Consulting Application Guide PDF

Electrical Sector
15th Edition
July 2014
Consulting Application Guide

15 th Edition
Consulting
Application
Guide
Eaton Corporation
Electrical Sector
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
2011 Eaton Corporation
All other trademarks are property
of their respective owners.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. CA08104001E
September 2011
2013 Consulting Application Guide

Contents
December 2013
Sheet 00001
Technical
Discussion
Power
Management
Products
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Selector Guide
Medium
Voltage
Equipment
Medium Voltage
Transformer
Selector Guide
Unit
Substations &
Transformers
Low
Voltage
Distribution
Equipment
CA08104001E
Introduction
22
Panelboards
ii
Alphabetical Index
23
Lighting Control Systems

Pow-R-Command
Power Distribution Systems
24
BuswayPow-R-Way III
Low Voltage
Power Management
Connectivity & Monitoring
25
Transfer Switches
Advanced & Electronic Metering
26
Power Circuit Breakers &

Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
27
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

& Enclosures
Low
Voltage
Distribution
Equipment
Circuit
Breakers
& Safety
Switches
Protective & Predictive Relays
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-W
Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers
28
Switching Devices
Low Voltage
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access

Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers
29
Motor Control Centers

Low Voltage
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB

Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers
30
Motor Starters &

ContactorsLow Voltage
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium

Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
31
Adjustable Frequency Drives

Low Voltage
FusesMedium Voltage
32
Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays

& Pilot Devices
10
Motor Starters (AMPGARD)

Medium Voltage
33
Uninterruptible Power Supplies
11
BuswayMedium Voltage
34
Surge Protection (SPD) &

Power Conditioning Products
12
Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage
35
Power Factor Capacitors

& Harmonic Filters
13
Primary Unit Substations

Secondary 1000V & Above
36
Resistance Grounding Systems
14
Secondary Unit Substations

Secondary Below 1000V
37
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
15
Unitized Power Centers
38
Coordinated Electrical Houses
16
Substation Transformers
39
Solar (PV)
Systems Interconnect
17
Pad-Mounted Transformers
40
Cat Generator Paralleling

Switchgear
18
Spot Network Equipment
41
Power System Studies

& Field Services
19
Distribution Dry-Type
TransformersLow Voltage
20
Metal-Enclosed Drawout
SwitchgearLow Voltage
21
SwitchboardsLow Voltage
Control
Products
Power
Quality
For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
2013 Consulting Application Guide

Copyright
December 2013
Sheet 00 002
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should
not be used for construction purposes . Drawings containing exact dimensions are
available upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to
change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
ANSI Voltage Classifications

Please note that in the text of the Consulting Application Guide, the term low voltage
generally refers to system voltages of 1000 volts and lower. The term medium voltage
generally refers to system voltages of 1000 volts and up to 38 kV.
Terms and Conditions

Individual product list prices are published in Eatons Price and Availability Digest (PAD).
All orders accepted by Eaton are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth
in Selling Policy SP03000001E.
Technical and Descriptive Publications

This publication contains technical data for the proper selection of many products
and systems. It may not cover all product details and/or application considerations.
Additional information is available in the form of technical information publications
and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your
local Eaton field salesperson or distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website
at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Products are sold by Eaton as commercial grade product not intended for application
in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use
of the product in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
Installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and/or other local codes or industry standards
that are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with
these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
CAT, Caterpillar, its respective logos and Caterpillar Yellow, as well as corporate and
product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without
permission.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide
for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton products
distributor or sales office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any
prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eatons Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.
Copyright 2013, Eaton.
CA08104001E
Introduction
i-1
September 2011
Sheet i 001
Welcome
Welcome to the 15th Edition of the Consulting Application
Guide. This document is designed to assist an electrical
consultant or a power system design engineer in the layout
and specification of equipment. In this expanded edition,
you will find complete details on our extensive line of
distribution, control and power quality products and
services. Please be sure to browse the various sections
to gain a sense of Eatons overall capabilities.
The 15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide
is available in printed hardcopy version, electronically at
www.eaton.com/consultants and on CD, as well as in iBook
format. We created this guide to make it easy for you to do
business with us, and continue to offer it to you in multiple
formats to meet your various needs.
Eaton Corporation is a Global Leader in

Power Distribution, Power Quality, Control
and Automation, and Monitoring Products
At Eaton, we believe that a reliable, efficient and safe power
system is the foundation of every successful enterprise.
Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and
our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses
around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining
powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of
excellence. From the products we manufacture to our
dedicated customer service and support, we know whats
important to you.
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems
management with a holistic and strategic approach,
leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions
and services. We focus on the following three areas in
all that we do:
Reliabilitymaintain the appropriate level of power
continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime
Efficiencyminimize energy usage, operating costs,
equipment footprint and environmental impact
Safetyidentify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect
what you value most
Our new guide shows the breadth of our combined power
distribution, control, quality and management product
offerings. Also included are tabs dedicated to our engineering services operation. You may select with confidence
from the products for residential, commercial and industrial
power distribution and control. While Eaton celebrates its
100th year, our heritage is rich with more than 200 years of
innovation and leadership from acquisitions and legendary
brands. This experience has resulted in many innovations
in distribution and industrial control productseach
incorporating leading-edge technology to provide the
highest value to our customers. Our engineers and scientists
are recognized throughout the industry and around the
world as experts in a wide range of disciplines including:
photoelectric optical technology, arc interruption, vacuum
technology, digital and analog electronics, communications
technology and the application of power semiconductors.
CA08104001E
New Features of the Consulting

Application Guide15th Edition
The 15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide
contains many new products, services and applicationspecific information. The Power Distribution Systems tab
has been updated, and the entire book has been organized
to make it easy to locate items. It is a reference guide that
should be on your bookshelf so that as questions arise, you
can quickly locate the data and pass it on to your customers
or clients. We have included two brand new sections in this
edition, one for solar (PV) systems and another dedicated
to electrical vehicle supply equipment. Detailing Eatons
offering in these areas, these new sections show how Eaton
is innovating new products to meet the new power and
infrastructure demands of the world.
Contents Page
Similar to the 14th Edition, we have grouped the contents
page to allow you to easily find products that share similar
electrical characteristics and/or applications. These
groupings include:
Power management products

Medium voltage equipment
Unit substations and transformers
Low voltage distribution equipment
Circuit breakers and safety switches
Control products
Power quality products
You may also notice that we have elected to make a few of the
sections dealing with more specialized products available as
electronic only. These sections are included in their entirety
on the CD, iBook and Web versions of the resource, but by
removing them from the printed version, we are able to
dedicate more pages to products that we believe are of a
broader interest to electrical system designers.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CD and Product Specifications

In addition to containing sections that were not printed in
the book, the CD version also contains a complete set of
product specifications in PDF and MS Word format, as well
as breaker trip curves. This CD can be ordered by filling out
a form on www.eaton.com/consultants.
To aid you in finding the proper Typical Specification Guide
files, a straightforward and intuitive navigation system has
been developed.
You have the option of navigating through the traditional
Table of Contents or Alphabetical Index contained in the
guide. We have built an interactive navigation system
with submenus and links that will guide you to the correct
product specifications, permitting you to build a complete
set of specifications with relative ease.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
i-2
Introduction
September 2011
Sheet i 002
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Updated Information
Eaton Corporation
We continue to print this publication because we have

received feedback that users love the quick access to this
valuable reference publication. However, the most up-to-date
information and specs are always available on our Web site
at www.eaton.com/consultants. Also on this page, users will
find product spotlights, hot topic coverage, technical papers,
listings of Launch and Learn presentations, newsletters and
training materials. Please visit this Consultant Resource Page
and bookmark it in your browser. Refer back to this page to
stay current on Eatons electrical business.
Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient

and safe power is available when its needed most. With
unparalleled knowledge of electrical power management
across industries, experts at Eaton deliver customized,
integrated solutions to solve our customers most critical
challenges.
Delivering the Promise of Power

Through the Power of Information
Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the

application. But, decision makers demand more than just
innovative products. They turn to Eaton for an unwavering
commitment to personal support that makes customer
success a top priority. For more information, visit
www.eaton.com/electrical.
Theres no doubt about it: Accurate product and application

information makes for better decisions, better systems and
satisfied customers. Thats why weve completely revised
and updated the 15th Edition of the Consulting Application
Guide. This volume is your point-of-entry, your touchstone
and your guide to the most innovative products and support
services in the business.
Comments?
E-mail: marketingsupportEG@eaton.com
Or write: Eaton Corporation
1000 Cherrington Parkway
Moon Township, PA 15108-4312
Attn: Catalog Department
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
ii-1
June 2015
Sheet ii 001
Arc Flash Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.3-1
AC Drive Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7

AC Drive Acceleration and Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
AC Drive Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
AC Drive Compatibility
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
AC Drive Input Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5
AC Drive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Accessories
M-Max Series AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1-3
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-17
C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-8
Arc Flash Safety Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.3-1 41.3-6
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-13, 20.1-10, 22.0-6
ii
Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad
Switchgear Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1, 5.2-1 5.2-5,
5.5-18 5.5-39
Arc-Resistant MVS Metal-Enclosed

Load Interrupter Switchgear5 and 15 kV . . . 8.0-36 8.0-43
Arc-Resistant Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5,
Active Harmonic Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3-1 35.3-7
5.5-18 5.5-39
Low Voltage Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20.1-6
27 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-29 5.5-32
38 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-33 5.5-37
5 and 15 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-18 5.5-28
Add-On Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42
ATC Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.4-1 25.4-16
Addressable Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-28
Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . 7.3-3, 8.0-1, 12.0-1
Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1 31.5-18

CFX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-1 31.3-24
CPX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2-1 31.2-18
H-Max Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-2
H-Max Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-1 31.5-18
IntelliDisconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-11
IntelliPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-11
HVX9000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-1 31.3-24
M-Max Series AC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1-1 31.1-5
MVX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1-1 31.1-5
SVX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4-1 31.4-20
Automatic Transfer Switches

Medium VoltageVacuum Breaker. . . . . . . . 12.0-2 12.0-13
Autotransformer Starters (LV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.4-2
Adjustment Factors for Calculating

Total AC Drive System Efficiency Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Advanced and Electronic Metering
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4-1 3.4-13
IQ Flange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.4-1
Single and Multi Unit
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
Sub-Network Master Local
Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-2
IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4-1 3.4-13
AEGIS Powerline Filters
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-20
AFD Output Harmonics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Air Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .18.0-7, 18.0-9, 21.0-2,
21.0-9 21.0-11,
26.1-6 26.1-26
Alternative Energy Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-35
AMPGARD Medium Voltage
Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.1-40
Auxiliary Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28.0-7
4
5
B
Batteries
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-5, 40.2-2, 40.2-3, 40.2-9,
40.3-2, 40.3-3, 40.3-11, 40.4-14
UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-1 33.2-11, 33.2-21
9
10
Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.3-6

Bearing and DV/DT Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-3
BIOTEMP Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-7, 13.0-8, 14.0-12,
16.0-2 16.0-5, 16.0-13
Boric Acid FusesMedium Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11
Braking, Regeneration Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-3
Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-26
Breaker Power Monitoring
and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27
11
12
13
14
Breaker-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.2-1 25.2-11

Bridge Joint Power Takeoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-44
15
Building Automation Systems (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23.0-1

Building Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
16
Building Information Model (BIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.1-1

Bushing Box Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.0-17
Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-51
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-1 24.0-52
Medium Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24
Busway Joint Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-51
17
18
AMPGARD SC9000 Adjustable

Frequency Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1, 10.2-1 10.2-16
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25.1-7
19
ANSI Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-6

BuswayMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2
20
AR Series Low Voltage Breaker Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-8
Cable Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.0-16, 24.0-44
Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI). . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-4, 27.2-13
Calculating Total AC Drive System

Efficiency Table, Adjustment Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-4
CA08104001E
21
ii-2 Alphabetical Index

June 2015
Sheet ii 002
i
ii
Capacitor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-1, 27.3-6,

35.0-3, 35.0-4
Capacitor Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-2, 35.0-9
Capacitor Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1, 5.4-4, 5.4-5,
35.0-3, 35.0-4
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-1 35.6-7

AUTOVAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2-1 35.2-11
Cast Coil Transformers

Primary Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16

Secondary Substation . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-18, 14.0-19,
14.0-37, 14.0-38
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Caterpillar Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5

Closed-Transition Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.3-1
Closed-Transition Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-4
Engine Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-3, 40.3-3
Generator Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5
Load Shed/Load Add . . . .40.0-4, 40.1-4, 40.2-1 40.2-3,
40.2-9, 40.2-11, 40.2-12, 40.3-1,
40.3-2, 40.3-11 40.3-13, 40.4-4,
40.4-5, 40.4-9, 40.4-15,
40.5-4, 40.5-5
Modbus Network . . . . . . . . 40.2-2, 40.2-3, 40.3-2, 40.3-3
Paralleling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-5, 40.1-5
Soft Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-1, 40.5-4, 40.5-5
Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . .40.0-2, 40.0-4, 40.0-5, 40.2-1,
40.2-2, 40.3-1, 40.3-2
Circuit Breaker Cable
Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-5
Circuit Breaker DataSwitchboards . . . . . . . . 21.0-14 21.0-16
12
Circuit Breaker Retrofit and

Replacement Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-1 41.5-4
Circuit Breaker Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-2, 27.4-8
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Circuit Breaker Wire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-8

Circuit Breakers
Air Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 18.0-7, 18.0-9, 21.0-2,
21.0-9 21.0-11,
26.1-6 26.1-26
Insulated Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12 26.1-14
Molded Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-1 27.4-54
Circuit Breakers Molded Case
Interrupting Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-6
Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8 27.4-9

Digitrip RMS Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-8, 27.4-9
Digitrip Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-8, 27.4-9
Earth Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-12
Engine Generator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-19
Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-4, 27.4-5,
27.4-11, 27.4-12
Mining Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-20
Molded Case Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-1
Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . .27.2-2, 27.3-2, 27.3-5
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . 27.2-1, 27.2-2, 27.3-5,
27.4-38 27.4-40
QUICKLAG Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1 27.4-54
Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-8 27.2-11
Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.3-9
Transformer Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . .27.3-6, 27.3-7
TRI-PAC (Fused) Circuit Breakers . . . . . . .27.4-46, 27.4-47
Welding Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26.1-26, 27.2-20
100% Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-5 27.2-7
400415 Hertz Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-16
Circuit BreakersMolded-Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12
Cable Selection/Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-5
Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12
Low Voltage Power Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 1.3-12
Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 1.5-8
Series Combination Tables . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-13 22.0-21
Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-11 22.0-21
Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3
Circuit BreakersNRX (Series)
Compact Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20.1-13
Circuit Breakers, Enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-48 27.4-54
Circuit Breakers, Molded Case
Add-On Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-42
Earth Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-42
8002500 Amperes (R-Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-32
Circuit Breakers, Power Magnum DS
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-1 26.1-26
Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1 27.4-54
Clean Power Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2-1 31.2-18
CM52 Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-1 18.0-39
Codes and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-6
Cogeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
Combination Starter Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-42
Circuit BreakersMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-39
Combiner Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39.0-1, 39.3-1, 39.3-2
Circuit BreakersMolded Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-3 27.4-54

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-7, 27.1-8,
27.4-33, 27.4-34
Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37
Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37
Cable Selection/Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-8
Capacitor Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-6
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . 27.2-3, 27.4-4,
27.4-45 27.4-47
DC Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-14
Commercial Metering Switchboards . . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11

Commissioning of Electrical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.1-1
Communication Modules
BACnet
CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.3-11
CANopen (Slave)
CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.3-11
DeviceNet
CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.3-11
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3
C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-8
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
ii-3
June 2015
Sheet ii 003
Ethernet/IP
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
Johnson Controls Metasys N2
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
LonWorks
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
Modbus
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
Modbus/TCP
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
PROFIBUS
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
Communication Network
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-1 2.1-28, 18.0-30
Communications
H-Max Series Drives (IntelliDisconnect)
Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-14
H-Max Series Drives (IntelliPass)
Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-14
H-Max Series Drives (Open)
Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6
Communications and Supplemental Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-4
Compatibility
AC Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Conductor Ampacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5-16 1.5-18
Magnum MDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-5, 26.1-6, 26.1-10

Magnum SBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1, 26.1-5,
26.1-6, 26.1-12
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-3, 27.4-4,
ii
27.4-45 27.4-47
Current Limiting Fuses
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.0-12, 9.0-1 9.0-11
Current Limit-R BreakersNon-Fused. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-3
Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-17 3.2-20
Current Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-6 3.2-7
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-8 3.4-13
D64 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32.2-2
C306 Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.2-1 4.2-4

C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.2-5 4.2-10
D
DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-14
DC Quick Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37.2-1, 37.2-2
Derating Factors
(Molded-Case Circuit Breakers)
Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.3-37
Interrupting Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.3-37
Device Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4
Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.3-1 4.3-5
Digital Panel Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 32.5-7
Constant Horsepower Load Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5, 27.4-8 27.4-9
Constant Torque Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Digitrip OPTIM Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-43
Constant Torque Load Figure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Digitrip Retrofit Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-5 41.5-8
Construction Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-50
Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1 4.1-5
Contactor-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.1-1 25.1-15

Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-7
Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
Control Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1

Cooling Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Coordinated Electrical Houses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5
Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-3 1.4-6
CPX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . .31.2-1 31.2-18,
31.5-1 31.5-18
4.1-8 4.1-10
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DIM Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-27

Distributed Energy Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
15
Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1 1.5-24

Distribution Transformers, Dry-Type . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37
16
Double Conversion UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.6-1

DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.5-1
17
DP-300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,

4.3-3 4.3-5
CSL-3 High-Efficiency Transformers . . . . . . . . . 19.1-4, 19.1-17,
DP-300 Current Differential

Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
19.1-28, 19.1-33
4.3-3, 4.3-5
Cubed Exponential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
DP-300 Differential Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
Current Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
4.3-3, 4.3-5
Current Limiting Breakers

FCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-45
LCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-45
CA08104001E
3
4
Constant Horsepower Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Control Centers, Motorsee Motor Control Centers
CVX050/100
Surge Protective Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-18 34.1-19
Conductor Resistance, Reactance,

Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5-14 1.5-16
Contactors, Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 30.2-11
18
19
20
21

June 2015
Sheet ii 004
Drawout Case Option

Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-8 4.1-10
ii
Drawout Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MEB) . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-6
Elevator Control Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.7-11

Elevator Control Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28.0-7
Emergency Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33 1.4-34
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
Drive Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Drive Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
4.2-22 4.2-28
EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
Drives, Variable Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1
2
3
4
Dry-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-36

Dry-Type Transformers
Distribution Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37
TC-100 Transformer
Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.4-4 4.4-6
Unit Substation Type. . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-14, 14.0-15
Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-6 4.1-7
5
6
Duplex Receptacle Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-19
4.2-29 4.2-36
Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-48 27.4-54
NEMA 1
Flush Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-51
Surface Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-51
NEMA 12, 12K
Dustproof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-52
NEMA 3R
Rainproof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-52
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Enclosed Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3 3.4-7
DV/DT Protection, Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Enclosed Starters . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-5, 30.6-1 30.6-3

Enclosed Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27
Enclosure Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42
End Cable Tap Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.0-16

Energy Conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-32
Eaton Distribution Relay

EDR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-27 4.1-30
Eaton SP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21 34.1-22
Engineering Services
and Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1, 1.4-23
EDR-3000 Eaton Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,

4.1-27 4.1-30
10
EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,

4.1-31 4.1-37
Energy Sentinel (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.0-6, 3.2-21 3.2-26
EnviroLine Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28.0-10

Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Ester-Based Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.0-5, 17.0-5
Ethernet Communications
Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26.2-8
11
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
12
EES (Essential Electrical System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-17
ETR-4000 Transformer
Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
4.3-6 4.3-11
EGP Generator Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.3-1 40.3-13
Expertise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.0-2
EGR-4000 Generator
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
Extended Warranty Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.1-3
4.1-38 4.1-44
13
14
15
16
17
4.3-12 4.3-21
EZ Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-4, 22.1-2,
ELC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-39
22.2-2, 22.3-6
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 37.0-1 37.2-2

DC Quick Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.2-1, 37.2-2
Pow-R-Station Level 2 AC
Electric Vehicle Charging Station. . . . . . 37.1-1 37.1-4
E3 Type Energy-Efficient Transformers

(CSL-3 Compliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-4, 19.1-17,
Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Electromechanical Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1

Electronic Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1-1 3.1-18, 27.4-8
18
19
20
21
Expulsion FusesMedium Voltage . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11, 14.0-41
Electronic Power Meters

IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35
IQ 250 and IQ 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32
Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31
19.1-28, 19.1-33
Facility-Wide Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34.1-1

Factors Affecting Service
Deviation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-3
Fault Current Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.3-3 1.3-10
Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-44
Filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3-1 35.3-7
Electronic Self-Enclosed Meters

IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
Final Field Fit Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-52
Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-3, 27.4-8
Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MSB) . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
Electronic Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-27 34.1-28

CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
ii-5
June 2015
Sheet ii 005
Fixed Vacuum Breaker Switchgear

(MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2-1 7.2-8
Ground Detector/
Neutralizer Bus Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-42
Flywheel Converter (Rotary Converter). . . . . . . . .1.4-26 1.4-27
Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . .1.4-6, 1.4-11 1.4-13, 32.0-1
Foreseer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4-20 2.4-24
Ground Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32.0-1
Foreseer Software and

Engineering Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4-20 2.4-24
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.0-1, 1.4-7 1.4-11
Formulas and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-19
Grounding Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.4-7 1.4-14,
FP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
36.0-1 36.2-6
4.1-11 4.1-15
Group Control (Multi-Pak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.7-1
Grounding Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13
FP-5000 Advanced Feeder

Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-16 4.1-20
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
Freedom Arc Resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.4-8

Freedom FlashGard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.5-13
Freedom Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-1 4.2-10
Freedom Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.0-1, 30.3-1 30.3-10
Frequency, Output Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Fused Current Limiting Breakers
TRI-PAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-4
Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45, 24.1-19
Fused Switches, Low Voltage
Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39
Distribution Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-13, 21.2-12,
21.3-2, 22.4-1, 22.4-4,
22.4-8 22.4-10
Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27
Fused Switches, Medium Voltage (MVS) . . . . . . . .8.0-1 8.0-14
Fuses
AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-2
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.0-1 9.0-11
MVS Load Interrupter Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-12, 9.0-2
Power and Distribution Class . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.0-1 9.0-11
Transformer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-2, 9.0-7,
9.0-8, 14.0-42
Fusible Panelboard PRL1aF,
PRL-2aF, PRL-4F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-1, 22.6-1, 22.6-7
G
Generator Controlssee Caterpillar Switchgear
Generator Parallelingsee Caterpillar Switchgear
Generator Quick Connect Switchboards . . . . . . . 21.7-1 21.7-2
Generator System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-2
Grid-Tied Solar Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1 39.1-11
Power Xpert Solar 250 kW
Grid-Tied Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1 39.1-6
3.87 kW Grid-Tied
Solar Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1, 39.1-7 39.1-11
ii
1
2
Harmonic Considerations
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35.0-7
Harmonic Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-18, 1.4-21 1.4-24,
4.1-21 4.1-26
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.3-13
29.1-21, 29.2-14
Harmonic Correction Units
(Active Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3-1 35.3-7
Harmonic Mitigating
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-1, 19.1-12 19.1-15
5
6
Harmonic Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-21
Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-18, 1.4-21 1.4-24, 29.2-14

K-Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-2
Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 27.4-8
Waveform Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1, 27.4-8
Harmonics, AFD Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-2

Harmonics, Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-5
Health Care Facility Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-14 1.1-19
Heat Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
9
10
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
11
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker

Molded Case Circuit Breakers,
Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-35
12
High Resistance Grounding Systems. . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13, 36.0-1

High Resistance Pulsing Grounding
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13, 36.0-1
13
High Temperature Hydrocarbon

Fluid (HTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.0-4, 17.0-4
14
High Voltage Equipmentsee Medium

Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide Page 5.0-A
Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.0-1
Load Interrupter Switchgear (WLI) . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
Metal-Clad Switchgear (VCP-W) . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-39
Metal-Enclosed Front-Access
Vacuum Breaker Switchgear (MEF) . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40
Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear (MEB) . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-5
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear (MSB) . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
15
HLE Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.0-1, 9.0-2,
16
17
18
19
9.0-7, 9.0-8
Human Machine Interface (HMI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40.0-4
20
21
CA08104001E

June 2015
Sheet ii 006
i
ii
1
IBC (International Building Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20

IEEE 519-1992. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-23
IEEE Designations for Suffix Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-5
IEEE Device/Relay Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4
IFS (Integrated Facility
Switchboards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays

CT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.3-17
C441 Overload Relays
Type 3R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.3-12
Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.5-6
Option Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.5-6
L
Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 30.2-11
Impedance Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11 1.5-15

Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-14
Distribution Transformers, Dry-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11
Power Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11
Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG

Solenoid-Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13, 27.4-15
Lighting Control System

Pow-R-Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 23.6-2
In-Phase Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-16
Lightning and Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-21
5
6
7
8
Input Harmonics, AC Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5
Linear Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-4, 6.0-26
Installation Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4

Cooling Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Liquid Filled Substation Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.0-2

18.0-16 18.0-17
Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.11-1
Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers . . . . . . .14.0-12, 14.0-13
Insulated Case Breaker Type SB . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12, 26.1-13
Load Interrupter Switchgear,

Medium Voltage (MVS/WLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
InsulGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 5.3-3, 6.0-15,

7.3-4 7.3-5, 8.0-9 8.0-10
InsulGard Predictive Maintenance . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.5-1 4.5-10
InsulGard Predictive Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-11
10
Integral Motorized Remote Racking

Option (VCP-W MR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-5 5.3-7
Integrated Facility Switchboards (IFS). . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9
Integrated Panelboard SPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-4
Integrated Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5
12
Integrated Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-3

IPAIntegrated Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5
13
14
15
16
IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 3.4-13

IQ Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9
IQ Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-8
IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21 3.2-26
IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-42
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16 3.2-20
IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21 3.2-26
IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 3.1-37
17
IQ 250 and IQ 260 Electronic Power Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32

IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 3.1-34
18
IR Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Isolation Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
19
20
21
Liquid Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 18.0-5,
Installation Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51
11
Lighting Control Circuit Breakers

(Panelboards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23.0-1
K
Kits
CFX9000 Series Drives
CFX9000 Series Option Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-10

Medium Voltage (MVS/WLI/ND). . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-35
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40.1-1
Load Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34 1.4-35,
40.0-4, 40.2-11
Locations
Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.0-3
U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.0-3
Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
Low Resistance Grounding Schemes . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13
Low Voltage Adjustable
Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1 31.5-18
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout
Vacuum Starter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-10 41.5-11
Low Voltage Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-1 24.0-52
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12
Low Voltage Distribution Panelboards
Pow-R-Line Multipoint Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-13 22.4-14
Low Voltage Distribution
Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-36
Low Voltage Distribution Switchboards . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2
Commercial Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11
Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3
Low Voltage Fused Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27
Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-39
Distribution Panelboards (FDP). . . . . . . . . . 22.0-1 22.0-4
Distribution Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2
Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27
Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21,
20.0-1 20.1-48, 26.0-1,
26.1-1 26.1-26
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
ii-7
June 2015
Sheet ii 007
(Magnum DS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21,

20.1-1 20.1-51
Low Voltage Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.2-13
Medium Voltage Switches (MVS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14

Medium Voltage Switchgear
Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.0-A
Medium Voltage Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-1 12.0-13

Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switches . . . . . 12.0-2 12.0-13
ii
Medium Voltage Transformer

Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 13.0-B
Metal-Clad Switchgear Medium Voltage

Arc-Resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5,
5.5-18 5.5-39
Metal-Clad Switchgear (VacClad-W)

Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-39
Magnetic Motor Starters, Full Voltage . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-10
Metal-Enclosed Breaker Switchgear

Medium Voltage (MSB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
Magnetic Motor Starters,

Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.5-17
Electromagnetic Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4
Solid-State Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17
Metal-Enclosed Drawout Switchgear

Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.0-1 20.1-51
Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-50
Metal-Enclosed Load
Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-25
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . .1.3-11 1.3-12

Low Voltage Starters and Contactors . . . . . . . . . 30.0-1 30.7-2
Low Voltage Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2
Low Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13, 18.0-9, 20.1-1
Low Voltage SystemGrounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13,
36.2-1 36.2-6
Magnum DS Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-1 26.1-26

Magnum DS Metal-Enclosed
Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-48
Magnum MDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-10
Magnum MDSX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-9
Magnum Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-27 26.1-30
Magnum SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12
Magnum SB Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-13
Magnum-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.3-1 25.3-14
Manual Motor Starters,
Individual Enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1, 30.1-2
Matching the AFD to the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-1, 4.3-2
MEB Metal-Enclosed Breaker Switchgear
(Drawout Mounted Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1-1 7.1-5
Medium Voltage Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24
Medium Voltage Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-1 35.5-7
Medium Voltage Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 9.0-1 9.0-11
Medium Voltage Load
Interrupter Switchgear
MVS-ND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.0-26 8.0-35
Medium Voltage Load Interrupter
Switchgear (MVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.0-1 8.0-14
Medium Voltage ME Front-Access
Vacuum Breaker Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.0-1 6.0-40
Medium Voltage Metal-Clad
Switchgear (VacClad-W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.0-1 5.5-39
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Bus . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MEB/MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.0-1 7.3-5
MEF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.0-1 6.0-40
MVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.0-1 8.0-35
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed
(MEF Front-Access Vacuum
Breaker Switchgear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.0-1 6.0-40
Metering Devices
and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
IQ Additional Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.0-1, 3.0-3,
3.0-6, 3.2-21
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-6, 3.2-16
IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35
IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-3, 3.1-32
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for
IQ 100/200 Series and PXM 2000 Meters . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31
Power Xpert 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.0-1, 3.1-20 3.1-30
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000. . . . . . . .3.0-1, 3.1-1 3.1-18
Sub-Network Master Local
Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
Metering Devices, Protective Relays
and Communications
Protective Relays
DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-3 4.3-5
VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1 4.4-3
Metering SwitchboardsCommercial. . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11
Metering, Protection and Control Devices
Addressable Relay II (ARII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-28
Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-26
and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27
Digitrip 3000 Feeder
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.1-1 4.1-5
Digitrip 3000Drawout
Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.1-8 4.1-10
Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.1-6 4.1-7
Medium Voltage Starters (AMPGARD) . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.1-40

CA08104001E
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

June 2015
Sheet ii 008
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
EDR-3000 Eaton
Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-27 4.1-30
EDR-4000 Distribution
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-31 4.1-37
EDR-5000 Distribution
EGR-4000 Generator
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-12 4.3-21
ETR-4000 Generator
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-6 4.3-11
4.3-6 4.3-11
Feeder Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-1 4.1-44
FP-4000 Feeder
InsulGard Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.5-1 4.5-10
IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9, 3.4-1
IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ Energy Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-21 3.2-26
IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-16 3.2-20
IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-21 3.2-26
IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 3.1-37
IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11 3.2-15
IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ 250/260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 3.1-34
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1 3.2-10
I/O Devices Digital Input
Module (DIM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-27
MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-1, 4.3-2
Modbus Master INCOM Network
Translator (mMINT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-1 4.2-38
MP-3000 Motor
MP-4000 Motor Protection
with Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-17 4.2-21
Power Xpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1 3.1-7
Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1, 2.1-8
Power Xpert 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.1-20 3.1-30
Product Operated Network
Interface (PONI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-25
PROFIBUS Master INCOM
Network Translator (PMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-4
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-37, 4.2-38
VR-300 Multifunctional
Voltage Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.4-1 4.4-3
MOC Mechanism Operated Cell Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-24

Modbus MINT (mMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
Molded Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-1
Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25.2-1
Monitoring Systems (Power Xpert) . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.4-1 2.4-12
Motor Application and
Performance (Drives). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-2
Motor Circuit Protection Selection Guide . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 1.5-8
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-1, 27.4-38
Medium Voltage (AMPGARD) . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.2-16
Motor Control, Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-7 10.1-9,
30.4-1 30.5-17
Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-1 4.3-2
Motor Load Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-6
Constant Horsepower Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-6
Constant Torque Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-6
Variable Torque Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-6
Motor Load Types and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-5
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 1.5-8, 27.2-2,
27.4-38 27.4-40
Overload Relays
C440/XT Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-4
C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-5 4.2-10
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-10
Motor Protection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 1.5-8
Motor Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-1 4.2-38
Motor Starters (AMPGARD)
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.2-16
Motor Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-20 1.3-21
Motor/Generator/Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-11 4.2-16
MSB Metal-Enclosed Breaker Switchgear
(Fixed Mounted Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
Multi-Pak Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.7-1, 30.7-2
Multiple Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-13 22.4-14
Multiple Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-2
Multipoint Energy Submeter II (IQ) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16 3.2-20
Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3
MVS Medium Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-25
MVS Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter
Switchgear5 and 15 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-36
Meters, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
20
Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26.1-15 26.1-22,
NEMA Enclosure Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13
27.4-8 27.4-9
NEMA Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-6
21
Microprocessor-Based
Metering Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-8
NEMA TP-1 Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19.1-16
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
ii-9
June 2015
Sheet ii 009
Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-1 2.1-28

Network Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-32
Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11 1.1-12,
18.0-1 18.0-39
CM52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-20 18.0-23
MPCV Network Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-25 18.0-28
Spot Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11 1.1-12,
18.0-2 18.0-15
Network Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11 1.1-12,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-1 17.0-13

Panel Meters
Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 32.5-7
Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-1 22.7-13
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line Multipoint Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-13 22.4-14
Partial Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-1 4.5-10, 6.0-15,
Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . .18.0-6, 18.0-10 18.0-12,
7.3-4, 7.3-5,
18.0-16 18.0-19
8.0-9 8.0-10, 11.0-2
Network Transition Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-33
Partial Discharge Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 5.3-3
Nonlinear Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-21 1.4-23, 22.0-7,
Passive Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35.0-8

PDUsee Power Distribution Units
Nonlinear LoadsTransformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-11
Peak Shaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36
Non-Segregated Phase Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2, 11.0-7
Performance, Motor Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-2
NRX Breaker Communications

Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-5
Photovoltaic String Disconnect

Switch Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2-4 39.2-6
NRX (Series) Compact Power

Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-13
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1 32.1-3

Plug-in Cable Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-44
Plug-in Device Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-46
O
Oil Type Liquid Filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-2, 16.0-9
OPTIM Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5, 27.4-8 27.4-9
OPTIMizer Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5, 27.4-10
Options
CFX9000 Series Drives
Enclosed Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-13
Option Board Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-10
Option Board Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6
Other Third-Party Integration Products . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.5-1 2.5-4
Plug-in Device Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-39

Plug-in Device Physical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-48
PONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-25, 2.5-1
Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5
Power Breakers, Trip Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-10
Power Center, Unitized Dry-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-1 15.0-3
Power Circuit Breakers (Magnum) . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-33,
Output Harmonics, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Power Conditioning Products . . . . . . . 34.0-1, 34.1-23 34.1-28
Output Voltage and Frequency, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Power Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1 1.5-24
Overcurrent Protection and Coordination. . . . . . . . .1.4-3 1.4-5
Power Equipment Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
Overcurrent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1 4.2-21

DT-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1-1 4.1-10
EDR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1-31 4.1-37
EDR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1-38 4.1-44
FP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1-11 4.1-15
FP-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1-16 4.1-20
FP-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1-21 4.1-26
MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1, 4.3-2
MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2-11 4.2-16
MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2-17 4.2-21
Power Factor Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-2
CA08104001E
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
26.1-1 26.1-26
Output Current, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-2
Power Circuit Breakers (DSII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8 27.4-9
Power Conditioning
Sag Ride Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-23 34.1-26
Overload Relays
C440/XT Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2-1 4.2-4
C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2-5 4.2-10
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2-1 4.2-10
1
2
Paralleling Equipment
see Caterpillar Switchgear
18.0-2 18.0-15
29.1-21, 29.2-14
ii
Power Factor CorrectionCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35.0-9
13
14
15
16
Power Factor, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-5

Power Fusessee FusesMedium Voltage
Power Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-18 1.4-24
Power Sentinel (IQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.0-1, 3.2-21 3.2-26
Power System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1 1.1-19
Power System Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.4-1
GearGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-2 41.4-8
Instant Response Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.4-1
17
18
19
Power System Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.4-9

Partial Discharge Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.4-9
20
Power Takeoff Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-44
21

June 2015
Sheet ii 010
i
ii
Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31

Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1, 2.1-8
Power Xpert Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-2, 3.1-1 3.1-7
Power Xpert 2000 Series . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-3, 3.1-20 3.1-30
Power Xpert 2000 Series Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-22
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.1-1 3.1-18

PowerLynx Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.1-5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PowerNet Communication Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1 2.5-4

Addressable Relay II (ARII). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-28
Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-26
C306 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-27
Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . 4.1-1 4.1-5
Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option . . . . . . 4.1-8 4.1-10
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-21 4.1-26
Integral Protective Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-12
IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 3.4-13
IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9
IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.4-1
IQ Energy Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-21 3.2-26
IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-16 3.2-20
IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21 3.2-26
IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
MP-3000 Motor
4.2-11 4.2-16
MP-4000 Motor
4.2-17 4.2-21
Product Operated Network
Interface (PONI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-25
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10
Universal RTD Module . . . . 4.2-22, 4.2-30, 4.2-37, 4.2-38
Pow-R-Command 750
Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.4-1 23.4-2
Pow-R-Flex Low Ampere Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.1-1
Pow-R-Line C Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-9 21.0-10
Pow-R-Line Column Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5-1 22.5-5
Pow-R-Line Multipoint Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-13 22.4-14
Pow-R-Line Multipoint Meter (MPM) . . . . . . . . 22.4-13 22.4-14
Pow-R-Line i Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-11 21.0-13
Pow-R-Line 1a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1-1 22.1-4
Pow-R-Line 1aF Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.6-1, 22.6-2
Pow-R-Line 1R Retrofit Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-1 22.6-2
Pow-R-Line 2a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.2-1, 22.2-2
Pow-R-Line 2aF Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-7 22.6-8
Pow-R-Line 2R Retrofit Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-3 22.6-4
Pow-R-Line 3a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-1 22.3-4
Pow-R-Line 3FQS Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-9 22.6-10
Pow-R-Line 3E Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-5 22.3-6
Pow-R-Line 4 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-1 22.4-12
Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.0-2
Predictive Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.0-2
Predictive Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10
Primary Selective System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6 1.1-10
Secondary 1000V & Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16
PROFIBUS Master INCOM
Network Translator (PMINT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-4
Protective and Predictive Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10
Protective Relay Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-5, 4.1-14, 4.1-19,
4.1-24, 4.2-14, 4.3-2,
5.4-27 5.4-28, 5.5-9, 5.5-10
18
Pow-R-Command 1000
Panelboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.3-1 23.3-2
19
Pow-R-Command 2000
Panelboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.2-1 23.2-2
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4, 4.0-1 4.5-10

DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-3 4.3-5
DT-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-10
EDR-3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-27 4.1-30
EDR-4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-31 4.1-37
EDR-5000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-38 4.1-44
EGR-4000. . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-12 4.3-21
EMR-3000 . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-22 4.2-28
EMR-4000 . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-29 4.2-36
ETR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-6 4.3-11
FP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-11 4.1-15
FP-5000 . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-16 4.1-20, 7.1-2, 7.2-3
FP-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-21 4.1-26
MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-1, 4.3-2
MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-11 4.2-16
MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-17 4.2-21
VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.4-1 4.4-3
Pow-R-Command 25
Panelboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.6-1 23.6-2
Protective Relays
IEEE Device Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4
Pow-R-Command 5000
Panelboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.1-1
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32.0-1
CompactSquare PushbuttonsE30 . . . . . . . . . . . .32.1-2
C22 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32.1-1
13
14
PowerPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16, 4.1-12, 4.1-14, 4.1-19,

4.1-24, 4.1-27, 4.1-36, 4.1-43,
15
4.2-13, 4.2-20, 4.2-22, 4.2-24,
16
Pow-R-Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 23.6-2
4.2-26, 4.2-33, 4.2-35
17
20
21
Pow-R-Command Lighting
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 23.6-2
Pow-R-Command 100
Panelboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.5-1 23.5-2
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
ii-11
June 2015
Sheet ii 011
E30 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2

E34 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2
HT800 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2
M22 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1
Square PushbuttonsE30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2
10250T Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1
PV System Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34
Q
Quad Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45, 24.1-20, 24.1-21
Quick Connection Assembly
Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1 21.7-2
QUICKLAG
Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-1 27.4-3,
27.4-11, 27.4-12
Solenoid-Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13 27.4-16
Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes

(RUGTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.8-1
Rotary UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27
ii
S
Safety Switches
Factory Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-30 28.0-31
Flex Centersee Factory Modifications
Safety Switches (600V and Below). . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-31
Sag Ride Through

Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-23 34.1-26
Secondary Selective System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-9

Secondary Less than 1000V
see Unit Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1 14.0-47
Secondary Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-31 1.4-32
4
5
Seismic Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20 1.5-25
R
Radial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6 1.1-9, 1.1-12, 1.3-7
Receptacle Plug-in Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45
Reduced Voltage
Solid State Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-8
Reduced Voltage Motor Starters
DS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26
Reduced Voltage, Medium Voltage Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-7
Reduced Voltage, Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-9
Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.5-1
Regeneration Limit and Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Relays
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1
Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-1 4.3-5
Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-44
Ground Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1, 32.2-1
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-1 4.2-38
Overload
C440/XT Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2-1 4.2-4
C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2-5 4.2-10
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2-1 4.2-10
Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-37
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32.0-2, 32.3-1, 32.3-2,
32.3-3, 32.3-4, 32.4-5, 32.5-7
Voltage Monitoring
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3-1, 32.3-2,
32.3-3, 32.3-4
Remote Operated Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2
RESIBLOC Cast Resin Transformers . . . . . . . . . 14.0-16, 14.0-17
Resistance Grounding Equipment . . . . .36.0-1, 36.1-1 36.1-5,
Selection Considerations for Drives

Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Drive Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Duty Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Speed Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Speed Regulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-7
Selection Guides
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26.0-2, 27.0-2
Medium Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.0-A
Transformer Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 13.0-B
Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters
IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
ResonanceCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-7
Retrofit Panelboards PRL-1R, PRL-2R . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-1, 22.6-4
Roll-up Generator Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1, 21.8-2
CA08104001E
7
8
9
10
11
12
Series G
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
High Instantaneous
Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-35
13
Series NRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-1 26.2-8
14
Series Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-11 22.0-21,

27.2-8 27.2-11
Component Ratings
(Breaker-Breaker
and Fuse-Breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-8 27.2-11
Panelboard Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . 22.0-11 22.0-21
15
Series Surge Protector (AEGIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34.0-1
17
Service Contract Offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-3 41.1-5

Service Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-3
Service Deviation Table, Factors Affecting . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-3
Short-Circuit Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1 1.3-5,
1.3-13 1.3-19
36.2-1 36.2-6
Resistance, Neutral Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.0-1
16
18
19
Short-Circuit Currents, Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-9 1.5-10

Silicone Type Liquid Filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.0-2, 16.0-9
20
Single and Multi Unit Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3 3.4-7

Single Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45, 24.1-19
21

June 2015
Sheet ii 012
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Soft Start Controllers

DS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26
SPD (Surge Protective Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.2-13
Starters
AMPGARD Medium Voltage
Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.2-26
Autotransformer Starters (LV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.4-2
Enclosure Types and Box Sizes . . . . . . . . . 30.6-1 30.6-3
Freedom Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7
Magnetic Motor Starters
Full Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-10
Reduced Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4
Manual Motor Starters,
Individual Enclosed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.1-1, 30.1-2
Multi-Pak Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.7-1, 30.7-2
NEMA Motor Starters
Electromechanical Full Voltage
Enclosure Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-8 30.3-10
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7
NEMA Motor Starters
Microprocessor-based
Electromechanical Full Voltage . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-10
Reduced Voltage
DS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30.5-26
Reduced VoltageMagnetic,
Electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-5
Reduced Voltage
Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17
SPDsSurge Protection Products . . . . . . . . . . . 34.0-1 34.1-22
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.1-1
Speed Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3, 31.0-7
Static Bypass Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30
Speed Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3, 31.0-7
Static Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27
Spot Network Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-1 18.0-39

Dry-Type Network
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-5, 18.0-9, 18.0-18,
18.0-34, 18.0-38, 18.0-39
Liquid-Type Network
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-9, 18.0-16, 18.0-37
Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-1 18.0-39
Network Relaying
Type MPCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-21, 18.0-25 18.0-28
Low Voltage
NEMA Rated Freedom. . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7
Magnetic, Electromechanical
Full VoltageNEMA . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7
Magnetic, Electromechanical
Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4
Manual, Individual Enclosed. . . . . . . . 30.1-1, 30.1-2
NEMA, Magnetic
Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4
Reduced Voltage,
Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17
Solid-State Reduced Voltage . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17
Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-25, 18.0-27
Static Power Factor Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35.4-1
Soft Start Reduced Voltage

Soft Starters
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-13
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-15
Solar Combiner Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.3-1, 39.3-2
Solar DC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1, 39.2-1 39.2-7
Solar (PV) Systems Interconnect
Combiner Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.3-1, 39.3-2
Solar DC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2-1 39.2-7
Solenoid Operated, Remote
Controlled Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2
Solenoid-Operated, QUICKLAG
Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13, 27.4-15
Sound Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36 1.4-37, 13.0-13,
14.0-46, 16.0-8
Sparing Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-10 1.1-11

SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-8
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SPD Series Sidemount Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-6 34.1-13
Spot Network Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11 1.1-12,

18.0-2 18.0-15
SPV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-16 34.1-17
SP1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21 34.1-22
Standard and Optional Features . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.5-1 25.5-19
Standards
BuswayMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2
Standby UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-29 1.4-30
21
Static Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30

Static Switching Power Factorsee Capacitors
Static UPSUninterruptible Power Supplies . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30
Static Bypass Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30
Static Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27
Studies
Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.2-1
Motor Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.2-1
Power Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.2-1
Power Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.2-1
Substation Study and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.2-1
Sub-Feed Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.1-2, 22.2-2
Substation TransformersPrimary . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16,
16.0-1 16.0-8
Surge Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34.1-7
Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-1 34.1-22
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-19 1.4-21, 22.0-7
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-17,
5.4-17 5.4-20, 7.3-2, 8.0-14
Surge Protection (SPD) &
Power Conditioning Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.0-1 34.1-28
Surge Protective Device
(SPD) Voltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29.2-13
Surge Protective Device (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-4, 24.1-18
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29.1-48
AEGIS Powerline Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34.1-20
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
ii-13
June 2015
Sheet ii 013
AEGIS Series Type for

Critical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-20
CVX Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-18 34.1-19
SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-7, 34.1-1 34.1-15
SPV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-16 34.1-17
SP1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21 34.1-22
Surge Protective Devices in Assemblies . . . . . . . .1.4-20 1.4-21
Surge Protective Devices (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-14 1.4-17
Surge Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-14 1.4-17, 29.2-13
SVX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4-1 31.4-20
Switchboards
Commerical Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.10-1 21.10-11
General and Summary Info
(Including Circuit Breaker
and Fusible Switch Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.0-5
Generator Quick Connect
Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1 21.7-2
IFS (Integrated Facility Systems) . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9
Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.11-1
Magnum SB, Drawout
Insulated Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1 21.5-11
Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3
Outdoor Enclosures for
Pow-R-Line C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-1, 21.4-2
Pow-R-Line C Front-Access,
Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.0-10
Roll-up Generator Termination
Boxes (RUGTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1
SwitchboardsLow Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-22
Switchgear
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13, 18.0-9, 20.1-1
Arc-Resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5,
5.5-19 5.5-39
Communications and
Supplemental Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-4
Drawout Vacuum Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1 5.1-13,
5.4-1 5.5-17
Partial Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3-1 5.3-3
(VCP-W Drawout
Vacuum Breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10, 5.0-1,
5.0-4 5.1-13, 5.4-1 5.4-31,
5.5-1 5.5-17, 13.0-4, 13.0-10,
14.0-23 14.0-24, 14.0-26 14.0-27
(MEB Drawout
Vacuum Breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10, 7.0-1,
7.1-2 7.1-5,
13.0-4, 13.0-10
(MEF Front-Access Vacuum
Breaker Switchgear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.0-1 6.0-40
(MSB Fixed Mounted
CA08104001E
Vacuum Breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10, 7.0-1,

7.2-1 7.2-8, 13.0-4,
13.0-10, 14.0-23 14.0-24,
14.0-26 14.0-27
(MVS Fusible
Interrupter Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 8.0-1 8.0-14,
13.0-4, 13.0-10,
14.0-23 14.0-27
Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage
(DSII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21, 20.0-1
Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage
(Magnum DS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21,
14.0-25 14.0-27, 14.0-39,
20.0-1, 20.1-1 20.1-48
Synchronous Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1-10
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Synchronous Motor Starters,

Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1-1, 10.1-10
System Analysis, Power Distribution. . . . . .1.0-1, 1.3-1 1.3-24
System Application Considerations . . . . . . .1.0-1, 1.4-1 1.4-37

System Design Considerations. . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.1-1 1.1-19,
1.3-1 1.3-24, 1.4-1 1.4-37,

35.0-3 35.0-14
System Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-25
T
TC-100 Transformer Temperature
Controller for Dry-Type Transformers . . . .4.0-1, 4.4-4 4.4-6
Temperature Protection
RTD Monitoring of Motors and
Associated Equipment. . . . . . . . . 4.2-22, 4.2-29, 4.2-37
Transformer Fan Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.0-44
Tenant SubmeteringMultipoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-1 41.1-2
Through-Feed Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.0-6
Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.3-9
Timers
Elapsed Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1, 32.5-2, 32.5-3
Timer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1, 32.5-4, 32.5-5,
32.5-6, 32.5-7
TOC Truck Operated Cell Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-24
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Torque Indicating Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-51

Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-5, 31.0-7
Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-2 41.1-3
Transfer Switch Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1 25.0-8
Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1 25.5-19
ATC Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-1 25.4-16
Automatic Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25.0-2
Breaker-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-1 25.2-11
Bypass Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25.1-7
Contactor-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-1 25.1-15
Magnum-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-1 25.3-14
Service Entrance Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25.0-4
17
18
19
20
21

June 2015
Sheet ii 014
i
ii
Standard and Optional Features . . . . . . . 25.5-1 25.5-19

Transfer Switch Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-2 25.0-7
Transfer Switches, Medium
Voltage, Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-1 12.0-13
TVSSsee SPDsSurge Protection Products

Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and
Column Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.7-12, 22.7-13
Transformer Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-13 1.3-15, 1.3-19,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1.5-11, 18.0-6
UBC (Uniform Building Code). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20
Transformer Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . 41.4-10 41.4-12
Uninterruptible Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.0-1 33.6-1

Eaton Software and Connectivity . . . . . . . 33.4-1 33.4-11
ConnectUPS Web/
SNMP Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-7 33.4-8
Eaton Extensions for
IBM Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-4
Eaton LanSafe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-2 33.4-3
Eaton Modbus Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-10
Eaton Modbus Profiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-5
Eaton Multiview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-4
Eaton Netwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-5
Expansion Chasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-11
Forseer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-1
Intelligent Power Software Suite . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-5
Multi-Server Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-9
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card. . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-6
Power Xpert Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.4-1
Relay Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-8 33.4-9
Serial Protocol Products . . . . . . . . . 33.4-9 33.4-11
General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1 33.1-3
Data Center and Facility UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-2
Eaton BladeUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-2
Eaton Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-2
Eaton EX RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-1
Eaton Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-3
Eaton 5110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-1
Eaton 9130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-1
Eaton 9390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-2
ePDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-2
Network and Server UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-1
PC/Workstation and Home A/V UPS . . . . . . . . .33.1-1
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-2
Software and Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-3
Surge Suppressors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.1-2
Glossary of Power Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.6-1
Large Three-Phase Units
Eaton 9395 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-1 33.3-27
Automatic Hot-Tie System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.3-4
Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.3-5
ENERSYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.3-6
Static Auto-Tie System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.3-4
Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.5-1 33.5-39
Power Xpert Gateway
PDP Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.5-3
Remote Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.5-40 33.5-48
Three-Phase Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-1 33.2-49
Eaton 9355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-1 33.2-10
Eaton 9390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-11 33.2-49
Eaton 9390 IAC-SB or IAT-ST . . . . 33.2-44 33.2-47
Eaton 9390 Integrated Accessory
Cabinet (IAC-B and IAT-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.2-44
Eaton 9390 Integrated Accessory
Cabinet-Distribution (IAC-D) . . . 33.2-39 33.2-43
Eaton 9390 Integrated
Accessory Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.2-38
Transformer Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-2, 9.0-2,

9.0-7 9.0-11, 14.0-41 14.0-43,
17.0-6, 27.3-6, 27.3-7
Transformer Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1
TC-100 for Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . 4.4-4 4.4-6
Transformers
Dry-Type Primary Unit Substation . . . . . . 13.0-9 13.0-12
Dry-Type Secondary
Unit Substation . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-14, 14.0-15, 14.0-26,
14.0-27, 14.0-35,
14.0-37, 14.0-38
Dry-Type, Distribution
Type (DT-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37
Efficiency Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-32
IFS Mounted Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9
Liquid-Type Primary Unit Substation . . . . 13.0-2 13.0-8
Liquid-Type Secondary
Unit Substation . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-12, 14.0-13, 14.0-23,
14.0-24, 14.0-31,
14.0-43, 14.0-46
Loss Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
Motor Drive Isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-18
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-6, 18.0-8 18.0-12
Pad Mounted (Liquid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-1 17.0-13
Short-Circuit Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-9 1.5-10
Sparing Transformer System . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-10 1.1-11
Three-Phase
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-22
Transformer Losses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12
Winding Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
14
Transient-Free Statically Switched

Capacitor Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4-1
15
Trip Units
Digitrip 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14,
26.1-20, 26.2-4
16
17
18
19
20
Trip Units Medium Voltage

Digitrip 520V, 520MCV, 1150V . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-11 6.0-12
Trip Units (Low Voltage) Microprocessor . . . . . . . 27.1-2, 27.4-8
Trip Units, Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-15 26.1-21
Digitrip 1150+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-19
Digitrip 520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14, 26.1-18,
26.1-20, 26.2-4
Digitrip 520M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14, 26.1-18,
26.1-20, 26.2-4
Digitrip 520MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 26.1-18, 26.1-20
TRI-PAC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-4, 27.4-4,
21
27.4-46, 27.4-47
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
ii-15
June 2015
Sheet ii 015
Eaton 9390 UPS Integrated

Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-21 33.2-28
Eaton 9390 UPS Integrated
Distribution Cabinet . . . . . . . . . 33.2-29 33.2-37
UNIPAK600V Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1-4
VR Series MV Vacuum Replacement

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-12 41.5-17
VR-300 Multifunctional Voltage Relay . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
UNIPUMPsee Capacitors
Unitized Power Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-1 15.0-3
Watt Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13

Waveform Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.1-1 3.1-30,
3.3-1, 3.3-2, 27.4-8
Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.0-4, 3.0-5, 3.0-6,
3.1-1 3.1-30, 3.3-1, 3.3-2
UNIVAR 15 kV Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-6

UNIVAR 5 kV Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-1
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-11, 4.2-37, 4.2-38
Web-Enabled Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.0-2, 3.1-1 3.1-30

Wire Ampacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-16 1.5-18
UPSUninterruptible
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-25 1.4-30
Wiring
Zone Selective Interlocking . . . . . . . . 4.1-4, 4.1-11, 4.1-16
URTD (Universal RTD Module) . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-11, 4.2-37, 4.2-38
WLIsee MVS
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.0-1 5.5-39
XLM Generator Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-1 40.2-12
Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switch (VCP-W)

5 Cycle, Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-2 12.0-13
Vacuum Breakers (VCP-W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1, 5.1-3

Variable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-1 31.2-14,
31.5-1 31.5-18
Zone Interlocking
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26.1-22, 27.1-6
Medium Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-4, 4.1-11, 4.1-16
Zone Selective Interlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20.1-7
VCP-T/VCP-TL MV Vacuum Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.0-2 6.0-4

Voltage Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
Voltage Drop
Busway Voltage Drop Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-46
Cable Voltage Drop
Calculation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3-22 1.3-24
2
3
4
5
6
Vacuum Breakers (MEB or MSB) . . . 7.1-1 7.1-5, 7.2-1 7.2-8
ii
4.4-1 4.4-3
UNIPUMPCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1-1
Unit Substations
Secondary 1000V & Above. . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16
Secondary Less than 1000V . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1 14.0-47
VR-300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1 4.4-3
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Voltage Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1

Voltage Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
14
Voltage Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-4

Voltage (Nominal System Voltages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
VPR Voltage Protection Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-14 34.1-15
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.0-1
August 2013
Power Distribution
Systems
Sheet 01 001
Contents
System Design
Basic Principles. . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
Modern Electric Power
Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
Goals of System Design . . . 1.1-2
Voltage Classifications; BILs
Basic Impulse Levels . . . . . 1.1-4
Three-Phase Transformer
Winding Connections . . . . 1.1-5
Types of SystemsRadial,
Loop, Selective, Two-Source,
Sparing Transformer, Spot
Network, Distribution . . . . 1.1-6
Health Care Facility
Design Considerations . . . 1.1-14
Generator Systems . . . . . . 1.1-17
Generator System Design
Types of Generators . . . . . . . 1.2-1
Generator Systems . . . . . . . 1.2-2
Generator Grounding. . . . . . 1.2-3
Generator Controls. . . . . . . . 1.2-4
Generator Short-Circuit
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-4
Generator Protection . . . . . . 1.2-5
System Analysis
Systems Analysis . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
Short-Circuit Currents . . . . . 1.3-2
Fault Current Waveform
Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-3
Fault Current Calculations
and Methods Index . . . . . . 1.3-4
Determine X and R from
Transformer Loss Data . . . 1.3-19
Voltage Drop
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-20
System Application Considerations
Capacitors and
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1
Overcurrent Protection
and Coordination . . . . . . . . 1.4-3
Protection of Conductors . . . 1.4-5
Temperature Ratings . . . . . 1.4-5
Zone Selective Interlocking . 1.4-5
Ground Fault Protection . . . 1.4-6
i
Suggested Ground
Fault Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-6
Grounding/Ground Fault Protection
GroundingEquipment,
System, MV System,
LV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-9
Ground Fault Protection . . . . 1.4-11
Lightning and Surge
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14
Grounding Electrodes. . . . . . 1.4-14
MV Equipment Surge
Protection Considerations . 1.4-14
Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14
Types of Surge
Protection Devices . . . . . . . 1.4-15
Power Quality
Terms, Technical Overview . . 1.4-18
SPD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-19
Harmonics and
Nonlinear Loads . . . . . . . . . 1.4-21
UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-25
Other Application Considerations
Secondary Voltage . . . . . . . . 1.4-31
Energy Conservation . . . . . . 1.4-32
Building Control Systems . . 1.4-33
Distributed Energy
Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
Cogeneration. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
PV System Design
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34
Emergency Power. . . . . . . . . 1.4-35
Peak Shaving. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36
Sound Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36
Reference Data
IEEE Protective Relay
Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1
Codes and Standards . . . . . . 1.5-6
Motor Protective
Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7
Chart of Short-Circuit
Currents for Transformers . . 1.5-9
Transformer Full Load
Amperes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-10
Impedances Data . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11
Transformer Losses,
TP-1 Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12
Power Equipment Losses . . . 1.5-13
NEMA Enclosure Definitions . . 1.5-13
Cable R, X, Z Data . . . . . . . . . 1.5-14
Conductor Ampacities . . . . . 1.5-16
Conductor Temperature
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-16
Formulas and Terms . . . . . . . 1.5-19
Seismic Requirements . . . . . 1.5-20
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Designing a Distribution System
CA08104001E
21
1.0-2

August 2013
Sheet 01 002
This page intentionally left blank.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
1.1-1
Sheet 01 003
Basic Principles
The best distribution system is one
that will, cost-effectively and safely,
supply adequate electric service to
both present and future probable
loadsthis section is included to aid
in selecting, designing and installing
such a system.
The function of the electric power
distribution system in a building or
an installation site is to receive power
at one or more supply points and
to deliver it to the individual lamps,
motors and all other electrically
operated devices. The importance
of the distribution system to the
function of a building makes it almost
imperative that the best system be
designed and installed.
In order to design the best distribution
system, the system design engineer
must have information concerning the
loads and a knowledge of the various
types of distribution systems that are
applicable. The various categories of
buildings have many specific design
challenges, but certain basic principles
are common to all. Such principles,
if followed, will provide a soundly
executed design.
The basic principles or factors requiring consideration during design of

the power distribution system include:
Functions of structure, present

and future
Life and flexibility of structure
Locations of service entrance and
distribution equipment, locations
and characteristics of loads,
locations of unit substations
Demand and diversity factors
of loads
Sources of power; including
normal, standby and emergency
(see Tab 40)
Continuity and quality of
power available and required
(see Tab 33)
Energy efficiency and management
Distribution and utilization voltages
Bus and/or cable feeders
Distribution equipment and
motor control
Power and lighting panelboards
and motor control centers
Types of lighting systems
Installation methods
Power monitoring systems
Electric utility requirements
Modern Electric Power

Technologies
Several new factors to consider in
modern power distribution systems
result from two relatively recent
changes. The first recent change is
utility deregulation. The traditional
dependence on the utility for problem
analysis, energy conservation measurements and techniques, and a
simplified cost structure for electricity
has changed. The second change is less
obvious to the designer yet will have
an impact on the types of equipment
and systems being designed. It is the
diminishing quantity of qualified building electrical operators, maintenance
departments and facility engineers.
Modern electric power technologies
may be of use to the designer and
building owner in addressing these
new challenges. The advent of microprocessor devices (smart devices)
into power distribution equipment has
expanded facility owners options and
capabilities, allowing for automated
communication of vital power system
information (both energy data and
system operation information) and
electrical equipment control.
These technologies may be grouped as:
Power monitoring and control

Building management systems
interfaces
Lighting control
Automated energy management
Predictive diagnostics
Various sections of this guide cover

the application and selection of such
systems and components that may be
incorporated into the power equipment being designed. See Tabs 2, 3, 4,
23 and 41.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.1-2

System Design
August 2013
Sheet 01 004
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Goals of System Design

When considering the design of an
electrical distribution system for
a given customer and facility, the
electrical engineer must consider
alternate design approaches that
best fit the following overall goals.
1. Safety: The No. 1 goal is to design
a power system that will not
present any electrical hazard to
the people who use the facility,
and/or the utilization equipment
fed from the electrical system.
It is also important to design a
system that is inherently safe for
the people who are responsible
for electrical equipment
maintenance and upkeep.
The National Electrical Code
(NEC), NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E,
as well as local electrical codes,
provide minimum standards and
requirements in the area of wiring
design and protection, wiring
methods and materials, as well
as equipment for general use with
the overall goal of providing safe
electrical distribution systems
and equipment.
The NEC also covers minimum
requirements for special
occupancies including hazardous
locations and special use type
facilities such as health care
facilities, places of assembly,
theaters and the like, and the
equipment and systems located in
these facilities. Special equipment
and special conditions such as
emergency systems, standby
systems and communication
systems are also covered in
the code.
It is the responsibility of the design
engineer to be familiar with the
NFPA and NEC code requirements
as well as the customers facility,
process and operating procedures;
to design a system that protects
personnel from live electrical
conductors and uses adequate
circuit protective devices that will
selectively isolate overloaded or
faulted circuits or equipment as
quickly as possible.
2. Minimum Initial Investment:

The owners overall budget for
first cost purchase and installation of the electrical distribution
system and electrical utilization
equipment will be a key factor
in determining which of various
alternate system designs are to be
selected. When trying to minimize
initial investment for electrical
equipment, consideration should
be given to the cost of installation,
floor space requirements and
possible extra cooling requirements as well as the initial
purchase price.
3. Maximum Service Continuity:
The degree of service continuity
and reliability needed will vary
depending on the type and use
of the facility as well as the loads
or processes being supplied by
the electrical distribution system.
For example, for a smaller
commercial office building, a
power outage of considerable
time, say several hours, may be
acceptable, whereas in a larger
commercial building or industrial
plant only a few minutes may be
acceptable. In other facilities such
as hospitals, many critical loads
permit a maximum of 10 seconds
outage and certain loads, such
as real-time computers, cannot
tolerate a loss of power for even
a few cycles.
Typically, service continuity and
reliability can be increased by:
A. Supplying multiple utility power
sources or services.
4. Maximum Flexibility and

Expendability: In many industrial
manufacturing plants, electrical
utilization loads are periodically
relocated or changed requiring
changes in the electrical distribution system. Consideration of
the layout and design of the
electrical distribution system to
accommodate these changes
must be considered. For example,
providing many smaller transformers or loadcenters associated
with a given area or specific
groups of machinery may lend
more flexibility for future changes
than one large transformer; the
use of plug-in busways to feed
selected equipment in lieu of
conduit and wire may facilitate
future revised equipment layouts.
In addition, consideration must be
given to future building expansion,
and/or increased load requirements due to added utilization
equipment when designing the
electrical distribution system.
In many cases considering transformers with increased capacity
or fan cooling to serve unexpected
loads as well as including spare
additional protective devices and/
or provision for future addition of
these devices may be desirable.
Also to be considered is increasing
appropriate circuit capacities or
quantities for future growth.
Power monitoring communication
systems connected to electronic
metering can provide the trending
and historical data necessary for
future capacity growth.
B. Supplying multiple connection

paths to the loads served.
C. Using short-time rated power
circuit breakers.
D. Providing alternate customerowned power sources such as
generators or batteries supplying
uninterruptable power supplies.
E. Selecting the highest quality electrical equipment and conductors.
F. Using the best installation methods.
G. Designing appropriate system
alarms, monitoring and diagnostics.
H. Selecting preventative maintenance systems or equipment to
alarm before an outage occurs.
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

System Design
1.1-3
Sheet 01 005
5. Maximum Electrical Efficiency

(Minimum Operating Costs):
Electrical efficiency can generally
be maximized by designing
systems that minimize the losses
in conductors, transformers and
utilization equipment. Proper
voltage level selection plays a
key factor in this area and will
be discussed later. Selecting
equipment, such as transformers,
with lower operating losses,
generally means higher first cost
and increased floor space requirements; thus, there is a balance
to be considered between the
owners utility energy change
for the losses in the transformer
or other equipment versus the
owners first cost budget and
cost of money.
6. Minimum Maintenance Cost:
Usually the simpler the electrical
system design and the simpler
the electrical equipment, the less
the associated maintenance costs
and operator errors. As electrical
systems and equipment become
more complicated to provide
greater service continuity or
flexibility, the maintenance costs
and chance for operator error
increases. The systems should be
designed with an alternate power
circuit to take electrical equipment
(requiring periodic maintenance)
out of service without dropping
essential loads. Use of drawout
type protective devices such as
breakers and combination starters
can also minimize maintenance
cost and out-of-service time.
7. Maximum Power Quality:

The power input requirements
of all utilization equipment has
to be considered including the
acceptable operating range of
the equipment and the electrical
distribution system has to be
designed to meet these needs.
For example, what is the required
input voltage, current, power
factor requirement? Consideration to whether the loads are
affected by harmonics (multiples
of the basic 60 Hz sine wave) or
generate harmonics must be taken
into account as well as transient
voltage phenomena.
The above goals are interrelated
and in some ways contradictory.
As more redundancy is added to
the electrical system design along
with the best quality equipment
to maximize service continuity,
flexibility and expandability, and
power quality, the more initial
investment and maintenance
are increased. Thus, the designer
must weigh each factor based
on the type of facility, the loads
to be served, the owners past
experience and criteria.
Summary
It is to be expected that the engineer
will never have complete load information available when the system is
designed. The engineer will have to
expand the information made available to him on the basis of experience
with similar problems. Of course, it
is desirable that the engineer has as
much definite information as possible
concerning the function, requirements,
and characteristics of the utilization
devices. The engineer should know
whether certain loads function
separately or together as a unit, the
magnitude of the demand of the loads
viewed separately and as units, the rated
voltage and frequency of the devices,
their physical location with respect
to each other and with respect to the
source and the probability and possibility of the relocation of load devices
and addition of loads in the future.
Coupled with this information, a
knowledge of the major types of electric
power distribution systems equips the
engineers to arrive at the best system
design for the particular building.
It is beyond the scope of this guide to
present a detailed discussion of loads
that might be found in each of several
types of buildings. Assuming that the
design engineer has assembled the
necessary load data, the following
pages discuss some of the various
types of electrical distribution systems
that can be used. The description of
types of systems, and the diagrams
used to explain the types of systems
on the following pages omits the
location of utility revenue metering
equipment for clarity. A discussion of
short-circuit calculations, coordination,
voltage selection, voltage drop, ground
fault protection, motor protection and
other specific equipment protection
is also presented.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Design
1.1-4
August 2013
Sheet 01 006
i
ii
1
2
Voltage Classifications
ANSI and IEEE standards define
various voltage classifications for
single-phase and three-phase systems.
The terminology used divides voltage
classes into:
3
4
5
6
Low voltage
Medium voltage
High voltage
Extra-high voltage
Ultra-high voltage
15.5
25.8
38.0
110
125
150
Voltage
Class
Medium
voltage
Nominal System Voltage

Three-Wire Four-Wire
240/120
240
480
600
2400
4160
4800
6900
13,200
13,800
23,000
34,500
46,000
69,000
208Y/120
240/120
480Y/277
4160Y/2400
8320Y/4800
12000Y/6930
12470Y/7200
13200Y/7620
13800Y/7970
20780Y/12000
22860Y/13200
24940Y/14400
34500Y/19920
1.2
2.5
5.0
8.7
15.0
25.0
34.5
Impulse
Withstand (kV)
Table 1.1-4. Liquid-Immersed

Transformers Voltage and Basic
Lightning Impulse Insulation Levels (BIL)
(From ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00-2000)
Application
20
30
45
60
30
45
60
95
60
110
125
95
125
150
110
150
200
BIL values in bold typeface are listed as

standard. Others listed are in common use.
Optional higher levels used where exposure
to overvoltage occurs and higher protection
margins are required.
Lower levels where surge arrester
protective devices can be applied with
lower spark-over levels.
Some factors affecting the selection

of motor operating voltage include:
75
95
150
34.5
46.0
69.0
200
250
350
1.2
2.5
5.0
45
60
75
30
45
60
The following table is based in part

on the above factors and experience.
Because all the factors affecting the
selection are rarely known, it is only
an approximate guideline.
BILBasic Impulse Levels
8.7
15.0
25.0
95
110
150
75
95
Table 1.1-6. Selection of Motor Horsepower

Ratings as a Function of System Voltage
ANSI standards define recommended

and required BIL levels for:
34.5
46.0
69.0
200
250
350
200
250
Metal-clad switchgear
(typically vacuum breakers)
Metal-enclosed switchgear (typically
load interrupters, switches)
Liquid immersed transformers
Dry-type transformers
115.0
138.0
161.0
550
650
750
230.0
345.0
500.0
765.0
900
825 750 650
1175 1050 900
1675 1550 1425 1300
2050 1925 1800
12
13
Ultra-high
voltage
1,100,000
Power
Table 1.1-2 through Table 1.1-5 contain

those values.
125
Motor, motor starter and cable

first cost
Motor, motor starter and cable
installation cost
Motor and cable losses
Motor availability
Voltage drop
Qualifications of the building
operating staff; and many more
8.7
15.0
25.0
345,000
500,000
765,000
95
10
20
30
45
30
45
60
High
voltage
Distribution
Voltage Recommendations by
Motor Horsepower
Nominal BIL
System (kV Crest)
Voltage
(kV rms)
BIL (kV Crest)
1.2
2.5
5.0
Extra-high
voltage
18
125
150
60
75
95
17
27.0
38.0
Table 1.1-5. Dry-Type Transformers Voltage

and Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation
Levels (BIL)From ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01-1998)
Nominal
System
Voltage
(kV rms)
Table 1.1-3. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

Voltage and Insulation Levels
(From ANSI C37.20.3-1987)
115,000
138,000
161,000
230,000
16
60
95
95
4.76
8.25
15.0
10
15
4.76
8.25
15.0
Table 1.1-1. Standard Nominal System

Voltages and Voltage Ranges
(From IEEE Standard 141-1993)
14
Impulse
Withstand (kV)
Rated Maximum
Voltage (kV rms)
11
Rated Maximum
Voltage (kV rms)
Table 1.1-1 presents the nominal system voltages for these classifications.
Low
voltage
Table 1.1-2. Metal-Clad Switchgear Voltage

and Insulation Levels (From ANSI/IEEE
C37.20.2-1999)
150 125
200
250
450
550
650
350
450
550
Motor Voltage Motor

(Volts)
hp Range
System
Voltage
460
2300
4000
up to 500
250 to 2000
250 to 3000
480
2400
4160
4600
13,200
250 to 3000
above 2000
4800
13,800
BIL values in bold typeface are listed as

standard. Others listed are in common use.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
1.1-5
Sheet 01 007
Table 1.1-7. Three-Phase Transformer Winding Connections

Phasor
Diagram
Notes
1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire service with a mid-tap ground.
DELTA-DELTA Connection
Phasor
Diagram:
1
H3
X1
X3
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 0

DELTA-WYE Connection
H2
X2
X0
X1
H1
H3
X3

WYE-DELTA Connection
Phasor
Diagram:
H2
X2
X1
H1
H3
X3
X2
H2
X0
H1
H3
X1

2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire grounded service with
XO grounded.
3. With XO grounded, the transformer acts as a ground source for the
secondary system.
4. Fundamental and harmonic frequency zero-sequence currents in the secondary
lines supplied by the transformer do not flow in the primary lines. Instead the
zero sequence currents circulate in the closed delta primary windings.
5. When supplied from an effectively grounded primary system does not see load
unbalances and ground faults in the secondary system.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire delta service with a mid-tap ground.
3. Grounding the primary neutral of this connection would create a ground source
for the primary system. This could subject the transformer to severe overloading
during a primary system disturbance or load unbalance.
4. Frequently installed with mid-tap ground on one leg when supplying
combination three-phase and single-phase load where the three-phase
load is much larger than single-phase load.
5. When used in 25 kV and 35 kV three-phase four-wire primary systems,
ferroresonance can occur when energizing or de-energizing the transformer
using single-pole switches located at the primary terminals. With smaller kVA
transformers the probability of ferroresonance is higher.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service only, even if XO is grounded.
3. This connection is incapable of furnishing a stabilized neutral and its use may
result in phase-to-neutral overvoltage (neutral shift) as a result of unbalanced
phase-to-neutral load.
4. If a three-phase unit is built on a three-legged core, the neutral point of the
primary windings is practically locked at ground potential.
WYE-WYE Connection
Phasor
Diagram:
X3
X2
H2
X0
H0
H1
H3
X1
X3
X2
H2
1. Suitable for four-wire effectively grounded source only.

2. Suitable for a three-wire service or for four-wire grounded service with
XO grounded.
3. Three-phase transformers with this connection may experience stray flux tank
heating during certain external system unbalances unless the core configuration
(four or five legged) used provides a return path for the flux.
4. Fundamental and harmonic frequency zero-sequence currents in the secondary
lines supplied by the transformer also flow in the primary lines (and primary
neutral conductor).
5. Ground relay for the primary system may see load unbalances and ground
faults in the secondary system. This must be considered when coordinating
overcurrent protective devices.
6. Three-phase transformers with the neutral points of the high voltage and low
voltage windings connected together internally and brought out through an
HOXO bushing should not be operated with the HOXO bushing ungrounded
(floating). To do so can result in very high voltages in the secondary systems.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire service with a mid-tap ground.
3. When using the tap for single-phase circuits, the single-phase load kVA should
not exceed 5% of the three-phase kVA rating of the transformer. The three-phase
rating of the transformer is also substantially reduced.
DELTA-DELTA Connection with Tap

Phasor
Diagram:
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
GROUNDED WYE-WYE Connection

Phasor
Diagram:
ii
X2
H2
H1
Phasor
Diagram:
X4
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
H1
H3
X1
X3
21
CA08104001E
1.1-6

System Design
August 2013
Sheet 01 008
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Types of Systems
In many cases, power is supplied by
the utility to a building at the utilization
voltage. In these cases, the distribution
of power within the building is achieved
through the use of a simple radial
distribution system.
In cases where the utility service voltage
is at some voltage higher than the
utilization voltage within the building,
the system design engineer has a choice
of a number of types of systems that
may be used. This discussion covers
several major types of distribution
systems and practical modifications
of them.
1. Simple radial
2. Loop-primary system
radial secondary system
3. Primary selective system
secondary radial system
4. Two-source primary
secondary selective system
Low voltage feeder circuits run from

the switchgear or switchboard assemblies to panelboards that are located
closer to their respective loads as
shown in Figure 1.1-1.
A fault on the secondary low voltage

bus or in the source transformer will
interrupt service to all loads. Service
cannot be restored until the necessary
repairs have been made. A low voltage
feeder circuit fault will interrupt service
to all loads supplied over that feeder.
Each feeder is connected to the switchgear or switchboard bus through a

circuit breaker or other overcurrent
protective device. A relatively small
number of circuits are used to distribute
power to the loads from the switchgear or switchboard assemblies and
panelboards.
A modern and improved form of the

conventional simple radial system
distributes power at a primary voltage.
The voltage is stepped down to
utilization level in the several load
areas within the building typically
through secondary unit substation
transformers. The transformers are
usually connected to their associated
load bus through a circuit breaker, as
shown in Figure 1.1-2. Each secondary
unit substation is an assembled unit
consisting of a three-phase, liquidfilled or air-cooled transformer, an
integrally connected primary fused
switch, and low voltage switchgear or
switchboard with circuit breakers or
fused switches. Circuits are run to
the loads from these low voltage
protective devices.
Because the entire load is served from

a single source, full advantage can be
taken of the diversity among the loads.
This makes it possible to minimize the
installed transformer capacity. However,
the voltage regulation and efficiency
of this system may be poor because
of the low voltage feeders and single
source. The cost of the low voltagefeeder circuits and their associated circuit
breakers are high when the feeders are
long and the peak demand is above
1000 kVA.
5. Sparing transformer system

6. Simple spot network
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
7. Medium voltage distribution

system design
Primary Fused Switch

Transformer
1. Simple Radial System

The conventional simple radial system
receives power at the utility supply
voltage at a single substation and steps
the voltage down to the utilization level.
In those cases where the customer
receives his supply from the primary
system and owns the primary switch
and transformer along with the secondary low voltage switchboard or switchgear, the equipment may take the form
of a separate primary switch, separate
transformer, and separate low voltage
switchgear or switchboard. This equipment may be combined in the form of
an outdoor pad-mounted transformer
with internal primary fused switch
and secondary main breaker feeding
an indoor switchboard.
600V Class
Switchboard
Distribution
Dry-Type
Transformer
Distribution
Panel
MCC
Distribution
Panel
Lighting
Panelboard
Figure 1.1-1. Simple Radial System
52 Primary Main Breaker
52 52 52 52 52 52 Primary Feeder Breakers
Another alternative would be a

secondary unit substation where
the primary fused switch, transformer
and secondary switchgear or switchboard are designed and installed as
a close-coupled single assembly.
In those cases where the utility owns
the primary equipment and transformer,
the supply to the customer is at the
utilization voltage, and the service
equipment then becomes low voltage
main distribution switchgear or
a switchboard.
Primary
Cables
Secondary Unit
Substation
Figure 1.1-2. Primary and Secondary Simple Radial System

CA08104001E
August 2013

System Design
1.1-7
Sheet 01 009
Because each transformer is located

within a specific load area, it must
have sufficient capacity to carry the
peak load of that area. Consequently,
if any diversity exists among the load
area, this modified primary radial
system requires more transformer
capacity than the basic form of the
simple radial system. However,
because power is distributed to the
load areas at a primary voltage, losses
are reduced, voltage regulation is
improved, feeder circuit costs are
reduced substantially, and large
low voltage feeder circuit breakers
are eliminated. In many cases the
interrupting duty imposed on the
load circuit breakers is reduced.
This modern form of the simple radial
system will usually be lower in initial
investment than most other types of
primary distribution systems for buildings in which the peak load is above
1000 kVA. A fault on a primary feeder
circuit or in one transformer will cause
an outage to only those secondary
loads served by that feeder or transformer. In the case of a primary main
bus fault or a utility service outage,
service is interrupted to all loads until
the trouble is eliminated.
Reducing the number of transformers
per primary feeder by adding more
primary feeder circuits will improve
the flexibility and service continuity
of this system; the ultimate being one
secondary unit substation per primary
feeder circuit. This of course increases
the investment in the system but
minimizes the extent of an outage
resulting from a transformer or
primary feeder fault.
In addition, if only one primary fuse on

a circuit opens, the secondary loads are
then single phased, causing damage to
low voltage motors.
break switches with load side bus

connection) sectionalizing switches
and primary load break fused switch
as shown in Figure 1.1-4.
Another approach to reducing costs

is to eliminate the primary feeder
breakers completely, and use a single
primary main breaker or fused switch
for protection of a single primary
feeder circuit with all secondary unit
substations supplied from this circuit.
Although this system results in less
initial equipment cost, system reliability
is reduced drastically because a single
fault in any part of the primary conductor
would cause an outage to all loads
within the facility.
When pad-mounted compartmentalized transformers are used, they are

furnished with loop-feed oil-immersed
gang-operated load break sectionalizing
switches and drawout current limiting
fuses in dry wells as shown in Figure
1.1-5. By operating the appropriate
sectionalizing switches, it is possible
to disconnect any section of the loop
conductors from the rest of the system.
In addition, by opening the transformer
primary switch (or removing the load
break drawout fuses in the pad-mounted
transformer) it is possible to disconnect
any transformer from the loop.
2. Loop Primary System

Radial Secondary System
A key interlocking scheme is normally

recommended to prevent closing all
sectionalizing devices in the loop. Each
primary loop sectionalizing switch and
the feeder breakers to the loop are
interlocked such that to be closed they
require a key (which is held captive
until the switch or breaker is opened)
and one less key than the number of
key interlock cylinders is furnished.
An extra key is provided to defeat the
interlock under qualified supervision.
This system consists of one or more

PRIMARY LOOPS with two or more
transformers connected on the loop.
This system is typically most effective
when two services are available from
the utility as shown in Figure 1.1-3. Each
primary loop is operated such that one
of the loop sectionalizing switches is
kept open to prevent parallel operation
of the sources. When secondary unit
substations are used, each transformer has its own duplex (2-load
Primary Main Breaker 1 52
52 Primary Main Breaker 2

52
52
52
Tie
Breaker
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
52
Loop Feeder Breaker
13
Loop A
NC
11
12
52
Loop B
CA08104001E
ii
10
Primary connections from one secondary

unit substation to the next secondary
unit substation can be made with
double lugs on the unit substation
primary switch as shown, or with
separable connectors made in
manholes or other locations.
Depending on the load kVA connected
to each primary circuit and if no ground
fault protection is desired for either the
primary feeder conductors and transformers connected to that feeder or
the main bus, the primary main and/or
feeder breakers may be changed to
primary fused switches. This will significantly reduce the first cost, but also
decrease the level of conductor and
equipment protection. Thus, should
a fault or overload condition occur,
downtime increases significantly and
higher costs associated with increased
damage levels and the need for fuse
replacement is typically encountered.
NO
NC
NC
Fault Sensors
14
15
16
NC
NC
NO
NC
NC
NC
17
18
19
Secondary Unit Substations Consisting of:

Duplex Primary Switches/Fused Primary Switches/
Transformer and Secondary Main Feeder Breakers
Figure 1.1-3. Loop PrimaryRadial Secondary System

20
21
1.1-8

System Design
August 2013
Sheet 01 010
Loop
Feeder
Loop
Feeder
Load Break
Loop Switches
ii
1
Fused
Disconnect
Switch
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 1.1-4. Secondary Unit Substation

Loop Switching
Loop
Feeder
Loop
Feeder
Load Break
Loop Switches
8
9
Load Break
Drawout Fuses
10
11
12
Figure 1.1-5. Pad-Mounted Transformer

Loop Switching
13
In addition, the two primary main

breakers, which are normally closed,
and primary tie breaker, which is
normally open, are either mechanically
or electrically interlocked to prevent
paralleling the incoming source lines.
For slightly added cost, an automatic
throw-over scheme can be added
between the two main breakers and
tie breaker. During the more common
event of a utility outage, the automatic
transfer scheme provides significantly
reduced power outage time.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The system in Figure 1.1-3 has higher

costs than in Figure 1.1-2, but offers
increased reliability and quick restoration of service when 1) a utility outage
occurs, 2) a primary feeder conductor
fault occurs, or 3) a transformer fault
or overload occurs.
Should a utility outage occur on one of
the incoming lines, the associated primary main breaker is opened and the
tie breaker closed either manually or
through an automatic transfer scheme.
When a primary feeder conductor fault

occurs, the associated loop feeder
breaker opens and interrupts service
to all loads up to the normally open
primary loop load break switch
(typically half of the loads). Once it is
determined which section of primary
cable has been faulted, the loop sectionalizing switches on each side of
the faulted conductor can be opened,
the loop sectionalizing switch that had
been previously left open then closed
and service restored to all secondary
unit substations while the faulted
conductor is replaced. If the fault
should occur in a conductor directly
on the load side of one of the loop
feeder breakers, the loop feeder
breaker is kept open after tripping and
the next load side loop sectionalizing
switch manually opened so that the
faulted conductor can be sectionalized
and replaced.
52
Loop A
Loop A
In cases where only one primary line

is available, the use of a single primary
breaker provides the loop connections
to the loads as shown here.
Figure 1.1-6. Single Primary Feeder

Loop System
A basic primary loop system that
uses a single primary feeder breaker
connected directly to two loop feeder
switches which in turn then feed the
loop is shown in Figure 1.1-6. In this
basic system, the loop may be normally
operated with one of the loop sectionalizing switches open as described
above or with all loop sectionalizing
switches closed. If a fault occurs in the
basic primary loop system, the single
loop feeder breaker trips, and secondary
loads are lost until the faulted conductor
is found and eliminated from the loop
by opening the appropriate loop
sectionalizing switches and then
reclosing the breaker.
Note: Under this condition, all secondary

unit substations are supplied through the
other loop feeder circuit breaker, and thus
all conductors around the loop should be
sized to carry the entire load connected to
the loop. Increasing the number of primary
loops (two loops shown in Figure 1.1-6)
will reduce the extent of the outage from a
conductor fault, but will also increase the
system investment.
3. Primary Selective System

Secondary Radial System
When a transformer fault or overload

occurs, the transformer primary fuses
open, and the transformer primary
switch manually opened, disconnecting
the transformer from the loop, and
leaving all other secondary unit
substation loads unaffected.
The primary selectivesecondary

radial system, as shown in Figure 1.1-7,
differs from those previously described
in that it employs at least two primary
feeder circuits in each load area. It is
Primary Metal-Clad
Switchgear Lineup
52
Primary Main Breaker
52
Bus A
Bus B
52
52
52
52
Feeder A1
52
Feeder B1
Primary Feeder Breaker
Feeder B2
Feeder A2
To Other
Substations
NO
NC
NO
NC
Typical Secondary Unit

Substation Duplex Primary
Switch/Fuses
Transformer/600V Class
Secondary Switchgear
NO
NC
Figure 1.1-7. Basic Primary SelectiveRadial Secondary System

CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
1.1-9
Sheet 01 011
designed so that when one primary

circuit is out of service, the remaining
feeder or feeders have sufficient
capacity to carry the total load. Half
of the transformers are normally
connected to each of the two feeders.
When a fault occurs on one of the
primary feeders, only half of the
load in the building is dropped.
Duplex fused switches as shown in
Figure 1.1-7 and detailed in Figure 1.1-8
are the normal choice for this type of
system. Each duplex fused switch
consists of two (2) load break threepole switches each in their own
separate structure, connected together
by bus bars on the load side. Typically,
the load break switch closest to the
transformer includes a fuse assembly
with fuses. Mechanical and/or key
interlocking is furnished such that
both switches cannot be closed at
the same time (to prevent parallel
operation) and interlocking such
that access to either switch or fuse
assembly cannot be obtained unless
both switches are opened.
Primary
Feeders
Load Break
Switches
Fuses
Figure 1.1-8. Duplex Fused Switch in

Two Structures
As an alternate to the duplex switch
arrangement, a non-load break selector
switch mechanically interlocked with a
load break fused switch can be used as
shown in Figure 1.1-9. The non-load
break selector switch is physically
located in the rear of the load break
fused switch, thus only requiring one
structure and a lower cost and floor
space savings over the duplex
arrangement. The non-load break
switch is mechanically interlocked to
prevent its operation unless the load
break switch is opened. The main
disadvantage of the selector switch is
that conductors from both circuits are
terminated in the same structure.
CA08104001E
Primary
Feeders
Non-Load Break
Selector Switches
Interlock
Load Break
Disconnect
Fuses
Figure 1.1-9. Fused Selector Switch in

One Structure
This means limited cable space especially if double lugs are furnished for
each line as shown in Figure 1.1-7 and
should a faulted primary conductor
have to be changed, both lines would
have to be de-energized for safe
changing of the faulted conductors.
In Figure 1.1-7 when a primary feeder
fault occurs, the associated feeder
breaker opens and the transformers
normally supplied from the faulted
feeder are out of service. Then manually, each primary switch connected to
the faulted line must be opened and
then the alternate line primary switch
can be closed connecting the transformer to the live feeder, thus restoring
service to all loads. Note that each of the
primary circuit conductors for Feeder
A1 and B1 must be sized to handle the
sum of the loads normally connected
to both A1 and B1. Similar sizing of
Feeders A2 and B2, etc., is required.
If a fault occurs in one transformer,
the associated primary fuses blow
and interrupt the service to just
the load served by that transformer.
Service cannot be restored to the
loads normally served by the faulted
transformer until the transformer
is repaired or replaced.
Cost of the primary selective
secondary radial system is greater
than that of the simple primary radial
system of Figure 1.1-1 because of the
additional primary main breakers, tie
breaker, two-sources, increased number
of feeder breakers, the use of primaryduplex or selector switches, and the
greater amount of primary feeder
cable required. The benefits from the
reduction in the amount of load lost
when a primary feeder is faulted, plus
the quick restoration of service to all
or most of the loads, may more than

offset the greater cost. Having two
sources allows for either manual or
automatic transfer of the two primary
main breakers and tie breaker should
one of the sources become unavailable.
i
ii
The primary selective-secondary radial

system, however, may be less costly or
more costly than a primary loop
secondary radial system of Figure 1.1-3
depending on the physical location
of the transformers while offering
comparable downtime and reliability.
The cost of conductors for the two
types of systems may vary greatly
depending on the location of the
transformers and loads within the
facility and greatly override primary
switching equipment cost differences
between the two systems.
4. Two-Source Primary
Secondary Selective System
This system uses the same principle

of duplicate sources from the power
supply point using two primary main
breakers and a primary tie breaker.
The two primary main breakers and
primary tie breaker being either
manually or electrically interlocked
to prevent closing all three at the same
time and paralleling the sources. Upon
loss of voltage on one source, a manual
or automatic transfer to the alternate
source line may be used to restore
power to all primary loads.
Each transformer secondary is

arranged in a typical double-ended
unit substation arrangement as shown
in Figure 1.1-10. The two secondary
main breakers and secondary tie
breaker of each unit substation are
again either mechanically or electrically
interlocked to prevent parallel operation.
Upon loss of secondary source voltage
on one side, manual or automatic
transfer may be used to transfer the
loads to the other side, thus restoring
power to all secondary loads.
This arrangement permits quick
restoration of service to all loads when
a primary feeder or transformer fault
occurs by opening the associated
secondary main and closing the
secondary tie breaker. If the loss of
secondary voltage has occurred
because of a primary feeder fault
with the associated primary feeder
breaker opening, then all secondary
loads normally served by the faulted
feeder would have to be transferred
to the opposite primary feeder. This
means each primary feeder conductor
must be sized to carry the load on both
sides of all the secondary buses it is
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1.1-10 Power Distribution Systems

System Design
August 2013
Sheet 01 012
i
ii
1
2
emergency conditions, the in-service

transformer of a double-ended unit
substation would have to have the
capability of serving the loads on
both sides of the tie breaker. For this
reason, transformers used in this
application have equal kVA rating
on each side of the double-ended
unit substation and the normal
operating maximum load on each
transformer is typically about 2/3 base
nameplate kVA rating. Typically these
serving under secondary emergency

transfer. If the loss of voltage was due
to a failure of one of the transformers in
the double-ended unit substation, then
the associated primary fuses would
open taking only the failed transformer
out of service, and then only the
secondary loads normally served by
the faulted transformer would have
to be transferred to the opposite
transformer. In either of the above
3
4
52
52
Primary Main Breakers
52
52
To Other Substations
Typical
Double-Ended
Unit
Substation
52
52
52
Primary Feeder Breakers
To Other Substations
8
9
10
Primary Fused Switch
11
Transformer
Tie Breaker
Secondary Main Breaker
Figure 1.1-10. Two-Source PrimarySecondary Selective System
12
transformers are furnished with

fan-cooling and/or lower than normal
temperature rise such that under
emergency conditions they can carry
on a continuous basis the maximum
load on both sides of the secondary tie
breaker. Because of this spare transformer capacity, the voltage regulation
provided by the double-ended unit
substation system under normal
conditions is better than that of the
systems previously discussed.
The double-ended unit substation
arrangement can be used in conjunction
with any of the previous systems
discussed, which involve two primary
sources. Although not recommended,
if allowed by the utility, momentary
re-transfer of loads to the restored
source may be made closed transition
(anti-parallel interlock schemes would
have to be defeated) for either the
primary or secondary systems. Under
this condition, all equipment interrupting and momentary ratings should be
suitable for the fault current available
from both sources.
For double-ended unit substations
equipped with ground fault systems
special consideration to transformer
neutral grounding and equipment
operation should be madesee
Grounding and Ground Fault
Protection in Section 1.4. Where
two single-ended unit substations are
connected together by external tie
conductors, it is recommended that
a tie breaker be furnished at each end
of the tie conductors.
5. Sparing Transformer System
13
K
14
15
Sparing Transformer
16
K
17
Generally no more than three to five

single-ended substations are on a
sparing loop.
18
Typical Secondary Busway Loop
19
K
K
Typical Single-Ended Substation
20
21
The sparing transformer system concept

came into use as an alternative to the
capital cost intensive double-ended
secondary unit substation distribution
system (see Two-Source Primary
Secondary Selective System). It essentially replaces double-ended substations
with single-ended substations and one
or more sparing transformer substations all interconnected on a common
secondary bus (see Figure 1.1-11).
Figure 1.1-11. Sparing Transformer System

The essence of this design philosophy

is that conservatively designed and
loaded transformers are highly reliable
electrical devices and rarely fail. Therefore, this design provides a single common backup transformer for a group of
transformers in lieu of a backup transformer for each and every transformer.
This system design still maintains a
high degree of continuity of service.
CA08104001E
August 2013

System Design
1.1-11
Sheet 01 013
Referring to Figure 1.1-11, it is apparent that the sparing concept backs up

primary switch and primary cable failure as well. Restoration of lost or failed
utility power is accomplished similarly
to primary selective scheme previously
discussed. It is therefore important to
use an automatic throwover system
in a two source lineup of primary
switchgear to restore utility power
as discussed in the Two-Source
Primary schemesee Figure 1.1-10.
A major advantage of the sparing
transformer system is the typically
lower total base kVA of transformation.
In a double-ended substation design,
each transformer must be rated to
carry the sum of the loads of two busses
and usually requires the addition of
cooling fans to accomplish this rating.
In the sparing concept, each transformer carries only its own load, which
is typically not a fan-cooled rating. Major
space savings is also a benefit of this
system in addition to first cost savings.
The sparing transformer system
operates as follows:
All main breakers, including
the sparing main breaker, are
normally closed; the tie breakers
are normally open
Once a transformer (or primary
cable or primary switch/fuse) fails,
the associated secondary main
breaker is opened. The associated
tie breaker is then closed, which
restores power to the single-ended
substation bus
Schemes that require the main to
be opened before the tie is closed
(open transition), and that allow
any tie to be closed before the
substation main is opened, (closed
transition) are possible
With a closed transition scheme, it is

common to add a timer function that
opens the tie breaker unless either
main breaker is opened within a time
interval. This closed transition allows
power to be transferred to the sparing
transformer without interruption, such
as for routine maintenance, and then
back to the substation. This closed
transition transfer has an advantage in
some facilities; however, appropriate
interrupting capacities and bus bracing
must be specified suitable for the
momentary parallel operation.
In facilities without qualified electrical

power operators, an open transition
with key interlocking is often a
prudent design.
The major advantage of the secondary

network system is continuity of
service. No single fault anywhere
on the primary system will interrupt
service to any of the systems loads.
Most faults will be cleared without
interrupting service to any load.
Another outstanding advantage that
the network system offers is its flexibility to meet changing and growing
load conditions at minimum cost and
minimum interruption in service to
other loads on the network. In addition
to flexibility and service reliability, the
secondary network system provides
exceptionally uniform and good
voltage regulation, and its high
efficiency materially reduces the
costs of system losses.
Note: Each pair of main breaker/tie breaker

key cylinders should be uniquely keyed to
prevent any paralleled source operations.
Careful sizing of these transformers

as well as careful specification of the
transformers is required for reliability.
Low temperature rise specified with
continuous overload capacity or
upgraded types of transformers
should be considered.
One disadvantage to this system is
the external secondary tie system,
see Figure 1.1-11. As shown, all singleended substations are tied together on
the secondary with a tie busway or
cable system. Location of substations
is therefore limited because of voltage
drop and cost considerations.
6. Simple Spot Network Systems
Three major differences between the

network system and the simple radial
system account for the outstanding
advantages of the network. First,
a network protector is connected in
the secondary leads of each network
transformer in place of, or in addition
to, the secondary main breaker, as
shown in Figure 1.1-12. Also, the
secondaries of each transformer in
a given location (spot) are connected
together by a switchgear or ring bus
from which the loads are served over
short radial feeder circuits. Finally, the
primary supply has sufficient capacity
to carry the entire building load without overloading when any one primary
feeder is out of service.
The AC secondary network system

is the system that has been used for
many years to distribute electric power
in the high-density, downtown areas
of cities, usually in the form of utility
grids. Modifications of this type of
system make it applicable to serve
loads within buildings.
A network protector is a specially

designed heavy-duty air power breaker,
spring close with electrical motor-charged
mechanism, with a network relay to
control the status of the protector
(tripped or closed). The network relay
is usually a solid-state microprocessorbased component integrated
Routing of busway, if used, must be

carefully layed out. It should also be
noted, that a tie busway or cable fault
will essentially prevent the use of the
sparing transformer until it is repaired.
Commonly, the single-ended substations and the sparing transformer
must be clustered. This can also be
an advantage, as more kVA can be
supported from a more compact
space layout.
Typical Feeder
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Primary Circuit
To Other
Networks
Network Transformer
16
Network Protector
17
Fuses
Optional Main, 50/51
Relaying and/or
Network Disconnect
Tie
Tie
NC
LV Feeder
Drawout
Low Voltage
Switchgear
NC
18
19
Customer
Loads
Customer
Loads
Customer
Loads
20
Figure 1.1-12. Three-Source Spot Network
21
CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
Sheet 01 014
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
into the protector enclosure that

functions to automatically close the
protector only when the voltage
conditions are such that its associated
transformer will supply power to the
secondary network loads, and to automatically open the protector when
power flows from the secondary to the
network transformer. The purpose of
the network protector is to protect the
integrity of the network bus voltage
and the loads served from it against
transformer and primary feeder faults
by quickly disconnecting the defective
feeder-transformer pair from the
network when backfeed occurs.
The simple spot network system
resembles the secondary-selective
radial system in that each load area
is supplied over two or more primary
feeders through two or more transformers. In network systems, the
transformers are connected through
network protectors to a common
bus, as shown in Figure 1.1-12, from
which loads are served. Because the
transformers are connected in parallel,
a primary feeder or transformer fault
does not cause any service interruption to the loads. The paralleled
transformers supplying each load
bus will normally carry equal load
currents, whereas equal loading of
the two separate transformers supplying a substation in the secondaryselective radial system is difficult to
obtain. The interrupting duty imposed
on the outgoing feeder breakers in the
network will be greater with the spot
network system.
The optimum size and number of
primary feeders can be used in the
spot network system because the
loss of any primary feeder and its
associated transformers does not
result in the loss of any load even
for an instant. In spite of the spare
capacity usually supplied in network
systems, savings in primary switchgear and secondary switchgear costs
often result when compared to a radial
system design with similar spare
capacity. This occurs in many radial
systems because more and smaller
feeders are often used in order to
minimize the extent of any outage
when a primary fault event occurs.
In spot networks, when a fault occurs
on a primary feeder or in a transformer,
the fault is isolated from the system
through the automatic tripping of the
primary feeder circuit breaker and all
of the network protectors associated
with that feeder circuit. This operation

does not interrupt service to any loads.
After the necessary repairs have been
made, the system can be restored to
normal operating conditions by closing
the primary feeder breaker. All network
protectors associated with that feeder
will close automatically.
The chief purpose of the network bus
normally closed ties is to provide for
the sharing of loads and a balancing
of load currents for each primary service and transformer regardless of
the condition of the primary services.
Also, the ties provide a means for
isolating and sectionalizing ground
fault events within the switchgear
network bus, thereby saving a portion
of the loads from service interruptions,
yet isolating the faulted portion for
corrective action.
The use of spot network systems
provides users with several important
advantages. First, they save transformer capacity. Spot networks permit
equal loading of transformers under
all conditions. Also, networks yield
lower system losses and greatly
improve voltage conditions. The
voltage regulation on a network
system is such that both lights and
power can be fed from the same
load bus. Much larger motors can
be started across-the-line than on a
simple radial system. This can result in
simplified motor control and permits
the use of relatively large low voltage
motors with their less expensive
control. Finally, network systems
provide a greater degree of flexibility
in adding future loads; they can be
connected to the closest spot
network bus.
Spot network systems are economical
for buildings that have heavy concentrations of loads covering small areas,
with considerable distance between
areas, and light loads within the
distances separating the concentrated
loads. They are commonly used in
hospitals, high rise office buildings,
and institutional buildings where a
high degree of service reliability is
required from the utility sources.
Spot network systems are especially
economical where three or more
primary feeders are available.
Principally, this is due to supplying
each load bus through three or
more transformers and the reduction
in spare cable and transformer
capacity required.
They are also economical when

compared to two transformer doubleended substations with normally
opened tie breakers.
Emergency power should be connected
to network loads downstream from
the network, or upstream at primary
voltage, not at the network bus itself.
7. Medium Voltage Distribution

System Design
A. Single Bus, Figure 1.1-13
The sources (utility and/or generator(s))
are connected to a single bus. All feeders
are connected to the same bus.
Utility
G
52
52
Main Bus
52
One of Several Feeders
Figure 1.1-13. Single Bus

This configuration is the simplest
system; however, outage of the utility
results in total outage.
Normally the generator does not have
adequate capacity for the entire load.
A properly relayed system equipped
with load shedding, automatic voltage/
frequency control may be able to
maintain partial system operation.
Any future addition of breaker sections
to the bus will require a shutdown of
the bus, because there is no tie breaker.
B. Single Bus with Two Sources from the

Utility, Figure 1.1-14
Same as the single bus, except that
two utility sources are available.
This system is operated normally with
the main breaker to one source open.
Upon loss of the normal service, the
transfer to the standby normally
open (NO) breaker can be automatic
or manual. Automatic transfer is
preferred for rapid service restoration
especially in unattended stations.
21
CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
1.1-13
Sheet 01 015
Utility #2
Utility #1
Standby
Normal
The third tie breaker allows any bus

to be fed from any utility source.
Again, the closing of the tie breaker can

be manual or automatic. The statements
made for the retransfer of scheme B
apply to this scheme also.
Utility #1
Caution for Figures 1.1-14, 1.1-15 and

1.1-16: If continuous paralleling of
sources is planned, reverse current,
reverse power and other appropriate
relaying protection should be added.
When both sources are paralleled for
any amount of time, the fault current
available on the load side of the main
device is the sum of the available
fault current from each source plus
the motor fault contribution. It is
required that bus bracing, feeder
breakers and all load side equipment
is rated for the increased available
fault current.
Utility #2
52 NO
52 NC
52 NC
Loads
52 NC
NO
Bus #1
Bus #2
52
Figure 1.1-14. Single Bus with Two-Sources

Retransfer to the Normal can be
closed transition subject to the approval
of the utility. Closed transition momentarily (510 cycles) parallels both
utility sources. Caution: when both
sources are paralleled, the fault current
available on the load side of the main
device is the sum of the available fault
current from each source plus the motor
fault contribution. It is recommended
that the short-circuit ratings of the
bus, feeder breakers and all load side
equipment are rated for the increased
available fault current. If the utility
requires open transfer, the disconnection of motors from the bus must be
ensured by means of suitable time delay
on reclosing as well as supervision
of the bus voltage and its phase with
respect to the incoming source voltage.
This busing scheme does not preclude
the use of cogeneration, but requires
the use of sophisticated automatic synchronizing and synchronism checking
controls, in addition to the previously
mentioned load shedding, automatic
frequency and voltage controls.
This configuration is more expensive
than the scheme shown in Figure 1.1-13,
but service restoration is quicker. Again,
a utility outage results in total outage to
the load until transfer occurs. Extension
of the bus or adding breakers requires
a shutdown of the bus.
If paralleling sources, reverse current,
reverse power and other appropriate
relaying protection should be added
as requested by the utility.
C. Multiple Sources with Tie Breaker,

Figure 1.1-15 and Figure 1.1-16
This configuration is similar to configuration B. It differs significantly in that
both utility sources normally carry the
loads and also by the incorporation
of a normally open tie breaker. The
outage to the system load for a utility
outage is limited to half of the system.
CA08104001E
52
52
Load
The medium voltage system configurations shown are based on using metalclad drawout switchgear. The service
continuity required from electrical
systems makes the use of single-source
systems impractical.
Figure 1.1-15. Two-Source Utility with

Tie Breaker
If looped or primary selective distribution system for the loads is used, the
buses can be extended without a shutdown by closing the tie breaker and
transferring the loads to the other bus.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Summary
Load
6
7
In the design of a modern medium

voltage system, the engineer should:
1. Design a system as simple as

possible.
This configuration is more expensive

than B. The system is not limited to two
buses only. Another advantage is that
the design may incorporate momentary
paralleling of buses on retransfer after
the failed line has been restored to prevent another outage. See the Caution
for Figures 1.1-14, 1.1-15 and 1.1-16.
2. Limit an outage to as small a

portion of the system as possible.
3. Provide means for expanding the
system without major shutdowns.
4. Relay the system so that only the
faulted part is removed from
service, and damage to it is minimized consistent with selectivity.
In Figure 1.1-16, closing of the tie

breaker following the opening of a
main breaker can be manual or automatic. However, because a bus can
be fed through two tie breakers, the
control scheme should be designed
to make the selection.
5. Specify and apply all equipment

within its published ratings and
national standards pertaining to
the equipment and its installation.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Utility #2
Utility #1
Utility #3
16
17
52 NC
Bus #1
52 NC
52 NC
NO
52
52 NO 52 Typical Feeder
Bus #2
52
NO
18
Bus #3
52
19
52
52 NO
20
Tie Busway
Figure 1.1-16. Triple-Ended Arrangement

21

System Design
August 2013
Sheet 01 016
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Health Care Facilities
Health care facilities are defined by

NFPA (National Fire Protection Agency)
as Buildings or portions of buildings
in which medical, dental, psychiatric,
nursing, obstetrical, or surgical care
are provided. Due to the critical
nature of the care being provided at
these facilities and their increasing
dependence on electrical equipment
for preservation of life, health care
facilities have special requirements for
the design of their electrical distribution systems. These requirements are
typically much more stringent than
commercial or industrial facilities.
The following section summarizes
some of the unique requirements
of health care facility design.
These NFPA guidelines represent the

most industry recognized standard
requirements for health care electrical
design. However, the electrical design
engineer should consult with the
authorities having jurisdiction over
the local region for specific electrical
distribution requirements.
NFPA 101-2009Life Safety Code

NFPA 110-2010Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
NFPA 111-2010Standard on
Stored Electrical Energy Emergency
and Standby Power Systems
10
Table 1.1-8. Health Care Facilities

Description
Health care electrical systems usually

consist of two parts:
There are several agencies and organizations that develop requirements

for health care electrical distribution
system design. The following is a
listing of some of the specific NFPA
(National Fire Protection Agency)
standards that affect health care
facility design and implementation:
Ambulatory
surgical
facilities
Other health
care facilities
1. Non-essential or normal
electrical system.
2. Essential electrical system.
All electrical power in a health care
facility is important, though some
loads are not critical to the safe operation of the facility. These non-essential
or normal loads include things such
as general lighting, general lab equipment, non-critical service equipment,
patient care areas, etc. These loads are
not required to be fed from an alternate
source of power.
NFPA 37-2010Standard for

Stationary Combustion Engines
and Gas Turbines
NFPA 70-2011National
Electrical Code
NFPA 99-2005Health Care Facilities
Definition
EES Type
Hospitals
NFPA 99 Chap. 13 Type 1
Nursing homes NFPA 99 Chap. 17 Type 2
Limited care
facilities
Health Care Electrical System

Requirements
The electrical system requirements for

the essential electrical system (EES)
vary according to the type of health
care facility. Health care facilities are
categorized by NFPA 99 as Type 1,
Type 2 or Type 3 facilities. Some
example health care facilities, classified
by type, are summarized in the
following Table 1.1-8.

If electrical life support or critical care areas

are present, then facility is classified as Type 1.
Type 1 Essential Electrical

Systems (EES)
Type 1 essential electrical systems
(EES) have the most stringent requirements for providing continuity of
electrical service and will, therefore,
be the focus of this section. Type 1
EES requirements meet or exceed
the requirements for Type 2 and
Type 3 facilities.
11
Normal Source
Normal Source
Normal Source
12
Emergency Power Supply

G
13
14
15
16
Non-Essential Loads
Non-Essential Loads
17
18
19
20
21
Manual Transfer Switch

Delayed Automatic Transfer Switch
Equipment
System
Life Safety Critical

Branch
Branch
Emergency System
Automatic (Non-Delaying)
Transfer Switch
Essential Electrical System
Figure 1.1-17. Typical Large Hospital Electrical SystemType 1 Facility
CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
1.1-15
Sheet 01 017
Sources: Type 1 systems are required

to have a minimum of two independent
sources of electrical powera normal
source that generally supplies the
entire facility and one or more alternate sources that supply power when
the normal source is interrupted. The
alternate source(s) must be an on-site
generator driven by a prime mover
unless a generator(s) exists as the
normal power source. In the case
where a generator(s) is used as the
normal source, it is permissible for the
alternate source to be a utility feed.
Alternate source generators must be
classified as Type 10, Class X, Level 1
gensets per NFPA 110 Tables 4.1(a)
and 4.2(b) that are capable of providing
power to the load in a maximum of
10 seconds. Typically, the alternate
sources of power are supplied to the
loads through a series of automatic
and/or manual transfer switches (see
Tab 25). The transfer switches can
be non-delayed automatic, delayed
automatic or manual transfer depending
on the requirements of the specific
branch of the EES that they are feeding.
It is permissible to feed multiple
branches or systems of the EES from
a single automatic transfer switch
provided that the maximum demand
on the EES does not exceed 150 kVA.
This configuration is typically seen
in smaller health care facilities that
must meet Type 1 EES requirements
(see Figure 1.1-18).
Normal Source
Alternate
Source
Non-Essential
Loads
Entire Essential
Electric System
(150 kVA or Less)
Figure 1.1-18. Small Hospital Electrical

SystemSingle EES Transfer Switch
Table 1.1-9. Type 1 EES Applicable Codes

Description
Standard
Section
Design
Sources
NFPA 99
NFPA 99
Uses
Emergency
Power Supply
Classification
NFPA 99
4.4.1.1.1
4.4.1.1.4 thru
4.4.4.1.1.7.2
4.4.1.1.8 (1-3)
NFPA 110
Distribution
NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2
517.30
Systems and Branches of Service: The

Type 1 EES consists of two separate
power systems capable of supplying
power considered essential for life
safety and effective facility operation
during an interruption of the normal
power source. They are the emergency
system and the equipment system.
1. Emergency systemconsists of
circuits essential to life safety and
critical patient care.
The emergency system is an electrical
sub-system that must be fed from an
automatic transfer switch or series of
automatic transfer switches. This
emergency system consists of two
mandatory branches that provide power
to systems and functions essential to
life safety and critical patient care.
A. Life safety branchsupplies
power for lighting, receptacles
and equipment to perform the
following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Illumination of means of egress.

Exit signs and exit direction signs.
Alarms and alerting systems.
Emergency communications
systems.
5. Task illumination, battery
chargers for battery powered
lighting, and select receptacles
at the generator.
6. Elevator lighting control, communication and signal systems.
7. Automatic doors used for egress.
These are the only functions
permitted to be on the life safety
branch. Life safety branch equipment and wiring must be entirely
independent of all other loads
and branches of service. This
includes separation of raceways,
boxes or cabinets. Power must be
supplied to the life safety branch
from a non-delayed automatic
transfer switch.
B. Critical branchsupplies power

for task illumination, fixed equipment, selected receptacles and
selected power circuits for areas
related to patient care. The
purpose of the critical branch
is to provide power to a limited
number of receptacles and locations to reduce load and minimize
the chances of fault conditions.
The transfer switch(es) feeding the
critical branch must be automatic
type. They are permitted to have
appropriate time delays that will
follow the restoration of the life
safety branch, but should have
power restored within 10 seconds
of normal source power loss.
The critical branch provides power
to circuits serving the following
areas and functions:
1. Critical care areas.
2. Isolated power systems in
special environments.
3. Task illumination and selected
receptacles in the following
patient care areas: infant
nurseries, medication prep
areas, pharmacy, selected
acute nursing areas, psychiatric
bed areas, ward treatment
rooms, nurses stations.
4. Specialized patient care task
illumination, where needed.
5. Nurse call systems.
6. Blood, bone and tissue banks.
7. Telephone equipment rooms
and closets.
8. Task illumination, selected
receptacles and selected power
circuits for the following: general
care beds (at least one duplex
receptacle), angiographic labs,
cardiac catheterization labs,
coronary care units, hemodialysis
rooms, selected emergency
room treatment areas, human
physiology labs, intensive care
units, selected postoperative
recovery rooms.
9. Additional circuits and singlephase fraction motors as needed
for effective facility operation.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
Sheet 01 018
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Table 1.1-10. Type 1Emergency System

Applicable Codes
Description
Standard
Section
General
NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.2
517.31
Life safety
branch
NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.2.2
517.32
Critical branch
NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.2.3
517.33
Wiring
NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.4
517.30(C)
The following equipment must be

arranged for delayed automatic or
manual transfer to the emergency
power supply:
1. Select heating equipment.
2. Select elevators.
3. Supply, return and exhaust
ventilating systems for surgical,
obstetrical, intensive care,
coronary care, nurseries and
emergency treatment areas.
4. Supply, return and exhaust
ventilating systems for airborne
infectious/isolation rooms, labs and
medical areas where hazardous
materials are used.
5. Hyperbaric facilities.
6. Hypobaric facilities.
7. Autoclaving equipment.
8. Controls for equipment listed above.
9. Other selected equipment in
kitchens, laundries, radiology
rooms and central refrigeration
as selected.
2. Equipment systemconsists of
major electrical equipment necessary
for patient care and Type 1 operation.
The equipment system is a subsystem
of the EES that consists of large electrical
equipment loads needed for patient
care and basic hospital operation.
Loads on the equipment system that
are essential to generator operation are
required to be fed by a non-delayed
automatic transfer switch.
The following equipment must be
arranged for delayed automatic transfer
to the emergency power supply:
1. Central suction systems for medical
and surgical functions.
2. Sump pumps and other equipment
required for the safe operation of
a major apparatus.
3. Compressed air systems for
medical and surgical functions.
4. Smoke control and stair
pressurization systems.
5. Kitchen hood supply and exhaust
systems, if required to operate
during a fire.
13
Table 1.1-11. Type 1Equipment System

Applicable Codes
Description
Standard
Section
General
NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.3
517.34
Equipment
NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.3 (3-5)
517.34(A)-(B)
Any loads served by the generator that

are not approved as outlined above as
part of the essential electrical system
must be connected through a separate
transfer switch. These transfer switches
must be configured such that the loads
will not cause the generator to overload
Normal Source
14
and must be shed in the event the

generator enters an overload condition.
Ground fault protectionper NFPA 70
NEC Article 230.95, ground fault
protection is required on any feeder or
service disconnect 1000A or larger on
systems with line to ground voltages
of 150V or greater and phase-to-phase
voltages of 600V or less. For health care
facilities (of any type), a second level of
ground fault protection is required to
be on the next level of feeder downstream. This second level of ground
fault is only required for feeders that
serve patient care areas and equipment
intended to support life. 100% selective
coordination of the two levels of ground
fault protection must be achieved with a
minimum six-cycle separation between
the upstream and downstream device.
New in the 2011 NEC, ground fault
protection is now allowed between
the generator(s) and the EES transfer
switch(es). However, NEC 517.17(B)
prohibits the installation of ground fault
protection on the load side of a transfer
switch feeding EES circuits (see Figure
1.1-19additional level of ground fault).
Careful consideration should be used in
applying ground fault protection on the
essential electrical system to prevent
a ground fault that causes a trip of the
normal source to also cause a trip on
the emergency source. Such an event
could result in complete power loss of
both normal and emergency power
sources and could not be recovered
until the source of the ground fault
was located and isolated from the
system. To prevent this condition,
NEC 700.26 removes the ground fault
protection requirement for the
Normal Source(s)
G
15
480/277V
480/277V
1000 A
Service
GF
or Larger
Entrance
16
480/277 V
1000 A
Service
GF
or Larger
Entrance
1000 A
Service
GF
or Larger
Entrance
Generator Breakers are

Supplied with
Ground Fault Alarm
Only. (NEC 700.26)
Ground Fault
is Permitted
17
GF GF GF GF GF
18
Additional Level
of Ground Fault
Protection
Non-Essential Loads
GF GF GF
GF GF GF
and EES Transfer

Switches.
(NEC 517.17(B))
Non-Essential Loads
19
GF = Ground Fault Protection Required
20
21
Essential Electrical System
Additional Level of Ground Fault is

not
Transfer Switches. (NEC 517.17a(2))
Figure 1.1-19. Additional Level of Ground Fault Protection

Ground fault protection is required for service disconnects 1000A and larger or systems with less than 600V phase-to-phase and greater than 150V to
ground per NEC 230.95.
CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
1.1-17
Sheet 01 019
emergency system source. Typically,

the emergency system generator(s)
are equipped with ground fault alarms
that do not automatically disconnect
power during a ground fault.
Table 1.1-12. Ground Fault Protection
Applicable Codes
Description
Standard
Section
Services
Feeders
NEC
NEC
230.95
215.10
Additional level
NEC
NFPA 99
517.17
4.3.2.5
Alternate source
NEC
NEC
700.26
701.26
Wet procedure locationsA wet

procedure location in a health care
facility is any patient care area that
is normally subject to wet conditions
while patients are present. Typical wet
procedure locations can include operating rooms, anesthetizing locations,
dialysis locations, etc. (Patient beds,
toilets and sinks are not considered
wet locations.) These wet procedure
locations require special protection
to guard against electric shock. The
ground fault current in these areas
must be limited to not exceed 6 mA.
In areas where the interruption of power
is permissible, ground fault circuit
interrupters (GFCI) can be employed.
GFCIs will interrupt a circuit when
ground fault current exceeds 5 mA
(1 mA).
In areas where the interruption of
power cannot be tolerated, protection
from ground fault currents is accomplished through the use of an isolated
power system. Isolated power systems
provide power to an area that is isolated from ground (or ungrounded).
This type of system limits the amount
of current that flows to ground in
the event of a single line-to-ground
fault and maintains circuit continuity.
Electronic line isolation monitors (LIM)
are used to monitor and display leakage
currents to ground. When leakage
current thresholds are exceeded, visible
and/or audible alarms are initiated to
alert occupants of a possible hazardous
condition. This alarm occurs without
interrupting power to allow for the
safe conclusion of critical procedures.
Table 1.1-13. Wet Procedure Location
Applicable Codes
Description
Standard
Section
General
NFPA 99
NEC
4.3.2.2.9
517.20
Isolated power
systems
NFPA 99
NEC
4.3.2.6
517.160
CA08104001E
Maintenance and Testing

Regular maintenance and testing of
the electrical distribution system in
a health care facility is necessary to
ensure proper operation in an emergency and, in some cases, to maintain
government accreditation. Any health
care facility receiving Medicare or
Medicaid reimbursement from the
government must be accredited by the
Joint Commission on Accreditation of
Health Care Organizations (JCAHO).
JCAHO has established a group of
standards called the Environment of
Care, which must be met for health
care facility accreditation. Included in
these standards is the regular testing
of the emergency (alternate) power
system(s). Diesel-powered EPS installations must be tested monthly in
accordance with NFPA 110 Standard
for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems. Generators must be tested
for a minimum of 30 minutes under
the criteria defined in NFPA 110.
One method to automate the task of
monthly generator tests is through the
use of Power Xpert communications.
With the Power Xpert integrated metering, monitoring and control system, a
facility maintenance director can initiate a generator test, control/monitor
loads, meter/monitor generator test
points and create a JCAHO compliant
report automatically from a central PC.
The report contains all metered values,
test results, date/time information, etc.
necessary to satisfy JCAHO requirements. This automated generator testing
procedure reduces the labor, training
and inaccuracies that occur during
manual emergency power system tests.
(See Power Monitoring Tab 2.)
Table 1.1-14. Maintenance and Testing
Applicable Codes
Description
Standard
Section
Grounding
NFPA 99
4.3.3.1
Emergency power
system
NFPA 99
JCAHO
4.4.4.1.1
EC.2.14(d)
Generator
NFPA 110
8.4
Transfer switches
NFPA 110
8.3.5, 8.4.6
Breakers
NFPA 99
NFPA 110
4.4.4.1.2
8.4.7
Routine maintenance should be performed on circuit breakers, transfer

switches, switchgear, generator equipment, etc. by trained professionals
to ensure the most reliable electrical
system possible. See Tab 41 for
Eatons Electrical Services & Systems
(EESS), which provides engineers,
trained in development and execution

of annual preventative maintenance
procedures of health care facility
electrical distribution systems.
Paralleling Emergency Generators

Without Utility Paralleling
In many health care facilities (and
other large facilities with critical
loads), the demand for standby
emergency power is large enough
to require multiple generator sets to
power all of the required essential
electrical system (EES) loads. In many
cases, it becomes more flexible and
easier to operate the required multiple
generators from a single location using
generator paralleling switchgear.
Figure 1.1-20 on Page 1.1-18 shows
an example of a typical one-line for a
paralleling switchgear lineup feeding
the EES.
A typical abbreviated sequence of
operation for a multiple emergency
generator and ATS system follows.
Note that other modes of operation
such as generator demand priority and
automated testing modes are available
but are not included below. (Reference
Tab 41 for complete detailed
sequences of operation.)
1. Entering emergency mode
a. Upon loss of normal source,
automatic transfer switches
send generator control system
a run request.
b. All available generators are
started. The first generator up
to voltage and frequency is
closed to the bus.
c. Unsheddable loads and load
shed Priority 1 loads are powered in less than 10 seconds.
d. The remaining generators are
synchronized and paralleled
to the bus as they come up to
voltage and frequency.
e. As additional generators are
paralleled to the emergency
bus, load shed priority levels
are added, powering their
associated loads.
f. The system is now in
emergency mode.
2. Exit from emergency mode
a. Automatic transfer switches
sense the utility source is
within acceptable operational
tolerances for a time duration
set at the automatic transfer
switch.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

System Design
August 2013
Sheet 01 020
i
ii
1
2
3
4
With Utility Paralleling
b. As each automatic transfer

switch transfers back to utility
power, it removes its run
request from the generator
plant.
c. When the last automatic transfer switch has retransferred to
the utility and all run requests
have been removed from the
generator plant, all generator
circuit breakers are opened.
d. The generators are allowed
to run for their programmed
cool-down period.
e. The system is now back in
automatic/standby mode.
6
Transformer
Generators X = Number of Units

G1
Utility
Metering
G2
Gx
Typical
Generator
Breaker
10
13
The intent of this requirement is so that

a fire in one location cannot take out
both sources of power. To meet this
requirement, the paralleling switchgear
must be split into separate sections
with a tie bus through a fire-rated wall.
For more information on generator
paralleling switchgear, see Tab 40.
Utility
12
NFPA 110 requirements state that the

normal and emergency sources must
be separated by a fire-rated wall.
Health care facilities are ideally suited

to take advantage of these programs
because they already have significant
on-site generation capabilities due to
the code requirements described.
11
Many health care facilities are taking

advantage of these utility incentives
by adding generator capacity over
and above the NFPA requirements.
Figure 1.1-21 on Page 1.1-19 shows
an example one-line of a health care
facility with complete generator
backup and utility interconnect.
Today, many utilities are offering their

customers excellent financial incentives to use their on-site generation
capacity to remove load from the utility
grid. These incentives are sometimes
referred to as limited interruptible
rates (LIP). Under these incentives,
utilities will greatly reduce or eliminate
kWhr or kW demand charges to their
customers with on-site generation
capabilities. In exchange, during times
of peak loading of the utility grid, the
utility can ask their LIP rate customers
to drop load from the grid by using
their on-site generation capabilities.
Service Main
Emergency Bus
Normal Bus
Optional
Electrically
Operated
Stored
Energy
Breakers
Optional Electrically
Operated Stored
Energy Breakers
F1
F2
EF1
Fx
EF2
EFx
14
15
16
Equipment
ATS # 1
Non-Essential
Loads
EP1
Life Safety
ATS # 2
EP2
Typical
Panelboards
Critical
ATS # X
EPX
17
Load Shed/Load
Add ATS Units
Optional Closed
Transition
Paralleling of
Generators and
Utility
Figure 1.1-20. Typical One-Line for a Paralleling Switchgear Lineup Feeding the Essential Electrical System (EES)
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Design
August 2013
1.1-19
Sheet 01 021
Transformer
ii
Generators X = Number of Units

Utility
Metering
G1
Utility
Protective
Relay
Closed
Transition
Paralleling of
Generators and
Utility, Plus
Soft Loading/
Unloading
Service Main
Normal Bus
G2
Gx
Typical
Generator
Breaker
2
3
Emergency Bus
TIE
Optional
Electrically
Operated
Stored
Energy
Breakers
Fire-Rated Wall
or Separation Barrier
Utility
F1
F2
Fx
Optional TIE
Field Installed
Cable or Busway
Electrically Operated
Stored Energy
Breakers
EF1
EF2
4
5
EFx
6
Equipment
ATS # 1
Non-Essential
Loads
EP1
Life Safety
ATS # 2
EP2
Critical
ATS # X
EPX
Figure 1.1-21. Typical One-Line Health Care Facility with Complete Generator Backup and Utility Interconnect
Typical
Panelboards
Load Shed/
Load Add
ATS Units
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01022
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.2-1
Sheet 01 023
Generators and
Generator Systems
Typical Diesel GensetCaterpillar
Introduction
The selection and application
of generators into the electrical
distribution system will depend on
the particular application. There are
many factors to consider, including
code requirements, environmental
constraints, fuel sources, control
complexity, utility requirements and
load requirements. The health care
requirements for legally required
emergency standby generation
systems are described starting on
Page 1.1-14. Systems described in
this section are applicable to health
care requirements, as well as other
facilities that may require a high
degree of reliability. The electrical
supply for data centers, financial
institutions, telecommunications,
government and public utilities
also require high reliability. Threats
of disaster or terror attacks have
prompted many facilities to require
complete self-sufficiency for
continuous operation.
2011 NEC Changes Related to

Generator Systems
Article 250.30Grounding Separately
Derived AC Systemshas been
completely rewritten for clarity and
for usability. Most notably, the term
equipment bonding jumper was
changed to supply-side bonding
jumper (see 250.30(A)(2)). This was
necessary to ensure proper identification and installation of bonding
conductors within or on the supply
side of service equipment and
between the source of a separately
derived system and the first disconnecting means. The other requirements for grounded systems were
renumbered to accommodate the
250.30(A)(2) change. 250.30(B)(3)
Ungrounded Systemshas been
added, and this language requires
a supply-side bonding jumper to

be installed from the source of a
separately derived system to the first
disconnecting means in accordance
with 250.30(A)(2). Another new
requirement, 250.30(C)Outdoor
Sourcehas been added, and requires
a grounding electrode connection at
the source location when the separately
derived system is located outside
of the building or the structure
being supplied.
Article 445.19Generators Supplying
Multiple Loadshas been revised
to require that the generator have
overcurrent protection per 240.15(A)
when using individual enclosures
tapped from a single feeder.
Article 517.17(B)Feeder GFP (Health
Care Facilities)now allows, but does
not require, multiple levels of GFPE
upstream of the transfer switch when
the choice is made to provide GFPE
on the alternate power source
(i.e., generator).
Article 701.6(D)Signals (Legally
Required Standby Systems)now
requires ground fault indication for
legally required standby systems of
more than 150V to ground and OCPDs
rated 1000A or more.
Types of Engines
Many generator sets are relatively
small in size, typically ranging from
several kilowatts to several megawatts. These units are often required
to come online and operate quickly.
They need to have the capacity to
run for an extended period of time.
The internal combustion engine is
an excellent choice as the prime
mover for the majority of these
applications. Turbines may also be
used. Diesel-fueled engines are the
most common, but other fuels used
include natural gas, digester gas,
landfill gas, propane, biodiesel,
crude oil, steam and others.
Some campuses and industrial
facilities use and produce steam
for heating and other processes.
These facilities may find it economically feasible to produce electricity as
a byproduct of the steam production.
These installations would typically be
classified as a cogeneration facility
producing a fairly constant power
output and operating in parallel with
the electric utility system.
Types of Generators
Generators can be either synchronous
or asynchronous. Asynchronous
generators are also referred to as
induction generators. The construction
is essentially the same as an induction
motor. It has a squirrel-cage rotor and
wound stator. An induction generator
is a motor driven above its designed
synchronous speed thus generating
power. It will operate as a motor if it
is running below synchronous speed.
The induction generator does not have
an exciter and must operate in parallel
with the utility or another source. The
induction generator requires VARs from
an external source for it to generate
power. The induction generator
operates at a slip frequency so its
output frequency is automatically
locked in with the utility's frequency.
An induction generator is a popular
choice for use when designing
cogeneration systems, where it will
operate in parallel with the utility.
This type of generator offers certain
advantages over a synchronous
generator. For example, voltage and
frequency are controlled by the utility;
thus voltage and frequency regulators
are not required. In addition, the
generator construction offers high
reliability and little maintenance.
Also, a minimum of protective relays
and controls are required. Its major
disadvantages are that it requires
VARs from the system and it normally
cannot operate as a standby/
emergency generator.
Synchronous generators, however,
are the most common. Their output is
determined by their field and governor
controls. Varying the current in the
DC field windings controls the voltage
output. The frequency is controlled
by the speed of rotation. The torque
applied to the generator shaft by
the driving engine controls the power
output. In this manner, the synchronous generator offers precise control
over the power it can generate. In
cogeneration applications, it can be
used to improve the power factor of
the system.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.2-2

August 2013
Sheet 01 024
Generator Systems
Multiple Isolated Standby Generators
Emergency Standby Generator System
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
There are primarily three types of

generator systems. The first and
simplest type is a single generator
that operates independently from
the electric utility power grid.
This is typically referred to as an
emergency standby generator
system. Figure 1.2-1 shows a single
standby generator, utility source
and a transfer switch. In this case, the
load is either supplied from the utility
or the generator. The generator and
the utility are never continuously
connected together. This simple radial
system has few requirements for
protection and control. It also has the
least impact on the complete electric
power distribution system. It should
be noted that this type of generator
system improves overall electrical
reliability but does not provide the
redundancy that some facilities
require if the generator fails to
start or is out for maintenance.
8
Utility
G1
9
10
11
ATS
12
13
14
Load
Figure 1.2-1. Emergency Standby

Generator System
The second type of generator system

is a multiple isolated set of standby
generators. Figure 1.2-2 shows
multiple generators connected to
a paralleling bus feeding multiple
transfer switches. The utility is the
normal source for the transfer switches.
The generators and the utility are never
continuously connected together in this
scheme. Multiple generators may be
required to meet the load requirements
(N system). Generators may be applied
in an N+1 or a 2N system for improved
system reliability.
Utility
G1
G2
Switchgear
ATS-1
ATS-2
Load 1
Load 2
Figure 1.2-2. Multiple Isolated Set of

Standby Generators
In an N system, where N is the number
of generators required to carry the
load; if a generator fails or is out for
maintenance, then the load may be
dropped. This is unacceptable for most
critical 24/7 operations. In an N + 1
system, N is the number of generators
needed to carry the load and 1 is
an extra generator for redundancy.
If one generator fails to start or is out
for maintenance, it will not affect the
load. In a 2N system, there is complete
100% redundancy in the standby
generation system such that the failure
of one complete set of generators
will not affect the load.
Multiple generator systems have a

more complex control and protection
requirement as the units have to be
synchronized and paralleled together.
The generators are required to share
the load proportionally without swings
or prolonged hunting in voltage or
frequency for load sharing. They may
also require multiple levels of load
shedding and/or load restoration
schemes to match generation capacity.
Multiple Generators Operating in

Parallel with Utility System
The third type of system is either one
with a single or multiple generators
that operate in parallel with the utility
system. Figure 1.2-3 shows two
generators and a utility source feeding
a switchgear lineup feeding multiple
loads. This system typically requires
generator capacity sufficient to carry
the entire load or sophisticated load
shedding schemes. This system will
require a complete and complex
protection and control scheme. The
electric utility may have very stringent
and costly protection requirements
for the system. IEEE standard 1547
describes the interconnection requirements for paralleling to the utility.
Utility
G1
G2
Switchgear
Load 1
Load 2
Load 3
Figure 1.2-3. Multiple Generators Operating

in Parallel with Utility System
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.2-3
Sheet 01 025
Generator Fundamentals
A generator consists of two primary
components, a prime mover and an
alternator. The prime mover is the
energy source used to turn the rotor
of the alternator. It is typically a
diesel combustion engine for most
emergency or standby systems.
In cogeneration applications, the
prime mover may come from a steam
driven turbine or other source. On
diesel units, a governor and voltage
regulator are used to control the speed
and power output.
The alternator is typically a synchronous machine driven by the prime
mover. A voltage regulator controls its
voltage output by adjusting the field.
The output of a single generator or
multiple paralleled generator sets is
controlled by these two inputs. The
alternator is designed to operate at a
specified speed for the required output
frequency, typically 60 or 50 Hz. The
voltage regulator and engine governor
along with other systems define the
generators response to dynamic
load changes and motor starting
characteristics.
Generators are rated in power and
voltage output. Most generators are
designed to operate at a 0.8 power
factor. For example, a 2000 kW
generator at 277/480V would have a
kVA rating of 2500 kVA (2000 kW/ 08 pf)
and a continuous current rating
of 3007A ( 2500 kVA 480V 3 ) .

Typical synchronous generators
for industrial and commercial
power systems range in size from
1003000 kVA and from 208V13,800V.
Other ratings are available and these
discussions are applicable to those
ratings as well.
Generators must be considered in the
short-circuit and coordination study
as they may greatly impact the rating
of the electrical distribution system.
This is especially common on large
installations with multiple generators
and systems that parallel with the
utility source. Short-circuit current
contribution from a generator
typically ranges from 8 to 12 times
full load amperes.
The application of generators requires

special protection requirements.
The size, voltage class, importance
and dollar investment will influence
the protection scheme associated with
the generator(s). Mode of operation
will influence the utility companys
interface protection requirements.
Paralleling with the electric utility is
the most complicated of the utility
inter-tie requirements. IEEE ANSI 1547
provides recommended practices.
Generator Grounding and Bonding

(Ref. NEC 2011, Article 250.30(A)(1)
and (2))
Generator grounding methods need
to be considered and may affect the
distribution equipment and ratings.
Generators may be connected in delta
or wye, but wye is the most typical
connection. A wye-connected generator
can be solidly grounded, low impedance
grounded, high impedance grounded
or ungrounded. Section 1.4 discusses
general grounding schemes, benefits
of each and protection considerations.
A solidly grounded generator may have
a lower zero sequence impedance than
its positive sequence impedance. In this
case, the equipment will need to be rated
for the larger available ground fault
current. The generators neutral may
be connected to the system-neutral; if
it is, the generator is not a separately
derived system and a three-pole transfer
switch is used. If the generators neutral
is bonded to ground separate from the
system-neutral, it is a separately
derived system and a four-pole transfer

switch is required or ground fault relays
could misoperate and unbalanced
neutral current may be carried on
ground conductors.
An IEEE working group has studied the
practice of low resistance grounding
of medium voltage generators within
the general industry. This working
group found that, for internal generator
ground faults, the vast majority of the
damage is done after the generator
breaker is tripped offline, and the field
and turbine are tripped. This is due to
the stored energy in the generator flux
that takes several seconds to dissipate
after the generator is tripped offline.
It is during this time that the low
resistance ground allows significant
amounts of fault current to flow into
the ground fault. Because the large fault
currents can damage the generators
winding, application of an alternate
protection method is desirable during
this time period. One of the solutions
set forth by this working group is
a hybrid high resistance grounding
(HHRG) scheme as shown in
Figure 1.2-4. In the HHRG scheme,
the low resistance ground (LRG)
is quickly tripped offline when the
generator protection senses the
ground fault. The LRG is cleared
at the same time that the generator
breaker clears, leaving the high
resistance ground portion connected
to control the transient overvoltages
during the coast-down phase of the
generator, thereby all but eliminating
generator damage.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
HRG
51G
Gen
86
Phase
Relays
R
R LRG
59G
14
87GN
15
16
17
Figure 1.2-4. Hybrid High Resistance Grounding Scheme
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.2-4

August 2013
Sheet 01 026
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Generator Controls
The engine generator set has controls
to maintain the output frequency
(speed) and voltage. These controls
consist of a governor and voltage
regulator. As loads change on the
system, the frequency and voltage
will change. The speed control will
then adjust the governor to correct
for the load (kW) change. The
voltage regulator will change the
field current to adjust the voltage
to the desired voltage value. These
are the basic controls found on all
synchronous generators.
Multiple generator systems require
more sophisticated controls.
Generators are paralleled in a multigenerator system and they must share
the load. These systems often have
a load shed scheme, which adds to
the complexity.
Multiple generator schemes need a
master controller to prevent units from
being connected out-of-phase. The
sequence of operation is to send a
start signal to all generators simultaneously. The first unit up to frequency
and voltage will be permitted to close
its respective breaker and energize the
paralleling bus. Breakers for the other
generators are held open, not permitted to close, until certain conditions
are met. Once the paralleling bus is
energized, the remaining generators
must be synchronized to it before
the generators can be paralleled.
Synchronization compares the voltage
phasors angle and magnitude. Both
generators must be operating at the
same frequency and phase-matched
within typically 5 to 10 degrees with
each other. The voltage magnitude
typically must be within 20 to 24%.
A synch-scope is typically supplied

on paralleling gear. The synch-scope
displays the relative relationship
between voltage phasors on the
generator to be paralleled and the
bus. If the generator is running slower
than the bus (less than 60 Hz) then the
needle on the scope will spin in the
counterclockwise direction. If it is
running faster, then it will rotate in
the clockwise direction. The greater
the frequency difference, the faster
is the rotation. It is important that the
generators are in phase before they
are paralleled. Severe damage will
occur if generators are paralleled
out-of-phase.
Generator Short-Circuit
Characteristics
If a short circuit is applied directly to
the output terminals of a synchronous
generator, it will produce an extremely
high current initially, gradually decaying
to a steady-state value. This change
is represented by a varying reactive
impedance. Three specific reactances
are used for short-circuit fault currents.
They are:
Subtransient reactance Xd, which
is used to determine the fault
current during the first 1 to 5 cycles
Transient reactance Xd, which is
used to determine the fault current
during the next 5 to 200 cycles
Synchronous reactance Xd, which
is used to determine the steadystate fault current
The subtransient reactance Xd will

range from a minimum of approximately 9% for a two-pole, wound-rotor
machine to approximately 32% for a
low-speed, salient-pole, hydro-generator.
The initial symmetrical fault current can
be as much as 12 times full load current.
Depending on the generator type,
the zero sequence impedance may be
less than the subtransient reactance
and the ground fault current substantially higher than the three-phase
short-circuit current. For example, a
2500 kVA, 480/277V, four-pole, 2/3 pitch
standby generator has a 0.1411 per
unit subtransient reactance Xd and
a 0.033 per unit zero sequence X o
reactance. The ground current is
approximately a third larger than the
three-phase fault current. The ground
fault current can be reduced to the
three-phase level by simply adding a
small reactance between the generator
neutral and ground while still being
considered solidly grounded.
The electric power system analysis
must be performed based on the worstcase operating conditions. Typically
this is when all sources are paralleled.
If the system can operate with both
the utility supply and generators in
parallel, then the equipment must be
rated for the combined fault current
plus motor contribution. If the generator
and utility will not be paralleled, then
both cases will need to be looked at
independently and the worst case used
for selecting the equipment ratings.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.2-5
Sheet 01 027
Generator Protection
Generator protection will vary and
depend on the size of the generator,
type of system and importance of the
generator. Generator sizes are defined
as: small1000 kVA maximum up
to 600V (500 kVA maximum when
above 600V); medium over 1000 kVA
to 12,500 kVA maximum regardless
of voltage; largefrom 12,500
50,000 kVA. The simplest is a single
generator system used to feed emergency and/or standby loads. In this
case, the generator is the only source
available when it is operating and
it must keep operating until the
normal source returns.
Figure 1.2-5 Part (A) shows minimum
recommended protection for a single
generator used as an emergency or
standby system. Phase and ground
time overcurrent protection (Device
51 and 51G) will provide protection for
external faults. For medium voltage
generators, a voltage controlled time
overcurrent relay (Device 51V) is
recommended for the phase protection as it can be set more sensitive
than standard overcurrent relays and
is less likely to false operate on normal
overloads. This scheme may not
provide adequate protection for
internal generator faults when no
other power source exists. Local
generator controllers may offer
additional protection for voltage
and frequency conditions outside
the generators capabilities.
Figure 1.2-5 Part (B) shows the
recommended protection for multiple,
isolated, medium voltage, small
generators. Additional protection
may be desired and could include
generator differential, reverse power,
and loss of field protection. Differential
protection (Device 87) can be accomplished with either a self-balancing
set of CTs as in Figure 1.2-6 or with
a percentage differential scheme as
in Figure 1.2-7 on Page 1.2-6. The
percentage differential scheme
offers the advantage of reducing the
possibility for false tripping due to
CT saturation. The self-balancing
scheme offers the advantages of
increased sensitivity, needing three
current transformers in lieu of six,
and the elimination of current
transformer external wiring from
the generator location to the generator
switchgear location.
ANSI/IEEE
Std 242-1986
ii
1
51
Alternate
Location
1
51V
32
40
1
2
3
51G
Gen
87
1
51
Preferred
Location
Gen
51G
(A)
(A) Single Isolated Generator on Low Voltage System

(B) Multiple Isolated Generator on Medium Voltage System
Figure 1.2-5. Typical Protective Relaying Scheme for Small Generators
(B)
6
7
8
9
50/5A
87-1
50/5A
87-2
50/5A
87-3
10
11
12
13
Gen
14
15
16
Figure 1.2-6. Self-Balancing Generator

Differential Relay Scheme
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.2-6

August 2013
Sheet 01 028
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reverse power protection (Device 32)

is used to prevent the generator
from being motored. Motoring could
damage (with other hazards) the prime
mover. A steam turbine could overheat
and fail. A diesel or gas engine could
either catch fire or explode. A steam
turbine can typically withstand
approximately 3% reverse power
where a diesel engine can withstand
up to 25% reverse power.
Loss of field protection (Device 40) is
needed when generators are operating
in parallel with one another or the
power grid. When a synchronous
generator loses its field, it will continue
to generate power as an induction
generator obtaining its excitation from
the other machines on the system.
During this condition, the rotor will
quickly overheat due to the slip
frequency currents induced in it. Loss
of excitation in one machine could
jeopardize the operation of the other
machines beyond their capability and
the entire system.
Grounding
Resistor
51G
87
01
PC
R1
R1
02
R2
Gen
OC
R2
03
87G
R3
R3
52
8
9
To Main Bus
10
11
OC = Operating coil
PC = Permissive coil
Figure 1.2-7. Generator Percentage Differential Relay (Phase Scheme)

and Ground Differential Scheme Using a Directional Relay
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.2-7
Sheet 01 029
Typical protection for larger generators

is shown in Figure 1.2-8. It adds
phase unbalance and field ground
fault protection. Phase unbalance
(Device 46) or negative sequence
overcurrent protection prevents the
generators rotor from overheating
damage. Unbalanced loads, fault
conditions or open phasing will
produce a negative sequence current
to flow. The unbalanced currents
induce double system frequency
currents in the rotor, which quickly
causes rotor overheating. Serious
damage will occur to the generator if
the unbalance is allowed to persist.
i
3
81U/O
1
27/59
Many modern protective relays are

microprocessor-based and provide a
full complement of generator protection
functions in a single package. The cost
per protection function has been
drastically reduced such that it is
feasible to provide more complete
protection even to smaller generators.
40
51V
3
Other protection functions such as

under/overvoltage (Device 27/59)
could be applied to any size generator.
The voltage regulator typically maintains the output voltage within its
desired output range. This protection
can provide backup protection in case
the voltage regulator fails. Under/over
frequency protection (Device 81U/81O)
could be used for backup protection
for the speed control. Sync check
relays (Device 25) are typically applied
as a breaker permissive close function
where generators are paralleled.
ii
87B
1
32
46
1
87
87G
60
Voltage Regulator and
Metering Circuits
64
1
49
7
Gen
E
8
51G
9
10
11
Figure 1.2-8. Typical Protective Relaying Scheme for Large Generator
12
IEEE ANSI 1547 provides recommended practices for utility inter-tie

protection. If the system has closedtransition or paralleling capability,
additional protection may be required
by the utility. Typically, no additional
protection is required if the generator
is paralleled to the utility for a maximum
of 100 msec or less. Systems that
offer soft transfer, peak shaving or
co-generation will require additional
utility inter-tie protection. The protection
could include directional overcurrent
and power relays and even transfer
trip schemes. Please consult your local
utility for specific requirements.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.2-8

August 2013
Sheet 01 030
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Generator Set Sizing

and Ratings
Many factors must be considered
when determining the proper size or
electrical rating of an electrical power
generator set. The engine or prime
mover is sized to provide the actual
or real power in kW, as well as speed
(frequency) control through the use
of an engine governor. The generator
is sized to supply the kVA needed at
startup and during normal running
operation and it also provides voltage
control using a brushless exciter and
voltage regulator. Together the engine
and generator provide the energy
necessary to supply electrical loads
in many different applications
encountered in todays society.
The generator set must be able to
supply the starting and running
electrical load. It must be able to
pick up and start all motor loads and
low power factor loads, and recover
without excessive voltage dip or
extended recovery time. Nonlinear
loads like variable frequency drives,
uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
systems and switching power supplies
also require attention because the SCR
switching causes voltage and current
waveform distortion and harmonics.
The harmonics generate additional
heat in the generator windings, and
the generator may need to be upsized
to accommodate this. The type of
fuel (diesel, natural gas, propane, etc.)
used is important as it is a factor in
determining generator set transient
response. It is also necessary to
determine the load factor or average
power consumption of the generator
set. This is typically defined as the load
(kW) x time (hrs. while under that
particular load) / total running time.
When this load factor or average
power is taken into consideration
with peak demand requirements
and the other operating parameters
mentioned above, the overall electrical
rating of the genset can be determined. Other items to consider include
the unique installation, ambient, and
site requirements of the project. These
will help to determine the physical
configuration of the overall system.
Typical rating definitions for diesel

gensets are: standby, prime plus 10,
continuous and load management
(paralleled with or isolated from
utility). Any diesel genset can have
several electrical ratings depending
on the number of hours of operation
per year and the ratio of electrical
load/genset rating when in operation.
The same diesel genset can have a
standby rating of 2000 kW at 0.8 power
factor (pf) and a continuous rating of
1825 kW at 0.8 pf. The lower continuous rating is due to the additional
hours of operation and higher load
that the continuous genset must
carry. These additional requirements
put more stress on the engine and
generator and therefore the rating
is decreased to maintain longevity
of the equipment.
Different generator set manufacturers
use basically the same diesel genset
electrical rating definitions and these
are based on international diesel
fuel stop power standards from
organizations like ISO, DIN and others.
A standby diesel genset rating is
typically defined as supplying varying
electrical loads for the duration of a
power outage with the load normally
connected to utility, genset operating
<100 hours per year and no overload
capability. A prime plus 10 rating is
typically defined as supplying varying
electrical loads for the duration of a
power outage with the load normally
connected to utility, genset operating
500 hours per year and overload
capability of 10% above its rating for
1 hour out of 12. A continuous rating
is typically defined as supplying
unvarying electrical loads (i.e., base
loaded) for an unlimited time. The load
management ratings apply to gensets
in parallel operation with the utility
or isolated/islanded from utility and
these ratings vary in usability from
<200 hours per year to unlimited
usage. Refer to generator set manufacturers for further definitions on load
management ratings, load factor or
average power consumption, peak
demand and how these ratings are
typically applied. Even though there is
some standardization of these ratings
across the manufacturers, there also
exists some uniqueness with regard to
how each manufacturer applies their
generator sets.
Electrical rating definitions for natural

gas powered gensets are typically
defined as standby or continuous with
definitions similar to those mentioned
above for diesels. Natural gas gensets
recover more slowly than diesel
gensets when subjected to block
loads. Diesel engines have a much
more direct path from the engine governor and fuel delivery system to the
combustion chamber and this results
in a very responsive engine-generator.
A natural gas engine is challenged
with air-fuel flow dynamics and a
much more indirect path from the
engine governor (throttle actuator)
and fuel delivery system (natural
gas pressure regulator, fuel valve and
actuator, carburetor mixer, aftercooler,
intake manifold) to the combustion
chamber and this results in a
less responsive engine-generator.
Diesel gensets recover about twice
as fast as natural gas gensets.
For the actual calculations involved
for sizing a genset, there are readily
accessible computer software programs
that are available on the genset manufacturers Internet sites or from the
manufacturers dealers or distributors.
These programs are used to quickly
and accurately size generator sets for
their application. The programs take
into consideration the many different
parameters discussed above, including
the size and type of the electrical loads
(resistive, inductive, SCR, etc.), reduced
voltage soft starting devices (RVSS),
motor types, voltage, fuel type, site
conditions, ambient conditions and
other variables. The software will
optimize the starting sequences of the
motors for the least amount of voltage
dip and determine the starting kVA
needed from the genset. It also provides
transient response data, including
voltage dip magnitude and recovery
duration. If the transient response is
unacceptable, then design changes can
be considered, including oversizing
the generator to handle the additional
kVAR load, adding RVSS devices to
reduce the inrush current, improving
system power factor and other methods.
The computer software programs are
quite flexible in that they allow changes
to the many different variables and
parameters to achieve an optimum
design. The software allows, for
example, minimizing voltage dips
or using paralleled gensets vs. a
single genset.
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.2-9
Sheet 01 031
Genset Sizing Guidelines

Some conservative rules of thumb
for genset sizing include:
1. Oversize genset 2025%
for reserve capacity and for
motor starting.
2. Oversize gensets for unbalanced
loading or low power factor
running loads.
3. Use 1/2 hp per kW for motor loads.
4. For variable frequency drives,
oversize the genset by at
least 40%.
5. For UPS systems, oversize the
genset by 40% for 6 pulse and
15% for 6 pulse with input filters
or 12 pulse.
6. Always start the largest motor
first when stepping loads.
For basic sizing of a generator system,
the following example could be used:
Generator Set Installation

and Site Considerations
There are many different installation
parameters and site conditions
that must be considered to have a
successful generator set installation.
The following is a partial list of areas
to consider when conducting this
design. Some of these installation
parameters include:
Step 1: Calculate Running Amperes
Motor loads:
200 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156A
100 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78A
60 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48A
Lighting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68A
Miscellaneous loads . . . . . . . . . . 95A
Running amperes . . . . . . . . . . . 445A
Foundation type (crushed rock,

concrete, dirt, wood, separate
concrete inertia pad, etc.)
Foundation to genset vibration
dampening (spring type, cork
and rubber, etc.)
Noise attenuation (radiator fan
mechanical noise, exhaust noise,
air intake noise)
Combustion and cooling air
requirements
Exhaust backpressure requirements
Emissions permitting
Delivery and rigging requirements
Genset derating due to high
altitudes or excessive ambient
temperatures
Hazardous waste considerations

for fuel, antifreeze, engine oil
Meeting local building and
electrical codes
Genset exposure (coastal
conditions, dust, chemicals, etc.)
Properly sized starting systems
(compressed air, batteries
and charger)
Allowing adequate space for
installation of the genset and for
maintenance (i.e., air filter removal,
oil changing, general genset
inspection, etc)
Flex connections on all systems that
are attached to the genset and a
rigid structure (fuel piping, foundation vibration isolators, exhaust, air
intake, control wiring, power cables,
radiator flanges/duct work, etc.)
Diesel fuel day tank systems
(pumps, return piping)
Fuel storage tank (double walled,
fire codes) and other parameters
Please see the generator set manufacturers application and installation

guidelines for proper application
and operation of their equipment.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Step 2: Calculating Starting Amperes

Using 1.25 Multiplier
Motor loads:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60A
Lighting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68A
Miscellaneous loads . . . . . . . . . . 95A
Starting amperes . . . . . . . . . . . 516A
12
Step 3: Selecting kVA of Generator
15
13
14
Running kVA =
(445A x 480V x 1.732)/
1000 = 370 kVA
Starting kVA =
(516A x 480V x 1.732)/
1000 = 428 kVA
16
17
Solution
Generator must have a minimum
starting capability of 428 kVA and
minimum running capability of 370 kVA.
18
Figure 1.2-9. Typical Genset Installation
Note: Courtesy of Caterpillar, Inc.
Also, please see section Factors

Governing Voltage Drop on
Page 1.3-21 for further discussion
on generator loading and reduced
voltage starting techniques for motors.
CA08104001E
19
20
21

August 2013
Sheet 01032
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-1
Sheet 01 033
Systems Analysis
A major consideration in the
design of a distribution system is to
ensure that it provides the required
quality of service to the various
loads. This includes serving each
load under normal conditions and,
under abnormal conditions, providing
the desired protection to service
and system apparatus so that
interruptions of service are minimized
consistent with good economic and
mechanical design.
Under normal conditions, the important technical factors include voltage
profile, losses, load flow, effects of
motor starting, service continuity and
reliability. The prime considerations
under faulted conditions are apparatus
protection, fault isolation and service
continuity. During the system preliminary planning stage, before selection
of the distribution apparatus, several
distribution systems should be analyzed
and evaluated, including both economic
and technical factors. During this stage,
if system size or complexity warrant,
it may be appropriate to provide a
thorough review of each system under
both normal and abnormal conditions.
The principal types of computer

programs used to provide system
studies include:
Short circuitidentify three-phase

and line-to-ground fault currents
and system impedances
Arc flashcalculates arc flash
energy levels, which leads to the
selection of personal protective
equipment (PPE)
Circuit breaker dutyidentify
asymmetrical fault current based
on X/R ratio
Protective device coordination
determine characteristics and settings of medium voltage protective
relays and fuses, and entire low
voltage circuit breaker and fuse
coordination
Load flowsimulate normal
load conditions of system
voltages, power factor, line
and transformer loadings
Motor startingidentify system
voltages, motor terminal voltage,
motor accelerating torque, and
motor accelerating time when
starting large motors
Short-circuit calculations define

momentary and steady-state fault
currents for LV and MV breaker and
fuse duty and bus bracings at any
selected location in the system, and also
determine the effect on the system
after removal of utility power due to
breaker operation or scheduled power
outages. Computer software programs
can identify the fault current at any
bus, in every line or source connected
to the faulted bus, or to it and every
adjacent bus, or to it and every bus
that is one and two buses away, or
currents in every line or source in the
system. The results of these calculations
permit optimizing service to the loads
while properly applying distribution
apparatus within their intended limits.
The following additional studies
should be considered depending
upon the type and complexity of the
distribution system, the type of facility
and the type of loads to be connected
to the system:
Harmonic analysis
Transient stability
Insulation coordination
Grounding study
Switching transient
Eatons Electrical Services & Systems

division can provide the studies
enumerated above.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.3-2

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 034
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Short-Circuit Currents
General
The amount of current available in a
short-circuit fault is determined by the
capacity of the system voltage sources
and the impedances of the system,
including the fault. Voltage sources
include the power supply (utility or
on-site generation) plus all rotating
machines connected to the system at
the time of the fault. A fault may be
either an arcing or bolted fault. In an
arcing fault, part of the circuit voltage is
consumed across the fault and the total
fault current is somewhat smaller than
for a bolted fault, so the latter is the
worst condition, and therefore is the
value sought in the fault calculations.
Basically, the short-circuit current is
determined by applying Ohms Law
to an equivalent circuit consisting of
a constant voltage source and a timevarying impedance. A time-varying
impedance is used in order to account
for the changes in the effective voltages
of the rotating machines during the
fault. In an AC system, the resulting
short-circuit current starts out higher
in magnitude than the final steadystate value and asymmetrical (due
to the DC offset) about the X-axis.
The current then decays toward a
lower symmetrical steady-state value.
The time-varying characteristic of the
impedance accounts for the symmetrical decay in current. The ratio of the
reactive and resistive components (X/R
ratio) accounts for the DC decay, see
Figure 1.3-1. The fault current consists
of an exponentially decreasing directcurrent component superimposed
upon a decaying alternating-current.
The rate of decay of both the DC and
AC components depends upon the
ratio of reactance to resistance (X/R)
of the circuit. The greater this ratio,
the longer the current remains higher
than the steady-state value that it
would eventually reach.
The total fault current is not symmetrical
with respect to the time-axis because
of the direct-current component,
hence it is called asymmetrical current.
The DC component depends on the
point on the voltage wave at which
the fault is initiated.
See Table 1.3-2 for multiplying factors
that relate the rms asymmetrical value
of total current to the rms symmetrical
value, and the peak asymmetrical
value of total current to the rms
symmetrical value.
The AC component is not constant

if rotating machines are connected
to the system because the impedance
of this apparatus is not constant. The
rapid variation of motor and generator
impedance is due to these factors:
Subtransient reactance (x d" ), determines fault current during the first
cycle, and after about 6 cycles this
value increases to the transient reactance. It is used for the calculation
of the momentary interrupting and/or
momentary withstand duties of
equipment and/or system.
Transient reactance (x d
' ), which determines fault current after about 6 cycles
and this value in 1/2 to 2 seconds
increases to the value of the synchronous reactance. It is used in the setting
of the phase OC relays of generators
and medium voltage circuit breakers.
Synchronous reactance (xd ), which
determines fault current after steadystate condition is reached. It has no
effect as far as short-circuit calculations
are concerned, but is useful in the
determination of relay settings.
Transformer impedance, in percent, is
defined as that percent of rated primary
voltage that must be applied to the
transformer to produce rated current
flowing in the secondary, with secondary shorted through zero resistance.
Therefore, assuming the primary
voltage can be sustained (generally
referred to as an infinite or unlimited
supply), the maximum current a transformer can deliver to a fault condition is
the quantity of (100 divided by percent
impedance) times the transformer
rated secondary current. Limiting the

power source fault capacity will thereby
reduce the maximum fault current from
the transformer.
The electric network that determines
the short-circuit current consists of an
AC driving voltage equal to the pre-fault
system voltage and an impedance
corresponding to that observed when
looking back into the system from the
fault location. In medium and high
voltage work, it is generally satisfactory
to regard reactance as the entire
impedance; resistance may be
neglected. However, this is normally
permissible only if the X/R ratio of the
medium voltage system is equal to or
more than 25. In low voltage (1000V
and below) calculations, it is usually
worthwhile to attempt greater accuracy
by including resistance with reactance
in dealing with impedance. It is for this
reason, plus ease of manipulating the
various impedances of cables and
buses and transformers of the low
voltage circuits, that computer studies
are recommended before final selection
of apparatus and system arrangements.
When evaluating the adequacy
of short-circuit ratings of medium
voltage circuit breakers and fuses,
both the rms symmetrical value and
asymmetrical value of the short-circuit
current should be determined.
For low voltage circuit breakers and
fuses, the rms symmetrical value
should be determined along with
either: the X/R ratio of the fault
at the device or the asymmetrical
short- circuit current.
Total CurrentA Wholly Offset

Asymmetrical Alternating Wave
3.0
2.5
rms Value of Total Current

Alternating Component Symmetrical Wave
rms Value of
Alternating Component
2.0
Scale of Curent Values
1.5
1.0
0.5
1
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
Direct ComponentThe Axis

Time in Cycles of
of Symmetrical Wave
a 60 Hz Wave
2.0
Figure 1.3-1. Structure of an Asymmetrical Current Wave

CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-3
Sheet 01 035
Fault Current Waveform Relationships
1.
Ip = I 2
Ip
----- = 2
I
Peak multiplication factor =
t
------------
1 + e X R
2. I rms asym = I 1 + 2e
Based on a 60 Hz system and t = 1/2 cycle

(ANSI/IEEE C37.13.1990/10.1.4)
The following Figure 1.3-2 describes

the relationship between fault
current peak values, rms symmetrical
values and rms asymmetrical values
depending on the calculated X/R ratio.
The table is based on the following
general formulas:
2 60
---------------120
---------------
1 + e X R =
2 1 + e
( 2 ) ( 2 60 )
------------------------------120 -----------------------------XR
I rms asym
------------------------------ = 1 + 2e
I
rms multiplication factor =
ii
----------
XR
1 + 2e
1
2
2
-----------XR
Example for X/R =15
2t
--------------XR
Peak mf = 2 1 + e
Where:
-------
15
4
=
2.5612
I = Symmetrical rms current

Ip = Peak current
rms mf = 1 + 2e
2
---------15
1.5217
e = 2.718
=2f
f = Frequency in Hz
t = Time in seconds
9
10
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.3
O
FA
CT
1.7
11
12
13
14
1.6
LT
IP
LI
2.0
1.5
PE
AK
1.9
1.8
ON
OR
CT
FA
1.4
TI
ICA
1.7
1.3
L
TIP
UL
M
MS
1.6
1.2
1.1
1.5
1.4
1.5
2.5
8 9 10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60 70 80 90 100
RMS MULTIPLICATION FACTOR =
CA
TI
2.1
PEAK MULTIPLICATION FACTOR =
1.8
2.2
RMS SYMMETRICAL
rms Asym = DC 2 + rms Sym2

with DC Value
Taken at Current Peak
Based Upon:
RMS MAXIMUM ASYMMETRICAL
2.7
RMS SYMMETRICAL
PEAK MAXIMUM ASYMMETRICAL
2.8
15
16
17
18
19
CIRCUIT X/R RATIO (TAN PHASE)
20
Figure 1.3-2. Relation of X/R Ratio to Multiplication Factor
21
CA08104001E
1.3-4

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 036
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

The calculation of asymmetrical
currents is a laborious procedure since
the degree of asymmetry is not the
same on all three phases. It is common
practice for medium voltage systems,
to calculate the rms symmetrical fault
current, with the assumption being
made that the DC component has
decayed to zero, and then apply
a multiplying factor to obtain the first
half-cycle rms asymmetrical current,
which is called the momentary
current. For medium voltage systems
(defined by IEEE as greater than 1000V
up to 69,000V) the multiplying factor
is established by NEMA and ANSI
standards depending upon the
operating speed of the breaker. For
low voltage systems, short-circuit
study software usually calculates the
symmetrical fault current and the
faulted system X/R ratio using ANSI
guidelines. If the X/R ratio is within the
standard, and the breaker interrupting
current is under the symmetrical fault
value, the breaker is properly rated.
If the X/R ratio is higher than ANSI
standards, the study applies a multiplying factor to the symmetrical
calculated value (based on the
X/R value of the system fault) and
compares that value to the breaker
symmetrical value to assess if it is
properly rated. In the past, especially
using manual calculations, a multiplying factor of 1.17 (based on the use
of an X/R ratio of 6.6 representing
a source short-circuit power factor
of 15%) was used to calculate the
asymmetrical current. These values
take into account that medium voltage
breakers are rated on maximum
asymmetry and low voltage breakers
are rated average asymmetry.
Synchronous motorsuse 5.0 times

motor full load current (impedance
value of 20%).
When the motor load is not known,
the following assumptions generally
are made:
208Y/120V Systems
Assume 50% lighting and 50%

motor load
Assume motor feedback contribution of twice full load current of

transformer
or
or
Medium Voltage Motors

If known, use actual values otherwise
use the values indicated for the same
type of motor.
Calculation Methods
The following pages describe various
methods of calculating short-circuit
currents for both medium and low
voltage systems. A summary of
the types of methods and types of
calculations is as follows:
240/480/600V Three-Phase, Three-Wire or

Four-Wire Systems
Assume 100% motor load
or
Assume motors 25% synchronous

and 75% induction
or
Assume motor feedback contribution of four times full load current

of transformer
480Y/277V Systems in Commercial Buildings
Assume 50% induction motor load

or
Assume motor feedback contribution of two times full load current

of transformer or source
To determine the motor contribution

during the first half-cycle fault current,
when individual motor horsepower
load is known, the subtransient
reactances found in the IEEE Red Book
should be used in the calculations.
When the system motor load is
unknown, the following assumptions
generally are made:
Induction motorsuse 4.0 times

motor full load current (impedance
value of 25%).
Note: For motors fed through adjustable

frequency drives or solid-state soft starters,
there is no contribution to fault current, unless
1) they have an internal run contactor or
2) they have a bypass contactor.
Medium voltage
switchgearexact
method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-5
Medium voltage
switchgearquick
check table . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-7
Medium voltage
switchgear
Example 1verify
ratings of breakers. . . . . Page 1.3-8
Medium voltage
switchgear
Example 2verify
ratings of breakers
with rotating
loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-9
Medium voltage
switchgear Example 3
verify ratings of
breakers with
generators . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-10
Medium voltage
fusesexact method. . . Page 1.3-11
Power breakers
asymmetry
derating factors . . . . . . . Page 1.3-11
Molded-case
breakersasymmetry
derating factors . . . . . . . Page 1.3-12
Short-circuit
calculations
short cut method
for a system . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-13
Short-circuit
calculationsshort
cut method for
end of cable . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-15
Short-circuit
calculations
short cut method
for end of cable
chart method . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-16
Short-circuit currents
chart of transformers
3003750 kVA . . . . . . . . . Page 1.5-9
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

System Analysis
1.3-5
Sheet 01 037

for Specific Equipment
Exact Method
The purpose of the fault current calculations is to determine the fault current
at the location of a circuit breaker, fuse
or other fault interrupting device in
order to select a device adequate for the
calculated fault current or to check the
thermal and momentary ratings of noninterrupting devices. When the devices
to be used are ANSI-rated devices, the
fault current must be calculated and the
device selected as per ANSI standards.
The calculation of available fault current
and system X/R rating is also used to
verify adequate bus bar bracing and
momentary withstand ratings of
devices such as contactors.
Medium Voltage VCP-W

Metal-Clad Switchgear
The applicable ANSI Standards, C37
is the latest applicable edition. The
following is a review of the meaning
of the ratings. (See Tab 5, Section 5.4.)
a voltage = maximum rated voltage

divided by K (for example, 4.76/1.24 =
3.85). If this breaker is applied in a
system rated at 2.4 kV, the calculated
fault current must be less than 36 kA.
For example, consider the following case:

Assume a 12.47 kV system with 20,000A
symmetrical available. In order to
determine if an Eaton Type 150 VCP-W
500 vacuum breaker is suitable for this
application, check the following:
From Table 5.4-1B in Tab 5, Section 5.4
under column Rated Maximum
Voltage V = 15 kV, under column
Rated short-circuit Current I = 18 kA,
Rated Voltage Range Factor K = 1.3.
Test 1 for V/Vo x I or 15 kV/12.47 kV x
18 kA = 21.65; also check K x I (which
is shown in the column headed
Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting
Capability) or 1.3 x 18 kA = 23.4 kA.
Because both of these numbers are
greater than the available system fault
K-Rated Voltage Factor

The rated voltage divided by this factor
determines the system kV a breaker can
be applied up to the short-circuit kVA
rating calculated by the formula
3 Rated SC Current Rated Max. Voltage
Note: Interrupting capabilities of some of

todays vacuum breakers may have K = 1,
whereby the interrupting current is constant
across its entire operating range.
Rated Short-Circuit Current

This is the symmetrical rms value of
current that the breaker can interrupt
at rated maximum voltage. It should
be noted that the product 3 x 4.76 x
29,000 = 239,092 kVA is less than the
nominal 250,000 kVA listed. This rating
(29,000A) is also the base quantity
that all the related capabilities are
referred to.

Capability
This is expressed in rms symmetrical
amperes or kiloamperes and is K x I
rated; 29,000 x 1.24 = 35,960 rounded
to 36 kA.
This is the rms symmetrical current
that the breaker can interrupt down to
CA08104001E
Note: If the system available fault current

were 22,000A symmetrical, this breaker
could not be used even though the
Capability is greater than 22,000 because
Test 1 calculation is not satisfied.
For approximate calculations, Table 1.3-1

provides typical values of % reactance
(X) and X/R values for various rotating
equipment and transformers. For simplification purposes, the transformer
impedance (Z) has been assumed to be
primarily reactance (X). In addition, the
resistance (R) for these simplified calculations has been ignored. For detailed
calculations, the values from the IEEE
Red Book Standard 141, for rotating
machines, and ANSI C57 and/or C37
for transformers should be used.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Table 1.3-1. Reactance X

System
Component
Reactance X Used for
Typical Values and Range

Short-Circuit Close and Latch on Component Base
Duty
(Momentary)
% Reactance X/R Ratio
Two-pole turbo generator

Four-pole turbo generator
X
X
X
X
9 (714)
15 (1217)
80 (40120)
80 (40120)
Hydro generator with damper wedges

and synchronous condensers
20 (1332)
30 (1060)
Hydro generator without damper windings
0.75X
0.75X
16 (1650)
30 (1060)
The Rated Maximum Voltage

This designates the upper limit of
design and operation of a circuit
breaker. For example, a circuit breaker
with a 4.76 kV rated maximum voltage
cannot be used in a 4.8 kV system.
current of 20,000A, the breaker is

acceptable (assumes the breakers
momentary and fault close rating is
also acceptable).
All synchronous motors
1.5X
1.0X
20 (1335)
30 (1060)
Induction motors above 1000 hp, 1800 rpm

and above 250 hp, 3600 rpm
1.5X
1.0X
17 (1525)
30 (1540)
All other induction motors 50 hp and above 3.0X
1.2X
17 (1525)
15 (240)
Induction motors below 50 hp and

all single-phase motors
Neglect
Neglect
Distribution system from remote

transformers
As specified
or calculated
15 (515)
Current limiting reactors
As specified
or calculated
80 (40120)
OA to 10 MVA, 69 kV
FOA 1230 MVA
FOA 40100 MVA
8.0
8.0 to 10.5
Depends on
primary
windings BIL
rating
11
12
13
14
Transformers
OA to 10 MVA, above 69 kV
10
18 (724)
18 (724)
20 (730)
38 (3244)
15
16
Table 1.3-2. Typical System X/R Ratio Range (for Estimating Purposes)
17
Type of Circuit
X/R Range
Remote generation through other types of circuits such as transformers rated 10 MVA
or smaller for each three-phase bank, transmission lines, distribution feeders, etc.
15 or less
Remote generation connected through transformer rated 10 MVA to 100 MVA

for each three-phase bank, where the transformers provide 90% or more
of the total equivalent impedance to the fault point
1540
Remote generation connected through transformers rated 100 MVA or larger

for each three-phase bank where the transformers provide 90% or more
of the total equivalent impedance to the fault point
3050
19
Synchronous machines connected through transformers rated 25100 MVA

for each three-phase bank
3050
20
Synchronous machines connected through transformers rated 100 MVA and larger
4060
Synchronous machines connected directly to the bus or through reactors
40120
18
21
1.3-6

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 038
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The Close and Latch Capability

This is also a related quantity
expressed in rms asymmetrical
amperes by 1.6 x maximum
symmetrical interrupting capability.
For example, 1.6 x 36 = 57.6 or 58 kA,
or 1.6 K x rated short-circuit current.
Another way of expressing the close
and latch rating is in terms of the peak
current, which is the instantaneous
value of the current at the crest. ANSI
Standard C37.09 indicates that the
ratio of the peak to rms asymmetrical
value for any asymmetry of 100% to
20% (percent asymmetry is defined as
the ratio of DC component of the fault
in per unit to 2 ) varies not more than
2% from a ratio of 1.69. Therefore,
the close and latch current expressed
in terms of the peak amperes is = 1.6 x
1.69 x K x rated short-circuit current.
In the calculation of faults for the purposes of breaker selection, the rotating
machine impedances specified in ANSI
Standard C37.010 Article 5.4.1 should
be used. The value of the impedances
and their X/R ratios should be obtained
from the equipment manufacturer. At
initial short-circuit studies, data from
manufacturers is not available. Typical
values of impedances and their X/R
ratios are given in Table 1.3-1.
The steps in the calculation of fault

currents and breaker selection are
described hereinafter:
Step 1: Collect the X and R data of the
circuit elements. Convert to a common
kVA and voltage base. If the reactances
and resistances are given either in
ohms or per unit on a different voltage
or kVA base, all should be changed
to the same kVA and voltage base.
This caution does not apply where
the base voltages are the same as
the transformation ratio.
Step 2: Construct the sequence
networks and connect properly for
the type of fault under consideration.
Use the X values required by ANSI
Standard C37.010 for the interrupting
duty value of the short-circuit current.
Step 3: Reduce the reactance network

to an equivalent reactance. Call this
reactance XI.
Step 4: Set up the same network for
resistance values.
Step 5: Reduce the resistance network
to an equivalent resistance. Call this
resistance RI. The above calculations
of XI and RI may be calculated by
several computer programs.
Step 6: Calculate the E/XI value, where
E is the prefault value of the voltage at
the point of fault nominally assumed
1.0 pu.
X
Step 7: Determine X/R = ------I as
RI
previously calculated.
Step 8: Go to the proper curve for
the type of fault under consideration
(three-phase, phase-to-phase, phaseto-ground), type of breaker at the location (2, 3, 5 or 8 cycles), and contact
parting time to determine the multiplier to the calculated E/XI.
See Figures 1.3-3, 1.3-4 and 1.3-5 for
5-cycle breaker multiplying factors.
Use Figure 1.3-5 if the short circuit is
fed predominantly from generators
removed from the fault by two or more
130
130
130
120
120
120
110
110
19
20
21
80
80
40
3
TIME
PA
RT
ING
60
60
70
50
50
40
40
NT
AC
NT
AC
T
50
70
CO
60
Ratio X/R
PAR
TIN
G
70
Ratio X/R
TIME
80
90
12
90
10
90
30
30
18
100
CO
17
Ratio X/R
14
16
100
100
13
15
110
12
11
The ANSI Standard C37.010 allows the

use of the X values only in determining the E/X value of a fault current. The
R values are used to determine the X/R
ratio, in order to apply the proper
multiplying factor, to account for the
total fault clearing time, asymmetry,
and decrement of the fault current.
5-CYCLE
BREAKER
30
5-CYCLE
BREAKER
20
20
20
10
10
10
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Multiplying Factors for E / X Amperes
Figure 1.3-3. Three-phase Fault Multiplying

Factors that Include Effects of AC and
DC Decrement
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Figure 1.3-4. Line-to-Ground Fault Multiplying

Factors that Include Effects of AC and
DC Decrement
5-CYCLE
BREAKER
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Figure 1.3-5. Three-phase and Line-to-Ground

Fault Multiplying Factors that Include Effects
of DC Decrement Only
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-7
Sheet 01 039
transformations or the per unit reactance external to the generation is 1.5

times or more than the subtransient
reactance of the generation on a common base. Also use Figure 1.3-5 where
the fault is supplied by a utility only.
Step 9: Interrupting duty short-circuit
current = E/XI x MFx = E/X2.
Step 10: Construct the sequence
(positive, negative and zero) networks
properly connected for the type of
fault under consideration. Use the
X values required by ANSI Standard
C37.010 for the Close and Latch
duty value of the short-circuit current.
Step 11: Reduce the network to an
equivalent reactance. Call the reactance X. Calculate E/X x 1.6 if the
breaker close and latch capability is
given in rms amperes or E/X x 2.7 if
the breaker close and latch capability
is given in peak or crest amperes.
Step 12: Select a breaker whose:
Application Quick Check Table
The ANSI standards do not require the

inclusion of resistances in the calculation of the required interrupting and
close and latch capabilities. Thus the
calculated values are conservative.
However, when the capabilities of
existing switchgears are investigated,
the resistances should be included.
For application of circuit breakers in a

radial system supplied from a single
source transformer. Short-circuit duty
was determined using E/X amperes
and 1.0 multiplying factor for X/R ratio
of 15 or less and 1.25 multiplying
factor for X/R ratios in the range of
15 to 40.
For single line-to-ground faults, the

symmetrical interrupting capability
is 1.15 x the symmetrical interrupting
capability at any operating voltage,
but not to exceed the maximum
symmetrical capability of the breaker.
Application Above 3,300 ft (1,000m)

The rated one-minute power frequency
withstand voltage, the impulse withstand voltage, the continuous current
rating, and the maximum voltage rating
must be multiplied by the appropriate
correction factors below to obtain
modified ratings that must equal or
exceed the application requirements.
Section 5 of ANSI C37 provides

further guidance for medium voltage
breaker application.
Reclosing Duty
ANSI Standard C37.010 indicates the
reduction factors to use when circuit
breakers are used as reclosers. Eaton
VCP-W breakers are listed at 100%
rating factor for reclosing.
Note: Intermediate values may be obtained

by interpolation.
b.
See Table 6.0-1, Tab 6.

Where:
I
= Rated short-circuit current
Vmax = Rated maximum voltage
of the breaker
VD
KI
Operating Voltage
kV
Motor Load
2.4
100%
= Actual system voltage

= Maximum symmetrical
interrupting capacity
c. E/X x 1.6 rms closing and

latching capability of the breaker
and/or
E/X x 2.7 Crest closing and
latching capability of the breaker.
Altitude in
Feet (Meters)
Correction Factor
Current
Voltage
3300 (1006) (and below)

5000 (1524)
10,000 (3048)
1.00
0.99
0.96
1.00
0.95
0.80
4.16
1.5
2
2.5
2.5
3
3
3.75
3.75
5
5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
12
12
15
15
20
20
20
25
30
3
4
5
6
7
8
12
13.8
11
50 VCP-W 250
12 kA
50 VCP-W 250
36 kA
50 VCP-W 350
49 kA
50 VCP-W 250
10.1 kA
150 VCP-W 500

23 kA
150 VCP-W 500

22.5 kA
150 VCP-W 500

19.6 kA
12
13
50 VCP-W 250
33.2 kA
14
50 VCP-W 350
46.9 kA
75 VCP-W 500
41.3 kA
Breaker Type and

symmetrical interrupting capacity
at the operating voltage
50
10
6.6
0%
1
1.5
2
Table 1.3-4. Application Quick Check Table

Source
Transformer
MVA Rating
ii
Table 1.3-3. Altitude Derating
a. Maximum voltage rating exceeds

the operating voltage of the system:
V max
E
------- I ------------- KI
Vo
X2
15
150 VCP-W 750
35 kA
150 VCP-W 750

30.4 kA
16
150 VCP-W 1000

46.3 kA
150 VCP-W 1000

40.2 kA
17
Transformer impedance 6.5% or more, all other transformer impedances are 5.5% or more.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.3-8

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 040
i
ii
1
2
Application on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis
For Three-Phase Fault
Example 1Fault Calculations
EI 3-Phase = ---X
Given a circuit breaker interrupting and momentary rating in the table below,
verify the adequacy of the ratings for a system without motor loads, as shown.
Table 1.3-5. Short-Circuit Duty
Type
Breaker
V Max.
50VCPW250
4.76 kV
Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability

at V Max.
Max. KI
29 kA
36 kA
36 kA
at 4.16 kV Oper. Voltage
4.76
----------- (29) = 33.2 kA I1
4.16
LG symmetrical interrupting capability
Close and Latch or

Momentary
58 kA I3
4
5
Check capabilities I1, I2 and I3 on the following utility system where there is no
motor contribution to short circuit.
7
8
On 13.8 kV System, 3.75 MVA Base

13.8 kV
X
3.75 MVA- = 0.01 pu or 1%

Z = -------------------------------375 MVA
= 15
2
2
2
2X
Z = X + R = R -------2- + 1
R
375 MVA
V
A
Available
Z - = --------------1 - = ----------------1 - = 0.066%

R = ---------------------2
15.03
266
X
-------- + 1
9
10
13.8 kV
11
12
13
XX = ---( R ) = 15 (0.066) = .99%

R
3750 kVA
V
Transformer Standard 5.5% Impedance

has a 7.5% Manufacturing Tolerance
4.16 kV
5.50 Standard Impedance

0.41 (7.5% Tolerance)
Transformer Z =
5.09%
50VPC-W250
I
I 3-Phase = ----BX
where X is per unit reactance
IB is base current
1.15 (33.2) = 38.2 kA I2
Note: Interrupting capabilities I1 and I2 at operating voltage must not exceed maximum
symmetrical interrupting capability Kl.
where X is ohms per phase and E is

the highest typical line-to-neutral
operating voltage or
14
MVA
Base current I B = 3.75
= 0.52kA
3 ( 4.16 kV )
I
0.52 = 8.6 kA Sym.
I 3-Phase = ----1- = ---------------------X
0.0604
System X
= 9 (is less than 15)
R
would use 1.0 multiplying factor for
short-circuit duty, therefore, shortcircuit duty is 8.6 kA sym. for threephase fault I1 and momentary duty is
8.6 x 1.6 = 13.7 kA I3.
For Line-to-Ground Fault

3I B
3E - = -------------------------I LG = -------------------------2X 1 + X 0 2X 1 + X 0
For this system, X0 is the zero sequence
reactance of the transformer, which
is equal to the transformer positive
sequence reactance and X1 is the positive sequence reactance of the system.
Therefore,
3(0.52)
I LG = = 9.1 kA Sym.
2(0.0604) + 0.0505
Using 1.0 multiplying factor (see
Table 1.3-6), short-circuit duty = 9.1 kA
Sym. LG (I2)
Answer
15
Figure 1.3-6. Example 1One-Line Diagram
16
From transformer losses per unit or percent

R is calculated
17
18
19
20
21
The 50VCP-W250 breaker capabilities

exceed the duty requirements and
may be applied.
31,000 Watts Full Load

6,800 Watts No Load
24,200 Watts Load Losses
Transformer X =
Z R
24.2 kW - = 0.0065 pu or 0.65%

R = ------------------------------3750 kVA
2
(5.09) (0.65) =
25.91 0.42 =
25.48
X = 5.05%
X
13.8 kV System 0.99%
Transformer
5.05%
System Total 6.04%
or
0.0604 pu
With this application, shortcuts could

have been taken for a quicker check of
the application. If we assume unlimited
short circuit available at 13.8 kV and
that Trans. Z = X
I
0.52 = 9.5 kA Sym.
Then I 3-Phase = ----B- = -----------------X 0.055
X/R ratio 15 or less multiplying factor
is 1.0 for short-circuit duty.
R
X/R
0.066% 15
0.65%
8
0.716% 9
0.00716 pu
The short-circuit duty is then 9.5 kA

Sym. (I1, I2) and momentary duty is
9.5 x 1.6 kA = 15.2 kA (I3).
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-9
Sheet 01 041
X/R
X = 0.628 (6.9) = 0.015 0.015

21 (13.8)
0.001
15
Transformer
0.0055
10
X = 15
R
21 kA Sym. Available
13.8 kV
7500 kVA
All calculations on per unit basis.

7.5 MVA base
7.5 MVA- = 0.628 kA
Base Current I B = -----------------------------3 6.9 kV
X
13.8 kV System
Given the system shown with motor

loads, calculate the fault currents
and determine proper circuit breaker
selection.
Z = 5.53%
X = 5.5%
R = 0.55%
ii
X
= 10
R
6.9 kV
13.8 kV System
0.055
X
= 25
R
197A FL
X''d = 20%
Total Source Transformer 0.070 pu 0.0065 pu 11
X
= 35
R
173A FL
X''d = 25%
3000 hp Synchronous Motor
X = 0.20 (0.628) = 0.638 pu at 7.5 MVA Base

0.197
3000 hp
1.0 PF
Syn.
4
5
6
2500 hp
Ind.
2500 hp Ind. Motor
X = 0.25 (0.628) = 0.908 pu at 7.5 MVA Base

0.173
E- = I----B- where X on per unit base
I 3-Ph = ---X X
Table 1.3-6. Multiplying Factor for E/X
Amperes (ANSI C37.010, 1979, Figures 1.1-8,
1.1-9 and 1.1-10)
System
X/R
Type VCP-W Vacuum

Circuit Breaker
Rated Interrupting Time, 5-Cycle
7
Source of
Short-Circuit Current
Interrupting
E/X Amperes
Momentary
E/X Amperes
X
R
I3 Source Transformer
0.628
0.070
= 8.971
0.628
= 8.971
0.070
11
I1 3000 hp Syn. Motor
0.628
= 0.656
(1.5) 0.638
0.628
= 0.984
0.638
I1 2500 hp Syn. Motor
0.628
= 0.461
(1.5) 0.908
0.628
= 0.691
0.908
I3F =
Type of Fault
Ratio
ThreePhase
LG
Three-Phase
and LG
Source of Short Circuit

Local
Remote
25
25
0.638
= 39
35
35
0.908
= 39
= 157
----- = 0.062 (235) = 14.5 is a Multiplying Factor of 1.0 from Table 1.3-6
System X
R
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.04
1.00
1.00
1.02
1.06
1.10
1.00
1.00
1.05
1.10
1.13
36
40
45
50
55
1.06
1.08
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.14
1.16
1.19
1.22
1.25
1.17
1.22
1.25
1.27
1.30
Breaker
Type
60
65
70
75
80
1.16
1.17
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.26
1.28
1.29
1.30
1.31
1.32
1.33
1.35
1.36
1.37
150VCP-W500
85
90
95
100
1.22
1.23
1.32
1.33
1.38
1.39
1.40
1.41
100
120
130
1.24
1.24
1.24
1.34
1.35
1.35
1.42
1.43
1.43
75VCP-W500

at V Max.
8.25 kV 33 kA
15 kV
18 kA
9
10
11
13
14
Table 1.3-7. Short-Circuit Duty = 10.1 kA

V
Max.
12
I B = 0.628 = 0.062
Total X = -----------------------I 3F
10.1
1
15
20
25
30
1
R
10.647
Total 1/R = 235
x 1.6
17.0 kA Momentary Duty
10.088
10.1 kA
or
X (1)
R (X)
11
0.070
Max. KI
41 kA
23 kA
Answer
Either breaker could be properly
applied, but price will make the type
150VCP-W500 the more economical
selection.
Close and Latch

or Momentary
(33) = 39.5 kA
66 kA
15 (18) (39.1) = 23 kA
6.9
(But not to exceed KI)
37 kA
8.25
6.9
15
16
17
18
19
20
Where system X/R ratio is 15 or less, the

multiplying factor is 1.0.
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 042
i
ii
Answer
Check breaker application or generator bus for the system of generators shown.
Each generator is 7.5 MVA, 4.16 kV 1040A full load, IB = 1.04 kA
Sub transient reactance Xd = 11% or, X = 0.11 pu
X- ratio is 30
Gen ---R
1
1 1 1 3
1 1 1 3
1
= + + = and = + + =
RS R R R R
X X X X
XS
3
4
5
6
7
The 50VCP-W250 breaker could be

applied.
XS = X
R
X- = 30
----- = Gen ---or X S = X
----- and R S = ---- Therefore, System -------R
RS
3
3
R
G1
G2
G3
Since generator neutral grounding reactors are used to limit the I LG to I3-phase or
below, we need only check the I3 short-circuit duty.
I I I 31
----------------------- = 28.4 kA Symmetrical E/X amperes
I B Phase = ----B- + ----B- + ----B- + ----------B- = 3(1.04)
0.11
X X X X
4.16 kV
----- of 30 is a Multiplying Factor of 1.04 from Table 1.3-6.

System X
R
Short-circuit duty is 28.4 (1.04) = 29.5 kA Symmetrical
8
9

Breaker Type
V Max.
at V Max.
Max. KI
50VCP-W250
4.76 kV
29 kA
36 kA
4.76
(29) = 33.2 kA
4.16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

System Analysis
1.3-11
Sheet 01 043
Medium Voltage Fuses

Fault Calculations
There are two basic types of medium
voltage fuses. The following definitions
are taken from ANSI Standard C37.40.
Expulsion Fuse (Unit)

A vented fuse (unit) in which the
expulsion effect of the gases produced
by internal arcing, either alone or aided
by other mechanisms, results in current
interruption.
Current-Limiting Fuse (Unit)

A fuse unit that, when its currentresponsive element is melted by a
current within the fuses specified
current-limiting range, abruptly
introduces a high resistance to
reduce current magnitude and
duration, resulting in subsequent
current interruption.
There are two classes of fuses;
power and distribution. They are
distinguished from each other by
the current ratings and minimum
melting type characteristics.
The current-limiting ability of a
current-limiting fuse is specified by
its threshold ratio, peak let-through
current and I2t characteristics.
Interrupting Ratings of Fuses

Modern fuses are rated in amperes
rms symmetrical. They also have a
listed asymmetrical rms rating that
is 1.6 x the symmetrical rating.
Refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.48 for fuse
interrupting duty guidelines.
Calculation of the Fuse Required

Interrupting Rating:
Step 1Convert the fault from
the utility to percent or per unit on
a convenient voltage and kVA base.
Step 2Collect the X and R data of all
the other circuit elements and convert
to a percent or per unit on a convenient kVA and voltage base same as
that used in Step 1. Use the substransient X and R for all generators and
motors.
Step 3Construct the sequence
networks using reactances and connect
properly for the type of fault under
consideration and reduce to a single
equivalent reactance.

networks using resistances and
connect properly for the type of
fault under consideration and reduce
to a single equivalent resistance.
Step 5Calculate the E/XI value,
where E is the prefault value of the
voltage at the point of fault normally
assumed 1.0 in pu. For three-phase
faults E/XI is the fault current to be
used in determining the required interrupting capability of the fuse.
Note: It is not necessary to calculate a
single phase-to-phase fault current. This
current is very nearly 3 /2 x three-phase
fault. The line-to-ground fault may exceed
the three-phase fault for fuses located in
generating stations with solidly grounded
neutral generators, or in delta-wye transformers with the wye solidly grounded,
where the sum of the positive and negative
sequence impedances on the high voltage
side (delta) is smaller than the impedance of
the transformer.
For single line-to-ground fault:

X I = X I (+) + X I () + X I (0)
E 3
I f = -----XI
Step 6Select a fuse whose
published interrupting rating
exceeds the calculated fault current.
Figure 1.3-2 should be used where
older fuses asymmetrically rated are
involved.
The voltage rating of power fuses used
on three-phase systems should equal
or exceed the maximum line-to-line
voltage rating of the system. Current
limiting fuses for three-phase systems
should be so applied that the fuse
voltage rating is equal to or less than
1.41 x nominal system voltage.
Low Voltage Power Circuit

BreakersFault Calculations
The steps for calculating the fault current for the selection of a low voltage
power circuit breaker are the same as
those used for medium voltage circuit
breakers except that where the connected loads to the low voltage bus
includes induction and synchronous

motor loads. The assumption is made
that in 208Y/120V systems the contribution from motors is two times the full
load current of step-down transformer.
This corresponds to an assumed 50%
motor aggregate impedance on a kVA
base equal to the transformer kVA
rating or 50% motor load. For 480V,
480Y/277V and 600V systems, the
assumption is made that the contribution
from the motors is four times the full
load current of the step-down transformer, which corresponds to an assumed
25% aggregate motor impedance on a
kVA base equal to the transformer kVA
rating or 100% motor load.
In low voltage systems that contain
generators, the subtransient reactance
should be used.
If the X/R to the point of fault is greater
than 6.6, a derating multiplying factor
(MF) must be applied. The X/R ratio is
calculated in the same manner as that
for medium voltage circuit breakers.
Calculated symmetrical amperes x
MF breaker interrupting rating.
The multiplying factor MF can be
calculated by the formula:
( ) ( X/R )
]
2 [ 1 + 2.718
MF =
2.29
If the X/R of system feeding the
breaker is not known, use X/R = 15.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
For fused breakers by the formula:

1 + 2 ( 2.718 )
MF =
1.25
12
If the X/R of the system feeding the

breaker is not known, use X/R = 20.
13
Refer to Table 1.3-8 for the standard

ranges of X/R and power factors used in
testing and rating low voltage breakers.
Refer to Table 1.3-9 for the circuit
breaker interrupting rating multiplying
factors to be used when the calculated
X/R ratio or power factor at the point
the breaker is to be applied in the
power distribution system falls outside
of the Table 1.3-8 X/R or power factors
used in testing and rating the circuit
breakers. MF is always greater than 1.0.
14
( 2 ) ( X/R )
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 044
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Molded-Case Breakers and

Insulated Case Circuit
BreakersFault Calculations
The method of fault calculation is the
same as that for low voltage power
circuit breakers. Again, the calculated
fault current x MF breaker interrupting
capacity. Because molded case breakers
are tested at lower X/R ratios, the MFs
are different than those for low voltage
power circuit breakers.
X 2

R 2
1 + 2.718
MF = ---------------------------------------------------X 1

R 1
1 + 2.718
X1 R1 = test X/R value
X2 R2 = X/R at point where breaker
is applied
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker

Interrupting Derating Factors
Refer to Table 1.3-8 for the standard
ranges of X/R and power factors used
in testing and rating low voltage
breakers. Refer to Table 1.3-9 for
the circuit breaker interrupting rating
de-rating factors to be used when the
calculated X/R ratio or power factor
at the point the breaker is to be applied
in the power distribution system falls
outside of the Table 1.3-8 X/R or power
factors used in testing and rating the
circuit breakers.
Normally the short-circuit power factor
or X/R ratio of a distribution system
need not be considered in applying
low voltage circuit breakers. This is
because the ratings established in
the applicable standard are based
on power factor values that amply
cover most applications.
11
12
13
Table 1.3-8. Standard Test Power Factors

Interrupting
Rating in kA
Power Factor
Test Range
X/R Test
Range
Molded Case Circuit Breaker

10 or Less
Over 10 to 20
Over 20
0.450.50
0.250.030
0.150.20
1.981.73
3.873.18
6.64.9
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

All
0.15 Maximum 6.6 Minimum
For distribution systems where the

calculated short-circuit current X/R
ratio differs from the standard values
given in the above table, circuit breaker
interrupting rating derating factors from
Table 1.3-9 table should be applied.
Table 1.3-9. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating Derating Factors

% P.F.
X/R
Interrupting Rating
Molded Case or Insulated Case
9
10
Established standard values include

the following:
Power Circuit Breaker
< / = 10 kA
>10 kA
< / = 20 kA
>20 kA
Unfused
Fused
50
30
25
1.73
3.18
3.87
1.000
0.847
0.805
1.000
1.000
0.950
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
20
15
12
4.90
6.59
8.27
0.762
0.718
0.691
0.899
0.847
0.815
1.000
0.942
0.907
1.000
1.000
0.962
1.000
0.939
0.898
10
8.5
7
9.95
11.72
14.25
0.673
0.659
0.645
0.794
0.778
0.761
0.883
0.865
0.847
0.937
0.918
0.899
0.870
0.849
0.827
19.97
0.627
0.740
0.823
0.874
0.797
Note: These are derating factors applied to the breaker and are the inverse of MF.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-13
Sheet 01 045
Short-Circuit CalculationsShortcut Method
Determination of Short-Circuit Current

Note 1: Transformer impedance generally relates to self-ventilated rating (e.g., with OA/FA/FOA transformer use OA base).
Note 2: kV refers to line-to-line voltage in kilovolts.
Note 3: Z refers to line-to-neutral impedance of system to fault where R + jX = Z.
Note 4: When totaling the components of system Z, arithmetic combining of impedances as ohms Z. per unit Z. etc., is considered a
shortcut or approximate method; proper combining of impedances (e.g., source, cables transformers, conductors, etc.). should use
individual R and X components. This Total Z = Total R + j Total X (see IEEE Red Book Standard No. 141).
Select convenient kVA base for system to
be studied.
2.
Change per unit, or percent, impedance from

one kVA base to another:
(a) Per unit = pu impedance kVA base 2 =

(b) Percent = % impedance kVA base 2 =
kVA base 2
kVA base 1
(pu impedance on kVA base 1)
Change ohms, or percent or per unit, etc.:
(c) Ohms impedance =
Change power-source impedance to per unit

or percent impedance on kVA base as selected
for this study:
kVA base 1
( kV )2
(% impedance)
(10)
kVA base
(a) if utility fault capacity given in kVA
kVA base in study

Per-unit impedance = pu Z = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------power-source kVA fault capacity
kVA base in study

Per-unit impedance = pu Z = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(short-circuit current) ( 3 )(kV of source)
6.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Change motor rating to kVA:
motor kVA ( 3 ) (kV) (I) where I = motor nameplate full-load amperes

if 1.0 power factor synchronous motor
kVA = (0.8) (hp)
if 0.8 power factor synchronous motor
kVA = (1.0) (hp)
if induction motor
kVA = (1.0) (hp)
(a) Base current = I Base =
Determine symmetrical short-circuit current:
10
11
Three-phase kVA
Single-phase kVA
or
( 3 ) ( kV )
kV line-to-neutral
1.0
(b) Per unit I SC =
puZ
12
(c) rms Symmetrical current = ISC = (pu ISC) (IBase Amperes)
13
Three-phase KVA base

Single-phase kVA base
(d) rms Symmetrical current = Amperes = ---------------------------------------------------------------- or ----------------------------------------------------------------( puZ ) ( kV )
( puZ ) ( 3 ) ( kV )
(e)
(g)
7.
(b)
8.
9.
Determine motor contribution (or feedback) as

source of fault current:
3(line-to-neutral kV) 2 ( 1000 )

= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------(ohms Z)
16
17
(a) synchronous motor5 times motor full load current (impedance 20%)
See IEEE
Standard No. 141
(b) induction motor4 times motor full-load current (impedance 25%)
(c) motor loads not individually identified, use contribution from group of motors as follows:
on 208Y/120V systems2.0 times transformer full-load current
on 240-480-600V three-phase, three-wire systems4.0 times transformer full-load current
on 480Y/277V three-phase, four-wire systems
In commercial buildings, 2.0 times transformers full-load current (50% motor load)
In industrial plants, 4.0 times transformer full-load current (100% motor load)
14
15
(kV) (1000)
= ----------------------------------3 (ohms Z)
(a) from three-phase transformerapprox. 86% of three-phase current

(b) three single-phase transformers (e.g., 75 kVA, Z = 2%) calculate same as one three-phase
unit (i.e., 3 x 75 kVA = 225 kVA, Z = 2%).
(c) from single-phase transformersee Page 1.3-15.
Determine line-to-line short-circuit current:
CA08104001E
(Three-phase kVA base) (100)

Single-phase kVA base (100)
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- or -------------------------------------------------------------------------------(%Z) ( kV )
(%Z) ( 3 ) ( kV )
base
base) (100)
kV )2 ( 1000 -)
(a) Symmetrical short-circuit kVA = kVA
-------------------------- = (kVA
---------------------------------------------- = (--------------------------------( puZ )
ohms Z
%Z
Determine symmetrical short-circuit kVA:
4
5
(ohms impedance) (kVA base)

2
( kV )
( 10 )
(b) if utility fault capacity given in rms symmetrical short circuit amperes
5.
kVA base 2
(% impedance on kVA base 1)
impedance) (kVA base)

percent impedance = (ohms
(a) Per unit impedance = pu Z =
2
(kV
)
( 1000 )
100
(b) % impedance = % Z =
4.
1
2
1.
3.
ii
18
19
20
21

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 046
Example Number 1
How to Calculate Short-Circuit Currents at Ends of Conductors
ii
A. System Diagram
B. Impedance Diagram (Using Short Cut Method for Combining Impedances

and Sources).
Utility Source
500 MVA
Utility
Major Contribution
2
Cables
Transformer
Switchboard Fault
1000 kV A
5.75%
480V
Cables
Cable
Switchboard Fault
5
6
7
100 ft (30m)
3350 kcmil Cable
in Steel Conduit
Fault
0.002 pu
1.00 pu
1.00 pu
1.00 pu
0.0575 pu
0.027 pu
Switchboard Fault
0.027 pu
0.027 pu
Mixed LoadMotors and Lighting

Each Feeder100 ft (30m) of 3350 kcmil
Cable in Steel Conduit Feeding Lighting and
250 kVA of Motors
0.027 pu
Cable Fault
Cable Fault
Combining Series Impedances: ZTOTAL = Z1 + Z2 + ... +Zn
9
10
11
12
13
C. Conductor impedance from Table 1.5-16,

Page 1.5-14. Conductors: 3350 kcmil copper,
single conductors Circuit length: 100 ft (30m),
in steel (magnetic) conduit Impedance
Z = 0.00619 ohms/100 ft (30m).
ZTOT = 0.00619 ohms (100 circuit feet)
Combining Parallel Impedances:
1 =
ZTOTAL
0.0595 pu
D. Fault current calculations (combining impedances arithmetically, using approximate

Short Cut methodsee Note 4,
Page 1.3-13)
1 + 1 + ... 1
Z1
Z2
Zn
0.342 pu
0.027 pu
Step
1
Equation
(See)
4(a)
kVA base
1000
Utility per unit impedance = Z pu = ------------------------------------------ = --------------------- = 0.002 pu
utility fault kVA 500.000
3(a)
%Z = 5.75 = 0.0575 pu
Transformer per unit impedance = Z pu = ------------------100
100
16
4(a) and
9(c)
kVA base
1000 = 1.00 pu
Motor contribution per unit impedance = Z pu = --------------------------------------- = ------------------4 x motor kVA 4 x 250
17
3(a)
Cable impedance in ohms (see above) = 0.00619 ohms
14
15
6(d)
0.027 pu
Calculation
Select 1000 kVA as most convenient base, since all data except utility source is on
secondary of 1000 kVA transformer.
Total impedance to switchboard fault = 0.0507 pu (see diagram above)

kVA base =
Symmetrical short circuit current at switchboard fault = 3-phase
1000
= 23,720 amperes rms
( Z pu ) ( 3 ) ( kV )
( 0.0507 ) ( 3 ) ( 0.480 )
19
21
0.0777 pu
(ohms)(kVA base) = (0.00619)(1000) = 0.027pu

Cable impedance per unit = Z pu = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2
2
(kV) (1000)
(0.480) (1000)
18
20
0.0507 pu
6(d)
Total impedance to cable fault = 0.0777 pu (see diagram above)

kVA base =
Symmetrical short circuit current at cable fault = 3-phase
1000
= 15, 480 amperes rms
( Z pu ) ( 3 ) ( kV )
( 0.0777 ) ( 3 ) ( 0.480 )
Figure 1.3-9. Example Number 1

CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-15
Sheet 01 047
Example Number 2
Fault CalculationSecondary Side of Single-Phase Transformer
480V Three-Phase Switchboard Bus at 50,000A Symmetrical, X/R = 6.6
Z
{ RX == 0.1498
0.9887 Z
= 6.6
Z=
R=
75 kVA Single-Phase 480-120/240V; Z = 2.8%, R = 1.64%, X = 2.27%
X = 6.6 R
100 Ft. Two #2/0 Copper Conductors, Magnetic Conduit R = 0.0104 Ohms
X = 0.0051 Ohms
6.6753
120V
F2
Half-winding of Transformer
1
2
( 6.6R ) + R = 43.56R + R =
X +R =
X = 6.6R
240V
F1
ii
Deriving Transformer R and X:
A. System Diagram
44.56R = 6.6753R
2
R = 0.1498Z
X = 0.9887Z
% R by 1.5
{ Multiply
Multiply % X by 1.2 } Reference: IEEE Standard No. 141
Full-winding of Transformer
B. Impedance DiagramFault F1
RSyst = 0.00054
RSyst = 0.00356
RSyst = 0.00054
XSyst = 0.00356
RCond = 0.00677
RCond = 0.00332
RCond = 0.00677
XCond = 0.00332
RTfmr = 0.0164
RTfmr = 0.0227
RTfmr = 0.0246
XTfmr = 0.0272
RTotal = 0.02371
F1
RTotal = 0.02958
F1
C. Impedance DiagramFault F2
RTotal = 0.03191
F2
6
7
XTotal = 0.03408
F2
D. Impedance and Fault Current Calculations75 kVA Base

Note: To account for the outgoing and return paths of single-phase circuits (conductors,
systems, etc.) use twice the three-phase values of R and X.
ZSyst =
75
= 0.0018 pu
3 0.480 50,000
Base
kVA
ZCond =
2
( kV ) 1000
ohms
(From Page 1.3-13

Formula 4(b) )
(From Page 1.3-13

Formula 3(a) )
Full-winding of Transformer (75 kVA Base)
RSyst = 2 (0.1498 x Z)
= 0.00054 pu
XSyst = 2 (0.9887 x Z)
0.0104 75
RCond = 2 2
0.48 1000
0.0051 75
XCond = 2
( 0.48 ) 2 1000
1.64
RTfmr =
100
= 0.00356 pu
XTfmr =
Half-winding of Transformer (75 kVA Base)
11
= 0.00332 pu
= 0.0164 pu
= 0.0277 pu
1.64
RTfmr = 1.5 ( )
100
= 0.0246 pu
( 2.27
)
= 0.0272 pu
100
2
= 0.03791 pu
= 0.04669 pu
Z=
( 0.02371 ) + ( 0.02958 )
Z=
( 0.03191 ) + ( 0.03408 )
at the load side end of the conductors

can be calculated as follows.
Add source and conductor impedance or

0.00923 + 0.00273 = 0.01196 total ohms
This method uses the approximation

of adding Zs instead of the accurate
method of Rs and Xs.
277V/30,000A = 0.00923 ohms (source

impedance)
Next, 277V/0.01196 ohms = 23,160A

rms at load side of conductors
CA08104001E
0.00551/2 = 0.00273 ohms (conductor

impedance)
13
15
16
Method 1: Shortcut Methods

End of Cable
Conductor ohms for 500 kcmil conductor

from reference data in this section in
magnetic conduit is 0.00551 ohms per
100 ft (30m). For 100 ft (30m) and two
conductors per phase we have:
12
14
Figure 1.3-10. Example Number 2
For Example: For a 480/277V system

with 30,000A symmetrical available
at the line side of a conductor run of
100 ft (30m) of 2500 kcmil per phase
and neutral, the approximate fault current
10
= 0.00677 pu
2.27
100
XTfmr = 1.2
Impedance to Fault F1Full Winding
Impedance to Fault F2Half Winding
Short circuit current F1 = 75 (0.03791 x 0.240 kV) = 8,243A Symmetrical
Short circuit current F2 = 75 (0.04669 x 0.120 kV) = 13,386A Symmetrical
17
18
30,000A available
19
100 ft (30m)
2500 kcmil per phase
20
If = 23,160A
Figure 1.3-11. Short-Circuit Diagram
21

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 048
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Method 2: Chart Approximate Method
Step Five
The chart method is based on the following:
Enter the chart along the bottom horizontal scale with the
distance (in feet) from the transformer to the fault point.
Draw a vertical line up the chart to the point where it intersects the selected curve. Then draw a horizontal line to the
left from this point to the scale along the left side of the chart.
Motor Contribution
For system voltages of 120/208V, it is reasonable to assume
that the connected load consists of 50% motor load, and that
the motors will contribute four times their full load current
into a fault. For system voltages of 240 and 480V, it is reasonable to assume that the connected load consists of 100%
motor load, and that the motors will contribute four times
their full load current into a fault. These motor contributions
have been factored into each curve as if all motors were
connected to the transformer terminals.
Feeder Conductors
The conductor sizes most commonly used for feeders
from molded case circuit breakers are shown. For conductor
sizes not shown, the following table has been included for
conversion to equivalent arrangements. In some cases it
may be necessary to interpolate for unusual feeder ratings.
Table 1.3-10 is based on using copper conductor.
Table 1.3-10. Conductor Conversion (Based on Using Copper Conductor)
If Your Conductor is:
Use Equivalent Arrangement
3No. 4/0 cables

4No. 2/0 cables
2500 kcmil
2500 kcmil
32000 kcmil cables

5400 kcmil cables
6300 kcmil cables
4750 kcmil
4750 kcmil
4750 kcmil
800A busway
1000A busway
1600A busway
2500 kcmil
2500 kcmil
4750 kcmil
10
11
12
Step Six
The value obtained from the left-hand vertical scale is the fault
current (in thousands of amperes) available at the fault point.
For a more exact determination, see the formula method.
It should be noted that even the most exact methods for
calculating fault energy use some approximations and some
assumptions. Therefore, it is appropriate to select a method
which is sufficiently accurate for the purpose, but not more
burdensome than is justified. The charts that follow make
use of simplifications that are reasonable under most circumstances and will almost certainly yield answers that are
on the safe side. This may, in some cases, lead to application
of circuit breakers having interrupting ratings higher than
necessary, but should eliminate the possibility of applying
units which will not be safe for the possible fault duty.
UTILITY KVA
V
12.5
10.0
Short-Circuit Current Readout

The readout obtained from the charts is the rms symmetrical
amperes available at the given distance from the transformer. The circuit breaker should have an interrupting
capacity at least as large as this value.
5.0
2.5
How to Use the Short-Circuit Charts

Step One
14
15
1.
2.
3.
4.
System voltage
Transformer kVA rating (from transformer nameplate)
Transformer impedance (from transformer nameplate)
Primary source fault energy available in kVA
(from electric utility or distribution system engineers)
Step Two
16
17
18
19
20
21
Obtain the following data:
Select the applicable chart from the following pages. The

charts are grouped by secondary system voltage, which is
listed with each transformer. Within each group, the chart
for the lowest kVA transformer is shown first, followed in
ascending order to the highest rated transformer.
Step Three
Select the family of curves that is closest to the available
source kVA. The black line family of curves is for a source of
500,000 kVA. The lower value line (in red) family of curves is
for a source of 50,000 kVA. You may interpolate between
curves if necessary, but for values above 100,000 kVA it is
appropriate to use the 500,000 kVA curves.
Step Four
Select the specific curve for the conductor size being used. If
your conductor size is something other than the sizes shown
on the chart, refer to the conductor conversion Table 1.3-10.
5
10
20
50
Distance in Feet from T
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
Figure 1.3-12. 225 kVA Transformer/4.5% Impedance/208V
KV
Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.)
13
250 kcmil
W
WG
W
WG
7.5
30
kcmil
25
F
#4 A
20
50,000
B
F
15
10
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-17
Sheet 01 049
B
KV
30
120
ii
F
25
100
F
W
WG
20
15
50,000
80
60
4
2
10
40
20
3
#4 AWG
A
4
0
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
6
A
A
120
60
B
F
W
WG
50,000
F
60
30
10
40
20
4
kcmil
11
20
10
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
50,000
30
W
WG
10
5
10
20
50
100
200
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
500
1000 2000
5000
5000
12
13
14
20
50
40
kcmil
kcmil
60
5000
50,000
80
W
WG
100
50
40
12
15
10
F
50,000
16
4
2
17
18
2
19
0
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
20
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 050
1
2
3
A
ii
A
30
25
F
50,000
20
15
#1/0 AWG
A
#4 A
AWG
10
60
kcmil
50
50,000
#4 AWG
A
40
30
20
750 kcmil
10
4
0
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
9
10
11
13
30
750
500
25
F
20
15
10
kcmil
#4 A
5
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
17
18
19
20
60
W
WG
50
kcmil
50,000
40
F
30
20
10
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
A
16
5000
14
15
50,000
12
A
A
30
W
WG
B
25
F
50,000
20
15
4 750 kcmil
2
10
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-19
Sheet 01 051
Determining X and R Values

from Transformer Loss Data
Method 1:
Given a 500 kVA, 5.5% Z transformer
with 9000W total loss; 1700W no-load
loss; 7300W load loss and primary
voltage of 480V.
2
3 500
R = 7300W
3 0.480
%R = 0.0067 ohms
0.0067 500
%R = 2 = 1.46%
10 0.48
%X =
5.5 1.46 = 5.30%
Method 2:
Using same values above.
2
I R Losses
%R =
10 kVA
7300
= 1.46
10 500
%X =
How to Estimate Short-Circuit

Currents at Transformer
Secondaries:
Method 1:
To obtain three-phase rms symmetrical
short-circuit current available at
transformer secondary terminals,
use the formula:
I SC
100
= I FLC -----------%Z
where %Z is the transformer impedance

in percent, from Tables 1.5-6 through
1.5-10, Page 1.5-11.
This is the maximum three-phase symmetrical bolted-fault current, assuming
sustained primary voltage during fault,
i.e., an infinite or unlimited primary
power source (zero source impedance).
Because the power source must
always have some impedance, this
is a conservative value; actual fault
current will be somewhat less.
Note: This will not include motor shortcircuit contribution.
Method 2:
Refer to Page 1.5-9 in the Reference
section, and use appropriate row of
data based on transformer kVA and
primary short-circuit current available.
This will yield more accurate results
and allow for including motor shortcircuit contribution.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5.5 1.46 = 5.30%
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 052
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Voltage Drop Considerations

The first consideration for voltage
drop is that under the steady-state
conditions of normal load, the voltage
at the utilization equipment must be
adequate. Fine-print notes in the NEC
recommend sizing feeders and branch
circuits so that the maximum voltage
drop in either does not exceed 3%,
with the total voltage drop for feeders
and branch circuits not to exceed 5%,
for efficiency of operation. (Fine print
notes in the NEC are not mandatory.)
In addition to steady-state conditions,
voltage drop under transient conditions, with sudden high-current, shorttime loads, must be considered. The
most common loads of this type are
motor inrush currents during starting.
These loads cause a voltage dip on
the system as a result of the voltage
drop in conductors, transformers and
generators under the high current.
This voltage dip can have numerous
adverse effects on equipment in the
system, and equipment and conductors must be designed and sized to
minimize these problems. In many
cases, reduced-voltage starting of
motors to reduce inrush current
will be necessary.
10
Recommended Limits of
Voltage Variation
11
General Illumination: Flicker in

incandescent lighting from voltage
dip can be severe; lumen output drops
about three times as much as the
voltage dips. That is, a 10% drop in
voltage will result in a 30% drop in
light output. While the lumen output
drop in fluorescent lamps is roughly
proportional to voltage drop, if the
voltage dips about 25%, the lamp will
go out momentarily and then restrike.
For high-intensity discharge (HID)
lamps such as mercury vapor, highpressure sodium or metal halide, if the
lamp goes out because of an excessive
voltage dip, it will not restrike until it
has cooled. This will require several
minutes. These lighting flicker effects
can be annoying, and in the case of
HID lamps, sometimes serious. In
areas where close work is being done,
such as drafting rooms, precision
assembly plants, and the like, even
a slight variation, if repeated, can be
very annoying, and reduce efficiency.
Voltage variation in such areas should
be held to 2 or 3% under motor-starting
or other transient conditions.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Computer Equipment: With the

proliferation of data-processing and
computer- or microprocessor-controlled
manufacturing, the sensitivity of
computers to voltage has become an
important consideration. Severe dips of
short duration can cause a computer
to crashshut down completely,
and other voltage transients caused
by starting and stopping motors can
cause data-processing errors. While
voltage drops must be held to a minimum, in many cases computers will
require special power-conditioning
equipment to operate properly.
Industrial Plants: Where large motors
exist, and unit substation transformers
are relatively limited in size, voltage
dips of as much as 20% may be permissible in some cases, if they do not
occur too frequently. Lighting is often
supplied from separate transformers,
and is minimally affected by voltage
dips in the power systems. However, it
is usually best to limit dips to between
5 and 10% at most. One critical consideration is that a large voltage dip can
cause a dropout (opening) of magnetic
motor contactors and control relays.
The actual dropout voltage varies considerably among starters of different
manufacturers. The only standard that
exists is that of NEMA, which states
that a starter must not drop out at 85%
of its nominal coil voltage, allowing
only a 15% dip. While most starters
will tolerate considerably more voltage dip before dropping out, limiting
dip to 15% is the only way to ensure
continuity of operation in all cases.
X-Ray Equipment: Medical x-ray and
similar diagnostic equipment, such as
CAT-scanners, are extremely sensitive
to low voltage. They present a small,
steady load to the system until the
instant the x-ray tube is fired. This
presents a brief but extremely high
instantaneous momentary load. In
some modern x-ray equipment, the
firing is repeated rapidly to create
multiple images. The voltage regulation must be maintained within the
manufacturers limits, usually 2 to 3%,
under these momentary loads, to
ensure proper x-ray exposure.
Motor Starting
Motor inrush on starting must be limited
to minimize voltage dips. Table 1.3-11
on the next page will help select the
proper type of motor starter for various
motors, and to select generators of
adequate size to limit voltage dip.
See Tab 29 for additional data on
reduced voltage motor starting.
Utility Systems
Where the power is supplied by a
utility network, the motor inrush can
be assumed to be small compared
to the system capacity, and voltage
at the source can be assumed to
be constant during motor starting.
Voltage dip resulting from motor
starting can be calculated on the basis
of the voltage drop in the conductors
between the power source and
the motor resulting from the inrush
current. Where the utility system is
limited, the utility will often specify the
maximum permissible inrush current
or the maximum hp motor they will
permit to be started across-the-line.
Transformer Considerations
If the power source is a transformer,
and the inrush kVA or current of the
motor being started is small compared
to the full-rated kVA or current of the
transformer, the transformer voltage
dip will be small and may be ignored.
As the motor inrush becomes a significant percentage of the transformer
full-load rating, an estimate of the
transformer voltage drop must be
added to the conductor voltage drop
to obtain the total voltage drop to the
motor. Accurate voltage drop calculation would be complex and depend
upon transformer and conductor
resistance, reactance and impedance,
as well as motor inrush current and
power factor. However, an approximation can be made on the basis of the
low power-factor motor inrush current
(3040%) and impedance of the transformer.
For example, if a 480V transformer
has an impedance of 5%, and the
motor inrush current is 25% of the
transformer full-load current (FLC),
then the worst case voltage drop will
be 0.25 x 5%, or 1.25%.
The allowable motor inrush current is
determined by the total permissible
voltage drop in transformer and
conductors.
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-21
Sheet 01 053
Table 1.3-11. Factors Governing Voltage Drop

Type of
Motor
Starting Starting
How
Torque Current Started
Starting
Starting Torque per Unit of
Current
Full Load Torque
% Full-Load Motor Rpm
1750
1150
850
Full-Load Amperes
per kVA Generator
Capacity for Each
1% Voltage Drop
i
ii
Design A
Normal
Normal
Across-the-line
resistance
autotransformer
600700
480560
375450
1.5
0.96
0.96
1.35
0.87
0.87
1.25
0.80
0.80
0.0109.00936
0.0136.0117
0.0170.0146
Design B
Normal
Low
Across-the-line
resistance
autotransformer
500600
400480
320400
1.5
0.96
0.96
1.35
0.87
0.87
1.25
0.80
0.80
0.0131.0109
0.0164.01365
0.0205.0170
Design C
High
Low
Across-the-line
resistance
autotransformer
500600
400480
320400
0.2 to 2.5
1.28 to 1.6
1.28 to 1.6
0.0131.0109
0.0164.01365
0.0205.0170
Low
Secondary controller
100% current
for 100%
torque
0.0655
Across-the-line
Across-the-line
Autotransformer
300
450550
288350
40% Starting, 40% Pull-In

0.0218
0.0145.0118
0.0228.0197
Wound Rotor
High
Synchronous (for compressors)

Low
Synchronous (for centrifugal pumps) Low

Consult NEMA MG-1 sections 1 and 12 for the exact definition of the design letter.
In each case, a solid-state reduced voltage starter can be adjusted and controlled to provide the required inrush current and torque characteristics.
Where accuracy is important, request the code letter of the the motor and starting and breakdown torques from the motor vendor.
Using 80% taps.
Engine Generator Systems

With an engine generator as the
source of power, the type of starter
that will limit the inrush depends on
the characteristics of the generator.
Although automatic voltage regulators
are usually used with all AC enginegenerators, the initial dip in voltage is
caused by the inherent regulation of
the generator and occurs too rapidly
for the voltage regulator to respond.
It will occur whether or not a regulator
is installed. Consequently, the percent
of initial voltage drop depends on the
ratio of the starting kVA taken by the
motor to the generator capacity, the
inherent regulation of the generator,
the power-factor of the load thrown
on the generator, and the percentage
load carried by the generator.
A standard 80% power-factor enginetype generator (which would be
used where power is to be supplied
to motor loads) has an inherent
regulation of approximately 40%
from no-load to full-load. This means
that a 50% variation in load would
cause approximately 20% variation
in voltage (50% x 40% = 20%).
Assume that a 100 kVA, 80% PF
engine-type generator is supplying
the power and that the voltage drop
should not exceed 10%. Can a 7-1/2 hp,
220V, 1750 rpm, three-phase, squirrelcage motor be started without
exceeding this voltage drop?
Starting ratio =
Percent voltage drop gen. kVA 1000
F.L. amperes volts 3 reg. of gen.
CA08104001E
From the nameplate data on the motor,

the full-load amperes of a 7-1/2 hp.
220V, 1750 rpm, three-phase, squirrelcage motor is 19.0A. Therefore:
Starting current (%F.L.) =
10 100 1000
= 3.45 or 345%.
19.0 220 3 0.40
From Table 1.3-11, a NEMA design C or
NEMA design D motor with an autotransformer starter gives approximately this
starting ratio. It could also be obtained
from a properly set solid-state adjustable reduced voltage starter.
The choice will depend upon the
torque requirements of the load since
the use of an autotransformer starter
reduces the starting torque in direct
proportion to the reduction in starting
current. In other words, a NEMA
design C motor with an autotransformer would have a starting torque
of approximately full-load (see Table
1.3-11) whereas the NEMA design D
motor under the same conditions
would have a starting torque of
approximately 1-1/2 times full-load.
Note: If a resistance starter were used for
the same motor terminal voltage, the starting torque would be the same as that
obtained with autotransformer type, but the
starting current would be higher, as shown.
Shortcut Method
Column 7 in Table 1.3-11 has been
worked out to simplify checking.
The figures were obtained by using
the formula above and assuming
1 kVA generator capacity and 1%
voltage drop.
Example:
Assuming a project having a
1000 kVA generator, where the
voltage variation must not exceed
10%. Can a 75 hp, 1750 rpm, 220V,
three-phase, squirrel-cage motor be
started without objectionable lamp
flicker (or 10% voltage drop)?
From tables in the circuit protective
devices reference section, the full-load
amperes of this size and type of motor
is 158A. To convert to same basis as
column 7, 158A must be divided by
the generator capacity and % voltage
drop, or:
158
= 0.0158A per kVA
1000 x 10 per 1% voltage drop
Checking against the table, 0.0158 falls
within the 0.01700.0146 range. This
indicates that a general-purpose motor
with autotransformer starting can
be used.
Note: Designers may obtain calculated
information from engine generator
manufacturers.
The calculation results in conservative

results. The engineer should provide
to the engine-generator vendor the
starting kVA of all motors connected to
the generator and their starting sequence.
The engineer should also specify the
maximum allowable drop. The engineer
should request that the engine-generator
vendor consider the proper generator
size when closed-transition autotransformer reduced voltage starters, and
soft-start solid-state starter are used;
so the most economical method of
installation is obtained.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 054
Voltage Drop Formulas
If the receiving end voltage, load current and power factor

(PF) are known.
Approximate Method
ii
E VD = IR cos + IX sin
ER is the receiving end voltage.
where abbreviations are same as below Exact Method.
Exact Methods
2
3
Exact Method 2If receiving or sending mVA and its power

factor are known at a known sending or receiving voltage.
2
Voltage drop
2
2 ( ZMVA R )
E S = E R + --------------------------------- + 2ZMVA R cos ( R )
2
ER
Exact Method 1If sending end voltage and load PF

are known.
or
E VD = E S + IR cos + IX sin E S ( IX cos IR sin )
2
2
2 ( ZMVA R )
E R = E S + --------------------------------- 2ZMVA S cos ( S )
2
ES
where:
5
6
7
8
9
10
E VD = ( E R cos + I R ) + ( E R sin + I X ) E R
Voltage Drop
EVD = Voltage drop, line-to-neutral, volts

ES
= Source voltage, line-to-neutral, volts
= Line (Load) current, amperes
= Circuit (branch, feeder) resistance, ohms
= Circuit (branch, feeder) reactance, ohms
cos = Power factor of load, decimal

sin = Reactive factor of load, decimal
where:
ER
= Receiving line-line voltage in kV
ES
= Sending line-line voltage in kV
MVAR = Receiving three-phase mVA

MVAS = Sending three-phase mVA
Z
= Impedance between and receiving ends
= The angle of impedance Z
= Receiving end PF
= Sending end PF, positive when lagging
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
1.3-23
Sheet 01 055
Voltage Drop
Table 1.3-12. Temperature Correction Factors

for Voltage Drop
Voltage Drop Tables
Conductor
Size
Note: Busway voltage drop tables are

shown in Tab 24 of this catalog.
Tables for calculating voltage drop for

copper and aluminum conductors, in
either magnetic (steel) or nonmagnetic
(aluminum or non-metallic) conduit,
appear on Page 1.3-24. These tables
give voltage drop per ampere per
100 ft (30m) of circuit length. The
circuit length is from the beginning
point to the end point of the circuit
regardless of the number of conductors.
Tables are based on the following

conditions:
1. Three or four single conductors in
a conduit, random lay. For threeconductor cable, actual voltage
drop will be approximately the
same for small conductor sizes
and high power factors. Actual
voltage drop will be from 10 to
15% lower for larger conductor
sizes and lower power factors.
2. Voltage drops are phase-to-phase,
for three-phase, three-wire or
three-phase, four-wire 60 Hz
circuits. For other circuits, multiply
voltage drop given in the tables by
the following correction factors:
Three-phase, four-wire,
phase-to-neutral
Single-phase, two-wire
Single-phase, three-wire,
phase-to-phase
Single-phase, three-wire,
phase-to-neutral
No. 14 to No. 4
No. 2 to 3/0
4/0 to 500 kcmil
600 to 1000 kcmil
Percent Correction
Power Factors %
100
90
80
70
60
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.7
4.2
3.1
2.6
4.7
3.7
2.6
2.1
4.6
3.5
2.3
1.5
4.6
3.2
1.9
1.3
Calculations
To calculate voltage drop:
1. Multiply current in amperes by
the length of the circuit in feet to
get ampere-feet. Circuit length is
the distance from the point of
origin to the load end of the circuit.
2. Divide by 100.
3. Multiply by proper voltage drop
value in tables. Result is voltage
drop.
Example:
A 460V, 100 hp motor, running at 80%
PF, draws 124A full-load current. It is
fed by three 2/0 copper conductors in
steel conduit. The feeder length is
150 ft (46m). What is the voltage drop
in the feeder? What is the percentage
voltage drop?
x 1.155
x 0.577
3. Voltage drops are for a conductor

temperature of 75C. They may be
used for conductor temperatures
between 60C and 90C with
reasonable accuracy (within 5%).
However, correction factors in
Table 1.3-12 can be applied if
desired. The values in the table are
in percent of total voltage drop.
1. Determine maximum desired

voltage drop, in volts.
3. Table: 2/0 copper, magnetic conduit,

80% PF = 0.0187
186 x 0.0187 = 3.48V drop
3.48 x 100 = 0.76% drop
460
4. Conclusion: 0.76% voltage drop
is very acceptable. (See NEC 2005
Article 215, which suggests that a
voltage drop of 3% or less on a
feeder is acceptable.)
2. Divide voltage drop by

(amperes x circuit feet).
ii
3. Multiply by 100.
4. Find nearest lower voltage drop

value in tables, in correct column
for type of conductor, conduit and
power factor. Read conductor size
for that value.
5. Where this results in an oversized

cable, verify cable lug sizes for
molded case breakers and fusible
switches. Where lug size available
is exceeded, go to next higher
rating.
3
4
5
Example:
A three-phase, four-wire lighting
feeder on a 208V circuit is 250 ft
(76.2m) long. The load is 175A at
90% PF. It is desired to use aluminum
conductors in aluminum conduit. What
size conductor is required to limit the
voltage drop to 2% phase-to-phase?
2 208 = 4.16V
1. VD =
100
2.
4.16
= 0.0000951
175 250
3.
0.0000951 100 = 0.00951
1. 124A x 150 ft (46m) = 18,600A-ft

2. Divided by 100 = 186
x 0.577
x 1.155
To select minimum conductor size:
4. In table, under aluminum conductors, nonmagnetic conduit, 90%

PF, the nearest lower value is
0.0091. Conductor required is
500 kcmil. (Size 4/0 THW would
have adequate ampacity, but the
voltage drop would be excessive.)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
For conductor temperature of 60C

SUBTRACT the percentage from
Table 1.3-12.
17
For conductor temperature of 90C

ADD the percentage from Table 1.3-12.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

System Analysis
August 2013
Sheet 01 056
i
ii
Table 1.3-13. Voltage DropVolts per Ampere per 100 Feet (30 m); Three-Phase, Phase-to-Phase
Conductor Size
AWG
or kcmil
Magnetic Conduit (Steel)
Nonmagnetic Conduit (Aluminum or Nonmetallic)
Load Power Factor, %
Load Power Factor, %
60
70
80
90
100
60
70
80
90
100
14
12
10
8
0.3390
0.2170
0.1390
0.0905
0.3910
0.2490
0.1590
0.1030
0.4430
0.2810
0.1790
0.1150
0.4940
0.3130
0.1980
0.1260
0.5410
0.3410
0.2150
0.1350
0.3370
0.2150
0.1370
0.0888
0.3900
0.2480
0.1580
0.1010
0.4410
0.2800
0.1780
0.1140
0.4930
0.3120
0.1970
0.1250
0.5410
0.3410
0.2150
0.1350
6
4
2
1
0.0595
0.0399
0.0275
0.0233
0.0670
0.0443
0.0300
0.0251
0.0742
0.0485
0.0323
0.0267
0.0809
0.0522
0.0342
0.0279
0.0850
0.0534
0.0336
0.0267
0.0579
0.0384
0.0260
0.0218
0.0656
0.0430
0.0287
0.0238
0.0730
0.0473
0.0312
0.0256
0.0800
0.0513
0.0333
0.0270
0.0849
0.0533
0.0335
0.0266
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
0.0198
0.0171
0.0148
0.0130
0.0211
0.0180
0.0154
0.0134
0.0222
0.0187
0.0158
0.0136
0.0229
0.0190
0.0158
0.0133
0.0213
0.0170
0.0136
0.0109
0.0183
0.0156
0.0134
0.0116
0.0198
0.0167
0.0141
0.0121
0.0211
0.0176
0.0147
0.0124
0.0220
0.0181
0.0149
0.0124
0.0211
0.0169
0.0134
0.0107
250
300
350
500
0.0122
0.0111
0.0104
0.0100
0.0124
0.0112
0.0104
0.0091
0.0124
0.0111
0.0102
0.0087
0.0120
0.0106
0.0096
0.0080
0.0094
0.0080
0.0069
0.0053
0.0107
0.0097
0.0090
0.0078
0.0111
0.0099
0.0091
0.0077
0.0112
0.0099
0.0091
0.0075
0.0110
0.0096
0.0087
0.0070
0.0091
0.0077
0.0066
0.0049
600
750
1000
0.0088
0.0084
0.0080
0.0086
0.0081
0.0077
0.0082
0.0077
0.0072
0.0074
0.0069
0.0063
0.0046
0.0040
0.0035
0.0074
0.0069
0.0064
0.0072
0.0067
0.0062
0.0070
0.0064
0.0058
0.0064
0.0058
0.0052
0.0042
0.0035
0.0029
12
10
8
0.3296
0.2133
0.1305
0.3811
0.2429
0.1552
0.4349
0.2741
0.1758
0.4848
0.3180
0.1951
0.5330
0.3363
0.2106
0.3312
0.2090
0.1286
0.3802
0.2410
0.1534
0.4328
0.2740
0.1745
0.4848
0.3052
0.1933
0.5331
0.3363
0.2115
6
4
2
1
0.0898
0.0595
0.0403
0.0332
0.1018
0.0660
0.0443
0.0357
0.1142
0.0747
0.0483
0.0396
0.1254
0.0809
0.0523
0.0423
0.1349
0.0862
0.0535
0.0428
0.0887
0.0583
0.0389
0.0318
0.1011
0.0654
0.0435
0.0349
0.1127
0.0719
0.0473
0.0391
0.1249
0.0800
0.0514
0.0411
0.1361
0.0849
0.0544
0.0428
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
0.0286
0.0234
0.0209
0.0172
0.0305
0.0246
0.0220
0.0174
0.0334
0.0275
0.0231
0.0179
0.0350
0.0284
0.0241
0.0177
0.0341
0.0274
0.0217
0.0170
0.0263
0.0227
0.0160
0.0152
0.0287
0.0244
0.0171
0.0159
0.0322
0.0264
0.0218
0.0171
0.0337
0.0274
0.0233
0.0179
0.0339
0.0273
0.0222
0.0172
11
250
300
350
500
0.0158
0.0137
0.0130
0.0112
0.0163
0.0139
0.0133
0.0111
0.0162
0.0143
0.0128
0.0114
0.0159
0.0144
0.0131
0.0099
0.0145
0.0122
0.0100
0.0076
0.0138
0.0126
0.0122
0.0093
0.0144
0.0128
0.0123
0.0094
0.0147
0.0133
0.0119
0.0094
0.0155
0.0132
0.0120
0.0091
0.0138
0.0125
0.0101
0.0072
12
600
750
1000
0.0101
0.0095
0.0085
0.0106
0.0094
0.0082
0.0097
0.0090
0.0078
0.0090
0.0084
0.0071
0.0063
0.0056
0.0043
0.0084
0.0081
0.0069
0.0085
0.0080
0.0068
0.0085
0.0078
0.0065
0.0081
0.0072
0.0058
0.0060
0.0051
0.0038
1
2
3
4
Copper Conductors
Aluminum Conductors
7
8
9
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.4-1
Sheet 01 057
Capacitors
Capacitors and Power Factor

Capacitor General Application
Considerations
Additional application information
is available in Tab 35 regarding
capacitors and harmonic filters
as follows:
Capacitor selection
Where to install capacitors in a plant
distribution system
Locating capacitors on reduced
voltage and multi-speed starters
Harmonic considerations
Eliminating harmonic problems
National Electrical Code
requirements
Medium Voltage
Capacitor Switching
Capacitance switching constitutes
severe operating duty for a circuit
breaker. At the time the breaker opens
at near current zero, the capacitor is
fully charged. After interruption, when
the alternating voltage on the source
side of the breaker reaches its opposite
maximum, the voltage that appears
across the contacts of the open breaker
is at least twice the normal peak lineto-neutral voltage of the circuit. If a
breakdown occurs across the open
contact, the arc is re-established. Due
to the circuit constants on the supply
side of the breaker, the voltage across
the open contact can reach three times
the normal line-to-neutral voltage.
After it is interrupted and with
subsequent alternation of the supply
side voltage, the voltage across the
open contact is even higher.
ANSI Standard C37.06 (indoor oilless

circuit breakers) indicates the preferred
ratings of Eatons Type VCP-W vacuum
breaker. For capacitor switching,
careful attention should be paid to
the notes accompanying the table.
The definition of the terms are in ANSI
Standard C37.04 Article 5.13 (for the
latest edition). The application guide
ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.012 covers
the method of calculation of the
quantities covered by C37.06 Standard.
Note that the definitions in C37.04
make the switching of two capacitors
banks in close proximity to the switchgear bus a back-to-back mode of
switching. This classification requires
a definite purpose circuit breaker
(breakers specifically designed for
capacitance switching).
Low Voltage Capacitor Switching

Circuit breakers and switches for use
with a capacitor must have a current
rating in excess of rated capacitor
current to provide for overcurrent from
overvoltages at fundamental frequency
and harmonic currents. The following
percent of the capacitor-rated current
should be used as a general guideline:
i
ii
1
Fused and unfused switches. . . . 165%
Molded case breaker or

equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
DSII power circuit breakers. . . . . 135%

Magnum DS power
circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Contactors:
Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
We recommend that such application

be referred to Eaton.
Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
A breaker specified for capacitor

switching should include as applicable:
The NEC, Section 460.8(C), requires

the disconnecting means to be rated not
less than 135% of the rated capacitor
current (for 600V and below).
1. Rated maximum voltage.

2. Rated frequency.
3. Rated open wire line charging
switching current.
4. Rated isolated cable charging and
shunt capacitor switching current.
5. Rated back-to-back cable
charging and back-to-back
capacitor switching current.
6. Rated transient overvoltage factor.
7. Rated transient inrush current and
its frequency.
8. Rated interrupting time.
9. Rated capacitive current
switching life.
10. Grounding of system and
capacitor bank.
Load break interrupter switches
are permitted by ANSI/IEEE Standard
C37.30 to switch capacitance, but they
must have tested ratings for the purpose.
Refer to Eaton Type MVS ratings.
See Tab 35 for switching device

ampere ratings. They are based on
percentage of capacitor-rated current
as indicated (above). The interrupting
rating of the switch must be selected
to match the system fault current
available at the point of capacitor
application. Whenever a capacitor
bank is purchased with less than the
ultimate kVAR capacity of the rack
or enclosure, the switch rating should
be selected based on the ultimate
kVAR capacitynot the initial
installed capacity.
Refer to Tab 35 for recommended
selection of capacitor switching
devices; recommended maximum
capacitor ratings for various motor
types and voltages; and for required
multipliers to determine capacitor
kVARs required for power factor
correction.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.4-2

August 2013
Sheet 01 058
Capacitors
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Motor Power Factor

Correction
See Tab 35 containing suggested
maximum capacitor ratings for
induction motors switched with the
capacitor. The data is general in nature
and representative of general purpose
induction motors of standard design.
The preferable means to select capacitor
ratings is based on the maximum
recommended kVAR information
available from the motor manufacturer.
If this is not possible or feasible, the
tables can be used.
An important point to remember
is that if the capacitor used with the
motor is too large, self-excitation
may cause a motor-damaging overvoltage when the motor and capacitor
combination is disconnected from the
line. In addition, high transient torques
capable of damaging the motor shaft
or coupling can occur if the motor is
reconnected to the line while rotating
and still generating a voltage of
self-excitation.
Definitions
9
10
11
12
kVARrating of the capacitor in

reactive kilovolt-amperes. This value
is approximately equal to the motor
no-load magnetizing kilovars.
% ARpercent reduction in line

current due to the capacitor. A
capacitor located on the motor side
of the overload relay reduces line
current through the relay. Therefore, a
different overload relay and/or setting
may be necessary. The reduction in
line current may be determined by
measuring line current with and
without the capacitor or by calculation
as follows:
(Original PF)
% AR = 100 100
(Improved PF)
If a capacitor is used with a lower kVAR
rating than listed in tables, the % AR
can be calculated as follows:
Actual kVAR
% AR = Listed % AR
kVAR in Table
The tables can also be used for other
motor ratings as follows:
A. For standard 60 Hz motors
operating at 50 Hz:
kVAR = 1.71.4 of kVAR listed
% AR = 1.81.35 of % AR listed
B. For standard 50 Hz motors
operating at 50 Hz:
kVAR = 1.41.1 of kVAR listed
% AR = 1.41.05 of % AR listed
C. For standard 60 Hz wound-rotor
motors:
kVAR = 1.1 of kVAR listed
% AR= 1.05 of % AR listed
To derate a capacitor used on a system

voltage lower than the capacitor
voltage rating, such as a 240V
capacitor used on a 208V system,
use the following formula:
Actual kVAR =
2
( Applied Voltage )
Nameplate kVAR --------------------------------------------------------------------2
( Nameplate Voltage )
For the kVAC required to correct the

power factor from a given value of
COS 1 to COS 2, the formula is:
kVAC = kW (tan phase1tan phase2)
Capacitors cause a voltage rise.
At light load periods the capacitive
voltage rise can raise the voltage at
the location of the capacitors to an
unacceptable level. This voltage rise
can be calculated approximately by
the formula:
MVA r
% VR =
MVA SC
MVAR is the capacitor rating and MVASC

is the system short-circuit capacity.
With the introduction of variable speed
drives and other harmonic current
generating loads, the capacitor
impedance value determined must
not be resonant with the inductive
reactances of the system.
Note: For A, B, C, the larger multipliers

apply for motors of higher speeds; i.e.,
3600 rpm = 1.7 mult., 1800 rpm = 1.65
mult., etc.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-3
Sheet 01 059
Protection and Coordination
Ground-fault curves may also be

included in the coordination study
if ground-fault protection is provided,
but care must be used in interpreting
their meaning.
To ensure complete coordination, the

time-trip characteristics of all devices
in series should be plotted on a single
sheet of standard log-log paper.
Devices of different-voltage systems
can be plotted on the same sheet by
converting their current scales, using
the voltage ratios, to the same voltagebasis. Such a coordination plot is
shown in Figure 1.4-1. In this manner,
primary fuses and circuit breaker
relays on the primary side of a
Standard definitions have been

established for overcurrent protective
devices covering ratings, operation
and application systems.
MMotor (100 hp). Dashed line shows
initial inrush current, starting current
during 9-sec. acceleration, and drop to
124A normal running current, all well
below CBA trip curve.
1000
900
800
700
600
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
4.16 kV
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000
40 50 60
5000
30
4000
20
3000
6 7 8 9 10
2000
600
700
800
900
1000
500
400
300
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES AT 480V

200
Overcurrents in a power distribution

system can occur as a result of both
normal (motor starting, transformer
inrush, etc.) and abnormal (overloads,
ground fault, line-to-line fault, etc.)
conditions. In either case, the fundamental purposes of current-sensing
protective devices are to detect the
abnormal overcurrent and with proper
coordination, to operate selectively
to protect equipment, property
and personnel while minimizing the
outage of the remainder of the system.
With the increase in electric power
consumption over the past few
decades, dependence on the continued supply of this power has also
increased so that the direct costs
of power outages have risen significantly. Power outages can create
dangerous and unsafe conditions as
a result of failure of lighting, elevators,
ventilation, fire pumps, security
systems, communications systems,
and the like. In addition, economic loss
from outages can be extremely high
as a result of computer downtime,
or, especially in industrial process
plants, interruption of production.
substation transformer can be coordinated with the low voltage breakers.

Transformer damage points, based on
ANSI standards, and low voltage cable
heating limits can be plotted on this
set of curves to ensure that apparatus
limitations are not exceeded.
damage or withstand characteristics,

(e) calculation of maximum shortcircuit currents (and ground fault
currents if ground fault protection is
included) available at each protective
device location, (f) understanding of
operating characteristics and available
adjustments of each protective device,
(g) any special overcurrent protection
requirements including utility limitations. Refer to Figure 1.4-1.
70
80
90
100
and Coordination
250 MVA
1000
900
800
700
600
500
500
400
400
300
300
200
200
CA08104001E
250A
1000
kVA
5.75%
50
40
ANSI Three-Phase
Thru Fault
Protection Curve
(More Than 10 in
Lifetime)
30
TIME IN SECONDS
20
4,160V
480/277V
100
90
80
70
60
30
1,600A
20
10
9
8
7
6
600A
20,000A
4
3
175A
A
B
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
100 hp
124A FLC
13
14
15
.5
.5
X = Available fault current

including motor
contribution.
.4
.3
.4
.3
Ground
Fault Trip
.2
Transformer
Inrush
30
40 50 60
.02
SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES AT 480V
Figure 1.4-1. Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Typical Power Distribution System
Protective Devices Coordination Analysis
18
.03
19
.01
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000
20
2000
6 7 8 9 10
600
700
800
900
1000
500
400
200
300
Max.
480V Fault
5000
.03
.04
4000
.04
.02
.05
Max. Three-Phase
4.16 kV Fault
.05
17
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
3000
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
16
.2
.01
12
24,400A
10
11
50
40
19,600A
10
9
8
7
6
70
80
90
100
To study and accomplish coordination

requires (a) a one-line diagram, the
roadmap of the power distribution
system, showing all protective devices
and the major or important distribution
and utilization apparatus, (b) identification of desired degrees of power
continuity or criticality of loads
throughout system, (c) definition
of operating-current characteristics
(normal, peak, starting) of each
utilization circuit, (d) equipment
D
100
90
80
70
60
TIME IN SECONDS
Protective equipment must be adjusted

and maintained in order to function
properly when an overcurrent occurs,
but coordination begins during power
system design with the knowledgeable
analysis and selection and application
of each overcurrent protective device
in the series circuit from the power
source(s) to each load apparatus. The
objective of coordination is to localize
the overcurrent disturbance so that the
protective device closest to the fault
on the power-source side has the first
chance to operate; but each preceding
protective device upstream toward the
power source should be capable, within
its designed settings of current and
time, to provide backup and de-energize
the circuit if the fault persists. Sensitivity
of coordination is the degree to which
the protective devices can minimize
the damage to the faulted equipment.
20
21
1.4-4

August 2013
Sheet 01 060
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
ACB (175A) coordinates selectively

with motor M on starting and running
and with all upstream devices, except
that CB B will trip first on low level
ground faults.
Maximum 480V three-phase fault

indicated on the horizontal current axis.
BCB (600A) coordinates selectively

with all upstream and downstream
devices, except will trip before A on
limited ground faults, since A has no
ground fault trips.
4160
I 480 V = I 4160 V
480
CMain CB (1600A) coordinates

selectively with all downstream
devices and with primary fuse D,
for all faults on load side of CB.
DPrimary fuse (250A, 4160V) coordinates selectively with all secondary
protective devices. Curve converted to
480V basis. Clears transformer inrush
point (12 x FLC for 0.1 sec.), indicating
that fuse will not blow on inrush.
Fuse is underneath right-half of ANSI
three-phase withstand curve, indicating
fuse will protect transformer for highmagnitude faults up to ANSI rating.
Delta-wye secondary side short
circuit is not reflected to the primary
by the relation
V
I P = S I S
VP
for L-L and L-G faults. For line-to-line
fault, the secondary (low voltage) side
fault current is 0.866 x I three-phase
fault current.
However, the primary (high voltage)
side fault is the same as if the secondary
fault was a three-phase fault. Therefore
in coordination studies, the knee of the
short-time pickup setting on the secondary breaker should be multiplied by
1 or 1.1547
0.866
before it is compared to the minimum
melting time of the upstream primary
fuse curve. In the example shown, the
knee is at 4000A 30 sec., and the 30-sec.
trip time should be compared to the
MMT (minimum melt time) of the fuse
curve at 4000 x 1.1547 = 4619A. In this
case, there is adequate clearance to
the fuse curve.
In the example shown, the ANSI

three-phase through fault protection
curve must be multiplied by 0.577
and replotted in order to determine
the protection given by the primary
for a single line to ground fault in
the secondary.
Maximum 4160V three-phase fault

indicated, converted to 480V basis.
The ANSI protection curves are

specified in ANSI C57.109 for liquidfilled transformers and C57.12.59 for
dry-type transformers.
Illustrative examples such as shown
here start the coordination study from
the lowest rated device proceeding
upstream. In practice, the setting or
rating of the utilitys protective device
sets the upper limit. Even in cases
where the customer owns the medium
voltage or higher distribution system,
the setting or rating of the lowest set
protective device at the source determines the settings of the downstream
devices and the coordination.
Therefore the coordination study
should start at the present setting
or rating of the upstream device and
work toward the lowest rated device. If
this procedure results in unacceptable
settings, the setting or rating of the
upstream device should be reviewed.
Where the utility is the sole source,
they should be consulted. Where the
owner has its own medium or higher
voltage distribution, the settings or
ratings of all upstream devices should
be checked.
If perfect coordination is not feasible,
then lack of coordination should be
limited to the smallest part of the system.
Application data is available for all
protective equipment to permit
systems to be designed for adequate
overcurrent protection and coordination. For circuit breakers of all types,
time-current curves permit selection of
instantaneous and inverse-time trips.
For more complex circuit breakers,
with solid-state trip units, trip curves
include long- and short-time delays,
as well as ground-fault tripping, with a
wide range of settings and features to
provide selectivity and coordination.
For current-limiting circuit breakers,
fuses, and circuit breakers with
integral fuses, not only are timecurrent characteristic curves available,
but also data on current-limiting
performance and protection for
downstream devices.
In a fully rated system, all circuit
breakers must have an interrupting
capacity adequate for the maximum
available fault current at their point of

application. All breakers are equipped
with long-time-delay (and possibly
short delay) and instantaneous overcurrent trip devices. A main breaker
may have short time-delay tripping to
allow a feeder breaker to isolate the
fault while power is maintained to all
the remaining feeders.
A selective or fully coordinated system
permits maximum service continuity.
The tripping characteristics of each
overcurrent device in the system must
be selected and set so that the breaker
nearest the fault opens to isolate the
faulted circuit, while all other breakers
remain closed, continuing power to
the entire unfaulted part of the system.
The National Electrical Code
contains specific requirements for
designing certain circuits with selective
coordination. Article 100 defines
selective coordination: Coordination
(Selective), the following definition:
Localization of an overcurrent condition to restrict outages to the circuit or
equipment affected, accomplished by
the choice of overcurrent protective
devices and their ratings or settings.
NEC 2011 NFPA 70: National Electrical Code

International Electrical Code Series.
Article 620.62 (elevators, dumbwaiters,

escalators, moving walks, wheelchair
lifts, and stairway chair lifts) requires
Where more than one driving machine
disconnecting means is supplied by a
single feeder, the overcurrent protective
devices in each disconnecting means
shall be selectively coordinated with
any other supply side overcurrent
protective device. A similar requirement under Article 700.27 is as follows;
Emergency system(s) overcurrent
devices shall be selectively coordinated
with all supply side overcurrent
protective devices. Article 701.27
states that Legally required standby
system(s) overcurrent devices shall be
selectively coordinated with all supply
side overcurrent devices.
Exception: Selective coordination
shall not be required between two
overcurrent devices located in series
if no loads are connected in parallel
with the downstream device.
In addition, for health care facilities,
Article 517.26, Application of Other
Articles requires that The essential
electrical system shall meet the
requirements of Article 700, except
as amended by Article 517.
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.4-5
Sheet 01 061

All breakers must have an interrupting
capacity not less than the maximum
available short-circuit current at their
point of application. A selective
system is a fully rated system with
tripping devices chosen and adjusted
to provide the desired selectivity.
The tripping characteristics of each
overcurrent device should not overlap,
but should maintain a minimum time
interval for devices in series (to allow
for normal operating tolerances) at all
current values. Generally, a maximum
of four low voltage circuit breakers can
be operated selectively in series, with
the feeder or branch breaker downstream furthest from the source.
Specify true rms sensing devices in
order to avoid false trips due to rapid
currents or spikes. Specify tripping
elements with I2t or I4t feature for
improved coordination with other
devices having I2t or I4t (such as
OPTIM trip units) characteristics
and fuses.
In general for systems such as shown
in the example:
1. The settings or ratings of the
primary side fuse and main breaker
must not exceed the settings
allowed by NEC Article 450.
2. At 12 x IFL the minimum melting
time characteristic of the fuse
should be higher than 0.1 second.
3. The primary fuse should be to the
left of the transformer damage
curve as much as possible. The
correction factor for a single lineto-ground factor must be applied
to the damage curve.
4. The setting of the short-time delay
element must be checked against
the fuse MMT after it is corrected
for line-to-line faults.
5. The maximum fault current must
be indicated at the load side of
each protective device.
6. The setting of a feeder protective
device must comply with Article
240 and Article 430 of the NEC.
It also must allow the starting
and acceleration of the largest
motor on the feeder while carrying
all the other loads on the feeder.
Protection of Conductors (Excerpts

from NFPA 70-2011, Article 240.4)
Conductors, other than flexible cords
and fixture wires, shall be protected
against overcurrent in accordance with
their ampacities as specified in Section
310.15, unless otherwise permitted or
required in (A) through (G).
A. Power Loss Hazard. Conductor
overload protection shall not be
required where the interruption of
the circuit would create a hazard,
such as in a material handling
magnet circuit or fire pump circuit.
Short-circuit protection shall be
provided.
Note: FPN See NFPA 20-2003, standard
for the Installation of Stationary Pumps
for Fire Protection.
B. Devices Rated 800A or Less. The

next higher standard overcurrent
device rating (above the ampacity
of the conductors being protected)
shall be permitted to be used,
provided all of the following
conditions are met.
1. The conductors being protected
are not part of a branch circuit
supplying more than one receptacle for cord-and-plug-connected
portable loads.
2. The ampacity of the conductors
does not correspond with the
standard ampere rating of a fuse or
a circuit breaker without overload
trip adjustments above its rating
(but that shall be permitted to have
other trip or rating adjustments).
3. The next higher standard rating
selected does not exceed 800A.
C. Overcurrent Devices Rated Over
800A. Where the overcurrent
device is rated over 800A, the
ampacity of the conductors it
protects shall be equal to or
greater than the rating of the
overcurrent device as defined in
Section 240.6.
D. Small Conductors. Unless
specifically permitted in 240.4(E)
or 240.4(G), the overcurrent
protection shall not exceed 15A
for 14 AWG, 20A for 12 AWG, and
30A for 10 AWG copper; or 15A
for 12 AWG and 25A for 10 AWG
aluminum and copper-clad
aluminum after any correction
factors for ambient temperature
and number of conductors have
been applied.
E. Tap Conductors. Tap conductors

shall be permitted to be protected
against overcurrent in accordance
with the following:
1. 210.19(A)(3) and (A)(4) Household
Ranges and Cooking Appliances
and Other Loads.
i
ii
1
2. 240.5(B)(2) Fixture Wire.

3. 240.21 Location in Circuit.
4. 368.17(B) Reduction in Ampacity
Size of Busway.
5. 368.17(C) Feeder or Branch Circuits
(busway taps).
2
3
4
6. 430.53(D) Single Motor Taps.

Temperature Ratings
UL listed circuit breakers rated 125A or

less shall be marked as being suitable
for 60C (140F), 75C (167F) only or
60/75C (140/167F) wire. All Eaton
breakers rated 125A or less are marked
60/75C (140/167F). All UL listed circuit
breakers rated over 125A are suitable
for 75C conductors. Conductors rated
for higher temperatures may be used,
but must not be loaded to carry more
current than the 75C ampacity of that
size conductor for equipment marked
or rated 75C or the 60C ampacity of
that size conductor for equipment
marked or rated 60C. However, when
applying derated factors, so long as
the actual load does not exceed the
lower of the derated ampacity or the
75C or 60C ampacity that applies.
Zone Selective Interlocking

Trip elements equipped with zone
selective interlocking, trip without
intentional time delay unless a
restraint signal is received from
a protective device downstream.
Breakers equipped with this feature
reduce the damage at the point of
fault if the fault occurs at a location
between the zone of protection.
The upstream breaker upon receipt
of the restraint signal will not trip until
its time-delay setting times out. If the
breaker immediately downstream of the
fault does not open, then after timing
out, the upstream breaker will trip.
Breakers equipped with ground fault
trip elements should also be specified
to include zone interlocking for the
ground fault trip element.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.4-6

August 2013
Sheet 01 062
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Ground Fault Protection
Suggested Ground Fault Settings
Article 230.95 of NEC requires groundfault protection of equipment shall be

provided for solidly grounded wye
electrical services of more than 150V
to ground, but not exceeding 600V
phase-to-phase for each service
disconnect rated 1000A or more.
For the main devices:

A ground fault pickup setting equal
to 2030% of the main breaker rating
but not to exceed 1200A, and a time
delay equal to the delay of the shorttime element, but not to exceed
1 second.
The rating of the service disconnect

shall be considered to be the rating
of the largest fuse that can be installed
or the highest continuous current trip
setting for which the actual overcurrent
device installed in a circuit breaker is
rated or can be adjusted.
For the feeder ground fault setting:

A setting equal to 2030% of the feeder
ampacity and a time delay to coordinate
with the setting of the main (at least
6 cycles below the main).
The maximum allowable settings are:

1200A pickup, 1 second or less trip
delay at currents of 3000A or greater.
The characteristics of the ground-fault
trip elements create coordination
problems with downstream devices
not equipped with ground fault
protection. The National Electrical
Code exempts fire pumps and
continuous industrial processes
from this requirement.
It is recommended that in solidly
grounded 480/277V systems where
main breakers are specified to be
equipped with ground fault trip elements
that the feeder breakers be specified
to be equipped with ground fault trip
elements as well.
If the desire to selectively coordinate

ground fault devices results in settings
that do not offer adequate damage
protection against arcing single lineground faults, the design engineer
should decide between coordination
and damage limitation.
For low voltage systems with highmagnitude available short-circuit
currents, common in urban areas and
large industrial installations, several
solutions are available. High interrupting Series C molded case breakers,
current-limiting circuit breakers, or
current-limiting fuses, limiters integral
with molded-case circuit breakers
(TRI-PAC) or mounted on power
circuit breakers (MDSL) can be used to
handle these large fault currents. To
provide current limiting, these devices
must clear the fault completely within
the first half-cycle, limiting the peak
current (Ip) and heat energy (I2t)
let-through to considerably less than
what would have occurred without
the device. For a fully fusible system,
rule-of-thumb fuse ratios or more
accurate I2t curves can be used to
provide selectivity and coordination.
For fuse-breaker combinations, the
fuse should be selected (coordinated)
so as to permit the breaker to handle
those overloads and faults within its
capacity; the fuse should operate
before or with the breaker only on
large faults, approaching the interrupting capacity of the breaker, to minimize
fuse blowing. Recently, unfused, truly
current-limiting circuit breakers with
interrupting ratings adequate for the
largest systems (Type Series C, FDC,
JDC, KDC, LDC and NDC frames
or Type Current Limit-R) have
become available.
The Series G high performance,

current-limiting circuit breaker series
offers interrupting ratings to 200 kA.
Frames are EGC, EGU, EGX, JGC,
JGU, JGX, LGC, LGU and LGX.
Any of these current-limiting devices
fuses, fused breakers or current-limiting breakerscannot only clear these
large faults safely, but also will limit
the Ip and I2t let-through significantly
to prevent damage to apparatus
downstream, extending their zone
of protection. Without the current
limitation of the upstream device,
the fault current could exceed the
withstand capability of the downstream equipment. Underwriters
Laboratories tests and lists these
series combinations. Application
information is available for
combinations that have been tested
and UL-listed for safe operation
downstream from MDSL, TRI-PAC,
and Current Limit-R, or Series C
breakers of various ratings, under
high available fault currents.
Protective devices in electrical
distribution systems may be properly
coordinated when the systems are
designed and built, but that is no
guarantee that they will remain
coordinated. System changes and
additions, plus power source changes,
frequently modify the protection
requirements, sometimes causing loss
of coordination and even increasing
fault currents beyond the ratings of
some devices. Consequently, periodic
study of protective-device settings
and ratings is as important for safety
and preventing power outages
as is periodic maintenance of the
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-7
Sheet 01 063
Grounding
above ground potential. Any person

coming in contact with such an object
while grounded could be seriously
injured or killed. In addition, current
flow from the accidental grounding of
an energized part of the system could
generate sufficient heat (often with
arcing) to start a fire. To prevent the
establishment of such unsafe potential
difference requires that (1) the equipment grounding conductor provide a
return path for ground fault currents of
sufficiently low impedance to prevent
unsafe voltage drop, and (2) the equipment grounding conductor be large
enough to carry the maximum ground
fault current, without burning off, for
sufficient time to permit protective
devices (ground fault relays, circuit
breakers, fuses) to clear the fault. The
grounded conductor of the system
(usually the neutral conductor),
although grounded at the source, must
not be used for equipment grounding.
Grounding encompasses several

different but interrelated aspects of
electrical distribution system design
and construction, all of which are
essential to the safety and proper
operation of the system and equipment supplied by it. Among these
are equipment grounding, system
grounding, static and lightning
protection, and connection to earth
as a reference (zero) potential.
1. Equipment Grounding
Equipment grounding is essential
to safety of personnel. Its function is
to ensure that all exposed noncurrentcarrying metallic parts of all structures
and equipment in or near the electrical
distribution system are at the same
potential, and that this is the zero
reference potential of the earth.
Equipment grounding is required
by both the National Electrical Code
(Article 250) and the National Electrical
Safety Code regardless of how the
power system is grounded. Equipment
grounding also provides a return path
for ground fault currents, permitting
protective devices to operate. Accidental contact of an energized conductor
of the system with an improperly
grounded noncurrent-carry metallic
part of the system (such as a motor
frame or panelboard enclosure) would
raise the potential of the metal object
The equipment grounding conductor

may be the metallic conduit or raceway
of the wiring system, or a separate
equipment grounding conductor,
run with the circuit conductors, as
permitted by NEC. If a separate
equipment grounding conductor is
used, it may be bare or insulated; if
insulated, the insulation must be green,
green with yellow stripe or green tape.
Conductors with green insulation may
not be used for any purpose other than
for equipment grounding.
The equipment grounding system

must be bonded to the grounding
electrode at the source or service;
however, it may be also connected
to ground at many other points.
This will not cause problems with
the safe operation of the electrical
distribution system. Where computers,
data processing, or microprocessorbased industrial process control
systems are installed, the equipment
grounding system must be designed
to minimize interference with their
proper operation. Often, isolated
grounding of this equipment, or
isolated electrical supply systems are
required to protect microprocessors
from power system noise that does
not in any way affect motors or other
electrical equipment. Such systems
must use single-point ground concept
to minimize noise and still meet
the NEC requirements. Any separate
isolated ground mat must be tied to
the rest of the facility ground mat
system for NEC compliance.
2. System Grounding
System grounding connects the
electrical supply, from the utility, from
transformer secondary windings, or
from a generator, to ground. A system
can be solidly grounded (no intentional
impedance to ground), impedance
grounded (through a resistance or
reactance), or ungrounded (with no
intentional connection to ground.
3. Medium Voltage System: Grounding

Description
A
Ungrounded
B
Solidly Grounded
C
Reactance Grounded
D
Resistance Grounded
E
Resonant Grounded
(1) Apparatus
insulation
(2) Fault to
ground current
Fully insulated
Lowest
Partially graded
Partially graded
Partially graded
Usually low
Maximum value rarely

higher than three-phase
short circuit current
Cannot satisfactorily be
reduced below one-half
or one-third of values for
solid grounding
Low
Improved over solid

grounding particularly
if used at receiving end
of system
Improved over solid

grounding particularly
if used at receiving end
of system
Unlikely
Negligible except when

Petersen coil is short
circuited for relay
purposes when it may
compare with solidly
grounded systems
Is eliminated from
consideration during
single line-to-ground
faults unless neutralizer
is short circuited to
isolate fault by relays
Requires special
provisions but can be
made satisfactory
Unlikely
Effect of faults
transmitted as excess
voltage on sound phases
to all parts of conductively
connected network
Unlikely unless
resistance is quite high
and insulation weak
Effect of faults
transmitted as excess
voltage on sound phases
to all parts of conductively
connected network
Seem to be more likely
but conclusive information
not available
Usually unimportant
Lower than with other

methods but can be
made satisfactory by use
of high-speed breakers
(4) Relaying
Difficult
Satisfactory
(5) Arcing
grounds
(6) Localizing
faults
Likely
Unlikely
(7) Double
faults
CA08104001E
Satisfactory
Possible if reactance is
excessive
Effect of fault transmitted Effect of faults localized
Effect of faults localized to
as excess voltage on
to system or part of
system or part of system
sound phases to all
system where they occur where they occur unless
parts of conductively
reactance is quite high
connected network
Likely
Likely
Unlikely unless
reactance is quite high
and insulation weak
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Table 1.4-1. Features of Ungrounded and Grounded Systems (from ANSI C62.92)
(3) Stability
Satisfactory
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1.4-8

August 2013
Sheet 01 064
i
ii
Table 1.4-1. Features of Ungrounded and Grounded Systems (Continued)

Description
A
Ungrounded
(8) Lightning
protection
C
Reactance Grounded
D
Resistance Grounded
E
Resonant Grounded
Ungrounded neutral
Highest efficiency and
service arresters must be lowest cost
applied at sacrifice in cost
and efficiency
If reactance is very high

arresters for ungrounded
neutral service must be
applied at sacrifice in cost
and efficiency
Arresters for ungrounded,

neutral service usually
must be applied at
sacrifice in cost and
efficiency
Ungrounded neutral
service arresters must
be applied at sacrifice
in cost and efficiency
(9) Telephone
interference
Will usually be low

except in cases of double
faults or electrostatic
induction with neutral
displaced but duration
may be great
Will be reduced from

solidly grounded values
Will be reduced from

solidly grounded values
Will be low in magnitude

except in cases of double
faults or series resonance
at harmonic frequencies,
but duration may be great
(10) Radio
interference
May be quite high during Minimum

faults or when neutral
is displayed
Greater than for

solidly grounded,
when faults occur
Greater than for

solidly grounded,
when faults occur
May be high during faults
(11) Line
availability
Will inherently clear

Must be isolated for
themselves if total length each fault
of interconnected line is
low and require isolation
from system in increasing percentages as length
becomes greater

each fault

each fault
Need not be isolated but

will inherently clear itself
in about 60 to 80 percent
of faults
(12) Adaptability Cannot be interconnected Satisfactory indefinitely

Satisfactory indefinitely
to interconnection unless interconnecting
with reactance-grounded with solidly-grounded
system is ungrounded
systems
systems
or isolating transformers
are used
Satisfactory with solidlyor reactance-grounded

systems with proper
attention to relaying
Cannot be interconnected
unless interconnected
system is resonant
grounded or isolating
transformers are used.
Requires coordination
between interconnected
systems in neutralizer
settings
(13) Circuit
breakers
Interrupting capacity
determined by threephase conditions
Same interrupting
capacity as required for
three-phase short circuit
will practically always be
satisfactory
determined by threephase fault conditions
(14) Operating
procedure
Ordinarily simple but

possibility of double
faults introduces
complication in times
of trouble
Simple
Simple
Simple
Taps on neutralizers must

be changed when major
system switching is performed and difficulty may
arise in interconnected
systems. Difficult to tell
where faults are located
(15) Total cost
High, unless conditions

Lowest
are such that arc tends
to extinguish itself, when
transmission circuits may
be eliminated, reducing
total cost
Intermediate
Intermediate
Highest unless the arc

suppressing characteristic is relied on to eliminate
transmission circuits
when it may be lowest
for the particular types
of service
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Solidly Grounded
Will be greatest in
magnitude due to higher
fault currents but can
be quickly cleared
particularly with high
speed breakers
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Because the method of grounding

affects the voltage rise of the unfaulted
phases above ground, ANSI C62.92
classifies systems from the point of
view of grounding in terms of a
coefficient of grounding
Highest Power Frequency
rms Line Ground Voltage
COG = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------rms Line Line Voltage at Fault
Location with the Fault Removed
This same standard also defines

systems as effectively grounded when
COG .8 such a system would have
X0 /X1 3.0 and R0 /X1 1.0. Any other
grounding means that does not satisfy
these conditions at any point in a
system is not effectively grounded.
The aforementioned definition is

of significance in medium voltage
distribution systems with long lines
and with grounded sources removed
during light load periods so that in
some locations in the system the
X0 /X1, R0 /X1 may exceed the defining
limits. Other standards (cable and
lightning arrester) allow the use of
100% rated cables and arresters
selected on the basis of an effectively
grounded system only where the
criteria in the above are met. In
effectively grounded system the lineto-ground fault current is high and
there is no significant voltage rise in
the unfaulted phases.
With selective ground fault isolation
the fault current should be at least 60%
of the three-phase current at the point

of fault. Damage to cable shields must
be checked. Although this fact is not
a problem except in small cables, it is
a good idea to supplement the cable
shields returns of ground fault current
to prevent damage, by installing an
equipment grounding conductor.
The burdens on the current transformers

must be checked also (for saturation
considerations), where residually
connected ground relays are used
and the current transformers supply
current to phase relays and meters.
If ground sensor current transformers
(zero sequence type) are used they
must be of high burden capacity.
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-9
Sheet 01 065

should not be limited to less than the
current transformers rating of the
source. This rule will provide sensitive
differential protection for wye-connected
generators and transformers against
line-to-ground faults near the neutral.
Of course, if the installation of ground
fault differential protection is feasible,
or ground sensor current transformers
are used, sensitive differential relaying
in resistance grounded system with
greater fault limitation is feasible.
In general, ground sensor current
transformers (zero sequence) do not
have high burden capacity. Resistance
grounded systems limit the circulating
currents of triple harmonics and limit
the damage at the point of fault. This
method of grounding is not suitable
for line-to-neutral connection of loads.
Table 1.4-2 taken from ANSI-C62.92

indicates the characteristics of the
various methods of grounding.
Reactance Grounding
It is generally used in the grounding
of the neutrals of generators directly
connected to the distribution system
bus, in order to limit the line-to-ground
fault to somewhat less than the threephase fault at the generator terminals.
If the reactor is so sized, in all probability
the system will remain effectively
grounded.
Resistance Grounded
Medium voltage systems in general
should be low resistance grounded.
The ground fault is typically limited to
about 200400A but less than 1000A
(a cable shield consideration). With a
properly sized resistor and relaying
application, selective fault isolation
is feasible. The fault limit provided
has a bearing on whether residually
connected relays are used or ground
sensor current transformers are used
for ground fault relaying.
On medium voltage systems, 100%

cable insulation is rated for phase-toneutral voltage. If continued operation
with one phase faulted to ground is
desired, increased insulation thickness is required. For 100% insulation,
fault clearance is recommended within
one minute; for 133% insulation, one
hour is acceptable; for indefinite
operation, as long as necessary,
173% insulation is required.
In general, where residually connected

ground relays are used (51N), the fault
current at each grounded source
Table 1.4-2. Characteristics of Grounding
Grounding Classes
and Means
A. Effectively
1. Effective
2. Very effective
B. Noneffectively
1. Inductance
a. Low inductance
b. High inductance
2. Resistance
a. Low resistance
b. High resistance
3. Inductance and resistance
4. Resonant
5. Ungrounded/capacitance
a. Range A
b. Range B

Ratios of Symmetrical
Component Parameters
Percent Fault
Current
Per Unit Transient

LG Voltage
X0/X1
R0/X1
R0/X0
0-3
0-1
0-1
0-0.1
>60
>95
2
<1.5
3-10
>10
0-1
<2
>25
<25
<2.3
2.73
0-10
>10
>100
2
(-1)
>2
<25
<1
<10
<1
<2.5
2.73
2.73
2.73
- to -40
-40 to 0
<8
>8
3
>3
Values of the coefficient of grounding (expressed as a percentage of maximum phase-to-phase

voltage) corresponding to various combinations of these ratios are shown in the ANSI C62.92
Appendix figures. Coefficient of grounding affects the selection of arrester ratings.
Ground-fault current in percentage of the three-phase short-circuit value.
Transient line-to-ground voltage, following the sudden initiation of a fault in per unit of the crest
of the prefault line-to-ground operating voltage for a simple, linear circuit.
In linear circuits, Class A1 limits the fundamental line-to-ground voltage on an unfaulted phase to
138% of the prefault voltage; Class A2 to less than 110%.
See ANSI 62.92 para. 7.3 and precautions given in application sections.
Usual isolated neutral (ungrounded) system for which the zero-sequence reactance is capacitive
(negative).
Same as NOTE (6) and refer to ANSI 62.92 para. 7.4. Each case should be treated on its own merit.
Under restriking arcing ground fault conditions (e.g., vacuum breaker interrupter operation),
this value can approach 500%.
Under arcing ground fault conditions, this value can easily reach 700%, but is essentially unlimited.
Grounding Point
The most commonly used grounding
point is the neutral of the system or the
neutral point created by means of a
zigzag or a wye-broken delta grounding
transformer in a system that was operating as an ungrounded delta system.
In general, it is a good practice that all
source neutrals be grounded with the
same grounding impedance magnitude.
However, neutrals should not be tied
together to a single resistor. Where
one of the medium voltage sources is
the utility, their consent for impedance
grounding must be obtained.
The neutral impedance must have a
voltage rating at least equal to the rated
line-to-neutral voltage class of the system. It must have at least a 10-second
rating equal to the maximum future
line-to-ground fault current and a
continuous rating to accommodate the
triple harmonics that may be present.
4. Low Voltage System: Grounding

Solidly grounded three-phase systems
(Figure 1.4-2) are usually wyeconnected, with the neutral point
grounded. Less common is the redleg or high-leg delta, a 240V system
supplied by some utilities with one
winding center-tapped to provide 120V
to ground for lighting. This 240V, threephase, four-wire system is used where
120V lighting load is small compared
to 240V power load, because the
installation is low in cost to the utility.
A corner-grounded three-phase delta
system is sometimes found, with
one phase grounded to stabilize all
voltages to ground. Better solutions
are available for new installations.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Phase A
Phase B
14
Phase C
Neutral
15
Grounded Wye
16
Phase B
Phase C
Phase A
Neutral
17
18
Center-Tapped (High-Leg) Delta
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
19
20
Corner-Grounded Delta
Figure 1.4-2. Solidly Grounded Systems

CA08104001E
21

August 2013
Sheet 01 066
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Ungrounded systems (Figure 1.4-3)

can be either wye or delta, although
the ungrounded delta system is far
more common.
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Ungrounded Delta
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Ungrounded Wye
Figure 1.4-3. Ungrounded Systems
5
6
7
Resistance-grounded systems
(Figure 1.4-4) are simplest with a
wye connection, grounding the neutral
point directly through the resistor.
Delta systems can be grounded by
means of a zig-zag or other grounding
transformer. Wye broken delta
transformer banks may also be used.
8
9
10
16
17
18
19
20
15
Phase A
12
14
Phase C
Resistance-Grounded Wye
11
13
Phase A
Phase B

N
R
Phase B
Phase C
Delta With Derived Neutral ResistanceGrounded Using Zig-Zag Transformer
Figure 1.4-4. Resistance-Grounded Systems

This derives a neutral point, which
can be either solidly or impedancegrounded. If the grounding transformer
has sufficient capacity, the neutral
created can be solidly grounded and
used as part of a three-phase, four-wire
system. Most transformer-supplied
systems are either solidly grounded
or resistance grounded. Generator
neutrals are often grounded through
a reactor, to limit ground fault (zero
sequence) currents to values the
generator can withstand.
Selecting the Low Voltage System

Grounding Method
There is no one best distribution
system for all applications. In choosing
among solidly grounded, resistance
grounded, or ungrounded power
distribution, the characteristics of the
system must be weighed against the
requirements of power loads, lighting
loads, continuity of service, safety
and cost.
Under ground fault conditions, each
system behaves very differently. A
solidly grounded system produces
high fault currents, usually with arcing,
and the faulted circuit must be cleared
on the first fault within a fraction of a
second to minimize damage. An
ungrounded system will pass limited
current into the first ground fault
only the charging current of the system,
caused by the distributed capacitance
to ground of the system wiring and
equipment. In low voltage systems,
this is rarely more than 1 or 2A.
Therefore, on first ground fault, an
ungrounded system can continue in
service, making it desirable where
power outages cannot be tolerated.
However, if the ground fault is
intermittent, sputtering or arcing, a
high voltageas much as 6 to 8 times
phase voltagecan be built up across
the system capacitance, from the
phase conductors to ground. Similar
high voltages can occur as a result
of resonance between system
capacitance and the inductances
of transformers and motors in the
system. The phase-to-phase voltage
is not affected. This high transient
phase-to-ground voltage can puncture
insulation at weak points, such as
motor windings, and is a frequent
cause of multiple motor failures on
ungrounded systems. Locating a first
fault on an ungrounded system can
be difficult. If, before the first fault is
cleared, a second ground fault occurs
on a different phase, even on a
different, remote feeder, it is a highcurrent phase-to-ground-to-phase
fault, usually arcing, that can cause
severe damage if at least one of the
grounds is not cleared immediately.
If the second circuit is remote, enough
current may not flow to cause
protection to operate. This can leave
high voltages and stray currents on
structures and jeopardize personnel.
In general, where loads will be
connected line-to-neutral, solidly
grounded systems are used. High
resistance grounded systems are
used as substitutes for ungrounded

systems where high system
availability is required.
With one phase grounded, the voltage
to ground of the other two phases
rises 73%, to full phase-to-phase
voltage. In low voltage systems this
is not important, since conductors
are insulated for 600V.
A low voltage resistance grounded
system is normally grounded so that
the single line-to-ground fault current
exceeds the capacitive charging
current of the system. If data for the
charging current is not available, use
4050 ohm resistor in the neutral
of the transformer.
In commercial and institutional
installations, such as office buildings,
shopping centers, schools and hospitals,
lighting loads are often 50% or more
of the total load. In addition, a feeder
outage on first ground fault is seldom
crucialeven in hospitals, that have
emergency power in critical areas. For
these reasons, a solidly grounded wye
distribution, with the neutral used for
lighting circuits, is usually the most
economical, effective and convenient
design. In some instances, it is an
NEC requirement.
In industrial installations, the effect
of a shutdown caused by a single
ground fault could be disastrous.
An interrupted process could cause
the loss of all the materials involved,
often ruin the process equipment
itself, and sometimes create extremely
dangerous situations for operating
personnel. On the other hand, lighting
is usually only a small fraction of the
total industrial electrical load. A solidly
grounded neutral circuit conductor
is not imperative and, when required,
can be obtained from inexpensive
lighting transformers.
Because of the ability to continue in
operation with one ground fault on
the system, many existing industrial
plants use ungrounded delta distribution. Today, new installations can have
all the advantages of service continuity
of the ungrounded delta, yet minimize
the problems of the system, such
as the difficulty of locating the first
ground fault, risk of damage from a
second ground fault, and damage
transient overvoltages. A highresistance grounded wye distribution
can continue in operation with a
ground fault on the system and will
not develop transient overvoltages.
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.4-11
Sheet 01 067

And, because the ground point is
established, locating a ground fault is
less difficult than on an ungrounded
system especially when a pulsing
contactor design is applied. When
combined with sensitive ground-fault
protection, damage from a second
ground fault can be nearly eliminated.
Ungrounded delta systems can be
converted to high-resistance grounded
systems, using a zig-zag or other
grounding transformer to derive a
neutral, with similar benefits, see
Tab 36. While the majority of
manufacturing plants use solidly
grounded systems, in many instances,
the high-resistance grounded distribution will be the most advantageous.

A ground fault normally occurs in one
of two ways: by accidental contact of
an energized conductor with normally
grounded metal, or as a result of
an insulation failure of an energized
conductor. When an insulation failure
occurs, the energized conductor
contacts normally noncurrent-carrying
grounded metal, which is bonded to
or part of the equipment grounding
conductor. In a solidly grounded
system, the fault current returns to the
source primarily along the equipment
grounding conductors, with a small
part using parallel paths such as building steel or piping. If the ground return
impedance was as low as that of the
circuit conductors, ground fault currents
would be high, and the normal phase
overcurrent protection would clear
them with little damage. Unfortunately,
the impedance of the ground return
path is usually higher, the fault itself
is usually arcing and the impedance
of the arc further reduces the fault
current. In a 480Y/277V system, the
voltage drop across the arc can be
from 70 to 140V. The resulting ground
fault current is rarely enough to cause
the phase overcurrent protection
device to open instantaneously and
prevent damage. Sometimes, the
ground fault is below the trip setting of
the protective device and it does not
trip at all until the fault escalates and
extensive damage is done. For these
reasons, low level ground protection
devices with minimum time delay
settings are required to rapidly clear
ground faults. This is emphasized by
the NEC requirement that a ground
fault relay on a service shall have a
maximum delay of one second for
faults of 3000A or more.
The NEC (Sec. 230.95) requires that
ground fault protection, set at no more
than 1200A, be provided for each service
CA08104001E
disconnecting means rated 1000A or

more on solidly grounded wye services
of more than 150V to ground, but
not exceeding 600V phase-to-phase.
Practically, this makes ground fault
protection mandatory on 480Y/277V
services, but not on 208Y/120V services.
On a 208V system, the voltage to
ground is 120V. If a ground fault
occurs, the arc goes out at current
zero, and the voltage to ground is
often too low to cause it to restrike.
Therefore, arcing ground faults on
208V systems tend to be self-extinguishing. On a 480V system, with 277V
to ground, restrike usually takes place
after current zero, and the arc tends to
be self-sustaining, causing severe and
increasing damage, until the fault is
cleared by a protective device.
The NEC requires ground fault
protection on the service disconnecting
means. This protection works so fast
that for ground faults on feeders, or
even branch circuits, it will often open
the service disconnect before the
feeder or branch circuit overcurrent
device can operate. This is highly
undesirable, and in the NEC (230.95)
a Fine Print Note (FPN) states that
additional ground fault protective
equipment will be needed on feeders
and branch circuits where maximum
continuity of electric service is necessary. Unless it is acceptable to disconnect the entire service on a ground
fault almost anywhere in the system,
such additional stages of ground
fault protection must be provided.
At least two stages of protection are
mandatory in health care facilities
(NEC Sec. 517.17).
Overcurrent protection is designed to
protect conductors and equipment
against currents that exceed their
ampacity or rating under prescribed
time values. An overcurrent can result
from an overload, short circuit or (high
level) ground fault condition. When
currents flow outside the normal
current path to ground, supplementary
ground fault protection equipment will
be required to sense low-level ground
fault currents and initiate the protection
required. Normal phase overcurrent
protection devices provide no protection
against low-level ground faults.
There are three basic means of sensing
ground faults. The most simple and
direct method is the ground return
method as illustrated in Figure 1.4-5.
This sensing method is based on the fact
that all currents supplied by a transformer must return to that transformer.
Main
Neutral
ii
Service
Transformer
GFR
Sensor
Typical
Feeder
Ground Bus
Main Bonding
Jumper
Grounding
Electrode
Conductor
Equipment
Grounding
Conductor
Typical
4W Load
Figure 1.4-5. Ground Return Sensing Method

When an energized conductor faults
to grounded metal, the fault current
returns along the ground return path to
the neutral of the source transformer.
This path includes the main bonding
jumper as shown in Figure 1.4-5.
A current sensor on this conductor
(which can be a conventional bar-type
or window type CT) will respond to
ground fault currents only. Normal
neutral currents resulting from
unbalanced loads will return along
the neutral conductor and will not be
detected by the ground return sensor.
This is an inexpensive method of sensing

ground faults where protection per
NEC (230.95) is desired. For it to
operate properly, the neutral must be
grounded in only one place as indicated
in Figure 1.4-5. In many installations,
the servicing utility grounds the neutral
at the transformer and additional
grounding is required in the service
equipment per NEC (250.24(A)(2)).
In such cases, and others including
multiple source with multiple, interconnected neutral ground points,
residual or zero sequence ground
sensing methods should be employed.
A second method of detecting ground
faults involves the use of a zero
sequence sensing method, as illustrated in Figure 1.4-6. This sensing
method requires a single, specially
designed sensor either of a toroidal
or rectangular shaped configuration.
This core balance current transformer
surrounds all the phase and neutral
conductors in a typical three-phase,
four-wire distribution system. The
sensing method is based on the fact
that the vectorial sum of the phase and
neutral currents in any distribution
circuit will equal zero unless a ground
fault condition exists downstream from
the sensor. All currents that flow only
in the circuit conductors, including
balanced or unbalanced phase-to-phase
and phase-to-neutral normal or fault
currents, and harmonic currents, will
result in zero sensor output.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

August 2013
Sheet 01 068
1
2
Zero
Sequence
Sensor
levels of ground fault protection are

desired for added service continuity.
Additional grounding points may be
employed upstream of the residual
sensors, but not on the load side.
neutral. In a residual sensing scheme,

the relationship of the polarity markings
as noted by the X on each sensor
is critical. Because the vectorial sum of
the currents in all the conductors will
total zero under normal, non-ground
faulted conditions, it is imperative
that proper polarity connections are
employed to reflect this condition.
Alternate
Sensor
Location
Sensor
Polarity
Marks
Main
Both the zero sequence and

residual sensing methods have
been commonly referred to as
vectorial summation methods.
Most distribution systems can use
either of the three sensing methods
exclusively or a combination of the
sensing methods depending upon
the complexity of the system and
the degree of service continuity and
selective coordination desired.
Different methods will be required
depending upon the number of supply
sources, and the number and location
of system grounding points.
Residual
Sensors
Main
Neutral
Neutral
GFR
Typical
Feeder
5
Typical
4W Load
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 1.4-6. Zero Sequence Sensing Method

Zero sequence sensors are available
with various window openings for
circuits with small or large conductors,
and even with large rectangular windows to fit over bus bars or multiple
large size conductors in parallel. Some
sensors have split cores for installation
over existing conductors without
disturbing the connections.
This method of sensing ground faults
can be employed on the main disconnect where protection per NEC (230.95)
is desired. It can also be easily employed
in multi-tier systems where additional
desired for added service continuity.
Additional grounding points may be
employed upstream of the sensor, but
not on the load side.
Ground fault protection employing
ground return or zero sequence sensing
methods can be accomplished by the
use of separate ground fault relays
(GFRs) and disconnects equipped with
standard shunt trip devices or by circuit
breakers with integral ground fault
protection with external connections
arranged for these modes of sensing. In
some cases, a reliable source of control
power is needed.
The third basic method of detecting
ground faults involves the use of
multiple current sensors connected in
a residual sensing method as illustrated
in Figure 1.4-7. This is a very common
sensing method used with circuit breakers equipped with electronic trip units,
current sensors and integral ground
fault protection. The three-phase sensors
are required for normal phase overcurrent protection. Ground fault sensing
is obtained with the addition of an
identically rated sensor mounted on the
Typical
4W Load
As an example, one of the more

frequently used systems where
continuity of service to critical loads
is a factor is the dual source system
illustrated in Figure 1.4-8. This system
uses tie-point grounding as permitted
under NEC Sec. 250.24(A)(3). The use
of this grounding method is limited
to services that are dual fed (doubleended) in a common enclosure or
grouped together in separate enclosures,
employing a secondary tie.
Figure 1.4-7. Residual Sensing Method

As with the zero sequence sensing
method, the resultant residual sensor
output to the ground fault relay or
integral ground fault tripping circuit
will be zero if all currents flow only
in the circuit conductors. Should a
ground fault occur, the current from
the faulted conductor will return along
the ground path, rather than on the
other circuit conductors, and the residual sum of the sensor outputs will not
be zero. When the level of ground fault
current exceeds the pre-set current
and time delay settings, a ground
fault tripping action will be initiated.
This scheme uses individual sensors

connected in ground return fashion.
Under tie breaker closed operating
conditions, either the M1 sensor or
M2 sensor could see neutral unbalance
currents and possibly initiate an
improper tripping operation. However,
with the polarity arrangements of
these two sensors along with the tie
breaker auxiliary switch (T/a) and
interconnections as shown, this
possibility is eliminated.
This method of sensing ground faults

can be economically applied on main
service disconnects where circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection
are provided. It can be used in protection schemes per NEC (230.95) or in
multi-tier schemes where additional
Power
Transformer
Power
Transformer
Neutral Sensor
Main Bkr. 52-1
Main
Bkr.
52-1
Neutral Sensor
Main Bkr. 52-2
Tie Bkr.
52-T
A, B, C
Neutral
Typical
4-Wire
Feeder
Neutral Sensor
Tie Bkr. 52-T
( )B5
( )B4
4-Wire
Load
B4
B5
Digitrip
Main
Bkr.
52-2
A, B, C
Neutral
M1N
M1G
Typical
Feeder
GFR
52-T
a
B5
B4
Digitrip
Main Bkr.
52-1
TG
M2G
M2N
ii
However, should any conductor become

grounded, the fault current will return
along the ground pathnot the normal
circuit conductorsand the sensor will
have an unbalanced magnetic flux
condition, and a sensor output will
be generated to actuate the ground
fault relay.
TN
3352-T
B4
B5
Digitrip
Main Bkr.
52-T
( )B5
Typical
52-T 4-Wire
Feeder
a
B4
B5
Digitrip
Main Bkr.
52-2
( )B4
4-Wire
Load
B4
B5
Digitrip
Figure 1.4-8. Dual Source SystemSingle Point Grounding

Note: This GF scheme requires trip units to be set to source ground sensing.
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-13
Sheet 01 069

or a combination of all types may be
employed to accomplish the desired
end results.
Selective ground fault tripping coordination between the tie breaker and the
two main circuit breakers is achieved
by pre-set current pickup and time
delay settings between devices GFR/1,
GFR/2 and GFR/T.
Because the NEC (230.95) limits the

maximum setting of the ground fault
protection used on service equipment
to 1200A (and timed tripping at 3000A
for one second), to prevent tripping
of the main service disconnect on a
feeder ground fault, ground fault
protection must be provided on all the
feeders. To maintain maximum service
continuity, more than two levels (zones)
of ground fault protection will be
required, so that ground fault outages
can be localized and service interruption minimized. To obtain selectivity
between different levels of ground
fault relays, time delay settings should
be employed with the GFR furthest
downstream having the minimum
time delay. This will allow the GFR
nearest the fault to operate first.
With several levels of protection, this
will reduce the level of protection for
faults within the upstream GFR zones.
Zone interlocking was developed for
GFRs to overcome this problem.
The advantages of increased service

continuity offered by this system can
only be effectively used if additional
added on each downstream feeder.
Some users prefer individual grounding
of the transformer neutrals. In such
cases, a partial differential ground
fault scheme should be used for the
mains and tie breaker.
An example of a residual partial differential scheme is shown in Figure 1.4-9.
The scheme typically relies upon the
vector sum of at least two neutral
sensors in combination with each
breakers three-phase sensors. To
reduce the complexity of the drawing,
each of the breakers three-phase
sensors have not been shown. It is
absolutely critical that the sensors
polarities are supplied as shown, the
neutral sensor ratings of the mains and
tie are the same, and that there are
no other grounds on the neutral bus
made downstream of points shown.
GFRs (or circuit breakers with integral

ground fault protection) with zone
interlocking are coordinated in a
system to operate in a time delayed
mode for ground faults occurring most
remote from the source. However, this
time delayed mode is only actuated
when the GFR next upstream from the
fault sends a restraining signal to the
upstream GFRs. The absence of a
restraining signal from a downstream
An infinite number of ground fault

protection schemes can be developed
depending upon the number of alternate
sources, the number of grounding points
and system interconnections involved.
Depending upon the individual system
configuration, either mode of sensing
Power
Transformer
Power
Transformer
X
X
Neutral
Sensor Main
Breaker 52-2
Neutral
Sensor Main
Breaker 52-1
Main
Breaker
52-1
Typical
Four-Wire
Feeder
Trip Unit
Phase A,
Phase B,
Phase C
Neutral
Neutral Sensor X
Tie Breaker 52-T
X
X
52-1
a
52-T
a
Main
Breaker
52-2
52-2
a
Typical
Four-Wire
Feeder
Power distribution systems differ

widely from each other, depending
upon the requirements of each user,
and total system overcurrent protection, including ground fault currents,
must be individually designed to meet
these needs. Experienced and knowledgeable engineers must consider the
power sources (utility or on-site), the
effects of outages and costs of downtime, safety for people and equipment,
initial and lifecycle costs, and many
other factors. They must apply protective devices, analyzing the time-current
characteristics, fault interrupting
capacity, and selectivity and coordination methods to provide the most safe
and cost-effective distribution system.
X
X
Four-Wire Load
Four-Wire Load
Trip Unit
Main Breaker
52-1
Trip Unit
Trip Unit
Tie Breaker Main Breaker
52-T
52-2
Figure 1.4-9. Dual Source SystemMultiple Point Grounding

CA08104001E
Circuit breakers with integral ground

fault protection and standard circuit
breakers with shunt trips activated
by the ground fault relay are ideal for
ground fault protection. Many fused
switches over 1200A, and Eaton Type
FDP fusible switches with ratings from
400 to 1200A, are listed by UL as suitable
for ground fault protection. Fusible
switches so listed must be equipped
with a shunt trip, and be able to
open safely on faults up to 12 times
their rating.
Further Information
Phase A,
Phase B,
Phase C
Neutral
Tie Breaker
52-T
Trip Unit
GFR is an indication that any occurring

ground fault is within the zone of the
GFR next upstream from the fault and
that device will operate instantaneously
to clear the fault with minimum damage and maximum service continuity.
This operating mode permits all GFRs
to operate instantaneously for a fault
within their zone and still provide
complete selectivity between zones.
The National Electrical Manufacturers
Association (NEMA) states, in their
application guide for ground fault
protection, that zone interlocking is
necessary to minimize damage from
ground faults. A two-wire connection
is required to carry the restraining
signal from the GFRs in one zone to
the GFRs in the next zone.
PRSC-4ESystem Neutral Grounding and Ground Fault Protection

(ABB Publication)
PB 2.2NEMA Application Guide
for Ground Fault Protective Devices
for Equipment
IEEE Standard 142Grounding of
Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems (Green Book)
IEEE Emerald Book (Standard 1100)
UL 96A, Installation Requirements
for Lightning Protection Systems
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

August 2013
Sheet 01 070
i
ii
1
2
3
Lightning and Surge Protection

Physical protection of buildings
from direct damage from lightning
is beyond the scope of this section.
Requirements will vary with geographic
location, building type and environment, and many other factors (see
IEEE/ANSI Standard 142, Grounding
of Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems). Any lightning protection
system must be grounded, and the
lightning protection ground must be
bonded to the electrical equipment
grounding system.
Grounding Electrodes
At some point, the equipment and

system grounds must be connected
to the earth by means of a grounding
electrode system.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Outdoor substations usually use a

ground grid, consisting of a number of
ground rods driven into the earth and
bonded together by buried copper
conductors. The required grounding
electrode system for a building is
spelled out in the NEC Article 250.
The preferred grounding electrode
is a metal underground water pipe in
direct contact with the earth for at least
10 ft (3m). However, because underground water piping is often plastic
outside the building, or may later be
replaced by plastic piping, the NEC
requires this electrode to be supplemented by and bonded to at least one
other grounding electrode, such as
the effectively grounded metal frame
of the building, a concrete-encased
electrode, a copper conductor ground
ring encircling the building, or a made
electrode such as one or more driven
ground rods or a buried plate. Where
any of these electrodes are present,
they must be bonded together into
one grounding electrode system.
One of the most effective grounding
electrodes is the concrete-encased
electrode, sometimes called the Ufer
ground, named after the man who
developed it. It consists of at least
20 ft (6m) of steel reinforcing bars or
rods not less than 1/2 inches (12.7 mm)
in diameter, or at least 20 ft (6m) of
bare copper conductor, size No. 4 AWG
or larger, encased in at least 2 inches
(50.8 mm) of concrete. It must be
located within and near the bottom of
a concrete foundation or footing that
is in direct contact with the earth. Tests
have shown this electrode to provide
a low-resistance earth ground even in
poor soil conditions.
The electrical distribution system and

equipment ground must be connected
to this grounding electrode system by
a grounding electrode conductor. All
other grounding electrodes, such as
those for the lightning protection system, the telephone system, television
antenna and cable TV system grounds,
and computer systems, must be bonded
to this grounding electrode system.
Medium Voltage Equipment Surge

Protection Considerations
Transformers
If the voltage withstand/BIL rating of
the transformer is less than that of the
switchgear feeding the transformer,
surge protection is recommended at
the transformer terminals, in line with
established practices. In addition,
consideration should be given to using
surge arresters and/or surge capacitors
for transformers having equal or
greater withstand/BIL ratings than that
of the switchgear feeding the transformer for distribution systems where
reflected voltage waves and/or resonant conditions may occur. Typically
incoming voltage surges are reflected
at the transformer primary terminals
(because of the change in impedance)
resulting in voltages at the ends of the
transformer primary terminals/windings of up to two times the incoming
voltage wave. System capacitance and
inductance values combined with the
transformer impedance values can
cause resonant conditions resulting
in amplified reflected waves. Surge
arresters/capacitors when required,
should be located as close to the transformer primary terminals as practical.
Motors
Surge capacitors and, where appropriate, surge arresters should be applied
at the motor terminals.
Generators
Surge capacitors and station
class surge arresters at the machine
terminals.
Surge Protection
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear is applied over a broad range of
circuits, and is one of the many types
of equipment in the total system. The
distribution system can be subject to
voltage transients caused by lighting
or switching surges.
Recognizing that distribution system
can be subject to voltage transients
caused by lighting or switching, the
industry has developed standards to
provide guidelines for surge protection
of electrical equipment. Those guidelines should be used in design and
protection of electrical distribution
systems independent of the circuit
breaker interrupting medium. The
industry standards are:
ANSI C62
Guides and Standards for Surge
Protection
IEEE 242Buff Book
IEEE Recommended Practice for
Protection and Coordination of
Systems
IEEE 141Red Book
Recommended Practice for
Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants
IEEE C37.20.2
Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear
Eatons medium voltage metal-clad
and metal-enclosed switchgear that
uses vacuum circuit breakers is applied
over a broad range of circuits. It is one
of the many types of equipment in the
total distribution system. Whenever a
switching device is opened or closed,
certain interactions of the power
system elements with the switching
device can cause high frequency voltage
transients in the system. Due to the
wide range of applications and variety
of ratings used for different elements
in the power systems, a given circuit
may or may not require surge protection. Therefore, Eaton does not include
surge protection as standard with its
metal-clad or metal-enclosed medium
voltage switchgear. The user exercises
the options as to the type and extent
of the surge protection necessary
depending on the individual circuit
characteristics and cost considerations.
The following are Eatons recommendations for surge protection of medium
voltage equipment. Please note these
recommendations are valid when
using Eatons vacuum breakers only.
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.4-15
Sheet 01 071

Surge Protection Recommendations
Note: The abbreviation ZORC used in the
text below refers to Surge Protection Device
manufactured by Strike Technology (Pty)
Ltd. An equivalent device offered by other
manufacturers, such as Type EHZ by ABB,
and Protec Z by Northern Technologies SA
can also be used.
1. For circuits exposed to lightning,

surge arresters should be applied
in line with Industry standard
practices.
2. Transformers
a. Close-Coupled to medium
voltage primary breaker:
Provide transients surge protection, such as Surge Arrester
in parallel with RC Snubber, or
ZORC. The surge protection
device selected should be
located and connected at the
transformer primary terminals
or it can be located inside the
switchgear and connected on
the transformer side of the
primary breaker.
b. Cable-Connected to medium
Provide transient surge protection, such as Surge Arrester in
parallel with RC Snubber, or
ZORC for transformers connected by cables with lengths
up to 75 feet. The surge protection device should be located
and connected at the transformer terminals. No surge
protection is needed for transformers with lightning impulse
withstand ratings equal to that
of the switchgear and connected
to the switchgear by cables at
least 75 feet or longer. For
transformers with lower BIL,
provide surge arrester in parallel
with RC Snubber or ZORC.
RC Snubber and/or ZORC damp

internal transformer resonance:
The natural frequency of transformer
windings can under some circumstances
be excited to resonate. Transformer
windings in resonance can produce
elevated internal voltages that produce
insulation damage or failure. An RC
Snubber or a ZORC applied at the
transformer terminals as indicated
above can damp internal winding
resonance and prevent the production
of damaging elevated internal voltages.
This is typically required where rectifiers,
UPS or similar electronic equipment is
on the transformer secondary.
3. Arc-Furnace Transformers
Provide Surge Arrester in parallel
with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the
transformer terminals.
4. MotorsProvide Surge Arrester in
parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC
at the motor terminals. For those
motors using VFDs, surge protection should be applied and precede the VFD devices as well.
5. GeneratorsProvide station class
Surge Arrester in parallel with RC
Snubber, or ZORC at the generator
terminals.
6. Capacitor SwitchingNo surge

protection is required. Make sure
that the capacitors lightning
impulse withstand rating is equal
to that of the switchgear.
7. Shunt Reactor Switching
reactor terminals.
8. Motor Starting Reactors or Reduced
Voltage Auto-Transformers
reactor or RVAT terminals.
i
ii
1
2
3
9. Switching Underground Cables

Surge protection not needed.
Types of Surge Protection Devices
Generally surge protective devices

should be located as closely as possible
to the circuit component(s) that require
protection from the transients, and
connected directly to the terminals of
the component with conductors that
are as short and flat as possible to
minimize the inductance. It is also
important that surge protection devices
should be properly grounded for
effectively shunting high frequency
transients to ground.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Figure 1.4-10. Surge Protection Devices
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 072
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Surge Arresters
Surge Capacitors
ZORC
The modern metal-oxide surge

arresters are recommended because
this latest advance in arrester design
ensures better performance and high
reliability of surge protection schemes.
Manufacturers technical data must
be consulted for correct application
of a given type of surge arrester.
Notice that published arrester MCOV
(Maximum Continuous Operating
Voltage) ratings are based on 40 or
45C ambient temperature. In general,
the following guidelines are recommended for arrester selections, when
installed inside Eatons medium
voltage switchgear:
Metal-oxide surge arresters limit the

magnitude of prospective surge overvoltage, but are ineffective in controlling its rate of rise. Specially designed
surge capacitors with low internal
inductance are used to limit the rate of
rise of this surge overvoltage to protect
turn-to-turn insulation. Recommended
values for surge capacitors are: 0.5 f
on 5 and 7.5 kV, 0.25 f on 15 kV, and
0.13 f on systems operating at 24 kV
and higher.
A ZORC device consists of parallel

combination of Resistor (R) and Zinc
Oxide Voltage Suppressor (ZnO), connected in series with a Surge Capacitor.
The resistor R is sized to match surge
impedance of the load cables, typically
20 to 30 ohms. The ZnO is a gapless
metal-oxide nonlinear arrester, set
to trigger at 1 to 2 PU voltage, where
1 PU = 1.412*(VL-L/1.732). The Surge
Capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15
to 0.25 microfarad. As with RC Snubber,
under normal operating conditions,
impedance of the capacitor is very
high, effectively isolating the resistor
R and ZnO from the system at normal
power frequencies, and minimizing
heat dissipation during normal operation. Under high frequency transient
conditions, the capacitor offers very
low impedance, thus effectively
inserting the resistor R and ZnO in
the power system as cable terminating
network, thus minimizing reflection of
the steep wave-fronts of the voltage
transients and prevents voltage doubling of the traveling wave. The ZnO
element limits the peak voltage magnitudes. The combined effects of R, ZnO,
and Capacitor of the ZORC device
provides optimum protection against
high frequency transients by absorbing,
damping, and by limiting the peak
amplitude of the voltage wave-fronts.
Please note that the ZORC is not a
lightning protection device. If lightning
can occur or be induced in the electrical
system, a properly rated and applied
surge arrester must precede the ZORC.
A. Solidly Grounded Systems:

Arrester MCOV rating should be
equal to 1.05 x VLL/(1.732 x T),
where VLL is nominal line-to-line
service voltage, 1.05 factor allows
for +5% voltage variation above
the nominal voltage according
to ANSI C84.1, and T is derating
factor to allow for operation at
55C switchgear ambient, which
should be obtained from the
arrester manufacturer for the type
of arrester under consideration.
Typical values of T are: 0.946 to 1.0.
B. Low Resistant Grounded Systems
(systems grounded through
resistor rated for 10 seconds):
Arrester 10-second MCOV capability
at 60C, which is obtained from
manufacturers data, should be
equal to 1.05 x VLL, where VLL is
nominal line-to-line service voltage,
and 1.05 factor allows for +5%
voltage variation above the
nominal voltage.
C. Ungrounded or Systems
Grounded through impedance
other than 10-second resistor:
equal to 1.05 x VLL/T, where VLL
and T are as defined above.
RC Snubber
A RC Snubber device consists of a
non-inductive resistor R sized to match
surge impedance of the load cables,
typically 20 to 30 ohms, and connected
in series with a Surge Capacitor C. The
Surge Capacitor is typically sized to be
0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. Under normal
operating conditions, impedance of
the capacitor is very high, effectively
isolating the resistor R from the
system at normal power frequencies,
and minimizing heat dissipation during
normal operation. Under high frequency
transient conditions, the capacitor
offers very low impedance, thus effectively inserting the resistor R in the
power system as cable terminating
resistor, thus minimizing reflection of
transients and prevents voltage doubling of the traveling wave. The RC
Snubber provides protection against
high frequency transients by absorbing and damping and the transients.
Please note RC Snubber is most effective in mitigating fast-rising transient
voltages, and in attenuating reflections
and resonances before they have a
chance to build up, but does not limit
the peak magnitude of the transient.
Therefore, the RC Snubber alone may
not provide adequate protection. To
limit peak magnitude of the transient,
application of surge arrester should
also be considered.
Refer to Table 1.4-3 for recommended

ratings for metal-oxide surge arresters
that are sized in accordance with the
above guidelines, when located in
Eatons switchgear.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-17
Sheet 01 073
Surge Protection Summary

Minimum protection: Surge Arrester
for protection from high overvoltage
peaks, or Surge Capacitor for protection from fast-rising transient. Please
note that the surge arresters or surge
capacitor alone may not provide
adequate surge protection from
escalating voltages caused by circuit
resonance. Note that when applying
surge capacitors on both sides of a
circuit breaker, surge capacitor on
one side of the breaker must be
RC Snubber or ZORC, to mitigate
possible virtual current chopping.
Good protection: Surge Arrester

in parallel with Surge Capacitor for
protection from high overvoltage
peaks and fast rising transient. This
option may not provide adequate
surge protection from escalating
voltages caused by circuit resonance.
When applying surge capacitors on
both sides of a circuit breaker, surge
capacitor on one side of the breaker
must be RC Snubber or ZORC,
to mitigate possible virtual
current chopping.
Best protection: ZORC, plus proper

surge arrester preceding ZORC where
needed for protection against lightning.
ZORC provides protection from high
frequency voltage transients and limits
peak magnitude of the transient to
1 to 2 PU (see ZORC description on
Page 1.4-16 for more detail). Surge
arrester provides protection from
higher voltage peaks resulting from
lightning surges.
Further Information
IEEE/ANSI Standard 142Grounding
Systems (Green Book)
IEEE Standard 241Electric Power
Systems in Commercial Buildings
(Gray Book)
IEEE Standard 141Electric Power
Distribution for Industrial Plants
(Red Book)
Better protection: RC Snubber in

parallel with Surge Arrester for
protection from high frequency
transients and voltage peaks.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 1.4-3. Surge Arrester SelectionsRecommended Ratings

Service
Voltage
Line-to-Line
kV
2.30
2.40
3.30
4.00
4.16
4.76
4.80
6.60
6.90
7.20
8.32
8.40
11.00
11.50
12.00
12.47
13.20
13.80
14.40
18.00
20.78
22.00
22.86
23.00
24.94
25.80
26.40
33.00
34.50
38.00
Distribution Class Arresters

Solidly
Low Resistance
Grounded System
Grounded System
Arrester Ratings kV
Nominal MCOV
Nominal MCOV
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
10
10
12
12
12
15
18
18
18
18
21
21
21
27
30
30
2.55
2.55
2.55
2.55
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
8.40
10.20
10.20
10.20
12.70
15.30
15.30
15.30
15.30
17.00
17.00
17.00
22.00
24.40
24.40
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
10
10
12
12
12
12
15
18
18
21
21
24
24
24
30
30
2.55
2.55
2.55
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
8.40
10.20
10.20
10.20
10.20
12.70
15.30
15.30
17.00
17.00
19.50
19.50
19.50
24.40
24.40
Station Class Arresters

High Resistance or
Solidly
Low Resistance
Ungrounded System Grounded System
Grounded System
Arrester Ratings kV
Nominal MCOV
Nominal MCOV
Nominal MCOV
3
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
10
12
12
15
18
18
18
18
18
21
27
30
30
2.55
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
10.20
10.20
12.70
15.30
15.30
15.30
15.30
15.30
17.00
22.00
24.40
24.40
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
10
10
12
12
12
15
18
18
18
18
21
21
21
27
30
30
2.55
2.55
2.55
2.55
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
8.40
10.20
10.20
10.20
12.70
15.30
15.30
15.30
15.30
17.00
17.00
17.00
22.00
24.40
24.40
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
10
12
12
12
12
15
15
18
21
21
24
24
24
24
27
36
36
36
2.55
2.55
2.55
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
10.20
10.20
10.20
10.20
12.70
12.70
15.30
17.00
17.00
19.50
19.50
19.50
19.50
22.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Nominal
MCOV
3
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
10
12
12
15
18
18
18
18
18
21
27
30
30
36
36
36
36
39
45
48
2.55
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
10.20
10.20
12.70
15.30
15.30
15.30
15.30
15.30
17.00
22.00
24.40
24.40
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
31.50
36.50
39.00
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 074
Power Quality
Power Quality Terms

Technical Overview
ii
Introduction
Sensitive electronic loads deployed

today by users require strict requirements for the quality of power delivered
to loads.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
For electronic equipment, power

disturbances are defined in terms of
amplitude and duration by the electronic equipment operating envelope.
Electronic loads may be damaged
and disrupted, with shortened life
expectancy, by disturbances.
The proliferation of computers, variable
frequency motor drives, UPS systems
and other electronically controlled
equipment is placing a greater demand
on power producers for a disturbancefree source of power. Not only do these
types of equipment require quality
power for proper operation; many
times, these types of equipment are
also the sources of power disturbances
that corrupt the quality of power in a
given facility.
Power quality is defined according
to IEEE Standard 1100 as the concept
of powering and grounding electronic
equipment in a manner that is suitable
to the operation of that equipment.
IEEE Standard 1159 notes that within
the industry, alternate definitions or
interpretations of power quality have
been used, reflecting different points
of view.
15
In addressing power quality problems

at an existing site, or in the design
stages of a new building, engineers
need to specify different services or
mitigating technologies. The lowest
cost and highest value solution is
to selectively apply a combination
of different products and services
as follows:
16
Key services/technologies in the

power quality industry:
13
14
17
18
19
20
Power quality surveys, analysis

and studies
Power monitoring
Grounding products and services
Surge protection
Voltage regulation
Harmonic solutions
Lightning protection (ground rods,
hardware, etc.)
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
or motor-generator (M-G) set
Defining the Problem

Power quality problems can be resolved
in three ways: by reducing the variations
in the power supply (power disturbances), by improving the load equipments tolerance to those variations, or
by inserting some interface equipment
(known as power conditioning equipment) between the electrical supply
and the sensitive load(s) to improve the
compatibility of the two. Practicality
and cost usually determine the extent
to which each option is used.
Many methods are used to define
power quality problems. For example,
one option is a thorough on-site
investigation, which includes inspecting
wiring and grounding for errors,
monitoring the power supply for
power disturbances, investigating
equipment sensitivity to power disturbances, and determining the load
disruption and consequential effects
(costs), if any. In this way, the power
quality problem can be defined,
alternative solutions developed,
and optimal solution chosen.
Before applying power-conditioning
equipment to solve power quality
problems, the site should be checked
for wiring and grounding problems.
Sometimes, correcting a relatively
inexpensive wiring error, such as a
loose connection or a reversed neutral
and ground wire, can avoid a more
expensive power conditioning solution.
Sometimes this approach is not practical

because of limitations in time; expense
is not justified for smaller installations;
monitoring for power disturbances
may be needed over an extended
period of time to capture infrequent
disturbances; the exact sensitivities of
the load equipment may be unknown
and difficult to determine; and finally,
the investigative approach tends to
solve only observed problems. Thus
unobserved or potential problems
may not be considered in the solution.
For instance, when planning a new
facility, there is no site to investigate.
Therefore, power quality solutions are
often implemented to solve potential
or perceived problems on a preventive
basis instead of a thorough on-site
investigation.
Another option is to buy power conditioning equipment to correct any and

all perceived power quality problems
without any on-site investigation.
Power Quality Terms

Power disturbance: Any deviation
from the nominal value (or from some
selected thresholds based on load
tolerance) of the input AC power
characteristics.
Total harmonic distortion or distortion
factor: The ratio of the root-meansquare of the harmonic content to the
root-mean-square of the fundamental
quantity, expressed as a percentage
of the fundamental.
Crest factor: Ratio between the
peak value (crest) and rms value of
a periodic waveform.
Apparent (total) power factor: The
ratio of the total power input in watts
to the total volt-ampere input.
Sag: An rms reduction in the AC
voltage, at the power frequency, for
the duration from a half-cycle to a few
seconds. An undervoltage would have
a duration greater than several seconds.
Interruption: The complete loss of
voltage for a time period.
Transient: A sub-cycle disturbance
in the AC waveform that is evidenced
by a sharp brief discontinuity of the
waveform. May be of either polarity
and may be additive to or subtractive
from the nominal waveform.
Surge or impulse: See transient.
Noise: Unwanted electrical signals
that produce undesirable effects
in the circuits of control systems
in which they occur.
Common-mode noise: The noise
voltage that appears equally and in
phase from each current-carrying
conductor to ground.
Normal-mode noise: Noise signals
measurable between or among active
circuit conductors feeding the subject
load, but not between the equipment
grounding conductor or associated
signal reference structure and the active
circuit conductors.
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.4-19
Sheet 01 075
Power Quality
Methodology for Ensuring Effective
Power Quality to Electronic Loads
Cost Per kVA
The power quality pyramid is an

effective guide for addressing power
quality problems at an existing facility.
The framework is also effective for
specifying engineers who are designing a new facility. Power quality starts
with grounding (the base of the
pyramid) and then moves upward
to address the potential issues. This
simple, yet proven methodology,
will provide the most cost-effective
approach. As we move higher up the
pyramid, the cost per kVA of mitigating
potential problems increase and the
quality of the power increases (refer
to Figure 1.4-11).
5. Uninterruptible Power Supply

(UPS, Gen. Sets, etc.)
4. Harmonic Distortion
3. Voltage Regulation
2. Surge Protection
1. Grounding
The proliferation of communication

and computer network systems
has increased the need for proper
grounding and wiring of AC and data/
communication lines. In addition to
reviewing AC grounding and bonding
practices, it is necessary to prevent
ground loops from affecting the signal
reference point.
The benefit of implementing cascaded

network protection is shown in
Figure 1.4-12. Combined, the two
stages of protection at the service
entrance and branch panel locations
reduce the IEEE 62.41 recommended
test wave (C320 kV, 10 kA) to less than
200V voltage, a harmless disturbance
level for 120V rated sensitive loads.
2. Surge Protection
If only building entrance feeder

protection were provided, the letthrough voltage will be approximately
950V in a 277/480V system exposed
to induced lightning surges. This
level of let-through voltage can cause
degradation or physical damage of
most electronic loads.
Wherever possible, consultants,

specifiers and application engineers
should ensure similar loads are fed
from the same source. In this way,
disturbance-generating loads are
separated from electronic circuits
affected by power disturbances. For
example, motor loads, HVAC systems
and other linear loads should be
separated from the sensitive process
control and computer systems.
Surge protection devices (SPDs)

are recommended as the next stage
power quality solutions. NFPA,
UL 96A, IEEE Emerald Book and
equipment manufacturers recommend
the use of surge protectors. The
SPD shunt short duration voltage
disturbances to ground, thereby
preventing the surge from affecting
electronic loads. When installed as
part of the facility-wide design, SPDs
are cost-effective compared to all
other solutions (on a $/kVA basis).
The IEEE Emerald Book recommends
the use of a two-stage protection
concept. For large surge currents,
diversion is best accomplished in
two stages: the first diversion should
be performed at the service entrance
to the building. Then, any residual
voltage resulting from the action
can be dealt with by a second
protective device at the power
panel of the computer room
(or other critical loads).
The most effective and economic

solution for protecting a large number
of loads is to install parallel SPDs at
the building service entrance feeder
and panelboard locations. This reduces
the cost of protection for multiple
sensitive loads.
Figure 1.4-11. Power Quality Pyramid
ii
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1. Grounding
SPD
CP
480V
Stage 1 Protection
(Service Entrance)
SPD
120/208V
Computer or
Sensitive
Loads
Stage 2 Protection
(Branch Location)
System Test Parameters:

IEEE C62.41[10] and C62.45 [10]
test procedures using category;
480V main entrance panels;
100 ft (30m) of three-phase wire;
480/208V distribution transformer;
and 208V branch panel.
20,000V
PEAK VOLTAGE
Grounding represents the foundation

of a reliable power distribution
system. Grounding and wiring
problems can be the cause of up to
80% of all power quality problems.
All other forms of power quality
solutions are dependent upon good
grounding procedures.
= SPD
Figure 1.4-12. Cascaded Network Protection
Inputhigh energy
transient disturbance; IEEE Category
C3 Impulse 20,000V; 10,000A
Best achievable
performance with single SPD
at main panel (950V, at Stage 1)
13
14
15
800V
400V
0
25 uS
50 uS
TIME (MICROSECONDS)
Two stage (cascade

approach) achieves best
possible protection (less
than 200V at Stage 2)
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 076
Power Quality
The recommended system approach

for installing SPDs is summarized in
Figure 1.4-13.
ii
1.
Identify Critical Loads
1
2.
Identify Non-Critical Loads
2
3
3.
Identify Noise and
Disturbance Generating Loads
4.
Review Internal Power Distribution Layout
5.
Identify Facility Exposure to
Expected Levels of Disturbance
Directly connecting the surge suppresser to the bus bar of electrical

distribution equipment results in
the best possible level of protection.
Compared to side-mounted devices,
connecting the SPD unit to the bus
bar eliminates the need for lead wires
and reduces the let-through voltage
up to 50% (see Figure 1.4-14).
8
Figure 1.4-13. System Approach for Installing SPDs
9
10
There may be specific critical loads

within a facility that require a higher
level of protection. A series SPD is best
suited for protecting such loads.
Advantages of the system approach are:
11
The lowest possible investment

in mitigating equipment to protect
a facility
Increasing the diameter of the installation

wires is of negligible benefit. Inductance is a skin effect phenomenon and
a function of wire circumference. Since
only a marginal reduction in inductance
is achieved when the diameter of the
installation conductors is increased,
the use of large diameter wire results
in only minimal improvement (see
Figure 1.4-15).
Side-Mounted SPD vs. Integral SPD
6.
Apply Mitigating Equipment to:
a) Service Entrance Main Panels
b) Key Sub-Panels
c) Critical Loads
d) Data and Communication Lines
tion wires, the area between wires is

reduced and the mutual inductance
affect minimized.
Building entrance SPDs protect

the facility against large external
transients, including lightning
SPDs are bi-directional and prevent
transient and noise disturbances
from feeding back within a system
when installed at distribution or
branch panels
Two levels of protection safeguard
sensitive loads from physical
damage or operational upset
Further benefits provided by integrated

surge suppression designs are the
elimination of field installation costs and
the amount of expensive outboard
wall space taken up by side-mounted
SPD devices.
Building Entrance Feeder Installation

Considerations
Given that surges are high frequency

disturbances, the inductance of the
installation wiring increases the
let-through voltage of the protective
device. Figure 1.4-15 shows that
for every inch of lead length, the
let-through voltage is increased by
an additional 1525V above the
manufacturers stated suppression
performance.
Installing an SPD device immediately

after the switchgear or switchboard
main breaker is the optimal location
for protecting against external disturbances such as lightning. When placed
in this location, the disturbance is
intercepted by the SPD and reduced
to a minimum before reaching the
distribution and/or branch panel(s).
The use of a disconnect breaker
eliminates the need to de-energize
the building entrance feeder equipment should the SPD fail or require
isolation for Megger testing.
Lead length has the greatest effect on

the actual level of protection realized.
Twisting of the installation wires is
the second most important installation
consideration. By twisting the installa-
12
208Y/120 Panelboard
(integrated versus side mounted SPD)
13
14
15
SPD
16
SPD
17
GRO UND
18
G RO UND
Let-Through Voltage at Bus Bar
1000
SPD Integrated
into Panelboards,
Switchboards, MCCs
Side-Mounted SPD
used for Retrofit
Applications
Side-Mounted SPD Device

(assuming 14-inch (355.6 mm) lead length to bus)
800
600
400
Integrated SPD
(direct bus bar connection)
200
0
200
2.00
Surge
Event
0.00
2.00
4.00
6.00
8.00
10.00
Microseconds
19
Figure 1.4-14. Performance Comparison of Side-Mounted vs. Integrated SPD
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-21
Sheet 01 077
Additional Let-Through Voltage
Power Quality
Reference Tab 34 for detailed
information on SPDs.
Additional Let-Through Voltage Using IEEE C1(6000V, 3000A)[3]

Waveform (UL 1449 Test Wave)[12]
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
209V (23%)
673V (75%)
3 ft (914.4 mm)
Lead Length
Loose Wiring
Twisted Wires
14 AWG
10 AWG
4 AWG
1 ft (304.8 mm)
Lead Length,
Twisted Wires
Figure 1.4-15. The Effect of Installation Lead Length on Let-Through Voltage

Additional to UL 1449 ratings.
The size or capacity of a suppressor is

measured in surge current per phase.
Larger suppressers rated at approximately 250 kA per phase should be
installed at the service entrance to
survive high-energy surges associated
with lightning.
A 250 kA per phase surge rating allows
for over a 25-year life expectancy
assuming an IEEE defined high
exposure environment. Lower surge
rating devices may be used; however,
device reliability and long-term
performance may be compromised.
For aerial structures, the 99.8 percentile
recorded lightning stroke current is
less than 220 kA. The magnitude of
surges conducted or induced into a
facility electrical distribution system is
considerably lower given the presence
of multiple paths for the surge to travel
along. It is for this reason that IEEE
C62.41 recommends the C3 (20 kV,
10 kA) test wave for testing SPDs
installed at building entrance feeders.
SPDs with surge ratings greater than
250 kA are not required, however, higher
ratings are available and may provide
longer life.
Installing Panelboard Surge

Protection Devices
Smaller surge capacity SPDs (120 kA
per phase) are installed at branch panelboards where power disturbances
are of lower energy, but occur much
more frequently. This level of surge
current rating should result in a
greater than 25-year life expectancy.
When isolated ground systems are
used, the SPD should be installed such
that any common mode surges are
shunted to the safety ground.
The use of a disconnect breaker is
optional. The additional let-through
voltage resulting from the increased
inductance caused by the disconnect
CA08104001E
switch is about 5060V. This increase

in disturbance voltage can result in
process disruption and downtime.
Installing Dataline Surge Protection

Most facilities also have communication lines that are potential sources
for external surges. As identified by
the power quality pyramid, proper
grounding of communication lines is
essential for dependable operation.
NEC Article 800 states that all data,
power and cable lines be grounded
and bonded.
Power disturbances such as lightning
can elevate the ground potential
between two communicating pieces
of electronic equipment with different
ground references. The result is current
flowing through the data cable, causing
component failure, terminal lock-up,
data corruption and interference.
NFPA 780 D4.8 warns that surge
suppression devices should be installed
on all wiring entering or leaving electronic equipment, usually power, data
or communication wiring.
Surge suppressers should be installed
at both ends of a data or communication cable. In those situations where
one end of the cable is not connected
into an electronic circuit (e.g., contactor
coil), protection on the electronic end
only is required.
To prevent the coupling or inducing of
power disturbances into communication
lines, the following should be avoided:
Data cables should not be run over
fluorescent lighting fixtures
Data cables should not be in the
vicinity of electric motors
The right category cable should
be used to ensure transmission
performance
Data cables must be grounded at
both ends when communicating
between buildings
3. Voltage Regulation
Voltage regulation (i.e., sags or overvoltage) disturbances are generally
site- or load-dependent. A variety of
mitigating solutions are available
depending upon the load sensitivity,
fault duration/magnitude and the
specific problems encountered. It is
recommended to install monitoring
equipment on the AC power lines to
assess the degree and frequency of
occurrences of voltage regulation
problems. The captured data will allow
for the proper solution selection.
4. Harmonics Distortion
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Harmonics and Nonlinear Loads

Until recently, most electrical loads were
linear. Linear loads draw the full sine
wave of electric current at its 60 cycle
(Hz) fundamental frequencyFigure
1.4-16 shows balance single-phase,
linear loads. As the figure shows,
little or no current flows in the neutral
conductor when the loads are nonlinear and balanced.
With the arrival of nonlinear electronic
loads, where the AC voltage is converted to a DC voltage, harmonics are
created because of the use of only part
of the AC sine wave. In this conversion
from AC to DC, the electronics are turned
on in the 60 cycle wave at a given point
in time to obtain the required DC level.
The use of only part of the sign wave
causes harmonics.
It is important to note that the current
distortion caused by loads such as rectifiers or switch mode power supplies
causes the voltage distortion. That
voltage distortion is caused by distorted
currents flowing through an impedance.
The amount of voltage distortion
depends on:
System impedance
Amount of distorted current
Devices that can cause harmonic

disturbances include rectifiers, thrusters and switching power supplies, all
of which are nonlinear. Further, the
proliferation of electronic equipment
such as computers, UPS systems,
variable speed drives, programmable
logic controllers, and the like: nonlinear loads have become a significant
part of many installations. Other types
of harmonic-producing loads include
arcing devices (arc furnaces, fluorescent lights) and iron core storable
devices (transformers, especially
during energization).
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

August 2013
Sheet 01 078
Power Quality
i
ii
1
2
Nonlinear load currents vary widely

from a sinusoidal wave shape; often
they are discontinuous pulses. This
means that nonlinear loads are
extremely high in harmonic content.
Triplen harmonics are the 3rd, 9th,
15th,...harmonics. Further, triplen
harmonics are the most damaging
to an electrical system because these
harmonics on the A-phase, B-phase
and C-phase are in sequence with each
other. Meaning, the triplen harmonics
present on the three phases add

together in the neutral, as shown in
Figure 1.4-17, rather than cancel each
other out, as shown in Figure 1.4-16.
Odd non-triplen harmonics are
classified as positive sequence
or negative sequence and are the
1st, 5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc.
Harmonic Issues
In general, as the order of a harmonic

gets higher, its amplitude becomes
smaller as a percentage of the fundamental frequency.
In general, harmonics present on

a distribution system can have the
following detrimental effects:
1. Overheating of transformers and

rotating equipment.
60 Hz Fundamental
2. Increased hysteresis losses.
3. Decreased kVA capacity.
A Phase
4. Overloading of neutral.
5
6
Harmonic currents perform no work

and result in wasted electrical energy
that may over burden the distribution
system. This electrical overloading
may contribute to preventing an
existing electrical distribution system
from serving additional future loads.
5. Unacceptable neutral-to-ground
voltages.
120
Lagging
6. Distorted voltage and current

waveforms.
B Phase
7. Failed capacitor banks.

8. Breakers and fuses tripping.
8
120
Lagging
C Phase
9
10
Balance
Neutral
Current
11
12
Figure 1.4-16. Balanced Neutral Current Equals Zero
60 Hz Fundamental
13
3rd Harmonic
A Phase
14
15
120
Lagging
B Phase
16
17
120
Lagging
C Phase
18
19
21
20
Neutral
Triplen
Current
Phase Triplen Harmonics
Added in the Neutral
Figure 1.4-17. Unbalanced Single-Phase Loads with Triplen Harmonics

9. Double or ever triple sized neutrals

to defy the negative effects of
triplen harmonics.
In transformers, generators and
uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
systems, harmonics cause overheating
and failure at loads below their ratings
because the harmonic currents cause
greater heating than standard 60 Hz
current. This results from increased
eddy current losses, hysteresis losses
in the iron cores, and conductor skin
effects of the windings. In addition,
the harmonic currents acting on the
impedance of the source cause
harmonics in the source voltage, which
is then applied to other loads such as
motors, causing them to overheat.
The harmonics also complicate the
application of capacitors for power
factor correction. If, at a given harmonic
frequency, the capacitive impedance
equals the system reactive impedance,
the harmonic voltage and current can
reach dangerous magnitudes. At the
same time, the harmonics create
problems in the application of power
factor correction capacitors, they
lower the actual power factor. The
rotating meters used by the utilities for
watthour and various measurements
do not detect the distortion component
caused by the harmonics. Rectifiers
with diode front ends and large DC side
capacitor banks have displacement
power factor of 90% to 95%. More
recent electronic meters are capable
of metering the true kVA hours taken
by the circuit.
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-23
Sheet 01 079
Power Quality
Single-phase power supplies for
computer and fixture ballasts are
rich in third harmonics and their
odd multiples.
Even with the phase currents perfectly
balanced, the harmonic currents in
the neutral can total 173% of the
phase current. This has resulted in
overheated neutrals. The Information
Technology Industry Council (ITIC)
formerly known as CBEMA, recommends that neutrals in the supply to
electronic equipment be oversized
to at least 173% of the ampacity of
the phase conductors to prevent
problems. ITIC also recommends
derating transformers, loading them
to no more than 50% to 70% of their
nameplate kVA, based on a rule-ofthumb calculation, to compensate
for harmonic heating effects.
In spite of all the concerns they
cause, nonlinear loads will continue
to increase. Therefore, the design of
nonlinear loads and the systems that
supply them will have to be designed
so that their adverse effects are greatly
reduced. Table 1.4-4 shows the typical
harmonic orders from a variety of
harmonic generating sources.
Total Harmonic Distortion

Revised standard IEEE 519-1992
indicates the limits of current distortion allowed at the PCC (Point of
Common Coupling) point on the
system where the current distortion
is calculated, usually the point of
connection to the utility or the main
supply bus of the system.
The standard also covers the harmonic
limits of the supply voltage from the
utility or cogenerators.
Table 1.4-5. Low Voltage System Classification
and Distortion Limits for 480V Systems
Class
AN
DF
Special application
General system
Dedicated system
10
5
2
16,400
22,800
36,500
3%
5%
10%
Special systems are those where the rate

of change of voltage of the notch might
mistrigger an event. AN is a measurement
of notch characteristics measured in
volt-microseconds, C is the impedance
ratio of total impedance to impedance
at common point in system. DF is
distortion factor.
Table 1.4-6. Utility or Cogenerator Supply

Voltage Harmonic Limits
Voltage
Range
2.369 kV 69138 kV >138 kV
Typical
Harmonics
Maximum
individual
harmonic
3.0%
6-pulse rectifier
12-pulse rectifier
18-pulse rectifier
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19

11, 13, 23, 25
17, 19, 35, 37
Total
harmonic
distortion
5.0%
Switch-mode power
supply
Fluorescent lights
Arcing devices
Transformer energization
3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13
3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13
2, 3, 4, 5, 7
2, 3, 4
Table 1.4-4. Source and Typical Harmonics

Source
Generally, magnitude decreases as harmonic

order increases.
1.5%
2.5%
1.0%
1.5%
V
Percentages are h x 100 for each
V1
harmonic
and
h = hmax
Vthd =
1/2
Table 1.4-7. Current Distortion Limits for

General Distribution Systems (120 69,000V)
Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in
Percent of IL
Individual Harmonic Order (Odd Harmonics)
ISC /IL
<20
20<50
50<100
100<1000
>1000
<11
4.0
7.0
10.0
12.0
15.0
11 17
23
35 TDD
<h <h <h <h
<17 <23 <35
2.0
3.5
4.5
5.5
7.0
1.5
2.5
4.0
5.0
6.0
0.6
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.4
5.0
8.0
12.0
15.0
20.0
All power generation equipment is limited

to these values of current distortion,
regardless of actual ISC/IL where:
ISC = Maximum short-circuit current at PCC.
IL = Maximum demand load current
(fundamental frequency component) at PCC.
TDD = Total Demand Distortion. Even

harmonics are limited to 25% of the odd
harmonic limits above. Current distortions
that result in a DC offset, e.g., half-wave
converters, are not allowed.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Harmonic Solutions
In spite of all the concerns nonlinear
loads cause, these loads will continue
to increase. Therefore, the design
of nonlinear loads and the systems
that supply them will need design so
adverse harmonic effects are greatly
reduced. Table 1.4-8 and depicts many
harmonic solutions along with their
advantages and disadvantages.
Eatons Engineering Services &
Systems Group (EESS) can perform
harmonic studies and recommend
solutions for harmonic problems.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
Vh
h=2
It is important for the system designer
to know the harmonic content of the
utilitys supply voltage because it will
affect the harmonic distortion of
the system.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 080
Power Quality
i
ii
Table 1.4-8. Harmonic Solutions for Given Loads

Load
Type
Solutions
Advantages
Disadvantages
Drives and rectifiers

includes three-phase
UPS loads
Line reactors
Inexpensive
For 6-pulse standard drive/rectifier, can
May require additional compensation
1
2
reduce harmonic current distortion from

80% down to about 3540%
K-rated/drive isolation
transformer
Offers series reactance (similar to line
DC choke
Slightly better than AC line reactors
reactors) and provides isolation for

some transients
for 5th and 7th harmonics
12-pulse convertor
Harmonic mitigating
transformers/phase shifting
85% reduction versus standard
6-pulse drives
Substantial (5080%) reduction in harmonics
when used in tandem
No advantage over reactors for
reducing harmonics unless in pairs

for shifting phases
Not always an option for drives
Less protection for input semiconductors
Cost difference approaches 18-pulse drive
and blocking filters, which guarantee

IEEE 519 compliance
Harmonic cancellation highly dependent
on load balance
Must have even multiples of matched loads
Bus connectedaccommodates
Tuned filters
Broadband filters
Makes 6-pulse into the equivalent
18-pulse converter
Excellent harmonic control for drives
load diversity
Provides PF correction
of 18-pulse
Computers/
switch-mode
power supplies
Handles load/harmonic diversity

Complete solution up to 50th harmonic
High cost
Neutral blocking filter
Eliminates the 3rd harmonic from load

Relieves system capacity
Possible energy savings
High cost
May increase voltage distortion
Harmonic mitigating
transformers
3rd harmonic recalculated back to the load

When used as phase-shifted transformers,
Requires fully rated circuits and
oversized neutrals to the loads
reduces other harmonics

Reduces voltage flat-topping
11
Fluorescent
lighting
Oversized neutral/derated
transformer
Tolerate harmonics rather than correct

Typically least expensive
Upstream and downstream equipment
K-rated transformer
Tolerate harmonics rather than correct
Does not reduce system harmonics
Harmonic mitigating
transformers
3rd harmonic recalculated back to the load

When used as phase-shifted transformers,
Requires fully rated circuits and
fully rated for harmonics
oversized neutrals to the loads
reduces other harmonics

Reduces voltage flat-topping
13
14
High cost
Active filters
10
12
must be resized if system changes

Higher cost
Requires one filter per drive
above 100 hp
IEEE 519 compliant
7
8
Requires allocation analysis

Sized only to the requirements of that system;
K-rated transformer
Tolerate harmonics rather than correct them
Does not reduce system harmonics
Low distortion ballasts
Reduce harmonics at the source
Additional cost and typically more
Active filters
Fast response and broadband
High cost
expensive than system solutions

Welding/arcing
loads
harmonic correction
Reduces voltage flicker
15
Tuned filters
SCR controlled tuned filters simulates
an active filter response
16
17
System
solutions
SCR controlled units are high cost
but fixed filters are reasonable
Tuned filters
Provides PF correction
Lower cost compared to other systems
System analysis required to verify application.
Harmonic mitigating
transformers
Excellent choice for new design or upgrade
No PF correction benefit
Active filters
Ideal solution and handles system diversity
Highest cost
Must be resized if system changes
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)
1.4-25
Sheet 01 081
5. Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS)
The advent of solid-state semiconductors over 40 years ago, and their
subsequent evolution to transistors,
and the miniaturization of electronics
into microprocessor over 25 years ago,
has created numerous computation
machines that assist us in every
conceivable manner. These machines,
and their clever configurations,
whether they take the form of
computers, appliance controls, fax
machines, phone systems, computers
of all sizes, server systems and server
farms, emergency call centers, data
processing at banks, credit companies,
private company communication
networks, government institutions and
defense agencies, all rely on a narrow
range of nominal AC power in order
for these devices to work properly.
Indeed, many other types of equipment also require that the AC electrical
power source be at or close to nominal
voltage and frequency. Disturbances
of the power translate into failed
processes, lost data, decreased
efficiency and lost revenue.
The normal power source supplied by

the local utility or provider is not stable
enough over time to continuously
serve these loads without interruption.
It is possible that a facility outside a
major metropolitan area served by the
utility grid will experience outages of
some nature 1520 times in one year.
Certain outages are caused by the
weather, and others by the failure
of the utility supply system due to
equipment failures or construction
interruptions. Some outages are
only several cycles in duration, while
others may be for hours at a time.
In a broader sense, other problems
exist in the area of power quality, and
many of those issues also contribute
to the failure of the supply to provide
that narrow range of power to the
sensitive loads mentioned above.
Power quality problems take the
form of any of the following: power
failure, power sag, power surge,
undervoltage, overvoltage, line noise,
frequency variations, switching
transients and harmonic distortion.
Regardless of the reason for outages
and power quality problems, the
sensitive loads can not function
normally without a backup power
source, and in many cases, the loads
must be isolated from the instabilities
of the utility supply and power quality
problems and given clean reliable
power on a continuous basis, or be
able to switch over to reliable clean
electrical power quickly.
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

systems have evolved to serve the
needs of sensitive equipment and
can supply a stable source of electrical
power, or switch to backup to allow
for an orderly shutdown of the loads
without appreciable loss of data or
process. In the early days of mainframe computers, motor-generator
sets provide isolation and clean power
to the computers. They did not have
deep reserves, but provided extensive
ride-through capability while other
sources of power (usually standby
emergency engine generator sets) were
brought to serve the motor-generator
sets while the normal source of power
was unstable or unavailable.
UPS systems have evolved along the
lines of rotary types and static types
of systems, and they come in many
configurations, and even hybrid
designs having characteristics of
both types. The discussion that
follows attempts to compare and
contrast the two types of UPS
systems, and give basic guidance
on selection criteria. This discussion
will focus on the medium, large and
very large UPS systems required by
users who need more than 10 kVA of
clean reliable power.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 082
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Power Ratings of UPS Systems
types of hybrid UPS systems are not

the focus of this discussion, because
only one or two vendors offer these
hybrid types of rotary UPS systems,
although admittedly they continue to
be used in very large-scale data center
applications. See Figure 1.4-18 for the
modern high speed Rotary UPS
systems discussed in this section
of the guide. These types of modern
rotary UPS systems are advanced,
integrated designs using scalable
configurations of high-speed flywheel, motor and generator in one
compact UPS package. The new rotary
technologies have the potential to
replace battery backup systems, or
at least reduce the battery content
for certain applications. The appeal
of rotary systems is the avoidance of
the purchase, maintenance and facility
space required by DC battery based
backup systems.
Small UPS: Typically 300 VA to 10 kVA,

and sometimes as high as 18 kVA
Medium UPS: 1060 kVA
Large UPS: 100200 kVA units, and
higher when units are paralleled
Very Large UPS: 200750 kVA
units, and higher when units
are paralleled
Each of these categories is arbitrary

because manufacturers have many
different UPS offerings for the same
application. The choice of UPS type
and the configuration of UPS modules
for a given application depends upon
many factors, including how many
power quality problems the UPS is
expected to solve; how much future
capacity is to be purchased now for
future loads; the nature of the sensitive loads and load wiring; which
type of UPS system is favored, rotary
or static; choices of battery or DC
storage technology considered; and
a host of other application issues.
High-Speed Rotary
Concept of Operation
300900 kVA/720 kW maximum.
The modern rotary type of UPS

operation is understood by reviewing
the four topics below: startup mode,
normal operation mode, discharge
mode and recharge mode.
Typical Rotary Configurations
Startup Mode
Rotary UPS systems are among the

oldest working systems developed
to protect sensitive loads. Many of
these systems are complicated enginegenerator sets coupled with high
inertial flywheels operated at relatively
low rotational speeds. These legacy
The UPS output is energized on

bypass as soon as power is applied
from the source to the system input.
The UPS continues the startup
procedure automatically when the
front panel controls are placed into
the Online position. Internal UPS
Rotary UPS Systems

Typical Ratings
13
14
system checks are performed then

the input contactor is closed. The static
disconnect switch is turned on and the
conduction angle is rapidly increased
from zero to an angle that causes the
DC bus voltage between the utility
converter and the flywheel converter
to reach approximately 650V through
the rectifying action of the freewheeling diodes in the utility converter.
As soon as this level of DC voltage is
reached, the static disconnect turns
on fully. The next steps involved the
utility converter IGBTs to start firing,
which allows the converter to act as
a rectifier, a regulating voltage source
and an active harmonic filter. As the
IGBTs begin to operate, the DC bus
is increased to a normal operating
voltage of approximately 800V, and
the output bus is transferred from
bypass to the output of the power
electronics module. The transfer from
bypass is completed when the output
contactor is closed and the bypass
contactor opened in a make-beforebreak manner.
The firing of the SCRs in the static
disconnect switch is now changed so
that each SCR in each phase is only
turned on during the half-cycle, which
permits real power to flow from the
utility supply to the UPS. This firing
pattern at the static disconnect switch
prevents power from the flywheel
from feeding backward into the
utility supply and ensures that all of
the flywheel energy is available to
support the load.
Static Bypass Option

It = Input Current
Ir = Real Load Current
Ic = Charging Current
Ig = Voltage Regulation Current
Bypass Contactor
15
It = Ir + Ic + Ig
16
Input
Contactor
Id = Ih + Ix + Ir
Static Disconnect
Switch
Line Inductor
Source
Load
Flywheel Converter
17
Utility Converter
Ix
18
Field Coil
Driver
dc
Ic
Filter Inductor
dc
ac
19
20
Output
Contactor
Inverter
Fuse
Ig
ac
Output Transformer
Id = Output Current
Ih = Harmonic Current
Ix = Reactive Load Current
Ir = Real Load Current
Ih
Integrated Motor/Flywheel/
and Generator
Figure 1.4-18. Typical-High Speed Modern Rotary UPS
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

1.4-27
Sheet 01 083
Immediately after the output is transferred from bypass to the power electronic module, the flywheel field is
excited, which also provides magnetic
lift to unload the flywheel bearings.
The flywheel inverter is turned on
and gradually increases frequency
at a constant rate to accelerate the
flywheel to approximately 60 rpm.
Once the flywheel reaches 60 rpm,
the flywheel inverter controls the
acceleration to keep currents below the
maximum charging and the maximum
input settings. Once the flywheel
reaches 4000 rpm, the UPS is fully
functional and capable of supporting
the load during a power quality event.
flywheel acceleration continues until
the Flywheel reaches full charge at
7700 rpm. The total time to complete
startup is less than 5 minutes.
Normal Operation Mode

Once the UPS is started and the
flywheel is operating at greater than
4000 rpm, the UPS is in the normal
operating mode where it is regulating
output voltage and supplying reactive
and harmonic currents required by the
load. At the same time it cancels the
effect of load current harmonics on the
UPS output voltage.
Input current consists of three components: real load current, charging
current, and voltage regulation current.
Real current is current that is in phase
with the supply voltage and supplies
real power to the load. Real current
flowing through the line inductor causes
a slight phase shift of the current
lagging the voltage by 10 degrees
and ensures that the UPS can quickly
transfer to bypass without causing
unacceptable switching transients. The
second component is charging current
required by the flywheel to keep the
rotating mass fully charged at rated
rpm, or to recharge the rotating mass
after a discharge. The power to maintain full charge is low at 2 kW and
is accomplished by the IGBTs of the
flywheel converter gating to provide
small pulses of motoring current to the
flywheel. This current can be much
higher if fast recharge times are
selected. The final component of input
current is the voltage regulation current,
which is usually a reactive current that
circulates between the input and the
utility converter to regulate the output
voltage. Leading reactive current
causes a voltage boost across the line

inductor, and a lagging current causes
a bucking voltage. By controlling the
utility converter to maintain nominal
output voltage, just enough reactive
current flows through the line inductor
to make up the difference between the
input voltage and the output voltage.
The load current consists of three
components: the harmonic current
required by the load, the reactive load
current, and the real current, which
does the work. The utility converter
supplies both the harmonic and
reactive currents. Because these
currents supply no net power to the
load, the flywheel supplies no energy
for these currents. They circulate
between the utility converter and the
load. The power stage controls analyze
the harmonic current requirements of
the load and set the firing angle of
the inverter IGBTs to make the utility
converter a very low impedance source
to any harmonic currents. Thus,
nonlinear load currents are supplied
almost entirely from the utility
converter with little effect on the
quality of the UPS output voltage
waveform and with almost no
transmission of load harmonics
currents to the input of the UPS.
Discharge Mode
The UPS senses the deviation of
the voltage or frequency beyond
programmed tolerances and quickly
disconnects the supply source by
turning off the static disconnect switch
and opening the input contactor. The
disconnect occurs in less than one-half
cycle. Then the utility converter starts
delivering power from the DC bus to
the load, and the flywheel converter
changes the firing point of its IGBTs
to deliver power to the DC bus. The
UPS maintains a clean output voltage
within 3% or nominal voltage to the
load when input power is lost.
as the load power is completely

transferred to the input source, the utility converter and flywheel converter
start to recharge the flywheel and
return to normal operation mode. The
flywheel recharge power is programmable between a slow and fast rate,
and using the fast rate results in an
increase of UPS input current over
nominal levels. Recharging the flywheel
is accomplished by controlling the
utility and flywheel converter in a
similar manner as is used to maintain
full charge in the normal operation
mode, however the IGBT gating points
are changed to increase current into
the flywheel.
High-Speed Rotary Advantages
High-Speed Rotary Disadvantages
Recharge Mode
When input power is restored to
acceptable limits, the UPS synchronizes
the output and input voltages, closes
the input contactor and turns on the
static disconnect switch. The utility
converter then transfers power from
the flywheel to the input source by
linearly increasing the real input
current. The transfer time is programmable from 1 to 15 seconds. As soon
Addresses all power quality

problems
Battery systems are not required
or used
No battery maintenance required
Unlimited discharge cycles
150-second recharge time available
Wide range of operating temperatures can be accommodated
(20 to 40C)
Small compact size and less floor
space required (500 kW systems
takes 20 sq ft)
N+1 reliability available up to
900 kVA maximum
No disposal issues
Flywheel does not have deep

reserve capacityrides through
for up to 13 seconds at 100% load
Some enhanced flywheel systems
may extend the ride through to
30 seconds at 100% load
Mechanical flywheel maintenance
required every 23 years, and oil
changes required every year
Recharge fast rates require the
input to be sized for 125% of
nominal current
Flywheels failures in field not
understood
Requires vacuum pumps for
high-speed flywheels
Limited number of vendors and
experience
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 084
Static UPS Systems

Typical Ratings
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
40750 kVA/600 kW, and higher when

multiple units are paralleled.
Typical Static UPS Configurations

Static UPS systems modules are
available in three basic types of
configurations known as standby, line
interactive and double conversion.
See Tab 33 in this guide for details on
all the UPS configurations available
from Eaton. The lighter power ratings
are likely to be one of the first two
types of configurations, e.g., standby
or line interactive. Most medium or
large static UPS installations use the
double conversion technology in one
or multiple module configurations,
i.e., or multiple UPS units in parallel.
Figure 1.4-19 illustrates the one-line
diagram of a simple single Double
Conversion UPS module. Brief
explanations appear for the standby
and line interactive UPS systems
after the text explaining the Double
Conversion static UPS type of system.
A. Double conversion concept of
operationthe basic operation of
the Double Conversion UPS is:
1. Normal power is connected to
the UPS input through the facility
This usually involves two input
circuits that must come from the
same source.
2. The Rectifier/Charger function

converts the normal AC power to
DC power to charge the battery
and power the inverter. The load
is isolated from the normal
input source.
3. The battery stores DC energy
for use when input power to the
UPS fails. The amount of power
available from the DC battery
system and time to discharge
voltage is a function of the type of
battery selected and the amperehour sized used. Battery systems
should be sized for no less than
5 minutes of clean power usage
from a fully charged state, and, in
many cases, are sized to provide
more time on battery power.
4. The DC link connects the output
of the rectifier/charger to the input
of the inverter and to the battery.
Typically the rectifier/charger is
sized slightly higher than 100% of
UPS output because it must power
the inverter and supply charger
power to the battery.
5. The bypass circuit provides a

path for unregulated normal
power to be routed around the
major electronic sub-assemblies
of the UPS to the load so that the
load can continue to operate during
maintenance, or when the UPS
electronics fails. The bypass static
switch can switch to conducting
mode in 150120 milliseconds.

When the UPS recognizes a
requirement to transfer to the
bypass mode, it simultaneously
turns the static switch ON, the
output breaker to OPEN, and the
bypass breaker to CLOSE. The
output breaker opens and the
bypass breaker closes in about
50 milliseconds. The restoration
of normal conditions at the UPS
results in the automatic restoration
of the UPS module powering the
load through the rectifier/charger
and inverter with load isolation
from power quality problems, and
the opening of the bypass circuit.
Static Double Conversion Advantages
Addresses all power quality

problems
Suitable for applications from
5 kVA to over 2500 kVA
Simple battery systems are
sized for application
Long battery backup times and
long life batteries are available
Higher reliability is available
using redundant UPS modules
12
UPS Module
Bypass Breaker (Optional)
13
Bypass Static Switch
14
15
Source
Load
Normal Rectifier/Charger
Breaker
AC
Inverter
DC
DC
16
17
18
Output
Breaker
AC
Battery Breaker
Battery
Figure 1.4-19. Typical Static UPS, Double Conversion Type with Battery Backup
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-29
Sheet 01 085
Static Double Conversion Disadvantages
Battery systems, battery maintenance

and battery replacement are required
Large space requirement for
battery systems (higher life takes
more space, e.g., 500 kW takes
80200 sq ft depending upon the
type of battery used, VRLA 10 year,
VRLA 20 year or flooded)
Limited discharge cycles of
battery system
Narrow temperature range
for application
Efficiencies are in the 9094%
range, which is lower than some
line interactive configurations
Bypass mode places load at risk
unless bypass has UPS backup
Redundancy of UPS modules
results in higher costs
Output faults are cleared by the
bypass circuit
Output rating of the UPS is 150%
for 30 seconds
Battery disposal and safety
issues exist
B. Standby UPS concept of

operationThe basic operation of
the Standby UPS is:
1. The Standby UPS topology is
similar to the double conversion
type, but the operation of the UPS
is different in significant ways.
Normal power is connected to
the UPS input through the facility
electrical distribution system. This
usually involves two input circuits
that must come from the same
source. See Figure 1.4-20 for
details.
2. The rectifier/charger function
converts the normal AC power to
DC power to charge the battery
only, and does not simultaneously
power the inverter. The load is
connected to the input source
through the bypass static switch.
The inverter is in the standby
mode ready to serve the load
from battery power if the input
power source fails.
3. The battery stores DC energy for

use by the inverter when input
power to the UPS fails. The
amount of power available from
the DC battery system and time to
discharge voltage is a function of
the type of battery selected and
the ampere-hour sized used.
Battery systems should be sized
for the anticipated outage.
4. The DC link connects the output of
the rectifier/charger to the input of
the inverter and to the battery.
Typically the rectifier/charger
is sized only to supply charger
power to the battery, and is
rated far lower than in the
double conversion UPS.
5. The bypass circuit provides a
direct connection of input source
to the load. The load operates
from unregulated power. The
bypass static switch can switch
to non-conducting mode in 150
120 milliseconds. When the UPS
recognizes the loss of normal
input power, it transfers to battery/
inverter mode by simultaneously
turning the Inverter ON and the
static switch OFF.
Static Standby UPS Advantages

Lower costs than double conversion
Rectifier and charger are
economically sized
Efficient design
Batteries are sized for the
application
Static Standby UPS Disadvantages
Impractical over 2 kVA

Little to no isolation of load from
power quality disturbances
Standby power is from battery alone
Battery systems, battery maintenance and battery replacement
are required
Limited discharge cycles of
battery system
Narrow temperature range for
application
Output faults are cleared by the
bypass circuit
issues exist
C. Static line interactive UPS

concept of operationthe basic
operation of the Line Interactive
UPS is:
1. The Line Interactive type of UPS
has a different topology than the
static double conversion and
standby systems. The normal
input power is connected to the
load in parallel with a battery
and bi-directional inverter/charger
assembly. The input source usually terminates at a line inductor
and the output of the inductor is
connected to the load in parallel
with the battery and inverter/
charger circuit. See Figure 1.4-21
for more details.
2. The traditional rectifier circuit
is eliminated and this results
in a smaller footprint and
weight reduction. However, line
conditioning is compromised.
3. When the input power fails, the
battery/inverter charger circuit
reverses power and supplies the
load with regulated power.
Static Line Interactive UPS Advantages

Slight improvement of power
conditioning over standby
UPS systems
Small footprints and weights
Efficient design
Batteries are sized for the
application
Static Line Interactive UPS Disadvantages
Impractical over 5 kVA

Not as good conditioning as
double conversion
Standby power is from battery alone
Battery systems, battery maintenance and battery replacement
are required
Limited discharge cycles for the
battery system
Narrow temperature range for
application
issues exist
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 086
UPS Module
ii
Bypass Static Switch
1
2
Load
Source
Normal
Breaker
3
4
Rectifier/
Charger
Inverter
AC
DC
DC
AC
Battery
Breaker
5
Battery
6
7
Output
Breaker
Figure 1.4-20. Typical Static UPS, Standby Type with Battery Backup
UPS Module
9
10
Load
Source
Inductor
11
Bidirectional
Inverter/Charger
12
DC
13
AC
14
15
16
Battery
Figure 1.4-21. Typical Static UPS, Line Interactive Type with Battery Backup
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-31
Sheet 01 087
Secondary Voltage Selection
Technical Factors
The choice between 208Y/120V and

480Y/277V secondary distribution for
commercial and institutional buildings
depends on several factors. The most
important of these are size and types
of loads (motors, fluorescent lighting,
incandescent lighting, receptacles)
and length of feeders. In general, large
motor and fluorescent lighting loads,
and long feeders, will tend to make the
higher voltages, such as 480Y/277V,
more economical. Very large loads
and long runs would indicate the use
of medium voltage distribution and
loadcenter unit substations close to
the loads. Conversely, small loads,
short runs and a high percentage of
incandescent lighting would favor
lower utilization voltages such as
208Y/120V.
The principal advantage of the use of

higher secondary voltages in buildings
is that for a given load, less current
means smaller conductors and lower
voltage drop. Also, a given conductor
size can supply a large load at the
same voltage drop in volts, but a lower
percentage voltage drop because of
the higher supply voltage. Fewer or
smaller circuits can be used to transmit
the power from the service entrance
point to the final distribution points.
Smaller conductors can be used in many
branch circuits supplying power loads,
and a reduction in the number of lighting branch circuits is usually possible.
It is easier to keep voltage drops within
acceptable limits on 480V circuits than
on 208V circuits. When 120V loads are
supplied from a 480V system through

step-down transformers, voltage drop
in the 480V supply conductors can be
compensated for by the tap adjustments on the transformer, resulting
in full 120V output. Because these
transformers are usually located close
to the 120V loads, secondary voltage
drop should not be a problem. If it is,
taps may be used to compensate by
raising the voltage at the transformer.
The interrupting ratings of circuit
breakers and fuses at 480V have
increased considerably in recent years,
and protective devices are now available
for any required fault duty at 480V.
In addition, many of these protective
devices are current limiting, and can
be used to protect downstream equipment against these high fault currents.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Industrial installations, with large

motor loads, are almost always 480V,
often ungrounded delta or resistance
grounded delta or wye systems (see
section on ground fault protection).
Elevator
Panel
Typical
Practical Factors
Because most low voltage distribution
equipment available is rated for up to
600V, and conductors are insulated for
600V, the installation of 480V systems
uses the same techniques and is
essentially no more difficult, costly, or
hazardous than for 208V systems. The
major difference is that an arc of 120V
to ground tends to be self-extinguishing,
while an arc of 277V to ground tends
to be self-sustaining and likely to
cause severe damage. For this reason,
the National Electrical Code requires
ground fault protection of equipment
on grounded wye services of more
than 150V to ground, but not exceeding
600V phase-to-phase (for practical
purpose, 480Y/277V services), for any
service disconnecting means rated
1000A or more. The National Electrical
Code permits voltage up to 300V
to ground on circuits supplying
permanently installed electric discharge
lamp fixtures, provided the luminaires
do not have an integral manual switch
and are mounted at least 8 ft (2.4m)
above the floor. This permits a threephase, four-wire, solidly grounded
480Y/277V system to supply directly all
of the fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting in a building
at 277V, as well as motors at 480V.
Emergency
Lighting Panel
Typical
HVAC
Panel
(Typical Every
Third Floor)
HVAC
Feeder
Busway
Riser
11
Emergency
Lighting
Riser
Typical
Building and
Miscellaneous
Loads
10
Typical
480Y/277 V
208Y/120 V
Panel
Panel
Dry Type Transformer
480-208Y/120 V
(Typical Every Floor)
Elevator
Riser
Typical
12
13
Typical
14
Typical
Typical
Spare
15
Automatic
Transfer Switch
4000 A
Main CB
Gen. CB
CTs
PTs
Utility
Service
Utility
Metering
Emergency
or Standby
Generator
4000A at 480Y/277V
100,000A Available Fault Current
16
17
18
Figure 1.4-22. Typical Power Distribution and Riser Diagram for a Commercial Office Building
Include ground fault trip.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 088
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Economic Factors
Utilization equipment suitable for
principal loads in most buildings
is available for either 480V or 208V
systems. Three-phase motors and
their controls can be obtained for either
voltage, and for a given horsepower
are less costly at 480V. Fluorescent and
HID lamps can be used with either 277V
or 120V ballasts. However, in almost all
cases, the installed equipment will have
a lower total cost at the higher voltage.
Energy Conservation
Because of the greatly increased cost
of electrical power, designers must
consider the efficiency of electrical
distribution systems, and design for
energy conservation. In the past,
especially in commercial buildings,
design was for lowest first cost,
because energy was inexpensive.
Today, even in the speculative office
building, operating costs are so high
that energy-conserving designs can
justify their higher initial cost with a
rapid payback and continuing savings.
Buildings that must meet LEED certifications may require energy-saving
designs. There are four major sources
of energy conservation in a commercial
buildingthe lighting system, the
motors and controls, the transformers
and the HVAC system.
The lighting system must take
advantage of the newest equipment
and techniques. New light sources,
familiar light sources with higher
efficiencies, solid-state ballasts with
dimming controls, use of daylight,
environmental design, efficient
luminaires, computerized or
programmed control, and the like,
are some of the methods that can
increase the efficiency of lighting
systems. They add up to providing
the necessary amount of light, with the
desired color rendition, from the most
efficient sources, where and when it is
needed, and not providing light where
or when it is not necessary. Using the
best of techniques, office spaces that
originally required as much as 3.5W
per square foot have been given
improved lighting, with less glare
and higher visual comfort, using as
little as 1.0 to 2.0W per square foot.
In an office building of 200,000 square
feet (60,960m), this could mean a
saving of 400 kW, which, at $0.05 per
kWh, 250 days per year, 10 hours per
day, could save $50,000 per year in
energy costs. Obviously, efficient
lighting is a necessity.
Motors and controls are another cause

of wasted energy that can be reduced.
New, energy-efficient motor designs
are available using more and better
core steel, and larger windings.
For any motor operating 10 or more
hours per day, it is recommended to
use the energy-efficient types. These
motors have a premium cost of about
20% more than standard motors.
Depending on loading, hours of use
and the cost of energy, the additional
initial cost could be repaid in energy
saved within a few months, and it
rarely takes more than two years.
Because, over the life of a motor, the
cost of energy to operate it is many
times the cost of the motor itself, any
motor with many hours of use should
be of the energy-efficient type.
Where a motor drives a load with
variable output requirements such
as a centrifugal pump or a large fan,
customary practice has been to run the
motor at constant speed, and to throttle
the pump output or use inlet vanes or
outlet dampers on the fan. This is highly
inefficient and wasteful of energy. In
recent years, solid-state variablefrequency, variable-speed drives for
ordinary induction motors have been
available, reliable and relatively
inexpensive. Using a variable-speed
drive, the throttling valves, inlet vanes
or output dampers can be eliminated,
saving their initial cost and energy
over the life of the system. An
additional benefit of both energyefficient motors and variable-speed
drives (when operated at less than
full speed) is that the motors operate
at reduced temperatures, resulting in
increased motor life.
Transformers have inherent losses.
Transformers, like motors, are designed
for lower losses by using more and
better core materials, larger conductors,
etc., and this results in increased initial
cost. Because the 480V to 208Y/120V
stepdown transformers in an office
building are usually energized 24 hours
a day, savings from lower losses can
be substantial, and should be considered in all transformer specifications.
One method of obtaining reduced
losses is to specify transformers with
220C insulation systems designed for
150C average winding temperature
rise, with no more than 80C (or
sometimes 115C) average winding
temperature rise at full load. A
better method would be to evaluate
transformer losses, based on actual
loading cycles throughout the day,
21
and consider the cost of losses as well

as the initial cost of the transformers
in purchasing.
NEMA standard TP-1 is being adopted
by many states and is another method
of energy-efficient design. NEMA TP-1
establishes minimum operating
efficiencies for each distribution
transformer size at a loading equal to
35% of the transformer full load kVA.
The 35% loading value in the NEMA
standard reflects field studies conducted by the U.S. Department of
Energy, which showed that dry-type
transformers installed in commercial
facilities are typically loaded at an
average of 35% of their full load
capacity over a 24-hour time period.
Table 1.4-9 compares losses for
both low temperature rise and TP-1
transformers using a 75 kVA design.
Table 1.4-9. Load Losses
Temp.
Rise C
Load Losses in Watts
150
115
360
420
490
480
620
610
885
805
1535 2450
1170 1950
80
500
TP-1 150 230
535
310
615
480
730
745
945 1410
1235 2280
No
25% 35% 50% 75% Full
Loss Load Load Load Load Load
Efficiencies above TP-1. Candidates

Standard Level (CSL) is a DOE
efficiency evaluation for transformers.
CSL-1 is equivalent to TP-1. Levels
are from CSL-1 to CSL-5. CSL-3 is
being promoted for higher efficiency
applications. A NEMA white paper
Clarifications on the Use of DOE
DesignLines 6, 7 and 8 is available
from NEMA that elaborates on
the matter.
HVAC systems have traditionally been
very wasteful of energy, often being
designed for lowest first cost. This,
too, is changing. For example, reheat
systems are being replaced by variable
air volume systems, resulting in equal
comfort with substantial increases in
efficiency. While the electrical engineer
has little influence on the design of the
HVAC system, he/she can specify that
all motors with continuous or long duty
cycles are specified as energy-efficient
types, and that the variable-air-volume
fans do not use inlet vanes or outlet
dampers, but are driven by variablespeed drives. Variable-speed drives
can often be desirable on centrifugal
compressor units as well. Since some
of these requirements will be in HVAC
specifications, it is important for the
energy-conscious electrical engineer
to work closely with the HVAC engineer
at the design stage.
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-33
Sheet 01 089
Building Control Systems

In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from these energy-saving lighting,
power and HVAC systems, they must
be controlled to perform their functions
most efficiently. Constant monitoring
would be required for manual operation,
so some form of automatic control
is required. The simplest of these
energy-saving controls, often very
effective, is a time clock to turn various
systems on and off. Where flexible
control is required, programmable
controllers may be used. These range
from simple devices, similar to multifunction time clocks, up to full microprocessor-based, fully programmable
devices, really small computers. For
complete control of all building systems,
computers with specialized software
can be used. Computers can not only
control lighting and HVAC systems,
and provide peak demand control, to
minimize the cost of energy, but they
can perform many other functions.
Fire detection and alarm systems can
operate through the computer, which
can also perform auxiliary functions
such as elevator control and building
communication in case of fire. Building
security systems, such as closed-circuit
television monitoring, door alarms and
intruder sensing, can be performed by
the same building computer system.
The time clocks, programmable
controllers and computers can
obtain data from external sensors
and control the lighting, motors and
other equipment by means of hard
wiring-separate wires to and from
each piece of equipment. In the more
complex systems, this would result in
a tremendous number of control
wires, so other methods are frequently
used. A single pair of wires, with electronic digital multiplexing, can control
or obtain data from many different
points. Sometimes, coaxial cable is
used with advanced signaling equipment. Some systems dispense with
control wiring completely, sending
and receiving digital signals over the
power wiring. The newest systems
may use fiber-optic cables to carry
tremendous quantities of data, free
from electromagnetic interference.
The method used will depend on
the type, number and complexity
of functions to be performed.
CA08104001E
Because building design and control

for maximum energy saving is important and complex, and frequently
involves many functions and several
systems, it is necessary for the design
engineer to make a thorough building
and environmental study, and to
weigh the costs and advantages of
many systems. The result of good
design can be economical, efficient
operation. Poor design can be wasteful
and extremely costly.
Distributed Energy Resources

Distributed energy resources (DER)
are increasingly becoming prominent
sources of electric power. Distributed
energy resources are usually small-tomedium sources of electric generation,
either from renewable or non-renewable
sources. Sources include:
Photovoltaic (PV) systems

(solar systems)
Wind
Fossil-fueled (diesel, natural gas,
landfill gas, coal-bed methane)
generators (reciprocating engines)
Gas-fired turbines (natural gas,
landfill gas, coal-bed methane)
Water-powered (hydro)
Fuel cells
Microturbines
Wave power
Coal-fired boilers
Distributed energy resources may also

be termed alternative energy resources.
Prime Power
DER can be used for generating prime
power or for cogeneration. Prime power
concerns a system that is electrically
separated from the electrical grid.
Prime power is generated at remote
sites where commercial electrical
power is not available.
Cogeneration
Cogeneration is another outgrowth of
the high cost of energy. Cogeneration
is the production of electric power
concurrently with the production of
steam, hot water and similar energy
uses. The electric power can be the
main product, and steam or hot water
the byproduct, as in most commercial
installations, or the steam or hot water
can be the most required product,
and electric power a byproduct, as
in many industrial installations. In
some industries, cogeneration has
been common practice for many
years, but until recently it has not been
economically feasible for most
commercial installations. This has
been changed by the high cost of

purchased energy, plus a federal law
(Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act,
known as PURPA) that requires public
utilities to purchase any excess power
generated by the cogeneration plant.
In many cases, practical commercial
cogeneration systems have been built
that provide some or all of the electric
power required, plus hot water, steam,
and sometimes steam absorption-type
air conditioning. Such cogeneration
systems are now operating successfully in hospitals, shopping centers,
high-rise apartment buildings and
even commercial office buildings.
Where a cogeneration system is being
considered, the electrical distribution
system becomes more complex. The
interface with the utility company is
critical, requiring careful relaying
to protect both the utility and the
cogeneration system. Many utilities
have stringent requirements that
must be incorporated into the system.
Proper generator control and protection is necessary, as well. An on-site
electrical generating plant tied to an
electrical utility, is a sophisticated
engineering design.
Utilities require that when the
protective device at their substation
opens that the device connecting a
cogenerator to the utility open also.
One reason is that most cogenerators
are connected to feeders serving other
customers. Utilities desire to reclose
the feeder after a transient fault is
cleared. Reclosing in most cases will
damage the cogenerator if it had
remained connected to their system.
Islanding is another reason why the
utility insists on the disconnection of
the cogenerator. Islanding is the event
that after a fault in the utilitys system
is cleared by the operation of the
protective devices, a part of the
system may continue to be supplied
by cogeneration. Such a condition is
dangerous to the utilitys operation
during restoration work.
Major cogenerators are connected to
the subtransmission or the transmission
system of a utility. Major cogenerators
have buy-sell agreements. In such
cases, utilities use a trip transfer
scheme to trip the cogenerator breaker.
Guidelines that are given in ANSI
Guide Standard 1001 are a good
starting point, but the entire design
should be coordinated with the utility.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

August 2013
Sheet 01 090
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
PV System Design Considerations

Successful photovoltaic (PV) design
and construction is a complex multidiscipline endeavor. Proper planning
includes the site-layout study for
maximizing the suns energy harvesting for solar module selection, and
for updating the electrical/mechanical
design and construction to the latest
code and local constraints, including
fire marshal and seismic regulations.
Professionally prepared bid, permit,
construction and as-build drawings
shall be required and maintained.
For installation in/on/for existing
structures and sites, it is advised
that, at the minimum, pre-design
and construction tests be performed
for existing power-quality issues,
water drainage and the utility feeder/
transformer, and that electrical
distribution panel ratings are verified
sufficient for the planned solar system,
and the necessary arc flash studies be
performed. Connection to the utility
is always a utility interconnect agreement (application) process, and is
typically required for the available
solar incentives and programs offered
by the utility, municipality, state, and
various federal agencies and departments. State, and IRS tax incentives
require well-documented records.
Solar systems, while low maintenance, do require periodic service.
The solar modules need to be washedclean on a regular basis and electrical
terminations require initial and annual
checks. Cooling system filters are
periodic maintenance items, with the
re-fresh rate dependent upon typical
and unusual circumstances.
Solar systems installed near other new
construction where dust is generated
(e.g., grading, paving) or agricultural
environments may require additional
solar-system checks and services.
Planning for such contingencies is
the business of solar-system design,
construction and on-going operation.
Performance-based incentives
require verifiable metering, often
by registered/approved independent
third parties. Such monitoring periods
are typically for 60 or more months.
The S-Max inverter offers a wide range
of features and options to enable a
successful and long-lived solar-energy
harvesting solution. The isolation stepup transformer, coupled to either a
negative or a positive grounded solar
array, ensures that the S-Max can
match to all (known) solar module
technologies. The S-Max follows
standard industry and code practices
in determining the maximum number

of solar modules per string for the
open-circuit photovoltaic (PV) voltage
rise in cold weather (Voc < 600V as per
NEC). Its low 300V MPPT lower-limit
ensures that multiple configurations
are possible for solar systems hot
weather voltage drop (i.e., Vmp
as a function of temperature, solar
irradiance and array-conductor voltage
drop). The following equations are the
basis of all solar system layout and
design. Consult professional engineering to help when planning any solar
system. Engineering design firms
offering complete solar systems
turn-key calculations, drawings,
construction management and
procurement are a good place to
start. Eaton offers professional S-Max
inverter application assistance, on-site
commissioning and maintenance
services. Eaton maintains a working
relationship with the best engineering
services firms across the country, and
helps arrange the successful implantation of your solar system. The S-Max
250 kW inverter and up-fit solutions
easily perform well in Mega-Watt and
Utility-Scale systems. Eaton also offers
a wide range of balance-of-system
(BOS) products, ranging from solar
module source and array combiners,
to DC and AC breakers, electrical and
distribution panels and switchgear.
Low Temperature Equation

Voc_max = Voc + (temp-differential x
temp-coefficient-of-Voc)
The temp-differential is the difference
between the standard module rating
at 25C and the low temperature.
The voltage (Voc) will rise with
temperatures under 25C.
Seek the solar module data sheet for
a list of standard test condition (STC)
data, temperature coefficients, and
any special module-related information to determine the low-temperature
open circuit voltage. The NEC 2011,
and industry practice, requires the
use of the sites Extreme Annual
Mean Minimum Design Dry Bulb
Temperature data, available in the
ASHRAE Handbook. Code requires
that the resulting maximum voltage
(Voc) when added in the string of
modules be under 600V. Record
low temperatures provide an
indication of system performance
when temperatures drop to these
levels. The S-Max inverter is designed
to standards higher than 600 Vdc.
High Temperature Equation

Once the maximum number of
modules per string is established,
the minimum number of modules per
string needs to be calculated. Here,
more site-related aspects come into
play, as the voltage of solar modules
decreases with increasing temperature. The modules (photovoltaic cell)
temperature is influenced by the
ambient temperature, reflected sunloads from nearby structures, parapet
walls, roof-coatings, etc. Air-flow
above and behind the solar modules
affect the cell temperature. The
accepted industry standards to add
to the module heating is listed below.
Unusual mounting systems may
adjust these figures, and it is best to
seek assistance in establishing and
planning such installations.
20C for ground or pole mounted
solar systems
25C for roof-top solar systems
mounted at inclined angles
(offers improved air-flow behind
the modules)
30C for roof-top solar systems
mounted flat, yet at least 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) above the roof surface
Vmp_min = Vmp + (temp-differential x

temp-coefficient-of-Vmp)
The temp-differential in this case
includes the above temperature
adders. The Vmp and related
temperature coefficients are listed
on the solar modules data sheets.
While the code doesnt indicate the
high temperature to use (i.e., because
it is an equipment application issue),
the industry standard is to evaluate the
ASHRAE 2% and 4% high temperature
figures, coupled to known location
differences. Record high temperatures
provide an indication of system
performance when climatic condition
reaches these levels.
Beyond the damaging temperature
affects on photovoltaic module Vmp
voltage levels, voltage drop in PV
conductors under such conditions also
need to be calculated and evaluated,
beyond normal temperatures. The
inverter only uses (knows) the Vmp
voltage at the inverter, not at the
PV modules.
Increasing grid voltages also puts a
constraint on the minimum Vmp
voltage at the DC input stage.
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-35
Sheet 01 091

federal or other codes, or by any
governmental agency having jurisdiction. Optional standby systems, not
legally required, are also covered in
the NEC (Article 702).
To ensure the full MPPT range without

power-clipping (reduced power
output), prudent PV system designs
shall consider the PV arrays Vmp
voltage drop to the point of the
inverter connection, ambient
temperatures and the PV system
installation types effects on Vmp,
solar module miss-match and
tolerance variations, degradation of
solar modules over time (solar system
life), etc. Typical Vmp design values,
based upon known and expected
conditions are 510% over the
minimum MPPT tracking voltage.
Reference NEC 2011 Section 690,
Solar Photovoltaic Systems.
nation, with a rechargeable battery,

a charger to keep it at full capacity
when normal power is on, one or more
lamps, and a relay to connect the
battery to the lamps on loss of normal
power, is also permitted. Because
of the critical nature of emergency
power, ground fault protection is not
required. It is considered preferable
to risk arcing damage, rather than to
disconnect he emergency supply completely. For emergency power, ground
fault alarm is required by NEC 700.7(D)
to indicate a ground fault in solidly
grounded wye emergency systems
of more than 150V to ground and
circuit-protective devices rated 1000A
or more.
Emergency systems are intended to

supply power and illumination essential for safety to human life, when the
normal supply fails. NEC requirements
are stringent, requiring periodic testing
under load and automatic transfer to
emergency power supply on loss of
normal supply. See Figure 1.4-23.
All wiring from emergency source to
emergency loads must be kept separate
from all other wiring and equipment,
in its own distribution and raceway
system, except in transfer equipment
enclosures and similar locations. The
most common power source for large
emergency loads is an engine-generator
set, but the NEC also permits the
emergency supply (subject to local code
requirements) to be storage batteries,
uninterruptible power supplies, a
separate emergency service, or a
connection to the service ahead of the
normal service disconnecting means.
Unit equipment for emergency illumi-
Emergency Power
Most areas have requirements
for emergency and standby power
systems. The National Electrical Code
does not specifically call for any
emergency or standby power, but
does have requirements for those
systems when they are legally
mandated and classed as emergency
(Article 700), legally required standby
(Article 701) by municipal, state,
Legally required standby systems, as

required by the governmental agency
having jurisdiction, are intended to
supply power to selected loads, other
than those classed as emergency
systems, on loss of normal power.
These are usually loads not essential
to human safety, but loss of which
could create hazards or hamper
rescue or fire-fighting operations.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Utility
Source
Typical Application: Three engine generator sets serve the load, plus one additional engine
generator set for redundancy to achieve N+1 level of performance. Open or Closed transition is available.
G1
G2
G3
G4
10
11
Paralleling Switchgear
with Distribution
Revenue
Metering
12
HMI
Touchscreen
52G1
52G2
52G3
52G4
Main
Service
D1
D2
D3
13
D4
14
15
16
To Normal
Distribution
Circuits
ATS1
To Emergency
Circuits
ATS2
EDP1
ATS3
EDP2
ATS4
EDP3
17
18
EDP4
19
Optional Remote PC
with Software
LP1
BP1
LP2
BP2
LP3
BP3
LP4
BP4
20
Figure 1.4-23. Typical Emergency Power System
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01 092
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
NEC requirements are similar to those

for emergency systems, except that
wiring may occupy the same distribution and raceway system as the
normal wiring if desired. Optional
standby systems are those not legally
required, and are intended to protect
private business or property where
life safety does not depend on
performance of the system. Optional
systems can be treated as part of the
normal building wiring system. Both
legally required and optional standby
systems should be installed in such
a manner that they will be fully available on loss of normal power. It is
preferable to isolate these systems
as much as possible, even though not
required by code.
Where the emergency or standby
source, such as an engine generator
or separate service, has capacity to
supply the entire system, the transfer
scheme can be either a full-capacity
automatic transfer switch, or, less
costly but equally effective, normal
and emergency main circuit breakers,
electrically interlocked such that on
failure of the normal supply the
emergency supply is connected to the
load. However, if the emergency or
standby source does not have capacity
for the full load, as is usually the
case, such a scheme would require
automatic disconnection of the
nonessential loads before transfer.
Simpler and more economical in
such a case is a separate emergency
bus, supplied through an automatic
transfer switch, to feed all critical
loads. The transfer switch connects
this bus to the normal supply, in
normal operation. On failure of the
normal supply, the engine-generator
is started, and when it is up to speed
the automatic switch transfers the
emergency loads to this source. On
return of the normal source, manual or
automatic retransfer of the emergency
loads can take place.
Peak Shaving
Many installations now have
emergency or standby generators.
In the past, they were required for
hospitals and similar locations, but
not common in office buildings or
shopping centers. However, many
costly and unfortunate experiences
during utility blackouts in recent years
have led to the more frequent installation of engine generators in commercial and institutional systems for safety
and for supplying important loads.
Industrial plants, especially in process

industries, usually have some form
of alternate power source to prevent
extremely costly shutdowns. These
standby generating systems are
critical when needed, but they are
needed only infrequently. They
represent a large capital investment.
To be sure that their power will be
available when required, they should
be tested periodically under load.
The cost of electric energy has risen
to new high levels in recent years, and
utilities bill on the basis not only of
power consumed, but also on the
basis of peak demand over a small
interval. As a result, a new use for
in-house generating capacity has
developed. Utilities measure demand
charges on the basis of the maximum
demand for electricity in any given
specific period (typically 15 or 30
minutes) during the month. Some
utilities have a demand ratchet clause
that will continue demand charges on
a given peak demand for a full year,
unless a higher peak results in even
higher charges. One large load, coming
on at a peak time, can create higher
electric demand charges for a year.
Obviously, reducing the peak demand
can result in considerable savings in
the cost of electrical energy. For those
installations with engine generators
for emergency use, modern control
systems (computers or programmable
controllers) can monitor the peak
demand, and start the engine-generator
to supply part of the demand as it
approaches a preset peak value. The
engine-generator must be selected
to withstand the required duty cycle.
The simplest of these schemes transfer specific loads to the generator.
More complex schemes operate the
generator in parallel with the normal
utility supply. The savings in demand
charges can reduce the cost of owning
the emergency generator equipment.
In some instances, utilities with little
reserve capacity have helped finance
the cost of some larger customerowned generating equipment. In
return, the customer agrees to take
some or all of his load off the utility
system and on to his own generator at
the request of the utility (with varying
limitations) when the utility load
approaches capacity. In some cases,
the customers generator is paralleled
with the utility to help supply the peak
utility loads, with the utility buying the
supplied power. Some utilities have
been able to delay large capital expenditures for additional generating
capacity by such arrangements.
It is important that the electrical system designer providing a substantial

source of emergency and standby
power investigate the possibility of
using it for peak shaving, and even
of partial utility company financing.
Frequently, substantial savings in
power costs can be realized for a
small additional outlay in distribution
and control equipment.
Peak shaving equipment operating in
parallel with the utility are subject to the
comments made under cogeneration
as to separation from the utility under
fault conditions.
Sound Levels
Sound Levels of Electrical Equipment
for Offices, Hospitals, Schools and
Similar Buildings
Insurance underwriters and building
owners desire and require that the
electrical apparatus be installed
for maximum safety and the least
interference with the normal use of
the property. Architects should take
particular care with the designs for
hospitals, schools and similar buildings to keep the sound perception of
such equipment as motors, blowers
and transformers to a minimum.
Even though transformers are
relatively quiet, resonant conditions
may exist near the equipment, which
will amplify their normal 120 Hz hum.
Therefore, it is important that consideration be given to the reduction of
amplitude and to the absorption of
energy at this frequency. This problem
begins in the designing stages of the
equipment and the building. There are
two points worthy of consideration: 1)
What sound levels are desired in the
normally occupied rooms of this building? 2) To effect this, what sound level
in the equipment room and what type
of associated acoustical treatment
will give the most economical
installation overall?
A relatively high sound level in the
equipment room does not indicate
an abnormal condition within the
apparatus. However, absorption may
be necessary if sound originating in
an unoccupied equipment room is
objectionable outside the room.
Furthermore, added absorption
material usually is desirable if
there is a build-up of sound
due to reflections.
CA08104001E

August 2013
1.4-37
Sheet 01 093

Some reduction or attenuation takes
place through building walls, the
remainder may be reflected in various
directions, resulting in a build-up or
apparent higher levels, especially if
resonance occurs because of room
dimensions or material characteristics.
Area Consideration
In determining permissible sound levels within a building, it is necessary to
consider how the rooms are to be used
and what levels may be objectionable
to occupants of the building. The
ambient sound level values given in
Table 1.4-10 are representative average
values and may be used as a guide in
determining suitable building levels.
Decrease in sound level varies at an
approximate rate of 6 dB for each
doubling of the distance from the
source of sound to the listener. For
example, if the level 6 ft (1.8m) from
a transformer is 50 dB, the level at a
distance of 12 ft (3.7m) would be 44 dB
and at 24 ft (7.3m) the level decreases
to 38 dB, etc. However, this rule applies
only to equipment in large areas
equivalent to an out-of-door installation,
with no nearby reflecting surfaces.
Table 1.4-10. Typical Sound Levels
Description
Average
Decibel
Level (dB)
Radio, recording and TV studios

Theatres and music rooms
Hospitals, auditoriums and churches
2530
3035
3540
Classrooms and lecture rooms

Apartments and hotels
Private offices and conference rooms
3540
3545
4045
Stores
Residence (radio, TV off)
and small offices
Medium office (3 to 10 desks)
4555
Residence (radio, TV on)

Large store (5 or more clerks)
Factory office
60
61
61
Large office
Average factory
Average street
64
70
80
53
58
Table 1.4-11. Maximum Average Sound LevelsDecibels

kVA
Liquid-Filled Transformers
Self-Cooled
Rating (OA)
Forced-Air
Cooled Rating (FA)
Self-Cooled
Rating (AA)
Forced-Air
Cooled Rating (FA)
300
500
750
55
56
58
67
67
58
60
64
67
67
67
1000
1500
2000
58
60
61
67
67
67
64
65
66
67
68
69
2500
3000
3750
62
63
64
67
67
67
68
68
70
71
71
73
5000
6000
7500
65
66
67
67
68
69
71
72
73
73
74
75
10,000
68
70
76
Because values given in Table 1.4-11

are in general higher than those given
in Table 1.4-10, the difference must be
attenuated by distance and by proper
use of materials in the design of the
building. An observer may believe
that a transformer is noisy because
the level in the room where it is
located is high. Two transformers of
the same sound output in the same
room increase the sound level in the
room approximately 3 dB, and three
transformers by about 5 dB, etc.
Sounds due to structure-transmitted
vibrations originating from the transformer are lowered by mounting the
transformers on vibration dampeners
or isolators. There are a number of
different sound vibration isolating
materials that may be used with
good results. Dry-type power transformers are often built with an isolator
mounted between the transformer
support and case members. The
natural period of the core and coil
structure when mounted on vibration
dampeners is about 10% of the fundamental frequency. The reduction in the
transmitted vibration is approximately

98%. If the floor or beams beneath
the transformer are light and flexible,
the isolator must be softer or have
improved characteristics in order to
keep the transmitted vibrations to a
minimum. (Enclosure covers and
ventilating louvers are often improperly tightened or gasketed and
produce unnecessary noise.) The
building structure will assist the
dampeners if the transformer is
mounted above heavy floor members
or if mounted on a heavy floor slab.
Positioning of the transformer in
relation to walls and other reflecting
surfaces has a great effect on reflected
noise and resonances. Often, placing
the transformer at an angle to the wall,
rather than parallel to it, will reduce
noise. Electrical connections to a
substation transformer should
be made with flexible braid or
conductors; connections to an
individually mounted transformer
should be in flexible conduit.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Transformer Sound Levels

Transformers emit a continuous
120 Hz hum with harmonics when
connected to 60 Hz circuits. The
fundamental frequency is the hum
that annoys people primarily because
of its continuous nature. For purposes
of reference, sound measuring
instruments convert the different
frequencies to 1000 Hz and a 40 dB
level. Transformer sound levels based
on NEMA publication TR-1 are listed
in Table 1.4-11.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

August 2013
Sheet 01094
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-1
Sheet 01 095
IEEE Protective Relay Numbers

Table 1.5-1. Selected IEEE Device Numbers for Switchgear Apparatus
Device
Number
Function
Definition
Typical
Uses
Time-delay starting or closing relay
A device that functions to give a desired amount

Used for providing a time-delay for
of time delay before or after any point of operation re-transfer back to the normal source
in a switching sequence or protective relay system, in an automatic transfer scheme.
except as specifically provided by device functions
48, 62 and 79 described later.
Starting circuit breaker
A device whose principal function is to connect

a machine to its source of starting voltage.
19
Starting to running transition timer
A device that operates to initiate or cause the

automatic transfer of a machine from the starting
to the running power connection.
Used to transfer a reduced voltage

starter from starting to running.
21
Distance relay
A device that functions when the circuit

admittance, impedance or reactance increases or
decreases beyond predetermined limits.
23
Temperature control device
A device that functions to raise or to lower the

temperature of a machine or other apparatus, or
of any medium, when its temperature falls below
or rises above, a predetermined level.
Used as a thermostat to control

space heaters in outdoor equipment.
24
Volts per hertz relay
A device that operates when the ratio of voltage

to frequency is above a preset value or is below
a different preset value. The relay may have any
combination of instantaneous or time delayed
characteristics.
A device that operates when two AC circuits are

within the desired limits of frequency, phase angle
or voltage, to permit or cause the paralleling of
these two circuits.
In a closed transition breaker

transfer, a 25 relay is used to ensure
two-sources are synchronized before
paralleling. Eaton FP-5000/EDR-5000
feeder protective relays.
27
Undervoltage relay
A device which functions on a given value of

undervoltage.
Used to initiate an automatic transfer

when a primary source of power is lost.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/MP-4000/
EDR-5000/EDR-4000 protective relays.
32
33
34
Directional power relay
Position switch
Master sequence device
1
2
3
4
Synchronizing or synchronism check device
Annunciator relay
ii
25
30
A non-automatically reset device that gives a

number of separate visual indications upon the
functioning of protective devices, and which may
also be arranged to perform a lockout function.
Used to remotely indicate that a

protective relay has functioned, or
that a circuit breaker has tripped.
Typically, a mechanical drop type
annunciator panel is used.
A relay that functions on a desired value of power

flow in a given direction, or upon reverse power
resulting from arc back in the anode or cathode
circuits of a power rectifier.
Used to prevent reverse power from

feeding an upstream fault. Often
used when primary backup generation
is used in a facility. Eaton FP-5000/
EDR-5000 protective relays.
A device that makes or breaks contact when the

main device or piece of apparatus, which has no
device function number, reaches a given point.
Used to indicate the position of a

drawout circuit breaker (TOC switch).
A device such as a motor-operated multi-contact
switch, or the equivalent, or a programmable

device, that establishes or determines the operating
sequence of the major devices in equipment
during starting and stopping, or during sequential
switching operations.
Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000
motor protective relays.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
37
Undercurrent or underpower relay
A relay that functions when the current or power

flow decreases below a predetermined value.
38
Bearing protective device
A device that functions on excessive bearing

Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000 motor
temperature, or on other abnormal mechanical
protective relays.
conditions, such as undue wear, which may
eventually result in excessive bearing temperature.
40
Field relay
A device that functions on a given or abnormally
high or low value or failure of machine field current,

or on an excessive value of the reactive component
of armature current in an AC machine indicating
abnormally high or low field excitation.
18
19
41
Field circuit breaker
A device that functions to apply, or to remove,

the field excitation of a machine.
42
Running circuit breaker
A device whose function is to connect a machine

to its source of running or operating voltage.
This function may also be used for a device, such
as a contactor, that is used in series with a circuit
breaker or other fault-protecting means, primarily
for frequent opening and closing of the circuit.
CA08104001E
16
17
20
21

Reference Data
1.5-2
August 2013
Sheet 01 096
Table 1.5-1. Selected IEEE Device Numbers for Switchgear Apparatus (Continued)
Device
Number
Function
Definition
Typical
Uses
43
Manual transfer or selector device
A manually operated device that transfers control

or potential circuits in order to modify the plan of
operation of the associated equipment or of some
of the associated devices.
44
Unit sequence starting relay
A device that functions to start the next available

unit in multiple-unit equipment upon the failure or
non-availability of the normally preceding unit.
46
Reverse-phase, or phase balance,

current relay
A relay that functions when the polyphase

currents are of reverse-phase sequence, or when
the polyphase currents are unbalanced or contain
the negative phase-sequence components above
a given amount.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
EDR-4000 feeder protective relays and
MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000 motor
protective relays.
47
Phase-sequence voltage relay
A relay that functions upon a predetermined

value of polyphase voltage in the desired phase
sequence.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
EDR-4000 feeder protective relays
and MP-3000/MP-4000 motor
protective relays.
48
Incomplete sequence relay
A relay that generally returns the equipment to the

normal, or off, position and locks it out of the
normal starting, or operating or stopping sequence
is not properly completed within a predetermined
amount of time. If the device is used for alarm
purposes only, it should preferably be designated
as 48A (alarm).
49
Machine, or transformer, thermal relay
A relay that functions when the temperature of a

machine armature, or other load carrying winding
or element of a machine, or the temperature
of a power rectifier or power transformer
(including a power rectifier transformer) exceeds
a predetermined value.
Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
ETR-4000 motor protective relays.
50
Instantaneous overcurrent,
or rate-of-rise relay
A relay that functions instantaneously on an

excessive value of current, or an excessive rate of
current rise, thus indicating a fault in the apparatus
of the circuit being protected.
Used for tripping a circuit breaker

instantaneously during a high-level
short circuit. Can trip on phasephase (50), phase-neutral (50N),
phase-ground (50G) faults.
Eaton Digitrip 3000, FP-5000/
FP-4000/EDR-5000/EDR-4000/
EDR-3000 protective relays,
MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
51
AC time overcurrent relay
A relay with either a definite or inverse time

characteristic that functions when the current in an
AC circuit exceeds a predetermined value.
Used for tripping a circuit breaker

after a time delay during a sustained
overcurrent. Used for tripping a
circuit breaker instantaneously
during a high-level short circuit.
Can trip on phase (51), neutral (51N)
or ground (51G) overcurrents.
Eaton Digitrip 3000, FP-5000/
FP-4000/EDR-5000/EDR-4000/
EDR-3000 protective relays,
MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
52
AC circuit breaker
A device that is used to close and interrupt an

AC power circuit under normal conditions or to
interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency
conditions.
17
A term applied typically to medium

voltage circuit breakers, or low
voltage power circuit breakers.
Eaton VCP-W vacuum circuit
breaker, magnum DS low voltage
power circuit breaker
53
Exciter or DC generator relay
A device that forces the DC machine field excitation

to build up during starting or that functions when
the machine voltage has built up to a given value.
18
55
Power factor relay
A relay that operates when the power factor

in an AC circuit rises above or below a
predetermined value.
19
56
Field application relay
A device that automatically controls the application

of the field excitation to an AC motor at some
predetermined point in the slip cycle.
20
59
Overvoltage relay
A relay that functions on a given value of

overvoltage.
ii
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
21
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000
feeder protective relays and MP-4000
motor protective relay.
Used to trip a circuit breaker,

protecting downstream equipment
from sustained overvoltages.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000
feeder protective relays and MP-4000
motor protective relay.
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-3
Sheet 01 097

Device
Number
Function
Definition
Typical
Uses
60
Voltage or current balance relay
A relay that operates on a given difference in

voltage, or current input or output of two circuits.
ii
62
Time-delay stopping or opening relay
A time-delay relay that serves in conjunction with

the device that initiates the shutdown, stopping
or opening operation in an automatic sequence.
Used in conjunction with a 27 device

to delay tripping of a circuit breaker
during a brief loss of primary voltage,
to prevent nuisance tripping.
A switch that operates on given values or on a

given rate of change of pressure.
Used to protect a transformer during

a rapid pressure rise during a short
circuit. This device will typically act
to open the protective devices above
and below the transformer. Typically
used with a 63-X auxiliary relay to
trip the circuit breaker.
63
Pressure switch
64
Ground protective relay
A relay that functions on a failure of the insulation

Used to detect and act on a groundof a machine, transformer or of other apparatus to fault condition. In a pulsing high
ground, or on flashover of a DC machine to ground. resistance grounding system, a 64
device will initiate the alarm.
65
Governor
A device consisting of an assembly of fluid,
electrical or mechanical control equipment used for

regulating the flow of water, steam or other media
to the prime mover for such purposes as starting,
holding speed or load, or stopping.
66
Notching or jogging device
A device that functions to allow only a specified

Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000
number of operations of a given device, or
motor protective relays.
equipment, or a specified number of successive
operations within a given time of each other. It also
functions to energize a circuit periodically or for
fractions of specified time intervals, or that is used
to permit intermittent acceleration or jogging of a
machine at low speeds for mechanical positioning.
67
AC directional overcurrent relay
A relay that functions on a desired value of AC

overcurrent flowing in a predetermined direction.
69
Permissive control device
A device that is generally a two-position manually Used as a remote-local switch for

operated switch that in one position permits the
circuit breaker control.
closing of a circuit breaker, or the placing of
equipment into operation, and in the other position
prevents the circuit breaker to the equipment from
being operated.
71
Level switch
A switch that operates on given values, or on a

given rate of change of level.
Eaton FP-5000/EDR-5000 feeder

protective relays.
Used to indicate a low liquid level within

a transformer tank in order to save
transformers from loss-of-insulation
failure. An alarm contact is available
as a standard option on a liquid level
gauge. It is set to close before an unsafe
condition actually occurs.
72
DC circuit breaker
A device that is used to close and interrupt a

DC power circuit under normal conditions or to
interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency
conditions.
73
Load-resistor contactor
A device that is used to shunt or insert a step of

load limiting, shifting or indicating resistance in
a power circuit; to switch a space heater in circuit;
or to switch a light or regenerative load resistor
of a power rectifier or other machine in and out
of circuit.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
74
Alarm relay
A device other than an annunciator, as covered

under device number 30, which is used to operate,
or to operate in connection with, a visible or
audible alarm.
78
Phase-angle measuring relay
A device that functions at a predetermined phase
angle between two voltages, between two currents,

or between voltage and current.
18
79
AC reclosing relay
A relay that controls the automatic closing and

locking out of an AC circuit interrupter.
19
Used to automatically reclose a

circuit breaker after a trip, assuming
the fault has been cleared after the
power was removed from the circuit.
The recloser will lock-out after a
predetermined amount of failed
attempts to reclose.
17
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
1.5-4
August 2013
Sheet 01 098
i
ii
Device
Number
Function
Definition
Typical
Uses
81
Frequency relay
A relay that functions on a predetermined value of

frequencyeither under or over, or on normal
system frequencyor rate of change frequency.
Used to trip a generator circuit

breaker in the event the frequency
drifts above or below a given value.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
EDR-4000 feeder protective
relays and MP-4000 motor
protective relay.
83
Automatic selective control or transfer relay
A relay that operates to select automatically

between certain sources or conditions in
equipment, or performs a transfer operation
automatically.
Used to transfer control power

sources in a double-ended
switchgear lineup.
85
Carrier or pilot-wire relay
A device that is operated or restrained by a signal

transmitted or received via any communications
media used for relaying.
86
Locking-out relay
An electrically operated hand, or electrically, reset

relay that functions to shut down and hold an
equipment out of service on the occurrence of
abnormal conditions.
Used in conjunction with protective

relays to lock-out a circuit breaker
(or multiple circuit breakers) after
a trip. Typically required to be
manually reset by an operator before
the breaker can be reclosed.
87
Differential protective relay
A protective relay that functions on a percentage or Used to protect static equipment,

phase angle or other quantitative difference of two such as cable, bus or transformers,
currents or of some other electrical quantities.
by measuring the current differential
between two points. Typically the
upstream and/or downstream circuit
breaker will be incorporated into the
zone of protection. Eaton FP-5000
feeder protective relay (87B) and
MD-3000 protective relay.
90
Regulating device
A device that functions to regulate a quantity or

quantities, such as voltage, current, power, speed,
frequency, temperature and load, at a certain value
or between certain (generally close) limits for
machines, tie lines or other apparatus.
91
Voltage directional relay
A device that operates when the voltage across an

open circuit breaker or contactor exceeds a given
value in a given direction.
94
Tripping or trip-free relay
A relay that functions to trip a circuit breaker,

contactor or equipment, or to permit immediate
tripping by other devices, or to prevent immediate
reclosure of a circuit interrupter, in case it should
open automatically even though its closing circuit
is maintained closed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-5
Sheet 01 099
Suggested IEEE Designations for Suffix Letters
Suggested IEEE Designations

for Suffix Letters
Auxiliary Devices
These letters denote separate auxiliary
devices, such as the following:
C
Closing relay/contactor
CL
Auxiliary relay, closed

(energized when main device
is in closed position)
CS
Control switch
Main Device
Other Suffix Letters
The following letters denote the main

device to which the numbered device
is applied or is related:
The following letters cover all other

distinguishing features, characteristics or conditions not specifically
described in Auxiliary Devices through
Main Device Parts, which serve to
describe the use of the device in the
equipment, such as:
Alarm/auxiliary power
AC
Alternating current
BP
Bypass
BT
Bus tie
Capacitor
DC
Direct current
Down position switch relay
Exciter
Lowering relay
Feeder/field
Opening relay/contactor
Generator/ground
OP
Auxiliary relay, open

(energized when main device
is in open position)
Motor/metering
MOC
Mechanism operated contact
PB
Push button
Synchronizing/secondary
Raising relay
Transformer
UP position switch relay
TOC
Truck-operated contacts
Auxiliary relay
Main Device Parts
Auxiliary relay
Auxiliary relay
These letters denote parts of the

main device, except auxiliary contacts,
position switches, limit switches and
torque limit switches:
Actuating Quantities
Automatic
BF
Breaker failure
Close
Decelerating/down
Emergency
Failure/forward
HS
High speed
Local/lower
Manual
Open
OFF
Off
ON
On
Raise/reclosing/remote/reverse
Test/trip
TDC
Time-delay closing contact
TDDO
Time delayed relay coil

drop-out
10
11
Coil/condenser/capacitor
CC
Closing coil/closing contactor
TDO
Time-delay opening contact
HC
Holding coil
TDPU
Time delayed relay coil pickup
Amperes/alternating
Operating motor
THD
Total harmonic distortion
Current
OC
Opening contactor
Frequency/fault
Solenoid
I0
Zero sequence current
SI
Seal-in
I-, I2
Negative sequence current
Target
I+, I1
Positive sequence current
TC
Trip coil
Power/pressure
PF
Power factor
Speed
Temperature
Voltage/volts/vacuum
VAR
Reactive power
VB
Vibration
Watts
ii
These letters indicate the condition or

electrical quantity to which the device
responds, or the medium in which it is
located, such as the following:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
1.5-6

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 100
Codes and Standards
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Codes and Standards

The National Electrical Code (NEC),
NFPA Standard No. 70, is the most
prevalent electrical code in the United
States. The NEC, which is revised every
three years, has no legal standing of
its own, until it is adopted as law by
a jurisdiction, which may be a city,
county or state. Most jurisdictions
adopt the NEC in its entirety; some
adopt it with variations, usually more
rigid, to suit local conditions and
requirements. A few large cities, such
as New York and Chicago, have their
own electrical codes, basically similar
to the NEC. The designer must determine which code applies in the area
of a specific project.
The Occupational Safety and Health
Act (OSHA) of 1970 sets uniform
national requirements for safety in the
workplaceanywhere that people are
employed. Originally OSHA adopted
the 1971 NEC as rules for electrical
safety. As the NEC was amended every
three years, the involved process for
modifying a federal law such as OSHA
made it impossible for the act to adopt
each new code revision. To avoid this
problem, the OSHA administration
in 1981 adopted its own code, a condensed version of the NEC containing
only those provisions considered
related to occupational safety. OSHA
was amended to adopt this code,
based on NFPA Standard 70E, Part 1,
which is now federal law.
The NEC is a minimum safety
standard. Efficient and adequate
design usually requires not just
meeting, but often exceeding NEC
requirements to provide an effective,
reliable, economical electrical system.
Many equipment standards have been
established by the National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
and the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI). Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) has standards that
equipment must meet before UL will
list or label it. Most jurisdictions and
OSHA require that where equipment
listed as safe by a recognized laboratory is available, unlisted equipment
may not be used. UL is by far the most
widely accepted national laboratory,
although Factory Mutual Insurance
Company lists some equipment, and
a number of other testing laboratories

have been recognized and accepted.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers (IEEE) publishes a number
of books (the color book series) on
recommended practices for the design
of industrial buildings, commercial
buildings, emergency power systems,
grounding, and the like. Most of these
IEEE standards have been adopted as
ANSI standards. They are excellent
guides, although they are not in any
way mandatory.
A design engineer should conform

to all applicable codes, and require
equipment to be listed by UL or
another recognized testing laboratory
wherever possible, and to meet
ANSI or NEMA standards. ANSI/IEEE
recommended practices should
be followed to a great extent. In
many cases, standards should be
exceeded to get a system of the
quality required. The design goal
should be a safe, efficient, longlasting, flexible and economical
Professional Organizations
American National Standards Institute
(ANSI)
National Electrical Manufacturers

Association (NEMA)
Headquarters:
1300 North 17th Street

Suite 1847
Rosslyn, VA 22209
703-841-3200
1819 L Street, NW
6th Floor
Washington, DC 20036
202-293-8020
Operations:
25 West 43rd Street
4th Floor
New York, NY 10036
212-642-4900
www.nema.org
National Fire Protection Association

(NFPA)
1 Battery March Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
617-770-3000
www.ansi.org
www.nfpa.org
Institute of Electrical and Electronic

Engineers (IEEE)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
Headquarters:
3 Park Avenue
17th Floor
New York, NY 10016-5997
212-419-7900
Operations:
445 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08854-1331
732-981-0060
www.ieee.org
International Association of Electrical

Inspectors (IAEI)
901 Waterfall Way
Suite 602
Richardson, TX 75080-7702
972-235-1455
333 Pfingsten Road

Northbrook, IL 60062-2096
847-272-8800
www.ul.com
International Code Council (ICC)

5203 Leesburg Pike
Suite 600
Falls Church, VA 22041
1-888-422-7233
www.iccsafe.org
The American Institute of Architects (AIA)

1735 New York Avenue, NW
Washington, DC 20006-5292
202-626-7300
www.aia.org
www.iaei.org
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-7
Sheet 01 101
Motor Protective Device Data
Motor Protection
Consistent with the 2011 NEC
430.6(A)(1) circuit breaker, HMCP and
fuse rating selections are based on
full load currents for induction motors
running at speeds normal for belted
motors and motors with normal
torque characteristics using data taken
from NEC Table 430.250 (three-phase).
Actual motor nameplate ratings shall
be used for selecting motor running
overload protection. Motors built
special for low speeds, high torque
characteristics, special starting
conditions and applications will
require other considerations as
defined in the application section
of the NEC.
These additional considerations may
require the use of a higher rated HMCP,
or at least one with higher magnetic
pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse
ampere rating selections are in
line with maximum rules given in
NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based
on known characteristics of Eaton type
breakers, specific units are recommended. The current ratings are no
more than the maximum limits set by
the NEC rules for motors with code
letters F to V or without code letters.
Motors with lower code letters will
require further considerations.
In general, these selections were
based on:
1. Ambientoutside enclosure not
more than 40C (104F).
2. Motor startinginfrequent
starting, stopping or reversing.
3. Motor accelerating time
10 seconds or less.
4. Locked rotormaximum 6 times
motor FLA.
Type HMCP motor circuit protector
may not set at more than 1300% of
the motor full-load current to comply
with NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA
Design B energy high-efficiency
motors that can be set up to 1700%.)
Circuit breaker selections are based
on types with standard interrupting
ratings. Higher interrupting rating types
may be required to satisfy specific
system application requirements.
Table 1.5-2. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Horsepower
Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA
Fuse Size NEC 430.52

Maximum
Amperes
Recommended Eaton
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
Time Delay
Amperes
Amperes
Non-Time Delay
Adj. Range
i
ii
230V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
30
50
50
70
90300
150500
150500
210700
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
460V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
5
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
250
400
400
12502500
20004000
20004000
575V, Three-Phase
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
5
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
15
15
30
30
45150
45150
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
50
50
50
100
150500
150500
150500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
18
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
19
For motor full load currents of

208V and 200V, increase the
corresponding 230V motor values
by 10 and 15% respectively.
14
15
16
17
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
1.5-8
August 2013
Sheet 01 102
Motor Protective Device Data
Table 1.5-3. 60 Hz, Recommended Protective Setting for Induction Motors

hp
ii
Full Load Minimum Wire Size

Amperes 75C Copper Ampacity
(NEC) FLA at 125% FLA
Size
Minimum Conduit Size,

Inches (mm)

Maximum Amperes
THW
Time
Delay
Amperes
THWN
XHHN
Non-Time
Delay
Recommended Eaton:
Circuit
Breaker
Amperes
Motor Circuit
Protector
Amperes
Adjustable Range
115V, Single-Phase
1
2
3
3/4
1
1-1/2
13.8
16
20
14
14
12
20
20
30
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
25
30
35
45
50
60
30
35
40
2
3
5
7-1/2
24
34
56
80
10
8
4
3
30
50
85
100
0.50 (12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
1.00 (25.4)
1.00 (25.4)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
1.00 (25.4)
45
60
100
150
80
110
175
250
50
70
100
150
230V, Single-Phase
3/4
1
1-1/2
6.9
8
10
14
14
14
20
20
20
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
15
15
20
25
25
30
15
20
25
2
3
5
7-1/2
12
17
28
40
14
12
10
8
20
30
50
50
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
25
30
50
70
40
60
90
125
30
40
60
80
Two-pole device
not available

Two-pole device
not available
Consult fuse manufacturers catalog for smaller fuse ratings.

Types are for minimum interrupting capacity breakers. Ensure that the fault duty does not exceed breakers I.C.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-9
Sheet 01 103
Chart of Short Circuit Currents for Transformers

Table 1.5-4. Secondary Short-Circuit Current of Typical Power Transformers
208V, Three-Phase
240V, Three-Phase
480V, Three-Phase
600V, Three-Phase
Transformer
Rating
ThreePhase
kVA and
Impedance
Percent
Maximum
ShortCircuit
kVA
Available
from
Primary
System
300
5%
50,000
100,000
150,000
834
834
834
14,900
15,700
16,000
1700
1700
1700
16,600
17,400
17,700
722
722
722
12,900
13,600
13,900
2900
2900
2900
15,800
16,500
16,800
361
361
361
6400
6800
6900
1400
1400
1400
7800
8200
8300
289
289
289
5200
5500
5600
1200
1200
1200
6400
6700
6800
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
834
834
834
16,300
16,500
16,700
1700
1700
1700
18,000
18,200
18,400
722
722
722
14,100
14,300
14,400
2900
2900
2900
17,000
17,200
17,300
361
361
361
7000
7100
7200
1400
1400
1400
8400
8500
8600
289
289
289
5600
5700
5800
1200
1200
1200
6800
6900
7000
1388
1388
1388
21,300
25,200
26,000
2800
2800
2800
25,900 1203
28,000 1203
28,800 1203
20,000
21,900
22,500
4800
4800
4800
24,800
26,700
27,300
601
601
601
10,000
10,900
11,300
2400
2400
2400
12,400
13,300
13,700
481
481
481
8000
8700
9000
1900
1900
1900
9900
10,600
10,900
1388
250,000
1388
500,000
Unlimited 1388
26,700
27,200
27,800
2800
2800
2800
29,500 1203
30,000 1203
30,600 1203
23,100
23,600
24,100
4800
4800
4800
27,900
28,400
28,900
601
601
601
11,600
11,800
12,000
2400
2400
2400
14,000
14,200
14,400
481
481
481
9300
9400
9600
1900
1900
1900
11,200
11,300
11,500
2080
2080
2080
28,700
32,000
33,300
4200
4200
4200
32,900 1804
36,200 1804
37,500 1804
24,900
27,800
28,900
7200
7200
7200
32,100
35,000
36,100
902
902
902
12,400
13,900
14,400
3600
3600
3600
16,000
17,500
18,000
722
722
722
10,000
11,100
11,600
2900
2900
2900
12,900
14,000
14,500
2080
250,000
2080
500,000
Unlimited 2080
34,400
35,200
36,200
4200
4200
4200
38,600 1804
39,400 1804
40,400 1804
29,800
30,600
31,400
7200
7200
7200
37,000
37,800
38,600
902
902
902
14,900
15,300
15,700
3600
3600
3600
18,500
18,900
19,300
722
722
722
11,900
12,200
12,600
2900
2900
2900
14,800
15,100
15,500
2776
2776
2776
35,900
41,200
43,300
5600
5600
5600
41,500 2406
46,800 2406
48,900 2406
31,000
35,600
37,500
9800
9800
9800
40,600 1203
45,200 1203
47,100 1203
15,500
17,800
18,700
4800
4800
4800
20,300
22,600
23,500
962
962
962
12,400
14,300
15,000
3900
3900
3900
16,300
18,200
18,900
2776
250,000
2776
500,000
Unlimited 2776
45,200
46,700
48,300
5600
5600
5600
50,800 2406
52,300 2406
53,900 2406
39,100
40,400
41,800
9800
9800
9800
48,700 1203
50,000 1203
51,400 1203
19,600
20,200
20,900
4800
4800
4800
24,400
25,000
25,700
962
962
962
15,600
16,200
16,700
3900
3900
3900
19,500
20,100
20,600
4164
4164
4164
47,600
57,500
61,800
8300
8300
8300
55,900 3609
65,800 3609
70,100 3609
41,200
49,800
53,500
14,400
14,400
14,400
55,600 1804
64,200 1804
57,900 1804
20,600
24,900
26,700
7200
7200
7200
27,800 1444
32,100 1444
33,900 1444
16,500
20,000
21,400
5800
5800
5800
22,300
25,800
27,200
4164
250,000
4164
500,000
Unlimited 4164
65,600
68,800
72,500
8300
8300
8300
73,900 3609
77,100 3609
80,800 3609
56,800
59,600
62,800
14,400
14,400
14,400
71,200 1804
74,000 1804
77,200 1804
28,400
29,800
31,400
7200
7200
7200
35,600 1444
37,000 1444
38,600 1444
22,700
23,900
25,100
5800
5800
5800
28,500
29,700
30,900
10
2406
2406
2406
24,700
31,000
34,000
9600
9600
9600
34,300 1924
40,600 1924
43,600 1924
19,700
24,800
27,200
7800
7800
7800
27,500
32,600
35,000
11
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
2406
2406
2406
36,700
39,100
41,800
9600
9600
9600
46,300 1924
48,700 1924
51,400 1924
29,400
31,300
33,500
7800
7800
7800
37,200
39,100
41,300
3008
3008
3008
28,000
36,500
40,500
12,000
12,000
12,000
40,000 2405
48,500 2405
52,500 2405
22,400
29,200
32,400
9600
9600
9600
32,000
38,800
42,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
3008
3008
3008
44,600
48,100
52,300
12,000
12,000
12,000
56,600 2405
60,100 2405
64,300 2405
35,600
38,500
41,800
9600
9600
9600
45,200
48,100
51,400
3609
3609
3609
30,700
41,200
46,600
14,000
14,000
14,000
44,700 2886
55,200 2886
60,600 2886
24,600
33,000
37,300
11,500
11,500
11,500
36,100
44,500
48,800
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
3609
3609
3609
51,900
56,800
62,800
14,000
14,000
14,000
65,900 2886
70,800 2886
76,800 2886
41,500
45,500
50,200
11,500
11,500
11,500
53,000
57,000
61,700
4511
4511
4511
34,000
47,500
54,700
18,000
18,000
18,000
52,000 3608
65,500 3608
72,700 3608
27,200
38,000
43,700
14,400
14,400
14,400
41,600
52,400
58,100
16
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
4511
4511
4511
62,200
69,400
78,500
18,000
18,000
18,000
80,200 3608
87,400 3608
96,500 3608
49,800
55,500
62,800
14,400
14,400
14,400
64,200
69,900
77,200
17
500
5%
750
5.75%
1000
5.75%
1500
5.75%
2000
5.75%
2500
5.75%
3000
5.75%
3750
5.75%

50,000
100,000
150,000
50,000
100,000
150,000
50,000
100,000
150,000
50,000
100,000
150,000
50,000
100,000
150,000
50,000
100,000
150,000
50,000
100,000
150,000
50,000
100,000
150,000
Rated
Load
Continuous
Current,
Amps
rms Symmetrical Amps
Trans50%
Comformer Motor bined
Alone Load
Rated
Load
Continuous
Current,
Amps
Trans100% Comformer Motor bined
Alone Load
Rated
Load
Continuous
Current,
Amps
Trans100%
Alone Load
Rated
Load
Continuous
Current,
Amps
Trans100%
Alone Load
Short-circuit capacity values shown correspond to kVA and impedances shown in this table. For impedances other than these, short-circuit currents
are inversely proportional to impedance.
The motors short-circuit current contributions are computed on the basis of motor characteristics that will give four times normal current.
For 208V, 50% motor load is assumed while for other voltages 100% motor load is assumed. For other percentages, the motor short-circuit
current will be in direct proportion.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
13
14
15
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 104
Transformer Full Load Amperes
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Table 1.5-5. Transformer Full-Load Current, Three-Phase, Self-Cooled Ratings

Voltage, Line-to-Line
kVA
208
240
480
600
2400
4160
7200
12,000
12,470
13,200
13,800
22,900
34,400
30
45
75
112-1/2
150
225
300
500
750
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3750
5000
7500
10,000
83.3
125
208
312
416
625
833
1388
2082
2776
4164
72.2
108
180
271
361
541
722
1203
1804
2406
3608
4811
36.1
54.1
90.2
135
180
271
361
601
902
1203
1804
2406
3007
3609
4511
28.9
43.3
72.2
108
144
217
289
481
722
962
1443
1925
2406
2887
3608
4811
7.22
10.8
18.0
27.1
36.1
54.1
72.2
120
180
241
361
481
601
722
902
1203
1804
2406
4.16
6.25
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.2
41.6
69.4
104
139
208
278
347
416
520
694
1041
1388
2.41
3.61
6.01
9.02
12.0
18.0
24.1
40.1
60.1
80.2
120
160
200
241
301
401
601
802
1.44
2.17
3.61
5.41
7.22
10.8
14.4
24.1
36.1
48.1
72.2
96.2
120
144
180
241
361
481
1.39
2.08
3.47
5.21
6.94
10.4
13.9
23.1
34.7
46.3
69.4
92.6
116
139
174
231
347
463
1.31
1.97
3.28
4.92
6.56
9.84
13.1
21.9
32.8
43.7
65.6
87.5
109
131
164
219
328
437
1.26
1.88
3.14
4.71
6.28
9.41
12.6
20.9
31.4
41.8
62.8
83.7
105
126
157
209
314
418
0.75
1.13
1.89
2.84
3.78
5.67
7.56
12.6
18.9
25.2
37.8
50.4
63.0
75.6
94.5
126
189
252
0.50
0.76
1.26
1.89
2.52
3.78
5.04
8.39
12.6
16.8
25.2
33.6
42.0
50.4
62.9
83.9
126
168
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-11
Sheet 01 105
Impedances Data
Approximate Impedance Data

Table 1.5-6. Typical Impedances
Three-Phase Transformers Liquid-Filled
kVA
Liquid-Filled
Network
Padmount
37.5
45
50
75
112.5
150
3.4
3.2
2.4
225
300
500
5.00
5.00
3.3
3.4
4.6
750
1000
1500
5.00
5.00
7.00
5.75
5.75
5.75
2000
2500
3000
7.00
7.00
5.75
5.75
6.50
3750
5000
6.50
6.50
%R
%X
X/R
65C Rise
112.5
150
225
5.00
5.00
5.00
1.71
1.88
1.84
4.70
4.63
4.65
%Z
%R
%X
X/R
2.75
2.47
2.52
4.8
5.2
4.6
4.0
3.1
3.5
2.6
4.1
3.0
0.65
1.33
0.86
75
112.5
150
5.3
6.0
5.3
3.5
2.9
3.0
4.0
5.2
4.4
1.14
1.79
1.50
75
112.5
150
4.3
5.1
4.3
3.4
2.9
2.5
2.5
4.2
3.5
0.72
1.44
1.39
225
300
500
5.1
7.6
7.2
2.6
2.5
1.7
4.4
7.2
7.0
1.68
2.88
4.20
225
300
500
7.4
5.5
6.8
2.9
2.4
1.4
6.8
4.9
6.7
2.32
2.04
4.86
750
8.0
1.5
7.9
5.42
750
8.2
0.8
8.1
10.13
115C Rise Copper
15
30
45
4.4
4.8
4.6
4.3
4.4
2.8
1.2
1.8
3.7
0.27
0.41
1.35
15
30
45
4.8
4.6
4.4
3.8
3.0
3.1
2.9
3.5
3.1
0.76
1.19
0.99
75
112.5
150
5.9
3.1
5.2
2.8
2.5
2.2
5.1
1.9
4.7
1.82
0.79
2.16
75
112.5
150
4.7
5.0
4.4
2.7
2.3
1.9
3.9
4.5
4.0
1.43
1.98
2.09
225
300
500
6.2
5.4
6.6
2.0
2.0
1.1
5.8
4.9
6.5
2.93
2.44
6.09
225
300
500
8.1
5.2
6.8
2.6
1.7
1.3
7.7
4.9
6.6
2.99
2.80
5.16
80C Rise Aluminum
80C Rise Copper

0.89
1.02
1.76
15
30
45
2.1
3.0
3.9
1.7
2.0
2.5
1.3
2.1
3.1
0.75
1.05
1.25
75
112.5
150
4.3
4.1
4.7
1.9
1.8
1.4
3.9
3.7
4.5
2.05
2.04
3.22
75
112.5
150
4.3
3.3
3.7
2.0
1.8
1.8
3.8
2.8
3.2
1.93
1.60
1.78
225
300
500
5.6
6.1
5.4
1.4
1.4
0.8
5.4
5.9
5.3
3.77
4.18
6.57
225
300
5.4
6.1
1.5
1.2
5.2
6.0
3.60
5.07
Note: Values are typical. Measurements at

temperature rise +20C.
2500
5.75
0.86
5.69
6.61
Table 1.5-11. 600V Primary Class

NEMA Type TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers
3.47
5.10
5.19
1.21
1.92
2.11
1000
1500
2000
5.75
5.75
5.75
2.16
1.87
1.93
5.33
5.44
5.42
2.47
2.90
2.81
2500
5.75
1.74
5.48
3.15
300
500
750
4.50
5.75
5.75
1.93
1.44
1.28
4.06
5.57
5.61
2.10
3.87
4.38
1000
1500
2000
5.75
5.75
5.75
0.93
0.87
0.66
5.67
5.68
5.71
6.10
6.51
8.72
2500
5.75
0.56
5.72
10.22
2.3
2.5
2.9
4.21
5.04
6.10
2.87
2.66
2.47
2.6
2.4
1.6
5.59
5.64
5.67
4.50
5.75
5.75
3.5
3.4
3.3
1.33
1.12
0.93
300
500
750
15
30
45
5.75
5.75
5.75
X/R
ii
15
30
45
1000
1500
2000
%X
X/R
0.30
0.86
0.91
3.57
3.18
3.96
%R
%X
1.4
3.0
3.4
4.81
4.77
5.57
%Z
%R
4.6
3.5
3.8
1.35
1.50
1.41
kVA
%Z
4.8
4.6
5.1
5.00
5.00
5.75
150C Rise
kVA
15
30
45
300
500
750
Table 1.5-8. 15 kV Class Primary

Dry-Type Substation Transformers
Table 1.5-10. 600V Primary Class Three-Phase

NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efficient Dry-Type
Distribution Transformers, Copper Wound
150C Rise Copper
115C Rise Aluminum
Table 1.5-7. 15 kV Class Primary

Oil Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers
%Z
kVA
150C Rise Aluminum
Values are typical. For guaranteed values,

refer to transformer manufacturer.
kVA
Table 1.5-9. 600V Primary Class Three-Phase

NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efficient Dry-Type
Distribution Transformers, Aluminum Wound
Note: Values are typical. Measurements at

temperature rise +20C.
10
11
12
kVA
Temperature Rise
Impedance
300
300
300
80
115
150
3.16 at 100C
3.03 at 135C
7.06 at 170C
13
500
500
115
150
5.97 at 135C
6.04 at 170C
14
750
750
115
150
7.21 at 135C
No test
15
16
80C Rise
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 106
Transformer Losses
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Transformer Loss Data

See product sections for data.
Transformer Losses at Reduced Loads

Information on losses based on actual
transformer test data can be obtained
from the manufacturer. Transformer
manufacturers provide no load watt
losses and total watt losses in accordance with ANSI standards. The
calculated difference between the
no load losses and the total losses
are typically described as the load
losses. Although transformer coils
are manufactured with either aluminum
or copper conductors, the industry
has sometimes referred to these load
losses as the copper losses.
Transformer losses for various

loading can be estimated in the
following manner. The no load watt
losses of the transformer are due to
magnetization and are present
whenever the transformer is
energized. The load watt losses are
the difference between the no load
watt losses and the full load watt
losses. The load watt losses are
proportional to I2R and can be
estimated to vary with the transformer
load by the square of the load current.
At 0% load:
1800 watts
For example, the approximate watts

loss data for a 1000 kVA oil-filled
substation transformer is shown in
the table as having 1800 watts no
load losses and 15,100 watts full load
losses, so the load losses are approximately 13,300 watts (15,1001800). The
transformer losses can be calculated
for various loads as follows.
Because transformer losses vary

between designs and manufacturers,
additional losses such as from
cooling fans can be ignored for
these approximations.
At 50% load:
1800 watts + (13,300)(0.5)2 =
1800 watts + 3325 watts = 5125 watts
At 100% load:
1800 watts + 13,300 watts = 15,100 watts
At 110% load:
1800 watts + (13,300)(1.1)2 =
1800 watts + 16,093 watts = 17,893 watts
Note: 1 watthour = 3.413 Btu.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-13
Sheet 01 107
Power Equipment Losses and Enclosures/Knockout Dimensions
Power Equipment Losses
Enclosures
Table 1.5-12. Power Equipment Losses
The following are reproduced from NEMA 250.
Equipment
Watts
Loss
Medium Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 5 and 15 kV)

1200A breaker
2000A breaker
3000A breaker
4000A breaker
600
1400
2100
3700

600A unfused switch
1200A unfused switch
100A CL fuses
500
750
840
Medium Voltage Starters (Indoor, 5 kV)

400A starter FVNR
800A starter FVNR
600A fused switch
1200A fused switch
600
1000
500
800
Table 1.5-13. Comparison of Specific Applications of Enclosures for Indoor Nonhazardous Locations
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the
Following Environmental Conditions
400
1000
1500
3200A breaker
4000A breaker
5000A breaker
2400
3000
4700
Fuse limiters800A CB
200
500
750
Fuse truck3200A CB
Fuse truck4000A CB
3600
4500
Structures3200A
Structures4000A
Structures5000A
4000
5000
7000
High resistance grounding
1200
Panelboards (Indoor, 480V)

225A, 42 circuit
6P
12
12K 13
44 per foot
60 per foot
66 per foot
1600A
2000A
2500A
72 per foot
91 per foot
103 per foot
3200A
4000A
5000A
144 per foot

182 per foot
203 per foot
Motor Control Centers (Indoor, 480V)

NEMA Size 1 starter
NEMA Size 2 starter
NEMA Size 3 starter
39
56
92
NEMA Size 4 starter

NEMA Size 5 starter
Structures
124
244
200
Adjustable Frequency Drives (Indoor, 480V)
4
5
Table 1.5-14. Comparison of Specific Applications of Enclosures for Outdoor Nonhazardous Locations
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the

Following Environmental Conditions
Enclosure Type
3
3R 3S
Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment

Rain, snow and sleet
Sleet
Windblown dust
Hosedown
Corrosive agents
Occasional temporary submersion
Occasional prolonged submersion

4X
6P
These enclosures may be ventilated.

External operating mechanisms are not required to be operable when the enclosure is ice covered.
External operating mechanisms are operable when the enclosure is ice covered.
300
800A
1200A
1350A
ii
These enclosures may be ventilated.

These fibers and flying are nonhazardous materials and are not considered the Class III type
ignitable fibers or combustible flyings. For Class III type ignitable fibers or combustible flyings,
see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
Low Voltage Busway (Indoor, Copper, 480V)
Adjustable frequency drives
Enclosure Type
1 2 4
4X
Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment

Falling dirt
Falling liquids and light splashing
Circulating dust, lint, fibers and flyings
Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers and flyings
Hosedown and splashing water
Oil and coolant seepage
Oil or coolant spraying and splashing
Corrosive agents
Occasional temporary submersion
Occasional prolonged submersion
Low Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 480V)

800A breaker
1600A breaker
2000A breaker
Table 1.5-15. Comparison of Specific Applications of Enclosures for Indoor Hazardous Locations
Provides a Degree of Protection Against
Atmospheres Typically Containing
(For Complete Listing, See NFPA 497M)
Class
Acetylene
Hydrogen, manufactured gas
diethyl ether, ethylene, cyclopropane
Gasoline, hexane, butane, naphtha, propane,
acetone, toluene, isoprene
Metal dust
Carbon black, coal dust, coke dust
Flour, starch, grain dust
Fibers, flyings
Methane with or without coal dust
I
I
I

Enclosure Types
Enclosure Type
7 and 8, Class I Groups 9, Class II Groups
A
I
II
II
II
III
MSHA
10
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
For Class III type ignitable fibers or combustible flyings, see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
Due to the characteristics of the gas, vapor or dust, a product suitable for one class or group may
not be suitable for another class or group unless so marked on the product.
Note: If the installation is outdoors and/or additional protection is required by Tables 1.5-13 and
1.5-14, a combination-type enclosure is required.
> 96%
efficiency
15
16
17
18
Note: The information provided on power

equipment losses is generic data intended
to be used for sizing of HVAC equipment.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 108
Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Average Characteristics of
600V Conductors
Ohms per 1000 ft (305m)
Application Notes
Resistance and reactance are
phase-to-neutral values, based on
60 Hz AC, three-phase, four-wire
distribution, in ohms per 100 ft
(30m) of circuit length (not total
conductor lengths)
Based upon conductivity of 100%
for copper, 61% for aluminum
Based on conductor temperatures
of 75C. Reactance values will
have negligible variation with
temperature. Resistance of both
copper and aluminum conductors
will be approximately 5% lower
at 60C or 5% higher at 90C.
Data shown in tables may be
used without significant error
between 60 and 90C
For interlocked armored cable,
use magnetic conduit data for
steel armor and non-magnetic
conduit data for aluminum armor
The tables below are average characteristics based on data from IEEE
Standard 141-1993. Values from
different sources vary because of
operating temperatures, wire
stranding, insulation materials
and thicknesses, overall diameters,
random lay of multiple conductors
in conduit, conductor spacing, and
other divergences in materials, test
conditions and calculation methods.
These tables are for 600V 5 kV and
15 kV conductors, at an average
temperature of 75C. Other parameters
are listed in the notes. For medium
voltage cables, differences among
manufacturers are considerably
greater because of the wider variations
in insulation materials and thicknesses, shielding, jacketing, overall
diameters, and the like. Therefore,
data for medium voltage cables should
be obtained from the manufacturer
of the cable to be used.
Z = X +R
For busway impedance data, see
Tab 21 of this catalog
For PF (power factor) values less
than 1.0, the effective impedance Z e
is calculated from
Z e = R PF + X sin (arc cos PF)
For copper cable data, resistance

based on tinned copper at 60 Hz;
600V and 5 kV nonshielded cable
based on varnished cambric insulation; 5 kV shielded and 15 kV cable
based on neoprene insulation
For aluminum cable data, cable is
cross-linked polyethylene insulated
Table 1.5-16. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Copper Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (305m) at 75C (a) Three Single Conductors
Wire Size,
AWG or
kcmil
8
8 (solid)
6
6 (solid)
4
4 (solid)
2
1
In Magnetic Duct
600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded
R
X
Z
5 kV Shielded and 15 kV
R
X
Z
In Non-Magnetic Duct
R
X
Z
R
X
Z
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0754
0.0754
0.0685
0.0685
0.0632
0.0632
0.0585
0.0570
0.814
0.790
0.515
0.501
0.327
0.318
0.210
0.170
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0860
0.0860
0.0796
0.0796
0.816
0.791
0.516
0.502
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0603
0.0603
0.0548
0.0548
0.813
0.788
0.513
0.499
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0688
0.0688
0.0636
0.0636
0.814
0.789
0.514
0.500
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0742
0.0742
0.0685
0.0675
0.329
0.321
0.214
0.174
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0506
0.0506
0.0467
0.0456
0.325
0.316
0.207
0.166
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
350
400
0.128
0.102
0.0805
0.0640
0.0540
0.0533
0.0519
0.0497
0.139
0.115
0.0958
0.0810
0.128
0.103
0.0814
0.0650
0.0635
0.0630
0.0605
0.0583
0.143
0.121
0.101
0.0929
0.127
0.101
0.0766
0.0633
0.0432
0.0426
0.0415
0.0398
0.134
0.110
0.0871
0.0748
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.128
0.102
0.0805
0.0640
0.0594
0.0594
0.0547
0.0540
0.0507
0.0504
0.0484
0.0466
0.326
0.318
0.209
0.169
0.138
0.114
0.0939
0.0792
0.0552
0.0464
0.0378
0.0356
0.0495
0.0493
0.0491
0.0490
0.0742
0.0677
0.0617
0.0606
0.0557
0.0473
0.0386
0.0362
0.0570
0.0564
0.0562
0.0548
0.0797
0.0736
0.0681
0.0657
0.0541
0.0451
0.0368
0.0342
0.0396
0.0394
0.0393
0.0392
0.0670
0.0599
0.0536
0.0520
0.0547
0.0460
0.0375
0.0348
0.0456
0.0451
0.0450
0.0438
0.0712
0.0644
0.0586
0.0559
450
500
600
750
0.0322
0.0294
0.0257
0.0216
0.0480
0.0466
0.0463
0.0495
0.0578
0.0551
0.0530
0.0495
0.0328
0.0300
0.0264
0.0223
0.0538
0.0526
0.0516
0.0497
0.0630
0.0505
0.0580
0.0545
0.0304
0.0276
0.0237
0.0194
0.0384
0.0373
0.0371
0.0356
0.0490
0.0464
0.0440
0.0405
0.0312
0.0284
0.0246
0.0203
0.0430
0.0421
0.0412
0.0396
0.0531
0.0508
0.0479
0.0445
Note: More tables on Page 1.5-15.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-15
Sheet 01 109
Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance

Table 1.5-17. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Copper Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (305m) at 75C (b) Three Conductor Cable
Wire Size,
AWG or
kcmil
In Magnetic Duct and Steel Interlocked Armor

R
X
Z
R
X
Z
In Non-Magnetic Duct and Aluminum Interlocked Armor

R
X
Z
R
X
Z
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0577
0.0577
0.0525
0.0525
0.813
0.788
0.513
0.499
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0658
0.0658
0.0610
0.0610
0.814
0.789
0.514
0.500
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0503
0.0503
0.0457
0.0457
0.812
0.787
0.512
0.498
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0574
0.0574
0.0531
0.0531
0.813
0.788
0.513
0.499
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0483
0.0483
0.0448
0.0436
0.325
0.316
0.207
0.166
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0568
0.0508
0.0524
0.0516
0.326
0.317
0.209
0.168
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0422
0.0422
0.0390
0.0380
0.324
0.315
0.206
0.164
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0495
0.0495
0.0457
0.0450
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
350
400
0.128
0.102
0.0805
0.0640
0.0552
0.0464
0.0378
0.0356
0.0414
0.0407
0.0397
0.0381
0.0379
0.0377
0.0373
0.0371
0.135
0.110
0.0898
0.0745
0.128
0.103
0.0814
0.0650
0.0486
0.0482
0.0463
0.0446
0.137
0.114
0.0936
0.0788
0.127
0.101
0.0766
0.0633
0.0360
0.0355
0.0346
0.0332
0.132
0.107
0.0841
0.0715
0.128
0.102
0.0805
0.0640
0.0423
0.0420
0.0403
0.0389
0.325
0.316
0.207
0.166
0.135
0.110
0.090
0.0749
0.0670
0.0598
0.0539
0.0514
0.0557
0.0473
0.0386
0.0362
0.0436
0.0431
0.0427
0.0415
0.0707
0.0640
0.0576
0.0551
0.0541
0.0451
0.0368
0.0342
0.0330
0.0329
0.0328
0.0327
0.0634
0.0559
0.0492
0.0475
0.0547
0.0460
0.0375
0.0348
0.0380
0.0376
0.0375
0.0366
0.0666
0.0596
0.0530
0.0505
450
500
600
750
0.0322
0.0294
0.0257
0.0216
0.0361
0.0349
0.0343
0.0326
0.0484
0.0456
0.0429
0.0391
0.0328
0.0300
0.0264
0.0223
0.0404
0.0394
0.0382
0.0364
0.0520
0.0495
0.0464
0.0427
0.0304
0.0276
0.0237
0.0197
0.0320
0.0311
0.0309
0.0297
0.0441
0.0416
0.0389
0.0355
0.0312
0.0284
0.0246
0.0203
0.0359
0.0351
0.0344
0.0332
0.0476
0.0453
0.0422
0.0389
8
8 (solid)
6
6 (solid)
4
4 (solid)
2
1
Table 1.5-18. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Aluminum Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 Ft (305m) at 90C (a) Three Single Conductors
Wire Size,
AWG or
kcmil
In Magnetic Duct
R
X
Z
R
X
Z
In Non-Magnetic Duct
R
X
Z
R
X
Z
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
350
400
500
600
700
750
1000
0.847
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.106
0.0896
0.0750
0.0644
0.0568
0.053
0.050
0.046
0.048
0.043
0.041
0.040
0.039
0.0384
0.0375
0.0369
0.0364
0.849
0.534
0.338
0.269
0.214
0.172
0.139
0.113
0.0975
0.0839
0.0742
0.0675
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.210
0.167
0.132
0.105
0.0892
0.0746
0.0640
0.0563
0.068
0.063
0.059
0.056
0.055
0.053
0.051
0.0495
0.0479
0.0468
0.0459
0.536
0.341
0.271
0.217
0.176
0.142
0.117
0.102
0.0887
0.0793
0.0726
0.847
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.105
0.0894
0.0746
0.0640
0.0563
0.042
0.040
0.037
0.035
0.034
0.033
0.037
0.031
0.0307
0.0300
0.0245
0.0291
0.848
0.534
0.337
0.267
0.213
0.170
0.137
0.109
0.0945
0.0804
0.0705
0.0634
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.210
0.167
0.132
0.105
0.0891
0.0744
0.0638
0.0560
0.054
0.050
0.047
0.045
0.044
0.042
0.041
0.0396
0.0383
0.0374
0.0367
0.535
0.339
0.269
0.215
0.173
0.139
0.113
0.0975
0.0837
0.0740
0.0700
0.0459
0.0388
0.0338
0.0318
0.0252
0.0355
0.0359
0.0350
0.0341
0.0341
0.0580
0.0529
0.0487
0.0466
0.0424
0.0453
0.0381
0.0332
0.0310
0.0243
0.0444
0.0431
0.0423
0.0419
0.0414
0.0634
0.0575
0.0538
0.0521
0.0480
0.0453
0.0381
0.0330
0.0309
0.0239
0.0284
0.0287
0.0280
0.0273
0.0273
0.0535
0.0477
0.0433
0.0412
0.0363
0.0450
0.0377
0.0326
0.0304
0.0234
0.0355
0.0345
0.0338
0.0335
0.0331
0.0573
0.0511
0.0470
0.0452
0.0405
Table 1.5-19. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Aluminum Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (30m) at 90C (b) Three Conductor Cable
Wire Size,
AWG or
kcmil
In Magnetic Duct and Steel Interlocked Armor

R
X
Z
R
X
Z
In Non-Magnetic Duct and Aluminum Interlocked Armor

R
X
Z
R
X
Z
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
350
400
500
600
700
750
1000
0.847
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.106
0.0896
0.0750
0.0644
0.0568
0.053
0.050
0.046
0.048
0.043
0.041
0.040
0.039
0.0384
0.0375
0.0369
0.0364
0.849
0.534
0.338
0.269
0.214
0.172
0.139
0.113
0.0975
0.0839
0.0742
0.0675
0.335
0.265
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.105
0.0895
0.0748
0.0643
0.0564
0.056
0.053
0.050
0.049
0.048
0.045
0.0436
0.0424
0.0418
0.0411
0.340
0.270
0.216
0.174
0.141
0.114
0.100
0.0860
0.0767
0.0700
0.847
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.105
0.0894
0.0746
0.0640
0.0563
0.042
0.040
0.037
0.035
0.034
0.033
0.037
0.031
0.0307
0.0300
0.0245
0.0291
0.848
0.534
0.337
0.267
0.213
0.170
0.137
0.109
0.0945
0.0804
0.0705
0.0634
0.335
0.265
0.210
0.167
0.132
0.105
0.0893
0.0745
0.0640
0.0561
0.045
0.042
0.040
0.039
0.038
0.036
0.0349
0.0340
0.0334
0.0329
0.338
0.268
0.214
0.171
0.138
0.111
0.0959
0.0819
0.0722
0.0650
0.0459
0.0388
0.0338
0.0318
0.0252
0.0355
0.0359
0.0350
0.0341
0.0341
0.0580
0.0529
0.0487
0.0466
0.0424
0.0457
0.0386
0.0335
0.0315
0.0248
0.0399
0.0390
0.0381
0.0379
0.0368
0.0607
0.0549
0.0507
0.0493
0.0444
0.0453
0.0381
0.0330
0.0309
0.0239
0.0284
0.0287
0.0280
0.0273
0.0273
0.0535
0.0477
0.0433
0.0412
0.0363
0.0452
0.0380
0.0328
0.0307
0.0237
0.0319
0.0312
0.0305
0.0303
0.0294
0.0553
0.0492
0.0448
0.0431
0.0378
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 110
Conductor Ampacities
i
ii
1
Current Carrying Capacities of Copper and Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors
From National Electrical Code (NEC), 2011 Edition (NFPA 70-2011)
Table 1.5-20. Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated 02000V, 60 to 90C (140 to 194F).
Not more than three current-carrying conductors in raceway, cable or earth (directly buried), based on ambient temperature of 30C (86F).
Size
Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.15 [B][16])
AWG or
kcmil
60C (140F)
75C (167F)
Types
TW, UF
60C (140F)
Size
75C (167F)
90C (194F)
RHW, THHW,
THW, THWN,
XHHW, USE
TBS, SA, SIS,

THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THWN-2,
RHH, RHW-2,
USE-2, XHH,
XHHW, XHHW-2,
ZW-2
Types
RHW, THHW,
THW, THWN,
XHHW, USE, ZW
3
4
90C (194F)
TBS, SA, SIS,
FEP, FEPB, MI,
RHH, RHW-2,
THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THWN-2,
USE-2, XHH,
XHHW, XHHW-2,
ZW-2
Copper
TW, UF
AWG or
kcmil
Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum
18
16
14
15
20
14
18
25
12
10
8
20
30
40
25
35
50
30
40
55
20
25
30
20
30
40
25
35
45
12
10
8
6
4
3
55
70
85
65
85
100
75
95
110
40
55
65
50
65
75
60
75
85
6
4
3
2
1
1/0
95
110
125
115
130
150
130
150
170
75
85
100
90
100
120
100
115
135
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
145
165
195
175
200
230
195
225
260
115
130
150
135
155
180
150
175
205
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
350
215
240
260
255
285
310
290
320
350
170
190
210
205
230
250
230
255
280
250
300
350
400
500
600
280
320
355
335
380
420
380
430
475
225
260
285
270
310
340
305
350
385
400
500
600
700
750
800
385
400
410
460
475
490
520
535
555
310
320
330
375
385
395
420
435
450
700
750
800
900
1000
1250
435
455
495
520
545
590
585
615
665
355
375
405
425
445
485
480
500
545
900
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
520
545
560
625
650
665
705
735
750
435
455
470
520
545
560
585
615
630
1500
1750
2000
9
10
11
12
13
14
See NEC Section 240.4 (D).
Note: For complete details of using Table 1.5-20, see NEC Article 310 in its entirety.
15
16
17
18
19
Table 1.5-21. Correction Factors From NFPA 70-2011 (See Table 310.15 [B][2][a])
Ambient
Temperature C
For ambient temperatures other than 30C (86F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown
above by the appropriate factor shown below.
Ambient
Temperature F
2125
2630
3135
1.08
1.00
0.91
1.05
1.00
0.94
1.04
1.00
0.96
1.08
1.00
0.91
1.05
1.00
0.94
1.04
1.00
0.96
07077
07886
08795
3640
4145
4650
0.82
0.71
0.58
0.88
0.82
0.75
0.91
0.87
0.82
0.82
0.71
0.58
0.88
0.82
0.75
0.91
0.87
0.82
096104
105113
114122
5155
5660
6170
0.41
0.67
0.58
0.33
0.76
0.71
0.58
0.41
0.67
0.58
0.33
0.76
0.71
0.58
123131
132140
141158
7180
0.41
0.41
159176
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

Reference Data
1.5-17
Sheet 01 111
Ampacities for Conductors

Rated 02000V (Excerpted
from NFPA 70-2011, 310.15)
Note: Fine Print Note (FPN) was changed
to Informational Note in the 2011 NEC.
(A) General.
(1) Tables or Engineering Supervision.
Ampacities for conductors shall
be permitted to be determined by
tables as provided in 310.15(B) or
under engineering supervision,
as provided in 310.15(C).
Note: Informational Note No. 1: Ampacities
provided by this section do not take voltage
drop into consideration. See 210.19(A),
Informational Note No. 4, for branch circuits
and 215.2(A), Informational No. 2, for feeders.
Note: Informational Note No. 2: For the
allowable ampacities of Type MTW wire,
see Table 13.5.1 in NFPA 79-2007, Electrical
Standard for Industrial Machinery.
(2) Selection of Ampacity. Where

more than one ampacity applies
for a given circuit length, the
lowest value shall be used.
Exception: Where two different
ampacities apply to adjacent
portions of a circuit, the higher
ampacity shall be permitted to
be used beyond the point of
transition, a distance equal to 10 ft
(3.0m) or 10 percent of the circuit
length figured at the higher
ampacity, whichever is less.
Note: Informational Note: See 110.14(C) for
conductor temperature limitations due to
termination provisions.
(B) Tables. Ampacities for conductors

rated 02000V shall be as specified
in the Allowable Ampacity
Table 310.15(B)(16) through
Table 310.15(B)(19), and
Ampacity Table 310.15(B)(20) and
Table 310.15(B)(21) as modified
by 310.15(B)(1) through (B)(7).
Note: Informational Note: Table
310.15(B)(16) through Table 310.15(B)(19)
are application tables for use in determining
conductor sizes on loads calculated in
accordance with Article 220. Allowable
ampacities result from consideration of one
or more of the following:
(1) Temperature compatibility with

connected equipment, especially
the connection points.
(2) Coordination with circuit and
system overcurrent protection.
(3) Compliance with the requirements
of product listings or certifications.
See 110.3(B).
CA08104001E
(4) Preservation of the safety benefits

of established industry practices
and standardized procedures.
(1) General. For explanation of type
letters used in tables and for
recognized sizes of conductors for
the various conductor insulations,
see Table 310.104(A) and Table
310.104(B). For installation
requirements, see 310.1 through
310.15(A)(3) and the various
articles of this Code. For flexible
cords, see Table 400.4, Table
400.5(A)(1) and Table 400.5(A)(2).
(3) Adjustment Factors.
(a) More Than Three CurrentCarrying Conductors in a Raceway
or Cable. Where the number of
current-carrying conductors in a
raceway or cable exceeds three, or
where single conductors or multiconductor cables are installed
without maintaining spacing for
a continuous length longer than
24.00-inch (600 mm) and are not
installed in raceways, the allowable
ampacity of each conductor shall
be reduced as shown in Table
310.15(B)(3)(a). Each current-carrying
conductor of a paralleled set of
conductors shall be counted as a
current-carrying conductor.
Note: Informational Note No. 1: See Annex
B, Table B.310.15(B)(2)(11), for adjustment
factors for more than three current-carrying
conductors in a raceway or cable with
load diversity.
Note: Informational Note No. 2: See 366.23(A)
for adjustment factors for conductors in
sheet metal auxiliary gutters and 376.22(B)
for adjustment factors for conductors in
metal wireways.
(1) Where conductors are installed in

cable trays, the provisions of
392.80 shall apply.
(2) Adjustment factors shall not apply
to conductors in raceways having
a length not exceeding 24.00-inch
(600 mm).
(3) Adjustment factors shall not apply
to underground conductors entering or leaving an outdoor trench
if those conductors have physical
protection in the form of rigid
metal conduit, intermediate metal
conduit, rigid polyvinyl chloride
conduit (PVC), or reinforced
thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC)
having a length not exceeding
10 ft (3.05m), and if the number of
conductors does not exceed four.
(4) Adjustment factors shall not

apply to Type AC cable or to
Type MC cable under the following
conditions:
a. The cables do not have an overall
outer jacket.
b. Each cable has not more than three
current-carrying conductors.
i
ii
1
c. The conductors are 12 AWG copper.
d. Not more than 20 current-carrying

conductors are installed without
maintaining spacing, are stacked,
or are supported onbridle rings.
(5) An adjustment factor of 60 percent

shall be applied to Type AC cable or
Type MC cable under the following
conditions:
4
5
a. The cables do not have an overall

outer jacket.
b. The number of current carrying

conductors exceeds 20.
c. The cables are stacked or bundled

longer that 24.00-inch (600 mm)
without spacing being maintained.
(b) More Than One Conduit, Tube,

or Raceway. Spacing between
conduits, tubing, or raceways
shall be maintained.
(c) Circular Raceways Exposed to
Sunlight on Rooftops.
Where conductors or cables are
installed in circular raceways exposed
to direct sunlight on or above rooftops,
the adjustments shown in Table 1.5-22
shall be added to the outdoor
temperature to determine the
applicable ambient temperature
for application of the correction
factors in Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) or
Table 310.15(B)(2)(b).
Note: Informational Note: One source for
the average ambient temperatures in various
locations is the ASHRAE Handbook
Fundamentals.
Table 1.5-22. NEC (2011) Table 310.15(B)(3)(c)

Ambient Temperature Adjustment for Circular
Raceways Exposed to Sunlight On or
Above Rooftops
Distance Above Roof to
Bottom of Conduit
Temperature
Adder F (C)
00.51-inch (013.0 mm)
60 (33)
Above 0.51-inch (13.0 mm)

3.54-inch (90.0 mm)
40 (22)

11.81-inch (300.0 mm)
30 (17)

36.00-inch (900.0 mm)
25 (14)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 112
i
ii
1
2
3
4
(4) Bare or Covered Conductors.

Where bare or covered conductors
are installed with insulated
conductors, the temperature
rating of the bare or covered
conductor shall be equal to the
lowest temperature rating of the
insulated conductors for the
purpose of determining ampacity.
(5) Neutral Conductor.
(a) A neutral conductor that carries
only the unbalanced current from
other conductors of the same
circuit shall not be required to
be counted when applying the
provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
(b) In a three-wire circuit consisting

of two phase conductors and the
neutral conductor of a four-wire,
three-phase, wye-connected
system, a common conductor
carries approximately the same
current as the line-to-neutral load
currents of the other conductors
and shall be counted when applying
the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
(6) Grounding or Bonding Conductor.

A grounding or bonding conductor
shall not be counted when applying
the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
(c) On a four-wire, three-phase wye

circuit where the major portion of
the load consists of nonlinear
loads, harmonic currents are
present in the neutral conductor;
the neutral conductor shall therefore be considered a currentcarrying conductor.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
1.5-19
Sheet 01 113
Formulas and Terms

Table 1.5-23. Formulas for Determining Amperes, hp, kW and kVA
To
Find
Direct
Current
Amperes (l) when

horsepower is known
hp
746
E % eff
kW 1000
Amperes (l) when

kilowatts is known
Amperes (l) when
kva is known
Kilowatts
kVA
Two-PhaseFour-Wire
Three-Phase
kW 1000
E pf
hp 746
2 E % eff pf
kW 1000
2 E pf
kVA 1000
E
l E pf
1000
kVA 1000
2E
l E 2 pf
1000
IE
1000
IE2
1000
hp 746
3 E % eff pf
kW 1000
3 E % pf
1000
kVA
3E
l E 3 pf
1000
IE 3
1000
Single-Phase
hp 746
E % eff pf
IE
1000
I E % eff
746
I E % eff pf
746
For two-phase, three-wire circuits, the current in the common conductor is
Horsepower (output)
Alternating Current
ii
1
2
3
I E 2 % eff pf
I E 3 % eff pf
746
746
2 times that in either of the two other conductors.
Note: Units of measurement and definitions for E (volts), I (amperes), and other abbreviations are given below under Common Electrical Terms.
Common Electrical Terms

Ampere (l)
= unit of current or rate of flow of electricity
Volt (E)
= unit of electromotive force
Ohm (R)
= unit of resistance
E
Ohms law: I = (DC or 100% pf)
R
= 1,000,000 ohms
Megohm
Volt Amperes (VA)
= unit of apparent power

= E l (single-phase)
= El 3
Kilovolt Amperes (kVA) = 1000 volt-amperes

Watt (W)
= unit of true power

= VA pf
= 0.00134 hp
Kilowatt (kW)
= 1000 watts
Power Factor (pf)
= ratio of true to apparent power

kW
W
= -------- -----------VA kVA
= unit of electrical work
= 1 watt for 1 hour
= 3.413 Btu
= 2655 ft-lbs
Watthour (Wh)
Kilowatt-hour (kWh)
= 1000 watthours
Horsepower (hp)
= measure of time rate of doing work

= equivalent of raising 33,000 lbs 1 ft in 1 minute
= 746 watts
Demand Factor
= ratio of maximum demand to the total connected load
Diversity Factor
= ratio of the sum of individual maximum demands of

the various subdivisions of a system to the maximum
demand of the whole system
Load Factor
= ratio of the average load over a designated period

of time to the peak load occurring in that period
How to Compute Power Factor
Watts
Determining Watts pf = --------------------------------------------Volts Amperes
1. 1. From watthour meter.

Watts = rpm of disc x 60 x Kh
Where Kh is meter constant

printed on face or nameplate
of meter.
If metering transformers are used,

above must be multiplied by the
transformer ratios.
2. Directly from wattmeter reading.

Where:
10
Volts = line-to-line voltage as

measured by voltmeter.
11
Amperes = current measured in

line wire (not neutral) by ammeter.
13
Table 1.5-24. Temperature Conversion

(F to C)
(C to F)
C = 5/9 (F32)
F = 9/5(C)+32
C 15
F
5
10
14
C 25
F 77
30
86
C 65
F 149
5
23
0
32
5
41
10
50
12
15
59
20
68
35 40 45
95 104 113
50 55
122 131
60
140
70 75 80 85
158 167 176 185
90 95
194 203
100
212
1 Inch
= 2.54 centimeters
1 Kilogram
= 2.20 lbs
1 Square Inch = 1,273,200 circular mills
1 Circular Mill = 0.785 square mil
1 Btu
= 778 ft lbs
= 252 calories
1 Year
= 8760 hours
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 114
Seismic Requirements
ii
1
General
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
In the 1980s, Eaton embarked on a

comprehensive program centered
around designing and building
electrical distribution and control
equipment capable of meeting and
exceeding the seismic load requirements of the Uniform Building Code
(UBC) and California Building Code
(CBC). These codes emphasize building design requirements. Electrical
equipment and distribution system
components are considered attachments to the building. The entire
program has been updated to show
compliance with the 2009 International
Building Code (IBC) and the 2010 CBC
seismic requirements. A cooperative
effort with the equipment user, the
building designer and the equipment
installer ensures that the equipment
is correctly anchored such that it can
withstand the effects of an earthquake.
Eatons electrical distribution and
control equipment has been tested
and seismically proven for requirements exceeding the IBC and CBC.
Over 100 different assemblies
representing essentially all product
lines have been successfully tested
and verified to seismic levels higher
than the maximum seismic requirements specified in the IBC and CBC.
The equipment maintained structural
integrity and demonstrated the ability
to function immediately after the
seismic tests. A technical paper,
Earthquake Requirements and Eaton
Distribution and Control Equipment
Seismic Capabilities (SA12501SE),
provides a detailed explanation
of the applicable seismic codes
and Eatons equipment qualification
program. The paper may be found
at www.eaton.com/seismic. Type
in SA12501SE in the document
search field.
Figure 1.5-1. Typical Earthquake Ground Motion Map for the United States
International Building Code (IBC)
California Building Code
On December 9, 1994, the International

Code Council (ICC) was established
as a nonprofit organization dedicated
to developing a single set of comprehensive and coordinated codes. The
ICC foundersthe Building Officials
and Code Administrators (BOCA), the
International Conference of Building
Officials (ICBO), and the Southern
Building Code Congress International
(SBCCI)created the ICC in response
to technical disparities among the
three nationally recognized model
codes now in use in the U.S. The
ICC offers a single, complete set of
construction codes without regional
limitationsthe International
Building Code.
The 2001 CBC was based upon the

1997 UBC. In August of 2006, it was
repealed by the California Building
Standards Commission (CBSC) and
replaced by the 2007 CBC, California
Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24,
Part 2 and used the 2006 IBC as the
basis for the code. The 2010 CBC
is based upon the 2009 IBC, with
amendments as deemed appropriate
by the CBSC. Eatons seismic
qualification program fully envelopes
the requirements of the 2010 CBC.
Uniform Building Code (UBC)

1997 was the final year in which the
UBC was published. It has since been
replaced by the IBC.
18
19
Process
According to Chapter 16 of the 2009
IBC, structure design, the seismic
requirements of electrical equipment
in buildings may be computed in two
steps. The first step is to determine
the maximum ground motion to be
considered at the site. The second step
is to evaluate the equipment mounting
and attachments inside the building
or structure. These are then evaluated
to determine appropriate seismic test
requirements. The ground motion,
seismic requirements of the equipment,
and the seismic response spectrum
requirements are discussed on
Page 1.5-22, see Figure 1.5-3.
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

Reference Data
1.5-21
Sheet 01 115
According to the code, the first and

most important step in the process
is to determine the maximum
considered earthquake spectral
response acceleration at short
periods of 0.2 seconds (SS) and at
a period of 1.0 second (S1). These
values are determined from a set
of 24 spectral acceleration maps
(Figure 1.5-1) and include numerous
contour lines indicating the severity
of the earthquake requirements at a
particular location in the country.
The spectral acceleration maps
indicate low to moderate seismic
requirements for the entire country,
with the exception of two particular
areas; the West Coast and the Midwest
(the New Madrid area). The seismic
requirements at the New Madrid area
are approximately 30% higher than the
maximum requirements of the West
Coast. The maps also suggest that the
high seismic requirements in both
regions, West Coast and Midwest,
quickly decrease as one moves away
from the fault area. Therefore, the high
requirements are only limited to a
relatively narrow strip along the fault
lines. Just a few miles away from this
strip, only a small percentage of the
maximum requirements are indicated.
Assuming the worse condition, which
is a site directly located near a fault,
the maximum considered earthquake
spectral response acceleration at short
periods of 0.2 seconds (SS) is equal to
285% gravity and at 1.0 second period
(S1) is 124% gravity. These numbers
are the maximum numbers for the
entire country except for the New
Madrid area. These particular sites are
on the border of California and Mexico
(S1) and in Northern California (SS).
To help understand the 2009 IBC (and
2010 CBC) seismic parameters for a
specific building location, the link to
the US Geological Society is extremely
helpful: http://earthquake.usgs.gov/
research/hazmaps/design/
Download the file Java Ground
Motion Parameter Calculatorand
save it to your hard drive, then run the
executable that was downloaded.
The program will allow one to enter
the latitude and longitude of a
location. (One must be connected
to the Internet to run this application,
even after downloading the program.)
The IBC (CBC) seismic parameters for
that location will then be displayed.
If the latitude and longitude of the

building location is not known,
another convenient Web site is
available that will provide this
information based upon a street
address: http://geocoder.us/
SDS, the peak spectral acceleration,

extends between the values of T 0 and
TS. T0 and TS are defined in the codes
as follows:
T0 = 0.2 SD1/SDS = 0.2 x 1.24/1.90 =
0.131 seconds (7.63 Hz)
To determine the maximum considered earthquake ground motion for

most site classes (A through D), the
code introduces site coefficients,
which when applied against the
location-specific site class, produces
the adjusted maximum considered
earthquake spectral response
acceleration for the required site.
The site coefficients are defined as
Fa at 0.2 seconds short period and
FV at 1.0 second period. From the
tables in the code, the highest adjusting factor for SS is equal to 1.0 and the
highest adjusting factor for S1 is 1.50.
TS = SD1/SDS = 1.24/1.90 =
0.653 seconds (1.53 Hz)
According to the IBC and ASCE 7, the
spectral acceleration (Sa) at periods
less than 1.45 seconds may be computed by using the following formula:
Where T is the period where Sa is

being calculated:
Therefore, the acceleration at
0.0417 seconds (24 Hz), for example,
is equal to:
ii
1
2
3
SM1 = Fv S1 = 1.5 x 1.24g = 1.86g
The acceleration at 0.03 seconds

(33 Hz) is equal to:
Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.0/0.131) + 0.4) =

0.76g (ZPA)
ASCE 7 (American Society of Civil

Engineers), Section 11.4, provides a
plot of the final shape of the design
response spectra of the seismic
ground motion. The plot is shown in
Figure 1.5-2. ASCE 7 is referenced
throughout the IBC as the source for
numerous structural design criteria.
5
6
At zero period (infinite frequency),

T = 0.0, the acceleration (ZPA) is
equal to:
SMS = Fa SS = 1.0 x 2.85g = 2.85g
Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.0417/0.131) + 0.4) = 1.12g
Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.03/0.131) + 0.4) = 1.02g
The acceleration to frequency

relationship in the frequency range
of 1.0 Hz to TS is stated equal to:
8
9
10
11
Sa = SD1/T
The design spectral acceleration curve

can now be computed. The peak spectral acceleration (SDS) and the spectral
acceleration at 1.0 second (SD1) may
now be computed from the following
formulas in the code:
Where Sa is the acceleration at the

T period.
12
At 1.0 Hz (T=1.0) this equation yields

the following acceleration:
13
Sa = 1.24/1 = 1.24g
14
SDS = 2/3 x SMS = 2/3 x 2.85g = 1.90g
15
SD1 = 2/3 x SM1 = 2/3 x 1.8g = 1.24g
16
SDS
Sa =
17
SD1
T
18
S T
Sa = D12 L
T
SD1
19
20
T0
TS
1.0
Period T (sec)
Figure 1.5-2. Design Response Spectrum

CA08104001E
Sa = SDS (0.6 T/T0 + 0.4)
As a result, the adjusted maximum

considered earthquake spectral
response for 0.2 second short period
(SMS) and at 1.0 second (SM1), adjusted
for site class effects, are determined
from the following equations:
Spectural Response Acceleration Sa(g)
Ground Motion
TL
21

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 116
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Testing has demonstrated that the

lowest dominant natural frequency of
Eatons electrical equipment is above
3.2 Hz. This indicates that testing at
1.24g at 1 Hz is not necessary. In
addition, having the low end of the
spectra higher than realistically
required forces the shake table to
move at extremely high displacements
to meet the spectral acceleration at
the low frequencies.
Testing to accommodate the low end
of the spectra using this acceleration
component can result in testing to a
factor 2 to 3 times greater than that
realistically required.
Through testing experience and data
analysis, the seismic acceleration at
1.0 Hz is taken equal to 0.7g, which
will ensure that the seismic levels are
achieved well below 3.2 Hz. This yields
a more vigorous test over a wider
range of seismic intensities.
In developing the seismic requirements
above, it is important to recognize
the following:
It can be seen that Eaton has elected to

develop generic seismic requirements
that envelop two criteria:
The highest possible spectral peak
accelerations and ZPA
The maximum frequency range
required for many different sites
10
9
8
7
Test Response Spectrum

(TRS)
Zero Period
Acceleration = Maximum
Table Test Motion
5
4
3
Spectrum Dip Not Important

Because Frequency is Not an
Equipment Natural Frequency
1.0
.9
.8
.7
.6
Required Response Spectrum

(RRS)
.5
Zero Period
Acceleration = Maximum
Floor Motion
.4
.3
T0 and TS are dependent on SMS and

SD1. If SD1 is small relative to SMS then
T0 and TS will be smaller and the
associated frequencies will shift
higher. The opposite is also true.
This must be realized in developing
the complete required response
spectrum (RRS). Therefore, it is not
adequate to stop the peak spectral
acceleration at 7.63 Hz. There are other
contour line combinations that will
produce higher T0. To account for this
variation it is almost impossible to
consider all combinations. However,
a study of the spectral acceleration
maps indicates that all variations with
high magnitude of contour lines could
very well be enveloped by a factor
of 1.5. Therefore, T0 is recomputed
as follows:
T0 = 0.2 SD1/(SDS x 1.5) = 0.2 x 1.24/
(1.90 x 1.5) = 0.087 seconds (11.49 Hz)
Eaton ensures maximum certification
by requiring peak acceleration during
testing to extend to 12 Hz.
.2
.1
1
4 5 6 78
9 10
20
30
40
60
80
100
Frequency Hz
Figure 1.5-3. Design Response Spectrum
ASCE 7 Section 13.3Seismic

Demands on Non-Structural
Components
ASCE 7 Paragraph 13.3.1 (IBC Section
1621.1.4) provides a formula for
computing the seismic requirements
of electrical and mechanical equipment
inside a building or a structure. The
formula is designed for evaluating the
equipment attachment to the equipment foundations. The seismic loads
are defined as:
Fp = 0.4 ap SDS Wp (1 + 2 Z/h)/(Rp/Ip)
Rp = Component response modification factor that for electrical equipment

varies from 2.5 to 6.0.
Ip = Component importance factor that
is either 1.0 or 1.5.
Z = Highest point of equipment in a
building relative to grade elevation.
h = Average roof height of building
relative to grade elevation.
The following parameters produce the
maximum required force:
Where:
18
Fp = Seismic design force imposed

at the components center of gravity
(C.G.) and distributed relative to
component mass distribution.
19
ap = Component amplification factor

that varies from 1.00 to 2.50.
20
This completes the ground motion

design response spectrum. The
spectral accelerations are equal to
0.76g at ZPA, or 33 Hz, and increases
linearly to a peak acceleration of 1.90g
at 0.09 seconds (or 11.49 Hz) and stays
constant to 0.653 seconds (1.53 Hz),
then gradually decreases to 1.24g at
1 second (or 1.0 Hz). This curve is
Acceleration (g peak)
SDS = Ground level spectral

acceleration, short period.
Wp = Component operating weight.
Z is taken equal to h (equipment

on roof)
Ip is taken equal to 1.5
ap is taken equal to 2.5
Rp is taken equal to 2.5
SDS is equal to 1.90g as indicated
in the previous section
The acceleration (Fp/Wp) at the C.G.

of the equipment is then computed
equal to:
Acceleration = Fp/Wp = 0.4 x 2.5 x
1.90g (1 + 2) / (2.5/1.5) = 3.42g
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

Reference Data
1.5-23
Sheet 01 117
For equipment on (or below) grade,
the acceleration at the equipment C.G.
is then computed equal to:
10
Acceleration = Fp/Wp = 0.4 x 2.5 x

1.90g (1 + 0) / (2.5 /1.5) = 1.14g
Final Combined Requirements

To better compare all seismic levels
and determine the final envelope
seismic requirements, the 2010 CBC,
2009 IBC for California, and 2009 IBC
for New Madrid area seismic requirements are plotted in Figure 1.5-4. All
curves are plotted at 5% damping. An
envelopment of the seismic levels in
the frequency range of 3.2 Hz to 100 Hz
is also shown. This level is taken as
Eatons generic seismic test requirements for all certifications. Eaton
performed additional seismic test runs
on the equipment at approximately
120% of the generic enveloping seismic
requirements (see Figure 1.5-5). Eaton
has established this methodology to
provide additional margin to accommodate potential changes with the
spectral maps, thus eliminating the
need for additional testing.
ii
IBC 2009 New Madrid
Acceleration (g)
1
2
1
Eaton Seismic
3
4
5
0.1
1
10
100
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 1.5-4. Required Response Spectrum Curve
7
10
8
Eaton 120% Seismic Envelope
9
Acceleration (g)
It is impractical to attempt to measure

the actual acceleration of the C.G. of a
piece of equipment under seismic test.
The seismic response at the middle of
base mounted equipment close to its
C.G. is at least 50% higher than the
floor input at the equipment natural
frequency. The base accelerations
associated with the accelerations of
FP/WP at the C.G. of the equipment
could then be computed as 3.42 /1.5
= 2.28g. It is the equipment base input
acceleration that is measured and
documented during seismic testing
and is the acceleration value shown
on Eatons seismic certificates.
IBC 2009/CBC 2010
10
Eaton 100% Seismic Envelope

1
11
12
13
0.1
10
100
14
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 1.5-5. Eaton Test Required Response Spectrum Curve
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Reference Data
August 2013
Sheet 01 118
i
ii
Product Specific Test Summaries

Table 1.5-25. Distribution Equipment
Tested and Seismically Proven Against
Requirements within IBC 2009
Eaton Equipment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear

DS II
Magnum DS
High resistance ground
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line C 1a, 1a-LX, 2a, 2a-LX, 3a, 3E, 4,
5P, F-16 and Pow-R-Command
Switchboards
Instant
Pow-R-Line 5P
Integrated facilities
Pow-R-Line C
Multimeter
Pow-R-Line i
MCC
IT.
Advantage
Series 2100
FlashGard
Freedom 2100
Low voltage busway
Pow-R-Way and associated fittings
Pow-R-Way III and associated fittings
Dry type transformers
Mini powercenters
EP, EPT, DS-3, DT-3
Transfer switches
Automatic transfer switch equipment
Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
Battery modules
UPSs
Enclosed control safety switches
General-duty
Heavy-duty
Elevator control module
Medium voltage switchgear
Type VacClad-W
Type MMVS
MEF
Type MVS/MEB
MV bus
Metal-enclosed non-segregated phase bus
Network protectors
Type CM-22
Type CMD
Medium voltage control
AMPGARD
SC9000 drives
Substation transformers
Dry-type
Liquid type
Unitized dry-type power centers
Figure 1.5-6. Sample Seismic Certificate
Note: See www.eaton.com/seismic for

current seismic certificates.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
August 2013

Reference Data
1.5-25
Sheet 01 119
Additional Design and

Installation Considerations
When installing electrical distribution
and control equipment, consideration
must be given as to how the methods
employed will affect seismic forces
imposed on the equipment, equipment
mounting surface, and conduits
entering the equipment.
Eaton recommends that when specifying a brand of electrical distribution
and control equipment, the designer
references the installation manuals of
that manufacturer to ascertain that the
requirements can be met through the
design and construction process.
For Eaton electrical distribution and
control products, the seismic installation guides for essentially all product
lines can be found at our Web site:
http://www.eaton.com/seismic.
Electrical designers must work closely
with the structural or civil engineers
for a seismic qualified installation.
Consideration must be given to the
type of material providing anchorage
for the electrical equipment.
If steel, factors such as thickness or

gauge, attachment via bolts or welding,
and the size and type of hardware
must be considered.
If concrete, the depth, the PSI, the type
of re-enforcing bars used, as well as
the diameter and embedment of
anchorage all must be considered.
The designer must also give consideration if the equipment will be secured
to the wall, versus stand-alone or freestanding, which requires the equipment to withstand the highest level of
seismic forces. Top cable entry should
be avoided for large enclosures, as
accommodation for cable/conduit
flexibility will need to be designed
into the system.
For a manufacturer to simply state
Seismic Certified or Seismic
Qualified does not tell the designer
if the equipment is appropriate for
the intended installation.
Note: Eaton recommends that designers
confirm with the manufacturer if the
seismic certification supplied with the
equipment is based on:
1. ACTUAL shaker table test as

required by the IBC and CBC.
2. The seismic certificate and test
data clearly state if the equipment
was tested as free-standing
anchored at the bottom of the
equipment to the shaker table.
3. Structure attached, that is,
anchored at the center of gravity
(C.G.) or at the TOP of the equipment to a simulated wall on the
shaker table.
Stand-Alone or Free-Standing Equipment

If stand-alone or free-standing, then
this may require that additional width
space be allowed at each end of the
equipment for additional seismic
bracing supplied by the manufacturer.
Additional thought must be given to
the clearances around the equipment
to rigid structural edifices. Space must
be allowed for the differing motions of
the equipment and the structure, so
that they do not collide during a seismic event and damage one another.
Note: If the equipment is installed as standalone or free-standing, with additional
seismic bracing at each end and not
attached to the structure as tested, and yet,
it is fitted tightly against a structural wall,
then this would be an incorrect installation
for the application of the seismic certificate.
Furthermore, if conduits are to be

installed overhead into the equipment,
does the design call for flexible conduits
of sufficient length to allow for the
conflicting motion of the equipment
and the structure during a seismic event
so as to not damage the conductors
contained therein, and the terminations
points within the equipment.
Structure Attached Equipment

The designer must work closely
with the structural engineer if the
equipment is to be attached to the
structure to ascertain that the internal
wall re-enforcement of the structure,
type of anchor, and depth of embedment is sufficient to secure the
equipment so that the equipment,
conduits and structure move at or
near the same frequency.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring
2.0-1
January 2013
Power Management
Connectivity & Monitoring
Sheet 02 001
CA08104001E
Contents
Overview
Power Xpert Architecture Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-2
Power Xpert Network Connectivity
Power Xpert Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
Power Xpert Gateway 200E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-8
Ethernet-Enabled Power Quality & Energy (PQ&E)IQ Meters . . . . 2.1-20
Ethernet-Enabled Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Protective Relays . . 2.1-21
Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-23
IPONI Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-25
Breaker Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-26
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-27
Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-28
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-1
Copper Ethernet Cable Wiring Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-2
Fiber Optic Cable Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-3
X-Slot Connectivity Options
Power Xpert Gateway Power Distribution Products (PDP) Card . . . . . 2.3-1
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-3
Monitoring Software
Power Xpert Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-1
Power Xpert Software Optional Modules/Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-4
Foreseer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-20
Power Xpert Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-20
Power Management Systems & Products for Third-Party Integration
Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
RS-485 PONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
DPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
MINTII RS-232 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-2
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
PMINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-4
Specifications
See Eatons Product Specification Guide, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16901 &
Section 26 27 13.11 &
Section 16911
Section 26 09 13.13
Addressable Relay II. . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16902,
Section 26 29 05,
Paragraph 2.02.C
Paragraph 2.02.C
BIMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16901,
Section 26 27 13.11 &
Paragraph 2.04.A
Paragraph 2.04.A
SMLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16901,
Section 26 27 13.11 &
Paragraph 2.04
Paragraph 2.04
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
2.0-2

Overview
January 2013
Sheet 02 002
Power Xpert Architecture

Introduction
ii
Enabling Power
System Management
Eatons Power Xpert Architecture

(PXA) provides a complete hardware/
software solution to manage your
entire power system. Power Xpert
Architecture consists of Power
Xpert meters, gateways, switches
and software.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Power Xpert devices are devices that

can provide by themselves, or facilitate
for others, Ethernet network protocols
to communicate with your critical
infrastructure components. Power
Xpert devices provide the intelligent
hardware connectivity layer to allow
Web-enabled communications
throughout the power system.
Foreseer Software and Engineering

Services provide the vendor with
independent, power and energy
infrastructure integration solutions
that help companies reduce energy
consumption and unplanned downtime due to the failure of critical
power, environmental, safety or
security systems.
Power Xpert Software

Power Xpert Software is a comprehensive solution for system-level management of your power infrastructure via
a Web-browser. Power Xpert Software
provides a clear picture of what is
happening at a component, device
and system level. Because no two
organizations needs are the same,
Power Xpert Software is available in
two editions.
Power Xpert Software Professional Edition
Power Xpert Gateways
Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition
Power Xpert Gateways are capable

of Web-enabling electrical devices
contained in electrical gear via a
standard Web-browser on the Ethernet
network. Standard on-board Web
pages eliminate the need for any
customer programming or software.
Geared toward advanced power users,

system integrators and enterprises
with heterogeneous device spectrum
and system developers who can take
advantage of the included SNMP and
Modbus integration development
utilities.
15
Eatons Power Xpert Gateway Cards

(PXGX) for the UPS and PDP provide
Web-enabled, real-time monitoring
of your important infrastructure
equipment, including single- and
three-phase Eaton UPSs and Eaton
Power Distribution Units, Eaton
Remote Power Panels, Rack Power
Modules, and the Eaton Energy
Management System for power
quality status and fast response to
power-related events.
18
Eatons Power Xpert Ethernet

switches are ideal for extending
Ethernet networks in harsh, industrial
environments. Power Xpert Ethernet
switches provide communications
from the factory floor or facility
basement to the front end office.
Power Xpert Meters provide measurement of the critical elements found in

power systems, including voltage,
power, current, transients, harmonics
or even time. Power Xpert Meters
provide Web-enabled communications
for use through a Web browser or with
the Power Xpert Software or thirdparty monitoring systems.
Power Xpert Meters
Power Xpert Gateway

(X-Slot) Cards
17
Foreseer Services
Geared toward end users, with built-in

support for Eaton power distribution
products such as switchgear, UPSs,
breakers, PDUs, RPPs, meters, relays,
VFDs and MCCs among others. Eaton
products connect with the software
directly via an Ethernet connection,
while legacy devices use a Power
Xpert Gateway to Web enable their
communications. A subset of third-party
meters and devices are supported as
standard via the gateway connection.
14
16
Power Xpert Reporting

Eatons Power Xpert Reporting works
in conjunction with Power Xpert
Software or Foreseer Services,
allowing a view past individual
measurements, trend graphs and
events. It consolidates complex
data from a multitude of devices
from around the globe into easy-tounderstand graphical reports.
Support for Existing

PowerNet Systems
Power Xpert Software is directly
compatible with existing PowerNet
systems v.3.32 and higher. All
communications hardware devices
such as MINT II can be connected to
Power Xpert Software through the
PowerNet server for configuration of
the INCOM communication devices.
Extensive support for third-party

devices via standard SNMP and
Modbus TCP protocols
Large variety of ready-made thirdparty drop-in drivers
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Overview
January 2013
2.0-3
Sheet 02 003
i
ii
a
1
Web Browser
e
(WAN)
Data
Export
(csv)
Email
(SMTP)
Waveform
Data Capture and Acquisition
Trending
j 3rd Party HMI
Software
Internet
Power Xpert 4
Gateway 200E
Power Xpert 5
Gateway 400E
BACnet/IP
l
BACnet/WS+
2
c
NTP
Modbus TCP/IP
Power
Xpert
Meter
2000
Power Xpert
Meter
4000/6000/8000
Power Xpert
Gateway 600E
Power Distribution r
Power Xpert
Gateway 800E
IQ Analyzer
Meter w/PONI Card
Energy
STS
IQ 35M
20
IQ MESII
C440/441
21 Overload
Relay
PDU
GEN & CTRL
13
IQ 250/250
Meters
IQ DP-4000
Meter w/PONI Card
IQ 220/230
Meters
CRAC
Critical Power
Distribution & Cooling
16
17
Eaton
PDU
Digtal Input
Module KYZ
14
15
Eaton
UPS
DT-1150
Trip Unit
InsulGard
Relays
18
SVX9000
MVX9000
Drive
3rd Party Motor

Relays
OPTIM Trip Unit
MP-3000/4000
FP-4000/5000
Motor Protection
Relays
3rd Party
Protective
Relays
Product Name
Page Reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
Power Xpert 6-Port Ethernet Switch
Power Xpert Gateway 200E
Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
IQ Analyzer
Digitrip DT1150
Breaker Interface Module
OPTIM Trip Unit
MP-3000/MP-4000/MD-3000
DT-3000/FP-4000/FP-5000
Energy/Power Sentinel
IQ 130/140/150 Meters
IQ 250/260 Meters
InsulGard Relay
SVX9000/MVX9000 Drive
Digital Input Module KYZ
Eaton PDU w/PXGX PDP Card
Eaton UPS w/PXGX UPS Card
IQ 35M
IQ MESII
C440/441 Overload Relay
2.4-1
2.5-1, 3.1-1, 3.1-20
2.2-1
2.1-1
2.1-8
3.3-1
6.0-12
2.1-26, 6.0-14, 20.1-17, 21.0-7, 26.1-27
21.0-5, 27.4-10
4.2-11, 4.2-17, 4.3-1
4.1-1, 4.1-11, 4.1-16
3.2-21, 24.0-42
2.1-20, 3.1-35, 20.1-17, 21.0-6, 25.5-14
2.1-20, 3.1-32, 20.1-16, 21.0-7, 25.5-14
4.5-1, 5.3-1, 6.0-15, 7.3-4, 8.0-9, 41.4-11
29.1-33, 29.1-35, 29.1-37, 31.0-1, 31.4-1
2.1-27
2.3-1
2.3-3
3.2-1
3.2-16
4.2-1, 4.2-5
EOLR
10
Breaker Interface
8
Module w/PONI Card
EOLTR
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
4
5
IQ 130/140/150
Meters
12
ATS
19
MultiPort
Device
Server
Alarm
Power Xpert
Ethernet Switch
Network Time Server
Web Browser
(LAN)
b HTTP
Power
Xpert
Ethernet
Switch
Motor Controls
10
11
Power
Sentinel Meter
3rd Party
PQ Meters
12
11
EOLR
Energy
Sentinel Meter
EOLTR
13
EOLR
14
Freedom MCC
MV Starter
MV Switchgear
LV Switchgear
Eatons Assembled Equipment may include one or more of the

devices with communications shown in the above drawing.
Figure 2.0-1. Power Xpert System Overview

See Notes on Page 2.0-4.
EOLR
EOLTR
Ethernet Network
QC Port Network
INCOM Network
RS-485 Network
End of line resistor
End of line termination resistor
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
2.0-4

Overview
January 2013
Sheet 02 004
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Power Xpert SystemNotes

a. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP)Device events and
periodic log file attachments
are sent to users in the form of
an e-mail from the following
Power Xpert products: Foreseer
Services, Power Xpert Software,
Power Xpert Meters 2000/4000/
6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateway
600E, 800E and Power Xpert
Gateway UPS and PDP Cards.
b. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(HTTP)Web browser access is
available on the following Power
Xpert products: Foreseer Services,
Power Xpert Software, Power
Xpert Meters 4000/6000/8000,
Power Xpert Gateways and
Power Xpert Gateway UPS and
PDP Cards.
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
Secure (HTTPS)A secure
protocol allowing Web browser
access on the following Power
Xpert products: Power Xpert
Software, Power Xpert Meters
2000/4000/6000/8000, Power
Xpert Gateways and Power
Xpert Gateway Cards.
c. Network Time Server (NTP)
Network Time Protocol (Clientside) is available on the following
Power Xpert products: Foreseer
Services, Power Xpert Software,
Power Xpert Meters 2000/4000/
6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateways
and Power Xpert Gateway UPS
and PDP Cards.
d. Modbus TCP/IPModbus TCP/IP
over Ethernet is available on the
following Power Xpert products:
Foreseer Services, Power Xpert
Software, Power Xpert Meters
2000/4000/6000/8000, Power
Xpert Gateways and Power Xpert
Gateway UPS and PDP Cards.
Modbus register maps
are available online at
www.eaton.com/powerxpert.
e. Data ExportData files consist of
metered data and event log information that is exported from the
meter, gateway or software in the
form of a .csv (comma separated
variable) file. Supported products
are: Power Xpert Gateway
PXG 600E/800E, PXGXUPS,
PXGXPDP, Power Xpert Meter
2000/4000/6000/8000 and Power
Xpert Software.
f. BACnet/IPOver Ethernet is available on the following Power Xpert

products: Power XPert Gateways
(200E/400E/600E/800E) and Power
Xpert Gateway Cards (UPS, PDP).
g. Data TrendingViewing trended
data in a standard web browser
interface in the form of a graphed
line for one or more data points
is available for the following
products: Power Xpert Gateway
600E/800E, PXGXUPS, PXGXPDP,
Power Xpert Meter 2000/4000/
6000/8000 and Power Xpert
Software.
h. Waveform CaptureThe ability to
capture a waveform and/or export
the waveform as a standard
comtrade file format is available
on the following products: Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000.
i. Waveform Acquisition and
ExportThe ability to acquire a
waveform from another device
that natively captures a waveform
internally and then export that
waveform in a standard comtrade
file format is supported by the
following devices: PXG 600E/800E
(provides data acquisition and
comtrade conversion for: IQ
Analyzer, DT1150 and FP-5000).
Note: The Power Xpert Meters
4000/6000/8000 also export natively
captured waveforms as comtrade
file format.
j. Third-Party HMI Software IntegrationIs achieved through the

Modbus TCP/IP interface on all
Power Xpert devices. If PowerNet
software is used in the system,
then an OPC server is available.
k. Proprietary Serial Device Protocols
over EthernetThe ability to
communicate with third-party
equipment is achieved by first
converting the physical serial
media to Ethernet by using a standard serial to Ethernet multiport
terminal server (see Note k.). Next,
a device driver library is required
to convert the proprietary protocol
to an Eaton internal standard to
allow the data to be integrated
within Eaton software. Products
that support this type of thirdparty device integration are
Foreseer Services.
l. BACnet/WS+Is based upon the

protocol specification developed
by the ASHRAE standards group
as an Addendum c to Standard
135-2004.
Reference: [BACnetA Data
Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control
Networks. Public Review Draft,
ASHRAE Standard. BSR/ASHRAE
Addendum c to ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 135-2004. First Public
Review. Released: October 22,
2004. 32 pages. Copyright (c)
American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc. August 30, 2004.]
This draft shows proposed changes
to the current BACnet standard.
Note: Eaton Corporation has extended
this protocol addendum with a (+) to signify
the addition of an event-driven behavior
to the existing polled data acquisition
model. This allows optimization in communications between Power Xpert devices and
Power Xpert Software.
m. Power Xpert Ethernet Switch

The Eaton Power Xpert Ethernet
switch provides connectivity
between Power Xpert devices on a
common subnetwork. The 6-port
version of the switch shown
provides six RJ-45 network ports.
As an option 1 or 2 of these ports
can be substituted to be ST-Type
fiber connections.
n. Multiport Terminal ServerIs a
device that is used to add network
connectivity to serial devices.
These terminal servers offer 8
or 16 RS-232/485 serial ports to
connect a variety of serial devices
including meter devices, UPS,
PDU, static switch, automatic
transfer switch, generators,
computer room air conditioners,
and other commercial, industrial
or business automation equipment. The serial ports use standard RJ-45 or DB-9 connectors for
convenient cabling, and optional
adapters are available as well.
21
CA08104001E
January 2013

Overview
2.0-5
Sheet 02 005
o. Single-port Device ServerIs a

device that is used to add network
connectivity to a single serial
device. These device servers offer
a single RS-232/485 serial port to
connect a variety of serial devices
including meter devices, UPS,
PDU, static switch, automatic
transfer switch, generators,
computer room air conditioners,
and other commercial, industrial
or business automation equipment. The serial ports use standard RJ-45 or DB-9 connectors for
convenient cabling, and optional
adapters are available as well.
p. PXG 600E/800E COM2 Port
Is used to communicate on a
Modbus RS-232/485 network or
on an Eaton QCPort (IT) bus. The
user may choose between a DB-9
or terminal strip connector to connect up to 32, RS-45 serial devices.
q. PXG 600E/800E COM1 Port
Is used to communicate on a
Modbus RS-232/485 network or
on an Eaton QCPort (IT) bus.
A terminal strip connector is
provided for this interface. Up
to 32 devices may be connected
to this port.
r. PXG 600E/800E INCOM PortIs

used to communicate on an Eaton
INCOM device network only. Up
to 64 devices may be connected
to this port.
s. PXG 200E/400E PortsThe ports
on the PXG 200E/400E operate
the same as on the PXG 600A;
however, there is only one
RS-232/485 port to be used for
Modbus or QCPort.
t. PONI (Product Oriented Network
Interface)Is used to connect the
Breaker Interface Module (8) to an
INCOM network.
u. PXGXPDP CardIs used to
connect an Eaton PDU (Power
Distribution Unit) or RPP (Remote
Power Panel) to an Ethernet
network. Available interfaces are:
HTTP (Web) SNMP, SMTP (e-mail),
Modbus TCP/IP, BACnet/IP and
BACnet/WS+.
v. PXGXUPS CardIs used to connect an Eaton UPS to an Ethernet
network. Available interfaces are:
HTTP (Web) SNMP, SMTP (e-mail),
Modbus TCP/IP, BACnet/IP and
BACnet/WS+.
Important Note: When connecting

multiple Modbus RTU devices to either
a multiport terminal server or a Power
Xpert Gateway over an RS-485 daisychain network, the baud rate, data
frame (stop bits, data bits and parity),
byte order (standard or reversed) and
physical wiring (two- or four-wire)
must be the same for all devices
connected.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
2.0-6

January 2013
Sheet 02 006
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Power Management Systems & Products

Network Connectivity
January 2013
2.1-1
Sheet 02 007
Fixed List of supported devices (no ability

to add new product support via EDS
upload); however, new supported devices
will be added during firmware updates.
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway 200E
(PXG 200E) is designed to provide
a Web-enabled gateway to serially
communicating energy meters via a
standard Web browser. The PXG 200E
supports revenue grade single and
multipoint energy meters via Modbus
RTU and INCOM. Operates as a
cost-effective hardware solution
for better energy management; no
software required; can export data
for use in other new or existing
monitoring systems.
The PXG 200E allows you to:
IQ 35M
IQ Energy Sentinel
IQ 130
IQ 140
IQ 150
IQ 220/230
IQ 220M/230M
IQ 230/330
IQ 250
IQ 260
IQ MESII
PM3
DT 1150/1150V
DT OPTIM 1050
DIM KYZ (WAGES)
EI NEXUS 1200 Series
SQD PM710
SQD PM850
Monitor energy usage patterns and

reveal opportunities for efficiency
improvements
Remotely monitor real-time
conditions and profile 5-minute
interval trend logs, and export
data in csv format
Allocate energy costs to
departments or processes
Reduce peak demand surcharges
Reduce power factor penalties
Identify billing discrepancies
Allows user to daisy-chain multiple
Ethernet compatible downstream
devices via RJ-45 port (for specifics,
see Page 2.1-7, Figure 2.1-5)
Connect to downstream devices
via a Web browser, Modbus
master or SNMP client separately
or concurrently
Power Xpert Gateway Screenshots
i
ii
1
2
3
Home Page
4
5
6
7
Bus Page
8
9
10
11
12
Device Page
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
2.1-2

January 2013
Sheet 02 008
i
ii
Table 2.1-1. PXG 200E Features

Features
PXG 200E
Total number of supported devices
64
Maximum number of INCOM devices supported
64
Maximum number of Modbus devices supported
32
Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM and Modbus RTU)
Yes
Number of downstream communication ports
Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously
USB port for configuration
Yes
Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports10/100Base-T
Yes
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported
Yes
SNMP client access v.1 and v.3
Yes
INCOM slave action commands supported
Yes
INCOM date and time settings supported
Yes
Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master
Yes
Device summary screens per main, bus and device
Yes
Event notification via the Web interface
Yes
Secure Ethernet communicationsSSL encryption
Yes
Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list
Yes
IPv4 and IPv6 support
Yes
Save and restore configuration file
Yes
Interval loggingcsv file format, downloadable to Excel
Yes
Ability to upload additional or modified EDS files
No
Device waveform access and storageCOMTRADE file format
No
Set user-defined events
No
Trend graph displayed
Yes
Data loggingcsv file format, downloadable to Excel
No
Event loggingcsv file format, downloadable to Excel
No
E-mail notification on events and threshold alarms
No
Custom summary Web page creation
No
Ability to create custom events
No
BACnet/IP support
Yes
The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway 200E

Includes:
The Power Xpert Gateway module
Mounting provisions and required
hardware for panel and DIN rail
mounting
CD-ROM: contains the user manual,
Modbus register maps, USB driver
and other associated files
Figure 2.1-1. Power Xpert Gateway with DIN

Rail Mounting (Brackets Included)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-3
Sheet 02 009

The table below represents many of the parameters displayed on the Web page for a given device; however, it is not exhaustive.
For the complete list of parameters display, per device, refer to the Device Data Map file at http://www.eaton.com/pxg.
Table 2.1-2. Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway
Nexus
1262/1272
SQD PM 850
SQD PM 710
ii
Third-Party
Devices
Digital Input
Module KYZ
Voltage (line-neutral)
I/O
Digital
Input Module
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
Digitrip 1150
PM3
IQ 35M
IQ 150
IQ Power
Sentinel
IQ 140
IQ 260
IQ 130
IQ 250
Voltage (line-line)
IQ MESII
IQ 230/330M
Average
IQ Energy
Sentinel
IQ 230/330
Circuit
Breaker
Trip Units
IQ 220/320
Units IQ Meters
Voltage
Current
Phase
Ground
Neutral
Peak
Demand
Apparent
VA
Reactive
VAR
Real
Apparent
PF
Displacement
PF
Real
Wh
Forward
Wh
Reverse
Wh
Apparent
Vah
Reactive
VARh
Leading
VARh
Lagging
VARh
Power
Average
5
6
7
8
Power Factor
Energy
10
11
12
Power Quality
THD
Current THD
Voltage THD
Frequency
Hz
Waveform capture
N/A
13
Temperature
Ambient
15
Auxiliary
Load bearing
Motor bearing
Winding
Phase (L, C, R)
Terminal block
14
16
17
18
Input Status
8
Count
Status/cause of trip
Thermal memory
19
Pole temperature
Winding temp.
20
Fan status
Alarm/trip relay
21
CA08104001E

2.1-4
January 2013
Sheet 02 010

Table 2.1-3. Data Acquisition and Integration Table For Supported Devices
IQ Energy Sentinel
Meter
IQ 220/IQ 320
Meter
IQ 230/IQ 330
Meter
IQ Power Sentinel
Meter
IQ MES II
Protective
Digitrip 1150/DT1150V
Protective
Digitrip OPTIM 1050
I/O
DIM-KYZ
Meter
PM3
Meter
IQ 230/IQ 330M
Meter
IQ 250
Meter
IQ 260
Meter
SQD PM 710
Meter
SQD PM 850
Meter
IQ 130
Meter
IQ 140
Meter
IQ 150
Meter
Nexus 1262/1272
Meter
IQ 35M
BACnet/IP
DIM
Meter
File Export
(COMTRADE
File Export)
Pass-through
INCOM
(PowerNet)
File Export
(CSV File
Format)
Modbus TCP
(BMS and
SCADA)
I/O
ii
SNMP
(NMS)
Web Services
(Power Xpert
Software)
Device Name
HTTP (Web
Browser)
Device Type
SMTP
(E-mail Client)
Supported Devices
Pass-through
QCPort
(CHStudio)
INCOM
Modbus
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-5
Sheet 02 011
Dimensions
Power Xpert GatewayDimensions in Inches (mm)
i
ii
1
2
3
24 Vdc
Input Power
COM 1 Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 32 Modbus
RTU Devices
INCOM Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 64 INCOM
Devices
RJ-45
Connection
to the LAN
RJ-45
Connection
to the Other
Ethernet Devices
USB Connection
for Local
Configuration
Capability
Power and Traffic

Indicator Lights
4
5
Figure 2.1-2. Power Xpert Gateway 200E
6
0.19 (6)
(4.8)
10.75
(273.1)
10.25
(260.4)
7
0.56
(14.2) 1.60
(40.6)
2.00 1.12
(50.8) (28.5) 0.56
(14.2)
8
9
8.75
(222.3)
Front
0.24
(6.1)
0.25
(6.4)
10
11
Figure 2.1-3. Power Xpert Gateway 200E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)
12
8.75
(222.3)
13
14
15
4.30
(109.2)
16
17
18
19
0.60
(15.2)
20
Figure 2.1-4. Power Xpert Gateway 200E
21
CA08104001E

2.1-6
January 2013
Sheet 02 012
Technical Data and Specifications
i
ii
1
Power Input
Table 2.1-4. PXG 200E Part Numbers
Description
Style
Number
Catalog
Number

Power supply24 Vdc
Mounting bracket kit
103008420-5591
ELC-PS02
66B2146G01
PXG200E
ELC-PS02
PXGACC01
Power Consumption
Memory
Serial Protocols Supported
Flash: 1 GB
RAM: 128 MB
Communication Ports
Supported Devices
Network port: two 10/100Base-T

RJ-45 connector
Configuration port: one USB port
Serial ports PXG 200E
One RS-485 port for connection to
INCOM devices
One RS-485 port for connection
to Modbus RTU devices
Refer to www.eaton.com/pxg for

most current list. Call for information
on additional devices.
4
5
6
7
Network Protocols Supported
10
11
12
13
Modbus TCP/IP: supports data

access from Modbus TCP clients
Web server: supports data access
from Web browsers (HTTP and
HTTPS)
DHCP: supports automatic IP
address assignments, if enabled
SNMP: supports common network
management tools
NTP: supports time synchronization
via a network time server for PXG
synchronization
SMTP: supports mail server for
e-mail notification
BACnet/IP: supports data access
from BACnet/IP clients
INCOM
Modbus RTU
Web Browsers Recommended

IE 6.0 or higher
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or higher
Google Chrome: Future
Note: Future; see www.eaton.com/pxg for

most recent specifications.
Number of Devices Supported
PXG 200E
64 total with INCOM Port + COM 1
port not to exceed 64. Port
limitations are as follows:
INCOM port: up to 64 INCOM
devices
COM 1 port: up to 32 Modbus
devices
8 watts maximum
Operating Temperature
Input voltage, nominal: 24 Vdc; 0.8A

Input voltage range: 20% Nominal
32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
Ambient Storage Temperature
40 to 185F (40 to 85C)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% noncondensing at 50C
Size (H x D x L) in Inches (mm)
2.10 x 4.50 x 8.90 (53.3 x 114.3 x 226.1)
Weight
1.5 lbs
Regulatory and Standards Compliance

UL 508, Standard for Programmable Controller Equipment
FCC, Class A, Part 15, Subpart B,
Sections 15.107b and 15.109b
EN55022: 1994 Class A, Information
Technology Equipment
EN 61000-6-2:2001 Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Party 6-2:
Immunity for Industrial Environments
Note: Features and specifications listed in

this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum
capabilities of the product with all options
installed. Although every attempt has been
made to ensure the accuracy of information
contained within, Eaton makes no representation about the completeness, correctness
or accuracy and assumes no responsibility
for any errors or omissions. Features and
functionality may vary depending on
selected options.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-7
Sheet 02 013

PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
The PXG-E allows for units to be
connected together through two RJ-45
10/100 connectors on the front of the
PXG-E series of products. This
arrangement is a pass-through of
Ethernet communications allowing a
single network drop to connect up to
five Ethernet communicating devices.
The maximum length of a copper
cable run should not exceed
295 ft (90m) total.
Note: In this configuration, if any of the

PXG-E units go offline or lose power, the
communication to the downstream Ethernet
devices will lose connection to the LAN.
i
ii
1
2
3
Ethernet LAN
4
LAN Connection
5
6
295 ft (90m)
PXM2000
7
8
Figure 2.1-5. PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
2.1-8

January 2013
Sheet 02 014
Power Xpert Gateway

400E/600E/800E
ii
1
The PXG 600E/800E also offer direct

e-mail notifications to up to 10 users.
Select from event notifications, data
logs, interval log, event logs and
heartbeat e-mails.
2
3
4
5
6
Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and

800E are typically installed in an electrical
assemblya motor control center, low/
medium voltage switchgear or switchboard
to consolidate data available from
components such as trip units, meters,
motor controllers and protective relays.
General Description
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The PXG 600E/800E allow you to enable

pre-selected parameters to be trended
for each supported device. Selecting
the trend symbol will generate a realtime graph for that parameter and can
be viewed for the past 24 hours, seven
days, 30 days or all past history.
Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and

800E (PXG 400E/600E/800E) provide a
cost-effective method to easily Webenable Eaton and third-party products.
The PXG 400E/600E/800E series offers
improved performance over the
previously offered series, logging
in the PXG 600E/800E, daisy chaining
capabilities (Page 2.1-10, Figure 2.1-8)
and design enhancements including a
new processor and additional RAM and
Flash memory.
The gateway consists of an embedded
Web server that allows the user to
connect to Eaton products such as
breakers, meters and relays found in
MCCs, LV and MV switchgear and
switchboardsto name a fewthat
communicate via Eaton protocols
INCOM and QCPort, in addition to thirdparty products that communicate via
Modbus RTU. The Gateway provides
the central connection point for the
power metering/monitoring/protective
devices, allowing their parameters to
be monitored via the Web.
The PXG 400E/600E/800E provide data
communications to Eatons Power
Xpert Software to facilitate centralizing
and gathering data for long-term data
archival, analysis and trending features.
The PXG 400E/600E/800E are
compatible with and facilitate
integration with many third-party
building and factory automation
systems via Modbus TCP and
Web services.
Home Page
The PXG 800E brings this communication hardware-only solution closer

to those requirements that have
previously only been met by a
software package. The PXG 800E
includes all the functionality of the
PXG 600E. Additional features include:
Creation of custom summary
Web pages on the user interface
from existing device parameters
or events
Bus Page
In the PXG 400E/600E/800E, information is presented in organized, userfriendly Web pages and includes, but
is not limited to, the following:
Device status
Comm status
Voltage
Current
Power
Power factor
Energy
Power quality
Temperature
I/O states
Device Page
Power Xpert Gateway Screenshots

Downstream devices on the Power
Xpert Gateways often report key
operating status information that
warrants immediate attention. The
PXG identifies a set of key status
values for each device and generates
Events in response to changes in
these status values. An example of a
device event is an overcurrent trip on a
circuit breaker.
Trending Page (PXG 600E/800E Only)
In addition to displaying events on its

home page, the PXG reports events to
monitoring software such as Power
Xpert Software. These events will then
be integrated with those from across
the power system, providing unified
enterprise level event management.
Note: Enclosed solution available. Contact

your Eaton sales office for more details.
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-9
Sheet 02 015

The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway Includes:
Table 2.1-5. Features of the PXG-E Product Offering

Features
PXG 400E PXG 600E PXG 800E
Total number of supported devices

Maximum number of INCOM devices supported
Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM,
Modbus RTU and QCPort)
Number of downstream communication ports
Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously
USB port for configuration
Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports10/100Base-T
Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported
SNMP client access v.1 and v.3
INCOM slave action commands supported
INCOM date and time settings supported
Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master
Device summary screens per main, bus and device
Event notification via the Web interface
Secure Ethernet communicationsSSL encryption
Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list
IPv4 and IPv6 support
Ability to upload additional or modified EDS files
Save and restore configuration file
Device waveform access and storageCOMTRADE file format
Set user-defined events
Trend graph displayed
Data loggingcsv file format, downloadable to Excel
Interval loggingcsv file format, downloadable to Excel
Event loggingcsv file format, downloadable to Excel
E-mail notification on events and threshold alarms
Custom summary Web page creation
BACnet/IP protocol supported
64
64
Yes
96
64
Yes
96
64
Yes
2
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
3
3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
3
3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
The Power Xpert Gateway module

Mounting provisions and required
hardware for panel and DIN rail
mounting
CD-ROM: contains the user manual,
Modbus register maps, USB driver
and other associated files
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 2.1-7. Power Xpert Gateway with DIN

Rail Mounting (Brackets Included)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
24 Vdc
Input Power
COM 1 Port:
RS-485 Connection for
up to Either (32) QCPort
or Modbus RTU Devices
INCOM Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 64 INCOM
Devices
RJ-45
Connection
to the LAN
RJ-45
Connection
to the Other
Ethernet Devices
USB Connection
for Local
Configuration
Capability
Power and Traffic

Indicator Lights
15
16
Data and Link

Indicator Lights:
Available only
with 800E
COM 2 Port:
Either RS-485
or RS-232
Connection
for up to Either
(32) QCPort or
Modbus RTU
Devices
17
18
19
PXG 600E or 800E
20
Figure 2.1-6. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
21
CA08104001E
2.1-10 Power Management Systems & Products

January 2013
Sheet 02 016
Technical Specifications
i
ii
1
2
PXG-E Daisy Chain Application

The PXG-E allows for units to be
connected together through two RJ-45
10/100 connectors on the front of the
PXG-E series of products. This
arrangement is a pass-through of
Ethernet communications allowing a
single network drop to connect up to
five Ethernet communicating devices.
The maximum length of a copper
cable run should not exceed
295 ft (90m) total.
Note: In this configuration, if any of the

PXG-E units go offline or lose power, the
communication to the downstream Ethernet
devices will lose connection to the LAN.
3
4
Ethernet LAN
LAN Connection
5
6
7
295 ft (90m)
PXM2000
Figure 2.1-8. PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-11
Sheet 02 017
Connectivity Matrix
Table 2.1-6. Data Acquisition and Integration Table For Supported Devices
Supported Devices
Device Type
Device Name
ii
File Export
(Waveform File
Export)
File Export
(Data File
Format)
SMTP
(E-mail Client)
BACnet/IP
SNMP
(NMS)
Pass-through
QCPort
(CHStudio)
Pass-through
INCOM
(PowerNet)
PXG 600E/800E Only
Modbus TCP
(BMS and
SCADA)
Web Services
(Power Xpert
Software)
HTTP (Web
Browser)
PXG 400E/600E/800E
INCOM
Accutrol 400
Drive
AF97
I/O
Universal RTD
I/O
DIM
I/O
DIM KYZ
Meter
IQ DP-4000
Meter
IQ Energy Sentinel
Meter
IQ 220/IQ 320
Meter
IQ 230/IQ 330
Meter
IQ Analyzer
(6000/6200)
Meter
IQ Analyzer (6400/6600)
Meter
IQ Data
Meter
IQ Data Plus
Meter
IQ Data Plus II
Meter
Power Manager
Meter
IQ Power Sentinel
Meter point
IQ MES II
Protective
Digitrip 3000
Protective
Digitrip 3200
Protective
FP-6000
Protective
FP-5000
Protective
FP-4000
Protective
MP-3000
Protective
MP-4000
Protective
Digitrip 520MC
Protective
NRX520
Protective
IQ 500
Protective
MPCV Relay
Protective
Protective
Digitrip 810
Protective
Digitrip 910
Protective
Digitrip MV
Protective
Digitrip OPTIM 1050
Protective
Digitrip OPTIM 550
Protective
Digitrip OPTIM 750
Starter
Advantage
Starter
Advantage ACM
Subnetwork master
AEM II
Subnetwork master
BIM II
Subnetwork master
CMU
Subnetwork master
IQ CED II
Subnetwork master
IQ MES II
Transfer switch
ATC-400
Transfer switch
ATC-600
Transfer Switch
ATC-800

Required IPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

Required a WPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.
Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity.
CA08104001E
2
3
Drive
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

January 2013
Sheet 02 018
Connectivity Matrix
Table 2.1-6. Data Acquisition and Integration Table For Supported Devices (Continued)
Supported Devices
Device Type
Device Name
ii
Insulation monitor
InsulGard
Meter
IQ 130
Meter
IQ 140
Meter
IQ 150
Meter
IQ 220M/230M
Meter
IQ 250
Meter
IQ 260
Meter
IQ 35M
Meter
Nexus 1262
Meter
SQD CM3000 Series
Meter
SQD CM4000 Series
Meter
SQD PM710
Meter
SQD PM850
Meter
PML 7350
Meter
PML 7550
Meter
PML 7650
10
Meter
PM3
Protective
GE 369 Motor Relay
Protective
GE 469 Motor Relay
11
Protective
FP-4000/FP-5000
Protective
FP-6000
12
Overload relay
C441
Temp monitor
Qualitrol 118
Temp monitor
TC-50
13
Temp monitor
TC-100
Transformer differential relay
ABB TPU 2000
14
I/O
D77A-AI16
I/O
D77A-AI8
15
I/O
D77A-DI16
I/O
D77A-DI8
16
Starter
IT. S811 (MV811)
Starter
IT. Starter
Starter
IT. Starter QSNAP
17
File Export
(Data File
Format)
SMTP
(E-mail Client)
Pass-through
QCPort
(CHStudio)
SVX9000
Pass-through
INCOM
(PowerNet)
BACnet/IP
Modbus TCP
(BMS and
SCADA)
MVX9000
Drive
Web Services
(Power Xpert
Software)
Drive
HTTP (Web
Browser)
SNMP
(NMS)
PXG 600E/800E Only

File Export
(Waveform File
Export)
PXG 400E/600E/800E
Modbus
QCPort
Requires a QSNAP for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.
Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity.
18
Note: Additional supported devices will be available via firmware updates. Contact your local Eaton sales office for help with
devices not currently listed in Table 2.1-6.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-13
Sheet 02 019
Product Selection
The table below represents many of the parameters displayed on the Web page for a given device; however, it is not exhaustive.
For the complete list of parameters display, per device, refer to the Device Data Map file at http://www.eaton.com/pxg.
Table 2.1-7. Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway
ii
Protective Relays
EDR-3000
FP-6000
MP-4000
MP-3000
FP-5000
FP-4000
MPVCV Relay
IQ 500
Digitrip 3200
Digitrip 3000
1
Digitrip MV
Digitrip OPTIM 750
Digitrip OPTIM 550
Digitrip OPTIM 1050
Digitrip RMS 810
Digitrip RMS 910
Digitrip 520MC
Digitrip 1150
Power Manager
IQ 35M
IQ 150
IQ 140
IQ 130
IQ MESII
IQ Energy Sentinel
IQ Power Sentinel
IQ 260
IQ 250
IQ 230/330M
IQ 230/330
IQ 220/320
IQ DP-4000
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600
Circuit Breaker Trip Units

IQ Data
IQ Data Plus
IQ Data Plus II
Units IQ Meters
2
3
Voltage

Average
Voltage (line-line)
Current

Average
Phase
Ground
Neutral
Peak
Demand
Apparent
VA
Reactive
VAR
Real
Apparent
PF
Displacement
PF
9
10
Energy
Wh
Forward
Wh
Reverse
Wh
Apparent
Vah
Reactive
VARh
Leading
VARh
Lagging
VARh
THD
Current THD
Voltage THD
11
12
13
Power Quality
Frequency
Hz
Waveform capture
N/A
14
15
Temperature
Ambient
7
8
Power Factor
Real
Power
Auxiliary
Load bearing
Motor bearing
Winding
Phase (L, C, R)
Terminal block
16
17
18
Input Status
Number of inputs
19
Thermal memory
Pole temperature
20
Winding temp.
Fan status
Alarm/trip relay
CA08104001E
21

January 2013
Sheet 02 020
Product Selection
Nexus 1262/1272
Qualitrol 118
ABB TPU 2000
GE 469 Motor Relay
GE 369 Motor Relay
PML 7550
PML 7650
PML 7350
SQD PM 710
SQD PM 850
Temperature
Controller
TC-100
TC-50
PM3
Universal RTD
DIM KYZ
D77A-DI8
D77A-DI16
D77A-AI8
D77A-AI16
Digital Input Module
ACT-800
SVX & MVX Drives
ACT-600
C441 Overload Relay
IT. Starters/QSNAP
IT. S811
SQD CM 4000 Series
Third-Party Devices
SQD CM 3000 Series
Transfer
I/O
Switches
ATC-400
Advantage Starters
InsulGard
AF97
ii
Motor Starters
& VFDs
Accutrol 400
Units
Monitoring
Device
Table 2.1-7. Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway (Continued)
Insulation
Monitor
Voltage
Average
Voltage (line-line)
Current
Average
Phase
Ground
Neutral
Peak
Demand
Power
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Apparent
VA
Reactive
VAR
Real
Apparent
PF
Displacement
PF
Power Factor
Energy
Real
Wh
Forward
Wh
Reverse
Wh
Apparent
Vah
Reactive
VARh
Leading
VARh
Lagging
VARh
Power Quality
THD
Current THD
Voltage THD
Frequency
Hz
Waveform capture
N/A
Temperature
Ambient
Auxiliary
Load bearing
Motor bearing
Winding
Phase (L, C, R)
Terminal block
Input Status
Number of inputs
Thermal memory
Pole temperature
8 16 8 16
Winding temp.
Fan status
Alarm/trip relay
Partial discharge
intensity (PDI)
Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com for latest information.
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-15
Sheet 02 021
Dimensions
Power Xpert GatewayDimensions in Inches (mm)
0.19 (6)
(4.8)
i
10.75
(273.1)
10.25
(260.4)
ii
0.56
(14.2) 1.60
(40.6)
2.00 1.12
(50.8) (28.5) 0.56
(14.2)
8.75
(222.3)
Front
0.24
(6.1)
0.25
(6.4)
Figure 2.1-9. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.75
(222.3)
7
8
4.30
(109.2)
9
10
11
12
0.60
(15.2)
13
Figure 2.1-10. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
Sheet 02 022
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Power Input
Table 2.1-8. PXG Part Numbers
Description
Style
Number
Catalog
Number

103008421-5591
103008422-5591
103008423-5591
PXG400E
PXG600E
PXG800E
Power supply24 Vdc

Mounting bracket kit
ELC-PS02
66B2146G01
ELC-PS02
PXGACC01
6
7
8
9
10
11
Serial Protocols Supported
Flash: 1 GB400E/600E
2 GB800E
RAM: 128 MB
Communication Ports
Supported Devices
Network port: two 10/100Base-T

RJ-45 connectors
Configuration port: one USB port
Serial ports PXG 400E
One dedicated RS-485 port for
connection to INCOM devices
to either QCPort or Modbus RTU
devices
Serial ports PXG 600E/800E
One dedicated RS-485 port for
connection to INCOM devices
devices
One RS-485 or RS-232 (software
selectable) port for connection
devices
Refer to www.eaton.com/pxg for

most current list. Call for information
on additional devices.
12
Network Protocols Supported
13
14
15
16
17
18
Input voltage, nominal: 24 Vdc; 0.8A

Input voltage range: 20% Nominal
Power Consumption
8 watts maximum
32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
Ambient Storage Temperature

Memory
Modbus TCP/IP: supports data

access from Modbus TCP clients
Web server: supports data access
from Web browsers (HTTP and
HTTPS)
DHCP: supports automatic IP
address assignments, if enabled
SNMP: supports common network
management tools
NTP: supports time synchronization
via a network time server for PXG
synchronization
SMTP: supports mail server for
e-mail notification
BACnet/IP: supports data access
from BACnet/IP clients
INCOM
QCPort
Modbus RTU
Web Browsers Recommended

IE 6.0 or higher
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or higher
Google Chrome (future)
Number of Devices Supported
PXG 400E
port not to exceed 64. Port
limitations are as follows:
devices
COM 1 port: up to 32 QCPort or
Modbus RTU devices
PXG 600E/800E
port + COM 2 PORT not to exceed
96. Port limitations are as follows:
devices
COM 1 port: up to 32 QCPort
or Modbus RTU devices
COM 2 port: up to 32 QCPort
or Modbus RTU devices
40 to 185F (40 to 85C)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% noncondensing at 50C
Size (H x D x L) in Inches (mm)
2.10 x 4.50 x 8.90 (53.3 x 114.3 x 226.1)
Weight
1.5 lbs
Regulatory and Standards Compliance

UL 508, Standard for Programmable
Controller Equipment
FCC, Class A, Part 15, Subpart B,
Sections 15.107b and 15.109b
EN55022: 1994 Class A, Information
Technology Equipment
EN 61000-6-2:2001 Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Party 6-2:
Immunity for Industrial Environments
Note: Features and specifications listed in

this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum
capabilities of the product with all options
installed. Although every attempt has been
made to ensure the accuracy of information
contained within, Eaton makes no representation about the completeness, correctness
or accuracy and assumes no responsibility
for any errors or omissions. Features and
functionality may vary depending on
selected options.
Note: PXG 800Eup to 96 total devices.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-17
Sheet 02 023
Wiring Guidelines
General Wiring GuidelinesRS-485 Network
Rule 5: Cable Shielding
Table 2.1-9. RS-485 Wiring GuideThree Terminal Devices
The cable shielding and outer jacket

should not be stripped back beyond
1.50 inches (38 mm). Three-pole
terminal blocks are used to ensure
a continuous metallic shield ground
path. To ensure a secure electrical
connection when daisy chaining
devices that have built-in two-pole
terminal blocks, mechanically crimp
sleeves onto the two shield path
drain wires.
Device Name
A
( Wire)
B
(+ Wire)
Common
Wire
IQ 230M
12 (MOD2)
11 (MOD1)
10 (INCOM 3)
I 26V
None
IQ 250
()
(+)
Older Models Older Models
are Marked
are Marked
B ()
A () or A(+)
SH
None
IQ 260
()
(+)
Older Models Older Models
are Marked
are Marked
B ()
A () or A (+)
SH
None
IQ 330M
12 (MOD2)
10 (INCOM 3)
I 26V
None
11 (MOD1)
XCVR
Common
Data
Bias
Rule 6: Cable Grounding
InsulGard
None
Floating
None
Bushing Gard
(InsulGard G3 )
None
Floating
None
Power Xpert Meter

4000/6000/8000
Data A
750B-S
Data B
750B-S
Shield
(COM)
I 300V
750 Ohm
Switch Sel
A()
B(+)
COM

Transceiver (XCVR) Common Connected to:

I = Isolated
NI = Non Isolated
E = Earth Ground
Center terminal on Insulgard (marked with Ground symbol) is for shield splicing only and is
electrically floating.
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 is directly compatible with Ethernet networks and does
not need a Power Xpert Gateway. See Tab 3 for more details.
When communicating over RS-485

networks to Eaton products, the
following general wiring guidelines
should be used.
Rule 1: Cable Selection

Twisted Shielded Pair (TSP)
Note cables specifically designed
for RS-485 applications are highly
recommended. The RS-485 bus is a
length of twisted shielded pair (TSP)
that includes a third conductor (used
for the common wire), a braided shield
accompanied by a drain wire, and
nominal impedance of 120 ohms.
Belden Wire and Cable Company

Part Number 3106A or equivalent
Rule 2: Cable Intermixing

Any cable in the Belden 3106A family
can be intermixed with each other in
the Modbus network.
Note: For fiber optic wiring guidelines, see
Pages 2.2-2 and 2.2-3.
Rule 3: System Topology, Size and Capacity

Strict daisy chain must be adhered
to. A strict daisy chain configuration
is one where the transmission line
connects from one RS-485 receiver
to the next. The transmission line
appears as one continuous line to
the RS-485 driver
Maximum 32 devices
Line termination: maximum cable
lengths of 4000 ft (1219m); longer
bus lengths will slow the data rate
Rule 4: Cable Splicing

The prime goal is to create a secure
electrical connection while minimizing
exposure to electrical transients.
Ferrules are used to dress cable ends.
Most devices have built-in terminal
blocks which can be used for splicing.
Additionally, terminal blocks should
be used when splicing elsewhere in
the gear or facility to ensure a secure
electrical connection.
Ground the communication network at

only one point in the network, preferably by terminating the drain wire
to ground at the EOL node (same
location as the EOLR). A solid earth
ground is accomplished by connecting
the shield ground paths drain wire to
a #14 AWG or larger multi-stranded
wire that has an impedance path of 1
ohm or less to a known earth ground.
Note: The building electrical ground may
not be effective since it may travel through
many connections and considerable
distances before reaching earth ground.
In such cases a new ground path will be
required since the effectiveness of this
shield earth ground connection will affect
the integrity of data transferred over
the cable.
Rule 7: Cable Termination

End of Line Resistors (EOLR) are
necessary to maintain signal strength
and minimize reflections. EOLR must
match the impedance of the TSP.
Two EOLR are needed and should be
located at both ends of the RS-485 bus.
If there is only one device connected to
the Modbus master, it is considered
the last device in the network and
should be terminated with a 120 ohm
1/4 watt terminating resistor.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Rule 8: Device Addressing

Each device must have a unique
slave address
No two devices on the same
RS-485 network can have the same
slave address
15
Ethernet Cable Specifications
17
For complete specifications, refer to

the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet specification.
16
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
Sheet 02 024
Wiring Guidelines
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
INCOM Network
INCOM was specifically designed with
the intention of delivering a comprehensive and powerful energy management solution for use in electrical
distribution environments while ensuring affordability, flexibility, simplicity
and noise immunity. An INCOM network installed per the following rules
will allow the user to fully realize all of
the above advantages. (Refer to Eaton
document TD17513 for specific system
layout recommendations and details.)
Rule 1: Cable Selection

Twisted Shielded Pair
Approved cable types:
Any of the cables in the Belden 9463

family
Quabbin 6205
CommScope 9022
Manhattan Electric M4154
IMPCABLEa 600V rated cable
custom designed for INCOM
Style # 2A95705G01
Rule 2: Cable Intermixing
9
10
11
12
13
14
Due to impedance differences

between IMPCABLE and the Belden
9463 family, the main cable run(s)
should be entirely for the 9463 family
OR IMPCABLE: do not alternate
between these types. The cable
used for taps can be different from
the main run.
Rule 3: System Topology, Size and Capacity

Supports Daisy Chain, Star and MultiLevel Network Segment Topologies.
(Note: Star Segment Topology is
not recommended for new designs).
See Figure 2.1-10. Surge protection is
required for FSK networks that leave
a building at the egress/ingress of
the building.
15
16
17
18
19
20
Supports distances up to 10,000 ft

(3048m) per segment when
designed within the specifications of
this guideline
Supports up to 1000 devices on a
single network segment
Supports sub-network master
devices and associated sub-networks
Supports 1200 or 9600 baud rate.
Attenuation:
Total system capacity: 25 dB
Attenuation per device: 0.01 dB
Attenuation for approved
wire types (see Tables 2.1-10
and 2.1-11)
Table 2.1-10. Cable Attenuation

Cable
Type
Attenuation/
1000 ft (305m)
IMPCABLE
Belden 9463 family
1.6 dB
2.0 dB
Table 2.1-11. Attenuation at Star

Number of
Long Lines
Attenuation
3
4
5
3.5 dB
6 dB
8 dB
Definitions:
Daisy chain: point-to-point
wiring between devices or
clusters of devices
Star: single point with a number
of long lines emanating from it
Long line: >200-ft (61m)
wire run
Simple tap: <200-ft (61m)
connection to cluster of devices
Rule 4: Cable Splicing

The goal is to create a secure electrical
connection while minimizing exposure
to electrical transients. Ferrules are
used to dress cable ends in order to
avoid problems associated with frayed
and loose wires. Besides facilitating
cable installation, subsequent data line
troubleshooting and downtime are
minimized. Most INCOM devices have
built in three pole terminal blocks for
data lines and shield. For older INCOM
devices that have only two terminals,
shield continuity must be ensured by
other means. Additional terminal
strips should be used when splicing
elsewhere in the electrical enclosure
or facility to ensure secure electrical
connections. All devices, End of
Line Termination Resistors, and
Taps should be wired in parallel
across the cable.
Rule 5: Cable Shielding

The cable shielding and outer jacket
should not be stripped back beyond
1.50 inches (38 mm). Terminal blocks
are used at tap points to ensure a
continuous metallic shield ground
path. To ensure a secure electrical
connection when daisy-chaining
INCOM devices that have built-in
two pole terminal blocks, use crimp
sleeves to join the two shield drain
wires. The cable shield ground path
for a main network and sub-network
must not be joined. Each should
have a separate connection to earth
ground reference.
21
Rule 6: Cable Grounding

The shield should be continuous
across a network segment and connected to the buildings electrical system grounding electrode conductor.
The 2005 NEC provides the following
guidance on grounding communication cables:
1. When a communication cable
enters a building, a primary
protector is required and must be
grounded as described in section
800 IV. Specifically, paragraphs
800.93 and 800.100 define grounding requirements for the primary
protector.
2. Grounding systems are generally
covered by Section 250 III. The
grounding electrode conductor is
specifically covered by paragraphs
250.62, 250.64, 250.66, 250.68 and
250.70.
3. Bonding requirements between
communication systems and
the power distribution system is
specified by Paragraph 250.94.
A solid earth ground is accomplished
by connecting the shield ground paths
drain wire to a #14 AWG or larger
multi-stranded wire that has an impedance path of 1 ohm or less to the buildings grounding electrode conductor.
Rule 7: Cable Termination

Each network segment requires a minimum of two End of Line Termination
Resistors (EOLTRs). The EOLTRs
maintain signal strength and minimize
reflections. The EOLTRs should be 1/2
watt 100 ohm non-inductive resistors,
such as carbon composition or metal
film. Wire-wound resistors are not
acceptable. Taps on network segments
should not be terminated. Some
INCOM devices have the EOLTR
permanently installed and must be
located at the end of a main run.
Other INCOM devices have an EOLTR
that can be switched to optionally
terminate the network segment at the
device. Care must be exercised when
installing devices containing termination resistors that the switches are
set appropriately. A minimum of two,
up to a maximum of five EOLTRs must
be installed on each network segment
as dictated by network topology.
Rule 8: Device Address

In order to avoid the possibility of
devices in a main network having the
same addresses as those in subnetworks, set main network device
addresses at 100 or higher excluding
addresses 901 to 908.
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-19
Sheet 02 025
Wiring Guidelines
INCOM
Master
Device 1
Main Run
Device 2
Device 10
Device 5
ii
EOLTR
EOLTR
Device 3
Note: Device 1 may be a PC with

internal CONI Card, a SubNetwork
Master (BIM, LDISP), an INCOM MINT
(RS-232 MINTII, Ethernet MINT, Modbus RS-485 MINT), an INCOM Gateway
(NetLink, Power Xpert Gateway).
Tap
Tap
Device 6
Device 8
Device 9
3
4
Device 4
Device 7
Figure 2.1-11. Daisy-Chain Segment Topology
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
Sheet 02 026
IQ Meters
i
ii
Ethernet-Enabled Power
Quality & Energy (PQ&E)
IQ Meters
1
2
3
600E/800E is 8000. Dividing 8000 by 274

tells you that the maximum number of
FP-5000s you can have downstream
on a single PXG 400E/600E/800E is 28.
Please contact your local Eaton sales
office for a maximum number of
downstream devices based on your
monitored parameter requirements.
Communication Interfaces
Equipment
Note: For detailed equipment information,

refer to Tab 3.
IQ Digital Panel Meters
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway 400E

supports a total of 64 devices. The
Power Xpert Gateway 600E and 800E
support up to 96 total devices, with a
limit of 64 INCOM devices.
7
8
9
10
11
When designing a system using gateways, it is important to consider not

only the number of devices that will
communicate through a PXG 400E/
600E/800E, but also the quantity of
monitored parameters of each of its
supported downstream devices.
For example, the number of the
monitored parameters in the FP-5000
protective relay is 274, the maximum
number of parameters per PXG 400E/
Modbus RTU (RS-485) or INCOM

(downstream)
Modbus TCP/IP (with PXG)
HTTP(s) (with PXG)
XML/SOAP (with PXG)
SMTP (with PXG 600E/800E)
SNMP (with PXG)
BACnet/IP (with (PXG)
Metering/Monitoring Applications
IQ 35M meterModbus RS-485

IQ MES IIINCOM
IQ 130/140/150 meters
IQ 250/260 metersModbus RS-485
IQ 220/230 metersINCOM
IQ DP-4000/4100 metersINCOM
IQ Energy Sentinel/Power Sentinel
metersINCOM
IQ Central Energy Display IIINCOM
Real-time viewing of power/energy

readings (PXG)
View trended power/energy
readings (PXG 600E/800E)
User-defined events (PXG 600E/800E)
E-mail notification (PXG 600E/800E)
Installation Applications
Low voltage switchgear
Low voltage motor control centers
Medium voltage motor starters
Options
Communications Applications
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters may

be connected for Web browser access
and INCOM translation for Power
Xpert Software and Foreseer Services
PXG 600E/800EUp to 96 IQ meters
may be connected for Web browser
access, data logging, alarm notification, control commands, and INCOM
translation for Power Xpert Software
and Foreseer Services
Building Management System (BMS)

Energy Management Systems
Network Management Systems (NMS)
HMI
Foreseer Services
12
13
14
PXG 600E
and
PXG 800E
15
IQ 250/260
IQ Analyzer
16
17
18
19
20
21
IQ Analyzer
IQ 250/260
3rd Party Meter
3rd Party Meter

Ethernet Network
QCPort Network
INCOM Network
RS-485 Network
eolr = End of line resistor
eoltr = End of line terminator
resistor
eolr
3rd Party
Meter
eolr
IQ 250/260
3rd Party
Meter
eolr
3rd Party
Meter
eoltr
eoltr
Figure 2.1-12. PXG Ethernet-Enabled IQ Meter Applications

Note: Many other devices supported. See complete supported device list at www.eaton.com/pxg.
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-21
Sheet 02 027
Trip Units and Protective Relays
Ethernet-Enabled Circuit
Breaker Trip Units and
Protective Relays
Modbus RTU (RS-485) or INCOM

downstream
HTTP (with PXG) (with ECC)
HTTPS (with PXG)
SNMP (with PXG)
BACnet/IP (with PXG)
XML/SOAP (with PXG)
Building Management System

(BMS)
HMI
Network Management Systems
(NMS)
Foreseer Services
Up to a combination of 64 INCOM trip

units and protective relays may be
connected to a single Power Xpert
Gateway (PXG) and deployed in
various power distribution and
motor control applications and made
accessible to an Ethernet network
using the PXG.
Digitrip 3000/3200
FP-4000/5000/6000
MP-3000/4000
Digitrip 520MC
IQ 500
MPCV Relay
Digitrip 810/910
Digitrip MV
Digitrip OPTIM 1050/750/550
BIM II (Breaker Interface Module)
Options
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters may
be connected for Web browser
access and INCOM translation for
access, data logging, alarm notification, control commands, and INCOM

Viewing an Eaton FP-5000 Protective Relay

through the Power Xpert Gateway
7
8
9
10
24 Vdc
Power Supply Required
PXG 600E and PXG 800E
11
12
3rd Party
Motor Relay
1150/DT1150
1150/DT1150
3rd Party
Motor Relay
3rd Party
Motor Relay
3rd Party
Motor Relay
3rd Party
Motor Relay
13
14
BIM II
BIM II
3rd Party
Motor Relay
OPTIM 1050
Optim 1050
Note: Both PXG 400E/600E support a

maximum of 64 INCOM devices while
not to exceed the total PXG device limit.
PXG 400E64 Total
PXG 600E/800E96 Total
Equipment
General Description
ii

readings (PXG)
Electronic Trip Units
FP4000
FP5000
DT3000
3rd Party
Portective
Relay
eolr
eoltr
3rd Party
3rd Party
Portective
Relay
eolr
Portective
Relay
eolr
Ethernet Network
QCPort Network
INCOM Network
RS-485 Network
eolr = End of line resistor
eoltr = End of line termination resistor
15
16
FP4000
FP5000
DT3000
17
eoltr
18
Figure 2.1-13. Power Xpert Gateway Trip Unit and Relay Application
Note: When using Modbus RTU over an RS-485 communications network, the data rate, data
protocol (data bit, stop bit and parity) and wiring topology (two-wire or four-wire) must be the
same for each of the devices.
Note: Many other devices supported. See complete supported device list at www.eaton.com/pxg.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
Sheet 02 028
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Medium Voltage
Fused Switch
Step Down
Unit Substation Transformer
Low Voltage
Secondary Distribution Switchboard
All CAT5e or CAT6 Wiring,

Connectors and Conduit to Additional
Ethernet Devices if Required
(i.e., PXM in Medium Voltage Switch)
by Installing Contractor.
7
8
Modbus RS-485 Belden Wiring and

Conduit from Switchboard to
Transformer Temperature Controller
Optional Connection Via 62.5

Micron Duplex Multimode Fiber
Pair With ST Connectors to
Facility Power Monitoring System.
all Fiber Optic Wiring, Connectors and
Conduit by Installing Contractor.
CAT5e or CAT6 Connection to
Facility Power Monitoring Network.
All Wiring, Connectors and Conduit
(Daisy Chain to other
INCOM Trip Units or
PM3 Meter Modules)
Thru-Door RJ-45 Port
10
(End of Line
Terminating Resistor)
11
Eaton PXES6P Network Switch
12
Eaton TC-100
Transformer
Temperature
Control
Typical Optional
PXM6000
Meter Inputs
Eaton PX600 Gateway

Eaton Series C F 225A
Frame Breaker with
PM3K3225CO2V48M
Meter Module
SPD Alarm Contact
Switch Open Contact
13
Typical Optional
PXM6000
Meter Inputs
Trans Hi Temp Alarm
Switch Closed Contact
Trans Fans On Contact
Switch Blown Fuse Contact
Eaton Series C K 400A

Frame Breaker with
PM3K3630C02V48M
Meter Module
14
Typical Eaton
Internal Wiring
15
16
Eaton Magnum
Breaker 520MC
or 1150 Trip Unit
17
Eaton Digitrip OPTIM
1050 or 550 Trip Unit
18
19
Medium Voltage
Fused Switch
Step Down
Unit Substation Transformer
Eaton Series G LG 600A

Frame Breaker with
PM3L3630C02V48M Meter Module
Low Voltage
Secondary Distribution Switchboard
Figure 2.1-14. Typical Ethernet-Enabled Unit Substation With Switchboard Secondary
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-23
Sheet 02 029
Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center
Ethernet-Enabled
Motor Control Center
Modbus RTU (RS-485) or

INCOM (FSK)
HTTP (with PXG)
HTTPS (with PXG)
XML/SOAP (with PXG)
SNMP (with PXG)
BACnet/IP (with PXG)
readings (PXG)
Electronic Motor Overload Relays, Soft

Starters and Variable Frequency Drives
General Description
Eaton Variable Frequency Drives may
be connected to a single Power Xpert
Gateway (PXG) 400E (not to exceed
64 total) or Power Xpert Gateway
600E/800E (not to exceed 96 total)
deployed in various low-voltage motor
control center applications and made
accessible to an Ethernet network.
Equipment
S811 Soft Starter
SVX9000/MVX9000 variable
frequency drives
C441 Overload Relay

(BMS)
(NMS)
HMI
Foreseer Services
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Options
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters
access and INCOM translation for
access, data logging, alarm notification, control commands and INCOM
13
14
15
Note: Both PXG 400/600 support a

maximum of 64 INCOM devices while
not to exceed the total PXG device limit.
PXG 400E64 total
PXG 600E/800E96 total
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
Sheet 02 030
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Optional Connection Via 62.5 Micron Duplex Multimode Fiber Pair

with ST Connectors to Facility Power Monitoring System.
All Fiber Optic Wiring, Connectors and Conduit by Installing Contractor.
All CAT5e or CAT6 Wiring, Connectors and Conduit to

Additional Ethernet Devices if Required (i.e., Other Ethernet
Communicating MCCs) by Installing Contractor.
CAT5e or CAT6 Connection to Facility Power Monitoring Network.

All Wiring, Connectors and Conduit by Installing Contractor.
10
11
XP702 Industrial PC
with Touch Screen
Eaton Motor Insight
C441 Overload Relay
10.40 Inch Touch Screen
Eaton Motor Insight

C441 Overload Relay
12
13
14
Thru-Door RJ-45 Port
Eaton Motor Insight

C441 Overload Relay
Eaton Motor Insight

C441 Overload Relay
Eaton PXES6P Network Switch
15
16
Eaton SVX9000
Variable Frequency
Drive
Eaton PX600
Gateway
17
18
19

Eaton SVX9000
Variable Frequency
Drive
Eaton IQ 260
Meter
Eaton IQ 260
Meter
Eaton Motor Insight

C441 Overload Relay
(End of Line
Terminating
Resistor)
(End of Line
Terminating
Resistor)
20
21
Eaton Motor Insight

C441 Overload Relay
Figure 2.1-15. Typical Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center
CA08104001E
January 2013

2.1-25
Sheet 02 031
IPONI Communication Modules
IPONI Communication
Modules
Metered Parameters/
Communications
An IPONI enables communication of
the metered parameters and set points
consistent with those of the device to
which it is attached.
Communications
Supported Devices
The IPONI enables communications

over a twisted shielded pair INCOM
device network. Wiring communications to these devices adhere to the
Wiring Guidelines (see Pages 2.1-17
and 2.1-19).
Catalog Information
i
ii
1
2
Table 2.1-12. PONI Communication Modules

Description
Catalog
Number
INCOM PONI
IPONI
3
4
5
IPONI Communication Module
Certifications/Listings
Physical Characteristics
Each IPONI attaches to its associated
product. No other mounting or enclosure is required. When mounted to the
back of the meter or relay or other
communicating device, the IPONI gets
its power from the device to which it is
attached. The connection to the device
is via a 9-Pin connector.
IQ Analyzer (1.06)
IQ DP-4000
Automatic Transfer Control (ATC)
BIMII
MP-3000
MP-4000
IPONI: UL/cUL
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
Sheet 02 032
Breaker Interface Module (BIMII)
1
2
4
General Description
Eatons Breaker Interface Module is a

panel-mounted device which performs
the following functions:
9
10
11
12
13
Monitors and displays parameters

(right) from any combination of
Digitrip RMS 810, 910, Digitrip 1150
when set up to communicate as
a 910 and Digitrip OPTIM Trip
Units, Energy Sentinels and Power
Sentinels, supporting as many as
50 of these devices up to 10,000 ft
(3048m) away
Communicates the information
from these protective and energy
monitoring devices over an Eaton
INCOM network
Continuously monitors breakers
recording and time stamping trip
events along with approximate fault
currents. Events are logged into
non-volatile RAM
Parameters Displayed
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The programmed functions, addresses

and circuit descriptions are stored in
non-volatile memory.
Phase current
Energy
Present demand watts
Peak demand watts
Average demand current
Cause and magnitude of trip
Trip history
% Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
for each phase
% Harmonic Content for each phase
(1st27th harmonic)
Custom circuit description
Note: The Breaker Interface Module

displays only a portion of the information
it receives from the Digitrip RMS 910
and Power Sentinels. The balance of the
information (such as waveform analysis
and power factor) can be passed through
the unit to a master computer, where it
can be viewed.
External Power
A 24 Vdc supply is required for
the BIMII. (No external power supply
is required for the PONI Card.) A 120
or 240 Vac supply is required for
the BIMPS.
Rear Access Area

All wiring connections to the breaker
interface module are made at the
chassis rear and include:
An operator can use the Breaker

Interface Module to:
14
Communications
The Breaker Interface Module can

be mounted directly on the assembly
or at a remote location and can be
used to access, configure and display
information from OPTIM trip units.
Non-Volatile Memory
A PONI card can be easily fieldmounted to the back of the Breaker

Interface Module, enabling the unit
to pass the information from its
subnetwork to a remote master
control unit up to 10,000 ft (3048m)
away. No reprogramming of the unit
is required when the IPONI is added.
ii
Features and Functions
Complete initial system setup:

Select system frequency
(50/60 Hz)
Set password
Configure the system:

Change time-current set points
for Digitrip OPTIM breakers
Select protection options
Select alarm levels
Display information:
Breaker information
Time-current set points
Metered values
Trip event information
Test trip unit performance:
Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
Expanded energy monitoring:
Set addresses for group energy
monitoring
Group energy readings
Relay connection for alarm

condition, high load condition,
peak exceed for device or group,
and watthour pulse
Initiator
24 Vdc inputBIMII
120 or 240 Vac inputBIMPSII
DIP switches for selecting an
operating mode
Three-contact connector with
subnetwork
Connector for PONI card for remote
communications local display units

Power Requirement
15 VA maximum
Input Voltage
24 Vdc 5%BIMII
120 or 240 Vac 10%BIMPSII
0 to 70C (32 to 158F)
Humidity
5% to 95% R.H. (noncondensing)
Alarm Contact Ratings

10 A at 277 Vac (resistive)
10 A at 30 Vdc (resistive)
1/3 hp at 125, 250 Vac
Local and remote indication:

Remote indication/alarming
Breaker status LED indication
Expanded communications.
Communicate with:
OPTIM Trip Units
Digitrip RMS 810 and 910
Digitrip 1150, 1150+ and 520MC
IQ Energy Sentinels
IQ Power Sentinel
A total of 50 devices
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Password Protection
A user-defined password is included
for added security when changing
settings or performing breaker tests.
6.72 H x 10.25 W x 2.60 D

(170.7 H x 260.4 W x 66.0 D)
6.72 H x 10.25 W x 3.85 D
(170.7 H x 260.4 W x 97.8 D)
(with communications card)
Table 2.1-13. Catalog Information

Description
Catalog
Number
Breaker interface module

Breaker interface module
power supply
BIMII
BIMPSII
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.1-27
Sheet 02 033
Digital Input Module (DIM)
I/O Devices Digital Input

Module (DIM)
Standards and Certifications
UL 873
CE mark (48 Vdc operation)
FCC Part 15, Class A
IEC 1000-4-x
CISPR 22, Class A
IEC 1000-4-2; 1995, Electro Static
Discharge
IEC 1000-4-3; 1995, Radiated
RFImmunity.
IEC 1000-4-6; 1996, Conducted
RFImmunity
FCC Part 15 Class A (10 meters)
Radiated Emissions
CISPR 22, Class A (30 meters);
1991, Radiated Emissions
CISPR 22, Class A; 1991, Conducted
Emissions (PowerPort)
Digital Input Module (DIM)
50/60 Hz
ii
Power
85 to 138 Vac (120 Vac nominal)

50/60 Hz; 100 mA
48128 Vdc (48 Vdc nominal);
100 mA
Brownout operation at 50% and 80%
of nominal ac and dc ratings
Power input is provided from a
limited source, isolated from the
mains by double isolation
Power for all inputs is supplied
from an internal, isolated 24 Vdc
power source
Table 2.1-14. Specifications

Description
Rating
General Description
Operating temperature
20 to 60C
Eatons Digital Input Module is a

device that interfaces with up to four
standard utility (electric, gas, water)
meters or monitors eight digital
inputs. It translates KYZ pulses from
meters into a register count that is
maintained and compiled within the
DIM module in non-volatile memory.
The pulse count can be accessed from
the DIM module remotely using
Eatons Power Management Software
including the energy billing application.
Storage temperature
20 to 70C
Operating humidity
5 to 90% maximum
noncondensing
Altitude
10,000 ft (3048m)
Environment
Indoor use only
Transient overvoltage
Category 2
Pollution
Equipment
Class 1
The DIM can also be used to

monitor eight digital inputs from
switch closures.
Height: 4.25 inches (107.9 mm)
Width: 3.54 inches (90.0 mm)
Depth: 3.50 inches (88.9 mm)
(does include DIN rail)
10 LED status indicators, 100 ohm
termination DIP switch, address
selector switches
DIN rail mounting
Figure 2.1-16. KYZ Input Module
CA08104001E
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mounting Information
10
The DIM module is designed to be

DIN rail mountable. DIN rail must
be 1/3 inches H x 1-3/8 inches W
(8.5 mm H x 34.9 mm W).
11
Communications
12
The DIM is a fully compatible Power

Management Software communicating
device with built-in INCOM communications. The DIM comes complete with
a 3-pin connector to receive the
shielded twisted pair conductor.
Table 2.1-15. Ordering Information
Reads four separate KYZ equipped

utility meters
Pulse counts stored in non-volatile
memory
Each channel independently
monitors KYZ counts, pulse counts,
or digital indications
Monitors a maximum of eight
individual digital inputs
Input channels are isolated
Isolated 24 Vdc power is provided
on the I/O connector
LED indicators on the input channels
indicate when the unit is counting
All wiring must be complete as per

Instruction Leaflet TD17513, wiring
specification base rules.
Frequency Range
Description
Catalog
Number
Digital input module
DIM
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

January 2013
Sheet 02 034
Addressable Relay II
ii
1
2
3
The Addressable Relay II must be

updated every 10 seconds when the
communications watchdog is enabled
or else communications are assumed
to be lost. The communications watchdog is enabled when DIP switch 3
is set to the ON position. When the
communications watchdog is not
enabled, the relay will remain in the
state set by the last command issued.
See Figure 2.1-17 for DIP switch
configuration.

Monitored Parameters
Output relay energized/de-energized
Input relay 1 status
Input relay 2 status
Breaker status open/closed
Protective relay status normal/tripped
Communications
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
Catalog
Number
Addressable relay
ARII
Baud Rate
Relay Pulse
Communications Watchdog
OFF
9600
Disabled
Disabled
ON
1200
Enabled
Enabled
Figure 2.1-17. DIP Switch Functions

Power Bus
L1
L2
L3
The Addressable Relay II is a Form C

relay with output contact ratings as
shown in the specifications table. The
Addressable Relay II may be powered by
48120 Vac or 48125 Vdc through terminals 11 and 12 of the terminal block. dc
polarity is not significant. The operating
temperature range of the Addressable
Relay II is 0 to 70C.
Each Addressable Relay II includes
two status indicating circuits (IN1 and
IN2) that can be used to transmit the
contact status of devices external to
the Addressable Relay II. A typical
installation using these report-back
inputs to the Power Management
Software system is shown in the wiring
example. Terminals 4 and 5 connect to
the status input 1 circuit, and terminals
6 and 7 connect to the status input
2 circuit. These status indicating
circuits operate with input voltages
of 48120 Vac or 48125 Vdc circuits.
The Addressable Relay II includes a
feature called the communications
watchdog. The communications
watchdog monitors communications
between the Addressable Relay II and
the computer control station. If communications are lost, the communications watchdog will reset the relay
to the de-energized (OFF) state.
Built-in INCOM communications for

monitoring in a Power Management
Software system
Description
INCOM
Network
Cpt
FL
15
Eatons Addressable Relay II is

designed for use where information
or control of non-communicating
devices is required remotely. The
relays communicate INCOM Frequency
Shift Key (FSK) on the Power Management Software system. Devices are
assigned a 3-digit address to uniquely
identify them on the daisy-chained
twisted shielded pair network.
O O O
General Description
Enables remote control of noncommunication capable devices

on the Power Management
Software system
O 1 2 3
N
Monitors two digital status inputs

on the Power Management
Software system
M1
M2
M3
OL
OL
OL
T1
T2
T3
Hand
Communication and
Controlled Output Relay
OL
Off
1
Auto
2
OL
Breaker
Status
51
Trip
Input 1
6
8
9
11
Input 2
5
7
MA
INCOM
Communications
Power
12
Addressable Relay
Figure 2.1-18. Typical Addressable Relay II Wiring Diagram

Note: The Power Xpert Gateway does not support the Addressable Relay II.
CA08104001E
January 2013

Power Xpert Systems and Network System Expansion
2.2-1
Sheet 02 035
Power Xpert Ethernet

Switches
Table 2.2-1. Power Xpert Ethernet Switches

Description
Catalog
Number
4 port Ethernet switchcopper only

6 port Ethernet switchcopper only
PXES4P24V
PXES6P24V
6 port Ethernet switch5 copper/1 fiber (ST connector)

6 port Ethernet switch4 copper/2 fiber (ST connector)
PXES6P24V1ST
PXES6P24V2ST
General Description
Eatons Power Xpert Ethernet switches
are ideal for extending Ethernet
networks via CAT5 wiring or fiber
in harsh, industrial environments.
Built with high-grade components
and constructed using special thermal
techniques, PXE switches can withstand the unpredictable conditions
of such environments.
Features
Simultaneous, full-duplex, highspeed communication on all ports

no network performance bottlenecks
Hardened for factory floorideal
for both industrial or data center
applications
Unmanaged, plug-and-play
implementationno software or
additional hardware required for
configuration
Seamlessly integrates into Eatons
Power Xpert Architecturequality
and reliability of Eaton guaranteed
Mounting options include standalone panel-mounting, DIN rail
mounting, or 19-inch standard
rack mounting
PXE 6-Port Switch10/100 Mb with

Optional 100 Mb Fiber
This compact switch provides
six Ethernet ports, with flexible
configurations. The base models
have one of three options:
Two 100 Mb fiber and four 10/100
copper ports
One fiber and five copper ports
Six copper ports
PXE 4-Port Switch10/100 Mb

For smaller applications requiring
fewer connection points and no fiber,
the 4-port Power Xpert Ethernet switch
is a versatile option. It provides edge
access Ethernet ports in a convenient
and compact package.
CA08104001E
1
2
Table 2.2-2. Accessories
Convenient Network Expansion
ii
Description
Catalog
Number
Power supply (preferred)100240 Vac input

DIN rail mount with screw24 Vdc output terminals
ELC-PS02
Power supply (alternate)120 Vac input

Wall plug-in type with 6 ft. cord12 Vdc output
PXESPS12V
DIN rail mounting bracket
PXESDINRL
19-inch rack mount tray
PXESTRAY
Table 2.2-3. Operating Environment
3
4
5
Description
Specifications
Ambient temperature ratings
25 to 60C long-term per independent agency tests (UL),

or 40 to 85C short-term per IEC type tests
Storage temperature
40 to 185F (40C to 85C)
Cold start
to 20C
Ambient relative humidity
5%95% (noncondensing)
Altitude
200 to 50,000 ft (60 to 15,000m)
MTBF
> 15 years
8
9
Table 2.2-4. Network Standards
10
Description
Ethernet IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u; IEEE 802.1p, 100Base-TX, 10Base-T, 100Base-FX
Table 2.2-5. Agency Approvals and Standards Compliance
11
Description
UL listed (UL60950), cUL, CE, emissions meet FCC Part 15, Class A
Table 2.2-6. Power Consumption
12
13
Description
7.0 watts typical9 watts maximum
14
Table 2.2-7. Packaging

Description
Specifications
Enclosure
Robust sheet metal (steel)
Dimensions of PXES4P series

Weight of PXES4P series
3.50 in H x 3.00 in W x 1.00 in D (8.9 cm x 7.6 cm x 2.5 cm)

8.6 oz. (243g)
Dimensions of PXES6P series

Weight of PXES6P series
3.60 in H x 3.00 in W x 1.70 in D (9.2 cm x 7.6 cm x 4.3 cm)

13 oz. (370g)
Cooling method
Case used as a heat sink
Table 2.2-8. Mounting

Description
Specifications
Metal panel mounting clips

DIN rail mounting
19-inch rack mount
Included
Optional
Optional
15
Note: These specifications are subject to

change without notice and represent the
maximum capabilities of the product with
all options installed. This is not a complete
feature list. Features and functionality may
vary depending on selected options and
product model. Please refer to the technical
data sheet and user manual for detailed
specifications. Please see www.eaton.com/
powerxpert for latest information.
16
17
18
19
20
21

2.2-2
January 2013
Sheet 02 036
Application Information
i
ii
1
Copper Ethernet Cable

Wiring Guidelines
The following information can be used
as a guide when designing an Ethernet
system using copper Ethernet cable.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Cables should not be routed near

equipment that generates strong
electric or magnetic fields such
as motors, drive controllers, arc
welders and conduit
Ethernet cable insulation has a
voltage rating of 300 Vac. Use of
barriers, cable trays or high voltage
sheathing with STP Ethernet cable
may be required in installations with
cables carrying voltages greater
than 300 Vac. This may also be
necessary in order to comply with
UL requirements. In installations
where the cable cannot be physically
separated from the power cables
(where a physical barrier is not
practical) fiber optic cable should
be used
When crossing power conductors
with Ethernet cable, cross at right
angles
Shielded twisted pair (STP) Ethernet
cable should be specified for use in
high noise environments. Shielded
shrouded connectors must be used
and the shield must be connected at
both ends of the wire. The mating
plug must have a shielded shroud
that is terminated to ground at both
ends. Where there is a possibility of
a difference in ground potential
(common mode) voltages between
the two terminated ends, fiber optic
cable is recommended
When using conduit or a metal
cable tray, each section of the
conduit or tray must be bonded
to each adjacent section and the
conduit or tray needs to be bonded
to earth ground. Do not allow the
shields to touch the conduit or metal
tray at any point
Only shielded (STP) Ethernet cables
should be placed into metal conduit.
Some UTP cables may not function
properly when installed in conduit,
as the metal conduit can affect the
electrical properties of an unshielded
cable. Consult the cable manufacturer when installing UTP cables
in conduit
As a general rule for noise protection, Ethernet Cable should maintain
a minimum distance of 3 inches
(8 cm) from electric power conductors for up to 100V and 1 inch
(3 cm) for each additional 100V up to
400V. STP cable is recommended
For Ethernet cable run within

conduit but near conductors with
potentially noisy power conductors
carrying currents of greater than
20A or voltages greater than 400V,
maintain the following distances.
STP cable is required
Conductors of less than
20A = 3 inches
Conductors of 20A or more
and up to 100 kVA = 6 inches
Conductors greater than
100 kVA = 12 inches
For Ethernet cable run near
conductors with potentially noisy
power conductors carrying currents
of greater than 20A or voltages
greater than 400V, maintain the
following distances. STP cable is
recommended
Conductors of less than
20A = 6 inches
Conductors of 20 A or more
and up to 100 kVA = 12 inches
Conductors greater than
100 kVA = 24 inches
Route Ethernet cable at least 5 ft
(1.5m) from sources of rf/microwave
radiation. STP cable is required
Do not cascade more than four
Ethernet repeaters (router, switch or
hub) within a network segment
Environmentally sealed connectors
should be specified for cables used
in outdoor installations
Avoid pinching the cable when using
cable ties
Total distance between an Ethernet
transmitter and receiver at the end
points of the network should not
exceed 328 ft (100m)
Total distance from a patch panel to
a wall jack (using solid cable) shall
not exceed 295 ft (90m). Splices are
not permitted
Patch cords used as cross-connect
jumpers in a patch panel should not
exceed 20 ft (6m)
Patch cords from a wall jack to the
work area PC (or device) shall not
exceed 16 ft (5m)
Ethernet cable used in harsh
environments must be selected to
withstand the following conditions:
vibration, air born contaminants,
chemicals, temperature, electromagnetic interference, combustible
atmospheres and local regulatory
standards such as UL and NEMA
Ethernet connectors used in harsh

environments must be robust
enough to withstand vibration,
multiple connection cycles, temperature changes, and provide a proper
seal to protect against moisture,
dust/dirt and chemical attack
Different cable media support different bandwidth capabilities. When
installing cable in a network, care
should be taken to install the cable
that will fill current network loading
requirements and future expansion
needs. In general, fiber optic cable
can support the greatest bandwidth
(upward of 25,000 gigabits) and UTP
has the lowest. CAT5e cabling
is designed to operate a bit rates up
to 1000 Mb and CAT6 cable up to
2000 Mb
Operating your cable at maximum
speed reduces the distance between
network segments. Check with your
cable supplier for specifications
regarding segment distance vs.
speed
Cable with 5% impedance mismatch
or return loss of 27 to 32 dB is
recommended. Ethernet cable
impedance can vary by as much
as 15% (85 to 115 ohms). Average
Ethernet cable with 15% impedance
variation can have up to 10 dB additional return loss. This discontinuity
is referred to as return loss, since
it causes some of the signal to be
reflected back down the cable
instead of propagating forward. It
is measured in decibels or ratio of
transmitted versus reflected signal
Fiber Optic Technology

The use of fiber optics in telecommunications and wide area networking
has been common for many years,
but more recently fiber optics have
become increasingly prevalent in
industrial data communications systems as well. High data rate capabilities, noise rejection and electrical
isolation are just a few of the important characteristics that make fiber
optic technology ideal for use in
industrial and commercial systems.
Although often used for point-to-point
connections, fiber optic links are being
used to extend the distance limitations
of RS-232, RS-422/485 and Ethernet
systems while ensuring high data
rates and minimizing electrical
interference.
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.2-3
Sheet 02 037
Conventional electrical data signals
are converted into a modulated light
beam, introduced into the fiber and
transported via a very small diameter
glass or plastic fiber to a receiver that
converts the light back into electrical
signals.
Optical fibers allow data signals to
propagate through them by ensuring
that the light signal enters the fiber at
an angle greater than the critical angle
of the interface between two types of
glass. Optical fiber is actually made
up of three parts. The center core is
composed of very pure glass. Core
dimensions are usually in the range
of 50125 um for multi-mode cables
and 89 um for single-mode cables.
The surrounding glass, called cladding, is a slightly less pure glass.
The diameter of the core and cladding
together is in the range of 125440 um.
Fiber Optic Cable

Wiring Guidelines
The following information can be used

as a guide when designing an Ethernet
system using fiber optic Ethernet
cable:
Surrounding the cladding is a protective layer of flexible silicone called

the sheath.
Select a fiber cable that is suited for

the application, e.g., outdoor, aerial,
duct, intra-building, risers, general
building and plenum applications
Fiber optic cable is useful in
applications where the environment
is combustible, electrically noisy,
the cable must be bundles with high
voltage wires or where common
mode voltages may exist between
the earth ground points of the
terminating connectors
Fiber optic cable is available in
various operating temperature
ranges. Care should be taken to
match the temperature rating of
the fiber to the environment it will
be exposed to. The temperature
specification for fiber may be
narrower than copper cable. Consult
the cable manufacturer for temperature specifications of your cable type
Sealed fiber connectors are available
for use in harsh environments to
prevent contamination from entering the connector and fiber. The type
of seal required will be application
dependant and can vary from dustand moisture-proof to water-tight
Mixing fiber cable types is not
permitted. The same core
dimensions and mode must be
used within cable segments
Care should be taken when

purchasing connectors to include
strain relief, which reduces
mechanical strain (vibration) within
the cable, as well as the connector.
Strain relief also provides support
to the cable to ensure proper bend
radius at the connector
Single-mode fiber is used for
long distance transmission of
up to 120 km. Distance may vary
depending on speed and type of
converter used
Multi-mode graded-index fiber cable
is used for communication over
shorter distances of up to 2 km
Fiber cable is composed of glass
and is not well suited for applications requiring tight bend radiuses.
Cable radius dimensions vary per
manufacturer. If the manufacturer
does not provide a bend radius, a
typical rule of thumb is a radius not
less than 15x the cable diameter
Fiber cable to connector terminations can be performed in the field
using special equipment. This
method is not recommended
Tier One testing is recommended
when diagnosing system irregularities and should be performed
in all new installations
Tier Two testing is recommended
to certify that a system complies
with standards set forth by the
owner/installer
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
2.2-4

January 2013
Sheet 02 038
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.3-1
Sheet 02 039
Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card
Power Xpert Gateway

PDP CardPower
Distribution Unit
Features
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway Power
Distribution Products Card (PXGX
PDP) provides Web-enabled, real-time
monitoring of Powerware Power
Distribution Units (PDUs), Rack Power
Modules (RPM) and Powerware
Remote Power Panels (RPPs) through
standard on-board Web pages, Power
Xpert Software or third-party software.
An integral part of the Power Xpert
Architecture, which provides end-toend PowerChain solutions, the
PXGXPDP provides a central point to
connect distribution products to an
Ethernet network.
Information is presented in organized,

user-friendly Web pages and include
the following:
PDU system identification

Graphic panel layouts
Voltage
Current
Frequency
Energy
Power
THD (current and voltage)
Web-enabled monitoring of power

quality data down to the branch
circuit leveldata can be viewed
from any location with a Web
browser
Configure and edit the EMS
remotely via the Web interface
supports remote configuration,
including naming, alarm and
warning set points, and percentages
Data and event logging with time
stampaccurate logging for power
quality analysis
Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP support
open communication protocol
facilitates integration with standard
building management systems and
network management systems
Customized e-mail messaging for
events notification, including data
and event logs and periodic heartbeat e-mailsdirect alarm and
event notification to the appropriate
person(s) in the organization
Easy integration into existing
Ethernet infrastructureminimize
installation cost
Securely access and view informationpassword authentication is
required at two levels. The card
also supports secure Web-based
communication via SSL
Generate Modbus register maps on
the flyall of the data specific to the
system is immediately available and
can be generated with one click of
the mouse
Save and Restore settings
Configuring a large PDU with EMS
can take time. Once the effort is
complete, the configuration can be
saved for later use. It also allows the
user to duplicate panel identical
configurations in minimal time
Supports the environmental
monitoring probetemperature,
humidity and contact status can
be viewed though the Web page
i
ii
1
2
PDU or RPP System Summary Page
3
4
5
6
7
8
PDU or RPP Panel Page
9
10
11
12
13
EMP Page
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
2.3-2

January 2013
Sheet 02 040
i
ii
1
2
3
4

Table 2.3-1. The Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card Kit
Local configuration Cable
Quick Start guide
Ordering Information
Catalog number
Style number
Description
PXGXPDP
103008064-5591
Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card for use with Powerware PDUs/RPPs/RPMs/PDRs/EMS-UGK
Devices Supported
Eaton Power Distribution Units with X-Slot compatibility
Eaton Remote Power Panels with X-Slot compatibility
Eaton Rack Power Modules with X-Slot compatibility
Eaton Power Distribution Rack with X-Slot compatibility
Eaton Energy Management System with X-Slot compatibility
Communication Ports
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Ethernet ports
Serial ports
Two RJ-45 ports: supports 10/100Base-T for daisy chaining via integrated Ethernet switch
One USB port: supports local configuration and one RJ485 for optional connection to an Environmental
Monitoring Probe (EMP)
Communication Protocols Supported

Web server
Modbus TCP/IP
SNMP
SMTP
NTP
DHCP
BACNET IP
Supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP and HTTPS)

Supports data access from Modbus TCP clients
Supports common network management tools
Supports e-mail notification
Supports time synchronization via an NTP server for card and PDU synchronization
Supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled
Supports data access from BACnet/IP clients
Supported MIBs
Eaton PDU MIB
Eaton EMP MIB
Eaton alarms and traps MIB
RFC 4133 entity MIB
RFC 4268 entity state MIB
RFC 4268 entity state MIB Part II
RFC 1213 MIB II
Web Browsers Supported
12
13
14
15
16
IE, 7 and 8
Mozilla Firefox, 2.0 and higher
Google Chrome
Dimensions
Weight
12 cm x 11.4 cm x 3.9 cm (4.70 in x 4.50 in x 1.50 in)

200g (7.0 oz)
Environmental Specifications
Ambient operating
Relative humidity
Altitude
Enclosure rating
0 to +40C (32 to 104F)

10 to 80%, noncondensing
10,000 ft
Indoor use only
Mounting Configuration
X-Slot form factor fits directly into PDU/RPP/RPM chassis/PDR/EMS-UGK
17
18
Power Supply
Nominal input voltage
Input voltage range
12 Vdc, unregulated (provided by PDU/RPP)

825 Vdc, unregulated
Power Consumption
3.5 watts
Regulatory/Standards Compliance
19
20
21

CISPR 22, Class A
ROHS Compliant
Telecom conducted via EU standard
EN 55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003, Class A/EN55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003
Note: Features and specifications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of
the software and products with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on
selected options.
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.3-3
Sheet 02 041
Power Xpert Gateway Series 2000 Card
Power Xpert Gateway UPS

CardUninterruptible
Power Supplies
Features
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card
(PXGX UPS) provides Web-enabled,
real-time monitoring of Powerware
Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
through standard on-board Web
pages, Power Xpert Software or thirdparty software.
An integral part of the Power Xpert
Architecture, which provides end-toend PowerChain solutions, the PXGX
UPS provides a central point to
connect distribution products to an
Ethernet network.
Information is presented in organized,
user-friendly Web pages and include
the following:
UPS system identification

Voltage
Current
Frequency
Energy
Output Power
Powerfull load %
Battery information
History and maintenance
Run time remaining
Voltage
% battery left
Web-enabled monitoring of power

quality datadata can be viewed
from any location with a Web
browser
Data, event and system logging with
time stampaccurate logging for
power quality analysis
Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP
supportopen communication
protocol facilitates integration with
standard building management
systems and network management
systems
Intelligent e-mail communications
two options for alarm and event
e-mail notification, individual
e-mails for each alarm or event, or
collective notification, providing the
same information with a drastically
reduced number of e-mails
Easy integration into existing
Ethernet infrastructureminimize
installation cost
Securely access and view informationpassword authentication is
required at two levels. The card also
supports secure Web-based
communication via SSL
Generate Modbus register maps on
the flyall of the data specific to the
UPS is immediately available and
can be generated with one click of
the mouse
Save and Restore settingsonce the
configuration effort is complete, it
can be saved for later use
Supports the environmental
monitoring probetemperature,
humidity and contact status can be
viewed through the Web page
Two independent, redundant
Ethernet portsdesigned to
support high reliability systems
i
ii
1
2
UPS Summary Page
3
4
5
6
7
8
Alarm Summary Page
9
10
11
12
13
NetWatch Configuration Page
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

2.3-4
January 2013
Sheet 02 042
i
ii

Table 2.3-2. The Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card Kit
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card
Local configuration cable
Quick start guide
1
2
Catalog number
PXGXUPS
Style number
103007974-5591
Description
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card for use with Powerware UPSs
Devices Supported
3
4
Eaton uninterruptible power supplies with X-Slot compatibility; these include the Eaton 9155, 9315, 9355, 9330, 9390, 9395, BladeUPS
Communication Ports
Ethernet ports
Two RJ-45 ports: supports 10/100Base-T for daisy-chaining
Serial ports
One USB port: supports local configuration and one RJ485 for optional connection to an Environmental Monitoring Probe (EMP)
5
6
7
8
Web server
Supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP and HTTPS)
Modbus TCP/IP
Supports data access from Modbus TCP clients
SNMP
Supports common network management tools
SMTP
Supports e-mail notification
NTP
Supports time synchronization via an NTP server for card and UPS synchronization
DHCP
Supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled
BACnet/IP
Supports data access from BACnet/IP
IP v4 and v6
IP v4 and v6 compatibility
Supported MIBs
Eaton Power MIB
RFC 1628 UPS MIB

Eaton EMP MIB
Eaton alarms and traps MIB
10
11
RFC 4133 entity MIB

RFC 4268 entity State MIB; RFC 4268 entity state MIB Part 2
RFC 1213 MIB II
Web Browsers Supported

IE, 7 and 8
12
Mozilla Firefox, 2.0 and higher

Google Chrome
13
14
15
16
Dimensions
12 cm x 11.4 cm x 3.9 cm (4.70 in x 4.50 in x 1.50 in)
Weight
200g (7.0 oz)
Ambient operating
Relative humidity
Altitude
Enclosure rating
0 to +40C (32 to 104F)

10 to 80%, noncondensing
10,000 ft
Indoor use only
Mounting Configuration
X-Slot form factor fits directly into UPS chassis
Power Supply
17
Nominal input voltage

Input voltage range
12 Vdc, unregulated (provided by UPS)

825 Vdc, unregulated
Power Consumption
18
19
20
21
3.5 watts
Regulatory/Standards Compliance
CISPR 22, Class A
ROHS Compliant
Telecom conducted
via EU standard
EN 55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003, Class A/EN55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003
Note: Features and specifications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of
the software and products with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on
selected options.
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-1
Sheet 02043

General Description
Power Xpert Software aggregates
the information arriving from different
types of device families via various
communication methods. Its unique
Web-based design, alarm bubble-up
and advanced trend and waveform
analysis tools help you to quickly turn
your attention to the most important
events and to identify reliability issues
and cost-saving opportunities. The
standard custom graphic package, the
Layout Manager, with an icon library
and standard vertical templates,
allows you to import and mimic your
physical environment and gauges.
Open protocol support makes Power
Xpert Software compatible with
most newer generation third-party
equipment. Older legacy, proprietary
protocols are supported by Power
Xpert Gateways (see Page 2.1-1),
and custom software drop-in drivers
made available by Eaton. Power Xpert
Software is the first power system
software of this caliber to put all these
powerful features at your fingertips.
Key Features
Connects to your existing network

Data trending and graphing for
detailed information for troubleshooting, problem prevention and
costs savings
Web-based views that allow access
to critical information from any
location via a Web browser
A modular, scalable architecture that
allows the addition of capabilities
and devices as the power system
expands
Alarm conditions bubble up through
the system to allow personnel to
identify which device is in alarm
and where it is located
All the functionality of Eatons
PowerNet software suite
Connectivity to a wide range of
Eaton and third-party devices. For a
full list of compatible devices, refer
to the hardware compatibility list
found at www.eaton.com/pxs
i
ii
1
2
Power Xpert Software Layout Manager
The Power Xpert Software Layout

Manager module provides the user a
library of powerful design tools and
standard templates for the creation
of custom HumanMachine Interface
(HMI) graphical layouts. Objects can
be easily animated, various gauges
can be selected, and custom bitmaps
can be imported with little effort.

Professional Edition

Enterprise Edition
Product Selection Guide
Server module
Trend viewer module
Geared toward end users, with

built-in support for Eaton power
distribution products such as
switchgear, UPSs, breakers, PDUs,
RPPs, meters, relays, VFDs and
MCCs, among others
Eaton products connect with the
software directly via an Ethernet
connection, while legacy devices
use a Power Xpert Gateway to
Web-enable their communications
A subset of third-party meters and
devices are supported as standard
via the gateway connection
Layout manager module
Quality manager module
Eaton device support (switchgear, UPSs, breakers,

ePDUs, meters, relays, VDFs, MCCs, etc.)
Power Xpert Gateway third-party device support
4
5
6
7
Table 2.4-1. Power Xpert Software Edition Features

Feature Sets
SNMP connector
Modbus connector
Optional third-party driver support
Custom third-party device driver support
Note: For complete listing of Foreseer class hardware compatibility, visit the Foreseer Web site
at www.eaton.com/foreseer.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Geared toward advanced power
users, system integrators and
enterprises with heterogeneous
device spectrum and system
developers who can take advantage
of the included SNMP and Modbus
integration development utilities
Extensive support for third-party
devices via standard SNMP and
Modbus TCP protocols
Large variety of ready made,
optional third-party drop in
drivers available
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
2.4-2
January 2013
Sheet 02 044
Table 2.4-2. Power Xpert Software General Features

Features
General
ii
1
2
3
Web browser user interface

Web-based monitoring capabilities
Downloadable software version updates
Event Notification
Event notification via e-mail notification
Event Notification via pagers, text message or third-party interfaces
Alarm state management
Event indicator displayed without Web page active
Alarm/event searching and filtering
Waveform attached to applicable power event
Web browser based waveform viewing
Alarm capabilities based on device driven events
Analysis and Trending
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Graphic trend viewer

Chart or data option selection
Multiple trends display
Multiple axis support
View multiple variables (i.e., Ia, Ib, Ic, Vab, Vbc, etc.) for a single waveform
Standard COMTRADE file format support
Customizable trend viewer look and feel
Fixed or custom time frames
Trend analysis capabilities
Data export
Custom Graphics and Layouts

Custom graphics development via Web browser
Four user view example templates included as standard
iFrame capability
Browser portal widget support
Streaming media support
Graphic object library included as standard
ISO standard electrical picture objects available
Graphic files import capability
Graphic object animation capability
Gauge object library support
External Web Links support
Alarm bubble-up support through several page layers
Trend object support
UPS Shutdown
12
13
14
File saving during shutdown

Automatic, orderly and sequential shutdown
Parallel redundant UPS shutdown capability
Security and Administration

Windows authentication security
Two tier secure system access support
SSL
Secure Web browser access (support for HTTPS)
Time Synchronization
Time synchronization support for connected devices with 1 millisecond time resolution
15
Export and Integration

Extended Excel spreadsheet support
SQL database query support
16
Logs
System log
Error log
17
Service
Eaton help desk services (1-877-ETN-CARE)
Turnkey startup service
18
System Backup
Power Xpert Software system backup
19
20
Documentation and Training Videos

System Administrators Guide
Power Xpert Software Users Guide
Layout Manager Guide
Quick Start Guide
Power Xpert Software introduction and training video
Power Xpert Reporting introduction and training video
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-3
Sheet 02045
Analyzing Power Quality
Managing Energy Costs
Electrical power quality is becoming

ever more important with the
continuing increase of nonlinear
loads in industrial and commercial
facilities. Voltage or frequency
variances can disrupt many industrial
processes, resulting in costly downtime and equipment losses. Power
Xpert Software provides historical
profiles, or records of events for
internal and utility verification, as well
as real-time information that allows
the user to isolate the source, magnitude, time and direction of power quality problems, including the following:
Energy management is essential for

an industrial or commercial facility.
Electricity costs account for between 10
and 30% of total facility operating costs.
Despite being often considered overhead, energy costs are manageable.
Voltage Disturbances
The most common power quality
problem, voltage sags and swells,
occurs because of utility supply
variations, system faults or the
concurrent starting of large
motor loads
Harmonics
Harmonic distortion appears on
the distribution system because of
variable frequency drives and other
non-sinusoidal loads where AC/DC
conversion is present (UPS systems,
computer power supplies, etc.)
Power Factor
The ability to monitor power factor
throughout the facility ensures
delivery of power at optimal
efficiency, allows 100% usage of
transformers and prevents costly
power factor penalties
Manage When Energy is Used

Manage your energy costs by
accurately measuring and quantifying
energy patterns and usage within
the facility.
Track Use Patterns
Efficiently schedule processes
during non-peak usage times by
being able to identify where and
when energy is being consumed.
Verify the effectiveness of energy
reduction methods
Purchase Energy
Make informed energy purchasing
decisions by comparing how the
rate structures offered by various
suppliers impact your bottom-line

Computer Server
Allocate Energy Costs

Establish accountability and enable
incentives for energy conservation
by accurately allocating usage and
costs to each process or department
Verify Energy Bill
Confirm the accuracy of your energy
bill using the detailed data supplied
by Power Xpert Software
ii
Track and Schedule Maintenance
Coordination problems can be

identified by overlaying coordination
curves of active devices identifying
problems before an unnecessary
outage occurs. Maintenance schedules
can be created on real-time mechanical
and electrical equipment usage
avoiding unnecessary preventive
maintenance. Equipment benefiting
from usage-based maintenance can
have maintenance alarms initiated
based on equipment lifetime
deteriorators rather than simply
time schedules.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Web Browser
or Client
12
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 2.4-1. Typical Power Xpert Software System
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
2.4-4

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 046
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Problem Avoidance and

Troubleshooting
Operators receive alerts to potential
problems before they occur, such as
a breaker timing out to trip. Loads
can be shed or switched to alternate
sources to prevent critical upstream
breakers from unnecessarily tripping
on an overload condition. Crucial
electrical distribution information is
instantaneously available to identify
which breaker has tripped along with
the cause and magnitude of the
problem. Event sequence information
narrows the list of possible causes to
a trip. Immediate identification of
problems can shorten downtime
from hours to minutes saving
production losses.
Power Xpert
Software Modules
Power Xpert Software GUI
Views/Templates
Each device category has its own

template presenting pertinent
information and metrics that are
customized for that device type (UPS,
PDU, meter, VDF, MCC and the like).
You will be able to review a short list of
the latest events time-stamped to the
millisecond, the picture of the device,
and its model information including
name, location, contact and serial
number. At any point, you can create
a custom user view of any device with
various gauges, custom icons and
imported graphics that change color
(greenyellowred) depending on
event status.
Power Xpert Software Graphic View
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Increased Productivity
Increased productivity by eliminating
the need for time-consuming data
collection. Personnel are freed to
perform actual maintenance functions
that keep facilities operating. Historical
archive records and software tools
provide simple-to-use tools for collecting energy data for internal and tenant
energy billing without manual meter
reading or monthly bill calculating.
Load profiles are immediately available for analysis when considering
expansion. Spare capacity on existing
feeders can be identified through
historical load profiling avoiding trips
due to seasonal peaks. Correct determination of transformer spare capacity
can help avoid unnecessary substation
purchases. Double-ended substations
designed for redundancy can have
their ability to carry loads through a
single transformers outage verified.
The Power Xpert Software Graphic

View device template provides a
standard layout for displaying Eaton
device-specific measurements and
data. Graphic templates are built
into the software for standard Eaton
devices. Viewing the most vital
parameters along with self-explaining
legends and one-line diagrams is
available at a glance. Device-specific
information is gathered at the bottom
of the screen, including a product
picture, location, system contact,
maintenance schedule and asset
serial number.
14
Power Xpert Software List View
The Power Xpert Software List View

device template is provided as a
standard layout for all devices,
including third-party systems. The
List View is available for any device
integrated into Power Xpert Software,
including third-party products.
Typically it arranges product attributes
into logical categories and displays
them in a spreadsheet format, including continuously updated values and
field labels. The List View presents all
measurements and data in a spreadsheet format that can be easily viewed
and acted upon.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-5
Sheet 02 047
Layout Manager
Trend Viewer
Layout Manager lets you model actual

physical representations in a virtual
replica of your real-world power system.
Build complete power system

diagrams
Large library of symbols and icons
Create building groups that
mirror your physical facilities or
organization structure
Create drill-down Web pages and
folder structure to display your data
the way you want to see it
Alarm bubble-up ensures alarm
events to raise to the top level
through the folder structure
ii
1
2
Hospital/Campus User View Examples
3
Trend Viewer
Industry-Specific Templates
Switchgear One-Line Layout Manager
Plant Floor Example User View
Power Xpert Software has sample

graphic layout templates that you
can use and modify for various
applications and environments. At
Eaton, we understand that mimicking
the real world is often the best way of
keeping your system easy to use and
simple to monitor. Included sample
templates consist of a typical plant
industrial layout, data center, hospital
(health care) environment and a
generic geographical layout application. All of the templates have typical
devices integrated into them and, with
the included Layout Manager utility,
you can customize them to fit your
unique needs.
Data Center
The Trend Viewer gives quick insight

into understanding power system
device measurement trends. Preventing system overloads, planning future
capacity and preventing expensive
downtime can be achieved with this
tool. The Power Xpert Software Trend
Viewer offers a multitude of sophisticated trending capabilities. Viewable
charts are quickly plotted with
Microsofts SilverLight technology.
Device measurement attributes
and other parameters can be easily
selected from either the List View or
the Custom User View. Trend graphs
can be presented in various chart
formats one at a time, or you can
view multiple charts at the same time.
Single and multiple trends can be
shown at the same time using fixed
or custom time frames. Results can
be easily exported to a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
2.4-6
January 2013
Sheet 02 048
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Quality Manager
The standard Quality Manager,
invoked directly from the event log,
provides a tool for detailed waveform
analysis. Determining and comparing
waveform signatures provides a
wealth of information on electrical
phenomena, allowing you to take
necessary protective action to prevent
or protect against further occurrences.
Quality Manager allows you to zoom
in and out of waveforms, to sample
individual parts of a waveform in
great detail, and to provide accurate
measurement information per points
of sampling versus time scaleall the
way up to the millisecond time resolution. In addition, this module can open
third-party and individual COMTRADE
standard files for examination.
Spot trends faster with easy-to-read
graphical displays of real-time
information
Monitor for voltage disturbances,
voltage variances, and more
Analyze complex waveforms
See trends for historical data
Installation with
Deployment Utility
Power Xpert Modbus

TCP/IP Connector
All key setup requirements are

automatically validated. If any of
the prerequisites are not met or are
incorrectly configured, the deployment
utility will alert you to resolve the
situation. The best part of using the
deployment utility is that it has a
button you can click to fix the
discovered problem.
Connects to and retrieves data

from devices using Modbus
TCP/IP protocol
Modbus connector provides
interfaces to devices from many
non-Eaton manufacturers that
communicate via industry-standard
Modbus TCP/IP
Requires user configuration and
installation of the tool
Note: Available with Enterprise edition.
Power Xpert SNMP Connector
Easy Installation with Deployment Utility
Connects to and retrieves data from

devices using SNMP protocol
SNMP connector provides
interfaces to non-Eaton devices that
communicate via SNMP protocol
Industry-standard SNMP support
Flexible compiler to process
MIB files
Requires user configuration and
installation of the tool
Note: Available with Enterprise edition.
9
10
11
12
13
Waveform Analysis Quality Manager
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-7
Sheet 02049
Integrated PowerNet Support

PowerNet (available on the Power
Xpert Software DVD)
General Description
The features of Eatons PowerNet
software suite are available as a
standard part of Power Xpert
Software. PowerNet is a family of
software applications, client/ server
configuration, that help provide a
window into an electrical distribution
system. Existing PowerNet systems
can be easily integrated with Power
Xpert Software.
PowerNet Features
Connectivity bundle
Communication to 1000 INCOM
devices
Auto learn of all INCOM
connected devices for
maximum usability
Security configuration
Trending/logging configurations
Device set point editing/printing/
viewing
MSDE/SQL data storage
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
server
OLE for Process Control (OPC)
server
Modbus RTU Gateway to
data from Eaton INCOM
communicating devices
Power quality bundle

Viewing of captured waveforms
Up to eight cycles of actual
waveform
Zoomed-in view of high-speed
waveform samples
Spectrum chart showing
frequency content and
magnitude (Fourier analysis)
CBEMA/ITIC representation
of events
Top down access to specific
Waveform events from event
lists and CBEMA/ITIC curves
Trip curve display for coordination and selectivity needs
Log-log coordination curve
plottedon-screen for trip units
and motor protective relays with
the click of a button
Online modification of trip curve
pickups and time delays; instant
verification of coordination with
an updated trip curve
Automatic scale adjustment

based on device pickup level
Addition or removal of trip curves
directly from the display screen
Color-coded curves tied to the
device description for added
clarity
Overlay multiple curves
View motor start profiles next to
motor protection relay trip curve
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PowerNet Digitrip Screen Viewed

in Power Xpert Software
Table 2.4-3. PowerNet WaveformCaptured Waveforms

Captured
Waveform
Eaton Device
IQ
Analyzer
Digitrip
910
1150
OPTIM 1050
MPCV
Relay
10
Currents
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Ground
11
12
Voltages
Line-Line
Line-Neutral
Ground-Neutral
Transformer
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
2.4-8
January 2013
Sheet 02 050
Power Xpert Reporting Software
ii
Foreseer
Software
(one or more
instances)
2
3
4CR Data
Acquisition
Engine
7
8
10
Device
Aggregators
(PowerNet,
Gateways)
Capacity Summary Report: The

summary of top- and bottom-loaded
circuits, as well as loading details
for each circuit according to userdefined date/time range and facility
hierarchy location
Power Xpert
Devices
(Meters,
Gateways,
Other)
Figure 2.4-2. Power Xpert Reporting

Architectural Overview
Greenhouse Gas Report
Utilities Report: Captures

consumption of water, air, gas,
electricity and steam (WAGES)
Power Xpert Reporting brings the

power system information together
to compare and contrast. Power Xpert
Reporting provides a standard set
of reports, including:
Greenhouse Gas Report: Captures

the six offensive greenhouse gasses:
carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide,
nitrogen oxide, mercury, methane
and nitrous oxide broken down by
selected locations within a facility
Power Xpert
Software
(one or more
instances)
Third-Party Devices, Non-Power Xpert Devices
5
6
Data Center Efficiency Report:

A summary of data center
infrastructure efficiency and power
usage effectiveness, including such
information as temperature and
humidity, and energy consumption
11
12
13
Capacity Summary Report

Utilities Report
14
15
16
17
Data Center Efficiency Report
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-9
Sheet 02 051
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report:

Determine branch circuit loading
levels at a glance with color-coded
graphics indicating loading status
against capacity. Redundant sources
can be reviewed, as well as single
source loads
Energy Summary Report: The

summary of consumption (kWh)
and demand (kW) for a userdefined date/time range and
facility hierarchy location
Power Quality Report: The

distribution and trend for amps,
volts and THD according to userdefined date/time ranges and
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Energy Summary Report
Energy Cost Allocation Report: The

total energy bill dollar value or a cost
per kWh across a facility hierarchy
for a user-defined date/time range
11
12
13
Power Quality Report
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report
14
15
Energy Cost Allocation Report
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
2.4-10 Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 052
ii
Event Summary Report: Provides a

Pareto chart of events according to
user-defined date/time ranges and
Startup Service Packs Include

the Following Services
Startup scope determination

Eaton services will help you evaluate
your service needs and check that
the service pack you have selected
has appropriate coverage for your
circumstances
Pre-installation checkup
Eaton services will contact you to
go through the pre-installation
checklist, which ensures efficient,
prime quality installation and
configuration services
Available Power Xpert Startup

Service Packs
All services are performed by

authorized Eaton Electrical Services
& Systems group personnel.
Event Summary Report
Joint Commission Report: Standard

Joint Commission Compliant Report
supports hospital power test
requirements. It checks events, key
metrics of generators and automatic
transfer switches (ATS) during
generator testing at user-defined
date/time ranges and facility
hierarchy location
Table 2.4-4. Selecting the Appropriate Service Pack

Startup Service Product
Number of Eaton Devices to be Integrated

<15
10
Power Xpert 1 Day
11
1530
Power Xpert 5 Day

Customer Fixed Price Quote

3175
>75
Non-Eaton
Devices
Power Xpert 2 Day
12
Installation and configuration

Eaton services will install Power
Xpert Software and configure it
for operation with your equipment
according to startup scope
determination. Configuration
may also include creating custom
graphic layouts if necessary
and required
System test
Eaton services will test the Power
Xpert Software for operability and
will validate communications with
key components
Optional hands-on training
If required, Eaton services can
provide hands-on training for
Power Xpert Software, using the
software on-site or using simulated
demo systems
At Eaton, we want to make it as easy

and non-disruptive as possible to
implement our Power Xpert products.
Eaton offers several startup service
packs from partial help to full turnkey
solution implementation.
Service Offerings
Available and valid in continental United States only.

Typical number of Eaton devices that can be configured in the Power Xpert Software during the
course of the selected Startup Service Pack.
We strongly recommend a review of the latest Hardware Capability List at www.eaton.com/pxs.
Please call the Technical Resource Center for custom Startup Service at 800-809-2772, option 4, 1
for a price quote.
13
14
Note: The number of devices that can be configured during the course of a selected Start
Pack can vary depending on the devices installation readiness levels. Maximum numbers
indicated require full configuration readiness levels defined in the Power Xpert Startup
Services Checklist document in the services brochure at www.eaton.com/pxs.
15
16
17
Joint Commission Report
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-11
Sheet 02 053

Table 2.4-5. Technical Specifications
Power Xpert Startup

Service Pack Guidelines
Description
1 day
8 hrs, on-site, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m.
2 day
16 hrs, on-site, two consecutive days, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m.
5 day
5-day 40 hrs, on-site, five consecutive days, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m.
Additional services
Can be purchased at Eaton prevailing time and service time material rates or fixed price quote can be provided.
Call 1-800-809-2772 option 4, 1.
After hours service
If required during night shift or weekend, additional service costs will apply and a purchase order must be received
for the premium time prior to scheduling the service.
Customer
required training
Any required safety training will be charged at the required training service hours purchased. Any expenses required
or safety training (i.e., drug testing payments) will be an extra charge.
ii
Customer Requirements
IP addresses
IP addresses are required for the serving computer, certain communicating devices and certain device interfaces. Static IP
addresses including subnet mask and default gateway must be provided prior to scheduling service.
Connections
The system must be fully wired and connected prior to commencing service. This includes any network drops for any
TCP/IP devices and actual device wiring (i.e., INCOM or Modbus networks).
Device compatibility
We strongly recommend that you review Eatons full Hardware Compatibility List available at www.eaton.com/pxs.
Travel
Travel costs
The pricing includes both travel and lodging in the continental United States.
Selling policy
Eaton selling policy
1
2
3
4
5
6
Eaton Selling Policy 5-000 applies to all Power Xpert Policy Startup Service Pack sales.
Validity and restrictions

Availability
Eaton Power Xpert Startup Service Packs are available and valid in the continental United States only.
Validity
Valid for 12 months after date of purchase.
Scheduling
Recommended to schedule a service appointment within the first three months of purchase.
Advance notice
A minimum of three weeks advance notice is required prior to requested service date.
8
9
Table 2.4-6. Power Xpert Software

Description
Catalog
Number

Power Xpert Software Professional Edition w/ 1-day startup
PXS-PRO
PXS-PRON1S
PXS-PRON2S

Power Xpert Software Professional Edition and Power Xpert Reporting
PXS-PRON5S
PXS-PRONPXR

Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition w/ 1-day startup
PXS-ENT
PXS-ENTN1S

PXS-ENTN2S
PXS-ENTN5S
10
11
12
13
14

Power Xpert Reportingsingle source DB connection
Power Xpert Reportingup to 2 source DB connections
PXR
PXR-2DB
PXR-5DB

PXR-10DB
PXR-25DB
PXR-50DB
Service Packs
Power Xpert 1-day startup Service Pack
PX-1S
PX-2S
PX-5S
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 054
Software Requirements
Hardware Requirements
Supported operating systems
ii
Power Xpert Software (PXS) requires a

server-class machine with the following minimum hardware specifications:
Table 2.4-7. Hardware Specifications
Hardware
Specification
Processor
2.8 GHz, dual-core processor
Memory
2 GB allocated for PXS

(allocate 3 GB of memory
to a virtual machine session
running PXS)
3
4
Disk space
required for
application
The PXS application

itself requires 190 MB
of disk storage
Disk space
required for
database
A typical database will grow

to 2 GB within a year. If you
have a large number of
devices, reserve additional
storage space
Video
resolution
1280 by 1024 pixels

or higher
Removable
media
DVD RO drive
6
7
8
9
10
11
You may wish to add the following

hardware as well:
Local printer
Sound card (if sounds are assigned
to specific alarm conditions)
Modem (for remote alarm notification to machines not available via
your network)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2

(Standard or Enterprise) 32-bit
edition
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
(32-bit) with Service Pack 3, 32-bit
Windows Server 2008 (Standard
or Enterprise), 32-bit or 64-bit
Windows Server 2008 R2 (Server
or Enterprise), 32-bit or 64-bit
Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate
or Enterprise editions, either 32-bit
or 64-bit
Software components
IIS 5.0 or higher (must be
installed prior to installing PXS;
for Windows 7 and Windows Server
2008, this is installed automatically)
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0
or 8.0
Third-Party Software Installed

The following Microsoft software
is also installed during the
PXS installation.
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1

Windows Installer 4.5
C++ Runtime Library 2008
Microsoft Data Access 2.8
SQL Server 2008 Express SP2
SQL Server 2005 Express
Management Studio SP2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-13
Sheet 02 055

Table 2.4-8. Power Xpert Software (PXS) Hardware Compatibility List (HWCL)
Device
Communication
Protocol
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
5115 UPS
SNMP
5125 UPS
SNMP
5130 UPS
SNMP
9120 UPS
SNMP
9120 UPS
XCP/BCM
9125 UPS
SNMP
9125 UPS
XCP/BCM
9130 UPS
SNMP
9135 UPS
SNMP
9140 UPS
SNMP
9150 HV
single-phase UPS
XCP/BCM
9150 HV
three-phase UPS
XCP/BCM
BACnetWS+
9155
three-phase UPS
BACnetWS+
9155
three-phase UPS
SNMP
9155 UPS
BACnetWS+
9155 UPS
SNMP
5
6
9170 Plus
two-phase UPS
XCP/BCM
9170 Plus
single-phase UPS
XCP/BCM
9305 UPS
XCP/BCM
9305 UPS
UCII
9305 UPS
SNMP
9305 UPS
XCP/BCM/UCII
9315 50500 UPS
XCP/BCM
9315 50500 UPS
SNMP
9315 750 UPS
XCP/BCM
9315 750 UPS
SNMP
9315 SBM
SNMP
9315 SBM
with MBP
BACnetWS+
9315 SBM
without MBP
BACnetWS+
9315 UPM
with Bypass
BACnetWS+
9315 UPM
without bypass
BACnetWS+
9320 UPS
XCP/BCM
9330 UPS
SNMP
9330 UPS
XCP/BCM
9335 UPS
SNMP
9335 UPS
XCP/BCM
9340 UPS
XCP/BCM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent typical configurations that may require additional connectivity products in
conjunction with Power Xpert Software. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options and product model, and depending on the
communication methods being used and firmware versions, some device-specific parameters may not get always passed through to the software.
Please refer to the Technical Data Sheets and User Manuals for detailed specifications and parameter availability. Please refer to the Hardware
Compatibility List posted at www.eaton.com/pxs for latest version and details.
Note: For updated list, see www.eaton.com/pxs.
XCP/BCM
9155
two-phase UPS
9150 LV UPS
CA08104001E
ii
1
Eaton UPSs
18
19
20
21

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 056
Table 2.4-8. Power Xpert Software (PXS) Hardware Compatibility List (HWCL) (Continued)
Device
Communication
Protocol
ii
1
2
3
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton UPSs (Continued)
9355 UPS
BACnetWS+
9390 2-module
SNMP
9390 3-module
SNMP
9390 4-module
SNMP
9390 UPS
SNMP
9390 UPS
BACnetWS+
9395 2-module
SNMP
9395 3-module
SNMP
9395 4-module
SNMP
9395 5-module
SNMP
9395 6-module
SNMP
9395 7-Module
SNMP
9395 8-Module
SNMP
9395 distributed
parallel with SBM
BACnetWS+
9395 distributed
parallel without
SBM
BACnetWS+
9395 UPS
BACnetWS+
9395 UPS
SNMP
BladeUPS
SNMP
BladeUPS
2-module
SNMP
10
BladeUPS
3-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
4-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
5-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
6-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
module
SNMP
Ferrups
SNMP
IPM BP III
UPS, BCM
XCP/BCM
IPM BP IV BCM
XCP/BCM
IPM BP Plus UPS
XCP/BCM
IPM BPII UPS,

P-Record
single-phase
XCP/BCM
IPM BPII UPS,

P-Record
three-phase
XCP/BCM
Plus 1836 UPS
XCP/BCM
Prestige UPS
SNMP
Prestige UPS
XCP/BCM
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-15
Sheet 02 057

Device
Communication Supported
Protocol
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
i
ii
1
Eaton Power Distribution Equipment

EMS-PDR
BACnetWS+
EMS-PDU
BACnetWS+
EMS-RPM
BACnetWS+
EMS-RPP
BACnetWS+
ePDU MI red
display 208V 30A
(630, L6-30)
SNMP
ePDU MI red
display 208V 60A
(IEC 309-60 1P)
SNMP
ePDU MI red
display all 120V
(5-xx, L5-xx),
ePDU MI red
display 208V 20A
(620, L6-20)
SNMP
ePDU MI red
SNMP
display split-phase 20A
(L14-20), ePDU
MI red display
split-phase 30A
(L14-30)
Monitored ePDU
blue display
SNMP
Monitored ePDU
red display
three-phase
SNMP
PDU panel,
PDU subfeed,
EMS panel,
EMS subfeed
BACnetWS+
Switched ePDU
16 outlets
single-phase
SNMP
Switched ePDU
24 outlets
single-phase
SNMP
Switched ePDU
24 outlets
three-phase
SNMP
13
Switched ePDU
8 outlets
single-phase
SNMP
14
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 058
Device
Communication
Protocol
ii
1
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
INCOM
IQ Analyzer
6400/6600
INCOM
IQ Data,
IQ Generator
INCOM
INCOM
IQ DataPlus,
IQ DataPlus II,
IQ DataPlus II
Goldstar,
IQ DataPlus II HV
IQ DP-4000
INCOM
IQ Multipoint ES
INCOM
IQ Multipoint ESII
INCOM
IQ Power Sentinel
INCOM
IQ Sentinel, univ.
w/external CTs,
univ. multiple
well-head,
univ. single
well-head
INCOM
IQ 130
Modbus RTU
IQ 140
Modbus RTU
IQ 150
Modbus RTU
IQ 200/IQ 300,
IQ 220/320,
IQ 230/IQ 330
INCOM
IQ 220/230
IQ 230M/IQ 330M
(three-wire)
Modbus RTU
IQ 230M/IQ 330M
(four-wire)
Modbus RTU
IQ 250
Modbus RTU
IQ 260
Modbus RTU
IQ 7000
INCOM
Meter point
INCOM
Power Manager,
Power Manager,
w/inp. trans.
INCOM
Power Xpert
Meter 2250
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 2260
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 2270
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 4000
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 6000
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 8000
BACnetWS+
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton Meters
IQ Analyzer
6000/6200
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-17
Sheet 02 059

Device
Protocol
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
i
ii
1
Eaton Circuit Protection Products

ARMS IDM
INCOM/Modbus
C441
overload relay
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip 520MC
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip 700/800
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip 810
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip 910
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip MV,
Digitrip 3000,
Digitrip 3200
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip
OPTIM 550,
Digitrip OPTIM 750
INCOM/Modbus
DT1150/DT1150V/
Navy
INCOM/Modbus
EDR-3000
INCOM/Modbus
EDR-4000
INCOM/Modbus
ETR-4000
INCOM/Modbus
FP-4000/FP-5000
INCOM/Modbus
FP-6000
INCOM/Modbus
IQ 500
overload relay
INCOM/Modbus
MMCO relay
INCOM/Modbus
MP-3000,
MP-4000
INCOM/Modbus
MPCV relay
INCOM/Modbus
Series NRX 1150
INCOM/Modbus
Series NRX 519
INCOM/Modbus
Series NRX 520M
INCOM/Modbus
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Eaton DC Systems
SC200 system
controller
SNMP
13
Eaton Sub-Network Master

AEM, AEMII
INCOM/Modbus
AIM
INCOM/Modbus
BIM/BIMII
INCOM/Modbus
CMU
INCOM/Modbus
IQ 1000
INCOM/Modbus
IQ 1000II,
IQ 1000II Goldstar
INCOM/Modbus
IQ CED, IQ CED II
INCOM/Modbus
WCMU
INCOM/Modbus
ATC-400
INCOM/Modbus
ATC-600
INCOM/Modbus
ATC-800
INCOM/Modbus
14
15
16
17
Eaton Transfer Switch
Supported by Power Xpert Enterprise Edition.
CA08104001E
18
19
20
21

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 060
Device
Communication
Protocol
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton Starters
ACM/Advantage
INCOM
Advantage
INCOM
IQ 500
overload relay
INCOM
IT. Starter S811

(MV811)
QCport
IT. Starter QSnap
QCport
IT. Starter with

cover controls
QCport
D77A-AI16
QCport
D77A-DI16
QCport
D77A-DI8
QCport
Eaton Drives
Accutrol 400
INCOM/Modbus
AF97
INCOM/Modbus
MVX9000
Modbus RTU
SVX9000
Modbus RTU
Eaton I/O
DIM
INCOM/Modbus
D77A-AI16
QCport
D77A-AI8
QCport
D77A-DI16
QCport
D77A-DI18
QCport
Foreseer DAT
SNMP
Universal RTD
INCOM/Modbus
Environmental Monitoring
EMP
Communications
Card
Qualitrol 118
INCOM/Modbus
Wireless
temperature
sensor
802.11g
Integration Tools
LanSafe
SNMP agent
SNMP
Third-party
custom device
driver support
Various
Third-party
Modbus TCP
compatible
devices
Modbus TCP
Third-party SNMP
SNMP
compatible devices
18
19
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported by Power Xpert Enterprise Edition.
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
2.4-19
Sheet 02 061

Device
Protocol
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
i
ii
1
Miscellaneous
Addressable relay,
addressable
relay inv.
INCOM/Modbus
Alarm relay
INCOM/Modbus
Breaker controller
INCOM/Modbus
InsulGard
insulation monitor
Modbus
IQ Transfer
Switch II
INCOM/Modbus
Pow-R-Command
INCOM/Modbus
Wireless
current sensor
INCOM/Modbus
5
6
2
3
4
Third-Party Device Support

ABB TPU 2000
Modbus
GE 369
motor relay
Modbus
GE 469
motor relay
Modbus
EI Nexus
1262/1272
Modbus
PML 7350
meter series
Modbus
PML 7550
meter series
Modbus
PML 7650
meter series
Modbus
Power Xpert
Gateway thirdparty device
support
Modbus
Square D CM3000
meter series
Modbus
Square D CM4000/4250 Modbus

meter series
8
9
10
11
Square D PM710
meter series
Modbus
Square D
PM810/820/850/870
meter series
Modbus
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 062
Foreseer Services
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Foreseer Services
Foreseer Software and Engineering
Services (Foreseer Services) provide
vendor independent, power and
energy infrastructure integration
solutions that help companies reduce
energy consumption and unplanned
downtime due to the failure of critical
power, environmental, safety or
security systems.
Turnkey software and connectivity
solutions are coupled with state-ofthe-art project management, systems
design, third-party device integration,
testing and custom application development to develop a comprehensive
monitoring solution to meet your
custom needs.
Foreseer Services is delivered in four
categories, each offering a multitude
of unique value-add services that
you can discuss with your Eaton
sales professional.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Design services
Installation services
Commissioning services
Follow-up services
Hardware services
Software services
Foreseer services is fully distributable

to allow different monitoring capabilities to be deployed at different sites
allowing you to purchase only what is
needed. Many competitive systems
offer a one-size-fits all type approach
where you end up paying for more
capacity than is needed. With Foreseer
Services, you pay only for what you
need, when you need it.
of the best fit for various integration

environments, and the right solution
at the right price.
Foreseer Services Categories

Foreseer Services has three
general categories:
Foreseer Software Services
Foreseer Project Management
Services
Foreseer Engineering Services
Foreseer Software Services

Unique Features
Four scalable solutions
Four classes, capable of handling
15,000 to 256,000 data streams
(channels).
Software (up to 15,000 channels)
Foreseer M-Class server software
(up to 25,000 channels)
Foreseer R-Class server software (up
to 100,000 channels)
Foreseer S-Class server software
(up to 256,000 channels)
Redundant, Worldwide Coverage

The inclusion of one or more extra
Foreseer servers provides the highest
possible levels of system reliability. In
the unlikely event that one Foreseer
server fails then the remaining servers
can carry the load of the power
monitoring system.
With the Manager of Managers (MOM)
software option, data from one server
can be monitored alongside data
from other servers, enabling you to
aggregate multiple Foreseer sites into
a single system.
Four Scalable Solutions
Data Gathering, 24/7
Foreseer Software Services is available

in four classes, capable of handling
15,000 to 256,000 data streams
(channels), so you can be assured
A proactive algorithm gathers data

24/7, enabling you to sample data
points from thousands of devices,
every second.
User-Defined Formulas
Information from multiple sources
and systems can be inserted into user
defined formulas, providing knowledge for informed decision making.
Extensive Device Driver Library

Foreseer Software Services enables
the full-scale integration of third-party
products. A device library of over
600 drivers has been developed. For a
full list of compatible devices, see the
Foreseer services/hardware compatibility list at www.eaton.com/foreseer.
Trend Analysis
High performance analysis and
forecasting tools assess equipment
performance specifications including
cause analysis, impact analysis,
capacity planning, preventive maintenance assessments and trending.
Custom User Interfaces

Custom, mimic graphics, dashboards,
and 3D renderings.
Web Browser AccessUnlimited Seats

Web browser access enables easy
system access. Multiple users can
access Foreseer software without the
need for additional client seat licenses.
Alarm Notifications
For each channel being monitored,
you can assign up to four alarm
thresholdsfrom routine maintenance
alerts to system failureplus handling
instructions and escalation procedures
for each.
Foreseer Project Management Services

Each Foreseer integration project can
be customized. See Figure 2.4-3 for an
overview of project flow.
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 2.4-3. Foreseer Project Management Services
21
CA08104001E
January 2013

Monitoring Software
2.4-21
Sheet 02 063
Foreseer Services
Foreseer Engineering Services
Design Services
Custom Foreseer Services

Applications
After extensive assessment of your

requirements and the existing device
and facility infrastructure, the Foreseer
design services team configures your
system, complete with a bill of materials and recommendations unique to
your needs. Specification development,
drawings and detailed documentation
for your project is part of this step.
Third-party device support and
communication interface planning is
critical, including driver development
and enhancement, if necessary. User
interfaces are designed with default
views to meet your specifications.
Data Center Efficiency
Installation Services
Use Foreseer Software Services

Power Xpert Reporting option to
automatically calculate Data Center
Infrastructure Efficiency (DCiE) and
Power Usage Effectiveness (PUE).
These industry-standard efficiency
metrics help IT managers to understand and to track how efficiently
their data center is running and
how effective improvement efforts
have been.
Installation services team members

are with you from project initiation to
handing over the Foreseer system
when work is complete. Tasks include:
Startup needs, testing and

customization
Drawings and custom graphic
layout development
Customized device gauge graphics
and status indicators
Third-party software integration
Custom software and application
development
Setup and configuration of
reporting packages and basic
Foreseer training
Commissioning Services
Commissioning services consist of
overall and tiered systems testing
and full point-to-point system
commissioning options.
Follow-up Services
Our follow-up services team handles
all issues related to connectivity,
device installation, configuration and
customization, hardware integration,
third-party system setup, configuration and testing. Technical support
and customized service contracts
with scheduled site visits are also
available with advanced Foreseer
system training.
Growth Planning
i
ii
1
2
Power Capacity View

Eaton Powerware UPS-Primary View
Calculates DCiE and PUE
Energy Cost Allocation

Fair Share Utility Cost Distribution
Foreseer Software provides energy
usage by individual circuit so each
device can be a part of the energy
management strategy. It even
allocates electrical cost to individual
and branch circuits, which can then
be assigned to individual users of a
department or device.
Power Density
Pinpoint Hot Spots in Your Data Center
Power density is a critical measurement as racks proliferate and expand
from TCP/IP networks and servers and
other elements of the infrastructure
are placed into smaller areas. Foreseer
Software manages power density by
device, for a single rack, floor or an
entire building, allowing identification
of overloaded racks and incorrect
power drains due to device failure.
The Power Capacity View provides an

at-a-glance simple analysis of the data
centers electrical capacity. Normal,
cautionary and alarm events are
triggered automatically, both online
and remotely once a threshold has
been reached. Mapping the data
centers capacity is critical for power,
cooling and redundancy planning.
With Foreseer Software projection
graphing capability, data center
managers can easily predict when
they are going to hit a capacity
threshold going into the future and
can prepare accordingly.
Plan with the Electrical Capacity

Planning Tool
Demand on devices grows as
organizations expand. While average
demand may not be a concern, peak
demand is. Foreseer software tracks
the kW and kVA over time, immediately informs of peak levels, and
projects future demands based on
past usage. Assisting in planning for
electrical upgrades and/or changes to
the power system to support changing
load patterns.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 064
Foreseer Services
i
ii
Load Balancing
Prevent Unbalanced Loads
Improper load balancing contributes
to harmonic distortion. Foreseer
software tracks load levels by phase,
giving instant notification when

extreme imbalances begin to occur,
and providing the knowledge to take
the necessary steps to re-distribute the
load. Foreseer software visually illustrates the load balance of a device or
system in real-time, while showing

what the balanced model should be.
You see the current state, the worstcase scenario and the proper load.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 2.4-4. Data Center/Co-Location DeviceThe typical Data Center/Co-Location device mixture includes a large variety of power distribution,
cooling, environmental monitoring, lighting, safety and security, backup and emergency power systems that have been purchased over a long
period of time. Foreseer Services integrates all of these systems into a simple, single software monitoring package. Support for metering and
energy measurement, including greenhouse gas monitoring, are requirements that need to be taken into consideration as well as, for example,
Building Management System integration.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
January 2013

Monitoring Software
2.4-23
Sheet 02 065
Foreseer Services
A/C Control Client Software
Foreseer Services
Available Options
AC Control-Zone Assignment
Take Control of Your Environment

The Foreseer software A/C interface
offers comprehensive monitoring and
optional lead/lag control for Air Flow,
Data Aire and Liebert System 3 air
conditioning units. Lead/lag control
and scheduling is viewable via a
Web-browser and is controllable
with the proper user authority.
Maintenance Scheduler
Maintenance Scheduler
Eatons Power Xpert Reporting works

in conjunction with Foreseer Software
allowing a view past individual
measurements, trend graphs and
events. It consolidates complex data
from a multitude of devices from
around the globe into easy-to-understand graphical reports. It provides a
standard set of reports for the most
common report requests. Simply
choose from 10 ready-to-go report
templates. Power Xpert Reporting can
be set to run the report automatically
and send you new, updated reports via
e-mail at predefined intervals.
Redundancy
Safeguards valuable information.
The inclusion of one or more extra
Foreseer software servers provides
the highest levels of system reliability.
In the event that one Foreseer
software server fails, the remaining
servers carry the load of the power
monitoring system.
Data Acquisition Engine (DAE)
Provides a powerful means to

integrate data from multiple locations
where each location is running its own
Foreseer software server. This unique
feature provides a scalable system
where the total number of integrated
points on the centralized MOM server
can be as large as 256,000 points.
Designed specifically for geographically or physically removed sites

where local IT expertise may not
exist. The data acquisition engine (see
Page 2.4-24 for details) automatically
collects and sends data from critical
infrastructure devices, and communicates that data back to the Foreseer
software server. Using local processing and the shared bandwidth of an
IP network, the DAE reduces the cost
required to transmit data to the central
server. The DAE also continues to
operate independently and generate
alarms even if the connection to
the central server is unavailable,
increasing the overall availability
of the management system.
Sequence of Events Recorder
Data Acquisition Terminal (DAT)
Enables breaker status monitoring

capability at a time stamping
resolution of 1 millisecond. During
a critical or catastrophic event,
sequence of event information
is captured by the recorder for
retrospective analysis and root
cause issue mitigation.
Easily integrates monitored

equipment and sensors located in
small, networked remote sites. The
DAT (see Page 2.4-24 for details)
employs standard Modbus communications to relay information to either
a Foreseer software server or a data
acquisition engine over a TCP/IP
network. Data is packaged in
sequential Modbus registers to
enable optimum scan times without
impacting network bandwidth.
Manager of Managers (MOM)
Eliminate the Hassles
Secure Web Server (https)
The Foreseer software maintenance

scheduler offers the ability to preset
scheduled (weekly or periodic)
maintenance windows within the
system to disarm selected devices
on which maintenance will be
performed. Disarming the devices
allows continued monitoring and
archiving during the maintenance
period while disabling alarms and
preventing unnecessary notification
of personnel.
Provides an encrypted means to

protect all data that is viewed via a
standard Web browser on the Internet
or intranet. Using the OpenSSL
package from the Internet, Foreseer
software is able to provide 128 bit
encryption between the Foreseer
Software and the Web browser.
Both registered certificates from
a third-party provider or self-signed
certificates are allowed to be used
with this option.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Universal Input Enclosure

Provides network connectivity for
analog and contact input information
along with device server capability.
Each enclosure contains from one to
five input modules with pluggable
connectors used for power and
input wiring, enabling cost-efficient
monitoring of equipment in small,
remote facilities.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Monitoring Software
January 2013
Sheet 02 066
Foreseer Class Hardware Options
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To further expand the reach of

Foreseer Services, two hardware
devices are offered.
The Foreseer data acquisition engine

is designed specifically for geographically or physically removed Foreseer
class sites where local IT expertise
may not exist.
The Foreseer data acquisition
terminal easily integrates monitored
small, networked remote sites.
For complete listing of Foreseer
class hardware compatibility,
visit the Foreseer Web site at
www.eaton.com/foreseer.

Designed specifically for geographically or physically removed sites

where local IT expertise may not exist.
The data acquisition engine automatically collects and sends data from
critical infrastructure devices, such as
UPS, generator and power distribution
units, and communicates that data, as
well as status and alarms, back to the
centrally located Foreseer server.
Using local processing and using the
shared bandwidth of an IP network,
the DAE reduces the cost required to
transmit data to the central server.
The DAE can also continues to operate
independently and generate alarms
even if the connection to the central
server is unavailable, increasing
the overall availability of the
management system.
DAE Technical Specifications
11
12
13
14
External power input: 115/230 Vac

in, 5 Vdc 8A out, optional48 Vdc
Ethernet: dual 10/100Base-T
Ethernet ports
Communications ports: four RS-232/
422/485 and four USB ports
Dimensions in inches (H x W x D):
3.50 x 17.00 x 11.00, 19.00-inch rackmount with removable flanges
Environment: 32 to 104F
(0 to 40C), 0% to 90%
noncondensing RH
Monitoring: 3072 channels,
maximum of 1536 analog
Easily integrates monitored

small, networked remote sites. The
DAT employs standard Modbus
communications to relay information
to either a Foreseer server or a data
acquisition engine over a TCP/IP
network. Data is packaged in
sequential Modbus registers to
enable optimum scan times without
impacting network bandwidth.
DAT Technical Specifications
External power input: 100/240 Vac,

47/63 Hz,1A (0.5A at 240) optional
48 Vdc
Ethernet: 10Base-T, status and
activity LEDs
Communications: Modbus RTU
via UDP using TCP/IP Port 7010
or Modbus TCP
Dimensions in inches (H x W x D):
1.75 x 19.00 x 4.63
Weight: 3 lbs
Environment: 4 to 185F
(20 to 85C), 0% to 90%
noncondensing RH
Discrete inputs: 16 channels
configure as dry contact
Relay outputs: 16 channels, SPDT
configuration, contacts rated at
500 mA, 125 Vac
Analog inputs: eight channels of
12-bit A/D up to 16 digital inputs
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
January 2013

for Third-Party Integration
2.5-1
Sheet 02 067
Power Xpert Gateway and PONI Communication Modules
Power Xpert Gateway

400E/600E/800E
MP-4000. The DPONI is powered

both by the host product to which
it is attached and by the DeviceNet
network.
The MPONI comes with mounting

hardware and attaches to the back
of its associated device.
Note: Please see IL for detailed register
support information for each supported
product. Not all device functionality is
supported with the RS-485 PONI over the
Modbus protocol.
The DPONI uses opto-couplers to

isolate the two power systems. The
DPONI communicates at 125, 250 or
500 Kbps selected via a front panel DIP
switch. All products on the DeviceNet
network must be set at the same
communication rate. The DPONI has a
bi-color network/module status LED
that functions in accordance with the
DeviceNet specification. An additional
monocolor LED flashes while the
DPONI is receiving a message from
the host device.
DPONI
Power Xpert Gateway
The Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E

and 800E work on an open communication architecture. They connect both
Eaton and third-party electrical equipment communicating through INCOM,
QCPort and Modbus RTU.
The DeviceNet Product Operated

Network Interface (DPONI) enables
communication between a DeviceNet
network master station and a host
device in a master/slave format over
a DeviceNet network. The DPONI is
compatible with the MP-3000 and
Network
Connection
(Green Phoenix
LED
Connection)
Address
Selector
Switches
Various baud rates are available for

networking flexibility, and onboard
LEDs indicate operation, error and
communication status. The MPONI is
applied where a device network exists
connected by a dedicated shielded
twisted pair conductor. Modbus RS485 allows a single device or multiple
units in a daisy-chain configuration to
communicate with another local or
remote device and may extend up to
4000 ft (1219m) without a repeater.
CA08104001E
2
3
4
RS-485 RX
NETWORK
1=A
2=G
3 = COMMON
STATUS
4 = SHIELD
5 = CHASSIS
IQ Host
Device
Connection
RS-485
P roduct
O perated
N etwork
I nterface
10
12
Figure 2.5-1. RS-485 PONI
13
DeviceNet Status
DeviceNet
Network
Connection
(5 point plug)
11
LED
Recommended
18 gauge twisted pair IMPCABLE or
20 gauge Belden 9463 class
RS-485 PONI
The RS-485 Product Operated Network
Interface card, or MPONI card, enables
Modbus communication capability to
various Eaton products. Each MPONI
contains two rotary address switches
to uniquely identify each device on the
network and a baud rate DIP switch. A
5-pin connector is provided for wiring
to the RS-485 network.
Function
Selector
Switch
TX
Ethernet TCP support uses your

existing network infrastructure,
reducing costs.
For detailed information on

compatible devices, refer to
www.eaton.com/pxg.
ii
Modbus TCP/IP supports integration

with third-party monitoring solutions.
For example, the gateways send
information to a Kepware OPC
server, which then allows the data
from downstream devices to integrate
with third-party HMI and Building
Management systems.
For detailed information on the Power

Xpert Gateways, please see Page 2.2-1.
14
DEVICE
MOUNTING
15
Data
Code
Earth
GND
16
17
18
19
INCOM
Status
Figure 2.5-2. DPONI
IQ Host Device
Connection
20
21

2.5-2
January 2013
Sheet 02 068
MINTII RS-232 Converter
ii
2
3
4
5
General Description
The Master INCOM Network

Translator II (MINTII) converts the
twisted shielded pair network of
INCOM devices to an RS-232 signal.
This signal can be accessed by PLCs,
computer serial ports and building
management system serial interface
cards. The MINTII is also often
applied as an interface to standard
line drivers and converters to allow
communication through dedicated
telephone lines, dial-up modems,
fiber-optic line drivers, radio
frequency or wireless modems.
Temperature: 0 to 60C
Humidity: 095%
Power: 120V
Speed: 1200, 2400 and 9600 baud
(INCOM), 19.2K baud (RS-232)
Communications: INCOM, RS-232
Product Selection
Table 2.5-1. MINTII RS-232 Converter
Description
Catalog
Number
Master INCOM
Network Translator II
MINTII
Applications
Converts a network of power management software devices to ASCII RS-232
format for access through a serial port
of a PC, laptop, or Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC).
Master INCOM Network Translator II
Displayed Parameters
6
7
8
9
Eatons MINTII provides access to

all parameters monitored over a
system monitoring system such as
Power Xpert Software or Foreseer
Services
Supports INCOM networks up to
8500 ft (2590m) in distance and
device counts up to 1000
11
12
PC
MINTII
Twisted Pair
INCOM Network
10
9-Pin
PC Comport
Suitable for panel mounting or

desktop use
120 Vac power cord included for
plug-in to standard duplex receptacle
9-Pin Female to
25-Pin Male
Straight-Through
RS-232 Cable
Figure 2.5-3. MINTII Connection Diagram for Use with a PC
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

January 2013
2.5-3
Sheet 02 069
mMINT
mMINT
LED indicators for INCOM transmit

and receive communications
exchanges
LED indicators for Modbus RS-485
transmit and receive communications exchanges
Input power for the module from
either 120 Vac or 24125 Vdc
DIN rail mount package
0 to 60C ambient operation
Module Mounting
When mounting the mMINT, verify
that an 11 mm H x 28 mm W DIN rail
is used and that it is within an
enclosed space.
mMINT Module
General Description
The mMINT (Modbus Master INCOM
Network Translator) Module is an
Eaton accessory product that will
provide communication between a
Modbus RTU network and an INCOM
(INdustrial COMmunications) network
(see Figure 2.5-4). This module is
transparent to the Modbus network.
It communicates to a master on the
Modbus network using the Modbus
RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) protocol.
It communicates to slave devices on
the INCOM network using the IMPACC
(Integrated Monitoring, Protection,
and Control Communication) protocol. The catalog number of this
product is mMINT.
Features
The mMINT module is a slave
device on the Modbus network and
as such requires a master that will
exchange register objects with the
mMINT module.
Handles generic pass-through commands (Modbus/INCOM/Modbus)

Capable of passing Modbus register
objects from Eatons existing products and newer PnP (Plug-n-Play)
products to a Modbus RTU master
Data in IEEE Floating Point format
and fixed point
Modbus RTU communications
data transfer rates of 1200, 9600
or 19200 baud with one start bit,
eight data bits, no parity, and either
one or two stop bits
Up to 32 products connected to
INCOM network port (246 unique
addresses maximum)
Flashing Status LED to indicate an
active module
CA08104001E
Simplified Wiring Rules

INCOM Network
The following simplified rules apply
to a given system consisting of a
single daisy-chained main cable link
between master and slave devices
(see Figure 2.5-4). For more complex
considerations including star configurations, please refer to the IMPACC
wiring specification T.D. 17513.
Modbus RS-485 Network

The following simplified rules apply to
a given system consisting of a cable
link between master and slave devices
(see Figure 2.5-5). For more complex
configurations, please refer to standard Modbus RTU wiring specification
rules for the RS-485 network.
The recommended Modbus cable
has twisted-pair wires (24 AWG
stranded 7x32 conductors with PVC
insulation) having an aluminum/
mylar foil shield with drain wire
The maximum system capacity
is 4000 feet of communications
cable and 247 devices on the
Modbus RTU network
Make sure that there is twistedpair wire that is recommended
for Modbus RTU network use.
Use shielded twisted-pair wire to
connect each slave to the Modbus
RTU network, daisy-chain style.
The polarity of the twisted pair is
critically important
RS-485
Modbus
A B COM SHD
Modbus RTU Serial Network

J3
(Slave)
Modbus
mMINT
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Modbus
Master
11
4.25
(108.0)
12
(Master)
INCOM Network
J2
J1
INCOM
Slaves
Figure 2.5-4. mMINT in a Communications

Network
Recommended INCOM cable styles
are Belden 9463 or C-H style
2A957805G01
The maximum system capacity is
10,000 feet of communications cable
and 32 slave devices on the INCOM
network under the mMINT
Non-terminated taps, up to 200 feet in
length, off the main link are permitted,
but add to the total cable length
Make sure that there is twisted-pair
wire that is recommended for
IMPACC network use. Use shielded
twisted-pair wire to connect each
slave to the INCOM network,
daisy-chain style. The polarity of
the twisted pair is not important
24125 Vdc
120 Vac
Shield INCOM
3.54
(89.9)
Figure 2.5-5. mMINT Module Dimensions
Burden
24 Vac/dc 3 VA
Safety Standards
UL
CSA
CE mark
Communications Speed
INCOM:
N2 Bus:
14
15
16
17
18
13
1200, 9600 baud

9600 baud
19
20
21
2.5-4

January 2013
Sheet 02 070
PMINR
PMINT
Features
The PMINT module is a slave device
on the PROFIBUS network and as such
requires a PROFIBUS master that will
interrogate the PMINT module.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PMINT Module
General Description
The PMINT (PROFIBUS DPMaster
INCOM network translator) module is
an Eaton accessory product that will
provide communications between a
PROFIBUS DP network master and an
INCOM (INdustrial COMmunications)
based Digitrip Magnum 520MC
or 1150 trip unit. The module is
transparent to the PROFIBUS network
master. It communicates to a master
on the PROFIBUS network using
the PROFIBUS-DP-V0 protocol. It
communicates to a slave Magnum
trip unit device on INCOM.
The PMINT uses the VPC3+C ProfiChip integrated circuit, providing

PROFIBUS communications support
with automatic recognition of data
transfer rates up to 12 Mbits/s
Flashing Status LED to indicate an
active module
LED indicators for PROFIBUS
SYSFAULT and BUSFAULT
LED indicators for INCOM transmit
and receive communications
exchanges
Input power for the module from
either 100240 Vac or 24150 Vdc
DIN rail mount package
40 to 85C ambient operation
INCOM Connection
INCOM communications is based on
a master-slave protocol. The PMINT
is a master on the INCOM connection
and continually obtains data from the
attached trip unit. Reference material
pertaining to INCOM can be obtained
from http://www.eaton.com, then
search on 17384.
The following simplified rules apply

to a given system consisting of an
INCOM master and the slave trip unit.
Recommended INCOM cable styles
are Belden 3073F or Eaton style
2A957805G01
A 100 ohm terminating resistor is
required across the INCOM carrier
signal pair at the trip unit
The maximum system capacity
is 8000 feet of communications
cable on an INCOM network under
the PMINT
Make sure that there is twisted pair

wire that is recommended for INCOM
network use. Use shielded twisted pair
wire to connect between the PMINT
and the INCOM communications
based trip unit. The polarity of the
twisted pair is not important.
PROFIBUS DP RS-485 Network

Reference material pertaining to
PROFIBUS can be obtained from the
http://PROFIBUS.com Web site. Refer
to the PROFIBUS DP standard for
transmission using copper cables
(RS-485). A 9-pin D-SUB connector
interface is provided.
IL17384Part A: INCOM
Communications Standard
IL17384Part C: Protective Relays
and Trip Units
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
3.0-1
May 2014
Advanced and
Electronic Metering
Sheet 03001
Contents

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-2
Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3
Eaton Advanced Meters
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-20
Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31
IQ 250/260 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32
IQ 130/140/150 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35
Eaton Submeter Overview
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1
IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and
Metering Module (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-33
Eaton Electronic Meters
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
Accessories
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series
and PXM 2000 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
Sub-Network Master Local Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-2
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-17
Specifications
CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16901
Section 26 27 13.11
Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.A
Paragraph 2.02.A
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.B
Paragraph 2.02.B
IQ 250/260 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.E
Paragraph 2.02.E
IQ 100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.D
Paragraph 2.02.D
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.G
Paragraph 2.02.G
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.I
Paragraph 2.02.I
Breaker Power Monitoring and
Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.J
Paragraph 2.02.J
IQ 150S/250S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02K
Paragraph 2.02K
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02L
Paragraph 2.02L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Metering Products Family
CA08104001E
ii
21
3.0-2

Overview
May 2014
Sheet 03 002
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
General Description
Eatons metering products provide
solutions needed to monitor and
manage all aspects of an electrical
When seeking greater reliability,
increased productivity and significant
cost savings to remain competitive
in todays market, Eatons metering
products fit the bill. These innovative
meters and communications systems,
along with Power Management
software, make it possible to successfully take control of the electrical
Power Xpert Meters

Power Xpert Meters are the benchmark
for intelligent Web-enabled top-quality
metering devices for the power chain.
Power Xpert Meters provide measurement of the critical elements found
in the power chain whether that be
voltage, power, current, transients,
harmonics or even time. Power
Xpert Meters provide Web-enabled
high definition communications
for use with the Power Xpert Software.
All Power Xpert Meters provide a
standard communications protocol for
easy integration into other systems.
Greater Reliability
Eaton metering products permit
receiving an early warning of potential
problems, eliminate unnecessary
trips, isolate faults to ensure minimum
downtime and shed or equalize loads
while a problem is being corrected.
Increased Productivity
Equipment downtime resulting from
voltage or frequency variations can be
very costly to an operation. Monitoring
power quality with Eatons metering
products throughout the electrical
distribution system provides data to
identify, isolate and correct problems
quickly and efficiently.
Metering Products Family
Reduced Energy and Operating Costs

When we think about meters and
power quality, the common thread
throughout the basket of solutions is
information. Collecting, monitoring,
and managing data from the electrical
distribution system can help reduce
costs for those facilities prepared to
define and analyze present electrical
energy usage levels and patterns.
Data provided by Eaton metering
products comprise the data for
verifying utility bills for energy
management and lowering operating
costs. Deregulation in some geographical locations permits energy users to
select a utility provider and negotiate
rate structures. For large users with
heavy utility bills this may be an
incentive to verify the utility bill,
identify an opportunity for savings,
negotiate a better utility rate, and apply
the savings directly to the bottom line.
Users are also empowered to decrease
energy consumption, thereby lowering
peak demand charges and decreasing
operating costs.
When an Eaton meter is used with

Eaton trip units and relays incorporating
built-in metering capabilities, the
entire electrical distribution system
can be cost-effectively managed.
Eaton is an industry leader offering
a complete integrated solution to oversee your entire electrical distribution
system. As a global manufacturer of
low and medium voltage electrical
distribution system equipment and
components, Eaton is an experienced
innovator of Metering Products that
incorporate leading-edge technology.
These innovations result from
our scientific and engineering
expertise, physical resources and
the ongoing R&D programs at our
technology centers.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Overview
May 2014
3.0-3
Sheet 03 003
Selection Chart
Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm)
IQ 250/260 Series
Device Name
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
Section Page Number
3.1-1
3.1-20
3.1-32
Volts
Amperes
Current range (% of nominal)
0.1% of RV + 0.02% FS
0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS
0.00520A (400%)
0.1% of RV
0.1% of RV
0.1200%
0.1% of RV
0.1% of RV
0.1200%
Watts
VARs
VA
0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS
0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS
0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS
0.2% of RV
0.2% of RV
0.2% of RV
0.2% of RV
0.2% of RV
0.2% of RV
PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Frequency
0.1%
0.1%
0.01 Hz
0.2% of RV
0.03 Hz
0.2% of RV
0.03 Hz
THD-voltage
THD-current
Watthours
127th
127th
0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1
40th 2345
40th 2345
0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
40th 6
40th 6
VAR-hours
VA-hours
Ampere-demand

0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS


Watt-demand
VAR-demand
VA-demand



Revenue accuracy
Individual ampere harmonics
Individual voltage harmonics

85th 7
85th 7
ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)

40th 345
40th 345
ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)
Interharmonics
Yes hi
ii
Electrical Parameters
Minimum and/or Maximum Values
3
4
7
8
Volts
Current
Power
L-L, L-N, N-G, VAUX L-L

A, B, C, N, G
Watt, VAR, VA
L-L, L-N
A, B, C, N
Watt, VAR, VA
L-L, L-N
A, B, C
Watt, VAR, VA
Power factor
Frequency
THD
Apparent/displacement
Hertz
Amperes/volts (L-L, L-N, AUX L-L)
Apparent
Hertz
Amperes/volts 2345
Apparent
Hertz
Amperes/volts 6
Demand values
Trend analysis
Event logging
Disturbance recording
kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes

2/4 h/8 i GB
2/4 h/8 i GB
2/4 h/8 i GB, 60 cycles per event

256/512 2/768 345 MB
100,000 alarms/events with timestamp
768 MB, up to 64 cycles per event 45
Storage
2/4 h/8 i GB
256/512 2/768 345 MB
128 KB for logging, up to 8 parameters every

15 minutes for 30 days k
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
Discrete contact inputs
Analog inputs
5 maximum
Optional (2) Form C, 5 A or (4) Form A, 120 mA

Optional (4) 420 mA or (4) 01 mA
Optional (2) or (4)
Optional (2) Form C, 5 A or (4) Form A, 120 mA

Optional (4) 420 mA or (4) 01 mA
Optional (2) or (4)
12
Synch-input kW utility
Via status input
Via end of interval pulse with

optional digital inputs
Via end of interval pulse with

optional digital inputs
13
Auxiliary voltage
Yes
kWh pulse initiator

Waveform display
Waveform capture, samples/cycle
Frequency distribution display
Yes
Local/computer
Yes, 512
Yes
Yes, up to 64 4, up to 512 5
Yes
14
Display type
Display lines/character
Display character height
LCD k
Graphic (320 x 240 pixels)
5.5 mm H x 4 mm W
Red LED
3 lines, 4 characters
0.56 (14.2) H
Red LED
0.56 (14.2) H
15
Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII,
Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0

Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet
TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP,
45 Waveform FTP

Network: Modbus TCP via
Power Xpert Gateway
128 KB k
Other Features
Communications
k Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP,
HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, FTP, DNP 3.0

Setup configuration
Via Web browser/display
Via Web browser/display
Via configuration software/display
Dimensions inches (mm)
Meter: 8.82 (224.0) H x 8.22 (208.8) W x

6.72 (170.7) D
Display: 9.02 (229.1) H x 7.80 (198.1) W x
2.49 (63.2) D
20 to 60C display unit
20 to 70C meter base unit m
TD02601007E
4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x

4.97 (126.2) D
(see Page 3.1-26)
4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x

4.97 (126.2) D
(see Page 3.1-34)
20 to 70C
20 to 70C
Operating temperature range

Reference literature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Under typical operating conditions.

PXM 2260 only.
PXM 2270 only.
PXM 2280 only.
PXM 2290 only.
IQ 260 only.
Individual values reported to 85th harmonic;
anti-alias filtering prevents higher frequencies
from distorting readings (see IEC 61000-4-7).
CA08104001E
h
i
j
k
l
TD02601017E
PXM 6000 only.

PXM 8000 only.
At computer only.
Optional.
The auxiliary voltage option adds three
additional voltage input channels to
Power Xpert Meters.
Using <10 VA meter sourced 24V power.
9
10
11
16
17
18
TD02601016E
Legend:
PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
Auxiliary Voltage
(Optional)
= Provides three additional
voltage inputs to the
meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.
Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter
6000/8000 supported.
19
20
21

Overview
3.0-4
May 2014
Sheet 03 004
Selection Chart
i
ii
Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

Device Name
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series
IQ DP-4000 Series
Section Page Number
3.3-1
Volts
Amperes
0.2% FS 1
0.2% FS 1
3800%
0.3% FS
0.3% FS
10250%
Watts
VARs
VA
0.4% FS, 6 RV 2
0.4% FS, 6 RV 3
0.4% FS, 6 RV 2
0.6% FS
0.6% FS
0.6% FS
PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Frequency
0.8% FS 1
0.8% FS 1
0.04% 1 or 0.01 Hz
1.0% FS
1.0% FS
0.17% FS
THD-voltage
THD-current
Watthours
50th
50th
0.5% RV 2
31st
31st
0.6% FS
VAR-hours
VA-hours
Ampere-demand
1% RV 3
0.5% RV 2
0.2% FS 1
0.6% FS
0.6% FS
0.3%
Watt-demand
VAR-demand
VA-demand
0.4% FS 1
0.4% FS 1
0.4% FS 1
0.6%
0.6%
0.6%
Revenue accuracy
ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)

50th
50th
Interharmonics
Volts
Current
Power
L-L, L-N
A, B, C, N, G
Watt, VAR, VA
L-L, L-N
A, B, C
Watt, VAR, VA
Power factor
Frequency
THD
Hertz
Amperes/volts
Hertz
Amperes/volts
Demand values
Trend analysis
Event logging
All
Time/date
504 events w/timestamp
10 waveform events
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
All
2 Alarms
Other Features
Storage
90 kB
15 Parameters
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
Analog inputs
(4) 10A Form C 5

(4) 010/420 mA
(3) +30 Vdc Differential
(1) 020/420 mA
(3) 10A Form C 6
(1) kW Demand 6
At device or via communications
At device or via communications 6
Auxiliary voltage 7
14
kWh pulse initiator

Waveform display
Waveform capture, samples/cycle
Yes
Local 6/computer
Yes, 128
Local 6/computer
Yes 6
15
Display type
Graphic LCD with LED backlight

Up to 7 Lines
7 Segment LED
1 line, 7 characters
1 line
Communications
Serial: INCOM 8
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 8
Serial: INCOM 8
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 8
Setup configuration
6.70 (170.2) W x 10.30 (261.6) H x

5.40 (137.2) D 9
20 to 70C
TD1702BTE
6.70 (170.2) W x 10.30 (261.6) H x

5.40 (137.2) D 9
20 to 70C
TD1703ATE
12
13
16
17

1
18
2
3
4
19
5
6
20
21
8
9
From 3300% of FS.

At unity power factory and 5300% of FS.
At a power factor < 0.5 and 5300% of FS.
At computer only.
Relays programmable to operate on any
measured function.
Optional.
Power Xpert Meters.
An IPONI is required.
Dimensions in mm = 170.2 W x 261.6 H x 137.2 D
Legend:
PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
Auxiliary Voltage
(Optional)
CA08104001E

Overview
May 2014
3.0-5
Sheet 03 005
Selection Chart
Device Name
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
IQ 130/140/150 Series
IQ 35M
IQ 150S/250S Series
i
ii
1
Section Page Number
3.1-35
3.2-1
3.2-11
Volts
Amperes
0.25% of RV
0.25% of RV
0.1200%
0.4% +0.015% per C deviation from 25C

0.4% (5100%), 0.8%(15%) +0.015% per C from 25C
1120%
0.1% of RV
0.1% of RV
0.1200%
Watts
VARs
VA
0.5% of RV 1
0.5% of RV 1
0.5% of RV 1
0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2
Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs
0.2% of RV
0.2% of RV
0.2% of RV
PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Frequency
0.5% of RV 1
0.03 Hz 1
Calculated: watts/VAs
0.02 Hz
0.2% of RV
0.03 Hz
THD-voltage
THD-current
Watthours
VAR-hours
VA-hours
Ampere-demand

0.25% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 1
2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2

Watt-demand
VAR-demand
VA-demand


2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2
Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs

Revenue accuracy
ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)
ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)
Interharmonics
8
9
2
3
4

Volts
Current
Power
L-L, L-N
A, B, C
Watt, VAR, VA 1
L-L, L-N
A, B, C,
Watt, VAR, VA
Power factor
Frequency
THD
Apparent 1
Hertz 1
Apparent (low alert)

Hertz (out of range alert)
Apparent
Hertz
10
Demand values
Trend analysis
Event logging
kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 1
kW, kVAR, kVA; maximum kW, kVAR, kVA
Logging on demand interval or Modbus command 4

2 MB 5
2 MB 5
11
3
3
Other Features
Storage
10 registers (16 bit) by 5760 entries each

(115 KB) 4
2 MB 5
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
Analog inputs
2-pulse inputs with BACnet
Optional demand synchronization via Modbus
Auxiliary voltage 6
kWh pulse initiator

Waveform display
Waveform capture
Yes
Yes
Display type
Red LED
0.56 (14.2) H
Backlit LCD
2 lines by 5 characters each (full alphanumeric top row)
7.5 mm
Red LED
0.56 (14.2) H
Communications
Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII 4

Network: Modbus TCP 4
Serial: Modbus RTU 4, BACnet MS/TP 4

Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway

Network: Modbus TCP, wired or wireless
Setup configuration
Via display/configuration software
TD02601016E
3.60 (91.4) H x 4.20 (106.7) W x 2.30 (58.4) D

(see Page 3.2-4)
Meter: 30 to 70C
Display: 10 to 50C
TD02601018E
7.90 (200.7) H x 7.50 (190.5) W x 3.10 (78.7) D
4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D

(see Page 3.1-37)
20 to 70C
1
2
3
4
5
6
CA08104001E
TD02601019E
PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
Auxiliary Voltage
(Optional)
13
14
15
16
17
20 to 70C
Legend:
IQ 140/150.
IQ 150 only.
At computer only.
Optional.
IQ 250S only.
Power Xpert Meters.
12
18
19
20
21

Overview
3.0-6
May 2014
Sheet 03 006
Selection Chart

Device Name
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
Power Xpert
Multi-Point Meter
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module (PM3)
IQ Energy Sentinel
Section Page Number
3.2-16
3.2-33
3.2-27
Volts
Amperes
0.2% RV
0.2% RV
0.5% of RV
0.5% of RV
Watts
VARs
VA
0.5% RV
0.5% RV
0.5% RV
1.0% of RV
1.0% of RV
1.0% of RV
1.0% FS
PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Frequency
0.5% RV
0.1 Hz
2.0% of RV
0.1 Hz
THD-voltage
THD-current
Watthours
0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class
1.0% per ANSI C12.1
1.0% FS
VAR-hours
VA-hours
Ampere-demand

1.0% of RV
1.0% of RV
Watt-demand
VAR-demand
VA-demand

1.0% FS
Revenue accuracy
ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)
1.0% per ANSI C12.1
Interharmonics
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6

Volts
Current
Power
L-L, L-N
A, B, C
Watts, VAR, VA
10
Power factor
Frequency
THD
Apparent
Hertz
11
Demand values
Watts (Delivered & Received), Watts (Q1Q4),

VA (Q1, Q4), VA (Q2, Q3)
Interval data
20 latest events and historical
1
1
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Trend analysis
Event logging
Other Features
Storage
256 MB standard, 2 GB optional
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
Analog inputs
1 standard, 8 each module 3
3 standard, 8 each module 3
Circuit breaker status
Via communications only
Via communications and digital input
Auxiliary voltage 2
kWh pulse initiator
Waveform display
Waveform capture
Aggregate or main-digital output, LED output

on meter modules (accuracy check)
Display type
LCD color touchscreen 3

6-inch diagonal
Graphics
Communications
Serial: Modbus RTU

3 Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet
TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP, SFTP
Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU

Network: via Power Xpert Gateway
Serial: INCOM
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway
Setup configuration
Via PXMP configuration software
Via configuration software

Refer to TD150006EN (see Page 3.2-25)

20 to 70C
TD150006EN
Refer to IL01219085E
25 to 70C
IL01219085E
Refer to TD.17.07.T.E. (see Page 3.2-32)

25 to 70C
TD1707TE
19
20
Legend:
PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
Auxiliary Voltage
(Optional)
At computer only.
Power Xpert Meters.
Optional.
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-1
Sheet 03 007
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series
Power Xpert Meter

4000/6000/8000 Series
Both the local graphic display and the

embedded Web server present real
time, historical and event information
in a browser-style graphical format
to help the user interpret key circuit
information, such as:
Current loading
Voltage and power levels
Power factor
energy usage
I/O status
Power quality measurements
Harmonic plots
Disturbance and transient
waveforms
ITIC disturbance summary screen
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/

8000 Series Graphic Display uses a
simple twist and click navigation
control dial to easily navigate the
menus and drill down into increasing
levels of important detail. A back key
enhances the browser-like
navigation of the graphic display.
The Web server provides the energy
and demand readings required to help
manage the cost of energy. It also
provides critical information regarding power quality, such as harmonic
distortion, flicker, crest factor, K-Factor
and more.

Series Display and Meter Base
General Description
8000 Series monitors the critical
aspects of an electrical distribution
system. This premier power quality
metering instrument is simple to use,
powerful, scalable and highly flexible.
8000 offers a new level of intuitive
user interface design, presenting critical electrical distribution system
information in simple-to-navigate
and easy-to-understand information
architecture. The Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display
visualizes the information from up to
16 meter modules. The embedded
Web server displays complex power
quality data using standard Internet
browsers and allows for device
configuration from the browser.
Note: Features and functionality may vary

depending on the meter model and options
being used. Review the Features and
Benefits chart in Table 3.1-2 for details.
Detect and Record High-Speed

Transients to Help:
Avoid equipment damage and

disruption
Identify equipment malfunction
Monitor Circuit Loading to Help:
Avoid overloads and nuisance

overload trips
Maximize equipment utilization
Manage emergency overloads
Manage Energy Utilization to Help:
Reduce peak demand charges

and power factor penalties
Identify excessive energy
consumption
Metered/Monitored Parameters
Identify Power Quality Problems to Help:
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Note: See Table 3.1-2.
Application Description
Identify harmonics, sags, swells
and transients damaging or
disrupting sensitive, missioncritical IT equipment
Boost IT equipments service life
to the maximum
Analyze sequence of events up to
1 millisecond time resolution
Protect motors from damage
Preserve the integrity of processes
and batches
Prevent blown capacitor bank fuses
Protect transformers and conductors
from overheating
Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N, N-G

Phase neutral and ground currents
Power: real, reactive and apparent
Frequency
Power factor: apparent and
displacement
Energy
Demand
% THD
Minimum and maximum values
Harmonics
Flicker
Individual harmonics
Interharmonics
% TDD
ITIC events plot, duration, magnitude
Energy comparisons
Demand comparisons
Event calendar
Event timeline and sequence
Number of 9s of availability
Phasors
Sequence components
Crest factor
K-Factor
PQ index
Accuracy
Currents: 0.05% RV + 0.025%FS

Voltage: 0.1% RV + 0.025% FS
Energy, and demand power:
0.2% in accordance with ANSI C12.20
Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Power factor:
0.10% at Unity PF
0.30% at 0.5 PF
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

3.1-2
May 2014
Sheet 03 008
i
ii
1
2
Communications
For Optional Graphic Display
Multiple communications ports including:
Note: Display ports restrict access to up

to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
meter modules located on the display
RS-485 network.
Standard
RS-485 remote display port

RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave port
RJ-45 10/100Base-T Local Configuration
Port (local Web server connection)
HTTP (local), FTP, COMTRADE
Optional
3
4
5
Communications Expansion Card (CEC)

Selectable 100FX or 10/100Base-T
Ethernet network port
RS-485 Modbus RTU Selectable
Master/Slave port
HTTP (remote), Modbus TCP,
SNMP, SMTP, NTP, DNP 3.0
RS-485 meter display network port

RJ-45 10/100Base-T for access to
Local Display Power Xpert network
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP
Ethernet TCP/IP
HTML
NTP (Network Time Protocol)
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol)
COMTRADE (IEEE C37.111-1999)
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet (Distributed
Network Protocol)
7
8
Two-Piece Design

meter module
Graphic Display 320 x 240 pixel
backlight LCD remote graphics
display (supports up to 16 Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
meter modules)
Display/Meter Mounting Options
Remotely mount the display up to

2000 ft (1210m) away from 1 to 16
Power Xpert Meter modules
Mount the display and Power Xpert
Meter module on opposite sides of a
panel. 15 additional meter bases can
be remotely mounted
Meter Base Unit Characteristics

including optional wall mounting
brackets
NEMA rating: NEMA 1, IP3
Display Unit Characteristics

Depth:
1.45 inches (36.8 mm) behind
panel surface
1.04 (26.3 mm) projection in
front of panel surface
NEMA rating: NEMA 12, IP42 front
of panel rating
10
11
12
13
14
eolr
Power Xpert Meter in

Modbus RTU Slave Mode
Modbus Master
PLC
Figure 3.1-1. RS-485 Network

1. When using Modbus RTU over an
RS-485 communications network,
the data rate, data protocol (data
bit, stop bit and parity) and wiring
topology (two-wire or four-wire)
must be the same for each of
the devices.
2. Connections should be made

using communication/control
shielded cable equivalent to
Belden cable p/n 9463.
15
16
17
Safety: EN61010-1, UL/cUL 61010-1

Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 0.2 class,
ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
EMC: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
EN55011 Class A
Measurement Canada approval
AE-1898 (4000/6000 meters)
Immunity IEC 61326
CE Mark
Power Xpert
Ethernet Switch
18
19
Power Xpert Meter
20
21
Figure 3.1-2. Ethernet Network

1. Optional Ethernet Communications Card must be ordered with
the meter.
Standard Web Browser
2. Available Ethernet connections

are: 10Base-T and ST fiber.
CA08104001E
May 2014

3.1-3
Sheet 03 009
Ease-of-UsePower Xpert Meter

4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display
(Option)
8000 display features a large easy-toread white backlit graphic LCD. The
information presented by the display
is organized into an information
architecture that is easy-to-navigate
and organized for simplicity. Screen
navigation is accomplished using a
navigation control dial and a back
button. The user simply twists the
knob on the navigation control dial to
move between menu selections and
drill down links on the screen. When
the selection is highlighted, pressing
the dial makes the selection.
Information is displayed from a single
meter or an RS-485 daisychain of up to
16 meters. The display features a rich
set of screens including real-time data,
trend plots, waveform views and an
ITIC Plot. The graphic display allows
basic device setup and password
protected resets. An audible alarm
is available to annunciate
alarm conditions.

Embedded Web Server
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
embedded Web server offers Eaton
customers a new level of accessibility
to the critical information required to
manage their electrical distribution
system. The Web server includes
real-time circuit information in both
numeric and graphical visual formats
to help monitor circuit parameters such
as current loading, voltage and power
levels, power factor, THD, Flicker and
more. The Web server also provides
energy and demand readings with
graphic usage plots to help analyze
energy usage patterns. Energy readings
include kWh, kVARh, delivered and
received and kVAh with time of use
and RTP displays. The interval energy
usage plot includes the ability to do
week-to-week and month-to-month
energy consumption graphical
comparisons for benchmarking
purposes. The embedded Web server
will also display in simplified Chinese
if connected to a computer configured
for Chinese language.
Both the Power Xpert Meter 4000/

6000/8000 embedded Web server
and the local graphic display support
graphical trend charts of key circuit
measurements such as current,
voltage, power and energy. The trend
chart supports a zoom feature that
allows the user to view data over a
short period of 16 hours up to 4 years.
The trend chart includes zoom in/out
buttons and a horizontal slider bar
control to manage scrolling forward
and backward through the data. Trend
charts of basic readings include
minimum, maximum and average
readings. Trend charts of interval by
interval energy data also display
peak demand.
Historical Trend Logging
Storage capacity for standard trend

plots includes all of the following
intervals:
Note: For remote access and networking

capabilities such as connecting to a LAN/
WAN, use the optional Communications
Expansion Card (CEC).
Sag/Swell/Transient Capture
and Recording
60 cycles of waveform are oversampled
at 4096 samples per cycle (Power Xpert
Meter 4000/6000), filtered through antialiasing and recorded at 512 samples
per cycle and post event data. The
Power Xpert Meter 8000 samples at
a rate of 100,000 samples per cycle.
Embedded Web server supports
viewing of triggered waveforms one
channel at a time and includes the
ability to zoom and to scroll horizontally
using a slider bar.
The Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000
Series have preconfigured (600V and
below) trigger settings for sags, swells
and transients, and do not require
additional setup by the user. Waveforms are stored in non-volatile flash
memory using an industry standard
COMTRADE format. Waveforms
can be automatically sent out as
COMTRADE attachments to an e-mail
following an event, or can be retrieved
from an FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
directory structure in the Power Xpert
meter modules memory.
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000

records historical data for graphical
viewing from the Local display or the
embedded Web server. Graphical
views of historical data support
pan and zoom. 145 standard metering
parameters are logged as part of the
standard meter functionality including
min./max. and average for each
parameter. The averages are calculated
over the interval period. The minimum
and maximum readings are based on
200 ms calculations.
Every 5 minutes for 48 hours (2 days)

Every 15 minutes for 192 hours
(8 days)
Every hour for 28 days (4 weeks)
Every 8 hours for 56 weeks
Every week for 44 months
i
ii
1
2
3
Note: Trend plot data can be easily exported

to third-party applications, such as Microsoft
Excel in csv-file format.
In addition, metered parameters are

automatically stored on the built-in
FTP Servers, where they can be easily
copied and imported into third-party
applications for benchmarking and
analysis. Logs on the FTP Server
include the min./max. and average
for 145 standard metering parameters
at 5-minute intervals.
Storage capacity for trend data:
63 days of 5-minute interval trend
data. Capacity=18,144 intervals.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

3.1-4
May 2014
Sheet 03 010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Energy Profile Data

8000 records Real and Reactive energy
forward, reverse, net and absolute
sum, as well as Apparent energy
(kVAH). Up to eight status inputs can
be configured as energy accumulators
for counting KYZ pulse inputs (option).
These readings are stored over a
configurable interval from 1 to
60 minutes, as well as in daily and
weekly totals.
With the optional LAN/WAN Ethernet
Communication Expansion Card, users
can easily configure the meters to
send periodic e-mails at user-defined
intervals of energy consumption and
power demand. E-mails contain
a summary of readings per rate
structures and also have the actual
measurements attached to the e-mails
body as a CSV file in a ZIP container.
In addition, metered parameters are
automatically stored on the built-in FTP
Server, where they can be easily copied
and imported into third-party applications for benchmarking and analysis.
Logs on the FTP Server include energy
consumption logs, one for every month
in CSV file format, trended measurement logs also in CSV file format and
waveform captures in COMTRADE
file format.
Storage capacity for energy profile data:
62 days of 15 minute interval

energy and pulse interval data
(Fixed interval capacity = 5952
intervals. Configurable intervals
from 1 to 60 min)
372 days of 1 day accumulated
208 weeks of 1 week accumulated
Energy and Demand Comparisons

Energy and demand usage patterns can
be analyzed with the month-to-month,
week-to-week comparison chart built
into the meter. Raw data can be
exported with the Save Table option
to other applications, such as Excel, for
further analysis and graphing.
Power Xpert Meter Profiler

Free Download
The Power Xpert Meter Profiler is a
free energy-management software
download, compatible with the Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, allowing
a comparison of expected or baseline
energy consumption patterns to actual
usage, and flagging areas of concern
using deviations from modeled energy
patterns. These deviations point to
targets as they hunt for energy
consumption offenders in their facility.
By applying pattern analysis
techniques and intelligently
using color and shape to convey
the results, the Power Xpert Meter
Profiler provides the user an easy-tounderstand visualization of energy
usage, thus offering information for
proactive energy management.
Calendar Usage View
Features and Benefits
Develops a baseline of energy

demand for management analysis
Easily identifies periods of high
energy demand at-a-glance by day,
week and month
Allows for a daily, weekly, monthly
comparison of energy usage
compared to baseline
Allows for detailed comparison
of multi days energy usage
Offers multi views of energy usage
and baseline comparisons to quickly
identify anomalies
Multi-Day Detail Comparison View
The Profiler uses the previous 9 weeks

of data for the energy use baseline, but
you can manually add more values to
the baseline.
The Power Xpert Meter Profiler is also
a predictor: It can predict what energy
consumption would be expected later
in a day. The Real-Time view generates
a baseline from the last two months
and makes a prediction of the future
load. The view represents the current
day (today), and shows three graphs:
the baseline for the day, the historical
data (up to present) and the predicted
future data. Instantaneous data is
retrieved and averaged to keep the
graphs up-to-date. The averaged
values are shown as shapes at the
current time: Instantaneous, 1-minute
average and 15-minute average.
In addition, users can add the data
from two different Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000s into one calendar
view. The profiler will mathematically
combine the two loads into a totalized
view. It is also possible to change the
percentage contribution of each meter,
as well as subtract a portion of one
meter from another.
To download the tool, go to
www.eaton.com/pxm and click on
the link for the Power Xpert Meter
Profiler. Registration will be required
to download.
18
19
20
Daily Detailed Energy Usage View
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-5
Sheet 03 011
Eaton Power Xpert Energy

ViewerFree Download
The Power Xpert Energy Viewer (PXEV)
provides the means to develop an
energy usage baseline for energy
management programs, comparing
interval logged data points. It is a free
Web download for compatible Eaton
product home pages. This tool allows
easy interpretation of the data collected
by compatible devices via graphical
charts, graphs and reports without
having to export the available .csv file
into Microsoft Excel or another tool.
See Page 3.1-31 for more information.
Event Logging
ITIC Analysis Plot

8000 local graphic display or the
embedded Web server both allow the
user to view a list of triggered events
along with any captured parameters,
event details, and triggered waveforms. In addition, a separate event log
includes a variety of activities including acknowledged triggers,
new min. and max. events, and system
operations such as resets. The size
of the event log is virtually unlimited
based only on the memory
option selected.
The Power Xpert Meter graphic

display (option) and Web server
(option) include a graphic representation of the ITIC plot (Power Xpert
Meter 6000/8000) with counts of
disturbances and transients that
have occurred. The ITIC plot organizes
events into eight distinct disturbance
zones corresponding to severity and
a 9th zone for transients. A pass/fail
count is displayed to indicate how
many events are outside the ITIC
limits. Clicking on any counter in the
ITIC Web page will link the user to the
event view and display all triggered
events in the selected zone. This
makes it simple to view disturbance
waveforms associated with the
ITIC plot.
E-mail Notification
Comparison Summary
Event Triggers
8000 supports five types of
configurable event triggers:
Out of limits (4000/6000/8000)

Demand overload (4000/6000/8000)
Sub-cycle disturbance
(4000/6000/8000)
ITIC (6000/8000)
Fast transient (8000)
With the optional LAN/WAN Ethernet

Communication Expansion Card
attached to the Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000, the users can easily
configure the meters to send periodic
e-mails at user-defined intervals for
energy consumption and power
demand. E-mails contain a summary
of readings per rate structures and
also have the actual measurements
attached to the e-mails body as a CSV
file in a ZIP container. Prompt alarm
e-mails can also be sent for any event
condition either standard in the meter
or ones set up by the user based on
thresholds, dV/dt triggers or IO status
changes with the optional IO Card.
Alarm e-mails can be configured to
have the COMTRADE waveform
capture attached to the e-mails body.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
A separate ITIC graph is available to

review individual ITIC events. This
graph will show the user the event hit
position on the graph and the event
duration and magnitude.
Inputs and Outputs
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 is

available with an optional digital I/O
card that includes:
Eight digital inputsself sourced

24 Vdc
Three relay outputs5A max.
continuous, 240 Vac max.,
30 Vdc max.
Two solid-state outputs80 mA
max. continuous, 30 Vdc max.
Each of the eight inputs are interrupt
driven, allowing for 1 ms accuracy
of digital events time stamps
(1 ms accuracy requires local NTP
TimeServer). Inputs can also be
configured for demand synch, and
pulse counting. Inputs selected for
pulse counting can be scaled. Interval
by interval pulse recordings are
maintained in profile memory and
can be displayed graphically.
Outputs can be used for KYZ, or
alarm annunciation.
These triggers permit pickup, reset

and pickup delay to be configured
by the user. When a trigger occurs,
actions include Performance Monitoring
(#9s analysis), Capturing Waveform,
Capture Parameters, Send E-mail and
Operate a Relay Output. The Graphic
Display flashes an LED to annunciate
the alarm condition. An audible alarm
is also available.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Trigger options include:
18
Out of limits: over 100 triggers

Demand overload: 10 triggers
ITIC: eight triggers
Fast transient: dV/dT and absolute
per phase
Sub-cycle disturbancedV/dT
and absolute
19
Periodic E-mail Message
20
21
CA08104001E

3.1-6
May 2014
Sheet 03 012
Ratings
Application to 500 kV, no PTs to 600V

CT ratios selectable from standard
120/600 Vac line
CT inputs accept 5A secondary
Power supply: standard 120/240 Vac
or 110/250 Vdc
Storage Capacity
Table 3.1-1. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Estimated Memory and Storage Capacity with 2/4/8 GB Memory Capacity
ii
Event
File Size
(KB)
Severe
Typical
PXM 4000
2 GB
Subcycle disturbance
1260
10
60
12.3
73.8
166
28
PXM 6000
4 GB
ITIC event
1260
20
6.2
24.6
666
166
Typical
PXM 8000
7
1
Occurrence
Per Month 1
Months of Capacity
with 8 GB Memory 2
Memory
4
5
Memory
Usage (MB)
Model
8 GB
Severe
Typical
Severe
1260
10
60
12.3
73.8
333
55
ITIC + subcycle disturbance
Total--->
15
80
18.5
98.4
222
42
333
ITIC event
1260
20
6.2
24.6
1332
1260
10
60
12.3
73.8
666
111
Transients
2048
30
6.0
60.0
1365
137
ITIC + subcycle disturbance + transients
Total--->
18
110
24.5
158.4
335
52
The typical and severe power quality event occurrences are estimates and may vary depending on the electrical environment.
Memory is not allocated by event category; memory is used first come, first served.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-7
Sheet 03 013
Power Xpert Meter 4000
Harmonics
Disturbance capture
Low frequency transient detection
and capture
Standard power quality index
2 GB data logging
Harmonics, including individual

harmonics
Flicker calculations
ITIC performance curve
Event calendar view
Events timeline view
Sequence of events waveform plot
Enhanced power quality index
4 GB data logging
Impulsive transient capture at 6 MHz

100,000 samples per cycle
Premium power quality index
8 GB data logging
ii
1
2
3
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benefits

Feature
Power Xpert Meter
Benefit
Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter

over the network, Internet.
Time of usage can be set up to support four different schedules.
Enables you to flash the meter with the latest firmware updates.
The meter can automatically adjust to the environment and alarm

only when real events occur.
Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average,

trend graph analysis, export, print
Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze

parameters right on the meter or external software.
Energy and demand plot comparisons month-to-month,

week-to-week
Plot two months or two weeks for vivid energy or demand

comparison.
Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive, frequency
Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential

PF penalties.
Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, TOU, profile,

previous month comparison, graph analysis, export, print
Keep track of your energy usage, compare time of usage

and usage against previous month, identify peaks to conserve
energy usage.
4000
6000
8000
Embedded Web server
TOU metering support
Firmware flash update support
Self-learning capability
(characterizes normal per circuit)
General
Power, Energy and Demand
6
7
8
9
10
Power Quality Analysis

Statistical analysis (minimum, maximum, average)
Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas.
Sag and swell monitoring, management and recording
Capture electrical sags and swells and analyze the waveforms.
Symmetrical components: zero, negative, positive
Analyze possibly unbalanced three-phase power systems.
Low frequency transient detection and capture
Capture lower frequency transient waveforms for retrospective

analysis or e-mailing.
Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle
4096
4096
100,000 Extremely high sampling rate will effectively capture

impulsive transients.
Number of Nines uptime data (e.g., 6 nines=99.9999%)
Review uptime availability per cent.
K-factor
Review the ratio of eddy current losses, e.g., when driving

non-linear and linear loads.
Crest factor
Review the peak-to-average ratio of the waveform.
Define appropriate security access level per user.
Security
Secure 5 level user access privileges
1
11
12
13
14
15
Delta-Sigma A/D oversampling rate.
Note: These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options
installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and
product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and user manual for detailed specifications.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

3.1-8
May 2014
Sheet 03 014
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benefits (Continued)

Feature
Power Xpert Meter
Benefit
4000
6000
8000
Modbus TCP
Easy integration with standard protocol to power management

and other software.
Modbus RTU
Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several

(116) meters together.
HTML
Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web

browser.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to

existing NMS system.
Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Access, copy, paste, cut waveform capture files on the meter with
an FTP Client.
Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize

time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution.
COMTRADE, open IEEE standard file format for waveform

capture export
Import waveform captures in standard IEEE (C37.111-1999) COMTRADE file format to third-party software.
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet (Distributed Network Protocol)
Communicate with the meter via DNP 3.0 over Ethernet, hook to
existing utility systems.
Trend measurements CSV file export
Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, e.g.,

Microsoft Excel in standard CSV file format.
I/O (eight digital inputs, three relay outputs,

two solid-state KYZ outputs)
The Power Xpert Meter I/O Card is extremely flexible and can be
used in a large variety of different applications. Digital inputs and
relay outputs can be programmed to interact during various
conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices, such as
alarm, pulse meters, trip units, sensors can be easily integrated to
the Power Xpert Meter. Triggers and events can be tied to the
meters standard functions such as, e.g., e-mail, logs and trends.
Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize

time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution
The GPS option allows the meter to synchronize time over the GPS
satellite positioning system up to the 1 millisecond resolution
Communications and I/O
8
Time Synchronization
NTP time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy

GPS time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy
10
11
12
15
16
17
Trend logging
Log trend information for easy statistical analysis.
Review the load profile graph to get a better understanding of

your electrical load versus time.
Event logging
Log events for retrospective event analysis.
Store large amounts of waveform captures and events for

historical analysis.
Memory and Storage
Harmonics
127
127
127
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter.
Delta-Sigma D/A conversion technology
Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion.
Harmonics over-sampling (4096 samples per cycle)
Over-sampling enables the usage of Anti-Aliasing technology,

increasing accuracy.
Anti-alias filtering
Technology to remove out-of-band signal components resulting

in more accurate data.
Review individual harmonic levels directly on the meter.
Total Demand Distortion (TDD)
Identify harmful harmonics in, e.g., lightly loaded variable-speed

drive environments where THD may be high but not relative.
Interharmonics allow you to see what is going on between the

integer multiples of the fundamental. Zoom in on the harmonics
trend graph and review frequency content every 5 Hz instead of
every 60 Hz.
Interharmonics
18
1
19
Load profile
Harmonic levels
14
Logs
Standard memory, GB
13
Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion.
When used with third-party device and I/O option.
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-9
Sheet 03 015

Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benefits (Continued)
Feature
Power Xpert Meter
Benefit
4000
6000
8000
Subcycle disturbance capturing
Capture fast voltage changes/low frequency transient

(e.g., capacitor switching transient).
dV/dt triggers for subcycle oscillatory transients
Detect and record a large magnitude oscillation transient

resulting in equipment damage.
Absolute threshold and dV/dt triggering
Detect and record if a surge suppressor is necessary.
Power quality indexstandard

(includes dv/dt count, %TDDi and %THDv)
Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format.
Power quality indexenhanced (includes standard

index plus Sag level, swell level and flicker)
Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format

(includes ITIC events and flicker calculations).
Flicker calculations
Detect and quantify low frequency rms voltage variations

causing incandescent lighting flicker.
Automatic trigger setting
Trigger thresholds are automatically set according to ITIC

(CBEMA) standard, no need to figure this out by yourself.
Automatic event severity analysis
Automatically analyze the severity of the event with the ITIC

(CBEMA) performance curve plot, see where the event actually hit.
Event severity counters
An ITIC (CBEMA) event counter keeps track of the number

of all sags, swells and transients.
ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously

CBEMA performance curve
ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously

CBEMA performance curve for easy power problem evaluation.
Custom ITIC (CBEMA) plot with individual event magnitude

and duration
Review custom ITIC (CBEMA) plots of individual events

showing you the actual magnitude, duration and hit are in
a simple graphical representation.
Event calendar view
The Events Timeline calendar view provides instant insight to the

frequency of power events and helps detect reoccurring problems.
Events timeline view
View and understand the sequence of events that have

occurred during a period of time.
Sequence of events and events plot on waveform
Plot color-coded events on a captured waveform to gain

insight into the sequence of events cycle per cycle.
Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format

(includes ITIC events and flicker calculations).
Highlights
Power quality indexpremium (includes enhanced

index plus counts of impulsive transients)
High-Speed Transient Capture and Detection

6 MHz capture of impulsive transients
Capture impulsive transients by taking six samples every

millionth of a second.
Transient capture duration: ~20 ms/6M Hz ~120 ms/1 MHz
Record and analyze transients during a longer timeframe.
Waveform recorded at 100,000 samples per cycle
High-speed ensures impulsive transients are correctly

captured (fast rise time).
Three-phase voltage and neutral-to-ground fast

transient capture
Capture impulsive transients on all four channels.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
3.1-10 Advanced and Electronic Metering

May 2014
Sheet 03 016

Graphic Display (Option) Features
ii
A menu-driven graphical display

with information organized into a
user-friendly information architecture.
The Homepage (see below) offers:
Selecting the trend plot for a given

parameter displays a historical graph
of the selected parameter over the last
16 hours. The zoom buttons change
the time scale to one of several data
views based on historical averages
with min./max. The Pan button allows
scrolling within the selected view.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Graphical level indicator based on

a statistical analysis for three-phase
line-to-line and line-to-neutral
voltage and per phase currents
to quickly indicate out of normal
readings
Large easy-to-read average L-L
voltage average phase currents
and system frequency can be
highlighted and selected using
the navigation control dial to drill
down for additional detail
Menu selections for meter, power,
quality, events and setup are shown
for ease of navigation into display for
more detail, or basic device setup
Ethernet Settings
Ethernet and other settings can be

input or verified via the Power Xpert
LCD Display.
Note: Some of the other settings are
specific only to the Web Browser GUI.
Trend Plot
Waveforms can be displayed for

currents and voltages. The waveforms
can be viewed on demand for steadystate conditions. Triggered waveforms
can also be displayed to view sag/
swell or transient data.
9
10
ITIC Plot (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
11
12
13
Homepage
Highlighting a field such as the

avg. current value and pressing the
navigation control dial brings up a
detail screen like the one below.
Waveform Viewer
The Power Xpert Meter classifies

disturbances and summarizes the
results graphically using the ITIC plot.
The number of ITIC sags and swells
are indicated for each of nine severity
levels. A pass/fail summary is shown
to indicate how many events are
outside the ITIC pass zone.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Current Summary
Highlighting an individual reading

on the detail summary level screen
and selecting it drills down to a level
including links to min./max., historical
trend plots, triggers, harmonic spectral
data, and waveform viewing.
Harmonic Spectrum
The harmonic spectral plot displays

both harmonics and interharmonics up
to the 85th order. A detailed table also
includes individual magnitudes and
angles of current and voltage
harmonics, as well as a harmonic
power calculation at each frequency.
CA08104001E
May 2014

3.1-11
Sheet 03 017
Power Xpert Meter

Graphic Display (Option) Screens

Web Browser Views
Meter Top Level Screen
The Web server allows the user

to view waveforms of the voltage
and current to spot power quality
problems such as notching.
V-LL avg, V-LN avg, IA, IB, IC, Iavg, Freq.
Meter Detail Screens
Power Top Level Screen
Power Detail Screens

Per phase detail, kVA, kVAR, kW, Min./
Max. with date/time of occurrence,
Trend Plots, Triggers.
Quality Top Level Screen

10 min. and 24 hr. PQIndex, THDI,
THDV, K-Factor, Crest Factor, Flicker
Pst, %9s of Reliability.
Quality Detail Screens

Per phase detail L-L, L-N,V aux,
Odd, Even, Interharmonics, Present,
Min/Max, Trend Plots, Harmonic
spectrum plots, waveform plots.
Events Top Level Screen

Active/Acknowledged Event list, Trigger List, System Log, ITIC Curve Link.
Event Detail Screens

Event List, Condition, Acknowledge
Button, Trigger Date/Time, Trigger
description.
Setup Top Level Screen

View setup, Edit setup, Login, Logout.
Setup Detail Screens

Quick Setup, Trigger setup,
Detail setting.
ii
1
Per phase detail L-L, L-N, Symmetrical

Comp, Aux. Channels, Min./Max. with
date/time of occurrence, Trend Plots,
Triggers, Phasors.
Three-Phase Power Factor, kWHr,
kWd, Real-Time kW, kVAR, kVA,
Load Profile Link.
3
Web Browser Homepage (Note: 4000
does not include flicker, ITIC)

embedded Web server offers Eaton
customers a new level of accessibility
to the critical information required to
manage the electrical distribution
system. The embedded Web server
includes real time circuit information
in both numeric and graphical formats
to help monitor circuit parameters
such as current loading, voltage and
power levels, power factor.
4
Events Timeline
(Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
View and understand the sequence

of events that have occurred during a
period of time. Plot color-coded events
on captured waveforms to gain insight
into the sequence of events from
one single cycle to the next one. This
provides the user an excellent vantage
point to review and compare multiple
events at an unprecedented resolution.
6
7
8
9
The Web server also provides the

energy and demand readings required
to help manage the cost of energy.
Readings include kWh, kVARh,
delivered and received and kVAh with
time-of-use and separate status input
controlled energy accumulation to
account for energy during special times
such as rate alert periods or stand-by
generator times of operation.
The Web server also includes critical
information regarding Power Quality
such as harmonic distortion, flicker
(Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000), crest
factor, K-Factor and more.
10
11
12
Harmonic Spectral Plot

both harmonics and interharmonics up
to the 85th order. A detailed table also
includes individual magnitudes and
angles of current and voltage
harmonics, as well as a harmonic
power calculation at each frequency.
Even, odd and total THD are displayed
for diagnostic purposes. In addition,
the Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000
provides interharmonics, which
allow users to see what is going on
between the integer multiples of
the fundamental.
13
14
15
16
17
18
Steady-State Waveform
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 018
i
ii
1
2
3
Historical Trend Plot
Graphical Trending of Data
4
5
6
7
8
9

8000 embedded Web server supports
graphical trend charts of key circuit
measurements such as current,
voltage, power and energy. The trend
chart supports a zoom feature that
allows the user to view data over a
short period of 16 hours or a longer
period of 48 months. The trend chart
has a horizontal slider bar control to
manage scrolling forward and backward through the data. Trend charts
of basic readings include minimum,
maximum and average readings.
Trend charts of energy data also
display demand values.
10
12
13
Energy Comparison
15
16
17
18
ITIC Analysis Plot (Power Xpert 6000/8000)
The ITIC Web page includes counters to

track the occurrence of disturbances and
a pass/fail summary. In addition, selecting any disturbance counter links to a
detailed event view of the disturbances
in that ITIC category. Disturbance waveforms can be viewed from the browser.
Disturbance Recording
Events Calendar
(Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
Sag/Swell Recording
11
14
Demand Comparison
Demand comparison compares power

consumption day-to-day, month-tomonth or week-to-week. Power Xpert
Meters can set to measure demand at
1 to 60 minute intervals. Both sliding
and fixed interval windows are
supported for maximum flexibility.
Energy usage patterns can be effortlessly analyzed with the month-tomonth, week-to-week comparison
chart. Raw data can be easily exported
with the Save Table option to other
applications such as Excel for further
analysis or graphing (firmware
version 12.x.x and higher only).
Note: All data logging for trend plotting is
automatically preconfigured in the Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000. In addition,
the 6000 and 8000 Series Meters have
sag, swell and transient triggers built-in
according to the ITIC (CBEMA) standard.
60 cycles of waveform are recorded

at 256 samples per cycle including
30 cycles of pre and post trigger data.
8000 embedded Web server supports
viewing of triggered waveforms one
channel at a time including the ability
to zoom and to scroll horizontally
using a slider bar. Waveforms are
stored in Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000 non-volatile flash memory
using an industry standard Comtrade
format. Waveforms can be automatically sent out by e-mail following an
event, or can be retrieved from an
FTP directory structure in the meter
modules memory.
The Events Timeline calendar view

provides instant insight to the
frequency of power events and
helps detect reoccurring problems.
Color-coded events can be filtered
to detect specific issues.
Web Server Device Configuration

Special software is not required to configure a Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/
8000. The embedded Web server
includes comprehensive device
setup capability.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-13
Sheet 03 019
PQ Index
Power at a Glance
i
ii
1
2
3
Figure 3.1-5. Power at a Glance
Easily Upgrade Your Power Xpert

Meter 4000 to a 6000
Figure 3.1-3. PQ Index
A statistical analysis comparing the
last 10 minute and 24 hour periods
Power Quality to the historical norm
for the circuit.
The PQ Index score results in a
Power Quality rating of Normal,
Caution and Alert for the period.
Flicker (EN61000-4-15; Power Xpert

Meter 6000/8000)
Eaton understands that our customers

needs change over time. Thats why
weve developed meters that can grow
with you. Once a Power Xpert Meter
4000 is purchased, you have the
ability to upgrade to a Power Xpert
Meter 6000, with no intervention from
Eaton, when needed. All the features
of the Power Xpert Meter 4000 that
you have been using and depend on
remain, however, once updated, all the
additional features of the Power Xpert
Meter 6000 are available. The selfupgrade is available on Eatons Web
site. Youll need a credit card, your
Power Xpert Meter 4000 serial number
and date code (you will be presented
with this information if you are using
the upgrade link directly from your
Power Xpert Meter) and your e-mail
address. Once you have completed
the purchase, we will send you your
new license key information via
e-mail that will allow you to complete
the upgrade.
Figure 3.1-4. Flicker

Flicker values for Perceptibility,
PST and PLT are calculated based
on EN61000-4-15 guidelines.
High-speed triggering of waveforms based on events such as

breaker trips or static transfers
Demand interval timing taken
from a master utility meter end
of interval pulse
Status inputs are self sourced providing a nominal 24 Vdc (2030 Vdc)
across the circuit.
Names can be configured for each
input for ease of use.
Relay Outputs
The optional PXIO-B card includes
three 5 A form C relay outputs rated
for 240 Vac or 30 Vdc. These outputs
can be used for applications such as:
Alarm annunciation
KYZ pulse output
Alarm outputs can be driven from
triggers based on metering values.
Output modes include:
4
5
6
7
8
Normalrelay energized during

alarm condition
Latchedrelay energized by
event trigger, de-energized
by acknowledgement
Timedrelay energized by
event trigger, maintained for a
programmed interval
Auxiliary Voltage Option

The optional auxiliary voltage
selection allows for sensing of
another input voltage such as a
transformer or UPS and secondary
voltage from transformer or UPS
output. This option permits waveform
or harmonic comparisons across
these devices.
9
10
11
12
13
14
Discrete Contact Inputs
15
The optional PXIO-B expansion

card offers eight digital inputs that
are useful for a variety of applications
such as:
16
Status indication with time

stamping of transitions
(1 ms precision)
Pulse Counting of KYZ or other
utility pulses such as air, water
or gas
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 020
i
ii
1
Communications Expansion
Card (CEC)
The optional CEC Card offers
two Ethernet connection options,
10/100Base-T and a fiber-optic port that
can be used for the following applications:
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Monitoring, managing and configuring the meter remotely using a

standard Web Browser interface
like Microsoft Internet Explorer
Alarm notifications via e-mail, SMTP
Enabling access to the meters
FTP server (energy, trend and
waveform logs)
Providing Modbus TCP/IP or RTU
communications to BMS systems
Providing DNP 3.0 over Ethernet to
utility systems
Providing SNMP communications
to NMS systems
Synchronizing with an NTP server
for 1ms timestamping resolution
Asset management via SNMP to
Updating firmware on the meter
Figure 3.1-6. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module Layout

I/O Card (option)
1 Digital inputs 1-8.
b Solid-state outputs 1-2.
c Relay outputs 1-3.
CT and Voltage Connections
4 CT input connections.
e Standard three-phase voltage phase inputs.
f Auxiliary channel voltage inputs (option).
Communication Expansion Card (LAN/WAN Ethernet Networking) (option)
g 100FX ST-type Ethernet (multi-mode).
h 10/100Base-T Ethernet.
i RS-485 (two-wire w/shield)24V accessory power (Com 2).
j RS-232 (Tx Rx) Modbus RTU (Com 3).
Standard Features
k Local RJ-45 config. port (non-networkable Ethernet).
l RS-485 (two-wire w/shield) Modbus RTU (Com 1).
m Meter mounting brackets.
n Sealable mode switch cover.
o Control power (100240 Vac and 110250 Vdc) (20%).
p Display RS-485 network port (up to 15 meters)24V accessory power (Com 0).
q Meter base address.
r Com reset button.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-15
Sheet 03 021
V1
V2
V3
V4
VR
(+) L
ii
52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11
PSI2
() N
Control
Power
120/240 AC
110/250 DC
Current Inputs
Voltage Inputs
Protective
Earth /
Chassis
Ground
Disconnect
Switch
Breaker
1
2
Shorting
Block
Disconnect
Switch
3
4
L3
5
Line
Load
L2
L1
6
7
Figure 3.1-7. Three-Phase Three-Wire Delta (Up to 600V)
Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
9
Current Inputs
Voltage Inputs
3
V1
V2
V3
V4
VR
(+) L
10
52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11
PSI2
() N
Control
Power
120/240 AC
110/250 DC
11
Protective
Earth /
Chassis
Ground
Disconnect
Switch
12
Breaker
Disconnect
Switch
13
Shorting
Block
14
15
16
L2
Line
Load
L3
L1
17
18
Figure 3.1-8. Three-Phase Three-Wire Delta (Above 600V)

19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 022
i
ii
7.22
(183.5)
1.50
(38.1)
1.45
(36.8)
5X #8 32 Thread
Thread Depth 0.31
1
2
3.00 Ref.
(76.2)
0.57
(14.5)
7.80
(198.0)
PowerXpert
3.00 Ref.
(76.2)
EVENTS
3
4
5
9.02
(229.0)
7.22
(183.5)
Model#: PX8000
Catalog#: PX8054A1CB
Style#: 65D8054G010
Serial#: 000042
G.O.#: XXXXXXXXXX
Power Supply: 24 VDC (+/ -20%)
SELV, 8W MAX.
Oper Temp: -20 TO 60C
7.76 Ref.
(197.1)
Rev: 1
Date Code: C050131
MADE IN CANADA
Push to
Hold in for
Select Turn to
Help
Highlight
DO NOT HIPOT / DIELECTRIC TEST

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: 1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY
CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
BACK
Customer Satisfaction for Technical Support

www.eaton.com
1-800-809-2772 or 1-414-449-7100
E18555
9
24 Vdc Input
Power
Display Link
Com 0
DG2-
DG3 10/100 T
Li
TX R
nk
DX
3
2 1
C 24
SH
O +
M
DG13
SH D
B
1
D
A
7
4.00 Ref.
(101.6)
1.04
(26.3)
0.46
(11.6)
9
10
Figure 3.1-9. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Multimeter Graphic Display (PXD-MMG)
Sold Separately, Supports up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Modules
11
9.56 (242.8)
12
13
4x 0.20
( 5.2)
14
4x R0.11
(R2.8)
15
6.72 (208.3)
8.88 (255.6)
6.33 (160.8)
16
17
18
19
8.32
(211.3)
5.00
(127.0)
7.36
(186.9)
1.60
(40.6)
20
8.20 (208.3)
0.42 (10.7)
21
0.34
(8.6)
Figure 3.1-10. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module

CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-17
Sheet 03 023
Power Xpert Meters Configuration and Wiring Examples
Modbus RTU
(RS-485) Master
Up to 16 Meters can be Daisy-Chained to a

Single Power Xpert Meter LCD Display
Power Xpert
Software
Web
Browser
Modbus TCP
Master
ii
1
Up
to 16
2
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Display Link (RS-485)
Figure 3.1-11. Display Link
4
Modbus RTU (RS-485)

Master
Figure 3.1-14. Web EnabledAdvanced System Functionality
5
6
Modbus RTU (RS-485)

Up
to 16
Flow Meter
(Pulse Count)
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/Tamper Switch
8
9
Figure 3.1-12. Modbus RTU (RS-485)Non-Web Enabled

Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Master
Web
Browser
10
Modbus TCP
Master
Trip and Sequence

of Events
Alarm
Eight programmable digital inputs

Two solid-state programmable outputs
Three relay programmable outputs
11
12
Figure 3.1-15. AccessoriesI/O Card (Option)
13
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Up
to 16
14
Water Leak and

Vibration Sensors
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/
Tamper Switch
Figure 3.1-13. Web EnabledBrowser and Modbus TCP
15
16
17
Alarm
Smoke Alarm
Eight programmable digital inputs
Two solid-state programmable outputs
Three relay programmable outputs
Figure 3.1-16. IT Configuration ExamplesAccessories

I/O Card (Option)
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 024
i
ii
1
2
3
4
To order a Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000, the catalog number should
be determined using the chart shown
in Table 3.1-3. The chart illustrates how
to include the desired factory options
as part of a catalog number. Option
cards that are selected at time of order
entry will be installed at the factory.
Option cards are also field installable
for field upgrades.
If a display is required, it should be
ordered separately. The Multi-Meter
Graphic Display is capable of displaying data from an RS-485 daisychain of
up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/

8000 meter modules over a distance
of up to 2000 ft. Power Xpert meter
modules include panel mounting
brackets. The Multi-Meter Graphic
Display is designed to mount separately. If back-to-back meter to display
panel mounting is desired, a mounting
bracket kit is available (PX-PMBA).
Technical Data
Environmental Conditions
Example 1: PXM8251A1BB
(PXM 8000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr,
Com. Exp. and I/O Cards)
Example 2: PXM6251A1BA
(PXM 6000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr,
Com. Exp. Card)
Current Inputs (Each Channel)
Table 3.1-3. Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter Catalog Numbering System
PXM 8 0 5 1 A 1 B B
Model Series
4 = 4000 (standard
power quality), 2 GB
6 = 6000 (enhanced
power quality), 4 GB
8 = 8000 (premium PQ w/
transient capture), 8 GB
7
8
9
Voltage Input Configuration
10
0 = Standard (V1, V2, V3, V4)

2 = Standard plus auxiliary
(V6, V7, V8)
11
Card Slot 3 Configuration

A = No card option
B = I/O option card
(eight digital inputs,
two solid-state outputs,
three relay outputs)
Power Supply Configuration
12
1 = Standard communications module
with RS-485
Example 1: PXM8251A1BB (PXM 8000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. and I/O Cards)
Example 2: PXM6251A1BA (PXM 6000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. Card)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Conversion: 4096 rms samples

per cycle delta-sigma converter
digitally filtered down to 512
samples per cycle for anti-aliasing
PT input: 120500,000V primary
Input range: 600V L-L, 347 L-N
direct connect
Nominal full scale: 1000V rms
Input impedance: 2 megohms
Frequency Range
13
Conversion: 4096 samples per cycle

delta-sigma converter digitally filtered
down to 512 samples per cycle
CT Input: 4096 rms samples
per cycle delta-sigma converter
digitally filtered down to 512
samples per cycle for anti-aliasing
Burden: less than 10 milliohms
Overload withstand: 500A for
1 second, non-repeating
Range: 0.00520A continuous
Accuracy: 0.05% or reading plus
0.01% of full scale (from 50 milliamps
to 20A)
Voltage Inputs (Each Channel)
A = No card option
B = Communication expansion card
for LAN/WAN Ethernet
networking w/10/100Base-T,
100F, RS-485, RS-232 Ports
1 = Standard 100240 Vac or

110250 Vdc power supply
Operating temperature:
Meter: 20 to +70C
Display: 20 to 60C operating
Storage temperature: 40 to 85C
Operating humidity:
595% condensing
Device weight: 7.1 lbsmeter
2.1 lbsdisplay
Meter and back of display are
pollution degree 2
Elevation to 6562 ft (2000m)
127th harmonic
Accuracy
Table 3.1-4. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Accessories
4763 Hz
Harmonic Response (Voltage, Current)

IEC 687 0.2 Class
Discrete Inputs
Description
Catalog
Number
Digital I/O Card: eight digital input, two solid-state output, three relay output
Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking:
100FX fiber-optic, 10/100T, RS-485, RS-232
Graphic display module
PXMIO-B
PXMCE-B
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for back-to-back meter to graphic display mounting

Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a graphic display to an
IQ Analyzer cutout
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for reduced graphic display rear clearance
PX-PMBA
PX-PMBB
PX-PMBC
Solid-State Outputs
Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 license upgrade key 1
PXM-4KUPG
PXD-MMG
Applicable to PXM 4000 Meters only. Upgrade package to be field loaded by customer.
Provides enhanced PXM 6000 functionality in an existing PXM 4000 Meter, including ITIC
and calendar functions.
Note: Communication cable (standard Modbus RTU) is not included in the package for
meter module connection.
21
Self sourced: 24 Vdc
Relay Output Contacts
5A maximum, 240 Vac maximum,

30 Vdc maximum
Lifetime: 1,000,000 no load operations
100,000 under rated voltage and load
Maximum load: 100 milliamps

Max. voltage: 30V (externally sourced)
Control Power Input
Input range AC: 100240 Vac (20%)

Frequency range: 4763 Hz
Input range DC: 110250 Vdc 20%
Burden 50 VA
Ride-through: 15s
CA08104001E
May 2014

3.1-19
Sheet 03 025
Ethernet-Ready Power
Quality & Energy (PQ&E)
Power Xpert Meters
Layout Diagrams
Modbus Master
ii
General Description
One or more Ethernet-ready PQ&E

Power Xpert Meters may be deployed
in various power distribution and
motor control applications.
Equipment

Options
Ethernet Expansion CardCEC

(recommended one per meter)
Local display (one per 16 meters)
Modbus RTU (RS-485) (standard)

Display link (RS-485) (standard)
Modbus TCP/IP (with CEC)
HTTP (with CEC)
FTP (with CEC)
SMTP (with CEC)
SNMP (with CEC)
XML/SOAP (with CEC)
DNP 3.0 (with CEC)
eolr
Modbus RS-458 Network
Figure 3.1-17. Power Xpert Meter Used in a Modbus RS-485 Network Application
Power Xpert
Software
Building
Management
System
5
6
7
Web
Browser
Network
Time Server
8
9
Ethernet
Network
XML/SOAP
Modbus TCP/IP
HTTP
NTP
10
11
Identify power quality problems,

view waveforms, monitor circuit
loading, and manage energy
use via standard Web browser
(PXM 4000/6000/8000)
View ITIC plots, Enhanced Power
Quality Index (PQI), and event/
calendar view via Web browser
(PXM 6000/8000)
Detect and record high-speed
transients (PXM 8000)
12
Figure 3.1-18. Power Xpert Meter Used in an Ethernet Network Application
13
14
15
16

17
18

(BMS)
HMI
Foreseer Software
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 026
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
Power Xpert Meter

2000 Series
ii
1
2
3
4
The embedded Web server displays

comprehensive power quality data
using standard Internet browsers and
allows for device configuration from
the browser. The embedded Web
server presents real time, historical,
and event information in a browserstyle graphical format to help the user
interpret information such as current
loading, voltage and power levels,
power factor, energy usage, I/O status,
power quality measurements, as well
as harmonic plots. The embedded
Web server also allows for waveform
capture and for visualizing steady-state
harmonic content that is critical for
power quality analysis.

manage the cost of energy.

and batches
Protect transformers and conductors
from overheating
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
General Description
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
power quality instrument monitors the
most critical aspects of an electrical
distribution system. This premier
power quality metering instrument
uses the latest in advanced technology
to make it simple to use, powerful,
scalable and highly flexible. The Power
Xpert Meter 2000 offers the same level
of intuitive user interface design as the
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000,
presenting critical electrical distribution system information in a simple
to navigate and easy-to-understand
information architecture.

overload trips
Maximize equipment utilization
Manage Energy Utilization to Help:
Reduce peak demand charges

and power factor penalties
consumption
Note: See Table 3.1-8.
18
19
Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N

Phase and neutral currents
Power: real, reactive and apparent
Frequency
Power factor: apparent
Energy: real, forward, reverse, sum
Demand: peak with date and time
% THD
Minimum and maximum values
Harmonics
Demand comparisons
Phasors
Accuracy
Note: Under typical operating conditions.
Currents: 0.1% RV
Voltage: 0.1% RV
Energy, and demand power:
0.2% in accordance with ANSI C12.20
Frequency: 0.03 hertz
Power factor: 0.2% RV
Communications
Multiple communications ports including:
Standard

10/100Base-T Ethernet network port
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP
BACnet/IP
Ethernet TCP/IP
HTTP, HTTPS
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol) v1, v3
DNP 3.0
Power Xpert Meter 2000 with

integral display
Power Xpert Meter 2000 transducer
only (no display) meter module
NEMA rating: NEMA 12, IP42 front
of panel rating
Meter with Integral Display

Dimensions

Depth:
3.96 inches (100.5 mm) behind
panel surface
1.01 (25.6 mm) projection in
front of panel surface
UL/cUL Electrical and Electronic

Measuring and Test Equipment 22CZ
Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 0.2 class,
ANSI C62.41 Burst
CE Mark
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-21
Sheet 03 027

Embedded Web Server
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web server offers Eaton customers
a new level of accessibility to the critical
information required to manage their
electrical distribution system. The Web
server includes real-time information
in both numeric and graphical visual
formats to help monitor parameters
such as current loading, voltage and
power levels, power factor, THD, and
more. The Web server also provides
energy and demand readings with
graphic usage plots to help analyze
energy usage patterns. Energy readings include kWh, kVARh, delivered
and received and kVAh with time.
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web server supports graphical
trend charts of key measurements
such as current, voltage, power and
energy. The trend chart supports a
zoom feature that allows the user
to view data over predefined ranges
from as little as 16 hours to as much
as 4 years. The trend chart includes
zoom in/out buttons and a horizontal
slider bar control to manage scrolling
forward and backward through the
data. Trend charts of basic readings
include minimum, maximum and average readings. Trend charts of interval
by interval energy data also display
peak demand.
Waveform Display
Sixty cycles of waveform are sampled
at 400 samples per cycle. The Power
Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web
server offers a view of a single-cycle
waveform to visualize steady-state harmonic content. Waveforms are
presented via a Web browser. By
clicking refresh, the waveform is
updated to that period in time.
Waveform Recording
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 can
record waveforms at up to 512 samples
per cycle. Waveform captures are
automatically stored on the FTP server
in the IEEE standard COMTRADE file
format. This allows users to view
and analyze the waveforms in any
standard free-of-charge or commercial
COMTRADE file viewer.
CA08104001E
Event Logging
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 records

historical data for graphical viewing
from the embedded Web server.
Graphical views of historical data
support pan and zoom. Over 100
standard metering parameters are
logged as part of the standard meter
functionality including min./max. and
average for each parameter. The
averages are calculated over the
interval period.
The Power Xpert Meter 2000

embedded Web server allows the
user to view a list of triggered events.
In addition, a separate system log
records system operations such
as resets.
Energy Profile Data

The Power Xpert Meter 2000 records
Real and Reactive energy forward,
reverse, net and absolute sum, as
well as Apparent energy (kVAH).
These readings are stored on a fixed
5 minute interval. Up to 4 status inputs
can be configured as energy accumulators for counting KYZ pulse inputs.
Demand Comparisons
Demand usage patterns can be
analyzed with the month-to-month,
week-to-week comparison chart
built into the meter. Raw data can be
exported as a .csv file with the Save
Table option to other applications for
further analysis and graphing.
Event Triggers
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 has two
levels of configurable event triggers:
On-board meter limits (PXM 2260/

2270/2280/2290)
On-board gateway card limits
The on-board meter limits can be set
for any measured parameter, for up to
16 limits. If either of the 16 limits are
exceeded, an alarm condition will be
present and illuminate one of the LEDs
on the meter faceplate. The on-board
meter out of limits can also be used to
energize a relay output, if so equipped.
The on board gateway limits can
trigger an alarm off of any measured
parameter on any of the PXM 2000
model series. These triggers permit
pickup, reset and pickup delay to be
configured by the user.
ii
1
E-mail
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 contains
the ability to send e-mails based on
an event that has been triggered
or cleared along with the option to
send an event or data log file. The
Power Xpert Meter 2000 also has the
ability to send a configurable periodic
e-mail with meter information.
Inputs and Outputs

Power Xpert Meter 2000 is available
with a standard KYZ output. The
base meter also includes two
expansion slots for plug-in cards.
See Figure 3.1-19 on Page 3.1-23 for
details. The Power Xpert Meter 2000
embedded Web server card takes up
one of these option slots, leaving an
additional slot that can be populated
by one of the following I/O cards.
Two relay outputs/two status inputs

Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
Four analog outputs 01 mA
Inputs can also be configured for
demand synch and pulse counting.
Inputs selected for pulse counting
can be scaled. Accumulated pulse
recordings are maintained in profile
memory. Outputs can be used for
alarm annunciation.
Ratings
Application to any PT ratio, no PTs

required to 600 Vac
CT ratios to any CT ratio
CT inputs available as 5 or 1A
secondary
Separate Source Control Power
Input:
90265 Vac or 100370 Vdc
Low voltage 1860 Vdc
Displayed Information
Monitored information is available

locally through the display, the
Web browser or system power
management software
True rms values through
40th harmonic
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2% revenue
metering specification
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

May 2014
Sheet 03 028

Web Browser Views
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Web Browser
Power Xpert Meter 2000s embedded

Web server offers Eaton customers a
new level of accessibility to the critical
information required to manage the
electrical distribution system. The
embedded Web server includes real
time circuit information in both numeric
and graphical formats to help monitor
parameters such as current loading,
voltage and power levels and power
factor. The Web server also provides
the energy and demand readings
required to help manage the cost of
energy. Readings include kWh, kVARh,
delivered and received and kVAh.
The Web server also includes critical
information regarding Power Quality
such as harmonic distortion.
11
13
14
15
Real-Time Visualization of Harmonic Content
17
Energy Demand Profile

harmonics up to the 40th order. A
detailed table also includes individual
magnitudes and angles of current and
voltage harmonics, at each frequency.
Individual and total THD are displayed
for diagnostic purposes.
Energy Managers can view load

profile data compared against the peak
demand. The plot allows comparison
of present and past months usage.
The Web server offers a waveform

view to visualize steady-state harmonic
content of the voltage and current to
spot power quality problems.
Web Server Device Configuration

Special software is not required
to configure a Power Xpert Meter
2000. The embedded Web server
includes a comprehensive device
configuration engine.

The optional I/O expansion cards
offers two or four digital inputs that
are useful for a variety of applications
such as:
Historical Trend Plot
Graphical Trending of Data
12
16
Harmonic Spectral Plot
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded

Web server supports graphical trend
charts of key circuit measurements such
as current, voltage, power and energy.
The trend chart supports a zoom feature
that allows the user to view data over
a short period of 16 hours or a longer
period of 48 months. The trend chart
has a horizontal slider bar control to
manage scrolling forward and backward
through the data. Trend charts
of basic readings include minimum,
maximum and average readings.
Trend charts of energy data also
display demand values.
Pulse Counting of KYZ or other utility

pulses such as air, water or gas
Demand interval timing taken
from a master utility meter end
of interval pulse
Names can be configured for each
input for ease of use.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-23
Sheet 03 029
Relay Outputs
The optional I/O card includes two 5A

Form C relay outputs rated for 240 Vac
or 30 Vdc or 4 Form A solid-state
outputs. These outputs can be used
for applications such as
Alarm annunciation
KYZ pulse output
Alarm outputs can be driven from

triggers based on metering values.
Analog Outputs
The optional IO card includes either

four 420 mA outputs or 01 mA
outputs. These outputs can be used
for applications such as:
d
e
Input to BMS or PLC systems

for tracking a measured meter
parameter
The standard communications card

provides one Ethernet connection
and 10/100Base-T port (copper only)
that can be used for the following
applications:
Monitoring, managing and configuring the meter remotely using a
standard Web Browser interface
Alarm notifications via e-mail, SMTP
Providing Modbus TCP/IP, RTU
and BACnet/IP communications
to BMS systems
Providing SNMP communications
to NMS systems
Synchronizing with an NTP server
Asset management
Updating firmware on the meter
Standard Communications Card
ii
g
Figure 3.1-19. PXM 2000 Rear View
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Power supply inputs

System voltage inputs
NEMA 12 gasket
RS-485
KYZ out
Meter gateway card
I/O slot
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 030
ii
90265 Vac
100370 Vdc
Optional 1860 Vdc
1
2
HI
HI
GND
L (+)
N ()
VRef
A
B
C
HI
Ic
Ib
Ia
LO
LO
LO
Control
Power
Supply
HI
HI
GND
L (+)
N ()
VRef
A
B
x
HI
Ic
Ib
Ia
LO
LO
LO
Power
Supply
4
5
6
7
C
N
C
A
N
8
9
Figure 3.1-20. Service: Wye or Delta, Four-Wire with No PTs, Two or Three CTs
10
11
12
13
14
15
HI
HI
HI
Ic
Ib
Ia
LO
LO
LO
16
GND
L (+)
N ()
VRef
A
B
C
90265 Vac
100370 Vdc
Optional 1860 Vdc
Control
Power
Supply
C
or
17
B
18
Not Connected to Meter
19
A
20
21
Figure 3.1-21. Service: Delta, Three-Wire with No PTs, 2 CTs

CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-25
Sheet 03 031
Power Xpert Meters Configuration and Wiring Examples

Modbus RTU
(RS-485)
Master
Power Xpert
Software
Web
Browser
Modbus TCP
Master
Building
Automation
System
ii
Water Leak &
Vibration Sensors
1
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/
Tamper Switch
Modbus RTU
(RS-485)
2
3
Smoke Alarm
Alarm
Connections:
= Ethernet(Modbus TCP and BACnet/IP
= Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Figure 3.1-22. Web EnabledAdvanced System Functionality
Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs

Four KYZ pulses/two programmable inputs
Four programmable analog outputs
Figure 3.1-24. IT Configuration ExamplesAccessories

I/O Cards (Option)
4
5
6
7
8
Flow Meter
(Pulse Count)
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/
Tamper Switch
9
10
11
Alarm
Trip and Sequence

of Events
Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs

Four KYZ pulses/four programmable inputs
Four programmable analog outputs
Figure 3.1-23. AccessoriesI/O Cards (Option)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 032
PXM 2000 Dimensions

0.08
(2.0)
ii
4.85
(123.2)
1
4.85
(123.2)
2
3
5.02
(127.5)
4.85
(123.2)
0.77
(19.6)
0.91
(23.1)
0.95
(24.0)
3.25
(82.6)
3.25
(82.6)
0.77
(19.6)
6
7
Figure 3.1-25. PXM 2000 Display

Front View
Figure 3.1-26. PXM 2000 Meter/Display

Side View
3.38
(85.9)
4 x .02
(0.5)
Figure 3.1-27. PXM 2000 Transducer Only

Side View
3.62
(92.0)
4.0
(101.6)
10
3.54
(89.9)
3.62
(92.0)
11
12
13
3.54
(89.9)
Figure 3.1-28. PXM 2000 Rear View
1.69
(42.9)
Figure 3.1-29. ANSI Mounting Panel Cutout
Figure 3.1-30. DIN Mounting Cutout
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-27
Sheet 03 033
To order a Power Xpert Meter 2000,
the catalog number should be
determined using the chart shown
in Table 3.1-5. The chart illustrates
how to include the desired factory
options as part of a catalog number.
Option cards that are selected at time
of order entry will be installed at the
factory. Option cards are also field
installable for future upgrades.
Power Xpert Meter modules include

panel mounting brackets.
Example 1: PXM2270MA65145
(PXM 2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A,
90265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO).
ii
Example 2: PXM2250MA65105
(PXM 2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A,
90265 Vac/Vdc).
1
2
Table 3.1-5. Power Xpert Meter 2000 Catalog Numbering System
PXM 2250 M A 6 5 1 0 5
Model Series 1
2250
2260
2270
2280
I/O Slot 2
=
=
=
=
Energy meter
Power quality meter
Power quality plus meter
Power quality plus with
up to 64 samples/cycle
waveform recording
meter
2290 = Power quality plus with
up to 512 samples/cycle
recording meter
5 = Gateway card
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
Power Supply
I/O Slot 1
1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 2460 Vdc
0 = None
1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs
2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
3 = Four analog outputs: 01 mA
4 = Four analog outputs: 420 mA
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
Meter Type
M = Meter (with integral

display)
T = Transducer only
(no display)
10
Example 1: PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 meter/display 60 Hz, 5A, 90265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO)
Example 2: PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 meter/display 60 Hz, 5A, 90265 Vac/Vdc)
1
11
Refer to Table 3.1-8 for model-specific features.
12
Table 3.1-6. Power Xpert 2000 Meter Accessories

Description
Catalog
Number
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a PXM 2000 to an

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ data cutout
IQ250-PMAK
PXM 2000 gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000
PXM2000-GCK
13
14
Table 3.1-7. Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards

Description
Catalog
Number
PXM 2000 I/O card2 relay outputs/2 status inputs
IQ250/260-IO1
PXM 2000 I/O card4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs
IQ250/260-IO2
PXM 2000 I/O card4 analog outputs 01 mA
IQ250/260-IO3
PXM 2000 I/O card4 analog outputs 420 mA
IQ250/260-IO4
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 034
i
ii
1
Technical Data
PXM 2000 Series Electronic Power
Meter Technical Information
Current Inputs
4
5
8
9
Class 10: 5A nominal, 10A maximum

Class 2: 1A nominal, 2A maximum
Fault current withstand:
100A for 10 seconds
300A for 3 seconds
500A for 1 second
Continuous current withstand:
20A for screw terminated or passthrough connections
Programmable current: full scale
to any CT ratio
Burden: 0.005 VA per phase
maximum at 11A
Pickup current: 0.1% of nominal
Class 10: 5 mA
Class 2: 1 mA
Connections:
Pass-through wire gauge
dimension: 0.177 inches (4.5 mm)
Quick connect: 0.25-inch
(6.35 mm) male tab
Voltage Inputs
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Range:
Line-to-neutral 20576 Vac
Line-to-line 0721 Vac
Programmable voltage range:
full scale to any PT ratio
Supported systems:
3 element wye, 2.5 element wye
2 element delta, four-wire delta
systems
Input impedance: 1 megohm/phase
Burden: 0.36 VA/phase maximum
at 600V; 0.014 VA at 120V
Connection: 7-pin 0.400-inch
pluggable terminal block,
AWG #1226 (0.1293.31 mm2)
Isolation
KYZ Pulse
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V
Environmental Ratings
Operating temperature: 20 to 70C

Operating humidity: to 95% RH
noncondensing
Faceplate rating:
NEMA 12
Mounting gasket included
Sensing Method
Voltage, current: true rms

Power: sampling at over 400
samples per cycle on all channels
Harmonics Resolution: 40th order
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA: 100 msec at

60 Hz
All other parameters: 1 second
at 60 Hz
Power Supply
AC/DC voltage option: 90265 Vac

at 50/60 Hz or 100370 Vdc,
universal AC/DC supply
Low voltage DC voltage option:
1860 Vdc
Burden: 10 VA maximum
Contacts: 1 Form A
On resistance, maximum: 35 ohms
Peak switching voltage: 350 Vdc
Continuous load current: 120 mA
Peak load current: 350 mA (10 ms)
Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc:
1 uA
Opto-isolation: 3750 Vac
Dimensions and Shipping
Weight: 2 lbs (0.91 kg)

Basic unit: H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00
inches (H 127.0 x W 124.5 x
L 127.0 mm)
PXM 2000 Series: mounts in
3.62-inch (92.0 mm) DIN and
ANSI C39.1 round cut-outs
Shipping container dimensions:
6.00-inch (152.4 mm) cube
Tolerance: 0.1 inches (2.54 mm)
Compliance
IEC/EN60687: 0.2% accuracy

ANSI C12.20: 0.2% accuracy
ANSI C62.41: burst
UL/cUL: Electrical & Electronic
Measuring & Test Equipment 22CZ
CE
Serial Communications Format
Connection type: RS-485

(through back plate)
Com port baud rate: 9600
57,600 bauds
Com port address: 01247
Data format: 8-bit, no parity
Protocols: Modbus ASCII, RTU
or DNP 3.0
Network Communications Format
Connection type: RJ-45

10/100Base-T Ethernet Network port
Protocols: Ethernet TCP/IP,
Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, HTTP,
HTTPS, NTP, SMTP, SNMP
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-29
Sheet 03 035
Features of PXM 2250 plus:

Harmonics
On-board meter hardware limits to
activate optional relay outputs
Visual indication of limits exceeded
at meter face
512 MB for data logging
Features of 2270 plus:
Features of 2280 plus:
Measures basic meter parameters

Ethernet
On-board gateway card
limits/alarms
Up to 64 samples per cycle for

waveform recording
Configuration of total, pre- and
post-event cycles.
Up to 512 samples per cycle for

waveform recording
1
2
3
4
5
Table 3.1-8. Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270Features and Benefits

Feature
ii
Features of PXM 2260 plus:

Harmonics, including individual
Waveform view to visualize
steady-state harmonic content
Power Xpert Meter
Benefit
2250
2260
2270
2280
2290
Embedded Web Server
Use a standard Web browser to monitor and

manage the meter over the network, Internet.
Firmware flash update support
Enables you to flash the meter with the

latest firmware updates.
Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum,

average, trend graph analysis, export, print
Review voltage and current trends, export, print

and analyze parameters right on the meter or
external software.
Demand plot comparisons month-to-month,

week-to-week
Plot two months or two weeks for vivid

demand comparison.
Power, apparent, real, reactive, power factor
Review power usage and power factor and

avoid potential PF penalties.
Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum,

TOU, profile, export, print
Keep track of your energy usage, identify peaks

to conserve energy usage.
General
7
8
9
10
11
400
400
400
400
400
Define appropriate security access level per user.
13
Modbus TCP
Easy integration with standard protocol to power

management and other software.
14
Modbus RTU
Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks,

daisy chain several (132) meters together.
HTTP, HTTPS
Communicate to the meter over the Internet

via standard Web browser.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
Communicate with the meter via Simple Network

Protocol; hook to existing NMS system.
Send e-mail messages via standard Simple

Mail Transfer Protocol.
Network Time Protocol support enables the

meter to synchronize time over the network.
DNP 3.0
Easy integration with serial DNP networks.
Trend measurements CSV file export
Easily export trend measurements to third-party

applications, in standard CSV file format.
Statistical analysis (minimum, maximum, average)

Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle
Review statistical trends, identify past and

future problem areas.
High sampling rate resulting in high accuracy.
Security
Secure two level user access privileges
12
Communications
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 036
i
ii
1
2
Table 3.1-8. Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270Features and Benefits (Continued)

Feature
Power Xpert Meter
Benefit
2250
2260
2270
2280
2290
Trend logging
Log trend information for easy statistical analysis.
Load profile
Review the load profile graph to get a better understanding of

your electrical load versus time.
Event logging
Log events for retrospective event analysis.
256
512
768
768
768
Store trend data and events for historical analysis.
40th
40th
40th
40th
Allows you to identify potential harmful harmonics.
Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter.
Provides simple metric for power quality viewable from the

embedded Web server.
Waveform view on a PC to visualize steady-state harmonic content

through embedded Web server to identify power quality issues.
64
512
Logs
Memory and Storage

Standard memory, MB
Harmonics
Harmonic levels
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Waveform
Waveform display
Waveform recording
6
7
8
9
10
Ability to record waveforms up to specified samples/cycle.
I/O
I/O
Two relay outputs/two status inputs
Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional The Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards are extremely flexible
and can be used in a large variety of different applications. Digital
inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact during
various conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices,
such as alarms, pulse meters, trip units and sensors, can be easily
integrated to the Power Xpert Meter 2000. Triggers and events can
be tied to the meters standard functions such as e-mail, logs and
trends. Analog outputs can be programmed to output meter
parameters to BMS or PLC systems.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
May 2014

3.1-31
Sheet 03 037
Power Xpert Energy Viewer
Power Xpert Energy Viewer

General Description
The Power Xpert Energy Viewer (PXEV)
provides the means to develop an
energy usage baseline for energy
management programs, comparing
interval logged data points. It is a free
Web download for compatible Eaton
product home pages. This tool allows
easy interpretation of the data collected
by compatible devices via graphical
charts, graphs and reports without
having to export the available .csv file
into Microsoft Excel or another tool.
The final report consists of four tabs.

The first tab, the Power tab, shows the
statistics on the raw power data. The
Day, Week and Month tabs show the
statistics for energy, calculated by
integrating the power over the
corresponding interval duration.
Users can select up to four different
devices for energy comparison.
Compatible Devices
Power Xpert Meter 2000 series

Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/
8000 series
Power Xpert Gateway 600A
(connected devices that capture watt
and kWh values, i.e., IQ 100 series)
Power Xpert Gateway PDP card
Power Xpert Gateway
Series 1000 card
i
ii
1
2
3
4
The PXEV is a versatile tool suited
for a wide range of customer
applications. Two basic examples
are presented below.
5
6
Schools and Dormitories

An excellent application for the PXEV
is a Schools and/or Dormitory
scenario where each elementary
school in a school district or college
dorm (building) on a campus has a
three-phase main meter. The PXEV
could be used to graphically compare
each building, thus determining which
is the most energy efficient.
7
8
9
10
Monitoring Secondary Transformers

PXEV users can monitor the secondary
of three-phase transformers (kVA) to
compare transformer loading over
time. This determines the unused,
available capacity when expansion
projects are planned and engineers
need to determine if additional power
transformers need to be purchased/
installed. In the case where more
transformers are not necessary
to carry the expansion load, the
information from the PXEV can
assist in providing significant
monetary savings.
Summary Report: Select the different tabs to view the appropriate energy values. The
Power tab shows kW or MW power on a 15-minute demand window (normal setting
on our devices). The Day/Week/Month tabs show kWh or MWh for those time periods.
11
12
13
14
15
Features
Quickly add an Eaton device

specified above using its IP address
Compare two devices energy usage
Compare last month to the
current month
Develop an energy baseline
Customize/specify values from
the source:
Invert values
Magnitude
Resolution
Interpolation
Customize data range for
summary data
CA08104001E
16
17
18
19
20
Comparison Summary: Users can select up to four different
devices for energy comparison. This graphic shows two devices.
21

May 2014
Sheet 03 038
IQ 250/260 Series
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic

Power Meters
Measure and display real-time

information about critical power
parameters with a sampling rate
of 400 samples per cycle
Monitor power utilization and quality
with ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.2%)
Optional 128 KB for data logging,
which guards against loss of
historical data
Additional Features
ii
1
Verify meter accuracy with KYZ test

pulse self-certification capabilities
Standard Modbus RTU
communications
Available as transducer only or
with display
Field upgradeable to a Power Xpert
Meter 2000
Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert
Architecture for a holistic systemlevel view
Table 3.1-9. Features of IQ 250 and IQ 260 Electronic Power Meters
Features
IQ 250
IQ 260
Instrumentation
Current, per phase
Current demand
General Description
Calculated neutral current
The IQ 250 and IQ 260 meters provide

capabilities you would not normally
expect in affordable, ultra-compact
meters, such as fast sampling rate
and accurate metering for a full
range of power attributes. Providing
the first line of defense against costly
power problems, Eatons IQ 250 and
IQ 260 electronic power meters can
perform the work of an entire wall
of legacy metering equipment using
todays technology.
Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N)
Frequency
Real, reactive and apparent power, total and per phase (kW, kVAR, kVA)
Real, reactive and apparent energy, total and per phase (kWh, kVARh, kVAh)
Real, reactive and apparent power demand
Power factor, total and per phase
Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, THD (IQ 260), kW, kVAR, kVA
Optional
Optional
RS-485
KYZ output
Modbus RTU
Modbus ASCII
DNP 3.0
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter
When space is at a premium, yet you

need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 250/
260 series fit the bill. These meters are
ideal for electrical equipment assemblies, machine control panels, such as
panelboard and switchboard mains and
feeders, low voltage metal-enclosed
switchgear feeders and motor control
centers. Requiring far less space than
other meters with similar functionality,
IQ 250/260 series fit into a standard
ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or
other electrical equipment, and therefore fit easily into retrofit applications.
18
Utility and commercial metering

Substations, industrial facilities,
power generation sites and campuses
Submetering
Load studies and voltage recording
Analog meter replacement
Demand Methods
Block interval (sliding, fixed)
Data Logging
128 KB for data logging
Communications
I/O
Two digital in/two digital out 1
Optional
Optional
Four digital in/four KYZ out
Optional
Optional
Four analog output (420 mA) 2
Optional
Optional
Four analog output (01 mA)
Optional
Optional

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) voltage and current per phase
Alarming
Set point driven alarm
1
2
Digital Out with IQ 250 requires external command.

Requires external power supply.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-33
Sheet 03 039
IQ 250/260 Series
Table 3.1-10. IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information

Description
Specifications
Description
Specifications
Sensing Method
Current Inputs
Class 105
Amp. nominal, 10A maximum
Voltage, current
True rms
Class 2
1A nominal, 2A maximum
Power
Fault current withstand

100A for:
300A for:
500A for:
Sampling at over 400 samples

per cycle on all channels
10 seconds
3 seconds
1 second
Harmonics resolution
40th order
Continuous current withstand
20A for screw terminated

or pass-through connections
Programmable current
Full scale to any CT ratio
Burden
0.005 VA per phase maximum

at 11A
Pickup current
Class 10
Class 2
0.1% of nominal
5 mA
1 mA
Connections
Pass-through wire gauge dimension
Quick connect
0.177 inches (4.5 mm)

0.25-inch male tab
Voltage Inputs
Update Rate
100 msec at 60 Hz
1 second at 60 Hz
90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or

100370 Vdc, universal
AC/DC supply
Power Supply
AC/DC voltage option
DC voltage option
1860 Vdc
Burden
10 VA maximum
Connection type
RS-485 (through back plate)
Com port baud rate
960057,600 bauds
Standard Communications Format
Com port address
01247
Data format
8-bit, no parity
Protocols
Modbus ASCII, RTU or DNP 3.0
Programmable voltage range
Full scale to any PT ratio
Supported systems
3 element wye, 2.5 element

wye, 2 element delta, four-wire
delta systems
Contacts
1 Form A
On resistance, maximum
35 Ohms
Input impedance
1 megohm/phase
Peak switching voltage
350 Vdc
Burden
0.36 VA/phase maximum at

600V; 0.014 VA at 120 Volts
Continuous load current
120 mA
Peak load current
350 mA (10 ms)
Connection
7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable

terminal block, AWG #1226
(0.1293.31 mm2)
Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc
1 uA
Opto-isolation
3750 Vac
KYZ Pulse
20C to +70C
Storage temperature
20 to +70C
Operating humidity
To 95% RH noncondensing
Faceplate rating
NEMA 12
mounting gasket included
Weight
7
8
9
10
11
All other parameters
20576 Vac
0721 Vac
Watts, VAR and VA
Range
Line-to-neutral
Line-to-line
Isolation
ii
2 lbs
Basic unit
H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches
IQ 250/260
Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI

C39.1 round cut-outs
Shipping container dimensions
6.00-inch cube
Tolerance
0.1 inches (2.54 mm)
12
13
Compliance
IEC 687
0.2% accuracy
ANSI C12.20
0.2% accuracy
ANSI C62.41
Burst
UL/cUL
Electrical and electronic

measuring and test
equipment 22CZ
CE
Meets EU safety, health and

environmental requirements
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 040
IQ 250/260 Series
i
ii
IQ 250/260 Meter Dimensions

4.85 (123.2)
4.97 (126.2)
4.93 (125.2)
4.20 (106.7)
4.16 (105.7)
1
2
5.02
(127.5)
4.85
(123.2)
3.54
(89.9)
3
Expandable I/O Componentry
4
IQ 250/260 Face
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
IQ 250/260M Side
IQ 250/260T Side
5
Figure 3.1-31. IQ 250/260 Meter DimensionsFace and Side Views
6
7
Table 3.1-11. IQ 250/260 Meter Catalog Numbering System
IQ 250 M A 6 5 1 1 0
8
Model Series
250 = Power
260 = Power quality
10
Meter Type
M = Meter (with
integral display)
T = Transducer only
(no display)
11
12
13
14
15
I/O Slot 2
I/O Slot 1
Data Logging
A = None
L = On-board
data logging
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
Power Supply
1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 2448 Vdc
0 = None
1 = Two relay outputs/
two status inputs
2 = Four KYZ pulses/
four status inputs
3 = Four analog
outputs: 01 mA
4 = Four analog
outputs: 420 mA
0 = None
1 = Two relay outputs/
two status inputs
2 = Four KYZ pulses/
four status inputs
3 = Four analog
outputs: 01 mA
4 = Four analog
outputs: 420 mA
Table 3.1-12. IQ 250/260 Meter Accessories

Description
Catalog
Number
Panel mounting adapter for retrofitting an IQ 250/260 to an

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout
IQ250-PMAK
PXM 2000 Gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000
PXM2000-GCK
Table 3.1-13. Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards
16
17
18
Description
Catalog
Number
IQ 250/260 I/O card2 relay outputs/2 status inputs
IQ250/260-IO1
IQ 250/260 I/O card4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs
IQ250/260-IO2
IQ 250/260 I/O card4 analog outputs 01 mA
IQ250/260-IO3
IQ 250/260 I/O card4 analog outputs 420 mA
IQ250/260-IO4
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-35
Sheet 03 041
IQ 130/140/150 Series
IQ 130/140/150 Electronic
Power Meters

power generation sites and campuses
Submetering

Monitor power utilization and

quality with ANSI C12.20
accuracy (0.5%)
Optional Modbus RTU or TCP
communications
with display
Designed to accommodate
upgrades
Integrate into Eatons Power
Xpert Architecture for a holistic
system-level view
Table 3.1-14. Features of IQ 100 Electronic Power Meters
General Description
The IQ 100 meter family provides
expect in affordable, compact
meters, such as fast sampling rate
and accurate metering for a full range
of power attributes. Providing the
first line of defense against costly
power problems, Eatons IQ 100 series
electronic power meters can perform
the work of an entire wall of legacy
metering equipment utilizing
todays technology.
When space is at a premium, yet
you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the
IQ 100 series fits the bill. These meters
are ideal for electrical equipment
assemblies, machine control panels,
such as panelboard and switchboard
mains and feeders, low voltage
metal-enclosed switchgear feeders
and motor control centers. Requiring
far less space than other meters with
similar functionality, IQ 100 series
meters fit into a standard ANSI or
IEC cutout on a panelboard or other
electrical equipment, and therefore
fit easily into retrofit applications.
Features
ii
1
2
3
4
Additional Features
IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter
IQ 130
IQ 140
IQ 150
Instrumentation
Current, per phase
Current demand
Min./max. readings, I, V
Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA
Frequency
Real, reactive and apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA)
Power factor, total
6
7
8
Power
Demand Methods
Block interval (sliding, fixed)
9
10
11
Energy
Real, reactive and apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, VAh)
Communications
RS-485, Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, KYZ output
Optional
Optional
Optional
RJ45, Modbus TCP, KYZ output
Optional
Optional
Optional
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 042
IQ 130/140/150 Series

Table 3.1-15. IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Specifications
8
9
10
Voltage, current
True rms
Class 2
Power
Fault Current Withstand

100A for:
300A for:
500A for:

10 seconds
3 seconds
1 second
Continuous current withstand
20A for screw terminated or

pass-through connections
Burden

at 11A
Pickup current
0.1% of nominal
Class 10
5 mA
Class 2
1 mA
Connections
Pass-through wire gauge dimension
Quick connect
0.177 inches (4.5 mm)

0.25-inch male tab
15
100 msec at 60 Hz
1 second at 60 Hz
Power Supply
90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or

AC/DC supply
DC voltage option
1860 Vdc
Burden
10 VA maximum
Optional Communications Format

Connection type
RS-485 or RJ45
(through back plate)
Com. port baud rate
960057,600 bauds
Com. port address
01247
Data format
8-bit, no parity
Protocols
Modbus ASCII/RTU or TCP
Supported systems

delta systems
350 Vdc
Input impedance
1 megohm/phase
120 mA
Burden

600V; 0.014 VA at 120V
Peak load current
350 mA (10 ms)
1 uA
7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable

(0.1293.31 mm2)
Opto-isolation
3750 Vac
Optional KYZ Pulse

Contacts
1 Form A
35 Ohms

Weight
Isolation
14
Watts, VAR and VA
20576 Vac
0721 Vac
11
13
Update Rate
Range
Line-to-neutral
Line-to-line
Connection
12
Specifications
Class 10
Voltage Inputs
Description
Sensing Method
Current Inputs
20 to +70C
Storage temperature
40 to +85C
Operating humidity
Faceplate rating
NEMA 12 water-resistant
mounting gasket Included
2 lbs
Basic unit
H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches
IQ 100
Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI

C39.1 round cut-outs
Shipping container dimensions
6.00-inch cube
Tolerance
0.10 inches (2.54 mm)
Compliance
IEC 687
0.5% accuracy
ANSI C12.20
0.5% accuracy
ANSI C62.41
Burst
UL/cUL/CE

measuring and test
equipment 22CZ
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.1-37
Sheet 03 043
IQ 130/140/150 Series
IQ 100 Meter Dimensions
4.85 (123.2)
4.97 (126.2)
ii
4.93 (125.2)
4.20 (106.7)
4.16 (105.7)
1
5.02
(127.5)
4.85
(123.2)
3.54
(89.9)
IQ 100T Transducer Only
IQ 100M Front View
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
IQ 100M Side View
IQ 100T Side View
4
5
Figure 3.1-32. IQ 100 Meter DimensionsFront and Side Views
Table 3.1-16. IQ 100 Meter Catalog Numbering System
IQ 150 M A 6 5 1 1
8
Model Series
130 = Volts/amps
140 = Power
150 = Energy
Communication
Meter Type
Power Supply
M = Meter (with
integral display)
T = Transducer only
(no display)
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 2448 Vac
0 = None
1 = Modbus RTU
and KYZ pulse
2 = Modbus TCP
and KYZ pulse
9
10
11
Table 3.1-17. IQ 100 Meter Accessories

Description
Catalog
Number
Panel mounting adapter for retrofitting an IQ 100 to an

IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout
IQ250-PMAK
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 044
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-1
Sheet 03 045
IQ 35M
IQ 35M
Commercial submetering
Energy management
Industrial monitoring
Cost allocation
IQ 35M
General Description
The Eaton IQ 35M Meter is a DIN rail
meter that combines exceptional
performance and easy installation
to deliver a cost-effective solution
for energy and power monitoring
applications, as well as submetering
applications. All models include pulse
output and phase alarms for true
versatility in all situations. The
Modbus output options offer
added flexibility for configuration
and data analysis.
DIN rail or surface mounted

watthour meter with demand
Affordable, lightweight and compact
meter providing watthours energy
information
Included backlit LCD display for
local reading
Power and energy readings
kW
kWh
Peak demand available
Monitors
Watts, watthours, watt demand
Volts, amperes
PF, frequency
VARs, VA
Optional data logging capability
Optional serial communications
(Modbus-RTU or BACnet MS/TP)
Revenue grade, ANSI C12.20 0.5%
accuracy, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S
User-enabled password protection
On-board diagnostics
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The IQ 35M allows you to:
Verify energy bills

Make informed load shifting
and shedding decisions
Fairly and accurately allocate
energy costs to users
Identify wasteful practices
Decrease unnecessary usage
Produce an energy profile
Secure the optimum utility
rate structure
9
10
IQ 35M mounted and wired in
Eaton panelboard. Closeup photo
showing IQ 35M panelboard
integration and deadfront cover.
11
12
Note: Please refer to Tab 22 for

panelboard information.
IQ 35M in optional NEMA 4X enclosure.
Enclosure shipped loose for field
mounting of meter. Enclosure only
model number: IQ35M-ENC.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

3.2-2
May 2014
Sheet 03 046
IQ 35M
Product Selection
Table 3.2-1. Catalog Number Selection
ii
IQ35M A 1 1
Meter Series
Enclosure Type
1 = Standard energy
2 = Four quadrant energy
Output Option
1 = Pulse output only
2 = Pulse output + Modbus
3 = Pulse output + Modbus +
data logging
5 = Pulse inputs + BACnet +
data logging
Accessories
8
9
10
Environmental
Voltage input
UL: 90V (L-N) to 600V (L-L)
CE: 90V (L-N) to 300V (L-L)
Current input
Scaling: 532,767A
Input range: 00.333V or
01V (selectable)
Control power
UL: 90V (L-N) to 600V (L-L)
CE: 90V (L-N) to 300V (L-L)
Accuracy
NEMA 4 enclosure
Fuse kits
DIN rail
Replacement mounting clips
CTssolid and split core
Real power and energy

0.5% (ANSI C12.20, IEC 62053-22
Class 0.5S)
Outputs
IQ35MAx1 thru 3:
Real energy pulse: NO static;
alarm contacts: NC static
IQ35MA11
Reactive energy pulse 30 Vac/dc
IQ35MAx2, IQ35MAx3
RS-485 two-wire Modbus RTU
IQ35MA15 RS-485 two-wire
BACnet MS/TP

Meter: 30 to 70C (22 to 158F)
Display: 10 to 50C (14 to 122F)
Storage temperature range
Meter: 40 to 85C (40 to 185F)
Display: 10 to 60C (14 to 140F)
Humidity range
<95% RH noncondensing
Data Outputs
Inputs
IQ35MA15
Two pulse accumulators
Mechanical
Mounting
DIN rail or 3-point screwmount
11
12
kW, kWh: Total

Current: Three-phase average and
per phase
Voltage: Three-phase average, per
phase, and line-line and line-neutral
Power: Real, reactive and apparent;
Three-phase total and per phase
Power factor: Three-phase average
and per phase
Frequency
Power demand: most recent
and peak
Demand configuration: fixed,
rolling block and external sync
Data logging (IQ35MAx3)
10 configurable data buffers;
configurable demand subinterval
(when set at a 15-minute interval,
buffers store data for 60 days)
Data logging (IQ35MA15)
6 configurable data buffers;
configurable demand subinterval
(when set at a 15-minute interval,
buffers store data for 60 days)
Trending requires communication
network to retrieve data
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
May 2014

3.2-3
Sheet 03 047
IQ 35M
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 3.2-1. IQ 35M Product Diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 3.2-2. IQ 35M Advanced CommunicationModbus RTU

CA08104001E
21
3.2-4

May 2014
Sheet 03 048
IQ 35M
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 3.2-3. IQ 35M Advanced CommunicationBACnet
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Figure 3.2-4. IQ 35M Mechanical Installation
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
May 2014

3.2-5
Sheet 03 049
IQ 35M
Dimensions
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 3.2-5. Dimensional Drawing

Figure 3.2-7. Wall Mount Configuration
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 3.2-6. DIN Rail Configuration
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

3.2-6
May 2014
Sheet 03 050
IQ 35M
i
ii
IQ 35M Current Transducers

Low Current Ranges
5600A
General Description
1
2
3
4
Solid- and split-core AC current

transducers have different hole
sizes and current ratings to suit any
application. The solid-core models
are ideal for new construction projects.
Split-core models are perfect for
retrofits. Output is fixed at the industry
standard of 00.333 Vac.
7
8
9
10
11
12
Data logging
Recording
Power monitoring
Energy management
Alternative energy monitoring
Cost allocation
Features
Description
Model Number
IQ 35M CT, 5A:0.33 Vac,

0.30 inch
0.30
(8.0)
1.70
(44.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-30-5
IQ 35M CT, 20A:0.33 Vac,

0.30 inch
0.30
(8.0)
1.70
(44.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-030-20
IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac,

0.50 inch
0.50
(13.0)
1.90
(49.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-050-50
IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac,

0.75 inch
0.75
(19.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-075-50
IQ 35M CT, 100A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-100
IQ 35M CT, 200A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-200
Solid Core
IQ 35M CT, 250A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-250
IQ 35M CT, 300A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-300
IQ 35M CT, 400A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 Inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-400
IQ 35M CT, 5A:0.33 Vac,

0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-5
IQ 35M CT, 30A:0.33 Vac,

0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-30
IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac,

0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-50
UR
CE
RoHS
14
Table 3.2-2. IQ 35MDimensions in Inches (mm)
High accuracy: 1% at 10% to 130%

of rated current
00.333 Vac standard output
Solid-core models have a rugged
epoxy encapsulated construction,
giving it outstanding durability
Split-core models have interleaving
joints for reliability with a selflocking mechanism and no
exposed metal; a safe design
13
Figure 3.2-9. IQ 35M-SO Split-Core

CT Dimensions
Figure 3.2-8. IQ 35M-SO Solid Core

CT Dimensions
Inputs
Split Core
Frequency range: 50400 Hz

Accuracy: 1% at 10% to 130%
of rated current
IQ 35M CT, 100A:0.33 Vac,

0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-100
IQ 35M CT, 200A:0.33 Vac,

0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-200
16
Outputs
IQ 35M CT, 250A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 inch
3.25
(83.0)
3.35
(86.0)
1.00
(26.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1.25
(32.0)
IQ35M-SP-125-250
17
IQ 35M CT, 300A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 inch
3.25
(83.0)
3.35
(86.0)
1.00
(26.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1.25
(32.0)
IQ35M-SP-125-300
Environmental
IQ 35M CT, 400A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 inch
3.25
(83.0)
3.35
(86.0)
1.00
(26.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1.25
(32.0)
IQ35M-SP-125-400
IQ 35M CT, 600A:0.33 Vac,

1.25 inch
3.25
(83.0)
3.35
(86.0)
1.00
(26.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1.25
(32.0)
IQ35M-SP-125-600
15
At rated current: 0.333 Vac
18
Operating temperature range:

10 to 55C (14 to 131F)
Storage temperature range:
40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
19
Lead Length
8-foot twisted pair
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-7
Sheet 03 051
IQ 35M
IQ 35M Current Transducers

High Current Ranges
8002400A
General Description
The IQ 35M split-core current
transducers, high current ranges,
provide a safe 00.333 Vac output for
use with the IQ 35M energy meter.
Data logging
Recording
Power monitoring
Energy management
Alternative energy monitoring
Cost allocation
Features
High accuracy: 1% of reading from

10% to 100% of rated current
00.333V output
UR
CE
Inputs
Frequency range: 50/60 Hz

Accuracy: 1% of reading from
10% to 100% of the rated current
of the CTs
ii
1
Outputs
At rated current: 0.333
Mechanical
Installation category: Cat II or Cat III
Environmental
3
Figure 3.2-10. IQ 35M-SP-25X

15 to 60C (5 to 140F)
40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
Humidity range:
095% noncondensing
5
6
Lead Length
6-foot twisted pair
Table 3.2-3. IQ 35MDimensions in Inches (mm)

Description
Model Number
IQ 35M CT,
800A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
2.90
(73.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
5.20
(132.0)
5.90
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-253-800
IQ 35M CT,
1000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-1000
IQ 35M CT,
1200A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-1200
IQ 35M CT,
1600A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-1600
IQ 35M CT,
2000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-2000
IQ 35M CT,
2400A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-2400
Split Core
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

3.2-8
May 2014
Sheet 03 052
IQ 35M
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Supported System Types
voltage inputs are valid, which are to

be ignored, and whether neutral is
connected. Setting the correct System
Type prevents unwanted energy
accumulation on unused inputs,
selects the formula to calculate the
Theoretical Maximum System Power,
and determines which phase loss
algorithm is to be used. The phase
The IQ 35M power meters have a

number of different possible system
wiring configurations (see wiring
diagrams on Page 3.2-9). To configure
the meter, set the System Type via the
User Interface or Modbus register 130
(if so equipped). The System Type tells
the meter which of its current and
loss algorithm is configured as a

percent of the Line-to-Line System
Voltage (except when in System
Type 10) and also calculates the
expected Line to Neutral voltages
for system types that have Neutral
(12 and 40).
Table 3.2-4. Supported System Types

Number
of Wires
CTs
Qty
Voltage Connections
System Type
ID
Qty
ID
Type
Modbus
Register 130
User Interface:
SETUP>S SYS
Phase Loss Measurements
A
A
A, B
2
2
3
A, N
A, B
A, B, N
L-N
L-L
L-L with N
10
11
12
1L + 1n
2L
2L + 1n
AB
AB
VLL
VLN
Balance
Wiring
Diagram
Figure
Number
Single-Phase Wiring
2
2
3
1
1
2
AN
AN, BN
AN-BN
3.2-11
3.2-12
3.2-13
AB-BC-CA
3.2-14
AN-BN-CN
and AB-BC-CA
3.2-15
3.2-16
Three-Phase Wiring
3
A, B, C 3
A, B, C
Delta
31
3L
AB, BC, CA
A, B, C 4
A, B, C, N
Grounded
wye
40
3L + 1n
AB, BC, CA
AN, BN, CN
Table 3.2-5. Wiring

Symbol
Description
Voltage disconnect switch

Fuse (installer is responsible for ensuring compliance with local
requirements. No fuses are included with the device.)
Earth ground
10
S1
Current transducer
11
S2
12
13
14
Potential transformer
Protection containing a voltage disconnect switch with a fuse or
disconnect circuit breaker. The protection device must be rated for
the available short-circuit current at the connection point.
Note: IQ 35MA1x models are not polarity sensitive. No need to observe polarity when wiring.
IQ 35MA2x models are polarity sensitive. Observe correct polarity when wiring.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-9
Sheet 03 053
IQ 35M
Wiring Diagrams
i
Use System Type 31 (3L)
L1 L2 L3
Use System Type 10 (1L + ln)

N L1
ii
1
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
N
X1
White
Black
X2
White
Black
X1
+
A
+
B
+
C
X2
X1
White
Black
X2
White
Black
X1
+
A
+
B
+
C
4
5
X2
Figure 3.2-11. Single-Phase Line-to-Neutral Two-Wire System, 1 CT

Use System Type 11 (2L)
L1 L2
Figure 3.2-14. Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 3 CTs, No PT

N
L1
L2
L3
8
A
B
C
N
X1
White
Black
X2
A
B
C
N
White
Black
White
Black
X1
+
A
+
B
+
C
Figure 3.2-12. Single-Phase Line-to-Line Two-Wire System, 1 CT
X2
X1
X2 X1
White
Black
+
A
+
B
+
C
X2
9
10
11
12
13
Figure 3.2-15. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Direct Voltage Connection,

3 CTs
14

N L1
L2
L1 L2
L3
15
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
N
X1
X2
White
Black
X1
X2
White
Black
X1
+
A
+
B
+
C
Figure 3.2-13. Single-Phase Direct Voltage Connection, 2 CTs
CA08104001E
X2
White
Black
White
Black
X1
X2
X1
White
Black
+
A
+
B
+
C
X2
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 3.2-16. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Connection, 3 CTs, 3 PTs
21

May 2014
Sheet 03 054
IQ 35M
Control Power
ii
G 1 2
G 1 2
L1 L2 L3
N L1 L2 L3
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 3.2-17. Direct Connect Control Power (Line-to-Line)

Line-to-Line from 90 Vac to 600 Vac (UL) (520 Vac CE). In
UL installations, the lines may be floating (i.e., a delta). If
any lines are tied to an earth (i.e., a corner grounded delta),
see the Line-to-Neutral installation limits. In CE installations,
the lines must be neutral (earth) referenced at less than
300 Vac L-N.
Figure 3.2-20. Control Power Transformer (CPT) Connection

The Control Power Transformer may be wired L-N or L-L.
Output to meet meter input requirements
Fuse Recommendations
Keep the fuses close to the power source (obey local
and national code requirements).
For selecting fuses and circuit breakers, use the
following criteria:
G 1 2
N L1 L2 L3
10
11
Figure 3.2-18. Direct Connect Control Power (Line-to-Neutral)

Line-to-Neutral from 90 Vac to 347 Vac (UL) or 300 Vac (CE).
Current interrupt capacity should be selected based

on the installation category and the fault current capability
Overcurrent protection should be selected with
a time delay
The voltage rating should be sufficient for the input
voltage applied
Provide overcurrent protection and disconnecting means
to protect the wiring. For DC installations, the installer
must provide external circuit protection (suggested: 0.5A,
time delay fuses)
The earth connection is required for electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) and is not a protective earth ground
12
G 1 2
13
14
15
Figure 3.2-19. Direct Connect Control Power (DC)

DC control power from 125 Vdc to 300 Vdc (UL and CE max.).
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-11
Sheet 03 055
IQ 150S/250S Series
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed
Electronic Meters
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed
Electronic Meter
General Description
With energy costs skyrocketing, you
need the ability to verify the accuracy
of utility billing and allocation of
energy costs among business units,
different manufacturing areas or
facilities, and tenants. Production
equipment and IT systems are
vulnerable to power anomalies;
therefore, you must ensure that power
is always up to specifications. If your
infrastructure is an established facility,
you may not currently have metering
or may have addressed these concerns
by deploying a variety of analog
gauges and metersone for volts, one
for amperes and so on, with separate
meters for each measurement.
If youre planning an upgrade or a new
power infrastructure, no doubt you
would like to capitalize on the latest
technology to improve upon that
cumbersome architecture and its
patchwork view.
Industrial and commercial buildings,

metering and submetering
Government facilities and military
Universities and airports
Self-enclosed, these meters are an

ideal solution for surface mounting
next to a selected piece of equipment for energy monitoring
NEMA 12 enclosure with a large,
easy-to-read faceplate, consistent
with other Eaton meter models,
designed with knockouts for easy
installation
Ethernet communications option
for either wired or wireless setup,
allowing for additional ease of
installation and integration into
existing networks
Available data and alarm recording
for historical records/trending
Architecture for a holistic systemlevel view
Wireless and High-End Capabilities you

would not Expect from a Self-Enclosed,
Compact Meter
Providing the first line of defense
against costly power problems,
Eatons IQ 150S/250S electronic selfenclosed meters can perform the work
of an entire wall of legacy metering
equipment using todays secure
wireless technology. Eatons IQ 150S/
250S meters use 24-bit AD converters
that sample at more than 400 samples
per cycle and meet IEC 687 (0.2%
accuracy) and ANSI C12.20 (0.2%
accuracy) standards. With such highperformance measurement capability,
these meters can be confidently used
for primary revenue metering and
submetering applications.
Either model will help you monitor
energy demand, while the IQ 250S provides the extra benefit of also
monitoring and recording the changes
in the characteristics of your power.
Eatons IQ 150S/250S meters provide
direct-reading metered values for
the most critical power aspects, such
as watts, watt demand, watthours,
voltage amperes (VA), VA-hours, VARs,
VAR-hours and power factor. They have
high sampling speed and accuracy.
These meters are self-enclosed in a
NEMA 12 enclosure with knockouts
on the bottom for communication
and power, providing for an easy
installation.
Perhaps you dont have network drops

in all the right places. The IQ 150S/250S
offers a wireless communications
option. The transmissions are encrypted
using 128-bit Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) for security.
i
ii
Industry-Standard Communication
Protocols
Standard Modbus RS-485 Communication
Standard communication includes

an RS-485 output speaking Modbus
protocol. This allows the unit to be
connected to any serial RS-485 bus
using the Modbus interface. The unit
communicates easily with most building
automation, Power Xpert Software
or other software systems. Baud rates
are up to 57.6K baud to provide fast
update times.
Wi-Fi or Land-Based Ethernet

The unit offers an Ethernet option
configured either as an RJ45 or Wi-Fi
connection. The Wi-Fi configuration
allows the 150S/250S to be used on
standard Wi-Fi base stations. The unit
is assigned an IP address; it communicates Modbus protocol over Ethernet
TCP/IP. Wireless Ethernet is reliable
and easy to integrate, making it the
superior solution for mass meter
deployment.
KYZ Pulse
For applications in which a pulse is
needed, the unit also provides a KYZ
output that pulses proportional to
the amount of energy consumed.
This feature is used for pulse counting
applications into building management
systems where serial or Ethernet
protocol is not available.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Verify Energy Bills

The IQ 150S/250S models provide a
traceable watthour test pulse (used
with a watthour pulse recorder or totalizer), so you can verify the accuracy of
your meter and in turn, the accuracy of
billing from your utility company and
to internal customers.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 056
IQ 150S/250S Series
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Integrated with Eatons Power Xpert

Architecture
Table 3.2-6. Features of IQ 150S/250S Electronic Power Meters
IQ 150S/250S meters integrate into

Eatons Power Xpert Architecture,
where meters, gateways and monitoring devices collaborate to create a unified, centralized view of the end-to-end
power and facility infrastructure.
Instrumentation
When used in this architecture, either

with a Power Xpert Gateway or directly
via Ethernet, the meters with the Modbus RTU option can provide Webbased graphics of current power conditions. Simply connect your meter to
a Power Xpert Gateway to translate
Modbus-based information from the
meter into HTML-based Web pages
that are accessible from any standard
Web browser. If you select a model
with the Ethernet option, the meter can
easily be monitored remotely via
Power Xpert Software or another thirdparty monitoring system. With access
to accurate, real-time information from
IQ 150S/250S meters, Power Xpert
Architecture can transform your power
system into an integrated, agile system, and an easily managed entity that
performs better and costs less.
Designed for the User

When space is at a premium, yet you
need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, Eaton
IQ 150S/250S meters fit the bill. These
ultra-compact meters are ideal for surface mounting next to a selected piece
of equipment for energy monitoring.
Requiring far less space than other
meters with similar functionality,
and offering a NEMA 12 enclosure
and a large, easy-to-read faceplate,
consistent with other Eaton meter
models, these meters are designed
with knockouts for easy retrofit
installation.
Features
IQ 150S
IQ 250S
Current, per phase
Frequency
Total
Total and per phase
Minimum/maximum readings, I 1, V 1, PF, F, W, VAR, VA
Power
Real, reactive and apparent power (W, VAR, VA)
Total
Total and per phase
Average
Average and per phase
Block interval (fixed, sliding)
Current demand
Total
Total and per phase
Power factor
Demand Methods
Energy
Real, reactive and apparent energy (Wh, VARh, VAh)
Total
Total and per phase
Real and reactive, net and positive and negative (Wh, VARh)
Total
Total and per phase
I/O
Pulse output
Communications
RS-485, Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0
RJ45 or 802.11b, Modbus TCP 2
Optional
Optional
Data Logging
Alarming
1
2
Per phase only.

If configured for Ethernet, RS-485 not available.
Most meters in this class have small or

dark displays that can be hard to see,
especially from a distance. Eatons
IQ 150S/250S meters have a large,
bright red, three-line LED display, each
line more than a half-inch tall. This
display is very easy to read, even if the
meter is installed at a height or distance.
Using the keypad and menus on the
local display, users can display a
variety of electrical system values or
program the meter.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-13
Sheet 03 057
IQ 150S/250S Series
Table 3.2-7. IQ 150S/250S Electronic Meter Technical Information

Description
Specifications
Current Inputs
Description
Specifications
Class 10
Watts, VAR and VA
100 msec at 60 Hz
Class 2
1 second at 60 Hz
Fault Current Withstand

20A for:
60A for:
100A for:
10 seconds
3 seconds
1 second
Burden

at 11A
Pickup Current
Class 10
Class 2
0.1% of nominal
5 mA
1 mA
Connections
Screw terminal
#632 screws
Line-to-line
90400 Vac at 50/60 Hz or

AC/DC supply
Burden
16 VA maximum
Standard Serial Communications Format

Connection type
RS-485
Communications port baud rate
960057,600 Bauds
Communications port address
01247
Data format
8-bit, no parity
Protocols
Modbus ASCII, RTU, DNP 3.0
Optional Ethernet Communications Format

20416 Vac (IQ150S),
20576 Vac (IQ250S)
20721 Vac
Supported systems

delta systems
Connection type
RJ45 or 802.11b (wireless)
Protocols
Modbus TCP
KYZ Pulse
Contacts
1 Form A
35 Ohms
350 Vdc
Input impedance
1 megohm/phase
120 mA
Burden

600V; 0.014 VA at 120V
Peak load current
350 mA (10 ms)
1 uA
Opto-isolation
3750 Vac
Connection
Power Supply
Voltage Inputs
Range
Line-to-neutral
ii
Update Rate
7-pin, 0.400-inch screw

(0.1293.31 mm2)
Isolation
Weight
4 lbs
Basic unit
H 7.90 x W 7.50 x D 3.10 inches
20 to +70C
IEC 687
0.2% accuracy
Storage temperature
20 to +70C
ANSI C12.20
0.2% accuracy
Operating humidity
ANSI C62.41
Burst
Faceplate rating
NEMA 12
ANSI (IEEE) C37.90.1
Surge withstand
UL/cUL

measuring and test equipment
22CZ
Sensing Method
Voltage, current
rms
Power

5
6
7
8
9
10
Compliance
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed.
This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may
vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product
model. Please refer to User Manual for detailed specifications.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 058
IQ 150S/250S Series
Wiring Diagram
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Three-Phase Four-Wire WYE Direct
Three-Phase Four-Wire WYE with PTS
Three-Phase Three-Wire DELTA Direct
Three-Phase Three-Wire DELTA Direct
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 3.2-21. IQ 150S/250S Wiring Diagram
15
Installation Diagram
16
7.53
(191.3)
3.70
(94.0)
17
18
Closed
5.60
(142.2)
19
20
21
Lockable
Revenue Seal
Figure 3.2-22. IQ 150S/250S Installation
0.50
(12.7)
Mounting
Plate
5.95
(151.1)
7.90
(200.7)
7.90
(200.7)
Antenna Length:
4.40 (111.8)
3.11
(79.0)
Figure 3.2-23. IQ 150S/250S Meter Dimensions

CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-15
Sheet 03 059
IQ 150S/250S Series
Table 3.2-8. IQ 150S/250S Meter Catalog Numbering System
ii
IQ 150 S A 6 5 1 1
1
Model Series
150 = Energy
250 = Energy plus
Communication
Meter Type
S = Self-enclosed meter
Power Supply
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
1 = 90400 Vac/dc
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
1 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)

2 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)
or TCP(RJ45)
or 802.11b (Wi-Fi)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 060
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter

High-Density Metering
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Eatons Power Xpert? Multi-Point

Meter is an ANSI C12.20 revenue class
Web enabled electronic submetering
device that can be mounted in panelboards, switchboards or enclosures.
When mounted in a panelboard or a
switchboard, the Power Xpert MultiPoint Meter provides customers with
an integrated power distribution and
energy metering solution that saves
space, reduces installation labor and
lowers total cost.
The Eaton Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meter (PXMP Meter) offers a highly
modular approach to high-density
metering applications in electrical
power distribution systems. The PXMP
Meter is compatible with most threephase industrial, commercial and
single-phase residential low voltage
electrical power systems. The PXMP
is equipped with two Modbus RTU
communication ports for local display
and remote serial communications.
The PXMP also has optional pulse
input and digital output modules along
with one standard digital output and
three digital inputs. The PXMP Energy
Portal Module is Web enabled, making
it suitable for use with Ethernet
networks and modems.
General Description
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
can measure up to any of the following
number of circuits:
18
19
20
Sixty single-phase, two-wire

(single-pole)
Thirty single-phase, three-wire
(two-pole)
Twenty three-phase, four-wire
(three-pole)
The circuits listed above can be mixed

provided that the total number of
current sensors does not exceed 60.
The meter provides current; voltage;
power factor; demand and active,
reactive, and real power (VA, VAR,
kW); and active, reactive and real
energy (VA, VAR, kWh) measurements
for each load. The unit also provides
up to two years at 15-minute intervals
or eight years at one-hour intervals of
demand data logging storage in nonvolatile memory for up to 60 submeters.
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter can
be used with three different ratings
of current sensors: 100 mA, 10 mA
or 333 mV. Switchboard/ panelboard
applications will use the 100 mA
current sensors, which are highly accurate, self-protecting in the event
of an open circuit condition under load
and are supplied with an integral plugin connector. The PXMP automatically
detects the rating of the current sensor
that is connected.
The PXMP can also use 10 mA current
sensors that were previously installed
for IQMESII retrofit applications.
Additionally the PXMP can use 333 mV
split core current sensors for retrofit
applications where metering has not
previously existed. The 10 mA and
333 mV current sensors are also
self-protecting in the event of an
open circuit condition under load.
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter is
ideally suited to handle submetering in
low voltage power distribution equipment applications such as distribution
boards in multi-tenant buildings, comprehensive main and feeder metering in
commercial/industrial switchboards or
medium voltage distribution equipment
with the use of voltage and current
transformers.
provides a cost-effective solution for
residential or commercial metering
installations. Typical installations include:
21
Features
High-rise buildings
Government institutions
K12, universities and campuses
Office buildings
Medical facilities
Apartment and condominium
complexes
Airports
Shopping malls
Industrial sites
Mixed-use facilities
Monitors power and energy for up

to 60 current sensors; spacesaving
modular design allows measurement from 1 to 60 circuits
Built-in communication interfaces
Monitors single-phase and threephase loads from 120 to 600 Vac
Monitors current, voltage, power
factor, frequency, power and energy
Stores extensive energy profile data
for each metering point; can be used
to identify coincidental peak
demand contribution
LEDs provide status of unit
communication activity and verify
sensor connections
Meets rigid ANSI C12.20 accuracy
specifications for revenue meters
Three standard digital inputs and
eight pulse inputs per optional
module to monitor WAGES
(water, air, gas, electric or steam)
One standard digital output and
eight digital outputs per optional
module for alarm indication
Three types of meter modules
to support 10 mA, 100 mA or
333 mV sensors
Can be directly mounted in a
UL Listed panelboard, switchboard
or enclosure
256 MB of memory in meter base for
up to two years of 15-minute interval data (eight years of one-hour
interval data) for eight demand values up to 60 submeters
Communication Capabilities
With the Power Xpert Multi-Point
Meters built-in communication
capabilities, remote meter reading
and monitoring functions can be
integrated into both new and retrofit
applications.
Standard Modbus RTU

Optional Modbus TCP / BACnet/IP /
SNMP / HTTP / SMTP / NTP / SFTP
communications
Software Compatibility
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter:
Can be used as part of an

electrical energy monitoring
and cost allocation system
Can be remotely monitored via
onboard Web pages with Eatons
optional Energy Portal Module
Is compatible with third-party software platforms and interface devices
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-17
Sheet 03 061

Configuration

is fully configurable using Power
Xpert Multi-Point configuration
software that can be downloaded
free from the Eaton website at
www.eaton.com/meters
Each Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
module can be configured for up
to six metering points in any
combination of single-phase and

three-phase metering points corresponding to the voltage wiring of
the meter base
Power Xpert Multi-Point configuration software simplifies system
commissioning and startup;
PXMP configuration software
supports both online and offline
configurations
Easy to Install
UL Listed for mounting inside

panelboards (e.g., PRL4), switchboards, and NEMA 12 enclosures
Quick connect terminals for current
sensors, Modbus communications,
and bus voltages make wiring the
unit quick and easy
i
ii
1
2
Table 3.2-9. Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Features

Main/Aggregate
Channel Data
Tenant
Current, per phase
Frequency
Description
Instrumentation
Minimum/maximum readings, V
Per phase
Minimum/maximum readings, W, VAR, VA
Total and per phase
Minimum/maximum readings, PF, F
Total
Real, reactive and apparent power (W, VAR, VA)
Total and per phase
Total and per phase
Total
Power factor
Average
Average
5
6
Power
Demand
Block interval (fixed, sliding)
Total and per phase
Minimum/maximum readings, PF, W, VAR, VA
Total and per phase
Total
Total
Energy
Real, reactive and apparent energy (Wh, VARh, VAh) Total
Real, forward and reverse, and total (Wh)

1
9
10
Main only.
Product Selection
11
Table 3.2-10. Meter Selection

Meter Module
Meter Base
Three-Phase
Application or
Single-Phase
with ABCN
Typical Applications
Single-Phase
Application
with ABN
New Switchboards
PXMP Current
Sensors, Solid Core,
PXMP-CSXXX,
Ampere Ratings
Retrofit Existing
IQMESII Sensors,
Solid Core, CS-XXX,
Ampere Ratings
Enclosed PXMP 333MV

Sensors, Split Core,
CS-SP-X-XXXX-333MV,
Ampere Ratings
Enclosed
PXMP
Interface
Modules
PXMP-MM100MA
PXMP-MB
125, 250, 400
PXMP-MM333MV
PXMP-MB
100, 200, 300, 400, 600,

800, 1000, 1200, 1600,
2000 2
PXMP-IM333MV
PXMP-MM10MA
PXMP-MB
5, 50, 70, 125,

200, 400
PXMP-MM100MA-AB
PXMP-MB-AB
125, 250, 400
PXMP-MM333MV-AB
PXMP-MB-AB
100, 200, 300, 400, 600,

800, 1000, 1200, 1600,
2000 2
PXMP-IM333MV
PXMP-MM10MA-AB
PXMP-MB-AB
5, 50, 70, 125,

200, 400
For applications requiring more than 2000A current sensors, use a CS005 with 5A CT in conjunction with PXMP-MM10MA.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 062
i
ii
1
2
3
External Circuit Group Specifications
Environmental
PXMP-MB (-AB) Meter Base
The PXMP Meter and current sensors

must be housed in a NEMA or UL
enclosure that keeps the internal
environment within the PXMPs
environmental specification ranges
and provides suitable fire and
mechanical protection in the end
product installation.
Discrete Output
4
5
6
Emissions Conducted and Radiated
Temperature range: 20 to +70C

(4 to +158F)
40 to +85C
Humidity: 595% noncondensing
environment
Pollution degree: II
Elevation: 0 to 9843 ft (0 to 3000m)
Housing: IP20
CE Mark
EMC EN61326
FCC part 15 class B

CISPR 11 class B
Table 3.2-11. Electromagnetic Immunity
9
10
11
12
Standard
Description
Level
EN61000-4-2
ESD
Discrete Inputs
EN61000-4-3
RF radiated
EN61000-4-4
Electrical fast
transient
EN61000-4-5
Surge
31
EN61000-4-6
RF conducted
EN61000-4-11
Volt sag/swell/
variation
13
Quantity 3, common circuits

inputs 13
Group isolation 2 kV
No input-to-input circuit isolation
24 Vdc PXMP inputs are for a local bus that

is surge level 2. PXG60E AC mains connection will support level 3.
Product Safety
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Quantity 1solid-state relay Form A

NO Bidirectional FET
Polarity of external source is
not important
Isolation circuit to ground
2 kV/1 min.
Maximum external source
voltage 28 Vdc
Line-to-line TVS clamp across
switching element at 32 Vdc
Solid-state relay on resistance
35 ohms maximum
Maximum load current 80 mA
Minimum pulse width
20 milliseconds
Fixed 25 milliseconds for pulse
initiator function
Maximum pulse rate 25 Hz
Wiring to two-position removable
terminal plug
1218 AWG (3.310.82 mm2),
wire ferrules recommended
T1 (polarity not important)
T2 (polarity not important)
IEC/EN61010-1
UL 61010-1 File E185559
CNL evaluation to CAN/C22.2
No 1010.1.92
Accuracy
ANSI C12.20Accuracy Class 0.5%

with either CSXXX or PXMP-CSXXX
sensors
Measurement Canada
Approval Pending
All inputs per module share a

common external
24V (10%) supply
24V externally sourced between
common and inputs
Design to interface with external
dry contact
Input impedance ~2.2K ohms
Input current draw ~10 mA per
input
COM1 and COM2 RS-485 Serial Ports
No D+/D biasing reliance on failsafe driver and biasing at Master

Baud rate configurable between
9600115K baud (default)
Use cable designed for RS-485
communications
Low L:L capacitance
Impedance of ~100120 ohms
ShieldMylar for high frequency; Braid for low frequency
Separate common and shield for
best noise immunity
Maximum cable length is 4000 ft
(1219.2m) with 32 nodes at 19.2K
baud increased data rates will
reduce maximum cable distance
2000 ft (609.6m) with 32 total
nodes at 115.2K baud
Isolation 300V to ground due to TVS

diode clamps
Modbus RTU slave protocol,
address defined by rotary switch
Green Rx and Red Tx LEDs
per channel
Data + > Dataduring idle marked,
logic 1 state
End of Line Termination resistance
should match cable impedance
(typ. 100120 ohms)
Four-position removable terminal
plug 1822 AWG (0.820.33 mm2)
typical, wire ferrules recommended
COM1
T7Shield
T8RS-485 common
T9Data
T10Data +
COM2
T11Shield
T12RS-485 common
T13Data
T14Data +
Minimum pulse width

10 milliseconds
Maximum pulse rate 20 Hz
Wiring to four-position removable
terminal plug
1218 AWG (3.310.82 mm2),
T3Common (connect ext.
24 common here)
T4Input 1 (dry contact to
24V hot)
24V hot)
24V hot)
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-19
Sheet 03 063

PXMP-MB Power Supply Input
PXMP Meter Modules (PXMP-MMs)
PXMP Pulse Input Modules (PXMP-PIMs)
Compatible with all PXMP Meter Base

slots 110 LED indicators:
24 Vdc 20%
15W maximum load
1 kV isolation barrier internal to
PXMP-MB
Externally fuse circuit to protect wire
Green power OK LED
Three-position terminal block
1612 AWG (1.313.31 mm2),
T1524 Vdc (common)
T1624 Vdc + (Hot)
T17Shield (optional)
capacitively referenced to
chassis ground for enhanced
EMC performance
Meter Voltage Inputs
Overvoltage CAT III

Maximum voltage rating
480VL:G (corner grounded delta)
347VL:N
600VL:L
Frequency rating 4763 Hz

Metering range (temporary
transitions)
30700VL:N
30700VL:L
Abuse withstand rating
1000V sustained
High pot withstand rating
2500V/1min
Input impedance 4M ohms
Fuse inputs rated to protect wiring
to mains. External fuses must be
installed between the meter voltage
terminal and the mains disconnect
switch to the main lines to protect
the lines. 600V 1A BUSS type
KTK-R-1 Fast Acting or equivalent
fuses are recommended.
Wiring to removable terminal plug
1018 AWG (5.260.82 mm2), wire
ferrules recommended
T18N (VR)
T19C (V3)
T20B (V2)
T21A (V1)
Health and status green, blink to

show activity
Pulse energy output one red per
group of three loads
Load energy direction red/green pair
per load
All variations support six load inputs.
Current sensor connection is one 2 x 2
connector per load.
Compatible with PXMP-SCXX sensor
cables, total cable length to the sensor
should not exceed 28 ft (8.5m).
Note that -AB suffix only affects what
voltage channels the loads are paired
with for metering purposes.
PXMP-MM10MA supports the CSXXX
series of 10 mA maximum secondary
output current transformers.
PXMP-MM100MA supports the
PXMP-CSXXX series of 100 mA
maximum secondary output current
transformers.
PXMP-MM333MV supports 333 mV
maximum secondary output current
transformers with the use of the
PXMP-IM333MV interface module.
PXMP Digital Output Module (PXMP-DOM)
Compatible with all PXMP-MB

slots 110
LED indicators
show activity
Output On/Off status one green
per output
Eight individual solid-state
relay outputs
Each circuit rated for 24 Vdc (20%)

with an 80 mA load maximum
24 Vdc is externally sourced
Group isolation to ground 2 kV
Each circuit has its own separate
common, circuit-to-circuit
isolation 120V
16-position removable terminal plug
1218 AWG (3.310.82 mm2), wire
ferrules recommended
Compatible with all PXMP-MB

slots 110
LED indicators
show activity
Input On/Off status one green per
pulse input
Eight pulse inputs to external

dry contacts
Maximum pulse rate is 20 Hz
Minimum pulse width is
20 milliseconds
External circuit groups rated for
24 Vdc (20%)
All circuits share the same
electrical common
External supply connects to the

module with a two-position removable terminal plug
The supply is internally fanned out
to all circuits
Group isolation limited to 300V to
ground due to TVS diode clamp
Input impedance ~2.2K causing a
10 mA load per input when
energized
External circuit groups connect
with a 16-position removable
terminal plug
Terminals support 1218 AWG
(3.310.82 mm2), wire ferrules
recommended
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 064
i
ii
1
2
3
PXMP Energy Portal Module (PXMP-EPM)
LED four-stack for bottom LAN/WAN

Ethernet port
Link (Tx/Rx blink)
10/100 speed
DHCP/Fixed
TX active
Config. Ethernet RJ45 Cat5 STP/UTP

10Base-T/100Base-Tx
Auto crossover capability
supported
Java Web browser interface
Only functionally compatible with

PXMP-MB slot 10
LED indicators
Top health and status green, blink
to show activity
Com. reset buttonreset to
defaults
Local IP 192/10
RJ45 front-facing Ethernet configuration port LEDs
Link (Tx/Rx blink)
10/100 speed
Bottom facing LAN/WAN

Ethernet port
RJ45 Cat5 STP/UTP 10Base-T/
100Base-Tx
STP required for full
electromagnetic immunity
Auto crossover capability
supported
Supports Modbus TCP and Java
Web browser interface
Bottom-facing telephone
modem interface
Modem type V92/56K baud
RJ11 field interface
4
Table 3.2-12. Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter SystemHardware Specifications
Components
Field
Circuit
Power
Source
Rated
Voltage
Rated
Current
Circuit
Impedance
Isolation
Note 1
Note 2
PXMP-MB
PXMP-MB-AB
Digital output
External
24 20% 1
0.080A
maximum
35 ohms
maximum
2.0 kV
Digital input
External
24 20% 1
0.01A
2.22K
2.0 kV
Opto drops
supply by 2V
Group are electrically common
COM1 RS-485
Internal
5V 1
5060 ohms
300V
TVS diode
clamped to PE
COM2 RS-485
Internal
5V 1
5060 ohms
300V
TVS diode
clamped to PE
Power
supply input
External
24 20% 1
0.7A
maximum
N/A
1.0 kV
Installation
Class II input
15W
maximum
Voltage inputs
A (V1)/ B (V2)/
C (V3)/ N (VR)
External
mains
480V L:G 2
0.12 mA
4M ohms
N/A
Installation
Class III
High pot 2500V/

1 minimum
347V L:N 2
0.09 mA
4M ohms
N/A
Installation
Class III
High pot 2500V/

1 minimum
600V L:L 2
0.09 mA
4M ohms
N/A
Installation
Class III
High pot 2500V/

1 minimum
7
8
9
10
11
PXMP-MM100MA
CT secondary
External
N/A
100 mA
14.6 ohms
N/A
20% over-range
See sensor for

primary isolation
PXMP-MM10MA
CT secondary
External
N/A
10 mA
67 ohms
N/A
20% over-range
See sensor for

primary isolation
PXMP-MM333MV
CT secondary
External
0.333V 2
N/A
50,000 ohms
N/A
20% over-range
13
See sensor for

primary isolation
PXMP-DOM
Digital output
External
24 20% 1
0.080A
maximum
10 ohms
maximum
2 kV group
120V isolation
circuit-to-circuit
14
Isolation
dependent on
external source
PXMP-PIM
Pulse input
External
24 20% 1
0.01A
2.22K ohms
300V to
ground
TVS diode
clamped to PE;
group isolated,
all circuits
common to 24V
external source
Note: Opto
creates 2.2V drop
sourced by 2.2K
ohms; isolation
dependent on
external source
PXMP-EPM
Ethernet 100 Bt
Internal
N/A
N/A
1 kV
POT modem
Internal
N/A
N/A
12
15
16
17
DC.
AC RMS.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-21
Sheet 03 065
Catalog Information
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter, current sensors and
other accessories can be ordered from Eaton distributors.
Refer to the following catalog numbers when ordering.
Table 3.2-13. Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Products
Product
Description
Catalog
Number
Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABCN Voltage Inputs
The Pulse Input Module (PXMP-PIM) can be used to totalize

pulse outputs from water meters, gas meters, steam meters,
or even old electrical meters with KZ pulse outputs. The
PXMP-PIM can also be used for status monitoring in
applications where status indication updates of 6 seconds
over Modbus satisfies the application requirement.
Support products for the Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
include the HMI display, IMPCABLE and power supplies
as described in Table 3.2-14.
PXMP meter basethree-phase with ABCN

voltage inputs
PXMP-MB
PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs

for use with PXMP current sensors
PXMP-MM100MA
Product
Description
Catalog
Number

for use with IQMESII current sensors
PXMP-MM10MA
Communication cable, 1000 ft (305m),

600V insulation
IMPCABLE
PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs

for use with 333 mV current sensors
PXMP-MM333MV
PXMP meter display6-inch color touchscreen

(with cable)
PXMP-DISP-6
Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABN Voltage Inputs
Table 3.2-14. Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Support Products
PXMP-MB-AB
Power supplysingle-phase 90264 Vac,

24 Vdc at 2.5A
PSG60E
PXMP meter basesingle-phase, three-wire

with ABN voltage inputs
PSG60F

for use with PXMP current sensors
PXMP-MM100MA-AB
Power supplythree-phase 360575 Vac,

24 Vdc at 2.5A
Power supplythree-phase 600 Vac, 24 Vdc
PSS55D
PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use PXMP-MM10MA-AB

with IQMESII current sensors
PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for
use with 333 mV current sensors
PXMP-MM333MV-AB
IO Modules
PXMP meter pulse input module with eight inputs PXMP-PIM
PXMP meter digital output module with
eight outputs
PXMP-DOM
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Communication Module
PXMP meter energy portal module
PXMP-EPM
Current Sensor Kits

KIT, PXMP CS125 sensor, quantity of 3
PXMP-CS125-3
PXMP-CS250-3
PXMP-CS400-3
Current Sensor Cable Kits

KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 4 ft (1.2m), quantity of 3
PXMP-SC4-3
PXMP-SC6-3
PXMP-SC8-3
PXMP-SC12-3
Current Sensor Extension Cable Kits

KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m),
quantity of 3
PXMP-SCE-8-3
KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 16 ft (4.9m),

quantity of 3
PXMP-SCE-16-3
10
11
12
13
14
15
Interface Modules
PXMP current sensor interface module for 333 mV, PXMP-IM333MV-3
kit X 3
16
Note: Total sensor lead length must not exceed 28 ft (8.5m).
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 066
Wiring Diagrams
PXMB-MB
ii
Note: For all voltage connectionsFuses should be sized in accordance with best practices to protect the instrumentation wire.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 3.2-24. Four-Wire Wye Voltage Connection Inputs
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 3.2-25. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Service Current Sensor Connections

CA08104001E
May 2014

3.2-23
Sheet 03 067
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 3.2-26. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Service (Ten Single-Phase, Single-Pole) Current Sensor Connections
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Figure 3.2-27. Network 120/208 Three-Wire Apartment Service Current Sensor Connections
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 068
PXMB-MB-AB
Note: For all voltage connectionsFuses should be sized in accordance with best practices to protect the instrumentation wire.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 3.2-28. Single-Phase, Three-Wire 120/240 Voltage Connection Inputs
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 3.2-29. 120/240 Single-Phase, Three-Wire Service Current Sensor Connections

CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-25
Sheet 03 069
Mounting Dimensions
ii
10.67
(271.0)
0.20
(5.1)
1
10
Mode
24Vdc 80mA Output

Meter
Module
Meter
Module
Com
Com
Health
+
+
+
XX
XX
+
+
+
Pulse
1
+
+
+
CT
Inputs
XX
XX
+
+
+
Pulse
1
XX
B1
A1
100mA
Sensor
+
+
+
XX
B1
A1
100mA
Sensor
XX
XX
XX
+
+
+
+
+
+
XX
XX
XX
+
+
+
Pulse
1
XX
B1
A1
100mA
Sensor
+
+
+
XX
B1
A1
100mA
Sensor
Health
Pulse
2
-
XX
XX
XX
Pulse
2
+
+
+
Pulse
1
+
+
+
XX
B1
A1
100mA
Sensor
Meter
Module
Com
Health
Pulse
2
Pulse
1
-
Com
Health
Pulse
2
Meter
Module
XX
XX
XX
+
+
+
+
+
+
XX
B1
A1
100mA
Sensor
Portal
Module
Output
Module
Com
Com
Health
Health
Health
PI1
PI2
PI3
PI4
PI5
PI6
PI7
PI8
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
Status
XX
XX
XX
Com
Reset
+
+
+
Config. Port
Common
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Slave Address
9
3 7
3
4
5
6
Health
TX
RS-485
(Com 1)
RX
Pulse
1
-
1
2
Meter
Base
24Vdc Inputs
Com
Health
Pulse
2
Pulse
1
-
Pulse In
Module
Shield 7
Common 8
9
D
10
D
Power
Status
XX
TX
RS-485
(Com 2)
RX
B1
24Vdc
Shield 11
Common 12
13
D
D
14
12.00
(304.8)
Cat. No. PXMP-MB-XX

Style No. 66D2261GXX
Rev. X
SN: XXXXXX
FW Version X.X
Date Code: WYYMMDD
Made in USA
A1
100mA
Sensor
24Vdc
80mA Max
Local IP
O1
Link
O3
Local
PS Input
Rating
-Vdc 15
24Vdc +Vdc 16
15W Max Shld 17
WARNING
REMOVE POWER BEFORE SERVICING
O4
MORE THAN ONE LIVE CIRCUIT. SEE DIAGRAM.

AVERTISSEMENT: CET EQUIPEMENT RENFERME PLUSIEURS
CIRCUITS SOUS TENSION. VOIR LE SCHEMA.
O5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DO NOT HIPOT / DIELECTRIC TEST
N (VR) 18
O7
Link
10/100
DHCP
TX ST
O6
10/100
LAN
O8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Meter
Voltage Inputs
C
Delta
Wye
/1PH
LAN
24V
192/10
O2
A1
B1
XX
XX
XX
XX
PI1 PI2 PI3 PI4 PI5 PI6 PI7 PI8
11.67
(296.4)
XX
Meter
Module
Com
Health
Pulse
2
XX
Meter
Module
Com
Health
Pulse
2
-
Meter
Module
480V~ L:G Max.

347V~ L:N Max.
600V~ L:L Max.
CAT III
Freq. 47-63 Hz
nc
C (V3) 19
nc
B (V2) 20
nc
See manual for complete ratings
Modem
A (V1) 21
Power Xpert
Multipoint Meter
10
8.74
(222.0)
10
Figure 3.2-30. Single UnitFront View
11
15.63
(397.0)
12
13
14
Rev. X
FW X.XX
Technical Support 1-800-809-2772

http://www.Eaton.com Made in USA
Cat. No. PXMP-EPM-X

Style No. 66D2250G0X
Serial No. XXXXXX
WYYMMDD
Power Xpert
Multipoint Meter
Figure 3.2-32. Single UnitTop View

12.50
(317.5)
0.06~0.12
(1.6~3.0)
15
1.54
(39.0)
6.10
(0.24)
0.12 (3.0) R Typ.
16
6.79
(172.4)
7.25
(184.1)
17
Outer
5.21
(132.4)
5.67
(144.1)
3.27
(83.1)
Figure 3.2-31. Single UnitSide View
Cut-Out Dimensions
Figure 3.2-33. PXMP Color Touchscreen Display
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 070

Table 3.2-15. Current Sensor Dimensions in Inches (mm)
i
ii
Sensor
ID
PXMP-CS125
2.66 (67.6)
1.66 (42.1)
0.53 (13.5)
PXMP-CS250
2.96 (75.2)
2.42 (61.5)
1.12 (28.4)
PXMP-CS400
3.64 (92.5)
3.03 (73.2)
1.74 (44.2)
1
ID
Blue Locator LED
Terminal Block
3
4
5
6
PXMP-SCX
Cable Connection
Strain Relief
Strap Holes
333 mV
Sensor
Secondary
Leads
Figure 3.2-34. Current Sensor Dimensions

Figure 3.2-35. Open Interface Module (PXMP-IM333MV)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-27
Sheet 03 071
IQ Energy Sentinel
IQ Energy Sentinel
IQ Sentinels
IQ Sentinels are microprocessorbased submeters, designed to monitor
power and energy. They
represent an alternative to installing
separate wattmeters, watthour meters,
and watt demand meters.
The IQ Energy Sentinel monitors
watts, watthour and watt demand.
Key advantages include unmatched

savings in space, lower installation
costs, and the capability to communicate data readings in a variety of ways.
IQ Sentinels with built-in CTs and
communications have the added
benefit of greater overall system
accuracy. Conventional metering often
is less accurate since external CTs and
separate transducers may each have
inaccuracies of 1% or more.
IQ Sentinel
Features
Benefits
Monitors (accuracy stated full scale)
ii
1
2
3
Table 3.2-16. IQ Energy Sentinel Features
Kilowatts
1.0%
Kilowatts demand
1.0%
Kilowatt hour
1.0%
Built-in CTs version up to 400A or external CTs version up to 4000A
Breaker, panel or DIN rail mounted
Powered directly off the line
Built-in communication capability
Address set by DIP switches
Communication at 9600 baud
Noise immune INCOM protocol
Choice of operator interfaces
Subnetwork master local display
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
Power Management Energy Billing software
Power Management software
UL and CSA listed
One device replaces multiple meters and/or transducers

Improved system accuracy
Savings in product cost
Savings in space
Savings in installation cost
No external power source is needed
Permits remote monitoring and interconnection with
programmable logic controllers and building management
systems. For more information, see section on Power
Management Software Systems
Designed to interface directly with Power Management Software
Energy Billing software
Flexibilitydisplays what is needed where
it is needed
Power Management Software
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 072
IQ Energy Sentinel
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
IQ Sentinels (Continued)
Retrofitting
Eatons IQ Sentinels provide a unique

cost-effective method to implement
energy submetering at lower levels
in the distribution system.
The IQ Energy Sentinel is available

in three different package versions:
breaker mounted, universal breaker
with internal CTs, and universal
breaker with external CTs.
The space-saving design characteristics of the breaker mount IQ Energy

Sentinels allow them to be added to
existing Eaton circuit breakers at any
time...often with no additional space or
modifications required.
The ability to monitor power distribution

systems down to the machine or process
level at an industrial facility has become
essential to provide key benefits such as
to verify the accuracy of the utility bill,
identify and track energy usage to the
loads that consume it, develop a facility
energy profile to establish a baseline,
allocate energy costs to create accountability and so on.
An optional door-mounted interface,
the Subnetwork Master Local Display,
is available to display the energy
parameters monitored by the
IQ Sentinels.
Submetering application examples
for the IQ Sentinels include energy
demand monitoring, product cost
analysis, process machine tool
efficiency and productivity improvement, and energy-cost allocation
or tenant billing for commercial,
industrial, recreational and
residential facilities.
Designed for mounting on Series C

circuit breakers used in Eaton assemblies such as:
Pow-R-Line four panelboards

feeder circuits
Power-R-Line C switchboards
feeder circuits
Motor control centers and
enclosed control with circuit
breaker disconnectsstarter
or feeder circuits
Enclosed motor control
Enclosed circuit breakers
Pow-R-Way III Bus Plugs with
circuit breaker disconnects
Breaker Mount Applications

New Equipment
Note: For customer-billing applications, consult local utility for metering

requirements.
Universal Mount with Internal CTs
Universal Mount Applications

The universal mount IQ Energy Sentinel
with internal CTs includes integral 400A
CTs and may be applied on loads up to
400A. The universal mount IQ Energy
Sentinels with internal CTs may be
used wherever breaker mounting is
not feasible or possible.
The universal mount IQ Energy Sentinel
with provisions for external CTs may be
applied on loads up to 4000A. They are
usually used for monitoring loads larger
than 400A, on power cable sizes larger
than 500 kcmil or on circuits containing
more than one conductor per phase.
Commercial applications include

energy-cost allocation within convention halls, office buildings, shopping
malls, hospitals, warehouses and
storage facilities.
Industrial applications include departmental billing and process/assembly
line energy cost analysis. IQ Energy
Sentinels may be substituted for watt
transducers when monitoring machine
tool and equipment performance
within plants.
Or they may be installed when

upgrading from older circuit
breakers...often with no additional
space or modifications required.
F-Frame Breaker with IQ Sentinel
Recreational facilities include sports

arenas, camping grounds, trailer parks
and marinas.
17
The IQ Sentinel may be applied

on three-phase (three- or four-wire),
as well as single-phase (three-wire)
systems.
18
IQ Sentinels may be applied on either

50 or 60 Hz systems.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-29
Sheet 03 073
IQ Energy Sentinel
Eaton Breaker Mount
Eatons breaker mount IQ Energy Sentinel installs in less than

10 minutes on the load side of a Eaton Series C
F-Frame (150A), J-Frame (250A), or K-Frame (400A) circuit
breakers.
ii
1
Voltage
Tangs
Transmit
LED
2
3
4
5
6
Ground/Neutral
Connection
Energy Sentinel Features
Universal Mount with Internal CTs(UI)
Universal Mount for External CTs(UE)
The Universal Mount IQ Energy Sentinel with internal CTs

may be panel-mounted or DIN rail mounted on disconnects
or other circuits up to 400A. A pull-apart terminal block is
provided on the device for connection of the system voltage
reference wiring.
The Universal Mount IQ Energy Sentinel for external CTs

may be panel-mounted or DIN rail mounted on circuits
up to 4000A.
Note: The location of the ground/neutral connection differs on

Breaker Mount IQ Energy Sentinels from the location of the ground/
neutral connection on Universal Mount IQ Sentinels. Incorrect wiring
to the ground/neutral and communications connections may result
in accuracy and communication errors.
Communications
Connections
Communications
Connections
DIP Switch
Address
A pull-apart terminal block is provided on the device for

connection of the system voltage reference wiring as well as
another terminal block for connection to the users existing
5A secondary CTs that may range in standard ratios from
25:5 up to 4000:5.
Note: If the device will be disconnected without interruption of the
monitored load, the use of a CT shorting block is advised.
Communications
Shield
Connection
Communications
Connections
Communications
Shield
Connection
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CT
Terminal
Block
17
18
Ground/Neutral
Connection
Voltage Terminal Block
Ground/Neutral
Connection
Voltage Terminal Block
19
Energy Sentinel Features
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 074
IQ Energy Sentinel

Table 3.2-17. Energy Sentinel
ii
Current Input
Current Range: 1% to 125% of current rating
Burden:
1 VA
Voltage Input
Voltage Range: 20% of voltage rating
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Phase A
Power Factor Range

All (1 to +1)
Communications
Protocol:
INCOM
Speed:
9600 baud
Compatibility: Power Management Software
compatible
Operating temperature: 25 to 70C 1
(13 to 158F)
Storage temperature:
40 to 85C 1
(40 to 185F)
Operating humidity:
5% to 95%
relative humidity
noncondensing
Dimensions D x W x H in Inches (mm)
F 3.20 x 4.12 x 1.30 (81.3 x 104.6 x 33.0);
CT window size 2 0.59 (15.0)
J 4.04 x 4.12 x 1.28 (102.6 x 104.6 x 32.5);
K 4.04 x 5.31 x 1.25 (102.6 x 134.9 x 31.8);
UI 4.36 x 5.31 x 3.00 (110.7 x 134.9 x 76.2);
hole clearance 1.17 (29.7)
UE 4.36 x 5.31 x 3.00 (110.7 x 134.9 x 76.2)
11
12
Other Specifications
UL File No. E64983
CSA File No. LR106359-1
1
13
The Ground (GND) terminal of

the IQ Energy Sentinel should be
connected to the ground bus or other
non-current- carrying ground with
600V rated wire to ensure accuracy.
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Weight in Lbs (kg):

F
0.65 (0.30)
J
0.69 (0.31)
K
0.87 (0.39)
UI 1.10 (0.50)
UE 1.10 (0.50)
10
System Voltage Considerations

(Application Note)
Phase A
Neutral
Phase C
Three-Phase Star,
Four-Wire, Earthed
Neutral.
Three-Phase Star,
Four-Wire, NonEarthed Neutral.
Three-Phase Star,
Three-Wire
Three-Phase Star,
Three-Wire, Earthed
Neutral Point.
Phase C
Single-Phase,
Three-Wire, Earthed
Mid-Point (Connect
to A and C Phases).
Three-Phase Delta,
Three-Wire
Two-Phase Star,
Three-Wire, Earthed
Neutral (Connect to
A and C Phases).
Three-Phase Open
Delta, Four-Wire,
Earthed Junction.
Note: Acceptable for Universal IQ Energy Sentinels only.
Figure 3.2-36. Acceptable System Configurations
40C (standard) maximum for Series C

circuit breakers.
Acceptable for Universal IQ Energy
Sentinels only.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-31
Sheet 03 075
IQ Energy Sentinel
Table 3.2-18. IQ Energy Sentinels Catalog Information
Description
Voltage RatingVac
Current Rating
Maximum Amperes
Catalog
Number
For F-Frame breakers

120/240, 240, 208Y/120

220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
150
150
150
150
IQESF208
IQESF400
IQESF480
IQESF600
For J-Frame breakers

120/240, 240, 208Y/120

220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
250
250
250
250
IQESJ208
IQESJ400
IQESJ480
IQESJ600
For K-Frame breakers

120/240, 240, 208Y/120

220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
400
400
400
400
IQESK208
IQESK400
IQESK480
IQESK600
Universal with internal CTs

120/240, 240, 208Y/120

220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
400
400
400
400
IQESUI208
IQESUI400
IQESUI480
IQESUI600
Universal for external CTs

120/240, 240, 208Y/120

220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
4000
4000
4000
4000
IQESUE208
IQESUE400
IQESUE480
IQESUE600
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 3.2-19. Terminal, Cable and Wiring Guidelines

Sentinel
Eaton
Series C Terminal
Wire Size
Single Conductor
F-Frame
J-Frame
K-Frame
624B100G02, G17, G18, G19

T250KB, TA250KB
T350K, TA350KB
#141/0, #44/0, #44/01, #141/0 AWG

#4350 kcmil
#250500 kcmil

System voltage reference wiring
Current transformer wiring
Ground reference wiring
Communications wiring
#250500 kcmil
#24#10 AWG
#12 AWG (maximum)
#22#12 AWG (minimum 600V rated)
Eaton IMPCABLE or Belden 9463 family
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 076
IQ Energy Sentinel
ii
F-Frame Energy Sentinels
J-Frame Energy Sentinels
0.25
Typical
(6.4)
K-Frame Energy Sentinels
0.25
Typical
(6.4)
0.25
Typical
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
1.25
(31.8)
1.10
(27.9)
1.30
(33.0)
1.28
(32.5)
1.25
(31.8)
3
4
4.04
(102.6)
1.17
Typical
(29.7)
3.20
(81.3)
1.38
(34.9)
2.06
(52.3)
1.38
(34.9)
1.38
(34.9)
4.12
(104.6)
11
1.38
(34.9)
2.06
(52.3)
1.72
(43.7)
4.12
(104.6)
0.14
(3.6)
Radius
1.80
(45.7)
1.71
(43.4)
Universal with External CTs

Energy Sentinels
1.80
(45.7)
0.14
(3.6)
Radius
2.50
(63.5)
1.36
(34.5)
13
2.60
(66.0)
1.36
(34.5)
1.80
(45.7)
1.71
(43.4)
1.80
(45.7)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
1.36
(34.5)
5.31
(134.9)
14
1.72
(43.7)
2.66
(67.5)
5.31
(134.9)
Universal with Internal CTs

Energy Sentinels
12
15
0.96
(24.4)
1.38
(34.9)
10
4.04
(102.6)
0.77
(19.6)
0.59
(15.0)
1.17
Typical
(29.7)
0.90
Typical
(22.9)
2.60
(66.0)
3.00
(76.2)
1.36
(34.5)
5.31
(134.9)
1.17
(29.7)
Diameter
4.36
(110.7)
16
4.36
(110.7)
17
1.72
(43.7)
18
1.72
(43.7)
2.66
(67.5)
19
Figure 3.2-37. IQ Sentinel
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-33
Sheet 03 077
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module
Molded-Case Circuit
and Metering Module (PM3)

The PM3 provides the following
metering, monitoring and
communications functions:
Metering
Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
General Description
The Power Monitoring and Metering
Module (PM3) is a UL-listed add-on
communications module that
mounts directly to the load side
of three-pole molded-case circuit
breakers, similar to an earth leakage
module. The PM3 adds revenue
accurate power metering and breaker
status monitoring to new and/or
existing Series C and Series G
breakers. Regardless of the type of trip
unit (thermal-magnetic or electronic),
the PM3 can be applied in applications
where power metering, circuit breaker
monitoring and/or communications
is essential. The PM3 is extremely
flexible and can be used in main
breaker or feeder breaker applications.
The automatic voltage sensing
means that the same PM3 module
can be used on 208, 240 or 480 Vac
applications. It can also be installed
in reverse-feed and reverse-phasing
(CBA) applications.
Phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Iavg)

Phase-to-phase voltages
(Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vavg)
Phase-to-neutral voltages
(Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vavg)
Real power (kW)total and
per phase
Reactive power (kVAR)total and
per phase
Apparent power (kVA)total and
per phase
Power factortotal and per phase
Real energy (WHr)forward,
reverse and net
Reactive Energy (VARHr)forward,
reverse and net
Apparent energy (VAHr)forward,
reverse and net
Accuracy
Voltage and amperage: 0.5% of

reading
Watts, VARs, VA: 1% of reading
Energy: 1% per ANSI C12.1
Revenue Grade Accuracy: ANSI C12.1
Monitoring
Communications
INCOM and Modbus RTU

communications
Shielded-twisted pair
communications
Daisy-chaining of multiple units
Web-based communications
available through a Power
Xpert Gateway
TX and RX communication
diagnostic LEDs
5
6
Metering Module
Control Power
The PM3 is powered directly from the
circuit breaker voltage for applications
480 Vac and below. External control
power is not required for these
applications. However, an auxiliary
24 Vdc external power input is
included for applications requiring
communications capability even when
the breaker circuit is de-energized.
Modbus
Breaker must include auxiliary contact

and bell alarm contact accessory.
Breaker status
Open/close statusthru breaker
auxiliary contact
Tripped statusthru breaker bell
alarm contact
Unit healthflashing status LED
when module is powered
ii
Note: For 600V applications, external 24 Vdc

auxiliary power is required.
7
8
9
10
11
Product Selection
Table 3.2-20.PM3 Product Selection
PM3 Modules
Frame
FD
JG
KD and LG
12
Catalog Number
480V
600V
PM3FM
PM3JM
PM3LM
PM3FI480
PM3JI480
PM3LI480
PM3FI600
PM3JI600
PM3LI600
13
14
INCOM
FD
JG
KD and LG
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 078

Metered parameters
ii
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ia, Ib, Ic
Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn
Apparent Energy, Forward Real
Energy, Reverse Real Energy, Net
Real Energy, Lagging Reactive
Energy, Leading Reactive Energy,
Net Reactive Energy
Apparent Power A, B, C; Apparent
Power Total; Reactive Power A, B, C;
Reactive Power Total; Real Power A,
B, C; Real Power Total
Frequency, Apparent Power Factor,
Apparent PFA, Apparent PFB,
Apparent PFC
Table 3.2-21. PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications
for Modbus RTU
Description
Specification
Current Inputs
Pickup current
0.3A rms
Maximum reported current
FD/JG 250A rms

KD/LD 630A rms
Accuracy 0.5%
0.5% of reading
Voltage Inputs
Range

Supported systems
Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral

Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems
Input impedance
996 kiloohm/phase
Burden per phase
0.36 VA/phase max. at 600V;

0.014 VA at 120V
Phase voltage connections
Internal via screw terminal to busbar. For wye system, a neutral is

required to be connected to the PM3 on the right Phoenix connector.
Neutral connection
If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral

based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage. The system voltage must
be balanced for this to be accurate.
Frequency
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Accuracy
0.1 Hz
Resolution
0.1 Hz
Power and Energy

Accuracy
1% of reading (ANSI C12.1)
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20C to +50C
Storage temperature
20C to +50C
Operating humidity
5 to 95% RH noncondensing
Sensing Method
Voltage, current
True rms
Sampling rate
13.02K samples per second
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA
1.03 sec at 60 Hz
1.07 sec at 60 Hz
Power Supply (External)

DC voltage
1830 Vdc
Maximum current
30 mA at 24 Vdc
Burden
0.72W
Standard Communication Format

Connection type
Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common)
Com port baud rate
9600 or 19,200 bauds
Modbus address range
01247
Data format
Selectable (8, N, 1 | 8, N, 2 | 8,
Even, 1 | 8, Odd, 1)
Protocols
Modbus RTU
Internal termination resistor

selectable ON or OFF
Via DIP switch
Default: 19,200 bauds

Default: 8, N, 2
Default: Enabled
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.2-35
Sheet 03 079

Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.38
(35.1)
2.88
(73.2)
0.69
(17.5)
Line End
3.50 (88.9)
3.39
(86.1)
3.19
(81.0)
3.63
(92.2)
On
Off
3.63
(92.2)
6.00
(152.4)
CL
Handle
4.50
(114.3)
1.72
(43.7)
0.86
(21.8)
5.77
(146.6)
4.92
(125.0)
1
5.77
(146.6)
On/I
CL
Handle
CL
Handle
S
RY EA
LED
FACTO
O
N
Line End
ii
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.81
(96.8)
Off/O
8.44
(214.4)
CL
Handle
10.13
(257.3)
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
11.00
(279.4)
9.53
(242.1)
12.14
(308.4)
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
Tx
ON O
Rx
STATUS
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
See breaker for terminal information.
See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
MODBUS
COM
24 Vdc (+)
Power
24 Vdc ()
13.83
(351.3)
Network Address
N1
EARTH
123456789101112131415
2.06
(52.3)
Load End
3.34
(84.8)
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
3.42
(86.9)
3.94 (100.1)
4.13 (104.9)
Figure 3.2-38. FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
1.38
(35.1)
0.69
(17.5)
Line End
Load End
3.98
(101.1)
4.06
(103.1)
4.88 (124.0)
7
8
Figure 3.2-40. KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus

3.57 (90.7)
3.44
(87.4)
3.34
(84.8)
1.72
(43.7)
0.86
(21.8)
Line End
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
10
123456789101112131415
3.17
(80.5)
3.95
(100.3)
CL
Handle
CL
Handle
7.00
(177.8)
O
N
O
F
F
PUSH TO
TRIP
LED
S
RY EA
5.50
(139.7)
3.95
(100.3)
FACTO
10.50
(266.7)
O
N
1 2 3 4 5 6
12.00
(304.8)
5.58
(141.7)
4.73
(120.1)
CL
Handle
8.44
(214.4)
12.14
(308.4)
5.58
(141.7)
CL
Handle
10.13
(257.3)
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
Tx
ON O
Rx
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
STATUS
Network Address
N1
A
B
MODBUS
COM
EARTH
24 Vdc (+)
24 Vdc ()
Power
Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
11
12
13
13.82
(351.0)
14
123456789101112131415
2.06
(52.3)
Load End
4.13 (104.9)
3.34
(84.8)
3.42
(86.9)
4.41 (112.0)
Figure 3.2-39. JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
Load End
3.98
(101.1)
4.06
(103.1)
5.43 (137.9)
15
16
Figure 3.2-41. LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
17
18
Table 3.2-22. PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights

Description
Weight in lbs (kg)
Basic unit in inches (mm)
Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm)
CA08104001E
Frame
FD
1.26 (0.57)
JG
1.60 (0.73)
KD/LG
2.25 (1.02)
FD
4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
JG
4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
KD/LG
5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139.2 x 94.0 x 103.2)
FD/JG
8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (203.2 x 130.3 x 139.7)
KD/LG
6.25 x 8.25 x 7.00 (158.7 x 209.5 x 177.8)
19
20
21

May 2014
Sheet 03 080
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.3-1
Sheet 03 081
IQ Analyzer6000 Series

6400 Series without Waveform Display, 6600 Series
with Waveform Display
i
ii
1
General Description
Applications
Monitoring of over 150 electrical

parameters
Power quality management
Energy management
rms sensing
Phase, neutral and ground currents
Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg.
L-N, N-G
Power: real, reactive, apparent
(system and per phase)
Frequency
Power factor: apparent and
displacement (system and
per phase)
Energy and demand (forward,
reverse, net) real, reactive apparent
at four different utility rates
Individual current and voltage
harmonics: magnitude, phase angle
% THD: current and voltage
Waveform capture
Minimum/maximum values
Event logging/disturbance
recording
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5% revenue
metering accuracy, ANSI C12.16,
IEC687 Class 0.5%
Accuracy
Currents and voltages: 0.20%

Power, energy and demand: 0.40%
Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Power factor: 0.80%
Accuracy maintained from
3%800% of full scale and from
0.50 to 1.00 to +0.50 power factor
4
5
6
7
Communications
Features
Optional interface capability to

computer network for data collection,
storage and/or printout via the
Eaton Power Management software.
IQ AnalyzerComprehensive
Electrical Distribution Monitoring
Graphical reverse-mode LCD display

with LED backlight
Up to seven lines of information
without PONI, 5.83 inches (148.1 mm)
with PONI
Membrane faceplate NEMA 3R
and 12 rated
Listings/Certifications
UL listed, File E62791, NKCR

File E185559 (CE versions)
cULT listed #1010.1 C22.2
CE mark EN61010-1 EN50082-2
Measurement Canada Electricity
Meter AE-0782
CSA approved
The IQ Analyzer is a complete solution

to monitor and manage all aspects of
Its high-performance metering exceeds
ANSI C12.16 (0.5%) specification for
revenue meters and meets ANSI C12.20
Class 0.5%, provides quality true rms
readings through the 50th harmonic,
accurately measures nonsinusoidal
waveforms up to a 3.0 crest factor,
and displays even and odd multiples
of the fundamental current and voltage
through the 50th harmonic. Both
magnitude and phase angle of the
harmonics are displayed.
Note: For definition of power quality terms,
see Page 3.3-7.
The unique operator interface, which

includes a reverse-mode LCD display,
easy-to-use Meter Menu screens and
detailed Analysis screens, is designed
to allow a wealth of real-time and
recorded information to be accessed
easily by an operator. All programming can be accomplished through
the faceplate or the communications
port. The comprehensive online Help
feature provides useful information
on device operation, programming
and troubleshooting.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

3.3-2
May 2014
Sheet 03 082
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Disturbance Information
Event Logging
With the communications option and

Eatons Power Management software
and Waveform Display software, a
Waveform Analysis will construct
waveforms of up to 56 cycles of all
currents and voltages (including neutral
and ground) to help troubleshoot
undervoltage/sag and overvoltage/swell
conditions. (See CBEMA Trend Logging
section.) By programming a reset
threshold, the duration of the voltage
disturbance can also be indicated.
The IQ Analyzer is equipped with

on-board logging capability, which
includes the ability to log a total of
24 parameters with intervals ranging
from 0.13 seconds (every 8 cycles)
to twice a week (5040 minutes).
The trending function can begin
immediately or can be triggered
upon receipt of a discrete input into
the IQ Analyzer. On-board logging
provides a cost-effective means of
distributed data storage, where realtime communications may not be
feasible or for applications where
data storage redundancy is desired.
Four trend data logs are stored in
non-volatile memory aboard the
IQ Analyzer and can be retrieved
at the display or via communications
for viewing using Eaton software.
The IQ Analyzer will store in nonvolatile memory the time and reason
for last 504 events. These events can
be viewed from the graphical display
or accessed via communications. In
addition to all of the meter events listed
in the Event Conditions paragraph on
Page 3.3-4, the following events are
entered into the event log.
The IQ Analyzer 6600 series with

Graphic Waveform Display offers the
ability to view the captured waveform
right at the device. The 6600 series also
offers the ability to detect and capture
sub-cycle voltage disturbances.
Extensive Harmonic Distortion Analysis
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Current and voltage distortion data

are displayed at the device and are
accessible through the communications
port. This includes % THD, K-Factor,
crest factor, CBEMA factor, and both
magnitudes and phase angles of all
harmonics through the 50th. A snapshot
sample of this information may be activated by user commands, discrete
inputs or programmable thresholds
to capture distortion data during
conditions of real interest. To help
eliminate nuisance alarms, harmonic
distortion information can be captured
and relay outputs activated when THD
exceeds a programmable percentage
of fundamental or a programmable
magnitude (e.g., amperes) threshold.
Time-of-Use Metering
The IQ Analyzer offers the ability to
store energy usage data for time of
use revenue metering. It can be
programmed for any combination
of weekday, Saturday, Sunday,
22 holidays, 8 seasons, 32 schedules,
and 10 time periods per schedule.
The IQ Analyzer will keep track of the
following parameters for four different utility rates:
18
19
Watthours
VAR-hours
VA-hours
Current demand
Watt demand
VA demand
VAR demand
Up to 24 parameters with storage

capacity for up to 90,000 data points
Up to 234 days of data can be stored
when recording a parameter every
15 minutes
Trends 1, 2 and 3 can save data on
a discrete contact input
Trend 4 can save data on a power
quality or meter event
Minimum and maximum recording
(min./max. three-phase average
current, max. IG, min./max. threephase average VLL and VLN,
max. VNG, max. system watts,
VARs and VA, min./max. apparent
and displacement PF). Using this
feature, minimum and maximums
reached during each trend interval
are recorded
ITIC (formally CBEMA) Trend Logging

The IQ Analyzer can be configured
to store the necessary data so that
PowerNet can display a sag or swell
voltage event on the industry standard
ITIC (formerly CBEMA) curve for
predictive maintenance and troubleshooting. This application uses the
IQ Analyzer waveform capture
for high-speed events along with
historical trend logging for longer term
voltage disturbances. Once this data
is uploaded to a PC running the Power
Management Software Event Viewer,
the information is analyzed, displayed
and stored. Automatic uploading
of ITIC events can be selected in
PowerNet. A three-phase event will be
correctly displayed as a single point
on the ITIC curve.
Time and date of:
Alarms
Meter power up
All resets
All setting changes
Communications established or lost
Event logging is another powerful

troubleshooting tool within the
IQ Analyzer.
Extensive I/O and

Communications Capability
One analog and three digital inputs
are provided to interface with sensors
and transducers. Three analog outputs
and four relay contacts are furnished
to share data with PLCs and control
systems and to actuate alarms and
control relays. Terminals are captive
clamp type and finger safe. With the
communications option, the device
can be remotely monitored, controlled
and programmed.
Ratings
Application to 500 kV, no PTs to 600V

CT ratios selectable from 5: 5A
to 10,000: 5A
Standard 120/600 Vac line
Three-phase power supply module,
100600 Vac
Separate source power supply
module available, 100240 Vac
or 100250 Vdc
DC only separate source power
module also available, 2448 Vdc
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.3-3
Sheet 03 083
Displayed Information Features
All information is accessible at the

device or through the communications port via Eatons Power
Management Software
Quality true rms readings through
50th harmonic
Complies with the accuracy
portion of ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5%
revenue metering specification
Accurate readings for nonsinusoidal
waveforms with up to 3.0 crest factor
Screens display auto ranging units,
kilo units, mega units as needed
10-digit energy readings
Displays multiple parameters at the
same time
Programmable custom screens
The IQ Analyzer allows a user to

view commonly used parameters
by scrolling through its LED indicator
Meter Menu.
Harmonic Analysis Screens
ii
Meter Menu Displayed Information
Meter Menu Screens
Current:
Phases A, B, C, average
Neutral
Ground (separate CT)
Voltage:
Phases A-B, B-C, C-A, average
Phases A-N, B-N, C-N, average
Neutral-ground
Power:
Real (watts)
Reactive (VARs)
Apparent (VA)
Phases A, B, C and system
1
2
Harmonic Spectrum Available
with Model 6600
Minimum and Maximum Values
Meter Menu
Examples of Meter Menu
% THD current:
Phases A, B, C, N
% THD voltage:
Phases A-B, B-C, C-A
Phases A-N, B-N, C-N
Custom Screen
Power factor:
Displacement
Apparent
K-Factor
ITIC (CBEMA) derating factor
(displayed as Z)
Crest factor
Discrete input and output status
Analog input reading
CustomUser may program four
screens to show any combination
of seven Meter Menu parameters
per screen
Current:
Phases A, B, C, N, G
Voltage:
Phases A-N, B-N, C-N, N-G
Power:
Real (watts)
Reactive (VARs)
Apparent (VA)
CA08104001E
Power factor:
Apparent
Displacement
(three-phase and system)
Frequency.
THD (amperes, volts, and %):
Current (phases A, B, C, N)
Voltage (phases A-B, B-C, C-A,
A-N, B-N, C-N)
All minimum/maximum values may

be reset via reset pushbutton on
faceplate, discrete input or communications command. Values are
updated at least once every 16 line
cycles.
The F3 function key accesses the
Harmonic Analysis screens. Two cycles
of data sampled at 128
samples/cycle are simultaneously
recorded for:
Current:
Phases A, B, C, N, G
Voltage:
Phases A-N, B-N, C-N
Neutral to ground
Magnitudes (or % of fundamental)

of odd and even multiples of the
fundamental from 2nd50th are
displayed. The phase angle associated
with each multiple of the fundamental
is also displayed.
Custom Screen
Energy (forward, reverse and net):

Real (kWh)
Reactive (kVARh) apparent
(kVAh)no reverse or net
Frequency, time and date
Demand:
System current (amperes)
Systems real power (kW)
System reactive power (kVAR)
System apparent power (kVA)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

3.3-4
May 2014
Sheet 03 084
Event/Alarm Analysis Screens
ii
1
Event Conditions
Discrete Input Energized
Events may be triggered by up to

seven of any of the following
conditions:
Voltage Disturbances
All trigger conditions have programmable time delays from 0.1 to

60 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Demand Recording
Undervoltage/sagany VL-L, VL-N

(40%100%)
Note: 60% minimum for self-powered unit.
2
Example of Event Analysis Screens
3
4
Overvoltage/swellany VL-L, VL-N

(100%750%)
If zero time delay is programmed, any

disturbance lasting two cycles (less if
magnitude is sufficient to effect rms
readings) will trigger a voltage
disturbance event/alarm.
Sub-cycle transient capture/excess

dv/dt on VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Note: 6600 Series only.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Waveform Screen Available

with Model 6600
Note: 6600 Series only.
Maximum Threshold Exceeded
Event data is stored in non-volatile

memory. If a reset threshold is programmed, the duration of the event
(e.g., undervoltage) is also displayed.
With Eatons PowerNet communications option and Series III software,
waveforms and harmonic profiles
may be displayed on a PC.
Currentsphases A, B, C, neutral
and ground
Voltageneutral to ground
System powerwatts, VA, VARs
System power factordisplacement and apparent
Demand
Currentsphase A, B, C and AVG
System powerwatts, VARs, VA
Frequency
% THD or magnitude total
harmonic distortion
Currents
Phases A, B, C, neutral
Voltage
VA-N, VB-N, VC-N, VA-B, VB-C,
VC-A
Minimum Threshold Exceeded
Currentsphases A, B, C
System powerwatts, VARs, VA
System power factor
displacement and apparent
Frequency
Voltage Phase Unbalance
18
Sub-cycle voltage interruption

on VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Pressing the F2 function key accesses

the Event Analysis screens. These
display the following data for up to
ten event/alarm conditions:
Description, date, and time of
event/alarm with 10 millisecond
resolution
Current, voltages, power readings,
demand readings, frequency and
% THD at time of event/alarm
Current and voltage distortion
information available on Harmonic
Analysis screens
Input 1, 2, 3
Voltage L-L, L-N
Current Phase Unbalance
Peak Demands are date and time

stamped for:
Current phases A, B, C, average

System power:
Real (watts)
Reactive (VARs)
Apparent (VA)
Input/Output
Extensive input/output capability
is standard on the IQ Analyzer.
In addition to monitoring three-phase
currents and voltages, separate inputs
are provided for both ground and
neutral currents. Voltage of neutral-toground is also monitored to indicate
the presence of harmonics and
potential downstream grounding
problems. Analog and digital I/O
provide interfaces for transducers,
relays, PLCs and control systems.
Current Inputs
Five ampere secondary CT
connections for:
Phases A, B, C
Ground
Neutral
Separate ground and neutral
CT inputs
CT range 5:5 to 10,000:5
(any integer)
Voltage Inputs
Phases A, B, C (from 120 Vac

500 kV AC)
120/240 Vac control power input
standardnot required with
optional line power module
Separate ground-to-neutral
voltage reference
PT range 120:120 to 500,000:120
(any integer)
External 120V secondary PTs are
required above 600 Vac, optional
from 120600 Vac.
CurrentPhases A, B, C
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.3-5
Sheet 03 085
Three dry contact discrete inputs may
be programmed by the user to:
Trigger Event Analysisthe

information described in Event
Analysis Screens, including
Harmonic Analysis information, can
be recorded when external devices
trip or change state by wiring their
auxiliary contacts into these inputs
Act as a synch.-pulse input to
synchronize power demand
windows with utility provided
synch pulse
Actuate a relay output
Reset relay output, peak demands,
Trend Analysis records and Event
Analysis records
With communications option,
provide remote status indication
on Eatons network
Status of input contacts is displayed in

the Meter Menu Custom screen.
Relay Output Contacts

Four Form C NO/NC relay contacts may
be independently programmed to:
Act as a kWh, kVARh or kVAh pulse

initiator output
Actuate on one or more event
conditionsincluding discrete input
and Eaton Power Management
Software command (through
communications port)
Reverse sequence alarm
Each Relay may be set for Auto
or Manual Reset with 030 minute
release delay (one second increments).
Relays are Form C NO/NC. Relay(s)
programmed to actuate
on undervoltage also have a
programmable 030 minute delay
on power-up for transfer applications.
Separate
Source
Power Supply
Relay #2
The analog outputs may be

programmed to reflect any of
the following:
i
ii
1
2
3
Currentphases A, B, C, average,
N, G
VoltageL-L, L-N, N-G
Power:
Real (watts)
Reactive (VARs)
Apparent (VA)
% THD:
Current (phases A, B, C, N)
Voltage (L-L, L-N)
4
5
6
7
8
Earth Ground
Analog Input
Common
Analog
Outputs
Chassis Ground
Relay #1
One analog input and four analog

outputs may be configured as 020
or 420 mA. The analog input is
displayed at the device as a percentage and is accessible through the
communications port. The analog
input provides an interface with gas
flow meters, temperature transducers
or other analog devices.
Current Transformer
Connections
Power
Module
Connection
Analog Input and Outputs
Remote
Inputs
Frequencysystem
Power factor:
System displacement PF
System apparent PF
9
10
11
12
13
Field Replaceable
Fuse
Relay #3
Communication
Connection
Relay #4
System
Voltage
Connections
14
15
16
17
Figure 3.3-1.IQ AnalyzerRear View
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
3.3-6

May 2014
Sheet 03 086
IQ Analyzer Wiring Diagram

Three-Phase, Four-Wire (Above 600V)
External Potential Transformers and Current Transformers
ii
4 CT
1
2
N
Line
1 CT
5 CT
Fuse
Load
2 CT
L2
L1
3 CT
L3
Wye
Connection
Note: External PTs Not
Required Under 600V
Optional
Ground
Current
5
Control Power
IQ Analyzer
Relay No. 1
Fuse
7
8
A
B
1
2 3 4
(See Label for
120 Vac/125 Vdc Connections)
C
Neutral
Terminal

1
11
Relay No. 3
Relay No. 4
3 4
6 7
9 10
11
12
Separate Source Power Supply Module

(Also Available with Control Power Derived from Monitored Line)
9
10
Relay No. 2
H1G H1N H1C H1B H1A

H2G H2N H2C H2B H2A
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Analog I/O
Outputs
2
3
4
20
21
22
Ground
Analog
Input
Earth
Ground
23
24
25
Figure 3.3-2. Sample Wiring Diagram for a Three-Phase, Four-Wire System
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.3-7
Sheet 03 087
Definition of Power Quality Terms
Displacement Power Factor =
6.72
(170.7)
ii
---------------------------W 2 + Var 2
Normal
Event
= Fundamental (60 Hz) watts to

(60 Hz) VA.
A ratio of fundamental (60 Hz)
real power to apparent power.
Reset
Relay
IQ Analyzer
Program
2
3
Apparent Power Factor =

Previous
Level
F1
F2
F3
F4
Home
W
------
10.25
(260.4)
VA
= Total rms watts to VA.

A ratio of total real power
(including harmonic
component) to apparent power.
Current
Demand
Voltage
Power Factor
Power (Watts)
Frequency
Power (Vars)
% THD
Power (VA)
Distortion Factor
Energy
Custom
Program
Up
Down
Help
K-Factor =
In 2
h n2 ----
I 1
--------------------In 2
----
I 1
A derating factor that is

related to the sum of the
squares of harmonic currents
times the squares of their
harmonic numbers (multiples
of the fundamental).
5.38
2.69
10
8.90
CF
I Peak
A transformer harmonic
derating factor (THDF) defined
as a pure sine waves crest
factor (1.4141) divided by the
measured crest factor.
10.41
(264.4
4.45
2.23
12
4.69
10.09
(256.3)
.06 RAD
4 Places
CL
.94
(23.9)
5.52
(140.2)
13
14
2.53
.218 DIA
10 Places
I Peak
7.41
(188.2)
------------I rms
11.03
(280.2)
CL
5.06
Crest Factor =
11
.213
(5.4)
Typ. for 8
9.38
2I
rms
-----2- = ------------------
8.11
(206.0)
4.06
(103.1)
6.68
CBEMA Factor =
Figure 3.3-4. Dimensions and Cutout
Figure 3.3-5. Drilling Pattern
Ratio of peak current to rms

current.
Figure 3.3-6. Drilling Pattern for

Flange Mounting
15
16
17
18
Figure 3.3-3. Definition of Power Quality Terms
19
20
21
CA08104001E

3.3-8
May 2014
Sheet 03 088

Table 3.3-1. Input/Output Information
ii
Fuses
Self-powered units with IQMSSPM have 0.75A, 600V Bus
Type KTK-R-3/4 fuses (three required)
Separate source dual voltage units with IQMSSPM have a
single 0.20 (5.0) x 0.79 (20.0) 0.25A fuse

Separate source DC units with IQMDCPM do not have
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
user-replaceable fuses
20 to 70C
30 to 85C
Operating humidity:
5% to 95%
relative
humidity
Device weight:
5.8 lbs (2.6 kg)
Accuracy (in percent full scale)

Accuracy from 3300% of full scale and from 0.5. to 1.00 to 0.5 power factor.
Current and voltage:
0.20%
Power, energy, and demand:
0.40%
Frequency:
0.04%
Power factor:
0.80%
THD:
1.00%
Specific current accuracies:
0.20% of full scale to 200% of full scale and 150% crest factor
0.40% of reading for currents to 800% of full scale
Power and energy: start recording with an average of 3 mA secondary current
Current Inputs (each channel)

Conversion:
True rms, 32 sample/cycle (all samples used
in all rms calculations)
CT input:
5A secondary (any integer 5:5 to 10,000:5)
Burden:
0.05 VA
Overload withstand:
40A AC continuous, 300A AC 1 second
Range:
8 x CT continuous
Accuracy:
0.1% of CT primary rating, 0.2% of reading
above 150% of rating, sinusoidal (see accuracy
below for non-sinusoidal specifications)
Input impedance:
0.002 ohm
Discrete Inputs (dry contact)

+30 Vdc differential across each discrete input pair of terminals.
Minimum pulse width: 1.6 msec
Optically isolated inputs to protect IQ Analyzer circuitry.
Voltage Inputs (each channel)

Conversion:
True rms, 32 samples/cycle (all samples used
in all rms calculations)
PT Input:
Direct or any integer 120:120 to 500,000:120
Range:
30 to 660 Vac (separate source and DC source)
Nominal Full Scale:
100600 Vac
Burden:
21 VA (self-powered only)
Overload Withstand: 635 Vac, continuous
700 Vac, 1 second
Input Impedance:
1 megohm
Relay Output Contacts (4)

Form C dry contact:
10A at
120/240 Vac (resistive)
10A at 30 Vdc (resistive)
30A make (50 ms)
at 240 Vac/240 Vdc
Minimum pulse width:
Four cycles (68 ms)
Withstand Rating:
1000 Vac, 1 minute across contacts 5000 Vac
(contacts to coil, 1 minute) 10,000 Vac
(contacts to coil, surge voltage)
Frequency Range
2066 Hz fundamental (up to 50th harmonic)
Relay Response Time

(excluding programmed time delays):
2 line cycles for discrete input, Power Xpert Software command
(communications port)
45 line cycles for voltage disturbance, voltage unbalance
910 line cycles for all others
Harmonic Response (voltages, currents)

50th harmonic
12
Analog Outputs (4)

0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA into maximum 750 ohm load. Accuracy: 1%.
Analog Input (1)
0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA into 200 ohm load. Accuracy: 1%.
Table 3.3-2. Control Power Input
13
14
Description
Separate Source
Self-Powered 1
DC Source
Input range, AC
Frequency range
110240 Vac 10%

4566 Hz
110600 Vac 10%

4566 Hz
N/A
N/A
Input range, DC
Burden
110250 Vdc 10%

21 VA
N/A
21 VA
2448 Vdc 20%

21 VA
15
When directly wired to 480 Vac, IQ Analyzer can ride through a continuous sag that is 20% of rated voltage.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
3.3-9
Sheet 03 089
Table 3.3-3. Catalog Information
Description
Catalog
Number
IQ Analyzer, separate source power module

IQ Analyzer, 2448 Vdc power module
IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module
IQA6410 1
IQA6420 1
IQA6430 1
ii
IQ Analyzer, separate source power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture
IQ Analyzer, 2448 Vdc power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture
IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture
IQA6610 1
IQA6620 1
IQA6630 1
IQ Flange, to provide extra clearance when mounting

36.00-inch (914.4 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module
45.00-inch (1143.0 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module
IQFLANGE 2
IQACABLE 2
IQA45CABLE 2
2448 Vdc separate source power module

100240 Vac and 100250 Vdc separate source power module
Three-phase, self-powered power module
IQMDCPM 2
IQMSSPM 2
IQM3PPM 2
INCOM communication module
IPONI 2
RS-485 communication module with Modbus protocol
MPONI
Use three-phase power module if meter electronics are to be powered from the three-phase line voltage of 600V and below. Use separate source
power module if the meter electronics is to be powered from a separate 110240 Vac or 110250 Vdc source. Use 2448 Vdc power module if only
2448 Vdc is available to power electronics.
Separate power modules can be ordered if an active meter needs to have the existing power supply changed to a different voltage.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

May 2014
Sheet 03 090
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-1
Sheet 03 091
IQ Flange/Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
IQ Flange
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit

for IQ 100/200 Series and
PXM 2000 Meters
Product Selection

Description
Catalog
Number
Panel mounting adapter kit

IQ250-PMAK
IQ 100/200 and PXM 2000 Series
adapter kit to IQ Analyzer/
IQ DP-4000/IQ Data
ii
1
2
Dimensions
3
6.72
(170.7)
5.38
(136.7)
IQ Flange
Retrofit Applications
For applications where extra doormounting space is required, a flangemounting unit is available. The IQ
Flange provides an extra 2.50 inches
(63.5 mm) of clearance for the device.
For use with the following products:
IQ Analyzer
IQ DP-4000
MP-3000
DT-3000
4.45
(113.0)

Description
Catalog
Number
IQ Flange
IQFLANGE
5.38
(136.7)
The flange adapter plate can be

installed as follows:
8.90
(226.1)
9.38
(238.3)
6.68
(169.7)
4.45
(113.0)
0.06 (1.5) RAD
4 Places
2. Install the flange adapter plate.

Mount it from the rear using the
six screws provided in the kit. The
flange adapter plate screw hole
pattern shown in Figure 3.4-2
should match the typical IQ
drilling pattern. If not, perform
the next step
3. Drill six holes in the panel or the
door to mount the flange adapter
plate. Follow the typical IQ drilling
pattern. You need only the top,
center and bottom sets of holes
2.69
(68.3)
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
1. Remove the old meter from the

panel or door. Many IQ metering
products use the typical IQ
drilling pattern shown in
Figure 3.4-2 for mounting
Product Selection
2.23
(56.6)
4. Install the new IQ 100/200 Series

or PXM 2000 meter in the flange
adapter plate. Secure it from
behind with four flat washers,
lock washers and nuts provided
with the meter
4.69
(119.1)
10.25
(260.4)
4.45
(113.0)
7
8
9
10
Figure 3.4-2. Flange Adapter Plate

Screw Hole Pattern
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
2.53
(64.3)
18
5.06
(128.5)
0.218 (5.5) DIA
10 Places
19
Figure 3.4-1. Typical IQ Flange

Drilling Pattern
20
21
CA08104001E

Accessories
3.4-2
May 2014
Sheet 03 092
Sub-Network Master Local Display
Sub-Network Master
Local Display (SMLD)
ii
1
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Sub-Network Master Local Display
General Description
Eatons sub-network master local
display (SMLD) is an electronic
submetering device that provides
users the ability to view information
from sub-network connected devices
locally at switchgear, switchboards,
panelboards, motor control centers
and control panels, nearby or
thousands of feet away. The SMLD has
a built-in LCD display with navigations
for configuring, as well as monitoring.
Auto-learn capabilities complete the
configuration requirements, enabling
customization by use of user-defined
descriptions, as well as adding and
deleting meters.
The SMLD can be operated standalone
or in parallel with the new FetchIT
software application or the Power Xpert
complete energy monitoring system
solution software.
14
15
16
Acquire and display data (no control)

from up to 100 devices that can
communicate on Eatons INCOM
network, used in the PowerNet
monitoring system
Power connector rating: 24 Vac or

24 Vdc at 1A
Power source: 120 Vac or 24 Vdc,
UL Class 2 or CSA Class III SELV
transformer in accordance with C22.2
No. 1010-1. The voltage range is 18
to 24 Vac or Vdc, 200 mA (maximum)
Ratings
Operating temperature: 0 to 60C
Operating humidity: 5 to 90%
maximum noncondensing
Altitude: 10,000 feet (3048m)
Environment: indoor use only
Following devices are supported:

IQ 210/220/230
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
IQ Energy Sentinel (F, J, K Frames)
Universal Internal Energy Sentinel
Universal External Energy Sentinel
Digitrip OPTIM 1050L
Keypad functions:
Menu
Scroll up
Scroll down
Enter
Backlit LCD, 4-line x 20 character
Mounting Information
4.37 H x 4.37 W x 1.50 D inches (111.0

H x 111.0 W x 38.1 D mm)
Door mount or panel mount
Safety standardsUL 61010B-1

EMC Susceptibility Standards
IEC 1000-4-3, 1995 Radiated
RF Immunity
EMC Emissions StandardsFCC
Part 15, Class B Radiated Emissions
Communications
Product Selection

Description
Catalog
Number
Local display (120 Vac)

Local display (24 Vac or Vdc)
LDISP120
LDISP24
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions
in inches (mm)
Frequency Range
INCOM Frequency Shift Key (FSK)

network compatible 9600 baud
Non-intrusive arbitration algorithm
Passive monitoring automatically
enabled by arbitration algorithm
while host PC is communicating
Master on INCOM network upon
data request from front panel if host
PC is not communicating
Addresses for sub-network devices
can be 001044 hex (1255 decimals)
50/60 Hz
Table 3.4-4. Meter Base Unit
Power
Width
Height
Depth
4.37 (111.0)
4.37 (111.0)
1.50 (38.1)
Power consumption: 200 mA

(maximum) at 24 Vac, 24 Vdc
Note: DIN (92 mm x 92 mm) access cutout.
Computer
with Power
Management
Software
SMLD
Features, Benefits and Functions
17
18
19
Auto-learn connected devices

Configuration stored in
non-volatile memory
Host communications arbitration
algorithm enables seamless
integration into existing
communication networks
Functions standalone or networked
20
21
IQ
ES or
PS
IQ 210/220/230
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050C
Multiple Units as Required
Figure 3.4-3. Typical Use Diagram of SMLD
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-3
Sheet 03 093
Single and Multi Unit Enclosed Meters
Single and Multi Unit

Enclosed Meters
Single and Multi Unit NEMA 12

Enclosed MetersFront Views
General Description
The Eaton Enclosed Meter line provides
a complete energy metering and data
acquisition solution in a single enclosure. Designed for Eatons IQ 35M,
IQ 150, IQ 250/260 and Power Xpert
2000/4000/6000/8000 and Multi-Point
Meters, Eatons Enclosed Meter line
offers mounting and installation flexibility, especially in retrofit applications
where no metering compartment or
mounting space is available in the
existing electrical distribution equipment or where installation time is a
premium. Factory designed and wired,
Eatons Enclosed Meter line offers
savings in labor and installation costs
because input current and voltage
wiring, as well as I/O wiring, is pre-wired
to terminal blocks inside the enclosure.
The Enclosed Meter line has two offerings; single, prewired unit (specific
IQ 150, IQ 250/260 or PXM 2000/4000/
6000/8000 or PXMP models) and a
multi unit (specific IQ 150, IQ 250/260
or IQ 35M models). Because the multi
unit automatically includes Eatons
Power Xpert Gateway 200E, it facilitates measurement and verification of
the energy usage on processes and in
buildings. This provides a convenient
way to monitor energy usage from
multiple points, collect and log specific
energy use parameters, and display
and generate logs for historical energy
usage reports. Simply put, Eatons multi
unit enclosed meter solution helps meet
any measurement and verification
requirement to show energy efficiency
improvements and results. In addition
to the standard offering, Eaton can
also provide an enclosed metering
solution tailored around your
project needs.
Factory designed and wired to fit various Eaton power and energy meters at
varying price points, Eatons Enclosed
Meter line offers savings in labor and
installation costs because input current
and voltage wiring, as well as I/O
wiring, is pre-wired to terminal blocks
inside the enclosure. Standalone,
enclosed meters are ideal for new
metering applications where no
metering existed previously, retrofit
installations where energy monitoring
is a must or where ease of installation
is required.
Health care facilities

Educational facilities and campuses
Industrial facilities
Commercial facilities
Government facilities
The multi unit offering consolidates

energy-related data available from the
meters in the enclosure, but also allows
for external meters to be added to the
embedded Power Xpert Gateway 200E.
Through the Power Xpert Gateway
200Es embedded Web server, information can be presented in a variety
of ways, a standard Web browser
being the most widely used method.
The enclosed product is a standalone
solution that is ideal for many infrastructure designs. Further, as needs
change and grow, the enclosed product
can be integrated through Power Xpert
Software into a broader solution that
encompasses other intelligent hardware and can integrate with third-party
network management systems (NMS)
or building management systems
(BMS) for system-wide monitoring and
reporting of energy and power.
Saves installation time and cost

One part number to order; no need
to worry that any part has been
left out
Pick the meter or meters you
need as it is designed to fit various
Eaton power and energy meters,
at varying price points
Factory Wired
Most electrical contractors are very
familiar with wiring meters. However,
it does take time to place the disconnect,
CT shorting blocks, terminal blocks,
control power transformer, etc. and
associated wiring. It is not uncommon
for errors to be introduced during the
installation of multiple meters; it's
just inherent in wiring. With Eatons
Enclosed Meter line, everything is
wired at the factory: the shorting block,
terminal blocks, etc., assuring that its
done right. Further, to ensure safety,
Eatons Enclosed Meter line includes a
primary fusible disconnect for line
voltage that can be turned off during
meter maintenance.
For applications with line voltages
above the rated power supply of the
meter, an optional control power
transformer is supplied in the enclosure. Control voltage can also be
supplied via a separate source that is
wired to the field installation terminal
block. CT inputs for the meter are
wired directly to shorting terminal
blocks for easy field installation.
Factory wired products also save on
installation time and costs. The meters
are flush mounted on the enclosure
door with all inputs/outputs factorywired to terminal blocks.
Note: A meter subpanel assembly is also
available, which includes all the internal
components of the single-unit enclosed
meter for the IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000
Meters wired and mounted on a subpanel
to be installed into an existing electrical
structure. It comes with a 48-inch lead
for flexibility in mounting the meters at
various distances.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
3.4-4

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 094
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NEMA Rated
NEMA 12 enclosure prevents dust and
other materials from entering. Internal
gaskets also prevent air irritants from
harming the vital equipment inside.
This quality enclosure meets most
indoor application needs. NEMA 3R
enclosure is constructed for either
indoor or outdoor use to provide a
degree of protection to personnel
against access to hazardous parts;
to provide a degree of protection of the
equipment inside the enclosure
against ingress of solid foreign objects
(falling dirt); to provide a degree of
protection with respect to harmful
effects on the equipment due to the
ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow);
and that will be undamaged by the
external formation of ice on the enclosure. NEMA 4X enclosure provides
the same degree of protection as the
NEMA 3R with the additional protection
against windblown dust, splashing and
hose directed water, and protection
against corrosion.
Fused
Disconnect
Neutral,
Ground and
Input/Output
(not shown)
Terminal
Blocks
Control Power,
Voltage and CT
Inputs
CT Shorting
Terminal Block
Pre-Wired
Control Power
Transformer
Meter Fusing
NEMA 12 Front View, Door Open, Pre-Wired and Tested

Gateway Power Supply
Fused Disconnect
Meter Fusing
PX Gateway
Control Power,
Voltage, CT and
Communications
Inputs
10
Fused Control
Power Transformer
11
Ground
12
NEMA 3R Single Unit Closed and Open
CT Shorting
Blocks
13
14
NEMA 12 Multi Unit View, Door Open, Pre-Wired and Tested
15
Fused Disconnect
Meter Fusing
16
17
Prewired Control
Power Transformer
NEMA 4X Single Unit Closed and Open

Display
18
Meter Control
Power, Voltage
and CT Inputs
19
20
CT Shorting Terminal Blocks
NEMA 12 Single-Unit Enclosed Meter Inside View, PXM 4000/6000/8000 Series
21
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-5
Sheet 03 095

Meter Fusing
Flex Center
Gateway Power Supply
Fused
Disconnect
PX Gateway
Eatons Meter Flex Center can provide above and beyond the
standard meter enclosure offerings. The Meter Flex Center
can tailor the enclosed solution to meet the specification
requirements. Special requirements within the enclosures
can be size, number of meters, differing meter models,
special communication equipment, uninterruptible power
supplies, electric heaters, power receptacles, or any other
custom need. Below is an example of just a few of the Meter
Flex Center capabilities.
i
ii
1
2
Lifting Rings
3
PXM 2000
Power Meters
Control Power,
Voltage
Current
Sensor and
Communicatio
ns Inputs
4
5
Removable Covers
for Future Meters
Current Sensor Terminal Strip
Multi-Unit Enclosed Meter, Inside View of IQ 35M

Fused Disconnect
Fuses
PXMP Power
Supply
PXMP
Meter Base
Connections
6-Inch Color
Touchscreen
9
10
PXMP Meter
Base
NEMA 12
Enclosure
(30H x 24W
x 12D Inches)
11
Single-Pole Touchsafe Fuse Block
PXMP Meter Modules

(shown but sold separately)
CT Shorting Blocks
12
Enclosed Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
13
48-Inch Meter
Harness
Grounding
Bar
Meter Fusing
15
Fused
Disconnect
Communications
Connections for
Other Meters
Optional CPT
CT Shorting Block
Prewired Meter Backpan, Single Unit
Prewired panel to save installation time and cost for retrofits into existing equipment
Designed for Eatons:
IQ 100 Meter Series
250/260
With or without CPT, depending on voltage
Order meters separately
CA08104001E
14
PXG-600E
Communications
Gateway
Switch for
PXM 2000
Control Power
Transformer
Fuses
ELC-PS02
24 Vdc
Power Supply
16
Single-Pole
Touchsafe
Fuse Holder
17
Incoming
Line Circuit
Protector
Duplex Receptacle
NEMA 1 16 Meter Enclosure with PXM 2000

Front View and Door Open
18
19
20
21
3.4-6

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 096
i
ii
1
2
Table 3.4-5. Enclosed Meters
Table 3.4-6. Single Unit Enclosed Meter Catalog Numbering System
Description
Specification
Enclosure
rating
NEMA 12, 3R, 4X
Enclosure
operating
temperature
20C to +40C
Note: Temperature range of meter is 20C to +70C.
If applied outside, proper precautions should be taken
to avoid exceeding the maximum and minimum
temperature ratings of the meter.
Dimensions
Single unit (IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000):

NEMA 12 (8.00W x 16.30H x 10.40D inches),
NEMA 3R/4X (8.00W x 16.30H x 9.60D inches)
Single unit (PXMP):
NEMA 12/3R/4X (24.00W x 30.00H x 12.00D inches)
Single unit (PXM 4000/6000/8000):
NEMA 12 (20.00W x 24.00H x 14.10D inches),
NEMA 3R/4X (20.20W x 24.00H x 13.90D inches)
Multi unit:
NEMA 12 (13.00W x 30.00H x 15.20D inches)
NEMA 3R (13.20W x 30.10H x 14.60D inches)
NEMA 4X (13.00W x 30.00H x 14.00D inches)
3
4
5
6
7
8
Meters
Control
voltage
14
15
16
17
18
CPT Option
A = 120/240 Vac
(No CPT)
B = 480 Vac (CPT)
NEMA Rating
2 = NEMA 12
3 = NEMA 3R
4 = NEMA 4X
PXMP-MB - 2 B D
Meter Type
120V600V (PXMP)power supply required

Up to 240V (IQ 35M/150/250/260 and PXM 2000/4000/
6000/8000)no CPT required
Greater than 240V (IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000)
CPT required
Separate source controlno CPT required
Fusible disconnectprimary voltage
Shorting block(s) not required for IQ 35M or PXMP
Ground terminal block
Neutral terminal block
Eight-point terminal block(s) for input/output modules
for IQ 250/260 and PXM 2000
Wiring
Wired for three-phase, four-wire applications.

Three-phase, three-wire applicationswill need to
change the wiring for both the voltage and current per
the wiring diagram in the meter instruction manual.
12
IQ250MA65100
IQ250MA65110
IQ250MA65114
IQ260MA65100
IQ260MA65110
IQ260MA65114
IQ150MA6511
IQ150MA6512
Table 3.4-7. Enclosed PXMP Meter Catalog Numbering System
Single unit: IQ 150, IQ 250/260 and PXM 2000/4000/

6000/8000 and PXMP models
Multi unit: IQ 35M, IQ 150 and IQ 250/260
Basic
model
11
13
Meter Type
PXM2250MA65105
PXM2250MA65115
PXM2250MA65145
PXM2260MA65105
PXM2260MA65115
PXM2260MA65145
PXM2270MA65105
PXM2270MA65115
PXM2270MA65145
Communications Power Xpert Gateway 200E

(multi unit only)
9
10
PXM2250MA65105 - 2 B
Certifications
UL 508A and cUL
Source
control
No separate source control voltage required for

applications below 240 Vac (except PXMP)
Pre-wire
Pre-wired current transformer, shorting terminal

block(s), neutral, ground, voltage, control power,
fusible disconnect and input/output terminal block(s)
Latch
Padlocking latch provision
Optional
features
Control power transformersingle unit:

50 VA (IQ 150/250/260 and 150 VA (PXM 4000/6000/
8000); multi unit: 250 VA control power supply for
meter where monitored voltage is 480 Vac (IQ 150/
250/260 and PXM 2000/4000/6000/8000)
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice and

represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options
installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality
may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and
product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and user
manual for detailed specifications.
PXMP-MB
PXMP-MB-AB
Display
A = None
D = 6-inch color
touchscreen
NEMA Rating
2 = NEMA 12
3 = NEMA 3R
4 = NEMA 4X
A
B
C
D
Power Supply
= None
= 120/240 Vac
= 480 Vac
= 600 Vac
Table 3.4-8. Multi Unit Enclosed Meter Catalog Numbering System
IQ150MA6511 - 2 B 4 C
Meter Type
IQ35MA12
IQ150MA6511
IQ250MA65100
IQ260MA65100
NEMA Rating
2 = NEMA 12 1
3 = NEMA 3R
4 = NEMA 4X
Communications
C = Includes PXG200E
Number of Meters
4 = 4 meters
CPT Option
A = No CPT
B = CPT 1
Not available with IQ 35M.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-7
Sheet 03 097
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 3.4-4. NEMA 12 Single Unit Enclosure
9
13.00
(330.2)
10
11
12
13
14
15
8.50
23.9)
16
17
18
Right Side View
Front View
Rear View
19
Figure 3.4-5. NEMA 12 Multi Unit Enclosure
20
21
CA08104001E
3.4-8

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 098
20.00
(508.0)
ii
12.00
(304.8)
4x0.44
16.94
(430.3)
Subpanel Width
1/4-Turn
18.50
(469.9)
Mounting Width
0.75
(19.1)
3
24 00
21.00
(533.4)
Subpanel
Height
22.50
(571.5)
Mounting
Height
0.75
(19.1)
5
6
Left Side View
ight Side View
Front View (Door Removed)
External Rear View
7
8
9
10
Bottom View
Figure 3.4-6. NEMA 12 PXM 4000/6000/8000 Unit Enclosure
24.00
(609.6)
11
12.00
(304.8)
12
13
Top View
14
30.00
(762.0)
16
17
5.25
HMI
(133.4) Cutout
29.50
(749.3)
Door
15
Left Side View
6.79
(172.4)
Front View
23.63 (600.2)
Door
18
Right Side
View
Front View
(Door Removed)
19
20
21
Bottom View
Figure 3.4-7. NEMA 12 PXMP Unit Enclosure
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-9
Sheet 03 099
i
ii
1
2
3
This Drip Cap is
on NEMA 3R On
4
5
6
7
(no door)
Figure 3.4-8. NEMA 3R/4X Single Unit Enclosure
9
13.20
(335.3)
(NEMA 3R)
10
13.00
(330.2)
(NEMA 4X)
11
12
13
14
This Drip Cap is

on NEMA 3R Only
15
27.00
(685.8)
(NEMA 3R)
16
28.50
(723.9)
(NEMA 4X)
17
18
Right Side View
Front View
Front View
(no door)
Rear View
19
20
Figure 3.4-9. NEMA 3R/4X Multi Unit Enclosure
21
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 100
20.20 (513.1)
Top Width
20.00 (508.0)
Enclosure Width
ii
13.70
(348.0)
Top
Depth
1
2
12.00
(304.8)
Enclosure
Depth
17.50
(444.5)
Mounting Width
4x0.34
Top View
1.25
(31.8)
3
4
21.00
(533.4) Front View (Door Removed)
Mounting
Height
24.00
(609.6)
5
6
Left Side View
Front View
Right Side View
19.63 (498.6)
Door
External Rear View
1.50
(38.1)
Turn
locking
ch
7
8
Front View (Subpanel Only)
Bottom View
Figure 3.4-10. NEMA 3R PXM 4000/6000/8000 Unit Enclosure
10
20.00
(508.0)
11
12
12.00
(304.8)
13
18.50
(469.9)
Mounting Width
1/4-Turn
Padlocking
14
0.75
(19.1)
15
16
(19.1)
22.50
(571.5)
Mounting
Height
24.00
(609.6)
4x0.44
17
18
Left Side View
Fron
Right Side View
External Rear View
19
20
Bottom View
21
Figure 3.4-11. NEMA 4X PXM 4000/6000/8000 Unit Enclosure

CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-11
Sheet 03 101
24.00
(609.6)
ii
12.00
(304.8)
6.79
(172.5)
Top View
2
5.25
(133.4)
30.80
(782.3)
Overall
30.00
(762.0)
Enclosure
HMI
Cutout
4
5
Left Side View
Front View
Right Side View
23.63 (600.2)
Door
Front View
(Door Removed)
Front View
(Door Removed)
6
7
8
9
Bottom View
Figure 3.4-12. NEMA 3R PXMP Multi Unit Enclosure
10
24.00
(609.6)
11
12.00
(304.8)
12
13
6.79
(172.5)
Top View
14
30.00
(762.0)
Enclosure
30.00
(762.0)
Overall
5.25
(133.4)
HMI
Cutout
15
16
17
Left Side View
Front View
23.63 (600.2)
Door
Right Side View
Front View
(Door Removed)
Front View
(Door Removed)
18
19
13.07
(332.0)
Overall
20
Bottom View
Figure 3.4-13. NEMA 4X PXMP Multi Unit Enclosure

CA08104001E
21

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 102
Wiring Diagrams
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 3.4-14. 200240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Multi Unit IQ 35M Meters
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 3.4-15. 200240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Multi Unit IQ 150/250/260 Meters
CA08104001E
May 2014

Accessories
3.4-13
Sheet 03 103
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 3.4-16. 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Multi Unit IQ 150/250/260 Meters
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 3.4-17. 120240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Single-Phase, Three-Wire System with Single PXMP Meter
CA08104001E
21

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 104
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 3.4-18. 120240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye System with Single PXMP Meter
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 3.4-19. 480600 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye System with Single PXMP Meter
CA08104001E
May 2014

Accessories
3.4-15
Sheet 03 105
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 3.4-20. 200240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Single Unit IQ 150/250/260 or PXM 2000 Meter
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 3.4-21. 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Single Unit IQ 150/250/260 or PXM 2000 Meter
CA08104001E
21

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 106
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 3.4-22. 200240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Single Unit PXM 4000/6000/8000 Meter
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 3.4-23. 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Single Unit PXM 4000/6000/8000 Meter
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-17
Sheet 03 107
Current Transformers
Product Selection
Table 3.4-10. Split Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
Table 3.4-9. Solid Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
General Description
Eatons low voltage current transformers
are available in both solid core and split
core designs. Engineered for electronic
metering applications, all solid core
designs and selected split core designs
offer ANSI metering quality accuracy.
The solid core designs also meet ANSI
C57.13 relay accuracy requirements
including over-ranging capabilities. The
current transformer offering has a 5A
secondary at the rated primary current.
Split core CTs are specifically designed
to be installed around primary conductors without disconnecting wires or
breaking the circuit to be monitored.
These current transformers are perfect solutions for energy management
applications and are manufactured
for installation ease.
For new construction and retrofit
applications where no current
transformer exists, Eaton offers a
complete selection of low voltage
(up to 600V) current transformers.
These current transformers can be
used in commercial grade applications
such as control panels and panelboards. Additionally, they can be
used for most industrial metering and
relaying applications in switchboards,
switchgear and motor control centers.
Primary ANSI B0.1

Current Metering
Rating
Class
at 60 Hz
(Accuracy
in %)
Window
Catalog
Size in
Number
Inches (mm)
Diameter
300
400
500
600
750
800
1000
1200
0.3
1.56 (39.6)
50
100
150
200
1.2
0.6
0.3
0.3
1.25 (31.8)
S060-500
S060-101
S060-151
S060-201
400
500
600
750
800
1000
1200
0.3
3.25 (82.6)
S080-401
S080-501
S080-601
S080-751
S080-801
S080-102
S080-122
500
600
750
800
1000
1200
1500
1600
2000
2500
3000
0.3
600
750
800
1000
1200
1500
1600
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
0.3
25
50
0.3
4.25 (108.0)
6.31 (160.3)
Wound
Primary
S050-301
S050-401
S050-501
S050-601
S050-751
S050-801
S050-102
S050-122
S090-501
S090-601
S090-751
S090-801
S090-102
S090-122
S090-152
S090-162
S090-202
S090-252
S090-302
S025-601
S025-751
S025-801
S025-102
S025-122
S025-152
S025-162
S025-202
S025-252
S025-302
S025-352
S025-402
W190-025
W190-050
Note: Not for use with IQ 35M or IQ MESII.
Primary ANSI B0.1 Window

Current Metering Size in
Rating Class
Inches (mm)
at 60 Hz
(Accuracy
in %)
Catalog
Number
400
500
600
800
1000
1200
1500
1600
2000
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
2.00 x 5.50
(50.8 x 139.7)
M000-401
M000-501
M000-601
M000-801
M000-102
M000-122
M000-152
M000-162
M000-202
600
750
800
1000
1200
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4.8
4.8
2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.3
M050-601
4.10 x 7.10
(104.1 x 180.3) M050-751
M050-801
M050-102
M050-122
M050-152
M050-202
M050-252
M050-302
M050-352
M050-402
ii
Table 3.4-11. Split Core Current Transformers

Primary Accuracy
Current at 60 Hz
Rating (in %)
Window
Size in
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
100
150
200
300
400
5.0
5.0
4.0
2.0
2.0
0.80 x 1.95
(20.3 x 49.5)
M030-101
M030-151
M030-201
M030-301
M030-401
100
150
200
300
400
5.0
4.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.42 x 1.53
(36.1 x 38.9)
M040-101
M040-151
M040-201
M040-301
M040-401
200
300
400
500
600
750
800
1000
1200
1.0
2.60 x 2.75
(66.0 x 69.9)
500
600
800
1000
1200
1500
1600
2000
2500
3000
1.0
M060-201
M060-301
M060-401
M060-501
M060-601
M060-751
M060-801
M060-102
M060-122
2.60 x 6.25
M080-501
(66.0 x 158.8) M080-601
M080-801
M080-102
M080-122
M080-152
M080-162
M080-202
M080-252
M080-302
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 108

2.75
(69.9)
(4) Open Slots 0.22 x 0.34

(5.6 x 8.6)
ii
S050BRAC
1
2.23
(56.6)
1.67
(42.4)
1.10
(27.9)
X1
L
BE
LA
4
5
3.53
(90.0)
3.00
(76.2)
0.44
(11.2)
H1
X1
6
3.70
(94.0)
H1
8
1.88
(47.8)
9
10
11
0.31
(7.9)
2.25
(57.2)
(2) Holes 0.20 (5.1) Diameter
Approximate weight: 1 lb
1.56 Dia.
(39.6)
Figure 3.4-24. S050Approximate Dimensions
12
5.25
(133.4)
4.00
(101.6)
13
3.10
(78.7)
14
2.88
(73.2)
X1
(2) Slots
0.28 x 0.50
(7.1 x 12.7)
15
(2) 0.28 x 0.50 Slots

(7.1 x 12.7)
16
3.62
(91.9)
0.88
(22.4)
H1
17
0.44 (11.2)
X1
18
4.00
(101.6)
19
H1
See Tables
1.95
(49.5)
20
Approximate weight: 5.25 lbs
21

CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-19
Sheet 03 109
(8) Open Slots

0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6)
5.73 (145.5)
4.85 (123.2)
3.81 (96.8)
S080BRAC
ii
1
2.19
(55.6)
1.15
(29.2)
2.91
(73.9)
X1
BE
LA
(4) Holes
0.42 (10.7) Dia.
1.09
(27.7)
0.55
(14.0)
0.44
(11.2)
3
4
H1
X1
5.73
(145.5)
H1
3.25 (82.6) Dia.

2.84
(72.1)
0.51
(13.0)
Approximate weight: 2.5 lbs
7
8
4.70
(119.4)
10
5.92 (150.4)
4.85 (123.2)
3.81 (96.8)
S090BRAC
11
2.91
2.19 (73.9)
(55.6)
1.15
(29.2)
0
X1
(8) Open Slots 0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6)
EL
B
LA
X1
6.17
(156.7)
H1
13
14
3.50
(88.9)
H1
12
16
4.25 (108.0) Dia.

2.97
(75.4)
0.42
(10.7)
15
17
18
4.86 (123.4)
Approximate weight: 3 lbs
(4) 0.28 x 0.63 (7.1 x 16.0) Slots
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 110
S025BRAC
4.10
1.28
(32.5) (104.1)
2.98
(75.7)
ii
0
X1
6.37
(161.8)
0.56
(14.2)
E
AB
8.50
(215.9)
0.75
(19.1)
3
4
(4) Slots 0.44 x 1.00

(11.2 x 25.4)
0.44
(11.2)
H1
6.75
(171.5)
8.50
(215.9)
6.31
(160.3)
H1
4.25
(108.0)
7
8
6.75
(171.5)
0.88
(22.4)
(4) 0.56 (14.2)

Diameter Holes
10
(4) Closed Slots

0.21 x 0.50 (5.3 x 12.7)
2.75 (69.9)
11
12
X2
13
14
X1
4.12
(104.6)
4.69
(119.1)
2.19
(55.6)
H2 H1
X2 X1
3.25
(82.6)
H1
H2
BE
LA
3.50
(88.9)
(4) Open Slots

0.44 x 0.50 (11.2 x 12.7)
4.50
(114.3)
15
0.38
(9.7)
0.75
(19.1)
16
LABEL
17
0.44
(11.2)
4.88
(124.0)
18
0.50
(12.7)
19
20
3.48 (88.4)
(2) Mounting Holes
0.38 (9.7) Diameter
21
Figure 3.4-29. W190Approximate Dimensions

CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
3.4-21
Sheet 03 111
ov
a
ble
X1
Re
m
EL
is
E
Th
H1
Approximate
weight: 1.5 lbs
4.25 (108.0)
2.00
(50.8)
This End
Removable
0.44
(11.2)
0.75
(19.1)
X1
H1
LABEL
7.75
(196.9)
LABEL
ii
nd
LA
B
d
En
is ble
Th ova
m
Re
H1
X2
X1
5.50
(139.7)
4.10
(104.1)
7.10
(180.3)
10.00
(254.0)
10.90
(276.9)
H1
5
6
X1 X2
3.50 (88.9)
This End Removable
0.38
(9.7)
(2) 0.19 (4.8) Diameter Holes
Figure 3.4-30. M000Approximate Dimensions
6.40
(162.6)
1.13
(28.7)
7.30
(185.4)
1.63
(41.4)
(4) 0.31 (7.9) Dia. Holes
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Accessories
May 2014
Sheet 03 112
i
ii
2.50
(63.5)
1
H1
Terminal Arrangement for

Ratios 250:5 through 400:5
3.38 (85.9)
1.20
(30.5)
X2
X2
3.52
(89.4)
X1
H1
4.12
(104.6)
X1
6
7
8
1.53
(38.9)
LABEL
LABEL
4.78
(121.4)
Terminal Arrangement for

Ratios 100:5 through 200:5
1.42
(36.1)
9
L
BE
10
LA
H1
11
12
13
H1
14
15
16
H1
H1
17
2.70 (68.6)
18
6.25 (158.8)
5.80 (147.3)
9.25 (235.0)
X1 - WHITE
X2 - BLACK
19
20
H1
21
2.60 (66.0)
2.75 (69.9)
6.05 (153.7)
X1 - WHITE
X2 - BLACK
H1
1.75
(44.5)
6.05 (153.7)
1.75
(44.5)

CA08104001E
Protective and Predictive Relays
4.0-1
September 2011
Protective and
Predictive Relays
Sheet 04 001
Contents

Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDR-3000 Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freedom Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay with Voltage Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP-300 Current Differential Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformer Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VR-300 Multifunctional Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformer Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller
for Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InsulGard Predictive Maintenance
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switchgear Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2010
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.A
FP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.B
FP-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.C
FP-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.D
MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.E
MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.F
MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.G
DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.K
VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.H
EDR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.E
EDR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.F
EDR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.G
EMR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.C
EMR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.D
ETR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.L
EGR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.I
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16901, Paragraph 2.04.A
InsulGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sections 16950A, 16950C, 16950D
Paragraph 2.03.A
CA08104001E
4.0-2
4.1-1
4.1-1
4.1-6
4.1-8
4.1-11
4.1-16
4.1-21
4.1-27
4.1-31
4.1-38
4.2-1
4.2-1
4.2-1
4.2-5
4.2-11
4.2-17
4.2-22
4.2-29
4.2-37
4.3-1
4.3-1
4.3-3
4.3-6
4.3-6
4.3-12
4.3-12
4.4-1
4.4-1
4.4-4
4.4-4
4.5-1
4.5-4
4.5-5
4.5-5
4.5-6
4.5-8
4.5-10
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Selection Guide
4.0-2
September 2011
Sheet 04 002
General Description
Selection Chart
Table 4.0-1. Selection Chart
ii
Device Name
Description
1
2
Feeder Protection
IEEE
Device
Number
Page Number
DT-3000
FP-4000
FP-5000
FP-6000
EDR-3000
EDR-4000
EDR-5000
Page 4.1-1
Page 4.1-11
Page 4.1-16
Page 4.1-21
Page 4.1-27
Page 4.1-31
Page 4.1-38
Protection Functions
3
4
5
Phase inst. OC
50
Phase TOC
51
Ground inst. OC (measured)
50G
Ground TOC (measured)
51G
Phase directional control
67
Ground directional control
67N
Phase voltage restrained OC
51VR
No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Zone interlocking
11
10
10
10
11
11
11
Thermal overload
49
Locked rotor
49S/51
Jam/stall
51R
Undervoltage
27
Current unbalance
46
Negative sequence voltage
47
Power factor
55
Overvoltage
59
Frequency (over/under)
81
Vector surge
78V
Rate of change
81R
Forward/reverse VARs
32V
Differential
87
Forward/reverse power
32
Sync check
25
Reclosing
79
Loss of potential block
LOP
Cold load pickup

Breaker failure
14
50BF
2nd harmonic restrain

5th harmonic restrain
15
16
17
Ground differential
87GD
Generator unbalance
46G
Loss of excitation
40
Volts/hertz
24
100% stator ground fault
27TN/59N

The 50 and 51 protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection.
The 50N, 51N, 50G and 51G protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection.
87B using zone selective interlocking.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Selection Guide
September 2011
4.0-3
Sheet 04 003
General Description
Table 4.0-1. Selection Chart (Continued)
Device Name
Description
Feeder Protection
IEEE
Device
Number
DT-3000
FP-4000
FP-5000
FP-6000
EDR-3000
EDR-4000
EDR-5000
ii
1
Page Number
Page 4.1-1
Page 4.1-11
Page 4.1-16
Page 4.1-21
Page 4.1-27
Page 4.1-31
Page 4.1-38
Control Functions
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic control
Multiple settings groups
Number of starts limit
2
3
4
Starts per hour

Time between starts
Emergency override
Reduced voltage starting
Amperes
Ampere demand
Trip lock out
86
Metering Functions
Volts
Phase angle
(current and voltage)
Positive, negative
and zero sequence
Watts
Watt demand
Watthour
VARs
VAR demand
VAR-hour
VA
VA demand
VA-hour
Frequency
Trending (load profile)
Minimum/maximum recording
Trip circuit monitor
Breaker wear
Failure to trip
Oscillography
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Monitoring Functions
Sequence of events
Trip target data
Clock
Number of starts
Acceleration time
RTD temperature
Hottest RTD
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Selection Guide
4.0-4
September 2011
Sheet 04 004
General Description

Device Name
Description
ii
Feeder Protection
IEEE
Device
Number
DT-3000
FP-4000
FP-5000
FP-6000
EDR-3000
EDR-4000
EDR-5000
Page 4.1-1
Page 4.1-11
Page 4.1-16
Page 4.1-21
Page 4.1-27
Page 4.1-31
Page 4.1-38
1
Page Number
2
3
Communications
Local human machine interface
Remote communication port

RS-232
RS-485
Ethernet copper
4
5
Frequency shift key
Addressable protocols
INCOM
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-TCP
IEC-61850
Optional
Optional
Optional
Removable
terminals
Removable
terminals
Removable
terminals
Construction
Panel-mount case
Drawout
AC current inputs
10
11
12
Power supply options
3055C
40 60C
4060C
4060C
4060C
4060C
4060C
120240 Vac
48125 Vac/Vdc
48125 Vac/Vdc
48125 Vac/Vdc
19300 Vdc
19300 Vdc
19300 Vdc
24250 Vdc
100240 Vac/Vdc 100240 Vac/Vdc 100240 Vac/Vdc
40250 Vac
40250 Vac
40250 Vac
AC voltage inputs
Wye PTs
Delta/open delta PTs
Binary inputs
Alarm outputs
2 Form C
2 Form C
2 Form C
2 Form C
1 Form C
1 Form C
1 Form C
10
Trip outputs
Analog outputs
Analog inputs
ANSI
IEC
UL
CE
DT-3030 only
Local display
13
14
15
LEDs (local targets)
Standards
CSA
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Selection Guide
September 2011
4.0-5
Sheet 04 005
General Description
Device Name
Motor Protection
Description
IEEE
Device
Number
C306
Bimetallic OLR
C440/XT
Solid-State OLR
C441
Solid-State OLR
ii
1
Page Number
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-5
Motor Protection
Thermal overload protection
49
Trip class
Adjustable FLA
Bi-metallic
10 or 20
Selectable via heater packs
10A, 10, 20, 30

Selectable via DIP switches
530
Selectable via user interface
Adjustable via dial

(range approx.1.6:1)
Adjustable via dial

(range 5:1)
Adjustable via user interface

(range 9:1 and 18:1)
Locked rotor/stall current
49S/51
Phase losscurrent
46
Selectable on/off (90% setting)
Phase imbalance
46
Adjustable (030% setting), off
Ground fault
51N
Fixed at 50% of FLA setting
Programmable threshold,
and alarm or trip mode
Jam/current level protection
50
Instantaneous and adjustable
Phase reversal
47
Load Protection
Undercurrent
Low power (kW)
High power (kW)
Voltage Protection
Overvoltage
59
Undervoltage
27
Voltage imbalance
47
Voltage phase loss
47
7
8
9
10
11
Power-up delay
12
Control Functions
Manual reset
Automatic reset
Electronic remote reset
Network command reset
13
14
Output Contacts
NO contacts
1 B600
1 B300 (Form A or Form C)
NC contacts
1 B600
1 B300 (Form B or Form C)
Ground fault shunt relay

Independently programmable
1 B300 (Form A)
contacts
15
Control Power
Self (line) powered
Separate 24 Vdc supply
Separate 120 Vac supply
16
17
Metering Functions (via Local Display)

Amperes
Individual phase
Average
Current imbalance %
18
19
Voltage
Individual phase
Average
Voltage imbalance %
21
Depends on the catalog number ordered.
CA08104001E
20
4.0-6

Selection Guide
September 2011
Sheet 04 006
General Description

Device Name
Description
ii
Motor Protection
IEEE
Device
Number
C306
Bimetallic OLR
C440/XT
Solid-State OLR
C441
Solid-State OLR
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-5
1
2
Page Number
Metering Functions (via Local Display) (continued)
3
4
5
6
7
Kilowatts
Power factor
Trip status
Diagnostics (10 fault queue)
Overload indication
Thermal capacity
Frequency
Run hours
Ground fault current
Monitoring Functions (via Communications)
Configured settings
Thermal memory (time until reset)
Thermal capacity
Frequency
Overload indication
Trip status
8
9
10
11
Operating LED
Motor starts
Motor run hours
Power motor kW
Power factor
Current
12
13
14
Individual Phase I rms
Average Phase I rms
Current imbalance %
Voltage
Individual Phase V rms
Average Phase V rms
Voltage imbalance %
Fault Indication
15
16
17
18
19
Overload
Phase loss
Phase imbalance
Ground fault
Phase reversal
Jam/stall/current level
Undercurrent
Low power
High power
Voltage imbalance
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
20
21
CA08104001E

Selection Guide
September 2011
4.0-7
Sheet 04 007
General Description
Device Name
Description
Motor Protection
IEEE
Device
Number
C306
Bimetallic OLR
C440/XT
Solid-State OLR
C441
Solid-State OLR
ii
1
Page Number
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-5
Communications
Modbus RTU RS-485
Modbus RTU with I/O
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
EtherNet/IP with I/O
Modbus TCP with I/O
Mounting
Panel mounting
Contactor mounting
DIN rail mounting
4
5
6
Optional remote mounted display
Standards
UL
CSA
CE
NEMA
IEC
RoHS
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Selection Guide
4.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 04 008
General Description
i
ii

Device Name
Description
Motor
Protection
IEEE
Device
Number
MP-3000
Differential
Protection
MP-4000
EMR-3000
EMR-4000
MD-3000
DP-300
Transformer Generator
Protection
Protection
Voltage
Protection
ETR-4000
VR-300
EGR-4000
1
Page Number
Page 4.2-11 Page 4.2-17 Page 4.2-22 Page 4.2-29 Page 4.3-1 Page 4.3-3 Page 4.3-6
Page 4.3-12 Page 4.4-1
Phase inst. OC
50
Phase TOC
51
Ground inst. OC
(measured)
50G
Ground TOC
(measured)
51G
Phase directional
control
67
Ground directional
control
67N
Phase voltage
restrained OC
51VR
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
No. of curves
(ANSI/IEC/thermal)
11
11
11
Thermal overload
49
Locked rotor
49S/51
Jam/stall
51R
Undervoltage
27
Current unbalance
46
Negative sequence
voltage
47
Power factor
55
Overvoltage
59
Frequency (over/under)
81
Vector surge
78V
Rate of change
81R
Forward/reverse VARs
32V
Differential
87
Forward/reverse power
32
Sync check
25
Reclosing
79
Loss of potential block
LOP
Zone interlocking
15
Breaker failure
16
18
87GD
Generator unbalance
46G
Loss of excitation
40
Volts/hertz
24
100% stator ground

fault
27TN/
59N

Ground differential
20

2nd harmonic restrain
19
50BF
Cold load pickup
17
11
The 50 and 51 protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection.
The 50N, 51N, 50G and 51G protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection.
87B using zone selective interlocking.
87M or 87G (motor or generator differential).
87M, 87T or 87G (motor, transformer or generator differential).
87T (transformer differential).
21
CA08104001E

Selection Guide
September 2011
4.0-9
Sheet 04 009
General Description
Device Name
Description
Motor
Protection
IEEE
MP-3000
Device
Number
Differential
Protection
MP-4000
EMR-3000
EMR-4000
MD-3000
DP-300
Transformer Generator
Protection
Protection
Voltage
Protection
ETR-4000
VR-300
EGR-4000
i
ii
1
Page Number
Page 4.2-11 Page 4.2-17 Page 4.2-22 Page 4.2-29 Page 4.3-1 Page 4.3-3 Page 4.3-6
Page 4.3-12 Page 4.4-1
Control Functions
Remote open/close
(Trip only)
Programmable I/O
Programmable
logic control
Multiple settings
groups
Number of starts limit
Starts per hour
Time between starts
Emergency override
Reduced voltage
starting
Ampere demand
Volts
Phase angle
(current and voltage)
Current only
Positive, negative and

zero sequence
Watts
Watt demand
Watthour
VARs
VAR demand
VAR-hour
VA
VA demand
VA-hour
Frequency
Trip lock out
86
4
5
6
Metering Functions
Amperes
Trending (load profile)

Minimum/maximum
recording
Max. only
Trip circuit monitor
Sequence of events
Trip target data
Clock
Number of starts
Acceleration time
RTD temperature
Hottest RTD
Breaker wear
Oscillography
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Failure to trip
Differential and restrain current only.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.0-10 Protective and Predictive Relays

Selection Guide
September 2011
Sheet 04 010
General Description
i
ii

Device Name
Description
Motor
Protection
IEEE
MP-3000
Device
Number
Differential
Protection
Transformer
Protection
Generator
Protection
Voltage
Protection
MP-4000
EMR-3000
EMR-4000
MD-3000
DP-300
ETR-4000
EGR-4000
VR-300
Page 4.2-11
Page 4.2-17
Page 4.2-22
Page 4.2-29
Page 4.3-1
Page 4.3-3
Page 4.3-6
Page 4.3-12
Page 4.4-1
1
Page Number
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Communications
Local human
machine interface
Remote
communication port
RS-232
RS-485
Ethernet copper
Frequency
shift key
Optional
Optional
Addressable
protocols
INCOM
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-TCP
IEC-61850
Construction
Optional
Optional
Removable
terminals
Removable
terminals
Optional
Removable
terminals
Removable
terminals
Operating
temperature range
20 to 60C
20 to 60C
40 to 60C
40 to 60C 30 to 55C 20 to 70C
40 to 60C
40 to 60C 20 to 70C
10
Power supply
options
120240 Vac
120240 Vac
19300 Vdc
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
19300 Vdc
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
40250 Vac
40250 Vac
24250 Vdc 90250 Vdc
40250 Vac
40250 Vac
90250 Vdc
11
AC current inputs
Panel-mount case
Drawout
12
13
14
15
120240
Vac
AC voltage inputs
Wye PTs
Delta/open
delta PTs
Binary inputs
Alarm outputs
1 Form C
1 Form C
1 Form C
1 Form C
2 Form C
1 NO
1 Form C
1 Form C
1 Form C
Trip outputs
Analog outputs
Local display
LEDs (local targets)
ANSI
IEC
UL
Analog inputs
Standards
16
17
CE
CSA
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-1
Sheet 04 011
General DescriptionDigitrip 3000
Digitrip 3000
Feeder Protection Relay
The Digitrip 3000 features a userfriendly operator panel to monitor,

program and test the relay. Operating
parameters and troubleshooting
information are displayed in the two
highly visible display windows. In
addition, all data and information can
be communicated to a host computer
equipped with the appropriate
software. A Communication Trip
and Communication Close control
command can also be initiated by a
host computer with an authorized
access code.
Features
General
Digitrip 3000 Front View
General Description
Eatons Digitrip 3000 protective relay
is a multi-function, microprocessorbased overcurrent relay designed for
both ANSI and IEC applications. It is
a panel-mounted, self-contained unit
that operates from either AC or DC
control power. The Digitrip 3000 is
available in an optional quick-release
drawout case for panel-flush mounting.
For AC control power applications,
an optional Dual-Source Power
Supply (DSPS) is recommended. See
Page 4.1-6 for details. The Digitrip 3000
design provides true rms sensing of
each phase and ground current. Only
one unit is required for each threephase circuit. Current monitoring
and operator selectable protective
functions are integral to each relay.
The Digitrip 3000 relay operates
from the 5A secondary output of
standard current transformers.
Current transformer ratio information
is quickly programmed into the
unit via settings. This enables the
relay to display metered current in
primary amperes.
ANSI or IEC applications

User-friendly front panel
Non-volatile memory
View settings any time
Set CT ratios
Metered currents in
primary amperes
Individual phase targeting of fault
Integral test mode (phase
and ground)
Program and test mode
security access cover with
meter seal provision
Continuous internal circuitry

self-testing
Programmable lockout/self reset
after trip
Relay failure alarm contact
Trip alarm contact
Optional Dual-Source Power
Supply (DSPS), see Page 4.1-6
Optional quick-release drawout
case, see Page 4.1-8
Table 4.1-1. Catalog Numbers

Description
Catalog
Number
Digitrip 3000
DT3000
Digitrip 3000 drawout relay
DT3001
Digitrip 3000 drawout

inner chassis
DT3001-IC
Digitrip 3000 drawout outer case
DT3001-OC
Digitrip 3000 with 120 Vac

dual-source power supply
DT3010
Digitrip 3000 with 240 Vac

dual-source power supply
DT3020
Digitrip 3000 with 24/48 Vdc

power supply and CE mark
DT3030
Digitrip 3000 with 24/48 Vdc

power supply and CE mark in
drawout case
DT3031
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DIP Switches
Communication
Connection
Terminal Block 2-1
Terminal Block 2-2
Terminal
Block 1
Terminal
Block 2
12
13
14
15
Current
Transformer
Connections
16
Digitrip 3000 Rear View
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
4.1-2
September 2011
Sheet 04 012
i
ii
System Protection
6
7
Information and Data Delivery
8
9
10
11
12
13
True rms sensing of each phase and

ground current
Selectable curve shapes: ANSI, IEC
or thermal curves
Phase overcurrent protection per
time-current curve
Independent ground fault protection
per time-current curve
Time overcurrent reset time delay
Ground element capable of
residual, zero sequence or
external source connections
Instantaneous phase and ground OC
Short delay phase and ground OC
Selectable true making current
release (discriminator)
Configurable trip outputs
Zone selective interlocking (phase
and ground) for bus protection and
reduced arc flash energy
Displays individual phase currents
Displays ground current
Displays magnitude and phase of
current causing trip
Displays peak demand current
for each phase and ground since
last reset
Displays current transformer ratio
Indicates cause of trip (time or
instantaneous)
Data/information transmission
Provides breaker Open or Close
status to a remote location via
Eatons PowerNet
General
14
15
16
The Digitrip 3000 microprocessorbased relay provides reliable

three-phase and ground overcurrent
protection for all voltage levels. It can
be used for any application where
instantaneous and/or time overcurrent protection is required. It is most
commonly used as primary feeder
circuit protection, as in Figure 4.1-1.
The Digitrip 3000 may be applied

as the transformer primary protection
or as backup to the differential
protection, as in Figure 4.1-2.
CB
50
51
50N
51N
Time Overcurrent Reset

The Digitrip 3000 includes time delay
reset characteristic for the time overcurrent functions. This improves the
overcurrent protection response to
arcing fault conditions. The current
during an arcing fault may vary above
and below the pickup level. The time
above pickup will accumulate until
trip occurs.
Digitrip
3000
Figure 4.1-2. Transformer Protection

The Digitrip 3000 may be connected
to the secondary side of a delta-wye
grounded transformer with the ground
element connected to a separate CT
in the neutral connection of the transformer. With this connection, a lower
CT ratio and a pickup setting can be
used to provide more sensitive
ground fault protection especially
for resistance grounded systems
(see Figure 4.1-3).
The Digitrip 3000 provides complete

three-phase and ground protection
with separate elements and settings.
The relay can be used with CT ratios
from 5/5 to 5000/5. The CT ratio can
be set independently for phase and
ground, allowing the ground element
to be connected in either the residual or
the separate ground CT configuration
as in Figure 4.1-4 and Figure 4.1-5.
a
b
c
A1
B1
C1
GND G1
A2
B2
C2
50/51
G2
50N/51N
51N
Digitrip
3000
CB-52
Resistor
50G
51G
50
51
Figure 4.1-4. Residual Ground Connections
Digitrip
3000
CB
A1
A2
C1
B2
C2
50/51
Figure 4.1-3. Transformer Secondary

Protection with Ground CT Connection
The Digitrip 3000 relay has special
provisions for connection in a Zone
Interlocking Scheme that can be used
for bus protection or to improve
protection coordination in a tight or
close system. Zone interlocking is
described in more detail on Page 4.1-4.
CB-52
50G/51G
G2
GND G1
Digitrip
3000
Figure 4.1-5. Separate Zero Sequence

Ground CT Connections
17
18
19
CB
52
50
51
50N
51N
Digitrip
3000
20
Load
21
Figure 4.1-1. Primary Feeder Protection
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-3
Sheet 04 013

The phase and ground overcurrent
characteristics are defined by six
parameters.
Curve shape
Overcurrent pickup
Time multiplier or dial
Short delay pickup
Short delay time
Phase Curve Shape
Instantaneous Protection
The Digitrip 3000 includes the thermal,

ANSI and IEC family of curves, which
make it easy to coordinate with any
conventional protection scheme. The
user can select Moderately Inverse,
Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse or
Definite Time characteristics. The
thermal curves It, I2t, I4t and flat
slopes can also be selected.
Instantaneous (short-circuit)
protection reacts to high level
fault currents. If NONE is selected
for the instantaneous setting, the
instantaneous trip function is disabled
and a true making current release
(discriminator) function is provided.
If selected, the discriminator is
functional for 10 cycles and will trip
the breaker instantaneously, if the
fault current is above 11 times (I n).
Phase Time Overcurrent Protection
Instantaneous pickup
Time overcurrent (overload and fault)

protection is defined by the current
pickup setting and time multiplier.
Phase Short Time Protection

Short time (fault) protection responds
to short-circuit conditions. It is similar
to the Phase Long Time Protection in
that current and time settings are
offered. It differs, however, in two
ways: (1) NONE is a Short Delay
Pickup setting that, if selected,
will disable the Phase Short Time
Protection, and (2) a slope selection
is not available for the time line.
TIME
i
ii
1
2
3

The ground fault protection function
is a composite of the ground:
Ground curve shape
Time overcurrent and pickup
time settings
Short delay current and time
settings
Instantaneous setting
A NONE setting selection disables

that characteristic of the ground
fault protection.
5
6
7
8
CURRENT
Figure 4.1-6. Phase or Ground

Overcurrent Characteristics
10
I4t
11
(Curve Shape)
I2t
(Curve Shape)
(Curve Shape)
IEC-A IEC-B
FLAT
12
TIME
MOD
TIME
TIME
It
13
VERY
(Short Delay)
(Short Delay)
(Short Delay)
EXTREME
(Instantaneous)
(Instantaneous)
CURRENT
ANSI Curves
Figure 4.1-7. Digitrip 3000 Selective Curve Types
(Instantaneous)
14
15
CURRENT
CURRENT
Thermal Curves
IEC-D IEC-C
IEC Curves
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.1-4

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 014
i
ii
Main
Breaker
A
Digitrip
3000 A
Zone 1
2
Feeder
Breaker
B
3
4
Zone 2
Downstream
Breaker
C
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Zone 3
20
Digitrip
3000 C
LOAD
Figure 4.1-8. Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System

(Phase and Ground)
Zone selective interlocking is a protection function to minimize equipment
damage resulting from a phase fault or
a ground fault in an area where long
time and/or short time delay is in use.
When the Ground Zone Interlocking
feature is used, an immediate trip
is initiated when the fault is in the
breakers zone of protection, and no
restraining signal received regardless
of its preset time delay. When the
Phase Zone Interlocking feature is
used, the time overcurrent and short
delay phase elements work as follows.
The short delay phase element will
initiate an immediate trip when the
fault is in the breakers zone of protection, and no restraining signal received
regardless of its preset time delay. The
time overcurrent phase element will
initiate an immediate trip when the
fault is in the breakers zone of protection, and no restraining signal received
regardless of its preset time delay only
when the current being sensed by the
Digitrip 3000 exceeds 300% (3 x I n) of
the current transformer rating.
Upstream Digitrip 3000 protected

breakers are restrained from tripping
immediately by an interlocking signal
from the downstream Digitrip 3000
relay. This interlocking signal requires
only a pair of wires from the downstream breaker to the upstream breaker.
It provides standard coordinated tripping when the fault is located outside
the zone of protection.
In the sample zone interlocking system
shown above, circuit breakers A, B and
C are equipped with Digitrip 3000
overcurrent relays.
Fault Location Zone 3

Note: For the phase time overcurrent
element, the current sensed by the Digitrip
3000 must exceed 300% (3 x In) for the
zone selective interlocking to initiate an
immediate trip signal.
If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 2,

the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B
senses the fault and sends a restraining
signal to the upstream Digitrip 3000 of
Main Breaker A.
The Digitrip 3000 of the Downstream
Breaker C does not see this fault
because it is situated on the downstream side of the fault. As a result, the
Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C
does not send a restraining signal to
the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B.
Because it did not receive a restraining
signal from the Digitrip 3000 of
Downstream Breaker C, the Digitrip
3000 of Feeder Breaker B identifies that
the fault is in Zone 2 and immediately
trips Feeder Breaker B, regardless of
its time setting.

If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 3, the
Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C
senses the fault and sends a restraining signal to the upstream Digitrip
3000 of Feeder Breaker B. Having
received this signal, the Digitrip 3000
of Feeder Breaker B withholds its
trip command. As a result, only
Downstream Breaker C is tripped.
19
Interlocking
Wire
Digitrip
3000 B


If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no

restraining signal is received by
the Digitrip of Main Breaker A. As a
result, Main Breaker A is immediately
tripped by its Digitrip overcurrent
relay, regardless of its time setting.
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-5
Sheet 04 015
Technical DataDigitrip 3000
6.72
(170.7)
3.74
(95.0)
2.67
(67.8)
3.36
(85.3)
ii
1.87
(47.5)
0.51
(13.1)
1
Operational
Digitrip 3000
Curve
5.13
(130.3)
Reset
High Load
Communications
Trip
Time Overcurrent
4.66
(118.4)
rms Amperes
Pickup (xln)
Short Delay
Pickup (xln)
Time
IA
Terminal
Block
Select
IC
Instantaneous
Pickup (xln)
Time/Trip Cause
V iew
Settings
Program
Program
Select
Settings
5
5.25
(133.4)
Test
Program
9.31
(236.5)
In=5A (Secondary) or CT (Primary)
10.25
(260.3)
( 7.6)
IG
Phase
Ground
Amp Demand
IB
Settings/Test
0.38
(9.7) Typical
Save
Settings
Raise
Test
Select
Tests
Lower
T
Test
Test
0.50
(12.7)
0.29
(7.4)
1.05
6.7
0.62
(15.7)
3.02
(76.7)
Figure 4.1-9. Digitrip 3000 Fixed MountDimensions in Inches (mm)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 4.1-10. Digitrip 3000 Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram
CA08104001E
21

Feeder Protection
4.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 04 016
General DescriptionDual-Source Power Supply
Digitrip 3000 Relay with Dual-Source Power Supply
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source Power Supply
6
7
8
9
General Description
Eatons Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source
Power Supply (DSPS) is a microprocessor-based feeder overcurrent
protective relay designed for AC
auxiliary power applications. The
DSPS versions, Digitrip 3010 and
Digitrip 3020, include an integral
power supply module that:
Powers the relay from nominal
120 Vac, 50/60 Hz (Digitrip 3010
model) or 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
(Digitrip 3020 model) auxiliary
power, which is normally connected
and available
Operates solely from the main
current transformers (CTs) during
a fault if the normally connected
auxiliary AC voltage is not available,
like an electromechanical relay or an
electronic self-powered relay
The transition from external
auxiliary AC power to current power
is smooth with no time delay
10
11
12
13
14
The CT powering capability is critical

for tripping if the AC auxiliary supply
or its fuses fail prior to the fault; or if
the fault itself collapses, the supply
voltage at the critical moment when
tripping is needed.
The Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source
Power Supply design offers significant
performance and reliability benefits
over the electromechanical or selfpowered relays. It provides a full-time
metering display, remote communications and self-monitoring functions.
In addition, there is no calibration
required. The burden is lower than
most electromechanical and solid-state
self-powered relays.
Functional Description
The Dual-Source Power Supply
contains one AC voltage transformer
and three AC current transformers.
The AC voltage transformer is used to
supply nominal AC control power to
the unit. The current transformers are
used to power the unit from the line
current. Normally, the unit will operate
from the AC auxiliary power. Because
this voltage is usually obtained from
the system containing the circuit that
the relay is protecting, a fault on the
protected line could cause the AC
voltage to drop below an acceptable
operating level. Below approximately
70V for Digitrip 3010 or 140V for
Digitrip 3020, the DSPS switches over
to current powering. All three current
transformer secondaries are connected in series to supply this power.
The DSPS will supply enough power
to operate the Digitrip 3000 overcurrent relay in the tripped state with
currents greater than 1.8 per unit rated
secondary current, or 9A, in a singlephase. The DSPS will operate with
three-phase currents in a tripped state
with currents greater than 1.2 per unit
or 6A rated secondary current.
Note: There will be no effect to the Digitrip
3000 relay trip time accuracy when the
Dual-Source Power Supply switches from
normal AC voltage to fault-current power.
The Digitrip 3000 with DSPS provides

long-term, robust, maintenance-free
performance, which cant be achieved
with an energy-storing uninterruptible
power supply (UPS). The DSPS will
operate anytime there is a fault even
after an extended power outage.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-7
Sheet 04 017
Technical DataDual-Source Power Supply
i
6.03
(153.2)
6.72
(170.7)
ii
3.74
(95.0)
5.45
(138.4)
0.51
(13.0)
S/N000217
P
0
4D13125G01
Digitrip 3000
Terminal
T
Block
1
2
3
AC Input
100-120 Vac, 50/60Hz
10.25
(260.3)
9.31
(236.5)
Digitrip 8010 Protective Relay

with Dual-Source Power Supply
5
6
7
0.50
(12.7)
0.62
(15.7)
8
1.05
(26.7)
5.74
(145.8)
Figure 4.1-11. Digitrip 3010/3020 Dual-Source Power SupplyDimensions in Inches (mm)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 4.1-12. Digitrip 3010/3020 Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram

CA08104001E
21
4.1-8

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 018
General DescriptionDrawout Case
Digitrip 3000
Drawout Case Option
ii
1
2
General Description
The terminal blocks feature a twostage disconnect operation. Removal

of the Eatons Digitrip 3000 Inner
Chassis will disconnect the trip circuits
and short the CT secondaries before
the unit control power is disconnected.
Upon insertion of the Inner Chassis,
the control power connections are
made before the trip circuits are
activated. This feature provides
added security against false tripping.
The quick-release Drawout Case

option permits easy removal and
replacement of the protective unit
without disruption of the wiring.
The CT circuits are self-shorting
with make-before-break operation
on removal. All voltage inputs,
discrete inputs and contact outputs
are disconnected while maintaining
security against false tripping.
3
4
5
6
7
Digitrip 3000 Drawout Relay

5.23
(132.8)
Hole for Viewing INCOM

Communications Activity LED
8
9
10
11
9.51
(241.6)
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4.1-13. Rear View of Digitrip 3000 Drawout Outer CaseTerminal Layout
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Feeder Protection
4.1-9
Sheet 04 019
Technical DataDrawout Case
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 4.1-14. Digitrip 3000 Drawout Relay Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 020
Technical DataDigitrip 3000
Standards, Certifications and Ratings

Table 4.1-2. Digitrip 3000 Specifications
Current Inputs
ii
CTs:
CT burden:
5A secondary
<0.004 ohm
<0.1 VA at rated current (5A)
5A (secondary) or CT (primary)
100 x In for 1 second
In:
Momentary:
2
3
Phase and ground:
5A continuous
5A break at 120/240 Vac
5/10/25/50/75/100/
150/200/250/200/
250/300/400/500/
600/630/800/1000/
1200/1250/1500/
1600/2000/2400/
2500/3000/3200/
4000/5000
Nominal:
22 to 250 Vdc
120 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
Operating range:
28 to 280 Vdc
90 to 254 Vac 50/60 Hz
120
240
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vac
10W
10W 10W 10W 10 VA 18 VA
Vdc
Vdc
Inverse time
overcurrent
time multiplier:
Dielectric strength: Current inputs:

3000 Vac for 1 minute
phase to phase
Seismic test:
Meets requirements
for UBC and California
Building Code Zone 4
ZPA = 3.5
Standards:
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1,
C37.90.2
IEC 255
UL 1053
Thermal:
ANSI: (per ANSI

C37.112, 1996)
DT
3010
3020
3030
120 Vac
240 Vac
24/48 Vdc
11
Nominal:
operating
range:
70
132 Vac
140
264 Vac
12
Power
consumption: 15 VA
15 VA
13
Trip and Communications Close

Output Contacts
IEC: (per IEC

255-3, 1989)
It (moderately inverse)
I2t (very inverse)
I4t (extremely inverse)
FLAT (definite time)
Moderately inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
IEC-A (moderately
inverse)
IEC-B (very inverse)
IEC-C (extremely inverse)
IEC-D (definite time)
Phase Overcurrent Pickup Ranges
14
Make 30A for 0.25 seconds

0.25A break at 250 Vdc
5A break at 120/240 Vac
Meets ANSI C37.90, paragraph 6.7
Inverse time
overcurrent setting:
Short delay setting:
15
Instantaneous setting:

Short delay setting:
Short delay time:
It, I2t, I4t

Curve: 0.2 to 40 (47 settings)
FLAT: 0.2 to 2 (21 settings)
ANSI (all): 0.1 to 5.0
(50 settings)
IEC (all): 0.025 to 1.00
(40 settings)
0.05 to 1.5 sec (22 settings)
Current Monitoring
True rms sensing:
Display accuracy:
Phase and Ground Time-Current Curves
Power consumption:
24
48
125 250
0.1 to 2.0) x In,

None (26 settings)
(1 to 11) x In,
None (25 settings)
(1 to 25) x In,
None (30 settings)
Time Delay Settings
Tests
10
16
Inverse time
Overcurrent setting:
Instantaneous setting:
Input Voltage
DT-30XX
Operating temperature: 30C to +55C

Operating humidity:
0% to 95%
Relative humidity
(noncondensing)
40C to +70C
Auxiliary Alarm Contacts
Ground Overcurrent Pickup Ranges
CT (Primary) Settings Available
Environment
Ampere demand:
High load:
Three-phase and ground

1% of full scale [ln]
from 0.04 x ln to 1 x In
2% of full scale [ln]
from 1 x ln to 2 x In
Average demand over
5 minute sampling window
85% of inverse time
overcurrent setting
Timing Accuracy
Inverse time
overcurrent time:
Short delay time:
Standards:
10% at >1.5 x pickup

50 ms
ANSI C37.90
IEC 255
UL 1053
Communications
PowerNet
compatible:
Baud rate:
Built-in INCOM
1200 or 9600 baud
(0.2 to 2.2) x
In (28 settings)
(1 to 11) x In,
None (25 settings)
(1 to 25) x In,
None (30 settings)
Refer to Burden Curves for Digitrip 3010/3020.

For Ground Pickup < 0.2pu; Time Tolerance 15%.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-11
Sheet 04 021
General DescriptionFP-4000
FP-4000
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay

includes programmable logic functions.
Six gates and timers may be defined
and arranged for customized applications. Flash memory is used for the
programming and all settings are
stored in nonvolatile memory. The
relay allows for four preprogrammed
setting groups that can be activated
through software or contact input.
Metering

has a mass memory for data storage
and a real-time clock with 1 ms time
resolution. The relay will log 100
sequence of event records, detailed
trip logs, minimum/maximum values,
load profiles, breaker wear information
and oscillography data.

has eight programmable binary inputs,
five normally opened heavy-duty
outputs and one Form C signal relay.
FP-4000 Relay
Features
Eatons FP-4000 feeder protection relay

is a multi-functional, microprocessorbased relay for feeder circuits of all
voltage levels. It may be used as
primary protection for main, feeder
and tie circuit breaker applications
and transformers, and as backup
protection for high voltage lines and
differential protection.
provides complete current and voltage
protection and metering. The relay has
four current inputs rated for 5A or 1A
and four voltage inputs. Three of the
voltage inputs are to be connected to
the three-phase power voltage for
voltage protection and for metering.
They can be connected in wye-ground,
delta or open delta configuration.
The fourth voltage is for independent
single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage
protection.
The multiple settings groups can be
used for arc flash mitigation when
an alternate settings group, set to
have instantaneous elements only, is
activated using a selector switch and
the programmable I/O in the FP-4000.
An integral keypad and display is
provided for direct user programming
and for retrieval of data. LEDs provide
quick indication of relay status. A front
port is provided for direct computer
connection. An INCOM communication port on the back of the relay is
standard for local area networking.
Optional communication ports and
protocols are available.
CA08104001E
Protection
Phase overcurrent:
Two-stage instantaneous with
timers (50P-1 and 50P-2)
Inverse time overcurrent (51P-1)
10 standard curves
Instantaneous or time delay reset
Two independent ground overcurrent elements (one measured-IX
and one calculated IR):
Two-stage instantaneous
with timers (50X-1 and 50X-2)
(50R-1, 50R-2)
Inverse time overcurrent (51X, 51R)
10 standard curves
Breaker failure (50BF)
Phase unbalance negative sequence
overcurrent (46)
Phase voltage unbalance and
sequence protection (47)
Under/overvoltage (27/59)
Under/overfrequency (81U/81O)
Power factor (55)
Zone interlocking for bus
protection (87B)
Trip coil monitor

Close coil monitor
Breaker wear (accumulated
interrupted current)
Oscillography (up to 16 events)
Fault data logs (up to 16 events)
Sequence of events report
(up to 100 events)
Clock (1 ms time stamping)
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
Local communication port
Remote communication port:
FSK
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
INCOM
Modbus
Configuration software
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic gates and timers
Multiple setting groups
Bus transfer logic
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
FP4 2 01 - 0 1
Current Range
Control Functions
Table 4.1-3. Catalog Numbering Selection
2 = 5A
3 = 1A
ii
10
Communication
Monitoring
General Description
Amperes: positive, negative and

zero sequence
Ampere demand
Volts: positive, negative and
zero sequence
Phase angles
Volt-amperes and VA demand
Watts and kW demand
kWh (forward, reverse, net)
VARs and kVAR demand
kVARh (lead, leg and net)
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Magnitude THD V and I
Trending (load profile over time)
Packaging
Control Voltage
1 = Fixed case
0 = 48125 Vac/dc
1 = 100240 Vac/dc
19
Communications
0 = INCOM
1 = Modbus
20
21

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 022
i
ii
1
Voltage Protection
Metering
Eatons FP-4000 feeder protection

relay has been designed for maximum
user flexibility and simplicity. The
base relay includes all the standard
current and voltage protection and
metering functions.

has four voltage-input circuits. There
is a three-phase set designated as
Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase
voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary
Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage
(27) and overvoltage (59) protection.
The three-phase voltage protection
can be set to operate on a singlephase, two out of three phases, or all
three-phase logic. The Main VTs also
provide phase voltage unbalance/
reversal (47 negative sequence)
protection. Each element has an
independent threshold set point
and an adjustable time delay.

provides complete and accurate
metering of the voltages, currents,
frequency, power, power factor and
energy. Information is available on the
individual phase magnitude, angles
and the symmetrical component
values of positive, negative and zero
sequence current and voltage.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

provides complete three-phase and
ground overcurrent protection. There are
two independent ground overcurrent
elements. The first ground element X
uses the independently measured ground
(or neutral) current from a separate
current-sensing input. The second ground
element R uses a calculated 3Io current
obtained from the sum of the three-phase
currents. This calculated current could
be used for either the neutral or ground
current in a three-phase, four-wire system.
Each of the phase and ground overcurrent elements provides three
protection functions. Each element
contains an inverse-time overcurrent
(51) function and two instantaneous
overcurrent (50) functions with
adjustable timers.
Inverse-Time Characteristics
Flexible Phase Rotation

can be applied on either an A-B-C or
an A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
permits correct operation and indication of the actual system configuration.
Frequency Protection
The FP-4000 relay provides under/over
frequency (81U/81O) protection on the
Main VT inputs. Each element has an
independent threshold set point and
adjustable time delay.
There are 10 user-selectable inversetime overcurrent curve characteristics.

The user can select from the ANSI,
IEC or thermal curve families and
can select instantaneous or time delay
reset characteristics.

includes a programmable demand
feature and stores the maximum
demand of current, kW, kVAR and
kVA since last reset. The demand is
user-configurable for fixed or sliding
window, the time interval is adjustable
and the demand interval can be
synchronized to a demand pulse.
Energy usage direction and net values
are given for kWh, kVARh and kVAh.
The relay monitors, logs and time
stamps minimum and maximum
values for current, voltage, watts,
VARs, VA, power factor and frequency.
has metered set points that can be
used to activate an output for an
alarm, control or trip function.
For example, you might want to close
a contact to insert a capacitor bank
if the power factor is less than 0.9
lagging or provide an alarm if the
demand is greater than a preset value.
Breaker Failure
12
13
14
15

includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF)
function that can be initiated from
either an internal or an external trip
signal. This is an independent element
that can be used to operate a lockout
relay or to trip an upstream breaker.
The timer must be longer than the
breaker operating time and the
protective function reset times.
16
17
18
19
20
PowerPort and PowerNet Protection Overview Screen
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Feeder Protection
4.1-13
Sheet 04 023
Loading Profile
Trip Log
Programmable Logic
The FP-4000 feeder protection

relay has memory available to store
metered data on a predetermined
interval. The log holds data from
1024 time sample intervals. This
information can be retrieved and
plotted with a PC to show the loading
profile of a given circuit over a period
of time. For example, if the time
interval is set for 15 minutes, then the
relay will store a metered data profile
over an approximate 10-day period.
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay will

store a maximum of 16 trip records in
an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
be date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution and reference an event
number associated with oscillographic
and sequence of event data. The trip log
record will include information on the
type of fault, protection elements that
operated, fault location, and currents
and voltages at the time of the fault.
Sequence of Events Records

provides oscillography-recording
capabilities. The relay will record all
voltage and current signals along with
the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic
and contact closures. The FP-4000
relay can record 16 records of 16
cycles of data. Fewer records of longer
duration can be selected and recorded.
The waveform capture is initiated by
a trip, pickup, external contact, front
panel interface or through the remote
communications port.

provides six logic gates and timers
that the user can customize for special
or unique applications. Each gate can
be assigned a logic function of either
AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate
can have a maximum of four input
signals and each input signal can be
required to be a NOT. Input signals
can be external inputs received via
the binary inputs or internal values
associated with the protection, alarm
or metering set points. Each gate
has a unique output assignment
and designation that can be used
as the input to another gate. There
are six independent timers that
have adjustable pickup and dropout
delay settings.

records a maximum of 100 events
associated with the relay. An event
is classified as a change of state as
detected by the relay. These include
relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact
closure, alarms, setting changes and
self-diagnostic failures. Each event
is date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution. The events are stored in
an FIFO in chronological order.
Waveform Capture
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Integral User Interface

The front panel user interface has a
4.00 x 20.00-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm)
alphanumeric vacuum fluorescent
display for wide angle viewing in all
light conditions. LEDs provide quick
and easy visual display of power on,
mode of operation, alarm and trip
indication. Pushbuttons are provided
for operation mode selection, scrolling
through data and settings. A security
door restricts access to the program
and test modes. In addition, the relay
settings and test functions can be
password protected.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 024
i
Main VTs
(2) or (3)
ii
1
2
Phase
CTs (3)
50
P1
51P
50
P2
50
P3
461
462
55A
55D
50
BF
CALC
31o = IR
51R
3
CB
50
R1
Trip
Coil
Monitor
50
R2
5
6
7
8
METERING
V, I, F, PF,
W, VARS, VA
Energy
Demand
Min./Max.
%THD
Phasors
Data Logger
Waveform
SER
Fault Records
50
R3
Optional
Zero
Sequence
CT
51X
50
X1
50
X2
59
M1
59
M2
27
M1
27
M2
471
472
81
U1
50
X3
81
U2
81
O1
Optional
VT (1)
59
A1
59
A2
27
A1
27
A2
FP-4000
81
O2
10
Load
11
Figure 4.1-15. FP-4000 Relay Typical One-Line Diagram
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Programmable I/O
Communication Software
Transview

provides five heavy-duty, trip-rated,
normally open contacts and two
Form C auxiliary contacts. Two trip
rated contacts are fitted with a circuit
continuity feature for monitoring the
trip or close circuits. One Form C
contact is dedicated to the relay failure
alarm function and is operated in a
normally energized (failsafe) mode.
There are eight user-configurable
discrete inputs that accept a dry
contact. Each input and output is
user-programmable for maximum
application flexibility.
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The first is PowerPort.

It runs on a PC or laptop for easy access
to a single relay to change set points
or configuration, and to view metered
values and stored data. PowerPort is
free and can be downloaded from the
Eaton Web site at www.eaton.com.
Transview is a COMTRADE file viewer

that is required in addition to the
PowerNet waveform client to view
FP-4000 waveforms. Users can view
individual voltage and current waveforms, as well as phasers and digital
input/output and internal protection
functions such as undervoltage and
current unbalance.
The second package is PowerNet.

PowerNet is a power management
software package that is designed
for continuous, remote monitoring
of many devices. It provides all the
functionality of PowerPort plus
additional functions such as billing,
trending and graphics. Contact your
local Eaton representative for more
information on PowerNet software.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-15
Sheet 04 025
Technical DataFP-4000
Table 4.1-4. FP-4000 Specifications
Compliance
Metering Accuracy (Continued)
Discrete Inputs
UL Recognized, File # E154862

UL 1053 (1994) Recognized
ANSI C37.90 (1989)
EN 55011 (1991)
EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
Input signal
Frequency necessary
for accurate operation: 60 Hz nominal,
5763 Hz (5%)
50 Hz nominal,
4753 Hz (5%)
Clock accuracy:
Free running 1
Minute/month at 25C
Clock automatically updated by PowerNet host when
present.
Number of contact inputs:

Rating:
Emission Tests
EN 55011 (1991):
Group 1 Class A
(CISPR-11, Class A)
FCC 47 CFR Chapter 1: Part 15 Subpart b Class A
ANSI C37.90.1 (1989):

ANSI C37.90.2 (1995):
EN 61000-4-2 (1995):
EN 61000-4-3 (1997):
EN 61000-4-4 (1995):
EN 61000-4-5 (1995):
EN 61000-4-6 (1996):
EN 61000-4-11 (1994):
Surge withstand capability

EMI immunity to 35 V/m
ESD rating of 8 kV
Radiated EM field at 10 V/m
Fast transient burst at 2 kV
Surge immunity test
Conducted RF at 10 V/m
Voltage dips and variations
Control Power
Control voltage:
Operating voltage:
Interruption
ride-through time:
Power consumption:
48125 Vac/dc
100240 Vac/dc
55264 Vac
38300 Vdc
20 cycle interruption of
nominal AC supply
20 VA maximum
Nominal (In):
CT rating:
CT burdens:
1A or 5A
2 x In continuous
< 0.25 VA at 5A (nominal)
Voltage Inputs
Nominal:
Operating range:
Burden:
Momentary:
Continuous:
Moderate, very, extremely,
IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I2t, I4t, flat
Inverse time overcurrent pick-up ranges

51, 51N, 51G:
0.1 to 4.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
Inverse time overcurrent multipliers
51, 51N, 51G:
0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps
Inverse time delay
range 51, 51N, 51G:
0 to 9999 cycles in
1 cycle steps
Instantaneous overcurrent pickup ranges
50, 50N, 50G:
Pick-up accuracy 50/51: 1% (at 0.12 per unit)
time accuracy
51, 51N, 51G:
3% or 30 ms
Voltage Unbalance (47)
Current Inputs
120 Vac
69150 Vac
<0.015 at 120 Vac
1 megaohm
Threshold (minimum voltage) 1 to 100V in 1V steps.

% V2/V1:
4 to 40% in 1% Steps
Time delay:
0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
Current Unbalance (46)
INCOM Communications
Baud rate:
Maximum distance:
Protocol:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

Pickup range:
Time delay:

Power Factor (55)

Trigger/Reset
Threshold:
0.5 lag to 0.5 lead in 0.01 steps
Time delay:
0 to 1000 seconds in 1 second steps
0.02 Hz
1
Altitude:
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Height:
Width:
Depth:
10
12
13
14
15
Behind Panel
10.15 inches (257.9 mm)
7.62 inches (193.5 mm)
7.48 inches (190.0 mm)
In Front of Panel
Weight
0C to 50C
5% for operation below
0C and above 50C
11
40C to +60C (40F to
+140F) product tested
to +85C
40C to +85C (40F to
+185F)
5% to 95%
relative humidity
(noncondensing)
0 to 6350 feet
(0 to 2500m) above
mean sea level
Dimensions
Height:
Width:
Depth:
1.5%
9.2k, 9.6k
Modbus RTU
Baud rate:
38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k
Connector standard 9-pin subminiature,
three-wire protocol:
INCOM
Humidity:
45 to 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz steps
RS-232 Communication, Front Panel
Pickup range:
Time delay:
10 to 150V in 1V steps
9600 fixed
10,000 feet (3048m)
INCOM
RS-485 Communication, Rear Panel
Pickup range:
Time delay:
Frequency
measurement
accuracy:
Phase angle:
Power metering
accuracy:
Metering accuracy
temperature range:
Temperature range:
Six programmable logic gates for AND, OR,

NAND, NOR operation
Two latching (flip/flop) gates
Six timer gates provide on/off delays
Under/Overvoltage Protection (27/59)
Phase current:
Phase voltage:
Logic and Control Functions
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/810)
Ground current:
Make 30A AC/DC for 0.25 seconds

Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc (resistive)
Break 5A at 120 Vac
5A at 120 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc
Threshold (minimum current) 0.1 to 20.0 per unit

in 0.01 steps.
% I2/I1:
4 to 40% in 1% steps
Time delay:
Metering Accuracy
0.5% or 0.025A from
0.02 to 20.0 per unit fully
offset current waveform
0.5% of full scale (In)
from 0.02 to 2.0 per unit
fully offset current
waveform
0.5% or 0.2V from
0160 Vac
Number of
output contacts: Five Form A and Two Form C
Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection (50/51)

Inverse time overcurrent characteristics
51, 51N, 51G:
ii
Output Contacts
Rating of Output Contacts
Protective Functions
Immunity Tests
8
48 Vdc wetting voltage
provided with internal
ground only
10.15 inches (257.9mm)

7.62 inches (193.5 mm)
0.62 inches (15.7 mm)
16
17
18
9.0 lbs (4.1 kg)
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 026
FP-5000
ii
1
2

trip logs, minimum/maximum
values, load profiles, breaker wear
information and oscillography data.
3
4
5
6
7
FP-5000 Relay
General Description
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

includes programmable logic
functions. Six gates and timers may be
defined and arranged for customized
applications. Flash memory is used for
the programming and all settings are

is a multi-functional, microprocessorbased relay for feeder circuits of
all voltage levels. It may be used as
primary protection for main, feeder
and tie circuit breaker applications,
transformers and as backup
protection for high voltage lines
and differential protection.
provides complete current and voltage
protection and metering in a single,
compact drawout case. The relay has
four current inputs rated for 5A or 1A
voltage inputs are to be connected to
the three-phase power voltage for
They can be connected in wye-ground,
delta or open delta configuration. The
fourth voltage is for independent
single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage
protection.
used for arc flash mitigation when an
alternate settings group, set to have
instantaneous elements only, is
and retrieval of data. LEDs provide
quick indication of relay status.
A front port is provided for direct
computer connection. An INCOM
communication port on the back of
the relay is standard for local area
networking. Optional communication
ports and protocols are available.

has eight programmable binary
inputs, five normally opened heavyduty outputs and one Form C signal
relay. It can be powered from 48 Vdc to
125 Vdc or 120 Vac to auxiliary power.
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent (forward, reverse

or both):
Two Inverse time overcurrent
(51P-1 and 51P-2)
Directional current (67)
10 standard curves
Voltage restrained time overcurrent (51VR)
Two independent ground directional
overcurrent elements (one measured-IX and one calculated IR):
Two-stage instantaneous
with timers (50X-1 and 50X-2)
(50R-1, 50R-2)
Ground directional polarizing (67N)
3 Vo, Ipol, negative sequence
10 standard curves
overcurrent (46)
Reverse/forward power (32-1, 32-2)
Sync check (25)

Power factor (55)
protection (87B)
Metering

zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor

Close coil monitor
(up to 100 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
FSK
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
INCOM
Modbus
Control Functions
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic gates and timers
Bus transfer logic
Cold load pickup
Loss of potential (PT blown fuses)
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-17
Sheet 04 027
Table 4.1-5. Catalog Numbering Selection
FP5 2 00 - 0 1
Current Range
2 = 5A
3 = 1A
Packaging
Control Voltage
0 = Drawout
1 = Fixed case
0 = 48125 Vac/dc
1 = 100240 Vac/dc
Communications
0 = INCOM
1 = Modbus
Voltage Restrained Overcurrent
Eatons FP-5000 feeder protection

base relay includes all the standard
current and voltage protection, and
metering functions.
Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P-2). This

modification of the pickup overcurrent
level is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The FP-5000
uses the simple linear model below to
determine the effective pickup value.
Directional Overcurrent Protection

ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are two independent
ground overcurrent elements. The
first ground element X uses the
independently measured ground
current-sensing input. The second
ground element R uses a calculated
3Io current obtained from the sum
of the three-phase currents. This
calculated current could be used for
either the neutral or ground current
in a three-phase, four-wire system.
adjustable timers.
Phase direction is a function used to
supervise all phase current elements
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is
compared to a corresponding phase
current to establish the direction of
the fault. This function is selectable
to operate in the forward, reverse or
both directions.
Ground direction is used to supervise
ground current elements and is
accomplished by using ground,
negative sequence or residual
currents supervised by zero or positive
sequence voltages or ground current.
This function is selectable to operate
in forward, reverse or both directions.

IEC or thermal curve families and
i
ii
1
Breaker Failure
either an internal or external trip signal.
This is an independent element that
can be used to operate a lockout relay
or trip an upstream breaker. The timer
must be longer than the breaker
operating time and the protective
function reset times.
2
3
4
5
Voltage Protection
Pickup %
100 %
25 %
Figure 4.1-16. Voltage Restraint Coil

Pickup Characteristics
Sync Check
The sync check function is provided
for double-ended power source
applications. The sync check monitors
voltage magnitude, phase angle and
slip frequency between the bus and
line. It also incorporates breaker close
time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live
line and live bus live line features.


can be applied on either an A-B-C or
A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
Reverse Power
Reverse power provides control for

power flowing through a feeder. There
are two elements to be configured:
operate in forward or reverse; or,
under or over power conditions.
Reverse power is typically applied to
generator or motor applications while
under power is generally applied to
load or generation loss.

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 028
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Metering
Trip Log

frequency, power, power factor and
energy. Information is available on the
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay will

resolution and reference an event
number associated with oscillographic
and sequence of event data. The trip log
record will include information on the
type of fault, protection elements that

demand of current, kW, kVAR and
kVA since last reset. The demand is
user-configurable for fixed or sliding
alarm, control or trip function. For
example, you might want to close a
contact to insert a capacitor bank if the
power factor is less than 0.9 lagging
or provide an alarm if the demand is
greater than a preset value.
Waveform Capture
Programmable Logic

are six independent timers that
have adjustable pickup and dropout
delay settings.

4 x 20-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm) alphanumeric vacuum fluorescent display
for wide angle viewing in all light
conditions. LEDs provide quick and
easy visual display of power on,
indication. Pushbuttons are provided
for operation mode selection, scrolling
through data and settings. A security
door restricts access to the program
and test modes. In addition, the relay
password protected.
Loading Profile
relay has memory available to store
interval. The log holds data from
1024 time sample intervals. This
information can be retrieved and
plotted with a PC to show the loading
profile of a given circuit over a period
of time. For example, if the time
interval is set for 15 minutes, then the
relay will store a metered data profile
over an approximate 10-day period.

FP-5000 Set Point Overview
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-19
Sheet 04 029
i
ii
Metering
V, I, F, PF,
W, VARS, VA
Energy
Demand
Min./Max.
% THD
Phasors
Data Logger
Waveform
SER
Fault Records
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FP-5000
8
9
Load
Programmable I/O
Transview

continuity feature for monitoring the
trip or close circuits. One Form C
Eaton provides two types of

communication software. The first
is PowerPort. It runs on a PC or laptop
for easy access to a single relay to
change set points or configuration and
to view metered values and stored
data. PowerPort is free and can be
downloaded from the Eaton Web site
at www.eaton.com.
Transview is a COMTRADE file viewer

that is required in addition to the
PowerNet waveform client to view
FP-5000 waveforms. Users can view
individual voltage and current waveforms, as well as phasers and digital
input/output and internal protection
functions such as undervoltage and
current unbalance.
The second package is PowerNet.

PowerNet is a power management
software package that is designed for
continuous, remote monitoring of
many devices. It provides all the
functionality of PowerPort plus
information on PowerNet software.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 030
i
ii
1
2
3

Compliance
Metering Accuracy (Continued)
Discrete Inputs
UL Recognized, File # E154862

ANSI C37.90 (1989)
EN 55011 (1991)
EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
Input signal
frequency necessary
for accurate operation: 60 Hz nominal,
5763 Hz (5%)
50 Hz nominal,
4753 Hz (5%)
Clock accuracy:
Free running 1
Minute/month at 25C
Clock automatically updated by PowerNet host when
present.
Number of contact inputs:

Rating:
Emission Tests
EN 55011 (1991):
Group 1 Class A
(CISPR-11, Class A)
4
5
6
7
ANSI C37.90.1 (1989):

ANSI C37.90.2 (1995):
EN 61000-4-2 (1995):
EN 61000-4-3 (1997):
EN 61000-4-4 (1995):
EN 61000-4-5 (1995):
EN 61000-4-6 (1996):
EN 61000-4-11 (1994):
Control Power
Control voltage:
Operating voltage:
8
9
Surge withstand capability

EMI immunity to 35 V/m
ESD rating of 8 kV
Radiated EM field at 10 V/m
Fast transient burst at 2 kV
Surge immunity test
Conducted RF at 10 V/m
Voltage dips and variations
Interruption
ride-through time:
Power consumption:
48250 Vdc
100240 Vac
55264 Vac
38300 Vdc
20 cycle interruption of
nominal AC supply
20 VA maximum
11
12
Nominal (In):
CT rating:
CT burdens:
1A or 5A
2 x In continuous
Voltage Inputs
Nominal:
Operating range:
Burden:
13
120 Vac
69150 Vac
<0.015 at 120 Vac
1 megaohm
Metering Accuracy
14
15
16
17
18
19
Phase current:
Ground current:
Phase voltage:
Frequency
measurement
Accuracy:
Phase angle:
Power metering
accuracy:
Metering accuracy
temperature range:
Temperature range:
0.5% or 0.025A from

0.02 to 20.0 per unit fully
offset current waveform
0.5% of full scale (In)
from 0.02 to 2.0 per unit
fully offset current
waveform
0.5% or 0.2V from
0160 Vac
Momentary:
Inverse time overcurrent characteristics

51, 51N, 51G:
Inverse time overcurrent pickup ranges
51, 51N, 51G:
Inverse time overcurrent multipliers
51, 51N, 51G:
Inverse time delay
range 51, 51N, 51G:
Instantaneous overcurrent pickup ranges
50, 50N, 50G:
Pickup accuracy 50/51:
Time accuracy
51, 51N, 51G:
Directional 67, 67N, 67G:
Continuous:
IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I2t, I4t, Flat
1.5%
0C to 50C
5% for operation below
0C and above 50C

Break 5A at 120 Vac
5A at 120 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc

NAND, NOR operation
0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps

0 to 9999 cycles in
1 cycle steps

1% (at 0.12 per unit)
3% or 30 ms
Reverse overcurrentsame
data as above for reverse

Threshold (Minimum Voltage) 1 to 100V
in 1V steps.
% V2/V1:
Time delay:
Baud rate:
Maximum distance:
Protocol:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
Baud rate:
38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k
Connector standard nine-pin subminiature,
three-wire protocol:
INCOM
Humidity:

10 to 150V in 1 volt steps
Altitude:
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/810)

Pickup range:
Time delay:

Pickup range:
Time delay:

Behind Panel
Height:
Width:
Depth:
In Front of Panel
Sync Check (25)
Weight
1 to 60
0.1 to 2 Hz
1 to 100V
0 to 9999 cycles
20
Power Factor (55)
21
Time delay: 0 to 1000 seconds in 1 second steps
40C to +60C
(40F to +140F)
product tested to +85C
40C to +85C
(40F to +185F)
5% to 95%
Relative humidity
(noncondensing)
0 to 6350 feet
(0 to 2500m) above
mean sea level
Dimensions
Forward/reverse over/under
Pickup accuracy:
1.0%
Trip time accuracy: 0 to 12 cycles or
0.1% whichever is greater
Phase angle:
Slip frequency:
Voltage differential:
Breaker close time:
9.2k, 9.6k
Modbus RTU
Threshold (minimum current) 0.1 to 20.0 per unit

in 0.01 steps.
% I2/I1:
Time delay:
Pickup range:
Time delay:
9600 fixed
10,000 feet (3048m)
INCOM
Power Protection (32)

0.02 Hz
1
Number of
output contacts: Five Form A and Two Form C
Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection (50/51)
Current Inputs
10
Output Contacts
Immunity Tests
8
48 Vdc wetting voltage
provided with internal
ground only
Height:
Width:
Depth:
6.70 inches (170.2 mm)

5.30 inches (134.6 mm)
6.90 inches (175.3 mm)
11.34 Inches (288.0 mm)

7.72 Inches (196.1 mm)
0.80 Inches (20.3 mm)
12.5 lbs (5.7 kg)
Trigger/reset
threshold: 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead in 0.01 steps
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-21
Sheet 04 031
FP-6000
FP-6000 Relay
General Description
is a multi-functional, microprocessorbased relay for feeder circuits of all
voltage levels. It may be used as a
reclosing relay; primary protection on
feeders, mains and tie circuit breaker
applications; or as backup protection
for transformers, high voltage lines
and differential protection.
provides complete current, voltage
and power protection and metering in
a single, compact drawout case. The
relay has four current inputs rated 5A
or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of
the voltage inputs are to be connected
to the three-phase power voltage for
They can be connected in wye-ground
or open delta configuration. The fourth
voltage is for independent single-phase
undervoltage/overvoltage protection.
The FP-6000 is the only relay in its
class that offers a flexible yet simple
reclosing protection. Its compact
design makes it ideal for polemounted recloser controls.
used for arc flash mitigation when an
instantaneous elements only, is
and retrieval of data. LEDs provide
quick indication of relay status.
computer connection. An INCOM
CA08104001E
communication port on the back of

the relay is standard for local area
networking. Optional communication
ports and protocols are available.

relay includes programmable logic
functions. Six gates and timers may be
defined and arranged for customized
applications. Programmable logic
control functions make the FP-6000
relay ideally suited for main-tie-main
and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes.
Flash memory is used for the

load profiles, breaker wear information and oscillography data.
Metering

has eight programmable binary
inputs, five normally opened heavyduty outputs and one Form C signal
relay. It can be powered from 48 Vdc
to 250 Vdc or 120 Vac to 240 Vac
auxiliary power.
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent (forward, reverse

or both):
Two Inverse time overcurrent
(51P-1 and 51P-2)
Directional current (67)
10 standard curves
Voltage restrained time
overcurrent (51VR)
Two independent ground directional
overcurrent elements (one measuredIX and one calculated IR):
timers (50X-1 and 50X-2)
(50R-1, 50R-2)
Ground directional polarizing (67N)
3 Vo, Ipol, negative sequence
10 standard curves
overcurrent (46)

Reverse/forward power
(32-1, 32-2, 32-3)
Reverse/forward VARs
(32V-1, 32V-2, 32V-3)
Thermal Protection (49DT, 49MT,
49DA, 49MA)
Sync check (25)
Power factor (55)
protection (87B)

zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
RTD temperatures
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor

Close coil monitor
(up to 100 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
FSK
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
INCOM
Modbus
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 032
Reverse VARs
Table 4.1-7. FP-6000 Catalog Numbering Selection
FP6 2 00 - 0 1
ii
Current Range
2 = 5A
3 = 1A
Packaging
Control Voltage
0 = Drawout
0 = 48125 Vac/dc
1 = 100240 Vac/dc
Communications
Protocol
0 = INCOM
1 = Modbus RTU
2
Control Functions
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic gates
and timers
Bus transfer logic
Cold load pickup
Loss of potential (PT blown fuses)
Autoreclose function (79)
Auto zone coordination
has been designed for maximum user
flexibility and simplicity. The base
relay includes all of the standard
current and voltage protection and
metering functions.

currents supervised by zero or positive

Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P-2). This
modification of the pickup overcurrent
level is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The FP-6000
uses the simple linear model below to
Thermal Protection
The FP-6000 has a fiber optic port
to communicate to URTD, which is
offered separately and is able to
provide 11 direct temperature
measurements. With URTD connected
to the relay, the FP-6000 is able to
provide fan control, and temperaturerelated overload alarm, and trip
functions. Each RTD can be assigned
to some dedicated spots, such as
windings, rotor bearing, load bearing,
top oil and user-defined spots.
The user can select from the ANSI, IEC
or thermal curve families and can select
instantaneous or time delay reset
characteristics.
Breaker Failure
Pickup %
100 %

ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are two independent
first ground element X uses the
current-sensing input. The second
ground element R uses a calculated
3Io current obtained from the sum
of the three-phase currents. This
either the neutral or ground current
in a three-phase, four-wire system.


adjustable timers.
Reverse Power

(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is compared to a corresponding phase current
to establish the direction of the fault.
This function is selectable to operate in
the forward, reverse or both directions.
Reverse VARs can be used to detect loss

of excitation in synchronous machines.
There are three elements to be configured: operate in forward or reverse; or,
under or over VARs conditions.
25 %
Sync Check
are three elements to be configured:

or to trip an upstream breaker. The
timer must be longer than the breaker
Voltage Protection

The FP-6000 feeder protection relay can
be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B
phase rotation. A user setting permits
correct operation and indication of the
actual system configuration.
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Feeder Protection
4.1-23
Sheet 04 033
Autoreclosing Logic
The FP-6000 provides a four shotrecloser scheme. Autoreclosing is
normally used by the utilities in their
distribution and transmission lines,
but it can be used in commercial and
industrial applications with long overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the faults that
occur on overhead lines are transient
in nature. Tripping of a circuit breaker
normally clears a transient fault and
reclosing of the circuit breaker restores
power back to the circuit.
Metering
frequency, power, power factor,
energy and RTD temperatures.
Information is available on the
demand of current, kW, kVAR and kVA
since last reset. The demand is user
configurable for fixed or sliding
For example, if the time interval is

set for 15 minutes, then the relay will
store a metered data profile over an
approximate 10-day period.

Programmable Logic


are six independent timers that have
adjustable pickup and dropout
delay settings.
Trip Log
will store a maximum of 16 trip
records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip
record will be date and time stamped
to a 1 ms resolution and reference
an event number associated with
oscillographic and sequence of event
data. The trip log record will include
information on the type of fault,
protection elements that operated,
fault location and currents and
voltages at the time of the fault.
Waveform Capture

4 x 20-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm) alphanumeric vacuum fluorescent display
for wide angle viewing in all light
conditions. LEDs provide quick and
easy visual display of power on, mode
of operation, alarm and trip indication.
Pushbuttons are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through
data and settings. A security door
restricts access to the program and
test modes. In addition, the relay
password protected.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15

alarm, control or trip function. For
example, you might want to close a
contact to insert a capacitor bank if the
power factor is less than 0.9 lagging or
provide an alarm if the demand is
greater than a preset value.
16
17
18
Loading Profile
has memory available to store
interval. The log holds data from 1024
time sample intervals. This information can be retrieved and plotted with
a PC to show the loading profile of a
given circuit over a period of time.
CA08104001E
19
20
FP-6000 Set Point Overview
21

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 034
i
ii
32V
-1
32V
-2
32V
-3
Metering
V, I, F, PF,
W, VARS, VA
Energy
Demand
Min./Max.
% THD
Phasors
Data Logger
Waveform
SER
Fault Records
42M
2
3
79
49D
4
5
6
7
8
FP-6000
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Load
Programmable I/O

continuity feature for monitoring
the trip or close circuits. One Form C

communication software. The first is
PowerPort. It runs on a PC or a laptop
change set points or configuration,
and to view metered values and stored
data. PowerPort is free and can be
at www.eaton.com.
The second package is Power Xpert

Software. Power Xpert Software is
a power management software
package that is designed for continuous, remote monitoring of many
devices. It provides all the functionality
of PowerPort plus additional functions
such as billing, trending and graphics.
Contact your local Eaton representative for more information on Power
Xpert Software.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-25
Sheet 04 035
Compliance
Principal Parameters
UL Recognized, File # E154862 (FP6200-00 5A CT

model only)
ANSI C37.90 (1989)
EN 55011 (1991)
EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
Emission Tests
EN 55011 (1991):
Group 1 Class A
(CISPR-11, Class A)
Current (amperes) Ia, Ib, Ic, Ir, Ix
Range
0.02 to 20 per unit
Sequence currents
Main voltage
Sequence voltages
Auxiliary voltage
Phase angle for I and V
System frequency
Ampere demand
Watt demand
0.02 to 20 per unit

0 to 160V
0 to 160V
0 to 250V
0 to 360
45 to 65 Hz
0.02 to 20 per unit
0 to 4000 MW
Watts
0 to 4000 MW
Watthours
0 to 999.999 MWh
Immunity Tests
VAR demand
0 to 4000 MVAR
ANSI C37.90.1 (1989): Surge withstand capability
VARs
0 to 4000 MVAR
ANSI C37.90.2 (1995): EMI immunity to 35 V/m
VAR-hours
0 to 999.999 MVARh
EN 61000-4-2 (1995): ESD rating of 8 kV
VA demand
0 to 4000 MVA
EN 61000-4-3 (1997): Radiated EM field at 10 V/m
VA
0 to 4000 MVA
EN 61000-4-4 (1995): Fast transient burst at 2 kV
VA-hours
0 to 999,999 MVAh
EN 61000-4-5 (1995): Surge immunity test
Apparent power factor
1 to +1
EN 61000-4-6 (1996): Conducted RF at 10 V/m
Displacement power factor
1 to +1
EN 61000-4-8:
Power frequency magnetic
Total harmonic distortion
0 to 9999 1%
field immunity
Other metering accuracy
1%
EN 61000-4-11 (1994): Voltage dips and variations
FS (full scale) = 3 x CT rating x nominal L-N voltage.
Control Power
Control voltage:
Operating voltage:
Interruption
ride-through time:
Power consumption:
48125 Vdc
100120 Vac
100250 Vdc
100240 Vac
38150 Vdc
55132 Vac
80308 Vdc
55264 Vac
83 ms at 120V, 60 Hz AC
250 ms at 110 Vdc/
300 ms at Vac
20 VA maximum
22 VA maximum
Current Inputs
CT ratings:
CT burdens:
2 x In at 5A continuous
3 x In at 1A continuous
80 x In at 5A for 1 second
100 x In at 1A for 1 second
Nominal:
Operating range:
Burden:
0120 Vac line to common

0144 Vac (+20%)
Line to common
1 megaohm input
Input Signal Frequency

Necessary for Accurate
Operation:
60 Hz nominal,
5763 Hz (5%)
50 Hz nominal,
4753 Hz (5%)
Frequency measuring
accuracy:
0.02 Hz
Clock accuracy:
Free running 1 minute/
month at 25C (77F)
Automatically updated by
PowerNet host when
present
CA08104001E
1% FS
0.02 for load currents above 20% rated

0.02 for load currents above 20% rated
Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection
Power Protection (32)
Inverse characteristics:
Direction:
forward/reverse
Criterion:
over/under
Pickup range:
0.02 to 4 pu
Note: 1pu = 3 x CT secondary rating x VT
secondary rating for wye; the square root of
3 x VT secondary rating x CT secondary rating
for open delta.
Pickup accuracy:
1.0%
Trip time accuracy:
0 to 2 cycles or 0.1%,
whichever is greater

IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I2t, I4t, flat
TOC (51) pickup range: 0.02 to 4.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
Time multipliers:
0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps
IOC (50) pickup range:
Pickup accuracy:
1% (at 0.1 to 2 per unit)
Time delay:
Time accuracy:
3% or 30 ms
Directional (67, 67N, 67G): forward, reverse or both

Threshold
(minimum voltage):
% V2/V1:
Time delay:


Threshold
(minimum current):
% I2/I1:
Time delay:

Pickup range:
Time delay:

Neutral Voltage Protection (59N)

Source:
Criterion:
Pickup range:
Time delay:
calculated, measure
phasor, rms
5 to 250V in 1V steps
Pickup range:
Time delay:
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Protective Functions (continued)
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/O)

Metering Accuracy
1.5% FS for PF = 0.5 to 0.5
Voltage Inputs
Accuracy
at < 2 + CT rating: 0.5% of CT rating
at > 2 + CT rating: 0.5% of reading
1% of nominal
0.5% of nominal 0.2V
1% of nominal
1% of nominal
1 at nominal voltage
0.02 Hz
0.5%
1.0% FS for PF = unity
1.5% FS for PF = 0.5 to 0.5
6
7
8
9
10
11
VAR Protection (32V)

Direction:
forward/reverse
Criterion:
over/under
Pickup range:
0.02 to 4 pu
Note: 1pu = 3 x CT secondary rating x VT
secondary rating for wye; the square root of
3 x VT secondary rating x CT secondary rating
for open delta.
Pickup accuracy:
1.0%
Trip time accuracy:
0 to 2 cycles or 0.1%,
whichever is greater
12
13
14
Thermal Protection (49)

Pickup range:
Time delay:
0 to 199C or 0 to 390F
0.1 to 3500 seg
15
Sync Check (25)

Phase angle:
Slip frequency:
Voltage differential:
Breaker close time:
1 to 60
0.1 to 2 Hz
1 to 100V
0 to 9999 cycles
Discrete Inputs
16
17
Number of
contact inputs: 8
Rating:
48 Vdc wetting voltage provided
with internal ground only
18
Power Factor (55)
Output Contacts
19
Trigger/reset
threshold:
0.5 to 1 lag; 0.5 to 0.99 lead in 0.01 steps
Time delay: 0 to 1000 seconds in 1 second steps
Number of
contact inputs: 5 Form A and 2 Form C

Pickup range:
Time delay:

20
21

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 036
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Standards, Certifications and Ratings (Continued)

Table 4.1-8. FP-6000 Specifications (Continued)
Momentary:
Operating
temperature:
Continuous:

Break 5A at 120/240 Vac
5A at 120/240 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc
Storage
temperature:
Humidity:

NAND, NOR operation
Altitude:
Dimensions
Baud rate:
Maximum distance:
Protocol:
Behind Panel
9600 fixed
10,000 feet (3048m)
INCOM

Baud rate:
Connector standard:
Protocol:
38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k

9-pin subminiature, 3-wire
INCOM

Baud rate:
Protocol:
19.2k, 9.6k
Modbus RTU
Height:
Width:
Depth:
40C to +60C
(40F to +140F)
40C to +85C
(40F to +185F)
5% to 95% relative humidity
(noncondensing)
0 to 6350 feet (0 to 2500m)
Above Mean Sea Level
6.70 inches (170.2 mm)

5.30 inches (134.6 mm)
6.90 inches (175.3 mm)
In Front of Panel
Height:
Width:
Depth:
11.34 inches (288.0 mm)

7.72 inches (196.1 mm)
0.80 inches (20.3 mm)
Weight
12.5 lbs (5.7 kg)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Feeder Protection
4.1-27
Sheet 04 037
General DescriptionEDR-3000
EDR-3000
Distribution Relay
General
The EDR-3000 microprocessor-based
relay provides reliable three-phase
and ground overcurrent protection
for all voltage levels. It can be used for
any application where instantaneous
and/or time overcurrent protection is
required. It is most commonly used
as primary feeder circuit protection, as
in Figure 4.1-20.
The EDR-3000 may be connected to

the secondary side of a delta-wye
grounded transformer with the ground
element connected to a separate CT in
the neutral connection of the transformer. With this connection, a lower
CT ratio and a pickup setting can be
used to provide more sensitive
ground fault protection especially for
resistance grounded systems (see
Figure 4.1-22).
i
ii
1
2
3
Resistor
EDR-3000 Relay
CB
52
50
51
50G
51G
EDR-3000
General Description
The EDR-3000 protective relay is a
multifunction, microprocessor-based
overcurrent relay designed for both
ANSI and IEC applications. It is a
panel-mounted, self-contained unit
that operates from either AC or DC
control power. The EDR-3000 design
provides true rms and fundamental
sensing of each phase and ground
current. Only one unit is required for
each three-phase circuit.
Current monitoring and operator
selectable protective functions are
integral to each relay. The EDR-3000
relay operates from the 5A or 1A
secondary output of standard
current transformers. Current
transformer ratio information is
quickly programmed into the unit
via settings. This enables the relay to
display metered current in primary
amperes, secondary amperes or per
unit values. The EDR-3000 features
a user-friendly operations panel to
monitor and to program the relay.
Operating parameters and troubleshooting information are displayed in
the 128 x 64 LCD display. In addition,
all data and information can be
communicated to a host computer
equipped with PowerPort-E.
A Communication Trip and
Communication Close control
command can also be initiated by
a host computer.
50G
51G
50
51
Figure 4.1-20. Primary Feeder

Circuit Protection
The EDR-3000 may be applied as the
transformer primary protection or as
backup to the differential protection,
as in Figure 4.1-21.
50
51
50G
51G
EDR-3000
CB
Figure 4.1-22. Transformer Secondary

Protection with Neutral CT Connection
Load
The EDR-3000 relay has special

provisions for connection in a zone
interlocking scheme that can be used
for bus protection or to improve
protection coordination in a tight or
close system. Zone interlocking is
described in the following sections. In
addition, the EDR-3000 has multiple
setting groups that can be used to
reduce arc flash hazard with
instantaneous elements.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CB
EDR-3000
Figure 4.1-21. Transformer

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 038
i
ii
1
2
3
The EDR-3000 provides complete
three-phase and ground protection
with separate elements and settings.
The relay can be used with CT ratios
from 1 to 50,000 for 1A models and
1 to 10,000 for 5A models. The CT ratio
can be set independently for phase
and ground, allowing the ground
element to be connected in either the
residual or the separate ground CT
configuration, as in Figure 4.1-23
and 4.1-24.
b
c
5
8

(Phase and Ground)
Zone selective interlocking is a protection function to minimize equipment

damage resulting from a phase or a
ground fault in an area where long
time and/or short time delay is in use.
6
9
50/51
50N/51N
GND 12
11
When the Ground Zone Interlocking

feature is used, an immediate trip
is initiated when the fault is in the
breakers zone of protection, regardless
of its preset time delay. When the
Phase Zone Interlocking feature is
used, the time overcurrent elements
work as follows. The instantaneous
phase element will initiate an immediate
trip when the fault is in the breakers
zone of protection, regardless of its
preset time delay. For the time overcurrent phase element, the current
sensed by the EDR-3000 must exceed
1.5 times the pickup setting for the
immediate trip signal when the fault is
in the breaker's zone of protection.
EDR-3000
CB-52
Figure 4.1-23. Residual Ground Connection
4
5
3
6
9
50/51
CB-52
50G/51G
12
GND 11
Upstream EDR-3000 protected

breakers are restrained from tripping
immediately by an interlocking signal
from the downstream EDR-3000 relay.
This interlocking signal requires only
a pair of wires from the downstream
breaker to the upstream breaker.
It provides standard coordinated
tripping when the fault is located
outside the zone of protection. In
the sample zone interlocking system
shown in Figure 4.1-26, circuit
breakers A, B and C are equipped
with EDR-3000 overcurrent relays.
EDR-3000
Figure 4.1-24. Separate Zero Sequence

Ground CT Connection
9
10
11
12
13
Table 4.1-9. Catalog Numbering Selection for EDR-3000 Distribution Relay Removable Terminals
EDR-3000 A 0 B A 1
14
Hardware Option 1
15
A = Four digital inputs, four

outputs, removable terminals
B = Eight digital inputs, six
outputs, removable terminals,
trip coil monitor
C = Four digital inputs, four
zone interlocking and
IRIG-B
16
17
18
Mounting Options
Hardware Option 2
0 = Phase current 5A/1A,
ground current 5A/1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
I = Modbus-TCP
(RJ-45)
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
B = Conformal coated
circuit boards
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Consult factory for the availability of eight digital inputs, six outputs, trip coil monitor, zone interlocking, IRIG-B and Modbus-TCP.
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Feeder Protection
4.1-29
Sheet 04 039
If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 3,
the EDR-3000 of downstream breaker
C senses the fault and sends a restraining signal to the upstream EDR-3000 of
feeder breaker B. Having received this
signal, the EDR-3000 of feeder breaker
B withholds its trip command. As a
result, only downstream breaker C
is tripped.

If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 2, the
EDR-3000 of feeder breaker B senses
the fault and sends a restraining signal
to the upstream EDR-3000 of main
breaker A. The EDR-3000 of the downstream breaker C does not see this
fault because it is situated on the
downstream side of the fault. As a
result, the EDR-3000 of downstream
breaker C does not send a restraining
signal to the EDR-3000 of feeder

breaker B. Because it did not receive a
restraining signal from the EDR-3000 of
downstream breaker C, the EDR-3000
of feeder breaker B identifies that the
fault is in Zone 2 and immediately
trips feeder breaker B, regardless of
its time setting.

If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no restraining
signal is received by the Digitrip of
main breaker A. As a result, main
breaker A is immediately tripped by its
EDR-3000 overcurrent relay, regardless
of its time setting.
3.62
(91.8)
B
A
A
4.88
(124.0)
Cutout
t
CL
6.30
(160.0)
3.05
(77.6)
1
2
3
4
i
ii
A Holes for
Standard
Panel Mount
Note: For the time overcurrent phase

element, the current sensed by the
EDR-3000 must exceed 1.5 times the pickup
setting for the zone selective interlocking
to initiate an immediate trip signal when the
fault is in the breakers zone of protection.
B Holes for
Projection
Panel Mount
5.38
(136.7)
4.94
(125.5)
3.94
(100.0)
CL
B
4x 0.19
(4.8)
Figure 4.1-25. Drilling Pattern
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Figure 4.1-26. Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 040
Technical Data and SpecificationsEDR-3000
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Table 4.1-10. EDR-3000 Specifications
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage:
Buffer time in case
of supply failure:
Digital Inputs
19300 Vdc/40250 Vac
50 ms at minimal aux.
voltage communication is
permitted to be interrupted
Max. permissible making current:
18A peak value for <0.25 ms
12A peak value for <1 ms
The voltage supply must be protected b a fuse of:
2.5A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm
(approx. 0.20 in. x 0.08 in) according to IEC 60127
(approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Power Consumption
Power supply range: 19300 Vdc: 6W idle mode/
8W max. power
40250 Vac: 6W idle mode/
8W max. power
(for frequencies of 4070 Hz)
Power consumption: Phase current inputs
at In = 1A burden = 0.15 mVA
Ground current input: at In = 1A burden = 0.35 mVA
Max. input voltage:

Input current:
Reaction time:
Fallback time:
4 Switching thresholds:
Un = 24 Vdc
Switching threshold 1 ON:
Switching threshold 1 OFF:
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Terminals:
Front Interface RS-232

300 Vdc/270 Vac
<4 mA
<20 ms
<30 ms (safe state of the
digital inputs)
Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Min. 19.2 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Min. 42.6 Vdc
Max. 21.3 Vdc
Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac
Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac
Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac
Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
Screw-type terminal
Binary Output Relays

Continuous current:
Switch-on current:
Max. breaking current:
5A DC up to 50V (resistive)
0.2A DC at 300V
Max. switching voltage:
Switching capacity:
Contact type:
Terminals:
5A AC/DC
25A AC/DC for 4s
5A AC up to 125V AC
Baud rates:
Handshake:
Connection:
115,200 Baud
RTS and CTS
Nine-pole D-Sub plug
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: Six screw-clamping terminals
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
(terminating resistors internal)
Climatic Environmental Conditions

25C up to +70C
(13F to +158F)
Operating temperature: 20C up to +60C
(4F to +140F)
Permissible humidity
at Ann. average:
<75% rel.
(on 56d up to 95% rel.)
Permissible
installation altitude: <2000m (6561.67 ft)
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
altitude applies, a changed
classification of the
operating and test voltages
may be necessary.
250 Vac/300 Vdc

2000 VA
1 changeover contact
Screw-type terminals
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-31
Sheet 04 041
EDR-4000
Distribution Protection Relay
EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay
General Description
Eatons EDR-4000 distribution
protection relay is a multi-functional,
microprocessor-based relay for feeder
circuits of all voltage levels. It may be
used as a primary protection on
and differential protection. The relay
is most commonly used on medium
voltage switchgear applications.
The EDR-4000 feeder protection relay
provides complete current, voltage,
frequency protection and metering in
a single, compact case. The relay has
four current inputs rated for either 5A
voltage is for independent singlephase undervoltage/overvoltage
protection, or ground protection for
an ungrounded system.
The Maintenance Mode password
protected soft key, can be used for
arc flash mitigation to change to an
instantaneous elements only. The
multiple setting groups can also be
changed, via communications or a
digital input.
and retrieval of data without the need
of a computer. 14 programmable
LEDs provide quick indication of
relay status.

computer connection. An RS-485
communication port on the back is
standard for local area networking
using Modbus-RTU. An optional
Ethernet port and protocols
are available.
The EDR-4000 distribution protection
functions*. Logic gates and timers
may be defined and arranged for
customized applications. Programmable logic control functions make the
EDR-4000 relay ideally suited for
main-tie-main and main 1/main 2
transfer schemes. Flash memory is
used for the programming and all
settings are stored in nonvolatile
memory. The relay allows for four
preprogrammed setting groups that
can be activated through software or
contact input.

through software, the display or a
contact input.

relay has a mass memory for data
storage and a real-time clock with
1 ms time resolution. The relay will
log 300 sequence of event records,
20 detailed trip logs, minimum/
maximum values, load profiles,
breaker wear information and
oscillography data.
The EDR-4000 has eight programmable

binary inputs, two normally opened and
eight Form C heavy-duty outputs and
one Form C signal alarm relay. It can
be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or
40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent elements:

Three instantaneous elements
with timers (50P[1], 50P[2]
and 50P[3])
Three inverse time overcurrent
elements (51P[1], 51P[2]
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
51P[2] and 51P[3] can be
voltage restrained
Metering
CA08104001E
Ground overcurrent elements:

Two instantaneous measured
elements with timers (50X[1]
and 50X[2])
Two instantaneous calculated
elements with timers (50R[1]
and 50R[2])
Two inverse time overcurrent
measured elements (51X[1]
and 51X[2])
calculated elements (51R[1]
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
overcurrent (46[1], 46[2])
sequence protection (47[1], 47[2])
Main three-phase under/overvoltage
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
Auxiliary single-phase under/
overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2],
59A[1], 59A[2])
Ground fault overvoltage relay
(59N[1], 59N[2])
Six frequency elements that can be
assigned to: overfrequency, underfrequency, rate of change or vector
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
Apparent and displacement
power factor (55A[1], 55A[2],
55D[1], 55D[2])
protection (87B)
Switch onto fault protection
Cold load pickup
protection (87B)
zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Distribution Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 042
Monitoring
ii
1
2
Communication
Trip coil monitor

Breaker wear primary and secondary
(accumulated interrupted current)
Oscillography (6000 cycles total)
(up to 300 events)
Control Functions
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-TCP (optional)
Breaker open/close
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable Logic
Programmable LEDs
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
EDR-4000 A 0 B A 1
6
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs,

removable terminals, zone
interlocking
B = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs,
removable terminals,
zone interlocking and
large display
8
9
10
11
Mounting Options
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
1 = Modbus-RTU +
Modbus-TCP
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground and large display.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Feeder Protection
4.1-33
Sheet 04 043
Protection and Control Functions
Breaker Failure
Maintenance Mode

protection relay has been designed
for maximum user flexibility and
simplicity. The base relay includes all
the standard current and voltage
protection and metering functions.

relay includes a breaker failure (50BF,
62BF) function that can be initiated
from either an internal or an external
trip signal. This is an independent
element that can be used to operate
a lockout relay or to trip an upstream
breaker. The timer must be longer
than the breaker operating time and
the protective function reset times.
The Maintenance Mode can improve

safety by providing a simple and
reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and lower incident energy
levels at energized panels. The
Maintenance Mode allows the user
to switch to more sensitive settings
via a password protected soft key,
communication or via a digital Input
while maintenance work is being
performed at an energized panel
or device. The more sensitive
settings provide greater security for
maintenance personnel and helps to
reduce the possibility of injury.
relay provides complete three-phase
and ground overcurrent protection.
There are eight independent ground
overcurrent elements. The ground
elements X use the independently
measured ground (or neutral) current
from a separate current-sensing input.
The ground elements R use a
calculated 3Io residual current
obtained from the sum of the threephase currents. This calculated current
could be used for either the neutral
or ground current in a three-phase,
four-wire system. Each of the phase
and ground overcurrent elements
can be selected to operate based on
fundamental or rms current.

Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[2] and
51P[3]). This modification of the
pickup overcurrent level is compared
to the corresponding phase input
voltage. The EDR-4000 uses the simple
linear model below to determine the
effective pickup value.
Pickup %
100 %
25 %
Voltage Protection
relay has four voltage-input circuits.
There is a three-phase set designated
as Main Voltage (M) and a singlephase voltage circuit designated as
Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include
undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59)
protection. The three-phase voltage
protection can be set to operate on a
single-phase, two out of three phases,
or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs
also provide phase voltage unbalance/
Ground Voltage Protection

In high impedance grounded systems,
ground fault protection is provided by
the detection of zero sequence voltage
(3Vo) in the neutral of the transformer
by an overvoltage element (59N)
connected to the secondary of the
distribution grounding transformer,
or in the secondary of a wye-broken
delta transformer used when the
neutral is not accessible or in delta
system. In the EDR-4000, we can
measure this zero sequence voltage
through the 4th voltage input; the 59N
element has to be desensitized for 3rd
harmonic voltages that can be present
in the system under normal operation.

IEC or thermal curve families, and can
select instantaneous or time delay

relay can be applied on either an A-B-C
or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
permits correct operation and indication
of the actual system configuration.
The EDR-4000 relay provides six
frequency elements than can be
used to detect under/over frequency,
rate of change, and a vector surge
(decoupling of two systems) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each
element has an independent threshold
set point and adjustable time delay.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Monitoring and Metering

The EDR-4000 protection relay records
a maximum of 300 events associated
with the relay. An event is classified as
a change of state as detected by the
relay. These include relay pickups,
dropouts, trips, contact closure,
alarms, setting changes and selfdiagnostic failures. Each event is date
and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution.
The events are stored in an FIFO log in
chronological order.
5
6
7
8
9
Trip Log
The EDR-4000 protection relay will
store a maximum of 20 trip records
in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
resolution. The trip log record will
include information on the type of
fault, protection elements that
Waveform Capture
The EDR-4000 transformer protection
relay provides oscillography-recording
measured signals along with the
binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and
contact closures. The ETR-4000 relay
can record up to 6000 cycles of data.
The number of records is proportional
to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The
waveform capture is initiated by up
to eight different triggers; it can also
be generated manually through the
display or via communications.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 044
i
ii
1
2
3
Programmable I/O
Programmable Logic

128 x 64 pixel LCD display with background illumination for wide angle
viewing in all light conditions. 17
programmable LEDs provide quick
and easy visual display of power
on, mode of operation, alarm and trip
indication. Soft keys are provided for
operation mode selection, scrolling
through data and settings. In addition,
the relay settings and test functions
are password protected.

relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated,
two normally open and eight Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs can be
used for monitoring the trip circuit.
One Form C contact is dedicated to
the relay failure alarm function and
is operated in a normally energized
(fail-safe) mode. There are eight
user-configurable discrete inputs that
accept a wet contact and can operate
through a wide range of power.
Each input and output is userprogrammable for maximum

relay provides logic gates and timers
has a unique output assignment and
designation that can be used as the
input to another gate. There are
24 independent timers that have
delay settings.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4.1-28. Typical One-Line Diagram
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Feeder Protection
4.1-35
Sheet 04 045
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 4.1-29. Typical Control Diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 046
i
ii
1
PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or a
laptop for easy access to a single relay
to change set points or configuration
data. PowerPort-E is free and can be

at www.eaton.com/pr.
Software. Power Xpert Software is a
power management software package
that is designed for continuous,
remote monitoring of many devices.

It provides additional functions such
as billing, trending and graphics.
Xpert Software.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 4.1-30. PowerPort-E EDR-4000 Device Planning
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-37
Sheet 04 047
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage:
Digital Inputs
24270 Vdc/48230 Vac
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case

of supply failure:
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
18A peak value for <0.25 ms
12A peak value for <1 ms
The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:
Power Consumption
Power
supply range: 24270 Vdc: 7W idle mode/
approx. 13W max. power
48230 Vac: 7 VA idle mode/
approx. 13 VA max. power
Power
consumption: Phase current inputs
at In = 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
current input: at In = 1A, S = 0.35 mVA
at In = 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Max. input voltage:

Input current:
Reaction time:
Fallback time:
Switching thresholds:
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Terminals:
Zone Interlocking
300 Vdc/259 Vac
<4 mA
<20 ms
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Min. 19.2 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Min. 42.6 Vdc
Max. 21.3 Vdc
NOTICE: ONLY FOR ZONE INTERLOCK TRIPPING

OUTPUTS (ZONE INTERLOCK, SEMI-CONDUCTOR
OUTPUT): 5 Vdc, <2 mA FOR CONNECTION TO
ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY.
Zone out:
Output voltage (high): 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
Output voltage (low):
0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Zone in:
Nominal input voltage: +5 Vdc
Max. input voltage:
+5.5 Vdc
Switching threshold ON: Min. 4.0 Vdc
Switching threshold OFF: Max. 1.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation:
2.5 kV AC
(to ground and other IO)
Connection:
(twisted pair)

Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
Screw-type terminal
Baud rates:
Handshake:
Connection:
115,200 Baud
RTS and CTS
Relay Outputs
RS-485
Continuous current:
Max. make current:
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
5A AC/DC
25A AC/25A DC up to 30V for 4s
30A/230 Vac according to
ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005
Max. breaking current: 5A AC up to 125 Vdc
0.3A DC at 300V
Max. switching voltage: 250 Vac/250 Vdc
Switching capacity:
1250 VA
Contact type:
Form C or normally open contact
Terminals:

30C to +70C
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
at Ann. average:
<75% rel.
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
altitude applies a changed
may be necessary.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 048
EDR-5000
Distribution Protection Relay
ii
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

functions. Logic gates and timers may
be defined and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic
control functions make the EDR-5000
relay ideally suited for main-tie-main
and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes.

are available.
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay
General Description
microprocessor-based relay for feeder
circuits of all voltage levels. It may
be used as a primary protection on
and differential protection. The relay
is most commonly used on medium
voltage switchgear applications.
relay provides complete current,
voltage and frequency protection, and
metering in a single, compact case.
The relay has four current inputs rated
for either 5A or 1A and four voltage
inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are
to be connected to the three-phase
power voltage for voltage protection
and for metering. They can be
connected in wye-ground or open
delta configuration. The fourth voltage
is for independent single-phase
undervoltage/overvoltage protection,
or ground protection for an
ungrounded system.
digital input.

programming, and all settings are
contact input.
relay has mass memory for data
log 300 sequence of event records,
oscillography data.
The EDR-5000 has eight programmable
binary inputs, two normally opened and
eight Form C heavy-duty outputs and
one Form C signal alarm relay. It can
be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or
40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Features
Protection

and 50P[3])
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
Voltage restraint (51P[2]
and 51P[3])
Directional control (all elements)

and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
59A[1], 59A[2])
(59N[1], 59N[2])
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
55D[1], 55D[2])
Forward and reverse watts
(32[1], 32[2])
Forward and reverse VARs
(32V[1], 32V[2])
Sync check (25)
Autoreclosing (79)
protection (87B)
Cold load pickup

relay status.
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-39
Sheet 04 049
Metering
Monitoring

zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Sync values
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU
Trip coil monitor

(up to 300 events)
ii
Control Functions
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Breaker open/close
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic
Programmable LEDs
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
1
2
3
4
5
6
EDR-5000 A 0 B A 1
8
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs,
interlocking
interlocking and large
display
Mounting Options
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
H = IEC-61850
(Goose)
1 = Modbus-RTU +
Modbus-TCP
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground and large display.
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 050
i
ii
1
Sync Check
Ground Voltage Protection
The Eatons EDR-5000 distribution

simplicity. The base relay includes
all the standard current and voltage
protection and metering functions.

the line. It also incorporates breaker
close time, dead bus dead line,
dead bus live line, and live bus live
line features.
In high impedance grounded systems,

ground fault protection is provided by
the detection of zero sequence voltage
(3Vo) in the neutral of the transformer
by an overvoltage element (59N)
connected to the secondary of the
distribution grounding transformer,
or in the secondary of a wye-broken
delta transformer used when the
neutral is not accessible or in delta
system. In the EDR-5000, we can
measure this zero sequence voltage
through the 4th voltage input; the 59N
element has to be desensitized for 3rd
harmonic voltages that can be present
in the system under normal operation.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

and ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are eight independent ground overcurrent elements.
The ground elements X use the
current-sensing input. The ground
elements R uses a calculated 3Io
residual current obtained from the
sum of the three-phase currents. This
either the neutral or ground current in
a three-phase, four-wire system. Each
of the phase and ground overcurrent
elements can be selected to operate
based on fundamental or rms current.
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is compared to a corresponding phase current
to establish the direction of the fault.
This function is selectable to operate in
the forward, reverse or both directions.
negative sequence or residual currents
supervised by zero, negative or positive

Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[2], 51P[3]).
This modification of the pickup
overcurrent level is compared to the
corresponding phase input voltage.
The EDR-5000 uses the simple linear
model below to determine the
effective pickup value.
17
Pickup %
18
100 %
19
25 %
20
21

Reverse Power
are three elements to be configured:
Reverse VARs
Reverse VARs can be used to detect
loss of excitation in synchronous
machines. There are three elements
to be configured: operate in forward
or reverse; or, under or over
VARs conditions.
IEC or thermal curve families, and can
select instantaneous or time delay

relay can be applied on either an A-B-C
or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
The EDR-5000 relay provides six
frequency elements than can be
used to detect under/over frequency,
rate of change, and a vector surge
(decoupling of two systems) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each
set point and adjustable time delay.
Autoreclosing Logic

from either an internal or external trip
The EDR-5000 provides a six shotrecloser scheme. Autoreclosing is

normally used by the utilities in their
distribution and transmission lines,
but it can be used in commercial
and industrial applications with long
overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the
faults that occur on overhead lines
are transient in nature. Tripping of a
circuit breaker normally clears a
transient fault and reclosing of the
circuit breaker restores power back
to the circuit.
Voltage Protection
Maintenance Mode

independent threshold set point
and adjustable time delay.

reliable method to reduce fault
clearing time and lower incident
energy levels at energized panels.
The Maintenance Mode allows the
user to switch to more sensitive
settings via a password protected
soft key, communication or via a
digital input while maintenance work
is being performed at an energized
panel or device. The more sensitive
maintenance personnel and help to
Breaker Failure
CA08104001E
September 2011

Feeder Protection
4.1-41
Sheet 04 051

The EDR-5000 protection relay records
with the relay. An event is classified as
a change of state as detected by the
relay. These include relay pickups,
The events are stored in an FIFO log
in chronological order.
Trip Log
The EDR-5000 protection relay will
in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record
will be date and time stamped to a
1 ms resolution. The trip log record
will include information on the type
of fault, protection elements that
operated, fault location and currents
Waveform Capture
measured signals along with the binary
signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact
closures. The EDR-5000 relay can
record up to 6000 cycles of data. The
number of records is proportional to

the size of each record; the maximum
size per record is 600 cycles. The

The front panel user interface has
a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with
background illumination for wide
angle viewing in all light conditions.
17 programmable LEDs provide quick
Load Profiling/Trending
The EDR-5000 relay automatically
records selected quantities into nonvolatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or
60 minutes, depending on the trending
report setting.
Programmable I/O
two normally open and eight Form C
used for monitoring the trip circuit.

the relay failure alarm function and is
operated in a normally energized
(failsafe) mode. There are eight
user-configurable discrete inputs
that accept a wet contact and can
operate through a wide range of
power. Each input and output is
Programmable Logic
are 24 independent timers that have
delay settings.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 4.1-32. Visual Logic Editor
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 052
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
4.1-43
Sheet 04 053
is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or


Contact your local Eaton representative
for more information on Power Xpert
Software.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 4.1-35. PowerPort-E EDR-5000 Device Planning
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Feeder Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 054
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage:
Digital Inputs
24270 Vdc/48230 Vac
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case

of supply failure:
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
18A peak value for 0.25 ms
12A peak value for 1 ms
Power Consumption
Power
Power
at In = 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
at In = 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Max. input voltage:

Input current:
Reaction time:
Fallback time:
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Terminals:
Zone Interlocking
300 Vdc/259 Vac
<4 mA
<20 ms
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Min. 19.2 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Min. 42.6 Vdc
Max. 21.3 Vdc

Zone out:
0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Zone in:
Max. input voltage:
+5.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation:
2.5 kV AC
Connection:
(twisted pair)

Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
Screw-type terminal
Baud rates:
Handshake:
Connection:
115,200 Baud
RTS and CTS
Relay Outputs
RS-485
Continuous current:
Max. make current:
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
5A AC/DC
0.3A DC at 300V
Switching capacity:
1250 VA
Contact type:
Terminals:
11
12

30C to +70C
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
at Ann. average:
<75% rel.
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
may be necessary.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Motor Protection
4.2-1
Sheet 04 055
General DescriptionOverload Relays
Freedom Overload Relays
C440/XT Electronic
Overload Relay
Features
Reliable, accurate, electronic

motor protection
Easy to select, install and maintain
Compact size
Flexible, intelligent design
Global product offering
available with NEMA, IEC and
DP power control
Size/Range
Broad FLA range (0.331500A)
Selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30)
Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and
DP contactors
Most compact electronic overload in
its class
ii
1
2
3
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay

32A OverloadC306DN3B
General Description
C306 Overload Relays are designed for
use with CE or CN non-reversing and
reversing contactors. Four sizes are
available for overload protection up
to 144A.
Features
Selectable manual or automatic

reset operation
Interchangeable heater packs
adjustable 24%to match motor FLA
and calibrated for use with 1.0 and
1.15 service factor motors. Heater
packs for 32A overload relay will
mount in 75A overload relay
useful in derating applications
such as jogging
Class 10 or 20 heater packs
Load lugs built into relay base
Bimetallic, ambient compensated
operated. Trip free mechanism
Electrically isolated NO-NC
contacts (pull RESET button to test).
(Electrical ratings see tables in
Volume 5Motor Control and
Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 33,
Section 33.1)
Overload trip indication
Shrouded or fingerproof
terminals to reduce possibility
of electrical shock
General Description
Eatons electronic overload relay (EOL)
is the most compact, high-featured,
economical product in its class.
Designed on a global platform, the
new EOL covers the entire power
control spectrum including NEMA,
IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA and
DP versions are offered with the C440
designation while the IEC offering has
the XT designation. The electronic
design provides reliable, accurate
and value driven protection and
communications capabilities in a
single compact device. It is the flexible
choice for any application requiring
easy-to-use, reliable protection.
Eaton has a long history of innovations
and product development in motor
control and protection, including both
traditional NEMA, as well as IEC
control. It was from this experience
that the C440 was developed,
delivering new solutions to meet
todays demands.
C440 is a self-powered electronic overload relay available up to 100A as a
self contained unit. With external CTs,
C440 can protect motor up to 1500 FLA.
Available add-on accessories include
remote reset capability and communication modules with I/O for DeviceNet,
PROFIBUS, and Modbus.

Meets UL 508 single-phasing
requirements
UL listed, CSA certified, NEMA
compliance and CE mark
Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault

(NC) contacts
Test/Trip button
5
6
7
Motor Protection
Thermal overload
Phase loss
Selectable (ON/OFF)
phase imbalance
Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault
User Interface
Large FLA selection dial
Trip status indicator
Operating mode LED
DIP switch selectable trip class,
phase imbalance and ground fault
Selectable Auto/Manual reset
9
10
Feature Options
Remote reset
120 Vac
24 Vac
24 Vdc
Tamper-proof cover
Communications modules
Modbus RTU RS-485
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010)
Ethernet IP (planned)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Reference
20
Refer to Volume 5Motor Control

and Protection, CA08100006E,
Tab 33, Section 33.1 for additional
product information.
CA08104001E
Motor Control
21

Motor Protection
4.2-2
September 2011
Sheet 04 056
General DescriptionOverload Relays
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Benefits
Flexibility
Reliability and Improved Uptime

C440 provides the users with
peace of mind knowing that their
assets are protected with the
highest level of motor protection
and communication capability in
its class
Extends the life of plant assets
with selectable motor protection
features such as trip class, phase
imbalance and ground fault
Protects against unnecessary
downtime by discovering changes
in your system (line/load) with
remote monitoring capabilities
Status LED provides
added assurance that valuable
assets are protected by indicating
the overload operational status
6
7
8
Table 4.2-1. Electronic Overload Education
Motor Protection
Description
Monitoring Capabilities
Individual phase currents rms

Average three-phase current rms
Thermal memory
Fault indication (overload, phase
loss, phase imbalance, ground fault)
Cause
UL
CSA
CE
NEMA
IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1)
RoHS
ATEX directive 94/9/EC
Equipment Group 2, Category 2
Effect if not Protected
C440/XT Protection
A line to ground fault.
A current leakage path to ground. An undetected ground fault can

burn through multiple insulation
windings, ultimately leading to
motor failure, not to mention risk
to equipment or personnel
Fixed protective setting that

takes the starter offline if ground
fault current exceeds 50% of the
FLA dial setting, i.e., if the FLA
dial is set to 12A, the overload
relay will trip if the ground
current exceeds 6A.
Imbalanced
phases (voltage
and current)
Uneven voltage or current

between phases in a threephase system.
When a three-phase load is

powered with a poor quality
line, the voltage per phase
may be imbalanced.
Imbalanced voltage causes large

imbalanced currents and as a
result this can lead to motor
stator windings being overloaded, causing excessive
heating, reduced motor efficiency
and reduced insulation life.

takes the starter offline if a
phase drops below 50% of
the other two phases.
Phase loss
current (singlephasing)
One of the three-phase

voltages is not present.
Multiple causes, loose wire,

improper wiring, grounded
phase, open fuse, etc.
Single-phasing can lead to

unwanted motor vibrations in
addition to the results of imbalanced phases as listed above.

15
17
Ground fault
13
16
IP 20 rated terminal blocks

Available in Eatons industry leading
FlashGard MCCs
Tested to the highest industry
standards such as UL, CSA, CE
and IEC
RoHS compliant
Overload is a condition in
An increase in the load or
which current draw exceeds
torque that is being driven
115% of the full load
by the motor.
amperage rating for
A low voltage supply to the
an inductive motor.
motor causes the current to
go high to maintain the
power needed.
A poor power factor causing
above normal current draw.
11
14
Safety
Available with NEMA, IEC and

DP contactors
Improves return on investment by
reducing inventory carrying costs
with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and
selectable trip class
Design incorporates built-in ground
fault protection thus eliminating the
need for separate CTs and modules
Flexible communication with
optional I/O enables easy integration into plant management
systems for remote monitoring
and control
Available as an open component
and in enclosed control and motor
control center assemblies
Thermal overload
10
12
Definition
Increase in current draw

Thermal trip behavior is defined
leads to heat and insulation
by UL, CSA and IEC standards.
breakdown, which can cause
Trip class is settable from 10A,
system failure.
10, 20, 30
Increase in current can increase
power consumption and waste
valuable energy.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-3
Sheet 04 057
Product SelectionOverload Relays

Modbus Communication Module
DeviceNet Communication Modules
PROFIBUS Communication Modules
The Modbus module combined

with an expansion module and a
communication adapter provide
Modbus communication capability
to the C440 electronic overload relay.
The DeviceNet Communication Module

provides monitoring and control for
the C440 overload relay from a single
DeviceNet node. These modules also
offer convenient I/O in two voltage
options, 24 Vdc and 120 Vac.
The PROFIBUS module combined

with an expansion module and a
communication adapter provide
Modbus communication capability
to the C440 electronic overload relay.
i
ii
1
2
3
PROFIBUS Communication Module

DeviceNet Communication Module
The Modbus communication

module is capable of baud rates
up to 115K
The Modbus address and baud rate
configuration can be easily changed
using the HMi user interface
Modbus address and baud rate are
set via convenient DIP switches;
LEDs are provided to display
Modbus traffic
Configuration with common
Modbus configuration tools
Terminals
Unique locking mechanism
provides for easy removal of
the terminal block with the field
wiring installed
Each terminal is marked for ease
of wiring and troubleshooting
Selectable I/O assemblies
4IN/2OUT
Signal types include
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
Each I/O module is optically
isolated between the field I/O and
the network adapter to protect the
I/O and communication circuits
from possible damage due to
transients and ground loops
Input Module features a userdefinable input debounce, which
limits the effects of transients and
electrical noise
Output Module supports a userdefinable safe state for loss of
communication; hold last state,
ON or OFF

Communication to DeviceNet uses
only one DeviceNet MAC ID
Configuration
DeviceNet MAC ID and Baud
rate are set via convenient DIP
switches with an option to set
from the network
Advanced configuration available
using common DeviceNet tools
Terminals
wiring installed
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
Combined status LED

The PROFIBUS communication
up to 12 Mb
PROFIBUS address is set via
convenient DIP switches; LEDs are
provided to display PROFIBUS status
Intuitive configuration with common
PROFIBUS configuration tools
Terminals
wiring installed

4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.2-4

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 058
i
ii

Table 4.2-2. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A
Description
Specification
45 mm
55 mm
690 Vac (60/50 Hz)
690 Vac (60/50 Hz)
0.331.65A
15A
420A
945A
20100A
XT IEC frames
B, C, D
F, G
Freedom NEMA sizes
00, 0, 1, 2
10A, 10, 20, 30

Selectable
10A, 10, 20, 30

Selectable
1.05 x FLA: does not trip

1.15 x FLA: overload trip
1.05 x FLA: does not trip

1.15 x FLA: overload trip
Phase loss
Fixed threshold 50%
Fixed threshold 50%
Phase imbalance (selectable: enable/disable)
Fixed threshold 50%
Fixed threshold 50%
Ground fault (selectable: enable/disable)
50% of FLA dial setting

>150% = 2 sec
>250% = 1 sec
50% of FLA dial setting

>150% = 2 sec
>250% = 1 sec
Reset
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Electrical Ratings
Operating voltage (three-phase) and frequency
FLA Range
2
3
4
5
Use with Contactors
Trip Class
Motor Protection
Thermal overload setting
6
7
Feature
8
9
Indicators
Trip status
Orange flag
Orange flag
Mode LED
One flash: Overload operating properly

Two flashes: Current is above FLA dial setting
pending trip
One flash: Overload operating properly

Two flashes: Current is above FLA dial setting
pending trip
10
Options
11
12
Remote reset
Yes
Yes
Reset bar
Yes
Yes
Communication expansion module
Yes
Yes
Communication adapter
Yes
Yes
Capacity
13
Load terminals
Terminal capacity
1210 AWG (46 mm2)

86 AWG (616 mm2)
61 AWG (1650 mm2)
14
Tightening torque
2025 lb-in (2.32.8 Nm)

2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
Terminal capacity
2 x (1812) AWG
2 x (1812) AWG
Tightening torque
5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm)
5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm)
Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals
15
16
17
Voltages
Insulation voltage U i (three-phase)
Insulation voltage U i (control)
690 Vac
690 Vac
500 Vac
500 Vac
Rated impulse withstand voltage
6000 Vac
6000 Vac
Overvoltage category/pollution degree
III/3
III/3
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-5
Sheet 04 059
One external remote reset terminal

Motor Protection
C441 Motor Insight Overload

and Monitoring Relay
General Description
Eatons C441 Motor Insight, the
first product in the Intelligent Power
Control Solutions family, is a highly
configurable motor, load and line
protection device with power
monitoring, diagnostics and flexible
communications allowing the
customer to save energy, optimize
their maintenance schedules and
configure greater system protection,
thus reducing overall costs
and downtime.
C441 Motor Insight is available in either
a line-powered or 120 Vac control
powered design, capable of monitoring
voltages up to 660 Vac. Each of these
units is available in a 19A or a
590A FLA model. With external CTs,
Motor Insight can protect motors up
to 540A FLA. Available add-on
accessories include communication
modules for Modbus, DeviceNet
and PROFIBUS, all with I/O options.
For ease-of-use and operator safety,
C441 Motor Insight offers a remote
display that mounts easily with two
30 mm knockouts.

Features
Size/Range
Broad FLA range of 1540A
Selectable trip class (530)
Four operating voltage options
Line-powered from 240 Vac,
480 Vac, 600 Vac
Control-powered from 120 Vac
Motor Control
Two output relays

One B300 Form C fault relay and
one B300 ground fault shunt relay
Other relay configurations are
available, including one Form A
and one Form B SPST (fault
and auxiliary relays), allowing
programmable isolated relay
behavior and unique voltages
CA08104001E
Thermal overload
Jam protection
Current imbalance
Current phase loss
Ground fault
Phase reversal
Load Protection
Undercurrent
Low power (kW)
High power (kW)
Line Protection
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Voltage imbalance
Voltage phase loss
Provides superior protection

of motors and pumps before
catastrophic failure occurs
Increases profitability with greater
process uptime and throughput,
reduced costs per repair, reduced
energy consumption and extended
equipment life
Adjustments to overload configuration can be made at any time
IP20 rated terminal blocks

Terminal blocks are set back
from the display to reduce
operator shock hazard
Remote display (optional) does not
require that the operator open the
panel to configure the device
Currentaverage and phase rms

Voltageaverage and phase rms
Powermotor kW
Power factor
Frequency
Thermal capacity
Run hours
Current imbalance %
Voltage imbalance %
Motor starts
Motor run hours
Offered in a variety of
configurations
External snap-on modules
provide support for multiple
communications protocols
Advanced power, voltage and
current monitoring capabilities
Communications modules and
remote display can be used
simultaneously
Highly configurable fault and reset
characteristics for numerous
applications
Fully programmable isolated fault
and auxiliary relays
Options
Ease of Use
Type 1, 12 remote display

Type 3R remote display kit
Communication modules
Modbus
Modbus with I/O
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
Modbus TCP with I/O (contact
product line)
Ethernet IP (contact product line)
Benefits
Advanced diagnostics allows for

quick and accurate identification
of the root source of a motor,
pump or power quality fault;
reducing trouble-shooting time and
the loss of productivity, reducing
repeat faults due to misdiagnosis,
and increasing process output
and profitability
1
2
3
4
5
Flexibility
ii
Safety
Bright LED display with easy-tounderstand setting and references

Powered from line voltage or
120 Vac control power
Remote display powered from
base unit
Full word descriptions and units on
user interface
cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508

UL 1053 applicable sections for
ground fault detection
CSA certified (Class 3211-02)
CE
NEMA
IEC EN 60947-4-1
RoHS
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Motor Protection
4.2-6
September 2011
Sheet 04 060
i
ii
Table 4.2-3. Advanced Overload Education

Description
Definition
Source
Result
C441 Motor Insight

Protection
Thermal overload
Overload is a condition in which

current draw to a motor exceeds
115% of the full load amperage
rating over a period of time for
an inductive motor.
An increase in the load or

torque that is being driven by
the motor.
A low voltage supply to the
motor would cause the current
to go high to maintain the
power needed.
A poor power factor would
cause above normal current
draw.
Increase in current draw.

Current leads to heat and
insulation breakdown, which
can cause system failure.
Additionally, an increase in
current can increase power
consumption and waste
valuable energy.
Thermal trip behavior is defined

by UL, CSA and IEC standards.
Trip class is settable from
530 by 1
Provides power factor monitoring and low voltage protection
features.
Jam
Jam is similar to thermal

overload in that it is a current
draw on the motor above
normal operating conditions.
Mechanical stall, interference,

jam or seizure of the motor or
motor load.
The motor attempts to drive the

load, which has more resistive
force due to the mechanical
interference. In order to drive
the load, the motor draws an
abnormal amount of current,
which can lead to insulation
breakdown and system failure.
Provides a configurable Jam

setting that is active during
motor run state to avoid
nuisance trips.
Trip Threshold 150400%
of FLA.
Trip Delay 120 seconds.
Ground fault
A line to ground fault.
A current leakage path

to ground.
An undetected ground fault

can burn through multiple
insulation windings, ultimately
leading to motor failure.
Motor Insight has ground fault

protection capability down to
0.15 amps estimated from the
existing three-phase CTs using
the residual current method.
That is, the three-phase current
signals should sum to zero
unless a ground fault (GF)
condition is present. In the case
of a GF, Motor Insight can alarm,
trip the starter, or trip an alternative relay that can be used to
shunt trip a breaker or light up a
warning light. GF current can
also be monitored in real-time
through the advanced monitoring capabilities.
Note: GF settable thresholds
vary with motor FLA. 0.15A may
not be available in all cases.
Imbalanced phases Uneven voltage or currents

(voltage and current) between phases in a threephase system.
When a three-phase load is

powered with a poor quality
line, the voltage per phase may
be imbalanced.
Imbalanced voltage causes

large imbalanced currents and
as a result this can lead to motor
stator windings being overloaded, causing excessive heating, reduced motor efficiency
and reduced insulation life.
Provides two protection settings

that address this problem. The
user can choose to set current
imbalance thresholds or voltage
imbalance thresholds, each
of which can trip the starter.
Additionally, both of these may
be monitored through Motor
Insights advanced monitoring
capabilities, allowing the
customer to notice in real-time
when and where a condition
is present.
Phase losscurrent
(single-phasing)
One of the three-phase current

is not present.
Multiple causes, loose wire,

improper wiring, grounded
phase, open fuse, etc.
Single-phasing can lead to

unwanted motor vibrations in
addition to the results of imbalanced phases as listed above.

Phase rotation
(phase-reversal)
Improper wiring, leading to

phases being connected to the
motor improperly.
A miswired motor. Inadvertent

phase-reversal by the utility.
Phase-reversal can cause

unwanted directional rotation of
a motor. In the event that the
load attached to the motor can
only be driven in one direction,
the result could be significant
mechanical failure and/or injury
to an operator.
Configurable phase protection,

allowing the user to define the
phase sequencing intended for
that application. If no phase
sequence is required, the user
has the ability to disable this
feature.
Frequency variance
When line frequency

is inconsistent.
Malfunctioning alternator speed

regulator, or poor line quality
caused by an overload of a
supply powered by individual
sources.
Variations in frequency can

cause increases in losses,
decreasing the efficiency of
the motor. In addition, this can
result in interference with
synchronous devices.
Advanced monitoring
capabilities allow the user to
monitor frequency in real-time.
Motor Protection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-7
Sheet 04 061

Table 4.2-3. Advanced Overload Education (Continued)
Description
Definition
Source
Result
C441 Motor Insight

Protection
If undercurrent goes
undetected, a mechanical
failure can and has occurred.
In the case of a pump, running
a pump dry or running a pump
in a dead-headed condition
can cause excessive heating,
damaging expensive seals
and breaking down desired
fluid properties.
Motor Insight has two protection settings to detect this:

undercurrent and low power.
Low power is a more consistent
way of ensuring detection as
power is linear with motor load,
where as current is not. An
unloaded motor may draw 50%
of its rated current, but the
power draw will be less than
10% of rated power due to a low
power factor.
The motor load is drawing more This is typical of batch processpower than it should at normal ing applications where several
operating conditions.
ingredients flow into a mixer.
When a substances consistency
changes and viscosity increases
from what is expected, the
motor may use more power to
blend the mixture. Out-of-tolerance conditions can be detected
using the High Power and Low
Power settings.
If a high-power fault goes

undetected, the result may
be a batch of material that
does not meet specification.
Monitors the three-phase real

power. If the real power value
is estimated above the set
threshold for the set length
of time, a fault is detected and
the overload will trip the starter.
Additionally, power can be
monitored in real-time.
When the line voltage to the

motor exceeds the specified
rating.
An overvoltage condition leads

to a lower than rated current
draw and a poor power factor.
A trip limit of 110% of rated
voltage is recommended.
Overvoltage can also lead to
exceeding insulation ratings.
Monitors the maximum rms

value of the three-phase
voltages. If the rms value rises
above the set threshold for
the set length of time, a fault
is detected and the overload
can trip the starter or send
and display an alarm of the
condition. All line-related faults
have an alarm-no-trip mode.
An undervoltage condition
leads to excessive current draw.
This increases the heating of
the motor windings and can
shorten insulation life. A trip
limit set to 90% of rated voltage
is recommended.
Monitors the minimum rms

value of the three-phase
voltages. If the rms value
drops below the set threshold
for the set length of time, a fault
is detected and the overload
can trip the starter or send
and display an alarm of the
condition. All line-related faults
have an alarm-no-trip mode.
Multiple loads starting

simultaneously can cause
sags affecting the operation
of devices that may prevent
successful startup.
If power is lost to a motor
driving a pump, it may be
necessary to delay a restart to
allow the pump to come to a
complete stop to prevent starting a motor during backspin.
Configurable to delay closing

the fault relay on power-up.
For each Motor Insight controlling a motor, a different setting
can be programmed, helping to
maintain the integrity of your
line power.
Load Protection
Undercurrent or
low power
High power
Average rms current provided

Undercurrent is usually
to the motor falls below normal associated with a portion of
the users load disappearing.
Examples of this would be a
broken belt, a dry-pump (low
suction head) or a dead-headed
centrifugal pump.
Undervoltage
Power-up delay
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Line Protection
Overvoltage
When the line voltage to the

motor is below the specified
rating.
Allows for starting motors and

loads in a deliberate fashion.
Poor line quality.
Poor line quality.
When there is a power failure,

or power cycle, multiple loads
come online simultaneously.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
4.2-8
September 2011
Sheet 04 062
Accessories
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
13
14
15
16
17
I/O
Catalog
Number
None
C441M
Modbus Communication Module 4IN/2OUT
120 Vac
C441N
Modbus Communication Module 4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc
C441P
The Modbus Communication Module

with I/O provides communication,
monitoring and control for the
C441 Motor Insight overload relay.
12
Description
The C441 Motor Insight Modbus

Communication Module is a sidemounted device providing Modbus
communication capability to the
11
Table 4.2-4. Modbus Communication Module
The Modbus communication

up to 115K
The Modbus address and baud
rate configuration can be easily
changed using the Motor Insight
user interface (C441M only)
Modbus address and baud rate
are set via convenient DIP switches
(C441N and C441P); LEDs are
provided to display Modbus traffic
Configuration with common
Modbus configuration tools
Terminals
wiring installed
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
Modbus Module
Modbus with I/O Module
DeviceNet Communication Modules

4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
Combined status LED
The DeviceNet Communication

Module provides monitoring and
control for the Motor Insight overload
relay from a single DeviceNet node.
These modules also offer convenient
I/O in two voltage options, 24 Vdc and
120 Vac.

Communication to DeviceNet uses
only one DeviceNet MAC ID
Configuration
DeviceNet MAC ID and Baud
rate are set via convenient DIP
switches with an option to set
from the network
Advanced configuration available
using common DeviceNet tools
Terminals
wiring installed
Table 4.2-5. DeviceNet Modules
18
Description
I/O
Catalog
Number
120 Vac
C441K
24 Vdc
C441L
19
20
21
DeviceNet Module
CA08104001E
September 2011

Motor Protection
4.2-9
Sheet 04 063

PROFIBUS Communication Module
The C441 Motor Insight PROFIBUS
Communication Module is a sidemounted device providing PROFIBUS
communication capability to the
Table 4.2-6. PROFIBUS Communication Module

Description
I/O
Catalog
Number
PROFIBUS Communication Module 4IN/2OUT
120 Vac
C441S
PROFIBUS Communication Module 4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc
C441Q
i
ii
1
The PROFIBUS Communication

Module with I/O provides communication, monitoring and control for the
The PROFIBUS communication

up to 12 Mb
PROFIBUS address is set via
convenient DIP switches (C441Q
and C441S); LEDs are provided to
display PROFIBUS status
Intuitive configuration with common
PROFIBUS configuration tools
Terminals
wiring installed
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
PROFIBUS with I/O

Module
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 064
ii
3.90
(99.1)
0.20
(5.1)
0.30
(7.6)
1
2
4.00
(101.6)
0.40
(10.2)
0.20
(5.1)
3.60
(91.4)
2.30
(58.4)
0.20
(5.1)
2.70
(68.6)
3.10
(78.7)
4
3.30
(83.8)
5
6
Figure 4.2-1. C441 Motor Insight Conversion Plate
7
8
(4) Open Slots

0.22 x 0.34 (5.6 x 8.6)
1.09
(27.7) 2.23
(56.6)
1.67
(42.4)
9
2.75
(69.9)
10
3.53
(89.7)
3.00
(76.2)
11
12
13
14
15
16
Label
(2) Holes
0.20 Dia.
X1
0.44
(11.2)
3.65
(92.7)
H1 1.56 Dia.
1.88
(47.8)
0.31
(7.9)
2.25
(57.8)
Quantity
Three per Assembly
Figure 4.2-2. Applicable for C441CTKIT150, C441CTKIT300

and C441CTKIT600
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Motor Protection
4.2-11
Sheet 04 065
General DescriptionMP-3000
MP-3000
Motor Protection Relay
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay
General Description
Eatons MP-3000 motor protection
relay is a multi-functional microprocessor-based protective relay for the
protection of any size motor at all
voltage levels. It is most commonly
applied on medium voltage starters
and on critical or larger motors. The
MP-3000 relay is a current only device
that provides complete and reliable
motor protection, monitoring and
starting control functions.
The MP-3000 motor protection relay
is available in either a fixed mount,
semi-flush case or in a semi-flush quickrelease drawout case. Both housings
are compact and fit a standard IQ cutout.
The optional quick-release drawout
case features two-stage contact
disconnection and self-shorting CT
circuit terminals. A spare self-shorting
terminal pair is available for use as
relay removal alarm or for continuous
motor operation (non-failsafe mode)
on relay removal. The optional
communication module is externally
mounted on the fixed mount case
and internally mounted in the
drawout case.
has three phase and one ground current
inputs. Both a 5A and 1A version are
available. The ground protection and
metering functions can be used with
either a zero sequence ground CT or
from the residual connection of the

phase CTs. The zero sequence ground
CT provides greater ground fault
sensitivity than the residual connection.
The relay is programmable for 60 Hz
or 50 Hz operation.
Features

has two discrete inputs, four Form C
(1NO and 1NC) contacts and one
4 to 20 mA analog output. The relay
provides maximum user flexibility to
configure the I/O. All inputs and outputs (except for the trip output) are
user-programmable. In addition, the
relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of
protection on, program mode, monitor
mode, view setting mode, history
mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary
1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page
in the program mode provides display
indication of the discrete input states
and testing of the output relays, target
LEDs and analog circuit.
A user-friendly operator interface and

display provides quick access to the
settings, monitored values, motor
history and operational logs. Large
LED alphanumeric character display
provides easy viewing from any angle
in any light. Simple keypad operation
provides quick and easy navigation
through all settings and stored data.
The program mode and emergency
override buttons are access restricted
via a latched cover which can be sealed
if required. An integrated help function
provides an online description display of
functions, abbreviations and operations.
Optimum Motor Protection

has been designed for maximum
motor operation and protection. It
permits running the motor as close
to its design limits while protecting
it against excessive heating and
damaging overload conditions. The
MP-3000 field proven protection
algorithms were developed based
on motor designs and operating
parameters for optimum operation
and protection while minimizing
nuisance tripping.
uses a protection algorithm and
measurement technique based
on proven positive and negative
(unbalance) sequence current
sampling and true rms calculations.
General
Self diagnostics
User-friendly interface
Large LED display
Built-in help program
Built-in test mode
LED mode and target indication
Remote communications
Programmable discrete inputs
Programmable outputs
Protection
ii
1
2
3
4
I2t
overload protection (49/51)

Locked rotor (49S/51)
Ultimate trip current (51)
Negative sequence phase
unbalance (46)
Instantaneous overcurrent (50)
Ground fault protection (50G)
RTD trip and alarm with URTD
module (49/38)
Underload trip (37)
Starts per time (66)
Jam or stall (51R)
Auto or manual reset (86)
Failsafe or non-failsafe trip modes
Alarming
Ground fault
overload
Jam/stall
Underload
Phase unbalance
5
6
7
8
9
10
I2t
Control
Transition for reduced voltage starts:

Transition on current level
Transition on time
Transition on current level or time
and time
Incomplete sequence monitoring
Permits number of cold starts
Limits number of starts per time
Time between starts
Anti-backspin time delay
Mechanical load shedding
Zero speed switch for long
acceleration motors
Motor stop input for synchronous
motor applications
Remote trip input
Differential trip input
Emergency override
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 066
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
RTD temperatures:
Individual winding
Motor bearing
Load
Auxiliary temperatures
Motor conditions:
% of I2t thermal bucket
Time before start
Remaining starts allowed
Oldest start time
History
17
Motor currents:
Average current (I ave)
Individual phase and ground
current in primary amperes
% of full load
% phase unbalance
Motor history:
Operational counter
Run time
Highest starting and running
currents
Highest % phase unbalance
Maximum winding, bearing and
load RTD temperatures
Number of emergency overrides
Trip history (number of trips):
Ground faults
Overloads
Instantaneous overcurrent
JAM
Underload
Phase unbalance
RTDs
Phase reversal
Incomplete sequence
Remote, differential
Communication
Starts exceeded
Time between starts
Transition
Total history (record which cannot

be reset):
Total trips
Run time
Operations count
Logging
Log book (chronological list of
last 100 events with date and
time stamp)
Event log (detailed information of
last 20 trips and alarms with date
and time stamp)
Start log (data on most recent four
starts with date and time stamp)
User Interface
has a user-friendly interface that
makes it easy to retrieve important
information or make setting changes.
LEDs provide visual indication of
display and keypad mode. The pushbuttons are clearly labeled and quickly
access the desired information.
provides protection against motor
overloads, short circuits and abnormal
I2t Overload
Motor overloads are typically limited
by the rotor thermal capabilities but
the measuring quantities are from the
stator. This requires accurate measurements and good motor thermal
models to provide reliable protection.
uses a field proven measurement and
motor thermal protection model. The
relay samples the current waveforms
36 times per cycle providing accurate
measurements of the positive and
negative sequence currents. The
negative sequence component of
current causes greater heating effect
on the rotor and has a greater impact
on the thermal model in the relay.
This same algorithm has been used
to protect thousands of motors
since 1984.

overload protection is easy to set and
apply. Simply input motor nameplate
information and CT ratios and the
characteristic is automatically set.
When using the MP-3000 motor
protection relay, it is recommended
that the ratio of CT primary rating
to the motor full load amperes
(CT Pri/Motor FLA) is selected to
fall between 0.25 and 1.5. The
thermal model adapts its tripping
characteristics if RTDs are connected.
Instantaneous Overcurrent
provides an instantaneous phase
overcurrent function to trip the motor
for high fault current levels. This
function can be disabled and has an
adjustable time delay on starting to
avoid nuisance tripping on inrush.
Phase Unbalance Protection

Motor supply circuits are often fed
through fuses and can be run with a
single-phase fuse blown. The motor
may still see three-phase voltage but
will only have current on two phases,
referred to as single-phasing the
motor. The MP-3000 motor protection
relay measures the current unbalance
and can be used to alarm or trip the
motor before damage occurs. Pickup,
start and run timers and a separate
alarm setting are provided.

A separate circuit measures
ground fault current. A ground CT
is recommended for more sensitive
protection against winding fault
ground. The relay ground circuit
can be connected residually from
the three-phase CTs. The ground fault
protection has pickup and time delay
set points or can be disabled.
Alarms history (number of alarms):

Ground faults
Overloads
JAM
Underload
Phase unbalance
RTDs
Starts exceeded
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-13
Sheet 04 067
JAM Protection
Anti-Backspin
Remote/Differential Trip
The user-selectable JAM function

protects motors that are running
against a sudden mechanical jam
or stall condition. The common
application is on motors used on
crushers, chippers or conveyors. It
detects an increase of motor current
to a level above full load. Pickup, start
and run timers and a separate alarm
setting are provided.
For certain applications, for example,

pumping fluid up a pipe, the motor
may be driven backward for a period
of time after it stops. The MP-3000
relay provides an anti-backspin timer
to prevent starting the motor while it
is spinning in the reverse direction.
The timer begins counting from the
moment a stop is declared by the relay.
One of the binary inputs can be

programmed to accept a contact input
from a separate differential relay, such
as the MD-3000 or other device to trip
the motor. This provides local and
remote target information and uses
the trip contacts of the MP-3000 motor
protection relay. It will also record and
log the motor information at the time
of the trip.
MP-3000
URT
Motor
49/51 Overload I2T
49S/51 Locked Rotor
51R Jam/Stall
37 Loss of Load/
Underload
46 Phase Loss/
Unbalance
50 Phase Inst. OC
50G Ground Inst. OC
66 Starts per time
period
11 RTDs
Fiber Optic Link
Figure 4.2-3. MP-3000

Motor Protection Relay Functions
Underload Protection
Start Control Timers

Motors typically have limits to the
number of cold starts, hot starts, starts
per time period and time between
starts that are permitted without
damage. The MP-3000 motor protection relay incorporates these timers
to prevent starting the motor beyond
its capabilities.
Emergency Override
The user-selectable underload

function is used to detect the loss
of load on the motor. Coupling failure
is a common cause for loss of load.
Pickup, start and run timers and a
separate alarm setting are provided.

has a user-programmable feature that
will let the operator reset the start
control timers and thermal overload
bucket. This function is intended for
use in emergency conditions only and
may result in motor damage or failure.
Reduced Voltage Starting
Long Acceleration Motors
Eatons MP-3000 motor protection relay

provides a transition and incomplete
sequence function for reduced voltage
starting. The user can select to transition
based on the current level or on time.
Large motors with high inertia loads

may experience starting currents that
exceed the locked rotor current and
time. The MP-3000 motor protection
relay has logic and provisions for a
zero speed switch input to differentiate
between a stall and start condition. If
the motor is spinning then the relay
will not trip on the normal locked rotor
time allowing the motor to start.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Load Shedding
provides a mechanical load shedding
feature that can be used to control an
upstream process. The load shedding
function closes a contact on an overload condition to control an upstream
process from adding more load until
the overload condition is gone.
6
Motor Starting Profile Time/Current Chart
Motor Starting Profile

The MP-3000 relay records the average
current of the motor for the last two
starts. This information is available
over the communications port. The
motor current can then be plotted
and compared to the motor overload
protection curve. Available in
PowerPort or the PowerNet Event
Viewer Client.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 068
Product DescriptionMP-3000
Product Selection
Table 4.2-7. MP-3000
Description
Catalog
Number
MP-3000 drawout, 5A with RS-232

MP-3000 drawout, INCOM, 5A with RS-232
MP-3000 drawout, Modbus, 5A with RS-232
MP3011
MP3012
MP3013
MP-3000 drawout, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232

MP3014
MP3111
MP3112

MP-3000 fixed case, 5A with RS-232
MP3113
MP3114
MP3010
MP-3000 fixed case, INCOM, 5A with RS-232

MP-3000 fixed case, Modbus, 5A with RS-232
MP-3000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232
MP3010-INCOM
MP3010MODBUS
MP3010DEVICEN

MP3110
MP3110-INCOM
MP3110MODBUS

MP-3000 fixed case, INCOM, 5A with RS-232, URTD
MP-3000 fixed case, Modbus, 5A with RS-232, URTD
MP3110DEVICEN
MP3010VPI
MP3010VPM
MP-3000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232, URTD

MP3010VPD
MP3110VPI
MP3110VPM
MP3110VPD
ii
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
L3
L3
L2
L2
L1
L1
CTs
T
Main
Fuse
GFCT
C
B
A
T2
T1
Ground
12
T3
Gnd.
To Motor
or Load Device
Under Control
X1 X2
Primary
Fuses
13
Non-Current
Carrying Ground
CPT
Secondary
Fuses
14
5
Ground
H
1
C
15
STAR
T T
16
STOP
ac Supply
To MP-3000
Additional
Control
2
A
H
2
B
G
1
H
2
C
G
2
Trip Contacts
12
11
MP-3000
Back View
with Jumper
Connection
17
Alarm Contacts
18
18
19
Auxiliary Trip Contacts

15
19
Alarm
Aux. Trip
16
Figure 4.2-4. MP-3000 Wiring
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-15
Sheet 04 069
Technical DataMP-3000
L3
L3
See Below for

Residual Ground Connection
GFCT
T3
CTs
Main
Fuse
L2
T2
L1
T1
Ground
Ground
X1
To Motor
or
Load Device
Under Control
Non-current
Carrying Ground
STOP
60
Secondary
Fuses
START
42
nd
Additional
Control
44
15 16
19
Trip Contacts
56
54
50
Contacts
29
30
52
54
56
51
48
Alarm
53
Auxiliary Trip Contacts
46
48
Alarm Contacts
CPT
ac Supply
to MP-3000
ii
X2
Primary
Fuses
17
28
58
29 30
60
6
8
9
Aux. Trip
10
46
11
12
Residual Ground Connection

C
13
B
14
A
15
Ground
16
21 23 25
22
24
26
27
28
17
Back View of Drawout
18
Figure 4.2-5. MP-3000 Drawout Typical CT Circuits and Motor Control Wiring
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 070
i
ii

Table 4.2-8. MP-3000 Specifications
Control Power
Nominal rating:
1
2
3
4
Frequency:
Power use:
Operating
range:
Ride through
time:
5
6
Phase burden:
Ground burden:
Saturation:
12
13
14
15
16
Start Control Functions
Full load
amperes:
Locked rotor
current:
Locked rotor
time:
Ultimate trip
current:
Phase CT ratio:
Ground CT ratio:
Timing accuracy:
Starts per time:

Time for starts
per time:
Time between
starts:
Number of
cold starts:
Motor transition
current:
Time for transition:
Inc. sequence
timer:
Long acceleration
timer:
Anti-backspin
timer:
Number of
inputs:
Rating:
1A or 5A
2 x In continuous
VA at In
VA at In
x In
1% of In (5%100%)
1.5% of In (0%55%)
Ground fault (GF):

GF Start and run
time delay:
Timer accuracy:
Instantaneous O.C.:
IOC start time
delay:
Timer accuracy:
JAM trip:
Underload trip:
Phase unbalance
trip:
2 Programmable
1.2 VA at 120 Vac
Maximum OFF = 36 Vac
Minimum ON = 86 Vac
300% to 1200% FLA

1 to 120 seconds
85% to
150% FLA
10 to 4000: In
10 to 4000: In
2.5% or 30 ms
For I > 1.1x U.T.C.
Off, 2% to 55% CT ratio

2 to 60 cycles
20 ms
Off, 300% to 1600% FLA
Clock
0 to 60 cycles
20 ms
Off, 100% to 1200% FLA
Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Communications
Off, 4% to 40%
Ineg/Ipos
0 to 1200 seconds
JAM, Underload and Phase Unbalance

Time Delay
Start delay timers:
Run delay timers:
Timer accuracy:
0 to 120 seconds
0 to 240 seconds
0.5% +100 ms
Output Contacts
Number of
outputs:
Momentary:
(Resistive)
Continuous:
Alarm Setting Range

4 Form C, Programmable
Make 30A AC/DC
for 0.25 second
Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc
5A at 120/240 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc
Analog Output
Rating:
Maximum load:
Accuracy:
Ground fault:
Overload I2t:
JAM:
Underload:
Phase unbalance:
Run delay timers:
4 to 20 mA
Programmable
1K ohm
1%
Off, 2% to 75%
CT ratio
Off, 60% to 99% I2t
Off, 100% to 1200%
FLA
Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Off, 4% to 40%
Ineg/Ipos
0 to 240 seconds
Accuracy:
Log book:
Log event:
Log start:
Start profile:
100 events
20 trips and alarms
Last 4 starts
Last start
(communication only)
Motor, trips, alarms and
permanent records
Off, 1 to 10 starts
Off, 1 to 240 minutes
1 to 5 starts
10% to 300% FLA
0 to 1200 seconds
Off, 1 to 240 seconds
1 minute/month at 25C
DPONI
Type:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
Functions:
5-wire
500K, 250K, 125K, Auto
DeviceNet
Read/write set points
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
View starting profile
IPONI
Type:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
Functions:
2-wire, FSK
1200 or 9600 baud
INCOM
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
MPONI
Type:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
Functions:
5-wire, 485
1200 or 9600 baud
Modbus RTU
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
Logging
History records:
17
10 to 3000A
Trip Setting Range
Discrete Inputs
10
11
30 cycles at
nominal Vac
Metering Accuracy
Phase current:
Ground current:
120 Vac: 90132 Vac

240 Vac: 180264 Vac
Current Inputs
Nominal (In):
CT rating:
120 Vac or 240 Vac

(+10%, 25%)
50 or 60 Hz
20 VA maximum
URTD: 6 VA maximum
IPONI: 1 VA maximum
Motor Overload Protection (I2t)
Operating:
Storage:
Humidity:
Temperature: 20C to +60C

0% to 95% (noncondensing)
18
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
10.25 (260.4)
6.72 (170.7)
3.70 (94.0)
7 lbs (3 kg)
19
UL Recognized
20
File Number E154862

UL 1053
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2
CSA
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Motor Protection
4.2-17
Sheet 04 071

Relay with Voltage Inputs
MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay
General Description
Eatons MP-4000 motor protection
relay is a multi-functional microprocessor-based protective relay for
the protection of any size motor at all
applied on medium voltage starters
and on critical or larger motors. The
MP-4000 relay provides complete and
reliable motor protection, monitoring
and starting control functions.
is available in either a fixed mount,
semi-flush case or in a semi-flush
quick-release drawout case.
The optional quick-release drawout
case features two-stage contact
disconnection and self-shorting CT
circuit terminals. A spare self-shorting
terminal pair is available for use as
relay removal alarm or for continuous
motor operation (non-failsafe mode)
on relay removal. The optional
communication module is externally
mounted on the fixed mount case
and internally mounted in the
drawout case.
has three phase and one ground
current inputs. The MP-4000 also has
three voltage inputs. Both a 5A and
1A version are available. The ground
protection and metering functions can
be used with either a zero sequence
ground CT or from the residual
connection of the phase CTs. The
zero sequence ground CT provides
greater ground fault sensitivity than
the residual connection. The relay
is programmable for 60 Hz or
50 Hz operation.
CA08104001E

has two discrete inputs, four Form C
(1NO and 1NC) contacts and one 4 to
20 mA analog output. The relay
provides maximum user flexibility
to configure the I/O. All inputs and
outputs (except for the trip output) are
user-programmable. In addition, the
relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of
protection on, program mode, monitor
mode, view setting mode, history
mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary
1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page
in the program mode provides display
indication of the discrete input states
and testing of the output relays,
target LEDs and analog circuit.
A user-friendly operator interface and
display provides quick access to the
settings, monitored values, motor
history and operational logs. Large
LED alphanumeric character display
provides easy viewing from any angle
in any light. Simple keypad operation
provides quick and easy navigation
through all settings and stored data.
The program mode and emergency
override buttons are access restricted
via a latched cover which can be
sealed if required. An integrated
help function provides an online
description display of functions,
abbreviations and operations.
Features
Self diagnostics
User-friendly interface
Large LED display
Built-in help program
Built-in test mode
LED mode and target indication
Remote communications
Programmable discrete inputs
Programmable outputs
Protection
ii
1
2
3
4
I2t
Optimum Motor Protection

has been designed for maximum
permits running the motor as close
to its design limits while protecting
it against excessive heating and
MP-4000 field proven protection
nuisance tripping.
overload protection (49/51)

Locked rotor (49S/51)
Ultimate trip current (51)
Undervoltage (27)
Overvoltage (59)
Under power (32)
Negative sequence phase
unbalance (46)
Negative sequence voltage
unbalance (47)
Ground fault protection (50G)
RTD trip and alarm with URTD
module (49/38)
Underload trip (37)
Power factor (55)
Starts per time (66)
Jam or stall (51R)
Auto or manual reset (86)
Failsafe or non-failsafe trip modes
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Alarming
Ground fault
overload
Jam/stall
Underload
Phase unbalance
Voltage unbalance
I2t
The MP-4000 motor protection

relay uses a protection algorithm
and measurement technique based
(unbalance) sequence current
sampling and true rms calculations.
General
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 072
Control
ii
1
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
Transition for reduced voltage starts:

Transition on time
Transition on current level or time
and time
Incomplete sequence monitoring
Permits number of cold starts
Limits number of starts per time
Time between starts
acceleration motors
Motor stop input for synchronous
motor applications
Remote trip input
Emergency override
Metering
RTD temperatures:
Individual winding
Motor bearing
Load
Auxiliary temperatures
Motor conditions:
% of I2t thermal bucket
Time before start
Remaining starts allowed
Oldest start time
History
Motor history:
Operational counter
Run time
currents
Highest % current unbalance
Highest % voltage unbalance
voltages
Maximum winding, bearing and
load RTD temperatures
Number of emergency overrides
Trip history (number of trips):

Ground faults
Overloads
Instantaneous overcurrent
JAM
Underload
Phase unbalance
Voltage unbalance
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Under power
Power factor
RTDs
Phase reversal
Incomplete sequence
Remote, differential
Communication
Starts exceeded
Time between starts
Transition
Alarms history (number of alarms):

Ground faults
Overloads
JAM
Underload
Current unbalance
Voltage unbalance
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Under power
Power factor
RTDs
Starts exceeded
Total history (record which cannot

be reset):
Total trips
Run time
Operations count
Logging
Log book (chronological list of
last 100 events with date and
time stamp)
Event log (detailed information of
last 20 trips and alarms with date
and time stamp)
Start log (data on most recent four
starts with date and time stamp)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Motor Protection
4.2-19
Sheet 04 073
Product SelectionMP-4000
User Interface
Product Selection

has a user-friendly interface that
makes it easy to retrieve important
information or make setting changes.
LEDs provide visual indication of
display and keypad mode. The pushbuttons are clearly labeled and quickly
access the desired information.
Table 4.2-9. MP-4000 Ordering Information
provides protection against motor
overloads, short circuits and abnormal
I2t Overload
Motor overloads are typically limited
by the rotor thermal capabilities
but the measuring quantities are
from the stator. This requires
accurate measurements and good
motor thermal models to provide
reliable protection.
uses a field-proven measurement and
motor thermal protection model. The
relay samples the current waveforms
36 times per cycle providing accurate
measurements of the positive and
negative sequence currents. The
negative sequence component of
current causes greater heating effect
This same algorithm has been used
to protect thousands of motors
since 1984.
Description
Catalog
Number

MP4011
MP4012
MP4013

MP4014
MP4111
MP4112

MP4113
MP4114
MP4010

MP4010INCOM
MP4010MODBUS
MP4010DEVICEN

MP4110
MP4110INCOM
MP4110MODBUS

MP4110DEVICEN
MP4010VPI
MP4010VPM

MP4010VPD
MP4110VPI
MP4110VPM
MP4110VPD
ii
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

overload protection is easy to set and
apply. Simply input motor nameplate
information and CT ratios and the
characteristic is automatically set.
12
When using the MP-4000 motor

protection relay, it is recommended
that the ratio of CT primary rating
to the motor full load amperes
(CT Pri/Motor FLA) is selected to fall
between 0.25 and 1.5. The thermal
model adapts its tripping characteristics if RTDs are connected.
14
13
15
16
17

provides an instantaneous phase overcurrent function to trip the motor for
high fault current levels. This function
can be disabled and has an adjustable
time delay on starting to avoid
nuisance tripping on inrush.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 074

Current Unbalance Protection
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

single-phase fuse blown. The motor
may still see three-phase voltage but
will only have current on two phases,
referred to as single-phasing the
motor. The MP-4000 motor protection
relay measures the current unbalance
and can be used to alarm or trip the
motor before damage occurs. Pickup,
start and run timers and a separate
alarm setting are provided.
Voltage Unbalance Protection

The MP-4000 will calculate negative
sequence voltage from three-phase
voltages. The presence of negative
sequence voltage identifies either
a phase unbalance or reverse
phase rotation condition. The
MP-4000 provides both alarm and
trip functionality.
8
9
10
A separate circuit measures ground

fault current. A ground CT is recommended for more sensitive protection
against winding fault ground. The
relay ground circuit can be connected
residually from the three-phase CTs.
The ground fault protection has
pickup and time delay set points or
can be disabled.
11
12
The MP-4000 provides over/under

protection on the Main VT inputs.
Each element has an independent
threshold and time delay.
13
Voltage Protection
14
15
16
The MP-4000 voltage protection can

be used to generate a trip or alarm if
the voltage exceeds (overvoltage 59)
a specified threshold for a specific
time delay or drops below (undervoltage 27) a specified threshold for a
specified time delay. Voltage elements
can act on one, two or three phases.
Power Factor
17
18
19
The power factor function in the

MP-4000 can be used for many
applications. For a synchronous motor,
it can be used to indicate field loss.
The power factor protection can
generate a trip or alarm when
the power factor falls between
specified thresholds.
JAM Protection
Emergency Override
The user-selectable JAM function

against a sudden mechanical jam or
stall condition. The common application is on motors used on crushers,
chippers or conveyors. It detects an
increase of motor current to a level
above full load. Pickup, start and run
timers and a separate alarm setting
are provided.

control timers and thermal overload
use in emergency conditions only and
may result in motor damage or failure.
Pickup, start and run timers and a
separate alarm setting are provided.

Eatons MP-4000 motor protection relay
starting. The user can select to transition
based on the current level or on time.
Anti-Backspin
For certain applications, for example,
pumping fluid up a pipe, the motor
may be driven backward for a period
of time after it stops. The MP-4000
relay provides an anti-backspin timer
to prevent starting the motor while it
is spinning in the reverse direction.
The timer begins counting from the
moment a stop is declared by the relay.

Large motors with high inertia loads
may experience starting currents that
time. The MP-4000 motor protection
the motor is spinning then the relay
One of the binary inputs can be programmed to accept a contact input
from a separate differential relay, such
as the MD-3000, or other device to trip
the motor. This provides local and
remote target information and uses
the trip contacts of the MP-4000 motor
protection relay. It will also record
and log the motor information at the
time of the trip.

number of cold starts, hot starts, starts
per time period and time between
starts that are permitted without
damage. The MP-4000 motor protection relay incorporates these timers
to prevent starting the motor beyond
its capabilities.
Motor Starting Profile Time/Current Chart
Load Shedding
Motor Starting Profile

upstream process. The load shedding
The MP-4000 relay records the average

current of the motor for the last two
starts. This information is available
over the communications port. The
motor current can then be plotted
and compared to the motor overload
protection curve. Available in
PowerPort or the PowerNet Event
Viewer Client.
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-21
Sheet 04 075
Table 4.2-10. MP-4000 Specifications
Control Power
Nominal rating:
Frequency:
Power use:
Operating
range:
Ride through
time:
120 Vac or 240 Vac

(+10%, 25%)
50 or 60 Hz
20 VA maximum
URTD: 6 VA maximum
IPONI: 1 VA maximum
120 Vac: 90132 Vac
240 Vac:180264 Vac
30 cycles at
nominal Vac
Current Inputs
Nominal (In):
CT rating:
Phase burden:
Ground burden:
Saturation:
120 Vac
69 to 150 Vac
2 VA
Metering Accuracy
Phase current:
Ground current:
1% of In (5%100%)
1.5% of In (0%55%)
Discrete Inputs
Number of
Inputs:
Rating:
2 Programmable
1.2 VA at 120 Vac
Maximum OFF = 36 Vac
Minimum ON = 86 Vac
Output Contacts
Number of
outputs:
Momentary:
(Resistive)
Continuous:
4 Form C,
Programmable
Make 30A AC/DC
for 0.25 second
Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc
5A at 120/240 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc
Analog Output
Rating:
Maximum load:
Accuracy:
Logging
Full load
amperes:
Locked rotor
current:
Locked rotor
time:
Ultimate trip
current:
Phase CT ratio:
Ground CT ratio:
Timing accuracy:
Log book:
Log event:
Log start:
Start profile:
10 to 3000A
300% to 1200% FLA
1 to 120 seconds
85% to
150% FLA
10 to 4000: In
10 to 4000: In
2.5% or 30 ms
For I > 1.1x U.T.C.
Trip Setting Range

1A or 5A
2 x In continuous
VA at In
VA at In
x In
Voltage Inputs
Nominal rating:
Operating range:
Burden:
Motor Overload Protection (I2t)
Ground fault (GF):

GF Start and run
time delay:
Timer accuracy:
Instantaneous O.C.:
IOC Start time
delay:
Timer accuracy:
JAM trip:
Underload trip:
Current unbalance
trip:
Off, 2% to 55% CT Ratio

2 to 60 cycles
20 ms
Off, 300% to 1600% FLA
0 to 60 cycles
20 ms
Off, 100% to 1200% FLA
Off, 1% to 90% FLA
History records:
Starts per time:

Time for starts
per time:
Time between starts:
No. of cold starts:
Motor transition
current:
Time for transition:
Inc. sequence timer:
Long acceleration
timer:
Anti-Backspin Timer:
Accuracy:
JAM, Underload and Phase Unbalance

Time Delay
MPONI
Type:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
Functions:
DPONI
Type:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
Functions:
Ground fault:
Overload I2t:
JAM:
Underload:
Phase unbalance:
Run Delay timers:
Off, 2% to 75%
CT Ratio
Off, 60% to 99% I2t
Off, 100% to 1200%
FLA
Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Off, 4% to 40%
Ineg/Ipos
0 to 240 seconds

1 to 5 starts
IPONI
Type:
Baud rate:
Protocol:
Functions:
3
4

1 minute/month at 25C
7
8
2-wire, FSK
1200 or 9600 baud
INCOM
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
5-wire, 485
1200 or 9600 baud
Modbus RTU
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Operating:
Storage:
Humidity:
17

0% to 95% (noncondensing)

Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
10.25 (260.4)
6.72 (170.7)
3.70 (94.0)
7 lbs (3 kg)
File Number E154862

UL 1053
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2
CSA
UL Recognized
CA08104001E
10% to 300% FLA

0 to 1200 seconds
5-wire
500K, 250K, 125K, Auto
DeviceNet
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
Alarm Setting Range

4 to 20 mA
Programmable
1K ohm
1%
Off, 1 to 10 starts
Clock
Communications
0 to 120 seconds
0 to 240 seconds
0.5% + 100 ms
ii
Start Control Functions
Off, 4% to 40%
Ineg/Ipos
0 to1200 seconds
Voltage unbalance (47)
Threshold:
OFF, 1 to 100V
% V2/V1:
4% to 40%
Time delay:
0 to 1200 seconds
Pickup range:
OFF, 10 to 150V
Time delay:
0 to 1200 seconds
Pickup range:
Off, 15 to 60 Hz
Time delay:
0 to 60 seconds
Power protection (32)
Threshold:
OFF, 0.06 to 0.90 *FLA *VT
Time delay:
0 to 1200 seconds
Power factor (55)
Threshold:
OFF, 0.05 to 0.99
Time delay:
0 to 60 seconds
Start Delay timers:

Run Delay timers:
Timer accuracy:
100 events
20 trips and alarms
Last 4 starts
Last start
(communication only)
Motor, trips, alarms and
permanent records
18
19
20
21

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 076
General DescriptionEMR-3000
EMR-3000
ii
1

relay status.
Ethernet port and protocols are
available.
2
3
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay

has mass memory for data storage
sequence of event records, 20 detailed
load profiles, the five latest start
profiles, motor trending, breaker wear
information and oscillography data.
4
5
6
EMR-3000
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
General Description
Eatons EMR-3000 motor protection
relay is a multifunctional microprocessor-based protective relay for
applied on medium voltage or larger
motors. The MP-3000 relay is a current
only device that provides complete
and reliable motor protection, monitoring and starting control functions.
has removable terminal blocks, and it
has Modbus-RTU communications as
standard; and an optional Ethernet
port for Modbus-TCP communications.
has three-phase and one ground
current inputs. It can be used with
either 5A or 1A CTs. The ground
protection can be used with either
a zero sequence ground CT or from
the residual connection of the phase
CTs. The zero sequence ground
CT provides greater ground fault
sensitivity than the residual connection. The unit is user programmable
for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation.
digital input. Flash memory is used
for the programming and all settings
are stored in nonvolatile memory.

has four discrete inputs and one fiber
optic input, one Form C and two NO
programmable contacts, and one
Form C healthy contact. It also has
an optional 420 mA analog output
or zone interlocking card. The relay
to configure the I/O. All inputs and
outputs (except the healthy output)
are user-programmable. The unit also
counts with a test mode to force outputs and simulate currents, to facilitate
the commissioning of the unit. It can
be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc
or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Features
Protection
Thermal protection (49/51)

Locked rotor protection (49S/51)

Two instantaneous elements with
timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3])
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves

and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
Jam or Stall protection (50J[1]

and 50J[2])
overcurrent (46[1] and 46[2])
Underload protection (37[1],
37[2], 37[3])
Temperature protection with
optional URTD (49/38)
Stars per hour (66)
Lockout protection (86)
protection (87B)
Microprocessor-based protection
with monitoring and control for
medium voltage motors
Integral test function reduces
maintenance time and expense
Zone selective interlocking
improves coordination and tripping
time, and saves money compared to
a traditional bus differential scheme
Reduce troubleshooting time and
maintenance costsTrip and event
recording in non-volatile memory
provides detailed information for
analysis and system restoration.
6000 cycles of waveform capture
aids in post fault analysis (viewable
using PowerPort-E software)
Minimum replacement time
Removable terminal blocks ideal
in industrial environments
21
Front RS-232 port and PowerPort-E

software provides local computer
access and user-friendly windows
based interface for relay settings,
configuration and data retrieval
Breaker open/close from relay faceplate or remotely via communications
Fast and easy troubleshooting,
improved maintenance procedures
and increased device security.
Provides detailed traceability for
system configuration changes
Relays self-diagnostics and
reporting improves uptime and
troubleshooting
Breaker trip circuit monitoring
improves the reliability of the
breaker operation
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-23
Sheet 04 077
Metering

zero sequence
Ampere demand
Phase angles
Frequency
% THD I
Magnitude THD I
Phase angles
Temperature with remote
URTD module
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor

Sequence of events report (up to
300 events)
Motor history
Records the last five motor start
profiles
Motor start trending
CT supervision
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU
Control Functions
Transition for reduced voltage starts

Incomplete sequence delay
Permits numbers of cold starts
Limits numbers of starts per hour
acceleration motors
Motor stop inputs
Remote trip input
Emergency override
Breaker/Contactor open-close/
stop-start
CA08104001E
Remote open-close (stop-start)

Programmable I/O
Programmable LEDs

permits running the motor close to
its design limits while protecting it
against excessive heating and
EMR-3000 field-proven protection
nuisance tripping. The EMR-3000
motor protection relay uses a
protection algorithm and measurement technique based on proven
positive and negative (unbalance)
sequence current sampling and true
rms calculations.
Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip

characteristics that adjust the trip
times based on measured motor
temperature when RTDs are used.
overcurrent function to trip the motor
for high fault current levels and to
save the fuses. This function can be
disabled and has an adjustable time
delay on starting to avoid nuisance
tripping on inrush.
through fuses and can be run with
a single-phase fuse blown, referred
to as single-phasing the motor. The
EMR-3000 motor protection relay
measures the current unbalance and
can be used to alarm or trip the motor
before damage occurs. Pickup, start
and run timers, and a second element
for alarm purposes are provided.
The EMR-3000 motor relay features

the exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip
intelligent overload protection system.
Intel-I-Trip develops custom overload
curves simply from motor nameplate
data. Intel-I-Trip protects motors from
potentially damaging overload and
abnormal operating conditions.
The Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload
protection feature uses field-proven
measurement techniques and a
motor thermal protection model.
The EMR-3000 motor relays unique
measurement technique samples the
current waveforms 36 times per cycle,
providing accurate measurements of
the positive and negative sequence
currents. The negative sequence
current causes a greater heating effect
Intel-I-Trip uses these measurements
in its motor model to safely protect the
motor against the heating effects of
these currents.
A separate measuring circuit is used

to measure ground current. A ground
CT is recommended for more sensitive
protection against winding insulation
breakdown to ground. The relay
ground circuit can be connected
The ground fault protection has pickup
and time delay set points or can
be disabled.
ii
1
2
3
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Protection
The motor thermal model is analogous

to a bucket that is being filled and
drained at the same time. The fill rate
is dependent on the motor currents
and the drain is based on motor design
principles. The size of the bucket is
equivalent to the thermal capacity
associated with the mass of the motor.
Intel-I-Trip integrates these rates and
will issue a trip when the thermal
capacity is filled.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Jam Protection
The user-selectable Jam function
and run timers and a second element
12
13
14
15
Pickup, start and run timers, and a
second element for alarm purposes
are provided.
16
17
18

starting. The user can select to
transition based on the current
level and/or on time.
19
20
21

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 078
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Antibackspin
Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor
Waveform Capture
The stop function is programmable

from 220%. For certain applications,
such as pumping a fluid up a pipe,
the motor may be driven backward for
a period of time after it stops. The
EMR-3000 relay provides an antibackspin timer to prevent starting the
motor while it is spinning in the
reverse direction. The timer begins
counting from the moment a stop is
declared by the relay.

or trip an upstream breaker. The timer
The EMR-3000 motor protection

relay can be applied on either an
A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A
user setting permits correct operation
and indication of the actual system
configuration.

contact closures. The EMR-3000 relay
to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles.
up to eight different triggers; it can
also be generated manually through
the display or via communications.

number of cold starts, starts per hour
period, or time between starts that
are permitted without damage. The
incorporates these timers to
prevent starting the motor beyond
its capabilities.
Load Shedding
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

upstream process. The load-shedding
Emergency Override
inhibitor timers and thermal overload
use in emergency conditions only,
and it may result in motor damage
or failure.

Large motors with a high inertia may
experience starting currents that
time. The EMR-3000 motor protection
the motor is spinning, then the relay
will not trip on the normal locked
rotortime allowing the motor to start.
The digital inputs can be programmed
to accept a contact input from a
separate differential relay or other
device to trip the motor. This provides
local and remote target information
and uses the trip contacts of the
EMR-3000 motor protection relay.
It will also record and log the motor
information at the time of the trip.
Maintenance Mode
clearing time and lower incident
settings via a password protected soft
key, communication or via a digital
Input while maintenance work is being
performed at an energized panel or
device. The more sensitive settings
provide greater security for maintenance personnel and help to reduce
the possibility of injury.

The EMR-3000 protection relay records
with the relay. An event is classified
as a change of state as detected by
the relay. These include relay pickups,
The events are stored in a FIFO in
Trip Log
The EMR-3000 protection relay will
in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
include information on the type
of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and
voltages at the time of the fault.

viewing in all light conditions. Seven
Starting Profiles
The EMR-3000 records the average
current versus time for the last five
starting cycles. This information is
available via the communications
port through PowerPort-E.
Motor Statistics
For each motor start, the EMR-300
stores a motor start report and adds
this data to the motor statistics buffer.
With the motor statistics you can track
motor start data for the past 18 30-day
periods. For each 30-day interval, the
relay records the following information:
The date the interval began
The total number of starts in
the interval
The averages of the following
quantities:
Motor start time
Start % rotor thermal
capacity used
Maximum start current
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Motor Protection
4.2-25
Sheet 04 079
Programmable I/O
The EMR-3000 relay automatically

report setting.

provides heavy-duty, trip rated, 2NO
and one Form C contacts. One isolated
inputs can be used for monitoring
the trip circuit. One Form C contact
is dedicated to the relay failure alarm
function and is operated in a normally

energized (failsafe) mode. There are 4
eight user-configurable discrete inputs
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 080
i
ii
1
PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or laptop
change set points or configuration


Xpert Software.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 4.2-8. PowerPort-E EMR-3000 Device Planning
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-27
Sheet 04 081
Table 4.2-11. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-3000 Motor Relay Removable Terminals
EMR-3000 A 0 B A 1
ii
Hardware Option 1
A = Four digital inputs, four
one 420 mA analog output,
URTD interface, IRIG-B
small display
B = Four digital inputs, four
zone interlocking, URTD
interface, IRIG-B, small display
Mounting Options
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current, 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
I = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485) +
Modbus-TCP
(RJ-45)
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground.
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 082
Technical Data and SpecificationsEMR-3000
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Table 4.2-12. EMR-3000 Specifications
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage:
Buffer time in case
of supply failure:
Digital Inputs
19300 Vdc/40250 Vac
voltage communication is
permitted to be interrupted
Power Consumption
Power
8W max. power
40250 Vac: 6W idle mode/
8W max. power
Power
Ground
current input: at In = 1A burden = 0.35 mVA
Max. input voltage:

Input current:
Reaction time:
Fallback time:
4 switching thresholds:
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Terminals:

300 Vdc/270 Vac
<4 mA
<20 ms
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Min. 19.2 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Baud rates:
Handshake:
Connection:
115,200 Baud
RTS and CTS
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
Fiber Optic
Min. 42.6 Vdc

Max. 21.3 Vdc
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: ST-plug

URTD-Interface

Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
Screw-type terminal
Binary Output Relays

Continuous current:
Max. make current:
Max. breaking current:
5A AC/DC
25A AC/25A DC for 4s
5A AC up to 125 Vdc
0.2A DC at 300V
Switching capacity:
2000 VA
Contact type:
1 changeover contact
Terminals:
Connection:
Versatile link
25C up to +70C
(13F to 158F)
(4F to 140F)
at Ann. average:
<75% rel.
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
may be necessary.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-29
Sheet 04 083
EMR-4000
EMR-4000
General Description
relay is a multifunctional microprocessor-based protective relay for
applied on medium voltage or larger
motors. The EMR-4000 relay is a
current and voltage device that
provides complete and reliable
motor protection, monitoring,
diagnostics, metering and starting
control functions.
has removable terminal blocks, and it
has Modbus-RTU communications as
standard; and an optional Ethernet
port for Modbus-TCP communications
or IEC-61850.

provides complete current, voltage
and frequency protection in a single
compact case. The relay has four
current inputs rated for either 5A or 1A
voltage inputs are to be connected
voltage is for independent singlephase undervoltage/overvoltage
protection. The unit is user programmable for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation.

functions. Logic gates and timers
may be defined and arranged for
customized applications. With the
programmable logic control functions
you can simplify the complexity of
your starting schemes by eliminating
timers and auxiliary relays. Flash
memory is used for the programming
and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for
four preprogrammed setting groups
that can be activated through software
or contact input.

protected soft key can be used for
digital input. Flash memory is used
for the programming and all settings
are stored in nonvolatile memory.

has mass memory for data storage
load profiles, the five latest start
profiles, motor trending, breaker/
contactor wear information and
oscillography data.

relay status.

has eight discrete inputs, one fiber
optic input, two Form C and 2NO
output programmable contacts, and
one Form C healthy contact. It also
has four 420 mA analog outputs and
one zone interlocking card. The relay
to configure the I/O. All inputs and to
outputs (except the healthy output)
are user-programmable. The unit
also counts with a test mode to force
outputs and simulate currents, to
facilitate the commissioning of the
unit. It can be powered from 19 Vdc
to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac
auxiliary power.

are available.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 084
General DescriptionEMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay
i
ii
Features
Protection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Locked rotor protection (49S/51)
Two instantaneous elements with
timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3])
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
Jam or Stall protection (50J[1]
and 50J[2])
overcurrent (46[1] and 46[2])
Underload protection (37[1],
37[2], 37[3])
Temperature protection with
optional URTD (49/38)
Stars per hour (66)
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
59A[1], 59A[2])
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
Apparent and displacement power

factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2])
Forward and reverse watts (32[1],
32[2], 32[3])
Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1],
32V[2], 32V[3])
Lockout protection (86)
protection (87B)
Diagnostic
Communication
Metering

zero sequence
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
URTD module
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor

Sequence of events report (up to
300 events)
Motor history
Records the last five motor
start profiles
Motor start trending
CT supervision
VT supervision
Broken rotor bar (Beta version)

Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU (optional)
IEC-61850 (optional)
Control Functions
Transition for reduced voltage starts

Incomplete sequence delay
Permits numbers of cold starts
Limits numbers of starts per hour
acceleration motors
Motor stop inputs
Remote trip input
Emergency override
Breaker/contactor open-close/
stop-start
Remote open-close (stop-start)
Programmable I/O
Programmable LEDs
Programmable logic
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-31
Sheet 04 085
General DescriptionEMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay

Table 4.2-13. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-4000 Motor Relay Removable Terminals
EMR-4000 A 0 B A 1
ii
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs, five
interface, IRIG-B, large
display
Mounting Options
Hardware Option 2
ground current 5A1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current, 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
H = IEC-61850
I = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485) +
Modbus-TCP
(RJ-45)
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount

permits running the motor close to its
design limits while protecting it against
excessive heating and damaging
overload conditions. The EMR-4000
field-proven protection algorithms
were developed based on motor
designs and operating parameters for
optimum operation and protection
while minimizing nuisance tripping.
relay uses a protection algorithm
and measurement technique based
(unbalance) sequence current sampling
and true rms calculations.
4
5
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Protection

The EMR-4000 motor relay features
the exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip
intelligent overload protection
system. Intel-I-Trip develops custom
overload curves simply from motor
nameplate data. Intel-I-Trip protects
motors from potentially damaging
overload and abnormal operating
conditions. The Intel-I-Trip intelligent
overload protection feature uses field
proven measurement techniques and
a motor thermal protection model.
The EMR-4000 motor relays unique
measurement technique samples the
current waveforms 36 times per cycle,
providing accurate measurements
of the positive and negative sequence
currents. The negative sequence
current causes a greater heating effect
Intel-I-Trip uses these measurements
in its motor model to safely protect the
motor against the heating effects of
these currents.
CA08104001E
The motor thermal model is analogous

to a bucket that is being filled and
drained at the same time. The fill rate
is dependent on the motor currents
and the drain is based on motor
design principles. The size of the
bucket is equivalent to the thermal
capacity associated with the mass of
the motor. Intel-I-Trip integrates these
rates and will issue a trip when the
thermal capacity is filled.
Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip

characteristics that adjust the trip
times based on measured motor
temperature when RTDs are used.
Jam Protection
overcurrent function to trip the
motor for high fault current levels
and to save the fuses. This function
can be disabled and has an adjustable
time delay on starting to avoid
nuisance tripping on inrush.

single-phase fuse blown, referred
to as single-phasing the motor. The
measures the current and voltage
unbalance and either can be used to
alarm or trip the motor before damage
occurs. The EMR-4000 has two voltage
and two current unbalance elements.
Pickup, start and run timers are
provided for each element.
2
3
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground, large display and IEC-61850.
A separate measuring circuit is used

to measure ground current. A ground
CT is recommended for more sensitive
protection against winding insulation
breakdown to ground. The relay
ground circuit can be connected
The ground fault protection has
pickup and time delay set points
or can be disabled.
The user-selectable jam function
and run timers, and a second element
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Underload/Underpower Protection
The user-selectable underload/
underpower function is used to detect
the loss of load on the motor. Coupling
failure is a common cause for loss of
load. Whenever possible, it is better to
use underpower to detect loss of load.
Three power elements and two underload elements are provided in the
relay for tripping and alarm purposes.
Pickup, start and run timers are
provided for each element.
14
18
The frequency elements provide the

ability to detect when the motor is
operating at off-nominal frequencies
that can do damage to the process
or, to signal to upstream protections
or controls to implement load
shedding actions.
15
16
17
19
20
21

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 086
i
ii
Power Factor Protection
This protection is used in synchronous

motors applications to detect out-ofsynchronism conditions.
Large motors with a high inertia may

experience starting currents that
time. The EMR-4000 motor protection
the motor is spinning, then the relay
Undervoltage/Overvoltage Protection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Use the voltage protective functions

to detect abnormal system voltage
conditions that are potentially
hazardous to the motor.

provides a transition and an incomplete sequence function for reduced
voltage starting. The user can select
to transition based on the current
level and/or on time.
Antibackspin
The stop function is programmable
from 220%. For certain applications,
such as pumping a fluid up a pipe,
the motor may be driven backward
for a period of time after it stops.
The EMR-4000 relay provides an
antibackspin timer to prevent starting
the motor while it is spinning in the
reverse direction. The timer begins
counting from the moment a stop is
declared by the relay.

number of cold starts, starts per hour
period or time between starts that
are permitted without damage.
relay incorporates these timers to
prevent starting the motor beyond
its capabilities.
Load Shedding
upstream process. The load-shedding
Emergency Override
relay has a user-programmable
feature that will let the operator
reset the start inhibitor timers and
thermal overload bucket. This function
is intended for use in emergency
conditions only, and it may result in
motor damage or failure.
The digital inputs can be programmed
to accept a contact input from a
separate differential relay or other
device to trip the motor. This provides
local and remote target information
and uses the trip contacts of the
EMR-4000 motor protection relay. It
will also record and log the motor
information at the time of the trip.
Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor

either an internal or external trip
relay or trip an upstream breaker. The
timer must be longer than the breaker

A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation.
A user setting permits correct
operation and indication of the
Maintenance Mode
clearing time and to lower incident
settings via a password protected
digital Input while maintenance work
Diagnostic Features
Broken Rotor Bar (Beta Version)
The EMR-4000 provides advanced
motor diagnostics including a broken
rotor bar detection function. The
broken rotor bar detection is a
condition maintenance function that
continuously monitors the motors
health while in operation. The
advanced Motor Current Signature
Analysis (MCSA) continuously
analyzes the motor current signature
and based on preset algorithms it will
determine when a broken rotor bar is
present in the motor.
The broken rotor bar function will
provide early detection of any rotor
problems and advise maintenance
personnel of the impending issue,
allowing for predictive maintenance
of the motor and for prevention of
catastrophic motor failures.
By providing early indication of
potential rotor problems, serious
system issues such as: reduced
starting torque, overloads, torque
and speed oscillation and bearing
wear can be avoided. With the
advanced broken rotor bar detection
system, advanced warning of
impending problems reduces
catastrophic failures, maximizing
motor life and system uptime.

The EMR-4000 protection relay records
The events are stored in a FIFO in
Trip Log
The EMR-4000 protection relay will
a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
operated, fault location and currents
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-33
Sheet 04 087
Waveform Capture
Starting Profiles
Programmable I/O

capabilities. The relay will record
all measured signals along with the
contact closures. The EMR-4000 relay
The EMR-4000 records the average

current versus time for the last five
starting cycles. This information is
available via the communications
port through PowerPort-E.

2NO and one Form C contacts.
One isolated input can be used for
monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C
There are 4 eight user-configurable
discrete inputs that accept a wet
contact and can operate through a
wide range of power. Each input
and output is user-programmable
for maximum application flexibility.

viewing in all light conditions. Seven
operating mode selection, scrolling
Motor Statistics
For each motor start, the EMR-3000
stores a motor start report and adds
this data to the motor statistics buffer.
With the motor statistics you can
track motor start data for the past
18 30-day periods. For each 30-day
interval, the relay records the
following information:
The date the interval began
The total number of starts in
the interval
The averages of the following
quantities:
Motor start time
Start % rotor thermal
capacity used
Maximum start current
The EMR-4000 relay automatically
records selected quantities into
non-volatile memory every 5, 10, 15,
30 or 60 minutes, depending on the
trending report setting.
Programmable Logic
provides logic gates and timers that
the user can customize for special or
unique applications. Each gate can
or metering set points. Each gate has
a unique output assignment and
delay settings.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 088
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-35
Sheet 04 089
is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or a


Xpert Software.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 4.2-12. PowerPort-E EMR-4000 Device Planning
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 090
Technical Data and SpecificationsEMR-4000
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Table 4.2-14. EMR-4000 Specifications
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage:
Digital Inputs
24270 Vdc/48230 Vac
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case

of supply failure:
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
Power Consumption
Power
Power
at In = 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
at In = 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Max. input voltage:

Input current:
Reaction time:
Fallback time:
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Terminals:
Zone Interlocking
300 Vdc/259 Vac
<4 mA
<20 ms
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Min. 19.2 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Min. 42.6 Vdc
Max. 21.3 Vdc

Zone out:
0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Zone in:
Max. input voltage:
+5.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation:
2.5 kV AC
Connection:
(twisted pair)

Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
Screw-type terminal
Baud rates:
Handshake:
Connection:
115,200 Baud
RTS and CTS
Relay Outputs
RS-485
Continuous current:
Max. make current:
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
5A AC/DC
0.3A DC at 300V
Switching capacity:
1250 VA
Contact type:
Terminals:
Fiber Optic
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: ST-plug
URTD-Interface
Connection:
Versatile link

30C to +70C
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
at Ann. average:
<75% rel.
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
may be necessary.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
4.2-37
Sheet 04 091
General DescriptionUniversal RTD
Universal RTD Module
The Universal RTD Module transmits

information using a fiber optic link,
with a maximum distance of
400 feet (122m).
Eatons Universal RTD Module is an

electronic resistance temperature
detector designed to monitor as a
stand-alone device or in conjunction
with the protective relays. The
Universal RTD Module can be used
to monitor, for example, transformer
temperature and relay that information back to a remote computer or
programmable controller. When used
in conjunction with the motor relays,
the Universal RTD Module enhances
the units motor protection ability. In
addition to the FP-6000, ETR-4000,
EMR-3000, EMR-4000 and EGR-4000,
the Universal RTD Module can be used
with the older motor relays such as
IQ-1000 II, MP-3000 and MP-4000.
General Description
Monitors as a stand-alone device or
in conjunction with the MP-3000,
MP-4000, FP-6000, ETR-4000,
EMR-3000, EMR-4000 and EGR-4000
protection relays.

Description
Catalog
Number

48250 AC/DC
URTDI-01

2448 Vdc
URTDII-02

Height: 7.67 (194.8)
Width: 4.32 (109.7)
Depth: 2.00 (50.8)
The Universal RTD Module can be

used to monitor as many as 12 RTD
inputsfour groups consisting of six
motor windings, two motor bearings,
two load bearings and two auxiliary.
The Universal RTD Module can be
programmed to accept any of the
following types of RTD inputs: 10 ohm
copper, 100 ohm platinum, and 100
and 120 ohm nickel.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Communications
Communications to the Power Xpert
Software are enabled through Power
Xpert Gateway and Modbus-RTU port
built into the module.
6
7
8
9
Universal
RTD Module
AC
A
120 Vac H3
ACN
Control Power
Transformer
10
H
Data
Strobe
H
1
B
120 Vac
H
2
B
H
1
C
G
1
H
2
C
MP-3000
No
on-current
Carrying
arrying Ground
Optical Fiber for URTD

Communications
to MP-3000
(Preferred Method)
25
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Customer Remote
Input Contacts
or Pushbuttons
11
G
2
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
Shield
n
Data
Strobe
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Figure 4.2-13. MP-3000 and URTD Wiring
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 092
Technical DataUniversal RTD

RTD Inputs: (Requires URTD Module)
6.26
(159.0)
with PONI and RTD Module
Sensor types:
5.07
(128.8)
ii
10 ohm copper
100 ohm nickel
120 ohm nickel
100 ohm platinum
URTD Module Communications
1
2
Interface:
Fiber optic
Fiber optic
cable:
Type HFBR-PNS005
4
25
24
1A49102H19
+4/20
OUTPUT
-4/20
OUTPUT
120
AUX 2
35
UNIVERSAL RTD MODULE
STYLE NUMBER 2D78559
SOURCE
VAC AUTO SELECT

V
33
31
29
27
7
8
9
10
10
AC
J3
ACN
AUX1
GND
LB2
LB1
25
24
MB2
23
22
21
MB1
20
DISCRETE
1
DISCRETE
COMMON
DISCRETE
IN 2
RTD Module
Mounting
Bracket
11
12
Figure 4.2-14. MP-3000 URTD MountingDimensions in Inches (mm)
13
14
Universal
RTD Module
AC
ACN
120VAC J3
Control Power
Transformer
Common
Data
Strobe
120V AC
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
11 12
41 42
13
14
43
44
15
16
45
46
17
18
47
48
19
20
49
50
21 22
51 52
23
24
53
54
25
26
55
56
27
28
57
58
29 30
59
60
Data
Strobe
Common
Shield
Non-current
Carrying Ground
Customer Remote
Input Contacts
Or Pushbuttons
Optical Fiber for URTD
Communications to MP-3000
(Preferred Method)
Figure 4.2-15. MP-3000 Drawout Typical AC Supply and URTD Wiring

CA08104001E

Differential Protection
September 2011
4.3-1
Sheet 04 093
General DescriptionMD-3000
MD-3000 Motor
Differential Relay
The MD-3000 microprocessor-based
relay provides reliable instantaneous
trip protection for all voltage levels.
It is most commonly used as a motor
differential protection relay.

Description
Catalog
Number
Fixed case
Drawout
MD3000
MD3001
System Protection
Features
MD-3000 Differential Relay
General Description
Eatons MD-3000 Protective Relay
is a microprocessor-based sensitive
three-phase instantaneous OC relay
designed for both ANSI and IEC
applications. The MD-3000 is suitable
for use as a motor or generator selfbalancing differential protection relay.
ANSI and IEC applications

Phase differential metering
Monitoring and reporting of
magnitude and phase of current
causing trip
Relay failure alarm contact
Trip alarm contact
User-friendly front panel
Non-volatile memory
View settings any time
Set CT ratios
Integral test mode
Program and test mode
security access cover with
meter seal provision
Continuous internal circuitry
self-testing
Programmable lockout/self reset
after trip
Instantaneous sensitive phase

overcurrent trip
Information and Data Delivery
Displays current transformer ratio

Data/information transmission
Wiring Diagram
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
87
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 4.3-1. Self-Balancing
The MD-3000 Relay operates from

the 5A secondary output of standard
current transformers. Current
transformer ratio information is
quickly programmed into the unit
via settings. The MD-3000 features
a user-friendly operator panel to
monitor, program and test the relay.
Operating parameters and troubleshooting information are displayed
in the two display windows.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.3-2

September 2011
Sheet 04 094
Technical DataMD-3000
1
5.67
(144.0)
MD 3000
Motor/Generator
Differential
5.23
(132.8)
0.80
(20.3)
3.86
(98.0)
ii
5.33
(135.4)
7.72
(196.1)
2.61
(66.3)
S/N000000
W000000
66D0000G00
REV. 0
Operational
Reset
MD 3001 Motor Differential

Drawout Case
Power Supply Input:
Term. 17/19
AC 120-240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
DC 48-250 Vdc
Caution - Refer to
Instruction Leaflet
Built by FEC
Tested by GLK
RMS Amperes
4.75
(120.7)
Differential
Pickup In
A DIF
Time
B DIF
C DIF
Select
12 Unused
Unused 13
14 Unused
Unused 15
16 Unused
17
(+)
Power Supply 19
Input
(-)
18 Unused
20
11 12
41 42
13 14
43 44
15 16
45 46
17 18
47 48
19 20
49 50
21 22
51 52
23 24
53 54
25 26
55 56
27 28
57 58
Current Input
In=5A (Secondary)
Settings/Test Time/Trip Cause
11.34
(288.0)
Unused 11
21
22
A1
A2
23
24
25
26
B2
Program
Test
Unused
Unused
9.51
(241.6)
B1
C2
View
Settings
C1
27
28
Unused
30
Unused
29
Program
Program
Select
Settings
Save
Settings
Raise
Lower
Test
Select
Tests
Test
29 30
Test
6
7
8
1.51
(38.4)
6.89
(175.0)
Figure 4.3-2. MD-3000Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For The DT3031 To Be "CE Compliant",

The Power Supply Input Fuse Must Be
Rated At A Maximum Of 0.25 AMPS.
10
CS
C
11
TB2
14
Differential
Trip
TB2
15
CS
T
AC/DC
Supply
12
Enclosure Rear View
52a
TC
13
52a
14
A
B
15
C
52
11 12
41 42
13 14
43 44
15 16
45 46
17 18
47 48
19 20
49 50
21 22
51 52
23 24
53 54
25 26
55 56
27 28
57 58
29 30
59 60
16
Trip Alarm
A1
B1
17
C1
18
19
20
21
Differential
Trip
Equip Gnd
CT
A2
B2
C2
A
Chassis Gnd
Figure 4.3-3. MD-3000 Wiring Diagram

CA08104001E

September 2011
4.3-3
Sheet 04 095
General DescriptionDP-300
DP-300 Current Differential

Protection Relay
IL
IL
or
or
or
or
ii
Ib
Ia
Ib
Ia
B)
A)
Schematic Circuit Diagrams (Single-Phase Version):

A) Fault Outside the Protection Area
B) Fault Inside the Protection Area
1
2
3
Figure 4.3-4. Protected Area PrincipleFault A Outside = No Alarm, Fault B Inside = Alarm
DP-300
Features
General Description
The DP-300 offers a three-phase current
differential protection for generators,
motors and two winding transformers.
The current flowing in the individual
conductors is measured by means of
current transformers installed on both
sides of the protection zone. These
transformers form the limits of the
protection zone. By means of freely
configurable relays, the unit will
indicate if any of the adjusted fault
current limits have been exceeded.
The unit counts with a slope characteristic to prevent operation due to CT
ratio mismatches, CT ratio errors,
CT saturation, and errors because of
tap changes.
True rms 6 x current measurement,

three-phase system on both sides of
the protected zone
Secondary current transformer
output available as: /1A or /5A
Configurable trip set points for:
Differential current (Id)
Restrain current (Is)
Configurable delays
Four alarm relays
Typical Nameplate
Three discrete inputs (for blocking,

acknowledgment and configuration)
Two-line LC display
Configurable transformer ratio
Configurable vector group
Transformer inrush detection/
suppression
Individual configuration of the
nominal current for the high- and
low-voltage side of the transformer
Configurable transformer ratio
separated for currents of high- and
low-voltage side of the transformer
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
For transformer applications, the unit

has 2nd and 5th harmonic restraints to
prevent misoperation in case of inrush
currents caused for energization or
over excitation of the transformer.
When used in transformer applications,
the DP-300 allows change to the phase
shift of the transformer, without having
to change the connection of the external CTs, via selecting the vector group
in the display. The different nominal
currents of the high and low voltage
side of the transformer, as well as the
transformer ratio, may be configured.
Every measuring point may be set
separately. These features permit the
DP-300 to be universal in its applications.
The DP-300 permits design
simplification of the switchgear
cabinet, facilitates the commissioning,
ensures the operation of the system,
is user friendly, and increases the
availability of the system.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 4.3-5. Typical DP-300 Nameplate
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.3-4

September 2011
Sheet 04 096
Technical DataDP-300
Technical Data
Table 4.3-2. DP-300 Specifications
ii
Description
Measured currents (nominal value IN)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Specification
Measurements, CurrentsIsolated
5A
Measuring frequency
40.0 to 70.0 Hz
Accuracy
Class 1
Linear measuring range
5.0 x In
Maximum power consumption per path
< 0.15 VA
Rated short-time current (1s)
30.0 x In
Ambient Conditions
Voltage supply
90 to 250 Vac/Vdc
Intrinsic consumption
Maximum 10 VA
Ambient temperature storage
30 to +80C (22 to +176F)
Operational
20 to +70C (4 to +158F)
Ambient humidity
95%, noncondensing
Maximum altitude
6562 ft (2000m)
Degree of pollution
Digital InputsIsolated
Input range (Vcont, digital input)
Nominal voltage 18 to 250 Vac/dc
Input resistance
Approximately 68K ohms
Relay OutputsIsolated
Contact material
AgCdO
Resistive load (GP) (Vcont, relay output)
AC: 2.00 Aac at 250 Vac

DC: 2.00 Adc at 24 Vdc, 0.36 Adc at 125 Vdc, 0.18 Adc at 250 Vdc
Inductive load (PD) (Vcont, relay output)
AC: B300
DC: 1.00 Adc at 24 Vdc, 0.22 Adc at 125 Vdc, 0.10 Adc at 250 Vdc
10
Operating time
Minimum 100 ms
Differential current
Minimum 10%
Housing
11
12
Type
APRANORM DIN 43 700
Dimensions (W x H x D)
5.67 x 3.78 x 5.20 inches (144 x 96 x 132 mm)
Front panel cutout (W x H)
5.43 [+0.039] x 3.63 [=0.031] inches (138 [+1.0] x 92 [+0.8] mm)
Terminals
Screw-type, terminals depending on connector, 0.00388 in.2 (2.5 mm2) or 0.00620 in.2 (4.0 mm2)
Recommended tightening torque
[0.00388 in.2] 4.43 in./lbs/[0.00620 in.2] 5.3 in./lbs ([2.5 mm2] 0.5 Nm/[4.0 mm2] 0.6 Nm)
Use 60/75C (140/167F) copper wire only
Use Class 1 wire only (or equivalent)
Weight
Approximately 2.2 lbs (1000g)
13
14
Housing Protection
Protection system
IP42 from front with correct mounting

IP54 from front with gasket
Gasket: P/N 8923-1038)
IP20 from back
Front foil
Insulating surface
15
16
17
EMC-Test (CE)
Tested according to applicable EN guidelines
Listings
CE marking; UL listing for ordinary locations, UL/cUL listed, ordinary locations, File No.: E231544
Additional approvals
IEEE C37.90.1 and C37.90.2
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
4.3-5
Sheet 04 097
Technical DataDP-300
Wiring Diagram
i
ii
DP-300
Block Differential Protection
Possible Protected Objects:
79
PE
83 81
Current IL2 Transducer Set 1
Configuration Off
N/C
10
Acknowledgement
Common
8
4
Relay 2
12
13
14
15
Relay 3
Ready for Operation
N/C
10
Relay 4
11
12
11
16
Blocking
Relay 1
Subject to Technical Modifications.
Figure 4.3-6. DP-300 Wiring Diagram
18 19
17
15 16
6
DP-300 Current Differential Protection Relay
31 32
34
33
35 36
30
29
28
27
The Transducer Ratio is

Adjustable in the Display.
25 26
L3
Protected Object
The Transducer Ratio is

Adjustable in the Display.
L (90 to 250 Vac/dc)
L2
Transducer Set 1 (High Voltage Side)

L1
17
Transducer Set 2 (Low Voltage Side)
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.3-6

Transformer Protection
September 2011
Sheet 04 098
General DescriptionETR-4000
Protection Relay
ii
1
2
The ETR-4000 has eight programmable

binary inputs, four normally opened
and four Form C heavy-duty outputs
and one Form C signal alarm relay. It
can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The ETR-4000 transformer protection

relay has a mass memory for data
log 300 sequence of events records,
oscillography data.
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay
Features
General Description
Protection
Eatons ETR-4000 transformer

microprocessor-based relay for two
winding transformers of all voltage
levels. The ETR-4000 provides phase
and ground percentage restrained
differential protection using a variable
dual slope characteristic with phase,
negative, residual and neutral
overcurrent elements for backup
protection. It can also be used to
provide restrained differential protection to large motors and generators.
Dual-slope percentage restrained

current differential with magnetizing
inrush and overexcitation
blocking (87R)
Unrestrained current
differential (87H)
Restricted ground fault/Ground
Differential (87GD)
Phase overcurrent (elements
can be assigned to either side
of the transformer):
The ETR-4000 has eight current inputs

rated for either 5A or 1A to monitor
both sides of the transformers. The
CTs can be connected in wye in both
sides of the transformer; the relay
automatically compensates for the
connection of the transformer and
for CT mismatch errors.
protected soft key can be used for
instantaneous elements only.
of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs
provide quick indication of relay status.
are available.
contact input.
Four instantaneous elements

with timers (50P[1], 50P[2], 50P[3]
and 50P[4])
Four inverse time overcurrent
elements (51P[1], 51P[2], 51P[3]
and 51P[4])
11 standard curves
Inrush blocking
Negative sequence phase overcurrent (elements can be assigned to

either side of the transformer):
elements (51Q[1] and 51Q[2])
11 standard curves
Ground overcurrent (elements
can be assigned to either side
of the transformer):
and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])

and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
Two breaker failure elements

(50BF[1] and 50BF[2])
Phase transformer overload
protection (49)
protection (87B)
Metering
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor for both primary

and secondary breakers
Breaker wear primary and
secondary (accumulated
(up to 300 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU
Control Functions

zero sequence
Ampere demand
Current phase angles
% THD I
Magnitude THD I
RTD temperatures
Breaker open/close both breakers

Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable LEDs
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
CA08104001E

September 2011
4.3-7
Sheet 04 099
Table 4.3-3. Catalog Numbering Selection for ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay Removable Terminals
ETR-4000 A 0 B A 1
ii
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs, nine
two zone interlocking, URTD
B = Four digital inputs, five
IRIG-B, small display
C = Eight digital inputs, five
one zone interlocking, IRIG-B,
small display
Mounting Options
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
1 = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485) +
Modbus-TCP
(RJ-45)
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Eatons ETR-4000 transformer
simplicity. The ETR-4000 is suitable
for application on small, medium
and large two-winding power transformers. Multiple current inputs are
used to provide primary protection,
control and backup protection of
transformers, including current
differential, restricted ground
differential and overcurrent protection.
4
5
Another condition that can create a

false differential current is a sudden
change of voltage or frequency that
can put the transformer in a overexcitation state. In this case there
is high content of 5th harmonic
currents. The percentage differential
element is also desensitized when
the 5th harmonic content exceeds
a predefined value.
The current differential element looks

at the vector difference between the
current entering and leaving the zone
of protection. If the difference exceeds
a pre-determined amount, the element
will operate.
6
7
8
9
10
Dual-Slope Percent Differential Protection

The primary protective element for
transformer protection is the percent
differential element, which compares
the current entering the primary
and leaving the secondary of the
transformer. The ETR-4000 has built
in compensation for the turns-ratio
and the phase shift of the transformer,
so its not necessary to compensate
for the transformer connection by the
connection of the CTs.
2
3
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground, four inputs/five outputs and eight inputs/five outputs.
The operating characteristic of the

percent differential element is a dualslope characteristic to accommodate
for CT saturation and CT errors.
Dual-Slope Operating Characteristics
11
Harmonic Restraints
There are certain conditions like
energizing one side of the transformer
with the other side de-energized
(inrush currents) or the paralleling
of two transformers (sympathetic
currents) that can create false
differential currents. These differential
currents if not recognized can cause
a false trip; in the case of inrush
conditions or sympathetic currents,
the differential current is characterized
by a heavy content of 2nd and 4th
harmonic currents. The percentage
differential element is desensitized
either permanently (stationary
conditions) or temporarily (transient
conditions), whenever the 2nd or
4th harmonic exceed the value
programmed into the relay.
12
Harmonic Restraints
Unrestrained Differential
An unrestrained differential element
is provided for fast tripping on heavy
internal faults to limit catastrophic
damage to the transformer and to
minimize risks to the remainder of
the power system.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.3-8

September 2011
Sheet 04 100
i
ii
1
Restricted Ground Fault
Negative Sequence Overcurrent
Ground differential protection is

applied to transformers having
impedance grounded wye windings.
It is intended to provide sensitive
ground fault detection for low magnitude fault currents, which would not
be detected by the main percent
differential element.
Because this element does not respond

to balanced load or three-phase faults,
the negative-sequence overcurrent
element may provide the desired overcurrent protection. This is particularly
applicable to delta-wye grounded
transformers where only 58% of the
secondary p.u. phase-to-ground fault
current appears in any one primary
phase conductor. Backup protection
can be particularly difficult when
the wye is impedance grounded.
The ETR-4000 protection relay records

The events are stored in an FIFO in
A negative-sequence element can be

used in the primary supply to the
transformer and can be set as
sensitively as required to protect for
secondary phase-to-ground or phaseto-phase faults. This element should
be set to coordinate with the low-side
phase and ground relays for phaseto-ground and phase-to-phase faults.
The negative sequence element
must also be set higher than the
negative-sequence current due to
unbalanced loads.
The ETR-4000 protection relay will

in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
2
3
4
5
6
7
Restricted Ground Fault
Overcurrent Elements
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
The ETR-4000 can be used to provide

backup for transformer and adjacent
power system equipment. Instantaneous overcurrent elements can be
used for fast clearing of severe internal
or external (through) faults.
Time overcurrent protection elements
per winding allow coordinating with
the adjacent protection zones and
acting as a backup protection. There
are 11 user-selectable inverse-time
overcurrent curve characteristics. The
user can select from the ANSI, IEC or
thermal curve families, and can select
instantaneous or time delay reset
characteristics.
Breaker Failure
relay includes two breaker failure
(50BF, 62BF) elements that can be
initiated from either an internal or
external trip signal. These are
independent elements that can be
used to operate a lockout relay or
trip an upstream breaker. The timer
Maintenance Mode
settings via a password-protected
digital Input while maintenance work
Trip Log
Waveform Capture
contact closures. The ETR-4000 relay
waveform capture is initiated by up to
eight different triggers; it can also

viewing in all light conditions. 17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

4.3-9
Sheet 04 101
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Figure 4.3-7. ETR-4000 Device Planning
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 102
Programmable I/O

four normally open and four Form C
used for monitoring the trip circuits.
(failsafe) mode. There are eight userconfigurable discrete inputs that
accept a wet contact and can operate
through a wide range of power.
Each input and output is userprogrammable for maximum
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

that is designed for continuous, remote
monitoring of many devices. It provides
information on Power Xpert Software.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 4.3-8. ETR-4000 Typical One-Line Diagram
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
4.3-11
Sheet 04 103
Technical Data and SpecificationsETR-4000
Table 4.3-4. ETR-4000 Specifications
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage:
Digital Inputs
24270 Vdc/48230 Vac
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case

of supply failure:
> = 50 ms at minimal aux.

voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
Power Consumption
Power
Power
at In = 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
at In = 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Max. input voltage:

Input current:
Reaction time:
Fallback time:
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Terminals:
Zone Interlocking
300 Vdc/259 Vac
<4 mA
<20 ms
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Min. 19.2 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Min. 42.6 Vdc
Max. 21.3 Vdc

Zone out:
0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Zone in:
Max. input voltage:
+5.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation:
2.5 kV AC
Connection:
(twisted pair)

Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
Screw-type terminal
Baud rates:
Handshake:
Connection:
115,200 Baud
RTS and CTS
Relay Outputs
RS-485
Continuous current:
Max. make current:
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
5A AC/DC
0.3A DC at 300V
Switching capacity:
1250 VA
Contact type:
Terminals:
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fiber Optic
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: ST-plug
URTD-Interface
Connection:
Versatile link
10

30C to +70C
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
at Ann. average:
<75% rel.
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
may be necessary.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 104
General DescriptionEGR-4000
EGR-4000 Generator
Protection Relay
ii
1
3
4
EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs
provide quick indication of relay status.

digital input.
General Description
Eatons EGR-4000 generator protection
relay is a multi-functional, microprocessor-based relay for small to
medium sized generators. It may
be used as a primary or backup
protection in standby generators,
and cogeneration applications.
The EGR-4000 generator protection
relay provides voltage controlled,
voltage restrained, and standard
directional three-phase overcurrent
protection, as well as directional
phase-residual and independent
ground overcurrent protection and
breaker failure. Three-phase over-/
undervoltage, voltage unbalance,
current unbalance, over/under and
rate-of-change frequency, vector
surge, power factor, directional VARs,
directional power, loss of excitation,
overexcitation and sync check
functions are standard functions.
The EGR-4000 generator relay
provides all required protection,
control, monitoring and metering for
small and medium sized generators in
a single, compact case. The relay has
four current inputs rated for either 5A
voltage is for independent single-phase
undervoltage/overvoltage protection,
or 100% ground protection for a high
resistance grounded generator.

and an Ethernet port in the back are
optional for local area networking.
Optional Modbus-RTU, Modbus-TCP
or IEC-61850 protocols are supported.
functions. Logic gates and timers may
be defined and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic
control functions make the EGR-4000
very flexible. Flash memory is used for
the programming and all settings are
stored in nonvolatile memory.
relay has mass memory for data
storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms
time resolution. The relay will log 300
load profiles, breaker wear information
and oscillography data.
The EGR-4000 has eight programmable
binary inputs, two analog inputs, two
analog outputs, two normally opened
and two Form C heavy-duty outputs,
and one Form C signal alarm relay. It
can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc
Features
Protection

and 50P[3])
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
Voltage restraint (51P[2]
and 51P[3])

and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
59A[1], 59A[2])
(59N[1], 59N[2])
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
55D[1], 55D[2])
Forward and reverse watts (32[1],
32[2], 32[3])
Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1],
32V[2], 32V[3])
Overexcitation, volts-per-hertz
(24[1], 24[2])
64S, 100% stator ground fault
(27TN/ 59N)
Generator unbalance (46G[1], 46G[2])
Loss of excitation (40[1],40[2])
Sync check (25)
Lockout (86)
Loss of potential-LOP
protection (87B)
Cold load pickup
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
4.3-13
Sheet 04 105
Metering
Sync values
URTD module

RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU (optional)
IEC-61850 (optional)
Generator hours of operation

zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor

Breaker wear
(up to 300 events)
Control Functions
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
Breaker open/close
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable Logic
Programmable LEDs
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 4.3-5. Catalog Numbering Selection for EGR-4000 Generator Relay Removable Terminals
EGR-4000 A 0 B A 1
8
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs,
five outputs, 2AI +2AO,
zone interlocking,
URTD interface
Mounting Options
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
H = IEC-61850 (Goose)
I = Modbus-RTU +
Modbus-TCP
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 106
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Reverse VARs
Eatons EGR-4000 generator protection

EGR-4000 provides comprehensive
protection, metering and monitoring
of small to medium sized synchronous
or induction generators operating at
50 or 60 Hz. The base relay includes all
the standard protection and metering
functions. Protection features found
in the EGR-4000 include:
Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[2], 51P[3]),

to protect the distribution system
components against excessive
damage and to prevent the generator
and its auxiliaries from exceeding their
thermal limitations. This modification
of the pickup overcurrent level is
compared to the corresponding phase
input voltage. The EGR-4000 uses
the simple linear model below to
Reverse VARs can be used to detect loss

of excitation in synchronous machines.
There are three elements to be configured: operate in forward or reverse;
or, under or over VARs conditions.

The EGR-4000 generation protection
and ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are 14 independent
ground elements X use the
current-sensing input. The ground
elements R use a calculated 3Io
residual current obtained from the
sum of the three-phase currents. This
either the neutral or ground current in
a three-phase, four-wire system. Each
of the phase and ground overcurrent
elements can be selected to operate
based on fundamental or rms current.
currents supervised by zero, negative
or positive sequence voltages or
ground current. This function is
selectable to operate in forward,
reverse or both directions.
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is
compared to a corresponding phase
current to establish the direction of
the fault. This function is selectable
to operate in the forward, reverse or
both directions.
Pickup %
100 %
25 %

Sync Check
Reverse Power
power flowing through a generator.
There are three elements to be
configured, operate in forward or
reverse; or, under or over power
conditions. Reverse power is typically
applied to prevent generator motoring
that can cause damage to the prime
mover; while under power is generally
applied to load loss and to prevent
an overspeed condition that could
damage the prime mover.
IEC or thermal curve families, and
Breaker Failure
from either an internal or external trip
Voltage Protection
an adjustable time delay.

negative sequence or residual currents
supervised by zero, negative or positive
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

4.3-15
Sheet 04 107
100% Ground Stator Protection
Loss of Excitation
In high impedance grounded

generators, ground fault protection
is provided by the detection of voltage
in the neutral of the generator by an
overvoltage element (59N) connected
to the secondary of the distribution
grounding transformer, this overvoltage element has to be desensitized
for 3rd harmonic voltages normally
present in the generator. Under
normal conditions there is no voltage
across the secondary of the grounded
transformer; when one of the phases
goes to ground, voltage appears
across the resistor and the overvoltage
element operates, indicating a ground
conductor. However, the overvoltage
element technique described above
will protect around 90% to 95% of
the winding. The last 5% to 10% is
protected by detecting the decayed
of the 3rd harmonic voltage using an
undervoltage element (27TN) tuned
to the 3rd harmonic voltage. In the
EGR-4000 we can provide 100% stator
ground protection by measuring the
zero sequence voltage through the
4th voltage input, and by combining
the 59N and 27A elements. The 27A
element has to be programmed to
operate for 3rd harmonic zero
sequence voltages.
Operation of generators at off-nominal

frequencies can have extremely
detrimental effects on both the
generator itself and the associated
prime mover, in particular with steam
turbine generators operating below
normal frequency. The EGR-4000 relay
provides six frequency elements that
can be used to detect under/over
frequency, rate of change and a vector
surge (decoupling of two systems)
protection on the Main VT inputs. Each
set point and an adjustable time delay.
Loss of field protection or loss of

excitation is used to avoid unstable
operation, potential loss of synchronism and possible damage to
synchronous generators. When a
synchronous generator loses its
field, the generator can continue
to generate power as an induction
generator, provided that it can obtain
its excitation from the other machines
on the system. During this condition,
the rotor will quickly overheat due to
the slip frequency currents induced in
it. Loss of excitation in one machine
could jeopardize the operation of other
machines beyond their capability and
also the stability of the entire system.
The EGR-4000 supports the two typical
distance relaying schemes used for
detecting the loss excitation. The
two schemes differ mainly in that
scheme 1 uses a negative offset mho
element and scheme 2 uses a positive
offset mho element with directional
unit supervision.

A-B-C or an A-C-B phase rotation.
A user setting permits correct
operation and indication of the
Negative Sequence Protection

Negative sequence overcurrent
protection prevents the generators
from rotor overheating damage.
Unbalanced loads, fault conditions
or open phasing will produce a
negative sequence current to flow. The
unbalanced currents induce double
system frequency currents in the rotor,
which quickly causes rotor overheating. Serious damage will occur to the
generator if the unbalance is allowed
to persist. The EGR-4000 provides
a negative sequence definite time
overcurrent element and a negative
sequence timed overcurrent tripping
element to ensure that the generator
stays within its short-time and
continuous negative sequence
current rated limits.
Overexcitation Protection
Generator overexcitation occurs when
the ratio of voltage versus frequency is
too high, and the rotor iron saturates
due to high flux density. High flux
density results in stray flux in
components not designed to carry it,
which in turn causes overheating and
can potentially damage the generator.
This protection is provided through a
Volts/Hertz function with a programmable inverse time characteristic.
Maintenance Mode
safety by providing a simple and a
settings via a password-protected soft
key, communication or via a digital
input while maintenance work is being
performed at an energized panel or a
device. The more sensitive settings
provide greater security for maintenance personnel and help to reduce
the possibility of injury.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 108
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 4.3-10. Negative Sequence Protection
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4.3-11. Loss of Excitation
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

4.3-17
Sheet 04 109

relay records a maximum of 300
events associated with the relay. An
event is classified as a change of state
as detected by the relay. These include
self-diagnostic failures. Each event is
date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution. The events are stored
in an FIFO log in chronological order.
Trip Log
The EGR-4000 protection relay will
Waveform Capture
The EGR-4000 distribution protection
capabilities. The relay will record
all measured signals along with the
contact closures. The EGR-4000 relay
to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles.
up to eight different triggers; it can
also be generated manually through
the display or via communications.

The front panel user interface has
a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with
background illumination for wide
angle viewing in all light conditions.
17 programmable LEDs provide quick
The EGR-4000 relay automatically
report setting.
Programmable I/O
two normally open and two Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs can
be used for monitoring the trip circuit.
(failsafe) mode. There are eight
user-configurable discrete inputs
The EGR-4000 also has two analog
inputs and two analog outputs.
The analog inputs are available for
providing protection and monitoring

of generator bearing vibration. The
analog inputs are field programmable
to measure transducer signals that
operate over a range of 0 to 20 mA,
4 to 20 mA, or 1 to 10V. Two analog
outputs are available for signaling
the value of measured analog
quantities to external process control
devices such as PLCs. They can be
programmed to operate over a 0 to
20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 1 to 10V range.
The analog outputs can be configured
to signal a representation of most
analog quantities measured by the
EGR-4000 including current, voltages
and RTD temperature.
Programmable Logic
has a unique output assignment and
delay settings.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CA08104001E
21

September 2011
Sheet 04 110
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

4.3-19
Sheet 04 111
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 112
i
ii
1
to change set points or configuration,


Xpert Software.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Figure 4.3-15. PowerPort-E EGR-5000 Device Planning
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
4.3-21
Sheet 04 113
Technical Data and SpecificationsEGR-4000
Table 4.3-6. EGR-4000 Specifications
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage:
Digital Inputs
24270 Vdc/48230 Vac
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case

of supply failure:
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
Power Consumption
Power
Power
at In = 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
at In = 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Max. input voltage:

Input current:
Reaction time:
Fallback time:
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Terminals:
Zone Interlocking
300 Vdc/259 Vac
<4 mA
<20 ms
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Min. 19.2 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Min. 42.6 Vdc
Max. 21.3 Vdc

Zone out:
0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Zone in:
Max. input voltage:
+5.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation:
2.5 kV AC
Connection:
(twisted pair)

Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
Screw-type terminal
Baud rates:
Handshake:
Connection:
115,200 Baud
RTS and CTS
Relay Outputs
RS-485
Continuous current:
Max. make current:
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
5A AC/DC
0.3A DC at 300V
Switching capacity:
1250 VA
Contact type:
Terminals:
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fiber Optic
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: ST-plug
URTD-Interface
Connection:
Versatile link
10

30C to +70C
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
at Ann. average:
<75% rel.
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
may be necessary.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04114
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Voltage Protection Relay
September 2011
4.4-1
Sheet 04 115
General DescriptionVR-300
VR-300 Multifunctional
Voltage Relay
Features
Over-/undervoltage monitoring
(59/27)
Over-/underfrequency monitoring
(81O/U)
Voltage asymmetry monitoring (47)
Sync-check (25)fixed to relay 3
Typical Nameplate
Zero voltage monitoring: dead

bus start functionality (close CB
to dead bus)
Two configurable relays
Discrete input for blocking of
protective functions or remote
acknowledgment
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
VR-300
General Description
The VR-300 is an industrial grade

protective relay that offers multiple
protective features in a single package,
ideal for stand-alone protection or for the
implementation of transfer schemes.
8
9
Using a digital processor to

measure true rms values enables
a high degree of measuring accuracy
regardless of harmonics, transients
or disturbing pulses.
The compact size and multiple
functions of the VR-300 help to
simplify switchgear design. The
digital display offers a user-friendly
interface to set up the unit as well
as to monitor the operation and
display any alarms.
10
11
Figure 4.4-1. Typical VR-300 Nameplate
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

4.4-2
September 2011
Sheet 04 116
Technical DataVR-300
Technical Data
Table 4.4-1. VR-300 Specifications
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Specification
Measuring Voltage
Standard (Vrated) wye/delta
Maximum value Vph-ph maximum, (UL/cUL)
66/115 Vac
Rated Voltage Vph-ground
50 Vac/2.5 kV
Maximum 150 Vac
Rated surge voltage
2.5 kV
Measuring frequency
40.0 to 80.0 Hz
Accuracy
Class 1
Linear measuring range

Input resistance
1.3 x Vrated
0.21M ohms
Maximum power consumption per path
< 0.15W
Ambient Variables
Wide range power supply
90 to 250 Vac/Vdc
Intrinsic consumption
Maximum 12 VA
Ambient temperature
Storage: 30 to +80C (22 to +176F)

Operational: 20 to +70C (4 to +158F)
Ambient humidity
95%, noncondensing
Maximum altitude
6562 ft (2000m)
Degree of pollution
Discrete InputsIsolated
Input range (Vcont, discrete input)
Rated voltage 18 to 250 Vac/Vdc
Input resistance
Approximately 68K ohms
Relay OutputsPotential Free
9
10
Contact material
AgCdO
General purpose (GP) (Vcont, relay output)
AC: 2.00A AC at 250 Vac

DC: 2.00A DC at 24 Vdc, 0.22A DC at 125 Vdc, 0.10A DC at 250 Vdc
Pilot duty (PD) (Vcont, relay output)
AC: B300
DC: 1.00A DC at 24 Vdc, 0.22A DC at125 Vdc, 0.10A DC at 250 Vdc
Housing
11
12
13
Type
APRANORM DIN 43 700
Dimensions (W x H x D)
3.78 x 2.84 x 5.20 in. (96 x 72 x 132 mm)
Front panel cutout (W x H)
3.62 [+0.03) x 2.68 [+0.03] in. (92 [+0.8] x 68 [+0.7] mm)
Wiring
Screw-type, terminals 0.0039 in.2 (2.5 mm2)
Recommended tightening torque
0.369 ft/lbs (0.5 Nm). Use 60/75C (140/167F) copper wire only.
Use Class 1 wire only (or equivalent)
Weight
Approximately 2.14 lbs (800g)
Protection
14
15
16
17
18
Protection system
IP42 from front with correct mounting

IP54 from front with gasket (gasket: P/N 8923-1036) IP20 from back
Front foil
Insulating surface
EMC-test (CE)
Tested according to applicable EN guidelines
Listings
CE marking; UL listing for ordinary locations, UL/cUL listed, ordinary locations,

File No.: E231544
Additional approvals
IEEE C37.90.1 and C37.90.2
Reference Conditions
Table 4.4-2. Reference Conditions

Measuring
Value
Display
Range
Accuracy
The data apply to the following

reference conditions:
40.0 to 80.0 Hz
0.05 Hz
0 to 520,
0 to 65 kV
1%
Frequency
fL1, fL2, fL3
Voltage
19
VL1, VL2, VL3,

VL12, VL23, VL31
20
Accuracy depending on the configured

transformer ratio.
Input voltage = sinusoidal

rated voltage
Frequency = rated frequency 2%
Power supply = rated voltage 2%
Power factor cos = 1
Ambient temperature 23C 2K
Warm-up period = 20 minutes
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
4.4-3
Sheet 04 117
Technical DataVR-300
i
ii
1
Measuring Voltage L3
70 71 72
Synchronizing Voltage L3
The synchronizing voltage must be connected

3-phase if the measuring voltage is connected
3-phase (N not connected). If the measuring
voltage is connected 4-phase (L1, L2, L3, N),
the synchronizing voltage may be connected
2-phase (L1-L2). L3 is connected only for
compensation and is not measured.
5 6 7 8
2/3
Synchronizing System (Fixed)
Not Measured.
90 to 250 Vac/dc
0 Vdc
Blocking of protective functions
or remote acknowledgement.
3
Relay 3
(Fixed to synch-check
zero voltage configurable)
Relay 2
Relay 1
(Ready for Operation)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(Measuring Voltage N)
Measuring Voltage
3-Wire or
4-Wire System
VR-300 (Multi-Function Voltage Relay)
1 2 3 4
3/4
CB
Supervised System (Variable) 3/4
Wiring Diagram
4
5
6
7
8
Measuring Voltage: 100 Vac

The socket for the PC parameterization
is situated on the side of the unit. This is
where the DPC must be plugged in.
Subject to Technical Modifications.
9
10
11
Figure 4.4-2. VR-300 Wiring Diagram
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.4-4

September 2011
Sheet 04 118
General DescriptionTC-100
i
ii
TC-100 Transformer
Temperature Controller for
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TC-100
General Description
The TC-100 Transformer Temperature
Controller monitors up to three ventilated dry-type transformer windings
and one ambient temperature. The
TC-100 operates relays by comparing
the highest winding temperature to
stored set point temperatures and
displays four thermocouple inputs,
as well as the stored maximum
temperature and its associated winding. The unit provides fans, alarm and
trip output relays. Up to two fans can
be controlled via the TC-100. Each fan
operating contact is fuse protected.
A yellow LED indicates that fans are
on. A fan exerciser turns the fans on
automatically at periodic intervals to
prevent fan motor seizing (on-time
and interval is programmable).
Form C contacts are provided for

notification of alarm conditions. A
red LED illuminates to indicate that the
alarm is actuated. An internal audible
alarm also sounds when the unit goes
into alarm condition. This audible
buzzer can be silenced without canceling the alarm. The alarm and trip relays
can be configured as a fail-safe relay
(normally energized when the unit is
powered up). For example, if the alarm
relay was configured as a fail-safe; if
supply control power to the TC-100 is
interrupted, the alarm relay changes
state for notification of this condition.
The alarm circuit is also used for
notification of an open or a missing
thermocouple. If a thermocouple were
to open, the alarm relay operates and
the corresponding channel will read -
on the LED display. It is important to
note that a failed thermocouple
will not cause the device to trip the
transformer offline.
Form C contacts are provided to trip
the transformer offline if any of the
winding temperatures exceed the trip
setting. A red LED indicates that the
trip relay has actuated.

Control
Metering
A test function is provided to: test the

digital display and all of the LEDs;
simulate over-temperature conditions;
and check the internal temperature of
the monitor.
The TC-100 has built-in monitoring

functions and logging functions to
help you shed some light on the
unknowns of the operation of your
transformer. Temperature trending lets
you understand the hour of the day
that the transformer runs hotter, and
modify its loading to extend the life of
your transformer; logging information
lets you restore the operation of your
system faster, by letting you correlate
tripping and alarming events to the
overall conditions of your system;
and fan wear information can be
used to perform preventive maintenance to increase the uptime in
your transformers.
USB port in the front

Modbus-RTU communications
Programming and monitoring
software (the unit can be completely
programmed through the front of
the unit)
420 mA output for integration with
SCADA systems
Hardware
19
20
Trending
Fan failure
Fan wear
Alarm log
Trip log
Test mode
Detect failed sensors
Self-diagnostics
Communications
21
Average temperature
(all three windings)
Maximum instantaneous
temperature (all three windings)
Maximum temperature memory
per winding
Fans hours of operation
Winding 1, Winding 2, Winding 3
and ambient temperature
Monitoring
A 420 mA analog signal is provided

for remote indication or for use with
SCADA systems.
18
Thermocouple inputs (E or K type

thermocouples)
Automatic correlation throughout
entire temperature range to
compensate for thermocouple
non-linearity
Programmable on and off set points
Alarm relay for remote monitoring
Trip relay for remote monitoring
Two fan power relays
Fan failure detection to start a
backup fan or alarm
Fan exerciser (cycle time and
duration) to reduce fan wear
Fans can be operated automatically
or manually
One trip relay (Form C)

One alarm relay (Form C)
Two power fan relays (1 NO each)
Two digital inputs
420 mA output for integration with
SCADA systems
Local Alarm 95 db
Available in semi-flush or hinge
panel-mounting versions
CA08104001E

September 2011
4.4-5
Sheet 04 119
Technical DataTC-100
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 4.4-3. TC-100 External Wiring Diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Figure 4.4-4. Programming and Monitoring Software
20
21
CA08104001E

4.4-6
September 2011
Sheet 04 120
Technical DataTC-100
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Table 4.4-3. TC-100 Technical Specifications
Description
Nominal rating
120 Vac or 240 Vac (+10%, 25%)
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Power use
15 VA maximum
Operating range
120 Vac: 90132 Vac

240 Vac:180264 Vac
Ride-through time
20 cycles at nominal Vac
Environmental
30 to +72C
Storage temperature
50 to +72C
Relative humidity
0 to 90% (noncondensing)
Measurement Accuracy
Temperature
11
Number of inputs
Two programmable
Rating
1.2 VA at 120 Vac

Max. OFF = 36 Vac
Min. ON = 86 Vac
(built in power source available)
Outputs
Output fans
Two individually configurable SPST contacts rated 30A at 120/240 Vac, 1 hp at 120 Vac, 2 hp at
240 Vac for each contact
Output alarm
One SPDT contact rated 10A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) configurable for normal or
fail-safe operations
Output alarm
One SPDT contact rated 10A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) configurable for normal of
fail-safe operation
Remote analog output
420 mA into a load of up to 1000 ohms max. proportional to hottest winding temperature 1%
EMC
Immunity
12
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-11
14
16
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-2002 - Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) tests for protective relays
and relay systems
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2-2004, standard withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic
interference from transceivers
13
15
1C one count under normal conditions

2C one count under extreme conditions
Extreme conditions are:
Ambient temperature colder than 10C
Winding to unit temperature greater than 210C
Discrete Inputs
9
10
Specification
Control Power
Emissions
ESD
RF Radiated immunity
EFT/Burst immunity
Surge immunity
RF conducted immunity
Power frequency magnetic field immunity
Voltage variation immunity
EN 50011 CISPR-11, Class A

CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
Clock
Accuracy
+/1 1 minute/month at 25C
Logging
17
18
Trend data
100 entries, logging interval programmable from 1 minute to 30 days
Alarm events
Last 25 alarm events
Trip events
Last 25 trip events
19
20
21
Table 4.4-4. Catalog Ordering Information for TC-100 Transformer

Temperature Controller for Dry-Type Transformers
Description
Catalog
Number
Barrier cabinet
Controller only (semi flush mounting) TC-100
Controller with barrier cabinet (hinge front panel)
TC-100-Barrier
TC-100
TC-101
CA08104001E

September 2010
4.5-1
Sheet 04 121
General DescriptionInsulGard
InsulGard
InsulGard
General Description
The InsulGard is a continuous
partial discharge monitor that can be
applied to a variety of medium voltage
electrical equipment rated 4 kV to
38 kV. It is commonly applied to
motors, generators, switchgear, bus
duct, unit substations and cable
systems. The InsulGard will monitor
the quality of insulation while the
equipment is in service under normal
operating conditions. Through monitoring, it can ascertain the relative
condition of insulation, the deterioration of which is the leading cause of
electrical failures.
The InsulGard system consists of
sensors and a monitor. The monitor
can be used as a stand-alone unit, or
it can be wired so that it can remotely
upload data to your system or to Eaton
diagnostics personnel for analysis.
While the sensors vary according to
application, they are all designed
to detect partial dischargesthe
foundation of the InsulGard technology and one of the best predictors
of insulation breakdown.
The term partial discharge is a

common name for small electrical
discharges (arcs) that typically occur
within or between insulation materialsusually across a void in the
insulation. Partial discharge is also
referred to as corona or surface tracking. The visible evidence of corona
presents itself as white, powdery
residue, typically found on the end
windings of motors or generators.
Surface-tracking damage appears as
tree-like, jagged lines, typically found
on switchgear and bus ducts. Surface
tracking stems from a contaminated
insulation surface, often started by
corona. The small arcing activity on
the surface of the insulation contributes to further burning, resulting in
additional stress points that promote
further deterioration. Both corona
and surface tracking are the primary
causes of insulation breakdown,
which can lead to full discharges and
electrical failures. It is important to
note that traditional methods of
detecting corona and surface-tracking
damage require taking equipment
offline. It also requires disassembling
the equipmenta costly procedure.
Moreover, corona and surface tracking
damage have to be severe to be
visible. The InsulGard system allows
you to detect partial discharge while
the electrical system is energized. It
does so by detecting and analyzing the
radio signal frequencies emitted by the
partial discharges. More specifically,
the InsulGard focuses on the 1 MHz to
20 MHz bandwidth range where the
majority of partial-discharge activity
can be detected. InsulGard allows
predictive analysis and maintenance
as opposed to preventive analysis and
time-based maintenance.
The detection of partial discharge on
equipment can indicate if a problem
exists. Even more useful is information
that can correlate the signal intensity
(measured in milliwatts) associated
with partial discharges to various
states of insulation degradation on
similar equipment. Eatons Predictive
Diagnostics Group has studied
numerous cases of partial discharge
on rotating equipment and switchgear.
The knowledge base accumulated has
allowed Eaton to develop guidelines
and parameters to help one determine
the seriousness (failure-time windows)
of the partial-discharge activity that
the equipment may be exhibiting.
Because it is a continuous, online
monitoring system, it is easy to
monitor conditions over time.
Eatons InsulGard is a stand-alone

microprocessor-controlled continuous
partial discharge monitoring device
for a wide range of medium voltage
power equipment. It is designed
to provide an alarm based on PD
characteristics at an early stage of
insulation degradation. It measures
partial discharges from up to 15
different partial discharge sensors
and stores the information in internal
memory, alarming users if any set
points are exceeded. InsulGard can
work with constant 50/60 Hz frequency
powered equipment, as well as with
variable frequency applications.
Various PD sensor types can be used,
depending on the application.
InsulGard has three auxiliary inputs
for PD data correlation to additional
parameters. One of the inputs is
designated for temperature, where
the other two are commonly used for
load, voltage or humidity depending
upon the application. InsulGard has
several interfaces that allow for easy
implementation into any alarm or
SCADA system:
Three C-form dry relay contacts
provide Yellow or Red alarm indication, and the Device Status relay
indicates any device malfunction
420 mA optically isolated output
can be configured to represent
Partial Discharge Intensity (PDI)
or maximum discharge magnitude
to any SCADA system
RS-485 optically isolated interface
based on Modbus RTU protocol
allows for remote device configuration and data download. InsulGard
can be networked with an existing
Modbus, allowing for up to 231
addressable devices
Ethernet port, Web page, FTP or
Modbus TCP
Communication protocol includes

Modbus, proprietary binary and ASCII
text options allowing a software
programmer to build InsulGard into
a high-level software program using
simple text type commands. InsulGard
is supplied with database software
that allows for automated communication to a device or several devices
for data acquisition and analysis.
The software allows for either direct
network or dialup connection to a
device by a regular telephone landline
or a cellular connection.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.5-2

September 2010
Sheet 04 122
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
InsulGard has 15 signal inputs

(Ch1Ch15) for partial discharge
measurement and a noise input
dedicated for noise suppression
(Ch16). All 16 inputs have identical
conditioning circuits (CC) providing
signal isolation, transient suppression
and high-pass filtering of the input
signals. The frequency band of the
InsulGard is from 1 MHz to 20 MHz.
InsulGard acquires PD data in the form
of three dimensional phase-resolved
pulse height distribution (PRPHD)
PD pulse count as a function of pulse
magnitude and 60(50) Hz phase. It has
24 (15) phase windows and a magnitude dynamic range of about 70 dB,
divided in 21 magnitude windows.
The data can be stored in the internal
device memory in the form of threedimensional PRPHD matrixes and/or
in the brief form of integral quantities
derived from these matrixes. Each
record is accompanied by three
additional correlation parameters.
Before each measurement, InsulGard
performs self-calibration and self-test.
If any problem is detected, the status
relay dry contacts will open and an
appropriate message will appear on
the InsulGard display. Loss of power
will be indicated in the same way by
opening status relay contacts.
InsulGard measures signals from
signal inputs sequentially multiplexing
them to a single metering channel.
Each pulse from each sensor is
validated by the allowed pulse width.
In the case of non-compliance,
InsulGard will not count the pulse.
After each measurement, data from

all active signal channels will be
compared to alarm thresholds. If any
of the Yellow threshold limits are
exceeded, the Warning LED will be
turned on and the Warning relay dry
contacts will close. In the case of a
Red level achieved, InsulGard will
trigger additional measurement and,
if confirmed, an Alarm LED will be
turned on and the Alarm relay dry
contacts will close. If Red alarm is
detected, full measurement data will
be stored in the memory.
Fullduring this mode PRPDD

is stored in the memory with the
mentioned above parameters for
each active channel and every
measurement.
PD measurements can be performed

on a time schedule (up to 50 per day)
or in specified time intervals (from
1 minute to 23 hours 59 minutes).
Four measurements per day are
recommended.
InsulGard has two Megabytes of

internal flash memory for data storage
allowing for its standalone operation.
When the memory is filled, the device
starts replacing the oldest data with
the latest data. The rate of the memory
consumption depends upon a number
of active channels, frequency of
measurements, and frequency of
PRPDD storage. As an example, if all
15 channels are active for measurements four times a day and PRPDD
are stored twice a month, the device
holds 17 months of the latest PD data
in its internal memory. All stored data
and settings can be accessed from
the keypad, or remotely from a PC.
Between scheduled measurements,

the High Alarm feature is enabled.
All signal sensors are connected to
a summation unit and further to a
separate High Alarm channel.
InsulGard continuously searches for
an appearance of high magnitude
pulses and pulse series. Magnitude
threshold and repetition in series are
configurable. If five events of pulse
series were detected between the
scheduled measurements, InsulGard
will trigger a full PD measurement,
and display an alarm, if any.
Briefin order to save a memory,

PRPDD can be stored in the memory
several times a month. An operator
should set a number of days and a
measurement number at the current
day for storing PRPDD. During the
remaining measurements, InsulGard
will store the brief version of PD data.
Full PD measurement by InsulGard

involves a measurement of statistical
Phase Resolved Partial Discharge
Distribution (PRPDD) for every active
channel. After each measurement
for every active channel, InsulGard
calculates PDI, Maximum PD magnitude, PD pulse repetition rate, and
trend parameters (rate of PD parameter
change). The calculated parameters
are compared to alarm set points
and alarm status is determined. All
calculated and alarm status parameters
are stored in the internal memory for
each measurement. Additionally, three
auxiliary parameters (temperature,
% of full load current and operating
voltage or humidity) are assigned to
the measurement data. PRPDD can,
optionally, be stored in the internal
memory. There are two modes of PD
data storage Brief and Full.
19
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2010

4.5-3
Sheet 04 123
Alarms
InsulGard has two configurable alarms,
Red and Yellow, that connect to two
C-form relays. There are two groups of
parameters that can generate an alarm.
One is if an alarm set point is exceeded
(Partial Discharge Intensity (PDI) and its
trend or PD pulse magnitude and its
trend). One of two, PDI or Magnitude,
can be configured for alarm at one
time. The same parameter is configured for 420 mA interface output
automatically. 420 mA output provides
a signal with the slope of 10% of Red
Alarm Threshold per 1mAmp. That
means that Red alarm threshold
corresponds to 14 mA output.
Alarm set points for PDI are represented in terms of mW. Magnitude is
represented in terms of mV.
Trend is set in terms of times per year
for both PDI and Magnitude. Alarm on
trend is enabled after a training period
of 1/3 of the trend-sliding window.
Yellow and Red alarms operate differently. In the case of a Yellow alarm, it
will appear on the corresponding relay
as received. In the case of a Red alarm,
InsulGard will initiate an additional
measurement at the time of alarm,
and only if confirmed, will indicate the
alarm by relay. If the Red alarm is not
confirmed, the status of the alarm will
be set per the last measurement. If at
any measurement the alarm status will
be reduced, InsulGard will indicate the
reduced alarm status with both an
alarm LED reading and relay.
Alarm relays can operate in two
modes (configurable). Relays lock
in an alarm status received at the
last measurements, until the next
measurement. Or a relay can operate
for a limited configurable time and
then open the contacts. At the next
measurement, if an alarm status is
detected, relays will hold the alarm
contacts closed for the same time.
Trend
InsulGard calculates trend of a
parameter enabled for alarm. Trend
is normalized to the value of the
parameter change in times per year.
Trend has two alarm thresholds,
Yellow and Red, connected to alarm
relays and also to the alarm status LED
at the front panel of the device. Trend
is calculated as a linear approximation
of data over specified time interval
(default is 18 weeks). This 18-week
time window is sliding over time while
device monitors partial discharges.
Continuous Watch Feature

Between the scheduled measurements
the Continuous Watch feature (High
Alarm) is initiated. At this time all
signal sensors are summarized and
connected to the separate High Alarm
channel. InsulGard is continuously
watching for the events of high
magnitude pulses (configurable)
and their series. If five series of such
events are detected, InsulGard starts
full PD measurement and, in the case
of Red alarm confirmation, InsulGard
indicates this alarm and stores full PD
data in the internal device memory.
Schedule
PD measurements can be performed
at specified times during a day or
time interval basis (configurable).
The device is shipped with time
basis schedule enabled and set to
record measurements four times a
day. This is sufficient for all common
applications.
If necessary, InsulGard can be set to
measure up to 50 times per day at
scheduled times or in specific time
intervals varying from 1 minute to
23 hours 59 minutes.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

4.5-4
September 2010
Sheet 04 124
Technical DataInsulGard
i
ii
1
2

Table 4.5-1. Power Source Specifications
Description
Specification
Applications
HV and MV equipment (motors including VFD), switchgears, generators, bus

ducts, cable terminations, transformers, est.)
Mounting options
In NEMA 4X enclosure. On the panel. Door (Flash) mount
Installation category
II
Pollution degree
Temperature range
40C to +70C (+85C without enclosure)
Relative humidity
0%RH90%RH
Maximum altitude
6562 ft (2000m)
Power source
115V / 230 Vac 10%
Power consumption of device (VA max)
15 VA
Fuse inside InsulGard case: 20 mm, 250 Vac, time lag 5TS type by BEL Inc.
For 115 Vac5ST200-R (200 mA)

For 230 Vac5ST125-R (125 mA)
Input fuse on the panel (panel mount option): 20 mm, 250 Vac, Fast fuse 5MF
type by BEL Inc. (A maximum output current from outlet for 115 Vac3A)
Display
5MF 3 R (3 A)
Keypad
Four arrows and four functional keys
LEDs (normal, warning (Alarm 1) or Alarm (Alarm 2) conditions, memory and

setting modes
Five LEDs
60 / 50 Hz
6
7
8
Graphic dot display, two lines
Approximate Size (Length x Width x Height) and Weight

Main unit
9.20 x 7.00 x 2.50 inches (23.4 x 17.8 x 6.4 cm), 4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
Door-mount option (main unit with sensor interface board)
Panel-mount option
Enclosure (NEMA 4X) mount option
PD Measurement Parameters
9
10
PD channels
15
Noise channel
Continuous watch (high PD activity) channel
Basic type of data
Phase-resolved PD distribution
PD channel dynamic range
68 dB
11
Number of magnitude windows (3.23 dB each)
21
Number of phase windows (15 each)
24
Power frequency at a monitored equipment
320 Hz, 20400 Hz
12
Synchronization type
Internal and external
Maximum measured pulse repetition rate
367,300 pulses/second at 60 Hz
306,000 pulses/second at 50 Hz
13
Calculated parameters for each PD channel
Partial discharge intensity (PDI) or maximum pulse magnitude (Q max),

Pulse repetition rate (pps), Trend
Alarming parameters
PDI, Qmax, Trend
Data record types
Full/Brief
Internal data memory allows for up to 1000 days data storage at

four measurements per day
Self-test and self-calibration
2 MB
At powering up and before every measurement
Setup
Configurable from keypad and PC
Allowed RG-58 coaxial cable length to PD sensors
Up to 150 ft (46m)
14
15
16
17
18
Auxiliary Inputs
Input specified for temperature measurement calibrated for 100 ohm platinum
RTD sensor
Analog inputs specified for current, voltage or humidity measurement
USB Host
For future use
Interfaces
C-form dry-type relays for device status, warning (Alarm 1) and alarm (Alarm 2)
PD levels (fully configurable)
3
120 Vac/ 5A
28 Vdc/ 5A
For other ratings refer to the relay specification
420 mA isolated interface represents highest PDI or max. magnitude

as % of the alarm (Alarm 2) threshold
RS-485 interface optically isolated (231 addresses)
Slope is 1 mA per 10%
Ethernet
Modbus-TCP, Web page, FTP
USB
PC connection
USB host
For future use
19
20
21
Communication Protocol: Modbus RTU, binary, text commands
CA08104001E
September 2010

4.5-5
Sheet 04 125
Product SelectionInsulGard
General Notes
The three basic InsulGard packages
are Switchgear Applications,
Motor Applications and Generator
Applications. At the beginning of
each section to follow are the basic
components typically found in each
type of application.
Switchgear Applications
Switchgear Applications have three
typical components: InsulGard
Switchgear Package, Coupling
Capacitor Sensors and RFCT Sensors.
lnsulGard Systems for Switchgear
Applications are sold as packages.
Packages provide greater value.
Standard Equipment with the
lnsulGard Switchgear Package is
shown in Table 4.5-3.
Table 4.5-2. Standard Equipment
Description
Quantity
InsulGard
Humidity sensor mounted as specified
Temperature mounted as specified
RS-485 communication port
InsulGard software CD
Set of instruction manuals
Description
Catalog
Number
Door-mount InsulGard for mounting onto indoor cabinet door cut-out, includes:
RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol
Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports
Embedded temperature and humidity sensors
InsulGard software CD and one set of instruction manuals
PD-IG-S-E0
Back-panel-mount (no enclosure) for installing InsulGard into an existing enclosure,

includes:
Embedded temperature and humidity sensors
InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals
PD-IG-S-E1
InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes:

External temperature and humidity sensors (PD-SR-TS, PD-SR-HS)
PD-IG-S-E2
ii
1
Table 4.5-3. InsulGard Switchgear PackagesOrder PD Sensors Separately
5
6
7
8
9
Table 4.5-4. Communication Options

Description
Catalog
Number
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS-485 port for extended length,

remote connection to PC USB port
PD-USB
Advanced RS-232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV

(installed on back panel except for door-mounted IG it must be mounted separately)
PD-MODEM
11
12
Table 4.5-5. Auxiliary (Dynamic) Sensors

Description
10
Catalog
Number
Auxiliary Sensors for InsulGard, BushingGard

External temperature sensor for InsulGard (TS)
Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet
PD-SR-TS
External humidity sensor for InsulGard (HS)

PD-SR-HS
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes Current Transformer (CT), rated 5A,
with ID = 0.50 inches
Connect to secondary winding of the motor (or generator) current transformer
Note: Differential current transformer cant be used
PD-SR-CT
Split (Flex)Core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT.

Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for load measurement
if the motor/generator current transformer cant be used
(Order separately if required)
PD-SR-CTF
13
14
15
16
Note: In switchgear applications, humidity and temperature sensors are installed in the same
switchgear cubicle (embedded) with the InsulGard.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
4.5-6

September 2010
Sheet 04 126
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Catalog
Number
InsulGard Partial Discharge Sensors

IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor
Set of three 5 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit
Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet
PD-SR-IPDS-5

PD-SR-IPDS-7

PD-SR-IPDS-15

PD-SR-IPDS-27

PD-SR-IPDS-38
Note: The number of cubicles will determine the number of coupling capacitors required for
the project. One set of three coupling capacitors is required for every three vertical structures.
The catalog numbered set includes mounting kits, boots, cables and the like.
Table 4.5-7. RFCT Sensor
7
8
9
10
11
Motor Applications
Table 4.5-6. Coupling Capacitors Sensors
Description
Catalog
Number
0.75-inch diameter RFCT,

default cable length 65 feet
PD-SR-RFCT-075
The number of RFCTs required

is determined by what cables the
customer wants to protect (to protect
secondary cables leaving the switchgear, incoming feeder cables to the
main breaker/switch, etc.). There will
be one RFCT per cubicle to protect
the cabling (even if there are multiple
cables per phase).
The length of cable or sensitivity

zone of protection depends upon the
type of cable, the number of splices,
and the number of taps. PLIC Type
Cable is protected up to maximum
of 1500 ft. EPR (rubber composition)
distances are shorter with protection
up to a maximum of 300 ft.
In figures shown below, the lnsulGard
is protecting the six vertical section
switchgear layout with the two sets of
coupling capacitors and is protecting
the feeder cables via the RFCTs installed
on the power cable shield. An exploded
view of the RFCT is also shown.
Generally, the Motor Application

components list consists of just the
InsulGard Package itself. In some
applications, the customer may
want to monitor the cable feeding
the motor. In those cases, one will
need to add the line item for the
appropriate RFCT.
InsulGard Systems for Motor
lnsulGard Motor Package is shown
in Table 4.5-8.
Description
Quantity
InsulGard
NEMA 4X enclosure
Set of three coupling capacitors
Coupling capacitor mounting kit

(cabling, hardware,
boots, connectors)
RTD module (six inputs)
External mount humidity sensor

(65 ft cable pigtail included)
Temperature sensor
(65 ft cable pigtail included)
lnsulGard software CD
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Typical Installation of RFCT Sensor
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2010
4.5-7
Sheet 04 127
Table 4.5-9. InsulGard Motor Packages
Description
Catalog
Number
InsulGard Motor Kits
i
ii
Stator RTD number 8

Motor voltage 15 kV
For motors with Stator RTD number 9 order additional PD-SR-RTD-6

One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17
One RTD-6 sensor board PD-SR-RTD-6
Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT)
PD-IG-M-E2-A1

One RTD-6 sensor board (PD-SR-RTD-6)
External humidity sensor (PD-SR-HS)
Cable for spare stator RTD for temp sensor input
PD-IG-M-E2-A2

Split core CT (PD-SR-CTF)
PD-IG-M-E2-A2-CTF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
Catalog
Number
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS-485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port
PD-USB
Advanced RS-232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV

PD-MODEM
11
12

Catalog
Number
13

PD-SR-TS
14

PD-SR-HS
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes current transformer (CT), rated 5A, with ID = 0.50-inches
Note: Differential current transformer can't be used
PD-SR-CT
Description
15
16
Split (flex)core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT.

PD-SR-CTF
Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for load measurement if the motor/generator current transformer can't be used
17
Note: In most motor applications, the humidity and temperature sensors will be external to the InsulGard Enclosure (typically field mounted in
cable termination compartment) and shipped with a 65 foot coaxial pigtail. Mounting in the same cubicle as the lnsulGard is not typical for
motor applications. Also please indicate if CT input is customer furnished or must be supplied and what type it is/should be.
18
Table 4.5-12. RFCT Sensor
19
Description
Catalog
Number
0.75-Inch diameter RFCT, default cable length 65 feet
PD-SR-RFCT-075
20
21
CA08104001E
4.5-8

September 2010
Sheet 04 128
i
ii
1
The length of cable or sensitivity

zone of protection depends upon the
type of cable, the number of splices,
and the number of taps. PLIC Type
Cable is protected up to maximum
of 1500 ft. EPR (rubber composition)
distances are shorter with protection
up to a maximum of 300 ft.
2
3
4
5
6
Generator Applications
Typically, the Generator Package

components list consists of the
InsulGard Package and occasionally
additional sets of coupling capacitors.
For part numbers of additional sets
of coupling capacitors, please see
Switchgear Applications Section on
Page 4.5-5.
Description
Quantity
InsulGard
NEMA 4X enclosure
lnsulGard Systems for Generator

lnsulGard Generator Package is
shown in Table 4.5-13.
RTD module (six inputs)
External mount humidity sensor (

65 cable pigtail included)
Temperature sensor
(65 cable pigtail included)
Set of three coupling capacitors
Coupling capacitor mounting kit

(cabling, hardware,
boots, connectors)
lnsulGard software CD
Table 4.5-14. Generator Packages

Description
Catalog
Number
InsulGard Generator Kits (Air-Cooled)Voltage 27 kV
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

PD-IG-M-E2-A1

One RTD-6 sensor board (PD-SR-RTD-6)
PD-IG-M-E2-A2
InsulGard Generator Kits (Air-Cooled)Voltage 27 kV

One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-27)
Two RTD-6 sensor boards (PD-SR-RTD-6)
Auxiliary sensors set (PD-SR-A1)
PD-IG-GV-E2-A1

One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-27)
Auxiliary sensors set A2 (PD-SR-A2)
PD-IG-GV-E2-A2
InsulGard Generator Kit (Hydrogen-Cooled)Voltage 16 kV

InsulGard inside NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes:
PD-IG-HC-E2-A3
21
CA08104001E
September 2010

4.5-9
Sheet 04 129
Description
Catalog
Number
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port
PD-USB
Advanced RS232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV

PD-MODEM
i
ii
1

Description
Catalog
Number

PD-SR-TS

PD-SR-HS
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes current transformer (CT), rated 5A, with ID = 0.50-inches
Note: Differential current transformer cant be used
PD-SR-CT
Split (Flex) - Core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT.

Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for Load measurement if the
motor/generator current transformer cant be used
PD-SR-CTF
3
4
5
Note: In most generator applications, the humidity and temperature sensors will be external to the InsulGard enclosure {typically field
mounted in cable termination compartment} and shipped with a 65-foot coaxial pigtail. Mounting in the same cubicle as the lnsulGard is not
typical for generator applications. Also, please indicate if CT input is customer furnished or must be supplied and what type it is/should be.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2010
Sheet 04 130
Connection DiagramInsulGard
Connection Wiring Diagram
ii
1
2
Modem TD-34
3
4
InsulGard Panel Wiring Diagram

IWD115-M
RJ-11
N
Phone
Cable
L
Local
Port
RS485
2
1
Cables
from:
Ref
9
10
11 +5 H%
12 S
Sw
Ref
H%
13
Ch14
RS485-A(+)
11
12
RS485-B(-)
12
13
RS485-ISOGND
13
14
ALARM - NC
14
15
ALARM - COM
15
16
ALARM - NO
16
17
WARNING-NC
17
18
WARNING-COM
18
19
WARNING-N0
19
20
STATUS-NC
20
21
STATUS-COM
21
22
STATUS-NO
22
23
NOT/USED
23
24
NOT/USED
24
4-20
mA
K
C
A
B
RS-485
RED
to temporary
broughtScrew
Ground
laptop
on back
cover
LINE
29
NEUTRAL
31
GROUND
GREEN
DIN RAIL
GROUND
FUSES:
Inside InsulGard for 115 Vac Application: Time-Lag 80 mA, 250 Vac, 5 x 20 mm, 195 Series by Wickmann (DigiKey.com, Part No: WK5026-ND)
16
17
27
28
30
GREEN
ENCLOSURE,
PANEL
GROUND
26
WHITE
14
GR
25
RED
GREEN
15
Humidity
sensor
11
Alarm 2
Alarm
PC cable
Ch15
Ch16
(Noise)
115 VAC
8 S2
H%(SIG)-BLACK
RED
7 S1
12
Ch13
H%(+5V)-RED
CT-Load
sensor
GREEN
CT
H%(GND)-WHITE 6
WHITE
Ch12
WHITE
5
6
LOAD-GND-BLACK 5
GREEN
11
RTD
3
4
10
Ch11
LOAD-SIG-RED
4-20mA- (-)
Ch10
RTD-RED
4-20mA- (+)
Ch9
RTD
Temperature
Sensor
9
+
Alarm 1
Ch8
Warning
Ch7
R3
Ch6
Power
10
Ch5
InsulGard
ALL
BLUE
Ch4
Status
Ch3
Connector to Interface Board
Sensor Interface Board
Connector to InsulGard
X2
Ch2
RTD-BLACK
10
X1
Ch1
Coax cables from PD Sensors ##1-16
RTD-WHITE
+5
DIN-Rail Terminal Strip
RED
BLACK
On the Panel: Fast Acting 3.0A, 250 Vac, 5 x 20 mm, 191 Series by Wickman (DigiKey Part No: WK4714-ND).
Figure 4.5-1. Typical Connection Diagram
Notes
18
19
20
21
1. Modem with Power Module are installed if ordered.

2. On motors, an unused RTD can be used as the temperature
sensor (wire colors in brackets relate only to TS sensor).
3. In switchgears current sensor (CT) is not used, and if
panel is installed without an enclosure, the temperature
(TS) and humidity (HS) sensors can be installed directly
on the panel. Use a left fitting (hub) on the enclosure
for power supply cable and for the cables to the relays
(Alarm1&2, R3) and use a right hub for all signal cables.
4. Fuses: Miniature Fuses 5 x 20, 250 Vac, 195 Series by

Wickmann (DistributorDigiKey.com).
5. Fuse inside InsulGard for 120V application200 mA
(DigiKey Part NO: WK5034-ND), for 230 Vac application
80mA (DigiKey Part NO: WK5026-ND). Fuse on a panel:
1.0A (DigiKey Part NO: WK5048-ND).
6. Outlet is not installed for 230 Vac application.
CA08104001E
Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide
5.0-A
September 2011
Sheet 05 001
Medium Voltage Switchgear
Table 5.0-A. Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide

CAG
Tab
Tab
Title
Voltage
Range
Switching Drawout Front/Rear

Device
or Fixed Accessible
VacClad-W Medium Voltage
Drawout Vacuum Breakers
4.7638 kV
Vacuum
breaker
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MEF Front-Access Medium
Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers
4.7615 kV
7.1
MEB Medium Voltage Drawout
Vacuum Breakers
7.2
MSB Medium Voltage Switch- and
Fixed-Mounted Vacuum Breakers
MVS Medium Voltage
Load Interrupter Fusible Switch

Drawout Front & rear

required
Front only
required
Compartmentalized
Breaker Bus
Cable
Area
VTs &
CPTs
Insulated ANSI
Bus
Standards
C37.20.2
Front & rear

required
Switch &
vacuum
breaker
4.7638 kV
Fixed
Fusible
switches
C37.20.2 &
C37.20.3
C37.20.3
ii
1
2
3
Optional front access only designs available.

Available as an option.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
MEB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear
MSB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear
CA08104001E
MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
21
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage
5.0-1
Marc h 2015
VacClad-WMedium Voltage
Sheet 05001
Contents
Metal-Clad Vacuum Breaker SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage
5 and 15 kV Switchgear36.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-4
5 kV Switchgear26.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-8
27 kV Switchgear36.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-9
38 kV Switchgear42.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-10
Arc-Resistant Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
Integral Motorized Remote Racking Option (VC-W MR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-5
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-13
Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-15
Arc-Resistant Switchgear Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-16
Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-17
Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-23
Control Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-25
RelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-27
Main-Tie-Main Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-29
Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-1
5 and 15 kV (Standard Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-1
27 kV (Standard Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-11
38 kV (Standard Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-15
5 and 15 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-18
27 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-29
38 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-33
Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) Room Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-37
Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Tab 12
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16346
Sections 26 13 26
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Arc-Resistant Switchgear
CA08104001E
21
5.0-2

Marc h 2015
Sheet 05 002
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.1-1
Sheet 05 003
General Description
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad

switchgear with Type VCP-W vacuum
breakers provides centralized control
and protection of medium voltage
power equipment and circuits in
industrial, commercial and utility
installations involving generators,
motors, feeder circuits, and transmission and distribution lines.
ii
1
2
VacClad-W switchgear is available in

maximum voltage ratings from 4.76 kV
through 38 kV, and interrupting ratings
as shown below. VacClad-W offers a
total design concept of cell, breaker
and auxiliary equipment, which can be
assembled in various combinations to
satisfy user application requirements.
Two-high breaker arrangements
are standard up to 15 kV. One-high
arrangements can be furnished
when required.
3
4
5
6
7
Ratings
Maximum Voltages:
4.76 kV, 8.25 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV, 38 kV
Typical Indoor Assembly with a Breaker Withdrawn on Rails (Arc Resistant Switchgear)
Interrupting Ratings:
4.76 kV:
8.25 kV:
15.0 kV:
27.0 kV:
38.0 kV:
8
9
Up to 63 kA
Up to 63 kA
Up to 63 kA
Up to 40 kA
Up to 40 kA
Fixed
Stem
Continuous CurrentCircuit Breakers:

1200 A, 2000 A, 3000 A (5 and 15 kV)
4000 A Forced cooled (5 and 15 kV)
1200 A, 2000 A, (27 kV)
600 A, 1200 A, 1600 A, 2000 A,
2500 A (38 kV)
3000 A Forced cooled (38 kV)
10
Contacts
11
Bellows
Shield
12
Movable
Stem
13
Continuous CurrentMain Bus:

1200 A, 2000 A, 3000 A (5 and 15 kV)
4000 A (5 and 15 kV)
1200 A, 2000 A, 2500 A, 2700 A (27 kV)
1200 A, 2000 A, 2500 A, 3000 A (38 kV)
Note: Continuous currents above 4000 A,
contact Eaton.
Certifications
UL and CSA listings are available for

many configurations; consult Eaton
Support Gasket Only

(Seal Formed by Bellows)
VCP-W Circuit Breaker
Cut-Away View of Vacuum Interrupter

(Enlarged to Show Detail)
Advantages
Eaton has been manufacturing metalclad switchgear for over 60 years,
and vacuum circuit breakers for more
than 40 years. Tens of thousands of
Eaton vacuum circuit breakers, used in a
wide variety of applications, have been
setting industry performance standards
for years.
With reliability as a fundamental goal,
Eaton engineers have simplified the
VacClad-W switchgear design to minimize problems and gain trouble-free
performance. Special attention was
given to material quality and maximum

possible use was made of components
proven over the years in Eaton
switchgear.
Maintenance requirements are
minimized by the use of enclosed
long-life vacuum interrupters. When
maintenance or inspection is required,
the component arrangements and
drawers allow easy access. The light
weight of the VacClad-W simplifies
handling and relocation of the breakers.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.1-2

March 2015
Sheet 05 004
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
Eatons VacClad-W switchgear meets or

exceeds ANSI/ IEEE C37.20.2 and
NEMA SG-5 as they apply to metalclad switchgear. The assemblies also
conform to Canadian standard CSAC22.2 No. 31-04, and EEMAC G8-3.2.
Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers
meet or exceed all ANSI and IEEE
standards applicable to AC high
voltage circuit breakers rated on
symmetrical current basis.
Refer to Tab 1 for information on

seismic qualification for this and
other Eaton products.
Compartmentalization
Medium voltage metal-clad switchgear

equipment conforming to C37.20.2 is
a compartmentalized design, wherein
primary conductors are fully insulated
for the rated maximum voltage of the
assembly, and all major primary circuit
components are isolated from each
other by grounded metal barriers.
This type of construction minimizes
the likelihood of arcing faults within
the equipment and propagation of
fault between the compartments
containing major primary circuits.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
BKR
Shorting Bar
(Bolted Fault)
10
Three-Phase
Test Source
(Low Voltage)
Figure 5.1-1. Metal-Clad Switchgear ShortCircuit and Momentary Withstand Tests
Main Bus
Seismic Qualification
Standards
The C37.20.2 metal-clad switchgear

equipment is designed to withstand
the effects of short-circuit current in
a bolted fault occurring immediately
downstream from the load terminals
of the switchgear. The bolted fault
capability is verified by short-time and
momentary short-circuit withstand
current testing on complete switchgear,
as well as by fault making (close and
latch) testing on the switching devices
as shown in Figure 5.1-1.
The short-time current withstand

tests demonstrate electrical adequacy
of busses and connections against
physical damage while carrying the
short-circuit current for a given duration.
The momentary current withstand tests
demonstrate the mechanical adequacy of the structure, busses and
connections to withstand electro-magnetic forces with no breakage of insulation. It should be noted that design
testing of standard metal-clad switchgear does not involve any internal arcing faults.
FeaturesVacuum Circuit Breaker
High power laboratory tests prove

VCP-W breakers are capable of 50 to
200 full fault current interruptions
V-Flex (stiff-flexible) current transfer
from the vacuum interrupter
moving stem to the breaker primary
disconnecting contact is a nonsliding/non-rolling design, which
eliminates maintenance required
with the sliding/rolling type transfer
arrangements. The V-Flex system
provides excellent electrical and
thermal transfer, and long vacuum
interrupter life.
Easy inspection and accessibility is
afforded by a front-mounted stored
energy operating mechanism. The
same basic mechanism is used on
all ratings, which requires a minimum
investment in spare parts
All VCP-W circuit breakers are horizontal drawout design, which provides connect, test and disconnect
position. A latch secures the breaker
in the connected and disconnected/
test position. 5/15/27 kV breakers
can be fully withdrawn on extension
rails for inspection and maintenance
without the need for a separate lifting device. 38 kV circuit breaker is
designed to roll directly on the floor
All breaker functions, indicators
and controls are grouped on an
easily accessible panel on front of
the breaker
Trip-free interlocks prevent moving
a closed circuit breaker into or out
of the connected position
Breaker cannot be electrically or
mechanically closed when in the
intermediate position
Closing springs automatically
discharge before moving the circuit
breaker into or out of the enclosure
Breaker frame remains grounded
during levering and in the
connected position
Coding plates are provided to ensure
only correct breaker rating can be
installed in cell
Quality Assurance Certificate is
included with each circuit breaker
Easy-to-see contact erosion indicator
is provided as standard on the
vacuum interrupter moving stem.
Only periodic visual inspection is
required to verify that the contacts
have not worn out
A simple visual means, T-cutout, is
provided to verify by simple visual
inspection that the loading springs
are applying proper pressure to the
contacts when the breaker is closed
Vacuum interrupters with copperchrome contacts provide superior
dielectric strength and very low
chop current
High-strength, high-impact, trackresistant glass polyester on 5/15 kV
and cycloaliphatic epoxy on 27/38 kV
is used for primary insulation and
support as standard
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.1-3
Sheet 05 005
General Description
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers
i
Fixed
Stem
ii
Glass Polyester
Insulator
Front-Accessible Stored
Energy Mechanism
Vacuum Interrupter
Pole Unit
Breaker Operations
Counter
Manual Spring
Charging Port
Breaker Main Contacts

Open/Closed Status
Spring Charged/
Discharged Status
Contacts
Bellows
Shield
Movable
Stem
Manual Push-to-Close
& Open Pushbuttons
Support Gasket Only

(Seal Formed by Bellows)
Type VCP-W 5/15 kV Circuit Breaker
Cut-away View of Vacuum Interrupter

(Enlarged to Show Detail)
5
6
Primary
Disconnect
Epoxy
Insulator
Primary
Disconnect
Pole Unit
Vacuum
Interrupter
Located
Inside this
Molded
Epoxy
Housing
Front-Accessible
Stored Energy
Mechanism
Behind this
Panel
Insulation
Shrouds
Alignment
Rollers
Secondary Disconnect
11
12
Code Plates
Type VCP-W 38 kV Circuit

BreakerFront View
10
Control Panel
(Breaker
Functions and
Indicators)

BreakerSide View
Breaker Wheel

BreakerRear View
13
14
Type VCP-W Circuit BreakerFeatures
15
16
17
18
19
V-Flex System
Contact Erosion Indicator
T-Cutout
20
21
CA08104001E

Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)
5.1-4
March 2015
Sheet 05 006
General DescriptionSwitchgear
FeaturesSwitchgear
Assembly
ii
VacClad is a Metal-Clad Design
1
2
3
Eatons VacClad switchgear is an integrated assembly of drawout vacuum

circuit breakers, bus and control
devices coordinated electrically and
mechanically for medium voltage
circuit protection and control. The
metal-clad integrity provides maximum
circuit separation and safety.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
All circuit breakers are equipped

with self-aligning and self-coupling
primary and secondary disconnecting devices, and arranged with
a mechanism for moving it
physically between connected
and disconnected positions
All major primary components, such
as circuit breaker, voltage transformer, control power transformer,
and buses are completely enclosed
and grounded by metal barriers.
A metal barrier in front of the
circuit breaker and auxiliary drawer
ensures that, when in the connected
position, no live parts are exposed
by opening the compartment door
Automatic shutters cover primary
circuit elements when the removable element is in the disconnected,
test or removed position
All primary bus conductors and
connections are insulated with trackresistant fluidized bed epoxy coating
for rated maximum voltage of the
assembly
Mechanical interlocks are provided
to maintain a proper and safe
operating sequence
Instruments, meters, relays, secondary control devices and their wiring
are isolated, where necessary, by
grounded metal barriers from all
primary circuit elements
VacClad is Corona Free
16
17
18
19
20
Corona emissions within the standard

VacClad switchgear assemblies have
been eliminated or reduced to very
low levels by special fabrication and
assembly techniques, such as rounding and buffing of all sharp copper
edges at the joints, employing star
washers for bolting metal barriers,
and using specially crafted standoff
insulators for primary bus supports.
By making switchgear assemblies
corona-free, Eaton has made its
standard switchgear more reliable.
Circuit Breaker Compartment
The mechanism for levering the

breaker is a unique cell mounted
design. It incorporates all the safety
interlocks to render the breaker
mechanically and electrically tripfree during the levering procedure
A silver-plated copper ground

bus provided on the levering pan
assembly is engaged by a spring
loaded ground contact on the circuit
breaker to ensure that the circuit
breaker remains grounded throughout its travel
Type VCP-W Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly (5/15 kV Shown)
Front ViewStandard (non arc-resistant) Metal-Clad Switchgear

Automatic Steel Shutters
MOC & TOC

Switch (Optional)
Under this Cover
Secondary
Disconnect
Ground Bus
Levering Screw Assembly
Code Plates
Circuit Breaker Compartment (Arc Resistant Switchgear)
Cell Studs
Front-Accessible CTs
Primary
Insulating Tubes
21
Circuit Breaker Compartment Shown with Shutters Opened for Illustration
CA08104001E

5.1-5
March 2015
Sheet 05 007

(Continued)
Each circuit breaker compartment

is provided with steel shutters
(breaker driven) that automatically
rotate into position to cover the
insulating tubes and stationary cell
studs to prevent accidental contact
with live primary voltage, when
the breaker is withdrawn from the
connected position
Current transformers installed
over the primary insulating tubes,
located behind the steel shutters,
are front accessible. Up to four
standard accuracy current transformers can be installed per phase.
Front accessibility permits adding
or changing the transformers when
the unit is de-energized without
breaking high voltage connections
and primary insulation
Code plates ensure that only correct
breaker rating can be installed in cell
Auxiliary Compartments
Control power transformer drawer is

mechanically interlocked with
the transformer secondary main
breaker that requires the main
breaker to be opened, so that
the primary circuit is disconnected
only under no-load when the drawer
is withdrawn
Grounding straps are provided

in each drawer to automatically
ground and discharge primary fuses
when the drawer is withdrawn
2
3
VT Drawer
4
Extension Rail
VT Secondary Fuses
5
CTP Drawer
CPT Secondary Breaker/

Drawer Interlock
CPT Secondary
Main Breaker
Drawout Auxiliaries
VT Primary
Fuses
Extension
Rail
Secondary
Terminals
CPT, Single-Phase
up to 15 kVA
Primary
Taps
9
10
11
12
13
CPT Primary
Fuse
2 or 3 VTs
VT Drawer Shown Fully Withdrawn on Rails
Extension
Rail
14
CPT Drawer Shown Fully Withdrawn on Rails
15
Primary Fuse
Grounding Straps
(Attached to
Cell Frame)
16
17
Secondary
Disconnect
Block
Glass Polyester
Shutter Barrier
18
19
Drawer to Cell Frame
Ground Contact
Space Heater
(Optional for Indoor)
VT/CPT Compartment with VT/CPT Drawer RemovedInside View
CA08104001E
ii
1
5/15 kV VacClad design permits up to

four auxiliary drawers in one vertical
unit (only two shown in the photo).
These drawers can be used for installing
voltage or control power transformers,
or primary fuses. Each drawer can also
be configured for use as a battery tray.
Each auxiliary drawer is a horizontal
drawout design that can be fully
withdrawn on extension rails similar
to the breaker, thus allowing front
access to auxiliary equipment
to permit easy testing and fuse
replacement
A safety shutter (operated by
the drawer) is included in each
auxiliary drawer compartment.
It automatically operates when
the auxiliary drawer is withdrawn
to protect workmen from accidental
contact with the stationary primary
contacts
Each auxiliary drawer can accommodate two voltage transformers,
connected line-to-line (open delta);
three voltage transformers, connected line-to-ground; or singlephase control power transformer up
to 15 kVA, 15 kV with their associated
primary fuses. Three-phase control
power transformer, or single-phase
transformers larger than 15 kVA
can be fixed mounted within the
structure, with their primary fuses
installed in the auxiliary drawer
20
21

5.1-6
March 2015
Sheet 05 008
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Rear Compartments
Rear of each structure is segregated
into main bus and cable compartments
by grounded metal barriers, as
required for a given application.
Access to main bus and power cable
connections is provided from the rear
through removable bolted covers or
optional rear hinged doors. Cable
trough (chimney) is provided to segregate upper and lower compartment
power cables as required.

Cable Lugs (stress
cones not shown)
Customers
Power Cables
Metal Barrier Between

Upper and Lower
Compartment
All primary buses (main bus and line

and load runbacks) are 100% conductivity copper, and insulated for
rated maximum voltage of the
assembly by flame retardant, trackresistant fluidized epoxy coating.
The bolted bus joints are silver- or
optionally tin-plated for positive
contact and low resistance, with
each joint insulated with easily
installed boots. Bus supports
between the adjacent units are
made of high-impact, high-strength,
track-resistant glass polyester at 5
and 15 kV, and cycloaliphatic epoxy
at 27 and 38 kV
Adequate space is available for
cable termination, bus duct connection, installation of zero sequence
current transformers, and surge
arresters. In two-high arrangement,
power cables for each circuit are
separated by metal barriers
A bare copper ground bus is provided in the rear of each structure,
which extend the entire length of the
switchgear
All control wiring is isolated from
primary circuit elements by
grounded metal-conduit or braided
metal jacket, with the exception of
short lengths of wire such as at
instrument transformer terminals
Breaker Shown in the Connected Position
Surge Arresters
(Optional)
Cable Barrier
(Chimney)
Pre-formed Insulating Boots
Around Bus Joints
Copper Bus, Insulated with
Fluidized Epoxy Coating
Rear View
Breaker Shown in the Test/

Disconnected Position
Main Bus Support
Between Each
Adjacent Unit
Copper Bus,
Silver or
(Optional)
Tin Plated
Fluidized
Epoxy
Coating
17
18
Breaker Shown in the Fully

Withdrawn Position
19
Main Bus Details
20
21
CA08104001E

5.1-7
March 2015
Sheet 05 009
Roll-on-the-Floor Breaker Option
i
ii
1
2
3
4
VCP-W Direct Roll-in Breaker with
Fixed Wheels
5
6
7
8
9
10
Roll-on-the-Floor Switchgear Compartment
An optional direct roll-in breaker

designed for use in upper and lower
compartment of 5/15 kV indoor and
outdoor walk-in aisle switchgear is
available for all 5/15 kV VCP-W, VCPWC and VCP-WG circuit breakers.
Breaker is fitted with special wheel kit,
and compartment interface is modified
to allow circuit breaker to be rolled
directly from the floor into the switchgear compartment, or from switchgear
compartment onto the floor without
a need for external lifting device
or dolly. The circuit breaker can be
supplied with all four fixed wheels or
can be supplied with two swivel-type
wheels on the front and two fixed
wheels on the rear. In 2-high
construction, the roll-on-the-floor
breaker option is available for breakers
in upper or lower compartments, however, removal of upper breaker
requires external lifter and lift pan,
which are optional accessories.
When using a 1200 or 2000 A circuit

breaker in the lower compartment, the
compartment above the breaker can
be left blank or used of auxiliaries,
such as VTs or single-phase CPT, or
primary fuses for three-phase or larger
than 15 kVA single-phase CPTs. When
using 3000A circuit breaker in the
lower compartment, the compartment
above the breaker is left blank
for ventilation. The design is rated for
application in Seismic Zone 4 environment. It can also be supplied with
UL or CSA label for certain ratings.
Contact Eaton for ratings available
with UL/CSA label. The overall
dimensions of the 5/15 kV indoor and
outdoor walk-in aisle structures with
the roll-on-the-floor breaker option are
the same as the standard structures
that use standard non roll-on-the-floor
circuit breakers.
11
12
VCP-W Direct Roll-in Breaker with
Swivel Wheels on Front
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.1-8

Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 kV (26.00-Inch Wide)
March 2015
Sheet 05 010
General Description
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide

5 kV 250 MVA Switchgear
ii
1
2
3
4
Fully Withdrawn Breaker
7
8
9
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Standard Model
11
12
Automatic Shutters
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
The 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide switchgear line is designed for use with
Eatons Type VCPW-ND Narrow
Design vacuum circuit breakers rated
4.76 kV, 60 kV BIL, 250 MVA, 1200 A
maximum, with rated main bus of
1200 or 2000A. For installations requiring 2000 A main breakers with 1200 A
feeders, lineups can be built with
standard 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide
main breaker cubicles and 26.00-inch
(660.4 mm) wide feeders.
Configurations
10
19
This narrow width VacClad-W MV

Metal-Clad switchgear was designed
for use in instances where floor space
requirements would not allow the
industry standard 36.00-inch (914.4 mm)
wide switchgear. Typical applications
include not only new construction
but also replacement switchgear for
installations previously equipped with
26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide air-break
devices. This line of switchgear has also
been used where 5 kV, 1200 A, 250 MVA
applications are commonplace, such as
generator and control applications.
Ratings
5
6
Fused PT Drawer
The 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide design

is flexible. Available configurations
include breaker over breaker, one or
two auxiliary drawers over breaker,
breaker over one or two auxiliary
drawers, or up to four auxiliary drawers
in one vertical section. The standard
height and depth are 95.00-inch
(2413.0 mm) and 96.25-inch (2444.8 mm)
respectively. A breaker over auxiliary,
or auxiliary over breaker combination
can be supplied in reduced depth of
86.25-inch (2190.8 mm). The depth
of breaker over breaker combination
can also be reduced to 86.25-inch
(2190.8 mm) if power cables for top
breaker enter from the top and the
cables for bottom breaker enter from
the bottom.
The main bus location and connections
in the standard 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm)
high 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide design
are 100% compatible with standard
95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high 36.00-inch
(914.4 mm) wide vertical sections. As a
result, additions to existing Eaton 5 kV,
250 MVA 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide
VCP-W installations can be simply and
rapidly performed without costly system modifications and transition sections. Refer to Pages 5.5-7 and 5.5-8 for
available configurations, dimensions
and weights.
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Low

Profile Model
In addition to the floor space saving
offered by the standard 26.00-inch
(660.4 mm) wide model, a further
saving in the height and depth of the
switchgear is also available. Where
height and depths are an issue, such
as an outdoor powerhouse or in a
mobile power container, the standard
95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high unit can
be reduced to an 80.00-inch high
(2032.0 mm), 72.00-inch (1828.9 mm)
deep low profile model. Main bus
rating available in the 80.00-inch
(2032.0 mm) high x 72.00-inch
(1828.9 mm) deep low profile model is
limited to 1200 A maximum. It is not
compatible in size or location with
standard 26.00-inch (660.4 mm)
wide or 36.00-inch (914.4 mm)
wide, 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high
VCP-W units.
The low profile model is designed to
house breaker over auxiliary or auxiliary over breaker, or auxiliary over
auxiliary. In order to provide maximum
vertical space for power cable terminations, auxiliary over breaker configuration should be used for customers top
entrance cables, and breaker over auxiliary configuration should be used for
customers bottom entrance cables.
Auxiliary compartments are designed
to accommodate one or two auxiliary
drawers. That is, up to four auxiliary
drawers can be installed in an auxiliary
over auxiliary configuration. A set of
two line-to-line or three line-to-ground
connected voltage transformers, or a
single-phase control power transformer
up to 15 kVA can be installed in each
auxiliary drawer. Because of the
reduced depth, control devices cannot
be located on breaker compartment
door. All control devices should be
located on the auxiliary compartment
doors. Refer to Pages 5.5-9 for
available configurations, dimensions
and weights.
For all 26.00-inch (660.4 mm)
wide configurations, multifunction
microprocessor-based relays and
meters, such as Eatons E-Series relays
and Power Xpert meters are recommended for reduced panel space.
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.1-9
Sheet 05 011
General Description
27 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear
Eatons 27 kV nominal metal-clad
switchgear is used for applications at
system voltages higher than 15 kV, up
to and including 27 kV. It is designed
for use with Type VCP-W, horizontal
drawout vacuum circuit breakers.
Ratings
Maximum rated voltage: 27 kV rms

Note: Eaton tested to 28.5 kV.
BIL withstand: 125 kV peak

Maximum symmetrical interrupting:
16 kA, 22 kA, 25 kA, 40 kA rms
Continuous current:
Circuit breakers1200 A, 2000 A
Switchgear main bus
One-high design: 1200 A, 2000 A
Two-high design: 1200 A, 2000 A,
2500 A, 2700 A
Features and Configurations

27 kV metal-clad switchgear design
is an extension of Eatons 5 and 15 kV
VacClad design. It has same footprint
and overall space envelop, and it
incorporates all features and
advantages of the 5 and 15 kV VacClad
design, with the exception of some
modifications required for 27 kV
application.
Each auxiliary drawer can accommodate two voltage transformers

connected line-to-line, or three
voltage transformers connected
line-to-ground, which can be withdrawn for easy maintenance and
replacement of primary fuses
When required by an application,
a single-phase control power transformer up to 37.5 kVA, or a three-phase
control power transformer up to
45 kVA can be fixed mounted in the
front bottom compartment, with the
primary fuses in an auxiliary drawer
located in the upper compartment.
When the control power transformer is
located remotely from the switchgear,
but fed through primary fuses located
in the switchgear, the fuses are
installed in an auxiliary drawer. The
primary fuse drawer is key interlocked
with the control power transformer
secondary main breaker to ensure
that it is opened first, and transformer
load is disconnected, before the fuse
drawer can be withdrawn
27 kV metal-clad switchgear is available
in general purpose, ventilated, indoor
or outdoor aisleless type enclosure
Two-high 27 kV arrangements with
breaker-over-breaker are available in
indoor type enclosure
Roll-on-the-floor configurations are
available
Uses horizontal drawout type

VCP-W 125 kV BIL rated vacuum
circuit breakers
A cycloaliphatic epoxy insulation
material is used throughout the
switchgear housings and the circuit
breakers for phase-to-ground
and phase-to-phase primary bus
supports. For decades, cycloaliphatic
epoxy insulation has demonstrated
its outstanding electrical and
mechanical characteristics in harsh
outdoor applications. The use of this
insulation system with the 27 kV
design ensures a comfortable margin
of safety at higher voltages
All primary bus conductors are insulated for full 28.5 kV by fluidized epoxy
coating. All buses are fabricated from
100% conductivity copper. Bus joints
are silver- or tin-plated as required, and
covered with pre-formed insulating
boots to maintain metal-clad integrity
Available configurations include:
auxiliary over breaker, and auxiliary
over auxiliary. Each auxiliary or breaker
requires one-half vertical space
Epoxy
Insulator
Primary
Disconnect
i
ii
1
2
3
4
27 kV VCP-W Circuit BreakerSide View

Drawout
Auxiliary Drawer
5
6
7
8
9
10
27 kV SwitchgearFront View
Surge Arresters
11
12
13
Main Bus
Barrier
Split Rear
Covers
Epoxy Bus
Supports
14
15
16
17
18
Fluidized Epoxy Coated Cu Bus
27 kV SwitchgearRear View
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.1-10

March 2015
Sheet 05 012
General Description
38 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear
ii
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
Control
Compartment
Ratings
Breaker
Compartment
Door
Maximum rated voltage: 38 kV rms

BIL withstand: 150 and 170 kV peak
Maximum symmetrical interrupting
with K = 1: 16 kA, 25 kA, 31.5 kA,
40 kA rms, and 35 kA rms (21 kA
rating with K = 1.65)
Continuous current:
Circuit breakersup to 2500 A
Switchgear main busup to 3000 A
Features38 kV
Vacuum Circuit Breaker
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
All 38 kV circuit breakers are horizontal

drawout design, which provide
connect, test and disconnect position.
A latch secures the breaker in the
connected and disconnected/test
position. The circuit breaker is
designed to roll directly on the floor
Type VCP-W Roll-on

the Floor Drawout
Circuit Breaker
12
17
Easy inspection and accessibility is

afforded by front mounted stored
energy operating mechanism. The
same basic mechanism is used on
all ratings, which requires a minimum investment in spare parts
Eatons VacClad switchgear family is

designed for use in applications with
distribution voltages up to 38 kV maximum. Typical applications include not
only new construction but also replacement for older air-break, minimum oil
or SF6 switchgear. The circuit breaker
and switchgear will meet industry
requirements for greater safety, quality,
superior reliability and minimal maintenance while providing higher insulation
levels in less space than other breaker
types, thus reducing overall switchgear
size for significant space savings.
Corona-free design increases circuit

breaker reliability and in-service life
by maintaining insulation integrity
Superior cycloaliphatic epoxy
insulationa void-free insulating
material with outstanding electrical
and mechanical characteristics, such
as track resistance, dielectric
strength, and fungus resistance,
even in harsh industrial environmentis used throughout the circuit
breaker as primary phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground insulation
Axial-magnetic, copper-chrome
contacts are used in 38 kV vacuum
interrupters to provide superior
dielectric strength, better performance characteristics, and lower
chop current
High power laboratory tests prove
VCP-W breakers are capable of 50 to
200 full fault current interruptions
V-Flex (stiff-flexible) current transfer
from the vacuum interrupter
moving stem to the breaker primary
disconnecting contact is a nonsliding/non-rolling design, which
eliminates maintenance required
with the sliding/rolling type transfer
arrangements. The V-Flex system
provides excellent electrical and
thermal transfer, and long vacuum
interrupter life
Control Panel
(Breaker Functions
and Indicators)
Contact Erosion
Indicator
Secondary
Contact Block
Guide Rails Ensure

Breaker/Cell Alignment
Lift/Pull Handle
Code Plates
38 kV BreakerFully Withdrawn
Pole Unit
Primary
Disconnect
Vacuum Interrupter
Located Inside
this Molded
Epoxy Housing
Insulation Shrouds
Alignment Rollers
Breaker
Wheel
38 kV BreakerRear View
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.1-11
Sheet 05 013
General Description38 kV Switchgear
Features38 kV Vacuum
Circuit Breaker (Continued)
Features38 kV
Switchgear Assembly
Like the circuit breaker described

above, the 38 kV switchgear assembly
is a corona-free metal-clad design.
It incorporates many features and
advantages of 5, 15 and 27 kV VacClad
design, with additional modifications
required for 38 kV application.
All breaker controls and indicators

are functionally grouped on the
front control panel and include:
main contact status, closing spring
status, port for manual spring charging, close and trip button, and
mechanical operations counter
Clearly visible contact erosion
indicator on the front of the breaker
Trip-free interlocks prevent moving
a closed circuit breaker into or out
of the connected position
Breaker cannot be electrically or
mechanically closed when in the
intermediate position
Closing springs automatically
discharge before moving the circuit
breaker into or out of the enclosure
during levering and in the
connected position
Coding plates are provided to
ensure only correct breaker rating
can be installed in cell
Industry-leading cycloaliphatic
epoxy supports are used for primary
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
insulation throughout, providing
170 kV BIL and 80 kV (1 minute)
power frequency withstand capability
All primary bus conductors are
insulated for full 38 kV by fluidized
epoxy coating. All buses are
fabricated from 100% conductivity
copper. Bus joints are silver- or
tin-plated as required, and covered
with Eatons pre-formed insulating
boots to maintain metal-clad integrity
Control
Compartment
Control
Devices
Circuit breaker compartment is

designed to interface with Type
VCP-W 38 kV circuit breaker. It
includes floor-mounted breaker pan
assembly (levering assembly) with
all safety interlocks required by the
metal-clad design. Cell mounted
guide rails accurately guide the
breaker into the cell during levering,
and ensure correct alignment
of the circuit breaker primary
disconnects with the cell primary
contacts when breaker reaches
connected position
Coding plates are provided to
ensure only correct breaker rating
can be installed in the cell
Automatic steel shutters cover
cell primary contacts when circuit
breaker is withdrawn from its connected position, to prevent persons
from accidentally touching the
stationary primary cell contacts.
Each shutter can be padlocked in
the closed or open position. It can
also be manually latched open as
required for maintenance
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Provision for
Padlocking Shutter
in Closed Position
Steel
Shutters
10
11
12
Breaker Compartment
13
38 kV SwitchgearControl Compartment
Ground Secondary
Bus
Disconnect
MOC Switch
Beneath this Cover
Stationary
Primary
Contacts
Steel Shutter
Breaker Compartment (Shutter Shown

Open for Illustration)
14
15
16
17
Breaker Levering
Pan Assembly
TOC
Switch
Code
Plates
Guide
Rail
MOC
Switch
38 kV SwitchgearCircuit Breaker
Compartment
19
Guide
Rail
Breaker Pan
Assembly
Provision for
Padlocking
Racking Screw
and Moving Block
Assembly
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly
CA08104001E
18
20
21
5.1-12

March 2015
Sheet 05 014
i
ii
Features38 kV Switchgear
Assembly (Continued)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A separate control compartment is

provided for installation of protection, metering and control devices.
No devices are located on circuit
breaker compartment door
Rear of the switchgear is divided in
main bus and cable compartments,
isolated from each other by
grounded metal barriers. Sufficient
space is available for customers top
or bottom entry power cables. Bus
duct terminations can also be
supplied. A bare copper ground bus
is provided along the entire lineup,
with an extension in each cable
compartment for termination of
power cable shields
Each 38 kV 150 kV BIL indoor structure
is 42.00 inches (1066.8 mm) wide x
95.00 inches (2413 mm) high x 124.36
inches (3158.8 mm) deep. Also available are outdoor aisleless and outdoor sheltered aisle structures
Voltage transformers are equipped
with integral top-mounted primary
fuses and installed in an auxiliary
compartment. Two auxiliary compartments can be provided in one
vertical section. Each auxiliary compartment can be supplied with 1, 2
or 3 VTs, and can be connected to
bus or line, as required for a given
application. The VTs assembly is
located behind a fixed bolted panel,
and provided with mechanism for
moving it between connected and
disconnected position. The VT
assembly is interlocked with the
fixed bolted panel such that the
panel cannot be removed unless the
VTs are withdrawn to disconnected
position. A shutter assembly covers
the primary stabs when VTs are
withdrawn to disconnected position.
A mechanism is also provided to
automatically discharge VT primary
fuses as the VTs are withdrawn from
connected to disconnected position
Ring type current transformers
are installed over bus or line side
primary insulating bushings, located
behind the steel shutters, in the
breaker compartment. In this design,
the CTs are easily accessible from
the front, after removal of the circuit
breaker. The front accessibility
permits adding or changing the CTs
when the equipment is de-energized,
but without removal of high voltage
joints or primary insulation. The
design allows installations of two
sets of standard or one set of high
accuracy CTs on each side of the
circuit breaker
Enclosed Main
Bus Compartment
Bus SupportEpoxy
Customers Cable
Connections
Ground Bus
38 kV Switchgear AssemblyRear View
Bus SupportEpoxy
Cu Bus, Silver- or
Tin-Plated at Joints
Fluidized Epoxy
Coated Bus
Main Bus
Cycloaliphatic
Epoxy Support
Power Cable Lug

Removable Insulating
Boots at Bus Joints
Ring Type Current

Transformers
Rear Compartment (Partial)
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.1-13
Sheet 05 015
38 kV, 150 kV BIL DesignAvailable Enclosures (42-Inch, 48-Inch and 60-Inch Wide Structures are Available)
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Indoor UnitDirect Roll-on-the-Floor Breaker
Breaker Removal Platform for Outdoor Aisleless
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Non-Walk-In (OD Aisleless)
Walk-In (OD Sheltered Aisle)
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.1-14

March 2015
Sheet 05 016
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Arc-Resistant Switchgear
March 2015
5.2-1
Sheet 05 017
General Description
Switchgear Medium Voltage
Eatons 5/15 kV switchgear is designed

and tested for IEEE Type 2B accessibility,
and 27 and 38 kV switchgear is designed
and tested to IEEE Type 2.
Arc-resistant features are intended to
provide an additional degree of protection to the personnel performing normal
operating duties in close proximity to
the equipment while the equipment
is operating under normal conditions.
The normal operating conditions for
proper application of arc-resistant
switchgear designs are as follows:
The Type VCP-W and VCP-WC vacuum

circuit breakers, used in VacClad-W
arc-resistant switchgear, meet or
exceed all ANSI and IEEE standards
applicable to AC high voltage circuit
breakers rated on symmetrical current
basis, including but not limited to:
C37.04, C37.06, and C37.09. Also available are type VCP-WG vacuum circuit
breakers conforming to IEEE standard
C37.013 for AC high voltage generator
circuit breakers.
Third-Party Certification
with Plenum Installed
Eaton has been manufacturing arcresistant metal-clad switchgear since
1990. Eaton was the first major North
American manufacturer to design, test
and manufacture arc-resistant switchgear in accordance with EEMAC G14.1.
We now offer Type 2 and 2B arc-resistant switchgear assemblies, designed
and tested in accordance with the IEEE
C37.20.7, with Type VCP-W drawout
vacuum circuit breakers.
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad arcresistant switchgear with Type VCP-W
vacuum circuit breakers can be
configured in various combinations
of breakers and auxiliaries to satisfy
users application requirements.
One-high and two-high arrangements
can be provided when required.
Accessibility Types
Arc-resistant switchgear performance
is defined by its accessibility type
in accordance with IEEE test guide
C37.20.7 as follows:
Type 1Switchgear with arc-resistant
designs or features at the freely
accessible front of the equipment only.
Type 2Switchgear with arc-resistant
designs or features at the freely accessible exterior (front, back and sides) of
the equipment only. (Type 2 incorporates
Type 1.)
Type 2BSwitchgear with Type 2
accessibility plus arc-resistant in front
of the instrument/control compartment
with the instrument/control compartment door opened. (Type 2B incorporates Type 2.)
CA08104001E
Circuit Breakers
All doors and covers providing

access to high voltage components
are properly closed and latched
Pressure relief devices are free
to operate
The fault energy available to the
equipment does not exceed the
rating of the equipment (shortcircuit current and duration)
There are no obstructions around
the equipment that could direct the
arc fault products into an area
intended to be protected
The equipment is properly grounded
The user should also refer to documents such as NFPA 70E, for safety
training and safe work practices and
methods of evaluating safe work
distances from energized equipment
based on the potential flash hazard,
and use proper PPE when working on
or near energized equipment with the
door/cover opened or not properly
secured.
5 and 15 kV arc-resistant metal-clad

switchgear assemblies can be provided
with CSA (Canada or USA) or UL
(USA only) listing. Contact Eaton
for available ratings.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Switchgear
Arc-resistant metal-clad switchgear

also conforms to C37.20.2 and is tested
as such for short time and momentary
short-circuit withstand for through
bolted fault as noted on Page 5.1-2. In
addition, the enclosure is also tested in
accordance with IEEE guide C37.20.7
for withstand against the effects of
internal arcing faults as shown in
Figure 5.2-1.
Three-Phase
Test Source
(High Voltage)
Main
Bus
8
9
10
11
12
Standards
13
Switchgear Assembly
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad
arc-resistant switchgear meets or
exceeds the following standards
and test guides:
North American Documents
IEEE C37.20.2Standards for

IEEE C37.20.7Guide for Testing
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear for
Internal Arcing Faults
Canadian Documents
CSA C22.2 No. 31-04Switchgear

Assemblies
EEMAC G8-3.2Metal-Clad and
Station Type Cubicle Switchgear
EEMAC G14-1Procedure for
testing the resistance of metal-clad
switchgear under conditions of
arcing due to an internal fault.
The G14-1 was the first North
American testing guide introduced
in 1987
BKR
Ground
Bus
0.5 mm Dia. (24 AWG) Wire
Used to Initiate Arcing Fault
Figure 5.2-1. Arc-Resistant Switchgear

Enclosure Internal Arcing Short-Circuit
Withstand Test
Internal arcing faults are those faults
occurring in air, phase-to-phase or
phase-to-ground, within the confines
of the switchgear enclosure. Arcing
faults can occur within a switchgear
compartment as a result of insulation
failure or human error. The arcing fault
produces a tremendous release of heat
energy at the point of the fault, which
heats and expands the air volume
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.2-2
March 2015
Sheet 05 018
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
within the enclosure, and may decompose or vaporize materials exposed to

an arc or involved in its path. The
effects of this type of fault vary
depending on enclosure volume, arc
duration, arc voltage, and available
short-circuit current. If the switchgear
is not designed and tested to withstand effects of internal arcing faults,
its parts could blow away along with
discharge of hot decomposed matter,
gaseous or particulate, causing injury
to personnel that may be present in its
vicinity. Arc-resistant switchgear is
designed to channel and control effects
of the arcing fault and its enclosure is
tested for withstand against such fault
in accordance with IEEE guide C37.20.7.
Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit

Breaker Features and Ratings
VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant

switchgear is designed for use with
Eatons state-of-the-art medium voltage vacuum type VCP-W (standard
ANSI), VCP-WC (extra capability), and
VCP-WG (generator) circuit breakers.
Refer to Tables 5.4-1B, 5.4-2 and 5.4-3
for complete list of available ratings.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Arc-Resistant Enclosure and

Arc Exhaust
VacClad-W arc-resistant switchgear
is designed to withstand effects of
internal arcing faults up to its rated arc
short-circuit current and duration. The
arc-withstand capability of the switchgear enclosure is achieved by use of
reinforced heavier gauge steel where
needed, smart latching of doors and
covers, and top-mounted built-in
pressure relief system. Following
are standard design features built
into each arc-resistant switchgear
assembly.
15
16
17
18
19
20
The formed steel compartment

design provides sealed joints under
fault conditions. This prevents smoke
and gas from escaping to other
compartments, a condition that can
occur with switchgear compartments
designed with conventional flat
bolted panels
Integral, pressure release flap vents
mounted on top of each individual
vertical section provide for controlled
upward release of arc created overpressure, fire, smoke, gases and
molten material out of the assembly
without affecting structural integrity,
and protect personnel who might
be present in the vicinity of the
switchgear
The structure roof, including the

pressure release flap vents, is drip
proof. The design is made strong such
that the roof can be walked-on
when the gear is completely deenergized (for example, during
installation)
Since arc pressure is vented out
through the top of each individual
vertical section, the equipment
damage is confined to individual
structures, minimizing damage to
adjacent structures
The levering mechanism is mechanically interlocked with the compartment door such that the door cannot
be opened until the circuit breaker is
opened and levered out to the test/
disconnect position. This interlocking ensures that the levering of the
circuit breaker into or out from the
connected position is done with
compartment door closed and
latched, with no exposure to
potential arc flash
Easy access and viewing ports are
provided on the door to allow operator to carry out all normal functions
with the door closed and latched,
with no exposure to potential arc
flash. Those functions include:
Breaker levering, manual charging
of closing springs, manual opening
and closing of the circuit breaker,
viewing of open/close status of
the breaker main contacts, viewing
of charged/discharged status of
the closing springs, viewing of
mechanical operations counter,
and breaker position
VacClad arc-resistant 5/15 and 38 kV
designs permit maximum of two
auxiliary drawers in one vertical
section. The 27 kV design permits
maximum of only one auxiliary
drawer per vertical section.
Each auxiliary drawer is equipped

with cell-mounted levering mechanism. The mechanism is mechanically
interlocked with its compartment
door such that the door cannot be
opened and access to auxiliary
drawer cannot be gained until the
drawer is first levered out to the
disconnected position. This interlocking ensures that the levering of the
auxiliary drawer into or out from
the connected position is done with
compartment door closed and latched,
with no exposure to potential arc flash
A viewing window is provided on

the door and on front panel of the
drawer to allow viewing of the drawer
position and the primary fuses
In 5/15 kV designs, each auxiliary
drawer can also accommodate a
single-phase CPT rated up to 15 kVA,
with primary fuses, or the drawer
can also be configured as a fuse
drawer with two or three primary
fuses, and connected to a fixed
mounted CPT (single-phase or
three-phase 45 kVA maximum) in
the rear of the structure
In 27 kV designs, an auxiliary drawer
can be configured as a fuse drawer
with two primary fuses and connected to a fixed-mounted CPT
(single-phase 25 kVA maximum)
in the rear of the structure
In 38 kV designs, fuse drawer can be
provided with two primary fuses
and connected to a fixed-mounted
CPT (single-phase 25 kVA maximum)
in the rear of the structure. Please
note that in 38 kV designs, a fuse
drawer requires a full vertical
section, because it occupies the
same compartment space as
required for a circuit breaker
Control Compartments
The control compartment doors can
be opened to access control wiring
without having to de-energize the primary circuit. The control compartments
have been tested to provide arc-resistant
protection with its door opened under
normal operating condition. Please
note the control compartment door
should be opened only for access to
control wiring when needed, and
should remain closed at all other times.
Relay Box on Breaker Compartment

Door in 5/15 kV Switchgear
When needed for additional relays/
instruments/controls, a relay box
mounted on the breaker compartment
door provides ample space for individual breaker relaying and controls.
An access to control wiring or device
terminals that are enclosed within the
relay box does not require opening of
the circuit breaker compartment door.
Arc Exhaust Wall and Arc Exhaust

Chamber (Plenum)
Refer to Page 5.5-37.
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.2-3
Sheet 05 019
General Description
5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Front ViewType VCP-W 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant

Switchgear (Plenum Above the Switchgear Not Shown)
5/15 kV Auxiliary
Over Auxiliary
5/15 kV Breaker
Over Breaker
6
7
8
9
10
Breaker Compartment
Breaker Shown Fully

Withdrawn on
Extension Rails
VTs DrawerShown
Fully Withdrawn
Fuse DrawerShown
Fully Withdrawn
11
12
13
Ground Bus
14
15
16
17
18
19
Rear View 5/15 kV VCP-W

Rear ViewBreaker Over

Breaker Cable Termination
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-18 to 5.5-28 and Pages 5.5-37 to 5.5-39.
Rear ViewBottom
Cable Compartment
20
21
CA08104001E
5.2-4

March 2015
Sheet 05 020
General Description
27 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Front View27 kV VCP-W Arc-Resistant Switchgear

(Plenum Above the Switchgear is Not Shown)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Typical 27 kV CellControls in Top,

Breaker in the Bottom
Rear ViewTypical 27 kV
Breaker Cable Termination
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-29 to 5.5-32 and Pages 5.5-37 to 5.5-39.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.2-5
Sheet 05 021
General Description
38 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
38 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Shown Without

Arc Plenum Above the Switchgear)

Shown with Breaker Removed
7
8
9
Control
Compartment
VT Drawer
Main Bus
Cover
Main Bus
(Shown
with Cover
Removed)
10
11
12
Primary Cable
Termination
13
14
15
16
Front ViewVT Over VT
VT Tray
Rear Assembly
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-33 to 5.5-39.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.2-6

March 2015
Sheet 05 022
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Partial Discharge
March 2015
5.3-1
Sheet 05 023
General Description
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear
i
ii
1
2
InsulGard Relay (PD Monitoring)
RFCT Sensor
InsulGard Relay
Partial Discharge Equipment
Partial Discharge in Switchgear
Sensing and Monitoring
Partial discharge is a common name for

various forms of electrical discharges
such as corona, surface tracking, and
discharges internal to the insulation.
It partially bridges the insulation
between the conductors. These
discharges are essentially small arcs
occurring in or on the surface of the
insulation system when voltage stress
exceeds a critical value. With time,
airborne particles, contaminants and
humidity lead to conditions that result
in partial discharges. Partial discharges
start at a low level and increase as
more insulation becomes deteriorated.
Examples of partial discharge in switchgear are surface tracking across bus
insulation, or discharges in the air gap
between the bus and a support, such
as where a bus passes through an
insulating window between the sections
of the switchgear. If partial discharge
process is not detected and corrected,
it can develop into a full-scale insulation
failure followed by an electrical fault.
Most switchgear flashover and bus
failures are a result of insulation
degradation caused by various forms
of partial discharges.
Eatons Type VCP-W metal-clad switchgear (2.438 kV) is corona-free by

design. Corona emissions within the
standard VacClad switchgear assemblies
have been eliminated or reduced to very
low levels by special fabrication and
assembly techniques, such as rounding
and buffing of all sharp copper edges
at the joints, employing star washers
for bolting metal barriers, and using
specially crafted standoff insulators for
primary bus supports. By making
switchgear assemblies corona-free,
Eaton has made its standard switchgear
more reliable. However, as indicated
above, with time, airborne particles,
contaminants and humidity lead to
conditions that cause partial discharges
to develop in switchgear operating at
voltages 4000 V and above. Type VCP-W
switchgear can be equipped with factory-installed partial discharge sensors
and partial discharge sensing relay for
continuous monitoring of the partial
discharges under normal operation.
Timely detection of insulation degradation through increasing partial discharges
can identify potential problems so that
corrective actions can be planned and
implemented long before permanent
deterioration develops. Partial discharge
detection can be the foundation of an
effective predictive maintenance
program. Trending of partial discharge
data over time allows prediction of
failures, which can be corrected before
catastrophic failure occurs.
The PD sensing and monitoring system
consists of Eatons InsulGard Relay
and PD sensors specifically developed
for application in the switchgear to
work with the relay.
CA08104001E
Partial discharges within the switchgear compartment are detected by

installation of a small donut type radio
frequency current transformer (RFCT)
sensor over floating stress shields of
the specially designed bus or line side
primary bushings. Partial discharges in
customers power cables (external discharges) are detected by installation of
the RFCT around ground shields of the
incoming or outgoing power cables
termination.
In 38 kV switchgear (refer to Figure 5.3-3),
one RFCT sensor is installed around
primary bushing stress shield in every
breaker compartment and supplied
as standard for measurement of discharges internal to the switchgear compartment. Its output is wired to terminal
blocks in control compartment for easy
access for periodic field measurements.
It can also be connected directly to
optional InsulGard relay for continuous
monitoring of partial discharges.
Because one RFCT sensor is included
in 38 kV breaker compartment, Eatons
38 kV switchgear is PD Sensing Ready
when received by the customer.
An additional RFCT sensor for each
incoming and outgoing power cable
circuits can be provided as an option for
measurement of external discharges.
In 5/15/27 kV switchgear (refer to
Figure 5.3-2), primary epoxy bushings
with stress shield and RFCT sensors
for measurement of internal as well
as external partial discharges are
all optional. InsulGard relay is also
optional. When specified, one set of
primary epoxy bushings (located on
bus side) with stress shield and associated RFCT sensor is provided at every
two vertical sections. An additional
RFCT sensor for each incoming and
outgoing power cable circuits can be
provided as required. The RFCT output
signals can be connected directly to
InsulGard relay for continuous monitoring of partial discharges or can be
used for periodic field measurements.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
5.3-2

Partial Discharge
March 2015
Sheet 05 024
General DescriptionPartial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring
i
ii
Temp Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Input
Terminal
Block
InsulGard
Relay
Optional
Modem
1
2
3
4
Signals (up to 15 Total) from

PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors,
RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc.)
120 Vac
Auxiliary
Power
Output
Alarm
Status
Figure 5.3-1. InsulGard Relay System
5
6
7
RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear
compartment.
RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up

to 100 ft from switchgear.
Figure 5.3-3. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections

(38 kV Switchgear)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

compartment.
Figure 5.3-2. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections

(527 kV Switchgear)
Note: Use one set of epoxy bottles with ground stress shield on bus
side (either in the top or bottom compartment) at every two vertical
sections. Use standard bottles at all other locations.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Partial Discharge
March 2015
5.3-3
Sheet 05 025
Partial Discharge Sensors and Monitoring for Switchgear
Radio Frequency Current Sensor (RFCT)
Epoxy Bottles with Stress Shield
ii
1
2
3
PD Sensors
4
5
6
PD Sensors
PD Sensors are Installed

in Switchgear Cubicle
Figure 5.3-4. How the Process WorksSensing and Data Collection
9
Pulse Repetition Rate (PPC)
10
5
4
11
12
2
1
13
Cub16
Cub15
Cub14
Cub13
Cub12
Cub11
Cub9
Cub8
Cub7
Cub6
Cub5
Cub4
Cub3
Cub2
Cub1
Relatively high Partial Discharge levels indicate problems

in older non-fluidized epoxy insulated MV bus. Problems
in cable terminations and in connected equipment can also
be revealed.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 5.3-5. How the Process WorksData Analysis and Report (Sample)
21
CA08104001E
5.3-4

Communications and Supplemental Devices
March 2015
Sheet 05 026
General DescriptionCommunications, Protection and Supplemental Devices
Integrated Monitoring
Protection and Control
ii
Communications System
1
2
3
4
5
6
Eatons power management products

provide hardware and software solutions that allow customers to interface
with their switchgear at varying levels
of sophistication. Power Xpert and IQ
Meters monitor common electrical
parameters and communicate the data
via standard industry protocols and
optional Web interfaces. Power Xpert
Gateways consolidate devices into
a single Web browser interface and
provide Ethernet connectivity. Eatons
Power Xpert Insight and Foreseer
Web-based software systems display,
analyze and store data from multiple
devices across the facility to enable
management of the customers
power system.
Refer to Tab 2 for more information on

communication systems.
Protective Relays
9
10
A full scope of protective relays

designed to meet all application
requirements is available to
provide the utmost in system
and component protection. Refer
to Tab 4 for further information.
Ground and Test Device

The ground and test device is a drawout
element that may be inserted into a
metal-clad switchgear housing in place
of a circuit breaker to provide access to
the primary circuits to permit the temporary connection of grounds or testing equipment to the high-voltage
circuits. High potential testing of cable
or phase checking of circuits are typical
tests which may be performed. The
devices are insulated to suit the voltage
rating of the switchgear and will carry
required level of short-circuit current.
Before using ground and test devices,
it is recommended that each user develop
detailed operating procedures consistent with safe operating practices. Only
qualified personnel should be authorized
to use ground and test devices.
Manual and electrical ground and test
devices are available, These devices
include six studs for connection to
primary circuits. On the manual device,
selection and grounding is accomplished
by cable or bus bars connection. On
electrical-type devices, grounding is
accomplished by an electrically
operated grounding switch.
Standard Accessories
One test jumper

One levering crank
One maintenance tool
One lifting yoke (527 kV)
One sets of rails (527 kV)
One turning handle (5th wheel, 38 kV)
11
Supplemental Devices
12
Dummy Element (Dummy Breaker)
Dummy element is a drawout element

with primary disconnects similar to a
drawout circuit breaker, but consists
of solid copper conductors in place of
vacuum interrupters, and is designed
for manual racking. it is typically used
as drawout disconnect link in the
primary system for circuit isolation or
bypass. The device is insulated to suit
the voltage rating of the switchgear
and will carry required levels of shortcircuit current, but it is not rated for
any current interruption. It must be
key interlocked with all source devices
such that it can only be inserted into or
removed from its connected position
only after the primary circuit in which it
is to be applied is completely
de-energized.
Optional Accessories
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5/15 kV Manual Type G&T Device
5/15 kV Manual G&T Device shown

with Upper Terminals Grounded
Transport dolly (527 kV),

(515 kV arc-resistant)
Portable lifter (527 kV)
Test cabinet
Electrical levering device (538 kV)
Ramp for lower breaker (527 kV),
(515 kV arc-resistant)
Manual or electrical ground and
test device
Hi-pot tester
5/15 kV Manual G&T Device shown

with Lower Terminals Grounded
Before using a dummy element, it is

recommended that each user develop
detailed operating procedure consistent with safe operating practices.
Only qualified personnel should be
authorized to use the dummy element.
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.3-5
Sheet 05 027
Integral Motorized Remote Racking Option (VC-W MR2)
Integral Motorized Remote

Racking Option (VC-W MR2)
VC-W MR2 Integral
Racking Device
Hand-Held Pendant without Test Position
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly

without Test Position VC-W MR2
Integral Racking Device
Hand-Held Pendant with Test Position
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly with

Test PositionVC-W MR2 Integral
Racking Device
VC-W MR2 is an optional motorized

racking device accessory installed
inside a circuit breaker or auxiliary
compartment. It is available for
application in circuit breaker compartments of 5/15/27/38 kV Type VC-W arc
and non-arc, and 5 kV VC-W ND metalclad switchgear. It is also available for
application in auxiliary compartments
of 5/15 kV Type VC-W arc-resistant
switchgear. This optional accessory
allows user to safely move a circuit
breaker or drawout auxiliary element
between the connect and disconnect
position within their respective
compartments from a safe distance
away from the switchgear. The circuit
breaker compartments in 5/15 kV arc
and non-arc metal-clad designs are also
available with distinct test position.
In those designs, the VC-W MR2
accessory allows movement of the
circuit breaker between the connect,
test and disconnect positions. For
switchgear designs/ratings not included
above, contact Eaton for availability
of MR2 accessory.
A microprocessor-based controller
card, located below the drive motor,
interfaces with an external hand-held
pendant (standard), discrete external
I/O (optional) or external Modbus
communication (optional) and controls
the breaker/auxiliary drawer movement via the drive motor. The system
is also designed such that it allows
manual racking of the breaker/auxiliary
using the levering crank accessory if
needed. The VC-W MR2 controller
interface is shown in Figure 5.3-6.
The crank safety switch disables the
motor whenever a breaker/auxiliary is
being manually racked in or out. The
connect, test and disconnect limit
switches provide breaker/auxiliary
position inputs to the controller card.
In addition to the standard permissive
switch, two terminals are provided for
connection of the customers external
interlocking/permissive contact(s).
Note that a single-phase 120 Vac
control supply is required for proper
operation of the VC-W MR2 controller
and the drive motor.
When VC-W MR2 integral racking is
supplied, its controller card is wired
to the CAT 6 jack installed in the
associated breaker/auxiliary compartment door, and each switchgear
lineup is shipped with one hand-held
pendant with 30 feet of CAT 6 cable.
The pendant interfaces with the MR2
controller card via the CAT 6 cable
through a CAT 6 jack located on the
breaker/auxiliary compartment door. It
allows the operator to move away from
the switchgear up to 30 feet and rack
the breaker/auxiliary from disconnect to
connect, or connect to disconnect
position by pressing the appropriate
function pushbutton on the pendant.
Breaker/auxiliary positions are
indicated by three LED lights on the
pendant. In those designs where a
circuit breaker is provided with a
distinct test position, pendent includes
a test pushbutton to allow movement
of the circuit breaker between the
connect, test and disconnect positions.
The breaker positions (connect, intermediate, test, disconnect) are indicated
by four LED lights. A blinking light
indicates that the breaker/auxiliary is in
motion through the selected position.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.3-6

March 2015
Sheet 05 028
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A solid (non-blinking) light indicates

that the breaker/auxiliary has reached
and stopped in the selected position.
In case normal operation fails, the
appropriate error code is displayed in
a separate two-character LED display
window on the pendant. A list of
various error codes and their descriptions along with suggested corrective
actions are printed on the back side
of the pendant. Examples of error
states: motor overcurrent, motor
overtemperature, motor timed out,
breaker position unknown, open
permissive, communication error
and no breaker/auxiliary.
Technical Data
In addition to the pendant, a discrete

I/O interface terminal block module
can be supplied as an option to allow
the customer to interface with the MR2
controller via external hardwired dry
contacts, for example, pushbuttons
located at a remote control panel. The
I/O interface module provides output
terminals for connections of remote
6 V LEDs for indication of breaker/
auxiliary position status at the remote
panel. The remote LED lights are not
included with the MR2. With this
optional I/O interface, the breaker/
auxiliary can be moved between
connect and disconnect positions from
a remote control panel. If the customer
needs to operate the MR2 with the
hand-held pendant, the pendant
becomes the master and will override
the customers remote control signals.
Control Supply Ratings
Nominal control voltage120 Vac,

50 or 60 Hz, single-phase
Control voltage range100 to
140 Vac, 50 or 60 Hz
Time to travel from connect to
disconnect, or disconnect to
connect27 seconds maximum
Current draw during the travel
15 A maximum for about 3 seconds
and 3.6 A for about 24 seconds
Requirements for External Contacts

and LEDs when Interfacing with MR2
External contacts should be rated
for minimum open circuit voltage of
5 Vdc, and be able to close and carry
20 mA at 5 Vdc
When remote LEDs are used, use
5 Vdc rated LEDs, current up to 20 mA
It is the customers responsibility to
provide single-phase 120 V, 50 or 60 Hz
nominal supply for the MR2 controller.
It can be derived from within the
switchgear if an appropriate control
power transformer is available within
the switchgear.
Type VC-W MR2 motorized racking
accessory has been endurance tested
and guaranteed for 500 operations as
required by IEEE C37.20.2.
The VC-W MR2 controller is also

equipped with a CAT 6 jack to allow
the customer to interface with the
controller via their SCADA system using
a Modbus interface. Please note that
only one of the two options, discrete
I/O interface or Modbus interface, can
be used, but not both. Figure 5.3-7
shows an illustration of a typical Modbus
control example. Additional components shown outside the MR2 controller
in Figure 5.3-7 are not included with
the MR2. System-level controls can
be optionally supplied by Eatons
Engineering Services & Systems.
If the customer needs to operate the
MR2 with the hand-held pendant,
the pendant becomes the master and
will override the Modbus interface.
Error codes are displayed on Modbus
devices when controlling the MR2 with
Modbus and on the pendant when
controlling with the pendant.
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.3-7
Sheet 05 029
i
CAT 6 Jack
(Software Programming)
J1
Controller
P/N: 1C19620H01
ii
TB5
J5
1
TB4
51 52 53 54
CAT 6 Jack
CAT 6
Cable
Crank
Safety
Switch
J2
41 42 43 44 45 46 47
To Customer
Application
and Controls
Common
Disconnect
Connect
2
3
2P 15A
Circuit
Breaker
4
L N G
120 Vac
MOC
Auxiliary
Power Input Switch
Modbus
Test
CAT 6
Cable
(30 ft)
MOC
Switch
J3
R = Connect
A = Intermediate
G = Disconnect
Y = Test
J4
CAT 6
Cable
Disconnect
Limit Switch
Optional
Discrete I/O
Interface Terminal
Block Module
P/N: 5543630
Phoenix UKM-RJ
CAT 6 Jack
J3
Connect
Limit Switch
CAT 6 Jack
Hand-Held
Pendant
(Overrides
Discrete I/O
and Modbus)
5
To Drive
Motor
6
7
8
Multiple permissive
contacts may be wired in
series with MOC contact
if required by the customer.
LED Lights
10
Figure 5.3-6. VC-W MR2 Controller Interface for a VCB with Distinct Test Position
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
#2
#3
#4
#1
MR2
MR2
MR2
11
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
#13
#14
#15
#16
MR2
MR2
MR2
MR2
MR2
12
RS-485 to USB
Converter
13
CAT 6
14
USB
Discrete I/O Interface
Terminal Block,
P/N: 5543630
Phoenix UKM-RJ
Twisted Pair
Shielded Wire,
Daisy Chained
15
16
Example shown is typical for control of up

to 16 circuit breakers or auxiliary drawers
controlled via each USB COM port.
17
18
Eaton HMI
XP Series
USB COM1
USB COM2
USB COM3
19
20
Figure 5.3-7. VC-W MR2 Typical Modbus Control Example
21
CA08104001E
5.3-8

March 2015
Sheet 05 030
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.4-1
Sheet 05 031
Technical DataStandard VCP-W Circuit Breakers
Discussion of changes in the

Rated Voltage Range Factor, K,
or K-factor in Circuit Breaker
Rating Structure
In 1997 and 2000 editions of ANSI
C37.06, under Table 1, preferred values
for the rated voltage range factor, K,
were set to 1.0 for all indoor circuit
breaker ratings. This was done because
interrupting capabilities of todays
vacuum circuit breakers are better
represented by K = 1.0. Unlike old
air-magnetic and oil circuit breakers,
todays vacuum breakers generally do
not require a reduction in interrupting
current, as the operating voltage is
raised to rated maximum voltage,
for example from 11.5 kV up to 15 kV.
The interrupting capability of vacuum
circuit breakers is essentially constant
over the entire range of operating
voltages, up to and including its rated
maximum voltage. The change was also
made as a step toward harmonizing
preferred ANSI ratings with the
preferred ratings of IEC standards. It
was further recognized that it is much
simpler to select and apply circuit
breakers rated on the basis of K = 1.0.
The change in the K value, however,

in no way affects the ratings and
capabilities of circuit breakers originally
tested and rated on the basis of K > 1
in the earlier editions of C37.06. Existing
circuit breakers, with ratings based on
K > 1.0, are still perfectly valid, meet
the latest editions of the standards,
and should be continued to be applied
as they have been in the past. The
original K > 1.0 ratings are neither
obsolete nor inferior to the new
K = 1.0 ratings; they are just different.
The new 1997 and 2000 editions of
ANSI standard C37.06 still include the
earlier K > 1 ratings as Table A1 and
A1A. The change from K > 1.0 to
K = 1.0 should be implemented by
manufacturers as they develop and
test new circuit breakers designs. The
change does not require, recommend
or suggest that manufactures re-rate
and re-test existing breakers to new
standard. And accordingly, Eaton
continues to offer both circuit breakers
rated on the traditional basis of K > 1.0
just as thousands of those breakers
have been applied for variety of circuit
switching applications worldwide, and
also as Eaton develops new breakers,
they are rated and tested to the new
K = 1 ratings. As a leader in vacuum

interruption technology, Eaton continues to provide a wide choice of modern vacuum circuit breakers so that the
user can select the most economical
circuit breaker that can satisfy their
circuit switching application.
Table 5.4-1A includes 5/15 kV circuit

breakers rated on the basis of
K = 1.0 in accordance with revised
ANSI standards
Table 5.4-1B includes capabilities of
traditional 5/15 kV circuit breakers
rated on the basis of K > 1.0
Table 5.4-1C includes 27/38 kV
circuit breakers rated on the basis
of K = 1.0
Table 5.4-2 includes circuit breaker
designs, rated on the basis of K = 1.0
with extra capabilities for those
applications whose requirements
go beyond what is usually
experienced in normal distribution
circuit applications
Table 5.4-3 includes circuit breakers
for special generator applications
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-W Medium Voltage

5.4-2
March 2015
Sheet 05 032
Table 5.4-1A. Available 5/15 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K = 1.0)
(Continued on next page)
Identification
Short-Circuit Ratings (Reference C37.04-1999 and C37.06-2009 Except as Noted 1)
A
rms
kA
rms
sym
kA rms kA
asym
Peak
Total
rms
kV
Peak
sec
sec
kV/
sec
ms
Cycles
(60 Hz)
50 VCP-W 25
4.76
60
19
60
1200
2000
3000
25
50
31
65
25
8.2
50
44
0.19
50
50 VCP-W 40
4.76
60
19
60
1200
2000
3000
40
50
49
104
40
8.2
50
44
0.19
50
50 VCP-W 50
4.76
60
19
60
1200
2000
3000
50
44
59
130
50
8.2
50
44
0.19
50
50 VCP-W 63
4.76
60
19
60
1200
2000
3000
63
55
80
164
63
8.2
50
44
0.19
50
150 VCP-W 25
15
60
36
95
1200 8
25
50
31
65
25
28 8
75
66
0.42
50
10
150 VCP-W 40
15
60
36
95
1200
2000
3000
40
50
49
104
40
25.7
75
66
0.39
50
11
150 VCP-W 50
15
60
36
95
1200
2000
3000
50
44
59
130
50
25.7
75
66
0.39
50
12
150 VCP-W 63
15
60
36
95
1200 8
2000 8
3000 8
63
55
80
164
63
28 8
75
66
0.42
50
13
Maximum Voltage (V)
2000
3000
1
2
3
14
4
5
15
6
7
16
25.7
Interrupting Time
TRV Rise Time (t3)
kV
Peak
RRRV = uc/t3 7
Time to Peak
(T2 = t3 x 1.137)
kV
rms
Peak Voltage
(E2) = (uc)
Hz
Short-Time Withstand
Current 6
kV
rms
Closing and Latching

Current (2.6 x I)
DC Component (% DC) 4
Units
Asymmetrical Interrupting
Current (It) 5
Symmetrical Interrupting
Current (I) 3
Power Frequency 1
Continuous Current 2
Transient Recovery Voltage

Parameters are Based on TD-4
Lightning Impulse Withstand

Voltage (1.2 x 50 s)
Insulation Level
Power Frequency Withstand
Voltage (1 min.)
ii
Rated Values
Drawout Circuit
Breaker Type
0.39
All circuit breakers are tested at 60 Hz; however, they can also be applied at 50 Hz with no derating.
4000 A fan-cooled rating is available for 3000 A circuit breakers.
Because the voltage range factor K = 1, the short-time withstand current and the maximum symmetrical interrupting current are equal to the rated
symmetrical interrupting current.
Based on the standard DC time constant of 45 ms (corresponding to X/R of 17 for 60 Hz) and the minimum contact parting time as determined from
the minimum opening time plus the assumed minimum relay time of 1/2 cycle (8.33 ms for 60 Hz).
The asymmetrical interrupting current, I total, is given by (It) = I x Sqrt (1 + 2 x %DC x %DC) kA rms asymmetrical total.
Duration of short-time current and maximum permissible tripping delay are both 2 seconds for all circuit breakers listed in this table, as required
in C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 and C37.06-2009.
RRRV can also be calculated as = 1.137 x E2/T2.
These circuit breakers were tested to the preferred TRV ratings specified in C37.06-2000.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-3
Sheet 05 033

Table 5.4-1A. Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K = 1.0)
(Continued)
Drawout
Circuit Breaker
Type
Capacitance Current Switching Capability

(Reference C37.04a-2003, C37.06-2009 and C37.09a-2005)
Out-of-Phase
Switching
ii
Current = 0.25 x I
Class
Voltage = 1.44 x V
No-Load
Operations
Inrush Frequency
Cable-Charging Current
Duty
Cycle
A
rms
Class
A
rms
Class
A
rms
kA
Peak
kHz
kV
rms
kA
rms
Inrush Current
Mechanical Endurance
A
rms
Capacitor Bank Current
Operating Duty
Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching
Continuous Current
Units
Rated Values
Isolated Shunt Capacitor

Bank Current
Identification
2
3
9j
50 VCP-W 25
1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
310
C2
75630
751000
751600
C2
75630
751000
751600
0.8
0.5
0.3
6.3
50 VCP-W 40
1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
310
C2
75630
751000
751600
C2
75630
751000
751600
0.8
0.5
0.3
10
50 VCP-W 50
1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
310
C2
75630
751000
751600
C2
75630
751000
751600
0.8
0.5
0.3
12.5
50 VCP-W 63
1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2
75630
751000
751600
C2
75630
751000
751600
0.8
0.5
0.3
15.8
150 VCP-W 25
1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
0.8
0.5
0.3
22
6.3
150 VCP-W 40
1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
0.8
0.5
0.3
22
10
150 VCP-W 50
1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
0.8
0.5
0.3
22
12.5
150 VCP-W 63
1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2
75630
751000
751600
C2
75630
751000
751600
0.8
0.5
0.3
22
15.8
9
j
Each operation consists of one closing plus one opening.

All 40 and 50 kA circuit breakers exceed required 5000 no-load operations; all 63 kA circuit breakers exceed the required 2000 no-load ANSI operations.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

5.4-4
March 2015
Sheet 05 034
V
kV
MVA kV
Class Class rms
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
I 4 E2
5
K 4 kV kV
T2
kA kV
rms Crest Amp rms Crest S
Y8 9
kV/S Cycles Sec. ms
V/K
kV
rms
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary) j
3-Second
ShortTime
Current
Carrying
Capability
Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers
Rated
Maximum Voltage Divided by K
Rated Reclosing Time
Rated Permissible Tripping Delay
Rated Interrupting Time
Rate of Rise of
Recovery Voltage 6
Maximum
Sym.
Interrupting
Capability
K Times Rated
Short-Circuit
Current 4
2.7 K
Times
Rated
ShortCircuit
Current
1.6 K
Times
Rated
ShortCircuit
Current
KI
KI
kA rms
kA rms
2.7 KI
kA
Crest
1.6 KI k l
kA rms S
asym.
250
4.76 1.24 19
60
1200 29
8.9
50
0.2
300
3.85 36
36
97
58
1.2
50 VCP-W
250
4.16
250
4.76 1.24 19
60
1200 29
2000
3000
8.9
50
0.2
300
3.85 36
36
97
58
1.2
50 VCP-W
350
4.16
350
4.76 1.19 19
60
1200 41
2000
3000
8.9
50
0.2
300
4.0
49
49
132
78
1.2
75 VCP-W
500
7.2
500
8.25 1.25 36
95
1200 33
2000
3000
15.5
60
0.29
300
6.6
41
41
111
66
1.2
150 VCP-W
500
13.8
500 15
1.30 36
95
1200 18
2000
3000
28
75
0.42
300
11.5
23
23
62
37
1.2
150 VCP-W
750
13.8
750 15
1.30 36
95
1200 28
2000
3000
28
75
0.42
300
11.5
36
36
97
58
1.2
150 VCP-W
1000
13.8
1000 15
1.30 36
95
1200 37
2000
3000
28
75
0.42
300
11.5
48
48
130
77
1.2
For capacitor switching, refer to Tables 5.4-1A and 5.4-2.

5 and 15 kV circuit breakers are UL listed.
Circuit breakers shown in this table were tested in accordance with
IEEE standard C37.09-1979.
For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting
capability at an operating voltage
13
Isc =
14
But not to exceed KI.

Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage
V
(Rated Short-Circuit Current)
Vo
Isc = 1.15
15
17
Current Values
4.16
16
Rated Transient
Recovery Voltage
50 VCP-WND
250
12
Current
Rated Time to Crest


Voltage (1 min.)
Nominal Voltage Class
Related Required Capabilities
Insulation
Level

(at Rated Maximum kV)
Rated Crest Voltage
Voltage
Rated Continuous
Current at 60 Hz
Rated Values
Circuit
Breaker Type
Rated Voltage Range Factor
Identification
Rated Maximum Voltage
ii
Table 5.4-1B. Available 5/15 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K > 1) 123
Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class
7
8
T (seconds) = Y
V
Vo

The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase
circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal
to the operating voltage.
4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous
rating is available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details.
3-cycle rating available, refer to Tables 5.4-1A and 5.4-2.

Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay
at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula:
k
l
(K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current) 2

Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute

period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula.
For reclosing service, there is No derating necessary for Eatons
VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can
perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and
some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all
with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Table 5.4-2.
Included for reference only.
Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical
interrupting capability, both at specified operating voltage.
E2
RRRV = 1.137 -----T2
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-5
Sheet 05 035

Table 5.4-1C. Available 27/38 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards 123
V
5
kV
MVA kV K 4 kV kV
rms Crest Amp
Class Class rms
270 VCP-W 27
16
Rated
Maximum Voltage Divided by K
Rated Reclosing Time
Rated Permissible Tripping Delay
Rate of Rise of
Recovery Voltage f
Rated Time to Crest
1.6 K
Times
Rated
ShortCircuit
Current
k
1.6 KI
kA rms
asym.
Current Values
I
E2
kA kV
T2
rms Crest S
7
Y8 9
kV/S Cycles Sec. ms
Maximum
Sym.
Interrupting
Capability
3-Second
ShortTime
Current
Carrying
Capability
K Times Rated
Short-Circuit
Current 4
V/K KI
kV
rms kA rms
KI
kA rms
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary) j
2.7 K
Times
Rated
ShortCircuit
Current
2.7 KI
kA
Crest
i
ii
1
2
3
4
27
1.0
60
125
1200
2000
16
51
105
0.55
300 27
16
16
43
26
1.2
270 VCP-W 27
22
1000 27
1.0
60
125
1200
2000
22
51
105
0.55
300 27
22
22
60
35
1.2
270 VCP-W 27
25
1250
27
1.0
60
125
1200
2000
25
51
105
0.55
300 27
25
25
68
40
1.2
270 VCP-W
32
1600 27
1.0
60
125
1200
2000
31.5 51
105
0.55
300 27
31.5
31.5
85
51
1.2
270 VCP-W 27
40
2000 27
1.0
60
125
1200
2000
40
51
105
0.55
300 27
40
40
108
64
1.2
380 VCP-W 34.5

16
1.0
80
170
1200
2000
16
71
125
0.64
300 38
16
16
43
26
1.2
380 VCP-W 34.5

21
1200
2000
21
71
125
0.64
300 23
35
35
95
56
1.2
380 VCP-W 34.5

25
38
1.0
80
1200
2000
25
71
125
0.64
300 38
25
25
68
40
1.2
380 VCP-W 34.5

32
38
1.0
80
1200
2000
2500
31.5 71
125
0.64
300 38
31.5
31.5
85
51
1.2
10
380 VCP-W 34.5

40
1200
2000
2500
40
125
0.64
40
40
108
64
1.2
11
3-cycle rating available, refer to Table 5.4-2.

Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay
at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula:
12
1
2
3
4
750
Rated Transient
Recovery Voltage

Rated Crest Voltage
Rated Continuous
Current at 60 Hz

Current
Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers
Related Required Capabilities
Insulation
Level
Voltage (1 min.)
Rated Voltage Range Factor
Voltage
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class
Rated Values
Nominal Voltage Class
Identification
38
38
1.65 80
170
m
170
m
170
m
38
1.0
80
170
m
71
For capacitor switching, refer to Table 5.4-2.

27 and 38 kV breakers are not UL listed.
Circuit breakers shown in this table were tested in accordance with
IEEE standard C37.09-1979.
For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting
capability at an operating voltage
Isc =
V
Vo
7
8
T (seconds) = Y

Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage
Isc = 1.15
V
Vo

The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase
circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal
to the operating voltage.
4000 A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000 A continuous
rating is available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details.
k
l
m
n
38
(K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current) 2

The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute

period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula.
For reclosing service, there is No derating necessary for Eatons
VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can
perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and
some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all
with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Table 5.4-2.
Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical
interrupting capability, both at specified operating voltage.
ANSI standard requires 150 kV BIL. All 38 kV ratings are tested to
170 kV BIL.
Type 380 VCP-W 40 circuit breaker is not rated for rapid reclosing.
E2
RRRV = 1.137 -----T2
5
6
7
8
9
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

5.4-6
March 2015
Sheet 05 036
Technical DataExtra Capability VCP-WC Circuit Breakers
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Introducing the VCP-WC extra capability medium voltage drawout circuit

breaker. Designed to provide all the
industry-leading features expected of
the VCP-W, plus extra capabilities for
those application requirements that go
beyond what is usually experienced.
The performance enhancement features of the VCP-WC make it an ideal
choice for capacitor switching duty,
high altitude applications, transformer
secondary fault protection, locations
with concentrations of rotating
machinery or high operating endurance requirements, just to mention a
few. Consider these capability
enhancements:
6
7
8
Definite purpose capacitor switching

Higher close and latch
Faster rate of rise of recovery voltage
Higher short-circuit current
Higher mechanical endurance
Higher insulation level
Higher voltage ratings with K=1

3-cycle interrupting time
Higher switching life
Designed and tested to ANSI
standards and higher
WR fixed retrofit configuration
available
Vacuum Circuit Breaker Design

Leadership
Front, functionally grouped controls

and indicators
Glass-polyester (5/15 kV), or epoxy
insulation (27/38 kV)
Front, vertically mounted stored
energy mechanism
Drawout on extension rails
Integrally mounted wheels
Quality Assurance Certificate
Eaton is a world leader in vacuum

interrupter and vacuum circuit breaker
technology, offering VCP-WC with extra
capabilities without sacrificing the
proven features already standard
with other VCP-W circuit breakers.
Features such as:
Vacuum interrupters with

copper-chrome contacts
V-Flex non-sliding current
transfer system
Visible contact erosion indicators
Visible contact wipe indicators
The Type VCP-WC Breakers are not

Interchangeable with Standard VCP-W
Breakers. They are Equipped with Different
Code Plates and Taller Front Panels.
Table 5.4-2. Extra Capability Type VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), Rated K = 1
Rated Values
Voltage Insulation
Level
Mechanical
Endurance
kA rms %
Total
kA kA
kA ms Seconds
rms Peak rms
kV/s
A rms
A rms
kA
Peak
kHz
No-Load
Operations
50 VCP-W 25C
5.95 1
24
75
25
14
50 VCP-W 40C
5.95 1
24
75
50
75
75
75
31
36
36
58
15
50 VCP-W 50C
5.95 1
24
75
50 VCP-W 63C
5.95 1
24
75
57
57
52
62
64
64
62
83
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.8
1.1
400 & 630

1000
250
630
1000
250
630
1000
250
250
75 VCP-W 50C
10.3 1
42
95
42
95
1200
2000
3000 4
1200
2000
3000 4
1200
2000
3000 4
1200
2000
3000 4
1200
2000
3000 4
1200
2000
3000 4
57
57
52
50
75
75
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.8
630
1000
250
400 & 600
400 & 630

1000
630
1000
630
1000
400 & 1600 5

400 & 1600 5
400 & 1600 5
630
1000
400 & 600 7

1000 7
20 & 20
18
15
18
15
18
8.8 & 7.7

8.8 & 7.7
8.8 & 7.7
15
18
20 & 20
18
6.5 & 5.5

2.7
3.5
2.7
3.5
2.7
1.6 & 0.465

1.6 & 0.465
1.6 & 0.465
3.5
2.7
6.5 & 5.5

2.7
10,000
10,000
5,000
10,000
10,000
5,000
10,000
10,000
5,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
5,000
10,000
10,000
5,000
630 7
1000 7
630 7
1000 7
400 & 1600 5

400 & 1600 5
400 & 1600 5
15
18
15
18
8.8 & 7.7

8.8 & 7.7
8.8 & 7.7
3.5
2.7
3.5
2.7
1.6 & 0.465

1.6 & 0.465
1.6 & 0.465
10,000
10,000
5,000
10,000
10,000
5,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
13
17
150 VCP-W 25C 17.5
18
150 VCP-W 40C 17.5
42
95
19
150 VCP-W 50C 17.5
42
95
20
150 VCP-W 63C 15
42
95
21
50
63
50
25
40
1200
2000
3000 4
1200
50
2000
3000 4
1200
63
2000
4
3000
Short-Time Current
for 3 Seconds 1
Interrupting Time 2

Capability
Maximum Voltage (V)
16
40
97
25
50
2.0
139
40
50
2.0
139
50
50
2.0
175
63
50
2.0
64
64
62
31
36
36
139
50
50
2.0
97 6 25
50
2.0
75
58
139
40
50
2.0
57
57
52
62
64
64
62
83
139
50
50
2.0
175
63
50
2.0
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.8
1.1
1000 7
250 7
630 7
1000 7
250 7
630 7
1000 7
250 7
250
Inrush Frequency
A
rms
12
Asym. Interrupting (It)
kV
Peak
11
% DC Component (Idc)
kV K kV
rms
rms
10
Voltage Range Factor
Inrush Current
Capacitor Switching Ratings

General
Definite Purpose
Purpose
Back-to-Back
Isolated
Capacitor Switching
Shunt
Capacitor
Bank
Current
Capacitor Bank
Current
Rate of
Rise of
Recovery
Voltage
(RRRV)
Sym. Interrupting
at Voltage (Isc)
Maximum
Permissible
Tripping
Delay
Continuous Current
at 60 Hz
Current

Identification
Circuit
Breaker
Type

Voltage (1 min.)
Industry Leader VCP-WC
Note: Refer to Page 5.4-7 for footnotes.
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-7
Sheet 05 037
Technical DataExtra Capability VCP-WC Circuit Breakers

Table 5.4-2. VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), Rated K = 1 (Continued)
Capacitor Switching Ratings
General Purpose
Definite Purpose
Isolated
Cable
Charging Shunt
Capacitor
Current
Bank
Current
Back-to-Back
Capacitor Switching
ms Seconds
kV/s
A rms
A rms
i
ii
1
Inrush Frequency
Interrupting Time 2
kA kA
kA
rms Peak rms
Short-Time Current
for 3 Seconds 1

Capability
kA
rms
Total
Sym. Interrupting
at Voltage (Isc)
Asym. Interrupting (It)
kV
A
Peak rms
Continuous Current
at 60 Hz
Rate of
Rise of
Recovery
Voltage
(RRRV)
Inrush Current
Maximum
Permissible
Tripping
Delay
Mechanical
Endurance
Capacitor Bank
Current
Current
% DC Component (Idc)
kV K kV
rms
rms

Voltage Insulation
Level
Voltage (1 min.)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Voltage Range Factor
Rated Values
Maximum Voltage (V)
Identification
A rms
kA
Peak
kHz
400
20
4.2
5,000
2
No-Load
Operations
3
4
270 VCP-W 25C 27
60
125
1200
1600
25
75
36
85
25 h
50
2.0
1.1
400
270 VCP-W 32C 27
60
125
1200
1600
31.5
55
40
100
31.5 i 50
2.0
1.1
400
400
20
4.2
5,000
270 VCP-W 40C 27
60
125
1200
1600
40
50
49
112
40 j
50
2.0
1.1
400
400
20
4.2
5,000
380 VCP-W 16C 38
80
170
1200
2000
16
75
23.3 50
16
50
2.0
0.7
1.3
50
50
250
250 & 1000
250
20
4.4
10,000
250 & 1000 20 & 20 5 & 5
380 VCP-W 25C 38
80
170
1200
2000
25
65
34.0 75
25
50
2.0
0.7
1.3
50
50
250
250 & 1000
250
20
4.4
10,000
250 & 1000 20 & 20 5 & 5
380 VCP-W 32C 38
80
170
33.1
1200
2000
2500
3000FC k
57
42.5 91
31.5
50
2.0
0.7
1.3
0.7
1.3
50
50
50
50
250
250
250 & 1000 250 & 1000
250 & 1000 250 & 1000
20
20 & 20
20 & 20
10,000
4.4
5&5
5&5
380 VCP-W 40C 38
80
170
1200
40
2000
2500
3000FC l
63
53.5 107
40
50
2.0
0.7
50
50
50
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
h
i
j
k
l
m
10,000
Except as noted.
3 cycles.
Contact Eaton for higher RRRV or for more information.
4000 A FC rating available.
C37.04.a-2003 Class C2 at 15 kV.
Close and Latch Current for 1200A Type 150 VCP-W 25C is proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not derated.
Capacitor Switching Ratings are proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not derated.
2.5 seconds.
1.6 second.
1 second.
2000 A FC to 3000 A.
2500 A FC to 3000 A.
Tested at 27 kV, 350 A isolated or back-to-back capacitor bank, inrush current 4.6 kA, inrush frequency 1.2 kHz.
Note: 38 kV, 2500 A and 3000 A WC breakers are not rated for rapid reclosing.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

5.4-8
March 2015
Sheet 05 038
Technical DataType VCP-WG and VCP-WRG Generator Circuit Breakers
Type VCP-WG Generator

Circuit Breakers
ii
1
2
3
4
5
VCP-WG Breaker (Front View)
The VCP-WG (drawout) and VCP-WRG

(fixed) circuit breakers meet, and even
exceed, the rigorous service duty
requirements for generator circuit
applications as defined by IEEE.
Eatons VCP-WG and VCP-WRG
generator breakers are available in
two frame sizes. The 29.00-inch frame
(29.00 inches wide with front cover on)
has ratings up to 15 kV, 63 kA and
3000A (4000A with forced-air cooling). The 31.00-inch frame (31.00
inches wide with front cover on) has
ratings up to 15 kV, 75 kA and 4000 A
(5000 A with forced-air cooling). The
31.00-inch frame is also available in a
fixed version with ratings up to 15 kV,
75 kA and 6000 A (7000 A with forcedair cooling).
Count on Eatons innovative technology
to handle high continuous AC current
and voltage, then safely switch
through extreme out-of-phase voltages
and high-stress asymmetrical currents
using clean and green vacuum interruption without fail for over 10,000
normal operations.
6
7
8
Eatons VCP-WG generator circuit

breakers meet the strict service duty
requirements set forth by IEEE for generator circuit applications, including:
9
10
Generator circuit configuration

High continuous current levels
Unique fault current conditions
Transformer-fed faults
Generator-fed faults
Unique voltage conditions
Very fast RRRV
Out-of-phase switching
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
VCP-WG Breaker (Rear View)
Why generator circuit breakers?
Specially rated generator breakers

typically should be used on
generator applications 10,000 kW
and above
A generator circuit breaker, properly
rated and tested to the appropriate
industry standard, can protect the
generator from damage, or even
complete failure, that could occur
when feeding a faulted transformer,
and also can protect the transformer, in the event that a fault
should occur in the generator
Generator circuits have unique
characteristics that require specially
designed and tested circuit breakers.
The IEEE developed the special
industry standard C37.013 and amendment C37.013a-2007 to address these
characteristics. Eaton has dedicated
years of research, design, enhancement and testing to create Eatons
family of generator breakers.
Generator Circuit Configuration

The transformer and generator can
be in close proximity to the circuit
breaker. See Figure 5.4-1. Applications
with high continuous current levels
require connections with large conductors of very low impedance. This construction causes unique fault current
and voltage conditions as shown in
Figure 5.4-2.
Generator
Circuit Breaker
Generator
High Continuous Current Levels

Generator circuit breakers must be
able to handle high continuous current
levels without overheating. VCP-WG
drawout circuit breakers are designed
to reliably operate up to 4000 A with
natural air convection cooling, and up
to 5000 A with suitable enclosure fan
cooling during overload conditions.
VCP-WRG fixed circuit breakers are
designed to reliably operate up to
6000 A with natural air convection
cooling and up to 7000 A with suitable
enclosure fan cooling during overload
conditions.
Unique Fault Current Conditions

System-source (aka, transformer-fed)
faults (see Figure 5.4-1, fault location
a) can be extremely high. The full
energy of the power system feeds the
fault, and the low impedance of the
fault current path does very little to
limit the fault current. Eatons type
VCP-WG Generator Circuit Breakers
are ideal for interrupting such high
fault currents because they have
demonstrated high interruption
ratings up to 75 kA, with high DC fault
content up to 75%, as proven by high
power laboratory tests.
Generator-source (aka, generator-fed)
faults, see Figure 5.4-1, fault location
b) can cause a severe condition
called Delayed Current Zero, see
Figure 5.4-2). The high ratio of inductive reactance to resistance (X/R ratio)
of the system can cause the DC component of the fault current to exceed
100%. The asymmetrical fault current
peak becomes high enough and its
decay becomes slow enough that
the natural current zero is delayed
for several cycles. The circuit breaker
experiences longer arcing time and
more electrical, thermal and mechanical stress during the interruption. The
IEEE standard requires verification that
the circuit breaker can interrupt under
these severe conditions. Eatons
VCP-WG generator circuit breakers
have demonstrated their ability to
interrupt three-phase fault current
levels up to 135% DC content under
delayed current zero conditions.
High Voltage
Circuit Breaker
Step-up
Transformer
Figure 5.4-1. Generator Circuit Application
21
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.4-9
Sheet 05 039

Unique Voltage Conditions
i
Contact Parting
Generator circuits typically produce very

fast rates of rise of recovery voltage
(RRRV) due to the high natural frequency
and low impedance and very low stray
capacitance. VCP-WG generator circuit breakers are designed to interrupt
fault current levels with very fast RRRV
in accordance with IEEE standard
C37.013 and C37.013a. VCP-WG generator circuit breakers have a distinct ability
to perform under out-of-phase conditions when the generator and power
system voltages are not in sync. The
voltages across the open contacts can
be as high as twice the rated line-toground voltage of the system. The IEEE
standard requires demonstration by
test that the generator circuit breaker
can switch under specified out-of-phase
conditions.
8
Current
pu
6
4
Eatons generator vacuum circuit

breakers are available in drawout
(VCP-WG) or fixed (VCP-WRG) configurations to provide for superior performance and versatility. Many industrial
and commercial power systems now
include small generators as a local
source of power. New applications are
arising as a result of the de-regulation
of the utility industry, and the construction of smaller packaged power
plants. Eatons generator breakers
interrupt large short-circuit currents
in a small three-pole package.
-2
-4
-6
20
Electric utilities: fossil, hydro and

wind power
Packaged power plants
Industrial companies using
combined cycle/combustion
turbine plants
Government and military
Commercial institutions
Petrochemical and process
industries
Forestry, pulp and paper
Mining, exploration and marine
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Figure 5.4-2. Generator-Fed Faults Can Experience Delayed Current Zero, Where the High Inductance
to Resistance Ratio of the System Can Cause the DC Component of the Fault Current to Exceed 100%
6
7
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
29.00
(736.6)
10.00
(254.0)
30.00
(762.0)
10.00
(254.0)
29.00
(736.6)
31.40
(797.6)
8
26.60
(675.6)
9
10
31.20
(792.5)
11
Typical applications include:
Idc
Versatility in Application
ii
24.60
(624.8)
24.60
(624.8)
29-Inch Frame Drawout VCP-WG
29-Inch Frame Fixed VCP-WRG
12
13
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
30.60
(777.2)
10.00
(254.0)
30.00
(762.0)
10.00
(254.0)
30.60
(777.2)
26.80*
(680.7)
14
15
39.60
(1005.8)
39.30
(998.2)
The VCP-WG is the worlds generator

circuit breaker for reliable and robust
power generation protection.
16
17
24.60
(624.8)
31-Inch Frame Drawout VCP-WG
*6000 A has a depth of 28.50 (723.9)
18
31-Inch Frame Fixed VCP-WRG
19
Figure 5.4-3. Type VCP-WG (Drawout) and Type VCP-WRG (Fixed) Circuit Breakers
20
21
CA08104001E
5.4-10

March 2015
Sheet 05 040
i
ii
5 kV Class Generator Circuit Breaker Ratings

Table 5.4-3. Generator Circuit Breaker Types: VCP-WG (DrawoutDO) / VCP-WRG (FixedFIX)
Description
Units
Short-Circuit Current (Isc)

50 kA
63 kA
75 kA
Maximum Voltage (V): 5 kV
1
2
Frame in Inches (mm)

(see Figure 5.4-3 on Page 5.4-9)
29.00
(736.6)
Ratings Assigned
DO
Continuous Current
A rms
1200
2000
3000
29.00
(736.6)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
29.00
(736.6)
FIX
DO
FIX
DO
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
29.00
(736.6)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
FIX
DO
FIX
DO
FIX
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
4000
4000 1 4000 1 4000
5000 1 5000
6000
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
4000
4000 1 4000 1 4000
5000 1 5000
6000
6300 1
7000 1
6300 1
7000 1
6300 1
7000 1
4000
4000
5000 1 5000
6000
Dielectric Strength
Power frequency withstand voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage
kV rms
kV peak
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
Interrupting Time
ms
50
50
83
83
50
50
83
83
83
83
Closing Time
ms
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
Asymmetrical current interrupting capability
Ref: Minimum opening time
Short-time current carrying capability
Duration of short-time current
kA rms
% DC
ms
kA rms
sec
50
75
30
50
3
50
75
30
50
3
50
75
54
50
2.3
50
75
54
50
2.3
63
75
30
63
3
63
75
30
63
3
63
75
54
63
1.4
63
75
54
63
1.4
75
63
54
75
1
75
63
54
75
1
Closing and Latching Capability
kA peak
137
137
137
137
173
173
173
173
206
206
First Generator-Source Symmetrical

Current Interrupting Capability
kA rms
25
25
25
25
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
40
40
First Generator-Source Asymmetrical

% DC
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Second Generator-Source Symmetrical

kA rms
31.5
31.5
40
40
40
40
50
50
Second Generator-Source Asymmetrical

% DC
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
Prospective TRVRate of Rise of Recovery

Voltage (RRRV)
Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 1.84 x V)
kV / s
kV peak
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0 2
9.2 2
3.0 2
9.2 2
3.1
5
6
7
10
11
Transient recovery voltageTime to Peak

(T2 = 0.62 x V)
12
13
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1 2
3.1 2
Load Current Switching Endurance Capability
Operations 10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
No-Load Mechanical Endurance Capability
Operations 10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
Out-of-Phase Current Switching Capability
kA
25
25
25
25
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
37.5
37.5
kV rms
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.1
90 out-of-phase power frequency recovery

voltage ( = 1.5 x sqrt(2/3) x V)
14
90 out-of-phase inherent TRV

Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV)
15
16
1
2
17
18
kV / s
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
kV peak
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13

(T2 = 0.89 x V)
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Ratings achieved using forced-air cooling by blowers in the enclosure.

TRV capacitors are required if RRRV is >0.5 kV/s; or T2 is <65 s.
Note: Rated frequency: 60 Hz.

Note: Standard operating duty: CO - 30 m - CO.
Note: Relevant Standard: IEEE standards C37.013-1997 and C37.013a-2007.
Note: Test certificates available.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-11
Sheet 05 041
15 kV Class Generator Circuit Breaker Ratings
Table 5.4-4. Generator Circuit Breaker Types: VCP-WG (DrawoutDO) / VCP-WRG (FixedFIX) (Continued)
Description
Units
Short-Circuit Current (Isc)

50 kA
63 kA
ii
75 kA
Maximum Voltage (V): 15 kV

Frame in Inches (mm)
(see Figure 5.4-3 on Page 5.4-9)
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
Ratings Assigned
DO
FIX
DO
FIX
DO
FIX
DO
FIX
DO
FIX
Continuous Current
A rms
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
4000
4000
5000 1 5000
6000
4000
4000 1 4000 1 4000
5000 1 5000
6000
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
4000
4000 1 4000 1 4000
5000 1 5000
6000
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
6300 1
7000 1
6300 1
7000 1
6300 1
7000 1
4
5
Dielectric Strength
Power frequency withstand voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage
kV rms
kV peak
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
Interrupting Time
ms
50
50
83
83
50
50
83
83
83
83
Closing Time
ms
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
Asymmetrical current interrupting capability
Ref: Minimum opening time
Short-time current carrying capability
Duration of short-time current
kA rms
% DC
ms
kA rms
s
50
75
30
50
3
50
75
30
50
3
50
75
54
50
2.3
50
75
54
50
2.3
63
75
30
63
3
63
75
30
63
3
63
75
54
63
1.4
63
75
54
63
1.4
75
63
54
75
1
75
63
54
75
1
Closing and Latching Capability
kA peak
137
137
137
137
173
173
173
173
206
206
First Generator-Source Symmetrical

kA rms
25
25
25
25
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
40
40
First Generator-Source Asymmetrical

% DC
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
Second Generator-Source Symmetrical

kA rms
31.5
31.5
40
40
40
40
50
50
Second Generator-Source Asymmetrical

% DC
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
Prospective TRVRate of Rise of Recovery

Voltage (RRRV)
kV / s
kV peak
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4 2
30.9 2
3.4 2
30.9 2
9.3

(T2 = 0.62 x V)
9.3
9.3
9.3
9.3
9.3
9.3
9.3
9.3 2
9.3 2
Load Current Switching Endurance Capability
Operations 10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
No-Load Mechanical Endurance Capability
Operations 10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
Out-of-Phase Current Switching Capability
kA
25
25
25
25
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
37.5
37.5
kV rms
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.4
90 out-of-phase power frequency recovery

voltage ( = 1.5 x sqrt(2/3) x V)
90 out-of-phase inherent TRV
Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV)
1
2
kV / s
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
kV peak
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39

(T2 = 0.89 x V)
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
Ratings achieved using forced-air cooling by blowers in the enclosure.

TRV capacitors are required if RRRV is >0.5 kV/s; or T2 is <65 s.
Note: Rated frequency: 60 Hz.

Note: Standard operating duty: CO - 30 m - CO.
Note: Relevant Standard: IEEE standards C37.013-1997 and C37.013a-2007.
Note: Test certificates available.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.4-12

March 2015
Sheet 05 042
Technical DataCircuit Breakers
i
ii
1
2
3
Type VCP-W Circuit Breaker Operating Times

The closing time (initiation of close
signal to contact make) and opening
time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break) are shown in Table 5.4-5.
Figure 5.4-4 below shows the sequence

of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with applicable VCP-W
circuit breaker timings.
Table 5.4-5. Closing Time and Opening Time

Rated
Control Voltage
Breaker
Rating
Closing Time
Milliseconds
Opening Time Milliseconds

Standard 5-Cycle Breaker Optional 3-Cycle Breaker
48 V, 125 V, 250 Vdc
All
4560
3045
3038
120 V, 240 Vac
All
4560
120 V or 240 Vac capacitor trip
All
2641
2638
Optionalundervoltage trip release 48 V, 125 V, 250 Vdc
All
3045
3045
4
Clearing Time
Interrupting Time
Standard: 83 ms (5 Cycle)
Optional Available: 50 ms (3 Cycle)
6
Contact Parting Time
12
Maximum Contact Parting Time = 38 ms (2-1/4 Cycle) Based on Minimum Tripping

Delay Equal to 8 ms (1/2 Cycle)
Tripping Delay Time
8 ms (1/2 Cycle) Minimum Delay

2 sec = (120 Cycle) Maximum Delay
Protective Relay
Operating Time
Auxiliary Relay
Operating Time
Opening Time
Arcing Time
3045 ms for 5 Cycle VCP-W

3038 ms for 3 Cycle VCP-W
517 ms
Shunt Trip
Operating Time
Mechanism
Operating Time
10
ShortCircuit
Begins
11
12
Rated Control
Voltage Energizes
Trip Coil
Main
Contacts
Parts
Last
Pole
Clears
Figure 5.4-4. Sequence of Events and Circuit Breaker Operating Times

1
2
13
Times shown are based on 60 Hz.

% DC component capability (and asymmetry factor S) depend on the minimum contact parting time.
The % DC component capability is M 50% (S factor M 1.2) for all VCP-W circuit breakers.
14
Load
52-1
15
52-2
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
38 ms
12 ms
47 ms
52-1 Opening Time
Arcing
Time
Dead Time (With Arcing)
7
ms
16
100
Time (ms)
52 ms
52-2 Closing Time
Source #1
17
Source #2
52-1 b
Contact
Makes
59 ms
Transfer
Initiate
18
Control
Supply
19
20
Dead Bus Time (No Arcing)
Standard
b Contact
Trip 52-1
21
52-1
b
Close 52-2
Approx. 100 ms
Total Transfer Time
Transfer
Initiate
Signal
Figure 5.4-5. Typical Transfer Times 3Fast Sequential Transfer

3
Times shown are based on 60 Hz.
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.4-13
Sheet 05 043
Technical DataCircuit Breakers and Switchgear

Usual Service Conditions
Applications at Frequencies Less Than 60 Hz
Usual service conditions for operation

of metal-clad switchgear are as follows:
Altitude does not exceed 3300 feet

(1000m)
Ambient temperature within
the limits of 30 C and +40 C
(22 F and +104 F)
The effect of solar radiation is not
significant
Applications Above 3300 Feet (1006m)

The rated one-minute power frequency
withstand voltage, the impulse withstand
voltage, the continuous current rating
and the maximum voltage rating must
be multiplied by the appropriate correction factor in Table 5.4-8 to obtain
modified ratings that must equal or
exceed the application requirements.
Based on series of actual tests performed

on Type VCP-W circuit breakers and
analysis of these test data and physics
of vacuum interrupters, it has been
found that the current interruption
limit for Type VCP-W circuit breakers
is proportional to the square root of
the frequency. Table 5.4-6 provides
derating factors, which must be applied
to breaker interrupting current at
various frequencies.
Table 5.4-6. Derating Factors
Interrupting Current
Derating Factors
50 Hz
25 Hz
16 Hz
12 Hz
None
0.65
0.52
0.45
Note: Intermediate values may be obtained

by interpolation.
Rated Short-Time and

Close and Latch Currents
Applications Above or Below 40C Ambient
No derating is required for short time

and close and latch current at lower
frequency.
Refer to ANSI C37.20.2, Section 8.4

for load current-carrying capabilities
under various conditions of ambient
temperature and load.
Rated Continuous Current

Because the effective resistance of
circuit conductors is less at lower
frequency, continuous current through
the circuit can be increased somewhat.
Table 5.4-7 provides nominal current
rating for VCP-W breakers when
operated at frequencies below 60 Hz.
No derating is required for lower

frequency.
i
ii
CTs, VTs, Relays and Instruments

Application at frequency other than
rated frequency must be verified for
each device on an individual basis.
Table 5.4-8. Altitude Derating Factors
Altitude Above Altitude Correction Factor to

Sea Level in
be Applied to:
Feet (m)
Voltage
Rated
Continuous
Current
3
4
3300 (1006)
(and Below)
1.0
1.0
4000 (1219)
5000 (1524)
6000 (1829)
0.98
0.95
0.92
0.995
0.991
0.987
6600 (2012)
7000 (2137)
8000 (2438)
0.91
0.89
0.86
0.985
0.98
0.97
9000 (2743)
10,000 (3048)
12,000 (3658)
0.83
0.80
0.75
0.965
0.96
0.95
13,200 (4023)
14,000 (4267)
16,000 (4877)
0.72
0.70
0.65
0.94
0.935
0.925
16,400 (5000)
18,000 (5486)
20,000 (6096)
0.64
0.61
0.56
0.92
0.91
0.90
9
10
11
Table 5.4-7. Current Ratings

Rated Continuous Nominal Current at
Current at 60 Hz
Frequency Below 60 Hz
1200 A
2000 A
3000 A
Power Frequency and Impulse Withstand

Voltage Ratings
50 Hz 25 Hz 16 Hz 12 Hz
12
1243
2075
3119
13
1410
2374
3597
1519
2573
3923
1589
2703
4139
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.4-14

March 2015
Sheet 05 044
Technical DataSwitchgear
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Unusual Service Conditions

Applications of metal-clad switchgear
at other than usual altitude or temperature, or where solar radiation is significant, require special consideration.
Other unusual service conditions that
may affect design and application
include:
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Exposure to salt air, hot or humid

climate, excessive dust, dripping
water, falling dirt, or other similar
conditions
Unusual transportation or storage
conditions
Switchgear assemblies when used
as the service disconnecting means
Installations accessible to the
general public
Exposure to seismic shock
Exposure to nuclear radiation
Maintenance shall consist of adjusting,

cleaning, lubricating, tightening, etc.,
as recommended by the circuit breaker
instruction book.
to rated continuous current at rated

maximum voltage with power factor
between 80% leading and
80% lagging.
Continuous current switching assumes

opening and closing rated continuous
current at rated maximum voltage with
power factor between 80% leading and
80% lagging.
In accordance with ANSI C37.06, if a

short-circuit operation occurs before
the completion of the listed switching
operations, maintenance is recommended and possible functional part
replacement may be necessary,
depending on previous accumulated
duty, fault magnitude and expected
future operations.
Inrush current switching ensures a

closing current equal to 600% of rated
continuous current at rated maximum
voltage with power factor of 30% lagging
or less, and an opening current equal
Table 5.4-9. Breaker Operations Information
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
kV rms
Load Current Switching

Table 5.4-9 showing number of
operations is a guide to normal maintenance for circuit breakers operated
under usual service conditions for most
repetitive duty applications including
isolated capacitor bank switching and
shunt reactor switching, but not for
arc furnace switching. The numbers
in the table are equal to or in excess
of those required by ANSI C37.06.
Switchgear Heat Loss

The heat-loss data for circuit breakers
given in Table 5.4-10 includes portion
of main bus conductors and load runbacks. Please note that the estimated
wattage given for each component is
at its full rating. For example, the chart
shows 600 W for 1200 A, 5 kV VCP-W
breaker. It simply means that we
estimated 600 W loss in breaker in a
1200 A, 5 kV compartment when the
circuit breaker is carrying full 1200 A.
The actual loss, of course, will depend
on the actual current being carried by
the breaker. If the full load current of
the load connected to that 1200 A
breaker, for example, is only 200 A,
the heat-loss in that compartment
will be much less. By simple I x I x R
calculations, one can easily calculate
actual loss at 200 A as = 600 x (200/
1200) x (200/1200) = 16.67 W. Also,
in case of lineup consisting of many
feeders, all feeders might not be carrying or supplying loads at all times. If
that is the case, then one can further
reduce total watt loss for the lineup by
applying a utilization factor.
Maximum Number of Operations 1
Circuit Breaker Ratings
4.76, 8.25, 15
4.76, 8.25, 15
4.76, 15
27
38
1
Rated
Continuous
Current
Amperes
Rated
Short-Circuit
Current
kA rms, sym.
1200, 2000
3000
All
33 kA and below 2000

All
1000
37 kA and above 1000
All
All
All
All
Between
Servicing
500
250
No-Load
Rated
Mechanical Continuous
Current
Switching
Inrush
Current
Switching
10,000
5000
5000
10,000
5000
5000
750
400
400
2500
1500
2500
1500
100
100
Each operation is comprised of one closing plus one opening.
Table 5.4-10. Heat Loss in Watts at Full Rating, at 60 Hz

Type of Switchgear Assembly Breaker
Rating
1200 A
2000 A
2500 A
3000 A
4000 A Fan
Cooled
VCP-W
VCP-W
600 W
850 W
1400 W
1700 W
2300 W
2100 W
3800 W
3700 W
5, 15, and 27 kV
38 kV
Other Components
Each CT, standard accuracy
Each CT, high accuracy
Each VT
50 W
100 W
60 W
CPT single-phase, 25 kVA

CPT single-phase, 45 kVA
450 W
892 W
Space heatereach
250 W
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-15
Sheet 05 045
Technical DataAssembly Ratings
Standard Metal-Clad
Switchgear Assembly Ratings
i
ii
VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear is

available for application at voltages up
to 38 kV, 50 or 60 Hz. Refer to the table
below for complete list of available
ratings.
1
2
Table 5.4-11. Standard VCP-W (Non-Arc-Resistant) Metal-Clad Switchgear Ratings Per IEEE C37.20.2-1999 12
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
(Ref.)
Rated
Voltage
Range
Factor
K
8.25
15
27
38
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Insulation Level
Rated Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Current
Withstand
(2-Second)
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(10-Cycle) (167 ms)
K*I 5
2.7 *K*I 6
1.6 *K* I 7
(Ref. only)
Amperes
kA rms Sym.
kA Crest
kA rms Asym.
Rated Main Bus

Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage,
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Lightning
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
[LIWV]
(BIL)
kA rms
kV rms
kV Peak
25
19
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
25
68
40
1.24
29
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
36
97
58
40
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
40
108
64
1.19
41
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
49
132
78
kV rms
4.76
(Ref.)
Rated
ShortCircuit
Current
I
60
50
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
50
135
80
63
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
63
170
101
1.25
33
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
41
111
66
50
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
50
135
80
1.3
18
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
23
62
37
25
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
25
68
40
1.3
28
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
36
97
58
40
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
40
108
64
1.3
37
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
48
130
77
50
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
50
135
80
63
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
63
170
101
16
1200, 2000, 2500, 2700
16
43
26
22
1200, 2000, 2500, 2700
22
60
35
25
1200, 2000, 2500, 2700
25
68
40
31.5
1200, 2000, 2500, 2700
31.5
85
51
40
16
36
95
36
95
60
125
1200, 2000, 2500, 2700
40
108
64
1200, 2000, 2500
16
43
26
25
1200, 2000, 2500
25
68
40
80
150 8
31.5
1200, 2000, 2500
31.5
85
51
1.65
23
1200, 2000, 2500
35
95
56
40
1200, 2000, 2500
40
108
64
The switchgear assembly is designed for use with type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
circuit breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. In such cases, switchgear assembly ratings as given in this table
will apply.
Switchgear assemblies can be supplied with UL/CSA label. Contact Eaton for availability.
Circuit breaker requires forced air cooling to carry 4000 A at 4.76, 8.25 and 15 kV, and 3000 A at 38 kV.
27 kV 2500 A and 2700 A main bus ratings are available in two-high design configurations only.
Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices may limit the duration to a value less than
2 seconds.
These values exceed 2.6*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999.
This is a standard IEEE C37.20.2 rating for 38 kV Class of switchgear.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

5.4-16
March 2015
Sheet 05 046
Technical DataAssembly Ratings
1
2
3
4
VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant

switchgear is available for application
at voltages up to 38 kV, 50 or 60 Hz.
Refer to the table below for complete
list of available ratings.
Table 5.4-12. VacClad-W Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad Switchgear 12
Rated
(Ref.)
Maximum Rated
Voltage 3 Voltage
Range
Factor
K
(Ref.)
Rated
ShortCircuit
Current
I
Ratings per IEEE C37.20.2-1999

Insulation Level
8.25
15
10
11
12
27 38
13
14
38 3
15
16
17
2
3
4
18
5
6
19
7
8
K*I 5
2.7 *K*I 6 1.6 *K* I 7

(Ref. only)
kA rms
Sym.
kA Crest
Accessibility Rated Arc ShortType

Circuit Withstand
Current
Rated Arc
Duration
kA rms
kV rms
kV Peak
25
19
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25
68
40
2B
25
65
0.5
1.24
29
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36
97
58
2B
36
93.6
0.5
40
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40
108
64
2B
40
104
0.5
1.19
41
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 49
132
78
2B
49
127.4
0.5
50
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50
135
80
2B
50
130
0.5
63
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63
170
101
2B
63
170
0.5
0.5
kV rms
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(10-Cycle) (167 ms)
Lightning
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
[LIWV]
(BIL)
6
7
Enclosure Internal Arc Withstand

Rated
Short-Time
ShortCircuit
Current
Withstand
(2-Second)
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage,
60 Hz,
1 Minute
5
4.76
Rated Main Bus

1.25
33
50
1.3
18
1
1.3
2.6*Isc
kA rms
Sym.
kA Peak
Sec.
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 41
111
66
2B
41
106.6
135
80
2B
50
130
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 23
62
37
2B
23
59.8
0.5
25
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25
68
40
2B
25
65
0.5
28
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36
97
58
2B
36
93.6
0.5
40
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40
108
64
2B
40
104
0.5
1.3
37
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 48
130
77
2B
48
124.8
0.5
50
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50
135
80
2B
50
130
0.5
63
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63
170
101
2B
63
170
0.5
16
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 16
43
26
16
41.6
0.5
22
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 22
60
35
22
57.2
0.5
25
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 25
68
40
25
65
0.5
31.5
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 31.5
85
51
31.5
81.9
0.5
40
16
1
1
36
60
95
kA rms
Asym.
Isc
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50
36
60
Amperes
EEMAC G14-1
ii
Assembly Ratings
IEEE C37.20.7
95
125
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 40
108
64
40
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 16
43
26
16
41.6
25
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 25
68
40
25
65
0.5
31.5
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 31.5
85
51
31.5
81.9
0.5
80
150
104
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.65
23
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 35
95
56
35
91
0.5
40
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 40
108
64
40
104
0.5
The switchgear assembly is designed for use with type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
will apply.
Switchgear assemblies can be supplied with UL/CSA label. Contact Eaton for availability.
515 kV switchgear is supplied with a plenum. 2738 kV switchgear is supplied with arc wall. For plenum requirements at 27 and 38 kV, contact Eaton.
Maximum continuous current rating for circuit breaker that can be supplied at 38 kV is 2500 A.
Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices
may limit the duration to a value less than 2 seconds.
27 kV arc-resistant switchgear can be supplied in one-high configuration only.
20
21
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.4-17
Sheet 05 047
Technical DataSurge Protection
Surge Protection
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear is applied over a broad range of
circuits, and is one of the many types
of equipment in the total system. The
distribution system can be subject to
voltage transients caused by lighting
or switching surges.
Recognizing that distribution system
can be subject to voltage transients
caused by lighting or switching, the
industry has developed standards to
provide guidelines for surge protection
of electrical equipment. Those guidelines should be used in design and
protection of electrical distribution
systems independent of the circuit
breaker interrupting medium. The
industry standards are:
ANSI C62
Guides and Standards for Surge
Protection
IEEE 242Buff Book
IEEE Recommended Practice for
Protection and Coordination of
Systems
IEEE 141Red Book
Recommended Practice for
Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants
IEEE C37.20.2
Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear
IEEE C57.142
Guide to Describe the Occurrence
and Mitigation of Switching
Transients Induced by Transformers,
Switching Device, and System
Interaction
Eatons medium voltage metal-clad
and metal-enclosed switchgear that
uses vacuum circuit breakers is applied
over a broad range of circuits. It is one
of the many types of equipment in the
total distribution system. Whenever a
switching device is opened or closed,
certain interactions of the power
system elements with the switching
device can cause high frequency voltage
transients in the system. Due to the
wide range of applications and variety
of ratings used for different elements
in the power systems, a given circuit
may or may not require surge protection. Therefore, Eaton does not include
surge protection as standard with its
metal-clad or metal-enclosed medium
voltage switchgear. The user exercises
the options as to the type and extent
of the surge protection necessary
depending on the individual circuit
characteristics and cost considerations.
CA08104001E
The following are Eatons recommendations for surge protection of medium

voltage equipment. Please note these
recommendations are valid when
using Eatons vacuum breakers only.
In all cases described below, Eaton
highly recommends performing a
switching transient study to determine the transient response, and
properly select and rate the transient
mitigation equipment.
Surge Protection Recommendations

Note: The complete surge protection
for power system equipment consists of
a surge arrester in parallel with an RC
snubber. Eaton can custom design and
supply an RC snubber to the specific
characteristics of the system of interest,
and highly recommends this approach. The
abbreviation RC snubber used in the text
below refers to Eatons custom device.
Alternatively, standard, one-size-fits-all
devices are available from other manufacturers. The abbreviation Protec Z used in
the text below refers to Surge Protection
Device manufactured by NTSA. An equivalent device offered by other manufacturers,
such as Type EHZ by ABB, can also be used.
1. For circuits exposed to lightning,

surge arresters should be applied
in line with Industry standard
practices.
2. Transformers
a. Close-coupled to medium
Provide transients surge protection, such as surge arrester
in parallel with RC snubber, or
Protec Z. The surge protection
device selected should be
located and connected at the
transformer primary terminals
or it can be located inside the
switchgear and connected on
the transformer side of the
primary breaker.
b. Cable-connected to medium
Provide transient surge protection, such as surge arrester in
parallel with RC snubber, or
Protec Z for transformers
connected by cables with
lengths up to 200 feet, depending on the size of cable and
number of conductors per
phase. The surge protection
device should be located and
connected at the transformer
terminals. In general, no surge
protection is needed for transformers with basic impulse
level (BIL) withstand ratings
equal to that of the switchgear
and connected to the switchgear by cables at least 200 feet
or longer. For transformers

with lower BIL than the switchgear, provide surge arrester
in parallel with RC snubber or
Protec Z.
RC snubber and/or Protec Z damp
internal transformer resonance:
The natural frequency of transformer
windings can under some circumstances be excited to resonate by the
switching frequency. Transformer
windings in resonance can produce
elevated internal voltages that produce
insulation damage or failure. An RC
snubber or a Protec Z applied at the
transformer terminals as indicated
above can damp internal winding
resonance and prevent the production
of damaging elevated internal
voltages. This is typically required
where rectifiers, UPS or similar
electronic equipment is on the
transformer secondary.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
3. Arc-Furnace Transformers
Provide surge arrester in parallel
with custom RC snubber at the
transformer terminals. Switching
of Arc-Furnace Transformers produce transients with significant
magnitude and energy requiring
RC snubbers with custom ratings.
4. MotorsProvide surge arrester in

parallel with RC snubber, or Protec
Z at the motor terminals. For those
motors using VFDs, surge protection should be applied and precede
the VFD devices as well. For high
reliability motor applications,
install station class surge arresters
in parallel with RC snubbers.
10
5. GeneratorsProvide station class

surge arrester in parallel with
RC snubber, or Protec Z at the
generator terminals.
6. Capacitor SwitchingProvide
surge arresters at the line-side
of the capacitor bank. Make sure
that the capacitors BIL withstand
rating is equal to that of the switchgear. In the case of harmonic filter
banks, install additional surge
arresters on the line reactors.
Further, for multi-step capacitor
banks or capacitor banks in close
proximity, back-to-back switching
transient effects can be minimized
with the application of inrush
limiting reactors.
7c. Shunt Reactor Switching
Provide surge arrester in parallel
with RC snubber, or Protec Z at the
reactor terminals.
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
5.4-18

March 2015
Sheet 05 048
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
7b. Series Current Limiting Reactor

SwitchingProvide surge arrester
in parallel with RC snubber, or
Protec Z at both reactor terminals.
Alternatively, the RC snubber can
be installed in parallel with the
series current limiting reactor.
8. Motor Starting Reactors or
Reduced Voltage AutoTransformers (RVAT)Provide
surge arrester in parallel with RC
snubber, or Protec Z at the reactor
tap in use and/or RVAT terminals
and/or motor terminals.
9. Switching Underground Cables
Surge protection not needed.
10. Voltage Transformers (VTs) and
Control Power Transformers
(CPTs)In certain power system
configurations, VTs and CPTs
installed inside the switchgear are
susceptible to: a) voltage transients
induced by opening and closing of
upstream switching device, b) low
frequency (less than power
frequency of 50/60 Hz) ferroresonance when de-energizing
a long run of power cables
connected to those transformers,
c) classical ferro-resonance due to
single-phase switching or energization of certain VT configurations,
and d) internal resonance where
the natural frequency of the
primary windings can under
some circumstances be excited
to resonate by the switching
frequency. Eaton does not provide
surge protection for VTs and CPTs
as standard. Eaton recommends
performing a power system switching transient study to determine
need for surge protection (surge
arrester, RC snubber, damping
resistor, other solution) for given
power system components.
Switching Transients Study

Eatons Power System Engineering
group can perform the switching
transient study using the Electromagnetic Transients Program (EMTP) to
determine the transient response, and
properly select and rate the transient
mitigation equipment.
The switching transient study can
simulate in EMTP the various transient
concerns described above including
primary switching of transformers,
arc-furnace transformer switching,
motor and generator switching, generator breaker transient recovery voltage
(TRV) evaluation, capacitor isolated
switching and back-to-back switching,
switching of shunt reactors and series
current limiting reactors as well as
transients associated with RVAT
contactor switching. VTs and CPTs
require a special focus of transient
studies involving EMTP simulation
of switching, ferro-resonance and
internal resonance.
Through the EMTP study, the surge
capacitor and resistor components of
the RC snubber are precisely selected
for each application, to match the
electrical system surge impedance and
to provide superior transient suppression. The EMTP study also provides
the recommendation for the best
location of the snubber assembly to
protect the transformer, generator
or motor. When appropriate for all
systems under study, but especially in
the case of VTs and CPTs, the EMTP
study will recommend additional
forms of surge protection, mitigation
techniques and/or alternative equipment ratings and configurations.
Contact Eaton if switching transients
study is desired.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.4-19
Sheet 05 049
Types of Surge Protection Devices
Figure 5.4-6. Surge Protection Devices

Generally surge protective devices
should be located as closely as possible
to the circuit component(s) that require
protection from the transients, and
connected directly to the terminals of
the component with conductors that
are as short and flat as possible to
minimize the inductance. It is also
important that surge protection devices
should be properly grounded for
effectively shunting high frequency
transients to ground.
Surge Arresters
The modern metal-oxide surge
arresters are recommended because
this latest advance in arrester design
ensures better performance and high
reliability of surge protection schemes.
Manufacturers technical data must
be consulted for correct application
of a given type of surge arrester.
Notice that published arrester MCOV
(maximum continuous operating
voltage) ratings are based on 40 or
45 C ambient temperature. In general,
the following guidelines are recommended for arrester selections, when
installed inside Eatons medium
voltage switchgear:
A. Solidly Grounded Systems:
equal to 1.05 x VLL/(1.732 x T),
where VLL is nominal line-to-line
service voltage, 1.05 factor allows
for +5% voltage variation above
the nominal voltage according
to ANSI C84.1, and T is derating
factor to allow for operation at
55 C switchgear ambient, which
should be obtained from the
arrester manufacturer for the type
of arrester under consideration.
Typical values of T are: 0.946 to 1.0.
CA08104001E
B. Low Resistant Grounded Systems

(systems grounded through
resistor rated for 10 seconds):
Arrester 10-second MCOV capability
at 60 C, which is obtained from
manufacturers data, should be
equal to 1.05 x VLL, where VLL is
nominal line-to-line service voltage,
and 1.05 factor allows for +5%
voltage variation above the
nominal voltage.
C. Ungrounded or Systems
Grounded through impedance
other than 10-second resistor:
equal to 1.05 x VLL/T, where VLL
and T are as defined above.
Refer to Table 5.4-13 for recommended
ratings for metal-oxide surge arresters
that are sized in accordance with the
above guidelines, when located in
Eatons switchgear.
Surge Capacitors
Metal-oxide surge arresters limit the
magnitude of prospective surge overvoltage, but are ineffective in controlling its rate of rise. Specially designed
surge capacitors with low internal
inductance are used to limit the rate of
rise of this surge overvoltage to protect
turn-to-turn insulation. Recommended
values for surge capacitors are: 0.5 f
on 5 and 7.5 kV, 0.25 f on 15 kV, and
0.13 f on systems operating at 24 kV
and higher.
RC Snubber
An RC snubber device consists of a
non-inductive resistor R sized to match
surge impedance of the load cables,
typically 20 to 30 ohms, and connected
in series with a surge capacitor C. The
surge capacitor is typically sized to be
0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. Under normal
operating conditions, impedance of
the capacitor is very high, effectively
isolating the resistor R from the
system at normal power frequencies,

and minimizing heat dissipation during
normal operation. Under high frequency
transient conditions, the capacitor
offers very low impedance, thus
effectively inserting the resistor R in
the power system as cable terminating
resistor, thus minimizing reflection of
transients and prevents voltage
doubling of the traveling wave. The RC
snubber provides protection against
high frequency transients by absorbing and damping and the transients.
Please note RC snubber is most
effective in mitigating fast-rising
transient voltages, and in attenuating
reflections and resonances before they
have a chance to build up, but does
not limit the peak magnitude of the
transient. Therefore, the RC snubber
alone may not provide adequate
protection. To limit peak magnitude
of the transient, application of surge
arrester should also be considered.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Protec Z
A Protec Z device consists of parallel
combination of resistor (R) and zinc
oxide voltage suppressor (ZnO), connected in series with a surge capacitor.
The resistor R is sized to match surge
impedance of the load cables, typically
20 to 30 ohms. The ZnO is a gapless
metal-oxide non-linear arrester, set
to trigger at 1 to 2 PU voltage, where
1 PU = 1.412*(VL-L/1.732). The surge
capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15 to
0.25 microfarad. As with RC snubber,
under normal operating conditions,
impedance of the capacitor is very high,
effectively isolating the resistor R and
ZnO from the system at normal power
frequencies, and minimizing heat
dissipation during normal operation.
Under high frequency transient conditions, the capacitor offers very low
impedance, thus effectively inserting
the resistor R and ZnO in the power
system as cable terminating network,
thus minimizing reflection of the steep
wave-fronts of the voltage transients
and prevents voltage doubling of the
traveling wave. The ZnO element limits
the peak voltage magnitudes. The
combined effects of R, ZnO, and
capacitor of the Protec Z device
provides optimum protection against
high frequency transients by absorbing,
damping, and by limiting the peak
amplitude of the voltage wave-fronts.
Please note that the Protec Z is not a
lightning protection device. If lightning
can occur or be induced in the electrical
system, a properly rated and applied
surge arrester must precede the
Protec Z.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
5.4-20

March 2015
Sheet 05 050
i
ii
1
2
3
Surge Protection Summary
Good protection: Surge arrester in

parallel with surge capacitor for
protection from high overvoltage
peaks and fast rising transient. This
option may not provide adequate
surge protection from escalating
voltages caused by circuit resonance.
When applying surge capacitors on
both sides of a circuit breaker, surge
capacitor on one side of the breaker
must be RC snubber or Protec Z,
to mitigate possible virtual current
chopping.
Minimum protection: Surge arrester

for protection from high overvoltage
peaks, or surge capacitor for protection from fast-rising transient. Please
note that the surge arresters or surge
capacitor alone may not provide
adequate surge protection from
escalating voltages caused by circuit
resonance. Note that when applying
surge capacitors on both sides of a
circuit breaker, surge capacitor on
one side of the breaker must be RC
snubber or Protec Z, to mitigate
possible virtual current chopping.
Better protection: RC snubber or

Protec Z in parallel with surge arrester
for protection from high frequency
transients and voltage peaks.
Best protection: For optimum or
best protection, a switching transient
analysis is recommended, and surge
protection needs as determined based
on such study should be implemented.
4
Table 5.4-13. Surge Arrester SelectionsRecommended Ratings
5
6
Service
Voltage
Line-to-Line
kV

Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Solidly
Nominal
Nominal
Arrester Ratings kV
Nominal
MCOV
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Nominal
Nominal
Arrester Ratings kV
MCOV
MCOV
Nominal
MCOV
MCOV
MCOV
2.30
2.40
3.30
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
4.00
4.16
4.76
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
4.80
6.60
6.90
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.20
8.32
8.40
11.00
11.50
12.00
6
9
9
9
9
10
5.10
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
6
6
6
6
9
9
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
9
9
9
10
12
12
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
10.20
10.20
6
6
6
6
9
9
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
6
6
9
9
9
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
9
9
9
10
12
12
7.65
7.65
7.65
8.40
10.20
10.20
9
10
10
7.65
8.40
8.40
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
12.47
13.20
13.80
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
12
10.20
10.20
10.20
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
15
10.20
10.20
12.70
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
14.40
18.00
20.78
22.00
22.86
23.00
12
15
18
18
18
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
15.30
15.30
15.30
12
15
18
18
21
21
10.20
12.70
15.30
15.30
17.00
17.00
21
27
30
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
24.40
12
15
18
18
18
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
15.30
15.30
15.30
15
18
21
21
24
24
12.70
15.30
17.00
17.00
19.50
19.50
21
27
30
30
36
36
17.00
22.00
24.40
24.40
29.00
29.00
14
24.94
25.80
26.40
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
24
19.50
19.50
19.50
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
27
19.50
19.50
22.00
36
36
39
29.00
29.00
31.50
15
33.00
34.50
38.00
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
30
30
24.40
24.40
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
36
36
36
29.00
29.00
29.00
45
48
36.50
39.00
10
11
12
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-21
Sheet 05 051
Technical DataSurge Protection and Instrument Transformers
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers are used
to protect personnel and secondary
devices from high voltage, and permit
use of reasonable insulation levels for
relays, meters and instruments. The
secondaries of standard instrument
transformers are rated at 5 A and/or
120 V, 60 Hz.
Voltage Transformers
Selection of the ratio for voltage
transformers is seldom a question
since the primary rating should be
equal to or higher than the system
line-to-line voltage. The number of
potential transformers per set and
their connection is determined by the
type of system and the relaying and
metering required.
When two VTs are used, they are
typically connected L-L, and provide
phase-to-phase voltages, (Vab, Vbc,
Vca) for metering and relaying.
When three VTs are used, they are
connected line-to-ground, and provide
phase-to-phase (Vab, Vbc, Vca),
as well as phase-to-ground (Va, Vb, Vc)
voltages for metering and relaying.
The zero-sequence current transformer

is used for sensitive ground fault relaying or self-balancing primary current
type machine differential protection.
The zero-sequence current transformer
is available with a nominal ratio of
50/5 or 100/5 and available opening
size for power cables of 7.25 inches
(184.2 mm). Special zero-sequence
transformers with larger windows are
also available.
If metering or relaying application

requires phase-to-ground voltages,
use three VTs, each connected L-G.
If not, use of two VTs connected L-L
is sufficient.
For ground detection, three VTs
connected in Line-to-ground/brokendelta are used.
A single VT, when used, can be
connected line-to-line (it will provide
line-to-line output, for example Vab
or Vbc or Vca), or line-to-ground (it
will provide line-to-ground output, for
example Va or Vb or Vc). Generally,
a single VT is used to derive voltage
signal for synchronizing or Over
Voltage/Under Voltage function.
The minimum number of current

transformers for circuit relaying and
instruments is three current transformers, one for each phase or two-phase
connected current transformers and one
zero-sequence current transformer.
Separate sets of current transformers
are required for differential relays.
The minimum pickup of a ground

relay in the residual of three-phase
connected current transformers is
primarily determined by the current
transformer ratio. The relay pickup
can be reduced by adding one
residual connected auxiliary current
transformer. This connection is very
desirable on main incoming and
tie circuits of low resistance grounded
circuits.
The current transformer ratio is generally selected so that the maximum load
current will read about 70% full scale
on a standard 5 A coil ammeter. Therefore, the current transformer primary
rating should be 140150% of the
maximum load current.
Maximum system fault current can
sometimes influence the current
transformer ratio selection because
the connected secondary devices
have published one-second ratings.
Standard accuracy current transformers are normally more than adequate

for most standard applications of
microprocessor-based protective
relays and meters. See Table 5.4-16
for CT accuracy information.
Table 5.4-14. Standard Voltage Transformer Ratio Information

Rating-Volts
2400
4200
4800
7200
8400
10800
12000
14400
15600
18000
21000
24000
27000
36000
Ratio
20-1
35-1
40-1
60-1
70-1
90-1
100-1
120-1
130-1
150-1
175-1
200-1
225-1
300-1
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

5.4-22
March 2015
Sheet 05 052
Technical DataInstrument Transformers
i
ii
Table 5.4-15. Standard Voltage Transformer, 60 Hz Accuracy Information

Switchgear
Voltage TransformerANSI Accuracy
kV
Class
Maximum Number
Per Set and Connection
kV
BIL
Burdens at 120 Volts
Burdens at 69.3 Volts
W, X, Y
ZZ
W, X
Thermal Rating
55C Connection
60
2LL
or 3LG
20, 1
35,
40
0.3
1.2
0.3
LL
LG
LG 2
700
400
700
7.5
and
15
95
2LL
or 3LG
35, 40,
60, 70,
100, 120
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.3
1.2
LL
LG
LG 2
1000
550
1000
27
125
2LL
or 3LG
90, 100,
120, 130,
150, 175,
200, 225
0.3
0.3
0.3
1.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
1.2
LL
LG
LG 2
1000
550
1000
38
170
2LL
or 3LG
175, 300
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
LL
LG
LG 2
1000
550
1000
3
4
1
For solidly grounded 4160 V system only or any type 2400 V system.
For solidly grounded system only.
Table 5.4-16. Current Transformers, 55 C Ambient
Note: LL = Line-to-line connection. LG = Line-to-ground connection.
CT Ratio
(MR = Multi-Ratio)
Metering Accuracy Classification
Relaying Accuracy Classification
At 60 Hz
Standard Burden
B 0.1
At 60 Hz
Standard Burden
B 0.5
At 60 Hz
Standard Burden
B 1.8
Minimum Accuracy
Required per IEEE
C37.20.2
Standard Accuracy
Supplied in VCP-W
Switchgear
Optional High Accuracy

Available in VCP-W
Switchgear
50:5
75:5
100:5
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.4
2.4
C10
C10
C10
C10
C10
C10
C20
C20
150:5
200:5
250:5
0.6
0.6
0.6
2.4
2.4
2.4
C20
C20
3
C20
C20
C20
C50
C50
C50
10
300:5
400:5
500:5
0.6
0.3
0.3
2.4
1.2
0.3
2.4
2.4
2.4
C20
C50
C50
C100
C100
C100
11
600:5
800:5
1000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
2.4
1.2
0.3
C100
C100
C100
C200
C200
C200
12
1200:5
1500:5
2000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C100
C100
C200
C200
C200
C400
C400
C400
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
13
2500:5
3000:5
4000:5
C100
C100
C200
C200
C200
C400
C400
C400
600:5 MR
1200:5 MR
2000:5 MR
3000:5 MR
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
2.4
0.3
0.3
0.3
3
3
3
3
C100
C200
C200
C200
C200
C400
C400
C400
C10
C20
14
50:5 zero sequence

100:5 zero sequence
15
3
16
Volt-Ampere
1
2
Standard
Ratios
C20
C50
3
C50
C50
Not listed in C37.20.2.
Note: Maximum number of CTsTwo sets of standard accuracy or one set of high accuracy CTs can be installed in the breaker compartment
on each side of the circuit breaker.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-23
Sheet 05 053
Technical DataControl Equipment
Control Equipment
Circuit Breaker Control
Eatons VCP-W circuit breaker has a
motor charged spring type stored
energy closing mechanism. Closing
the breaker charges accelerating
springs. Protective relays or the control switch will energize a shunt trip
coil to release the accelerating springs
and open the breaker. This requires a
reliable source of control power for the
breaker to function as a protective
device. Typical AC and DC control
schematics for type VCP-W circuit
breakers are shown on Pages 5.4-25
and 5.4-26.
For AC control, a capacitor trip device
is used with each circuit breaker shunt
trip to ensure that energy will be
available for tripping during fault
conditions. A control power transformer
is required on the source side of each
incoming line breaker. Closing bus tie
or bus sectionalizing breakers will
require automatic transfer of control
power. This control power transformer
may also supply other AC auxiliary
power requirements for the switchgear.
Auxiliary contacts available for controls

or external use from auxiliary switch
located on the circuit breaker are typically limited in number by the breaker
control requirements as follows:
Breakers with AC control voltage:

1NO and 3NC
Breakers with DC control voltage:
2NO and 3NC
When additional auxiliary contacts
are needed, following options are
available:
5/15/27 kV Breakers: Each breaker

compartment can be provided with
up to three Mechanism Operated
Cell (MOC) switches, each with
5NO and 4NC contacts. The MOC
switches are rotary switches,
mounted in the cell, and operated by
a plunger on the breaker. Two types
of MOC switches can be provided
MOC that operates with breaker in
connected position only, or MOC
that operates with breaker in
connected, as well as test position
38 kV Breakers: Each 38 kV breaker

can be provided with an additional
breaker mounted auxiliary switch,
with 5 NO and 5 NC contacts
Another optional switch available is

called TOCTruck Operated Switch.
This switch is mounted in the cell and
operates when the circuit breaker is
levered into or out of the operating
position. This switch changes its state
when breaker is moved from test to
connected position and vice versa. The
TOC provides 4NO and 5NC contacts.
Auxiliary switch contacts are primarily
used to provide interlocking in control
circuits, switch indicating lights,
auxiliary relays or other small loads.
Suitability for switching remote
auxiliary devices, such as motor
heaters or solenoids, may be checked
with the interrupting capacity listed in
Table 5.4-17. Where higher interrupting
capacities are required, an interposing
contactor should be specified.
Initiation of
Trip Signal
Initiation of
Close Signal
VCP-W
Circuit Breaker
Main Contacts
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Closed
Open
Opening Time
= 30 45 ms If Interrupting Time = 83 ms
= 30 38 ms If Interrupting Time = 50 ms
Closing Time
= 45 60 ms
Breaker Auxiliary
Switch
3 ms
a Contact
Breaker
b Breaks 6 ms
Auxiliary
Before a Makes
Switch
b Contact
10
11
Closed
3 ms
Open
b Makes 7 ms
After a Breaks
Closed
Any economic comparison of AC

and DC control for switchgear should
consider that the AC capacitor trip is
a static device with negligible maintenance and long life, while the DC
battery will require maintenance and
replacement at some time in the future.
Figure 5.4-7. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Operating Times
Relays
Table 5.4-17. Auxiliary Switch Contacts Interrupting Capacities
12
13
+4 ms to +10 ms Open
-9 ms to -3 ms
14
Microprocessor-based or solid-state
relays would generally require DC
power or reliable uninterruptible AC
supply for their logic circuits.
Type
Auxiliary
Switch
Auxiliary Switches
Breaker Auxiliary Switch 20

TOC Switch
20
MOC Switch
20
Optional circuit breaker and cell auxiliary

switches are available where needed
for interlocking or control of auxiliary
devices. Typical applications and
operation are described in Figure 5.4-7
and Table 5.4-17.
8
Signal:
For DC control, it would require a DC

control battery, battery charger and
an AC auxiliary power source for the
battery charger. The battery provides a
very reliable DC control source, since it
is isolated from the AC power system
by the battery charger. However, the
battery will require periodic routine
maintenance and battery capacity is
reduced by low ambient temperature.
Continuous Control Circuit Voltage

Current
120 Vac
240 Vac
48 Vdc
Amperes
15
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
16
Non-inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes

15
15
15
10
10
10
16
16
16
10
10
10
5
5
5
18
Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes

Breaker Auxiliary Switch 20
TOC Switch
20
MOC Switch
20
15
15
15
Breaker auxiliary switches and MOC

switches are used for breaker open/
close status and interlocking.
10
10
10
16
16
16
10
10
10
17
5
5
5
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.4-24

March 2015
Sheet 05 054
Technical DataControl Equipment
i
ii
1
2
3
Table 5.4-18. VCP-W Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power Requirements
Rated
Control
Voltage
Inrush
Amperes
Spring Charging Motor

Run
Amperes
Average Run
Time, Sec.
Close or Trip
Amperes
UV Trip
mA
Maximum
Close
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
36.0
16.0
9.2
9
4
2
120 Vac
240 Vac
16.0
9.2
4
2
Trip
Indicating
Light
Amperes
6
6
6
16
7
4
200
80
40
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140280
0.02
0.02
0.02
6
6
6
3
104127
208254
104127
208254
0.02
0.02
Table 5.4-19. Control Power TransformersSingle-Phase, 60 Hz 1

Rated Primary
Voltage, Volt
Rated Secondary
Voltage, Volt
kVA
kV
Class
2400
4160
4800
240120
240120
240120
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
5
5
5
7200
8400
12470
240120
240120
240120
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
15
15
15
13200
13800
23000
34500
240120
240120
240120
240120
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
15, 25
Voltage Range
15
15
27
38 2
Line-to-line connection only available. Refer to Eaton for other voltages and kVA ratings.
150 kV BIL.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-25
Sheet 05 055
Technical DataControl Schematics
i
ANSI Standard VCP-W Breaker DC Control Schematic
ii
P
(+)
GL
WL
RL
11
9UV
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
PR
CS
T
CS
C
2
UV
DC Source
10UV
3
14
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
24
53
55
57
61
54
56
58
62
16
9A
22
15
21
Not Available when Second

Trip Coil Option is Chosen
19
20
LOCATION
CCBSN
CGL
LOCATION
a
10A
PS
1
17
ST
2
a
10
PS2
bb
18
ST
1
b
LC
LS2 LS2
bb
aa
12
SR
10
51
52
LS1
bb
14
13
3A
LOCATION
TCSSLT
TRCS_
TRCO_51N
N
(-)
13
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
Options
8
ANSI Standard VCP-W Breaker AC Control Schematic
1
S-TRU
FUSE
CAC120
LOCATION
S-MRU
S-CPU
CS
C
GL
WL
10
PR
11
9UV
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
CS
T
RL
11
UV
9UV
10UV
AC Source
12
14
13
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
24
ST
1
18
22
ST
2
a
16
CRL
LOCATION
19
LOCATION
TRCS_
TRSS
TRCO_51N
Not Available when Second

Trip Coil Option is Chosen
10UV
9A
61
15
20
62
57
17
For AC UV
Trip Only
10A
10
58
53
52
21
LOCATION
CCBSN
10
PS
1
b
LC
LS2 LS2
bb
aa
56
PS2
bb
()
SR
UV
12
54
(+)
Cap Trip Dev
51
AC
14
3A
LS1
bb
55
13
AC
1
13
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
14
15
16
Options
Figure 5.4-8. Typical 5/15/27 kV VCP-W DC and AC Control Schematics

Operation: LS1
bb = Closed until springs are fully charged.
LS2
= Open until springs are fully charged.
aa
LS2 = Closed until springs are fully charged.
bb
LC = Open until mechanism is reset.
PS1 = Open in all except between Test and Connected positions.
PS2 = Closed in all except between Test and Connected positions.
18
19
20
>>
Legend: CS
= Breaker Control SwitchClose
C
CS = Breaker Control SwitchTrip
T
Y = Anti Pump Relay
SR = Spring Release Coil (Coil)
M = Spring Charge Motor
ST = Shunt Trip
PR = Protective Relay
= Secondary Disconnect
17
21
CA08104001E
5.4-26

March 2015
Sheet 05 056
Technical DataControl Schematics
i
Breaker DC Control Schematic
ii
P
(+)
CS
C
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
CS
T
WL
11
RL
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
U7
U8
U9
U10
UV
U24
U24
U23
U22
U21
U20
U19
U18
U17
U16
U15
10UV
Auxiliary Switch #2 Optional

14
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCS_
TRCO_51N
OPTIONS
12
PS
1
24
ST
1
53
55
57
61
54
56
58
62
18
16
17
15
9A
51
LOCATION
a
ST
2
22
10A
b
LC
Y LS2 LS2
bb aa
13
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCS_
TRCO_51N
10
PS2
bb
SR
10
52
5
9
LS1
bb
3A
13
14
U1
9UV
GL
PR
DC Source
2
3
S-TRU
LOCATION
FUSE
CDC0
S-MRU
S-CPU
21
20
19
N
(-)
Customer Must Furnish

This a Contact from
Auxiliary Switch When
Second Trip Coil Option
is Chosen and Make the
Appropriate Connections
LOCATION
TRCS_
TCSSLT
TRCO_51N
7
8
Breaker AC Control Schematic
1
S-MRU
FUSE
CAC120
S-TRU
S-CPU
LOCATION
CS
C
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
9UV
U24
U6
U7
U8
U9
U10
U24
U23
U22
U21
U20
U19
U18
U17
U16
U15
10UV
9UV
OPTIONS
PS
1
LS2
bb
b
LC
LS2
aa
53
57
61
54
58
62
LOCATION
18
17
15
a
22
ST
2
10UV
10
9A
7
51
(-)
ST
1
UV
12
6
For AC UV
Trip Only
13
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
TCSSLT
LOCATION
21
10
PS2
bb
(+)
CAP TRIP DEV
52
SR
AC
Y
14
LS1
bb
55
56
3A
13
AC
1
20
16
19
LOCATION
TRCS_
TRSS
TRCO_51N
2
CONTACT
S-CPL
S-TRU
S-CPU
SAACCN
MOTOR
CL_STD
CL_GR
CRL
TRIP
S-MRL
S-TRL
FUSE
CAC120
LOCATION
SACCN
S-MRU
Customer Must Furnish

This a Contact from
Auxiliary Switch When
Second Trip Coil Option
is Chosen and Make the
Appropriate Connections
Figure 5.4-9. Typical 38 kV VCP-W DC and AC Control Schematics

Legend: CS
= Breaker Control SwitchClose
C
CS = Breaker Control SwitchTrip
T
Y = Anti Pump Relay
SR = Spring Release Coil (Coil)
M = Spring Charge Motor
ST = Shunt Trip
PR = Protective Relay
= Secondary Disconnect
Operation: LS1
bb = Closed until springs are fully charged.
LS2
= Open until springs are fully charged.
aa
LS2 = Closed until springs are fully charged.
bb
LC = Open until mechanism is reset.
PS1 = Open in all except between Test and Connected positions.
PS2 = Closed in all except between Test and Connected positions.
>>
20
U5
UV
16
19
U4
Auxiliary Switch #2 Optional
24
18
U3
14
14
17
U2
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
TCSSLT
LOCATION
13
15
U1
11
RL
AC Source
11
GL
WL
10
12
PR
CS
T
10A
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-27
Sheet 05 057
Technical DataRelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function
Bus
Bus
3Y
ETR-4000
52
50/51
50N/51N
86
52
ii
1
87T
50/51G
EDR-3000
63
1
50/5
1
87GD
50/51G
50/51
50/51N
50N/51N
50/51
50/51G
1
50/5
52
5
3Y
Phase CT Rating = 200% Feeder Full Load
EDR-3000 = Eaton Distribution Relay
1 Alternate to 50/51G
Phase CT Rating = 200% Full Load

ETR-4000 = Eaton Transformer Relay
87TTransformer Differential Relay (Above 5 MVA)
86GD = Ground Differential Relay (Above 5 MVA and
Low Resistance Grounded)
86Lockout Relay
63Sudden Pressure Relay (Liquid Above 5 MVA)
1
7
8
Alternate to 50/51G
9
Figure 5.4-10. Protective RelaysFeeder Circuit
Figure 5.4-12. Protective RelaysTransformer Feeder
Bus
10
Bus
11
EMR-5000
EMR-4000
27, 59, 47,
81, 55
52
2 or 3 VTS
27, 59, 47, 81,

55, 78V
2 or 3 VTS
52
1
Aux. Vol.
27, 59
1
Aux. Vol.
49, 50, 51, 66, 46, 32,

37, 50BF, 50/51R
49, 50, 51, 66,

46, 32, 37, 50BF,
50/51R
49R, 38
87M
NEUT 3
49, 38
RTD
M
URTD
13
14
50/51G
1
50/5
50/51G
1
50/5
12
27, 59
15
RTD
U
R
T
D
16
17

EMR-4000 = Eaton Motor Relay
URTDUniversal RTD Interface Module
1 Alternate to 50/51G

EMR-5000 = Eaton Motor Relay
URTDUniversal RTD Interface Module
18
19
20
Figure 5.4-11. Protective RelaysInduction Motors Below 1500 hp

Minimum Adequate Protection
CA08104001E
Figure 5.4-13. Protective RelaysInduction Motors Above 1500 hp and

Synchronous Motors
21
5.4-28

March 2015
Sheet 05 058
Technical DataRelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function
EDR-5000 RelayTypical One-Line Diagrams
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Figure 5.4-14. EDR-5000 Eaton Distribution RelayTypical Main or Feeder Breaker Application Diagram
1
2
12
Can be set for Forward, Reverse or Both directions.

Can be Set for Underfreq, Overfreq, Rate of Change or Vector Change.
Refer to Tab 4 for details on Eatons relays. Refer to Tab 3 for details on Eatons available metering.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-29
Sheet 05 059
Typical Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Application Layouts, 515 kV
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Standard Metal-Clad)

Note: Arrangements shown in Figures 5.4-155.4-17 can be provided in 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide, 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high,
96.25-inch (2444.8 mm) deep structures with 50VCPWND, 1200 A circuit breakers.
Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter.
i
ii
1
Line VTs
Line VTs
Line CPT
1-ph, 15 kVA max.
Bus VTs
Line CPT
1-ph, 15 kVA max.
Bus VTs
52-T
1200 or
2000 A
2
3
4
Bus 1
Bus 2
5
52-M1
1200 or
2000 A
R
M
1200 A
R
CTs
1200 A
R
CTs
CTs
52-M2
1200 or
2000 A
R
M
1200 A
M
CTs
6
7
CTs
8
9
Feeder
Feeder
Source 1
Feeder
Source 2
10
Figure 5.4-15. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs and Line CPTs
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 1200 or 2000 A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
11
Line VTs
Line VTs
12
13
Bus VTs
Bus VTs
52-T
1200 or
2000 A
15
Bus 2
Bus 1
14
16
52-M1
1200 or
2000 A
R
M
CTs
1200 A
R
CTs
52-M2
1200 or
2000A
R
M
1200 A
M
CTs
CTs
17
18
19
Source 1
Feeder
Feeder
Source 2
Figure 5.4-16. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, but without Line CPTsPreferred Arrangement
CA08104001E
20
21
5.4-30

March 2015
Sheet 05 060
i
ii
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Continued)

Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter
Feeder
Feeder
1
Line VTs
CTs
CTs
R
M
Bus VTs
52-T
1200 or
2000 A
Bus VTs
1200 A
1200 A
Bus 1
Bus 2
52-M1
1200 or
2000 A
52-M2
1200 or
2000 A
5
6
1200 A
R
CTs
1200 A
CTs
CTs
CTs
Line VTs
8
9
10
11
Feeder
Feeder
Source 2
Source 1
Figure 5.4-17. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, but without Line CPTsAlternate Arrangement
12
13
15
Bus 1
Bus 2
Line CPT
1-ph, 15 kVA max.
Line CPT
1-ph, 15 kVA max.
16
52-M1
3000 A
17
18
Bus VTs
Bus VTs
14
52-M2
3000 A
52-T
3000 A
CTs
CTs
Line VTs
Line VTs
19
20
21
Source 2
Source 1
Figure 5.4-18. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, and Line CPTs
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 3000 A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.4-31
Sheet 05 061
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Continued)
Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter
ii
R
R
M
52-M1
3000 A
52-M2
3000 A
52-T
3000 A
Bus 1
(Optional
Fans) 1
3
4
Bus 2
(Optional
Fans) 1
(Optional
Fans) 1
5
6
7
Line VTs
Bus VTs
Bus VTs
Line VTs
8
Source 1
Source 2
Figure 5.4-19. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 3000 A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
1
9
10
This arrangement can be supplied with cooling fans to allow 4000A continuous.
11
Medium Voltage High Resistance

Grounding System
12
Refer to Tab 36, Section 36.1, for
complete product description, singleline diagram, layout and dimensions
of medium voltage high resistance
grounding system.
13
14
15
16
17
18
C-HRG Free-Standing
NEMA 1 Enclosure
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.4-32

March 2015
Sheet 05 062
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-1
Sheet 05 063
Layout Dimensions5 and 15 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures (Standard Metal-Clad)
Layout Dimensions5 and 15 kVDimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical Units
Tie Breaker Bus Transition

Requirements
i
Available Configurations
ii
1
1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
Breaker
2
1200 Ampere
Breaker
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
3
4
Drawout
Auxiliary
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Figure 5.5-1. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide

Typical Breaker/Breaker Vertical Section
6
7
8
9
Blank
(Ventilation)
Figure 5.5-4. Tie Breaker Bus Transition

Requirements
1
Drawout
Auxiliary
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Breakers cannot be located in bus transition

compartment.
10
11
3000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
1200 Ampere
Breaker
12
13

Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
3000 Ampere
Breaker 23
14
15
Vent Area
Drawout
Auxiliary
16
17
Figure 5.5-5. Available Configurations

2
3
For 4000 A force cooled application,

refer to Eaton.
This configuration is available for indoor
and outdoor walk-in designs only.
19
20

Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
Dimensions for estimating purposes only.

CA08104001E
18
21

5.5-2
March 2015
Sheet 05 064
Typical Weights in Lbs (kg)

Table 5.5-1. Assemblies (Less Breakers. See Table 5.5-2 for Breakers.) 1
Type of
Main Bus
Indoor
Vertical Section Rating Amperes
Aisleless
B/B
1200
2000
3000
4000
2400 (1090)
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
B/A
or
A/B
1200
2000
3000
4000
A/A
1200
2000
3000
4000
ii
1
4
5
10
3200 (1453)
3300 (1500)
3400 (1545)
3500 (1590)
4200 (1907)
4300 (1952)
4400 (1998)
4500 (2045)
7200 (3269)
7400 (3360)
7600 (3450)
7700 (3500)
2300 (1044)
2400 (1090)
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2900 (1317)
3000 (1362)
3100 (1407)
3200 (1453)
4100 (1861)
4200 (1907)
4300 (1952)
4400 (1998)
7000 (3178)
7200 (3269)
7400 (3360)
7500 (3409)
2000 (908)
2100 (953)
2200 (999)
2300 (1046)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
3800 (1725)
3900 (1771)
4000 (1816)
4100 (1861)
6400 (2906)
6600 (2996)
6800 (3087)
6900 (3136)
See Table 5.5-2 for breakers.
Type of
Breaker
Figure 5.5-8. Indoor
Current Rating, Amperes

1200
2000
3000
Approximate Weight, Lbs (kg), Static 2

50 VCP-W 250, 40C, 25, 40
50 VCP-W 350, 50C, 50
50 VCP-W 500, 63C, 63
350 (159)
460 (209)
575 (261)
410 (186)
490 (222)
575 (261)
525 (238)
525 (238)
575 (261)
75 VCP-W 500, 50C, 50

150 VCP-W 500, 25C, 25
150 VCP-W 750, 40C, 40
375 (170)
350 (159)
350 (159)
410 (186)
410 (186)
410 (186)
525 (238)
525 (238)
525 (238)
150 VCP-W 1000, 50C, 50

150 VCP-W 1500, 63C, 63
460 (209)
575 (261)
490 (222)
575 (261)
525 (238)
575 (261)
Double Row
Table 5.5-2. Breaker Weights in Lbs (kg)
Sheltered-Aisle Including Aisle

Single Row
Impact weight = 1.5 times static weight.
11
Figure 5.5-9. Outdoor Aisleless
12
13
14
15
Figure 5.5-6. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Single Row
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 5.5-7. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Double Row
Dimensions and weights for estimating

purposes only.
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-3
Sheet 05 065
Dimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

32.00 (812.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
23.00
(584.2)
32.00
(812.8)
23.00
(584.2)
44.50 (1130.3)
60.88 (1546.4)
(4) Knockouts
for Top Secondary
Conduit Entry
20.25
(514.4)
6.00
(152.4)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Front
0.88
(22.0)
9.00
(228.6)
Figure 5.5-10. Top View of Typical Indoor

Breaker and Auxiliary Structures
Primary conduit locations for top
or bottom entry.
3
4
5
6
7
8
j
k
Four Conduits
3
4
0.56
(14.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.38 (85.9)
5
Two Conduits
3.38
(85.9)
Figure 5.5-11. Base Plan of a Typical Indoor

Breaker or Auxiliary Structure
2
11.50 (292.1)
0.25 (6.4) Member

0.56 (14.2) 5.56
(141.2)
Front
7.00
(177.8)
ii
7.00 (177.8)
3.00 (76.2)
34.25
(870.0)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
2.00
(50.8)
96.25 (2444.8)
2.00
(50.8)
Primary conduit locations for top or

bottom entry.
Recommended minimum clearance to rear
of VacClad-W: 36.00 inches (914.4 mm).
Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25
inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W.
Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) bolts.
Station ground connection provision.
Secondary conduit space: Allmaximum
of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection.
Minimum clearance to LH side of
VacClad-W: 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Minimum clearance to RH side of the
switchgear: 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
Finished foundation surface shall be level
within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
(914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and
diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
Minimum clearance to front of VacClad-W:
70.00 inches (1778.0 mm).
Floor steel if used, must not exceed this
dimension under VacClad-W.
Figure 5.5-12. Primary Conduit Locations for

Top or Bottom Entry
l
Changes to 8.25 (209.6 mm) if optional

hinged rear doors are required.
7
8
10
2
3
4
4
3
3
4
Upper
Hinged
Panel
1-Large Relay
Case
2-Small Relay
Case
3-Instrument
4-Test Switch
5-Switch
6-Lock-out
Relay or
Switch
7-Metering
Unit
11
12
13
14
Lower
Hinged
Panel
15
16
17
Figure 5.5-13. Maximum Hinged

Panel Equipment
Note: The figure above shows that the
arrangement of components differs
between upper and lower panels. The figure
may also be used to select custom arrangements of hinged panel components. Also,
the use of multi-function relays such as
Eatons E-series relays will significantly
reduce consumption of panel space.

CA08104001E
18
19
20
21
5.5-4

March 2015
Sheet 05 066
6.00
(152.4)
4.00
(101.6)
Attach to the Switchgear

Channels Using Supplied Hardware
ii
1.00 (25.4)
3.00
(76.2)
4.00 (101.6)
4.25
(108.0)
0.75 (19.1)
0.63 (16.0)
2
3
4
Location for station

ground connection.
Attach switchgear to
foundation using one
of the two holes.
Use 5/8" Grade 5 or
better bolt. Torque
to 150 ft.-lbs.
(Total of 4 mounting
bolts per vertical
section, one at each
corner.)
Power cable entrance

space. Refer to shop
order base plan drawing
for conduit locations.
Conduit projection not
to exceed 8.00 inches (203.2 mm).
6.00 (152.4)
4.50 (114.3)
Attach to the Floor at One of the Two Hole

Locations Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
Secondary control wiring

conduit entrance space.
Conduit stub ups not to
project more than 7.00 inches (177.8 mm).
2
Mounting Clip Details

within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36 inches
4.50
(114.3)
2.00 (50.8)
5/8" Bolt & HDWE
Supplied by Customer
6.00
(152.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Optional
Rear Door
7
8
4.88 (124.0)
View A
2
7 GA Steel
Mounting Clip
Supplied by Eaton
36.00 (914.4)
Minimum Recommended Clearance
2.75 (69.8)
X
4.50 (114.3)
C
L
6.00 (152.4)
7.00 (177.8)
4.50 (114.3)
3.31 (84.1)
3
10
21.25 (539.8)
3
2.00 (50.8)
11.50 (292.1)
20.50
(520.7)
8.00 (203.2)
11
7.12 (180.8)
4.38 (111.3)
7.12
(180.8)
90.69 (2303.5)
12
0.56 (14.2)
3.00 (76.2)
0.56 (14.2)
13
14
15
16
36
0.25
(6.4)
3.00 (76.2)
Channel
Locations
3.38 (85.9)
3.88 (98.5)
2.00 (50.8)
36
7.67 (194.8)
0.12
(3.0)
4.50 (114.3)
10.56 (268.2)
0.12
(3.0)
Outdoor
End Wall
View X-X
Outdoor
End Wall
Grade Level
2.75 (69.8)
4.50 (114.3)
36.00 (914.4)
17
90.27 (2292.8)
90.27 (2292.8)
101.25 (2571.8)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
70.00 (1778)
Front of Switchgear
18
19
Figure 5.5-14. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Aisleless Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-5
Sheet 05 067

Channels Using Supplied Hardware
Attach to the Floor at

One of the Two Hole Locations
Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt
or Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
1.25
(31.8)

ground connection.
of the two holes.
Use 5/8" Grade 5 or
better bolt. Torque
to 150 ft.-lbs.
bolts per vertical
corner.)

Conduit projection
not to exceed
8.00 inches (203.2 mm).
6.00
(152.4)
4.00
(101.6)
1.00 (25.4)
6.50 (165.1)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
6.00 (152.4)
4.88 (124.0)
4.25
(108.0)
0.75 (19.1)
0.63 (16.0)
2.75
(69.8)
5.75 (146.1)
ii
3.00
(76.2)
1
2
4.50 (114.3)
5.75 (146.1)
3.75
(95.3)
Secondary control wiring

conduit entrance space.
Conduit stub ups not to
project more than
7.00 inches (177.8 mm).

Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
5
Mounting Angle Details
2
Finished foundation
surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
in 36 inches (914.4 mm)
left-to-right, front-to-back,
and diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.
4.50
(114.3)
5/8" Bolt & HDWE
Supplied by
Customer
2.00 (50.8)
6.00
(152.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Optional
Rear Door
7
View A
2
2.75 (69.8)
3
21.25 (539.8)
3
8.00 (203.2)
4.50 (114.3)
7.00 (177.8)
4.38 (111.3)
7.12
(180.8)
11.50 (292.1)
20.50
(520.7)
90.69 (2303.5)
11
12
90.27
(2292.8)
0.56 (14.2)
3.00 (76.2)
10
2.00
(50.8)
7.12 (180.8)
6.00 (152.4)
X SEE ENLARGED
VIEW A
CL
Locations
4.50
(114.3)
Channel
7 GA Steel
Mounting Clip
Supplied by Eaton
36.00 (914.0)
13
0.56 (14.2)
4
0.25 (6.4)
3.00 (76.2)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.8)
3.88 (98.5)
167.23
(4247.6)
0.25 (6.4)
3.88 (98.5)
4.00 (101.6)
Outdoor
End Wall
Removable
Covers
Typical
1.25
(31.8)
0.75
(19.1)
CHANNEL
LOCATIONS
5
3.00 (76.2)
4.00 (101.6)
11.50
(292.1)
68.96
(1751.6)
11.40
(289.6)
Aisle
11.50
(292.1)
0.70
(17.8)
0.10
(2.5)
Outdoor
End Wall
0.12 (3.0)
2.75 (69.8)
4.50 (114.3)
38.00 (965.2)
15
16
17
18
2.00
(50.8)
0.10
(2.5)
4.00
(101.6)
14
4.50
(114.3)
19
View X-X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
38.00 (965.2)
20
Front of Switchgear
Figure 5.5-15. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
21
5.5-6

March 2015
Sheet 05 068
Note:
First install both
rows of switchgear
then install aisle
parts per drawing. (Later)
ii
1
2
3

ground connection
typical each end unit.
2 5
6.50
(165.1)
6
5.75
(146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
3.75
(95.3)
5
Mounting Angle Details
of the two holes.
Use 5/8" Grade 5 or
better bolt. Torque
to 150 ft. lbs.
bolts per vertical
corner.)
Finished foundation
surface shall be level
within 0.06-inch
(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
(914.4 mm) left-to-right,
front-to-back, and
diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.

Conduit projection
not to exceed
8.00 inches (203.2 mm).

Channels Using
Supplied Hardware
Optional
Rear Door
Secondary control wiring conduit

entrance space. Conduit stub ups
not to project more than
7.00 inches (177.8 mm).
Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
Better Torque to 150 Ft. Lbs.
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
4.00 (101.6)
4.88 (124.0)
2
Minimum
36.00
Recommended
(914.4)
Clearance
3.00
(76.2)
4.00
(101.6)
6.00 (152.4)
CL
4.50 (114.3)
7.00 (177.8)
7.12 (180.8)
4.38 (111.3)
21.25 (539.8)
2.00
(50.8)
11.50 (292.1)
3
8.00 (203.2)
20.50
(520.7)
7.12 (180.8)
90.69 (2303.5)
90.27
(2292.8)
0.56 (14.2)
3.00 (76.2)
0.56 (14.2)
4
0.25
(6.4)
10
3.00 (76.2)
3.38 (85.8)
3.88 (98.5)
3.38 (85.8)
0.25 (6.4)
3.88 (98.5)
11
Removable
Covers
12
0.75
(19.1)
Aisle
5
Typical
1.50
(38.1)
11.50
(292.1)
11.50
(292.1)
4.00 (101.6)
Channel
Locations
1.50 (38.1)
3.50 (88.9)
68.96
(1751.6)
11.50
(292.1)
13
4.00 (101.6)
Outdoor
End Wall
0.12
(3.0)
0.12
(3.0)
38.00
(965.2)
4
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Outdoor
End Wall
38.00
(965.2)
90.27
(2292.8)
Channel
Locations
15
16
17
261.50
(6642.1)
2.00
(50.8)
0.75
(19.1)
14
Channel
Locations
2
7 GA Steel
Mounting Clip
Supplied by Eaton
0.12 (3.0)
3.00 (76.2)
4.00 (101.6)
2.00
(50.8)
36.00 Minimum
(914.4) Recommended
Clearance
4.50 (114.3)
View X-X
18
X
19
Figure 5.5-16. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Common Aisle Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-7
Sheet 05 069
Layout Dimensions5 kV, 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide, Indoor Only (Standard Metal-Clad)
Layout Dimensions5 kVDimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical UnitsIndoor

Requirements
ii
1
1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
1200 Ampere
Breaker
2
3
4
5
Drawout
Auxiliary

Typical Breaker/Breaker Vertical Section
7
Drawout
Auxiliary
8
9

Requirements
1

compartment.

10
Typical Weights
Table 5.5-3. Switchgear Assembly
(Less Breaker)
11
Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating,
Amperes
Weight
Lbs (kg)
B/B
1200
2000
2000 (908)
2200 (999)
B/A or A/B
1200
2000
1700 (772)
1900 (863)
A/A
1200
2000
1600 (726)
1800 (817)
Table 5.5-4. Circuit Breaker 2

Type of
Circuit
Breaker
Current
Rating,
Amperes
Weight
Lbs (kg)
(Static)
50 VCPW-ND-250
1200
345 (157)
Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section

CA08104001E
21

5.5-8
March 2015
Sheet 05 070
Layout Dimensions5 kV, 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide, Indoor Only (Standard Metal-Clad)
ii
2.00
(50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
23.00
(584.2)
22.00 (558.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
23.00
(584.2)
60.88 (1546.4)
4
5
(4) Knockouts
for Top Secondary
Conduit Entry
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Front

Primary conduit locations for top
or bottom entry.
3
4
5
12
13
15
16
0.88
(22.0)
9.00
(228.6)
j
k
Four Conduits
0.56
(14.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.38 (85.9)
Two Conduits
3.38
(85.9)

2
14
11.50 (292.1)
0.25 (6.4) Member

0.56 (14.2) 5.56
(141.2)
Front
7.00
(177.8)
11
20.25
(514.4)
6.00
(152.4)
44.50 (1130.3)
10
7.00 (177.8)
24.25
(619.9)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
2.00
(50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
22.00
(558.8)
96.25 (2444.8)

bottom entry.
Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25
inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W.
Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
bolts.
70.00 inches (1778.0 mm).

Top or Bottom Entry
l
Changes to 8.25 (209.6 mm) if optional

hinged rear doors are required.
Upper
Hinged
Panel
6 5
3
6 5
1-Large Relay
Case
2-Small Relay
Case
3-Instrument
4-Test Switch
5-Switch
6-Lock-out
Relay or
Switch
7-Metering
Unit
1
7
Lower
Hinged
Panel
17
Panel Equipment
18

19
20
21

CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-9
Sheet 05 071
Layout DimensionsSpecial Design5 kV, Low Profile 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad)
i
ii
1
80.00
(2032.0)
LL
(1)
2
RTH
521
36.00
(914.4)
SCD
0H7
Pad
3
4
80.00 1
(2032.0)
Figure 5.5-26. 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA VCP-W ND Low Profile 26.00-Inch
(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Blank/Breaker
1
Figure 5.5-29. Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) if power cables

enter from top.
Blank
521
1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
4
Auxiliary or
Blank 4
Blank
1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
RTH
36.00
(914.4)
SCD
0H7
Pad
1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
80.00
(2032.0)
Auxiliary or
Blank 4
1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
4
Auxiliary or
Blank 4
Auxiliary or
Blank 4
7
8
9
10
Figure 5.5-30. Available Configurations (Front View)

4
Relays or control devices cannot be mounted on the circuit breaker

or auxiliary compartment door.
Typical Weights
80.00 2
(2032.0)
Table 5.5-5. Switchgear Assembly (Less Breaker)

(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Breaker/Blank
2
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) if power cables

enter from below.
Vertical Section
Type
Main Bus Rating,

Amperes
Weight
Lbs (kg)
B/A or A/B
1200
2000
1500 (682)
1700 (772)
A/A
1200
2000
1400 (636)
1600 (726)
80.00
(2032.0)
Circuit Breaker
Type
Current Rating,
Amperes
Weight (Static)
Lbs (kg)
50 VCPW-ND-250
1200
345 (157)
LP
(2)
Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
RTH
12
13
14
15
Table 5.5-6. Circuit Breaker 5
VTX
(2)
11
16
17
RTH
521
SCD
0H7
Pad
36.00
(914.4)
18
19
80.00 3
(2032.0)
(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Auxiliary/Breaker
3
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inch (1831.7 mm) if power cables enter
from top.
CA08104001E
20
21
5.5-10

March 2015
Sheet 05 072
Layout DimensionsSpecial Design5/15 kV, Low Profile 36.00-Inch (9.14.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad)
Access for
VT Cables
VT Cables
Either/Or
Blank
ii
VT or CPT
1
2
4
SC
HTR
Figure 5.5-32. Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
BYZ(1)
86.25 1
(2190.8)
Auxiliary
Blank
VCP-W
Breaker
1200 or
2000 A
VCP-W
Breaker
1200, 2000
or 3000 A
Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-31. 36.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide VCP-W Low Profile Indoor Unit
1
36.00
(914.4)
CT
CT
Breaker
CT
CT
80.00
(2032.0)
Other depths possible depending on cable entry direction and VT/CPT

connections. Contact Eaton.
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
9
Figure 5.5-33. Available Configurations (Front View)
10
Typical Weights
Table 5.5-7. Assemblies (Less Breakers, See Table 5.5-2 for Breakers)
11
Vertical Section
Type
Main Bus Rating,

Amperes
Indoor Structure
Lbs (kg)
12
B/B
1200
2000
3000
2200 (999)
2300 (1044)
2400 (1090)
13
B/A or A/B
1200
2000
3000
2100 (953)
2200 (999)
2300 (1044)
A/A
1200
2000
3000
1800 (818)
1900 (864)
2000 (908)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-11
Sheet 05 073
Layout Dimensions27 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), One-High Design
Layout Dimensions27 kV One-High DesignDimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical Units
ii
Drawout
VTs
Drawout
VTs
Drawout
VTs
1
2
1200 Ampere
Breaker
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
VTs
3
4
5
Figure 5.5-34. Indoor

36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical
Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
Drawout
Fuses
Figure 5.5-36. Indoor Auxiliaries

36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical
Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
Typical Weights in Lbs (kg)

Fixed
CPT
Table 5.5-8. Assemblies (Less Breakers)

Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus Indoor

Rating
Amperes
Outdoor
Aisleless
A/B
1200
2000
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
3400 (1545)
3500 (1591)
A/A
1200
2000
2200 (999) 2800 (1271)

2300 (1045) 2900 (1317)

Type of
Breaker
Figure 5.5-35. Outdoor Aisleless

8
9
10
Current Rating,
Amperes
1200
2000
270 VCP-W 750

270 VCP-W 1000
415 (188)
415 (188)
475 (216)
475 (216)
270 VCP-W 1250, 25C

270 VCP-W 40, 40C
415 (188)
415 (188)
475 (216)
475 (216)
11
12
13
Breaker impact = 1.5 x breaker weight.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
5.5-12

March 2015
Sheet 05 074
Layout Dimensions27 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), One-High Design

2.00 (50.8)
ii
2.00 (50.8)
32.00 (812.8)
32.00 (812.8)
3.00 (76.2)
11.50 (292.1)
96.25 (2444.8)
23.00
(584.2)
5
(2) Knockouts
for Top Secondary
Conduit Entry
9.00 (228.6)
0.56
(14.2)
15.50
(393.7)
3.00
(76.2)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88
(98.6)
0.25 (6.35) Member

8.50
(215.9)
3.00
(76.2)
9
10
11
Front
Front
3.00
(76.2)


bottom entry.
13
16
17
18

Top or Bottom Entry
l
Changes to 8.25 inches (209.6 mm) if

optional hinged rear doors are required.
5.56
(141.2)

12
15
Two Conduits
0.56 (14.2)
14
Four Conduits
0.88
(22.0)
34.25
(870.0)
59.31 (1506.5)
7.00 (177.8)
3.00 (76.2)
23.00
(584.2)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
34 (863.6)
7
8
j
k

bottom entry.
Floor steel, if used, must not exceed
3.25 inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W.
Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor
0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts.
72.00 inches (1828.8 mm).
Note: Outdoor Aisleless Base Plan

27 kV switchgear outdoor Aisleless base
plan details are same as 5/15 kV outdoor
Aisleless switchgear. Refer to Figure 5.5-14.
19
20
21
3
4
4
No devices on the
breaker compartment
door.
Upper
Hinged
Panel
1-Large Relay
Case
2-Small Relay
Case
3-Instrument
4-Test Switch
5-Switch
6-Lock-out
Relay or
Switch
7-Metering
Unit
Lower
Hinged
Panel

Panel Equipment

CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-13
Sheet 05 075
Layout Dimensions27 kV Two-High Design
Layout Dimensions27 kV Two-High Design


Requirements
i
ii
Typical UnitsIndoor 1
6
1
2
3
6
Figure 5.5-42. Indoor 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm)

Wide Typical Breaker-over-Breaker
Vertical Section
1

Typical Auxiliary-over-Breaker
Vertical Section
For 1-high arrangement (1 breaker per cell),

depth may be reduced to 108.64 inches
(2759.5 mm).
Available Configurations 2
8
6
Blank
1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
VTs
CPT Primary
Fuse Drawer
1200 Ampere
Breaker

Requirements
1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
or
2000 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
or
2000 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
or
2000 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
or
2000 Ampere
Breaker
H
100.00
(2540.0)
Blank
Drawout
VTs

compartment.
Typical Weights
Blank
CPT Primary
Fuse Drawer
CPT Primary
Fuse Drawer
CPT Primary
Fuse Drawer
Drawout
VTs
Drawout
VTs
Drawout
VTs
CPT
Main Bus
Rating,
Amperes
Weight
Lbs (kg)
12
Aux/Bkr
1200
2000
2500
2700
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1227)
13
Aux/Aux
1200
2000
2500
2700
2200 (1000)
2300 (1046)
2300 (1046)
2400 (1091)
Bkr/Bkr
1200
2000
2500
2700
2700 (1227)
2800 (1273)
2800 (1273)
2900 (1318)
Blank
Blank
11
Type of
Vertical
Section
Blank
H
100.00
(2540.0)
10
Table 5.5-10. Assemblies (Less Breakers) 7
36.00
(914.4)
Drawout
VTs
14
15
16
Refer to Table 5.5-9 for breaker weights.
17
18

2
3
4
5
Available Main Bus Ratings for 27 kV two-high design are 1200 A, 2000 A, 2500 A or 2700 A.
Bus connected, maximum 4 A fuses. CPT is installed remote from the switchgear.
Fuses are bus or line connected. CPT is installed in front bottom, on drawout frame.
Maximum CPT size is single-phase 37.5 kVA or three-phase 45 kVA.
Bus or Line connected, maximum 4 A fuses. CPT is installed remote from the switchgear.
19
20
CA08104001E
21
5.5-14

March 2015
Sheet 05 076
Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
ii
1
5
36.00
(914.4)
Min.
2
3
4
Rear
32.00
(812.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
Anchor locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts SAE

Grade 5 or better, (6) places in each vertical section.
Secondary control wiring conduit openings, conduit

projection must not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
Minimum front clearance when using

Eatons portable lifter.
Minimum left-hinged panel clearance.

Recommended minimum rear clearance.
Finished foundation surface shall be level within

0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)
left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally,
as measured by a laser level.
Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must not exceed

2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See shop order base plan
Customers ground provisions, provided as shown

by symbol on shop order sectional side views.
Line
Compt.
25.00
(635.0)
5
6
Bus
Compt.
118.64
(3013.5)
7
8
9.00
(228.6)
6
48.00
(1219.2)
0.88
(22.4)
Breaker
Compt.
65.97
(1675.6)
0.88
(22.4)
9
10
Control
Compt.
13
10.96
(278.4)
11
12
7.00
(177.8)
22.25 3.00
(565.2) (76.2)
1.25
(31.8)
32.00
(812.8)
4 Min.
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
0.59
(15.0)
0.59
(15.0)
Top Entry Secondary Control
36.00
(914.4)
Knockouts for 1.38" (35.1)

or 1.75 (44.5) Conduits
Front
14
72.00
(1828.8)
Min.
15
7.80
(198.1)
7.38
(187.5)
3.00
(76.2)
16
3.00
(76.2)
36.00
(914.4)
17
18
Figure 5.5-46. Typical Indoor Floor Plan27 kV Two-High
19
20
21

CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-15
Sheet 05 077
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL Design

Typical Units
i
Typical Weights in Lbs (kg) 1
ii

Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating
Amperes
Indoor
Breaker
1200
2000
2500
3100 (1409)
3200 (1455)
3355 (1525)
Auxiliary
1200
2000
2500
3000 (1364)
3100 (1409)
3355 (1525)
Figure 5.5-47. IndoorTypical Breaker, Main or Feeder
Type of
Breaker
Current Rating, Amperes

1200
2000
380 VCP-W-16, 16C

380 VCP-W-25, 25C
1080 (490)
1080 (490)
1140 (518)
1140 (518)
380 VCP-W-32, 32C

380 VCP-W-21
1080 (490)
1080 (490)
1140 (518)
1140 (518)
380 VCP-W-40, 40C
1080 (490)
1080 (490)
1140 (518)
1140 (518)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 5.5-48. IndoorTypical Auxiliary-Over-Auxiliary
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Figure 5.5-49. IndoorTypical Bus Tie Breaker
20
CA08104001E
21
5.5-16

March 2015
Sheet 05 078
i
ii
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL DesignOutdoor Enclosures

(48-Inch and 60-Inch Wide Structures are Available)
139.94
(3554.5)
2
3
4
115.67
(2938.0)
106.48
(2704.6)
5
6
42.00 (1066.8)
Wide
129.22
(3282.2)
1.17
(29.7)
8
Figure 5.5-50. Outdoor Aisleless (42.00 Inches [1066.8 mm] Wide)
9
215.72
(5479.3)
10
11
12
13
121.79
(3093.5)
106.47
(2704.3)
14
15
16
17
210.63
(5350.0)
1.17
(29.7)
Figure 5.5-51. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle (42.00 Inches [1066.8 mm] Wide)
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-17
Sheet 05 079
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL DesignDimensions in Inches (mm)
i
ii
1
Min.
42.00
(1066.8)
Rear
8
3.75
(95.2)
Line
Compt.
Min.
1.50
(38.1)
Max.
3.00
(76.2)
1.16
(29.5)
3.75
(95.2)
34.50
16.00 (876.3)
(406.4)
1
8.69
(220.7)
68.48
(1739.4)
Bus
Compt.
124.36
(3158.7)
73.24
(1860.3)
39.60
(1005.8)
Suggested locations for 0.500-13 bolts

or welding.
Secondary conduit location bottom

entrance. Conduit projection must
not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
Recommended minimum front clearance.

Recommended minimum real clearance

follow local regulations.
Finished foundation surface shall be

level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right,
front-to-back, and diagonally, as
measured by a laser level.
1.75
(44.4)
30.88
(784.4)
3.00
(76.2)
7.50
(190.5)
Floor Plate
Min.
38.00
(965.2)
4
10
Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must

not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See
shop order base plan for conduit locations.
11
Customers ground provisions

provided as shown by symbol on
shop order sectional side views.
12
Alternate Secondary Conduit

Location Top Entrance
3
Min.
84.00
(2133.6)
14
42.00
(1066.8)
15
1.94
(49.3)
Front
13
Min.
1.50
(38.1)
Max.
3.00
(76.2)
42.00
(1066.8)
Finished foundation (within

0.08-inch (2.0 mm) clearance) must
extend under switchgear minimum
1.50 inches (38.1 mm) to maximum
3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
7A
1.00
(25.4)
Door
7B
1.23
(31.3)
Floor steel if used, must not exceed

this dimension under switchgear.
15.38
(390.7)
7A
2
Breaker
Compt.
7A
Unfinished Foundation Under Switchgear
7.50
(190.5)
16
3.00
(76.2)
17
7B
3.54
(89.9)
18
19
Figure 5.5-52. Typical Indoor Base Plan38 kV
20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-18

March 2015
Sheet 05 080
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV
Typical Application Layouts
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 5.5-53. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV

Notes:
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two

accuracy CTs can be installed on
each side of the circuit breaker.
2. Bottom entry is standard for all

power cables. In breaker over
breaker arrangement, maximum
number of cables is limited to
two per phase for each breaker.
3. All lineups shown can be provided

in mirrored configuration.
4. Refer to Figure 5.5-56 to 5.5-61 for
dimensions.
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.5-19
Sheet 05 081
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Notes:

13
14
15
16

dimensions.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-20

March 2015
Sheet 05 082
Typical Application Layouts (Continued)
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Notes:
20
21



dimensions.
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-21
Sheet 05 083
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
i
ii
32.00
(812.8)
Arc exhaust
plenum
Control
Compartment
1
1200 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
1200 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
2
1200 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
(no relays)
4
95.00
(2413.0)
Control
Compartment
1200 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
1200 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
1200 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
5
6
7
8
9
32.00
(812.8)
10
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
2000 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
1200 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
2000 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
2000 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
(no relays)
95.00
(2413.0)
Dynamic Vent
2000 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
12
Dynamic Vent
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Dynamic Vent
Dynamic Vent
Dynamic Vent
2000 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
1200 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
2000
0A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
(Notes 1, 2, 3)
(Notes 1, 3, 4)
(no relays)
(Note 1)
36.00
(914.14)
11
(Notes 1, 2)
(Notes 1, 3)
13
14
15
16
17
Notes:
1 = Please note that the only control space available for relays and LV devices for this configuration
is the relay box located on the breaker compartment door.
2 = Maximum current through a 2000 A breaker in this location must be limited to 1750 A.
3 = This configuration requires use of a 4000 A main bus.
4 = Maximum current through each 2000 A breaker in this configuration must be limited to 1750 A each.
18
19
20
Figure 5.5-56. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
21
CA08104001E
5.5-22

March 2015
Sheet 05 084
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
ii
1
32.00
(812.8)
Arc exhaust
plenum
2
Control
Compartment
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Control
Compartment
(no relays)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Blank or
Transistion
to Ampgard
(no relays)
4
5
95.00
(2413.0)
Dynamic Vent
2000/3000 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
6
7
Control
Compartment
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Control
Compartment
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Blank or
Auxiliary
4000 A FC
Breaker
(with relay
box)
(no relays)
(no relays)
3000 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
3000 A FC
Breaker
(with relay
box)
3000 A FC
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Fan
Fan
Dynamic Vent
Dynamic Vent
8
9
32.00
(812.8)
10
11
2000/3000 A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
12
13
95.00
(2413.0)
Dynamic Vent
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Control
Compartment
Dynamic Vent
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Control
Compartment
(no relays)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Control
Compartment
Fans located
inside this
compartment
(no relays)
Dynamic Vent
(Notes 2, 5)
36.00
(914.14)
(Notes 1, 5)
(Note 6)
(Notes 1, 6)
(Note 7)
Notes:
1 = Please note that the only control space available for relays and LV devices for this configuration
is the relay box located on the breaker compartment door.
6 = Maximum current allowed through a 3000 A circuit breaker in this configuration is 3000 A
with fans running, and 2500 A when fans are not running.
7 = Maximum current allowed through a 3000 A circuit breaker in this configuration is 4000 A
with fans running, and 2500 A when fans are not running.
Figure 5.5-56. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV (Continued)
21
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.5-23
Sheet 05 085
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
Typical Sectional Side Views
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 5.5-57. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
CA08104001E
21
5.5-24

March 2015
Sheet 05 086
Typical Sectional Side Views (Continued)
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-25
Sheet 05 087
Typical Sectional Side Views (Continued)
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

CA08104001E
21
5.5-26

March 2015
Sheet 05 088
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearWeights5 and 15 kV
i
ii
1
5/15 kV Arc-Resistant SwitchgearTypical Weights

Table 5.5-13. Assemblies (Less Breakers) 1234
Type of
Vertical Section
Main Bus
Rating
Indoor Structure
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
97.50-Inch (2476.5 mm) D
Indoor Structure
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
109.50-Inch (2781.3 mm) D
Amperes
Lbs (kg)
Lbs (kg)
Lbs (kg)
Breaker/breaker
1200
2000
3000
4000
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
3000 (1362)
3100 (1407)
3025 (1374)
3175 (1441)
3275 (1487)
3375 (1532)
3175 (1441)
3375 (1532)
3475 (1578)
3575 (1623)
Blank/breaker or
breaker/blank
1200
2000
3000
4000
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
3000 (1362)
2900 (1317)
3125 (1419)
3150 (1430)
3275 (1487)
3125 (1419)
3175 (1441)
3325 (1510)
3475 (1578)
Auxiliary/breaker or
breaker/auxiliary
1200
2000
3000
4000
2650 (1203)
2750 (1248)
2850 (1294)
2950 (1339)
2850 (1294)
2975 (1351)
3100 (1407)
3225 (1464)
2975 (1351)
3225 (1464)
3275 (1487)
3450 (1566)
Auxiliary/auxiliary
1200
2000
3000
4000
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
2800 (1271)
2925 (1328)
3050 (1385)
3175 (1441)
2925 (1328)
3175 (1441)
3225 (1464)
3375 (1532)
Blank/auxiliary or
auxiliary/blank
1200
2000
3000
4000
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2700 (1226)
2825 (1283)
2950 (1339)
3075 (1396)
2825 (1283)
2975 (1351)
3125 (1419)
3275 (1487)
Blank/blank
1200
2000
3000
4000
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2700 (1226)
2825 (1283)
2950 (1339)
3075 (1396)
2825 (1283)
2975 (1351)
3125 (1419)
3275 (1487)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
10
11
Indoor Structure
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
121.50-Inch (3086.1 mm) D

Add weights of end-wall to left and right end structures as follows:
350 Lbs (159.1 kg) for 97.50-inch (2476.5) D structures.
Add plenum weight as follows:
300 Lbs (136.4 kg) to left and right end structures.
200 Lbs (91.0 kg) to each intermediate structures.
Add arc duct assembly weight as follows:
200.00 Lbs (91.0 kg) for standard 51.00-inch (1295.4 mm) arc exhaust duct assembly.
30.00 Lbs (14.0 kg) per foot for additional arc duct.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-27
Sheet 05 089
Typical Top PlanDimensions in Inches (mm)

36.00
(914.4)
End Wall 1.50

(38.1)
18.00
(457.2)
Cables for the
Upper Breaker
through These
Conduits
i
36.00
(914.4)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
18.00
(457.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
7.00
(177.8)
7.00
(177.8)
18.00
(457.2)
1.50 End Wall

(38.1)
18.00
(457.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
7.00
(177.8)
ii
1.25
(31.8)
2
3
4
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
9.00
(228.6)
6.00
(152.4)
9.00
(228.6)
6.00
(152.4)
6
7
81.00
(2057.4)
Plenum
108.00 1
(2743.2)
8
9
10
11
12
15.25
(387.4)
13
VS #1
VS #2
VS #3
Front
Top View
Figure 5.5-60. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear, Top Entry CablesTypical Conduit Entrance Locations5 and 15 kV
Note: For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of up to 41 kA rms symmetrical,
minimum two vertical sections and one arc duct exit are required.
For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of 50 kA rms symmetrical or higher,
minimum three vertical sections and two arc duct exits are required.
1
Depth shown is based on use of maximum one 500 kCM per phase, or two 250 kCM per phase power cables
for each breaker entering from the top; otherwise, use structures with 121.50-inch (3086.1-mm) depth.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-28

March 2015
Sheet 05 090
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan5 and 15 kV
Typical Floor PlanDimensions in Inches (mm)
ii
1 These are the locations of 0.75 inch (19.1 mm)
diameter mounting holes for securing an arcresistant VacClad-W switchgear assembly

(hereafter referred to as VC-W) vertical section to
a finished foundation. Use of 0.50 inch (12 mm)
diameter SAE Grade 5 hardware tightened to
75 ft-lb (101.7 Nm) is recommended. Use of
other post-installed mechanical anchor systems,
bonded/adhesive type systems, pre-installed
cast-in-place systems such as shear lugs, L-bolts
and J-bolts, or plug welding the VC-W switchgear
vertical section at the mounting hole locations to
cast-in-place structural steel materials or to a steel
house foundation is sole responsibility of others.
Alternative mounting systems must have equal or
greater average ultimate tensile and shear load
capabilities as SAE Grade 5 hardware. In addition
to load capabilities of the mounting system, the
bearing strength and bearing surface area at each
VC-W switchgear vertical section mounting hole
location must be taken into account. Alternative
mounting systems must provide equal or greater
bearing properties as a Key Bellevilles, Inc.,
K1125-E-125 washer or other manufacturers equal
device used with SAE Grade 5 hardware at each
VC-W switchgear anchor location. Consult a
licensed structural or civil engineer prior to
selecting a mounting system if a system other
than that recommended is preferred.
Rear
4
36.00
(914.0)
7.52
(191.0)
20.96
(532.0)
1.61
(41.0)
3.75
(95.0)
1
6
28.00
(711.0)
5
6
9.00
(229.0)
96.46
(2450.0)
8
0.75
(19.0)
9
10
11
16.00
(406.0)
19.00
(483.0)
14
2 Minimum front clearance required when using
0.75
(19.0)
1.88
(48.0)
3.37
(86.0)
0.25
(6.0)
61.09
(1552.0)
Eatons portable lifter to install drawout devices.

If other Eaton devices are used to install drawout
devices, these devices may require more space,
which will be indicated on an arc-resistant VC-W
switchgear assembly specific shop order floor
plan. In addition, the local authority having
jurisdiction may also require a larger distance.
3 Minimum left-hinged panel clearance.

4.46
(113.0)
1.46
(37.0)
12
13
44.50
(1130.0)
22.75
(578.0)
7.52
(191.0)
32.00 Min.
(813.0)
0.88
(22.0)
0.88
(22.0)
3.88
(99.0)
5.80
(147.0)
36.00
(914.0)
3
Front
4 This is the minimum rear clearance required.

The local authority having jurisdiction may
require a larger distance.
5 Location of low voltage control conduit wiring
70.00 Min.
(1778.0)
2
15
openings. Conduits are limited to a projection

of 1.00 inch (25.4 mm) above the finished floor
or inside the top cover when such conduit entry
is from the top. Maximum conduit size is
1.25 inches (31.8 mm).
6 These are the high voltage cable conduit entry

locations when entering from the floor or the top.
See shop order base plan for recommended
conduit locations when bottom entry is being
used. Conduit projection must not exceed
2.00 inches (50.8 mm).
7 This is the location of the cable lug for attaching
16
Floor Plan Detail
17
the cable from the customers ground grid. In the

first and last vertical section in an arc-resistant
VC-W switchgear assembly, the grounding grid
cable should enter through the HV cable conduit
entry area in the floor and be routed to this
terminal lug.
8 Finished foundation surface shall be level within

left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as
18
Figure 5.5-61. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan5 and 15 kV
19
20
21
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.5-29
Sheet 05 091
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts27 kV
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Figure 5.5-62. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts27 kV
14
Notes:
15

power cables, maximum four
per phase.
16
17

dimensions.
18
4. 27 kV arc-resistant switchgear can

be supplied in one-high design
configuration only.
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-30

March 2015
Sheet 05 092
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)27 kV
Available Configurations (Continued)
ii
40.00
(1016.0)
1
2
3
4
5
6
90.37
(225.0)
7
8
9
No Relays
No Relays
No Relays
10
11
42.00
(1067.0)
12
Figure 5.5-63. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)27 kV
13
14
Please note that an additional 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) clearance is required above
the arc wall for arc exhaust.

15
Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating
Amperes
Indoor
Structure
16
Control/breaker
1200
2000
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
Control/auxiliary
1200
2000
2400 (1090)
2500 (1135)
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-31
Sheet 05 093
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)27 kV
Typical Sectional Side ViewsDimensions in Inches (mm)
i
ii
40.00
(1016.0)
40.00
(1016.0)
1
2
3
4
90.37
(2295.0)
90.37
(2295.0)
5
6
108.63
(2759.0)
108.63
(2759.0)
7
8
9
40.00
(1016.0)
10
40.00
(1016.0)
11
12
13
90.37
(2295.0)
90.37
(2295.0)
14
15
16
108.63
(2759.0)
108.63
(2759.0)
Figure 5.5-64. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)27 kV
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-32

March 2015
Sheet 05 094
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan27 kV
ii
1
2
Rear
42.00
(1066.8) Min.
42.00
(1067)
5
5.50
(140)
3
4
14.00
(356)
4.00
(102)
1B
6.00
(152)
5
6
1B Bottom cable entrance.
1.00
(25)
30.00
(762)
108.62
(2759)
4.00
(102)
Secondary control
wiring conduit openings,
location bottom entrance
(optional; only by special order).
Minimum front clearance.
Minimum left clearance.

Recommended minimum
rear clearance.
Finished foundation surface shall

be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
102 mm base channel.
7
8
3.00
(76)
50.38
(1280)
6.00
(152)
1.38
(35)
10
11
12
13
3.00
(76)
4.75
(121)
1.00
(25)
38.00
(965.2)
Min.
4
Standard Secondary Conduit

1.12
(29)
Front
72.00
(1829)
Min.
1.00
(25)
3.25
(83)
6.00
(152)
14
15
16
Figure 5.5-65. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan27 kV
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
March 2015

5.5-33
Sheet 05 095
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts38 kV
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Notes:
1. Maximum # of CTS:
Bus Side
2 sets of standard or
1 set of high accuracy
Line/Cable side
3 sets of standard or
1 set of standard and
1 set of high accuracy
2. CT mounting bushings
on bus side are provided
only when bus side CTs
are included.
3. Bottom entry is standard f
or all power cables. Contact
Eaton if top entry is required.
4. Refer to Figure 5.5-67 to 5.5-69
for dimensions.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 5.5-66. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts38 kV

CA08104001E
21
5.5-34

March 2015
Sheet 05 096
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)38 kV
ii
40.00
(1016.0)
1
2
3
4
5
100.00
(2540.0)
6
7
8
9
42.00
(1067.0)
10
11
Figure 5.5-67. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts (Front Views)38 kV

1
12
13
14
Please note that an additional 48.00-inch

(1219.2 mm) clearance is required above
the arc wall for arc exhaust.

Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating
Amperes
Indoor
Structure
Breaker cell
1200
2000
2500
3000
3500 (1589)
3700 (1680)
4000 (1816)
4000 (1816)
Auxiliary cell
1200
2000
2500
3000
3000 (1362)
3200 (1453)
3500 (1589)
3500 (1589)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-35
Sheet 05 097
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)38 kV
Typical SectionalDimensions in Inches (mm)
i
ii
40.00
(1016.0)
1
2
3
100.00
(2540.0)
4
5
6
7
129.75
(3296.0)
8
9
40.00
(1016.0)
10
11
12
100.00
(2540.0)
13
14
15
129.75
(3296.0)
16
Figure 5.5-68. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)38 kV
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-36

March 2015
Sheet 05 098
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan38 kV
ii
1
2
42.00
(1066.8)
Min.
Rear
3
4
3.75
(95.3)
3.75
(95.3)
Line
Compt
4.15
(105.4)
3.00
(76.2)
Max.
16.00
(406.4)
0.88
(22.4)
6
7
7B
34.50
(876.3)
2.00
(50.8)
40.24
(1022.1)
Bus
Compt
Suggested locations for 0.50-Inch

(12.7 mm) bolts or welding.
Secondary control wiring conduit

openings, conduit projection must
not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
Minimum front clearance.

Recommended minimum
rear clearance.
Finished foundation surface shall be

level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
14.63
(371.6)
129.75
(3295.7)
10
Supplied by Customer
Breaker
Compt
2.00
(50.8)
1.16
(29.5)
10
11
39.58
(1005.3)
12
7.50
31.88 (190.5)
(809.8)
13
16.38
(416.1)
14
1.50
(38.1)
1.70
(43.2)
15
16
Unfinished Foundation Under Switchgear
10
38.00
(965.2)
Min.
4
61.62
(1565.1)
1
7A
3.00
(76.2)
Max.
7A
Floor steel if used, must not exceed

dimension under switchgear.
7B
Finished foundation
(within 0.06-inch [1.5 mm] clearance)
must extend under switchgear
minimum 1.50 inches (38.1 mm)
to a maximum 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Primary (H.V.) conduit projection

must not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm).
See shop order base plan
Customers ground provisions,

provided as shown by symbol on
shop order sectional side views.
10
4.00-inch (101.6 mm) minimum

channel supplied by customer.
3.00
(76.2)
42.00
(1066.8)
Alternate Secondary Conduit

7B
Front
42.00
(1066.8)
84.00
(2133.6)
Min.
17
2.20
(55.9)
7.50
(190.5)
18
3.38
(85.9)
19
3.00
(76.2)
20
21
Figure 5.5-69. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan38 kV

CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-37
Sheet 05 099
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearArc Exhaust Wall and Plenum
Arc Exhaust Wallfor 27 and 38 kV Switchgear
Arc Exhaust wall Figure 5.5-70 is supplied as standard for all 27/38 kV arcresistant switchgear. The arc exhaust
wall must be field installed above the
switchgear. Note minimum 48.00-inch
(1219.2 mm) ceiling clearance is
required above the arc exhaust wall
for proper venting of the arc exhaust.
All 5/15 kV arc-resistant switchgear is
provided with arc exhaust chamber
(plenum). It is also installed in the
field. When using arc exhaust chamber,
minimum ceiling clearance required
above the arc exhaust chamber (plenum)
is equal to that needed for field
installation of the chamber. Eaton
recommends minimum 18.00-inch
(457.2 mm). Refer to Figures 5.5-72 and
5.5-73 for typical arc exhaust chamber
(plenum) and arc duct exit arrangements for arc-resistant switchgear
installed inside an electrical room and
inside an outdoor house.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 5.5-70. Arc Exhaust Wall Above the Switchgear
Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) with Arc Duct Exit

for 5 and 15 kV Switchgear
Note: APPLICABLE TO ALL ARC-RESISTANT

SWITCHGEAR:
For switchgear with enclosure arc

ratings of up to 41 kA rms symmetrical,
minimum two vertical sections and
one arc duct exit is required.
10
For switchgear with enclosure arc

rating of 50 kA rms symmetrical or
higher, minimum three vertical
sections and two arc duct exits are
required.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 5.5-71. Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) with Arc Duct Exit Above the Switchgear
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-38

March 2015
Sheet 05 100
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearExhaust Layout
Typical LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

72.00
(1828.8)
Minimum
ii
1
2
Arc Exhaust Caution!

When equipment is energized
and operating, all personnel
stay clear of fenced area
below the arc exhaust
release point.
31.50
(800.1)
Minimum
16.50
(419.1)
Wall
3
4
De-energize the equipment

prior to entering the fenced
area or prior to opening any
switchgear rear doors.
= Up to 24.00 (610.0)
Arc Duct Collar
Rear
6
7
8
9
10
Arc Exhaust
Chamber (Plenum)
Front
11
12
13
Top View
Typical 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Lineup
81.00
(2057.4)
Duct Cross Section

24.00 (609.6) x 24.00 (609.6)
32.00
(812.8)
Arc Exhaust Chamber

(plenum above
the switchgear)
14
15
16
Arc Duct
Switchgear
Front
Wall Flashing Around

the Duct by Others
1090.50
(2781.3)
95.00
(2413.0)
End Piece
(arc exhaust)
17
Arc Plenum with Arc Duct Exit
(Partial View)
18
19
20
21
1.25
(31.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
Side View
1.25
(31.8)
Typical 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Figure 5.5-72. Typical Layout of 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Inside Electrical Room and Outside Minimum Exhaust Area
CA08104001E

March 2015
5.5-39
Sheet 05 101
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearExhaust Layout
Typical Layout (Continued)
i
Arc Exhaust Caution!
When equipment is
energized and operating,
all personnel stay clear
of fenced area below the
arc exhaust release point.
Min.
72.00
(1829.0)
Front
16.50
(419.1)
Min.
31.50
(800.1)
De-energize the equipment

prior to entering the fenced
area prior to opening any
switchgear rear doors.
Fenced Area with Access Gate
Seismic Applications = 6.00 (152.4)

Non-Seismic Applications can be Less than
6.00 (152.4) or as Required by the House Design
Simplified Top View

(not to scale)
Minimum Recommended
Clearance Above the Plenum = 18.00 (457.2)
32.00 Arc Exhaust Plenum
(812.8)
Switchgear
Height
Arc Duct Exit Piece

with Hinged Flap Assembly
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
House Wall with Doors for

Access to Rear of the Switchgear
Customers
Power Cables
From Below
Simplified Side View

(not to scale)
Outdoor House
Arc-Resistant
Switchgear
ii
For the layout shown, doors on the house

wall (not shown) provide access to rear of
the switchgear. For rear access to switchgear
from within the house, minimum 36.00 (914.4)
clearance is required behind the switchgear.
Figure 5.5-73. Typical Layout of 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Inside an Outdoor House (Electrocenter)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access Medium Voltage

February 2015
6.0-1
MEF Front-Access Medium Voltage
Sheet 06 001
CA08104001E
Contents

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-19
Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-31
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16347A
Section 26 13 19.11
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Note: Viewing windows shown

in the photo are illustration only.
MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
20
21
6.0-2
February 2015
Sheet 06 002
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Medium Voltage
Drawout Breaker
Eatons newest Type MEF metalenclosed front-accessible switchgear
with Type VCP-T/VCP-TL drawout
vacuum circuit breakers provide
centralized control and protection of
medium voltage power equipment and
circuits in industrial and commercial
installations involving:
6
7
8
Transformer primary switching

Transformer secondary main
General purpose feeder circuit
Bus tie circuit
Generator Main
Across-the-line starting of medium
voltage motors
Automatic transfer switching
using main-main or main-tie-main
configurations
Harmonic filter bank switching
Any combination of above
applications
11
Type MEF metal-enclosed switchgear

is designed for application at voltages
up to 15 kV. It is a modularized design
that can be assembled in various combinations to satisfy user application
requirements. The switchgear can be
supplied with one-high or two-high
breaker arrangements. Type MEF
switchgear is a front-accessible design,
suitable for installation against the wall.
12
For metal-clad, rear-access switchgear

design, refer to Tab 5, type VCP-W
switchgear.
13
Standards
9
10
MEF SwitchgearIndoor Unit
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker with

Integral Protective Relay
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit BreakerSide View
Ratings
14
15
16
17
18
19
MEF metal-enclosed switchgear

is designed to meet requirements
of C37.20.3, IEEE standard for metalenclosed switchgear. Drawout circuit
breakers and auxiliary drawers are
designed to meet requirements
of C37.20.2, IEEE standard for
metal-clad switchgear.

Rated maximum voltage:

4.76 kV, 15 kV
Rated main bus continuous current:
1200, 2000 A
Circuit breaker ratings: continuous
current 600, 1200, 2000 A
Rated short-circuit current:
16, 20, 25, 32 and 40 kA
Refer to Table 6.0-3 and
Table 6.0-4 for more details
MEF also meets Canadian Standard,

CSA C22.2 No. 31-04.
Type VCP-T/VCP-TL vacuum circuit
breakers used in MEF switchgear meet
or exceed ANSI and IEEE standards
applicable to AC high voltage circuit
breakers rated on symmetrical current
basis; C37.04, C37.06, C37.09.
Third-Party Certifications
20
UL
CSA
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-3
Sheet 06 003
General DescriptionVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Advantages
Reduced footprint
Front-access design
Maintenance-free bus joints
Full benefits of switching and
interrupting capabilities of
vacuum breakers
Integral relaying and metering by
use of breaker mounted protection
that allows full short-circuit and
overload coordination with
upstream devices
External control power is not
required when using integral
protection
Optional external relays and meters
MEF fills the application gap
between metal-enclosed fusible
load interrupter and metal-clad
breaker switchgear designs
Breakers shipped installed in
the switchgear; no mismatch or
misplaced circuit breakers at site
and reduced installation cost
Secondary control connector interlock prevents breaker being moved

into the connected position if the
breaker control wiring connector is
not correctly engaged with its compartment control wiring connector.
Interlocking also prevents disconnection of circuit breaker control
wiring connector, manually or automatically, while the circuit breaker is
in the connected position and in any
position between the connected and
the test/disconnected
throughout its travel and in the
connected position
Choice of manually or electrically
operated circuit breakers
Integral spring charging handle
Choice of breaker mounted protection for automatic short-circuit and
overload protection without a need
for external control power
Can also be used with external

relays when equipped with
optional shunt trip and external
control power
Easy-to-see contact erosion indicator is provided on the moving stem
of the breaker. Only visual inspection is required to verify that the
contacts have not worn out
Easy-to-see contact wipe indicator is
provided for verification by simple
visual inspection that the loading
springs are applying proper
pressure to the contacts when
the circuit breaker is closed
One auxiliary switch (5a, 5b)
included as standard on all breakers
for breaker contact status
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FeaturesVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum
Circuit Breaker
Vacuum circuit breakers provide

high duty cycle, fast interruption,
reduced maintenance, and are
environmentally friendly
Very compact and lightweight circuit
breaker rated to 15 kV; weighs only
250440 lbs (114200 kg)
Fully horizontal drawout feature
with connect, test and disconnect
positions provides ease of operation
and interchangeability. Levering-in
(racking) system is an integral part
of the breaker
All circuit breaker functions, indicators and controls are grouped on an
easily accessible panel on front of
the circuit breaker
Levering interlock prevents the
breaker from being racked out when
in connected position and closed
Trip-free interlock prevents breaker
from closing, manually or electrically, while it is being levered or
when in an intermediate position
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Fully Withdrawn on Extension Pan
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-4
February 2015
Sheet 06 004
General DescriptionVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Choice of Breakers
VCP-T/VCP-TC Breakers
VCP-TL/VCP-TLC Breakers
ii
1
2
3
4
VCP-T/VCP-TC Breaker
VCP-TL/VCP-TLC Breaker
ANSI rateddrawout
Equipped with stored energy spring operating
mechanism
5/15 kV, 600/1200/2000 A
25 kA and 40 kA rms symmetrical
K=1
Rated interrupting time = 3 cycle
Operating mechanism = 10,000 operations
Vacuum interrupters = 30,000 operations
ANSI rateddrawout
Equipped with linear magnetic actuator operating
mechanism
5/15 kV, 600/1200 A
25 kA rms symmetrical
K=1
Rated interrupting time = 3 cycle
Operating mechanism = 100,000 operations
Vacuum interrupters = 30,000 operations
9
u
10
v
y
11
U
x
ad
12
aa
ac
13
14
al
at
bt
af
15
16
17
18
19
20
u
v
ao
aq
ar
ag
as
VCP-T Breaker
u Secondary Wiring
v Through-the-Window
Accessories
w Electric Charging Motor
x Manual Charging Handle
y Contact Status (Open-Close)
U Spring Status (ChargedDischarged)
V Manual OFF Pushbutton
W Manual ON Pushbutton
X Operations Counter
at 5A/5B Auxiliary Switch
VCP-TL Breaker
ak Opening Spring
al OFF Key Lock Location
am Motor Cutoff Switch
an Integral Protective Relay
(Optional)
ao Cradle with Levering
Mechanism
ap Shock Bolt Handle
aq Shock Bolt
ar Packing Screw Lock Plate
as Levering Drive Nut
bt Push/Pull Handle
u Magnetic Actuator
v Capacitor
w Controller
x Power Supply
Notes:
1. Type VCP-TC and VCP-TLC are optional designs with capacitor
switching capabilities. See Table 6.0-5 on Page 6.0-19.
2. VCP-TL/VCP-TLC breakers are designed such that in event of
control power loss, internal capacitors provide sufficient energy
to perform an electrical open operation up to 48 hours after the
loss of control power.
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-5
Sheet 06 005
General DescriptionMEF Switchgear
FeaturesMEF Switchgear
Assembly
MEF Switchgear is Modular
Type MEF is metal-enclosed frontaccessible switchgear with many

metal-clad features.
Drawout circuit breaker and

auxiliary (VT, CPT) compartments
with automatic shutters to prevent
accidental contact with high voltage
circuits when breaker/auxiliary
is removed
No high voltage connections or
circuits are exposed by opening
of circuit breaker, VT or CPT
compartment door
All drawout elements are provided
with mechanical interlocks for
proper operating sequence under
normal operating conditions as
described in IEEE C37.20.2
All low voltage control wiring,
devices and control compartments
are isolated from high voltage
circuits
Available configurations include:

Breaker over auxiliary
Breaker over breaker
Auxiliary over auxiliary
Pull sections with various cable
entry combinations
i
Control
Compartment
ii
1
2
MEF Switchgear is Front Accessible
Allows primary cable connections

from the front of the switchgear
All drawout elements (breaker,
VT, CPT) are front accessible after
opening their compartment door
All field connections required at
shipping splits are accessible and
made from the front
No rear access space is required.
The switchgear can be installed
against the wall
All non-accessible primary
bus joints and connections are
maintenance-freedo not require
inspection or re-torque
3
4
5
CPT Drawer
VT Drawer
MEF SwitchgearIndoor Unit
MEF Switchgear is Compact
7
8
Breaker and auxiliary cells are

26.00-inch wide, 61.50-inch deep,
92.00-inch tall (660.6 mm wide,
1562.1 mm deep, 2336.8 mm tall)
Cable pull sections are
19.00 inches wide, 61.50 inches deep,
92.00 inches tall (482.6 mm wide,
1562.1 mm deep, 2336.8 mm tall)
Reduced front aisle space for
breaker withdrawal saves overall
floor space
Shipping groups can be moved
in place by forklift, or overhead
lifting means
Control
Compartment
10
11
12
13
14
15
MEF SwitchgearBreaker Over Breaker
and Adjacent Pull Section
MEF Switchgear
Single Breaker with
Cables Out the Bottom
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-6
February 2015
Sheet 06 006
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Each circuit breaker compartment

is provided with steel shutters
(breaker driven) that automatically
rotate into position to cover stationary cell studs to prevent contact with
high voltage circuit when the
breaker is moved from connected to
disconnected position. Provisions
for padlocking the shutters open
or closed is included as standard
Rejection interlock pins prevent
insertion of the circuit breaker if the
circuit breaker and structure ratings
are not compatible
A silver-plated copper ground
bus keeps the breaker grounded
throughout its travel and in its
connected position

Breaker in Connected Position
Circuit Breaker in Connected

Position Indicator
7
Panel Space
for LV
Control
Devices
8
9
Steel
Shutters
10
Cell
Stabs
11
12
Provision
for Padlock
Shutters
13
14
15
16
VCP-T Circuit Breaker Compartment
17
VCP-T Circuit Breaker Compartment

(Shutters Shown Open for Illustration)
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-7
Sheet 06 007
MEF switchgear permits use of up to

four auxiliary drawers in one vertical
unit. Those drawers can be used for
installation of voltage or control power
transformers.
ii
1
Each drawer can be fully withdrawn

on extension rails, thus allowing
easy access to VT, CPT and their
primary fuses
Safety shutter protects against accidental contact with primary stabs
when the drawer is withdrawn
A VT drawer can accommodate
two VTs, each connected line-to-line
(open delta), or three VTs, each
connected line-to-ground
A CPT drawer can accommodate
a maximum of single-phase,
5 kVA CPT
Mechanical interlock is included
on CPT drawer that requires CPT
secondary breaker to be opened
prior to withdrawing the drawer to
ensure that the primary circuit can
only be disconnected under no-load
Primary fuses are automatically
grounded as the drawer is
withdrawn from connected to
disconnected position
VT Drawer
2
3
4
CPT Drawer
5
Interlock
CPT Secondary
Main Breaker
Extension
Rail
6
7
8
Drawout VT and CPT
9
10
Primary Shutter
Secondary Disconnect
11
Primary
Fuses
12
13
NEW PHOTO TO COME
14
15
Extension
Rail
Auxiliary Drawer Compartment
CPT Withdrawn on Extension Rails
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-8
February 2015
Sheet 06 008
Cable Pull Sections

CT/Sensor
Secondary Wires
ii
Three-Phase CT
Single-Phase
Current Sensors
CT/Sensor
Primary Bushings
2
Pull Section Close-Up View CT/Sensor Mounting
3
4
Customers Cable
Terminal Pads
Surge Arresters
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
MEF Cable Pull Section Adjacent

to 2-High Breaker Cell
Cable pull sections are included

as required to allow top or bottom
primary cable terminations from
the front of the switchgear. Current
sensors for use with breaker mounted
integral protective relay, or current
transformers for use with door
mounted external relays are mounted
in the primary circuits in the pull
sections. Pull sections are also used
as needed for bus transition and
bus connections to other equipment.
Pull section is metal-enclosed.
Zero Sequence
Sensor
Zero Sequence
CT
Pull Section Close-Up View Cable Termination and Zero Sequence CT/Sensor
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-9
Sheet 06 009
Bus Compartments
Pull Section
Breaker Over Breaker Cell
Main Bus
Main Bus
Joint with
PVC Boot
Main Bus
Support
i
ii
1
2
3
Risers to
Main Bus
Top ViewMain Bus Access
Type MEF switchgear is completely front accessible,

designed to be installed against a wall. Access necessary
for customers primary cable terminations, joining of bus
joints (main bus and ground bus) at shipping splits, and
terminations of customers control wires are provided from
the front of the switchgear. Main bus is accessible from
the top front of the switchgear. All bus bars are insulated
throughout by epoxy coating using Eatons fluidized bed
process, and covered with PVC boots at joints. All joints
are silver-plated. All bus joints that are not accessible are
bolted with special hardware to eliminate need for future
inspection or re-torque. Minimum 24.00-inch (609.6 mm)
clearance to ceiling is recommended for main bus access.
Breaker Cell
Primary Insulators
Run Backs to Pull Section
Copper Ground Bus

(Accessible in Pull Section)
Rear View (Shown with Rear Covers Removed for Illustration Purposes)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-10
February 2015
Sheet 06 010
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Protection and Metering

Type MEF switchgear with VCP-T/
VCP-TL circuit breakers can be supplied with integral breaker mounted
protective relays for overload and
short-circuit protection and metering.
The integral relays are self-powered
from specially designed and tested
current sensors. MEF switchgear can
be supplied with external relays and
meters connected to current transformers and powered from an external
auxiliary power.
Integral Protection and Metering
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breakers

can be equipped with Eatons Type
Digitrip 520MCV or Digitrip 1150V
protection relays
The Digitrip 520MCV is used for
basic overcurrent protection
The Digitrip 520MCV relay includes
an Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System (ARMS) feature that may
be activated at the breaker or from
remote. When activated, the ARMS
feature lowers the available arc flash
energy at the connected downstream device by faster clearing of
the downstream fault
The Digitrip 1150V is used for
advanced current and voltage
protections, and metering and
communication functions. ARMS
feature is included on 1150V relay
as standard
The 520MCV and 1150V relays are
designed and tested to work with
Eatons Type V current sensors only
The power required to operate the

protective relays basic overcurrent
protection functions is provided by
secondary output from the current
sensors once the three-phase primary
current through the circuit breaker
exceeds approximately 10 to 12%
of the current sensor rating or singlephase primary current exceeds
approximately 30% of the current
sensor rating.
The relay continuously analyzes
secondary current signals from the
current sensors and when preset current levels and time delay settings are
exceeded, sends and a trip signal to
the trip actuator of the circuit breaker.
The trip actuator causes tripping of
the circuit breaker by providing the
required mechanical force for tripping.
The trip actuator is automatically reset
each time the circuit breaker opens.
Rating Plug
A rating plug matched to phase current
sensor rating is installed on all integral
protective relays. The rating plug and
phase current sensors define maximum continuous current rating (In) of
the circuit breaker. The rating plug and
phase current sensors also determine
the maximum instantaneous setting.
If the rating plug is removed from
the protective relay, the circuit breaker
will trip if it is carrying current. See
Page 6.0-25 for available phase
current sensors and rating plugs.
The current sensors, protective relay

and circuit breaker are fully tested
as a system for time-overcurrent
response over the entire current
range up to the interrupting rating
of the circuit breaker.
An optional Overcurrent Trip Switch
(OTS) with one latching type Form C
contact can be provided to indicate
tripping of the circuit breaker by the
action of an integral protective relay.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-11
Sheet 06 011
General Description
Digitrip 520MCV
Integral Protective Relay
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 6.0-1. VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breaker Digitrip Model 520MCV
Digitrip Model 520MCV
The Digitrip 520MCV integral

protective relay is used when basic
three-phase (50/51) and ground
(50/51N or 50/51G) overcurrent protection is required. It does not contain
provisions for communication. The
relay is a microprocessor-based device
that operates from secondary output
of current sensors and provides true
rms sensing of each phase and
ground, and is suitable for application
at either 50 or 60 Hz systems. The
sensing current for ground protection
can be derived from residual connections of the phase sensors or from an
optional Type-V zero sequence current
sensor. The relay does not require
external control power for its protection functions and can be applied with
Manually or Electrically Operated
circuit breakers.
The 520MCV relay provides a number
of time-overcurrent response curves
and settings for phase, as well as
ground protection and coordination
with upstream or downstream devices.
It can also be zone interlocked with
other upstream or downstream relays
for faster selective tripping.
The 520MCV includes an Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS)
feature when enabled, it reduces arc
flash incident energy during equipment maintenance.
Table 6.0-1. Digitrip 520MCV Protection and Coordination

IEEE
Device
Number
Available Settings (50 or 60 Hz)
Phase Long Delay

51
Pickup setting (Ir) 1

Time delay, I2t
Thermal memory
(0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0) times In

(2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 seconds) at 6 times Ir
Enable/disable
50T
Pickup setting 2
Time delay, FLAT 3
Time delay, I2t 4
9
10
Phase Short Delay

(1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10) times Ir, M1
0.1,0.3,0.4, st1, st2 seconds
(0.1, 0.3, 0.5 seconds) at 8 times Ir
11
Phase Instantaneous
50
Pickup setting 2
(2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10) times In, M1, OFF
Pickup setting 5
Time delay, FLAT
Time delay, I2t 6
(0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75) times In, OFF
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 second
(0.1, 0.3, 0.5) at 0.625 times In
13
Enable/disable
14
Ground Fault
51/50G
12
Phase short delay and ground fault
ARMS Mode Settings

Settings
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
1
2
4
5
6
CA08104001E
Protection
Function
Pickup
2.5 x rating plug amperes
In = Current Sensor/Rating Plug rating in amperes.

M1 = Maximum Setting based on In
= (12 x In) for In = 1600 and 2000 A;
= (14 x In) for all other values of In
st1 and st2 settings are based on In
In
st1
st2
100 A
0.5 sec
0.5 sec
200400 A
0.5 sec
1.0 sec
6002000 A
1.0 sec
2.0 sec
I2t response is applicable to currents less than (8 x Ir).
For currents greater than (8 x Ir), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
When using phase residual connection scheme, In is current sensor/rating plug rating in ampere.
When using zero sequence connection scheme, In is zero sequence current sensor rating in ampere.
I2t response is applicable to currents less than (0.625 x In).
For currents greater than (0.625 x In), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
6.0-12
February 2015
Sheet 06 012
General Description
Digitrip 1150V Integral Protective Relay
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 6.0-2. VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breaker Digitrip Model 1150V

The Digitrip 1150V integral protective
relay is used for advanced current and
voltage protection, and metering and
communication.
The Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System (ARMS) feature is included on
1150V units as standard. When enabled,
it reduces arc flash incident energy
during equipment maintenance.
The relay is a microprocessor-based
device that operates from secondary
output of current sensors and external
voltage transformers, provides true
rms sensing of each phase and
ground, and is suitable for application
at either 50 or 60 Hz systems. The
sensing current for ground protection
can be derived from residual connections of the phase sensors or from
an optional Type-V zero sequence
current sensor.
The basic overcurrent protection functions of this relay are self-powered
from the current flowing in the secondary of the current sensors. It does
require external auxiliary power for its
voltage and frequency related protection and alarm functions, and metering
displays. The relay can be applied
with manually or electrically operated
circuit breakers.
The 1150V relay provides following

ANSI/IEEE protection functions:
51/50, 51/50N or 51/50G, 37, 46, 27,
59, 81U, 81O, 47 and 32.
The 1150V relay provides a number
of time-overcurrent response curves
and settings for phase, as well as
ground protection and coordination
with upstream or downstream devices.
It can also be zone interlocked with
other upstream or downstream relays
for faster and selective tripping.
In addition to display of metering
values as noted in Figure 6.0-2
above, the relay provides data through
its front panel display to help plan
inspection and maintenance schedules
of the circuit breaker and the circuit
it is protecting. Those data include:
Total number of Close Operations by

circuit breaker since last reset
The last time the circuit breaker
was operated (Opened or Closed
or Tripped) with time and date
Total number of instantaneous and
short delay trip operations by the
circuit breaker since last reset
Total number of overloads (long
delay trips) and ground fault trips
since last reset
The 1150V relay is also suitable for

communication using the INCOM
communications system. All monitored values, trip/alarm events, and
captured waveforms can be displayed
on a remote computer. Breakers can also
be opened/closed remotely with password protection. Peripheral translator/
gateway devices are available to convert
INCOM to other protocols, such as
Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, etc.
The relay has a built-in 24-character
alphanumeric LED display to allow
programming and viewing of settings,
menus, trip and alarm logs, and real time
metering data. Because the relay is
installed on the circuit breaker, the
breaker compartment door must be
opened for viewing or programming
of the relay functions. An optional
Breaker Interface Module can be used
for monitoring, viewing and programming of multiple relays from an alternate location, eliminating the need to
open circuit breaker compartment door.
Also available is wireless transceiver for
short-range infrared wireless communication between a hand-held Palm
personal data assistant (PDA) and the
Digitrip 1150V relays with compartment
doors closed.
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-13
Sheet 06 013
General Description
Table 6.0-2. Digitrip 1150V Protection and Coordination
IEEE
Protection
Device
Function
Number
Available Settings
(50 or 60 Hz)
Phase Long Delay

51
Pickup setting (Ir)

Time delay, I2t
Time delay, I4t
IEEE moderately inverse
IEEE very inverse
IEEE extremely inverse
Thermal memory
(0.41.0, in steps of 0.05) times In

(224 seconds, in steps of 0.5) at 6 times Ir
(15 seconds, in steps of 0.5) at 6 times Ir
Time dials of 0.15.0, in steps of 0.1
Enable/disable 2
Phase Short Delay

50T
Pickup setting
Time delay, FLAT
Time delay, I2t
(1.512 or 1.514, in steps of 0.5) times Ir 3

0.12 seconds, in steps of 0.05 4
(0.12 seconds, in steps of 0.05) at 8 times Ir 456
Phase Instantaneous
50
Pickup setting
(212 or 214) times In, OFF 3
Ground Fault
51/50G
Pickup setting
Time delay, FLAT
Time delay, I2t
Thermal memory
Phase short delay and ground fault
Pickup
Time delay
The 1150V unit provides the following

pick-up settings:
ii

Current Unbalance
46
Pickup
Time delay
525% current unbalance, OFF

0240 seconds
27
Pickup
Time delay
45110% of phase-to-phase voltage, OFF

1250 seconds
Overvoltage
59
Pickup
Time delay
Pickup50 Hz system
Pickup60 Hz system
Time delay
4852 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF

0.25 seconds, in steps of 0.02
Overfrequency
81O
Pickup50 Hz system
Pickup60 Hz system
Time delay

0.25 seconds, in steps of 0.02
Voltage Unbalance
47
Pickup
Time delay
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pickup
Time delay
550% voltage unbalance, OFF

1250 seconds

currents in rms amperes, real time
currents in rms amperes,
5-minute average
currents, maximum and minimum
since last reset
Line-to-line voltages
Forward/reverse kW, kW demand
and maximum kW demand
kVA, kVA demand and maximum
kVA demand
Watt and VA demand, maximum W
and VA demand
Forward/reverse kWh
kVAh
kVAh and kWh pulse initiate
Total harmonic distortion for
each phase current
Individual harmonic currents
up through 27th harmonic for
each phase
Power factor, minimum and
maximum
Frequency
Circuit breaker operations count
Programmable alarms
Programmable output contacts
(breaker close, alarm, trip)
Metering Accuracy
165000 kW
1250 seconds
In = Current Sensor/Rating Plug rating in amperes.

Thermal memory feature is available when using I2t or I4t curves only.
Maximum Setting is based on In:
= (12 x In) for In = 1600 and 2000 A;
= (14 x In) for all other values of In
Upper limit of this setting is 0.5 for 100 A sensor/rating plug, 1.0 for 200 to 400 A sensor/rating
plug, and 2.0 for sensors/rating plugs rated above 600 A.
I2t response is applicable to currents less than (8 x Ir).
For currents greater than (8 x Ir), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
I2t response curve for phase short delay is only available when phase long delay response selected
is I2t.
When using phase residual connection scheme, In is current sensor/rating plug rating in amperes.
When using zero sequence connection scheme, In is zero sequence current sensor rating in amperes.
I2t response is applicable to currents less than (0.625 x In). For currents greater than (0.625 x In),
the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
CA08104001E
Reverse Power
32
80135% of phase-to-phase voltage, OFF

1250 seconds
Underfrequency
81U
Undervoltage
2
3
Enable/disable
75% current unbalance, OFF
130 seconds
Metering, Power Quality and

Other Features
Phase Loss (Current Based)

37
(0.241.0, in steps of 0.01) times In, OFF 7

0.10.5 seconds, in steps of 0.05.
(0.10.5 seconds, in steps of 0.05) at 0.625 times In 8
Yes
ARMS Mode Available Trip

Current Settings
1% of full-scale (In) for currents in

the range of 5100% of (In)
3% of full-scale for voltages
(full scale is equal to phase-to-phase
voltage)
4% of full-scale for power and
energy readings
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
6.0-14
February 2015
Sheet 06 014
General Description
Breaker Interface Module II
ii
Type MEF switchgear with VCP-T circuit

breakers can be supplied with external
relays, such as Eatons EDR-3000,
EDR-5000 and EMR-3000, and meters
such as Eatons Power Xpert Meter
family. The external relays and meters
are typically installed on the circuit
breaker or control compartment doors
and connected into the secondary
circuits of conventional CTs and VTs.
External control power may be required
for correct operation of the external
relays depending on the type of
relays used.
1
2
3
4
Eatons EDR-3000 is a microprocessorbased multifunction overcurrent

protection relay designed to provide
the following ANSI protection functions:
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
External Protection
and Metering
The Breaker Interface Module is

a microprocessor-based operator interface that can be locally mounted on
one of the switchgear compartment
doors or remote from the switchgear.
It is used for access, monitoring, display of parameters, and programming
of multiple Digitrip 1150V relays.
It communicates to the relays over
a subnetwork, with up to 50 relays.
The Breaker Interface Module can
also communicate using the INCOM
communications system via an
appropriate PONI (product operated
network interface) module. Peripheral
translator/gateway devices are available to convert INCOM to other protocols, such as Modbus RTU, Modbus
TCP, and so forth.
51/50, 51N/50N or 51G/50G.
The EDR-5000 can be zone interlocked

for faster selective tripping. It can also
be used for automatic open or closed
transition transfer of three breaker
main-tie-main systems. Refer to Tab 4
for more details of the EDR-5000.
Eatons EMR-3000 is a microprocessorbased motor protection relay designed
to provide the following ANSI protection functions:
49, 50, 51, 46, 50G, 51G, 37, 38, 66,
2/19, 74, 86.
Refer to Tab 4 for more details of the
EDR-3000.
Eatons Power Xpert and IQ include
microprocessor-based metering
and communication devices that
can be provided in MEF for use with
conventional CTs and VTs. Refer to
Tab 3 for further information on
these devices.
EDR-3000 relays can be zone interlocked for faster selective tripping.

Refer to Tab 4 for more details of
EDR-3000.
Eatons EDR-5000 is a microprocessorbased multifunction protection and
metering unit designed to provide the
following ANSI protection functions:
51/50, 51N/50N, 51G/50G, 50BF,
25, 32, 46, 67, 27, 59, 47, 78V, 81-O,
81-U, 86.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-15
Sheet 06 015
Partial Discharge
for Switchgear
RFCT Sensor
InsulGard Relay
(PD Monitoring)

Partial discharge is a common name for
various forms of electrical discharges
such as corona, surface tracking and
discharges internal to the insulation.
It partially bridges the insulation
between the conductors. These
discharges are essentially small arcs
occurring in or on the surface of the
insulation system when voltage stress
exceeds a critical value. With time,
airborne particles, contaminants and
humidity lead to conditions that result
in partial discharges. Partial discharges
start at a low level and increase as
more insulation becomes deteriorated.
Examples of partial discharge in
switchgear are surface tracking across
bus insulation, or discharges in the air
gap between the bus and a support,
such as where a bus passes through
an insulating window between the
sections of the switchgear. If partial
discharge process is not detected
and corrected, it can develop into a
full-scale insulation failure followed by
an electrical fault. Most switchgear
flashover and bus failures are a result
of insulation degradation caused by
various forms of partial discharges.

Eatons Type MEF metal-enclosed
switchgear (2.415 kV) is corona-free
by design. By making switchgear
assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made
its standard switchgear more reliable.
However, as indicated above, with
time, airborne particles, contaminants
and humidity lead to conditions that
cause partial discharges to develop in
switchgear operating at voltages 4000V
and above. Type MEF switchgear can
be equipped with factory-installed
partial discharge sensors and partial
discharge sensing relay for continuous
monitoring of the partial discharges
under normal operation. Timely detection of insulation degradation through
increasing partial discharges can identify potential problems so that corrective actions can be planned and
deterioration develops. Partial discharge detection can be the foundation
of an effective predictive maintenance
failures, that can be corrected before
consists of Eatons InsulGard relay
work with the relay.
Partial discharges within the MEF
switchgear compartment are detected
by the installation of a small donut
type radio frequency current transformer (RFCT) sensor over floating
stress shields of the specially designed
CT/sensor primary bushings. Partial
discharges in the customers power
cables (external discharges) are
detected by the installation of the
RFCT around ground shields of the

incoming or outgoing power cables
termination.
Output signals from sensors (RFCTs)
are wired out to terminal blocks for
future or field use, or connected to the
InsulGard relay. One InsulGard relay
can monitor up to 15 output signals,
including temperature and humidity.
The temperature and humidity sensors
are included with each InsulGard relay
system.
The relay continuously monitors the
switchgear primary system for partial
discharges and provides an alarm signal (contact closure) when high PD
level is detected. Data analysis and
diagnostics by Eaton engineers can
also be provided by remote communication with the InsulGard relay.
The sensors and InsulGard relay are
optional in MEF switchgear.
In 5/15 kV MEF switchgear (refer to
Figure 6.0-4), primary epoxy bushings with stress shield and RFCT sensors for measurement of internal, as
well as external partial discharges are
all optional. InsulGard relay is also
optional. When specified, one set of
CT/sensor primary bushings (located
on the line side) with stress shield and
associated RFCT sensor is provided in
every incoming and outgoing primary
circuit. An additional RFCT sensor for
each incoming and outgoing power
cable circuits can be provided as
required. The RFCT output signals
can be connected directly to InsulGard
relay for continuous monitoring of
partial discharges or can be used for
periodic field measurements. One
InsulGard relay can monitor up to
15 output signals.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Temp Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Input
Terminal
Block
InsulGard
Relay
Optional
Modem
16
17
18

RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc..)
120 Vac
Auxiliary
Power
Output
Alarm
Status
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-16
February 2015
Sheet 06 016
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear compartment.

RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft from switchgear.
10
11
Figure 6.0-4. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Use one set of CT/sensor bushings for all incoming and outgoing primary circuits.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
6.0-17
Sheet 06 017
General Description
Communication Systems

provide hardware and software
solutions that allow customers to
interface with their switchgear at varying levels of sophistication. Power
Xpert and IQ Meters monitor common
electrical parameters and communicate
the data via standard industry protocols
and optional Web interfaces. Power
Xpert Gateways consolidate devices
into a single Web browser interface and
management of the customers power
system. Refer to Tab 2 for more information on communication systems.
Breaker Lifting Device
Levering Crank
Used for moving the breaker
between the disconnected/test
and connected position.
Breaker Extension Pan

Used for installing/removing the
breaker to/from its compartment.
Breaker Lifting Yoke

Used with the breaker for installation/
removal of the breaker onto/from the
breaker extension pan using optional
breaker lifter or other overhead
lifting means.
Test Jumper
Allows connection of breaker
secondary controls disconnect to cell
disconnect when the breaker is outside
its compartment.
Used for installing/removing

the breaker onto/from the Breaker
Extension Pan.
Manual Ground and Test Device

The ground and test device is a
drawout element that may be inserted
into a breaker compartment in place
of a circuit breaker to provide access
to the primary circuits to permit the
temporary connections of grounds
or testing equipment to the high
voltage circuits.
The device includes six terminals for
connections to primary circuits. Selection of upper or lower terminals for
grounding is accomplished manually
by cable connections before the device
is inserted into the desired breaker
compartment. The circuit selected for
grounding using this device must be
checked by some other means, prior
to insertion of the device into the compartment, to be sure it is de-energized.
High potential testing of cable or
phase checking of circuits are typical
tests that may be performed. The
device is insulated to suit voltage
rating of the switchgear and will
carry required levels of short-circuit
current, but it is not rated for any
current interruption.
Before using a ground and test device,
it is recommended that each user
develop detailed operating procedure
consistent with safe operating practices. Only qualified personnel should
be authorized to use the ground and
test device.
Dummy Element
Dummy element is a drawout element
with primary disconnects similar to
a drawout circuit breaker, but consists
of solid copper conductors in place of
vacuum interrupters, and is designed
for manual racking. It is typically used
as drawout disconnect link in the
primary system for circuit isolation
or bypass. The device is insulated
to suit the voltage rating of the switchgear and will carry required levels
of short-circuit current, but it is not
rated for any current interruption.
It must be key interlocked with all
source devices such that it can only
be inserted into or removed from
its connected position only after the
primary circuit that it is to be applied
is completely de-energized.
Before using a dummy element,
it is recommended that each user
develop detailed operating procedure
consistent with safe operating
practices. Only qualified personnel
should be authorized to use the
dummy element.
Functional Test Kit (for Testing of

Digitrip 520V and 1150V Relays)
Functional Test Kit is a hand-held
battery powered tester capable of
testing trip elements of 520V and
1150V protective relays. The test kit
allows testing of: Relay Power Up,
Instantaneous Trip, Short Delay Trip,
Long Delay Pickup and Trip, and
Ground Fault Trip, when applicable.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
VT/CPT Drawer Extension Rails
14
Allows withdrawal of VT/CPT auxiliary

drawer for inspection and access to
primary fuses and VT/CPT.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-18
February 2015
Sheet 06 018
Application
i
ii
MEF Switchgear with

Automatic Transfer Control
(ATC)
Application
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Eatons MEF switchgear with an

automatic transfer control system
is an integrated assembly of drawout
VCP-T/VCP-TL breakers, sensing
devices and control components
available in 5 through 15 kV classes.
ATC Controller
Eatons ATC-900 controller is equipped
to display history information either
via the front panel or over the PowerNet power monitoring system. ATC900 controller stores 320 time stamped
events. Oscillographic data for last 10
events can be downloaded via USB
port or displayed in the controllers
display window. Controller allows
communications via RS-232 or
Modbus through RS-458 port,
Ethernet or via USB interface.
Automatic transfer control is typically

applied where the continuity of service
for critical loads from two power
sources in either a two-breaker
(one load) or three-breaker (two
loads) configuration is desired.
MEF switchgear with an automatic
transfer control system can meet most
automatic throwover requirements as
it has a wide variety of operational
sequences embodied in one standard
automatic transfer control system.
ATC Controller
Standard Features
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Eatons ATC controller continuously

monitors all three phases on both
sources for correct voltages. Should
the voltage of the normal source be
lost while the voltage of the alternate
source remains normal, the voltage
sensing function in the ATC controller
will change state starting the time
delay function. If the voltage of the
normal source is not restored by the
end of the time delay interval, the
normal breaker will open and the
alternate source breaker will close,
restoring power to the load.
Typical Three-Breaker
(Two Mains and Normally Open Tie)
8
9
Typical Two-Breaker Automatic Transfer

Control Using ATC Controller
Voltage sensing on both sources is

provided by the ATC controller
Lights to indicate status of switches,
sources, and so on
Interlocking to prevent paralleling of
sources via software
Control power for the automatic
transfer control system is derived
from the sensing voltage transformers
Manual override operation
Selectable closed with sync check or
open transition on return to normal
Programmable time delays on both
sources, OFF DELAY and ON DELAY
Four programmable digital inputs
and outputs
Single-source responsibility; all
basic components are manufactured by Eaton
Optional Features
Lockout on phase and/or ground

overcurrents and/or internal bus faults
Load current, power and PF metering
with optional DCT module
24 Vdc control power input
Up to four additional I/O modules,
each with four programmable digital
inputs and digital outputs
The automatic transfer switchgear

assembly includes two main breakers
and one tie breaker, and an integrated
containing sensing devices, low
voltage logic control and auxiliary
equipment. The transfer control
system monitors both sources for
correct voltages. An automatic-manual
transfer selector switch is provided
for selection of manual or automatic
operating mode. In manual mode,
all three breakers can be manually
operated. Interlocking is provided in
manual mode of operation to prevent
closing all three breakers at the same
time. In the automatic mode, the basic
sequence of operation based upon two
normally energized sources is carried
out as follows. Normal operation is
with the main breakers closed and
the tie breaker open. Upon detection
of an undervoltage(s) to the line side
of a main breaker, and after a fieldadjustable time delay, that main
breaker opens and after an additional
field-adjustable time delay, the tie
breaker closes to restore power to the
affected portion of the facility. Upon
restoration of voltage to the line side
of the main breaker, and after a fieldadjustable time delay, the tie breaker
opens and after a field-adjustable time
delay, the opened main breaker closes.
An interlocking is provided to prevent
closing all three breakers simultaneously in manual mode.
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-19
Sheet 06 019
Technical DataSwitchgear Assembly and Circuit Breakers
Technical Data
Table 6.0-3. MEF Switchgear Assembly Rated Per ANSI Standards

Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Insulation Level
Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage,
60 Hz, 1 Minute
kV rms
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
15
15
15
15
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage (BIL)
Rated
Main Bus
Continuous
Current
Rated Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(2-Second)
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(10 Cycle)
2.6 * I
ii
1.55 * I
(for Reference Only)
kV rms
kV Peak
Amperes
kA rms Symmetrical kA Crest
kA rms Asymmetrical
19
19
19
19
60
60
60
60
1200
2000
1200
2000
25
25
40
40
65
65
104
104
39
39
62
62
36
36
36
36
95
95
95
95
1200
2000
1200
2000
25
25
40
40
65
65
104
104
39
39
62
62
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
(BIL)
1.2 x 50
microsec
kV rms
kV Peak
Amperes
V
kV
rms
Rated
Short-Circuit
Current
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage
kA rms
Symmetrical
Maximum
Symmetrical
Interrupting
& 2-Second
Short-Time
Current
Carrying
Capability
K*I
2.6 * K * I
kA rms
Symmetrical
kA Crest
50VCP-T16
50VCP-T16
50VCP-T20
4.76 19
4.76 19
4.76 19
60
60
60
600
16
1200, 2000
16
600, 1200, 2000 20
1
1
1
16
16
20
50VCP-T25
50VCP-T32
50VCP-T40
4.76 19
4.76 19
4.76 19
60
60
60
600, 1200, 2000 25

600, 1200, 2000 31.5
600, 1200, 2000 40
1
1
1
25
31.5
40
150VCP-T16
150VCP-T20
150VCP-T25
15
15
15
36
36
36
95
95
95
600, 1200, 2000 16

600, 1200, 2000 20
600, 1200, 2000 25
1
1
1
16
20
25
150VCP-T32
150VCP-T40
15
15
36
36
95
95
600, 1200, 2000 31.5

600, 1200, 2000 40
1
1
31.5
40
1
2
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
Single Bank
Back-to-Back
25A
250 and 1000 A
250 A with Inrush Current 4 kApk at 5.9 kHz and

1000 A with Inrush Current 15 kApk at 25 kHz
1.732 * V * I
MVA
25
25
25
130
130
165
20,000
10,000
10,000
65
82
104
25
25
25
210
260
330
10,000
10,000
10,000
42
52
65
25
25
25
420
520
650
10,000
10,000
10,000
82
104
25
25
830
1040
10,000
10,000
Table 6.0-5. Type VCP-TC Circuit Breakers (Tested for Capacitor Switching) 3
Type VCP-TC circuit breakers have same ratings as type VCP-T circuit breakers,
plus capacitor switching capabilities as follows:
Grounded Capacitor Banks
Amperes
Three-Phase
MVA
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage (for
Reference
Only)
42
42
52
Rated interrupting time for all VCP-T circuit breakers is 3 Cycle (50 ms).
Operating duty for all VCP-T circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
Cable
Charging
Cable
Charging
Breaking
Current
Mechanical Endurance
No Load C-O Operations
Rated
Continuous
Current
Rated Voltage
Range Factor
Rated Maximum
Voltage
Insulation Level
2
3
Table 6.0-4. Available Type VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Per ANSI Standards (C37.04, C37.09) 12
Circuit
Breaker
Type 12
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Type 50 VCP-T32C, 50 VCP-T40C, 150 VCP-T32C and 150 VCP-T40C circuit breakers only.
Note: Ratings of 250 and 1000 A cover capacitor bank applications from 751000 A.
Type VCP-TC breakers are considered definite purpose breakers per ANSI C37.04.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-20
February 2015
Sheet 06 020
Technical DataSwitchgear Assembly and Circuit Breakers
Technical Data
Table 6.0-6. Available Type VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Per ANSI Standards (C37.04, C37.09) 12
1
2
kV
rms
50VCP-TL16
50VCP-TL20
50VCP-TL25
150VCP-TL16
150VCP-TL20
150VCP-TL25
1
2
6
7
8
9
10
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Rated
Rated
Continuous Short-Circuit
Impulse
Current
Withstand Current
at Rated
Voltage
Maximum
(BIL)
Voltage
1.2 x 50
microsec
kV rms
kV Peak
Amperes
kA rms
Symmetrical
60
60
60
600, 1200
600, 1200
600, 1200
16
20
25
1
1
1
16
20
25
42
52
65
95
95
95
600, 1200
600, 1200
600, 1200
16
20
25
1
1
1
16
20
25
42
52
65
3
4
Insulation Level
4.76 19
4.76 19
4.76 19
15
15
15
36
36
36
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Maximum
Symmetrical
Interrupting
& 2-Second
Short-Time
Current
Carrying
Capability
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
Cable
Charging
Breaking
Current
K*I
2.6 * K * I
Amperes 1.732 * V * I
kA rms
kA Crest
Symmetrical
Three-Phase
MVA
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage (for
Reference
Only)
Mechanical
Endurance
No Load C-O
Operations
MVA
Vacuum
Mechanism
Interrupter
25
25
25
130
165
210
30,000
30,000
30,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
25
25
25
420
520
650
30,000
30,000
30,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
Rated interrupting time for all VCP-TL circuit breakers is 3 Cycle (50 ms).
Operating duty for all VCP-TL circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
Table 6.0-7. Type VCP-TLC Circuit Breakers (Tested for Capacitor Switching)
Type VCP-TLC circuit breakers have same ratings as type VCP-TL circuit breakers,
plus capacitor switching capabilities as follows:
Cable
Charging

Single Bank
Back-to-Back
25 A
250 and 630 A
250 A with inrush current 15 kApk at 5 kHz and

630 A with inrush current 15 kApk at 1.5 kHz
Note: Ratings of 250 and 630 A cover capacitor bank applications from 75 to 630 A.
Note: Type VCP-TLC breakers are considered definite purpose breakers per ANSI C37.04.
Switchgear Heat Loss
11
Rated Voltage
Range Factor
Circuit
Breaker
Type 12
Rated Maximum
Voltage
ii
The heat-loss data for circuit breakers

given in Table 6.0-8 includes portion
of main bus conductors and load runbacks. Please note that the estimated
wattage given for each component is
at its full rating. For example, the chart
shows 600 W for 1200 A breaker. It
simply means an estimated 600 W
loss in breaker in a 1200 A, 5/15 kV
compartment when the circuit breaker
is carrying full 1200 A. The actual loss,
of course, will depend on the actual
current being carried by the breaker.
If the full load current of the load
connected to that 1200 A breaker, for
example, is only 200 A, the heat-loss in
that compartment will be much less.
By simple I x I x R calculations,
one can easily calculate actual loss
at 200 A as = 600 x (200/1200) x
(200/1200) = 16.67 W. Also, in case of
lineup consisting of many feeders,
all feeders might not be carrying or
supplying loads at all times. If that is
the case, then one can further reduce
total watt loss for the lineup by applying a utilization factor.
Table 6.0-8. MEF Equipment Losses

Equipment
Watts Loss

600 A breaker
1200 A breaker
2000 A breaker
400
600
1400
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-21
Sheet 06 021

Type VCP-T Circuit Breaker Operating Times
The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break)
are shown in Table 6.0-9. Figure 6.0-5 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with
applicable VCP-T circuit breaker timings.
i
ii
Table 6.0-9. Closing and Opening Times for Electrically Operated VCP-T Breakers, at Rated Control Voltage
Rated
Control Voltage
Breaker
Rating
Closing Time
Milliseconds
Opening Time
Milliseconds 1
1727
48 V, 125 V, 250 Vdc
All
2840
120 V, 240 Vac
All
2840
120 V or 240 Vac capacitor trip
All
1727
Optionalundervoltage trip release 48 V, 125 V, 250 Vdc
All
4060
For manually operated breakers with integral protective relay, refer to applicable relay time-current curves for clearing time.
Interrupting Time
3 Cycles (50 ms)
2 2.5 Cycles Based on

1/2 Cycle Tripping Delay

(S-Factor Based on This)
(S = 1.2 For All VCP-T Breakers)
Release (Tripping) Delay Time
Opening Time
Arcing Time
1/2 Cycle (8 ms) Minimum

2 Seconds Maximum
25 33 msec
(5 17 msec)
Auxiliary Relay
Operating Time
3
4
Clearing Time
Protecting Relay
Operating Time
Shunt Trip
Operating Time
8
9
Mechanism
Operating Time
10
ShortCircuit
Begins
Main
Contact
Parts
Rated Control
Voltage Energizes
Trip Coil
Last
Pole
Clears
12
Figure 6.0-5. Sequence of Events for VCP-T Circuit Breakers with Shunt Trip
2
11
13
0
Load
52-1
52-2
52-1
29
29 ms
12 ms
Opening Time
Arcing
Time
89

52 ms
52-2
Source #1
4 52-1 b Contact
ms Makes
60 ms
Transfer
Initiate
52-1
b
Transfer
Initiate
Signal
Dead Time (No Arcing)

64 ms
Standard
b Contact
Control
Supply
Trip 52-1
14
15
16
Closing Time
Source #2
Time (msec)
17
18
19
20
Close 52-2
Figure 6.0-6. Typical Transfer TimesFast Sequential TransferVCP-T Circuit Breakers

CA08104001E
21
6.0-22
February 2015
Sheet 06 022
i
ii
Type VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Operating Times

The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break)
are shown in Table 6.0-10. Figure 6.0-7 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with
applicable VCP-TL circuit breaker timings.
Table 6.0-10. Closing and Opening Times for Electrically Operated VCP-TL Breakers, at Rated Control Voltage, Typical
Rated
Control Voltage
3660 Vac, 3672 Vdc
All
60
2533
100240 Vac, 100353 Vdc
All
60
2533
Breaker
Rating
Closing Time
Milliseconds
Opening Time
Milliseconds 1
Clearing Time
Interrupting Time
3 Cycles (50 ms)
2 2.5 Cycles Based on

1/2 Cycle Tripping Delay

(S-Factor Based on This)
(S = 1.2 For All VCP-T Breakers)
6
7
8
Opening Time
Arcing Time
1/2 Cycle (8 ms) Minimum

2 Seconds Maximum
25 33 msec
(5 17 msec)
Protecting Relay
Operating Time
9
10
11
Release (Tripping) Delay Time
Auxiliary Relay
Operating Time
ShortCircuit
Begins
Shunt Trip
Operating Time
Mechanism
Operating Time
Main
Contact
Parts
Rated Control
Voltage Energizes
Trip Coil
Last
Pole
Clears
Figure 6.0-7. Sequence of Events for VCP-TL Circuit Breakers with Shunt Trip
2
12
13
14
0
Load
52-1
52-2
52-1
15
52-2
16
Source #1
17
Transfer
Initiate
20
21
52-1
b
12 ms
Arcing
Time
Time (msec)
52 ms
4 52-1 b Contact
Makes
ms
60 ms
Closing Time
Transfer
Initiate
Signal
Dead Time (No Arcing)

64 ms
Standard
b Contact
Control
Supply
19
29 ms
Opening Time
89
Source #2
18
29
Trip 52-1
Close 52-2
Figure 6.0-8. Typical Transfer TimesFast Sequential TransferVCP-TL Circuit Breakers
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-23
Sheet 06 023
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Control Power Requirements

Table 6.0-11. Shunt Trip Coil Ratings, VCP-T Breakers 1
Rated
Control
Voltage
Operational
Voltage
Range
Inrush Power
Remark
Consumption
at Rated Voltage
Volts
VA
Table 6.0-13. Undervoltage Release Coil Ratings, VCP-T Breakers 3

Rated
Operational Dropout
Inrush
Continuous Power
Control Voltage
Voltage Range Power
Consumption
Voltage Range
(3560%)
Consumption at Rated Voltage
Volts
Volts
VA
VA
ii
814
1729
3966
250
275
450
18
18
10
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
1428
2856
77121
250
250
450
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
125 Vdc
220 Vdc
250 Vdc
70140
154242
140280
450
450
450
125 Vdc 106138

220 Vdc 187242
250 Vdc 213275
4475
77132
88150
450
450
450
10
10
10
110 Vac
120 Vac
220 Vac
240 Vac
77121
104127
154242
208254
450
450
450
450
Capacitor Trip
Capacitor Trip
Capacitor Trip
Capacitor Trip
110 Vac
94121
120 Vac 102132
220 Vac 187242
240 Vac 204264
3966
4272
77132
84144
450
450
400
400
10
10
10
10
These electrical accessories are optional for VCP-T circuit breaker,

and require external control power. Please specify each of these
accessories as required for the application.
Table 6.0-12. Spring Release Coil (Closing Coil) Ratings, VCP-T Breakers 2
Rated
Control
Voltage
Operational
Voltage
Range
Inrush Power
Consumption
at Rated Voltage
Volts
VA
2026
4153
94121

Table 6.0-14. Spring Charging Motor Ratings, VCP-T Breakers 4

Rated
Control
Voltage
Operational
Voltage
Range
Running Inrush
Current Current
Power
Consumption
at Rated Voltage
Spring
Charging
Time
Volts
Ampere
Ampere
VA
Seconds
4
5
6
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
2027
3856
94121
250
250
450
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
2027
3856
94121
8
4
3
32
16
12
250
250
250
5
5
5
125 Vdc
220 Vdc
250 Vdc
100140
187242
200280
450
450
450
125 Vdc 100140

220 Vdc 187242
250 Vdc 200280
3
2
2
12
8
8
250
250
250
5
5
5
110 Vac
120 Vac
220 Vac
240 Vac
94121
104127
187242
208254
450
450
450
450
110 Vac
120 Vac
220 Vac
240 Vac
94121
104127
187242
208254
3
3
2
2
12
12
8
8
250
250
250
250
5
5
5
5


11
Table 6.0-15. VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Control Power Requirements

Rated
Control
Voltage
Electro-Magnetic Controller Internal Capacitors Charging 5

Maximum Inrush
Peak
Inrush Duration
Charging Current
Peak
Minimum Close, Carry and Interrupting

Maximum Charging Current Ratings Needed for External
Contacts
Duration
ms
Sec.
Close Contact
Trip Contact
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
0.52
14
22
3.5
3.5
3.5
1
1
1
30
30
30
11 mA at 96 Vdc
11 mA at 96 Vdc
11 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
120 Vac
240 Vac
17
22
3.5
3.5
1
1
30
30
11 mA at 96 Vdc
11 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
10
Data provided are for charging of internal capacitors from a fully discharged state. In normal operation, the capacitors recharge in about 15 seconds
after each closing operation.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-24
February 2015
Sheet 06 024
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Auxiliary and Other Switches
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Breaker Auxiliary Switch

All VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breakers are
supplied with an auxiliary switch with
5NO and 5NC contacts. On Manually
Operated breakers, all 5NO and 5NC
contacts are available for customers
use. On Electrically Operated circuit
breakers, 1NO and 1NC contacts are
used for breaker status indicating
lights (red and green lights) and
remaining 4NO and 4NC contacts are
generally available for other control
functions or customers use.
The auxiliary switch is a heavy-duty,
double-break type switch with wipe
type contacts. The switch contact
ratings and operating times are given
in Table 6.0-16 and Figure 6.0-9.
MOC Switch
The mechanism operated cell (MOC)
switch is not available in MEF switchgear. When number of NO and NC
contacts available from the Breaker
Auxiliary Switch are not sufficient
for controls or customers use, an
auxiliary relay energized by one of the
available NO or NC contacts must be
used as needed. The use of auxiliary
relay requires external control power.
TOC Switch
The optional truck operated cell
(TOC) switch operates when the
circuit breaker is levered into or out
of the operating (connected) position.
In MEF TOC option includes two micro
switches, one for connected position,
and one for test/disconnected position,
each with 1 Form C contact. If additional contacts are required, auxiliary
relay must be used. The use of auxiliary relay requires external control
power. The TOC switch contact
ratings are given in Table 6.0-17.
Table 6.0-16. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Contact Ratings

Continuous
Current in
Amperes
Control Circuit Voltage

120 Vac
240 Vac
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
10
10
Non-Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes

20
15
10
16
16

20
Signal:
15
10
16
16
Initiation of
Shunt Trip Signal
Initiation of
Close Signal
T
VCP-T
Circuit Breaker
Main Contacts
Closed
Open
Opening Time
t = 17 27 ms
Closing Time
t = 28 40 ms
Closed
t 3 ms
Breaker Auxiliary
Switch
"a" Contact
t 3 ms
"b" Breaks 6 ms
Before "a" Makes
Breaker Auxiliary
Switch
"b" Contact
Open
"a" Breaks 7 ms
Before "b" Makes
t 6 ms
to 3 ms
Closed
t +10 ms
to +4 ms
Open
Figure 6.0-9. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Operating Times, at Rated Control Voltage
Table 6.0-17. TOC Switch Contact Ratings
Continuous
Current in
Amperes
Control Circuit Voltage

120 Vac
240 Vac
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
0.5
0.2
0.05
0.03
Non-Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes

20
15
15
0.5

20
12.5
12.5
0.05
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-25
Sheet 06 025
Technical DataCurrent Sensors and Instrument Transformers
Phase Current Sensors

Eaton Type-V phase current sensors
are specifically designed and tested to
function with Eatons 520V and 1150V
integral protective relays and the Type
VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breaker.
The phase current sensors are
installed in the primary circuit,
external to the circuit breaker, over
a set of specially designed insulated
bushings. The bushings and current
sensors are tested as an assembly
for the same impulse withstand (BIL)
rating as that of the switchgear in
which they are installed.
The power required to operate the
relays basic overcurrent protection
functions is provided by secondary
output from the current sensors once
the three-phase primary current
through the circuit breaker exceeds
approximately 10 to 12% of the current
sensor rating or single-phase primary
current exceeds approximately 30%
of the current sensor rating.
The current sensors are designed to
supply sensing and operating power
to Eatons 520V and 1150V integral protective relays. They are not suitable for
use with any other relays or meters.
Primary current rating of the current
sensors defines maximum continuous
current rating (In) of the primary circuit
in which they are installed, regardless
of the circuit breaker frame rating.
For example, an 800A current sensor
installed in a primary circuit controlled
by 1200A rated circuit breaker, defines
800A as the maximum continuous
current that can be carried through
that circuit. The current sensors also
determine the maximum instantaneous
setting that can be set on the relays.
Phase Current Sensors and

Rating PlugsAvailable Ratings
100, 200, 250, 300, 400, 600,

630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600
and 2000
Zero Sequence
Current Sensors
Phase and Zero Sequence

Eaton Type-V zero sequence current

sensors are specifically designed and
tested to function with Eatons 520V
and 1150V integral protective relays
and type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breaker.
The zero sequence sensor, as its name
implies, measures zero sequence
current (vector summation of phase
currents) and provides sensitive
method for ground fault sensing.
Refer to Table 6.0-18 for available
zero sequence sensors.
Conventional current transformers

with 5A secondary are used when
using external relays. CTs used for
phase protection and metering are
installed over the specially designed
insulated bushings in the primary
circuit. Maximum of two sets of CTs,
or one set of CT and one set of current
sensor can be installed over those
insulated bushings. Ground fault
sensing, when used, can be accomplished by residual sensing of phase
currents, or by using an optional
zero sequence current transformer.
Refer to Table 6.0-19 for the available
current transformers and their
ratings and accuracies.
Table 6.0-18. Zero Sequence Current Sensors

Available Ratings
Description
Ratio
ID = 4.80 inch (121.9 mm)
50:1 1
(tap selectable),
ID = 4.80 inch (121.9 mm)
100/200:1
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
For use with 1150V relay only and with

auxiliary power to the relay.
Table 6.0-19. Phase and Zero Sequence Current TransformersAvailable Ratings

CT Ratio
Metering Accuracy Classification at 60 Hz
Relay
Class
Burden
B 0.1
Burden
B 0.2
Burden
B 0.5
Burden
B 0.9
Burden
B 1.8
50:5
100:5
200:5
1.2
0.6
0.6
2.4
0.6
0.6
1.2
0.6
2.4
1.2
4.8
2.4
C10
C20
250:5
300:5
400:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.3
1.2
0.6
0.3
1.2
1.2
0.6
C20
C20
C50
500:5
600:5
750:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C50
C100
C100
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C100
C100
12
1500:5
1600:5
2000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C100
C100 2
13
50:5 Zero sequence

100:5 Zero sequence
C10
C20
14
9
10
11
This accuracy is less than IEEE C37.20.2.
Voltage Transformers
Voltage transformers supply voltage
signal proportional to primary circuit
voltage for relaying and metering.
Refer to Table 6.0-20 for available VT
ratings and accuracies.
When two VTs are used, they are
typically connected L-L, and provide
phase-to-phase voltages, (Vab, Vbc,
Vca) for metering and relaying.
When three VTs are used, they are
connected line-to-ground, and provide
phase-to-phase (Vab, Vbc, Vca), as well
as phase-to-ground (Va, Vb, Vc) voltages
for metering and relaying.
CA08104001E
If metering or relaying application

requires phase-to-ground voltages,
use three VTs, each connected L-G.
If not, use of two VTs connected L-L
is sufficient.
For ground detection, three VTs
connected in line-to-ground/brokendelta are used.
A single VT, when used, can be
connected line-to-line (it will provide
line-to-line output, for example Vab
or Vbc, or Vca), or line-to-ground (it
will provide line-to-ground output, for
example Va or Vb or Vc). Generally,
a single VT is used to derive voltage
signal for synchronizing or Over
Voltage/Under Voltage function.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
6.0-26
February 2015
Sheet 06 026
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Control, CPT and Surge Protection
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Table 6.0-20. Voltage Transformers

Available Ratings 1
Primary
Voltage
Ratio
2400
4200
4800
20:1
35:1
40:1
120
120
120
7200
8400
12000
60:1
70:1
100:1
120
120
120
12480
13200
14400
104:1
110:1
120:1
120
120
120
Secondary
Voltage
All voltage transformers are rated for metering accuracy of 0.3% at 10 VA burden, and
rated for thermal VA of 200 at 55 degrees C.
Circuit Breaker Control

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
VCP-T Circuit Breakers

Type VCP-T circuit breakers are
available as either Manually Operated
(MO) or Electrically Operated (EO).
All circuit breakers are equipped with
spring charging handle integral to the
circuit breaker, and push-to-close and
push-to-open pushbuttons.
Manually charging the closing springs
and then pressing the push-to-close
pushbutton accomplish closing of
the MO breaker. Closing of the breaker
charges the tripping springs. Manually
pressing the push-to-open pushbutton
accomplishes tripping of the MO
breaker. If the MO breaker is equipped
with integral protective relay, the relay
provides tripping impulse via trip
actuator to open the breaker, without a
need for external control power supply.
Electrically operated breakers are
equipped with electric motor for
spring charging, spring release coil
(close coil) and shunt trip coil. All
EO breakers can be manually operated
as described above. In order to
electrically operate the EO breakers,
external control power is required.
Also, when using microprocessorbased or solid-state external relays,
external control power is required for
relay logic.
For AC control, a capacitor trip device

is used with each circuit breaker shunt
trip to ensure energy is available
for tripping during fault conditions.
When AC control power is derived
from within the switchgear, CPT
should be connected on line side of
the main breaker. For main-tie-main
lineups, CPT connected on source side
of each main with automatic transfer
control device on the secondary
should be used.
VCP-TL Circuit Breakers

All VCP-TL circuit breakers are
equipped with linear actuator
mechanism, comprising of: the linear
actuator, electro-magnetic controller
(EM controller), three closing
capacitors, and internal power supply
modules for the EM controller. An
AC or DC control supply (selected by
breaker style number) is required to
operate the linear actuator mechanism.
Internal power supply modules convert
input control voltage and supplies 96
Vdc for operation of the EM controller
and charging of capacitors. The linear
actuator mechanism is designed for
OCO duty cycle with control power
on. Initial charging of capacitors (from
fully discharged state) takes about
30 seconds. In normal operation with
control power connected, the capacitors recharge in about 15 seconds
after each closing operation. All
circuit breakers include a standard
anti-pump feature.
Once the capacitors are charged,
circuit breaker can be closed and
opened through: the use of manual
ON and OFF pushbuttons mounted
on the breaker itself, control switch
mounted on the breaker compartment
door, or any external dry contacts.
In the event that control power is lost,
the circuit breaker is capable of performing a manual or electrical OPEN
operation up to 48 hours after the loss
of control power. If the control power
loss lasts longer than 48 hours, the
circuit breaker can be opened using
the integral EMERGENCY OPEN
handle located on the front of the
circuit breaker, by grasping the handle
firmly and then pulling down.

Control power transformer is used
for auxiliary power for space heaters,
light, receptacle and control of electrically operated breakers when external
auxiliary power source is not available.
Control power transformer when used
for control of electrically operated
breakers should be connected on
source side of the main breaker so
that the control power is available
to close the main breaker. Refer to
Table 6.0-21 for available control
power transformer ratings in
MEF switchgear.
Table 6.0-21. Control Power Transformers
Available Ratings, Single-Phase, 60 Hz 2
Voltage
Secondary
kVA
Rating
BIL
kV
2400 V
4000 V
4160 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
5
5
5
60
60
60
4800 V
6900 V
7200 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
5
5
5
95
95
95
8320 V
8400 V
11500 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
5
5
5
95
95
95
12000 V
12470 V
13200 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
5
5
5
95
95
95
13800 V
14400 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
5
5
95
95
Primary
Line-to-Line connection only available.
Surge Protection
Surge arresters and or surge capacitors
can be provided in MEF switchgear.
Refer to Tab 5 for surge protection
guidelines and recommended ratings.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
6.0-27
Sheet 06 027
Technical Data
Typical Three-Line Diagrams, Integral Protection
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 6.0-10. Typical MEF Switchgear with Digitrip 520MCV Integral Protective Relay
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 6.0-11. Typical MEF Switchgear with Digitrip 1150V Integral Protective Relay
CA08104001E
21
6.0-28
February 2015
Sheet 06 028
Technical Data
Typical Three-Line Diagrams, External Protection
ii
1
MV Supply
Ph 1
VCP-T/VCP-TL
Drawout Breaker
Note:
External Control Power
Required for Breaker
Control and EDR-3000.
2
CS
Auxiliary
Power (AC, DC)
4
5
EDR-3000
Phase and
Ground
Overcurrent
(1) Three-Phase
Current
Transformer
6
7
8
Ground Fault Sensing

via Phase Residual,
or Zero Sequence
(1) BYZ
Zero Seq. CT
(optional)
Load
Figure 6.0-12. Typical MEF Switchgear with EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
10
MV Supply
11
Ph 1
12
13
VTs
(3-LG or 2-LL)
VCP-T/VCP-TL
Drawout Breaker
Note:
External Control Power
Required for Breaker
Control and EDR-5000.
CS = Control Switch
3P-3A
14
CS
15
16
Auxiliary
Power (AC, DC)
EDR-5000
Multi-Function
Protection and
Metering
(1) Three-Phase
Current
Transformer
17
18
19
20
Ground Fault Sensing

via Phase Residual,
or Zero Sequence
(1) BYZ
Zero Seq. CT
(optional)
Load
Figure 6.0-13. Typical MEF Switchgear with EDR-5000 Multi-Function Protective Relay
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-29
Sheet 06 029
Technical Data
Electrically Operated BreakersControl Schemes

Ph
1P15A
ii
BREAKER
120 Vac
Control Supply
RES
RES
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
(Optional)
Control
Switch
Trip
Control G
Switch
Close
Protective
Relay
1
2
Capacitor
Trip
ac
(+)
A16
B12
A23
Close
Circuit
(Spring
Release Coil)
Motor
Circuit
A25
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
COM
Spare
RES
B15
Spare
COM
B10
A27
A29
B19
B21
B23
B25
B27
B29
52
a
A28
A30
B20
B22
B24
B26
B28
B30
Trip
Coil
LOC
OCA
ATION
5
6
7
B14
B13
A24
A26
B11
LOC
TRSS
TRCS_
TRMVTU
OCA
ATION
LOC
TRMVTU
TRCS_
TRSS
OCA
ATION
LOC
CGL
OCA
ATION
LOC
CRL
OCA
ATION
LOC
TRMVTU
TRCS_
TRSS
OCA
ATION
Figure 6.0-14. Typical AC Control CircuitVCP-T Breaker
9
10
2P15A
BREAKER
(+)
RES
RES
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
(Optional)
Control
Switch
Trip
Control G
Switch
Close
12
DC Control Supply
13
W
A16
B12
A23
Close
Circuit
(Spring
Release Coil)
B14
A25
B13
A24
CGL
LOCATION
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
A27
A29
B19
B21
B23
B25
B27
B29
52
a
A28
A30
B20
B22
B24
B26
B28
B30
Trip
Coil
LOCATION
15
16
17
A26
CRL
LOCATION
Spare
B10
B11
LOCATION
TRSS
TRCS_
TRMVTU
TRMVTU
TRCS_
TRSS
LOCATION
Spare
Spare
Spare
14
RES
B15
Motor
Circuit
N
(-)
11
Protective
Relay
TRMVTU
TRCS_
TRSS
LOCATION
BREAKER
Figure 6.0-15. Typical DC Control CircuitVCP-T Breaker
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-30
February 2015
Sheet 06 030
Technical Data
(+) or Ph
2
3
4
5
6
7
Control Voltage
AC or DC (selected by breaker part number)
2P15A (DC Control)

1P15A (AC Control)
Res
ii
Electrically Operated BreakersControl Schemes
Res
CS
C
Remote
Close
CS
T
Relay
Trip
Remote
Trip
System
Healthy
Alarm Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare
(+)
A27
A29
B15
52
b
52
a
Power
Supply
A28
A30
B14
B12
B13
B10
Local Bkr
Open PB
B11
A25
Local Bkr
Close PB
VCP-TL Breaker
A26
B19
B21
B23
B25
B27
B29
52
b
52
a
52
b
52
a
52
b
52
a
B20
B22
B24
B26
B28
B30
8
(-) or N
Figure 6.0-16. Type VCP-TL Circuit BreakerTypical Control Circuit
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
6.0-31
Sheet 06 031
Layouts and Dimensions
MEF Switchgear Available Configurations

with Metering Compartment
Available MEF configurations are shown in Figure 6.017. For other configurations, contact Eaton
If utility metering compartment is required, use MVS
or VCP-W (rear-access) switchgear
Shipping group maximum length = 104.00 inches
(2642.0 mm)
All units are 92.00 inches (2367.0 mm) tall, 61.50 inches
(1562.0 mm) deep
Main bus1200 or 2000 A
2000 A breakers1-high (one breaker/vertical section) only,
except as noted in Figure 6.0-17
600 and 1200 A breakers can be stacked 2-high
(breaker/breaker)
Auxiliary shown can be either VTs (two or three) or
single-phase 5 kVA CPT
CTs or current sensors cannot be placed on main-bus side
of the breaker
CTs shown can be either one or two sets; or one set of
CT and one set of current sensors
Zero sequence CT shown can be replaced with
Zero sequence current sensor
Zero sequence CT and surge arresters shown are optional
Maximum number of cables per phase is limited as shown
in Table 6.0-22
Table 6.0-22. Maximum Number of Cables per Phase

Configuration
26.00-Inch
(660.4 mm)
Wide Cell
Breaker/blank
Adjacent
19.00-Inch
(482.6 mm)
Wide Pull
Section
None
Breaker/auxiliary Yes
Breaker/breaker
Yes
Cable
Entry
Direction
Number of Power
Cables/Phase 1
When
Using
Zero
Sequence
CT 2
Without
Zero
Sequence
CT or
Sensor
Bottom
Bottom
Top
Top/top
Bottom/bottom
Top/bottom
Multiple cables per phase are based on the use of a maximum wire
size of 500 kcmil for each cable. One cable per phase is based on the
use of maximum wire size of 1000 kcmil.
When using a zero sequence sensor (for use with an integral protective
relay), the number of cables is limited to one per phase with a
maximum wire size of 750 kcmil.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Configurations

Note:
15
= No shipping split here.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-32
February 2015
Sheet 06 032

Note: Refer to Page 6.0-31 for notes.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Configurations (Continued)

Note:
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
6.0-33
Sheet 06 033
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note:
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-34
February 2015
Sheet 06 034

ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Note:
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-35
Sheet 06 035
Front and Sectional Views
i
Main Bus
Main Bus Access
ii
Control
Compartment
1
2
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
Breaker
VCP-T
3
92.00
(2337.7)
4
5
CT Bushing
Cable
Pull Box
3-PH CT
(3) Current
Sensors
3 SA
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor
26.00
(660.4)
61.50
(1561.7)
Front View
Side View
8
9
Figure 6.0-18. Typical 1-High Breaker Unit, Cables Out the Bottom
Main Bus Access
10
Main Bus
(3) Current Sensors
11
12
Control
Compartment
3-PH CT
13
6002000A
Breaker
Compartment
Pull
Section
14
Breaker
VCP-T
92.00
(2337.7)
(3) SA
15
CT
Bushing
Drawout
VTs or CPT
VTs
16
17
Drawout
VTs or CPT
CPT 1-PH
18
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor
26.00
(660.4)
Front View
19.00
(482.6)
61.50
(1561.7)
Side ViewBreaker Cell
Figure 6.0-19. Typical Breaker/Auxiliary Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out Top or Bottom
CA08104001E
61.50
(1561.7)
Side ViewPull Section
19
20
21
6.0-36
February 2015
Sheet 06 036
Front and Side Views

Main Bus Access
ii
1
Main Bus
(3) Current Sensors
Control
Compartment
3-PH CT
2
3
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
Pull
Section
Breaker
VCP-T
92.00
(2337.7)
CT
Bushing
(3) SA
5
6
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
Breaker
VCP-T
7
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor
8
9
10
26.00
(660.4)
19.00
(482.6)
Front View
61.50
(1561.7)
Side ViewBreaker/Breaker Cell
Figure 6.0-20. Typical Breaker/Breaker Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out the Bottom
11
12
61.50
(1561.7)
Main Bus Access
Main Bus
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor
(3) Current Sensors
Control
Compartment
13
14
15
3-PH CT
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
Pull
Section
Breaker
VCP-T
92.00
(2337.7)
(3) SA
16
17
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
Breaker
VCP-T
18
19
20
CT Bushing
26.00
(660.4)
Front View
21
19.00
(482.6)
61.50
(1561.7)
61.50
(1561.7)
Side ViewBreaker/Breaker Cell
Figure 6.0-21. Typical Breaker/Breaker Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out the Top
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-37
Sheet 06 037
Front and Side Views
i
Main Bus Access
Main Bus-1
Main Bus-2
Control
Compartment
ii
1
2
6002000A
Breaker
Compartment
Pull
Section
Breaker
VCP-T
3
92.00
(2337.7)
Drawout
VTs or CPT
4
5
VTs
Drawout
VTs or CPT
CPT 1-PH
7
8
26.00
(660.4)
Front View
19.00
(482.6)
61.50
(1561.7)
Side ViewTie Breaker
Figure 6.0-22. Typical Bus Tie Breaker Unit and Pull Section
61.50
(1561.7)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-38
February 2015
Sheet 06 038
Layouts and DimensionsFloor Plan Details
MEF 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Unit

3.00
(76.2)
ii
2.00
(50.8)
Rear
6
6.00 For
(152.4) Seismic
2
1
3
4
30.25
(768.4)
9.80 1
(249.2)
2.00
(50.8)
1.25
(31.8)
A
4
22.25
(565.2)
5.00
(127.0)
1.75
(44.5)
12.00
(304.8)
7.00
(177.8)
26.00
(660.4)
28.50
(723.9)
1.63
(41.4)
18.00
(457.2)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
4.00
(101.6)
5
2.50
(63.5)
8
8.50
(215.9)
9.00
(228.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
8.38
(212.9)
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
2.50
(63.5)
B
3.00
(76.2)
26.00
(660.4)
3.00
(76.2)
Load Bearing Surfaces
4
Front
10
3
11
9
60.00
(1524.0)
12
13
14
15
Figure 6.0-23. MEF 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Unit Floor Plan
1
2
3
4
16
5
6
17
7
8
18
Suggested locations for 0.50 inch bolts or welding.

Secondary control wiring conduit openings (top or bottom) conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Minimum front clearance when using portable lifter. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
Minimum clearance for door opening: door hinged on left A = 15, B = 6.
Primary cable entrance space, available only with 1-high breaker with cables from below.
Primary conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit location.
Minimum rear clearance, local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left to right, front-to-back and diagonally,
Location of station grounding lug.
Minimum clearance recommended on top of the switchgear for main bus access is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
6.0-39
Sheet 06 039
Layouts and DimensionsFloor Plan Details
MEF 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section
i
3.00
(76.2)
2.00
(50.8)
Rear
5
6
6.00 For
(152.4) Seismic
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
7.00
(177.8)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00
(152.4)
2.50
(63.5)
30.25
(768.4)
9.81
(249.2)
8
11.00
(279.4)
5.00
(127.0)
1.75
(44.5)
1.25
(31.8)
22.25
(565.2)
4.00
(101.6)
28.50
(723.9)
1.63
(41.4)
8.38
(212.9)
19.00
(482.6)
2
3
4
5
6
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
A
4
ii
19.00
(482.6)
3.00
(76.2)
Load Bearing Surfaces
B
4
Front
10
3
9
60.00
(1524.0)
11
12
13
Figure 6.0-24. MEF 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section Floor Plan
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Suggested locations for 0.50 inch bolts or welding.

Secondary control wiring conduit openings (top or bottom) conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Minimum front clearance when using portable lifter. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
Minimum clearance for door opening: door hinged on left A = 15, B = 6.
Minimum rear clearance, local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left to right, front-to-back and diagonally,
Location of station grounding lug.
Primary cable entrance space (top or bottom entry). Primary conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
See shop order base plan for conduit location.
Minimum clearance recommended on top of the switchgear for main bus access is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
6.0-40
February 2015
Sheet 06 040
Table 6.0-23. MEF Switchgear Units Less Circuit BreakersApproximate Weights

Type of Structure
Structure
Width
Inches (mm)
ii
Structure Weight in Lbs (kg)

25 kA Switchgear
40 kA Switchgear
Main Bus Rating
Main Bus Rating
1200 A
2000 A
1200 A
2000 A
6001200 A Breaker over cable entry

6001200 A Breaker over 6001200 A breaker, with an adjacent pull section
6001200 A Breaker over blank, with an adjacent pull section
26.00 (660.4)
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
1350 (614)
2000 (909)
1550 (706)
1500 (682)
2250 (1023)
1700 (773)
1560 (709)
2670 (1214)
1785 (811)
1710 (777)
2920 (1327)
1935 (880)
6001200 A Breaker over auxiliary, with an adjacent pull section

2000 A Breaker over blank, with an adjacent pull section
2000 A Breaker over auxiliary, with an adjacent pull section
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
2000 (909)
2150 (977)
2210 (1005)
2660 (1209)
2235 (1016)
2385 (1084)
2210 (1005)
2660 (1209)
1200 A Stand-alone breaker, cable-in/cable-out, with an adjacent pull section

2000 A Stand-alone breaker, cable-in/cable-out, with an adjacent pull section
Auxiliary over blank or blank over auxiliary
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
26.00 (660.4)
2000 (909)
1500 (682)
2150 (977)
2210 (1005)
1600 (727)
2235 (1016)
1500 (682)
2385 (1084)
2210 (1005)
1600 (727)
Auxiliary over auxiliary

Blank structure (with main bus only)
Transition section (for close coupling to MCC, liquid or dry transformer)
Blank pull section (with main bus only)
26.00 (660.4)
26.00 (660.4)
19.00 (482.6)
19.00 (482.6)
1900 (864)
1000 (455)
800 (364)
550 (250)
2000 (909)
1100 (500)
900 (409)
650 (295)
1900 (864)
1000 (455)
800 (364)
600 (273)
2000 (909)
1100 (500)
900 (409)
700 (318)
4
5
6
7
8
Table 6.0-24. VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit BreakersApproximate Weights

Circuit Breaker
Type
Continuous
Current Rating
Amperes
Static
Weight
in Lbs (kg)
50 VCP-T16, 50 VCP-T20, 50 VCP-T25

50 VCP-T32, 50 VCP-T40
150 VCP-T16, 150 VCP-T20, 150 VCP-T25
150 VCP-T32, 150 VCP-T40
1200
2000
1200
2000
250 (114)
440 (200)
250 (114)
440 (200)
50 VCP-TL16, 50 VCP-TL20, 50 VCP-TL25
600
1200
600
2200
232 (105)
234 (106)
232 (105)
234 (106)
150 VCP-TL16, 150 VCP-TL20, VCP-TL25
9
Note: Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB Medium Voltage

February 2015
Vacuum Breakers
7.0-1
MEB & MSB Medium Voltage
Vacuum Breakers
Sheet 07 001
CA08104001E
Contents
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEB & MSB Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers

Drawout-Mounted Breaker (MEB)
General Description and Seismic Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2
Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2
Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-3
Breaker Control Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-3
Switch- and Fixed-Mounted Vacuum Breaker (MSB)
Seismic Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-2
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-3
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-3
Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-4
Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-4
Circuit Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-5
Breaker Control Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-5
Vacuum Breakers
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1
Low Resistance Ground Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1
Single-Ended Substation Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1
Optional Accessories (MEB and MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-2
Surge Arresters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-2
MEB and MSB Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-3
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-4
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
MEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16347A
Section 26 13 19.11
MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16347B
Section 26 13 19.16
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
MEB
MVS
MVS
20
21
7.0-2

February 2015
Sheet 07 002
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Drawout Vacuum Breakers (MEB)
February 2015
7.1-1
Sheet 07 003
General Description
MEB Metal-Enclosed
Drawout Breaker
General Description
Eatons MEB (metal-enclosed breaker)
switchgear assembly consists of a
single-high drawout vacuum circuit
breaker (Type VCP-W) in a metalenclosed cabinet. This equipment has
been designed primarily where metalclad switchgear is not required and a
switch or switch and fuse combination
are not suitable. As primary protection
for single-ended substations, it can
eliminate the need for a secondary
main circuit breaker. It can also be
applied as the primary main device and
integrated with fused or unfused feeder
switches in an Eaton Type MVS load
interrupter switchgear assembly.
Two and three breaker automatic
transfer schemes are also available.
For drawout vacuum circuit breaker
metal-clad switchgear, Eaton Type
VacClad-W, see Tab 5.
metal-enclosed front access only,
Type MEF switchgear, see Tab 6.
A Type MEB switchgear assembly is

classified as an overcurrent protective
device that provides increased system
protection and increased coordination
with upstream and downstream
devices where these benefits cannot
be achieved with a switch and fuse
combination. Vacuum circuit breakers
provide the following features:
High interrupting capacity suitable

for use with ground fault equipment
and differential relay schemes
High duty cycle
Adjustable overcurrent protection
Expanded protective relay functions,
such as those provided in the
EDR-5000 (refer to Tab 4)
Three-phase tripping; no single
phasing on tripping
Maintainable
Long equipment life
Special applications, such as
capacitor switching, are possible
with breakers
Type MEB switchgear provides a minimal footprint using vacuum breaker

technology. All protective devices and
metering are conveniently mounted on
the switchgear structure door.
Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers
have been designed with a V-Flex
current transfer system that provides
a unique non-sliding current transfer
arrangement, no maintenance,
excellent electrical and thermal transfer,
and long vacuum interrupter life.
Both indoor and outdoor non-walk-in
enclosures are available. Uses are
single or multiple circuits, transformer
primaries and mains for MVS
applications. Configurations with
an automatic transfer control system
can be easily accommodated. Drawout
vacuum breakers are ideal for high
duty cycle, as well as applications
requiring rapid return to service
after a load fault.
Type MEB switchgear is one product

of choice for ground fault interruption
when air interrupters alone would be
potentially hazardous if called on to
operate above their assigned interrupting ratings. Capacitor switching is easily
handled by MEB, avoiding the restrike
hazard presented by air switches.
ii
Standardized designs cover most

common applications, while custom
designs are also available for unusual
requirements.
Type MEB vacuum switchgear meets

or exceeds the following industry
standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3,
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4, ANSI C37.22,
ANSI C37.57, ANSI C37.58, NEMA
SG5, NEMA SG6, CSA 22.2 No. 31-04,
EEMAC G8-3.3. It is also CSA listable
for Canada and U.S. markets.
MEB circuit breaker sections are
easily mixed with MVS fused switch
sections in lineups. No bus transitions
are required between them except
where bus runs from top to bottom
locations, such as between main and
feeder sections.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
7.1-2
February 2015
Sheet 07 004
General DescriptionTechnical Data
i
ii
1
2
3
Construction
Current and voltage transformers
associated with protection devices
such as the EDR-3000 or EDR-5000
electronic overcurrent relays are
applied using the same ratings as
drawout metal-clad switchgear.
Metering and protective relay devices
are mounted on the single front
hinged door. The front door may be
opened at any time to provide access
to low voltage components and to the
front of the circuit breaker without
being exposed to high voltage.
The IQ family of electronic meters

is normally used when metering
functions are required.
The circuit breaker is racked into or out

of position, but can easily be drawn
out and removed from the enclosure
with grounded steel shutters, preventing accidental contact with primary
voltage connections. Routine maintenance can be performed on the circuit
breaker mechanism in the enclosure.
6
7
If AC control power is used, a capacitor

trip device is provided as standard.
A Digitrip 3010 relay with dual
source power supply may be used for
over-current protection, thus eliminating the need for an uninterruptible
power source for continuous fault
current protection.
Once the circuit breaker is closed
and the closing spring is recharged,
the breaker can open, close and
open without spring recharge.
EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
8
EDR-5000 Multifunction Protective Relay
Table 7.1-1. Protective Relays 1

The VCP-W vacuum circuit breaker is
easily accessible for routine inspection
and maintenance. User-friendly, front panel
controls and indicators are functionally
grouped together for easy operation.
10
11
Eatons MEB breaker can be furnished
with an Eaton Type EDR-3000 or
EDR-5000 relay to provide overcurrent
and fault protection. Optional zero
sequence 50/51G ground fault protection
is shown below. Refer to Tab 4 for
more details.
12
13
14
15
16
17
Relay Type
Protective Relay
IEEE Functions
Metering
EDR-3000
50/51; 50/51G
Amperes
and
ampere
demand
EDR-5000
25, 27, 32, 46, 47,

50N/G, 51N/G,
50/51,50BF, 51V,
59, 67N, 67
Amps; volts;
pf, energy,
power; THD;
waveform
See Tab 4 for available relays, selection and

application details.
MEB with Complete Access to Control

Switches, Overcurrent Relays and Meters,
as well as Breakers
Standard MEB insulators are NEMA

rated glass polyester or optional
epoxy. Control power is required.
The AC control power can be supplied
integrally if specified. The DC control
power, if required, must be furnished
by others.
3-CTs
Vacuum
Breaker
52
EDR-3000 or
EDR-5000 1
50/51
50N/51N
18
1-Zero Sequence CT
19
20
Figure 7.1-1. Typical MEB Single-Section

One-Line Diagram
1
Use of EDR-5000 requires VTs.
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
7.1-3
Sheet 07 005
Technical Data
Assembly Ratings
Table 7.1-2. MEB Assembly Main Bus Ratings 1

Rated Maximum
Volts kV
Rated
BIL kV
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
Rated Main Bus

Current Amperes
Rated Momentary
Current kA rms Asymmetrical
Rated Short-TIme (2 Seconds)

Current kA Symmetrical
600
600
600
1200
1200
1200
1200
2000
2000
600
600
600
1200
1200
1200
1200
40
61
80
40
61
80
101
40
61
40
61
80
40
61
80
101
25
38
50
25
38
50
63
25
38
25
38
50
25
38
50
63
ii
1
2
3
4
The switchgear assembly is designed for use with Type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
will apply.
5
6
Table 7.1-3. Available Type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards
Circuit
Breaker
Type 2345
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Rated Voltage
Range Factor
kV rms
50 VCP-W 250
50 VCP-W 350
50 VCP-W 500
75 VCP-W 500
150 VCP-W 500
150 VCP-W 750
150 VCP-W 1000
150 VCP-W 1500
50 VCP-W 25
50 VCP-W 40
50 VCP-W 50
50 VCP-W 63
75 VCP-W 50
150 VCP-W 25
150 VCP-W 40
150 VCP-W 50
150 VCP-W 63
50 VCP-WG 50
50 VCP-WG 63
150 VCP-WG 50
150 VCP-WG 63
2
3
4
5
4.76
4.76
4.76
8.25
15
15
15
15
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
8.25
15
15
15
15
4.76
4.76
15
15
1.24
1.19
1.0
1.25
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Rated
Continuous
Current
Rated Short-Circuit
Current at Rated
Maximum Voltage

and 3-Second Short-Time Current
Carrying Capability
K*I

Capability (Momentary)
7
8
2.6 * K * I
1.6 * K * I
Amperes
kA rms Symmetrical kA rms Symmetrical
kA Crest
kA rms Asym
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
29
41
63
33
18
28
37
63
25
40
50
63
50
25
40
50
63
50
63
50
63
97
132
170
111
62
97
130
170
65
104
130
164
130
65
104
130
164
137
173
137
173
58
78
101
66
37
58
77
101
40
64
80
100.8
80
40
64
80
100.8
82
103
82
103
36
49
63
41
23
36
48
63
25
40
50
63
50
25
40
50
63
50
63
50
63
For detailed ratings of Type VCP-W circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-1A.
For detailed ratings of Type VCP-WC circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-2.
For detailed ratings of Type VCP-WG circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-3 and 5.4-4.
Please note certain Eaton breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. When these
breakers are applied in an MEB switchgear assembly, the assembly ratings as given in Table 7.1-2 will apply.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Breaker Control Ratings
17
Rated Control
Voltage
Run Amperes
Time Seconds
Close or
Trip Amperes
Voltage Range
Inrush Amperes
Spring Charge Motor
Close
Trip
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
120 Vac
240 Vac
36.0
16.0
9.2
16.0
9.2
9.0
4.0
2.0
4.0
2.0
6
6
6
6
6
16
7
4
6
3
3856
100140
200280
104127
208254
2856
70140
140180
104127
208254
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
7.1-4
February 2015
Sheet 07 006
LayoutDimensions
i
ii
1
2
Typical Arrangements5 kV and 15 kV

The sketches in this section represent
the most common arrangements.
Layouts shown are for rear-accessible
equipment. Front-accessible designs
are availablerefer to Eaton. See Tab 8
for detailed layout information on load
interrupter switchgear. Many other
configurations and combinations are
available. Two voltage transformers
(fixed or drawout) for metering or
one control transformer for AC breaker

control can be mounted in the structures shown. For control power above
1 kVA, additional space is required.
Depth of units will vary due to cable
entrance and exit requirements,
the addition of lightning arresters,
instrument transformers, special cable
terminators, and so on. Cables are
shown out top and bottom for layout
only. Top or bottom must be selected

for incoming and for outgoing cables.
Please note that rear access is required
for installation.
Cable sizing is based on two 500 kcmil
XLP or EPR insulated cables per phase
using preformed slip-on cable termination devices. For unit substation alignment details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
3
80.00
(2032.0)
4
5
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
PR
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
52
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
PR
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 1
Single Unit, Cable In and Out
PR
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
52
Outdoor
41.00 (1041.4)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
Arrangement 2
Primary for Dry-Type Transformer
7
8
70.00
(1778.0)
70.00
(1778.0)
52
20.00
36.00
(508.0)
(914.4)
Arrangement 3
Primary for Liquid-Filled Transformer
70.00
(1778.0)
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
PR
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
52
PR
PR
ATC
52
52
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
15.00
36.00
(914.4)
(381.0)
(914.4)
Arrangement 5
Two Breaker Auto TransferSingle Load
36.00
36.00
36.00
15.00
(914.4)
(914.4)
(914.4)
(381.0)
Arrangement 4
Main Device with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional)
36.00 48.00
(914.4 1219.2)
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
PR
PR
52
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
52
52
18
19
20
21
36.00
36.00
15.00
(914.4)
(381.0) (914.4)
Arrangement 6
Three Breaker Auto TransferMain-Tie-Main Feeders
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Figure 7.1-2. Layouts and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: PROvercurrent protective relay, typical functions50/51, 50/51N or 50/51G. Eaton EDR-3000 or EDR-5000.
Note: ATCAutomatic Transfer Controller.
Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
CA08104001E
February 2015
7.1-5
Sheet 07 007
LayoutDimensions
Rear Access Top or Bottom Entry and Exit
Roof for Outdoor Unit
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
95.46
(2424.7)
Outdoor
Height
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
Optional
Rear Door
1.50 (38.1)
Customer's Cable
Support (Locate at
Installation)
A&B
70.00
(1778.0)
CT
90.37
(2295.4)
Indoor
Height
2
3
VCPW
Roof Layout
Lug
36.00 (914.4)
Line or Bus
(Fixed)
16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
Optional
Rear Door
VT
1.25 (31.8)
6.60 (167.6)
8.00 (203.2)
5
6
A&B
70.00
(1778.0)
70.00
(1778.0)
7
8
Figure 7.1-3. 5 and 15 kV MEB with Main Bus, Main Breaker and
Fixed Line or Bus VTs
1
ii
1.25 (31.8)
Floor Layout
Depth shown is based on the use of (2)-500 kcmil cables per phase.
For stand-alone cable in and cable out in the same section, minimum
80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) depth is required.
36.00 (914.4)
Note: Drawout VTs are not available in MEB switchgear. Use Type
VCP-W or MEF designs.
Figure 7.1-4. 5 and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts
Table 7.1-5. Approximate Weights in Lbs (kg)
Note: A = Power cable to load, B = Power cable from source.
For cable in and cable out in same section, 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm)
depth is required.
9
10
5 or 15 kV Class
Indoor
Outdoor
11
MEB section
MVS section (non-fused)
Fuses (three) add
Transition section
1600 (726)
1500 (681)
200 (91)
300 (136)
1900 (863)
1800 (817)
200 (91)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
7.1-6
February 2015
Sheet 07 008
LayoutDimensions
a Locations for tie-down 0.65 (16.5 mm) diameter holes.
Four places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring
should be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5, (M12 x 1.75 min.
CL 10.9), and tightened to 75 ft-lbs (101.7 Nm).
i
ii
1
2
5.00
(127.0)
Typ.
1.25
(31.8)
2.95
(74.9)
3
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
4
3
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
1.25
(31.8)
4.25
(108.0)
4
18.00
(457.2)
Min.
FRONT DOOR
b Door swing equals unit width at 90.

c The standard minimum clearances on side. 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) may need to be added for passage from front
to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
Optional
Rear Door
4.25
(108.0)
5
Min.
8
9
Figure 7.1-5. Typical Anchor Plan for MEB, Indoor or Outdoor
d Clearance required for additional door swing to insert or

remove breaker, and for metering/relays on front of door.
Left hand side only. The authority having jurisdiction
may require a larger distance.
e Minimum distance in front is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm)
for breaker insertion and removal. The authority having
jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
f The standard minimum recommended distance is
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear
access for installation and maintenance. The authority
having jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
g If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is the
width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch
(25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require
a larger distance.
h Finished foundations surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-toright, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a
laser level.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Switch and Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MSB)
February 2015
7.2-1
Sheet 07 009
General Description
MSB Metal-Enclosed Switch

and Vacuum Breaker
General Description
Eatons assembly designated MSB
(metal-enclosed switch and breaker)
consists of a load interrupter switch
(Type MVS) in series with a vacuum
circuit breaker (Type VCP-TR for
515 kV) in a metal-enclosed cabinet.
This combination has been designed
primarily where a vacuum circuit
breaker is required for its higher
interrupting capacity and a switch is
required to provide a visible means
of disconnect. As primary protection
for single-ended substations, it can
eliminate the need for a secondary
main circuit breaker. It can also be
applied as the primary main device
and integrated with fused or unfused
feeder switches in a lineup of MVS
switchgear. Two and three breaker
automatic transfer schemes are
also available.
metal-enclosed switchgear, Type MEB,
see Page 7.1-1.
For drawout vacuum circuit
breaker metal-clad switchgear,
Type VacClad-W, see Tab 5.
metal-enclosed front access only,
Type MEF switchgear, see Tab 6.
With the vacuum circuit breaker,

Type MSB switchgear is classified as
an overcurrent protective device that
provides increased system protection
and increased coordination with
upstream and downstream devices
where these benefits cannot be
achieved with a switch and fuse
combination. Vacuum circuit breakers
provide the following features:
High interrupting capacity suitable

for use with ground fault equipment
and differential relay schemes
Load Break Switch providing
visible means of disconnect
without opening the door
High duty cycle
Adjustable overcurrent protection
Expanded protective relay functions,
such as those provided in the
EDR-5000 (refer to Tab 4)
Three-phase tripping; no single
phasing on tripping
Maintainable
Long equipment life
Special applications, such as
capacitor switching, are possible
with breakers
Eaton Type MSB switchgear

provides a small footprint using
vacuum breaker technology where the
breaker rating does not exceed 1200A
continuous and the interrupting ratings
shown. All protective devices and
metering are conveniently mounted
on the switchgear structure door.
The VCP-TR vacuum breaker is a fully
rated two-step stored energy circuit
breaker with an open-close-open
duty cycle. It is rated for 25 or 40 kA
interrupting ratings at all voltages
from 4.76 to 15 kV and has a front
access mechanism. Type VCP-TR
circuit breakers can be supplied with
integral trip unit for phase and ground
overcurrent protection.
The vacuum circuit breakers have
been designed with a flex current
transfer system that provides a unique
non-sliding current transfer arrangement, no maintenance, excellent
electrical and thermal transfer, and
long vacuum interrupter life.
Visible disconnect means is ensured

by the load break air interrupter switch
and viewing window. Both indoor and
outdoor non-walk-in enclosures are
available. Applications are single units,
lineups and transformer primary applications. Configurations with an automatic transfer control system
can be easily accommodated. Fixed
vacuum breakers are ideal for high
duty cycle, as well as applications
requiring rapid return to service after
a load fault.
Type MSB switchgear is the product
of choice for ground fault interruption
when air interrupters alone would be
potentially hazardous if called on to
operate above their assigned ratings.
Capacitor switching is easily handled
by MSB avoiding the restrike hazard
presented by air switches.
Standardized designs cover most
common applications while custom
designs are also available for unusual
requirements.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Type MSB vacuum switchgear

meets or exceeds the following
industry standards:
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4
ANSI C37.22
ANSI C37.57
ANSI C37.58
NEMA SG5
NEMA SG6
CSA 22.2 No. 31
EEMAC G8-3.3
CSA listable for Canada and
U.S. markets
Refer to MVS Tab 8. MVS switch

sections are easily mixed with MSB
sections in lineups. No bus transitions
are required between them except
where bus runs from top to bottom
locations, such as between main and
feeder sections.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
7.2-2
February 2015
Sheet 07 010
General Description
ii
1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5/15 kV MSB Assembly
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
7.2-3
Sheet 07 011
Construction
Eatons Type MSB switchgear uses the

same proven enclosure and air switch
mechanism as MVS switchgear. It
differs in the addition of the fixedmounted Eaton VCP-TR (515 kV)
vacuum breaker in place of fuses.
Current and voltage transformers
associated with protection devices
such as the EDR-3000 or EDR-5000
electronic protective relays are applied
using the same ratings as drawout
metal-clad switchgear. Integral overcurrent protective devices with the
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System mode switch, such as
DT 520MCV and DT-1150V, are also
available. Devices are mounted on the
single front-hinged door. The front door
may be opened at any time to provide
access to low voltage components and
the front of the circuit breaker without
being exposed to high voltage.
ii
1
2
3
EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
4
5
6
Eatons IQ family of electronic meters

is normally used when metering
functions are required.
The circuit breaker is bolted into
position, but can be unbolted and
removed from the enclosure. Routine
maintenance can be performed on
the circuit breaker mechanism in
the enclosure.
7
8
MSB with Control Switches,
Digitrip 3000 Overcurrent Relay
with Optional Metering Shown
EDR-5000 Multifunction Protective Relay
9
10
Standard switch insulators are NEMA

rated glass polyester or optional
epoxy. Control power will be required
as detailed below. The AC can be
supplied integrally if specified. The
DC control power, if required, must
be furnished by others.
11
12
If AC control power is used, a capacitor

trip device is provided.
13
Once the circuit breaker is closed and

the closing spring is recharged, the
breaker can open, close and open
without spring recharge.
14
Digitrip 520MCV
15
16
17
18
19
20
Digitrip 1150V
CA08104001E
21
7.2-4
February 2015
Sheet 07 012
Technical Data
i
ii
Table 7.2-1. Integral Protective Relays 1
Eatons MSB breaker can be furnished with an Eaton Type

EDR-3000 or EDR-5000 relay to provide overcurrent and fault
protection. Optional zero sequence 50/51G ground fault
protection is shown below. Refer to Tab 4 for more details.
Relay Type
Protective Relay
IEEE Functions
Metering
DT 520MCV
50, 50T, 51, 50G, 51G
Amperes
DT-1150V
50, 50T, 51, 51G, 50G, 37, 46,

27, 59, 32, 47, 74, 81U, 81-0
Amperes, voltage, VA,

VAR, Watt, Wh, VAh, THD
MVS Load
Break
Switch
2
3
EDR-3000 or
EDR-5000 1
3-CTs
Vacuum
Breaker
50/51
50N/51N
See Tab 6, Pages 6.0-10, 6.0-11 and 6.0-12 for details.
Table 7.2-2. Protective Relays 2

Relay Type
Protective Relay
IEEE Functions
Metering
EDR-3000
50/51; 50/51G
Amperes and
ampere demand
EDR-5000
25, 27, 32, 46, 47, 50N/G,

51N/G, 50/51, 50BF, 51VR,
59, 67N, 67
Amps; volts; pf,

energy, power; THD;
waveform
52
4
2
5
6
1-Zero Sequence CT
Use of EDR-5000 requires VTs.
9
10
13
Rated
Rated Rated
Maximum BIL
Main Bus
Volts kV
kV
Current
Amperes
4.76
4.76
MVS
Switch
15
15
Phase Current
Sensors
VCP-TR or -TRL
Circuit Breaker
52
11
12
Assembly Ratings
Table 7.2-3. MSB Switchgear Assembly Ratings
Figure 7.2-1. Typical MSB Single-Section One-Line Diagram

1
Optional Ground
Current Sensor
TA
600, 1200
600, 1200
25
40
VTs 2 L-L or 3 L-G
CTs
VYs
2 L-L or 3 L-G
Optional Ground
Current Sensor
R = Relay
DT-3010 or EDR-5000
Integral Trip Unit

DT 520MCV
TA
RP
EM
(if TRL
bkr)
Current
Sensors
TA = Trip Actuator
EM = Electromagnetic
Linear Actuator
RP = Rating Plug
ST = Shunt Trip Coil
Max Length = 50 Feet
LV Switchgear Main Bus

Integral Trip Unit
DT 1150V
TA
EM
(if TRL
bkr)
18
Required if Using
EDR-5000
ST
MVS
Switch
VCP-TR or -TRL
Circuit Breaker 52
40
64
MVS
Switch
TA = Trip Actuator
Linear Actuator
RP = Rating Plug
Substation
Transformer
17
20
95
95
Primary Source
Figure 7.2-2. Typical MSB One-Line Diagram with DT 520MCV
Phase Current
Sensors
19
25
40
RP
EM
(if TRL
bkr)
Rated Short-TIme
(2 Seconds)
Current kA
Symmetrical
600, 1200, 2000 40

600, 1200, 2000 64
VCP-TR or -TRL
Circuit Breaker 52
16
Rated
Momentary
Current kA rms
Asymmetrical
60
60
Integral Trip Unit

DT 520MCV
14
15
See Tab 4 available relays selection and application details.
Figure 7.2-4. Transformer Primary Breaker with Secondary Bus

3
RP
TA = Trip Actuator
Linear Actuator
RP = Rating Plug
Surge protection device, such as RC snubber, EHZ or Protec Z is highly

recommended for transformer protection. Refer to Tab 5, Page 5.4-17 to
Page 5.4-20 for Eatons recommendations for surge protection.
Figure 7.2-3. Typical MSB One-Line Diagram with DT-1150V
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
7.2-5
Sheet 07 013
Technical Data

Type MSB assemblies can be supplied with Type VCP-TR or
VCP-TRC (stored energy operator) or with Type VCP-TRL or
VCP-TRLC (electromagnetic linear actuator operator) circuit
breakers. Type VCP-TRC and VCP-TRLC circuit breakers are
identical to VCP-TR and VCP-TRL breakers except they

are rated for additional capacitor switching capability as
indicated in Table 7.2-5.
Table 7.2-4. Available Type VCP-TR and VCP-TRL Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards
Circuit
Breaker
Type 12
Rated
Insulation Level
Rated
Maximum Power
Continuous
Impulse
Voltage
Frequency Withstand Current
Withstand Voltage
Voltage
(BIL)
60 Hz,
1.2 x 50
1 Minute microsec
Rated
ShortCircuit
Current
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Rated
Voltage
Range
Factor
kV rms
50VCP-TR25
50VCP-TRL25
50VCP-TR40
150VCP-TR25
150VCP-TRL25
150VCP-TR40
1
2
4.76
4.76
4.76
15
15
15
Maximum
Symmetrical
Interrupting
& 2-Second
Short-Time
Current
Carrying
Capability
Closing
and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
K*I
2.6 * K * I
kA rms sym
kA Crest
Amperes MVA
Vacuum
Interrupter
Mechanism
Cable
Charging
Breaking
Current
Three-Phase Mechanical Endurance

MVA
No Load C-O Operations
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage
(for
Reference
Only)
1.732
*V*I
kV rms
kV Peak
Amperes
kA rms
sym
19
19
19
60
60
60
600, 1200
600, 1200
600, 1200
25
25
40
1
1
1
25
25
40
65
65
104
25
25
25
210
210
330
30,000
30,000
30,000
10,000
100,000
10,000
36
36
36
95
95
95
600, 1200
600, 1200
600, 1200
25
25
40
1
1
1
25
25
40
65
65
104
25
25
25
650
650
1040
30,000
30,000
30,000
10,000
100,000
10,000
Circuit
Breaker Type
Cable
Charging
VCP-TRC
25 A
(40 kA ratings)

Single Bank
Back-to-Back
250 and 1000 A
250 A with inrush current

of 4 kA peak at 5.9 kHz and
1000A with inrush current
of 15 kA peak at 25 kHz
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Rated interrupting time for all VCP-T circuit breakers is 3 cycle (50 ms).
Operating duty for all VCP-T circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
Table 7.2-5. Available Type VCP-TRC Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated

per ANSI Standards (Definite Purpose, Tested for Capacitor Switching)
Type VCP-TRC (stored energy operator) circuit breakers have same
ratings as Type VCP-TR breakers, plus additional capacitor switching
capabilities as follows.
Breaker Control Ratings

Table 7.2-6. Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power
Requirements
Rated
Control
Voltage
Spring Charge Motor

Run
Amperes
Time
Seconds
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
4.0
3.0
2.0
5
5
5
120 Vac
240 Vac
3.0
2.0
5
5
Close or Trip
Amperes
Voltage Range
Close
Trip
10
5.2
3.6
1.8
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140180
11
3.6
1.8
104127
208254
104127
208254
12
Inrush current is 4 times running amperes.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
7.2-6
February 2015
Sheet 07 014
LayoutDimensions
i
ii
1
Typical Arrangements5 kV and 15 kV

The sketches in this section represent
the most common switch arrangements. Many other configurations and
combinations are available. Layouts
shown are for rear-accessible equipment. Front-accessible designs are
availablerefer to Eaton.
Depth of units will vary due to cable

entrance and exit requirements,
instrument transformers, special
cable terminators, and so on.
Cables are shown out top and bottom

for layout only. Top or bottom must be
selected for incoming and for outgoing
cables. Cable sizing is based on two
500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables
per phase using preformed slip-on
cable termination devices. Rear access
is required for installation. For unit
substation alignment details, see
Tabs 13 and 14.
2
3
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
6
7
62.00
(1574.8)
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
PR
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
52
52
8
9
Indoor
36.00
(914.4)
20.00
(508.0)
Arrangement 3
Primary for Liquid Filled
Transformer
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
11
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 2
Primary for Dry-Type
Transformer
62.00
(1574.8)
10
52
Outdoor
41.00
(1041.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 1
Single Unit,
Cable In and Out
PR
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
PR
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
PR
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
PR
52
52
PR
PR
PR
52
52
52
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
12
36.00 - 48.00
(914.4 - 1219.2)
13
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00 - 48.00
(914.4 - 1219.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 6
Main Lugs with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional) 1
Arrangement 5
Main Device with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional) 1
14
62.00
(1574.8)
62.00
(1574.8)
15
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
16
Indoor
ATC
90.38
(2295.7)
17
PR
52
PR
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
PR
52
PR
52
52
52
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
ATC
18
36.00
(914.4)
19
20
21
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 7
Two Breaker Auto TransferSingle Load
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 8
Three Breaker Auto TransferMain-Tie-Main with Feeders
Figure 7.2-5. Layouts and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Width of metering compartment may vary depending on utility requirements.
Note: PROvercurrent protective relay, typical functions50/51, 50/51N or 50/51G. Eatons EDR-3000 or EDR-5000.
Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
CA08104001E
February 2015
7.2-7
Sheet 07 015
LayoutDimensions
Rear Access Top or Bottom Entry and Exit

Roof for
Outdoor Unit
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
Optional
Rear Door
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
1.25 (31.8)
ii
1
A&B
Roof Layout
95.46
(2424.7)
Outdoor
Height
16.00 (406.4)
VT
Switch
CT
36.00 (914.4)
90.37
(2295.3)
Indoor
Height
4
10.00 (254.0)
Optional
Rear Door
6.60 (167.6)
8.00 (203.2)
Vacuum
Breaker
16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0)
1.25 (31.8)
A&B
Floor Layout
5
6
7
62.00
(1574.8)
36.00 (914.4)
Figure 7.2-6. 5, 15 kV MSB with Main Bus
Figure 7.2-8. 5 kV and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts
Minimum depth 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm) if two sets of CTs are required.
VT cannot be located
here when using
40 kA breaker
Roof for
Outdoor Unit
Cable location B not available with main bus.
Note: A = Power cable to load, B = Power cable from source.

Note: For D dimension, refer to Page 7.1-4.
8
9
10
11
VT
12
13
95.46
(2424.7)
Outdoor
Height
90.37
(2295.3)
Indoor
Height
Switch
14
CT
15
Vacuum
Breaker
16
17
18
Figure 7.2-7. 5, 15 kV MSB without Main Bus

2
19
Minimum depth 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) if two sets of CTs are required.
20
Dimensions in inches (mm).
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
CA08104001E
21
7.2-8
February 2015
Sheet 07 016
LayoutDimensions
a Locations for tie-down 0.65 inches
(16.5 mm) diameter holes for
four places. Customer provided
bolts for anchoring should be
0.5013 min. (M12 x 1.75 min.
CL 10.9) and tightened to 75 ft-lbs
(101.7 Nm).
i
ii
5
1
2
5.00
(127.0)
Typ.
b Door swing equals unit width

at 90.
Optional
Rear Door
4.25
(108.0)
c The standard minimum clearances

on side. 24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
may need to be added for passage
from front to rear. The authority
having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
1.25
(31.8)
2.95
(74.9)
3
4
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
d Minimum clearance in front is the

width of the widest vertical section
plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The
authority having jurisdiction may
5
1.25
(31.8)
4.25
(108.0)
e The standard minimum

recommended distance is
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for
assemblies requiring rear access
for installation and maintenance.
The authority having jurisdiction
may require a larger distance.
FRONT DOOR
4
Min.
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 7.2-9. Typical Anchor Plan for MSB, Indoor or Outdoor

5 or 15 kV Class
Indoor
Outdoor
MSB section
MVS section (non-fused)
Fuses (three) add
Transition section
1700 (773)
1500 (681)
200 (91)
300 (136)
2000 (909)
1800 (817)
200 (91)
13
f For MVS only. If the application is

specifically provided by contract as
not requiring rear access as stated
in 5, then the minimum
recommended distance is
6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
g If optional rear door is supplied,
the minimum is the width of the
widest vertical section plus
1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority
having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
h Finished foundations surface
shall be level within 0.06-inch
(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
(914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-toback and diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
Vacuum Breakers
February 2015
7.3-1
Sheet 07 017
Application Examples
Application Examples
Low Resistance Ground Schemes
ii
Medium voltage low resistance

ground schemes are typically used for
medium voltage 5 kV class systems
feeding 5 kV class motor loads. The
resistor affords both full selectivity in
tripping on ground faults, while limiting ground fault magnitudes to low
values (typically 50400 A). Reducing
the current levels to a faulted motor
greatly reduces the damage to the
motor and subsequent rewind and
repair costs.
System tripping during a ground fault
on the line side of the secondary main
breaker must be cleared by sending a
trip signal to the transformer primary
side protective device. Fusible switches
on the primary side of the step-down
transformer (typically rated 515 kV)
may not be used for this purpose. Any
ground fault sensed may escalate as
the switch is being signaled to trip
thereby exceeding its typical 600 A
maximum current breaking capacity.
52-1
1
2
Unprotected
Zone for
Ground
Fault
Protection
R
251G
251G 151G
5
Complete Secondary Ground
Fault Protection Using WVB
for Primary Device
Incomplete Ground Fault Protection

Using Fusible Switch Primary
DeviceNOT RECOMMENDED
Figure 7.3-1. Low Resistance Ground Scheme (Phase and Primary Ground Fault Protection not Shown)
50/51
50N/51N
Eatons MEB and MSB breaker, being a

fully rated interrupting device, may be
tripped regardless of fault level up to
its interrupting rating (for example,
28 kA). Only this type of overcurrent
device or a metal-clad switchgear
drawout breaker may be safely used.
DT 520MCV
DT 1150V
EDR-3000
or EDR-5000 1
6
7
8
9
10
52
11
Single-Ended Substation Designs

In this configuration, the MEB or MSB
serves as both primary and secondary
protection for the transformer. Savings
in both floor space and cost result, due
to elimination of the secondary main
device. This scheme is only recommended where cost and space prevent
the use of secondary main device.
52-2
52-2
EDR-3000
or EDR-5000 1
50/51
50N/51N
12
Figure 7.3-2. Single-Ended Unit Substations Using Primary Breaker Protection (MEB)
1
Use of DT-1150V or EDR-5000 requires VTs.
13
14
Note: Two sets of current transformers are

used to protect against secondary ground
faults, overloads and short circuits, as well
as primary winding faults.
15
16
17
50/51
50N/51N
EDR-3000
or EDR-5000 1
52
50/51
50N/51N
DT-520MCV
or DT-1150V
18
19
20
Figure 7.3-3. Single-Ended Unit Substations Using Primary Breaker Protection (MSB)
1
CA08104001E
Use of DT-1150V or EDR-5000 requires VTs.
21
7.3-2
Vacuum Breakers
February 2015
Sheet 07 018
Optional Accessories (MEB and MSB)
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Surge Arresters
IEEE Standard C62.11 for metal-oxide
surge arresters lists the maximum
rated ambient temperature as 40 C.
The ambient temperature inside an
MEB and MSB switchgear vertical
section may exceed this temperature,
especially in outdoor applications
where solar radiation may produce

a significant contribution to the
temperature. Table 7.3-1 lists the
recommended minimum duty cycle
voltage rating for various system
grounding methods based on switchgear temperatures not exceeding 55 C.
Table 7.3-1. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Service
Voltage
Line-to-Line
kV

Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Solidly
Nominal
Nominal
Arrester Ratings kV
Nominal
MCOV
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Nominal
Nominal
Arrester Ratings kV
MCOV
MCOV
Nominal
MCOV
MCOV
MCOV
2.30
2.40
3.30
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
4.00
4.16
4.76
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
4.80
6.60
6.90
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.20
8.32
8.40
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
11.00
11.50
12.00
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
9
10
10
7.65
8.40
8.40
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
12.47
13.20
13.80
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
12
10.20
10.20
10.20
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
15
10.20
10.20
12.70
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
14.40
12
10.20
12
10.20
21
17.00
12
10.20
15
12.70
21
17.00
Note: MCOV = Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Vacuum Breakers
February 2015
7.3-3
Sheet 07 019
MEB and MSB Switchgear

with Automatic Transfer Control
Application
Eatons MEB and MSB switchgear with
an automatic transfer control system
is an integrated assembly of drawout
VCP-W breakers, sensing devices
and control components. Available
in 515 kV classes.
It is typically applied where the
continuity of service for critical loads
from two power sources in either
a two-breaker (one load) or threebreaker (two loads) configuration
is desired.
ATC Controller
Eatons ATC-900 controller is equipped
to display history information either
via the front panel or over the
PowerNet power monitoring system.
ATC-900 controller stores 320 time
stamped events. Oscillographic data
for last 10 events can be downloaded
via USB port or displayed in the
controllers display window. Controller allows communications via RS-232
or Modbus through RS-458 port,
MEB and MSB switchgear with an

can meet most automatic throwover
requirements as it has a wide variety
of operational sequences embodied
in one standard automatic transfer
control system.
Typical Two-Breaker Automatic Transfer

Using ATC Controller
Eatons ATC-900 controller continuously
monitors all three phases on both
sources for correct voltages. Should the
voltage of the normal source be lost
while the voltage of the alternate source
remains normal, the voltage sensing
function in the ATC controller will
change state starting the time delay
function. If the voltage of the normal
source is not restored by the end of the
time delay interval, the normal breaker
will open and the alternate source
breaker will close, restoring power to
the load.
ATC Controller
Standard Features

sources, and so forth
and outputs
Typical Three-Breaker
(Two Mains and Normally Open Tie)
The automatic transfer switchgear
assembly includes two main breakers
and one tie breaker, and an integrated
containing sensing devices, low
voltage logic control and auxiliary
equipment. The transfer control
system monitors both sources for
correct voltages. An automatic-manual
transfer selector switch is provided
for selection of manual or automatic
operating mode. In manual mode,
all three breakers can be manually
operated. Interlocking is provided in
manual mode of operation to prevent
closing all three breakers at the same
time. In the automatic mode, the basic
sequence of operation based upon two
normally energized sources is carried
out as follows. Normal operation is
with the main breakers closed and the
tie breaker open. Upon detection of
an undervoltage(s) to the line side
of a main breaker, and after a fieldadjustable time delay, that main
breaker opens and after an additional
field-adjustable time delay, the tie
breaker closes to restore power to the
affected portion of the facility. Upon
restoration of voltage to the line side
of the main breaker, and after a fieldadjustable time delay, the tie breaker
opens and after a field-adjustable time
delay, the opened main breaker closes.
Interlocking is provided to prevent
closing all three breakers simultaneously in manual mode.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Optional Features

Load current, power and PF
metering with optional DCT module
Up to four additional I/O modules
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
7.3-4
Vacuum Breakers
February 2015
Sheet 07 020
i
ii
Partial Discharge
for Switchgear
1
2
3
4
Coupling Capacitor
Type PD Sensor
RFCT Sensor
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
InsulGard Relay
(PD Monitoring)

Partial discharge (PD) is a common
name for various forms of electrical
discharges such as corona, surface
tracking and discharges internal to
the insulation. It partially bridges the
insulation between the conductors.
These high-frequency discharges are
essentially small arcs occurring in or
on the surface of the insulation system
when voltage stress exceeds a critical
value. With time, airborne particles,
contaminants and humidity lead
to conditions that result in partial
discharges. Partial discharges start
at a low level and increase as more
insulation becomes deteriorated.
bus insulation, or discharges in the
air gap between the bus and a support,
sections of the switchgear. If partial
discharge process is not detected and
corrected, it can develop into a fullscale insulation failure followed by an
electrical fault. Most switchgear flashover and bus failures are a result of
insulation degradation caused by

Eatons Type MEB and MSB metalenclosed switchgear (2.415 kV) is
corona-free by design. By making
switchgear assemblies corona-free,
Eaton has made its standard switchgear more reliable. However, as
indicated above, with time, airborne
particles, contaminants and humidity
lead to conditions that cause partial
discharges to develop in switchgear
operating at voltages 4000V and
above. Type MEB and MSB switchgear
can be equipped with factory-installed
under normal operation. Timely
detection of insulation degradation
through increasing partial discharges
can identify potential problems so
that corrective actions can be
planned and implemented long
before permanent deterioration
develops. Partial discharge detection
can be the foundation of an effective
predictive maintenance program.
Trending of partial discharge data
over time allows prediction of failures,
which can be corrected before
The PD sensing and monitoring
system consists of Eatons InsulGard
relay and PD sensors specifically
developed for application in the
switchgear to work with the relay.
Partial discharges within the MEB
by the installation of a small donut type
radio frequency current transformer
Temp Sensor
Humidity Sensor
(RFCT) sensor over floating stress

shields of the specially designed bus
or line side primary bushings. Partial
discharge in the customers power
cables (external discharges) are
detected by the installation of the RFCT
around ground shields of the incoming
or outgoing power cables termination.
Partial discharges within the MSB
by installation of coupling capacitor
type sensor connected to the main
bus or on the load side of the feeder
breakers. Partial discharges in the
customers power cables (external
discharges) are detected by the
installation of the RFCT around ground
shields of the incoming or outgoing
power cables termination.
Output signals from sensors (coupling
capacitor and RFCT) are wired out to
terminal blocks for future or field use,
or connected to the InsulGard relay.
One InsulGard relay can monitor up
to 15 output signals, and temperature
and humidity. The temperature and
humidity sensors are included with
each InsulGard relay system. The
relay continuously monitors the
switchgear primary system for partial
discharges and provides an alarm
signal (contact closure) when high
PD level is detected. Data analysis
and diagnostics performed by Eaton
engineers can also be provided by
remote communication with the
InsulGard relay.
optional in MEB and MSB switchgear.
Input
Terminal
Block

InsulGard
Relay
120 Vac
Auxiliary
Power
Optional
Modem
Output
Alarm
Status
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Vacuum Breakers
7.3-5
Sheet 07 021
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

compartment.

compartment.


8
9
Figure 7.3-5. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in

MEB Switchgear (515 kV)
Figure 7.3-6. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MSB

Switchgear (515 kV)
10
Note: Use one set of epoxy bottles with ground stress shield on bus
side (either in the top or bottom compartment) at every two vertical
sections. Use standard bottles at all other locations.
Note: Use one set of PD sensing capacitors at every two vertical

sections, or portion thereof. Use one RFCT at each incoming/
outgoing cable circuit.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage

8.0-1
MVS Medium Voltage Load
Interrupter Fusible Switch
Sheet 08 001
CA08104001E
Contents
MVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-2
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-2
Duplex Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-5
Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-5
Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-6
Motor Operated MVS Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-7
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-7
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-9
MVS Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-11
MVS Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-12
Method to Determine the Minimum Recommended Fuse Size
for Fuse Applied on Primary Side of a Power Transformer . . . . . . . . . 8.0-13
MVS Layout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-18
Mini MVS Layout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-28
MVS-ND Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-29
Arc-Resistant MVS Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter
Switchgear5 and 15 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-39
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Sections 16361A,
Sections 26 13 16.11,
16361B
26 13 16.13
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear
21

8.0-2
February 2015
Sheet 08 002
General Description
MVS Load Interrupter

Switchgear
ii
General Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
16
17
IEEE Standard C37.20.3

ANSI C37.57
NEMA SG5
Canadian Standard CAN/
CSA C22.2 No. 31
Type MVS switches meet or exceed

the requirements of the following
industry standards:
A complete line of Eaton switches and

fuses is available, as follows:
11
15
Eatons MVS load interrupter

switchgear meets or exceeds the
requirements of the following
industry standards:
Eatons MVS Load Interrupter

Switchgear is an integrated assembly
of switches, bus and fuses that are
coordinated electrically and mechanically
for medium voltage circuit protection.
All major components are manufactured by Eaton, establishing one source
of responsibility for the equipments
performance and ensuring high
standards in quality, coordination,
reliability and service.
10
5, 15, 27 and 38 kV voltage classes

600 A continuous and load interrupting ratings, all voltage classes,
1200 A continuous and load interrupting for 5 and 15 kV classes
350 A continuous and load
interrupting ratings for 5 kV and
15 kV classes for capacitive circuits
Non-fused or fused with current
limiting or boric acid-type fuses
Manual or motor operated
Indoor or outdoor non-walk-in
enclosures
Single switches and transformer
primary switches
Duplex loadbreak switch arrangements for selection of alternate
feeds
Two-position, manual no-load
selector switches for selection of
alternate feeds (5 and 15 kV only)
Lineups with main bus
Standard arrangements with automatic transfer control systems, two
sources feeding one load or two
sources feeding two loads on a split
bus with tie switch

ANSI C37.58
ANSI C37.22
NEMA SG6
Canadian Standards CAN/CSA C22.2
No. 193 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 58
Outdoor Duplex with Customer Metering
Eatons Load Interrupter Type MVS
metal-enclosed switchgear provides
safe, reliable switching and fault
protection for medium voltage circuits
rated from 2.438 kV. The MVS switch
is ideal for applications where high
duty cycle operation is not needed.
MVS switchgear has the advantage of
low initial cost inherent in switch designs
while offering the characteristics most
vital to safety and coordination.
The MVS switchs quick-make, quickbreak mechanism provides full-load
current interrupting capability while
fuses provide accurate, permanently
calibrated short circuit detecting and
interrupting capabilities. Visibility of
actual blade position improves safety
by giving positive assurance of circuit
de-energization.
5 and 15 kV MVS switchgear assemblies are available as listed products

with Underwriters Laboratories and
Canadian Standards Association for
most options. In addition, 27 and 38 kV
MVS switchgear assemblies are
available with CSA/US listing to
U.S. standards with a limited number
of options.
Load interrupter switches should not
be used to interrupt load currents
above their interrupting rating of 600
or 1200 A, as they are not designed
nor tested for interrupting fault currents
on electrical systems. Optional fuses
can be provided for phase overcurrent
protection. For ground fault current
tripping, see MSB and MEB switchgear
Tab 7. Refer to Page 8.0-13, Table 8.0-6
for applicable fuse ratings.
Standard design configurations for:
18
19
NEMA pads for cable lugs

Surge arresters
Instrument transformers
Control power transformers
IQ electronic metering
Eatons PowerNet accessing
devices such as addressable relays
and PONI cards
Other auxiliary equipment

20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-3
Sheet 08 003
General Description
Construction
i
ii
b
c
f
Switch with Hinged Screen Barrier Open
g
h
i High Quality Insulation

Bus and switch insulators, switch
drive rod barriers between phases,
and barriers between outer phases
and the housing, are of high
strength, non-hygroscopic, trackresistant glass polyester as standard.
Optional switch, fuse and main bus
epoxy insulation system is available.
j Red-Green Switch
Position Indicators
a Switch Mechanism
Quick-make, quick-break stored
energy operation.
The opening and closing of the
switch blades is done by the
operating spring. An operators
actions only charge and release
the operating spring.
The switch blades cannot be teased
to any intermediate positions.
During the closing operation, full
clearance between blades and
stationary contacts is maintained
until the switch mechanism goes
over toggle.
The switch mechanism has only
metal-to-metal linkageno chains
or cables are used.
Arc interruption takes place between
copper-tungsten tipped auxiliary
(flicker) blade and arcing contacts
with a DE-ION arc chute; no arcing
takes place between the main blades
and the stationary contacts to
prolong the life of the main blades.
Blow-out forces cannot be transmitted to the operating handle.
CA08104001E
b Provisions for Padlocking Door

Handle not visible in the photo.
c Inspection Window
A large 8.00-inch x 16.00-inch
(203.2 x 406.4 mm) gasketed,
rectangular, high impact viewing
window permits full view of the position of all three switch blades through
the closed door.
d Full Height Main Door
The door has a return flange and two
rotary latch-type handles to provide
latching members held in shear. It
closes over a projecting frame.
e Foot-Operated Door Stop
f Grounded Metal Safety Barrier
Prevents inadvertent contact with any
live part, yet allows full-view inspection of the switch blade position.
g Door Interlock
Prevents the door of the enclosure
from being opened when the switch
is closed.
h Switch Interlock
Prevents inadvertent closure of the
switch if the door of the enclosure
is open.
6
7
l Provisions for Door and

Switch Key Interlocks
Typical Switch with Front Door Open
k Provisions for Padlocking

Switch Open or Closed
m The Operating Handle

It is conveniently located behind
a small access door giving the
structure a smooth homogeneous
appearance and discourages casual
contact by unauthorized personnel.
10
n Switchgear Assembly
Rating Nameplate
12
11
13
m
l
14
15
16
j
17
k
18
19
l
20
Switch Operating Compartment Door Open
21
8.0-4

February 2015
Sheet 08 004
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Switch Mechanism
The quick-make, quick-break mechanism uses a heavy-duty coil spring
that provides powerful opening and
closing action. To close the switch,
the handle is inserted into the spring
charging cam, then rotated upward
through an angle of 120 degrees. This
action charges the operating spring,
and as the mechanism is forced past
toggle, the stored energy of the spring
is released and transferred to the main
shaft that snaps the switch closed.
As a result of the over-toggle action, the
blades are moved independently of the
operator. It is impossible to tease the
switch into any intermediate position.
To open the switch, the handle is
inserted into the spring charging
cam and rotated downward through
120 degrees resulting in charging of
the operating spring, then releasing its
stored energy in similar sequence.
Quick-Break DE-ION Arc Interruption

With the switch closed, both main and
auxiliary (flicker) blades are closed,
and all of the current flows through the
main blades. The flicker blades are in
the closed position in the arc chutes,
but are past the arcing contacts and
thus carry no current.
As the main blades open, current is

transferred momentarily to the flicker
blades, which are held in the arc chutes
by high pressure contact fingers. There
is no arcing at the main blades.
When the main blades reach a predetermined angle of opening, a stop
post on the main blades prevents further
angular movement between the main
and flicker blades. This starts the flicker
blades out of the high pressure contacts
in the arc chutes and as contacts are
broken, the flicker blades are snapped
into position by their torsion springs.
The heat of the arc, meanwhile,
releases a blast of de-ionizing gas
from the gas-generating material of
the arc chute. This combination of
quick-break and DE-ION action quickly
extinguishes the arc and the circuit is
safely de-energized.
A non-fused switch has the ability
to close and latch four times when
rated 40 kA fault close, and one time
when rated 61 kA fault close, and
continue to carry rated current thus
adding a large margin of integrity to
the electrical system.
The 5/15 kV switch designs have also
demonstrated the ability to surpass
the number of ANSI C37.22 required
loadbreak current operations by no
less than 200%.
Bus Insulation System

All bus runs are supported using a high
strength and high creep, finned support
providing in excess of 12.00 inches
(304.8 mm) for 5/15 kV and 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) for 27/38 kV, of creep
distance between phases and ground.
The molded high track-resistant fins are
constructed as standard of Aramid
nylon or optional Cycloaliphatic epoxy.
Significantly superior bus bracing

than standoff type A20 insulators
Significantly increased creep
distance phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground
Improved endurance from fault
incidents
Minimizes bus system failures due
to tracking
Eliminates additional ground
planes in the switchgear for bus
supporting systems
Bus Support
11
12
13
14
15
Main, Flicker Blades
Engaged
16
Main Blades Disengaged,

Flicker Blade Engaged
Both Blades Disengaged
Figure 8.0-1. Switch Operation
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-5
Sheet 08 005
General Description
Duplex Switch Configuration
Two-Position, No-Load Selector Switch
Loadbreak Switch with Grounding Jaw
Two MVS load interrupter switch

sections can be used to provide costeffective source selectivity with a
common load side bus feeding one
load, fused or nonfused. Key interlocks
are a standard feature provided to permit only one switch to be closed at one
time and prevent opening any switch
door unless both switches are open.
Eatons MVS load interrupter switch

can be used to provide the most costeffective source selectivity in a single
compact structure with a two-position
Type MVS non-loadbreak selector
switch in series with the load break
MVS switch. This selector switch is
mechanically interlocked such that
operation can be performed only when
the load interrupter switch is in the
open position. Also, neither the MVS
switch nor the main door can be
closed without the selector switch
being positively locked in one of the
two feeder positions.
The loadbreak switch can be supplied

with optional grounding jaws for automatic grounding of the load circuit.
When the switch is opened, the switch
main blades engage grounding jaws to
ground the load circuit. This feature
cannot be used in a duplex switch
configuration. The ground jaw option
is available at 538 kV. It is meant for
applying a static ground, and is not
rated for carrying fault currents.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
K1
K1
6
7
K1
K1
Door
Door
95.40
(2423.2)
8
Figure 8.0-5. Typical Feeder Switch with
Optional Grounding Jaw (538 kV)
9
10
36.00
(914.4)
Grounding
Jaw
36.00
(914.4)
Figure 8.0-2. Typical Duplex Switch

Configuration with One K1 Key
62.00
(1574.8)
11
SA
Figure 8.0-3. Typical Two-Position Selector

Switch for Bottom Cable Entrance
Line
90.37
(2295.0)
Non
Load
Break
Selector
Switch
12
SW
13
14
FU
Load
15
31.60
(803.0)
Mechanical
Interlock
Load
Break
Switch
16
2.19
(56.0)
62.00
(1575.0)
Figure 8.0-6. Typical Section View of Feeder

Switch with Optional Grounding Jaws
17
18
19
36.00
(914.4)
Figure 8.0-4. Typical Selector Switch

ConfigurationDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
20
21
8.0-6

February 2015
Sheet 08 006
General Description
Mini-MVS (26-Inch Wide)
ii
1
2
Eatons Mini-MVS switchgear

assembly is rated 200 A, 4.76 kV. The
medium voltage Mini-MVS switchgear
assembly is for use in power
distribution, transformer primary
connections and isolation applications
requiring a stand-alone assembly,
cable in/cable out terminations and
manual operation.
The Mini-MVS switchgear assembly
is seismically qualified. The assembly
is listed by UL or CSA. The switch is
available fused or non-fused. There is
an option for an outdoor enclosure.
Several built-in interlocks and safety
features are provided.
3
4
Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly

Standard Features
Seismically qualified
Manually operated switch
Door-to-switch safety interlocking
Auxiliary switch, one Form C contact
Viewing window for switch position
Provisions for padlocking the switch
in the OPEN position
Provision for padlocking the two
door handles closed
Spare fuse rack
Grounded metal screen barrier in
front of the switch
Cycloalaphatic epoxy insulators
Line, load and ground cable lugs
for #6 solid-4/0 stranded cable
Aluminum or copper
Key interlock provisions
ListedUL/CSA
Optional Features
Enclosed typeindoor or outdoor

Outdoor enclosure includes
space heater
Note: If the application requires a heater for

condensation, an outdoor enclosure should
be selected
10
11
Fused or unfused switch

If fused, Eatons Type CLE current
limiting fuses from 10E amperes
to 200E amperes are supplied
Distribution type surge arresters,
3 or 6 kV
Spare fuses
Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly

W = 26.00 inches (660.4 mm)
H = 66.00 inches (1676.4 mm)
D = 27.25 inches (692.2 mm)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015

8.0-7
Sheet 08 007
General Description
Motor Operated
MVS Switches
Application
Eatons MVS Pow-R-Drive motor
operator makes possible the safety,
convenience and coordination inherent
in remote switch operation.
Description
Manual Operation
A MVS Pow-R-Drive motor operated

switch is a standard, manually
operated switch in combination with a
heavy-duty electric motor-driven linear
actuator that charges the spring. The
linear actuator is located in a separate
isolated low voltage compartment.
During electrical operation, it smoothly
and quietly extends or retracts the
proper distance to cause the switch
mechanism to operate.
To operate manually, loosen the

holding screw that keeps the pin
connecting the linear actuator to the
mechanism in place. Remove this pin.
Remove the clevis pin on the support
of the bottom of the linear actuator.
Unplug the cord from the disconnecting terminal block as the actuator is
removed and set the actuator aside.
The switch can now be operated
manually with the removable handle.
Standard motor operators are

mounted in the switch enclosure.
This eliminates the separate motor
compartment conserving floor space.
Key Interlock to Lock Switch Open

A keyed lock is standard to lock the
switch in the open position only.
This lock not only locks the switch in
the open position, but also breaks the
electrical motor contacts integral to
the lock and permits the key to be
removed. With the key, the operator
can then open the lock on the switch
door. This scheme gives positive
assurance that the switch is open and
cannot be closed with the door open.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Motor Operated MVS Switch
Manual Operation Override
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
8.0-8

February 2015
Sheet 08 008
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
Electronic Metering and

Communications Apparatus
MVS switchgear assemblies can
be equipped with Eatons family of
Power Xpert and IQ digital meters to
monitor a power circuits electrical
quantities within the capabilities of
each device. Refer to Tab 3 for further
information on these devices.
provide hardware and software solutions that allow customers to interface
with their switchgear at varying levels
of sophistication. Power Xpert and IQ

Meters monitor common electrical
parameters and communicate the data
via standard industry protocols and
optional Web interfaces. Power Xpert
Gateways consolidate devices into a
single Web browser interface and
management of the customers power
system. Refer to Tab 2 for more information on communication systems.
Outdoor Enclosures
Weatherproofing complying with
the requirements of IEEE standard
C37.20.3 is available for MVS switchgear assemblies. The weatherproofing
consists of sloped roof panels that are
joined together with caps. Doors
and rear covers are fully gasketed.
Externally accessible louvered filtered
covers, top and bottom, front and rear,
are provided for ventilation. At least
one 250 watt heater is provided in each
vertical section. Power for the heaters
may be supplied from an external
source, or an optional integral control
power transformer may be specified to
provide power for the heaters.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Outdoor Enclosure
14
15
Other Meters:
IQ 160/260
16
Refer to Tab 3.
17
18
19
20
Power Xpert Meter

PXM 4000/6000/8000
Electronic Metering
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-9
Sheet 08 009
Partial Discharge
for Switchgear
Coupling Capacitor
Type PD Sensor
RFCT Sensor
InsulGard Relay
(PD Monitoring)

Partial discharge (PD) is a common
name for various forms of electrical
discharges such as corona, surface
tracking, and discharges internal to
the insulation. It partially bridges the
insulation between the conductors.
These high frequency discharges are
essentially small arcs occurring in or
on the surface of the insulation system
when voltage stress exceeds a critical
value. With time, airborne particles,
contaminants and humidity lead
to conditions that result in partial
discharges. Partial discharges start
at a low level and increase as more
insulation becomes deteriorated.
bus insulation, or discharges in the
air gap between the bus and a support,
sections of the switchgear. If a partial
discharge process is not detected
and corrected, it can develop into a
full-scale insulation failure followed
by an electrical fault. Most switchgear
flashover and bus failures are a result
of insulation degradation caused by

Eatons Type MVS metal-enclosed
switchgear (2.427 kV) is corona-free
by design. By making switchgear
assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made
its standard switchgear more reliable.
However, as indicated above, with
time, airborne particles, contaminants
and humidity lead to conditions that
cause partial discharges to develop
in switchgear operating at voltages
4000 V and above. Type MVS switchgear
can be equipped with factory-installed
under normal operation. Timely
detection of insulation degradation
through increasing partial discharges
can identify potential problems so that
corrective actions can be planned and
deterioration develops. Partial discharge
detection can be the foundation of
an effective predictive maintenance
failures, which can be corrected before
consists of Eatons InsulGard relay
work with the relay. There are two
types of PD sensors used in the switchgear: the first sensor is a coupling
capacitor type sensor developed for
use with 5, 15 and 27 kV switchgear.
The coupling capacitor sensor detects

partial discharges within the switchgear
cubicle and/or adjacent cubicles, and
is typically installed on the load side
of the feeder switches or on the main
bus. The second sensor is a small
donut type radio frequency current
transformer (RFCT). It is designed for
installation around ground shields
of customers incoming or outgoing
power cables. It detects partial discharges in customers power cables
and external electrical noise.
Typically one set of coupling capacitor
sensors is used at every two cubicles.
One RFCT sensor is used for each
incoming and outgoing power cable
circuit.
Output signals from sensors (coupling
capacitor and RFCT) are wired out to
terminal blocks for future or field use,
or connected to the InsulGard relay.
One InsulGard relay can monitor up
to 15 output signals, and temperature
and humidity. The temperature and
humidity sensors are included with
each InsulGard relay system. The relay
continuously monitors the switchgear
primary system for partial discharges
and provides an alarm signal (contact
closure) when high PD level is detected.
Data analysis and diagnostics by Eaton
engineers can also be provided by
remote communication with the
InsulGard relay.
optional in MVS switchgear.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Temp Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Input
Terminal
Block
InsulGard
Relay
13
Optional
Modem
14
15

120 Vac
Auxiliary
Power
16
Output
Alarm
Status
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
8.0-10 Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage

February 2015
Sheet 08 010
i
ii

Radio Frequency Current Sensor (RFCT)
Coupling Capacitor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PD Sensors
Figure 8.0-8. How the Process WorksSensing and Data Collection
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Coupling Capacitor detects partial discharges internal to

switchgear compartment.
RFCT detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft
from switchgear.
Figure 8.0-9. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in

MVS Switchgear (527 kV)
Note: Use one set of PD sensing capacitors at every two vertical
sections, or portion thereof. Use one RFCT at each incoming/
outgoing cable circuit.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-11
Sheet 08 011
Application
MVS Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control
i
ii
1
2
3
ATC Controller
Standard Features
Two-Switch Automatic Transfer
Eatons MVS switchgear with an

is an integrated assembly of motor
operated MVS switches, sensing
devices and control components.
Available in 538 kV classes.
It is typically applied where the
continuity of service for critical loads
from two power sources in either a
two-switch (one load) or three-switch
(two loads) configuration is desired.
MVS switchgear with an automatic
transfer control system can meet most
automatic throwover requirements as
it has a wide variety of operational
sequences embodied in one standard
automatic transfer control system.
Please note that the duty cycle of load
interrupter switches is limited by ANSI
Standard C37.22. Refer to Table 8.0-4
for maximum number of switching
operations allowed. If the number of
switching operations is expected to
exceed the maximum allowed, then
load interrupter switches should not
be used. Use circuit breakers (refer to
Type MSB, MEB, MEF or VCP-W
switchgear designs).
Application
Typical Two-Switch Automatic Transfer
Using ATC Controller
Eatons ATC-900 controller continuously monitors all three phases on
both sources for correct voltages.
Should the voltage of the normal
source be lost while the voltage of the
alternate source remains normal, the
voltage sensing function in the ATC
controller will change state starting the
time delay function. If the voltage of
the normal source is not restored by
the end of the time delay interval,
the normal switch will open and the
alternate source switch will close,
restoring power to the load.
ATC Controller
Eatons ATC controller is equipped to
display history information either via
the front panel or over the PowerNet
power monitoring system. ATC-900
controller stores 320 time stamped
events. Oscillographic data for last
10 events can be downloaded via USB
port or displayed in the controllers
display window. Controller allows
communications via RS-232 or
Modbus through RS-485 port,

sources, etc.
and outputs
Key interlocking of operating
system and doors where required
to provide operator safety
Optional Features

Blown fuse overcurrent lockout
Load current, power and PF metering
with optional DCT module
Up to four additional I/O modules,
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Sheet 08 012
Technical Data
Technical Data
Test Data
ii
1
2
3
All Eatons MVS switch ratings have

been thoroughly tested in recognized
high power laboratories with certified
inspectors from both UL and CSA
organizations. Tests were performed to
substantiate all published ratings in
accordance with ANSI, IEEE, CSA and
NEMA standards.
The testing program included tests of:
4
5
Basic impulse levels

Momentary withstand
Short-time withstand
Fault closing
Load interrupting at various loads,
various power factors
Mechanical life tests
Temperature rise test
These tests verified not only the performance of the switch and integrated
switch-fuse assembly, but also the
suitability of the enclosure venting,
rigidity and bus spacing.
8
9
10
11
12
13
The mechanical life test subjected the

MVS switch to a number of no load
cycles greater than the requirements
tabulated in ANSI C37.22 standards.
There were no moving or current
carrying part failures as a result.
The Fault Close and Load Interrupting
test demonstrated significant
improved performance above ANSI/
IEEE standards. See Tables 8.0-3 and
8.0-4 for results.
Table 8.0-1. Switch Ratings (Non-Fused)

Rated Maximum
Voltage
Impulse
Withstand
Continuous and
Load-Break
Fault-Close & Momentary Rated Short-Time ShortCircuit Current (2 sec.)

kV
kV
Amperes
kA Asym
60
60
60
60
600
600
1200
1200
40
61
40
61
65
99
65
99
25
38
25
38
15
15
15
15
95
95
95
95
600
600
1200
1200
40
61
40
61
65
99
65
99
25
38
25
38
27
27
125
125
600
600
40
64
65
104
25
40
38
38
150
150
600
600
40
50.4
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
kA Peak
65
81.9
kA rms Sym.
25
31.5
Table 8.0-2. Switchgear Assembly Main Cross Bus Ratings

Rated Maximum
Voltage
Rated
BIL
Rated Main
Bus Current
Rated Momentary
Rated Short-Time ShortCircuit Current (2 sec.)
kV
kV
Amperes
kA Asym
kA Peak
kA rms Sym.
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
6001200
6001200
6001200
1200
2000
2000
2000
40
61
80
101
61
80
101
65
99
130
164
99
130
164
25
38
50
63
38
50
63
15
15
15
15
95
95
95
95
6001200
6001200
6001200
1200
40
61
80
101
65
99
130
164
25
38
50
63
27
27
125
125
6001200
6001200
40
64
65
104
25
40
38
38
150
150
6001200
6001200
40
50.4
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
65
81.9
25
31.5
Table 8.0-3. MVS Switch Duty Cycle for Full Load Operations
Rated
Maximum
kV
Switch Load
Interrupting
Ampere Rating
ANSI Required
Number of Load
Interrupting Operations
Eaton MVS Switch Number

of UL Tested Load Break Operations
4.76
4.76
15
15
27
38
600
1200
600
1200
600
600
50
20
30
10
10
5
60
50
60
50
10
5
Table 8.0-4. MVS Switch Duty Cycle for Fault Close OperationsNon-Fused
14
Rated
Maximum
kV
17
18
19
20
21
ANSI Required
Number of Fault
Close Operations
Eaton MVS Switch Number

of UL Tested Fault
Close Operations
65
99
1
1
4
1
40
61
65
99
1
1
1
1
40
50.4
65
81.9
1
1
1
1
kA Peak
40
61
27
27
38
38
15
16
Switch Fault Close Rating

kA Asym
5 and 15
5 and 15
Table 8.0-5. Mini-MVS Ratings, rms Values

Description
Unfused
Fused
Rated maximum voltage

Impulse withstand voltage (BIL)
Low frequency withstand voltage
Frequency
4.76 kV
60 kV
19 kV
60 Hz
4.76 kV
60 kV
19 kV
60 Hz
Continuous current, maximum

Load current interrupting rating 1
Magnetizing interrupting current
200 A
200 A
4A
200 A
200 A
4A
Short-time short-circuit current, 2 seconds, rms sym

Momentary current, asymmetrical/peak
Fault close current, asymmetrical/peak
12.5 kA
20 kA/32.5 kA
20 kA/32.5 kA
1
2
100% to 80% power factor lagging.

Not applicable for fused units.
101 kA/164 kA 3
101 kA/164 kA 3
Rating with Eaton BHLE fuse.
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-13
Sheet 08 013
Technical Data
Table 8.0-6. Primary Fuses, Standard Ratings and Fused Switch Fault Close Rating
Type
Fuse
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-400
RBA-800
RBA-800
BHLE
CLE600/750
Switchgear Rated
Maximum Voltage, kV
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
Fuse Rated Continuous

Current Range, Amperes
Rated Interrupting
Capacity kA Symmetrical 1
Fused Switch Momentary

and Fault-Close Rating 1
kA Asym
kA Peak
10200
10200
0.5400
0.5400
0.5720
10450
600750
19
25
37.5
25
37.5
63
40
30.4
40
60
40
60
101 2
64
49
65
97.5
65
97.5
164
104
37
65
76
65
65
90
90
164
164
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-400
RBA-800
RBA-800
HRBA-400
HRBA-800
BHLE
BHCL
15
15
15
15
15
14.4
14.4
15
15
10200
0.5400
0.5400
0.5720
0.5720
0.5400
0.5720
10250
300
14.4
25
29.4
25
29.4
34.8
34.8
63
63
23
40
47
40
47
55.7
55.7
101 2
101 2
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
Cooper NX
25.8
25.8
25.8
27
10200
0.5300
0.5540
0.5100
10.5
21
21
35
16.8
33.6
33.6
56
27
54.6
54.6
91
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
GE EJO-1
38
38
38
38
10200
0.5300
0.5540
2080
6.9
16.8
16.8
12.5
11
26.8
26.8
20
Cooper NX
38
20100
35
56 3
18
47
47
32.5
91
1
2
3
When RBA expulsion fuses are used, and two ratings appear, the lower rating applies when the lower-rated switch (15 kV, 40 kA fault close, 25 kA
short-time current) versus the higher rating that applies when the higher-rated switch (15 kV, 61 kA fault close, 38 kA short-time) is used.
UL and CSA listed integrated rating with an Eaton BHLE or BHCL fuse.
UL and CSA listed integrated rating with Cooper NX fuse.
Note: For additional fuse data, refer to fuse documents in Tab 9.
Table 8.0-7. Eaton Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Fuse Correction Factors
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Eaton
Fuse Type
kV
Class
Fuse Rated
Continuous Current
Enclosure Correction
Factor (F1)
RBA 200/400/800
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
All
5.5
5.5
All
10150
175
1.0
1.00
0.94
11
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL

CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
5.5
5.5
5.5
200
250
300
0.90
0.81
0.94
12
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL

CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
5.5
5.5
5.5
350
400
450
0.84
0.80
0.84
13
CLE
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL, BHCL
5.5
15.5
15.5
600, 750, 1100

10150
175
0.83
1.00
0.89
14

15.5
15.5
15.5
200
250
300
0.86
0.82
0.75
15
Method to Determine the Minimum

Recommended Fuse Size for
Fuse Applied on Primary Side
of a Power Transformer
If the power transformer has one or
more supplementary cooled ratings
(FA, FOA, FOW, low temperature rise
designs permitted to be operated at a
higher permissible temperature rises,
etc.), perform two calculations, (A) and
(B), as outlined below and select
the fuse with the higher continuous

current rating as determined from
calculation (A) or (B). It is possible that
the fuse selection process yields the
same fuse continuous current rating
for the transformer base kVA rating as
well as the maximum supplementary
cooled kVA rating.
If the power transformer has no
supplementary cooled ratings,
perform only calculations (A) to
determine the minimum recommended fuse size.
Calculations (A):
A.1 Calculate the full load current
based on base kVA rating of the
transformer.
Three-phase transformer:
IFL = base kVA rating (E3 * Rated
Primary Voltage)
Single-phase transformer:
IFL = base kVA rating (Rated
Primary Voltage).
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Sheet 08 014
Technical Data
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A.2 Multiply the result of Step A.1

by appropriate factor for a given
Eaton fuse type being considered
for the application:
8.3/15.5/25.8/38 kV RBA:
1.4
5.5 kV CLE/HLE/HCL/BHLE: 1.4
A.3 Select the closest available published fuse with the continuous
current rating that is equal to or
greater than the calculated value
in Step A.2. This is the suggested
minimum recommended fuse size
when the fuse is applied in an open
air with ambient temperature
within 40 C and 30 C, installed
at an altitude of 3300 ft (1000 m)
or less, and operated at 60 Hz.
A.4 If the fuse is applied in an
enclosing package such as metalenclosed switchgear, contact the
enclosing package manufacturer
for appropriate correction factor
for the fuse selected in Step A.3.
When installed within Eatons
switchgear, refer to the
Table 8.0-7 for applicable
enclosure correction factor (F1).
A.5 If the actual ambient air temperature (Tamb) surrounding the fuse
(or surrounding the enclosure if the
fuse is installed in an enclosure) is
greater than 40 C; determine the
appropriate temperature correction
factor, 0.3% per C. This factor is
given by:
F2 = 1 ([Tamb 40] * 0.3 100),
where Tamb = actual ambient
temperature in C. To provide
conservative result, for actual
ambient less than or equal to
40 C, consider F2 = 1.0.
A.6 If the fuse is applied at an altitude
(H) greater than 3300 ft (1000 m)
above sea level, determine the
appropriate altitude correction
factor, 0.5% per 1000 ft. This factor
is given by:
F3 = 1 ([H 3300] * 0.5 100000),
where H = actual altitude in feet.
For H less than or equal to
3300 feet, consider F3 = 1.0.
A.7 Multiply the continuous current

rating of the fuse selected in
Step A.3 by the correction factors
from Steps A.4, A.5 and A.6. This
provides a modified continuous
current value for the selected fuse.
A.8 If the modified continuous current
value as determined in Step A.7 is
equal to or greater than the value
determined in Step A.2, then the
selected fuse is the minimum
recommended size for the application. If the modified continuous
current value is less than the value
determined in Step A.2, select the
next higher available continuous
fuse rating and repeat Steps A.4
through A.8.
Calculations (B):
B.1 Calculate the full load current
based on maximum supplementary
kVA rating of the transformer.
Three-phase transformer:
IFL = Maximum kVA rating
(E3 * Rated Primary Voltage)
Single-phase transformer:
IFL = Maximum kVA rating
(Rated Primary Voltage).
B.2 Multiply the result of Step B.1
by appropriate factor for a given
Eaton fuse type being considered
for the application:
8.3/15.5/25.8/38 kV RBA:
1.2
B.3 Select the closest available published fuse with the continuous
current rating that is equal to or
greater than the calculated value
in Step B.2. This is the suggested
minimum recommended fuse size
when the fuse is applied in an open
air with ambient temperature
within 40 C and 30 C, installed
at an altitude of 3300 ft (1000 m)
or less, and operated at 60 Hz.
B.4 If the fuse is applied in an enclosing

package such as metal-enclosed
switchgear, contact the enclosing
package manufacturer for appropriate correction factor for the fuse
selected in Step B.3. When installed
within Eatons switchgear, refer
to the Table 8.0-7 for applicable
enclosure correction factor (F1).
B.5 If the actual ambient air temperature (Tamb) surrounding the fuse
(or surrounding the enclosure if the
fuse is installed in an enclosure) is
greater than 40 C; determine the
appropriate temperature correction factor, 0.3% per C. This factor
is given by:
F2 = 1 ([Tamb 40] * 0.3 100),
where Tamb = actual ambient
temperature in C.
To provide conservative result, for
actual ambient less than or equal
to 40 C, consider F2 = 1.0.
B.6 If the fuse is applied at an altitude
(H) greater than 3300 ft (1000 m)
above sea level, determine the
appropriate altitude correction
factor, 0.5% per 1000 ft. This factor
is given by:
F3 = 1 ([H 3300] * 0.5 100000),
where H = actual altitude in feet.
For H less than or equal to
3300 feet, consider F3 = 1.0.
B.7 Multiply the continuous current
rating of the fuse selected in
Step B.3 by the correction factors
from Steps B.4, B.5 and B.6. This
provides a modified continuous
current value for the selected fuse.
B.8 If the modified continuous current
value as determined in Step B.7 is
equal to or greater than the value
determined in Step B.2, then the
selected fuse is the minimum
recommended size for the application. If the modified continuous
current value is less than the value
determined in Step B.2, select the
next higher available continuous
fuse rating and repeat Steps B.4
through B.8.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
February 2015

8.0-15
Sheet 08 015
Technical Data
Example #1:
1500 kVA, three-phase, 4.16 kV/480 V
transformer, no supplemental rating,
Eaton Type CLE Primary Fuses are
applied in Eatons metal-enclosed
switchgear, ambient surrounding the
switchgear is 45 C, switchgear is
installed at an altitude of 3000 feet
above sea level.
Because the transformer does not
have any supplemental ratings, only
calculations (A) are required.
Step A.1: IFL = 1500 (E3 * 4.16) =
208.18 A.
Step A.2: IFL*1.4 = 208.18 * 1.4 =
291.45 A.
Step A.3: Closest available CLE fuse
rating equal to or higher
than 291.45 is 300 A.
Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, enclosure
derating factor (F1) for
5.5 kV CLE 300 A fuse is 0.94.
Step A.5: Ambient temperature
correction factor F2 = 1
([45 40] * 0.3 100) = 0.985.
Step A.6: Altitude correction factor
F3 = 1.0
Step A.7: Modified continuous current
value = 300 * 0.94 * 0.985 *
1.0 = 277.77 A.
Step A.8: Because the modified
continuous current value of
277.77 is less than 291.45 A
calculated in Step A.2, select
the next higher available CLE
fuse rating, which is 350 A,
and repeat calculations
Steps A.4 to A.8.
Step A.5: F2 = 0.985
Step A.6: F3 = 1.0
value = 350 * 0.84 * 0.985 *
1.0 = 289.59 A.
continuous current value
of 289.59 A is less than
291.45 A calculated in the
initial Step A.2, select the
next higher available CLE
Steps A.4 to A.8.
Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, Enclosure


15.5 kV CLE 200 A fuse is 0.86.
Step A.5: F2 = 0.985
Step A.5: F2 = 1.0
ii
Step A.6: F3 = 1.0
Step A.6: F3 = 0.994

value = 400 * 0.8 * 0.985 *
1.0 = 315.2 A.

value = 200 * 0.86 * 1.0 *
0.994 = 171 A.

of 315.2 A is greater than
initial Step A.2, 400 A is the
minimum recommended
fuse size for this transformer
application. Select 5.5 kV
CLE 400 A fuse.

of 171 A is greater than
minimum recommended
application. Select 15.5 kV
CLE 200 A fuse.
Example #2:
Example #3:
2500 kVA, three-phase, 13.2 kV/480 V

transformer, no supplemental rating,
Eaton Type CLE Primary Fuses are
applied in Eatons metal-enclosed
switchgear, ambient surrounding the
switchgear is 30 C, switchgear is
installed at an altitude of 4500 feet
above sea level.
2500/3333 kVA AA/FA, three-phase,

13.2 kV/480 V transformer, Eaton
Type CLE Primary Fuses are applied
in Eatons metal-enclosed switchgear,
ambient surrounding the switchgear
is 40 C, switchgear is installed at an
altitude of less than 3300 feet above
sea level.
Because the transformer does not

have any supplemental ratings, only
calculations (A) are required.
Because the transformer has supplemental rating, both calculations (A)

and (B) are required.
Step A.1: IFL = 2500 (E3 * 13.2) =

109.34 A.
Calculations (A):
Step A.2: IFL*1.5 = 109.34 * 1.5 =

164.02 A.
than 164.02 is 175 A.
15.5 kV CLE 175 A fuse is 0.89.
Step A.5: Because actual ambient is
less than 40 C, F2 = 1.0.
F3 = 1 ([4500 3300] * 0.5
100000) = 0.994.
value = 175 * 0.89 * 1.0 *
0.994 = 154.82 A.
154.82 is less than 164.02 A
Steps A.4 to A.8.
Step A.1: IFL = 2500 (E3 * 13.2) =

109.34 A.
Step A.2: IFL*1.5 = 109.34 * 1.5 =
164.02 A.
than 164.02 is 175 A.
15.5 kV CLE 175 A fuse is 0.89.
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
Step A.5: Because actual ambient is

less than or equal to 40 C,
F2 = 1.0.
15

F3 = 1.0.
16

value = 175 * 0.89 * 1.0 *
1.0 = 155.75 A.
17

155.75 is less than 164.02 A
Steps A.4 to A.8.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Sheet 08 016
Technical Data

derating factor (F1) for 15.5 kV
CLE 200 A fuse is 0.86.
Step B.5: Because actual ambient is

less than or equal to 40 C,
F2 = 1.0.
ii
Step A.5: F2 = 1.0
Step B.6: F3 = 1.0.
Step A.6: F3 = 1.0
Step B.7: Modified continuous current

value = 200 * 0.86 * 1.0 *
1.0 = 172 A.
1
2
3
4
5

value = 200 * 0.86 * 1.0 *
1.0 = 172 A.
minimum recommended
application on the basis of
base kVA of 2500.
Calculations (B):
Step B.8: Because the modified

of 172 A is less than 189.51 A
calculated in Step B.2, select
Steps B.4 to B.8.
Step B.1: IFL = 3333 (E3 * 13.2) =

145.78 A
Step B.5: F2 = 1.0
Step B.2: IFL*1.3 = 145.78 * 1.3 =

189.51 A
Step B.3: Closest available CLE fuse

than 189.51 is 200 A.
Step B.7: Modified continuous current

value = 250 * 0.82 * 1.0 *
1.0 = 205 A
10
11
Step B.4: From Table 8.0-7, enclosure

derating factor (F1) for 15.5 kV
CLE 200 A fuse is 0.86.
From final Step B.8, minimum

recommended fuse rating = 250 A.
Select the fuse with the higher continuous current rating as determined
from calculation (A) or (B). Therefore,
select 15.5 kV, CLE 250 A fuse for this
transformer application.
Step B.4: From Table 8.0-7, Enclosure

15.5 kV CLE 250 A fuse is 0.82.
From final Step A.8, minimum

recommended fuse rating = 200 A.
Step B.6: F3 = 1.0
Step B.8: Because the modified

initial Step B.2, 250 A is the
minimum recommended
application on the basis of
its maximum kVA of 3333.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-17
Sheet 08 017
Technical Data
Surge Protection
IEEE standard C62.11 for Metal Oxide
Surge Arresters lists the maximum
rated ambient temperature as 40 C.
The ambient temperature inside
an Eaton MVS switchgear vertical
section may exceed this temperature,
especially in outdoor applications
where solar radiation may produce
a significant contribution to the

temperature. Table 8.0-8 lists the
recommended minimum duty cycle
voltage rating for various system
grounding methods. Surge arrester
rating is based upon the ambient air
temperature in the switchgear vertical
section not exceeding 55 C.
ii
1
2
Table 8.0-8. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Service
Voltage
Line-to-Line
kV

Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Solidly
Nominal
Nominal
Arrester Ratings kV
Nominal
MCOV
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Nominal
Nominal
Arrester Ratings kV
MCOV
MCOV
Nominal
MCOV
MCOV
MCOV
3
4
2.30
2.40
3.30
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
4.00
4.16
4.76
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
4.80
6.60
6.90
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.20
8.32
8.40
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
11.00
11.50
12.00
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
9
10
10
7.65
8.40
8.40
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
12.47
13.20
13.80
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
12
10.20
10.20
10.20
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
15
10.20
10.20
12.70
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
10
14.40
18.00
20.78
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
21
27
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
15
18
21
12.70
15.30
17.00
21
27
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
22.00
22.86
23.00
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
18
21
21
15.30
17.00
17.00
30
24.40
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
21
24
24
17.00
19.50
19.50
30
36
36
24.40
29.00
29.00
24.94
25.80
26.40
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
24
19.50
19.50
19.50
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
27
19.50
19.50
22.00
36
36
39
29.00
29.00
31.50
33.00
34.50
38.00
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
30
30
24.40
24.40
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
36
36
36
29.00
29.00
29.00
45
48
36.50
39.00
11
12
13
14
Note: MCOV = Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Sheet 08 018
LayoutsDimensions
i
ii
1
2
3
Typical Arrangements5 and 15 kV

The drawings in this section represent
are availablerefer to Eaton. Many
other configurations and combinations
are available. Two voltage transformers
for customer metering and one control
transformer for auxiliary power can
be mounted in the structures shown.
For control power transformer larger

than 1 kVA, additional space is
required. Depth of units will vary due
to cable entrance and exit requirements, the addition of lightning arresters, instrument transformers, special
cable terminators, etc. Disconnect
fuses may require wider sections.
55.25
(1403.4)
34.9449.25
(887.51251.0)
Entry
4
5
Top
70.00
(1778.0)
Bottom
62.00
(1574.8)

cables. Structure depth is based on
two 500 kcm XLP or EPR insulated
cables per phase using preformed
slip-on cable termination devices.
Refer to note below for minimum
required depth when more than two
cables per phase are used. For unit
Tabs 13 and 14.
55.25
(1403.4)
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
6
Outdoor
41.00 (1041.4)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 1
Single Unit
Cable In and Out 1
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
55.25
(1403.4)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00 48.00
(914.4 1219.2)
12
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00 48.00
(914.4 1219.2)
Arrangement 6
Main Incoming Metering Section (optional)
with Main Switch and Feeders
13
14
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
16
17
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 7
Main Incoming Metering Section (optional)
with Main Lugs Only Feeders
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
ATC
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
ATC
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 8
Two Switch Auto TransferSingle Load
18
36.00
(914.4)
55.28
(1404.1)
62.00
(1574.8)
15
Arrangement 5
Duplex Arrangement
Source Selective
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
11
36.00
(914.4)
55.28
(1404.1)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
10
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 4
Primary for Liquid
Filled Transformer
Arrangement 3
Selector Switch
Arrangement 2
Transformer
20.00
(508.0)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 9
Three Switch Auto TransferMainTieMain with Feeders
19
Figure 8.0-10. 5 and 15 kV Typical ArrangementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
20
Note: Width for Utility Metering Structures may vary.

Note: ATC = Automatic Transfer Controller (see Page 8.0-11). M = Motor Operator.
Note: Minimum depth of MVS unit: Up to two 500 kcm per phase: 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) or 62.00 inches (1574.8 mm) deep; three or four 500 kcm
per phase: 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm) deep, five or six 500 kcm per phase: 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) deep.
21
Mini-MVS switch unit in 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide, 27.25-inch (692.2 mm) deep and 66.00-inch (1676.4 mm) tall enclosure can be provided
for 5 kV, 200 A.

CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-19
Sheet 08 019
LayoutsDimensions

are availablerefer to Eaton. Many
for metering and one control transformer
for auxiliary power can be mounted

in the structures shown. For control
power above 1 kVA, additional space is
required. Depth of units will vary due
to cable entrance and exit requirements,
instrument transformers, special cable
terminators, etc. Cables are shown out
top and bottom for layout only. Top or

bottom must be selected for incoming
and for outgoing cables. Cable sizing is
based on two 500 kcmil XLP or
EPR insulated cables per phase using
preformed slip-on cable termination
devices. For unit substation alignment
details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
i
ii
1
2
80.00
(2032)
80.00
(2032)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
RBA
or S&C
Fuses
RBA
or S&C
Fuses
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
100.00
(2540.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
RBA
or S&C
Fuses
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
Outdoor
53.00 (1346.2)
Indoor
48.00 (1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
Arrangement 2
Transformer
Arrangement 1
Single Unit
Cable In and Out
Outdoor
35.00 (889.0)
Indoor
30.00 (762.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
or S&C
Fuses
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
Arrangement 3
Primary for Liquid-Filled
Transformer
48.00
(1219.0)
Arrangement 4
Duplex Arrangement
Source Selective
6
7
8
70.00
(1778.0)
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
RBA
Fuses
RBA
Fuses
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
48.00-60.00
(1219.0-1524.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
30.00
(762.0)
11
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
Arrangement 6
Main Lugs with FeedersMetering Section (optional)
RBA
Fuses
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
ATC
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
30.00
(762.0)
12
13
14
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
15
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
16
ATC
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
17
48.00
(1219.0)
Arrangement 7
Two Switch Auto TransferSingle Load
48.00
(1219.0)
30.00
(762.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
30.00
(762.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Arrangement 8
Three Switch Auto TransferMain Tie Main with Feeders
Figure 8.0-11. 27 and 38 kV Typical ArrangementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: Width for Utility Metering Structures may vary.
Note: ATC = Automatic Transfer Controller (see Page 8.0-11). M = Motor Operator.

CA08104001E
48.00
(1219.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
48.00-60.00
(1219.0-1524.0)
100.00
(2540.0)
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
10
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
Arrangement 5
Main Device with FeedersMetering Section (optional)
RBA
Fuses
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
18
19
20
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 020
LayoutsDimensions
i
ii
1
2
Typical ArrangementsMVS Connecting to Other Switchgear

are availablesee Page 8.0-25. Many
for metering and one control transformer
for auxiliary power can be mounted in
20.00
(508.0)
Main
Switch
55.30
MVS
(1404.6)
Switchgear
36.00
(914.4)
Main
Switch
90.40
(2296.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
1.25
(31.8)
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
MVS
AMPGARD
Switchgear Medium
30.00
Voltage
(762.0)
Starters
Plan View
62.00
(1574.8)
36.00
(914.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
36.00
(914.4)
20.00
(508.0)
26.00 or 19.00
(660.4 or 482.6)
Plan View
MEF
Switchgear
36.00
(914.4)
Front View
26.00 or 19.00
(660.4 or 482.6)
Front View
Arrangement 1
Indoor Top Cable to MV MCC
Arrangement 2
Indoor Bottom Cable to MV MCC
Arrangement 3Indoor MVS

Close-coupled to MEF Switchgear
11
4.00
(101.6)
Feeder
Switch
12
13
MVS
MEF
Switchgear Switchgear
1.25
(31.8)
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
92.00
(2336.8)
Front View
10
36.00
(914.4)

cables. Cable sizing is based on two
500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables
per phase using preformed slip-on
cable termination devices. For unit
Tabs 13 and 14.
Feeder
Switch
92.00
(2336.8)
55.30
(1404.6)
Feeder
Switch
36.00
(914.4)
Plan View
Feeder
Switch
AMPGARD
30.00
Medium
(762.0)
Voltage
Starters
5
6
the structures shown. For control power

transformer larger than 1 kVA, additional
space is required. Depth of units will
vary due to cable entrance and exit
requirements, the addition of lightning
arresters, instrument transformers,
special cable terminators, etc. Disconnect fuses may require wider sections.
94.37
(2397.0)
MVS
Switchgear
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
Feeder
Switch
80.00
(2032.0)
96.25
(2444.8)
MVS
Switchgear
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
14
15
36.00
(914.4)
4.60
(116.8)
36.00
(914.4)
Plan View
(Vac-Clad Main Bus Location Only)
36.00
(914.4)
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
16
Feeder
Switch
95.50
(2425.7)
Feeder
Switch
Feeder
Switch
90.40
(2296.2)
Feeder
Switch
17
36.00
(914.4)
Plan View
18
19
20
21
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
4.00
(101.6)
Front View
Front View
A) Depth 84.00 (2133.6) or 94.00 (2387.6) inches to rear align with MVA.
B) Cable exit rear only, top or bottom.
Arrangement 4Indoor to Metal-Clad Switchgear
A) DepthSection adjacent MVA, 80.00 inches (2032).

B) Depth addition MVS sections 55.30 inches (1404.6).
C) 2000A bus maximum.
Arrangement 5Outdoor Only to Metal-Clad Switchgear
Figure 8.0-12. Connections to AMPGARD MCC (7.2 kV Maximum) and to VCPW Switchgear (15 kV Maximum)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-21
Sheet 08 021
LayoutsDimensions, 5 and 15 kV Switch
Main Bus
Main Bus
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
1.36
(35.0)
H1,2
Switch
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
Fuse
2.19
(56.0)
ii
Taps
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
Switch
X1-4
515 kVA
CPT
(SinglePhase)
Fuse
Load
3
4
31.60
(803.0)
Depth
Depth
See Table 8.0-11
See Table 8.0-9
Figure 8.0-13. Front Access Feeder CircuitFused or Unfused
Figure 8.0-15. Rear Access Feeder Circuit With Bus Connected CPT
Table 8.0-9. Front Access
Main Bus
No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm)

(Based on 500 kcmil)
5 kV
15 kV
1.36
(35.0)
1 or 2 out bottom
34.94 (887.5)
34.94 (887.5)
1 or 2 out top
49.25 (1250.0)
49.25 (1250.0)
Table 8.0-10. Rear Access
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor

5 kV
15 kV
Switch
Load
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
Fuse
3 or 4 top or bottom
62.00 (1574.8)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
Load
34.15
(867.0)

5 kV
15 kV
1 or 2 out bottom
62.00 (1574.8)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2.19
(56.0)
Load
2.19
(56.0)
31.60
(803.0)
13
62.00 (1574.8)
14
Depth
See Table 8.0-10
15
Figure 8.0-14. Rear Access Feeder CircuitFused or Unfused
16
17
18
19
20
CA08104001E
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 022
Main Bus
Main Bus
ii
Taps
1.36
(35.0)
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
H1,2
2
3
Switch
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
515 kVA
CPT
(SinglePhase)
X1-4
Fuse
2.19
(56.0)
40.22
(1022.0)
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
Switch
Line
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
Fuse
2.19
(56.0)
Load
Load
34.15
(867.0)
31.60
(803.0)
Depth
6
7
Depth
See Table 8.0-14
See Table 8.0-12
Figure 8.0-16. Rear Access Feeder Circuit With Bus Connected CPT
Figure 8.0-18. Rear Access Cable In/Cable Out With Main Bus
Main Bus

5 kV
15 kV
1 or 2 out top
9
Lug
10
11
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor

5 kV
15 kV
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
13
14
2.19
(56.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
Switch
55.25 (1403.3)
62.00 (1574.8)
Fuse
12
70.00 (1778.0)
1.36
(35.0)
Load
31.60
(803.0)

5 kV
15 kV
3 or 4 top in/bottom out
62.00 (1574.8)
70.00 (1778.0)
5 or 6 top in/bottom out
70.00 (1778.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
Depth
See Table 8.0-13
15
Figure 8.0-17. Rear Access Cable In/Cable Out With Main Bus
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-23
Sheet 08 023
i
ii
20.00
(508.0)
1
18.00
(457.0)
Line
2
Line
3
110.37
(2803.0)
Indoor
Switch
115.46
(2933.0)
Outdoor
Switch
5
Fuse
Fuse
Load
Load
7
31.60
(803.0)
31.60
(803.0)
8
9
Depth
Depth
See Table 8.0-15
See Table 8.0-15
Figure 8.0-19. Rear Access Indoor, Cable In/Cable Out
11
Table 8.0-15. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom

5 kV
15 kV
1 or 2 top in bottom out
34.94 (887.5)
34.94 (887.5)
1 or 2 top in top out
49.25 (1250.0)
49.25 (1250.0)
10
Figure 8.0-20. Rear Access Outdoor, Cable In/Cable Out
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CA08104001E
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 024
i
ii
1
2
3
135.00
(3429.0)
Outdoor
Tall Height
135.00
(3429.0)
Outdoor
Tall Height
110.00
(2794.0)
Outdoor
Low Height
Note (A)
127.00
(3225.8)
Indoor
Tall Height
110.00
(2794.0)
Outdoor
Low Height
Note (A)
Switch
127.00
(3225.8)
Indoor
Tall Height
Fuse
Fuse
101.50
(2578.1)
Indoor
Low Height
Note (A)
101.50
(2578.1)
Indoor
Low Height
Note (A)
Switch
7
8
9
Front
Depth
See Table 8.0-16
Front
Depth
See Table 8.0-17
10
Figure 8.0-21. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom
Figure 8.0-22. Rear Access, Cable Entry and ExitTop or Bottom
11
Note A: Low height dimensions are for non-fused, manually

operated switch only. For all motor operated switches and all
fused switches, tall height dimensions apply.
Note A: Low height dimensions are for non-fused, manually

operated switch only. For all motor operated switches and all
fused switches, tall height dimensions apply.
12
Table 8.0-16. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom
Table 8.0-17. Rear Access, Cable Entry and ExitTop or Bottom
13

27 kV
38 kV

27 kV
38 kV
1 or 2
1 or 2
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-25
Sheet 08 025
LayoutsDimensions
Front Only Access Bottom Entry,
Top or Bottom Exit
16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
Optional
Rear Door
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
33.00 (838.2)
13.00 (330.2)
1.25 (31.8)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
A&B
Roof Layout
Roof Layout
19.00 (482.6)
36.00 (914.4)
16
Roof Layout
10
Front
Front
20.00 (508.0)
36.00 (914.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
Optional
Rear Door
6.60 (167.6)
8.00 (203.2)
42.00 (1066.8)
8.00 (203.2)
6.00 (152.4)
1.25 (31.8)
A&B
8.00 (203.2)
Floor Layout
D
10
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
10
Front
16
Floor Layout
10
D
10
8.00 (203.2)
16
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
Front
Floor Layout
10
16.00 (406.4)
D
10
B
16
10
Front
56.00 (1422.4)

2
Cable location not available with top main bus.

When high continuous current fusing or instrumentation is required, consult the Eaton factory for guidance.
Note: A = Power Cable to Load. B = Power Cable from Source. See Figures 8.0-10 and 8.0-13 through 8.0-20 as applicable for dimension D
on Pages 8.0-18 and 8.0-21 through 8.0-23.
Rear Access Top
or Bottom Exit
8.00 (203.2)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
ii
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
Rear Access Top or Bottom

Entry and Exit
9
10
Front Only Access Bottom

Entry, Top or Bottom Exit
16.00 (406.4)
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
46.00 (1168.4)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
Optional
Rear Door
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
Roof Layout
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
A&B
Roof Layout
11
16.00 (406.4)
1.25 (31.8)
12
Roof Layout
13
14
Front
Front
48.00 (1219.2)
59.00 (1498.6)
8.00 (203.2)
11.00 (279.4)
15.00 (381.0)
16
6.60 (167.6)
6.00 (152.4)
Floor Layout
D
A&B
Floor Layout
Floor Layout
16.00 (406.4)
Front
8.00 (203.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
15
78.00 (1981.2)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
Optional
Rear Door
6.60 (167.6)
8.00 (203.2)
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
Front
48.00 (1219.2)
16
16
17
16
18
Front
78.00 (1981.2)
19

3
When high continuous current fusing or instrumentation is required, consult the Eaton factory for guidance.
Note: A = Power Cable to Load. B = Power Cable from Source. See Figures 8.0-11 and 8.0-21 through 8.0-22 as applicable for dimension D
on Pages 8.0-19 and 8.0-24.

CA08104001E
20
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 026
LayoutsDimensions
a Locations for tie-down 0.65 (16.5) diameter holes in four
places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should
be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5 (M12 x 1.75 CL 10.9) and
tightened to 75 ft-lbs (101.7 Nm).
i
ii
5.00
(127.0)
Typ.
6
Optional
Rear Door
4.25
(108.0)
1.25
(31.8)
2.95
(74.9)
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
3
1
1.25
(31.8)
4.25
(108.0)
FRONT DOOR
8
2
4
Min.
9
10
12
d Minimum clearances in front is the width of the widest

vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority
e The standard minimum recommended distance is 30.00
inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear access
for installation and maintenance. The authority having
jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
f For MVS only. If the application is specifically provided
by contract as not requiring rear access as stated in 5,
then the minimum recommended distance is 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm).
g If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is
the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch
(25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require
a larger distance.
h Finished foundations surface shall be level within
0.06 inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)

left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.
11
c The standard minimum clearances on side24.00 inches

(609.6 mm)may need to be added for passage from
front to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may
Figure 8.0-25. Typical Anchor Plan515 kV Indoor or Outdoor
Switch
Description
Indoor
Outdoor
Non-fused switch
Fuses (3), add
Indoor transition
1500 (681)
200 (91)
300 (136)
1800 (817)
200 (91)
Outdoor throat
5 or 15 kV Class
500 (227)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Dimensions in Inches (mm).

CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-27
Sheet 08 027
LayoutsDimensions
i
4.50
(114.3)
Typ.
1.25 (31.8)
Optional
Rear
Door
ii
2
2.12
(53.8)
Typ.
0.44
(11.2)
Typ.
5.81
(147.6)
Typ.
3
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
1.28
(32.5)
Typ.
6.00
(152.4)
Min. 3
3
1
Optional
Rear Door
Min.
5
3
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
7
1.25
(31.8)
Typ.
0.44
(11.2)
Typ.
1.28
(32.5)
Typ.
5.81
(147.6)
Typ.
FRONT DOOR
FRONT
4
2
Min.
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
Min.
8
9
Figure 8.0-26. Typical Anchor Plan2738 kV Outdoor
Figure 8.0-27. Typical Anchor Plan2738 kV Indoor
a Typical location for four (two front, two back) Eaton

supplied tie down clips for all 2738 kV. Customer
provided bolts for anchoring should be 0.5013 min.
SAE Grade 5 M12 x 1.75 min. CL 10.9 or stronger, and
tightened to 75 ft-lbs.
b Door swing equals vertical section width at 90.

c Minimum clearance on side24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
may need to be added for passage from front to rear.
Local jurisdictions may require a larger clearance.
Switch
Description
10
Indoor
Outdoor
Non-fused switch
Fuses (3), add
Indoor transition
2000 (908)
300 (136)
1100 (499)
2400 (1090)
300 (136)
Outdoor throat
Motor operator adder
400 (182)
1200 (545)
400 (182)
11
27 or 38 kV Class
12
13
14
d Minimum clearance in front is the width of the widest

vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm), but not less
than that required by the NEC. Local jurisdictions may
15
e Minimum clearance in rear is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).

If rear doors are supplied, the minimum clearance is the
width of the widest vertical section equipped with a rear
door plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Local jurisdictions may
require a larger clearance.
16
17
f Finished foundations surface shall be level within

left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as
18
19
g Locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) anchor bolts.
20
Dimensions in Inches (mm).
CA08104001E
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 028
LayoutsDimensions
Mini-MVS Switch
(5 kV, 200A Only)
ii
Arrester
Option
6.00
(152.4)
Maximum weight of switch assembly

is 550 lbs (250 kg).
12.69
(322.3)
17.38
(441.5)
Line
Lug
2
3
27.25
(692.2)
Entrance/Exit
Area Top
4
5
53.56
(1360.4)
2.12
(53.8)
Front
26.00
(660.4)
Load
Lug
16.38
(416.1)
15.00
(381.0)
4.11
(104.4)
Cable
Routing
Area
4.11
(104.4)
29.50
(749.3)
1
Top View
Ground
Lug
7
8
27.25
(692.2)
Entrance/Exit
Area Bottom
2.12
(53.8)
Side Section View Non-Fused Switch
Figure 8.0-29. Front and Side View of Non-Fused Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly
3.37
(85.6)
27.25
(692.2)
Front View w/o Door and

Screen Barrier Non-Fused Switch
Cable Size #62/0, 1/Phase.

Arrester
Option
10
4.11
(104.4)
11
Front
26.00
(660.4)
4.11
(104.4)
12.69
(322.3)
Floor Plan
12
Line
Lug
17.38
(441.5)
6.00
(152.4)
Lifting Plates
13
Cable
Routing
Area
14
Viewing
Window
15
16
53.56
(1360.4)
66.25
(1682.8)
17
11.50
(292.1)
18
Front View w/o Door and

Screen Barrier CLE Fused Switch
21
Ground
Lug
27.25
(692.2)
Side Section View CLE Fused Switch
19
20
Load
Lug
16.25
(412.8)
26.00
(660.4)
Front View
Figure 8.0-28. Front View and

Conduit Entrance
Figure 8.0-30. Front and Side View of Fused CLE Mini-MVS Switch Assembly
2
Cable Size #62/0, 1/Phase.
Note: The Mini-MVS unit is designed for front access only or as front and rear access. Cable
terminations are accessible from the front. The unit can be placed against the wall, with a
minimum 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) clearance. For rear access applications, a minimum 30.00-inch
(762.0) clearance is recommended. Check for additional NEC code clearance requirements.
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-29
Sheet 08 029
General Description
MVS-ND Medium VoltageLoad Interrupter Switchgear

5 and 15 kV (18.00-Inch Wide)
Mechanical indicators show whether

the switch mechanism
is open or closed
Provisions for padlocking the switch
in open or closed position
Provision for padlocking the main
door in closed position
Space heaters are provided as
standard for outdoor switchgear
(120 V or 240 Vac control supply is
to be provided by the purchaser)
Instrumentation, CTs, VTs and CPT

Due to compact dimensions, MVS-ND
units are not designed for mounting of
CTs, VTs or a CPT. If the application
requires CTs, VTs or a CPT, a conventional 36.00-inch-wide MVS unit is
required, which can be close-coupled
to the MVS-ND unit through an
18.00-inch transition section.

Indoor Unit
Indoor with Top Hat
Outdoor with Top Hat
General Description
Type MVS-ND load interrupter switchgear offers the same great functionality
of traditional MVS switchgear in a
reduced footprint. It uses a Type MVS-ND
load interrupter switch with its poles
arranged front-to-back and provides
the narrowest footprint available without the use of environmentally harmful
SF6 gas. Type MVS-ND switchgear, like
all other Eaton metal-enclosed and
metal-clad switchgear, depends on air
for its primary phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground insulation. It is
designed for general power distribution or transformer primary switching,
where infrequent switching means is
required.
Type MVS-ND load interrupter switchgear is available as follows:
Rated maximum voltage of

4.76 or 15 kV
Rated continuous and load-break
current rating of 600 or 1200 A
Indoor or outdoor non-walk-in
enclosures
Can be supplied as single unit
or lineup of multiple units with
main bus
Duplex arrangement for Source 1
or Source 2 selection
Main-tie-main lineup
Close-coupled primary for dry or
liquid-filled transformer
Close-coupled to Eatons Type MVS,
Type VCP-W or AMPGARD motor
control center via an 18.00-inch
transition section
CA08104001E
Supplied with manually or motor

operated switches
Supplied with non-fused or fused
switches with 5 kV BHLE 10450 A or
15 kV BHLE 10250 A or BHCL 300 A
primary fuses
Optional auxiliary switch with up to
5a/5b contacts
Optional space heaters for indoor
switchgear
Supplied with key interlocks to force
a desired sequence of operation
Surge arresters (optional) can be
added to the line or load side
Standard Features
Air insulated three-pole, gangoperated, quick-make, quick-break

load interrupter switch mechanism
provides speed of operation that is
independent of the operator for safe
and reliable switching
Proven load interrupter switch
design that uses main and flicker
blade technology
A through-the-door switch operation
from the front of the switchgear
A door interlock prevents inadvertent
opening of the enclosures front
door while the load interrupter
switch is in the closed position
A switch interlock prevents
inadvertent closing of the switch when
the enclosures front door is open
Viewing window provides clear,
visible confirmation of opened and
closed switch contacts
Eatons MVS-ND load interrupter

switchgear meets or exceeds the
requirements of the following
industry standards:

ANSI C37.57
NEMA SG5
CSA C22.2 No. 31
Type MVS-ND switches meet or
exceed the requirements of the
following industry standards:

ANSI C37.58
ANSI C37.22
NEMA SG6
5/15 kV MVS-ND load interrupter
switchgear can be provided with UL
or CSA listing.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
5/15 kV MVS-ND load interrupter

switchgear has been qualified for
seismic applications by actual testing
to meet requirements of IBC 2006 and
CBC 2007. Refer to Tab 1 for information for this and other Eaton products.
18
19
20
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 030
Technical Data
Technical Data
Available Ratings
ii
Refer to Table 8.0-20 for available Type MVS-ND switchgear assembly and Table 8.0-21 for MVS-ND switch ratings.
Table 8.0-20. Type MVS-ND Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter Switchgear Assembly Main Cross Bus Ratings
1
2
3
4
5
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage,
60 Hz, 1 Minute
Lightning Impulse
Withstand Voltage
(LIWV) (BIL)
Rated Main Bus

Continuous
Current
Rated Short-Time
Withstand (2 Second)
Rated Momentary
Withstand (10 Cycle) (167 ms)
kV rms
kV rms
kV Peak
Amperes
kA rms sym
kA rms Asym
kA Peak
4.76
4.76
19
19
60
60
600, 1200
600, 1200
25
38
40
61
65
99
15.00
15.00
36
36
95
95
600, 1200
600, 1200
25
38
40
61
65
99
Table 8.0-21. Type MVS-ND Non-Fused Load Interrupter Switch Ratings 1

Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage,
60 Hz, 1 Minute
Lightning Impulse
Withstand Voltage
(LIWV) (BIL)
Rated
Continuous
and Load Break
Current
Rated Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(2 Second)
Rated Fault-Close
and Momentary
(10 Cycle) (167 ms)
Rated
Magnetizing
Current
kV rms
kV rms
kV Peak
Amperes
kA rms sym
kA rms Asym
kA Peak
Amperes
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
19
19
19
19
60
60
60
60
600
600
1200
1200
25
38
25
38
40
61
40
61
65
99
65
99
12
12
24
24
50
50
20
20
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
36
36
36
36
95
95
95
95
600
600
1200
1200
25
38
25
38
40
61
40
61
65
99
65
99
12
12
24
24
30
30
10
10
6
7
8
Rated Load
Break
Current
Operations
Fault-close rating of MVS-ND when supplied with 5BHLE 10450 A and 15BHLE 10250 A or 15BHCL 300 A fuses is 160.6 kA peak.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-31
Sheet 08 031
LayoutsDimensions
i
12.00
(304.8)
12.00
(304.8)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
ii
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
2
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
TX
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
TX
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
Single Unit
Cable in Bottom
Out Bottom
Single Unit
Cable in Side
Out Bottom

Transformer Cable
Connected (Incoming
Cables from Top)
TX
18.00
(457.2)
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
Single Unit
Cable in Top
Out Bottom
92.00
(2336.8)

Transformer Cable Connected
(Incoming Cables from Bottom,
Rear Access)

Transformer Cable Connected
Side Access)
60.00
(1524.0)
TX
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
TX
20.00
(508.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
20.00
(508.0)
92.00
(2336.8)
6
7
60.00
(1524.0)
20.00
(508.0)
24.00
(610.0)
12.00
(305.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
10
92.00
(2336.8)
TX
11
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
Transformer Bus Connected
(Incoming Cables from Top)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
6.00
(152.4)
36.00
(914.0)

Rear Access)
42.00
(1067.0)
12
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
Duplex Arrangement
Source Selective

Side Access)
13
14
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
20.00
(508.0)
15
20.00
(508.0)
16
92.00
(2336.8)
17
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
18
18.00
(457.2)
15.00
(381.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
Main Switch and Feeders
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
Main Switch and Feeders
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
15.00
(381.0)
Main-Tie-Main
Figure 8.0-31. 5 and 15 kV

CA08104001E
19
20
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 032
LayoutsDimensions
i
ii
Bus
Main
Switch Transition
60.00
(1524.0)
Section
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
MVS-ND
Switchgear
60.00
(1524.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Plan View
MVS-ND
Switchgear
96.25
(2444.8)
MVS-ND
Switchgear
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Plan View
Main
Switch
96.25
(2444.8)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Plan View
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
60.00
(1524.0)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Section
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
60.00
(1524.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Bus
Feeder
Switch Transition
Section
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
MVS-ND
Switchgear
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
Bus
Main
Switch Transition
Bus
Feeder
Switch Transition
Section
7.50
(190.5)
7.50
(190.5)
Plan View
Main
Switch
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
92.00
(2336.8)
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
92.00
(2336.8)
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
92.00
(2336.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
92.00
(2336.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
7
Feeder
Switch
Feeder
Switch
8
9
10
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Front View
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Front View
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Front View
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Front View
Figure 8.0-32. MVS Connecting to Other Switchgear (Indoor)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-33
Sheet 08 033
LayoutsDimensions
7.50
(190.5)
7.50
(190.5)
Bus
Main
Switch Transition
ii
Bus
Feeder
Switch Transition
Section
Section
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
60.00
(1524.0)
MVS-ND
Switchgear
96.25
(2444.8)
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
60.00
(1524.0)
MVS-ND
Switchgear
96.25
(2444.8)
1
2
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4.00
(101.6)
18.00
(457.2)
4.00
(101.6)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Plan View
Plan View
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
Main
Switch
7
92.00
(2336.8)
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
95.00
(2413.0)
92.00
(2336.8)
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
95.00
(2413.0)
Feeder
Switch
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Front View
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
18.00
(457.2)
Front View
10
11
Figure 8.0-33. MVS Connecting to Other Switchgear (Outdoor)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CA08104001E
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 034
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Sectional Side Views

60.00
(1524.0)
ii
10.00
(254.0)
1
2
3
4
17.00
(431.8)
1.27
(32.3)
Front
Door
1.13
(28.7)
9.36
(237.7)
Bolted Rear Cover
1.57
(39.9)
Switch
Access
Door
92.00
(2336.8)
5
17.89
(454.4)
17.00
(431.8)
80.00
(2032.0)
17.00
(431.8)
6
7
9.36
(237.7)
17.00
(431.8)
23.00
(584.2)
10.00 (254.0)
Lower Main Bus Location
25.60
(650.2)
Lug
Height
Figure 8.0-34. 5 and 15 kV Standard Switch Unit Detail
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-35
Sheet 08 035
LayoutsDimensions, 5 and 15 kV
5 and 15 kV Standard Switch Unit Detail Typical Sectional Side Views Layouts
Top Cable Entry in

6.00-Inch (152.4 mm)
LH/RH Pull Section
ii
Main Bus
Main Bus
98.13
(2492.5)
Outdoor
98.13
(2492.5)
Outdoor
Switch
92.00
(2336.8)
Indoor
Switch
92.00
(2336.8)
Indoor
118.13
(3000.5)
Outdoor
Switch
112.00
(2844.8)
Indoor
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Load
Load
25.54
(648.7)
Load
25.54
(648.7)
25.54
(648.7)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
Figure 8.0-35. Front/Side Access Feeder

CircuitFused or Unfused Top Cable Entry
5
72.00
(1828.8)
Figure 8.0-37. Front/Side Access Feeder Circuit

Fused or Unfused Bottom Cable Entry
12.00
(304.8)
Figure 8.0-39. Front/Side Access Cable In/

Cable OutFused or Unfused
Top Cable Entry in
6.00-Inch (152.4 mm)
LH/RH Pull Section
6
7
8
Main Bus
9
98.13
(2492.5)
Outdoor
10
Switch
92.00
(2336.8)
Indoor
118.13
(3000.5)
Outdoor
118.13
(3000.5)
Outdoor
Fuse
11
Switch
112.00
(2844.8)
Indoor
Load
25.54
(648.7)
Switch
112.00
(2844.8)
Indoor
Fuse
60.00
(1524.0)
72.00
(1828.8)
Load
12.00
(304.8)
Figure 8.0-36. Front/Side Access Feeder

CircuitFused or Unfused Top Cable Entry
25.54
(648.7)
12
Fuse
Load
25.54
(648.7)
60.00
(1524.0)

13
14
60.00
(1524.0)

15
16
17
18
19
20

CA08104001E
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 036
i
ii
22.89
(581.4)
13.50
13.50
(342.9) (342.9)
1
Line
2
3
118.13
(3000.5)
Outdoor
Switch
Switch
112.00
(2844.8)
Indoor
92.00
(2336.8)
Fuse
Fuse
Load
Connection to Dry or
Liquid Transformer
6
7
8
9
16.81
(427.0)
13.50
(342.9)
60.00
(1524.0)
13.50
(342.9)
Figure 8.0-41. Typical Arrester Mounting
12.00
(304.8)
72.00
(1828.8)
60.00
(1524.0)
Figure 8.0-42. Close-Coupled to Dry and Liquid Transformers with 12-Inch Rear Extension, Bottom
Incoming, Rear Access
10
11
12
98.13
(2492.5)
Outdoor
13
Switch
92.00
(2336.8)
Indoor
14
Fuse
15
Bottom
Cable Entry
in 6-Inch
Left Hand/
Right Hand
Pull Section
16
Connection to
Dry or Liquid
Transformer
17
18
19
18.00
(457.2)
6.00
(152.0)
Bottom Cable Entry in 6-Inch

Left Hand/Right Hand Pull Section
24.00
(609.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
Front View
Sectional Side View
20
Figure 8.0-43. Close-Coupled to Dry and Liquid Transformers with 6-Inch Side Pull Section,
Bottom Incoming, Side Access
21

CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-37
Sheet 08 037
Typical Base Plan and Recommended HV Cable Entry/Exit Locations
i
14.00
(355.6)
Roof Layout
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(51.2)
8.00
(203.2)
3
38.37
60.00 (974.6)
(1524.0)
38.37
60.00 (974.6)
(1524.0)
48.00
(1219.2)
72.00
(1828.8)
12.63
(320.8)
3
62.00
(1574.8)
4
5
1.00
(25.4)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
2
18.00
(457.2)
12.63
(320.8)
4.00
(101.6)
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
6.00
(152.4)
12.63
(320.8)
6
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
24.00
(609.6)
18.00
(457.2)
10.00
(254.0)
18.00
(457.2)
13.00
(330.2)
Floor Layout
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
11
3
48.00
(1219.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
12
62.00
(1574.8)
13
1
14
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
18.00
(457.2)
12.63
(320.8)
12.63
(320.8)
9
10
8.00
(203.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
ii
1.00
(25.4)
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
6.00
(152.4)
4.00
(101.6)
18.00
(457.2)
24.00
(609.6)
Switch Unit
LH/RH Side Pull Section
12.63
(320.8)
15
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
10.00
(254.0)
18.00
(457.2)
= Recommended Cable Entry Points
16
17
Rear Pull Section
18
a Area is not available with bottom main bus.

b Area is not available with top main bus.
19
c Area will be limited by top or bottom main bus

Figure 8.0-44. Recommended HV Cable Entry/Exit Locations
20
CA08104001E
21

February 2015
Sheet 08 038
LayoutsDimensionsWeights
Typical Anchor Plan

a Locations for tie-down 0.75 (19.0) diameter holes in six
places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should be
0.5013 min. Grade 5 (M12 x 1.75 CL 10.9) and tightened
to 75 ft-lbs (101.7 Nm).
ii
1
5
6
3.00
(76.2)
2
3
Rear
Cover
1.13
(28.7)
22.88
(581.2)
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
3 5
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
3 5
26.44
(671.6)
6
7
5.94
(150.9)
e The standard minimum recommended distance is

36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for assemblies requiring
rear or side access for installation and maintenance.
The authority having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
3.00
(76.2)
1
Front
Door
f For MVS-ND only. The application is specifically

provided by contract as not requiring rear access as
stated in Note 5, then the minimum recommended
distance is 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
1.28
(32.5)
g Finished foundations surface shall be level within

left-to-right. Front-to-back and diagonally as measured
by a laser level.
9
10
c The standard minimum clearances on side24.00 inches

(609 mm)may need to be added for passage from front
to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
d Minimum clearances in front is the width of the widest
vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority
60.00
(1524.0)
4.00
(102.0)
Figure 8.0-45. Typical Anchor Plan

Table 8.0-22. Type MVS-ND Fused Load Interrupter Switch StructuresApproximate Weights
11
12
Structure
Type
Switch without Top Hat
13
Switch with Top Hat
14
15
16
DimensionsInches (mm)
Width
Depth
Weightlb (kg)
Height
Indoor Unit
Outdoor Unit
18.00 (457.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
92.00 (2336.8)
800 (363)
900 (408)
18.00 (457.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
950 (431)
1100 (499)
24.00 (609.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
92.00 (2336.8)
875 (397)
1000 (454)
24.00 (609.6)
72.00 (1828.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
1025 (465)
1200 (544)
18.00 (457.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
112.00 (2844.8)
900 (408)
1000 (454)
18.00 (457.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
1050 (476)
1200 (544)
24.00 (609.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
112.00 (2844.8)
975 (442)
1100 (499)
24.00 (609.6)
72.00 (1828.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
1125 (510)
1300 (590)
Main Bus Transition
15.00 (381.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
92.00 (2336.8)
500 (227)
600 (272)
Transition Unit
18.00 (457.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
92.00 (2336.8)
800 (363)
900 (408)
Duplex Unit with Top Hat
36.00 (914.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
112.00 (2844.8)
1700 (771)
1900 (862)
36.00 (914.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
1850 (839)
2050 (930)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
92.00 (2336.8)
2200 (998)
2500 (1134)
Duplex Unit without Top Hat
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-39
Sheet 08 039
General Description
Arc-Resistant MVS MetalEnclosed Load Interrupter

Switchgear5 and 15 kV
Arc-Resistant MVS Metal-Enclosed Load

Interrupter Switchgear
General Description
Eatons 5/15 kV MVS metal-enclosed
load interrupter switchgear is now
available with arc-resistant construction
with accessibility Type 2B in accordance with IEEE Std C37.20.7-2007.
Type MVS arc-resistant switchgear is
designed for indoor use. It can also be
used outdoor (37-, 53-, 68- and 82-inch
deep units only) with space heaters.
It can be configured for a variety of
applications. Switches can be supplied
with manual or electrical operating
mechanism and with or without primary
fuses. Type 2B accessibility provides
arc-resistant features and protection at
the freely accessible exterior (front, back
and sides) of the equipment as well
as in front of the instrument/control
compartment with the instrument/
control compartment door opened
while the equipment is energized
and operating normally.
Arcing faults can occur within the

switchgear as a result of insulation
failure or human error. Arcing faults
occurring in air between phases or
phase and ground within the confines
of the switchgear produce a variety
of physical phenomena, including
tremendous release of heat at the
point of fault and sudden pressure
increase. Heat from the arc may
decompose or vaporize materials
involved in its path. The effects of
this type of fault vary depending on
enclosure volume, arc duration, arc
voltage and available short-circuit
current. If an internal arcing fault
occurs within the switchgear that is
not designed and tested to withstand
effects of such a fault, its parts could
blow off along with discharge of hot
decomposed matter, gaseous or particulate, causing injury to personnel who
may be present in the vicinity of the
switchgear.
Arc-resistant MVS metal-enclosed
load interrupter switchgear is designed
and tested to withstand the effects of
an internal arcing fault by controlling
and directing the effects of the arc
away from personnel in a safe manner.
Arc-resistant features are intended
to provide an additional degree of
protection to the personnel performing
normal operating duties in close
proximity to the equipment while it
is operating under normal conditions.
All doors and covers providing

access to high voltage components
are properly closed and latched
Pressure-relief devices are free
to operate
The fault current discharged into
the equipment does not exceed the
rated internal arc short-circuit current
and duration of the equipment
The equipment is properly grounded
The user should also refer to documents such as NFPA 70E, for safety
training and safe work practices and
for methods of evaluating safe work
and use proper PPE when working
on or near energized equipment with
the door/cover opened or not properly
secured.
i
ii
1
2
Eatons arc-resistant MVS metalenclosed load interrupter switchgear

meets or exceeds the requirements
of IEEE Std C37.20.7-2007, Guide for
Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
for Internal Arcing Faults. It also meets
or exceeds the following industry
standards:

ANSI C37.57
NEMA SG5
CSA C22.2 No. 31
Type MVS switches meet or exceed

the requirements of the following
industry standards:

ANSI C37.58
ANSI C37.22
NEMA SG6
5/15 kV arc-resistant MVS metalenclosed load interrupter switchgear
can be provided with CSA (Canada or
USA) or UL (USA only) listing. Contact
Eaton for available ratings.
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5/15 kV arc-resistant MVS metalenclosed load interrupter switchgear

has been qualified for seismic applications by actual testing to meet requirements of IBC 2006 and CBC 2007. Refer
to Tab 1 for information for this and
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Sheet 08 040
Technical Data
Technical Data
Available Ratings
ii
Refer to Table 8.0-23 for available arc-resistant MVS metal-enclosed load interrupter switchgear assembly ratings.
Refer to Table 8.0-1 and Table 8.0-6 for non-fused and fused MVS switch ratings.
Refer to Table 8.0-2 and Table 8.0-3 for MVS switch duty cycle ratings.
Table 8.0-23. Arc-Resistant MVS Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter Switchgear Assembly Ratings
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Switchgear Assembly Main Cross Bus Ratings

per IEEE C37.20.3-2001
Switchgear Assembly Internal Arc Withstand Ratings

per IEEE C37.20.7
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage,
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Lightning
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
(LIWV)
(BIL)
Rated
Main Bus
Continuous
Current
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(10 Cycle) (167 ms)
Rated
Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Current
Withstand
(2 Second)
kV rms
kV rms
kV Peak
Amperes
kA rms Asym kA Peak
kA rms Sym
4.76
19
60
600, 1200
40
65
25
2B
25
65
4.76
19
60
600, 1200
61
99
38
2B
40
104
0.5
4.76
19
60
61
99
38
2B
40
104
0.5
2000
600, 1200
Accessibility
Type
Rated Internal
Arc Short-Circuit
Withstand Current
Rated
Internal Arc
Short-Circuit
Duration
kA rms Sym
Seconds
kA Peak
0.5
4.76
19
60
80
130
50
2B
40
104
0.5
4.76
19
60
2000
80
130
50
2B
40
104
0.5
4.76
2000
19
60
101
164
63
2B
40
104
0.5
15
36
95
600, 1200
40
65
25
2B
25
65
0.5
15
36
95
600, 1200
61
99
38
2B
40
104
0.5
15
36
95
600, 1200
80
130
50
2B
40
104
0.5
15
36
95
600, 1200
101
164
63
2B
40
104
0.5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-41
Sheet 08 041
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Arrangements
30.00
(762.0)
Main Incoming Switch
Feeder Switch
Bus-Tie Switch
Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust

Plenum
Plenum
Arc Exhaust
Plenum

Plenum
Plenum
ii
1
2
3
95.00
(2413.0)
4
5
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Duplex
Arrangement
Standalone Switch
Transformer
Primary Switch
Transformer
Primary Switch

Plenum
Plenum
Arc Exhaust
Plenum
Arc Exhaust
Plenum
Arc Exhaust
Plenum
8
9
10
11
Dry-Type
Transformer
Liquid-Filled
Transformer
12
13
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
Figure 8.0-46. Available ConfigurationsTypical One-Line Arrangements

a Each end of lineup contains a 1.49 inch (37.8) endskin.
b Depth of units will vary due to cable entrance and
exit requirements, the addition of lightning arresters,
instrument transformers, special cable terminators, etc.
c Minimum depth of MVS unit: up to two 500 kcm per
phase: 53.00 inches (1346.2 mm); three or four 500 kcm
per phase: 68.00 inches (1727.2 mm); five or six 500 kcm
per phase: 82.00 inches (2082.8 mm).
20.00
(508.0)
1.49
(37.8)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Sheet 08 042
LayoutsDimensions
i
ii
Typical Arrangements (Continued)

95.00 Inches (2413.0 mm) Deep
1
2
3
4
5
MVS
MVA
MVS
MVA
MVS Transition AMPGARD

Front Aligned,
Facing Front
LH/RH Available
MVS Transition
AMPGARD
Rear Aligned,
Facing Rear
LH/RH Available
6
8
9
10
11
12
MVS Transition
AMPGARD
Front Aligned,
Facing Front
LH/RH Available
MVS
Transition AMPGARD
Rear Aligned,
Facing Rear
LH/RH Available
MVS
Transition
AMPGARD
Front/Rear Aligned,
Facing Out
LH/RH Available
13
14
15
16
17
MVA
Cell
MVA
Cell
18
19
Figure 8.0-47. Available ConfigurationsClose-Coupling to Arc-Resistant MVA and AMPGARD
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-43
Sheet 08 043
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Layout Dimensions: 5/15 kV
34.39
(873.5)
ii
Arc
Plenum
30.00
(762.0)
Arc
Plenum
Arc
Plenum
Arc
Plenum
1
2
3
95.00
(2413.0)
4
5
28.37
(720.6)
34.00
(863.6)
49.50
(1257.3)
64.50
(1638.3)
78.50
(1993.9)
37.00 Inches
(939.8 mm) Deep
1 or 2 Out Bottom
1 or 2 Out Top
(Indoor Only)
53.00 Inches
(1346.2 mm) Deep
1 or 2 In/Out
Top/Bottom
68.00 Inches
(1727.2 mm) Deep
3 or 4 Top
In/Bottom Out
82.00 Inches
(2082.8 mm) Deep
5 or 6 Top
In/Bottom Out
6
7
8
9
Arc
Plenum
Arc
Plenum
Arc
Plenum
32.00
(812.8)
10
11
12
95.00
(2413.0)
95.00
(2413.0)
28.37
(720.6)
17.79
(451.9)
49.50
(1257.3)
53.00-Inch (1346.2 mm) Duplex
49.50
(1257.3)
68.00-Inch (1727.2 mm) Duplex
(Available in 82.00-Inch [2082.8 mm]
for Other Cable Configurations)
26.32
(668.5)
13
14
15
95.00
(2413.0)
16
MVS-MVA 96.00 Inches (2438.4 mm) Deep
Figure 8.0-48. Typical Sectional Side Views5/15 kV Arc-Resistant MVS
17
Note: Number of cables are based on 500 kcm.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Sheet 08 044
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Layout Dimensions: 5/15 kV (Continued)
ii
1
96.00
(2438.4)
Transition
Transition
96.00
(2438.4)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
6
32.00
(812.8)
8
9
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
Main
Switch
36.00
(914.4)
Plenum
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Transition
108.00
(2743.2)
MVS Arc
Switchgear
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
Plan View
Plan View
AMPGARD
Plenum
32.00
(812.8)
Main
Switch
Plenum
Plenum
AMPGARD
Plenum
32.00
(812.8)
Main
Switch
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
95.00
(2413.0)
10
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
50.00
(1270.0)
36.00
(914.4)
4.00
(101.6)
Plan View
1.49
(37.8)
Plenum
50.00
(1270.0)
Main
Switch
4.00
(101.6)
MVS Arc
Switchgear
4.00
(101.6)
AMPGARD
Medium
50.00
(1270.0)
Voltage
Starters
MVS Arc
Switchgear
3
4
Main
Switch
AMPGARD
50.00
Medium
(1270.0)
Voltage
Starters
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
Plenum
Plenum
AMPGARD
Plenum
Main
Switch
95.00
(2413.0)
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
95.00
(2413.0)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
11
1.49
(37.8)
12
13
14
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
1.49
(37.8)
1.49
(37.8)
1.49
(37.8)
Front View
Front View
Front View
36.00
(914.4)
Figure 8.0-49. Typical Layout DimensionsIndoor Arc-Resistant MVS Close-Coupled to Indoor Arc-Resistant AMPGARD
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
8.0-45
Sheet 08 045
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Anchor Plan
0.88
(22.4)
2
Rear
Door
34.25
(870.0)
0.88
(22.4)
ii
2
Rear
Door
34.25
(870.0)
2
1
1
3
3
26.25
(666.8)
34.00
(863.6)
41.75
(1060.5)
8.00
(203.2)
6.75
(171.5)
Front Door
0.88
(22.4)
Rear
Door
6
7
8
2
Rear
Door
34.25
(870.0)
34.25
(870.0)
10
1
22.00
(558.8)
11
1
64.50
(1638.3)
41.75
(1060.5)
36.00
(914.4)
3
3
6.75
(171.5)
12
78.50
(1993.9)
41.75
(1060.5)
13
14
4
5
36.00
(914.4)
Front Door
5.96
(151.4)
5.96
(151.4)
2
0.88
(22.4)
49.50
(1257.3)
36.00
(914.4)
5.96
(151.4)
5.96
(151.4)
15
16
36.00
(914.4)
Front Door
Front Door
17
18
Figure 8.0-50. Typical Anchor Plan5/15 kV Arc-Resistant MVS Units

a Locations for tie-down 0.87 (22.1) diameter holes.
Customer-provided bolts for anchoring should be
0.5013 minimum SAE Grade 5 (M12 x 1.75 minimum
CL 10.9) and tightened to 75 ft-lbs (101.7 Nm).
c Finished foundations surface shall be level within

0.06 inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-toright, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a
laser level.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

February 2015
Sheet 08 046
LayoutsDimensions
Arc Duct Layout
16.00
(406.4)
ii
10.00
(254.0)
1
D = Unit Depth
49.50 (1257.3),
64.50 (1638.3)
and
78.50 (1993.9)
16.00
(406.4)
18.00
(457.2)
3
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
4
5
16.00
(406.4)
6
7
18.00
(457.2)
Arc Duct
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Recommended
Conduit Entry/Exit
Figure 8.0-51. Recommended HV Cable Exit/Entry Locations

(37.00-, 53.00-, 68.00- and 82.00-Inch [939.8-, 1346.2-, 1727.2- and
2082.8-mm] Deep MVS Units)
11
18.00
(457.2)
12
13
Plenum Layout
Suggested Direction
Available Direction
(Length of Exhaust to be
Determined by Customer)
34.00
(863.6)
16.00
(406.4)
10
Type MVS arc-resistant switchgear is supplied with an arc

exhaust plenum fitted on top of the switchgear. To maintain
Type 2B accessibility, one arc duct is required to direct the
arc exhaust out of the common plenum to the outside. Arc
duct can be supplied by Eaton when included in its scope of
supply or it can be supplied by the customer. When supplied
by the customer, it must be made and installed in accordance
with basic minimum design requirements provided by Eaton.
Arc duct can be fitted on the left end, right end, rear or front
of the exhaust plenum as shown in Figure 8.0-53. Arc duct
can consist of straight pieces or 90 or 45 degree bends as
required to suit the installation layout.
Front of the
Switchgear
Figure 8.0-53. Typical Arc Duct Layout

14.00
(355.6)
16.00
(406.4)
14
16.00
(406.4)
15
D
16.00
(406.4)
16
17
18
19
20
D = Unit Depth
95.00 (2413.0)
or
107.00 (2717.8)
16.00
(406.4)
18.00
(457.2)
26.50
(673.1)
36.00
(914.4)
Figure 8.0-52. Recommended HV Cable Exit/Entry Locations

(95.00- and 107.00-Inch [2413.0- and 2717.8-mm] Deep MVS Units)
21
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
9.0-1
September 2011
Fuses
Medium Voltage
Sheet 09 001
Contents
FusesMedium Voltage
Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-4
Expulsion Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-6
Technical Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-7
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16362
Section 26 18 16
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CA08104001E
21
9.0-2
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 002
General Description
Medium Voltage Fuses
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Eatons entry in the power fuse

business began over 75 years ago
under Westinghouse Electric. In 1935,
Westinghouse introduced the medium
voltage boric acid expulsion fuse
followed by the medium voltage
current limiting fuse. Even today,
medium voltage fuses continue to use
the core Westinghouse technology.
Eaton continues to build on the
Westinghouse technology legacy by
engineering higher performance,
cost-effective power fuse products.
Eaton medium voltage fuses are
manufactured and tested to the
requirements of the ANSI C37.4X
series of standards.
Eaton is the only North American
manufacturer of both current limiting
and expulsion medium voltage power
fuses. A full range of general purpose,
backup and boric acid fuses is
available for distribution and power
applications.
All Eaton medium voltage fuses are
thoroughly tested and conform to
ANSI specifications. Some motor
starter fuses are UR recognized, and
both current limiting and expulsion
fuses have been approved in UL
rated switchgear.
The following fuse terminology will

assist in understanding and selecting
the correct fuse. The following is a
brief overview of those terms.
Power vs. Distribution

The differentiation is intended to
indicate the test conditions and where
fuses are normally applied in a power
system, based on specific requirements
for generating sources, substations
and distribution lines. Each class has
its own unique set of voltage, current
and construction requirements
(see ANSI C37.42, .46 and .47).
Low vs. Medium vs. High Voltage

While fuses are defined in the ANSI
standards as either low or high voltage,
Eatons Electrical Sector has elected to
name their fuses to correspond with
the equipment in which they are
installed. Therefore, per ANSI C84,
fuses are named as follows:
Expulsion vs. Current Limiting

Expulsion Fuse: An expulsion fuse is
a vented fuse in which the expulsion
effect of the gases produced by internal arcing, either alone or aided by
other mechanisms, results in current
interruption.
An expulsion fuse is not current
limiting and as a result limits the duration of a fault on the electrical system,
not the magnitude.
Current Limiting Fuse: A current limiting fuse is a fuse that, when its current
responsive element is melted by a current within the fuses specified current
limiting range, abruptly introduces
a high resistance to reduce current
magnitude and duration, resulting in
subsequent current interruption.
Table 9.0-1. General Fuse Comparison
Expulsion
Current
Limiting
Low Voltage
1000V and below
Vented
Sealed
Medium Voltage
Greater than
100069,000V
Electromechanical
Static
High Voltage
Greater than
69,000V
Interrupts at current zero, Limits fault current

limits fault
magnitude and
current duration
duration
Generally higher voltage Generally higher
ratings
interrupting ratings
Different time/current
characteristics
Different time/
current
characteristics
Current limiting and expulsion fuses

can be used to meet any overcurrent
protection need. At any point along
the medium voltage electrical
distribution system, Eaton has a
fuse to satisfy your overcurrent
protection needs.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
9.0-3
September 2011
Sheet 09 003
Table 9.0-2. Eaton Medium Voltage Fuse Family

Current Limiting
Expulsion
HLE:
CLE:
CLS:
HCL:
CX:
CLPT:
RBA: Refillable, boric acid

RDB: Refillable, dropout, boric acid
DBU: Dropout, boric acid, indoor/outdoor S&C equivalent
Helical configuration current limiting, E-rated

Current limiting, E-rated
Current limiting starter (motor starter)
Current limiting, clip-mount, E-rated
Current limiting, C-rated
Current limiting, E-rated
Fuse
Fuse
Voltage
Ampere
Range (kV) Rating
ii
1
Table 9.0-3. Application Guide

Type
Fuse Maximum
Class Use
Interrupting
Indoor/Outdoor
Rating (kA Sym.)
Applied in:
10E1350A
65
General purpose
indoor/outdoor
Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers,

dip poles, substation capacitor banks.
2
3
Current Limiting
CLE
2.415.5
CLPT
2.438
0.25E10E
80
General purpose
indoor
Potential transformers. BAL-1 mountings and clips

are no longer available.
CLS
2.48.3
2R44R
50
Backup distribution
indoor
AMPGARD and non-AMPGARD motor starters. HCLS version is the

same as the CLS except hermetically sealed for hazardous locations.
CX/CXI 4.315.5
CXN
3.5C300C
50
General purpose
distribution indoor
Pad mounted distribution transformers, Substation service transformers,

and fused switches. Direct substitution for McGraws NX fuse.
HCL
2.415.5
10A900A
63
General purpose
distribution indoor

HLE
2.415.5
10E450E
65
General purpose
indoor/outdoor

4
5
6
Expulsion Fuses
RBA
2.438
0.5E720E
37.5
Boric acid power

indoor
Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, and power transformers.
RDB
2.438
0.5E720E
37.5
Boric acid power

outdoor
Feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers, substation

service transformers, dip poles, potential transformers,
and substation capacitor banks. Outdoor version of the RBA.
Boric acid power

indoor/outdoor
Feeder circuit sectionalizing, fused switches, power transformers,

substation service transformers, dip poles, and potential transformers.
Direct equivalent for S&Cs SMU-20 fuse units.
DBU
4.438
5E200E,
3K200K
50
Table 9.0-4. Power Fuse Ampere Characteristic Ratings

Rating Definition
E
Fuses rated 100E or below will melt in 300 seconds at some current value between 2.0 and 2.4 times the E number.
Fuses rated above 100E will melt in 600 seconds at some current value between 2.2 and 2.64 times the E number.
The fuse will melt in 15 to 35 seconds when the current equals 100 times the R number.
The fuse will melt in 1000 seconds at some current value between 1.7 and 2.4 times the C number.
Class A fuses have parameters that do not fall within the C, E, or R definitions above.
Meet C37.40 temperature requirements, but not the E rating.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
9.0-4
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 004
Current limiting fuses are constructed

with pure silver fuse elements, high
purity silica sand filler, and a glass
resin outer casing.
Current Limiting Fuse Types
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
There are three current limiting fuse

types: backup, general purpose and
full range. It is important that the user
have an understanding of these definitions to ensure proper application of
the fuse (Figure 9.0-1).
Backup Fuse: A fuse capable of interrupting all currents from the rated
maximum interrupting current down
to the rated minimum interrupting
current.
Backup fuses are normally used for
protection of motor starters and are
always used in series with another
interrupting device capable of interrupting currents below the fuses rated
minimum interrupting current.
General Purpose Fuse: A fuse capable
of interrupting all currents from the
rated maximum interrupting current
down to the current that causes
melting of the fusible element in no
less than one hour.
General purpose fuses are typically
used to protect feeders and
components such as transformers.
Multi-Range Fuses
CLE and HLE fuses are also available in
user-selectable multi-range versions
1040A, 50125A and 150200A.
A high fault current melts the silver

element almost instantly and loses
energy to the surrounding sand. The
sand melts and forms fulgurite, a
glass-like substance. The arc voltage
rapidly increases to nearly three times
the fuse voltage rating and forces the
current to zero.
Low fault current melts a solder drop
on the silver fuse element that, in turn,
melts the silver. The element burns
back until there is a sufficient internal
gap to interrupt the current. This is
known as the M-effect.
Eaton offers current limiting fuses in
two basic types: backup and general
purpose. Backup fuses are applied in
series with another circuit protective
device, such as a contactor or an
expulsion fuse, to interrupt high fault
currents beyond the other devices
range. General purpose fuses are
designed to interrupt low fault
currents that cause them to melt
in one hour or less.
Disconnect End Fittings and

Disconnect Live Parts
Accessories
A wide assortment of mountings, live
parts and end fittings are available to
facilitate power fuse installation.
Mountings
Mountings include a base, porcelain
or glass polyester insulators, and
live parts. They help enable the fuse
to be safely attached to the gear.
Mountings can be either disconnect
or non-disconnect.
Live Parts
Live parts attach the fuse to the
insulators and are considered part
of the mounting. All parts above the
insulators are live parts.
Full Range Fuse: A fuse capable of

interrupting all currents from the rated
maximum interrupting rating down to
the minimum continuous current that
causes melting of the fusible element,
with the fuse applied at the maximum
ambient temperature specified by the
manufacturer.
13
i max. rated maximum
interrupting current
i min. rated minimum
interrupting current
i hr.
r current causing element
melting in 1 hour
i any current melting
element with no time
limit
14
16
17
18
19
20
Current Limiting Type
15
i min.
Backup
General Purpose
Full Range
i
i hr.
i max.
Figure 9.0-1. Current Limiting Types Protection Range
21
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
9.0-5
September 2011
Sheet 09 005
Table 9.0-5. CLE, HLE, HCL and CLS Fuses

Description
Family
CLE
HLE
HCL
ii
CLS
1
2
General
Class
General purpose
Use
Maximum kV
Maximum kA
Rating
Mounting
Indicator
Approvals
General purpose
General purpose
Backup
Power
Power
Power
Power
2.7515.5
5.515.5
5.515.5
2.415.5
63
63
63
50
10E1350A
10E450A
10E900E
2R44R
Clip
Clip, bolt-on, hookeye
Clip lock, bolt-on
Clip, bolt-on, hookeye
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
IEEE, ANSI
IEEE, ANSI
IEEE, ANSI
UL, IEEE, ANSI
3
4
5
Applications
Feeder circuits
Motor starters
PTs and CTs
LV breakers
Substation service
Transformers
Capacitor banks
Fused switches
8
9
Table 9.0-6. CLPT, CX, CLT and DSL Fuses

Description
Family
CLPT
CX
CLT
10
DSL
11
12
General
Class
General
General
General
Back-up
Power/distribution
Distribution
Distribution
Power
Maximum kV
5.538
4.315.5
2.7515
600V
Maximum kA
80
50
25
200
Use
Rating
0.25E 10E
3.5C300C
5150
1005000
Mounting
Clip
Clip
Stud bolt-on
Bolt-on
Indicator
Optional
None
None
None
IEEE, ANSI
IEEE, ANSI
IEEE, ANSI
UL
Approvals
Applications
13
14
15
16
Feeder circuits
17
Motor starters
PTs and CTs
LV breakers
Substation service
Transformers
Capacitor banks
18
19
Fused switches
20
21
CA08104001E
9.0-6
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 006
Expulsion Fuses
ii
1
2
3
RBA
E-Rated Refillable
Boric Acid
4
5
Type RBA indoor expulsion fuses

must be fitted with a discharge filter
or condenser that moderates the
discharge exhaust. The discharge
filter limits the exhaust to a small
and relatively inert amount of gas
and lowers the noise level without
affecting the fuse interrupting rating.
Steam discharge, that can effect the
interrupting, is fully restricted by
the condenser.
Type RDB outdoor dropout fuses
include an ejector spring that forces
the arcing rod through the top of the
fuse. The arcing rod strikes a latch on
the mounting that forces the fuse to
swing outward through a 180 arc into
the dropout position.
6
7
Refill units can be field installed into

RBA and RDB expulsion fuses. Once
the operated unit has been removed,
the separately purchased unit can be
easily installed into the fuse holder.
8
9
10
Eatons expulsion fuses use boric acid

as the interrupting medium. Under a
fault condition, arc heat decomposes
the boric acid into water vapor. The
water vapor blast deionizes the arc
path preventing arc re-ignition after
a natural current zero.
RDB
E-Rated Refillable Outdoor
Dropout Boric Acid
11
12
Accessories
The following accessories are available
for expulsion fuses:
Mountings
Mountings include a base, porcelain
or glass polyester insulators, and live
parts. They help enable the fuse to be
safely attached to the gear. Mountings
can be either disconnect, non-disconnect
or dropout. Non-disconnect mountings
are available in either bolt-on or clamptype arrangements. Fuses may be
vertical or underhung.
Live Parts
Live parts attach the fuse to the
insulators and are considered part
of the mounting. All parts above the
insulators are live parts.
End Fittings
End fittings are metal parts that
attach to each end of the fuse at
the ferrules. They are used only on
disconnect fuses or when converting
a non-disconnect to a disconnect fuse.
Type DBU fuse units are designed

for new and aftermarket utility
applications. End fittings are available,
in both indoor and outdoor versions,
as well as live parts and mountings.
Mufflers confine the arc within the
fuse and substantially reduce the noise
and exhaust when the fuse interrupts.
13
14
15
DBU
Dropout Boric Acidfor Use Indoors,
Inside Switchgear or Outdoors
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
9.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 09 007
Technical Ratings
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-7. Transformer Primary Fuse Application

Maximum Transformer kVA
Fuse Family/Characteristics
Self-Cooled
Forced
Air
Type
Current
Range
Maximum
kV
Interrupting
Rating Amperes
(Symmetrical)
742
1336
2228
4010
742
890
866
1560
2600
4676
866
1039
CLE
CLE
CLE-750
CLE-750
CXN
CXN
10250
300450
600750
10001350
60250
300
5.5
63,000
63,000
40,000
31,500
50,000
50,000
Expulsion
600
1190
2140
695
1385
2500
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
3200
8.3
Current
limiting
1287
2317
3862
6952
1286
1545
1502
2703
4506
8111
1501
1802
CLE/HLE
CLE/HLE
CLE-750
CLE-750
CXN
CXN
10250
300450
600750
10001350
60250
300
5.5
Expulsion
1030
2055
3700
1200
2400
4320
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
3200
8.3
Current
limiting
1483
2671
4451
8013
1483
1780
1731
3116
5193
9348
1731
2077
CLE/HLE
CLE/HLE
CLE-750
CLE-750
CXN
CXN
10250
300450
600750
10001350
60250
300
5.5
Expulsion
1190
2375
4280
1385
2775
5000
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
480720
3200
8.3
19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
Current
limiting
1536
2987
2134
2560
1792
3485
2490
2987
CLE/HLE
CLE
CXN
CXN
10175
200350
60250
300
8.3
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion
1705
3415
6150
2000
3985
7170
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
3200
8.3
19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
Current
limiting
222
890
1603
3117
2226
2672
259
1039
1870
3637
2598
3117
CLE/HLE
CLE/HLE
CLE/HLE
CLE
CXN
CXN
1025
30100
125180
200350
60250
300
8.3
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
13
1785
3565
6420
2080
4160
7500
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
3200
8.
19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
15
System
Voltage
Fuse
Type
2400
Current
limiting
4160
4800
6900
7200
Expulsion
8.3
17.1
8.3
17.1
8.3
17.1
19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
63,000
63,000
40,000
31,500
50,000
50,000
19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
63,000
63,000
40,000
31,500
50,000
50,000
Maximum transformer kVA ratings are based on ratios of maximum fuse current rating to transformer full load current (IF/IT) as listed.
For a 55C rise liquid-filled transformer, use the kVA rating for 65C rise (55C rating x 1.12). For suggested minimum fuse applications,
see Tables 9.0-9, 9.0-10 and 9.0-11.
The type RBA interrupting ratings shown are those of the discharge filter type, in which the noise is minimized and deionization of
expulsion gases is assured.
These applications are subject to

modification when specific factors
such as transformer characteristics,
other protective devices, coordination
requirements and load variations may
indicate a different IF/IT ratio.
Caution: Primary fuses must not be

relied upon for clearing secondary
ground faults.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
9.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 09 008
Technical Ratings
i
ii
1
Technical Ratings (Continued)

Table 9.0-7. Transformer Primary Fuse Application (Continued)
Maximum Transformer kVA
Fuse Family/Characteristics
Self-Cooled
Forced
Air
Type
Current
Range
Maximum
kV
Interrupting
Rating Amperes
(Symmetrical)
371
1484
2226
4452
1484
2597
432
1731
2597
5195
1731
3030
CLE
HLE
CLE
HLE
CXN
CXN
10150
10125
175300
150250
45100
120175
15.5
63,000
63,000
63,000
63,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion
2970
5945
3465
6930
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
10200
15.5
14,400
29,400
29,400
14,000
Current
limiting
408
1632
2449
4898
1632
2857
476
1905
2857
5715
1905
3333
CLE
HLE
CLE
HLE
CXN
CXN
10150
10125
175300
150250
45100
120175
15.5
63,000
63,000
63,000
63,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion
3265
6530
3810
7620
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
7150
15.5
14,400
29,400
29,400
14,000
Current
limiting
426
1707
2560
5121
1707
5855
497
1991
2987
5975
1991
3485
CLE
HLE
CLE
HLE
CXN
CXN
10150
10125
175300
150250
45100
120175
15.5
63,000
63,000
63,000
63,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion
3415
6830
3415
3985
7970
3985
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
7150
15.5
14,400
29,400
29,400
14,000
23,000
Expulsion
5690
8535
5690
6635
9950
6635
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-27
10200
5300
450540
3200
25.5
34,500
Expulsion
8535
12800
8535
9950
14925
9950
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-38
10200
5300
450540
3200
38.0
System
Voltage
Fuse
Type
12,000
Current
limiting
2
3
4
13,200
5
6
7
13,800
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
17.1
27.0
10,500
21,000
21,000
12,500
6,900
16,800
16,800
10,000
Maximum transformer kVA ratings are based on ratios of maximum fuse current rating to transformer full load current (IF/IT) as listed.
For a 55C rise liquid-filled transformer, use the kVA rating for 65C rise (55C rating x 1.12). For suggested minimum fuse applications,
see Tables 9.0-9, 9.0-10 and 9.0-11.
The type RBA interrupting ratings shown are those of the discharge filter type, in which the noise is minimized and deionization of
expulsion gases is ensured.
These applications are subject to

modification when specific factors
such as transformer characteristics,
other protective devices, coordination
requirements and load variations may
indicate a different IF/IT ratio.

ground faults.
Table 9.0-8. Selection of Minimum Primary Fuse for Transformer Protection

For self-cooled
transformers
For forced air

transformers
18
Instructions: Multiply the transformer primary full load current

(FLA) times the multiplier shown in the table to determine
suggested minimum size fuse. Use fan-cooled primary FLA
with forced air transformer multiplier. See Tables 9.0-9 thru 9.0-11
for suggested minimum fuse size.
19
Type CLE current limiting fuses

Type RBA, DBU expulsion type fuses
1.4 x FLA
of XFMR
1.2 x FLA
of XFMR
All ratings
20
21
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
9.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 09 009
Technical Ratings
Interrupting Ratings of Fuses

networks using reactances and
connect properly for the type of fault
under consideration and reduce to a
single equivalent reactance.
Modern fuses are rated in amperes

rms symmetrical. They also have a
listed asymmetrical rms rating, which
is 1.6 x the symmetrical rating.
For single line-to-ground fault;
Calculation of the fuse required

interrupting rating:
Step 6Select a fuse with a published

interrupting rating exceeding the
calculated fault current.
Step 5Calculate the E/XI value,

where E is the prefault value of the
voltage at the point of fault normally
assumed 1.0 in pu. For three-phase
faults E/XI is the fault current to be
used in determining the required
interrupting capability of the fuse.
Step 1Convert the fault from

the utility to percent or per unit on
a convenient voltage and kVA base.
Step 2Collect the X and R data of all
the other circuit elements and convert
to percent or per unit on a convenient
kVA and voltage base same as that
used in Step 1. Use the substransient
X and R for all generators and motors.
ii
E
XI
I f = ----- 3
Step 4Same as above except using

resistances (omit if a symmetrically
rated fuse is to be selected).
Refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.48 for fuse

interrupting duty guidelines.
XI = XI(+) + XI(-) + XI(0)
Table 9.0-10 should be used where

older asymmetrically rated fuses
are involved.
The voltage rating of power fuses
used on three-phase systems should
equal or exceed the maximum lineto-line voltage rating of the system.
Current limiting fuses for three-phase
systems should normally be applied
so that the fuse voltage rating is equal
to or less than 1.41 x nominal system
voltage. However, the insulation
levels on 2.4 kV systems normally
allow 4.3 or 5.5 kV rated fuses to
be used.
Note: It is not necessary to calculate

a single phase-to-phase fault current. This
current is very nearly 3/2 x three-phase
fault. The line-to-ground fault may exceed
the three-phase fault for fuses located in
generating stations with solidly grounded
neutral generators, or in delta-wye transformers with the wye solidly grounded,
where the sum of the positive and negative
sequence impedances on the high voltage
side (delta) is smaller than the impedance of
the transformer.
Table 9.0-9. Suggested Minimum Current Limiting Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer ApplicationsE-Rated Fuses
System
2.4
Nominal kV
4.16
4.8
7.2
12.0
13.2
13.8
14.4
Fuses Maxi- 2.75

mum kV
5.5
5.5
8.3
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
27.1
36.1
54.1
50E
65E
80E
15.6
20.8
31.2
25E
30E
50E
13.5
18.0
27.1
20E
25E
50E
9.0
12.0
18.0
15E
20E
25E
5.4
7.2
10.8
10E
15E
15E
4.9
6.6
9.8
10E
10E
15E
4.7
6.3
9.4
10E
10E
15E
4.5
6.0
9.0
10E
10E
15E
300
500
750
72.2
120.3
180.4
125E
200E
300E
41.6
69.4
104.1
80E
125E
150E
36.1
60.1
90.2
65E
100E
150E
24.1
40.1
60.1
40E
65E
100E
14.4
24.1
36.1
20E
50E
65E
13.1
21.9
32.8
20E
30E
65E
12.6
20.9
31.4
20E
30E
65E
12.0
20.0
30.1
20E
30E
65E
1000
1500
2000
240.6
360.8
481.1
350E
600E
750E
138.8
208.2
277.6
200E
300E
400E
120.3
180.4
240.6
175E
250E
350E
80.2
120.3
160.4
125E
175E
250E
48.1
72.2
96.2
80E
100E
150E
43.7
65.6
87.5
80E
100E
125E
41.8
62.8
83.7
80E
100E
150E
40.1
60.1
80.2
80E
100E
125E
2500
3000
3750
601.4
721.7
902.1
1100E
1100E
1350E
347.0
416.4
520.4
600E
600E
750E
300.7
360.8
451.1
450E
600E
750E
200.5
240.6
300.7
300E
350E
120.3
144.3
180.4
200E
250E
250E
109.3
131.2
164.0
175E
200E
250E
104.6
125.5
156.9
175E
200E
250E
100.2
120.3
150.4
175E
200E
250E
5000
7500
10,000
1202.8
1804.2
2405.6
693.9
1040.9
1387.9
1100E
601.4
902.1
1202.8
1100E
1350E
400.9
601.4
801.9
240.6
360.8
481.1
218.7
328.0
437.4
300E
209.2
313.8
418.4
300E
200.5
300.7
400.9
300E
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Transformer Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
kVA Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating
Self-Cooled Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
112.5
150
225
Note: Fuse ratings represent the fuse that will withstand transformer inrush (12 x FLC for 0.1 second and 25 x FLC for 0.01 second) and be able
to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLC, 150% for 15.5 kV).
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
9.0-10 FusesMedium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 09 010
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-10. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer ApplicationsE-Rated Fuses
System
2.4
Nominal kV
4.16
4.8
7.2
12.0
13.2
13.8
14.4
ii
Fuses Maxi- 2.75

mum kV
5.5
5.5
8.3
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
Transformer Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
kVA Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
112.5
150
225
27.1
36.1
54.1
40E
50E
80E
15.6
20.8
31.2
25E
30E
50E
13.5
18.0
27.1
20E
25E
40E
9.0
12.0
18.0
15E
20E
25E
5.4
7.2
10.8
10E
10E
15E
4.9
6.6
9.8
10E
10E
15E
4.7
6.3
9.4
10E
10E
15E
4.5
6.0
9.0
10E
10E
15E
300
500
750
72.2
120.3
180.4
100E
175E
250E
41.6
69.4
104.1
65E
100E
150E
36.1
60.1
90.2
50E
80E
125E
24.1
40.1
60.1
40E
65E
80E
14.4
24.1
36.1
20E
40E
50E
13.1
21.9
32.8
20E
30E
50E
12.6
20.9
31.4
20E
30E
50E
12.0
20.0
30.1
20E
30E
50E
1000
1500
2000
240.6
360.8
481.1
400E
450E
720E
138.8
208.2
277.6
200E
300E
400E
120.3
180.4
240.6
175E
250E
350E
80.2
120.3
160.4
125E
175E
250E
48.1
72.2
96.2
65E
100E
150E
43.7
65.6
87.5
65E
100E
125E
41.8
62.8
83.7
65E
100E
125E
40.1
60.1
80.2
65E
80E
125E
2500
3000
3750
601.4
721.7
902.1
347.0
416.4
520.4
540E
720E
720E
300.7
360.8
451.1
400E
540E
720E
200.5
240.6
300.7
300E
350E
400E
120.3
144.3
180.4
175E
200E
250E
109.3
131.2
164.0
150E
175E
250E
104.6
125.5
156.9
150E
175E
250E
100.2
120.3
150.4
150E
175E
200E
5000
7500
10,000
1202.8
1804.2
2405.6
693.9
1040.9
1387.9
400.9
601.4
801.9
540E
240.6
360.8
481.1
400E
540E
720E
218.7
328.0
437.4
300E
450E
720E
209.2
313.8
418.4
300E
450E
720E
200.5
300.7
400.9
300E
450E
540E
7
8

601.4
902.1
1202.8
Two 300E-ampere fuse refill units in parallel with 10% derating.

Table 9.0-11. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Ratings for Self-Cooled 25.838 kV Transformer Applications
9
10
11
System
Nominal kV
22.9
23.9
24.9
34.5
Fuses
Maximum kV
25.8
25.8
24.8
Transformer kVA
Rating Self-Cooled
Full Load
Current Amps
14
15
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
750
1000
1500
18.9
25.2
37.8
30E
40E
65E
18.1
24.2
36.2
25E
40E
50E
17.4
23.2
34.8
25E
40E
50E
12.6
16.7
25.1
20E
25E
40E
2000
2500
3000
50.4
63.0
75.6
80E
100E
125E
48.3
60.4
72.5
65E
100E
100E
46.4
58.0
69.6
65E
80E
100E
33.5
41.8
50.2
50E
65E
80E
3750
5000
7500
10,000
94.5
126.1
189.1
252.1
62.8
83.7
125.5
167.3
100E
125E
175E
250E
12
13
Fuse Rating
Amps E
150E
175E
300E
450E
90.6
120.8
181.2
241.6
125E
175E
250E
450E
87.0
115.9
173.9
231.9
125E
175E
250E
450E
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
9.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 09 011
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-12. Suggested Minimum DBU Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
System
2.4
Nominal kV
4.2
4.8
7.2
12.0
13.2
13.8
14.4
Fuses Maxi- 17.1

mum kV
17.1
17.1
17.1
17.1
17.1
17.1
17.1
i
ii
Transformer Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
kVA Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Three-Phase Transformers
112.5
150
225
27
36
54
40E
50E
80E
16
21
31
25E
30E
50E
14
18
27
20E
25E
40E
9
12
18
15E
20E
25E
5
7
11
10E
10E
15E
5
7
10
7E
10E
15E
5
6
9
7E
10E
15E
5
6
9
7E
10E
15E
300
500
750
72
120
180
100E
200E
42
69
104
65E
100E
150E
36
60
90
50E
100E
125E
24
40
60
40E
65E
100E
14
24
36
20E
40E
50E
13
22
33
20E
30E
50E
13
21
31
20E
30E
50E
12
20
30
20E
30E
50E
1000
1500
2000
241
361
481
139
208
278
200E
120
180
241
200E
80
120
160
125E
200E
48
72
96
80E
100E
150E
44
66
87
65E
100E
125E
42
63
84
65E
100E
125E
40
60
80
65E
65E
125E
2500
601
347
301
200
120
200E
109
150E
105
150E
100
150E
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 9.0-13. Suggested Minimum DBU Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
System
22.9
Nominal kV
23.9
24.9
34.5
Fuses Maxi- 27.0

mum kV
27.0
27.0
38.0
Transformer Full Load

kVA Rating Current Amps
Self-Cooled
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
7
8
Fuse Rating
Amps E
750
1000
1500
19
25
38
30E
40E
65E
18
24
36
25E
40E
50E
17
23
34
25E
40E
50E
13
17
25
20E
25E
40E
10
2000
2500
3750
50
63
95
80E
100E
150E
48
60
91
80E
100E
150E
46
58
87
65E
80E
125E
33
42
63
50E
65E
100E
11
12
Table 9.0-14. Type DBU Expulsion Fuses, Boric Acid, Indoor/Outdoor
13
Maximum
Design kV
Current Rating
Amperes
Interrupting Rating
rms (kA Symmetrical)
17.1
3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K,
5E, 7E, 10E, 13E, 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 40E, 50E, 65E, 80E, 100E, 125E, 150E, 175E, 200E,
15SE, 20SE, 25SE, 30SE, 40SE, 50SE, 65SE, 80SE, 100SE, 125SE, 150SE, 175SE, 200SE
14
14
27
12.5
15
38
10outdoor
8.5indoor with muffler
Note: Used on overhead distribution transformers, substation equipment, industrial transformer installations, and radial distribution circuits.
16
17
18
19
20
For additional information, see:

Volume 4, CA08100005E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab 26
CA08104001E
21
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage
10.0-1
July 2014
Motor Control (AMPGARD)

Medium Voltage
Sheet 10 001
CA08104001E
Contents
Motor Starters
General Description
Application and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personnel Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum ContactorBolt-in, Type SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum ContactorStab-in, Type SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Low Voltage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus and Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced Voltage StartersMechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced Voltage StartersSolid-State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronous Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Potential Transformers and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Breaker AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LBS Loadbreak Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type SL, 400 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type SL, 800 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type SL, 300 A, 15 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contactor-Fuse Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Fuse Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout Dimensions
Full Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary Reactor, Reduced Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autotransformer, Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronous Brush Type Mark V Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid-State Reduced Voltage AMPGARD MV4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Line Switch/PT Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie Switch Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arc-Resistant Starter Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Breaker AMPGARD Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMPGARD XP3
General Description
Enhanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Description
SC9000 EP Fully Integrated AE-Frame AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronous Transfer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 kV Input Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integrated AMPGARD Main Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personnel Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Output Filters and Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
ii
10.1-1
10.1-1
10.1-2
10.1-3
10.1-4
10.1-4
10.1-5
10.1-6
10.1-7
10.1-8
10.1-10
10.1-11
10.1-11
10.1-11
10.1-12
10.1-14
10.1-17
10.1-17
10.1-18
10.1-19
10.1-20
10.1-21
10.1-22
10.1-23
10.1-24
10.1-27
10.1-29
10.1-30
10.1-32
10.1-35
10.1-37
10.1-38
10.1-39
10.1-41
10.1-42
10.1-43
10.1-44
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10.2-1
10.2-2
10.2-13
10.2-15
10.2-16
10.2-17
10.2-19
10.2-20
10.2-22
10.2-24
17
18
19
20
21
10.0-2 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage

July 2014
Sheet 10 002
i
ii
1
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
AMPGARD Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349
Section 26 18 39
AMPGARD Arc Resistant Starters . . . . Section 16349AR Section
AMPGARD XP3 Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349XP3 Section
SC 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349B
Section 26 18 39.13
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-1
Sheet 10 003
General Description
AMPGARD Motor
Control Assembly
The low voltage compartment

is painted white as standard to
maximize serviceability.
Simplicity of design: Componentto-component design eliminates half
of the electrical connections.
Time-proven contactor technology:
Three vacuum contactor ratings are
used, 400A and 800A 7.2 kV and 300A
15 kV. 400A 7.2 kV contactors are
available as stab-in or bolt-in design.
800A 7.2 kV and 300A 15 kV contactors
are available as stab-in design only.
AMPGARD Motor Control Assembly
General Description
AMPGARD
Eatons
medium voltage
metal-enclosed control family
provides control and protection
of medium voltage motors and
equipment rated 230013,800V
nominal/15,000V maximum.
AMPGARD control has a complete
metal-enclosed offering:
Full and reduced voltage starting of

medium voltage motors up to 8000 hp
Main breaker metal-enclosed
switchgear, a smaller footprint,
single integrated assembly direct
coupled to the AMPGARD control
Integral LBS loadbreak switches
available as main, tie or feeder.
The LBS can be supplied as fused
or un-fused
Adjustable frequency drives
(SC 9000) up to 4160V, 6000 hp

Personnel safety: Positive mechanical
isolating switch with visible disconnect
completely grounds and isolates the
starter from the line connectors with
a mechanically driven isolating shutter,
leaving no exposed high voltage.
Medium voltage door is mechanically
locked closed with interlocking mechanism; low voltage section has separate
door and is segregated from the
medium voltage section.
High degree of isolation: Main bus is

located in separate compartment on
top of lineup. Vertical bus is barriered in
rear of starter. Load cables are isolated
from adjacent starter in two-high
sections. A vertical low voltage wireway
is provided for isolation of customer
control wiring. The low voltage control
compartment is isolated from medium
voltage by grounded steel barriers.
Starter catalog types are available for
the following applications:
Squirrel cage, full voltage

(reversing and non-reversing)
Squirrel cage, primary reactor
Squirrel cage, autotransformer
Reduced voltage solid-state
Synchronous full voltage
Synchronous primary reactor
Synchronous auto-transformer
(reversing and non-reversing)
Two-speed, two winding
Two-speed, one winding
Enclosures
AMPGARD products are available in
NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures
as standard. NEMA 12 (dust tight),
NEMA 3R (outdoor) and arc-resistant
enclosures are available options for
most products. Contact Eaton for
exceptions. Enclosure type affects the
maximum continuous current rating
of the starters in the enclosure.
Refer to Table 10.1-4 on Page 10.1-17 for

specific ratings for each enclosure type.
Arc-Resistant AMPGARD
When specified, AMPGARD is available
in special arc-resistant construction.
AMPGARD AR is available with a 50 kA,
0.5 sec arc resistant rating. The design
has been tested and verified to meet
the requirements of IEEE C37.20.7 for
Type 2B construction. Type 2B construction is defined as arc-resistant at
front, back and sides of the enclosure
with the low voltage compartment door
open. Most types of 400A and 800A
starters, as well as 24-inch (610 mm)
wide incoming cable sections are
available in arc-resistant construction.
A common plenum design to close
couple to Eaton arc-resistant switchgear
is also available. Consult Eaton for
ratings on this design. Main Breaker
AMPGARD, SC 9000 AFD, LBS load
break switches are not available in
arc-resistant construction. Due to the
specific nature of arc-resistant testing,
no modifications may be made to
the enclosure while maintaining the
arc-resistant rating. Consult Eaton
for more details.
Personnel Safety Features

One of the most important considerations in designing the AMPGARD
starter was personnel safety. The
result is an extensive system of
interlocks and other safety features.
Interlocks
Interlocking on AMPGARD starters
includes:
Isolating switch mechanism locks

the medium voltage door closed
when the switch is in the ON position
Provision for optional key interlocks
When door is open, interlock prevents
operating handle from being moved
inadvertently to ON position
When contactor is energized, isolating
switch cannot be opened or closed
CA08104001E
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Ease of installation: Current limiting

fuses, contactor assembly and
isolating switch assembly are easily
removed from the enclosure; line
and load terminals are completely
accessible from the front.
Ease of maintenance: All components
are front accessible, facilitating routine
inspection and/or parts replacement.
19
20
AMPGARD Main Breaker
AMPGARD SC 9000 4160V, 2500 hp AFD
MV4S
RVSS
2-High FVNR
21

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 004
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Other Safety Features

AMPGARD starters include many
additional features designed to
protect operating personnel. These
features include:
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Provision for a padlock on

the isolating switch handle in
OFF position
Shutter barrier between line
terminals and isolation switch
stabs is mechanically driven
Distinctive marking on switch
assembly appears when shutter
barrier is in position and starter is
completely isolated from the line
Grounding clips provide a positive
grounding of the starter and main
fuses when the isolating switch
is opened
High and low voltage circuits are
compartmentalized and isolated
from each other
The drawout isolation switch is
easily removed by loosening two
bolts in the back of the switch.
The shutter remains in place
when the switch is withdrawn
A remote operator for the starter

isolation switch is an available option.
The AMPGARD Remote Operator (ARO)
enables users to open or close the
switch through the use of a pushbutton
station operated up to 30 feet away
from the starter. Users can mount the
ARO on the front of the starter, plug it
into any available 120 Vac source, then
easily operate the isolation switch from
outside the starter arc flash boundary.
13
Isolation Switch Auxiliary Contacts
Optional Blown Fuse

Indicator Contacts
Switch Operating
Arm
Control Plug
JMT-400/800A Isolation Switch

Front View
Line Side Connections
Line Side Access Panel

(Removable From Front)
JMT-400/800A Isolation Switch

Rear View
Isolation Switch
Eatons Type JMT-4/8 and JMT-15 are
each a drawout, lightweight, three-pole,
manually operated isolating switch
mounted in the top of the starter enclosure. They may be easily removed
by loosening two bolts in the rear of
the switch. The JMT-4 is rated 400A
continuous while the JMT-8 is rated
720A continuous. The JMT-15 is rated
300A continuous at 15 kV. All isolation
switches have a mechanical life rating
of 10,000 operations.
14
15
16
17
Features
A positive mechanical interlock
between the isolating switch handle
mechanism and contactor prevents the
isolating switch from being opened
when the contactor is closed or from
being closed if the contactor
is closed.
An operating lever in the isolating
switch handle mechanism is designed
to shear off if the operator uses
too much force in trying to open the
non-loadbreak isolating switch when
the contactor is closed. This feature
ensures that the operator cannot open
the switch with the main contactor
closed, even if excessive force is
used on the operating handle.
To operate the isolating switch, the
operating handle is moved through
a 180 vertical swing from the ON to
the OFF position. In the ON position,
a plunger on the back of the handle
housing extends through a bracket on
the rear of the starter high voltage
door, preventing the door from being
opened with the switch closed. When
the high voltage door is open, a door
interlock prevents the handle from
being inadvertently returned to the
ON position.
When the operating handle is moved
from ON to OFF, copper stabs are
withdrawn from incoming line fingers.
As the stabs withdraw, they are
visible above the top of the fuses
when viewed from the front, and
simultaneously grounded. As the
fingers are withdrawn, a spring-driven
isolating shutter moves across the
back barrier to prevent front access
to the line connections. As the
shutter slides into position, distinctive
markings appear on the back barrier,
making it easier to check the position
of the shutter.
The component-to-component circuitry

concept includes the mountings for
the current limiting fuses as part of
the isolating switch.
18
19
20
Mechanical Non-Loadbreak
Isolating Switch
AMPGARD Remote Operator
Switch Handle
Closed
Switch Handle
Open
21
CA08104001E
July 2014

Motor Starters
10.1-3
Sheet 10 005
General Description
400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum

Contactor, Type SL
400A Bolt-in Contactor

7200 Volt Maximum
General Description
Eatons Type SL Vacuum Contactors
were designed and engineered
specifically for use in AMPGARD
starters. 7.2 kV SL 400A Vacuum
Contactors are self-supporting,
compact, drawout, three-pole, DC
magnet closed contactors. To permit
application matching of the starter to
the motor rating, the SL Contactor is
available in 400A standard and high
interrupting ratings.
SL Contactors are available in the
standard bolt-in configuration and
optional stab-in design. Either bolt-in
or stab-in designs can be supplied in a
two-high configuration, with a starter
maximum of 400 full load amperes. The
total NEMA 1 structure rating cannot
exceed 720A for a combination of
two starters. Refer to Table 10.1-4 on
Page 10.1-17 for other ratings.
Design
Maintenance
Eaton Vacuum Contactors are highly

versatile, low-chop contactors that have
been designed to meet all applicable
NEMA standards and are UL recognized components. The contactors
accommodate mechanical interlocks
that function with the starter isolation
switch and with other contactors.
These interlocks provide unmatched
safety and service protection.
Reduced maintenance is one of the

outstanding features of Eatons
Vacuum Contactor line. The special
contact material in the vacuum
interrupters provides long life even
under severe operating conditions.
The main coils operate with a very
low temperature rise to maximize
insulation life. Steel bearings on
the main shaft provide long, troublefree operation.
The contactors consist of a molded

frame with moving armature, magnet
and vacuum interrupters. The contactor
is easily positioned into the starter, and
vacuum interrupters provide long life
with a minimal maintenance program.
The SL operating coils are energized
by a control board that provides a
pulse-width-modulated DC output.
Control voltages and contactor dropout
times are programmed using a DIP
switch located on the control board.
The control board is mounted in a
protected cavity in the molded
contactor frame to prevent inadvertent
access to the voltage and dropout
DIP switch. Four auxiliary contacts
(2NO, 2NC) are supplied with each
contactor and are wired to terminal
blocks on the starter control panel.
The vacuum interrupters employ
special main contact materials that
exhibit a low chop current plus other
specially engineered characteristics
that minimize switching surges. Surge
protection is therefore not required
due to the use of the vacuum contactor. Surge protection may be required
for other reasons such as the high
probability of lightning strike, etc.
An included simple go/no-go gauge is

used for checking contact wear. Wear
can be checked without removing the
contactor from the starter. The vacuum
contactor at 65 lb is much lighter than
previous generation airbreak or vacuum
contactors, which allows for easier
insertion and removal from the
starter structure.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Contactor Control Board
10
11
12
13
DIP Switch on Contactor Control Board
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 006
General Description
Mechanical Interlock with
Isolation Switch
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
400A Stab-in Contactor
7200V Maximum
400A, 7.2 kV Bolt-in

The bolt-in version of the SL Contactor
is supplied as standard for those
applications requiring a 400A contactor.
The contactor is mounted on wheels
and rolls into the AMPGARD structure
on steel rails. Bolted bus bars connect
the contactor line and load terminals
to the power components in the starter
cell. A three-phase current transformer,
three-phase potential transformer and
ground fault current transformer are
mounted in the cell when required.
A plug on the side of the contactor
connects the contactor to the low
voltage control panel.
Roll-out
Wheels
Self-Aligning
Contactor Line
and Load Fingers
400A Stab-in Contactor 7200V

Maximum with Mechanical Interlock
800A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactors

The 800A SL Contactor is available in
a one-high configuration and is rated
at 600/650/720A enclosed. The 800A
contactor is available with a stab-in type
connection only. The 800A contactor
is mounted on wheels and has similar
features to the stab-in 400A contactor.
The contactor is easily withdrawn from

the structure by removing the six bolts
securing the contactor line and load
terminals, and the pin connecting
the isolating switch interlock arm.
The contactor can be removed from
the starter without disconnecting
any medium voltage cables.
400A, 7.2 kV Stab-in
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A stab-in version of the SL Contactor

is an available option. The stab-in
contactor is mounted on wheels
and rolls into the AMPGARD structure.
Contactor line and load fingers engage
cell-mounted stabs as the contactor
is inserted into the starter cell. The
contactor is held in position by a bolt
and bracket combination. It can be
easily withdrawn from the starter
cell by removing the bolt holding
the contactor against the bracket
and disconnecting the isolation
switch interlock. The contactor can
be removed from the starter without
disconnecting any medium voltage
cables.
800A Vacuum Break Contactor

7200V Maximum Stab-in with Wheels,
and Line and Load Fingers
300A, 15 kV Stab-in Contactor

The 300A 15 kV SL Contactor is
available in a one-high configuration
and is rated at 300A enclosed. The
300A contactor is available with a
stab-in type connection only. The 15 kV
contactor is mounted on wheels and
has similar features to the 800A 7.2 kV
contactor. The maximum starter current
is 300 full load amperes when supplied
with 15 kV 400 ampere CLS fuses.
300A Stab-in Contactor

15 kV Maximum

AMPGARD starters use Eatons Type
CLS power fuses with special time/
current characteristics for motor service.
Type CLE or Type HLE power fuses
are applied when the starter is used
to feed a transformer. The fuse is
coordinated with the contactor and
overload relay characteristics to
provide maximum motor/transformer
utilization and protection. The standard
mounting method for power fuses is
bolted with an option for fuse clips in
the 400A starter. 800A 7.2 kV and 300A
15 kV fuses are supplied as bolted only.
Interruption is accomplished without
expulsion of gases, noise or moving
parts. Type CLS/CLE/HLE fuses are
mounted in a vertical position to ensure
maximum rating reliability, proper
operation and to eliminate the possibility
of dust and dirt collecting, resulting in
a deterioration of dielectric properties.
When a fault has been cleared, a
plastic indicator in the top of the fuse,
normally depressed, pops up to give
visible blown fuse indication. This
indicator also operates the optional
blown fuse mechanism (available
with bolted 7.2 kV fuses only) on the
isolation switch that gives a contact
closure to allow use in the starter
control circuit.
Blown fuses may be removed and
replaced without removing or drawing
out the contactor. The control circuit
primary fuses are also current limiting.
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-5
Sheet 10 007
General Description
Standard Isolation Switch
Viewing Window
Motor Load Connections

(Accepts 2-Hole Lugs
as Standard)
i
ii
Bolted
Main Fuses
CLS Clip Fuse
Customer
Terminal Blocks
for Remote
Control
Connections
CLS Bolted Fuse
Standard Fuse Mounting is Bolted with Optional Clip Mounting
1
2
3
Horizontal
Wireway
Fuse Fault
Indicator
Vertical Control
Wireway
Control Power Transformer

(750 VA Standard, up to
4 kVA Available)
AMPGARD 400A StarterMedium Voltage Door Open

Blown Fuse
Indicator
Operating Arm
(Optional)
Blown Fuse Indicating Device
Isolated Low Voltage Control

The low voltage door has four cutouts as standard.
Device panels are provided on the low voltage door to

simplify the mounting of pilot devices. The low voltage control panel is behind the low voltage door and is completely
isolated from the medium voltage compartment. A standard
viewing window allows visual verification of the isolation
switch status before attempting to open the medium voltage
door. The medium voltage door is locked closed whenever
the isolation switch is closed.
5
6
7
8
9
Predrilled Holes for Additional

Control Devices
10
1/4 Turn Door Latch

Top and Bottom
Motor Protective Relay
(When Specified)
Standard Isolation
Switch Viewing
Window
Indicating Lights
Start/Stop Pushbutton
(When Specified)
MD-3000 Differential
Relay (When Specified)
Isolation Switch
Operating Handle
(Mechanism Locks
Medium Voltage
Door When Switch
is Closed)
Low Voltage
Access Door
AMPGARD 400A Starter Door Closed

Distinctive Markings on Isolation Switch
Shutter Indicate Shutter is Closed and
Switch is Open
Medium Voltage
Access Door
Interposing Control Relay

DIN Rail Mounted
AMPGARD 400A StarterLow Voltage Door Open
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
View of Isolation Switch Through Viewing Window
CA08104001E
21

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 008
General Description
Bus and Optional Features

Insulated Barriers to Separate
Motor Load Cables from Main Bus
ii
Low Voltage
Conduit Area
1
Phase A
2
Phase B
3
4
Phase C
Medium Voltage Conduit

Area (Lower Starter)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Bus Splice
Plates
Vertical
Bus Drops
Medium Voltage Conduit Area

(Upper Starter)
Bus Compartment Top View 3000A Main Horizontal Bus
Vertical Bus, Rear View (2-High 400A)
Main Bus
Vertical Bus
UL, CSA and IEC Certification
When starters are grouped together

in a lineup, a typical option is the
main bus. The AMPGARD main bus
is mounted in its own 12-inch (305 mm)
high top-mounted enclosure, which
isolates it from the starter. The connection from the main bus to the starter is
done with rigid vertical bus. Insulated
barriers are provided for separate top
entry of power and control cables.
The main bus is top, side and front
accessible, which allows for ease of
maintenance or extension of lineup
without disassembling the starters.
Vertical bus is located behind a fixed

barrier in the rear of the enclosure.
It is fully insulated as standard, with
plating to match that of the main bus.
AMPGARD starters are designed,

assembled and tested to meet all
applicable standards:
Other Optional Features
Main bus is available for 1000, 1200,

2000 and 3000A. Main bus is uninsulated as standard on 7.2 kV and below.
Fully insulated bus is an available
option for up to 7.2 kV starters and is
standard on 15 kV and arc resistant
starters. Bus may be supplied with
either tin or silver plating. Crossover
bus, busway entry, and pull boxes
are not available for the 3000A design
(3000A bus duct provisions are available
with the Main Breaker AMPGARD,
see Page 10.1-12).
AMPGARD starters are available

with a variety of accessories and
modifications to satisfy a wide range
of application requirements. Some
of the broad areas covered include:
Bus and cable entrance enclosures

Transformers
Power factor correction capacitors
Operators and pilot devices
Instruments and meters
Control relays and timers
Solid-state or selected electromechanical protection devices
NEMA/ANSI ICS3
UL 347
CSA
The major components, i.e., contactor,
isolating switch, fuses, EMR-3000 and
EMR-4000 are UL recognized.
UL or CSA labeling of a specific starter
requires review to ensure that all
requested modifications and auxiliary
devices meet the appropriate standards.
Refer to factory when specified.
AMPGARD starters meet the requirements of IEC standards 60694, 60298
and 60470.

The standard bus short circuit rating

is 50 kA per NEMA standards and is
based on the let-through current of the
largest fuse used in any starter. An
optional 50 kA, 2-second bus rating is
available for customers that require a
higher rating for the main bus.
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-7
Sheet 10 009
General Description
Reduced Voltage Starters
Reduced Voltage Reactor Starter
General Description
Reduced Voltage
Autotransformer Starter
i
ii
Eaton offers traditional electromechanical reduced voltage starters in

addition to reduced voltage solid-state
(RVSS) starters. Unless otherwise
specified, reactors and autotransformers
are NEMA medium duty rated. They
are designed for three 30-second starts
per hour. Heavy-duty reactors and
transformers can be supplied when
specified. Locked rotor current must
be specified when ordering reduced
voltage starters to ensure that the
reactors or autotransformers are
properly sized.
1
2
3
4
Reactor Starter
Table 10.1-1. Type 502 Reactor Starting

Characteristics
Starter
Type
%
%
%
%
Motor Motor Line
Torque
Voltage Current Current
80
80% tap
65% tap 1 65
50% tap
50
1
80
65
50
80
65
50
64
42
25
Factory set on 65% tap.
Table 10.1-2. Type 602 Auto-transformer

Starting Characteristics
Starter
Type
%
%
%
%
Motor Motor Line
Torque
80
80% tap
65% tap 2 65
50% tap
50
Advantages
Advantages
Reduces starting currents

Least costly reduced voltage
starting method
Disadvantages
Large footprint: 1-1/2 structures

at 400A
Bump on transition to full voltage
Not as efficient as autotransformer
Due to reduced torque during
starting, motor must typically be
unloaded during the start sequence
Sequence of Operation
Main contactor (M) closes

Current flows through reactor
reducing voltage to motor (based
on tap setting)
When motor current reaches
~125%, the run contactor (R) closes
providing full voltage to the motor
Auto Transformer Starter
80
65
50
67
45
28
64
42
25
6
7
8
Produces the most torque per

incoming line ampere of any
reduced voltage starting method
Less costly than RVSS
Disadvantages
10
11
Large footprint: 1-1/2 structures

at 400A
More costly than reactor
Bump on transition to full voltage
Due to reduced torque during
starting, motor must typically be
unloaded during the start sequence
Notes: Care should be taken when selecting
the motor for reduced voltage starting to
ensure that there is sufficient torque to
accelerate the load at reduced voltage.
Motors that do not fully accelerate at
reduced voltage will generate high voltages
at transition that can damage the autotransformer and void the factory warranty.
Sequence of Operation
12
13
14
15
16
17
Shorting contactor (S) closes

Main contactor (M) closes
Current flows through autotransformer reducing voltage to motor
(based on tap setting)
When motor current reaches ~125%,
the shorting contactor (S) opens and
the run contactor (R) closes providing full voltage to the motor
Notes: Because the motor is never
disconnected from the supply voltage,
the starting is closed transition.
CA08104001E
18
19
20
21

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 010
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Solid-State Reduced Voltage

AMPGARD MV4S
Eaton offers reduced voltage solidstate soft starters in 400A and 720A
configurations. Horsepower ratings
are available through 5000 hp. The
400A AMPGARD soft starter requires
one full height structure with a full
voltage starter in the upper compartment bus connected to a soft start truck
assembly in the lower compartment.
The 720A soft starter requires two
full height structures (total 72 inches
(1829 mm) wide). The soft start
components are fixed mounted in the
720A starter. Both soft starters include
internal fault protection and built-in
basic motor protection. The standard
assembly includes an EMR-3000 motor
relay for advanced motor protection.
Why is Solid-State Reduced

Voltage Soft Starting Desirable?
10
Eliminate shock to your mechanical

components
Avoid coupling and shaft damage
Prevent rotor and winding failure
Stop drive belt squeal and breakage
Prevent water hammer in pipes
Soft stop the pump motors
Reduce pressure so valves close gently
Avoid the surge wave
Reduce peak starting currents
Reduce voltage drop on motor start
11
12
Ratings
The soft start controller provides
a number of selectable starting
characteristics as standard:
Kick Start
Provides an initial boost of current to
overcome motor and system inertia.
Ramp Start
Operator sets the initial starting
voltage and ramp time. Factory
setting for starting voltage is 20%.
Range is 0 to 100%. Factory setting
for starting time is 10 seconds. Range
is 0 to 120 seconds.
Load CablesNormal
Current Limit
Limits the maximum starting current.
Used in long start time applications
and motor protection applications.
Factory setting is 350% of motor FLA.
Range is 200 to 600%.
Solid-State Soft Stop

Provides a slow decrease in output
voltage. Extends the stopping time of
the motor. Typically used with pumps.
Motor
Protection
Relay
Load CablesMoved for Full Voltage Start
Main Starter
Cubicle
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
23004160 Vac grounded systems

60 kV BIL impulse rating
Horsepower: to 5000 hp
Refer to Table 10.1-19 on Page 10.1-32

for more detailed ratings information.
The AMPGARD solid-state soft starter
is recommended for application only
on power systems that are solidly
grounded or resistance grounded.
Ungrounded systems are not
recommended.
Industry Standards
The AMPGARD solid-state starter is
designed and built to meet all applicable
industry standards. The 400A starter is
available as a UL listed assembly.
Soft Starter
LV Control
Compartment
Drawout
SCR Truck
(Located
Behind
MV Door)
AMPGARD 400A Soft Starter
NEMA ICS3
UL 347
CSA
Manufactured in an ISO 9001
and ISO 14001 certified facility
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-9
Sheet 10 011
General Description
How It Works
1. At the time of start, the bypass
contactor is open and all current
passes through the SCRs that
ramp the voltage per the preprogrammed starter settings.
2. After start is complete, the run
contactor closes, taking the SCRs
out of the circuit.
3. The SCRs are on for only a short
time therefore no MCC venting or
cooling is required.
MV4S Keypad and Display
Application with Capacitors

Capacitors of any kind may not be
connected to the load of the solid-state
starter. When power factor correction
capacitors are required, the capacitors
are connected ahead of the RVSS truck
and are switched with a separate
capacitor contactor. If multiple starters
with capacitors are supplied in the
same lineup, all capacitors are
switched off while the solid-state
starter ramps. At the completion of
the ramp cycle, the capacitors for
all energized starters are sequenced
back on. Long cable runs may create
enough capacitance to be of concern.
Capacitance connected to the starter
motor connections must not exceed
0.3 ufd.
400A MV4S Roll-out Truck
4. When a stop command is

received, the SCRs can be
programmed to ramp down,
providing a soft stop.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Design
Soft start components and bypass
contactor are mounted in a easyto-remove roll-out truck assembly.
Maintenance can be performed with
the truck on a bench away from the
starter cubicle.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
720A MV4S with Doors Open
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 012
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Synchronous Motor Control,

Basic or Enhanced, with
Mark V Controller
9
10
11
The Enhanced Brush-type starter

includes all features of the Basic
starter plus premium protection,
metering and communications.
Features include:
AMPGARD synchronous starters are

available for Brush-type and Brushless
Motors, in Basic and Enhanced versions.
Both Basic and Enhanced Brush-type
designs feature the AMPGARD exclusive
Soft-sync that minimizes mechanical
shock as the motor is synchronized.
Power factor regulation/

VAR regulation
Auto-loading
Field forcing
Enhanced metering
Event recorder
Communications with Modbus
TCP/Modbus RTU, Serial Interface
(RS-232)
The standard enhanced display is an
Eaton GP04 interface module. An
Eaton PanelMate is available as a
high-end display.
Eaton Factory Authorized Start-up

Service is required with all Enhanced
Synchronous Starters.
Basic Brush-type
The Basic Brush-type starter includes
a three-phase exciter to generate DC
rotor current up to 200A plus a control
board that determines the proper
time to apply the DC field while also
providing basic protection, including:
Enhanced Brush-type
Basic Brushless
AMPGARD Synchronous Starter
Locked rotor protection

Incomplete sequence
Failure to synchronize
Blown fuse protection
Pullout protection
Field loss protection
The protective features are displayed

on an Eaton GP02 interface module.
Stator protection is provided by
an EMR-3000 solid-state motor
protection relay.
The Basic Brushless starter includes

a three-phase DC power supply to
generate exciter field current up to
10A plus a control board that provides
basic protection. A solid-state motor
protective relay is supplied for pullout
protection. Output voltage is adjustable
from 62125 Vdc.
Stator protection is provided by
an EMR-4000 solid-state motor
protection relay.
Basic Display with Trip Indication
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-11
Sheet 10 013
General Description
Incoming Line
Depending on the size and number
of incoming cables, an incoming line
enclosure may be necessary. Different
designs are available for incoming
power for top or bottom entry.
When incoming line metering is
specified, an additional 24-inch
(610 mm) wide metering structure
is typically supplied.
Bus for
Top or
Bottom
Entry
Incoming
Power
Incoming Line Connection Options
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch
For application needs with loads

rated 600 or 1200A at 23006600V,
AMPGARD is available with the Type
LBS loadbreak switch. The LBS is fixed
mounted and will fit in one-half of a
standard 80-inch (2032 mm) high,
36-inch (914 mm) wide vertical structure.
Power fuses up to 450E amperes
can be mounted within the half-high
structure. 600E or 750E fuses require
an additional half-structure, 1100E
or 1350E fuses require an additional
full structure. Lineups supplied with
unfused LBS switches or with switches
that use fuses greater than 450A
cannot be rated for 50 kAIC. Refer to
Table 10.1-5 on Page 10.1-17 for additional ratings information. Mechanical
interlocks are incorporated so that the
door cannot be opened when the switch
is on, and when the door is open the
switch cannot be closed. A safety
screen is supplied behind the switch
door. The Type LBS switch can be
supplied with two Form C electrical
interlocks.
Cable: Maximum of six per phase,

750 kcmil maximum, top or
bottom entry
Bus Duct: Top only, 1200A, 2000A or
3000A. Standard Eaton three-wire
designs only
Transformer Throat: Must be the
standard design used by Eaton
Potential Transformers,
Control Power Transformer
Disconnect and Fuses
Bus connected (7.2 kV max.) potential
transformers and/or control power
transformers are mounted in a
20-inch (508 mm) high assembly that
includes a disconnect and primary fuses.
The assembly can be mounted in a
24-inch (610 mm) or 36-inch (914 mm)
wide structure.
Typical 24-Inch (610 mm) Wide

Incoming Line Structure
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Potential Transformers, Control

Power Transformer and Fuses
Mounted in a Disconnect Assembly,
Height 20 Inches (508 mm)
11
12
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch Shown
in Upper or Lower Half of 36-Inch
(914 mm) Wide Structure, Height
40 Inches (1016 mm)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch Shown

with Safety Screen Removed
CA08104001E
21

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 014
General Description
Main Breaker AMPGARD
Ratings
23006600 Vac systems

(7200 Vac maximum), three-phase
60 kV BIL impulse withstand rating
ANSI interrupting ratings250,
350 and 500 MVA. 500 MVA rating
available for 6600V systems only
Continuous current1200A, 2000A,
and 3000A
ii
1
2
Front/Side Accessible
Connections
All connections requiring maintenance are front or side accessible

Rear access space is not required
An MBA (excluding back-to-back
design) can be installed flush
against the wall
Circuit Breaker Rating Chart

Table 10.1-3. ANSI Standards
Type VCP-W Circuit Breakers Rated on
Symmetrical Current Rating Basis
ANSI
Interrupting
Rating
Nominal
Voltage Class
Impulse
Withstand
Rating
Short-Circuit
Current at Rated
Maximum kV
Continuous
Current
at 60 Hz
MVA
kV
kV Peak
kA rms
Amperes
250
4.16
60 kV BIL
29 at
4760V
1200
2000
3000
350
4.16
60 kV BIL
41 at
4760V
1200
2000
3000
500
7.2
60 kV BIL
33 at
8250V
1200
2000
3000
7
8
Main Breaker AMPGARD
General Description
10
Eatons Main Breaker AMPGARD

(MBA) is a fully integrated metalenclosed medium voltage Type VCP-W
Drawout Vacuum Circuit Breaker that
is bus connected (close-coupled) to
AMPGARD Medium Voltage Starters
in a single integrated assembly.
11
Notes: MBA sections are 100 inches

(2540 mm) high.
12
13
14
15
16
17
Main Breaker AMPGARD (7.2 kV max.)

is suitable for service entrance. Utility
metering sections are not available.
Main Breaker AMPGARD is designed
and built to meet the following
standards where applicable:
NEMA ICS-1 and NEMA ICS-3, Part 2

ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3
UL 347
CSA C22.2, No. 31 and No.14
Listing/Certification
UL listing and CSA certification is
available, depending on the specific
bill of material.
Notes: See Page 10.1-20 for complete ratings.
Main Breaker AMPGARDDoors Open
Requires Less Floor Space
Only 60 inches (1524 mm) deep,

the integrated MBA design provides
a bus system that directly connects
to AMPGARD motor starters, eliminating space-consuming transition
sections. The reduced floor space
requirements yield significant cost
savings, particularly when installation in a prefabricated electrical
house is required
Back-to-back starters provide for
an increase in the number of
starters without an increase in
floor space
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
July 2014

Motor Starters
10.1-13
Sheet 10 015
General Description
Microprocessor-Based Relays
Enclosures
Eatons protective relays provide

programmable circuit protection,
information and operator conducted
testing. Refer to Tab 4 for more
information.
The MBA is available in NEMA/

EEMAC 1, NEMA/EEMAC 1G/1A,
and NEMA/EEMAC 12 enclosures.
i
ii
1
Metering
Power Xpert meters are available
for multi-function metering. Refer
to Tab 3.
Communications
Eatons Power Xpert Architecture

communications provides for monitoring and controlling complete electrical
distribution systems of those parts of
a system selected by the operator.
Refer to Tab 2.
Low Voltage Equipment Cell Compartment

for Metering and Protection Devices
4
5
6
AMPGARD 2-High Structure Bus Connected

to Main Breaker Section
7
8
9
10
Side Panel Removed to Show Incoming
Cable Connections
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 016
Technical Data
Technical Data
Typical Wiring Diagram for Full Voltage FVNR Starter
ii
1
Motor
2
3
T3
T2
T1
CG
1CT
X2
X2
X2
X1
X1
X1
CG
GND
DP
MP
H1C H2A
H1A H2A
C1
C11
H1B
H1B H2B
H2B
C2
C12
H1C
H2C
IQ DP4130
25
C13 H1A H2C
C3
GND
X2
GF2
X1
GF1
EMR3000 24
G2
GFCT
G1
8
H3
X3
PF1 H2
X2
H2
H1
10
PT
SF2
1Amp
V2
V11
MB
2 4
(BLK) (WHT)
1T1
Cust. 120 V ACN

Test Power
DC
COIL
2
DC
COIL
1
1T2
Cust.
Rcpt.
M
14
Ground
1 Rcpt.
120 V
ISW
X2
H2
B
Coil
Controller
(X1)
PF1
1 Amp
H1 VA X1
CPT
750
MA
12
IS2
1 Plug
120 V X1
Main
Fuse
Start
8
Amp
SF1
Start
M3
M7
M5
Ma
M2
MX
17
Stop
P1
M7
1A
Ground
Ma
ISW
G
URTD
AC
MP
19
L3
(X1)
MX
(X2)
Run RIL Off GIL
MA
IS1
15
(X2)
50
(WHT) (BLK)
M 5
L2
ACN 32
Ground
M6
Stop
M5
Mb
M4
Ground
L1
P1
21
M8
12 Set Point
System
11 Trip Mode 1
MP
1T3
13
20
M8
12
18
M9
GND
11
16
Neutral
IQ DP-4130
V13
V2
X1 V1
H1
M9
Mb
V3
12
Ground
DP
P1
4160 Vac
60 Hz
Figure 10.1-1. Induction Motor Across-the-Line Starter, Vacuum Contactor with Optional EMR-3000 Motor Protection and
IQ Metering, Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Red and Green Indicating Lights
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-15
Sheet 10 017
Technical Data
Typical Wiring Diagram for Reduced Voltage Autotransformer RVAT Starter
i
ii
MOTOR
1
T3
T1
T2
2
3
MP
G1 G2
EMR-3000
SCTB
GF12
1CG GF11
5
M9
M9
R9
R9 Mb
M8
R8
R8
M8
R7
R7
H1C H1B H1A

IQ DP-4130
DP
H2C H2B H2A
Rb
Ground
CG
X2
X1
1CT
X1 X2
X1 X2
X1
GF1
GFCT
Ground
X2
GF2
H2A
C11 H1A
C1
C21
H2B
C12 H1B
C2
C22
H2C
C13 H1C C23
25
24
C3
Ra
R6
R6
R5
R5
Rb
X3 V3
X2
PT
Ground
MB
12
SB
RB
MP
H1 X1
PF1
1 AMP
Main
Fuse
CPT
750 VA
1 PLUG
120V
MA
MX
RX
(BLK)
COIL CONTROLLER
+
(WHT)
(BLK)
+
-
(WHT)
SX
OFF
S5
Sb
M3
X1
10 (DISCRETE
R3
S5
R3
Ra
S4
R2
15
16
M7
M5
17
Ma
M7 M5
Mb
M6 M4
9 4
MP
P1
1A
P1
Figure 10.1-2. Induction Motor Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Starter, Vacuum Contactor with Optional EMR-3000 Motor Protection and
IQ Metering, Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Red and Green Indicating Lights
CA08104001E
18
19
STOP
L1
14
X1
IN 2)
INC. SEQ.
S6
3 S4 S7
M3
START
M4
M2
2
Ground
4160 Vac
60 Hz
SA
RX
ISW
L2
RA
52
2
MP
1
51
X2
RUN RIL GIL
SX MX RX
Ground
X2
50
12
8 AMP
IS1
SF1 1X1 IS2 ISW
H2 X2
13
SA
RA
MP
S 5 1
12
Set MP3000 Set Point

"START" to the
Following; TRNC(100),
TRNT (Max 30 Sec),
and TRN(I).
Transition
Cust 120 V
Test Power
ACN
GND
Cust
1 RCPT
RCPT
120 V
(WHT)
(BLK)
+
-
R 5 1
DC
DC
COIL COIL
2
1
11
Set Point Sys

TP Mode 1
11
6 2
COIL CONTROLLER
M 5 1
DC
DC
COIL COIL
2
1
(WHT)
(WHT)
(BLK)
DC
DC
COIL COIL
1
2
6 2
(BLK)
80
R
L
6
1T1
(BLK)
50
65
L3
10
12
1SA
VC
VB
VA
MA
M
SF2
1 AMP
COIL CONTROLLER
1T2
50
80
R
L
V11
V1
+
-
80
R
L
V2
(WHT)
65
X1
V2
Ground
65
S
J
K
50
Autotransformer
2SA
1T3
3SA
H2
H1
V13
GND
H3
A B NEU C
DP
IQ DP-4130
G
R4
R4
20
21

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 018
Technical Data
Ground Fault, Instantaneous Overcurrent and Differential (if used).

MAX
T2
T1
22
20
72
31
TRPX
AUX 3
MP
30
B7
B6
71
SS2
Softstart Bypass
Position
Cont Normal Bypass
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
X
12
3
X2
SCTB
CG
MAX Run
CG1
CG1
CG
C2
Black
Blue
C1 Red
H1A H2A
C13
C22
H1B H2B
C23
C31
C32
H1C H2C
C33
= Circuit Board Input
Continued
from Lower
Left
TB2
EMR-3000
C31
TB3
= Circuit Board Dry Output

= Circuit Board Wetted Output
M5
M3
B3
25
CIB
24
GND
MP
GF21
X2 GF2
G2
GF11 EMR-3000
G1
GFCT
X1
TB1
C12
C21
C21
X1
X1
MP
C11
C11
X2
GIL Bypass 1RIL
Off
X1
Green
G GND
1CT
X2
RIL
White
C3
TCB
Ba
Refer to MP4000 Manual IB02602002E, Pages 4-12 Through 4-13,

Setpoints 10-2, 10-15 and 10-19.
21
MAX
All Other Trip Functions Will Operate the Trip Output and Allow the
Softstart Module to Open the Circuit (Controlled Shutdown)
T3
26
23
These Trip Conditions Will Result in the Immediate Opening of the

Main Contactor (Uncontrolled Shutdown)
27
MAX
24
TB8-6
MAX
MP4000 Must be Programmed for AUX2 Relay Output to Trip on:
TB8-5
25
MP4000 Programming Notes:

Motor
RVSS Bypass Input
Capacitors (Power Factor or Surge)

Must not be Connected to the Load Side
of the RVSS Starter. If Capacitors are
Supplied in the Motor Terminal Box,
They Must be Removed.
Fault Status Indicator

for Customers use
ii
Typical Wiring Diagram for Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

Contactor Status Indicators for
Customers Use
GF1
M3
B3
M5
Ma
Ba
Mb
M2
M4
B2
1T3
1T2
1T1
B
Reduced Voltage 400A MVS4 Starter
SCR ASSY
400 AMP
Pole ASSY
SCR ASSY
SCR ASSY
X1
H2
X2
H1
X1
11
NEU
V2
B
MP4000
V11
V1
PT
SF2
1 AMP
V13
V13 BLK
V2
V2 GRY
V11
V11 YEL
J2-4
67
J2-1
SS2
MCB
TCB
TCB
CR
Reset
C
GND
TB2-5
TB2-6
RVSS Reset
X2
H1
J2-7
V31
V3
H2
64
TB1-6
TB1-8
Start/Stop
GND
MP G
TB2-1
TB2-2
Emergency Bypass
E
F
10
66
68
CPU
*
TX
65
=
=
=
=
Remote Device
Internal Term. Blk(s)
Term. Blk. for Customer Conn.
TX Type Light
63
See MP
Programming
Notes
12
12
12
MB
BB
2
+
5
MX
MA
BX
BA
SS2
MCB
TB1-9
50
H2
1 Plug
VB
H1
VA
PF1
3 AMP
CPT
2K VA
12
69
70
3
BA
62
ISW
IS1
AMP
SS2
ISW
TCB
4
A1
Main Coil
SS2
TCB
2
TB8-7
GND
A1
TB8-9
MX
*
Start
Start
CR
55
*
Stop
CR
L3
L2
1A
L1
Ring
Transformers
Reset
2
BX
62
PNL PNL AED
Bypass
Coil
EZ Relay
Timing Head .1-30SEC 54
NO/NC
TB3-11
SF1
TCB
TB3-10
Main
Fuse
15
1
19
Stop
21
S N
PHASE C
RVSS
Fault
S N
PHASE B
TRPX
MP
20
Continued
at Right
CIB
1 RCPT
X1
IS2
IS3
ISW
TCB
50
CR
TB4-3
GND
120V
TB1-1
TRPX
X2
18
TRPX
51
CUST
ACN RCPT
CUST 120V
Test Power
17
X2
RVSS
WIL
Fault
X1
15
16
Time Between
Starts Timer
(AUX5 Failsafe)
TB4-1
Mode 2
13
52
(White)
(White)
(White)
1
12
MP
TRIP
TB2-2
DC
Coil
2
TB2-1
14
(White)
DC
Coil
1
(Black)
VA
6
(Black)
+
Coil Controller
VB
DC
Coil
2
(Black)
DC
Coil
1
VC
Mode 1
1
Coil Controller
(Black)
+
-
13
MP
AUX 2
4160 VAC
60 HZ
7
1
S N
PHASE A
GND
1
Figure 10.1-3. Induction Motor Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starter, Vacuum Contactor with EMR-3000 Motor Protection, Local and Remote
Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Local and Remote Red and Green Indicating Lights
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-17
Sheet 10 019
Technical Data
Table 10.1-4. Starter Maximum Continuous Current Ratings
Starter Class
Enclosure Type
Two-high with 400A 7.2 kV contactors

Two-high with 400A 7.2 kV contactorsalternate
NEMA 1
NEMA 12/NEMA 3R
Arc Resistant
330 top
320 top
330 bottom
320 bottom
320 top
230 top
210 top
400 bottom 1
370 bottom
350 bottom
One-high with 800A 7.2 kV contactor
720
650
600
One-high with 300A 15 kV contactor
300
300
N/A
ii
360 top
360 bottom
1
2
Limited acceleration time and locked rotor current. Contact Eaton for details.
LBS Loadbreak Switch

Table 10.1-5. LBS Switch Ratings
Description
Continuous
Amperes
Load-Break
Amperes
Fault Close Rating,

kA Asymmetrical
System Fault Rating,

kA Symmetrical
600A unfused switch

1200A unfused switch
600
1200
600
1200
40
61
25
38
600A fused switch, 450E maximum fuse

450
450
600
1200
80
80
50
50

600
750
600
1200
64
64
50
50
1200 2
1200
49
31
1200A rating is for NEMA 1 enclosure with vented covers. NEMA 3R/12 rating is 1000A.
Type SL, 400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings
4
5
6
7
8
Table 10.1-6. Type SL 400A Vacuum Contactor Ratings

Rated Utilization Voltage
2200 to 2500V
3000 to 3600V
3800 to 4800V
6000 to 7200V
Interrupting rating
(With 400A high interrupting contactor)
NEMA unfused (E1)
NEMA fused (E2)
8.5 kA
50 kA
8.5 kA
50 kA
8.5 kA
50 kA
8.5 kA
50 kA
Application table
Induction motor
Synchronous motor (0.8 PF)
(1.0 PF)
Transformer
Capacitor three-phase
200 MVA at 2400V

1750 hp
1750 hp
2000 hp
1500 kVA
1200 kVAR
285 MVA at 3300V

2250 hp
2250 hp
2500 hp
2000 kVA
1650 kVAR
400 MVA at 4600V

3000 hp
3000 hp
3500 hp
2500 kVA
2100 kVAR
570 MVA at 6600V

4500 hp
4500 hp
5500 hp
4000 kVA
3300 kVAR
Arcing time
Pickup voltage
Dropout voltage
Control voltages
AC
DC
Control circuit burden
Closing (AC)/(DC)
Holding (AC)/(DC)
Auxiliary contact rating
Voltage (maximum)
Continuous current
Making capacity (AC)
Making capacity (DC)
Breaking capacity (AC)
Breaking capacity (DC)
Latch (when specified)
Mechanical life
Trip voltages (DC)
Trip voltages (AC)
Minimum trip voltage
Trip burden
24 Vdc
125 Vdc
110/120 Vac
Trip time
Weight
12 milliseconds (3/4 cycle) or less

80% rated coil voltage
13
110/120/220/240 (50/60 Hz)

125
14
100V125V, 1 kVA/200V250V, 1.8 kVA

100V125V, 40 VA/200V250V, 50 VA
15
9
10
11
12
Maximum Insulation Voltage: 7200V

Maximum interrupting current
(3 operations)
Rated current
IEC make-break capability-AC4
Make
Break
Short-time current
30 seconds
1 second
8.7 milliseconds (0.5 cycle) 3
Standard service altitude
Optional service altitudes
Mechanical life
Electrical life
BIL
Dielectric strength (60 Hz)
Closing time
(Energization to contact touch)
Opening time
8500A (High interrupting)

4500A (Standard interrupting)
400A enclosed
4000A
3200A
2400A
6000A
63 kA Peak
1000 to +2000 meters
3500 to 1001 meters
+2001 to +5000 meters
2.5 million operations
300,000 operations
60 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds)
20 kV (1 minute)
80 milliseconds
30 to 330 milliseconds (selectable)
600V
10A
7200 VA
125 VA
720 VA
125 VA
250,000 operations
24/125V
110/120V
400 VA
400 VA
400 VA
30 milliseconds
60 lbs (27 kg) (stab-in/bolt-in)
16
17
18
19
20
Time stated in cycles on 60 Hz base.
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 020
Technical Data
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Type SL, 800A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings

Table 10.1-7. Type SL 800A Vacuum Contactor Ratings
Description
SJ 25V830
SJ 33V830
SJ 50V830
SJ 72V830
Rated utilization voltage
22002500V
30003300V
38005000V
60007200V
Interrupting rating
NEMA unfused (E1)
NEMA fused (E2)
NEMA fused (E2)
12.5 kA
200 MVA at 2300V
50 kA
12.5 kA
12.5 kA
12.5 kA
285 MVA at 3300V 408 MVA at 4600V 570 MVA at 6600V
50 kA
50 kA
50 kA
Power rating 1
Induction motor
(1.0 PF)
Transformer
Capacitor three-phase
3000 hp
3000 hp
3500 hp
2500 kVA
2400 kVAR
4000 hp
4000 hp
5000 hp
3500 kVA
3200 kVAR
12,500A
600/650/720A enclosed
800A open
Arcing time
Pickup voltage
Dropout voltage
Control voltages (AC)/(DC)
8000 hp
8000 hp
10,000 hp
6000 kVA
4800 kVAR
Maximum Insulation Voltage: 7200V

Maximum interrupting current
(three operations)
Rated current
IEC make-break capability-AC4 class 3
Make
Break
Short time current
30 seconds
1 second
8.75 milliseconds (0.5 cycle)
Mechanical life
Electrical life
BIL
Closing time (energization to contact touch)
Opening time
8000A
6400A
4320A
10,800A
86 kA peak
250,000 operations
200,000 operations
At rated current
60 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds)
18.2 kV (1 minute)
80 milliseconds
50330 milliseconds, field
selectable
10
11
5000 hp
5000 hp
6000 hp
4500 kVA
4000 kVAR
Control circuit burden (rated volt)

Closing (AC)/(DC)
Holding (AC)/(DC)
Auxiliary contact rating (L-64)
Voltage (maximum)
Continuous current
Mechanical life
Trip voltages (DC)
Trip voltages (AC)
Tripping voltage
Tripping burden
24 Vdc
48 Vdc and 96 Vdc
110 Vac and 220 Vac
Weight

110/120/220/240V (50/60 Hz)
125 Vdc
2600 VA
80 VA
600V
10A
7200 VA
200 VA
720 VA
200 VA
100,000 operations
24/48/96V
110/220V (50/60 Hz)
1200 VA
400 VA
500 VA
95 lbs (43 kg)
Other power ratings are available based on the specific load data.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-19
Sheet 10 021
Technical Data
Type SL, 300A, 15 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings
Table 10.1-8. Type SL 15 kV Vacuum Contactor Ratings

Description
SL12V330
SL15V330
Utilization voltage
10,00011,000V
12,40013,800V
Interrupting rating
EI (unfused)
E2 (fused)
E2 (fused)
5 kA
950 MVA at 11,000V
50 kA
5 kA
1190 MVA at 13,800V
50 kA
1
2
Induction motor
6000 hp (300 FLA)
7500 hp (300 FLA)
6000 hp
7500 hp
6750 hp
8500 hp
Transformer
3800 kVA at 11 kV
6800 kVA at 13.8 kV
BIL
75 kV
95 kV (with arrestors)
Rating
Maximum voltage
15,000V
Maximum interrupting current (three operations)
5000A
Rated current
300A enclosed
300A open
IEC make-break capability
AC3make 3000
AC3break 2400
Short-time current
30 seconds
1 second
8.75 milliseconds
1800A
4500A
25 kA peak
Mechanical life
250,000 operations
Electrical life
200,000 operations
36 kV (1 minute)
Closing time
80 milliseconds
Opening time
50 to 330 milliseconds (selectable)
Weight
95 lbs (43 kg)
Arcing time
Pickup voltage
Dropout voltage
Control voltages
(AC)
(DC)
110/120/220/240V (50/60 Hz)

125V
Control circuit burden (rated voltage)

Closing
Holding
2600 VA
80 VA
Auxiliary contact ratings

Voltage (maximum)
Continuous current
600V
10A
7200 VA
200 VA
720 VA
200 VA

Mechanical life
Trip voltages (DC)
Trip voltages (AC)
Tripping voltage
Tripping burden
24 Vdc
48 Vdc and 96 Vdc
110 Vac and 220 Vac
Weight
3
4
Table 10.1-9. Type SL 15 kV Vacuum Contactor Specifications

Specification
ii
250,000 operations
24/48/96V
110/220V (50/60 Hz)
1200 VA
400 VA
500 VA
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
95 lbs (43 kg)
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 022
Technical Data
ii
1
Main Breaker Ratings

Table 10.1-10. Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards
Identification
Rated Values
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Voltage
Related Required Capabilities 1

Insulation Level
Current
Rated
Transient
Recovery
Voltage
Current Values
Asymmetry Factor
for VCP-W Breakers
Cycles V/K
kA
kV rms rms
kA
rms
kA
Crest
Rated
Reclosing Time
2
5
E2
T2 4
Amps I
kV
mS Cycles Y
kA Crest
Sec
rms
Rated Permissible
Tripping Delay
1.6 K Times Rated


Divided By K
Rated Time to Crest
kV
Crest
Rated Crest Voltage
kV
rms
Rated Continuous
Current at 60 Hz
1.6 K Times Rated

1.2 x 50
sec. Impulse
2
kV
MVA V
Class Class kV rms K
K Times Rated
Short-Circuit
Current 3 KI
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
Normal
Frequency
Rated Voltage
Range Factor
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Nominal
Voltage Class
Nominal Three-Phase
MVA Class

Maximum Sym.
Interrupting
Capability
Rated Withstand
Test Voltage
3-Second Short-Time
Current Carrying
Capability
kA rms S
Assy.
50
VCP-W
250
4.16
250
4.76
1.24 19
60
1200
2000
3000
29
8.9
50
30
3.85
36
36
58
97
132 8 78 8
1.2
50
VCP-W
350
4.16
350
4.76
1.19
19
60
1200
2000
3000
41
8.9
50
30
4.0
49
49
132
78
1.2
10
75
VCP-W
500
7.2
500
8.25
1.25 36
95
1200
2000
3000
33
15.5
60
30
6.6
41
41
111
66
1.2
11
12
13
3
14
15
4
5
For reclosing service, there is No Derating necessary for Eatons type VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can perform
the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all with no derating.
Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
V
For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability at an operating voltage, Vo =
Vo
V
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage, Vo = 1.15
Vo
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal to the
operating voltage.
4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. Contact Eaton for details.
3-cycle rating available.
Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula:
(K Times Rated Short-Circuit current) 2
T (seconds) =Y
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula.
Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical interrupting capability, both at specified operating voltage.
8 Non-standard breakers with high momentary rating available for special applications.
Notes: Contact Eaton for capacitor switching, low inductive switching, and cable charging ratings.
6
16
17
18
19
20
Rated
Control
Voltage
Spring Charge Motor

Run
Amperes
Time
(Seconds)
Close or Trip
Amperes
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
9.0
4.0
2.0
6
6
6
16
7
4
120 Vac
240 Vac
4.0
2.0
6
6
6
3
UV Trip mA
(Maximum)
Voltage Range
Close
Trip
Indicating
Light
Amperes
200
80
40
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140280
0.35
0.35
0.35
104127
208254
104127
208254
0.35
0.35
21
CA08104001E
July 2014

Motor Starters
10.1-21
Sheet 10 023
Technical Data
One of the most critical coordination

issues is between the contactor and
the starter fuses. The fuses must
interrupt faults greater than the
interrupting rating of the contactor.
The AMPGARD 400A high interrupting
contactor (SL400A-HI) has an 8-cycle
dropout time factory setting as
standard and will interrupt at 8500A.
The maximum size fuse used with an
SL400A-HI contactor is a 450-24R. By
comparing the fuse curve with the
contactor rating, it can be observed
that for faults greater than 8500A, the
fuse will open before the contactor.
With faults less than 8500A, the
contactor may clear the fault before
the fuse blows, depending on the
settings of the protective relays. Refer
to Figure 10.1-4 for an illustration of
AMPGARD coordination.
Other vacuum contactors available
today may have lower interrupting
ratings than the AMPGARD Type SL
vacuum contactors. Dropout times
also vary, and may be as short as
two cycles on other starter designs.
Lower interrupting ratings and shorter
dropout times can result in fault
current levels where the contactor
may be required to interrupt a fault
greater than its rating. This can
result in equipment failure. Refer to
Figure 10.1-5 for an illustration of
an improperly coordinated starter.
AMPGARD XP3 provides complete
contactor fuse coordination with
minimum contactor opening time to
minimize the time fault current flows
throughout the power system. Refer
to Pages 10.1-4110.1-44 for more
complete details.
mechanical damage to the motor and

may prevent the starter fuses from
blowing by allowing the contactor to
clear the fault (only if the fault is less
than the contactor interrupting rating).
AMPGARD starters use 400A standard
interrupting contactors (SL400-SI)
when the contactor is not required
to coordinate with the starter main
fuse. An example of this application
is the run contactor of a reduced
voltage starter.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Time
The AMGARD starter provides

ensured coordination between its
fuses, contactor, current transformers,
protective relays, and the motor it
is controlling.
AMPGARD starters also ensure

coordination between other starter
components. The current transformers
and protective relays are selected to
work properly with each other, and
to protect the motor. Protective relays
like Eatons EMR-3000 provide optimal
motor protection, while also rapidly
opening the contactor during fault
conditions. This rapid opening signal
cannot open the contactor in less than
its set dropout time, but it will take
the motor off-line in the shortest
possible time. This will help minimize
Contactor
Dropout
24R Fuse
Curve
8
9
Contactor
Interrupting Rating
10
Current
Figure 10.1-4. Proper Contactor Fuse Coordination Found in AMPGARD Starter
11
12
13
24R Fuse
Curve
Time
Contactor-Fuse Coordination
14
15
Contactor
Dropout
16
Contactor
Interrupting Rating
17
Fault Current Range
where Contactor can
Attempt to Open on a Fault
Greater than its Rating
Current
Figure 10.1-5. Contactor Fuses That Are Not Properly Coordinated
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 024
Technical Data
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Protection Considerations
Coordinated with the motors
characteristics, the protective devices
in the AMPGARD starter provide motor
protection from overload to
full system capacity faults.
InsulGard relays are an available

option on AMPGARD starters. The
InsulGard provides early warning of
increasing partial discharge levels in
Multi-function solid-state motor

protection relays are a common
option on AMPGARD starters. The
EMR-3000 is typically provided when
a multi-function relay is specified.
The EMR-3000 provides many types of
protection including overload, locked
rotor, ground fault and phase loss/
phase unbalance. The EMR-3000 also
provides start control logic to protect
the motor against excessive starting.
The relay may be applied to either
across-the-line or reduced voltage
starters. On reduced voltage starters,
the EMR-3000 can control the
transition from reduced to full voltage,
offering the greatest protection for the
motor and starter. An optional RTD
module can be supplied for motors
with built-in RTDs. The EMR-4000 can
be supplied when voltage monitoring
and protection are required.
Eatons MD-3000 can be supplied when
motor differential protection is required.
the starting equipment, cables and

motor. This early warning will help the
user to better schedule maintenance
and avoid unplanned downtime.
Ultimate Trip
AMPGARD starters are supplied with

an adjustable thermal overload relay
as standard.

Curve Programmed to
Follow Specific Motor
Damage Curve Providing
Maximum Motor
Utilization
Controller Maximum
Interrupting Rating
Time In Seconds
Full Load Amps
Motor Starting Curve
11
Instantaneous
Overcurrent
12
24R Fuse
13
14
Contactor Dropout
15
16
Asymmetrical
Offset Compensation
17
18
19
Contactor Interrupting
Capacity
EMR-3000 Motor Protective Relay

Current
Figure 10.1-6. Full Range Coordinated Protection Between Current Limiting Type CLS Fuses,
Vacuum Contactor and Motor Protection Relay
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-23
Sheet 10 025
Technical Data
Starter Fuse Information
Table 10.1-12. Fuse Coordination Recommendations

Minimum FLA
Maximum FLA
Fuse Rating
CT Ratio
7.2 kV/400A Contactor

10.0
23.0
31.2
42.0
22.9
31.1
41.9
46.7
70-2R
70-2R
100-3R
100-3R
25:5
50:5
50:5
75:5
46.8
63.0
74.8
83.0
62.9
74.7
82.9
93.5
130-4R
150-5R
170-6R
170-6R
75:5
100:5
100:5
150:5
93.6
124.0
137.1
166.0
123.9
137.0
165.9
187.0
200-9R
200-9R
230-12R
230-12R
150:5
200:5
200:5
300:5
187.1
247.0
329.0
360.1
246.9
328.9
360.0
400.0 1
390-18R
450-24R
450-24R
450-24R
300:5
400:5
600:5
600:5
250.0
330.0
499.0
650.1
720.0
450-24R
450-24R
650-36R
800-44R
800-44R
300:5
400:5
600:5
800:5
1000:5
ii
1
2
3
4
5
7.2 kV/800A Contactor

200.0
250.1
330.1
500.0
650.1
1
6
7
Specific motor acceleration time and locked rotor current must be reviewed to ensure
24R fuse has sufficient capacity for start cycle.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 026
Layout Dimensions
Equipment Details
Mounted in the Medium Voltage Section
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
Three incoming line connectors

Drawout three-pole gang-operated line
isolating switch assembly with isolating shutter, external operating
handle interlocked to prevent opening
the medium voltage compartment
door until the isolating switch is
open and grounded
Vertically mounted current limiting
power fuses with pop-up blown fuse
indicators
One magnetic three-pole vacuum
contactor with DC operating coils
and mechanical interlock to prevent
opening the isolating switch when
contactor is closed
One control power transformer
(115V secondary)
Two CPT primary current
limiting fuses
Four electrical interlocks
(2NO, 2NC)
Three current transformers
Reversing Starter
11
12
One additional magnetic three-pole

vacuum contactor (duplicate of above),
both contactors are mechanically and
electrically interlocked.
Horsepower 1 Volts
Dimensions
Weight
Lbs (kg)
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1350 (613)
1350 (613)
1700 (772)
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1350 (613)
1350 (613)
1700 (772)
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
6600 6 400
6600 6 400
6600 6 720
570,000
570,000
570,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1500 (681)
1500 (681)
1800 (817)
6600 6 400
6600 6 400
6600 6 720
570,000
570,000
570,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
Height 2 Width
Depth
Additional
Starter Spaces
Table 10.1-13. Starter Selection InformationDimensions in Inches (mm)

Equipment
Arrangement
Number
ii
Full Voltage Squirrel Cage Starters

Catalog S210 Non-Reversing
Catalog S310 Reversing
Specifications
Starter
Interrupting
Rating
(kVA)
Layout Dimensions
Contactor
Ampere Rating
(Enclosed)
22002400V Non-Reversing
700/800 3
1500/1750 4
3000
2300
2300
2300
22002400V Reversing
700/800 3
1500/1750 4
3000
2300
2300
2300
1250/1500 3
2500/3000 4
5500
4600
4600
4600
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500 3
2500/3000 4
5500
4600
4600
4600
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250 3
4000/4500 4
8000
6600V Reversing
2000/2250 3
4000/4500 4
8000
1
2
3
4
5
6
Horsepower based on NEMA standard design B motor at 1800 rpm.

When horizontal bus is added, height becomes 92.00 inches (2336.8 mm).
At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds.
At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.
Maximum current for two starters in a single structure is 720A.
May be applied on 6900V systems where maximum voltage does not exceed 7200V.
Mounted in the Low Voltage Compartment
13
14
15
16
Control panel with:

One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
One interposing control relay
Set of control circuit terminal blocks

One control circuit secondary fuse
One run-test circuit
RVS
RVS
M
Arrangement 1
Arrangement 2
Arrangement 3
Arrangement 4
17
Figure 10.1-7. Starter Arrangements
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-25
Sheet 10 027
Layout Dimensions
1.50 (38)
3.50
(89)
1200 Amp - 4.00" X 1/Ph
4.63 (118)
Main
Bus
Ph Ph Ph
a b c
Low Voltage
Control
1.36
(35)
1.18
(30)
7.39
(188)
5.81
(148)
Low Voltage
Control
80.00
(2032)
62.00
(1575)
22.00
(559)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
4.63 (118)
2.50
(64)
7.39 21.00
(188) (533)
22.85
(580)
30.00
(762)
36.00
(914)
Front View
2.00 (51)
Main Bus
Note C1
3.00 (76)
6.00 (152)
36.00
(914)
Top View
36.00
(914)
4.50
(114)
9.25 (235)
Note A
2.31
13.75
(58)
(349)
1.00 (25)
6.00 (152)
Note C
Note B
Gnd 1.45
Bus (37)
5.81
(148)
2.00
(51)
61.00
(1549)
ii
5.50 (140)
3.00
(76) 2.00
(51)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
30.00
(762)
9.32 (237)
Note T
12.00
(305)
1.25
(32)
13.50
(343)
3.00 (76)
27.00
(686)
2.00
(51)
5.50 (140)
6.80 (173)
1
2
3
30.00
(762)
28.00
(711)
21.67
(550)
1.00
(25)
4.50
(114)
4
5
6
Floor Plan
Note D
Side View
Detail A
Load Terms
T1 T2 T3
4.38
4.38
(111)
(111)
Arranged Horizontally
on Rear Wall Load Panel
in Starter
For seismic installations,

mount a minimum of
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
1200A Main Bus
Figure 10.1-8. Arrangement 1 Detail (Full Voltage 400A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
Main
Bus
Ph Ph Ph
a b c
9.32
(237)
12.00
(305)
13.50
(343)
1.25
(32)
Note E
5.50 (140)
Low Voltage
Control
80.00
(2032)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
7.39
(188)
5.81
(148)
Gnd 1.45
Bus (37)
22.85
(580)
30.00
(762)
36.00
(914)
Front View
1.36
(35)
1.18 (30)
2.00
(51)
4.63 (118)
31.75
(806)
2.50
(64)
2.00
(51)
6.80 (173)
Note G
6.00 (152)
15
4.50 (114)
Note A
Note E
9.25 (235)
2.31
13.75
(59)
(349)
1.00 (25)
6.00 (152)
Note G
3.00 (76)
27.00
(686)
30.00
(762)
28.00
(711)
21.67
(550)
1.00
(25)
16
17
4.50 (114)
Floor Plan
Note D
18
Side View
Detail A
19
800A Starter
Figure 10.1-9. Arrangement 2 Detail (Full Voltage 800A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
CA08104001E
13
14
36.00
(914)
Top View
36.00
(914)
Load Term
T1 T2 T3
4.3
4.3
(109)
(109)
on Rear Wall Load Panel
in Starter
12
5.50 (140)
Main Bus
29.00
(737)
11
30.00
(762)
2.00
(51)
3.00
(76)
9
10
1.50
(38)
3.50
(89)

mount a minimum of
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
20
21

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 028
Layout Dimensions
11.50 (292.1)
1.25
(31.8)
1.50 (38.1)
ii
PH PH PH Main
A B C Bus
3.50
(88.9)
Top Plan View
6.70 (170.2)
Main
Bus
2
Ground
Bus
24.00
(609.6)
1.00
(25.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping Section 1
1500 Lbs
1.50
(38.1)
13.50
(342.9)
Elevation View
9.32
(236.7)
36.00
(914.4)
5.81
(147.5)
60.00
(1524.0)
56.43
(1433.3)
Shipping Section 1
1500 Lbs
0.90
(22.9)
Low Voltage
Control
1.85
(47.0)
7.39
(187.7)
Ground
Bus
1.45
(36.8)
Base Plan View
30.00
(762.0)
Load Term
T1 T2 T3
5.50
(139.7)
Note E
30.00
(762.0)
6.70 (170.2)
Main Bus
Note G
3.00
(76.2) 1.36
(34.5)
6.00
(152.4)
1.18
(30.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
36.00
(914.4)
59.00
(1498.6)
Top View
2.00
(50.8)
4.50
(114.3)
22.85
(580.4)
LH Side
Sheet
1.25
(31.8)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
12.00
(304.8)
Load Term
3.50
Detail A
Note L
(88.9)
15
16
4.50
(114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
11
14
Note A
30.00
(762.0)
Structure #1
60.00
(1524.0)
24.00
(609.6)
28.00
(711.3)
1.00
(25.4)
15.00
(381.0)
PH PH PH Main
A B C Bus
13
22.00
(558.8)
Side View
10
12
Note F
19.00
2.00
(482.6)
(50.8)
30.00
(762.0)
UNIT 2D
UNIT 1D
1
8
9
24.00
(609.6)
4.50
(114.3)
22.85
(580.3)
5
6
Top View
62.00
(1574.8)
1.45
(36.8)
Continuation of Bus
from Adjacent Structure
24.00
(609.6)
80.00
(2031.9)
0.90
(22.9)
30.00
(762.0)
27.50
(698.5)
5.50
(139.7)
Note F
12.00
(304.8)
2.50
(63.5)
1.00
(25.4)
13.75
(349.3)
Note E
36.00
(914.4)
9.25
(235.0)
Note A
28.00
2.31
(58.7) 1.00 21.67 (711.3) 30.00
(762.0)
(25.4) (550.5)
Note G
2.92 (74.2)
17
18
Side View
4.38 (111.3)
4.38 (111.3)
2.00
(50.8)
6.00
(152.4)
3.00
(76.2)
on Rear Wall Load
Panel in Starter
4.50
(114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
Detail A
19
27.00
(685.9)
Structure #2
Figure 10.1-10. Arrangement 1 Detail (Full Voltage 15 kV)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-27
Sheet 10 029
Layout Dimensions
Primary Reactor, Reduced

Voltage Starters
Specifications
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2800 (1271)
2800 (1271)
4000 (1816)
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3250 (1476)
3250 (1476)
4650 (2111)
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2800 (1271)
2800 (1271)
4000 (1816)
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3250 (1476)
3250 (1476)
4650 (2111)
6600
6600
6600
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3300 (1498)
3300 (1498)
4650 (2111)
6600
6600
6600
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3250 (1476)
3250 (1476)
4650 (2111)
One additional magnetic contactor

(duplicate of above), both contactors
are mechanically and electrically
interlocked.
One control panel with:

One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
Two interposing relays
One set of control circuit
terminal blocks
Reduced Voltage Structure
700/800 4
1500/1750 5
3000
2300
2300
2300
700/800 4
1500/1750 5
3000
2300
2300
2300
ii
1
2
3
4
1250/1500 4
2500/3000 5
5500
4600
4600
4600
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500 4
2500/3000 5
5500
4600
4600
4600
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250 4
4000/4500 5
8000
2000/2250 4
4000/4500 5
8000
2
3
4
5

At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds.
At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.
Run
Contactor
Run
Contactor
5
6
7
8
Reactor
Reactor
M
Arrangement 2
Arrangement 3
Run
Contactor
M
Reversing Reactor
Contactor
12
13
14
Arrangement 4
15
17
18
%
%
%
%
Motor Motor Line
Torque
80
65
50
11
16
Table 10.1-14. Type 502 Reactor

80
65
50
Reversing
Reactor
Contactor
9
10
Run
Contactor
Depth
22002400V Reversing
Arrangement 1

run contactor with DC operating coil
and electrical interlocks
One medium-duty starting reactor
with 506580% taps
80
80% tap
65% tap 1 65
50% tap
50
Width
Starter
Type
Height 3
6600V Reversing
Reversing Starter
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Equipment
Arrangement
Number

One drawout three-pole gangoperated line isolation switch
assembly with isolating shutter,
external operating handle interlocked
to prevent opening the medium
voltage compartment door until the
isolating switch is open and grounded
One vertically mounted current
limiting power fuse with pop-up
blown fuse indicators
opening the isolation switch when
the contactor is closed
(115V secondary)
Two CPT primary current limiting fuses
Four electrical interlocks (2NO, 2NC)
Dimensions
Starter
Interrupting
Rating (kVA)
Volts
Contactor
Ampere Rating
(Enclosed)
Horsepower 2
19
64
42
25
20

CA08104001E
21

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 030
Layout Dimensions
i
ii
13.50
(343)
1.50
(38)
3.50
(89)
Main
Ph Ph Ph Bus
a b c
7.39
(188)
1200 Amp - 4.00" X 1/Ph
80.00
(2032)
61.00
(1549)
4
5
22.00
(559)
5.81
(148)
Front View
30.00
(762)
3.00 (76)
36.00
(914)
22.85
(580)
2.50
(64)
1.00 (25)
6.00 (152) 21.67
Note G (550)
27.00
(686)
Side View
8
RVNR 400A Starter w/Main Bus 1200A
Top View
28.00
(711)
2.00
(51)
30.00
(762)
5.50 (140)
5.50 (140)
6.80 (173)
Note G
36.00
(914)
4.50
(114)
61.00
(1549)
Gnd 1.45
Bus (37)
2.00 (51)
Main Bus
Load Term
4.38 (111)
4.38 (111)
2.92 (74)
9.32
(237)
Note L1
12.00
(305) 2.88 2.00
(73) (51)
1.70
(43)
1.00 (25)
Low Voltage
Control
Load Term
T1 T2 T3
1.25
(32)
36.00
(914)
36.00 (914)
27.00 (686)
4.50 2.00 (51)
(114)
Note E
13.75
(349)
4.63
(118)
1.00 (25)
2.31 (59)
1.00 (25)
Note A
28.00
(711)
1.00
(25)
30.00
(762)
4.50
(114)
Floor Plan
Note D

mount a minimum of
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
Figure 10.1-12. Arrangement 1 Detail (Reduced Voltage, 400A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-29
Sheet 10 031
Layout Dimensions
Starter
Type
Reversing Starter
(duplicate of above), both contactors are
mechanically and electrically interlocked.

One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
Three interposing relays
terminal blocks
Reduced Voltage Structure(s)

run contactor with DC operating coil
and electrically and mechanically
interlocked with the starting contactor
One magnetic two-pole vacuum
start contactor with DC operating
coil and electrical and mechanical
interlocks
One medium-duty starting autotransformer with 506580% taps
Three distribution class lightning
arresters for high voltage stress protection on the transformer zero tap
80% tap
80
65% tap 1 65
50% tap
50
1
80
65
50
67
45
28
64
42
25
Specifications

Horsepower
Volts
Dimensions
Weight
Lbs (kg)
200,000
200,000
200,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2
80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3
3100 (1407)
3100 (1407)
4800 (2179)
200,000
200,000
200,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2
80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3
3650 (1657)
3650 (1657)
5650 (2565)
400,000
400,000
400,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2
80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3
3100 (1407)
3100 (1407)
4800 (2179)
400,000
400,000
400,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2
80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3
3650 (1657)
3650 (1657)
5650 (2565)
6600 400
6600 400
6600 720
570,000
570,000
570,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2
80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3
3100 (1407)
3100 (1407)
4800 (2179)
6600 400
6600 400
6600 720
570,000
570,000
570,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 3

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 3
80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 4
3650 (1657)
3650 (1657)
5650 (2565)
Height 3 Width
Depth
Number of
Structures

assembly with isolating shutter,
external operating handle interlocked
to prevent opening the medium
voltage compartment door until
the isolating switch is open and
grounded
Three vertically mounted current
limiting power fuses with pop-up
(115V secondary)
Two CPT primary current limiting fuses
Equipment
Arrangement
Number
ii
%
%
%
%
Motor Motor Line
Torque
Starter
Interrupting
Rating
(kVA)
Table 10.1-16. Type 602 Auto-transformer

Contactor
Ampere Rating
(Enclosed)
Reduced Voltage
Autotransformer Starters
4
5
700/800 4
1500/1750 5
3000
2300 400
2300 400
2300 720
22002400V Reversing
700/800 4
1500/1750 5
3000
2300 400
2300 400
2300 720
1250/1500 4
2500/3000 5
5500
4600 400
4600 400
4600 720
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500 4
2500/3000 5
5500
4600 400
4600 400
4600 720
8
9
10
11
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250 4
4000/4500 5
8000
12
6600V Reversing
2000/2250 4
4000/4500 5
8000
2
3
4
5

14
15
Short
Run
Auto
Transformer
Arrangement 1
16
Short
Short
Auto
Transformer
Run
M
Arrangement 2
Run
Rev
Auto
Transformer
Arrangement 3
13
Short
M
Rev
Auto
Transformer
17
Run
Arrangement 4
18
19
20

CA08104001E
21

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 032
Layout Dimensions
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11

assembly with isolating shutter.
External operating handle interlocked to prevent opening the
medium voltage compartment
open and grounded
Three vertically mounted current
limiting power fuses with pop-up
(115V secondary)
limiting fuses
Reversing Starter
(duplicate of above), both contactors
are mechanically and electrically
interlocked.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
One interposing relay
terminal blocks
Horsepower Horsepower Volts

at 1.0 PF
at 0.8 PF 1
Mounted on top of starter:

One starting and field discharge
resistor
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
Lbs (kg)
23
700/800 4
900/1000 4 2300 400
1500/1750 5 1750/2000 5 2300 400
3000
3500
2300 720
200,000 1
200,000 1
200,000 2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1500 (681)

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1500 (681)
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2350 (1067)
200,000 3
200,000 3
200,000 4
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953)

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953)
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2900 (1317)
400,000 1
400,000 1
400,000 2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1550 (704)

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1550 (704)
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2350 (1067)
400,000 3
400,000 3
400,000 4
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953)

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953)
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2900 (1317)
570,000 1
570,000 1
570,000 2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1700 (772)

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1700 (772)
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2500 (1135)
570,000 3
570,000 3
570,000 4
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953)

80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953)
80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2900 (1317)
22002400V Reversing
900/1000 4 2300 400
700/800 4
1500/1750 5 1750/2000 5 2300 400
3000
3500
2300 720
1250/1500 4 1500/1750 4 4600 400
2500/3000 5 3000/3500 5 4600 400
5500
6000
4600 720
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500 4 1500/1750 4 4600 400
2500/3000 5 3000/3500 5 4600 400
5500
6000
4600 720
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250 4 2500/2750 4 7200 400
4000/4500 5 5000/5500 5 7200 400
8000
10,000
7200 720
6600V Reversing
2000/2250 4 2500/2750 4 7200 400
4000/4500 5 5000/5500 5 7200 400
8000
10,000
7200 720
1
2
3
4
5

Starting and discharge resistors are mounted on top, add 13.00 inches (330.2 mm) to the height.
At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds.
At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.
Field
Panel
Field
Panel
Field
Panel
Field
Panel
One brush-type solid-state Mark VI

field panel with:
Mounted on door:
One AC line ammeter, panel type
One DC field ammeter, panel type
One exciter field potentiometer
One set of externally ventilated
heatsinks
One graphic display
One ELC controller

One set of control circuit blocks
Three primary fuses
Three secondary fuses
Mounted in the Upper Compartment

or Auxiliary Structure
Mounted on inside compartment:

One step-down exciter
transformer three-phase
One SCR power supply panel
One synchronous control board
MOV surge protection
One three-phase CT
Equipment
Arrangement
Number
Starter
Interrupting
Rating (kVA)
ii
Full Voltage Synchronous Starters

Brush Type Mark VI Controller
Contactor
Ampere Rating
(Enclosed)
Rev
Rev
Arrangement 1
Arrangement 2
Arrangement 3
Arrangement 4

6
7
When the field panel requirement exceeds 88A at 125 Vdc or 44A at 250 Vdc, an auxiliary structure
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) wide is required.
Mounting location of exciter transformer when field panel requirement exceeds 88A at 125 Vdc or
44A at 250 Vdc. Otherwise compartment is blank.
20
21

CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-31
Sheet 10 033
Layout Dimensions
25.0
(635)
Starting &
Discharge res.
1.50
(38)
13.50
(343)
4.63 (118)
Note E
12.25
(311)
3.50
(90)
1000 Amp - 3.00" X 1/Ph
Ph Ph Ph
a b c
Main
Bus
DC Field
Conn's MTD
on rh Side
3.00
(76) 2.00
(51)
80.00
(2032)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
Low Voltage
Control
36.00
(914)
Front View
30.00
(762)
5.50
(140)
5.50
(140)
6.80
(173)
2.00 (51)
Main Bus
1.18
(30)
5.81
(148)
ii
12.00
(305)
1.36 (35)
22.00
(559)
1.25 (32)
4.13
(105)
Note G
Gnd
Bus
7.39
(188)
1.45
(37)
22.85
(580)
30.00
(762)
Side View
21.00
(533)
2.50
(64)
2
3
3.00 (76)
36.00
(914)
Top View
36.00
(914)
4.50
(114)
Note E
Note A
7.13 (181)
2.31
(59)
13.75 (349)
1.00 (25)
6.00 (152)
Note G
30.00
(762)
28.00
(711)
21.67
(550)
1.00
(25)
6
7
8
2.00
(51)
27.00
(686)
4.50
(114)
Floor Plan
Note D
9
10
Detail A
Load Term
T1 T2 T3
4.38 (111)
4.38 (111)
On Rear Wall Load Panel
in Starter
11
Synchronous Starter
1000A Main Bus

mount a minimum of
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
12
13
Figure 10.1-15. Arrangement 1 Detail (400A, Synchronous)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 034
Layout Dimensions
Reduced Voltage Solid-State Soft

Starter AMPGARD MV4S Starters
Equipment Details
Mounted in the Medium Voltage Sections
ii
1
2
4
5
8
9
11
12
Control panel with:

One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
One interposing control relay
Set of control circuit terminal blocks

Mounted in Lower Door Compartment
Soft start control module with

Modbus and RS-232 interface for
remote communications
User interface module with 2 x 20
character LCD display, 12 LEDs,
and eight pushbuttons
Horsepower 12
SCR/Contactor
Ampere Rating
Starter Interrupting
Rating (AIC)
Dimensions
Height 3
Width 4
Depth
Add. Starter
Spaces
Weight
Lbs (kg)
2300
2300
1500
3000
400
720
50,000
50,000
92.00 (2336.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
36.00 (914.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
0
0
2000 (908)
4000 (1816)
3300
3300
1800
3600
400
720
50,000
50,000
92.00 (2336.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
36.00 (914.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
0
0
2000 (908)
4000 (1816)
4160
4160
2500
5000
400
720
50,000
50,000
92.00 (2336.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
36.00 (914.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
0
0
2000 (908)
4000 (1816)
1
2
13

Drawout three-pole gang-operated
line isolating switch assembly with
isolating shutter, external operating
open and grounded
power fuses with pop-up blown
fuse indicators
contactor is closed
(115V secondary)
limiting fuses
Withdrawable SCR truck with fully
rated vacuum bypass contactor

Volts
10
3
4

Based on maximum acceleration time of 30 seconds.
Includes horizontal bus.
Does not include incoming line provisions.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-33
Sheet 10 035
Layout Dimensions
PH PH PH Main
A B C Bus
Load Term
Detail A
Note: L
12.00
(305.0)
5.81
(148.0)
POWER
RUN
ALARM
TRIP
62.00
(1575.0)
Low
Voltage
Control
13.50
(343.0)
9.32
Note: E
3.00 2.00
(76.2) (51.0)
3.50
(89.0)
1.36
(345.4)
1.18
(30.0)
80.00
(203.2)
61.00
(155.0)
2.00
(51.0)
36.00
(914.4)
22.85
(580.4)
2.50
(64.0)
2.00 (51.0)
5.50
(140.0)
5.50
(140.0)
6.80
(173.0)
30.00
(762.0)
36.00
(914.4)
1
2
Note: C1
3.00
(76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Top View
3
4
4.50
(114.3)
Note: A
Note: E
1.00
(25.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Note: G
2.00
(51.0)
30.00
(762.0)
For seismic installations, mount a
minimum of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
ii
4.10 (104.1)
10.00
(254.0)
Ground
Bus
1.45
(36.8)
1.25
(32.0)
Main Bus
Low
Voltage
Control
7.39
Ground
(188.0)
Bus
1.45
(36.8)
1.50
(38.1)
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4)
30.00
(762.0)
6
7
8
3.00 (76.2)
27.00
(686.0)
4.50
(114.3)
9
10
Side View
Floor Plan
Figure 10.1-16. Arrangement Detail (400A Solid-State Reduced Voltage)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 036
Layout Dimensions
Table 10.1-20. Arrangement Detail Notes

Note
Description
Cable Notes
ii
1
Line connection is designed for maximum of one 4/0 cable.
Line connection is designed for maximum of two 500 kcmil.
Load connection is designed for maximum of one 350 kcmil or two 4/0.
Load connection is designed for maximum of one 750 kcmil or two 500 kcmil.
Arrangement Notes
0.875 dia. typical 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
HV conduit space, load cables for two-high starters. Cables for lower starter enter in front half of conduit space, and cables for upper starter enter
in rear half.
B1
HV conduit space, line and load cables for bottom entry stand-alone starters. Line cables should enter in rear half of conduit space,
and load cables should enter in front half of conduit space.
LV conduit space for two-high starters with bottom entry control conduit. Control wiring for upper starter should enter in left half of conduit space,
and lower starter control wiring should enter in right half of conduit space.
C1
LV conduit space for two-high starters with top entry control conduit. Control wiring for upper starter should enter in right half of conduit space,
and lower starter control wiring should enter in left half of conduit space.
90 door swing requires 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00-inch (457.2 mm) wide
structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide structure and
40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure.
HV conduit space, load.
HV conduit space, line only.
7
8
9
10
F1
HV conduit space, line only. Line cables to enter in rear half of conduit space only.
LV conduit space only.
Load terminations located on rear wall of starter mounted on a load panel. Terminations are arranged horizontally from left to right. T1, T2, T3
left to right at 4.38-inch (111.3 mm) centers.
L1
Load terminations located on rear wall of reduced voltage enclosure mounted on a load panel. Terminations are arranged horizontally
from left to right. T1, T2, T3 left to right at 4.38-inch (111.3 mm) centers.
HV conduit space, load cables for two-high starters. Cables for lower starter enter in rear half of conduit space, and cables for upper starter enter
in front half.
Steel bottom with removable lead plates.
Tolerances 0.0 inches +0.25 inches per structure.
Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-35
Sheet 10 037
Layout Dimensions
Incoming Line Switch/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
i
ii
5.50
(139.7)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
2.00 (50.8)
6.70
MAIN BUS (170.2)
Note
C1
3.00
(76.2)
1.36
6.00
(34.5) (152.4)
1.18
(30.0)
12.00
(304.8)
30.00
(762.0)
2.00 (50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Top View
3.50
(88.9)
36.0
(914.4)
2.00
(50.8)
4.50
(114.3)
80.00
(2,032.0)
Unit 1B
Unit 2B
7.75
(196.9)
1.45
(36.8)
GND
BUS
Unit 1D
30.00
28.00 (762.0)
(711.2)
Note F
0.90
(22.9)
Unit 2C
34.00
(863.6)
19.00
(482.6)
Line
Term
59.00
(1,498.6)
7
27.00
(685.8)
4.50
(114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
Unit 2D
1
36.00
(914.4)
24.00
(609.6)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
60.00
(1,524)
21.00
(533.4)
Side View Structure 1

1.50
(38.1)
1.25
(31.8)
Shipping Section 1 - 1750 Lbs

9.32
(236.7)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
5.50
(139.7)
30.00
5.50 (762.0)
(139.7)
12.00
(304.8)
2.00 (50.8)
6.70
(170.2)
MAIN BUS
12
24.00
(609.6)
13
Top View
80.00
(2,032.0)
2.00
(50.8)
30.00
(762.0)
0.90
(22.9)
GND
BUS
5.81
(147.6)
1.45
(36.8)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
19.00
(482.6)
10
11
2.00
(50.8)
3.50
(88.9)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
24.00
(609.6)
24.00
(609.6)
14
4.50
(114.3)
22.00
(558.8)
30.00
(762.0)
15
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
15.00
(381.0)
Floor Plan Note D
16
17
4.50
(114.3)
18
Figure 10.1-17. Incoming LBS, Bottom Entry up to 450A Fuse, Unfused with Metering Section
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 038
Layout Dimensions
Incoming Line Switch/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
ii
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
12.00
(304.8)
1.25
(31.8)
33.00
(838.2)
1.50
(38.1)
5.50
(139.7)
9.32
(236.7)
3.50
(88.9)
2.00
(50.8)
36.00
(914.4)
Top View
80.00
(2,032.0)
36.00
4.50 (914.4)
(114.3)
2.00
(50.8)
4
Unit 2B
GND
BUS
Unit 3B
34.00
(863.6)
19.00
(482.6)
1.45
(36.8)
Note F
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
27.00
(685.8)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
Unit 3C
6
7
8
36.00
(914.4)
Unit 2D
4.50
(114.3)
36.00
(914.4)
3
24.00
(609.6)
NOTE C1
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
96.00
(2,438.4)
12.00
(304.8)
Shipping Section 1 - 3250 Lbs
MAIN BUS 6.70 (170.2)

3.00 (76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Top View
(30.0)
80.00
(2,032.0)
0.90
(22.9)
11
12
36.00
4.50 (914.4)
(114.3)
2.00
(50.8)
Line
Term
7.75
(196.9)
GND 1.45
BUS (36.8)
34.00
(863.6)
19.00
(482.6)
24.00
(609.6)
1.00
(25.4)
27.00
(685.8)
4.50
(114.3)
Floor Plan Note D

21.00
(533.4)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
14
28.00
(711.2)
30.00
1.00
(762.0)
(25.4)
Note F
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
13
5.50 (139.7)
2.00 (50.8)
1.36
(34.5) 1.18
59.00
(1,498.6)
30.00
(762.0)
2.00 (50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
3.50
(88.9)
9
10
5.50
(139.7)
Unit 3D
2
12.00
(304.8)
1.50
(38.1)
9.32
(236.7)
1.25
(31.8)
5.50
(139.7)
30.00
(762.0)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
3.50
(88.9)
15
28.00
(711.2) 30.00
(762.0)
Floor Plan Note D

Unit 1D
30.00
(762.0)
6.70
(170.2)
MAIN BUS
2
3
5.50
(139.7)
2.00 (50.8)
MAIN BUS
24.00
(609.6)
5.50 (139.7)
6.70 (170.2)
Top View
16
80.00
(2,032.0)
2.00
(50.8)
17
5.81
30.00
(762.0) (147.6)
18
0.90
(22.9)
19
GND 1.45
BUS (36.8)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
19.00
(482.6)
24.00
(609.6)
4.50
(114.3)
22.00
(558.8)
1.00
(25.4)
28.00
(711.2) 30.00
1.00
(762.0)
(25.4)
15.00
(381.0)
4.50
(114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
20
Figure 10.1-18. Incoming LBS, Bottom Entry, 600E/750E/1100E/1350E Fused with Metering Section
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-37
Sheet 10 039
Layout Dimensions
Tie Switch LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
i
ii
1
10.25
(260.4)
5.27
(133.9) 1.50
(38.1)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
12.00
(304.8)
2
1.25
(31.8)
8.25
(209.6)
3.00
1.36 (76.2)
(34.5)
1.45
(36.8)
5.50
(139.7)
30.00
(762.0)
6.70
(170.2)
MAIN BUS
3.00 (76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
Note C1
1.18
(30.0)
36.00
(914.4)
80.00
(2,032.0)
6
7
0.90
(22.9)
1.45
(36.8)
2.00
(50.8)
GND
BUS
Unit 1D
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
1
Side View
36.00
(914.4)
4.50
(114.3)
9.00
(228.6)
19.50
(495.3)
28.00
(711.2)
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping Section 1 - 1200 lbs.
Top View
59.00
(1,498.6)
Unit 1B
2.00 (50.8)
3.50
(88.9)
GND
BUS
3
5.50
(139.7)
24.50
(622.3)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
27.00
(685.8)
Floor Plan Note D
30.00
(762.0)
10
11
4.50
(114.3)
12
13
14
Figure 10.1-19. LBS Tie
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 040
Layout Dimensions
Arc-Resistant Starter LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
ii
Notes:
For non-seismic installations, mount a
minimum of 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) from wall.
For seismic installations, mount a minimum

of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) from wall.
39.06
(992.1)
3
4
5.90
(149.9)
5.90
(149.9)
5.90
(149.9)
24.20
(614.7)
24.20
(614.7)
Flap Assy.
5.90
(149.9)
21.06
(534.9)
121.78
(3093.2)
Wall
See Notes
97.36
(2472.9)
7
8
1
Shortest Length Exhaust Duct Possible
2
5.50
(139.7)
Top Plan View
5.50
(139.7)
10
Low Voltage
Conduit
Side
Covers
12
1.85
(47.0)
13
5.81
(147.6)
Unit 1B
Unit 2B
62.00
(1574.8)
15
Unit 1D
1
Unit 2D
2
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
17
Elevation View
18
21
PH
B
PH
C
TYP
1.45
(36.8)
1.85
(47.0)
22.00
(558.8) 5.81
(147.6)
Ground Bus
7.15
(181.6)
3.50
(88.9)
27.48
(698.0)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
0.85
(21.6)
Rear
Sprt
3.00
9.39 (76.2)
(238.5)
80.00
(2032.0)
27.48
(698.0)
50.09
(1272.3)
51.09
(1297.7)
2.00
(50.8)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
21.00
(533.4)
2.31
(58.7)
4.50
(114.3)
1.45
(36.8)
5.80
(147.3)
Top View
61.00
(1549.4)
4.63
(117.6)
9.25
(235.0)
13.75
(349.3)
Note X
2.50 1.00
18.66 (63.5) (25.4) 6.00
(152.4)
(474.0)
Note C
3.00
(76.2)
27.00
(685.8)
Note A
50.09
(1272.3)
At
Floor
Level
28.00
(711.2)
21.67
30.00
(550.4)
(762.0)
1.00
(25.4)
4.50
(114.3)
Floor Plan
Note D
Structure #2
Base Plan View
49.24
(1250.7)
Note G
1.41
(35.8)
2.00
(50.8)
Structure #1
Main
Bus
Note T
20.77
(527.6)
Main
Bus
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
2.00
(50.8)
127.74
(3244.6)
Side View
19
20
PH
A
8.95
(227.3)
Ground Bus
14
16
5.93
(150.6)
Low Voltage
Control
Side
Covers
Low Voltage
Control
11
13.80
(350.5)
1.21
(30.7)
Cable Chimney
Through Plenum
Plenum Ships
Separately
51.09
(1297.7)
Rear supports
protrude 1.00"
from rear.
Consider this
dimension
before locating
equipment.
Structure #1 and Structure #2
Figure 10.1-20. 50 kA Arc-Resistant, 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Incoming Cable Section and Two-High 400A Starter Section
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
10.1-39
Sheet 10 041
Layout Dimensions
Main Breaker AMPGARD LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
i
31.12
(790.4)
11.00
(279.4)
10.00 MAIN
(254.0) BUS
Low Voltage
Compartment
11.50
(292.1)
Low
Voltage
Wireway
PH
A
PH PH PH
C B A
6.50
(165.1)
GND
90.00
(2286.0)
20.64
(524.3)
36.63
(930.4)
High Voltage
Access
Removable
Barrier
Customer
29.55
Terminal
(750.6)
Block
Low Voltage Wireway
GND
BUS
24.62
(625.3)
Unit 1B
Unit 2C
Unit 2F
1
26.00
(660.4)
4
36.00
(914.4)
1.50
(38.1)
9.32
(236.7)
1.63
(41.4)
Unit 4D
3
2
36.00
(914.4)
6.25
(158.8)
3.00
(76.2)
Note G
4.00
(101.6)
31.12
(790.4)
PH B
102.00
(2590.8)
Shipping Section 1 7900 lbs.
PH A
11.88
(301.8)
HV Conduit
Area
22.00
(558.8)
Vented
Compartment
16.00
(660.4)
30.00
(762.0)
1.18
(30.0)
5.00
(127.0)
Note A
60.00
(1,524)
22.00
(558.8)
1.85
(47.0)
5.81
(147.6)
62.00
(1574.8)
1.85
(47.0)
1.25
(31.8)
2.00
(50.8)
22.00
(558.8)
57.00
(1447.8)
HV Conduit
Area
LV Conduit
Area
Front
2.75
(69.9)
26.00
(660.4)
3.00
(76.2)
1.00
(25.4)
5.00
(127.0)
36.00
(914.4)
Aux. Compt.
Door
(Note D)
10
12.00
(304.8)
11
3.50
(88.9)
7.39
(187.7)
80.00
(2032.0)
61.00
(1549.4)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
1.45
(36.8)
7.39
(187.7) 21.00
(533.4)
12
13
14
15
22.00
(558.8)
30.00
(762.0)
3.00 (76.2)
0.00
(0.00)
1.45
GND (36.8)
BUS
GND
BUS
11.25
(285.8)
1.25 (31.8)
0.00 (0.00)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
5.81
(147.6)
0.56 dia. (TYP)

6.00 (152.4)
4.75 (120.6)
36.00
(914.4)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
Low
Voltage
Control
36.00
(914.4)
26.00
(660.4)
6.70
(170.2)
Top View
Front
5.50
(139.7)
6.00
(152.4)
3.00
(76.2)
2.00
(50.8)
30.00
(762.0)
5.50
(139.7)
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
1.36
(34.5)
6.00
(152.4)
40.00
(1016.0)
MAIN BUS
11.00
(279.4)
Top View
26.00
(660.4)
1.25
(1.8)
13.50
(342.9)
Note T
60.00
(1524.0)
MAIN BUS
5.00
(127.0)
Righthand Side View

Main Breaker Compartment
4.63
(117.6)
2.00
(50.8)
Note C1
3.00
(76.2)
PH C
14.00
(355.6)
24.62
(625.3)
60.00
(1524.0)
6.00
(152.4)
1.50
(38.1)
Unit 1F
GND
BUS
Front View Incoming Cable

Termination Compartment
36.00
(914.4)
26.00
(660.4)
52
3.00
(76.2)
26.00
(660.4)
Lefthand Side View Incoming Cable

Termination Compartment
Unit 4B
Customer
Terminal
Block
3.00
(76.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
Unit 1C
90.00
(2286.0)
Main Breaker
Compartment
51.20
(1300.5)
39.63
(1006.6)
Disc SW
(if reqd.)
17.00
(431.8)
14.87
(377.7)
51.20
(1300.5)
6.50
(165.1)
11.50
(292.1)
6.50
(165.1)
Access
Panels
Incoming
Cable
Termination
Disc SW
(if reqd.)
17.00
(431.8)
1L3 1L2 1L1
10.00
(254.0)
Front
Front
Line Termination
Mounted on RH Side
ii
PH PH MAIN
BUS
B C
Upper Compt.
Door
(Note D)
2.00
4.63
(50.8)
(117.6)
Floor Plan
4.50
(114.3)
1.00
(25.4)
16
Note A
17
9.25
(235.0)
Note B
Incoming Cable
Terminal Adapter
Side View
36.00
(914.4)
30.00
(762.0)
2.31
(58.7)
13.75
(349.3)
6.00
(152.4)
1.00
(25.4)
21.67
(550.4)
28.00
(711.2)
18
Note C
2.00
(50.8)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
27.00
(685.8)
Floor Plan
Note D
4.50
(114.3)
19
20
Figure 10.1-21. AMPGARD Main Breaker and Two-High 400A Starter Section
21
CA08104001E

Motor Starters
July 2014
Sheet 10 042
Layout Dimensions
Incoming Line/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

21.00
(533.4)
1.50
(38.1)
ii
PH PH PH Main
A B
C Bus
12.00
(304.8)
1.25
(31.6)
9.32
(236.7)
5.50
(139.7)
3.50
(88.9)
5.50
(139.7)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
6.70
(170.2)
MAIN BUS
30.00
(762.0)
24.00
(609.6)
Top View
80.00
(2032.0)
4
5
24.00
(609.6)
4.50
(114.3)
2.00
(50.8)
30.00
(762)
5.81
(147.6)
0.90
(22.9)
30.00
1.00 (762.0)
(25.4)
15.00
(381.0)
30.00
(762.0)
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4)
22.85
(580.4)
Unit 1B
22.00
(558.8)
19.00
(482.6)
1.45
GND
(36.8)
BUS
4.50
(114.3)

Floor Plan Note D
Unit 1C
Continuation of
Bus From Adjacent
Structure
10
Unit 1D
11
12
1
24.00
(609.6)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B
C BUS
Un it 2D
2
24.00
(609.6)
12.00
(304.8)
11.50
(292.1)
1.50
(38.1)
30.00
(762.0)
5.50
(139.7)
5.50
(139.7)
6.70
(170.9)
3.50
(88.9)
48.00
(1219.2)
Shipping Section 1 - 850 lbs.
1.25
(31.8)
Note F
27.50
(698.5)
MAIN BUS
24.00
(609.6)
13
14
Top View
80.00
(2032.0)
0.90
(22.9)
62.00
(1574.8)
2.00
(50.8)
15
16
17
18
24.00
(609.6)
4.50
(114.3)
Note F
GND
BUS
1.45
(36.8)
19.00
(482.6)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
22.00
(558.8)
1.00
(25.4)
Note A
15.00
(381)
28.00
(711.2)
30.00
(762.0)
1.00
(25.4)
4.50
(114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
19
Figure 10.1-22. 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Incoming Cable Section with 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Metering Section (for Right End of Lineup)
20
21
CA08104001E

AMPGARD XP3
July 2014
10.1-41
Sheet 10 043
General Description
AMPGARD XP3
I/O Modules are provided for interfacing

with the AMPGARD XP3. Modules are
available in Digital (DIOM) and Analog
(AIOM) configurations. DIOMs contain
4 digital inputs and 3 digital outputs
per module. Two DIOMs are standard
on each AMPGARD XP3 starter. Up to
6 digital modules can be supplied in
a single starter. AIOMs contain two
420 mA inputs and two 420 mA
outputs. Two AIOMs can be substituted
for a single DIOM. Both AIOMs and
DIOMs accept ring terminals.
Control circuits are constructed using
I/O modules and internal XP3 logic.
Starter Display Module
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Central Display Module
AMPGARD XP3
General Description
For 6.9 kV applications and below,
a premium version of the AMPGARD
offering is available and identified as
AMPGARD XP3. A contactor mounted
Motor Protection and Contactor Controller (MPCC) and a door mounted
Starter Display Module (SDM) replace
the typically supplied motor protection
relay. An encapsulated Sensor Module
with Rogowski Coils and Voltage Dividers
(also contactor mounted) replace the
standard current transformers (CTs)
and potential transformers (PTs).
The optional Central Display Module

allows operators to move out of the
arc flash zone. The CDM uses a touch
screen that displays the following
information: Real-time status of
all starters in the lineup, Historical
information for all starters, Instruction
Books, Schemes, Wiring Diagrams and
Outlines plus Starter Specific Renewal
Parts. The CDM can also be used to
start, stop, and reset all starters.
5
6
7
8
The CDM standard communication is

through EtherNet/IP.
Event alarm via email communicates
operational issues quickly for fast
resolution.
9
I/O Modules
AMPGARD XP3 utilizes universal

components that allow for standard
starter construction. Linearity of the
current and voltage sensors mean
one style for all horsepower ratings.
Fuses are the only items that need to
be changed to modify starter horsepower. Programmable I/O can be used
to standardize control circuits. Control
circuit modifications are made by
re-programming, not re-wiring.
10
11
12
13
14

Central Display Module
400A Vacuum Contactor with

MPCC and Sensor Module
AMPGARD XP3 provides complete

current, voltage, and frequency
protection as well as metering and
control functions. Unique features
enhance the protection, prediction and
performance capabilities of the XP3.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

AMPGARD XP3
July 2014
Sheet 10 044
General Description
i
ii
Protection
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
Monitor/meter
12
13
14
Stall/speed Sw (14)
Reduced voltage start sequence (19)
Undervoltage (27)
Reverse power (32)
Jam
Acceleration time
Over torque (32)
Contactor quick trip (34)
Undercurrent (37)
Under power (37)
Bearing RTD (38) (optional)
Contactor condition monitor (39C)
Current balance (46)
Phase reversal (47)
Incomplete sequence (48)
Thermal overload (49)
Stator RTD (49T) (optional)
Time overcurrent (51)
Ground overcurrent (50/51G)
Power factor (55)
Overvoltage (59)
Starts/time (66)
Time between starts (66)
Alarm relay (74)
Fuse fatigue/fuse damage alarm (74F)
Frequency (81)
Lockout (86)
Differential (87) (optional)
Individual phase currents

Average phase currents
RTD temperatures
Ground current
Phase to phase voltage
Phase to neutral voltage
Control voltage
Watts
Vars
Power factor
Frequency
Energy
Run time
Number of starts
Number of trips
Mega-watt hours (total accumulated)
Available fault current
Incident energy
Contactor pickup voltage
Contactor dropout voltage
Loss of vacuum detection
Motor thermal life
Motor thermal capacity used
Enhanced Features
Contactor-Fuse Coordination Quickly
Clears Faults
If fault current is less than the contactor
interrupting rating, the contactor will
open without delay (approx. 20 milliseconds). If fault is greater than the
contactor interrupting rating, the
contactor will stay closed until fuse
blows (up to 130 milliseconds). Fault is
removed up to 110 milliseconds faster
than with a conventional starter.
Contactor Health Verifies Correct Operation

Contactor pick-up and drop-out
voltages are determined (with starter
off line/ isolation switch open) and
compared to previous values. Changes
from previous readings can indicate
vacuum loss, incorrect core alignment,
coil problem, debris on core face,
incorrectly installed replacement
vacuum interrupters, and so on. Ensure
that contactor operation meets original
design parameters.
Thermal Age of Motor Identifies

Overworked Motors
XP3 compares actual motor temperature to allowable temperature (based
on insulation class of the motor). High
temperatures will shorten motor life.
The algorithm calculates thermal life
based on motor temperature over
time, and helps identify motors in
need of repair or replacement.
Fuse Health Algorithm Identifies Potential

Fuse Fatigue or Fuse Damage Before the
Fuses Cause an Unwanted Shutdown
Fuse fatigue displays if a fuse has
experienced a high level of overcurrent
(4 or more of the last 20 starts had
currents that exceeded 100% of the
I2T fuse rating).
Fuse damage displays if a fuse has
experienced an excessive amount of
overcurrent (current has exceeded
125% of the I2T fuse rating).
Available Fault Current Determined at

the Starter
Available fault is calculated by
accurate measurement of voltage drop
during motor starting (at locked rotor
current). The SDM displays incident
energy available at the starter when
clearing time of the upstream device
is programmed. With optional CDM,
the incident energy calculation is used
to display PPE requirements (Personal
Protective Equipment level needed
to protect the operator). Operators
will know the correct PPE needed to
approach the starter.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
CA08104001E
Figure 10.1-23. Standard XP3 Schematic for FVNR Starter
E-STOP
Mb
M5
M7
*
STOP
*
START
M4
M6
Ma
MA
FIBER
SDM
PORT
1 15 AMP
PUSH/PULL
IS4
I/O 1
M5
1-7
1-5
IS5
GND
PSM1
M7
IS5
6
12
M3
Ma
M2
ISW
9
10
(BLK) DC (WHT)
COIL +
2
RIL
X2
GIL
X2
1-7 1-8
1-5 1-6
DIN 3
DIN 2
1-1 1-2
DIN 0
X1
STOP
X1
RUN
1-3 1-4
DIN 1
MB
TO SM
ACN
CUST
RCPT
CUST 120V
TEST POWER
+ DC
COIL
(WHT)
(BLK)
1
MPCC
1-3
120V
GND
X2
1 PLUG
12
ISW IS2 X1
CPT
750 VA
VB
H2
H1
PF1
1 AMP
VA
MAIN
FUSE
1 RCPT
SF1 IS1 ISW IS3
GND
ISW
12
12
12
TO MPCC
GND
SM
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
DOUT 1
1T1
1T2
1T3
2-6
= PLC INPUT
= PLC OUTPUT
2-5
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
DOUT 2
ALARM STATUS
INDICATOR
FOR CUSTOMER USE
2-6
DOUT 2
= REMOTE DEVICE
= INTERNAL TERM. BLK(S)
= TERM. BLK. FOR CUSTOMER CONN.
TX = TX TYPE LIGHT
FAULT STATUS
INDICATOR
FOR CUSTOMER USE
2-3
DOUT 1
2-8
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
DOUT 4
RUN STATUS
INDICATOR
FOR CUSTOMER USE
4-3
DOUT 4
T1
T2
T3
4-5
MOTOR
L1
L2
L3
July 2014

AMPGARD XP3
10.1-43
Sheet 10 045
Technical Data
Technical Data
i
Typical Wiring Diagram
ii
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

AMPGARD XP3
July 2014
Sheet 10 046
Layout Dimensions
Equipment Details
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
700/800 3
1500/1750 4
3000
200,000
200,000
200,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1350 (613)
1350 (613)
1700 (772)
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1350 (613)
1350 (613)
1700 (772)
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
6600 6 400
6600 6 400
6600 6 720
570,000
570,000
570,000
1
1
2
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 5
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1500 (681)
1500 (681)
1800 (817)
6600 6 400
6600 6 400
6600 6 720
570,000
570,000
570,000
3
3
4
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0

80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
Depth
2300
2300
2300
2300
2300
2300
1250/1500 3
2500/3000 4
5500
4600
4600
4600
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500 3
2500/3000 4
5500
4600
4600
4600
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250 3
4000/4500 4
8000
6600V Reversing
2000/2250 3
4000/4500 4
8000
3
4
5
6

Maximum current for two starters in a single structure is 720A.
May be applied on 6900V systems where maximum voltage does not exceed 7200V.
13
15
Weight
Lbs (kg)
400
400
720
Height 2 Width
22002400V Reversing
14
700/800 3
1500/1750 4
3000
One additional magnetic three-pole

vacuum contactor (duplicate of
above), both contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked
Dimensions
Reversing Starter
11
12

Drawout three-pole gang operated
line isolating switch assembly with
isolating shutter, external operating
open and grounded
power fuses with pop-up blown fuse
indicators
the contactor is closed. Contactor
includes universal current and voltage
sensing module and motor protection
and contactor controller (MPCC).
Two CPT primary current limiting
fuses
Horsepower 1 Volts
Additional
Starter Spaces

Equipment
Arrangement
Number
ii
Full Voltage Squirrel Cage Starters

Catalog X210 Non-Reversing
Catalog X310 Reversing
Specifications
Starter
Interrupting
Rating
(kVA)
Layout Dimensions
Contactor
Ampere Rating
(Enclosed)
Low voltage door with

Starter display module
Emergency stop pushbutton
DC power supply
Digital input/output modules with
8 digital inputs and 6 digital outputs
Run-test circuit with test power plug
CPT secondary fuse
RVS
RVS
16
M
Arrangement 1
Arrangement 2
Arrangement 3
Arrangement 4
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
Motor ControlMedium Voltage

July 2014
10.2-1
Sheet 10 047
General Description
SC9000 EP Adjustable
Frequency Drive, SC9000 with
Encapsulated Powerpole

Personnel safety: Positive mechanical
isolating switch with visible disconnect
completely grounds and isolates the
AFD from the line power with a
mechanically driven isolating shutter,
leaving no exposed high voltage.
Medium voltage door is mechanically
key locked closed with the isolation
switch; low voltage section has a
separate door and is segregated
from the medium voltage section.
Ease of installation: Current limiting
fuses, contactor assembly, inverter
assembly, and isolating switch
assembly are easily removed from the
enclosure; line and load terminals are
completely accessible from the front.
Ease of maintenance: All components
are front accessible, facilitating routine
inspection and/or parts replacement.
The low Mean Time to Repair (MTTR)
means time and cost savings.
SC9000 EP
General Description
Eatons SC9000 EP medium voltage
adjustable frequency drive (AFD)
family provides precise control and
protection of medium voltage motors
and equipment rated 2400 V, 3300 V
and 4160 V nominal.
Smallest industry footprint: The

SC9000s specialized design and high
density packaging make it one of
the smallest footprints per hp in the
industry as a fully integrated drive.
This size benefit ensures installations
in space limited electrical rooms,
eliminates the need for additional
cable and conduit installations, and
in some cases, eliminates the need
for additional feeders required by
our competitors.
SC9000 EP AFD has a complete offering:
Precise control of medium voltage

motors up to 6000 hp
A smaller footprint, 24-pulse front
end, and integrated assembly direct
coupled through a common power
bus to the entire medium voltage
product family as integrated
control gear
Fully integrated package with
isolation switch, main contactor,
24-pulse isolation transformer,
rectifier and inverter
Compliant with IEEE 519
Designed, built and tested with

reliability in mind: With an encapsulated
powerpole, Eatons medium voltage
drives are helping customers to improve
reliability and serviceability of their
systems. Encapsulated powerpole
offers low overall lifecycle costs while
maintaining the patented environmental
protection of the SC9000 EP; encapsulation of power electronic devices,
conformal coating on control boards
and mechanical barriers to prevent
damage to adjacent components in the
event of a fault. The SC9000 EP drive
incorporates three-level neutral point
clamped (NPC) inverter topology, which
reduces the number of components
and improves reliability. With the
count of 46 active components in the
topology, the inverter has MTTF (Mean
Time To Failure) of 12.7 years. All
SC9000 EP power electronic components are stored and assembled in a
clean room to prevent surface contamination, which could degrade insulation
and thermal performance. All active
components are burned in and tested
for functionality and partial discharge.
All assembled drives are tested up to
24 hours at rated load in a temperature
controlled test bay up to 50 C.
Easy AMPGARD integration: With
standard fully integrated construction,
the SC9000 can be supplied as a standalone drive or directly connected to
AMPGARD products in a configuration
known as integrated control gear.
This integrated solution aligns the
SC9000 with a host of other motor
control products, such as motor starters,
load break switches, and main breakers
all connected via a common bus.
Protection through technology: The
encapsulated roll-out inverter employs
a unique insulation system, which
reduces the potential of environmental
contamination. The inverter design
comprises six separate power poles
mounted to the heat pipe assembly.
These individually replaceable power
poles provide modularity and in-field
serviceability as an alternate to
complete inverter replacement.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
10.2-2 Motor ControlMedium Voltage

July 2014
Sheet 10 048
Frame Size and Rating
i
ii
SC9000 EP Fully Integrated Frame A AFD

(3001150 hp at 4160 V)
(300700 hp at 3300 V)
(300500 hp at 2400 V)
Type HLE Current

Limiting Fuses
Isolating Switch
Top Entry Control

Conduit Area
2
3
Top Entry
HV Conduit
Area
4
5
6
7
8
9
Line and
Load Cable
Termination
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
Encapsulated
Powerpole
Roll-Out
Inverter
10
24-Pulse
Rectifier
Bridge
11
12
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
13
14
15
16
17
DC Link
Pre-Charge
Circuit
18
19
20
21
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area
Bottom Entry Control

Conduit Area
CA08104001E

July 2014
10.2-3
Sheet 10 049
Layout Dimensions
Layout DimensionsFrame A AFD

(3001150 hp at 4160 V)
(300700 hp at 3300 V)
(300500 hp at 2400 V)
i
ii
Line Terminals Pullbox
Main Bus
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
27.27
(692.7)
23.33
(592.6)
5.00
(127.0)
5.50
(139.7
7.00
(177.8)
7.00
(177.8)
F
E
7.00
(177.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
36.38
(924.1)
65.00 (1651.0)
Top View
1.60
(40.6)
Recommend
24.00 Inch
24.00
(609.6 mm) Clearance (609.6)
for Blower Removal
3
4
Optional Redundant Blower
K2
K1
9.00
(228.6)
1.85
(47.0)
Window
1
3
K1
K2
K3
2
4
4.13
(104.9)
5
CTB
0.90
(22.9)
Unit 1D
62.00
(1574.8)
1
65.00 (1651.0)
Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight 6225 lbs (2826 kg)
Low Voltage Control
User
Interface
18.50
(469.9)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
Elevation
View
Optional Redundant Blower
MP4000
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend
a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
D - 90 door swing requires:
12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure,
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure,
32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure.
E - HV conduit space, load.
F - HV conduit space, line only.
G - LV conduit space only.
J - Load terminals located on left-hand side of enclosure.
Y - Tolerances: 0.0 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure.
Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
Line Term
Note J
U V W
12.00
(304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
8
9
6.00 (152.4)
Line Term
Note J
L1
80.00
(2032.0
10
12.81
7.50 (190.5)
62.00
(325.4) L2
(1574.8)
2.50
L3 7.50 (190.5)
(63.5)
3.25
2.50
(82.6) 16.90
(63.5)
(429.3)
Ground Bus
11
12
22.49
(571.2)
49.00
(1244.6)
Right Side View
13
59.00 (1498.6)
2.69
(68.3)
29.50
(749.3)
29.80
(756.9)
43.63
(1108.2)
7.00
(177.8)
2.80
(71.1)
F
E
1.50
(38.1)
32.50
(825.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Front
2.50 4.00
(63.5) (101.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
0.75 (19.1)
59.00 (1498.6)
0.25
(6.4)
0.437 x 0.688 Slot
0.75 (19.1)
0.437 x 0.688 Slot
15
2.50 4.00
(63.5) (101.6)
0.75 (19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.437 x 0.688 Slot
Main Bus End

2000 A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
32.50
(825.5)
29.30
(744.2)
0.75 (19.1)
1.50 3.00
(38.1) (76.2)
0.75 (19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
14
Main Bus End

1200 A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph
0.75 (19.1)
1.38
(35.1)
5.00
(127.0)
2.38
(60.5)
38.63
(981.2)
Note A
21.81
(554.0)
12.75
(323.9)
Main Bus End

1000 A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph
0.50
(12.7)
Ground Bus End

600 A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches (92.2 mm)
from Each Side of the Structure
0.562 Dia.
Hole
CL
0.25
(6.4)
0.63
(16.0)
0.50
(12.7)
16
17
18
2.00
(50.8)
0.25
(6.4)
19
Floor Plan
Note D
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm)
Clear in Front of Drive Unit
for Removal of Drive Inverter
Figure 10.2-1. SC9000 EP AFD Frame A Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
20
21

July 2014
Sheet 10 050
i
ii
SC9000 EP Fully Integrated Frame B AFD

(10002000 hp at 4160 V)
(8001500 hp at 3300 V)
(6001000 hp at 2400 V)
Type HLE Current

Limiting Fuses
Top Entry HV
Conduit Area
Isolating Switch
Top Entry Control

Conduit Area
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Line and
Load Cable
Termination
DC Link
Pre-Charge
Circuit
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
(in the rear)
Encapsulated
Powerpole
Roll-Out
Inverter
11
12
24-Pulse
Rectifier
Bridge
13
14
15
16
17
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area

Conduit Area
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

July 2014
10.2-5
Sheet 10 051
Layout Dimensions
Layout DimensionsFrame B AFD

(10002000 hp at 4160 V)
(8001500 hp at 3300 V)
(6001000 hp at 2400 V)
i
ii
Main Bus
Main Bus
39.27
(997.5)
5.50
50.00
(139.7)
(1270.0)
7.00
G
(177.8)
1.25
(31.8)
5.00 (127.0)
15.50
(393.7) F
1.25
(31.8)
12.27
(311.7)
2.00
(50.8)
Redundant
Blowers
28.50
(723.9)
2.00
(50.8)
65.00 (1651.0)
1.85
(47.0)
K1
7
WINDOW
K1
K2
K3
Inverter
1
4.13
(104.9)
Converter
Unit 2D
1
65.00 (1651.0)
Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight
8025 lbs (3643 kg)
50.00
(1270.0)
6.00
(152.4)
Optional Redundant Blowers
12.00 (304.8)
12.00
(304.8)
49.00
(1244.6)
3.50
(88.9)
4.38
(111.3)
4.38
(111.3)
Ground
Bus
2
30.00 (762.0)
Shipping
Section 2
Approx. Weight
900 lbs (409 kg)
PH PH Main
B C Bus
U V W
0.90
(22.9)
64.80
(1645.9)
5.50 31.88
(139.7) (809.8)
36.00 (914.4)
(Optional)
Top View SS #2 (Optional)
Load Term
Note J
CTB
Unit 1D
12.00
(304.8)
30.00
(762.0)
Top View SS #2
Low Voltage Control
MP4000
12.27
(311.7)
2.80 (71.1)
PH
A
K3
2.00
2.00
(50.8) (50.8)
12.27
(311.7)
5.50 50.00
(139.7) (1270.0)
Top View SS #1
K2
Main Bus
2.00 2.00
(50.8) (50.8)
Approx. 120.00 Inches

(3048.0 mm) Tall
80.00
(2032.0)
66.00
(1676.4)
Recommend 24.00 Inch

(609.6 mm) Clearance
for Blower Removal
Redundant
24.00 Blowers
(609.6)
PH PH PH Main
A B C Bus
22.49
(571.2)
12.20
(309.9)
2.86
(72.6)
19.90
(505.5)
9
10
3.50
(88.9)
50.00
(1270.0)
Right Side View

59.00 (1498.6)
36.80
(934.7)
2.40
(61.0)
4.75
(120.7) 44.20
(1122.7)
Note A
38.30
(972.8)
3.50
(88.9)
43.00
(1092.2)
2.50
(63.5)
1.58 (40.1)
Note A
3.50
(88.9)
Note A
Optional With
Redundant Blowers
43.00
(1092.2)
3.00
(76.2)
4.75
Front
(120.7)
33.50
(850.9)
33.50
(850.9)
25.00
(635.0)
G
2.50
(63.5)
7.00
(177.8)
30.00
(762.0)
2.50
(63.5)
36.00
(914.4)
Front
Floor Plan
Note D
60.00
(1524.0)
12.00
(304.8)
31.00
(787.4)
Front
Floor Plan
Note D
Floor Plan
Note D
2.80
(71.1)
6.00
(152.4)
F
7.00
(177.8)
30.00
(762.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
SS #1
Optional With
Redundant
Blowers
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm)
Clear in Front of Drive
Unit for Removal of
Drive Inverter
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm)

Clear in Front of Drive
Unit for Removal of
Drive Inverter
SS #2
SS #2 (Optional)
0.75 (19.1)
0.75 (19.1)
1.50 3.00
(38.1) (76.2)
0.437 x 0.688
0.75 (19.1)
Slot
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
0.50
(12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
2.50 4.00
(63.5) (101.6)
0.25
(6.4)
Ground Bus End

600 A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches (92.2 mm)
from Each Side of the Structure
Main Bus End

2000 A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
Main Bus End

1200 A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph
Main Bus End

1000 A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to
extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
above grade.
D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm)
for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm)
wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for
24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure,
wide drive structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for
36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure,
wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for
65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure.
.
J - 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) inverter load terminals
located on left side of converter.
36.00 inch (914.4 mm) inverter load terminals
located on right side of inverter.
Y - Tolerances: 0.00 inches (0.0 mm)
+0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure.
Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of
2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
2.50 4.00
(63.5) (101.6)
0.25
(6.4)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
0.63
(16.0)
Figure 10.2-2. SC9000 EP AFD Frame B Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
0.50
(12.7)
CL
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2.00
(50.8)
0.25
(6.4)
20
21

July 2014
Sheet 10 052
i
ii
SC9000 EP Fully Integrated Frame C AFD

(22503000 hp at 4160 V)
(17502000 hp at 3300 V)
(12501750 hp at 2400 V)
Top Entry Control

Conduit Area
Type HLE Current

Limiting Fuses
Top Entry HV
Conduit Area
Isolating Switch
DC Link
Pre-Charge Circuit
3
4
5
Line and
Load Cable
Termination
6
7
8
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
9
Encapsulated
Powerpole
Roll-Out
Inverter
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area
24-Pulse
Rectifier Bridge

Conduit Area
Note: See Page 10.2-7 for dimensional details.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

July 2014
10.2-7
Sheet 10 053
Layout Dimensions
Layout DimensionsFrame C AFD

(22503000 hp at 4160 V)
(17502000 hp at 3300 V)
(12501750 hp at 2400 V)
i
ii
1
2.75
(69.9)
Main Bus
Main Bus
2.00
(50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
F
7.00
(177.8)
29.25
(743.0) 16.00
(406.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
5.00
(127.0)
2.38
(60.5)
36.00
(914.4)
Top View SS #1
12.00
(304.8)
12.23
(310.6)
3.70
(94.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
5.50
(139.7)
26.70
(678.2)
7.00
(177.8)
31.88
(809.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
7.00
(177.8)
F
E
5.75
(146.1)
12.27
(311.7)
E
6.00
(152.4)
30.00
(762.0)
Optional 36.00 (914.4)
3.70
(94.0)
65.00 (1651.0)
Top View SS #3
Top View SS #2
Main Bus End

1000 A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph
Recommend
24.00 (609.6) Clearance 24.00
for Blower Removal
(609.6)
Redundant
Blowers
0.75
(19.1)
K3
1.85
(47.0)
WINDOW
Inverter
K1
K2
K3
K4
4
5
CTB
CTB1
1
Shipping
Section 1
36.00 (914.4)
Approx. Weight
1550 lbs (704 kg)
1
Shipping Section 2
65.00 (1651.0)
Approx. Weight
9800 lbs (4449 kg)
2
Shipping
Section 3
30.00 (762.0)
Optional 36.00 (914.4)
Approx. Weight
900 lbs (409 kg)
16.00
(406.4)
29.25
(743.0) 16.00
(406.4)
Note A
7.00
(177.8)
E
5.75
(146.1)
43.00
(1092.2)
29.00
(736.6)
Front
36.00
(914.4)
SS #1
35.00
(889.0)
4.00
(101.6)
8.00 32.50
(203.2) (825.5)
43.00
(1092.2)
2.50 (63.5)
G
3.00
(76.2)
32.50
9.50
(825.5) (241.3)
2.80
(71.1)
6.00
(152.4)
Front
5.00 (127.0)
Front
2.50
(63.5)
Note A
59.00 (1498.6)
3.00
(76.2)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
25.00
(635.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Optional
36.00 (914.4)
12.00
(304.8)
11
7.00
(177.8)
2.00
(50.8)
12
13
0.63
(16.0)
Figure 10.2-3. SC9000 EP AFD Frame C Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
0.25
(6.4)
Ground Bus End

600 A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches from
Each Side of the Structure
0.50
(12.7)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
C
60.00
Floor Plan
SS #3
(1524.0)
Note D
Detail Notes:
60.00 Inches
SS #2
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend
(1524.0 mm)
a maximum of 2.00 inches: (50.8 mm) above grade.
Clear in
D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
for Removal
of Inverter
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure,
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure.
J - Load terminals located on right side of inverter.
Optionload terminals located on left side of converter.
CA08104001E
2.50
(63.5)
10
0.50
(12.7)
4.00
(101.6)
Right Side View
Note A
0.25
(6.4)
2.50
(63.5)
Main Bus End

2000 A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
0.75
(19.1)
50.00
(1270.0)
3.50
(88.9)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
22.49
(571.2)
3.50 (88.9)
2.75 (69.9)
4.00
(101.6)
2.86
(72.6)
7
8
0.75
(19.1)
80.00
(2032.0)
Ground
Bus
0.25
(6.4)
1.50
(38.1)
Main Bus End

1200 A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph
0.90
(22.9)
Unit 3D
Converter
3.50
(88.9)
Low Voltage Control
K1
Unit 2D
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
K4
WINDOW
Main
Disconnect
Unit 1D
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
K2
18.50
(469.9)
14
15
0.25
(6.4)
16
17
18
19
20
21

July 2014
Sheet 10 054
i
ii
SC9000 EP Fully Integrated Frame D AFD (Single Inverter)

(30003700 hp at 4160 V)
(22503000 hp at 3300 V)
(20002500 hp at 2400 V)
Top Entry Control

Conduit Area
Top Entry HV
Conduit Area
Isolating Switch
DC Link
Pre-Charge Circuit
3
Top Load
Conduit Area
4
5
6
Load Cable
Termination
7
8
Type HLE
Current
Limiting
Fuses
9
10
Encapsulated
Powerpole
Roll-Out
Inverter
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
11
12
13
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area
24-Pulse
Rectifier Bridge
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
(in the rear)

Conduit Area
Bottom Load
Conduit Area
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

July 2014
10.2-9
Sheet 10 055
Layout Dimensions
Layout DimensionsFrame D AFD (Single Inverter)

(30003700 hp at 4160 V)
(22503000 hp at 3300 V)
(20002500 hp at 2400 V)
i
ii
2.00 (50.8)
Main Bus
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
41.42
(1052.1)
12.32
(312.9)
12.32
50.00
(312.9)
(1270.0)
5.50
(139.7)
40.75
1.38 (1035.1)
(35.1)
2.00
(50.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
3.00
(76.2)
5.50
6.00 (152.4) (139.7)
5.00
(127.0)
6.19
(157.2)
36.00
(914.4)
76.00
(1930.4)
SS #1
SS #2
Main Bus
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
12.32
(312.9)
12.00
(304.8)
3.00
(76.2)
50.00
(1270.0)
6.00
(152.4)
36.00
(914.4)
31.88
(809.8)
5.50
(139.7)
Main Bus End

1000 A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph
SS #3
0.75 (19.1)

For Blower Removal
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
24.00
(609.6)
PH
A
K14
K13
1.85
(47.0)
WINDOW
K11
K12
K13
K14
K44
Inverter
CTB
CTB2
K11
CTB1
Isolation Transformer
and Converter
Unit 2D
0.90
(22.9)
UNIT 3D
Main
Disconnect
Unit 1D
1
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping
Section 1
40.00 (1016.0)
Approx. Wt.
2560 lbs (1162 kg)
2
76.00
(1930.4)
3
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping Section 2
76.00 (1930.4)
Approx. Wt.
16,500 lbs (7491 kg)
Shipping
Section 3
36.00 (914.4)
Approx. Wt.
3775 lbs (1714 kg)
PH
B
12.00
(304.8)
PH MAIN
C BUS
Low Voltage Control
K12
5.00
29.00
(127.0)
(736.6)
Note A
12.00
(304.8)
18.00
(457.2) F
23.00
41.33
(584.2)
14.00
7.00 (1049.8)
(355.6)
41.38
(177.8)
(1051.1)
3.00
19.63
(76.2)
(498.6)
4.00
(101.6)
80.00
(2032.0)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
5.00
(127.0)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
39.00 Front
(990.6)
Note A
44.00
(1117.6)
4.15
(105.4
50.00
(1270.0)
3.00 (76.2)
Front
6.00 1.50
(152.4) (38.1)
8.88
(225.6)
36.00
(914.4)
SS #1
2.75
(69.9)
43.00
(1092.2)
38.00
(965.2)
38.00
(965.2)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
J - Load terminals located on right-hand side of enclosure.
Ground Bus End

600 A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches (92.2 mm) from
Each Side of the structure
12
30.00
(762.0)
2.80
(71.1)
31.00
(787.4)
2.50
(63.5)
0.50
(12.7)
2.00
(50.8)
12.00
(304.8)
0.25
(6.4)
14
15
16
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm)

Clear in Front of Unit for
Removal of Inverter
17
SS #3
18
Figure 10.2-4. SC9000 EP AFD Frame D (Single Inverter) Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
13
CL
36.00
(914.4)
1.85
(47.0)
SS #2
11
0.63
(16.0)
Front
0.25
(6.4)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
6.00
(152.4)
43.25
(1098.6)
9
10
4.00
(101.6)
3.50
(88.9)
0.50
(12.7)
0.75
(19.1)
50.00
(1270.0)
25.00
(635.0)
0.25
(6.4)
2.50
(63.5)
Main Bus End

2000 A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
Ground
Bus
2.86
(72.6)
49.00
(1244.6)
25.00
(635.0)
6
7
0.75 (19.1)
3.50
(88.9)
Right Side View
3.50
(88.9)
0.25
(6.4)
1.50
(38.1)
Main Bus End

1200 A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph
38.25
(971.6)
13.00
(330.2)
3.00
(76.2)
19
20
21

July 2014
Sheet 10 056
i
ii
SC9000 EP Fully Integrated Frame D AFD (Parallel Inverters)

(37504500 hp at 4160 V)
(22503000 hp at 3300 V)
Top Entry Control
Conduit Area
Secondary
Blower
DC Link
Pre-Charge
Circuit
2
3
Top Entry HV
Conduit Area
Isolating Switch
Top Load
Conduit Area
Balancing
Reactor
4
5
6
7
8
9
Load Cable
Termination
Type HLE
Current
Limiting
Fuses
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
10
11
12
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area
24-Pulse
Rectifier
Bridge
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
(mounted
behind rectifier
bridge)
Bottom Entry
Control
Conduit Area
Dual
Encapsulated
Powerpole
Roll-Out Inverters
Bottom Load
Conduit Area
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

July 2014
10.2-11
Sheet 10 057
Layout Dimensions
Layout DimensionsFrame D AFD (Parallel Inverters)

(37504500 hp at 4160 V)
(22503000 hp at 3300 V)
2.00 (50.8)
Main Bus
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
41.42
(1052.1)
ii
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
12.32
(312.9)
12.32
(312.9)
6.19
(157.2)
5.50
6.00 (152.4) (139.7)
14.00 50.00
(355.6) (1270.0)
2.11
(53.6)
4
20.50
(520.7)
12.00
(304.8)
K15
K14
K11
K12
K13
K14
K44
1.85
(47.0)
K44
K15
K16
K17
7
CTB
CTB2
K11
CTB1
Main
Disconnect
and Converter
Unit 2D
Unit 1D
1
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping
Section 1
40.00 (1016.0)
Approx. Weight
2560 lbs (1162 kg)
3.50
(88.9)
3
86.00
(2184.4)
U V
5.00
(127.0)
29.00
(736.6)
12.00
(304.8)
14.00
(355.6)
19.63
(498.6)
Front
7.00
(177.8)
80.00
(2032.0)
25.00
(635.0)
36.00
(914.4)
38.00
(965.2)
0.75 (19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
Ground Bus End

600 A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches from Each
Side of the Structure
Main Bus End

2000 A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
0.75 (19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
0.25
(6.4)
2.50
(63.5)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
0.63
(16.0)
48.12
(1222.2)
15.50
(393.7)
5.00
(127.0)
3.00
31.00
39.00 (76.2) (787.4)
(990.6)
2.63
(66.8)
2.00
14.00
(50.8)
E
(355.6)
Note A
5.00
(127.0)
3.00
(76.2)
32.50
(825.5)
42.50
6.75
(1079.5) (171.5)
0.50
(12.7)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum
of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for
12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
CL
2.00
(50.8)
0.25
(6.4)
Figure 10.2-5. SC9000 EP AFD Frame D (Parallel Inverters) Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
SS #3
Front
1.85
(47.0)
Ground 3.26
(82.8)
Bus
22.75
(577.9)
49.00
(1244.6)
50.00
(1270.0)
31.13
(790.7)
38.00
(965.2)
80.00
(2032.0)
15
Main Bus End

1200 A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
25.00
(635.0)
3.50
(88.9)
68.00
(1727.2)
0.90
(22.9)
0.75 (19.1)
30.36
(771.1)
SS #2
43.25
5.00
Note A
4.15 (1098.6)
(127.0)
44.00
(105.4)
39.00 Front
(1117.6) 50.00
(990.6)
2.75
(1270.0)
(69.9)
3.00 (76.2)
41.33
(1049.8)
4.38
(111.3)
Load Term
Note J
Right Side View

13.00
(330.2)
Main Bus End

1000 A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
3.50
(88.9)
Ground
Bus 5.00
(127.0)
12.00
(304.8)
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
38.25
(971.6)
49.00
(1244.6)
50.00
(1270.0)
Shipping Section 3
86.00 (2184.4)
Approx. Weight
6800 lbs (3087 kg)
Shipping Section 2
76.00 (1930.4)
Approx. Weight
16,500 lbs (7491 kg)
41.38
(1051.1)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
0.90
(22.9)
Unit 3D
2
76.00
(1930.4)
Note A
18.00
23.00 (457.2) F
(584.2)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
1.50
(38.1)
8.88
(225.6)
Inverter-2
Inverter-1
Low Voltage Control
PH PH PH MAIN
A B C BUS
WINDOW
2
3
86.00
(2184.4)
3.00
(76.2)

(609.6 mm) Clearance 24.00
for Blower Removal (609.6)
K12 K13
12.32
(312.9)
30.88
5.50 (784.4)
(139.7)
7.00
(177.8)
76.00
(1930.4)
36.00
(914.4)
2.00
(50.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
5.50
(139.7) 40.75
1.38 (1035.1)
(35.1)
50.00
(1270.0)
3.00
(76.2)
5.00
(127.0)
20
21

July 2014
Sheet 10 058
Frame Size and RatingLayout Dimensions
i
ii
Layout DimensionsFrame E AFD

(47506000 hp at 4160 V)
(32504000 hp at 3300 V)
Recommend 24.00 Inch (609.6 mm) Clearance

for Blower Removal TypicalAll Units
Redundant Blowers
2
24.00
(609.6)
3
4
K2
K3
K4
K5
K33
K4
K5
K6
Window
6
MP4000
K1
K2
K3
K33
K1
CTB
CTB2
Unit 2D
CTB1
92.00
(2336.8)
All Units
and Converter
Inverter-1
Inverter-2
80.00
(2032.0)
All Units
Unit 3D
Main Disconnect
Unit 1D
10
11
12
13
14
100.00
(2540.0)
Shipping Section 2
Approx. Weight
(19,500 lbs)
86.00
(2184.4)
Shipping Section 3
Approx. Weight
(6800 lbs)
Figure 10.2-6. SC9000 EP Frame EDimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 10.2-1. SC9000 EP Frame EDimensions in Inches (mm)
Output
Voltage
Motor
FLA
hp
Width
Height
Depth
Height
3300 1
4160
520640
620713
32504000
50006000
222.00 (5638.8)
222.00 (5638.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
12.10 (307.3)
12.10 (307.3)
15
1
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight
(2560 lbs)
Cabinet Size
Redundant Blower
3300 V, 50 Hz.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

10.2-13
Adjustable Frequency Drives Synchronous Transfer Systems
July 2014
Sheet 10 059
General Description
Synchronous Transfer Control with SC9000 EP
If the drive control receives a command

to sync down, the drive control will
start the AFD and close the motor select
contactor; however, the AFD output
contactor does not close initially.
See Figure 10.2-11.
4160 V, 60 Hz, Line
i
ii
1
2
3
AFD Bus
Synchronous Transfer Control System
General Description
4160 V, 60 Hz, Line
Synchronous transfer systems

help maximize capital efficiency by
controlling multiple motors with
one adjustable frequency drive.
Most manufacturers synchronous
transfer control systems have multiple
drive output and motor select contactors that are interconnected typically
via cables to allow the AFD to manage
multiple motors.
With the SC9000 EP and the Eaton
medium voltage control integrated
control gear AFD double-bus design,
the drive output and motor select
contactors are close-coupled under a
common power bus (no cables), giving
our customers the compact design and
superior performance they expect
from Eaton.
Once the system bus is energized, the
AFD and Feeder Bus are energized.
See Figure 10.2-7.
AFD Bus
Figure 10.2-8. Synchronous Transfer Process

When the motor is required to transfer
to the utility line, the drive control will
send the Sync Up command to the AFD.
The AFD will adjust the output to match
the line voltage, frequency and phase
angle. Once synchronization is locked,
the bypass and motor select contactor
are closed and opened such that
paralleling is minimized. The output
reactor dampens transient currents.
See Figure 10.2-9.
Figure 10.2-11. Drive Control Receives

Command to Sync Down
The AFD output will adjust to match

the utility voltage, frequency and
phase. Once these parameters are
locked in, the AFD output contactor
will close and the bypass contactor
will open such that paralleling is minimized. The output reactor will dampen
transient currents. See Figure 10.2-12.
4160 V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
The Start command will start the

synchronous transfer process. First the
drive control will close the appropriate
motor select contactor and then start
the AFD. The AFD will operate at a
preset speed or a reference speed.
See Figure 10.2-8.
10
Figure 10.2-12. AFD Adjusts to Match the

Utility Voltage, Frequency and Phase
11
The AFD will operate at a set speed

point or follow a reference speed.
See Figure 10.2-13.
12
4160 V, 60 Hz, Line
13
4160 V, 60 Hz, Line
14
15
AFD Bus
Figure 10.2-7. AFD and Feeder Bus Energized
4160 V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
Figure 10.2-9. Voltage, Frequency and

Phase Angle Synchronization
The AFD is shut down and waits for
another Start command for the next
motor. The first motor is running on
bypass. See Figure 10.2-10.
4160 V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
Figure 10.2-13. AFD Operating Speed

These sequences can be commanded
for any of the motors (15) illustrated
and are not limited to just five motors
in a system; however, only one motor
at a time can be on the AFD. Each
system can be configured to start any
number of motors, keeping in mind
equipment size and layout.
16
17
18
19
20
AFD Bus
Figure 10.2-10. AFD Shut Down and Waiting

CA08104001E
21

Adjustable Frequency Drives Synchronous Transfer Systems
July 2014
Sheet 10 060
Layout Dimensions
Layout DimensionsSynchronous Transfer Systems
ii
VFD Bus
Main Bus
1
K2
K4
K3
K1
2
Window
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
Inverter
A1 Motor Bypass
Door
Unit 6B
Interlock
Output Filter
Unit 5B
AMPGARD
SC 9000
A2 Motor Bypass
Door
Unit 7B
Interlock
A3 Motor Bypass
Door
Unit 8B
Interlock
A4 Motor Bypass
Door
Unit 9B
Interlock
A5 Motor Bypass
Unit 10B Door
Interlock
CTB
Unit 2D
Unit 1D
K5
Unit 3D
Drive Output Contactor

A1 Motor Select
A2 Motor Select
A3 Motor Select
A4 Motor Select
A5 Motor Select
Trip PB Unit 6D
Trip PB Unit 7D
Trip PB Unit 8D
Trip PB Unit 9D
Trip PB Unit 10D
Trip PB
Unit 5D
5 Mech Unlatch
7 Mech Unlatch
8 Mech Unlatch
9 Mech Unlatch
6 Mech Unlatch
10 Mech Unlatch
4.00
(101.6)
6
7
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
65.00
(1651.0)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
65.00
(1651.0)
76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
72.00
(1828.8)
72.00
(1828.8)
Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight
(9325 lbs)
Shipping Section 2
Approx. Weight
(4725 lbs)
Shipping Section 3
Approx. Weight
(3600 lbs)
Shipping Section 4
Approx. Weight
(4700 lbs)
Shipping Section 5
Approx. Weight
(4700 lbs)
8
9
Converter
10
Inverter
Optional
Output Filter
BP
BP
M
Unit
6B
24 Pulse
XFMR
Unit
7B
BP
Unit
8B
BP
Unit
9B
BP
Unit
10B
11
12
Unit 2D
Unit 3D
Unit 5D
MS
MS
D
Unit 1D
Unit
6D
Unit
7D
MS
Unit
8D
MS
Unit
9D
MS
Unit
10D
Figure 10.2-14. SC9000 EP Synchronous Transfer System with Five MV Starters (For Reference Only)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Adjustable Frequency Drives 15 kV Input Voltage
July 2014
10.2-15
Sheet 10 061
Layout Dimensions
Layout Dimensions15 kV Input Voltage
i
ii
Redundant Blowers
Recommend 24.00 inch
for Blower Removal
TypicalAll Units
24.00
(609.6)
1
2
K2
K6
K5
K3
MP4000
K1
K2
K3
K4
Incoming Line
Inverter-1
Isolation Transformer Converter

Unit 3D
Unit 2D
CTB
CTB2
Contactor
Unit 1D
K4
K5
K6
Window
K1
1
Inverter-2
Unit 4D
7
1
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
100.00
(2540.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
Shipping Section 2
Approx. Weight (17,925 lbs)
Shipping Section 3
Approx. Weight (6800 lbs)
72.00 (1828.8)
Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight (4500 lbs)
Main Bus End

2000 A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
Main Bus End

1000 A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph
0.75
(19.1)
1.50
(38.1)
2.50
(63.5)
0.75
(19.1)
3.00
(76.2)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
4.00
(101.6)
0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
2.50
(63.5)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
4.00
(101.6)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
Ground Bus End

600 A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches (92.2 mm) from
Each Side of the Structure
Main Bus End

1200 A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph
0.75
(19.1)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum
of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm)
for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 30.00 inches (762.0 mm)
for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure,
40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure.
J - Load terminals located on right side of inverter.
Optionload terminals located on left side of converter.
Kirk Key Interlock
0.50
(12.7)
2.00
(50.8)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Description
CL
0.63
(16.0)
K1
Drive must be off. Main contactor must be open,

ISW must be open to release K1. K1 is released
when K2, K3, K4 are turned to transfer block.
K2, K3
Can only be released by K1. K2, K3 are used to open

the converter doors on Unit 7D.
K4
Can only be released by K1. K4 is used to open the

second transfer block on Unit 8D.
K5, K6
Can only be released by K4. K5, K6 are used to open

the inverter doors on Unit 8D.
0.25
(6.4)
15
16
17
18
Figure 10.2-15. SC9000 EP Frame D 4160 V with High Voltage Input
Adjustable Frequency Drives With High Voltage Input

The fully integrated SC9000 EP can be
designed to receive input voltages from
2.4 to 13.8 kV, with output voltages of
2400 V, 3300 V and 4160 V, with 50 or
60 Hz available. The high voltage input
option eliminates the need of a separate
CA08104001E
distribution transformer, reduces

overall footprint and simplifies overall
installation. Please consult the factory
for drive dimensions and incoming
line section requirements.
19
20
21
Adjustable Frequency Drives Integrated AMPGARD Main Breaker
July 2014
Sheet 10 062
Layout Dimensions
i
ii
Layout DimensionsIntegrated AMPGARD Main Breaker (Metal-Enclosed)

Top View
1
2
61.12
(1552.4)
Note: See Page 10.1-25 for details.
3
Frame B SC9000 EP Medium Voltage Drive
Main Breaker, Output Contactor with Bypass
4
Elevation View
5
1
Fp4000
Cs
Sw
MP3000
Window
Unit 1B
Unit 2B
Window
Unit 1C
Unit 2C
Converter
Inverter
Unit 7D
Ctb
Unit 4D
Unit 5D
Unit 1F
11
12
Unit 2F
1
26.00
(660.4)
36.00 (914.4)
Spacer
Main Breaker
10
Spacer
4.00 (101.6)
Unit 7D
7
4.00 (101.6)
65.00 (1651.0)
30.00 (762.0)
Shipping
Section 1
66.00 (1676.4)
Shipping
Section 2
65.00 (1651.0)
Shipping
Section 3
30.00 (762.0)
Shipping
Section 4
40.00 (1016.0)
Approx. Weight
8025 lbs (3643 kg)
Approx. Weight
8025 lbs (3643 kg)
Approx. Weight
900 lbs (409 kg)
Approx. Weight
1800 lbs (817 kg)
36.00 (914.4)
13
14
Floor Plan
30.00
(762.0)
15
16
60.00
(1524.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
17
18
19
20
201.00 (5105.4)
Overall
Note: See Page 10.1-15 and Page 10.1-26 for details.
Figure 10.2-16. Eaton Medium Voltage Integrated Control Gear with Main Breaker Dimensions(See Page 10.1-6 for Information on Main Bus.
Refer to Eaton for Larger hp Layouts and Detailed Assembly Dimensions.)
Note: For exact conduit locations and descriptions, please see Page 10.1-39.
21
CA08104001E

Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data
July 2014
10.2-17
Sheet 10 063
Technical Data
Typical Schematic
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 10.2-17. Typical Schematic for SC9000 EP AFD

CA08104001E
21

Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data
July 2014
Sheet 10 064
Technical Data
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 10.2-18. Typical Schematic for 24-Pulse Transformer, Rectifier and Inverter
CA08104001E
July 2014

10.2-19
Adjustable Frequency Drives Personnel Safety Features
Sheet 10 065
General Description
Personnel Safety Features
Interlocks
ii
Interlocking on SC9000 EP AFD includes:
Isolating switch mechanism locks

the medium voltage door closed
when the switch is in the ON position
Standard key interlocks on all
medium voltage doors
When door is open, interlock
prevents operating handle from
being moved inadvertently to
ON position
When contactor is energized,
isolating switch cannot be opened
or closed
1
2
3
Isolation Switch
Operating Shaft
Additional Safety Features
Provision for a padlock on the isolating

switch handle in OFF position
Shutter barrier between line
terminals and isolation switch
stabs is mechanically driven
Distinctive marking on back of
switch assembly appears when
shutter barrier is in position and
starter is completely isolated
from the line
Grounding clips provide a positive
grounding of the SC9000 EP AFD
and main fuses when the isolating
switch is opened
High and low voltage circuits are
compartmentalized and isolated
from each other
The drawout isolation switch is
easily removed by loosening two
bolts in the back of the switch. The
shutter remains in place when the
switch is withdrawn
Grounding device is provided for
shorting the DC bus to ground
before entering the medium voltage
compartments
See Page 10.1-2 for details on the
Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating
Switch.
Mechanical
Interlock with
Contactor
6
7
Isolation Switch
Door Locking
Mechanism
8
9
10
Removable Cover Allows

Access to Bolted Line Side
Connections
Shutter Operated by Stab

Motion when Isolation
Switch is in Position
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Distinctive Marking
when Shutter is in
Closed Position
Motion of Shutter
Shutter Mechanism and Finger Barrier Isolation of Incoming Line Bus

(Shown with Removable Portion of Isolation Switch Removed)
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Adjustable Frequency Drives Component Details
July 2014
Sheet 10 066
General Description
Modular Roll-in/Roll-out
Stab-in Three-Phase Inverter
ii
1
2
3
This method of heat removal from

the inverter is up to 10 times more
efficient than traditional air-cooling
methods, resulting in less required
airflow for quieter and more efficient
operation. The thermal management
system has been subjected to temperatures of 50 C to model cold weather
transport without the rupture of any
heat pipes. It is also important to note
that thermal management performance
was unaffected by the extreme
cold storage.
In the event of a failure, the modular

roll-in/roll-out design of the inverter
will minimize downtime. The inverter
can be partially withdrawn from the
structure and repairs affected without
having to fully remove the inverter.
For even faster return to service, the
inverter can be fully withdrawn from
the structure. A spare inverter can
then be quickly reinstalled. The drive
is then ready to restart the motor with
minimal downtime.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Figure 10.2-20. Heat Pipe Construction

Six-Pack, Roll-In/Roll-Out Inverter (Side
Sheets Not Shown). Up to 3700 hp on
Single Inverter
General Description
12
13
14
The roll-out three-phase inverter

module employs an insulation and
buswork system to obtain the highest
power density rating in the market.
Heat pipe technology is used to
cool the active power components
in the inverter.
This cooling methodology and

the encapsulation of the medium
voltage components result in a
harsh-environment inverter that
protects the active power devices
from the environment and airborne
contaminants, eliminating potential
causes of failures.
Inverter Replacement System
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 10.2-19. Heat Pipe Thermal

Management System
CA08104001E
July 2014

10.2-21
Sheet 10 067
General Description
Type SL Vacuum Contactor

Stab-in with Wheels, Fuses,
and Line and Load Fingers
Mechanical
Interlock with
Isolation Switch
See Page 10.1-4 for detailed information on current limiting fuses.
See Page 10.1-21 for detailed information on contactor-fuse coordination.
ii
Isolated Low Voltage Control

The low voltage door has four cutouts
as standard.
Control Rack
Viewing Window
1
2
SC9000 EP
Keypad
3
4
Roll-Out
Wheels
400 A Stab-In Contactor

and Fuse Assembly
Self-Aligning
Contactor Line
and Load
Fingers
Stab-In Contactor Mechanical

Interlock and Fingers
General Description
400 A Vacuum Contactors
A stab-in version of the SL Contactor
is standard. The stab-in contactor is
mounted on wheels and rolls into the
SC9000 EP AFD structure. Contactor
line and load fingers engage cellmounted stabs as the contactor
is inserted into the SC9000 EP AFD
incoming cell. The contactor is held
in position by a bolt and bracket combination. It can be easily withdrawn
from the SC9000 EP AFD incoming cell
by removing the bolt holding the
contactor against the bracket and
disconnecting the isolation switch
interlock. The contactor can be
removed from the SC9000 EP AFD
after disconnecting the medium
voltage cables going to the control
transformer.

8
SC9000 EP AFDs use Eatons Type HLE

power fuses with special time/current
characteristics. The fuse is coordinated
with the contactor to provide maximum
motor/transformer utilization and
protection. The standard mounting
method for power fuses is bolted
onto the contactor assembly.
Interruption is accomplished without
expulsion of gases, noise or moving
parts. Type HLE fuses are mounted in
a horizontal position. When a fault has
been cleared, an indicator in the front
of the fuse, normally depressed, pops
up to give visible blown fuse indication.
The control circuit primary fuses are
also current limiting.
9
10
11
12
13
1/4 Turn Door
Latch Top and
Bottom
External Motor
Protection Relay
(optional)
Indicating
Lights and
Pushbuttons
800 A Vacuum Contactors
14
15
SC9000 EP AFD Low Voltage Door Closed
The 800 A SL Contactor is available in

the SC9000 EP Frames D and E AFDs
and is rated at 720 A enclosed.
The 800 A contactor is mounted on
wheels and has similar features to
the stab-in 400 A contactor.
Fuse Fault
Indicator
Blown Fuse Indicating Device
The device panel and optional Eaton

motor protection relays fit in the low
voltage door. The standard SC9000 EP
keypad can be removed for plug-in
of a laptop via a serial connection.
A standard viewing window allows
visual verification of the SC9000 EP
AFD status. The low voltage control
panel is behind the low voltage door
and is completely isolated from the
medium voltage compartment.
The medium voltage door is locked
closed and interlocked with the
isolation switch.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

July 2014
Sheet 10 068
General Description
Pre-Charge Circuit
Monitoring and Protection Options
ii
The equipment and major components

are seismic certified and meet the
applicable seismic requirements of the
current International Building Code (IBC)
and California Building Code (CBC);
Eaton is the first supplier with certification
from the State of Californias Office
of Statewide Health Planning and
Development (OSHPD).
2
3
4

5
SC9000 EP Pre-Charge Circuit
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Unlike other pre-charge methods, the

innovative pre-charge circuit in the
SC9000 EP protects the transformer,
rectifier and DC bus components from
high in-rush currents. The design uses
the control power circuit for DC link
capacitor charging. This feature
reduces the risk of component
or transformer failure during the
pre-charge cycle and lengthens the
life of the affected components.

UL and CSA Certification
SC9000 EP AFDs are designed, assembled and tested to meet all applicable
standards: NEMA ICS6, NEMA ICS7,
IEEE 519, IEEE 1100, UL 347 and CSA
C22.2. The major components (contactor, isolating switch, fuses, transformer and inverter active devices) are
UL recognized.
UL or CSA labeling of a specific AFD
requires review to ensure that all
requested modifications and auxiliary
devices meet the appropriate standards.
Refer to factory when specified.
SC9000 EP Options
Communications Options
Integrated Control Gear Under One Main

Bus Options
AMPGARD main/feeder breaker

Incoming line section
Load break switches
Output contactor
Full voltage non-reversing
starter bypass
Reduced voltage solid-state bypass
Reduced voltage autotransformer bypass
Reduced voltage primary
reactor bypass
Full voltage non-reversing
additional starters
Reduced voltage solid-state
additional starters
Reduced voltage auto-transformer
additional starters
Synchronous starters
Classic AMPGARD transition
Powerware UPS control power

backup (see Tab 33, Section 33.2)
EMRs
Eaton Power Xpert meters
(see Tab 3)
Eaton EMR-4000 motor
protection relays with RTDs
(see Tab 4, Section 4.2)
Eaton EMR-5000 motor
protection relays with RTDs
(see Tab 4, Section 4.2)
Redundant fans with automatic
switchover
Johnson Controls N2
Modbus TCP
Modbus
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
BACnet
CANopen
LonWorks
EtherNet/IP
Output Filters
Drive output filters are recommended
for longer cable lengths between the
drive and motor.
Table 10.2-2. Recommended Output
Filter Application
Motor Type
Motor Lead Length (ft)

dv/dt Filter
Sine Filter
Non-inverter
duty rated
Over 100 ft
Over 500 ft
Inverter
duty rated
Over 375 ft
Over 1200 ft
See Page 10.2-23 for dimensional

details.
Enclosure Options
NEMA 1 Gasketed is standard and
the only enclosure option at this time.
If an outdoor installation is required,
Eaton can supply the AFDs and other
electrical equipment in a modular
building called an Integrated Power
Assembly (see Tab 38).
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

10.2-23
Adjustable Frequency Drives Optional Output Filters and Reactors
July 2014
Sheet 10 069
Layout Dimensions
Layout Dimensions
DVDT Filter
Sine Filter
12.27
(311.7)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
23.80
(604.5)
2.00
(50.8)
31.38
(797.1)
5.50
(139.7)
7.00
(177.8)
26.67
(677.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
23.33
(592.6)
32.47
(824.7)
5.50
(139.7)
2.74
(69.6)
12.00
(304.8)
2.00
(50.8)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend
a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm)
for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure,
structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm)
wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm)
wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm)
wide drive structure.
Y - Tolerances: 0.00 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm)
per structure.
Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
into structure.
6.00
(152.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
2.63
(66.8)
36.00
(914.4)
40.00
(1016.0)
Top View
SS #2
Top View
SS #1
ii
1
2
3
4
5
PH
A
DVDT Filter
PH MAIN
C BUS
Load Term
Note J
K16
K4
PH
B
Sine Filter
12.00
(304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
7
4.38
(111.3)
6.75
(171.5)
46.88
(1190.8)
80.00
(2032.0)
Output Reactor
Contactor/Output Filter
Unit 1D
0.90
(22.9)
Unit 2D
10
Ground Bus
2
40.00
(1016.0)
Shipping Section 2
2560 lbs (1162 kg)
1
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping Section 1
1875 lbs (851 kg)
21.50
(546.1)
44.00
(1117.6)
0.75 (19.1)
26.63
(676.4)
2.25
(57.2)
43.00
(1092.2)
22.00
(558.8)
31.00
(787.4)
2.50
(63.5)
Front
35.00
(889.0)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
0.437 x 0.688
0.75
Slot
(19.1)
7.00
(177.8)
36.00
(914.4)
40.00
(1016.0)
SS #1
SS #2
2
3
0.25
(6.4)
0.50
(12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
0.437 x 0.688
0.75
Slot
(19.1)
2.50
(63.5)
0.25
(6.4)
Ground Bus End

600 A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches from Each Side
of the Structure
Main Bus End

2000 A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
0.437 x 0.688
0.75
Slot
(19.1)
1
1.50
(38.1)
14
4.00
(101.6)
14.00
(355.6)
Front
13
Main Bus End

1200 A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph
0.75 (19.1)
Note A
12
50.00
(1270.0)
Main Bus End

1000 A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph
Note A
11
22.85
(580.4)
49.00
(1244.6)
2.40
(61.0)
3.00
(76.2)
1.45
(36.8)
0.50
(12.7)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
15
16
17
CL
0.63
(16.0)
0.25
(6.4)
Varies for sine (depends on option), 46.88 (1190.8) standard, dv/dt 57.88 (1470.2).
10.92 (277.4) sine.
9.00 for dv/dt.
2.00
(50.8)
0.25
(6.4)
18
19
20
Figure 10.2-21. SC9000 EP AFD Output Filter Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
21
CA08104001E

Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data and Ratings
July 2014
Sheet 10 070
Technical Data
Technical Data
Table 10.2-3. Design Specifications
NEMA
IEC
Power rating
3006000 hp
2234474 kW
Motor type
Induction and synchronous
Induction and synchronous
Input voltage rating
2400 V15,000 V
2400 V15,000 V
Input voltage tolerance
10% of nominal
10% of nominal
Power loss ride-through
5 cycles (Std.)
5 cycles (std.)
Input protection
Metal oxide varistor
Metal oxide varistor
Input frequency
50/60 Hz, 5%
50/60 Hz, 5%
Input power circuit protection
Contactor/fuses
Contactor/fuses
Input impedance device
Isolation transformer
Isolation transformer
Output voltage
02400 V
03300 V
04160 V
02400 V
03300 V
04160 V
Inverter design
PWM
PWM
Inverter switch
IGBT
IGBT
Enclosure
NEMA 1
IP20
Ambient temperature (without derating)
0 C to +40 C
0 C to +40 C
Storage and transport temperature
40 C to +70 C
40 C to +70 C
Relative humidity
95% noncondensing
95% noncondensing
Altitude (without derating)
03300 ft
01000 m
Seismic
2006 IBC
2006 IBC
Standards
UL, IEEE, CSA
IEC
Cooling
Air-cooling advanced heat pipe technology
Air-cooling advanced heat pipe technology
Average watts loss 1
23 watts/hp
23 watts/hp
Input power factor
>0.96
>0.96
Number of inverter IGBTs
IGBTs
IGBTs
2400 V
12
12
3300 V
12
12
4160 V
12
12
PIV
PIV
2400 V
3300 V
3300 V
3300 V
6500 V
6500 V
4160 V
6500 V
6500 V
Rectifier designs
24-pulse PWM
24-pulse PWM
Rectifier switch
Diode
Diode
Rectifier switch failure mode
Non-rupture, non-arc
Non-rupture, non-arc
Rectifier switch cooling
Air-cooled
Air-cooled
Output waveform to motor
Sinusoidal current/voltage
Sinusoidal current/voltage
Speed regulation
0.1% without tach feedback
0.1% without tach feedback
Output frequency range
1120 Hz
1120 Hz
Service duty rating
Standard
Standard
Typical efficiency
96.597.5%
96.597.5%
Flying start capability
Yes
Yes
ii
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
Description
10
11
IGBT PIV rating
12
13
14
15
16
Reflects conservative estimate. Actual amounts may vary.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

10.2-25
July 2014
Sheet 10 071
Technical Data
Frame Size VT/CT Reference Chart

Table 10.2-4. SC9000 EP Frame A
See Page 10.2-3 and Figure 10.2-1
Table 10.2-7. SC9000 EP Frame D

See Pages 10.2-9 and 10.2-11 and Figures 10.2-4 and 10.2-5
i
ii
2400/60 Hz VT
3300/50 Hz VT
4160/60 Hz VT
2400/60 Hz VT
3300/50 Hz VT
4160/60 Hz VT
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
FLA
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
69
80
91
300
350
400
48
56
64
300
350
400
38
44
51
300
350
400
448
504
561
2000
2250
2500
360
400
440
2250
2500
2750
403
434
461
3250
3500
3750
103
114
450
500
72
80
96
450
500
600
57
63
76
450
500
600
480
3000
493
527
558
4000
4250
4500
112
700
89
101
114
700
800
900
2400/60 Hz CT
3300/50 Hz CT
4160/60 Hz CT
124
132
1000 1
1150 1
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
335
390
448
1500
1750
2000
240
280
320
1500
1750
2000
279
310
341
2250
2500
2750
372
403
3000
3250
hp
2400/60 Hz CT
3300/50 Hz CT
4160/60 Hz CT
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
FLA
69
80
300
350
48
56
64
300
350
400
38
44
51
300
350
400
72
80
450
500
57
63
76
450
500
600
hp
Requires second blower configuration. Redundant blowers not available.
Table 10.2-5. SC9000 EP Frame B

2400/60 Hz VT
3300/50 Hz VT
4160/60 Hz VT
FLA
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
hp
3300/50 Hz VT
4160/60 Hz VT
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
520
560
600
3250
3500
3750
589
620
651
4750
5000
5250
640
4000
682
713
744
5500
5750
6000
128
144
160
800
900
1000
124
155
186
1000
1250
1500
2400/60 Hz CT
3300/50 Hz CT
4160/60 Hz CT
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
201
223
900
1000
200
240
1250
1500
217
248
1750
2000
360
400
2250
2500
434
461
493
3500
3750
4000
3300/50 Hz CT
4160/60 Hz CT
FLA
FLA
hp
hp
hp
91
103
114
400
450
500
96
112
128
600
700
800
89
101
114
700
800
900
134
156
600
700
144
160
900
1000
124
155
1000
1250
2400/60 Hz VT
600
700
800
FLA
Table 10.2-8. SC9000 EP Frame E

See Figure 10.2-6
134
156
178
2400/60 Hz CT
VT = Variable Torque (110% overload for 1 minute every

10 minutes)
CT = Constant Torque (150% overload for 1 minute every
10 minutes)
Table 10.2-6. SC9000 EP Frame C

10
11
12
13
14
15
2400/60 Hz VT
3300/50 Hz VT
4160/60 Hz VT
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
16
279
335
390
1250
1500
1750
280
320
1750
2000
279
310
341
372
2250
2500
2750 2
3000 2
17
2400/60 Hz CT
3300/50 Hz CT
4160/60 Hz CT
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
FLA
hp
178
201
223
279
800
900
1000
1250
200
1250
186
217
248
1500
1750
2000
18
19
20
Requires second blower configuration. Redundant blowers not available.
21
CA08104001E

July 2014
Sheet 10 072
Technical Data
Table 10.2-9. SC9000 EP Adjustable Frequency Drive Efficiency, Power Factor and
Harmonics Typical Data
Description
ii
1
2
Load (%)
50
75
100
Speed 50%
Input PF (1)
0.96
0.98
0.98
Input THD (V)
3.13
3.64
3.43
Input THD (I)
7.59
6.40
6.73
Efficiency (%)
0.943
0.959
0.962
Speed: 75%
Input PF (1)
0.98
0.99
0.99
Input THD (V)
1.34
2.32
3.15
Input THD (I)
6.76
4.44
3.85
Efficiency (%)
0.965
0.970
0.971
5
6
Speed: 100%
Input PF (1)
0.98
0.99
0.99
Input THD (V)
2.16
2.20
2.30
Input THD (I)
5.95
4.38
3.13
Efficiency (%)
0.971
0.972
0.974
Table 10.2-10. SC9000 EP Adjustable Frequency Drive Heat Loss Data
7
8
9
10
11
Horsepower
Watts Loss
as Heat
Horsepower
Watts Loss
as Heat
Horsepower
Watts Loss
as Heat
200
4600
900
20,700
3000
69,000
300
6900
1000
23,000
3500
80,500
350
8050
1250
28,750
3700
85,100
400
9200
1500
34,500
3750
86,250
450
10,350
1750
40,250
4000
92,000
500
11,500
2000
46,000
4500
103,500
600
13,800
2250
51,750
5500
126,500
700
16,100
2500
57,500
6000
138,000
800
18,400
2750
63,250
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-1
March 2015
Busway
Medium Voltage
Sheet 11 001
Contents
Space Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-11

Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-11
General Description . . . . . . . . 11.0-2
Traditional Elbows . . . . . . . 11.0-12
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2
Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-13
Withstand Ratings . . . . . 11.0-2
Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-14
Technical Data and
Switchgear Flanges . . . . . . 11.0-15
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-3
End Cable Tap Box . . . . . . . 11.0-16
Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-3
Phase Transposition . . . . . . 11.0-16
Dimensional Data . . . . . . . . 11.0-4
Expansion Joints . . . . . . . . 11.0-17
General Description . . . . . . . . 11.0-8
Bushing Box Termination. . 11.0-17
Collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-8
Transformer Termination . . 11.0-18
Splice Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-8
Sealing Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-18
Boot Connection. . . . . . . . . 11.0-8
Vapor/Fire Barriers . . . . . . . 11.0-19
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-9
Column Supports . . . . . . . . 11.0-20
Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-9
Horizontal Hanger. . . . . . . . 11.0-21
Non-Segregated Phase
Wall/Floor Flange . . . . . . . . 11.0-22
Feeder Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-10
Installation Diagrams . . . . . 11.0-23
Vertical Feeder . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-11
Field Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-24
Dust-Proof Construction . . 11.0-11
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Metal-Enclosed Bus Medium Voltage. . . . . . Section 16341
Section 26 18 29
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Typical 0.6/5/15 kV Bus Run Section
CA08104001E
21
11.0-2 BuswayMedium Voltage

March 2015
Sheet 11 002
General Description
Test
The design of non-segregated bus

runs has been tested per ANSI C37.23.
Certification of momentary current
testing, impulse testing and heat rise
are available upon request.
ii
1
Predictive Diagnostics
Straight Section
2
3
Partial discharge sensing and

monitoring is available as an option
for medium voltage applications. Refer
to Tab 4, Pages 4.5-1 through 4.5-8.
Withstand Ratings
The metal-enclosed non-segregated
phase bus runs are designed to withstand electrical and mechanical forces
generated by momentary (10 cycle)
and short-time (2 second) short-circuit
currents in accordance with the latest
ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.23. For 600 V
application, 4-cycle momentary
current withstand rating up to 158 kA
peak (98.8 kA rms asymmetrical) is
also available.
Refer to Table 11.0-1 for available
short-circuit ratings.
5
Certain bus ratings can be supplied

with CSA listing. Refer to
Tables 11.0-111.0-4 for availability
of CSA listing.
Downward Elbow
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
General Description
Eatons non-segregated phase bus
runs are designed for use on circuits
whose importance requires greater
reliability than power cables provide.
Typical of such applications are the
connections from transformers to
switchgear assemblies in unit substations, connections from switchgear
assemblies to rotating apparatus, and
tie connections between switchgear
assemblies.
Non-segregated phase bus is an
assembly of bus conductors with
associated connections, joints and
insulating supports confined within
a metal enclosure without interphase
barriers. The conductors are adequately separated and insulated from
each other and grounded by insulating
bus supports. Each conductor for
2400 V service and above is insulated
with a fluidized bed epoxy coating
throughout, which reduces the possibility of corona and electrical tracking.
Optional
Ground Bus
Three-Phase, Three-Wire
12003200 A
600 V 515 kV
Optional
Ground Bus
40005000 A
600 V 515 kV
Optional
Ground Bus
Three-Phase, Four-Wire
12003200 A
600 V 515 kV
Optional
Ground Bus
40005000 A
600 V 515 kV
Standards
17
18
19
20
21
The metal-enclosed non-segregated

phase bus runs are designed for 600 V,
5 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV and 38 kV service in
accordance with ANSI C37.23. Available
ratings are shown in Table 11.0-1.
Temperature Rise
The bus will be capable of carrying
rated current continuously without
exceeding a conductor temperature
rise of 65 C above an outside ambient
temperature of 40 C, as required by
ANSI Standard C37.23.
Optional
Ground Bus
12002000 A
27 kV
Optional
Ground Bus
12002000 A
38 kV
Figure 11.0-1. System Configurations

CA08104001E
11.0-3
March 2015
Sheet 11 003
Electrical Data
ii
Table 11.0-1. Available Non-Segregated Bus Ratings per ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.23-1987 1
Rated Maximum
Voltage kV rms
Rated Power
Frequency Hz
Power Frequency
Withstand 1 min.
Dry, kV rms
Impulse Withstand Rated

(1.2 x 50 microsec) Continuous
kV Peak
Current
Amperes
Rated Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Withstand Current
(kA rms Symmetrical)
2 Sec.
1 Sec. 2
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Withstand Current
10 Cycle
kA Peak
0.635
0.635
4.76
4.76
60
60
60
60
2.2
2.2
19
19
10
10
60
60
1200
2000
3000
3200
4000
5000
50
1200
2000
3000
3200
63
1200
2000
3000
3200
4000
5000
50
1200
2000
3000
3200
63
69
132
kA rms Asym.
3
4
89
170
100.8
132
78
6
7
170
100.8
60
36
95
1200
2000
3000
3200
4000
5000
50
132
78
8.25
60
36
95
1200
2000
3000
3200
63
170
100.8
1200
2000
3000
3200
4000
5000
50
1200
2000
3000
3200
63
15
60
60
36
36
95
95
11
130
78
12
13
170
100.8
14
60
60
125
1200
2000
40
108
64
38
60
80
170
1200
2000
40
104
64
9
10
27
78
8.25
15
Refer to Tables 11.0-2, 11.0-3 and 11.0-4 for available CSA and UL listings.
This is a value calculated from 2-second short-circuit withstand current rating based on relationship l2t = constant.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 11 004
Dimensional Data
W
ii
Bus CL
3
4
5
Bus CL
CL
Optional
Ground Bus
Layout 1
1 2 3
1 1 2 2 3 3
H
Bus CL
2 3 1 2 3
H
CL
Optional
Ground Bus
Layout 3
CL
Optional
Ground Bus
Layout 2
Figure 11.0-2. Medium Voltage Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Configurations

Table 11.0-2. Bus Duct Rated 49 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Seconds
Wire
Voltage
kV 1
Ampere
Rating
Layout
No.
Width
Height Conductor
Centerline
Conductor
Size
Phase-Phase
Conductor
Spacing
Bracing
Supports 2
Optional
Ground
Bus
Average
Weight
Per Foot 3
Standards
Listing
Aluminum Enclosures
3
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
1
1
1
20.00
20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 3
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
38
47
68
CSA
CSA
CSA
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3200
4000
5000
1
2
2
20.00
35.75
35.75
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
68
101
118
CSA
CSA
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
4
4
4
26.00
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 3
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
48
60
88
CSA
CSA
0.635/5/15
0.635
3200
4000
4
5
26.00
35.75
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
5.38
4.00
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
88
127
Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
1
1
1
20.00
20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 3
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
58
67
106
CSA
CSA
10
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3200
4000
5000
1
2
3
20.00
35.75
35.75
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
106
154
154
11
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
4
4
4
26.00
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 3
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
72
84
124
CSA
CSA
12
0.635/5/15
0.635
3200
4000
4
5
26.00
35.75
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
4.00
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
124
188
13
2
3
14
All phase conductors above 635 V are fully insulated with epoxy insulation for the rated maximum voltage. Epoxy insulation is available at 600 V as
an option.
Optional poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy bracing supports are available. Consult factory.
Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy support bracing.
Note: For dimensions in mm, multiply inches by 25.4.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-5
March 2015
Sheet 11 005
Dimensional Data (Continued)
i
W
Bus CL
1 2 3 N
H
Optional
Ground Bus
Bus CL
CL
ii
1 1 2 2 3 3 N N
CL
Optional
Ground Bus
Layout 5
Layout 4
Figure 11.0-3. Medium Voltage Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Configurations
Table 11.0-3. Bus Duct Rated 63 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Seconds

Wire
Voltage
kV 1
Ampere
Rating
Layout
No.
Width
Height Conductor
Centerline
Conductor
Size
Phase-Phase
Conductor
Spacing
Bracing
Supports 2
Ground
Bus
Average
Weight
Per Foot 3
Standards
Listing
Aluminum Enclosures
CSA
CSA
CSA
4
5
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
1
1
1
20.00
20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
48
48
78
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3200
4000
5000
1
2
2
20.00
35.75
35.75
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
78
105
121
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
4
4
4
26.00
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
61
61
101
0.635/5/15
0.635
3200
4000
4
5
26.00
35.75
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
5.38
4.00
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
101
128
Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
1
1
1
20.00
20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
68
68
89
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3200
4000
5000
1
2
3
20.00
35.75
35.75
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
89
134
160
10
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
4
4
4
26.00
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
85
85
115
11
0.635/5/15
0.635
3200
4000
4
5
26.00
35.75
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
5.38
4.00
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
115
188
12
1
2
3
All phase conductors above 635 V are fully insulated with epoxy insulation for the rated maximum voltage. Epoxy insulation is available at 600 V as
an option.
Optional poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy bracing supports are available. Consult factory.
Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy support bracing.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 11 006

W
ii
Bus CL
W
1
Bus CL
Bus CL
H
D
D
CL
Ground Bus
Ground Bus
Layout 8
2
3
1 2 3
CL
Layout 9
CL
Layout 10
Ground Bus
Figure 11.0-4. Dimensional Data for 27 kV/38 kV Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Configurations
Table 11.0-4. Dimensional Data for 27 kV Bus Rated up to 108 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second
4
5
6
Wire Rated
Type Maximum
Voltage
kV 1
Rated
Layout Enclosure
Enclosure
Cont.
No.
Material
Size (Inches)
Current
Standard Optional W
H
C
Amperes
27
27
1200
2000
8
8
Aluminum
Aluminum
30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 7.00

30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.50 x 4 7.00
4
4
5
5
6
6
0.25 x 2.00 37
0.25 x 2.00 49
Yes
Yes
No
No
27
27
1200
2000
8
8
30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 7.00

30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.50 x 4 7.00
4
4
5
5
6
6
0.25 x 2.00 37
0.25 x 2.00 49
Yes
Yes
No
No
2
3
4
5
6
Steel
Steel
# of Bars
Ph and
Size, Cu
(Inches) 1
Ph-Ph Insulating
Bus
Supports
Spacing Standard Optional 2
(Inches)
Optional
Ground
Bus, Cu
(Inches)
Listing
Approx.
Average
Weight
CSA UL
per Foot (Lbs) 3
All bus bars for applications above 600 V are fully insulated with fluidized epoxy coating for the rated maximum voltage.
Check with Eaton for availability.
Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or epoxy insulating supports in place of glass polyester.
Glass polyester.
Polyester/porcelain.
Epoxy.
Table 11.0-5. Dimensional Data for 38 kV Bus Rated up to 104 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second
10
Wire Rated
Type Maximum
Voltage
kV 7
Rated
Layout Enclosure
Enclosure
Cont.
No.
Material
Size (Inches)
Current
Standard Optional W
H
C
Amperes
11
38
38
1200
2000
9
10
Aluminum
Aluminum
40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 10.50

40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.38 x 4 10.50
Epoxy
Epoxy
0.25 x 3.00
0.25 x 3.00
61
89
Yes
Yes
No
No
38
38
1200
2000
9
10
40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 10.50

40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.38 x 4 10.50
Epoxy
Epoxy
0.25 x 3.00 88
0.25 x 3.00 116
No
No
No
No
12
7
8
13
Steel
Steel
# of Bars
Ph and
Size, Cu
(Inches)
Ph-Ph Insulating
Bus
Supports
Spacing Standard Optional 8
(Inches)
Optional
Ground
Bus, Cu
(Inches)
Listing
Approx.
Average
Weight
CSA UL
per Foot (Lbs) 9
All bus bars for applications above 600 V are fully insulated with fluidized epoxy coating for the rated maximum voltage.
Check with Eaton for availability.
Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or epoxy insulating supports in place of glass polyester.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-7
March 2015
Sheet 11 007
Table 11.0-6. Non-Segregated Phase Bus Electrical Properties and Watt Loss Data
Wire
Type
Rated Max.
Voltage
Cont.
Rated
Current
Conductor (Copper)
#/ph
Thick
Width
Inch
Enclosure
Material
Inch
Phase
Arrangement
Electrical Properties
Size
ohm/Ph/ft
F/PH/FT
DC
Cap to Grd
XL
Z = R+JXL
Cg
7.1
4.7
2.7
2.7
49.8
37.0
31.1
31.1
50.3
37.3
31.3
31.3
2.2
4.4
5.9
5.9
1.4
1.0
5.5
3.7
1.8
1.3
7.1
4.7
35.6
32.9
49.8
37.0
35.6
32.9
50.3
37.3
5.9
7.8
2.2
4.4
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
35.75 x 17.38
35.75 x 17.38
2.1
2.1
1.0
1.0
2.7
2.7
1.3
1.3
31.1
31.1
32.9
14.6
31.3
31.3
32.9
14.6
5.9
5.9
7.8
7.4
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
5.5
3.7
2.1
2.1
7.1
4.7
2.7
2.7
49.8
37.0
31.1
31.1
50.3
37.3
31.3
31.3
1.5
3.1
4.1
4.1
1-1-2-2-3-3-N-N
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
Aluminum
Steel
Steel
35.75 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
1.4
5.5
3.7
1.8
7.1
4.7
35.6
49.8
37.0
35.6
50.3
37.3
4.9
1.5
3.1
8.00
8.00
8.00
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
1-1-2-2-3-3-N-N
Steel
Steel
Steel
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
35.75 x 17.38
2.1
2.1
1.0
2.7
2.7
1.3
41.1
41.1
32.9
41.2
41.2
32.9
4.1
4.1
6.6
0.25
0.50
0.25
0.50
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
Aluminum
Aluminum
Steel
Steel
30.00 x 21.00
30.00 x 21.00
30.00 x 21.00
30.00 x 21.00
8.3
4.1
8.3
4.1
10.6
5.3
10.6
5.3
51.6
24.8
51.6
24.8
52.7
25.4
52.7
25.4
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
0.25
0.38
0.25
0.38
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
Aluminum
Aluminum
Steel
Steel
40.25 x 21.50
40.25 x 21.50
40.25 x 21.50
40.25 x 21.50
8.3
4.1
8.3
4.1
10.6
5.3
10.6
5.3
61.3
59.0
61.3
59.0
62.3
59.2
62.3
59.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
kV
Amperes
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
3200
1
1
1
1
0.50
0.38
0.50
0.50
3.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
5.5
3.7
2.1
2.1
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
4000
5000
1200
2000
2
2
1
1
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.38
6.00
8.00
3.00
6.00
1-1-2-2-3-3
1-1-2-2-3-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
Aluminum
Aluminum
Steel
Steel
35.75 x 17.38
35.75 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3000
3200
4000
5000
1
1
2
2
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-1-2-2-3-3
1-2-3-1-2-3
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
3200
1
1
1
1
0.50
0.38
0.50
0.50
3.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
0.635
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
4000
1200
2000
2
1
1
0.50
0.50
0.38
6.00
3.00
6.00
0.635/5/15
0.635
0.635
3000
3200
4000
1
1
2
0.50
0.50
0.50
27
27
27
27
1200
2000
1200
2000
1
1
1
1
38
38
38
38
1200
2000
1200
2000
1
2
1
2
60 Hz
W x H (Inches) R 20C
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 11 008
General Description
Collar
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Collars (see Figure 11.0-5) are

U-shaped metal pieces used for
enclosure-to-enclosure connections.
0.312 18 x 0.875
(7.9 x 22.2)
Hex Steel Bolt
0.312 (7.9) Weather Seal
Washer (Steel)
Weather Seal
Washer NEOP.
(Outdoor Only)
Splice Joint
Conductors are silver-plated for
maximum conductivity (tin plating
is optional). Bus runs rated 3200 A
(aluminum enclosure) or 2000 A (steel
enclosure) and below use one conductor per phase, while the higher ratings
use two conductors per phase. Adjacent
sections are electrically bonded together
by means of plated copper splice
plates to provide electrical continuity.
All splice joints (see Figure 11.0-6)
should be torqued 50 ft/lbs.
Boot Connection
Bus joints are insulated with a
flame-retardant PVC boot, easily
removable for joint inspection
(see Figure 11.0-7).
0.125 TK x 0.75
(3.2 x 19.05) Wide
Gasket on Inside of Collar
(Outdoor Only)
Collar
Tinnerman Nut
Note: Numbers indicate

bolt tightening sequence.
Figure 11.0-5. Enclosure Section Joint Collar
Insulated Bus
0.50 13 x 2.0 (12.7 x 50.8)

Hex Bolt
0.500 (12.7) Washer
Splice Plate
Splice Plate
10
11
12
0.500 (12.7) Pyramidal Washer

0.500 (12.7) 13 Hex Nut
Figure 11.0-6. Typical Splice Plate Connection
13
14
PVC Boot
15
Phase Conductors
16
17
18
19
Splice Plates
Nylon Ties
Figure 11.0-7. Boot Assembly (for Insulated Bus Only)
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-9
March 2015
Sheet 11 009
Construction
Enclosures are fabricated from 11-gauge
aluminum, and are welded for maximum
rigidity (see Figure 11.0-8). Removable
covers are secured with bolts for ease of
access when making joints and subsequent and periodic inspection. (Steel
housings are also available.)
Enclosures are painted with baked-on
epoxy powder coat paint system resulting in a very durable finish with uniform
thickness and gloss. This cosmetically
pleasing finish minimizes the risk of
problems in harsh environments. The
standard color is ANSI-61 light gray.
Special paint colors are available
upon request.
3. Apply 3.00-inch (76.2 mm) insulating tape, lapping and layering

(1 layer up to 5 kV) (2 layers for 5 kV
to 15 kV). Tape must overlap preinsulation by 1.50 inches (38.1 mm).
Should a tape roll expire, start a new
roll by overlapping any
previous end by 1/2-turn.
Ground Conductor (Optional)

For all ratings except 170 kA peak
rated bus, a separate, continuous
0.25 x 2.00 inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm) bare
copper ground bus, bolted and running
along the entire length is available.
For 170 kA peak rated bus runs, a
continuous 0.25 x 3.00 inch

(6.4 x 76.2 mm) bare copper ground
bus running along the entire length
is provided when required.
In the 170 kA peak rated bus, ground
pads are welded at each end of the
enclosure. Copper ground links are
provided (regardless of provisions of
ground bus) to ensure a continuous
ground path throughout the run.
Neutral Conductor (Optional)

Fully rated, isolated and insulated
neutral conductor can be provided
when specified.
3
4
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 11.0-8. Housing Assembly
13
14
15
Bare Conductor
16
Flex Connector
Filler
Transformer
Spade
1. Clean area of dirt and foreign

matter as specified under cleaning
procedures.
CA08104001E
Phase Conductors
2. Apply at least 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) of

filler over the sharp edges of the
conductor, splice plates, hardware
or flex connectors. Smooth out and
blend the contour so that tape may
be easily applied.
A variety of terminations is available to

accommodate most termination
requirements. Bus runs can be terminated with flexible shunts, potheads,
porcelain bushings or conductor stub
ends for connections to riser bars in
switchgear assemblies.
For flex connectors, finish connections

with insulating tape (furnished).
The following procedures should be
followed for taping joints.
ii
Flexible joints are supplied in all

straight bus runs at approximately
50 feet (15.2 m) intervals to allow for
the expected expansion when the
conductors are energized and are
carrying rated current.
All conductors are 98% conductivity

copper bars. Bus joints are made by
solidly bolting the bus bars together
with splice plates on each side
(see Figure 11.0-9). All joint surfaces
are silver-plated or tin-plated to ensure
maximum conductivity through the
joint. After bolting, each standard joint is
covered by a preformed, flameretardant insulating boot, providing full
insulation for bus conductors (5 kV and
above). These boots are easily removable for inspection of the joints at any
future time. The copper bus bars are
mounted on supports of track-resistant,
flame-retardant glass polyester. If boots
are not available for connection, taping
the joint will be required.
17
Transformer
Main Bus
Pre-Insulation
1.00-inch (25.4 mm)

Insulating Tape
to Secure Joint
1.50 (38.1)
Minimum
Overlap
Figure 11.0-9. Taping Instructions

3.00-inch (76.2 mm)

Insulating Tape
to Pad Filler
18
19
20
21

March 2015
Sheet 11 010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Non-Segregated Phase Feeder Bus

Straight sections of feeder bus can be
supplied in any length, at 1/8-inch
(3.2 mm) increments, from a 14.00-inch
(355.6 mm) minimum to an 8-foot
(2 m) maximum. Figure 11.0-10
illustrates the configuration of feeder
bus and the conductors locations.
Collars are used for all horizontal
enclosure-to-enclosure connections.
20.00
(508.0)
3-Wire 1200 2000 and 3000 Amperes
Top View
5.38
(136.7)
26.00
(660.4)
4-Wire 1200 2000 and 3000 Amperes

Top View
5.38
(136.7)
5
6
7
8
35.75
(908.5)
3-Wire 4000 and 5000 Amperes

Top View
5.38
(136.7)
9
10
35.75
(908.5)
11
12
4.00
(101.6)
13
4-Wire 4000 and 5000 Amperes

Top View
8.13
(206.5)
F
17.38
(441.5)
14
15
9.25
(235.0)
Front View
Figure 11.0-10. Non-Segregated Phase Feeder Bus
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-11
March 2015
Sheet 11 011
Vertical Feeder
Vertical feeder enclosures (see

Figure 11.0-11) are designed in
standard lengths of 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) through 56.00 inches
(1422.4 mm) in 1.00-inch (25.4 mm)
increments. All vertical enclosures
are supplied with external (turned-out)
flanges for enclosure-to-enclosure
connections.
ii
1
2
Dust-Proof Construction
Both vertical and horizontal sections of

feeder bus can be supplied with dustproof construction in any length, at
1/8-inch (3.18 mm) increments, from
14.00 inches (355.6 mm) to an 8-foot
(2.4 m) maximum. Figure 11.0-10
illustrates the configuration of feeder
bus and the conductors locations.
Removable gasket flat covers are
secured with bolts for ease of access
when making joints and subsequent
and periodic inspection. External and
internal flanges are used for all dustproof enclosure-to-enclosure connections. Gasket material is to be placed
between internal and external flanges
during installation.
Space Heaters
Space heaters are provided on outdoor
bus duct runs for use with customersupplied 120 or 240 Vac power supply at
250 watts for both. Consult the factory
for additional heater ratings. Heaters
come pre-wired using #14 shielded pair
cable with a terminal block ready to
accept customer-supplied power. The
heaters are continuously energized or
may be thermostat controlled. There is
one heater provided every 8 ft (2.4 m)
as standard.
5
8.13
(206.5)
16.25
(412.8)
Figure 11.0-11. Vertical Feeder

Upward
Rearward
10
11
12
13
Forward
F
There is a fitting to meet every application need: flanges, elbows, offsets,

tees, cable tap boxes, transformer
connections and expansion joints.
14
15
Downward
16
These fittings, along with standard and

minimum dimensions, are described
on the following pages.
8.13
(206.5)
CL
The relationship of fittings to straight

lengths (forward, rearward, upward
and downward) is illustrated in
Figure 11.0-12.
CA08104001E
Fittings
When making field measurements and

layouts, it should be remembered that
the dimensions are given from the
centerline of the non-segregated bus
bar, not the centerline of the housing.
Figure 11.0-11 and Figure 11.0-12
show the differences in center line
in relationship to the housing.
Duct Width
17.38
(441.5)
17
18
Figure 11.0-12. Horizontal Feeder
19
20
21

March 2015
Sheet 11 012
i
ii
Traditional Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90-degree changes in the direction
of bus runs. The four types that are available are forward,
rearward, upward and downward.
Table 11.0-7. Elbow Dimensions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Amperes Wire Enclosure

Type Material

Upward
Downward
Rearward
Forward
1200
2000
3000
3
3
3
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
3000
3200
3200
3
3
3
Steel
Aluminum
Steel
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
21.00 (736.6)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (736.6)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
4000
5000
1200
3
3
4
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6)

29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6)
2000
3000
3000
4
4
4
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum
Steel
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6)

24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6)
3200
3200
4000
4
4
4
Aluminum
Steel
Aluminum/steel
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6)

24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6)
Note: All dimensions are to the centerline of the non-segregated bus bar.
8
9
B
A
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 11.0-15. Rearward Elbow
Figure 11.0-13. Upward Elbow
15
16
A
17
A
18
19
20
21
Figure 11.0-14. Downward Elbow
Figure 11.0-16. Forward Elbow

CA08104001E
11.0-13
March 2015
Sheet 11 013
Offsets
An offset is used to avoid obstacles and to conform to building

structure. It is two elbows fabricated into a single fitting for
use where space restrictions prohibit the use of a standard
90-degree elbow. The minimum lengths are listed in
Table 11.0-8.
ii
Table 11.0-8. Offset Dimensions
Amperes
Wire
Type
Enclosure
Material

Upward
Downward
Rearward
Forward
1200
2000
3000
3
3
3
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
3000
3200
3200
3
3
3
Steel
Aluminum
Steel
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
4000
5000
1200
3
3
4
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
2000
3000
3000
4
4
4
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum
Steel
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
3200
3200
4000
4
4
4
Aluminum
Steel
Aluminum/steel
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
8.13
(206.5)
27.38
(695.5)
10.00
(254.0)
Minimum
CL
Bus
9.25
(235.0)
9.25
(235.0)
A
13
14
Figure 11.0-19. Rearward Offset
Figure 11.0-17. Upward Offset
15
16
A
3.50 (88.9)
Minimum
Offset
11
12
10
27.38
(695.5)
10.00
(254.0)
Minimum
CL
Bus
8.13
(206.5)
3.50 (88.9)
Minimum
Offset
17
18
19
20
Figure 11.0-18. Downward Offset

CA08104001E
Figure 11.0-20. Forward Offset

21

March 2015
Sheet 11 014
i
ii
Tees
Tees are used to branch-off a bus run. The four types
available are forward, rearward, upward and downward.
1
36.00
(914.4)
2
3
17.38
(441.5)
F
18.00
(457.2)
6
19.25
(489.0)
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
19.25
(489.0)
8
9
Figure 11.0-21. Downward
Figure 11.0-23. Forward
10
11
12
36.00
(914.4)
17.00
(431.8)
17.38
(441.5)
13
14
15
16
19.25
(489.0)
17
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
19.25
(489.0)
18
Figure 11.0-22. Upward
Figure 11.0-24. Rearward
19
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-15
March 2015
Sheet 11 015
Switchgear Flanges
Switchgear termination enclosures connect non-segregated
phase bus to medium voltage switchgear, medium voltage
motor control centers, and low voltage switchgear, switchboards or motor control centers. Each enclosure is designed
to coordinate with opening, drilling and bus extension detail
supplied on the switchgear equipment by the switchgear
supplier. Standard switchgear termination enclosures
include external (turned out) flange for connections to
switchgear equipment for medium voltage applications,
and internal (turned in) flange for low voltage applications.
All flanges will match switchgear roof sheet coordinations.
"A"
ii
"B"
1
0.312-18 x 0.875
(7.9 x 22.2)
Stl. Hex Bolt
Internal Flange
0.312 (7.9)
Flat Washer
Table 11.0-9. Flange

Amperes
Wire
Type
Enclosure
49 kA
63 kA
1200
Aluminum/steel
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
2000
Aluminum/steel
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
3000
Aluminum
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
3000
Steel
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
3200
Aluminum
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
3200
Steel
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4000
Aluminum
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4000
Steel
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
5000
Aluminum
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
5000
Steel
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
1200
Aluminum/steel
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
2000
Aluminum/steel
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
3000
Aluminum
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
3000
Steel
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
3200
Aluminum
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
3200
Steel
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4000
Aluminum
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4000
Steel
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
0.125 Tk. x 1.25

(3.2 x 31.8)
Wide Gasket
0.312 (7.9)
Flat Washer
0.312 (7.9)
Lockwasher
0.312-18 (7.9)
Stl. Hex Nut
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 11.0-25. Low Voltage Switchgear Flange (Internal Flange)
"A"
11
12
"B"
0.312-18 x 1.25
(7.9 x 31.8)
Stl. Hex Bolt
10
13
External Flange
14
0.312 (7.9)
Weatherseal
Washer (Stl.)
15
0.312 (7.9)
Weatherseal
Washer (Neop.)
0.125 Tk. x 1.25
(3.2 x 31.8)
Wide Gasket
16
17
0.312 (7.9)
Weatherseal
Washer (Neop.)
0.312 (7.9)
Weatherseal
Washer (Stl.)
0.312-18 (7.9)
Stl. Hex Nut
Figure 11.0-26. Medium Voltage Switchgear Flange (External Flange)

CA08104001E
18
19
20
21

March 2015
Sheet 11 016
i
ii
1
2
3
4
End Cable Tap Box

End cable tap boxes (see
Figure 11.0-27) are applied to feed a
run of bus duct with cable and conduit.
The enclosure is designed to accommodate specified size and number of
cables per phase. Conductors are
separated and provided with the
required number of cable lugs per
phase, and necessary space for cable
termination. The enclosure is provided
with removable access covers as
necessary for access to power cable
terminations.
47.00
36.00 (1193.8)
(914.4)
48.00
(1219.2)
11.00
(279.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Main Bus
Phase Transposition
Phase transposition is normally

provided within the switchgear equipment. However, when required, it can
be provided within the bus run system
to align phasing of terminal equipment
at two ends.
All dimensions are to the centerline

of the non-segregated bus bar.
Accessible
Top Covers
CL
Cable Lugs
Optional
Ground Bus
Accessible
Bottom Covers
Figure 11.0-27. End Cable Tap Box
8
11.00
(279.4)
9
10
62.00
40.00 (1574.8)
(1016.0)
17.38
(441.5)
11
12
13
14
11.00
(279.4)
Accessible
Cover
Accessible
Cover
Accessible
Cover
15
Accessible
Cover
Main Bus
Figure 11.0-28. Phase Transposition
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-17
March 2015
Sheet 11 017
Expansion Joints
An expansion joint is a special bus and
housing fitting provided in long runs to
accommodate thermal expansion of
bus conductors with respect to steel or
aluminum housing, when carrying
rated continuous current. The fitting
consists of two pieces of housing, each
with one flange end. The flanged ends
are separated by a 1.00-inch
(25.4 mm) gap. A sealing ring assembly is then installed over the bolted
flanges (see Page 11.0-18). Flexible
copper braids of required ampacity
connect bus conductors within the
expansion fitting. An expansion joint
is normally provided for every 50 feet
(15 m) of straight run. However, within
those 50 feet (15 m), if the bus run
contains elbows or flexible termination, such as transformer throat, the
expansion joint may be omitted.
The enclosure is bolted together for
shipping, but the four bolts should be
removed after installation.
Bushing Box Termination

This is used to connect bus duct to an
outside source such as a power station
or when the customer wants to connect cable that is located outdoors.
0.125 x 3.00 Gasket

(3.2 x 76.2)
Flat 0.312 (7.9) Washer
0.312 (7.9) 18 x A + 1 Hex
Steel Bolt
Flat 0.312 (7.9) Washer

0.312 (7.9) Split Steel Lockwasher
0.312 (7.9) 18 Hex Steel Nut
Hardware to be
Removed After
Installation
i
ii
1
2
Standard 1.00 (25.4)

Bolting Detail
(4) Places
3
4
5
6
Tinnerman
Nut
Flat 0.312 (7.9) Steel Washer
0.312 (7.9) Steel Split Lockwasher
0.312 18 x 1.00 Hex
(7.9 x 25.4) Steel Bolt
7
Bottom Section
Figure 11.0-29. Expansion Joint
The enclosure is designed to accommodate bushing sizes of 12003000 A

with voltages up to a maximum of
15 kV (see Figure 11.0-30).
The conductors are separated and
provided with flex connectors on the
internal portion. The enclosure will be
furnished with heaters and removable
access covers for maintenance.
Flat 0.312 (7.9) Std. Washers

to Space Flanges as
Required
Steel Sealing Frame
49.00
(1244.6)
36.00
(914.4)
10
72.00
(1828.8)
11
24.00
(609.6)
Bushings
12
13
Main
Bus Bar
24.00
(609.6)
24.00
(609.6)
38.00
(965.2)
14
15
Flex Connectors
16
Figure 11.0-30. Bushing Box
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 11 018
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Transformer Termination
This is a special enclosure designed
to match the transformer throat. It
includes a matching flange and
required number of flexible copper
braids for connections to transformer
bushing terminal pads. The transformer termination enclosure flange
is provided with or without drilling
as required for a given transformer.
A sealing ring kit is included for
field installation around the flange
connection (see Figure 11.0-31).
Sealing Ring
A sealing ring kit is provided for placement around enclosure-to-enclosure
flange connections in an expansion
fitting, and for placement around bus
run flange and transformer or
generator flange interface (see
Figure 11.0-32). The sealing ring
provides a weatherproof seal around
such joints. The kit consists of three
pieces: a U-shaped metal piece
fabricated by welding together three
members, a separate bottom piece
and a U-shaped gasket. The sealing
ring kit is installed in the field by the
customer. First, the U-shaped gasket is
placed upside down around flange-toflange interface. Then the U-shaped
metal piece is placed over the gasket
bolted to the bottom piece to provide
a weatherproof seal around the
enclosure.
D
Flex
Connectors
A
E
5.50 (139.7)
E
C
Heater
Box
9.50
(241.3)
Access
Cover
Column
Support
Bracket
29.50
(749.3)
A = Floor to Centerline of Transformer Flange

B = Flange Height
C = Flange Width
D = Pending Location of Transformer Spade
E = Dimensions Between Transformer Spades
Figure 11.0-31. Transformer Termination
0.312 (7.9) Weatherseal Washer (Steel)

0.312 (7.9) Steel Split Lockwasher
13
0.312 18 x 1.00 Hex Steel Bolt

(7.9 x 25.4)
Bottom Section
14
15
16
Steel Sealing Frame
"A"
Standard 0.50 (12.7) (See Bus Run Layout

Drawing for Actual Dimension.)
0.125 x 3.00 Gasket

(3.2 x 76.2)
Figure 11.0-32. Sealing Ring
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-19
March 2015
Sheet 11 019
Vapor Barriers
Vapor barriers are two pieces of
0.75-inch (19.1 mm) thick glass
polyester that are sealed with silicone
sealant. The vapor barrier is used to
seal construction openings and
penetrations through floor slabs,
walls and other building partitions
and assembles against the passage
of moisture.
5.38
(136.7)
Vapor
Barrier
5.38
(136.7)
1.12
(28.4)
8.13
(206.5)
ii
Fire
Foam
Fire barriers consist of desired firerated barrier sandwiched between

two vapor barriers. Used to seal construction openings and penetrations
through floor slabs, walls and other
fire-rated building partitions and
assemblies against the passage of
flame, noxious gas, smoke and water.
Restore fire-rated construction to
original integrity.
Figure 11.0-33. 1-Hour Fire Barrier
5.38
(136.7)
Vapor
Barrier
5.38
(136.7)
11.00
(279.4)
1.12
(28.4)
1.12
(28.4)
8.13
(206.5)
5
Fire
Foam
Table 11.0-10. Suggested Guide for Designing

Minimum Penetration Thickness for
Designated Fire Ratingsin Inches (mm)
Thickness of 4.00
Dow Corning (101.6)
RTV Foam
2-Hour
Fire Test
3-Hour
Fire Test
8.00
(203.2)
12.00
(304.8)
Note: Data extracted from results of several

large scale E-l 19-76 fire test of different
Dow Corning silicone RTV foam penetration
seal systems in both floor and wall test
structures.
5.38
(136.7)
Vapor
Barrier
6
7
8.00
(203.2)
Fire Rating
1-Hour
Fire Test
1
2
4.00
(101.6)
Fire Barriers
Description
6.50
(165.1)
1.12
(28.4)
5.38
(136.7)
1.12
(28.4)
1.12
(28.4)
8.13
(206.5)
10
Fire
Foam
12.00
(304.8)
15.00
(381.0)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 11 020
i
ii
1
2
3
Column Supports
Outdoor bus runs are normally
supported by a single structural column
with a crossbeam, which is bolted to
brackets provided on the bus housing.
Special conditions may require a different design. The customer furnishes
the columns, beams and foundation
hardware for the support columns.
Only the brackets are included with the
bus run. Column supports should be
placed every 8 to 10 feet (2.4 to 3.0 m),
at transformer throats and at transitions
where the run turns vertical for more
than 3 feet (0.91 m).
Hardware
Splice
Plate
Collar
Enclosure
Boot
CL Of
Bus
Of
5.50 CL Bus
(139.7)
Ground Bus
Ground Bus Link
See Figure 11.0-38

for Piercing
Support Angle
H-Beam By
Customer
Figure 11.0-37. Column Support at Joint
6.00
(152.4)
5.50
(139.7)
1.75
(44.5)
1.75
(44.5)
CL
7
8
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
2.00
(50.8)
1.75
(44.5)
CL
0.503 (12.8) Dia.

(4)
1.75
(44.5)
6.00
(152.4)
9
Plate By Customer
Welded to I-Beam
Recommended Plate
6 x 6 x 1/2 TK
10
11
Figure 11.0-38. Beam Drilling
12
13
14
15
0.875 (22.2) Dia.

(4)
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
4.50
(114.3)
6.00
(152.4)
4.50
(114.3)
CL
0.656 Dia.
(2) ea. side
1.50
(38.1)
4.50
(114.3)
1.50
(38.1)
16
6.00
(152.4)
CL
0.75 (19.1) Tk
Plate
4.50
(114.3)
17
18
6.00
(152.4)
15.5
19
0.75 (19.1)
Figure 11.0-36. Column Support at Transformer
20
Figure 11.0-39. Base Plate Detail
21
CA08104001E
11.0-21
March 2015
Sheet 11 021
Horizontal Hanger
The indoor bus run is attached to existing building structure through the use of
5/8-inch (15.9) diameter hanger rod

assembly (see Figure 11.0-40). Exact
placement to be determined by installer.
Hanger rods and associated support

material to be supplied by the customer
or contractor.
i
ii
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
A
A = 20.00, 26.00, 35.75
(508.0, 660.4, 908.1)
Width of Enclosure
6.00
(152.4)
Minimum
Distance
6.00
(152.4)
Minimum
Distance
Threaded Rod
0.625 Dia. (15.9)
Hanger- Supplied
By Customer
0.625 (15.9) Nut

Lockwasher
Flatwasher
3
4
0.75
0.75
(19.1)
(19.1)
Steel Structural
System
(6) Locations
Threaded Rod Extends
to Roof Hangers
5
6
17.38
(441.5)
7
8
Steel Structural
System
Threaded Rod
0.625 Dia. (15.9)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
9
10
Figure 11.0-40. Horizontal Hanger Assembly
11
12
Floor Flange
Thru Floor
Horizontal Feeder
Horizontal Tee
Downward
Elbow
Collar
Enclosure to
Enclosure Flange
Hardware
Expansion Joint
Outdoor
Downward
Tee
Indoor
Vertical
Feeder
Forward/
Rearward Elbow
Sealing
Ring
Offset
Transformer
Brackets
T-Beams
by Customer
Upward Elbow
Upward
Tee
Collar
14
End Cable Tap Box
Thru Wall
Enclosure to
Switchgear Hardware
Wall
Flange
Internal
Switchgear
Flange
Phase Transposition
15
16
17
Horizontal Feeder
External
Switchgear
Flange
Collar
18
19
Horizontal
Hanger
Hanger
Angles
20
21
Figure 11.0-41. Typical Bus Duct Components

CA08104001E
13
Bushing Box

March 2015
Sheet 11 022
i
ii
Wall/Floor Flange
Wall/floor flange fittings are provided
when a bus run passes through a wall
or floor. The wall/floor flange assembly
is a sliding design. It consists of a Ushaped piece fabricated with two lips.
The assembly is installed in the wall

opening by the purchaser. The bus run
is installed through the wall/floor
flange assembly by sliding through it.
1
2
3
0.438 (11.1) Dia.

Holes In Wall Frame
1.00 (25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
0.375 (9.5)-16 Tap

By Purchaser
8.00
(203.2)
8.63
(219.2)
18.38
(466.8)
3.00
(76.2)
Wall Opening
B
9.75
(247.7)
Wall
THK
Wall
Frame
Figure 11.0-43. Wall Flange
8.00
(203.2)
7
C
8
9
10
11
Figure 11.0-42. Wall Opening

Table 11.0-11. Wall/Floor Opening Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Width
20.00 (508.0)
7.25 (184.2)
21.00 (533.4)
10.50 (266.7)
26.00 (660.4)
7.25 (184.2)
21.00 (533.4)
10.50 (266.7)
35.75 (908.1)
8.00 (203.2)
36.75 (933.5)
18.38 (466.9)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
11.0-23
March 2015
Sheet 11 023
Installation Diagrams
i
ii
Internal
Switchgear
Flange
1
Horizontal
Feeder
External
Switchgear
Flange
2
3
Collar
4
5
Horizontal
Hanger
6
7
8
Figure 11.0-44. Typical Bus Run (Switchgear-to-Switchgear)
9
Downward
Elbow
Collar
10
Wall Flange
Enclosure
to Enclosure
Flange
Hardware
Wall Enclosure
11
Horizontal Feeder
Sealing
Ring
12
Internal
Switchgear
Flange
13
Switchgear
Transformer
Enclosure
Horizontal
Hanger
14
15
Brackets
16
T-Beam Support
by Customer
17
18
Figure 11.0-45. Typical Bus Run (Switchgear-to-Transformer)
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 11 024
Field Fit
A field fit section of bus is typically an

elbow or a short length of feeder that
is intentionally left out of a run for later
shipment. It is most often a mutually
agreed upon section between the
customer and the plant. The purpose
of the program is to effectively manage the dimensional uncertainties that
may be involved in a bus layout.
The example shown in Figure 11.0-46

identifies the field fit piece as a straight
length.
ii
1
Upon release of the order, this item is

kept on hold for field measurement.
The contractor installs the bus duct
and is then able to obtain an exact
dimension for the final field fit piece.
The measurement should be made
from edge of the housing 1 to the
edge of the housing 2.
The field fit section will ship within 5 to

10 working days from the receipt of the
release fax. This program has been
successful for many years and it provides assurance of an exact fit the first
time. It allows bus duct to be released
when certain dimensions are not yet
determined. It also eliminates the costly
delays that can occur when sections
have to be remade and shipped due to
last minute job site changes. In turn,
this allows installations to begin early
and projects can be completed on time.
The contractor can fax the dimensions

directly to the factory on the Final Field
Fit Fax Release form, which is packed
with the original shipment.
4
3
5
Edge of Housing
6
7
8
9
Final
Field
Fit
Edge of
Housing
1
1
10
FF
11
Field Measure
Dimension A
A
12
13
Edge of Housing
2
Equipment
Switchgear
1
Hold FF for Final Fit.
Customer to Furnish
Dimensions.
Edge of Housing
14
FF
15
16
Figure 11.0-46. Final Field Fit
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
12.0-1
November 2013
Transfer Switches
Medium Voltage
Sheet 12 001
CA08104001E
Contents
Medium Voltage Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-4
Protection and Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-4
Auxiliary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-5
Available Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-6
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-7
Layout DimensionsStandard Metal-Clad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-9
Layout DimensionsArc-Resistant Metal-Clad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-13
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Medium Voltage Vacuum Breaker
Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16495
Section 26 36 23.21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Medium Voltage Transfer Switch

Conforming to UL 1008A
21
12.0-2 Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage

Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switch (VCP-W-ATC)
November 2013
Sheet 12 002
General Description
i
ii
Reliability and Control with

Vacuum Technology and
Microprocessor-Based Logic
Metal-Clad
Standard Control Features
The metal-clad switchgear with

drawout vacuum circuit breakers used
for medium voltage transfer switch is
designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable
standards of:
Lights:
Normal position
Emergency position
Normal source available
Emergency source available
Undervoltage/overvoltage,
underfrequency/overfrequency
sensing on Source 1
Undervoltage/overvoltage,
underfrequency/overfrequency
sensing on Source 2
Six timers:
TDNE = Time Delay Normal
to Emergency
TDEN = Time Delay Emergency
to Normal
TDES = Time Delay Engine Start
TDEC = Time Delay Engine
Cooldown
TDEF = Time Delay Emergency
Failure
TDN = Time Delay Neutral
7
Medium Voltage Vacuum
Breaker Transfer Switch
8
9
10
11
Eatons Electrical Sector is an innovator

of low and medium voltage manual
transfer switches and has expanded
these capabilities into medium voltage
automatic transfer switches (MV ATS)
conforming to UL 1008A that combine
proven vacuum technology and microprocessor-based logic.
12
Why Use Vacuum Circuit Breakers

Instead of Load Interrupter
Switches for Automatic Transfer?
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Vacuum circuit breakers are suitable

for multiple switching (500010,000
or even more) operations between
sources involved in automatic
transfer system. Duty cycle of load
interrupter switch is limited (5 to 50
operations) by ANSI C37.22
Vacuum circuit breakers are rated for
both load current switching as well
as interrupting fault currents, where
as the load interrupter switches are
rated for load current switching only
Vacuum circuit breakers allow use of
various relay schemes (for example,
phase and ground overcurrent,
under and overvoltage, under and
overfrequency, directional overcurrent, directional power, differential,
etc.) for protection and coordination
as desired for a given application.
Relaying schemes are either not
possible or very limited when using
load interrupter switches
Drawout circuit breakers are easily
maintainable
UL 1008A dated March 2012

standard for medium voltage
transfer switches
IEEE C37.20.2 dated 1999
standard for metal-clad switchgear
ANSI C37.55 dated 2002
conformance test procedures
NEMA SG-5power switchgear
assemblies
CSA C22.2 No. 31-04 dated
January 2004CSA standard for
switchgear assemblies
ANSI and IEEE standards for high
voltage AC circuit breakers
IEEE C37.04-1999, ANSI C37.06-2000
and 2009, and IEEE C37.09-1979
and 2009
Available as an optionType 2B
arc-resistant design conforming to
IEEE C37.20.7 dated 2007, guide for
testing metal-enclosed switchgear
for internal arcing faults
The MV ATS style is perfect for any

emergency or backup system and
suitable for service entrance use. It
provides reliable automatic transfer
to standby power when:
The normal power source fails
Peak shaving is used
The power source is unreliable
Backup power is mandated by code
or local regulations
Eaton manufactures all MV ATS basic

components and provides one year full
warranty, eliminating problems that
can arise with multiple warranties for a
single piece of equipment. Assembly
and manufacturing is completed in
ISO certified facilities.
Seismic Qualified
Eatons medium voltage circuit
breaker transfer switch assemblies
are seismically tested or qualified by
analysis based on actual testing done
on similar equipment, to exceed the
requirements based upon 2009 IBC
parameters and CBC 2010.
Programmable engine test mode

and test run timer
Source 1 availableone Form C
contact
Source 2 availableone Form C
contact
Communication capability via
PowerNet
Real-time clock and date
Phase reversal on Source 2
Phase reversal on Source 1
Go to Emergency feature
Preferred source selector for use on
systems comprised of utility/utility
or utility/generator
Overcurrent lockout feature
Plant Exerciser with fail-safe feature
Automatic or manual
pushbutton re-transfer selection
PT ratio set points
Closed Transition with Default to
In-Phase Transition with Default to
Time Delay Neutral (for closed
transition switches only)
Additional Options
Overcurrent protection:
Normal
Emergency
Eatons Power Xpert
and IQ metering: normal and
emergency
CA08104001E
November 2013

12.0-3
Sheet 12 003
General Description
Space heater
Closed transition with sync check
Partial discharge InsulGard relay
Communications:
INCOM
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet)
Circuit Breaker Switches

Switching is provided by Eatons
VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers in
ANSI voltages of 5 and 15 kV.
Circuit breaker switches (CBS) are
horizontal drawout types up to 15 kV.
The CBS includes five major components: vacuum interrupter pole units,
stored energy mechanism, push rod
assembly, primary disconnecting contacts, and removable glass polyester
insulating barriers.
Vacuum Interrupters
Each CBS includes three vacuum
interrupters, separately mounted in
a self-contained, self-aligning pole
unit that is easily removed. A direct
reading contact erosion indicator
is clearly visible when the CBS is
withdrawn from the compartment.
Each vacuum interrupter pole unit is
mounted on glass polyester supports
for 5 kV and 15 kV ratings.
The unique, nonsliding current
transfer system from the movable
vacuum interrupter stem to the CBS
consists of a series of tin-plated, high
conductivity copper leaf conductors.
The conductors are swaged onto the
movable vacuum interrupter stem
and provide:
Improved current flow because the
multi-point contact offers very low
electrical resistance
No required maintenance because
the current transfer from the
movable stem to the CBS primary
conductor is a nonsliding and
nonrolling design
Longer vacuum interrupter life
Operation
Operation is by a motor-charged
stored energy spring mechanism
charged by a universal electric motor,
or a manual levering tool in an emergency. The stored energy mechanism
is a true mechanically and electrically
trip-free design, meaning that while
holding a mechanical trip command,
the breaker contacts will not close or
touch while receiving an electrical or
mechanical close command.
CA08104001E
Each CBS is electrically operated by

these control voltages: 120 Vac close
and ac capacitor trip, or 48 Vdc, 125
Vdc or 250 Vdc. AC control voltage is
derived from potential transformers
connected in the line side of each CBS.
The DC control voltage is provided by
the user.
Controls and indicators are functionally
grouped on the front control panel and
include: closing spring status, close
and trip button, operation counter,
contact status indicators and a T
handle latch (located at the bottom of
the control panel). Each CBS includes
a control switch, and red and green
lights to indicate the CBS contact
position.
Contacts
Primary disconnects are silver-plated
copper. Secondary contacts are silverplated and automatically engage in
the CBS operating position. They can
be manually engaged in the CBS
test position.
Safety
Double deadfront shields isolate the
operator from high voltage when the
CBS is energized. The CBS can be
connected or disconnected with the
compartment door closed by a
manually operated levering device.
Safety interlocks provide for the
mechanism to be held mechanically
trip-free during racking. Closing
springs will discharge automatically
when the CBS is being withdrawn.
Maintenance
The stored energy mechanism and
control components are easily accessible and can be inspected by removing
the front panel. Minor maintenance
when required, such as lubricating the
mechanism and accessing the control
components, is simplified.
Operation Sequence
Transfer is initiated by Eatons ATC
controller microprocessor-based logic
door mounted device.
Two ATC controller models, Open or
Closed Transition, are available.
Both models are identical except that
the closed transition ATC controller
will not initiate the transfer until both
power sources are synchronized in
voltage, frequency and phase angle.
If a power source is lost, the closed
transition ATC controller will operate
in the open mode.
ATC controller capabilities include:
Continuous monitoring of all three

phases of all loads and voltage on
the source and bus
Generator testing under load
Simplified, custom programming
on the faceplate keypad to meet
specific user requirements. There
are no DIP switches to set
Visual status indications of both
sources and the load.
Easy-to-use:
At-a-glance overview of the MV
ATS status and parameters and
key diagnostic data
Real-time values for volts and
frequency can be viewed on the
LED display plus the power
source in use
Displays historical information
including Source 1 and Source 2
run time, available time, and
connected time, load energized
time, number of transfers, and the
date, time and reason for the last
16 transfers
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATC-600 Open Transition Transfer

When the system is operating from the
normal source, the ATC-600 controller
indicates real-time values for volts
and frequency on the front panel LED
display with an indication of the power
source in use. The ATC-600 controller
continuously monitors either singlephase or three-phase voltages for
Source 1, Source 2 and the load. The
ATC-600 controller allows system configuration selection for Source 1/
Source 2 as Utility/Generator, or Dual
Generator, or Dual Utility.
When Source 1 voltage or frequency
is detected to be below userprogrammed set points, transfer to
Source 2 is initiated. The transfer
occurs when Source 2 voltage and
frequency are detected to be within
programmed parameters.
While the load is connected to Source 2,
the ATC-600 controller continues to
monitor Source 1. When Source 1
voltage and frequency return to within
programmed parameters of Source 1,
and after a programmed time delay, load
transfer back to Source 1 is initiated.
The load transfer back to Source 1 is
open type because the Source 2 circuit
breaker switch is opened first after
which the Source 1 circuit breaker
switch is closed.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

November 2013
Sheet 12 004
General Descriptions
ATC Controller
Bus and Bus Insulation
Protective Relays
Bus
Customer-requested protective relays

can be provided and installed in the
MV ATS. Refer to Tab 4.
ii
The main bus is copper. A set of either

1200A or 2000A main bus is provided
with provisions for future extension.
Bolted bus connections are silverplated for positive contact and low
resistance. Each joint is insulated
with easily installed boots. The bus
is braced to withstand fault currents
equal to the close and latch rating of
the circuit breakers. All bus, bus supports and connections will withstand
stresses produced by currents equal
to the momentary ratings of the circuit
breakers.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
ATC-800
ATC-800 Closed Transition Transfer

When the system is operating from
the normal source, Eatons ATC-800
controller indicates real-time values for
volts and frequency on the front panel
LED display with an indication of the
power source in use. The ATC-800
controller continuously monitors either
single-phase or three-phase voltages
for Source 1, Source 2 and the load.
The ATC-800 controller allows system
configuration selection for Source 1/
Source 2 as Utility/Generator, or Dual
Generator, or Dual Utility.
The ATC-800 controller provides for
selection of closed transition enabled
or disabled.
When enabled, it is possible for load
to be transferred from Source 1 to
Source 2 without interruption of power
to the load when both sources are
available. The source paralleling
during load transfer is less than
100 milliseconds.
When disabled, the two sources
cannot operate in parallel.
When Source 1 voltage or frequency
is detected to be below the userprogrammed set points, transfer to
Source 2 is initiated. The transfer
occurs when Source 2 voltage and
frequency are detected to be within
the programmed parameters.
While the load is connected to Source
2, the ATC-800 controller continues to
monitor Source 1. When Source 1
frequency and voltage return to within
programmed limits of Source 1, and
after a programmed time delay, the
load is transferred back to Source 1.
When the closed transition mode is
enabled, Source 1 is closed first, then
Source 2 is opened without power
interruption to the load. When in the
disabled mode, Source 2 is opened
first and then Source 1 is closed.
Temperature rise of the bus and connections conforms to ANSI standards

and is documented by factory testing.
The copper ground bus extends the
entire length of the MV ATS. An
optional fully rated neutral bus
(insulated or noninsulated) extends
the entire length of the MV ATS.
Bus Insulation
The main bus is insulated with epoxy,
applied in the fluidized bed process.
When applied in this process, the
epoxy is nonhygroscopic, inert, and
track, mold and fungus resistant.
Thermal and electrical performance
is enhanced because the epoxy is
bonded directly to the bus bar conductor, eliminating the air gap between
insulation and conductor. Heat transfer
is greatly improved, resulting in the
bus system running cooler. No air
gap exists for insulation damage or
corona discharge.
The main bus supports are glass
polyester for 5 kV and 15 kV ratings,
except the main bus supports for
63 kA ratings are porcelain.
Terminations and
Secondary Wiring
Eatons MV ATS includes terminal
blocks for secondary wire terminations
plus an inventory of spare terminal
connections. One control circuit
cutout device is provided in each
CBS housing.
Secondary wire is #14 AWG, Type SIS
rated 600 Vac, 90C. The wires terminate on terminal blocks, identified on
marker strips numbered in agreement
with the connection diagrams.
Incoming line and feeder cable lugs
are provided.
Note: See Page 12.0-7 for ATC controller

programming selections and ratings.
Partial Discharge Sensing

and Monitoring
Refer to Tab 5, Section 5.3 for details
of partial discharge sensing and
monitoring option.
Metering
Customer-requested metering can
be provided. Associated instrument
transformers are included.
Current transformers are provided and
wired to shorting-type terminal blocks.
Potential transformers are provided
including primary and secondary
fuses with disconnecting means
for metering.
A choice of Eaton microprocessorbased metering is available, such as
IQ Series or Power Xpert. Refer to
Tab 2.
Enclosure Construction
Metal-clad integrity provides maximum circuit separation and safety
through isolated grounded metal
compartments, complete isolation of
all conductors, and no live parts are
exposed when a door is opened.
Communications
When the ATC controller is provided
with an Eaton IPONI communication
network interface, an MV ATS can be
included on a PowerNet communications network, providing for remote
monitoring and control using a PC.
Outdoor Enclosures
Two outdoor enclosure styles are
available.
Aisleless, mounted on an integral
base frame with a weatherproof
enclosure for field assembly. A
weatherproof door is provided on the
circuit breaker switch drawout side
Sheltered aisle mounted on an integral base frame with a weatherproof
enclosure for field assembly. The
enclosure is extended on the circuit
breaker switch drawout side to form
an operating and/or maintenance
aisle with sufficient space to permit
interchange of circuit breaker
switches. A weatherproof door with
an inside quick release latch mechanism is located at each end of the
inside, even when locked from the
CA08104001E
November 2013

12.0-5
Sheet 12 005
General Description
outside. Interior lights, light switches,
and duplex ground fault receptacles
are provided in the aisle.
Each vertical section is provided with
tubular-type space heaters operated at
half voltage for long life. 500V or 250V
rated heaters are used at 240V or 120V
respectively. Power is furnished from
a control power transformer mounted
in the MV ATS.
As an option, heaters can be wired
to provide temporary heating during
storage.
Auxiliary Equipment
Voltage and Control Power Transformers
Voltage transformers are drawoutdrawer mounted for ratings up to 15 kV.
Up to three voltage transformers can
be mounted in a drawer.
Control power transformers up
to 15 kV, 15 kVA, single-phase are
drawout-drawer mounted.
Drawers are in enclosed auxiliary
compartments and can be withdrawn
on rails for easy inspection, testing
and fuse replacement. When a
drawer is withdrawn, the fuses
are automatically disconnected,
grounded, and primary bus stabs
isolated by glass polyester shutters.
A mechanical interlock is provided so
that the secondary circuit breaker must
be open before the control power
transformer drawer or control power
transformer primary fuse drawer can
be withdrawn.
Ring-type current transformers are
provided with thermal and mechanical
ratings coordinated with the circuit
breakers. Current transformer accuracy
meets ANSI standards.
Standard current transformer location
on the bus side and line side of the
5 kV and 15 kV CBS units provide
front accessibility so that adding or
changing transformers can be accomplished when an Eatons MV ATS is
de-energized without breaking the
high voltage connections and
primary insulation.
Shorting terminal blocks are provided
on each current transformer secondary.
Indoor MV ATS assembly conforming
to UL 1008A can be supplied with
arc-resistant designs and features
conforming to Type-2B accessibility
CA08104001E
that provide arc-resistant protection

on the front, sides and rear of the
equipment in accordance with
IEEE C37.20.7.
Each individual vertical section of the
MV ATS assembly is provided with
integral- and top-mounted pressure
release flaps to facilitate a controlled
upward release of arc-created overpressures, smoke and gasses.
Individual vertical sections are of
a unitized design to allow removal
of a damaged vertical section after
a fault incident, without requiring
the removal of the adjacent
vertical sections.
An enclosed arc chamber with arc duct
exit is provided above the switchgear
for exhaust collection and discharge.
The arc exhaust is vented from the
arc chamber to the exit location via
the arc duct. Arc duct is optional.
Nameplates
External engraved nameplates are
screw mounted on the face of each
MV ATS assembly for each main
and feeder circuit. Nameplates are
laminated plastic with black 0.2-inch
(5.1 mm) high characters on a white
background.
A master nameplate includes MV
ATS designation, voltage and ampere
ratings, short circuit rating, manufacturers name, and shop order number.
Internal engraved nameplates are
screw mounted within the MV ATS
to identify control components such
as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons
and switches.
Eaton MV ATS switches are provided
with all required markings and labels
in accordance with UL 1008A.
Finish
Standard finish, inside and out, is
a thermosetting, polyester powder
paint (ANSI 61 gray) applied electrostatically to all metal parts (steel and
aluminum) that are first precleaned
and phosphatized.
Maintenance tool for manually

charging the circuit breaker closing
spring and manually operating
the shutter
Levering crank for moving the
circuit breaker between test and
connected positions
Test jumper for electrically operating the circuit breaker while out of
the compartment
Lifting yoke for lifting the circuit
breaker on or off compartment rails
Rail extensions and rail clamps
Portable lifting device for lifting the

circuit breaker on or off the rails
Ramp for rolling a circuit breaker
directly onto the floor from the
lower compartment
Test cabinet for testing electrically
operated circuit breakers outside
housing
Dockable transport dolly for moving a
circuit breaker outside of the cabinet
Portable electrical levering device
Integral levering device (refer to
Tab 5, Pages 5.3-5 and 5.3-6)
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Factory Testing
Circuit Breaker Switch Element
Alignment test with master cell to verify all interfaces and interchangeability
Circuit breaker operated over a
range of minimum to maximum
control voltage
One-minute dielectric test
10
Circuit Breaker Switch Housing

Alignment test with master circuit
breaker to verify interfaces
One-minute dielectric test on
primary and secondary circuits
Operational sequence test to
verify operation of wiring, relays
and other devices
Final inspection and quality check
Three certified copies of the factory

test reports are provided.
Test Witnessing
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
This finish provides excellent mechanical strength and scratch resistance,

resists chalking caused by the suns
ultraviolet rays, and meets the salt
spray requirements of ASTM B-117.
As an option, all factory tests can

be witnessed by the customer or
customer representative.
18
Installation
19
Accessories
Complete installation, startup, testing

and long-term maintenance is available from Eatons Electrical Services
& Systems (EESS).
20
Provided for testing, inspection,

maintenance and operation.
21

November 2013
Sheet 12 006
Available Ratings
Table 12.0-1. Medium Voltage Automatic Transfer Switch, Model VCP-W-ATC, Ratings per IEEE C37.20.2 and UL 1008A
Types and Ratings of Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Ratings per IEEE C37.20.2-1999 (Metal-Clad, Non-Arc Resistant)
OptionalRatings per IEEE C37.20.7
Breaker Type
Insulation Level
Enclosure Internal Arc Withstand
4.76
5
6
7
8.25
15
8
9
10

11
kV peak
Amperes
2.7 *K*I 1.6 *K* I

(Ref. only)
kA rms
Sym
kA Crest
kA rms
Asym
Isc
2.6*Isc
kA rms
Sym
kA peak
Sec
UL 1008A Operating Duty Class

(Class A = 2000 Operations)
Rated Main Bus

Continuous Current
kV rms
K*I
Rated Arc ShortCircuit Withstand

Current
Rated Arc Duration
Lightning Impulse
Withstand Voltage
[LIWV] (BIL)
Based on
60 Hz
Rated Momentary
Withstand (10 cycle)
[167 ms]
Accessibility Type
Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage,
60 Hz, 1 Minute
kA rms
sym
kV rms
Rated Interrupting
Time in Cycles
Rated Voltage
Range Factor
K

at Rated Maximum Voltage
I
ii
Rated Short Time Short-Circuit

Current Withstand (2-Second)
50 VCP-W 25
25
19
60
1200, 2000
25
68
40
2B
25
65
0.5
50 VCP-W 40
40
19
60
1200, 2000
40
108
64
2B
40
104
0.5
50 VCP-W 50
50
19
60
1200, 2000
50
135
80
2B
50
130
0.5
50 VCP-W 250
29
1.24
19
60
1200, 2000
36
97
58
2B
36
93.6
0.5
50 VCP-W 350
41
1.19
19
60
1200, 2000
49
132
78
2B
49
127.4
0.5
75 VCP-W 40
40
36
95
1200, 2000
40
111
66
2B
40
104
0.5
75 VCP-W 50
50
36
95
1200, 2000
50
135
80
2B
50
130
0.5
75 VCP-W 500
33
1.25
36
95
1200, 2000
41
111
66
2B
41
106.6
0.5
150 VCP-W 25
25
36
95
1200, 2000
25
68
40
2B
25
65
0.5
150 VCP-W 40
40
36
95
1200, 2000
40
108
64
2B
40
104
0.5
150 VCP-W 50
50
36
95
1200, 2000
50
135
80
2B
50
130
0.5
150 VCP-W 500
18
1.3
36
95
1200, 2000
23
62
37
2B
23
59.8
0.5
150 VCP-W 750
28
1.3
36
95
1200, 2000
36
97
58
2B
36
93.6
0.5
150 VCP-W 1000 37
1.3
36
95
1200, 2000
48
130
77
2B
48
124.8
0.5
Circuit breakers are rated to standards for HV AC circuit breakersANSI/IEEE C37.04, C37.06 and C37.09.
Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices may limit the duration to a value less
than 2 seconds.
These values exceed 2.6*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999 and ANSI C37.06-2000.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
12.0-7
Sheet 12 007
Technical Data
Table 12.0-2. ATC Controller Programming Selections
Parameters
Set Points
ATC Controller
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ii
Time delay normal to emergency

Time delay emergency to normal
Time delay engine cool-off
0 to 1800 seconds
0 to 1800 seconds
0 to 1800 seconds
Time delay engine start

Time delay neutral
0 to 120 seconds
0 to 120 Seconds or based on load voltage decay
(10 to 30% of nominal voltage)
Closed
Closed transition frequency differential
Closed transition voltage deviation
Enabled or disabled
0.0 to 0.3 Hz
1 to 5% (voltage)
Single-phase
In-phase frequency differential
Synchronized time
Enabled or disabled
0.0 to 3.0 Hz
1 to 60 minutes
Load sequencing
Pretransfer
Signal device
0 to 10 devices
0 to 20 seconds
(Up to 10 devices)
Plant exerciser
Preferred source selector
Sensing
System selection
Load or no load transfer (selectable)

Source 1 or source 2 or none
Three-phase or single-phase
Utility/generator or utility/utility or generator/generator
Optional parameters.
Table 12.0-3. ATC Controller Ratings

Input control power range
65 Vac rms to 160 Vac rms, 50/60 Hz
Voltage measurements of:
Voltage measurement range

Voltage measurement accuracy
Frequency measurement for:
Source 1 VAB
Source 1 VBC
Source 1 VCA
0 to 790 Vac rms, 50/60 Hz
2% of nominal range
Source 1 and source 2
Frequency measurement range

Frequency measurement accuracy
Undervoltage sensing
40 Hz to 60 Hz
0.1 Hz
Source 1 and source 2
Undervoltage dropout range

Overvoltage dropout range
Underfrequency dropout range
Overfrequency dropout range
50 to 90% of nominal range

105 to 120% of nominal voltage
90 to 100% of nominal frequency
100 to 120% of nominal frequency
Source 2 VAB
Source 2 VBC
Source 2 VCA
7
Load VAB
Load VBC
Load VCA
Contact Outputs
Two Form A contacts for generator start
5A, 250 Vac

5A, 30 Vdc
Four Form A contacts for control functions
10A, 250 Vac

10A, 30 Vdc
Form C contacts for control functions
10A, 250 Vac

10A, 30 Vdc
Front Panel Indications

Mode
Automatic
Test
Program
LED Lights
Source 1 available: amber
Source 1 connected: green
Source 1 preferred: red
Load energized: red
LED Display
History information
Set points
Real-time clock
Blinking LED indicates automatic operation

Illuminated LED indicates unit is in the test mode
Illuminated LED indicates unit is in the program mode
Blinking LED indicates the user is viewing set points in the program mode
Source 2 available: amber
Source 2 connected: green
Source 2 preferred: red
Environmental Temperature Range

Operation
Storage
20C to +70C
30C to +85C
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Optional.
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 12 008
Technical Data
Typical One-Line Diagram
ii
Main Bus
Heaters
__ k VA
1-Phase CPT
Optional
Lights
Surge
Arresters
Cable Lugs
GFCI Receptacle
(Optional)
Other Loads
To Load
3
Automatic
Transfer
Controller
4
5
VCP-W
52-1 Circuit Breaker
Digitrip
3010
CTs
(3)
(Dual Powered)
VCP-W
52-2 Circuit Breaker
Breaker #1
Control Power
____ A
ATC-600
or
ATC-800
____ A
(When Required)
Power
Quality Meter
CTs
____ :5
Digitrip
3010
(3)
(Dual Powered)
Breaker #2
Control Power
(When Required)
Power
Quality Meter
8
VTs (2 or 3)
VTs (2 or 3)
9
10
11
Cable Lugs
Surge
Arresters
Cable Lugs
(Optional)
Surge
Arresters
(Optional)
12
Source 1
13
Source 2
Figure 12.0-1. Typical Medium Voltage Automatic Transfer Switch
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
12.0-9
Sheet 12 009
Layout DimensionsStandard Metal-Clad
Layout Dimensions in Inches (mm)Standard Metal-Clad
i
Power Cable Entrance

7.00
(177.8)
ii
72.00
(1828.8)
72.00
(1828.8)
1
2
18.50
(469.9)
C
L
If Bottom Entry
If Top Entry
C
L
C
L
C
L
Main 1 Main 2 Load (Top or

96.25
Main 2 Main 1 Cables Bottom) (2444.8)
Load
Cables
101.25
(2571.8)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
4
5
6
7
Floor Plan
Floor Plan
8
9
Line 1 VTs
Line 1 VTs
10
Main 1
Breaker
(1200A)
Main 1
Breaker
(1200A)
11
115.00
(2921.0)
95.00
(2413.0)
Main 2
Breaker
(1200A)
Bus CPT
(Optional)
12
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Main 2
Breaker
(1200A)
13
Line 2 VTs
Line 2 VTs
14
Shipping Group
15
Front Elevation
Front Elevation
16
Figure 12.0-2. Indoor 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers
Figure 12.0-3. Outdoor Aisleless 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers
Circuit breakers are packaged and shipped separately.
17
Table 12.0-4. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Indoor
4400 (1998)
350575 (159261)
Outdoor aisleless
5600 (2542)
350575 (159261)
Table 12.0-5. Minimum Recommended Clearances in Inches (mm)

Equipment
Type
Front
Side
Indoor
70.00 (1778.0)
32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor aisleless
70.00 (1778.0)
32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
18
Rear
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 12 010

ii
72.00
(1828.8)
1
2
Line 1 VTs
C
L
C
L
Main 1
Breaker
(1200A)
Load
Cables
120.00
(3048.0)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
Bus CPT
169.38
(4302.3)
(Optional)
Main 2
Breaker
(1200A)
Line 2 VTs
38.00
(965.2)
7
8
Shipping Group
Aisle
72.00
(1828.8)
Front Elevation
9
38.00
(965.2)
10
Floor Plan
11
Figure 12.0-4. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers

12
13
Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Equipment
Type
Front
Side
Outdoor sheltered aisle
8000 (3632)
350575 (159261)
N/A
38.00 (965.2) 36.00 (914.4)
Rear
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
12.0-11
Sheet 12 011
i

7.00
(177.7)
108.00
(2743.2)
ii
108.00
(2743.2)
1
2
C
L
C
L
CL
C
L
Load
Cables
CL
CL
Load
Cables
96.25
(2444.8)
3
101.25
(2571.8)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
6
7
Floor Plan
Floor Plan
9
Line VTs
Line VTs
Line VTs
Line VTs
10
11
95.00
(2413.0)
Main
Breaker
(2000A)
115.00
(2921.0)
Main
Breaker
(2000A)
Main
Breaker
(2000A)
Bus CPT
13
Main
Breaker
(2000A)
Bus CPT
(Optional)
12
14
(Optional)
15
Shipping Group
Shipping Group
Front Elevation
16
Front Elevation
Figure 12.0-5. Indoor 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers
Figure 12.0-6. Outdoor Aisleless 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers
Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Equipment
Type
Front
Side
Rear
Indoor
6900 (3133)
410575 (186261)
Indoor
70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor aisleless
8700 (3950)
410575 (186261)
Outdoor aisleless
70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 12 012

ii
108.00
(2743.2)
1
2
Line VTs
CL
CL
Line VTs
CL
3
Load
Cables
120.00
(3048.0)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
169.38
(4302.3)
Main
Breaker
(2000A)
Main
Breaker
(2000A)
Bus CPT
(Optional)
38.00
(965.2)
7
Shipping Group
72.00
(1828.8)
Aisle
8
9
Front Elevation
38.00
(965.2)
Floor Plan
10
Figure 12.0-7. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers
11
12
13
Aisles shipped separately.

Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Equipment
Type
Front
Side
12,300 (5584)
410575 (186261)
N/A
38.00 (965.2) 36.00 (914.4)
Rear
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
12.0-13
Sheet 12 013
Layout DimensionsArc-Resistant Metal-Clad
Layout Dimensions in Inches (mm)Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad

Rear Extension
for Top
Entry Cables
Only

75.00
(1905.0)
(Top
Entry)
Main 2 Main 1
Rear Extension
for Top
Entry Cables
Only

111.00
(2819.4)
ii
1
12.00
(304.8)
(Top
Entry)
12.00
(304.8)
2
109.50
(2781.3)
(Top
Entry
Cables)
(Bottom
Entry)
C
L
C
L
Main 1 Main 2
Load
Cables
(Bottom
Entry)
C
L
C
L
C
L
3
4
Load
Cables
96.25
(2444.8)
(Bottom
Entry
Cables)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
109.50
(2781.3)
(Top
Entry
Cables)
96.25
(2444.8)
(Bottom
Entry
Cables)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
5
6
7
Floor Plan
Floor Plan
32.00
(812.8)
Arc Exhaust Plenum
8
32.00
(812.8)
Arc Exhaust Plenum
9
10
Main 1
Breaker
(1200A)
Line 1 VTs
Line 1 VTs
Line 2 VTs
11
95.00
(2413.0)
Main 2
Breaker
(1200A)
95.00
(2413.0)
Main 1
Breaker
(1200 or
2000A)
Line 2 VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Main 2
Breaker
(1200 or
2000A)
12
13
14
Shipping Group
Shipping Group
15
Front Elevation
Front Elevation
Figure 12.0-8. Indoor 5/15 kV, Arc-Resistant MV ATS

without Optional CPT
Figure 12.0-9. Indoor 5/15 kV, Arc-Resistant MV ATS

with Optional CPT

Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
1200A
Circuit
Breaker
2000A
1200A
2000A
Indoor Figure 12.0-8
6400
Indoor Figure 12.0-9
8950
9250
Top Entry Cables

Figure 12.0-8, add
425
Top Entry Cables

Figure 12.0-9, add
600
725
Equipment
Type
Front
Indoor
70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
Refer to Table 5.5-2 for circuit breaker weights.
CA08104001E
16
Side
Rear
17
18
19
20
21

November 2013
Sheet 12 014
Layout DimensionsArc-Resistant Metal-Clad
Layout Dimensions in Inches (mm)Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad

Arc exhaust plenum and arc duct exit for 5 and 15 kV metal-clad
switchgearrefer to Tab 5, Pages 5.5-37, 5.5-38 and 5.5-39.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide
13.0-A
September 2011
Sheet 13 001
Transformer Product SelectorLiquid-Filled Types

Table 13.0-1A. Transformer Product Selector
Transformer
Maximum Voltage
Available
Primary Secondary kVA
CAG
Tab
Types
Application
Considerations
69 kV
13
Mineral OilTypical outdoor

installation.
Transformer is part of a close-coupled

assembly that includes both primary
and secondary equipment.
ii
Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled

Primary Unit
Substation
(Steps down
utility service
voltage)
34.5 kV
500 kVA
20 MVA
SiliconeApplied where
flammability is a concern.
Vegetable OilSpecified
where flammability and
clean-up are a concern.
Secondary
34.5 kV
Unit Substation
(Provides
secondary
system voltage)
600V
300 kVA
3750 kVA
High short-circuit strength.

Sealed tank design is impervious to
the environment.
2
3
14
4
5
6
Pad-Mounted TransformerLiquid-Filled
34.5 kV
5 kV
45 kVA
5 MVA
17

installation.
Stand-alone unit servicing underground distribution loads such as

shopping centers, schools, industrial
and institutional facilities.
Tamper-resistant compartmentalization allows unit to be installed in

open access applications.
8
9
10
Network Transformer (Spot Networks)Liquid-Filled

Secondary
Spot Network
34.5 kV
480V
500 kVA
3000 kVA
18

installation.
Network transformers are part of

a commercial spot network system
where multiple transformer units feed
large potential loads in parallel, such
as four 2500 kVA units feeding 480/277
volt loads. Liquid network transformers
have fluid-filled primary mag-break
integral switch and network protectors
field-mounted on the secondary flange
with safety interlocks.
Installations are usually indoors,
and multiple primary circuits and
sources that can be paralleled must
exist upstream, usually supplied by
the utility. Government buildings with
high levels of loads at the utilization
voltage merit these systems.
The loads are not adversely affected
by one primary circuit outage, and
may not be affected by two being
down in four transformer spot
network systems.
Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
69 kV
34.5 kV
750 kVA
20 MVA
16
Mineral OilTypical
outdoor installation.
Stand-alone unit servicing underground distribution loads such as

shopping centers, schools, industrial
and institutional facilities.
Tamper-resistant compartmentalization allows unit to be installed in
open access applications.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
13.0-B Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide

September 2011
Sheet 13 002
Transformer Product SelectorDry Types
i
ii
1
Table 13.0-1A. Transformer Product Selector (Continued)

Transformer
Maximum Voltage Available

CAG
Tab
Types
Application
Considerations
34.5 kV
13
VPIVacuum pressure
impregnation with polyester
resin. Used in commercial
construction and industrial
application.
Transformer is part of a
close-coupled assembly
that includes both primary
Unit Substation TransformerDry-Type

Primary Unit
Substation
(Steps down utility
service voltage)
15 kV
500 kVA
10 MVA
VPEVacuum Pressure
Encapsulated with silicon resin.
Applied where MIL-1-24092
spec is required (salt-spray
application).
3
4
Secondary
34.5 kV
Unit Substation
(Provides secondary system voltage)
600V
112.5 kVA 14
3750 kVA
5
6
Network Transformer (Spot Networks)Dry-Type

Secondary
Spot Network
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Cast CoilUses the electrical

and mechanical strength
of epoxy to provide higher
levels of performance and
environmental protection in
high moisture, dust-laden
and chemical environments.
Windings are hermetically
sealed in epoxy.
ResiblocCoils insulated
with epoxy and reinforced
with roving glass fiber. Highly
resistant to short-circuit forces,
severe climate conditions and
cycling loads.
7
8
Explosion resistant, fire

resistant and nonpolluting
to the environment.
34.5 kV
480V
500 kVA
3000 kVA
18
VPIVacuum pressure
impregnation with polyester
resin. Used in commercial
application.
VPEVacuum Pressure
application).
and mechanical strength
of epoxy to provide higher
levels of performance and
environmental protection in
high moisture, dust-laden
and chemical environments.
Windings are hermetically
sealed in epoxy.
cycling loads.
16
Network transformers are

part of a commercial spot
network system where multiple
transformer units feed large
potential loads in parallel, such
as four 2500 kVA units feeding
480/277 volt loads. Dry-type
network transformers do
not have an integral switch.
Network protectors are field
mounted on the secondary
flange, or assembly mounted
in switchgear sections.
Installations are usually
indoors, and multiple primary
circuits and sources that can be
paralleled must exist upstream,
usually supplied by the utility.
Government buildings with
high levels of loads at the
utilization voltage merit
these systems.
The loads are not adversely
affected by one primary
circuit outage, and may not be
affected by two being down
in four transformer spot
network systems.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above
13.0-1
September 2011

Secondary 1000V & Above
Sheet 13 001
CA08104001E
Contents
Primary Liquid-Type Substations
Primary Dry-Type Substations
Dry/Liquid-Type Transformers
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-13
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16312
Section 26 11 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Primary Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
21
13.0-2 Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above

September 2011
Sheet 13 002
General Description
General Description
Definition
ii
A primary unit substation is a

close-coupled assembly consisting
of enclosed primary high voltage
equipment, three-phase power
transformer and enclosed secondary
medium voltage equipment. The
following electrical ratings are typical:
A primary unit substation is defined in

the following standards:
Primary voltage: 6.969 kV

Transformer kVA: 50020,000 kVA
Secondary voltage: 2.4 kV34.5 kV
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Primary unit substations are used to

step down utility distribution voltages
to in-plant distribution voltages.
Primary unit substation transformers
are designed, manufactured and
tested in accordance with applicable
IEEE standards.
Advantages
As a result of locating power
transformers and their close-coupled
equipment as close as possible to
the areas of load concentration, the
secondary distribution cables or
busways are kept to minimum lengths.
This concept has obvious advantages
such as:
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NEMA Standard No. 201-1982

IEEE Standard No. 100-1977
Reduced power losses

Improved voltage regulation
Improved service continuity
Reduced exposure to faults
Increased flexibility
Minimum installation cost
Efficient space utilization
Primary Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
Easier to Specify
Standardization through IEEE
standards results in proven designs
with complete accessory equipment
and features.
Ratings Available
kVAThree-Phase:
6.969 kV (350 kV BIL and below)

50020,000 kVA
Highest Short-Circuit Strength
Frequency:
Highly researched and thoroughly

tested designs provide the short-circuit
strength necessary to withstand the
repeated large short-circuit currents
that are available in modern systems.
Easier Handling and Reduced

Maintenance
Compact designs reduce the cost of
rigging and hauling and require smaller
installation space. Straight-forward
design and simplified accessories
reduce maintenance costs.
Transformer Fluids:
Mineral oil
Silicone fluid
Environmentally friendly fluid
Note: For additional information

about insulating fluids, see Tab 14,
Pages 14.0-314.0-8.
Primary and Secondary Equipment:
Additional advantages of Eatons

unit substations in this unified
approach are:
Single-source responsibility
Complete electrical and mechanical
control over coordination of the
three close-coupled sections
Availability of all switchgear
types as secondaries gives
broad application flexibility
Modern design
Composite assembly retains proven
safety and integrity of each of its
three major parts
60 Hz or 50 Hz
Air terminal chamber (ATC)

Load interrupter switchgear,
Type MVS
Metal-enclosed circuit breaker switchgear, Types MEB, MEF and MSB
Metal-clad circuit breaker
switchgear, Type VacClad-W
MV motor control assemblies,
Type AMPGARD
Cover-mounted bushings (liquid
transformer only)
Medium voltage busway
Note: For additional information about

transformer applications and types of
insulating fluids, see Tab 14.
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

13.0-3
Sheet 13 003
General Description
Standard Features
Liquid-Filled Transformer
i
Coverwelded to tank
Cooling tubes (radiators)
Note: Radiator position and number of

radiators will vary based upon design.
Bolted handhole on cover

Automatic resealing mechanical
pressure relief device
X3
H2

H1
X0
H3
HV bushing, three total, located in

ANSI Segment 2
LV bushing, four total (wye
connected), located in ANSI
Segment 4
ii
X2
X1
Note: HV and LV bushings may be cover

mounted or left/right orientation may be
reversed.
5
6
Top View
Z-bar flange
Lifting loopstwo for lifting

cover only
Lifting hooksfour for lifting

complete unit
Jacking provisions on tank or base

Ground padtwo total
9

Drain valvefor combination

lower filter press connection and
complete drain with sampler
10
11
Base (may be flat or formed)

Control cabinet for alarm lead
termination
Diagram instruction nameplate
with warning nameplate
12
13
De-energized tap changer with

padlock provisions
14
Liquid temperature indicator with

maximum indicating hand
15
Upper valve for upper filter press

connection
Magnetic liquid level gauge
Vacuum pressure gauge with air
test and Sealedaire valve
16
17
Front View
18
Figure 13.0-1. Liquid-Filled Primary Unit Substation Transformer with Wall-Mounted HV
and LV Bushings
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 13 004
Layout Dimensions
Layout Dimensions
Transition Section or Throat
ii
1
D1R
D2R
Secondary
Equipment
Primary
Equipment
DP
DS
Transformer
Center Line
D1F
D2F
6
WP
W1
Figure 13.0-2. Outdoor Liquid-Filled Primary Unit SubstationsPlan View
Table 13.0-1. Outdoor Dimension References
10
11
W1
Radiator position and number of radiators will vary based on design.
Legend:
Equipment
Dimensions
Reference
Transformer
MVC
MVS
ME
MC
W, D
WS, DS
WP, DP, WS, DS
WP, DP, WS, DS
WP, DP, WS, DS
Pages 13.0-6 through 13.0-8

Tab 10, Pages 10.1-24 through 10.1-40
Transition Section or Throat and other Reference Dimensions
12
13
14
15
16
Primary or Secondary
Equipment
D1R
W1
D2F
D2R
MVC
12
21
MVS
ME
MC
25.25
25.25
16.5
20
20
16
25.25
25.25
16.5
27 kV
MVS
ME
MC

35
35

38 kV
MVS
ME
MC
35
5 kV

MVC = Medium Voltage Motor Control,

Type AMPGARD
MVS = Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Switches, Type MVS
ME = Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Breakers, Type MEB, MEF, MSB
MC = Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Breaker
Assemblies, Type VacClad-W
Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Four-Wire

D1F
5 kV
or
15 kV
17
WS
Front
Four-wire connections are not available with MVC equipment.

For three-phase, four-wire, D1F and D2F are 30.25.
For three-phase, four-wire, D1R and D2R are 14.5.
Contact Eaton.
This product is not available for this voltage and configuration.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
13.0-5
Sheet 13 005
Layout Dimensions
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC)
UtilizationLiquid-Filled Transformer
DP
D TX
CL
of Transformer
ii
Air Terminal Chamber
A substation using one or two Air

Terminal Chambers (ATCs) is different
from a substation using close-coupling
on both the primary and secondary
sides. An ATC uses a cable connection
on either the primary side, secondary
side or both, and is placed between
the transformer and the remotely
mounted primary or secondary
equipment.
Transformer
DS
1
2
3
W2
W TX
W1
4
5
Figure 13.0-3. Liquid-Filled Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View

Table 13.0-2. Primary or Secondary ATC or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Voltage
Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase, Four-Wire
kV
W1
DP
W2
DS
5 or 15
27
38
22.00 (558.8)
25.00 (635.0)
35.00 (889.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
22.00 (558.8)
25.00 (635.0)
35.00 (889.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
Note: Minimum ATC widths by kVA are listed in the table above. The width of any ATC can be
expanded to allow for the installation of additional conduits. When calculating the area of the
conduit opening, allow for a 2.00-inch (50.8 mm) lip around the entire perimeter of the ATC.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 13 006
Layout Dimensions
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
For special 55C rise units, bus duct throats and air terminal
chambers, see Notes 2 through 6 at bottom of page for
dimensions that should be added to the table dimensions.
500
750
1000
9
10
11
12
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
4520 (2050) 120 (454)

4750 (2155) 150 (568)
5590 (2536) 170 (644)
92 (2336.8) 56 (1422.4)
92 (2336.8) 56 (1422.4)
92 (2336.8) 59 (1498.6)
56 (1442.4)
56 (1442.4)
59 (1498.6)
1500
7380 (3348) 210 (795)
2000
8890 (4032) 240 (908)
2500 10,060 (4563) 260 (984)
92 (2336.8) 67 (1701.8)
92 (2336.8) 70 (1778.0)
92 (2336.8) 70 (1778.0)
67 (1701.8)
70 (1778.0)
70 (1778.0)
3000 11,110 (5039) 290 (1098) 95 (2413.0) 70 (1778.0)

3750 13,200 (5987) 340 (1287) 95 (2413.0) 73 (1854.2)
5000 18,020 (8174) 620 (2347) 113 (2870.2) 74 (1879.6)
70 (1778.0)
73 (1854.2)
74 (1879.6)
Table 13.0-4. 65C Rise, Oil-Filled

HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
7
8
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)

HV 6900D, 75 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
160 (606)
180 (681)
210 (795)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
56 (1422.4)
59 (1498.6)
65 (1651.0)
2000
8760 (3973)
2500
9940 (4509)
3000 11,650 (5284)
230 (871)
260 (984)
350 (1325)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
68 (1727.2) 114 (2895.6)

68 (1727.2) 125 (3175.0)
70 (1778.0) 127 (3225.8)
13,330 (6046) 390 (1476) 95 (2413.0) 72 (1828.8)

16,640 (7548) 480 (1817) 95 (2413.0) 75 (1905.0)
30,300 (13,744) 1220 (4618) 114 (2895.6) 113 (2870.2)
34,830 (15,799) 1230 (4656) 114 (2895.6) 118 (2997.2)
79 (2006.6)
78 (1981.2)
92 (2336.8)
127 (3225.8)
131 (3327.4)
138 (3505.2)
139 (3530.6)

HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
750
1000
1500
5120 (2322)
5980 (2712)
7280 (3302)
170 (644)
180 (681)
210 (795)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
57 (1447.8) 79 (2006.6)
62 (1574.8) 81 (2057.4)
63 (1600.2) 100 (2540.0)
14
2000
8700 (3946)
2500 10,290 (4667)
3000 11,860 (5380)
230 (871)
270 (1022)
320 (1211)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
65 (1651.0) 108 (2743.2)

70 (1778.0) 114 (2895.6)
73 (1854.2) 127 (3225.8)
16
17
18
19
3750
5000
7500
10,000
13,410 (6083) 360 (1363) 95 (2413.0) 73 (1854.2)

17,030 (7725) 520 (1968) 99 (2514.6) 75 (1905.0)
29,720 (13,481) 1140 (4315) 109 (2768.6) 113 (2870.2)
35,790 (16,234) 1310 (4959) 116 (2946.4) 117 (2971.8)
129 (3276.6)
131 (3327.4)
140 (3556.0)
143 (3632.2)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
5650 (2563)
6400 (2903)
8020 (3638)
220 (833)
220 (833)
250 (946)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
59 (1498.6) 81 (2057.4)
61 (1549.4) 87 (2209.8)
64 (1625.6) 101 (2565.4)
2000
9500 (4309)
2500 10,550 (4785)
3000 12,000 (5443)
280 (1060)
300 (1136)
330 (1249)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
68 (1727.2) 101 (2565.4)

70 (1778.0) 107 (2717.8)
73 (1854.2) 127 (3225.8)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,350 (6509) 450 (1703) 95 (2413.0)

19,110 (8668) 700 (2650) 117 (2971.8)
30,880 (14,007) 1210 (4580) 117 (2971.8)
39,080 (17,726) 1600 (6057) 124 (3149.6)
73 (1854.2)
74 (1879.6)
102 (2590.8)
106 (2692.4)
128 (3251.2)
129 (3276.6)
140 (3556.0)
145 (3683.0)

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
5660 (2567)
6640 (3012)
8000 (3629)
210 (795)
230 (871)
250 (946)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
58 (1473.2)
62 (1574.8)
64 (1625.6)
83 (2108.2)
87 (2209.8)
107 (2717.8)
2000
9350 (4241)
2500 10,860 (4926)
3000 12,400 (5625)
290 (1098)
310 (1173)
340 (1287)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
66 (1676.4)
71 (1803.4)
73 (1854.2)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
130 (3302.0)
14,500 (6577) 430 (1628) 95 (2413.0)

74 (1879.6)
19,510 (8850) 720 (2725) 118 (2997.2) 74 (1879.6)
30,270 (13,730) 1120 (4240) 118 (2997.2) 101 (2565.4)
38,140 (17,300) 1500 (5678) 124 (3149.6) 105 (2667.0)
130 (3302.0)
132 (3352.8)
143 (3632.2)
146 (3708.4)
3750
5000
7500
10,000

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 12470Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
13
15
750
1000
1500
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
4840 (2195)
5720 (2595)
7370 (3343)
3750
5000
7500
10,000

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
6630 (3007)
7510 (3406)
9040 (4100)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
290 (1098)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
65 (1657.0)
66 (1676.4)
69 (1752.6)
64 (1625.6)
78 (1981.2)
88 (2235.2)
2000 10,110 (4586)

2500 11,670 (5788)
3000 12,760 (5793)
290 (1098)
330 (1249)
350 (1325)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
70 (1778.0)
73 (1854.2)
74 (1879.6)
96 (2438.4)
106 (2692.4)
130 (3302.0)
15,280 (6931) 440 (1666) 95 (2413.0) 75 (1905.0)

19,370 (8786) 650 (2461) 107 (2717.8) 76 (1930.4)
30,850 (13,993) 1180 (4467) 114 (2895.6) 100 (2540.0)
38,320 (17,382) 1450 (5489) 122 (3098.8) 104 (2641.6)
133 (3378.2)
136 (3454.4)
139 (3530.6)
143 (3632.2)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
Notes: 1. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION.

2. For 55C units, add 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) to W
dimension and 10 in (254.0 mm) to D dimension.
3. Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) to W dimension for each
bus duct throat.
15 kV air terminal chamber.
34.5 kV air terminal chamber.
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
13.0-7
Sheet 13 007
Layout Dimensions
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Table 13.0-12. 65C Rise,

Silicone/Environmentally Friendly Fluid
HV 6900D, 75 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)

Height
Width
Depth
750
1000
1500
4930 (2236)
5940 (2694)
7690 (3488)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
160 (606)
180 (681)
220 (833)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
48 (1219.2)
52 (1320.8)
59 (1498.6)
76 (1930.4)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
Depth
7000 (3175)
7720 (3502)
9880 (4481)
330 (1249) 115 (2921.0)

350 (1325) 115 (2921.0)
380 (1438) 115 (2921.0)
67 (1701.8)
67 (1701.8)
69 (1752.6)
66 (1676.4)
79 (2006.6)
98 (2489.2)
2000
9270 (4205)
2500 10,630 (4822)
3000 12,280 (5570)
250 (946) 87 (2209.8)

280 (1060) 87 (2209.8)
340 (1287) 87 (2209.8)
62 (1574.8)
62 (1574.8)
63 (1600.2)
107 (2717.8)
112 (2844.8)
121 (3073.4)
2000 11,300 (5126)

2500 12,880 (5842)
3000 13,760 (6241)
410 (1552) 115 (2921.0)

450 (1703) 115 (2921.0)
460 (1741) 115 (2921.0)
71 (1803.4) 112 (2844.8)

71 (1803.4) 122 (3098.8)
72 (1828.8) 130 (3302.0)
3750 14,540 (8446)

5000 18,620 (8453)
380 (1438) 87 (2209.8)

580 (2196) 98 (2489.2)
67 (1701.8)
68 (1727.2)
122 (3098.8)
123 (3124.2)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,030 (7271)
520 (1968)
19,780 (8972)
660 (2498)
30,270 (13,730) 1070 (4050)
39,290 (17,822) 1480 (5602)
115 (2921.0) 85 (2159.0) 136 (3454.4)

117 (2971.8) 100 (2540.0) 138 (3505.2)
129 (3276.6) 124 (3149.6) 138 (3505.2)
136 (3454.4) 127 (3225.8) 140 (3556.0)
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
7230 (3279)
8040 (3647)
9920 (4500)
340 (1287) 115 (2921.0)

360 (1363) 115 (2921.0)
390 (1476) 115 (2921.0)
68 (1727.2)
68 (1727.2)
69 (1752.6)
2000 11,700 (5307)

2500 13,120 (5351)
3000 14,400 (6532)
430 (1628) 115 (2921.0)

460 (1741) 115 (2921.0)
500 (1893) 115 (2921.0)
71 (1803.4) 116 (2946.4)

73 (1854.2) 124 (3149.6)
76 (1930.4) 128 (3251.2)
750
1000
1500
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,210 (7353)
540 (2044)
20,490 (9294)
740 (2801)
31,470 (14,275) 1190 (4505)
36,390 (16,506) 1190 (4505)
115 (2921.0) 77 (1955.8)

124 (3149.6) 95 (2413.0)
133 (3378.2) 122 (3098.8)
132 (3352.8) 125 (3175.0)
67 (1701.8)
80 (2032.0)
94 (2387.6)
136 (3454.4)
139 (3530.6)
140 (3556.0)
145 (3683.0)

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 13800Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
2000
9270 (4205)
2500 10,510 (4767)
3000 12,100 (5488)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
2000 12,210 (5538)

2500 13,600 (6169)
3000 14,990 (6799)
450 (1703) 115 (2921.0)

470 (1779) 115 (2921.0)
510 (1931) 115 (2921.0)
72 (1828.8) 108 (2743.2)

74 (1879.6) 109 (2768.6)
77 (1955.8) 125 (3175.0)
115 (2921.0) 77 (1955.8)

122 (3098.8) 94 (2387.6)
125 (3175.0) 123 (3124.2)
135 (3429.0) 124 (3149.6)
63 (1600.2)
70 (1778.0)
93 (2362.2)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
48 (1219.2) 79 (2006.6)
53 (1346.2) 82 (2082.8)
55 (1397.0) 116 (2946.4)
250 (946)
270 (1022)
310 (1173)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
59 (1498.6) 118 (2997.2)

61 (1549.4) 119 (3022.6)
65 (1651.0) 119 (3022.6)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
137 (3479.8)
138 (3505.2)
139 (3530.6)
148 (3759.2)
2000
9080 (4119)
2500 11,180 (5071)
3000 12,470 (5656)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
121 (3073.4)
122 (3098.8)
131 (3327.4)
131 (3327.4)
9
10
11

Height
Width
Depth
180 (681)
190 (719)
220 (833)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
49 (1244.6) 79 (2006.6)
51 (1295.4) 82 (2082.8)
56 (1422.4) 116 (2946.4)
250 (946)
290 (1098)
310 (1173)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
59 (1498.6) 118 (2997.2)

64 (1625.6) 119 (3022.6)
66 (1676.4) 115 (2921.0)
14,590 (6618)
360 (1363) 87 (2209.8) 68 (1727.2)
18,330 (8314)
540 (2044) 93 (2362.2) 68 (1727.2)
31,330 (14,211) 970 (3672) 98 (2489.2) 111 (2819.4)
39,050 (17,713) 1230 (4656) 101 (2565.4) 114 (2895.6)

dimension and 10 inches (254.0 mm) to D dimension.
bus duct throat.
160 (606)
180 (681)
220 (833)
14,380 (6523)
390 (1476) 87 (2209.8) 65 (1651.0)
18,490 (8387)
560 (2120) 97 (2463.8) 68 (1727.2)
32,180 (14,597) 1020 (3861) 98 (2489.2) 112 (2844.8)
46,580 (21,128) 1760 (6662) 119 (3022.6) 120 (3048.0)
5340 (2422)
6120 (2776)
7660 (3475)

HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
750
1000
1500
410 (1552) 115 (2921.0)

390 (1476) 115 (2921.0)
410 (1552) 115 (2921.0)
16,590 (7585)
540 (2044)
20,480 (9290)
710 (2688)
32,220 (14,615) 1050 (3975)
38,460 (17,445) 1350 (5110)
5010 (2272)
6090 (2762)
7730 (3506)
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
9110 (4132)
1000
9370 (4250)
1500 10,760 (4881)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
ii
121 (3073.4)
122 (3098.8)
131 (3327.4)
131 (3327.4)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 13 008
Layout Dimensions
i
ii
1
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)

Height
Width
Depth
5970 (2708)
6820 (3093)
8710 (3951)
230 (871)
240 (908)
280 (1060)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
52 (1320.8)
54 (1371.6)
57 (1447.8)
2000 10,140 (4599)

2500 11,890 (5393)
3000 13,480 (6114)
310 (1173)
338 (1279)
380 (1438)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
58 (1473.2) 110 (2794.0)

62 (1574.8) 121 (3073.4)
66 (1676.4) 124 (3149.6)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,820 (7176)
440 (1666) 87 (2209.8) 68 (1727.2)
19,250 (8732)
540 (2044) 87 (2209.8) 70 (1778.0)
32,700 (14,832) 1090 (4126) 100 (2540.0) 99 (2514.6)
50,160 (22,752) 2200 (8328) 120 (3048.0) 118 (2997.2)
73 (1854.2)
91 (2311.4)
95 (2413.0)
125 (3175.0)
129 (3276.6)
133 (3378.2)
133 (3378.2)

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Width
Depth
6090 (2762)
7110 (3225)
8630 (3918)
230 (871)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
52 (1320.8) 75 (1905.0)
55 (1397.0) 91 (2311.4)
56 (1422.4) 102 (2590.8)
2000 10,050 (4559)

2500 12,170 (5520)
3000 13,600 (6169)
310 (1173)
350 (1325)
380 (1438)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
58 (1473.2) 107 (2717.8)

63 (1600.2) 114 (2895.6)
66 (1676.4) 116 (2946.4)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,300 (6940)
420 (1590) 87 (2209.8) 68 (1727.2)
19,350 (8777)
580 (2196) 89 (2260.6) 70 (1778.0)
32,590 (14,783) 1040 (3937) 94 (2387.6) 98 (2489.2)
40,250 (18,257) 1370 (5186) 109 (2768.6) 102 (2590.8)
126 (3200.4)
129 (3276.6)
134 (3403.6)
137 (3479.8)

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 12470Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Width
Depth
6930 (3143)
7920 (3592)
9370 (4250)
360 (1363)
300 (1136)
310 (1173)
87 (2209.8) 56 (1422.4)
87 (2209.8) 58 (1473.2)
87 (2209.8) 59 (1498.6)
66 (1676.4)
72 (1828.8)
90 (2286.0)
2000 11,240 (5098)

2500 12,760 (5788)
3000 14,260 (6468)
330 (1249)
370 (1401)
390 (1476)
87 (2209.8) 62 (1574.8)
87 (2209.8) 66 (1676.4)
87 (2209.8) 69 (1752.6)
104 (2641.6)
110 (2794.0)
111 (2819.4)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,910 (7217)
420 (1590) 87 (2209.8)
19,830 (8995)
530 (2006) 89 (2209.8)
33,990 (15,418) 1100 (4164) 94 (2387.6)
39,610 (17,967) 1280 (4845) 109 (2768.6)
69 (1752.6)
71 (1803.4)
97 (2463.8)
99 (2514.6)

Height
Width
Depth
750
7600 (3447)
1000
8460 (3837)
1500 10,740 (4872)
370 (1401) 107 (2717.8)

390 (1476) 107 (2717.8)
420 (1590) 107 (2717.8)
60 (1524.0) 68 (1727.2)
60 (1524.0) 84 (2133.6)
62 (1574.8) 107 (2717.8)
2000 12,260 (5561)

2500 13,760 (6241)
3000 15,020 (6813)
460 (1741) 107 (2717.8)

490 (1855) 107 (2717.8)
520 (1968) 107 (2717.8)
64 (1625.6) 115 (2921.0)

64 (1625.6) 121 (3073.4)
66 (1676.4) 121 (3073.4)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,950 (7688)
570 (2158)
20,270 (9194)
650 (2461)
33,980 (15,413) 1200 (4542)
42,340 (19,205) 1440 (5451)
107 (2717.8) 78 (1981.2)

109 (2768.6) 92 (2336.8)
120 (3048.0) 117 (2971.8)
129 (3276.6) 150 (3810.0)
129 (3276.6)
132 (3352.8)
136 (3454.4)
136 (3454.4)

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
750
7930 (3597)
1000
8840 (4010)
1500 10,710 (4858)
380 (1438) 107 (2717.8)

400 (1514) 107 (2717.8)
440 (1666) 107 (2717.8)
61 (1549.4)
61 (1549.4)
62 (1574.8)
2000 12,530 (5684)

2500 13,920 (6314)
3000 15,620 (7085)
470 (1779) 107 (2717.8)

500 (1893) 107 (2717.8)
560 (2120) 107 (2717.8)
64 (1625.6) 117 (2971.8)

66 (1676.4) 117 (2971.8)
69 (1752.6) 127 (3225.8)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
17,580 (7974)
20,980 (9516)
32,460 (14,724)
40,320 (18,289)
610 (2309)
680 (2574)
1080 (4088)
1360 (5148)
107 (2717.8) 71 (1803.4)

108 (2743.2) 84 (2133.6)
119 (3022.6) 116 (2946.4)
129 (3276.6) 119 (3022.6)
68 (1727.2)
81 (2057.4)
95 (2413.0)
127 (3225.8)
132 (3352.8)
135 (3429.0)
135 (3429.0)

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 13800Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)

Height
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)

Height

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
750
9270 (4205)
1000
9900 (4491)
1500 11,620 (5271)
400 (1514) 107 (2717.8)

420 (1590) 107 (2717.8)
460 (1741) 107 (2717.8)
65 (1651.0)
65 (1651.0)
65 (1651.0)
2000 13,160 (5969)

2500 14,580 (6613)
3000 16,090 (7298)
500 (1893) 107 (2717.8)

530 (2006) 107 (2717.8)
560 (2120) 107 (2717.8)
65 (1651.0) 117 (2971.8)

67 (1701.8) 117 (2971.8)
69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
17,930 (9711)
600 (2271)
21,410 (9720)
680 (2574)
32,060 (14,542) 1010 (3823)
41,850 (18,983) 1330 (5035)
108 (2743.2) 77 (1955.8)

110 (2794.0) 77 (1955.8)
114 (2895.6) 116 (2946.4)
122 (3098.8) 148 (3759.2)
55 (1397.0)
67 (1701.8)
96 (2438.4)
130 (3302.0)
131 (3327.4)
132 (3352.8)
116 (2946.4)
122 (3098.8)
130 (3302.0)
139 (3530.6)
139 (3530.6)

dimension and 10 in (254.0 mm) to D dimension.
bus duct throat.
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
13.0-9
Sheet 13 009
General Description
General Description
VPI
VPE
ii
Aluminum windingscopper
optional
Step-lap mitered core
220C insulation system150C
average temperature rise
Vacuum pressure impregnated in
polyester resin
Four full-capacity taps on HV
winding rated 2-1/2% 2-FCAN
2-FCBN on units with voltage
above 601V
NEMA 1 heavy-gauge ventilated
enclosure with removable panels
front and rear
ANSI 61 gray paint electrostatically
applied using dry powder
Vibration isolation pads between
core and coil and enclosure
Base equipped with jacking pads
and designed for rolling or skidding
enclosure in any direction
Provisions for lifting core and
coil assembly
Diagrammatic aluminum nameplate
100% QC impulse test
Short-circuit design verification
optional
Vacuum pressure encapsulated
silicone resin
above 601V
front and rear
coil assembly
Short-circuit design verification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformer
Cast Coil
CA08104001E
Windings cast in a mold. HV coils

vacuum cast in epoxy in a metal
mold. LV coils encapsulated/
pressure-injected in epoxy for
600V and below
optional
above 601V
front and rear
coil assembly
Partial discharge-free (less than
20 pc at 120% rated voltage)
RESIBLOC
High voltage windings cast in epoxy

reinforced by fiberglass rovings
Copper high voltage, aluminum low
voltage windings
above 601V
front and rear
coil assembly
Partial discharge-free (less than
20 pc at 120% rated voltage)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 13 010
Layout Dimensions
Layout Dimensions
Transition Section
1
Primary
Equipment
DP
Transformer
Transition Section
ii
Secondary
Equipment
W1
WS
DS
4
5
WP
W1
W
Front
6
7
8
9
Figure 13.0-4. Indoor VPI/VPE/Cast/RESIBLOC Primary Unit SubstationsPlan View

Table 13.0-21. Indoor Dimension References
Legend:
Equipment
Dimensions
Reference
Transformer
MVC
MVS
ME
MC
W, D
WS, DS
WP, DP, WS, DS
WP, DP, WS, DS
WP, DP, WS, DS
Page 13.0-12
Transition Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)
10
11
12
13
Primary or Secondary
Equipment
MVC
MVS
ME
MC

W1
5 kV
15 kV
27 kV
38 kV
7.5
0
20
18
0
20
18
30
30
36
30
30
42

Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS
Front to rear centerline aligns with centerline of the transformer.

Four-wire connections are not available with MVC equipment.
Note: Surge arresters as discussed in Tabs 7 and 8 can be located in the primary of
Note: Dimensions are APPROXIMATE.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above 13.0-11

September 2011
Sheet 13 011
Layout Dimensions
Substation with Air Terminal

Chamber (ATC) Utilization
Dry-Type Transformer
i
ii
A substation using one or two air

terminal chambers (ATCs) is different
from a substation using close-coupling
on both the primary and secondary
sides. An ATC uses a cable connection
on either the primary side, secondary
side or both, and is placed between
the transformer and the remotely
mounted primary or secondary
equipment.
DTX
Transformer
1
D
2
3
4
Front
W1
WTX
W2
Figure 13.0-5. Dry-Type Indoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View

Transformer dimensions are shown on the following page in Table 13.0-23.

ATC depths shall match transformer depth, for any kVA of interest. See Table 13.0-23.
Table 13.0-22. Primary or Secondary ATC or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage
Three-Phase, Three-Wire or
ATC Widths
ATC Depths
kV
W1
W2
5 or 15
27
38
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
DTX
DTX
DTX
Note: Minimum ATC widths by kVA are listed in the table above. The width of any ATC can be
expanded to allow for the installation of additional conduits. When calculating the area of the
conduit opening, allow for a 3.00-inch (76.2 mm) lip around the entire perimeter of the ATC.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 13 012
Layout Dimensions
i
ii
Table 13.0-23. VPI/VPE/Cast/RESIBLOC Ventilated Dry-TypeDimensions in Inches (mm)

Aluminum Windings, Standard Design and Losses, Delta-Wye
VPI/VPE = 150C Rise, Cast/RESIBLOC = 80C Rise
kVA
HV (kV)
HV BIL
Height
Width
Depth
Weight in Lbs (kg)

VPI/VPE
Cast/RESIBLOC
5 kV Secondary
2000
15
27
38
95
125
150
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
130 (3302.0)
120 (3048.0)
130 (3302.0)
148 (3759.2)
68 (1727.2)
72 (1828.8)
78 (1981.2)
11,000 (4994)
13,000 (5902)
13,500 (6129)
14,000 (6356)
16,000 (7264)
18,000 (8172)
2500
15
27
38
95
125
150
112 (2844.8)
130 (3302.0)
138 (3505.2)
124 (3149.6)
140 (3556.0)
150 (3810.0)
68 (1727.2)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
13,500 (6129)
15,000 (6810)
15,500 (7037)
17,000 (7718)
19,000 (8626)
21,000 (9534)
3000
15
27
38
95
125
150
120 (3048.0)
130 (3302.0)
138 (3505.2)
130 (3302.0)
140 (3556.0)
150 (3810.0)
72 (1828.8)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
16,500 (7491)
18,500 (8399)
19,500 (8853)
22,000 (9988)
24,000 (10,896)
26,000 (11,804)
5000
15
27
38
95
125
150
130 (3302.0)
138 (3505.2)
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
148 (3759.2)
150 (3810.0)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
82 (2082.8)
22,000 (9988)
23,000 (10,442)
24,000 (10,896)
31,000 (14,074)
33,000 (14,982)
35,000 (15,890)
7500
15
27
38
95
125
150
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
150 (3810.0)
150 (3810.0)
154 (3911.6)
78 (1981.2)
84 (2133.6)
88 (2235.2)
24,500 (11,123)
26,000 (11,804)
27,000 (12,258)
48,000 (21,792)
50,000 (22,700)
52,000 (23,608)
10000
15
27
38
95
125
150
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
148 (3759.2)
160 (4064.0)
160 (4064.0)
160 (4064.0)
78 (1981.2)
84 (2133.6)
90 (2286.0)
29,000 (13,166)
30,000 (13,620)
31,000 (14,074)
62,000 (28,148)
64,000 (29,056)
66,000 (29,964)
7
8
9
10
15 kV Secondary
2000
27
38
125
150
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
120 (3048.0)
130 (3302.0)
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
12,000 (5448)
13,500 (6129)
18,000 (8172)
20,000 (9080)
2500
27
38
125
150
112 (2844.8)
120 (3048.0)
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
14,000 (6356)
14,500 (6583)
21,000 (9534)
23,000 (10,442)
3000
27
38
125
150
120 (3048.0)
124 (3149.6)
148 (3759.2)
150 (3810.0)
78 (1981.2)
82 (2082.8)
15,500 (7037)
16,000 (7264)
26,000 (11,804)
28,000 (12,712)
5000
27
38
125
150
124 (3149.6)
130 (3302.0)
150 (3810.0)
154 (3911.6)
88 (2235.2)
88 (2235.2)
17,500 (7945)
19,000 (8626)
35,000 (15,890)
37,000 (16,798)
7500
27
38
125
150
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
154 (3911.6)
160 (4064.0)
88 (2235.2)
90 (2286.0)
20,500 (9307)
22,500 (10,215)
52,000 (23,608)
54,000 (24,516)
10000
27
38
125
150
148 (3759.2)
148 (3759.2)
160 (4064.0)
160 (4064.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
23,500 (10,669)
25,000 (11,350)
66,000 (29,964)
68,000 (30,872)
11
12
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Add 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) to width dimension for each 15 kV air terminal chamber.
Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 13 013
Technical Data
ANSI Segment Identification

for HV and LV Bushings/
Terminations on Dry and
Liquid Transformers
The plan view below shows the ANSI
segments used to identify the location
of both the HV and LV bushings.
Table 13.0-24. Dry-Type Transformer Rating Table112 to 10,000 kVA
Primary/Secondary
BIL kV
Maximum Voltage (kV)
20/30/45
30/45/60/75/95
45/60/75/95
60/75/95/110/125
2.5
5.0
8.7
15.0
110/125
125
150
25.0
27.0
34.5
Segment 3
ii
1
2
First BIL rating given below is standard. Others shown are optional.
Table 13.0-25. Liquid Transformer Rating Table500 to 10,000 kVA

Segment 4
Segment 2
Primary
BIL kV
Secondary
Voltage Range
BIL kV
Voltage Range
12000D, 12470D, 13200D, 13800D

12000D, 12470D, 13200D, 13800D
45
60
2400Y, 2400D, 2520D

4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D, 5040D
125/150
125/150
125/150
22900D
22900D
22900D
45
60
75
2400Y, 2400D, 2520D

4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D
6900D, 7200D, 7560D, 8320D, 8720D
125/150
22900D
95
150/200
150/200
34400D, 34500D
34400D, 34500D
45
60
12000D, 12470Y, 12600D, 13090Y,

13200Y, 13200D, 13800Y, 14400D
2400Y, 2400D, 2520D
4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D, 5040D
150/200
150/200
34400D, 34500D
34400D, 34500D
75
6900D, 7200D, 7560D 8320Y, 8720D
250
350
46000
69000
95
12000D, 12470Y, 12600D, 13090Y,

13200Y, 13200D, 13800Y, 14400D
Segment 1
95/110
95/110
Figure 13.0-6. Front (Nameplate, Gauges, etc.)

HV: Segment 2 is standard for
wall-mounted bushings
(optional Segment 4)
Segment 3 is standard for
cover-mounted bushings
LV:
Segment 4 wall-mounted is
standard (optional Segment 2)
Note: See Tab 9 for fuse selections.
First BIL rating given below is standard. Others shown are optional.
Transformers will have a minimum 98% efficiency for all ratings

(maximum 2% losses).
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Table 13.0-26. Standard Sound LevelsDecibels (per ANSI TR-1)

kVA
11
Vent Dry-Type and Cast Coil Transformers
OA
FA
AA
FA
500
750
1000
56
58
58
67
67
67
60
64
64
67
67
67
12
1500
2000
2500
60
61
62
67
67
67
65
66
68
68
69
71
13
3000
3750
5000
63
64
65
67
67
67
68
70
71
71
73
73
14
6000
7500
10000
66
67
68
68
69
70
72
73
74
75
76
15
16
Table 13.0-27. Standard Impedances (Percent)

HV kV BIL
Class
Low Voltage
Below 2400V
Low Voltage
2400V and Above
45150
200
250
350
5.75
7.25
7.75
6.50
7.00
7.50
8.00

6.75% is also available as an option.

17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 13 014
Technical Data
Table 13.0-28. Liquid Filled 15 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise

kVA
ii
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
and 55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
and 20CNL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1795
2277
3193
10,085
12,741
17,352
11,880
15,018
20,545
4320
5460
7530
750
1000
1500
1947
2470
3464
10,942
13,823
18,826
12,889
16,293
22,290
4680
5930
8170
2000
2500
3000
4045
4833
5364
21,031
23,776
23,823
25,076
28,609
29,187
9300
10,780
11,320
2000
2500
3000
4388
5243
5819
22,818
25,796
25,847
27,206
31,039
31,666
10,090
11,690
12,280
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6424
8152
11,458
14,565
28,273
35,345
48,205
59,352
34,697
43,497
59,663
73,917
13,490
16,990
23,510
29,400
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6970
8844
12,431
15,803
30,676
38,349
52,302
64,396
37,646
47,193
64,733
80,199
14,640
18,430
25,510
31,900
3
4

kVA
5
6
7
8
9
10
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
and20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1777
2254
3161
9984
12,613
17,178
11,761
14,867
20,339
4270
5410
7460
750
1000
1500
1928
2445
3429
10,832
13,685
18,638
12,760
16,130
22,067
4640
5870
8090
2000
2500
3000
4004
4784
4310
20,820
23,538
23,584
24,824
28,322
27,894
9210
10,670
10,210
2000
2500
3000
4344
5190
4676
22,589
25,538
25,584
26,933
30,728
30,260
9990
11,570
11,070
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6359
8070
11,343
14,419
27,990
34,991
47,722
58,758
34,349
43,061
59,065
73,177
13,360
16,820
23,270
29,110
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6899
8755
12,307
15,644
30,369
37,965
51,778
63,752
37,268
46,720
64,085
79,396
14,490
18,250
25,250
31,580

kVA
11
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL Total

Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL Total

Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
12
750
1000
1500
1812
2299
3224
10,183
12,865
17,521
11,995
15,164
20,745
4360
5520
7600
750
1000
1500
1966
2494
3498
11,048
13,958
19,010
13,014
16,452
22,508
4730
5980
8250
13
2000
2500
3000
4084
4879
4396
21,236
24,008
24,055
25,320
28,887
28,451
9390
10,880
10,410
2000
2500
3000
4431
5293
4769
23,041
26,048
26,099
27,472
31,341
30,868
10,190
11,810
11,290
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6486
8231
11,569
14,707
28,549
35,690
48,676
59,933
35,035
43,921
60,245
74,640
13,620
17,150
23,740
29,690
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7037
8930
12,552
15,957
30,875
38,735
52,813
65,027
37,912
47,665
65,365
80,984
14,760
18,610
25,760
32,210
14
15
16

kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
17
18
19
20
21
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL Total

Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at1 00%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL Total

Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1902
2413
3385
10,692
13,508
18,397
12,594
15,921
21,782
4580
5790
7980
750
1000
1500
2063
2618
3672
11,600
14,656
19,960
13,663
17,274
23,632
4960
6280
8660
2000
2500
3000
4288
5122
4615
22,298
25,208
25,257
26,586
30,330
29,872
9860
11,420
10,930
2000
2500
3000
4652
5557
5007
24,193
27,350
27,403
28,845
32,907
32,410
10,700
12,390
11,860
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6810
8642
12,147
15,442
29,976
37,474
51,109
62,929
36,786
46,116
63,256
78,371
14,300
18,010
24,920
31,170
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7388
9376
13,179
16,754
32,523
40,659
55,453
68,277
39,911
50,035
68,632
85,031
15,520
19,540
27,040
33,820
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed. Losses based
on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating 25 kV.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 13 015
Technical Data
Table 13.0-36. Biotemp Filled 15 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
i
ii
750
1000
1500
1774
2258
3188
9587
11,942
15,734
11,361
14,200
18,922
4170
5240
7120
750
1000
1500
1924
2449
3458
10,401
12,957
17,071
12,325
15,406
20,529
4520
5690
7730
2000
2500
3000
4069
4900
5299
18,298
19,638
21,758
22,367
24,538
27,057
8640
9810
10,740
2000
2500
3000
4414
5316
5749
19,853
21,307
23,607
24,267
26,623
29,356
9380
10,970
11,650
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6350
8085
11,495
14,824
24,962
30,018
39,066
46,694
31,312
38,103
50,561
61,518
12,590
15,590
21,260
26,500
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6889
8772
12,472
16,084
27,083
32,569
42,386
50,662
33,972
41,341
54,858
66,746
13,660
16,910
23,070
28,750

kVA
No load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1756
2235
3156
9491
11,822
15,576
11,247
14,057
18,732
4130
5190
7050
750
1000
1500
1905
2424
3424
10,297
12,826
16,899
12,202
15,250
20,323
4480
5630
7650
2000
2500
3000
4028
4851
5246
18,115
19,441
21,540
22,143
24,292
26,786
8560
9710
10,630
2000
2500
3000
4370
5263
5691
19,654
21,093
23,370
24,024
26,356
29,061
9280
10,540
11,530
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6286
8004
11,380
14,675
24,712
29,717
38,675
46,227
30,998
37,721
50,055
60,902
12,460
15,430
21,050
26,230
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6820
8684
12,347
15,922
26,812
32,242
41,962
50,156
33,632
40,926
54,309
66,078
13,520
16,740
22,840
28,460

kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL Total

Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL Total

Losses at 50% Load
and 55C LL ref. temp
per DOE (Watts)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
750
1000
1500
1791
2279
3219
9680
12,058
15,887
11,471
14,337
19,106
4210
5290
7190
750
1000
1500
1943
2472
3492
10,502
13,082
17,237
12,445
15,554
20,729
4570
5740
7800
12
2000
2500
3000
4108
4948
5350
18,477
19,829
21,970
22,585
24,777
27,320
8730
9910
10,840
2000
2500
3000
4457
5368
5804
20,047
21,514
23,837
24,504
26,882
29,641
9470
10,750
11,760
13
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6411
8164
11,607
14,968
25,206
30,311
39,448
47,150
31,617
38,475
51,055
62,118
12,710
15,740
21,470
26,760
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6955
8857
12,593
16,240
27,348
32,887
42,801
51,157
34,303
41,744
55,394
67,397
13,790
17,080
23,290
29,030

kVA
No load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL Total

Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL Total

Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1880
2392
3379
10,164
12,660
16,681
12,044
15,052
20,060
4420
5560
7550
750
1000
1500
2039
2595
3666
11,027
13,736
18,098
13,066
16,331
21,764
4800
6030
8190
2000
2500
3000
4313
5195
5617
19,400
20,820
23,068
23,713
26,015
28,685
9160
10,400
11,380
2000
2500
3000
4679
5636
6094
21,049
22,589
25,028
25,728
28,225
31,122
9940
11,280
12,350
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6731
8572
12,187
15,716
26,466
31,826
41,420
49,507
33,197
40,398
53,607
65,223
13,350
16,530
22,450
28,090
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7303
9300
13,222
17,051
28,715
34,531
44,940
53,715
36,018
43,831
58,162
70,766
14,480
17,930
24,460
30,480
CA08104001E
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 13 016
Technical Data
i
ii
1
2
Table 13.0-44. Typical Losses for Dry-Type Transformers (Watts)

kVA Rating
VPI/VPE
Cast Coil/RESIBLOC
No Load Loss
Load Loss
Total Loss
2000
2500
3000
7000
8500
10,000
30,000
32,500
37,500
37,000
41,000
47,500
5000
7500
10,000
14,500
17,000
23,500
40,000
45,000
55,000
54,500
62,000
78,500
No Load Loss
Load Loss
Total Loss
6500
8000
9000
18,000
20,000
25,000
24,500
28,000
34,000
13,500
20,000
22,500
30,000
40,000
50,000
43,500
60,000
72,500
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V
14.0-1
December 2012

Secondary Below 1000V
Sheet 14 001
CA08104001E
Contents
Transformer Fluids and NEC Compliance
Transformer Product Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-2
Transformer Cooling Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-3
Transformer Fluids Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-4
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70 NEC) Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-5
Product Overview
DOE 2010 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-9
Types of Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-10
Cable Terminal Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-11
Type MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-11
Type MSB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-11
Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-12
VPI/VPE Dry-Type Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-14
RESIBLOC Epoxy Cast Resin Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-16
Cast Coil Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-18
Integrated Unit SubstationOptional Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-20
Magnum DS Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-21
DSII Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-21
Magnum SB Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-22
Pow-R-Line C Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-22
Layout Dimensions
Composite Floor Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-23
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-28
Primary Switching Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-30
Transformers and Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-31
Outdoor Secondary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-39
Technical Data
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-41
Primary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-42
Secondary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-47
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16311
Section 26 11 16.11
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MVS Primary Switch and DSII Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
21
14.0-2 Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V

December 2012
Sheet 14 002
Product Selection
Transformer Product Selector

Table 14.0-1. Transformer Product Selector
ii
Transformer
Maximum Voltage Available

CAG
Tab
Types
Application
Considerations
VPIVacuum pressure impregnation with polyester resin.

Used in commercial
application.
Transformer is part of a
close-coupled assembly
that includes both primary
Unit Substation TransformerDry-Type
1
2
Secondary
34.5 kV
Unit Substation
(provides secondary system voltage)
600V
112.5 kVA 14
3750 kVA
VPEVacuum Pressure
application).
3
4
Explosion-resistant, fireresistant and nonpolluting

to the environment.

and mechanical strength of
epoxy to provide higher levels
of performance and environmental protection in high moisture, dust-laden and chemical
environments. Windings are
hermetically sealed in epoxy.
5
6
cycling loads.
7
8
Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
9
10
11
Secondary
34.5 kV
Unit Substation
(provides secondary system voltage)
600V
300 kVA
3750 kVA
14

installation.
Environmentally Friendly
FluidsSpecified where
flammability and clean-up
are a concern.
Transformer is part of a closecoupled assembly that includes

both primary and secondary
equipment.
High short-circuit strength.
Sealed tank design is
impervious to the environment.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
December 2012

14.0-3
Sheet 14 003
Cooling Classes
Cooling Classes
of Transformers
Table 14.0-2. IEEE Transformer Cooling Classes
O N A N
The cooling classes of transformers

have recently changed, and are
explained in Table 14.0-2. The IEEE
transformer cooling designations were
changed to become consistent with
the IEC standards (IEC 60076-2: 1998).
The new classifications are described
in IEEE C57.12.00-2000.
First Letter
Internal Cooling Medium
In Contact With Windings
O = Mineral oil or other fluid with
fire point 300C
K = Insulating liquid with fire point
>300C
L = Insulating liquid with no
measurable fire point
The new cooling designations have

four-letter descriptions that describe
the type of oil, how the oil is internally
circulated, what is used to cool the oil,
and how the oil is externally cooled.
For example: ONAN
Second Letter
Circulation Mechanism for
Internal Cooling Medium
N = Natural convection flow through cooling
equipment and in windings.
F = Forced circulation through cooling
equipment (i.e., cooling pumps) and
natural convection flow in windings.
D = Forced circulation through cooling
equipment, directed from the cooling
equipment into at least the main windings.
Table 14.0-3. Cooling Classes Comparisons,

Past/Present Designations
Designations
ii
Fourth Letter
Circulation Mechanism for
External Cooling Medium
N = Natural convection
F = Forced circulation
fans (air cooling) or pumps
(water cooling)
Third Letter
External Cooling Medium
A = Air
W = Water
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Previous
Present
OA
FA
OA/FA/FA
ONAN
ONAF
ONAN/ONAF/ONAF
10
OA/FA/FOA
OA/FOA
OA/FOA/FOA
ONAN/ONAF/OFAF
ONAN/ODAF
ONAN/ODAF/ODAF
11
FOA
FOW
FOA
FOW
OFAF
OFWF
ODAF
ODWF
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 14 004
Fluids Comparison
Transformer Fluids Comparison

Table 14.0-4. Fluid Advantages and Disadvantages
ii
1
2
Advantages
Disadvantages
Mineral Oil
Low transformer cost

Good dielectric performance
Low maintenance cost
Good heat dissipation
Good cold climate performance
Preventative maintenanceDGA historical data available
Higher installation cost

Vaults required for indoor installations per code low fire point160C
<30% Biodegradability
Silicone Fluid
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Low heat release

Reduced smoke
Low flame
Self extinguishing
Low toxicity
Moderate viscosity
High stability
Non-biodegradable
Not suitable for use with internal Bay-O-Net fuses
Transformer cost
Disposal cost
Viton gaskets required
Retrofil applications
High transformer cost
High moisture absorption
Environmentally Friendly Fluids
High fire point360C

High flash point343C
Compatible with mineral oil
Excellent retrofil fluid (compatible with oil up to a 10% mixture)
Excellent dielectric performance
97% biodegradable
Renewable resource
Greater tolerance to moisture
Transformer cost (lower than silicone fluid)

Pour point (15 to 25C) transformer energized with full load with
top oil temperature at 50C with no problemsno crystals formed

at 68C
Table 14.0-5. Fluid Properties Comparison

Property
Mineral
Oil
Silicone
Fluid
Fluids
Specific gravity
Flash point C
Fire point C
0.91
145
160
0.96
300
330
0.91
343
360
Viscosity (cSt.) 100C

40C
0C
3
12
76
16
38
90
10
45
300
Pour point C
Dielectric strength, kV
Dissipation factor (%) 25C
-40
30
0.05
-55
4.3
0.01
1525
49
0.0250.05
Permittivity
Resistivity
Oxidation inhibitor
Biodegradability
2.2
1013
Optional
<30%
2.7
1014
No
0%
3.1
1013
Required
97%
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

December 2012
14.0-5
Sheet 14 005
NEC Requirements
NEC Requirement Guidelines

for the Installation of
Listed Less-Flammable
NEC (NFPA) Recognition
These guidelines focus on the
requirements of Article 450.23 of
the National Electrical Code (NEC)
for the installation of less-flammable
liquid-insulated transformers. Less
flammable liquids are used in transformers where an extra margin of
fire safety is important. Typical applications include installations indoors,
on rooftops, near buildings, bush
and forest fire prone areas, and in
pedestrian traffic areas.
Less-flammable liquids, also known as
high fire point liquids, are transformer
dielectric coolants that have a minimum fire point of 300C. Commonly
used fire-resistant fluids include dimethysiloxane, and ester-based fluids.
Two Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratories (NRTL); Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) and FM approvals
(FM) currently list less-flammable
liquids. They also list less-flammable
liquid-filled transformers.
Less-flammable liquid-filled transformers were formally recognized by
the NEC for indoor installation in 1978.
In 1990, the NEC integrated specific
less-flammable transformer requirements for outdoor installations for
Article 450.23, in effect recognizing
less-flammable transformers as
inherently safer than conventional
oil-filled transformers. Less-flammable
transformers, long recognized as an
additional safeguard for indoor installations, are becoming increasingly
recognized for outdoor applications
as well.
General NEC Requirements

The requirements and options for the
different types of indoor and outdoor
installations are outlined in Table 14.0-6.
These guidelines also summarize the
UL classification and FM approvals
installation requirements for lessflammable fluids referred to as
listing requirements in NEC 450.23.
In cases where the transformer installation presents a fire hazard, one or
more of the following safeguards shall
be applied according to the degree of
hazard involved:
1. Space requirements
2. Fire-resistant barriers
3. Automatic fire suppression systems
4. Enclosures that confine the oil
of a ruptured transformer tank
NEC Article 450.28, modification of
transformers, requires that when
modifications are made to transformers
in existing installations that change the
transformer type, the transformers must
be marked to show the type of insulating
liquid installed and the installations must
comply with current requirements of
the NEC. Examples of changes include
replacing a complete transformer (retrofitting) or replacement of the liquid only
(retrofilling). Askarel (PCB) and conventional mineral oil-filled transformers
are frequently retrofitted or retrofilled
using less-flammable liquids. NEC
110.34 sets minimum clear work space
dimensions around transformers.
Indoor installations using less-flammable

liquid-insulated transformers must
comply with NEC Article 450.23, which
defines the requirements for three
types of indoor transformer installations as detailed in Table 14.0-6:
Non-combustible building with no
combustible materials stored in area
Combustible building or
combustibles stored in area
Rating greater than 35 kV
The installation of less-flammable liquidinsulated transformers indoors without

a vault in a Type I or II non-combustible
building where no combustible
materials are stored requires that:
A liquid confinement area be provided

The transformer be filled with a
listed less-flammable insulating
liquid with a minimum 300C
fire point
The installation comply with the
listing requirements of the liquid
in the transformer
CA08104001E
If the installation cannot meet the

liquid listing requirement, it must
be provided with an automatic fire
extinguishing system and a liquid
containment or the transformer must
be installed in a vault complying with
NEC 450, Part III, transformer vaults.
Article 450.26 may be followed in
lieu of any requirements listed in
Article 450.23. Exceptions to vault
requirements listed in NEC 450.26 are
also valid for less-flammable fluidfilled installations. Construction
requirements for vaults are detailed
in Part III of Article 450.
Article 450.42 in Part III, transformer
vaults, allows an exception to the
3-hour vault requirement permitting
a 1-hour rated fire-resistant rated room
if equipped with an automatic extinguishing system.
The installation of less-flammable
liquid-insulated transformers indoors
without a vault in Type I or II non-combustible building where no combustible materials are stored required that:
A liquid containment area be
provided
The transformer be filled with a
listed less-flammable insulating
liquid with a minimum 300C
fire point
The installation comply with the
listing requirements of the liquid
in the transformer
If the installation cannot meet the

liquid listing requirements or one
or more of the exceptions listed in NEC
450.26, the installation must either
be provided with an automatic fire
extinguishing system and a liquid
confinement area or the transformer
must be installed in a vault, per
NEC 450, Part III.
Article 450.42 in Part III, Transformer
Vaults, allows an exception to the
3-hour vault requirement permitting a
1-hour rated fire-resistant rated room
if equipped with an automatic spray
extinguishing system.
If the installation does not comply
with one or more of the exceptions
listed in 450.26, the transformer must
be installed in a vault complying with
NEC 450, Part III transformer vaults.
Article 450.23. Exceptions to vault
requirements listed in Article 450.26
may be followed in lieu of any
requirements listed in NEC 450.26
would also be valid for less-flammable
fluid-filled transformer installations.
Construction requirements for vaults
are detailed in Part III of Article 450.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

December 2012
Sheet 14 006
NEC Requirements
i
ii
Table 14.0-6. NEC Article 450.23 Requirements

Installation
Type
NEC
Requirements
Indoor Installations
Transformer rated 35 kV, installed in a non-combustible building
with no combustible materials stored in area.
1
2
3
4
5
Transformer rated 35 kV, installed in a combustible building or in a

building with combustible materials stored in area.
Both liquid confinement and auto extinguishment

Vault per NEC 450, Part III
Transformer rated >35 kV
Outdoor Installations
Non-combustible building and no combustible materials stored
in area.
Combustible building or combustible materials stored
in area.

Both liquid confinement, and either of the following listing requirements :

Underwriters Laboratories
FM approvals
Both liquid confinement and auto extinguishment
Either of the following listing requirements :

FM approvals
In accordance with NEC Article 450.27, oil insulated transformers installed

outdoors, i.e., space separation, fire barriers or water spray systems.
Optionalno additional safeguards are required if one or more Exceptions 1-6 of Article 450.26, oil-insulated transformers installed indoors apply.
Refer to NFPA 220-1999 for definition of non-combustible Type I and II building construction.
Fine print note, Article 450.23, (B) (1) states: Installations adjacent to combustible material, fire escapes, or door and window openings may
require additional safeguards such as those listed in Article 450.27.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

December 2012
14.0-7
Sheet 14 007
NEC Requirements
Listing OptionA
Underwriters Laboratories Requirements
The UL classification of lessflammable liquids per the NEC Article
450.23 for three-phase 4510,000 kVA
transformers requires:
Transformers be equipped with
tanks capable of withstanding
12 psig minimum without rupture
Transformers be equipped with
pressure relief devices with minimum pressure relief capacity per
the UL classification marking
Transformer primaries be protected
with overcurrent protection options
per the UL classification marking
Listing OptionB
Factory Mutual Requirements
The indoor installation requirements
according to factory mutual loss prevention data (LPD) 5-4/14-8, January
1997, revised January 2001, consist
of requirements for all transformer
and fluid types. Specific requirements
for less-flammable liquid-insulated
transformers are included. Refer to
Section 2.2.1.2 of FM LPD for special
installation requirements for network
transformers.
General transformer requirements are
as follows:
Minimum 3 ft (0.9m) clearance from

building walls
Liquid containment provisions
Room fire-resistance rating based
on fluid and transformer type
Room ventilation, if necessary,
to prevent non-thermal damage
Smoke detection with alarm in the
electrical room
Less-flammable liquid-filled transformers must comply with one of

the following:
Be FM approved or equivalent
Be located in a room with a 1-hour
fire-resistance rating
Have automatic sprinklers above the
transformer and 20 ft beyond with a
discharge density of 0.20 gpm/sq ft
Note: For a listing of FM-approved

less-flammable fluids, refer to Factory
Mutual Research Approval Guide P7825.
FM Approved Transformer
Less-flammable liquid-filled transformers rated 510,000 kVA must be
equipped with specific design and
protection features to be FM approved
or equivalent. Key characteristics
of this protection system are fire
properties of the liquid, the ability
to mechanically withstand pressure
generated by a low-level electrical
fault and the ability of electrical protection to clear a fault before tank rupture.
According to FM approval Standard
3990, the key protection features
are as listed below. Refer to the FM
standard for complete requirements:
The transformer tank rupture
strength shall be a minimum of
15 psi for rectangular and 20 psi
for cylindrical tanks. All transformer
tanks shall be designed to withstand
a pressure of 7 psi without
permanent distortion
The transformer tank shall be provided with a pressure relief device
to vent internal over-pressures. The
device must be capable of venting a
minimum specified flow rate, based
on the kVA as noted in Table 14.0-7
Section 2.3.3 of the FM approval
Standard 3990. Proper pressure
venting coordinated with proper
tank pressure withstand rating has
proven highly effective in preventing tank rupture from overpressure
due to internal fault currents below
the trip rating of primary circuit
current limiting fuses
The unit is filled with an FM

approval less-flammable fluid
to reduce the probability of ignition
to the liquid. Less-flammable
fluids, also known as high fire point
or fire-resistant liquids, are dielectric
coolants that have a minimum
fire point of 300C (572F) per the
ASTM D92 Cleveland Open Cup
test method
The primary circuit shall have

overcurrent protection that limits
the let-through current (I2t) to a
specified maximum value as listed
in Table 14.0-8 and in Section 2.3.5
of the FM approval Standard 3990.
Current-limiting fusing and its
functional equivalents are designed
to interrupt a high current internal
fault before the tank withstand
pressure level is reached. If protection is designed to vent gas during
operation, such as with expulsion
fuses, this protection shall be
located outside the transformer
tank. Certain exceptions apply
and permit expulsion fusing to
be mounted in the tank if in series
and properly coordinated with
current limiting fusing
The transformer shall have an
additional nameplate with the FM
approval mark with the following
data: tank pressure rating, fuse
part number, pressure relief device
part number, and requirements
particular to the type of installation
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 14 008
NEC Requirements
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Listing OptionB (Continued)
Table 14.0-7. FM Pressure Relief Device

Required Ratings
Factory Mutual Requirements
kVA Rating
For grounded wye secondary windings of 150V or more and rated at

1000 or more nominal amperes, a
notification tag shall be provided by
the manufacturer, secured to the
low voltage neutral bushing, advising that the transformer installation
requires ground fault relay protection prior to energization (if not
installed at time of manufacturing)
Indoor units greater than 500 kVA
and outdoor units greater than
2500 kVA shall be equipped with
alarm contacts on the pressure
relief device and a rapid-rise relay
Three-phase pad-mounted and
substation transformers shall be
equipped with an oil level gauge.
Additionally, all transformers rated
750 kVA or higher shall be equipped
with a liquid temperature indicator
and pressure-vacuum gauge
Transformers shall be capable
of passing basic lightning impulse
insulation level (BIL) testing at a
minimum tilt of 1.5 from vertical
ThreePhase
112.5
150
300
1000
2000
10,000
SinglePhase
37.5
50
100
333
667
3333
Flow Rate
SCFM at 15PSI
(103 kPa)
35
50
100
350
700
5000
Note: For kVA ratings not listed, use next

highest rating in table.
Table 14.0-8. FM Maximum I2t Let-Through

Required Ratings
kVA Rating
ThreePhase
45
75
112.5
150
225
SinglePhase
Current
Limiting
Fusing
Other
Protection
15
25
500,000
500,000
700,000
800,000
37.5
50
75
550,000
600,000
650,000
900,000
1,000,000
1,200,000
300
500
750
100
167
250
750,000
900,000
1,100,000
1,400,000
1,900,000
2,200,000
1000
1500
2000
333
500
667
1,250,000
1,500,000
1,750,000
3,400,000
4,500,000
6,000,000
2500
3000
3750
833
1000
1250
2,000,000
2,250,000
2,500,000
7,500,000
9,000,000
11,000,000
5000
7500
10,000
1667
2500
3333
3,000,000
3,000,000
3,000,000
14,000,000
14,000,000
14,000,000
Note: For kVA ratings not listed, use next

lowest rating in table.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
14.0-9
Sheet 14 009
DOE Requirements
DOE 2010 Requirements

This information details the minimum efficiencies required
of power transformers rated 2500 kVA and below, as defined
by the Department of Energy (DOE) Federal Regulation for
Distribution Transformers.
Table 14.0-11. High Voltage 15 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600V and
Below. Copper Conductor Windings. Losses in Watts. Three-Phase
Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformers
VPI, 15 kV Primary 150C Temp. Rise
kVA
This federal regulation requires all transformers rated

2500 kVA and below with a primary voltage of 35,000V and
below, and a low voltage of 600V and below to meet the
minimum efficiency levels as stated below. This regulation
affects all transformers in scope manufactured as of
January 1, 2010. This regulation affects all transformers
installed in the U.S., regardless of domestic or foreign
manufacturing.
Distribution Transformers
Liquid-Filled <34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
6050 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
165
220
320
700
1000
1450
865
1220
1770
413
562
696
225
300
500
450
500
750
2200
2600
3600
2650
3100
4350
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1300
1500
1900
5600
7000
9500
6900
8500
11,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2750
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000
14,600
17,750
19,800
5429
6408
N/A

No Load
at 85C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
135C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
4695 kV BIL
Total Losses at
75% Load and
75C Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
1250
1500
2000
4500
8500
10,000
5750
10,000
12,000
2022
2960
3980
1000
1500
2000
2500
3500
4250
13,000
17,000
21,000
15,500
20,500
25,250
4898
6659
8268
2500
3000
3750
5000
9000
11,000
24,000
33,500
35,000
29,000
42,500
46,000
9700
N/A
N/A
13,000
18,500
23,500
40,000
45,000
55,000
53,000
63,500
78,500
N/A
N/A
N/A
Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed.

Units must typically meet the new DOE efficiency guideline levels with
noted losses complying with such.
Cast, 15 kV Primary 115C Temp. Rise

kVA
kVA
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
170C
(Watts)

Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
170C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
300
500
750
5000
7500
10,000

No
Load
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
135C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
135C
(Watts)
4695 kV BIL
Total Losses at
75% Load and
75C Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
300
500
750
1250
1500
2500
4000
8000
9000
5250
9500
11,500
2022
2960
3980
11
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
12,500
16,000
19,000
15,500
20,000
24,000
4898
6659
8268
12
2500
3000
3750
5500
9000
11,000
20,000
26,000
29,000
25,500
35,000
40,000
9700
N/A
N/A
13
13,500
20,000
22,500
30,000
35,000
45,000
43,500
55,000
67,500
N/A
N/A
N/A
5000
7500
10,000

No
Load
(Watts)

14
15
75
112.5
150
200
300
375
900
1000
1400
1100
1300
1775
413
562
696
16
225
300
500
450
500
900
2200
3000
4300
2650
3500
5200
942
1164
1889
17
750
1000
1500
1000
1500
1900
6000
7000
10,500
7000
8500
12,400
2567
3221
4375
18

2600
2800
4000
12,500
15,500
18,000
15,100
18,300
22,000
5429
6408
N/A
19
2000
2500
3000


20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 010
General Description
i
ii
1
2
General Description
Types of Distribution Systems
Definition
Simple Radial
A secondary unit substation is a

close-coupled assembly consisting
of enclosed primary high voltage
equipment, three-phase power transformers, and enclosed secondary low
voltage equipment. The following
electrical ratings are typical:
Primary voltage: 2.438 kV
Transformer kVA: 3003750
Secondary voltage: 208, 240, 480
or 600V (maximum)
Primary
Switch
Loop Selective
Low-Voltage
Main
Transformer
4
5
6
7
8
9
A secondary unit substation is defined

in the following standards:
NEMA Standard No. 210
IEEE Standard No. 100
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 14.0-1. Simple Radial
Reduced power losses

Improved voltage regulation
Improved service continuity
Reduced exposure to low voltage
faults
Increased flexibility
Minimum installation cost
Efficient space usage
Additional advantages of Eatons

unit substations in this unified
approach are:
Single-source responsibility
Complete electrical and mechanical
control over coordination of the
three close-coupled sections
Availability of all switchboard and
switchgear types gives broad
application flexibility
Modern design
Composite assembly retains proven
safety and integrity of each of its
three major parts
MVS
Simple and less costly

Easy to coordinate
No idle parts
Figure 14.0-4. Loop Selective
Primary Selective
Advantages
As a result of locating power transformers and their close-coupled
secondary switchboards as close as
possible to the areas of load concentration, the secondary distribution
cables or busways are kept to
minimum lengths. This concept
has obvious advantages such as:
Feeders
be further improved by substituting

selector type primary switches as in B.
Duplex
MVS
Selector
MVS
Figure 14.0-2. Primary Selective Radial

Similar to simple radial with added
advantage of a second primary
incoming cable circuit. By switching
to a second circuit, duration of outage
from cable failure is limited.
Secondary Selective
M
This configuration is based upon a string

of substations being fed from two
sources. The power cables from the first
source terminate at a loop switch in
the substation primary switchgear
assembly, down the switchgear bus to
another loop switch in the same
switchgear assembly, then back out to
another loop switch in a different
substation. The loop cabling system is
continued through every unit substation
until the cable connects to the second
source. Typically, the path from one
substation to another is broken by an
open switch in one of the substations.
The philosophy is if there is a failure
somewhere, or it is desired to perform
maintenance to cable or a switchgear
assembly, it may be isolated by opening
the appropriate switches in the loop, thus
restoring service to the other substations.
Spot Network (See Tab 18)
Figure 14.0-5. Spot Network
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 14.0-3. Secondary Selective

Normally operated as two electrically
independent unit substations, with bus
tie breaker (T) open, and with approximately half of the total load on each
bus. In case of failure of either primary
incoming circuit, only one bus is
affected, and service can be promptly
restored by opening main breaker (M)
on the dead bus and closing tie breaker
(T). This operation can be made automatic, with duration of outage on
either bus limited to a few seconds.
Because the transformers are not

paralleled, secondary fault currents
and breaker applications are similar to
those on radial unit substations. Service
continuity and substation capacity can
The transformers are parallel on the

secondary sides through network
protectors. In case of primary voltage
failure, the associated protector automatically opens. The other protector
remains closed, and there is no dead
time on the bus, even momentarily.
When primary voltage is restored, the
protector automatically checks for
synchronism and recloses.
Secondary voltage regulation is
improved by paralleled transformers.
Secondary fault capability is increased
by paralleled transformers and the
feeder breakers must be selected
accordingly. Primary switches are
usually selector or duplex type so
that transformers may be transferred
to alternate live sources.
CA08104001E
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V 14.0-11

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 011
General Description
Cable Terminal Compartment,

Air Filled, No Disconnect

Type MVS, Unfused or Fused
Duplex
2 Position
ii
Selector
1
Loop
Figure 14.0-6. MVS Switch Arrangements
Switch Arrangements
In addition to the single, two-position
switch for simple ON-OFF operation
from a single primary feeder, other
standard arrangements are available
for use with primary selective power
centers involving two primary alternate sources. These arrangements
are shown above.
Air Terminal Compartment
Type MVS Fused Switch
Air terminal chamber is furnished when

connecting cables only to the transformer, such as in the case when the
primary circuit protection or disconnect
switch is remotely located from the unit
substation. The standard air terminal
chamber is a floor-standing, metalenclosure mechanically and electrically
connected to the transformer primary,
and includes the following equipment:
Secondary unit substations requiring a

primary disconnect are furnished with
Eatons Type MVS metal-enclosed load
interrupter switchgear assemblies. Each
assembly consists of one (or more)
gang-operated MVS switch(es) with
full air load break characteristics. With
power fuses incorporated into the
assembly, the MVS switchgear provides
short circuit protection for the transformer as well. MVS switchgear is
furnished as the standard high side
disconnecting equipment for all
secondary unit substations, both
dry-types and liquid-filled types.
Assembly, Type MSB
Ratings
Clamp-type terminals and busconnectors, if required, for making

the connection from the bushings to
the customer-furnished incoming
cables
Undrilled entrance plate for top or
bottom entry of customer cables
Cutout and hardware for bolting
to transformer Z-Bar flange
Gasket for installation between
terminal chamber and Z-Bar
flange connection for outdoor
designs only
Removable end panel for access
to chamber
See Technical Data Page 14.0-43 for

standard ratings. For additional
details, see MVS Tab 8.
MVS Switchgear Features
CA08104001E
Quick-make, quick-break stored

energy manual or optional
electrically operated mechanism
Removable operating handle
conveniently and attractively stored
DE-ION arc interruption
Positive position indication
Standard insulated cable connections
to transformer (voltage rating 15 kV
maximum) for fused switches
Available with current limiting fuses
or expulsion fuses, or unfused
Proven reliability
UL or CSA listing is available as
an option
MVS switchgear, when provided

with a fixed-mounted medium voltage
vacuum circuit breaker instead of
fuses, is termed Type MSB metalenclosed switchgear. Use of the
medium voltage circuit breaker in
conjunction with protective relaying
provides a significantly higher level
of protection for the transformer and
low voltage switchboard/switchgear
than that attainable with fuses. Typical
protection relaying functions are:
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Overcurrent and ground fault

protection
Transformer differential
Rate of rise relay on liquid-filled
transformer
14
On single-ended substations, deleting

the secondary main circuit breaker might
be possible as the medium voltage
circuit breaker and the protective relays
would serve the same purpose. In some
critical applications, it may still be
necessary to apply overcurrent relaying
on the secondary of the transformer to
trip the medium voltage circuit breaker
rather than relying solely on the primary
16
Other Available Primary Incoming

Line Equipment
20
Medium voltage metal-clad switchgear.

See Tab 5.
21
15
17
18
19

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 012
General Description
Liquid-Filled Substation
Transformers
Standard Features and Accessories
ii
Eatons liquid-filled substation transformers are custom-designed power

transformers suitable for both indoor
and outdoor applications.
2
3
4
5
The transformers are of the sealed

tank design and suitable for use
in coordinated unit substation in
most any type of application and
environment. Typical applications
of liquid-filled transformers are:
Utility substations
Pulp and paper mills
Steel mills
Chemical plants/refineries
General industry
Commercial buildings
Benefits
Custom-design flexibility to meet
special customer needs and
applications
Computerized loss-evaluated
designs for specific customer
load and evaluation criteria
8
9
Available in higher kVA ratings

High short-circuit strength
IEEE short-time overload capability
Aluminum or copper windings
Impervious to the environment
through sealed design
Lowest first cost and comparable
cost of ownership to cast/dry designs
Available as mineral oil-filled or
with less-flammable liquids, such
as silicone or environmentally
friendly fluids
Design and Technology

Liquid-filled transformers are custom
designed and manufactured. Coils are
of the rectangular design with Insuldur
layer insulation. Primary windings are
comprised of strap conductors, either
aluminum or copper. Secondary
windings are either full height sheet
conductors or strap conductor dependent on the voltage and kVA rating.
The turn-to-turn insulation is coated
with a diamond pattern of B-stage
epoxy adhesive, which cures during
processing to form a high-strength
bond. This bond restrains the windings during operation and under
short-circuit stresses.
Liquid-filled transformers are suitable

for use up to 65C average rise over
a maximum ambient temperature of
40C, not to exceed 30C average for
any 24-hour period. The transformer
may be specified as 55C rise, in which
case the transformer has a self-cooled
(OA) overload capability of 112%
without loss of life.
Material used for cores is non-aging,
cold rolled, high permeability, grainoriented silicone steel. Cores are rigidly
braced to reduce sound levels and
losses in the finished product.
The core and coil assembly is immersed
in either mineral oil, silicone or
environmentally friendly fluids
and is contained in a sealed tank.
Flat, tubular or panel radiators are
mounted on the front and back of the
tank. The liquid circulates through the
tank and radiators by means of natural
convection, and effectively cools the
core and coil assembly.
10
11
Mechanical Relief Device

(Optional)
Padlockable
No Load Tap Changer
Lifting Hooks and Loops
Welded Tank Cover
12
Pressure Vacuum Gauge
13
High Voltage
Cast Resin Bushing
(Not Visible)
Dial Type Thermometer

Magnetic Liquid Level
Gauge (Not Visible)
Low Voltage Sealed
Cast Resin Bushing
14
15
LV and HV
Z-Bar Flanges for
Connection to Incoming
Line Section and
Switchgear Section
Stainless Steel
Diagrammatic
Nameplate
16
Provision for Forced Air Cooling

is Standard on Transformers
750 kVA and Above
17
Upper Filter
Press Connection
(Not Visible)
18
19
1.00-Inch Drain Valve with

0.38-inch (9.6 mm) Sampler
Base
NEMA Ground Pad
20
Liquid-Filled Substation Transformer
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 013
General Description
Liquid-Filled Substation
Transformers (Continued)
Optional Features
Accessories
Standard accessories include:
De-energized padlockable manual

tap changer
Liquid level gauge
Dial type thermometer
Drain valve
Lifting hooks
Jacking pads
Ground pad
Diagrammatic nameplate
Bolted handhole
Provisions for rolling and skidding
ANSI 61 paint finish
Rapid pressure rise relay with

seal in
Pressure relief device
Pressure vacuum gauge
Upper filter press cap
Dial hot spot indicator
Alarm contacts on gauges
Control power transformer,
single-phase 480120/240V
55C average rise
Non-standard ambient temperature
(30C average/24-hour 40C
maximum is standard)
Non-standard altitude (up to
3300 ft (1006m) is standard)
Non-standard BIL level
Fan cooling package
Lightning arresters
Low loss design (loss evaluation)
Special sound level
Wye-wye connected windings
Tank undercoating
Copper windings/bussing
Containment pan with drain valve
UL listed
FM (factory mutual) certified
Future fan provisions (on units
7502500 kVA)
Core ground strap
Neutral grounding resistor
Factory Tests
The following tests are standard:
Induced potential
Applied potential
Resistance measurement
Ratio test
Polarity and phase relationship test
No load loss
Exciting current at rated voltage
Impedance and load loss
Regulation, calculated from test
results
Mechanical leak test
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Special Tests
The following tests can be provided
at additional cost:
Temperature rise
ANSI impulse
Sound level
Corona (partial discharge)
Witness
Insulation resistance and power
factor test
Short circuit
Zero-phase sequence impedance
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 014
General Description
VPI/VPE Dry-Type
Transformers
ii
1
2
3
4
Eatons VPI and VPE transformers

are custom-designed dry-type power
transformers, which give environmental protection, for both indoor and
outdoor applications. The transformers are explosion-resistant, fireresistant, non-polluting to the
environment, and ideally suitable for
use in coordinated unit substations.
Typical applications of VPI/VPE
transformers are:
Ventilation
Louvers
Fan Control/
Winding
Temperature
Indicator
Core-Coil
Assembly
Removable
Panel
Schools, hospitals, shopping centers

High-rise buildings
Industrial environments
Benefits
10
11
12
Ratings
13
14
15
16

applications
designs for specific customer load
and evaluation criteria
Environmental protection
Low maintenance
High short-circuit strength
Available in NEMA 1, 2 and
3R enclosures
Economical
112.53750 kVA
Primary voltages: 600V35 kV
Primary BIL: up to 150 kV
Secondary voltages: 120V15 kV
Secondary BIL: up to 75 kV
Temperature rise: 80/115/150C
Fan Motor and Blades
Dry-Type Substation Transformer

The dry-type transformers are custom
designed and manufactured with coils
insulated with 220C Class H Nomex ,
insulation system. Environmental
protection is provided by vacuum
pressure impregnation with polyester
resin (VPI). Enhanced environmental
protection is available through the use
of silicone resin encapsulation (VPE).
The VPE process provides 4-cycle
enhanced environmental protection.
The entire core and coil assembly is
vacuum pressure encapsulated with
a silicone resin per MIL-1-24092. Both
systems are superior to the conventional dry-type technology known as
Dip and Bake. Both resin types, and
Nomex, insulation system are 220C
Class H rated. Transformers with Class
H insulation are suitable for use up to
150C average rise over a maximum
ambient temperature of 40C, not to
exceed 30C average for any 24-hour
period. Other temperature rise options
are 80C and 115C, which allow the
transformer to be overloaded up to
150C rise.
Taps are provided on the central section

of the HV coil face. Taps are accessed by
removing enclosure panels, and taps are
changed by moving the flexible bolted
links from one connecting point to the
other. To simplify these changes, the
connection points are clearly identified.
cold rolled, high permeability, grainoriented silicone steel. Cores are constructed with step lap mitered joints and
are rigidly braced to reduce sound levels
and losses in the finished product.
To reduce the transfer of noise to the
case, the core is mounted on neoprene
rubber vibration dampeners. The core
is electrically grounded by means of
a flexible ground braid.
The enclosure has removable panels
for access to taps and for core and coil
inspection. The complete case can be
removed and knocked down to reduce
size and weight for rigging into tight
locations.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 015
General Description
VPI/VPE Dry-Type
Transformers (Continued)
Optional Features
Accessories
Jacking pads
Ground pad
Provisions for rolling
Ventilation grilles
Core ground strap
Primary reconnectable taps
Future fan provisions on units
over 500 kVA
Core ground strap
NEMA 1 enclosure
Copper windings/bussing
(aluminum is standard)
VPE silicone resin vacuum pressure
impregnation and encapsulation
Fan cooling package, complete with
digital winding temperature
80C or 115C rise (150C rise is
standard)
NEMA 3R enclosure
Aluminum or copper ground bus
Lightning arresters
Special sound level
UL label
Tests
Induced potential
Applied potential
Ratio test
No load loss at rated voltage
Quality control impulse
Special Tests
The following tests can be provided at
additional cost:
Temperature rise
ANSI impulse
Sound level
Witness
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 016
General Description
RESIBLOC Epoxy Cast

Resin Transformers
ii
Available in NEMA 1, 2, 3R
enclosures
Low losses and longest life for
greatest economy of ownership
Ratings
4
5
RESIBLOC Substation Transformer
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Eatons RESIBLOC cast resin transformers are premium, custom-designed,

dry-type power transformers that offer
longer life, higher BIL levels, superior
mechanical and short-circuit strength,
as well as superior protection against
high moisture, metallic dust-laden and
harsh chemical environments.
RESIBLOC cast resin transformer may
be applied indoors as well as outdoors.
The transformers are explosionresistant, fire-resistant, non-polluting
to the environment and ideally suitable
for use in a coordinated unit substation.
Typical applications of RESIBLOC cast
resin transformers are:
14
15
17
18
20
21
Steel mills
High-rise buildings/rooftop units
Cement mills and mining operations
Chemical plants
Water-slide installations, sand and
salt spray
Rail transportation systems
Benefits
16
19
112.53750 kVA
Primary voltages: 2300V34.5 kV
Temperature rise: 80C

applications
Environmental immunity, unlimited
storage
Practically maintenance free
Highest possible short-circuit
strength
Ultimate withstand to thermal and
mechanical stresses
ANSI short-time overload capability
Copper windings
The RESIBLOC epoxy cast resin

transformers are custom-designed and
manufactured with coils insulated with
epoxy and reinforced with glass fiber.
Low Voltage Windings

Transformer low voltage windings
with an insulation class of 1.2 kV (600V)
and below, are wound using sheet
conductors that allow free current
distribution within the axial width of
the coil and that eliminate the axial
forces developed in other types of
windings under short-circuit conditions. The impregnated insulation
bonds the sheet conductors together
to form a solid winding block for
internal mechanical strength. During
assembly, each low voltage winding
is blocked radially against the core
for additional short-circuit integrity.
High Voltage Windings

Transformer high voltage windings,
insulation class 2.5 kV (2400V) and
above, are wound using the exclusive
RESIBLOC cast resin construction,
which is reinforced with a licensed
glass roving technique. This fiber
roving technique was originally
developed for production of synthetic
cylindrical components, such as
containers, which are subject to
high mechanical loads. The use of
the glass fiber roving technique in
the manufacture of RESIBLOC
transformers provides mechanical,
thermal and short-circuit strength
that is unequaled. The high coils
are coaxially mounted over the low
voltage windings on the core legs.
Temperature Rise
RESIBLOC cast transformers use
155C class insulation and are typically
specified for 80C average rise over
a maximum ambient temperature
of 40C, not to exceed 30C average
for any 24-hour period.
Taps
Taps are provided on the central
section of the HV coil face. Taps are
accessed by removing enclosure panels, and taps are changed by moving
the flexible bolted links from one
connecting point to the other. To
simplify these changes, the connection
points are clearly identified.
Core
cold rolled, high permeability, grainoriented silicone steel. Cores are constructed with strap lap mitered joints
and are rigidly braced to reduce sound
levels and losses in the finished product.
and associated core clamps and structural parts are electrically grounded to
prevent an induced voltage buildup.
Enclosure
for access to taps and for core and coil
inspection. The complete case can be
removed and knocked down to reduce
size and weight for rigging into tight
locations.
Accessories
Jacking pads
Ground pad
Ventilation grilles
Core ground strap
over 500 kVA
Reconnectable primary taps
NEMA 1 enclosure
Epoxy
The epoxy used in RESIBLOC is a
bisphenol A-based resin that is
halogen-free to ensure that no harmful
decomposition products are formed in
the event of a fire. In addition, epoxy
is one of the best non-hygroscopic
materials available for insulation, and
is highly resistive to chemicals and
harsh industrial environments.
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 017
General Description
RESIBLOC Epoxy Cast

Resin Transformers (Continued)
Optional Features

NEMA 3R enclosure
Lightning arresters
Special sound level
Tests
Special Tests

at additional cost:
Induced potential
Applied potential
Ratio test
Polarity and phase relationship test.
No load loss
Partial discharge test (for coils rated
1.2 kV and higher)
Temperature rise
ANSI impulse
Sound level
Witness
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 018
General Description

ii
1
2
3
4
5
Eatons cast coil transformers are

premium, custom-designed, dry-type
power transformers, which offer longer
life, higher BIL levels, superior shortcircuit strength and superior protection
against high moisture, metallic dustladen and harsh chemical environments.
Cast coil transformers may be applied
indoors as well as outdoors.
The transformers are explosion resistant, fire resistant, non-polluting to the
environment and ideally suitable for
use in coordinated unit substations.
Typical applications of cast coil
transformers are:
6
7
8
9
Benefits
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21

applications
Environmental immunity,
unlimited storage
Practically maintenance free
Highest possible short-circuit
strength
Available in NEMA 1, 2 and
3R enclosures
Low losses and longest life for
greatest economy of ownership
Ultimate impulse withstand
Moisture and chemical resistant
Ratings
19
Steel mills
High-rise buildings/rooftop units
Cement mills and mining operations
Chemical plants
Water-side installations, sand and
salt spray
Rail transportation systems
112.53750 kVA
Primary voltage: 2300V46 kV
Temperature rise: 80/100/115C
Ventilation
Louvers
LV Bus
Fan Control/
Winding
Temperature
Indicator
Core-Coil
Assembly
Removable
Panel
HV Bus
Fan Motors
and Blades
Cast Coil Substation Transformer

The cast coil transformers are customdesigned and manufactured with coils
insulated with materials such as glass
mat and DuPont Nomex. The epoxy
used in the casting process has the
lowest temperature tolerance and
limits the insulation system to 185C.
The thickness of the epoxy is carefully
engineered to provide maximum
strength and environmental protection
and yet minimize the temperature
differential through the core thickness
in order to limit destructive stresses.
HV and LV coils are separately
manufactured and mounted coaxially
on the core legs with blocks to hold
them firmly, yet permit expansion and
contraction. HV windings are wound
with one or more strands of rectangular
wire, into disc or drum development,
and placed into molds. They are
dried and vacuum poured or cast, to
eliminate moisture and voids in the
sealing process. Low voltage windings
are hermetically sealed in epoxy using
one of two processes. The windings
can also be designed with air ducts for
improved cooling performance. The
first method used to seal low voltage
windings is the pre-impregnated
insulation process. This process
consists of winding the sheet
conductor(s) in parallel with an epoxy
pre-impregnated sheet of insulation.
After the winding process is completed,
the coil is baked to dry the moisture
from the winding and to cure the epoxy
pre-impregnated insulation. The curing
process binds the coil together to form
a solid winding block. The ends of the
coil are then sealed with epoxy for
added protection. The second process
is to cast the low voltage winding in a

mold. Windings with operating voltage
less than 600V are cast using a pressure
injection process. Winding with operating voltages greater than 600V are
processed using the same techniques
employed for the high voltage windings. Cast transformers use 185C class
insulation and are typically specified for
80C average rise over a maximum
ambient temperature of 40C, not to
exceed 30C average for any 24-hour
period. Other temperature rise options
are 100C or 115C.
Taps are provided on the central section
of the HV coil face. Taps are accessed
by removing enclosure panels, and
taps are changed by moving the flexible bolted links from one connecting
point to the other. To simplify these
changes, the connection points are
clearly identified.
cold rolled, high permeability, grainoriented silicone steel, cores are constructed with strap lap mitered joints
and are rigidly braced to reduce sound
levels and losses in the finished product.
and associated core clamps and structural parts are electrically grounded to
prevent an induced voltage buildup.
for access to taps, and for core and coil
inspection. The complete case can
be removed and knocked down to
reduce size and weight for rigging
into tight locations.
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 019
General Description

(Continued)
Optional Features
Accessories
Jacking pads
Ground pad
Ventilation grilles
Core ground strap
over 500 kVA
Reconnectable primary taps
NEMA 1 enclosure
Copper windings
Full cast secondary
100C or 115C rise (80C rise is
standard)
(30C average/24-hour, 40C
Non-standard BIL levels
NEMA 3R enclosure
Lightning arresters
Special sound level
UL listing
Special Tests
at additional cost:
Temperature rise
ANSI impulse
Sound level
Witness
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tests
Induced potential
Applied potential
Ratio test
No load loss
Partial discharge test (for coils rated
1.2 kV and higher)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 020
General Description
Integrated Unit Substation

Optional Configuration
ii
1
2
Product Offering
When electrical room space is limited

or when additional electrical system
capacity is required for renovation of
an existing building, unit substation
dimensions can create layout
challenges for electrical designers
and engineers. The solution to these
problems is Eatons IUSintegrated
unit substation.
By combining transformer primary

and secondary protective devices in
a single section, Eatons IUS offers
a significant floorspace reduction
compared to other substation designs.
3
4
The IUS uses a 5 or 15 kV class

VCP-T drawout vacuum breaker for
transformer primary protection,
integrated with a 600V Magnum DS
drawout air circuit breaker for
transformer secondary protection.
Both breakers are in a single UL
listed structure.
5
6
7
The integrated unit substation

addresses issues that matter to
building owners, electrical contractors
and engineers, including:
10
11
Integrated Unit Substation
Reduction in installation time

Fewer structures
Reduction in delivery time
Reduction in overall floor space
Reduction in overall installed costs
Reduction in material handling and
rigging requirements
12
13
Up to 15 kV, 1200A primary

(VCP-T breaker up to 25 kAIC)
Up to 600V, 6000A secondary
(Magnum DS breaker up to
100 kAIC)
Main structure is 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) wide x 91.00 inches
(2311.4 mm) deep
Standard coordination available
to Eaton dry-type or cast-coil
substation transformers
For main breaker applications 4000A or

above, a separate 44.00 inch (1117.6 mm)
structure is required beside the main
24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure.
Features
Shorter approval drawing
lead-times
Fewer control wiring
interconnections
Improved transformer access
transformer is not sandwiched
between primary and secondary
equipment
Reduction of arc-flash hazard by
incorporating VCP-T primary
breaker with Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System trip unit
IUS Standards
The integrated unit substation
primary/secondary breaker section
is UL listed. The IUS complies with
ANSI C37.20.1 and ANSI C37.51 for
the low voltage compartment, and
ANSI C37.20.3 for the medium
voltage compartment.
Low voltage power switchgear
distribution sections are UL 1558 listed
and comply with ANSI C37.20.1.
14
Transformer sections are UL 1562

listed and comply with ANSI C37.30.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 021
General Description
Magnum DS Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed

Switchgear
DSII Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed

Switchgear
See Tab 20 for complete description and layout information.
Contact Eaton for complete description and layout information.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DSII
Magnum DS
Construction Details
10,000A main bus capacity

Front-access enclosures available for use in front-access
substations, allowing the substation to be placed up
against a wall
All devices individually mounted and compartmentalized
Sections flush front and rear
Drawout construction
Designed for mounting away from the wall
Main DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized
Eatons Magnum DS power circuit breakers with integral

microprocessor-based Digitrip RMS trip units and
stored energy manual or electrical operating mechanism,
8006000A
Feeder DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized
Magnum DS power circuit breakers with integral

8006000A
6000A main bus capacity

Front and rear accessible
All devices individually mounted and compartmentalized
Sections flush front and rear
All units are drawout construction
Designed for mounting away from wall
Main DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized

Eaton DSII power circuit breakers with integral
8005000A, drawout mounted
DSLII power circuit breakerssame as DSII except
equipped with current limiters for 200 kA fault current
application, 8004000A, drawout mounted
10
11
12
13
Feeder DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized

DSII power circuit breakers with integral microprocessorbased Digitrip RMS trip units and stored energy manual
or electrical operating mechanism, 8005000A, drawout
cell mounted
Eaton DSLII power circuit breakerssame as DSII except
equipped with current limiters for 200 kA fault current
application, 8004000A, drawout mounted
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Product Overview
December 2012
Sheet 14 022
General Description
Magnum SB Switchboards
Pow-R-Line C Switchboards
Magnum SB
Pow-R-Line C
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
6000A main bus maximum

Rear accessmain and distribution sections
Drawout feeder devices individually compartmentalized
Designed for mounting with code clearance to a wall
Main DevicesIndividually Mounted
13
Insulated-case circuit breaker, Magnum SB, 8006000A,

drawout, per UL 1066
Feeder DevicesIndividually Mounted
14
15
16
Insulated-case circuit breaker, Magnum SB, 8004000A,

drawout per UL 1066

Front and rear accessmain section front and/or
side accessible
Feeder devices panel mounted
Sections rear aligned, or front and rear aligned
Not designed for mounting against a wall, self-supporting
and requires code clearance at the rear
Main DevicesIndividually Mounted

Molded case circuit breaker, 4002500A, fixed or drawout
Air power circuit breaker, Magnum DS, 8006000A, fixed
or drawout
Air power circuit breaker with current limiting fuses, DSL,
8005000A
Bolted pressure switch, 8005000A, fixed
Fusible switches, 4001200A, fixed
Feeder DevicesGroup Mounted
17
18
Molded-case circuit breaker, 151200A

Fusible switches, 301200A
Feeder DevicesIndividually Mounted

Air power circuit breaker, Magnum DS, 8005000A
Bolted pressure switches, 8005000A, fixed
Molded-case circuit breaker, 16002500A
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 023
Indoor Liquid-Filled
Indoor Composite Floor PlanLiquid-Filled Transformer
Rear
Primary Equipment
ii
Transformer
Transition
Section
Secondary Equipment
Transition
Section
D2R
DTX
DP
CL
of Transformer
DS
D2F
D1F
2
3
4
5
WP
WTX
W1
WS
W2
Front
Figure 14.0-7. Liquid-Filled, IndoorTop View
Legend:
Table 14.0-13. Primary Equipment Dimension References

Primary
Equipment
Dimensions
Reference
Page(s)
Transformer
MVS
ME
MC
WTX, DTX
WP, DP
WP, DP
WP, DP
Page 14.0-31
Page 14.0-30
Page 14.0-30
Tab 5

Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage
kV
Primary
Equipment
Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase Four-Wire

W1
D1F
MVS
ME
MC
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
18.00 (457.2)
25.25 (641.3)
25.25 (641.3)
42.50 (1079.5)
27
MVS
MC
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)

38
MVS
MC
30.00 (762.0)
42.00 (1066.8)

5 or 15

8
9
10
11
12
13
For three-phase, four-wire, D1F is 30.25.

Contact Eaton.
14
Table 14.0-14. Secondary Equipment Dimension ReferencesDimensions in Inches (mm)

For WS, DS Dimensions
15
Secondary
Equipment
W2
D2F
D2R
Magnum DS and SB switchgear (rear access)
22.00 (558.8)
45.00 (1143.0)
20.1-25
16
Pow-R-Line C switchboard (front access)

Pow-R-Line C switchboard (rear access)
Pow-R-Line i switchboard (rear access)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
21.1 (All)
21.2 (All)
21.3 (All)
17
Tab-Page
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 024
Outdoor Liquid-Filled
Outdoor Composite Floor PlanLiquid-Filled Transformer
ii
D1R
DP
3
D1F
Secondary Equipment
Transition Section/Throat
Primary Equipment
Transformer
DTX
CL
of Transformer
D2 R
DS
Transition
Section/Throat
4
5
WP
W2
W TX
W1
WS
Door
Swing
Walk-in Aisle (if used)
7
Figure 14.0-8. Liquid-Filled, Outdoor EnclosureTop View
Legend:
Primary
Equipment
Dimensions
Reference
Page(s)
10
Transformer
MVS
ME
MC
WTX, DTX
WP, DP
WP, DP
WP, DP
Page 14.0-31
Page 14.0-30
Page 14.0-30
Tab 5
11
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition Section/ThroatDimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage
kV
Primary
Equipment
Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase Four-Wire

W1
D1F
D1R
MVS
ME
MC
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
16.00 (406.4)
25.25 (641.3)
25.25 (641.3)
16.50 (419.1)
27
MVS
MC
35.00 (889.0)
38
MVS
MC
35.00 (889.0)
12
13
14
5 or 15
15
16

Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS

For three-phase, four-wire, D1F is 30.25 inches (768.4 mm).

For three-phase, four-wire, D1R is 14.50 inches (368.3 mm).
Contact Eaton.

Secondary
Equipment
W2
D2R

Tab-Page
17
Magnum DS and SB switchgear
38.50 (977.9)
27.00 (685.8)
20.1-25, 14.0-39
18

25.00 (635.0)
25.00 (635.0)
25.00 (635.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
25.00 (635.0)
21.1 (All)
21.2 (All)
21.3 (All)
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 025
Indoor IUS
Indoor IUS Composite Floor Plan
i
ii
1
2
DS
Secondary Equipment
DIUS
S
IUS
Transformer
DTX
3
4
5
Front
WS
WIUS
WTX
Figure 14.0-9. IUS with Liquid-Filled or Dry-Type TransformerTop View

Table 14.0-17. IUS (Primary & Secondary) Equipment Dimension References
Primary and Secondary
Equipment
Dimensions
Reference
Page(s)
Transformer
IUS
WTX, DTX
WIUS, DIUS
Pages 14.0-36 and 14.0-38

Page 14.0-20
Notes:
The IUS houses both the primary (MV) and secondary (LV) equipment breaker.
Primary (MV) equipment is housed in the bottom portion of the IUS Structure.
Secondary (LV) equipment is housed in the top portion of the IUS Structure.
A VCP-T (MV) breaker is used between the primary equipment and transformer.
See Tab 5 for additional information on the VCP-T breaker.
A Magnum-DS (LV) breaker is used between the transformer and secondary equipment.
See Tab 26 for additional information on the Magnum DS breaker.
The IUS/Transformer is a front-aligned substation.
Legend:
IUS = Integrated Unit Substation
TX = Transformer
LV = Low Voltage
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 026
Indoor Dry-Type
Indoor Composite Floor PlanDry-Type Transformer
ii
1
DP
DTX
Primary Equipment
Transformer
Transition
Section
Transition
Section
Secondary Equipment
W2
WS
DS
3
4
Front
WP
WTX
W1
Figure 14.0-10. Ventilated Dry-Type, RESIBLOC and Cast Coil, IndoorTop View
6
7
8
9
10
11
Legend:

Primary
Equipment
Dimensions
Reference
Page(s)
Transformer
MVS
ME
MC
WTX, DTX
WP, DP
WP, DP
WP, DP
Pages 14.0-35 and 14.0-37

Page 14.0-30
Page 14.0-30
Tab 5

Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS

Secondary
Equipment
Magnum DS and SB switchgear (rear access)
20.1-25
Tab-Page
Magnum DS and SB switchgear (front access)
20.1-31

21.1 (All)
21.2 (All)
21.3 (All)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 027
Outdoor Dry-Type
Outdoor Composite Floor PlanDry-Type Transformer
i
ii
Transition Section
Transition Section
T
Primary Equipment
DP
1
DTX
Transformer
DS
Secondary Equipment
3
4
5
Front
WP
WTX
W1
WS
W2
Figure 14.0-11. Ventilated Dry-Type, RESIBLOC and Cast Coil, OutdoorTop View
Legend:

Primary
Equipment
Dimensions
Reference
Page(s)
Transformer
MVS
ME
MC
WTX, DTX
WP, DP
WP, DP
WP, DP
Pages 14.0-35 and 14.0-37

Page 14.0-30
Page 14.0-30
Tab 5
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition Section/ThroatDimensions in Inches (mm)

Primary
Equipment
W1
5 kV
15 kV
27 kV
MVS
ME
MC
5.00 (127.0)
20.00 (508.0)
16.00 (406.4)
5.00 (127.0)
20.00 (508.0)
16.00 (406.4)
N/A
N/A
38 kV

Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS
7
8
9
10
11
Contact Eaton.
12

Secondary
Equipment
W2
Magnum DS and SB switchgear
38.50 (977.9)


Tab-Page
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
20.1-25
21.1 (All)
21.2 (All)
21.3 (All)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 028
ii
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) UsageLiquid-Filled Transformer

A substation using one or two air terminal chambers (ATCs) is different from a substation using close-coupling on both the
primary and secondary sides. An ATC uses a cable connection on either the primary side, secondary side or both, and is
placed between the transformer and the remotely mounted primary or secondary equipment.
Transformer
D2 R
2
3
DP
4
D1F
Air T
Terminal Chamber
D1R
DTX
CL
of Transformer
9
10
11
12
13
DS
W1
7
8
Air T
Terminal
minal Ch
Chamber
W2
W TX
Figure 14.0-12. Liquid-Filled Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View

Table 14.0-22. Primary ATC or Transition Section

Table 14.0-23. Secondary ATC or Transition Section

Voltage
Voltage
kV
W1
DP
5 or 15
27
38
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
DTX
DTX
DTX
All
Note: Minimum ATC widths by kVA are listed in the table above.
The width of any ATC can be expanded to allow for the installation
of additional conduits. When calculating the area of the conduit
opening, allow for a 2.00-inch (50.8 mm) lip around the entire
perimeter of the ATC.
W2
DS
18.00 (457.2)
DTX
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 029
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) UsageDry-Type Transformer

A substation using one or two air terminal chambers (ATCs) is different from a substation using close-coupling on both the
primary and secondary sides. An ATC using a cable connection on either the primary side, secondary side or both, and is
placed between the transformer and the remotely mounted primary or secondary equipment.
i
ii
1
DP
Transition Section
Transition Section
2
DTX
Transformer
DS
4
5
Front
WTX
W1
W2
Figure 14.0-13. Dry-Type Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View


Protective collars are only used on outdoor designs.
Table 14.0-24. Primary ATC or Transition Section

Table 14.0-25. Secondary ATC or Transition Section

Voltage
Voltage
kV
W1
DP
5 or 15
27
38
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
DTX
DTX
DTX
All
W2
DS
18.00 (457.2)
DTX
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 030
Primary Switching Equipment
Primary Switching EquipmentType MVS/MSB Switchgear

Table 14.0-26. Primary Switching EquipmentType MVS Switchgear
ii
1
Rated
Maximum
Voltage,
kV

Fault
Close kV WP
DP
Asym.
Three-Wire
Maximum
5
15
27
38
64
64
60
30
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
5
15
27
38
64
64
60
30
72.00 (1828.8) 62.00 (1574.8)

72.00 (1828.8) 62.00 (1574.8)
96.00 (2438.4) 100.00 (2540.0)
96.00 (2438.4) 100.00 (2540.0)
Selector
switch
5
15
64
64
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
62.00 (1574.8)
70.00 (1778.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
70.00 (1778.0)
Sectionalizing
loop feed
switches
5
15
27
38
64
64
60
30
108.00 (2743.2)
108.00 (2743.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
144.00 (3657.6)
55.30 (1404.6)
55.30 (1404.6)
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
62.00 (1574.8)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)

80.00 (2032.0)
127.00 (3225.8)
135.00 (3429.0)

80.00 (2032.0)
127.00 (3225.8)
135.00 (3429.0)
Configuration
of Switch(es)
Single
switch
2
3
4
5
6
Duplex
(two)
switches

9
10
11
14
15
16
62.00 (1574.8)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
62.00 (1574.8)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
80.00 (2032.0) 127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0)
80.00 (2032.0) 127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
100.00 (2540.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0)
127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
Configuration
of Switch(es)
and Vacuum Breaker
Fault Close Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Rated
Maximum kV Asym.
WP
DP
Voltage, kV Maximum
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
10.00 (254.0) 20.00 (508.0)

10.00 (254.0) 20.00 (508.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
Single
5
15
64
64
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
5
15
64
64
5
15
64
64
Height (Outdoor
Non-Walk-in)
WC
CC
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
114.00 (2895.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
52
Duplex
52
Sectionalizing
loop feed
switches

52
A transition section is required when any MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a liquid-filled transformer and when any MSB switchgear
assembly is connected to any kind of transformer. When a 5 or 15 kV MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a dry-type or cast coil transformer,
no transition section is required when installed indoors, but a 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) throat is required when installed outdoors.
WC
6.6 (167.6)
6.6
(167.6)
CC
CC
WC
WC WC
WC
WC
WC WC
WC

Description
6.6 (167.6)
CC
Indoor
Outdoor
1600 (726)
1500 (681)
1900 (863)
1800 (817)
200 (91)
300 (136)
200 (91)
1200 (544)
2000 (908)
2400 (1090)
300 (136)
1100 (499)
300 (136)
1200 (544)
5 or 15 kV Class
MSB section
MVS section
(non-fused)
Fuses (3) add
Transition section
Outdoor throat
DP
19
25.8 or 38 kV Class
WP
Single or Selector
Plan View
21
CC
Height
(Indoor)
18
20
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
WC
Table 14.0-27. Primary Switching EquipmentType MSB Switchgear
WC
17
55.30 (1404.6)
55.30 (1404.6)
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
Height (Outdoor
Non-Walk-in)
A transition section is required when any MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a liquid-filled transformer and when any MSB switchgear
assembly is connected to any kind of transformer. When a 5 or 15 kV MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a dry-type or cast coil transformer,
no transition section is required when installed indoors, but a 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) throat is required when installed outdoors.
Where disconnect fuses are used, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to section width, 5 and 15 kV only.
When height of 101.50 inches (2578.1 mm) is used with fuses identified in footnote , the depth increases to 100.00 inches (2540.0 mm).
Height is 101.50 inches (2578.1 mm) for 27 kV MVS switchgear without fuses or with Cooper type NX fuses, and 38 kV MVS switchgear without
fuses or with GE type EJO-1 fuses.
Height is 110.00 inches (2794.0 mm) for 27 kV MVS switchgear without fuses or with Cooper type NX fuses, and 38 kV MVS switchgear without
fuses or with GE type EJO-1 fuses.
Can be 62.00 inches (1574.8 mm) deep if incoming cable enters from below.
12
13
Height
(Indoor)
Four-Wire
WP
WP
Duplex
Plan View
Sectionalized Loop Feed

Plan View
MVS section
(non-fused)
Fuses (3) add
Transition section
Outdoor throat
Figure 14.0-14. Primary Equipment Floor Plan

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 031
Transformers
Table 14.0-29. Oil-Filled Standard Design, 60 Hz, HV Delta, LV at 600V Class (30 kV BIL) Indoor or Outdoor Application
kVA
HV, kV
HV BIL, kV
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Liquid
Gallons (Liters)
38.20 (970.3)
47.00 (1193.8)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
115.00 (2921.0)
118.00 (2997.2)
6100 (2767)
7400 (3357)
9300 (4218)
9301 (4219)
9302 (4219)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
17,250 (7825)
17,250 (7825)
17,250 (7825)
17,850 (8097)
17,850 (8097)
16,800 (7627)
18,000 (8165)
480 (1817)
517 (1957)
575 (2177)
HTX
WTX
DTX
53.00 (1346.2)
57.00 (1447.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
70.00 (1778.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
Oil-Filled 65C Rise

300
500
750
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3750
5 or 15
5 or 15
5 or 15
25
35
5 or 15
25
35
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
60 or 95
60 or 95
125
150
60 or 95
125
150
60 or 95
125
150
5 or 15
25
35
5 or 15
25
35
25
35
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
60 or 95
125
150
125
150
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
600 (2271)
640 (2423)
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3750
5 or 15
5 or 15
5 or 15
25
35
5 or 15
25
35
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
60 or 95
60 or 95
125
150
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
53.00 (1346.2)
57.00 (1447.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
50.50 (1282.7)
52.20 (1333.5)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
6100 (2767)
7400 (3357)
9300 (4218)
9301 (4219)
9302 (4219)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
5 or 15
25
35
5 or 15
25
35
25
35
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
60 or 95
125
150
125
150
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
70.00 (1778.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
122.00 (3098.8)
135.00 (3429.0)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
17,500 (7938)
17,500 (7938)
17,500 (7938)
17,850 (8097)
17,850 (8097)
16,800 (7620)
18,000 (8165)
1
2
3
4
650 (2461)
5
650 (2461)
6
680 (2574)
900 (3407)
Oil-Filled 55/65C Rise

300
500
750
ii
480 (1817)
517 (1957)
575 (2177)
7
8
9
600 (2271)
10
640 (2423)
11
670 (2536)
12
700 (2650)
13
700 (2650)
900 (3407)
14
15
Plan
Elevation
16
CLof Bushing
HTX
DTX
17
CL
18
19
WTX
20
Figure 14.0-15. Liquid-Filled, Indoor and Outdoor

= 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) for all ratings through 15 kV primary,

600V secondary.

CA08104001E
21

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 032
Transformers
i
ii

kVA
1
2
No Load
at 75C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
175
250
300
960
1250
1630
1135
1500
1930
413
562
696
225
300
500
330
520
730
2500
2600
4900
2830
3120
5630
750
1000
1500
1100
1500
1900
6200
6700
10,000
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
190
260
320
950
1300
1600
1140
1560
1920
413
562
696
942
1164
1889
225
300
500
400
500
700
2300
3000
5000
2700
3500
5700
942
1164
1889
7300
8200
11,900
2567
3221
4375
750
1000
1500
1000
1300
1900
6500
8500
10,500
7500
9800
12,400
2567
3221
4375
14,600
17,800
19,800
5429
6408
N/A
2000
2500
3000
2100
2700
4000
14,500
15,500
18,000
16,600
18,200
22,000
5429
6408
N/A

Designates units must typically meet the new DOE efficiency guideline
levels with noted losses complying with such.


7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 033
Transformers
Environmentally Friendly Fluid Filled Units
Table 14.0-32. Liquid-Filled Standard Design, 60 Hz, HV Delta, LV at 600V Class (30 kV BIL) Indoor or Outdoor Application
kVA
HV, kV
HV BIL, kV

WTX
HTX
DTX
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Liquid
Gallons (Liters)
ii
1
Liquid-Filled 65C Rise

300
5 or 15
60 or 95
73.00 (1854.2)
53.00 (1346.2)
38.20 (970.3)
6100 (2767)
480 (1817)
500
5 or 15
60 or 95
73.00 (1854.2)
57.00 (1447.8)
47.00 (1193.8)
7400 (3357)
517 (1957)
750
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
9300 (4218)
9301 (4219)
9302 (4219)
575 (2177)
1000
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
600 (2271)
1500
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
640 (2423)
2000
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
650 (2461)
2500
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
17,250 (7825)
17,250 (7825)
17,250 (7825)
650 (2461)
3000
25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
96.60 (2453.6)
17,850 (8097)
17,850 (8097)
680 (2574)
3750
25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
115.00 (2921.0)
118.00 (2997.2)
16,800 (7620)
18,000 (8165)
900 (3407)
73.00 (1854.2)
53.00 (1346.2)
50.50 (1282.7)
6100 (2767)
480 (1817)
4
5
6
7
8
Liquid-Filled 55/65C Rise

300
5 or 15
500
5 or 15
60 or 95
73.00 (1854.2)
57.00 (1447.8)
52.50 (1333.5)
7400 (3357)
517 (1957)
750
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
9300 (4218)
9301 (4219)
9302 (4219)
575 (2177)
1000
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
11,500 (5216)
11,500 (5216)
11,500 (5216)
600 (2271)
10
1500
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
63.60 (1615.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
13,500 (6124)
13,500 (6124)
13,500 (6124)
640 (2423)
11
2000
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
670 (2536)
12
2500
5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
17,500 (7938)
17,500 (7938)
17,500 (7938)
700 (2650)
13
3000
25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
18,000 (8165)
18,000 (8165)
700 (2650)
14
3750
25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
122.00 (3098.8)
135.00 (3429.0)
16,800 (7620)
18,000 (8165)
900 (3407)
Plan
60 or 95
16
Elevation
17
CLof Bushing
HTX
DTX
15
CL
18
19
WTX
20
Figure 14.0-16. Liquid-Filled, Indoor and Outdoor

= 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) for all ratings through 15 kV primary,

600V secondary.
CA08104001E
21

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 034
Transformers
i
ii

kVA
1
2
No Load
at 75C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
175
250
300
960
1250
1630
1135
1500
1930
413
562
696
225
300
500
330
520
730
2500
2600
4900
2830
3120
5630
750
1000
1500
1100
1500
1900
6200
6700
10,000
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
190
260
320
950
1300
1600
1140
1560
1920
413
562
696
942
1164
1889
225
300
500
400
500
700
2300
3000
5000
2700
3500
5700
942
1164
1889
7300
8200
11,900
2567
3221
4375
750
1000
1500
1000
1300
1900
6500
8500
10,500
7500
9800
12,400
2567
3221
4375
14,600
17,800
19,800
5429
6408
N/A
2000
2500
3000
2100
2700
4000
14,500
15,500
18,000
16,600
18,200
22,000
5429
6408
N/A



7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 035
Transformers
VPI and VPE Ventilated Dry-TypeStandard Unit Substation
Table 14.0-35. Aluminum Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600 Volt LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
kVA
HV, HV
kV BIL, H
WTX
kV TX
Weight
Lbs (kg)
DTX
150C Rise
kVA
HV, HV
kV BIL, H
WTX
kV TX
Weight
Lbs (kg)
DTX
80 or 115C Rise
ii
1
300
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 78.00 (1981.2)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)
102.00 (2590.8) 90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
3200 (1453)
3600 (1634)
4000 (1816)
4500 (2043)
300
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)
102.00 (2590.8) 96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
4000 (1816)
5000 (2270)
6000 (2724)
6500 (2951)
500
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 78.00 (1981.2)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)
102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
4400 (1998)
4600 (2088)
5000 (2270)
5500 (2497)
500
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)
102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
5200 (2361)
5800 (2633)
7000 (3178)
7500 (3405)
750
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 78.00 (1981.2)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)
102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2)
102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
5500 (2497)
6200 (2815)
6500 (2951)
7000 (3178)
750
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)
102.00 (2590.8) 114.00 (2895.6)
102.00 (2590.8) 114.00 (2895.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
6200 (2815)
7000 (3178)
8000 (3632)
8500 (3859)
1000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)
112.00 (2844.8) 114.00 (2895.6)
112.00 (2844.8) 114.00 (2895.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
6300 (2860)
7400 (3360)
7500 (3405)
8000 (3632)
1000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6)

90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0)
112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0)
66.00 (1676.4) 7800 (3541)

66.00 (1676.4) 8750 (3972)
72.00 (1828.8) 9500 (4313)
72.00 (1828.8) 10,000 (4540)
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)

96.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0) 120.00 (3048.0)
66.00 (1676.4) 8200 (3723)

66.00 (1676.4) 9300 (4222)
66.00 (1676.4) 10,000 (4540)
72.00 (1828.8) 10,500 (4767)
1500
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 9500 (4313)

102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 10,500 (4767)
112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 11,000 (4994)
112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 11,500 (5221)
2000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)

96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4)
120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4)
120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4)
66.00 (1676.4) 9400 (4268)

66.00 (1676.4) 10,500 (4767)
72.00 (1828.8) 12,000 (5448)
78.00 (1981.2) 12,500 (5675)
2000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4)

102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4)
120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 72.00 (1828.8)
120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 72.00 (1828.8)
12,000 (5448)
13,000 (5902)
13,200 (5993)
13,500 (6129)
2500
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8) 90.00 (2286.0)

108.00 (2743.2) 96.00 (2438.4)
120.00 (3048.0) 132.00 (3352.8)
120.00 (3048.0) 132.00 (3352.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
11,700 (5312)
13,000 (5002)
14,500 (6583)
15,000 (6810)
2500
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
130.00 (3302.0)
130.00 (3302.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
132.00 (3352.8)
138.00 (3505.2)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
15,000 (6810)
15,800 (7173)
16,000 (7264)
16,500 (7491)
3000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4)

108.00 (2743.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4)
120.00 (3048.0) 138.00 (3505.2) 78.00 (1981.2)
120.00 (3048.0) 144.00 (3657.6) 78.00 (1981.2)
15,000 (6810)
16,000 (7264)
18,000 (8172)
19,000 (8626)
3000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
130.00 (3302.0)
140.00 (3556.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
114.00 (2895.6)
138.00 (3505.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
17,000 (7718)
18,000 (8172)
20,000 (9080)
22,000 (9988)
3750
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
16,000 (7264)
17,000 (7718)
19,000 (8626)
21,000 (9534)
3750
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
130.00 (3302.0)
140.00 (3556.0)
114.00 (2895.6)
120.00 (3048.0)
150.00 (3810.0)
150.00 (3810.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
18,000 (8172)
19,000 (8626)
22,000 (9988)
24,000 (10,896)
1500

108.00 (2743.2)
114.00 (2895.6)
144.00 (3657.6)
150.00 (3810.0)
Dimensions based on MVS primary coordination and Magnum DS secondary coordination. For outdoor base construction, add 12.00 inches
(304.8 mm) to height and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width and depth. Roof overhangs 8.50 inches (215.9 mm) front and rear.
30 kV BIL is standard for 5 kV class; 60 kV BIL is available as an option. 60 kV BIL is standard for 15 kV class; 95 kV BIL is available as an option.
Note: Smaller dimensions/weights may be available, refer to Eaton.
Table 14.0-36. High Voltage 15 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600 V and
VPI, 15 kV Primary 150C Temp. Rise
kVA
TX
No
Load
(Watts)
TX
TX

Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
170C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
170C
(Watts)
4695 kV BIL
Total Losses at
75% Load and
75C Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
300
500
750
1250
1500
2000
4500
8500
10,000
5750
10,000
12,000
2022
2960
3980
1000
1500
2000
2500
3500
4250
13,000
17,000
21,000
15,500
20,500
25,250
4898
6659
8268
2500
3000
3750
5000
9000
11,000
24,000
33,500
35,000
29,000
42,500
46,000
9700
N/A
N/A

3
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 14.0-17. Indoor Ventilated Enclosure (NEMA 1 Construction)

CA08104001E
21

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 036
Transformers
VPI and VPE Ventilated Dry-TypeIntegrated Unit Substation (IUS)

Table 14.0-37. Aluminum/Copper Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600V LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
ii
1
2
kVA
HV
BIL, kV
2

HTX
Weight Lbs (kg)
WTX
DTX
Aluminum
Core and Coil
Aluminum
Total
Copper
Core and Coil
Copper
Total
150C Rise
1000
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
52.00 (1320.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
4900 (2225)
6500 (2951)
5900 (2679)
7500 (3405)
5900 (2679)
6800 (3087)
6900 (3133)
7800 (3541)
1500
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
6700 (3042)
8000 (3632)
7700 (3496)
9000 (4086)
8200 (3723)
8800 (3995)
9200 (4177)
9800 (4449)
2000
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
8500 (3859)
9700 (4404)
9500 (4313)
11,000 (4994)
8900 (4041)
10,800 (4903)
9900 (4495)
12,100 (5493)
2500
5
15
60
95
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
9600 (4358)
11,800 (5357)
10,700 (4858)
13,200 (5993)
10,900 (4949)
12,400 (5630)
12,000 (5448)
13,800 (6265)
3000
5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
12,500 (5675)
13,700 (6220)
13,700 (6220)
15,200 (6901)
13,300 (6038)
14,500 (6583)
14,500 (6583)
16,000 (7264)
3750
5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
108.00 (2743.2)
108.00 (2743.2)
15,400 (6992)
15,000 (6810)
16,800 (7627)
16,500 (7491)
15,400 (6992)
19,800 (8989)
16,800 (7627)
21,300 (9670)
3
4
HV, kV
80C Rise
6
7
8
9
10
1000
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
6600 (2996)
7100 (3223)
7600 (3450)
8200 (3723)
7900 (3587)
7800 (4212)
8900 (4041)
8900 (4041)
1500
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
96.00 (2438.4)
8700 (3950)
9400 (4268)
9700 (4404)
10,500 (4767)
10,000 (4540)
11,400 (5176)
11,000 (4994)
12,500 (5675)
2000
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
96.00 (2438.4)
112.00 (2844.8)
11,500 (5221)
11,900 (5403)
12,700 (5766)
13,400 (6084)
12,300 (5584)
15,800 (7173)
13,500 (6129)
17,300 (7854)
2500
5
15
60
95
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
108.00 (2743.2)
112.00 (2844.8)
12,600 (5720)
13,900 (6311)
13,900 (6311)
15,500 (7037)
14,500 (6583)
17,500 (7945)
15,800 (7173)
19,100 (8671)
3000
5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
118.00 (2997.2)
15,500 (7037)
15,400 (6992)
16,900 (7673)
17,300 (7854)
16,300 (7400)
20,000 (9080)
17,700 (8036)
21,900 (9943)
3750
5
15
60
95
108.00 (2743.2)
112.00 (2844.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
118.00 (2997.2)
18,000 (8172)
20,000 (9080)
19,500 (8853)
21,900 (9943)
22,000 (9988)
24,000 (10,896)
23,500 (10,669)
25,900 (11,759)
11
12
13
H
TX
14
15
16
17
18
TX
TX
19
20
21
Dimensions and weights for estimating purposes only.

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 037
Transformers
Cast Coil and RESIBLOC Dry-TypeStandard Unit Substation
Table 14.0-38. Standard Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600V LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
kVA
HV, HV
kV BIL,
WTX
H
TX
kV
Weight
Lbs (kg)
DTX
80C Rise
HV, HV
kV BIL,
HTX
WTX
kV
kVA
Weight
Lbs (kg)
DTX
100C Rise or 115C Rise
300
5
15
60
95
500
5
15
27
750
78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0)

78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0)
4000 (1816)
4400 (1998)
300
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0)

78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0)
3900 (1771)
4200 (1907)
60
95
125
90.00 (2286.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0) 10.002 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4)
5900 (2679)
7100 (3223)
7500 (3405)
500
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0)

84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
6000 (2724)
6200 (2815)
5
15
27
60
95
125
90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0)

90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 66.00 (1676.4)
7400 (3360)
7900 (3587)
8400 (3814)
750
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0)

84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
7500 (3405)
7900 (3587)
1000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)

90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2)
102.00 (2590.8) 114.00 (2895.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
8700 (3950)
66.00 (1676.4)
8800 (3995)
66.00 (1676.4)
9000 (4086)
72.00 (1828.8) 11,300 (5130)
1000
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0) 66.00 (1676.4)

90.00 (2286.0) 66.00 (1676.4)
8400 (3814)
8500 (3859)
1500
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0) 96.00 (2438.4)

102.00 (2590.8) 96.00 (2438.4)
112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0)
112.00 (2844.8) 126.00 (3200.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
11,000 (4994)
11,400 (5176)
11,700 (5312)
13,000 (5902)
1500
5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
2000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4)

102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4)
112.00 (2844.8) 126.00 (3200.4) 72.00 (1828.8)
120.00 (3048.0) 132.00 (3352.8) 78.00 (1981.2)
13,600 (6174)
14,000 (6356)
14,000 (6356)
18,000 (8172)
2000
5
15
60
95
96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 12,400 (5630)

102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 13,000 (5902)
2500
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
138.00 (3505.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
16,900 (7673)
16,600 (7536)
16,000 (7264)
21,200 (9625)
2500
5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 15,200 (6901)

112.00 (2844.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 14,700 (6674)
3000
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
124.00 (3149.6)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
150.00 (3810.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
22,500 (10,215)
23,500 (10,669)
24,000 (10,896)
24,000 (10,896)
3000
5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 20,000 (9080)

112.00 (2844.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 21,000 (9534)
5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
124.00 (3149.6)
126.00 (3200.4)
126.00 (3200.4)
144.00 (3657.6)
150.00 (3810.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
24,000 (10,896)
25,000 (11,350)
26,000 (11,804)
27,000 (12,258)
3750
5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8) 126.00 (3200.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 23,000 (10,442)

120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 26,000 (11,804)
3750

90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
ii
96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 10,200 (4631)

96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 10,800 (4903)
4
5
6
7
8
Dimensions based on MVS primary coordination and Magnum DS secondary coordination. For outdoor base construction, add 12.00 inches
(304.8 mm) to height and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width and depth. Roof overhangs 8.50 inches (215.9 mm) front and rear.
30 kV BIL is standard for 5 kV class; 60 kV BIL is available as an option. 60 kV BIL is standard for 15 kV class; 95 kV BIL is available as an option.
9
10
11
12
Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformers.
13
Cast, 15 kV Primary 115C Temp. Rise

kVA
TX
No
Load
(Watts)
TX
TX

Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
135C
(Watts)
4695 kV BIL
Total Losses at
75% Load and
75C Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
14
1250
1500
2500
4000
8000
9000
5250
9500
11,500
2022
2960
3980
16
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
12,500
16,000
19,000
15,500
20,000
24,000
4898
6659
8268
17
2500
3000
3750
5500
9000
11,000
20,000
26,000
29,000
25,500
35,000
40,000
9700
N/A
N/A
18
13,500
20,000
22,500
30,000
35,000
45,000
43,500
55,000
67,500
N/A
N/A
N/A
19


CA08104001E
15
300
500
750
5000
7500
10,000
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
135C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
20
21

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 038
Transformers
Cast Coil Dry-TypeIntegrated Unit Substation (IUS)

Table 14.0-40. Aluminum/Copper Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600 Volt LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
ii
1
2
3
kVA
HV, kV
HV
BIL, kV

HTX
Weight Lbs (kg)
DTX
WTX
Aluminum
Core and Coil
Aluminum
Total
Copper
Core and Coil
Copper
Total
115C Rise
1000
1500
2000
15
15
15
95
95
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
7800 (3541)
9600 (4358)
11,400 (5176)
8800 (3995)
10,700 (4858)
12,600 (5720)
8000 (3632)
11,200 (5085)
12,900 (5857)
9000 (4086)
12,300 (5584)
14,100 (6401)
2500
3000
3750
15
15
15
95
95
95
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
114.00 (2895.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
14,000 (6356)
16,400 (7446)
20,000 (9080)
15,400 (6992)
17,900 (8127)
21,700 (9852)
15,500 (7037)
18,200 (8263)
22,000 (9988)
16,900 (7673)
19,200 (8717)
23,700 (10,760)
80C Rise
1000
1500
2000
15
15
15
95
95
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
114.00 (2895.6)
118.00 (2997.2)
8300 (3768)
10,200 (4631)
13,500 (6129)
9400 (4268)
11,400 (5176)
15,100 (6855)
8900 (4041)
16,300 (7400)
16,900 (7673)
10,000 (4540)
17,500 (7945)
18,500 (8399)
2500
3000
3750
15
15
15
95
95
95
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
108.00 (2743.2)
64.00 (1625.6)
64.00 (1625.6)
64.00 (1625.6)
124.00 (3149.6)
124.00 (3149.6)
124.00 (3149.6)
16,000 (7264)
18,000 (8172)
23,300 (10,578)
17,800 (8081)
19,900 (9035)
25,200 (11,441)
19,800 (8989)
21,000 (9534)
25,000 (11,350)
21,600 (9806)
22,900 (10,397)
26,900 (12,213)
7
8
9
TX
10
11
12
W
TX
TX
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 039
Outdoor Secondary Equipment
12.13
(308.1)
2.50
(63.5)
Roof
25.00
(635.0)
3.21
(81.5)
3.06
(77.7)
26.94
Opening
(684.3)
3.06
(77.7)
2.00
(50.8) 30.00
Unit
(762.0)
4.25 x 3.50
(108.0 x 88.9)
Bottom
Conduit
Space
3.93
(99.8)
Maximum
Opening
Rear of Base
5.03
(127.8)
Control Wire
Opening
30.81
Opening
(782.6)
18.94
Opening
(481.1)
45.66
(1159.8)
25.00
(635.0)
Maximum
Opening
40.94
Opening
(1039.9)
3.06
(77.7)
Structure
Width
'C'
B
47.83
(1214.9)
Rear of
Inner Structure
15.68
14.07
(398.3) (357.4)
A
44.00
Unit
(1117.6)
1.05
(26.7)
Top View A
Bus Duct
Chimney
& Cover
22.00
Unit
(558.8)
Maximum
Opening
1.05
(26.7)
1.50
(38.1)
Lifting Angle
Foundation
Tie Down
(for Seismic Only)
Section B-B
2
'B'
16.99
(431.6)
'C'
11.00
(279.4)
30.00
(762.0)
24.99
(634.8)
15.00
(381.0)
38.00
(965.2)
32.99
(838.0)
19.00
(482.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
38.99
(990.4)
22.00
(558.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
44.99
(1142.8)
25.00
(635.0)
Section A-A
Floor Plan
ii
Structure
Width
22.00
(558.8)
1.05
(26.7)
'B'
109.13
to Floor
(2771.9)
25.25
(641.4)
Control Wire
Opening
4.25 x 3.50
(108.0 x 88.9)
1.05
(26.7)
3
4
5
22-inch Width = 21.40 (543.56) to Rear Frame

'A'
O.S. of
Outdoor
End Sheet
119.98
Overall Depth
(3047.5)
15.68 Bus Opening
(398.3) (from Base)
See Section A-A Above for

Bus Duct Orientation Info.
Outdoor
Roof
Sheet
1.00
(25.4)
0.61
(15.5)
2.30
(58.4)
28.59
(From Base)
(726.2)
109.13
(2771.9)
5.75
C (146.1)
105.06
(2668.5)
30.21
(Opening
Width)
(767.3)
5.75
(146.1)
111.48
Overall
Height
(2831.6)
4.00 A
(101.6)
26.00
(660.4)
72.00
(Switchgear
Depth)
(1828.8)
Throat
Opening
& TXF
33.45
Door Swing
(849.6)
117.08
(Base)
(2973.8)
19.70
(500.4)
41.38
(1051.1)
38.50
(977.9)
9
10
42.00
(Aisle Width)
(1066.8)
33.45
Door Swing
(849.6)
39.66
(1007.4)
Front of
Outdoor
Base
8.00
(203.2)
16.00
(406.4)
44.00
30.00
(1117.6)
(762.0)
Unit Widths
(Overall Shipping Width)
22.00
(558.8)
Structure
End trims (one set per lineup)
22-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure
22-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure
22-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure
38-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure
Transformer throat
11
12
13
Weights of Outdoor Structures

(without breakers)
Switchgear
Throat
(Shipped
Disassembled)
21.50
(546.1)
C
See
Top View
Above
Top View
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
1.00
(25.4)
Side View
45.00
(1143.0)
'A'
Switchgear Throat
(Shipped Disassembled)
33.45
(Door Width)
(849.6)
A 1.00
(25.4)
16.96
(430.8)
14.50
(368.30)
29.97
26.57
(761.2) (674.9)
C
*51.79
(1315.5)
36.00
(914.4)
21.50
(546.1)
WeightLbs (kg)
1500 (681)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
5200 (2361)
2300 (1044)
2500 (1135)
2700 (1226)
3200 (1453)
150 (68)
5.00
(127.0)
14
15
16
17
18
Front View
9255C25
19
Figure 14.0-21. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Magnum DS Switchgear and Magnum SB SwitchboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)

46.63 inches (1184.4 mm) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
52.63 inches (1336.8 mm) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
18.70 inches (475.0 mm) = 44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box.
0.50-inch (12.7 mm) hardware recommended in all tie down locations.
CA08104001E
20
21

Layout Dimensions
December 2012
Sheet 14 040
Outdoor Secondary Equipment
EnclosuresPow-R-Line C
ii
2.15 (54.6)
Table 14.0-41. Enclosure

17.37
(441.2)
4.50
(114.3)
1.25
(31.8)
31 8)
1
2.13
(54.0)
(54
0)
90.70
(2303.8)
2303.8
22.00
(558.8)
4
5
Structure
Width
48.00 (1219.2)
61.00 (1549.4)
02500 kVA transformer
55.00 (1397.0)
61.00 (1549.4)
44.00
(1117.6)
A
To
Floor
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure
Depth
Dimension A
20.00
(508.0)
5.00
(127.0)
Switchboard
Indoor Structure
Depth
Front of
PRL C Inne
er
Structure
20-inch
(508.0)
Transition
Structure Width
Standard busway entry/exit location,

36.00-inch (914.4 mm) deep minimum.
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always
required when throat connecting to other
equipment. Standard transformer throat
connection, 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep
structure only.
Swbd. Struc.
Depth
Enclosure Depth
12.81
(325.4)
6
Figure 14.0-22. Front or Rear AccessNon-Walk-in with Flat RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
7
4.5 (114.3)
2.25
(57.2)
8
9
5.00
(127.0)
2.13
(54.0)
20.00
(508.0)
92.95
(2360.9)
10
Front of
PRL C Inner
Structure
12
0.13 (3.2)
End Trim
20-inch
(508.0)
Transition
Structure
Width
13
0.13 (3.2)
End Trim
Switchboard
Indoor Structure
Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure
Depth
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
61.00 (1549.4)
67.00 (1701.8)
79.00 (2006.6)
Dimension A
44.00
(1117.6)
A
To
Floor
11
22.00
(558.8)

55.00 (1397.0)
61.00 (1549.4)
Swbd. Struc.
Depth
Enclosure Depth
12.81
(325.4)
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always

required when throat connecting to other
equipment. Standard transformer throat
connection, 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep
structure minimum.
Figure 14.0-23. Front AccessNon-Walk-in with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
14
4.50
(114.3)
15
16
20.5
(520.7)
25.00
(635.0)
2.13
(54.0)
5.00
(127.0)
17
92.95
(2360.9)
18
A
to
Floor
2.31 (58.7)
Rear of
Enclosure
96.25
(2444.8)
22.00
(558.8)
44.00
(1117.6)
Front of
PRL C Inner
Structure

Top of
Bus Duct
Chimney Cap
Rear of
PRL C Inner
Structure
Switchboard
Indoor Structure
Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure
Depth
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
65.00 (1651.0)
71.00 (1803.4)
83.00 (2108.2)
Dimension A
55.00 (1397.0)
61.00 (1549.4)
19
20
21
Structure
Width
20-inch
(508.0)
Transition
0.125 (3.2)
End Trim
Swbd. Struc.
Depth
Enclosure Depth
4.19
(106.3)

Standard transformer throat connection,

48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) deep only.
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure
always required when throat connecting
to other equipment.
Non-walk-in dimension12.81 inches
(325.4 mm).
Standard busway entry/exit location.
Figure 14.0-24. Rear AccessNon-Walk-in with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)

CA08104001E

Technical Data
December 2012
Sheet 14 041
Transformers
Table 14.0-44. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
System
Grounding
Nominal System Line-to-Line Voltage (kV)

2.4
4.16
4.8
7.2
12.0
12.47
13.2
13.8
14.4
22.9
24.9
34.5
Solidly grounded
system
12
12
12
12
12
12
24
30
Low resistance
grounded system
12
12
12
12
12
21
24
30
High resistance
or ungrounded system
12
18
18
21
21
24
36
39
54
Rated Maximum
System Voltage, kV
Fuse
Type
Type
Nomenclature
Amperes Symmetrical
Interrupting Rating
Current limiting
CLE (striker pin type)

CLE-750
CXN
63,000
40,000
50,000
Expulsion
RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
19,000
37,500
Current limiting

CLE-750
CXN
63,000
40,000
50,000
Expulsion
RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
19,000
37,500
Current limiting

CXN
63,000
50,000
Expulsion
RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
19,000
37,500
14.4
Expulsion
HRBA400/HRBA800
34,800
15.5
Current limiting

CXN
63,000
50,000
Expulsion
RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
14,400
29,400
25.8
Expulsion
RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
10,500
21,000
38
Expulsion
RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
6,900
16,800
2.75
5.5
8.3
1
2
Note: Arrester rating is based on a 55C maximum ambient temperature in the enclosure.
Table 14.0-45. Transformer Primary Fuse Applications
ii
To find the suggested minimum fuse size

for transformer:
1. Calculate the transformers base
full load current rating by dividing
the transformer base kVA by the
nominal transformer voltage, then
dividing this result by 1.732.
3
4
5
2. Multiply the result of Step 1 by

1.4 to determine the theoretical
minimum recommended fuse
continuous current rating.
3. Find the closest available fuse

continuous current rating that is
equal to or greater than this value.
This is the suggested minimum
recommended fuse size for the
transformers base kVA rating.
If the transformer has a fan rating,

perform two calculations: 1.) selfcooled (as above), and 2.) fan-cooled,
however in the later calculation, use
the fan full load amperes and use
a 1.2 multiplier instead of 1.4, as
directed above. Select the fuse rating
for each of the applications by selecting a fuse value equal to or greater
than the calculated ampere values.
Usually, fan-cooled transformers
require a higher rated primary fuse,
and the higher rated fuse from the
calculations should be selected.
However, it is possible that the fuse
selection process yields the same
fuse rating for self-cooled and fancooled units; when that occurs,
higher rated fuses are not required
for fan-cooled units.
These application guidelines are
subject to modification when specific
factors such as transformer characteristics, other protective devices,
coordination requirements and load
variations may indicate a different
ratio of fuse ampere rating to
transformer full load current rating.
ground faults.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Technical Data
December 2012
Sheet 14 042
Primary Equipment
i
ii
1
2
Table 14.0-46. Suggested Current Limiting Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer Applications
(Check Compliance of Fuses to FM Requirements if Installation Must Comply with FM)
System
2.4
Nominal kV
4.16
4.8
7.2
12.0
13.2
13.8
14.4
Fuses Maximum kV
5.5
5.5
8.3
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
Transformer Full
Fuse
kVA Rating Load
Rating
Self-Cooled Current Amps E
Amps
112.5
150
225
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating
Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
27.1
36.1
54.1
40E
50E
80E
15.6
20.8
31.2
25E
30E
50E
13.5
18.0
27.1
20E
25E
50E
9.0
12.0
18.0
15E
20E
25E
5.4
7.2
10.8
10E
10E
15E
4.9
6.6
9.8
10E
10E
15E
4.7
6.3
9.4
10E
10E
15E
4.5
6.0
9.0
10E
10E
15E
2.25
3.0
3.0
300
500
750
72.2
120.3
180.4
100E
175E
250E
41.6
69.4
104.1
80E
125E
150E
36.1
60.1
90.2
65E
100E
150E
24.1
40.1
60.1
40E
65E
100E
14.4
24.1
36.1
20E
40E
65E
13.1
21.9
32.8
20E
30E
65E
12.6
20.9
31.4
20E
30E
65E
12.0
20.0
30.1
20E
30E
65E
5.0
5.0
5.75
1000
1500
2000
240.6
360.8
481.1
350E
138.8
600E 208.2
750E 277.6
200E
300E
400E
120.3
180.4
240.6
175E
250E
350E
80.2
120.3
160.4
125E
175E
250E
48.1
72.2
96.2
80E
100E
150E
43.7
65.6
87.5
80E
100E
125E
41.8
62.8
83.7
80E
100E
125E
40.1
60.1
80.2
80E
100E
125E
5.75
5.75
5.75
2500
601.4
1100E 347.0
600E
300.7
400E
200.5
300E
120.3
175E
109.3
150E
104.6
150E
100.2
150E
5.75
3
4
2.75
Percent
Impedance
(% Z)
Fuse ratings represent the smallest fuse possible that will withstand transformer inrush (12 x FLA for 0.1 second and 25 x FLA for .01 second)
and be able to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLA).
Table 14.0-47. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
7
8
9
System
2.4
Nominal kV
4.16
4.8
7.2
12.0
13.2
13.8
14.4
Fuses Maximum kV
8.3
8.3
8.3
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
8.3
Transformer Full
Fuse
kVA Rating Load
Rating
Self-Cooled Current Amps E
Amps
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Full
Fuse
Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating Load
Rating
Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
Percent
Impedance
(% Z)
10
112.5
150
225
11
27
36
54
40E
50E
80E
16
21
31
25E
30E
50E
14
18
27
20E
25E
40E
9
12
18
15E
20E
25E
5
7
11
10E
10E
15E
5
7
10
7E
10E
15E
5
6
9
7E
10E
15E
5
6
9
7E
10E
15E
2.25
3.0
3.0
300
500
750
72
120
180
100E
200E
250E
42
69
104
65E
100E
150E
36
60
90
50E
100E
125E
24
40
60
40E
65E
100E
14
24
36
20E
40E
50E
13
22
33
20E
30E
50E
13
21
31
20E
30E
50E
12
20
30
20E
30E
50E
5.0
5.0
5.75
12
1000
1500
2000
241
361
481
400E
540E
720E
139
208
278
200E
300E
400E
120
180
241
200E
250E
400E
80
120
160
125E
200E
250E
48
72
96
80E
100E
150E
44
66
87
65E
100E
125E
42
63
84
65E
100E
125E
40
60
80
65E
65E
125E
5.75
5.75
5.75
13
2500
3750
601
347
540E 301
450E 200
300E
120
180
200E
250E
109
164
150E
250E
105
157
150E
250E
100
150
150E
250E
5.75
14

15
Fuse ratings represent the smallest fuse possible that will withstand transformer inrush (12XFLA for 0.1 second and 25XFLA for .01 second) and be
able to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLA).
Two 300 E-Ampere fuse refills used in parallel with 10% derating factor.
Table 14.0-48. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 25.838.0 kV Power Transformer Applications
16
System Nominal kV
22.9
23.9
24.9
34.5
Fuses Maximum kV
25.8
25.8
25.8
38.0
17
Transformer
kVA Rating
Self-Cooled
Full Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
18
750
1000
1500
19
25
38
30E
40E
65E
18
24
36
25E
40E
50E
17
23
34
25E
40E
50E
13
17
25
20E
25E
40E
19
2000
2500
3750
50
63
95
80E
100E
150E
48
60
91
80E
100E
150E
46
58
87
65E
80E
125E
33
42
63
50E
65E
100E
20
21
CA08104001E

Technical Data
December 2012
Sheet 14 043
Primary Equipment
Transformer Technical Data
Table 14.0-49. Type MVS Primary Switch, Standard Ratings

Rated
Maximum
Voltage, kV
Impulse
Withstand,
kV (BIL)
Rated Current
Continuous and
Load Break, Amperes
Rated Fault-Close
and Momentary
Current, kA Asym.
5
5
5
60
60
60
600
600
1200
40
64
40
5
15
15
60
95
95
1200
600
1200
64
40
40
15
15
27
95
95
125
600
1200
600
64
64
40
27
38
125
150
600
600
64
40
Voltage Range
Time Seconds
Close or Trip
Amperes
Close
Trip
4.0
3.0
2.0
5
5
5
5.2
3.6
1.8
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140180
3.0
2.0
5
5
3.6
1.8
104127
208254
104127
208254
Rated Control
Voltage
Spring Charge Motor

Run Amperes
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
120 Vac
240 Vac
Dimensions and weights as listed in

the tables are based on the following:
Table 14.0-50. Available Vacuum Breaker Ratings, MSB Switchgear
Transformer Standards
Inrush current is four times running amperes.
Standard base kVA ratings:

30050075010001500
2000250030003750
Three-phase, 60 Hz, two windings
Standard temperature rise
(see tables) above ambient air
temperature of 40C (104F)
maximum and 30C (86F)
average in any 24-hour period
Maximum altitude of 3300 ft
(1006m) above sea level for full
rating
Standard high-voltages:
2400416048006900720012000
1247013200138002080022900
34500, delta connected only
Standard high-voltage taps:
Two approximately 2-1/2% full
capacity above and two below
rated voltage
Standard low voltages (no taps):
208Y/120 (1000 kVA maximum)
240 delta (1000 kVA maximum)
480 delta (all ratings)
480Y/277 (all ratings)
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Note: 600Y and 600 delta also available.
Aluminum winding conductors

No series-parallel or delta-wye
terminal boards
Standard accessories and losses
Standard surface preparation, finish
processes, materials and colors
Standard tests in accordance with
IEEE standard test code (see below)
HV and LV basic impulse levels (BIL),
impedance and sound levels in line
with the following tables
IEEE Standard Tests
Resistance measurements
Ratio tests
Polarity and phase relation
No-load loss
Exciting current
Applied potential test
Induced potential test
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Technical Data
December 2012
Sheet 14 044
Transformers
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 14.0-51. Liquid-Filled Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Temperature Rise, C,
Base Rating, OA
Transformer Base, kVA
Continuous kVA Multiplier

65C OA
55C FA
65C FA
55
Below 2500
2500 and larger
1.120
1.120
1.150
1.250
1.290
1.400
65
Below 2500
2500 and larger
1.000
1.000
N/A
N/A
1.150
1.250
Table 14.0-52. Dry-Type (Conventional VPE and VPI) Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Base Rating, AA

80C AA
115C AA
150C AA
80C FA
115C FA
150C FA
80
115
150
1.000
N/A
N/A
1.150
1.00
N/A
1.330
1.150
N/A
1.330
N/A
N/A
1.500
1.330
N/A
1.800
1.500
1.330
Table 14.0-53. Dry-Type Cast Coil, Dura-Cast, and RESIBLOC Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Base Rating, AA
Type
80
100
115
80

80C AA
100C AA
115C AA
80C FA
100C FA
115C FA
Cast Coil or
Dura-Cast
1.000
N/A
N/A
1.120
1.000
N/A
1.170
1.050
1.000
1.330
N/A
N/A
1.450
1.330
N/A
1.500
1.380
1.330
RESIBLOC
1.000
N/A
N/A
1.330
N/A
N/A
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Technical Data
December 2012
Sheet 14 045
Transformers
Table 14.0-54. Secondary Short-Circuit Capacity of Typical Power Transformers
Transformer
Rating
ThreePhase
kVA
and
Impedance
%
Maximum
ShortCircuit
kVA
Available
from
Primary
System
300
5%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
208V, Three-Phase
240V, Three-Phase
480V, Three-Phase
600V, Three-Phase
Rated
Load
Continuous
Current,
Amps
Rated
Load
Continuous
Current,
Amps
Rated
Load
Continuous
Current,
Amps
Rated
Load
Continuous
Current,
Amps
rms (Symmetrical
Amperes)
ComTrans- 50%
former Motor bined
Alone Load
14,900 1700
15,700
16,000
16,300
16,500
16,700
16,600
17,400
17,700
18,000
18,200
18,400
50,000
1388
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
21,300 2800
25,200
26,000
26,700
27,200
27,800
50,000
2080
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
1000
5.75%
Trans- 100% Comformer Motor bined

Alone Load
361
25,900 1203
28,000
28,800
29,500
30,000
30,600
20,000
21,900
22,500
23,100
23,600
24,100
4800 24,800
26,700
27,300
27,900
28,400
28,900
601
28,700 4200
32,000
33,300
34,400
35,200
36,200
32,900 1804
36,200
37,500
38,600
39,400
40,400
24,900
27,800
28,900
29,800
30,600
31,400
7200 32,100
35,000
36,100
37,000
37,800
38,600
902
50,000
2776
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
35,900 5600
41,200
43,300
45,200
46,700
48,300
41,500 2406
46,800
48,900
50,800
52,300
53,900
31,000
35,600
37,500
39,100
40,400
41,800
1500
5.75%
50,000
4164
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
47,600 8300
57,500
61,800
65,600
68,800
72,500
2000
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
2500
5.75%
3000
5.75%
3750
5.75%

rms (Symmetrical
Amperes)
Alone Load
2900 15,800
16,500
16,800
17,000
17,200
17,300
750
5.75%
722
12,90
13,60
13,90
14,10
14,300
14,400
500
5%
834
rms (Symmetrical
Amperes)
289
10,000
10,900
11,300
11,600
11,800
12,000
2400 12,400
13,300
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,400
481
12,400
13,900
14,400
14,900
15,300
15,700
3600 16,000
17,500
18,000
18,500
18,900
19,300
722
6900 40,600 1203

45,200
47,100
48,700
50,000
51,400
15,500
17,800
18,700
19,600
20,200
20,900
4800 20,300
22,600
23,500
24,400
25,000
25,700
962
55,900 3609
65,800
70,100
73,900
77,100
80,800
41,200 14,400 55,600 1804

49,800
64,200
53,500
57,900
56,800
71,200
59,600
74,000
62,800
77,200
20,600
24,900
26,700
28,400
29,800
31,400
24,700
31,000
34,000
36,700
39,100
41,800
2406
3008
3609
4511
1400
rms (Symmetrical
Amperes)
ii

Alone Load
7,800
8,200
8,300
8,400
8,500
8,600
6,400
6,800
6,900
7,000
7,100
7,200
5,200
5,500
5,600
5,600
5,700
5,800
1200
8,000
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,400
9,600
1900
6,400
6,700
6,800
6,800
6,900
7,000
9,900
10,600
10,900
11,200
11,300
11,500
10,000
11,100
11,600
11,900
12,200
12,600
2900 12,900
14,000
14,500
14,800
15,100
15,500
12,400
14,300
15,000
15,600
16,200
16,700
3900 16,300
18,200
18,900
19,500
20,100
20,600
7200 27,800 1444

32,100
33,900
35,600
37,000
38,600
16,500
20,000
21,400
22,700
23,900
25,100
5800 22,300
25,800
27,200
28,500
29,700
30,900
9600 34,300 1924

40,600
43,600
46,300
48,700
51,400
19,700
24,800
27,200
29,400
31,300
33,500
7800 27,500
32,600
35,000
37,200
39,100
41,300
28,000 12,000 40,000 2405

36,500
48,500
40,500
52,500
44,600
56,600
48,100
60,100
52,300
64,300
22,400
29,200
32,400
35,600
38,500
41,800
9600 32,000
38,800
42,000
45,200
48,100
51,400
30,700 14,000 44,700 2886

41,200
55,200
46,600
60,600
51,900
65,900
56,800
70,800
62,800
76,800
24,600 11,500 36,100

33,000
44,500
37,300
48,800
41,500
53,000
45,500
57,000
50,200
61,700
34,000 18,000 52,000 3608

47,500
65,500
54,700
72,700
62,200
80,200
69,400
87,400
78,500
96,500
27,200 14,400 41,600

38,000
52,400
43,700
58,100
49,800
64,200
55,500
69,900
62,800
77,200
Short-circuit capacity values shown correspond to kVA and impedances shown in this table. For impedances other than these, short-circuit
currents are inversely proportional to impedance.
The motors short-circuit current contributions are computed on the basis of motor characteristics that will give four times normal current.
For 208V, 50% motor load is assumed while for other voltages 100% motor load is assumed. For other percentages, the motor short-circuit
current will be in direct proportion.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Technical Data
December 2012
Sheet 14 046
Transformers
i
ii
Table 14.0-55. IEEE Standard Insulation LevelskV BIL

HighVoltage
Rating
Transformer
Liquid-Filled
LV
HV
Ventilated Dry
HV
Cast Coil
LV
LV
HV
2400
4160
4800
45
60
60
30
30
30
20
30
30
10
10
10
20
30
30
10
10
10
6900
7200
12,000
75
75
95
30
30
30
45
45
60
10
10
10
45
45
60
10
10
10
12,470
13,200
13,800
95
95
95
30
30
30
60
60
60
10
10
10
60
60
60
10
10
10
22,900
34,400
125
150
30
30
110
150
10
10
110
150
10
10
3
4
600V maximum.
Note: Increased BIL option is available.
5
6
Table 14.0-56. Standard Guaranteed Sound LevelsDecibels

Maximum
Base kVA
(Self-Cooled)
Liquid-Filled
Transformer
OA
Ventilated Dry and Cast

Coil Transformer
FA
AA
FA
300
500
750
55
56
58
67
67
55
60
64
67
67
67
1000
1500
2000
58
60
61
67
67
67
64
65
66
67
68
69
2500
3000
3750
62
63
64
67
67
67
68
68
70
71
71
73
10
Table 14.0-57. Impedances (7-12% Tolerance)

kVA
Liquid-Filled
Transformer
Ventilated Dry and Cast

Coil Transformer
11
300
500
750
5.0%
5.0%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
12
1000
1500
2000
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
13
2500
3000
3750
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
14
Optional impedance values are available up to 8.0%.

Contact Eaton for more information.
Table 14.0-58. Transformer kVA Ratings, Three-Phase

In addition to their self-cooled (AA or OA) kVA ratings,
Eatons standard secondary unit substation transformers
of liquid-filled and ventilated dry-types are designed for
continuous operation at the following supplementary
self-cooled and fan-cooled (FA) kVA ratings:
Liquid-Filled
65C Rise
OA
55/65C Rise
FA
OA 55C
OA 65C
FA 55C
FA 65C
300
500
750
N/A
N/A
862
300
500
750
336
560
840
N/A
N/A
862
N/A
N/A
966
1000
1500
2000
1150
1725
2300
1000
1500
2000
1120
1680
2240
1150
1725
2300
1288
1932
2576
2500
3000
3750
3125
3750
4690
2500
3000
3750
2800
3360
4200
3125
3750
4690
3500
4200
5250
Ventilated Dry-Type
150C Rise
AA
115/150C Rise
FA
AA 115C
AA 150C
FA 150C
300
500
750
400
667
1000
300
500
750
345
575
863
460
767
1151
1000
1500
2000
1333
2000
2667
1000
1500
2000
1150
1725
2300
1533
2300
3067
2500
3333
2500
2875
3833
80/115C Rise
AA 80C
AA 115C
80/150C Rise
FA 115C
AA 80C
AA 150C
FA 150C
300
500
750
345
575
863
460
767
1151
300
500
750
405
675
1012
538
898
1346
1000
1500
2000
1150
1725
2300
1533
2300
3067
1000
1500
2000
1350
2025
2700
1795
2693
3591
2500
3000
3750
2875
3450
4313
3833
4580
5391
2500
3000
3750
3375
4050
5063
4489
5400
6329
Cast Coil
80/115C Rise
AA 80C
AA 115C
FA 115C
300
500
750
345
575
862
460
765
1150
15
1000
1500
2000
1150
1725
2300
1530
2300
3066
16
2500
3000
3750
2875
3450
4312
3833
4588
5391
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
December 2012

Technical Data
Sheet 14 047
Secondary Equipment
Secondary Equipment
For information on secondary

equipment for use in unit substations,
refer to the following tabs of the
Consulting Application Guide:
ii
Tab 20Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed

Drawout Switchgear
Tab 21Low Voltage

Switchboards
Tab 26Power Circuit Breakers

and Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
Tab 27Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

and Enclosures
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
15.0-1
March 2015
Unitized Power
Centers
Sheet 15001
Contents
General Description and Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-2
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-2
Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-2
Third-Party Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-3
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-4
LayoutDimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-5
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16313
Section 26 11 16.13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Unitized Power Center
CA08104001E
21
15.0-2 Unitized Power Centers

March 2015
Sheet 15 002
General Description
ii
Ratings
Advantages
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Unitized Power Center
General Description
and Application
Eatons unitized dry-type power
centers are self-contained metalenclosed unit substations especially
designed to supply and distribute low
voltage power from medium voltage
lines in modern commercial and
industrial systems. They are ideal
where considerations of equipment
size, accessibility, maintainability,
ease of installation, and overall
economy are uppermost.
Due to the inherent compactness of
unitized power centers, they are easily
and conveniently applied in multiples
throughout a distribution system at
physical locations close to centers of
load concentration. The distribution
voltage is thus stepped down to the
utilization voltage only at or near
the areas of demand with kVA
being allocated as required for
new construction or renovation in
existing buildings. The application
of unitized power centers in this
manner results in several advantages
not available with conventional
secondary unit substations.
Three-phase kVA:
112.51000
Primary voltages:
2.4 kV Class with 20 kV
LIWV (BIL), 60 Hz
5 kV Class with 30 kV
LIWV (BIL), 60 Hz
15 kV Class with 60 kV
LIWV (BIL), 60 Hz
MV power system grounding
solid or low resistance grounded
(M100 A) only. UPC product is not
to be used on high-resistance or
ungrounded MV power systems
Transformer windings:
Primary connectionsthree-wire
delta only
Copper or aluminum
Type AA, ventilated dry-type
NEMA Class 220 C insulation
80, 115, 150C rise. When
transformer must meet requirements of Federal 10CFR-431K,
the 750 and 1000 kVA units are
only available in 150 C rise
Type FA (forced air) available,
increases kVA ratings by 33%
Primary taps at 95%, 97.5%, 100%,
102.5%, 105% of rated
primary voltage
Secondary voltages:
208Y/120 V, four-wire
240V, three-wire
480Y/277 V, four-wire
480V, three-wire
575/380 V, four-wire
Transformer efficiency
per 10CFR431K
MV Power System Grounding

Please note that due to lower LIVW
(BIL) and power frequency withstand
ratings of the UPC transformers, the
UPC product is not suitable for use on
high-resistance or ungrounded MV
power systems where a voltage
escalation caused by an arcing type
single phase-to-ground fault can cause
insulation failures within the UPC. The
UPC product should only be applied
on solidly grounded systems or low
resistance grounded power systems
designed to allow minimum 100 A
primary ground fault current during
a single phase-to-ground fault.
Moving into place is facilitated

by the rugged channel base
construction and lifting eyes
included with each assembly
All standard unitized power centers
are especially designed to minimum
dimensions consistent with safety
and reliability
Standard unitized power centers
are front-only accessible, making
against-the-wall installations
possibleminimum of 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) from wall for seismic
applications, 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
for non-seismic
Future load growth is easily accommodated by the addition of unitized
power centers to the system without
affecting the units serving the
original load areas
Losses in the medium voltage
portion of the distribution system
are lower, resulting in a continuous
operating savings
Secondary output voltage may be
adjusted at each unitized power
center to compensate for unusual
load conditions without affecting the
voltage setting of other apparatus in the system
Trouble is more quickly isolated with
individual units located at or near
their served loads
Primary power is purchased from
the utility at the lower primary
power rates, resulting in operational
cost savings throughout the life of
the equipment
Overall installed cost is lower
because of the cost benefits of
medium voltage distribution cable
as compared to low voltage cable
or busway
IQ Energy Sentinel devices can be
provided on each feeder circuit to
interface with an Eaton PowerNet
system to monitor and display
electrical energy (kWH). See
Tab 3 for more information
The IQ family of electronic meters
can be provided to monitor the
parameters unique to each type of
device. With a PONI accessory, each
of these devices can be connected
to an Eaton PowerNet power
monitoring system. See Tab 2 for
more information
20
21
CA08104001E
15.0-3
March 2015
Sheet 15 003
Advantages (continued)
Third-Party Listing
The UPC is UL listed.

Technical Data
Table 15.0-1. Primary Disconnect Switch RatingsType MVS Load Interrupter 1

Rated
Maximum
Voltage
kV rms
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
kV peak
Continuous
and Load
Break
Current
Ampere
Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Withstand
Current
(2 second)
kA, rms sym
Non-Fused Switch
Fault Close and
Momentary
Rating (10 cycles)
kA, rms Asym
Fused Switch
Fault Close
Rating
kA, rms Asym
4.76
4.76
60
60
600
600
25
38
40
61
101
101
15
15
95
95
600
600
25
38
40
61
101
101
kVA
Primary Fuse Ampere Rating at, kV

2.4
112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
4.16 4.8
45
25
18
50
35
25
75
45
40
100
60
50
200 100
80
150 120
200 175
7.2
12.0 13.2 13.8
15
18
25
35
60
85
125
7
10
15
20
40
60
75
7
10
15
20
30
45
60
7
10
15
18
30
45
60
Table 15.0-3. Unit WeightsLbs (kg)

kVA
112.5 2
150 2
225 2
300 2
500 2
750 2
1000 3
2
3
2
3
UL listing available with fused switch only.
Table 15.0-2. Primary Fuse Ampere Rating

Current Limiting Eaton Type HCL, 63,000 A
Symmetrical Interrupting Rating
Weight in Lbs (kg)

4097 (1858)
4317 (1958)
4744 (2152)
5247 (2380)
5659 (2567)
6721 (3049)
10834 (4924)
Single primary, LV distribution in front of the

transformer.
Single primary. Separate LV switchboard
close coupled to transformer.
ii
Table 15.0-4. Unitized Power Center,

Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings
Breaker
Type
Range of
Rated
Continuous
Current,
Amperes
Rated Maximum
Interrupting
Capability, kA Sym.
240V
480V
4
5
EDB
EDS
ED
100225
100225
100225
22
42
65
EDH
EDC
EHD
100225
70225
15100
100
200
18
14
FDB
FD
HFD
15150
15225
15225
18
65
100
14
35
65
FDC
JD
HJD
15225
70250
70250
200
65
100
100
35
65
JDC
DK
KD
70250
250400
100400
200
65
65
100
35
10
HKD
KDC
LGE
100400
100400
250600
100
200
65
65
100
35
11
LGH
LD
HLD
250600
300600
300600
100
65
100
65
35
65
12
LDC
MDL
HMDL
300600
400800
400800
200
65
100
100
50
65
13
ND
HND
NDC
6001200
6001200
6001200
65
100
200
50
65
100
14
RD 4
RDC 4
8002500
8002500
125
200
65
100
Not panel mounted, supplied only in added

auxiliary distribution section.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 15 004
Technical Data
Table 15.0-5. Ventilated Dry-Type Transformer Standard Ratings 1

Impedance kV
i Primary LIWV
%
Class Volts
(BIL)
Primary
Taps
Wye
Self-Cooled
Secondary Secondary Full
Volts
Load Amperes
208 V
480 V
112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
2400,
4160
or
4800
20 kV,
30 kV,
or
30 kV
22-1/2%
208Y/120
or
480Y/277
312
416
625
833
1389
2082
2776
135
180
271
361
601
902
1203
150
200
300
400
667
1000
1333
112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
15
7200,
12470
13200
or
13800
30 kV,
60 kV,
60 kV
or
60 kV
22-1/2%
208Y/120
or
480Y/277
312
416
625
833
1389
2082
2776
135
180
271
361
601
902
1203
150
200
300
400
667
1000
1333
kVA
ii
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
Fan Cooled (Optional)

kVA
Secondary Full
Load Amperes
Transformer Maximum
Short-Circuit Amperes
rms Symmetrical 2
208 V
480 V
208 V
480 V
416
555
833
1110
1200 3
2776
3000 4
180
241
361
481
802
1203
1604
11566
11896
14194
15840
24136
36205
48274
5012
5155
6151
6561
10459
15689
20918
416
555
833
1110
1200 3
2776
3000 4
180
241
361
481
802
1203
1604
6245
8327
12491
15140
24136
36205
48274
2706
3608
5413
6561
10459
15689
20918
Refer to Table 15.0-6 for available temperature rise, fan and secondary voltage options.
Short circuit currents assume unlimited utility source, and do not include motor contributions.
Maximum load/output is limited to 1200 A due to chassis limitation.
Maximum load/output is limited to 3000 A (cross bus limitation).
Note: All units are three-phase, 60 Hz, 150 C rise, 220 C insulation system.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
15.0-5
March 2015
Sheet 15 005
LayoutDimensions

MV switch will be fused or nonfused. UL listing available with

fused switch only
MV fuse class: current limiting,
Eaton Type HCL only
Primary surge protection shown is
optional. Surge arresters, snubber
pack or both can be provided
Use separate LV switchboard if:
LV distribution chassis required
is >1200 A
LV chassis-mounted devices
will consume more than 36X
of available chassis space
Bottom or top entry incoming high
voltage cable size and quantity is
limited to 250 kcmil, two per phase
Vent screens, filters, door gaskets
or space heaters are not available
in this product
FA rating (33% increase in kVA)
is optional
Available transformer options
see Table 15.0-6
Table 15.0-6. Available Transformer Options 1

Transformer Section
48-Inch Wide With LV Distribution in Front
Transformer Section
48-Inch Wide With Separate LV Distribution
Trans.
kVA
Temp.
Rise C
Optional
Fan 2
Secondary
Voltage
Trans.
kVA
Temp.
Rise C
Optional
Fan 2
Secondary
Voltage
ii
112.5
150
225
80, 115, 150

80, 115, 150
80, 115, 150
Yes
Yes
Yes
All
All
All
112.5
150
225
80, 115, 150

80, 115, 150
80, 115, 150
Yes
Yes
Yes
All
All
All
300
80, 115, 150
Yes
All
300
80, 115, 150
Yes
All
2
Transformer Section
60-Inch Wide With LV Distribution in Front
Transformer Section
60-Inch Wide With Separate LV Distribution
Trans.
kVA
Temp.
Rise C
Optional
Fan 2
Secondary
Voltage
Trans.
kVA
Temp.
Rise C
Optional
Fan 4
Secondary
Voltage
500
500
500
750
150
80, 115
150
150
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
All 3
480 V, 600 V
All
480 V, 600 V
500
750
1000
80, 115
150
150
Yes
Yes
Yes
All
All
All
1
2
3
4
Available secondary voltages: 208/120 V wye (four-wire), 240 V delta (three-wire), 480/277 V wye
(four-wire), 480 V delta (three-wire) and 575/380 V wye (four-wire).
33% increased kVA capacity with fans.
At 208 or 240 V secondary, maximum load (output) is limited to 1200 A due to chassis limitation.
33% increased kVA capacity with fans, except for 1000 kVA transformer using 208 V secondary,
maximum load/output is limited to 3000 A (cross bus limitation).
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 15 006
LayoutDimensions
HV Left
ii
HV Right
Top or Bottom Entry
Top or Bottom Entry
1
2
Vent
To LV Distribution
Chassis
To LV Distribution
Chassis
2/ph
Max.
Vent
85.00
(2159.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
2/ph
Max.
6
Power
Transformer
7
36.00
(914.4)
Power
Transformer
48.00 or 60.00
(1219.2)
(1524.0)
One Line/Front Elevation
9
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
10
37.82
(960.6)
Primary
Switch
Power
Transformer
36.64
(930.7)
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
11
LV Distribution Chassis
12
Front
Front
Foot Print
Foot Print
13
Note: These UPCs are shipped fully assembled,

except 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) top vent is shipped separately.
14
Figure 15.0-1. Single Primary, LV Distribution in Front of the Transformer
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
15.0-7
March 2015
Sheet 15 007
LayoutDimensions
HV Left
HV Right
Top or Bottom Entry
Top or Bottom Entry
ii
1
Vent
Vent
2/ph
Max.
2/ph
Max.
85.00
(2159.0)
To LV Distribution
Close-Coupled
Switchboard
90.00
(2286.0)
To LV Distribution
Close-Coupled
Switchboard
2
3
80.00
(2032.0)
4
5
Power
Transformer
36.00
(914.4)
48.00 or 60.00
(1219.2)
(1524.0)
Power
Transformer
36.00 or 45.00
(914.4) (1143.0)
6
7
= Shipping Split
8
2.50 (63.5)
37.82
(960.6)
Primary
Switch
Power
Transformer
2.50 (63.5)
36.64
(930.7)
LV Switchboard
LV Switchboard
36.00
(914.4)
Front
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
9
10
Front
Foot Print
Foot Print
Note: In addition to shipping splits shown,

5.00-inch (127.0 mm) top vent is shipped separately.
Figure 15.0-2. Single Primary, Separate LV Distribution Switchboard Close-Coupled to Transformer
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 15 008
LayoutDimensions
HV Left
HV Right
Top or Bottom Entry
Top or Bottom Entry
ii
1
Vent
3
4
To LV Distribution
Chassis
2/ph
Max.
To LV Distribution
Chassis
2/ph
Max.
Vent
85.00
(2159.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
2/ph
Max.
2/ph
Max.
5
Power
Transformer
6
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Power
Transformer
48.00 or 60.00
(1219.2)
(1524.0)
= Shipping Split
8
9
10
2.50 (63.5)
37.82
(960.6)
Primary
Switch
Primary
Switch
2.50 (63.5)
Power
Transformer
36.64
(930.7)
11
Foot Print
12
13
Front
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Primary
Switch
Front
Foot Print

Figure 15.0-3. Duplex Primary, LV Distribution in Front of the Transformer
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
15.0-9
March 2015
Sheet 15 009
LayoutDimensions
HV Right
HV Left
Top or Bottom Entry
Top or Bottom Entry
ii
85.00
(2159.0)
2/ph
Max.
Vent
Vent
2/ph
Max.
2/ph
Max.
To LV
Distribution
Close-Coupled
Switchboard
80.00
(2032.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
2/ph
Max.
To LV
Distribution
Close-Coupled
Switchboard
2
3
4
Power
Transformer
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
48.00 or 60.00
(1219.2) (1524.0)
Power
Transformer
36.00 or 45.00
(914.4) (1143.0)
= Shipping Split
37.82
(960.6)
Primary
Switch
Primary
Switch
Power
Transformer
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
LV
Switchboard
36.64
(930.7)
36.00
(914.4)
LV
Switchboard
Front
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch

Figure 15.0-4. Duplex Primary, Separate LV Distribution Switchboard Close-Coupled to Transformer
8
9
Front
Foot Print
Foot Print
Primary
Switch
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

March 2015
Sheet 15 010
LayoutDimensions
Molded Case Circuit BreakerLayout 1

See Table 15.0-2 for Ampere Ratings
Secondary Distribution Panelboard

Maximum Panel HeightX Unit
ii
2X
1
Space for
Main and Feeder
36X
Molded Case
Circuit
Breakers
3X
4X
6X
2-Pole ED, EDH,

2-Pole ED, EDH,
EDC, EHD,
EDC, EHD,
FD, FDB,
FD, FDB,
FDC, HFD
FDC, HFD
3-Pole ED, EDH,
3-Pole ED, EDH,
FD, FDB,
FD, FDB,
FDC, HFD,
FDC, HFD,
JD, JDB,
JD, JDB,

HJD, JDC
HJD, JDC
2- or DK, KD, KDB, HKD, KDC
3-Pole
2- or LD, LDB, HLD, LDC, MDL, LG
3-Pole HMDL, ND, HND, NDC
Transformer
Ventilating Opening
5
6
Figure 15.0-5. Distribution Panel Layout Mounted in Front of Transformer up to 1200 A Panel-Mounted Main and Feeder Devices
7
8
1
2
100% rated main and feeder electronic trip breakers are available rated 4001200 A. 90 C wire rated at 75 C ampacity must be used.
May be used as a main device.
Note: For main devices or main bus 1200 A and below. Feeder devices mounted in front of transformer.
Note: For auxiliary switchboard section layoutadjacent to transformer, refer to Figure 15.0-7 for switchboard section information.
Note: Neutral conductor is always gutter mounted.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
15.0-11
March 2015
Sheet 15 011
LayoutDimensions
Lifting Handles (2)

(Can Be Removed)
Lifting Handles (2)

(Can Be Removed)
i
ii
Primary
Switch
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Power
Transformer
LV
Switchboard
Front
Front
3
Figure 15.0-6. Base Plan ViewHV Left, LV Distribution
in Front of the Transformer
Figure 15.0-7. Base Plan ViewHV Left, LV Switchboard

Close-Coupled to Transformer on the Right
Minimum recommended clearance on each side and rear = 2.00 inches

(51.0 mm) for non-seismic applications, 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) for
seismic applications. Local jurisdictions may require more.
Minimum recommended clearance in the front = 36.00 inches
(863.6 mm). Local jurisdictions may require more.
Note: Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06 inches

(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back
and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Refer to actual
order drawings for power cable conduit entrance locations.
Minimum recommended clearance on each side and rear = 2.00 inches

(51.0 mm) for non-seismic applications, 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) for
seismic applications. Local jurisdictions may require more.
Minimum recommended clearance in the front = 36.00 inches
(863.6 mm). Local jurisdictions may require more.
Note: Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06 inches

(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back
and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Refer to actual order
drawings for power cable conduit entrance locations.s
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
16.0-1
September 2011
Substation
Transformers
Sheet 16 001
Contents
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-2
Rectangular Core and Coil Process Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-3
Fluid Preservation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4
Transformer Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4
Quality Assurance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4
Optional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4
Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4
Seismic Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4
Standard FeaturesLiquid-Filled Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-7
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-8
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16322A
Section 26 12 13
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
CA08104001E
21
16.0-2 Substation Transformers

September 2011
Sheet 16 002
General Description
Product Scope
Substation Benefits/Advantages
75030,000 kVA
Primary voltages: through 69 kV
Secondary voltages: through 34.5 kV
Available Fluids
ii
1
Mineral oil
Silicone
Environmentally friendly fluids
4
Rectangular core/coil design:

Minimal size: space saving
Minimal weight: energy saving
Insuldur layer insulation system for
thermal upgrade and mechanical
strength
DuraBIL turn insulationsuperior
adhesion, abrasion resistance and
thermal stability
High efficiency with the best
combination of initial cost and
low operating cost
Sealedaire preservation system
sealed gas blanket over fluid in tank
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Substation Transformers Feature CoverMounted Primary and Secondary Bushings

and Can Be Provided with Load (LTC)
Changers
Definition
A substation transformer is typically
a standalone unit located at the
front end of a campus, industrial site
or large commercial project. The
substation transformer is used to
step down the utility service voltage.
Eatons substation transformers
use a rectangular core and coil design
that is a distinguishing characteristic
of Eaton small power liquid-filled
transformers. This proven design
provides excellent mechanical
strength, dependability and spacesaving economy needed for utility,
industrial and commercial applications.
16
With most ratings, a choice of fluids

including mineral oil (typically specified for outdoor applications), silicone
(flammability concerns) and environmentally friendly fluids (flammability
concerns or anywhere that an insulating fluid spill could require expensive
cleanup procedures).
17

14
15
18
19
20
21

Core and Coil Assembly
Core and Coil Items

Tap leads
High voltage lead
Tap changer
Core ground (removable)
High voltage leads
Step-lap core
Low voltage bus
Side braces and support tie
Low voltage bushing connection
Bottom support
Flexible bus
Inner phase barrier insulation
Phase coil
CA08104001E
16.0-3
September 2011
Sheet 16 003
General Description
Rectangular Core and

Coil Process Design
The rectangular design offers excellent
mechanical strength that has been
proven through years of service and
in special testing.
Mechanical strength is achieved
through the use of a unique six-piece
supporting structure. This supporting
structure is assembled in a pressure
jig around the core and coils, and arc
welded to form a rigid structure.
space. The short yoke between the core

legs reduces the external path of the
flux between active core leg material,
resulting in an increase in efficiency. The
rectangular shape of the core allows for
more uniform and rigid support that
prevents the shift of laminations and
improves sound level characteristics.
Coil
The top and bottom pieces exert a

clamping action on the yokes of the core
to hold the laminations firmly in place
and more importantly, to achieve optimum sound attenuation by using a precalculated pressure. Welding holds this
preload for a permanently quiet core.
Steel end plates are pressed into position
and welded to the top and bottom pieces
to form a permanent framing. The thickness of the end plate is calculated for
each design. The end plates calculated
thickness provides the beam strength
required to minimize the tendency of
the wide, flat part of the outside coils
to round out during fault conditions.
Core
The Core Efficiently Fills the

Similar Shape Opening in the
Coil to Minimize Unused Space
Eaton coils feature aluminum or copper conductors in both high and low
voltage windings. The low voltage
winding is accomplished on a constant
tension machine and consists of a fullwidth or part-coil sheet conductor
extending the full height of the coil.
The advantage of the low voltage
sheet is a continuous cross-section
of conductor that allows the electrical
centers of high and low voltage
windings to easily align themselves,
virtually eliminating the vertical
component of short-circuit force.
Step-Lap Mitered Core Joints are Used

for Efficiency and Noise Reduction
The rectangular core is a series of

laminations made from high-quality,
grain-oriented silicon steel.
The high voltage windings use wire

conductors and are wound directly
over the low voltage winding on a
constant tension traversing machine.
The high voltage conductors are
typically insulated with the DuraBIL
turn insulation.
Turn Insulation
Decreases in exciting current

up to 40%
Reductions in sound levels up to 3 dB
Reductions in no load loss up to 10%
DuraBIL Turn Insulation
i
ii
1
2
3
4
DuraBIL will not degrade and contaminate the transformer fluid with moisture.
Beyond the chemical attributes, DuraBIL
maintains dimensional stability and
the coils structural integrity.
Insuldur Insulation
Insuldur insulation thermally

upgraded craft paper is typically used
for layer and high to low insulation.
The Insuldur system of chemical stabilizers thermally upgrades cellulose
insulating materials to permit a 12%
higher load capacity. Insuldur can be
used with all fluids offered with Eaton
small power transformers.
Chemical stabilizers retard insulation
breakdown under elevated temperature
conditions. Additionally, dimensional
changes in the insulating materials are
minimized to ensure a tighter structure.
The result is greater strength and
coil integrity throughout the life of
the transformer.
The Insuldur system allows a unit rated
at 55C rise to be operated at a 10C
higher temperature, with a 12% increase
in kVA capacity. Generous oil ducts
extend the height of the coil to provide
cooling in the winding. The staggered,
diamond epoxy bonds help to ensure
free oil flow through the winding.
The transformer tank is designed to

withstand a pressure 25% greater than
the maximum operating pressure.
The carbon-steel plate used to form
the tank is reinforced with external
side wall braces, and tank seams are
continuously welded.
CA08104001E
DuraBIL is a single layer of epoxy

powder deposited electrostatically
and baked on the wire conductor.
The process is closely controlled and
monitored to ensure a continuous,
uniform coating. The result is a
compact turn insulation with superior
characteristics, including adhesion,
flexibility, abrasion resistance, and
thermal and chemical stability.
Tank Construction
The stacked core provides a superior

flux path by using a step-lap mitered
core joint. The effective way in which
the core is supported, as well as the
efficient step-lap joint, have resulted in:
The rectangular-shaped core efficiently

fills the correspondingly shaped opening
in the coil with a minimum of unused
Traditional crepe paper or Nomex

tape is used in some design considerations. However, DuraBIL, which is a
tough, flexible and inert turn insulation,
is used in most designs. It reduces the
most prevalent cause of transformer
failure: deterioration of turn insulation.
Each cooler assembly is individually

welded and receives a pressurized
check for leaks prior to assembly on the
tank. After the coolers are attached to
the tank, the completed tank assembly
is leak-tested before shipment.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 16 004
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Micafil Low Frequency Heating

Insulation Drying Process
The insulation is dried in its own
tank and is never exposed to the
atmosphere once it dries
The windings are heated uniformly,
so the insulation deep in the coils
reaches a temperature that promotes moisture removal during
the vacuum cycle
The moisture level of the air in the
vacuum exhaust is monitored constantly to ensure that the insulation
is dry when the process is completed
Fluid Preservation Systems

Sealedaire Standard on Units
>2500 kVA or 250 kV BIL
Silicone
Optional Tests
Silicone is a less flammable dielectric

coolant for transformer applications
and features heat stability, material
compatibility, low flammability and
low toxicity. Silicones high fire point
of 340C qualifies it as a less flammable
fluid, which is UL listed and factory
mutual approved for indoor and outdoor use. Its a good choice in areas
where potential fire hazards exist
and special fire-suppressant systems
are installed.
The following additional tests can be

made on any substation transformer.
All tests are made in accordance with
the latest revision of IEEE Standard
Test Code C57.12.90.
BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3
5. Sound Test.
BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is a new,

fully biodegradable, environmentally
friendly dielectric fluid. In a 21-day
period, BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 has
been tested to be 97% biodegradable.
6. Octave Band Sound Test.
The Sealedaire preservation system

uses a sealed gas space above the fluid
that prevents breathing under normal
conditions. An automatic pressurevacuum relief valve assembly is
factory-set to keep internal pressure
within the limits of 6.5 pounds per
square inch pressure or vacuum.
BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is Factory

Mutual approved and UL listed.
BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is suitable
for application indoors and in areas of
heightened environmental sensitivity
where any insulating fluid spill could
require expensive clean-up procedures.
Intertaire Optional
Quality Assurance Testing
The Intertaire Fluid Preservation

System prevents oxygen and moisture
from being drawn into the transformer
tank when vacuum conditions exist.
This system consists of a nitrogen
cylinder and necessary controls to
maintain positive nitrogen pressure
in the gas space.
The following tests are made on

all transformers unless noted as an
exception. The numbers shown do not
necessarily indicate the sequence in
which the tests will be made. All tests
will be made in accordance with the
latest revision of IEEE C57.12.90 Test
Code for Transformers.
Conservator Optional
The Conservator, or Expansion-Tank
System, seals the fluid from the
atmosphere in the main tank by using
an auxiliary tank partially filled with
transformer fluid and connected to
the main tank by piping. The system
allows the transformer tank to remain
full, despite expansion or contraction
of the fluid due to temperature changes.
Transformer Fluids
Mineral Oil
Mineral oil is primarily used in
outdoor applications.
Eaton offers transformers designed
with less flammable fluidssilicone,
Envirotemp FR3 and BIOTEMPthat
can be used to meet the National
Electrical Code 450.23 for indoor
applications.
1. Resistance measurements of all

windings on the rated tap and on
the tap extremes on one unit of a
given rating on a multiple unit order.
2. Ratio Tests on the rated voltage
connection and all tap connections.
3. Polarity and Phase-relation Tests.
4. No-load loss at rated voltage.
5. Excitation current at rated voltage.
6. Impedance and load loss at rated
current on the rated voltage connection of each unit and on the tap
extremes on one unit of a given
rating on a multiple unit order.
7. Applied Potential Tests.
8. Induced Potential Test.
1. IEEE Impulse Test.

2. Quality Control Impulse Test.
3. IEEE Front-of-Wave Impulse Test.
4. Temperature Test.
7. Insulation Resistance (Meggar) Test.

8. Corona (Partial Discharge) or Radio
Influence Voltage (RIV) Tests.
9. Short-Circuit Test.
10. Short-Circuit Capability Calculations in lieu of Short-Circuit Test.
11. Insulation Power Factor Test.
12. Zero-Phase Sequence
Impedance Test.
13. Seismic Test.
14. Quality Assurance Documentation.
15. Witness or Inspection.
Standards Compliance
IEEE C57.12.00
IEEE C57.12.90
ISO 9001
CSA-C88
Substation transformers have
successfully passed IEEE shortcircuit tests
Substation transformers are
manufactured in an ISO 9001
certified factory

9. Mechanical Leak Test.
20
21
CA08104001E
16.0-5
September 2011
Sheet 16 005
General Description
General Description
Self-cooled power rating (kVA):
75020,000
Primary voltage (kV): Up through 69
Secondary voltage (kV): Up to 34.5
Available fluids:
Oil, silicone, BIOTEMP and
Envirotemp FR3
Load tap changers: 2500 kVA
and larger
Standard Electrical Features
Two windings, without

reconnectable windings
Four high voltage winding fullcapacity taps with a total tap
range of 10%
Standard impedance as shown
in chart
Frequency of 60 Hz
Sound levels as shown in chart
Standard BIL levels as shown in chart
Excitation limits defined by IEEE
C57.12.00-1980:
Unit will deliver rated kVA at 5%
above rated secondary voltage
without exceeding the limiting
temperature rise provided the
load power factor is 80% or
higher and the frequency is
at least 95% of rated value
Unit can be energized at 10%
above rated secondary voltage
at no-load without exceeding
the limiting temperature rise
65C average temperature rise
Standard Electromechanical
Features
Aluminum windings
Tap changer for de-energized
operation with the handle brought
out through the tank wall
Rubber-jacketed multi-conductor
control wiring
Optional Electromechanical
Features
Optional Electrical Features
Series multiple windings

Delta-wye connectionchanging
the internal connections on the HV
or LV windings (three-phase only)
Nonstandard HV taps and tap range
Nonstandard phase relationship
Low-loss, high-efficiency designs
Frequency other than 60 Hz
Special impedances
Design to withstand IEEE front-ofwave impulse test
Special sound level
Special BIL level
Over excitation
55C/65C average temperature rise
Special ambient temperatures
Operation at altitudes above
3300 ft (1000m)
Motor-starting duty or dedicated
motor loads
CA08104001E
Copper windings
Tap changer mechanical key
interlock
Provisions only for tap changer
mechanical key interlock
Flexible conduit for control wiring
Rigid conduit for control wiring
Special control wiring size or
insulation
Core ground lead brought to test
point located inside tank adjacent
to bolted handhole
Electrostatic shields
Internally-mounted bushing
current transformer
Corrosion-resistant steel hardware

Lifting hooks for complete unit
Lifting loops for tank cover
Welded main tank cover
Welded handhole on cover, or
bolted handhole when access
to tank interior is required
Tank grounding provisions
Transformer base that permits
rolling in directions parallel to
the base center line
Provisions for jacking
Special hardware
Bolted handhole
Bolted manhole
Ground connector and pad
Skid mounting
Standard Gauges and Fittings

Magnetic liquid-level gauge with
alarm contacts
Dial-type thermometer with
alarm contacts
Pressure-vacuum gauge:
Units rated 200 kV BIL and below
Units rated 2500 kVA and below
Pressure-vacuum gauge with
alarm contacts
Magnetic liquid-level gauge with

alarm contacts
Dial-type thermometer with
alarm contacts
Pressure-vacuum gauge
(no alarm contactsprimary units
+/<2500 only)
Pressure-vacuum gauge with
alarm contacts
Pressure-relief device (no alarm
contacts):
Silicone filled (excluding primary
units >2500)
Oil filled (excluding primary
units >2500)
Pressure-relief device with
alarm contacts
Rapid pressure rise relay
Dial hot-spot indicator
Remote winding temperature
indicator
Shock indicator for shipment
Audible alarm
Top filter-press connection-valve
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Optional Cooling System

Tank design pressure: 15 psig
Fluid preservation system:
Sealedaire on units 2500 kVA
Intertaire
Conservator
Coolers:
Removable coolers
Panel coolers
Provisions only for future fans (FFA)
excluding secondary units >500 kVA
Complete forced air cooling
systems (FA):
15% added capacity units rated
2500 kVA
25% added capacity units rated
>2500 kVA
Optional Tank Features
Pressure-relief device (no alarm

contacts):
Silicone filled
Oil filled
Pressure-relief device with
alarm contacts
Rapid pressure rise relay
Dial hot-spot indicator
Shock indicator for shipment
Audible alarm
RTD coil for use with remote
temperature indicator
Optional Gauges and Fittings
Standard Tank Features
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 16 006
General Description
Standard Tank Finish
ii
1
2
3
4
Optional Tank Finish

Special paint color
Paint system process:
Standard system: 5 mils
total thickness
System I: zinc chromate epoxy
primer and intermediate coat, oven
cure, air spray aliaphatic polyurethane, ambient cure, 57 mils
System II: zinc-rich primer,
epoxy coat, oven cure and air dry,
7 mils minimum (only available
with panel coolers)
Tank undercoating
5
6
7
8
9
Special paint color

Paint system process:
Standard system: 5 mils
total thickness
System I: zinc chromate epoxy
primer and intermediate coat, oven
cure, air spray aliaphatic polyurethane, ambient cure, 57 mils
System II: zinc-rich primer, epoxy
coat, oven cure and air dry, 7 mils
minimum (only available with
panel coolers)
Standard High and

Low Voltage Components
Bushings: cover-mounted
porcelain with copper conductor
Optional High and

Low Voltage Components
Special Options
Bushings:
Special cover-mounted
porcelain bushings
Extra creep bushings
Transformer-breakerinterchangeable (TBI) bushings
Bushing terminal connectors
Cover-mounted bus duct throat
HV and LV surge arresters
External fuses (HV only)
Operation in hazardous locations

(qualification of externally attached
equipment such as wiring, conduit,
fans, cabinets, alarm contacts
and relays)
Receptacle or light in control cabinet
Space heater with thermostat in
control cabinet
Reusable gaskets on bushings,
handhole and devices
Special dimensions
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
16.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 16 007
General Description
Standard Features
Liquid-Filled Transformer
i
Coverwelded to tank
ii
Cooling tubes (radiators)

Note: Radiator position and number of
radiators will vary based upon design.
X0
H3
Bolted handhole on cover
X3
Automatic resealing mechanical

H2
HV bushing, three total, located in

ANSI Segment 2
H1
LV bushing, four total (wye

connected), located in ANSI
Segment 4
X2
X1
Note: HV and LV bushings may be cover

mounted or left/right orientation may be
reversed.
Lifting loopstwo for lifting

cover only
Top View
Lifting hooksfour for lifting

complete unit
Jacking provisions on tank or base
Ground padtwo total

Drain valvefor combination
lower filter press connection and
complete drain with sampler
Control cabinet for alarm lead

termination
De-energized tap changer with

padlock provisions
9
10
Base (may be flat or formed)
Diagram instruction nameplate

with warning nameplate
11
12
H
13

Liquid temperature indicator with

maximum indicating hand
14
Upper valve for upper filter press

connection
15
Magnetic liquid level gauge

Vacuum pressure gauge with air
test and Sealedaire valve
16
17
W
(Flange to Flange)
18
Front View
19
Figure 16.0-1. Liquid-Filled Primary Unit Substation Transformer with Wall-Mounted

High Voltage and Low Voltage Bushings
Note: See Pages 16.0-12 through 16.0-14 for dimensions and weights.
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 008
Technical Data
Table 16.0-1. Standard Sound Levels

Self-Cooled (OA)
Equivalent Two-Winding (kVA)
NEMA
Average DB-OA
NEMA
Average DB-FA
ii
60017500
750110,000
10,00112,000
67
68
69
69
70
71
12,00115,000
15,00120,000
70
71
72
73
The plan view, below, shows the ANSI

segments used to identify the location
of both the HV and LV bushings.
Segment 3
Table 16.0-2. Standard Basic Impulse Levels

kV
Class
kV
BIL
8.7
15.0
25.0 (Ground Y only)
95
110
125
26
34
40
25.0
34.5 (Ground Y only)
34.5
150
150
200
50
50
70
46.0
69.0
350
250
95
140
8
9
Segment 1
(Front)
Figure 16.0-2. Front (Nameplate, Gauges, etc.)

HV: Segment 2 is standard for
wall-mounted bushings
(optional Segment 4).
Segment 3 is standard for
cover-mounted bushings.
LV:
Segment 4 wall-mounted is
standard (optional Segment 2).
Table 16.0-3. Standard Impedances (Percent)

HV kV BIL
Class
Low Voltage
Below 2400V
Low Voltage
2400V and Above
45150
200
250
350
5.75
7.25
7.75
6.50
7.00
7.50
8.00

10
Twice
Normal
Voltage
Applied Test
60 Hz-kV
10
15
19
1.2
2.5
5.0
Segment 4
Segment 2
Introduced Test
180 Hz7200 Cycles
45
60
75
ANSI Segment Identification

for HV and LV Bushings

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
16.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 16 009
Technical Data
kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses at 200 kV HV BIL

100% Load and Total Losses
85C (Watts)
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
i
ii
1
750
1000
1500
1777
2254
3161
9984
12,613
17,178
11,761
14,867
20,339
4270
5410
7460
750
1000
1500
1902
2413
3385
10,692
13,508
18,397
12,594
15,921
21,782
4580
5790
7980
2000
2500
3000
4004
4784
4310
20,820
23,538
23,584
24,824
28,322
27,894
9210
10,670
10,210
2000
2500
3000
4288
5122
4615
22,298
25,208
25,257
26,586
30,330
29,872
9860
11,420
10,930
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6359
8070
11,343
14,419
27,990
34,991
47,722
58,758
34,349
43,061
59,065
73,177
13,360
16,820
23,270
29,110
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6810
8642
12,147
15,442
29,976
37,474
51,109
62,929
36,786
46,116
63,256
78,371
14,300
18,010
24,920
31,170

kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
5
6
7
8
750
1000
1500
1795
2277
3193
10,085
12,741
17,352
11,880
15,018
20,545
4320
5460
7530
750
1000
1500
1928
2445
3429
10,832
13,685
18,638
12,760
16,130
22,067
4640
5870
8090
2000
2500
3000
4045
4833
5364
21,031
23,776
23,823
25,076
28,609
29,187
9300
10,780
11,320
2000
2500
3000
4344
5190
4676
22,589
25,538
25,584
26,933
30,728
30,260
9990
11,570
11,070
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6424
8152
11,458
14,565
28,273
35,345
48,205
59,352
34,697
43,497
59,663
73,917
13,490
16,990
23,510
29,400
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6899
8755
12,307
15,644
30,369
37,965
51,778
63,752
37,268
46,720
64,085
79,396
14,490
18,250
25,250
31,580
10

kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
11

kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1812
2299
3224
10,183
12,865
17,521
11,995
15,164
20,745
4360
5520
7600
750
1000
1500
1947
2470
3464
10,942
13,823
18,826
12,889
16,293
22,290
4680
5930
8170
2000
2500
3000
4084
4879
4396
21,236
24,008
24,055
25,320
28,887
28,451
9390
10,880
10,410
2000
2500
3000
4388
5243
5819
22,818
25,796
25,847
27,206
31,039
31,666
10,090
11,690
12,280
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6486
8231
11,569
14,707
28,549
35,690
48,676
59,933
35,035
43,921
60,245
74,640
13,620
17,150
23,740
29,690
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6970
8844
12,431
15,803
30,676
38,349
52,302
64,396
37,646
47,193
64,733
80,199
14,640
18,430
25,510
31,900
on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating of 25 kV.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 010
Technical Data

kVA
ii
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1966
2494
3498
11,048
13,958
19,010
13,014
16,452
22,508
4730
5980
8250
2000
2500
3000
4431
5293
4769
23,041
26,048
26,099
27,472
31,341
30,868
10,190
11,810
11,290
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7037
8930
12,552
15,957
30,875
38,735
52,813
65,027
37,912
47,665
65,365
80,984
14,760
18,610
25,760
32,210
5
6
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
9
10
11
12
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
2063
2618
3672
11,600
14,656
19,960
13,663
17,274
23,632
4960
6280
8660
2000
2500
3000
4652
5557
5007
24,193
27,350
27,403
28,845
32,907
32,410
10,700
12,390
11,860
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7388
9376
13,179
16,754
32,523
40,659
55,453
68,277
39,911
50,035
68,632
85,031
15,520
19,540
27,040
33,820
Table 16.0-12. Environmentally Friendly Fluid 5 kV Primary

55C Temp. Rise
kVA
13
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
14
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
15
750
1000
1500
1756
2235
3156
9491
11,822
15,576
11,247
14,057
18,732
4130
5190
7050
16
2000
2500
3000
4028
4851
5246
18,115
19,441
21,540
22,143
24,292
26,786
8560
9710
10,630
17
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6286
8004
11,380
14,675
24,712
29,717
38,675
46,227
30,998
37,721
50,055
60,902
12,460
15,430
21,050
26,230
18
19
kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1774
2258
3188
9587
11,942
15,734
11,361
14,200
18,922
4170
5240
7120
2000
2500
3000
4069
4900
5299
18,298
19,638
21,758
22,367
24,538
27,057
8640
9810
10,740
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6350
8085
11,495
14,824
24,962
30,018
39,066
46,694
31,312
38,103
50,561
61,518
12,590
15,590
21,260
26,500

kVA

55C Temp. Rise

55C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1791
2279
3219
9680
12,058
15,887
11,471
14,337
19,106
4210
5290
7190
2000
2500
3000
4108
4948
5350
18,477
19,829
21,970
22,585
24,777
27,320
8730
9910
10,840
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6411
8164
11,607
14,968
25,206
30,311
39,448
47,150
31,617
38,475
51,055
62,118
12,710
15,740
21,470
26,760

55C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1880
2392
3379
10,164
12,660
16,681
12,044
15,052
20,060
4420
5560
7550
2000
2500
3000
4313
5195
5617
19,400
20,820
23,068
23,713
26,015
28,685
9160
10,400
11,380
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6731
8572
12,187
15,716
26,466
31,826
41,420
49,507
33,197
40,398
53,607
65,223
13,350
16,530
22,450
28,090
20
21
CA08104001E
16.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 16 011
Technical Data
65C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)

65C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss at
100% Load
and 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
i
ii
1
750
1000
1500
1905
2424
3424
10,297
12,826
16,899
12,202
15,250
20,323
4480
5630
7650
750
1000
1500
1943
2472
3492
10,502
13,082
17,237
12,445
15,554
20,729
4570
5740
7800
2000
2500
3000
4370
5263
5691
19,654
21,093
23,370
24,024
26,356
29,061
9280
10,540
11,530
2000
2500
3000
4457
5368
5804
20,047
21,514
23,837
24,504
26,882
29,641
9470
10,750
11,760
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6820
8684
12,347
15,922
26,812
32,242
41,962
50,156
33,632
40,926
54,309
66,078
13,520
16,740
22,840
28,460
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6955
8857
12,593
16,240
27,348
32,887
42,801
51,157
34,303
41,744
55,394
67,397
13,790
17,080
23,290
29,030

65C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)

65C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
5
6
7
8
750
1000
1500
1924
2449
3458
10,401
12,957
17,071
12,325
15,406
20,529
4520
5690
7730
750
1000
1500
2039
2595
3666
11,027
13,736
18,098
13,066
16,331
21,764
4800
6030
8190
2000
2500
3000
4414
5316
5749
19,853
21,307
23,607
24,267
26,623
29,356
9380
10,970
11,650
2000
2500
3000
4679
5636
6094
21,049
22,589
25,028
25,728
28,225
31,122
9940
11,280
12,350
10
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6889
8772
12,472
16,084
27,083
32,569
42,386
50,662
33,972
41,341
54,858
66,746
13,660
16,910
23,070
28,750
3750
7303
5000
9300
7500 13,222
10,000 17,051
28,715
34,531
44,940
53,715
36,018
43,831
58,162
70,766
14,480
17,930
24,460
30,480
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 012
Layout Dimensions
chambers, see Notes at bottom of page for dimensions that
should be added to the table dimensions.
ii

HV 6900D, 75 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
500
750
1000
4520 (2050)
4750 (2155)
5590 (2536)
120 (454)
150 (568)
170 (644)
92 (2337) 56 (1422)
92 (2337) 56 (1422)
92 (2337) 59 (1499)
56 (1422)
56 (1422)
59 (1499)
750
1000
1500
1500
2000
2500
7380 (3348)
8890 (4032)
10,060 (4563)
210 (795)
240 (908)
260 (984)
92 (2337) 67 (1702)
92 (2337) 70 (1778)
92 (2337) 70 (1778)
67 (1702)
70 (1778)
70 (1778)
2000
9500 (4309)
2500 10,550 (4785)
3000 12,000 (5443)
3000
3750
5000
11,110 (5039)
13,200 (5987)
18,020 (8174)
290 (1098)
340 (1287)
620 (2347)
95 (2413) 70 (1778)
95 (2413) 73 (1854)
113 (2870) 74 (1880)
70 (1778)
73 (1854)
74 (1880)
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
4840 (2195)
5720 (2595)
7370 (3343)
2000
8760 (3973)
2500
9940 (4509)
3000 11,650 (5284)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
13,330 (6046)
16,640 (7548)
30,300 (13,744)
34,830 (15,799)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
13
750
1000
1500
14
2000
8700 (3946)
2500 10,290 (4667)
3000 11,860 (5380)
19
20
3750
5000
7500
10,000
5120 (2322)
5980 (2712)
7280 (3302)
13,410 (6083)
17,030 (7725)
29,720 (13,481)
35,790 (16,234)

Height
Width
Depth
230 (871)
260 (984)
350 (1325)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
68 (1727) 114 (2896)

68 (1727) 125 (3175)
70 (1778) 127 (3226)
390 (1476)
95 (2413) 72 (1829)
480 (1817)
95 (2413) 75 (1905)
1220 (4618) 114 (2896) 113 (2870)
1230 (4656) 114 (2896) 118 (2997)
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
18
Depth
56 (1422)
59 (1499)
65 (1651)
12
17
Width
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)

HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
16
Height
160 (606)
180 (681)
210 (795)
11
15

HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
7
8

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
79 (2007)
78 (1981)
92 (2337)
127 (3226)
131 (3327)
138 (3505)
139 (3531)

Height
Width
Depth
170 (644)
180 (681)
210 (795)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
57 (1448) 79 (2007)
62 (1575) 81 (2057)
63 (1600) 100 (2540)
230 (871)
270 (1022)
320 (1211)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
65 (1651) 108 (2743)

70 (1778) 114 (2896)
73 (1854) 127 (3226)
360 (1363)
95 (2413) 73 (1854)
520 (1968)
99 (2515) 75 (1905)
1140 (4315) 109 (2769) 113 (2870)
1310 (4959) 116 (2946) 117 (2972)
129 (3277)
131 (3327)
140 (3556)
143 (3632)
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
5650 (2563)
6400 (2903)
8020 (3638)
14,350 (6509)
19,110 (8668)
30,880 (14,007)
39,080 (17,726)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
220 (833)
220 (833)
250 (946)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
59 (1499) 81 (2057)
61 (1549) 87 (2210)
64 (1626) 101 (2565)
280 (1060)
300 (1136)
330 (1249)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
68 (1727) 101 (2565)

70 (1778) 107 (2718)
73 (1854) 127 (3226)
450 (1703)
95 (2413) 73 (1854)
700 (2650) 117 (2972) 74 (1880)
1210 (4580) 117 (2972) 102 (2591)
1600 (6057) 124 (3150) 106 (2692)
128 (3251)
129 (3277)
140 (3556)
145 (3683)

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
5660 (2567)
6640 (3012)
8000 (3629)
2000
9350 (4241)
2500 10,860 (4926)
3000 12,400 (5625)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,500 (6577)
19,510 (8850)
30,270 (13,730)
38,140 (17,300)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
210 (795)
230 (871)
250 (946)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
58 (1473) 83 (2108)
62 (1575) 87 (2210)
64 (1626) 107 (2718)
290 (1098)
310 (1173)
340 (1287)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
66 (1676) 107 (2718)

71 (1803) 107 (2718)
73 (1854) 130 (3302)
430 (1628)
720 (2725)
1120 (4240)
1500 (5679)
95 (2413) 74 (1880)
118 (2997) 74 (1880)
118 (2997) 101 (2565)
124 (3150) 105 (2667)
130 (3302)
132 (3353)
143 (3632)
146 (3708)

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 12470Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
6630 (3007)
7510 (3406)
9040 (4100)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
290 (1098)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
65 (1651)
66 (1676)
69 (1753)
2000 10,110 (4586)

2500 11,670 (5293)
3000 12,760 (5788)
290 (1098)
330 (1249)
350 (1325)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
70 (1778) 96 (2438)
73 (1854) 106 (2692)
74 (1880) 130 (3302)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,280 (6931)
19,370 (8786)
30,850 (13,993)
38,320 (17,382)
440 (1666)
650 (2461)
1180 (4467)
1450 (5489)
95 (2413) 75 (1905)
107 (2718) 76 (1930)
114 (2896) 100 (2540)
122 (3099) 104 (2642)
64 (1626)
78 (1981)
88 (2235)
133 (3378)
136 (3454)
139 (3531)
143 (3632)
Notes: 1. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. Refer to the transformers

outline drawing for actual dimensions for construction.
dimension and 10.00 inches (254.0 mm) to D dimension.
bus duct throat.
21
CA08104001E
16.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 16 013
Layout Dimensions
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
7000 (3175)
7720 (3502)
9880 (4481)
330 (1249)
350 (1325)
380 (1438)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
67 (1702)
67 (1702)
69 (1753)
66 (1676)
79 (2007)
98 (2489)
2000 11,300 (5126)

2500 12,880 (5842)
3000 13,760 (6241)
410 (1552)
450 (1703)
460 (1741)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
71 (1803)
71 (1803)
72 (1829)
112 (2845)
122 (3099)
130 (3302)
115 (2921) 85 (2159)

117 (2972) 100 (2540)
129 (3277) 124 (3150)
136 (3454) 127 (3226)
136 (3454)
138 (3505)
138 (3505)
140 (3556)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,030 (7271)
19,780 (8972)
30,270 (13,730)
39,290 (17,822)
520 (1968)
660 (2498)
1070 (4050)
1480 (5602)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
750
1000
1500
4930 (2236)
5940 (2694)
7690 (3488)
160 (606)
180 (681)
220 (833)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
48 (1219)
52 (1321)
59 (1499)
76 (1930)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
2000
2500
3000
9270 (4205)
10,630 (4822)
12,280 (5570)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
340 (1287)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
62 (1575)
62 (1575)
63 (1600)
107 (2718)
112 (2845)
121 (3073)
3750
5000
14,540 (6595)
18,620 (8446)
380 (1438)
580 (2196)
87 (2210)
98 (2489)
67 (1702)
68 (1727)
122 (3099)
123 (3124)
7230 (3279)
8040 (3647)
9920 (4500)
340 (1287)
360 (1363)
390 (1476)
115 (2921) 68 (1727)

115 (2921) 68 (1727)
115 (2921) 69 (1753)
67 (1702)
80 (2032)
94 (2388)
750
1000
1500
2000 11,700 (5307)

2500 13,120 (5951)
3000 14,400 (6532)
430 (1628)
460 (1741)
500 (1893)
115 (2921) 71 (1803)

115 (2921) 73 (1854)
115 (2921) 76 (1930)
116 (2946)
124 (3150)
128 (3251)
2000
9270 (4205)
2500 10,510 (4767)
3000 12,100 (5488)
540 (2044)
740 (2801)
1190 (4505)
1190 (4505)
115 (2921)
124 (3150)
133 (3378)
132 (3353)
136 (3454)
139 (3531)
140 (3556)
145 (3683)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,210 (7353)
20,490 (9294)
31,470 (14,275)
36,390 (16,506)
Height
Width
77 (1956)
95 (2413)
122 (3099)
125 (3175)
Depth

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 13800Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
750
9110 (4132)
1000
9370 (4250)
1500 10,760 (4881)
410 (1552) 115 (2921)

390 (1476) 115 (2921)
410 (1552) 115 (2921)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
2000 12,210 (5538)

2500 13,600 (6169)
3000 14,990 (6799)
450 (1703) 115 (2921)

470 (1779) 115 (2921)
510 (1931) 115 (2921)
72 (1829) 108 (2743)

74 (1880) 109 (2769)
77 (1956) 125 (3175)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,590 (7525)
20,480 (9290)
32,220 (14,615)
38,460 (17,445)
540 (2044)
710 (2688)
1050 (3975)
1350 (5110)
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
750
1000
1500
ii

HV 6900D, 75 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
Depth
115 (2921) 77 (1956)

122 (3099) 94 (2388)
125 (3175) 123 (3124)
135 (3429) 124 (3150)
63 (1600)
70 (1778)
93 (2362)
137 (3480)
138 (3505)
139 (3531)
148 (3759)
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
5010 (2272)
6090 (2762)
7730 (3506)
14,380 (6523)
18,490 (8387)
32,180 (14,597)
46,580 (21,128)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
750
1000
1500
5340 (2422)
6120 (2776)
7660 (3475)
2000
9080 (4119)
2500 11,180 (5071)
3000 12,470 (5656)
3750
5000
7500
10,000

Height
Width
Depth
160 (606)
180 (681)
220 (833)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
48 (1219) 79 (2007)
53 (1346) 82 (2083)
55 (1397) 116 (2946)
250 (946)
270 (1022)
310 (1173)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
59 (1499) 118 (2997)

61 (1549) 119 (3023)
65 (1651) 119 (3023)
390 (1476) 87 (2210) 65 (1651)

560 (2120) 97 (2464) 68 (1727)
1020 (3861) 98 (2489) 112 (2845)
1760 (6662) 119 (3023) 120 (3048)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
121 (3073)
122 (3099)
131 (3327)
131 (3327)
10
11
12

Height
Width
Depth
13
180 (681)
190 (719)
220 (833)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
49 (1245) 79 (2007)
51 (1295) 82 (2083)
56 (1422) 116 (2946)
14
250 (946)
290 (1098
310 (1173)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
59 (1499) 118 (2997)

64 (1626) 119 (3023)
66 (1676) 115 (2921)
15
14,590 (6618)
360 (1363)
18,330 (8314)
540 (2044)
31,330 (14,211) 970 (3672)
39,050 (17,713) 1230 (4656)

bus duct throat.

HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)

HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
87 (2210)
68 (1727)
93 (2362)
68 (1727)
98 (2489) 111 (2819)
101 (2565) 114 (2896)
121 (3073)
122 (3099)
131 (3327)
131 (3327)
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 014
Layout Dimensions
i
ii
1
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL

Height
Width
Depth
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
5970 (2708)
6820 (3093)
8710 (3951)
230 (871)
240 (908)
280 (1060)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
52 (1321)
54 (1372)
57 (1448)
73 (1854)
91 (2311)
95 (2413)
750
7600 (3447)
1000
8460 (3837)
1500 10,740 (4872)
370 (1401) 107 (2718)

390 (1476) 107 (2718)
420 (1590) 107 (2718)
60 (1524) 68 (1727)
60 (1524) 84 (2134)
62 (1575) 107 (2718)
2000 10,140 (4599)

2500 11,890 (5393)
3000 13,480 (6114)
310 (1173)
338 (1279)
380 (1438)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
58 (1473) 110 (2794)

62 (1575) 121 (3073)
66 (1676) 124 (3150)
2000 12,260 (5561)

2500 13,760 (6241)
3000 15,020 (6813)
460 (1741) 107 (2718)

490 (1855) 107 (2718)
520 (1968) 107 (2718)
64 (1626) 115 (2921)

64 (1626) 121 (3073)
66 (1676) 121 (3073)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,820 (7176)
19,250 (8732)
32,700 (14,832)
50,160 (22,752)
440 (1666)
87 (2210) 68 (1727)
540 (2044)
87 (2210) 70 (1778)
1090 (4126) 100 (2540) 99 (2515)
2200 (8328) 120 (3048) 118 (2997)
125 (3175)
129 (3277)
133 (3378)
133 (3378)

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
16,950 (7688)
20,270 (9194)
33,980 (15,413)
42,340 (19,205)
570 (2158)
650 (2461)
1200 (4542)
1440 (5451)
107 (2718) 78 (1981)

109 (2769) 92 (2337)
120 (3048) 117 (2972)
129 (3277) 150 (3810)
129 (3277)
132 (3353)
136 (3454)
136 (3454)

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL

Height
3750
5000
7500
10,000
Width
Depth
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
6090 (2762)
7110 (3225)
8630 (3915)
230 (871)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
52 (1321) 75 (1905)
55 (1397) 91 (2311)
56 (1422) 102 (2591)
750
7930 3597)
1000
8840 (4010)
1500 10,710 (4858)
380 (1438) 107 (2718)

400 (1514) 107 (2718)
440 (1666) 107 (2718)
61 (1549)
61 (1549)
62 (1575)
2000 10,050 (4559)

2500 12,170 (5520)
3000 13,600 (6169)
310 (1173)
350 (1325)
380 (1438)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
58 (1473) 107 (2718)

63 (1600) 114 (2896)
66 (1676) 116 (2946)
2000 12,530 (5684)

2500 13,920 (6314)
3000 15,620 (7085)
470 (1779) 107 (2718)

500 (1893) 107 (2718)
560 (2120) 107 (2718)
64 (1626) 117 (2972)

66 (1676) 117 (2972)
69 (1753) 127 (3226)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,300 (6940)
19,350 (8777)
32,590 (14,783)
40,250 (18,257)
420 (1590) 87 (2210) 68 (1727)

580 (2196) 89 (2261) 70 (1778)
1040 (3937) 94 (2388) 98 (2489)
1370 (5186) 109 (2769) 102 (2591)
126 (3200)
129 (3277)
134 (3404)
137 (3480)

HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 12470Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
750
1000
1500
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
17,580 (7974)
20,980 (9516)
32,460 (14,724)
40,320 (18,289)
610 (2309)
680 (2574)
1080 (4088)
1360 (5148)
107 (2718) 71 (1803)

108 (2743) 84 (2134)
119 (3023) 116 (2946)
129 (3277) 119 (3023)
127 (3226)
132 (3353)
135 (3429)
135 (3429)

HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 13800Y, 95 BIL

Height
3750
5000
7500
10,000
68 (1727)
81 (2057)
95 (2413)
Width
Depth
kVA
Weight
Rating Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid

Height
Width
Depth
6930 (3143)
7920 (3592)
9370 (4250)
360 (1363)
300 (1136)
310 (1173)
87 (2210) 56 (1422)
87 (2210) 58 (1473)
87 (2210) 59 (1499)
66 (1676)
72 (1829)
90 (2286)
750
9270 (4205)
1000
9900 (4491)
1500 11,620 (5271)
400 (1514)
420 (1590)
460 (1741)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
65 (1651)
65 (1651)
65 (1651)
2000 11,240 (5098)

2500 12,760 (5788)
3000 14,260 (6468)
330 (1249)
370 (1401)
390 (1476)
87 (2210) 62 (1575)
87 (2210) 66 (1676)
87 (2210) 69 (1753)
104 (2642)
110 (2794)
111 (2819)
2000 13,160 (5969)

2500 14,580 (6613)
3000 16,090 (7298)
500 (1893)
530 (2006)
560 (2120)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
65 (1651) 117 (2972)

67 (1702) 117 (2972)
69 (1753) 123 (3124)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,910 (7217)
19,830 (8995)
33,990 (15,418)
39,610 (17,967)
420 (1590) 87 (2210)

530 (2006) 89 (2261)
1100 (4164) 94 (2388)
1280 (4845) 109 (2769)
69 (1753)
71 (1803)
97 (2464)
99 (2515)
122 (3099)
130 (3302)
139 (3531)
139 (3531)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
17,930 (8133)
21,410 (9711)
32,060 (14,542)
41,850 (18,983)
600 (2271)
680 (2574)
1010 (3823)
1330 (5035)
108 (2743) 77 (1956)

110 (2794) 77 (1956)
114 (2896) 116 (2946)
122 (3099) 148 (3759)
55 (1397)
67 (1702)
96 (2438)
130 (3302)
131 (3327)
132 (3353)
116 (2946)

bus duct throat.
CA08104001E
17.0-1
September 2011
Pad-Mounted
Transformers
Sheet 17 001
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2
Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2
Industry Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2
Design Impedances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2
Application Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-3
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-3
Transformer Cooling Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-4
NEC Requirement Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-5
Seismic Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-5
Primary Protection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-6
Primary Switching Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-8
Loadbreak Wells and Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-9
Primary Fuse Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-10
Layout Data 752500 kVA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-11
Technical Data 752500 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-12
Layout Dimensions 30005000 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-13
Technical Data 30005000 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-14
Specifications
CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16321
Section 26 12 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Typical Pad-Mounted Transformer
CA08104001E
21
17.0-2 Pad-Mounted Transformers

September 2011
Sheet 17 002
General Description
Three-Phase
ii
1
Industry Standards
Application Limitations
Pad-mounted transformers meet

industry standards: IEEE C57.12.00,
IEEE C57.12.34, IEEE C57.12.28, IEEE
C57.12.29, IEEE C57.12.70, IEEE
C57.12.80, IEEE C57.12.90, IEEE C57.91
and NEMA.
The transformers described herein are

designed for the application conditions
normally encountered on electric power
distribution systems. As such, they are
suitable for use under the usual service
conditions described in IEEE Standard
C57.12.00 general requirements for
liquid-immersed distribution, power
and regulating transformers.
Ratings
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Typical Pad-Mounted Transformer
Introduction
Eatons three-phase pad-mounted
transformer is offered in a variety
of designs and configurations. The
following pages describe the standard
designs and the common options that
are available.
Some special designs and options
may require additional engineering,
factory coordination, unusual
application requirements or
special manufacturing needs.
13
Higher impedances limit secondary

fault currents such that coordination
with secondary low voltage moldedcase circuit breakers is usually
possible. (Low impedances are also
available if required for paralleling,
and so on.)
14
Standard color is pad-mounted green

[Munsell Green (#7GY3.29/1.5)]. ANSI
#24, 61 and 70 are available as options.
15
Application
12
16
17
18
Liquid-filled, three-phase, commercial

pad-mounted distribution transformers
are designed for servicing such underground distribution loads as shopping
centers, schools, institutions and
industrial plants. They are available
in both livefront and deadfront
construction, for radial or loop-feed
applications, with or without taps.
755000 kVA
High voltages (primary):
4160 Grd. Y/2400
2400
through
through
34,500 Grd. Y/19,920
34,500
HV Taps: 22-1/2% above and below
normal, or 42-1/2% below normal
Standard BIL levels:
kV Class
BIL (kV)
1.2
30
2.5
45
5.0
60
8.7
75
15.0
95
25.0 Grd. Y Only
125
25.0
150
34.5 Grd. Y Only
150
34.5
150
Low voltages (secondary).
All voltages through 5 kV class
UL labeling available
Factory Mutual labeling available
Design Impedances
Impedances are supplied to meet
IEEE C57.12.00 standards. Customerspecified impedances are available.
(Subject to IEEE/ANSI 7.5%
impedance tolerance.)
Typical design impedances:

kVA
%Z
75
4.00
112-1/2
4.00
150
4.00
225
4.00
300
5.00
500
5.00
750
5.75
1000
5.75
1500
5.75
2000
5.75
2500
5.75
3000
5.75
3750
5.75
5000
5.75
Note: Subject to NEMA/IEEE 7.5%

impedance tolerance.
Note: Non-standard design impedance
may be obtained by contacting Eaton.
19
20
Consult Eaton for unusual service

conditions such as:
Abnormal environmental conditions
Unusual transient voltages present
on the source voltage
Frequent or planned throughfault duty
Planned overloading unless in strict
accordance with the IEEE loading
guide (C57.91)
Motors whose horsepower rating
is greater than half the transformer
kVA rating
Unusual frequency of impact loading
may occur when supplying welding
apparatus, electric arc furnaces or
motors with cyclical loads
Loads involving abnormal harmonic
or DC current that may result
where appreciable load currents
are controlled by solid-state or
similar devices
These lists do not purport to cover
all unusual conditions and applicable
limitations. Other unusual service
conditions are described in IEEE
Standard C57.12.00.
Table 17.0-1. Temperature Guarantees

Description
Ambient
Rise
Standard
Optional
30C
30C
65C
55C

30C average ambient temperature of

cooling air not to exceed 40C maximum
over any 24-hour period.
Degree rise is the average winding
temperature rise by resistance.
A dual temperature rating of 55/65C adds
12% additional continuous capacity to the
base kVA rating of the transformer.
Note: Altitudes not to exceed

3300 ft (1006m).
FluidsLiquid Dielectric
The choice of fluid, mineral oil or
less flammable natural esther fluid
(BIOTEMP, Envirotemp FR3) is
made based upon site conditions
and proximity to facility walls,
windows and flammable structures,
and environmentally sensitive areas.
21
CA08104001E
17.0-3
September 2011
Sheet 17 003
General Description
Standard Features
Four lifting hooks

Bolted-on terminal compartment
with removable front sill
ii
Hinged, lift-off cabinet doors
Interlocked hex-head or penta-head

bolt padlock handle operates a cam
assembly that is part of the threepoint door latching mechanism
Hex-head or penta-head bolts

must be removed from the flange
formed on the steel high/low
barrier before the HV door can
be openednot shown
3
4
Removable neutral ground strap

not shown
Tank ground pads (1 in HV, 1 in LV)
Steel high/low voltage

compartment barrier
Nameplate
Fill plug and self-actuating

Externally operated no load

tap changer
Drain valve and sampling device
10
Options
11
Primary Termination
For livefront construction, externally clamped high voltage porcelain bushings double eye-bolt or
spade for cable (75225 kVA) or a
single eyebolt or spade for cable
(3001500 kVA). Spade bushings
are also offered
12
13
For deadfront construction, externally clamped high voltage epoxy

bushing wells for 200A loadbreak,
or 600A non-loadbreak inserts
14
15
Secondary Termination
16
NEMA spade terminals
17
18
Primary and Secondary Compartment Features
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 17 004
General Description
i
ii
1
2
Transformer Cooling Classes

Table 17.0-2. Fluids Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages
Disadvantages
Mineral Oil
Low transformer cost

Low maintenance cost
Good heat dissipation
Good cold climate performance
Preventative maintenanceDGA historical data available
Higher installation cost

Vaults required for indoor installations per code low fire point160C
<30% biodegradability
Silicone Fluid
3
4
5
Low heat release

Reduced smoke
Low flame
Self extinguishing
Low toxicity
Moderate viscosity
High stability
Non-biodegradable
Not suitable for use with internal Bay-O-Net fuses
Transformer cost
Disposal cost
Viton gaskets required
Retrofil applications
High transformer cost
High moisture absorption
Environmentally Friendly Fluids
6
7
8
9
High fire point360C

High flash point343C
Compatible with mineral oil
Excellent retrofil fluid (compatible with oil up to a 10% mixture)
Excellent dielectric performance
97% biodegradable
Renewable resource
Greater tolerance to moisture
Transformer cost (lower than silicone fluid)

Pour point (15 to 25C) transformer energized with full load with top
oil temperature at 50C with no problemsno crystals formed at 68C
Table 17.0-3. Fluid Properties Comparison

Property
Mineral
Oil
Silicone
Fluid
Fluids
Specific gravity
Flash point C
Fire point C
0.91
145
160
0.96
300
330
0.91
343
360
11
Viscosity (cSt.) 100C

40C
0C
3
12
76
16
38
90
10
45
300
12
Pour point C
Dielectric strength, kV
Dissipation factor (%) 25C
40
30
0.05
55
4.3
0.01
15 to 25
49
0.0250.05
13
Permittivity
Resistivity
Oxidation inhibitor
Biodegradability
2.2
1013
Optional
<30%
2.7
1014
No
0%
3.1
1013
Required
97%
10
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
17.0-5
September 2011
Sheet 17 005
General Description
NEC Requirement Guidelines

for the Installation of Listed
Less-Flammable Liquid-Filled
Transformers
NEC (NFPA) Recognition
These guidelines focus on the
requirements of Article 450.23 of
the National Electrical Code (NEC)
for the installation of less-flammable
liquid-insulated transformers. Lessflammable liquids are used in
transformers where an extra margin
of fire safety is important. Typical
applications include installations
indoors, on rooftops, near buildings,
bush and forest fire prone areas and
in pedestrian traffic areas.
Less-flammable liquids, also known as
high fire point liquids, are transformer
dielectric coolants that have a minimum fire point of 300C. Commonly
used fire-resistant fluids include
dimethysiloxane and ester-based
fluids. Two Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratories (NRTL);
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
and FM Approvals (FM) currently
list less-flammable liquids. They
also list less-flammable liquid-filled
transformers.
Less-flammable liquid-filled
transformers were formally recognized
by the NEC for indoor installation
in 1978. In 1990, the NEC integrated
specific less-flammable transformer
requirements for outdoor installations
for Article 450.23, in effect recognizing
less-flammable transformers as
inherently safer than conventional
oil-filled transformers. Less-flammable
transformers, long recognized as
an additional safeguard for indoor
installations, are becoming increasingly recognized for outdoor
applications as well.
in existing installations that change the

transformer type, the transformers
must be marked to show the type of
insulating liquid installed and the
installations must comply with current
requirements of the NEC. Examples of
changes include replacing a complete
transformer (retrofitting) or replacement of the liquid only (retrofilling).
Askarel (PCB) and conventional mineral
oil-filled transformers are frequently
retrofitted or retrofilled using lessflammable liquids. NEC 110.34
sets minimum clear work space
dimensions around transformers.
General NEC Requirements

The requirements and options for the
different types of outdoor installations
are outlined in Table 17.0-4. These
guidelines also summarize the UL
Classification and FM Approvals
installation requirements for lessflammable fluids referred to as
listing requirements in NEC 450.23.
In cases where the transformer
installation presents a fire hazard, one
or more of the following safeguards
will be applied according to the degree
of hazard involved:
1. Space requirements.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
2. Fire-resistant barriers.
3. Automatic fire suppression

systems.
4. Enclosures that confine the oil
of a ruptured transformer tank.
6
NEC Article 450.28, Modification of

Transformers, requires that when
modifications are made to transformers
Table 17.0-4. NEC Article 450.23 Requirements

Installation
Type
NEC
Requirements
Outdoor Installations
Non-combustible building and no
combustible materials stored in area.
Either of the following listing requirements :

FM approvals
10
Combustible building or combustible

materials stored in area.
In accordance with NEC Article 450.27, oil-insulated

transformers installed outdoors, i.e., space
separation, fire barriers or water spray systems.
11

Refer to NFPA 220-1999 for definition of non-combustible Type I and II building construction.
Fine Print Note, Article 450.23, (B) (1) states: Installations adjacent to combustible material, fire
escapes, or door and window openings may require additional safeguards such as those listed in
Article 450.27.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 17 006
General Description
Primary Overcurrent
Protection Options
ii
Primary protective devices are

applied to distribution transformers
in order to:
1. Prevent injury to personnel.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
2. Prevent or minimize damage

to equipment.
3. Improve the continuity of service
by selectively controlling outages.
Factors that affect the protection
scheme are:
1. Industry standard.
2. Customers specification.
3. Customers system configuration
(available fault current, system
voltage, system connection,
and so on.)
4. Availability of equipment.
The first consideration in determining
the ampere rating of a fuse is to verify
that the fuse in question is capable of
withstanding typical inrush currents
without element damage. When a
transformer is energized, it is exposed
to very large currents for very short
periods of time. These currents are
known as magnetizing inrush (or fuse
withstand) and cold load pickup,
and are a result of the transformers
magnetic circuit, the electrical system
configuration and the connected load.
The second consideration for selecting
the fuse ampere rating is the maximum load current the fuse is expected
to carry without damage. Transformer
fusing tables available from the
manufacturer normally list the range
of overload provided. If the longtime
minimum melt current for a particular
fuse size is known, it can be compared
to the transformer rated current to
determine the exact amount of
overload permitted. An ambient of
2540C is generally assumed for
application tables. Care should be
taken when fuses are applied in higher
ambient conditions, which will reduce
the amount of overload permitted. An
example of a high ambient condition
used frequently in distribution transformers is that of current limiting fuses
in dry-well canisters. To accommodate
the overload and derating factors
referred to, the following ratios are
used on general-purpose CL fuses.
Nameplate current rating of fuse/

nameplate current rating of transformer
= 1.25 for enclosures surrounded by
air (EFD, clip mount, arc-strangler)
or = 1.35 for enclosures surrounded
by oil (canisters).
Derating factors are not applied to
expulsion or backup CL fuses because
high temperature has minimal effect
on their operation.
Finally, it is necessary to verify that the
fuse current rating under consideration will, in fact, operate prior to the
transformer sustaining any permanent thermal damage (conductor or
insulation burning or melting). This is
done by comparing the total clearing
characteristics of the fuse in question
with the IEEE (I2t) damage line.
It is important that the total clearing
characteristics of the device under
consideration lie to the left of the
damage line for all expected values
of fault current. Note that most fuse
characteristics will cross the damage
line at some point. It is important to
make this occur at the lowest possible
value of the current.
The interrupting rating of a device is a
measure of the maximum symmetrical
fault current at which the device can
successfully clear a fault condition
without excessive damage to itself,
the equipment it is protecting or
the surrounding environment.
It is extremely critical that the
interrupting rating of a device be
greater than the maximum available
symmetrical fault current. For devices
applied to the transformer primary,
the maximum fault current must be
supplied by the utility because this
value is dependent on the electrical
system configuration.
Bay-O-Net fuse assemblies are used to

protect transformers and distribution
systems. They are designed for use in
pad-mounted or sub-surface distribution transformers filled with transformer oil or approved equivalent.
The assemblies combine the ease
of hotstick operation with the safety
of deadfront construction.
Removal of the fuse holder from the
assembly indicates that the apparatus
is electrically disconnected. It also
allows convenient fuse element
inspection and replacement. When
typical safety practices are followed,
the assemblies can be load-break
operated for working on the
transformer secondary; changing
distribution voltage with dual
voltage switches or tap changers;
or disconnecting the apparatus from
the line.
The optional Flapper Bay-O-Net
Assembly (available as sidewallmounted only) includes a flapper valve
inside the housing, which closes when
the fuse holder is removed, thus
minimizing oil spillage.
Table 17.0-5. Bay-O-Net Fuse Electrical Ratings
kV
Rating
Electrical Ratings
150
50
Internal, oil-immersed, expulsion type

Sized to operate only in the event of
a winding failure, isolating the transformer from the primary system
Interrupting rating is 3500A at 8.3 kV
BIL and full wave crest

60 Hz, AC, 1-minute withstand
Maximum Single-Phase Interrupting Ratings

8.3
3000A rms asymmetrical

cover mount
3500A rms symmetrical
sidewall mount
15.5

cover mount
sidewall mount
23.0

cover mount
sidewall mount
Protective Fuse Link
Specification
Load Break Ratings (Phase-to-Phase at 80% PF)

10.0
15.5
26.7
34.5

160A
150A
80A
50A
With RTE Bay-O-Net fuse links only.

Except high ampere overload links, which
are rated at 2000A symmetrical.
Protective Fuse Link
Bay-O-Net-Type Fuse
Oil immersed, expulsion type
Drawout for fuse replacement
Hookstick operable, loadbreak design
Available with either overloadsensing or fault sensing
3500 AIC at 8.3 kV, 1800 AIC
at 15.5 kV
Bay-O-Net-Type Fuse Assembly
CA08104001E
17.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 17 007
General Description
Air immersed in drywell canister

Drawout for fuse replacement
Hookstick operable
Limits both the current magnitude
and energy associated with low
impedance faults
Effective in minimizing the probability
of tank rupture due to internal, high
energy, low impedance faults
Available fuse interrupting ratings of
25,00050,000A rms (symmetrical)
Maximum fuse ampere rating at
15 kV (250A fuses)
Partial Range Current Limiting Fuses

Oil immersed, internally block
mounted
Applied in series with an expulsion
type fuse (Bay-O-Net typesee above)
Protection against tank rupture
The current-limiting backup fuse

is used in series with low-current
primary protection devices such as
a Bay-O-Net fuse.
The fuses highly efficient current-limiting section minimizes the effects of
high fault current stresses on equipment and the distribution system. Its
minimum interrupting rating is coordinated with that of a low current interrupter to avoid undesirable low current
operation; yet its maximum interrupting rating will clear the highest fault
currents likely to occur. Higher continuous current ratings can be achieved by
connecting two fuses in parallel.
The current-limiting fuse is used in
transformers to protect and isolate
faulted equipment. When connected
in series with a low current primary
protection device, the fuse becomes an
element of a two-part protection system
that gives a full range of fault protection.
Drawout Current Limiting Fuse Canister
Drawout Current Limiting Fuse

Loadbreak Assembly
Table 17.0-6. Current-Limiting Backup Fuse

Electrical Ratings and Characteristics
Fuse
Type
Maximum
Backup (partial range)

C rated
50,000A rms
symmetrical
This two-part system provides low

current protection with the replaceable
expulsion fuse and it adds the energy-
limiting protection of a current-limiting

fuse. Together, they coordinate easily
with upstream and downstream devices.
200 Ampere
300 Ampere
600 Ampere
35
21.1
150
25
15.2
125
60 Hz 1-minute withstand kV
Continuous current
Loadbreak
50
200
200
40
300
300
34
600
600
10,000
10,000
6000
10,000
10,000
10,000
15,000
10,000
10,000
Momentary, 10 Hz
2-second
3-shot make and latch ampere
15
8.3
95
Voltage kV phasephase maximum

Voltage kV phaseground maximum
Impulse withstand kV
Table 17.0-8. Current-Limiting Backup Fuse Interrupting Ratings

Continuous Ampere
Current Rating
Minimum Interrupting
(Amperes)
Minimum Melt I2t

(A2x s)
Maximum Clear I2t

(A2x s)
8.3 kV
30
40
50
100
125
165
1200
1800
4100
5800
8200
16,500
65
80
100
300
200
350
6200
9600
17,100
26,700
42,900
62,000
125
150
165
375
450
500
30,500
43,900
68,600
97,800
148,000
245,000
800
1000
1200
122,000
175,600
274,400
369,000
566,000
875,700
30
40
50
100
150
200
1200
1800
4100
7600
11,000
23,000
10
65
80
100
350
250
350
6200
9600
17,100
33,000
52,900
93,800
11
125
150
165
400
450
30,500
43,900
125,700
162,300
12
250
300
330
800
1000
122,000
175,600
408,000
660,700
13
30
40
50
125
200
325
1200
1800
4100
10,500
15,100
34,300
65
80
100
400
300
400
6200
9600
17,100
38,400
68,300
121,000
125
150
165
500
600
700
30,500
43,900
68,600
149,700
196,700
307,300
900
1200
1400
122,000
175,600
274,400
391,100
563,000
882,000
250
300
330
15.5 kV
23 kV
250
300
330

The 8.3 kV, 30100A ratings have been tested and approved for application at 9.9 kV.
The maximum interrupting capacity for the 65100A ratings at 9.9 kV is 18 kA.
Parallel fuses.
The 15.5 kV, 30125A and 250A ratings have been tested and approved for application at 17.2 kV.
The maximum interrupting rating for the 15.5 kV fuse, 30125A at 17.2 kV is 43 kA. For the 15 kV,
250A fuse at 17.2 kV, the maximum interrupting rating is 12 kA.
The maximum interrupting rating for the 23 kV fuse, 80165A, 300 and 330A, is 30 kA. For the
23 kV, 250A fuse, the maximum interrupting rating is 12 kA.
See Table 17.0-8 for fuses with ratings other

than 50,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
CA08104001E
ii
Table 17.0-7. Two- and Four-Position, Load Break, Sectionalizing Switch

Ratings
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 17 008
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
Primary Switching Options

Eatons oil-immersed switches are
available for radial or loop-feed
system switching in three current
ratings. The three-phase gangoperated switch has a spring-loaded
mechanism for loadbreak and latch
operation. The switch is mounted near
the core and coil assembly, for low cable
capacitance; and with simultaneous
three-phase switching, the possibility of
ferroresonance is reduced. Available in
ratings through 600A at 15 kV, 300A at
25 kV, and 200A at 35 kV.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV)

Deadfront Arrester
A-Coil
The highly nonlinear characteristics

of the varistor elements provide more
precise and predictable operating
characteristics. The MOV arrester is
capable of withstanding temporary
overvoltages, so that ratings can be
reduced, providing improved margins
of protection.
Open
Coil
Source
A
Figure 17.0-1. Two-Position Switch

AB-Coil
B-Coil
Surge protection is available without

losing deadfront construction in the
cabinet. The Eaton type MOV arrester
is completely deadfront. It is compact,
and is usable wherever a loadbreak
elbow can be used.
A-Coil
Open and Loop through
Source
A
B Source
Deadfront Elbow Arrester
Surge Arresters
Eaton distribution class surge arresters are supplied on transformers when
specified. Transformers with livefront
configuration have mounting nuts
welded on the tank wall for arrester
mounting.
Because it is fully shielded and deadfront, it is mountable at any angle

and submersible. Its durable rubber
construction means there are no
fragile porcelain skirts to chip or crack.
The MOV arrester is available in
ratings from 3 kV to 27 kV.
AB-Coil
B-Coil
A-Coil
Open
Coil
B Source
Coil
Figure 17.0-2. Four-Position Switch

(Loop Feed) T Blade
Source
11
Figure 17.0-3. Four-Position Switch

(Loop-Feed) V Blade
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
17.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 17 009
General Description
INSULATION
High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber formulated, mixed
and milled in-house for consistent and reliable field performance.
SEMI-CONDUCTIVE INSERT
High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber
creates a smooth surface around the current
interchange to evenly distribute electrical
stress within the insulation.
SEMI-CONDUCTIVE SHIELD
High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber provides protective
deadfront shield that meets requirements of IEEE Standard 592.
PULLING EYE
Stainless steel
reinforced for
positive shotgun
stick switching
operations.
i
ii
1
LOADBREAK PROBE
Tin-plated copper probe with arc-ablative
tip(arc follower) provides dependable loadbreak switching characteristics.
TEST POINT (OPTIONAL)

Corrosion-resistant, conductive
electrode provides consistent
capacitive voltage for application of
fault indicators and for determining
if the circuit is energized (cap not
shown).
2
3
COPPERTOP COMPRESSION CONNECTOR

Inertia-welded aluminum barrel and threaded copper
lug makes crimping easy and ensures a tight, reliable
electrical connection with loadbreak probe.
LOADBREAK BAND
UV-resistant nylon band identifies
the elbow as three-phase loadbreak
rated and is field replaceable.
GROUNDING TABS
Molded into semi-conductive shield
for the attachment of a ground wire
to maintain deadfront safety.
IN
-.910
100
78
LE215
17
CONDUCTIVE INSERT ENDS

Encapsulated with insulating rubber. Reduces
cable extrusion and distortion that can be
caused by thermocycling. Mitigates the effects of
the electrical stresses along the cable to elbow
interface, greatly reducing the possibility of
interface tracking.
-23.1 1
7
8
9
Figure 17.0-4. 200A, 15 kV Class Loadbreak Elbow Connector
10
INSULATION
High-quality, peroxide-cured EPDM
rubber formulated, mixed and molded
in-house for consistent and reliable
field performance.
LATCH INDICATOR RING

Molded-in bright yellow ring eliminates elbow installation
guesswork by ensuring a quality connection.
SEMI-CONDUCTIVE SHIELD
High quality EPDM rubber provides protective deadfront
shield that meets requirements of IEEE Standard 592.
SHIELD HOUSING
Structural member of insert
providing mechanical strength
and uniform electrical shielding.
CONTACT HOLDER
Copper component transfers current from
piston-contact to bushing well stud.
11
12
13
14
THREADED BASE
3/8-16 UNC
Copper threads
provide connection
to bushing well
stud.
ARC SNUFFER ASSEMBLY
Arc-ablative plastic produces
arc-extinguishing gas
during loadbreak switching
operations.
GROUNDING TABS
Three tabs molded into a semi-conductive
shield for the attachment of a ground wire
to maintain deadfront safety.
INTEGRAL PISTON-CONTACT
One-piece copper component
provides a multi-point, knurled
current transfer to the contact
holder. During a fault-close
switching operation, the piston
is forced quickly forward to
engage the elbows
loadbreak probe.
Figure 17.0-5. Bushing Well Insert Cutaway Illustrates Uncomplicated Nature of Current Path
HEX BROACH
5/16 hex broach
permits consistent installation
with torque tool.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 17 010
General Description
Tank
Wall
ii
Recommended Oil Level
Minimum Oil Level
1.25
(29.0)
2
3
Transformer
Primary
Winding
Isolation
Link
Elbow
Connector
4
5
6
Bottom
Contact
Upper
Contact
High
Voltage
Lead
7
Underground
Cable
8
9
High Voltage
Bushing
10
Figure 17.0-6. Bay-O-Net Assembly with Isolation Link
11
Note: Isolation link is not required if the Bay-O-Net fuse is used in series with a backup energy limiting fuse.
Bay-O-Net
Fuse Link
12
Contact
Flare End
13
14
15
16
Tulip Tip End
Cartridge
Figure 17.0-7. Insertion of Bay-O-Net Into Cartridge
Flare End of
Bay-O-Net Link
Tulip End of
Bay-O-Net Link
17
18
19
End Plug
(c)
Cartridge
(a)
Inner Holder
(b)
Figure 17.0-8. Assembly of Cartridge with Fuse Onto Inner Holder
20
21
CA08104001E
17.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 17 011
Layout Dimensions
Front View
Side View
LV
Comp
HV
Comp
Pad
15.50
(393.7)
H
Conductor
Entry Area
3.50
(88.9)
Min.
D + 4.00
(101.6)
kVA
Transformer Dimensions
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
Gallons (Liters) of
Oil (Approximate)
HV: 515 kV Radial Feed, Livefront

75
112
150
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
2280 (1034.2)
2400 (1088.6)
2700 (1224.7)
115 (435.3)
115 (435.3)
125 (473.2)
225
300
500
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
58.00 (1473.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
58.00 (1473.2)
58.00 (1473.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
3350 (1519.5)
3650 (1655.6)
5200 (2358.7)
150 (567.8)
165 (624.6)
200 (757.1)
750
1000
1500
81.00 (2057.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
86.00 (2184.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
2000
2500
3000
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
77.00 (1955.8)
13,400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
HV: 515 kV Radial Feed, Deadfront

75
112
150
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
2350 (1065.9)
2450 (1111.3)
2700 (1224.7)
115 (435.3)
115 (435.3)
125 (473.2)
225
300
500
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
58.00 (1473.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
58.00 (1473.2)
58.00 (1473.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
3400 (1542.2)
3700 (1678.3)
5400 (2449.4)
150 (567.8)
165 (624.6)
200 (757.1)
750
1000
1500
81.00 (2057.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
86.00 (2184.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
2000
2500
3000
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
77.00 (1955.8)
13,400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
HV: 515 kV Loop Feed, Livefront

75
112
150
65.00 (1651.0)
65.00 (1651.0)
65.00 (1651.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
2400 (1088.6)
2500 (1134.0)
2800 (1270.1)
115 (435.3)
115 (435.3)
125 (473.2)
225
300
500
65.00 (1651.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
68.00 (1727.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
58.00 (1473.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
58.00 (1473.2)
58.00 (1473.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
3500 (1587.6)
3800 (1723.7)
5600 (2540.1)
150 (567.8)
165 (624.6)
200 (757.1)
750
1000
1500
82.00 (2082.8)
86.00 (2184.4)
88.00 (2235.2)
64.00 (1625.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
2000
2500
3000
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
77.00 (1955.8)
13,400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
1
2
42.00 (1066.8)
4.00 (101.6)
W + 4.00 (101.6)
Figure 17.0-9. Pad-Mounted Transformer (752500 kVA)Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 17.0-9. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed 65C Rise, 752500 kVADimensions in Inches (mm)
ii
Dimensional Variations
3
4
Height Variations
1. Add 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) to the

height when using bayonet fusing
on all kVA ratings.

height when using dry well canister
fusing on 75500 kVA ratings.

height when using dry well canister
fusing on 750 kVA rating only.
Depth Variations
4. Canister fuses require deeper

tanks on some transformer sizes.
a. Add 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) to
the depth of kVA ratings 75, 150
and 225.
b. Add 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) to
the depth of kVA rating 500.
5. Less flammable natural esther
fluid requires deeper tanks on
some transformer ratings.
a. Add 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
to the depth of kVA ratings
751500. Add 8.00 inches
(203.2 mm) to the depth of
kVA ratings 2000 and 2500.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Dimensions are approximate

not for construction.
CA08104001E
21

September 2011
Sheet 17 012
Layout Dimensions/Technical Data
Table 17.0-9. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed 65C Rise, 752500 kVADimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
kVA
Transformer Dimensions
Width (W)
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
Gallons (Liters) of
Oil (Approximate)
52.00 (1320.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
56.00 (1422.4)
69.00 (1752.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
74.00 (1879.6)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
55.00 (1397.0)
55.00 (1397.0)
55.00 (1397.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
75.00 (1905.0)
77.00 (1955.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
3500 (1587.6)
4500 (2041.2)
6000 (2721.6)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
13,400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
135 (511.0)
185 (700.3)
190 (719.2)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
52.00 (1320.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
56.00 (1422.4)
69.00 (1752.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
74.00 (1879.6)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
55.00 (1397.0)
55.00 (1397.0)
55.00 (1397.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
75.00 (1905.0)
77.00 (1955.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
3500 (1587.6)
4500 (2041.2)
6000 (2721.6)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
13400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
135 (511.0)
185 (700.3)
190 (719.2)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
HV: 25 kV Radial Feed Deadfront

75150
225300
500
750
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
68.00 (1727.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
76.00 (1930.4)
80.00 (2032.0)
89.00 (2260.6)
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
HV: 25 kV Loop Feed Deadfront

75150
225300
500
750
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
68.00 (1727.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
76.00 (1930.4)
80.00 (2032.0)
89.00 (2260.6)
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
Technical Data
Table 17.0-10. Liquid Filled<34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise

kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
9
10
11
12
13
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
175
250
300
960
1250
1630
1135
1500
1930
413
562
696
225
300
500
330
520
730
2500
2600
4900
2830
3120
5630
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1100
1500
1900
6200
6700
10,000
7300
8200
11,900
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000
14,600
17,800
19,800
5429
6408
Table 17.0-12. Environmentally Friendly Fluid<34.5 kV Primary

55C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
175
250
300
960
1250
1630
1135
1500
1930
413
562
696
225
300
500
330
520
730
2500
2600
4900
2830
3120
5630
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1100
1500
1900
6200
6700
10,000
7300
8200
11,900
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000
14,600
17,800
19,800
5429
6408
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed.
14
Table 17.0-11. Liquid Filled<34.5 kV Primary 65C Temp. Rise

kVA
15
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
16
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp per DOE (Watts)
17
75
112.5
150
190
260
320
950
1300
1600
1140
1560
1920
413
562
696
18
225
300
500
400
500
700
2300
3000
5000
2700
3500
5700
942
1164
1889
19
750
1000
1500
1000
1300
1900
6500
8500
10,500
7500
9800
12,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2100
2700
4000
14,500
15,500
18,000
16,600
18,200
22,000
5429
6408
20
21
Table 17.0-13. Environmentally Friendly Fluid<34.5 kV Primary

65C Temp. Rise
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
190
260
320
950
1300
1600
1140
1560
1920
413
562
696
225
300
500
400
500
700
2300
3000
5000
2700
3500
5700
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1000
1300
1900
6500
8500
10,500
7500
9800
12,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2100
2700
4000
14,500
15,500
18,000
16,600
18,200
22,000
5429
6408
CA08104001E
17.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 17 013
Layout Dimensions
Front View
Side View
ii
Pad
H1 H2 H3
C
X0 X1X2 X3
15.00
(381.0)
H1 H2 H3
XOX1 X2 X3
8.00
(203.2)
F
D
8.00
(203.2)
2
3
4
5
Figure 17.0-10. Pad-Mounted Transformer (30005000 kVA)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 17.0-14. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed Rated 65C Rise, 30005000 kVADimensions in Inches (mm)
kVA
Transformer
A
Pad
B
C
E
Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
74.00 (1879.6)
79.00 (2006.6)
76.00 (1930.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
80.00 (2032.0)
58.00 (1473.2)
63.00 (1600.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
12,900 (5851)
20,000 (9072)
21,500 (9752)
385 (1457)
540 (2044)
565 (2139)
78.00 (1981.2)
81.00 (2057.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
74.00 (1879.6)
77.00 (1955.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
65.00 (1651.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
15,000 (6804)
21,800 (9888)
22,000 (9979)
390 (1476)
550 (2082)
585 (2214)
86.00 (2184.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
74.00 (1879.6)
78.00 (1981.2)
79.00 (2006.6)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
15,400 (6985)
20,100 (9117)
22,900 (10,387)
515 (1949)
650 (2461)
670 (2536)
80.00 (2032.0)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
74.00 (1879.6)
78.00 (1981.2)
80.00 (2032.0)
64.00 (1625.6)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
16,300 (7394)
21,200 (9616)
23,100 (10,478)
450 (1703)
575 (2177)
605 (2290)
78.00 (1981.2)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
67.00 (1701.8)
15,700 (7121)
19,800 (8981)
22,600 (10,251)
420 (1590)
525 (1987)
580 (2196)
78.00 (1981.2)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
67.00 (1701.8)
15,700 (7121)
19,800 (8981)
22,600 (10,251)
420 (1590)
525 (1987)
580 (2196)
86.00 (2184.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
81.00 (2057.4)
74.00 (1879.6)
77.00 (1955.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
65.00 (1651.0)
15,400 (6985)
19,300 (8754)
20,500 (9299)
530 (2006)
630 (2385)
600 (2271)
86.00 (2184.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
85.00 (2159.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
79.00 (2006.6)
79.00 (2006.6)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
69.00 (1752.6)
17,100 (7756)
20,600 (9344)
23,800 (10,795)
500 (1893)
560 (2120)
625 (2366)
107.00 (2717.8)
107.00 (2717.8)
107.00 (2717.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
91.00 (2311.4)
91.00 (2311.4)
89.00 (2260.6)
19,800 (8981)
24,400 (11,068)
28,600 (12,973)
720 (2725)
840 (3180)
920 (3483)
Gallons
(Liters) of Oil
15 kV Class, Delta Connected HV-HV 95 kV BIL, LV 30 kV BIL

3000
3750
5000
76.00 (1930.4)
80.00 (2032.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
119.00 (3022.6)
82.00 (2082.8)
137.00 (3479.8)
100.00 (2540.0)
111.00 (2819.4)
108.00 (2743.2)
15 kV Class, Wye Connected HV-HV 95 kV BIL, LV 30 kV BIL

3000
3750
5000
74.00 (1879.6)
97.00 (2463.8)
91.00 (2311.4)
117.00 (2971.8)
81.00 (2057.4)
119.00 (3022.6)
83.00 (2108.2)
96.00 (2438.4)
101.00 (2565.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
101.00 (2565.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
101.00 (2565.4)
108.00 (2743.2)
101.00 (2565.4)
98.00 (2489.2)
107.00 (2717.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
93.00 (2362.2)
90.00 (2286.0
80.00 (2032.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
110.00 (2794.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
99.00 (2514.6)
108.00 (2743.2)

3000
3750
5000
86.00 (2184.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
86.00 (2184.4)
82.00 (2082.8)
122.00 (3098.8)
101.00 (2565.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
106.00 (2692.4)
82.00 (2082.8)
91.00 (2311.4)
92.00 (2336.8)
86.00 (2184.4)
82.00 (2082.8)
122.00 (3098.8)
101.00 (2565.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
106.00 (2692.4)
11
12
13
14

3000
3750
5000
9
10

3000
3750
5000

3000
3750
5000
15

3000
3750
5000
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
92.00 (2336.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
122.00 (3098.8)
100.00 (2540.0)
101.00 (2565.4)
106.00 (2692.4)

3000
3750
5000
80.00 (2032.0)
86.00 (2184.4)
95.00 (2413.0)
84.00 (2133.6)
87.00 (2209.8)
105.00 (2667.0)
104.00 (2641.6)
107.00 (2717.8)
107.00 (2717.8)

3000
3750
5000

88.00 (2235.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
101.00 (2565.4)
104.00 (2641.6)
104.00 (2641.6)
102.00 (2590.8)
99.00 (2514.6)
104.00 (2641.6)
106.00 (2692.4)
Standard compartment depth is 22.00 inches (558.8 mm) except 200 kV BIL has a depth of 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).
Depth may be altered by the addition of switching and fusing.
Extends under base of transformer only. Does not include rear coolers.
Standard low voltages are 480Y and 480 delta (through 3750 kVA only).
Low voltage above 3750 kVA must be 2400V or above.
Dimensions are approximatenot for construction.

CA08104001E
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 17 014
Technical Data
i
ii
Liquid Filled Technical Data

No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5517
6521
8193
22,491
26,340
32,255
28,008
32,861
40,448
11,140
13,110
16,260
3000
3750
5000
5985
7075
8889
24,402
28,578
34,996
30,387
35,653
43,885
12,090
14,220
17,640
1
2
3

No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5461
6455
8111
22,269
26,076
31,932
27,730
32,531
40,043
11,030
12,230
16,090
3000
3750
5000
5925
7003
8800
24,161
28,292
34,646
30,086
35,295
43,446
11,970
14,080
17,460

No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5570
6584
8273
22,046
25,815
31,612
27,616
32,399
39,885
11,080
13,040
16,180
3000
3750
5000
6043
7143
8976
23,919
28,009
34,299
29,962
35,152
43,275
12,020
14,150
17,550
11

No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100% LOAD
and 85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
kVA
No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5848
6913
8686
21,825
25,556
31,295
27,673
32,469
39,981
11,300
13,300
16,510
3000
3750
5000
6345
7500
9424
23,680
27,728
33,955
30,025
35,228
43,379
12,270
14,430
17,910
13
15
kVA
12
14
kVA
10
kVA
kVA
on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating 0.48 kV.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
18.0-1
September 2011
Spot Network
Equipment
Sheet 18 001
Contents

Discussion
Spot Network Decision Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-2
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-3
Commercial Spot Network Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-5
Network Protector Equipment
Liquid-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-16
Dry-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-18
CM52 Network Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-20
Protector NPL Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-24
MPCV Network Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-25
Communications Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-27
MPCV Network Relay Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-28
Communications Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-30
CM52 Protector Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-31
Network Disconnect Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-32
Network Transition Box to Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-33
Rating Selection
Spot Network Equipment Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-34
Protector Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-36
Layout Dimensions
Liquid-Type Network Unit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-37
Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-38
Dry-Type Network Unit
Switchgear Mounted Protector Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-39
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16422
Section 26 23 16
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CM52 Network Protector
CA08104001E
21
18.0-2 Spot Network Equipment

Discussion
September 2011
Sheet 18 002
Spot Network Decision Tree
i
ii
Continuity of
Service Critical
Considering Spot Networks for

Electrical Distribution in a Facility?
Continuity of
Service NOT Critical
1
2
Does the local utility

offer multiple circuits for
the metered utility service?
YES
Use Radial design at one

or more service voltages.
NO
4
5
Are the multiple incoming

circuits from the utility
in synchronization?
YES
Use separate Radial

or Double-ended
Substations with Open
Transition Switching.
NO
7
8
9
Are the multiple circuits from the utility

the same voltage and frequency under
most operating conditions?
YES
Spot Networks may be

possible, but without the
redundancy of multiple
primary circuits.
NO
10
11
How many circuits are available or routed to each major load areas of the facility?
One (1)
Two (2)
Three (3)
Four (4)
12
13
14
Spot Networks may be

possible, but without the
redundancy of multiple
primary circuits.
15
16
Three Transformer Spot

Networks are practical.
See Pages 18.0-34 through
18.0-36 for Application
information. If anticipated
load = Y kVA, use three
network transformers
each rated Y/2 kVA.
17
Two Transformer Spot
load = X kVA, use two
each rated X kVA.
18
19
20
21
Four Transformer Spot

load = Z kVA, use four
each rated Z/3 kVA.
Figure 18.0-1. Spot Network Decision Tree

CA08104001E
September 2011

Discussion
18.0-3
Sheet 18 003
General Description
Description
Eatons Spot Network Systems are
designed to ensure service continuity
in 208/120V and 480/277V wye connected secondary network systems.
These systems, in either grid or spot
network form, are commonly used in
areas of high load density such as
metropolitan and suburban business
districts or facilities.
Suburban loads were formerly almost
entirely residential and power outages
caused little more than personal
inconvenience. Now, the suburban
load includes not only shopping
plazas, industries and residences,
but such vital facilities as hospitals and
airports. For these and other critical
loads, power interruptions can have
serious consequences to public and
personal safety. Spot networks
provide superior reliability at these
important loads.
The need to supply increasing amounts
of power efficiently, without increasing
equipment size, has resulted in a shift
from 208V to 480V wye systems. The
change to a higher utilization voltage
requires a commensurate change in
operating procedures because of the
difference in arcing characteristics at
480V compared to 208V. For example,
while an arc in a 208 volt system is
normally self-extinguishing, an arc
in a 480V system will usually burn
until it is interrupted by an overcurrent
device or until it totally consumes the
arcing material.
Secondary network systems using
Eaton Network Protectors are among
the most dependable in use today.
In the event of a fault on a primary
system cable or transformer, the
protector opens due to reverse power
flow, thus isolating the fault from the
network bus and avoiding load power
disturbances. Loss of the primary
feeder will not result in service
outage at the load on the secondary
network. The other primary feeders
will continue carrying the load until
the faulted cable is repaired and
returned to service.
The network protector basically
consists of a special air power breaker,
a breaker operating mechanism, network relay(s) and control equipment.
Units are available in both weatherproof and submersible enclosures for
either separate or transformer throat
mounting. Switchgear mounting is
also possible.
i
Typical Feeder
Primary Circuit
To Other
Networks
Network Transformer
Protector
Fuses
Optional Main, 50/51
Relaying and/or
Network Disconnect
LV Feeder
ii
Tie
Tie
NC
NC
Customer
Loads
Customer
Loads
2
Low Voltage
Switchgear
Drawout
Customer
Loads
Figure 18.0-2. Typical Configuration for Three Transformer Spot Network
Better Continuity of Service

The largest user of network systems
in the United States is Consolidated
Edison of New York. Historical data
developed by this utility illustrates that
outages are very rare (approximately
zero) on grid systems and that spot
network systems are five times more
reliable than secondary selective
double-ended substation services.
Improved Regulation
Less Voltage Sagging
Each load is supplied from at least two
directions. Services supplied from a
transformer location have a minimum
of two paths of supply on utility
grids and spot networks, and can
be designed to have more. Abrupt
changes in loads, such as motor
starting, cause much less voltage
disturbance due to the multiple paths
for load current compared to simple
radial services. The voltage dip
resulting from a given starting
current may be 70% less in a network
system than in a radial system.
Less Transformer
Capacity Required
In normal operation, the loads along
the network service are divided among
the various network transformers in
such a way that the best possible
voltage conditions and lowest losses
are realized. Since all the services are
tied together, many more loads are
supplied from the same secondary
network source than in a simple
radial system. The peak loads on
the transformers are correspondingly
lower in the network system compared
to a radial system supplying the same

loads, because of the diversity in the
demand among the larger number of
circuits. Therefore, less transformer
capacity may be required in a network
system than in a radial system in the
same area, particularly if three or
more primary feeders supply the
network system.
System Operation
A short circuit on any one primary
feeder will cause all the network protectors on that feeder to open on reverse
energy, provided the total power on
the three-phase feeder is in the reverse
direction. When the feeder cable is
repaired properly, the network protectors on that feeder will automatically
reclose when the feeder circuit breaker
at the upstream switchgear is closed, if
correct voltage conditions exist at the
network transformer.
If the phases are reversed during the
cable repairs, the protectors will not
reclose automatically as long as the
network remains energized. Likewise,
if a voltage less than network voltage
is restored to the feeder, the network
protector on that feeder will not
reclose automatically. The unit could
be closed manually if the network
relay trip contact is not closed.
If a feeder from a networkable source
is to be connected to an energized
network, the incoming voltage must
be slightly higher than the network
voltage and in proper phase relation
with it. If a feeder is being connected
to a dead network, it is sufficient
to have the incoming voltage high
enough to operate the closing
mechanism.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Discussion
September 2011
Sheet 18 004
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Maintenance of primary feeder circuits

can be accomplished by opening
upstream switchgear primary devices
one at a time, thereby opening every
protector connected to a given primary
due to reverse magnetizing currents
flowing through each protector served.
By opening the primary circuits one
at a time, the network loads are not
disturbed. Also, at times of light load,
the system can be economically
loaded by disconnecting some of the
primary circuits and operating the
transformers at more efficient levels.
Although the protectors are capable of
opening under reverse magnetizing
currents, the opening may be delayed
depending upon the time delay setting
of the network relay.
When the load increases on the network, other primaries can be brought
into service by closing the feeder
breakers. The associated protectors
on the reactivated feeders will reclose
serving the network if the transformer
voltage is higher than the network
voltage by a certain minimum amount
and in the proper phase relation.
Primary Feeder
Breaker
Typical
Protector
Typical Network
Transformer
LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
Grid
Grid
Figure 18.0-3. Typical Configuration for Utility Grid Network
CM52 Protector Advantages
Spring Close Operating Mechanism:

Avoids partial closures. The CM52
spring close mechanisms will not
permit closing motion of the contacts
until the closing springs are fully
charged. Also provides close and
latch ratings on protectors.
The network protector fuses provide

backup protection for clearing faults
on the primary feeder in the unlikely
event the protector fails to operate.
These melting alloy or partial range
current limiting fuses are located on
the load side of the protector, and
when removed, serve to isolate the
protector from the network.
Numerous protector models are available from Eaton and the best product
for the application is a function of the
type of system being designed: utility
grid (see Figure 18.0-3) or spot
network. Spot network systems
(see Figure 18.0-2) usually use the
CM52 type of protector, which has
important safety features not found on
earlier Eaton or competitor models.
Externally Mounted Silver-Sand Fuses:

Operate with no contamination of the
protector, and will positively interrupt
fault current to disconnect the protector from the network bus in abnormal
fault situations.
CM52 Protector
20
Exclusive Drawout Design: With

positive safety interlocks, provides
maximum protection against contact
with energized components while
disconnecting the unit for test or
maintenance; ensures maximum
safety for operating personnel. All
main current carrying and mechanical
operating components are located
behind a deadfront panel which
minimizes the possibility of tools or
hands being inserted into an energized
protector. The drawout unit is operated
by a hand-cranked levering system,
which cannot be engaged unless the
circuit breaker is open and cannot be
disengaged unless the drawout unit
is either fully disconnected or fully
connected.
21
Modular Construction: Simplifies field

maintenance and/or replacement of
components. Protectors can be quickly
15
16
17
18
19
put back into service reducing

maintenance time.
Low Energy, Trip Actuator: Provides

reliable tripping effort, even when
system voltage is not available, up to
four operations via remote tripping
before recharging is needed.
Close and Latch Ratings: Ratings
comparable to air power breakers are
readily available since the mechanism
is spring charged, unlike motor
operated protectors which have
no close and latch ratings.
Increased Dielectric Strength: CM52
units have passed a more stringent
dielectric test voltage of 5000 Vac
compared to the lower value of 2200V
required by ANSI standards.
Stored Energy Option: The CM52 can
be provided wired for stored energy.
This option charges the closing springs
after a closure, resulting in a 5-cycle
close after a trip event. This is the
preferred configuration for 2-unit
spot networks.
CA08104001E
September 2011

Discussion
18.0-5
Sheet 18 005
Commercial Spot Network Design Considerations
Commercial Spot Network

Design Considerations
This section deals with the various
components which make up the
commercial spot network, either as a
double-ended substation or multiple
transformer substation. The intent of
the discussion is to give some basic
guidelines for the selection of Eaton
transformers and network protectors.
The major components that will be
discussed are:
Coil #1 Interlock
Primary MagBreak Switch
Interlock logic can vary

thus both an A and B
auxiliary contact is
supplied.
Network
Transformer
Open
ii
1
Closed
To Network
Ground
Position
Protector
Fuses
1. Primary switches
2. Network transformer types
3. Network protectors
4. Spot network disconnects
5. Low voltage drawout switchgear
configurations
6. Typical spot network layouts
7. Use of current limiting fuses
8. Network device coordination
1. Medium Voltage Primary Switches

The incoming medium voltage feeder
may range from 4160V to 34.5 kV. Any
feeder which has a voltage higher than
34.5 kV should not be considered for
spot network service because the
cable charging capacitance begins to
affect the operation of the network
relay response. The primary feeder
enters into a switch compartment,
which can be liquid or air type. The
liquid type transformers usually use
a special three-position, liquid-filled,
non-loadbreak primary switch, which
has a special third position for grounding the incoming feeder cable during
maintenance work on a primary
circuit. Dry-type transformers usually
use a two-position air switch, which
omits the third position. Grounding
the circuit becomes a manual
procedure, if needed, on dry-type
transformers.
The three positions of the liquid
type non-loadbreak switch on liquid
network transformers are:
1. Close
2. Open
3. Ground
These liquid switch designs use
electrical interlocks that prevent the
unintentional movement of the switch,
with either the network protector in
the Closed position or the medium
voltage feeder being energized.
Figure 18.0-4 shows the typical
CA08104001E
Coil #2 Interlock
Figure 18.0-4. Three-Position Primary Switch Interlock for Liquid Network Transformers
electrical connections for the interlocking between the primary switch,
transformer and network protector.
Coil #1 and #2 are electrical interlocks
which prevent unsafe operation of the
primary mag-break switch. Coil #1
ensures that the protector must be
used to break load current before
operating the switch from closed to
open. Coil #2 ensures that the primary
cable must be deenergized before
operating the switch from closed
to ground. These interlocks are not
necessary on a two-position air switch
if it has loadbreak ratings.
Due to their common use, liquid type
network transformers are manufactured
with the three-position mag-break only
switch integral to the transformer. Drytype transformers use the commonly
available two-position air switch with
special flicker blades which give the air
switch a loadbreak rating. The capability
of interrupting load currents can save
time by not having to deenergize the
feeder. The choice of switch type is thus
dictated by the type of transformer
selected for the spot network system.
Another consideration is the necessity
to provide primary overcurrent protection for each transformer, such as in the
form of power fuses. Upstream breakers
usually serve two, three or four transformers on their circuit and thus have
the protective relays set at higher levels
dictated by the entire circuit load, which
sacrifices individual transformer protection. See Figure 18.0-13 later in this
section for a specific example of this
type of situation. When dry-type units
are used, one solution is to add power
fuses to the loadbreak switches.
However, this option is not easy
when liquid types are used unless air
switches are added ahead of the

integral type liquid switches. Eaton
recommends that no more than two
transformers be served by a single
upstream breaker and relay, unless
separate fused air switches are located
ahead of the transformers.
If fuses are used anywhere in the primary

circuit, the network protector relays
must be capable of tripping under
WATT-VAR conditions. New digital
type network relays have the ability to
configure their tripping characteristics
from WATT to WATT-VAR in the field.
Older type protectors having electromechanical relays should be updated
by retrofitting with the newer relays.
If fuses are not present, the standard
WATT trip characteristic, which is
standard in the industry, is appropriate.
Each type of primary switch uses
unique terminations of the primary
cable. Liquid switches use a terminal
chamber which is filled in the field
with a suitable compound to improve
the insulation strength of the cables.
Air switches use mechanical or
compression terminations with
stress cones.
Air switches require more floor space
than the integral liquid type of switch,
especially since the depth of the air
switch is made to match the depth of
the transformer. Transition sections
add to required floor space if hard bus
connections, not cable, are required.
Whereas the three-position liquid
switch dimensions are no greater
than 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) deep
off the end of the transformer and
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) in width
centered at the end of the unit.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion
September 2011
Sheet 18 006
i
ii
1
2
3
It is possible to use both types of

switches for liquid installations. Groups
of air switches can be mounted along a
wall to receive and distribute primary
circuit power to each transformer.
Individual power fuses can be
mounted within the air switches.
Dry-well mounting of current limiting
fuses in air canisters accessible from
the top or side walls of the transformer
is not recommended. The available
space will dictate much of the design
if sufficient space is not allocated for
electrical system equipment.
Primary switches accommodate the

three-phase conductors and never use a
neutral conductor. Most spot networks
use delta wound transformers, so there
is no need to deliver the neutral through
the primary switch. Any type cable can
be used, however the more modern
types are easier to handle than paper
lead insulated types which require
potheads for terminations within the
primary switch.
2. Network Transformer
Characteristics
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
After the primary switch, the power is

delivered to the primary windings of a
network type transformer. The design
may be liquid- or dry-type, with liquid
types being more popular from a
historical perspective, due to their
application in utility systems.
However, dry-type designs are now
available meeting the ANSI network
standards. Most applications within
commercial buildings desire dry-type
designs due to the desire to avoid the
fire hazard associated with liquid
dielectrics. It is important to use
proper dry-type ratings which mimic
the overload characteristics of liquid
units, therefore dry types should be
rated for 80C rise and use Class H
20C total temperature insulation
materials in VPI designs or 185C in
cast coil designs. Fans are normally
employed to aid the air cooling during
periods of overloading, and which
occur during a single primary outage.
Secondary voltages are always 480V
wye or 208V wye. Also, 216V wye
is a common rating. Primaries are
always delta, such as 4160V, 13.2 kV,
13.8 kV, etc.
Transformer impedances should fall
within the standard ranges indicated
in Table 18.0-1, or else the usual
protector interrupting ratings may
become inadequate. If impedances
drop below these values, the maximum through-fault may exceed the
interrupting rating of the protector.
Also, the impedance values among

transformers in a spot network should
be as close in value to each other that
manufacturing tolerances will allow;
this helps reduce circulating currents
between transformers.
Table 18.0-1. Transformer Impedance
kVA Size
Recommended Z
3001000
15003000
5% or greater
7% or greater
Notice that 3000 kVA is typically the

largest transformer that can be used
for network services, although Eaton
can go higher.
As an example, lets assume a twounit spot network using dry-type
transformers having 80C temperature
ratings. In this example we calculate
that the building load will not exceed
1495 kVA. Since we are designing the
service as a double-ended network
substation, either transformer must
be capable of carrying the full building
load of 1800A.
One choice is to select a 1500 kVA
transformer size which has a full load
rating of 1805 amperes. However, in
specifying transformers for network
services, the units can be undersized,
realizing that under most conditions
both units are available to supply
power to the network. When only one
is handling the entire load, it should be
considered an abnormal event that
should not continue indefinitely.
For our load of 1495 kVA, a 1000 kVA
transformer will supply 1888 amperes
at 157% of nameplate rating, therefore
we would select a 80C rise 1000 kVA
dry-type unit operated at 115C with
fans (157% overload capability) and
a protector with a continuous rating
of 1875A.
In all spot network designs, the equipment must be sized to handle the load
even though one primary, and thus one
transformer, is out of service (known
as a single contingency condition) for
some period of time. The basic design
constraint is that the load not exceed
the maximum thermal rating of the
remaining unit(s) during the time of
the single contingency. Protector ratings
recommended by vendors, as well as
protector circuitry, anticipate the loads
and are sized to handle the higher
currents, so the limiting factor is
the transformer.
FA fan rating when compared to conventional dry-type designs. When both

transformers are available, the 1000 kVA
units in our example will only be loaded
to 75% of their AA base rating.
The transformer winding configuration
will depend upon the primary service
available and the type of service needed
by utilization equipment comprising
the loads. For the most part, transformers are DELTA-WYE, which permits
the lowest ground relay pickup value
for the primary feeder breaker. This
type of winding configuration also
eliminates any zero sequence current in
the primary feeder for load unbalances
in the secondary. At higher primary
voltages, 27 kV through 34.5 kV, some
use has been made of GROUNDED
WYE-GROUNDED WYE windings. The
advantage gained is the reduction of
overvoltages which can result if one
leg of the unit is de-energized. The
disadvantage is that the primary breaker
ground relay must be set much higher
because load unbalances and ground
faults in the secondary are reflected by
zero sequence currents in the primary
circuit. See Pages 18.0-16 and 18.0-18
for network transformer features.
3. Network Protector
The network protector can be provided
in a weather-proof NEMA 4 housing,
submersible or suitable for mounting
within a low voltage switchgear
assembly. Both the transformer side
(line) and network (load) connections
of the protector are bus bar which can
accommodate transformer flange connections and loadside connections to
cable, busway or switchgear buswork.
Network protectors are special selfcontained air power breaker units
having a full complement of current,
potential and control transformers, as
well as relay functions to protect the
integrity of the low voltage network
bus. Normally, protectors do not have
any overcurrent protection in the
forward direction; if necessary, the
50/51 function can be achieved
through the use of remote mounted
protective devices.
Figure 18.0-5 illustrates a simplified
diagram of the various components
of the network protector.
Note: The symbol for a protector is the air
breaker symbol with a dot in the middle.
One advantage of liquid designs is their

large thermal mass which enables them
to handle higher currents for a longer
period of time without the need for an
CA08104001E
September 2011

Discussion
18.0-7
Sheet 18 007

Protectors have either rollout or
drawout mechanisms for easy maintenance. Protectors having the drawout
mechanisms, such as the CM52 type,
are comparable to air power breakers
in terms of maintenance and stored
energy functions. The older rollout
units use manually disconnected fuses
and links which must be removed from
the energized network bus prior to
rolling the unit out of the cubicle for
inspection, testing and maintenance.
Details on protectors are reviewed later
in this section and the recommended
spot network equipment ratings for
two, three and four unit configurations
are shown in Tables 18.0-9 through
18.0-12 that appear on Pages 18.0-34
and 18.0-35 in this product section.
The protector load side contains a
network fuse, usually a partial range
current limiting type. The fuses are
present as back-up protection if the
protector fails to open properly. These
fuses are separately removable, but
do not drawout with the protector
mechanism. Commonly, the fuses are
located at the top of each protector.
The fact that the fuses are located on
the network side means that fuse
maintenance requires operators to
come into contact with live parts and
conductors which can deliver high
fault currents. A method of easily
disconnecting the secondary of the
protector from the network bus,
similar to the configuration of the
primary, is needed to isolate the
fuse and protector, thus the need
for a network disconnect.
4. Spot Network Disconnects

The multiple sources of power to the
network bus can create a safety concern on the load side of each protector.
Obviously, each protector loadside is
energized from the network so long as
at least one transformer remains connected. The use of a network disconnect can provide a degree of operator
safety by requiring that the disconnect
be used to disconnect the protector
loadside from the network before
allowing access to network fuses or
protector mechanism. Such a disconnect reduces the likelihood of contacting live bus and forces operators to
follow a safe procedure prior to any
protector maintenance. Accidents
involving protectors can be traced
to the absence of such devices in
customers facilities and distribution
system designs. Eaton encourages
the use of network disconnect devices,
especially in facilities not having
CA08104001E
dedicated maintenance staff. Many

forms of disconnect devices are available; the specific choice depends upon
several related factors such as protector mounting, use of main breakers,
protector type, etc. Three key choices
for network disconnect devices are
outlined below.
Types of Network Disconnects

Principally, the two types are main
air power circuit breakers within
switchgear assemblies and non-loadbreak hookstick operated switches
mounted above the protectors in a
NEMA 1 cabinet.
Regardless of the type used, each
disconnect is interlocked with the
protector to ensure that the loadbreak
protector is used to break and make
the load currents. The protector
mechanism is rated for at least 10,000
operations before maintenance and
is the best device to interrupt normal
load currents. Protectors include an
operations counter to keep track of the
number of operations. The interlocks
may be keyed type or electrical control
wiring. Refer to Figure 18.0-6 for a
typical one-line.
Main Breakers
Main air power breakers are the safest
option to use as a network disconnect,
however their interrupting rating
guarantees proper operation under
all conditions including fault currents.
Switchgear mounting of the main
breakers means that the disconnect
device is the same type of device as
all other overcurrent devices mounted
in the assembly, thereby requiring
common maintenance and operation
procedures. The mains can be key
interlocked with their respective protectors to ensure that the protectors
are opened first, then the mains are
opened and racked to a disconnect
position prior to maintenance of the
protector or circuit devices.
Main breakers include overcurrent trip
units to provide individual overload
protection for each protector and
conductors. This protection is not a
normal function of the network relays
and augments protection generally
so long as the trip unit settings are
properly coordinated with the tie and
feeder devices. The trip unit protection
does not protect the incoming cable
against fault currents such as ground
faults or short circuit currents; the
sensors are not located at the lineside
of the protector circuit, rather they
are at the switchgear (load) side thus
giving only overload protection.
The key interlocking between main

air power breakers and network
protectors may be eliminated since
the main is a true interrupting device
usually rated at or above 65,000A
interrupting at 480V. When mains are
used as loadbreak devices on network
services, the opening of a main may
result in the opening of the respective
protector, however maintenance
procedures should always verify
protector operation.
Non-Loadbreak Disconnect
The network disconnect device for
mounting above the protector is the
non-loadbreak bolted pressure switch.
The device is hookstick operated from
the floor and provides a reliable
means of visibly disconnecting the
protector circuit from the loadside of
the protector. The switch is NEMA 1
cabinet mounted with double doors
and electrical interlocks to assure that
the protector is used to break the load
current. The door interlocks have a
defeatable procedure if qualified
personnel need to gain access under
load flow conditions. Key interlocking
with the protector is not necessary.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion
September 2011
Sheet 18 008
Network transformer neutrals are

brought to the loadside area of the
disconnect for transitioning to the
protector circuit neutral for delivery
into the switchgear. The loadside of
the disconnect can accommodate
outgoing busway or cables as needed.
See Page 18.0-32 for network
disconnect features.
Protector Fuses
Potential Transformer (PTs)
ii
MPCV
Voltage
Loadside
(Network)
MPCV Phasing
Voltage
Network
Protector
2
3
MPCV Trip
Ground
Lineside
(Transformer)
50/51 Relaying for Protectors
PTs
MPCV = Protector
Network
Relay
480V
MPCV Close
125V
b
Motor
MPCV
208V
5
6
Transformer
Control Txs.
Trip
Trip
Figure 18.0-5. Typical Network Protector Schematic
7
8
Network
Transformer
5 kV or 15 kV
Primary
208 o
0 Wye
The use of forward relaying on the

protector circuit needs to be coordinated with the tie breakers to ensure
that the protector auxiliary 50/51
protective settings are not faster than
the tie settings. Coordination is
achieved when the ties are faster
acting than the 50/51 protector forward
overcurrent relays, and they usually
trip open first due to the presence of
multiple transformer faults passing
through the ties. See Figures 18.0-14
and 18.0-15 for more details. Also refer
to tables on Pages 18.0-34 and 18.0-35
for details on the recommended tie
device ratings and settings.
Network
Protector
10
Fuses
3 Cts
11
Disconnect
Switch (Optional)
12
L SWGR
LV
13
86
Main Breaker
50/51
Cont.
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
Tie
Cont.
Figure 18.0-6. Partial Spot Network One-Line Diagram

15
NC
Recommended when no separate main breaker is used.
This product has become a standard

for Eaton and is manufactured in
the same plant as the protector for
improved assembly and product
coordination. Recent designs move
the NPL fuses on the protector into the
disconnect cabinet to ensure that fuses
have controlled access. Space exists
within the cabinet to mount separate
current transformers to provide inputs
for separate instantaneous and time
delay overcurrent relays which protect
the protector circuitry from point of
supply to the switchgear buswork. The
General Services Administration uses
this type of product on hundreds of
network units throughout the National
Capital Region and in other areas of the
country where networks are used.
Users who specify the non-loadbreak

disconnect can easily add the current
transformers for relaying at the load
side of the protector circuits and
provide superior fault and overload
protection for the incoming conductors between the protector and the
switchgear buswork. The relays are
usually mounted within the switchgear
and use a lockout feature to trip
and lockout the protector. Modern
microprocessor relays such as the
Eaton Digitrip 3000 can also be used
for the 50/51 protection to save costs
and mounting space.
The non-loadbreak design has been

chosen over the loadbreak for several
reasons. First, the loadbreak mechanisms need regular maintenance and
should not be allowed to sit in a closed
position for years, then be called upon
to operate without failure. This type of
duty is exactly what is required of a
network disconnect. Additionally, the
operating mechanism of a loadbreak
design requires a lot of force, more
than an operator can safely deliver
from a ladder or step. Hookstick
operation from the floor is a safer
procedure. Refer to Figure 18.0-7 for
typical section view of network units
using a network disconnect atop
the protector.
The use of forward relaying current

transformers is recommended even
when the non-loadbreak disconnect
is not used, such as occurs when only
transition boxes are used at the top of
the protectors.
System Neutral Grounding

Regardless of the device selected as
the network disconnect, the XO transformer neutrals are not grounded at the
transformers. Rather they are brought
into the switchgear and grounded at
one and only one location. This configuration allows the use of the ground
return method of ground fault protection whose zone of protection extends
from the secondary transformer windings to the outgoing air power breakers
in the switchgear. Other ground fault
detection methods are possible, but are
considerably more complicated to wire
and maintain and are without significant advantage or greater reliability.
CA08104001E
September 2011

Discussion
18.0-9
Sheet 18 009
5. Low Voltage Drawout

Switchgear Configurations
The most reliable and safe network bus
equipment is in the form of low voltage
drawout switchgear built per ANSI C37
standards. Unlike the UL 891
switchboard assemblies, low voltage
switchgear uses true 200,000A braced
buswork, 30 cycle short time ratings,
drawout stored energy air power circuit
breakers rated for 100% application,
for easier maintenanceall of which
provides superior performance
compared to fixed mounted molded
case breakers in switchboard
construction. This is true regardless
of where the protector is mounted.
A typical switchgear installation of a
protector uses a low voltage switchgear
compartment which is 96.00 inches
(2438.4 mm) high x 44.00 inches
(1117.6 mm) wide x 66.0084.00 inches
(1676.42133.6 mm) deep. The use
of transition sections between the
protector and switchgear ensures that
sufficient space exists to route buswork
between the two compartments.
Refer to Figures 18.0-8 through 18.0-12
which illustrate typical plan views
and front elevations for double-ended
network substations and three transformer spot network designs. Figure
18.0-8 shows the bus configuration of
the two-unit spot network substation.
Note that there must be a separate
ground return neutral bus which has
only one point of connection to the
grounding conductor. This type
arrangement permits selective tripping
of the Tie, then the protector. For a
line-to-ground fault on Bus #1, the
86T lockout relay controlling the Tie
breaker will be operated first when
GFR-T detects 1.0 per unit ground
current. After the Tie breaker is open,
the line-to-ground fault current is
sensed only by GFR-1, which will
actuate the 86-1 lockout to trip the
network protector NP #1.
For primary faults, the network relay
must be set such that it can respond
to both reverse magnetizing levels
of current as well as to any primary
circuit fault current. Since most
systems employ DELTA-WYE windings, primary faults will not be
detected by either GFR-T or the GFR
devices associated with the protectors,
since no zero sequence current will
flow. However, if GROUNDED WYEGROUNDED WYE transformers are
used, the relay coordination must be
such that the network relay responds
first to primary feeder faults. This
permits the correct operation of the
protector under such conditions,
CA08104001E
Neutral Bus
Neutral
(XO Bushing
on Back)
Primary
Switch
Load Transition
Non-loadbreak
Disconnect
NEMA 1 Cabinet
Fuse Location
(Inside)
Network Protector
(CM52 Type)
i
ii
1
2
3
Network
Transformer
4
Section View
5
Figure 18.0-7. Typical Non-Loadbreak Network Disconnect Mounting Arrangement
because the GFR-T should not attempt
to trip the Tie open. Therefore, power
will be maintained on the low voltage
bus with the Tie breaker remaining
closed. See Figures 18.0-9 and 18.0-11
for layout arrangements for dry-type
and liquid-type spot networks
respectively.
Figure 18.0-10 shows the bus configuration for a three-unit commercial spot
network. Again, the ground return
neutral bus is required which has only
one point of connection to the grounding conductor. Selective tripping is
achieved in the same fashion as the
double-ended network substation with
GFR-T sensing ground current and
operating the 86T device which then
opens both Tie breakers. The ground
relays GFR-1, GFR-2 and GFR-3 will
only sense ground current after the
Tie 86 lockout is energized and the
Tie breakers are open. Interlocking
auxiliary contacts on the 86-T with the
GFR circuits guarantees this selective
tripping and ensures the user that
ground currents are accurately
measured. The ampacity of the ground
return neutral bus must meet the
minimum requirements of the neutral
bus. It is prudent to size the ground
return neutral bus the same size as
the phase bus, since the ground and
neutral carry fault currents during
abnormal events.
The space required by the ground
sensors and connecting buswork can
be accommodated easily in two-unit
spot networks. However, on threeand four-unit systems, the extensive
structure-to-structure insulated
ground bus plus the normal phase,
neutral and ground buses can reduce
the usage of four breaker cells in the
switchgear to three. Vendor designs

vary on this issue. All four breaker
cells are available on two-unit, threeunit, and four-unit systems from
Eaton, when Magnum DS switchgear
is used.
The ampacity of the phase and neutral
buswork must meet the gross demand
plus spare capacity for growth as
stipulated by the National Electrical
Code for the loads served. If each
transformer on a two-unit spot
network has been sized with 100%
redundancy, then each protector
and load buswork should be rated to
carry the entire load from one primary
feeder and one transformer. Threeunit spot networks can reduce the
redundancy to 50% for the same
loads since two units remain in
service. Four-unit spot networks
may reduce the redundancy to 33%,
unless the loads need to be served
from two remaining services in which
case 100% redundancy is still required.
6. Typical Spot Network Layouts

The amount of space available for the
electric service will dictate the size and
quantity of the network units chosen
for a project. Double-ended substations,
especially dry-type designs, tend to be
arranged in a single lineup with the
primary feeders located at opposite
ends of the room. Refer to Figure 18.0-9
for an example of this type of arrangement. The single lineup can be used if
space permits. One alternative is to
locate the transformers behind, or in
front of the switchgear, with interconnecting busway or cables.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion
September 2011
Sheet 18 010

(228.6254.0 mm) required by a rail
mounted top of gear breaker lifter
device, or the network disconnect,
and must be accommodated. Liquid
transformer units have very high core
and coil untanking heights, which
precludes any chance of untanking the
core and coils in a normal building.
See Figures 18.0-32 through 18.0-34.
i
ii
1
N.P. #1
N.P. #2
Regarding conductors, it is prudent to

remember that busway can enter or
exit a switchgear structure at only
one location. Room does not exist to
accommodate more than the first run
of busway in a single section, unless
the first connects at the top and the
second connects at the bottom.
86-1
86-2
3
4
50/51
NC
PH. A,B,C
50/51
PH. A,B,C
Tie
N
86-T
6
Feeder
Breakers
GFR-1
GFR-2
7
GFR-T
Feeder
Breakers
GRN
(Ground
Return
Neutral)
Loads
The number of network transformers

used in a typical spot network is
directly correlated with the number of
independent, yet networkable primary
feeders available. At least, that is a
general rule to follow, however the
secondary equipment can take many
configurations.
Loads
Ground Bus
9
Figure 18.0-8. One-Line for Two-Unit Spot Network
10
Protectors not fused.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
FDR FDR
FDR FDR
FDR FDR
2-Position
PRI SW.
(Fuse)
Transformer
Network
Protector
FDR FDR
Tie
FDR FDR
FDR FDR
FDR FDR
FDR FDR
Network
Protector
Transformer
2-Position
PRI SW.
(Fuse)
Figure 18.0-9. Front View of Double-Ended Network Substation

Three or more transformer unit spot
networks cannot be arranged in one
lineup, therefore they use the remote
mounting of the transformers. Refer to
Figure 18.0-11 for an example of this
type of equipment layout. It is important to remember which side or end of
equipment is used for normal operations
when designing a network layout. The
primary switches are operated from
the end as are the protectors. Switchgear needs both NEC clearances at the
front and the rear, due to the drawout
breakers and the rear accessible cable
compartments. Designers are encouraged to pay attention to the different
voltage levels present, both medium
and low voltage, and the required
working clearances given in the NEC
or local codes.
A typical plan view for a three-unit spot

network is shown in Figure 18.0-11;
four-unit spot networks are similarly
designed. If it becomes necessary to
split the switchgear assembly, position
the splits at one side or the other of the
Tie devices. This approach simplifies
the power connections of the neutral
and ground buses.
Equipment weights should also be

investigated to ensure that the structure
can support the network assemblies.
Means of egress and routes to remove
material if replacement becomes
necessary should be identified. Avoid
placing any network equipment against
any wall; the NEC clearances required
probably double if two means of egress
are not available. Structural columns
pose challenges, however they rarely
defeat network arrangements; avoid
switchgear door openings bumping
against columns before they are
fully opened.
The highest piece of equipment may
be the low voltage switchgear, which
is usually 96.00 inches (2438.4 mm)
in height, plus the 9.0010.00 inches
Eaton recommends using at least one

normally closed tie breaker in the low
voltage metal-enclosed switchgear for
the purpose of isolating ground faults,
and for maintenance of the assembly
(cleaning, torquing and testing).
Usually the number of normally closed
Tie breakers equals N-1, where N
equals the number of transformers
used in the spot network. However, for
some projects it may be desirable to
have a ring low voltage assembly
where the number of Tie breakers
equals N. In such a ring spot
network, a Tie busway or cable
connects the extreme left side bus
of the assembly to the extreme right
side bus, thus keeping the N-1 network
configuration even when one primary
or network transformer is down, or the
low voltage assembly bus is down for
maintenance or fault isolation.
Main breakers, when used, may be
positioned in switchgear that is one
integral lineup, or mounted in switchgear close-coupled to dry-type transformer/protector pairs which feed
power circuits to remote assemblies
having all Tie and Feeder breakers.
CA08104001E

Discussion
September 2011
18.0-11
Sheet 18 011

Historically, some users and designers
have recommended using low voltage
busway as the spot collector bus,
then feeding loads radially from the
collector bus. Eaton does not recommend low voltage busway as the network collector bus, since it has limited
short-time ratings and has higher
failure rates than the more robust low
voltage metal-enclosed switchgear. It
is certainly acceptable to use multiple
segments of busway to feed protector
circuits into the switchgear, where the
redundancy of busway circuits prevents
loss of power to loads for a single
busway fault or failure, and the available
fault currents are limited to levels that
can be delivered by one transformer,
not N transformers.
Control voltages for network protectors are usually 120 Vac and derived
internally from the transformer secondary or within the protector itself,
thus protectors are self-contained
regarding control power. The low voltage switchgear assembly may be ac or
DC with AC control power being more
popular. The ac current control systems
use a control power transformer on
the incoming of each protector circuit
with a control power transfer system
on the secondaries of all control power
transformers to pick the first live
source. The control power circuits are
always energized so long as at least
one protector is closed.
The addition of main meters for power
monitoring, overcurrent relays and
communication trip units generally
take very little space and can be
accommodated without adding space
if the switchgear layout rules and
standards are followed. It is possible
to monitor other non-switchgear
equipment by adding space for the
required number of communicating
addressable relays which monitor
remote contacts wired to the switchgear for status and alarming at a
remote power monitoring and
control system, such as transformer
temperature and pressure alarms.
7. Use of Current Limiting Fuses

Generally, this issue needs to be
addressed in the design stage of a
project, prior to specification writing.
Protectors are usually applied with
fuse limiters on the load side of each
protector, but there can be exceptions
to using the limiters.
The expected fault currents need to be
calculated for several locations, including
secondary windings of transformers,
network switchgear bus (both sides of
CA08104001E
i
ii
N.P. #1
N.P. #2
N.P. #3
86-1
86-3
86-2
50/51
50/51
NC
NC
PH. A,B,C
Tie
N

50/51
PH. A,B,C
PH. A,B,C
Tie
N
86-T
GFR-2
GFR-1
Feeder
Breakers
Feeder
Breakers
Loads
GFR-3
Feeder
Breakers
Loads
GRN
(Ground Return Neutral)
Loads
GFR-T
Ground Bus
7
Figure 18.0-10. One-Line for Three-Unit Spot Network

Protectors are fused for three- and four-unit spot networks.

Fuse location.
8
Primary Switch
Network
Transformer
10
Network Protector
11
Busway or Cable
12
Low Voltage
Drawout
Switchgear
Aux.
FDRS Sections
Tie
Aux.
FDRS Sections
Tie
Aux.
FDRS Sections
Figure 18.0-11. Floor Plan for Three-Unit Spot Network System

Tie breakers), and at the load side of
feeder breakers. Network systems that
use air power breakers and deliver
more than 65,000A of fault current
should use feeder breakers such as
Eatons Magnum DS breakers rated
up to 100,000A.
Network protectors are normally
equipped with load side fuses
(usually partial range current limiting)
and serve as backup protection should
the protector fail to open on reverse
fault current conditions. Air power
breakers are now available with kAIC
ratings of 65, 85, 100 and 200 kAIC,
without fuses.
In two transformer spot networks,

one can argue that the protectors
do not need to be fused for any
application up to and including
3000 kVA transformers. The principal
logic is that the Tie can experience
only the fault current from one
transformer and that the Tie protective
trip settings provide faster acting
backup protection than the protector
fuses for reverse power conditions.
When protector fuses are used, the
system needs to be designed with
interlocking to ensure that the fuses
are not accessible unless the protector
and disconnect are opened.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion
September 2011
Sheet 18 012

rather it makes grounding the primary
cable a manual procedure.
i
ii
Network
Protector
Network
Transformer
Network
Protectorr
Network
Transformer
1
Busway or
Cable Tray
2
Low Voltage
Drawout
Switchgear
3
Aux.
Sections
FDRS
Aux.
Tie
FDRS Sections
4
5
Figure 18.0-12. Floor Plan for Double-Ended Network Substation
6
7
Primary Medium
Voltage Devices
#1
#2
To Other
Spot
Networks
Two Position
Fusible Primary
Switch
65E
CLE Fuse
10
1000/1500 kVA
Dry Transformer
11
12
13
AA/FA
1875A CMD
Non-Fused Protector
50/51
Tie
14
15
50/51
2000A
NC
Typical DS or DSL Feeders
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 18.0-13. Example of Two-Unit Spot Network Coordination Issues
8. Network Device Coordination

By way of example, we shall illustrate
the level of coordination possible in
a typical two-unit network system
as shown in Figure 18.0-13. In this
example, two networkable primary
sources are available and several
transformers are presumed to be fed
from each of the two primary circuits.
The upstream primary device is a
13.8 kV vacuum circuit breaker with
a complement of relaying.
The medium voltage switches are

fused air type. The switches have two
positions, open and closed, not three
positions. We recommend that the
primary switches use key interlocks
with protectors to ensure that the
protectors are used to break and make
load currents, although this interlocking is not absolutely necessary since
the switches are loadbreak rated.
The lack of a ground position in the
primary switches does not impede the
normal operation of the network system;
In this example, a two-unit network

with 1000/1500 kVA dry transformers
AA/FA, 80C rise are used. The
transformers are configured delta-wye
with 13.8 kV primary, a 480V wye
secondary, and the impedance of each
is within the range of 5.757.00%. Eaton
Type CM52 Network Protectors are
rated 1875A and are mounted within
low voltage switchgear structures. The
CM52 is a deadfront, drawout protector
whose operation is very similar to the
air power circuit breaker used throughout the switchgear to distribute power
to the outgoing circuits. The network
relay used within the CM52 is the MPCV
type, a microprocessor-integrated
solid-state relay that allows for field
programming the network characteristics. All CM52 protectors are factory
wired for application of remote trip
and lockout functions, which will be
used in our example via the 86 lockout
relay and separate 50/51 protective relay.
The 50/51 relay will use 2000/5 ratio
current transformer inputs from current
transformers mounted on the load
side of each protector within a transition box. The 50/51 device may be a
solid-state relay, Digitrip 3000, due to
its broad range of field programmable
settings. Thus, the protectors are used
as main overcurrent protective devices
as well as protectors. When transformers are remote from the switchgear, the
current transformers must be located
within a transition box atop the protectors. The current transformers may
be used for metering also, or if more
accurate metering at lower current
levels is desired then a second set may
be necessary in the switchgear with
multi-ratios to match the average
load demands.
The low voltage assembly uses Eaton
Magnum DS breakers for both Tie and
Feeder devices. The Tie breaker will be
an MDS-620, 2000A frame, 1600A trip,
electrically operated, drawout design,
incorporating the Digitrip 520 trip unit.
The feeder breakers are a mix of 800A
frame and 1600A frame to serve the
outgoing feeder circuits. The switchgear will panel mount the two 50/51
relays, which provide overcurrent
protection for the protectors.
In this example, the fault currents
are less than 65 kA; however, systems
having higher fault currents can be
accommodated using higher-rated
Magnum DS breakers.
CA08104001E
September 2011

Discussion
18.0-13
Sheet 18 013

General DiscussionCoordination Curves
Eaton CLE 65E Power Fuses
The protective device settings for a

two-unit spot network are similar to
those used for a standard doubleended substation. The goal is to serve
both continuity of service and protection equally. Settings should not favor
either one or the other, but rather should
keep loads served if at all possible
and minimize nuisance outages even
under serve fault conditions, including
ground fault events. Basically, settings
should be implemented which allow
the closest upstream device near a
fault to clear before other upstream
devices trip. Faults in a network have
more than one source, which is a major
difference compared to double-ended
substations with a normally open
Tie breaker.
The selected current limiting fuse, 65E,

provides little if any overload protection for the transformer, however, it
does an acceptable job of supplying
NEC code mandated short circuit
protection for the 100% damage curve.
The fuse cannot provide protection
for the 58% curve and downsizing the
selected rating lower than 65E is likely
to result in nuisance fuse operation.
Each power fuse vendor has applica-
The fuse meets the NEC stipulated

protection, but lacks the flexibility
of a relay with nearly continuous
adjustments. If superior protection
is desired, then a vacuum breaker
with 50/51 relaying should be used
in lieu of the fused primary switch.
Do not use 50/51 relaying on a load
interrupter switch.
ii
1
2
3
100
1000
10000
100000
1000
4
5
100
6
7
8
10
9
10
T3
T1
1.0
11
12
MAG
0.1
13
3MAG
14
The following paragraphs detail the

protective device settings, discuss the
curves, and review the important issues.
15
ANSI Transformer Damage Curves

Two curves are plotted: both the 100%
and the 58% damage curves are shown
for the dry types in our example. These
curves are defined in ANSI Standard
141. The 58% curve reflects the fact
that a one per unit secondary fault on
a grounded wye transformer creates
a 0.58 per unit fault in the primary
conductors when the primary windings
have a delta configuration.
TIME
In Figure 18.0-14, we plot the timecurrent curves of the medium voltage

power fuses, whose main function is
to provide short circuit protection to
each transformer, the ANSI damage
curve typical for the transformers, the
50/51 relaying upstream from each
spot network, the Tie and Feeder
device trip curves, and the 50/51 relaying used by each protector. We have
shown the primary 50/51 protective
relaying curves by postulating their
relative position as being to the right
of each damage curve and to the left of
primary cable damage curves, since
several transformers are served by
each primary service. In other words,
several vault locations exist in the facility.
Obviously, these primary relays cannot
protect each transformer individually,
nor is it desirable to do so since it is
better to isolate a simple faulted
transformer with a power fuse than
to open the entire primary circuit.
tion tables and charts to properly

select fuses for any application.
0.01
CURRENT (Amperes)
Legend:
R
T3
T1
F
P
T
B
Primary 50/51 RelayingTypical for These Transformers

100% ANSI Damage/Withstand Curve for Transformer
58% ANSI Damage/Withstand Curve
Power Fuse 65E Rating
Network Protector Relay 50/51(Both LTD = 40 Seconds and 6 Seconds Shown)
Tie Breaker 1600AT
MAG = 1 TX INRUSH
Feeder Breaker 800AT
3MAG = 3 TX INRUSH
16
17
18
Figure 18.0-14. Two-Transformer Spot Network Phase Overcurrent
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Discussion
September 2011
Sheet 18 014
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Protector RelayingEaton Digitrip 3000

Plus Ground Fault Relay (GFR)
Tie BreakerEaton MDS 2000A with

Digitrip LS Plus Ground Fault Relay
Typical FeederEaton MDS 800A with

Digitrip LSIG
Network relays do not have any form

of forward 50/51 (instantaneous and
time overcurrent) protection, therefore if it is desired it must be added
separately. An 86 lockout relay is
recommended for positive lockout
indication and reset operations. The
curve for the Digitrip 3000 is shown in
Figure 18.0-14 and depicts the settings
for this microprocessor-based solidstate multi-phase relay. Using the
2000/5 ratio current transformers, the
settings are as follows:
The settings shown in Figure 18.0-14

were developed using 2000/5 sensors
on the Tie breaker. The settings recommended are:
The settings in Figure 18.0-14 were

generated using 800/5 sensors applied
on the feeder breakers. The Digitrip 520
trip unit settings are:
Long Time Pickup

(LTPU)
Long Time Delay I2t
(LTD)
Short Time Pickup
(STPU)
Short Time Delay
(STD)
Instantaneous
(INST)
Ground Fault Relay
(GFR)
Ground Fault Relay
(GFR)
Long Time Pickup

(LTPU)
Long Time Delay
(LTD)
Short Time Pickup
(STPU)
Short Time Delay
(STD)
Instantaneous
(INST)
Ground Fault Pickup
(GFPU)
Ground Fault Delay
(GFD)
Long Time Pickup

(LTPU)
Long Time Delay I2t
(LTD)
Short Time Pickup
(STPU)
Short Time Delay
(STD)
Instantaneous
(INST)
Ground Fault Relay
(GFR)
Ground Fault Relay
(GFR)
= 1.0 (2000A)
= 40 seconds
= 3 X (6000A)
= 0.3 seconds
= 11 X (22000A)
= 700A pickup
= 0.58 seconds
(35 cycles)
It is very important that the protector

50/51 settings be slower than the Tie
breaker. The faster acting Tie is desired
for isolation of switchgear faults
between one side of the Tie and the
loadside of a protector without taking
the whole network down. The Tie
clears one transformers fault
contribution, while the unfaulted
side remains energized. The protector
experiencing the remaining fault
current will subsequently trip open,
thereby isolating one-half of the
network bus for repair.
= 0.8 (1600A)
= 2 seconds
= 3 X (4800A)
= 0.2 seconds
= Not used
= 700A pickup
= 0.58 seconds
(35 cycles)
See
Figure 18.0-15
These settings allow the Tie to act

quickly for abnormal current conditions, yet also provide enough delay
to allow protectors to trip on reverse
current when protector operation is
the prudent first course of action.
Also, larger feeder devices, such
as 1200A breakers (not shown in
Figure 18.0-14) will easily fit to the
left and beneath the Tie curve. It is
important to set the Tie to operate
quicker than the protector 50/51
relaying. The faster Tie settings assure
that switchgear bus faults do not take
the entire service down (only half). In
our example, the Tie will only be called
upon to interrupt the fault current from
one transformer.
= 1.0 (800A)
= 2 seconds
= Not used
= Not used
= 2 X (1600A)
= F (500A)
= 0.3 seconds
(18 cycles)
See
Figure 18.0-15
These settings provide for fast action

of feeder devices experiencing the
maximum fault duty of the switchgear
(fault current from two transformers).
Ground fault protection is recommended for the feeder trip units; these
settings can be coordinated with the
two-stage ground fault detection
system (single point ground return
method) mentioned earlier in
Figure 18.0-8. Suggested ground
fault protective device settings are
illustrated in Figure 18.0-15, and the
settings are listed under the protector,
Tie breaker, and feeder device discussion in this section.
Faults located in the transformer

secondary windings may open both
the Tie and the protector, depending
upon the magnitude of the event.
The protector should open first upon
reverse power, since protectors
respond to reverse power in 7 cycles.
If the Tie also trips open, the Tie can be
reclosed to serve the entire load again
after locking out the protector on the
faulted transformer.
Note: The transformer is given superior
overload protection by the Digitrip 3000
compared to the level of protection given
by the power fuse. This is especially true
even in the overload region of the ANSI
damage curve.
20
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

Discussion
18.0-15
Sheet 18 015

Ground fault settings are established
essentially the same as a double-ended
substation using a single tee ground
point and ground return methodology.
Eatons MDS feeder breakers are set to
coordinate with downstream devices
so that downstream breakers experiencing a fault trip first. The GFR relays
for the Tie and protectors are set
slightly higher in pickup and have a
longer delay than the ground fault for
the feeder devices. Protector and Tie
ground fault settings are usually set
at the same levels; coordination is
achieved by interlocking the two
stages so that the Tie stage operates
first followed by the protector stage.
Ground current originating from faults
in the switchgear buswork or incoming
conductors is directly measured by
the GFR on the Tie, then by one of
the protectors after the Tie opens.
Subsequently, the GFR on the faulted
zone causes the protector experiencing
the fault to trip open thereby isolating
the fault completely. Downstream
ground faults are cleared by downstream circuit breakers or the DS feeder
breaker serving the faulted circuit.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 18.0-15. Spot Network Ground Fault Protection
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 18 016
Liquid-Type Network Transformers

The primary switch is interlocked with
the associated network protector and
secondary transformer windings to
ensure that the switch is only used to
break or make magnetizing current.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Typical Liquid Network Transformer
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Network transformers are available

with liquid immersed core and coil
assemblies, and use the liquid as the
principal insulation means for primary
and secondary windings. The fluid
can be mineral oil, silicon or a biodegradable form of vegetable oil. Indoor
applications benefit from using silicon
or the biodegradable vegetable oil
liquid dielectric. See the discussion
below for ABBs BioTemp fluid.
The transformers are built to ANSI
C57.12.40 standards and have an
integral primary non-loadbreak threeposition switch having connected,
open and grounded positions. The
grounded position grounds the
incoming medium voltage feeder
that serves the transformer, and does
not ground the primary windings.
Liquid network transformers have a

special low voltage flange for field
mounting a network protector on the
secondary flange. The protector is best
mounted close to the secondary windings of the associated transformer
to minimize distance between the
windings and the protector contacts.
There are only two standard ANSI
flange configurations, smaller and
larger, and the user generally gets one
based upon the transformer kVA size.
It is possible to chose one over the
other, but the specifier must be careful
in the selection and make certain
adequate load growth and redundancy
are built into the system when
choosing a small flange size for a
transformer that normally is supplied
with a large flange for a higher
ampacity protector. If the specifier
stays with the Eaton recommendations for sizing protectors, the flange
size is properly chosen for every unit.
Liquid transformers are available with
an array of accessories, most of which
are listed on the next page with the
outline drawings of a typical liquid
network transformer. Alarm contacts
are usually wired to terminal boxes for
use on alarm schemes or monitoring.
Certain accessories allow for the sampling of fluids at regular maintenance
intervals for testing and analysis.
Table 18.0-2. Typical Properties of Insulating Fluids

Description
BIOTEMP
Mineral Oil
H.T.H.
Silicone
45
30
40
43
Electrical
Dielectric strength, kV (ASTM D877)
15
BioTemp Advantages
Physical
Viscosity, cST.
100C
10
11.5
16
(ASTM D445)
40C
0C
45
300
12
76
110
2200
38
90
Flash pt. C
(ASTM D92)
330
145
285
300
Fire pt. C
(ASTM D92)
360
160
308
330
0.47
0.43
0.45
0.36
Coefficient of expansion, /C (ASTM D1903) 6.88 x 104
7.55 x 104
7.30 x 104
1.04 x 103
18
Pour pt. C
(ASTM D97)
15 to 25
40
24
55
Sp. gravity
(ASTM D1298)
0.91
0.91
0.87
0.96
Color
(ASTM D1500)
<0.5
0.5
0.52.0
<0.5
19
Environmental
97.0
25.2
27.1
0.0
16
17
Specific heat (cal/gr/C) (ASTM D2766)
Biodegradation Rate (%) 21day CECL33
BIOTEMP is a natural ester fluid

made from renewable and biodegradable vegetable-based oil. Below are
some of the environmental, fire
safety and operational advantages
of using BIOTEMP.
Environmental Advantages
Even though secondary containment is still required, BIOTEMP
spills can be disposed through
normal means and not treated as
hazardous or toxic waste
BIOTEMP minimizes air pollution by
producing only carbon dioxide and
water during combustion
BIOTEMP also offers the potential
for relief from government
regulatory penalties, resulting
in less costly spill cleanups
Fire Safety Advantages

BIOTEMP offers greater risk
mitigation on collateral damage
from transformer explosion and
fire, potentially lowering insurance
premiums
Active fire suppression and barrier
walls can essentially be eliminated
with BIOTEMP when minimal
spacing is maintained
BIOTEMP can alternatively be
used safely indoors and in tighter
spaces outdoors typically without
additional fire safety requirements
BIOTEMP is listed as a less
flammable dielectric fluid by
Factory Mutual (FM Global) and
is classified as a less hazardous
dielectric medium in respect to
fire hazard by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL)
Operational Advantages
BIOTEMP impregnated paper
experiences a much lower aging
rate compared to mineral oil
impregnated paper, leading to an
increase in the insulation system
lifetime (grid reliability)
BIOTEMP impregnated paper can
alternatively operate at a higher
hotspot temperature and attain the
same life expectancy as mineral oil
impregnated paper, increasing the
transformer peak load or overload
capacity (energy efficiency)
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
18.0-17
Sheet 18 017

Sealed TankBraced for 15 PSI (103 KPA)Color Network Black.

Base-Bar Type0.75 (19.0) x 1.50 (38.0).
Jacking Areas4 Total.
Lifting Hook for Lifting Complete Transformer.
Welded Cover with Gasket and Lifting Loops for Lifting Cover Only.
1.00 (25.4) Filling and Upper Filter Connection.
Bolted Manhole12.50 (318.0) x 12.50 (318.0) Opening with Cortite Gasket.
Relief DeviceOver a 7.00 (178.0) Handhole.
Cap with 2.00 (51.0) Square Head for Access to De-energized Tap Changer (with Key Interlock, Coordinated with HV Switch). Item .
LV ThroatPer ANSI C57.12.40 Figure 3.
LV Bushing3 Total.
XO Bushing Style 8D11227G02Spade 1.75 (44.0) NEMA Drilled. 3.75 (95.0) Wide x 0.5 (13.0) Thick Spade.
1.00 (25.4) Drain Valve with Bronze Pipe Plug.
Ground Pads2-Hole NEMA Drilling02 Total.
Magnetic Liquid Level Gauge with Alarm Contacts.
80.50 (2044.7)
Vacuum Pressure Gauge with Alarm Contact and Air Test Valve.
Overall & Shipping Length
Liquid Temperature Gauge with Alarm Contacts.
35.50
Rapid Pressure Rise Relay.
(901.7)
Control Cabinetwith Undrilled Entrance Plate.
21.40
Bolted Manhole12.50 (318.0) x 12.50 (318.0) Opening
(543.6)
with Cortite Gasket.
H.V. 3-Position Magnetic Break Disconnect and Grounding

Switch Operating Mechanism with Provisions for Padlocking, with
X0

Key Interlock. Locked in Open or Ground Positions, Coordinated

27.90
with Tap Changer. Item and Second Key Interlock. Locked in
(708.7)
Closed Position and Coordinated with Low Voltage Protector.
22.00
1.00 (25.4) Filling Coupling.

(558.8)
Magnetic Liquid Level Gauge.

CL
46.90
X3
Switch PositionsTop to Bottom, Ground, Closed, Open.
Tank

(1191.3)

Switch Cover with 0.50 (13.2) 3 Taps for Jack Screws (Bolted on).
X2
Overall &
Terminal Chamber Cover with 0.50 (13.2) 3 Taps for Jack

X1
Shipping

Screws (Bolted on).

Length

Nameplate and Warning Plate.

H.V. Terminal Chamber.
1.00 (25.4) Drain Coupling.
Plan View
Terminal for #2 to 4/0 Cable Range3 Total.
2.50
Entrance 3 G & W Stuffing Boxes. Catalog Number RS33-G1, 4.50 (114.0) CL to CL.
(63.5)
0.50 (13.2) Air Test Fitting with Bronze Pipe Plug.
0.50 (13.2) Top Liquid Sampler with Bronze Pipe Plug.
0.25 (6.0) Fluid Level Plug.
Interlock Bushing.
36.30 (922.0)
25.30
To Switch Entrance)
(642.6)

XO
67.00
(1701.8)
Over
Tank

16.60
(421.6)

To XO

47.40
(1204.0)

1.50
(38.1)
14.80
(375.9)
29.60
(751.8)

42.00
(1066.8)
Centerline
LV Throat

Over

Switch
Entrance
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

3.90
(99.1)
Side View
23.70
(602.0)
23.70
(602.0)
53.40 (1356.4)
Base Length
17
18
19
20
Front View
Figure 18.0-16. Outline Drawing750 kVA, 55/65C Rise, 13,750 Delta to 480Y/277 Volts
CA08104001E
Shipping
Height
25.40
(645.2)
To Cab
75.4
(1915.2)
4.10
(104.1)
62.00
(1574.8)
21

September 2011
Sheet 18 018
Dry-Type Network Transformers
Eaton can also supply close-coupled

primary switchgear with a two-breaker
(VCPW) transfer capability on the
primary of cast coil dry-type network
units. The proximity of vacuum breakers will mandate using RC snubbers
within the transformer.
ii
1
Dry-type network transformers have

a special low voltage flange for field
mounting a network protector on the
secondary flange. The protector is best
mounted close to the secondary windings of the associated transformer
to minimize distance between the
windings and the protector contacts.
There are only two standard ANSI
flange configurations, smaller and
larger, and the user generally gets one
based upon the transformer kVA size.
It is possible to chose one over the
other, but the specifier must be careful
in the selection and make certain
adequate load growth and redundancy
are built into the system when
choosing a small flange size for a
transformer that normally is supplied
with a large flange for a higher
ampacity protector. If the specifier
stays with the Eaton recommendations for sizing protectors, the flange
size is properly chosen for every unit.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Typical Dry-Type Network Transformer
11
12
13
14
15
Network transformers are available

with dry-type core and coil assemblies,
and use special polyester resin or
cast epoxy as the principal insulation
means for primary and secondary
windings. The choice depends upon
the economics of the project. Indoor
applications benefit from using drytype networks since no containment or
sampling of liquid dielectric is needed.
Eaton strongly recommends 80C rise
cast coil transformers for use in spot
network systems.
The transformers are built to ANSI

C57.12.57 standards and do not have
an integral primary switch, unless a
two-position switch is added in the
field. The process of grounding the
incoming medium voltage feeder that
serves the transformer becomes a
manual process of adding grounding
cables. The two-position primary
switch is usually loadbreak rated and
is not interlocked with the associated
network protector and secondary
transformer windings.
Dry-type transformers can be closecoupled to LV drawout switchgear with

protectors, tie and feeder devices all
switchgear mounted.
Dry-type network transformers are
available with an array of features,
most of which are listed on the next
page with the outline drawings of
a typical dry network transformer.
A transformer monitoring package
is usually included with temperature
readings, RTDs and Alarm contacts.
Most designs have knock-down
enclosures for ease in rigging a
unit into position through hallways
and doorways.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
18.0-19
Sheet 18 019
Characteristics
Total of Two
Jack Screws
0.5013 UN
2.25
(57.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Ventilated Surface
Front and Back
TEMPERATURE
MONITOR OR
CUTOUT PROVIDED
3.38
(85.7)
77.00
(1955.8)
1.25
(31.8)
NAMEPLATE
5.44
(138.1)
8.38
(212.9)
1.50
(38.1)
108.00
(2743.2)
Front View
12.00
(304.8)
9.00
(228.6)
X0
12.88
(327.0)
9.50
(241.3)
CL
32.88
(835.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
5.00
(127.0)
X1
X2 X3
5.00
(127.0)
0.56 x 1.06
(14.2 x 20.6)
Slots
33.00
(838.2)
9.00
(228.6)
67.63
(1717.7)
Accessories
9.00
(228.6)
27.13
(689.0)
66.00
(1676.4)
LV End View
1.50
(38.1)
3.00
(76.2)
0.56 x 1.06
(14.33 x 27.0)
Rects
1.88
(47.6)
30.00
(762.0)
8.00
(203.2)
90.00
(2286.0)
1.13
(28.6)
8.88
(225.4)
H1 H2 H3
51.00
(1295.4)
17.13
(435.0)
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
66.00
(1676.4)
20
HV End View
Figure 18.0-17. Outline Drawing1000/1500 kVA Cast Coil Network Transformer,

80C/100C Rise, 13,800 Delta to 480Y/277 Vac Wye
CA08104001E
Braced for seismic

ANSI 61
LV end sheets
Standard ventilation
Aluminum screens
Copper ground bus (0.25 x 2.00)
Neutral disconnect link
UL listing
Control panel
Control power supplied by ABB
Forced cooling
15
36.00
(914.4)
8.00
(203.2)
Enclosure: NEMA 2 (indoor

ventilated with drip-proof roof)
Finish: ANSI 61
Product type: Cast/Cast
kVA: 1000/1500
HV: 13,200
HV kV BIL: 95
LV: 480Y/277
LV kV BIL: 10
Taps: 12,540/12,870/13,200/
13,530/13,860
Impedance: 5%
Temperature rise: 80C
Cooling class: AA/FA
Hertz: 60
Phases: 3
LV windings: Cu
HV windings: Cu
Sound level: 64 dB
Approximate weight:
10,200/4627 lbs/kg
Provisions for mounting network
protector on the left end
Primary is cable connected to closed
coupled primary switchgear, such
as MVS
21

September 2011
Sheet 18 020
Type CM52 Network Protectors
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
CM52 Drawout
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Network Protector Ratings

Typical Enclosed CM52 Network Protector
Quality Designed to be Smarter, Safer and Streamlined

The CM52 Network Protector provides the highest level
of reliability and service continuity available today. An
intelligent protective device, the CM52 Network Protector is
designed to handle ratings from 800 to 4500A, 216 to 600V.
This new network protector features an electrically operated,
composite case, spring closed air network circuit breaker
controlled by the MPCV network relay.
The CM52 meets or exceeds the standards in IEEE C57.12.44.
This ensures a product with the highest performance
standard applicable to a network protector. A first for
network protectors, the CM52 is setting a new standard
by being UL-qualified. This third party approval certifies
the delivery of a quality product. A UL-qualified network
protector means easier code approval for quicker system
start-up and less approval time and costs in a non-utility
environment.
UL listed and labeled CM52 protectors are presently available
through 4500A. Contact Eaton and the protector product
line for more details on UL listed and labeled CM52 network
protectors.
Several network protector models currently exist to satisfy

all location requirements. The new CM52 design covers all
of these ratings, giving you one type of protector to handle
all installation needs. The styles available include internal
or external fuse mountings and submersible or NEMA 4
enclosures throughout the current and voltage ratings.
Having parts and accessories common through all protector
ratings means lower maintenance and inventory costs. The
CM52 was also designed with higher interrupting and fault
close ratings than older protector models. This higher rating
allows for safer installations and better protection on a
network system.
Table 18.0-3. CM52 Ratings TableRatings through 480 Volts Wye
Continuous
Current
Rating
Interrupting
Rating
Close
and Latch
Rating
Suggested Transformer
Rating (kVA)
216V
480V
800
1200
1600/1875
42
42
42
35
35
35
225
300
500
500
750
1000
2000
2500/2825
3000
42
65
65
35
45
45
600
750
1000
1000
1500
2000
3500
4500
85
85
65
65
1000
1000
2000
2000
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
18.0-21
Sheet 18 021
CM52 Secondary Contacts
Protector downtime is both frustrating

and costly. No mechanism adjustments, few replacement parts, colorcoded wiring, diagnostics, and a
protected motor are key contributors
to the high-level service reliability
and reduced downtime of the CM52
Network Protector.
CM52 IDM
The CM52 is a low maintenance

network protector. It requires no
mechanism adjustments, is easier
to troubleshoot and has built-in
diagnostics. Maintenance time is no
longer needed for the adjustment of
protector contacts. Troubleshooting
is much easier with the CM52 through
color-coded wiring and a front
accessible test block. Diagnostics
are built into the Indicating Diagnostic
Module. The IDM replaces the
traditional manual adjustment of the
min. motor pick-up adjustable resistor
and offers diagnostic indicators for
available control voltage for the
motor, spring release and trip circuit.
With the new CM52, maintenance
becomes easier and protector downtime decreases, saving money and
increasing reliability.
Much more manageable at less
than half the weight of older network
protectors, the protector is easier to
handle, resulting in less time in vaults,
and lower labor costs. A four-position,
drawout, deadfront circuit breaker
makes testing quick and safe, curbing
maintenance time and costs. The deadfront provides worker safety, drastically
reducing the possibility of live electricity
accidents during inspection. A front
accessible 6-point test block provides
safe and easy connection of test
equipment during testing, phasing
and troubleshooting.
Quality was the focus through the
design to the manufacturing of the
new CM52 Network Protector. The
circuit breaker in the CM52 goes
through a 100-point testing procedure
in an ISO 9000 breaker specialty
plant. The quality design and testing
of the CM52 virtually eliminates the
need for later adjustments and
insures a reliable product.
The Intelligence of the

ProtectorMPCV Relay
Within the CM52 lies its intelligence,
the MPCV Network Relay. The
programmable MPCV Network
Relay brings the proven performance
of microprocessor-based technology
to the CM52 Network Protector.
This programmable relay offers
multiple selections to meet the
requirements of each network
protector installation. With the MPCV,
you can select between the traditional
straight-line master close curve and
modified circular close curve. Our
enhanced sequence-based algorithm
provides exceptional performance
and stability over a wide range of
temperatures and voltages in
comparison with a power-based
algorithm. Additionally, the antipumping feature on the MPCV relay
protects the motor under damaging
system conditions.
Communications
The MPCV relay has built in communication capabilities for monitoring
and control of the network protector.
This allows users to access and
display information from the relay
including voltage, current, energy
usage, power quality, and last trip
details. Control of the protector is
possible from a remote location,
providing safer conditions and
quicker response time.
The relay can also communicate other
information about the network protectors environment through standard
auxiliary inputs. Information such as
water or pressure loss inside the network
housing, or erratic internal enclosure
temperature will send an alert notifying
of problems in the vault.
The relay has the capability of
communicating information to a
Data Concentrator/Translator (DC/T)
over a shielded twisted pair of
communications wires. Information
is obtained through a utilitys SCADA
protocol and/or Eatons PowerNet
software program.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 18 022
Type CM52Features, Functions and Benefits
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Features, Functions
and Benefits
Table 18.0-6. CM52 Ratings Comparison TableRating Tested at 600 Volts
1. Standardized Breaker Frames:

Only three basic breaker frames
of minimal physical size are used
throughout the CM52 to provide
different electrical ratings.
Table 18.0-4. CM52 Sizes
Ampere
Rating
Breaker SizeInches (mm)

Width
Height
Depth
8002000
22503000
35004500
17.00 (431.8)
22.00 (558.8)
35.00 (889.0)
17.00
(431.8)
17.00
(431.8)
Table 18.0-5. CM52 Weights

Weight in Lbs (kg)
CM52 Breaker
Element
CM52
Interrupting
Rating (kA)
Close & Latch

Rating (kA)
Interrupting
Rating (kA)
Close & Latch

Rating (kA)
800
1200
1600/1875
2000
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
42
42
42
42
35
35
35
35
30
30
30
35
25
25
25
35
2500/2825
3000
22.00 (558.8)
22.00 (558.8)
65
65
45
45
60
60
40
40
3500
4500
35.00 (889.0)
35.00 (889.0)
85
85
65
65
60
60
40
40
IEEE/ANSI
Close & Latch ratings apply only to spring close and stored energy mechanisms.
6. Four Breaker Element

Drawout Positions:
2. Light Weight Breaker Element:

A reduced breaker physical size
also results in a substantial weight
reduction compared to existing
Network Protector designs.
Ampere
Rating
Continuous
Breaker
Current Rating Element
(Amperes)
Width
Inches (mm)
Comparable
Breaker
8002000
170 (77)
400 (182)
22503000
185 (84)
550650
(250295)
35004500
350 (159)
7001300
(318590)
3. 10 kV BIL (Basic Impulse Level):

Impulse testing is the application
of a high surge voltage on equipment to simulate possible surges
caused by lightning. Although not
defined or required by IEEE/ANSI
C57.12.44, this test provides an
additional measure of safety and
performance to the design. (The
test was performed at 1.2us x 50
us wave shape on a 3 x 3 grid.)
4. Deadfront Drawout Breaker:
Protects the user from accessing
live circuits. Eaton offers the only
deadfront drawout breaker designs
in the Network Protector industry.
5. Improved Interrupting and Fault
Close (Close & Latch) Ratings:
Improved interrupting and fault
close ratings ensure that the
network protector will withstand
fault conditions and continue
to protect their associated
transformer.
a. ConnectedFully connected
to primary and secondary
connections. The door may be
open or closed in this position.
b. TestPrimary clusters are
disconnected, secondary
wiring disconnects are made.
Testing can be performed on
the unit at this point without
disturbing the power connections. The door may also
be opened or closed in this
position.
c. DisconnectedPrimary
clusters are disconnected,
secondary disconnects are
open. The door must be open
in this position.
d. Removable positionBreaker
element can be removed from
its rails. The door must be open
with the breaker element in
this position.
7. Standardized Modular Components:
The motor, shunt trip, spring
release coil, arc chutes, IDM,
auxiliary switches and multi-ratio
CTs are easily removable, and
main components are standard
across different ratings. This
allows reduced part inventories
and reduced training for shop
and field crews.
8. Low Maintenance: The breaker

has no adjustments required
over the life of the unit and fewer
replacement parts than traditional
units. A built-in wear gauge shows
the acceptable limit of contact wear,
making the breaker condition easier
to identify for service periods.
Easy Inspection
9. Sealed Motor Gear Box:

Charges closing spring in less
than 1-1/2 seconds.
10. Indicating Diagnostic Module (IDM):
Replaces the traditional Motor
Close Relay and adjustable resistor,
and offers diagnostic indicators
on available control voltage for
the motor, spring release and
trip actuator.
11. Front-Mounted Test Points: Easy
access test points located on the
front of the unit make for quick
test cable connections and avoid
requiring the operator to reach
into live voltage area.
19
20
21
Convenient Accessories
CA08104001E
September 2011

18.0-23
Sheet 18 023
Type CM52Options and Standards and Certifications

16. Improved Submersible Enclosure
Design: Customer-Specified
Internal or External Fuse Mounting
and revised Hinging and Opening
hardware for easier door opening
and closing. The door has greater
than 90 opening capability.
Options
Remote Racking System

The CM52 network protector is also
available with an integral remote
racking system. The system remotely
racks the breaker off the energized
bus work while the door is still closed
to the test position either through
an external pendant or through
communications.
i
ii
1
2
Arc Flash
Test Block Access Cover
4
5
6
Remote Racking System

Meets or exceeds the standards in
IEEE C57.12.44
The CM52 network protector is UL
labeled and approved in the NEMA
housing at all ratings
Test Block with Cover Removed
12. Universal Wired Breaker: Breakers

are wired all the same regardless
of system voltage. Breakers can
be interchanged between 216V
grids and 480V spots without
modifications. Multi-Tap settings
for current transformers make
changing amperes easy for
maximum flexibility and
inventory reduction.
13. Retrofit Adapter Frames and
Bus Adapters: Allows replacing of
most older GE and Westinghouse
breakers in existing enclosures.
14. Color Coded Teflon Wire:
Red = Close Circuit
Green = Open Circuit
White = All Other
Yellow = Normally Open
Blue = Normally Closed
Black = Common
15. Sixty (60) Point Secondary Contact:
Allows quick wiring for additional
contacts, relays and other devices
in the breaker element. Connections are automatic for breaker
racking in and out.
7
8
9
10
11
VaultGard Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System Indicating
Diagnostic Module
The CM52 network protector is available

with the NPARMs module (Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System).
This device is internal to the network
protector and can be remotely activated
usually through a switch mounted at
the vault entrance or through communications. This will enable the Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System device
on all CM52s in a spot network. Once
activated, the NPARMs places the
protectors in a sensitive mode, sensing both forward and reverse current
directions. This device will actuate in
34 ms and call for all CM52 breakers
to trip if a fault is sensed on an adjacent
network protector or collector bus. It
has been shown that this device limits
the total incident energy to less than
8 cal/cm2.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 18 024
1000
900
800
700
600
1000
900
800
700
600
500
500
400
400
300
300
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5
.5
.4
.4
.3
.3
.2
.2
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.05
.04
10
.04
.03
.03
.02
.02
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Characteristics of the NPL fuse have

been especially tailored for coordination with the transformer safe-heating
curve and in consideration of the
protector interrupting rating. This
specially designed characteristic curve
is less inverse than the ordinary melting characteristic of a silver-sand fuse.
The curve is a function of the design
of the unique, silver element used in
its make-up.
The NPL fuse does not become currentlimiting within the interrupting rating
of the protector. The fuses have been
successfully tested in its epoxy
enclosure at a three-phase fault
condition of 150,000A at 600V. The
NPL fuse is not ampacity rated,
and does not provide overcurrent
protection per NEC Article 240.
.01
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
6 7 8 9 10
20
30
40 50 60
5000
4000
10
9
8
7
6
3000
10
9
8
7
6
2000
20
600
700
800
900
1000
30
20
500
40
30
400
50
40
300
200
50
Scale x 10 = Seconds
4 5
100
90
80
70
60
Eatons NPL fuse has been designed as

a nonexpulsion, silver-sand type fuse.
It is exclusively for use on the CM52
network protector. Each end terminal
is fabricated from high conductivity,
impact extruded copper. High quality
NEMA Grade G5 convolutely wound
glass melamine tubing is permanently
sealed to the terminal with RTV
Silastic to eliminate possible sand
leakage or moisture entry. The terminals and tube are secured together
with stainless steel, high strength,
spirally wound pins. All fuses are tested
on an ultra-low resistance measuring
instrument capable of resolving onehundredth of a micro-ohm and
evaluated on the basis of statistical
probability techniques to ensure
uniformity.
100
90
80
70
60
NPL Fuse
200
200
70
80
90
100
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000
40 50 60
5000
30
4000
20
3000
6 7 8 9 10
2000
500
400
300
.01
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000
ii
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
200
NPL Fuse
70
80
90
100
600
700
800
900
1000
NPL Fuse
Scale x 1000 = Current in Amperes
Figure 18.0-18. Average Melting Curve of NPL Fuse

Table 18.0-7. CM52 Protector Limiter Selection
Protector Current
Rating (A)
Limiter/Fuse
Style Number
Curve
Number
800
1200
16001875
140D318G04
140D318G05
140D318G01
1
2
3
2000
25002825
3000
140D318G07
140D318G02
140D318G06
4
5
3500
4000
4500
140D318G08
5980C01G03
KRPC6000

These are the recommended limiters for use on three and four transformer spot network systems.
The limiters are optional on two transformer systems.
Consult Eaton for DSL fuse curve and Bussmann for KRPC fuse curved.
Fusing a protector is necessary

for three- and four-spot network transformer spot networks.
21
CA08104001E
September 2011

18.0-25
Sheet 18 025
Type MPCV Network Protector Relay
Description
The microprocessor controlled network
relays were designed to replace the
Type CN-33 electromechanical master
relay, the Type CNJ electromechanical
phasing relay and the Type BN electromechanical desensitizing relay. The
MPCV series relays use the same
voltage and current inputs as do the
electromechanical equivalent. They
|also continually monitor voltage across
an open breaker and current through
a closed breaker, and perform the
following functions.
Warning
Trip Function
The MPCV relays are designed to be

used on network protectors which
have been wired for 216Y/125V or
480Y/277V service using relay
potential transformers. This relay
is designed to operate at 125V (line
to ground). Do not attempt to apply
this relay on any other system voltage
or configuration.
Figure 18.0-19 diagrams the currentinduced trip characteristics. The

positive sequence current I1 is multiplied by the cosine of the angle of its
phasor related to V1N. If the resulting
sign is negative, then reverse powerflow is indicated. The trip level
(11COS) for this can be adjusted
from 0.05 to 5 percent of rated current.
The cosine multiplication operation
results in the straight line which is
perpendicular to the phasor.
2
3
6
7
8
9
MPCV Network Relay

Exclusive Features
Gull-Wing Trip to address high X/R

Network Transformers
Anti-pump algorithm
Protective remote close
The MPCV series relay will mount on

standard CM52 and existing CMD and
CM-22 network protectors utilizing the
present system of low voltage relay
mounting studs.
ii
The trip contact will close upon

balanced fault conditions if the
positive sequence power flow is
out of the network
The close contact will close if the
ensuing positive sequence power
will be into the network
The trip contact will close upon the
flow of reverse magnetizing current
of its associated transformer
The MPCV relay is the only sequencedbased network relay in the market.
The MPCV relay calculates the
fundamental frequency positive
sequence voltage and current phasors
to account mathematically for any
power system voltage unbalances.
Essentially, the MPCV relay extracts
the fundamental components of the
sampled voltage and current signals
using discrete Fourier Transform, then
the positive sequence components are
then calculated. The positive sequence
current phasors for each phase are
compared with the reverse trip
setting (RT in the setting menu) and
a determination to trip is made within
the relay. The sampling rate is 32
samples per power line cycle, and
the algorithm requires two successive
line cycles of data to initiate a trip
where the positive sequence currents
experienced by the MPCV relay exceed
the RT settings. The MPCV has the
following exclusive features:
10
MPCV Relay (Front View) for CM52 Protectors
Failure to follow these instructions

could result in severe personal injury,
death, and/or product or property
damage.
Functional Characteristics
All measurements in the relay are
made as net voltages and currents,
computed as the positive sequence
voltage and current (represented as
V1X or I1) and the negative sequence
voltage and current (represented as
V2X or I2). The network positive and
negative voltages sequence are
denoted V1N and V2N respectively.
The other important voltage is the
phasing voltage, which is the difference between the transformer and
network voltages, whose sequence
components are denoted V1P and V2P.
The V1N is defined as the reference
phasor for all phase measurements,
and the nominal phase-to-neutral
voltage (1 P.U.) is defined as 125 Vac
rms. From this, the basic functional
characteristics are graphically depicted
in Figures 18.0-19 through 18.0-22.
11
Figure 18.0-19. Trip Characteristics
In a different fault condition, the
negative sequence network voltage
V2N will exceed 0.06 P.U., in which
case the trip curve is rotated 60
clockwise direction to the alternate
trip curve shown, with the same trip
level as set before (0.05 to 5 percent).
In either case, the trip is called for after
50 mS, or three line cycles, in a 60 Hz
system, of a fault condition.
The BN function can be initialized to
modify the characteristics and timing
of the reverse-current trip conditions.
This adds to the basic detection
requirements that the true rms value
of the reverse current exceeds some
settable threshold between 50% and
250% of the protector CT rating. When
the magnitude of the reverse current is
less than the settable threshold, a trip
will occur if the condition exists for
an adjustable time period of 0 to
5 minutes. The BN function is standard
on all MPCV relays.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 18 026
Type MPCV Network Protector Relay
i
ii
1
2
3
Special Trip Characteristic

Gull-Wing Trip
For some applications, the straightline trip curve is not the optimum
performance setting to use. If the
transformers have high X/R ratios, then
the straight-line trip does not perform
as well as the enhanced Gull-Wing
trip characteristic, a feature that has
been in the MPCV relay since 2003.
Technically, the following circumstances benefit from having the
enhanced Gull-Wing trip feature:
Under a three-phase fault with
the X/R ratio higher than 11.4, the
voltage to current angle is less than
95 degrees
Double line-ground faults on the primary of a delta-wye transformer with
blown protector fuse on one phase
Single line-ground fault on the
primary of grounded wye-grounded
wye transformer with blown protector
fuse on one phase
0
Non-Trip Region
VN
ITYP. Forward
RT/Tan (5)
5 Tilt
90
270
RT
IHigh_Lag
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
IBackfeed
Trip Region
180
Figure 18.0-20. Traditional Relay Trip Characteristic
Close Characteristics
Figure 18.0-23 also diagrams the
voltage regions for close, float and trip
operation when the protector is open.
Under extreme conditions when the
protector is open, a trip is called for
to prevent a dangerous manual close
operation. With the protector open
and the network and transformer
voltages normal and balanced,
positive sequence phasing voltage
(V1P) is measured. If V1P is in the
close region, the relay makes its close
contact. If V1P is not in the close
region, but is less than 0.06 P.U., then
the float is called for, as this voltage
difference is not deemed dangerous
regardless of the phase relationships,
and manual close of the protector
would not exceed the breaker capacity.
If V1P is greater than 0.06 P.U. and
does not lie in the close region, then
trip is called for to prevent manual
closing. The relay also calls for trip
under all rolled and crossed phase
conditions, even when either the
transformer side or the network side
of the protector is de-energized.
The close contact will close only in
the quadrant defined by the two lines,
termed master and phasing. The phasing line, emanating from 0, defines a
minimum phase angle of the phasing
voltage ahead of the network voltage
for closing, which is selectable at +5,
5, 15 or 25. The master line sets
a minimum difference between the
transformer and network voltage,
settable from 0.0008 to 0.02 P.U. at 0 (in
phase). This line exhibits a slope of 7.5.
0
Non-Trip Region
VN
ITYP. Forward
Expanded 5 Gull-Wing
Trip Region
RT/Tan (5)
90
5 Tilt
270
RT
IHigh_Lag
IBackfeed
Trip Region
180
Figure 18.0-21. Enhanced Gull-Wing Trip Characteristic
Protective Remote Close (PRC)

Feature
This feature helps address problems
with very lightly loaded network protectors. If a protector is opened and the
system is very lightly loaded, the users
had to manually close the protector
that had opened. The MPCV can be
sent a PRC communications close
command via any Eaton communication
option available. The PRC command

is not an unqualified close, rather the
MPCV relay relaxes its master line
setting to 75 mV and the command
closes the protector provided the
phase voltage angle is in the widen
close window. After closure, the MPCV
relay automatically readjusts the
master line setting back to the original
master line setting configured in
the relay.
CA08104001E
September 2011

18.0-27
Sheet 18 027
Communications Capabilities
0
PL

Straight Line Close Characteristic
25
Normal ML,
PL Re-close Settings
i
ii
PRC
Temporary (10 sec)
PRC Boundary
Close Region
1
2
VP
ML
VPX
PRC
~75 mV
90
270
VN
180
Figure 18.0-22. Circular Closing Curve

Note: If the phases are crossed on both
the transformer and the network side, V2P
could be very close to or equal to zero, but
the trip contact will close as V1N is less than
0.1 P.U. and V1P is less than 0.8 P.U.
Figure 18.0-24. PRCStraight Line Close
6
0
PL1

Circle Close Characteristic
The other closing curve characteristic

option available is the circular line
closing curve which maintains the
same value of phasing volts from
the 25 to +90 quadrants (refer to
Figure 18.0-22). The circular closing
curve permits the network protector
to close at lower loads while ensuring
the watt flow is into the network.
Any close conditions must exist for
500 ms before the close contact
will close.
25
Nornal ML, PL1,

PL2 Re-close Settings
PRC
8
Temporary (10 sec)
PRC Boundary
Close Region
VP
ML
PL2
90
10
VPX
~75 mV
PRC
270
VN
11
12
180
13
Figure 18.0-25. PRCCircle Close

exceeds 0.2 P.U., then the trip contact
will close, indicating crossed phases
on either the transformer side or the
network side.
Settings
Figure 18.0-23. Closing Characteristics

Straight Closing
If the network side is de-energized,
and the transformer side is energized,
the close contact will close, if V1N is
less than 0.1 P.U., and V2N is less than
0.06 P.U., and V1P exceeds 0.8 P.U.
Note that, as stated before, if V2P
CA08104001E
All settings can be altered through a

digital programming pendant which
plugs into the unit while mounted on
the network protector breaker. When
not in use, the pendant may be stored
separate from any network protector
location, most conveniently with the
network protector test kit. While the
pendant is plugged in, actual trip and
close operations will be inhibited and
the amber float light will flash. The
pendant has a display for the readout
of the set points and a keyboard to
set them.
Factory default settings are programmed

into each MPCV network relay, however,
each project and protector application

represents different voltage and
loading conditions, which can require
adjustment of the default settings to
other appropriate values. Experienced
service technicians must be used
when commissioning protectors, and
proper tools such as protector test sets
and programming pendants must be
used to start up protectors and maintain
the units.
Relay settings can also be implemented
via PowerNet software, which allows
for the full use of the communication
features of the MPCV network relay
as described on the following pages.
Non-Eaton communication protocols
may be able to interface with a subnetwork of MPCV relays through a data
concentrator and an independently
written and supplied driver.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 18 028
MPCV Network Relay Communications
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Control and Monitoring

Capabilities from MPCV
Network Relays
Proven PowerNet and Power Xpert
software, developed by Eaton, provides an operator with the capability to
control network protectors from a personal computer while simultaneously monitoring power quality and
operating conditions, providing this
information in real time.
PowerNet software is a user-friendly,
Microsoft Windows-based program
that allows the operator to point and
click through the screens. Standard
software screens are appropriate for
most applications but can be customized
to meet your individual requirements.
Power Xpert is a Web-based information gathering system that uses only
Ethernet browsers and IP addresses to
display data. No custom or proprietary
vendor software is required.
8
9
10
Monitoring
Control
PowerNet and Power Xpert provides

energy management, operations and
equipment status information, and
offers the operator these capabilities:
PowerNet provides multiple network

protectors controlled from a remote
location and allows the following
capabilities:
Real-time information. The operator

commands an inquiry to each MPCV
Relay on the system which logs
current, voltage, power (watts,
vars and VA), energy, frequency,
demand, power factor, and total
harmonic distortion (THD). This
information is displayed on a
single screen
Also displayed on this screen is
network protector inside air temperature. Additionally, from the same
screen, the operator can select to
view the last trip waveform or
review the MPCV Relay set points
Data printout. Real-time information
from all MPCV Relays on any one
feeder can be printed out to provide
a near instantaneous load flow of
the entire feeder
Internal environment of the network protector enclosure. Water
inside the network housing and
upper copper bus temperatures.
Breaker status (open/closed)
Vault environment. Transformer
top oil temperature, water in the
network vault, fire alarm, and
network enclosure pressure
11
12
Sample Set Point Screen
13
14
15
Sample Monitoring Screen
Close or trip the breaker relay

contacts. If the operator chooses to
have the breakers relay trip contact
make, the breaker opening can
be viewed on-screen and listed
currents will go to zero. A designedin safety feature prevents the
network protector from being closed
while the MPCV Relay trip contact is
made until the relay trip response
is removed
Relay set points. The operator can
review or change the operational set
points without using the hand-held
controlling pendant. Password
protected security helps prevent
accidental or improper usage
Alarming
Eaton software provides the operator
with these capabilities:
Receive an alarm in real time.
When an established parameter
of a monitoring function is reached
or exceeded, an alarm condition is
displayed immediately on the PC
screen, enabling the operator to:
Identify the vault or feeder in
question
Determine what alarm has been
triggered and at what location
Power Xpert is a Web-based
approach to communications
without proprietary vendor software
For more information, visit the
URLs below:
www.eaton.com/powerxpert
www.eaton.com/pxm
www.eaton.com/pxgx
www.eaton.com/pxs
www.eaton.com/pxr
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
18.0-29
Sheet 18 029
MPCV Network Relay Communications
Other Communication Protocols

Eaton has introduced two new
communications options for the MPCV
relay, those being the VaultGard,
and the DNP MINT.
VaultGard
The server is simple to connect and

requires no software, only Internet
Explorer. The system displays real
time voltage and current readings,
PF, watts, temperature, open/close
status, relay set points and MPCV relay
control-remote open and block open,
protective remote close (PRC). The
device can log up to 32 MPCV relay
data and provide MPCV reason
code outputs.
VaultGard
This device server can display up to

32 MPCV relays on one screen. The
protocol is Ethernet and/or DNP 3.0.
Devices can be connected in various
communication configurations, such as
hardwired LAN or wireless, including
short-range wireless from module
(100m), cellular modem and hot spot
zone connect ability.
No software needed!wireless Wi-Fi

or hardware Ethernet connection
Object trending
Operations counter
Wireless control and calibration
color coded alarms
E-mail notification (with cellular,
hot spot or ethernet connection
configuration)
Automatically discovers connected
MPCVs
Reason code display
No new relay to purchase
128 bit security
Data logging
DNP 3.0, up and down link
DNP 3.0 RS-485
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet
DNP MINT Translator
i
ii
1
2
3
4
DNP MINT Translator
The DNP MINT allows connection of

up to 16 devices, including MPCV
relays, DT810 and DT910 trip units,
DT OPTIM, DT 520MC, DT1150, DT3000,
DTMV, DT3200, DP-4000, DIM digital
input module, and addressable relays.
The output is DNP3.0 in RS-485.
5
6
7
The DNP MINT can be configured

either hardwired, fiber optic, 900 MHz
radio, or cellular.
Up to 16 MPCVs or other devices

can be connected to one module
RS-485 uplink allows networking
multiple DNP MINTs
Toggle switch controlled
configuration mode
Class 0 polling and Class 1, 2, 3
events supported
Direct operate or select and operate
remote control
Can be hardwired or wirelessly
viewed
Simple twisted pair to MPCVs can
be run up to 10,000 feet
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 18 030
Communications Configurations
Antenna
ii
1
Serial DNP
Multiple MPCVs!
Cellular
DNP-RTM
3
4
5
6
Power Supply
120 Vac12/48 Vdc
120 Vac
7
8
9
Communications Enclosure
10
Figure 18.0-26. Configuration #1Cellular with DNP
11
Laptop
12
or
PC
Pocket PC
13
Fiber
or
Wireless RF
or
Ethernet
or
Cellular
14
Twisted Pair INCOM Cable
15
16
17
18
19
20
VaultGard
MPCV
Network
Protector 1
MPCV
MPCV
Network
Protector 2
Network
Protector 3
MPCV
Network
Protector 4
Figure 18.0-27. Configuration #2Wireless Sites/Digital Communication Links
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
18.0-31
Sheet 18 031
CM52 Protector Schematic
50
51
TB-14
TB-15
A-10
Connector on Relay
A-11
50
TS
52b
AUXb
30A
AUX b
N41
N1
A-9
N11
Network
A
30A
N42
N2
18
S
N3
N1
30A
N43
A-1
ii
M
P
C
V
TB-28
B-27
B-26
B-25
13
N2
A-12
J2-1
Common
A-14
X2
3C
15
A-6
13C
0C
11
X4
T3
J2-5
TA
OK
TA (-)
J1-2
TR1
11C
2C
3-CT
J2-4
Coil
OK
TA
G1
M
P
C
V
J2-3
Motor
OK
52a
TR2
L3
CL1
Close Output
A-4
J2-2
Close
Enabled
IDM
Trip Input
1C
B-8
CPT
T1
TS
B-7
L1
125 Vac
X1
3-
DO Power
A-13
N12
J1-4
N13
Motor Monitor
N3
CLF
X5
B-11
T3C
4
5
EL
5
TB-1
2
B-3
B-2
T1
B-1
MPCV
Trip
1
30A
T1
T41
T11
T2
30A
T42
17
Transformer
T3
D1a
D1b
D1c
TB-16
52 a
52 b
AUX b
TB-18
D2c
TB-19
BF2
1
BF1
CL5
LS1
CL9
12
M1
LS2
T12
CL6
A-15
D3a
D3c
G1
A-30
TB-20
TB-21
TB-22
TB-23
Notes:
IDM
TB-24
Legend:
BF-2
CL
TS
LS1
MOT
52 b
AUX b
B-29
TB-17
L1
LS1
D2a
B-5
43
Close
BF1
S
A
B-4
T43
T13
52 a
52 b
AUX b
M
P
C
V
A-8
30A
Customer Auxiliary
Breaker Contacts
52 a
AUX a
Remote
Trip
TB-2
120 Vac
T3
T2
= Anti-Close/Lockout Relay
= Close Coil/Spring Release
= Test Switch
TA = Trip Actuator
43 = Ext. handle Switch
52a = BKR Aux(Open When Breaker Is Open)
= Motor 120 Vac

= Network Relay
= Indicating Diagnostic Module
BF-1 = Close Relay
Electrical interlock manufactured after September of 2003.
EL
See Note 2 N.C. Dry Contacts for Monitoring.
= Electrical Interlock
10
1. Trip and Lockout Provisions: for remote trip, wire external N.O.
contact to position 2 block and position 1 block.
must not exceed 24 Vac/dc 1020 MA.
Figure 18.0-28. Typical Schematic DiagramCM52 Network Protector 480Y/277V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 18 032
Network Disconnect Cabinet
Network Disconnect Cabinet
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Typical Network Disconnect

Neutral Connection Visible
the disconnect, is always used to break

and make load current. The mechanism
is behind electrically interlocked cabinet
doors, which when opened, trips open
the protector. Common ratings are
8004000A, 600 Vac and below.
The cabinet designs are NEMA 1 indoor
only. The protector has a flange at the
top which allows for the mounting
of the disconnect at the top of each
respective protector. In many cases, it is
possible to locate current transformers
within the network disconnect cabinet
to provide for forward 50/51 protection
(relays mounted remotely) on the
network circuits. These relays serve to
monitor the circuit and trip the network
protector when faults occur within the
power circuit feeding the downstream
spot network switchgear.
In some cases, it is possible to locate
the protector fuses within the cabinet.
Four Lifting/
Drop Brackets
Welded to Each Corner
of Main Module
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Hinged Exterior Doors
10
12
The load conductor cables or busway

are connected at the top of each network
disconnect. The drawings detailed on
this page depict a busway flange and
connection. When busway is used,
only two flange orientations are
preferred and those align the busway
phase conductors with the A, B, C left
to right orientation of the protector
phase conductors.
Pow-R-Way Busway
(Flange Gasket Supplied by Busway)
See Busway Drawing
11
Eaton designs, manufactures and tests

the non-loadbreak disconnects at the
same factory that makes the network
protectors, and the plant is ISO 9000
certified. Product electrical and dimensional coordination is ensured between
the protectors and network disconnects
with Eaton. Due to the mounting location,
the network disconnects are seated at
high distances from the floor and sufficient vertical space must exist in the
electrical room to accommodate the
non-loadbreak product.
Cover Latch
Typical Network Disconnect

with Doors Open
Padlock Provision
on Hinged
Exterior Covers
Network disconnects are an important

safety item for spot network systems.
Many forms of disconnect are available,
including downstream main breakers
and non-loadbreak disconnects at the
top of the network protector. This page
describes the non-loadbreak product.
Removable Cover
on Fuse Housing
1.75 (44.5) D
Lift Hole
CL
Roll Out
Unit
Network disconnect means on the load

side of each protector is necessary to
allow safe access to the protector and
protector fuses in the circuit. These
fuses are on the load side of the
protector and are still energized from
the downstream network when a given
protector is opened. Safe access to the
fuses requires some form of network
disconnect means, as outlined above.
Eaton recommends the use of a network
disconnect means for each protector on
all spot network systems. The choice is
up to the owner or designer based
upon costs and available space. The
non-loadbreak product from Eaton is a
hook-stick, gang operated mechanism.
The non-loadbreak design allows for
easier Open-Close operations from the
floor at the front of the unit compared
to loadbreak designs. The protector, not
CL
Trans.
Throat
CL
Network
Protector
Extension
Rail
Stored
Location
of Track
Ext.
Inspection
Window
In. Pipe Plug (2)

Side View
Front View
Figure 18.0-29. Typical 3000A Non-Loadbreak Disconnect Mounted on a Network Protector

0.50 All-thread rod must be used for hanging as permanent support from overhead.
Disconnect enclosure cabinet: interior and exterior surfaces receive ANSI-61 Cationic Epoxy
Electrocoat grey finish over phosphatized 12 gauge steel. The interior of main module is then
finished gloss white.
Three-point cover latching mechanism between the two hinged front covers.
Dimensions for the neutral connection from disconnect cabinet to X/O on transformer must be
supplied by contractor.
Current transformers mounted inside cubicle. CT ratio and class per customers specifications.
CA08104001E
September 2011

18.0-33
Sheet 18 033
Network Transition Box
Network Transition Box

Network transition boxes are used at
the top of protectors when the network
disconnect takes a form other than the
non-loadbreak disconnect explained
on the previous page. Two other forms
of disconnect are available, including
downstream main breakers and downstream fused drawout fuse trucks.
This page describes the transition
box product.
Network disconnect means on the
load side of each protector is necessary to allow safe access to the protector and protector fuses in the circuit.
These fuses are on the load side of the
protector and are still energized from
the downstream network when a given
protector is opened. Safe access to the
fuses requires some form of network
disconnect means, as outlined above.
Eaton recommends the use of a
network disconnect means for each
protector on all spot network systems.
The decision to use a main breaker or
drawout fuse truck implies that the
protector circuit does not use the
non-loadbreak disconnect, perhaps
due to the lack of space at the top of
the protector. The downstream disconnect is usually key interlocked with the
network protector, especially when the
disconnect is the drawout fuse truck.
The area at the top of the protector
becomes a transition area to connect
to cables or busway. Common ratings
for transition boxes are 8004000A,
600 Vac and below.
The transition box designs are NEMA 1

indoor and NEMA 3R outdoor only.
The protector has a flange at the
top which allows for the mounting of
the transition box at the top of each
respective protector. In many cases it
is possible to locate current transformers within the network transition to
provide for forward 50/51 protection
(relays mounted remotely) on the
network circuits. These relays serve
to monitor the circuit and trip the
network protector when faults occur
within the power circuit feeding the
downstream spot network switchgear.
Eaton designs, manufactures and tests

transition boxes the same factory that
makes the network protectors, and
the plant is ISO 9000 certified. Product
electrical and dimensional coordination
is ensured between the protectors and
transition boxes with Eaton.
The load conductor cables or busway
are connected at the top of each transition box. The drawings detailed on this
page depict a busway flange and connection. When busway is used, several
flange orientations are preferred and
those align the busway phase conductors with the A, B, C left to right orientation of the protector phase conductors.
Eaton
Bus Flange
Removable
Fuse Housing
Cover
Current
Transformer
Removable
Front Cover
1
2
3
4
5
Roll Out Unit
9
CL
Network
Protector
Extension
Rail
10
11
Stored
Location of
Track Ext.
12
Inspection
Window
13
1.00 (25.4) In. Pipe Plug (2)

Side View
7
8
1.75 (44.5) D
Lift Hole
CL
Trans.
Throat
ii
Bolt-on
Front Cover
NPL Type
Silver
Sand
Fuses
Front View
Figure 18.0-30. Typical 1875A Network Transition Box Mounted on a Network Protector
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Rating Selection
September 2011
Sheet 18 034
Spot Network Equipment Selector Guide
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Selector Guide
Figure 18.0-31 illustrates the general
configuration of the network equipment for Tables 18.0-9 through 18.0-12
equipment values. For three-unit spot
networks, the fourth transformer/protector pair and load L4 bus and load do
not exist. For 2-unit spot networks, the
third and fourth transformer/protector
pairs and load L3 and L4 buses
and loads do not exist. Tables 18.0-9
through 18.0-12 are developed for
systems anticipating only one primary
feeder outage, and secondary voltage
is 480 wye or 208 wye respectively.
Table 18.0-8. CM52 Protector Features
Features
CM52
Continuous current
ratings in amperes
8004500A
Operating mechanism
Spring close
Close and latch

rating available
Yes
Mechanism withdrawal
Drawout
Mechanical life (no. ops)
10,000
Withdrawn construction
Deadfront
Protector fuse type
Silver- sand
NPL type
Fuse location
External
Protector trip device
Shunt trip
Dielectric test passed
2200V
UL label
Yes
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Strongly recommended for spot network

applications. Used optional pre-charge
energy mechanism on two transformer spot
networks.
NPL fuses can be mounted in epoxy
enclosures or network disconnect cabinets.
TX1
TX3
TX2
NP1
NP3
NP2
Tie
LOADS
L1
TX4
LOADS
L2
NP4
Tie
Tie
LOADS
L3
LOADS
L4
TL = L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 = Total Network Load kVA
Figure 18.0-31. Spot Network Configurations

Table 18.0-9. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Liquid Transformers
480V Secondaries Liquid Transformers (Including Oil and Silicone) OA 55C Rise
with 138% Short Time Capacity (Up to 24 Hours for Probable Sacrifice of 1% Life)
Total Network
TX kVA Nominal
TL = Load kVA
(Maximum for
One PRI Outage)
TX = Network TX
kVA (55C Liquid)
NP = Protector
Ampacity
at 480V
LV Switchgear Tie
Breaker Frame/
Trip Amperes
Two-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2 and L3 = L4 = 0TX3 and TX4 are Absent
1000
1500
2000
690
1035
1380
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
800/800AT
1600/1200AT
1600/1600AT
3000
4000
5000
2070
2760
3450
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2200AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
Three-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2+L3 and L4 = 0TX4 is Absent

1500
2250
3000
1380
2070
2760
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
800/800AT
1600/1200AT
1600/1600AT
4500
6000
7500
4140
5520
6900
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2200AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
Four-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2+L3+L4All TXs are Present

2000
3000
4000
2070
3105
4140
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
800/800AT
1600/1200AT
1600/1600AT
6000
8000
10000
6210
8280
10350
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2200AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
Table 18.0-10. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Dry Transformers

480V Secondaries Dry-Type Transformers (Including VPI, VPE and Cast Coil) AA/FA 80C Rise
with 150% Overload Capacity (Continuous when Fan Cooling is Active and Ambient is 30C)
Total Network
TX kVA Nominal
TL = Load kVA
(Maximum for
One PRI Outage)
TX = Network TX
kVA (80C Dry)
NP = Protector
Ampacity
at 480V
LV Switchgear Tie
Breaker Frame/
Trip Amperes
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
750
1125
1500
2250
3000
3750
500
750
1000
1500
2000
2500
1200
1600
1875
2825
3500
4500
1600/1000AT
1600/1400AT
2000/1600AT
3200/2600AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
1200
1600
1875
2500
3500
4500
1600/1000AT
1600/1400AT
2000/1600AT
3200/2600AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT

1500
2250
3000
4500
6000
7500
1500
2250
3000
4500
6000
7500
500
750
1000
1500
2000
2500
20
2000
3000
4000
2250
3375
4500
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
1600/1000AT
1600/1400AT
2000/1600AT
21
6000
8000
10000
6750
9000
11250
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2600AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
CA08104001E

Rating Selection
September 2011
18.0-35
Sheet 18 035
Spot Network Equipment Selector Guide

Table 18.0-11. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Liquid Transformers216Y or 208Y Secondaries Liquid Transformers
(Including Oil and Silicone) OA 55C Rise with 138% Short Time Capacity (Up to 24 Hours for Probable Sacrifice of 1% Life)
Total Network
TX kVA Nominal
TL = Load kVA (Maximum

for One PRI Outage)
TX = Network TX kVA
(55C Liquid)
LV Switchgear Tie Breaker

Frame/Trip Amperes
500
750
1000
2000
3000
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/2800AT
4000/4000AT
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
690
1035
1380
2070
2760
3450
NP = Protector
Ampacity at 216 or 208V
ii

1500
2250
3000
1380
2070
2760
500
750
1000
2000
3000
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/2800AT
4000/4000AT
4500
6000
7500
4140
5520
6900
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A

2000
3000
4000
2070
3105
4140
500
750
1000
2000
3000
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/2800AT
4000/4000AT
6000
8000
10000
6210
8280
10350
1500
2000
2500
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
For the listed table Total Load values (TL) protector ratings are not available. However, protector ratings are available through 5000A, which will
support reduced TL (Total Load) values of 1871 kVA, 3742 kVA and 5613 kVA for 2-, 3-, and 4-unit spot networks, respectively at 216Y volt secondary
(4% less load values are supported if 208Y is the system voltage).
Note: NA indicates that spot networks are not available.
Table 18.0-12. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Dry Transformers216Y or 208Y Secondaries Dry Transformers (Including VPI, VPE
and Cast Coil) AA/FA 80C Rise with 150% Overload Capacity (Continuous when Fan Cooling is Active and Ambient is 30C)
Total Network
TX kVA Nominal
TL = Load kVA (Maximum

for One PRI Outage)
TX = Network TX kVA
(80C Dry)
NP = Protector
Ampacity at 216 or 208V
LV Switchgear Tie Breaker

Frame/Trip Amperes
5
6
7
8
9
10
1000
1500
2000
750
1125
1500
500
750
1000
2250
3500
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/3100AT
4000/4000AT
11
3000
4000
5000
2250
3000
3750
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
12

1500
2250
3000
1500
2250
3000
500
750
1000
2250
3500
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/3100AT
4000/4000AT
13
4500
6000
7500
4500
6000
7500
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
14

2000
3000
4000
2070
3105
4140
500
750
1000
2250
3500
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/3100AT
4000/4000AT
6000
8000
10000
6210
8280
10350
1500
2000
2500
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
For the listed table Total Load values (TL) protector ratings are not available. However, protector ratings are available through 5000A, which will
support reduced TL (Total Load) values of 1871 kVA, 3742 kVA and 5613 kVA for 2-, 3-, and 4-unit spot networks, respectively at 216Y volt secondary
(4% less load values are supported if 208Y is the system voltage).
Note: NA indicates that spot networks are not available.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Rating Selection
September 2011
Sheet 18 036
Protector Application Information
Protector Application Information

Table 18.0-13. Transformer and Protector Combinations and Protector RatingsCM52 Protectors
ii
1
Network Transformer
Transformer
Nameplate
kVA Rating
Network Protectors
Full Load Current
rms Amperes
Continuous
Current Rating
rms Amperes
Protector Rating
as % of Transformer
Full Load Current
Interrupting Rating in
rms Symmetrical
Amperes
Close and Latch Rating

in rms Symmetrical
Amperes
System Voltage = 216Y/125 or 208Y/120
225
300
500
600
800
1333
800
1200
1600
133
150
120
42,000
42,000
42,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
500
500
500
1333
1333
1333
1875
2000
2250
141
150
169
42,000
42,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
45,000
750
750
1000
2000
2000
2667
2500
2825
3000
125
141
112
65,000
65,000
65,000
45,000
45,000
45,000
1000
1000
2667
2667
3500
4500
131
169
85,000
85,000
65,000
65,000
500
750
1000
600
900
1200
800
1200
1600
133
133
133
42,000
42,000
42,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
1000
1000
1000
1200
1200
1200
1875
2000
2250
158
167
188
42,000
42,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
45,000
1500
1500
2000
1800
1800
2400
2500
2825
3000
139
157
125
65,000
65,000
65,000
45,000
45,000
45,000
2000
2500
2500
2400
3000
3000
3500
4500
5000
145
150
167
85,000
85,000
85,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
System Voltage = 480Y/277
10
11
The interrupting rating exceeds the available fault current from the transformer.
The short time rating of protectors without fuses equals the interrupting rating.
Note: Use this table and its equipment ratings when designing network systems where the protectors are rated lower or higher, as a
percentage of the full load amperes of the transformers, than those selected in the Tables 18.0-9 through 18.0-12. This table is also useful
when selecting equipment ratings for systems that anticipate more than one single primary outage, e.g., when two outages are expected
on a four-transformer spot network.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
18.0-37
Sheet 18 037
Liquid-Type Network Unit Dimensions
Dimensions
i
Legend:
SW = Primary
TX = Network Transformer (Silicone filled)
NP = Network Protector
ND = Network Disconnect (Non-loadbreak)
All dimensions are shown in Tables 18.0-14
and 18.0-15.
18
(457.2)
WT
WP
Neutral
ii
ND
12
(304.8)
Front
H
ND
DD
SW
32
(812.0)
TX
NP
SW
HT
Liquid
Transformer
HN
NP
HL
HP
DN
TX
4
Front View
Plan View
Figure 18.0-32. Liquid Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design
Note: Dimensions are approximate for silicone filled network transformers and are typical for the ratings indicated. Designs can be customized
to fit into existing spaces in many instances, although at higher cost. Specifiers are encouraged to consult Eaton to facilitate special existing
conditions.
Table 18.0-14. Liquid NetworkDimensions in Inches (mm)
Network
Equipment
DimensionsRefer to Plan and Front View Figures Above
TX
kVA
NP
Amps
HT
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
64 (1625.6) 49 (1244.6) 40 (1016.0) 52 (1320.8) 106 (2692.4)

67 (1701.8) 50 (1270.0) 43 (1092.2) 55 (1397.0) 109 (2768.6)
77 (1955.8) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 66 (1676.4) 120 (3048.0)
50 (1270.0) 34 (863.6)
53 (1346.2) 34 (863.6)
56 (1422.4) 34 (863.6)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
83 (2108.2) 57 (1447.8) 55 (1397.0) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2)

90 (2286.0) 61 (1549.4) 65 (1651.0) 74 (1879.6)
93 (2362.2) 63 (1600.2) 67 (1701.8) 90 (2286.0)
62 (1574.8) 36 (914.4) 116 (2946.4)

66 (1676.4) 38 (965.2) 122 (3098.8)
68 (1727.2) 42 (1066.8) 128 (3251.2)

HP
HL
HN
WT
WP
DN
DD
102 (2590.8)
105 (2667.0)
108 (2743.2)
32 (812.8)
32 (812.8)
32 (812.8)
34 (863.6) 42 (1066.8)
34 (863.6) 45 (1143.0)
34 (863.6) 48 (1219.2)
38 (965.2) 34 (863.6) 55 (1397.0)

38 (965.2)
63 (1600.2)
48 (1219.2)
68 (1727.2)
Protector selected at 480V per Table 18.0-9 recommendations.

Consult Eaton for network disconnect information. If disconnect is remote from this location, then the transition box at top of protector is
30.0036.00 inches (762.0914.4 mm) above protector flange.
Weights in
Lbs (kg)
TX
kVA
Network TX
NP
Amps
500 1200
750 1600
1000 1875
7800 (3541)
10,600 (4812)
11,400 (5176)
1500 2500
2000 3500
2500 4500
16,100 (7309)
21,000 (9534)
24,000 (10,896)

Liquid Gallons
(Liters)
Network Disconnect
Network TX
850 (386)
850 (386)
850 (386)
250 (114)
300 (136)
350 (159)
220 (833)
250 (946)
320 (1211)
1200 (545)
1450 (658)
1500 (681)
400 (182)
500 (1893)
600 (2271)
700 (2650)
Protector NP
8
9
10
11
12
Table 18.0-15. Liquid NetworkWeights in Lb (kg)

Network
Equipment

Weights for transformers include the fluid weight.

The number of gallons of liquid includes the fluid inside the primary switch.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 18 038
Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions
Legend:
SW = Primary
TX = Network Transformer (Silicone filled)
NP = Network Protector
ND = Network Disconnect (Non-loadbreak)
20
(508.0)
ii
Neutral
ND
W
36
(914.4)
TX
Front
HT
HP
DN
TX
SW
Front
HL
Plan View
Front View
Table 18.0-16. Dry-Type NetworkDimensions in Inches (mm)

Network
Equipment
TX
kVA
NP HT
Amps
HP
HL
HN
WT
WP
W
DN
DD
180 (4572.0)
192 (4876.0)
192 (4876.0)
32 (812.8)
32 (812.8)
32 (812.8)
34 (863.6) 66 (1676.4)
34 (863.6) 66 (1676.4)
34 (863.6) 66 (1676.4)
90 (2286.0) 34 (863.6)
102 (2590.8) 34 (863.6)
102 (2590.8) 34 (863.6)
1500 2500
2000 3500
2500 4500
102 (2590.8) 90 (2286.0) 60 (1524.0) 75 (1905.0) 129 (3276.6)

112 (2844.8) 90 (2286.0) 64 (1625.6) 81 (2057.4)
120 (3048.0) 90 (2286.0) 66 (1676.4) 90 (2286.0)
102 (2590.8) 36 (914.4) 194 (4927.6)

124 (3149.6) 38 (965.2) 218 (5537.2)
130 (3302.0) 42 (1066.8) 226 (5740.4)

38 (965.2) 34 (863.6) 66 (1676.4)

38 (965.2)
66 (1676.4)
48 (1219.2)
66 (1676.4)
Table 18.0-17. Dry-Type NetworkWeights in Lbs (kg)

Network
Equipment
Weights in
Lbs (kg)
Protector NP + Stand
14
500 1200
750 1600
1000 1875
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
5600 (2542)
6700 (3042)
8450 (3836)
950 (431)
950 (431)
950 (431)
15
1500 2500
2000 3500
2500 4500
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
10,150 (4608)
13,150 (5970)
16,000 (7264)
1330 (604)
1550 (704)
1600 (726)

NP
Primary SW + Fuses
Amps
Network TX
TX
kVA
17

Dimensions for overall width include a bussed transition20.00 inches (508.0 mm) on the primary. This 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) section may be
eliminated by using cable connections to primary bushing in lieu of buswork.
13
16
18 (457.2)
Note: Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and
aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 56 (1422.4) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2)

90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 56 (1422.4) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2)
102 (2590.8) 90 (2286.0) 56 (1422.4) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2)
12
HN
Figure 18.0-33. Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design
500 1200
750 1600
1000 1875
11
NP
DD
10
ND
NP
Dry Type
Transformer
SW
Front
WP
Dry Type
Transformer
WT
12
(304.8)
Network ND Disconnect
250 (114)
300 (136)
350 (159)
400 (182)

Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and aluminum
windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
Protector stand carries the weight of the protector, since the dry-type end sheets do not have the strength to support the weight of the protector.
Consult Eaton for network disconnect information. If disconnect is remote from this location then the transition box at top of protector is
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
18.0-39
Sheet 18 039
Dry-Type Network UnitSwitchgear Mounted Protector Dimensions
20
(508.0)
(1)
W
36
(914.4)
66
(1676.4)
WT
Voltage
Switchgear
Dry T
Type
Transformer
DP
TX
Dry T
Type
Transformer
HT
HP
NP
SW
Legend:
= Primary
TX
etwork Transformer (Silicone filled)
r
ND
(1)
Tr
s
(2) = Protector Structure May Be Close-Coupled To
Switchgear Without Transition
SW
HN
TX
ii
1
Switchgear
Mounted
2
H
NP
(1)
(2)
(2)
To
Switchgear
Plan View
Front
Front View
4
5
Figure 18.0-34. Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design with Switchgear Mounted Protector
Note: Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity
and aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
Table 18.0-18. Dry-Type with Switchgear Mounted ProtectorDimensions in Inches (mm)

Network
Equipment
TX
kVA
NP
Amps
HT
HP
HN
WT
W
DP
D
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
102 (2590.8)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
96 (2438.4)
96 (2438.4)
96 (2438.4)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
102 (2590.8)
102 (2590.8)
102 (2590.8)
102 (2590.8)
228 (5791.2)
228 (5791.2)
228 (5791.2)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
96 (2438.4)
96 (2438.4)
96 (2438.4)
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
238 (6045.2)
238 (6045.2)
238 (6045.2)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
84 (2133.6)


Primary transition section 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) in width may be eliminated by using cable interconnections. Elimination of transition reduces
width by 20.00 inches (508.0 mm).
Dimensions are approximate for low voltage switchgear construction. Close-coupling to switchgear structures with main and feeders will
require 72.0078.00 inch (1828.81981.2 mm) depth depending upon the type of feeders used, fused or nonfused. When switchgear is remote,
using cable or busway connections, the depth of the protector section can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm).
8
9
10
11
12
Table 18.0-19. Dry-Type with Switchgear Mounted ProtectorWeights in Lbs (kg)

Network
Equipment
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
TX
kVA
NP
Amps
Primary SW
Including Power Fuses
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
5600 (2542)
6700 (3042)
8450 (3836)
4000 (1816)
4000 (1816)
4000 (1816)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
10,150 (4608)
13,150 (5970)
15,600 (7082)
4400 (1998)
4600 (2088)
4600 (2088)
13
Network Transformer
TX
Low Voltage Switchgear

and Protector NP
Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and
aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage
19.0-1
November 2013
Distribution Dry-Type
TransformersLow Voltage
Sheet 19 001
Contents
Glossary of Transformer Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-2
The Energy Policy Act of 2005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-5
General Description/Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-1
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-5
General Purpose Encapsulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-8
K-Factor Rated for Nonlinear Loads (KT Type) TP-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-11
Harmonic Mitigating (HMT Type) TP-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-12
NEMA TP-1 Energy Efficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-16
Energy Efficient (CSL-3 Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-17
Motor Drive Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-18
Hazardous Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-19
MiniPower Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-20
FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-35
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16461
26 22 13
MiniPower Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16463
26 27 00.11
Further Information
Volume 2Commercial Distribution 2011, Tab 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA08100003E
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Eatons Family of Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
CA08104001E
21
19.0-2 Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage

Glossary
November 2013
Sheet 19 002
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Glossary of Transformer Terms

Air cooled: A transformer that is
cooled by the natural circulation of air
around, or through, the core and coils.
Ambient noise level: The existing
or inherent sound level of the area
surrounding the transformer, prior to
energizing the transformer. Measured
in decibels.
Ambient temperature:
The temperature of the air surrounding the transformer into which the
heat of the transformer is dissipated.
Ampacity: The current-carrying

capacity of an electrical conductor
under stated thermal conditions.
Expressed in amperes.
Ampere: The practical unit

of electric current.
Attenuation: A decrease in signal

power or voltage. Unit of measure
is dB.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Autotransformer: A transformer in
which part of the winding is common
to both the primary and the secondary
circuits.
Banked: Two or more single-phase
transformers wired together to supply
a three-phase load. Three single-phase
transformers can be banked together
to support a three-phase load. For
example, three 10 kVA single-phase
transformers banked together will
have a 30 kVA three-phase capacity.
BIL: Basic impulse level. The ability of
a transformers insulation system to
withstand high voltage surges. All
Eaton 600V-class transformers have a
10 kV BIL rating.
BTU: British thermal unit. In North
America, the term BTU is used
to describe the heat value (energy
content) of fuels, and also to describe
the power of heating and cooling
systems, such as furnaces, stoves,
barbecue grills and air conditioners.
When used as a unit of power, BTU
per hour (BTU/h) is understood,
though this is often abbreviated to
just BTU.
Buck-boost: The name of a
standard, single-phase, two-winding
transformer application with the
low voltage secondary windings
connected as an autotransformer
for boosting (increasing) or bucking
(decreasing) voltages in small
amounts. Applications can either
be single-phase or three-phase.
CE: Mark to indicate third-party

approved or self-certification to
specific requirements of the
European community.
Celsius (centigrade): Metric
temperature measure.
F = (1.8 x C) + 32
C = (F-32) / 1.8
Center tap: A reduced capacity tap
at the mid-point of a winding. The
center tap on three-phase delta-delta
transformers is called a lighting tap.
It provides 5% of the transformers kVA
for single-phase loads.
Certified tests: Actual values taken
during production tests and certified
as applying to a given unit shipped on
a specific order. Certified tests are
serial numberspecific.
Common mode: Electrical noise
or voltage fluctuation that occurs
between all of the line leads and the
common ground, or between ground
and line or neutral.
Compensated transformer:
A transformer with a turns ratio
that provides a higher than nameplate
output (secondary) voltage at no load,
and nameplate output (secondary)
voltage at rated load. It is common
for small transformers (2 kVA and less)
to be compensated.
Conductor losses: Losses (expressed
in watts) in a transformer that are
incidental to carrying a load: coil
resistance, stray loss due to stray
fluxes in the windings, core clamps,
and the like, as well as circulating
currents (if any) in parallel windings.
Also called load losses.
Continuous duty rating: The load that
a transformer can handle indefinitely
without exceeding its specified
temperature rise.
Core losses: Losses (expressed in
watts) caused by magnetization of
the core and its resistance to magnetic
flux. Also called no-load losses or
excitation losses. Core losses are
always present when the transformer
is energized.
CSA: Canadian Standards
Association. The Canadian equivalent
of Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
CSL3: Candidate Standard Level 3

(CSL3) design criteria developed by
the U.S. Department of Energy. This
term is used when considering the
maximum, practical efficiency of a
transformer.
cUL: Mark to indicate UL Certification
to specific CSA Standards.
Decibel (dB): Unit of measure used to
express the magnitude of a change in
signal or sound level.
Delta connection: A standard threephase connection with the ends of
each phase winding connected in
series to form a closed loop with each
phase 120 degrees from the other.
Sometimes referred to as three-wire.
Dielectric tests: Tests that consist of
the application of a voltage higher
than the rated voltage for a specified
time for the purpose of determining
the adequacy against breakdowns of
insulating materials and spacings
under normal conditions.
Dry-type transformer: A transformer
in which the core and coils are in a
gaseous or dry compound insulating
medium. A transformer that is cooled
by a medium other than a liquid,
normally by the circulation of air.
E3: Eatons version of a CSL3
transformer.
Eddy currents: The currents that are
induced in the body of a conducting
mass by the time variation of magnetic
flux or varying magnetic field.
Efficiency: The ratio of the power
output from a transformer to the
total power input. Typically expressed
as a %.
Electrostatic shield: Copper or other
conducting sheet placed between
primary and secondary windings,
and grounded to reduce electrical
interference and to provide additional
protection from line-to-line or line-toground noise. Commonly referred to
as Faraday shield.
Encapsulated transformer:
A transformer with its coils either
dipped or cast in an epoxy resin or
other encapsulating substance.
Enclosure: A surrounding case
or housing used to protect the
contained equipment against external
conditions and prevent personnel
from accidentally contacting live parts.
CA08104001E
November 2013

Glossary
19.0-3
Sheet 19 003
Environmentally preferable product:

A product that has a lesser or reduced
negative effect on human health and
the environment when compared to
competing products that serve the
same purpose. This comparison may
consider raw materials acquisition,
production, manufacturing, packaging,
distribution, reuse, operation,
maintenance and disposal of the
product. This term includes recyclable
products, recycled products and
reusable products.
EPACT: The Energy Policy Act of
1992 (EPAct) is an important piece of
legislation for efficiency because it
established minimum efficiency levels
for dry-type distribution transformers
manufactured or imported after
December 2006. EPAct, which was
based on NEMA standards, defined
a number of terms, including what
constitutes an energy-efficient
transformer. The DOE issued a rule
that defines these transformers and
how manufacturers must comply. DOE
EPAct rule (PDF): Energy Efficiency
Program for Certain Commercial
and Industrial Equipment: Test
Procedures, Labeling, and the
Certification Requirements for Electric
Motors. Final Rule. 10-CFR Part 431.
Excitation current: No load current.
The current that flows in any winding
used to excite the transformer when
all other windings are open-circuited.
It is usually expressed in percent of the
rated current of a winding in which it is
measured. Also called magnetizing
current.
FCAN: Full Capacity Above Nominal
taps. Designates the transformer will
deliver its rated kVA when connected
to a voltage source which is higher
than the rated primary voltage.
FCBN: Full Capacity Below Nominal
taps. Designates the transformer will
deliver its rated kVA when connected
to a voltage source which is lower than
the rated primary voltage.
Frequency: On AC circuits, designates
the number of times that polarity
alternates from positive to negative
and back again per second, such as
60 cycles per second. Typically
measured in Hertz (Hz).
Ground: Connecting one side of
a circuit to the earth through low
resistance or low impedance paths
to help prevent transmitting electrical
shock to personnel.
CA08104001E
Harmonic: A sinusoidal waveform with

a frequency that is an integral multiple
of the fundamental frequency (60 Hz).
60 H3 fundamental
120 H3 2nd harmonic
180 H3 3rd harmonic
240 H3 4th harmonic
Harmonic distortion: Nonlinear
distortion of a system characterized
by the appearance of harmonic
(non-sinusoidal) currents in the
output, when the input is sinusoidal.
Harmonic distortion, total (THD): The
square root of the sum of the squares
of all harmonic currents present in
a load, excluding the fundamental
60 Hz current. Usually expressed as
a percent of the fundamental.
Inducted potential test: A standard

dielectric test of transformer
insulation. Verifies the integrity of
insulating materials and electrical
clearances.
Inrush current: The initial high peak
of current that occurs in the first few
cycles of energization, which can be
30 to 40 times the rated current.
Insulating transformer: Another term
for an isolating transformer.
Isolating transformer: A transformer

where the input (primary) windings
are not connected to the output
(secondary) windings (i.e., electrically
isolated).
Hottest-spot temperature: The highest

temperature inside the transformer
winding. Is greater than the measured
average temperature of the coil
conductors, when using the
resistance change method.
K-factor: A common industry term for

the amount of harmonics produced by
a given load. The larger the K-factor, the
more harmonics that are present. Also
used to define a transformers ability
to withstand the additional heating
generated by harmonic currents.
Impedance: The retarding forces

of current in an AC circuit; the
current-limiting characteristics
of a transformer. Symbol = Z
Inductance: In electrical circuits, the
opposition to a change in the flow of
electrical current. Symbol = L
Insulation materials: Those materials

used to insulate the transformers
electrical windings from each other
and ground.
Hi pot: A standard test on dry-type

transformers consisting of extra-high
potentials (voltages) connected to the
windings. Used to check the integrity
of insulation materials and clearances.
Hysteresis: The tendency of a

magnetic substance to persist in
any state of magnetization.
Hp: Horsepower. The energy required

to raise 33,000 pounds a distance of
one foot in one minute. 1 hp is equal
to 746 watts, or 0.746 kW.
HMT: Harmonic Mitigating

Transformer (HMT) is better able to
handle the harmonic currents present
in todays electrical power system.
thereby increasing system capacity,
reducing distortion throughout a
facility, help to minimize downtime
and mysterious maintenance on
equipment, and return the longevity
of equipment life through reduced
operational energy losses, thereby
running cooler.
ii
Insulation: Material with a high

electrical resistance.
Integral TVSS or SPD: Major Standard

Change for Surge Protective Devices
(formerly known as Transient Voltage
Surge Suppressors). The primary
safety standard for transient voltage
surge suppressors (TVSS) has undergone major revisions in the past three
years with mandatory compliance by
manufacturers required by September
29, 2009. Even the name of the
standard has changed from UL
Standard for Safety for Transient
Voltage Surge Suppressors, UL 1449
to UL Standard for Safety for Surge
Protective Devices, UL 1449. This
means that TVSS listed to the UL 1449
2nd Edition standard will no longer
be able to be manufactured after
September 29, 2009. All Surge
Protective Devices must be designed,
tested, manufactured and listed to
the UL 1449 3rd Edition standard after
this date.
High voltage windings: In a twowinding transformer, the winding

intended to have the greater
voltage. Usually marked with
H designations.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
kVA: Kilovolt-ampere. Designates

the output that a transformer can
deliver for a specified time at a
rated secondary voltage and rated
frequency without exceeding the
specified temperature rise. When
multiplied by the power factor, will
give kilowatts or kW.
18
1000 VA = 1 kVA
21
19
20

Glossary
November 2013
Sheet 19 004
i
ii
1
2
Lamination: Thin sheets of electrical

steel used to construct the core of a
transformer.
Percent IR (% resistance): Voltage drop

due to resistance at rated current in
percent of rated voltage.
Limiting temperature: The maximum

temperature at which a component
or material may be operated
continuously with no sacrifice
in normal life expectancy.
Percent IX (% reactance): Voltage drop

due to reactance at rated current in
percent of rated voltage.
Linear load: A load where the current

waveform conforms to that of the
applied voltage, or a load where
a change in current is directly
proportional to a change in
applied voltage.
Percent IZ (% impedance): Voltage

drop due to impedance at rated
current in percent of rated voltage.
Sound levels: All transformers make

some sound mainly due to the
vibration generated in its core by
alternating flux. All Eaton generalpurpose dry-type distribution
transformers are designed with
sound levels lower than NEMA ST-20
maximum levels.
Star connection: Same as a wye
connection.
Phase: Type of AC electrical circuit;

usually single-phase two- or three-wire,
or three-phase three- or four-wire.
Step-down transformer: A transformer

where the input voltage is greater than
the output voltage.
Polarity test: A standard test

on transformers to determine
instantaneous direction of the
voltages in the primary compared
to the secondary.
Step-up transformer: A transformer

where the input voltage is less than
the output voltage.
Live part: Any component consisting

of an electrically conductive material
that can be energized under conditions
of normal use.
Load losses: I2R losses in windings.

Also see conductor losses.
Primary taps: Taps added to the

primary (input) winding. See Tap.
Low voltage winding: In a twowinding transformer, the winding

intended to have the lesser voltage.
Usually marked with X designations.
Primary voltage: The input circuit

voltage.
Mid-tap: See center tap.
Ratio test: A standard test of

transformers to determine the ratio
of the input (primary) voltage to the
output (secondary) voltage.
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Noise level: The relative intensity of

sound, measured in decibels (dB).
NEMA Standard ST-20 outlines the
maximum allowable noise level for
Nonlinear load: A load where the
current waveform does not conform to
that of the applied voltage, or where a
change in current is not proportional
to a change in applied voltage.
Non-ventilated transformer:
A transformer where the core and
coil assembly is mounted inside
an enclosure with no openings for
ventilation. Also referred to as totally
enclosed non-ventilated (TENV).
No load losses: Losses in a
transformer that is excited at rated
voltage and frequency but that is
not supplying a load. No load losses
include core losses, dielectric losses
and conductor losses in the winding
due to the exciting current. Also
referred to as excitation losses.
Overload capability: Short-term
overload capacity is designed into
transformers as required by ANSI.
Continuous overload capacity is
not deliberately designed into a
transformer because the design
objective is to be within the allowed
winding temperature rise with
nameplate loading.
Power factor: The cosine of the phase

angle between a voltage and a current.
Reactance: The effect of inductive

and capacitive components of a
circuit producing other than unity
power factor.
Reactor: A single winding device with
an air or iron core that produces a
specific amount of inductive reactance
into a circuit. Normally used to reduce
of control current.
Regulation: Usually expressed as
the percent change in output voltage
when the load goes from full load to
no load.
Scott T connection: Connection for
three-phase transformers. Instead of
using three sets of coils for a threephase load, the transformer uses only
two sets of coils.
Series/multiple winding: A winding
consisting of two or more sections that
can be connected for series operation
or multiple (parallel) operation. Also
called series-parallel winding.
Short circuit: A low resistance
connection, usually accidental,
across part of a circuit, resulting in
excessive current flow.
T-T connection: See Scott T

connection.
Tap: A connection brought out of
a winding at some point between
its extremities, usually to permit
changing the voltage or current ratio.
Taps are typically used to compensate
for above or below rated input voltage,
in order to provide the rated output
voltage. See FCAN and FCBN.
Temperature class: The maximum
temperature that the insulation system
of a transformer can continuously
withstand. The common insulation
classes are 105, 150, 180 (also 185)
and 220.
Temperature rise: The increase over
ambient temperature of the windings
due to energizing and loading the
transformer.
Total losses: The sum of the no-load
losses and load losses.
Totally enclosed non-ventilated
enclosure: The core and coil assembly
is installed inside an enclosure
that has no ventilation to cool the
transformer. The transformer relies
on heat to radiate from the enclosure
for cooling.
Transformer tests: Per NEMA ST-20,
routine transformer production tests
are performed on each transformer
prior to shipment. These tests are:
Ratio tests on the rated voltage
connection; Polarity and Phase
Relation tests on the rated connection;
No-Load and Excitation Current tests
at rated voltage on the rated voltage
connection and Applied Potential and
Induced Potential tests. Special tests
include sound level testing.
21
CA08104001E

Glossary and The Energy Policy Act of 2005
November 2013
19.0-5
Sheet 19 005
Transverse mode: Electrical noise

or voltage disturbance that occurs
between phase and neutral, or from
spurious signals across metallic hot
line and the neutral conductor.
Turns ratio: The ratio of the number
of turns in the high voltage winding
to that in the low voltage winding.
Typical test data: Tests that were
performed on similar units that were
previously manufactured and tested.
UL (Underwriters Laboratories):
An independent safety testing
organization.
Universal taps: A combination of six
primary voltage taps consisting of 2 at
+2-1/2% FCAN and 4 at -2-1/2% FCBN.
The Energy Policy Act of 2005

The Energy Policy Act of 2005 and the
resulting Federal Law 10 CFR Part 431
require that efficiency of low voltage
dry-type distribution transformers
manufactured after January 1, 2007
shall be no less than the efficiency
levels listed in Table 4-2 of NEMA
Standard TP-1-2002. Transformers
specifically excluded for the scope of
this law include:
Watt: A unit of electrical power when

the current in a circuit is one ampere
and the voltage is one volt.
Wye connection: A standard threewire transformer connection with
similar ends of single-phase coils
connected together. The common
point forms the electrical neutral point
and may be grounded. Also referred to
as three-phase four-wire. To obtain the
line-to-neutral voltage, divide the line
voltage by 3 ( 1.732 ) .
Transformers rated less than 15 kVA

Transformers with a primary or
secondary voltage greater than
600V
Transformers rated for operation at
other than 60 Hz
Transformers with a tap range
greater than 20%
Motor drive isolation transformers
Rectifier transformers
Autotransformers
Transformers that supply
Uninterruptible Power Supplies
Special impedance transformers
Regulating transformers
Sealed and non-ventilated
transformers
Machine tool transformers
Welding transformers
Grounding transformers
Testing transformers
Repaired transformers
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 19 006
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
November 2013
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers

Overview
19.1-1
Sheet 19 007
General Description/Product Overview
Energy-Efficient
Transformers
K-Factor Rated Nonlinear

Transformers
Harmonic Mitigating
Transformers
i
ii
1
2
3
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efficient

Ventilated Transformer
Eatons family of energy-efficient

transformers meet NEMA TP-1
efficiency requirements and federal
energy efficiency laws mandated
by the Energy Policy Act of 2005.
Distribution transformers installed in
the United States are required to meet
these energy efficiency requirements.
Energy-efficient transformers are
especially designed to have low no
load (core) losses. Minimum efficiency
levels have been established for these
transformers when loaded at 35% of
their full load capacity. Available 600V.
Eaton offers a wide variety of energyefficient transformers, including 150C,
115C or 80C; general purpose or
K-factor rated; with aluminum or
copper windings. Eatons energyefficient transformers are manufactured with a NEMA 2 enclosure
as standard, and are suitable for
installation outdoors when a NEMA 3R
weathershield kit is installed. Eatons
energy-efficient transformers use a
220C insulation system with 150C
temperature rise as standard.
Eaton K-Factor nonlinear transformers

are specifically designed to withstand
the harmful overheating effects caused
by harmonics generated by nonlinear
(non-sinusoidal) loads. These loads
include computers, laser printers,
copiers and other office equipment,
as well as video monitors and other
electronic equipment. The core and
coils of K-Factor transformers are
especially designed to have reduced
induction levels, which result in a
reduction in stray losses. Oversized
(200% rated) neutrals and electrostatic
shielding are provided as standard on
K-Factor transformers. Eaton K-Factor
transformers are available in ratings
with a K-factor of 4, 13, 20, 30, 40 and
50. 600V-class single-phase models
are available to 167 kVA; three-phase
ratings to 1500 kVA. Eatons family of
K-Factor transformers are manufactured
with the same high-quality construction
features as our ventilated transformer
products, including NEMA 2 enclosures
and the 220C (Class R) insulation
system with 150C temperature rise
as standard.
Installation of energy-efficient
transformers may help facilities
earn points toward LEED certification
from the U.S. Green Building Council.
Refer to Page 19.1-11 for additional

information. Eaton K-Factorrated
transformers comply with NEMA
TP-1 standards.

information.
Harmonic Mitigating
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers (HMTs) are specially designed

transformers that treat a wide variety
of harmonics. Also called phaseshifting transformers, their low zerosequence impedance wye zig-zag
secondary windings prevent harmful
triplen (3rd, 9th, 15th, etc.) harmonic
currents from coupling into the primary
delta, where they can progress
upstream to the service entrance.
Multiple HMTs with a variety of phaseshift configurations can be applied in
a coordinated scheme to target 5th,
7th, and higher order harmonics at
the common bus feeding all of the
transformers. HMTs are ideally suited
for installations rich in harmonic loads,
such as educational facilities (K-12
and universities), government,
commercial, medical and call-center
applications. HMTs are manufactured
with the same high-quality features
as Eatons ventilated transformers,
including NEMA 2 enclosures and the
220C (Class R) insulation system with
150C temperature rise as standard.
Additionally, Eatons HMTs are
manufactured with a 200% neutral
and electrostatic shield as standard.
information.
HMTs are available in four
configurations:
Type NON (0 phase-shift)
Type THR (30)
Type POS (+15)
Type NEG (15)
Available in three-phase ratings to

500 kVA and 600V. All Eaton HMTs
meet or exceed NEMA TP-1 efficiency
levels, when operated under either
linear or nonlinear load profiles Eaton
HMT transformers comply with NEMA
TP-1 standards.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
19.1-2 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers

Overview
November 2013
Sheet 19 008
Motor Drive Isolation

Transformers
Hazardous Location
Transformers
MiniPower Center
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers are especially designed for

three-phase, SCR-controlled, variablespeed motor drive load profiles. Sized
by horsepower and common motor
voltages, motor drive isolation transformers are braced to withstand the
mechanical stresses associated with
AC adjustable frequency drives or
DC drives. Available in three-phase
ventilated designs to 1500 hp and
600V. Epoxy encapsulated three-phase
designs are available to 20 hp. Motor
drive isolation transformers are
manufactured using the same highquality construction features as our
ventilated transformer products,
Epoxy encapsulated models have
NEMA 3R enclosures and 115C
temperature rise as standard. All Eaton
three-phase motor drive isolation
transformers include a normally
open dry contact temperature sensor
installed in the coils. This sensor can
be connected to provide advance alert
or warning of a potential overheating
of the transformer.
information.
MiniPower Center
Hazardous Location Transformers
Eatons hazardous location transformers

are suitable for use in environments
classified by the National Electrical
Code (NEC) as Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C and D, as defined by
NEC Article 501, when installed in
compliance with NEC-recommended
procedures for dry-type transformers
rated 600V and below. As defined by
NEC Article 500, Class I, Division 2
locations include atmospheres that
may contain volatile or ignitable
concentrations of flammable liquids
or gas vapors, or locations adjacent to
such environments. Acetone, ammonia,
benzene, gasoline, methane, propane
and natural gas are examples of
such substances.
are of the encapsulated design, and are
available up to 600V ratings. Singlephase ratings 0.05 kVA through 25 kVA;
three-phase ratings to 75 kVA.
Hazardous location transformers use
a 180C insulation system with 115C
temperature rise.
information.
An Eaton minipower center replaces

three individual components:
Primary main breaker
Transformer
Distribution loadcenter.
The minipower center combines

all three into a single unit. All interconnecting wiring is performed at the
factory. Minipower centers are ideally
suited for applications where 120V
is required at a remote location.
Parking lots, workbenches and
temporary power on construction
sites are common applications for
minipower centers. Available in
single-phase and three-phase ratings
to 600V, 100A, and 30 kVA with
secondary loadcenters with
provisions for up to 24 single-pole
branch breakers. Available with
aluminum bus and plug-on branch
breakers, or with copper bus and
bolt-on branch breakers.
Minipower centers incorporate an
encapsulated transformer in their
construction, and are NEMA 3R
rated for outdoor applications.
information.
Read the text on Page 19.0-5 on

the Energy Policy Act of 2005 before
specifying these units. These units are
exempt from NEMA TP-1 requirements.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
November 2013

Overview
19.1-3
Sheet 19 009
Shielded Isolation
Transformers
Marine Duty
Transformers
Buck-Boost and Low Voltage

Lighting Transformers
i
ii
1
2
3
Shielded Isolation Ventilated Transformer
Marine-Duty Ventilated Transformer
Eatons shielded isolation transformers

are typically installed where sensitive
loads such as input circuits of
computers, medical equipment and
microprocessors require additional
protection from high-frequency
electrical disturbances. Shielded
isolation transformers include an
electrostatic shield (Faraday shield)
installed between the primary and
secondary windings. This shield is
grounded to the core of the transformer
to attenuate high-frequency electrical
disturbances in the load from being
transmitted to the line side of the
transformer. Shielded isolation
transformers are available in all
sizes and ratings of encapsulated and
ventilated transformers. By design,
all K Factor and harmonic mitigating
transformers include an electrostatic
shield as standard.
Eatons marine-duty transformers are

Type Approved by the American
Bureau of Shipping (ABS) for on-board
use in steel vessels (not for propulsion
systems or combat vessels). These
transformers are typically installed
below deck in electrical or mechanical
rooms where the ambient temperature
is greater than normal. Eatons marineduty transformers are especially
designed for operation in 50C
ambient locations. Marine-duty rated
transformers are manufactured
with copper windings as standard.
Encapsulated designs are available in
single-phase ratings 0.05 kVA through
37.5 kVA; three-phase designs 15 kVA
through 75 kVA. Ventilated designs are
available in single-phase ratings of
15 kVA through 100 kVA; three-phase
designs 15 kVA through 300 kVA.
Encapsulated and ventilated models
are available up to 600V ratings. The
standard temperature rise of Eatons
marine-duty transformers is 115C.

specifying these units.

specifying these units.
Buck-Boost Transformers
Eatons buck-boost transformers are

ideally suited to applications where
the available voltage needs to be
slightly increased (boosted) or
decreased (bucked) to be used in
a specific application. When buckboost transformers are wired as
autotransformers, they can be used
to accomplish this bucking or boosting
of voltage. Buck-boost transformers
are single-phase encapsulated
transformers and are available in
three voltage combinations;
120 x 24012/24
120 x 24016/32
240 x 48024/48
...and are available in 0.05 kVA through

7.5 kVA. These transformers can also
be used at their nameplate voltages
for applications such as low voltage
interior or landscape lighting.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Overview
November 2013
Sheet 19 010
CSL-3 Transformers
ii
1
2
3
4
5
CSL-3 Transformer
Eaton CSL-3 transformers have the

highest efficiencies and the lowest
losses of any type of unit. Copper or
aluminum windings are available in
15 kVA through 300 kVA ratings. Units
are available with temperature rise of
150C, 115C or 80C rise.
Eaton CSL-3 transformers are more

efficient than NEMA TP-1 by 34%38%.
Using CSL-3 units lowers the carbon

footprint of a facility and assists with
LEED certification.

information on CSL-3 transformers.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

General Purpose Ventilated Transformers
November 2013
19.1-5
Sheet 19 011
Description
General Construction
Features of General Purpose
(TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT
TP-1) Ventilated Transformers
Rated 600V and below
General Description
Eatons single-phase and three-phase
general purpose dry-type ventilated
transformers are of the two-winding
type, self-cooled, and are available in a
wide variety of primary and secondary
voltage combinations.
Eatons transformers are designed,
manufactured and tested in accordance
with all of the latest applicable ANSI,
NEMA and IEEE standards. All 600V
class ventilated transformers with
ratings through 1500 kVA are UL
listed and bear the UL label. Open
core and coil assemblies are UR
labeled products.
These transformers are designed for
continuous operation at rated kVA for
24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with
normal life expectancy as defined in
ANSI C57.96.
Insulation System
Core and Coil Assemblies
Industry standards classify insulation

systems and temperature rise as
shown below.
The transformer core is constructed

using high-grade, non-aging, silicon
steel with high magnetic permeability,
and low hysteresis and eddy current
losses. Maximum magnetic flux
densities are substantially below
the saturation point. The transformer
core volume allows for efficient
transformer operation at 10% above
the nominal tap voltage. The core
laminations are tightly clamped and
compressed. Coils are wound of
electrical grade aluminum or copper,
and are of continuous wound
construction. The BIL (basic impulse
level) for all 600V-class windings is
10 kV. The core and coil assembly is
installed on vibration-absorbing pads.
Table 19.1-1. Insulation System Classified

Ambient
Temperature
+ Winding
Rise
+ Hot
Spot
= Temp.
Class
40C
40C
40C
80C
115C
150C
30C
30C
30C
150C
185C
220C
The design life of transformers having

different insulation systems is the
same; the lower temperature systems
are designed for the same life as the
higher temperature systems.
Eatons ventilated transformers,
regardless of their temperature rise,
are manufactured using a 220C
insulation system. Required
performance is obtained without
exceeding the insulation system
rating at rated temperature rise in
a 40C maximum ambient, with an
average ambient temperature of 30C
over a 24-hour period.
All insulation materials used are
flame-retardant and do not support
combustion as defined in ASTM
Standard Test Method D635.
Ventilated transformers with wyeconnected secondaries have the

neutral brought out to a separate XO
terminal or bus bar.
The core and coil assembly is
grounded to the transformer enclosure
by means of a visible flexible copper
ground strap. The copper ground
strap is sized per the NEC to be a
grounding conductor.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Ventilated Transformers
November 2013
Sheet 19 012
Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Taps
Primary taps are available on most
Eaton ventilated transformers to
allow compensation for source
voltage variations.
Winding Terminations
Primary and secondary windings are
terminated in the wiring compartment.
Encapsulated units have copper leads
or stabs brought out for connections.
Ventilated transformers have leads
brought out to aluminum or copper
pads that are pre-drilled to accept
Cu/Al lugs. Aluminum-wound transformers have aluminum pads; copperwound transformers have copper
pads. Lugs are not supplied with Eaton
transformers; however, lug kits are
available as a field-installed accessory.
Eaton recommends external cables be
rated 90C (sized at 75C ampacity) for
encapsulated designs and rated 75C
for ventilated designs.
Series-Multiple Windings
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Series-multiple windings consist of

two similar coils in each winding that
can be connected in series or parallel
(multiple). Transformers with seriesmultiple windings are designated with
an x or a / between the voltage
ratings, such as voltages of 240 x 480
or 120/240. If the series-multiple
winding is designated by an x,
the winding can be connected only
in series or parallel. With a /
designation, a mid-point also becomes
available in addition to the series or
parallel connection. As an example, a
240 x 480 winding can be connected
for either 240 (parallel) or 480 (series).
A 120/240 winding can be connected
for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series),
or 240 with a 120 mid-point.
Enclosures
The transformer enclosure is made of
heavy-gauge steel and is finished using
a continuous process of degreasing,
cleaning and phosphatizing, followed
by electrostatic deposition of a thermosetting polyester powder coating and
subsequent baking. The coating color
is ANSI 61 and is UL recognized for
outdoor use. In compliance with
NEMA ST-20, Eatons ventilated
transformers are designed such that
the maximum temperature on the top
of the enclosure does not exceed 50C
rise above the ambient temperature.
For ventilated transformers, the enclosure construction is ventilated, dripproof, NEMA 2, with lifting provisions.
All ventilation openings are protected
against falling dirt. Proper installation
of weathershields on ventilated transformers makes the enclosure NEMA
3R rated and suitable for outdoor use.
To ensure proper ventilation and cooling of the transformer, follow manufacturers recommended clearances
around ventilation openings.
Installation Clearances
Eatons transformers should be
installed with a minimum of 6 inches
of clearance around the transformer
enclosure to prevent accidental contact
with flammable or combustible materials. Most Eaton ventilated transformers require a minimum of 6 inches of
clearance in front and in back of the
transformer to allow for proper airflow
through the transformer. Care should
be taken to avoid restricting the
airflow through the bottom of the
transformer.
Transformers should be located in
areas not accessible to the public.
Sound Levels
All transformers emit some audible
sound due mainly to the vibration
generated in their core by alternating
flux. NEMA ST-20 defines the
maximum average sound levels
for transformers.
Table 19.1-2. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01
Maximum Audible Sound Levels for 600V
Class Transformers (dB 40)
kVA
Ventilated
Transformers
Encapsulated
Transformers
09
1050
51150
151300
40
45
50
55
45
50
55
57
301500
501700
7011000
10011500
60
62
64
65
All Eaton ventilated transformers are

designed to have audible sound levels
lower than those required by NEMA
ST-20. However, consideration should
be given to the specific location of a
transformer and its installation to
minimize the potential for sound
transmission to surrounding
structures and sound reflection.
Installation and ambient conditions
at a specific location can result in fieldmeasured audible sound levels as
much as 15 dBA greater than those
levels measured in a sound-proof
chamber. The following installation
methods should be considered:
1. If possible, mount the transformer
away from corners of walls or
ceilings. For installations that
must be near a corner, use
sound-absorbing materials on
the walls and ceiling if necessary
to eliminate reflection.
2. Provide a solid foundation for
mounting the transformer and
use vibration dampening mounts
if not already provided in the
transformer. Eatons ventilated
transformers contain a built-in
vibration dampening system to
minimize and isolate sound
transmission. However,
supplemental vibration
dampening mounts installed
between the floor and the
transformer may provide
additional sound dampening.
3. Make electrical connections to the
transformer using flexible conduit.
4. Locate the transformer in an
area where audible sound is not
offensive to building inhabitants.
5. If a transformer is going to be
installed in a location where
the audible sound could be
objectionable, consider installing
a transformer specifically
designed to have reduced
sound levels. Eaton offers
many transformers with a
sound reduction up to 5 dB
below NEMA ST-20 limits.
20
21
CA08104001E

Ventilated Transformers
November 2013
19.1-7
Sheet 19 013
Description
Applicable Standards
600V-class ventilated transformers
are manufactured per the following
standards:
UL 1561
NEMA ST-20
ANSI C57.12.01
IEC 60726 for CE-marked ventilated
models

Standard Production Tests

The following production tests are
performed as standard on all Eaton
transformers, prior to shipment:
1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage
connection and at all tap
connections.
2. Polarity and phase relation tests
on the rated voltage connection.
3. Applied potential tests.
4. Induced potential tests.
5. No-load and excitation current at
rated voltage on the rated voltage
connection.
Operation
Eatons ventilated transformers are
designed for continuous operation at
rated kVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year, with normal life expectancy as
defined in ANSI C57.96.
Short-term overload capacity is
designed into transformers, as required
by ANSI. Ventilated transformers will
deliver 200% of nameplate load for
30 minutes; 150% of nameplate load
for 1 hour; and 125% of nameplate load
for 4 hours without being damaged,
provided that a constant 50% load
precedes and follows the overload.
Refer to ANSI C57.96-01.250 for
additional limitations.
and overloaded by 15% of its nameplate kVA without compromising

the normal life of the transformer.
Likewise, an 80C rise transformer
operated as a 150C rise transformer
is capable of a constant 30% overload
without compromising the normal life
expectancy of the transformer.
However, because Eatons ventilated

transformers are manufactured using a
220C insulation system, 115C and
80C low temperature rise transformers
can be operated as 150C rise transformers. The excess thermal capacity
of these low temperature rise transformers allows a 115C transformer to
be operated as a 150C rise transformer
Rated Line Voltage

120
208
240
277
480
600
2400
4160
4800
3
4
1
1.5
2
3
8.3
12.5
16.7
25.0
4.8
7.2
9.6
14.4
4.2
6.3
8.3
12.5
3.6
5.4
7.2
10.8
2.1
3.1
4.2
6.3
1.7
2.5
3.3
5.0
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.3
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
5
7.5
10
15
41.7
62.5
83.3
125.0
24.0
36.6
48.1
72.1
20.8
31.3
41.7
62.5
18.0
27.1
36.1
54.2
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
8.3
12.5
16.7
25.0
2.1
3.1
4.2
6.3
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.6
1.0
1.6
2.1
3.1
25
37.5
50
75
208.3
312.5
416.7
625.0
120.2
180.3
240.4
360.6
104.2
156.3
208.3
312.5
90.3
135.4
180.5
270.8
52.1
78.1
104.2
156.3
41.7
62.5
83.3
125.0
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
6.0
9.0
12.0
18.0
5.2
7.8
10.4
15.6
833.3
1391.7
2083.3
2775.0
4166.7
480.8
802.9
1201.9
1601.0
2403.8
416.7
695.8
1041.7
1387.5
2083.3
361.0
602.9
902.5
1202.2
1805.1
208.3
347.9
520.8
693.8
1041.7
166.7
278.3
416.7
555.0
833.3
41.7
69.6
104.2
138.8
208.3
24.0
40.1
60.1
80.0
120.2
20.8
34.8
52.1
69.4
104.2
100
167
250
333
500
ii
Table 19.1-3. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Single-Phase Transformers
kVA
Rating
5
6
7
8
9
Note: Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/Line Voltage.
Table 19.1-4. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Three-Phase Transformers
kVA
Rating
10
Rated Line Voltage

208
240
480
600
2400
4160
4800
3
6
9
8.3
16.7
25.0
7.2
14.4
21.6
3.6
7.2
10.8
2.9
5.8
8.7
0.7
1.4
2.2
0.4
0.8
1.3
0.4
0.7
1.1
11
15
30
45
41.6
83.3
125.0
36.1
72.2
108.4
18.0
36.1
54.2
14.4
28.9
43.3
3.6
7.2
10.9
2.1
4.2
6.3
1.8
3.6
5.4
12
75
112.5
150
208.2
312.5
416.3
180.4
271.6
360.8
90.2
135.3
180.4
72.2
108.2
144.3
18.0
27.1
36.1
10.4
15.6
20.8
9.0
13.5
18.0
13
225
300
500
625.0
832.7
1387.8
541.9
721.7
1202.8
270.7
360.8
601.4
216.5
288.7
481.1
54.2
72.2
120.3
31.3
41.6
69.4
27.1
36.1
60.1
14
750
1000
2081.9
2775.8
1804.3
2405.7
902.1
1202.9
721.7
962.3
180.4
240.6
104.1
138.8
90.2
120.3
15
Note: Three-Phase Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/(Line Voltage x 1.732).
16
17
18
19
Note: Continuous overload capacity is not

deliberately designed into transformers.
The design objective is to be within the
allowable winding temperature rise at
nameplate full load capacity.
20
21
CA08104001E

General Purpose Encapsulated Transformers
November 2013
Sheet 19 014
Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
General Construction
Features of General Purpose
Encapsulated Transformers
Rated 600V and Below
Insulation Systems
Core and Coil Assemblies
Industry standards classify insulation

systems and temperature rise as
shown below.
The transformer core is constructed

using high-grade, non-aging, silicon
steel with high-magnetic permeability,
and low hysteresis and eddy current
losses. Maximum magnetic flux
densities are substantially below
the saturation point. The transformer
core volume allows for efficient
transformer operation at 10% above
the nominal tap voltage. The core
laminations are tightly clamped
and compressed. Coils are wound
of electrical grade aluminum or
copper, and are of continuous wound
construction. The BIL (basic impulse
level) for all 600V-class windings
is 10 kV. In encapsulated transformers,
the core and coil assembly is
completely encased in a proportioned
mixture of resin or epoxy, and
aggregate to provide a moistureproof, shock-resistant seal. The core
and coil encapsulation system is
designed to minimize the audible
sound level.
Table 19.1-5. Insulation System Classification
General Description
Ambient
Temperature
Eatons single-phase and three-phase

general purpose encapsulated dry-type
transformers are of the two-winding
type, self-cooled, and are available in a
wide variety of primary and secondary
voltage combinations.
+
Winding
Rise
+
Hot
Spot
=
Temp.
Class
40C
40C
25C
40C
40C
55C
80C
135C
115C
150C
10C
30C
20C
30C
30C
105C
150C
180C
185C
220C
Eatons transformers are designed,

manufactured and tested in accordance
with all of the latest applicable ANSI,
NEMA and IEEE standards. All 600Vclass encapsulated transformers with
ratings through 75 kVA are UL listed
and CSA certified, and bear the UL and
CSA labels.
These transformers are designed for
continuous operation at rated kVA for
24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with
normal life expectancy as defined in
ANSI C57.96.
The design life of transformers having

different insulation systems is the
same; the lower temperature systems
are designed for the same life as
the higher temperature systems.
Eatons encapsulated transformers are
manufactured using a 180C insulation
system. Required performance is
obtained without exceeding the
insulation system rating at rated
temperature rise in a 40C maximum
ambient, with an average ambient
temperature of 30C over a 24-hour
period.
All insulation materials are flameretardant and do not support
combustion as defined in ASTM
Standard Test Method D635.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
19.1-9
Sheet 19 015
Description
Taps
Enclosures
Primary taps are available on many

Eaton encapsulated transformers
to allow compensation for source
voltage variations.
The transformer enclosure is made of

heavy-gauge steel and is finished using
a continuous process of degreasing,
cleaning and phosphatizing, followed
by electrostatic deposition of a thermosetting polyester powder coating and
subsequent baking. The coating color
is ANSI 61 and is UL recognized for
outdoor use. In compliance with
NEMA ST-20, Eatons transformers
are designed such that the maximum
temperature on the top of the enclosure
does not exceed 50C rise above the
ambient temperature.
Winding Terminations
Primary and secondary windings are
terminated in the wiring compartment.
Encapsulated units have copper leads
or stabs brought out for connections.
Ventilated transformers have leads
brought out to aluminum or copper
pads that are pre-drilled to accept
Cu/Al lugs. Aluminum-wound transformers have aluminum pads; copperwound transformers have copper
pads. Lugs are not supplied with
Eatons transformers; however, lug
kits are available as a field-installed
accessory. Eaton recommends external cables be rated 90C (sized at 75C
ampacity) for encapsulated designs
and rated 75C for ventilated designs.
Series-Multiple Windings
Series-multiple windings consist
of two similar coils in each winding
that can be connected in series or
parallel (multiple). Transformers with
series-multiple windings are designated with an x or a / between the
voltage ratings, such as voltages of
240 x 480 or 120/240. If the seriesmultiple winding is designated by an
x, the winding can be connected
only in series or parallel. With a /
designation, a mid-point also becomes
available in addition to the series or
parallel connection. As an example, a
240 x 480 winding can be connected
for either 240 (parallel) or 480 (series).
A 120/240 winding can be connected
for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series),
or 240 with a 120 mid-point.
For encapsulated transformers, the

enclosure construction is totallyenclosed, non-ventilated NEMA 3R,
with lifting provisions.
Wall mounting brackets are provided
on many Eaton encapsulated transformers. These mounting brackets
are designed to provide the proper
spacing between the mounting surface
and the transformer enclosure.
To ensure proper ventilation and
cooling of the transformer, follow
manufacturers recommended
clearances around encapsulated
transformers.
Sound Levels
All transformers emit some audible
sound due mainly to the vibration generated in their core by alternating flux.
NEMA ST-20 defines the maximum
average sound levels for ventilated
transformers, and IEEE C57.12.01
defines the maximum average sound
level for encapsulated transformers.
Table 19.1-6. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01
Maximum Audible Sound Levels for 600V
Class Transformers (dB 40)
kVA
Ventilated
Transformers
Encapsulated
Transformers
09
1050
51150
151300
40
45
50
55
45
50
55
57
301500
501700
7011000
10011500
60
62
64
65
All Eaton encapsulated transformers

are designed to have audible sound
levels lower than those required by
IEEE C57.12.01. However, consideration should be given to the specific
location of a transformer and its
installation to minimize the potential
for sound transmission to surrounding
structures and sound reflection.
Installation and ambient conditions at
a specific location can result in fieldmeasured audible sound levels as
much as 15 dBA greater than those
levels measured in a sound-proof
chamber. The following installation
methods should be considered:
1. If possible, mount the transformer
away from corners of walls or
ceilings. For installations that
must be near a corner, use soundabsorbing materials on the
walls and ceiling if necessary
to eliminate reflection.
2. Provide a solid foundation for
mounting the transformer and
use vibration-dampening mounts
if not already provided in the
transformer. Eatons encapsulated
transformers use a special
encapsulation system to minimize
and isolate sound transmission.
However, supplemental vibration
dampening mounts installed
between the floor and the
transformer may provide for
3. Make electrical connections to the
transformer using flexible conduit.
4. Locate the transformer in an
area where audible sound is not
offensive to building inhabitants.
5. If a transformer is going to be
installed in a location where the
audible sound could be objectionable, consider installing a transformer specifically designed to
have reduced sound levels. Eaton
offers many transformers with a
sound reduction up to 5 dB below
IEEE C57.12.01 limits.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 19 016
Description
i
ii
Applicable Standards
600V-class encapsulated transformers
are manufactured per the following
standards:
1
2
3
4
UL 5085 up to 15 kVA
UL 1561 15 kVA and larger
NEMA ST-20
ANSI C57.12.01
IEEE C57.12.01
IEC 61558 for single-phase
CE-marked models
CSA C22.2 No. 47-M90
Table 19.1-7. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Single-Phase Transformers
kVA
Rating
Rated Line Voltage

120
208
240
277
480
600
2400
4160
4800
1
1.5
2
3
8.3
12.5
16.7
25.0
4.8
7.2
9.6
14.4
4.2
6.3
8.3
12.5
3.6
5.4
7.2
10.8
2.1
3.1
4.2
6.3
1.7
2.5
3.3
5.0
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.3
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.2
0.3
0.4
06
5
7.5
10
15
41.7
62.5
83.3
125.0
24.0
36.6
48.1
72.1
20.8
31.3
41.7
62.5
18.0
27.1
36.1
54.2
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
8.3
12.5
16.7
25.0
2.1
3.1
4.2
6.3
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.6
1.0
1.6
2.1
3.1
25
37.5
50
75
208.3
312.5
416.7
625.0
120.2
180.3
240.4
360.6
104.2
156.3
208.3
312.5
90.3
135.4
180.5
270.8
52.1
78.1
104.2
156.3
41.7
62.5
83.3
125.0
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
6.0
9.0
12.0
18.0
5.2
7.8
10.4
15.6
833.3
1391.7
2083.3
2775.0
4166.7
480.8
802.9
1201.9
1601.0
2403.8
416.7
695.8
1041.7
1387.5
2083.3
361.0
602.9
902.5
1202.2
1805.1
208.3
347.9
520.8
693.8
1041.7
166.7
278.3
416.7
555.0
833.3
41.7
69.6
104.2
138.8
208.3
24.0
40.1
60.1
80.0
120.2
20.8
34.8
52.1
69.4
104.2
100
167
250
333
500
Note: Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/Line Voltage.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Standard Production Tests

The following production tests are
performed as standard on all Eaton
transformers, prior to shipment:
1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage
connection and at all tap connections.
2. Polarity and phase relation tests
on the rated voltage connection.
3. Applied potential tests.
4. Induced potential tests.
5. No-load and excitation current at
rated voltage on the rated voltage
connection.
Table 19.1-8. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Three-Phase Transformers
kVA
Rating
Rated Line Voltage

2400
4160
4800
3
6
9
208
8.3
16.7
25.0
240
7.2
14.4
21.6
480
3.6
7.2
10.8
600
2.9
5.8
8.7
0.7
1.4
2.2
0.4
0.8
1.3
0.4
0.7
1.1
15
30
45
41.6
83.3
125.0
36.1
72.2
108.4
18.0
36.1
54.2
14.4
28.9
43.3
3.6
7.2
10.9
2.1
4.2
6.3
1.8
3.6
5.4
75
112.5
150
208.2
312.5
416.3
180.4
271.6
360.8
90.2
135.3
180.4
72.2
108.2
144.3
18.0
27.1
36.1
10.4
15.6
20.8
9.0
13.5
18.0
225
300
500
625.0
832.7
1387.8
541.9
721.7
1202.8
270.7
360.8
601.4
216.5
288.7
481.1
54.2
72.2
120.3
31.3
41.6
69.4
27.1
36.1
60.1
750
1000
2081.9
2775.8
1804.3
2405.7
902.1
1202.9
721.7
962.3
180.4
240.6
104.1
138.8
90.2
120.3
Note: Three-Phase Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/(Line Voltage x 1.732).
Operation
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Eatons encapsulated transformers are

designed for continuous operation at
rated kVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year, with normal life expectancy as
defined in ANSI C57.96.
Short-term overload capacity is
designed into transformers, as required
by ANSI. Encapsulated transformers
will deliver 200% of nameplate load for
30 minutes; 150% of nameplate load
for 1 hour; and 125% of nameplate load
for 4 hours without being damaged,
provided that a constant 50% load
precedes and follows the overload.
Refer to ANSI C57.96-01.250 for
additional limitations.
Note: Continuous overload capacity is not
deliberately designed into transformers
because the design objective is to be within
the allowable winding temperature rise at
nameplate full load capacity.
CA08104001E
November 2013

K-Factor Rated Nonlinear Transformers
19.1-11
Sheet 19 017
Description
K-Factor Rated Nonlinear

Transformers Rated 600V
and Below
Applications
Eaton K-Factor transformers are
specifically designed to withstand the
harmful overheating effects caused by
harmonics generated by nonlinear
(non-sinusoidal) loads. These loads
include computers, laser printers,
copiers and other office equipment,
as well as video monitors and other
electronic equipment. Eaton K-Factor
transformers are not simply over-sized
transformers. The core and coils of
our K-Factor transformers are specially
designed to have reduced induction
levels, which results in a reduction in
stray losses. Oversized (200% rated)
neutrals and electrostatic shielding are
typical features found in our K-Factor
transformers. Eaton K-Factor transformers are manufactured with the
same high-quality construction features
as our other ventilated transformer
products, including NEMA 2 enclosures
as standard.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eaton K-Factor transformers are
available in a wide range of ratings
to meet specific voltage conversion
requirements. Eaton offers transformers
with K-factor ratings of 4, 13, 20, 30,
40 and 50.
kVA Capacity
Single-phase ventilated designs are
available in ratings from 15 kVA
through 167 kVA; three-phase ratings
15 kVA through 1500 kVA.
Insulation System and Temperature Rise
K = (Ih)2(h)2
Eatons ventilated transformers should

be installed with a minimum of
6.00 inches of clearance around the
transformer enclosure to prevent
accidental contact with flammable or
combustible materials. Most Eaton
ventilated transformers require a
minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance
in front and in back of the transformer
to allow for proper airflow through the
transformer. Care should be taken to
avoid restricting the airflow through
the bottom of the transformer. Transformers should be located in areas not
accessible to the public.
Ih = Percent Current at Harmonic h
Wiring Compartment
Eatons ventilated transformers have
wiring compartments sized to comply
with NEMA and NEC standards.
The K-factor
A common industry term for the
amount of harmonics produced by a
given load is the K-factor. The larger
the K-factor, the more harmonics are
present. Linear loads, for example,
have a K-factor of 1. Transformers may
carry a K-factor rating to define the
transformers ability to withstand
the additional heating generated
by harmonic currents.
Calculating the K-factor

All nonlinear waveforms can be
broken down mathematically into
a fundamental frequency and its
harmonics. IEEE C57.110 establishes
a direct relationship between these
harmonics and transformer heating.
Underwriters Laboratories has
established a similar relationship, the
K-factor, which is derived by summing
the square of the percentage current at
a given harmonic level multiplied by
the square of the harmonic order.
Ventilated transformers are manufactured using a 220C insulation system

with 150C temperature rise as standard. Low temperature rise designs
(115C and 80C temperature rise)
are available as options.
h = Harmonic Order, i.e., 3rd, 5th, 7th

For example, a load that is 90% of the
fundamental, 30% of the third harmonic,
and 20% of the fifth harmonic would
yield (.9)2(1)2 + (.3)2(3)2 + (.2)2(5)2 or
a K-factor of 2.62. This load would
require a transformer with a K-factor
rating of 4.
i
ii
1
2
Transformers that carry a K-factor

rating define the transformers ability to
withstand a given harmonic load while
operating within the transformers
insulation class.
An analysis of harmonic loads and

a calculation of the K-factor must be
made to properly apply transformers
in any building or facility. Note that
the calculated K-factor is not constant
since nonlinear loads change
throughout the day as equipment and
lighting is turned off and on. These
harmonic loads also change over the
life of the building or facility as equipment is added or removed.
Harmonic Currents
Harmonic currents are found in nonlinear loads. These currents are generated
by various types of equipment including
switching mode power supplies that
abruptly switch current on and off during
each line cycle. Switching mode power
supplies or diode capacitor power
supplies convert AC line voltage to low
voltage DC. This process accomplished
by charging capacitors during each line
cycle with narrow pulses of current that
are time-coincident with line voltage
peaks. Examples of this equipment
include electronic ballasts for fluorescent
lighting, personal computers, printers,
fax machines, electronic and medical
test equipment uninterruptible power
supplies and solid-state motor drives.
Note: Nonlinear is synonymous with the
term non-sinusoidal.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Frequency
Most ventilated transformers are
designed to operate in 60 Hz systems.
50/60 Hz designs are available as an
option. Eatons ventilated transformers
can be designed to operate at a variety
of frequencies.
18
19
Winding Material
Aluminum conductor and terminations
are provided as standard on ventilated
transformers. Copper winding conductors and terminations are available as
an option.
CA08104001E
20
Figure 19.1-1. Harmonic Currents Found in Nonlinear Loads Cause Wave Shape Distortion and
Create Added Stresses on Transformers
21

Harmonic Mitigating Transformers
November 2013
Sheet 19 018
Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Harmonic Mitigating
and Below
kVA Capacity
Application Considerations
Three-phase ratings 15 kVA through

500 kVA.
Eaton offers harmonic mitigating

transformers with four different phaseshift options:
Applications
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers are manufactured using a

temperature rise as standard. Low
temperature rise designs (115C and
80C temperature rise) are available as
options.
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers (HMTs) are specially designed

transformers that treat a wide variety
of harmonics. Also called phaseshifting transformers, their low zerosequence impedance wye zig-zag
secondary windings prevent harmful
triplen (3rd, 9th, 15th, etc.) harmonic
currents from coupling into the primary delta, where they can progress
upstream to the service entrance.
Multiple HMTs with a variety of phaseshift configurations can be applied in
a coordinated scheme to target 5th,
7th and higher-order harmonics at the
common bus feeding all of the transformers. HMTs are ideally suited for
installations rich in harmonic loads,
such as educational facilities (K12 and
universities), government, commercial,
medical and call-center applications.
HMTs are manufactured with the
same high-quality features as Eatons
ventilated transformers, including
NEMA 2 enclosures and the 220C
(Class R) insulation system with
Additionally, Eatons HMTs are
manufactured with a 200% neutral
and electrostatic shield as standard.
Eatons harmonic mitigating ventilated
transformers are designed primarily
for indoor installations. Ventilated
transformers have NEMA 2 enclosures
as standard, and are suitable for
installation outdoors when NEMA 3R
weathershield kits are installed.
Ventilated transformers are typically
floor-mounted on an elevated
housekeeping pad. When properly
supported, they are also suitable for
wall mounting or trapeze-mounting
from ceilings.
Frequency
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers are designed to operate in
60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz designs are
available as an option. The transformers
can be designed to operate at a variety
of frequencies.
Winding Material
Copper conductor and terminations
are provided as standard on harmonic
mitigating transformers. Aluminum
winding conductors and terminations
are available as an option.
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers should be installed with a
minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance
around the transformer enclosure
to prevent accidental contact with
flammable or combustible materials.
Most Eaton ventilated transformers
require a minimum of 6.00 inches of
clearance in front and in back of the
transformer to allow for proper airflow
through the transformer. Care should
be taken to avoid restricting the
airflow through the bottom of the
transformer.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons ventilated transformers have
with NEMA and NEC standards.
Technical Data
Thermal Sensors
Available Ratings
Harmonic mitigating transformers are

available with warning and/or alarm
thermal sensors imbedded in their coils.
Thermal sensors are normally open dry
contacts that can be wired to provide
a signal to remote locations to indicate
a potential heating problem within the
transformer coils. Contacts are rated
180C (warning) and 200C (alarm).
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers are available in a wide range

of ratings to meet specific voltage
conversion requirements. Eatons
HMTs accept a three-phase three-wire
input and have a three-phase four-wire
(phases and neutral) output.
20
Type NON (0 phase-shift)

Type POS (+15 phase-shift)
Type NEG (15 phase-shift)
Type THR (30 phase-shift)
To select the proper HMT, the

nonlinear load profile of a particular
application must be known.
Type NON (0) HMTs are ideally
suited for treating 3rd and other triplen
harmonics that are the signature of
single-phase nonlinear loads. This is
the most common application encountered. Type NON HMTs use electromagnetic flux cancellation to cancel
triplen harmonics. There, harmonics
are treated in the secondary windings
and prevented from coupling into the
primary delta windings, where they
may be transmitted upstream to the
service entrance location. Type NON
HMTs can be deployed singly to treat
triplen harmonics. As with most other
harmonic mitigating methods, the
closer the HMT can be installed to the
load, the greater the benefit.
Type POS (+15) and Type NEG (15)
harmonic mitigating transformers are
typically used together in coordinated
pairs to treat 5th, 7th and other
harmonics that are generated by threephase nonlinear loads. 5th, 7th and
higher order harmonics pass through
the harmonic mitigating transformers,
to a point of common coupling; the
first common electrical point that is
shared by the HMTs. At this common
point, balanced portions of the 5th,
7th, etc., harmonic currents are
canceled and prevented from flowing
further upstream in the distribution
system. Type POS and Type NEG
HMTs have nearly identical electrical
characteristics, including zerosequence and positive-sequence
impedance and reactance. The more
closely matched the coordinated pairs
of transformers, the more thorough
the harmonic cancellation.
Coordinated pairs of Type NON and
Type THR transformers, as well as
coordinated pairs of Type NON, Type
THR, Type POS and Type NEG HMTs
provide treatment of 3rd and other
triplen harmonics within their
secondary windings. This cancellation
is achieved by virtue of their wye
zig-zag winding configuration.
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
19.1-13
Sheet 19 019
Description

As our world becomes even more
dependent on electrical and electronic
equipment, there is an increased
likelihood that operations will
experience the negative effects of
harmonic distortion. The productivity
and efficiency gains achieved from
increasingly sophisticated pieces
of equipment have a drawback:
increased harmonic distortion in the
What are Harmonics?

The difficult thing about harmonic
distortion is determining the source.
Once this task has been completed,
the solution can be easy. Harmonic
mitigating transformers (HMTs) are
one of the many possible solutions
to help eliminate these harmful
harmonics.
60 Hz
fundamental
Figure 19.1-2. Typical Waveform of Single-Phase Devices
As shown in Figures 19.1-3 and 19.1-4,

the waveform created by the nonlinear
source is actually the mathematical
sum of several sine waves, each with
a different frequency and magnitude.
Each of these individual waveforms is
called a harmonic, and is identified by
its frequency relative to the fundamental
frequency, 60 Hz. In other words, each
individual harmonic is identified by a
number, which is the number of complete cycles the specific harmonic goes
through in a single 60 Hz cycle.
In Figure 19.1-4, the fundamental
frequency is 60 Hz. The fundamental
frequency is assigned the harmonic
number of 1, and is the benchmark for
all other harmonic numbering. The
fundamental, 60 Hz sine wave completes
60 full cycles in one second. The 3rd
harmonic completes three full cycles
in the time it takes the fundamental to
complete just one cycle, or 180 cycles
per second. Likewise, the 5th harmonic
completes five full cycles in the time
it takes the fundamental harmonic to
complete a single cycle, which equates
to 300 cycles per second. Odd multiples
of the 3rd harmonic (3rd, 9th,15th,
21st, etc.) are commonly referred to
as triplen harmonics.
Figure 19.1-3. Composite Waveform
5th
An understanding of how harmonics

are generated and what harmonics
really are is necessary in order to
understand how HMTs can provide
harmonic mitigation. Electronic equipment requires DC voltage to operate.
Rectifiers and capacitors are used to
convert AC voltage to DC voltage
within the equipment. These devices
are frequently referred to as switch
mode power supplies. As the capacitors charge and discharge during this
conversion, the capacitor draws current in pulses, not at a continuous rate.
This irregular current demand, as
depicted in Figure 19.1-2, distorts the
linear 60 Hz sine wave. As a result, these
types of loads are commonly referred
to as non-sinusoidal, or nonlinear.
7th
3rd
fundamental
Figure 19.1-4. Components of a Nonlinear Waveform
The proliferation of electronic equipment

(including computers, fax machines,
copiers, electronic ballasts, office
equipment, cash registers, slot machines,
electronic monitoring devices, video
games, medical diagnostic equipment
and the like) is what makes single-phase
devices the most common source of
harmonics. These devices generate a typical waveform shown in Figure 19.1-2,
and have a harmonic profile as shown
in Table 19.1-9. As one can see, the predominant harmonic is the 3rd harmonic.
Three-phase, nonlinear loads such as
drives, on the other hand, are typically
rich in 5th and 7th harmonics.
CA08104001E
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

November 2013
Sheet 19 020
Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
What Problems do
Harmonics Cause?
The distorted current waveform that is
created by nonlinear loads can cause
many problems in an electrical distribution system. Depending upon the
severity of the harmonic distortion,
the negative effects of harmonics may
be tolerable, and the installation of
a K-factorrated transformer may be
an adequate solution. K-factorrated
transformers do not provide any
harmonic treatment. Rather, they are
designed to withstand the destructive
effects of the additional heat generated by harmonic currents in the
transformers windings.
In many instances, the harmful effects
of harmonics are too severe, and
simply tolerating them is not an
acceptable option. Harmonic currents
can cause excessive heating in distribution transformers. This additional
heat not only reduces the life expectancy of a transformer, it also reduces
the usable capacity of the transformer.
Another side effect is that the audible
noise of a transformer may be amplified when installed in a system that
contains harmonics.
An important characteristic of
harmonics is that they are transmitted
upstream from the load, to the transformers secondary windings, through
the primary windings of the transformer, back to the service entrance,
and eventually to the utility lines.
Harmonic currents flowing upstream

from nonlinear loads, through the
system impedance of cables and
transformers, create harmonic voltage
distortion. When linear loads, like
motors, are subjected to harmonic
voltage distortion, they will draw a
nonlinear harmonic current. As with
distribution transformers, harmonic
currents cause increased heating,
due to iron and copper losses, in
motors and generators. This increased
heating can reduce the life of the
motor, as well as the motors efficiency. In electrical cables, harmonic
currents may also create increased
heating, which can lead to premature
aging of the electrical insulation.
Nuisance tripping of the circuit breakers protecting the cable may also
occur. Communications equipment
and data processing equipment are
especially susceptible to the harmful
effects of harmonics because they rely
on a nearly perfect sinusoidal input.
This equipment may malfunction, or
even fail, when installed in systems
that are rich in harmonics.
The costs associated with downtime
resulting from the malfunction or failure of electrical or electronic equipment can be staggering. These costs
can easily surpass thousands, if not
millions, of dollars per hour in lost
production or lost productivity. In
addition to the well-defined costs
associated with the most catastrophic
of harmonic effects, there are many
less quantitative costs that are often
overlooked when evaluating the need
for harmonic mitigation. The increased
heating caused by harmonics in
cables, motors and transformers
increases the cooling requirements
in air-conditioned areas. The same
increases in heating result in increased
maintenance costs and more frequent
equipment replacement in order to
avoid failures that could shut down
a building for a period of time.
What do HMTs do?

HMTs are an economical solution in
the battle against the harmful effects
of harmonics. HMTs are passive
devices: they dont have any moving
parts and they are typically energized
24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365
days a year. This means that they are
always on the job treating harmonics, regardless of the level of load they
are serving at a given point in time.
Whenever the HMT is energized, it will
provide harmonic treatment.
Harmonic mitigating transformers are
commonly referred to as phase-shifting transformers. The HMT offering
from Eatons electrical business has
delta-connected primary windings
and wye zig-zag connected secondary
windings. The use of wye zig-zag secondary windings allows a transformer
to be designed in a wide variety of
different phase-shifts (30, 15,
0, +15). In standard delta-wye
transformers, including K-factorrated
transformers, triplen harmonics are
passed from the secondary windings
into the primary delta windings, where
they are trapped and circulate. In
HMTs, the electromagnetic flux
cancellation created by the wye zig-zag
winding configuration prevents 3rd
and other triplen harmonics from
being transmitted into the primary
delta winding. Harmonic treatment is
provided entirely by electromagnetic
flux cancellation; no filters, capacitors
or other such devices are used. It
is important to remember that the
harmonic currents still flow in the
secondary windings.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
19.1-15
Sheet 19 021
Description
Benefits of Installing HMTs

In addition to improved system
reliability and reduced maintenance
costs, HMTs also have excellent
energy-saving characteristics. With
the cost of electricity continuing to
increase around the world, there is
an ever-increasing interest in energyefficient products. In many facilities,
the cost of electricity is the second
largest expense, eclipsed only by
salaries and wages.
Transformers consume energy
even when they are lightly loaded or
not loaded at all. Significant energy
savings may be attained if the no-load
losses of a transformer are reduced.
NEMA Standard TP-1 addresses
this issue by requiring high efficiency
levels when a transformer is loaded at
35% of its full capacity. However, this
standard applies to linear load profiles
only, and tests to validate compliance
with NEMA TP-1 are performed using
linear loads.
In actual applications, the growing

presence of electronic devices creates
nonlinear load profiles. Nonlinear
loads cause the losses in distribution
transformers to increase, thereby
reducing their realized efficiency.
Therefore, NEMA TP-1 efficiency
compliance may not be a true indication of the efficiency of a transformer
exposed to nonlinear loads. Though
a measure of linear load efficiency,
Eatons family of HMTs meets the
efficiency standards set forth in
NEMA Standard TP-1. Because HMTs
are intended to be installed in systems
that contain high levels of nonlinear
loads, Eatons family of HMTs is
designed to meet the NEMA TP-1
efficiency levels when applied to
nonlinear load profiles with 100%
harmonic distortion, across a broad
range of load levels, not just the
35% load level used in NEMA TP-1.
These energy savings are realized
over the entire life of the transformer.
Table 19.1-9. Typical Harmonic Profile of
Single-Phase Switched Mode Power Supply
Harmonic
Magnitude
1
3
5
7
1.000
0.810
0.606
0.370
9
11
13
15
0.157
0.024
0.063
0.079
The closer that an HMT can be located
to the load, the greater the benefits
of harmonic treatment. Installation
of a large capacity HMT at the service
entrance of a large building would
certainly provide some harmonic treatment. However, installation of several
smaller rated HMTs, perhaps one
or more on each floor of a building,
provides greater benefits that will be
noticed throughout the facility. For this
reason, the most popular HMTs will be
rated 75 kVA and less. This complements the cost-efficiencies that can be
gained by distributing higher voltages
through smaller cables to the point
where a safer, lower voltage is needed
to operate equipment.
When connecting the loads to
the transformer, it is important to
remember that the balanced portion
of the harmonic loads will be treated.
To achieve the maximum harmonic
treatment, when considering the
triplen harmonics that are treated in
the secondary windings, each phase
should be balanced, and the harmonic
profile of the loads should be as
similar as possible. When treating 5th,
7th and higher order harmonics by
using multiple transformers, the loads
should likewise have similar
harmonic profiles, and the kVA and
impedance of the transformers should
be identical as well. For example,
two 75 kVA HMTs can be paired
with a single 150 kVA HMT to provide
maximum harmonic performance.
In instances where transformers of
unequal kVA are used in combination,
harmonic treatment is provided for
the lowest kVA load. For example, if,
instead of pairing two 75 kVA HMTs
with a single 150 kVA HMT, one would
pair two 45 kVA HMTs with a 150 kVA
HMT. Only 90 kVA (two times 45 kVA)
of the 150 kVA load would be treated
(if they were fully loaded). In
real-world situations, it is nearly
impossible to have perfectly matched
loads. However, the benefits of
treating harmonics, even in situations
where the loads are unbalanced, are
a far superior option than to not treat
them at all.
Eaton HMT transformers comply with
NEMA TP-1 standards.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efficient Transformers
November 2013
Sheet 19 022
Description
i
ii
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efficient

Transformers Rated
600V and Below
Applications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Eatons family of NEMA TP-1-2002,

ventilated transformers are another
option available to customers
interested in reducing their energy
consumption. These transformers
comply with all state and local
regulations that mandate installation
of energy-efficient distribution
transformers in new construction.
NEMA TP-1 transformers are typically
installed in commercial construction,
as well as in educational (K12 and
universities), government and
industrial facilities. NEMA TP-1
compliant transformers are especially
designed to have low no-load (core)
losses. Minimum efficiency levels
have been established for these
transformers when loaded at 35% of
their full load capacity. NEMA TP-1
transformers are manufactured
using the same high-quality
construction features as Eatons
ventilated transformer products,
Ventilated transformers are typically
floor-mounted on an elevated housekeeping pad. When properly supported,
they are also suitable for wall mounting
or trapeze-mounting from ceilings.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
As an Energy Star Partner, Eatons
brand offers a wide range of NEMA
TP-1 energy-efficient transformers to
meet specific voltage conversion
requirements.
kVA Capacity
Eatons NEMA TP-1 ventilated transformers are available in the same
kVA ratings as single-phase and
three-phase general purpose ventilated transformers.
18
19
20
21
Eatons NEMA TP-1 energy-efficient

transformers are manufactured using
as standard. NEMA TP-1 transformers
are also available in either 115C or
80C temperature rise.
Frequency
The Energy Policy Act of 2005
Most NEMA TP-1 transformers are

designed to operate in 60 Hz systems.
50/60 Hz designs are available as an
option. Eatons transformers can be
designed to operate at a variety of
frequencies.
The Energy Policy Act of 2005 and

the resulting Federal Law 10 CFR Part
431 require that efficiency of low voltage dry-type distribution transformers
manufactured after January 1, 2007,
shall be no less than the efficiency
levels listed in Table 4-2 of NEMA
Standard TP-1-2002. Transformers
specifically excluded from the scope
of this law include: transformers rated
less than 15 kVA, transformers rated
greater than 600V, transformers rated
for operation at anything other than
60 Hz, transformers with a tap range
greater than 20%, drive transformers,
rectifier transformers, autotransformers, uninterruptible power supply
transformers, special impedance
transformers, regulating transformers, sealed and nonventilated transformers, machine tool transformers,
welding transformers, grounding
transformers and testing transformers.
Winding Material
an option.
Eatons NEMA TP-1 transformers
require clearances that are identical to
those for general purpose ventilated
transformers.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons NEMA TP-1 energy-efficient
transformers have wiring compartments sized to comply with NEMA
and NEC standards.
What is NEMA TP-1?

The Energy Act of 1992, H.R. 776
empowered the U.S. Department of
Energy (DOE) to set guidelines for
more efficient electrical devices that
would reduce the nations energy
consumption. In 1996, in conjunction
with the DOE, NEMA adopted a new
standard for efficiencies of distribution
transformers: NEMA Standard
TP-1-1996. This standard set minimum
efficiency levels for standard transformer kVA ratings. Prior studies had
shown that transformers in commercial and industrial facilities are loaded
at an average of 35% of their nameplate full-load capacity. The minimum
efficiency levels included in NEMA
TP-1 for low voltage transformers
(600V and below) are based upon
this 35% loading, and at 75C ambient
temperature. The Environmental
Protection Agency adopted the
efficiency levels set forth in NEMA
TP-1 as part of their Energy Star
program. The DOE, in conjunction
with NEMA, is continually looking
at the attainable efficiency levels
for distribution transformers, and
revising them upward.
Table 19.1-10. NEMA TP-1-2002

Efficiency Levels
Tables of Energy Efficiency
NEMA Class 1 Efficiency Levels
Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
Low Voltage (600V and below)
Single-Phase
kVA
Three-Phase
Efficiency kVA
Efficiency
97.7
98.0
98.2
15
30
45
97.0
97.5
97.7
50
75
100
98.3
98.5
98.6
75
112.5
150
98.0
98.2
98.3
167
250
333
98.7
98.8
98.9
15
25
37.5
225
300
500
750
1000
98.5
98.6
98.7
98.8
98.9
Since distribution transformers are

typically energized 24 hours a day,
seven days a week, 365 days a year,
the energy savings gained by installing
high-efficiency transformers is realized
for the vast majority of a transformers
20-year or greater anticipated life.
CA08104001E

Low Temperature Rise Transformers
November 2013
19.1-17
Sheet 19 023
Description
CSL-3 Transformers
Energy Policy Legislation
In an effort to increase energy
efficiency within the U.S. electrical
system, effective January 1, 2007,
the federal government implemented
legislation found within EPACT 2005
standards to change manufacturing of
dry-type transformers such that they
had to meet the NEMA TP-1 energy
efficiency levels. The foundation and
reasoning for this change was started
in a 2004 government study called,
10 CFR Part 430Energy Conservation
Program for Commercial and Industrial
Equipment: Energy Conservation Standards for Distribution Transformers;
Proposed Rule. This study laid the
foundations of five different efficiency
levels (Candidate Standard Levels
CSL) for a multitude of transformer
technologies. Whereas many transformer technologies (both dry and oilfilled, low and medium voltage) were
discussed, the CSL-1 transformer
represents the least efficiency level
of low voltage, dry-type transformers
listed. This energy efficiency level is
at the same performance as NEMA
TP-1 transformers (the current
required efficiency performance). The
CSL-2 through CSL-5 classifications
represent increasingly higher performance energy efficiency levels (with
CSL-5 being the highest efficiencies/
lowest losses). While CSL-5 is the most
efficient transformer in this classification shown, currently the material
costs necessary to meet those
efficiencies are prohibitive in the
commercial market. The CSL-3
level has a significant increase in
performance when compared with
NEMA TP-1 efficiency levels.
The 10 CFR Part 430 standard was

an evolving standard. As more was
learned about possible transformer
efficiencies, materials and performance, the standard continued to
evolve until the 10 CFR Part 431
Energy Conservation Program for
Commercial Equipment: Distribution
Transformers Energy Conservation
Standards; Final Rule was published
in October 2007. This final rule shows
improvements and refinements made
as the standard matured, changing
CSL-3 minimum efficiency levels from
an average of 28% lower losses than
NEMA TP-1 to an average of 32%.
Eaton Corporation is continuing to

provide cutting-edge efficiencies and
performance to our customers looking
for that extra performance when
designing a LEED or green building.
CSL-3 Compliant Eaton Type E3

480V to 208/120V standard

150 or 115C temperature
rise available
Copper windings and terminals
standard; aluminum not available
CSL-3 2007 Final Rule efficiencies
levels
Increased efficiencies help to gain
LEED points (because LEED only
incorporates regulated losses, the
comparison of No Load Losses
against standard NEMA TP-1
transformers can be used to
document energy savings)
30%40%less losses than NEMA

TP-1 transformers
No additional maintenance to maintain energy efficiency and savings
K-13 ratedcan be used in areas
with a high concentration of nonlinear loads
Ultra-low excitation (no-load) losses
Available in three-phase ratings
from 15 to 300 kVA
Reduced heat output helps to
reduce cooling costs
Energy savings provides a return
on investment (ROI) energy
savings analysis
Environmentally friendly through
reduced pollution due to low
energy losses
200% rated neutral
Single electrostatic shield for
attenuation of common-mode and
transverse-mode noise
220C insulation system
Operating costs kept to a minimum
May be installed as a stand-alone
transformer, or included with an
Integrated Facility System (IFS)
Meet NEMA ST-20 audible sound
level standards
Enclosures are NEMA 2 drip-proof.
The addition of optional weathershields makes the enclosure
NEMA 3R rainproof
Lbs of CO2
Saved
Number of Men
(Average Weight 250 Lbs)
CO2 Savings Equivalence
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
Pollution
Cleaning
15
30
45
608
991
1411
3.0
5.0
7.0
61
99
141
75
112.5
150
2007
2682
3513
10.0
13.4
17.6
201
269
352
225
300
4422
5520
22.1
27.6
443
553
Environmental impact data per nationalized

averages of utility pollution production
in 2004 published by the U.S. EPA eGrid
report in 2007. Transformer losses based on
35% loading of nameplate with linear load.
ii
11
Table 19.1-11. Environmental Impact of E3 Transformers vs. Standard NEMA TP-1

kVA
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Motor Drive Isolation Transformers
November 2013
Sheet 19 024
Description
i
ii

and Below
Applications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers are especially designed for

three-phase SCR controlled, variable
speed motor drives load profiles. Sized
by horsepower and common motor
voltages, motor drive isolation transformers are braced to withstand the
mechanical stresses associated with
AC adjustable frequency drives or DC
drives. Two-winding drive isolation
transformers provide:
Electrical isolation between the
incoming line and the drive circuitry
Voltage conversion on input line to
standard drive input voltages
Help to minimize line disturbances
caused by SCR firing
Reduce short-circuit currents and
voltage line transients
Motor drive isolation transformers

are manufactured using the same
high-quality construction features as
our ventilated transformer products,
220C (Class R) insulation system as
standard. Epoxy encapsulated models
have NEMA 3R enclosures and 115C
temperature rise as standard. All Eaton
three-phase ventilated motor drive isolation transformers include a normally
open dry contact temperature sensor
installed in the coils. This sensor can
be connected to provide advance alert
or warning of a potential overheating
of the transformer. Ventilated transformers are typically floor-mounted on
an elevated housekeeping pad. When
properly supported, they are also
suitable for wall mounting or trapezemounting from ceilings. Encapsulated
designs are typically wall-mounted
through 15 kVA; larger designs are
floor-mount.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers are available in a wide range
conversion requirements. Available
in three-phase ventilated designs to
1500 hp and 600V; epoxy encapsulated
three-phase designs are available
to 20 hp.
kVA Capacity
Eatons motor drive isolation encapsulated and ventilated transformers are
available in the same kVA ratings as
general purpose encapsulated and
ventilated transformers.

Eatons motor drive isolation ventilated
transformers are manufactured using
temperature rise as standard. 115C or
80C temperature rise are available as
an option. Encapsulated designs use a
temperature rise as standard. 80C
temperature rise is available as an
option on encapsulated transformers.
Frequency
Most motor drive isolation transformers are designed to operate in 60 Hz
systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available
as an option. Eatons transformers can
be designed to operate at a variety of
frequencies.
Winding Material
an option. For encapsulated designs,
most models rated 2 kVA and below
are constructed using copper windings; 3 kVA and larger designs have
aluminum windings as standard,
with copper windings available as
an option.
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers require clearances that are
identical to those for general purpose
transformers. Transformers should
be located in areas not accessible to
the public.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers have wiring compartments
sized to comply with NEMA and NEC
standards.
Thermal Sensors
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers are provided with thermal
sensors imbedded in their coils. The
thermal sensors have normally open
dry contacts that can be wired to
provide a signal to remote locations
to indicate a potential heating problem
within the transformer coils. Contacts
are rated for 180C.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
November 2013

Hazardous Location Transformers
19.1-19
Sheet 19 025
Description
Hazardous Location
and Below
Applications
are suitable for use in environments
classified by the National Electrical Code
(NEC) as Class I, Division 2, Groups A,
B, C and D, as defined by NEC Article
501, when installed in compliance with
NEC-recommended procedures for
dry-type transformers rated 600V
and below.
As defined by NEC Article 500, Class I,
Division 2 locations include atmospheres
that may contain volatile or ignitable
concentrations of flammable liquids
or gas vapors, or locations adjacent to
such environments. Acetone, ammonia,
benzene, gasoline, methane, propane
and natural gas are examples of
such substances.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
are available in the same ratings as
sand and resin encapsulated transformers. Hazardous location transformers are available in a wide range
of ratings to meet specific customer
requirements.
kVA Capacity
Single-phase designs are available
in ratings from 0.05 kVA through
37.5 kVA; three phase ratings 375 kVA.

are manufactured using a 180C insulation system with 115C temperature
rise as standard. 80C temperature rise
is available as an option.
Frequency
Most hazardous location transformers
are designed to operate in 60 Hz
systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available
as an option. Eatons transformers can
be designed to operate at a variety
of frequencies.
ii
1
Winding Material
Copper conductors and terminations
are provided as standard on Eatons
hazardous location transformers rated
2 kVA and less. Aluminum conductor
and terminations are provided as
standard on hazardous location
transformers rated 3 kVA and greater.
Copper winding conductors and
terminations are available as an option.
Eatons wall-mounted hazardous

location transformers have a specially
designed hanger bracket that spaces
the transformer an adequate distance
from the mounting surface.


are of the encapsulated design, and
are available up to 600V ratings. Singlephase ratings 0.05 25 kVA; three-phase
ratings to 75 kVA. Hazardous location
transformers use a 180C insulation
system with 115C temperature rise.
3
4
7
8
9
10
When provided in a Grade 304 or 316

stainless steel enclosure, Eatons
hazardous location transformers meet
the corrosion-resistance requirements
of a NEMA 3RX enclosure rating.
Hazardous location transformers can
be mounted in any position indoors,
and only in upright positions for
outdoor installations.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Mini-Power Centers
November 2013
Sheet 19 026
Description
i
ii
1
MiniPower Centers
Rated 600V and Below
Applications
An Eaton minipower center replaces
three individual components:
Primary main breaker
Transformer
Distribution loadcenter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
...by combining all three into a single

unit. All interconnecting wiring is
performed at the factory. Minipower
centers are ideally suited for applications where 120V is required at a
remote location. Parking lots, workbenches and temporary power on
construction sites are common
applications for minipower centers.
Available with aluminum bus and
plug-on branch breakers, or with
copper bus and bolt-on branch
breakers. Minipower centers
incorporate an encapsulated
transformer in their construction.
Primary main breakers are available
in a variety of interrupting ratings. The
NEMA 3R enclosure makes it ideally
suited for use in areas that contain
dust, moisture, corrosive fumes, metal
shavings and other airborne particles
that may cause damage to ventilated
transformers. When provided in a
Grade 316 stainless steel enclosure,
the Eaton minipower center meets
the corrosion-resistance requirements
of a NEMA 3RX enclosure rating.
Minipower centers can be mounted
in any position indoors, and in upright
positions only for outdoor installations.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eatons minipower centers are
available in single-phase and threephase ratings to 600V, 100A and
30 kVA with secondary loadcenters
with provisions for up to 24 singlepole branch breakers. Minipower
centers are available in a wide range
conversion requirements.
kVA Capacity
Single-phase designs are available
in ratings from 3 kVA through 25 kVA;
three-phase ratings 15 kVA through
30 kVA.

Minipower centers are manufactured
using a 180C insulation system with
80C temperature rise is available as
an option.
Frequency
Most minipower centers are designed
to operate in 60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz
designs are available as an option.
Eatons minipower centers can be
designed to operate at a variety of
frequencies.
Winding Material
are provided as standard on encapsulated transformers rated 3 kVA and
greater. Copper winding conductors
and terminations are available as
an option. Copper windings are
standard in the all-copper model.
Eatons minipower centers have

with NEMA and NEC standards. Ample
conduit knockouts are provided to
offer ready access. The wiring
compartment of wall-mounted
transformers is located in the bottom
portion of the enclosure.
Primary Main Breakers

Minipower centers are provided with
primary main circuit breakers that
have an interrupting rating of 14 kAIC.
EHD primary main circuit breakers are
provided as standard on mini-power
centers with a 480V primary; 600V
designs have an FD primary main
breaker as standard. Primary main
circuit breakers with greater AIC
ratings are available as an option on
minipower centers with plug-on
secondary circuit breakers.
Optional primary main breakers are
FD (rate 25 kAIC at 480V; 18 kAIC
at 600V), HFD (65 kAIC at 480V;
25 kAIC at 600V) or FDC (100 kAIC
at 480V; 35 kAIC at 600V).
Branch Circuit Breakers

Eatons minipower centers are available with an aluminum bus loadcenter
interior that accepts 1.00-inch plug-on
branch circuit breakers Type BR family.
The all-copper minipower center
is constructed with a copper-wound
transformer and a copper bus loadcenter
interior that accepts 1.00-inch bolt-on
branch breakers Type BAB family.
15
Eatons minipower centers are

designed to be wall-mounted. They
have a specially designed hanger
bracket that spaces the minipower
center an adequate distance from
the mounting surface.
16
Minipower centers should be located

in areas not accessible to the public.
14
Wiring Compartments
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Single-Phase Transformers for Motors
November 2013
19.1-21
Sheet 19 027
Technical Data
Transformer Selection
How to Select Single-Phase Units
1. Determine the primary (source)
voltagethe voltage presently
available.
Table 19.1-12. Single-Phase AC Motors

Note: When motor service factor is greater than 1, increase full load amperes proportionally.
Example: If service factor is 1.15, increase ampere values by 15%.
Horsepower
If the load rating is given in

amperes, determine the load kVA
from the following chart. To determine kVA when volts and amperes
are known, use the formula:
kVA = Volts x Amperes
1000
208 Volts
220 Volts
230 Volts
Minimum
Transformer kVA
ii
1/6
1/4
1/3
4.4
5.8
7.2
2.4
3.2
4.0
2.3
3.0
3.8
2.2
2.9
3.6
0.53
0.70
0.87
1/2
3/4
1
9.8
13.8
16
5.4
7.6
8.8
5.1
7.2
8.4
4.9
6.9
8
1.18
1.66
1.92
1-1/2
2
3
20
24
34
11.0
13.2
18.7
10.4
12.5
17.8
10
12
17
2.40
2.88
4.10
5
7-1/2
10
56
80
100
30.8
44
55
29.3
42
52
28
40
50
6.72
9.6
12.0
2. Determine the secondary (load)

voltagethe voltage needed at
the load.
3. Determine the kVA load:
If the load is defined in kVA, a
transformer can be selected from
the tabulated data.
Full Load Amperes

115 Volts
If motors are started more than once per hour, increase minimum transformer kVA by 20%.
Table 19.1-13. Full Load Current in AmperesSingle-Phase Circuits

kVA
Voltage
120
If the load is an AC motor,

determine the minimum transformer kVA from Table 19.1-12
at the right.
Select a transformer rating
equal to or greater than the
load kVA.
4. Define tap arrangements needed.
5. Define temperature rise.
2400
4160
0.25
0.50
0.75
2.0
4.2
6.3
1.2
2.4
3.6
1.1
2.3
3.4
1.0
2.1
3.1
0.9
1.8
2.7
0.5
1.0
1.6
0.4
0.8
1.3
0.10
0.21
0.31
0.06
0.12
0.18
1
1.5
2
8.3
12.5
16.7
4.8
7.2
9.6
4.5
6.8
9.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
3.6
5.4
7.2
2.1
3.1
4.2
1.7
2.5
3.3
0.42
0.63
0.83
0.24
0.36
0.48
3
5
7.5
25
41
62
14.4
24.0
36
13.6
22.7
34
12.5
20.8
31
10.8
18.0
27
6.2
10.4
15.6
5.0
8.3
12.5
1.2
2.1
3.1
0.72
1.2
1.8
220
240
277
480
600
20.8
31
52
16.7
25
41
4.2
6.2
10.4
2.4
3.6
6.0
10
15
25
83
125
208
48
72
120
45
68
114
41
62
104
36
54
90
37.5
50
75
312
416
625
180
240
360
170
227
341
156
208
312
135
180
270
78
104
156
62
83
125
15.6
20.8
31.3
9.0
12.0
18.0
833
1391
480
802
455
759
416
695
361
602
208
347
166
278
41.7
69.6
24.0
40.1
100
167
208
Table of standard transformer ratings used to power single-phase motors in Table 19.1-12.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Three-Phase Transformers for Motors
November 2013
Sheet 19 028
Technical Data
How to Select Three-Phase Units
ii
1. Determine the primary (source)

voltagethe voltage presently
available.
2. Determine the secondary (load)

voltagethe voltage needed at
the load.
2
3
5
6
kVA = Volts x Amperes x 1.732

1000
If the load is an AC motor, determine the minimum transformer kVA

from Table 19.1-14 at the right.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Horsepower
Select a transformer rating

equal to or greater than the
load kVA.
Full Load Amperes

208 Volts
230 Volts
380 Volts
460 Volts
575 Volts
Minimum
Transformer kVA
1/2
3/4
2.2
3.1
4.0
2.0
2.8
3.6
1.2
1.7
2.2
1.0
1.4
1.8
0.8
1.1
1.4
0.9
1.2
1.5
1-1/2
2
3
5.7
7.5
10.7
5.2
6.8
9.6
3.1
4.1
5.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
2.1
2.7
3.9
2.1
2.7
3.8
5
7-1/2
10
16.7
24
31
15.2
22
28
9.2
14
17
7.6
11
14
6.1
9
11
6.3
9.2
11.2
15
20
25
46
59
75
42
54
68
26
33
41
21
27
34
17
22
27
16.6
21.6
26.6
30
40
50
88
114
143
80
104
130
48
63
79
40
52
65
32
41
52
32.4
43.2
52
60
75
100
170
211
273
154
192
248
93
116
150
77
96
124
62
77
99
64
80
103
125
150
200
342
396
528
312
360
480
189
218
291
156
180
240
125
144
192
130
150
200
3. Determine the kVA load:

If the load is defined in kVA, a
transformer can be selected from
the tabulated data.
If the load rating is given in
amperes, determine the load kVA
from the following chart. To determine kVA when volts and amperes
are known, use the formula:
Table 19.1-14. Three-Phase AC Motors
If motors are started more than once per hour, increase minimum transformer kVA by 20%.
Note: When motor service factor is greater than 1, increase full load amperes proportionally.
Example: If service factor is 1.15, increase above ampere values by 15%.
Table 19.1-15. Full Load Current in AmperesThree-Phase Circuits

kVA
Voltage
208
240
380
480
600
2400
4160
4. Define tap arrangements needed.

5. Define temperature rise.
Using the above procedure, select
the transformer from the listings in
this catalog.
3
6
9
8.3
16.6
25
7.2
14.4
21.6
4.6
9.1
13.7
3.6
7.2
10.8
2.9
5.8
8.6
0.72
1.4
2.2
0.42
0.83
1.2
15
22.5
30
41.7
62.4
83.4
36.1
54.1
72.3
22.8
34.2
45.6
18.0
27.1
36.1
14.4
21.6
28.9
3.6
5.4
7.2
2.1
3.1
4.2
57.0
68.4
76
45.2
54.2
60.1
36.1
43.4
48.1
9.0
10.8
12.0
5.2
6.3
6.9
37.5
45
50
104
124
139
90.3
108
120
75
112.5
150
208
312
416
180
270
360
114
171
228
90
135
180
72
108
144
18.0
27.1
36.1
10.4
15.6
20.8
225
300
500
624
832
1387
541
721
1202
342
456
760
270
360
601
216
288
481
54.2
72.2
120
31.3
41.6
69.4
750
1000
2084
2779
1806
2408
1140
1519
903
1204
723
963
180
241
104
139
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
19.1-23
November 2013
Sheet 19 029
Technical Data
Table 19.1-16. Typical Data for Encapsulated 480V Class General-Purpose Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound
kVA
Frame
Weight Lbs
Losses in Watts
Efficiency
Al
No
Load
Total
1/4
Load
1/2
Load
3/4
Load
Cu
% Regulation
% Impedance
Full
Load
100%
P.F.
80%
P.F.
Min.
Max.
Sound
Level dB
i
ii
Type EP 115C Rise Single-Phase

0.05
0.075
0.10
FR52
FR54
FR54
7
7
7
6
7
5
9
14
15
65.3
66.0
82.4
79.6
79.0
86.9
84.3
82.5
87.7
85.6
82.8
86.5
5.9
9.4
10.3
6.4
9.2
10.6
5.5
7.5
8.0
9.5
11.0
12.0
45
45
45
0.15
0.25
0.5
FR55
FR57P
FR57P
8
12
13
7
14
20
20
29
47
83.4
79.0
85.1
88.2
87.2
90.3
88.9
89.5
91.4
87.8
89.6
91.4
9.0
5.9
5.5
9.6
7.5
7.0
8.0
7.5
5.0
12.0
9.5
7.0
45
45
45
0.75
1
1.5
FR58AP
FR67P
FR67P
65
20
30
40
29
24
30
57
60
90
86.0
90.8
92.5
91.3
93.9
94.7
92.7
94.5
95.0
92.9
94.4
94.6
3.9
3.8
4.1
5.0
4.9
5.2
4.0
3.8
2.5
6.0
5.8
4.5
45
45
45
2
3
5
FR68P
FR176
FR177
113
40
69
120
30
61
104
100
135
215
94.2
92.0
91.8
95.7
95.0
95.0
95.8
95.7
95.8
95.4
95.7
95.9
3.6
2.5
2.3
4.7
3.5
3.3
3.3
2.5
2.0
5.3
4.1
4.6
45
45
45
7.5
10
15
FR178
FR179
FR180
123
193
216
133
208
235
129
153
209
250
295
435
93.2
93.9
94.4
96.0
96.3
96.6
96.7
97.0
97.1
95.9
97.2
97.2
1.5
1.5
1.6
2.4
2.5
2.8
2.4
2.0
1.6
3.4
3.3
3.6
45
50
50
25
37.5
FR182
FR300A
385
735
414
856
191
225
440
370
96.8
97.4
98.0
98.3
98.3
98.5
98.4
98.4
1.1
1.2
2.5
2.6
1.6
2.8
4.2
4.0
50
50
Type EPT 115C Rise Three-Phase

3
6
9
FR201
FR200
FR103
116
143
166
123
153
178
110
145
195
165
275
375
87.3
90.9
91.6
92.6
94.5
95.0
94.3
95.5
95.9
94.9
95.7
96.1
2.1
2.2
2.0
6.1
3.1
2.8
2.4
2.9
2.0
8.0
4.9
3.6
45
45
45
15
30
45
75
FR95
FR243
FR244
FR245
275
422
660
1275
300
504
745
1450
265
250
300
400
545
665
740
945
93.0
96.5
97.2
97.7
95.7
97.7
98.2
98.6
96.5
98.0
98.4
98.8
96.6
97.9
98.5
98.8
1.9
1.5
1.0
0.8
3.1
2.5
2.1
1.6
1.9
1.8
1.8
1.7
3.9
3.8
4.0
3.4
50
50
50
55

Typical values for aluminum windings. Refer to Pages 19.1-2619.1-28 for typical data for copper windings. Up-to-date design data is available at
www.eaton.com.
Actual impedance may vary 7.5%.
Type EPT transformers 315 kVA are T-T connected.
Note: Performance data is based upon 480V delta primary and a 208Y/120V secondary for three-phase transformers; 240 x 480V primary and a
120/240V secondary for single-phase transformers. All data is subject to future revision. Refer to Eaton for 5 kV class information. All data is
subject to future revision.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 19 030
Technical Data
i
ii
Table 19.1-17. Typical Data for 480V Class NEMA TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound
kVA
No
Load
15
816
25
818
37.5 818
50
75
100
167
10
11
X
T Rise
+20
R
T Rise
+20
Sound
Level dB
TP1
Inrush
Efficiency Absolute Practical
Max.
Max.
819
820
821
814
246
359
374
80
300
125
549
848
1314
97.6 97.6 97.2 96.6

97.7 98.1 97.9 97.5
98.1 97.8 97.2 96.6
2.0
1.4
2.2
2.9
2.7
4.6
4.3
3.5
5.8
3.0
2.8
4.8
3.1
2.2
3.2
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
737
1139
1066
245
379
355
555
740
841
1610
300
170
260
900
1668
2266
2543
3987
98.2
98.4
98.5
68.7
97.0
97.0
97.6
98.0
1.9
2.3
1.9
1.4
4.0
5.3
4.7
6.8
5.1
6.9
6.1
9.7
4.3
6.3
5.6
9.5
2.7
2.8
2.3
1.8
45
50
50
55
98.30
98.50
98.60
98.70
1585
2105
2834
1250
528
701
944
416
98.1
98.2
98.4
98.7
97.6
97.6
98.0
98.4
15
816
25
818
37.5 818
246
373
380
80
300
125
519
766
1182
97.8 97.8 97.3 96.8

97.7 98.1 98.0 97.7
98.2 98.4 98.1 97.8
2.1
1.4
2.0
3.1
2.8
3.1
3.9
3.3
4.1
2.6
2.8
2.9
2.9
1.9
2.8
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
773
1102
616
244
367
205
50
75
590
689
300
170
417
2356
98.4 98.3 97.9 97.4

98.5 98.2 97.6 97.0
1.8
2.7
4.1
5.6
5.2
6.9
5.2
6.3
0.2
2.9
45
50
98.30
98.50
1553
1717
511
572
819
820
15
818
25
818
37.5 819
360
370
565
115
120
150
269
580
834
97.4 98.3 98.4 98.4

97.8 98.2 98.0 97.8
98.1 98.4 98.1 97.8
0.8
1.5
1.5
1.7
3.2
3.3
2.0
3.9
4.1
1.8
3.4
3.6
1.0
1.8
1.8
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
1381
1046
1471
460
348
490
50
75
680
900
175
260
1014
1387
98.4 98.5 98.4 98.1

98.3 98.6 98.5 98.2
1.5
1.4
3.4
3.5
4.2
4.3
3.9
4.0
1.7
1.5
45
50
98.30
98.50
1733
2423
577
807
820
821
Type DT-3 150C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efficient

15
912D
30
912D
37.5 912D
204
291
381
95
165
210
778
1207
1428
96.6 96.7 96.0 95.1

97.2 97.3 96.9 96.2
97.5 97.5 97.0 96.4
4.8
3.7
3.5
4.0
5.6
5.5
4.8
4.6
4.5
1.4
3.0
3.1
4.6
3.5
3.2
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
382
479
484
127
159
161
45
50
75
912D
914D
914D
351
531
553
210
270
300
1911
1316
2917
97.5 97.4 96.7 96.0

97.7 98.1 97.9 97.5
97.9 97.7 97.0 96.3
3.8
2.2
3.6
6.3
4.0
6.6
5.1
3.2
5.3
3.4
2.4
4.0
3.8
2.1
3.5
45
45
50
97.70
98.00
98.00
564
999
561
188
333
187
112.5 916A
150
916A
225
917
793
913
1343
400
490
650
3693
4923
6476
98.0 98.0 97.5 96.9

98.2 98.0 97.5 96.9
98.4 98.2 97.8 97.2
3.2
3.2
2.8
7.5
6.5
6.3
6.0
5.3
5.1
5.2
4.4
4.4
2.9
3.0
2.6
50
50
55
98.20
98.30
98.50
1049
1518
2204
350
506
734
300
500
750
1597
2590
3340
750
1400
1800
8239
9782
12,692
98.5 98.3 97.9 97.3

98.6 98.7 98.5 98.1
98.8 98.9 98.7 98.4
2.9
1.9
1.8
8.9
8.2
8.9
7.6
7.2
8.0
7.2
7.0
7.9
2.5
1.7
1.5
55
60
64
98.60
98.70
98.80
2097
3769
4521
699
1256
1507
8
9
% Regulation % Imp.
80% T Rise
+20
PF
Type DS-3 80C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efficient Single-Phase
6
7
Efficiency (T Rise +20)
25% 50% 75% Full

100%
Load PF
4
5
Total at
Rise +20
1
2
Frame Weight Losses in Watts
918A
919
920

15
30
45
912D
912D
912D
202
311
418
100
165
220
743
1492
1458
96.7 96.8 96.2 95.4

97.3 97.1 96.3 95.5
97.8 97.9 97.5 97.0
4.4
4.5
2.8
3.9
4.8
5.4
4.4
4.8
4.6
1.2
1.8
3.7
4.3
4.4
2.8
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
383
411
550
127
137
183
13
50
914D
75
914D
112.5 916A
556
581
829
270
300
440
1211
2415
3209
97.6 98.1 98.0 97.7

97.9 97.9 97.5 96.9
98.0 98.1 97.8 97.3
1.9
3.0
2.6
3.7
6.7
3.6
3.2
5.9
3.1
2.6
5.1
1.9
1.9
2.8
2.5
45
50
50
98.00
98.00
98.20
892
758
1301
297
252
433
14
150
225
300
916A
918A
923
996
1569
1908
530
720
830
3781
5205
6926
98.1 98.3 97.9 97.5

98.4 98.4 98.1 97.8
98.5 98.5 98.2 97.8
2.4
2.2
2.3
5.8
6.8
6.0
5.2
6.2
5.4
4.7
5.8
4.9
2.2
2.0
2.0
50
55
55
98.30
98.50
98.60
1534
1875
2678
511
631
872
500
750
920
922
3117
4884
1650
2000
6968
9335
98.5 98.9 98.8 98.7

98.9 99.1 99.0 98.8
1.2
1.3
6.6
8.7
6.6
9.0
6.5
8.9
1.1
1.0
60
64
98.70
98.80
3930
4458
1310
1486
12
15

15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
276
350
540
165
180
290
551
904
1027
96.7 97.4 97.2 96.8

97.3 97.8 97.6 97.2
97.7 98.2 98.2 97.9
3.4
2.5
1.7
3.9
3.9
3.5
3.5
3.4
3.3
2.3
2.5
2.9
2.6
2.4
1.6
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
358
337
953
119
112
317
75
916A
112.5 916A
150
917
810
944
1438
360
470
650
1782
2521
2760
97.8 98.2 98.0 97.7

98.2 98.4 98.2 97.9
98.2 98.6 98.5 98.3
0.3
1.9
1.5
3.5
4.4
4.8
4.3
4.1
4.7
3.9
3.7
4.5
1.9
1.8
1.4
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
1006
1554
1665
355
518
555
225
300
500
1746
2400
3418
830
1100
1800
4047
5338
5858
98.3 98.6 98.5 98.3

98.6 99.0 99.0 98.9
98.6 99.0 99.0 98.9
1.6
1.6
0.9
5.5
5.9
4.9
5.6
6.1
5.4
5.4
5.9
5.3
1.4
1.4
0.8
55
55
60
98.50
98.60
98.70
2003
2655
4462
667
885
1487
16
17
18
19

923
919
920
www.eaton.com.
20
21
CA08104001E
19.1-25
November 2013
Sheet 19 031
Technical Data
Table 19.1-18. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated, TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound
kVA
Frame Weight Losses in Watts

No
Load
Total at
Rise +20
Efficiency (T Rise +20)
% Regulation % Imp.
25% 50% 75% Full
100% 80% T Rise
+20
Load PF
PF
X
T Rise
+20
R
T Rise
+20
Sound
Level dB
TP1
Inrush
Efficiency Absolute Practical
Max.
Max.
Type KT-4 150C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efficient

15
30
45
i
ii
912D
912D
912D
206
311
400
100
165
220
883
1263
1554
96.7 96.5 95.6 94.6

97.2 97.3 96.7 96.0
97.7 97.7 97.3 96.7
5.5
3.9
3.2
5.2
7.4
5.9
5.5
6.0
4.8
1.8
4.8
3.8
5.2
3.7
3.0
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
375
453
710
125
151
236
75
914D
112.5 916A
150
916A
547
800
1010
300
440
530
2622
3525
4055
97.9 97.8 97.2 96.6

98.0 98.0 97.6 97.0
98.1 98.2 97.8 97.4
3.3
3.0
2.6
6.7
7.4
6.6
5.3
6.0
5.4
4.4
5.3
4.8
3.1
2.7
2.3
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
995
1082
1574
331
360
524
225
300
500
1680
2122
3201
700
1100
1800
5879
5895
7054
98.3 98.3 97.9 97.5

98.4 98.6 98.4 98.1
98.5 98.9 98.8 98.7
2.6
1.9
1.3
7.6
6.8
5.9
6.3
5.9
5.4
5.9
5.7
5.2
2.3
1.6
1.1
55
55
60
98.50
98.60
98.70
1943
2863
4588
647
954
1529
918A
919
920

912D
912D
912D
307
313
400
135
165
220
394
1344
1463
96.3 97.5 97.6 97.5

97.4 97.3 96.6 95.9
97.8 97.9 97.5 97.0
1.8
4.1
3.0
2.7
5.1
6.1
2.2
4.6
5.2
1.4
2.4
4.4
1.7
3.9
2.8
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
491
584
591
163
194
197
75
914D
112.5 916A
150
917
587
947
1243
285
470
560
2355
2910
4119
97.9 97.9 97.5 97.0

97.9 98.1 97.9 97.5
98.1 98.2 97.8 97.4
2.9
2.4
2.5
6.7
5.0
6.6
5.9
4.3
5.7
5.2
3.7
5.2
2.8
2.2
2.4
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
823
1447
1468
274
482
489
225
300
1680
2480
700
1100
5413
5735
98.3 98.3 98.1 97.7

98.4 98.7 98.5 98.2
2.3
1.8
7.5
6.7
7.0
6.3
6.7
6.1
2.1
1.5
55
55
98.50
98.60
1719
2547
573
849
15
30
45
918A
919

15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
378
365
550
165
188
285
416
877
1055
96.4 97.6 97.7 97.6

97.2 97.7 97.6 97.2
97.4 98.1 98.0 97.8
1.7
2.4
1.8
2.9
3.9
3.7
2.5
3.5
3.4
1.9
2.6
2.9
1.7
2.3
1.7
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
482
583
708
160
194
236
75
916A
112.5 917
150
918A
774
1380
1604
360
550
700
1784
1872
2728
97.8 98.2 98.0 97.7

97.9 98.5 98.5 98.4
98.0 98.5 98.5 98.3
2.0
1.3
1.4
4.7
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.2
4.5
4.0
4.1
4.3
1.9
1.2
1.4
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
986
1577
1880
328
525
626
225
300
2336
2689
850
1100
3728
4589
98.4 98.7 98.6 98.4

98.4 98.8 98.7 98.5
1.4
1.4
5.0
5.5
5.2
5.8
5.1
5.6
1.3
1.2
55
55
98.50
98.60
2647
2610
882
870
919
919

15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
75
916A
112.5 916A
150
917
225
300
923
919
271
365
545
165
198
280
604
977
1215
96.7 97.3 97.0 96.5

97.1 97.6 97.3 96.9
97.5 98.0 97.8 97.4
3.1
2.7
2.2
4.2
4.3
4.2
3.6
3.5
3.3
2.1
2.4
2.6
2.9
2.6
2.1
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
379
565
890
126
188
277
10
812
920
1221
360
490
530
2139
3059
4297
97.7 98.0 97.8 97.4

98.0 98.2 97.8 97.4
98.1 98.1 97.7 97.2
2.6
2.4
2.7
5.9
5.0
6.5
4.9
4.1
5.3
4.3
3.4
4.6
2.4
2.3
2.5
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
907
1513
1790
302
504
597
11
830
1100
4461
5931
98.3 98.6 98.3 98.0

98.4 98.6 98.4 98.2
1.9
1.9
6.6
7.2
6.1
6.3
5.9
6.0
1.6
1.6
55
55
98.50
98.60
1771
2543
590
847
12
1960
2358

15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
332
390
548
165
200
280
432
903
1187
96.6 97.6 97.6 97.4

97.3 97.8 97.6 97.2
97.5 98.1 98.0 97.7
1.9
2.5
2.2
3.2
4.4
2.8
3.6
3.0
2.2
2.8
2.3
1.8
2.3
2.0
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
409
420
836
136
120
278
13
75
916A
112.5 916A
150
918A
808
990
1600
360
540
650
1850
2373
2372
97.8 98.1 97.8 97.5

97.9 98.3 98.2 98.0
98.1 98.5 98.4 98.1
2.4
1.8
1.3
5.6
4.5
3.4
4.8
4.0
3.0
4.3
3.6
2.8
2.2
1.6
1.1
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
805
1303
1932
268
434
644
14
225
300
2306
3291
850
1100
4001
4583
98.3 98.7 98.6 98.3

98.4 98.8 98.7 98.5
1.6
1.3
4.9
6.2
5.1
6.3
4.9
6.2
1.4
1.2
55
55
98.50
98.60
2508
2851
836
950
15
919
919

15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
315
408
555
165
188
280
536
854
982
96.4 97.3 97.2 96.9

97.4 97.9 97.7 97.3
97.6 98.2 98.2 98.0
2.5
2.3
1.6
3.9
4.0
3.2
3.6
3.6
3.0
2.5
2.8
2.5
2.5
2.2
1.6
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
375
497
656
125
166
218
16
75
916A
112.5 917
150
918A
838
1367
1607
400
550
668
1289
1905
2474
97.8 98.4 98.5 98.4

97.9 98.5 98.5 98.4
98.2 98.6 98.6 98.4
1.3
1.3
1.4
3.0
4.2
4.6
2.9
4.4
4.7
2.6
4.2
4.5
1.2
1.2
1.2
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
1624
1171
1562
541
390
520
17
225
300
2582
3228
850
1100
3471
3978
98.3 98.7 98.7 98.5

98.3 98.8 98.8 98.7
1.3
1.1
5.1
4.2
6.3
4.5
6.2
4.3
1.2
1.0
55
55
98.50
98.60
2159
3255
719
1085
18

919
920
www.eaton.com.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 19 032
Technical Data
i
ii
Table 19.1-19. Typical Data for 480V Class NEMA TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound
kVA
15
25
37.5
50
75
100
167
10
11
12
13
14
% Regulation
100%
PF
80%
PF
%
Imp.
Sound
Level dB
TP1
Efficiency
Inrush
Absolute
Max.
Practical
Max.
816
818
818
270
406
453
80
115
125
605
732
1154
97.6
97.9
98.2
97.5
98.1
98.1
96.9
97.7
97.6
96.3
97.3
97.0
3.5
2.7
4.2
3.7
4.2
3.5
4.8
2.3 3.5 45
2.5 2.5 45
4.0 2.7 45
97.70
98.00
98.20
551
1379
1321
183
459
440
819
820
821
814
657
803
960
1665
160
175
250
570
1159
2259
2504
3094
98.3
98.5
98.6
98.7
98.4
98.3
98.4
98.8
98.1
97.7
98.0
98.6
97.7
97.1
97.5
98.3
2.0
2.8
2.3
1.5
3.3
4.8
4.3
6.3
3.8
6.5
5.5
9.0
3.8
5.8
5.0
8.8
45
50
50
50
98.30
98.50
98.60
98.70
1321
2133
2779
2865
440
711
926
955
2.0
2.8
2.3
1.5
15
25
37.5
816
818
818
264
420
450
80
110
125
437
603
1217
97.8
97.9
98.2
98.1
98.2
98.0
97.8
98.0
97.5
97.3
97.7
96.9
2.4
2.0
2.9
2.2
2.9
4.5
3.3
3.2
5.9
2.2 2.4 45
2.6 2.0 45
5.1 2.9 45
97.70
98.00
98.20
718
862
1300
239
287
433
50
75
819
820
703
793
300
175
1409
2178
98.4
98.5
98.4
98.3
98.0
97.8
97.6
97.2
2.2
2.7
3.8
4.7
4.7
6.2
4.1 2.2
5.6 2.7 50
98.30
98.50
1498
2107
499
702
15
25
37.5
818
818
819
407
430
685
115
300
300
293
679
729
97.3
97.9
98.1
98.2
98.4
98.6
98.3
98.3
98.6
98.2
98.1
98.5
1.2
1.5
1.1
1.7
2.6
2.2
1.8
3.0
2.6
1.4 1.2 45
2.6 1.5 45
2.3 1.1 45
97.70
98.00
98.20
375
494
617
125
164
205
50
75
820
821
799
1042
180
250
1013
1447
98.3
98.3
98.6
98.6
98.4
98.4
98.1
98.1
1.7
1.6
2.9
3.4
3.4
3.8
2.9 1.7 45
3.5 1.6 50
98.30
98.50
989
1015
329
338

15
30
37.5
912D
912D
912D
250
350
415
150
165
210
755
1100
1382
98.9
97.3
97.5
97.0
97.5
97.6
96.4
97.0
97.1
95.7
96.5
96.5
4.2
3.2
3.2
5.3
4.5
4.8
4.8
5.2
4.0
2.6 4.0 45
4.1 3.1 45
2.5 3.1 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
321
614
639
107
204
213
45
50
75
912D
914D
914D
416
647
643
215
270
320
1786
1220
2903
97.4
97.7
97.9
97.4
98.2
97.5
96.9
98.0
97.1
96.2
97.7
96.4
3.6
2.0
3.6
5.5
3.5
7.4
4.6
2.8
4.3
3.0 3.5 45
2.0 1.9 45
2.5 3.4 50
97.70
98.00
98.00
637
1072
1015
212
357
338
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
876
1064
1569
420
530
560
3699
4269
7124
97.9
98.1
98.4
97.9
98.2
98.1
97.4
97.8
97.5
96.8
97.3
97.0
3.0
2.7
3.2
6.7
5.3
8.7
5.1
4.3
7.4
4.2 2.9 50
3.5 2.5 50
6.8 2.9 55
98.20
98.30
98.50
1185
1752
2498
395
584
832
300
500
923
919
2050
3681
730
1400
7959
8292
98.4
98.8
98.3
98.9
97.9
98.7
97.4
98.4
2.6
1.6
6.7
7.4
5.5
6.8
4.9 2.4 55
6.7 1.4 60
98.60
98.70
2872
3839
964
1279
8
9
Efficiency (Trise +20)

25% 50% 75% Full
Load
Total at
Rise +20
6
7
Losses in Watts
No
Load
4
5
Weight
1
2
Frame

15
30
45
912D
912D
912D
256
337
446
95
180
215
669
1077
1625
97.7
97.7
97.7
97.8
97.8
97.7
97.3
97.3
97.2
96.7
96.8
96.6
4.0
3.0
3.2
5.4
6.2
5.2
4.8
4.6
4.4
2.9 3.8 45
3.5 3.0 45
3.1 3.1 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
229
433
658
76
144
219
50
75
112.5
914D
914D
916A
630
662
914
270
320
400
1213
2346
2953
97.8
97.9
98.1
98.2
98.0
98.2
98.0
97.6
97.9
97.7
97.0
97.4
2.0
2.8
2.5
3.5
5.4
5.7
3.0
4.7
5.0
2.3 1.9 45
3.9 2.7 50
4.5 2.3 50
98.00
98.00
98.20
960
842
1036
320
280
345
150
225
300
500
916A
917
923
919
1132
2036
2325
3681
530
650
830
1400
3364
6445
6038
7841
98.3
98.4
98.6
98.8
98.5
98.3
98.7
98.9
98.2
97.8
98.4
98.7
97.8
97.3
98.1
98.5
2.0
2.9
2.0
1.4
4.8
8.8
5.7
6.8
4.4
8.1
5.2
6.8
4.0
7.7
4.9
6.6
50
55
55
60
98.30
98.50
98.60
98.70
1605
1572
1860
4033
535
524
620
1344
1.9
2.6
1.7
1.3
15
15
30
45
912D
912D
912D
349
410
504
135
210
200
390
823
1308
96.6
97.3
97.9
97.7
97.9
98.0
97.7
97.7
97.7
97.6
97.4
97.2
1.8
2.1
2.5
2.4
3.4
4.5
2.1
3.0
3.9
1.3 1.7 45
2.1 2.0 45
3.1 2.5 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
449
493
473
150
164
158
16
75
112.5
150
916A
916A
917
818
1065
1410
370
440
650
1837
2409
3349
97.9
98.1
98.3
98.2
98.3
98.5
98.0
98.0
98.3
97.7
97.6
97.9
2.0
1.8
1.9
9.3
3.8
3.9
4.3
3.3
3.7
3.8 2.0 50
2.8 1.8 50
3.2 1.8 50
98.00
98.20
98.30
937
1754
1593
312
584
531
225
300
923
919
2030
3041
830
1100
4096
4646
98.4
98.5
98.7
98.8
98.5
98.7
98.3
98.5
1.6
1.4
5.4
5.6
5.4
6.1
5.2 1.5 55
6.0 1.2 55
98.50
98.60
2568
3753
856
1251
17
18
Typical values for copper windings. Refer to Pages 19.1-2319.1-25 for typical data for aluminum windings. Up-to-date design data is available at
www.eaton.com.
19
20
21
CA08104001E
19.1-27
November 2013
Sheet 19 033
Technical Data
Table 19.1-20. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated, TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound
kVA
Frame
Weight
Losses in Watts
% Regulation
No
Load
25% 50% 75% Full

Load
100%
PF
80%
PF
Total at
Rise +20
%
Imp.
Sound
Level dB
TP1
Efficiency
Inrush
Absolute
Max.
Practical
Max.
ii
15
30
45
912D
912D
912D
251
326
479
100
165
220
635
1134
1505
96.8
97.4
97.6
97.1
97.5
97.8
96.6
97.1
97.3
96.0
96.5
96.8
3.7
3.5
3.0
5.0
5.3
5.6
4.2
4.3
5.0
2.1 3.6 45
2.9 3.2 45
4.1 2.9 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
265
504
670
88
168
223
75
112.5
150
914D
916A
916A
463
977
1212
300
440
540
2883
2952
3716
97.9
98.1
98.3
97.7
98.2
98.4
97.1
97.9
98.0
96.4
97.5
97.6
3.6
2.6
2.4
7.1
6.6
6.0
5.9
5.6
5.1
4.7 3.4 50
5.1 2.2 50
4.6 2.1 50
98.00
98.20
98.30
975
1031
1574
325
344
524
225
300
917
923
1815
2400
650
830
5420
6259
98.4
98.6
98.5
98.6
98.1
98.4
97.7
98.0
2.4
2.2
7.6
6.3
6.5
5.2
6.2 2.1 55
4.9 1.8 55
98.50
98.60
1694
2594
565
864
15
30
45
912D
912D
912D
256
341
526
95
165
220
702
1007
1200
96.7
97.4
97.9
96.9
97.6
98.1
96.3
97.3
97.9
95.6
96.8
97.5
4.2
3.0
2.3
5.7
4.8
5.0
5.0
4.2
4.1
2.9 4.0 45
3.1 2.8 45
3.5 2.2 50
97.00
97.50
97.70
279
466
633
93
155
211
75
112.5
150
914D
916A
917
759
1030
1631
300
470
650
1715
2735
3076
98.1
98.0
98.2
98.3
98.3
98.5
98.1
98.0
98.3
97.8
97.7
98.1
1.9
2.2
1.7
5.0
4.4
4.9
4.5
3.8
4.5
4.1 1.9 50
3.2 2.0 50
4.2 1.6 50
98.00
98.20
98.30
929
1171
1250
309
390
416
225
300
918A
923
1965
2337
690
830
4434
6127
98.5
98.6
98.6
98.7
98.4
98.4
98.1
98.0
1.9
2.0
5.6
5.2
5.3
4.7
5.0 1.7 55
4.3 1.8 55
98.50
98.60
1979
2187
659
729
15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
365
424
653
165
210
290
371
787
977
97.0
97.3
97.4
98.0
97.9
98.1
98.1
97.8
98.1
98.0
97.6
98.0
1.5
2.0
1.6
2.3
3.2
3.1
2.1
2.9
3.0
1.5 1.4 45
2.2 1.9 45
2.5 1.5 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
499
659
925
166
219
308
75
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
923
640
1264
1825
2096
350
560
650
890
1951
2009
2873
4449
97.8
98.2
98.5
98.3
98.1
98.7
98.7
98.6
97.8
98.6
98.5
98.4
97.5
98.4
98.2
98.1
2.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
5.2
4.3
6.1
6.5
4.9
4.2
6.4
6.6
4.4
4.0
6.3
6.4
50
50
50
55
98.00
98.20
98.30
98.50
854
1449
1288
2292
284
483
429
764
2.1
1.3
1.5
1.6

15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
346
390
623
165
190
235
461
908
1328
96.2
97.2
97.6
97.4
97.7
97.9
97.5
97.5
97.6
97.3
97.1
97.2
2.1
2.6
2.5
3.0
4.0
3.2
2.5
3.3
2.8
1.6 2.0 45
2.3 2.4 45
1.4 2.4 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
527
579
854
176
193
285
75
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
923
848
1080
1431
2129
370
455
600
830
2402
2991
3686
4250
97.7
98.0
98.2
98.4
97.9
98.2
98.3
98.6
97.5
97.9
98.1
98.4
97.0
97.4
97.7
98.2
2.8
2.4
2.3
2.0
5.7
4.3
5.1
6.3
4.5
3.5
4.2
5.4
3.6
2.7
3.7
5.1
50
50
50
55
98.00
98.20
98.30
98.50
1046
1180
1250
2771
348
393
416
923
2.7
2.3
2.1
1.5
9
10
11

15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
341
444
598
165
188
250
378
824
1476
96.6
97.1
97.4
97.8
97.8
97.7
97.9
97.6
97.4
97.9
97.3
96.9
1.5
2.2
2.8
2.4
3.6
4.6
2.1
3.1
4.0
1.6 1.4 45
2.2 2.1 45
2.9 2.7 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
472
620
939
157
206
313
75
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
923
894
1054
1399
2088
350
460
600
890
2128
2612
3185
4382
97.9
98.1
98.2
98.3
98.1
98.3
98.5
98.6
97.9
98.1
98.3
98.4
97.5
97.8
98.0
98.2
1.9
2.0
2.0
1.8
5.1
4.3
5.9
6.1
4.6
3.3
5.4
5.7
4.0
2.6
5.1
5.5
50
50
50
55
98.00
98.20
98.30
98.50
847
1375
1379
2490
282
458
460
830
2.4
1.9
1.7
1.6
12
13
14

15
30
45
912D
912D
914D
370
490
635
165
188
290
382
595
1189
96.7
97.4
97.4
97.8
98.2
97.9
97.9
98.2
97.8
97.8
98.1
97.5
1.5
1.4
2.1
2.4
3.0
3.9
2.2
2.8
3.5
1.6 1.4 45
2.5 1.4 45
2.8 2.0 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
472
592
736
157
197
245
15
75
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
918A
919
987
854
1807
4091
410
560
650
1200
1351
2039
3053
2364
97.7
98.1
98.0
98.2
98.9
98.6
98.4
98.9
98.4
98.5
98.3
99.1
98.3
98.3
98.0
99.1
1.4
1.4
1.7
0.6
2.8
4.2
4.3
2.7
2.6
4.3
4.0
2.9
2.3
4.1
3.7
2.8
98.00
98.20
98.30
98.50
1590
1374
1472
4321
530
458
490
1440
16

1.3
1.3
1.6
0.5
50
50
50
55
www.eaton.com.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 19 034
Technical Data
i
ii
Table 19.1-21. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated and HMT, TP-1 and CSL-3 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound
kVA
Weight
Losses in Watts
% Regulation
No
Load
25% 50% 75% Full

Load
100%
PF
80%
PF
15
30
45
Practical
Max.
98.0
98.3
98.1
97.7
98.0
97.7
2.0
1.7
2.2
3.7
2.7
4.1
3.2
2.3
3.5
2.6 1.9 45
1.6 1.7 45
2.8 2.1 45
98.00
98.30
98.50
307
779
617
102
260
206
75
915D
112.5 917
150
917
870
1526
1665
225
350
350
1529
1768
2419
98.5
98.6
97.8
98.6
98.8
98.9
98.4
98.7
98.7
98.0
98.5
98.4
1.9
1.3
1.5
4.9
3.5
4.5
4.4
3.1
4.2
4.1 1.7 50
2.8 1.3 50
3.9 1.4 50
98.60
98.80
98.90
993
2447
1976
331
816
659
225
300
2094
3900
650
750
3650
3731
98.9
98.9
98.9
99.1
98.8
99.0
98.5
98.8
1.5
1.3
5.4
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.1 1.3 55
5.1 1.0 55
99.00
99.04
2686
2990
895
997
97.4
98.0
98.6
98.0
98.3
98.5
98.0
98.1
98.2
97.7
97.8
97.7
2.0
1.9
2.3
3.7
2.7
4.1
3.2
2.4
3.5
2.6 1.8 45
1.5 1.8 45
2.8 2.1 45
98.00
98.30
98.50
287
780
603
96
260
201
98.5
98.6
98.8
98.8
98.6
98.9
98.9
98.9
98.3
98.8
98.7
98.7
98.0
98.6
98.4
98.4
1.9
1.2
1.6
1.7
4.0
3.0
4.5
5.5
3.6
2.7
4.2
5.2
3.1
2.5
4.0
5.0
50
50
50
55
98.60
98.80
98.90
99.00
958
2480
1930
2778
319
827
643
926
918A
919
Type KT-9 115C Rise CSL-3 Efficient
915D
917
917
918A
870
1526
1665
2094
210
350
350
650
12
Inrush
Absolute
Max.
98.1
98.4
98.5
75
112.5
150
225
11
Efficiency
97.6
98.1
98.5
78
125
135
10
Sound
Level dB
359
636
1076
335
406
635
78
125
135
912D
912D
915D
325
370
635
15
30
45
%
Imp.
912D
912D
915D
Total at
Rise +20
Type KT-13 115C Rise CSL-3 Efficient
1
2
Frame
353
670
1075
1551
1583
2463
3766
1.8
1.1
1.4
1.4
Type NON HMT 115C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efficient

15
30
45
912D
912D
915D
362
430
627
80
100
170
527
1040
1368
97.6
98.3
98.3
97.7
98.0
98.2
97.3
97.4
97.7
96.7
96.7
97.2
3.2
3.2
2.8
5.9
6.2
6.0
5.1
5.4
5.2
4.2 3.0 45
4.4 3.1 45
4.4 2.7 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
75
916A
112.5 917
150
918A
926
1628
2001
250
400
500
2096
2515
2688
98.4
98.4
98.5
98.3
98.5
98.7
97.9
98.3
98.6
97.4
97.9
98.3
2.6
2.0
1.6
7.0
5.5
5.6
6.2
4.9
5.2
5.7 2.5 50
4.5 1.9 50
5.0 1.5 50
98.00
98.20
98.30
225
300
3596
3891
590
800
3310
4854
98.8
98.7
98.9
98.9
98.8
98.7
98.6
98.4
1.5
1.7
6.2
7.1
6.0
7.0
5.9 1.2 55
6.8 1.4 55
98.50
98.60
919X
919X
Type THR HMT 115C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efficient

15
30
45
912D
912D
915D
450
610
80
100
170
708
1409
1374
97.1
98.0
98.2
97.0
97.4
98.1
96.4
96.5
97.7
95.5
95.6
97.1
4.3
4.7
2.8
7.4
8.0
4.8
6.3
6.8
4.2
4.7 4.2 45
5.2 4.4 45
3.2 2.7 45
97.00
97.50
97.70
75
916A
112.5 917
150
918A
868
1643
250
400
500
2341
2685
3304
98.2
98.3
98.5
98.1
98.4
98.6
97.6
98.1
98.3
97.0
97.7
97.9
2.9
2.2
2.0
6.6
5.5
6.7
5.8
5.0
6.3
5.0 2.8 50
4.6 2.0 50
6.0 1.9 50
98.00
98.20
98.30
225
300
3370
3894
590
800
3712
4688
98.7
98.9
98.8
99.0
98.7
98.8
98.4
98.5
1.7
1.7
6.6
7.4
6.4
7.2
6.2 1.4 55
7.1 1.3 55
98.50
98.60

919X
919X
www.eaton.com.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
19.1-29
November 2013
Sheet 19 035
Dimensions
DimensionsNEMA TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT TP-1 Types
i
ii
Outside
Width
Outside
Width
Top
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Height
Front
Left
Top
Front
Outside
Height
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
5
Left
Left
Front
Drawing 1
7
8
Outside
Length
9
Outside
Length
10
Drawing 2
Drawing 3
Figure 19.1-5. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsVentilated Transformers, NEMA TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT TP-1 Types
Table 19.1-22. Ventilated TransformersApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame
11
12
Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height
Width
Length
FR816
FR818
FR819
1
1
2
31.30 (795.0)
37.59 (954.8)
42.03 (1067.6)
22.89 (581.4)
22.89 (581.4)
24.22 (615.2)
18.39 (467.2)
20.36 (517.10
23.84 (605.5)
14
FR820
FR814, FR814E
FR821
2
2
2
42.03 (1067.6)
62.91 (1597.9)
62.91 (1597.9)
24.22 (615.2)
29.97 (761.2)
29.97 (761.2)
23.84 (605.5)
33.97 (862.8)
33.97 (862.8)
15
FR912B, FR912D
FR914D
FR915D
1
1
1
30.00 (762.0)
39.00 (990.6)
39.00 (990.6)
23.00 (584.2)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
16.50 (419.1)
22.00 (558.8)
22.00 (558.8)
16
FR916A
FR917
FR918A
2
2
2
48.56 (1233.4)
56.17 (1426.7)
62.18 (1579.4)
28.22 (716.8)
31.44 (798.6)
31.44 (798.6)
23.42 (594.9)
24.67 (626.6)
30.68 (779.3)
17
FR923
FR919, FR919E, FR919X
FR920, FR920E, FR920X
FR922
2
3
3
3
57.54 (1461.5)
75.00 (1905.0)
75.00 (1905.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.69 (931.9)
44.20 (1122.7)
44.20 (1122.7)
69.26 (1759.2)
32.65 (829.3)
36.23 (920.2)
36.23 (920.2)
42.65 (1083.3)
13
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 19 036
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EP
Outside
Width
ii
Top
Outside
Length
Top
Outside
Outside
Length
2
3
Outside
Length
Height
ack
Right
Outside
Height
Right Back
Drawing 6
Drawing 7
Outside
Height
Right
Back
Drawing 8
Outside
Width
4
5
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Width
6
7
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Width
Top
Right
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Right
Top
Back
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
Back
Right
Back
9
Drawing 10
10
Drawing 11
Drawing 9
11
12
13
Figure 19.1-6. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EP) Single-Phase

Table 19.1-23. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EP)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame
Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height
Width
Length
FR52
FR54
FR55
6
6
6
8.91 (226.3)
8.91 (226.3)
8.91 (226.3)
4.11 (104.4)
4.11 (104.4)
4.11 (104.4)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
FR56
FR57
FR58A
7
7
7
8.97 (227.8)
8.97 (227.8)
11.28 (286.5)
4.87 (123.7)
4.87 (123.7)
5.99 (152.1)
4.06 (103.1)
4.91 (124.7)
5.75 (146.1)
FR59A
FR67
FR68
7
7
7
11.28 (286.5)
13.41 (340.6)
13.41 (340.6)
5.99 (152.1)
6.37 (161.8)
6.37 (161.8)
5.75 (146.1)
6.52 (165.6)
6.52 (165.6)
16
FR176
FR177
FR301
8
9
11
14.25 (361.9)
16.00 (406.4)
22.26 (565.4)
7.69 (195.3)
10.38 (263.7)
12.71 (322.8)
8.00 (203.2)
9.89 (251.2)
12.79 (324.9)
17
FR178
FR302
FR304
9
11
11
16.00 (406.4)
25.26 (641.6)
25.26 (641.6)
10.38 (263.7)
12.71 (322.8)
14.72 (373.9)
9.89 (251.2)
12.79 (324.9)
14.82 (376.4)
18
FR179
FR180
FR182
FR190
9
9
10
10
19.00 (482.6)
19.00 (482.6)
23.31 (592.1)
26.31 (668.3)
13.38 (339.9)
13.38 (339.9)
16.35 (415.3)
16.35 (415.3)
10.52 (267.2)
10.52 (267.2)
14.12 (358.6)
14.12 (358.6)
14
15
19
20
21
CA08104001E
19.1-31
November 2013
Sheet 19 037
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EP
Outside
Width
ii
Top
1
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Top
Front
Left
Outside
Width
3
Top
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
4
Drawing 13
Front
Left
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Right
Back
6
7
Drawing 12
Drawing 14
Figure 19.1-7. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EP) Single-Phase
8
9
Table 19.1-24. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EPT)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Frame
Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height
Width
Length
FR132
FR300A
FR57P
13
12
14
20.67 (525.0)
28.24 (717.3)
9.34 (237.2)
19.02 (483.1)
22.42 (569.5)
4.45 (113.0)
13.59 (345.2)
14.06 (357.1)
5.18 (131.6)
11
FR58AP
FR567P
FR568P
14
14
14
11.68 (296.7)
13.03 (330.9)
13.78 (350.0)
4.99 (126.7)
5.74 (145.8)
6.22 (158.0)
5.99 (152.1)
6.56 (166.6)
6.32 (160.5)
12
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 19 038
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EPT
Outside
Length
Outside
Width
ii
Outside
Width
Top
Top
Top
Outside
Height
2
Front
Outside
Height
Outside
Height
Front
Left
Left
Left
Outside
Length
Front
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
5
Drawing 15
6
7
8
9
10
11
Drawing 16
Drawing 17
Figure 19.1-8. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EPT) Three-Phase

Table 19.1-25. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EPT)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame
Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height
Width
Length
FR201
FR102
FR103
15
15
15
13.40 (340.4)
13.12 (333.2)
15.90 (403.9)
15.93 (404.6
19.59 (497.6)
16.93 (430.0)
8.26 (209.8)
7.09 (180.1)
10.01 (254.3)
FR200
FR97
FR95
15
15
15
15.90 (403.9)
15.19 (385.8)
17.38 (441.5)
16.93 (430.0)
25.68 (652.3)
20.00 (508.0)
10.01 (254.3)
8.38 (212.9)
10.52 (267.2)
FR243
FR96
FR244
FR245
16
15
16
17
17.38 (441.5)
16.19 (411.2)
28.15 (715.0)
32.06 (814.3)
20.00 (508.0)
29.68 (753.9)
26.58 (675.1)
30.29 (769.4)
10.52 (267.2)
9.42 (239.3)
14.66 (372.4)
15.68 (398.3)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
19.1-33
November 2013
Sheet 19 039
Dimensions
i
Outside
Width
ii
1
Top
Outside
Width
Front
Top
Outside
Height
Outside
Height
Left
Left
Front
6
7
8
Outside
Length
Outside
Length
Drawing 4
10
Figure 19.1-9. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsCSL-3 Transformers

Table 19.1-26. CSL-3 TransformersApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame
9
Drawing 5
11
Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height
Width
Length
912B, 912D
915D
917
4
4
4
30.00 (762.0)
39.18 (995.2)
56.18 (1427.0)
23.00 (584.2)
29.00 (736.6)
31.25 (793.8)
16.50 (419.1)
22.00 (558.8)
24.24 (615.7)
918A
919
5
5
62.18 (1579.4)
75.00 (1905.0)
31.25 (793.8)
44.46 (1129.3)
30.25 (768.4)
35.75 (908.1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

November 2013
Sheet 19 040
Dimensions
i
Outside
Width
ii
1
2
3
Top
Outside
Width
Top
Front
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Front
Left
Outside
Height
Outside
Height
5
6
Top
Outside
Length
Left
Left
Front
Drawing 26
7
8
Outside
Length
Outside
Length
9
Drawing 27
10
11
12
Drawing 28
Figure 19.1-10. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsTotally Enclosed Nonventilated Transformers

Table 19.1-27. Totally Enclosed Nonventilated Transformers
Frame
Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height
Width
Length
13
FR818N
FR819N
FR820N
26
27
27
37.59 (954.8)
42.03 (1067.6)
42.03 (1067.6)
22.89 (581.4)
24.22 (615.2)
24.22 (615.2)
20.36 (517.1)
23.84 (605.5)
23.84 (605.5)
14
FR814N
FR912BN, FR912DN
FR914DN
27
26
26
62.91 (1597.9)
30.00 (762.0)
39.18 (995.2)
29.97 (761.2)
23.00 (584.2)
29.00 (736.6)
33.97 (862.8)
16.50 (419.1)
22.00 (558.8)
15
FR915DN
FR916AN
FR917N
26
27
27
39.18 (995.2)
46.58 (1183.1)
56.18 (1427.0)
29.00 (736.6)
28.22 (716.8)
31.44 (798.6)
22.00 (558.8)
23.42 (594.9)
24.67 (626.8)
FR918AN
FR923N
FR919N
FR920N
27
27
28
28
62.18 (1579.4)
57.50 (1460.5)
75.00 (1905.0)
75.00 (1905.0)
31.44 (798.6)
36.69 (931.9)
44.21 (1122.9)
44.21 (1122.9)
30.68 (779.3)
32.65 (829.3)
36.23 (920.2)
36.23 (920.2)
16
17
18
See Eaton Catalog CA08100003E,

Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 2
Commercial Distribution, Tab 2 for
product information and frame
cross-reference data.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

FAQ
November 2013
19.1-35
Sheet 19 041
Product Selection
Frequently Asked Questions

About Transformers
What are Insulation Classes?
Can 60 Hz transformers be used at other frequencies?

Transformers rated for 60 Hz can be applied to circuits with
a higher frequency, as long as the nameplate voltages are
not exceeded. The higher the frequency that you apply to a
60 Hz transformer, the less voltage regulation you will have.
60 Hz transformers may be used at lower frequencies, but
only at reduced voltages corresponding to the reduction in
frequency. For example, a 480120V 60 Hz transformer
can carry rated kVA at 50 Hz but only when applied as a
400100V transformer (50/60 x 480 = 400).
Can single-phase transformers be used on a three-phase source?

Yes. Any single-phase transformer can be used on a threephase source by connecting the primary terminals of the
single-phase transformer to any two wires of a three-phase
system. It does not matter whether the three-phase source is
three-phase three-wire or three-phase four-wire. The output
of the transformer will be single-phase.
Can transformers be used to create three-phase power from a

single-phase system?
No. Single-phase transformers alone cannot be used to
create the phase-shifts required for a three-phase system.
Phase-shifting devices (reactors or capacitors) or phase
converters in conjunction with transformers are required
to change single-phase power to three-phase.
What considerations need to be taken into account when

operating transformers at high altitudes?
At altitudes greater than 3300 ft (1000m), the density of
the air is lesser than at lower elevations. This reduces the
ability of the air surrounding a transformer to cool it, so the
temperature rise of the transformer is increased. Therefore,
when a transformer is being installed at altitudes greater
than 3300 ft (1000m) above sea level, it is necessary to
derate the nameplate kVA by 0.3% for each 330 ft (100m)
in excess of 3300 feet.
What considerations need to be taken into account when

operating transformers where the ambient temperature is high?
Eatons dry-type transformers are designed in accordance
with ANSI standards to operate in areas where the average
maximum ambient temperature is 40C. For operation in
ambient temperatures above 40C, there are two options:
1. Order a custom-designed transformer made for the
specific application.
2. Derate the nameplate kVA of a standard transformer
by 8% for each 10C of ambient above 40C.
What is the normal life expectancy of a transformer?

When a transformer is operated under ANSI/IEEE basic loading
conditions (ANSI C57.96), the normal life expectancy of a transformer is 20 years. The ANSI/IEEE basic loading conditions are:
A. The transformer is continuously loaded at rated kVA
and rated voltages.
B. The average temperature of the ambient air during
any 24-hour period is equal to 30C and at no time
exceeds 40C.
Insulation classes were originally used to distinguish

insulating materials operating at different temperatures.
In the past, letters were used for the different designations.
Recently, insulation system temperatures (C) have replaced
the letters designations.
ii
1
Table 19.1-28. Insulation Classes

Previous
Designation
Insulation System
Rating (C)
Class A
105
Class B
150
Class F
180
Class H
220
Class R
220
2
3
4
How do you know if the enclosure temperature is too hot?

UL and CSA standards strictly regulate the highest temperature that an enclosure can reach. For ventilated transformers,
the temperature of the enclosure should not increase by more
than 50C in a 40C ambient at full rated current. For encapsulated transformers, the temperature of the enclosure should
not increase by more than 65C in a 25C ambient at full rated
current. This means that it is permissible for the temperature
of the enclosure to reach 90C (194F). Although this temperature is very warm to the touch, it is within the allowed standards. A thermometer should be used to measure enclosure
temperatures, not your hand.
Can transformers be reverse-connected (reverse-fed)?
Yes, with limitations. Eatons single-phase transformers

rated 3 kVA and larger can be reverse-connected without any
loss of kVA capacity or any adverse effects. Transformers
rated 2 kVA and below, because there is a turns ratio
compensation on the low voltage winding that adjusts
voltage between no load and full load conditions, should
not be reverse-fed.
6
7
8
10
11
Three-phase transformers with either delta-delta or deltawye configurations can also be reverse-connected for stepup operation. When reverse-feeding a delta-wye connected
transformer, there are two important considerations to take
into account: (1) The neutral is not connected, only the
three-phase wires of the wye system are connected; and
(2) the ground strap between X0 and the enclosure must
be removed. Due to high inrush currents that may be
created in these applications, it is recommended that you
do not reverse-feed transformers rated more than 75 kVA.
The preferred solution is to purchase an Eaton step-up
transformer designed specifically for your application.
12
Can transformers be connected in parallel?
16
Yes, with certain restrictions. For single-phase transformers

being connected in parallel, the voltages and impedances
of the transformers must be equal (impedances must be
within 7.5% of each other). For three-phase transformers,
the same restrictions apply as for single-phase transformers,
plus the phase shift of the transformers must be the same.
For example, a delta-wyeconnected transformer (30 phase
shift) must be connected in parallel with another delta-wye
connected transformer, not a delta-deltaconnected transformer (0 phase shift).
C. The altitude where the transformer is installed does not

exceed 3300 ft (1000m).
CA08104001E
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21

FAQ
November 2013
Sheet 19 042
Product Selection
i
ii
Why is the impedance of a transformer important?
How Can I Reduce Transformer Sound Levels?
The impedance of a transformer is important because it is

used to determine the interrupting rating and trip rating of
the circuit protection devices on the load side of the transformer. To calculate the maximum short-circuit current on
the load side of a transformer, use the following formula:
All transformers emit some audible sound due mainly to

the vibration generated in their core by alternating flux.
NEMA ST-20 defines the maximum average sound levels
for transformers.
1
2
Load Current (Amps)

Maximum Short-Circuit = Full
-----------------------------------------------------------------Load Current (Amps)
Transformer Impedance
Full load current for single-phase circuits is:
Nameplate Volt-Amps
----------------------------------------------------------Load (output) Voltage
and for three-phase circuits the full load current is:
Nameplate Volt-Amps
-------------------------------------------------------------------Load (output) Volts 3
6
7
8
9
Example: For a standard three-phase, 75 kVA transformer,

rated 480V delta primary and 208Y/120V secondary (catalog
number V48M28T75J) and impedance equal to 5.1%, the full
load current is:
75,000 VA
--------------------------------= 208.2A
208V x 1.732
The maximum short-circuit load current is:
208.2A = 4082.4A
------------------0.051
10
The circuit breaker or fuse on the secondary side of this

transformer would have to have a minimum interrupting
capacity of 4083A at 208V. NEMA ST-20 (1992).
11
A similar transformer with lower impedance would require

a primary circuit breaker or fuse with a higher interrupting
capacity.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
What clearances are required around transformers when they

are installed?
All dry-type transformers depend upon the circulation of
air for cooling; therefore, it is important that the flow of air
around a transformer not be impeded. UL 1561 requires that
there be no less than 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) clearance
between any side of a transformer with ventilation openings
and any wall or obstruction. In compliance with NEC 450-9,
Eatons ventilated transformers have a note on their nameplates requiring a minimum of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
clearance from the ventilation openings and walls or other
obstructions. This clearance only addresses the ventilation
needs of the transformer. There may be additional local
codes and standards that affect installation clearances.
Table 19.1-29. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01 Maximum Audible

Sound Levels for 100V Class Transformers (dB 40)
kVA
Ventilated
Transformers
Encapsulated
Transformers
09
1050
51150
151300
40
45
50
55
45
50
55
57
301500
501700
7011000
10011500
60
62
64
65
All Eaton transformers are designed to have audible sound

levels lower than those required by NEMA ST-20. However,
consideration should be given to the specific location of
a transformer and its installation to minimize the potential
for sound transmission to surrounding structures and sound
reflection. The following installation methods should be
considered:
1. If possible, mount the transformer away from corners
of walls or ceilings. For installations that must be near
a corner, use sound-absorbing materials on the walls
and ceiling if necessary to eliminate reflection.
2. Provide a solid foundation for mounting the transformer
and use vibration dampening mounts if not already
provided in the transformer. Eatons ventilated transformers contain a built-in vibration dampening system
to minimize and isolate sound transmission. However,
supplemental vibration dampening mounts installed
between the floor and the transformer may provide
3. Make electrical connections to the transformer using
flexible conduit.
4. Locate the transformer in an area where audible sound
is not offensive to building inhabitants.
5. Install low sound transformers (up to 5 dB below
NEMA ST-20 sound limits).
Transformers should not be mounted in such a manner that

one unit will contribute to the additional heating of another
unit, beyond allowable temperature limits, for example,
where two units are mounted on a wall one above the other.
19
20
21
CA08104001E
November 2013

FAQ
19.1-37
Sheet 19 043
Product Selection
Why are CSL-3 transformers offered, and when should they
be used?
There is still a lot of confusion on the use of CSL-3
transformers. There currently is no legal requirement to use
CSL-3 transformers; however, their use provides the following
benefits in the form of lower losses and operating costs,
lower carbon footprint and lower heat rejection, and lower
air-conditioning requirements in a project. Currently (circa
2010) within the U.S., the minimum efficiency levels for low
voltage transformers legislated by Congress are equivalent
to TP-1/CSL-1. CSL-3 offers additional energy savings above
and beyond TP-1 based on 10 CFR Part 431Energy
Conservation Program for Commercial Equipment
Distribution Transformers Energy Conservation Standards;
Final Rule published October 2007.
CSL-3 transformers provide 3040% less losses than NEMA
TP-1 transformers. By using CSL-3 transformers, increased
efficiencies can help to gain LEED point (because LEED only
incorporates regulated losses, the comparison of No Load
Losses against standard NEMA TP-1 transformers can be
used to document energy savings). It is recommended that
the design engineer understand the transformer application
within a project so that the cost savings and return can be
accurately determined. In addition, always make sure that
the CSL-3 performance data obtained from manufacturers
references a NEMA or DOE standard and is verified by a
third-party independent test lab verses manufacturerdetermined standards and self-certified documentation.
Eatons CSL-3 compliant transformers are Type E3, such
as 75 kVA, style number N48M28F75CUE3.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage
20.0-1
April 2015
Metal-Enclosed Drawout
SwitchgearLow Voltage
Sheet 20 001
CA08104001E
Contents

Low Voltage
Magnum DS
(For detailed information on Magnum
DS breakers, refer to Tab 26.)
General Description
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1
Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-2
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-3
Instrumentation/Metering . . 20.1-4
Accessories/Options. . . . . . 20.1-4
Magnum DS Front
Accessible Switchgear. . . 20.1-5
Magnum DS ArcResistant Switchgear . . . . 20.1-6
Magnum DS Power
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . 20.1-7
Magnum DS Switchgear
Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-9
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System . . . . 20.1-10
Series NRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-13
Metering and
Monitoring Devices . . . . . 20.1-16
Technical Data
Voltage and Bus Ratings . . 20.1-18
Heat Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-18
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-18
Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . 20.1-20
Breaker Control Voltages . . . 20.1-21
CT Metering Accuracies. . . 20.1-23
Voltage Transformers. . . . . 20.1-23
Control Power Transformers 20.1-23
Layout Dimensions
Breaker Arrangements . . . . 20.1-27
Floor Plan/Conduit Area . . . . 20.1-36
Switchgear Section View . . . 20.1-38
Outdoor Enclosure . . . . . . . 20.1-41
Arc-Resistant
Layout Restrictions . . . . . 20.1-43
Center of Gravity/Weights . 20.1-48
Specifications
See Eatons Product Specification
Guide, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format:
1995
2010
Section 16426A
Section 26 23 00.11

Low Voltage and DSLII
For DS/DSII or DSL/DSLII Switchgear,
please consult factory at 1-800-257-3278.
Specifications
See Eatons Product Specification
Guide, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format:
1995
2010
Section 16426B
Section 26 23 00.13
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
20.0-2 Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage

April 2015
Sheet 20 002
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
20.1-1
Sheet 20 003
General Description
Standard Construction
Eatons Magnum DS power circuit

breaker switchgear is backed by
40 years of power circuit breaker and
switchgear development that have
set the industry standards for quality,
reliability, maintainability and
extended operating life, when it
comes to protecting and monitoring
low voltage electrical distribution
systems. Magnum DS switchgear is
designed to meet the changing needs
of our customers by providing:
Lower installation and

maintenance costs
Higher interrupting ratings and withstand ratings
Better coordination capability
Increased tripping sensitivity
Enhanced safety measures
Higher quality, reliability and
maintainability
Communications and power
quality monitoring and
measuring capabilities
Flexible layouts that maximize
use of capital by minimizing
equipment footprint
Magnum DS switchgear can meet the

needs of general applications, service
entrances, harsh environments, multiple source transfers, special grounding
systems and many others.
With a modern design, Magnum DS
metal-enclosed low voltage switchgear
and power circuit breakers provide:
100% rated, fully selective

protection
Integral microprocessor-based
breaker tripping systems
Two-step stored-energy breaker
closing
Standard 100 kA short-circuit
bus bracing
Optional 150 and 200 kA
short-circuit bus bracing
Optional metal barriers to isolate the
cable compartment from the
bus compartment
Both indoor and outdoor aisle and
aisleless enclosures
Full range of safety solutions
dealing with arc flash hazard
and operator error
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Magnum DS breakers are designed to:
Structure Features
Standard finish: Gray paint finish

(ANSI 61) using a modern, completely
automated and continuously monitored electrostatic powder coating.
This continually monitored system
includes spray de-grease and clean,
spray rinse, iron phosphate spray
coating spray rinse, non-chemical seal,
oven drying, electrostatic powder
spray paint coating and oven curing.
ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.16,

C37.17, C37.50
UL 1066
Magnum DS switchgear conforms to
the following standards:
CSA C22.2, No. 31-M89

ANSI C37.20.1
ANSI C37.51
UL Standard 1558 and UL
Standard 891
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
Built in an ISO certified facility
Maximum ratings for Magnum DS

switchgear are 600 Vac, 10,000A
continuous cross bus and 200,000A
short-circuit capacity.

Many other features for coordinated,

safe, convenient, trouble-free, and
economical control and protection of
low voltage distribution systems are
also provided.
CA08104001E
7
8
9
10
11
Integral base: The ruggedly formed

base greatly increases the rigidity of
the structure, reduces the possibility of
damage during the installation of the
equipment, and is suitable for rolling,
jacking and handling. A lifting angle
is permanently welded into the bus
compartment structure for increased
strength. The bottom frame structure
members are indented to allow the
insertion of a pry bar.
12
Heavy-duty door hinges: Each

breaker door is mounted with hinge
pins. Removal of the door is easily
accomplished by just lifting the hinge
pin. This allows easy access to the
breaker internal compartment for
inspection and maintenance.
16
Rear cover/doors: In Magnum DS

switchgear, standard rear bolted
covers are provided. They are split
into two sections to facilitate handling
during removal and installation.
Optional rear doors are also available.
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 004
General Description
i
ii
1
Through-the-door design: The

following functions may be performed
without the need to open the circuit
breaker doorlever the breaker
between positions, operate manual
charging system and view the spring
charge status flag, close and open
breaker, view and adjust trip unit and
read the breaker rating nameplate.
2
3
4
6
7
Through-the-Door Design
9
10
11
12
13
Cassette design: The breaker cassette

supports the breaker in the cell, as well
as on the movable extension rails
when the breaker is placed into or
removed from the cell. The extension
rails allow the breaker to be drawn
out without having to de-energize the
entire switchgear lineup.
Accessibility: When the door is open or
removed, each breaker compartment
provides front access to isolated,
vertical wireways, primary disconnects, cell current transformers and
other breaker compartment accessories
for ease of field wiring and troubleshooting field connections.
14
15
18
21
bar is the heart of the Magnum DS

vertical bus. This configuration
provides a much higher mechanical
strength. To further demonstrate
the strength and rigidity of this bus
system, it has been verified through
testing to withstand 85,000 A shortcircuit for a full 60 cycles.
Interference interlocks: Supplied on

breakers and in compartments where
the compartments are of the same
physical size. Interference interlocks
ensure an incorrect breaker cannot
be inserted.
Optional key interlock (switchgear
mounted): This mechanism holds the
breaker cell mechanically trip-free to
prevent electrical or manual closing.
Breaker can be stored in compartment,
and completely removed for maintenance or for use as a spare without
disturbing the interlock. Modification
of the breaker is not required. An
additional single cylinder breaker
mounted key interlock is available
as an option.
Optional mechanical interlock:
Available between adjacent breakers
to ensure the proper sequence of
operation between two circuit breakers
or a circuit breaker and a fuse truck.
Buses and connections: Vertical

and cross bus ratings in Magnum DS
switchgear are based on a UL and
ANSI standard temperature rise of
65 C above a maximum ambient air
temperature of 40 C. As an option,
55C temp rise over a maximum
ambient air temp of 40 C is available.
17
20
Optional safety shutters: Positive

acting safety shutters that isolate the
breaker connections to the main bus
when the breaker is withdrawn from
the cell is an option offered for additional safety beyond our standard
design. They reduce the potential
of accidental contact with live bus.
Insulating covers (boots) are
furnished on live main stationary
disconnecting contacts in compartments equipped for future breakers.
Bus Features
16
19
Bus bracing: Unique vertical bus

configuration provides an optional
industry-leading short-circuit withstand rating of 200,000 A. Standard
bracing is 100,000 A. The U shaped
Breaker inspection: When withdrawn

on the rails, breaker is completely
accessible for visual inspection; tilting is
not necessary. The rails are permanent
parts of every breaker compartment.
Closing spring automatic discharge:

Mechanical interlocking automatically
discharges the closing springs when
the breaker is removed from its
compartment.
Breaker Cell
Four-position drawout: Breakers can

be in connected, test, disconnected or
removed position. The breaker can be
moved between the connected, test
and disconnected positions while the
compartment door is closed.
Silver plating: Bolted, silver-plated

copper main buses are standard. The
plating is over the entire length of the
bar, not just at the joints. Optional
tin-plated copper buses are available.
Bus joints: All joints are bolted and
secured with Belleville-type spring
washers for maximum joint integrity.
These washers reduce the potential of
joint hardware loosening during the
change of joint temperature associated
with variations of the loads. Optional
maintenance-free hardware is also
available.
Full neutral: For four-wire applications,
the neutral bus is rated 100% of main
bus rating as standard. Neutral ratings
up to a maximum of 10,000 A are
available as an option. Additionally,
four-pole breakers can be used in
conjunction with four-wire systems.
Ground: A ground bus is furnished
the full length of the switchgear
assembly and is fitted with terminals
for purchasers connections.
Glass reinforced polyester and
Ultramid standoff insulation system:
Glass reinforced polyester has been
used on both low and medium voltage
switchgear for decades. By combining
this industry proven material with
Ultramid insulation, a total system
providing exceptional mechanical and
dielectric withstand strength, as well
as high resistance to heat, flame and
moisture, is produced. Substantial
testing to demonstrate accelerated
effects of heating and cooling on the
mechanical and dielectric properties
of this system prove it to provide
superior performance for decades
of trouble-free operation.
Bus ampacities: Vertical and cross bus

ratings in Magnum DS are 2000, 3200,
4000 and 5000 A. In addition, a 6000,
8000 and 10,000 A cross bus rating is
available. Vertical section bus is sized
per main cross bus maximum rating
or by ANSI C37.20.1 Section 7.4.1.3.
Table 11 to a maximum of 5000 A.
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
20.1-3
Sheet 20 005
General Description
Optional conductor insulation
covering: For applications requiring
additional bus protection in harsh
environments, Magnum DS switchgear
is designed for the addition of optional
conductor insulation covering, in
addition to providing full UL air
clearance without insulation. This
material is applied during the assembly
of the bus, and covers all vertical and
horizontal phase bus bars. Removable
boots provide access to section-tosection bus joints for inspection and
maintenance purposes. This insulation
is not available for vertical sections containing Series NRX breakers.
Optional Insulated Bus
Barriers: Optional grounded metal

barriers isolate the main bus and
connections from the cable compartment providing added safety to the
workers while reducing the potential
of objects falling into the bus compartment. In addition, vertical barriers
between cable sections can be added
to reduce potential hazards. Barriers
are removable to give access to the
bus compartment for inspection and
maintenance. Barriers can be either
solid metal or vented for ease of
infrared scanning.
Wiring Features
Cable compartment: The cable
compartment gives ample room
for terminating the power cables.
Removable top roof sheets allow
for easy conduit hub installation.
The floor of the cable compartment
is open to allow cable entry from
underground duct banks. Optional
floor plates are available.
Pow-R-Way
busIn addition to cable,

way and nonsegregated bus duct can
be terminated in the compartment.
Lug pad: The lugs are located on the
breaker run-backs to accommodate lug
orientations at a 45 angle to reduce
the bending radius of the cable needed
for making the connections, thus
reducing installation and maintenance
time. Mechanical setscrew type lugs
are standard. Optional NEMA
two-hole compression lugs are available as an option.
Control wireway: An isolated
vertical wireway is provided for
routing of factory and field wiring
in each switchgear section. Breaker
secondary terminal blocks are
mounted as standard above each
circuit breaker. The terminal blocks are
rated 30 A, and will accept bare wire,
ring or spade terminals for wire size
ranges of #22#10. Extruded loops are
punched in side sheets of the vertical
wireway to allow securing of customer
control wiring without the use of
adhesive wire anchors.
Control circuits may be wired in all
cells without removing the circuit
breaker. In addition, power circuits
may be connected in the rear of the
switchgear at the same time control
circuits are being wired in the front
of the switchgear.
For applications involving excessive
wiring, or nonstandard terminal blocks,
terminal blocks are mounted on the
rear frame with the power cables
where they are readily accessible for
customers connections and inspection.
Control wire: Standard wire is Type
SIS insulated stranded copper, extra
flexible No. 14 AWG minimum.
Control wire marking: Each wire

is imprinted with ink cured under ultraviolet light for durability and for easy
identification by the user. The enhanced
solvent resistance and durability of the
aerospace grade UV cure ink has been
tested for severe environments. The
imprinting is made every 3.00 inches
(76.2 mm) along the length of the wire
to make field troubleshooting easier.
The point of origin, wire designation
and point of destination are imprinted
in the following format: <origin zone/
wire name/destination zone>. Each
device has a uniquely designated zone.
< indicates the direction of
the wire origination and > indicates
the direction of the wire destination.
As an option, wire marking can be
made using sleeve type or heat
shrink sleeve type.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Control Wire Marking
Secondary terminal compartment:

There are 72 finger-safe secondary
connections for a standard frame
Magnum breaker, 60 for a narrow
frame Magnum breaker and 54 for
a Series NRX breaker. The customers
secondary terminal connections are
located at the front of the structure
behind a separate door providing
access to these connections without
the need to open the breaker
compartment door.
Short-circuiting terminal blocks:
One provided for each set of
instrumentation or relaying
application current transformers.
Shipping split connection: At each
shipping split, the control connections
are made with plug-in terminal blocks
rated 600 V, 40 A. The terminal blocks
mechanically interlock without removing the line or load connections. This
method of making the shipping split
control connections increases the
speed of installation and reduces the
potential of incorrect connections.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Optional Bus Compartment and

Vertical Section Barriers
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 006
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Instrumentation/Metering Features
Flexibility: Magnum DS switchgear
allows for a variety of metering options:
Analog switchboard type meters

such as ammeters, voltmeters,
watthour, power factor and so on
Electronic power metering such as
the Power Xpert, PX 2000, IQ 250/
260 and IQ Analyzer
Instrument door-mounted meters.
For feeder circuit instrumentation,
2% accuracy ammeters and
ammeter switches can be mounted
on the secondary contact compartment door between the breaker
compartment doors. The ammeters
and switches are immediately
associated with definite breaker
circuits. Other devices, such as
control pushbuttons, breaker control
switches, indicating lights and test
switches can be mounted on these
panels, within space limitations
See Tabs 2, 3 and 4 for Metering and
Power Management products.
Voltage transformers: Voltage
transformers are rated 10 kV BIL,
and are protected by both primary
and secondary fuses. The primary
fuses are of the current limiting type.
Instrumentationdoor-mounted
secondary terminal compartment
door: Devices, such as control pushbuttons, indicating lights, switches and
analog meters can be mounted
on these panels, within space limitations. The ammeters and switches are
immediately associated with definite
breaker circuits.
Devices Mounted on Secondary

Terminal Compartment Door
Instrument compartment door:

Devices, such as electronic power
metering and analog switchboard type
meters that do not fit on the secondary
terminal compartment door, are
mounted on the instrument compartment door or on a panel of a blank cell.
Traveling type circuit breaker lifter,

rail-mounted on top of switchgear
Floor-running portable circuit
breaker lifter and transfer truck
with manual lifting mechanism. This
requires approximately 84.00 inches
(2133.6 mm) deep front aisle space
Test cabinet for electrically operated
breakers, with pushbuttons, control
cable and receptacle, for separate
mounting. Optional space heaters
to be placed in the bottom of the
breaker, cable and bus compartments. Space heaters are provided
as standard in outdoor gear to
reduce condensation
Portable test kit (MTK2000) for
secondary injection testing and
verification of trip units. Uses
standard 120 V, 15 A, single-phase,
60 Hz supply, available from
any outlet. Allows for testing
of both Magnum DS and
Series NRX breakers
Remote racking device (MRR1000)
for both breaker racking and
operation (open/close) from a safe
distance. Mounts to any existing
Magnum DS breaker. Uses standard
120 V, 15 A, single-phase, 60 Hz
supply, available from any outlet
Current transformers: Current

transformers for metering and instrumentation are mounted in the breaker
compartments and are front accessible. Secondary wiring between the
current transformer and the standard
shorting terminal block is color-coded
for ease of identification.
Control power transformers:
Control transformers are provided
when required for AC control of circuit
breakers, space heaters and/or transformer fans. Like voltage transformers,
they are protected by current limiting
primary fuses. Non-current limiting
fuses are used on the secondary side
to protect branch circuits.
Power Xpert Meter Display
Accessories and Options Features

Switchgear accessories: Standard
accessories furnished with each
Magnum DS switchgear assembly
include:
Optional Switchgear Mounted Lifter
One breaker levering crank

Insulating covers or boots
furnished on live main stationary
disconnecting contacts in compartments equipped for future breakers
Removable cover to block opening
in the door when the breaker is
temporarily removed from its
compartment
20
21
MRR1000
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
20.1-5
Sheet 20 007
General Description
Enhanced Switchgear Options
Infrared scanning windows for bus

thermal scans
White interior panels for ease
of visibility in instrument
compartments
Maintenance-free (Torque-&-Forget)
bus hardware
Lug booting that provides additional
protection against accidental
contact to live parts in the cable
compartment
Grounding balls and covers for
protecting maintenance personnel
downstream of switchgear feeder
breakers
Electronic remote control device
that allows for breaker to open
and close away from the front
of the switchgear
Magnum DS FrontAccessible Switchgear
Magnum DS Front-Accessible Switchgear

42.00-Inch (1066.8 mm) Deep Enclosure
When floor space is limited, or room

constraints dictate that equipment
be mounted against a wall, why
compromise on switchgear design?
Eatons Magnum DS front-accessible
switchgear combines the robustness of
UL 1558 low voltage switchgear with
the flexibility of UL 891 switchboard
design. The front-accessible switchgear offering allows mounting against a
wall, or in other tight locations, where
a standard rear-accessible switchgear
lineup would not normally fit. The three
divisions of rear-accessible switchgear
are redistributed into two vertical
sections, with the breaker and the bus
in one half and cable and bus in the
other half on the right-hand side. Both
sections can be easily accessed by
operators and maintenance personnel
from the front of the switchgear.
Product Offering
Remote Control Device
i
ii
1
2
3
Features
Grounding Balls and Covers
CommercialOffice buildings, high

rise and convention centers
IndustrialAutomotive, petrochemical, pharmaceutical, pulp
and paper, utility and data centers
InstitutionalUniversities
and hospitals
GovernmentWater treatment,
federal buildings and municipalities
Critical Power OEMsGenerator
and UPS manufacturers
UL 1558
20008000 A bus
8006000 A breakers
100, 150 and 200 kA bus designs
600 Vac class
NEMA 1 indoor (corner section
available for layout flexibility)
NEMA 3R outdoor, both aisle and
aisleless enclosures
Standard 42.00-inch (1066.8 mm)

switchgear depth
Up to 4-high breaker arrangement
Breaker sections are 18.00, 22.00,
24.00 or 44.00 inches (457.2, 558.8,
609.6 or 1117.6 mm) wide depending
on breaker type and frame sizes
Cable compartments are 18.00, 22.00,
24.00, 30.00 or 44.00 inches (457.2,
558.8, 609.6, 762.0 or 1117.6 mm) wide
depending on cable or
conduit sizes
Substation arrangement, with close
coupling to dry-type or liquid-filled
transformers, where required
Benefits
Improved uptimeHighest
withstand ratings in the industry
allow for levels of selective
coordination never seen before
Improved maintainability
Dedicated secondary terminals
with separate access door and
front accessible control wireway
Increased reliabilityModular
design allows for reduced parts
for both structures and breakers
Increased safetyEnhanced
performance suite of options
Reduced installation costsFirst
UL 1558 switchgear designed to be
placed against a wall, allowing for
reduced floor plan requirements
without sacrificing design
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MTK2000 Trip Unit Test Kit
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 008
General Description
Magnum DS ArcResistant Switchgear
ii
1
Normal Operating Conditions
Standard Features
Arc-resistant features are intended

to provide an additional degree of
protection to the personnel performing
normal operating duties in close proximity to the equipment while
the equipment is operating under
normal conditions.

5
ArcGard Magnum DS Switchgear
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Arc-resistant low voltage switchgear

is a new development in the Magnum
DS line that protects operating and
maintenance personnel from dangerous arcing faults by channeling the arc
energy out the top of the switchgear.
Arc faults, caused by human error
or insulation failure, can generate
thermal energy as high as 35,000 F
and a blast equivalent to 20.7 lbs of
TNT. While arc-resistant gear does not
prevent these arcs from occurring, it
does safely redirect and contain these
arcs that do occur, regardless of the
originating location of the arc. ArcGard
Magnum DS switchgear has been
tested in all three compartments for a
full 0.5 seconds, passing ANSI Type 2
and Type 2B standards at 100 kA at
508 V and 85 kA at 635 V.
Accessibility Types
Arc-resistant switchgear performance
is defined by its accessibility type in
accordance with IEEE test guide
C37.20.7 as follows:
Type 1: Switchgear with arc-resistant
accessible front of the equipment only.
Type 2: Switchgear with arc-resistant
accessible exterior (front, back
and sides) of the equipment only.
(Type 2 incorporates Type 1.)
Type 2B: Switchgear with Type 2
accessibility plus arc-resistant in
front of the instrument/control
compartment with the instrument/
control compartment door opened.
(Type 2B incorporates Type 2.)
All doors and covers are properly

closed and latched
Pressure relief devices are free to
operate
The fault energy available to the
equipment does not exceed the
rating of the equipment (shortcircuit current and duration)
The equipment is properly
grounded
The user should also refer to

documents such as NFPA 70E, for
safety training and safe work practices
and methods of evaluating safe work
and use proper PPE when working
on or near energized equipment
with the door/cover opened or not
properly secured.
Product Offering
Arc-resistant switchgear comes
standard with:
Up to 100 kA short circuit at 508 Vac

maximum and 85 kA short circuit at
635 Vac maximum
Up to 10 kA horizontal main bus
continuous current
Up to 5 kA vertical bus
continuous current
Magnum DS power circuit
breaker frame ratings between
800 A and 6000 A
Up to four high breaker configuration with no additional layout
restrictions (requires 10-foot
floor to ceiling clearance)
Additional safety without
increasing the footprint of
regular Magnum DS switchgear
ANSI Type 2 arc-resistance: Type 2

arc-resistant switchgear regardless
of whether the arc originates the
breaker, bus or cable compartment
Stronger door and latch: The robust
doors are made of heavy 12 gauge
metal and secured with two-point
latches
Bellows and Two-Point Door Latch
Breaker bellows: Bellows surround

the breaker door, preventing arc
gasses from escaping around the
nose of the breaker while ensuring
easy racking of the breaker into the
disconnected position
Rear dynamic flap system: The
ventilation openings in the breaker
must be open during operation to
allow proper equipment ventilation,
but sealed off during an arc event.
The rear dynamic flap system uses
gravity to keep the flaps open
during normal operating conditions
and the arc pressure wave to close
the flaps during an arcing event. It
is a passively designed system so
there are no electrical or automated
parts that could break or fail
Rear Dynamic Flap System
21
CA08104001E
April 2015

Magnum DS
20.1-7
Sheet 20 009
General Description
Ventilation system: Each breaker

compartment is vented to allow
ionized gas to flow into the bus compartment from any location
in the switchgear and out the
top of the switchgear through
the hinged flaps
Bottom or top cable or bus
duct entry
Cable compartment floor plates
Optional Features
ANSI Type 2B arc-resistance

Plenum: The plenum is mounted
on top of arc-resistant gear to direct
dangerous arc gasses as they leave
the switchgear. The exit path can
either be a side or rear exit, with
a 4-foot blast zone around the exit
protection: Zone selective interlocking capability is also available in
arc-resistant gear, allowing the
breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delay while
the remainder of the distribution
system remains online
System
Safety shutters
One piece hinged and bolted
rear panel
Insulated bus
Vented bus/cable compartment
barriers: Bus/cable compartment
barriers are only available vented to
allow flow of arc gasses in the case
of an arc event
Cable compartment
segregation barrier
Magnum DS Power
Circuit Breakers
Eatons Type MDS power circuit
breakers constitute a complete,
modern and rugged line of low voltage
power circuit breakers using Eatons
DE-ION principle of arc extinction.
The breaker family is distinguished
by its similarity of appearance
and operation frame to frame. All
frame sizes are either manually or
electrically operated. Refer to Tab 26
for detailed information on Magnum
DS low voltage power circuit breakers.
Contacts
Magnum DS has silver tungsten
moving contacts and silver graphite
stationary contacts. The contacts
provide a long-wearing, low-resistance
joint. The contacts are protected from
arcing damage even after repeated
interruptions by the heel-toe action,
which causes the integral arcing
contacts to mate before the main
contacts part. The arcing contacts
then part last, striking the arc away
from the main contacts.
The main contacts are of the butt type
and are composed of multiple fingers
to give many points of contact without
alignment being critical.
ii
2
3
4
Four Physical Frame Sizes

Narrow, standard, double narrow and
double to promote breaker application
in compact modular enclosures and to
improve enclosure density.
Breaker Features
Release of the stored energy

is accomplished by manually
depressing a button on the front
of the breaker or electrically energizing
a releasing solenoid.
5
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit
Breakers have high withstand ratings
from 42 to100 kA to provide for maximum
system coordination and selectivity.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power

Circuit Breakers have integral current
limiters to provide interrupting ratings
of 200 kA at 600 Vac.
UL 1558/UL 1066
ANSI C37.20.1, C37.13, C37.51
ANSI C37.20.7
CSA C22.2 No 31-04
Third-party UL witnessed
and certified
NFPA 70E
13
14
15
16
17
18
Magnum DS Breaker Contacts

(Arc Chutes Removed)
19
Stored-Energy Mechanism
A cam-type closing mechanism
closes the breaker. It receives its
energy from a spring that can be
charged by a manual handle on the
front of the breaker or by a universal
electric motor.
CA08104001E
Magnum MDSX Current Limiting Power

Circuit Breakers have fast opening
contacts to provide interrupting ratings
up to 200 kA at 480 Vac without fuses.
20
21

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 010
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
Arc Chute
There are three basic means of
extinguishing an arc: lengthening
the arc path; cooling by gas blast or
contraction; deionizing or physically
removing the conduction particles
from the arc path.
The DE-ION principle is incorporated
in all Magnum DS circuit breakers.
This makes possible faster arc
extinction for a given contact travel,
ensures positive interruption and
minimum contact burning.
Levering Mechanism
4
5
6
7
8
The worm gear levering mechanism

is self-contained on the breaker
drawout element and engages
slots in the breaker compartment.
A standard 3/8-inch (10 mm) drive
set is used to lever the breaker
between the connected, test and
disconnected positions.
Mechanical interlocking is arranged
so that levering cannot be accomplished unless the breaker is in the
opened position.
Protection During Levering Operation
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
When levering the breaker between

the connected, test and disconnected
positions, the operator is protected
from contact with live parts by the
breaker door.
True two-step stored energy closing:
Refers to the sequence required to
charge and close the breaker.
1. The breaker closing springs are
charged either through the
manual-charging handle or by
the optional charging motor.
The breaker is mechanically interlocked to prevent closing of the
breaker until the closing springs
are fully charged.
17
2. With the closing springs fully

charged, the breaker can then
be closed by pressing the manual
close pushbutton on the breaker,
or by the optional spring release
coil through a remote electrical
signal.
18
This means that the energy required

to open the breaker is always restored
following a closing operation.
16
Stored energy is energy held in

waiting, ready to open or close the
breaker within five cycles or less.
The unique cam and spring design
provides necessary energy for a single
close-open sequence as well as the
energy for multiple charge-close
operations such as this possible
sequence: charge-close-rechargeopen-close-open.
The closing springs are interlocked
with the breaker racking mechanism
to ensure the closing springs are
discharged before the breaker can
be removed from the compartment.
Provisions for padlocking: All breakers
include provision for padlocking open
to prevent electrical or manual closing.
This padlocking can secure the breaker
in the connected, test or disconnected
position by preventing levering of the
breaker.
Ease of inspection and maintenance:
Magnum DS breakers are designed for
maximum accessibility and the utmost
ease of inspection and maintenance.
Manually operated breakers:
Manually operated breakers are
equipped with a manual charging
handle to charge the closing springs.
Manual closing and tripping pushbuttons are used to operate the breaker.
Remote closing and tripping can be
accomplished by installing optional
electric spring release and shunt trip
coils (see Tables 20.1-10 and 20.1-11 for
available control voltages, currents
and motor-operated spring charging
times). The breaker closing springs
must be charged manually, then
remote closing and tripping signals
can be sent to the breaker.
Electrically operated breakers:
Electrically operated breakers are
equipped with a spring charging motor
and electrically operated
spring release and shunt trip coils
(see Tables 20.1-10 and 20.1-11 for
available control voltages, currents
and motor-operated spring charging
times). The breaker manual charging
handle can be used to charge the
closing springs when power is not
available to the charging motor.
19
Optional Breaker Attachments

and Accessories
20
21
Shunt trip device (ST): Provides

for remote electrically controlled
breaker opening when energized
by a rated voltage input
Spring charge motor (MOT):
Charges the breaker closing springs
automatically, facilitating remote or
local closing. The motor assembly
includes its own cut-off switch that
changes state at the end of the
charging cycle. This contact can be
wired out for external indication
Spring release device (SR): Provides
breaker closing when its coils are
energized by a rated voltage input
Undervoltage release (UVR):
Trips the breaker when an existing
voltage signal is lost or falls below
an established threshold
Auxiliary switch: Up to 6a/6b
auxiliary individual dedicated
contacts are available for customer
use to indicate if the breaker is in
the OPEN or CLOSE position
Mechanical trip indicator flag:
The red trip indicator flag pops out
to provide local visual indication
when the Digitrip RMS trip unit
acts to trip the breaker on an overcurrent condition. Available in two
options: an interlocked version that
mechanically locks out the breaker
until the indicator is manually reset
and a non-interlocked version for
indication only
Bell alarm/overcurrent trip switch
(OTS): Provides two Form C contacts
that change state when the Digitrip
RMS trip unit acts to trip the breaker.
The contacts are available for
external indication or customer
use and are manually reset by the
mechanical trip indicator
Padlockable pushbutton cover:
Permits padlocking hinged cover
plates to block access to the PUSH
ON and PUSH OFF buttons on the
breaker faceplate
Mechanical operations counter:
Records mechanical operations of
the breaker over its installed life
Key off lock provisions: Enables
mounting of a single cylinder Kirk,
Castell or Ronis Key Lock to lock the
breaker in the OPEN position
Latch check switch: Provides one
Form C contact that changes state
when the breaker is ready to
close. Can be wired to the spring
release device for fast transfer
applications or wired for external
ready-to-close indication
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
20.1-9
Sheet 20 011
General DescriptionElectronic Trip Units
Trip Units
Digitrip RMS trip unit. Eatons
Digitrip RMS trip units feature a
dependent curve that is depicted in
the nameplate by a blue shaded area
of the trip curve. The dependent curve
affords better protection flexibility.
Additionally, all of the trip units have,
as standard, thermal memory, 50/60 Hz
operation and thermal self-protection
at 90 C.
Digitrip RMS integral microprocessorbased breaker overcurrent trip
systems: Provide maximum reliability
with true rms sensing as standard,
gives excellent repeatability and
requires minimum maintenance.
No external control source is
required for its protective functions.
Trip functions: Magnum DS trip units

provide the maximum in flexibility and
are available in the following configurations: LSI, LSIG, LSIA (ground fault
alarm only). In each case, either the
short delay or instantaneous (not both)
functions may be defeated. This
reduces the need for spare breaker
inventories and provides maximum
usage of interchangeable breakers.
Digitrip RMS 520: Enables the user
as many as nine phase and ground
current protection settings for maximum flexibility in trip-curve shaping
and multi-unit coordination, and adds
zone selective interlocking.
Digitrip RMS 520M: Adds phase,
neutral and ground current metering
with a four-character LCD display
window with 2% current metering
accuracy and type LSIA alarm when
ground fault settings are exceeded.
Digitrip RMS 520MC: Adds communication of trip values and breaker status
(open, close and tripped). Adds
System (ARMS).
Digitrip 1150+
Digitrip RMS 1150+: Provides

programmability for more sophisticated distribution systems. Adds
System (ARMS).
i
ii
Increased protection and

coordination capabilities
Systems monitoring information
including power factor, voltage
current, harmonic distortion
values, and waveform capture
with a three-line, (eight characters
per line) LED display
Two programmable contacts for
customer use
Time stamping of trip events for
improved troubleshooting and
diagnostics
Accuracy of 1% on metered values
and 2% on energy and power
Systems diagnostic information
Web enabled or PowerNet
communications
Breaker health menu
Additional protection functions:
Undervoltage/overvoltage
Underfrequency/overfrequency
Voltage unbalance
Reverse power
Zone selective interlocking: The
Digitrip RMS zone selective interlocking
(ZSI) capability provides positive
system coordination without time
delays. ZSI allows the breaker closest
to the fault to trip without any preset
time delay. The breaker closest to the
fault trips first, while the remainder
of the distribution system remains
online, thus avoiding unnecessary
and costly downtime.
The use of ZSI in Spot Network
Systems is not recommended by
Eaton. See the discussion in section 18
for the technical reasons why Eaton
does not recommend ZSI in Spot
Network Systems.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 012
General DescriptionElectronic Trip Units
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
System Maintenance Mode function
of the Digitrip 520MC and 1150+ can
reduce arc flash incident energy that is
generated on a fault condition. Eatons
System employs a separate, dedicated
analog trip circuit that eliminates
microprocessor latencies, resulting
in clearing times that are faster than
standard instantaneous tripping. This
provides superior arc flash reduction
to competing systems that simply
lower the standard instantaneous
pickup set point.
There are three ways to arm the
Maintenance Mode Arc Flash
Reduction setting. One method is
locally at the trip unit front panel. For
the 520MC, the 2-position switch in the
Maintenance Mode section of the trip
unit is used. Turning the switch to the
ON position will arm the setting. For
the 1150+, the local front keypad is
used to enable the Maintenance Mode
setting. The setting is located in the
SYSTEM submenu of programmable
settings (PGM SET).
For the second method of arming the

Maintenance Mode function, a remote
switch wired through the breaker
secondary contacts can remotely
arm the Maintenance Mode setting. A
high-quality gold-plated or palladium
contact is required in this application.
A third method to arm the maintenance setting is via a communication
device. This can be accomplished
through a Power Xpert Gateway.
A BIM (Breaker Interface Module),
Power Xpert software or PowerNet
system is another communication
method to arm the setting.
For Magnum DS breakers, the Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System setting
has five unique settings (2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0,
10.0 x In). To adjust this setting, a rotary
switch on the trip unit face is provided
for the 520MC while the 1150+ trip unit
uses its local keypad. For the Series
NRX breakers, the Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System setting has a
constant setting of 5000 A.
For all three arming methods, the
520MC provides a blue LED to confirm
the Maintenance Mode function is on.
In addition, there is also a normally
open breaker contact that allows the
user to wire in an external stacklight or
annunciator for remote indication. For
the 1150+, the message Maintenance
Mode Enabled will be shown on its
LED display. The 1150+ also has an
alarm relay that can be programmed
to track the Maintenance Mode state.
The Maintenance Mode function will

provide fast tripping even when the
regular Instantaneous is set to OFF.
The Instantaneous LED position is
also used to indicate a trip initiated
by the Maintenance Mode setting.
The 520MC LCD display, if powered,
will indicate with four dashes while
the 1150+ will display the message
Maintenance Mode Trip.
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System

System can be wired out to a separate
lockable switch/light combination
mounted on the switchgear for ease
of operation. Additionally, the switch
can be wired out to a remote station
for operation outside the arc flash
boundary of the switchgear, and the
alarm can be wired to an optional
beacon or audible device.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage 20.1-11

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 013
Low Voltage Trip UnitSelection Data

Table 20.1-1. Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers
i
ii
1
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip 520
Digitrip 520M
Digitrip 520MC
Digitrip 1150+ 1
Ampere Range
Interrupting rating at 480 V
rms sensing
200600 0A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000 A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000 A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000 A
42200 kA
Yes
2
3

Protection
Ordering options
fixed rating plug (In)
overtemperature trip
LI, LSI, LSIG

Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA

Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA

Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA

Yes
Yes
Long
delay
protection
(L)
Long delay pickup

Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir
Long delay time I4t
IEEE curves
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
Long Delay Thermal Memory

High Load Alarm
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
0.51.0 x (Ir)
Short
delay
protection
(S)
Short delay pickup

Short delay time I2t at 8 x Ir
Short delay time flat
Short delay time ZSI
2001000% x (Ir) & M1

100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (Ir) & M1

100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (Ir) & M1

100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (Ir) & M1

100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
Instantaneous
protection
(I)
making current release
off position
2001000% x (In) & M1

Yes
LSI & LSIG
2001000% x (In) & M1

Yes
Yes
2001000% x (In) & M1

Yes
Yes
2001000% x (In) & M1

Yes
Yes
Ground
fault
protection
(G) 2
Ground fault alarm

Ground fault pickup
Ground fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In
No
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
Yes
24100% x (In)
100500 ms
Ground fault delay flat

Ground fault ZSI
Ground fault thermal memory
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
Disable ground fault protection
No
No
No
No
Neutral protection (N)
Model LSI
Model LSI
Model LSI
Model LSI
Cause of trip LEDs

Magnitude of trip information
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote signal contacts

Programmable contacts
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Digital display
Current (% ) full scale sensor
No
No
4-character LCD
Yes +/2%
4-character LCD
Yes +/2%
24-character LED
Yes +/1%
Voltage (%) L to L
Power and energy (%)
Apparent power kVA and demand
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes +/1%
Yes +/2%
Yes
Reactive power kvar

Power factor
Crest factor
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Power qualityharmonics
% THD, waveform capture
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
N/A
No
Optional
INCOM/PowerNet
Standard
INCOM/PowerNet/TripLink
Standard
Trip log (three events)

Electronic operations counter
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Testing method 3
Waveform capture
Test set
No
Test set
No
Test set
No
Integral and test set

Yes
19

Breaker health monitor
Programmable relay functions
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes 1
20
System Diagnostics
System Monitoring
System Communications
Type
Power supply in breaker
Additional Features
Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over

and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage
unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip
and phase rotation alarm are included.
CA08104001E
2
3
1200 A maximum ground fault setting per

UL/NEC.
Test set for secondary injection.
Legend: In = Rating Plug and Sensor Rating.

Ir = Long Delay Pickup setting.
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 014
i
ii
Table 20.1-2. Magnum DS Breakers Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings

Time/Current
Characteristic
Pickup
Setting
Pickup
Point 1
Time Bands,
Seconds
Long delay
0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7,

0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0
In times long
delay setting
2, 4, 7, 10, 12,
15, 20, 24
Instantaneous
Off, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8,
10, M1
In times
instantaneous
setting
Short delay
2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8,
10, M1
Ir times short
delay setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5

flat response
0.1, 0.03, 0.05 2
Ground fault
0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4,

0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.0
In times ground
fault setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5

(flat response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5 2
1
2
3
1
In = Rating plug value

Ir = Long delay pickup setting x In
I2t response
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
April 2015

Magnum DS
Sheet 20 015
Series NRXGeneral Description
Series NRX
Series NRX Breakers Have a Compact

But Powerful Size to Provide Interrupting
Ratings up to 65 kA at 480 Vac
General Description
The Series NRX provides the performance of a power circuit breaker
65 kA interrupting at 480 Vacin the
compact size of a molded case breaker.
It offers the protection and features of
a power circuit breaker, along with
increased flexibility at a portion of
the size.
All frame sizes are either electrically
or mechanically operated. The Series
NRX is tested to 20,000 mechanical
operations and 10,000 electrical
operationssignificantly higher than
industry standards, such as UL and
IEC, require or the capabilities of
equivalent products on the market.
Thus, your maintenance personnel
can do what needs to be done, instead
of spending valuable time inspecting
and maintaining the breakers in
the system.
In switchgear, its important that the

breaker be easily accessible during
scheduled equipment maintenance.
The design of the breaker and cassette
enables full use of the breaker handle
and cassette rails with a gloved hand,
allowing electricians to remain in the
appropriate PPE protective gear.
The breakers ergonomic design also
maximizes functionality. Individual
Series NRX breaker door will open in
a saloon or barn type of arrangement so that personnel can access one
of the side-by-side breakers without
having to interact with the other. The
breakers handle allows the operator
to easily apply leverage across seven
complete strokes (with an average
of only 21 lbs of force) charging
the breaker quickly and easily, and
making it easier to cycle when needed
during commissioning or scheduled
maintenance. Series NRX breakers use
a true two-step stored energy mechanism similar to Magnum DS breakers.
The reduced weight of the Series NRX
makes it easier to handle during startup and scheduled inspection. A threepole, fully populated drawout breaker
weighs only 54 lbs/24 kg.
The Series NRX enables twice as many
feeder breakers in a standard structure
for a reduction in overall assembly size
of up to 50%.
The small size, 10.00 inches (254.0 mm)
wide by 10.70 inches (271.8 mm) deep
by 14.20 inches (360.7 mm) high, of
the Series NRX allows for much higher
densities of power circuit breakers
in a structureup to eight breakers
in a 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide
structureand a 2.50-inch (63.5 mm)
customer wireway. This means that two
Series NRX breakers can be mounted
side-by-side in the same space typically
used for one Magnum DS breaker.
The Series NRX breakers can also be
mixed and matched with Magnum DS
breakers, increasing layout flexibility
and providing the ability to stack
feeder breakers around larger main
and tie breakers. See layout guide for
more details.
All optional Magnum DS breaker

attachments and accessories are also
available for the Series NRX breakers.
Series NRX accessories can be quickly
installed at the job site, without any
special tools. Each breaker comes
standard with an accessory tray; the
needed accessories simply plug and
lock into the tray.
The Series NRX uses one CT for the
breaker frame. This eliminates the
need to match CTs and rating plugs to
change the continuous current rating
of the breaker. For example, changing
from 1200 to 800 A on previous breaker
designs required changing CT from
1200 to 800 A and changing the rating
plug from 1200 to 800 A. The Series
NRX breaker simplifies this process
by only requiring changing the 1200 A
rating plug to 800 A. This is accomplished through the Series NRXs
Rogowski air core CT. The Rogowski
coil does not saturate like a traditional
ferrous core CT, allowing the CT to be
used across a broad current range
with greater accuracy. One sensor
accommodates 2001200 A range.
A full range of trip units, ranging from
basic protection (LSI or LSIG) to metering, system diagnostics, protective
relay functions and communications,
complement the breaker offering.
Two of the trip unit models, the
Digitrip 520M and 1150, include
(optional) Eatons Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System, built to reduce
arc flash energy on a downstream
unit during system maintenance. Zone
selective interlocking is also available.
When communication capability
is required, the Series NRX breaker
has cassette-mounted modules,
eliminating the need for readdressing
replacement breakers. These DIN rail
mounted modules save space and
time during installation and are
available for field mounting capability.
Modules for Modus and Eatons
INCOM system are available with
future releases for PROFIBUS and
Ethernet compatible with Eatons
Power Xpert Architecture protocols.
Refer to Tab 26 for more detailed
information on Series NRX breakers.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 016
Table 20.1-3. Digitrip Trip Units for Series NRX ANSI/UL Rated Circuit Breakers
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip 520
Digitrip 520M
Digitrip 1150
Ampere range
Interrupting rating at 480 V
rms sensing
2001600 A
42 kA
Yes
2001600 A
42 kA
Yes
2001600 A
42 kA
Yes
LI, LSI, LSIG

Yes
Yes
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
Yes
No
2001000% x (Ir)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001200% x (In)
Yes
LSI and LSIG
No
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
No
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA

Yes
Yes
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
Yes
Yes (LSI only)
2001000% x (Ir)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001200% x (In)
Yes
Yes
Yes
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
No
Yes

Yes
Yes
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
Yes
0.51.0 x (Ir)
2001000% x (Ir)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001200% x (In) and M1
Yes
Yes
Yes
24100% x (In)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
4-character LCD
Yes 2% full scale
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Color graphic LCD

Yes 1% of reading
Yes 1% of reading
Yes 2% of reading
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
N/A
Yes 2
+24 Vdc
Yes 2
+24 Vdc
No
No
Test set
No
Yes (RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes (current and voltage)
Yes
Yes

Protection
Styles
Fixed rating plug (In)
Overtemperature trip
Long delay
Long delay pickup
protection (L)
Long delay time I4t
IEEE curves
Long delay thermal memory
High load alarm
Short delay
Short delay pickup
protection (S)
Instantaneous
protection (I)
Making current release
Off position
Ground fault
Ground fault alarm
protection (G) 1
Ground fault pickup
Ground fault delay I2t at .625 x In
Ground fault ZSI
System Diagnostics
Cause-of-trip LEDs
System Monitoring
Digital display
Current (%)
Voltage (%) L to L
Reactive power kVAR
Power factor
Crest factor
17
Type
Power supply
Additional Features
18
19
20
21
Trip log
No
No
Test set
Testing method 3
Waveform capture
No
No
No
No
1 1200 A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NECT.
2 Optional communications modules available: Ethernet (Web-browsing,
Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP), Modbus RTU, INCOM, PROFIBUS DP.
3 Test set for secondary injection.

CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 017

Table 20.1-4. Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings for Series NRX Breakers
Time/Current
Characteristic
Pickup
Setting
Pickup
Point 1
Time Band,
Seconds
Long delay
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.75,

0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0
In times
long delay setting
2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24

(at 6 times pickup value)
Instantaneous
2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
In times
instantaneous setting
Short delay
2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10
Ir times
short delay setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.05

(flat response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5 2
Ground fault
0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4,

0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.0
(1200 A maximum)
In times
ground fault setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.05

(flat response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5 2
1
2

I2t response.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 018
General DescriptionMetering and Monitoring Devices
Power Xpert
Incoming Line Power Meter
ii
See Tab 3.

manage the cost of energy. It also
provides critical information regarding power quality, such as harmonic
distortion, flicker, crest factor, K-Factor
and more. For detailed information,
refer to Tab 3.
Applications

and batches
Protect transformers and
conductors from overheating

overload trips
Maximize equipment use
3
Power Xpert
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
General Description
8000 Series monitors the critical
aspects of an electrical distribution
system. This premier power quality
metering instrument is simple to use,
and is powerful, scalable and highly
flexible. The Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 offers a new level
of intuitive user interface design,
presenting critical electrical
distribution system information
in simple-to-navigate and easy-tounderstand information architecture.
8000 graphic display visualizes the
information from up to16 meter
modules. The embedded Web server
displays complex power quality data
the browser.
Both the local graphic display and the
embedded Web server present real
time, historical and event information
in a browser-style graphical format
to help the user interpret key circuit
information, such as:
16
17
18
19
20
21
Current loading
Voltage and power levels
Power factor
Energy usage
I/O status
Power quality measurements
Harmonic plots
Disturbance and transient
waveforms
ITIC disturbance summary screen
Manage Energy Use to Help:
General Description
The Power Xpert 2000 Series Meter
power quality instrument monitors the
most critical aspects of an electrical
distribution system. This premier
power quality metering instrument
uses the latest in advanced technology
to make it simple to use, and is
powerful, scalable and highly flexible.
The Power Xpert 2000 offers the same
level of intuitive user interface design
as the Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000
Meter, presenting critical electrical
distribution system information in
a simple-to-navigate and easy-tounderstand information architecture.
The embedded Web server displays
comprehensive power quality data
the browser. The embedded Web
server presents real-time, historical
and event information in a browserstyle graphical format to help the user
interpret information such as current
loading, voltage and power levels,
power factor, energy usage, I/O status
and power quality measurements, as
well as harmonic plots. The embedded
Web server also offers a waveform
view to visualize steady-state
harmonic content, which is critical
for power quality analysis.
manage the cost of energy.

8000 graphic display uses a simple
twist and click navigation control
dial to easily navigate the menus and
to drill down into increasing levels
of important detail. A back key
enhances the browser-like navigation
of the graphic display.
Reduce peak demand charges and

power factor penalties
consumption
For more details, see Tab 3.
IQ 250/260
Incoming Line Metering
See Tab 3.
IQ 250/260
This microprocessor device provides

metering that meets ANSI C12.20
revenue metering accuracy, and has
capabilities such as fast sampling rate
and accurate metering for a full range
of power attributes. In addition, the
IQ 250 and IQ 260 Meters are prepared
for the future. Built-in slots allow for
upgrades to capabilities yet to be
developed.
Comprehensive metering
High-end accuracy
Self-test capability to validate
accuracy
Large, easy-to-read display
Local or remote configuration
Industry-standard communication
protocols
Mix-and-match input/output options
Integration with Eatons
Field-upgradeable
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 019
General DescriptionMetering and Monitoring Devices
IQ 130/140/150
Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII)
General Description
Local Subnetwork Display
The IQ 100 meter family provides

expect in affordable, compact meters,
such as fast sampling rate and
accurate metering for a full range
of power attributes. Providing the
first line of defense against costly
power problems, Eatons IQ 100 series
electronic power meters can perform
the work of an entire wall of legacy
metering equipment using todays
technology.
See Tab 4.
When space is at a premium, yet

you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the
IQ 100 series fits the bill. These meters
are ideal for electrical equipment
assemblies, machine control panels,
such as panelboard and switchboard
mains and feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders and
motor control centers. Requiring far
less space than other meters with
similar functionality, IQ 100 series
meters fit into a standard ANSI or
IEC cutout on a panelboard or other
electrical equipment, and therefore
fit easily into retrofit applications.
The breaker interface module is a

panel-mounted device that performs

from Digitrip 1150+ circuit breaker
trip unit. Supports as many as 50
of these devices up to 10,000 ft
(3048 m) away
Communicates the information from
these protective and energy monitoring devices over a PowerNet
network to a computer or PLC
Communications
For remote power monitoring and
software, see PowerNet Tab 2.
6
7
C-HRG Wall-Mounted Unit
(Separately Mounted Resistors Not Shown)
Where continuity of service is a high

priority, high-resistance grounding can
add the safety of a grounded system
while minimizing the risk of service
interruptions due to grounds. The
concept is a simple one: provide a path
for ground current via a resistance that
limits the current magnitude, and
monitor to determine when an
abnormal condition exists.
This provides for maximum continuity

of service, because no tripping occurs
for the resistance limited ground fault.
ii

power generation sites and
campuses
Submetering
See Tab 36 for more details.
Low Voltage High

Resistance Grounding

Monitor power use and quality with
ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.5%)
Optional Modbus RTU
communications
with display
Designed to accommodate
upgrades
Architecture for a holistic system
level view
HRG can be installed as stand-alone

equipment (as shown in photo) or can
be integrated into Magnum DS low
voltage switchgear; however, the use
of HRG is restricted to systems that
do not have single-phase or phase to
neutral loads.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
For more information, refer to Tab 3.
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 020
Technical Data
Ratings
Table 20.1-7. Heat Loss Data 1

Estimated Heat Loss Per Breaker (Watts)
Table 20.1-5. Voltage Ratings (AC)
ii
System
Voltage
Maximum
Voltage
208/240
480
600
254
508
635
2
3
4
5
6
7
Breaker
Frame
Table 20.1-6. Available Bus Ratings

Cross Bus
Ampacity
Bus Bracing
kA
2000
3200
4000
100, 150, 200
5000
6000
8000
10,000
100, 150, 200
Drawout
Mounting
Only
800
1600
2000
150
329
374
3200
4000
5000
6000
719
749
1000
2
Estimated Heat Loss Per Structure (Watts) 1

Loss is based on fully loaded vertical and
cross bus rating in a structure as given below.
Rating
Vertical
Bus
Cross
Bus
2000
3200
4000
410
1623
1097
288
1163
1169
5000
6000
8000
10,000
1410
2
886
1265
2
2
8
9
2
Vertical section bus is sized per

main cross bus maximum rating or
by ANSI C37.20.1 Section 7.4.13 Table
11 to a maximum of 5000 A. (4000 A in
18.00-inch [457.2 mm] structure.)
Note: In addition to the available bus
bracings shown in Table 20.1-6,
the bus has been tested for shortcircuit values of 85,000 A for a full
60 cycles.
Closing Times of Magnum DS

and Series NRX Breakers
5 cycles or less
For lower than maximum load currents, watt

loss may be estimated by reducing the full
load loss by the following:
WL = (IL/IFL)2 WFL
Where:
WL = Load Watts
WFL = Full Load Watts
IL = Actual Load Current
IFL = Full Load Current
Contact Eaton.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 021
Technical Data
Table 20.1-8. Indoor 2000 A LVA Loss Analysis R2
Case 1
Double-Ended Losses
Each Main
Load of 50%
Quantity
Tie Open Load = 1806 Amperes

Description
IFL Full Load

Rating
WFL Watts
Full Load Loss
2000 A 480 Main Bus
2000
700
903
0.204
2000 A Main M1 Breaker
2000
775
903
0.204
157.99
2000 A Distribution Section
2000
700
903
0.204
142.70
800AF/500AT MDS Feeder CB
800
150
350
0.191
28.71
800
150
180
0.051
7.59
800
150
200
0.063
9.38
800
150
73
0.008
1.25
2000 A Tie and Section Bus
2000
675
0.000
0.00
2000 A 480 Volt Distribution Bus
2000
700
903
0.204 1
42.70
10
800
150
403
0.254
38.06
11
800
150
175
0.048
7.18
12
800
150
150
0.035
5.27
13
800
150
75
0.009
1.32
14
2000
775
903
0.204
157.99
15
2000 A 480 Bus Main Bus
2000
700
903
0.204
Item No.
IL Actual Loading
Amperes
Rating
Factor
Total with Each Main at 50% Load

Case 2
WL Watts
Item Loss
142.70
985.52
Single Ended Losses
One Main
Load of 100%
Quantity
Tie Closed Load = 1806 Amperes

Description
IFL Full Load

Rating
WFL Watts
Full Load Loss
2000 A 480 Main Bus
2000
700
1806
0.815
570.79
2000
775
1801
0.811
628.45
2000 A Distribution Section
2000
700
903
0.204
142.70
800
150
350
0.191
28.71
800
150
180
0.051
7.59
Item No.
IL Actual Loading
Amperes
Rating
Factor
WL Watts Net
Item Loss
800
150
200
0.063
9.38
800
150
73
0.008
1.25
2000 A Tie and Section Bus
2000
675
903
0.204
137.60
2000 A 480 Volt Distribution Bus
2000
700
903
0.204
142.70
10
800
150
403
0.254
38.06
11
800
150
175
0.048
7.18
12
800
150
150
0.035
5.27
13
800
150
75
0.009
1.32
14
2000
775
0.000
0.00
15
2000 A 480 Bus Main Bus
2000
700
0.000
0.00
Total with One Main at 100% Load
ii
142.70
1720.99
Notes: Full Load of Section or Breaker comes from the frame or bus ratings of the product.
Actual Amperes is a loading profile over all the devices for the operating scenario of interest.
Rating Factor is a value that appropriately weights the nominal losses at full load to the actual losses for the actual loading value.
The formula is Rating Factor = (Actual Loading/Full Load Rating) x (Actual Loading/Full Load Rating).
The Rating Factor is applied (multiplied) by the Full Load Loss Watts to get Net Watts for each item.
See Table 20.1-7 for Nominal heat loss data for devices and sections.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 022
Technical Data
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066
ii
1
2
3
Standard Magnum DS
Double Magnum DS
Series NRX
Narrow Magnum DS
Magnum DS and Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications
Table 20.1-9. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Frame Type
6
800
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA

50/60 Hz 1
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
Short-Time
Withstand
Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous
Trip
Available Current Sensor

and Rating Plugs for
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
(Establishes Breaker
In Rating)
18 x In
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
MDN-408
MDN-508
MDN-608
MDN-C08
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
65
42
50
65
20
MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
MDS-C08
MDS-L08 2
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
85
85
NRX-408 5
NRX-508 5
NRX-608 5
Compact
Compact
Compact
85
85
85
42
50
65
35
35
35
42 kA at 254 Vac
42 kA at 508 Vac
35 kA at 635 Vac
200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600,

800 5
MDN-416
MDN-516
MDN-616
MDN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
65
42
50
65
30
18 x In
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600
MDS-616
MDS-816
MDS-C16
MDS-L16 2
MDS-X16 3
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
65
85
85
30
MDN-620
MDN-C20
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
65
65
65
35
MDS-620
MDS-820
MDS-C20
MDS-L20 2
MDS-X20 3
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
65
85
85
30
85
30
MDS-632
MDS-832
MDS-C32
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
85
MDS-X32 3
Double
200
200
50
50
Double Narrow
Double Narrow
Double Narrow
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
65
65
65
85
100
2000, 2500, 3200, 4000
17
MDN-640
MDN-840
MDN-C40
MDS-840
MDS-C40
MDS-X40 3
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
200
85
100
85
100
50
50
2000, 2500, 3200, 4000
18
7
8
9
10
1600
11
12
13
2000
14
15
3200
16
4000
19
20
2
3
21
4
5
85
30
18 x In
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3000, 3200
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal
to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a
15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for
short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
the two periods.
Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current limiter selected determines short-time and fixed
instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac.
Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.
Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
Series NRX uses the same sensors for all trip settings. No changes to sensors required.
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 023
Technical Data
Table 20.1-9. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Frame
Amperes
5000
6000
1
2
3
4
Breaker
Type
Frame
Type
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA

50/60 Hz 1
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
Short-Time
Withstand
Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous
Trip
Available Current Sensor & Rating

Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
(Establishes Breaker In Rating)
MDS-850
MDS-C50
MDS-X50 2 3
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
200
85
100
85
100
50
50
2500, 3200, 4000, 5000
MDS-C60 3
Double
100
100
100
100
3200, 4000, 5000, 6000
Table 20.1-10. Magnum Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc

24 Vdc
32 Vdc
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
Shunt Trip (ST)

Operational voltage range
Power consumption (inrush)
Opening time
Trip circuit 70110%

(Required for 35 ms)
Seconds
1726 Vdc
250 watts
35 ms
3453 Vdc
250 watts
35 ms
77138 Vdc
450 watts
35 ms
154275 Vdc
450 watts
35 ms
Spring Release (SR)

Closing time
Close circuit 70110%

Seconds
1726 Vdc
250 watts
40 ms
3453 Vdc
250 watts
40 ms
77138 Vdc
450 watts
40 ms
154275 Vdc
450 watts
40 ms
85110% voltage
Running % of
running seconds
2026 Vdc
12.0 A
300%
300 watts
5 sec
4153 Vdc
5.0 A
500%
250 watts
5 Sec
94138 Vdc
2.0 A
600%
250 watts
5 Sec
187275 Vdc
1.0 A
600%
250 watts
5 Sec
85110% voltage
3060% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
2026 Vdc
714 Vdc
250 watts
18 watts
70 ms
2735 Vdc
1019 Vdc
275 watts
15 watts
70 ms
4153 Vdc
1429 Vdc
275 watts
18 watts
70 ms
94138 Vdc
3375 Vdc
450 watts
10 watts
70 ms
187275 Vdc
66150 Vdc
450 watts
10 watts
70 ms
Inductive load
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.25 A
Spring Charge Motor (MOT)

Amps (running)
Amps (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
Undervoltage Release (UVR)
Drop-out voltage range
Power consumption (continuous)
Opening time
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
Breaker Control Device

Nominal Voltage
120 Vac
240 Vac
415 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
Trip circuit 70110%

Seconds
77140 Vac
450 VA
35 ms
146264 Vac
450 VA
35 ms
Spring Release (SR)

Closing time
Close circuit 70110%

Seconds
77140 Vac
450 VA
40 ms
146264 Vac
450 VA
40 ms
85110% voltage
Running % of
running seconds
94140 Vac
2.0 A
600%
250 VA
5 Sec
177264 Vac
1.0 A
600%
250 VA
5 Sec
85110% voltage
3060% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
94140 Vac
3376 Vac
450 VA
10 VA
70 ms
177264 Vac
62144 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
323457 Vac
114249 Vac
480 VA
10 VA
70 ms
408528 Vac
144288 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
510660 Vac
180360 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
Inductive load
10 A
10 A
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
CA08104001E
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
Shunt Trip (ST)

Opening time

Opening time
12
Table 20.1-11. Magnum Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac

Amps (running)
Amps (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
ii
1
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal
to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a
15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for
short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
the two periods.
Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.
Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.

Nominal Voltage
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 024
Technical Data
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Table 20.1-12. Series NRX Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc

Nominal Voltage
32 Vdc
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
Shunt Trip (ST)

Opening time
Trip circuits 70110%

Seconds
1726 Vdc
500 VA
25 ms
3453 Vdc
530 VA
25 ms
77138 Vdc
540 VA
25 ms
154275 Vdc
515 VA
25 ms
Spring Release (SR)

Closing time

Seconds
1726 Vdc
500 VA
25 ms
3453 Vdc
530 VA
25 ms
77138 Vdc
540 VA
25 ms
154275 Vdc
515 VA
25 ms

Running % of running
Seconds
2026 Vdc
5A
500%
150 VA
3 seconds
4153 Vdc
3A
500%
150 VA
3 seconds
94138 Vdc
1A
500%
150 VA
3 seconds
187275 Vdc
1A
1000%
280 VA
4 seconds

3560% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
2026 Vdc
814 Vdc
500 VA
5 VA
50 ms
2735 Vdc
1119 Vdc
620 VA
5 VA
50 ms
4153 Vdc
1729 Vdc
850 VA
5 VA
50 ms
94138 Vdc
4494 Vdc
890 VA
5 VA
50 ms
187275 Vdc
88132 Vdc
910 VA
5 VA
50 ms
Inductive load
0.5 A
0.25 A
120 Vac
240 Vac
415 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
Spring Release Motor (MOT)

Amperes (running)
Amperes (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
Opening time
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
Table 20.1-13. Series NRX Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac

Nominal Voltage
Shunt Trip (ST)
Opening time

Seconds
77140 Vac
540 VA
25 ms
146264 Vac
500 VA
25 ms
Spring Release (SR)

Closing time

Seconds
77140 Vac
540 VA
25 ms
146264 Vac
500 VA
25 ms

Running % of running
Seconds
94140 Vac
2A
300%
280 VA
3 seconds
177264 Vac
1A
1000%
280 VA
4 seconds

3560% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
94138 Vac
4494 Vac
890 VA
5 VA
50 ms
177264 Vac
84125 Vac
910 VA
5 VA
50 ms
323457 Vac
145228 Vac
960 VA
5 VA
50 ms
408528 Vac
168288 Vac
800 VA
8 VA
50 ms
510660 Vac
210360 Vac
800 VA
12 VA
50 ms
Inductive load
10 A
Spring Release Motor (MOT)

Amperes (running)
Amperes (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
14

Opening time
15
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
13
24 Vdc
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
April 2015

Magnum DS
Sheet 20 025
Technical Data
Ratings
Table 20.1-14. Metering Type Current Transformers
ANSI Meter Accuracy Classification
The narrow-band characteristic curve

allows close coordination with Digitrip
RMS tripping devices. Repeatability is
within 2%.
Breaker Frame
Rating
800, 1600, 2000
The maximum breaker current rating

for any breaker frame size is determined by the rating of the sensor used.
The breaker current rating for any
frame size can be changed by simply
changing the sensors and associated
rating plug, which are easily removed
from the breaker drawout element.
The wide range of long-delay pickup
makes one set of sensors more flexible
on a wider range of loads. The Digitrip
RMS itself need not be changed when
the associated sensors and rating
plugs are changed.
3200
Eatons Digitrip RMS can be supplied

in various combinations of four
independent, adjustable, overcurrent
protection functions:
Ratio
Ratio
B-0.1
B-0.2
B-0.5
B-0.9
B-1.8
ii
100/5
150/5
200/5
100/1
150/1
200/1
2.4
1.2
1.2
2.4
2.4
2.4
250/5
300/5
400/5
250/1
300/1
400/1
0.6
0.6
0.3
1.2
0.6
0.6
2.4
1.2
1.2
2.4
1.2
500/5
600/5
750/5
500/1
600/1
750/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.3
1.2
1.2
0.6
2.4
1.2
1.2
800/5
1000/5
1200/5
800/1
1000/1
1200/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
0.6
0.6
1500/5
1600/5
2000/5
1500/1
1600/1
2000/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.3
1600/5
2000/5
2400/5
1600/1
2000/1
2400/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.3
1.2
0.6
0.6
2500/5
3000/5
3200/5
2500/1
3000/1
3200/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
3500/5
4000/5
3500/1
4000/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
4000
4000/5
4000/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
5000
5000/5
5000/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
6000
6000/5
6000/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Long delay (L)

Instantaneous (I)
Short delay (S)
Ground (G)
Ground alarm only (A)
Every Eaton Magnum DS trip unit
comes standard with LSI characteristics. Optional ground (G) or ground
alarm (A) may also be provided.
These trip units also provide the
ability to defeat instantaneous to
provide LS protection only. In addition,
short delay protection may be set to
the maximum instantaneous level,
effectively disabling short delay
protection. Under no condition is it
possible to set the trip unit beyond
the capabilities of the circuit breaker.
Current transformers with meter accuracy classifications at higher burdens and/or suitable for relaying
are also available. They will be mounted in the rear cable connection compartment.
Table 20.1-15. Voltage Transformers

Insulation Class is 600V dielectric, 10 kV
full wave BIL. Accuracy Class is 0.6 for W and
1.2 for X burdens at 60 Hz. Thermal ratings
are 150 VA at 30 C and 100 VA at 55 C.
Primary and secondary fuses are mounted
on the face of the VT.
Available standard
ratios:
120:120
240:120
288:120
480:120
600:120
Table 20.1-16. Control Power Transformers

Insulation Class is 600V dielectric.
Primary and secondary fuses are mounted
on the face of the CPT. An optional primary
fuse cover is available. 0.5 kVA, 1 kVA, 3 kVA
and 5 kVA ratings are available as standard.
Available standard
ratios:
208:120/240
240:120/240
480:120/240
600:120/240
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 026
Layout Guide
Layout GuideMagnum DS Rear-Accessible Switchgear
ii
A
22.00 (558.8)
30.00 (762.0)
1
2
3
4
44.00 (1117.6)
5
Figure 20.1-1. Breaker Structures
Table 20.1-17. Layout Guide

Rear-Accessible Switchgear
7
8
Breaker Type
Ampacity Available
Structure WidthsAllowable Breaker PlacementsInches (mm)
<=100 kAIC 200 kAIC
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
Narrow (MDN)
8002000
MDN4MDN5MDN6MDNC-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
MainB, C, D
TieB, C
Standard (MDS)
8002000
MDS4MDS6MDS8MDSC-
8001600
MDSLMDSX-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
MainB/F, C/G
TieB/F, C/G
FeederB/F, C/G, D/H
FeederA, B, C, D FeederA, B, C, D,
TieB, C
E, F, G, H
MainB, C, D
Standard (MDS)
3200
MDS6MDS8MDSC-
2000
MDSLMDSX-
FeederB, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
MainB/F, C/G
TieB/F, C/G
FeederB/F, C/G, D/H
FeederB, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Standard (NRX) 1
8001200
NSS4NSS5NSS6-
Double (MDS)
40005000
MDS8MDSC-
32004000
MDSX-
FeederB/F, C/G, D/H

TieB/F, C/G
MainB/F, C/G, D/H
Double
w/fans (MDS)
6000
MDSC-
5000
MDSX-
FeederBC/FG, CD/GH
TieBC/FG, CD/GH
MainBC/FG, CD/GH
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Instrument
compartment
(SPD, HRG,
metering, controls,
panelboard, etc.)
1
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (117.6)
FeederA, B, C, D,
E, F, G, H
Feeder
contact Eaton
FeederA, B, C,
D, E, F, G, H
All positions
All positions
All positions
All positions
All positions
Series NRX 65 kAIC maximum.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 027
Layout Guide

Feeder
MDN-608
800 A
i
ii
Metering
Feeder
MDN-608 Metering
800 A
A/E
Feeder
Feeder
Main
Tie
Main
MDS-632 MDN-608 MDS-630 MDN-608 MDS-632
800 A
800 A
3200 A
3200 A
3200 A
B/F
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
MDN-608 MDN-608 MDN-608
800 A
800 A
800 A
C/G
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
MDS-608 MDS-608 MDS-608 MDS-608
800 A
800 A
800 A
800 A
D/H
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
MDS-616 MDS-616 MDS-616 MDS-616 MDS-616 MDS-616
1600 A
1600 A
1600 A
1600 A
1600 A
1600 A
SPD
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
MDN-608 MDN-608 MDN-608
800 A
800 A
800 A
D
22.00
(558.8)
18.00
(457.2)
22.00
(558.8)
18.00
(457.2)
Metering
SPD
Main
MDS-840
4000 A
Feeder
Feeder
MDS-608 MDS-608 Metering
800 A
800 A
Tie
MDS-840
4000 A
SPD
44.00
(1117.6)
22.00
(558.8)
Using Narrow and Standard Breakers
SPD
Main
MDS-840
4000 A
Feeder
Feeder
MDS-608 MDS-608
800 A
800 A
44.00
(1117.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
Using Standard and Double Breakers
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 20.1-2. Main-Tie-Main Typical LayoutsMDS Mains and Feeders

Note: Breaker and cell utilization should keep load amperes below rating of MAIN due to vertical bus limitations.
Cable used in the conduit areas are limited to 75C ampacity values per the NEC for ampacity calculations.
Any cell not used as a feeder breaker may be a blank, or a feeder breaker provision for future breakers, or SPD surge.
6
7
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
A
Main 4
4000
8
A
Blank or
Instrument
Tie 7
4000
Blank or
Instrument
10
B
B
Main 4
4000
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 5
11
Tie 4
4000
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 8
12
C
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 5
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 6
D
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 21A
C
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 9
D
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 21B
13
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 5
D
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 22A
D
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 22B
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsMDN Mains, Ties, Feeders and Miscellaneous, 4000 A
Dimensions in Inches (mm) 123
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fully rated 5000 A riser, and corresponding tap plate assembly, required in structure.
Section bus sized per main bus rating (maximum) or by ANSI C37.20.1 section 7.4.1.3 (Table 11) to a maximum of 5000 A. Section bus cannot
be less than 4000 A.
Reduced depth full width 1/4-high instrument compartment required in A-position when main breaker is in B-position. Reduced depth full width
1/2-high instrument compartment required in A/B-position when main breaker is in C-position.
Main breaker allowed in B-position or C-position only.
Reduced depth standard width instrument or SPD compartment required directly below main breaker. Riser bus required behind SPD compartment.
Standard depth 1/4-high instrument or SPD compartment can be used in D-position when main is in B-position. Riser bus required behind
SPD compartment.
Tie breaker allowed in B-position or C-position only.
Reduced depth standard width instrument or SPD compartment required directly below tie breaker. Riser bus required behind SPD compartment.
Standard depth 1/4-high instrument or SPD compartment can be used in D-position when tie is in B-position. Riser bus required behind
SPD compartment.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Note: Minimum structure depth is 72 inches.
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 028
Layout Guide
ii
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
A
Main 4
4000
2
3
Cable
Pull Section
Tie 6
4000
B
Main 4
4000
Cable
Pull Section
Tie 4
4000
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 7
4
5
Blank or
Instrument
C
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 8
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 5
C
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD 5
6
D
7
8
9
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 23A
1
2
4
5
11
6
7
12
D
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 24A
D
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 24B
Figure 20.1-4. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsMDN F/A Mains, Ties, Feeders and Miscellaneous, 4000 A
10
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 23B
Fully rated 5000 A riser, and corresponding tap plate assembly, required in structure.
Section bus sized per main bus rating (maximum) or by ANSI C37.20.1 section 7.4.1.3 (Table 11) to a maximum of 5000 A. Section bus cannot
be less than 4000 A.
Reduced depth full width 1/4-high instrument compartment required in A-position when main breaker is in B-position. Reduced depth full width
1/2-high instrument compartment required in A/B-position when main breaker is in C-position.
Main breaker allowed in B-position or C-position only.
Reduced depth standard width instrument or SPD compartment required directly below C-position main breaker. Riser bus required behind
SPD compartment.
Tie breaker allowed in B-position or C-position only.
Reduced depth standard width instrument or SPD compartment required directly below tie breaker. Riser bus required behind SPD compartment.
Standard depth 1/4-high instrument or SPD compartment can be used in D-position when tie is in B-position. Riser bus required behind
SPD compartment.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 029
Layout Guide

Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Transition or
Auxiliary
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
Blank or
Instrument
B
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
A
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
Blank or
Instrument
Main 2
800
1600
2000
3200
6
D
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 2
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 3
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 5
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 6
Feeder
800
1600
Blank or
Instrument
Feeder 3
800
1600
2000
Feeder 3
800
1600
2000
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
D
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 7
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
D
D
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 8
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 9
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
D
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 10
4
5
13
14
D
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 11
Figure 20.1-5. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsMagnum DS Mains, Ties, Feeders and Miscellaneous, 3200 A and Below
11
12
C
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
9
10
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
C
A
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
A
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
Blank or
Instrument
A
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 1
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
3
4
Feeder
800
1600
2000
D
1
2
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
D
ii
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A transition section is required if connecting to a non-standard dry-type transformer or auxiliary and metering devices are to be located in a transition
section, or there is a fire pump breaker required, or there is a zero sequence ground fault required.
A maximum of two 3200 A breakers are permitted per 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) width of switchgear, one of which must be a main or tie. A 3200 A frame
breaker cannot be mounted in the same enclosure with a 4000 A main or tie. For a 3200 A frame breaker mounted in the same enclosure with a 5000 A
main or tie, contact Eaton.
Contact Eaton for placement of 2000 A frame breaker in this compartment.
A maximum of three 2000 A breakers are 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) width of switchgear. If three are required, positions B, C and D must be used.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment.
Notes: Breaker and cell utilization should keep load amperes below rating of MAIN due to vertical bus limitations.
Cable used in the conduit areas are limited to 75 C ampacity values per the NEC for ampacity calculations.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 030
Layout Guide
ii
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
Blank or
Instrument
Main 1
4000
5000
2
3
4
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Blank or
Instrument
Main 4
4000
5000
G
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Blank or
instrument
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 13
G
Blank or
instrument
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 14
Feeder
4000
5000
11
12
Main 4
4000
5000
13
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 17a
14
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
B
10
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Blank or
Instrument
F
C
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 12
Blank or
Instrument
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Main 3
4000
5000
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Feeder
800
1600
2000
E
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
A
Blank or
Instrument
B
Feeder 2
800
1600
2000
3200
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
Blank or
Instrument
Figure 20.1-5. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains, 4000 A and 5000 ADimensions in Inches (mm) 5
1
2
15
3
If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the top.
Service entrance option is not available with feeder breakers mounted in this structure.
If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the bottom.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm)
wide instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 031
Layout Guide

Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Main 12
4000
5000
H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 17b
G
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Blank or
Instrument
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 19
1
2
Main 2
4000
5000
C
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
3200
Tie
4000
5000
Tie
4000
5000
G
Blank
ii
Feeder
800
1600
Main 3
4000
5000
F
Feeder
800
1600
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Blank
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
Blank or
Instrument
E
G
Blank or
Instrument
3
4
5
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 20
7
Feeder
800
1600
Feeder
800
1600
A
Feeder
800
1600
E
B
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
A
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
3200
Tie
4000
5000
Feeder
800
1600
E
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
3200
9
F
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Tie
4000
5000
G
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
3200
D
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 21
C
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
3200
11
G
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
3200
3
4
12
13
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 22
Figure 20.1-5. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains and Ties, 4000 A and 5000 A
2
10
Feeder 4
Feeder 4
800
1600
2000
3200
Fixed-mounted main breakers are not permitted in the D position.

If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the bottom.
If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the top.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide
instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide compartment in the structure.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 032
Layout Guide
ii
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
E
G
Feeder
800
1600
2000
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 23
Feeder
800
1600
12
G
Feeder
800
1600
2000
13
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 26
G
Feeder
800
1600
2000
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 25
E
Feeder
800
1600
2000
B
Feeder
800
1600
2000
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
F
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
4000
5000
11
E
Feeder
800
1600
2000
10
G
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
B
Feeder
800
1600
2000
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 24
Feeder
800
1600
Feeder
800
1600
2000
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
Feeder 1
4000
5000
Tie
4000
5000
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
4000
5000
Feeder
800
1600
Feeder 1
4000
5000
Tie
4000
5000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
F
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder 1
4000
5000
H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 27
14
15
Figure 20.1-5. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Ties and Feeders, 4000 A and 5000 A
1
2
16
B and D position feeders must be reverse fed.

Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide
instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 033
Layout Guide
Layout GuideMagnum DS Rear-Accessible Switchgear with NRX Feeders 12

Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
A
Feeder
800
NRX
E
Feeder
800
NRX
B
Feeder
800
NRX
G
Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
C
Feeder
800
NRX
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
E
Feeder
800
NRX
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 30
C
Feeder
800
NRX
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 31
5
6
7
8
Blank or
Instrument
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
3
4
G
Feeder
800
NRX
1
2
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
H
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 29
9
10
B
Feeder
800
NRX
11
Feeder
800
NRX
12
C
Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
ii
Feeder
800
NRX
A
B
Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 28
Blank or
Instrument
B
Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
NRX
A
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
Feeder
800
NRX
Blank or
Instrument
Feeder
800
NRX
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 32
C
Feeder
800
NRX
G
Feeder
800
NRX
13
H
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 33
14
15
Figure 20.1-5. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains and Ties, and Series NRX Feeder Breakers
1
2
Feeders are limited to NRX frame, 800 A maximum.

Main and Tie are Magnum DS frames, limited to frame ampacities shown.
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 034
Layout Guide

Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Main or Tie
6000
Blank or
instrument
Fan Compartment
3
4
C
Feeder 1
800
1600
2000
3200
5
6
Blank or
Instrument
G
Feeder 1
800
1600
2000
3200
D
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 34
E
Blank or
Instrument
Main or Tie 4
6000
Fan Compartment
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 35
96.00 (2438.4) 2
ii
92.00 (2336.8)
See Tab 21,

Section 21.1
Figure 21.1-9
for MCCB
Circuit Breaker
Layout
Information.
7
8
9
10
11
50.00
38.00
or
(1270.0)
(965.2)
12
13
Figure 20.1-5. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)

Magnum DS Mains and Ties, 6000 ADimensions in Inches (mm) 3
Figure 20.1-6. Group-Mounted Molded-Case

Circuit Breaker Switchboard
Note: Structures using molded-case

breakers for distribution will be UL
891 rated with 30-cycle bus bracing.
14
2
3
15
4
16
17
A maximum of two 3200 A breakers are permitted per 22.00-inch (559 mm) width of switchgear,
one of which must be a main or tie. A 3200 A frame breaker cannot be mounted in the same
enclosure with a 4000 A main or tie. For a 3200 A frame breaker mounted in the same enclosure
with a 5000 A or 6000 A main or tie, contact Eaton.
When a top-of-gear breaker lifter is used, height is 99.00 inches (2514.6 mm) total.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the
following exception: 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide instrument compartment must be adjacent to
another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure.
Need a 44.00-inch wide section on both sides of the tie for layout to be correct.
Notes: Breaker and cell utilization should keep load amperes below rating of MAIN due to
vertical bus limitations. Cable used in the conduit areas are limited to 75 C ampacity
values per the NEC for ampacity calculations. Any cell not used as a feeder breaker
may be a blank, or a feeder breaker provision for future breakers, or SPD surge.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 035
Layout Guide
Layout GuideMagnum DS Front-Accessible Switchgear
i
ii
Cable
Compartment
Note:
Cable
Compartment
18.00-Inch (457.2 mm) Breaker Sections:

Cable section can
ONLY be on the right.
22.00-Inch (558.8 mm) Breaker Sections:

Cable section can only
be on the right. Shipping
splits are not allowed
between breaker section
and its cable section.
3
4
Shipping splits must be

adjacent to a cable section.
D
Note 1: 18.00 (457.2), 22.00 (558.8), 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)
Note 2: 22.00 (558.8), 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)
18.00 (457.2)
x
(Note 1)
22.00 (558.8)
x
(Note 2)
Figure 20.1-7. Front-Accessible Breaker Structures

1
2
3
4
18.00 (457.2), 22.00 (558.8), 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)
22.00 (558.8), 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)
24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)
See Table 20.1-20 for information on cables and conduits.
8
9
Notes: Cable section can ONLY be on the right.

Shipping splits are not allowed between breaker section and its cable section.
Shipping splits must be adjacent to a cable section.
10

Front-Accessible Switchgear
Breaker Type
Frame Ampacity Available

m150 kAIC
Breaker Section WidthsInches (mm)

18.00 + X (457.2 + X)
22.00 + X (558.8 + X)
Narrow Magnum DS Frames

(MDN)
8002000
MDN4MDN5MDN6MDNC-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Standard Magnum DS
Frame (MDS)
8003200
MDS4MDS6MDS8MDSC-
Standard Series NRX

Frames (NRX) 5
8001200
NSS4NSS5NSS6-
Instrument compartment
(SPD, HRG, metering,
controls, panelboard, etc.)
5
11
24.00 + X (609.6 + X)
12
13
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
MainB/F
TieB/F or C/G
FeederB/F and C/G
FeederA, B, C, D,
E, F, G, H
All positions
All positions
All positions
14
15
16
17
Series NRX 65 kAIC maximum.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 036
Layout Guide
i
ii
Layout GuideMagnum DS Front-Accessible Switchgear

Cable Compartment
Top Entry
Cable
Compartment
Top Entry
Cable Compartment
Top Entry
Instrument
or SPD
Instrument
or SPD
Main Breaker
Main Breaker 5 kA
Cable
Compartment
Bottom
Entry
Cable Compartment
Bottom Entry
Blank
2
6 kA Main Breaker
Main Breaker
Main Breaker 5 kA
Fans
Instrument
or SPD
Instrument
or SPD
3
4
22.00 (558.8)
44.00 (1117.6)
Blank
22.00 (558.8)
44.00 (1117.6)
44.00 (1117.6)
Figure 20.1-8. Combination Breaker/Cable Sections
6
7
Metering
Feeder
MDN-608
800 A
Main
MDS 632
3200 A
Feeder
MDN-608
800 A
9
10
Cable
Compartment
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Tie
MDS 632
3200 A
Feeder
MDN-608
800 A
Blank
Feeder
MDN-608
800 A
Blank
Feeder
MDN-608
800 A
22.00
(558.8)
18.00
(457.2)
Feeder
MDN-608
800 A
Feeder
MDN-608
800 A
11
12
Cable
Compartment
Metering
18.00
(457.2)
22.00
(558.8)
18.00
(457.2)
Metering
Main
MDS 632
3200 A
Cable
Compartment
Cable
Compartment
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
Figure 20.1-9. Front-Accessible Standard and Narrow Breakers Main-Tie-Main Typical Layout
13
14
Instrument
A
15
Main MDS
3200A
B
F
16
Feeder Feeder
NRX
NRX
600 A 600 A
C
G
17
Cable
Compartment
SPD
18
19
20
21
D
24.00
(609.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
Arrangement 9
Feeder Feeder
NRX
NRX
800 A 800 A
A
E
Tie MDS
3200 A
B
F
Feeder Feeder
NRX
NRX
800 A 800 A
C
G
Feeder
NRX
400 A
D
24.00
(609.6)
Instrument
A
Cable
Compartment
Main MDS
3200 A
B
F
Feeder MDS
1600 A
C
Cable
Compartment
SPD
D
44.00
(1117.6)
24.00
(609.6)
Arrangement 10
44.00
(1117.6)
Arrangement 11
Figure 20.1-10. Main-Tie-Main Typical LayoutMDS Mains and Tie, NRX/MDS Feeders
Cable compartment must be at least as wide as the breaker compartment.
Cable sections must be on the right-hand side of the breaker sections when facing the front.
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 037
Layout Guide
Layout GuideMagnum DS Front-Accessible Switchgear 12
24.00
(609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
i
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
24.00
(609.6)
Feeder Feeder
800
800
A
E
Instrument
Feeder Feeder
800
800
B
F
Main 800
1600 2000 3200
B
F
Cable
Compartment
2
Cable
Compartment
Feeder Feeder
800
800
C
G
Feeder Feeder
800
800
D
H
Feeder Feeder
800
800
D
H
24.00
(609.6)
Arrangement 2
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
24.00
(609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
24.00
(609.6)
Feeder Feeder
800
800
A
E
Feeder Feeder
800
800
A
E
Instrument
Feeder Feeder
800
800
B
F
Tie 800
1600 2000 3200
B
F
Main 800
1600 2000 3200
B
F
Cable
Compartment
Cable
Compartment
Feeder 800 3
1600 2000 3200
C
G
Feeder Feeder
800
800
D
H
Feeder Feeder
800
800
D
H
Feeder Feeder
800
800
D
H
9
Cable
Compartment
10
11
12
Arrangement 5
Figure 20.1-11. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsSeries NRX and Magnum DS Breakers
3
7
8
Feeder Feeder
800
800
C
G
Arrangement 4
Tie 800
1600 2000 3200
C
G
Arrangement 3
Feeder Feeder
800
800
C
G
Arrangement 1
ii
Feeders are limited to NRX frame, 800 A maximum.

Main and Tie are Magnum DS frames, limited to frame ampacities shown.
Feeder breaker may be Magnum DS type, limited to the ampacities shown.
Any cell not used as a fee der breaker may be a blank, or a feeder breaker provision for future breakers, or SPD surge.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 038
Layout Dimensions
Conduit Area LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)
ii
44-Inch
3.00
(76.2)
Power
Conduit
Area
CC
12.00
(304.8)
3.60
(91.4)
3.00
(76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
21.50
(546.1)
6
7
3.50
(88.9)
5.38
(136.7)
36.00
(914.4)
3.00
(76.2)
17
CC
0.65
(16.5)
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
Front
A
6.00(152.4)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.60
(91.4)
31.18
(792.0)
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
1.50
(38.1)
1
12.00
(304.8)
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
Power
Conduit
Area
1.50
(38.1)
1.38
(35.1)
3.38
(85.9)
0.65
(16.5)
21.50
(546.1)
3.50 (88.9)
Provision for
0.50 (12.7) Hardware
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
Front
5.38
(136.7)
36.00
(914.4)
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
3.00
(76.2)
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
Front
16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
3.00 (76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.60
(94.4)
31.18
(792.0)
0.65
(16.5)
21.50
(546.1)
4.25 (108.0)
8.38
Provisions
for 0.50 (12.7) (212.9)
Hardware
4.63
(117.6)
36.00
(914.4)
3.00
(76.2)
This dimension is reduced by 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) when vertical section is close coupled to a dry-type transformer due to secondary bus connections.
Note: See Table 20.1-19 for further information on cable and conduit recommendations.
48.00
(1219.2)
24.00
24.00
(609.6)
(609.6)
13
16
1.50
(38.1)
3.00
(76.2)
Figure 20.1-12. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)18.00, 22.00, 30.00, 44.00-Inch (457.2, 558.8, 762.0, 1117.6 mm) Wide
Rear-Access Structures
12
15
16.00
(406.4)
6.00
(152.4)
14
1.50
(38.1)
11
16.00
(406.4)
1.38
(35.1)
10
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
24.00
(609.6)
54.00
(1371.6)
30.00
(762.0)
24.00
(609.6)
68.00
(1727.2)
44.00
(1117.6)
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
20.00
(508.0)
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
17.50
(444.5)
40.20
(1021.1)
20.50
(520.7)
26.50
(673.1)
40.50
(1028.7)
Front
Figure 20.1-13. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)Front-Access Structures
18
Note: See Table 20.1-20 for further information on cable and conduit recommendations.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 039
Layout Dimensions
Table 20.1-19. Rear-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
W
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
CC
Recommended Number of Conduits

3.50 Inch (88.9 mm)
4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
2
4
6
8
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
16
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
9.08 (230.6)
15.08 (383.0)
21.08 (535.4)
27.08 (687.8)
33.08 (840.2)
39.08 (992.6)
5
9
12
15
18
21
5
8
12
15
18
21
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Table 20.1-20. Front-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

W
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
CC
13.89 (352.8)
17.89 (454.4)
20.50 (520.7)
25.89 (657.6)
39.89 (1013.2)
13
Recommended Number of Conduits

3.00 Inch (76.2 mm)
3.50 Inch (88.9 mm)
4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
12
15
22
6
8
8
12
18
6
8
8
11
17
14
15
Table 20.1-21. Arc-Resistant Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

W
CC
Recommended Number of Conduits for Top Entry 1

3.50 Inch (88.9 mm)
4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
22.00 (558.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
14.80 (375.9)
20.80 (528.3)
26.80 (680.7)
34.80 (883.9)
8
10
14
18
6
9
13
15
30.00 (762.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
14.80 (375.9)
20.80 (528.3)
26.80 (680.7)
34.80 (883.9)
11
14
20
24
8
12
20
24
44.00 (1117.6)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
14.80 (375.9)
20.80 (528.3)
26.80 (680.7)
34.80 (883.9)
16
20
28
36
12
18
26
30
Arc-resistant switchgears conduit space for bottom entry is the same as regular rear-accessible gear.
CA08104001E
16
17
18
19
20
21

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 040
Layout Dimensions
Section ViewDimensions in Inches (mm)

Lifting Plate
ii
Metal-Enclosed Shipping
Split Terminal Blocks
Optional top-of-gear
Breaker Lifter
2
4.10 (104.1)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
99.00
(2514.6)
10
11
12
13
Vertical Bus Riser Area
Horizontal Cross Bus Area
92.00
(2336.8)
Ground
Bus
14
15
16
20.28
(515.1)
17
D
18
25.63
(651.0)
Figure 20.1-14. Section View of a Typical Structure with Magnum DS BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm)
19
See Table 20.1-19, Page 20.1-37 for depth information and recommended number of cables.
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 041
Layout Dimensions
Lifting Plate
Metal-Enclosed Shipping
Split Terminal Blocks
ii
Optional Top-of-Gear
Breaker Lifter
4.10
(104.0)
1
2
3
Ground Bus
6
7
99.00
(2515.0)
Vertical Bus Riser Area
92.00
(2337.0)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
20.28
(515.0)
D1
25.63
(651.0)
Figure 20.1-15. Section View of a Typical Structure with Series NRX BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm)
1
16
17
See Table 20.1-19, Page 20.1-37 for depth information and recommended number of cables.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 042
Layout Dimensions
i
3.50
(88.9)
ii
3.50
(88.9)
1
2
3.19
(81.0)
Encl. Width View A
8.81
(223.8)
4.10
(104.1)
6.02
(152.9)
Lifting Angle (View A)

30.8
(782.82)
4
5
6
800A
Runbacks Shown;
See Table A
for Other Sizes
7
8
22.00
(558.8)
9
10
92.00
(2336.8)
11
22.00
(558.8)
16.55
(420.4)
12
13
14
22.00
(558.8)
15
16
Front
6.41
(162.8)
17
18
19
20
20.28
(515.1)
40.16
(1020.1)
Table A. Bus Cross-Sections

Ampere Rating
800 A
Runback Cross-Section
3.50 x 0.25 2.50 x 0.38
0.88
(22.2)
1200/1600 A 2000 A
4.50 x 0.50
Figure 20.1-16. Front-Access Section ViewDimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: Top-mounted breaker lifting device available for bottom cable entry/exit only. For cables exiting the top of the switchgear,
a floor-mounted lifter must be used.
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 043
Layout Dimensions
LayoutOutdoor Walk-in Switchgear
17.13
(435.1)
2.50
(63.5)
3.06
(77.7)
20.00
(508.0)
4.00
(101.6)
5.03
(127.8)
45.66
(1159.8)
26.94
(684.3)
Opening
25.31
(642.9)
40.94
(1039.9)
Opening
18.44
(468.4)
30.00
(762.0)
Unit
3.93
(99.8)
Bus Duct
Chimney & Cover
18.94
(481.1)
Opening
22.00
(558.8)
Unit
Foundation Tie Down

(for Seismic Only)
Section A-A
Figure 1
Floor Plan
119.98
(3047.5)
Overall Depth
18.44 Bus Opening (From Base)
(468.4)
See Figure 1 Above for

3.89
(98.8)
2.30
(58.4)
109.03
(2769.4)
105.06
(2668.5)
28.59
(726.2)
(From Base)
111.48
(2831.6)
Overall
Height
33.45
(849.6)
(Door
Width)
2.00
(50.8)
26.00
(660.4)
117.08
(2973.8)
(Base)
30.89
30.89 26.97
26.97
(784.6)
(784.6) (685.0)
(685.0)
CLCL
Throat
Throat
Opening
Opening
&&TXF
TXF
Switchgear
SwitchgearThroat
Throat
(Shipped
(ShippedDisassembled)
Disassembled)
Door
DoorSwing
Swing
5.75
(146.1)
CL
36.00
36.00
(914.4)
(914.4)
22.00
22.00
(558.8)
(558.8)
Outdoor
Outdoor
Roof
RoofSheet
Sheet
30.21
(767.3)
(Opening
Width)
5.75
(146.1)
4.00
(101.6)
43.38
(1101.9)
(Aisle Width)
39.66
39.66
(1007.4)
(1007.4)
A
8.00
(203.2)
15.50
22.00 (393.7) 22.00
(558.8)
(558.8)
44.00
(1117.6)
30.00
(762.0)
Unit Widths
6
7
20.74
20.74
(526.8)
(526.8)
72.00
72.00
(1828.8)
(1828.8)
Switchgear
Switchgear
Depth
Depth
CLCL
CLCL
See
See
Figure
Figure11
42.00
42.00
(1066.8)
(1066.8)
(Clear
(Clear
Width)
Width)
Front
Frontof
of
Outdoor
Outdoor
Base
Base
10
Door
Door
Swing
Swing
11
33.45
33.45
(849.6)
(849.6)
12
13
WeightLbs (kg)
1500 (681)
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
5200 (2361)
2300 (1044)
2300 (1044)
2700 (1226)
3200 (1453)
150 (68)
5.00
(127.0)
Reference Drawing: 9255C35
Figure 20.1-17. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

CA08104001E
14
15
16
17
18
Front View
AA
Structure
End Trims One set per lineup)
18-inch (457.2) wide breaker structure
Transformer throat
45.00
(1143.0)
14.00
14.00
(355.6)
(355.6)

(without breakers)
Switchgear Throat
37.50
(952.5)
9.00
(228.6)
11.00
(279.4)
15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)
22.00
(558.8)
25.00
(635.0)
Top View
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
18.00-Inch
18.00-InchWidth
Width==17.4
17.4to
toRear
RearFrame
Frame(441.9)
(441.9)
22.00-Inch
22.00-InchWidth
Width==21.4
21.4to
toRear
RearFrame
Frame(543.6)
(543.6)
30.00-Inch
30.00-InchWidth
Width==29.4
29.4to
toRear
RearFrame
Frame(746.8)
(746.8)
38.00-Inch
38.00-InchWidth
Width==37.4
37.4to
toRear
RearFrame
Frame(950.0)
(950.0)
50.00-Inch
50.00-InchWidth
Width==49.4
49.4to
toRear
RearFrame
Frame(1254.8)
(1254.8)
55.00-Inch
55.00-InchWidth
Width==54.4
54.4to
toRear
RearFrame
Frame(1381.8)
(1381.8)
33.45
33.45
(849.6)
(849.6)
Side View
Transformer
Flange
AA
Transformer
Transformer
Flange
Flange
0.61
(15.5)
CL
B
O.S.
O.S.of
ofOutdoor
Outdoor
End
EndSheet
Sheet
18.00
13.35
(457.2) (339.1)
17.35
22.00
(558.8) (440.7)
30.00
25.35
(762.0) (644.0)
38.00
33.35
(965.2) (847.1)
44.00
39.35
(1117.6) (999.5)
50.00
45.35
(1270.0) (1151.9)
0.95
(24.1)
ii
1
Section B-B
Structure
Width
Top View
0.95
(24.1)
1.50
(38.1)
Lifting Angle
0.95
(24.1)
CL
44.00
(1117.6)
Unit
109.03
(2769.4)
to Floor
25.52
(648.2)
C
A L
A
B
Control Wire
Opening
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
0.95
(24.1)
16.81
(427.0
48.87
(1241.3)
Bottom
Conduit
Space
Rear of
Inner
Structure
C
B
2.00
(50.8)
Control Wire
Opening
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
3.06
(77.7)
3.06
(77.7)
20.00
(508.0)
Structure
Width
Roof
Rear of Base
Centerline of copper connection from bottom of structure
41.38
51.23
19.70
55
46.63
57.00
18.70
55
52.63
63.00
18.70
61
19
20
21

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 044
Layout Dimensions
LayoutOutdoor Non-Walk-in Switchgear

17.13
(435.1)
ii
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
3.06
(77.7)
20.00
(508.0)
25.44
(646.2)
40.94
(1039.9)
Opening
3.06
(77.7)
B
18.44
(468.4)
2.00
(50.8) 30.00
(762.0)
Unit
Bottom
Conduit
Space
CL
0.95
(24.1)
Transformer
Transformer
Flange
Flange
28.58
(725.9)
(From Base)
105.08
(2669.0)
10
11
109.79
(2788.7)
Overall
Height
CL
B
CL
2.00
(50.8)
30.23
30.23 26.97
26.97
(767.8)
(767.8) (685.0)
(685.0)
C
C
LL
Throat
Throat
Opening
Opening
&
& TXF
TXF
Switchgear
Switchgear Throat
Throat
(Shipped
Disassembled)
A
8.00
(203.2)
17
37.50
(952.5)
19
20
21
15.50
22.00 (393.7) 22.00
(558.8)
(558.8)
72.00
72.00
(1828.8)
(1828.8)
Switchgear
Switchgear
Depth
Depth
Outdoor
Outdoor
Base
Base
C
C
LL
C
C
LL
See
See
Figure
Figure 11
WeightLbs (kg)
1500 (681)
2400 (1090)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
5200 (2361)
2300 (1044)
2300 (1044)
2700 (1226)
3200 (1453)
150 (68)
44.00
(1117.6)
30.00
(762.0)
Unit Widths
Front View
Figure 20.1-18. Outdoor Non-Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
A
A
20.10
20.10
(510.5)
(510.5)
Structure
End trims one set per lineup)
Transformer throat
45.00
(1143.0)
Transformer
Flange
1.65
1.65
(41.9)
(41.9)
1.60
1.60
14.00
14.00 (40.6)
(40.6)
(355.6)
(355.6)

(without breakers)
Switchgear Throat
18
Rear
Rear of
of Base
Base
Indoor
Indoor Gear
Gear
Top View
14
16
to
to Rear
Rear Frame
Frame (543.6)
(543.6)
to
to Rear
Rear Frame
Frame (746.8)
(746.8)
to
to Rear
Rear Frame
Frame (950.0)
(950.0)
to
to Rear
Rear Frame
Frame (1254.8)
(1254.8)
to
to Rear
Rear Frame
Frame (1381.8)
(1381.8)
86.04
(2185.4)
(Base)
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
15
22.00-Inch
22.00-Inch Width
Width == 21.4
21.4
30.00-Inch
30.00-Inch Width
Width == 29.4
29.4
38.00-Inch
38.00-Inch Width
Width == 37.4
37.4
50.00-Inch
50.00-Inch Width
Width == 49.4
49.4
55.00-Inch
55.00-Inch Width
Width == 54.4
54.4
11.00
(279.4)
15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)
22.00
(558.8)
25.00
(635.0)
7.51
7.51
(190.8)
(190.8)
Work
Work Space
Space
Side View
13
A
A
4.00
(101.6)
26.00
(660.4)
12
36.00
36.00
(914.4)
(914.4)
22.00
22.00
(558.8)
(558.8)
Outdoor
Outdoor
Roof
Roof Sheet
Sheet
3.89
(98.8)
109.05
(2769.9)
0.95
(24.1)
O.S.
O.S. of
of Outdoor
Outdoor
End
End Sheet
Sheet
88.02
(2235.7)
Overall Depth
(468.4)

22.00
17.35
(558.8) (440.7)
25.35
30.00
(762.0) (644.0)
38.00
33.35
(965.2) (847.1)
39.35
44.00
(1117.6) (999.5)
50.00
45.35
(1270.0) (1151.9)
Figure 1
Floor Plan
18.00
13.35
9.00
(457.2) (339.1) (228.6)
Section A-A
1.50
(38.1)
Section B-B
Structure
Width
Top View
22.00
(558.8)
Unit
Foundation Tie Down

(for Seismic Only)
0.95
(24.1)
Bus Duct
Chimney & Cover
18.94
(481.1)
Opening
109.03
(2769.4)
to Floor
25.52
(648.2)
C
A L
44.00
(1117.6)
Unit
3.93
(99.8)
0.95
(24.1)
16.85
(428.0
17.83
(452.9)
Lifting Angle
Rear of
Inner
Structure
3.06
(77.7)
20.00
(508.0)
Control Wire
Opening
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
26.94
(684.3)
Opening
Structure
Width
Roof
Rear of Base
Centerline of copper connection from bottom of structure
41.38
51.23
19.70
55
46.63
57.00
18.70
55
52.63
63.00
18.70
61
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 045
Layout Guide
Arc-Resistant
Layout Restrictions
All Magnum rear-accessible layouts

(see Table 20.1-17) are available
in arc-resistant design with the
exceptions of the following:
i
ii
Front
36.00 1
(914.4)
1. Utility compartments as shown

in Figure 20.1-5 arrangement
1a or 1b.
21.25
(539.8)
2. 38.00-inch (965.2 mm) or

50.00-inch (1270.0 mm)
compartments as shown
in Figure 20.1-5 arrangement
1a or 1b.
0.95
(24.1)
4
Top Control
Conduit Area
3. 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) compartments as shown in Figure 20.1-5,

arrangements 2833.
4. Slider control section as shown

in Figure 20.1-5, arrangement 36.
5. Group-mounted molded-case
circuit breaker switchboard as
6. MDN, MDSX, MDSL, MDDX, fourpole and Series NRX breakers.
Width (of entire structure)
72.00 (1828.8)
96.10 (2440.9)
8
9
10
66.00 (1676.4)
Height (without plenum) 1

Section width
CC
Minimum in
Inches (mm)
Depth
Height (with plenum)
7
A
The following minimum dimensional

requirements also apply:
Dimension
Plenum
and
Roof Flaps
3.85 (97.8)
Dynamic
Flap Cage
117.00 (2971.8)
12
22.00 (558.8)
Requires an additional 10-foot ceiling

clearance with no overhead obstructions
(i.e., lights, conduits, smoke detectors, etc.).
Front access and outdoor/sprinkler

proof enclosures are not currently
available in arc-resistant gear.
11
Figure 20.1-19. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)
Arc-Resistant Structure
1
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) is the recommended front clearance for breaker removal with
top-of-switchgear-mounted breaker lifter. If a portable breaker lifter is to be used, allow
at least 84.00 inches (2133.6 mm) of aisle space.
Note: See Table 20.1-21 for further information on assembly depth and recommendations
for cables and conduits.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 046
Layout Dimensions
Non-PlenumDimensions in Inches (mm)
ii
No
Obstructions
in This Area
1
2
3
4
5
6
10 Foot
Minimum
Ceiling
105.20
(2672.1)
Top of
Flaps
7
8
9
10
11
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
Minimum Arc Line-up
72.00
(1828.8)
Figure 20.1-20. Non-Plenum Top Exit Configuration
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 047
Layout Dimensions
PlenumDimensions in Inches (mm)

A
i
26.10
(662.9)
ii
D
72.00 (1828.8)
21.70 (551.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
27.70 (703.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
33.70 (856.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
39.70 (1008.4)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
117.10
(2974.3)
9
10
91.90
(2334.3)
98.70
(2507.0)
11
12
13
14
15
16
Front
17
D
27.00
(685.8)
18
Figure 20.1-21. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Side View Showing the Arc Plenum
Note: Refer to Table 20.1-21, Page 20.1-37 for complete dimensions.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 048
Layout Dimensions
i
34.80 (883.9)
to Rear Frame
ii
1
2
Right-Hand Exit
(Left-Hand Exit
also Available)
D
Deep
Center Line of
Exhaust Duct
23.7
(602.0)
REF
37.30 (947.4)
to Front of Door
4
Front
5
Plan View
6
7
8
28.90
(734.1)
9
10
11
Rear Right-Hand Exit
Center Line of
Exhaust Duct
23.70
(602.0)
Width
15.20
(386.1)
Rear Exit Will Cover Two

22.00-Inch (558.8 mm)
Wide Structures
D
Deep
12
13
14
Front
15
Plan View
16
17
Figure 20.1-22. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Exhaust Configurations

Notes: Gear shown with rear covers.
Eaton arc resistant rating with or without plenum and arc duct are up to 85 kA at 635 Vac maximum and 100 kA at 508 Vac maximum.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 049
Layout Dimensions
23.70
(602.0)
Width
28.90
(734.1)
Rear
Left-Hand
Exit
Center Line of
Exhaust Duct
15.10
(383.5)
Note: Gear Shown

With Rear Covers
Rear Exit Will

Cover Two
22.00-Inch
(558.8 mm)
Wide Structures
D
Deep
ii
Plenum Top Exit Exhaust Duct
22.00
(558.8)
1
34.70
(881.4)
to Rear
Frame
2
3
4
37.40
(950.0)
to Front
of Door
5
6
Center
Lines of
Exhaust
Duct
Front
Plan View
23.70
(602.0)
Width
Non-Plenum/Exhaust Exit
9
10
Center Line of
Exhaust Duct
Side Exit with 90 Elbow
21.90
(556.3)
11
40.00
(1016.0)
63.50
(1612.9)
12
D
Deep
13
D
Deep
14
10.00 (254.0) Minimum
Distance Before
Turning 90 or 45
15
Front
16
Front
Plan View
17
Plan View
18
Figure 20.1-22. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Exhaust Configurations (Continued)
Notes: Gear shown with rear covers.
Eaton arc resistant rating with or without plenum and arc duct are up to 85 kA at 635 Vac maximum and 100 kA at 508 Vac maximum.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 050
Technical Data/Dimensions/Weights
Application
Table 20.1-23. Magnum DS Indoor Rear Switchgear Structure Approximate Weights

(Standard Construction Less Breakers) 1
Center of Gravity
Depth in
Inches (mm)
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1250 (568)
1300 (591)
1350 (614)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1400 (639)
1450 (659)
1500 (682)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1900 (864)
2000 (909)
2100 (955)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
2200 (1000)
2300 (1045)
2400 (1091)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
2500 (1136)
2600 (1182)
2700 (1227)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
2800 (1273)
2900 (1318)
3000 (1364)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
3800 (1727)
4000 (1818)
4200 (1909)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
4400 (2000)
4600 (2091)
4800 (2182)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
475 (216)
500 (227)
525 (239)
10
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
550 (250)
575 (261)
600 (273)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
950 (432)
1000 (455)
1050 (477)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1100 (500)
1150 (523)
1200 (545)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1700 (773)
1750 (795)
1800 (818)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1850 (840)
1900 (864)
1950 (886)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1600 (726)
1625 (738)
1650 (749)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1675 (760)
1700 (772)
1725 (783)
17
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1650 (749)
1675 (760)
1700 (772)
18
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1725 (783)
1750 (795)
1775 (806)
ii
1
For seismic calculations, the following

dimensions should be used to locate
the center of gravity for Indoor
Magnum DS switchgear.
Width in
Inches (mm)
Breaker Structure
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00
(457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
Table 20.1-22. Center of Gravity Location

Vertical
Left-to-Right
From the Front
60.00
(1524.0)
Center of
lineup
26.00
(660.4)
30.00 (762.0)
3
4
44.00 (117.6)
5
6
60.00 (1524.0)
7
8
Auxiliary/Transition Structures
12.00 (304.8)
11
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00

(457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
12
30.00 (762.0)
13
14
Utility Structures
15
38.00 (965.2)
16
50.00 (1270.0)
See Table 20.1-25 on the following page for breaker weights.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 051
Table 20.1-24. Magnum DS Indoor Front Switchgear Structure
Approximate Weights (Less Breakers) 1
Width in
Inches (mm)
Depth in
Inches (mm)
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
Breaker Structure
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00
(457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
40.00 (1016.0)
1100 (500)
30.00 (762.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
1750 (795)
44.00 (1117.6)
40.00 (1016.0)
2200 (1000)
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00

(457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
40.00 (1016.0)
800 (363)
30.00 (762.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
1550 (705)
44.00 (1117.6)
40.00 (1016.0)
1600 (727)
Cable Compartment
See Table 20.1-25 for breaker weights.
Table 20.1-25. Magnum DS and Series NRX Breaker Weights

Breaker
Drawout in Lbs (kg)
Compact
54 (24)
ii
MDN-408
MDN-508
MDN-608
130 (59)
130 (59)
130 (59)
MDN-C08
MDN-416
MDN-516
145 (66)
130 (59)
130 (59)
MDN-616
MDN-C16
MDN-620
MDN-C20
130 (59)
145 (66)
145 (66)
145 (66)
NRX
Narrow
Standard
MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
130 (59)
130 (59)
145 (66)
MDS-C08
MDS-X08
MDS-616
145 (66)
210 (95)
130 (59)
MDS-816
MDS-C16
MDS-X16
145 (66)
145 (66)
210 (95)
MDS-620
MDS-820
MDS-C20
145 (66)
145 (66)
145 (66)
MDS-X20
MDS-632
MDS-832
MDS-C32
210 (95)
175 (79)
175 (79)
175 (79)
4
5
6
7
8
9
Double Wide
MDS-X32
MDN-640
MDN-840
325 (148)
310 (141)
310 (141)
10
MDN-C40
MDS-840
MDS-C40
310 (141)
310 (141)
310 (141)
11
MDS-X40
MDD-X40
MDS-850
345 (157)
325 (148)
310 (141)
12
MDS-C50
MDS-X50
MDD-X50
310 (141)
345 (157)
325 (148)
13
MDS-C60
MDD-X60
310 (141)
325 (148)
Fused
MDS-L08
MDS-L16
MDS-L20
14
185 (84)
215 (98)
215 (98)
15
Note: Impact weight equals 1.5 times breaker static weight.

Three-pole frame weight given; four-pole frame weight
equals 1.33 times more.
16
Table 20.1-26. Magnum DS Arc-Resistant Switchgear Additional

Approximate Weights
17
Arc-Resistant Component
Approximate Weight (kg/Foot (m)
Plenum
34 (50.60)
Exhaust duct
38 (56.55)
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Magnum DS
April 2015
Sheet 20 052
Application
Altitude
Standards
ii
1
2
3
Magnum DS circuit breakers meet or

exceed all applicable requirements of
ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17, C37.50
and CSA.
System Voltage and Frequency

Magnum DS breakers are designed for
operation on AC systems only, 60 Hz or
50 Hz, 635 V maximum.
Continuous Current Ratings
4
5
6
7
Unlike transformers, generators and

motors, circuit breakers are maximumrated devices and have no built-in
temporary overload current ratings.
Consequently, it is vital that each application take into consideration
the maximum anticipated current
demand, initial and future, including
temporary overloads.
10
The continuous rating of any Magnum

DS breaker is limited to the sensor
rating, or the frame size current rating,
whichever is the lesser. For instance,
an MDS-616 1600 A frame breaker
with 800 A sensors has a maximum
continuous rating of 800 A, but the
same breaker with 1600 A sensors
is limited to 1600 A maximum.
11
All current ratings are based on a

maximum ambient air temperature
of 40 C (104 F).
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
Table 20.1-27. Altitude Derating Factors
Ambient Temperature
The temperature of the air surrounding
the enclosure should be within
the limits of: 30 C (22 F) to
+40 C (+104 F).
Altitude
The breakers are applicable at their
full voltage and current ratings up to
a maximum altitude of 6600 ft (2012 m)
above sea level. When installed at
higher altitudes, the ratings are subject
to the following correction factors in
accordance with ANSI C37.20.1.
Meters
Voltage
Current
Correction Correction
6600
7000
7500
2012
2134
2286
1000
0.989
0.976
1000
0.998
0.995
8000
8500
9000
2438
2591
2743
0.963
0.950
0.933
0.993
0.990
0.987
9500
10,000
10,500
2896
3048
3200
0.917
0.900
0.883
0,983
0.980
0.977
11,000
11,500
12,000
3353
3505
3658
0.867
0.850
0.833
0.973
0.970
0.967
12,500
13,000
3810
3962
0.817
0.800
0.963
0.960
Feet
kAIC rating is required. Per IEEE

sanctioned methodology, the
calculated short circuit current at the
point of interest is increased by the
Table 20.1-27 multiplying factors (MF)
to yield an apparent value of short
circuit current, which is then compared to the published breaker ratings.
Only breakers having published
ratings higher than the apparent
fault current can be safely applied.
For example, if unfused air power
breakers rated 65 kAIC were being
considered within a 480/277 Vac
distribution system where the X/R
at the point of breaker application is
14.25 and the calculated fault current
was determined to be 60 kA, the
determination of the suitability of
these breakers yields:
All low voltage air power circuit

breakers are tested per the ANSI
Standard C37.1 for a system X/R ratio
of 6.6 maximum. It is common within
low voltage systems to experience
power factor and X/R values outside
the range of the standard values, and
thus a means to evaluate published
product ratings is necessary.
Apparent Fault Current = 60 kA x MF

= 60 kA x 1.112
= 66.72 kA
and therefore because 66.72 kA
exceeds the 65 kAIC rating, the
breakers are not adequate and
higher rated kAIC breakers would
need to be applied.
For applications of power breakers

within distribution systems having
calculated X/R ratios higher than 6.6,
the derating of the air power breakers
Table 20.1-28. Air Power Breaker Derating
System
X/R Ratio
1.73
System
% PF
50.0
Derating and Multiplying Factors for Air Power Breakers

Fused
Unfused
Derating
MF
Derating
MF
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
3.18
30.0
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
3.87
25.0
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
4.90
20.0
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
6.59
15.0
0.939
1.065
1.000
1.000
8.27
12.0
0.898
1.114
0.962
1.000
9.95
10.0
0.870
1.149
0.937
1.067
11.72
8.5
0.849
1.178
0.918
1.089
14.25
7.0
0.827
1.209
0.899
1.112
19.97
5.0
0.797
1.255
0.874
1.144
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
April 2015

Magnum DS
Sheet 20 053
Unusual Environmental and

Operating Conditions
Special attention should be given
to applications subject to the
following conditions:
1. Damaging or hazardous fumes,
vapors, etc.
2. Excessive or abrasive dust.
For such conditions, it is generally
recommended that the switchgear
be installed in a clean, dry room,
with filtered and/or pressurized
clean air. This method permits the
use of standard indoor switchgear
and avoids the derating effect of
non-ventilated enclosures.
3. Salt spray, excessive moisture,
dripping, etc.
Drip shields in equipment rooms
and space heaters in indoor
weatherproof enclosures, may
be indicated, depending upon
the severity of the conditions.
4. Excessively high or low ambient

temperatures.
For ambient temperatures exceeding 40 C, and based on a standard
temperature rise of 65 C, the continuous current ratings of breaker
frame sizes, and also buses, current
transformers, etc., will be subject
to a derating factor calculated
from the following formula:
105 TotalSpecial Ambient, C
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------105 Total40 C Standard Ambient
Circuit breakers are not adversely
affected by very low outdoor
ambient temperatures, particularly
when energized and carrying
load currents. The standard
space heaters in weatherproof
switchgear will raise the
temperature slightly and
prevent condensation.
Electrical components such as
relays and instruments, however,
must be applied within the
manufacturers specified limits.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5. Exposure to seismic shock.

Magnum DS assemblies and
breakers have been certified for
applications through International
Building Code 2009 (IBC) and
California Building Code 2010
(CBC). Assembly modifications
may be required, so such
conditions must be specified.
6. Abnormally high frequency
of operation.
In line with above, a lesser number
of operations between servicing,
and more frequent replacement
of parts, may be indicated.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
21.0-1
October 2013
Switchboards
Low Voltage
Sheet 21 001
Contents
OPTIM Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5
Metering Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-6
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-8
Pow-R-Line C Front- or Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . 21.0-9
Pow-R-Line C Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-10
Pow-R-Line, Drawout Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Switchboard . . . . . . . 21.0-11
Pow-R-Line i, Compartmentalized Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-12
Circuit Breakers and Fusible Switch Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-15
Pow-R-Line C Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-1
Pow-R-Line C Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders and Pow-R-Line i . . . . . 21.2-1
Pow-R-Line i, Compartmentalized Feeders, Rear-Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-1
Outdoor Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-1
Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchboardsLow Voltage
FeaturesGeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1
Magnum SB Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-2
Layout and Breaker Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-3
Integrated Facility System Switchboards
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-1
Layout Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-2
Generator Quick Connect Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1
Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1
Multipoint Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1
Commercial Metering Switchboards
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.10-1
Layout Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.10-9
Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.11-1
Specifications:
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Type 1 Pow-R-Line C Front-Access
Section 26 24 13.11
Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429
Pow-R-Line i
Compartmentalized Feeders . . . . . . . . . Section 16428
Section 26 24 13.13
Integrated Facility System
Switchboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16433
Section 26 24 13.21
Commercial Metering Switchboard . . . . . Section 16431
Section 26 24 13.17
Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16435
Section 26 24 13.19
Power Distribution Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16474
Section 26 26 00
Circuit Breakers and Fusible
SwitchesLV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475
Section 26 28 11
Switchboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429C
Section 26 23 00.15
Roll-up Generator Termination
Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429R
Section 26 24 13.37
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
21.0-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage

October 2013
Sheet 21 002
General Description
i
ii
1
2
and Definitions
rear-connected switchboard. See

Pow-R-Line i switchboards in this
section for details.
Eatons Pow-R-Line family of

distribution switchboards incorporates
new design concepts that fit the
ever-increasing need for applications
on high short circuit systems, while
retaining maximum flexibility, safety
and convenience throughout the line.
Standard Pow-R-Line switchboard

height is 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm).
Contact Eaton for special heights.
Front Access
3
4
5
6
7
Front-access switchboards align at

the rear, enabling them to be placed
against a wall (Type Pow-R-Line C
front accessible). If the main section
is deeper than others, due to physical
size of the main device, the necessary
offset in lineup will occur in front, and
the main section will be accessible
from the side as well as from the front.
Eaton also offers front accessible
switchboards that align at the front
and rear.
Rear Access
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Standard Switchboard Height
Group Mounting
Group-mounted circuit protective
devices are an assembly of units
mounted on a panelboard type
chassis. Units may be moldedcase breakers, fusible switches,
customer metering and surge
protective devices.
A main molded-case breaker or main
fusible switch, within the sizes listed for
panelboard design, can be included in
the panel-mounted assembly in lieu of
a separate, individually mounted unit.
Space Only for Future Devices

Group-Mounted Construction
Where space only for future circuit
protective devices is required, the
proper space and a blank filler plate
will be supplied. Connections and
mounting hardware are not included.
Rear-access switchboards align at the

front and the rear. Bus maintenance
and cable entry and exit require rear
access. There are two types of rear
accessible switchboards. Both types
use the same incoming utility and/or
main structures. The first type uses
group-mounted feeder devices with
panel construction (Type Pow-R-Line C
rear accessible). The second type uses
individually compartmentalized feeder
devices with load side insulated bus
bar extensions (Type Pow-R-Line i).
Provision for Future Devices
Individually Mounted
Bus Bar System
Larger overcurrent protective devices

(OCPD) may be individually mounted.
In most cases, this means that the
OCPD is mounted vertically in the
switchboard and is connected via
bus bar. All insulated case circuit
breakers, power air circuit breakers
and bolted pressure contact switches
are individually mounted. Moldedcase circuit breakers 600A and above
may be individually mounted when
used as a main or as a feeder device
feeding other OCPD within a section
or adjacent sections.
Standard bus in the switchboards

is tin-plated aluminum. Copper,
silver-plated copper or tin-plated
copper are also available.
Compartmentalized Feeder
and Branch Devices
Compartmentalized molded-case
circuit breakers and fusible switches
provide additional isolation.
Individually mounted molded-case
circuit breakers and fusible switches
through 1200A are available in a
compartmentalized, rear-access,
Where provisions for future circuit

protective devices are required,
space for the device, corresponding
vertical bus, device connectors and
the necessary mounting hardware
will be supplied.
Main bus and sub-main buses

meet UL and NEMA standards for
temperature rise on all Pow-R-Line
switchboards. Special density rated
bus is available.
Overcurrent Devices
To properly select and size overcurrent
devices for use in a switchboard,
the allowable temperature rise must be
taken into account as to its effect
on the tripping characteristics of
the devices in question per UL 891.
Accordingly, the NEC requires
overcurrent devices to be rated not less
than 125% of the continuous load they
are protecting. To comply with this, an
80% derating factor must be used with all
overcurrent devices such as molded-case
breakers and FDPW fusible switches

unless they are tested and listed for
application at 100% of the rating. All
Magnum type breakers and bolted
pressure switches are 100% rated.
Short-Circuit Rating
Standard bus and connectors on all
switchboards are rated for use on
systems capable of producing up to
65,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit
current at the incoming terminals.
Increased bus short-circuit ratings
equal to that of connected switchboard
devices, up to 200,000A rms symmetrical,
are available in most Pow-R-Line C
switchboards when approved main
devices are installed. UL labeled
switchboard sections are marked with
their applicable short-circuit rating.
When air power circuit breakers are used
as feeder devices in a switchboard, these
devices may experience up to a 30-cycle
(1/2 second) delay if the instantaneous
setting is turned off. Eaton has qualified
our low voltage switchboards when air
power circuit breakers are used as
feeders (and mains) to 30 cycles. This
rating is not recognized under the UL 891
standard. However, Eaton has witness
tested the structure bussing with a
qualified National Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) at 30 cycles (1/2
second) up to 100 kAIC symmetrical.
Provision for Busway Entrance

and Exit
Busway connections to switchboard
sections include cutout and drilling in the
top of the switchboard with riser
connections from the switchboard device
or bus, up to the point where the bus
duct enters the switchboard. No
connections are furnished external to the
switchboard.
In all transactions involving busway
attached to switchboards, it is essential
that information regarding orientation of
the busway with respect to the front of
the switchboard be supplied to the
coordinating assembly plant.
On Pow-R-Line C switchboards, a
solid bus bar is used to connect the bus
duct to the individually mounted main
device, main or sub-main switchboard
bus, or vertical main bus of panelmounted circuit protective device
panels. Busway fed by group-mounted
branch devices are cable connected.
Aluminum riser connections are
standard. Copper- or silver-plated
copper is available as an option.
CA08104001E
21.0-3
October 2013
Sheet 21 003
General Description
Transitions
Transition structures are required
for connecting switchboards to the
secondary of power center
transformer (fluid filled), motor
control centers, and for other special
switchboard configurations such
as L or U shaped lineups. In
some applications, an extra structure
complete with connections is required;
in others, where switchboard depth
and space permit, only the connection
conductors are required. Refer to
Eaton for these applications.
Auxiliary Structures
These are normally mounted adjacent
to service structures or distribution
structures, and used where incoming
service or feeder conductors require
additional space or facilities not
included in the standard switchboard,
such as:
1. Mounted adjacent to a top
connected service structure
and used as a cable pull structure
where service conductors are
brought in underground. Auxiliary
structures are the same depth and
height as the service structure, and
are wide enough to accommodate
the incoming cables.
2. Mounted adjacent to a service
structure and used as a bus
transition compartment for
running riser bus from the loadside of the service structure up to
top outgoing bus duct connection
when distribution structures are
not required. Auxiliary structures
are the same depth and height as
service structures.
In addition to the above applications,
auxiliary structures may be mounted
adjacent to a distribution structure
and used as a structure for lighting
panel or other device that may be
cable-connected to a branch circuit
device in the distribution structure.
Dimensions are compatible with the
arrangements required.
Switchboards Used as
Service Equipment
Service equipment is the electrical
equipment that constitutes the main
control and means of power cutoff
the electric service (normally Power
Company supply) brought into the
building.
Where switchboards are to be used as
service equipment, certain NEC and
UL requirements apply that necessitate
modifications not normally supplied in
switchboards.
To further comply with NEC and UL

requirements, a separate bonding strap
is connected from the neutral bus to the
switchboard frame. This bonding
connection is located on the line side of
the removable neutral link, maintaining
a service ground to the switchboard
frame when the test link is removed.
See Figure 21.0-1.
1
Switchboard equipped with main

disconnect devices are not subject
to the above six disconnect
limitation, as the entire board can
be de-energized with the main
disconnect device.
Ground fault protection of
equipment must be provided for
solidly grounded wye electrical
services of more than 150V to
ground, but not exceeding 600V
phase-to-phase for each service
disconnecting means rated 1000A
or more.
B. For testing purposes, means are
also required to disconnect the
switchboard neutral bus from the
grounded service neutral conductor
(single-phase, three-wire; and threephase, four-wire systems). To
comply with this requirement,
a removable link (solid bar) is
provided in the switchboard
neutral bus. This link is generally
located near the point where the
main feeders enter the switchboard or in the area of the main
disconnect device where one
is provided.
ii
1
2
N
To Station
Ground
The following is a summary of the

requirements that are pertinent to the
application of a switchboard for
service equipment:
A. A switchboard with main lugs
only (no main disconnect)
must be designed so that all
circuits in the switchboard can
be disconnected from the supply
source by the operation of no
more than six operating handles
(breaker or switch).
Neutral
Link
4
5
Bonding
Strap
Equipment
Ground Bus
N
1
2
3
Switchboard Frame
Figure 21.0-1. Neutral Link

UL labeling will clearly indicate service
equipment listed switchboards.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 004
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Requirements and Labeling
Alternate Power
Source Capabilities
The basic requirement for obtaining a

UL label on a switchboard, is that all
the component devices (breakers,
switches, and so on) in the switchboard
assembly are UL listed. In addition,
the switchboard must comply with
all applicable provisions of UL 891.
Multiple solutions are available to

accommodate alternate power sources
available. Due to the large number of
customer and system requirements,
details are not provided in this guide.
Eaton offers solutions that include
main-main configuration and maintie-main configurations. Automatic
transfer equipment, including
UL 1008 listed transfer switches
and other automatic transfer
schemes, are available.
Todays modern electrical systems

require that switchboards offer a wide
selection of electrical devices, many
of which do not fall within the scope
of UL listed devices. Therefore, the
conditions under which a switchboard
may be labeled are limited.
Listed below are several important

guidelines for consideration when a
UL label is specified:
1. UL nameplates, where applicable,

are supplied for each vertical
structure rather than one common
nameplate for the complete
switchboard lineup. Where all
of the component devices in the
switchboard are UL listed and all
applicable provisions of UL 891
are met, each of the switchboard
sections may be labeled.
7
8
9
12
2. Individual vertical structures of

a switchboard may be labeled
where they comply with UL
requirements, although other
vertical structures in the same
switchboard lineup may not
meet the UL standards, and will
not be labeled.
13
3. All Pow-R-Line C switchboards

are UL labeled when all mounted
devices are UL listed.
10
11

Automatic Transfer Equipment

For continuity of service, automatic
transfer equipment between two
incoming sources may be required.
This equipment transfers the load
upon failure of the normal (or preferred)
source to the standby (or alternate)
source. Upon restoration of the normal
source, the load is automatically
transferred back to it. To accomplish
this, electrically operated main
protective devices (and bus tie devices,
if required) must be employed.
Additional relays also are required
to detect source voltage failure
and to transfer control power, when
required. A manual selector switch
is usually provided to select the
mode of operationautomatic or
manual transfer.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
21.0-5
October 2013
Sheet 21 005
General DescriptionOPTIM Trip Units
Digitrip OPTIM
Description
ii
Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable

communicating microprocessorbased low voltage electronic trip unit
system for Eaton molded-case circuit
breakers. Digitrip OPTIM trip units
are available in two models: Digitrip
OPTIM 550 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050.
1
2
Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully

programmable and can be applied as
a stand-alone breaker with a hand-held
Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for
configuring the trip unit, displaying
information and testing. In addition,
OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage
assembly with a panel mounted Breaker
Interface Module (BIMII) to configure,
display and test. Alternatively,
OPTIM can be applied as part of a
fully integrated PowerNet system.
(See Section 2.)
Features
Fully programmable. rms sensing
trip unit
Available in K, L, N, R breakers
Available in 80% and 100% rated
breakers
Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA
configurations
Note: LSIA has ground fault alarm only.
Available in two models OPTIM 550

and OPTIM 1050
Ten function time-current curve
shaping options, including a new I 4t
Long Delay Time or slope
Short delay and ground delay Zone
Selective Interlocking (ZSI)
Additional programmable
protection features including
thermal memory and discriminator
functions
Advanced warning systems including
high load alarm, ground fault alarm
Full system diagnostics capability
System monitoring features
including:
Load current
Power and energy
Power factor
Line-to-line voltage
3
4
5
6
Digitrip OPTIMizer
Hand-Held Programmer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held
programmer accesses, displays and
configures information from OPTIM
trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into
the front of the trip unit and is
powered by a 9V battery, or an
auxiliary power module.
An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:

Select breaker address
(50/60 Hz)
Set system baud rate
Set system password
Select alarm levels
Breaker information
Metered values
Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
PowerNet communications saves

individual wiring of breakers
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 006
General DescriptionMetering Devices
Power Xpert Meters 2000
ii
1
2
Power Xpert Meters 2000
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
This meter provides all the core

functions for monitoring power
consumption and power quality,
Ethernet connectivity and onboard
gateway card limits. This unit uses
D/A technology to sample circuits at
400 samples per cycle for extremely
accurate measurement of power factor
and energy consumption. In addition,
the meter has 256 MB for logging
meter data.
The Power Xpert 2260 Meter

This meter adds the ability to monitor
total harmonic distortion and the
ability to set onboard meter limits. The
meter also will illuminate LEDs on the
faceplate, indicating that a limit has
been exceeded and provides 512 MB
for data logging.
13
This meter adds the ability to monitor

individual harmonics and visualize
waveforms on your desktop using the
embedded Web server and raises the
storage to 768 MB for data logging.
15

8000 series is an Internet-enabled
(including a built-in Web server),
power quality and energy meter
with comprehensive power
and energy measurement, and
integrated quality analysis. These
meters allow you to use a standard
Web browser to surf the meter
and visualize a waveform and
analyze trends
Accurate detection of fast transients
Early warning of impending
problems
At-a-glance view of power quality
Reduces power monitoring cost
Supports continuous, nondisruptive monitoring
Accessible via the Ethernet
Uses industry-standard
communication protocols
IQ 130/140/150
Providing the first line of defense
against costly power problems,
Eatons IQ 100 electronic power meters
can perform the work of an entire wall
of legacy metering equipment using
todays technology.
24-bit AD converters that sample at

more than 400 samples per cycle
Meet ANSI C12.20 standards for
accuracy of 0.5 percent
Confidently used for primary
revenue metering and submetering
applications
Direct-reading metered values such
as watts, watt demand, watthours,
voltage amperes (VA), VA-hours,
VARs, VARhours and power factor
Also available in Eaton's enclosed
meter product
Meter series benefits include:
16
17
18
12
14
IQ 130/140/150
19
Fully understand your facilitys

power quality
Detailed event information; pinpoint
the root causes of problemsor
prevent them from occurring
Measure, trend and analyze power
via information through onboard
Web and comma separated values
(CSV) exporting capabilities
Up to 768 MB of storage; typically
15 years of storage capability
depending on the meter model
and frequency of events
20
21
CA08104001E
21.0-7
October 2013
Sheet 21 007
General DescriptionMetering Devices
i
ii
1
IQ 250/260
IQ 250/260
The IQ 250 and IQ 260 electronic
meters provide capabilities you
wouldnt normally expect in an
affordable, ultra-compact meter
such as fast sampling rate and
accurate metering for a full range of
power attributes. Built-in slots allow
for future upgrades.
Comprehensive metering
High-end accuracy
Self-test capability to validate
accuracy
Large, easy-to-read display
Industry-standard communication
protocols
Mix-and-match input/output options
Integration with Eatons Power
Xpert Architecture
Field-upgradeable

(BIMII)
The Breaker Interface Module II is a

panel-mounted device that performs

from any combination of Digitrip
RMS 810, 910 and 1150 Digitrip
OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip units,
F/J/K Frame Energy Sentinels,
and Universal Energy Sentinels,
supporting as many as 50 of
these devices up to 10,000 feet
(2540m) away
Communicates the information
from these protective and energy
monitoring devices over your
network
Note: For full technical information,

see Tab 2.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Note: For full technical information,

see Tab 3.
12
For information on other available

power meters, visit www.eaton.com/
meters.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 008
General DescriptionSurge Protective Devices (SPD)
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Power Xpert Gateway
Power Xpert Gateway

Eatons Power Xpert Gateway
(PXG) bridges the IT and facilities
management worlds by bringing
disparate panelboards, switchboards
and other power equipment onto
the network. The PXG takes the
complexity out of connecting power
equipment to the network. The Webenabled PXG is an out-of-the-box
device that can support up to 96
devices, translate most industrial
communication protocols, and offer
user-selectable events and real-time
trending. It also features e-mail
notification of events, waveform
capture and data/event loggingall
with no special software. Adding basic
meters or the utilitys meter, the PXG
assists in tracking energy usage. The
PXG recognizes the interdependence
of IT systems and power systems,
and delivers what organizations need
to bring these worlds together for
seamless, end-to-end system reliability.
The PXG consolidates data available
breakers, meters, motor controllers
and protective relays, and presents
the information in a variety of ways
(a Web browser being the most widely
used method). The PXG is a standalone solution. As needs change and
grow, the PXG can be integrated
through Power Xpert Software into a
broader solution that encompasses
other intelligent hardware and can
integrate with third-party network
management systems (NMS) or
building management systems (BMS)
for system-wide monitoring and
reporting of power and IT.
Integrated Surge Protective Devices
Integrated Surge
Protective Devices
Eaton integrates our industry-leading
surge protective devices (SPD) in to
switchboards. Lead length is kept
to a minimum to maximize SPD
performance. SPD units are available
with ratings up through 400k, and
are UL listed and labeled to UL 1449
3rd Edition.
All switchboards with integrated
SPD units are connected to a lineside
overcurrent protective device for
disconnecting means. When applied
on the lineside of a service entrance
main, the disconnecting means does
not count as a service disconnect
per National Electrical Code
Article 230.71[A].
For complete SPD product description,
application and ratings, refer to Tab 34.
For detailed information, please refer

to Tab 2.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.0-9
Sheet 21 009
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C, Front- or Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and UL 891.
ii
Front accessiblemain sections
front- and/or side-access
Front- and rear-access; main
sections front- and/or side-access
Feeder devices group-mounted
Sections rear-aligned or front- and
rear-aligned
2
3
Main Devices,
Molded-case circuit breakers,

4002500A, fixed-mounted
Insulated-case circuit breakers,
Magnum SB, 8005000A, fixed
and drawout
Air power circuit breakers,
Magnum DS, 8005000A,
fixed or drawout
Air power circuit breakers with
current limiting fuses, Magnum
DSL, 8005000A
Bolted pressure switches,
8005000A, fixed
4
5
6
Pow-R-Line C Switchboard
7
8
9
10
Feeder Devices, Group-Mounted

Bolt-on molded-case circuit
breakers, 151200A
Drawout molded-case circuit
breakers, 701200A
11
12
Feeder Devices,
13
Molded-case circuit breakers,

8002500A, fixed
Insulated-case circuit breakers,
Magnum SB, 8005000A, fixed
and drawout
DS and Magnum DS, 8004000A,
fixed and drawout
8001600A, fixed
14
15
16
17
Selective Coordination
18
Selectively coordinated systems

dictated by code and customer
mandates may be achieved with
Eaton switchboards to either 0.1 or
0.01 seconds as mandated by codes
and/or customers. Refer to Tab 1,
Section 1.4 for additional details.
19
For a complete product
specification in CSI format,
see Eatons Product
Specification Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429
Note: For selection and layout guidelines,

please reference Page 21.1-1.
CA08104001E
20
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 010
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
Features
ii
3
4
Eatons circuit breaker ratings up to

200 kAIC
Trip units that integrate Eatons
System reduces potential arc
flash available
Integral ground fault protection
available in electronic trip units
from 155000A
Electronic trip units that integrate
zone selective interlocking
capabilities available in moldedcase, insulated-case and air power
circuit breaker
Available with circuit breakers and
fusible switches on the same chassis

Type 1 Pow-R-Line C Features
Customer metering.
Utility metering compartment.
Surge protective device.
Main breaker (Magnum SB).
Cable pull and termination space.
7
8
Table 21.0-1. Pow-R-Line C Group-Mounted Switchboards

Voltage: 240480600 Vac, 250 Vdc
Mains: 4006000A
9
10
11
12
The Single Chassis Design

Provides Device Flexibility
13
14
15
16
250A frame single mount.

600A frame single mount.
250A frame dual mount.
600A frame dual mount.
UL listed and labeled. Meets NEC

and NEMA standards
Eaton microprocessor-based
metering devices are standard when
metering is specified. Conventional
metering is available. IQ and Power
Xpert devices can provide a
communications capability.
See Tab 3
Optional integral surge protective
device (SPD) is available in
Pow-R-Line C switchboards,
when specified. See Tab 34
Aluminum, copper or silver-plated
copper bus
A full range of device modifications
is available
Available in NEMA Type 1 and 3R
enclosures, UL listed
17
18
Modifications
Main Device
Type
Amperes
Short-Circuit
Symmetrical Rating (kA)
Molded-case circuit breakers

Insulated-case circuit breakers, Magnum SB
Air power circuit breakers, Magnum DS
Air power circuit breakers with CL fuses, DSL
4002500
8005000
8005000
200
Bolted pressure switches

Fusible switches
Main lugs only
8005000
4001200
4006000
200
200
Rating determined by
overcurrent protective
device
Feeder Device
Type
Amperes
Short-Circuit
Rating (kA)
14200
30100
Bolt-on, fixed-mounted molded-case circuit breakers 152500

Drawout, molded-case circuit breakers
70600
Fusible switches
301200
Stackedmain with branch devices
4002500
10200
10200
200
18200
8002000
8002000
30100
30100
Magnum SB up to two high

Magnum DS up to two high

5000A bolted pressure switches are not UL listed.

Third-party witness tested at 30 cycles.
Ground fault protection on mains

and distribution devices
Coordination with other Eaton
divisions for busway and
transformer connections
19
20
21
CA08104001E
21.0-11
October 2013
Sheet 21 011
General DescriptionPow-R-Line, Drawout Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Switchboard
Pow-R-Line Drawout Molded-Case

Utility and customer-owned metering

is available. Customer metering
includes Web-enabled communicating
systems.
Aluminum bus is standard with copper
and silver-plated copper optional.
Other common options include surge
protective devices (SPDs), seismically
qualified designs, density rated bus
and many more.
Drawout feeder MCCBs are available
in two-pole and three-pole offerings
from 20A to 600A in the high-density,
group-mounted design.
Drawout feeders above 600A through
1200A integrate the molded-case NX
drawout breaker. Drawout breakers
above 1200A through 2000A use the
Magnum SB insulated-case circuit
breaker. All are front accessible and
front connected.
Power-R-Line Drawout Switchboard
General Description

breaker switchboard
Front accessible
Front connected
Through-the-door design drawout
mechanism through 600A
Insulated-case UL 489 breakers
up to 1200A
Visual indication of breaker status
and position
Large grab handles for
easy removal
600 Vac maximum
600A maximum, group-mounted,
drawout molded-case feeder
breakers
Individually mounted insulated
UL 489 breakers through 1200A
Certifications
UL 891 listed
Instructions
Drawout feeders in UL 891

distribution switchboards
Rated as Service Entrance
Equipment when appropriately
equipped
Ideal for:
Data centers
Process equipment
manufacturing
Anywhere that requires quick
change of feeder devices
is needed
On an interim basis until Bid Manager

is updated, please use the Pow-R-Line C
switchboard Bid Manager take-off as
the basis for the following:
Eatons Pow-R-Line drawout

switchboard design is listed and
labeled to the UL 891 standard.
Switchboards may be rated up to
4000A. Main breakers are available up
to 4000A in both fixed-mounted and
drawout configurations. Main breakers
may be Magnum DS power circuit
breakers or Magnum SB insulatedcase circuit breakers in either drawout
or fixed-mounted configurations. Both
are front-accessible configurations.
Fixed-mounted molded-case circuit
breaker mains are available up
through 2500A.
Utility compartments
Service entrance or non-service
entrance information
Voltage
Bus rating
Bus material
Nameplate
Ground bus material
Short-circuit current rating
Top or bottom entrance
Incoming cable location
Customer metering
Surge protective device
Bus bracing
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 012
General DescriptionPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
i
ii
Pow-R-Line i Switchboards
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and
UL 891.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Front and rear accessible
main and distribution sections
Feeder devices individually
compartmentalized
Sections front and rear aligned
Designed for mounting with code
clearance to a wall
Main Devices,
9
10
Feeder Devices
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Molded case circuit breakers,

4002500A, fixed or drawout
Insulated case circuit breakers,
Magnum SB, 8004000A
Air power circuit breakers, Magnum
DS, 8004000A, fixed or drawout
Air power circuit breakers with
current limiting fuses, Magnum
DSL, 8004000A
8004000A, fixed
Molded case circuit breakers,

151200A are compartmentalized
Molded case circuit breakers above
1200A are not compartmentalized
Insulated case circuit breakers,
Magnum SB, 8004000A
Magnum DS, 8002000A
8002500A
Trip units that integrate Eatons
System to reduce potential arc flash
Integral ground fault protection
available in electronic trip units
from 155000A
Electronic trip units that integrate
zone selective interlocking
capabilities available in moldedcase, insulated-case and air power
circuit breaker
Pow-R-Line i Switchboard
Note: For selection and layout guidelines,

please reference Page 21.3-1.
20
For a complete product

specification in CSI format,
see Eatons Product
Specification Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16428
21
CA08104001E
21.0-13
October 2013
Sheet 21 013
Pow-R-Line i Construction Features
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5

8
9
10
Distribution SectionFront View
Distribution SectionRear View
Glass polyester circuit breaker compartment.
Available zero sequence ground fault.
Insulated copper load side runbacks.
Angled neutral connections.
Full length barrier isolating the cable compartment.
A, B, C phase connections.
Horizontal cross bus.
Anti-turn lugs.
Tandem mounted circuit breakers through 400A.
Movable cable support.
Isolating bus compartment.
Generous conduit space.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 014
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Pow-R-Line i Switchboards...
Greater Flexibility and
Increased Safety Features
Eatons Pow-R-Line i Switchboards
are engineered in a new
compartmentalized design for
applications where a greater degree
of safety is required. A wide variety
of configurations is possible, including
utility metering, customer metering,
main devices, branch devices,
accessories and enclosures.
Significant safety features include:
Individual compartments for branch
devicesglass polyester for circuit
breakers and steel for fusible
switches. These compartments
help eliminate possible contact
with the main bus and reduce fault
propagation
Three-section construction with each
section barriered from the other
Device section. Each device is
mounted in its own compartment
Bus bar section. Contains both
horizontal and vertical buses
Rear cable compartment.
Completely isolated from the
bus bars
A Wide Selection of Main

and Branch Devices
15
Main devices are available from

4004000A and can include molded
case circuit breakers, Magnum SB
and DS breakers, and fusible switches
or bolted pressure switches. Main
buses are rated up to 4000A.
17
Branch circuit breakers range from

1501200A frames. Branch fusible
switches are available from
1001200A frames.
Short-circuit ratings up to 200,000A
are UL listed.
Pow-R-Line i switchboards are UL listed
and meet all applicable requirements
of NEMA and NEC. They are rearaccessible and front- and rear-aligned.
Insulated copper runback. Power

is taken from the protective device
by the insulated copper runback
through a standard full height
glass polyester barrier to the rear
cable compartment. This design
virtually eliminates the possibility
of accidental contact with the
main buses during installation
or maintenance
14
16
Ground fault test panels can be mounted in

compartments with the circuit breakers for
convenience and space savings.
Pow-R-Line i switchboards can help to

provide for future distribution system
requirements by including empty
compartments for branch circuit breakers
and fusible switches. (Circuit breaker
provisions shown.)
Space-Saving Ground Fault

Test Panels
Pow-R-Line i switchboards can
accommodate either integral or
zero sequence types of ground
fault protection. Depending on the
specific application, a test panel can
be mounted in the circuit breaker
compartment, which may eliminate
the need for an auxiliary structure.
Provisions for the Future

Future expansion provisions include
line side connectors, load side
runbacks, terminals, and glass
polyester compartments and covers
(for circuit breakers).
Customer Metering
The Magnum DS breaker includes the

Digitrip RMS trip unit that provides
circuit protection, information and testing
functions, and true rms sensing.
Eaton microprocessor-based
metering devices are standard
when customer metering is specified.
Conventional metering is available.
IQ and Power Xpert devices can
provide communications capabilities.
See Tab 3.
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Technical Data
October 2013
21.0-15
Sheet 21 015
Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Technical Data

Table 21.0-2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit
Breaker
Type
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
EHD
EHD
HFDDC
FDB
FDB
FD, FDE
FD, FDE
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
HFD, HFDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
FDC, FDCE
JD
HJD
JDC
HJDDC
JGS
JGH
JGC
DK
KD
CKD
HKD
CHKD
KDC
HKDDC
LHH
NHH
LGE
LGH
LGC
LGU
LD
CLD
HLD
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
HLDDC
MDL
CMDL
HMDL
CHMDL
HMDLDC
ND
CND
HND
CNDC
NDC
CHND
NBDC
RD 1600
CRD 1600
RD 2000
RD 2500
CRD 2000
RDC 1600
CRDC 1600
RDC 2000
RDC 2500
CRDC 2000
PBDC

Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No. of
Poles
100225
100225
100225
100225
100225
15100
15100
15150
15225
15225
15225
15225
15225
15225
15225
15225
15225
15225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
1
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
4
1
2, 3
4
1
2, 3
4
2, 3
4
70250
70250
70250
70250
70250
70250
70250
250400
70400
70400
70400
70400
70400
100400
125400
150350
300600
300600
250600
250600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
400800
400800
400800
400800
300800
600120
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
7001200
8001600
8001600
10002000
10002500
10002000
8001600
8001600
10002000
10002500
10002000
16002000
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2, 3
Voltage
AC
240
240
240
240
240
277
480
600
600
277
600
600
277
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
240
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
DC
125
125
125
125
125
125
250
600
250
250
125
250
250
125
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
250
250
600
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
600
250
600
600
600
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. I.T. is

interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of
three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
For use on DC systems only.
CA08104001E
Trip
Type
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

AC Ratings Volts
DC Ratings Volts
120
120/240 240
277
480
600
125
250
125/250 600
14,000
35,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
150,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
14,000
14,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
18,000
25,000
35,000
25,000
35,000
50,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
35,000
35,000
25,000
35,000
50,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
42,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
42,000
42,000
42,000
42,000
10,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
22,000
22,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
42,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
50,000
22,000
22,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
42,000
22,000
22,000
25,000
25,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
125,000
125,000
125,000
200,000
125,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
For use with drawout feeder device only.

Electronic trip unit adjustable from
20250A.
100% rated.

35,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
65,000
Not available in Pow-R-Line i switchboards.

Available in bolt-on fixed mount or drawout
feeder device.
Individually, vertically mounted.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Technical Data
October 2013
Sheet 21 016
Table 21.0-3. Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Frame
Amperes
208/240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
SBS-608
SBS-C08
SBS-612
800
800
1200
200800
200800
2001200
65
100
65
65
100
65
65
85
65
SBS-C12
SBS-616
SBS-C16
1200
1600
1600
2001200
2001600
2001600
100
65
100
100
65
100
85
65
85
SBS-620
SBS-C20
SBS-625
2000
2000
2500
2002000
2002000
2002500
65
100
65
65
100
65
65
85
65
SBS-C25
SBS-630
SBS-C30
2500
3000
3000
2002500
2003000
2003000
100
65
100
100
65
100
85
65
85
SBS-840
SBS-C40
SBS-850
SBS-C50
4000
4000
5000
5000
20004000
20004000
25005000
25005000
65
100
65
100
65
100
65
100
65
85
65
85
ii
3
4
5
6
7
Trip Unit Current

Sensor and Rating
Plug Ranges
Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (000)

Interrupting Ratings
Fixed internal instantaneous trip set at approximately 18 x In symmetrical.
Table 21.0-4. Magnum DS Power Breaker Interrupting Ratings

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Frame
Amperes
Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (000)

Short-Time Rating
208/240V
480V
600V
208/240V
480V
600V
MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
800
800
800
42
65
85
42
65
85
42
65
85
42
65
85
42
65
85
42
65
85
MDS-C08
MDS-616
MDS-816
800
1600
1600
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
10
MDS-C16
MDS-620
MDS-820
1600
2000
2000
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
11
MDS-C20
MDS-632
MDS-832
2000
3000
3000
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
12
MDS-C32
MDS-840
MDS-C40
3000
4000
4000
100
130
130
100
85
100
100
85
100
85
85
100
85
85
100
85
85
100
MDS-850
MDS-C50
4000
5000
130
130
85
100
85
100
85
100
85
100
85
100
13
14
15
16
Table 21.0-5. Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit BreakersNon-Fused Type

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No. of Voltage
Poles AC DC
FCL
LCL
15100
125400
2, 3
2, 3

17
Also ratings without instantaneous trip.
480
600
Trip
Type
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b


DC
AC Ratings Volts
120
120/240 240
277
200,000
200,000
480
600
125
150,000
200,000 100,000
250
125/250
250
125/250
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.

Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
Not defined in W-C-375b.
Table 21.0-6. TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit BreakersFused Type
18
19
20
Circuit
Breaker
Type
No. of Voltage
Poles AC DC
Trip
Type
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b

DC
AC Ratings Volts
120
120/240 240
277
480
600
125
FB
LA
15100
70400
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
I.T.
16a, 16b, 17a, 26a

16a, 16b, 17a, 26a
200,000
200,000
200,000 200,000
200,000 200,000
100,000
100,000
NB
PB
300800
6001600
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
16b, 17a, 26a

17a, 26a
200,000
200,000
200,000 200,000
200,000 200,000
100,000
100,000
21
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40C

CA08104001E
Technical Data
October 2013
21.0-17
Sheet 21 017

Table 21.0-7. Electrical Characteristics of Fusible Switches
Device
Type
System
Voltage
Fusible
switch
240
or
600
Bolted
240
pressure or
switch
480
Ampere
Rating
30600
3001200
30600
800, 1200
Interrupting Capacities kA
Symmetrical Amperes
200 kAIC with Class R Fuses
200 kAIC with Class T Fuses
200 kAIC with Class R and J Fuses
200 kAIC with Class L Fuses
800, 1200, 1600 200 kAIC with Class L Fuses

2000, 2500, 3000, 200 kAIC with Class L Fuses
200 kAIC with Class L Fuses
4000, 5000
5000A bolted pressure contact switch is not UL listed.
Table 21.0-8. Standard Switchboard Terminals Standard Main Breaker,

Branch Breaker, Main Switch or Branch Switch Terminals
Type
Breaker
Ampere
Rating
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC
100225
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE,

HFDE, FDCE
15100
125225
FCL
15100
JD, HJD, JDC, JGS, JGH, JGC
70250
30, 60, 100

200
#141/0
#4300 kcmil
600
#14#1/0
# 4#4/0 or #6300 kcmil
(2) #4600 kcmil or

(4) 3/0250 kcmil
800
(3) 250750 kcmil or

(6) 3/0250 kcmil
1200
(4) 250750 kcmil or

(8) 3/0250 kcmil
#14#1/0
# 4350 kcmil
100225
250350
400
(1) #3350 kcmil

(1) 250500 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 3/0500 kcmil
300500
600
(2) 250350 kcmil

(2) 400500 kcmil
150350
(1) #2600 kcmil
400600
700800
(2) #1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(2) 500750 kcmil
6001000 (3) 3/0400 kcmil

1200
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
LCL
125225
250400
FB-P
15100
LA-P
70225
250400
(1) #6350 kcmil

(1) #4250 kcmil and
(1) 3/0600 kcmil
NB-P
350700
800
(2) #1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
Wire Size Ranges
250750 kcmil or
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
KD, HKD, KDC, CKD , CHKD
ND, HND, NDC, CND , CHND ,

CNDC
Ampere Rating
400
(1) 25500 kcmil

(2) 3/0250 kcmil or
(1) 3/0500 kcmil
MDL, CMDL , HMDL, CHMDL
Table 21.0-9. Fusible Switches
# 4#4/0 or
# 6300 kcmil
250350
400
LGE, LGH, LD, HLD, LDC,

CHLD , CLDC ,
LHH, LGC, LGU
NHH
Wire and cable terminals supplied on switchboard mounted

devices for making up incoming or outgoing cable
connections are of the mechanical screw clamp pressure
type. All standard terminals are suitable for use with either
aluminum or copper cable except as noted in the table.
Panel mounted devices use the standard terminal provided
with that device.
Wire Size
Ranges
DK
CLD ,
Cable Ranges for Standard Secondary

Device Terminals
(1) #6350 kcmil

(1) #4250 kcmil and
(1) 3/0600 kcmil
#141/0
100% rated breaker.
Note: All terminal sizes are based on wire ampacities corresponding

to those shown in NEC Table 310.16 under the 75C insulation
columns (75C wire). The use of smaller size (in circular mills),
regardless of insulation temperature rating is not permitted
without voiding UL labels on devices and equipment.
Note: For other terminals available on some ratings of molded
case circuit breakers and fusible switches, refer to Tab 27.
Table 21.0-10. Standard Mechanical Incoming Terminal Ranges

for Main Lugs Only and Main Devices Including Circuit Breakers
and Fusible Devices
Ampere Rating
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cable Range
400
600
800
(2) #2500 kcmil

(2) #2500 kcmil
(3) #2500 kcmil
1000
1200
1600
(4) #2500 kcmil

(4) #2500 kcmil
(5) #2500 kcmil
10
2000
2500
3000
(6) #2500 kcmil

(7) #2500 kcmil
(10) #2500 kcmil
11
Table 21.0-11. Range Taking Compression Main Terminals

Main
Ampere
Number of Conductors and Wire Range Per Phase

Aluminum Conductors
Copper Conductors
1200
1600
2000
2500
(4) 500750 kcmil

(5) 500750 kcmil
(6) 500750 kcmil
(7) 500750 kcmil
(3) 500750 kcmil

(4) 500750 kcmil
(4) 500750 kcmil
(6) 500750 kcmil
3000
4000
5000
(8) 500750 kcmil

(11) 500750 kcmil
(13) 500750 kcmil
(7) 500750 kcmil

(9) 500750 kcmil
(11) 500750 kcmil
Compression terminations will take a range of conductors and include

500, 600, 700 and 750 kcmil.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 018
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Pow-R-Line C
October 2013
21.1-1
Sheet 21 019
Layout and Dimensions
Layout Guide for Pow-R-Line C,

Front-Access, GroupMounted Feeders
Table 21.1-1. Front-Access Group-Mounted Feeders Pow-R-Line C

Steps
Description
Page
Step 1 Layout incoming main section (with or without main device) as follows:
Special Utility Metering Compartment
West Coast Utility Metering Compartment
Standard NEMA Utility Metering Compartment
Customer Only Metering Compartment
No Metering Compartment
Step 2
Layout Feeder Devices

in Distribution Sections
Pow-R-Line C
Group-Mounted Type Bolt-on Fixed or Drawout

Individually Mounted Type
Outdoor Enclosures
Step 3
Technical data, e.g., interrupting ratings, terminal size.
Step 4
Specification Data
21.1-2
21.1-6
21.1-8
21.1-9
21.1-9
ii
21.1-11
21.1-15
21.4-1
21.0-15
For a complete product specification in CSI format, see Eatons

Product Specification Guide, Section 16429.
Because utility compartment dimensions are the minimum required by utility, check no metering
main device widths and use the larger width of either the main device or utility metering
compartment.
Feeders are individually mounted, not compartmentalized.
Table 21.1-2. Rear-Access Group-Mounted Feeders Pow-R-Line C

Steps
PRLC SwitchboardFront-Access
Drawings
Drawings and data on the following
pages reflect dimensions for worst
case switchboard designs. Smaller
switchboard dimensions may be
available. Both preliminary and asbuilt approval drawings are available
from Eaton. These drawings reflect
the actual switchboard configured,
and include height, width and
depth dimensions.
Description
Page
Step 2

Pow-R-Line C
Group-Mounted Type
Outdoor Enclosures
Step 3
Step 4
Specification Data
In addition, a building information

model (BIM) 3D compatible drawing
is available for all configured to
order switchboards.
Table 21.1-3. Rear-Access Compartmentalized Feeders Pow-R-Line i
Eaton offers 3D BIM compatible

models to support a variety of
MEP software, including Autodesk
AutoCAD MEP, Revit MEP and
NavisWorks, Bentley Building
Electrical Systems, Graphisoft
ArchiCAD MEP Modeler, Nemetschek
N.A. VectorWorks, and others.
Steps
Description
Step 2

Pow-R-Line C
Compartmentalized Type
Outdoor Enclosures
Step 3
Step 4
Specification Data
21.0-15
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Page
21.2-10
21.1-15
21.4-1
compartment.
A BIM is a three-dimensional digital

representation of a facilitys physical
and functional characteristics. It serves
as a shared knowledge resource for
information about a facility and forms
a reliable basis for decisions
throughout its life-cycle.
21.2-3
21.2-5
21.2-7
21.2-8
21.2-8

Building Information Model
21.2-3
21.2-5
21.2-7
21.2-8
21.2-8
13
14
21.3-1
21.1-15
21.4-1
15
21.0-15
16

compartment.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Switchboard Layout Data
October 2013
Sheet 21 020
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices

Bottom Feed
Top Feed
Bottom or Top Feed
Bottom or Top Feed
ii
Pull Box
1
2
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Blank
Pull
Section
Layout 1
D
W1
Layout 2
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Layout 3
3.00
(76.2)
W or W1
Floor Plan
Layouts 1, 3 and 4
Pull Section Only
D
W1
Clear
Area
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Main
Utility
Pull
Section Compartment
Hot Sequence
Blank
Main
2500
Pull
Section Amp
Max.
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
2.50
(63.5)
Pull Box
Layout 4 (Cold Sequence)
Figure 21.1-1. Incoming Utility CompartmentDimensions in Inches (mm)
6
7
Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.1-9, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.1-5.
The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining
half of utility compartment structure.
Clear area assumes no floor channels used under bottom frame.
Table 21.1-4. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-1 LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Front-Access
8
Atlantic City Electric
9
10
12002500
30004000
12
NSTAR (Boston Edison, Cambridge

Electric, Commonwealth Electric)
13
8001600
20002500
30004000
14
15
16
18
19
21
TopMounted
Pull Box
Pull
Section
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Width (W1)
Bottom
Top
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/ N/A
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)/ N/A
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Cold
36 (914.4)
N/A
36 (914.4)
N/A
45 (1143.0) N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4) N/A
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Hot /Cold
Central Vermont Public Service
Hot
Cinergy/CG&E
(Cincinnati Gas and Electric)
Hot
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
800
1000
12002000
25004000

30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Hot
4001000
12002000
25004000
20
Layout 4
CH Energy Group
(Central Hudson Gas and Electric)
Exelon/ComEd
(Commonwealth Edison)
17
Layout 3
Hot
800
11
Layout 2
Hot
800
1200
16002000
25004000
BGE (Baltimore Gas and Electric)
Layout 1
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) N/A

36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A
For BG&E, the utility compartment is mounted in the bottom for Layout 1 and top for Layout 2. For bottom feed (Layout 1); up to 2500A, the main is
mounted in top. For 3000 and 4000A bottom feed, the main is in a separate structure. For top feed (Layout 2), maximum amperes is 4000A and the
main is mounted in the bottom.
For special applications approved by the utility.
Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Figure 21.1-4.
Only required for 750 kcmil incoming cables.
Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater.
For main device dimensions, see Figure 21.1-5. N/A = Not Applicable.

CA08104001E
October 2013
21.1-3
Sheet 21 021
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders

Table 21.1-4. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-1 LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Connecticut Light and Power

(Northeast Utilities)
8001200
16002000
25004000
Hot /Cold
ConEdison
(Consolidated Edison)
800 (Spec. 298)
Hot
Front-Access
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Layout 4
Top-Mounted Pull
Pull Box
Section
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Width (W1)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
12 (304.8)
Fig. 3
12 (304.8)
Fig. 3
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)

36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
45 (1143.0)
Bottom
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) N/A
12001600 (Spec. 298)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) N/A
12002000 (Spec. 377)

25004000 (Spec. 377)
DTE Energy (Detroit Edison)
800
12002000
25004000
Florida Power and Light
Georgia Power Co.
IPL (Indianapolis Power Co.)
800
12002000
25004000
Jersey Central Power (First Energy)
800
12002000
25004000
Kansas City Power and Light
LIPA (Long Island Power Authority)
800
12002000
25004000
LG&E Energy
(Louisville Gas and Electric)
800
12002000
25003000
Madison Gas and Electric
8001200
16002000
25004000
Massachusetts Electric
(National Grid)
800
12002000
25004000
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
Metropolitan Edison (First Energy)

Monongahela Power
Naperville
Narragansett (National Grid)
800
12002000
25004000

36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Top
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Top
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Top
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
Bottom
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
N/A
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
24 (609.6) N/A
36 (914.4) N/A
36 (914.4) N/A
Top
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Top
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
Top
Hot /Cold
Hot
Hot
38 (965.2) 24 (609.6)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
Hot
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
Cold
Hot
Hot
Hot
Hot
Hot
26 (660.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
Bottom
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Hot
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Bottom
Top

N/A
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) N/A
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)

26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)

Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.1-8.
For main device dimensions, see Page 21.1-9. N/A = Not Applicable.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
26 (48D)
30 (48D)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) N/A
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
Top
38 (965.2)
Hot
Hot
Hot/Cold
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
ii

October 2013
Sheet 21 022
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front -Access
Bottom Feed
Top Feed
Bottom or Top Feed
Pull Box
ii
Bottom or Top Feed
Pull Box
Main
Pull 2500A
Section Max.
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
1
2
8
9
Layout 1
Layout 2
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
16
17
New York State

Electric and Gas
Floor Plan
Layouts 1, 3 and 4
Pull Section Only
Layout 4
(Cold Sequence)
Front-Access
Layout 1
Hot
PPL (Pennsylvania Power

and Light)
Hot

Depth (D)
Height (H)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Bottom
Top
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Bottom
Top
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Bottom
Top
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Hot
Orange and Rockland
Depth (D)
Hot /Cold
12002000
25004000
19
Depth (D)
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
480Y/277 V
208Y/120 V
Top-Mounted Pull
Pull Box
Section
Hot /Cold
8001200
16002000
25003000
4000
8004000
8004000
Layout 4
36 (914.4) N/A
36 (914.4) N/A
36 (914.4)/ N/A
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)/ 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
Omaha Public Power
Layout 3
Cold
8001200
16002000
25004000
XCEL
(Northern States Power)
Layout 2
Cold
36 (914.4) N/A
36 (914.4) N/A
45 (1143.0) N/A
Northeast Utilities
21
Metering
Sequence
8001200
16002000
25004000
18
20
W1
Layout 3
Width (W) Depth (D)
11
15
3.00
(76.2)
W or W1
8001200
16002000
25004000
14
3.00
(76.2)
The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of
utility compartment structure.
Niagara Mohawk
(National Grid)
13
W1
10
12
2.50
(63.5)
Figure 21.1-2. Incoming Utility Compartment and/or Main DevicesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Clear
Area
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Main
5
6
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Blank
Pull
Section
Utility
Pull
Section Compartment
Hot Sequence
Blank
2.50
(63.5)
Bottom
45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
Width (W1)
30 (762.0)
12 (304.8)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)

30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
30 (762.0) 18 (457.2)
N/A
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)

36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Top
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) N/A

36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A
For limiter lugs or more than six (6) mechanical lugs per phase, use Layout 3.
For limiter lugs or more than six (6) mechanical lugs per phase, a 12-inch (304.8 mm) pull box is required.
For bottom incoming, front accessible applications only, 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide pull section required.

CA08104001E
October 2013
21.1-5
Sheet 21 023

Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Exelon/PECO
(Philadelphia Electric Company)
Metering
Sequence
Hot
8002000
25004000
8002500
4000
PEPCO
(Potomac Electric Power Co.)
XCEL Energy of Colorado
Layout 2
Layout 3
Layout 4
Top-Mounted
Pull Box
Pull
Section
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Width (W1)
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Bottom
Top
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Bottom
Top
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
Hot
8001200
16002000
25004000
PSEG
(Public Service Electric and Gas)
Layout 1
Hot
8002000
25004000
8003000
4000
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Hot
800
12002000
2500
30004000
Front-Access
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Public Service of New Hampshire Hot/Cold
First Energy Toledo Edison
Cold
Ameren
(Union Electric)
Hot
Bottom
Top
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Bottom
Top
N/A
N/A
8004000
Dominion
(Virginia Power Company)
Hot
800
1200
16002000
25004000
We Energies
(Wisconsin Electric Power Co.)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)

30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Hot
10004000
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
Hot
800
12002000
25003000
Wisconsin Public Service Corp.
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
Hot
800
1200
16003000
4000
Alliant Energy
(Wisconsin Power and Light)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer

to Page 21.1-8.
Only required for 750 kcmil incoming cables.
Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of

the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater.
30 (762.0)
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
7
8
9
10
Note: The following utilities have standardized on the National

Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) utility metering
compartment standard. Refer to Page 21.1-8 for specific sizing
and requirements.
American Electric Power, Central Hudson Gas and Electric, Central
Vermont, Consumers Power Company, Delmarva Power and Light,
Georgia Power Company, Kansas City Power and Light, Orange And
Rockland, Philadelphia Electric Company, Allegheny Power, Toledo
Edison, Union Electric, Columbus Southern Power, Pennsylvania
Electric Co. and Southern Maryland Electric Coop.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 024
Main StructuresIncoming West Coast Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices

Bottom Feed
ii
Bottom or Top Feed

2.50
(63.5)
Pull Box
2.50
(63.5)
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Pull
Section
2.50
(63.5)
3
Main
Layout 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
W1
Floor Plan
Layout 2
Layout 2
Figure 21.1-3. West Coast Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
D
W1
Clear
Area
Floor Plan
Layout 1
3.00
(76.2)
Blank
Clear
Area

Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Front-Access
Layout 1
Layout 2
(Top Feed)
(Bottom Feed)
Top-Mounted Pull Box Pull Section
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Width (W1)
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
N/R
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
West Coast Utilities

E.U.S.E.R.C.
Southern California Edison (S.C.E.)

400
600800
1000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
N/R
N/R
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
1200
1600
2000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
Los Angeles Department of Water and Power (L.A.D.W.P.)
16
400
600800
1000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)

30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
17
1200
1600
2000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)

36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
18
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)

51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
19
Refer to Eaton.
For main device dimensions, see Page 21.1-9. N/R = Not Required.
20
21

CA08104001E
October 2013
21.1-7
Sheet 21 025

Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Front-Access
Layout 1
Width (W)
Layout 2
(Top Feed)
(Bottom Feed)
Depth (D)
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Width (W1)

Pacific Gas and Electric (P.G. and E.)
ii
1
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
N/R
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
San Diego Gas and Electric (S.D.G. and E.)

400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
16002000 (Copper)
1600 (Aluminum)
2000 (Aluminum)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
54 (1371.6)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 026
Main StructureIncoming Standard (NEMA) Utility Compartments and/or Main Device

Hot Sequence Utility
Bottom Entrance
Top Entrance
ii
Cold Sequence Utility

Bottom Entrance
Top Entrance
1
2
90.00
(2286.0)
Utility
Pull
Compartment
Section
Hot Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Optional GFP
Optional GFP
3
4
5
6
Layout 1
Layout 2
Main
Clear
Area
2.50
(63.5)
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Layout 3
3.00
(76.2)
W1
Floor Plan,
Pull Section
Clear
Area
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
3.00
(76.2) (76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
D
W1
2.50
(63.5)
Top Plan,
Main Section
Layout 4
Figure 21.1-4. NEMA Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Optional GFP
D
W1
Optional GFP
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Main
Main
Optional
Customer
Metering
Pull
Main
90.00 Section
(2286.0)
2.50
(63.5)
Optional
Customer
Metering
Rigid bus extension into Pull Section is required above 2000A.

IQ meter mounted to disconnect door as an alternate location. (When K, L, M, N and R fixed-mounted frames and fixed-mounted power
circuit breakers are used.)
Table 21.1-7. Main Device Structure Size for Figure 21.1-4 Layouts
8
9
10
11
12
13
Main
Device
Max. Width Depth Pull

Amp. (W)
(D)
Section
Rating
Width
(W1)
Fixed-Mounted Devices
KD, HKD, KDC

400
LGS, LGH,
600
LGC, LGU
LD, HLD, LDC
600
MDL, HMDL
800
ND, HND, NDC 1200
36
36
30
30
20
20
36
36
36
30
30
30
20
20
26
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
36
36
36
30
30
30
26
26
26
400
600
36
36
30
30
20
20
15
CMDL, CHMDL 800

CND, CHND,
1200
CNDC
36
36
30
30
20
20
16
CRD, CRDC
CRD, CRDC
36
36
30
30
26
26
19
20
21
36
36
36
45
45
45
Magnum DS
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
1600
2000
400
800
1600
36
36
36
30
30
30
Note: Dimensions for Figure 21.1-4.

Note: Refer to Pages 21.1-2 to 21.1-4
for dimensions on special utility CT
compartments.
20
20
26
400
600
800
1200
400
600
800
1200
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30
36
36
36
36
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
26
100% Rated Electric Trip Bolted Pressure Switches

Available with Optional GFP
CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
CBC-3000
CBC-4000
CBC-5000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
45
Max. Width
Amp. (W)
Rating
Depth
(D)
Pull
Section
Width
(W1)
100% Rated Manual Bolted Pressure Switches

Not Available with Ground Fault Protection
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
QA-3000
QA-4000
QA-5000
30
30
30
30
36
36
36
20
26
26
26
30
30
30
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
36
30
36
30
36
30
36
30
45
36
45
36
45
36
Refer to Eaton
20
26
26
26
30
30
30
Drawout-Mounted Devices
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

Available with Optional Integral GFP
Magnum SB
Fusible Switches
TRI-PAC Fuse Type Current Limiting Breakers

LA-P
NB-P
PB-P
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
100% Rated Power Circuit Breakers

100% Rated Molded-Case Breakers

CKD, CHKD
CLD, HCLD,
CLDC
18
Magnum SB
Main
Device

14
17
Max.
Width Depth Pull
Amp. (W)
(D)
Section
Rating
Width
(W1)
Molded-Case Breakers
1600
2000
2500
Main
Device
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS

800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
48
48
48
48
54
66
26
26
26
30
30
Not UL listed.
Refer to Eaton.
Note: See Pages 21.1-11 to 21.1-14 for layout

of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1 and
21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures. Topmounted pull boxes are available with heights
of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches
(304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. For metric conversion: inches x 25.4 = mm.
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.1-9
Sheet 21 027
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Top Feed
Incoming StructureWith Customer Metering and/or Main Device

Bottom Entrance TopMounted Main with
Distribution Chassis
Top Entrance
Bottom Entrance
Mid-Mounted Main Bottom-Mounted
Main Load Cross Bus
Load Cross Bus
Pull 2500A
Section Max.
Optional GFP
2500A
Max.
Main
Optional GFP
22X
Dist.
Classis
Main
36.00
(914.4)
Min.
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Main
2.50
(63.5)
4000A Main

Max.
36.00
(914.4)
Min.
Clear
Area
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Pull Section
Minimum
Dimensions
Layout 5
(Fixed-Mounted
Devices Only)
400800
12002000
2500
Top Pull Box 400800

Minimum
12002000
Dimensions 2500
Width
Height
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)

5
6
Figure 21.1-5. Main Structure LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

2
3
Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
24.00 (609.6)
Min.
ii
1
Clear Area
3.00 3.00
(76.2) (76.2)
Ampere
Rating
Layout 4
Layouts 3 & 4
Floor or Top Plan
Optional GFP
22X
Dist.
Classis
24.00 (609.6)
Min.
Layouts 1 & 2
Optional GFP
2.50
(63.5)
Optional
Customer
Metering
Main
Top or Bottom
Entry Mid-Mounted
Main Cable Exit
Optional
Customer
Metering
Optional
Customer
Metering
Optional GFP
90.00
(2286.0)
Top Entrance TopMounted Main with


Customer metering with IQ meter requires 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) minimum width.
Not available with bottom fed TRI-PAC breaker.
Main
Device
Max.
Width (W)
Depth
Amp. Zero No GFP (D)
Rating Seq. or With
GFP Integral
GFP
30
36
36
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
24
20
20
24
24
24
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
400
600
600
30
30
30
26
26
26
18
18
18
CMDL, CHML
CND, CHND,
CNDC
800
1200
1200
30
30
30
26
26
26
18
18
18
CRD, CRDC
CRD, CRDC
1600
2000
30
30
26
26
30
30

LA-P
NB-P
PB-P
400
800
1600
30
30
30
26
26
26
18
18
24

of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1
and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures.
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available
with heights of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00
inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48

Magnum DS

CKD, CHKD
CLD, HCLD,
CLDC
Max.
Amp.
Rating

Magnum SB
KD, HKD, KDC

400
LGS, LGH,
600
LGC, LGU
600
LD, HLD, LDC
600
MDL, HMDL
800
ND, HND, NDC 1200
1600
2000
2500
Main
Device
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
400
600
800
1200
30
30
30
30
18
18
18
18
Max.
Amp.
Rating
400
600
800
1200

CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
CBC-3000
CBC-4000
CBC-5000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
45
30
30
30
30
36
36
36
Note: Dimensions for Layouts 1, 2 and 5

shown above. Dimensions for Layouts 3 and
4use larger allowable dimension of main
(shown above) or distribution mounted
devices (see Pages 21.1-9 to 21.1-15).
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)

QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
QA-3000
QA-4000
QA-5000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
30
30
30
30
36
45
45
30
30
30
30
30
36
36

Magnum SB
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48

Magnum DS

800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
8
9
10
11
12
Fusible Switches
CA08104001E
Main
Device
36
36
36
48
48
48
Bottom feed switch structure depth per

Figure 1 is 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) minimum.
Not UL listed.
Refer to Eaton.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 028
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Individually Mounted
Individually Mounted Distribution Devices

Top-Mounted Feeder with
ii
1
2.50
(63.5)
Clear Area
2500A
Feeder
Max.
CC
Optional GFP
Optional GFP
22X
Dist.
Classis
4
5
36.00
(914.4)
W
Min.
Layout 1
6
7
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
W
(Front)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
24.00 (609.6)
DMin.
Layout 2
Note: Switchboards designed using these distribution structures require front access for cable terminations.
Figure 21.1-6. Individually Mounted Distribution Layouts

Clear area assumes no floor channels used under front or rear frame members.
Note: Individually mounted distribution devices are not compartmentalized.
8
9
Table 21.1-9. Stacked Individually Mounted Distribution Structure

Sizes for Figure 21.1-6 Layout 1 OnlyDimensions in Inches (mm)
Feeder
Device
Max. Zero Sequence

Amp. GFP
Rating Minimum
Width
(W)
10
Depth
(D)
No GFP or with
Integral GFP
Minimum
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Minimum
Cable
Space
CC
11
12
13
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
Table 21.1-10. Top Feeder with Group-Mounted Distribution Chassis

Feeder
Device
Maximum
Ampere Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
RD, RDC
Magnum SB
Magnum DS
Manually Operated Bolted
Pressure Contact Switch
2500
2500
2500
2500
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12.00,

18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Available

Magnum 800
SB
1600
2000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
100% Rated Power Circuit Breaker
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum 800
DS
1600
2000

CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
54 (1371.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)

QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500

800
1200
1600
2000
2500
Structure size to be determined by device requiring the largest

structure width and depth.
Magnum DS Power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have been
qualified by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle withstand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.

CA08104001E
October 2013
21.1-11
Sheet 21 029
Distribution SectionsGroup-Mounted Devices
i
ii
Busway
Connection
Optional
Customer
Metering
or
Blank
90.00
(2286.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
24.00 (609.6)
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
Layout 1
Maximum 2000 Amperes
CT Compartment
Combination Section
90.00
(2286.0)
38X
Vertical
Panel
Space
for
Devices
22X
Device
Space
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
2.50
(63.5)
18.00 (457.2)
Layout 2
Busway Connection
50X
Vertical
Panel
Space
for
Devices
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
2.50
(63.5)
ClearArea
3
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
W
(Front)
Floor Plan
18.00 (457.2)
Layout 3
Full Distribution Section
6
7
Note: See Distribution Layout Guides for structure width and for feeder device X requirements on Pages 21.1-12 and 21.1-14.
Figure 21.1-7. Distribution Section LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)


For panels rated above 2000A, minimum depth is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
Busway connection can be either incoming service or exiting load from a feeder breaker. Increased depth will be required.
Main Lug Distribution Sizing

Most switchboard layouts feed the
distribution section(s) from adjacent
main breaker sections; however, a
single distribution section may have
a set of incoming main lugs only.
2. With a bussed auxiliary structure for

incoming cable per Figure 21.1-8.
50X
Chassis
38X
Chassis
2#2500
2#250750
10 (254.0) 10 (254.0)
16 (406.4) 10 (254.0)
800
3#2500
3#250750
10 (254.0) 10 (254.0)
16 (406.4) 10 (254.0)
1200
4#2500
4#250750
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
16 (406.4) 12 (304.8)
1600
5#2500
5#250750
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
16 (406.4) 12 (304.8)
2000
6#2500
6#250750
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
16 (406.4) 12 (304.8)

Wall
Cross Bus
X Space Required
400 &
600
Main lugs may be positioned in

two ways.
1. Main lugs on distribution panel
using space requirements in
Table 21.1-11.
Table 21.1-11. Main Lug Only Space

RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Amperes Lug
Range
(kcmil)
For compression lugs, use #250750 kcmil

lug dimensions.
Dimensions shown are for top entry on 38X
Chassis only. For bottom entry, use 50X
Chassis space requirements.
Incoming
Conduits
Pull
Section
Top Section View
PNLBD
PNLBD
18.00
(457.2)
Figure 21.1-8. Section Plan View

For 30004000A: Incoming cable or
busway enters top or bottom of pull
section, terminating in cross bus
extension. For pull section dimensions,
refer to Page 21.1-8.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 030
Distribution Layout GuideMolded-Case Breakers
ii
Surge P
1
2
7X
or
10X
ive evice
Customer
Meter ng
4
5
1P
1P
1X
2P
2P
2X
EHD
150
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE,

HFDDC
225
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH,

EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
3X
250
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC
4
4X
400
DK, KD, HKD, LHH

KDC, CKD , CHKD
3P
3X
2P
2P
2X
3P
3P
3X
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
Earr
kage
2 orr 3P
10
2 or P
400
ELKD, ELHKD, ELKDC
4
4X
600
LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
600
LD, HLD, LDC,

CLD , CHLD , CLDC
2 orr 3P
3X
100
FB-P
3X
250
JD, HJD, JDC
2 orr 3P
12
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
6X
2 orr 3P
, HKDDC
4
4X
6X
11
13
Customer Metering
Maximum
Amperes Frame
100
3P
1X = 1-3/8 inches
(34.9 mm)
400 kA
11X
36-inch (914.4
4 mm) Wide Structure
Breaker to Fusible
Transition, All Widths
1X
Filler
Load
, HLDDC
400
NHH, LA-P
800
MDL, HMDL,
CMDL , CHMDL , HMDLDC
1200
ND, HND,
NDC
400
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC
800
NB-P
1200
CND
14
2 orr 3P
6X
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
16
2 orr 3P
17
18
19
Break
4
4X
6X
, CHND
, CNDC , NBDC
ain.
Figure 21.1-9. Circuit Breaker X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

20
m y b use as
45-inch (1143.0 mm)

Wide Structure
15
Preferred location of SPD is mounted at the top of first distribution section. See Tab 34 for further information.
100% rated breakers.
For use on direct current (DC) systems only.
Note: For breaker interrupting rating and terminal data, see Tab 26.
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.1-13
Sheet 21 031
Distribution Layout GuideGroup-Mounted Drawout
i
1X = 1-3/8 inches
(34.9 mm)
ii
1
2

(includes behind the
deadfront disconnect)
7X through 200 kA
10X 250 kA through 400 kA
7X
or
10X
Surge Protective
Device (SPD)
3
4
5
Customer
Metering
Customer Metering
11X
2 or 3P
Dual Drawout
Feeder
3P
Dual Drawout
Feeder
2 or 3P
Dual Drawout
Feeder
3P
Dual Drawout
Feeder
JGS, JGH, JGC
9
10
600A
Max.
9X
45-Inch (1143.0 mm)

Wide Structure
2 or 3P
Single Drawout
Feeder
8
250A
Max.
7X
51-Inch (1295.4 mm)

Wide Structure
2 or 3P
Single Drawout
Feeder
36-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Minimum Structure
LGS, LGH, LGC
11
12
250A
Max.
7X
JGS, JGH, JGC
13
14
9X
600A
Max.
LGS, LGH, LGC
15
16
17
18
Figure 21.1-10. Circuit Breaker X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: Determine the structure width by the group-mounted drawout MCCB feeder devices above. The width of the structure is determined
by the maximum structure size shown for each device.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 032
Distribution Layout GuideFusible Switches
ii
1
2
1X

(SPD)
7X
or
10X
Surge Protective Device (SPD)

7X up to 200 kA
10X at 250400 kA
Customer Metering
11X
Customer Metering
30A
30A
60A
60A
100A
250V Max.
100A
250V Max.
5
6
100 A
4X
4X
4X
5X
200A
Main or Branch
100A
10
14
(11X with Shunt Trip)
11X
400A
Main or Branch
600A
Main or Branch
800A
Branch Only
16
1200A
Branch Only
9X
200A
15
17
200A
13
5X
600A
Branch
12
100A
400A
Branch
11
6X
45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide Structure
1X = 1-3/8 inches
(34.9 mm)
Fusible to Breaker
6X
9X
11X
11X
15X
Fusible switch may be used as horizontally main.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36- or 45-inch (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) wide structure.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted main switches only in 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide structure.
18
Figure 21.1-11. Fusible Switch X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
19

Twin 200A switches requires the use of J or T fuses at 480V.
Note: Ground fault applications for 800 and 1200A switches require a shunt trip.
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.1-15
Sheet 21 033
Individually Mounted Feeder Devices
i
ii
Rear of Switchboard
Optional GFP
19.50
(495.3)
Clear
Area
Clear
Area
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
12.00
(304.8)
3.00
(76.2)
51.00
(1295.4)
36.00
(914.4)
8.50
(215.9)
2
3
4
Floor Plan
Layout 1
Figure 21.1-12. Individually Mounted Feeder LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

Verify acceptance with code authorities.

Clearance from walls (on boards that are not rear accessible) should be a minimum of 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) for indoor boards.
For boards used in outdoor or wet locations the clearance should be no less than 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Table 21.1-12. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-12 LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

Feeder
Device
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Zero Sequence GFP
No GFP or with Integral GFP
Minimum
Minimum
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Width (W)
Depth (D)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
6
7
8
9

CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
800
1200
1600
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)

QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
800
1200
1600
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 034
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.2-1
Sheet 21 035
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders and Pow-R-Line i
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices

Bottom Feed
Top Feed
Bottom or Top Feed
i
Bottom or Top Feed
ii
2.50
(63.5)
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
2500
Amp
Max.
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Main
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Layout 1
Clear Area
Clear
Area
CC
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Layouts 3 and 4
Layout 4
Cold Sequence)
2
3
4
Note: Switchboards designed using these main structures require rear access for cable terminations. Refer to NEC Article 110-26 for requirements.
Figure 21.2-1. Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)


Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Atlantic City Electric
Metering
Sequence
Rear-Access
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
CC
Layout 4
Depth (D)
CC
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
BGE (Baltimore Gas and Electric) Hot

800
12002500
30004000
36 (914.4)
N/A
36 (914.4)
N/A

45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
CH Energy Group
(Central Hudson Gas and Electric)
Hot /Cold
N/A
Central Vermont Public Service
Hot
N/A
N/A
Cinergy/CG&E
(Cincinnati Gas and Electric)
Hot
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
800
1000
12002000
25004000


Refer to Eaton.
For BG&E, the utility compartment is mounted in the bottom for Layout 1 and top for Layout 2. For bottom feed (Layout 1); up to 2500A, the main is
mounted in top. For 3000 and 4000A bottom feed, the main is in a separate structure. For top feed (Layout 2), maximum amperes is 4000A and the
main is mounted in the bottom.

CA08104001E
11
13
14
15
16
Hot
4001000
12002000
25004000
10
12
Cold
8001600
20002500
30004000
Exelon/ComEd
(Commonwealth Edison)
Hot
800
1200
16002000
25004000
NSTAR (Boston Edison, Cambridge

Electric, Commonwealth Electric)
17
18
19
20
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 036
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access and Pow-R-Line i Feeders
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Connecticut Light and Power

(Northeast Utilities)
Hot /Cold
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
CC
Depth (D)
CC
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Hot
N/A
Georgia Power Co.
Hot
N/A
IPL (Indianapolis Power Co.)
Hot/Cold
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
N/A
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
6 (152.4)
36 (914.4)
6 (152.4)

48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
8001200
16002000
25004000
ConEdison
(Consolidated Edison)
DTE Energy (Detroit Edison)
7
8
9
Layout 4
Hot
800 (Spec. 298)

12001600 (Spec. 298)
12002000 (Spec. 377)
25004000 (Spec. 377)
Hot
800
12002000
25004000
Florida Power and Light
Rear-Access
800
12002000
25004000
Jersey Central Power (First Energy) Hot /Cold
800
12002000
25004000
Kansas City Power and Light
Hot
LIPA (Long Island Power Authority)
Hot
10
8001000
12002000
25004000
11
LG&E Energy
(Louisville Gas and Electric)
12
800
12002000
25003000
Madison Gas and Electric
Hot
Cold
13
8001200
16002000
25003000
14
Massachusetts Electric
(National Grid)
15
800
12002000
25004000
16
Metropolitan Edison (First Energy)
Hot
N/A
Monongahela Power
Hot
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
Naperville
Hot
N/A
Narragansett (National Grid)
Hot
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
17
18
800
12002000
25004000
19
20
21
Hot


Refer to Eaton.
For main device dimension, see Page 21.2-8. N/A = Not Applicable.

CA08104001E
October 2013
21.2-3
Sheet 21 037
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices (Continued)

Bottom Feed
Top Feed
Bottom or Top Feed
Bottom or Top Feed
ii
2.50
(63.5)
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
2500
Amp
Max.
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Blank
Main
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
CC
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Layout 1
Clear Area
Clear
Area
1
2
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Layouts 3 and 4
3
4
Layout 4
(Cold Sequence)
Figure 21.2-2. Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
New York State Electric and Gas
Cold
8001200
16002000
25004000
Niagara Mohawk (National Grid)
Depth (D)
CC
Layout 4
Depth (D)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
CC
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
8
9
10
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
11
Hot
Hot
12
13
Hot
12002000
25004000
Orange and Rockland
Layout 3
Depth (D)
Hot /Cold
8001200
16002000
25003000
4000
Omaha Public Power
Layout 2
Depth (D)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
8001200
16002000
25004000
XCEL (Northern States Power)
Layout 1
Width (W)
Cold
8001200
16002000
25004000
Northeast Utilities
Rear-Access
14
15
16
PPL (Pennsylvania Power and Light) Hot

8004000
Exelon/PECO
(Philadelphia Electric Company)

Hot
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 54 (1371.6)
6 (152.4)
N/A
N/A
Refer to Eaton.
For limiter lugs or more than six mechanical lugs per phase, a separate pull section is required.
For limiter lugs or more than six mechanical lugs per phase, a 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) pull box is required.
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
17

October 2013
Sheet 21 038
i
ii
1
2
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
8002000
25004000
8003000
4000
800
12002000
25004000
PSEG
(Public Service Electric and Gas)
7
8
9
10
11
Depth (D)
CC
Layout 4
Depth (D)
CC
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Hot
N/A
First Energy Toledo Edison
Cold
N/A
Ameren
(Union Electric)
Hot
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
8004000
Dominion
(Virginia Power Company)
Hot
800
1200
16002000
25004000
We Energies
(Wisconsin Electric Power Co.)
Hot
800
1200
16003000
4000
Alliant Energy
(Wisconsin Power and Light)
13
Wisconsin Public Service Corp.
Hot
Hot
10004000
16
Layout 3
Depth (D)
800
12002000
25003000
15
Layout 2
Depth (D)
Hot/Cold
12
14
Layout 1
Width (W)
Hot
800
12002000
2500
30004000
Public Service of New Hampshire
Rear-Access
PEPCO
Hot
(Potomac Electric Power Company)
XCEL Energy of Colorado
Metering
Sequence

Note: The following utilities have standardized on the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) utility metering compartment
standard. Refer to Page 21.1-8 for specific sizing and requirements. American Electric Power, Central Hudson Gas and Electric, Central Vermont,
Consumers Power Company, Delmarva Power and Light, Georgia Power Company, Kansas City Power And Light, Orange and Rockland,
Philadelphia Electric Company, Allegheny Power, Toledo Edison, Union Electric, Columbus Southern Power, Pennsylvania Electric Co. and
Southern Maryland Electric Coop.
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
October 2013
21.2-5
Sheet 21 039
Incoming West Coast Utility CT Compartments and/or Main Devices

Bottom Feed
Bottom or Top Feed
ii
2.50
(63.5)
Pull Box
2.50
(63.5)
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Pull
Section
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
2.50
(63.5)
Main
3.00
(76.2)
Blank
Clear
Area
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Layout 1
W1
Floor Plan
Layout 2
3
4
D
W1
Clear
Area
Layout 1
Layout 2
Figure 21.2-3. West Coast Utility LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)


Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Front- and Rear-Access

Layout 1
Layout 2
(Top Feed)
(Bottom Feed)
8
9
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Width (W1)
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
N/R
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
10
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
11
3000
4000
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
12

E.U.S.E.R.C.
Southern California Edison (S.C.E.)

400
600800
1000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
N/R
N/R
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
13
1200
1600
2000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
14
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
15
Los Angeles Department of Water and Power (L.A.D.W.P.)

400
600800
1000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)

30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
1200
1600
2000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)

36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)

51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
Refer to Eaton.
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
16

October 2013
Sheet 21 040
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Front- and Rear-Access

Layout 1
Width (W)
Layout 2
(Top Feed)
(Bottom Feed)
Depth (D)
Width (W)
Depth (D)
Height (H)
Width (W1)

Pacific Gas and Electric (P.G. and E.)
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
N/R
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
San Diego Gas and Electric (S.D.G. and E.)

400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
54 (1371.6)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
October 2013
21.2-7
Sheet 21 041
Incoming Standard (NEMA) Utility CT Compartment and/or Main Device
Hot Sequence Utility

Top Feed
Cold Sequence Utility

Bottom Feed
2.50 Floor Plan
Top Entrance
Bottom Entrance
ii
(63.5)
Clear Area
D
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
2.50
(63.5)
90.00
(2286.0)
Optional GFP
Optional GFP
W
(Front)
3.00
(76.2)
Main
Layout 1
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Layout 2
4
D
Main
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Main
Main
90.00
(2286.0)
3.00
(76.2)
Optional
Customer
Metering
Optional GFP
Optional
Customer
Metering
Optional GFP
CC
Layout 3
Layout 4
Figure 21.2-4. NEMA Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Max. Width Depth Min.
Amp. (W)
(D)
Cable
Rating
Space
CC
36
36
36
30
6
20
600
800
36
36
36
36
6
6
ND, HND,
NDC
RD, RDC
1200
1600
2000
36
36
36
36
48
48
6
12
12
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
2500
3000
36
45
48
48
12
12
Magnum SB
36
36
36
36
36
36
6
6
6
CMDL, CHMDL 800

CND, CHND, 1200
CNDC
1200
36
36
36
36
36
36
6
6
6
CRD, CRDC
CRD, CRDC
36
36
48
48
12
12
1600
2000

LA-P
NB-P
PB-P
400
800
1600
36
36
36
36
36
36
6
6
12
Note: Refer to Pages 21.1-15 to 21.6-6

for dimensions on special utility CT
compartments.
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
Magnum DS
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
48
48
48
54/66
54/66
66
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
QA-3000
QA-4000
QA-5000
12
12
12
12/18
12/18
18
400
600
800
1200
6
6
6
6

CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
CBC-3000
CBC-4000
CBC-5000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
36
36
6
36
36
6
36
36
6
36
36
6
45
48
12
45
48
12
45
48
12
Refer to Eaton

inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
CA08104001E

800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
36
36
6
36
36
6
36
36
6
36
36
6
45
48
12
45
48
12
45
48
12
Refer to Eaton

Magnum SB
Fusible Switches
400
600
800
1200
Max.
Width Depth Min.
Amp. (W)
(D)
Cable
Rating
Space
CC
26
26
26
30
30


400
600
600
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
Main
Device

400
600
CKD, CHKD
CLD, HCLD,
CLDC
Max.
Width Depth Min.
Amp. (W)
(D)
Cable
Rating
Space
CC
Molded-Case Breakers Available

With Optional Integral GFP
KD, HKD, KDC
LGS, LGH,
LGC, LGU
LD, HLD, LDC
MDL, HMDL
Main
Device
6
7
IQ meter can be mounted to disconnect door as an alternate location for molded case circuit breakers and fixed-mounted power circuit breakers.
Main
Device
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS

800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
Refer to Eaton.
Not UL listed.
36
36
36
45
45
45
54
54
54
66
66
66
6
6
6
18
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 042
Main StructureWith Customer Metering and/or Main Device

Top Entrance
Bottom Mounted
Main Load
Cross Bus
ii
Bottom Entrance
Bottom Mounted
Main Load
Cross Bus
Top or Bottom
Entrance Top
Mounted Main with
Top or Bottom
Entrance Top Mounted
Main Bottom
Mounted Feeder
Top or Bottom
Entrance
Mid Mounted
Main Cable Exit
2.50
(63.5)
Clear Area
Optional
Customer
Metering
Optional
Customer
Metering
Main
2500A
Max.
Optional
Customer
Metering
Optional G, F, P
Main
2500A
Max.
2.50
(63.5)
90.00
(2286.0)
Optional GFP
Optional GFP
Optional GFP
Layout 1
36 (914.4)
Min.
Layout 2
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
W
(Front)
Floor Plan
22X
Dist.
Classis
Main
Main
Optional GFP
Main
4000A
Max.
CC
Feeder
Device
2500A Max.
D
48 (1219.2)
Min.
36 (914.4)
Min.
Layout 3
Layout 4
D
W
Layout 5
Figure 21.2-5. Main Section LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Customer metering with IQ Meter requires

30.00-inch (762.0 mm) minimum width.
Main
Device
Max
Amp
Rating
Min. Width Min.

(W)
Depth
Zero Inte- (D)
Seq. gral
GFP GFP
or W/
No
GFP
Min.
Cable
Space
CC
Not available with bottom fed TRI-PAC

breaker.
Main
Device
Max.
Min.
Min.
Min.
Amp. Width Depth Cable
Rating (W)
(D)
Space
CC

Magnum SB
KD, HKD,
KDC
LGS, LGH,
LGC, LGU
LD, HLD,
LDC
LGS, LGH,
LGC, LGU
MDL, HMDL
ND, HND,
NDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
400 30
26
600 36
600 30
26
600 36
30
12
30
20
30
12
30
20
800 30
1200 30
26
26
30
30
12
12
1600 30
2000 30
2500 30
26
26
26
48
48
48
18
18
18
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
48
48
48
54
54
66
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Clear area assumes no floor channels used

under front or rear frame members.
Main
Device
Min.
Min.
Min.
Width Depth Cable
(W)
(D)
Space
CC
CKD, CHKD 400 30

CLD, HCLD, 600 30
CLDC
CMDL,
800 30
CHMDL
CND, CHND, 1200 30
CNDC
CRD, CRDC 1600 30
CRD, CRDC 2000 30
26
26
30
30
12
12
26
30
12
26
48
12
26
26
48
48
18
18

400 30
800 30
1600 30
26
26
26
30
30
36
12
12
18
400
600
800
1200
400
600
800
1200

CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
CBC-3000
CBC-4000
CBC-5000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000

36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
48
45
48
45
48
45
Refer to Eaton
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Max.
Amp.
Rating

QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
QA-3000
QA-4000
QA-5000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
30
36
30
36
30
36
30
36
36
48
45
48
45
48
Refer to Eaton
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

Magnum SB
Fusible Switches

LA-P
NB-P
PB-P
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS

800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
54
54
54
66
54
12
12
12
18
12
Refer to Eaton.
Bottom feed switch structure is 48.00 inches
(1219.2 mm) minimum.
Not UL listed.

inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.2-9
Sheet 21 043
Individually Mounted Feeder Devices
i
ii
2.50
(63.5)
22X
Panel
Space
1
Clear Area
Optional GFP
CC
Optional GFP
2.50
(63.5)
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
Layout 1
Layout 2
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
W
(Front)
Floor Plan
3
4
5
Layout 3
Note: Switchboards designed using these distribution structures require rear access for cable terminations. Refer to NEC Article 110-26 for requirements.
Figure 21.2-6. Individually Mounted Feeder LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

When using top-mounted (bottom feed) inverted bolted switches, verify acceptance with code authorities.
For Layout 2, width will be 36.00 or 45.00 inches (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) depending on size of panel mounting devices. Refer to Page 21.2-10.
Table 21.2-5. Stacked Distribution Structure Sizes for Figure 21.2-6

Layouts 1 and 2Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Feeder
Device
Max. Zero Sequence GFP

Amp.
Rating Minimum
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
No GFP or with
Integral GFP
Minimum
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Minimum
Cable
Space
CC
1600
2000
2500
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4)

30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0) 54 (1371.6) 26 (660.4)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4)

30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4)

30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)

CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
Width
(W)
Magnum SB
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
54 (1371.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)

800
1200
1600
2000
2500
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
800
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
Magnum DS
800
8
9
10
QA-800
800
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
Magnum DS power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have

been qualified by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle
withstand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.
Note: See Pages 21.2-10 to 21.2-12 for layout of distribution sections.

See Pages 21.4-1 and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures.
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of
12, 18, 24 and 30 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Structure size determined by device requiring largest width and depth.

Magnum DS power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have
been qualified by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle
withstand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.
11
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)


QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
Depth
(D)
Minimum
Cable
Space
CC

Magnum 800
DS
1600
2000
Maximum No GFP or with

Ampere
Integral GFP
Rating
Minimum
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Available

Magnum 800
SB
1600
2000
Feeder
Device
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
Table 21.2-6. Stacked Distribution Structure Sizes for Figure 21.2-6

Layout 3 OnlyDimensions in Inches (mm)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 044
Distribution SectionsGroup-Mounted Devices
ii
Busway
Connection
Optional
Customer
Metering
or
Blank
1
2
90.00
(2286.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
22X
Device
Space
2.50
(63.5)
38X
Vertical
Panel
Space
for
Devices
90.00
(2286.0)
50X
Vertical
Panel
Space
for
Devices
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
3.00
(76.2)
18.00 (457.2)
Layout 2
Busway Connection
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
18.00 (457.2)
W
(Front)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Layout 3
Full Distribution Section
See Distribution Layout Guides for structure width and for feeder device X requirements on Pages 21.2-11 and 21.2-12.
Figure 21.2-7. Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
Layout 1
Maximum 2000 Amperes
CT Compartment
Combination Section
24.00 (609.6)
2.50
(63.5)
4
5
ClearArea
Busway connection can be either incoming service to structure or exiting load from a feeder breaker. Increased depth will be required.
For panels rated above 2000A, minimum depth is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
Main Lug Distribution Sizing
10
11
Main lugs are accessible from the rear

of switchboard and do not require any
panel space. See Figure 21.2-8 below.
Incoming
Conduits
12
13
14
Cross
Bus
PNLBD
PNLBD
PNLBD
W
Top Section
View
15
Figure 21.2-8. Section Floor Plan
16
For 30004000A: Incoming cable or

busway enters top or bottom (rear) of
any section.
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
October 2013
21.2-11
Sheet 21 045
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
Distribution Layout GuideMolded-Case Breakers
ive evice
Customer
Meter ng
7X through 200 kA
400 kA
11X
Customer Metering
1X
2P
2P
2X
3P
3P
3X
2P
2P
2X
3P
3P
3X
ture
1P
36-inch (914.4
4 mm) Wide Str
2 orr 3P
2 or P
Load
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
Break
150
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE,

HFDDC
225
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH,

EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
3X
250
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC
4
4X
400
DK, KD, HKD, LHH

KDC, CKD , CHKD
600
LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
6X
600
LD, HLD, LDC,

CLD , CHLD , CLDC

, HLDDC
FB-P
3X
250
JD, HJD, JDC
400
LA-P, NHH
800
MDL, HMDL,
CMDL , CHMDL , HMDLDC
1200
ND, HND,
NDC
400
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC
45-inch (1143.0 mm)

Wide Structure
9
10
100
11
12
13
14
4
4X
6X
800
NB-P
1200
CND
ain.
Figure 21.2-9. Circuit Breaker X Space RequirementDimensions in Inches (mm)

3X
6X
m y b use as
, HKDDC
4
4X
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
EHD
6X
2 orr 3P
Maximum
Amperes Frame
100
2 orr 3P
2 orr 3P
ii
7X
or
10X
1P
2 orr 3P
1X = 1-3/8 inches
(39.4 mm)
Breaker to Fusible
1X
Filler
Surge P
Preferred location of SPD is mounted at top of first distribution section.

100% rated breakers.
For use on direct current (DC) systems only.
Note: For breaker interrupting ratings and terminal data, see Tab 26.
, CHND
15
, CNDC , NBDC
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 046
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders

1X = 1-3/8 inches
(39.4 mm)
ii
Fusible to Breaker
1X

(SPD)
7X
or
10X

7X up to 200 kA
10X at 250400 kA
Customer Metering
11X
Customer Metering
30A
30A
60A
60A
100A
250V Max.
100A
250V Max.
5
6
100 A
4X
4X
4X
5X
200A
Main or Branch
100A
10
14
11X
400A
Main or Branch
600A
Main or Branch
800A
Branch Only
16
1200A
Branch Only
9X
200A
15
17
200A
13
5X
600A
Branch
12
100A
400A
Branch
11
6X
6X
9X
11X
11X
15X
Fusible switch may be used as horizontally main.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36- or 45-inch (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) wide structure.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted main switches only in 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide structure.
18
Figure 21.2-10. Fusible Switch X Space RequirementDimensions in Inches (mm)
19

Preferred location of SPD is mounted at top of first distribution section. See Tab 34 for more information.
Twin 200A switches requires the use of J or T fuses at 480V.
Note: Ground fault applications for 800 and 1200A switches require a shunt trip.
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.3-1
Sheet 21 047
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
Distribution Layout GuideCircuit Breakers
i
ii
Zone A
A Zone
225A FD Family (T win Only)
250A JD Family
OR
400A KD Family
OR
6001200A LD, MDL, ND
Families
25X
50X
1
2
3
4
Zone B
B Zone
6001200A
LD, MDL, ND
Families
16X
B Zone Limited
Due to Cross Bus
5
6
Zone C
9X
C Zone
225A FD Family (T win Only)
250A JD Family
OR
400A KD Family
OR
6001200A LD, MDL, ND
Families
X Space Determines Amount of
Breakers Allowed in Zone
Frame Types can be Mixed within
Zones Specified
7
8
9
10
8X
(OPTIM)
2P OR 3P
2P OR 3P
LOAD
LOAD
2P OR 3P
LOAD
7X
LINE
5X
LINE
4X
LINE
11
FD, HFD, FDC (225A Twin Only)
JD, HJD, JDC (Twin and Single)
KD, HKD, KDC

400A (Twin and Single)
Zero Sequence Ground Fault Compartmentalized
13
14
LD, HLD, LDC, LCL, LA-P, MDL, HMDL, ND, HND,

NDC, NB-P 6001200A (Single Only)
15
16
Figure 21.3-1. Individually Compartmentalized Feeder Layout 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Section 50X Structure Only (4000A Maximum)
12
Unused bus space to be located in Zone A when possible.

For breakers with OPTIM trip units, the compartment height is 8X.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 048
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
ii
A Zone
1001200A Fusible Switch
Zone A
25X
50X
Zone B
16X
B Zone
B Zone Limited
Due to Cross Bus
Zone C
9X
C Zone
X Space Determines
Amount of Switches
Allowed in Zone
Switch Types can be Mixed

within Zones Specified
8
9
5X
100A
Branch
6X
200A
Branch
10
240V, 600V, 250 Vdc

Fusible Switch
240V, 600V, 250 Vdc

Fusible Switch
11
240V, 600V, 250 Vdc
Fusible Switch
12
9X
400A
Branch
13
240V, 600V
Fusible Switch
14
11X
600/800A
Branch
15
240V, 600V
Fusible Switch
16
17
15X
1200A
Branch
18
19
Figure 21.3-2. Individually Compartmentalized Feeder Layout 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Section 50X Structure Only (4000A Maximum)
Unused bus space to be located in Zone A when possible.
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.4-1
Sheet 21 049
Outdoor Enclosures
Non-Walk-in with Flat Roof
i
4.5
(114.3)
17.37
(441.2)
ii
1.25
(31.8)
1
2.15
(54.6)
2
3
2.13
(54.0)
20.00
(508.0)
5.00
(127.0)
22.00
(558.8)
90.7
(2303.8)
44.00
(1117.6)
7
8
A
to
Floor
Front of
PRL C Inner
Structure
9
10
Structure
Width
20.00
(508.0)
Transition
Structure Width
12.81
(325.4)
Switchboard Structure
Depth
Enclosure Depth
11
12
Figure 21.4-1 Front-AccessNon-Walk-In with Flat RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)

Standard busway entry/exit location, 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) deep minimum.

20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Standard transformer throat connection,
48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep structure only.
Table 21.4-1. Switchboard DepthsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Switchboard Indoor
Structure Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure Depth
24 (609.6)not available for transformer connection

48 (1219.2)minimum for transformer connection
37 (939.8)
43 (1092.2)
49 (1244.6)
61 (1549.4)
Table 21.4-2. Transformer Throat LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)

Transformer
Dimension A
02500 kVA
25015000 kVA
55 (1397.0)
61 (1549.4)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 050
Outdoor Enclosures
Non-Walk-in with Sloped Roof

4.50
(114.3)
ii
2.25
(57.2)
1
2
3
2.13
(54.0)
20.00
(508.0)
5.00
(127.0)
92.95
(2360.8)
22.00
(558.8)
6
44.00
(1117.6)
7
A
to
Floor
Front of
PRL C Inner
Structure
9
10
11
0.13
(3.2)
End Trim
12
Structure
Width
20.00
(508.0)
Transition
Structure Width
0.13
(3.2)
End Trim
12.81
(325.4)
Switchboard Structure
Depth
Enclosure Depth
Figure 21.4-2. Front-AccessNon-Walk-In with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
13
14
Table 21.4-3. Switchboard DepthsDimensions in Inches (mm)
15
16
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Standard transformer throat connection,
48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep structure minimum.
Switchboard Indoor
Structure Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure Depth

48 (1219.2)minimum for transformer connection
54 (1371.6)
66 (1676.4)
37 (939.8)
43 (1092.2)
49 (1244.6)
61 (1549.4)
67 (1701.8)
79 (2006.6)
Table 21.4-4. Transformer Throat LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)

Transformer
Dimension A
02500 kVA
25015000 kVA
55 (1397.0)
61 (1549.4)
17
18
19
20
21

CA08104001E
Metal-Enclosed DrawoutMagnum SB
October 2013
21.5-1
Sheet 21 051
General Description
Drawout Magnum SB
Switchboard
Eatons drawout Magnum SB

switchboard has been designed
for the power user that desires the
configurations and features of low
voltage switchgear, but does not
require the full selectivity and robustness that low voltage metal-enclosed
switchgear provides.
ii
The drawout Magnum SB switchboard

is designed and built using many of
the same techniques and parts of the
Magnum DS switchgear platform.
The design has been optimized for
the differences between the UL 891
standard and the more rigorous
UL 1558 standard.
1
2
4
5
Refer to Tab 20, Section 20.1 Magnum

DS switchgear structure features,
ratings and layout guides. Differences
in these ratings are covered on
the following pages.
6
7
Magnum SB is a low voltage insulatedcase circuit breaker family designed

for the performance and economic
requirements of UL 891 switchboards.
breakers have interruption ratings
up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with
continuous current ratings up
to 6000A
breakers have lighter-duty short
time withstand ratings and fixed
internal instantaneous trips on most
ratings, which is characteristic of
UL 489 molded-case breakers commonly used in UL 891 switchboards.
This provides for greater economy
and excellent coordination and
selectivity for most commercial
applications
Fixed internal instantaneous trips
on all SB insulated-case circuit
breakers rated 3200A and below will
provide an extra safety factor by
reducing the energy let-through to
downstream circuits at the maximum instantaneous trip point and
facilitate feeder circuit breaker
protection in UL 891 switchboards
with 3-cycle bus bracing
Magnum SBSE current limiting
power circuit breakers have 150 kA
interrupting ratings at 480 Vac with
continuous current ratings up to
5000A. The short-time withstand
rating is 30 kA for standard frame
and 50 kA for double frame breakers
8
Magnum SB Switchboard
Magnum SB breakers meet or exceed

the applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and
CSA standards, including:
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC

power circuit breakers used in
enclosures)
ANSI C37.16 (preferred ratings,
related requirements and
application recommendations for
low voltage power circuit breakers
and AC power circuit breakers)
ANSI C37.17 (trip devices for AC
and general purpose DC low voltage
power circuit breakers)
ANSI C37.50 (test procedures
for low voltage AC power circuit
breakers used in enclosures)
UL 1066 (standard for low voltage
AC and DC power circuit breakers
used in enclosures)
Drawout Magnum SB switchboards

conform to the following standards:
CSA
UL Standard 891
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
Built in an ISO certified facility
9
10
Maximum ratings for Magnum SB

switchboards are 600 Vac, 10,000A
continuous cross bus and 200 kA
short-circuit capacity.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 052
Technical Data
Magnum SB Switchboard Class UL 1066 Insulated-Case
ii
1
2
3
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Family UL Rated for Switchboard Applications
Table 21.5-1. Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
5
6
Frame
Breaker Type Frame
Amperes Catalog
Type
Position 16
800
7
8
1200
9
10
1600
11
12
2000
13
2500
14
3000
15
16
4000
5000
17
6000
18
19
20
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz

Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting Interrupting Short-Time

at 508 Vac
at 635 Vac
Withstand Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous Trip
Available Current Sensor and

Rating Plugs for Digitrip
RMS Trip Unit (Establishes
Breaker In Rating)
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
SBN-508
SBN-608
SBN-C08
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
20
20
20

SBS-608
SBS-C08
SBS-E08
Standard 65
Standard 100
Standard 200
65
100
150
65
85

20
20
30
SBN-512
SBN-612
SBN-C12
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
25
25
25

SBS-612
SBS-C12
SBS-E12
Standard 65
Standard 100
Standard 200
65
100
150
65
85
25
25
30

30
SBN-516
SBN-616
SBN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
30
30
30

SBS-616
SBS-C16
SBS-E16
Standard 65
Standard 100
Standard 200
65
100
150
65
85

30
30
30
SBN-620
SBN-C20
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
65
65
35
35
SBS-620
SBS-C20
SBS-E20
Standard 65
Standard 100
Standard 200
65
100
150
65
85

35
35
30
SBS-625
SBS-C25
Standard 65
Standard 100
65
100
65
85
45
45

SBS-E25
Double
200
150
50
50
SBS-630
SBS-C30
Standard 65
Standard 100
65
100
65
85
50
50

SBS-E30
Double
200
150
50
50
SBS-840
SBS-C40
SBS-E40
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
150
85
100
85
100
50
50
2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
SBS-850
SBS-C50
SBS-E50
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
150
85
100
85
100
50
50
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
SBS-C60
Double
100
100
100
100
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker

equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip
Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic
breakers are equal to the published shorttime withstand rating. These interruption
ratings are based on the standard duty
cycle consisting of an open operation,
a 15-second interval and a close-open
operation, in succession, with delayed
tripping in case of short-delay devices.
18 x In
30
18 x In
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600
18 x In
30
18 x In
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
30
The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each,
with a 15-second interval of zero current
between the two periods.
Fixed internal instantaneous trip set at
approximately 18 x In symmetrical will be
phased into the product.
Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for
product rating.
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3000
3000, 4000, 5000, 6000

Magnum SBSE Current Limiting Power

Circuit Breaker with fast opening contacts.
Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled
enclosure.
Note: Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.5-3
Sheet 21 053
Layout Guide
Layout GuideDrawout Magnum SB Rear-Access Switchboard

Rear-Connected Switchgear
Breaker Type
Ampacity Available
ii
Structure WidthsAllowable Breaker PlacementsInches (mm)
<=100 kAIC
150 kAIC
18 (457.2)
22 (558.8)
30 (762.0)
44 (117.6)
Narrow (SBN)
8002000
SBN5SBN6SBNC-
FeederA, B,
C, D
TieB
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
MainB, C, D
TieB, C
FeederA, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H
Standard (SBS)
8002000
SBS6SBSC-
8001600
SBSE
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB or C
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D,
E, F, G, H
Standard (SBS)
25003000
SBS6SBSC-
2000
SBSE
FeederB, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Feeder B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Feedercontact Eaton
Double (SBS)
40005000
SBS8SBSC-
32004000
SBSE
FeederB/F or C/G or D/H

TieB/F, C/G
MainB/F, C/G, D/H
Double w/ Fans (SBS)
6000
SBSC-
5000
SBSE
FeederBC/FG or CD/GH
TieBC/FG, CD/GH
MainBC/FG, CD/GH
Instrument compartment (SPD, HRG,

metering, controls, panelboard, etc.)
All positions
All positions
All positions
All positions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
18
22
30
12
44
13
Metering
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Main
SBS-630
3000A
Feeder
Feeder
Tie
SBN-608 SBS-630 SBN-608
800A
800A
3000A
Main
SBS-630
3000A
SPD
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
SBN-608 SBN-608 SBN-608
800A
800A
800A
SPD
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
22
Feeder
SBN-608 Metering
800A
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
SBN-608 SBN-608 SBN-608 SBN-608
800A
800A
800A
800A
18
22
18
Using Narrow and Standard Breakers
22
Metering
SPD
A/E
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Metering
SPD
Main
SBS-840
4000A
B/F
Main
MBS-840
4000A
C/G
Feeder
Feeder
SBS-608 SBS-608
800A
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
D/H
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
Feeder
SBS-616 SBS-616
1600A
1600A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
44
Tie
MBS-840
4000A
44
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
44
14
15
16
17
18
Using Standard and Double Breakers
19
Figure 21.5-2. Main-Tie-Main Typical Layouts
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 054
Layout Guide
Layout GuideDrawout Magnum SB Front-Access Switchboard

ii
1
Front-Connected Switchgear
Breaker Type
Ampacity Available
<=100 kAIC
Structure WidthsInches (mm)

18 + X (457.2 + X)
22 + X (558.8 + X)
44 + X (1117.6 + X)
Narrow (SBN)
8002000
SBN5SBN6SBNC-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Standard (SBS)
8003000
SBS6SBSC-
FeederB
TieB
MainB
Double (SBS)
40005000
SBS8SBSC-
FeederB/F
TieB/F
MainB/F
Double w/ Fans (SBS)
6000
SBSC-
FeederBC/EF
TieBC/EF
Main BC/EF
Instrument compartment (SPD, HRG,

metering, controls, panelboard, etc.)
All positions
All positions
All positions
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
Note:
8
9
10
Cable
Compartment
Cable
Compartment
Cable
Compartment
22" and 44" Breaker Sections:

Cable Compartment can
be on the right or left.
C
G
Shipping splits are not allowed
between 18" Breaker structure
and its cable compartment.
11
12
13
18" Breaker Sections:

Cable Compartment can
ONLY be on the right.
18
"x"
"x"
22
Shipping splits must be

adjacent to a cable compartment.
"x"
44
14
15
Cable Compartment
Top Entry
Cable
Compartment
Top Entry
Cable Compartment
Top Entry
Instrument
or SPD
Instrument
or SPD
Main Breaker
Main Breaker 5 kA
Cable
Compartment
Bottom
Entry
Cable Compartment
Bottom Entry
16
17
6 kA Main Breaker
Main Breaker
Main Breaker 5 kA
18
Fans
Instrument
or SPD
Instrument
or SPD
19
20
44 (1117.6)
22 (558.8)
Blank
Blank
44 (1117.6)
22 (558.8)
44 (1117.6)
Figure 21.5-4. Front-Access Main Sections
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.5-5
Sheet 21 055
Layout Guide
Cable
Compartment
Main
SBS-630
3000A
22
22
Metering
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Tie
Cable
Feeder
SBN-608 Compart- SBS-630
3000A
ment
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
Cable
SBN-608 Compart800A
ment
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
18
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
18
18
22
i
Main
SBS-630
3000A
ii
Cable
Compartment
1
2
22
22
Figure 21.5-5. Standard and Narrow BreakersTypical Main-Tie-Main Layout
Magnum SB Rear-Accessible Switchboard with NRX Feeders
5
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Blank or
Instrument
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
6
E
Feeder
1200
B
Tie
800
1600
2000
3000
C
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
H
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 28
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 29
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 31
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Blank or
Instrument
B
Feeder
1200
10
11
12
13
Blank or
Instrument
Main
800
1600
2000
3000
14
15
Feeder
1200
16
C
Feeder
1200
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 30
8
9
C
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
C
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
B
Feeder
1200
Feeder
800
A
Main
800
1600
2000
3000
Main
800
1600
2000
3000
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
800
Feeder
1200
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 32
C
Feeder
1200
G
Feeder
1200
D
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 33
17
18
19
Figure 21.5-6. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum SB Mains and Ties, and Series NRX Feeder Breakers
CA08104001E
20
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 056
Layout Guide
Layout GuideMagnum SB Front-Accessible Switchboard with NRX Feeders
ii
1
2
3
24.00
(609.6)
24.
30.
7
44.00 ( 17.6)
7
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
A
E
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
B
F
0
0 7
44.0 11 7.6)
7
24.00
(609.6)
Instr.
Instr.
Main 800
1600 2000 3000
B
F
Cable
Compartment
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
C
G
Feeder Feeder
1200
1200
C
G
Feeder NRX
1200 1200
D
H
Feeder Feeder
1200
1200
D
H
Arrangement 1
Arrangement 2
24.
24.00
(609.6)
Feeder eeder
1200 1200
A
E
9
10
11
12
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
B
F
44.0
Cable
Compartment
24.
17.6)
7
24.00
(609.6)
44.0
24.00 (609.6)
7
7.6)
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
A
E
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
Instr.
A
Tie 800
1600 2000 3000
B
F
Cable
Compartment
44.0
Instr.
E
Main 800
1600 2000 3000
B
F
Tie 800
1600 2000 3000
C
G
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
C
G
Feeder 800
1600 2000 3000
C
G
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
D
H
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
D
H
Feeder Feeder
1200 1200
D
H
Arrangement 3
Arrangement 4
11 7.6)
7
Cable
Compartment
Arrangement 5
13
Figure 21.5-7. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsSeries NRX and Magnum SB Breakers
14
15
48.00
(1219.2)
24.00
24.00
(609.6)
(609.6)
16
17
18
19
20
21
24.00
(609.6)
54.00
(1371.6)
30.00
(762.0)
24.00
(609.6)
68.00
(1727.2)
44.00
(1117.6)
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
20.00
(508.0)
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
17.50
(444.5)
40.20
(1021.1)
20.50
(520.7)
26.50
(673.1)
40.50
(1028.7)
Front
Figure 21.5-8. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)Front-Access Structures
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.5-7
Sheet 21 057
Table 21.5-4. Magnum SB Breaker WeightsLbs (kg)
Breaker
Drawout
SBN-800
SBN-1600
SBN-2000
SBS-800
SBS-1600
SBS-2000
SBSE-800
SBSE-1600
SBSE-2000
SBS-2500, SBS-3000
SBS-4000
SBS-5000
SBS-6000
SBSE-3000
SBSE-4000
SBSE-5000
110 (50)
i
ii
145 (66)
1
190 (86)
2
175 (80)
310 (141)
340 (154)
Note: Manually or electrically operated. For approximate impact weight, add 50% of
breaker weight.
96.00 (2438.4)
4
See Section 21.1
Figure 21.1-9
for MCCB Circuit
Breaker Layout
Information.
5
6
7
8
9
10
50.00
38.00
or
(1270.0)
(965.2)
11
12
13
Figure 21.5-9. Group-Mounted Molded-Case

When a top-of-gear breaker lifter is used,

height is 99.00 inches (2514.6 mm) total.
Note: Structures using molded-case

breakers for distribution will be UL 891
rated with 30-cycle bus bracing.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 058
Layout Dimensions
Layout
44-Inch
ii
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1
2
CC
12.00
(304.8)
3.60
(91.4)
4
5
21.50
(546.1)
0.65
(16.5)
3.50 (88.9)
Power
Conduit
Area
CC
1.50
(38.1)
3.00
(76.2)
FC
3.00
(76.2)
3.60
(91.4)
3.00
(76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
0.65
(16.5)
21.50
(546.1)
Provision
for 0.50 (12.7)
Hardware
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
A
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
D
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
Front
5.38
(136.7)
FC
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
3.00
(76.2)
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
Front
16.00
16.00
(406.4)
(406.4)
44.00
(1117.6)
9
10
1.38
(35.1)
6.00(152.4)
Top
Control
D
Conduit
Area
31.18
(792.0)
3.60
(91.4)
3.38
3.50
(85.9)
(88.9)
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
Front
3.00
(76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
5.38
(136.7)
Power
Conduit
Area
12.00
(304.8)
16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
6.00
(152.4)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.60
(94.4)
31.18
(792.0)
0.65
(16.5)
21.50
(546.1)
4.25 (108.0)
8.38
Provisions
for 0.50 (12.7) (212.9)
Hardware
4.63
(117.6)
FC
3.00
(76.2)
Ref: 4A37896
Figure 21.5-10. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)18.00, 22.00, 30.00, 44.00-Inch (457.2, 558.8, 762.0, 1117.6 mm) Wide
Rear-Access Structures
This dimension is reduced by 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) when vertical section is close coupled to a dry-type transformer due to secondary bus connections.
11
W
12
13
14
18.73
(475.7)
0.65
(16.5)
3.50
(88.9)
2.75 (70.0)
Control
Conduit
Areas
CC
40.20
(1021.0)
17.52
(445.0)
5.42
(138.0)
15
Figure 21.5-11. Front- Access Structures
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.5-9
Sheet 21 059
Layout Dimensions
Table 21.5-5. Rear-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
W
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
CC
Recommended Number
3.50 Inch (88.9 mm)
4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
2
4
6
8
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
16
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
9.08 (230.6)
15.08 (383.0)
21.08 (535.4)
27.08 (687.8)
33.08 (840.2)
39.08 (992.6)
5
9
12
15
18
21
5
8
12
15
18
21
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Table 21.5-6. Front-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

W
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
CC
13.89 (352.8)
17.89 454.4)
25.89 (657.6)
39.89 (1013.2)
13
Recommended Number
3.50 Inch (88.9 mm)
4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
6
8
11
16
6
8
11
16
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 060
Layout Dimensions
LayoutOutdoor Walk-in Switchboard

17.13
(435.1)
ii
1
20.00
(508.0)
25.31
(642.9)
(1039.9)
Opening
30.00
(762.0)
Unit
3.93
(99.8)
22.00
Unit
Foundation Tie Down

(for Seismic Only)
3.89
(98.8)
28.59
5.75
(146.1)
CL
2.00
(50.8)
26.00
(660.4)
12
111.48
(2831.6)
Overall
Height
33.45
(849.6)
(Door
Width)
117.08
(2973.8)
(Base)
39.66
(1007.4)
Switchgear Throat
45.00
(1143.0)
41.38
(1051.1)
17
Transformer
Flange
18
37.50
(952.5)
19
8.00
(203.2)
15.50
22.00
(558.8)
CL
Front of
Outdoor
Base
42.00
(1066.8)
(Clear
Width)
33.45
(849.6)
Structure
18.00-inch (457.2) wide breaker structure
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure
38.00-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure
Transformer throat
Weight
Lbs (kg)
1500 (681)
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
5200 (2361)
2300 (1044)
2300 (1044)
2700 (1226)
3200 (1453)
150 (68)
44.00
22.00
(558.8)
30.00
(762.0)
Unit Widths
5.00
(127.0)
20
Figure 21.5-12. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
21

CL
See
Figure 1
Door
Swing
33.45
(849.6)
Front View

(without breakers)
14
16
14.00
(355.6)
Top View
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
15
38" Width = 37.4 to Rear Frame (950.0)
72.00
(1828.8)
Switchgear
Depth
Side View
13
Door Swing
43.38
(1101.9)
(Aisle Width)
9.00
(228.6)
11.00
(279.4)
15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)
22.00
(558.8)
25.00
(635.0)

(784.6)
CL
Throat
Opening
& TXF
Switchgear Throat
4.00
(101.6)

36.00
(914.4)
22.00
Outdoor
Roof Sheet
5.75
(146.1)
CL
51.23
(1301.2)
11
Transformer
Flange
30.21
(767.3)
(Opening
Width)
(From Base)
105.06
(2668.5)
10
O.S. of Outdoor
End Sheet
0.61
(15.5)
2.30
109.03
(2769.4)
Figure 1
119.98
(3047.5)
Overall Depth
(468.4)

Bus Duct Orientation
Section A-A
Floor Plan
0.95
(24.1)
18.00
13.35
(457.2) (339.1)
17.35
22.00
(558.8) (440.7)
30.00
25.35
(762.0) (644.0)
38.00
33.35
(965.2) (847.1)
39.35
44.00
(1117.6) (999.5)
50.00
45.35
(1270.0) (1151.9)
Top View
0.95
(24.1)
Section B-B
Structure
Width
CL
1.50
(38.1)
Lifting Angle
0.95
(24.1)
Bus Duct
Chimney & Cover
Opening
109.03
(2769.4)
to Floor
25.52
(648.2)
C
A L
44.00
(1117.6)
Unit
Control Wire
Opening
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
0.95
(24.1)
16.81
(427.0
3.06
(77.7)
18.44
(468.4)
48.87
(1241.3)
Bottom
Conduit
Space
Rear of
Inner
Structure
C
B
Opening
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
(684.3)
3.06
(77.7)
5.03
(127.8)
45.66
(1159.8)
2.00
3.06
(77.7)
20.00
(508.0)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
Structure
Width
Roof
Rear of Base
46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat
(44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
18.70 (475.0) = 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide transition box.
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.5-11
Sheet 21 061
Layout Dimensions
LayoutOutdoor Non-Walk-in Switchboard
17.13
(435.1)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
3.06
(77.7)
20.00
(508.0)
3.06
(77.7)
25.44
(646.2)
40.94
(1039.9)
Opening
3.06
(77.7)
20.00
(508.0)
2.00
(50.8) 30.00
(762.0)
Unit
Bottom
Conduit
Space
18.44
(468.4)
CL
44.00
(1117.6)
Unit
3.93
(99.8)
Opening
Unit
O.S. of Outdoor
End Sheet
88.02
(2235.7)
Overall Depth
(468.4)
Outdoor
Roof Sheet
36.00
(914.4)
(558.8)
28.58
109.05
(2769.9)
109.79
(2788.7)
Overall
Height
CL
CL
2.00
(50.8)
30.23 26.97
(767.8) (685.0)
CL
Throat
Opening
& TXF
Switchgear Throat
1.60
1.65
A
(355.6)
4
5
6
7
8
CL
72.00
(1828.8)
Switchgear
Depth
10
CL
See
Figure 1
Top View
41.38
(1051.1)
8.00
(203.2)
11
13
Structure
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure
Transformer throat
Weight
Lbs (kg)
1500 (681)
2400 (1090)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
5200 (2361)
2300 (1044)
2300 (1044)
2700 (1226)
3200 (1453)
150 (68)
14
15
16
17
18
44.00
22.00
(558.8)
20.10

(without breakers)
15.50
12
Switchgear Throat
22.00
(558.8)
Outdoor
Base
86.04
(2185.4)
(Base)
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
37.50
(952.5)
Rear of Base
Indoor Gear
7.51
(190.8)
Work Space
Side View
Transformer
Flange

4.00
(101.6)
26.00
(660.4)
45.00
(1143.0)
11.00
(279.4)
15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)
22.00
(558.8)
25.00
(635.0)
Transformer
Flange
3.89
(98.8)
51.23
(1301.2)
Figure 1
Floor Plan
105.08
(2669.0)
22.00
17.35
(558.8) (440.7)
30.00
25.35
(762.0) (644.0)
38.00
33.35
(965.2) (847.1)
44.00
39.35
(1117.6) (999.5)
50.00
45.35
(1270.0) (1151.9)
0.95
(24.1)
Section A-A
1.50
(38.1)
Lifting Angle
18.00
13.35
9.00
(457.2) (339.1) (228.6)
Top View
0.95
(24.1)
Section B-B
Structure
Width
Bus Duct
Chimney & Cover
22.00
0.95
(24.1)
ii
1
25.52
(648.2)
C
A L
109.03
(2769.4)
to Floor
0.95
(24.1)
16.85
(428.0
17.83
(452.9)
18.94
Foundation Tie Down

(for Seismic Only)
Rear of
Inner
Structure
C
B
Control Wire
Opening
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
(684.3)
Structure
Width
Roof
Rear of Base
30.00
(762.0)
Unit Widths
Front View
19
Figure 21.5-13. Outdoor Non-Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
20

18.70 (475.0) = 4.004-inch (1117.6 mm) wide transition box.
Note: 46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat
(44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
CA08104001E
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 062
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.6-1
Sheet 21 063
General Description

Switchboards
Standards

Switchboard Sections and Selection
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and

UL 891
Used with Type 1 Pow-R-Line C
switchboard sections
Select main, branch feeder,
customer and utility metering
from Section 21.1
Factory wired panelboards and
dry-type distribution transformers
meet NEMA Standard PB-2, UL 891
and the National Electrical Code
From the following pages select the

appropriate section Type
Select from panelboards, blank steel
backpans and dry-type distribution
transformers by cell
Layout IFS sections near standard
distribution sections
Indicate on drawings and one-line
diagrams the connections from
feeder devices to the appropriate cell
General Description
Eatons Integrated Facility System
Switchboard product is a simple
concept. This technology integrates
standard panelboards, dry-type
distribution transformers, contactors
and other electrical equipment
into free-standing, front-access
switchboards.

Switchboard Benefits
Space savings up to 50% or more

Factory wired and pre-tested
Assembled and ready to install
Significantly reduces installation
time and materials
Significantly reduces materials
associated with panel installation
Frees up additional space at no
charge to the owner
Installed cost is typically less than
with traditional products
Sustainability and LEED compliant
i
ii
1
2
3
4
Panel L1
Panel L2
Main
Switchboard
Transformer
6
7
Telephone
Panel P3
Panel P2
Panel P1
8
9
Figure 21.6-1. Traditional Electrical RoomPlan View
10
11
IFS
Switchboard
12

Switchboard Solution
13
Available Options
Automatic transfer switches

UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supplies)
SPD (surge protective devices)
HVAC control
Lighting control
Power factor correction
Metering
Customer metering
Lighting power reduction products
14
Telephone
15
Figure 21.6-2. IFS Electrical RoomPlan View
16
Main RD
Utility
Breaker
Metering Customer
Section Metering,
SPD
P1
P3
L1
Dry-Type
Dist.
X-Former
L2
Feeder
Breaker
Section
Figure 21.6-3. Optimized IFS LayoutFront View
P2
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 064
Layout Dimensions
Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section Layout

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to panelboards.
Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
ii
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1
2
3.00
D (76.2)
Panelboard
Cell A
Panelboard
Cell C
90.00
(2286.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
Conduit Area
12.00
(304.8)
Floor Plan
Type 1 and 2 Sections
Panelboard
Cell B
5
6
IFS Type 1 Section
7
8
IFS Type 2 Section
Figure 21.6-4. Type 1 and 2 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 21.6-1. IFS Type 1 Allowable Configurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type
Reference Maximum Main

Device
Voltage
Catalog
Rating AC Type
Section
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Width Dimensions (W) Depth Dimensions (D) Section

Branch Allowable
Circuits Panelboard
Standard Optional
Standard Optional Height
Ampere Modifications
Range
IFS Type 1 Section
10
A
or
B
11
Pow-R-Line 1a
Pow-R-Line 2a
12
27
27
Pow-R-Command 28
240
480Y/277
240
480Y/277
MLO
400
Breaker 225
15100
MLO
400
Breaker 225
15100
MLO
15100
225

26 (660.4)
20 (508.0)

26 (660.4)
20 (508.0)

26 (660.4)
13
14
15
16

30 (762.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
30 (762.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details.

42 branch circuits maximum.
Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit
breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames,
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service entrance
label and surge protective device (SPD).
If panel sizing main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will fit in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section.
If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for structure dimensions.
Optional hinged panelboard door available on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide structures.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.6-3
Sheet 21 065
Layout Dimensions
Table 21.6-1. IFS Type 2 Allowable Configurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type

Device
Voltage
Catalog
Rating AC Type
Section
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes

Branch Allowable
Circuits Panelboard
Standard Optional
Range
IFS Type 2 Section

C
Pow-R-Line 1a
27
240
Breaker 400
15100
Pow-R-Line 2a
27
480Y/277
Breaker 400
15100
Pow-R-Command 28
480Y/277
MLO
400
Breaker 225
Pow-R-Line 3a
480Y/277

27
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
15100
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
MLO
600
Breaker 600
15225
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
MLO
15225
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
800
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
i
ii
1
2
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
4
5
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details.

Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service
equipment label and surge protective device (SPD).
If panel sizing with non-interchange main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will fit in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you
must use a full section. If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for cell height.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 066
Layout Dimensions

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard and transformer integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent sections.
ii
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1
2
3.00
(76.2)
Conduit Area
12.00
(304.8)
Cell D
Floor Plan
Cell F
90.00
(2286.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Cell E
6
7
8
3.00
(76.2)
Conduit Area
3.00
(76.2)
IFS Type 3 Section
IFS Type 4 Section
Floor Plan
Type 4 Sections with Blank Steel Backpan Only
Table 21.6-2. IFS Type 3 and 4 Allowable Configurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type

Device
Voltage
Catalog
Rating AC Type
Section
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Width Dimensions (W)

Branch Allowable
Circuits Panelboard
Standard Optional
Range
27
400
15100
Depth Dimensions (D)
Section
Height
Standard
Optional
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
IFS Type 3 Section
10
D
or
E
11
Pow-R-Line 1a
Pow-R-Line 2a
12
Blank Steel
Backpan
240
MLO

Breaker 225
27
480Y/277
MLO
400
15100

Breaker 225
None
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
20 (508.0)
30 (762.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
13
IFS Type 4 Section
14
15

16
17

18
Blank Steel
Backpan
None
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Pow-R-Line 3E panelboard available. Contact Eaton for details.

Possible uses: HVAC, dimming and contactors. Contact Eaton for details.
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service
equipment label and surge protective device (SPD).
If panel sizing is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will fit in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section. If it is
60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for cell height.
Optional hinged panelboard door available on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide structures.
Galvanized steel backpan provided for customer specified equipment. Contact Eaton for requirements and details.
19
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.6-5
Sheet 21 067
Layout Dimensions
Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard and transformer integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent sections.
ii
1
Cell I
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Cell G
90.00
(2286.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Cell H
IFS Type 5 Section
IFS Type 6 Section
Floor Plan Type 5 Section

with Blank Space in Cell H
No Bottom Entry Conduit
Space with Transformer
in Cell H or I (Type 5 or 6)
5
6
Table 21.6-3. IFS Type 5 Allowable Configurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes

Branch Allowable
Circuits Panelboard
Standard Optional
Range
MLO
Breaker
MLO
Breaker
None
400
225
400
225
15100
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
15100
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
24 (609.6)
90 (2286.0)
MLO
225
15100
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)

Device
Voltage
Catalog
Rating AC Type
Section
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type
IFS Type 5 Section

G
Pow-R-Line 1a
27
240
Pow-R-Line 2a
27
480Y/277
Blank Steel
Backpan
Pow-RCommand
28
240,
480Y/277

90 (2286.0)

Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, hinged
panelboard door on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide sections, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD).
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Note: Select one Panelboard Type or one Blank Steel Backpan and either one Transformer or one Blank Space per Cell.
14
Table 21.6-4. IFS Type 5 and 6 General Purpose Dry-Type Distribution TransformersDimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type
Reference Temper- Windings

ature
Catalog
Rise
Section
kVA
Range
Full Cap Taps
Allowable
Width
Modifications Dimensions (W)
FCAN
FCBN
42.5%
42.5%
42.5%
42.5%
22.5%
22.5%
22.5%
22.5%
Depth
Dimensions (D)
Section
Height
Standard
Optional
Standard Optional
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 90 (2286.0)

36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0)
N/A
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 90 (2286.0)

36 (914.4)
15
IFS Type 5 Section

19
H DT-3
Transformer

TP1, 480:
208Y/
120 Vac
Blank Steel
Backpan
150C
Only
Aluminum 1545
75
112.5
150
None

IFS Type 6 Section

I

19
DT-3
Transformer
TP1, 480:
208Y/
120 Vac
150C Aluminum 225

300
42.5%
42.5%
22.5%
22.5%

36 (914.4) N/A
45 (1143.0) N/A
Copper windings, 115C, 80C, K-Factor, low sound are available options but may change dimensions.
Either one F-Frame or K-Frame circuit breaker can be included in any transformer section to be used as a disconnect.
Contact Eaton for other Temperature Rise Transformers and Specials.
Note: 480:208Y/120 Vac three-phase or 480:120/240 Vac single-phase.
CA08104001E
30 (762.0) N/A
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 068
Layout Dimensions
i
ii

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to Panelboard Cell J.
Distribution Chassis in Cell K may be field wired or wired from an adjacent section. Standard features include lockable trim
doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
W
3.00
(76.2)
2
3
90.00
(2286.0)
286.0
3.00
(76.2)
Cell J
12.00
(304.8)
Conduit Area
Floor Plan
22X
Distribution
Chassis
Cell K
90.00
(2286.0)
286.0
22X
Distribution
Chassis
Cell K
Cell J
3.00
(76.2)
IFS Type 7 Section
IFS Type 8 Section
Table 21.6-5. IFS Type 7 and 8 Sections Allowable Configurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type
10

Catalog
Voltage
Device
Section
Rating AC Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch Allowable
Circuits Panelboard
Standard Optional
Range
400
15100
26 (660.4)
15100
Section
Height
Standard
Optional
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
IFS Types 7 and 8 Sections
11
J
12
Pow-R-Line 1a 27
MLO
Breaker 225
Pow-R-Line 2a 27
13
240
480Y/277
MLO
400
Breaker 225
Pow-RCommand
28
240,
480Y/277
Pow-R-Line C
Switchboard
Chassis
480Y/277
MLO
225
15100
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
MLO
800
15600
26 (660.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
15600
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
14
K
15
MLO or 1200
Breaker
16
17

18
19
Breaker 600


Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged panelboard door on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide
sections, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD).
If panel sizing main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will fit in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section.
If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton to see if it will fit.
Reference Page 21.1-11 for selection criteria.
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details.
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.6-7
Sheet 21 069
Layout Dimensions

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s). Standard features include
lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
i
ii
Cell
L
Cell
L
1
2
3
Floor Plan Type 9 Section
There is no Bottom Entry
Conduit Space with
Transformer in Cell M
4
5
Cell M
6
IFS Type 9 Section
Figure 21.6-8. Type 9 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 21.6-6. IFS Type 9 Section Panelboard Over Dry-Type Transformer (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm )
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type

Catalog
Voltage
Device
Section
Rating AC Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch Allowable
Circuits Panelboard
Standard Optional
Range
225
15100
36 (914.4)
15100
36 (914.4)
15100
26 (660.4)

Standard
Optional
Section
Height
Pow-R-Line 1a 27
240
Pow-R-Line 2a 27
480Y/277
MLO
Pow-RCommand
240,
480Y/277
MLO

MLO
Breaker 400
9
10
IFS Type 9 Section

L
225
45 (1143.0)
Breaker 400
27
225
45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6)
45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)

Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers.
kVA
Range
Full Cap Taps
12
13
14
15
Table 21.6-7. IFS Type 9 Section General Purpose Dry-Type Distribution TransformersDimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Transformer Reference Temper- Windings
ature
Cell Type
Catalog
Rise
Section
11
FCAN
FCBN
Allowable
Modifications
Standard Optional
Aluminum 1575
42.5%
22.5%
36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 90 (2286.0)

36 (914.4)
112.5
42.5%
22.5%
36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
Depth Dimensions (D) Section

16
IFS Type 9 Section

M

19
DT-3
Transformer
TP-1
480: 208Y/
120 Vac
150C
Only
Contact Eaton for other Temperature Rise Transformers and Specials.

Copper windings, 115C, 80C, K-Factor, and low sound TP-1 are available options but may change dimensions.
17
90 (2286.0)
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 070
Layout Dimensions
i
ii

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to Panelboard Cell J.
Distribution Chassis in Cell K may be field wired or wired from an adjacent section. Standard features include lockable trim
doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
W
3.00
(76.2)
Cell
N
Cell
N
22X
Distribution
Chassis
Cell O
3
4
90.00
(2286.0)
6
7
12.00
(304.8)
Conduit Area
Floor Plan
Cell
N
22X
Distribution
Chassis
Cell O
Cell
N
W
IFS Type 10 Section
3.00
(76.2)
90.00
(2286.0)
3.00
(76.2)
W
IFS Type 11 Section
9
10
11
Table 21.6-8. IFS Type 10 and 11 Sections Allowable Configurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type

Catalog
Voltage
Device
Section
Rating AC Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch Allowable
Circuits Panelboard
Standard Optional
Range
400
15100

Optional
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
IFS Types 10 and 11 Sections

N
Pow-R-Line 1a 27
240
MLO
Breaker 225
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
12
Pow-R-Line 2a 27
13
14
15
16
480Y/277
MLO
400
15100
Breaker 225
Pow-RCommand
28
240,
480Y/277
Pow-R-Line C
Switchboard
Chassis
480Y/277
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
225
15100
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
MLO
800
15600
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
15600
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 600
MLO or 1200
Breaker
19
20

45 (1143.0)
MLO
17
18
Section
Height
Standard
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton when applicable.

Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged trim, service entrance label and surge
protective device (SPD).
60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton to see if it will fit.
See Page Page 21.1-11 reference information in Tab 21.
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.6-9
Sheet 21 071
Layout Dimensions

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s). Standard features include
lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
i
ii
W
3.00
(76.2)
Cell
P
Cell
P
D
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
Conduit Area
Floor Plan
Type 12 Section
Cell
P
Cell
P
5
6
IFS Type 12 Section
Figure 21.6-10. Type 12 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 21.6-9. IFS Type 12 Section Allowable Configurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard
Cell
Type

Catalog
Voltage
Device
Section
Rating AC Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch Allowable
Circuits Panelboard
Standard Optional
Range
400
15100
Section
Height
Standard
Optional
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 1a 27

240
MLO

Breaker 225
Pow-R-Line 2a 27
Pow-RCommand
13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
9
10
IFS Types 12 Section

P
480Y/277
MLO
400
36 (914.4)
15100

Breaker 225
28
240,
480Y/277
MLO
225
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
15100

45 (1143.0)
18 (457.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
11
12
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Reference Section 27. Contact Eaton when applicable.

Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged trim, service entrance label and surge
protective device (SPD).
60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for structure dimensions.
If any single-phase is selected as 400A or PRC, section minimum width is 45.00 inches (1143.0 mm).
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 072
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Generator Quick Connect Switchboard
October 2013
21.7-1
Sheet 21 073
General Description

Switchboard

Switchboard Section
General Description
Eatons Generator Quick Connect
switchboard is an engineered
switchboard assembly designed to
allow easy and quick connection of
a standby generator to your facilitys
service entrance switchboard.
Through inclusion of cam-type
receptacles, standard mechanical
lugs, a dedicated generator service
disconnect and a key interlock transfer
scheme, a facility can quickly be
switched to generator power. By
including the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard, a facility can be on
backup power without waiting on
the utility to disconnect service.
Product Benefits
Decrease utility dependency:
In power outages, especially those
that are widespread, the utility
company may take hours before
they are available to disconnect
service from a facility. By use of
the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard, a facility is equipped
with a means that allows switching
between utility feed and a generator
feed, without waiting for the utility
to disconnect service
Decrease chance of spoilage:
For those facilities that house
perishable goods that require
controlled environmental conditions
such as refrigeration, prolonged
power outages can cost hundreds
of thousands of dollars in spoilage.
By use of the Generator Quick
Connect switchboard, a facility
ensures that they can be back on
sustained power before spoilage
occurs, and without the necessity
of calling in expensive specialty
equipment. In addition to direct loss
of product, the result of spoilage can
have a negative affect on a facilitys
insurance, which can result in
additional long-term costs
Decrease chance of lost revenue:
Without a constant supply of
electricity, a facilitys revenue
generation capability grinds to a
halt. By use of the Generator Quick
Connect switchboard, a facilitys
operations can be sustained and
downtime can be reduced
Decrease chance of liability:
Among the risks to a facility during
a power outage is the injury of
patrons due to loss of lighting. By
use of the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard, a facilitys lighting
can be sustained, allowing for the
safety of patrons
Decrease chance of loss

and damage: During a sustained
power outage, a facility may
become susceptible to loss due to
theft, damage and other malicious
acts. By use of the Generator Quick
Connect Switchboard, a facility can
better protect itself from these
losses and damages.
Quick and readily available
connection: In facilities that are not
equipped for a backup generator,
connection can demand field
modification of existing switchboard
structures, and/or even modification
of the facilitys physical structure.
By use of the Generator Quick
Connect Switchboard, the time
required for these connections
can be greatly reduced.
Construction Specifications
Eatons Generator Quick Connect
switchboard is built to UL 891 listed
Pow-R-Line C switchboard standards.
As such, the sizing rules of standard
switchboards apply, and all
modifications for Pow-R-Line C
switchboards are available.
For sizing information and available
modifications, consult Eaton.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Generator Quick Connect Switchboard
October 2013
Sheet 21 074
General Description
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
As the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard is based on the brand
Pow-R-Line C switchboard, it can
be applied in both new and retrofit
applications.
The Generator Quick Connect

switchboard is based on the
Pow-R-Line C switchboard construction.
However, as part of the larger assembly,
there are several sub-assemblies that
provide greater function and benefit
to facilities. These components are
described in the following and are
illustrated in the photos to the right.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
Ampere
Rating
Significant Components
and Assemblies
17
Table 21.7-1. Generator Quick Connect Dimensions and kW Ratings (Rated up to 480V)
Generator disconnect: The

generator service disconnect is a
UL listed circuit breaker with a key
interlock in combination with one
mounted on the main service
disconnect. It can include ground
fault protection, shunt trips, alarms,
single-phase protection and
auxiliary contacts
Cam-type receptacle sub-assembly:
This sub-assembly is designed to
work with the quick connects that
are commonly found on portable
generator cables. This sub-assembly
additionally includes color coding to
industry standards for proper and
easy phase identification, assuming
proper installation
Permanent operation instructions:
Affixed to each Generator Quick
Connect switchboard is a set of
simple instructions for operation.
With these instructions, any
generator technicians can
operate the mechanisms included
in the assembly
Standard mechanical lugs:
In addition to the cam-type
receptacles, a set of standard
mechanical lugs is provided with
the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard to allow an alternate
method of connecting generator
cables
Bus connection sub-assembly:
All connection methods described
previously are connected together
using only factory stamped and bent
bus. Bus connection, as opposed to
cable, provides a more robust and
smaller construction
Number of
Structures
kW (Max.) Rating
80% Rated
Generator
Disconnect
Breaker
100% Rated
Generator
Disconnect
Breaker
Depth
Structure
Width
Total
Width
480V
208V
480V
208V
400
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
213
92
266
115
600
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
319
138
399
173
800
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
425
184
531
230
1200
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
638
276
797
345
1600
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
850
368
1063
461
2000
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
1063
461
1329
576
2500
30.00
(762.0)
30.00 & 30.00

(762.0 & 762.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
1329
576
1661
720
3000
30.00
(762.0)
30.00 & 30.00

(914.4 & 914.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
N/A
N/A
1993
864

65 kAIC standard bus bracing.

Type 3R enclosures shall be equipped with a 13.00-inch (330.2 mm) front structure extension.
Calculated using the following: kW (max.) = [(V*A*1.73*PF)/1000]*(Breaker Rating) with PF
(power factor) equalling 0.8.
For applications above 3000A, contact Eaton.
Cam-Type Receptacle Sub-Assembly

Typical (1200A) Generator
Quick Connect Switchboard
Significant Components an Assemblies (Typical)
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.8-1
Sheet 21 075
General Description
Construction and
Eatons Roll-Up Generator Termination
Boxes (RUGTB) are designed as an
intermediate termination cabinet
between a temporary, portable, roll-up
generator and the facility being served
by the portable generator. The RUGTB
is designed for permanent installation
and is secured to a concrete pad
with bolts.
The RUGTB includes line terminations
for the temporary connection of the
portable generator and permanent
connections on the load side to the
secondary disconnect in the facility
which is interlocked with the main
overcurrent device in a manner that
ensures that only one, either the
service main or the generator main,
can be energized at any one time.
The conductors and conduits must
be sized and suitable for carrying the
load ratings marked on the equipment
per the National Electrical Code.
Enclosure
The enclosure is free-standing with
feet on the bottom providing access to
the cable connections for temporary
roll-up generator terminations. The
enclosure is made from code gauge
steel and suitable for either outdoor or
indoor installation (Type 3R construction). The enclosure is powder coat
painted ANSI 61 grey. Each enclosure
houses line and load phase and neutral
connections. Access is provided at the
bottom of the enclosure for both the
temporary connections to the roll-up
generator and permanent connections
to the facilitys generator overcurrent
disconnecting means. The permanent
connection section at the bottom of
the enclosure contains a fixed mounting plate. The temporary generator
connection to the RUGTB contains a
cover that allows the enclosure to be
sealed once the temporary connections
have been removed.
The enclosure uses feet that raise

the termination compartment off the
finished grade by 18 inches. Enclosure
feet have provisions for anchoring.
Anchor bolts used to secure the RUGTB
shall be encased in a concrete pad by
the installer in a manner that is suitable
as a permanent base for the RUGTB.
A template for anchor bolt installation
is available from the manufacturer.
The enclosure contains a sturdy,
lockable, hinged door for access to the
termination compartment by qualified
personnel as described in NFPA 70E
and the National Electrical Code.
Feeder conductor entry is provided in
the bottom of the enclosure for the line
side (generator). Removable bottom
plate for connections to the line side
(connection from the generator) is
available on either the right or left side
and must be specified on order. The
permanent load connections (feeding
generator disconnect inside the facility)
may exit the enclosure either from the
bottom or the back of the enclosure.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Standards and Ratings

UL 1773termination boxes
600 Vac maximum
Ampere ratings: 800, 1200, 1600,
2000 and 2500
Assembly short-circuit rating:
35,000A rms symmetrical
Marked Suitable for use on the line
side of service equipment per UL 1773
10
11
Standard Features
12
Type 3R enclosure standard

Line and load side mechanical alloy
set screw lugs
Hinged bottom trap door for line
conductors
36.00-inch (914.4 mm) width
[45.00 inches (1143.0 mm) wide
with 2 hole compression lugs]
13
14
15
Optional Features
Compression lugs (line and load)
1 hole Anderson
2 hole Burndy (requires
45.00-inch (1143.0 mm)
wide enclosure)
Compression lug provisions line
and load [0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolt,
1.75-inch (44.5 mm) spacing]
Optional 45.00-inch (1143.0 mm)
width
16
17
18
19
20
RUGTB Free-Standing Enclosure
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 076
General Description
Technical Data
Table 21.8-1. Roll-Up Generator Termination Box Available Lugs

Ampere
Rating
Available Line and Load Connections

Select One Line and One Load by Ampacity
Al/Cu Mechanical Lugs
ii
1
2
3
800
(3) 4/0500 kcmil or

(2) 3/0750 kcmil
1200
(4) 4/0500 kcmil or

(3) 3/0750 kcmil
1600
(5) 4/0500 kcmil or

(4) 3/0750 kcmil
2000
(6) 4/0500 kcmil or

(5) 3/0750 kcmil
2500
(8) 4/0500 kcmil or

(7) 3/0750 kcmil
2 Hole Cu Only Compression Lugs Brundy OnlyFactory Installed
4
5
800
(3) 350 kcmil or

(3) 400 kcmil
1200
(4) 500 kcmil or

(4) 600 kcmil or
(3) 750 kcmil
1600
(6) 500 kcmil or

(5) 600 kcmil or
(5) 750 kcmil
2000
(7) 500 kcmil or

(6) 600 kcmil or
(6) 750 kcmil
2500
(9) 500 kcmil or

(8) 600 kcmil or
(7) 750 kcmil
6
7
Figure 21.8-1. Bottom View Left Line (Generator) Connection
1 Hole Compression Provisions Only (Lugs Supplied by Others)
9
10
12
13
15
16
17
3provisions / phase
4provisions / phase
1600
5provisions / phase
2000
6provisions / phase
2500
7provisions / phase
2 Hole Compression Provisions Only (Lugs Supplied by Others)
11
14
800
1200
800
3provisions / phase
1200
4provisions / phase
1600
5provisions / phase
2000
6provisions / phase
2500
7provisions / phase
Figure 21.8-2. Front Bus Arrangement
Provisions only. Compression/crimp lugs supplied by installer.
Note: Wire bending space provided based on the Roll-up

Generator Termination Box size and number of conductors and
meets requirements of UL and the National Electrical Code.
Terminations
All Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes contain a
termination/lug landing for three phases and neutral suitable
for copper or aluminum conductors. Mechanical box lugs
are supplied standard. The number and size of mechanical
box lug connectors are determined by the ampacity of
the RUGTB ordered. Optional lug offering includes a
compression lug pad (compression lugs supplied by others).
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Multipoint Submetering
October 2013
21.9-1
Sheet 21 077
PRL MPM / PRC7500 Multipoint Submetering
PRL MPM / PRC7500

Benefits
When you need accurate information

of consumed energy for monthly
invoicing statements, use Eatons
integrated multipoint metering solution.
Using multipoint metering for utility
allocation maximizes revenue by
effectively measuring, allocating
and recovering utility expenditures.
The multipoint metering solution
can interface with a third-party utility
allocation service. The multipoint
metering solution offers to:
Factory-wired system
Integrated display
Saves floor space
Lower installed cost
Network compatible
Tenant sub-billing
UL Listed
Integral Web-based and third-party
software solutions available
i
ii
1
2
3
Purchase energy at bulk rates

while charging consumer rates
Capitalize on naturally variable
tenant loads by purchasing
energy at lower coinciding load
Capture and allocate common
area maintenance cost
Promote tenant retention with
accurate and defensible billing
Eliminate subsidization of
other tenants
4
5
6
7
PRL MPM Multipoint Submetering

PRL MPM Submetering
General Description
Allocation of energy consumption in

a residential or commercial application
is a tremendous task for a property
owner, management firm or electrical
energy manager. To assist in allocation
or direct billing of consumed energy,
use Eatons PRL MPM or PRC7500
low cost solutions. The PRL MPM /
PRC7500 provides a cost-effective
energy tabulation system for residential
or commercial metering installations.
These installations can include:
10
11
Factory Assembled and Wired Meters
12
13
High-rise buildings
Universities and campuses
Office buildings
complexes
Shopping malls
Airports
System commissioning is required
and priced separately
14
15
16
PRL MPMCTs are Factory-Mounted
and Wired to Meter
PRL MPM Submetering Using the Pow-R-Line C Switchboard 50X Chassis with
Eaton Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter and Current Sensors
Local display and network capable

devices are available as optional
components.
See Tab 3, Section 3.1 Metering for
more information.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 078
PRC7500 Multipoint Submetering
The MiniCloset-5 has a display

incorporated into the meter. A shorting
terminal block is provided to connect
between the MiniCloset-5 and the
current transformers. An optional
component for collecting data from
the MiniCloset-5 meters is the Scan
Transponder-5 (mounted separately)
(13.50 H x 8.50 W x 4.50 D in inches)
(342.9 H x 215.9 W x 114.3 D in mm).
Quadlogic Meter
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PRC7500CTs are Factory-Mounted
and Wired to Meter (Cable Shown is
Customer Installed)
9
10
PRC7500 Multipoint Submetering Using the Pow-R-Line C Switchboard 50X Chassis

with Quadlogic MiniCloset-5 Meter and Current Transformers
11
12
13
14
15
16
Utility
Master
Meter
17
QLC
QLC
Meter
Meter
Switch 1
Disconnect
Device
18
QLC
Utility Transformer
Scan Transponder
19
20
21
Utility Service
QLC
QLC
Meter
Meter
QLC
QLC
QLC
Meter
Meter
Meter
Utility Transformer
Switch 2
Switch 3
Note:
1) There should be no more than one transformer between the
Scan Transponder and the Quadlogic Meter.
2) Voltage connection wires to the Scan Transponder should
be at least 12 AWG.
3) Voltage connection run between the Scan Transponder and
the voltage tap should be under 20 feet (6.1m).
4) If the disconnect switch is fused, use only FAST ACTING FUSES.
Figure 21.9-1. Typical System Layout for PRC7500 with Multiple Metered Locations
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.9-3
Sheet 21 079
Layout Guide
i
Pow-R-Line MPM
ii
PRC7500
Reference Table 21.1-11 for

Main Lugs Only and
Figure 21.1-9 for Main Breakers
ED, EDH, EDC,

EDB, EDS
Trip Range (150225A)
DK, KDB, KD
HKD, KDC
Trip Range (70400A)
15X
2X
2-Pole
2-Pole
2X
3X
3-Pole
3-Pole
3X
3X
2-Pole
2-Pole
4X
5X
3-Pole
3-Pole
5X
4X 2P
6X 3P
4X 2P
6X 3P
2- or 3-Pole
2- & 3-Pole
Load
EHD
FDB
FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
Trip Range (15125A)
11X
Line
Bucket for Meter(s)

Maximum (1) PXMPM Meter
Pow-R-Line MPM
PXMPM Multipoint Meter
or
PRC7500
MiniCloset-5
EHD (100A Max.)

FDB (150A Max.)
(225A Frame)
3
4
ED, EDH, EDC,

EDB, EDS (225A Frame)
6X 2P
8X 3P
DK, KDB, KD (400A Frame)

HKD, KDC (400A)
6X 2P
8X 3P
2- & 3-Pole
Bucket for Meter(s)

Maximum (2) MC-5 Meters
Figure 21.9-2. PRL MPM / PRC7500 Layout Guide for Current Sensor and Current Transformer SizingStandard Pow-R-Line C Switchboard
Construction Applies
Note: For all other breaker frames and

amperages, consult factory for X
space sizing.
Note: Consult Section 21.1 for Pow-R-Line C

structure configuration.
Table 21.9-1. PRL MPM and PRC7500 Breaker Frames

Breaker
Type
Maximum Number Current Sensor Pow-R-Line MPM

PRC7500
Trip
of Poles (100 mA) I.D.
X
Minimum Structure
X
Minimum Structure
Amperes
in Inches
Space Width in Inches (mm) Space Width in Inches (mm)
EHD
EHD
100
100
2
3
0.53
2X
3X
36.00 (914.4)
2X
3X
36.00 (914.4)
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
125
125
2
3
0.53
2X
3X
36.00 (914.4)
4X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC

225
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, 225
FDCE
2
3
1.12
3X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
4X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
DK, KD, HKD, KDC

DK, KD, HKD, KDC
2
3
1.74
4X
6X
400
400
Single
36.00
(914.4)
Twin
51.00
(1295.4)
6X
8X
Single
36.00
(914.4)
Twin
51.00
(1295.4)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 080
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.10-1
Sheet 21 081
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Types WWCMS (EUSERC Only) and WCMS
Construction and Application

Considerations
Eatons Pow-R-Line C commercial

metering switchboards incorporate
design concepts to fit the needs for
reliable multiple circuit distribution
and metering in commercial
applications while retaining
maximum standardization, safety
and convenience.
ii
Type WWCMS metering switchboards

provide incoming service and tenant
metering arrangements that comply
with EUSERC utility requirements.
1
2
Type WCMS metering switchboards

meet the standard requirements
for service and tenant metering
arrangements for all utility locations
other than EUSERC service areas.
Type WCMS may be either hot or
cold sequenced.
5
6
7
Enclosure
The commercial metering
switchboards are made up of
one or more sections bolted together
to form a 90.00-inch (2286.0 mm)
high, freestanding, front-access
grounded enclosure. Each section
uses conventional distribution
switchboard construction consisting
of formed vertical posts and angle
cross members for a rigid selfsupporting framework to support the
bussing, devices and covers. Code
gauge steel covers for the rear, side
and front are formed and sectionalized
for easy removal and handling. Covers
on all unmetered compartments are
provided with sealing screws or studs.
All exterior surfaces are finished inside
and out with a durable powder coat
ANSI 61 light gray finish over a rust
resistant primer.
The switchboards are available
in NEMA Type 1 construction for
indoor use or NEMA Type 3R for
outdoor applications.
Bus Bar System

The standard main bus in the service
section and the horizontal cross bus
is tin-plated aluminum with ratings
from 4004000A. Both copper and
silver-plated copper bus are available
as options.
Main bus and sub-main buses meet UL
and NEMA standards for temperature
rise on all metering switchboards.
Special bus densities can be provided
to meet specific needs.
CA08104001E
Utility Approved Termination Compartment
Service and cross buses are supported

by high-strength glass-reinforced
polyester insulating supports. Splice
connections between sections are
easily made with bus tie links.
Ground bus is provided as standard on
all switchboards.
Standard bus and connectors on all
switchboards are rated for use on
systems capable of producing up to
65,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit
current at the incoming terminals.
Increased bus short-circuit ratings
equal to that of the connected
switchboard devices, up to 200,000A
rms symmetrical, are available in all
Pow-R-Line C switchboards. UL labeled
switchboard sections are marked with
their applicable short-circuit rating,
taking into account the short-circuit
capability of the power source to which
they are to be connected.
Transitions
Transition structures are required for
special switchboard configurations
such as L or U shaped lineups. In
some applications, an extra structure
complete with connections is required;
in others, where switchboard depth
and space permit, only the connection
conductors are required. (Refer to
factory for these applications.)
Auxiliary Structures
These are normally mounted adjacent
to service structures or distribution
structures and used where incoming
service or feeder conductors require
additional space or facilities not
included in the standard switchboard,
such as the following two applications.
1. Mounted adjacent to a topconnected service structure and
used as a cable pull structure
where service conductors are
brought underground. Auxiliary
structures are the same depth and
height as the service structure and
are wide enough to accommodate
the incoming cables.
2. Mounted adjacent to a service
structure and used as a bus transition compartment for running riser
bus from the line side of the service
structure up to a top incoming
busway connection. Auxiliary
structures are the same depth
and height as service structures.
Busway connections to
switchboard sections include
cutout and drilling in the top of the
switchboard with riser connections
from the switchboard device or
bus, up to the point where the
busway enters the switchboard.
In addition to the above applications,
auxiliary structures may be mounted
adjacent to a distribution structure and
used to route feeder cables out the top
of the lineup.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
21.10-2
October 2013
Sheet 21 082
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Switchboards Used as Service Equipment

Service equipment is the electrical
equipment that constitutes the main
control and means of power cutoff
for the electric service (normally
power company supply) brought
into the building.
Where switchboards are to be used
as service equipment, certain NEC
and UL requirements apply that
necessitate modifications not normally
supplied in switchboards.
Following is a summary of the
requirements that are pertinent to
the ordering of a switchboard for
service equipment:
A. A switchboard with main lugs
only (no main disconnect) must be
designed so that all circuits in the
switchboard can be disconnected
from the supply source by the
operation of no more than six operating handles (breaker or switch).
Switchboard equipped with main
disconnect devices are not subject to the above six disconnect
limitation, as the entire board can
be de-energized with the main
disconnect device.
Ground fault protection of equipment shall be provided for solidly
grounded wye electrical services
of more than 150V to ground, but
not exceeding 600V phase-tophase for each service disconnecting means rated 1000A or more.
B. For testing purposes, means are
also required to disconnect the
switchboard neutral bus from the
ground service neutral conductor
(single-phase three-wire, threephase four-wire systems). To
comply with this requirement, a
removable link (solid bar) is provided in the switchboard neutral
bus. This link is generally located
near the point where the main
feeders enter the switchboard or
in the area of the main disconnect
device where one is provided.
Where switchboards are to be used for

service equipment, it should be clearly
indicated in requests for quotations,
and noted on the order.
Requirements and Labeling
The basic requirement for obtaining
an Underwriters Laboratories label
on a switchboard, is that all the
compartment devices (breakers,
switches, and the like) in the
switchboard assembly are UL listed.
In addition, the switchboard must
comply with all applicable provisions
of UL 891.
Todays modern electrical systems
require that switchboards offer a wide
selection of electrical devices, many
of which do not fall within the scope
of UL listed devices. Therefore, the
conditions under which a switchboard
may be labeled are limited.
Listed below are several important
guidelines for consideration when
an Underwriters Laboratories label
is specified:
1. Underwriters Laboratories
nameplates, where applicable,
are supplied for each vertical
structure rather than one common
nameplate for the complete
switchboard lineup. Where all
of the component devices in the
switchboard are UL listed and all
applicable provisions UL 891 are
met, each of the vertical structures
that make up the switchboard may
be labeled.
Incoming Service
The incoming service section is
similar in design and arrangement to
standard distribution switchboards.
The incoming service can be located on
either end of the lineup or in the center.
Main lugs only (4004000A) can be
provided with an appropriate pull
section for cable entry and termination.
A variety of main service protective
devices are also available. The standard
devices include insulated-case circuit
breakers up to 4000A, molded-case
circuit breakers (4002500A), fusible
switches (4001200A) and bolted
pressure switches (8004000A).
Ground fault protection is available
to meet code requirements and a
service entrance label can be provided
when specified. Service sections can
also include power company main
service metering provisions, if
required, and user instrumentation
or monitoring devices.
Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers rated 800A and below
have thermal-magnetic trip devices
with optional electronic trip units.
Breakers 1200A and larger have
electronic trip units as standard.
Optional electronic trip units are
available rated 800A, offering
increased short-time function
adjustability and integral ground
fault protection.
2. Individual vertical structures of

a switchboard may be labeled
where they comply with Underwriters Laboratories requirements
although other vertical structures
in the same switchboard lineup
may not meet the UL standards,
and will not be labeled.
3. All Pow-R-Line C metering
switchboards are UL labeled if all
mounted devices are UL listed.
To further comply with NEC and

UL requirements, a separate
bonding strap is connected from
the neutral bus to the switchboard
frame. This bonding connection
is located on the line side of the
removable neutral link, maintaining a service ground to the switchboard frame when the test link
is removed.
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.10-3
Sheet 21 083
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Type WWCMS (EUSERC Only)

Fusible Switches
Meter Socket
Circuits Over 200A
These switches incorporate a quickmake, quick-break mechanism housed

in individual enclosures. The switches
rated 4001200A are provided in single
unit construction and applied as
individually mounted main devices.
Shunt trips are available for use
with ground fault protection.
The meter socket is a ring type device

rated 200A continuous for selfcontained metering applications. The
assembly includes a bypass test block
in a fully bussed combination to meet
EUSERC standard requirements.
Switches rated 400 and 600A are

designed for use with Class R fuses.
They can be provided with either
Class J or T fuse provisions. The
800 and 1200A units have provisions
for Class L fuses.
Tenant disconnects can be moldedcase circuit breakers, fusible pullout

devices (for Class T fuses) or fusible
switches arranged for Class R fusing.
Short-circuit ratings of the disconnect/
meter socket assembly are established
based on UL peak let-through currents
using self-contained meter sockets.
Requirements for tenant metered

circuits over 200A can be met using
separate sections with appropriate
disconnect devices installed below
a current transformer/metering
compartment. The metering
compartment constructed to EUSERC
standards provides mounting
provisions for the utility-furnished
current transformers that can be
connected to a transformer rated
meter socket provided on the sealable
compartment door.
Bolted Pressure Switches

Bolted pressure switches use a quickacting stored energy mechanism with
bolted pressure force on the contacts
in the closed position.
Disconnect
Available in ratings of 8004000A,

the switches can be provided as a
manually operated device or with an
electric trip mechanism for use with
ground fault protection equipment.
Single disconnects can include

molded-case circuit breakers, fusible
switches or bolted pressure switches.
For multiple feeder applications,
a 22X distribution chassis with breakers or fusible switches can
be provided in combination with
the metering compartment. The standard arrangement is for hot sequence
metering.
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
All bolted pressure switches have

provisions for Class L current limiting
fuses. The units are 100% rated
devices.
Tenant Metering Sections
10
Type WWCMS for EUSERC

Service Areas
11
Tenant metering sections provide

arrangements for grouping individual
tenant feeder circuits rated 200A or
less. Each circuit consists of a utility
approved meter socket and an
appropriate disconnect device.
12
Meter Socket Sealable Cover Arrangement
13
These sections contain chassis

mounted, factory assembled and
wired meter sockets and disconnects
arranged for hot sequence metering
(meter socket ahead of the tenant
disconnect). The switchboards are
shipped ready for connection of the
tenant feeder cables and installation
of the utility furnished watthour meter.
Sealable covers are provided to
comply with utility standard
requirements.
14
The WWCMS hot sequence metering

sections are constructed for bottom
exit of the tenant feeder cables. If
top exit of the cables is required, an
optional rear barrier wireway can be
provided in the back of the metering
section or a load side cable pull
section can be added to the lineup.
18
15
16
17
19
20
Assembly Includes Meter Socket and Test Block per
EUSERC Requirements Prewired to Tenant Disconnect
CA08104001E
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 084
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Type WCMS (Non-EUSERC)
Tenant Metering Sections

Type WCMS
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Tenant metering sections provide

arrangements for grouping individual
tenant feeder circuits rated 200A or
less. Each circuit consists of a utilityapproved meter socket and an
appropriate disconnect device.
These sections contain factory
assembled and wired meter sockets
and disconnects that can be arranged
for hot sequence metering (meter
socket ahead of the tenant disconnect)
or cold sequence metering (disconnect
ahead of the meter socket). The
switchboards are shipped ready for
connection of the tenant feeder cables
and installation of the utility-furnished
watthour meter.
The WCMS metering sections are
constructed for bottom exit of the
tenant feeder cables. If top exit of the
cables is required, an optional rear
barriered wireway can be provided in
the back of the metering section or a
load side cable pull section can be
added to the lineup.
provisions for the utility or ownerfurnished current transformers that

can be connected to a transformer
rated meter socket. The socket can
optionally be provided on the
switchboard or can be furnished and
installed separately by others. Single
disconnects can include molded-case
circuit breakers, fusible switches or
bolted pressure switches, and can be
arranged for hot or cold sequence
metering. For multiple feeder
applications, a 22X distribution chassis
with breakers or fusible switches can
be provided in combination with the
metering compartment. The standard
arrangement for multiple feeders is for
hot sequence metering.
Two types of 400A self-contained
meter sockets are available. A single
circuit 400A (320A continuous) rated
self-contained meter socket with
manual lever bypass is available
with either a breaker or fusible switch
tenant main. Also available is a 400A
continuous rated self-contained meter
socket without bypass, which uses
either a breaker or fusible switch
tenant main.
Barriered Socket Construction

with Manual Lever Bypass
Meter Socket
The meter socket is a ringless type
device rated 200A continuous for selfcontained metering applications. All
sockets include a manual lever bypass
device. The standard meter socket is
the heavy-duty Type HQ series. Type
HB sockets are also available.
Each meter socket is provided with
an individual screwless cover that
includes a sealing bracket with
provisions for barrel locks, sealing
wire or sealing bands. Individual
internal barriers are provided around
each socket.
Disconnect
Tenant disconnects can be moldedcase circuit breakers, fusible pullout
devices (for Class T fuses) or fusible
switches arranged for Class R fusing.
Short-circuit ratings of the disconnect/
meter socket assembly are established
based on UL peak let-through currents
using self-contained meter sockets.
Circuits Over 200A

Requirements for tenant metered
circuits over 200A can be met using
separate sections with appropriate
disconnect devices installed in
combination with a current
transformer/metering compartment.
The utility-approved metering
compartment provides mounting
Typical 200A 7 Jaw Sockets with Manual Lever Bypass Connected

to Circuit Breaker Disconnects in Hot Sequence Arrangement
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.10-5
Sheet 21 085
Disconnect Selection and Ratings
Main and Large Feeder Disconnects
Meter Section Tenant Main Disconnects
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
rms Symmetrical Amperes
240V
400
600
480V
240
Ampere
Rating
50100
Breaker
Type
EHD
18,000
25,000
65,000
35,000
FD, FDE
HKD
100,000
65,000
HFD, HFDE
65,000
KDC
200,000
100,000
125200
ED
65,000
400
KD
LGE
65,000
35,000
LGH
100,000
65,000
LD
65,000
35,000
HLD
100,000
65,000
LDC, LGC
200,000
100,000
800
MDL
65,000
50,000
8001200
ND
65,000
35,000
HND
100,000
65,000
NDC
200,000
100,000
RD
125,000
65,000
16002500
Maximum
Voltage
480Y/277
KDC
50,000
70100
EHD
14,000
70200
HFD, HFDE
35,000
FDC
50,000
KDC
25,000
400
Short-circuit rating based on peak let-through of 30,000A using

self-contained meter sockets per UL 414. Standard device shortcircuit rating applies when used with transformer rated sockets.
For use with 400A self-contained socket in single section construction
for Type WCMS lineups only.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 21.10-6. Fusible Pullout Devices

Table 21.10-2. Bolted Pressure Switches
Switch
Rating
Ampere
8004000
Fuse
UL
Class
Description Interrupting Rating

Current
Limiting
Switch
Rating
Ampere
Fuse
UL
Class

100 or 200
Current
Limiting
200,000
200,000

Table 21.10-3. Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit BreakerMain
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
240V
480V
800
1600
2000
SB
SB
SB
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
3000
4000
SB
SB
65,000
130,000
65,000
85,000
Switch
Rating
Ampere
Fuse
UL
Class

10
100 or 200
Current
Limiting
11
400600
12
Fuse
UL
Class

14
Current
Limiting
15
J
8001200
200,000
13

Switch
Rating
Ampere
200,000
200,000
200,000
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 086
Wire and Cable Terminals
Table 21.10-8. Standard Incoming

Terminals (MLO)
Ampere
Rating
ii
1
2
3
800
1600
2000
(3) #2-500 kcmil

(5) #2-500 kcmil
(6) #2-500 kcmil
1200
1600
2000
(4) #2-500 kcmil

(5) #2-500 kcmil
(6) #2-500 kcmil
SB
SB
3000
4000
(8) #2-500 kcmil

(11) #2-500 kcmil
2500
3000
4000
(7) #2-500 kcmil

(8) #2-500 kcmil
(11) #2-500 kcmil
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
All terminal sizes are based on wire

ampacities corresponding to those shown
in NEC Table 310.16 under the 75C
insulation columns (75C wire). The use of
smaller size (in circular mils) regardless of
insulation temperature rating is not permitted without voiding UL labels on devices
and equipment.

Breaker
Type
Optional Rear Barriered Wireway for Tenant

Metering Sections Provides Access for
Top Exit of Tenant Feeder Circuits
Standard Switchboard Terminals

Wire and cable terminals supplied
on switchboard mounted devices for
making up incoming or outgoing cable
connections are of the mechanical
screw clamp pressure type.
All standard terminals are suitable for
use with either aluminum or copper
cable except as noted in the table.
Panel-mounted devices use the
terminal provided as standard for
and furnished with that device.
ampacities corresponding to those
shown in NEC Table 310.16 under the
75C insulation columns (75C wire).
The use of smaller size (in circular
mills) regardless of insulation
temperature rating is not permitted
without voiding UL labels on devices
and equipment.
Wire
Range
SB
SB
SB
Ampere
Rating
(2) #2-500 kcmil

(2) #2-500 kcmil
(3) #2-500 kcmil
Breaker
Type
400
600
800
Wire
Range
Table 21.10-10. Magnum SB Insulated-Case

Circuit Breakers
Ampere
Rating
Wire
Range
EDB, EDS, ED,

EDH, EDC
125-225
#4-4/0 or
#6-300 kcmil
EHD, FDB, FDE

FD, HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
15-100
125-225
#14-1/0
#4-4/0 or
#6-300 kcmil
KD, KDB,
HKD, KDC
100-225
250-350
400
(1) #3-350 kcmil

(1) 250-500 kcmil
(2) 3/0-250 kcmil
or
(1) 3/0-500 kcmil
LGE, LGH, LD,

HLD, LDC, LGC
300-500
600
(2) 250-300 kcmil

(2) 400-500 kcmil
MDL
400-600
700-800
(2) #1-500 kcmil

(2) 3/0-400 kcmil
ND, HND,
NDC
800-1000
1200
(3) 3/0-400 kcmil

(4) 4/0-500 kcmil
RD
1600
2000
2500
(5) #2-500 kcmil

(6) #2-500 kcmil
(7) #2-500 kcmil

and equipment.

and equipment.
Table 21.10-11. Bolted Pressure Switches

Ampere
Rating
Wire
Range
800
1200
1600
(3) #2-500 kcmil

(4) #2-500 kcmil
(5) #2-500 kcmil
2000
2500
3000
(6) #2-500 kcmil

(7) #2-500 kcmil
(8) #2-500 kcmil
4000
(11) #2-500 kcmil

and equipment.

Ampere
Rating
Wire
Range
30
60
100
#4-#1/0
#4-#1/0
#4-#1/0
200
400
600
#4-300 kcmil
#4-600 kcmil
(2) #4-600 kcmil
800
1200
(3) #4-600 kcmil

(4) #4-600 kcmil

ampacities corresponding to those shown in
NEC Table 310.16 under the 75C insulation
columns (75C wire). The use of smaller size
(in circular mils) regardless of insulation
temperature rating is not permitted without
voiding UL labels on devices and equipment.
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.10-7
Sheet 21 087
Main Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: All sections are standard 90.00 inches
(2286.0 mm) high. Add 13.00 inches
(330.2 mm) to depth shown for NEMA
Type 3R outdoor enclosure.
ii
2.50
(63.5)
Table 21.10-13. Bussed Pull Sections

(With Lug Landings)
Main Ampere
Rating
Figure 21.10-2
W
D
400
600
800
30 (762.0)
24 (609.6)
1200
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
1600
2000
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
2500
3000
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
4000
51 (1295.4)
48 (1219.2)
3
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
W
D
W
If used with a main service section, depth

will match the main device section.
Figure 21.10-1. Typical Conduit Area

Figures 21.10-2, 21.10-3 and 21.10-4
Figure 21.10-2. Main Lugs OnlyTop or

Bottom Feed
Note: For main lug only applications.
Table 21.10-14. Main Fusible Switch Service Sections

Switch
Type
Fusible
Switch
Bolted
Pressure
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Figure 21.10-3
Figure 21.10-4
W1
400
600
800
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
1200
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
8
9
800
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1200
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
2500
3000
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
4000
51 (1295.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
10
D
11
Figure 21.10-3. Main Device (Breaker or

Switch)Bottom Feed
12
Table 21.10-15. Main Circuit Breaker Service Sections

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
KD, HKD,
KDC
400
LGE, LGH,
LGC, LD,
HLD, LDC
600
13
Figure 21.10-3
Figure 21.10-4
W1
30 (762.0)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
24 (609.6)
15
MDL, ND
800
ND, HND,
NDC
1200
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
RD
1600
2000
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
2500
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
3000
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
4000
51 (1295.4)
48 (1219.2)
51 (1295.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
Magnum SB
14
16
D
W1
17

Switch)Top or Bottom Feed
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
21.10-8
October 2013
Sheet 21 088
i
ii
1
Tenant Meter and Disconnect Sections200A Maximum Circuit

Standard arrangement provides for
bottom exit of cables. Top exit of
cables will require addition of load
side pull section or rear barriered
wireway for each metering section.
Hot sequence metering sections

incorporating 200A (maximum)
continuous rated self-contained meter
sockets with test bypass/disconnect
block in combination with tenant main
disconnect device.
2
3
4
5
6
20.00 (508.0)
Indoor
26.00 (660.4)
Outdoor
3 Circuits
Maximum
7
8
32.00 (812.8)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor
6 Circuits
Maximum
20.00 (508.0)
Indoor
26.00 (660.4)
Outdoor
2 Circuits Maximum 100A
1 Circuit Maximum 200A
Circuit Breaker or Fusible Pullout Disconnects
36.00 (914.4)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor
4 Circuits Maximum
(3) 200A Circuits Maximum and
(1) 100A Circuit Maximum
Fusible Switch Disconnects
Figure 21.10-5. Tenant Meter and Disconnect Configurations

10
32.00 (812.8)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor
Depth will match main device section.

3.00-inch (76.2 mm) additional clearance required by utility for clearance between meter and door posts for outdoor designs.
Double door without center post available for two sections side-by-side.
11
2.50
(63.5)
12
Barriered
Cross Bus
13
14
2.50
(63.5)
15
16
Barrier
3.00
(76.2)
W
Tenant
Feeder
Cables
3.00
(76.2)
20.00
(508.0)
Figure 21.10-7. Load Side Pull Section with

Barriered Cross Bus
17
Tenant
Feeder
Cables
Figure 21.10-8. Rear Barriered Wireway

Metering Section Side View
Depth will match main device section.
18
19
20
21
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Figure 21.10-9. Outdoor Floor Plans
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.10-9
Sheet 21 089
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Type WWCMS (EUSERC Only)
Main Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: All sections are standard 90.00 inches

(330.2 mm) to depth shown for NEMA
Type 3R outdoor enclosure.
ii
1
Table 21.10-16. Bussed Pull Sections

Main Ampere
Rating
800 or Less
12004000
Figure 21.10-10
W
D
20 (508.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
2
3
If used with a main service section, depth

will match the main device section.
Note: For main lug only applications and

installations requiring separate incoming
pull section (top or bottom feed).
4
D
W
5
Figure 21.10-10. Main Lug Only
Top or Bottom Feed
Table 21.10-17. Main Fusible Switch

Service Sections
Switch
Type
Fusible
switch
Bolted
pressure
switch
Ampere Figure 21.10-11

Rating or 21.10-12
400
600
800
1200
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
8
9
800
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
1200
1600
2000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
2500
3000
4000
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
10
11
D
W
12

Switch)Top Feed
13
Table 21.10-18. Main Circuit Breaker

Service Sections
Breaker
Type
Ampere Figure 21.10-11

Rating or 21.10-12
KD, HKD,
KDC
400
LGE, LGH,
LD, HLD,
LDC, LGC
600
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
15
D
MDL, ND,
800
HND, NDC 1200
RD
1600
2000
2500
14
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
D
16
3.00
(76.2)
W
3.00
(76.2)
18

Switch)Bottom Feed
17

Figures 21.10-10, 21.10-11 and 21.10-12
19
20
21
CA08104001E

October 2013
Sheet 21 090
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Type WCMS (Non-EUSERC)
i
ii
1
Tenant Meter and Disconnect Sections

Standard arrangement provides for
bottom exit of cables. Alternate cable
exit will require addition of load side
pull section or rear barriered wireway
for each section.
All sections are standard 90.00 inches

(2286.0 mm) high. Hot or cold sequence
metering sections incorporating 200A
(maximum) continuous rated selfcontained meter sockets (ringless type
with manual bypass) in combination
with tenant main disconnect device.
Barriered
Cross Bus
Tenant
Feeder
Cables
2
20.00
(508.0)
Figure 21.10-17. Load Side Pull Section

with Barriered Cross Bus
Standard depth is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).
5
Barrier
6
20.00
(508.0)
3 Circuits
Maximum
32.00
(812.8)
6 Circuits
Maximum
38.00
(965.2)
Tenant
Feeder
Cables
7 Circuits MaximumFusible Pullout

8 Circuits MaximumBreaker
Figure 21.10-14. Circuit Breaker or Fusible Pullout Tenant Disconnects

Figure 21.10-18. Rear Barriered Wireway

Metering Section Side View
9
10
11
12
13
20.00
(508.0)
14

20.00
(508.0)
1 Circuit Maximum 200A
15

32.00
(812.8)

38.00
(965.2)
1 Circuit
Figure 21.10-19. 400A Tenant Section

with Self-Contained Metering (Breaker)
Depth will match metering sections.
Figure 21.10-15. Fusible Switch Tenant Disconnects
16
17
For 400A applications, select either

400A (320A continuous) with manual
lever bypass or the 400A continuous
rated meter socket with 400A frame
Type KDC circuit breaker.
2.50
(63.5)
18
D
19
20
21
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
W
3.00
(76.2)
Can be arranged for hot sequence

metering with bottom cable exit or
cold sequence metering with top cable
exit. Alternate cable exit will require
addition of load side pull section
or rear barriered wireway. See
Figures 21.10-19 and 21.10-20.
26.00
(660.4)
1 Circuit
Figure 21.10-20. 400A Tenant Section with

Self-Contained Metering (Fusible Switch)


Figures 21.10-17, 21.10-18 and 21.10-19
Depth will match metering sections.
CA08104001E
October 2013
21.10-11
Sheet 21 091
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Types WWCMS (EUSERC Only) and WCMS
Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions

All sections are standard 90.00 inches
(330.2 mm) to depths shown for
NEMA Type 3R outdoor enclosure.
Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) for
NEMA Type 3R on single section
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) wide only.
Tenant Sections Arranged for

Transformer-Rated Metering
Includes utility-approved metering
compartment with provisions for
mounting current transformers for
metering circuits rated 400A and above.
Disconnect device can be either a
single fusible switch or circuit breaker
arranged for hot or cold sequence.
A 22X chassis for installation of
multiple disconnects on one metered
circuit is also available for hot
sequence metering.
Standard cable exit is at the bottom.
For top cable exit, add wireway barrier.
Table 21.10-19. Single Tenant Disconnect Service SectionsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Type
Disconnect
Ampere
Rating
Type WWCMS (EUSERC)
ii
Type WCMS
D
D
400
600
800
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
1200
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
800
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
1200
1600
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
Fusible SwitchDisconnect
Fusible
switch
Bolted
pressure
switch
1
2
3
Circuit BreakerDisconnect
KD, HKD, KDC
400
LD, HLD, LDC
600
MDL, ND
1200
RD
1600
30 (762.0)
800
ND, HND, NDC

36 (914.4)
4
5
Depth (D) will match depth of main device section.

Also requires 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide pull section.
6
7
2.50
(63.5)
8
D
2.50
(63.5)
Single
Disconnect
or
22X Chassis
3.00
(76.2)
W
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
Single Disconnect
12.00
(304.8)
3.00
(76.2)
W
3.00
(76.2)
22X Chassis
Maximum
Amperes
Depth (D) will match depth of main

device section.
30A
60A
100A
100A
240V Max. 240V Max.
100A
200A
100A
36 inch ( 914.4 mm) Wide

Structure
Note: Refer to panel layout guides.
5X
3X
2P
2P
3P
3P
6X
5X
2 or 3P
45 inch
(1143.0 mm) Wide
Structure
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
EHD,
FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE
225
EDB, EDS,
ED, EDH, EDC
3X
250
JD, HJD,
JDC
4X
400
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC
4X
600
LGE, LGH, LGC
6X
600
LD, HLD,
LDC
3X
250
JD, HJD,
JDC
800
MDL
1200
ND, HND,
NDC
2X
3X
11X
16X
2 or 3P
13
Frame
225
6X
Figure 21.10-22. 22X Chassis Layout Guide

Fusible Switches
CA08104001E
3P
2 or 3P
11X
800A Branch
3P
2 or 3P
4X
600A Branch
1200A Branch
1X
2X
4X
400A Branch
200A
1P
2P
2 or 3P
4X
9X
200A
1P
2P
36 inches (914.4 mm) Wide Structure
Figure 21.10-21. Multiple Disconnects

(22X ChassisSee Figures Below)
100A
11
30A
10
12
Figure 21.10-23. Typical Conduit AreasBottom Cable Exit
6X
Figure 21.10-24. 22X Chassis Layout GuideCircuit Breakers, 1X = 1.38 inches (34.9 mm)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2013
Sheet 21 092
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Instant Switchboards
October 2013
21.11-1
Sheet 21 093
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Instant Switchboards Meet EUSERC Requirements
General Description
Eatons Instant Switchboards are
designed as distributor-stocked units
to provide fast delivery to match the
needs of the construction market.
Suitable for use as service entrance
equipment, they combine utility
metering provisions with a fused main
switch in a single compact section that
can also include a distribution panel
for feeder and branch circuit breakers.
Typical applications for these versatile
switchboards include small office
buildings and factories, stores, supermarkets and shopping centers.
For applications that require the load

circuit conductors to exit at the top, a
loadside wireway compartment is available that bolts to the service section.
Standards
Dimensions
Instant Switchboards are UL 891

listed and comply with all applicable
industry standards.
These switchboards meet EUSERC

requirements.
These switchboards are available in

either indoor or outdoor enclosures
manufactured of code gauge steel with
a durable light gray finish. All units are
completely enclosed with front, rear
and side covers. Outdoor units include
a front hinged door.
Main lugs mounted at the top

(two #4600 kcmil per phase)
for overhead feed or for use with
underground pull section
A metering and CT compartment
with bussing for utility bar type CTs
and two 15.00-inch (381.0 mm) high
meter compartment doorsone with
meter socket provision, one blank
A 400 or 600A T-fused main switch
or 800A main circuit breaker with
either load lugs (same as main lugs)
or with connections to a factoryinstalled distribution panel
Underground pull sections are available with lug landing kits, providing
studs for incoming cables per EUSERC
requirements and two #4600 kcmil
lugs per phase for cable connection to
the service section.
Distribution panels can be included
for 240 Vac maximum (single-phase,
three-wire, or three-phase, four-wire)
or for 480Y/277 Vac (three-phase, fourwire). The 240V panels have provisions
for four two-pole or three-pole, 225A
frame circuit breakers; and 24 poles
of 100A frame circuit breakers. The
480Y/277V panel has provisions for
four two-pole or three-pole 225A
frame circuit breakers; and 24 poles
of 100A frame circuit breakers.
Distribution panel for 800A 240 Vac
or 480Y/277 Vac can be included with
provisions for six two- or three-pole,
225A frame circuit breakers.
65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at

240 Vac, with 400 and 600A fusible
switch mains using 65,000 AIC ED
225A frame or 10,000 AIC BAB 100A
frame branch breakers
65,000 rms symmetrical amperes
at 480Y/277 Vac, with 400 and 600A
fusible switch mains using 35,000
AIC FD 225A frame or 14,000 AIC
GHB 100A frame branch breakers
Main Ampere
Rating
ii
1
2
4
5
6
Type 1 Indoor
Type 3R Outdoor
7
8
Table 21.11-1. Instant Switchboards

Service
240 Vac, single-phase, three-wire, or

three-phase, four-wire
480Y/277 Vac, three-phase, four-wire
Construction
Indoor: 32.00 x 90.00 x 14.00 inches

(812.8 x 2286.0 x 355.6 mm)
Outdoor: 38.00 x 90.00 x 26.00 inches
(965.2 x 2286.0 x660.4 mm)
Service Ratings
Interrupting Ratings (Series Rating)
The service section includes:
35,000 rms symmetrical at

480Y/277 Vac fully rated using
800A main circuit breaker with
FD 225A frame branch breakers
Catalog Number
NEMA 1Indoor
NEMA 3ROutdoor
10
240 Vac MaximumMain Fused Switch Only

Single-phase, 3W
400
600
MSB423
MSB623
RMSB423
RMSB623
Three-phase, 4W
400
600
MSB424
MSB624
RMSB424
RMSB624
240 Vac MaximumMain Fused Switch with Distribution Panel
11
12
Single-phase, 3W
400
600
MSBP423
MSBP623
RMSBP423
RMSBP623
Three-phase, 4W
400
600
MSBP424
MSBP624
RMSBP424
RMSBP624
13
MSB824
RMSB824
14
240 Vac MaximumMain Circuit Breaker Only

Three-phase, 4W
800
240 Vac MaximumMain Circuit Breaker Only with Distribution Panel

Three-phase, 4W
800
MSBP824
RMSBP824
MSB444
MSB644
RMSB444
RMSB644
480Y/277 Vac Main Fused Switch Only

Three-phase, 4W
400
600
480Y/277 Vac Main Fused Switch with Distribution Panel

Three-phase, 4W
400
600
MSBP444
MSBP644
RMSBP444
RMSBP644
480Y/277 Vac Maximum Main Circuit Breaker Only

Three-phase, 4W
800
MSB844
RMSB844
480Y/277 Vac Maximum Main Circuit Breaker Only with Distribution Panel
Three-phase, 4W
800
MSBP844
15
16
17
18
RMSBP844
Not for use on 480V three-phase three-wire delta systems.
Note: Standard switchboards include two 15.00-inch (381.0) high meter compartment doors:
one with single meter socket provision and one blank. For other arrangements, use accessories.
19
20
21
CA08104001E

Instant Switchboards
October 2013
Sheet 21 094
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Instant Switchboards Meet EUSERC Requirements
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
Table 21.11-2. Meter Compartment Doors

(Meter Sockets Not Included)
Door Size
Inches (mm)
Drilling
Catalog
Number
15.00 H x 32.00 W
(381.0 x 812.2)
Blank
1 socket
MD150
MD151
30.00 H x 32.00 W
(762.0 x 812.2)
Blank
2 socket
MD300
MD302
Table 21.11-3. Meter Sockets

For Field Installation (order separately)
Number
of Jaws
Catalog
Number
4
5
6
M4
M5
M6
8
13
15
M8
M13
M15
Table 21.11-4. Loadside Wireway

Same Depth as Switchboard
Section
Width
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
NEMA 1
Indoor
NEMA 3R
Outdoor
12.00 (304.8)
LSS12W
RLSS12W
Table 21.11-6. Lug Landing Kits for

Underground Pull Sections
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Service
Catalog
Number
400
Single-phase, 3W
Three-phase, 4W
Single-phase, 3W
Three-phase, 4W
LL4003
LL4004
LL8003
LL8004
800
Table 21.11-5. Underground Pull Sections

Section
Width
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
Indoor
Outdoor
Table 21.11-7. Distribution Breakers
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
UG24W
UG30W
240 Vac
RUG24W
RUG30W
Note: Same depth as switchboard with

provisions for lug landing kit.
Note: If pull section is to be installed
separate from service section, add side
closer plates. Cat No. UGCP.
Ampere
Rating
1560
70100
125225
Type
Breaker
Poles
1P 2P
BAB
BAB
ED
X
X
X
X
X
X
GHB
FD
X
X
X
X
3P
480Y/277 Vac
15100
70225
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CA08104001E
Panelboards
22.0-1
June 2015
Panelboards
Sheet 22001
Contents
Panelboards
Overview
Market and Segment Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-2
Available Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-2
Panelboard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-2
Panelboard Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-4
General Construction Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-4
Application Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-5
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-8
Series Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-11
Pow-R-Line 1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1-1
Pow-R-Line 2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2-1
Pow-R-Line 3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-1
Pow-R-Line 3E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-5
Pow-R-Line 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-1
Pow-R-Line Column Type
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5-1
Pow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5-4
Retrofit Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1R Retrofit Panelboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-1
Pow-R-Line 2R Retrofit Panelboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-3
Pow-R-Line 1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-5
Pow-R-Line 2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-7
Pow-R-Line 3FQS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-9
Elevator Control Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-11
Panelboard Modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-12
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16470
Section 26 24 16
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4D
CA08104001E
22.0-2 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 002
General DescriptionPow-R-Line
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Overview
Choices to quickly change feeder
breakers in electrical distribution
equipment have evolved over the years.
While using drawout switchgear with
power air circuit breakers remains a
highly reliable solution, requests for
drawout molded-case circuit breakers
(MCCBs) have increased. And,
customers need a wall-mounted
panelboard solution with front
accessibility and front-connected
equipment to meet space requirements and application needs.
Market and Segment Applications
Available Ratings
While the drawout MCCB panelboard

design may be substituted for nearly
any traditional application with
feeder MCCBs, it has been specifically
designed to meet the needs of several
industries, including:
The panelboards are rated at 240 Vac,

480 Vac and 600 Vac. Fault current is
available up to 200 kAIC at 240 Vac,
100 kAIC at 480 Vac and 65 kAIC at
600 Vac. The short-circuit current
rating of the panelboard is determined
by the low short-circuit current rating
of the lowest rated overcurrent device
in the panelboard.
Eatons drawout MCCB Pow-R-Line

4D (PRL4D) panelboard provides
this solution.
This is the first design to offer two- and

three-pole MCCBs in a mechanical
drawout design. Breaker ratings from
20 A to 600 A use unique drawout
cassettes. Breakers are inserted and
removed via a mechanical removal
system similar to other drawout designs
associated with switchgear; however,
these breakers are horizontally
mounted in a traditional panelboard
group-mounted manner.
Electrical distribution systems where

a changeout of circuit breakers is
needed to upgrade equipment to
a new process
Data centers
Industrial facilities to minimize
downtime
Institutions
Laboratories
Health care facilities
Critical load applications

UL 67 Listed for wall-mounted
applications from 600 A to 1200 A
National Electrical Code
Boxes and trims are UL 50 Listed and

labeled. Both the box and the trim are
painted ANSI-61 light gray. Deadfront
covers are also painted ANSI-61 light
gray to match box and trim.
Drawout feeder MCCBs are available in
two- and three-pole offerings from 20 A
to 600 A. Main breakers above 600 A
are fixed-mounted using a traditional
bolt-on design. Main breakers 600 A
and below are available with either the
traditional fixed-mounted, bolt-on
design or in a drawout cassette. For
drawout mains or feeders above 600 A,
please use Eatons switchboard offering.
Panelboard Options
32
33
34
Copper and silver-plated copper

Copper lugs
Density-rated bus
Ground bars
Customer-owned meters
Service equipment construction
Surge protective devices
Seismically qualified panelboards
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
22.0-3
Sheet 22 003
Pow-R-Line 1a, 2a and 3a, and 3E
Robust design using Eaton

circuit breakers
Increased ratings (with Series
Rated main circuit breakers)
provide higher short-circuit ratings
Pow-R-Line 3a can accommodate
branch breakers dual-mounted
through 150 A and single-mounted
through 225 A
Pow-R-Line 3E panelboards
accommodate branch-mounted
breakers up to 125 A
Lock and Door opening mechanism
includes a positive slide catch and
right- or left-hand installation
Surface or flush trims
UL tested and listed. Meets NEC
and NEMA standards
Special Use Pow-R-Line

Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4B and 4F
Power Panels
Pow-R-Line 4B panelboard uses

circuit breakers
Pow-R-Line 4F panelboard uses
fusible switches
A single chassis accommodates
both circuit breakers and
fusible switches
Main and neutral are located at the
same ends to provide additional
space for branch devices
Three-piece trim facilitates
installation
Will accommodate circuit breakers
to provide higher ratings in a
standard chassis and increased
series ratings
UL tested and approved. Meets
NEC and NEMA standards
Pow-R-Line 4D Drawout Panelboard
Quick change-out or addition of

breakers without changing hardware
Front connected, front accessible
Drawout circuit breakers
20600 A ratings
Fixed-mounted molded-case circuit
breakers 151200 A
Mains 4001200 A
Main lugs only
Main molded-case circuit breaker
Single chassis supports both drawout
and fixed-mounted breakers
Mains and neutrals mounted on
same end of chassis/box
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX and Pow-R-Line

2a-LX column panelboards are
designed to fit within the structural
I-beam of a facility and offer branch
circuits up to 100 A
Pow-R-Line 1aF and Pow-R-Line
2aF fusible lighting panelboards
were developed for ultra high fault
currents and for use in selective
coordination applications and
test circuits
Pow-R-Line 1R and Pow-R-Line 2R
Retrofit Panelboards are the only
panelboards in the market listed for
use in retrofit applications in other
manufacturers existing back boxes
Elevator control panelboards
integrate electrical protection
and controls for elevators and
meet stringent code requirements
in a single, cost-effective package
22
31
32
Pow-R-Line 1a, 3a 3E and Column
Pow-R-Line 4B, Pow-R-Line 4F
33
34
35
36
37
Pow-R-Line 1aF and 2aF
38
Pow-R-Line 4D
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R
Elevator Control Panelboard
CA08104001E
22.0-4 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 004
22
Table 22.0-1. Panelboard Selection Guide

Panelboard
Type
Page
Reference
Device
Type
23
24
Pow-R-Line 1a 1
Pow-R-Line 2a 1
22.1-1
22.2-1
Breaker
Breaker
Pow-R-Line 3a 1
22.3-1
Breaker
Pow-R-Line 3E 1
Pow-R-Line 4B 1
22.3-5
22.4-1
Breaker
Breaker
Pow-R-Line 4F 1
22.4-8
Fusible switch
Pow-R-Line 4D
22.4-11
Breaker
Pow-R-Line 1aF
Pow-R-Line 2aF
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX
Pow-R-Line 2a-LX
Pow-R-Line 1R
Pow-R-Line 2R
Elevator control
panelboard 1
22.6-5
22.6-7
22.5-1
22.5-4
22.6-1
22.6-3
22.6-11
Fusible switch
Fusible switch
Breaker
Breaker
Breaker
Breaker
Fusible
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
General Construction Features

Eatons assembled panelboards
are designed for sequence phase
connection of branch circuit devices.
This allows complete flexibility of
circuit arrangement (single-, two- or
three-poles) to allow balance of the
electrical load on each phase.
Sturdy, rigid chassis assembly ensures
accurate alignment of interior with
panel front; prevents flexing and
minimizes possibility of loosening
or damage to current carrying parts
during and after installation.
38
39
Main lugs are mechanical solderless

type and approved for copper and
aluminum conductors.
40
41
42
43
Maximum Main
Rating, Amperes
AC
DC
Main Lugs Only
Main Device
240
240
480Y/277
240
480
600
480
240
480
600
240
600
240
480
240
480Y/277
240
480Y/277
240
480Y/277
480
250
600
600
400
800
800
800
600
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
400
400
225
225
225
225
800
600
600
400
600
600
600
600
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
400
400
225
225
225
225
800
250
250
600
250
125/250
Branch Circuits
Ampere Range
Short-Circuit Current Ratings

rms Symmetrical Amperes, AC
Fully Rated
(kA)
15100
1022
15100
65
15100
14
15225
10200
15225
14100
15225
1435
15125
3565
151200
10200
151200
14200
151200
14200
301200
100200
301200
100200
20600 Drawout 100
151200 Fixed
65
1530
200
1530
200
15-30
1022
1530
14
15100
1022
15100
14
15200
10200
Series Rated
(kA)
22200
65200
22150
22200
22150
35100
22200
22150
200
200
18200
25150
22100
22150
14100
Available with surge protective device (SPD).
Four point in-and-out adjustment

of panel interior is provided to meet
critical depth dimensions on flush
installations. This compensates
for possible misalignment of box
at installation.
37
Maximum
Voltage Rating
All enclosures are furnished in

accordance with UL standards and
include wiring gutters with proper wire
bending space. Special cabinets can
be provided at an additional charge.
The box dimensions shown are inside
dimensions. For outside dimensions,
add 0.25-inch (6.4 mm).
Standard panelboard boxes are supplied
without knockouts (blank endwalls).
EZ Trim
The EZ box and EZ trim are provided
standard for Pow-R-Line 1a and
Pow-R-Line 2a lighting panelboards, as
well as Pow-R-Line 3a and Pow-R-Line
3E mid-range panelboards.
The trims for lighting and appliance

branch circuit panelboards and small
power distribution panelboards
include a door with rounded corners
and concealed hinges. A flush-type
latch and lock assembly is included. All
locks are keyed alike. These trims are
available in both surface and flush
mounted designs.
Fronts for power distribution panelboards use a unique breaker front
cover design in which each device has
a dedicated bolt-on steel cover. The
individual covers form a single deadfront for the panelboard that is used
in conjunction with two wiring gutter
covers to complete the trim. A door
is not finished as part of the standard
offering on these panelboards but can
be provided, for an additional charge,
using a deeper than standard box.
Combination AFCI Circuit Breakers

Eatons 125 Vac AFCI single- and twopole, 15 A and 20 A bolt-on breakers in
panelboards meet Article 210.12 of the
NEC. See the NEC code for definitions
and details.
Enclosures
Boxes are code-gauge galvanized steel
except for column type panelboards,
which include a painted box finished in
ANSI-61 light gray to match the trim.
Standard panelboard cabinets are
designed for indoor use. Alternate
types are available for outdoor and
special purpose applications.
EZ Trim Provides Standard Door-in-Door
Construction With No Exposed Hardware
or Sharp Ridges. No Tools are Required
for Installation.
CA08104001E
June 2015
Panelboards
Overview
22.0-5
Sheet 22 005
All Eatons panelboards are designed to

meet the following applicable industry
standards, except where noted:
1. Underwriters Laboratories
a. Panelboards: UL 67
b. Cabinets, boxes and trims:
UL 50
Note: Only panelboards containing UL
listed devices can be UL labeled.
2. National Electrical Code

3. NEMA Standards: PB 1
4. Federal Specification W-P-115c
Circuit breakerType I Class 1
Fusible switchType II Class 1
Panelboard Selection Factors

In selecting a panelboard, the following factors must be considered:
a. Service (voltage and frequency).
b. Interrupting capacity (fully or
series rated).
c. Ampere rating of main.
d. Ampere ratings of branches.
e. Installation environment.
f. Codes and standards
mandates.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating

The short-circuit rating of Eatons
assembled panelboards are
test verified by, and listed with,
Underwriters Laboratories. Generally,
these ratings are that of the lowest
interrupting rated device in the panel.
Certain exceptions to this rule exist
where branch devices have been
UL tested in combination with
specific main devices having a
higher interrupting rating. Where
these defined main breaker and branch
breaker combinations are
used, the series short-circuit rating
of the assembled panelboard will be
the same as the series tested rating
of the approved rated main breaker.
Available main and branch breaker
combinations are tabulated on
Page 22.0-11 through Page 22.0-21.
All combinations shown are UL
tested and listed.
Please refer to Molded-Case Circuit

Breakers, Tab 27, for detailed
information on overcurrent protective
device combinations for use on
selectively coordinated systems.
Service Entrance Equipment

NEC Articles 230.F and G, and UL,
require that:
a. Panels used as service entrance
equipment must be located
near the point where the supply
conductors enter the building.
b. A panelboard having main lugs
only shall have a maximum
of six service disconnects to
de-energize the entire panelboard from the supply
conductors. Where more
than six disconnects are
required, a main service
disconnect must be provided.
c. Must include connector
for bonding and grounding
neutral conductor.
d. A service-entrance-type UL
label must be factory installed.
e. Ground fault protection of
equipment shall be provided
for solidly grounded wye
electrical services of more
than 150 V to ground, but not
exceeding 600 V phase-tophase for each service
disconnecting means rated
1000 A or more.
Service entrance panels must be
identified as such on the order entry
to the manufacturing location.
Column Type Panelboards
Sub-feed or through-feed provisions

must also be added to provide connection capability to the second section.
Note: Sub-feed or through-feed lugs
cannot be used on any panelboard that
is not protected by a single main overcurrent device either in the panelboard or
immediately upstream, i.e., service entrance
panelboards with main lugs only using the
six disconnect rule.
23
24
25
26
27
28
Sub-Feed Lugs (Figure 22.0-1)

Sub-feed lugs are one means of
interconnecting multi-section panels.
The sub-feed (second set of) lugs are
mounted directly beside the main lugs.
These are required in each section
except the last panel in the lineup.
The feeder cables are brought into
the wiring gutter of the first section
and connected to the main lugs.
Another set of the same size cables
are connected to the sub-feed lugs
(Section 1) and are carried over to the
main lugs of the adjacent panel. Cross
connection cables are not furnished by
Eaton. Sub-feed lugs are only available
on main lug only panels.
Note: Sub-feed lugs may not be used on
main lug only (six disconnect rule) service
entrance panels.
Box
Box
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Neutral
Neutral
Multi-Section Panelboards
When more than 42 overcurrent
protective devices are required, two
or more separate enclosures may be
required. Separate fronts for each
box are standard.
22
When a panelboard, for connection to

one feeder, must be furnished in more
than one section (box), each section
must be furnished with main bus and
terminals of the same rating, unless a
main overcurrent device is provided in
each section.
The same general code restrictions

apply as for standard width panels
except where trough extensions
are used.
38
39
40
41
These series ratings apply to panels

having main devices, or main lug
only panelboards fed remotely by the
device listed in the series ratings chart
as the main, for which UL listed tests
were conducted.
CA08104001E
Interconnecting Multi-Section
Panelboards
Panel
Standards
Panel
42
Conduit
Section 1
Section 2
Figure 22.0-1. Sub-Feed Lugs
43
22.0-6 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 006
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
(Continued)
Multiple Section Panelboard

Flush Mounted
Through-Feed Lugs (Figure 22.0-2)

Through-feed lugs are another
method to interconnect multi-section
panelboards. The incoming feeder
cables are connected to the main
lugs or main breaker at the bottom of
panel (Section 1). Another set of lugs
(through-feed) are located at the
opposite end of the main bus. The
interconnecting cables are connected
to the through-feed lugs in Section 1
and are carried over to the main
lugs in Section 2. The connection
arrangement could be reversed, i.e.,
main lugs at top; through-feed lugs
at bottom end of panel. Cross cables
are not furnished by Eaton.
Shown below is the standard method

for flush mounting multiple section
lighting and distribution panelboards
using standard flush trims.
Conduit Nipple for Cross Wiring by Contractor
.75
(19.1)
Wall
Trim
.75
(19.1)
1.5
(38.1)
Top Section
View
.75
(19.1)
Trim
.75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
Trim
Wall
Contractor to Mount Boxes

1-1/2-inch (38.1 mm) Apart to
Allow for 3/4-inch (19.1 mm)
Extension on Both Flush Trims
Outside Edge of Box
Note: Through-feed lugs may not be used

on main lug only (six disconnect rule)
service entrance panels.
Box
31
Cross Cables
Main
Lugs
32
Panel
Panel
33
34
ThruFeed
Lugs
Neutral
36
Conduit
Incoming Feeder Cables
39
40
41
42
43
.75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
Flush Trim Extends 3/4-inch

(19.1 mm) Beyond Outside
of Box on All Four Sides
Figure 22.0-3. Multiple Section Panelboard

Flush MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Main Lugs
38
.75
(19.1)
Branch Circuit Loading for Lighting Panels
35
37
.75
(19.1)
Two Section
Panelboard
(Flush Mounting)
Neutral
Section 1
Section 2
Figure 22.0-2. Through-Feed Lugs

Eatons Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System is available
on many molded-case circuit
breakers from 70 A to air power
circuit breakers at 5000 A. Recognized
by the 2011 National Electrical Code
and the National Electrical Safety
Code (NFPA 70E), the Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System
allows breakers to trip quickly thus
significantly reducing the available
arc flash potential.
Ambient Temperatures
30
Box
Ground fault protection (GFP) may

be added to most panelboards using
Eatons integral molded-case circuit
breaker GFP and included feeder
devices on power panelboards and
mains on all panelboards.
The size of mains and branches should

be selected based on the following:
a. Lighting circuits: NEC Article
210, 215, 220 and 240.
b. Distribution circuits, actual or
continuous loads: NEC Article
384.16.
c. Motor circuits: NEC Article 430.
d. Diversity factor.
e. Provision for future loading.
National Electrical Code Article 408
states a panelboard shall be protected
by an overcurrent protective device
having a rating not greater than that
of the panelboard. The overcurrent
protective device shall be located
within or at any point on the supply
side of the panelboard.
The primary function of an overcurrent

device is to protect the conductor and
its insulation against overheating. In
selecting the size of the devices and
conductors, consideration should be
given to the ambient temperature
surrounding the conductors within and
external to the panelboard. Cumulative
heating within the panelboard may
cause premature operation of the overcurrent protective devices.
UL test procedures are based, in part,
on 80% loading of panelboard branch
circuit devices. Article 408 of the NEC
limits the loading of overcurrent devices
in panelboards to 80% of rating where
in normal operation the load will
continue for three hours or more.
Further derating may be required,
depending on such factors as ambient
temperature, duty cycle, frequency
or altitude.
Exception: There is one exception
to this rule in both UL and NEC. It
applies to assemblies and overcurrent
devices that have been approved
for continuous duty at 100% of its
rating. This exception is covered in
NEC 210.20 (a). Also see Tab 27 of
this application guide for additional
information.
Exceptions to Article 408 selectively

apply. Refer to the National Electrical
Code Article 408 for specifics.
CA08104001E
June 2015
Panelboards
Overview
22.0-7
Sheet 22 007
(Continued)
Special Conditions
Standard panelboards, assembled
with standard components, are
adequate for most applications.
However, special consideration
should be given to those required
for application under special
conditions such as:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Excessive vibration or shock.

Frequencies above 60 cycles.
Altitudes above 6600 ft (2012 m).
Damp environment (possible
fungus growth).
e. Compliance with federal, state
and municipal electrical codes
and standards.

Harmonic Currents
Standard panelboard neutrals are
rated for 100% of the panelboard
current. However, because harmonic
currents can cause overheated
neutrals, an option is provided for
neutrals to be rated at 200% (1200 A
maximum neutral for 600 A main bus)
of the panelboard phase current.
Panelboards with the 200% rated
neutral are UL listed as suitable for
use with nonlinear loads.
Eaton can provide protective and

diagnostic systems integral to panelboards. The SPD is integrated into
the panelboards using a zero lead
length direct busbar connection.
Integral disconnect is used on all
Pow-R-Line 4 panels.
The quality of power feeding sensitive

electronic loads is critical to the reliable
operation of any facility. In modern
offices, hospitals and manufacturing
facilities, the most frequent causes
of microprocessor-based equipment
downtime and damage are voltage
transients and electrical noise.
Electrical loads and microprocessorbased equipment are highly susceptible
to both high and low energy transients.
High energy transients include lightning
induced surges and power company
switching. These high energy transients
can destroy components instantly.
23
24
25
26
Prior to specifying the 200% rated

neutral, Eaton recommends a harmonic
survey be conducted of the distribution
system, be it new or existing.
Surge Protective Devices (SPD)
22
27
Eaton SPDs May be Integrated
into Most Panelboards
The SPD protects sensitive electronic

equipment from the damaging effects
of high and low energy transients.
For complete product description and
available ratings, refer to Tab 34.
Compact Panelboard Meter

Most Eaton panelboards can integrate
a compact meter for reading the
panelboard power and energy usage.
Eatons IQ 35M has ANSI 12.20 0.5%
accuracy, a bright backlit LCD display,
real energy pulse output, phase
loss alarm and optional RS-485
communication capability.
More frequently the electrical system

experiences low energy transients and
high frequency noise.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
The effects of continual low energy

transients and high frequency
noise can cause erratic equipment
performance or sudden failure of
electronic circuit board components.
35
36
37
38
39
40
Closeup of IQM 35 With Deadfront
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.0-8 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 008
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line
22
23
24
25
26

Table 22.0-2. Electrical Characteristics of Circuit Breakers
Type
BAB, HQP
BAB-H, HQP-H
BABRP, BABRSP
QBGF, QPGF,
QBGFEP
QBAF, QBAG
QBHW, QPHW
27
28
29
30
31
QBHW-H, QPHW-H
QBHGF, QPHGF,
QBHGFEP
QBHAF, QBHAG
GHB
GHQ
HGHB
GHBGFEP
GHQRSP
GHBS
EGB
32
EGS
EGH
33
EHD
34
FDB
FD, FDE
35
36
37
38
EDB
EDS
ED
DK
JD
KD 4, CKD 5
LHH 6
NHH
LGE
LD 4, CLD 45
MDL 4, CMDL 45
ND 4, CND 45
40
41
42
43
DC Rating, Volts 1
Number
of Poles
Volts
AC
120/240
AC Rating, Volts
240
277
480
600
125
250
1570
15100
15100
1530
1530
1550
1550
1520
1520
1570
15100
15100
1530
1530
1520
1520
15100 2
15100
1520
1530
1560
1520
1520
1530
1530
15125
15125
15125
15125
15125
15125
15100
15100
15150
15150
15225
100225
100225
100225
250400
70250
100400
150400
150350
250600
300600
300800
4001200
1
2
2, 3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2, 3
1
2
1
2
1
2, 3
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2, 3
1
2, 3
1
2, 3
1
2, 3
2, 3
1
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
120
120/240
240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120/240
240
120
120/240
120
120/240
277
480Y/277
277
277
277
277
480Y/277
277
480Y/277
277
480
277
480
277
480
277
480
600
277
600
240
240
240
240
600
600
480
600
600
600
600
600
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
65
65
65
65
65
35
100
200
10
22
65
65
65
35
35
100
200
18
18
65
22
42
65
65
65
65
100
100
65
65
65
65
14
14
25
14
14
14
14
14
18
35
65
14
35
14 3
14 3
14 3
18
35
65
14
14
35
35
35
65
65
35
35
50
50
14
18
18
25
35
35
18
25
25
25
14
10
35
42
10
10
10
10
10
14
10
35
42
10
10
10
10
10
10
42
22
22 6
22
1
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
277
600
240
600
600
600
600
600
600
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
25
25
35
35
35
35
35
10
10
22
22
22
22
25 6
25
600
240
600
600
600
600
600
600
10
22
22
22
42
50
25 6
High Interrupting Capacity Circuit Breakers

HFD, HFDE
39
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (kA rms Symmetrical)

Ampere
Rating
EDH
HJD
HKD 4, CHKD 5
LGH
HLD 4, CHLD 45
HMDL 4, CHMDL 45
HND 4, CHND 45
15150
15225
100225
70250
100400
250600
300600
300800
4001200
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

2, 3
15225
FDC, FDCE
2, 3
100225
EDC
2, 3
70250
JDC
KDC 4
2, 3
100400
6
2, 3
250600
LGC
6
2, 3
250600
LGU
4
45
2, 3
300600
LDC , CLDC
4
45
2, 3
4001200
NDC , CNDC
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 DC rated single-pole, 1570 A only.
3 Rating 480Y/277 Vac maximum.
4
5
6
35
100
200
200
35
100
200
65
100
200
50
100
200
65
150
200
50
100
200
65
100
200
Available with integral ground fault protection.
100% rated breaker.
DC rating not available with Digitrip 310.
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
22.0-9
Sheet 22 009

Table 22.0-2. Electrical Characteristics of Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Type
22
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (kA rms Symmetrical)

Ampere
Rating
Voltage
AC Rating, Volts
Number
of Poles
AC
DC
120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
600
2, 3
2, 3
480
480
200
200
150
200
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
3
3
3
DC Rating, Volts
Current Limit-R Circuit Breakers

FCL
LCL 2
15100
125400
23
24
TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

FB-P
LA-P
NB-P
15100
70400
300800
Direct Current (DC) Rated Breakers

HFDDC 45
HJDDC 46
HKDDC 46
15150
70250
100400
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
42
42
42
42
42
42
35
35
35
HLDDC 46
HMDLDC 46
NBDC 46
300600
300800
7001200
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
42
42
42
42
42
42
35
35
35
1
2
3
4
5
6
DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.

100k based on NEMA test procedure.
Non-interrupting trip type.
Interrupting trip type.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.0-10 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 010
22
23
24
25
26
Terminal Wire Ranges, Pressure-Type Al/Cu Terminals Except as Noted

Where copper-aluminum terminals are supplied on designated panelboard types, best results are obtained if a suitable joint
compound is applied when aluminum conductors are used.
Table 22.0-3. Standard Main Lug Terminals
Panel
Type
100 A
225 A
250 A
#62/0
#6350 kcmil
(2) 4/0500 kcmil
(2) 4/0500 kcmil
Pow-R-Line 4
Pow-R-Command
#121/0
#6300 kcmil
#2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil

(2) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
(3) #2500 kcmil
(4) #2500 kcmil
Not applicable PRL 1aF, 1R, PRL 2aF, 2R.
Note: Optional 750 kcmil mechanical screw-type terminals are available upon request. Panelboard dimensions may be affected. Refer to Eaton.
Breaker Type
Ampere Rating
Wire Size Ranges
Table 22.0-4. Standard Main Breaker and Branch

Breaker Terminals (Continued)
Breaker Type
1570
90100
#14#4
#8#1/0
30
EDB, EDS, ED,

EDH, EDC
100225
EGB, EGS, EGH
15125
(1) #2500 kcmil

(2) #2500 kcmil
LD, HLD, LDC, CLD 3,

CHLD 3, CLDC 3
300500
600
(2) 250350 kcmil

(2) 400500 kcmil
#143/0
MDL, HMDL,
CMDL 3, CHMDL 3
400600
700800
15100
125225
175225
#14#1/0
#4#4/0
#6#350
(2) #1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(2) 500750 kcmil
ND, HND, NDC, CND 3,

CHND 3, CNDC 3
6001000
1200
(3) 3/0400 kcmil

(4) 4/0500 kcmil
#4#4/0 or
#6300 kcmil
32
FCL
GHB
15100
15100
#14#1/0
#14#1/0
33
GHQ
HGHB
GHQRSP
GHBS
1520
1530
1520
1530
#14#1/0
#14#1/0
#14#4
#14#1/0
70250
LCL
125225
250400
FB-P
15100
LA-P
70225
250400
#6350 kcmil
(1) #4250 kcmil
and (1) 3/0600 kcmil
NB-P
350700
800
(2) #1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
#4350 kcmil
DK
250350
400
250500 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
or (1) 3/0500 kcmil
NHH
KD, KDB,
HKD, KDC,
CKD 2, CHKD 2
150350
100225
250350
400
#2600 kcmil
(1) #3350 kcmil
(1) 250500 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 3/0500 kcmil
Wire Size Ranges
250400
500600
EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
JD, JDB, HJD, JDC
Ampere Rating
LGE, LGH, LHH,

LGC, LGU
31
39
Pow-R-Line 3E
QBHW, QPHW
38
(3) #2500 kcmil
(2) 4/0500 kcmil

(2) 4/0500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
29
37
1200 A
(2) #2500 kcmil

(2) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
#14#4
#8#1/0
36
800 A
#6350 kcmil
1570
90100
35
1
1
#6300 kcmil
#6300 kcmil
BAB, HQP
34
600 A
#121/0
#121/0
#121/0
Table 22.0-4. Standard Main Breaker and Branch Breaker Terminals
28
400 A
Pow-R-Line 1a, 1aF, 1R

Pow-R-Line 2a, 2aF, 2R
Pow-R-Line 3a
27
Wire Size Ranges for Ampere Capacity
100% rated breaker.
Note: For other terminals available on some ratings of molded-case

circuit breakers, refer to Tab 27.
Note: All terminal sizes are based on wire ampacities corresponding
to those shown in NEC Table 310.16 under 75 C insulation columns
(75 C wire). The use of smaller size (in circular mills), regardless of
insulation temperature rating is not permitted without voiding UL
labels on devices and equipment.
(1) #6350 kcmil

(1) #4250 kcmil
and (1) 3/0600 kcmil
#141/0
100% rated breaker.
Table 22.0-5. Fusible Switch Terminals

Ampere Rating
Wire Size Ranges
30, 60, 100

200
#141/0
#4300 kcmil
400
250750 kcmil or
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
600
(2) #4600 kcmil or

(4) 3/0250 kcmil
800
(3) 250750 kcmil or

(6) 3/0250 kcmil
1200
(4) 250750 kcmil or

(8) 3/0250 kcmil
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
22.0-11
Sheet 22 011
Technical Data and SpecificationsSeries Ratings
Series Rated Combinations

UL permits panelboards to be labeled
with a short-circuit rating of up to
200,000 A symmetrical where UL
listed combinations of main and branch
circuits are used.
These combinations consist of main
breakers or fusible devices connected
ahead of, and in series with approved
conventional devices.
Two arrangements are acceptable and
comply with UL standards for panelboards. The main circuit breaker may
be installed in the panel as a main
device (Figure 22.0-4), or it may be
mounted remote (Figure 22.0-5) from
the panel. In either case, the approved
main and branch combinations must
be followed. These arrangements are
acceptable and are UL listed having
been tested in accordance with
UL standards.
From the tables on Page 22.0-13
through Page 22.0-21, specific
combinations of main devices
(upstream) and branch devices
(downstream), series connected and
electrically adjacent in the system,
may be selected to qualify the
assembled panelboard for the
short-circuit ratings shown. Series
ratings apply only to those Eaton
breakers listed and published.
Do not use Classified breakers.
UL Labeled
Upstream
Overcurrent
Device
UL Labeled
Conventional
Branch
Breakers
Industry standards and the NEC

require protection of the entire
electrical distribution system from
damage due to short-circuit faults.
Article 230.205 of the NEC states that
service equipment shall be suitable
for the short-circuit current available
at its supply terminals. The entire
distribution system is required to meet
this standard. Series rated systems
have become an effective method
of meeting these requirements.
There are three protection systems
used to protect low voltage power
distribution equipment. They are:
Fully rated protection

Fully rated, selectively
coordinated protection
Series rated protection
Fully Rated ProtectionWhere all
overcurrent devices are rated for the
full prospective short-circuit current
at their line side terminals throughout
the system.
Selectively Coordinated Protection
A fully rated system where the
overcurrent device closest to the
fault will open first, thus isolating
the faulty circuit.
Series Rated ProtectionA shortcircuit interrupting rating assigned to
a combination of two or more overcurrent protective devices that are
connected in series and in which the
rating of the downstream device(s)
in the combination is less than the
series rating.
Series ratings are also known in
the industry as integrated ratings,
series combination ratings and
series connected ratings.
Code Issues
The fault current contribution of
motors connected between series
rated breakers must be considered.
Article 240.86 in the NEC states that for
series ratings, the sum of the motor
full-load currents cannot exceed 1%
of the interrupting rating of the lower
rated circuit breaker. The actual fault
current contribution from induction
motors is about four times their fullload current (impedance value of 25%).
For example, if the downstream branch
circuit breakers used in a series rated
combination have an interrupting
rating of 14,000 A rms symmetrical
for a 480 V system, the maximum
allowable motor contribution to that
panel from the branch circuit breakers
is 140 A (1%). For typical induction
motors, this is equivalent to a total
horsepower at 480 V of approximately
115 horsepower.
Requirements of the NEC (NFPA-70)
for series ratings may be met by
equipment marked with ratings
adequate for the available fault
current at the point of application
in the electrical system. Eaton
panelboards and switchboards
are marked consistent with NEC
Article 240.83.
Additionally, Article 110.22 requires
field marking on equipment where
series ratings are used. This label
is supplied standard with all Eaton
panelboards and switchboards.
Figure 22.0-4. Main Device

UL Labeled
Remote Upstream
Overcurrent
Device
Main
Lugs
UL Labeled
Conventional
Branch
Breakers
Neutral
Figure 22.0-5. Mounted Remote

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
All Eatons series ratings are in

full compliance with all applicable
requirements of the latest editions
of UL 489, 891 and 67.
The UL Recognized Component
Directory (the Yellow Book) contains
breaker manufacturers series
connected listings. These are
intended ONLY as a guideline for
use by others who are responsible
for their own testing, labeling and
listing. Therefore, the UL Recognized
Component Directory cannot be used
22
37
UL Issues
In a series rated system, all of the
overcurrent devices in series in the
protective scheme must have been
tested and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories for series combination
use in the system.
Neutral
CA08104001E
to interpret series connected

ratings in assembled equipment.
The assembled equipment must also
be UL tested for series ratings.
40
41
NEC Required Caution Label
Note: The NEC requires the installer to
properly apply and complete this label.
Label(s) must be placed on all equipment
where series ratings are used.
42
43
22.0-12 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 012
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Fuse Application Considerations

Fuses can be used instead of circuit
breakers in fully rated, selectively
coordinated and series connected
protection systems. See the tables
on Page 22.0-18 through Page 22.0-19
for fuse breaker data applied to series
connected designs.
Dont apply fuses using the upover-down method, which has
been recommended by some fuse
manufacturers for sizing a currentlimiting fuse that protects a downstream molded-case circuit breaker
with a specified rms symmetrical
interrupting rating. The method
can lead to erroneous and unsafe
conclusions, and should not be used.
Example: Assume a specific type of
current-limiting fuse rated 2000 A. Then
using the figure below:
1. Draw a vertical line from the
prospective short-circuit current of
200 kA to intersect the typical peak
let-through curve at A.
2. Draw a horizontal line left from
Point A to intersect the
prospective peak curve at B.
3. Drop a vertical line from B
to intersect the horizontal axis
and read the recommended rating,
65 kA rms, concluding that a
circuit breaker with a 65 kA
interrupting capacity will be
protected by a specified 2000 A
current-limiting fuse.
This conclusion is wrong when the
downstream service has a blow-open
contact assembly, as does a moldedcase circuit breaker or similar device.
The reason: The up-over-down method
ignores dynamic impedance (the
inherent current-limiting of the downstream molded-case circuit breaker).
Such impedance is developed directly
by the forces of the let-through current
created when the contacts are
blown open.
Example 1:
Prospective Peak Let-through Current in Amperes
22
460,000
150,000
Asymmetrical
Prospective
Peak Curve
at 15%
Power Factor
B
A
2000 Ampere
Current-limiter
Fuse Curve
65,000
200,000
Prospective Short-circuit rms Amperes

Do Not Use This Method
Figure 22.0-6. Old Up-Over-Down Chart
Applying Series Ratings

The following is provided to use
the series rating tables on the
following pages.
Step 1. Determine the available system
voltage and fault current.
Step 2. Select the appropriate table
using the system voltage.
Step 3. Use the appropriate Series
Equipment Rating column
equal to, or greater than,
the available fault current,
to determine the allowable
combinations of main
(upstream) and branch (downstream) overcurrent devices.
Main devices are shown in
bold/shaded areas. Respective
branch breakers are shown
directly below their associated
main device. If a rating is
not initially found in a column,
first look to the columns to
the right for higher Series
Equipment Ratings within
the same table. If still not
found, use ratings from table
of a higher system voltage
(higher numbered tables).
For proper application of currentlimiting fuses, always refer to

recommendations by the manufacturer
of the circuit breaker, which are based
on actual test data.
240 V, three-phase, three-wire, AC

system with available fault current of
37,438 A. Main (upstream) device is
a three-pole, 150 A, FD breaker. The
branch (downstream) breakers are
two- and three-pole, 20, 30 and 60 A,
240 V, BAB breakers.
1. Go to the 240V table (Table 22.0-7).
2. Look down under the 42 kA
column. This rating is not shown.
3. Look to the columns to the right.
This rating is shown under the 65 kA
column, and therefore is valid.
Example 2:
480Y/277 V, three-phase, four-wire, AC
62,097 A. Main (upstream) device is a
three-pole, 250 A, HJD breaker. The
two- and three-pole, 60, 70 and 100 A
FDB breakers.
1. Go to the 480Y/277 V table
(Table 22.0-10).
2. Look down under the 65 kA
column. This rating is not shown.
3. Look to the columns to the right.
This rating is still not shown.
4. Look at the table with the next
higher system voltage (480 V,
Table 22.0-11).
5. This rating is shown under the 65 kA
column, and therefore is valid.
Example 3:
208Y/120 V, three-phase, four-wire, AC
56,438 A. Main (upstream) device is
a three-pole, 225 A, ED breaker. The
single-pole, 20 A BAB (120/240 V), and
two- and three-pole, 70 A BAB (240 V).
1. Go to the 240 V table (Table 22.0-7).
2. Look under the 65 kA column.
This rating is shown under the
65 kA column, and therefore is
valid for the two- and three-pole
(240 V) breakers.
3. Look at the 120/240 V table
(Table 22.0-6) for the single-pole
(120/240 V) rating.
42
4. Look under the 65 kA column.

This rating is shown under the
65 kA column, and therefore
is valid for the single-pole
(120/240 V) breakers.
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
22.0-13
Sheet 22 013
Other Applications of Series Ratings

Series ratings can also be applied
under the following guidelines:
Any FULLY RATED breaker can be
applied upstream, downstream, or in
the middle of, any of the series ratings
stated in the tables.
Any series rating stated in the tables
may have additional branch breakers
of the EXACT SAME TYPE further
downstream in that rating.
COMBINING SERIES RATINGS is
allowed under certain conditions.
Main and branch series ratings may

be combined if:
Breakers A, B and C are in series
respectively from main to branch.
Breakers A and B series rate together,
breakers A and C series rate at the
same interrupting rating level (or
higher), it is allowable to use A, B and
C together at the A-B series rating.
It is improper to combine series
ratings under the following condition:
Breakers A, B and C are in series
respectively from main to branch.
Breakers A and B series rate together,
breakers B and C series rate at the

same interrupting rating level (or
higher), it is NOT allowable to use A,
B and C together at the A-B or B-C
series rating. However, combining
multiple overcurrent devices as in
this example, can be accomplished if
all devices in the series combination
have been tested together and listed
in triple rating Table 22.0-19.
Main devices shown centered at top
in shaded area, respective branch
devices shown directly below.
100
100
QBHW
GB, GHB
FB-P
FCL
QPHW
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
EHD
FD
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
GHQ
EHD
FD
HFD
30
31
32
33
34
EGH
FDB
35
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF
QBAF
QBAG
36
200
CA08104001E
26
29
GHQ, GHB
225
25
200
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QBAF
QBAG
125
150
24
28
EHD
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
23
27
Table 22.0-6. 120/240 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings

Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
Main
Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical
Breaker
18
22
42
65
Maximum
Amperes
22
LA-P
37
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
EHD
FD
38
EDB
EDS
ED, FD, FDE
EDH, EDC
HFD, HFDE
FDC
FDC
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBHGF
QPHGF
QBHW
QPHW
QBAF
QBAG
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBHGF
QPHGF
QBHW
QPHW
QBAF
QBAG
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QBHGF
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
QBHGF
GB, GHB
GHQ, GHQRSP
EHD, EGS
FD
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
GHQ
GHQRSP
EHD
FD
HFD
EGS
EGH
39
40
41
42
43
22.0-14 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 014
22
23
Table 22.0-6. 120/240 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings (Continued)

Main
Breaker
18
22
42
65
Maximum
Amperes
250
24
25
26
400
27
28
29
30
100
200
JD, JDB
HJD
JDC
HJD
JDC
JDC
BA (1570A)
BAB (1570A)
HQP (1570A)
QBHW
QPHW
EHD
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
EGS
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
EGS
EGH
DK, KD
DK, KD
HKD, CHKD
DK, KD
KDC
HKD
KDC
KDC
LCL
KDB
KDB, CKD
KDB
BA (1570A)
BAB (1570A)
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP (1570A)
QBHW
QPHW
BA (1570A)
BAB (1570A)
HQP (1570A)
CHKD
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
BA (1570A)
BAB (1570A)
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP (1570A)
QBHW
QPHW
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
EGS
EGH
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
600
CKD
EHD
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
EGS 1
CHLD, HLD
EHD
800
31
EHD
1200
32
HMDL
HND
EHD
Not valid with CHKD.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
22.0-15
Sheet 22 015
22
Table 22.0-7. 240 VacBreaker/BreakerSeries Ratings

For single- and two-pole 120/240V rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Table 22.0-6.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
100
150
23

18
22
EHD
BAB_H
HQP_H
42
65
100
200
24
QBHW_H
GB, GHB
FB-P
FCL
QPHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
EHD
FDB
FD
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FD, FDE
FDB
HFD, HFDE
25
BAB_H
HQP_H
FDB
29
LA-P
200
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD
FDB
FD
JD, JDB
250
27
28
BAB_H
HQP_H
225
26
30
31
EDB
EDS
ED
FD, FDE
EDH, EDC
HFD, HFDE
FDC
FDC
HQP_H
BAB_H
QBHW
QPHW
HQP_H
BAB_H
QBHW
QPHW
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD (1570A)
FDB
BAB_H
HQP_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
HJD
JDC
JDC
BAB_H (1570A)
HQP_H (1570 A)
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD
FDB
BAB_H (1570 A)
HQP_H (1570 A)
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
FDB
ED
JD, JDB
EGS
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FD, FDE
FDB
HFD, EDB, EDS
ED, HFDE
EDH
JD, JDB
HJD, EGS, EGH
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.0-16 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 016
22
23
24
Table 22.0-8. 240 VacBreaker/BreakerSeries Ratings

For single- and two-pole 120/240 V rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Table 22.0-6.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
400
25

65
100
DK, KD, KDB

CKD
HKD, CHKD
KDC
KDC
LCL
QBHW_H 1
QPHW_H 1
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, EDB, EDS
ED
JD, JDB
DK, KD, KDB
EGS 2
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, EDB, EDS, HFDE
ED
EDH
JD, JDB
HJD
DK, KD, KDB
HKD
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, HFD, EDB, EDS
ED, FDE, HFDE
EDH
JD, JDB
HJD
DK, KD, KDB
HKD
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD
FDB
26
27
200
28
500
29
JD, JDB
KD, KDB, DK
CKD
30
600
31
32
33
800
1200
34
2500
35
1
36
NB-P
HLD, HLDB, CHLD
LDC
GB 1, GHB 1
FD, EDB, EDS
ED, EHD
JD, JDB
KD, KDB, DK, CKD
LD, LDB
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH
NB-P
HMDL
KD, KDB, DK
EHD
FD
HND, CHND
NDC
EDB, EDS, ED
EHD
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH
RD
RDC
EDB, EDS, ED
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole.
Not valid with CHKD.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
22.0-17
Sheet 22 017
Series Rated Combinations (Continued)
22
Main devices shown in shaded area, respective branch devices shown directly below.
Table 22.0-9. 277 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings
All ratings in this table apply to single-pole branch breakers only. For two- and three-pole branch breakers, see other tables.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
24

22
25
35
65
100
150
25
FCL
100
GHB
GHQ, GHQRSP
EHD
FD
HFD
125
225
250
400
EGS
EGH
GHQ, GHB
GHQ, GHB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
GHB
GHQ
GHQRSP
GHB, GHQRSP
GHQ
EHD
FD
GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
27
29
JD, JDB
JD, JDB
HJD
LCL
JDC
GHB
GHB (1550 A)
GHB (1550 A)
EHD
FD
GHBS
GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
HKD
KD, KDB
HKD, CHKD
KDC
LCL
CKD
CHKD
CKD
GHB
GHB
GHB (1550 A)
EHD
FD
GHB (1550 A)
EHD
FD
GHB (1550 A)
EHD
FD
HFD
GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
KD, KDB
26
28
30
Table 22.0-10. 480Y/277 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings

All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. For single-pole branch breakers, see Table 22.0-9.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
23
31
32
33
34

22
25
35
65
100
100
150
35
FCL
36
GHB, GHQRSP
EGS
125
225
250
JD, JDB
400
KD, KDB
HKD, CHKD
CKD
GHB
GHB
GHB
EGH
37
GHB
GHB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
GHB, GHQRSP
GHB, GHQRSP
GHB
JD, JDB
HJD
JDC
GHB (1550 A)
GHB (1550 A)
GHB
KD, KDB
HKD, CHKD
KDC
LCL
CKD
GHB (1550 A)
GHB (1550 A)
GHB
GHB (1550 A)
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.0-18 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 018
22
23
24
25

All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes

25
35
65
100
26
27
HFD, HFDE
FDC
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
EGS 1
EHD, EGS, EGH

FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
250
JD, JDB
HJD
JDC
LCL
EHD
FDB
EHD
FDB
FD
JD, JDB
EGS
EHD, EGS, EGH

FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
FDE, HFDE
KD, KDB
HKD
KDC
LA-P
LCL
EHD
FDB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
JD, JDB
KD, KDB
EGS
EHD, EGS, EGH

FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
400
35
NB-P
500
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
37
600
38
39
1
40
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FD, FDE
34
36
FCL
EHD
FDB
225
32
33
FB-P
EHD
FDB
FD
HFD
EHD
FDB
FD
HFD
JD, JDB
HJD
30
31
150
LA-P
200
28
29
100
LD, LDB
HLD, HLDB
CLD
CHLD
JD, JDB
FD, FDE
JD, JDB
KD, KDB
LD, LDB
Not valid with HFDE.
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
22.0-19
Sheet 22 019

Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
225
250
18
25
35
FD
HFD
FDC
FDB
FDB
FD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
JDC
LCL
FDB
FDB
FD
JD, JDB
FDB
FD
HFD
JD, JDB
HJD
FDE, HFDE
KD, KDB
HKD, CHKD
KDC
KDC
LCL
CKD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
JD, JDB
HJD
JDC
KD, KDB
HKD
KDC
FDB
FD
JD, JDB
600
LD, LDB
HLD, HLDB
CLD
CHLD
FD
JD, JDB
KD, KDB
LD, LDB
42
50
100
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
200
100
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
GB
GHB
200
26
27

100
24
25
Table 22.0-13. 120/240 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings

400
23
400
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes
22
GB
GHB
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
GB
GHB
GB
GHB
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.0-20 Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
Sheet 22 020
22
23
24
25

Table 22.0-14. 240 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings
For single- and two-pole 120/240 V rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Table 22.0-13.
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes

100
200
100
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB
GHB
26
27
200
28
29
400
30
31
GB
GHB
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB 1
GHB 1
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB
GHB
GB
GHB
600
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
ED
JD, JDB
DK, KD, KDB
32
33
34
Table 22.0-15. 277 Vac Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings

Main fuse class are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings
in this table apply to single-pole branch breakers only. For two- and three-pole branch breakers, consult other tables.
35
36
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. See Table 22.0-13 for single-pole.
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes

65
100
100
37
200
38
39
200
GHBS
GHQ
GHQRSP
GHBS
GHQ
GHQRSP
GHB
GHBS
GHQ
GHQRSP
GHBS
GHQ
GHQRSP
EHD
FD
HFD
EHD
FD
HFD
GHB
400
GHB
GHB
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Overview
June 2015
22.0-21
Sheet 22 021

Table 22.0-16. 480Y/277 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings
Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area.
Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings
in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers
only. For single-pole branch breakers, see Table 22.0-15.
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes
Main
Fuse
65
100
200
Maximum
Amperes
100
200
GHBS
GHBS
GHB
GHBS
GHBS
GHB
400
600
EHD
FD, FDE
HFD
FDC
HFDE
GHB
EHD
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
JD
HJD
JDC
GHB
GHB

only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes

100
100
200
FD
HFD
FDC
26
27
JD
HJD
JDC
JD
HJD
JDC
KD
HKD
KDC
600
28
29
J
KD
HKD
KDC
KD
HKD
KDC
30
31
Table 22.0-19. Triple Series Ratings

Main Fuse
Class and
Maximum
Amperes
Tenant Main
Type
Branch
Type
System
Voltage
ShortCircuit
Series
Rating
(kA, Sym.)
L-6000
DK, KD, KDB
GB, GHB, EHD 1
240
100
L-6000
DK, KD, KDB
GB, GHB
120/240
100
L-6000
DK, KD, KDB
FD 1, FDB
240
100
EHD
L-6000
DK, KD, KDB
JD, JDB
240
100
L-6000
JD, JDB
GB, GHB
240
100
EHD
FD
HFD
FDC
EHD
FD
HFD
FDC
L-6000
JD, JDB
GB, GHB
120/240
100
L-6000
FD
GB, GHB
240
100
L-6000
FD
GB, GHB
120/240
100
L-6000
FD, FDB
BAB_H, HQP_H
QBHW_H, QPHW_H
240
100
L-6000
FD, FDB
BA, BAB
HQP (1570 A)
120/240
100
L-6000
EHD
BAB_H, HQP_H
240
100
L-6000
EHD
BA, BAB, HQP
120/240
100
24
25
FD, FDE
FD, FDE
JD
HFD, HFDE HFD, HFDE HJD
FDC
FDC
JDC
400
23
100
200
22
200
100
200

only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.0-22 Panelboards
June 2015
Sheet 22 022
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1a
June 2015
22.1-1
Sheet 22 023
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1a
Pow-R-Line 1a
Main Lugs Only
Table 22.1-1. Main Circuit Breakers
The short-circuit rating of the MLO

assembled panelboard will be fully
rated based upon the lowest rated
branch device or may be series rated
with an approved upstream device.
Main lugs only ampere ratings:
100, 225, 400 and 600.
Main Circuit Breakers
Pow-R-Line 1a
The short-circuit rating shown is that

of the main breaker only. The shortcircuit rating of the assembled
panelboard is the rating of the lowest
fully rated main or branch device
or the rating of an approved series
rated combination.
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum
Main Lugs
100600 A
Main Breakers
100600 A
Branch Breakers
15100 A
(Bolt-on or plug-on chassis)
Short-Circuit Current Ratings (Symmetrical)
240 Vac: 10 kA and 22 kA fully rated

240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated
Service
Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120 V

and 240/120 V delta
Single-phase, three-wire 120/240 V
Single-phase, two-wire 120 V
Three-phase, three-wire
208 V and 240 V
Suitable for service entrance
applications when specified.
Mains
100
100
100
BAB
QBHW
EHD
10
22
18
150
FDB
18
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
65
100
200
22
42
65
100
200
250
250
250
JD
HJD
JDC
65
100
200
27
400
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
KDC
LHH
65
65
100
200
100
28
600
600
600
600
600
LGE
LGS
LGH
LGC
LGU
65
85
100
100
200
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)

120 Vac
120/240 Vac
240 Vac
32
BAB, HQP
BAB, HQP
BAB, HQP
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
10
10
10
33
BAB-D 1, HQP-D 1
BAB-C 2, HQP-B 2
BABRP 3
BABRSP 3
1560
1530
1530
1530
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
34
QBGF, QBGFEP,
QPGF, QPGFEP
QBCAF 5
1550 4
1550 4
1520
1, 2
1, 2
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
35
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
22
22
22
36
QBHGF, QBGFEP
QPHGF, QPHGFEP
QBHCAF 5
1530
1530
1520
1, 2
1, 2
1
22
22
22
22
22
22
37
1
2
3
HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker.

Switching neutral breaker. Single-pole device requires two-pole space, two-pole device requires
three-pole space.
Solenoid operated breaker.
50 A is two-pole only.
Arc fault breaker.
Main breakers, 100 A, Types BAB and

QBH are horizontally mounted, same
as branch breakers. All other main
breakers are vertically mounted.
For available branch devices, refer

to Table 22.1-2.
Breaker
Type
Table 22.1-2. Branch Circuit Breakers
For available mains, refer

to Table 22.1-1.
Branch Circuits
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240 Vac
22
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Refer to series rating tables beginning

on Page 22.0-13 for the approved
series rated combinations available
for the branch circuit breakers listed
in Table 22.1-2.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.1-2 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1a
June 2015
Sheet 22 024
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 1a
22

Bussing
23
24
25
26
27
28
100400 A: Tin-plated aluminum

is standard, copper is available
as an option.
600 A: Only copper density is available
for these applications.
Boxes
Boxes are made from code-gauge
galvanized steel.
Blank ends are supplied as standard,
knockouts are available upon request.
EZ Trim
Trims are made from code-gauge steel
and painted ANSI 61 gray.
29
All panelboards have door-in-door

as standard with multi-point
catch and lock, and concealed
mounting hardware.
30
Modifications
Table 22.1-3. Sub-Feed Lugs (Main Lugs Only)
31
32
Ampere
Rating
Panel Height
Addition
100
225
0 Inches (0 mm)
0 Inches (0 mm)
Table 22.1-4. Through-Feed Lugs
33
Ampere
Rating
Information
34
100
225
400
600
See Table 22.1-6

See Table 22.1-6
See Table 22.1-6
See Table 22.1-6
Table 22.1-5. Sub-Feed Breakers

(One Per Panel)
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240 V
150
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
250
250
250
400
400
400
400
600
600
600
600
FDB
FD
HFD
FDC
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
JD
HJD
JDC
DK
KD
HKD
KDC
LGE
LGS
LGH
LGC
18
65
100
200
22
42
65
100
200
65
100
200
65
65
100
200
65
85
100
100
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on breakers.
BAB, HQP, QBHW and QPHW require
one additional pole space for shunt
trip, i.e., single-pole is two-pole size,
two-pole is three-pole size and threepole is four-pole size.
Box Sizing and Selection

Box size for all Type 1 panelboards
are available from Table 22.1-6.
Instructions
1. Select the rating and type of mains
required.
2. Count total number of branch
circuit poles (including spaces)
required in the panelboard. Do
not count main breaker poles.
Convert two- or three-pole branch
breakers to single-poles, i.e.,
three-pole breaker, count as
three poles.
Note: For horizontal mounted mains
(BAB Type), use main lug table, include
space in branch section for mains.
3. Using correct table, type of mains

and ampere rating per Step 1, find
total number of poles.
Note: Where total number of poles (Step 2)
fall between number in table, use the next
higher number.
4. Read box size across columns to

the right.
Top and Bottom Gutters (Minimum)
Ground Bar
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Standard bolted in box. Aluminum

is standard, copper is available as
an option.
Side Gutters
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide box:
6.50 inches (165.1 mm).
Enclosures
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4 and 4X.
35
36
Integrated onto panelboard chassis.

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1a
June 2015
22.1-3
Sheet 22 025

Table 22.1-6. Type 1 PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Ampere Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker Type

Mounting Position
22
Maximum Number
of Branch Circuits
Including Provisions 1
Box Dimensions 234
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
Height
Width
Depth
23
100 A
5
100 A
Main lugs or main breaker
100 A 5
with 100 A through-feed lugs
or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE

Vertical
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE

Vertical
225 A
225 A 6
225 A 6
with 225 A or 100 A sub-feed
lugs or breaker
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH, EDC
Vertical
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDE

FDC, EDB, EDS, HFDE, FDCE
ED, EDH, EDC
Vertical
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
400 A
400 A
400 A
with 225 A or 100 A sub-feed
lugs or breaker
1
2
3
4
5
6
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
DK, KD, HKD

KDC, LHH
Vertical
Mains
EHD, FDB, FD
HFD, FDC
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH, EDC
Vertical
Sub-feed
breakers
Greater than 42 branch circuit panelboards are available for jurisdiction governed by the 2008 National Electrical Code.
Smaller panelboard box sizes are available if required. Contact Eaton for application information.
Add 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) for SPD.
28.00-inch (711.2) optional width is available for panelboards with high circuit counts.
For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch
section for mains.
JD, HJD, JDC is same space requirement as 400 A DK, HKD, KDC.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.1-4 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1a
June 2015
Sheet 22 026
22
23
24
Table 22.1-6. Type 1 PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

Main Breaker Type
Mounting Position
Maximum Number
of Branch Circuits
Box Dimensions 234

Height
Width
Depth
600 A
LGE, LGS
LGH, LGC
LGU
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
600 A
with 225 A or 100 A sub-feed lugs
or breaker
LGE, LGS,
LGH, LGC
LGU
Vertical
Mains
EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDC,
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH, EDC
Vertical
Sub-feed
breakers
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
LGE, LGS,
LGH, LGC,
LGU
Vertical
Mains
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
Sub-feed
breakers
18
30
42
48
54
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
Ampere Rating
of Mains
600 A
25
26
27
28
29
600 A
or sub-feed breaker
30
31
1
2
3
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 2a
June 2015
22.2-1
Sheet 22 027
Pow-R-Line 2a
Mains
Main Lugs Only
For available mains, refer to Table 22.2-1.

The GHB main breaker is horizontally

mounted, same as branch breakers.
All other main breakers are vertically
mounted.

100, 225 and 400.
24
For available branch devices, refer to

Table 22.2-2.
25

of the main breaker only. The short
circuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully
rated main or branch device or the
rating of an approved series rated
combination.
General Description
240 Vac maximum

480Y/277 Vac maximum
Note: PRL2a panelboards are suitable for
use on three-phase, three-wire applications
when derived from a three-phase, four-wire
480Y/277 Vac service where the neutral is
not brought to the panelboard. For threephase, three-wire 480 Vac Delta services use
a PRL3a panelboard.
250 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs
100600 A
Main Breakers
100600 A
Branch Breakers
15100 A (bolt-on)
240 Vac: 65 kA fully rated

480Y/277 Vac: 14 kA fully rated
480Y/277 Vac: 22150 kA series rated
250 Vdc: 10 kA and 14 kA fully rated
Service

and 240/120 V Delta and 480Y/277 V
Three-phase, three-wire 208
and 240 V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc

CA08104001E
Breaker Frame
(Amperes)
100
100
Breaker
Type
GHB
EHD
240 Vac
480Y/277 Vac
65
18
14
14
125/250 Vdc
14
10
150
FDB
18
14
10
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
ED
65
100
200
65
35
65
100
10
22
22
250
250
250
250
250
EDH
EDC
JD
HJD
JDC
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
100
10
22
22
400
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
LHH
KDC
65
65
100
100
200
35
65
65
100
10
10
22
22
600
600
600
600
LGE
LGS
LGH
LGC, LGU
65
65
100
200
35
50
65
100
22
22
42
42
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles

120 Vac
240 Vac
277 Vac
480Y/277 Vac
125/250 Vdc
GHB 2
GHB 2
GHQ
15100
15100
1520
1
2, 3
1
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
1
1, 2
1
65
65
65
25
14
14
14
2
3
For use on 480Y/277 Vac systems only.

29
30
1530
HGHB
GHQRSP 23 1520
GHBGFEP
1560
27
225
225
225
225
26
28
Voltage
23
Branch Circuits
Pow-R-Line 2a
Panelboard Ratings
22
38
39
40
41

series rated combinations available for
the branch circuit breakers listed in
Table 22.2-2.
42
43
22.2-2 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 2a
June 2015
Sheet 22 028
Technical DataPow-R-Line 2a
22
Technical Data
Shunt Trips
Bussing

GHB breakers with shunt trips require
three-pole frame.
Box size for all Type 1 panelboards are

available from Table 22.2-6.
23
100400 A: Tin-plated aluminum is

standard, copper is available
as an option.
24
Boxes
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

galvanized steel.
Ground Bar
is standard. Copper is available as
an option.
1. Using description on the required

panelboard, select the rating and
type of mains required.
Enclosures

breakers to single-poles. i.e.,
three poles.
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4/4X.
EZ Trim

All panelboards have door-in-door as

standard with multi-point catch and
lock, and concealed mounting
hardware.

(GHB Type), use main lug table, include
Modifications


Amperes
Panel Height
Addition
100
225
0 Inches (0 mm)
0 Inches (0 mm)

higher number.

the right.
32
33
34
35
Amperes
Instructions
Information
Top and Bottom Gutters (minimum)

100
225
400
600
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
See Table 22.2-6

See Table 22.2-6
See Table 22.2-6
See Table 22.2-6
Side Gutters
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Table 22.2-5. Sub-Feed Breakers

(One Per Panel)
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
240 V
480Y/277 V
36
150
FDB
18
14
37
225
225
225
FD
HFD
FDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
38
225
225
225
ED
EDH
EDC
65
100
200
39
250
250
250
JD
HJD
JDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
40
400
400
400
KD
HKD
KDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 2a
June 2015
22.2-3
Sheet 22 029
Ampere
Rating
of Mains
22
Main Breaker Type

Mounting
Position
Maximum
Number
of Branch
Circuits
Including
Provisions 1
Box Dimensions 234
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE

Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
Height
Width
Depth
23
24
100 A Panelboards
100 A 5
Main lugs or
main breaker
100 A 5
or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,

Vertical
225 A Panelboards
225 A 6
Main lugs or
main breaker
225 A 6
with 225 A or 100 A through-feed
lugs or sub-feed breaker
ED, EDH, EDC, FDE

FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE
vertical
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,

ED, EDH, EDC
vertical
400 A Panelboards
400 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
400 A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 225 or
100 A through-feed lugs
or sub-feed breaker
1
2
3
4
5
6
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
vertical
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
Main
EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
vertical
Sub-feed
breaker
For horizontal mounted mains (GHB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
JD, HJD, JDC is same space requirements as 400 A DK, HKD, KDC.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.2-4 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 2a
June 2015
Sheet 22 030
22
23
24
25
Table 22.2-6. Type 1 PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

Main Breaker Type
Mounting
Position
Maximum
Number
of Branch
Circuits
Including
Provisions 1
Box Dimensions 234

Height
Width
Depth
600 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
LGE, LGS,
LGH, LGC,
LGU
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
600 A
with 225 A or 100 A sub-feed lugs
or breaker
LGE, LGS,
LGH, LGC,
LGU
Vertical
Mains
EHD, FDB, FD
HFD, FDC
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH, EDC
Vertical
Sub-feed
breakers
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
LGE, LGS,
LGH, LGC,
LGU
Vertical
Mains
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
Sub-feed
breakers
18
30
42
48
54
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
Ampere
Rating
of Mains
600 A Panelboards
26
27
28
29
30
600 A
or sub-feed breaker
31
1
32
2
3
4
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3a
June 2015
22.3-1
Sheet 22 031
Pow-R-Line 3a
Mains
Main Lugs Only

Main breakers, 100, 150 and 225 A,

Types EHD, FD, FDE, FDB, HFD, HFDE
and FDC may be horizontally mounted,
same as branch breakers. All other
main breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.3-2.
Pow-R-Line 3a
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum

480 Vac maximum
600 Vac maximum
250 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs
100800 A
Main Breakers
100600 A
Branches
240 Vac 15225 A

480 Vac 15225 A
600 Vac 15225 A (bolt-on)
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical)

250 Vdc: 1022 kA fully rated
Service
Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120 V,

240/120 V delta and 480Y/277 V
Three-phase, three-wire 240, 480
and 600 V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
22
23

100, 250, 400, 600 and 800.
24
25

of the main breaker only. The shortcircuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully
rated main or branch device, or the
combination.
26
27
28
Breaker Frame
(Amperes)
Breaker
Type

240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
250 Vdc
100
100
100
EHD
FCL
FB-P
18
200
200
14
150
200
200
10
150
FDB
18
14
14
10
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
65
100
200
22
42
65
100
200
35
65
100
18
25
35
10
22
22
250
250
250
JD
HJD
JDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
18
25
35
10
22
22
33
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
LHH
KDC
LCL
LA-P
65
65
100
100
200
200
200
35
65
65
100
200
200
25
35
65
200
10
10
22
22
34
600
600
400
400
600
600
600
600
600
600
LGE
LGH
LGC
LGU
LD
HLD
LDC
CLD 2
CHLD 2
CLDC 2
65
100
200
200
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
100
150
35
65
100
35
65
100
18
35
50
65
25
35
50
25
35
50
1
2
29
30
31
32
35
22
22
42
50
22
25
25
22
25
25
100,000 AIC based on NEMA test procedure.

100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 or 4X enclosure.
36
37
38
39
40
41

42
43
CA08104001E
22.3-2 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3a
June 2015
Sheet 22 032
22
23

in Table 22.3-2.

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Volts

of Poles 120 120/240
240 480 600 125
Vac Vac
Vac Vac Vac Vdc
250
Vdc
BAB
BAB
BAB
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
10
10
10
BAB-D 1
BAB-C 2
BABRP 3
BABRSP 3
1560
1530
1530
1530
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
QBGF, QBGFEP
QBCAF 5
1550 4
1520
1, 2
1
10
10
10
10
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
QBHGF, QBHGFEP
QBHCAF 5
1570
15100
15100
1550 4
1520
1
2
2, 3
1, 2
1
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
GHB 67
GHB 6
15100
15100
1
2, 3
65
65
14
14
GHQ 67
1520
65
14
29
HGHB 67
1530
65
25
GHBGFEP
GHQRSP 367
1560
1520
1
1, 2
65
65
65
65
14
14
14
30
EHD 7
EHD
15100
15100
1
2, 3
14
18
14
14
10
10
FDB
15150
2, 3
18
14
14
10
FD 7
FD, FDE
15100
15225
1
2, 3
65
65
35
35
18
10
10
HFD 7
HFD, HFDE
15100
15225
1
2, 3
65
100
65
65
25
10
22
15225
2, 3
200
100
35
22
100225
100225
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
22
42
65
100
200
10
10
10
10
10
24
25
26
27
28
31
32
33
34
FDC, FDCE
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
1
2
35
3
4
36
5
6
7
14
14

three-pole space.
50A is two-pole only.
Arc fault breaker.
Single-pole breaker rated 277 Vac.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3a
June 2015
22.3-3
Sheet 22 033

Bussing
Tin-plated aluminum is standard,
copper is available as an option.
Density rated bus is also available
as an option.
Boxes
galvanized steel.
EZ Trim
mounting hardware.
Modifications
Ampere Rating
Added Panel Height
100
250
0X
1X
Shunt Trips
Ground Bar

BAB and QBHW require one additional
pole space for shunt trip, i.e., singlepole is two-pole size, two-pole is
three-pole size and three-pole is
four-pole size. GHB breakers with
shunt trip require three-pole frame.

an option.
Types 12, 3R, 4/4X.
Note: Type 12, 3R, 4/4X enclosures are
not available for 800 A applications.
ASCO 920 can be bus connected

and mounted in panel for main or
sub-main (split-bus) applications.
Time Clocks
Side Gutters (Minimum)
Time clocks are mounted at the top or

bottom of the panel, either in extended
end gutters or in a separate enclosure
under a separate door.
4.00 inches (101.6 mm).
All mains: 5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Box Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
100400 A
600800 A

Ampere Rating
Added Panel Height
100
250
400
600
2X
5X
8X
8X
23X
31X
40X
53X
225/250
225/250
225/250
400
400
400
600
600
600
Breaker Interrupting
Added
Type
Rating
Panel
(kA Symmetrical) Height
JD
HJD
JDC
KD
HKD
KDC
LD
HLD
LDC
480 V
65
100
200
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
100
35
65
100
35
65
100
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
35
Table 22.3-5. Sub-Feed Breakers (One Per Panel)
240 V
25
34
Note: Sub-feed breakers and through-feed

lugs cannot be supplied in the same panel.
Ampere
Rating
24
28
Table 22.3-6. Type 1 Box SizesDimensions in Inches (mm)
14X
23X
31X
40X
53X
23
Enclosures
Remote Control Switches
Maximum
Panel Height
X Units
22
36
14X
37
15X
38
17X
39
Note: Sub-feed breakers and through-feed

lugs cannot be supplied in the same panel.
Note: Twin mounted J-Frame sub-feed
breakers are available. Requires 20X panel
height addition.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.3-4 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3a
June 2015
Sheet 22 034
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Panel Layout Instructions
Table 22.3-7. Layout Example
1. Select:
Poles
3X-6
5X-12
8X-18
10X-24
13X-30
a. Required mains (lugs or

breaker).
b. Neutral where required.
c. Branch circuits as required.
15X-36
18X-42
2. Layout panel as shown in

Table 22.3-7, using appropriate
X dimensions.
3. Using total X units (panel height)
find box height in inches from
Table 22.3-6. (When total X units
come out to an uneven number,
use next highest number, i.e., if
total X comes out 25X, use 31X.)

Multiple selections 1
may be used on panel.
Single-pole
Single-pole
Two-pole
Two-pole
Single-pole
Three-pole
5X 100, 250 A
8X 400, 600, 800 A
Two- and three-pole
3X, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, FDE, EDC 3, FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE
(225 A maximum)
Main lug section
2X 100 A
5X 250 A
8X 400, 600 A
14X800 A
Horizontal
mounting
Vertically
mounted
36
3
38
2X two-pole
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 5, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC
3X three-pole
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDE, FDC 5, HFDE, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC
Main breaker
section
37
EHD
FDB
FD,FDE (150 A
HFD, HFDE maximum)
FDC
Neutral selection 2
34
35
1X
2X
3X
Two-pole
32
33
BAB
QBGF
QBHW
QBHGF
QBGFEP
QBCAF
GHB
GHQ
HGHB
QBHGF
QBHCAF
GHBGFEP
GHQRSP
4
5
6
7
7X EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FDE, HFDE
9X FCL, FB-P 6
14X JD, HJD, JDC
15X DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH
17X LD, HLD, LDC, CLD, CHLD, CLDC
18X LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
21X LCL 7, LA-P 67
GHB, GHQ and HGHB breakers cannot be mixed on same connector as BAB, QBHW.
Sizing shown is for 100% rated neutral with
mechanical lugs. For 200% rated neutral with mechanical lugs, add 3X. For special lug
arrangements, contact Eaton.
Maximum of six breakers per panel.
Add 5X for 200 kA maximum SPD.
Horizontally mounted 15225 A main
breakers EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, may be furnished as branch breaker construction. Branch
breakers single-, two- or three-pole as required, may be located opposite these main breakers
(150 A maximum).
FB-P and LA-P top mounting only.
LCL, LA-P main breaker requires 6.50 inch (165.1 mm) deep box.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3E
June 2015
22.3-5
Sheet 22 035
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 3E
Pow-R-Line 3E
Mains
Main Lugs Only

Main breakers, 100, 150 and 225 A,

Types EG, EHD, FD, FDE, FDB, HFD,
HFDE and FDC may be horizontally
mounted, same as branch breakers.
All other main breakers are vertically
mounted.
Pow-R-Line 3E
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum

480 Vac maximum
250 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs
100600 A
Main Breakers
100600 A
Branches
240 Vac 15125 A

480 Vac 15125 A
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical)

Service

240/120 V delta and 480Y/277 V
240 and 480 V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
22
23

100, 250, 400 and 600.
24
Branch Circuits

to Table 22.3-9.

panelboard is the rating of the
lowest fully rated main or branch
device, or the rating of an approved
series rated combination.
25
27
28
Breaker Frame
(Amperes)
Breaker
Type
125
125
125
EGB 1
EGS 1
EGH 1
35
100
200
18
35
65
10
35
42
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
22
42
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
100
10
22
22
400
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
LHH
KDC
65
65
100
100
200
35
65
65
100
10
22
22
600
600
LGE
LGH
65
100
35
65
22
22
26
240 Vac
480 Vac
250 Vdc
29
30
31
32
33
34
Horizontally/branch mounted.
35

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles

120 Vac 2
240 Vac
277 Vac 2
480 Vac
250 Vdc
EGB
EGS
EGH
15125
15125
15125
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
35
100
200
35
100
200
18
35
65
18
35
65
10
35
42
Applicable to single-pole devices only.

in Table 22.3-9.

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.3-6 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3E
June 2015
Sheet 22 036
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 3E
22
Modifications
Bussing
Table 22.3-10. Through-Feed Lugs,

Sub-Feed Lugs (Main Lug Panels Only)
and Sub-Feed Breakers (One Per Panel)

23

as an option.
24
Boxes
25
26
27
28
29
30

galvanized steel.
EZ Trim
mounting hardware.
Ampere
Rating
Information
All
Table 22.3-11
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on two- and
three-pole breakers.
Ground Bar
an option.
Enclosures
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4/4X.

For complete product description
and available ratings, refer to Tab 34.
Instructions
breakers to single-poles, i.e.,
three poles.
(GHB Type), use main lug table, include

higher number.
31

the right.
32

5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
33
Side Gutters
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3E
June 2015
22.3-7
Sheet 22 037
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 3E

Ampere Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker Type

Mounting Position
22
Maximum Number
of Branch Circuits
Box Dimensions 234
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
30
42
48
54
60
72
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
Height
Width
Depth
23
125 A Panelboards
5
125 A
125 A 5
or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE

HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,

HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
225 A Panelboards
225 A
225 A
Main lugs or main breaker with
225 or 100 A through-feed lugs
or sub-feed breaker
ED, EDH, EDC, FDE

FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,

HFD, FDC, HFDE
ED, EDH, EDC
Vertical
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
400 A Panelboards
400 A
400 A
Main lugs or main breaker with
225 or 100 A through-feed lugs
or sub-feed breaker
DK, KD, LHH

HKD, KDC
Vertical
DK, KD, LHH

HKD, KDC
Vertical
Main
EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Vertical
Sub-feed
breaker
34
35
36
37
38
600 A Panelboards
600 A
1
2
3
4
5
LGS, LGH, LGC

Vertical
For horizontal mounted mains (EG Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.3-8 Panelboards
June 2015
Sheet 22 038
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
22.4-1
Sheet 22 039
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 4
Pow-R-Line 4
Branches
Bussing
2501200 A tin-plated aluminum is

standard; copper is available as an
option. Density rated bus is also
available as an option.
Breakers 151200 A, bolt-on

Breakers 20600 A drawout
Fusible switches 301200 A, bolt-on

250 Vdc: 1022 kA fully rated
Service
PRL4B
Circuit Breaker
Panelboard
PRL4F
Fusible
Panelboard
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 V, 480 V or 600 Vac maximum

600 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs

240/120 V delta and 480Y/277 V
Three-phase, three-wire 120, 240,
480 and 600 V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
Two-wire 600 Vdc

Main Lugs Only

22
23
24
25

250, 400, 600, 800 and 1200.
26
27

fully rated main or branch device, or
the rating of an approved series rated
combination.
28
29
30
31
2501200 A
Main Breakers
2501200 A
32
Main Switches
2001200 A
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.4-2 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
Sheet 22 040
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 4
22
Breaker Frame
Amperes
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
2
3
4
38
Breaker
Type

240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
250 Vdc
600 Vdc
250
250
250
250
250 1
JD
HJD
JDC
LCL
HJDDC
65
100
200
200
35
65
100
200
18
25
35
10
22
22
42
35
350
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400 1
NHH
DK
KD 2
CKD 23
LHH
HKD 2
CHKD 23
KDC 2
LCL 2
LA-P
HKDDC
100
65
65
65
100
100
100
200
200
200
65
35
35
65
65
65
100
200
200
35
25
25
35
35
35
65
200
10
10
10
42
22
22
22
42
65
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600 1
LGE 4
LGH 4
LGC 4
LGU
LD 2
CLD 23
HLD 2
CHLD 23
LDC 2
CLDC 3
HLDDC
65
100
200
200
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
65
100
150
35
35
65
65
100
100
18
35
50
65
25
25
35
35
50
50
22
22
42
50
22
22
25
25
25
25
42
35
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800 1
MDL 2
CMDL 23
HMDL 2
CHMDL 23
ND 2
CND 23
HND 2
CHND 23
NDC 2
CNDC 23
NB-P
HMDLDC
65
65
100
100
65
65
100
100
200
200
200
50
50
65
65
50
50
65
65
100
100
200
25
25
35
35
25
25
35
35
65
65
200
22
22
25
25
42
35
ND 2
CND 23
HND 2
CHND 23
NDC 2
CNDC 3
NBDC
65
65
100
100
200
200
50
50
65
65
100
100
25
25
35
35
65
65
42
50
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200 1
1
37
Main Fusible Switches
Table 22.4-1. Main Circuit BreakersType PRL4B and PRL4D

of the main switch only. The shortcircuit rating of the assembled panelboards is the rating of the lowest fully
combination. (Fuses are not included.)
400 and 600 A switches with shunt trip
will be rated 100 kA.
Note: Circuit breaker panelboards
are designated PRL4B. Fusible Switch
panelboards are designated PRL4F.
Table 22.4-2. Main Fusible Switches

Switch
Fuse
Rating
Class
Amperes
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
240 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc
Switches Rated 240 Vac, 250 Vdc

200
400
600
800
1200
R, T
R, T
R, T
L
L
200
200
200
200
200
10
10
200
200
200
200
200
Switches Rated 600 Vac

200
400
600
800
1200
R, J, T
R, J, T
R, J, T
L
L
200
200
200
200
200

100% rated circuit breaker.
Available in drawout configuration for PRL4D.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
22.4-3
Sheet 22 041

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
22
Number
of Poles

120 Vac
120/240 Vac
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
600 Vdc
BAB
BAB
BAB
QBGF, QBGFEP
1570
15100
15100
1550 1
1
2
2, 3
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
QBHGF, QBHGFEP
1570
15100
15100
1530
1
2
2, 3
1, 2
22
22
22
22
22
GHB 23
GHB 3
15100
15100
1
2, 3
65
65
14
14
14
14
GHQ 23
14
25
10
10
1520
65
23
1530
65
GHBGFEP
1560
65
EHD
EHD
15100
15100
1
2, 3
14
18
HGHB
14
14
FDB
15150
2, 3
18
14
14
10
FD 2
FD, FDE 4
15100
15225
1
2, 3
65
65
35
35
18
10
10
HFD 2
HFD, HFDE 4
HFDDC 5
15100
15225
15150
1
2, 3
2,3
65
100
65
65
25
10
42
22
42
35
FDC, FDCE
15225
2, 3
200
100
35
22
FB-P
15100
2, 3
200
200
200
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
100225
100225
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
22
42
65
100
200
10
10
10
10
10
JD
HJD
JDC
HJDDC 5
LCL
70250
70250
70250
70250
125250
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
200
200
35
65
100
200
18
25
35
42
10
22
22
42
35
NHH
DK
KD
CKD 7
HKD
LHH 6
CHKD 7
KDC
150350
250400
100400
100400
100400
125400
100400
100400
3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
100
65
65
100
100
100
100
200
65
35
65
65
65
65
100
35
25
35
35
35
35
65
10
10
22
22
42
22
22
HKDDC 5
LCL
LA-P
100400
200400
125400
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
200
200
200
200
200
42
42
35
1
2
3
4
5
Single-pole breaker rated 277 Vac.
At 480 V, use on 480Y/277 Vac system only.
Three-pole only.
6
7

100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus.
K- and N-Frame breakers require density
rated copper bus. Not available in Type 12,
4 and 4X enclosures.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.4-4 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
Sheet 22 042
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Table 22.4-3. Branch Circuit Breakers (Continued)

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles

120 Vac
120/240 Vac
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
600 Vdc
LGE
LGH
LGC
LGU
LD
CLD 1
HLD
CHLD 1
LDC
CLDC 1
HLDDC 2
250600
250600
250600
250600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
65
100
200
200
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
65
100
150
35
35
65
65
100
100
18
35
50
65
25
25
35
35
50
50
42
22
22
42
50
22
22
25
25
25
25
42
35
MDL
CMDL 1
HMDL
CHMDL
HMDLDC 2
300800
300800
300800
300800
300800
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
65
65
100
100
50
50
65
65
25
25
35
35
42
22
22
25
25
42
35
ND
CND 1
HND
CHND 1
NDC
CNDC 1
400800
400800
400800
400800
400800
400800
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
35
65
65
100
100
25
25
35
35
65
65
NB-P
NBDC 2
400800
7001200
2, 3
2, 3
200
200
200
42
42
50
ND
CND 1
HND
CHND 1
NDC
CNDC 1
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
35
65
65
100
100
25
25
35
35
65
65
1
2
33
34
100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. K- and N-Frame breakers require density rated copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 and 4X enclosures.
Table 22.4-4. Branch Fusible Switches (Fuses are not included)

Switch
Rating
Amperes
Mounting
Fuse
Class

240 V
600 V
250 Vdc
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
30/30
60/60
100/100
200/200
100
200
400
600
800
1200
Twin
Twin
Twin
Twin
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
R
R
R
R, T
R
R, T
R, T
R, T
L
L
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
R, J
R, J
R, J
J, T
R, J
R, J, T
R, J, T
R, J, T
L
L
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Twin
Twin
Twin
Twin
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
100% rated breakers and all N-Frame breakers have

Digitrip RMS 310 solid-state trip units as standard
K-, L- and M-Frame three-pole circuit breakers are optionally available with the Digitrip RMS 310 solid-state trip unit
The trip function options for the Digitrip RMS 310 include
LS and LSI. Main circuit breakers can also include the LSG
and LSIG integral ground fault trip functions
Digitrip OPTIM trip units are not available in panelboard
construction
Switches Rated 600 Vac

30/30
60/60
100/100
200/200
100
200
400
600
800
1200
Circuit breakers will have thermal-magnetic trip units with

the following exceptions:
Switches Rated 240 Vac, 250 Vdc
35
Circuit Breaker Trip Units
Note: Twin branch switches of different ampere ratings are available,

i.e., 30/60, 30/100, 60/100.
Refer to the series rating tables beginning on Page 22.0-13

for the approved series rated combinations available for
the branch circuit breakers listed in Table 22.4-3.
Modifications
Enclosures
Types 12, 3R, 4/4X.
Ground Bar
Standard bolted in box with (3) #6300 kcmil terminals.
Aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option.
Trims
Trim with door is available as an option for Type 1 enclosures.

Integrated onto panelboard chassis. For complete product
description and available ratings, refer to Tab 34.
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
22.4-5
Sheet 22 043
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 4B
Main Lug (MLO), Main Breaker, Neutral, Through-Feed (TFL) and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) X Space Requirements
(For compression lugs, or other configurations not shown, refer to Eaton.)
= Blank means no bus under cover to meet NEC cable bending space.
MLO, SFL
250 A, 400 A
600 A and 800 A
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
ThroughFeed Lugs
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W

MLO
Main
Breaker
7X
10X
7X
Main
Breaker
19X
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
3Ph 4W
Branch
Devices
3Ph 3W
2X
12X
7X
1200 A
1200 A
Branch
Devices
2X
88 A Vertically Mtd.
MSD Main Breaker
only, in 24.00-inch
(609.6 mm) wide
box. Available with
38X and 50X Panel
Height only.
36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
Branch
Devices
ThroughFeed Lugs
7X
Blank
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W
Blank
Main
Breaker
29
2X
Main
Breaker
Branch
Devices
Blank
30
Branch
Devices
2X
3Ph 4W
Blank
31
3Ph 3W
32
33
34
Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and

Sub-Feed Lugs (750 kcmil Maximum)
MLO, SFL
MLO, TFL
20X
250 A , 400 A ,
600 A and 800 A
35
13X
20X
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
3X
9X
Blank
13X
ThroughFeed Lugs
3X
9X
Blank
ThroughFeed Lugs
MLO, TFL
20X
15X
15X
1200 A
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
5X
11X
Blank
ThroughFeed Lugs
37
39
20X
1200 A
36
38
3Ph 3W
MLO
36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
5X
11X
Blank
3Ph 4W
Figure 22.4-2. X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Sub-feed lugs are available 250600 A. For 600 A, use 1200 A X space.
CA08104001E
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
3Ph 4W
27
28
36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
26
3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W

1
25
MLO, TFL
12X
36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
24
MLO, TFL
10X
250 A , 400 A ,
600 A and 800 A
23
Main Breaker with Neutral (when required)

(500 kcmil Maximum)
Standard Main Lug, Through-Feed and

22
3Ph 3W
ThroughFeed Lugs
40
41
42
43
22.4-6 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
Sheet 22 044
22
Breaker (PRL4B) Type Distribution

Panelboards 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
23
Panelboard Layout and Dimensions
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
To determine the dimensions of a

given panelboard enclosure, make
a layout sketch by fitting together
the main branch and lug modules
according to the appropriate tables in
the layout guide. Assign X units to
each module as shown and obtain a
total X number.
The height of the enclosure is related
to the total X units in the layout as
shown in Figure 22.4-3. Three standard
box heights are available to accommodate any and all layout arrangements.
X unit totals that do not exactly
match those in Table 22.4-5 must be
rounded off to the next higher standard
(26X, 38X, 50X).
When a calculated X total for a panel
exceeds 50X, the panel must be split
into two or more separate sections
with X space for through-feed lugs
figured in for all but one section. If a
neutral is required, a separate neutral
bar and appropriate X space must
be included in each section.
Layout Example
1 PRL4B panelboard, 480Y/277V,
three-phase, four-wire, 65 kA,
800A, main lug, consisting of:
12 20 A/single-pole HFD
2 250 A/three-pole HJD
1 400 A/three-pole HKD
20 A/1P
20 A/1P
1X
20 A/1P
20 A/1P
1X
20 A/1P
20 A/1P
1X
20 A/1P
20 A/1P
1X
20 A/1P
20 A/1P
1X
20 A/1P
20 A/1P
1X
250 A/3P
3X
250 A/3P
3X
400 A/3P
4X
Main Lugs
2. From Table 22.4-5, enclosure

height for 26X panel = 57.00 inches
(1447.8 mm).
3. Width = 24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
directly from layout guide.
4. Total enclosure depth = 11.30
inches (287.0 mm)standard
for all PRL4 panelboards.
10X
Neutral
TOTAL =
34
800 A
1. From layout guide, total X

height of panel = 26X, (which is a
design standard and no rounding
off is necessary).
26X
Note: For SPD unit, add 7X up to 200 kA and

10X for SPD above 200 kA.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
22.4-7
Sheet 22 045

Table 22.4-5. Standard Panelboard and Box
Box
Width
26X
38X
50X
57.00 (1447.8) 24.00 (609.6) 2 10.40 (264.2)

73.50 (1866.9) 24.00 (609.6) 2 10.40 (264.2)
90.00 (2286.0) 24.00 (609.6) 2 10.40 (264.2)
38X
50X
73.50 (1866.9) 36.00 (914.4)

90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4)
10.40 (264.2)
10.40 (264.2)
38X
50X
73.50 (1866.9) 44.00 (1117.6)

90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6)
10.40 (264.2)
10.40 (264.2)
22
Box 1
Depth
Filler
23
18
12X Poles
20X
42
Poles
100 A
Max.
24
400 AMaximum Bus Rating
Box depth is 10.40 inches (264.2 mm),

cover adds 0.90 inches (22.9 mm) for overall
enclosure depth of 11.30 inches (287.0 mm).
800 A maximum bus size in
24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide box.
Note: Flush trims available on PRL4B panels

with Door-in-Door enclosure only.
1P
1P
1X
2P
2P
2X
3P
3P
2P
2P
3P
Breaker To Fusible Transition, All Widths
1X
Sub Panel
3P
10.62 inches (269.9 mm)

2 or 3P

5.00 inches (127.0 mm)
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
Load
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
3X
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC
4X
400 A
Max.
DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH,

CKD, CHKD, HKDDC
600 A
Max.
LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
2 or 3P
44-Inch (1117.6 mm) Wide Box
2 or 3P
600 A
Max.
LD, HLD, CLD, CHLD, LDC, HLDDC
7X
10X
SPD
(7X through 200 kA)

(10X through 400 kA)
3X
100 A
Max.
FCL, FB-P, HFDDC
3X
250 A
Max.
JD, HJD, JDC
400 A
Max.
LCL, LA-P, NHH
800 A
Max.
MDL, HMDL, HMDLDC

CMDL, CHMDL
6X
2 or 3P
25
26
27
28
6X
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Box
250 A
Max.
4X
Load
2 or 3P
225 A
Max.
3X
2 or 3P
3P
EHD,
FDB, FD, FDE, HFDE
HFD, FDC, FDCE
2X
Side Gutters (Minimum)
225 A
Max.
3X
24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Wide Box
Panel Box
Height Height
1200 A
Max.
6X
2 or 3P
4X
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
ND, HND, NDC
400 A
Max.
DK, KD, HKD,

KDC
800 A
Max.
NB-P
1200 A
Max.
CND, CHND, CNDC, NBDC
37
38
6X
39
Breaker may be used as main.
Figure 22.4-3. Layout for Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Devices
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
j
BAB and QBHW breakers with shunt trips require one additional pole space, i.e., single-pole
is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size, and three-pole is four-pole size.
If panel contains only BAB or QBHW branch breakers, use a PRL1a panelboard.
GHB, HGHB or GHQ breakers cannot be mixed on same subchassis as BAB, QBHW.
If panel contains only GHB, HGHB or GHQ branch breakers, use a PRL2a panelboard.
When only one single-pole breaker of the group is required on either side of chassis,
the single-pole breaker space required changes from 1X to 2X.
Minimum 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide box is required if optional #6300 kcmil lug is required.
MDL main breaker in 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide box, refer to Figure 22.4-1.
Optional 750 kcmil terminal requires 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
Note: See Page 22.4-5 for MLO or Neutral and Vertically Mounted Mains space requirements.
CA08104001E
40
41
42
43
22.4-8 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
Sheet 22 046
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 4F
22
23
Main Lug (MLO), Main Switch, Neutral Through-Feed Lug (TFL) and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) X Space Requirements
(For other configurations refer to Eaton.)
= Blank means no bus under cover to meet NEC cable bending space.
Standard Main Lugs, Through-Feed Lugs
and Sub-Feed Lugs (500 kcmil Maximum)
24
MLO, TFL
MLO, SFL
25
10X
26
250 A , 400 A ,
600 A and 800 A
7X
28
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W
800 A 25X
1200 26X
12X
Branch
Devices
33
800 A,
1200 A
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
800 A and 1200 A

Vertically Mounted
Main Switch .
36.00-inch (914.4 mm) or
44.00-inch (1117.6 mm)
wide box.
3Ph 4W
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W

1
2
800 and 1200 A mains available only in vertical mounting.
34
Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and

35
MLO, SFL
MLO, TFL
20X
36
250 A , 400 A ,
600 A and 800 A
37
13X
20X
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
3X
38
9X
Blank
250 A, 400 A,
600 A and 800 A
ThroughFeed Lugs
3X
13X
20X
36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
42
ThroughFeed Lugs
MLO, TFL
20X
15X
1200 A
41
9X
Blank
3Ph 3W
MLO
40
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
3Ph 4W
39
15X
1200 A
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
5X
11X
Blank
ThroughFeed Lugs
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
5X
11X
Blank
3Ph 4W
43
3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
7X
ThroughFeed Lugs
7X
Blank
32
3Ph 3W
400 A and 600 A

Vertically Mounted
Main Switch.
36.00-inch (914.4 mm)
Branch or 44.00-inch
Devices (1117.6 mm)
wide box.
MLO, TFL
12X
2X
7X
3Ph 4W
1200 A
31
22X
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
ThroughFeed Lugs
MLO
30
Main
Switch
200 A, 400 A
600 A
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
Main
Switch
7X
10X
27
29
Main Switch with Neutral (when required)

(500 kcmil Maximum)
ThroughFeed Lugs
3Ph 3W

3
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
22.4-9
Sheet 22 047
Fusible (PRL4F) Type Distribution

Panelboards 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
Panel Layout and Dimensions
To determine the dimensions of a
given panelboard enclosure, make
a layout sketch by fitting together
the main branch and lug modules
according to the appropriate tables
in the layout guide. Assign X units
to each module as shown and obtain
a total X number.
The height of the enclosure is related
to the total X units in the layout as
shown in Figure 22.4-6. Three standard
box heights are available to accommodate any and all layout arrangements.
X unit totals that do not exactly
match those in Table 22.4-6 must
be rounded off to the next higher
standard (38X, 50X).
When a calculated X total for a panel
exceeds 50X, the panel must be split
into two or more separate sections
with X space for through-feed lugs
figured in for all but one section. If a
neutral is required, a separate neutral
bar and appropriate X space must
be included in each section.
Layout Example
1
22
PRL4F, three-phase, four-wire,

208Y/120 V complete with
400 A main switch and the
following branches:
23
1 200 A/three-pole
24
2 100 A/three-pole
2 30 A/three-pole
25
Panel to have short-circuit rating of

100,000A symmetrical.
400 A Neutral
7X
1. From layout guide,

X height of panel = 43X.
2. Rounded off to next higher
standard = 50X.
30 A/three-pole
100 A/three-pole
30A/three-pole
100A/three-pole
200 A/three-pole
4X
3. From Table 22.4-6, enclosure

height for 50X panel =
90.00 inches (2286.0 mm).
4X
4. Width = 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)

because no switch in the assembly
requires a 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm)
wide enclosure.
6X
400A three-pole
main switch (vertically mounted)
Total =
22X
43X
Note: In the above example, if a horizontally

mounted 400 A main switch was used, the
enclosure size would be: 73.50 inches H x
44.00 inches W x 11.30 inches D (1866.9 mm
H x 1117.6 mm W x 287.0 mm D).
26
27
28
29
30
5. Total enclosure depth =

11.30 inches (287.0 mm)
standard for all PRL4 panelboards.
31
Cabinet Specifications
32
Boxes: Code-gauge commercial

galvanized sheet steel (no knockouts).
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.4-10 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
Sheet 22 048
24
25
Panel
Height
Box
Height
Box
Width
Box 1
Depth
38X
73.50
(1866.9)
36.00
(914.4)
10.40
(264.2)
50X
90.00
(2286.0)
36.00
(914.4)
10.40
(264.2)
38X
73.50
(1866.9)
44
(1117.6)
10.40
(264.2)
50X
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
10.40
(264.2)
26
27
Note: Flush trims are available on PRL4F

panels with door-in-door enclosure only.
29
Side Gutters (minimum)
30
31
32
33
35
30 A
60 A
60 A
100 A
250 V Max.
100 A
250 V Max.
100 A
200 A
Main or Branch
1X
4X
36.00-inch (914.4) wide box:

200 A maximum
8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
4001200 A maximum
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
200 A maximum
10.00 inches (254.0 mm)
4001200 A maximum
8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
100 A
40
6X
7X
10X
400 A Branch
9X
11X
600 A Branch
200 A
(7X for SPD 200 kA and below)

(10X for SPD above 250 kA)
5X
100 A
200 A
400 A
Main or Branch
600 A
Main or Branch
1200 A
Branch
39
5X
36
38
4X
Surge Protective
Device (SPD)
800 A
Branch
37
4X
10.63 inches (269.9 mm)
34
30 A
Box depth is 10.40 inches (264.2 mm), cover

adds 0.90 inches (22.9 mm) for overall
28
Fusible to Breaker
36.00-inch (914.4 mm) Wide Box
23
Table 22.4-6. Standard Panel and Box

44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) Wide Box
22
6X
9X
11X
11X (16X with Shunt Trip)
15X (16X with Shunt Trip)
Fusible switch may be used as horizontal main.

400 and 600 A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) or
44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box. 400 and 600 A horizontally mounted main switches
only in 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
For vertically mounted main switch see Page 22.4-5 for sizing.
Figure 22.4-6. Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Fusible Switch Layout
Note: See Page 22.4-8 for MLO or neutral and vertically mounted main space requirements.
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
22.4-11
Sheet 22 049
General Description and Technical DataPow-R-Line 4D
Pow-R-Line 4D
Benefits
Interrupting ratings up to
200 kAIC symmetrical
Feeder power panelboard
Rated as Service Entrance
Equipment when appropriately
equipped
Ideal for:
Data centers
Process equipment manufacturing
Anywhere that requires quick
change of feeder devices
is needed
Type PRL4D Drawout Molded-Case

Circuit Breaker Power Panelboard
UL 67 Listed chassis
UL 50 Listed box and trim
Technical Data
Instructions
Determine box size by locating all
main and feeder devices in your panel.
The width of box is determined by the
maximum box size shown for each
device. For main lugs, through-feed
lugs and sub-feed lugs.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
General Description
Ease of maintenance
Faster to remove and install
Less downtime
30

breaker power panelboard
Front accessible
Front connected
Through-the-door design
drawout mechanism
Visual indication of breaker status
and position
Large grab handles for easy removal
600 Vac maximum
1200 A maximum mains
600 A maximum drawout
molded-case feeder breakers
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.4-12 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
Sheet 22 050
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 4D
24
25
Panel
Height
Box
Height
Box
Width
Box 1
Depth
38X
73.50
(1866.9)
36.00
(914.4)
11.31
(287.0)
50X
90.00
(2286.0)
36.00
(914.4)
11.31
(287.0)
38X
73.50
(1866.9)
44.00
(1117.6)
11.31
(287.0)
50X
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
11.31
(287.0)
26
27
Note: Flush trims not available on PRL4D

panels. Door-to-door option not available on
PRL4D panels.
28
Box depth is 10.40 inches (264.2 mm); cover

adds 0.90 inches (22.9 mm), for overall
31
250 A
Max.
9X
600 A
Max.
LGS, LGH, LGC
2 or 3P
Main Only
Fixed Mount
4X
600 A
Max.
LGS, LGH, LGC
2 or 3P
Main Only
Fixed Mount
6X
600 A
Max.
CLD
6X
800 A
Max.
MDL, HMDL, CMDL

CHMDL
6X
1200 A
Max.
NGS
2 or 3P
Main Only
Fixed Mount
10.63 inches (269.9 mm)
Side Gutters (minimum)
30
7X
2 or 3P
Main or Feeder
Single Drawout
29
2 or 3P
Feeder Only
Single Drawout
36.00-inch (914.4) wide box:

6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
2 or 3P
Main Only
Fixed Mount
2 or 3P
Feeder Only
Dual Drawout
32
2 or 3P
Feeder Only
Dual Drawout
2 or 3P
Main Only
Fixed Mount
33
34
23
Table 22.4-7. Standard Panel and Box

22
JGS, JGH, JGC
, CHLD
, NGH
, CLDC
, NGC
7X
250 A
Max.
JGS, JGH, JGC
6X
1200 A
Max.
NGSC
, NGHC
, NGCC
Figure 22.4-7. Layout for Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main DevicesPRL4D
35
1
2
3
100% rated breaker.

Optional 750 kcmil terminal requires 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
Contact Eaton for availability.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
22.4-13
Sheet 22 051
General DescriptionPow-R-Line Multipoint Meter
Pow-R-Line Multipoint Meter

(MPM)
Benefits
When you need accurate information

of consumed energy for monthly
invoicing statements, use Eatons
integrated multipoint metering solution.
Using multipoint metering for utility
allocation maximizes revenue by
effectively measuring, allocating
and recovering utility expenditures.
The multipoint metering solution
can interface with a third-party utility
allocation service. The multipoint
metering solution offers to:
Factory-wired system
Integrated display
Saves floor space
Lower installed cost
Network compatible
Tenant sub-billing
UL Listed
Integral Web-based and third-party
software solutions available
22
23
24
25
26
Purchase energy at bulk rates

while charging consumer rates
Capitalize on naturally variable
tenant loads by purchasing
energy at lower coinciding load
Capture and allocate common
area maintenance cost
Promote tenant retention with
accurate and defensible billing
Eliminate subsidization of
other tenants
27
28
29
30
Pow-R-Line Multipoint Meter
31
General Description
32
Allocation of energy consumption

in a residential or commercial
application is a tremendous task
for a property owner, management
firm or electrical energy manager.
To assist in allocation or direct billing
of consumed energy, use Eatons
Pow-R-Line Multipoint Meter low
cost solutions. The Pow-R-Line MPM
provides a cost-effective energy
tabulation system for residential or
commercial metering installations.
These installations can include:
High-rise buildings
Universities and campuses
Office buildings
complexes
Shopping malls
Airports
System commissioning is required
and priced separately
33
34
35
36
37
38
Pow-R-Line MPMCTs are Factory-Mounted

and Wired to Meter
Pow-R-Line Multipoint Meter Using the Pow-R-Line C Switchboard 50X Chassis with
Eaton Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter and Current Sensors
Local display and network capable

devices are available as optional
components.
See Tab 3, Section 3.1 Metering for
more information.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.4-14 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 4
June 2015
Sheet 22 052
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line Multipoint Meter
Layout Guide
23
Pow-R-Line MPM
See Page 22.4-8 for MLO or
Neutral and Vertically Mounted
Main Space Requirements
24
Bucket for Meter(s)
Maximum (1) PXMPM Meter
26
EHD
FDB
Trip Range (15125A)
27
ED, EDH, EDC,

EDB, EDS
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Pow-R-Line MPM
PXMPM Multipoint Meter
11X
2X
2-Pole
2-Pole
3X
3-Pole
3-Pole
3X
2-Pole
2-Pole
5X
3-Pole
3-Pole
4X 2P
6X 3P
DK, KDB, KD, HKD, KDC

Trip Range (70400A)
2- or 3-Pole
Load
Lugs
25
Line
22
Figure 22.4-8. Pow-R-Line MPM Layout Guide for Current Sensor and Current Transformer SizingStandard Pow-R-Line 4 Panelboard
Construction Applies
Note: For all other breaker frames and
amperages, consult factory for X
space sizing.
Note: Consult Section 22.4 for Pow-R-Line 4

structure configuration.
Table 22.4-8. Pow-R-Line MPM Breaker Frames

Breaker
Type
Maximum Trip
Amperes
Number
of Poles
Current Sensor
(100 mA) I.D. in Inches
X
Space
Minimum Enclosure
Width in Inches (mm)
EHD
EHD
100
100
2
3
0.53
2X
3X
36.00 (914.4)
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
125
125
2
3
0.53
2X
3X
36.00 (914.4)
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC

EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
225
225
2
3
1.12
3X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
DK, KD, HKD, KDC (Single Mounting Only)

DK, KD, HKD, KDC (Single Mounting Only)
400
400
2
3
1.74
4X
6X
36.00 (914.4)
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Column Type
June 2015
22.5-1
Sheet 22 053
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX
Main Lugs Only


rated combination.

100 and 225.
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum
Main Lugs
100 and 225 A
Main Breakers
100 and 225 A
Branch Breakers
15100 A (bolt-on)

Service
Breaker Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
100
100
100
BAB
QBHW
EHD
150
150
150
150
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
18
65
100
200
225
225
225
225
225
EDB
EDS
ED, FD
EDH, HFD
EDC, FDC
22
42
65
100
200
Mains
to Table 22.5-1.
24
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical) at 240 Vac
26
10
22
18
27
28
29
30

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles

120 Vac
120/240 Vac
240 Vac
BAB
BAB
BAB
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
10
10
10
BAB-D 1
BAB-C 2
BABRP 3
BABRSP 3
1560
1530
1530
1530
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
33
QBGF
QBGFEP
QBCAF 5
1550 4
1550 4
1520
1, 2
1, 2
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
34
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
22
22
22
35
QBHGF
QBGFEP
QBHCAF 5
1530 4
1530 4
1520
1, 2
1, 2
1
22
22
22
22
22
22
36
1
2

and 240/120 V delta
208 and 240 V
23
25
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
22
3
4
5

three-pole space.
Arc fault breaker.

in Table 22.5-2.

QBHW are horizontally mounted, same
31
32
37
38
39
40
41
42
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.5-2.
CA08104001E
43
22.5-2 Panelboards
Column Type
June 2015
Sheet 22 054
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
22

Bussing
23
100225 A: copper is standard.
Boxes
24
Boxes are made from code-gauge steel.
25
Trims
26
27
28
29
30
Blank ends are supplied as standard.

Doors have three-point catch and lock.
Neutral Bars
When column type panels are
furnished with trough extensions
and pull box, the neutral bar will
be placed in the pull box unless
otherwise specified.
When troughs and pull box are not
furnished, the neutral bar will be
located on the panel at the same
end as the main.
Cabinets
31
Boxes and trims are code-gauge steel.

ANSI-61 light gray painted finish.
32
Boxes are furnished without knockouts.
33
Standard depth is 6.00 inches

(152.4 mm). Standard width is
8.63 inches (219.1 mm).
Top and Bottom Gutters
Assembled Circuit Breaker Panelboards
4.50 inches (114.3 mm) minimum.
Box size, box and trim catalog numbers

for standard column type panelboards
listed are available from Table 22.5-4.
Left Side Gutter

Pull Box
Pull box is furnished without knockouts.
Modifications
Ampere Breaker
Rating
Type
Space
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240 V
150
150
150
150
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
18
65
100
200
225
225
225
225
225
22
EDB
42
EDS
65
ED, FD, FDE
EDH, HFD, HFDE 100
EDC, FDC
200
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on BAB,
QBHW and FDB breakers. BAB and
QBHW require one additional pole
space for shunt trip, i.e., single-pole
is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole
size and three-pole is four-pole size.
Ground Bar
an option.
34
Instructions
1. Using description of the required
type of main required.
a. 100 A panelboards
Table 22.5-4.
b. 225 A panelboards
Table 22.5-4.
circuit poles, including provisions,
required in the panelboard.
Do not count main breaker poles.
breakers to single poles, i.e.,
three poles.
Determine sub-feed breaker or
through-feed lug requirements.
3. Select the panelboard main
ampere rating from Table 22.5-4.
4. Panelboard Type from first
column, main breaker Frame and
Designation, if applicable from
second column, and sub-feed
breaker Frame and Designation, if
applicable, from the third column.
5. From Step 2, determine the number
of branch circuits in Column 4.
6. Read box size numbers across
columns to the right. All panels
are surface mounted.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Column Type
June 2015
22.5-3
Sheet 22 055

Table 22.5-4. PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)
22
Main Breaker Types

Mounting:
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
Sub-Feed
Breaker Types
Vertical Mounting
Maximum Number Box Dimensions

of Branch Circuits
Height
Width
Including Provisions
Main breaker
BAB, QBHW (H)
27
39
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,

HFD (V), HFDE
30
42
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EHD,

FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE
30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
30
42
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Panelboard
Types
Depth
23
100 A

with 100 A through-feed
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE, ED, EDH (V)

with 225 A through-feed
1
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EHD,

FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE
For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Trough Extension
6.00
(152.4)
25
26
225 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
24
16.00
(406.4)
12.00
(304.8)
Additional
Extensions
(If Required)
H
Box
Height
6.00
(152.4)
Figure 22.5-1. Trough Extension

8.63
(219.1)
When extension troughs are used,

the NEC requires that the number
of conductors in wireways shall not
contain more than 30 conductors
at any cross section, unless the
conductors are for signal circuits
or are control conductors between
a motor and its starter and used
only for starting duty. The sum of the
cross-sectional areas of all contained
conductors at any cross section of
a wireway shall not exceed 20% of
the interior cross-sectional area
of the wireway.
The derating factors specified in the
NEC shall not be applicable to the 30
current-carrying conductors at 20% fill
specified above.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.5-4 Panelboards
Column Type
June 2015
Sheet 22 056
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type
22
Pow-R-Line 2a-LX
Mains
Main Lugs Only

Type GHB main breakers are horizontally mounted, same as branch

breakers. All other main breakers
are vertically mounted.
23
24
25
Branch Circuits

100 and 225.

to Table 22.5-6.

rated combination.
26
27
28
Pow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type
29
30
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
31
Note: PRL2a panelboards are suitable

for use on three-phase, three-wire applications when derived from a three-phase,
four-wire 480Y/277 Vac service where the
neutral is not brought to the panelboard.
For three-phase, three-wire 480 Vac delta
services, use a PRL3a panelboard.
32
33
34
240 Vac
250 Vdc maximum
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
100
100
GHB
EHD
150
150
150
150
225
225
225
225
225
225
100 and 225 A
Main Breakers
36
100 and 225 A
Branch Breakers
37
38
39
40
41
43

480Y/277 Vac: 22150 kA series rated
250 Vdc: 10 kA and 14 kA fully rated
480Y/277 Vac
125/250 Vdc
14
14
14
10
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
18
65
100
200
14
35
65
100
10
10
22
22
ED
FD, FDE
EDH
HFD, HFDE
EDC
FDC
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
65
100
10
10
10

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number of
Poles

120 Vac
240 Vac
277 Vac
480Y/277 Vac 125/250 Vdc
GHB
GHB
GHQ
15100
15100
1520
1
2, 3
1
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
HGHB
GHQRSP 1
GHBS 1
1530
1520
1530
1
1, 2
1, 2
65
65
65
65
65
25
14
14
14
14

in Table 22.5-6.
Service
42
15100 A
240 Vac
65
18
Main Lugs
35

and 240/120 V delta and 480Y/277 V
208 and 240 V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Column Type
June 2015
22.5-5
Sheet 22 057

Bussing
100225 A: copper is standard.
Boxes
Boxes are made from code-gauge steel.
Blank ends are supplied as standard.
Trims
Doors have three-point catch and lock.
Neutral Bars
When column type panels are furnished
with trough extensions and pull box,
the neutral bar will be placed in the
pull box unless otherwise specified.
When troughs and pull box are not
furnished, the neutral bar will be located
on the panel at the same end as the main.
Top and Bottom Gutters
Assembled Circuit Breaker Panelboards

Box size, box and trim catalog

numbers for standard column type
panelboards listed are available
from Table 22.5-8.
Pull Box
Instructions
Left Side Gutter
Pull box is furnished without knockouts.
Modifications
Ampere
Rating
Space
Breaker
Type
150
150
150
150
225
225
225
225
225
225
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
240 V
480 V
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
18
65
100
200
14
35
65
100
ED
FD, FDE
EDH
HFD, HFDE
EDC
FDC
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
65
100
Cabinets
Shunt Trips
Boxes and trims are code-gauge steel.

ANSI-61 light gray painted finish.
Shunt trips are available on GHB, FDB

and FD breakers. GHB breakers with
shunt trips require three-pole frame.
Boxes are furnished without knockouts.

Standard depth is 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm). Standard width is
8.63 inches (219.1 mm).
Ground Bar
an option.
1. Using description of the required

type of main required.
a. 100 A panelboards
Table 22.5-8.
b. 225 A panelboards
Table 22.5-8.
circuit poles, including provisions,
required in the panelboard. Do not
count main breaker poles. Convert
two- or three-pole branch breakers
to single poles, i.e., three-pole
breaker, count as three poles.
Determine sub-feed breaker or
through-feed lug requirements.
3. Select the panelboard main
ampere rating from Table 22.5-8.
4. Panelboard type from first
column, main breaker frame and
designation, if applicable from
second column, and sub-feed
breaker frame and designation, if
applicable, from the third column.
5. From Step 2, determine the number
of branch circuits in Column 4.
6. Read box size numbers across
columns to the right. All panels
are surface mounted.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.5-6 Panelboards
Column Type
June 2015
Sheet 22 058
22
Table 22.5-8. PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Main Breaker Types
Mounting:
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
Sub-Feed
Breaker Types
Vertical Mounting
Maximum Number
of Branch Circuits
Including Provisions
Box Dimensions 1
Height
Width
Depth
Main breaker
GHB
(H)
27
39
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE

HFD, HFDE, FDCE
(V)
30
42
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE,

FDC, FDCE
30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
30
42
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
FD, FDE
FDE, HFD, HFDE, FDC
30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Panelboard
Types
23
100 A
24
25
26

or sub-feed breaker
225 A
27
Main lugs or
main breaker
28

or sub-feed breaker
1
29
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,

HFD, HFDE
(V)
For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Trough Extension
30
6.00
(152.4)
16.00
(406.4)
12.00
(304.8)
31
Additional
Extensions
(If Required)
32
33
H
Box
Height
34
6.00
(152.4)
35
36
Figure 22.5-2. Trough Extension

8.63
(219.1)
When extension troughs are used,

the NEC requires that the number
of conductors in wireways shall not
contain more than 30 conductors
at any cross section, unless the
conductors are for signal circuits
or are control conductors between
a motor and its starter and used only
for starting duty. The sum of the
cross-sectional areas of all contained
conductors at any cross section of
a wireway shall not exceed 20% of
the interior cross-sectional area of
the wireway.
The derating factors specified in
the NEC shall not be applicable to the
30 current-carrying conductors at 20%
fill specified above.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1R
June 2015
22.6-1
Sheet 22 059
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1R
Pow-R-Line 1R Retrofit
Panelboard
Eaton offers a factory-assembled

panelboard interior and trim designed
to bolt directly into an existing enclosure.
Custom-built panelboard interiors
and trims can be provided to retrofit
most any manufacturers existing
panelboard enclosure.
The panelboards are listed and are
marked with both the Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) and Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) labels.
Why Retrofit?
Pow-R-Line 1R
General Description
Upgrade protective device

Replacing old, obsolete circuit
breakers with new
Providing additional circuits for
load growth
Accommodating system change
and additions
Adding ground fault circuit
interrupters
Main Lugs Only

branch device, or may be series rated
24
25

fully rated main or branch device,
rated combination.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
100
100
100
BAB
QBHW
EHD
10
22
18
18
Immediate Benefits
150
FDB
Voltage
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
240 Vac maximum
Main Lugs
100400 A
Main Breakers
100225 A
Branch Breakers
15100 A (bolt-on chassis)
Installation time is dramatically

reduced
Disruption of existing power
service is minimal
Less cleanup and wall repair because
there is no need to cut and break
concrete or finished wall surface

Service

and 240/120 V delta
208 and 240 V
29
30
65
100
200
22
42
65
100
200
31
32
33
34

120 V
120/240 V
240 V
BAB
BAB
BAB
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
10
10
10
35
BAB-D 1
BAB-C 2
BABRP 3
BABRSP 3
1560
1530
1530
1530
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
36
QBGF, QBGFEP
QBCAF 5
1550 4
1520
1, 2
1
10
10
10
10
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
22
22
22
38
QBHGF, QBGFEP
QBHCAF 5
1530
1520
1, 2
1
22
22
22
22
39
CA08104001E
28
Number
of Poles

to Table 22.6-1.

to Table 22.6-2.
27
Ampere
Rating
Branch Circuits
26
Breaker
Type
Mains

QBH are horizontally mounted, same
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240 V
23

100 and 225.
Panelboard Ratings
22
4
5

three-pole space.
Arc fault breaker.

in Table 22.6-2.

37
40
41
42
43
22.6-2 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1R
June 2015
Sheet 22 060
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 1R
22
23
Application Guidelines
Bussing
The following dimensions and data

are necessary for production of a
panelboard to fit an existing box:

as an option.
Boxes
25
Fits existing box depths from

4.50 (114.3 mm) to 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) deep.
26
Optional mounting brackets are

available if existing enclosure
exceeds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deep.
27
Boxes shallower than standard may

require special collar adapters.
28
Trims
29
32
33
38
39
41
42
Existing Surface-Mounted Box
Height dimension H
Width dimension W
Depth dimension D
Flange width dimension may be
F or FF as appropriate:
Flange width dimension F
Flange width dimension FF
Figure 22.6-1. Existing Interior Mounting Studs
Plaster Line
F
D
Top View (Flush Mounted)
FF
D
Top View (Surface Mounted)
Figure 22.6-2. Existing Box Top View
Pow-R-Line 1R
The trim and door is designed to attach

directly to the panelboard
deadfront assembly so that there
is no external trim-fastening
hardware required.
The interior backpan or optional
mounting plates are fastened directly
to the back of the existing enclosure
using the hardware provided.
Neutral and Ground Bus
40
Stud location dimensions:

A _______, B _______ and C _______.
34
37
In most applications, the existing

mounting hardware in the enclosure
may be removed, but in some areas,
the backpan may need to be attached
using a minimum of one existing
mounting stud to meet local code
requirements for grounding.
Confirm with your local electrical
code authority having jurisdiction.
31
36
Front View
Height dimension H
Width dimension W
Depth dimension D
If box is not flush with plaster line,
dimension E
Stud Locations
30
35
Existing Flush-Mounted Box
24
Stud
Locations
Integrally mounted Neutral

assembly
Ground bar and bonding
conductor included
Neutral and Ground convertible
from left-right
Insulated/Isolated ground bus is
available as an option
Aluminum is standard, copper is
Table 22.6-3. Minimum Enclosure Sizing

Ampere
Rating
Number of
Circuits
Main Device
Type
Minimum Enclosure Dimensions Inches (mm)

Height
Width
Depth
100
18
30
42
MLO
21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
225
18
30
42
MLO
21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
400
18
30
42
MLO
21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
18
30
42
BAB, QBHW
21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
18
30
42
EHD, ED, EDH,

FDB, FD, HFD
EDB, EDC, EDS
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
18
30
42
ED, EDH, EDB, EDS, 30.00 (762.0)

EDC, FD, HFD, FDC 36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
Main Lug Only
Main Breaker
100
225
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 2R
June 2015
22.6-3
Sheet 22 061
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2R
Pow-R-Line 2R Retrofit
Panelboard
Eaton offers a factory-assembled

panelboard interior and trim designed
to bolt directly into an existing enclosure.
Custom-built panelboard interiors
and trims can be provided to retrofit
most any manufacturers existing
panelboard enclosure.
Why Retrofit?
Pow-R-Line 2R
General Description
Upgrade protective device

Replacing old, obsolete circuit
breakers with new
Providing additional circuits for
load growth
Accommodating system change
and additions
Adding ground fault circuit
interrupters
Panelboard Ratings
Immediate Benefits
Voltage
240 Vac
Main Lugs
100225 A
Main Lugs Only

branch device, or may be series rated
24
25

fully rated main or branch device,
rated combination.
Breaker
Breaker
Frame
Type
Amperes
100225 A
Branch Breakers
15100 A (bolt-on chassis)

Service
240 Vac
480Y/277 Vac
100
150
225
GHB
FDB
FDB
65
18
65
14
14
35
225
225
HFD
FDC
100
200
65
100
Number
of Poles

120 Vac
240 Vac
277 Vac
480Y/277 Vac
GHQ
GHB
GHB
1520
15100
15100
1
1
2, 3
65
65
65
14
14
14
GHB-HID 1
GHBGFEP 2
HGHB
1520
1560
1530
1
1
1
65
65
65
14
14
25


GHB breaker with 30 ma equipment ground fault protection.

in Table 22.6-5.
29
30
31
34
Ampere
Rating
Three-phase, four-wire 480Y/277 Vac

Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120 Vac
and 240/120 Vac delta
Single-phase, three-wire 120/240 Vac
Single-phase, two-wire 120 Vac
Three-phase, three-wire 208 and 240 Vac
28
33
Breaker
Type
27
32
26
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
Main Breakers
23

100 and 225.
Installation time is dramatically

reduced
Disruption of existing power
service is minimal
Less cleanup and wall repair because
there is no need to cut and break
concrete or finished wall surface
22

35
36
37
38
39
40
Mains
to Table 22.6-4.
41
Main breakers, 100 A, Type GHB is

horizontally mounted, same as branch
breakers. All other main breakers are
vertically mounted.
42
43
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.6-5.
CA08104001E
22.6-4 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 2R
June 2015
Sheet 22 062
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 2R
22
23
Application Guidelines
Bussing
The following dimensions and data

are necessary for production of a
panelboard to fit an existing box:

as an option.
Boxes
25
Fits existing box depths from

4.50 (114.3 mm) to 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) deep.
26
Optional mounting brackets are

available if existing enclosure
exceeds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deep.
27
Boxes shallower than standard may

require special collar adapters.
28
Trims
29
32
33
38
39
41
42
Existing Surface-Mounted Box
Height dimension H
Width dimension W
Depth dimension D
Flange width dimension may be
F or FF as appropriate:
Flange width dimension FF
Figure 22.6-3. Existing Interior Mounting Studs
Plaster Line
F
D
Top View (Flush Mounted)
FF
D
Top View (Surface Mounted)
Figure 22.6-4. Existing Box Top View
Pow-R-Line 2R
The trim and door is designed to attach

directly to the panelboard
deadfront assembly so that there
is no external trim-fastening
hardware required.
The interior backpan or optional
mounting plates are fastened directly
to the back of the existing enclosure
using the hardware provided.
Neutral and Ground Bus
40
Stud location dimensions:

A _______, B _______ and C _______.
34
37
In most applications, the existing

mounting hardware in the enclosure
may be removed, but in some areas,
the backpan may need to be attached
using a minimum of one existing
mounting stud to meet local code
requirements for grounding.
Confirm with your local electrical
code authority having jurisdiction.
31
36
Front View
Height dimension H
Width dimension W
Depth dimension D
If box is not flush with plaster line,
dimension E
Stud Locations
30
35
Existing Flush-Mounted Box
24
Stud
Locations
Integrally mounted Neutral

assembly
Ground bar and bonding
conductor included
Neutral and Ground convertible
from left-right
Insulated/Isolated ground bus is
Aluminum is standard, copper is
Table 22.6-6. Minimum Enclosure Sizing

Ampere
Rating
Number of
Circuits
Main Device
Type
Minimum Enclosure Dimensions Inches (mm)

Height
Width
Depth
100
18
30
42
MLO
21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
225
18
30
42
MLO
21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
18
30
42
GHB
21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
18
30
42
FDB, FD,
HFD, FDC
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
18
30
42
FD, HFD, FDC
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
Main Lug Only
Main Breaker
100
225
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1aF
June 2015
22.6-5
Sheet 22 063
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1aF
Pow-R-Line 1aF
Mains
to Table 22.6-7.
Main breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.6-8.
For use on high fault current systems
requiring lighting panels, selectively
coordinated systems and laboratories
and testing stations where overcurrent protection below 15A is required.
Pow-R-Line 1aF
Main Lugs Only
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum

rated based upon the upstream device.
100, 225 and 400.
Main Lugs

of the main breaker only. The short
circuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully
combination
100400 A
Main Breakers
100400 A
Branch Devices
30 A
Hybrid breaker and fuse
Class CC fuses, 30 A maximum
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240 Vac
22
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
100
100
100
EDB
EDS
ED
22
42
65
100
100
100
FD
FDE
EDH
65
65
100
100
100
HFD
HFDE
100
100
225
225
225
EDB
EDS
ED
22
42
65
26
225
225
225
FD
FDE
EDH
65
65
100
27
225
225
HFD
HFDE
100
100
28
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
42
65
100
29
400
400
KDC
LHH
200
200
23
24
25
Table 22.6-8. Branch Overcurrent Devices

Hybrid breaker/fuse (Class CC) branch
device 1
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting
Rating
Breaker
Type
30
200
Hybrid
Class CC fuses are required, 30A maximum. Fuses are not supplied by Eaton.
30
31
32
33
34
Service
35

and 240/120 V delta
208 and 240 V
36
37

38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.6-6 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 1aF
June 2015
Sheet 22 064
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 1aF
22
23
24
25
26
27
Bussing
Box size for all Type 1 panelboards

are available from Table 22.6-10.

as an option.
Boxes
galvanized steel.
29

higher number.
Instructions
1. Select the rating and type of
mains required.

the right.

5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
Trim

6.50 inches (165.1 mm).

and painted ANSI 61 gray Type YS.
Modifications
28


Ampere Rating
Information
100
225
400
See Table 22.6-14

See Table 22.6-14
See Table 22.6-14
Ampere
Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker
Type
Mounting
Position
Maximum
Number
of Branch
Circuits
Including
Provisions
Box Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
30
Ground Bar
31

an option.
100 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD,

FDE, HFD, FDC,
HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
Enclosures
100 A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100A
through-feed lugs
EHD, FDB, FD,

FDE, HFD, FDC,
HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
EDB, EDS, ED,

EDH, EDC,
FD, HFD, FDC,
FDE, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
with 225 or 100 A
through-feed lugs
EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDE
FDC, EDB, EDS,
HFDE
ED, EDH, EDC
Vertical
18
30
42
48
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
18
30
42
48
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
32
33
34
35
36
Type 1.
100 A
225 A
400 A
37
38
400 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 2aF
June 2015
22.6-7
Sheet 22 065
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2aF
Pow-R-Line 2aF
For use on high fault current systems
requiring lighting panels, selectively
coordinated systems and laboratories
and testing stations where overcurrent
protection below 15 A is required.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 480Y/277 Vac
100
100
100
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
35
65
100
Mains
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, HFDE
35
65
100
400
400
400
400
KD
HKD
KDC
LHH
35
65
100
100

to Table 22.6-11.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.6-12.
Main Lugs Only

Pow-R-Line 2aF
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac
Main Lugs
100400 A
Main Breakers
100400 A
Branch Devices

100, 225 and 400.

rated combination.
30 A (bolt-on)
Hybrid breaker and fuse
Class CC fuses, 30 A maximum
25
26
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting
Rating
Breaker
Type
30
200
Hybrid
Class CC fuses are required, 30A maximum.

Fuses are not supplied by Eaton.
27
28
29
30
31
32
34

35
Service
23
24
Table 22.6-12. Branch Overcurrent Devices

Hybrid breaker/fuse (Class CC) branch
device 1
22
33
36

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.6-8 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 2aF
June 2015
Sheet 22 066
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 2aF
22
23
24
25
26
27
Bussing

100400 A: Tin-plated aluminum is

standard, copper is available
as an option.
Boxes
galvanized steel.
Instructions

higher number.

the right.

5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
Trim

5.50 inches (139.7 mm).

and painted ANSI 61 gray, Type YS.
Modifications
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

Ampere Rating
Information
100
225
400
See Table 22.6-14

See Table 22.6-14
See Table 22.6-14
Ground Bar

Ampere
Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker Type

Mounting
Position
Maximum Box Dimensions

Number
Height
Width
of Branch
Circuits
Including
Provisions
Depth
100 A Panelboards

an option.
100 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
FDB, FD, FDE

HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
Enclosures
100 A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100 A
through-feed lugs
FDB, FD, FDE

HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
FD, HFD, FDC, FDE,

HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225 A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100 A
through-feed lugs
FDB, FD, FDE

HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400 A
Main lugs or
main breaker
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
18
30
42
48
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400 A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100 A
through-feed lugs
DK, KD,
LHH
HKD, KDC
Vertical
18
30
42
48
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
Type 1.
225 A Panelboards
400 A Panelboards
Main
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3FQS
June 2015
22.6-9
Sheet 22 067
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 3FQS
Pow-R-Line 3FQS
Pow-R-Line 3FQS
240 V, three-phase, three-wire

208/120 V, three-phase, four-wire
120/240 Vac, single-phase, three-wire
240 delta/120 Vac, three-phase,
four-wire
240 delta Vac, three-phase, three-wire
25 Vdc
General Description
Branch Overcurrent Devices
The Pow-R-Line 3FQS is a fusible

lighting panel designed for high fault
current applications where circuit
breakers may not meet the application.
This panel is ideal when the selective
coordination mandates apply. Designed
for use with Eatons Bussmann
CUBEFuse, the panel will selectively
coordinate with the maximum available
fault current. The PRL 3FQS is ideal
for control circuits below 15 A.
Eaton Bussmann Type CCPB

(compact circuit protector base)
15100 A
Single-, two- and three-pole
Branch fuses: Bussmann TCF or
FCF CUBEFuse
Short-Circuit Current Ratings
Communication systems
Ventilation and smoke
removal systems
Critical industrial processes
Data centers
Other critical or sensitive loads

Table 22.6-15. Main Lugs Only
Ampere
Rating
Standard Mechanical
Lug Wire Range
100
200
400
(1) #1300 kcmil

(1) #1300 kcmil
(1) #4600 kcmil
Table 22.6-16. Main Fused Switch

(Class J Fuses Only)
Ampere
Rating
Standard Mechanical
Lug Wire Range
100
200
400
(1) #1300 kcmil

(1) #1300 kcmil
(1) #4600 kcmil
Table 22.6-17. Main Non-Fused Switch

Ampere
Rating
Standard Mechanical
Lug Wire Range
100
200
400
(1) #1300 kcmil

(1) #1300 kcmil
(1) #4600 kcmil
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Panelboard Ratings
50 kAIC symmetrical standard

Up to 200 kAIC symmetrical when
appropriate upstream overcurrent
device is applied
Listings
Main Bus and Branch Connectors
34
UL 67 panelboard chassis
UL 50 listed box and trim
UL 98 listed fusible switches
Voltage
600 Vac maximum

125 Vdc maximum
(80A maximum branch)
Tin plated, copper bus and

branch connectors
NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 3R
Loadside Chassis
18, 30 and 42 circuit chassis
Incoming Line
120 V, single-phase, two-wire

no neutral
120/240 V, single-phase, three-wire
no neutral
Top or bottom
Spare Fuse Compartment
Provisions for six spare

CUBEFuses, standard
Feed-thru lugs
Sub-feed lugs
Sub-feed fused switch
Service Equipment
Seismic Qualifications
Qualified for International Building
Code (IBC) categories and site class A,
B, C and D.
CA08104001E
Options
Voltage Systems
Branch Disconnects
Branch Circuit Spaces
Mains
Main lugs: 30400 A
Main fusible switch: 30400 A
Main non-fused switch: 30400 A
35
Enclosures
Hospitals
Surgery centers
Emergency systems
Fire stations
Police stations
Laboratories
Labeled suitable for use as service

equipment (bonded neutral)
Neutrals
36
37
38
39
40
Isolated neutral
Bonded neutral
200% rated neutrals
41
Ground Bars
42
Bonded neutral
Isolated neutral
Special Trims
Door-in-door
No trim
43
22.6-10 Panelboards
Pow-R-Line 3FQS
June 2015
Sheet 22 068
Technical Data and SpecificationsPow-R-Line 3FQS
22
Table 22.6-18. Branch Circuit Disconnects Compact Circuit Protector Base (CCPB)
CCPB 1 Part
Number
Number
of Poles
23
CCPB-1-15CF
CCPB-2-15CF
CCPB-3-15CF
1
2
3
24
CCPB-1-20CF
CCPB-2-20CF
CCPB-3-20CF
25
Maximum CCPB
Ampacity
Non-Indicating
Fuses (Standard)
Indicating Fuses
(Optional) 2
115
115
115
15
15
15
TCF1RN, TCF3RN,
TCF6RN, TCF10RN,
TCF15RN
TCF6, TCF10,
TCF15
1
2
3
17.520
17.520
17.520
20
20
20
TCF17-1/2RN,
TCF20RN
TCF17-1/2,
TCF20
CCPB-1-30CF
CCPB-2-30CF
CCPB-3-30CF
1
2
3
2530
2530
2530
30
30
30
TCF25RN,
TCF30RN
TCF25,
TCF30
26
CCPB-1-40CF
CCPB-2-40CF
CCPB-3-40CF
1
2
3
3540
3540
3540
40
40
40
TCF35RN,
TCF40RN
TCF35,
TCF40
27
CCPB-1-50CF
CCPB-2-50CF
CCPB-3-50CF
1
2
3
4550
4550
4550
50
50
50
TCF45RN,
TCF50RN
TCF45,
TCF50
28
CCPB-1-60CF
CCPB-2-60CF
CCPB-3-60CF
1
2
3
60
60
60
60
60
60
TCF60RN
TCF60
29
CCPB-1-70CF 1
CCPB-2-70CF 2
CCPB-3-70CF 3
1
2
3
70
70
70
70
70
70
TCF70RN
TCF70
30
CCPB-1-90CF
CCPB-2-90CF
CCPB-3-90CF
1
2
3
8090
8090
8090
90
90
90
TCF80RN,
TCF90RN
TCF80,
TCF90
CCPB-1-100CF
CCPB-2-100CF
CCPB-3-100CF
1
2
3
100
100
100
100
100
100
TCF100RN
TCF100
31
CCPB disconnect can accept CUBEFuses with ampere ratings less than or equal to the ampere rating of the CCPB disconnect.
Correct fit with CCPB disconnect requires indicating CUBEFuses with date code R38 or later.
32
33
NEMA Type 1 Box Options
34
35
Note: Spare or replacement CCPB available only from authorized Eaton Bussmann distributors.
No knockouts (standard)
Knockouts, both top and bottom
(optional)
Knockouts, top or bottom (optional)
Replacement Fuses
36
37
38
39
Replace only with Bussmann

fuses of the same type and size
Contact your authorized
Eaton Bussmann distributor
for replacement fuses
Nameplates
Permanent circuit numbering

Enclosures
NEMA Type 1 Indoor
40
41
42
43
Fuse Ampere
Range
Flush mount or surface mount

Galvanized steel with removable
end wallsblank or with knockouts
(specify on order)
Table 22.6-19. NEMA Type 1 Box Sizes
Width
Depth
Height
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
33.00 (838.2)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
50.00 (1270.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
59.00 (1498.6)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
69.00 (1752.6)
Chassis mounts directly onto

enclosure studs in the enclosure
Trim finished with gray powder
coat paint over phosphatized steel
(ANSI 61) with door
Circuit directory card is located
on the inside of the door
Concealed trim screws
NEMA Type 3R Outdoor (Optional)
Surface mount only

Finished with gray powder coat
paint over phosphatized steel
(ANSI 61)
Bottom feed only, no knockouts
Table 22.6-20. NEMA Type 3R Outdoor

Box SizesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Width
Depth
Height
20.00 (508.0)
7.75 (196.9)
34.50 (876.3)
20.00 (508.0)
7.75 (196.9)
51.50 (1308.1)
20.00 (508.0)
7.75 (196.9)
60.50 (1536.7)
20.00 (508.0)
7.75 (196.9)
70.50 (1790.7)
Table 22.6-21. CCPB Horsepower Ratings

CCPB
Disconnect
Ampere Horsepower
Rating
Rating at Vac
CCPB
(Poles)-15CF
15
0.5
CCPB
(Poles)-20CF
20
0.75 3
CCPB
(Poles)-30CF
30
1.5
15
10
CCPB
(Poles)-40CF
40
7.5
20
10
CCPB
(Poles)-50CF
50
7.5
20
10
CCPB
(Poles)-60CF
60
7.5
20
10
CCPB
(Poles)-70CF
70
15
30
40
CCPB
(Poles)-90CF
80
20
40
50
CCPB
(Poles)-100CF
100
20
50
50
120 240 480 600

3
7.5
7.5 10
Chassis mounts directly onto studs

in the enclosure
Gasketed door has vault handle
with lock
Circuit directory card is located
on the inside of the door
Contact Eaton for other
enclosure types
CA08104001E
Panelboards
June 2015
22.6-11
Sheet 22 069
General DescriptionElevator Control Panelboard
Standards
Codes
The Elevator Control Panelboard is

designed to meet the following codes:
The Elevator Control Panelboard

meets and is listed to the following
standards:
UL 67 listed panelboard
UL 50 listed enclosure
UL 98 listed fusible elevator
control fusible switches
Options
NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code)

NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code)
ANSI/ASME A17.1 (Safety Code
for Elevators and Escalators)
NFPA 13 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems)
General Description
Ratings
240 Vac and 600 Vac

Three-phase, three-wire and
three-phase, four-wire
200 kA short-circuit current ratings
Main Lugs Only
800 A maximum
Branch Devices
30200 A, 240 Vac and 600 Vac fused

switch to feed the elevator
Elevator Controls Standard Features
Factory wired from switch

to controls
200 kA rms short-circuit
current rating
120 Vac shunt trip
Ground termination
Branch fusible switch
Class J fuse clips on switch
(fuses not included)
100 VA Control Power Transformer
(CPT) with 120 Vac secondary
CPT primary and secondary fusing
Selection of primary CPT voltages
Fire safety interface relay with
user-selected coil voltage
Fire alarm voltage monitoring relay
Keyed test switch
ON pilot light; user selects color
23
Integrated Surge Protective Device

(SPD) 100400 kA
Specialized control to meet
local codes
22
Eatons Elevator Control Panelboard

has superior selective coordination
properties. When paired with the
appropriate upstream fusing, the
elevator control panelboard can
selectively coordinate with higher
fault current levels. All fuses must
be of the same manufacturer. Consult
the specific fuse manufacturers data
for selective coordination values.
The Elevator Control Panelboard
is designed to replace multiple
components provided in elevator
control rooms, thus consolidating
and standardizing this area. With the
ability to control up to four elevators
in a common shaft, the Elevator
Control Panelboard offers the needed
controls in a space-saving design
while allowing access by the various
trades involved with the installation.
24
25
26
27
28
29

Surge Protective Devices (SPD) may
be integrated into all Elevator Control
Panelboards. Because most installation calls for SPDs, integrating an
Eaton SPD ensures proper installation
and significantly limits destructive
let-through beyond all size-mounted
solutions. Please see Section 36 for
more information.
Not only does the Elevator Control

Panelboard provide electrical feeds, it
also contains necessary components
for the control of the elevator and the
fire alarm system.
30
31
32
33
Table 22.6-22. Elevator Feeder Devices

Ampere
Rating
Fuse Class
Short-Circuit Current Rating (kAIC Symmetrical)

240 Vac
600 Vac
30
60
Class J
Class J
200
200
200
200
100
200
Class J
Class J
200
200
200
200
34
35
36
Table 22.6-23. Box Sizing and SelectionDimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere
Rating
37
Number of Dimensions
Elevators Without SPD
With SPD
Width
Height
Width
Height
400
400
400
2
3
4
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
57.00 (1447.8)
57.00 (1447.8)
57.00 (1447.8)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
600
600
600
2
3
4
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
57.00 (1447.8)
57.00 (1447.8)
57.00 (1447.8)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
800
800
3
4
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
Note: Dimensions reflect NEMA Type 1 enclosures.

All boxes are 11.31 inches (287.3 mm) deep.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
22.6-12 Panelboards
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modifications
June 2015
Sheet 22 070
General DescriptionTypes PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modifications
22
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and

Column Modifications
23
24
25
26
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Modifications Selection Guide

Table 22.6-24. ModificationsAlphabetical Index
Modification
Available on Panelboard Types

PRL1a
PRL2a
PRL3a
PRL3E
PRL4B
PRL4F
Ambient compensating breakers
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Column Type
No
Bus density
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cabinetsspecial: Types 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Complete assembly
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Compression type lugs, mains only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Concealed trim clamps (LT trim)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Conduit covers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Copper lugs
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Copper main bus
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Standard
Directory framemetal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Doors, special
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Electronic trip units
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Fungus-proof
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ground bar
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ground fault protection (zero sequence)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Handle lockoff device
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Std.
Yes
Hinges, special (LT trim)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Increased dimensions
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Increased panel bus rating
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Interiors to fit existing boxes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Locks, special (LT trim)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Metering devices
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Molded-case switches
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Nameplates engraved
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Panelboards
22.6-13
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modifications
June 2015
Sheet 22 071
General DescriptionTypes PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modifications

Table 22.6-24. ModificationsAlphabetical Index (Continued)
Modification
22
Available on Panelboard Types

PRL1a
PRL2a
PRL3a
PRL3E
PRL4B
PRL4F
Column Type
Neutral rated 200%
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Painting and special coating
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Permanent circuit numbers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote control switches (ASCO 920)
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Service entrance
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Shunt trips
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Split bus or meter loop
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Sub-feed breakers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Sub-feed lugs
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Sub-metering, IQ Energy Sentinel
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Surge protective device (SPD)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Tamperproof screws (LT trim)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Terminals, copper only for breakers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Through-feed lugs
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time clock space only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Touchup paint
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command
23.0-1
February 2012
Lighting Control Systems

Pow-R-Command
Sheet 23 001
CA08104001E
Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2
Pow-R-Command Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2
Pow-R-Command Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-3
Pow-R-Command 5000
Pow-R-Command 2000
System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2-2
Pow-R-Command 1000
Pow-R-Command 750
Pow-R-Command 100
Pow-R-Command 25
Building Automation Systems (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.6-2
Pow-R-Command 2000/1000/75
Panel Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Tab 22 Panelboards
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Pow-R-Command 750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16147D
Section 26 24 16.11
Pow-R-Command 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16147E
Section 26 24 16.13
Pow-R-Command 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16147F
Section 26 24 16.16
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Command Family
23.0-2 Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command

February 2012
Sheet 23 002
General Information
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Eatons Pow-R-Command family
of lighting control panelboards is
designed to meet the lighting control
needs for buildings of all sizes and
complexity. The system incorporates
microprocessor-based distributed
intelligence within a traditional panelboard, simplifying wiring in the field.
The system can be networked over
customers LAN or directly interfaced
to the Internet, allowing for password
protected Web access. The panelboard
design allows the Pow-R-Command
lighting control system to meet shortcircuit ratings, as required by the
National Electrical Code (NEC).
Lighting Control Overview

Traditional lighting control employs
lighting contactors or relay panels
to turn groups of lighting on or off.
Input devices are typically time clocks,
photo cells, wall switches, or, in more
sophisticated applications, contact
inputs from a building automation
system (BAS). Pow-R-Command is
a lighting control panelboard with
remote controllable circuit breakers.
These controllable circuit breakers
perform a dual function:
1. They provide the overcurrent and
overload protection for the circuit.
2. They perform the same function
as relays and contactors in traditional lighting control systems,
opening and closing the circuit
in response to a remote signal.
Installation Considerations
Short-Circuit Protection: In the past,

contactors or relay panels were
mounted close to the lighting load
and short-circuit ratings were not a
major concern. Today, most of the
lighting control devices are located in
electrical rooms, often adjacent to the
panelboards that feed them. These
devices are subjected to short-circuit
conditions almost as high as those of
the electrical distribution equipment.
The current version of the National
Electrical Code now requires that these
lighting control devices carry a shortcircuit rating (Article 110.10). Although
some traditional lighting control
components are available with shortcircuit ratings, these ratings are limited
and may require upstream fusing.
A lighting control panelboard makes
meeting the requirements of NEC
110.10 as simple as specifying the
short-circuit rating of the panelboard.
Simplicity: Lighting control panelboards

are as easy to install as standard
panelboards. There are no additional
components to install.
Flexibility: Lighting control panelboards allow simple and inexpensive

changes during startup. Contactor and
relay panels often require rewiring
to make changes in the field.
Choices: Eatons lighting control
panelboards offer varying levels of
flexibility, from six zones per panel
with the Pow-R-Command 25,
up to 250 zones per panel with
the Pow-R-Command 2000 and
PC Central software.
Space: Lighting control panelboards
eliminate contactor panels and/or relay
panels, freeing up valuable wall space.
Pow-R-Command panels are the same
width as standard panelboards.
Retrofit Applications: Retrofitting
traditional lighting control methods
into an existing electrical distribution
system often requires extensive
rewiring and unwanted downtime.
In most cases, a Pow-R-Command
panel interior can be installed into
an existing panelboard back box,
and the cables can be re-terminated
on the new circuit breakers, with
minimal downtime.
41
Labor: Because contactors and relays

are eliminated, the labor associated
with installing them and the additional
cables and conduit associated with
them is eliminated.
Startup: Startup for the
Pow-R-Command panelboards
is straightforward. The PRC25
requires no startup. It is prewired at
the factory. The PRC100 is provided
with factory startup assistance for
trouble-free installation. The PRC750
is provided with an LCD display and
keypad for on-site programming.
The PRC1000 and PRC2000 are
programmed over the network.
They have an optional display
available for local interface.
Operational Considerations
Failure Modes: If a lighting contactor or
relay fails to operate due to a mechanical
or control system failure, it is very
difficult to control the lights manually.
Often, it is necessary to hardwire
around the device on a temporary basis.
With a lighting control panelboard
system, the circuit breaker can be
manually switched on or off as necessary
until the system is back in operation.
Flexibility: In many cases, the lighting
control scheme may change over the
life of the facility. With traditional lighting control methods, changes require
major rewiring and facility downtime.
Breaker control schemes can be changed
within the lighting control panelboard,
often with a simple modification
through software.

42
43
CA08104001E
February 2012

23.0-3
Sheet 23 003
Selection Guide
Pow-R-Command 2000 (PRC2000)
Pow-R-Command 100 (JCI-100)
Eatons PRC2000 is a microprocessorbased programmable lighting control

system that can be used to control
all of the lighting in your industrial
facilities, high-rise office buildings
and airports. Being on the cutting edge
of technology, the Pow-R-Command
2000 is an IP-based device with an
embedded Web server. Capable of
being used in both standalone and
networkable applications, the
PRC2000 can incorporate both
standard branch-mounted breakers
and controllable thermal-magnetic
breakers for tailored control. The
System Controller also includes load
override, holiday scheduling, one-shot
or event schedules, off warning to
tenants, memory loss protection,
hardware diagnostics and real-time
clock for optimal energy management
functions. The PRC2000 also incorporates the ability to communicate with
networked devices over the Building
Automation and Control Network
(BACnet) protocol. BACnet is an
industry standard protocol and
provides increased flexibility in
component and device selection for
the control system. Consult your local
Eaton representative for availability
of additional protocols.
Eatons PRC1000 is a microprocessorbased programmable lighting control

system. With ratings from 100400A,
the PRC1000 can be used as a standalone panelboard or networked as a
system. The panelboard uses both
branch mounted standard breakers
through 100A, and controllable
thermal-magnetic breakers controlled
by the Pow-R-Command 1000 System
Controller. The System Controller
also includes load override, holiday
scheduling, one-shot or event
schedules, off warning to tenants,
memory loss protection, hardware
diagnostics and real-time clock
for optimal energy management
functions. The PRC1000 system
contains networkable intelligence
and provides automated switching
of branch circuit breakers.
Eatons PRC100 panelboard system

offers the broadest range of energy
control in the industry using standalone PRC100 panelboards or
a network of PRC100 panelboards.
The PRC100 system is ideal for large,
medium and small facilities with lighting
control systems that require frequent
changes, networkable panelboards,
remote access, or all of the above.
Eatons PRC25 panelboard replaces
contactors and relay panels in lighting
control and other load switching
systems. It is the most basic and costeffective way to remotely control loads.
The PRC25 is ideal for any building
that requires a fixed lighting control
scheme with a low installed cost.
The PRC25 can be controlled by an
external time clock, building management system, low-voltage switches
or photocell.
Pow-R-Command 750
Designed for standalone applications,
Eatons PRC750 is a premier microprocessor-based lighting control
system that can be used to control
all of the lighting in your industrial
facilities, high-rise office buildings
and airports. A single PRC750 panel
can be connected to a maximum of
three expansion panels for the ability
to control up to a total of 168 Smart
Breakers. The PRC750 also boasts
load override, holiday scheduling,
memory loss protection, astronomical
time clocks and scheduling, 16 switch
inputs, and alarm and message
log features.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Table 23.0-1. Pow-R-Command Selection Guide

Controller
PRC25
PRC100
PRC750
PRC1000
PRC2000
Required Eaton startup and integration
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Inputs
Low-voltage switch
Universal (switch or analog)
Digital switch network
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Optional switch input expander
48
48
48
Total inputs
64
16
64
64
Outputs
Outputs digital (maximum controllable zones)
16
75
75
Analog
Universal I/O module
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Telephone override
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Data logging
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Remote access
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Power supply for external devices
N/a
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Maximum number of loads (breaker/relay)
42
42
168
168
168
Number of satellite panels
7
7
7
Manual override
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Each rail drives up to 21 breakers. Rails can be distributed individually over a total of eight panels (maximum SLAN wire length of 150 feet).
CA08104001E
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

February 2012
Sheet 23 004
Selection Guide
22
Table 23.0-1. Pow-R-Command Selection Guide (Continued)

Controller
PRC25
PRC100
PRC750
PRC1000
PRC2000
Dimming
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Maximum number of dimming ballasts
160
160
160
Daylight harvesting (using dimming ballasts)
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Daylight switching (on/off circuit switching)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time clock
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time schedules
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scheduling zones
N/A
75
75
75/250
75/250
Outputs (Continued)
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
On/off periods per schedule
N/A
50
50
50
50
Holidays
N/A
30
30
30/16
30/16
Blink notice
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Maximum override time (hrs)
N/A
24
24
24
24
RS-232 port
No
No
No
No
No
RS-485 port
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Ethernet port
No
No
No
No
Yes
Ethernet via external Gateway
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Input/output matrix across controllers
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Input/output matrix within controller
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Local LCD/LED display
No
No
Yes
Option
Option
Local LED status indicators
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Non-volatile program memory
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Battery backup for program memory
N/A
10 years
10 years
10 years
10 years
Clock memory backup
N/A
10 years
10 years
10 years
10 years
Flash firmware memory
N/A
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modbus ASCII/RTU
N/A
Yes
No
No
No
Modbus TCP
N/A
No
No
No
No
Johnson Controls N2
N/A
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Protocols
BACnet
N/A
Yes
No
Yes
LonWorks
N/A
No
No
No
No
SOAP/XML
N/A
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
OPC
N/A
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
TCP/IP
N/A
No
N/A
Yes
Yes
BACnet/IP server
N/A
No
N/A
N/A
Yes
Browser Access
TCP/IP external device
36
37
38
39
40
Built-in Web Server
Standards
UL 916 energy management equipment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
California Title 24
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NEC 110.10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL 67 panelboards
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CSA C22.2 #29 panelboards
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Baud rate
N/A
9.6k
9.6k
9.6k
9.6k
Maximum controllers/network
N/A
120
1800
1800
Password protected
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mounting
41
42
Three-pole breaker housing
No
No
No
No
No
External bracket mount available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

250 additional schedules with optional Network Interface Box NIB.

16 additional holidays with optional Network Interface Box NIB.
Ethernet TCP/IP access with optional terminal server.
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Command 5000
February 2012
23.1-1
Sheet 23 005
General Description
Pow-R-Command 5000
Pow-R-Command 5000 Controller
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 5000
(PRC5000) is a microprocessor-based
building automation and energymanagement system capable of
controlling energy and demand using
remotely located unitary controllers.
The system performs the functions of
scheduling equipment, demand limiting,
duty cycling, monitoring, reporting,
trend logging and implementing
control strategies.
Modular hardware with flexible

user configurations
Non-volatile storage of all database
and control information
Clock and calendar with battery
backup
Two multidrop RS-485 LANs
Up to 15 individual unitary LANs
coordinated through a single
PRC5000, two of these may be
wired directly to the PRC5000; the
rest are connected via the facilitys
Ethernet LAN
Up to 120 universal unitary
controllers per LAN to control
many different types of systems:
HVAC, pumps, conveyors, etc.
Ethernet port for easy access to
remote unitary LANs over existing
Ethernet LAN wiring
RS-232 serial connection for local
terminal or modem
Automatic fail-safe mode
250 schedules, 250 programming
monitors and 50 control structures
Supports remote firmware upgrades
Optimum START/STOP, equipment
scheduling
Trend collection
Maintenance and security
alarm messages
Terminal interface with screen
editor data entry
Load shedding, demand limiting
energy management, four meters
Reports alarms or messages of
adverse conditions by e-mail or
pager over modem or network
Automatic communications
between remote sites and the
central system with automatic
logon and password exchange
Components
Linux-based operating system for

secure operations, communicating
TCP/IP via the Web
Integrated Web-server serves
up canned or custom Web pages
stored directly on the controller.
These pages can be viewed using
any standard Web-browser and
provides the interface for monitoring and controlling the system.
Canned and custom Web pages
then can be viewed with a standard
Internet browser
Monitor the building and manually
control by Web page interface
Universal Unitary Controllers
User configurable to control
pumps, fans, compressors,
conveyors, dampers, etc.
Accept inputs from pushbutton
stations, thermostats, photo
sensors, KYZ meter pulses and
many other device outputs
Addressable with unique address
Up to 120 UUC per RS-485
network
Basic model (UUC-0) has four
direct digital inputs (linked
with four pulse counters), eight
analog inputs, three analog
outputs and two thermostat ports
The cost-efficient UUC-4, has four
digital outputs (TRIAC or relay)
each with an LED status light
and analog/universal inputs
(no dedicated digital inputs),
and one thermostat port
The multi-functional UUC-8 can
be ordered with four configuration options (TRIAC or relay
output options as well as power
options). Eight digital outputs,
12 digital inputs, LED status
indication of all digital outputs
and inputs, eight analog/universal
inputs, three analog outputs, two
thermostat inputs and LED status
lights for controller power and
LAN receive/send data
U-LAN, the unitary controller LAN
operates at 9600 baud on a pair
of wires using standard RS-485
drivers, up to 4000 feet on a single
twisted-shielded cable. RS-485
repeaters should be used for when
more than 4000 feet is required
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

February 2012
Sheet 23006
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Command 2000
February 2012
23.2-1
Sheet 23 007
General Description
Pow-R-Command 2000
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 2000 is a
microprocessor-based programmable
lighting control system with an
embedded Web server and BACnet
native capability. The PRC2000 can be
used as a standalone panelboard or
networked as a system.
Features
Optional LCD display and keypad

Web pages
Memory loss protection
Power failure/brownout recovery
Astronomical real-time clock
PC Central control software
Time scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Digital and analog I/O
Input to output switch matrix
Messages/alarms
Daylight optimization
Switch Override Controller (SOC)
Telephone Override Controller (TOC)
Digital switch network
Components
Pow-R-Command 2000 Panelboard
Controller includes embedded

Web server
Intelligent power switching
equipment
LCD programming display
and keypad
Application Specific Controllers
(ASCs)
PC Central control software
Technical support
Web site
E-mail
Telephone
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
Pow-R-Command 2000 panelboards are
offered from 100 to 400A in main lug
and main breaker configurations.
Available voltages are 120/240, 208Y/
120 and 480Y/277, single-phase and
three-phase. The panelboard uses both
branch-mounted standard breakers
through 100A, and controllable thermalmagnetic breakers up to 30A that are
controlled by the Pow-R-Command
2000 System Controller. The panels
are available in column width. The
Pow-R-Command 2000 controllers
provide the ability to directly operate up
to eight breaker control busses. Such a
capability allows a single controller to
directly operate up to 168 GHQRSP and
BABRSP controllable circuit breakers,
with individual control and status
feedback of each controllable breaker.
The System Controller also includes
one-shot or event schedules, off
warning to tenants by blinking lights,
memory loss protection, power failure/
brownout protection, hardware
diagnostics, a real-time clock and
16 dry contact switch inputs. Up to
100 digital switches can be connected.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Equipment within the Pow-R-Command

2000 system may be networked. Up to
120 panelboards may be networked
over an ethernet cable without the need
for a personal computer in the system.
33
The Pow-R-Command 2000 panelboard

is listed UL 67 for panelboards and
UL 916 for energy management
equipment.
35
34
36
BACnet Protocol
The PRC2000 unit is capable for
integration within BACnet native
control networks. BACnet is a
communications protocol widely
used in building automation and
controls and adds even more flexibility
to the control system. Consult
your local Eaton representative for
additional network protocols.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Command 2000
February 2012
Sheet 23 008
System Configurations
22
PRC2000 Network Architecture
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Containing an embedded Web server,

each Pow-R-Command 2000 system is
programmed with a unique IP address
for communication via any standard
Internet browser. Web access is
standard with the PRC2000. Eight
21-circuit control busses configured
as needed throughout PRL1A and 2A
panels. The PRC2000 directly interfaces to a BACnet Client Workstation.
5th Floor
4th Floor
35
PRC
EP
2
BCB
3rd Floor
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
2000
2
BCB
2nd Floor
PRC
2000
2
BCB
CAT 5
Customer LAN
PC with
Internet
Browser
Ground
Each Pow-R-Command 2000 Typical for
8 Breaker Control Busses Each with 21 Breakers
34
PRC
EP
2
BCB
31
33
PRC
EP
1
BCB
32
PRC
EP
1
BCB
Breaker Control Busses (BCB)

Every Pow-R-Command Expansion
Panelboard can be configured with the
left and/or right breaker control busses
installed. When using a PRC EP panel
with one BCB, the remote controlled
breakers are placed on the side
with the control bus. Standard and
controlled breakers can be distributed
anywhere in the panel as needed.
PRC
EP
1
BCB
PRC
EP
1
BCB
#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent).

CAT 5E or 6 for digital switch network.
Remote
Access
Thru
VPN
Figure 23.2-1 PRC2000 Breaker Control Busses
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Command 1000
February 2012
23.3-1
Sheet 23 009
General Description
Pow-R-Command 1000
General Description
lighting control system. The PRC1000
can be used as a standalone panelboard
or networked as a system.
Features
LCD display and keypad

Control software
Time scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Messages/alarms
Components

equipment
and keypad
(ASCs)
Software and support
Integration components
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
one-shot or event schedules, off warning
to tenants by blinking lights, memory
loss protection, power failure/brownout protection, hardware diagnostics,
a real-time clock and 16 dry contact
switch inputs.
over a shielded twisted pair network
cable without the need for a personal
computer in the system.
The Pow-R-Command 1000
panelboard is listed UL 67 for
panelboards and UL 916 for energy
management equipment.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Command 1000
February 2012
Sheet 23 010
22
PRC1000 Application
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Customizable extension panels allow

for combinations of both regular and
remote controllable breakers for
individualized solutions as shown
in this riser diagram. Eatons
Pow-R-Command 1000 Controller can
support up to eight breaker control
busses contained within four standard
panelboards or split between a
maximum of eight. When connected to
the buildings Internet, all master and
expansion panels can be controlled.
PRC
EP
1
BCB
5th Floor
33
35
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
3rd Floor
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
1000
2
BCB
2nd Floor
PRC
1000
Ground
RS-485 Belden
3105A or Equivalent
Each Pow-R-Command 1000

8 Breaker Control Busses Each with 21 Breakers
34
PRC
EP
2
BCB
4th Floor
31
32
PRC
EP
1
BCB

PRC
EP
2
BCB
#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent).

CAT 5E or 6 for digital switch network.
Network
Interface
PC
with
Software
Remote
Access
Thru
Modem
or VPNEthernet
Figure 23.3-1. PRC1000 Breaker Control Busses
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Command 750
February 2012
23.4-1
Sheet 23 011
General Description
Pow-R-Command 750
General Description
lighting control system. The Pow-RCommand 750 can be used as a
standalone panel, or the user has
the option to connect up to three
expansion panels to the 750 creating
its own standalone subnetwork.
Features

Time scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Messages/alarms
Daylight control (via photocell)
Components
equipment
and keypad
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
loss protection, power failure/brownout
protection, hardware diagnostics,
switch inputs.
equipment.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Command 750
February 2012
Sheet 23 012
22
Pow-R-Command 750
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Designed for standalone applications,

Eatons PRC750 is a microprocessorbased lighting control system that
can be used to control the lighting in
your industrial facilities, high-rise
office buildings and airports. A single
PRC750 panel can be connected to a
maximum of three expansion panels
for the ability to control up to a total
of 168 Smart Breakers. The PRC750
also includes load override, holiday
scheduling, memory loss protection,
astronomical time clocks and
scheduling, 16 switch inputs, and
alarm and message log features.
PRC
EP
1
5th Floor
PRC
EP
1
4th Floor
PRC
EP
2
3rd Floor

PRC
EP
2
2nd Floor
PRC
750
Programming via local LCD

No Start-up required by factory
Ground
#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent)
Figure 23.4-1. PRC750 Standalone System Architecture
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Lightning Control SystemsPow-R-Command

Pow-R-Command 100
February 2012
23.5-1
Sheet 23 013
General Description
Pow-R-Command 100
General Description
lighting control system. The PRC100
can be used as a standalone panelboard
or networked as a system.
Features

Control software
Time scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Message/alarms
Components
equipment
(ASCs)
Software and support
PRC100 Exterior View
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
through 225A, and controllable
thermal-magnetic breakers which are
controlled by the Pow-R-Command 100
System Controller through an integral
communications bus housed in the
panelboard. This integral low voltage
control bus connects to the System
Controller and allows the individual
control and status feedback of each
controllable breaker.
loss protection, power failure/brownout protection, hardware diagnostics,
switch inputs.
over a shielded twisted pair network
cable without the need for a personal
computer in the system.
equipment.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
23.5-2 Lightning Control SystemsPow-R-Command

Pow-R-Command 100
February 2012
Sheet 23 014
22
PRC100-EC
23
Typical
System
Controller
24
25
26
PRC100
Controllable Breakers
or Standard Breakers 3 ASCs
Maximum
(Typical)
USC
USC
USC
Option
Expansion
Network
Remote
Input
SOC
Standard
Panelboard with
Controllable and
Standard Breakers
27
28
PRC100
PRC100-EC
USC
Pigtail
Cable
USC
PRC100
USC
SOC
PRC100-EC
Control
Cabinet
Typical branches:
Up to 42 controllable circuits.
Chassis mounted controllable
breakers can be mixed with
standard non-controllable
branch breakers.
USC
SOC
Control
Cabinet
Photocell
Switch
or LV Switch
29
Main Network Cable

(Twisted Pair)
30
SOC
PRC100
PRC100
Analog Phone Line
PRC100
Standard Analog
Modem
31
USC
USC
RS-232/Serial Cable
USC
32
Serial
Switching Box
120 Vac
33
NIB
Optional Networked PCsAccess to Graphics Program via DDE
Optional
Computer/
Software
34
35
PC
RS-232
Cable
36
Keyboard
37
38
39
40
41
42
Monitor
Central PC/DDE Server
Figure 23.5-1. Typical Building Lighting Control SystemNetworked
Typical New Lighting

Control System
Eatons Pow-R-Command 100
panelboards shown above each have
a System Controller for the basic
lighting control functions.
The Pow-R-Command EC panelboards
shown contain additional chassis
space for a switch override controller.
As shown, the central personal

computer (PC) is optional because
each panelboard is a standalone
operating lighting control system
with basic lighting control functions.
The PC may be used for programming
changes; downloading software;
scheduling, viewing system status
and configuration, etc.
Legend
PRC100 = Standard Pow-RCommand 100 Panel
PRC100-EC = Pow-R-Command 100
with Expansion Chassis
USC = Universal System
Controller Board
PC = Personal Computer
NIB = Network Interface Box
SOC = Switch Override
Controller
43
CA08104001E
February 2012

Pow-R-Command 25
23.6-1
Sheet 23 015
General Description
Pow-R-Command 25
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
and main breaker configurations. Available voltages are 120/240, 480Y/277 Vac
and 208Y/120, single-phase and threephase. The panelboard uses both
through 100A and controllable thermalmagnetic breakers that are controlled
by the MTM.
provides the ability to group up to
42 remotely operated controllable
breakers into six individual zones.

Each zone is designed to be switched
by a dry or control signal contact
from an external device. Each
Pow-R-Command 25 panelboard has
an integral zoning board where the
zone designations are pre-wired at the
factory and linked to specific contact
inputs. Limited changes may be made
to zone designations in the field
through wiring changes.
equipment.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 25 is
designed to replace lighting control
systems involving multi-pole lighting
contactors and relay panels. The
Pow-R-Command 25 uses controllable
circuit breakers in a panelboard that
are grouped into zones and switched
by a dry or control signal contact from
an external source. The controllable
breakers are pre-wired at the factory
in up to six customer-designated
zones with up to 16 breakers per zone.
34
Figure 23.6-1. Typical Electrically Held Contactor Control System
35
36
37
38
Note: Refer to factory for zoning restrictions.
39
Components
40

equipment
Maintained-to-momentary
board (MTM)
41
42
43
Figure 23.6-2. Typical Pow-R-Command 25 Panelboard System
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Command
February 2012
Sheet 23 016
Operational Description
22
Building Automation
Systems (BAS)
23
Integration
24
The Pow-R-Command lighting control

system can be integrated with Building
Automation Systems via the following
optional components:
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Native Modbus Controller. The

Native Modbus Controller takes
the place of the PRC100 System
Controller. The Native Modbus
Controller is designed as a slave
Modbus node
JCI100 Controller. The JCI100
Controller is designed to take
the place of the PRC100 System
Controller. The JCI Controller is
designed specifically for use in a
Johnson Controls Metasys network.
The JCI100 communicates using
JCIs N2 protocol and is treated as an
addressed slave node on an N2 bus
OPC Server. The PRC OPC Server is
a software addition onto a PRC100
or 1000 system. It is designed as an
interface between the PRC system
and an OPC server/client
SOAP Server. The PRC SOAP Server
is a PRC100 system network add-on.
The PRC SOAP Server is designed
as an interface between a PRC100 or
1000 system and a SOAP client
BACnet Server. The PRC BACnet
Server is a PRC system network
add-on. The BACnet Server is
designed to interface between the
PRC100 or 1000 system and a BAS
provider using the BACnet protocol
PRC2000 Web-enabled BACnet
Controller. The PRC2000 BACnet
Controller provides direct
interface via the Web to a
BACnet BAS system
System Interface Equipment
Lighting Management Software
Computer
Software
The System Interface Equipment

Provides Windows-based
programming and monitoring
screens. The personal computer
functions as the central point for
data manipulation and programming of the system. It communicates
with the system through a network
interface device that is connected
to the system through a twisted
pair network
The personal computer is not a
required component of a PRC100
network but is a useful tool for
centralized access and backup of
system controllers
An optional hand-held programmer
provides the capability to communicate directly with the PRC100
system when maintenance of the
panel is required. The hand-held
programmer connects directly to
the PRC100 controllers RS-485
board maintenance port using
the supplied cable
Refer to the factory for further information on applying these interfaces.
39
40
41
42
43
The Lighting Management Software
Provides programming for the

following equipment:
Power switching equipment
Application-specific controllers
The Lighting Management Software

provides fully interactive easy-to-use
software screens for the following
functions:
System Setup
System Management
Controller Access and Modification
Data Logging and Backup
Remote Monitoring
The programming screens provide

access to all the capabilities that
exist in the power switching and
application-specific controllers
Additional software components
can be purchased that will allow for
the creation and use of custom
graphic screens and/or Web access
to a PRC100 system
Network components provide
flexibility in establishing a PRC100
network. The network can consist of
either a pure twisted shielded network or a combination of a twisted
shielded network and Ethernet.
Ethernet networks are accomplished
using the PRC100 Ethernet Server
To connect to a PRC100 network via
a PC, modem or remote LAN/WAN
connection, a Network Access Device
is required. There are two types of
Network Access Devices offered. The
first is a Network Interface Box, which
allows connection via an RS-232 port.
The second is an Ethernet Server,
which is used for connection
via Ethernet
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAT.73.01.T.E

CA08104001E
BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage
24.0-1
September 2011
BuswayPow-R-Way III
Low Voltage
Sheet 24 001
Contents
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-2
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-3
Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-8
Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-11
Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-15
Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-16
Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-19
Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-21
Tees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-23
Crosses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-24
Tap Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-25
Weatherheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-27
Expansion Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-28
Phase Transpositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-28
Transformer Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-29
Transformer Throat Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-30
Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-31
Meter Center Power Takeoff Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-32
Busway Connected Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-34
Pow-R-Way III Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-35
Wall/Floor/Roof Flanges and End Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-36
Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-37
Plug-in Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-41
Power Takeoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-44
Receptacle Plug-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45
Plug-in Device Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-46
Plug-in Device Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-48
Construction Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-50
Installation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51
Final Field Fit Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-52
Pow-R-Flex
Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-3
Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-4
100-Ampere Busway
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-1
Plug-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-8
Receptacle Plug-in Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-8
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-9
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Section 16466
Section 26 25 00
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Way III Busway Installation
CA08104001E
22
24.0-2 BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 24 002
General Description
22
23
24
25
General Description
Table 24.0-1. Pow-R-Way Designations, See Figure 24.0-2
Eatons Pow-R-Way III is a 600V, totally enclosed, nonventilated, sandwich bus design available with copper
bus bars in ratings from 2255000A or with aluminum
bus bars from 2254000A. Pow-R-Way III is available in
outdoor feeder, indoor feeder, indoor plug-in and indoor
sprinkler-proof configurations. All four types can be used
interchangeably without adapters or special splice plates
provided they are of the same current and system rating.
The short-circuit withstand ratings for plug-in busway are
equal to those of indoor and outdoor feeder busway.
26
Standards
27
Pow-R-Way III meets the requirements of NEMA,

UL 857, CSA C22.2 No. 27-94, IEEE, ANSI, IEC, CE
and is manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified facility.
28
29
30
31
Pow-R-Way III busway is self certified for all ratings

and KEMA certified on select ratings to conform to the
following IEC Standards: EN 60439-1:1999+A1:2004,
EN 60439-2:2000-03, EN 60529.
KEMA Certification
Pow-R-Way III busway has been certified by KEMA for the
following IEC 439-2 subclauses:
Refer to Tab 1 for information on seismic qualification for this

and other Eaton products.
36
39
4WG
4WI
4WH
4WHG
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% internal ground, 100% neutral

Three-phase, four-wire, 50% isolated internal ground, 100% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% integral housing ground, 100% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 100% ground , 100% neutral
4WNG
4WNI
4WNH
4WNHG
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% internal ground, 200% neutral

Three-phase, four-wire, isolated internal ground, 200% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% integral housing ground, 200% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 100% ground , 200% neutral
100% ground consists of the 50% integral housing ground combined with
a 50% internal ground bus.
IEC 439-2
Subclause
Description
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
Verification of temperature rise limits

Verification of dielectric properties
Verification of short-circuit strength
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.7
Verification of effectiveness of protective circuit

Verification of clearances and creepage distances
Verification of degree of protection
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.12
Verification of electrical characteristics

Verification of structural strength
Verification of crushing resistance
8.2.13
Verification of resistance of insulating materials to

abnormal heat
Verification of resistance of flame propagation
Table 24.0-3. IEC 60529 IP Ratings
35
38
Three-phase, three-wire, 50% internal ground

Three-phase, three-wire, 50% isolated internal ground
Three-phase, three-wire, 50% integral housing ground
Three-phase, three-wire, 100% ground
8.2.14
33
37
3WG
3WI
3WH
3WHG
Table 24.0-2. IEC 439-2 Type Tests
IEC Standards
32
34
Available Conductor Including Grounding

Configurations and Neutral Options
IEC 529
IP Rating
Busway
Type
IP2X
IP40
IP54
Pow-R-Way III plug-in busway; plug-in outlet protects

against access to live parts
Pow-R-Way III indoor plug-in and feeder busway
Pow-R-Way III sprinkler-proof plug-in busway
IP55
IP66
Pow-R-Way III outdoor feeder busway

Pow-R-Way III severe outdoor feeder busway
Note: Outdoor feeder and sprinkler-proof plug-in busway joints

require field-applied calk to meet above listed IP ratings.
Figure 24.0-1. Pow-R-Way III Joint Design
Table 24.0-4. IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection

A
B
C
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
N
3-Phase, 3-Wire
with Housing Ground
3WH
3-Phase, 4-Wire
with Housing Ground
and 100% Neutral 4WH
3-Phase, 4-Wire
with Housing Ground
and 200% Neutral 4WNH
G
A
B
C
G
A
B
C
N
3-Phase, 4-Wire
with 50% Internal or
Isolated Ground
Bus and 100% Neutral
4WG or 4WI
G
A
B
C
N
3-Phase, 4-Wire
Isolated Ground
Bus and 200% Neutral
4WNG or 4WNI
IEC 529
IP Rating
Description
IP40
Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire

or solid foreign object 1 mm diameter. No protection
against water.
IP54

and dust shall not penetrate in quantity to interfere with
satisfactory operation or impair safety. Protects against
splashing water.
IP55

water jets.
IP66

powerful water jets.
40
41
42
43
3-Phase, 3-Wire
Isolated Ground Bus
3WG or 3WI
Figure 24.0-2. Conductor Configurations
CA08104001E
24.0-3
September 2011
Sheet 24 003
Conductor/Insulation System
Integral Ground
Construction Details, See Figure 24.0-3
The two-piece, extruded aluminum housing is designed,

manufactured and UL listed as a 50% integral ground path
(integral earth) and is fully fault rated. The system ground
continuity is maintained through each joint by the ground
path end blocks, ground path plates and joint covers. The
aluminum joint covers are furnished with ground path
contact surfaces on the inside of each end. When the covers
are installed, the contact surfaces are bolted directly to the
ground path end blocks with four 3/8-16 1/2-inch (12.7 mm)
hex bolts per cover.
Bus bars are fabricated from high strength, 98% conductivity

copper or 55% conductivity aluminum. The joint edge of each
busway conductor bar is beveled while the Pow-R-Bridge
conductor bars have full rounded edges. This makes for a
smooth and easy connection between the busway and
Pow-R-Bridge joint. The phase and neutral bars are insulated
with Class B 130C epoxy insulation. The epoxy powder is
applied by an automated fluidized bed process to ensure
uniform thickness. The epoxy powder is applied over the full
length of the preheated bar except for the joint and plug-in
contact surfaces. After the powder has been fused to the bus
bar, the bars enter an oven to cure. This process ensures that
all of the epoxy powder cross links and hardens to the bus bar.
Fluidized bed applied epoxy provides resistance to water
absorption and chemical erosion. Epoxy has outstanding
heat transfer characteristics and is ideally suited for sandwich
bus applications. The uniform thickness and smooth surface
provided by epoxy ensures that the insulation will have no
cavities or voids and also provides excellent edge coverage
to the bars. Epoxy has excellent dielectric strength, is flame
retardant and resists impacts that other Class B insulating
material could not withstand.
Bus bars for plug-in applications have full-sized welded
conductor tabs at the contact location points of the plug-in
outlet. The tabs are of the same thickness as the conductor
bars. The plug-in conductor tabs extend into the plug-in
outlet, maintaining a true sandwich design throughout the
entire busway length.
A highly visible label is furnished on each joint cover to alert

the installer that the covers must be properly installed to
maintain the ground path. The result is a 50% ground path
that ensures ground continuity with very low resistance
characteristics.
24
25
26
27
Pow-R-Way III offers a 50% ground bus (copper or aluminum)

that is internal to the busway.
28
Isolated Ground Option
29
To meet the growing demand for grounding isolation,

Pow-R-Way III offers a 50% isolated ground bus that is
insulated and internal to the busway. This option is available
for application to operations with heavy microprocessorbased loads or large computer installations where
grounding isolation is essential.
30
31
32
33
34
35
Silver-plating is applied to all joint and contact surfaces after

the fluidized bed epoxy is applied. Aluminum bus bars are
silver-plated by the Alstan 88C process. Copper bus bars are
plated with silver by a flashing process. The silver-plating of
the conductor tabs provides an extremely durable contact
surface for the spring loaded connections of bus plug stab
assemblies.
36
37
Housing Details, See Figure 24.0-3
38
Pow-R-Way III is constructed with a rugged two-piece

extruded aluminum housing. There are no seams or welds
across the top or bottom sides of the housing. The housing
is bolted along the bottom sides below the bus bars with high
tensile strength zinc-plated hardware. No fastening bolts or
screws penetrate the housing or enter the bus bar package.
39
40
Figure 24.0-3. Housing Assembly
A protective finish of ANSI 61, epoxy powder paint is applied

by an automated electrostatic process.
CA08104001E
23
Internal Ground Option
The result is improved heat dissipation, better bracing and

elimination of the need to separate, or flare, the conductor
bars at the plug-in opening. Maintaining a true sandwich
design also eliminates potential pathways for the
propagation of flame, smoke and gas through the busway
housing, commonly referred to as the chimney effect.
Pow-R-Way III achieves the highest 6-cycle short-circuit

withstand ratings available in the industry today. The nonmagnetic, all-aluminum housing provides for excellent heat
dissipation and a significant reduction in reactance and
magnetic flux leakage as compared to a steel or steel and
aluminum combination housing. The integrity and strength
of the housing ensures specifiers and users of a safe and
durable installation over a broad spectrum of industrial and
commercial applications.
22
41
42
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 004
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
200% Neutral Option, See Figure 24.0-4
UL Fire Stop System
Pow-R-Way III offers a fully rated, 200% neutral bus option for
busway fed distribution systems with nonlinear loads. The
additional neutral capacity prevents the overheating caused
by zero sequence harmonic currents. The Pow-R-Way III
200% neutral is manufactured with a single 0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) thick bus bar, which receives the same silver-plating
and Class B, 130C Epoxy insulation as the phase bars.
Pow-R-Way III busway may be used in UL listed throughpenetration fire stop systems. Systems applicable to busway
(i.e., system number C-AJ-6002) are listed in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory under Through-Penetration Fire Stop
Systems and have met the ASTEM E814 (UL 1479) criteria.
Power System Harmonics are generated by various types of

nonlinear loads. A sinusoidal voltage applied to a nonlinear
load will result in a non-sinusoidal current and waveform
distortion. Loads that are switched or pulsed, such as
rectifiers, thyristors and switch-mode power supplies,
are nonlinear. With the proliferation of electronics into
industrial, commercial and institutional applications,
nonlinear loads have become a significant and critical
component of most modern distribution and control
systems. Examples of nonlinear loads are personal
computers, UPS systems, variable frequency motor
controllers, electronic lighting ballasts, fax and copying
machines, medical test equipment and many other
microprocessor-based apparatus.
For typical installations shown in Figure 24.0-5, the installing

contractor uses mineral wool batt and fire stop sealant. In
riser applications, the system is used in combination with
Pow-R-Way III vertical spring hangers and a floor flange. In
horizontal applications, the system is used in combination with
two wall flanges, one on each side of the wall, and sealant.
Note: This information is provided as a guideline for typical fire stop
systems. Consult the fire stop system sealant manufacturer for the
UL file number and specific product information.
UL Listed Pow-R-Way III

Busway
Vertical
Hanger
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Nonlinear load currents typically are extremely high in

harmonic content. The harmonics create numerous problems
in electrical systems and equipment. Some harmonics are
negative sequence with 120 phase displacement (this means
the phase rotation is ACB instead of ABC). Positive sequence
harmonics have 120 phase displacement, but are of the same
rotation as the distribution system. Certain nonlinear loads
cause odd triplen harmonics which are zero sequence with
no phase displacement.
Balancing the phase load currents in a three-phase, fourwire system will normally reduce neutral currents to zero
if load currents have an undistorted sinusoidal waveform.
However, because zero sequence harmonics are additive
and will not cancel each other in the neutral, the neutral
current can be as high as 1.73 times the phase current, even
with the phase currents perfectly balanced. This can result in
overheated neutrals and lead to deterioration of equipment
performance and a shortened equipment life cycle.
Mounting Support
(by Others)
Floor Flange
12 Ga Steel
Floor
Firestop Material
Suggest 3m, Specified
Technologies, or Equivalent
Manufacturer Fire Stop Products
UL 1479 Listed
Floor Flange (Optional)
Figure 24.0-5. Typical Installations of Pow-R-Way III in

Fire Stop Systems
The Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers

Association (CBEMA) recommends that neutrals be
oversized to at least 173% of the ampacity of the phase
conductors to prevent problems. Pow-R-Way III offers a fully
rated, 200% neutral bus option for busway fed distribution
systems with non-sinusoidal loads. The additional neutral
capacity prevents the overheating caused by high harmonic
neutral currents.
39
Pow-R-Way III, Three-Phase Four-Wire
with Housing Ground and 200% Neutral
40
Top
41
A
B
42
43
Figure 24.0-4. 200% Neutral Cross Section
CA08104001E
24.0-5
September 2011
Sheet 24 005
Pow-R-Bridge, See Figure 24.0-6
Pow-R-Way III joint connections are made with the
Pow-R-Bridge joint package, which is installed on each
section of busway prior to shipment. A double-headed,
torque-indicating bolt is provided to ensure that proper
installation torque is achieved. Fall-away instruction tags
are furnished on the torque-indicating bolt heads to allow
for visual inspection from a distance. When the proper
torque value is achieved, the top bolt head will shear off and
allow the tag to fall to the floor. Any joint that is improperly
torqued will retain the highly visible (caution yellow) tag at
the bolt head.
The Pow-R-Bridge can provide an adjustment of 0.50 inch
(12.7 mm) at each joint. Over adjustment is prevented by
the joint covers, which will only allow a 0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
adjustment to be made and by stopping lances on the
conductor bars of the Pow-R-Bridge. The non-rotating design
of the Pow-R-Bridge maintains its configuration integrity
when it has been removed from a section of busway. The
conductors and insulators will not displace or swivel,
making reinstallation of the Pow-R-Bridge quick and easy.
Outdoor Pow-R-Bridge, See Figure 24.0-7

Joint connections for outdoor feeder busway are made with
a weatherized version of the Pow-R-Bridge joint. Aluminum
water barriers, 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) thick, are provided across
the T and T opposite sides of both joint ends on each
section of outdoor busway. Closed cell, neoprene gaskets
are applied to the top of each water barrier and to the inside
of the aluminum side access covers. The aluminum side
access covers overlap the top and bottom access covers and
bolt directly onto the end blocks. The outdoor Pow-R-Bridge
has the same 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) adjustability and features
as the indoor unit and is UL listed.
Table 24.0-5. Busway Pow-R-Bridge Joint Dimensions
Ampere Rating
UL 857
IEC 439
Figure 24.0-8
Configurations
Width
Length
Inches (mm)
Inches (mm)
Belleville
Bridge Joint
Pressure Plate Washer
(Top & Bottom)
Double-headed
Torque-Indicating
Bolt (Bottom)
Ground Path Plate

Ground Path
End Block
130 Epoxy
Insulation
on Bars
Bridge Joint
Retainer Screw
1/4-20 flg.
Head Hex Bolt
(4 per cover)
Ground
Path Contact
Surface
225
400
630
A
A
A
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
800
1000
1200
1000
1200
1400
A
A
A
4.50 (114.3)
5.12 (130.0)
5.62 (142.8)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
1350
1600
2000
1550
1800
2250
A
A
A
6.12 (155.4)
7.12 (180.9)
8.38 (212.9)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
2500
3200
4000
5000
3000
3800
4500
5800
B
C
C
D
10.88 (276.4)
15.88 (403.4)
18.38 (466.9)
23.41 (594.6)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
Joint Cover
High Strength
Glass Polyester
Insulators
Ground Path
End Block
Ground
Path Label
Captive Nut
Retainer
Figure 24.0-6. Indoor Bridge Joint Features

Drain
Gasketed Torque Hole Plug
Bolt Access Cap
(Top & Bottom)
A
A
A
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
800
1000
1200
A
A
A
5.62 (142.8)
6.12 (155.4)
7.12 (180.9)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
1350
1600
2000
A
B
B
8.38 (212.9)
9.12 (231.6)
10.88 (276.4)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
2500
3200
4000
C
D
D
18.38 (466.9)
19.88 (505.0)
23.41 (594.6)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
Gasketed Top
Access Cover
27
29
31
(L)
Belleville
Washer
Ground
Path Contact
Surface
Gasketed
Rear Joint
Cover
Bridge Joint Retainer Screw

Water Barrier
Ground Path
End Block
p & Bottom))
Captive Nut
Retainer
Double-Headed
Joint Torque Bolt
Gasketed
Front Joint
Cover
Ground
Path Label
Closed Cell
Neoprene Gasket
Water Barrier
Gasketed
Cover Plate
orque Bolt
Access Opening
Gasketed Bottom
Access Cover
Drain
Hole Plug
CL
CL
L/2
W/2
W
Figure B
AL 1600 and 2000 Ampere
CU 2500 Ampere
40
41
CL
CL
W/2
W
Figure D
AL 3200 and 4000 Ampere
CU 5000 Ampere
39
CL
CL
L/2
36
38
CL
W/2
W
Figure A
AL 225 1350 Ampere
CU 225 2000 Ampere
34
37
Figure 24.0-7. Outdoor Bridge Joint Features
33
35
End Block
L/2
32
Pow-R-Bridge Joint
Figure 24.0-8. Pow-R-Bridge Joint

CA08104001E
26
28
Gasketed
Cover Plate
24
30
Aluminum
225
400
600
23
25
.375-16 flg.
Head Hex Bolt
(4 per Cover)
Copper
225
400
600
22
L/2
CL
42
W/2
W
Figure C
AL 2500 Ampere
CU 3200 and 4000 Ampere
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 006
22
Pow-R-Way III Feeder Busway, See Figure 24.0-9 and Table 24.0-6
23
24
25
26
2255000A copper
2254000A aluminum
Ampere Rating
IEC 439
Al
Figure 24.0-9
Configuration
225
400
630
A
A
A
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
1000
1200
1400
A
A
A
29
1350
1600
2000
1350
1550
1800
2250
A
A
A
30
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
B
B
C
31
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
C
D
D
33
Cu
225
400
600
32
Configuration A Top View

1 Bar Per Phase
CL
225
400
600
28
CL
Table 24.0-6. Feeder Busway Configuration

UL 857
CL
Straight sections of feeder busway can be supplied in any

length, at 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) increments, from a 16.00-inch
(406.4 mm) minimum to a 10-foot (3048 mm) maximum.
Figure 24.0-9 illustrates the configuration of feeder busway
and Pow-R-Bridge for the available ampere ratings. See
Table 24.0-6 below for reference to the proper configuration.
Cu
27
CL
Each section will include one, factory installed, Pow-R-Bridge

mounted to the left end of the busway (with the T to
the top, when viewing the bus from the F side). Each
Pow-R-Bridge will have a T label that must always
match the T orientation of the busway.
Configuration B Top View

1 Bar Per Phase
CL
CL
T
Configuration C Top View F
2 Bars Per Phase
CL
CL
34
35
T
36
F
37
Configuration D Top View

2 Bars Per Phase
CL
16.00 Minimum
(406.4)
38
39
CL
T
F
40
Front View
Figure 24.0-9. Feeder Busway
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 24 007
Pow-R-Way III Plug-in Busway, See Figure 24.0-10 and
Tables 24.0-7 and 24.0-8
2255000A copper
2254000A aluminum
Straight sections of plug-in busway are made only in
24.00-inch (609.6 mm) incremental lengths with a
maximum length of 10 feet (3m). Figure 24.0-10 depicts
the configuration of plug-in busway and Pow-R-Bridge
for the available ampere ratings. See Table 24.0-7 below
for reference to the proper configuration.
CL
12.00
(304.8)
12.00
(304.8)
(609.6)
CL
CL
22
CL
23
F
CL
12.00
(304.8)
24
1 Bar Per Phase

C
12.00
(304.8)
(609.6)
CL
25
Table 24.0-7. Configuration

Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
IEC 439
Al
Figure 24.0-10
Configuration
Cu
F
225
400
600
225
400
630
26
225
400
630
A
A
A
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
1000
1200
1400
A
A
A
1350
1600
2000
1350
1550
1800
2250
A
A
A
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
B
B
C
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
C
D
D
CL
12.00
(304.8)
27
1 Bar Per Phase
12.00
(304.8)
(609.6)
CL
CL
28
CL
29
F
CL
30
F
Configuration C Top View

2 Bars Per Phase
12.00
(304.8)
31
12.00
(304.8)
(609.6)
32
Table 24.0-8 below illustrates the quantity of plug-in

openings per side that are available per standard section.
33
Table 24.0-8. Number of Plug-in Openings

Duct Length
Inches
Number of Plug-In Openings

mm
Front
Back
24.00
48.00
72.00
609.6
1219.2
1828.8
1
2
3
1
2
3
96.00
120.00
2438.4
3048.0
4
5
4
5
CL
Plug-in Outlet
The plug-in outlet and cover are made from a durable, high
strength, polycarbonate material that is rated as Class B,
130C, insulation. The plug-in cover is designed to protect
the contact surfaces and prevent the entry of dirt, dust or
moisture. The cover has a positive screw close feature that
prohibits the opening of the cover without the use of a tool.
The cover is also utility leadlock sealable.
24.00 Spacing
(609.6)
35
Configuration D Top View

2 Bars Per Phase
12.00
(304.8)
Each section will include one, factory installed, Pow-R-Bridge

mounted to the left end of the busway (with the T label
to the top, when viewing the bus from the F side). Each
Pow-R-Bridge will have a T label that must always match
the T orientation of the busway.
34
36
12.00
(304.8)
37
Front View
38
Figure 24.0-10. Plug-In Busway
39
Cover Can Be Hinged
on Either Side
Hinge
Pins
High Strength
Polycarbonate
Class B 130C
As a countermeasure to the effects of thermal expansion

and mechanical vibration, the plug-in outlet is secured to the
busway housing with high tensile strength locking hardware.
Fingersafe
Plug-in
Opening
40
41
42
N
Leadlock
Sealable
Figure 24.0-11. Plug-In Outlet Cover

CA08104001E
Positive
Screw Close
Feature
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 008
Electrical Data
22
Electrical Data
Table 24.0-11. Resistance, Reactance and ImpedanceCopper

Milliohms per 100 feet (30.5m)
Line-to-Neutral Copper Plug-in and Feeder Busway
Table 24.0-9. Short-Circuit Rating
23
24
UL 857
Ampere
Rating
Resistance
R
Reactance
X
Impedance
Z
225
400
600
2.30
2.30
2.30
1.20
1.20
1.20
2.59
2.59
2.59
1200
1200
1200
800
1000
1200
2.30
1.67
1.39
1.20
0.95
0.78
2.59
1.93
1.60
6-Cycle rms Symmetrical

Maximum Class L Fuse

Needed to Achieve
6-Cycle rms Series Rating
Plug-In
100 kA
200 kA
2000
2000
2000
Feeder
Aluminum
UL 857
Ampere Rating
25
225
400
600
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
26
800
1000
1200
100,000
100,000
125,000
100,000
100,000
125,000
2500
2500
2500
1350
1600
2000
1.20
0.94
0.76
0.66
0.50
0.39
1.37
1.07
0.85
27
1350
1600
2000
150,000
150,000
150,000
150,000
150,000
150,000
4000
4000
4000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
0.55
0.47
0.38
0.27
0.26
0.31
0.24
0.16
0.61
0.57
0.45
0.32
28
2500
3200
4000
2500
3200
4000
5000
Copper
29
225
400
600
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
2000
2000
2000
1600
1600
1600
30
800
1000
1200
85,000
100,000
100,000
85,000
100,000
100,000
2000
1600
3000
3000
31
1350
1600
2000
100,000
125,000
150,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
3000
3000
4000
2500
3200
4000
5000
150,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
150,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
4000
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Table 24.0-10. Resistance, Reactance and ImpedanceAluminum

Milliohms per 100 feet (30.5m)
Line-to-Neutral Aluminum Plug-in and Feeder Busway
UL 857
Ampere Rating
Table 24.0-12. Resistance Values for Integral Housing Ground (Only)

Milliohms Per 100 Feet (30.5m)
UL 857
Ampere Rating
Aluminum Phase
Conductors
Copper Phase
Conductors
225
400
600
1.04
1.04
1.04
1.04
1.04
1.04
800
1000
1200
0.95
0.92
0.85
1.04
0.99
0.95
1350
1600
2000
0.72
0.68
0.61
0.92
0.85
0.72
2500
3200
4000
5000
0.36
0.34
0.30
0.61
0.43
0.36
0.30
Derating Chart for Higher Ambient Temperatures
Resistance
R
Reactance
X
Impedance
Z
225
400
600
4.38
4.38
4.38
1.17
1.17
1.17
4.54
4.54
4.54
800
1000
1200
2.67
2.29
1.76
0.99
0.84
0.64
2.84
2.44
1.87
1350
1600
2000
1.39
1.25
1.01
0.49
0.43
0.34
1.47
1.32
1.07
2500
3200
4000
0.71
0.62
0.50
0.27
0.24
0.19
0.76
0.67
0.54
Pow-R-Way III busway may be operated continuously at its

assigned ratings without exceeding the maximum hot spot
temperature rise of 55C, provided the ambient temperature
does not exceed 55C. For higher ambient temperatures,
the ratings should be reduced by applying the appropriate
multiplier shown in the following chart.
Table 24.0-13. Higher Ambient Temperature Multipliers
Ambient
Temperature C
Multiplier
55
60
65
1.00
0.95
0.90
70
75
80
85
0.85
0.80
0.74
0.68
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 24 009
Electrical Data
Line-to-Line Voltage Drop
22
The table below gives average three-phase voltage drop

per m) at rated current and varying power factor. Line-toneutral voltage drop is obtained by multiplying the line
value by 0.577.
23
Table 24.0-14. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop

UL 857
Ampere Rating
24
Percent Power Factor

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
225
400
600
0.47
0.83
1.25
0.55
0.97
1.47
0.62
1.10
1.67
0.68
1.23
1.87
0.75
1.34
2.05
0.80
1.44
2.21
0.85
1.53
2.35
0.89
1.60
2.47
0.91
1.65
2.54
0.92
1.65
2.56
0.80
1.45
2.26
800
1000
1200
1.66
1.64
1.61
1.97
1.93
1.90
2.26
2.19
2.16
2.53
2.43
2.41
2.79
2.66
2.64
3.03
2.88
2.85
3.24
3.06
3.03
3.40
3.19
3.17
3.52
3.29
3.27
3.57
3.31
3.29
3.18
2.90
2.90
1350
1600
2000
1.54
1.39
1.34
1.81
1.65
1.60
2.07
1.89
1.84
2.31
2.11
2.07
2.53
2.32
2.28
2.74
2.52
2.48
2.92
2.68
2.65
3.06
2.82
2.79
3.16
2.91
2.89
3.18
2.95
2.93
2.81
2.62
2.62
2500
3200
4000
5000
1.15
1.61
1.67
1.43
1.39
1.85
1.92
1.66
1.61
2.07
2.16
1.88
1.82
2.27
2.38
2.08
2.01
2.46
2.58
2.27
2.20
2.63
2.76
2.44
2.36
2.76
2.91
2.58
2.49
2.86
3.02
2.69
2.59
2.92
3.08
2.76
2.64
2.89
3.07
2.76
2.39
2.46
2.62
2.39
225
400
600
0.46
0.81
1.21
0.61
1.09
1.66
0.76
1.36
2.10
0.90
1.62
2.52
1.03
1.87
2.93
1.17
2.11
3.33
1.29
2.34
3.70
1.40
2.55
4.04
1.50
2.74
4.35
1.58
2.88
4.61
1.54
2.81
4.55
30
800
1000
1200
1.37
1.45
1.33
1.73
1.84
1.69
2.08
2.21
2.03
2.41
2.57
2.36
2.73
2.91
2.68
3.03
3.24
2.98
3.31
3.54
3.25
3.55
3.80
3.50
3.76
4.03
3.70
3.90
4.18
3.85
3.69
3.98
3.65
31
1350
1600
2000
1.15
1.20
1.18
1.47
1.55
1.25
1.78
1.87
1.86
2.07
2.19
2.18
2.36
2.49
2.48
2.62
2.78
2.78
2.87
3.04
3.05
3.09
3.28
3.29
3.28
3.48
3.51
3.41
3.63
3.66
3.25
3.46
3.51
32
2500
3200
4000
1.19
1.26
1.31
1.49
1.58
1.66
1.78
1.88
1.99
2.05
2.17
2.30
2.32
2.45
2.61
2.57
2.71
2.89
2.80
2.96
3.16
2.99
3.16
3.39
3.16
3.34
3.59
3.27
3.46
3.72
3.07
3.25
3.52
33
25
Copper
26
27
28
29
Aluminum
Notes:
Voltage Drop = 3 I (R cos + X sin ) Volts/100 ft (30.5m)concentrated load, where cos = power factor.
For plug-in distributed loads, divide the voltage drop by 2. See IEEE Standard 141-13-8.3.
Actual voltage drop for loads less than full rated current and different lengths may be calculated by multiplying the values from
Table 24.0-14 by (actual/rated current) x (actual length/100 ft [30.5m]).
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 010
Electrical Data
22
23
IEC Electrical Data
Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground
Table 24.0-15. IEC 439-2 RatingsCopper
Eatons Pow-R-Way III busway offers a variety of grounding

options. Two of which are 50% integral housing ground and
50% internal ground.
IEC 439
Ampere
Rating
1-Second rms
Micro-Ohms Per Meter
Symmetrical Short- Resistance Reactance
Circuit Rating
R
X
Impedance
Z
24
225
400
630
35,000
35,000
35,000
80.80
80.80
80.80
27.00
27.00
27.00
85.20
85.20
85.20
25
800
1000
1200
35,000
35,000
55,000
80.80
80.80
63.40
27.00
27.00
22.30
85.20
85.20
67.20
26
1400
1550
1800
65,000
70,000
80,000
50.80
39.70
29.40
22.60
26.90
22.90
55.60
48.00
37.30
27
2250
3000
3800
85,000
100,000
120,000
26.20
17.80
13.90
11.60
9.12
10.30
28.80
20.00
17.30
4500
5800
120,000
120,000
13.10
9.11
7.05
5.00
14.90
10.40
28
Table 24.0-16. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop (MV Per Meter)Copper
29
30
IEC 439
Ampere
Rating
Percent Power Factor

50
60
70
80
90
100
26.23
47.21
72.46
27.87
50.16
77.05
29.18
52.46
80.98
29.84
54.10
83.28
30.16
54.10
83.97
26.23
47.54
74.10
800
1000
1200
99.34
94.43
94.43
106.23
100.59
100.59
111.48
104.59
104.59
115.41
107.87
107.87
117.05
108.52
108.52
104.26
95.08
95.08
1400
1550
1800
93.44
89.84
82.62
99.34
95.74
87.87
103.93
100.33
92.46
107.21
103.74
95.41
107.87
104.26
96.72
95.08
92.13
85.90
2250
3000
3800
81.31
72.13
86.23
86.89
77.38
90.49
91.74
81.64
93.77
94.75
84.92
95.74
96.07
86.56
94.75
85.90
78.36
80.66
34
4500
5800
90.49
80.00
95.41
84.59
99.21
88.20
100.98
90.62
100.66
90.49
85.90
78.36
35
Notes:
36
Actual voltage drop for loads less than full rated current and
different lengths may be calculated by multiplying the values from
Table 24.0-16 by (actual/rated current) x (actual length/100 ft [30.5m]).
32
33
The integral housing ground is where the extruded aluminum

housing is used as the ground path and no internal ground
conductor is provided. The housing is UL listed as a 50%
integral ground path. This type of ground path is as
effective of a ground conductor as an internal ground bar.
Table 24.0-17 shows a cross-sectional comparison between
the aluminum housing and internal ground bar. The integral
housing ground provides a larger ground path, which is over
100% of the cross-sectional area of the phase conductors.
Figure 24.0-12 illustrates the difference between the two
grounding options.
Table 24.0-17. Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground Comparison
Ampere
Rating
Bar Size
In Inches
UL 857
225
400
630
31
The 50% internal ground option has a separate ground

conductor internal to the housing, which is rated 50% of
the phase conductor.
Cu
Bar Per
Phase
IEC 439
Al
Cu
Cross-Sectional
Area (sq-in)
Internal
Ground
Housing
Ground
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.125 x 1.63
0.125 x 1.63
0.125 x 1.63
1
1
1
0.20
0.20
0.20
2.37
2.48
2.48
800
1000
1200
630
800
1000
1200
1200
0.125 x 1.63
0.125 x 2.25
0.125 x 2.75
1
1
1
0.20
0.28
0.34
2.48
2.54
2.69
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1600
2250
0.125 x 3.25
0.125 x 4.25
0.125 x 5.50
1
1
1
0.41
0.53
0.69
2.83
3.11
3.46
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3200
0.125 x 6.25
0.125 x 8.00
0.125 x 4.25
1
1
2
0.78
1.00
1.06
3.68
4.17
6.22
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
0.125 x 5.50
0.125 x 6.25
0.125 x 8.00
2
2
2
1.38
1.56
2.00
6.92
7.36
8.34
For plug-in distributed loads, divide the voltage drop by 2.
37
Integral Housing Ground
38
Internal Ground Bar
39
40
Figure 24.0-12. Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 24 011
Physical Data
Physical Data
22
DimensionsBus Bar and Housing

Table 24.0-18. Three-Wire with No Neutral
Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
Al
Phase Bar Size

IEC 439 (Depth and Width)
Inches (mm)
Cu
23
Bar
Conductor Configuration and Housing Size (Width x Height) Inches (mm)
Per
50% Integral
50% Internal
50% Internal
Phase Housing Ground 3WH
Ground Bus 3WHG
Isolated Ground 3WI
Figure 24.0-15
Configuration
24
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)

0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)

4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)

4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)

4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
A
A
A
25
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)

0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2)
0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)

5.38 x 4.38 (136.7 x 111.3)
5.88 x 4.38 (149.3 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)

5.38 x 4.50 (136.7 x 114.3)
5.88 x 4.50 (149.3 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)

5.38 x 4.55 (136.7 x 115.6)
5.88 x 4.55 (149.3 x 115.6)
A
A
A
26
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
0.25 x 3.25 (6.4 x 82.6) 1

0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0) 1
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7) 1
6.38 x 4.38 (162.1 x 111.3)

7.38 x 4.38 (187.5 x 111.3)
8.64 x 4.38 (219.5 x 111.3)
6.38 x 4.50 (162.1 x 114.3)

7.38 x 4.50 (187.5 x 114.3)
8.64 x 4.50 (219.5 x 114.3)
6.38 x 4.55 (162.1 x 115.6)

7.38 x 4.55 (187.5 x 115.6)
8.64 x 4.55 (219.5 x 115.6)
A
A
A
27
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8) 1

0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2) 1
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0) 2
9.40 x 4.38 (238.8 x 111.3)

11.17 x 4.38 (283.7 x 111.3)
16.14 x 4.38 (410.0 x 111.3)
9.40 x 4.50 (238.8 x 114.3)

11.17 x 4.50 (283.7 x 114.3)
16.14 x 4.50 (410.0 x 114.3)
9.40 x 4.55 (238.8 x 115.6)

11.17 x 4.55 (283.7 x 115.6)
16.14 x 4.55 (410.0 x 115.6)
A
A
B
28
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7) 2

0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8) 2
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2) 2
18.64 x 4.38 (473.5 x 111.3)

20.16 x 4.38 (512.1 x 111.3)
23.70 x 4.38 (602.0 x 111.3)
18.64 x 4.50 (473.5 x 114.3)

20.16 x 4.50 (512.1 x 114.3)
23.70 x 4.50 (602.0 x 114.3)
18.64 x 4.55 (473.5 x 115.6)

20.16 x 4.55 (512.1 x 115.6)
23.70 x 4.55 (602.0 x 115.6)
B
B
B
29

100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% internal housing ground.
Refer to Figure 24.0-13 on Page 24.0-12 for configuration A and B.
30
Table 24.0-19. Four-Wire with 100% Neutral

Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
IEC 439
Al
Cu
Phase Bar Size

(Depth and Width)
Inches (mm)
Bar
Per
50% Integral
50% Internal
50% Internal
Ground Bus 4WHG
Isolated Ground 4WI
Figure 24.0-15
Configuration
31
32
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)

0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)

4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)

4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)

4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
A
A
A
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)

0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2)
0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)

5.38 x 4.38 (136.7 x 111.3)
5.88 x 4.38 (149.3 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)

5.38 x 4.50 (136.7 x 114.3)
5.88 x 4.50 (149.3 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)

5.38 x 4.55 (136.7 x 115.6)
5.88 x 4.55 (149.3 x 115.6)
A
A
A
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
0.25 x 3.25 (6.4 x 82.6) 1

0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0) 1
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7) 1
6.38 x 4.38 (162.1 x 111.3)

7.38 x 4.38 (187.5 x 111.3)
8.64 x 4.38 (219.5 x 111.3)
6.38 x 4.50 (162.1 x 114.3)

7.38 x 4.50 (187.5 x 114.3)
8.64 x 4.50 (219.5 x 114.3)
6.38 x 4.55 (162.1 x 115.6)

7.38 x 4.55 (187.5 x 115.6)
8.64 x 4.55 (219.5 x 115.6)
A
A
A
34
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8) 1

0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2) 1
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0) 2
9.40 x 4.38 (238.8 x 111.3)

11.17 x 4.38 (283.7 x 111.3)
16.14 x 4.38 (410.0 x 111.3)
9.40 x 4.50 (238.8 x 114.3)

11.17 x 4.50 (283.7 x 114.3)
16.14 x 4.50 (410.0 x 114.3)
9.40 x 4.55 (238.8 x 115.6)

11.17 x 4.55 (283.7 x 115.6)
16.14 x 4.55 (410.0 x 115.6)
A
A
B
35
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7) 2

0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8) 2
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2) 2
18.64 x 4.38 (473.5 x 111.3)

20.16 x 4.38 (512.1 x 111.3)
23.70 x 4.38 (602.0 x 111.3)
18.64 x 4.50 (473.5 x 114.3)

20.16 x 4.50 (512.1 x 114.3)
23.70 x 4.50 (602.0 x 114.3)
18.64 x 4.55 (473.5 x 115.6)

20.16 x 4.55 (512.1 x 115.6)
23.70 x 4.55 (602.0 x 115.6)
B
B
B
36

100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% internal housing ground.
Refer to Figure 24.0-13 on Page 24.0-12 for configuration A and B.
33
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 012
Physical Data
22
DimensionsBus Bar and Housing (Continued)

Table 24.0-20. Four-Wire with 200% Neutral
Ampere Rating
23
Phase Bar Size (Depth Bar

Per
IEC 439 and Width)
50% Integral
50% Internal
50% Internal
Inches (mm)
Ground Bus 4WHG
Isolated Ground 4WI
Cu
UL 857
Cu
Al
Figure 24.0-15
Configuration
24
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)

0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0)

4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0)
4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0)
4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2)

4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2)
4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2)
4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5)

4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5)
4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5)
A
A
A
25
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)

0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2)
0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0)

5.38 x 4.92 (136.7 x 125.0)
5.88 x 4.92 (149.3 x 125.0)
4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2)

5.38 x 5.05 (136.7 x 128.2)
5.88 x 5.05 (149.3 x 128.2)
4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5)

5.38 x 5.10 (136.7 x 129.5)
5.88 x 5.10 (149.3 x 129.5)
A
A
A
26
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
0.25 x 3.25 (6.4 x 82.6) 1

0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0) 1
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7) 1
6.38 x 4.92 (162.1 x 125.0)

7.38 x 4.92 (187.5 x 125.0)
8.64 x 4.92 (219.5 x 125.0)
6.38 x 5.05 (162.1 x 128.2)

7.38 x 5.05 (187.5 x 128.2)
8.64 x 5.05 (219.5 x 128.2)
6.38 x 5.10 (162.1 x 129.5)

7.38 x 5.10 (187.5 x 129.5)
8.64 x 5.10 (219.5 x 129.5)
A
A
A
27
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8) 1

0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2) 1
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0) 2
9.40 x 4.92 (238.8 x 125.0)

11.17 x 4.92 (283.7 x 125.0)
16.14 x 4.92 (410.0 x 125.0)
9.40 x 5.05 (238.8 x 128.2)

11.17 x 5.05 (283.7 x 128.2)
16.14 x 5.05 (410.0 x 128.2)
9.40 x 5.10 (238.8 x 129.5)

11.17 x 5.10 (283.7 x 129.5)
16.14 x 5.10 (410.0 x 129.5)
A
A
B
28
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7) 2

0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8) 2
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2) 2
18.64 x 4.92 (473.5 x 125.0)

20.16 x 4.92 (512.1 x 125.0)
23.70 x 4.92 (602.0 x 125.0)
18.64 x 5.05 (473.5 x 128.2)

20.16 x 5.05 (512.1 x 128.2)
23.70 x 5.05 (602.0 x 128.2)
18.64 x 5.10 (473.5 x 129.5)

20.16 x 5.10 (512.1 x 129.5)
23.70 x 5.10 (602.0 x 129.5)
B
B
B
29

Neutral bar is 0.5 (12.7) x Width shown.

100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% integral housing ground.
Refer to Figure 24.0-13 for Configuration A and B.
30
Width
Width
31
32
33
Height
A
B
C
N
Height
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
N
34
Configuration A
Configuration B
35
36
2500 to 4000 Ampere Aluminum

3200 to 5000 Ampere Copper
225 to 2000 Ampere Aluminum

225 to 2500 Ampere Copper
Figure 24.0-13. Pow-R-Way III Cross-Section Dimensions
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 24 013
Physical Data
Weights
22
Table 24.0-21. Weight (lb ft) and Current Density (Amperes/in 2)

Ampere
Rating
Current Density
Amperes/In2
UL 857
Cu
Al
IEC 439
UL 857
Cu
Cu
WeightIncluding Integral Housing Ground

(lb ft)
23
IEC 439
Three-Wire
Four-Wire
100% Neutral
Four-Wire
200% Neutral
Add for Internal

Ground
Al
Cu
Cu
Al
Cu
Al
Cu
Al
Cu
Al
24
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
554
985
1477
554
985
554
985
1477
8
8
8
5
5
10
10
10
6
6
11
11
11
7
7
0.78
0.78
0.78
0.23
0.23
25
800
1000
1200
600
1000
800
1000
1200
1400
1969
1778
1745
1477
1164
2469
2133
2036
8
10
12
10
12
15
11
14
17
0.78
1.08
1.33
0.23
0.40
26
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
1662
1506
1455
1231
1129
982
1908
1694
1636
14
17
23
7
8
11
17
21
28
8
10
12
20
25
33
9
11
13
1.57
2.05
2.66
0.47
0.62
0.80
27
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
1250
1505
1024
1000
1500
1788
29
34
12
14
36
42
13
16
42
49
15
18
3.87
4.11
0.91
1.17
28
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
1455
1250
909
960
1000
1636
1450
45
63
21
23
28
56
72
24
26
32
66
85
27
29
36
5.32
7.74
1.61
1.83
2.35
29
Table 24.0-22. Weight (kg/M) and Current Density (Amperes/cm 2)

Ampere
Rating
UL 857
Cu
Al
IEC 439
UL 857
Cu
Cu
30
WeightIncluding Integral Housing Ground

(kg/m)
Current Density
Amperes/cm2
IEC 439
Three-Wire
Four-Wire
100% Neutral
Four-Wire
200% Neutral
Add for Internal

Ground
Al
Cu
Cu
Al
Cu
Cu
Cu
Al
Al
31
Al
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
86
153
229
86
153
86
153
229
12
12
12
7
7
15
15
15
9
9
17
17
17
11
11
1.17
1.17
1.17
0.35
0.35
32
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
305
276
270
229
180
380
328
313
12
15
18
15
18
22
11
17
21
26
11
12
1.17
1.62
1.98
0.35
0.60
33
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
258
233
226
191
175
152
293
260
233
21
25
34
11
12
16
25
32
42
12
15
18
30
37
49
14
16
20
2.34
3.06
3.96
0.71
0.92
1.20
34
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
194
233
159
155
231
275
43
51
18
21
54
63
20
24
63
73
22
27
5.76
6.12
1.36
1.75
35
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
226
194
140
149
155
252
223
67
94
32
34
42
83
108
36
39
48
98
126
40
43
54
7.92
11.53
2.40
2.73
3.50
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 014
Physical Data
22
Table 24.0-23. Ampere Ratings Needed to be at or Below 1000A/sq-in Density

Ampere Rating
Bar Size
UL 857
23
Cu
Cu
Standard
Density
Al
Al
1000A/sq-in
Density
Adjusted
Rating
Standard
Density
1000A/sq-in
Density
Adjusted
Rating
24
225
400
600
225
400
1.62
1.62
1.62
556
988
1481
556
988
873
None
None
1200
556
988
556
988
None
None
25
800
1000
1200
600
800
1.62
2.25
2.75
1975
1778
1745
985
941
873
1350
1600
2000
1481
1164
873
985
800
1000
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
3.25
4.25
5.50
1662
1506
1455
982
800
1000
2000
2500
2500
1231
1129
982
941
873
864
1200
1350
1600
2500
3200
1600
2000
6.25
8.00
2.00 x 4.25
1250
1506
909
800
4000
5000
1024
1000
800
1000
2000
None
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
2.00 x 5.50
2.00 x 6.25
2.00 x 8.00
1455
1250
1000
N/A
5000
N/A
909
1024
1000
909
800
1000
None
4000
None
26
27
28
Application Note
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
The above table is meant to help the user and specifier

select the higher busway ratings to meet the performance
specification of a current density value no higher than 1000A
per square inch. The current density values of our standard
busway offerings based upon temperature rise are listed
in the 5th and 8th columns of the table. These ratings are
UL listed and labeled, and safe to apply. However, certain
jurisdictions or applications require a better margin of
safety, and choose to use a 1000A/sq-in density standard.
When the lower than standard densities are required, such as
1000A/sq-in, then the only option is to oversize the busway
from the standard bar sizes and ampacity ratings. Oversizing
provides more bus bar material in cross-sectional area, and
results in lower current densities and lower temperature rises
for a given value of load current.
By example, take the case of 1600A copper busway.
The standard product uses a bar size of 0.25 in x 4.25 in
(1.0625 sq-in area) and which results in 1506A/sq-in density
(calculated by 1600A/1.0625 sq-in = 1506A/sq-in), as listed in
the table. If a project or application using bus runs expected
to carry 1600A of load current stipulated that the current
densities experienced by the busway should be no greater
than 1000A/sq-in, then oversizing to busway bars used in
the standard 2500A rating using 0.25 inch x 8 inch bars
(2.0 sq-in area) yields a current density of 1600A/2.0 sq-in
800A/sq-in for the 1600A of load current.
Why not just oversize to 2000A busway? The 2000A bar size
is 0.25 in x 5.50 in or 1.375 sq-in Computing the new density
yields 1600A/1.375 sq-in = 1164A/sq-in which is higher than
the desired value of no greater density than 1000A/sq-in.
Therefore, the table provides a quick method of determining
the ampacity of busway required to meet current density
values no greater than 1000A/sq-in for given values of load
current. The most important columns of data are the 1st, 7th
and 10th.
Eaton warrants that the Pow-R-Way III product will perform
as intended regardless of the method of selection, either
temperature rise only or current density. Eaton encourages
specifiers who use current density as the criteria for
busway selection to select and specify the busway ratings
recommended in the above table under the Adjusted Rating
column, and not rely upon the contractors or bidders to
resolve the matter in the later stages of a project. If sizing
busway is strictly based upon current density, do not specify
or use the standard ampacity values based upon the UL and
NEMA temperature rise standard on Contract Drawings.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-15
September 2011
Sheet 24 015
Physical Data
Fittings
There is a fitting to meet every application need: flanges,
elbows, offsets, tees, cable tap boxes, weatherheads,
transformer connections, power take-off sections, reducers,
adapter cubicles, expansion joints and end closures.
Rearward
22
Upward
23
These fittings, along with standard and minimum

dimensions, are described on the following pages.
Forward
When making field measurements and layouts, it should

be remembered that the dimensions are given from the
centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
Downward
The relationship of fittings to straight lengths (forward,

rearward, upward and downward) is illustrated in
Figure 24.0-14.
24
25
26
All straight lengths and fittings are marked with a T

label and an F label. The T and F locations will also
be noted on the construction, or the as-built, drawings
furnished. When installing the busway, the T and F
markings of each section must match. Failure to do so
will result in an improper installation with the phase bars
out of sequence.
27
Figure 24.0-14. T and F Orientation for Fittings
28
29
30
End Closer
Built-in
Power
Take-Off
31
In-Line
Power
Take-Off
Bolt-on
Unit
32
Upward/Downward
Corner Joint
Plug-in
Unit
Plug-in
Bus
Wall
Flange
Offset
Upward/
Downward
Elbow
90 Phase
Transposition
Center Cable
Tap Box
or
do
In
or
do
t
Ou
Weatherhead
Forward/
Rearward
Tee
180 Phase
Transposition
33
Floor Flange
34
35
Tra
n
sfo
Upward/
Downward
Tee
Forward/Rearward
Corner Joint
Protected
Reducer
rm
er
36
Transformer
Throat
rd
oa
37
hb
itc
Sw
ard
38
o
hb
itc
Sw
39
Expansion
Joint
40
End Cable Tap Box
41
Figure 24.0-15. Typical Busway Components
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 016
Physical Data
22
23
24
Traditional Indoor and Outdoor Elbows (Figure 24.0-16)
Table 24.0-24. Forward and Rearward Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90 changes in the direction of

busway runs. The four types that are available are forward,
rearward, upward and downward. See minimum leg lengths
listed for each type in Table 24.0-24 and Table 24.0-25.
All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
CL
25
CL
CL
26
Forward
CL
27
Downward
CL
28
C
CL
29
X
CL
X
CL
CL
CL
CL
Rearward
CL
31
Figure 24.0-16. Traditional Elbows
32
Corner Joint Elbows (Figure 24.0-17)
33
The Pow-R-Way III Corner Joint Elbow can be installed in

areas where a traditional 90 turn could never have been
accomplished before.
34
Pow-R-Way III Corner Joint Elbows can solve any serious

pathway problem and contribute to successful layouts with
minimal space requirements.
35
All dimensions are to the centerline of the Corner

Joint Connection.
Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
UL 857
Cu
Al
IEC 439
Minimum Leg Lengths (X)

Inches (mm)
Cu
Upward
Downward
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1550
1550
1800
2250
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
Ampere Rating
CL
CL
X
UL 857
CL
CL
Y
Cu
C
L
38
Forward
C
L
Y
C
L
X
C
L
Rearward
C
L
39
C
L
C
L
C
L
C
L
C
L
X
C
L
Y
41
X
C
L
C
L
42
Al

Inches (mm)
Table 24.0-26. Forward/Rearward Corner Joints
37
40
Cu
IEC 439
Ampere Rating
Upward
36
UL 857
Table 24.0-25. Upward and Downward Elbows

X
30
Ampere Rating
Upward
Al
IEC 439
Dimensions
Inches (mm)
Cu
(X)
(Y)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.94 (23.9)
0.94 (23.9)
0.94 (23.9)
5.38 (136.7)
5.38 (136.7)
5.38 (136.7)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
0.94 (23.9)
1.25 (31.8)
1.50 (38.1)
5.38 (136.7)
5.69 (144.5)
5.94 (150.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
1.75 (44.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.88 (73.2)
6.19 (157.2)
6.69 (169.9)
7.31 (185.7)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
3.25 (82.6)
4.12 (104.7)
6.64 (168.7)
7.70 (195.6)
8.57 (217.7)
11.07 (281.2)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
7.89 (200.4)
8.65 (219.7)
10.42 (264.7)
12.32 (312.9)
13.08 (332.2)
14.85 (377.2)
Downward
Figure 24.0-17. Corner Joint Elbows (For Indoor Applications Only)
43
CA08104001E
24.0-17
September 2011
Sheet 24 017
Physical Data
Table 24.0-27. Upward/Downward Corner Joints
Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
Al
22

IEC 439
Housing Ground
Cu
(X)
(Y)
(X)
Internal Ground
(Y)
(X)
Isolated Ground
(Y)
23
Three-Wire
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
24
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
25
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
26
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
27
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
28
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
29
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
30
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
31
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
32
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
33
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
36
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
37
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
38
Four-Wire (100%)
Four-Wire (200%)
34
35
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 018
Physical Data
22
23
24
Special Angle Elbows

Special angle elbows are traditional elbows that allow the
direction of the busway runs to change at angles greater
than 90 degrees. They allow easy routing through nontraditional corridors. The four types offered are forward,
rearward, upward and downward. See minimum leg lengths
for each type listed in Table 24.0-28 and Table 24.0-29.
Table 24.0-28. Forward and Rearward Elbows
25
Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
26
IEC 439
Al

Inches (mm)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
29
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
30
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
27
28
31
Rearward
Table 24.0-29. Upward and Downward Elbows

Ampere Rating
32
Forward
Cu
UL 857
Cu
Al
IEC 439

Inches (mm)
Cu
Upward
Downward
Upward
33
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
34
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
35
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
36
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
37
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
38
39
Downward
40
41
42
43
Figure 24.0-18. Special Angle Elbows
CA08104001E
24.0-19
September 2011
Sheet 24 019
Physical Data
Standard and Flush Flanges (Figure 24.0-19)
Flanges provide a direct connection to low voltage switchgear,
switchboards, motor control centers and other apparatus.
Cutout dimensions and drilling plans are provided with
the customer drawings and it is the responsibility of the
switchgear manufacturer to provide the opening, flange
drillings, connecting hardware and bus risers in their
equipment. For proper coordination between busway and
other equipment, detailed drawings, including switchgear
orientation, must accompany the order. A standard flange
can be supplied to the left or right of a section, as required.
A flush flange is used when the busway must lay close to the
top of a switchboard. The edge of the busway is 1.25 inches
(31.8 mm) from the top of the switchboard.
22
Flush Flange
23
24
25
1.25
(31.8)
CL
15.00
(381.0) (Minimum)
27
Table 24.0-30. Switchboard Flanges

Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
Al
IEC 439
Flush Flange
Min. Leg Length
Standard Flange
Min. Leg Length
Cu
(X) Inches (mm)
(X) Inches (mm)
26
CL Bridge
28
29
225
400
600
225
400
600
225
400
630
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
1000
1200
1400
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
30
1350
1600
2000
1350
1600
2000
1550
1800
2250
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
31
2500
3200
4000
2500
3200
4000
3000
3800
4500
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
5000
5800
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
32
12.00
(304.8) (Minimum)
33
Vault Flanges
Standard Flange Left
Vault flanges are used to enter a utility vault for termination

to the utility transformer. Each vault flange is custom
designed to meet each specific utility specification. Vault
flanges may look similar to those shown in Figure 24.0-20.
Please consult the factory for specific dimensions based
upon utility specifications.
34
Figure 24.0-19. Flanges
35
36
37
1.00
(25.4)
B
38
39
N
C
B
C
A
G
40
41
42
Figure 24.0-20. Vault Flanges
CA08104001E
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 020
Physical Data
22
23
24
Elbow Flanges (Figure 24.0-21)

An Elbow Flange is a combination of a standard elbow
and a standard flange fabricated into a single fitting. Elbow
Flanges are typically used when the minimum leg lengths
for either the standard elbow or standard flange cannot be
maintained. Minimum leg lengths are listed in Table 24.0-31
and Table 24.0-32.
CL
CL
X
CL
25
Table 24.0-31. Forward and Rearward Elbow Flanges

Ampere Rating
26
UL 857
Cu
Al
IEC 439
Minimum Dimensions
Inches (mm)
Cu
Joint Leg, (X)
Joint Leg, (Y)
27
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
28
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
9.25 (235.0)
29
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
9.25 (235.0)
9.75 (247.7)
10.25 (260.4)
30
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
10.75 (273.1)
11.75 (298.5)
14.00 (355.6)
31
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
15.25 (387.4)
16.00 (406.4)
17.75 (450.9)
32
33
Y
CL
Table 24.0-32. Upward and Downward Elbow Flanges

Ampere Rating
UL
857
Cu
IEC
439
Al
Joint Leg, (X)

Up
X
Flange Leg, (Y)
Up
Down
225 10.00 (254.0)

400 10.00 (254.0)
630 10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
35
800 600 1000 10.00 (254.0)

1000
1200 10.00 (254.0)
1200 800 1400 10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
36
1350 1000 1550 10.00 (254.0)

1600 1200 1800 10.00 (254.0)
2000 1350 2250 10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
37
1600
10.00 (254.0)
2500 2000 3000 10.00 (254.0)
3200
3800 12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
7.75 (196.9)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
38
4000 2500 4500 12.00 (304.8)
3200
12.00 (304.8)
5000 4000 5800 12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
7.75 (196.9)
7.75 (196.9)
7.75 (196.9)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
225 225
400 400
600
Cu
Minimum Dimensions
Inches (mm)
Down
34
Forward Elbow
Right Flange
CL
CL
Upward Elbow
Right Flange
CL
X
CL
Y
CL
Rearward Elbow
Right Flange
39
CL
CL
40
41
Downward Elbow
Right Flange
42
43
Figure 24.0-21. Elbow Flanges
CA08104001E
24.0-21
September 2011
Sheet 24 021
Physical Data
Offsets (Figure 24.0-22)
22
An Offset is used to avoid obstacles and to conform to the

buildings structure. It is two elbows fabricated into a single
fitting for use where space restrictions prohibit the use of
two standard 90 elbows. The minimum leg lengths are listed
in Table 24.0-33 and Table 24.0-34.
CL
Y
CL
3.00
23
(Minimum)
CL

Table 24.0-33. Forward and Rearward Offsets
Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
IEC 439
Al
24
CL
25
Minimum Dimensions (Y)

Inches (mm)
Cu
26
Forward
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
27
CL
28
3.00
(76.2)
(Minimum)
29
Downward
CL
30
CL
31
Table 24.0-34. Upward and Downward Offsets

Ampere Rating
UL
857
Cu
Al
225 225
400 400
600
Minimum Dimensions
Inches (mm)
IEC
439
Upward
Cu
(Y)
32
Downward
(Z)
(Y)
CL
(Z)
33
225 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)

400 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
630 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
CL
CL
3.00
(76.2)
(Minimum)
800 600 1000 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
1000
1200 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
1200 800 1400 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
1350 1000 1550 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
1600 1200 1800 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
2000 1350 2250 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
34
Y
CL
35
CL
Y
CL
1600
10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
2500 2000 3000 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
3200
3800 12.00 (304.8) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8)
36
37
4000 2500 4500 12.00 (304.8) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8)
3200
12.00 (304.8) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8)
5000 4000 5800 12.00 (304.8) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8)
38
Rearward
39
CL
40
CL
41
42
Upward
CL
Figure 24.0-22. Offsets

CA08104001E
3.00
(76.2)
(Minimum)
CL
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 022
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
Combination Offsets
CL
Combination offsets are used to conform to the buildings

structure and change direction, utilizing a small amount
of space. They are two different oriented elbows fabricated
into a single fitting. Forward or rearward directions are
determined by the T and F locations. Please refer
to Page 24.0-16. Minimum leg lengths are listed in
Table 24.0-24 and Table 24.0-25.
X
F
Ampere Rating
UL
857
Cu
IEC 439 X
Al
Cu
CL
Three-Wire/ Four-Wire
Four-Wire
200% N
Z
CL
Upward/Forward/Rearward
27
225
400
630
10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2)

10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2)
10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
28
800 600 1000

1000
1200
1200 800 1400
10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2)

10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2)
10.00 (254.0) 13.50 (342.9)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.50 (190.5)
7.00 (177.8)
7.50 (190.5)
7.50 (190.5)
29
1350 1000 1550

1600 1200 1800
2000 1350 2250
10.00 (254.0) 13.50 (342.9)

10.00 (254.0) 14.00 (355.6)
10.00 (254.0) 14.50 (368.3)
7.50 (190.5)
8.00 (203.2)
9.00 (228.6)
8.00 (203.2)
8.50 (215.9)
9.00 (228.6)
30
1600
2500 2000 3000
3200
3800
10.00 (254.0) 15.00 (381.0) 9.00 (228.6) 9.50 (241.3)

10.00 (254.0) 16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 10.50 (266.7)
12.00 (304.8) 18.50 (469.9) 12.50 (317.5) 13.00 (330.2)
31
4000 2500 4500
3200
5000 4000 5800
12.00 (304.8) 19.50 (495.3) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6)

12.00 (304.8) 20.50 (520.7) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8) 22.50 (571.5) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1)
32
33
34
35
36
Table 24.0-35. Combination Offsets
225 225
400 400
600
CL
Z
CL
CL
CL
CL
F
T
CL
CL
Z
Downward/Forward/Rearward
225 225
400 400
600
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)

13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
800 600 1000

1000
1200
1200 800 1400
13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)

13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.50 (190.5)
7.00 (177.8)
7.50 (190.5)
7.50 (190.5)
1350 1000 1550

1600 1200 1800
2000 1350 2250
13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9)

13.00 (330.2) 14.00 (355.6)
13.00 (330.2) 14.50 (368.3)
7.50 (190.5)
8.00 (203.2)
9.00 (228.6)
8.00 (203.2)
8.50 (215.9)
9.00 (228.6)
1600
2500 2000 3000
3200
3800
13.00 (330.2) 15.00 (381.0) 9.00 (228.6) 9.50 (241.3)

13.00 (330.2) 16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 10.50 (266.7)
13.00 (330.2) 18.50 (469.9) 12.50 (317.5) 13.00 (330.2)
4000 2500 4500
3200
5000 4000 5800
13.00 (330.2) 19.50 (495.3) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6)

13.00 (330.2) 20.50 (520.7) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0)
13.00 (330.2) 22.50 (571.5) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1)
CL
CL
Upward/Forward/Rearward
CL
CL
Y
F
CL
CL
F X
37
38
CL
39
CL
40
CL
Z
CL
Y
T
41
T
F
42
CL
CL
43
Downward/Forward/Rearward
Figure 24.0-23. Combination Offsets

CA08104001E
24.0-23
September 2011
Sheet 24 023
Physical Data
Tees (Figure 24.0-24)
A tee is a busway fitting suitable for connection in three
directions. The minimum leg lengths are shown in
Table 24.0-36 and Table 24.0-37.
CL
X
UL
857
Cu
225
400
600
800
1000
IEC
439
Al
225
400
600
Cu
23
CL
Table 24.0-36. Forward and Rearward Tees

Ampere Rating
22
CL
Forward
Y
CL
Minimum Leg Dimensions

Inches (mm)
CL
(X)
(Y)
225
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
1000
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
1200
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
1200
800
1400
13.50 (342.9)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1000
1550
13.50 (342.9)
13.50 (342.9)
1600
1200
1800
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
2000
1350
2250
14.50 (368.3)
14.50 (368.3)
1600
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
2500
2000
3000
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
3200
3800
27.25 (692.2) 8.00 (203.2) 26.38 (670.1) 19.39 (492.5) 21.12 (536.4)
4000
2500
4500
28.50 (723.9) 8.00 (203.2) 27.62 (701.6) 21.88 (555.8) 23.63 (600.2)
3200
29.25 (743.0) 8.00 (203.2) 28.38 (720.9) 23.41 (594.6) 25.12 (638.0)
5000
4000
5800
31.00 (787.4) 8.00 (203.2) 30.12 (765.1) 26.94 (684.3) 28.63 (727.2)
24
25
26
CL
Rearward
27
CL
X
CL
Y
CL
X
CL
28
29
30
31

CL
Table 24.0-37. Upward and Downward Tees

Ampere Rating
UL
857
Cu
IEC
439
Al
Cu

Inches (mm)
(X)
(Y)
225
225
21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0)
9.25 (235.0)
400
400
400
21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0)
9.25 (235.0)
600
1000
600
630
21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0)
9.25 (235.0)
1000
21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0)
9.25 (235.0)
1200
21.88 (555.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.62 (142.7)
10.50 (266.7)
1200
800
1400
22.38 (568.5) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 6.12 (155.4)
11.50 (292.1)
1350
1000
1550
22.88 (581.2) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 6.62 (168.1)
12.50 (317.5)
1600
1200
1800
23.88 (606.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 7.62 (193.5)
14.50 (368.3)
2000
1350
2250
25.12 (638.1) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 8.65 (219.7)
17.00 (431.8)
1600
25.88 (657.4) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 9.65 (245.1)
2500
2000
3000
27.62 (701.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 11.42 (290.1) 22.00 (558.8)
3200
3800
23.88 (606.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 16.38 (416.1) 14.50 (368.3)
4000
2500
4500
25.12 (638.1) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 18.65 (473.7) 17.00 (473.7)
3200
25.88 (637.4) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 20.41 (518.4) 18.50 (470.0)
5000
4000
5800
33
225
800
32
Upward
CL
34
35
CL
36
CL
37
CL
18.50 (470.0)
38
Downward
C
27.62 (701.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 23.94 (608.1) 22.00 (558.8)
39
CL
40
41
X
CL
42
X
CL
CL
Figure 24.0-24. Tees

CA08104001E
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 024
Physical Data
22
23
Crosses (Figure 24.0-25)

A cross is a busway fitting suitable for connection in four
directions. It is applied when a bus run must branch off in
three directions, all in the same plane.
Table 24.0-38. Forward and Rearward Crosses
24
Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
25
Al
IEC 439

Inches (mm)
Cu
(X)
(Y)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
28
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
21.70 (551.2)
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
21.70 (551.2)
29
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
22.94 (582.7)
23.71 (602.2)
25.09 (637.3)
22.94 (582.7)
23.71 (602.2)
25.09 (637.3)
26
27
30
31

Table 24.0-39. Upward and Downward Crosses
Ampere Rating
UL 857
32
33
34
35
36
37
Forward Rearward
Cu
Al
IEC 439

Inches (mm)
Cu
(X)
(Y)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
21.25 (539.8)
21.25 (539.8)
21.25 (539.8)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
21.25 (539.8)
21.88 (555.8)
22.38 (568.5)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
22.88 (581.2)
23.88 (606.6)
25.12 (638.1)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
25.88 (657.4)
27.62 (701.6)
23.88 (606.6)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
25.12 (638.1)
25.88 (637.4)
27.62 (701.6)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
Upward Downward
Figure 24.0-25. Crosses
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-25
September 2011
Sheet 24 025
Physical Data
End Cable Tap Box (Figure 24.0-26)
22
End cable tap boxes are used to feed a run of busway with
cable and conduit or where loads served by busway are
connected without the need for overcurrent protection. For
indoor applications, the T side, side opposite T and the
end panel are removable for access to the lugs. For outdoor
applications, these panels are gasketed to prevent moisture
from entering. In addition, the outdoor end cable tap
boxes are provided with removable gasketed side access
panels located on the F and side opposite F for more
accessibility to the lugs. Removable side access panels
are available on indoor cable tap boxes upon request.
38.00
(965.2)
23
Min.
T Side
Removable
Indoor
30.00
(762.0)
32.50
12.00
(304.8)
((Minimum))
(825.5)
L
of
Du
(381.0)
17.50
(444.5)
Side Opposite T
Removable Indoor
Gasketed
Access Cover
on Front and
Back of Box
for Outdoor
Tap Boxes
Standard
Dimension D: For mechanical lugs = 21.34 inches (542.0 mm).

For compression lugs = 19.44 inches (493.8 mm).
200% neutral.
Table 24.0-40. End Cable Tap Box Dimension

Copper
Dimensions
Aluminum
Dimensions
Ampere Rating
UL 857
IEC 439
Dimension (A)
Inches (mm)
Ampere Rating
UL 857
Copper
G
N
G
P
N
225
225
12.00 (304.8)
225
12.00 (304.8)
400
400
12.00 (304.8)
400
12.00 (304.8)
600
630
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
800
1000
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
1000
1200
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
1200
1400
12.00 (304.8)
800
12.00 (304.8)
1350
1550
12.00 (304.8)
1000
12.00 (304.8)
1600
1800
20.50 (520.7)
1200
12.00 (304.8)
2000
2250
20.50 (520.7)
1350
20.50 (520.7)
12
1600
24.50 (622.3)
2500
3000
24.50 (622.3)
2000
24.50 (622.3)
16
12
3200
3800
30.50 (774.5)
18
4000
4500
45.00 (1143.0)
2500
30.50 (774.5)
12
24
16
3200
30.50 (774.5)
18
5000
5800
45.00 (1143.0)
4000
45.00 (1143.0)
15
30
12
24

600
For compression lugs, factory provides provisions only.

All dimensions shown in Figure 24.0-26 remain constant regardless of system wiring configuration.
Denotes quantity of terminals per ground bus.
Denotes quantity of terminals per phase and 100% neutral bus.
Denotes quantity of terminals per 200% neutral bus option.
30
32
Aluminum
P
28
31
Quantity of Mechanical Terminals, Range

One #4 (20 mm2)600 kcmil (300 mm2)
Two 1/0 (50 mm2)250 kcmil (120 mm2)
Dimension (A)
Inches (mm)
27
29

25
26
CL
24
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 026
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Center Cable Tap Box (Figure 24.0-27)

Center cable tap boxes are used to center feed a run of
busway with cable and conduit or where loads served by
the busway are connected without the need for overcurrent
protection. For indoor applications, the T side, side
opposite T and the end panel are removable for access
to the lugs. For outdoor applications, these panels are
gasketed to prevent moisture from entering. In addition,
the outdoor center cable tap boxes are provided with
removable gasketed access panels located on the front
and back for more accessibility to the lugs.
B
C
T Side
Removable
Indoor
30.00
(762.0)
12.00
(304.8)
(Minimum))
32.50
(825.5)

D
Table 24.0-41. Center Tap Box DetailsDimension C

f Box
Dimension C in Inches (mm)
End
Removable
Indoor
Copper
2251350A
16002000A
2500A
3200A
3.63 (92.2)
4.75 (120.7)
6.00 (152.4)
10.75 (273.1) 12.25 (311.2)
40005000A
2251000A
12001350A
16002000A
25003200A
3.63 (92.2)
4.75 (120.7)
6.00 (152.4)
10.75 (273.1) 12.25 (311.2)
15.00 17.50
(381.0)
Side Opposite T
Removable Indoor
Aluminum
Dimension is
the Minimum
Gutter Space
Gasketed Access Cover

on Front and Back of Box
for Outdoor Tap Boxes Only
4000A
30
Figure 24.0-27. Center Cable Tap Box
31
Dimension D: For mechanical lugs = 21.34 inches (542.0 mm).

For compression lugs = 19.25 inches (489.0 mm).
200% neutral.
Table 24.0-42. Center Tap Box DetailsDimensions A and B
32
Ampere
Rating
33
UL 857
IEC 439
Cu
Cu
34
225
400
35
36
37
38
39
Dimensions
Inches (mm)

One #4 (20 mm2)600 kcmil (300 mm2)
Two 1/0 (50 mm2)250 kcmil (120 mm2)
UL 857
(A)
(B)
225
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
400
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
600
630
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
Copper
(A)
(B)
G
225
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
400
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
16.50 (419.1)
Al
N
G
P
N
40.00 (1016.0)
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
1000
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
1200
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
1200
1400
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
800
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
1350
1550
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
1000
16.50 (419.1)
40.00 (1016.0)
1600
1800
20.50 (520.7)
42.50 (1079.5)
1200
20.50 (520.7)
42.50 (1079.5)
2000
2250
20.50 (520.7)
42.50 (1079.5)
1350
20.50 (520.7)
42.50 (1079.5)
12
1600
24.50 (622.3)
45.00 (1143.0)
2500
3000
24.50 (622.3)
45.00 (1143.0)
2000
24.50 (622.3)
45.00 (1143.0)
16
12
3200
3800
30.38 (774.5)
58.00 (1473.2)
18
4000
4500
45.00 (1143.0)
60.50 (1536.7)
2500
30.38 (771.7)
58.00 (1473.0)
12
24
16
3200
30.38 (771.7)
58.00 (1473.0)
18
5000
5800
45.00 (1143.0)
60.50 (1536.7)
4000
45.00 (1143.0)
60.50 (1536.7)
15
30
12
24

600
Aluminum
P
800
41
Ampere
Rating
1000
40
Dimensions
Inches (mm)

All dimensions shown in Figure 24.0-27 remain constant regardless of system wiring configuration.
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-27
September 2011
Sheet 24 027
Physical Data
Weatherheads (Figure 24.0-28)
22
Weatherheads are used for service entrance connections

to busway. The side opposite of T is removable for access
to the lugs.
41.00
(1041.4)
23
CL of Box
12.00
(304.8)
(Minimum)
M
CL
24
24.00
(609.6)
CL of
Busway
25
1.00 Compression and
(25.4) Mechanical Lugs
(381.0)
17.50
(444.5)
Removable
Barrier
26
27
28
Figure 24.0-28. Weatherhead Details

Table 24.0-43. Weatherhead Details
Ampere
Rating
UL 857
Cu
IEC 439
Al
Copper
Minimum
Dimension (A)
Aluminum
Minimum
Dimension (A)

One #4 (20 mm2)600 kcmil (300 mm2)
Two 1/0 (50 mm2)250 kcmil (120 mm2)
Inches (mm)
Inches (mm)
Copper
G
Cu
29
Aluminum
P
N
G
P
N
225
225
225
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
400
400
400
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
600
800
1000
600
630
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
1000
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
1200
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
1200
800
1400
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
1350
1000
1550
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
1600
1200
1800
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
2000
1350
2250
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
12
1600
16.50 (419.1)
16.50 (419.1)
2500
2000
3000
30.00 (762.0)
16.50 (419.1)
16
12
3200
3800
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
18
4000
2500
4500
40.00 (1016.0)
30.00 (762.0)
12
24
16
3200
40.00 (1016.0)
30.00 (762.0)
18
5000
4000
5800
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
15
30
12
24


200% neutral.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 028
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
Expansion Joints (Figure 24.0-29)
Phase Transpositions (Figure 24.0-30 and Figure 24.0-31)
Expansion joints accommodate the expansion and

contraction of bus bars with respect to the enclosure.
They compensate for the difference in the coefficient of
expansion of the aluminum housing and the copper or
aluminum bus bars. Expansion joints must be used
wherever a run of busway crosses an expansion joint
of a building. They should also be installed in the center
of extremely long straight runs of busway; one every
300 feet (91m) for copper or one every 225 feet (68m)
for aluminum. The use of expansion joints should be
engineered for individual installations. Minimum
dimensions are shown in Table 24.0-44.
Phase transposition fittings are used in applications where

a phase rotation is needed due to a change in phasing from
the source equipment to the load equipment. Both 90 and
180 rotations are possible. In each case, all conductors
are rotated.
27
Table 24.0-44. Expansion Joints

Ampere Rating
28
UL 857
Cu
29
30
31
32
33
34
IEC 439
Al
Cu
225
225
225
12.00 (304.8)
400
400
400
12.00 (304.8)
600
600
630
12.00 (304.8)
800
800
1000
12.00 (304.8)
1000
1000
1200
12.00 (304.8)
1200
1200
1400
12.00 (304.8)
1350
1350
1550
16.50 (419.1)
1600
1600
1800
16.50 (419.1)
2000
2250
16.50 (419.1)
2500
2000
3000
20.50 (520.7)
3200
3800
20.50 (520.7)
4000
2500
4500
24.50 (622.3)
3200
24.50 (622.3)
5000
4000
5800
30.25 (768.4)
Figure 24.0-30. 180 TranspositionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Dimension remains as shown regardless of system configuration.
35
CL
36
49.00
(1244.6)
(Minimum)
37
38
Dimensions (A)
Inches (mm)
CL
25.00
(635.0)
12.00
(304.8) (Minimum)
A
39
CL of
Box
29.69
(754.1)
Figure 24.0-31. 90 TranspositionDimensions in Inches (mm)
40
CL of Duct
41
Figure 24.0-29. Expansion Joints
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-29
September 2011
Sheet 24 029
Physical Data
Single-Phase Transformer Taps (Figure 24.0-32)
Three-Phase Transformer Taps (Figure 24.0-33)
Single-phase transformer taps arrangements are used for

connections to three single-phase transformers. The bus
extensions do not include drilling or lugs (see Figure 24.0-2
on Page 24.0-2 for wiring configuration designations).
Three-phase transformer taps are used when making

connections to a three-phase transformer. The bus
extensions do not include drilling or lugs.
CL
CL
Pow-RBridge
CL
17.00 + 2X
(431.8) + 2X
Taps
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
N
C
6.00
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
(152.4)
Figure 24.0-33. Three-Phase Transformer Taps
28
29
30
Table 24.0-46. (A) Minimum Dimensions

A Phase or
Neutral
C Phase
or Neutral
Wire
Designation
Inches
mm
3W/
3WH
16.50
419.1
3WG/
3WHG/
3WI
16.50
419.1
4W/
4WH
19.50
495.3
4WG/4WHG/4WI/
4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI
19.50
Wire
Designation
Figure 24.0-32. Three Single-Phase Transformer Taps
Inches
Table 24.0-45. Single-Phase Transformer Taps
mm
IEC 439
Minimum Dimensions
Inches (mm)
Cu
(X)
(Y)
3W/
3WH
6.25
158.8
3WG/
3WHG/
3WI
32
33
4W/
4WH
12.12
307.8
31
495.3
Table 24.0-47. (B) Minimum Dimensions
B Phase
or Neutral
Al
(1/0)
6.00 (2/0)
7.50 (152.4)
(190.5)
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
Ground when
Required
Cu
27
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
UL 857
26
G
B
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
Ampere Rating
25
8.50 + y
(215.9) + y
Pow-RBridge
CL
Pow-RBridge
CL
Pow-RBridge
CL
17.00 + 2X
(431.8) + 2X
Support Pad
C
Taps
Taps
CL
23
24
15.00
(381.1)
Taps
22
9.25
235.0
4WG/4WHG/4WI/
4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI
34
15.12
384.0
35
Table 24.0-48. (C) Minimum Dimensions

Wire
Designation
50% Housing
Ground
50% Integral Ground

and 100% Ground
36
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.00 (101.6)
4.50 (114.3)
5.00 (127.0)
7.00 (177.8)
9.75 (247.7)
10.75 (273.1)
38
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
5.50 (139.7)
6.50 (165.1)
7.75 (196.9)
11.75 (298.5)
13.75 (349.3)
16.25 (412.8)
39
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
8.50 (215.9)
10.25 (260.4)
6.50 (165.1)
17.50 (444.5)
21.25 (539.8)
13.75 (349.3)
40
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
7.75 (196.9)
8.50 (215.9)
10.25 (260.4)
16.25 (412.8)
17.50 (444.5)
21.25 (539.8)
41
Inches
mm
3.00
76.2
6.00
152.4
37
Includes ground tap.
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 030
Physical Data
22
23
24
Transformer Throat Connections (Figure 24.0-34 and Figure 24.0-35)

A transformer throat is used when making connections
to a liquid-filled substation transformer. All transformer
throat connections include flexible connectors between the
transformer low voltage spades and Pow-R-Way III bus bars.
For transformers with drilled flanges, the busway will bolt
to the transformer throat instead of using a sealing ring.
Table 24.0-49. Transformer Throat Connections

Ampere Rating
UL 857
Bars Per
Phase
Minimum Dimensions
IEC 439
2251550
16002000
25004000
1
1
2
26.00 (660.4)
28.50 (723.9)
31.50 (800.1)
2252500
25003000
32005800
1
1
2
26.00 (660.4)
28.50 (723.9)
31.50 (800.1)
(A) Inches (mm)
Aluminum
2251350
16002000
25004000
Copper
2252000
2500
32005000
Transformer
25
Transformer
Throat
26
Sealing Ring
27
LV Spades
28
Front
Front
29
LV Throat
30
31
CL
Edge of
Transformer
Throat
1.75 (44.5) Plus

1/2 Duct Width
32
Indicate Number
of Holes,
Diameter of
Holes, and
Spacing
Between Holes
Top of Transformer
33
CL
Bushing
Transformer
34
x
Transformer Throat
35
Edge of
Throat
Collar
Sealing Ring
Side View of Transformer
36
37
X Thickness
Front
x
x
x
CL
38
39
40
41
Edge of
Transformer
Throat
Transformer
Tank Wall
X Number and
Diameter of Holes
LV Spade Detail
9.50
(241.3)
Figure 24.0-35. Transformer Throat Connection Detail
Figure 24.0-34. Transformer Throat
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-31
September 2011
Sheet 24 031
Physical Data
Transformer Flange Connections (Figure 24.0-36 and Figure 24.0-37)
12.00
(304.8)
(Minimum)
24
12.00
(304.8)
(Minimum)
25
B
20.00
(508.0)
Circuit Breaker
or Fused Reducer
26
Figure 24.0-38. Circuit Breaker or Fused Reducer
X
CL
27
Table 24.0-50. Circuit Breaker and Fused Reducer Dimensions

Circuit Breaker Reducer
Breaker
A
B
Amperes Inches (mm)
Flexible
Braid
225
X
400
600
Figure 24.0-36. Transformer Flange Connections

800
1000
x
x
x
23
CL
22
C Pow-R-Bridge
Transformer flange connections are used when making a

connection to a dry-type substation transformer. Transformer
flange connections include flexible connectors between the
transformer low voltage spades and the Pow-R-Way III
flange bus bars. Hardware is supplied to bolt the flange
plate to the transformer enclosure.
1200
x
1600
LV Spades
2000
x
2500
x
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
26.25
(666.8)
26.25
(666.8)
26.25
(666.8)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
34.00
(863.6)
34.00
(863.6)
34.00
(863.6)
42.25
(1073.2)
42.25
(1073.2)
42.25
(1073.2)
48.00
(1219.2)
48.00
(1219.2)
48.00
(1219.2)
Fusible Switch Reducer

Fuse
A
B
Rating Inches (mm)
225
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
42.25
(1073.2)
54.00
(1371.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
400
600
800
1000
1200
Non-Protected Reducers (Figure 24.0-39)

x
Front View of Transformer
Side View of Transformer

x
X Thickness
Non-protected reducers are used to reduce the ampacity of

the busway without overcurrent devices. Per NEC Section
364.11, for industrial applications, no overcurrent protection
is required where the busway is reduced in size, provided
the length of the smaller busway does not extend more than
50 feet (15.2m) and has a current rating of at least one-third
of the first upstream overcurrent device.
x
x
0
406.4
(Min
x
x
x
Transformer
Tank Wall
X Number and
Diameter of Holes
06.4)
(Mini
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
LV Spade Detail
Figure 24.0-37. Transformer Flange Connection Detail
42
Protected Reducers (Figure 24.0-38)

Protected reducers are used to reduce the ampacity of
busway using either a circuit breaker or a fused, nonautomatic circuit breaker overprotection device. Both serve
as a disconnecting means. The line side of the cubicle is
connected to the higher rated busway and the load side
is connected to the lower (reduced) rated busway.
CA08104001E
28
Figure 24.0-39. Non-Fused Reducer
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 032
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
Meter Center Power Takeoffs
In-Line PTO
Meter center power takeoffs (PTO) are designed to tap

power off the busway and feed tenant meter stacks in highrise applications. There are two types of power takeoffs,
bridge joint and in-line. Both devices are UL listed.
The in-line PTO shown in Figure 24.0-41 is built integral with

the busway, having the busway pass through the device.
This space-saving design reduces the horizontal wall space
by up to 24.00 inches (609.6 mm). With this device there is
no need to install a separate main device; saving installation
time and money. This device is available with a main circuit
breaker, main fusible switch or no main device. In-line PTOs
should be ordered with the busway through the Eaton
Greenwood, SC facility.
Bridge Joint PTO

The bridge joint PTO shown in Figure 24.0-40 mounts to
the right or left side of the busway at a joint between two
sections of busway. The bridge joint PTO comes with a main
circuit breaker or main fusible switch. Bridge joint PTOs
should be ordered with the meter stacks through the Eaton
Lincoln, IL facility.
The height of the busway bridge joint must be coordinated to
meet local utility/code requirements for minimum/maximum
meter socket heights. All dimensions shown are for reference
only showing a typical installation.
28
Wall
29
Vertical
Busway
12.26
(311.4)
30
8.55
(217.2)
125 A Meter Stock
Wall
35.90
(911.9)
33
70.00
(1778.0)
18.00
(457.2)
35
12.61
(320.3)
25.00
(635.0)
37
38
20.00
(508.4) .61
(15.5)
Meter
Center
Front
37.76
(959.1)
125 A
Stack
Bridge
Joint
20.00
(508.0)
5.81
(147.6)
30.06
(763.5)
12.45
(316.2)
70.00
(177.8)
67.34
(1710.4)
Floor
30.88
(784.35)
39
25.00
(635.0)
Figure 24.0-40. Bridge Joint PTO
20.00
(508.4) 12.39
(314.7)
12.45
(316.2)
40
41
8.55 (217.2)
1.93
(49.0)
200 A
Stack
Horizontal
Cross Bus
17.17
(436.1)
12.26
(311.4)
13.51
(343.2)
.50
(12.7)
32
36
Note: If 5-high 200A meter stacks are used, it is recommended to

increase the bridge joint height from 20.00 inches (508.0m) to
22.0024.00 inches (558.8609.6 mm). Attention must be given to
the minimum/maximum heights of the meter sockets.
In-Line PTO
31
34
The height of the first busway joint up through the floor

must be coordinated to meet local utility/code requirements
for minimum/maximum meter socket heights not to exceed
a minimum height of 16.00 inches (406.4 mm) above the
floor. Meter stack may be placed to the left, right or both
sides of the main device. All dimensions shown are for
reference only showing a typical installation.
Floor
Figure 24.0-41. In-Line PTO
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-33
September 2011
Sheet 24 033
Physical Data
In-Line Power Takeoff
Table 24.0-51. In-Line PTO Dimensions and Ratings

Device
Main Circuit Breaker PTO

The in-line main circuit breaker PTO shown in Figure 24.0-42
is available with trip ratings from 300A up to 1200A; using L,
M and N frame circuit breakers. This device is indoor rated
and may be weatherized upon request. See Table 24.0-51 for
dimensions and ratings.
Short-Circuit
Rating (kAIC)
(A) Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1 Bar
Per Phase
2 Bar
Per Phase
Main Circuit Breaker
Main Fusible Switch PTO

The in-line main fusible switch PTO shown in Figure 24.0-43
is available with 400, 600 and 800A switches; using Class T
fuses. This device is indoor rated only. The switch handle is
mounted in front, eliminating interference with the meter
sockets and the need for spacers between the main device
and meter stack. It comes with a hinged door, giving easy
access to the fuses mounted below the main switch. See
Table 24.0-51 for dimensions and ratings.
LD
HLD
MDL
65
100
65
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
24
HMDL
ND
HND
100
65
100
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
25
200
200
200
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
100
20.00 (508.0)
33.00 (838.2)
400A
600A
800A
No Main Device
1200A

Class T fuses only.

Rating of horizontal cross bus.
26
27
28
The in-line PTO with no main device shown in Figure 24.0-44

comes with 1200A horizontal cross bus as standard. This
device is intended for use with six meter sockets or less,
or as local code permits. See Table 24.0-51 for dimensions
and ratings.
29
30
CL
Bridge Joint
31
Bridge Joint
12.00
(304.8)
23
Main Fusible Switch
Unprotected PTO
Bridge Joint
22
12.00
(304.8)
12.00
(304.8)
32
33
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
15.00
(381.0)
A
34
2.00
(50.8)
35
5.00
(127.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
36
37
38
Figure 24.0-42. Main Breaker
Figure 24.0-43. Main Fusible Switch
Figure 24.0-44. Unprotected PTO
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 034
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Busway-Connected Panelboards
Pow-R-Way III busway-connected panelboards save space
and installation time by eliminating the need to install a bus
plug and cable over to a panelboard. This special enclosure
plugs directly on to vertical busway and accepts Eaton PRL1a,
PRL2a and PRL3a main circuit breaker panelboard interiors.
The enclosure also accepts 28.00-inch wide standard and EZ
trims. The panels can be top or bottom fed, and can mount
on either side of the busway. Each panel is UL 857 listed.
34
35
36
Top Conduit
Space
Top View
Third Plug-In Opening
Up From Lower Joint
28.00
(711.2)
Busway-connected panelboards are sold and shipped

through the Eaton regional satellite plants and coordinated
with the Eaton busway plant in Greenwood, SC. See
Figure 24.0-45.
Panelboard Spring Hangers

This specialized spring hanger shown in Figure 24.0-46,
allows the panel to be anchored and supported directly to
a wall, and uniquely allows the panel to float with the riser
busway. Panelboard spring hangers are sold separately as
a busway accessory. Hardware is included to mount the
spring hangers to the panelboard enclosure.
Table 24.0-52. Panelboard Enclosure Detail

MCB
Frame
Maximum
Box Size
MCB
Height
Busway
Joint
Height
Box
Height
Off Floor
Dimension in Inches (mm)

A
33
2.37
(60.2)
Note: These panels are not seismic rated.
31
32
Edge of Busway
to Wall
6.00
(152.4)
Minimum
Floor-Ceiling
Height
Dimension in
Inches (mm)
Front View
PRL1a & 2a Main Circuit Breaker

F
40.00
(1016.0)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
47.00
(1193.8)
103.00
(2616.2)
52.00
(1320.8)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
35.00
(889.0)
103.00
(2616.2)
64.00
(1625.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
23.00
(584.2)
103.00
(2616.2)
76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
33.00
(838.2)
21.00
(533.4)
113.00
(2870.2)
K (500) 94.00
(2387.6)
74.00
(1879.6)
34.00
(863.6)
4.00
(101.6)
114.00
(2895.6)
K (750) 94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
36.00
(914.4)
6.00
(152.4)
116.00
(2946.4)
Figure 24.0-45. Busway-Connected Panelboard Detail
PRL3a Main Circuit Breaker
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
F (4/0)
76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
11.00
(279.4)
103.00
(2616.2)
FCL
76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
11.00
(279.4)
103.00
(2616.2)
FB
76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
11.00
(279.4)
103.00
(2616.2)
76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
11.00
(279.4)
103.00
(2616.2)
K (500) 94.00
(2387.6)
74.00
(1879.6)
34.00
(863.6)
4.00
(101.6)
114.00
(2895.6)
K (750) 94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
36.00
(914.4)
6.00
(152.4)
116.00
(2946.4)
94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
34.00
(863.6)
4.00
(101.6)
114.00
(2895.6)
LCL
94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
38.00
(965.2)
8.00
(203.2)
118.00
(2997.2)
LA
94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
34.00
(863.6)
4.00
(101.6)
114.00
(2895.6)
LG
94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
36.00
(914.4)
6.00
(152.4)
116.00
(2946.4)
Figure 24.0-46. Panelboard Spring Hangers
CA08104001E
24.0-35
September 2011
Sheet 24 035
Physical Data
Pow-R-Way III Adapters (Figure 24.0-47 and
Figure 24.0-48)
Table 24.0-53. Available Pow-R-Way III Adapters

Busway
Types
A complete line of adapters are available to enable the

user to add to existing old-line Westinghouse or obsolete
bus runs with the Pow-R-Way III design. The specific
Westinghouse product lines are Low Impedance Busway,
Current Limiting Busway, Pow-R-Way and Pow-R-Way II.
The obsolete designs are CP2, CP3 and CP4 Safetybus.
See Table 24.0-53.
The adapters allow the incorporation of present day
technologies, available in Pow-R-Way III plug-in units, into
existing busway systems. State-of-the-art features such as
energy monitoring, transient voltage surge suppression and
coordination/communication capabilities can all be added to
existing distribution systems without having to upgrade and
replace entire runs of busway. See Table 24.0-53.
Brand
Minimum Adapter
Length in Inches (mm)
Low impedance busway
Westinghouse
60.00 (1524.0)
Low impedance
plug-in busway
Westinghouse
60.00 (1524.0)
Pow-R-Way busway
Westinghouse/
Cutler-Hammer
36.00 (914.4)
Pow-R-Way II busway
Westinghouse/
Cutler-Hammer
36.00 (914.4)
CP2 Safetybus
Cutler-Hammer
36.00 (914.4)
CP3 Safetybus
Cutler-Hammer
36.00 (914.4)
CP4 Safetybus
Cutler-Hammer
36.00 (914.4)
Competitive busway
Contact factory
36.00 (914.4)
22
23
24
25
26
27
Special adapters to competitive busway products are

also available. Please contact the Greenwood factory
for information.
28
29
Adapter
30
31
32
POWRWAY III
Existing
POWRWAY
Figure 24.0-47. Pow-R-Way III to Pow-R-Way Adapter
33
34
35
Adapter
36
37
POWRWAY III
Existing
CP Busway
38
Figure 24.0-48. Pow-R-Way III to CP Adapter
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 036
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
Wall/Floor Flanges (Figure 24.0-49)

Wall and floor flanges are used to fit around the busway
and close off the opening made to allow the bus run to pass
through a floor or wall. Wall and floor flanges are for cosmetic
purposes only and do not provide any type of vapor or
fire barrier.
Roof Flange (Figure 24.0-50)

A roof flange should always be used when outdoor busway
penetrates a roof.
End Closures (Figure 24.0-51)
26
End closures terminate a bus run and can be used to close

either the right or left end (see Figure 24.0-2 on Page 24.0-2
for wiring conductor configurations).
27
Table 24.0-54. End Closures

Ampere Rating
28
UL 857
Cu
Dimensions (A)
in Inches (mm)
IEC 439
Al
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
5.13 (130.3)
5.13 (130.3)
5.13 (130.3)
30
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
5.13 (130.3)
5.75 (146.1)
6.25 (158.8)
31
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
6.75 (171.5)
7.77 (197.4)
9.02 (229.1)
32
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
9.78 (248.4)
11.55 (293.4)
16.52 (419.6)
33
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.02 (482.9)
20.54 (521.7)
24.08 (611.6)
35
36
37
Wall
2.00
(50.8)
Wall/Floor
Flange
Cu
29
34
Busway
Height
Busway
Width
2.00
(50.8)
Figure 24.0-49. Wall/Floor Flange

Roof Flange
CL of Joint
10.25 (minimum)
(260.3)
2.50
(63.5)
(All 4 Sides)
7.00
(177.8)
Bell
2.00 (Rec.)
(50.8)
Roof
Table 24.0-55. Dimensions

Description
Dimensions (B)
in Inches (mm)
3WH, 3WG, 3WHG, 3WI, 4WH, 4WG, 4WHG, 4WI
5.00 (127.0)
4WNH, 4WNG, 4WNI, 4WNHG
5.50 (139.7)
CL
Maximum Roof Slope

with Standard Flange is
2.00 (50.8) per Foot
(304.8 mm)
Flange
Note: End closure extends 0.44 inches (11.2 mm) beyond the centerline of the removed Pow-R-Bridge.
Figure 24.0-50. Roof Flange

.44 (11.2)
38
CL
6.25 (158.8)
Indoor
39
40
7.38 (187.5)
Outdoor
41
42
B
43
Figure 24.0-51. End Closure with Pow-R-Bridge Removed
CA08104001E
24.0-37
September 2011
Sheet 24 037
Physical Data
Horizontal Hangers
One hanger is provided for every 10 feet (3.0m) of
horizontally mounted busway. The type of hanger supplied
is determined by the specific mounting requirements of
the busway. (For hook hangers and angle hangers, see
Figure 24.0-52 and Figure 24.0-53.)
1 Bar Per Phase Only
22
23
C
Duct
Width
Drop rods 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) diameter are not included

and must be furnished by the installer. Drop rods 3/4-inch
(19.1 mm) diameter are required for seismic applications.
24
Duct
Width
25
Duct
Height
Edgewise
Flatwise
26
Figure 24.0-52. Hook HangersNon-Seismic Only
27
Table 24.0-56. Flatwise Hook Hanger

Ampere Rating
UL 857
IEC 439
Cu
Al
Duct Width
(A)
(B)
(C)
28
Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
5.12 (130.0)
5.12 (130.0)
5.12 (130.0)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.75 (120.7)
5.38 (136.7)
5.88 (149.4)
5.12 (130.0)
5.75 (146.1)
6.25 (158.8)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
6.38 (162.1)
7.38 (187.5)
8.64 (219.5)
6.75 (171.5)
7.75 (196.9)
9.03 (229.4)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
2500
1600
2000
3000
9.40 (238.8)
11.17 (283.7)
9.78 (248.4)
11.58 (294.1)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
29
30
31
32
Table 24.0-57. Edgewise Hook Hanger
33
Conductor
Configuration

Duct Height
Duct Width
(A)
(B)
3WH/4WH/3WG/3WHG/4WG/4WHG
3WI/4WI
4.384.56 (111.2115.8)
4.384.56 (111.2115.8)
4.756.38 (120.7162.1)
7.3811.17 (187.4283.7)
8.40 (213.3)
13.19 (335.0)
4.81 (122.2)
4.81 (122.2)
4WNH/4WNG
4WNHG/4WNI
4.925.10 (125.0129.5)
4.925.10 (125.0129.5)
4.756.38 (120.7162.1)
7.3811.17 (187.4283.7)
8.40 (213.3)
13.19 (335.0)
5.35 (135.9)
5.35 (135.9)
Table 24.0-58. Flatwise Angle Hanger

Ampere Rating
UL 857
Cu
225
400
600
IEC 439
Al
225
400
Cu
225
400
630
35
Table 24.0-59. Edgewise Angle Hanger
Conductor
Bars Per
Phase
Busway
Width
1
1
1
34
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
(A)
9.00 (228.6)
9.00 (228.6)
9.00 (228.6)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1
1
1
4.75 (120.7)
5.38 (136.7)
5.88 (149.4)
9.00 (228.6)
9.63 (244.6)
10.12 (257.0)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
1
1
1
6.38 (162.1)
7.38 (187.5)
8.64 (219.5)
10.63 (270.0)
11.63 (295.4)
12.88 (327.2)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
1
1
2
9.40 (238.8)
11.17 (283.7)
16.14 (410.0)
13.62 (345.9)
15.44 (392.2)
20.39 (517.9)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
2
2
2
18.64 (473.5)
20.16 (512.1)
23.70 (602.0)
22.88 (581.2)
24.39 (619.5)
28.00 (711.2)
36
Conductor
Configuration

Duct Height
(A)
3WH/4WH/3WG/3WHG/
4WG/4WHG/3WI/4WI
4.384.56 (111.2115.8)
9.00 (228.6)
4WNH/4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI 4.925.10 (125.0129.5)
9.36 (237.7)
37
38
Note: Angle hangers must be used for seismic applications.
39
40
.7
(19
.75
A
1 Bar Per Phase
.75
75
.75
41
A
2 Bars Per Phase
Edgewise
42
A
Flatwise
Figure 24.0-53. Angle Hangers
CA08104001E
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 038
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Vertical Hangers (Figure 24.0-54 and Figure 24.0-55)

When busway is to be installed vertically, a spring
suspension type vertical hanger should be used.
Vertical hangers are not provided unless specified.
This unique hanger equalizes the weight of vertically
mounted busway along all supports. A vertical hanger
must be used on each floor and at the end of the bus run
on the last floor.
The maximum span permitted by UL on vertical hangers is
16 feet (4.9m). Intermediate hangers are required for floor
heights exceeding 16 feet (4.9m).
33
34
35
36
37
38
Flatwise
(1 Bar per Phase)
Flatwise
(2 Bar per Phase)
Figure 24.0-54. Typical Installation
Table 24.0-60. Edgewise Vertical Hangers (F and F-Opposite Sides)

Conductor
Configuration
Busway
Height
Hangers on F and F
Opposite Sides
Inches (mm)
(A) Inches (mm)
Figure 24.0-55
Configuration
3WH/4WH
4.38 (111.3)
4.72 (119.9)
3WG/3WHG/4WG/
4WHG
4.50 (114.3)
4.91 (124.7)
3WI/4WI
4.56 (115.8)
4.91 (124.7)
4WHN
4.92 (125.0)
5.25 (133.4)
4WNG/4WNHG
5.05 (128.3)
5.44 (138.2)
4WNI
5.10 (129.6)
5.44 (138.2)
Table 24.0-61. Flatwise Vertical Hangers (T and T-Opposite Sides)

Ampere Rating
32
Edgewise
(1 Bar per Phase)
UL 857
Busway
IEC 439 Width
Hangers on T and T
Opposite Sides
Cu
Cu
(A) Inches (mm)
Al
Inches (mm)
Figure 24.0-55
Configuration
225
225
225
4.75 (120.7)
4.62 (117.3)
400
400
400
4.75 (120.7)
4.62 (117.3)
630
4.75 (120.7)
4.62 (117.3)
600
800
600
1000
4.75 (120.7)
4.62 (117.3)
1200
5.38 (136.7)
5.25 (133.4)
1200
1400
5.88 (149.4)
5.75 (146.1)
1350 1000 1550
6.38 (162.1)
6.25 (158.8)
1600 1200 1800
7.38 (187.5)
7.25 (184.2)
2000 1350 2250
8.64 (219.5)
8.50 (215.9)
9.40 (238.8)
9.25 (235.0)
11.17 (283.7)
11.06 (280.9)
1600
2500 2000 3000

3200
3800
16.14 (410.0)
16.00 (406.4)
4000 2500 4500
18.64 (473.5)
18.50 (469.9)
20.16 (512.1)
20.06 (510.0)
23.70 (602.0)
23.59 (600.0)
3200
5000 4000 5800
Configuration A
(1 Bar per Phase)
Configuration B
(1 Bar per Phase)
1000
800
Configuration C
(1 Bar per Phase)
Configuration D
(2 Bar per Phase)
Figure 24.0-55. Vertical Hangers
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-39
September 2011
Sheet 24 039
Plug-in Protective Devices

All Pow-R-Way III plug-in units are designed with the safety
of the installer and user as the key criteria. The following
features are standard for both fusible and circuit breaker
type plug-in units:
Finger-Safe
Barriers
22
Ground Stab
Guide Port
23
Pow-R-Way III bus plugs have extended ground and neutral

bars which bring the termination points down into the cable
entry area making for a safer, easier connection.
A barrier is provided over the line side connections from the
bus plug stab assembly to the fusible switch or circuit breaker.
24
Outlet Seating Ridge
Mounting Hardware
The bus plug ground stab makes positive contact with the
busway ground (integral or internal) before the phase or
neutral stabs contact the bus bars.
Figure 24.0-57. Plug-in Outlet Details
A bus plug guide port is provided in the busway housing,

to the right of each plug-in outlet. A polarizing alignment pin
is located at the line side end of each bus plug enclosure.
The alignment pin must be inserted into the guide port for
proper installation. The plug-in unit and the busway are
interlocked to ensure that the device is in the OFF position
prior to installation or removal of the unit.
The load end of a plug-in unit varies with the orientation

of the busway as determined by the F and T markings
(see Figure 24.0-58 below).
To ensure that the bus plug is seated onto the busway,

the clamping mechanism will draw the unit tight onto the
busway housing as the installer tightens the clamps.
Plug-in units have an interference bracket that prevents
the cover from being opened while the device is in the
ON position and to prevent accidental closing of the device
while the cover is open.
25
26
Plug-in Device Mounting
27
28
29
ON
Handle
30
Load
Handle
OFF
T
Load
There are two locations available for field positioning of the

bus plug operating handle. On vertical bus run applications,
the handle can be mounted on the side of the plug, and for
horizontal runs, the handle can be mounted on the (line side)
end of the unit. Bus plugs are shipped with the handle
mounted on the end as standard. Mounting positions are
illustrated in Figure 24.0-58.
OFF
ON
31
OFF
32
33
Handle
Load
ON
OFF
When a plug-in unit is installed, the bus plug stab base

assembly engages a seating ridge provided on the plug-in
outlet. The stab base is drawn in to overlap the ridge and
form a tight seal against moisture and dust.
35
Load
ON
Handle
36
Guide Pin
and Port
34
37
Handle
ON
Load
T
F T
38
ON
OFF
OFF
39
Load
ON
O
ON
OFF
O
Handle
Load
ON
40
OFF
OFF
41
F
OFF
ON
Handle
Handle
Load
42
Clamp and Guide

DANG
Figure 24.0-56. Plug-in Stab Details
CA08104001E
43
Figure 24.0-58. Plug-in Device Mounting

September 2011
Sheet 24 040
22
23
24
Plug-in Device Mounting (Continued)

Plug-in openings are spaced every 24.00 inches (609.9 mm)
starting 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) in from the centerline of
each bridge joint with a maximum of five openings per
side of an individual section of busway. Figure 24.0-59 and
Figure 24.0-60 illustrate the number of plug-in openings
taken up by each style/size bus plug.
Each plug-in unit uses only one plug-in opening; however,

may cover up additional plug-in openings preventing use.
P3BFD
(Occupies 1 Plug-in Opening)
"
.00
"
0
4.0
12
F
2
P3F321(30 A), P3F361 (30 A),
P33F361H (30 A), P3F322 (60 A),
P3F362 (60 A), P3F362H (60 A)
P3F323(100 A), P3F363(100A)
and P3F363H (100 A)
"
.00
12
"
.00
24
P3F364H (200 A)
"
.00 and P3F365H (400 A)
24
"
.00 P3F324 (200 A)
24
" and P3F364 (200 A)
.00 (Occupies 2 Plug-in Openings)
24
"
in.
.00
12
0M
7.0
1
Can't Use
25
26
27
28
29
"
ing
f
Co
Op
"
.00
en
30
ing 12"
.
18
en
Op
f
CLo
.75
19
20
CL
d
En
"
.00
24
f
do
En
ing
"
n
ing 75
pe 2"
en 29.
f O 18.6
Op
f
CLo
p o
lam CL
fC
do
n
E
Section
Shown
Cla
10 ft.
Section
Shown
"T
"
32
ing
en
p
fO
T F
34
P3F325 (400 A), P3F365 (400 A),

P33F236 (600 A), P3F366 (600 A),
P3F327 (800 A) and P3F367 (800 A)
(Occupies 3 Plug-in Openings)
m
Cla
o
nd
"
.25
37
mp
CL
la
fC
do
ing
n
pe
En
"
.19
fO
44
CLo
Can't Use
Figure 24.0-60. Breaker Plug-in Device Mounting
37
P3B2D, P3BMD, P3BND and P3BLAP

P3BLCL
"
1
1.3
CLo
33
36
"
.00
24
"
.00
12
Can't Use
e
P3BJD
(Occupies 1 Plug-in
Opening)
P3BKD
(Occupies 2 Plug-in
Openings)
mp
of
31
35
.0
24
ing 0"
en 16.5
mp
Cla
p
fO
CLo
0"
o
nd
m
Cla
Figure 24.0-59. Fusible Plug-in Device Mounting
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-41
September 2011
Sheet 24 041
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices
Without protection devices, electronic based loads and

microprocessors are not provided with the noise- and
disturbance-free power that they require. Because
microprocessors are now common in most facilities,
specifiers must ensure that the AC power supply is properly
filtered. Significant performance advantages are achieved
by integrating SPD filters into busway systems.
SPD Series (Figure 24.0-61)

The Pow-R-Way III plug-in device product offering includes
a surge protective device (SPD), which is ideal for busway
fed distribution systems. A transient voltage is a random,
high energy, short duration electrical anomaly. These high
energy surges can disrupt, damage or destroy sensitive
microprocessor-based equipment. Eaton has developed
the SPD family of products to ensure that quality power
is supplied to commercial, industrial, medical and
institutional facilities.
Because the SPD unit is directly connected to the busway,

it is able to minimize let-through voltage and isolate critical
loads that are fed from a protected busway run. Due to
the integrated design, the SPD bus plug saves the userneeded wall space and greatly reduces the installed
project cost. The SPD bus plug is furnished with a breaker
disconnect. For catalog numbers and selection criteria,
see Table 24.0-62 below.
The SPD not only protects against externally created

impulse transients such as lightning, utility capacitor
switching and disturbances emitted by adjacent facilities,
but also provides needed protection against internal
transients. This type of transient is generated within a
facilitys own distribution system. Sources of internally
generated, or ringwave, transients are imaging, equipment,
variable frequency drives, lighting dimmers, arc welders,
and the switching on and off of electrical distribution
equipment. It is estimated that over 80% of surge
disturbances are actually caused by internal transients.
22
23
24
25
26
27
14.24
(361.7)
28
29
The SPD series also filters repetitive electrical line noise

(EMI/RFI), which is defined as any unwanted electrical
signal that produces undesirable effects in the circuits
of sensitive electronic equipment or disturbances that are
two times peak voltage. The suppression of AC transients
is accomplished through the use of Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOVs) that provide a low impedance path to divert surges
away from loads. Electrical line noise and ringing transients
are eliminated by adding filtering capacitors to the
suppression device.
30
5.75
(146.1)
31
32
21.50
(546.1)
Not all SPD units on the market have filtering capabilities.

The benefits of combining SPD and filtering are reduced
MOV stress resulting in a longer life cycle, lower
let-through voltage, better noise attenuation levels
and increased reliability.
33
34
Figure 24.0-61. SPD Bus Plug
35
Table 24.0-62. SPD Bus Plugs Selection Chart
36
P3BSPD 250 480Y S C

FixedDo Not Change
FixedDo Not
Change
Surge Rating
(kA/Phase)
100
120
160
200
250
300
Voltage Requirements
Option Code
4W
120/208 230/400 277/480 347/600
3W
240V
400V
480V
600V
Three-phase
wye (four-wire
+ ground)
208Y
400Y
480Y
600Y
1 = BasicDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection

status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, singlecolored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire.
Voltage Code
Three-phase
240D
delta (threewire + ground)
480D
600D
S = StandardDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire,
single-colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire
connection on systems with a neutral wire, audible alarm
with silence button, and Form C relay contact.
N = Standard + Surge CounterDual-colored LED per phase
to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units
with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate the lack
of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral
wire, audible alarm with silence button, Form C relay
contact, EMI/RFI filtering providing up to 50 dB of noise
attenuation from 10 kHz to 100 MHz, and surge counter
with reset button.
Note: Available for Pow-R-Way III plugs. This information is required for all quotations. This information should also be included at order entry
to ensure prompt processing of the order.
CA08104001E
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 042
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plugs (Figure 24.0-62)
Ground Detector/Neutralizer Bus Plug (Figure 24.0-63)
The IQ Energy Sentinel is a UL listed microprocessor-based

metering module capable of communicating energy usage
and demand values over the PowerNet power monitoring
network. These innovative submetering devices are
designed to mount directly to Series C molded-case
breakers through 400A and are available for universal
mounting through 2500A.
In rare cases, bus bars in a busway system pick up static

electricity. In order to discharge this potential, a neutralizer
and ground detector bus plug is available. The unit has three
18,000 ohm resistors connected between the bus bars and
the ground. Static electricity is discharged through these
resistors. A neon lamp is wired in series with the bus bar
and part of the resistor, and burns continuously. If there is a
ground anywhere on the system of a lower resistance than
the path through the lamp, the lamp will go out, indicating
that there is a short in the system.
It offers a centralized alternative to individually mounted

wattmeters, watthour meters and watt-demand meters.
Key advantages include unmatched savings in space, lower
installation costs, and the capability to communicate data
readings in a variety of ways. IQ Energy Sentinels with builtin CTs and communication capability have the added benefit
of overall system accuracy. The Energy Sentinel mounts on
the load side of Eaton F, J and K frame breakers within the
bus plug enclosure. The Energy Sentinel is also available
for fusible plug-in units, which use external CTs within the
plug-in enclosure.
Cover
(Cutaway)
18,000 Ohm
Resistors (3)
Ground
Indicating
Lamp (3)
Submetering application examples for the Energy Sentinel

include energy monitoring and demand management,
energy cost analysis/allocation and tenant or
interdepartmental billing.
To accomplish the communication system, the customer
must provide a twisted pair communication cable in
0.50-inch (12.7 mm) conduit connecting the IQ Energy
Sentinel to a Breaker Interface Module or a customer PC
to display and collect the information.
The IQ Energy Sentinel offers the user full energy
monitoring capability in a compact, cost-effective
module ideally suited to busway application.
34
Ground
Connection
Figure 24.0-63. Ground Detector/Neutralizer Bus Plug
Combination Starter Bus Plugs (see Figure 24.0-64)

Eatons Freedom and Advantage motor starters are
included in the Pow-R-Way III bus plug product offering.
Freedom Motor Starters offer state-of-the-art features that
ensure greater value, flexibility and performance in the
toughest commercial and industrial applications.
Advantage motor starters have features including a solidstate, heaterless overload relay with built-in ground fault
protection. Advantage also features communication
capabilities and an on-board microprocessor that controls
the contactor magnet to eliminate burnout in low voltage
or varying control circuit conditions.
35
36
Plug-in combination starters or contactors are mounted

in enclosures identical to the circuit breaker and fusible
switch type bus plugs including the clamp and guides,
safety interlocks and guide pin. They are available from
size 0 through 5 with a circuit breaker, motor circuit protector
or fusible disconnect. Contact Eaton for specific application
and outline dimensions.
37
38
39
40
Advantage
Starter
41
42
43
Figure 24.0-62. IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plug
Figure 24.0-64. Freedom/Advantage Bus Plug
CA08104001E
24.0-43
September 2011
Sheet 24 043

Digitrip OPTIM Bus Plugs (Figure 24.0-65)
Digitrip OPTIM is a new programmable, communicating,
microprocessor-based electronic trip unit system for Eatons
Series C circuit breakers. OPTIM is available for Pow-R-Way
III bus plugs on K-Frame (125400A), L-Frame (70600A)
and N-Frame (4001200A) circuit breakers. Digitrip OPTIM
provides an electrical distribution system with superior
programmable protection, coordination and a state-ofthe-art advanced warning capability along with system
diagnostics, monitoring and communications. Digitrip
OPTIM is available in two trip unit types: OPTIM 550 and
OPTIM 1050.
Digitrip OPTIM has an extensive menu of monitoring

capabilities including load monitoring, power factor
(OPTIM 1050), power and energy (OPTIM 1050) power
quality-current harmonics.
OPTIM trip units are PowerNet compatible and can be
included in the unique tripping PowerNet communications
system. Contact Eaton for specific applications and
outline dimensions.
22
23
24
25
Unique Digitrip OPTIM features can provide: Time current

settings with more increments that permit the user to
optimize system protection and coordination, improved
accuracy gives more selectivity and closer sensitivity in
providing coordination, programmable short delay and/or
instantaneous curve tripping options, selectable thermal
memory, as well as selectable sure start discriminator
protection features. Increased system security is provided
by the addition of a programmable password protection.
For improved system coordination, I4t long delay time
slope has been added to the traditional nine LSIG curve
shaping options. Short delay and ground delay zone
selective interlocking have also been added, down to a
70A circuit breaker.
26
The following Advance Warning options are also available:

A programmable high load phase and neutral alarm,
adjustable between 50% and 100% of Ir (LDPU setting), will
signal an impending trip condition. An adjustable ground
fault alarm that will alert the user of a ground fault condition
without the breaker. Energy alarming can be performed
(such as peak demand exceeded) to reduce energy costs
with OPTIM 1050 via PowerNet. Total Harmonic Distortion
(THD) alarming detects changes in power quality with
OPTIM 1050 via PowerNet.
31
Digitrip OPTIM provides a complete selection of system

diagnostic capabilities including: four cause-of-trip LEDs
are mounted on the front of the trip unit to improve
troubleshooting capabilities. They are complemented by
trip event information that is stored in memory after a trip
condition, remote breaker status indication is provided by
auxiliary and alarm switches. The Breaker Interface Module
(BIM) provides trip indication information on the front of the
unit or via relay contacts to a remote location.
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
Figure 24.0-65. OPTIM Bus Plug
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 044
Power Takeoff
22
23
24
Power Takeoff Sections

CL Pow-R-Bridge
Power takeoff sections are used to tap up to 1200A of power

off of the busway. A power takeoff section must be used
when power in excess of the current carrying capabilities
of the plug-in stabs (800A) is required. A bolt-on fusible
switch or circuit breaker unit can then be bolted to the
power takeoff.
6.94
(176.3)
26
9.00
(228.6)
CL P.T.O.
CL Pow-R-Bridge
6.94
(176.3)
17.00
(431.8)
(Minimum)
9.00
(228.6)
CL P.T.O.
15.00
(381.0)
15.00
(381.0)
Bridge Joint Power Takeoff (Figure 24.0-66)
25
17.00
(431.8)
(Minimum)
A bridge joint power takeoff is a special connection that

allows for the attachment of a bolt-on unit at the bridge joint.
The bridge joint power takeoff and a bolt-on unit can be
used to tap off power where plug-in busway is not available.
Edgewise Mounted
Single Bar
Per Phase Only
27
Load
Flatwise Mounted
Available in Single and
Double Bars Per Phase
DANG
ER
Figure 24.0-67. Built-in Power Takeoff

F
28
P.T.O.
Plug-in Cable Tap Boxes (Figure 24.0-68)

Plug-in cable tap boxes are used to feed the busway run, or
where equipment served by the busway is connected without
overcurrent protection. Plug-in cable tap boxes plug into any
Pow-R-Way III busway (2255000A) plug in opening.
Line
29
30
Bolt-on Circuit Breaker
Unit or Fusible Switch
ER
DANG
31
32
33
Top
Removable
CL Pow-R-Bridge
Figure 24.0-66. Bridge Power Takeoff
Built-in Power Takeoff (Figure 24.0-67)
34
35
A built-in power takeoff is a special piece of feeder busway

that allows for the attachment of a bolt-on unit. Built-in
power takeoffs are used where space restrictions dictate
that the wide dimensions of the busway be flat against the
wall, ceiling or other obstruction. In this application, power
takeoffs and bolt-on units are used instead of plug-in units.
CL
Stab.
3.81
(96.8)
Load End
36
D
Wiring
Gutter
37
38
Figure 24.0-68. Plug-in Cable Tap Box

Table 24.0-63. Plug-in Cable Tap Box Details
39
Ampere
Rating
40
200
Dimension
(A)
Compression
Conn./Phase and N
Mechanical
Lugs/Phase and N
Catalog
Number
(B)
(C)
(D)
Inches (mm)
Inches (mm)
Inches (mm)
Inches (mm)
English
Metric
English
Metric
19.50 (495.3)
15.50 (393.7)
7.12 (180.8)
7.50 (190.5)
(1)
(1)
P3PTB200C
200
19.50 (495.3)
15.50 (393.7)
7.12 (180.8)
7.50 (190.5)
(1) #4350 kcmil
(1) 21.2177 mm2
P3PTB200M
41
400
26.25 (666.7)
21.00 (533.4)
10.00 (254.0)
7.50 (190.5)
(1)
(1)
P3PTB400C
400
26.25 (666.7)
21.00 (533.4)
10.00 (254.0)
7.50 (190.5)
(1) 250750 kcmil

or (2) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 127380 mm2

or (2) 85.0127 mm2
P3PTB400M
42
600
30.00 (762.0)
24.75 (628.6)
10.50 (266.7)
12.80 (325.1)
(2)
(2)
P3PTB600C
600
30.00 (762.0)
24.75 (628.6)
10.50 (266.7)
12.80 (325.1)
(2) 250750 kcmil

or (4) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 127380 mm2

or (4) 85.0127 mm2
P3PTB600M
43
800
30.00 (762.0)
24.75 (628.6)
10.50 (266.7)
12.80 (325.1)
(3)
(3)
P3PTB800C
800
30.00 (762.0)
24.75 (628.6)
10.50 (266.7)
12.80 (325.1)
(3) 250750 kcmil

or (6) 3/0250 kcmil
(3) 127380 mm2

or (6) 85.0127 mm2
P3PTB800M
CA08104001E
24.0-45
September 2011
Sheet 24 045
Receptacle Plug-in Units
22
Eatons unique receptacle plug-in unit design makes them

the most flexible receptacle units in the industry. Pow-R-Way
III receptacle plug-in units come fully assembled and
wired, reducing installation time, and are built to order.
They are CSA and UL 857 listed and come in five different
configurations.
23
24
Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit
25
The fused duplex receptacle plug-in unit, shown in

Figure 24.0-69, allows for quick standard receptacle power at
any plug-in location along the busway. Each unit comes with
either two NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles (catalog number:
P3FD62FD62F) or two NEMA L5-15R duplex receptacles
(catalog number: P3FD61FD61F). Each duplex receptacle is
rated and fuse protected at 15 or 20A and is 120V, singlephase, three-wire.
26
27
28
29
Figure 24.0-70. Single Receptacle Plug
30
Quad Receptacle Unit

The quad receptacle plug-in unit, shown in Figure 24.0-71,
is configured to order and uses Type CH single-, two- and
three-pole plug-in circuit breakers. Each unit comes with
24 NEMA configured receptacles in any combination of
straight blade and twist-lock and three-, four- and five-wire,
rated 1550A. Each receptacle can be fixed mounted to the
front of the enclosure or cord mounted from the bottom of
the enclosure (not as shown). Cord lengths are 115 feet in
1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645
for cord drop applications.
31
32
33
34
35
36
Figure 24.0-69. Duplex Receptacle Plug
37
Single Receptacle Unit

The single receptacle plug-in unit, shown in Figure 24.0-70,
is configured to order and uses Type CH single- or two-pole
plug-in circuit breakers. One receptacle comes with each
unit that can be straight blade or twist-lock, rated from
1550A. Each receptacle can also be fixed mounted to the
front of the enclosure or cord mounted from the bottom of
the enclosure (not as shown). Cord lengths are 115 feet in
1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645
38
39
40
41
Figure 24.0-71. Quad Receptacle Plug
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 046
Plug-in Device Electrical Data
22
23

Table 24.0-64. Circuit Breakers
100% rated breakers are not available for use in bus plugs.
Contact product line for guidance.
Ampere
Rating
24

240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
Breaker
Type
Table 24.0-65. Branch Devices Earth Leakage Ground Fault Circuit

Breakers, continued)
(Adjustable pickup from 30 mA to 30A)
Ampere
Rating
kAIC (Symmetrical)
480 Vac
Breaker
Type
100250
100250
100250
35
65
100
ELJD
ELHJD
ELJDC
200400
200400
200400
35
65
100
ELKD
ELHKD
ELKDC
1560
70100
1560
18
18
18
14
14
14
14
EHD
EHD
FDB
70100
110150
1560
18
18
65
14
14
25
14
14
18
FDB
FDB
FD
70100
110150
175225
65
65
65
25
25
25
18
18
18
FD
FD
FD
Ampere
Rating

240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
Breaker
Type
1560
70100
110150
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
HFD
HFD
HFD
15100
125225
250400
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
FB-P
LA-P
LA-P
175225
1560
70100
100
200
200
65
100
100
25
35
35
HFD
FDC
FDC
400600
700800
200
200
200
200
200
200
NB-P
NB-P
110225
15100
100225
200
200
65
100
150
35
FDC
FCL
ED
30
100225
100225
70225
100
200
65
35
18
EDH
EDC
JD, JDB
31
250
70225
250
65
100
100
35
65
65
18
25
25
JD, JDB
HJD
HJD
25
26
27
28
29
32
70225
250
125250
200
200
200
100
100
200
35
35
JDC
JDC
LCL
250400
100400
100400
65
65
100
35
65
25
35
DK
KD, KDB
HKD
34
100400
200400
300600
200
200
65
100
200
35
50
25
KDC
LCL
LD, LDB
35
300600
300600
400800
100
200
65
65
100
50
35
50
25
HLD
LDC
MDL
36
400800
400800
400800
100
65
100
65
50
65
35
25
35
HMDL
ND
HND
400800
6001200
200
65
100
50
50
25
NDC
ND
6001200
100
65
35
HND
6001200
200
100
50
NDC
33
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Table 24.0-66. Integrally Fused, Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
Table 24.0-67. Breaker Unit Catalog Numbering System
P3B HFD 3 015 G N

Bus Style
P3B = PRWIII
IBP = PRW
BP = Old line
Breaker Frame
kAIC (Symmetrical)
Neutral Option
N = 100% neutral
N2 = 200% neutral
(PRWIII only)
ZN = Low Z
(old line only)
Operating Handle
Busway Interlock
Line Side
Barrier
Neutral Bar
and Terminal
Guide
Pin
(Adjustable pickup from 30 mA to 30A)

480 Vac
Trip Rating
(Ex. 015, 060,
150, 400)
Ground Option
G = 50% internal
I = Isolated ground
(PRWIII only)
(Ex. FD, JDC,

KDB)
Table 24.0-65. Branch Devices Earth Leakage Ground Fault

Circuit Breakers
Ampere
Rating
3-Pole Only
Breaker
Type
Ground Bar
and Terminal
3560
70100
110150
25
25
25
ELFD
ELFD
ELFD
3560
70100
110150
65
65
65
ELHFD
ELHFD
ELHFD
Figure 24.0-72. Typical Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit
3560
70100
110150
100
100
100
ELFDC
ELFDC
ELFDC
Please call Greenwood Low Voltage Busway department

for help in assigning a catalog number for a specific application.
Notes:
Do not leave spaces between characters. Example: P3BFD3225N;

IBPKD3400N.
All plug-in units come fully assembled.
CA08104001E
24.0-47
September 2011
Sheet 24 047

Table 24.0-68. Fusible Switch Horsepower and Short-Circuit Rating
(Based on Fuse Class)
Ampere
Rating
NEC
Standard
Maximum
Operating Handle
Maximum Symmetrical
rms at Fuse Class
Busway
Interlock
Neutral Bar
& Terminal
23
240V
30
60
100
3
7.5
15
7.5
15
30
200
400
600
25
50
75
60
125
200
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAR
800
100
250
200 kAL
30
60
100
5
15
25
15
30
60
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAR
200
400
600
50
100
150
125
250
400
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAJ
800
200
500
200 kAL
20
50
75
22
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAR
24
25
Guide
Pin
480V
26
27
Ground Bar
& Terminal
28
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAR
Figure 24.0-73. Typical Fusible Plug-In Unit
29
H clips are standard for ITAP and TAP unless specified by adding
R in catalog number. R clips are standard for P3F.
600V
30
60
100
7.5
15
30
200
400
600
60
125
200
150
350
500
200 kAR
200 kAJ
200 kAJ
800
250
500
200 kAL
Table 24.0-69. Fusible Unit Catalog Numbering System
NoteS:
Please call Greenwood Low Voltage Busway department for help in

assigning a catalog number for a specific application.
Do not leave spaces between characters. Example: P3F362RN;
ITAP361N.
All plug-in units come fully assembled.
P3F 3 6 4 R G N
30
31
32
33
Bus Style
P3F = PRWIII
ITAP = PRW
TAP = Old Line
Three-Pole
Only
Voltage
6 = 600V
2 = 240V
Fuse Clips
H, J or R 600A
T or L for 800A
Ampere
Ground Option
1 = 30
2 = 60
3 = 100
4 = 200
5 = 400
6 = 600
7 = 800
G = 50%
I = Isolated
PRWIII only)
Neutral Options
N = 100%
N2 = 200% (PRWIII only)
ZN = Low Z (old line
only)
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 048
Plug-in Device Physical Data
22

A
23
Guide Pin
ON
24
C
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
25
Handle C
L
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Plug-in
Opening
OFF
C
L
Clamp
and Guide
C
L
E
Plug-in Opening
and B
Figure 24.0-74. Bus Plugs

Table 24.0-70. Plug-in Units
Plug-In
Unit
Maximum Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Amperes AC Volts
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
Mechanical Terminal
Wire Range Per Phase (mm2)
Approx.
Weights
Lbs (kg)
Circuit Breaker Plug-in Units

P3BFD
225
(E- & F-Frame breakers)
600
21.20
(538.5)
12.36
(314.0)
5.43
(138.0)
6.25
(158.8)
4.00
(101.6)
6.06
(153.7)
100A(1) #141/0 (2.550)

150A(1) #44/0 (2595)
25
(11.3)
P3BJD
(J-Frame breakers)
250
600
23.26
(590.8)
12.36
(314.0)
6.97
(177.0)
10.44
(265.2)
4.00
(101.6)
6.06
(153.7)
250A(1) #14350 kcmil (25185)

225A(1) 3350 kcmil (35185)
47
(21.3)
P3BKD
(K-Frame breakers)
400
600
34.41
(874.0)
13.29
(337.6)
7.79
(197.9)
12.56
(319.0)
4.00
(101.6)
6.64
(168.7)
350A(1) 250500 kcmil (120240)

400A(2) 3/0250 kcmil (45120)
53
(24.0)
P3BLD
(L-Frame breakers)
600
600
41.91
(1064.5)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
17.38
(441.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
400A(1) 4/0600 kcmil (120300)

600A(2) 400500 kcmil (185240)
75
(34.0)
P3BMDL
(MDL-Frame breakers)
800
600
45.89
(1165.6)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
17.38
(441.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
600A(2) #1500 kcmil (50240)

800A(2) 500750 kcmil (300400)
136
(61.7)
P3BND
(N-Fame breakers)
800
600
45.98
(1167.9)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
17.38
(441.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
700A(2) # 1500 kcmil (50240)

800A(3) 3/0400 kcmil (95185)
138
(62.6)
P3BLAP
(TRI-PAC)
400
600
45.89
(1165.6)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
13.80
(350.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
225A(1) #6350 kcmil (16185)

96
400A(1) #4250 kcmil and
(43.5)
(1) 3/0600 kcmil (25120 and 95300)
P3BLCL
400
600
41.86
(1063.2)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
13.80
(350.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
(1) #4250 kcmil (25120) and

(1) 3/0600 kcmil (95300)
88
(39.9)
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
24.0-49
September 2011
Sheet 24 049

Table 24.0-70. Plug-in Units (Continued)
Plug-In
Unit
Maximum Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Amperes AC Volts
(A)
(B)
(C)
Mechanical Terminal
(D)
(E)
(F)
Wire Range Per Phase (mm2)
Approx.
Weights
Lbs (kg)
Fusible Plug-in Units

P3F321RH
P3F321RV
30
P3F361RH
P3F361RV
P3F322RH
P3F322RV
60
P3F362RH
P3F362RV
P3F323RH
P3F323RV
100
P3F363RH
P3F363RV
P3F324RH
P3F324RV
200
P3F364RH
P3F364RV
240
12.64
(321.1)
15.66
(397.8)
13.92
(353.6)
12.64
(321.1)
8.46
(214.9)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
8.26
(209.8)
6.72
(170.7)
Cu(1) #14#3, (2.535)

Al(1) #12#2 (3.235)
22
(10.0)
600
12.64
(321.1)
15.66
(397.8)
13.92
(353.6)
12.64
(321.1)
8.46
(214.9)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
8.26
(209.8)
6.72
(170.7)
240
12.64
(321.1)
15.66
(397.8)
13.92
(353.6)
12.64
(321.1)
8.46
(214.9)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
8.26
(209.8)
6.72
(170.7)
Cu(1) #14#3, (2.535)

Al(1) #12#2 (3.238)
24
(10.9)
600
12.64
(321.1)
15.66
(397.8)
13.92
(353.6)
12.64
(321.1)
8.46
(214.9)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
8.26
(209.8)
6.72
(170.7)
Cu(1) #141/0, (2.550)

Al(1) #121/0 (3.250)
24
(10.9)
240
14.83
(376.7)
19.85
(504.2)
17.92
(455.2)
12.76
(324.1)
8.37
(212.6)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
13.62
(345.9)
6.84
(427.7)
Cu(1) #141/0, (2.550)

Al(1) #121/0 (3.250)
(1) # 4250 kcmil Cu/Al (25120)
24
(10.9)
600
14.83
(376.7)
19.85
(504.2)
17.92
(455.2)
12.76
(324.1)
8.37
(212.6)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
13.62
(345.9)
6.84
(427.7)
240
23.86
(606.0)
17.24
(437.9)
15.29
(388.4)
8.52
(216.4)
5.71
(145.0)
6.80
(172.7)
3.90
(99.1)
3.83
(97.3)
8.26
(209.8)
600
23.86
(606.0)
17.24
(437.9)
15.29
(388.4)
8.52
(216.4)
5.71
(145.0)
6.80
(172.7)
3.90
(99.1)
3.83
(97.3)
8.26
(209.8)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
(1) # 4250 kcmil Cu/Al (25120)

(1) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300)
or (2) 250 kcmil (120)
47
(21.3)
31
32
33
P3F325R and
P3F365R
400
240
600
48.85
(1240.8)
21.22
(539.0)
10.07
(255.8)
12.67
(321.8)
4.00
(101.6)
10.69
(271.5)
(1) 250750 kcmil Cu/Al (127380)

(2) 3/0250 kcmil Cu/Al (85127)
77
(34.9)
P3F365H
400
600
23.59
(599.2)
21.22
(539.0)
21.00
(533.4)
12.67
(321.8)
4.00
(101.6)
10.69
(271.5)
(1) 250750 kcmil Cu/Al (127380)

(2) 3/0250 kcmil Cu/Al (85127)
81
(36.7)
P3F326R and
P3F366R
600
240
600
48.90
(1242.1)
26.31
(668.3)
10.59
(270.0)
14.26
(362.2)
4.00
(101.6)
13.16
(334.3)
(2) #2600 kcmil Cu/Al (35300)

(3) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300)
82
(37.1)
P3F327R and
P3F367R
800
240
600
48.90
(1242.1)
26.31
(668.3)
10.59
(270.0)
14.26
(362.2)
4.00
(101.6)
13.16
(334.3)
(3) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300)
108
(49.0)
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 050
Construction Drawing
22
Construction Drawing
0.45
(11.4)
23
24
96.00
(2438.4)
111.44
(2830.6)
30.00
(762.0)
A15
A14
25
A12
26
120.0
(3048.0)
6.00
(152.4)
150.0
(3810.0)
A12
Plug-In Unit
27
30.00
(762.0)
A12
28
Outdoor
Duct
29
2500 A 30 4W
30
25.00
(635.0)
A03
31
A13
Indoor
Duct
44.00
(1117.6)
A02
17.00
(431.8)
48.00
(1219.2)
A01
40
41
42
43
30.00 (381.0)
(762.0)
52.00
(1320.0)
18.00
(457.2)
A08
36.00
(914.4)
7.38
(187.5)
1 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Phase
1 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Neutral
Duct Weight = 21 Lbs./Ft.
Color = ANSI 61 Gray
Indoor/Outdoor
3200 Ampere, 3-Phase Copper, 227/480 Volts
4-Wire, Housing Ground, 100% Neutral
G
4.38 A
(111.3) B
C
N
A10
35.00
(889.0)
29.00
(736.6) 293.00
(7442.2)
15.00
(381.1)
G
4.38 A
(111.3) B
C
N
16.14
(409.9)
8.00
(203.2)
240.00
(6096.0)
A07
12.00
(304.8)
2 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Phase

2 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Neutral
Duct Weight = 42 Lbs./Ft.
Color = ANSI 61 Gray
See Drawing
BVC1004 Line 15
See Drawing
BVC1012 Line 5
35
39
15.00
2 of A09
6 .00 5/8
Same Elevation
38
24.00
(609.6)
25.63
(651.0)
34
37
A12
All Floors A11
2.00
1.00
33
36
1600 A 30 4W
39.00 A06
(990.6)
A04
32
120.0
(3048.0)
6.00
(152.4)
150.0
(3810.0)
30.00
6.00
(762.0)
(152.4)
Indoor/Outdoor
1600 Ampere, 3-Phase Copper, 227/480 Volts
4-Wire, Housing Ground, 100% Neutral
Item
A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
Description
XFMR Throat
Elbow
Wall Flange
Elbow Flange
Hanger
Flange Elbow
Elbow
29.0 Inches (736.6 mm) Length
120.0 Feet (3048.0mm) Length
Style No.
or S.O. No.
LVB01234 U01
LVB01234 A02
BVC0299G11
LVB01234 A04
BVD0301G12
LVB01234 A06
LVB01234 A07
LVB01234 A08
LVB01234 A09
Req.
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
Figure 24.0-75. Sample Installation Drawing

After the approval process and prior to shipment of the
busway from the factory, the installer will receive a set of
construction drawings. A sample is illustrated in Figure 24.075 above. The drawings will contain a complete layout of the
entire installation and a bill of material that includes:
Item
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
Description
Elbow
Floor Flange
30 Inches (726.0mm) Length
120.0 Feet (3048.0 mm) Length
96.0 Feet (2438.4 mm) Length
End Closer
Hanger
Hanger
Style No.
or S.O. No.
LVB01234 A10
BVD0299G06
LVB01234 A12
LVB01234 A13
LVB01234 A14
BVD0156G08
BVD0300G12
BVD0300G15
Req.
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
4
6. Location of the T and F markings on the busway.

7. Flange reference drawings.
8. Switchgear locations and orientation.
9. Wall and floor locations.
1. The item number of each section which can be correlated

with the drawing.
10. The length of each section.
2. A description of each section.
11. The location of any sections that have been designated

as Field Fit pieces (see Page 24.0-52).
3. The style number or shop order number of each section.

4. The quantity of each section or style number required.
5. The height, width and weight (per foot) of each
ampere rating.
The installer should review this drawing prior to and during

the installation process. Please note that plug-in units are
generally not shown on a construction drawing. The installer
will also receive installation instruction leaflets and operation
and maintenance manuals with the drawings.
CA08104001E
24.0-51
September 2011
Sheet 24 051
Installation Data
Installation Data
22
Hoisting and Positioning Busway

Pow-R-Way III is manufactured with two sets of lifting
eyes at the ends of each piece to facilitate the hoisting
and positioning of the busway during installation. Refer
to Figure 24.0-76 for location of lifting eyes.
23
24
Incorrect Joint Assembly:

No Pow-R-Bridge
25
26
27
Incorrect Joint Assembly:

T and F Labels Misaligned
28
29
30
Correct Joint Assembly
31
Figure 24.0-77. Bridge Joint Installation
Torque Indicating Bolt (Figure 24.0-78)
Figure 24.0-76. Hoisting Riser and Horizontal Busway
Busway Joint Assembly

When connecting sections of busway the following
guidelines must be followed:
The torque indicating bolt is a double-headed bolt designed

to ensure that proper installation torque is achieved. Fallaway instruction labels are provided between the upper and
lower bolt heads. A standard wrench with a (minimum)
14.00-inch (355.6 mm) handle should be used to complete
the joint installation. Torque should be applied to the upper
head only and as when the proper value is achieved. This
bolt head will shear off allowing the tag to fall to the floor.
Any joint that is improperly torqued will retain the highly
visible tag and should be retightened. The lower bolt head
remains intact for future maintenance and a label is provided
on the bridge joint with the proper torque requirements.
1. Carefully read NEMA publication BUI.1 provided with

the busway before installing equipment.
2. Contact surfaces must be kept clean and free of all
contaminants.
3. Align the (factory installed) Pow-R-Bridge end of the
piece being positioned with the non-bridge joint end of
the adjacent section. Confirm that the T and F labels
of both sections are in the same plane. Failure to do so
will result in an improper installation with the phase bars
of the connected sections out of sequence. Then, slide
the two sections together until the bus bars of the nonbridge section contact the stopping lances of the bridge
joint conductor bars of the section being positioned.
Figure 24.0-77 illustrates examples of incorrect and correct
connections. Obviously, the installation is incorrect if
the bridge joint is missing, but the busway will also be
improperly installed if the T label of the bridge joint is
not in the same plane as the T label of the busway.
Torque Indicating Bolt

as Shipped
Torque Indicating Bolt

After Installation
Yellow
Instruction
Label
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
For initial installation, tighten

until outer head shears off.
Use a 14-inch (355.6 mm) or
longer wrench.
Figure 24.0-78. Torque Indicating Bolt

Note: For maintenance or relocation torque from 55 to 65 ft lbs using
a torque wrench.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 052
Final Field Fit Program
22
23
24
25
26
27
Final Field Fit Program

A field fit section of busway is typically an elbow or a short
length of feeder that is intentionally left out of a run for later
shipment. It is most often a mutually agreed upon section
between the customer and the plant. The purpose of
the program is to effectively manage the dimensional
uncertainties that may be involved in a busway layout.
The example shown in Figure 24.0-79 identifies the field fit
piece as item F01, a straight length.
Upon release of the order, this item is kept on hold for field
measurement. The contractor installs the busway (Items A01
through A04) and is then able to obtain an exact dimension
for the final field fit piece, Item F01. The measurement
should be made from the edge of the housing of A01 to
the edge of the housing A02.
28
The contractor can fax the dimensions directly to the factory

on the Final Field Fit Fax Release form, which is packed with
the original shipment. The field fit section will ship within
5 to 10 working days from the receipt of the release fax.
Offset fittings or more than four field fits released at the
same time will ship within 15 working days. This program
has been successful for many years and it provides the
assurance of an exact fit the first time. It allows for busway
runs to be released when certain dimensions are not yet
determined. It also eliminates the costly delays that can
occur when sections have to be remade and shipped due
to last-minute job site changes. In turn, this allows for
installations to begin early and projects can be completed
on time.
The Final Field Fit Fax Release form is customized to each
order and is shipped to the job site with the busway. The
field fit items shown on the form will match the F items
shown on the as-built drawings provided. The sheet is faxed
from the job site directly to the product engineer at the factory.
29
30
31
A02
Field Measure
Dimension A
24.00
(609.6)
A04
32
36.00
(914.4)
24.00
(609.6)
F
36.00
(914.4)
33
A01
36.00
(914.4)
34
F01
A03
24.00
(609.6)
T
F
Hold F01 for Final Fit.

Customer to Furnish
Dimensions.
35
Switchgear #1
Front
36
F01
37
38
Customer Faxes A Dimension

for F01
39
Final Fit Piece Shipped within

5 to 10 Working Days (Elbow or
Feeder Length)
Figure 24.0-79. Final Field Fit Program
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
September 2011

Pow-R-Flex
24.1-1
Sheet 24 053
General Description
Pow-R-Flex
Low-Ampere Busway
The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is

a three-phase design available in threewire and four-wire configurations with
integral housing, internal and isolated
internal ground options. Oversized
neutral ratings are available on select
current ratings. See Table 24.1-5.
22
23
24
C
B
A
25
Pow-R-Flex Low-Ampere Busway

Three-Wire Housing
Ground Assembly
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Flex low-ampere
busway is the latest design in a family
of innovative busway products and
is the newest in the industry. The
Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is
an excellent solution for distributing
power throughout facilities, providing
the flexibility to easily use the
electrical system power where and
when it is needed. The Pow-R-Flex
low-ampere busway is practical for
manufacturing and assembly facilities,
machine shops, school and private
laboratories, warehouse facilities,
and data centers, and will reduce
installation time and costs.
The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway
is a maximum 600V design that uses
the latest in extrusion construction,
providing appealing aesthetics
without compromising heavy-duty
performance.
The design consists of an extruded,
all-aluminum housing with silverplated copper or aluminum
conductors. Copper conductors
offer ratings from 225600A, and
aluminum conductors offer ratings
from 150400A. The Pow-R-Flex lowampere busway comes in feeder
type and plug-in type with a full
line of complementary fittings and
accessories. Feeder and plug-in
busways can be used interchangeably
without adapters or special splice
plates. Each section is joined using
a Pow-R-Bridge joint-compression
fitting. The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere
busway comes in two color options:
ANSI 61 gray or black.
Standards
meets the requirements of NEMA,
ANSI, UL 857, and CSA-C22.2 and is
manufactured in an ISO 9001-certified
facility. The feeder, plug-in, fittings and
accessories are designed to withstand
the short-circuit ratings listed for each
ampere rating.
CA08104001E

27
Conductor Details
Pow-R-Flex bus bars are fabricated
from high-strength 100% to over 200%
neutral capacity on select current
ratings. The phase and neutral
conductors are silver-plated along
the entire length of the bus bars.
Aluminum bars are silver-plated by the
Alstan 88C process, and copper bars
are silver-plated through a flashing
process. The ground bar for the
internal ground option is not plated.
The internal conductors are separated
from one another using an air
insulation gap between phases,
ground and housing. The conductors
are supported and braced with a
durable, high-strength polycarbonate
support block that has a Class B 130C
insulation rating. The support blocks
provide superior fault current bracing.
For a Pow-R-Flex type plug-in busway,
there are no special provisions for
plug-in unit connections. Each plug-in
unit clamps directly onto each phase
and neutral conductor. A support block
is used at each plug-in provision,
providing additional bracing and
support around the plug-in unit
provision. This provides a more
robust, reliable and safe plug-in
unit connection.
The neutral conductor is made
from the same material as the phase
conductors and is the same physical
size, providing 100% to 200% neutral
capacity on select current ratings. See
Table 24.1-5 for neutral capacity by
ampere rating.
26
28
C
B
29
A
G
Three-Wire Internal
Ground Assembly
30
31
32
N
C
33
B
A
34
Four-Wire Housing
Ground Assembly
35
36
37
N
C
B
A
G
38
Four-Wire Internal
Ground Assembly
Figure 24.1-1. Conductor Configurations

Note: Single-phase configurations are also
available. Contact your local Eaton sales
representative for additional information.
39
40
41
42
43

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 054
General Description
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Ground Options
Pow-R-Bridge
Integral grounduses the extruded

aluminum housing as the ground/
earth path. It has been designed,
manufactured and UL listed as a
50% integral ground/earth path and is
fully fault rated. The system ground
continuity is maintained through each
joint by the aluminum joint covers.
The joint covers are furnished with
ground/earth path contact surfaces
on the inside of each cover. When
installed, the contact surfaces are
bolted directly to the busway ground/
earth path. A highly visible label is
furnished on each joint cover to alert
the installer that the covers must be
properly installed to maintain the
ground/earth path. The result is a
50% ground/earth path with very
low resistance characteristics.
Pow-R-Flex joint connections are

made with the Pow-R-Bridge joint
package, which is installed on each
section of busway prior to shipment.
A double-headed, torque-indicating
bolt is provided to ensure that the
proper installation torque is achieved.
Fall-away instruction tags are
furnished on the torque-indicating bolt
heads to allow for visual inspection
from a distance. When the proper
torque value is achieved, the top bolt
head will shear off and allow the tag
to fall to the floor. Any joint that is
improperly torqued will retain the
highly visible (caution yellow) tag
at the bolt head.
Internal grounduses a copper

ground/earth conductor that is internal
to the busway and is UL listed as a 50%
ground/earth path. The internal ground/
earth continuity is maintained through
the Pow-R-Bridge joint in the same
fashion as each phase conductor.
Isolated internal grounduses the
50% internal ground/earth conductor;
however, it has been isolated from
the busway housing throughout the
busway system and is UL listed as a
50% isolated ground/earth path.
The Pow-R-Bridge can provide an

adjustment of 0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
at each joint. Overadjustment is
prevented by the joint covers,
which will only allow a 0.50-inch
(12.0 mm) adjustment to be made.
The nonrotating design of the
Pow-R-Bridge maintains its
configuration integrity when it has
been removed from a section of
busway. The conductors, insulator
plates, and insulators will not displace
or swivel, making reinstallation of
the Pow-R-Bridge quick and easy.
Duct Length
Inches (mm)
Number of
Plug-In Provisions
24.00 (609.6)
48.00 (1219.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
96.00 (2438.4)
120.00 (3048.0)
1
3
5
7
9
150400A aluminum
225600A copper

is constructed with a heavy-duty
U-shaped aluminum extruded base
housing. The front covers are also
made from extruded aluminum. The
U-shaped base and front cover
incorporate a unique hinge design
to lock in the front covers on the top
side. The bottom sides are fastened
in place. This maintains short-circuit
strength, provides clean lines, and
adds to the aesthetic look and feel of
the product.
Straight sections of feeder busway can

be supplied in any length, at 0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) increments, from 24.00
inches (609.6 mm) minimum to
120.00 inches (3048.0 mm) maximum.
Each feeder section will include one
factory-installed Pow-R-Bridge on the
left end of the busway when viewing
the front of the busway. For added
safety and reliability, there are no
openings or access covers along the
entire length of each feeder section.
A protective finish is applied by an

electrostatic process. There are two
color options: ANSI 61 gray or black.
Table 24.1-1. Number of Plug-In Openings
Pow-R-Flex Feeder Busway
Housing Details
The non-magnetic, all-aluminum

housing provides for excellent heat
dissipation and a significant reduction
in reactance and magnetic flux
leakage, as compared to steel, or
steel and aluminum combination
housings. The integrity and strength
of the housing ensures specifiers and
users of a safe and durable installation
over a broad spectrum of applications.
blocks, which are rated as Class B

130C insulation. The plug-in provision
cover incorporates a shutter design
that prevents incidental contact with
the conductors inside the busway.
The shutter has a positive screw close
feature that prohibits the shutter from
being operated and opened without
the use of a tool. Once the screw is
removed, it is mechanically operated
by the plug-in unit when a plug-in unit
is being inserted onto the busway.
This shutter design puts safety first
and is IP2X finger safe. One plug-in/
tap-off provision cover is provided
every 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) along
a plug-in busway section. Each feeder
section will include one factoryinstalled Pow-R-Bridge on the left
end of the busway when viewing the
front of the busway.
Figure 24.1-2. Feeder Busway
Pow-R-Flex Plug-In Busway
150400A aluminum
225600A copper
Straight sections of plug-in busway

can be supplied in only 24.00-inch
(609.6 mm) increments from
24.00 inches (609.6 mm) minimum,
with a maximum of 120.00 inches
(3048.0 mm).
Figure 24.1-3. Plug-in Busway
For a Pow-R-Flex type plug-in busway,

a plug-in/tap-off provision cover is
used. This cover hinges into the
housing in the same manner as the
extruded front covers and is made
from the same durable, high-strength
polycarbonate material as the support
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
24.1-3
Sheet 24 055
Electrical Data
Electrical Data
Table 24.1-5. Oversized Neutral Ratings
Table 24.1-2. Short-Circuit RatingsThree-Cycle rms Symmetrical

Ampere
Rating
Plug-In Short-Circuit
Rating
Feeder Short-Circuit
Rating
22,000
35,000
35,000
42,000
22,000
35,000
35,000
42,000
22,000
35,000
42,000
42,000
22,000
35,000
42,000
42,000
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
Resistance
R
Reactance
X
Impedance
Z
9.93
3.44
3.44
2.41
4.56
2.92
2.92
2.50
10.90
4.57
4.57
3.46
5.30
1.85
1.32
1.32
4.24
2.96
2.51
2.51
6.87
3.53
2.75
2.75
Copper
225
400
500
600
Table 24.1-4. Ground Resistance Values Milliohms per 100 Feet (30.5m)
Ampere Rating
Integral R
Internal R
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
2.86
2.86
2.86
2.86
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
1.44
1.44
1.44
1.44
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)

0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
250%
150%
150%
150%
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)

0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
250%
150%
100%
100%
22
150
225
300
400
23
24
25
26
Table 24.1-6. Voltage Drop Volts per 100 Feet (30.5m) Line-to-Neutral,
60 Hz at Rated Current (Varying Power Factors)
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
Neutral
Rating
Aluminum
225
400
500
600
Table 24.1-3. Resistance, Reactance and Impedance Milliohms per

100 Feet (30.5m) Line-to-Neutral, Plug-in and Feeder Busway
Ampere
Rating
Neutral Size
D x W Inches (mm)
Copper
Copper
225
400
500
600
Ampere
Rating
Ampere
Rating
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
2.58
1.34
1.79
1.67
2.84
1.70
2.27
2.26
2.77
1.76
2.34
2.37
2.65
1.75
2.33
2.41
2.50
1.71
2.29
2.39
2.32
1.66
2.21
2.33
2.07
1.28
1.14
1.37
2.58
2.05
1.98
2.37
2.64
2.26
2.22
2.66
2.63
2.36
2.35
2.82
2.56
2.41
2.42
2.91
2.46
2.42
2.45
2.94
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
27
28
29
Copper
225
400
500
600
Notes:
Values shown in Table 24.1-6 are based upon concentrated
loads. For plug-in distributed loads, divide the values by 2.
See IEEE 141-13-8.3.
For line-to-neutral voltage drop, multiply the values from Table 24.1-6
by 0.577.
For other than rated current, multiply the values from Table 24.1-6 by
actual current/rated current.
For total voltage drop, multiply voltage drop by actual length/
100 ft (30.5m).
30
31
32
33
34
Copper
225
400
500
600
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 056
Physical Data
22
Physical Data
3.60
(91.4)
Table 24.1-7. Physical DimensionsWidth x Height in Inches (mm)
23
Ampere
Rating
Phase
Conductor
Ground
Conductor
Housing
Enclosure
150
0.28 x 0.50
(7.1 x 12.7)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
225
0.28 x 1.25
(7.1 x 31.8)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
300
0.28 x 1.25
(7.1 x 31.8)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
400
0.28 x 1.75
(7.1 x 44.5)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
225
0.28 x 0.50
(7.1 x 12.7)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
400
0.28 x 1.25
(7.1 x 31.8)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
500
0.28 x 1.75
(7.1 x 44.5)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
600
0.28 x 1.75
(7.1 x 44.5)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
Aluminum
24
25
26
0.50
(12.7)
8.30
(210.8)
3.60
(91.4)
Copper
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1.25
(31.7)
8.30
(210.8)
Table 24.1-8. Weight (lb ft)/Current Density (A/in^2)

Ampere
Rating
Current
Density
Weight
Three-Wire
Weight
Four-Wire
Add for
Ground
Add for
Oversized Neutral
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
1067
640
610
813
6.45
7.10
7.55
7.55
6.60
7.50
8.10
8.10
0.41
0.41
0.41
0.41
0.40
0.15
0.15
1618
1151
1027
1233
7.50
9.80
11.45
11.45
8.00
11.05
13.25
13.25
1.30
1.30
1.30
1.30
1.30
0.82
Copper
225
400
500
600
3.60
(91.4)
1.75
(44.4)
8.30
(210.8)
Table 24.1-9. Weight (kg/m)/Current Density (A/cm^2)
35
36
37
Ampere
Rating
Current
Density
Weight
Three-Wire
Weight
Four-Wire
Add for
Ground
Add for
Oversized Neutral
165
99
132
126
9.60
10.57
11.24
11.24
9.82
11.16
12.05
12.05
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.60
0.22
0.22
251
178
159
191
11.16
14.58
17.04
17.04
11.91
16.44
19.72
19.72
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.93
0.82
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
Figure 24.1-4. Conductor Dimensions
Copper
38
225
400
500
600
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
September 2011

Pow-R-Flex
24.1-5
Sheet 24 057
Physical Data
Fittings
There are various fittings allowing the
Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to
meet every application need: flanges,
elbows, offsets, tees, cable tap boxes,
adapters, expansion joints, phase
transpositions and end closures.
22
Rearward
24
These fittings, along with standard and

minimum dimensions, are described
on the following pages.
Forward

the dimensions are given from the
centerline of the busway and the
Pow-R-Bridge.
The relationship of fittings to straight
lengths (forward, rearward, upward
and downward) is illustrated in
Figure 24.1-5.
23
Upward
25
Rearward
26
27
Downward
28
Figure 24.1-5. Busway Orientation
29
All straight lengths and fittings are

marked with an F label. The F
marks the front of the busway and will
be noted on the construction or the
as-built drawings provided by Eaton.
30
Upward
Phasingthe phasing is indicated by

the location of the F label. When
facing the front of the busway, the
phasing is N-C-B-A-G top to bottom.
See Figure 24.1-6.
When installing Pow-R-Flex lowampere busway, the F labels on
the front of the busway must be
aligned. Failure to do so will result
in an improper installation with the
phase bars out of sequence.
31
Figure 24.1-6. Busway Phase Sequence
32
Traditional Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90-degree
changes in the direction of the busway
layouts. There are four types of elbows
available: forward, rearward, upward
and downward, allowing the busway
layout to turn in any direction.
Figure 24.1-7 shows the standard/
minimum leg lengths for each
type of elbow for all ratings and
configurations. Nonstandard lengths
are also available.
33
34
Downward
35
36
All dimensions shown are to the

centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge and
centerline of the busway.
37
38
Forward
Figure 24.1-7. Traditional Elbows
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 058
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
Standard Flanges
Flanges provide for a direct connection to low voltage
switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers
and other electrical equipment. Cutout dimensions and drilling
plans are provided with the customer installation drawings,
and it is the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer to
provide the opening, flange drillings, connecting hardware
and bus risers in their electrical equipment. For proper
coordination between the busway and other equipment,
detailed drawings, including equipment orientation, must
accompany the order prior to release and manufacture.
Figure 24.1-9 shows the standard/minimum flange
length and phase-to-phase dimensions for all ratings and
configurations. Nonstandard lengths and phase-to-phase
dimensions are also available.
All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the
Pow-R-Bridge measured from the top of the flange plate.
28
1.50
(38.1)
29
1.05
(26.7)
1.50
(38.1)
0.50 (12.7)
30
C
31
0.75
(19.0)
3.50
(88.9)
32
0.28
(7.1)
33
A
G
34
3.50
(88.9)
35
36
CL
15.78
(400.8)
37
3.50
(88.9)
38
39
40
3.50
(88.9)
41
1.60
(40.6)
Figure 24.1-9. Standard Flanges

0.89 (22.6)
42
43
4.50
4.50
4.50
(114.3) (114.3) (114.3)
4.05
(102.9)
Figure 24.1-8. Flange Cutout Detail
CA08104001E
September 2011

Pow-R-Flex
24.1-7
Sheet 24 059
Physical Data
Offsets
22
An offset is used to allow the busway layout, avoid any

obstacles and to conform to the buildings structure. It is two
elbows fabricated into a single fitting for use where space
restrictions prohibit the use of two traditional elbows.
There are four types of offsets available: forward, rearward,
upward and downward, allowing the busway layout to offset
in any direction.
23
24
Figure 24.1-10 shows the standard/minimum leg lengths

for each type of offset for all ratings and configurations.
Nonstandard lengths are also available.
25
All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the

Pow-R-Bridge and centerline of the busway.
26
27
Downward
28
29
30
31
Forward
32
33
34
35
36
Rearward
37
38
39
40
41
42
Upward
Figure 24.1-10. Offsets
CA08104001E
43

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 060
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cable Tap Boxes

There are two types of cable tap boxes: end and center. End
cable tap boxes are used to feed power to a run of busway
with cable and conduit or where loads served by busway
are connected without the need of overcurrent protection.
Center cable tap boxes are used to center feed a run of
busway with cable and conduit or where loads served by
the busway are connected without the need of overcurrent
protection.
The front and back covers are removable, improving the
ease of cable termination. Top and bottom access plates are
removable, allowing easy access to the lugs with tools. See
Figure 24.1-12 and Figure 24.1-13. There are two mechanical
lugs provided: per phase and one lug for the ground.
Terminal conductor range is as follows:
Phase and neutral:

Ground:
(1) #4350 kcmil

(1) #81/0
28
29
Figure 24.1-12 shows the standard/minimum stub

lengths for each type of cable tap box for all ratings and
configurations. Nonstandard lengths and enclosure sizes
are also available.
30
All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the Pow-RBridge measured from the edge of the box enclosure.
31
32
33
Figure 24.1-13. End Cable Tap Box Detail View
34
35
36
Figure 24.1-14. Mechanical Lug Access
37
38
39
40
41
42
Figure 24.1-15. End Cable Tap Box With IQ Power Meter
43
Figure 24.1-11. Center Cable Tap Box
CA08104001E
September 2011

Pow-R-Flex
24.1-9
Sheet 24 061
Physical Data
Expansion Joints
Phase Transpositions
Expansion joints accommodate the expansion and

contraction of bus bars with respect to the enclosure.
They accommodate for the difference in the coefficient
of expansion of the aluminum housing and copper or
aluminum bus bar conductors. Expansion joints must be
used whenever a run of busway crosses an expansion joint
of a building. They should also be installed in the center of an
extremely long straight run of busway; one every 300 feet
(91m) for copper and one every 225 feet (68m) for aluminum.
Usage per footage recommendations are based upon fullload ampere ratings. The use of expansion joints should
be engineered for specific applications and installations.
Minimum dimensions are shown in Figure 24.1-16.
Phase transposition fittings are used in applications where

a phase rotation is needed due to a change in phasing from
the source equipment to the load equipment. They may also
be used to correct plug-in unit orientation when the busway
comes out of proper orientation for plug-in units due to
the routing of the busway. There are two types of phase
transpositions: 90 degree and 180 degree. In both types,
all conductors are transposed. See Figure 24.1-17 and
Figure 24.1-18 for minimum dimensions.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Figure 24.1-17. 90-Degree Phase Transposition
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Figure 24.1-16. Expansion Joint
39
Figure 24.1-18. 180-Degree Phase Transposition
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 062
Physical Data
22
23
Accessories
VaporFire Barriers
Vaporfire barriers hold a two-hour fire rating and are used
to seal the busway internally for penetrations through walls,
floors, and other fire-rated penetrations, preventing the
passage of flame, noxious gas, smoke and moisture. See
Figure 24.1-19 for minimum dimensions.
24
End Closures
End closures terminate a bus run and can be used to cap
off either the left or right end of a section of busway. End
closures enclose and prevent incidental contact with live
conductors. An end closure adds 0.25 inches to the overall
length of the busway run. See Figure 24.1-21.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Figure 24.1-19. VaporFire Barrier
Tees (Horizontal)
Tee fittings allow for busway connection in three different
horizontal directions. Pow-R-Flex tee fittings consist of
special joint covers with instructions on how to place the
bridge joint. The through connections connect to the short
sides of the bridge joint, and the change connections
connect to the long side of the bridge joint.
34
35
Figure 24.1-21. End Closure
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Figure 24.1-20. Horizontal Tees
CA08104001E
September 2011

Pow-R-Flex
24.1-11
Sheet 24 063
Physical Data
Wall Flanges
Type C Wallmount Hanger
Wall flanges fit around the busway and are designed to

close off the wall gap opening around the busway, made to
allow the busway to pass through a wall. Wall flanges are
primarily for cosmetic purposes and do not provide any type
of vapor or fire barrier. See Figure 24.1-22.
The Type C wallmount hanger provides a means to

mount the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to a wall, beam,
pedestal or other fixed structure. The Type C brackets are
installed prior to installing the busway. Each hanger comes
with the hardware to mount the hanger to the busway. One
hanger should be used every 10 feet (3m), and the busway
span between hangers should not exceed 10 feet (3m).
See Figure 24.1-23.
The recommended cutout opening in a wall for the busway

should be 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) greater than the busway
dimensions or A x B.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Figure 24.1-23. Type C Wallmount Hanger
Type L Wallmount Hanger

The Type L wallmount hanger provides a means to mount
the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway flush against a wall. The
Type L brackets are sold as a two-piece hanger set and come
See Figure 24.1-24.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Figure 24.1-24. Type L Wallmount Hanger
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 064
Physical Data
22
23
24
Horizontal HangerSingle
Horizontal HangerBack-to-Back
Horizontal hangers provide a means to attach a single

0.50-inch (12.7 mm) threaded drop rod to the busway,
suspending the busway from above. Each hanger comes
See Figure 24.1-25.
The back-to-back horizontal hanger allows two busway runs

to be mounted back-to-back and suspended from above,
using a single 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) threaded drop rod. Each
hanger comes with the hardware to mount the hanger to the
busway. One hanger should be used every 10 feet (3m),
and the busway span between hangers should not exceed
10 feet (3m). See Figure 24.1-26.
25
26
27
28
29
30
Figure 24.1-26. Back-to-Back Hanger
31
32
33
Sway Braces
Figure 24.1-25. Single Hanger
Sway brace brackets provide a provision to brace the

busway run at a 45-degree angle, restricting the suspended
busway from swinging. There are two types of sway brace
brackets: single and back-to-back. Each sway brace comes
with the hardware to mount the brace to the busway.
See Figure 24.1-27.
34
35
36
37
38
Figure 24.1-27. Sway Braces
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
24.1-13
Sheet 24 065
Physical Data
Busway Power Monitoring
22
Eatons family of IQ electronic power

meters is available to monitor each
run of busway. Each power meter is
attached to the end cable tap box and
comes installed, ready for use. The
installing contractor will need to wire
the CTs to the meter. CTs are included
with the power meter.
23
24
25
Each power meter comes with a highly

visible LED display, showing metered
values for each phase with its threeline display. This display is very easy
to read, even if installed at a height or
distance. Using the keypad and menus
on the local display, users can display
a variety of electrical system values or
program the meter. Metered data may
also be transmitted and configured
remotely, depending upon the
selected meter and options selected.
IQ Meter (Front)
26
IQ Power Meter (Rear)
27
28
29
Table 24.1-10. IQ Electronic Power Meters

Features
IQ 130
IQ 140
IQ 150
IQ 250
IQ 260
PXM2000
Current, per phase
Current demand
Min./max. readings (I, V)
Min./max. readings (I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA)
Frequency
Real, reactive, apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA)
Power factor, total
Real, reactive, apparent power demand
Real, reactive, apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, Vah)
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), per phase (V, I)
Opt
Opt
I/O (Digital in/digital out, analog out, KYZ out)
Opt
Opt
Opt
Logging, trend, event
Embeded Web server
Firmware flash update
Waveform display
RS-485
Opt
Opt
Opt
Modbus RTU
Opt
Opt
Opt
Modbus ASCII
Opt
Opt
Opt
KYZ output
Opt
Opt
Opt
DNP 3.0
HTTP, HTTPS
SNMP
SMTP
NTP
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 066
Physical Data
22
23
24
Plug-In Unit Overcurrent Protective Devices
Plug-in cable tap boxes
A variety of plug-in units have been designed for

the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to meet multiple
applications and a variety of installation conditions.
Plug-in unit devices provide easy and flexible access
to a buildings electrical power system, while providing
safe overcurrent protection to equipment and wiring.
Plug-in cable tap boxes are used to back feed power to a

run-off busway, or where equipment served by the busway
is connected without overcurrent protection. Plug-in cable
tap boxes fit into any plug-in provision on a plug-in type
busway. See Figure 24.1-30.
25
All Pow-R-Flex plug-in units are designed with the safety of

the installer and user as the key criteria. The following safety
features are standard for all fusible and molded-case circuit
breaker plug-in units:
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Each plug-in unit ground stab makes positive contact with

the busway ground (integral or internal) before the phase
or neutral stabs contact the bus bars
Plug-in unit molded guide tabs are provided in the stab
support base. These ensure proper phase alignment and
open the busway outlet shutter mechanism
Each plug-in unit has an interface bracket, which prevents
the unit from being installed onto or removed from the
busway, while the device is in the on/closed position
Each plug-in unit has a door interlock, preventing the
front cover from being opened while the device is in
the on/closed position and preventing accidental closing
of the device while the front cover is open
Line-side barriers are provided over the line-side
terminal to help prevent accidental contact with
line-side connections
When the plug-in unit is installed, the stab-base assembly
on the plug-in unit is recessed into the busway outlet
cover to help seal against moisture and dust
Each plug-in unit has mounting flanges, which help
protect the stab-base assembly and have captive
hardware that bolt the unit securely to the busway
34
35
Table 24.1-11. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Details

Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Mechanical
Lugs (Standard)
Mechanical
Lugs (Metric)
LAPTB100MG
LAPTB100MGN
LAPTB200MG
LAPTB200MGN
100
100
200
200
Figure 24.1-30. Plug-In Cable Tap Box

Table 24.1-12. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Dimensions
Catalog Number
LAPTB100MG
LAPTB100MGN
LAPTB200MG
LAPTB200MGN
36
Stab Base
37
38
Neutral
Figure 24.1-28. Plug-In Stab Assembly Details
39
40
41
Ground
42
43
Gutter
Space
Figure 24.1-29. Plug-In Outlet Details
Figure 24.1-31. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Details
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
24.1-15
Sheet 24 067
Physical Data
22
23
24
Figure 24.1-33. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit Dimensions
25
Table 24.1-15. Breaker Plug-In Unit Dimensions

Plug-In
Unit
Figure 24.1-32. Plug-In Device Mounting
Circuit breaker plug-in units are stock and come with the
circuit breaker fully installed, ready for installation and
termination. All units are three-phase with three-pole
Eaton Series C molded-case circuit breakers.
Table 24.1-13. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings (kA Symmetrical)
240 Vac
LABFD
225
(F-Frame)
600
18.00
10.80
8.17
5.97
4.80
(457.2) (274.3) (207.5) (151.6) (121.9)
LABJD
250
(J-Frame)
600
18.56
10.80
9.08
5.97
4.61
(471.4) (274.3) (230.6) (151.6) (117.1)
26
27
28
Table 24.1-16. Breaker Plug-In Unit Physical Data
Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units
Ampere
Rating
Max.
Max.
A
Amperes Voltage
480 Vac
600 Vac
Breaker
Frame
15225
15100
15150
15225
65
18
18
65
14
14
35
14
18
ED
EHD
FDB
FD
15225
70250
70250
70250
100
65
65
100
65
35
35
65
25
18
18
25
HFD
JDB
JD
HJD
Plug-In
Unit
Mechanical
Terminals
Approximate
Weight lbs
LABFD
(F-Frame)
Cu/Al-(1)#44/0
25
LABJD
(J-Frame)
Cu/Al-(1)#14350 kcmil
40
29
30
31
32
Neutral
Breaker
33
34
Note: 100%-rated circuit breakers are not for use in plug-in units.
35
Table 24.1-14. Breaker Unit Selection Chart
LAB FDB 3100 G N

Bus Style
36
Ground
Neutral Option
LAB = Low ampere
37
N = 100%
N2 = Oversized
38
Breaker Frame
(Ex. FD, JDB)
Trip Rating
Ground Option
G = Internal
I = Isolated
Figure 24.1-34. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit Details
39
(Ex. 3015, 3225)
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 068
Physical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Fusible Switch Plug-In Units

Fusible switch plug-in units are stock and come fully
assembled with the switch assembly and fuse mounting
base ready for installation and termination. All fusible switch
plug-in units come standard with Class R fuse clips and can
be field modified for use with Class H and J fuses. Fuses are
not included. Instructions for fuse base modifications are
shown on the data label mounted on the inside of the
plug-in unit door.
Table 24.1-17. Fusible Switch Horsepower and Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
Ampere
Rating
Voltage
NEC
Standard
Eaton
Maximum
30
60
100
200
240
240
240
240
3
7.5
15
25
30
60
100
200
480
480
480
480
5
15
25
50
15
30
60
125
50
50
50
50
30
60
100
200
600
600
600
600
7.5
15
30
60
20
50
75
150
50
50
50
50
3
7.5
15
25
Fault
Current
50
50
50
50
30
30
60
60
240
600
240
600
LAF323R
LAF363R
LAF324R
LAF364R
100
100
200
200
240
600
240
600
Table 24.1-20. Fusible Plug-In Unit Physical Data
Cu-(1)#14#3
Al-(1)#12#2
25
LAF322R
Cu-(1)#141/0
Al-(1)#121/0
35
LAF362R
Cu-(1)#141/0
Al-(1)#121/0
35
LAF323R
Cu-(1)#141/0
Al-(1)#121/0
35
Ground
LAF363R
Cu-(1)#4250 kcmil
Al-(1)#4250 kcmil
35
G = Integral/internal
I = Internal/isolated
LAF324R
Cu-(1)#4250
Al-(1)#4250
45
LAF364R
Cu-(1)#4250
Al-(1)#4250
45
Fuse Clips
37
LAF321R
LAF361R
LAF322R
LAF362R
Three-pole only
1
2
3
4
LAF361R
N = 100%
N2 = Oversized
Amperes
25
LA = Low ampere
36
Cu-(1)#14#3
Al-(1)#12#2
Neutral Option
6 = 600V
2 = 200V
Max.
Voltage
LAF321R
Table 24.1-18. Fusible Unit Selection Chart
Voltage
Max.
Amperes
Approximate
Weight lbs
Bus Style
35
Plug-In
Unit
Mechanical
Terminals
32
34
Table 24.1-19. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Dimensions
Plug-In
Unit
LA 3 6 4 R G N
33
Figure 24.1-35. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Dimensions
H, J or R
= 30
= 60
= 100
= 200
38
39
40
41
42
Figure 24.1-36. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Details
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
24.1-17
Sheet 24 069
Physical Data
Surge Protective Device Plug-in Units
22
The Pow-R-Flex plug-in device product offering includes

surge protective devices (SPD), which are ideal for buswayfed distribution systems. A transient voltage is a random
high-energy, short-duration electrical anomaly. These highenergy surges can disrupt, damage, or destroy sensitive
microprocessor-based equipment. Eaton has developed
the SPD series of products to ensure that quality power is
supplied to commercial, industrial, medical, institutional
and data-center facilities.
23
24
25
The SPD device not only protects against externally created

impulse transients, such as lightning, utility capacitor
switching and disturbances emitted by adjacent facilities, but
also provides needed protection against internal transients.
This type of transient is generated within a facilitys own
distribution system. Sources of internally generated or ringwave transients are imaging equipment, variable-frequency
drives, lighting dimmers, arc welders, and the switching on
and off of electrical distribution equipment.
26
27
28
The SPDs also offer units that filter repetitive electrical line
noise (EMI/RFI), which is defined as any unwanted electrical
signal that produces undesirable effects in the circuits of
sensitive electronic equipment or disturbances that are two
times peak voltage. The suppression of AC transients is
accomplished through the use of thermally protected metaloxide varisters (MOVs), which provide a low-impedance
path to divert surges away from loads. Electrical line noise
and ringing transients are eliminated by adding filtering
capacitors to the suppression device.
29
30
31
32
The benefits of combining SPDs and filtering are reduced

MOV stress (resulting in a longer life cycle), lower letthrough voltage, better noise attenuation levels and
increased reliability.
Because the SPD units are directly connected to the busway,
they are able to minimize let-through voltage and isolate
critical loads, which are fed from a protected busway run. Due
to the integrated design, the SPD plug-in units save the user
wall space and greatly reduce the installed project cost. The
SPD plug-in units are furnished with a breaker disconnect. For
catalog numbers and selection criteria, see Table 24.1-21.
33
34
Figure 24.1-37. SPD Plug-In Unit
35
36
Table 24.1-21. SPD Plug-In Unit Selection Chart
37
LABSPD 250 480Y 2 C

38
FixedDo Not
Change
FixedDo Not
Change
Voltage Code
Surge Rating
(kA/Phase)
50
80
100
120
160
200
250
300
400
CA08104001E
208Y = 208Y/120V (four-wire + ground)

240D = 240 Delta (three-wire + ground)
480D = 240 Delta (three-wire + ground)
600D = 240 Delta (four-wire + ground)
Option Code
1 = BasicDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the
N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate
the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire.
S = StandardDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of
the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral
wire, audible alarm with silence button, and Form C relay contact.
N = Standard + Surge CounterDual-colored LED per phase to indicate
protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, singlecolored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire, audible alarm with silence button, Form C
relay contact, EMI/RFI filtering providing up to 50 dB of noise attenuation from 10 kHz to 100 MHz, and surge counter with reset button.
39
40
41
42
43

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 070
Plug-In Unit Devices
22
Table 24.1-24. Receptacle Unit Physical Dimensions in Inches (mm)
23
24
25
26
27
28
Eatons unique receptacle plug-in unit design makes them

the most flexible receptacle units in the industry. Pow-R-Flex
receptacle plug-in units come fully assembled and wired,
reducing installation time. Each unit is built to order, based
upon receptacle type and rating combinations. Additionally,
each individual unit has been optimally phased balanced
and are also optimally phased balanced for the entire run,
based upon the combination of receptacle plug-in units on
the run. This eliminates the need to manually phase balance
during installation. They are UL 857 and CSA listed, and
come in seven different styles with two different breaker
options, using standard NEMA receptacle configurations.
Table 24.1-22. Maximum 240V Plug-In Units
Plug-In
Unit Type
Single
29
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
60
Maximum
Ampere
Rating/Circuit
Number
of Circuits
Receptacle
Mounting
60
Fixed/cord
Double
120
60
Fixed/cord
Quad
120
60
Fixed/cord
Plug-In
Unit Type
Voltage
Single
240
400
480
Double
Quad
31
32
33
Height
Depth
8.50 (215.9)
8.50 (215.9)
8.50 (215.9)
11.50 (292.1)
11.50 (292.1)
11.50 (292.1)
6.50 (165.1)
6.50 (165.1)
6.50 (165.1)
240
400
480
8.50 (215.9)
11.00 (279.4)
11.00 (279.4)
12.25 (311.2)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
6.50 (165.1)
6.50 (165.1)
6.50 (165.1)
240
400
480
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
10.00 (254.0)
11.50 (292.1)
11.50 (292.1)
5.50 (139.7)
7.25 (184.2)
7.25 (184.2)
Table 24.1-25. Receptacle Unit Short-Circuit Withstand Rating

(rms Symmetrical)
Plug-In
Unit Type
Breaker
Type
240V
400V
480V
Single
CH
FD
10,000A
22,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
Double
CH
FD
10,000A
22,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
Quad
CH
FD
10,000A
22,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
30
Width
25 kAIC is available for single-phase connectors at 240V.
Table 24.1-23. Maximum 400/480/600V Plug-In Units

Plug-In
Unit Type
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Maximum
Ampere
Rating/Circuit
Number
of Circuits
Receptacle
Mounting
Single
60
60
Cord
Double
120
60
Cord
Quad
240
60
Cord
Note: For receptacle options, see receptacle selection chart.
NEMA Receptacle Configurations
34
35
36
37
38
39
Table 24.1-26. Straight-Blade Receptacles

Phase
Voltage
Configuration
15A
20A
30A
50A
60A
Single-phase
125V
250V
277V
Two-pole, three-wire, grounded

515R
615R
715R
520R
620R
720R
530R
630R
650R
Three-phase
250V
Three-pole, four-wire, grounded
1515R
1520R
1530R
1550R
1560R
Table 24.1-27. Twist-Lock Receptacles

Phase
Voltage
Configuration
15A
20A
30A
50A
60A
Single-phase
125V
250V
277V

L515R
L615R
L7-15R
L520R
L620R
L720R
L530R
L630R
L730R
CS6360
CS8264
Three-phase
250V
208/120V
480/277V

Three-pole, five-wire, grounded
L1520R
L2120R
L2220R
L1530R
L2130R
L2230R
CS8364
40
Available in a duplex configuration.
Available in a duplex configuration.

California standard receptacles.
Table 24.1-28. Pin and Sleeve Receptacles (UL and IEC 309)
41
Phase
Voltage
Configuration
15A
20A
30A
50A
60A
Single-phase
125V
250V
277V

P5-20C
P6-20C
P7-20C
P5-30C
P6-30C
P7-30C
P5-60C
P6-60C
P7-60C
Three-phase
250V
208/120V
480/277V

P15-20C
P21-20C
P22-20C
P15-30C
P21-30C
P22-30C
P15-60C
P2160C
P2260C
42
43
Note: For other receptacle options, contact the factory. 480/277V receptacles may be applied at 400/230V.
CA08104001E
September 2011

Pow-R-Flex
24.1-19
Sheet 24 071

Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit
Single Receptacle Unit (240V max.)
Double Receptacle Unit (240V max.)
The fused duplex receptacle unit

shown in Figure 24.1-38 allows for
quick standard receptacle power at
any plug-in location along the busway
run. There are two options. The
LAFD62FD62F comes with two
NEMA 5-20R, 20A duplex standard
receptacles. The LAFU61FU61F comes
with two NEMA L5-15R duplex twistlock receptacles. Each unit is fused
protected at 20 and 15A and is 120V
single-phase, three-wire.
The single receptacle unit shown in

Figure 24.1-39 is configured to order
based upon the receptacle type and
rating. These units are three- phase
and can service single- or three-phase
loads, 120V, 240V and 208/120V. They
use Type CH plug-in (10 kAIC), singlepole, two-pole or three-pole breakers.
Each unit comes with one receptacle,
with the breaker sized per the
receptacle rating. Each receptacle can
be fixed mounted to the front of the
enclosure or cable mounted to a cord
drop coming out of the bottom of the
enclosure. See Figure 24.1-40. Cord
drop lengths may be 115 feet in 1-foot
increments. Consult NEC Sections
368, 400 and 645 for cord drop
applications.
The double receptacle unit shown in

based upon each receptacle type and
rating. These units are three-phase
Each unit comes with up to two
receptacles, with each breaker sized
per the receptacle rating. Each
receptacle can be fixed mounted to
the front of the enclosure or cable
mounted to a cord drop coming out
of the bottom of the enclosure. See
Figure 24.1-42. Cord drop lengths
may be 115 feet in 1-foot increments.
Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 24.1-38. Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit
33
Figure 24.1-39. Single Receptacle Unit

(Fixed Mounted)
Figure 24.1-41. 240V, Double Receptacle Unit

(Fixed Mounted)
34
35
36
37
38
39
Figure 24.1-42. 240V, Double Receptacle Unit

(Cord Mounted)
40
41
Figure 24.1-40. Single Receptacle Unit

(Cord Mounted)
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 072
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Quad Receptacle Unit (240V max.)
Single Receptacle Unit (600V max.)
Double Receptacle Unit (600V max.)
The quad receptacle unit shown in

based upon each receptacle type and
Each unit comes with up to four
receptacles, with each breaker
sized per the receptacle rating. Each
receptacle can be fixed mounted to
the front of the enclosure or cable
The single receptacle unit shown in

loads up to 600V maximum (120V,
240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V,
400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type
F-Frame bolt-on molded-case circuit
breakers are used in single-pole, twopole or three-pole configurations. Each
unit comes with one receptacle, with
the breaker sized per the receptacle
rating. Each receptacle is cable
The double receptacle unit shown in

240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V,
400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type
breakers are used in single-pole, twopole or three-pole configurations.
Each unit comes with two receptacles,
with the breakers sized per the
receptacle rating. Each receptacle is
cable mounted to a cord drop coming
out of the bottom of the enclosure.
See Figure 24.1-46. Cord drop lengths
Figure 24.1-45. 600V, Single Receptacle Unit
Figure 24.1-46. 600V Double Receptacle Unit
29
30
31
32
33
34
Figure 24.1-43. 240V, Quad Receptacle Unit

(Fixed Mounted)
35
36
37
38
39

(Cord Mounted)
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
September 2011

Pow-R-Flex
24.1-21
Sheet 24 073

Quad Receptacle Units (600V max.)
22
The quad receptacle unit shown in

240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V,
400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type
breakers are used in single-pole, twopole or three-pole configurations. Each
unit comes with up to four receptacles,
with the breakers sized per the
receptacle rating. Each receptacle is
cable mounted to a cord drop coming
out of the bottom of the enclosure.
See Figure 24.1-47. Cord drop lengths
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Pow-R-Flex
September 2011
Sheet 24 074
Installation Drawing Information
22
Installation Drawing Information
23
2.00
(0 6m)
2.00
14 00
24
25
2.00
(0.6m)
26
27
28
A07
2.00
(0.6m)
2.00
(0.6m)
2.00
(0.6m)
29
30
Style #
Or S.O. #
Req.
LVB01234-A01
LVB01234-A02
LVB01234-A03
BVD0892G11
BVD1274G12
LVB01234-A07
BVD7156G08
31
32
1
1
3
2
8
2
1
33
Figure 24.1-48. Sample Installation Drawing
34
35
36
After the layout approval process,

installation drawings will be provided
just prior to shipment of the busway
from the factory. A sample is illustrated
in Figure 24.1-48. The drawings
will contain a complete layout of the
entire busway installation and a bill of
material that includes the following:
37
1. The item number of each section,

which can be correlated with the
layout drawing.
38
2. A description of each section.
39
3. The style number of each section,

which can be correlated to the
nameplate information on
each section.
40
41
4. The quantity of each style

number required.
5. The height, width and weight

(per foot) of each ampere rating.
6. Location of F markings on
the busway.
7. Fitting reference drawings.
8. Electrical equipment/switchgear
locations and orientation.
9. Wall and floor locations.
10. The length of each section.
The installer should review the
installation drawings prior to and
during the installation process.
Please note that plug-in units are
generally not shown on the installation
drawings. The installer will also
receive installation instruction leaflets,
and operation and maintenance
manuals with the drawings.
42
43
CA08104001E

100-Ampere Busway
September 2011
24.2-1
Sheet 24 075
General Description
100A Busway
Construction
ensure a good low resistance joint

between electrical conductors of
adjacent sections.
Enclosure
100A Busway
General Description
Eatons 100A busway is an excellent
solution for supplying multiple small
blocks of power for any normal
commercial and industrial power
system. 100A busway is practical for
small shops, laboratories, classrooms
and light manufacturing. The flexibility
of 100A busway will reduce cost by
reducing installation time compared
to cable and conduit installations.
Eaton 100A busway consists of a
durable steel housing and silver-plated
copper rods for maximum use and
efficiency. The complete product
offering consists of straight sections
of plug-in busway, fittings, accessories
and plug-in units. 100A busway can
be used for three-phase 600V systems
and single-phase 240V systems.
The busway housing is made of

20 gauge steel and is painted ANSI 61
gray using a powder coat paint
process. The enclosure includes
10 plug-in outlets per 10 foot (3m)
length (five per side). Each plug-in
outlet provides complete polarization
of the plug-in outlet, ensuring proper
phasing, see Figure 24.2-1. All plug-in
outlets are usable at the same time.
The plug-in outlet is enclosed by a
removable steel knockout cover.
Replacement covers are available
for outlets no longer being used.
The conductors are firmly supported

by molded insulators on alternate
sides of the busway. Insulators are
the type through which it is possible
to fully isolate the stabs, as well as
afford extra protection in the event
of stresses due to fault. Insulators are
spaced to allow mounting of the
plug-in units opposite to each other
without interference.
Neutral
Conductor joints are made by means

of boltless pressure clips, which
require no assembly or adjustment
by the installer. The busway is not
dependent upon the cover screws
of the enclosure for maintaining the
proper mechanical pressure to
24
25
26
28
C Phase
29
B Phase
30
A Phase
31
Figure 24.2-1. Polarizing Plug Outlet
32
33
34
35
Standards
Eaton 100A busway meets the
requirements of NEMA, UL 857,
ANSI and IEEE, and is manufactured
in an ISO 9001 certified facility. The
busway is designed for 100A capacity
and is available for single-phase threewire, three-phase three-wire, and
three-phase four-wire applications.
A 50% internal copper ground bar is
provided as standard. The short-circuit
withstand rating is14 kAIC at 3 cycles.
23
27
Conductors
Electrical conductors are round silverplated copper rods 9/32 in diameter.
The conductors are enclosed between
two steel housings that are riveted
together in a solid assembly. See
Figure 24.2-2 for cross sectional detail.
22
36
37
38
5.00
(127.0)
39
40
4.00
(101.6)
1.00
(25.4)
Figure 24.2-2. Typical Joint Detail
CA08104001E
1.00
(25.4)
41
42
43

100-Ampere Busway
September 2011
Sheet 24 076
General Description
22
23
24
25
26
Joint Connections
Outlet Cover
100A joints are designed for quick and

easy assembly by simply snapping on
section of busway to another and then
securing them by running up the
captive cover screws.
Enclosure
Electrical connection is made by

special high-pressure spring clips
that firmly engage the conductors.
The enclosure connection is made
with a scarf lap type joint secured by
captive cover screws. See typical joint
detail in Figure 24.2-3.
Table 24.2-1. Plug-In Outlets
27
Bus Rod
Straight Length
Feet (m)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Number
of Outlets
28
10 (3.0)
5 (1.5)
3 (0.9)
29.50 (13.4)
14.75 (6.7)
8.85 (4.0)
10
6
4
29
2 (0.6)
1 (0.3)
5.90 (2.7)
3.75 (1.7)
2
2
30
31
32
33
34
35
Insulator
Table 24.2-2. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop

The table below gives line-to-line
voltage drop at rated current and
varying power factors.
Percent
Power Factor
Enclosure
Voltage
Drop
0
10
20
30
0.35
0.56
0.77
0.98
40
50
60
70
1.19
1.39
1.59
1.79
80
90
100
2.00
2.20
2.50
Figure 24.2-3. Cross-Sectional Detail
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

100-Ampere Busway
September 2011
24.2-3
Sheet 24 077
Construction
Straight Lengths
22
100A busway comes in lengths of

10 feet, 5 feet, 3 feet, 2 feet and 1 foot
(3m, 1.5m, 0.9m, 0.6m and 0.3m) with
plug-in outlets included in all lengths.
Table 24.2-1 shows the total plug-in
outlets for each length. All plug-in
outlets may be used simultaneously.
23
24
Plug-in outlets are made usable

by the removal of a steel knockout
cover. Replacement outlet covers are
available for covering exposed outlets
when a plug-in unit is relocated.
25
26
27
9.00
(228.6)
26.25
(666.8)
26.25
(666.8)
26.25
(666.8)
26.25
(666.8)
6.00
(152.4)
28
29
9.00
(228.6)
22.50
(571.5)
22.50
(571.5)
6.00
(152.4)
30
31
32
9.00
(228.6)
21.00
(533.4)
6.00
(152.4)
33
34
35
18.00
(457.2)
6.00
(152.4)
36
37
4.81
(122.2)
38
7.19
(182.6)
39
40
Figure 24.2-4. Typical Straight Length Detail
41
42
43
CA08104001E

100-Ampere Busway
September 2011
Sheet 24 078
Construction
22
23
24
25
26
Fittings
Elbows
There are three basic fittings to meet

every application need. These include
elbows, tees and cable tap boxes and
are described in the following pages.
dimensions of fittings are given from
the centerline of the busway.
Elbows are used to make 90 degree

changes in the direction/routing of
the busway runs. There are four
types available with each leg of the
elbow being 10 inches (254 mm) long,
measured from the centerline of the
busway to the centerline of the joint.
See Figure 24.2-6.
Upward
Rearward
Fittings in relationship to straight

lengths are described as upward,
downward, forward and rearward.
This relationship is shown in
Figure 24.2-5.
Forward
Downward
27
Figure 24.2-5. Fitting Relationship
28
29
10.00
(254.0)
CL Joint
30
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
31
10.00
(254.0)
32
33
CL Joint
34
35
36
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
Upward Elbow
Downward Elbow
37
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
38
39
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
40
41
CL Joint
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
42
CL Joint
43
Forward Elbow
Rearward Elbow
Figure 24.2-6. Elbows

CA08104001E

100-Ampere Busway
September 2011
24.2-5
Sheet 24 079
Construction
Tees
22
Tees are busway fittings used for

making T connections to the busway.
The four standard tees are: upward,
downward, forward and rearward.
Each leg of a tee is 10 inches (254 mm)
long, measured from the centerline
of the busway to the centerline of
the joint.
23
24
25
10.00
(254.0)
CLJoint
10.00
(254.0)
26
CL Joint
27
10.00
(254.0)
28
CL Joint
29
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
30
10.00
(254.0)
31
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
32
Upward Tee
33
Downward Tee
34
10.00
(254.0)
CL Joint
CL Joint
35
10.00
(254.0)
36
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
37
10.00
(254.0)
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
38
CL Joint
10.00
(254.0)
39
CL Joint
40
Forward Tee
Rearward Tee
41
Figure 24.2-7. Tees
42
43
CA08104001E

100-Ampere Busway
September 2011
Sheet 24 080
Construction
22
23
24
25
Cable Tap Boxes

The standard end cable tap box
mounts at either the left or the right
end of a busway straight length.
Knockouts are provided sized at 1.25,
1.50 and 2.00 inches (31.8, 38.1 and
50.8 mm). The center cable tap box
allows busway to be attached to the
right and left of the tap box. Knockout
configuration is the same as the end
cable tap box. Also available is a

plug-in cable tap box with stabs for
mounting at a plug-in outlet anywhere
along the busway run. Knockouts are
provided sized at 0.75, 1.00, 1.25, 1.50
and 2.00 inches (19.1, 25.4, 31.8, 38.1
and 50.8 mm). All tap boxes are rated
100A and include lugs for accepting
either copper or aluminum cable.
26
5.69
(144.5)
10.19
(258.8)
27
6.06
(154.0)
4.13
(104.9)
28
4.13
(104.9)
29
30
31
32
33
7.50
(190.5)
5.38
(136.7)
Neutral
2.63
(66.8)
Plug-in Cable Tap Box
End Cable Tap Box
34
35
6.00
(152.4)
12.00
(304.8)
36
37
Center Cable Tap Box
38
6.00
(152.4)
Figure 24.2-8. Cable Tap Boxes
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
September 2011

100-Ampere Busway
24.2-7
Sheet 24 081
Construction
End Closer
22
End closers are used for closing off the

end of a busway run. An end closer
will end at 4 inches (101.6 mm) to the
length of the busway run, measured
from the centerline of the joint to the
end of the end closer.
C Joint
L
23
24
4.00
(101.6)
Wall Flange
Wall flanges are used to fit around
the busway and close off the opening
made to allow the busway run to pass
through the wall. Wall flanges are
for cosmetic purposes only and, by
themselves, do not provide any type
of vapor or fire barrier. Wall openings
should be cut 0.50 inch (0.5 mm) wider
and taller than the busway.
25
Hangers
28
Hangers are included with the busway;

one for each 10-foot (3m) length of
the busway run. The busway is
suitable for supporting on 10-foot (3m)
centers when mounted edgewise.
The edgewise hanger easily slips
over the busway firmly holding the
busway on edge. The C clamp
hanger is used for wall mounting
or sway bracing. Customer supplied
angle iron must be used in conjunction
with the C clamp.
26
27
Figure 24.2-9. End Closer
29
3.75
(95.3)
30
31
7.25
(184.2)
32
33
7.25
(184.2)
34
35
3.75
(95.3)
36
37
Angle Iron
1.00
(25.4)
0.75
(19.1)
38
39
6.00
(152.4)
40
5.44
(138.2)
42
1.00
(25.4)
Edgewise Hanger
Figure 24.2-11. Hangers
CA08104001E
41
Wall Hanger
43

100-Ampere Busway
September 2011
Sheet 24 082
Plug-In Devices
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Plug-in Devices
Plug-in devices plug in through the insulated outlets of the
busway enclosure and stab onto the busway conductors.
They are available with both fusible and circuit breaker
overcurrent protection. Grounds for all plug-in devices are
ordered and shipped separately.
5.69
(144.5)
15.13
(384.3)
Fusible Plug-in Units

Fusible plug-in units are available in 240V and 600V service
ratings. Both offer 30, 60 and 100 ampere current ratings
with provisions for Class H fuses. See Figure 24.2-12.
4.00
(101.6)
Circuit Breaker Plug-in Units

PINFD
Circuit breaker plug-in units are available with provisions

for HQP circuit breakers rated 240V, 10100A, and FD circuit
breakers rated 600V, 15100A. Enclosures have provisions
to accept any combination of single-, two- and three-pole
circuit breakers up to three poles. An external operating
handle is available for hook stick or chain operation.
See Figure 24.2-13.
Neutral
5.69
(144.5)
7.63
(193.8)

The receptacle plug-in unit includes provisions for three
HQP or FD frame circuit breaker poles and provisions for
up to three conventional single gang outlets and blank
covers to fill unused spaces. The receptacle plug-in unit
does not come with circuit breakers, outlets or wiring.
See Figure 24.2-14.
3.13
(79.5)
PINQP
Neutral
32
Figure 24.2-13. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit
33
34
22.25
(565.2)
8.69
(221.0)
15.38
(390.7)
35
8.00
(203.2)
36
37
FAN363
LCNFD
38
4.69
(119.1)
39
Figure 24.2-12. Fusible Plug-In Unit
40
3.69
(93.7)
13.25
(336.6)
3.13
(79.5)
41
LCNQP
42
43
5.69
(144.5)
Figure 24.2-14. Receptacle Plug-In Units

CA08104001E

100-Ampere Busway
September 2011
24.2-9
Sheet 24 083
Product Selection
Product Selection
22
Table 24.2-3. 100A BuswayCopper (Includes 50% Internal Ground Bar)

Description
600V Max.
FN 277/480V
Single-Phase, Three-Wire
120/240V
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
CST13G
CST135G
CST133G
CST132G
CST131G
CST14G
CST145G
CST143G
CST142G
CST141G
CST13NG
CST13N5G
CST13N3G
CST13N2G
CST13N1G
CFE13G
CRE13G
CUE13G
CDE13G
CFE14G
CRE14G
CUE14G
CDE14G
CFE13NG
CRE13NG
CUE13NG
CDE13NG
CFT13G
CRT13G
CUT13G
CDT13G
CFT14G
CRT14G
CUT14G
CDT14G
CFT13NG
CRT13NG
CUT13NG
CDT13NG
Straight LengthsFeet (m)

10 (3)
5 (1.5)
3 (0.9)
2 (0.6)
1 (0.3)
Elbows
Forward
Rearward
Upward
Downward
Tees
Forward
Rearward
Upward
Downward
Plug-in
End
Center
24
25
26
27
28
29
Table 24.2-4. Cable Tap Boxes

Description
23
Three-Wire or Four-Wire
Ground (If Required)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
30
PIB14
EB14
CBIB14G
PIGS100
GL100
(Included)
31
Table 24.2-5. Accessories

Description
Catalog Number
End closer
Outlet cover
Edgwise hanger
C clamp hanger
Slip-on wall flange
EC1
OC1
EH1
FH1
WF1
32
33
34
Table 24.2-6. Fusible Plug-In Units
35
Ampere
Rating
Voltage
Rating
Fusible Enclosure
Ground (If Required)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
30
60
100
240
240
240
FAN321
FAN322
FAN323
PIGS100
PIGS100
PIGS100
36
30
60
100
600
600
600
FAN361
FAN362
FAN363
PIGS100
PIGS100
PIGS100
37
38
Table 24.2-7. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units

Ampere
Rating
1550
15100
Breaker
Frame
QUICKLAG HQP
FD, EHD, FDB
Circuit Breaker
Enclosure
Receptacle
Enclosure
Ground
(If Required)
External Handle (Required

for Hook-Stick Operation)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
PINQP
PINFD
LCNQP
LCNFD
PIGS100
PIGS100
HMQP
HMFD
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
25.0-1
January 2015
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25 001
Contents
22
Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Equipment
Transfer SwitchGeneral Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-2
Transfer SwitchApplication Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-4
ATC Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-6
Contactor-Based Designs
Automatic Open Transition, 401600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-1
Automatic Closed Transition, 401200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-5
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 401600 A, Dual Drawout . . . . . . . 25.1-8
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 401200 A, Fixed Bypass . . . . . . . 25.1-14
Breaker-Based Designs
Molded-Case SwitchesManual Wallmount, 301000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-1
Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic Wallmount, 301000 A . . . . . 25.2-4
Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic Wallmount, 301000 A . . . . . . . . . 25.2-7
Maintenance Bypass Switches, 1001000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-12
Magnum-Based Designs
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-1
Magnum Drawout Transfer Switch, 2005000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-3
Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch, 2005000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-3
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch, 2005000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-10
ATC Controllers
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-1
ATC-100 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-5
ATC-300+ Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-7
ATC-900 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-10
Standard and Optional Features
Standard and Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-1
Feature Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-17
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-24
Appendix AkW Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-25
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
MTS Manual Transfer Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16496A Section 23.36.13.01
ATS Contactor with ATC-300+ Controller . . . . . Section 16496B Section 26.36.23.01
ATS Contactor with ATC-900 Controller . . . . . . Section 16496C Section 26.36.23.03
ATS Molded-Case with ATC-300+ Controller. . Section 16496D Section 26.36.23.05
ATS Molded-Case with ATC-900 Controller . . . Section 16496E Section 26.36.23.07
ATS Magnum with ATC-900 Controller . . . . . . Section 16496F Section 26.36.23.09
ATS Maintenance Bypass Transfer Switch. . . . Section 16496G Section 26.36.13.15
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Automatic Transfer Switch Family
CA08104001E
25.0-2 Transfer Switches

January 2015
Sheet 25 002
Automatic Transfer SwitchesGeneral Description
22
1. Power switching device to shift the

load circuits to and from the
power source.
23
2. Transfer Logic Controller to

monitor the condition of the power
sources and provide the control
signals to the power switching
device and initiate the back
generator startup.
24
25
26
Automatic Transfer Switch Family
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
UtilityGenerator
The three basic components of a

typical transfer switch are:
General Description
Eatons automatic transfer switches are
reliable, rugged, versatile and compact
assemblies for transferring essential
loads and electrical distribution
systems from one power source
to another.
Transfer switches are normally
supplied in stand-alone enclosures.
Eaton has the capability to integrate
transfer switches into other Eaton
distribution assemblies. See the
following table for a list of
integrated solutions.
Table 25.0-1. Product Description
Product
Type
Tab
Reference
Magnum DS switchgear
Pow-R-Line switchboards
Motor control centers
Panelboards
20
21
29
22
Note: For information on Transfer

Switch Panels, refer to CA08100002E,
Residential and Light Commercial Catalog,
Volume 1, Tab 3.
Design Description
A transfer switch is a critical component
of any emergency or standby power
system. When the normal (preferred)
source of power is lost, a transfer
switch quickly and safely shifts the load
circuit from the normal source of power
to the emergency (alternate) source of
power. This permits critical loads to
continue running with minimal or no
outage. After the normal source of
power has been restored, the retransfer
process returns the load circuit to the
normal power source.
Transfer switches are traditionally

applied between a utility and a
generator set for emergency and
standby power systems.
Generator
Breaker
Service
Disconnect
3. Control power source to

supply operational power to the
controller and switching device.
All Eaton transfer switches are
designed to meet the requirements set
forth by UL 1008 and are 100% rated
switches. Eaton builds contactor-based
design switches, molded-case switch
(or breaker-based) design switches,
and Magnum power-case switch
design switches.
UL 1008 Endurance Testing

The importance of specifying a
UL 1008 transfer switch can be seen
in Table 25.0-2. When specifying any
UL 1008 transfer switch, you can be
assured that the switch has met
and passed the following
endurance testing.
ATS
Load
Figure 25.0-1. Standard Application

UtilityGenerator
GeneratorGenerator
Transfer switches are sometimes
applied between two generator sets
for prime power use, often in remote
installations. In such applications,
source power is periodically alternated
between the generator sets to equally
share run-time.
UL 1008 Life Expectancy

Transfer switch applications typically
require a plant exerciser once a
week or once a month. Table 25.0-3
demonstrates the life expectancy
operating the UL 1008 switch once a
week for the life of the switch.
Utility
G
Generator
Breaker
G
Generator
Breaker
ATS
Table 25.0-2. UL 1008 Endurance Testing

ATS
Rating
(Amperes)
Rate of
With
Without Total
Operation Current Current
per Minute
Load
0300
301400
401800
8011600
16014000
1
1
1
6000
4000
2000
1000
6000
4000
3000
0.5
0.25
1500
1000
1500
2000
3000
3000
Figure 25.0-2. Standard Application

GeneratorGenerator
Table 25.0-3. UL 1008 Life Expectancy

ATS
Rating
(Amperes)
Minimum Life
Operations Expectancy
per Year
in Years
With
Current
Applied
Life
Expectancy
in Years
Without
Current
Applied
0300
301400
401800
52
52
52
115
76
38
115
76
57
8011600
16014000
52
52
28
19
57
57
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
25.0-3
Sheet 25 003
Transfer Switch Types
Mounting Type
Although an automatic transfer is the

most common type of transfer, transfer
switches have the following types.
Fixed-mount switchMost transfer

switches use a fixed-mounted power
device. For contactor-based designs
and breaker-based designs, the
transfer switch contactor or moldedcase switch is a fixed-mounted design.
Individual switching devices may not
be removed from the circuit without
breaking hard connections to bus bars.
Switch Types
Manual transferThis type of transfer
is a non-automatic transfer switch
manually initiated and manually
operated. There is no motor operator
or solenoid to initiate the transfer. The
operator needs to open the enclosure
door and operate the manual handle.
Manual transfer is available only on a
breaker-based design. Service entrance
ratings are not available on manual
transfer breaker-based designs.
Non-automatic transferThis type
of transfer is manually initiated, but
electrically operated via the solenoid in
a contactor-based design and the motor
operator in a breaker-based design.
Automatic transferThis type of
transfer takes place automatically
per the programmable settings in
the ATS controller. The ATS controller
senses source availability and when
the programmed conditions are met,
initiates a command to start the
transfer including the generator start
command (when transferring from
a utility to a generator source). An
automatic transfer switch can be
configured to perform a utility-toutility transfer or a generator-togenerator transfer (provided the
ATS controller has this capability).
Bypass isolation transfer switch
This type of transfer switch includes
an automatic transfer switch and
also includes the bypass switch that
allows the capability to transfer the
load to the bypass switch without
interrupting the power.
Maintenance bypass transfer switch
A maintenance bypass transfer switch
is a manually (manually initiated and
electrically operated) initiated transfer
switch used for specific applications
for a UPS.
Drawout mount switchBoth

contactor-based and Magnum-based
transfer switches have optional drawout
capability. Magnum ATSs have optional
drawout of both Source 1 and Source 2
Magnum power case switch or breaker.
Bypass isolation switches have drawout
ATS switches. In addition the bypass
isolation contactor design has an
optional dual drawout design. Magnum
bypass isolation transfer switches are
supplied as standard with drawout of
all the power-case switches.
Delayed transitionThis is a breakbefore-make or open transition that

also has a center off or neutral
position with a programmable time
delay setting for the neutral position.
The three position transfer switch is
either closed on Source 1, closed on
Source 2, or in a center off, neutral
position (not closed on either source).
Delayed transition with load voltage
decayThis is a delayed transition with
the optional feature to delay in the
neutral position to point where the load
voltage decays to a programmable
voltage level. When the load voltage
level reaches the programmable set
point, the transfer from the neutral
position initiates.
Closed transitionThis is a makebefore-break transfer. Both sources
are connected to the load for less than
100ms before the break occurs. The
two power sources have to be in
synchronism and be good sources
for the transfer to take place. These
programmable settings for relative
phase angle difference, frequency
and voltage difference are made in
the ATS controller.
Transition Type
Open transitionThis is a breakbefore-make transfer. There is a
definite break in power as the load
s taken off one source and connected
to the other source.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Open in-phase transitionThis is a

break-before-make transfer. There
is a definite break in power as the load
is taken off one source and connected
to the other source. The ATS controller
allows the transfer only when the
phase difference between the two
sources is near zero. The two position
transfer switch is closed on Source 1 or
closed on Source 2.
33
34
35
Open in-phase with default to time

delay neutralbreak-before-make
operation using an in-phase monitor
for source synchronization. If the
in-phase does not initiate a transfer
within a programmable time delay,
then the transfer will default to a time
delay neutral type of transfer.
36
37
38
Table 25.0-4. Transition Types

Transition
22
Contactor-Based
Breaker-Based
Magnum-Based
Two Position
Three Position
Open
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Open in-phase
Yes
No
No
Yes
Open in-phase default TDN
No
Yes
No
Yes
Delayed time delay neutral
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delayed load voltage decay
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Closed
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 004
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Installation Types
Built-in Protection
EmergencyA system legally required

and classified as emergency by
municipal, state, federal or other
governmental agencies. Automatically
transfers from the normal source to the
emergency source and cannot exceed
10 seconds and occurs automatically.
Meets the requirements of NEC
(NFPA 70 Article 700).
All Eaton molded-case switches are

self protected, such that under
extreme fault conditions, the switch
will open before destroying itself.
This feature allows Eaton to offer
Maintenance-Free Contacts on
the molded-case transfer switch.
The molded-case switches have
instantaneous magnetic trip units
installed in each switch. These trips
are not accessible once installed by
the factory to eliminate field tapering.
The trips are set to a minimum of
12 to 15 times the rated current of the
molded-case device, well above any
coordination set points. This means
they will not interfere with the normal
operation of the distribution system.
Legally requiredLegally required

systems are those that are so classified
by municipal, state, federal or other
governmental agencies. Automatically
supply power to selected loads, other
than those already classified as
emergency. The transfer from normal
power to the emergency power
cannot exceed 60 seconds and
occurs automatically.
Separately Derived and Non-Separately

Derived Systems (Switching the Neutral)
Separately derived systems are
discussed in Article 250.20(D) of the
NEC. The code says that a separately
derived system is where the alternate
source is provided with a grounded
conductor (neutral) that is not solidly
interconnected with the service
supplied grounded conductor
(neutral). The NEC does not mandate
the need for creating a separately
derived system, but does provide
guidance on how it is done. Basically
the ATS will switch the neutral (fourpole ATS) to keep the two systems
totally isolated. This may be done to
allow Ground Fault Sensing to work
properly, but a separately derived
system may be created for other
reasons left up to the engineer. If
the desire is to bond the generator
neutral to ground at the generator,
then a separately derived system is
being created, and the neutral in the
four-pole ATS must be switched.
OptionalGenerally, supplied to
selected loads either automatically
or manually. There is no time limit
associated with the transfer.
Article 702.2 is the only article that
allows manual transfer switches.
32
Service Entrance Rated Transfer Switches
33
Eaton provides UL 1008 service

entrance rated transfer switches using
the breaker-based designs or the
Magnum power-case switch designs.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Modifying the molded-case switch in

the transfer switch by adding trip units
and optional ground fault, along with
adding the service entrance option
eliminates the need for separate
upstream disconnect devices and their
respective power interconnections.
This means the automatic transfer
switch (ATS) is installed directly at
the point of service entrance, saving
valuable space and cost.
Typical Transfer Switch Installation
Transfer Switch Installation Rated

for Service Entrance
Utility Service
Utility Service
Service
Disconnect
Service
Disconnect
G
Generator
Breaker
ATS
Generator
Breaker
Load
ATS
Load
Figure 25.0-3. Service Entrance Rated Transfer Switches
Example: 400 A ATS with 500 A T/M Breaker
Eaton service entrance rated transfer

switches have a 100% integrated
rating. The ATS as well as the supplied
breaker may be applied at 100% of the
ATS rating, thus eliminating the need
to consider any de-rating factors based
upon the breaker rating.
400 FLA x 1.25 = 500 A Breaker

Compare 400 AATS and 500 A LD Breaker
400 A ATS
500 A
HLD Breaker
5
41
Misconception: Breaker
Type Switches Susceptible
ATS Trips to Nuisance Tripping
Breaker Trips
ATS Ok
Time
(Minutes)
Reality: Upstream Breaker

Will Trip Before ATS MCS
Trips When Overcurrent
is <7200 A
42
Breaker Ok
43
2 3 4 5
Current x 1000
10
Figure 25.0-4. Built-in Protection

1
Magnetic trip 12 x frame rating.
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.0-5
Sheet 25 005

Both the Eaton breaker-based and
contactor-based type ATS in all ratings
are available with an optional switched
neutral. This can be done for either
single-phase (three-pole) or threephase (four-pole) applications. The
switched neutral pole is fully rated,
meaning it has Withstand, Interrupt
and Closing ratings identical to the
power contacts. The neutral pole is
operated on a common shaft with
the power contacts, thereby ensuring
simultaneous opening and closing
of the neutral. Eaton provides a fully
rated switched neutral or fourth pole.
Separately
Derived
System
Bonding
Jumper
Equipment
Grounding N
Grounding
Conductor
Electrode
Conductor
Service
Equipment
G
N
Three-Pole
Transfer
Switch
Grounding
Electrode
Nearby
Figure 25.0-5. Separately Derived System
G
N
Not a Separately
Derived System
Equipment
Grounding
Conductor
N
Two-Pole Transfer
Switch
N Load
Figure 25.0-6. Non-Separately Derived System
Short-Time Ratings
The Eaton Magnum ATS is UL listed
with a UL 1008 short-time rating. This is
a true withstand rating, with a viability
temperature rise test performed at
the end of the short-circuit fault per
UL 1008. The short-time rating has
three components: voltage, current
and time. These are published in the
literature on the ATS, and the individual
rating components cannot be exceeded.
(In other words, it is not acceptable
to allow double the current rating for
half the time.) The components are
absolute, and the ATS must be applied
downstream from a breaker that will not
allow those ratings to be exceeded.
Eaton has had short-time ratings on
ATS products since 2002.
CA08104001E
Eaton can supply, and in fact, highly

recommends the use of an SPD
(surge protective device) on Service
Equipment Rated transfer Switches.
The SPDs should only be applied on
the utility side of the ATS and should
be ordered for the correct system
voltage on which they are to be used.
SPDs are rated in kA, which is simply a
longevity measure. The kA rating on
an SPD has nothing to do with available fault current. Eaton recommends
that for services 800A and above,
a minimum 250 kA rated SPD be
supplied. For applications below
800 A, a 160 kA device is suggested. Of
course there are other factors that may
affect the decision as to the rating, and
as always, the final decision is up to
the engineer. And remember that an
SPD is a transient/surge protective
device; it is NOT an overvoltage
protective device. An overvoltage
condition (such as the backup
generator overvoltage) will damage
the SPD.
Breaker-Based Versus
Contactor-Based Considerations
N Load
Service
Equipment
Surge Protection
Eaton builds both molded-case switch

(breaker-based) designs up to 1000 A
and contactor-based designs up to
1200 A. Both designs are 100% rated
designs, have the UL 1008 approval
and carry the UL 1008 label. Application
considerations may favor one design
over the other.
Low amperage applications requiring
a high withstand rating are more readily met with the breaker-based design.
The breaker-based design meets 65 kA
withstand ratings for many of the
sizes. Applications requiring a service
entrance rating are more readily met
with a breaker-based design. An
overcurrent trip is added to the
molded-case switch without increasing
the footprint and the entire SE rated
switch is UL 1008 approved. The Eaton
breaker-based designs are inherently
delayed transition type and this
transition type is more suited to
highly inductive loads, dual utility
applications, and where older AFDs
may be used downstream.
Contactor-based designs tend to have

a smaller footprint due to less moving
parts and a smaller power contactor.
Contactor-based ATSs can be applied
for those applications not requiring a
higher withstand rating. Applications
requiring open in-phase transfer are
more suited to two-position contactorbased designs. A two-position contactorbased design will operate with a shorter
dead bus time than a comparable
breaker-based design. This shorter dead
bus time enables the ATS controller to
perform the open in-phase transfer. In
applications where delayed transition
is required, a three-position contactorbased design may be used.
Selective coordination of emergency
and legally required systems may
involve intentional delay of breakers
upstream of the ATS. In these
applications, the ATS withstand may
require short-time ratings. Eatons
Magnum ATS is rated for 85 kAIC
up to 30 cycles.
Fully Rated Fourth Pole (Switched Neutral)

Eaton provides a fully rated switched
neutral or fourth pole, meaning that
the fourth pole has withstand, interrupt and closing ratings identical to the
power contacts. The neutral pole is
operated on a common shaft with the
power contacts, thereby ensuring
simultaneous opening and closing
of the switched neutral.
Eatons fully rated fourth pole
eliminates typical problems with
a three-pole overlapping neutral:
Eliminates nuisance ground trips

at the main due to circulating
zero sequence harmonic current
between sources
Reduction in ground current due

to isolated single ground point
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
lowers arc-flash levels and reduces

generator damage
38
Eliminates potential for faults

to propagate across overlapping
39
neutral; fully rated fourth pole will

handle as a normal operation
22
Does not generate voltages that

exceed normal phase voltage
Note: For more detail, reference Eaton

White Paper IA08700002E.
40
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 006
Selection Guide
22
Transfer Switch Selection Guide

Table 25.0-5. Transfer Switch Product FamilyContactor-Based Design
23
Description
Switch Type
Open
24
Contactor-based transfer
switch design
Automatic
non-automatic
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
ATC-100 1 Fixed
ATC-300+
ATC-900
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
40
80
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4X
NEMA 12
ATC-900
Fixed
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
40
80
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
Transition Type
Delayed
Closed
Controller
Type
Mounting
Type
25
26
27
See Page 25.1-1
28
Contactor-based transfer
switch design
Automatic
29
30
31
See Page 25.1-5
32
Contactor-based bypass
isolation transfer
switch design
Automatic
bypass isolation
ATC-300+
ATC-900
Dual
Drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4X
NEMA 12
Automatic
bypass isolation
ATC-300+
ATC-900
Fixed
Bypass
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4X
NEMA 12
33
34
35
See Page 25.1-8
36
Contactor-based bypass
isolation transfer
switch design
37
38
39
40
See Page 25.1-14

1
Up to 400 A only.
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.0-7
Sheet 25 007
Selection Guide
Table 25.0-6. Transfer Switch Product FamilyBreaker-Based Design
Description
Switch Type
Transition Type
Open
Molded-case
switch-based design
Manual
Delayed
Closed
Controller
Type
Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
No
controller
Fixed
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
480
480/277
240
240/120
208/120
100
150
225 2
300 2
400 2
600 2
800 2
1000 2
See Page 25.2-1

Molded-case
switch-based design
Non-automatic
No
controller
Fixed
See Page 25.2-4

Molded-case
switch-based design
Automatic
ATC-100 1 Fixed
ATC-300+
ATC-900
See Page 25.2-7

Maintenance bypass
Manual
No
controller
Fixed
22
23
24
25
26
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
27
28
29
30
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
31
32
33
34
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4X
35
36
37
See Page 25.2-12

1
2
38
Up to 400 A only.
Contact factory for availability.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 008
Product Selection
22
Table 25.0-7. Transfer Switch Product FamilyMagnum-Based Design

Description
Switch Type
Transition Type
Open
23
Power-case switch
Magnum-based design
Delayed
Closed
Controller
Type
Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
No
controller
Fixed or
drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000 1
5000 1
2, 3, 4
Open 2
NEMA 1behind
NEMA 1thru
NEMA 3R
Non-automatic
Automatic
ATC-900
Fixed or
drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
2, 3, 4
Open 2
NEMA 1behind
NEMA 1thru
NEMA 3R
ATC-900
Drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
5000
2, 3, 4
NEMA 1behind
NEMA 1thru
NEMA 3R
24
25
26
27
See Page 25.3-1

Power-case switch
Magnum-based design
28
29
30
31
See Page 25.3-1

Power-case switch Magnum- Automatic
bypass isolation based design bypass isolation
32
33
34
35
See Page 25.3-10

1
2
Drawout only.
Up to 3200 A.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Design
January 2015
25.1-1
Sheet 25 009
Automatic Open Transition, 401600 AGeneral Description
Automatic Open Transition,

401600 A
General Description
Features
The automatic open transition

contactor-based transfer switch
is the most basic design that will
provide a fully functioning automatic
transfer switch.
Standard Features
with ATC-300+ Controller
The power switching operation of

Eatons contactor-based transfer
switches may be separated into the
following key categories of:
Contactor-Based ATS
with ATC-300+ Controller
Open in-phase transitionbreakbefore-make operation using an

in-phase monitor for source
synchronization
Open in-phase with default to time
delay neutralbreak-before-make
operation using an in-phase monitor
for source synchronization. If the
in-phase does not initiate a transfer
within a programmable time delay,
then the transfer will default to a
time delay neutral type of transfer
Open delayed transitionbreakbefore-make operation using a
programmable time delay (true
neutral position)
The open in-phase transition uses a
two-position mechanism and the open
delayed transition uses a three-position
mechanism. The mechanism used to
operate the Eaton electrical contactor
is a momentarily energized solenoid
consisting of a stationary core and a
moving core that is magnetically
driven by an electrical coil.
The mechanism can be electrically and
mechanically operated. The design is
such that the mechanism is inherently
interlocked so that the device cannot
be closed on the Source 1 and
Source 2 at the same time under any
circumstances. When switching from
Source 1 to Source 2, or Source 2 to
Source 1, the mechanism will only
allow a break-before-make operation.
These contactor-based designs can be
applied with the ATC-100 controller up
to 400 A. The ATC-300+ controller can
be applied for applications 401600 A.
Applications needing communication
capability require the ATC-300+ with
communication enabled or the
ATC-900 controller.
Optional Features
An automatic open transition transfer
switch may be used for those applications where emergency backup power
is required, but a momentary loss of
power is acceptable on the retransfer
from emergency to normal.
CA08104001E
Auxiliary relay contacts:

Source 1 present 2NO and 2NC
Switch position indication contacts:
Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC
Source 1 and Source 2 sensing:
Undervoltage/underfrequency
Overvoltage/overfrequency
Three-phase rotation protection
Three-phase voltage unbalance
Pre-transfer signal contacts 1NO/1NC
(with three-position mechanism)
Go to emergency (Source 2)
Seven field-programmable
time delays
LCD-based display for programming,
system diagnostics and Help
message display
Mimic diagram with source
available and connected
LED indication
Time-stamped history log
System TEST pushbutton
Programmable plant exerciser
OFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval
selectable run time 0600 minutes
no load/load with fail-safe
Available surge suppression device
for power/controller, engine start
circuit, phone and cable connections
Space heater with thermostat
Eaton IQ and Power Xpert
series metering
Stainless steel cover for controller
Open in-phase transition, time delay
neutral or in-phase with a default to
time delay neutral transfer
ATC-100 and ATC-900
controllers available
Modbus RTU via RS-485
Source 2 inhibit
Manual retransfer to normal
Remote annunciator with control
Ethernet communication
(PXG 400 Gateway)
Commercial Design Highlights
UL 1008 front access

High withstand and closing ratings
Compact design
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Contactor-Based Design
January 2015
Sheet 25 010
Automatic Transition, 401200 ATechnical Data
22
Technical Data
Table 25.1-1. UL 1008 Short Circuit Withstand and Close-On Ratings (kA)
23
UL 1008
Ampere Rating
Mechanism
24
40, 80, 100

150, 200
225, 260, 400
25
40, 80, 100, 150, 200

225, 260, 400
600, 800, 1000, 1200
1600
26
27
28
29
30
31
480 V
600 V
3-Cycle
Specific Breaker
3-Cycle
Specific Breaker
Specific Fuse
C2
C2
C2
10,000
10,000
30,000
30,000
30,000
50,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
35,000
100,000 1
100,000
200,000
C3, C5
C3, C5
C3, C5
C3, C5
30,000
30,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
22,000
50,000
50,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000 1
Specific fuse rating at 480 V only.
Table 25.1-2. UL 1008 Ratings

Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
40
80
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 4X
32
200 A ATS with ATC-300+ Controller
33
Manual Operating
Mechanism
34
Normal
Power Source
Logic
Panel
35
Transfer
Mechanism
36
Load Lugs
38
39
Emergency
Power
Source
Neutral
Connections
37
1200 A ATS with

ATC-300+ Controller
1600 A ATS with

ATC-300+ Controller
Voltage
Selection
and
Transformer
Panel
Power
Panel
40
41
Typical Contactor-Based ATS 100400 A
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.1-3
Sheet 25 011
Automatic Transition, 401200 ADimensions
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
22
Table 25.1-3. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 401200 A Open Transition

(See Figure 25.1-7 and Figure 25.1-8)
Ampere
Rating
Enclosure
A (Height)
B (Width)
C (Depth)
Load Side, Normal

and Standby Source
Neutral
Connection
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
40100
at 480 V 1
N1, N12, N3R

N4X
N1, N12, N3R
N4X
N1, N12, N3R
N4X
N1, N12, N3R
N4X
N1, N12, N3R
38.68 (982.5)
37.50 (952.5)
38.68 (982.5)
37.50 (952.5)
38.68 (982.5)
37.50 (952.5)
52.00 (1321.0)
52.00 (1321.0)
52.00 (1321.0)
18.31 (465.1)
17.50 (444.5)
18.31 (465.1)
17.50 (444.5)
18.31 (465.1)
17.50 (444.5)
19.81 (503.2)
21.00 (533.4)
19.81 (503.2)
13.34 (338.8)
14.34 (364.2)
13.34 (338.8)
14.34 (364.2)
13.34 (338.8)
14.34 (364.2)
16.75 (425.5)
16.75 (425.5)
16.75 (425.5)
(3) #141/0
(3) #141/0
(3) #141/0
(3) #141/0
(3) 1/0250 kcmil
(3) 1/0250 kcmil
(3) 1/0250 kcmil
(3) 1/0250 kcmil
(6) 250500 kcmil
156 (71)
156 (71)
164 (74)
164 (74)
164 (74)
164 (74)
260 (118)
260 (118)
260 (118)
N4X
52.00 (1321.0)
21.00 (533.4)
16.75 (425.5)
(6) 250500 kcmil
260 (118)
N1, N3R
79.41 (2017.0)
29.19 (741.4)
22.46 (570.5)
(1) #142/0
(1) #142/0
(1) #142/0
(1) #142/0
(1) #6250 kcmil
(1) #6250 kcmil
(1) #6250 kcmil
(1) #6250 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 3/0600 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 3/0600 kcmil
(4) 1/0750 kcmil
N12, N4X
84.75 (2152.7)
N1, N3R
79.41 (2017.0)
N12, N4X
84.75 (2152.7)
29.00 (737.0) three-pole 24.26 (616.2)

29.00 (737.0) four-pole
25.25 (641.4) three-pole 22.46 (570.5)
29.19 (741.4) four-pole
29.00 (737.0) three-pole 24.26 (616.2)
29.00 (737.0) four-pole
40100
at 600 V 1
150200
at 480 V 1
150200
at 600 V 1
225400
at 480 V 1
2251200
at 600 V 2
6001200
at 480 V 2
1
2
(4) 1/0750 kcmil

(4) 1/0750 kcmil
(4) 1/0750 kcmil
23
24
25
26
27
(12) 1/0750 kcmil 600 (272) three-pole

650 (295) four-pole
(12) 1/0750 kcmil 700 (318)
750 (340)
(12) 1/0750 kcmil 600 (272) three-pole
650 (295) four-pole
(12) 1/0750 kcmil 700 (318)
750 (340)
Wallmount.
Floor standingheight dimension includes the bottom bracket.
B
G
G
13.29
(337.6)
C
Neutral
6.11
(155.2)
68.59
(1742.2)
29
30
31
7.75
(196.8)
28
32
Top of
Lugs on
Power Panel
33
34
13.13
(333.5)
Normal
35
36
55.12
(1400.0)
37
Front View
Side View
Emergency
43.23
(1098.1)
Figure 25.1-8. Automatic, Non-Automatic

Up to 400 A Wallmount Outline NEMA1
and NEMA 3R
28.09
(713.5)
25.69
(652.5)
Load
3.94
(100.0)
3.94
(100.0)
Front View
3.68
(93.5)
9.60
(43.9)
13.13
(333.5)
Side View
Figure 25.1-7. Automatic, Non-Automatic 6001200 A Outline NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
CA08104001E
39
40
10.37
(263.4)
38
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 012
22
23
24
Table 25.1-4. 1600 A Transfer Switch

Ampere
Rating
Enclosure
A
(Height)
B
(Width)
C
(Depth)
G
(Horizontal)
H
(Vertical)
Load Side, Normal

and Standby Source
Neutral
Connection
Weight
Lbs (kg)
1600 A at
480 V 1
N1
90.00
(2286.0)
40.00
(1016.0)
28.73
(729.7)
(4) 1/0750 kcmil
(12) 1/0750 kcmil
730 (331) three-pole

830 (377) four-pole
N3R
90.72
(2304.3)
40.35
(1024.9)
43.34
(1100.8)
(4) 1/0750 kcmil
(12) 1/0750 kcmil
780 (354) three-pole

830 (377) four-pole
Freestanding.
25
29.22
(742.2)
40.35
(1024.9)
Normal
Power Cable
Connections
26
Normal
Power Cable
Connections
27
62.51
(1587.8)
28
29
90.00
(2286.0)
90.69
(2303.5)
Emergency
Power Cable
Connections
26.49 (672.8)
24.13 (612.9)
26.49 (672.8)
24.13 (612.9)
Load Cable
Connections
31
32
62.51
(1587.8)
Emergency
Power Cable
Connections
30
40.00
(1016.0)
Front View
Load Cable
Connections
0.00
7.22 (183.4)
40.00
(1016.0)
10.72
(272.3)
33
28.73
(729.7)
Front View
Side View
34
47.59
(1208.8)
3.14
(79.8)
Figure 25.1-9. Automatic, Non-Automatic Open Transition

NEMA 1 Enclosure
0.00
7.22
(183.4)
10.72
(272.3)
43.34
(1100.8)
Side View
Figure 25.1-10. Automatic, Non-Automatic Open Transition

NEMA 3R Enclosure
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.1-5
Sheet 25 013
Automatic Transition, 401200 AGeneral Description
Automatic Closed Transition,

401200 A
Contactor-Based ATS
with ATC-900 Controller
General Description
Eatons closed transition contactorbased automatic transfer switch is
designed to avoid intentional interruption of power when both sources of
power are available by momentarily
paralleling both sources.
The switches are equipped with the
Eaton ATC-900 controller that provides
operational simplicity and field
configuration capability, coupled
with enhanced diagnostic and
troubleshooting capability.
The make-before-break contact
sequence coupled with Eatons ATC-900
provides a transfer switch that is useful
in critical standby power applications
available from 40 to 1200 A.
Features
A transfer switch designed for closed

transition has make-before-break
contacts that require the normal and
alternate sources to be synchronized.
The source contacts on Eatons
CTC9 will parallel for 100 ms or less.
The ATC-900 provides all-phase
undervoltage, underfrequency,
and overvoltage and overfrequency
protection as a standard. Consult
with the local utility company for
permission and to verify the protection
requirements as each utility may
have different rules regarding closed
transition applications. Protective
relays may be available as an option
upon request.
Standard Features
with ATC-900 Controller
Closed Transition Controls

The CTC9 accomplishes the closed
transition transfer by monitoring
the voltage and frequency set point
conditions of both power sources.
Once the set point conditions are met,
the ATC controller will start the closed
transition synchronization timer
(TSCT). The TSCT is adjustable from
160 minutes in duration. This duration
is the time during which the ATC-900
controller will monitor the phase
angles to anticipate when they will be
within 8 electrical degrees. The closed
transition scheme is anticipatory,
allowing the close contacts signal to
be initiated before the sources are
exactly in phase. If the TSCT times
out and the transfer switch has not
reached synchronization, the transfer
switch will remain connected to the
current power source and a failure
to transfer alarm will be displayed.
The transfer switch can also be
equipped with an optional open
transition transfer method for
situations where synchronization
is not possible, but a transfer is
required. One of the following
transition features can be selected:
Closed transition only

Closed transition with default to
load voltage decay
Closed transition with default to
time delay neutral

time delays
message display
Mimic diagram with source available
and connected LED indication
Programmable plant exerciserOFF,
daily, 7-day interval selectable run
time 0600 minutes no load/load
with fail-safe
Multi-tap transformer
Optional Features
Available surge suppression device

for power/controller, engine start
circuit, phone and cable connections
Ammeterload side
Power quality metering
Steel cover for controller
Pre-transfer signal contacts 1NO/1NC
(with three-position mechanism)
Commercial Design Highlights
UL 1008 front access

Compact design
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 014
Automatic Transition, 401200 ATechnical Data
22
Technical Data
23
24
25
26
27
UL 1008
Ampere
Rating
480 V
480 V
600 V
600 V
Rating When Used with Upstream Fuse
3-Cycle
Specific
Breaker
3-Cycle
Specific
Breaker
Rating
(kA)
Test
Voltage
Fuse
Type
40
80
100
10
10
10
30
30
30
10
10
10
22
22
22
100
100
100
480
480
480
RK5
RK5
RK5
200
200
200
150
200
225
10
10
30
30
30
50
22
22
50
35
35
65
100
100
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
400
400
600
260
400
600
30
30
50
50
50
65
50
50
50
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
L
600
600
1600
800
1000
1200
50
50
50
65
65
65
50
50
50
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
L
L
L
1600
1600
1600
Maximum Fuse
Amperes
28
29
30
31
32
33
Normal
Power Source
Controller
Source 1
Moving
Contact
Multi-Tap
Transformer
Source 2
Moving
Contact
Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
40
80
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
34
35
36
Load Lugs
Emergency
Power Source
Typical Contactor-Based ATC-900 Controller
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.1-7
Sheet 25 015
22
Table 25.1-7. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 401200 A Closed Transition (See Figure 25.1-11 and Figure 25.1-12)
Ampere
Rating
Enclosure
40100 at 480 V
40100 at 600 V
150200 at 480 V
150200 at 600 V 1
Bolt Pattern
23
B (Width)
C (Depth)
G (Horizontal)
H (Vertical)
Load Side, Normal

and Standby Source
Neutral
Connection
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
52.74 (1339.6)
52.74 (1339.6)
25.00 (635.0)
25.00 (635.0)
17.18 (436.4)
17.18 (436.4)
10.25 (260.4)
10.25 (260.4)
37.38 (949.5)
37.38 (949.5)
(1) #142/0
(1) #6250 kcmil
(3) #142/0
(3) #141/0
190 (86)
210 (95)
52.74 (1339.6) 25.00 (635.0)

71.02 (1803.9) 31.11 (790.2)
17.18 (436.4)
14.72 (373.9)
10.25 (260.4)
13.00 (330.2)
37.38 (949.5)
47.84 (1215.1)
(1) #6250 kcmil

(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(3) 1/0250 kcmil

(6) 250500 kcmil
210 (95)
420 (191)
25
14.72 (373.9)
32.00 (812.8)
32.00 (812.8)
13.00 (330.2)
N/A
N/A
47.84 (1215.1)
N/A
N/A
(2) 3/0250 kcmil

(4) 1/0750 cu/al
(4) 1/0750 cu/al
(6) 250500 kcmil

(12) 1/0750 kcmil
(12) 1/0750 kcmil
420 (191)
800 (363)
800 (363)
26
71.02 (1803.9) 31.11 (790.2)

225400 at 480 V
2251200 at 600 V 1 90.00 (2286.0) 46.00 (1168.4)
1
6001200 at 480 V
90.00 (2286.0) 46.00 (1168.4)
1
Standard Terminals
A (Height)
24
For NEMA 3R, add 14.60-inch (370.8 mm) to depth.
27
4.50
(114.3)
Neutral Cable
Connections
Emergency
Power Cable
Normal Power
Cable Connections Connections
29
2.64
(67.1)
TYP
30
A
49.00
(1244.6)
41.96
(1065.8)
31
Emerg.
Power
68.99
(1752.3)
18.60
(472.4)
Load
Power
B
Front View
C
Side View
(with right side removed)
Figure 25.1-11. Automatic Up to 400 A Wallmount NEMA 1

2
3
28
For switched neutral applications, connect to terminals marked NN,

EN and LN. Neutral assembly will not be provided.
Transformer pack is not included with 240/120 V, single-phase or
208/120 V, three-phase systems.
15.66
(397.8)
19.19
(487.4)
C
Load Power
Cable Connections
Side View
(with left side removed)
63.74
(1619.0)
32
33
25.40
(645.2)
23.00
(584.2)
Transformer
11.20
(284.5)
3.94
(100.1)
TYP
Front View
Figure 25.1-12. Automatic 6001200 AFloor-Standing NEMA 1
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 016
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001600 A, Dual DrawoutGeneral Description
22
23
Bypass Isolation Transfer

Switches, 1001600 A,
Dual Drawout
Features
Industrial Design Highlights
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
General Description
A bypass isolation transfer switch may
be used to provide emergency power
to life safety and other critical loads
where maintenance of the main
transfer switch, without interruption
of power to the load, is either desirable
or required.
The bypass isolation transfer switch
may be provided with either open or
closed transition type.

neutral position)
Closed transitionmake-beforebreak operation that requires the
normal and alternate sources to
be synchronized
Eatons automatic transfer switch
is designed to provide unmatched
performance, reliability and versatility
for critical standby power applications.
The switches can be equipped with
the ATC-300+ or ATC-900 controllers
to match your application needs.
Front access is a standard feature on

all ratings
Entry:
Top, bottom or both
Isolated compartments
Improved safety:
Isolated compartments with
barriers
Single motion rack-out with
doors closed
Ability to test power switching
elements during drawout process
Dual ATS capabilitybypass
contactor can be controlled by the
ATS controller in the bypass
mode of operation
Installation flexibility:
Field entry/exit locations can
be modified in the field
Interchangeable drawout
contactors
Field-selectable multi-tap
transformer panel permits operation
on a wide range of system voltages
Dual drawout
Standard Features
Drawout cassette design on both

ATS and bypass
No service interruption in bypass
to the same source
Source available contacts:
Switch position contacts:
Three-phase voltage unbalance/loss
41
Pre-transfer signal contacts 1NO

and 1NC (open transition only)
Go to Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Field-programmable time delays:
Time delay engine start:
01200 seconds
Time delay normal to emergency:
01800 seconds
Time delay emergency to normal:
01800 seconds
Time delay engine cooldown:
01800 seconds
Time delay emergency failure:
06 seconds
menu display
Optional Features
Available UL 1448 Third Edition

surge protection device (SPD)
Eaton IQ and Power Xpert multifunction power quality metering
Automatic transfer mode with
selectable non-automatic/automatic
retransfer mode
Remote annunciation with control
ATC-900 controller
Includes Modbus RTU via RS-485
Includes four programmable
inputs/outputs
Includes two plant exercisers
Includes LCD color display with
easy navigation tools to settings
and event logs
Expandable I/O (up to 20 I/O total)
Optional integrated load metering
Optional EtherNet TCP/IP
communications
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.1-9
Sheet 25 017
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001600 A, Dual DrawoutFeatures

Bypass Isolation Switch Features
Improved Safety
Ease of Transfer
Front Access
Front access is a standard feature.
Source 1 (NORMAL) Source and Load
connections are set up as standard top
entry and Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Source connections as bottom entry.
These connections are located in their
own separate compartments. These
connections can be relocated in the
field if necessary.
The unique Eaton design includes

separation between control and power
components. The ATS and bypass
isolation contactors are mounted in
separate compartments with protective
barriers between them. This design
prevents the possibility of contact with
the rear-mounted power connections
to the contactors. In addition, the top
and bottom entry have separate
compartment doors.
The Eaton design allows the operator

to make a quick and simple transfer
from the ATS power contactor to the
bypass contactor by initiating the
electrically operated transfer via a
two-position switch. Door-mounted
indicating lights confirm that a
successful transfer has taken place.
Multi-Tap Transformer
Ease of Maintenance
The industry-exclusive multi-tap

system voltage selector allows the
transfer switch to be applied on most
system voltages by proper insertion
of the selector plug.
Transfer to the bypass power contactor

is easily initiated and controlled via
door-mounted controls. Once the
transfer to the bypass contactor is
complete, the ATS contactor is easily
racked out with the compartment door
closed. The ATS contactor may then be
tested in the racked out position.
Drawout Contactors
The ATS and the bypass drawout
cassette power contactor designs are
identical and interchangeable. This
standard feature allows the user the
ability to withdraw, maintain or swap
contactor assemblies, providing
redundancy of ATS and bypass
functions from one contactor
assembly to the other.
22
23
24
25
Dual ATS Capability

The controller on conventional bypass
isolation switches only controls the ATS
contactor. The Eaton design allows the
switch controller to remain active in
both the ATS and bypass modes, thus
providing control to either contactor.
This ability of the controller to remain
active and control the bypass isolation
contactor provides N+1 redundancy
of a second fully functioning ATS, a
feature unique to Eaton.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Source 1 (NORMAL)
Connections
Load Connections
34
35
36
Drawout
Bypass
Contactor
Front Access
for Top or
Bottom Entry;
Terminals can
be Relocated
in the Field
37
38
39
40
Separate Doors for

ATS and Bypass
Compartments
41
42
Drawout ATS Contactor

Completely Removed
with Quick Connect Plug
Bypass Isolation Switch Components
CA08104001E
Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Connections
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 018
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001600 A, Dual DrawoutTechnical Data
22
23
24
25
UL 1008 listed
CSA C22.2 No. 178 certified
Technical Data
UL 1008
Ampere
Rating
480 V
480 V
600 V
600 V
3-Cycle
Specific
Breaker
3-Cycle
Specific
Breaker
Rating
(kA)
Test
Voltage
Fuse
Type
Maximum Fuse
Amperes
26
100
150
200
30
30
30
50
50
50
10
22
22
35
35
35
100
100
100
480
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
200
400
400
27
225
260
400
30
30
30
50
50
50
42
42
42
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
600
600
600
600
800
1000
1200
1600
50
50
50
50
50
65
65
65
65
65
42
42
42
42
65
65
65
65
200
200
200
200
600
600
600
600
L
L
L
L
28
29
1200
1200
1600
1600
30
Shown as Normal Operation

Bypass
Source 1
(NORMAL)
31
32
33
Bypass
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4X 1
NEMA 12 1
Bypass
Source 1
(NORMAL)
Available
(3)
(4)
Load
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
Available
34
1
Up to 1200 A.
35
36
(1)
(2)
ATS
37
38
ATS
Source 1
(NORMAL)
ATS
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
39
ATS
Locked In
40
ATS Isolated
(Flashing: ATS Removed)
41
42
Door Open
Figure 25.1-13. Bypass Isolation Diagram
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.1-11
Sheet 25 019
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 100400 A, Dual DrawoutDimensions
2.40
(61.0)
22
55.15
(1400.8)
23
28.74
(730.0)
25.20
(640.1)
24
5.23 (132.8)
8.37
(212.6)
25
18.28
(464.3)
12.00
(304.8)
26
27
Cable Compartment
2.98
(75.7)
24.05
(610.9)
28
29
Emergency Power
Cable Connections
30
31
Load Cable
Connections
32
Normal Power
Cable Connections
33
34
35
36
Note: Source 1,
Source 2 and load
connections can be
relocated in the field.
37
38
C
39
Figure 25.1-14. Bypass Isolation-Based Drawing NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R

Table 25.1-10. Isolation-Based Transfer Switch 100400A NEMA 1 1
C-Frame Fixed Bypass Enclosure
Switch Rating
Amperes
100200 at 480 Vac
225400 at 480 Vac
100200 at 600 Vac
225400 at 600 Vac
1
2
3
A (Height)
78.07 (1983.0)
78.07 (1983.0)
78.07 (1983.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
Standard Terminals
B (Width)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
C (Depth)
29.30 (744.2)
29.30 (744.2)
29.30 (744.2)
28.97 (735.8)
2
2
2
3
Line Side (Normal

and Emergency)
Load
Neutral
Weight
Lbs (kg)
(1) #6350 Cu/Al

(1) 3/0600 Cu/Al
(1) #6350 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(1) #6350 Cu/Al

(1) 3/0600 Cu/Al
(1) #6350 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(3) #6350 Cu/Al

(3) 3/0600 Cu/Al
(3) #6350 Cu/Al
(6) 3/0750 Cu/Al
625 (283.8) NEMA 1

625 (283.8) NEMA 1
625 (283.8) NEMA 1
1750 (794.5) NEMA 3R
For seismic applications, it is necessary to use 513 UNC Grade or better hex head bolts and washers torqued to 50 lbs-ft.
For NEMA 3R dimensions, add 18.29 inches (464.6 mm) to depth.
CA08104001E
40
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 020
22
23
Cable Entry
Top & Bottom
24
FRONT
25
17.86
(453.6)
26
27
2.71
(68.8)
28
CG
14.35
(364.5)
36.80
(934.7)
2.97
(75.4)
34.05
(864.9)
Top View
65.13
(1654.3)
Plan View
40.00
(1016.0)
Load
Connections
29
30
28.97
(735.8)
18.50
(470.0)
31
Source 1
Normal
Connections
32
33
90.08
(2288.0)
34
CG
35
Source 2
Emergency
Connections
36
Neutral
Connections
37
18.50
(470.0)
2.00
(50.8)
38
Note: Source 1 Normal and Load

connections are top and Source 2 is
bottom. These connections can be
relocated in the field.
Front View
39
Side View (with right side removed)
Figure 25.1-15. Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
40
41
42
43
Table 25.1-11. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 6001200 A 480 Vac, 2251200 A 600 Vac 1
Switch Rating
Amperes
Enclosure
A (Height)
B (Width)
C (Depth) 2
Line Side (Normal

and Emergency)
Load
Neutral
Weight
Lbs (kg)
600 at 480 Vac

600 at 600 Vac
8001200 at 480 Vac
8001200 at 600 Vac
1600 at 480 V
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
46.00 (1168.4)
40.00 (1016.0)
28.97 (735.8)
28.97 (735.8)
28.97 (735.8)
28.97 (735.8)
40.00 (1016.0)
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al

(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(5) 1/0750 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al

(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(5) 1/0750 Cu/Al
(6) 3/0750 Cu/Al

(6) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(16) 1/0750 Cu/Al
1750 (794.5)
1750 (794.5)
1850 (839.1)
1850 (839.1)
2200 (997.9)
1
2
Standard Terminals
For seismic applications, it is necessary to use 513 UNC Grade or better hex head bolts and washers torqued to 50 lbs-ft.
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.1-13
Sheet 25 021
22
Normal Power
Cable Connections
23
Load Cable
Connections
24
25
Neutral Assembly
26
90.06
(2287.5)
27
28
Emergency Power
Cable Connections
45.58
(1157.7)
29
30
40.00
(1016.0)
40.00
(1016.0)
Front View
Normal Power
Cable Connections
58.59
(1488.2)
31
32
33
Load Cable
Connections
34
35
Neutral Assembly
36
90.69
(2303.5)
37
38
Emergency Power
Cable Connections
47.19
(1198.6)
39
40
40.00
(1016.0)
1.50
(38.1)
TYP
41
31.18
(792.0)
41.54
(1055.1)
Front View
54.60
(1386.8)
Figure 25.1-16. Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Design 1600 A NEMA 1 (Top) and NEMA 3R (Bottom)
CA08104001E
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 022
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200 A, Fixed BypassGeneral Description
22
23
Bypass Isolation Transfer

Switches, 1001200 A,
Fixed Bypass
Features
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
General Description
A bypass isolation transfer switch may
be used to provide emergency power
to life safety and other critical loads
where maintenance of the main
transfer switch, without interruption
of power to the load, is either desirable
or required.
The bypass isolation transfer switch
may be provided with either open or
closed transition type.
35
36
37
38
39
40

neutral position)
Closed transitionmake-beforebreak operation that requires the
normal and alternate sources to
be synchronized
Eatons automatic transfer switch
is designed to provide unmatched
performance, reliability and versatility
for critical standby power applications.
The switches can be equipped with the
ATC-300+ or ATC-900 controllers to
match your application needs.
Front access is a standard feature on

all ratings
Entry:
Must be all top or all bottom
Improved safety:
with barriers
Single motion rack-out with
doors closed
Ability to test power switching
elements during drawout process
Optional dual ATS capability
bypass contactor can be
controlled by the ATS controller
in the bypass mode of operation
Installation flexibility:
Entry/exit locations are either
all top or all bottomfactory
configurable only
Interchangeable drawout
ATS contactor
Field-selectable multi-tap transformer
panel permits operation on a wide
range of system voltages
Fixed-mount bypass contactor
Standard Features
Drawout cassette design on ATS and

fixed-mount on bypass
No service interruption in bypass to
the same source
Three-phase voltage
unbalance/loss
41
Pre-transfer signal contacts 1NO and

1NC (open transition only)
Go to Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Field-programmable time delays:
Time delay engine start:
01200 seconds
Time delay normal to emergency:
01800 seconds
Time delay emergency to normal:
01800 seconds
Time delay engine cooldown:
01800 seconds
Time delay emergency failure:
06 seconds
menu display
Optional Features

Eaton IQ and Power Xpert multifunction power quality metering
Automatic transfer mode with
selectable non-automatic/automatic
retransfer mode
Remote annunciation with control
ATC-900 controller
inputs/outputs
and event logs
communications
42
43
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
25.1-15
Sheet 25 023
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200 A, Fixed BypassFeatures

Bypass Isolation Switch Features
Improved Safety
Ease of Transfer
Front Access
The unique Eaton design includes

separation between control and power
components. The ATS and bypass
isolation contactors are mounted
in separate compartments with
protective barriers between them.
This design prevents the possibility of
contact with the rear-mounted power
connections to the contactors. In
addition, the top and bottom entry
have separate compartment doors.
The Eaton design allows the operator

to make a quick and simple transfer
from the ATS power contactor to the
bypass contactor by initiating the
electrically operated transfer via a
two-position switch. Door-mounted
indicating lights confirm that a
successful transfer has taken place.
Front access is a standard feature.

Source 1 (NORMAL), Source 2
(EMERGENCY) and Load connections
are set up as either all top or all bottom
entry. These connections are located in
their own separate compartments.
The industry-exclusive multi-tap
system voltage selector allows the
system voltages by proper insertion
of the selector plug.
Drawout ATS and Fixed-Mounted Bypass

The ATS is designed as a drawout with
the contactor mounted in a cassette
with wheels. This allows the user the
ability to withdraw, maintain, inspect
and re-insert the ATS.
Ease of Maintenance
Transfer to the bypass power contactor
is easily initiated and controlled via
door-mounted controls. Once the
transfer to the bypass contactor is
complete, the ATS contactor is easily
racked out with the compartment door
closed. The ATS contactor may then
be tested in the isolated position.
The bypass contactor is designed

as a fixed-mounted design in its own
separate compartment.
Optional Dual ATS Capability

The controller on conventional bypass
isolation switches only controls the
ATS contactor. The Eaton design
allows the switch controller to remain
active in both the ATS and bypass
modes, thus providing control to either
contactor. This ability of the controller
to remain active and control the
bypass isolation contactor provides
N+1 redundancy of a second fully
functioning ATS, a feature unique
to Eaton.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Fixed-Mounted
Bypass
Contactor
35
Front Access for
Either All Top or
All Bottom Entry
36
37
38
Drawout ATS
Contactor
Completely
Removed
39
Separate Doors
for ATS and
Bypass
Compartments
40
41
Bypass IsolationFixed Bypass Components
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 024
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200 A, Fixed BypassTechnical Data
22
Technical Data
23
24
25
26
27
UL 1008
Ampere
Rating
480 V
480 V
600 V
600 V
3-Cycle
Specific
Breaker
3-Cycle
Specific
Breaker
Rating
(kA)
Test
Voltage
Fuse
Type
100
150
200
30
30
30
50
50
50
22
22
22
35
35
35
100
100
100
480
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
200
400
400
225
260
400
30
30
30
50
50
50
42
42
42
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
600
600
600
600
800
1000
1200
50
50
50
50
65
65
65
65
42
42
42
42
65
65
65
65
200
200
200
200
600
600
600
600
L
L
L
L
Shown as Normal Operation

Bypass
Source 1
(NORMAL)
29
Bypass
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
30
Bypass
32
1200
1200
1600
1600
28
31
Maximum Fuse
Amperes
Source 1
(NORMAL)
Available
(3)
(4)
Load
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
Available
Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
33
34
(1)
ATS
(2)
35
36
ATS
Source 1
(NORMAL)
ATS
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
37
ATS
Locked In
38
ATS Isolated
(Flashing: ATS Removed)
39
Door Open
40
Figure 25.1-17. Bypass Isolation
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.1-17
Sheet 25 025
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 100400 A, Fixed BypassDimensions
22
55.15
(1400.8)
2.40
(61.0)
25.20
(640.1)
23
28.74
(730.0)
24
6.15
(156.2)
5.23 (132.8)
25
13.22
(335.8)
18.28
(464.3)
26
2.98
(75.7)
27
Cable Compartment
24.05
(610.9)
28
29
Source 1 Normal
Connections
30
Electrical Panel Not

Shown for Clarity
31
32
33
A
34
35
Load
Connections
36
37
Source 2 Emergency
Connections
B
38
Note: Source 1 Normal, Source 2 Emergency

and load connections are NOT factory or field
reconfigurable. Sufficient wireway and bending
space is available to come in from either direction.
39
40
Figure 25.1-18. Bypass Isolation-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R

Table 25.1-14. Isolation-Based Transfer Switch 100400 A
C-Frame
Fixed Bypass
Enclosure
Switch
Ampere Rating
A
(Height)
G
B
C
(Width) (Depth) 1 (Horizontal)
H
(Vertical)
Line Side
(Normal)
Load
Neutral
100200
at 480/600 V
78.07
(1983.0)
30.00
(762.0)
29.30
(744.2)
N/A
N/A
(1) #6350 Cu/Al
(1) #6350 Cu/Al
(3) #6350 Cu/Al
625 (284)
225400
at 480 V
78.07
(1983.0)
30.00
(762.0)
29.30
(744.2)
N/A
N/A
(1) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(1) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(1) 3/0750 Cu/Al
625 (284)
Bolt Pattern
Standard Terminals
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
For NEMA 3R, add 15.48 inches (393.2 mm) to depth.
CA08104001E
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 026
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 4001200 A, Fixed BypassDimensions
22
23
14.61
(371.1)
40.00
(1016.0)
24
2.40
(61.0)
25
3.24
(82.3)
2.40
(61.0)
9.24
(234.7)
26
28.99
(736.3)
Cable Entry
Top
2.00
(50.8)
18.28
(464.3)
5.22
(132.6)
27
36.80
(934.7)
35.20
(894.1)
28
34.04
(864.6)
Top View
65.47
(1662.9)
Plan View
29
30
31
32
33
90.00
(2286.0)
34
Source 2
Emergency
Connections
35
Note: S1 Normal,
S2 Emergency and load
connections must be either
ALL Top or ALL Bottom and
are NOT field reconfigurable.
36
37
Source 1
Normal
Connections
38
Load Connections
39
40
28.99
(736.3)
40.00
(1016.0)
Side View
Front View
Figure 25.1-19. Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R

Table 25.1-15. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 1001200 A
41
42
43
Switch Ampere
Rating
Enclosure
Height
Width
Depth
Line Side (Normal)
Load
Neutral
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
100200
100200
4001200 1
4001200 1
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
28.99 (736.3)
44.47 (1129.5)
28.99 (736.3)
44.47 (1129.5)
(1) #6250 Cu/Al

(1) #6250 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(1) #6250 Cu/Al

(1) #6250 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(3) #6250 Cu/Al

(3) #6250 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
1750 (795) NEMA 1

1850 (840) NEMA 3R
1800 (817) NEMA 1
1850 (840) NEMA 3R
Standard Terminals
NEMA 3R dimensions. If seismic mounting brackets are required, then the width will be 46.00 inches (1168.4 mm).
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
25.2-1
Sheet 25 027
Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountGeneral Description
Molded-Case Switches
Manual Wallmount
General Description
Eatons wallmount manually operated

transfer switches are designed for a
variety of standby power applications
for critical loads. In the event of a
primary power source interruption,
the user can manually transfer the
load circuits to the standby power
source. Once primary power has
been restored, the user can manually
transfer the load circuits back to
the primary power source.
Features
Manual transfer switches cover
applications ranging from 30 to 1000 A
through 600 Vac for standard manual
configurations and open transition.
Manual Switch with Door Closed

Must Open Door to Engage the
Manual Handle
Manual transfer switches may be

applied for those application where
a manually initiated and manually
operated transfer is suitable. The front
door of the switch must be opened
to operate the manual handle. The
design comes standard with a deadfront design, allowing safe manual
transfer under load. Applications
requiring the manual operation to
be initiated without opening the
door need to select a non-automatic
transfer switch. Should an application
require a service entrance rating, then
a non-automatic or automatic design
needs to be selected.
22
Molded-case switch power

contact assemblies
Positive mechanical interlocking
Permanently affixed manual
operating handle
23
Benefits
25
High withstand, totally enclosed

for maximum arc suppression and
isolation during power transfer
Optional trip units offer system
overcurrent protection
Prevents the paralleling of two
sources of power
Permits safe and convenient
manual transfer of power
Complies with UL 1008 and

UL 489 standards
Meets American Bureau of
Shipping (ABS) approval
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 028
Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountTechnical Data
22
23
24
Technical Data
Standard UL 1008 3-CycleHorizontal and Vertical Industrial
Table 25.2-1. Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for

Power Cable Connections 1
Switch
Ampere
Rating
25
Line Side (Normal

and Standby
Source)
Load
Connection
Neutral
Connection
30100
150225
225300
HFD
HFD
HKD
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #3350
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #6350
(3) #141/0
(3) #4300
(3) #4350
400
HLD
(1) 4/0600
(2) #1500
(6) 250350
(1) 3/0350
(2) #1500
(3) 3/0400
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(3) 3/0400
(6) 250350
(12) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
800
800
1000
1
28
Breaker
Frame
HLD
600
HMDL
600
600 (four-pole) NB
26
27
HMDL
HNB
HNB
All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. For alternate

terminal sizes, contact Eaton.
ATS
Ampere
Rating
Short Circuit
Ratings When Used with

Upstream Fuse (kA)
Fuse
Type 2
600 V
200
200
200
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
25
25
25
400
400
400
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
65
65
65 3
25
25
25
400
600
800/1200
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
100/200
50 3
50 3
25
25
1200/1600
1600
L
L
100/200
200
240 V
480 V
600 V
30
70
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
150
200
225
100
100
100
65
65
65
300
400
600
100
100
100
800
1000
65
65
2
3
Maximum
Fuse Rating
Class RK5 fuse with 100 kA rating.

Four-pole units rated 35 kA.
Table 25.2-3. Wallmount Transfer Switch Ratings
29
30
31
32
Manual Handle
Deadfront
33
Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
34
35
36
Manual Switch with Door Open

Manually Initiated and Manually Operated
Note: If a service entrance rating is required, then a non-automatic
type switch must be selected. Service entrance ratings are not
available on a manual transfer switch.
Note: Manual operation of the handle requires opening the door.
37
38
39
40
Manual Transfer Switch

Shown without Deadfront
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.2-3
Sheet 25 029
Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountDimensions
Dimensions
22
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm). For Table 25.2-4Table 25.2-6, refer to Figure 25.2-1 and Figure 25.2-2.
Table 25.2-4. 301000 A Type MTVXNEMA 1, 3R and 12 1
Switch
Type
Enclosure
Gutter Space
23
Standard Terminals 2
Bolt Pattern
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Height
Width
Depth
Width
Depth
Bending
Horizontal
Vertical
Line
Load
Neutral
HKD (150225 A)
48.00
(1219.2)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.59
(269.0)
11.00
(279.4)
45.50
(1155.7)
(1) #3350
(1) #6350
(3) #4350
305 (138)
HKD (300 A)
56.00
(1422.4)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
13.59
(345.2)
11.00
(279.4)
53.50
(1358.9)
(1) #3350
(1) #6350
(3) #4350
395 (179)
HLD (400 A)
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(1) 4/0600
(2) #1500
(6) 250350
395 (179)
HLD (400 A) 3
53.00
(1346.2)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
11.85
(301.0)
16.00
(406.4)
50.48
(1282.2)
(2) 3/0350
(2) #1500
(6) 250350
395 (179)
HLD (600 A)
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(2) 3/0350
(2) #1500
(12) 4/0500
395 (179)
HLD (600 A) 3
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(2) 400500 (2) #1500
(12) 4/0500
395 (179)
HMDL (600 A)
76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.73
(450.3)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(12) 4/0500
510 (232)
HMDL (800 A)
76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.73
(450.3)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(12) 4/0500
510 (232)
NB (8001000 A)
76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.58
(446.5)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
540 (245)
1
2
3
24
Consult factory for NEMA 4X.

Suitable for Cu or Al wire. Consult the factory for other available terminal sizes.
Alternate line terminals.
22.88
(581.2)
13.13
22.74
(333.5) (577.6)
22.62
(574.5)
24.50
9.78
10.28
(622.3) (248.4) (261.1)
32.31
143
(820.7) (65)
2.00 Latch
(50.8) Open
A
5.00
(127.0)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
.75 Latch
(19.1) Closed
Power Panel Type
Height
Width
Depth
HFD
HKD
HLD
11.00 (279.4)
24.50 (622.3)
26.00 (660.4)
17.00 (431.8)
11.88 (301.8)
16.88 (428.8)
6.81 (173.0)
17.50 (444.5)
17.50 (444.5)
HMDL
NB
36.25 (920.8)
36.25 (920.8)
16.88 (428.8)
16.88 (428.8)
17.50 (444.5)
19.00 (482.6)
22.00 (558.8)
28.63 (727.2)
16.50 (419.1)
8.25 (209.6)
6.50 (165.1)
5.50 (139.7)
Power Panel
Transformer Panel
HFD
HKD, HLD, HMDL and NB
Power
Panel
Gutter
Space
33
34
35
38
39
H
A
40
Transformer
Panel
41
Top View
Figure 25.2-2. Dimensions

CA08104001E
Logic
Panel
30
37
Top of Lugs on
Power Panel
1.25
(31.75)
29
E C D
28
36
B
G
1.75
(44.45)
27
32
Table 25.2-6. Power Panel and Transformer Panel
Dimensions
26
31
Note: Dimensions are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes.
Table 25.2-5. 30150 A Type MTHXFD Manual
25
Front View
Side View
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 030
Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountGeneral Description
22
Non-Automatic Wallmount
23
25
26
27
Features
Non-automatic transfer switches

cover applications ranging from 30
to 1000 A through 600 Vac for manual
configurations, open transition,
standard or service entrance.
29
32
Eatons wallmount non-automatic

transfer switches are designed for a
variety of standby power applications
for critical loads.
28
31
In the event of a primary power source

interruption, the user can manually
transfer the load circuits to the standby
power source through the use of an
external pushbutton. Once primary
power has been restored, the user can
manually transfer the load circuits back
to the primary power source through
the use of an external pushbutton.
24
30
General Description
Non-Automatic Wallmount
Non-automatic transfer switches are

manually initiated, but electrically
operated designs. Front door-mounted
controls allow the operator to initiate
the transfer. Overcurrent trips may be
added to the design for either or both
the normal and emergency source.
Service entrance ratings are available.
Molded-case switch power

contact assemblies
Positive mechanical and electrical
interlocking
Permanently affixed manual
operating handle
Pushbutton operation
Deadfront panel
Benefits
High withstand, totally enclosed

for maximum arc suppression and
isolation during power transfer
Optional trip units offer system
overcurrent protection
Prevents the paralleling of two
sources of power
Permits safe and convenient
manual transfer of power under
load via external pushbutton
initiated operation
Complies with UL 1008 and

UL 489 standards
33
34
35

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.2-5
Sheet 25 031
Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountTechnical Data
Technical Data
Table 25.2-7. Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for

Power Cable Connections 1
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Breaker Line Side (Normal

Frame
and Standby
Source)
Load
Neutral
Connection Connection
30100
150225
225300
HFD
HFD
HKD
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #3350
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #6350
(3) #141/0
(3) #4300
(3) #4350
400
600
600
HLD
HLD
HMDL
(1) 4/0600
(1) 3/0350
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(6) 250350
(6) 250350
(12) 4/0500
600 (four-pole) NB
800
HMDL
800
HNB
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(4) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(4) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(12) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
1000
1
HNB
All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. For alternate

terminal sizes, contact Eaton.
Standard UL 1008 Three-CycleHorizontal and Vertical Industrial
22
ATS
Ampere
Rating
23
Short Circuit
Ratings When Used with Upstream

Fuse (kA)
Fuse
Type 2
600 V
200
200
200
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
25
25
25
400
400
400
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
25
65
65
65 3
25
25
25
400
600
800/1200
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
100/200
26
50 3
50 3
25
25
1200/1600
1600
L
L
100/200
200
27
240 V
480 V
600 V
30
70
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
150
200
225
100
100
100
65
65
65
300
400
600
100
100
100
800
1000
65
65
2
3
Maximum
Fuse Rating

Four-pole units rated 35 kA.
24
28
Table 25.2-9. Non-Automatic Wallmount Transfer Switch Ratings
Device Panel
Control Switch,
Service Entrance
Keyed Switch and
Indication Lights
Service Entrance
Label (Optional)
Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
29
Fixed
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
30
31
32
33
34
Non-Automatic Switch with Doors Closed

Note: Optional service entrance rating shown for this photo.
Non-Automatic Transfer Switch

Device panel shows controls to initiate the manual transfer
and control indicating lights. In addition, an optional service
entrance rating may be specified. Keyed switch is mounted
on the device panel.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 032
Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountDimensions
22

Table 25.2-10. 301000 A Types NTHENTVE NEMA 1, 3R and 12 (See Figure 25.2-3) 1
23
Switch
Type
Enclosure
A
Height
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Bolt Pattern
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Width
Depth
Width
Depth
Bending
Horizontal
Vertical
Line
Load
Neutral
HFD (30100 A) 3 47.74

(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
6.22
(157.9)
10.75
(273.0)
45.24
(1049.1)
(1) #141/0
(1) #141/0
(3) #141/0
227
(103)
HFD (150 A) 3
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
6.22
(157.9)
10.75
(273.0)
45.24
(1049.1)
(1) #6300
(1) #6300
(3) #4300
227
(103)
HKD (150225 A)
48.00
(1219.2)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.59
(269.0)
11.00
(279.4)
45.50
(1155.7)
(1) #3350
(1) #6350
(3) #4350
305
(138)
HKD (300 A)
56.00
(1422.4)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
13.59
(345.2)
11.00
(279.4)
53.50
(1358.9)
(1) #3350
(1) #6350
(3) #4350
395
(179)
HLD (400 A)
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(1) 4/0600
(2) #1500
(6) 250350
395
(179)
HLD (400 A) 4
53.00
(1346.2)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
11.85
(301.0)
16.00
(406.4)
50.48
(1282.2)
(2) 3/0350
(2) #1500
(6) 250350
395
(179)
HLD (600 A)
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(2) 3/0350
(2) #1500
(12) 4/0500
395
(179)
HLD (600 A) 4
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(2) 400500 (2) #1500
(12) 4/0500
395
(179)
HMDL (600 A)
76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.73
(450.3)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(12) 4/0500
510
(232)
HMDL (800 A)
76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.73
(450.3)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(12) 4/0500
510
(232)
NB (8001000 A)
76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.58
(446.5)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
540
(245)
1
2
32
Gutter Space
B
3
4

Suitable for Cu or Al wire. Consult the factory for other available terminal sizes.
NTHE with multi-tap voltage selection panel.
Alternate line terminals.
Table 25.2-11. Power Panel and Transformer Panel
33
34
Gutter
Space
Power
Panel
37
Height
Width
Depth
HFD
HKD
HLD
11.00 (279.4)
24.50 (622.3)
26.00 (660.4)
17.00 (431.8)
11.88 (301.8)
16.88 (428.8)
6.81 (173.0)
17.50 (444.5)
17.50 (444.5)
HMDL
NB
36.25 (920.8)
36.25 (920.8)
16.88 (428.8)
16.88 (428.8)
17.50 (444.5)
19.00 (482.6)
22.00 (558.8)
28.63 (727.2)
16.50 (419.1)
8.25 (209.6)
6.50 (165.1)
5.50 (139.7)
Power Panel
Transformer
Panel
35
36
Power
Panel Type
Logic
Panel
Transformer Panel
B
HFD
HKD, HLD, HMDL and NB
G
Top of Lugs
on Power Panel
38
39
40
H
A
41
42
43
Front View
Side View

CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.2-7
Sheet 25 033
Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountGeneral Description
Automatic Wallmount
Delayed Transition With Load

Voltage Decay
This is a delayed transition with the
optional feature to delay in the neutral
position to point where the load
voltage decays to a programmable
voltage level. When the load voltage
level reaches the programmable set
point, the transfer from the neutral
position initiates.
Optional Features

Double-throw, mechanically
interlocked transfer mechanism
Standard Features
Automatic Wallmount Transfer Switch
General Description
Eatons wallmount transfer switches
are designed for a variety of standby
power applications for critical loads.
They provide flexibility, reliability and
value in a compact package. In the
event of a primary power source
interruption, a transfer switch provides
an effective means to transfer the load
circuits to an alternate power source
while reducing the possibility of injury
or property damage.
Wallmount transfer switches meet
or exceed all industry standards for
endurance, reliability and performance.
These breaker-based designs can be

applied with the ATC-100 (up to 400 A),
ATC-300+ or ATC-900 controllers.
Suitable for emergency and standby

systems (all loads).
These molded-case switch designs are

inherently open transition type that
features delayed transition.
Delayed Transition
This is a break-before-make or
open transition that also has a
center off or neutral position with a
programmable time delay setting for
the neutral position. The three-position
transfer switch is either closed on
Source 1, closed on Source 2, or in a
center off, neutral position (not closed
on either source).
CA08104001E

Three-phase voltage
unbalance/loss
Pre-transfer signal contacts
1NO/1NC
time delays
LCD-based display for programming, system diagnostic and Help
message display
LED indication
Safe manual operation under full
load with permanently affixed
operating handle
Suitable for use as service

equipment in the standard
enclosure size
Available SPD for power/controller,
engine start circuit, phone and cable
connections
Integrated distribution panels
Field-selectable multi-tap
transformer panel permits
operation on a wide range of
system voltages
Integral overcurrent protection
Ammeterload side
ATC-100 and ATC-900 controllers
available
Source 2 inhibit
Manual retransfer to normal
Remote annunciator with control
Ethernet communication
(PXG 400 Gateway)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
ATC-900 controller

inputs/outputs
and event logs
communications
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 034
Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountFeatures
22
23
24
25
Source 1 and Load

Power Cable Connections
Automatic Transfer
Controller (ATC-300+)
Monitors Power Sources
Initiates Power Transfers
Control Service Disconnect

(Service Equipment
Rated Switches Only)
Surge Suppression
Device (Optional)
Permanently Affixed Manual
Transfer Handle Provides Safe
Manual Transfer Under Full Load
26
Customer Control
Connections
27
28
Service Disconnect Switch

(Keyed) (Service Equipment
Rated Switches Only)
Power Switching Panel

(with Deadfront Cover Installed)
29
Transformer Panel
Steps Line Power Down
to 120 Vac for Logic and
Electrical Operator
Available Multi-Tap
Voltage Selector
(See Page 25.2-9 for
additional details)
Source 2 Power Cable Connections
30
31
Space Heater (Optional)
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Basic Components of Automatic Transfer Switches
Eatons Superior Design Transfer

Switch Characteristics
Fast, Powerful and Safe Power

Switching Mechanism
Optional Integral Overcurrent

Protection Capability
Unmatched Performance and Versatility
The power panel uses a unidirectional

gear motor mechanism. The power
panel can be operated manually under
a full load.
For service entrance and other

applications, trip units can be integrated
into the power switching section.
This eliminates the need for separate
upstream protective devices, saving
cost and space.
Eatons family of wallmount transfer

switches offers unmatched performance, versatility and value for power
switching applications. At the heart of
these designs is Eatons molded-case
switch, designed specifically to meet
UL 1008.
Molded-Case Switch Features
True four-pole switched

neutral availability
Totally enclosed contact assembly
Superior Main Contact Structure

All Eaton wallmount transfer switches
meet or exceed the standards set
forth in UL 1008 and UL 489. No other
transfer switch manufacturer has
met the rigid testing requirements
of this combination of standards.
Completely enclosed contacts add
a measure of safety and reliability.
It also ensures the integrity of the
contact assemblies and minimizes
the need for periodic maintenance
of the contacts, reducing downtime.
Optional Thermal-Magnetic
or Electronic Trip Units
Molded-Case Switch
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.2-9
Sheet 25 035
Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountFeatures

Mechanical Interlock
North American Voltage Selector
Wallmount transfer switches feature

a rear-mounted, fail-safe mechanical
interlock to prevent paralleling of
sources. This is, in addition to
software interlocking and the
interlocking inherently provided
by the transfer mechanism.
North American multi-tap transformer

comes with 600, 480, 240, 208 and
120 Vac, single- and three-phase,
and 60 Hz taps, which are all field
selectable. Simply remove the steel
cover and move the appropriate blue
flag terminal to the desired voltage.
All switches are shipped with the blue
flag in the 600 V position.
Multi-Tap Voltage Selector
Transformer
Panel
Eatons industry-exclusive multi-tap

system voltage selector allows our
system voltages just by proper insertion
of the selector plug. Available in two
configurations: Worldwide multi-tap
with 600, 480, 415, 380, 240, 220 and
208 Vac, single- and three-phase,
50 and 60 Hz taps. North American
multi-tap with 600, 480, 240, 208
and 120 Vac, single- and three-phase,
60 Hz taps.
Load Bus Assembly
23
24
25
26
Triple Interlocks
22
27
28
Transformer Panel Location
29
30
Transformer Panel
Allows for Easy
Field Changes to
Voltage Configurations
The load bus can be oriented for

either top or bottom access. Top entry
is standard.
31
32
33
Transformer Panel Opened

Load Lugs (Top Entry)
Control Power
Fused Disconnect
for Service Rated
ATSs only
Load
Bus
Normal Power
Source MoldedCase Switch
Neutral
Connections
Load Bus
34
Power Panel
Manual
Operating Handle
36
37
38
Ease of Maintenance
Keyed quick-disconnect plugs are
provided for easy and complete
isolation of the control circuitry.
Maintenance can be performed on
the logic independent from the power
sections and still allow the user to
manually transfer power under full
load conditions.
35
Service
Disconnect
Indicator Wheel
Voltage Selection
Panel (Domestic)
Transfer
Mechanism
39
40
41
42
Motor Brake Board
Emergency Power Source

Molded-Case Switch
Typical (2251000 A) Vertical Design Transfer Switch Equipment

Logic Disconnect Plugs
CA08104001E
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 036
Breaker-Based Transfer Switches, Molded-CaseTechnical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Molded-Case Transfer Switch and Circuit Breaker
They are listed under Underwriters

Laboratories UL 1008 Standard for
transfer switch equipment and are
optionally available as suitable
for emergency and standby
systems as defined in NFPA 99
for health care facilities.
Switch
Ampere
Rating
UL 1008 3-Cycle Any Breaker Rating
Ratings When Used with Upstream Fuse
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
Maximum
Fuse Rating
30100
150
225
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
300
400
600 2
100
100
100
65
65
65
800 2
1000 2
65
65
50
50
UL 1008 listed
Technical Data
Electrical Ratings
Molded-case and circuit breaker

301000 A
Two-, three- or four-pole
Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
NEMA 1, 3R, 12, open
Fuse
Type 1
600 Vac
200
400
400
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
25
25
25
400
600
800/1200
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
100/200
25
25
1200/1600
1600
L
L
100/200
200

For 600, 800 and 1000 A ratings, single- through four-pole units are rated 35 kA.
Table 25.2-13. Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for Power Cable Connections 3
Switch
Ampere Rating
Breaker
Frame
Line Side (Normal and

Standby Source)
Load
Connection
Neutral
Connection
29
30100
150225
150225
HFD
HFD
HKD
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #3350
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #6350
(3) #141/0
(3) #4300
(3) #4350
30
225300
400
600
HKD
HLD
HLD
(1) #3350
(1) 4/0600
(1) 3/0350
(1) #6350
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(3) #4350
(6) 250350
(6) 250350
31
600
600 (four-pole)
800
HMDL
NB
HMDL
(2) #1500
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(2) #1500
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(12) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(12) 4/0500
HNB
HNB
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
32
800
1000
3
33
34
35
36
37
38
All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. For alternate terminal sizes,
contact Eaton.

Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
Number of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.2-11
Sheet 25 037
Breaker-Based Transfer Switches, Molded-CaseDimensions
22
B
G
23
Top of Lugs on
Power Panel
24
25
H
D
Power
Panel
Gutter
Space
26
A
E
Transformer
Panel
27
Logic
Panel
28
Top View
Front View
Side View
29
Figure 25.2-4. Dimension Views

Table 25.2-15. Breaker-Based and Molded-Case Transfer SwitchesNEMA 1, 3R and 12 1
Switch
Switch
Rating
Type
Amperes
Enclosure
Gutter Space
Bolt Pattern
Height
Width
Depth
Width
Depth
Horizontal
Vertical
Line Side (Normal Load and

Standby Source) Connection
Neutral
Connection
Weight
Lbs (kg)
30
31
Molded-Case
30100
HFD 3
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
46.44
(1180.0)
232
(105)
150225
HFD 3
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
46.44
(1180.0)
232
(105)
30100
HFD 4
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
46.44
(1180.0)
240
(190)
150
HFD 4
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
46.44
(1180.0)
240
(190)
150225
HFD 3
35.61
(904.0)
20.06
(509.5)
13.34
(339.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
34.31
(904.0)
150
(68)
150225
HKD
56.00
(1422.4)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
11.00
(279.4)
45.50
(1155.7)
305
(134)
300
HKD
53.00
(1346.2)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
11.00
(279.4)
53.50
(1358.9)
295
(134)
400
HLD
53.00
(1346.0)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
51.50
(1308.0)
425
(193)
600
HLD 3
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
62.50
(1588.0)
475
(214)
600
HMDL
76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
480
(218)
800
HMDL 3 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
510
(232)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
540
(245)
8001000 HNB
1
2
3
4
76.74
(1949.2)

Suitable with copper only.
240/120 V, single-phase, three-wire or 208 V, three-phase, four-wire systems only.
With multi-tap voltage selection panel.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 038
Maintenance Bypass Switches, 1001000 AGeneral Description
22
Maintenance Bypass Switches

Type MBHE 1001000 A
23
24
25
26
Benefits
Incoming
from Switchboard
Safe and reliable operation is

ensured due to the simple and
durable switching design
Unauthorized bypass is prevented
by the need of UPS system to send
the bypass authorized signal
100% current ratings makes
selection to the UPS kVA ratings
easy to accomplish
Use of interrupting rating switches
makes the maintenance bypass
switches adaptable to systems with
high levels of available fault current
UPS
Input Breaker
UPS
System
Maintenance
Bypass
Switch
Computer
Loads
Figure 25.2-5. Single Line Diagram of

Maintenance Bypass Switch
27
Layout Dimensions
28
Type MBHE Maintenance Bypass Switch
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
1001000 A Type MBHE Maintenance Bypass N1, N3R, N12
Eatons Maintenance Bypass Switch

is a UL 1008 listed device that provides
a simple and effective means for
bypassing un-interruptible power
supplies while maintaining continuity
of power to the critical computer loads.
A maintenance bypass switch is a
requirement on every UPS installation
in order to accommodate the maintenance and testing of the UPS system.
Table 25.2-16. Manual and Maintenance Bypass EnclosuresDimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere
Rating
UL 1008 listingFile E61639

Make-before-break electrical
operation
Lockout circuit to be wired into
the UPS bypass authorization
Pilot devices to show UPS position
Normal and Bypassed
Pilot device to show Lockout
enabled
Reliable manually initiated electrical
operation
High interrupting ratings
are standard
Molded-case switch designs
are available
Solid neutral connections
are standard
Dimensions
A
100150
22.21
(564.1)
13.13
(333.5)
24.04
(610.6)
22.18
(563.4)
24.92
(633.0)
9.89
(251.2)
32.47
(824.7)
225300
38.21
(970.5)
29.13
(739.9)
35.66
(905.8)
35.62
(904.7)
37.92
(963.2)
17.89
(454.4)
55.56
(1411.2)
400
38.21
(970.5)
29.13
(739.9)
35.77
(908.5)
35.62
(904.7)
37.92
(963.2)
17.71
(449.8)
55.56
(1411.2)
600
38.21
(970.5)
29.13
(739.9)
59.66
(1515.4)
49.62
(1260.3)
61.92
(1572.8)
17.71
(449.8)
55.76
(1416.3)
800
38.21
(970.5)
29.13
(739.9)
59.66
(1515.4)
49.62
(1260.3)
61.92
(1572.8)
17.71
(449.8)
55.76
(1416.3)
1000
38.21
(970.5)
29.13
(739.9)
59.66
(1515.4)
59.62
(1514.3)
61.92
(1572.8)
17.71
(449.8)
55.76
(1416.3)
Features
39
Maintenance Bypass Switches
General Description
36
Lockout
Circuit
A
B
2.00 (50.8)
Latch Open
0.75 (19.05)
Latch Closed
D
C
E
40
2.19
(55.6)
41
42
43
G
1.30
(33.0)
Figure 25.2-6. Maintenance Bypass SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)

CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.3-1
Sheet 25 039
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesGeneral Description
Floor-Standing Magnum
Transfer Switches

Freestanding enclosure
High withstand ratings
100 kA standard 3-cycle rating
Dual drawout on ATS and bypass
Deadfront
Safe manual transfer under load
Electrically operated
Magnum stored energy mechanism
Quick make / quick break
switching times (<3 cycles)

True four-pole switched neutral
Mechanically interlocked
Integral overcurrent trip option
Integrated service entrance
rating option
OSHPD listed
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch
General Description
Eatons Magnum transfer switches
are designed for a variety of standby
power applications for critical and
noncritical loads. They monitor both
Source 1 (Normal) and Source 2
(Emergency) power sources. In the
event of a Source 1 power interruption,
these switches will automatically
transfer the load circuits to the Source 2
power source. Once Source 1 power
source has been restored, the process
is automatically reversed.
The Magnum family of transfer switches
covers applications ranging from 200
to 5000 A through 600 Vac. Some of
the applications are: automatic or
non-automatic configurations, open or
closed transition and standard or rated
suitable for use as service entrance.
They are designed for applications
where total system coordination must
be accomplished while achieving a
high level of withstand, interrupting
and closing performance.
Drawout construction is available
for applications, such as critical lifesupport systems, where preventive
maintenance, inspection and testing
must be accomplished while
maintaining continuity of power
to the load.
CA08104001E
Standard Features
ATC-900 controller
Drawout cassette on ATS and bypass

Source 1 available 1NO/1NC
Source 1 position 1NO/1NC
Field-programmable time delays
Time emergency to normal
Time delay engine cooldown
Time delay emergency failure
LCD color-based display for

programming, system diagnostics
and Help menu
Mimic diagram with source available and connected LED indication
Four programmable inputs
and outputs
Standard Modbus 485
USB port for set point downloads
and event recording uploads
Password-protected access to
control functions and set point
programming
Two automatic plant exercisers
load or no load, daily, 7-, 14-,
28-day or calendar date operation,
0600 minute runtime
Optional Features
Automatic transfer operation with
selectable (via programming) nonautomatic or automatic retransfer
with fail-safe
Digital multi-function power

quality metering
monitoring of ATS status

Integrated load metering
EtherNet TCP/IP communications

Eaton Magnum transfer switches
meet or exceed all industry
standards for endurance, reliability
and performance. They are listed
under Underwriters Laboratories
UL 1008 Standard for transfer switch
equipment. With certain options,
they also comply with Source 2
and standby system requirements
as defined in NFPA 99 for health
care facilities.
23
24
25
DC power input for uninterrupted
22
UL 1008standard for safety for

automatic transfer switches 4000
and 5000 A available as UL 891 only
UL 489standard for circuit breakers
and molded case switches
CSA 22.2-178Canadian transfer
switch standard
NEC articlescode sections 517,
700, 701, 702applicable switch
equipment
NFPA 110Source 2 and Standby
Power Systems
NFPA 99health care facilities
EGSA 100Sstandard for transfer
switches
NEMA ICS10Standard for transfer
switch equipment
ISO 9000International
Organization for Standardization
IBCInternational Building
Code 2006
BOCABuilding Officials Code
Administrators
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 040
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Transfer Switch Withstand Ratings
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch
Table 25.3-1. System Coordination InformationWithstand, Closing and Interrupting Ratings
Ambient temperature range:

40 to +40 C (40 to +104 F)
20 to +70 C (4 to +158 F)
Operating humidity: up to 90%
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
Magnum Drawout Transfer Switch
2005000 A
Two-, three-, four-pole
(except units 3200 A and
higher only three- or four-pole)
120600 Vac
100,000 A withstand/closing/
interrupting at 480 Vac
Short-time withstand85,000 for
30 cycles
Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch
31
32
33
2003200 A; 4000 and 5000 A

ratings are drawout
Two-, three-, four-pole
(except units 3200 A and higher
only three- and four-pole)
120600 Vac
100,000 A withstand/closing/
interrupting at 480 Vac
Short-time withstand85,000 for
30 cycles
3-Cycle
Short-Circuit 600 V (kA)
30-Cycle 1
Short-Time 600 V (kA)
800
1000
1200
100
100
100
85
85
85
1600
2000
2500
100
100
100
85
85
85
3000
3200
4000
100
100
100
85
85
85 2
85 2
Transfer Switch
Ampere Rating
UL 1008
UL 891
4000
5000
1
2
Ratings used for coordination with upstream breakers with short-time ratings.
UL 1066 short-time withstand rating.
Table 25.3-2. Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch Mounting

Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
Number
of Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed
Drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
2, 3, 4
Open
NEMA 1 behind
NEMA 1 thru
NEMA 3R
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.3-3
Sheet 25 041
Magnum Drawout
Transfer Switch
Magnum Fixed-Mount
Transfer Switch
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
2000 A, Four-Pole,
NEMA 1 Enclosed,
Through-the-Door Design
Drawout construction with switch

position indicator
Completely interchangeable power
switching devices
Available in NEMA Type 1 and
3R enclosures
Rear, side and top cable access
29
2000 A, Three-Pole, Fixed Design,

NEMA Behind-the-Door Enclosure
30
Fixed-mount construction
Available in NEMA Type 1 and
3R enclosures
Rear, side and top cable access
Deadfront construction
Front access only requires an
additional wireway to be added
31
32
33
34
35
Source 1 Connections
36
37
Neutral Connections
38
Load Connections
39
40
41
Source 2 Connections
Neutral
Assembly
Magnum-Based Transfer Switches
CA08104001E
Side View of Magnum

Side or Rear Access Required
(Half-High Side Panels and
Back Panels are Not Shown)
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 042
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesFeatures

Power Panel
Performs Power Transfer Between Source 1 and Source 2
Using Magnum Power-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
25
Source 1
26
27
28
Source 2
Side-to-Side
Ledge
29
30
Side-to-Side
Ledge
Contact Wear
Inspection
Area (Ledge
Not Visible
Under Contacts)
Multi-Tap
Transformer
31
32
Electrical Operator
Pushbutton
33
Contact Wear
Inspection Area
(Ledge Now
Becoming Visible
Under Contacts)
Contact Wear
Indicator
Contacts Closed
and in Good
Condition
Contact Wear
Indicator
Contacts Closed
and Wear
is Indicated
Basic Switch Components of Drawout Magnum Automatic Transfer Switches
34
35
The open transition type Magnum

Transfer Switches feature both
mechanical (cable) and electrical
interlocking to prevent paralleling
of sources.
36
Ease of Maintenance
Allows the transfer switch to be readily

applied on most system voltages
worldwide by connecting to the proper
terminals. Available system voltages
include 120, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380,
401, 415, 480, or 600 Vac, 50 or 60 Hz.
Keyed quick-disconnect plugs are

provided for easy and complete
isolation of the control circuitry.
37
Maintenance can be performed on

the logic independent from the power
sections and still allow the user to
manually transfer power under full
load conditions.
38
39
40
Mechanical Cable Interlock
41
42
Voltage Selection Terminals

Logic Disconnect Plugs
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.3-5
Sheet 25 043
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesFeatures
Logic
Superior Main Contact Structure
Application Versatility
Eatons new ATC-900 controller brings
ease of use, adaptability, supervisory
and programming capabilities to
mission-critical applications. The
4.3-inch color TFT display provides
simple arrow keys for quick screen
navigation. Event logging and
recording of time stamped events
are easily viewed or the data may be
downloaded by the USB port. Field
configuration of I/O allows user
adaptability to special requirements.
Automatic Transfer Open/Closed Transition

Open or closed transition type
Magnum transfer switches use the
Eaton programmable ATC-900
microprocessor-based logic controller.
Refer to Technical Data TD140001EN
Open Transition ATC-900 for
Automatic Transfer Switches for
additional information.
ATC-900
All Eaton Magnum transfer switches

meet or exceed the standards set
forth in UL 1008 and UL 489 with high
withstand, totally enclosed Magnum
switches. No other transfer switch
manufacturer has met the rigid testing
requirements of this combination
of standards. Completely enclosed
contacts add a measure of safety
and reliability. They also ensures the
integrity of the contact assemblies
and minimizes the need for periodic
maintenance of the contacts, reducing
downtime and maintenance time.
Fast, Powerful and Safe

Switching Mechanism
The mechanism uses a high speed
m 3-cycle stored energy switching
mechanism. This mechanism can be
operated manually under a full load.
Ease of Coordination and Application

Short-Time Withstand
The use of electronic trips has allowed
performance curve shaping to
facilitate proper system coordination.
The most significant is the short
time rated trip unit.
These trip settings may be set for
what are considered extremely high
currents for much longer durations
than the three-cycle withstand test
required under UL 1008. To facilitate
improved coordination, Eaton Magnum
transfer switches have been tested and
are provided with 30-cycle, extended
withstand ratings.
Unmatched Performance and Versatility

The Eaton family of Magnum transfer
switches offers unmatched performance,
versatility and value for standby power
applications. At the heart of these
designs is the Magnum switch with
the following features:
Optional Integral Overcurrent

Protection Capability
22
23
24
25
26
Optional Digitrip Magnum Trip Unit
Service Entrance
For service entrance and other
applications, Digitrip solid-state trip
units can be integrated into the power
switching section. This eliminates
the need for separate upstream
protective devices, saving cost
and space. Available with various
combinations of long, short time,
instantaneous, ground fault protection
and communications. Overcurrent
trip selection can be made from the
series of Eaton Digitrip RMS trip units
including the standard Digitrip 520
or optional 520M, 520MC or 1150.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Magnum Power-Case Switch
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 044
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesDimensions
22
23
Dimensions
Number A
of
Height
Poles
B
Width
C
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
NEMA 1 Enclosed Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch

2
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
48.00
(1219.2)
1050
(477)
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
48.00
(1219.2)
1050
(477)
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
48.00
(1219.2)
1250
(568)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
48.00
(1219.2)
1900
(863)
25003200
28
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
48.00
(1219.2)
1900
(863)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
48.00
(1219.2)
2000
(910)
4000 1
29
5000 1
25
2002000
26
27
Table 25.3-3. Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switches

Ampere
Rating
24
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm).
Figure 25.3-1. 2003200 A Fixed-Mount NEMA 1

B
NEMA 3R Enclosed Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch
30
2002000
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
63.00
(1600.2)
1600
(726)
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
63.00
(1600.2)
1600
(726)
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
63.00
(1600.2)
1800
(817)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
2400
(1090)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
2400
(1090)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
2500
(1135)
4000
5000
31
32
33
34
35
36
Door Within a Door Design
At 4000 and 5000 A, the standard design is drawout.

See drawout dimensions.
Figure 25.3-2. 2003200 A Fixed-Mount NEMA 3R

Note: NEMA 3R design features an external blank door and an
interior door where the controller/device panel are mounted.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.3-7
Sheet 25 045

B
22
Table 25.3-4. Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches

Ampere
Rating
Number A
of
Height
Poles
B
Width
C
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
23
NEMA 1 Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch

2002000
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
60.00
(1524.0)
1600
(727)
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
60.00
(1524.0)
1600
(727)
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
60.00
(1524.0)
1900
(864)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
2500
(1136)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
2500
(1136)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
2800
(1273)
NEMA 3R Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch

2002000
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
75.00
(1905.0)
2100
(953)
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
75.00
(1905.0)
2100
(953)
90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
75.00
(1905.0)
2400
(1090)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3000
(1362)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3000
(1362)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3300
(1498)
24
25
26
27
28
Figure 25.3-3. 2003200 A Drawout NEMA 1

B
29
30
31
32
33
34
D
Figure 25.3-4. 2003200 A Drawout NEMA 3R
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 046
22

Wireway Cubicle
23
ATS Cubicle
SP
24
Source 1
(Normal)
25
26
Load
27
28
Source 2
(Emergency)
29
30
31
Right Side View

NEMA 1
Front View With Covers

NEMA 1
Emergency Lugs
Located in Rear of Cubicle
32
Table 25.3-5. Connection Type (40005000 A Only)
33
Connection Type
34
Source 1
(Normal)
Normal
Lugs
35
36
Load
Lugs
Emergency
Load
Wireway
Required 1
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Bus
No
No
No
No
37
38
Wireway
Cubicle
Source 2
(Emergency)
39
B
Width
C2
Width
D
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
68.00
(1727.2)
3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
68.00
(1727.2)
Ampere
Rating
No.
of
Poles
4000
5000
A
Height
54.00 (1371.6)
B
C
Front View Without Covers
NEMA 1
32.00 (812.8)
40
41
SP = Shipping Split.
42
Line
Figure 25.3-5. Magnum 40005000 A UnitsDrawout NEMA 1

1
43
2
3
The typical Magnum ATS at 4000 and 5000 A ratings will include one cubicle with the Source 1 and Source 2 power-case switches or breakers.
A second cubicle called a wireway is most likely required unless bus is used for the connections per Connection Type table above. Cable connections
to the wireway cubicle can be made from the top or bottom. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable connections may
be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections to the power-case switch or breaker cubicle are made from the back. The wireway width is
32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width.
Consult factory.
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.3-9
Sheet 25 047

Wireway Cubicle
SP
22
ATS Cubicle
23
24
Source 1
25
26
A
Load
27
Source 2
28
29
30
Front View NEMA 3R With Cover

Emergency Lugs
Located in Rear of Cubicle
31
Right Side View
32
Table 25.3-7. Connection Type (40005000 A Only)
Source 1
(Normal)
Line
Emergency
Load
Wireway
Required 1
33
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
34
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Bus
No
No
No
No
Connection Type
Normal
Lugs
Load
Lugs
35
36
Source 2
(Emergency)
32.00 (812.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
B
C
Front View Without Covers
Ampere
Rating
No.
of
Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C2
Width
D
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
4000
3 or 4
90.00
(2286.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
82.35
(2091.7)
5000
3 or 4
90.00
(2286.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
82.35
(2091.7)
Figure 25.3-6. Magnum 40005000 A UnitsNEMA 3R

1
2
3
The typical Magnum ATS at 4000 and 5000 A ratings will include one cubicle with the Source 1 and Source 2 power-case switches or breakers.
A second cubicle called a wireway is most likely required unless bus is used for the connections per Connection Type table above. Cable connections
to the wireway cubicle can be made from the top or bottom. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable connections may
be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections to the power-case switch or breaker cubicle are made from the back. The wireway width is
32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width.
Consult factory.
CA08104001E
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 048
22
Bypass Isolation
Transfer Switch
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
A bypass isolation switch uses
loadbreak isolation and bypass
transfer power contacts. Thus, should
voltage be lost on the line to which
the ATS is connected, and should
a manual bypass be required to the
other line, this can be accomplished
safely and quickly as described
below. With contactor designs using
non-loadbreak isolation and bypass
switches, manual bypass to the other
line is hindered by mechanical or
electrical safety interlocking.
The bypass isolation switch is
designed for applications where
maintenance, inspection and testing
must be performed while maintaining
continuous power to the load. This
is typically required in critical lifesupport systems and standby power
situations calling for safe system
maintenance with no power
disruptions. Such a design allows
for the quick removal of the different
switching devices for inspection,
maintenance or replacement.

Eatons transfer switch is a rugged,
compact design using Magnum power
switches or Magnum power circuit
breakers to transfer essential loads
from one power source to another.
Open transition switching devices are
interlocked to prevent both switching
devices from being closed at the same
time. The versatile design, in addition
to standard transfer functions, offers
an optional integral thermal and
short-circuit protection in either or
both switching devices.
The switching devices are in a compact
vertical arrangement. The logic can
be easily disconnected from the
switching device without disturbing
critical connections. The enclosure
is free standing, and by using the
specially supplied cleats, the switch
is seismic approved (Option 42). The
terminals are mounted in the rear of
the switch, permitting rear, top, bottom
or side cable or bus bar entrance.
The switching devices have a high
withstand rating. The high-speed,
stored-energy switching mechanism
guarantees a transfer time of less than
three cycles.
Freestanding enclosure
High withstand ratings
Dual drawout on ATS and bypass
Deadfront
Safe manual transfer under load
Magnum stored energy
mechanism
Quick make / quick break
switching times (<3 cycles)
True four-pole switched neutral
Mechanically interlocked
Integral overcurrent trip option
Integrated service entrance
rating option
OSHPD listed

Field-programmable time delays
Time emergency to normal
Time delay emergency failure
LCD color-based display for
programming, system diagnostics
and Help menu
LED indication
Four programmable inputs
and outputs
Standard Modbus 485
USB port for set point downloads
and event recording uploads
Password-protected access to
control functions and set point
programming
Two automatic plant exercisers
load or no load, daily, 7-, 14-,
28-day or calendar date operation,
0600 minute runtime
Optional Features

Automatic transfer operation with
selectable (via programming) nonautomatic or automatic retransfer
with fail-safe
Digital multi-function power
quality metering
DC power input for uninterrupted
monitoring of ATS status
Integrated load metering
EtherNet TCP/IP communications
Standard Features
ATC-900 controller
Drawout cassette on ATS
and bypass

CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.3-11
Sheet 25 049
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesTechnical Data

Table 25.3-9. Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch Mounting
Technical Data
Mounting
Type
Voltage
Current
Amperes
Number
of Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
2, 3, 4
NEMA 1Behind
NEMA 1Thru
NEMA 3R
23
24
25
26
Table 25.3-10. System Coordination InformationWithstand, Closing

and Interrupting Ratings
3-Cycle
30-Cycle 1
Short-Circuit 600 V (kA) Short-Time 600 V (kA)
Transfer Switch
Ampere Rating
22
27
28
UL 1008
Magnum Bypass Isolation Front View

NEMA 1 Through-the-Door
800
1000
1200
100
100
100
85
85
85
29
1600
2000
2500
100
100
100
85
85
85
30
3000
3200
4000
100
100
100
85
85
31
85 2
85 2
UL 891
4000
5000
1
2
32
Ratings used for coordination with upstream breakers with

short-time ratings.
UL 1066 short-time withstand rating.
33
34
INCOMING
SOURCE 1
35
36
SOURCE 1
ISOLATED
SOURCE 1
BYPASS
ATS
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1
POSITION
Front Access Option 54A is Available on All

Magnum Designs NEMA 1 Behind the Door
37
SOURCE 1
BYPASS
LOAD
A
SOURCE 1
AVAILABLE
SOURCE 2
ISOLATED
38
39
ATS
SOURCE 2
SOURCE 2
POSITION
40
SOURCE 2
BYPASS
41
INCOMING
SOURCE 2
SOURCE 2
BYPASS
42
SOURCE 2
AVAILABLE
43
Figure 25.3-7. Typical Bypass Isolation Switch Schematic
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 050
22
23
Dimensions
25
28
29
2002000
32
33
A
Height
B
Width
C
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
3100
(1409)
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
3100
(1409)
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
3700
(1682)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
4700
(2136)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
4700
(2136)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
5500
(2500)

2002000
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3700
(1682)
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3700
(1682)
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
4300
(1955)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
5300
(2410)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
5300
(2410)
25003200
90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
6000
(2730)
30
31
Number
of
Poles
26
27
Figure 25.3-8. 2003200 A Drawout NEMA 1

B
34
35
Table 25.3-11. Magnum Bypass Isolation Drawout Transfer Switches

Ampere
Rating
24
Figure 25.3-9. 2003200 A Drawout NEMA 3R
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.3-13
Sheet 25 051

22
Source 2 Emergency Lugs
23
24
A
32.00
(872.8)
54.00
(1371.8)
25
Note: Seismic mounting
brackets add 3.00 inches (76.2)
width to each side or an
additional 6.00 inches (152.4)
to total width.
54.00
(1371.8)
26
27
Top View
Source 1
Normal
Lugs
28
Emergency
ATS
Breaker
Load
Lugs
29
Normal
Bypass
Breaker
Normal
ATS
Breaker
30
Emergency
Bypass
Breaker
31
Wireway
Cubicle
32
SP
SP
B
C
Right Side View
33
Front View
34
Figure 25.3-10. Magnum 40005000 A UnitsNEMA 1

Note: The 4000 and 5000 A bypass isolation ATS will include two cubicles for the Source 1 and Source 2 Normal and the Bypass power-case
switch. An additional cubicle called a wireway is provided for the Normal and Load connections. The wireway cubicle will have removable
panels on the front, and cable connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections for Emergency are made in the rear.
The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
35
Table 25.3-12. NEMA 1 Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches
36
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C1
Width
Table 25.3-13. Magnum Bypass Isolation Drawout Transfer Switches
D
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
4000
3 or 4
90.00
(2286.0)
137.00
(3479.8)
146.00
(3708.4)
60.00
(1524.0)
5000
3 or 4
90.00
(2286.0)
137.00
(3479.8)
146.00
(3708.4)
60.00
(1524.0)
1
2
Ampere Number A
Rating of Poles Height
C
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
37

4000
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or
additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width.
Consult factory.
B
Width
5000
2 or 3
90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 6900 (3133)
90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 7600 (3450)
2 or 3
90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 7900 (3587)
90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 8600 (3904)
38
39

4000
5000
2 or 3
90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 7900 (3587)
90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 8600 (3904)
2 or 3
90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 8900 (4041)
90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 9600 (4358)
40
41
Table 25.3-14. Terminals

Ampere
Rating
CA08104001E
Normal, Emergency
and Load
Neutral
4000
(10) 3/0750 kcmil
(48) 4/0500 kcmil
5000
(12) 3/0750 kcmil
(48) 4/0500 kcmil
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 052
22
Source 2
Emergency Lugs
23
24
25
26
27
Source 1
Normal
Lugs
28
Top View
29
30
Normal
Bypass
Breaker
Normal
ATS
Breaker
31
Emergency
ATS
Breaker
32
Emergency
Bypass
Breaker
Load
Lugs
33
Wireway
Cubicle
35
36
37
38
39
Right Side View
Front View
Figure 25.3-11. Magnum 40005000 A UnitsNEMA 3R

Note: The 4000 and 5000 A bypass isolation ATS will include two cubicles for the Source 1 and Source 2 Normal and the Bypass power-case
switch. An additional cubicle called a wireway is provided for the Normal and Load connections. The wireway cubicle will have removable
panels on the front, and cable connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections for Emergency are made in the rear.
The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Table 25.3-15. NEMA 3R Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches

C
Width
D
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Number
of Poles
A
Height
4000
3 or 4
90.00
140.00 146.00 82.35
(2286.0) (3556.0) (3708.4) (2091.7)
5000
3 or 4
90.00
140.00 146.00 82.35
(2286.0) (3556.0) (3708.4) (2091.7)
B
Width
Ampere
Rating
40
SP
SP
34
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or
additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width.
Consult factory.
Table 25.3-16. Connection Type (40005000 A Only) 3

Connection Type
Emergency
Load
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Bus
No
No
No
No
41
Wireway
Line
A wireway is required in accordance with the following table for 4000

and 5000 A ratings.
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
January 2015
25.4-1
Sheet 25 053
22
Table 25.4-1. ATC Controller Feature Selection Chart

Feature Description
ATC-100
ATC-300+
ATC-900
23
24
25
Transition
Open transition
Standard
Standard
Standard
Closed transition
Not available
Not available
Standard
26
Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE)
Standard
Standard
Standard
27
Time delay engine start (TDES)
Standard
Standard
Standard
Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN)
Standard
Standard
Standard
Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC)
Standard
Standard
Standard
Time delay emergency fail (TDEF)
Standard
Standard
Standard
SelectableOFF, 7-, 14-, 28-day

interval fixed run time 15 minutes

interval, 0600 minutes, no load/
load with fail-safe
Two independent exerciser

modesOFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day
interval or by calendar date
(up to 12 independent calendar
dates). Test operations include
independent transfer time delays
Timers
29
Engine/Generator Exerciser
Plant exerciser (PE) with fail-safe
28
Source 1 Sensing
All-phase undervoltage and underfrequency
protection
Standard
Standard
Standard
All-phase overvoltage and overfrequency

protection
Standard
Standard
Standard
Three-phase rotation sensing
Not available
Standard
Standard
Not available
Standard
Standard
All-phase undervoltage and underfrequency

protection
Standard
Standard
Standard
All-phase overvoltage and overfrequency

protection
Standard
Standard
Standard
Three-phase rotation sensing
Not available
Standard
Standard
Not available
Standard
Standard
Source 2 Sensing
Manual Controls
Test operators
Standard
Standard
Standard
Four-position test selector switch (FPSS)
Not available
Not available
Optional
Time delay bypass pushbutton
Not available
Standard
Standard
Maintenance selector switch (MSS)
Not available
Optional
Optional
Automatic/manual operation selector switch
Not available
Optional
Optional
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Automatic/manual retransfer selector switch
Not available
Not available
Optional
Manual retransfer pushbutton
Not available
Optional
Optional
39
Source 1 connected / Source 2 connected
Standard
Standard
Standard
Source 1 available / Source 2 available
Standard
Standard
Standard
40
Source 1 tripped / Source 2 tripped
Standard
Standard
Standard
Indications / Status Display
41
42
43
CA08104001E

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 054
22
Table 25.4-1. ATC Controller Feature Selection Chart (Continued)

Feature Description
ATC-100
ATC-300+
ATC-900
Not available
23
24
Customer Outputs
25
Standard2NO and 2NC
Not available
Source 1 available / Source 2 available contacts Not available
Not available
Standard1 Form C
26
Load sequence
Not available
Not available
Configurable1 Form C
Selective load shed
Not available
Not available
Load bank control
Not available
Not available
27
Pre-transfer
Not available
Standard1 Form C
Pre-/post-transfer
Not available
Not available
Source 1 connected
Not available
Not available
28
29
30
31
32
Source 1 / Source 2 present contacts
Source 2 connected
Not available
Not available
ATS not in automatic
Not available
Not available
General alarm
Not available
Standard
ATS in test
Not available
Not available
Engine test aborted
Not available
Not available
Cooldown in process
Not available
Not available
Engine start contact status
Not available
Not available
Emergency inhibit on
Not available
Not available
Source 1 position indication contact
Not available
Standard1 Form C
Standard1 Form C
Source 2 position indication contact
Not available
Standard1 Form C
Standard1 Form C
Switch Position Indication Contact
Customer Inputs
33
34
35
36
37
Not available
Standard
Standardconfigurable input
Load shed / emergency inhibit
Not available
Standard
Monitor mode
Not available
Optional
Bypass timers
Not available
Not available
Lockout
Not available
Optional
Manual retransfer on/off
Not available
Programmed
Manual retransfer
Not available
Standard
Slave in
Not available
Not available
Remote engine test
Not available
Not available
Preferred source selection
Not available
Not available
Remote load test
Not available
Not available
ATS on bypass
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Optional
Integrated Metering
38
39
DCT meteringload side
Communications
Modbus 485
Not available
Optional
Standard
Modbus TCP/IP
Not available
Optional
Optional
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
January 2015
25.4-3
Sheet 25 055

Table 25.4-2. ATC Controller Specification Selection Chart
Specification Description
ATC-100
ATC-300+
ATC-900
22
23
24
Transfer Mode Open Transition

Delayedtime delay neutral
Standardbased on construction
In-phase monitoring
Load voltage decay
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Transfer Mode Closed Transition

Closed transition
25
26
27
Closed transition/In-phase
Not available
Not available
Closed transition/In-phase/
Time delay neutral
Not available
Not available
Closed transition/In-phase/
Load voltage delay
Not available
Not available
28
Not available
Optional
Optional
29
Service Entrance Rating

Source 1, Source 2 or both, and with
and without ground fault protection
Stainless Steel Cover
30
SS lockable cover for controller
Programming Selections
3 seconds (fixed)
01800 seconds
0166 seconds
5 minutes (fixed)
01800 seconds
0166 seconds
5 minutes (fixed)
01800 seconds
0166 seconds
3 seconds (fixed)
0120 seconds
0120 seconds
Time delay neutral
Not available
0120 seconds
0120 seconds or based on load

voltage decay of 230% of nominal
Time delay Source 2 fail
Not available
06 seconds
06 seconds
Time delay voltage unbalance
Not available
1030 seconds
1030 seconds
Voltage unbalance three-phase
Not available
0 or 1 (1 = enabled)
Enabled or disabled
Phase reversal three-phase
Not available
Dropout 520%
Pickup (DO 2%) 3%
Dropout 520%
Pickup (DO 2%) 3%
In-phase
Not available
Load sequencing
Not available
Not available
0120 seconds (up to xx devices)
Pre-transfer signal
Not available
1120 seconds
0120 seconds
Plant exerciser

interval, fixed run time 15 minutes,

interval, 0600 minutes, no load/
load with fail-safe
Two independent exerciser modes

OFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval or by
calendar date (up to 12 independent
calendar dates). Test operations
include independent transfer
time delays
Not available
Not available
Source 1, Source 2 or None
Commitment to transfer in TDNE
Not available
Not available
Enabled or disabled
Retransfer mode N/A automatic or

manual
Not available
Optional
Enabled or disabled
Auto daylight saving time adjustment Not available
Not available
Enabled or disabled
System selection
Utility/generator or dual utility
Utility/generator, dual utility,

dual generator or three source
Utility/generator
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 056
22
Table 25.4-2. ATC Controller Specification Selection Chart (Continued)

Specification Description
ATC-100
ATC-300+
ATC-900
System application voltage
Up to 480 Vac
Up to 600 Vac
Up to 600 Vac
Voltage measurements
Source 1 and 2
Source 1 and 2VAB, VBC and VCA
Source 1, 2 and loadVAB, VBC

and VCA
120480 Vac
0790 Vac rms
0700 Vac rms
Operating power
95145 Vac
65145 Vac
65160 Vac
24 Vdc (W10%)
Frequency measurements
Source 2
Source 1 and 2
Source 1 and 2
5060 Hz
4070 Hz
4070 Hz
20 to +70 C
20 to +70 C
20 to +70 C
30 to +85 C
30 to +85 C
30 to +85 C
Operating humidity
0 to 95% relative humidity

(noncondensing)

(noncondensing)

(noncondensing)
Operating environment
Resistant to ammonia, methane,

nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons
23
24
Voltage Specifications
25
26
27
28
Frequency Specifications
29
30
31
Front Panel Indication

Mimic diagram with LED indication
Unit status, Source 1 and 2 available

and connected (five total)

and connected (five total)

and connected (seven total)
32
Main display
N/A
LCD-based display, 2 lines,

16 characters
LCD display, 4.3 inch color TFT

(480x272)
Display language
N/A
English, French and Spanish
English, French and Spanish
33
Communications capable
N/A
Modbus 485
Modbus 485 or Ethernet TCP/IP
Enclosure compatibility
NEMA 1 and 3R
NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X UV

resistant faceplate
NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X UV

resistant faceplate
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
January 2015
25.4-5
Sheet 25 057
ATC-100 ControllerGeneral Description
ATC-100 Controller

Standard Features
ATC-100 Controller
General Description
The ATC-100 Controller is a
comprehensive, multi-function,
microprocessor-based ATS controller.
It is a compact, self-contained,
panel-mounted device designed to
replace traditional relay and solidstate logic panels.
The ATC-100 Controller provides both
fixed and jumper-selectable settings
to allow for a range of applications.
It operates from all system voltages
between 120 and 480 Vac, single-phase
and three-phase, at 50 or 60 Hz. In
addition, a period of no control power
operation is provided.

Controller settings via jumpers
located at the rear of the unit
LED indication
SelectableOFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day
interval fixed run time 15 minutes
Monitor utility and generator power
source voltages and generator
power source frequency
Provide undervoltage protection
of the utility and generator
power sources
Provide underfrequency and overfrequency protection of the utility
and generator power source
Permit easy customer setup
Permit system testing
Provide faceplate source status
indications
The ATC-100 Controller monitors the

condition of the three-phase line-toline voltage and frequency of both the
utility and generator power sources.
It can also be set up for single-phase
operation. The ATC-100 controller
provides the necessary intelligence
to ensure that the transfer switch
operates properly through a series
of sensing and timing functions.
UL listed component
IEC 61000-4-2, 61000-4-3, 61000-4-4,
61000-4-5, 61000-4-6, 61000-4-11
CISPR 11, Class B
FCC Part 15, Class B
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
The ATC-100 controller can be used

with both the breaker-based design
and the contactor-based design.
See Table 25.4-4 for ranges and
factory settings.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 058
ATC-100 ControllerTechnical Data
22
Technical Data
Table 25.4-3. ATC-100 Controller Specifications
23
Description
Specification
Input control voltage
95 to 145 Vac 50/60 Hz
24
Utility VAB Generator VAB

Utility VBC Generator VBC
Utility VCA Generator VCA
25
0 to 575 Vac rms (50/60 Hz)
26
27
28
29
1% of full scale
Frequency measurements of
Generator
40 Hz to 70 Hz
0.3 Hz over the measurement range
20 to +70 C (4 to +158 F)
0 to +85 C (22 to +185 F)
Operating humidity
0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing)
Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons
Generator start relay
5 A, 1/6 hp at 250 Vac

5 A at 30 Vdc with a 150 W maximum load
K1, K2 relays
10 A, 13 hp at 250 Vac
10 A at 30 Vdc
NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and NEMA 12

UV-resistant ATC-100 faceplate
30
Table 25.4-4. Adjustable Features with Range and Factory Default t
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Set Point
Fixed/
Adjustable
Description
Range
Factory Default
Breakers
Contactors
TDES
Fixed
3 seconds
3 seconds
3 seconds
TDNE
Jumper-selectable
Time delay normal to

emergency
2 or 15 seconds
15 seconds
15 seconds
TDEN
Fixed
Time delay emergency to

normal
5 minutes
5 minutes
5 minutes
TDEC
Fixed
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
NOM FREQ
Jumper-selectable
Nominal frequency
50 or 60 Hz
As ordered
As ordered
NOM VOLTS
Jumper-selectable
Nominal voltage
120, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380 and 480 V
As ordered
As ordered
S1 UV DROP
Fixed
Utility undervoltage
dropout
80% of NOMV
80% of NOMV
in volts
80% of NOMV
in volts
S2 UV DROP
Fixed
Generator undervoltage
dropout
80% of NOMV
80% of NOMV
in volts
80% of NOMV
in volts
S1 UV PICK
Fixed
Utility undervoltage
pickup
90% of NOMV
90% of NOMV
in volts
90% of NOMV
in volts
S2 UV PICK
Fixed
Generator undervoltage
pickup
90% of NOMV
90% of NOMV
in volts
90% of NOMV
in volts
S2 UF DROP
Fixed
Utility underfrequency
dropout
90% of NOMF
90% of NOMF
in hertz
90% of NOMF
in hertz
S2 UF PICK
Fixed
Generator underfrequency
pickup
95% of NOMF
95% of NOMF
in hertz
95% of NOMF
in hertz
S2 OF DROP
Jumper-selectable
Generator overfrequency
dropout
Off or 115% of NOMF (contactor)
Off
115%
S2 OF PICK
Jumper-selectable
Generator overfrequency
pickup
Off or 110% of NOMF
Off
110%
Generator test Jumper-selectable
Generator test programming
7-, 14- or 28-day
7-day
7-day
Test mode
Jumper-selectable
Test mode
Off, No Load, Load
Off
Off
TER
Fixed
Engine run test time
15 minutes
15 minutes
15 minutes
PHASES
Jumper-selectable
1 or 3
As ordered
As ordered
TDEF
Fixed
Time delay emergency

fail timer
6 seconds
6 seconds
6 seconds
TDN
Jumper-selectable
Time delay neutral
Disabled (0 seconds) or enabled

(2 seconds)
Enabled
(2 seconds)
Enabled
(2 seconds)
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
January 2015
25.4-7
Sheet 25 059
ATC-300+ ControllerGeneral Description
ATC-300+ Controller

Standard Features

ATC-300+ Controller
General Description
Transfer switches are equipped

with the high-performance ATC-300+
digital transfer controller, receive
rock-solid monitoring, status reporting
and transfer control operation.
Its superior design and robust
construction make the ATC-300+
the industry benchmark for critical
and distributed power systems.
Eatons ATC-300+ controller-based

automatic transfer switch is designed
to provide unmatched performance,
reliability and versatility for critical
standby power applications.
Pre-transfer signal contacts

1NO/1NC
Source-2 emergency inhibit contact
time delays
system diagnostic and Help
message display
LED indication
RS-485 communication capability
Optional Features
CA08104001E
Suitable for use as service equipment

in the standard enclosure size when
used with breaker-based design
transfer switches
Available UL 1449 3rd Edition
compliant surge protection devices
Integrated distribution panels
Field-selectable multi-tap transformer
panel permits operation on a wide
range of system voltages
Integral overcurrent protection
available when used with breakerbased design transfer switches
Ammeterload side
Power quality metering
Manual retransfer selector switch
Load shed/emergency inhibit
Manual retransfer
Communication via Modbus RTU
metering data, engine test, set point
management system status
Remote annunciator available
UL listed component
Meets UL 1008
Meets intent of UL 991
Meets IEC 1000-4-2, 1000-4-3,
1000-4-4, 1000-4-5, 1000-4-6, 1000-4-11
Meets CISPR 11, Class A
Complies with FCC Part 15, Class A
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 060
ATC-300+ ControllerTechnical Data
22
Technical Data
Table 25.4-5. ATC-300+ Controller Specifications
23
Description
Specification
Input control voltage
65145 Vac 50/60 Hz
24
25
Source 1 VAB
Source 1 VBC
Source 1 VCA
0790 Vac rms (50/60 Hz)
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
2% of nominal input voltage
Frequency measurement
Source 1 and Source 2
Source 2 VAB
Source 2 VBC
Source 2 VCA
4070 Hz
0.3 Hz
Undervoltage dropout range

Breaker/switch style ATS
Contactor style ATS
5097% of the nominal system voltage

Undervoltage pickup range
(Dropout +2%) to 99% of the nominal system voltage
Overvoltage dropout range

Contactor style ATS

Overvoltage pickup range
103% to (dropout 2%) of the nominal system voltage
Underfrequency dropout range
9097% of the nominal system frequency
Underfrequency pickup range
(Dropout +1 Hz) to 99% of the nominal system frequency
Overfrequency dropout range

Contactor style ATS
103 to 110% of the nominal system frequency

103 to 105% of the nominal system frequency
Overfrequency pickup range
101% to (dropout 1 Hz) of the nominal system frequency
20 to +70 C (4 to +158 F)
0 to +85 C (22 to +185 F)
Operating humidity
095% relative humidity (noncondensing)
Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons
Generator start relay
5 A, 1/6 hp at 250 Vac/5 A at 30 Vdc with a 150W maximum load
K1, K2, pre-transfer, alarm relays, K3, K4
10 A, 13 hp at 250 Vac/10 A at 30 Vdc
NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 UV-resistant ATC-300+ faceplate
The following set points are programmable if the corresponding feature is programmed.
35
Table 25.4-6. ATC-300+ Programming Features/Set Points 1

Set Point
Set Point Units
Description
Range
Factory
Default
TDES
Minutes: seconds
0120 seconds
0:03
TDNE
Minutes: seconds
01800 seconds
0:00
TDEN
Minutes: seconds
01800 seconds
5:00
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
TDEC
Minutes: seconds
01800 seconds
5:00
TDN
Minutes: seconds
Time delay neutral
0120 seconds
0:00
PLANT EXER
Days
Plant exerciser programming
Off, daily, 7-day, 14-day or 28 day
Off
TEST MODE
Test Mode
0, 1 or 2 (0 = no load engine test, 1 = load engine test, 2 =disabled)
TER
Hours: minutes
0600 minutes
5:00
TPRE
Minutes: seconds
Pre-transfer delay timer
0120 seconds
0:00
PHASES
1 or 3
As ordered
VOLT UNBAL
Volts
Voltage unbalanced
UNBAL DROP %
Percent
Percent for unbalanced

voltage dropout
520% of phase voltage unbalance
20%
UNBAL PICK %
Percent
Percent for unbalanced

voltage pickup
Dropout minus (UNBAL DROP % 2) to 3%
10%
UNBAL DELAY
Seconds
Unbalanced delay timer
1030
0:20
TDEF
Seconds
Time delay emergency fail timer
06 seconds
PHASE REV
Phase reversal
OFF, ABC or CBA
OFF
Complete list of programming selections found in IB01602009E.
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
January 2015
25.4-9
Sheet 25 061
ATC-300+ ControllerTechnical Data
22
23
Source 1, Source 2 and Load
Colored LED lights show status
of both sources and load.
24
25
LED Display
Unit will provide LED readout
showing actual metered values for
Voltage, Frequency and Condition
(including Normal, Undervoltage,
Overvoltage and so on).
26
Increase/Decrease
A detailed explanation
of these buttons can be
found in the Operation
section.
Engine Test Button

Pressing this button twice
initiates an engine test.
27
28
29
30
Help
Pressing the Help button in any
function mode will bring up display
messages, explanations and
prompts to assist the operator.
Lamp Test
Enter
Step Button
Shows multiple
variables under
each display select
function.
31
32
Closed Transition ATC-300+ Front Panel Display and Button Functions
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 062
ATC-900 Automatic Transfer Switch ControllerGeneral Description
22
ATC-900 Automatic Transfer

Switch Controller
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
Eatons ATC-900 brings intelligence,

adaptability, and enhanced supervisory
and programming capabilities to
Eatons complete transfer switch
product offering including contactor-,
breaker- and Magnum-based
transfer switches.
Ease of use is a major benefit of the

ATC-900 controller. The simple yet
powerful user interface includes many
intuitive operating features. The color
display and LED indications provide
enhanced operator visibility of transfer
switch status and system detail.
Clear operational focus was achieved
through design simplicity. Front arrow
keys allow for quick screen navigation,
removal of codes and abbreviations
avoid potential confusion, and refined
data screens provide for ease of
viewing and edits.
The one standard model concept

offers a variety of monitoring and
control features, selective load
shedding, remote load testing, along
with event logging/recording and
Modbus communications. With
configurable monitoring and control
features and add-on accessory
modules, the ATC-900 provides the
flexibility to meet current and future
system needs.
25
29
General Description
ATC-900 Automatic Transfer

Switch Controller
High reliability makes the ATC-900
ideal for mission-critical installations
in the health care, water, industrial and
data center industries. An intelligent
control architecture allows the
ATC-900 to address virtually any
system requirements. Typical
applications include utility-to-utility,
utility-to-generator and generator-togenerator transfer pairs, and advanced
programming features provide for
control of three-source systems.
Design flexibility allows for operations
with open, in-phase, delayed or closed
transition platforms.
Primary Functions
The ATC-900 Automatic Transfer
Switch Controller offers these standard
features:
35
Monitor normal and emergencysource voltages and frequencies

Provide transfer and retransfer
control signals
Provide engine/generator start and
shutdown signals
Permit user programming of
operational set points
Display real-time and historical
information
Permit system testing
Store customer and factoryestablished parameters in
nonvolatile memory
Provide faceplate source status
indication
Provide an LCD for programming
and status readouts
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
LCD screen for system status,

programming, system diagnostics,
help, and troubleshooting
Event logging and recording,
450 time stamped events
0600 V field programmable system
voltage flexible configuration with
assignable inputs and outputs
Three-source ATS controlmaster
and slave controller functionality
Selective, automatic load shedding
Industry standard communication
protocolsModbus RTU and/or
Modbus TCP/IP communications
interface
USB drive for uploading and
downloading of event data
USB drive for uploading and
downloading programmed
set points
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
January 2015
25.4-11
Sheet 25 063
ATC-900 Automatic Transfer Switch ControllerFeatures, Benefits and Functions

Table 25.4-7. ATC-900 Features
Features
ATC-900
22
Hardware
4.3-inch color TFT LCD display
UV-resistant faceplate
Mimic diagram and LED status indicators
Suitable for application over a wide range of environmental conditions
Positive feedback membrane pushbuttons for application in harsh environments
Help function for detailed description of displayed message
Password protected system test pushbutton
Bypass time delay pushbutton
Form C engine start contact for Source 1 and Source 2
S1 and S2 available Form C contacts
Self-diagnostic and system diagnostic functions with LED indication

DC power input
Optional
23
24
25
26
27
Metering
True rms voltage sensing of Source 1, Source 2 and Load
Frequency sensing of Source 1, Source 2 and Load
Voltage unbalance and phase rotation sensing

Load current sensing
Optional
Sampling at 64 samples per cycle
Optional
Source 1 voltages (three-phase)
Source 2 voltages (three-phase)
Load voltages (three-phase)
Source 1 frequency
Source 2 frequency
Load frequency
Load currents (three-phase)
Optional
Load kW
Optional
Load kVAR
Optional
Load kVA
Optional
PF
Optional
Programming
Programmable set points stored in nonvolatile memory
System monitoring with historical data storage and display
Digital set points for accurate and consistent performance
Password-protected access to control functions and set point programming
Four programmable control inputs
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Four programmable control outputs

Expandable I/O modules (up to 20 I/O total)
Optional
Automatic plant exercisertwo plant exerciser schedules, Off, daily, 7-day, 14-day,
28-day, calendar, separate TDNE, TDEN, TDEC timers from normal operation,
control input provided for remotely initiating an engine test
37
38
Communications
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP/IP
Optional
USB port for set point configuration and event-recording downloads
Event History
320 time-stamped events

2 seconds of metered data stored before and after a transfer event
39
Optional
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 064
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Unit Status Light

This LED blinks green indicating that the ATC-900
is operating and providing the transfer switch
control function in keeping with programmed set
points. If the LED is not lit or is on continuously,
a problem may be indicated.
LED Mimic Diagram

Source 1 and Source 2 color-coded
LEDs provide Available and
Connected status indication.
Help
Displays controller firmware
version and user tips.
Status Screen
The ATC-900 Main Menu screen provides
transfer switch status at a glance. Source 1,
Source 2, and load-metering data are
displayed as well as any active alarms.
Lamp Test
Pressing the Lamp Test pushbutton lights all LEDs
and then displays ATC-900 controller information.
Display
The ATC-900 eliminates the use of codes
and abbreviations for transfer switch
functions. Data screens are grouped for
ease of viewing and edits.
Engine Test
Performs an engine test using the programmed
engine run and cool down times. This is a
password-protected feature.
Arrow Key Navigation

Right and Left Arrow Keys are used to navigate
menu options and Up and Down Arrow Keys
are used to select and change set point values.
Bypass Time Delays

Pressing the Enter and Help pushbuttons
simultaneously reduces the active programmed
time delay to zero to simplify test procedures.
ATC-900 User Interface
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Configurable Inputs
System inputs are wetted contacts. System
inputs can be configured to perform a preset list
of functions. (Note: A factory configured input
cannot be reconfigured in the field if the factory
provides associated hardware.)
RS-422
Factory Use Only

The sensing inputs are the connection points
for monitoring Source 1, Source 2, and the
Load. Three-phase systems are connected to
Phase A, B and C. Single-phase systems are
connected to points Phase A and Phase B.
Accessory I/O Port
40
Factory Use Only

Source 1 and Source 2 auxiliary: These inputs
are connected to the power switching devices
position indication contacts
K1, K2, K3 and K4: These Form-A output
contacts are utilized to control the power
switching mechanism. They operate in
conjunction with the Source 1 and 2 auxiliary
inputs
41
Control Power Inputs (Source 1 and Source 2)

The control power input range is 65145 Vac,
50/60 Hz, 936 Vdc.
38
39
42
43
DCT Module
RS-232 (ATC-900 ECAM)
Modbus 485
USB Port
Generator start
Form-C contact. This is a latching relay utilized
to initiate startup and shutdown cycles of the
engine/generator set. The GENERATOR START
contact is rated 5 amperes at 250 Vac/30 Vdc.
Earth Ground
Provides a connection point for the common
system ground.
Configurable Outputs
Four Form C dry relay contacts that can be
configured to perform a preset list of functions.
Contacts are rated 10 amperes at 250 Vac/30 Vdc.
Note: A factory-configured output cannot be
reconfigured in the field if the factory provides
associated hardware)
Source 1 and Source 2 Available
Form C dry relay contacts that indicate
Source 1 and Source 2 availability based on the
programmed voltage and frequency set points.
Contacts are rated 10 amperes at 250 Vac/30 Vdc.
ATC-900 Connections
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
January 2015
25.4-13
Sheet 25 065

ATC-900 Programmable Set Points
Table 25.4-8 lists only controller features; switch features are not listed, as they are defined by switch construction.
Transition settings are specific to the transfer switch construction.
23
Table 25.4-8. Features and Set Points

Option
Number
22
Description
Range
Factory
Default
General Settings
Set new password
00009999
0900
Selected language
English, French or Spanish
English
Nominal frequency
50 or 60 Hz
As ordered
Nominal voltage
110600 V
As ordered
Number of phases
1 or 3
As ordered
Number of generators
0, 1 or 2
Preferred source
Source 1 or Source 2
Source 1
PT ratio
2:1500:1
As ordered
CT ratio
2005000
Daylight saving time
On or Off
Operating mode
Stand-alone/master or slave
Master
Phase sequence check
ABC, CBA or Off
Off
Commitment to transfer in TDNE
Yes or no
No
Manual retransfer
Auto, manual or external
As ordered
Modbus address
1247
Modbus baud rate
0 = 9600, 1, even
9600
1 = 9600, 1, odd
2 = 9600, 2, none
3 = 9600, 1, none
4 = 19,200, 1, even
5 = 19,200, 1, odd
6 = 19,200, 2, none
7 = 19,200, 1, none
Closed transition On or Off
On or Off
As ordered
Closed voltage difference
15%
2%
Closed frequency difference
0.00.3 Hz
0.3
Disable, in-phase default to alarm,

in-phase default to open transition
As ordered
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Transition Settings
47
32f/32d
34
Closed transition
35
Openin-phase transition
In-phaseOn or Off
36
In-phase frequency difference
0.03.0 Hz
1.0
Synchronization timer
160 minutes
32a/32d
Opendelayed transition
Time delay neutral
0120 seconds
Load voltage decay
230% of nominal voltage
6%
38
39
37
Time Delays
1a
09999 seconds
0:00
3a
09999 seconds
5:00
35A
Time delay pre-transfer
0120 seconds
0:01
35C
Time delay post-transfer
0120 seconds
0:10
2A
Time delay engine 1 start
0120 seconds
0:03
Time delay engine 2 start
0120 seconds
0:03
4A
09999 seconds
5:00
7A
Time delay engine fail timer
06 seconds
0:06
Voltage unbalance time delay
1030 seconds
0:30
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 066
22
23
Table 25.4-8. Features and Set Points

Option
Number
Description
Range
Factory
Default
Source 1 undervoltage dropout
7097% of nominal
80%
Source 1 undervoltage pickup
(dropout + 2%) to 99% of nominal
90%
Source Settings
26P
24
5P
Source 2 undervoltage dropout
7097% of nominal
80%
Source 2 undervoltage pickup
(dropout + 2%) to 99% of nominal
90%
25
26K
Source 1 overvoltage dropout
105120% of nominal (0 = disabled)
115%
Source 1 overvoltage pickup
103% of nominal to (dropout 2%) (0 = disabled)
105%
5K
Source 2 overvoltage dropout
115%
Source 2 overvoltage pickup
103% of nominal to (dropout 2%) (0 = disabled)
105%
26J
Source 1 underfrequency dropout
94%
Source 1 underfrequency pickup
(dropout + 1 Hz) to 99% of nominal (0 = disabled)
96%
5J
Source 2 underfrequency dropout
94%
Source 2 underfrequency pickup
(dropout + 1 Hz) to 99% of nominal (0 = disabled)
96%
26N
Source 1 overfrequency dropout
103110% (0 = disabled)
106%
Source 1 overfrequency pickup
101% to (dropout 1 Hz) (0 = disabled)
104%
5N
Source 2 overfrequency dropout
103110% (0 = disabled)
106%
Source 2 overfrequency pickup
101% to (dropout 1 Hz) (0 = disabled)
104%
Source 1 percent for unbalanced

voltage dropout
520% of phase-to-phase voltage unbalance

(0 = disabled)
12%

voltage pickup
3% to (dropout 2%) (0 = disabled)
10%

voltage dropout
520% of phase-to-phase voltage unbalance

(0 = disabled)
12%

voltage pickup
3% to (dropout 2%) (0 = disabled)
10%
26
27
28
29
26L
30
31
32
5L
Engine Test/Plant Exerciser (PE1 and PE2 are independently programmable)

6B
33
Engine test pushbutton on panel

Test mode
No load, load transfer, disabled
Load transfer
0600 minutes
Load transfer
PE time delay normal

to emergency
09999 seconds
1 minute
PE time delay emergency

to normal
09999 seconds
1 minute
PE time delay engine cooldown
09999 seconds
5 minutes
PE1/PE2 test mode
No load, load transfer, disabled
Disabled
36
PE1/PE2 run time
0600 minutes
30 minutes
PE1/PE2 schedule
Off, daily, 7-day, 14-day, 28-day or calendar date

(up to 12 user-specified dates)
30 minutes
37
PE1/PE2 calendar date
Month: 112; Day: 131
30 minutes
PE1/PE2 day of week
1 Sunday, 2 Monday, 3 Tuesday, 4 Wednesday,

5 Thursday, 6 Friday or 7 Saturday
30 minutes
PE1/PE2 plant start time
HH:MM AM/PM
30 minutes
Accessory I/O modules
04
34
23M
35
38
Accessory I/O
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
25.4-15
Sheet 25 067

Flexible Configuration
Designed for scalability, the ATC-900
can be configured for a wide variety
of applications. A mix-and-match
approach to features allows the user to
build a transfer switch controller that
meets the precise application needs.
Additional I/O can be added at any

time by adding an external I/O module.
Each I/O module contains four inputs
and outputs and up to four modules
can be daisy chained to the ATC-900
controller.
Voltage Inputs (measurement category)
The ATC-900 controller includes four

user configurable inputs and outputs.
The inputs and outputs can be
assigned functions from a predefined
list of options either at the factory or
in the field.
Inputs
Monitor mode
Bypass timers
Lockout
Manual retransfer On or Off
Manual retransfer
Slave in
Remote engine test
Go to emergency
Emergency inhibit
ATS on bypass
Go to neutral
Outputs (control)
Load sequence
Selective load shed
Load bank control
Pre-/post-transfer
Pre-transfer
Post-transfer
User remote control
Outputs (status/alarms)
Source 1 available (standard)
Source 2 available (standard)
Source 1 connected
Source 2 connected
General alarm
ATS in test
Engine test aborted
Cooldown in process
Generator 1 start status
Generator 2 start status
ATS on bypass
Range: universal, auto-ranging up to

416 Vac LN, 721 Vac LL
Supported hookups: 3-element wye
or delta
Input impedance: 2 m ohm/phase
Burden: 0.0022 VA/phase at 120 V
Fault withstand: meets IEEE C37.90.1
I/O ModuleThe ATC-900 optional I/O

module provides users with four additional
assignable inputs and outputs. Up to four
I/O modules can be added to an ATC-900
controller providing a total of 20 inputs
and outputs.
Metering
Optional metering requires the
addition of a DCT module. The DCT
module mounts directly on the back
of the controller.
The DCT module incorporates a
current transformer interface to the
ATC-900 allowing current to be
metered along with voltage and
frequency. Combined with the
ATC-900, the DCT module serves
as a multi-function power meter and
provides measurement of the listed
electrical parameters. Readings are
displayed on the ATC-900 controller
display or can be monitored through
Modbus 485.
5A nominal, 10 A maximum
Burden: 0.005 VA per phase
maximum at 11 A
Pickup current: 0.1% of nominal
Connections: screw terminals
Maximum input wire gauge:
AWG #12/2.5 mm 2
Fault withstand: 100 A/10 seconds,
300 A/3 seconds, 500 A/1 second
24
26
27
28
29
Isolation
23
25
Current Inputs
22
All inputs are isolated to 2600 Vac
30
Measurement Methods
Voltage, current: true rms

Power: sampling at 64 samples
per cycle on all channels measured
readings simultaneously
A/D conversion: 16 simultaneous
12 bit analog to digital converters
Table 25.4-9. Current Voltage Frequency
Metering Data
Metering
Units
Accuracy
33
34
Amperes 1% of
reading
Volts
1% of
reading
Lineto-line
voltage
36
0.2 Hz of
reading
Range is
20255 Hz
37
35
Voltage
VAB, VBC,
VCA
32
Notes
Current
IA, IB, IC
31
Frequency
Frequency
Hz
Table 25.4-10. Power and Energy

Metering Data
DCT Module Attached
38
Power
Metering
Units
Accuracy
Notes
Power
kW
2% of
reading
Approx.
1-second
update
kVA
kVA
2% of
reading
Approx.
1-second
update
kVAR
kVAR
2% of
reading
Approx.
1-second
update
PF (power
factor)
0 to 1.00
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 068
22
23
24
25
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Event Summary
In a mission-critical application, a failure to transfer to the

backup power system requires quick and decisive action.
Eatons ATC-900 controller provides users with the data
required to quickly identify the root cause of a backup power
system failure and minimize system downtime. This data
allows the user to identify a specific event and obtain
the detailed event information including a step by step
breakdown of the transfer sequence.
Historical Data
26
27
Event Summary Display
28
The ATC-900 controller stores 100 transfer summaries,

350 transfer details, 100 alarms and 20 time adjustments.
29
Events include:
30
32
33
The historical data display indicates historical and

cumulative counter values as follows:
34
35
36
Historical Data Display
31
Source 1 available
Source 1 connected
Source 1 engine run
Source 2 available
Source 2 connected
Source 2 engine run
Tier IV timer
Load energized
Number of transfers
Actions of the transfer sequence

Alarms
Changes to the set points
Changes to the time/date
Resetting a historical counter
Engine run test
Time-stamping resolution of 1 second.
Event Details
Historical counter resets are date and time-stamped events

that are captured in the event log.
37
38
Event Details Display
39
40
Each transfer event can be exploded to view a step by step,

time stamped, sequence of operation for a transfer event. All
metered values are also logged for each event and can be
viewed on the event data screen. Time stamping resolution
of 0.1 seconds.
41
42
43
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
25.4-17
Sheet 25 069

Hi-Speed Capture
HMi Remote Annunciator and Controller

The HMi Remote Annunciator and Controller monitors and
controls up to eight transfer switches on a 7-inch LCD touch
screen. It is compatible with either Modbus RTU or Modbus
TCP/IP protocols. A basic mimic bus for each transfer switch
displays source availability, source connected and preferred
source. Users can drill down to metered source values and
event history for each transfer switch. All control features are
password-protected and include engine test, transfer to
emergency (peak shaving), manual retransfer and bypass
time delays.
22
23
24
25
26
27
High Speed Capture Display, Pre and Post Event
The ATC-900 stores metered data updated on a continuous

20 millisecond basis for specific events. The data is captured
2 seconds before and 2 seconds after the event (except for a
power failure, which is 4 seconds before). Oscillographic
data for 10 events is stored in the controller and may be
downloaded over USB or displayed graphically.
28
29
HMi Remote Annunciator and Controller
USB Programming Port
Events include:
Source unavailability actions that initiate a transfer

sequence (undervoltage, overvoltage, etc.)
Successful transfers (at the point of breaker/
contactor closure)
Unsuccessful transfers (at the point of breaker/contactor
failure to close or open)
Industry Standard Communication Protocol

Every ATC-900 controller includes a standard Modbus RTU
communications interface with an option to upgrade to
Modbus TCP/IP.
Every ATC-900 transfer switch includes a front panel,

NEMA 4X rated USB port for use in configuring set points or
downloading event data to a USB flash drive. To reduce the
time spent on site for commissioning, set points can be
configured at a PC using the ATC-900 configuration software
and saved to a USB flash drive to be uploaded to one or
multiple controllers. Set points are also easily copied from
one controller to another.
Downloading event capture data provides the user the ability
to more thoroughly analyze high-speed capture data using a
PC, or data can be emailed to Eatons Technical Support Team
when off site troubleshooting support is required.
The ATC-900 is also compatible with Eatons Power Xpert

Gateway for web-based monitoring, Modbus TCP/IP,
SNMP, or BACnet/IP. The Power Xpert Gateway can be
used to consolidate data from up to 64 devices, including
communications ready transfer switch controllers, trip
units and meters, as well as other Eaton devices. Versions
of the Power Xpert Gateway include email event notification
and data-logging functionality.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
USB Programming Port
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

ATC Controllers
January 2015
Sheet 25 070
22
Web Terminal
23
Internet
24
25
Ethernet
26
Ethernet Switch
27
28
Third-Party
Gateway
Power Xpert Gateway:

Supports up to 64 Devices
HMi Remote Annunciator
and Controller
29
30
IQ250/260
31
Power Xpert Meter

ATC-900
ATC-300+
ATC-900
32
Figure 25.4-12. Power Xpert Architecture with ATC-900
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Special Applications
Load Management
Three-Source ATS Control
The ATC-900 includes several features to enhance the users

ability to manage load while on the alternate source.
The ATC-900 Master/Slave controller functionality provides

the user with the ability to use two independent transfer
switches in three-source systems consisting of a utility
and two generator sources. In a three-source system, the
Master ATS controls the engine starting and stopping of
the Slave ATS.
In the event of a Source 1 power failure, the Master ATS
engine start relay closes signaling the Slave ATS to start
both generators. (Note: The Slave ATS requires continuous
power using either the DCT Module for a DC power input
or a UPS input.) The Master ATS handles all transfer time
delays between the utility to generator transfer. If the
preferred generator does not start within the programmed
time delay, the Slave ATC-900 will initiate a transfer to the
non-preferred generator. If None Preferred is selected,
then both generators will start and the Slave ATS will
transfer to the first generator source available. The ATC-900
will sense the load is connected to a good source and shut
down the second generator.
Integrated load metering: provides metering data that

allows the user to monitor energy utilization and manage
system loading
Selective load shedding: selectively drop non-essential
loads when a user-defined kW level is reached. The
transfer switch remains on generator
Load shed to neutral (where ATS construction allows):
provides the ability to load shed to a neutral position from
a generator source
Pre-/post-transfer signals: provides the ability to stop
select loads during the transfer process
Load bank disable output: disengages a load bank if utility
power is lost during an engine test
Slave ATS
Gen 1
41
Utility
Gen 2
S2
Gen Start
42
43
S2
Slave
Master ATS
S1
S1
(Signal to Start Gen)
Load
Figure 25.4-13. Three-Source Transfer Switch Arrangement
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
ATC Controllers
January 2015
25.4-19
Sheet 25 071
ATC-900 Automatic Transfer Switch ControllerTechnical Data and Dimensions
Technical Data
Dimensions
Table 25.4-11. Technical Specifications
22
23
Parameter
Specification
Control
power
120 Vac (50/60 Hz) (operating range 65160 Vac)

or 24 Vdc (10%) with DCT module
Power
consumption
18 VA
5.00 (127.0)
3.63 (92.1)
24
Environmental
conditions
25
Operating
temperature
4.0 to +158 F (20 to +70 C)
Operating
humidity
Up to 90% relative humidity (noncondensing)
Enclosure
compatibility
NEMA 12 (standard mounting)

NEMA 4/4X (mounted with gasket between
panel and device faceplate)
NEMA 3R (outdoor)
UV resistant ATC-900 faceplate
System voltage
application
120600 Vac (50/60 Hz) (single- or three-phase)
Voltage
measurements
Source 1, Source 2 and Load (VAB, VBC, VCA for

three-phase system)
Voltage
measurement
range
0700 Vac
Voltage
measurement
accuracy
1% of reading
Frequency
measurements
Source 1 and Source 2
Frequency
measurement
range
4080 Hz
Frequency
measurement
accuracy
0.1 Hz
Applicable
testing
UL recognized component
2009 IBC, 2010 CBC and OSHPD certified
in ATS assemblies
Complies with UL 991 environmental tests
Complies with IEC 61000-4-2, 61000-4-3, 61000-4-4,
61000-4-5, and 61000-4-6
Complies with CISPR 11, Class A
Complies with FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Top View
6.72 (170.7)
0.50
(12.7)
26
2.10
(53.4)
27
28
29
9.31
(236.5)
10.25
(260.4)
30
31
32
Front View
Figure 25.4-14. ATC-900
CSA
conformance
C22.2 No. 178-1978 (reaffirmed 1992)
CE mark
European standards conformance
Additional Information
Side View
33
34
Instruction bulletin: IB01602088E

Web-based demo: www.eaton.com/ats
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 072
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-1
Sheet 25 073
Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
22
Table 25.5-1. Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features

Feature
Number
Description
23
Open Transition
RLC1
ATC1
ATC3
ATC9
NTCE
C2
C2
C2
C3
C5
C2
C3
C5
C2
C3
1
1A
1B
Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) fixed 2 or 15 seconds S

Adjustable 01800 seconds
Adjustable 0166 minutes
2
2A
Time delay engine start (TDES) fixed 3 seconds

3
3A
3B
Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) fixed 5 minutes

4
4A
4B
Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) fixed 5 minutes

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
Timers
Emergency (S2) Source Sensing

5H
5J
5K
5L
5L
5N
Phase reversal protection

All phase undervoltage/underfrequency
All phase overvoltage/overfrequency
All phase voltage unbalance and phase loss
All phase voltage unbalance
All phase overfrequency
System or Engine Test

6B
6C
6D
6H
Engine test pushbutton

Remote engine test input
Maintained 2-position test switch
S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
7
7A
Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) fixed 6 seconds

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
C
S
S
C
S
S
C
S
C
O
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Pushbutton Bypass
8C
8D
8E
Bypass TDEN
Bypass TDNE
Bypass TDNE/TDEN (input)
34
Maintenance Selector Switch

9B
Electrical operator isolator switch
Preferred Source Selector

10A
10C
10B
10D
Preferred source selector (programmed)

Preferred source selector input
Preferred source selector with selector switch
Utility to utility or utility to generator
Generator to generator
Indicating Lights/LEDs
12C
12D
12G
12H
12L
12M
Normal (S1) source connected

Emergency (S2) source connected
Normal (S1) source available
Emergency (S2) source available
Normal (S1) source tripped (requires feature 16)
Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires feature 16)
Source Available Contacts

14C
14D
14E
14F
14G
14H
33
Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C

Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Note: S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 074
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Table 25.5-1. Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
RLC1 ATC1 ATC3
ATC9
NTCE
C2
C2
C2
C3
C5
C2
C3
C5
C2
C3
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
Position Contacts
15E
15F
15G
15H
15M
15R
15S
Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C

Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C
Emergency load shed contacts 4 Form C
(must order as a separate field installed kit) (not in IES)
Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT)
Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT)
Integral Overcurrent Protection

16N
16E
16B
16S
Normal (S1) switch only

Emergency (S2) switch only
Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches
Service equipment/overcurrent protection normal (S1) and emergency (S2)
Metering
(Specify normal (S1), emergency (S2) or load side for 18A thru E)
18
18A
18B
18D
18E
18O
18P
18Q
18V
18R
18S
18T
18U
Integrated load metering (DCT module)

IQ 250/260
PX4000/6000/8000
IQ 130/140/150
PXM2250/2260/2270
IQ Analyzer normal (S1)
IQ Analyzer emergency (S2)
IQ Analyzer switch selectable (S1) and (S2)
IQ Analyzer load side
DP-4000 normal (S1)
DP-4000 emergency (S2)
DP-4000 switch selectable (S1) and (S2)
DP-4000 load side
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
21A
Non-standard terminals
22
22C
22D
Ground bus
Special ground barcontact factory
16 conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
O
C
O
O
C
O
C
O
O
C
O
C
Plant Exerciser
34
23A
23K
35
36
37
38
39
23L
23M
Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval, fixed 15 minutes

load/no load, with fail-safe
Selectabledisabled 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, 0600 minutes
24-hour, 7-day, 365-day programmable plant exerciser
Selectabledisabled 7-, 14-, 28-, 365-day interval, 0600 minutes
Normal (S1) Source Sensing

26D
26E
26H
26J
26K
26L
26L
26M
26P
Go to emergency (S2) input

Go to emergency (S2) input with selector switch 1
Allows operation with generator with utility sensing
(available only through a field installed kit) (not in IES)
All phase undervoltage
Alternative Transfer Modes of Operation
40
41
29G
29J
29L
29M
29K
1
42
Selector switch for auto or non-auto operation 1

Manual (pushbutton) transfer E to N; automatic N to E 1
Manual retransfer on/off input
Manual retransfer on/off input with selector switch 1
Manual retransfer input
When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured
by the user.
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-3
Sheet 25 075

Feature
Number
Description
22
Open Transition
RLC1
ATC1
ATC3
C2
C2
C2
C3
C5
C2
ATC9
C3
C5
C2
NTCE
C3
C
C
C
C
C
C
Open Transfer Operation Modes

32A
32B
32C
32D
32E
32F
32G
Time delay neutral adjustable 0120 seconds (delayed transition)

Load voltage decay adjustable 230% nominal voltage
In-phase transition defaults to load voltage decay
In-phase transition defaults to time delay neutral
Delay transition timer adjustable 360 seconds
In-phase transition
Time delay neutral fixed 0 or 2 seconds (delayed transition)
Logic Extender Cable (Open Enclosures Only)

34A
34C
34E
34F
48 inches (1219 mm)

96 inches (2438 mm)
144 inches (3658 mm)
100 inches (2540 mm) (fixed mount only)
35A
35B
Pre-transfer signal contacts 1 Form C

Pre-/post-transfer signal
C
C
C
C
C
C
36
36A
Load shed from emergency (S2 inhibit)

Load shedS2 inhibit with keyed switch (INPUT)
C
O
C
O
C
O
37
Go to isolated position (not SE rated)
Suitable for Use as Service Equipment Requires 16B, N or S

37A
Without ground fault protection
37B
With ground fault protection required at 1000 A or more if the

electrical service is a solidly grounded wye system of more than
150V to ground but not exceeding 600V phase to phase
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Stainless Steel Device Covers

38A
38B
23
SS cover for device plate or SE disconnect

SS cover for controller
32
Space Heater with Thermostat

41A
41E
100 watts
375 watts
42
IBC/CBC seismic qualified
33
C
C
C
C
34
35
Load Management Contacts

45AK
45L
Load sequencing contacts (1)

Selective load shed (assignable to multiple out put contacts)
Communications
48D
48F
48F
48G
48P
48RAC
48MRAC
48U
PXG400 gateway (includes Modbus)

ModbusMPONI module (PONI not required with ATC-300+)
Modbus communicationno PONI required
Modbus TCP/IP gateway
Power supply for remote annunciator
Remote annunciator with control (includes Modbus)
Remote annunciator with control multi-switch (includes Modbus)
USB port
O
O
S
O
O
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
49A
49B
49C
49C
Sensing isolation transformer Magnum

Sensing isolation transformer
Multi-tap voltage transformer (non AG only)
Multi-tap voltage transformer (option only on fixed)
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
O
S
O
O
S
O
O
S
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 076
22
23
24

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
RLC1
ATC1
ATC3
C2
C2
C2
C3
C5
ATC9
C2
C3
C5
NTCE
C2
C3
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
TVSS up to 480V (Connected to Normal)

51D1
51F1
50 kACVX
100 kACVX
Surge Protection Device with 12 ft Cable (on Normal)
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
51S1
51S2
51S3
51S4
51S5
51S6
51S7
51S8
51S9
50 kASPD 2
80 kASPD 2
100 kASPD 2
120 kASPD 2
160 kASPD 2
200 kASPD 2
250 kASPD 2
300 kASPD 2
400 kASPD 2
52B
52C
24V generator battery power

24V onboard power supply (charger and batteries)
54B
Upgrade to 316 stainless steel
60
Control power transformer (240/120 V single-phase and 208 V only)
61A
61B
UPS device
UPS 120 Vac terminal block input
80A
Emergency (S2) inhibit contact
General alarm indication contact

ATS in test
Engine test aborted
Cooldown in process
Emergency inhibit on with white indicating light 1
ATS on bypass
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
Lockout
Monitor mode
Remote load test
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Monitoring Outputs
81A
81B
81C
81D
81E
81F
81G
81GL
81H
33
Inputs
34
81J
81K
81L
Three Source ATS Control (Master/Slave)
35
90A
90B
1
36
37
Master control output

Slave input
by the user.
Add feature package B or C (e.g., 51S4B).
B: LED indication and audible alarm, Form C contact, EMI/RFI filtering (standard)
C: B and surge counter with Reset button (standard with surge)
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-5
Sheet 25 077

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
22
Closed Transition
BIC3
BIC3
BIC9
BIC9
CBC9
CBC9
CTC9
C3
Timers
1A
1B

2A
3A
3B

4A
4B

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S

5H
5J
5K
5L
5L
5N

23
24
25
26
27
28

6B
6C
6D
6H

S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
7A
30
S
S
S
S
S
S
C
S
S
C
S
S
C
S
S
C
S
S
C
31
S
C
O
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
33
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
35
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
29
Pushbutton Bypass
8C
8D
8E
Bypass TDEN
Bypass TDNE

9B
32

10A
10C
10B
10D

34
12C
12D
12G
12H
12L
12M


14C
14D
14E
14F
14G
14H

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 078
22
23
24
25

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
BIC3
BIC3
BIC9
BIC9
CBC9
CBC9
CTC9
C3
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
C
C
S
S
O
O
C
C
S
S
O
O
C
C
S
S
O
O
C
C
S
S
O
O
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Position Contacts
15E
15F
15G
15H
15R
15S

26
27
16N
16E
16B
16S

Service equipment/overcurrent protection normal (S1) and emergency (S2)
Metering
28
29
30
31
18
18A
18B
18D
18E

IQ 250/260
PX4000/6000/8000
IQ 130/140/150
PXM2250/2260/2270
20A
Rear bus connections
21A
Non-standard terminals (optional in IES for centers)
22
22C
22D
Ground bus
S
S
S
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
S
O
O
S
O
O
S
O
O
C
O
C
S
O
O
C
O
C
S
O
O
C
O
C
S
O
O
C
O
C
O
O
C
O
C
Plant Exerciser
23A
32
33
23K
23L
23M
Selectabledisabled 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, fixed 15 minutes

34
35
36
37
38
39
26D
26E
26H
26J
26K
26L
26L


29D
29G
29J
29L
29M
29K
1
Dual ATS bypass

by the user.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-7
Sheet 25 079

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
22
Closed Transition
BIC3
BIC3
BIC9
BIC9
CBC9
CBC9
CTC9
C3
C
C
C
C

32A
32B
32C
32D
32E
32F
32G

In-phase transition
Load Control
35A
35B

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
36
36A

C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
37

150 V to ground but not exceeding 600 V phase to phase
24
25
26
27
28

37A
37B
23
29

38A
38B

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

41A
41E
100 watts
375 watts
O
O
O
O
42
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

45AK
45L

Closed Transition Operational Modes (User Must Specify)

47C
47D
47E
47F
47G
47H
Closed/in-phase transition default to load voltage decay

Closed transition
Closed/in-phase transition default to time delay neutral
Closed transition load voltage decay
Closed transition time delay neutral
Parallel limit timer
30
31
32
33
34
35
Communications
48A
48D
48F
48F
48G
48P
48RAC
48MRAC
48R
48U
INCOMIPONI module
ModbusMPONI module (PONI not required with ATC-300+)
Remote annunciator
USB port
O
O
S
O
O
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
36
49A
49B
49C
49C

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
39
37
38
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 080
22
23
24

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
BIC3
BIC3
BIC9
BIC9
CBC9
CBC9
CTC9
C3
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

51D1
51F1
50 kACVX
100 kACVX
25
26
27
28
29
30
51S1
51S2
51S3
51S4
51S5
51S6
51S7
51S8
51S9
50 kASPD 2
80 kASPD 2
100 kASPD 2
120 kASPD 2
160 kASPD 2
200 kASPD 2
250 kASPD 2
300 kASPD 2
400 kASPD 2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
52B
52C
24V generator battery power

24V onboard power supply (charger and batteries)
54A
54B
Front access cabinet

59A
59B
Silver-plated bus
Tin-plated bus
S
O
S
O
61A
61B
UPS device
O
S
O
S
80A

ATS in test
Engine test aborted
Cooldown in process
ATS on bypass
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
Lockout
Monitor mode
Remote load test
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Monitoring Outputs
31
32
33
81A
81B
81C
81D
81E
81F
81G
81GL
81H
Inputs
34
35
81J
81K
81L

90A
90B
36
1
2
37
38

Slave input
by the user.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-9
Sheet 25 081
Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features

Table 25.5-2. Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ATH1
ATH3
ATH9
NTHE
MTHX
ATV1
ATV3
ATV9
NTVE
MTVX
MBHE
23
Timers
1
1A
1B
Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) fixed 2 or 15 seconds S

2
2A
Time delay engine start (TDES) fixed 3 seconds

3
3A
3B
Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) fixed 5 minutes

4
4A
4B
Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) fixed 5 minutes

S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S

5H
5J
5K
5L
5L
5N

22
24
25
26
27
28
29

6B
6C
6D
6H

S
C
O
O
7
7A
Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) fixed 6 seconds

S
S
S
S
C
S
C
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
O
O
Pushbutton Bypass
8C
8D
8E
Bypass TDEN
Bypass TDNE

9B

12C
12D
12G
12H
12L
12M


14C
14D
14E
14F
14G
14H
31
32
33
34

10A
10C
10B
10D
30

35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 082
22
23
24
25
Table 25.5-2. Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ATH1
ATH3
ATH9
NTHE
MTHX
ATV1
ATV3
ATV9
NTVE
MTVX
MBHE
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
O
O
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Position Contacts
15E
15F
15G
15H
15R
15S

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
16N
16E
16B

Metering
18
18A
18B
18D
18E

IQ 250/260
PX4000/6000/8000
IQ 130/140/150
PXM2250/2260/2270
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
20A
21A
22
Ground bus with provisions to attach to neutral
O
S
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
O
O
O
O
C
O
C
Plant Exerciser
23A
23K
23L
23M
Selectabledisabled 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, fixed 15 minutes


26D
26E
26H
26J
26K
26L
26L
26M
26P

Allows operation with generator with utility sensing
(available only through a field installed kit) (not in IES)

29G
29J
29L
29M
29K
1

by the user.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-11
Sheet 25 083

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ATH1
ATH3
ATH9
NTHE
MTHX
ATV1
ATV3
ATV9
NTVE
MTVX
MBHE
C
C
23

32A
32B
32C
32D
32E
32F
32G

In-phase transition

34A
34C
34E
34F
48 inches (1219 mm)

96 inches (2438 mm)
144 inches (3658 mm)
O
O
O
O
O
O
35A
35B

C
C
36
36A

C
O
37
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

37A
37B


38A
38B

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Distribution Panel (For 240/120 V Only)

39A
39B
39C
22
225 A with (2) 200 A feeders

33
41A
100 watts
42
34
C
C
35
36

45AK
45L

Communications
48D
48F
48G
48P
48RAC
48MRAC
48U

USB port
O
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
49B
49C
49C

Multi-tap voltage transformer 1
O
S
O
S
On dedicated voltage 240 V or 208 V, multi-tap transformer is not included as standard.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 084
22
23
24

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ATH1
ATH3
ATH9
NTHE
MTHX
MBHE
ATV1
ATV3
ATV9
NTVE
MTVX
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

51D1
51F1
50 kACVX
100 kACVX
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
51S1
51S2
51S3
51S4
51S5
51S6
51S7
51S8
51S9
50 kASPD 2
80 kASPD 2
100 kASPD 2
120 kASPD 2
160 kASPD 2
200 kASPD 2
250 kASPD 2
300 kASPD 2
400 kASPD 2
52B
52C
24 V generator battery power

24 V onboard power supply (charger and batteries)
54A
54B

55B
Source swap (normalbottom / emergencytop)
60
Control power transformer (240/120 V single-phase and 208 V only)
61A
61B
UPS device
80A

ATS in test
Engine test aborted
Cooldown in process
ATS on bypass
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
Lockout
Monitor mode
Remote load test
C
C
C
C
C
Monitoring Outputs
81A
81B
81C
81D
81E
81F
81G
81GL
81H
Inputs
81J
81K
81L

90A
90B
1
2

Slave input
by the user.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-13
Sheet 25 085
Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features

Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ATV9
NTVE
BIV9
CTV9
CBV9
MG
MG
MG
MG
MG
Timers
1B
2A
3A
3B

4A
4B

S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S

5H
5J
5K
5L
5L
5N


6B
6C
6D
6H

S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
S
C
O
O
7A
S
S
C
S
S
C
S
S
C
S
S
C
S
C
O
S
S
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
C
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
O
O
S
S
O
O
Pushbutton Bypass
8C
8D
8E
Bypass TDEN
Bypass TDNE
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

9B

10A
10C
10B
10D

12C
12D
12G
12H
12L
12M

32
33
34
35
36

14C
14D
14E
14F
14G
14H

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 086
22
23
24
25
Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ATV9
NTVE
BIV9
CTV9
CBV9
MG
MG
MG
MG
MG
S
S
O
O
C
C
S
S
O
O
C
C
S
S
O
O
C
C
S
S
O
O
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Position Contacts
15E
15F
15G
15H
15R
15S

26
27
28
29
30
31
16N
16E
16B

Metering
18
18A
18B
18D
18E

IQ 250/260
PX4000/6000/8000
IQ 130/140/150
PXM2250/2260/2270
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
20A
21A
22
22A
22B
22C
22D
Ground bus with provisions to attach to neutral

O
S
O
O
S
O
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
S
O
O
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
C
O
S
S
S
O
S
O
O
C
O
C
O
O
C
O
C
O
O
C
O
C
O
O
C
O
C
Plant Exerciser
32
23M

33
34
35
36
26D
26E
26H
26J
26K
26L
26L


29D
29G
29J
29L
29M
29K
Dual ATS bypass

37
38
by the user.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-15
Sheet 25 087

Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ATV9
NTVE
BIV9
CTV9
CBV9
MG
MG
MG
MG
MG
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

32A
32B
32C
32D

22
23
24
25

34F
35A
35B

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
36
36A

C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
37
27
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
28
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
26

37A
37B

29

38A
38B


41A
41E
100 watts
375 watts
42
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

45AK
45L

Closed Transition Operational Modes (User Must Specify)

47C
47D
47E
47F
47G
47H
Closed/in-phase transition default to load voltage decay

Closed transition
Closed/in-phase transition default to time delay neutral
Closed transition load voltage decay
Closed transition time delay neutral
Parallel limit timer
30
31
32
33
34
35
Communications
48D
48G
48P
48RAC
48MRAC
48U

USB port
O
O
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
O
O
S
O
O
O
O
O
S
49A
49B
49C

O
O
S
O
O
S
O
O
S
O
O
S
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 088
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Table 25-5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)

Feature
Number
Description
Open Transition
Closed Transition
ATV9
NTVE
BIV9
CTV9
CBV9
MG
MG
MG
MG
MG

51S1
51S2
51S3
51S4
51S5
51S6
51S7
51S8
51S9
50 kASPD 2
80 kASPD 2
100 kASPD 2
120 kASPD 2
160 kASPD 2
200 kASPD 2
250 kASPD 2
300 kASPD 2
400 kASPD 2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
52B
52C
24 V generator battery power

24 V onboard power supply (charger and batteries)
54A
54B

55B
Source swap (normalbottom / emergencytop)
57A
57B
Magnum breaker lift device (1) NEMA 1 only

Magnum breaker lift device bypass (2) NEMA 1 only
58A
58B
Shutterless cassette (drawout only)

Shuttered cassette (drawout only)
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
59A
59B
Silver-plated bus
Tin-plated bus
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
61A
61B
UPS device
O
O
80A

ATS in test
Engine test aborted
Cooldown in process
ATS on bypass
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
C
Lockout
Monitor mode
Remote load test
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Monitoring Outputs
81A
81B
81C
81D
81E
81F
81G
81GL
81H
Inputs
81J
81K
81L
36
90A
90B
1
37
38

Slave input
by the user.
Add feature package B or C (i.e., 51S4B).
B: LED indication + audible alarm, Form C contact, EMI/RFI filtering (standard)
C: B + surge counter with Reset button (standard with surge)
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
25.5-17
Sheet 25 089
Automatic Transfer Switch Features
Feature Description
Timers
1. Time Delay Normal to Emergency
(TDNE)
Provides a time delay to allow for
the generator to warm up before
transferring the load to the emergency
source. Timing begins only after the
Emergency Source becomes available
and is deemed good based on the
programmable voltage and frequency
set points in the controller.
2. Time Delay Engine Start (TDES)
Provides a time delay before initiating
the generator start cycle. This is to
account for momentary power outages
or voltage fluctuations of the normal
source. Provides a Form C contact to
the generator starter circuit.
3. Time Delay Emergency to Normal
(TDEN)
Provides a time delay of the retransfer
operation to permit stabilization of the
normal source. Timing begins only
after the normal source becomes
available and is deemed good based
on the programmable voltage and
frequency set points in the controller.
This function is fail-safe protected.
4. Time Delay Engine Cooldown
(TDEC)
Provides a time delay before initiating
the generator stop cycle after the
retransfer operation. This allows the
generator to cool down by running
unloaded. Timing begins on completion
of the retransfer cycle.
Source 2 Sensing
5. Source 2Monitoring and Protection
Provides monitoring and protection
based on the Source 2 voltage and/or
frequency set points. All Feature 5
monitoring and protection functions
are fail-safe operations.
5H. Three-Phase Rotation Protection
Provides three-phase reversal sensing
in order to protect against transferring
to an out-of-phase source. The controller
will treat the opposite source as
unavailable if the sources are out of
phase, based on programmable set
points in the controller.
5J. All-Phase Undervoltage/
Underfrequency Protection
Provides undervoltage/underfrequency
monitoring and protection based
on programmable set points in
the controller.
CA08104001E
5K. All-Phase Overvoltage/

Overfrequency Protection
Provides overvoltage/overfrequency
monitoring and protection based
on programmable set points in
the controller.
5L. Three-Phase Voltage Unbalance/
Phase Loss
Provides phase loss detection
from blown fuses on the Source 2
supply circuit.
5M. All Phase Voltage Phase Loss
Provides phase loss detection on the
Source 2 supply circuit.
6B. Test Operators
Automatic transfer switches are
provided with a controller faceplate
test pushbutton that simulates a loss
of the Source 1 as standard. All
programmed time delays (TDNE,
TDEN, etc.) will be performed as
part of the test. Engine run time of
the test is equal to the plant exerciser
programmed set point. All tests are
fail-safe protected.
6C. Remote Engine Test (INPUT)
Provides an input to initiate a test to
simulate a loss of the Source 1 as
standard. All programmed time delays
(TDNE, TDEN, etc.) will be performed as
part of the test. Engine run time of the
test is equal to the plant exerciser
programmed set point. All tests are
fail-safe protected. The test is initiated
via remote momentary contact closure.
6H. 4-Position Test Selector Switch
(FPSS)
Provides a door-mounted 4-position,
maintained contact selector switch
marked Auto, Test, Engine Start,
and Off. The FPSS is fail-safe
protected, except for the Off Position.
Transfer switch operation is determined
by the switch position. Transfer switch
operations are as follows:
AutoAutomatic operation mode.
TestA load test is performed until
the switch is moved to another position.
Engine StartA no-load test is
performed until the switch is moved
to another position.
OffThe automatic transfer
controller and engine start contact
are disabled. A white pilot light is
provided to indicate that the FPSS
is in the Off position.
7. Time Delay Emergency Fail (TDEF)

Provides a time delay that prevents
a connected emergency source from
being declared unavailable based
on the customers set points. This is
to account for momentary generator
fluctuations. If the Source 2 remains
in a failed state, then 0.5 seconds
after the TDEF timer expires the
transfer switch will proceed with the
programmed sequence for retransfer
if Source 1 is available. This time delay
is only implemented when Source 2 is
a generator.
Note: This feature is also enabled when
large loads cause generator output to drop
below customer set points.
8. Time Delay Bypass Pushbutton

Provides a momentary contact pushbutton to bypass the TDNE (Feature 1)
and/or TDEN (Feature 3) time delays.
The Time Delay Bypass Pushbutton
contact, when closed, will reduce any
or all of the programmed time delay to
zero. Must be executed when TDNE or
TDEN timer is displayed on the controller.
8C. Bypass Time Delay Emergency to
Normal (TDEN)
8D. Bypass Time Delay Normal to
Emergency (TDNE)
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
8E. Bypass TDNE/TDEN (INPUT)

Provides input to bypass the TDNE
(Feature 1) and/or TDEN (Feature 2)
time delays. The Time Delay Bypass
Pushbutton contact, when closed, will
reduce any or all of the programmed
time delay to zero. Must be executed
when TDNE or TDEN timer is displayed
on the controller. The bypass time
delay feature is initiated via remote
momentary contact closure.
33
9B. Maintenance Selector Switch

(MSS)
Provides a 2-position, maintained
contact selector switch marked
Operate and Disable. When
the MSS is placed in the Disable
position, the controller logic will be
disconnected from the transfer motor
circuit. The MSS is placed in the
Operate position for normal
automatic operation.
37
10. Preferred Source Selector

Provides a means to designate either
Source 1 or Source 2 as the Preferred
source. The Preferred source is the
source that the transfer switch will
connect the load to if it is available.
41
Note: This is a programmable software

feature not an actual switch.
22
34
35
36
38
39
40
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 090
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Feature Description (Continued)

10A. Preferred Source Selector (INPUT)
source using a remote contact or device
panel mounted contact closure. The
Preferred source is the source that
the transfer switch will connect the load
to if it is available.
10B. Preferred Source Selector
Provides a programmable source
selector for use on systems comprised
of dual utility or utility and engine/
generator power sources.
10C. Preferred Source Selector with
Selector Switch
source via device panel mounted
selector switch control. The Preferred
source is the source that the transfer
switch will connect the load to if it
is available.
10D. Preferred Source Selector
Provides a programmable source
selector for use on systems comprised
of dual engine/generator power
sources. (Dual engine starting circuits
are provided.)
42
43
14. Relay Auxiliary Contacts

14C. Source 1 Present
Provides 4 Form C relay auxiliary
contacts. The relay is energized when
Source 1 is present.
14D. Source 2 Present
14E. Source 1 Available
contact. The relay is energized when
Source 1 is available and within the
controllers programmable set points.
14F. Source 2 Available
contact. The relay is energized when
Source 2 is available and within the
controllers programmable set points.
15M. Source 2 Load Shed Contacts

Provides 4 Form C contacts to initiate
a load circuit disconnect while on
Source 2. This gives the user the
capability of selectively choosing not
to run certain loads while on Source 2.
15R. Normal (S1) Source Position 1
Form C (Relay OUTPUT)
Provides 1 Form C relay contact that
indicates the position of the Source 1
power switching device.
15S. Emergency (S2) Source Position 1
Form C (Relay OUTPUT)
Provides 1 Form C relay contact that
16B. Integral Overcurrent Protection on
Both Power Source Switching Devices
Provides integral overcurrent protection
on both Source 1 and Source 2 power
switching devices.
16E. Integral Overcurrent Protection on
the Source 2 Power Switching Device
on the Source 2 power switching device.
14G. Source 1 Present

16N. Integral Overcurrent Protection on

on the Source 1 power switching device.
12C. Source 1Load Connected

Provides a green indication that
indicates the load is connected to
Source 1 when lit.
14H. Source 2 Present

16S. External Overcurrent Protection on

Provides overcurrent protection on the
Source 1 power switching device.
12D. Source 2Load Connected

Provides a red indication that indicates
the load is connected to Source 2
when lit.
15. Switch Position Indication Contact

Provides a contact that indicates if
the power switching device is in the
open or closed position.
12G. Source 1Present

Provides a white or amber indication
Depending on the Controller that
Source 1 has power; however, this
does not indicate whether Source 1
is acceptable.
15E. Source 1 Position Indication

Contact
Provides 1 Form C contact that
18. Metering
The ATS controller provides voltage
and frequency readings. If additional
metering functions are required, Eaton
offers a series of digital meters that
may be added to the ATS. The meter
type can provide simple current and
voltage readings or more capable
meters providing Power, Demand
and energy readings.
12H. Source 2Present

Provides an amber indication that
Source 2has power; however, this
does not indicate whether Source 2
is acceptable.
15F. Source 2 Position Indication

Contact
Available only with integral overcurrent

protection (Feature 16) (shown on
automatic transfer controller display).
15G. Source 1 Position Indication

Contact
indicates the position of Source 1
12L. Source 1 Trip Indication

The automatic transfer controller
display will read Lockout if the
Source 1 circuit breaker is in the
tripped position.
15H. Source 2 Position Indication

Contact
indicates the position of Source 1
Overcurrent Trip Indication
41
12M. Source 2 Trip Indication

The automatic transfer controller
display will read Lockout if the
Source 2 circuit breaker is in the
tripped position.
Available with an optional communications interface. (See Feature 48

Communications for available
communication modules.)
Feature 18 metering options include all
required external devices (CTs, etc.) for
a fully functioning metering system.
18J. Integrated Metering (LOAD Side)
This metering option incorporates basic
load metering into the ATC-900 using
the add-on DCT module. In addition to
the standard voltage and frequency
metering, the DCT module adds current,
real power, reactive power, apparent
power, and power factor. This option
also enables the selective load shed
feature (option 45L).
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
25.5-19
Sheet 25 091

IQ 130/140/150
IQ 130
This digital meter provides basic current
and voltage per phase (L-L, L-N) and
min./max. readings (I, V). Optional
communication RS-485, Modbus RTU.
21A. Optional Power Cable

Connection Terminals
Eaton transfer switches are provided
as standard with Source 1, Source 2
and load circuit solderless screw-type
terminals for power cable connection.
Alternate terminal wire sizes, and
compression lug provisions may be
available dependent on transfer switch
type and ampere rating.
26D. Go to Emergency (Source 2)

Provides the capability for an external
contact closure to initiate a transfer
to the Source 2 power source. This
includes starting the generator,
performing the programmed time
delays and the transfer operation.
Retransfer will occur when the
external contact is opened. This is
a fail-safe function.
Plant Exerciser
26E. Go to Emergency (S2) Input

with Selector Switch
Provides a device panel mounted
selector switch labeled, Auto/Go to
Source 2, to initiate a transfer to the
Source 2 power source. This includes
starting the generator, performing the
programmed time delays and the
transfer operation. Retransfer will
occur when the external contact is
opened. This is a fail-safe function.
IQ 140
In addition to basic current and
voltage, will provide frequency, power
measurements real, reactive and
apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA).
Optional communication RS-485,
Modbus RTU.
IQ 150
In addition to basic current/voltage/
frequency and power readings, will
provide Energy Real reactive and
apparent (Wh, VAR, Vah). Optional
communication RS-485, Modbus RTU.
IQ 250/260
IQ 250
This digital meter provides current per
phase and current demand, voltage
(L-L, L-N) and frequency. Power, energy
and demand readings. Real, reactive
and apparent power and energy,
power factor. RS-485 communications,
Modbus RTU or ASCII. Optional I/O
slots available.
IQ 260
In addition to all of the features of
the IQ 250, power quality analysis is
available with THD voltage and current
per phase.
Power Xpert 2000

Provides either a Power Xpert PXM
2250, PXM 2260 or PXM 2270 meter.
Power Xpert 4000, 6000, 8000

Provides one of the Power Xpert Meters
with or without graphic displays.
20A. Rear Bus Provisions
Provides Source 1, Source 2 and
Load Circuit rear accessible bus stabs
with provision for bus bar connection.
Eaton transfer switches are provided
with either front or rear (dependent
on switch type) connected solderless
screw-type terminals for power cable
connection as standard.
CA08104001E
23A. Plant Exerciser With Fail-Safe

Provides a means for automatic testing
of the engine generator set or standby
power system. All programmed time
delays in the controller will be performed
during plant exerciser operations.
Programmable set points for test
intervals are start time, either disabled,
daily, 7, 14 or 28 days.
15-minute fixed engine test time.
Test may be performed with or without
load transfer. Test may be manually
cancelled during the operation. This
function is fail-safe protected.
23K. Plant Exerciser With Fail-Safe
delays in the controller will be performed
during plant exerciser operations.
Programmable set points for test
intervals are start time, either disabled,
daily, 7, 14 or 28 days, engine test time.
Test may be performed with or without
load transfer. Test may be manually
cancelled during the operation. This
function is fail-safe protected.
23M. SelectableDisabled, 7, 14, 28
or Day Interval, or Calendar Date,
0600 Minutes, Load/No Load,
with Fail-safe
delays in the controller will be
performed during plant exerciser
operations. Programmable set points
for test intervals are start time, engine
test time and either disabled, daily,
7, 14 or 28 days or up to 12 specific
calendar dates. Test may be performed
with or without load transfer. Test may
be manually cancelled during the
operation. This function is fail-safe
protected. This feature includes
independent time delays for time
delay normal to emergency, time
delay emergency to normal and
time delay for engine cooldown.

Source 1 Sensing
26. Source 1Monitoring and
Protection
Provides Source 1 monitoring and
protection functions. If Source 1 fails,
then the automatic transfer controller
will begin the sequence of operations
necessary to transfer the load to
Source 2. All Feature 26 monitoring
and protection functions are fail-safe
operations.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
26H. Three-Phase Rotation Protection

Provides three-phase reversal sensing
in order to protect against transferring to
an out-of-phase source. The controller
will treat the opposite source as
unavailable if the sources are out of
phase, based on programmable set
35
26J. All-Phase Undervoltage/

Underfrequency Protection
Provides all-phase undervoltage/
underfrequency monitoring and
protection based on programmable set
38
26K. All-Phase Overvoltage/

Overfrequency Protection
Provides all-phase overvoltage/
overfrequency monitoring and
protection based on programmable set
26L. Three-Phase Voltage Unbalance/
Phase Loss
Provides phase loss detection from
blown fuses on the Source 1.
36
37
39
40
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 092
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

26N. All-Phase Undervoltage Protection
Provides undervoltage protection for
Source 1 (ATC-100 Controller only).
29. Transfer Operation Modes
Provides standard or optional transfer
modes, mode selection devices
and operational methods for
transfer switches.
29D. Dual ATS Bypass
Provides automatic transfer switch
control of the bypass isolation switch.
29G. Automatic/Manual Operation
With Selector Switch
Provides 2-position selector switch
(labeled Auto/manual) that permits
selection of the automatic or manual
transfer. When in the Auto position,
the transfer switch operates with fully
automatic transfer, retransfer and
generator startup and shutdown
operations. When in the Manual
position, manual operation is
required to initiate the generator
startup or retransfer with generator
shutdown operations.
Note: Transfer switches with Feature 29
must be labeled as non-automatic transfer
switch equipment.
29J. Automatic Transfer or Automatic

Transfer With Non-Automatic
Retransfer Operation
Provides a field-selectable programmable set point that permits the transfer
switch to operate in one of the following
two transfer modes (A or B):
A. Fully automatic operation.
B. Automatic engine/generator startup
and automatic transfer operation
from Source 1 to Source 2. Manual
pushbutton operation is required
to initiate the retransfer operation
and engine/generator shutdown.
The pushbutton for manual
retransfer operation is included.
This is fail-safe protected.
29K. Manual Retransfer (INPUT)
Provides an input to remotely initiate
a manual retransfer from Source 2 to
Source 1.
29L. Manual Retransfer On/Off
(INPUT)
Provides an input to remotely enable or
disable the manual retransfer feature.
29M. Manual Retransfer On/Off Input

with Selector Switch
selector switch to enable or disable
the manual retransfer feature.
Selection of this option automatically
adds option 29J.
32. Delayed Transition Transfer Modes
for Open Transition Transfer Switches
Provides delayed transition transfer
modes for an open transition transfer
switch. Often used in systems with
inductive loads, a delayed transition
transfer switch may prevent or reduce
inrush currents due to out-of-phase
switching of inductive loads.
32A. Time Delay Neutral
Provides a time delay in the neutral
position during the transfer and
retransfer operations during which
both Source 1 and Source 2 are
disconnected from the load circuit.
This allows inductive loads time to
reach a safe voltage and eliminate back
EMF. The time delay is programmable
and is the same for both transfer and
retransfer operations. This is a passive
feature that requires the consulting
engineer/installer to determine the
settings based on how the user
will operate the facility. Adjustable
0120 seconds.
32B. Load Voltage Decay
Provides load voltage measurement
to sense back EMF that is generated
when the transfer switch is the neutral
position. It provides a delay in transfer
in either direction if an unacceptable
level is sensed as established by a
programmed set point. This is an
active feature that adapts to how
the facility is operating in order to
minimize neutral position wait time,
but ensure safety. Adjustable 230%
of nominal voltage.
32C. In-Phase Transition With Default
to Load Voltage Decay
Provides in-phase transition, which
is a feature that will permit a transfer
or retransfer between two available
sources that have a phase angle difference near zero. The in-phase transition
feature includes permissible frequency
difference and synchronization time
set points. In the event Source 1 and
Source 2 fail to synchronize within the
permitted frequency difference and
time, then the controller defaults to
the load voltage decay operation as
described in Feature 32B. Adjustable
frequency difference 0.03.0 Hz.
Adjustable synchronization time
allowance 160 minutes.
32D. In-Phase Transition With Default

to Time Delay Neutral
Provides in-phase transition, which is
a feature that will permit a transfer or
retransfer only between two available
sources that have a phase angle difference near zero. The in-phase transition
feature includes permissible frequency
difference and synchronization time
set points. In the event Source 1 and
Source 2 fail to synchronize within the
permitted frequency difference and
the time delay neutral operation as
described in Feature 32A. Adjustable
32E. Delayed Transition
The transfer and retransfer operations
during which both Source 1 and Source 2
are disconnected from the load circuit.
The time delay is programmable and
the same for both transfer and retransfer
operation. Adjustable 360 seconds.
32F. In-Phase Transition
Provides in-phase transition, this
feature will permit a transfer or
retransfer between two available
sources that have a phase angle
difference of 8 degrees or less. The
in-phase transition feature includes
permissible frequency difference and
synchronization time set points. In the
event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to
synchronize within the permitted
frequency difference and time, the
Alarm relay will energize and Failed
to Sync will be displayed on Line 1
of the controller. After resetting the
alarm, another in-phase transition may
be attempted or a non-synchronized
transfer may be initiated by failing the
connected source. The adjustable
frequency difference is 0.0 to 3.0 Hz.
If the synchronization does not occur
within a specified amount of time, the
Alarm relay will energize and the
failure will be logged into the transfer
history as either Sync Fail - Freq
or Sync Fail - Phase depending on
whether the frequency difference or
the phase difference was excessive.
32G. Time Delay Neutral
This feature provides a time delay in
the neutral position during the transfer
and retransfer operations during
which both the utility source and the
generator source are disconnected
from the load circuit. TDN cannot be
implemented on a transfer switch
using a 2-position contactor.
Jumper selectable at disable
(0 seconds) or enable (2 seconds).
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
25.5-21
Sheet 25 093

Logic Extender Cable
34A. 48 Inches (1219 mm)
Provides logic extension cable
with connectors.
34C. 96 Inches (2438 mm)
with connectors.
34E. 144 Inches (3658 mm)
with connectors.
34F. 100 Inches (2540 mm)
Provides logic extension only for
open Magnum ATS.
35A. Pre-Transfer Signal with
1 Form C Contact
Provides a signal prior to the
transferring of the load. Will not
transfer until the programmable delay
set point in the controller is reached.
If both sources are not available, this
option will ignore the time delay set
in the controller.
35C. Pre-/Post-Transfer Signal
(OUTPUT)
Provides a signal prior to the transferring of the load. Will not transfer until
the programmable delay set point
in the controller is reached. If both
sources are not available, this option
will ignore the time delay set in the
controller. The time delay is programmable for 0120 seconds pre transfer
and 0120 seconds post transfer.
36. Load Shed From Emergency
Provides the capability for an external
NC contact to initiate a load circuit
disconnection from the Source 2 power
source. If the load circuit is connected
to Source 2 and the contact is opened,
then a retransfer to Source 1 is
completed if Source 1 is available.
If Source 1 is not available, then the
transfer switch will transfer to neutral.
If the load circuit is connected to
Source 1 and the contact is open,
then a transfer Source 2 is prohibited.
36A. Load ShedS2 Inhibit with

Keyed Switch (INPUT)
selector switch to initiate a load circuit
disconnection from the Source 2
power source. If the load circuit is
connected to Source 2 and the selector
switch is switched to the S2 Inhibit/
Enabled position, then a retransfer to
Source 1 is completed if Source 1 is
available. If Source 1 is not available,
then the transfer switch will transfer to
neutral. If the load circuit is connected
to Source 1 and the switch is in the
S2 Inhibit position, then a transfer
Source 2 is prohibited.
37. Go to Isolated Position (not SE
Rated) (INPUT)
Provides an input to transfer a
3-position transfer switch (source 1/
off/source 2) to the off position using
a remote contact closure. When the
signal is removed, the transfer switch
will transfer back to the available,
preferred source.
37. Service Equipment Rated
Transfer Switch
Provides the label suitable for use as
service equipment and the features
necessary to meet the requirements for
the label. Includes service disconnect
with visible indication and neutral
assembly with removable |link.
Feature 16B or 16N must be selected
separately.
37A. Service Equipment Rated
Transfer Switch Without Ground
Fault Protection
Provides service equipment rating for
an application that does not require
ground fault protection.
37B. Service Equipment Rated Transfer
Switch With Ground Fault Protection
Provides service equipment rating for
an application that requires ground
fault protection.
38. Steel Cover
Provides protection for a device panel
as option 38a and protection for the
controller as option 38b.
39. Distribution Panel
The distribution panel feature uses
a panelboard design with bolt-on
circuit breakers type EHD. Bolt-on
breakers are designed to hold up
to the changes in temperature and
humidity that an industrial application
calls for. (240/120 Vac single-phase
systems only.)
CA08104001E
39A. 225 A With (2) 200 A Feeders

39B. 300 A With (3) 200 A Feeders
39C. 400 A With (4) 200 A Feeders
22
23
41. Space Heater With Thermostat

Provides a space heater and adjustable
thermostat. External control power is
not required. Availability is dependent
on transfer switch type.
24
41A. Space Heater With Thermostat

100 Watt
Provides 100-watt space heater with an
adjustable thermostat.
26
41E. Space Heater With Thermostat

375 Watt
Provides 375-watt space heater with an
adjustable thermostat.
25
27
28
42. Seismic Qualification

45. Load Sequencing Capability
Provides the capability for sequential
closure of up to 10 addressable relays
after a transfer. Each addressable relay
provides (1) Form C contact. A single
adjustable time delay between each
of the relay closures is provided.
Operates via a sub-network. Adjustable
1120 seconds.
45A. Load Sequencing Contacts (1)
(OUTPUT)
Provides the capability for sequential
contact closure of up to 10 contacts
after a transfer. A single adjustable
time delay between each of the relay
closures is provided. Operates using
the configurable output contacts
(Form C). Adjustable 0120 seconds.
45L. Selective Load Shed
Provides an output contact that
opens to shed a customer load if the
measured kW value exceeds the load
shed kW set point value. The load
will be picked up if the load restore
set point is attained.
47. Transfer Modes for Closed
Transition Transfer Switches
Provides available transition transfer
modes for a closed transition transfer
switch. Closed transition is a make
before break transfer and retransfer
scheme that will parallel (a maximum
of 100 ms) Source 1 and Source 2
providing a seamless transfer when
both sources are available. The closed
transition feature includes permissible
voltage difference frequency difference
and synchronization time allowance
set points. The phase angle difference
between the two sources must be near
zero for a permitted transfer. These
are all programmable set points in
the controller.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

January 2015
Sheet 25 094
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

47C. Closed Transition With Default
to In-Phase Transition With Default to
Load Voltage Decay
Provides a closed transition transfer
as the primary transfer mode. In the
voltage difference, frequency difference, phase angle difference and time,
then the controller defaults to the inphase transition with default to load
voltage decay operations as described
in Feature 32C and 32B. Adjustable
Adjustable voltage difference 15%
volts. Adjustable synchronization time
47D. Closed Transition
Provides a closed transition transfer as
the primary transfer mode. Only under
a fail-safe condition (i.e., loss of the
connected source) will the controller
transfer to the alternate source using
the load voltage decay operation as
described in Feature 32B. Adjustable
Adjustable voltage difference 15% V.
47E. Closed Transition With Default to
In-Phase Transition With Default to
Time Delay Neutral
Provides a closed transition transfer
as the primary transfer mode. In the
voltage difference, frequency difference, phase angle difference and
the in-phase transition with default
to time delay neutral operation as
described in Features 32D and 32A.
Adjustable frequency difference
0.00.3 Hz. Adjustable voltage
difference 15 percent volts.
47F. Closed/Load Voltage Decay
Controllers equipped with Feature
Set 47F will perform a closed transition
when both sources are synchronized in
frequency, phase and voltage. Failure
to synchronize will result in an open
transition Time Delay Load Voltage
Decay transfer. Time Delay Load
Voltage Decay uses the load voltage
measurements to sense back EMF
that is generated when the transfer
switch is in the Neutral position.
It provides a delay in transfer in either

direction if an unacceptable level is
sensed as established by a customer
programmed level. The transfer will not
take place until the back EMF decays
below the acceptable programmed
level. This feature has a separate setting
of enabling or disabling the operation.
If disabled, the transfer switch will not
delay in the Neutral position and will
transfer between the sources as fast as
possible. This feature is not available
with the Time Delay Neutral Optional
Feature 32A.
47G. Closed/Time Delay Neutral
Controllers equipped with Feature
Set 47F will perform a closed transition
transfer when both sources are
synchronized in frequency, phase and
voltage. Failure to synchronize will
result in an open transition Time Delay
Neutral transfer. Time Delay Neutral
provides a time delay in the transfer
switch neutral position when both
sources are open. This delay takes
place when the load is transferred in
either direction to prevent excessive
in-rush currents due to out-of-phase
switching of large motor loads.
48. Communication Modules
Provides communications modules
for the transfer switch controllers.
48D. Ethernet
Communication (PXG400 Gateway)

Translates Modbus RTU, QCPort or
INCOM to Modbus TCP. The PXG400
Gateway includes embedded Web
server monitoring of up to 64
connected devices.
48F. Modbus
Communication (MPONI)
Provides Modbus RTU protocol via
communications module.
48G. Modbus TCP/IP
Provides a third-party device for
Modbus 485 to Modbus TCP/IP
pass through.
48M1-48M4. I/O Module
Each I/O module provides four
additional user configurable inputs
and outputs. Up to four additional
I/O modules can be added, either by
the factory or in the field.
48MRAC. Multi-view Remote

Annunciator with Control
Provides remote monitoring of source
availability, source position and test
status for up to eight transfer switches
with the ATC-300+ or ATC-900 controller. Operates using Modbus protocol.
48RAC. Remote Annunciator
with Control
Provides remote monitoring and
control via a color touch screen
display for the controllers. Operates
using Modbus protocol (MPONI
required for the ATC-600/800).
48U. USB Port for Memory Stick
Provides a device panel mounted USB
port for uploading or downloading
controller set points and for downloading event history.
49A. Sensing Isolation Transformer
The sensing isolation transformer is
recommended for high resistance
grounded systems and for grounded
delta systems. Option 49A is available
for Magnum ATSs.
49B. Sensing Isolation Transformer
The sensing isolation transformer is
recommended for high resistance
grounded systems and for grounded
delta systems. Option 49B is available
for MCCB and contactor transfer
switches.
49C. Multi-Tap Control Power
Transformer
The multi-tap control power transformer is used to step-down voltage to
120 Vac for the transfer switch control
circuit. Incoming voltage can be
adjusted by moving the tap on the
primary side from 208 V, 240 V or
480 V for 60 Hz applications or
220 V, 380 V, 415 V, 600 V for 50 Hz
applications.
60. Dedicated Voltage Control
Power Transformer
The dedicated voltage control power
transformer can be selected for 208/
240 V systems where an added buffer
is preferred between the incoming
power and the microprocessor
controllers control power input.
60C. Power Loss Buffer
Provides ride-through power for the
ELC contained in automatic transfer
switches with bypass isolation. This
feature does not provide continuous
power for microprocessor controller.
43
CA08104001E
January 2015
Transfer Switches
25.5-23
Sheet 25 095

81B. ATS Not in Automatic (OUTPUT)
Provides remote indication that the
ATS is not in automatic mode.
81C. ATS in Test (OUTPUT)
ATS is currently running a test. The
test could be initiated by the device
panel engine test pushbutton or
automatically using the programmed
engine exerciser.
81D. Engine Test Aborted (OUTPUT)
Provides remote indication that an
engine test has been aborted. The
ATC-900 event log contains detailed
event information that can help assess
the reason the test was aborted.
81E. Cooldown in Process (OUTPUT)
Provides remote indication that an
engine cooldown is in progress.
81F. Engine Start Contact Status
(OUTPUT)
engine start contact is calling for the
generator to start.
81G. LOAD SHEDS2 Inhibit On
(OUTPUT)
emergency inhibit is on.
81GL. LOAD SHEDS2 Inhibit On
with White Indicating Light
Provides a 30 mm pilot light on the
transfer switch device panel to indicate
that S2 Inhibit is on.
81H. ATS on Bypass (OUTPUT)
bypass switch is carrying the load.
81J. Lockout
Provides an input to temporarily
disable automatic control. This feature
is used to indicate a tripped breaker
in a breaker-based transfer switch. It
is treated as an alarm and the alarm
must be reset to continue automatic
operation.
81K. Monitor Mode
Provides an input to disable automatic
control in the ATC-900 controller.
This function is used for when manual
operation is required. The controller
continues to accurately monitor source
status and set points can be changed;
however, no action will be initiated by
the controller.
81L. Remote Load Test

Provides an input to initiate a system
test using a remote contact closure.
The test will run based on the programmed engine test settings in the
controller. The settings include with
or without load, engine run time, and
independent test time delays.
81M. Terminal Block for Customer
Connections
This feature provides a common
terminal block for all customer
connections.
51S1B. 50 kASPD standard source 1

22
23

24

25

26
81N. Load Bank Control

Provides a remote output to disconnect
a load bank if Source 1 fails while the
load bank is running.
51S1C. 50 kASPD standard with

surge counter source 1
27
90B. Slave Input (INPUT)

The ATC-900 Master/Slave controller
functionality provides the user with
the ability to use two independent
transfer switches in three source
systems consisting of a utility and two
generator sources. In a three-source
system, the Master ATS controls the
engine starting and stopping of the
Slave ATS. The slave input receives
the engine start signal from the
Master controller.

Option 51. Surge Protection Device

Two types of surge protection devices
are used in Eaton automatic transfer
switches. Both types meet the requirements for UL 1449 3rd Edition for
surge suppression devices and are
CE marked. The type CVX is used on
Eaton wallmount ATS designs and
the Eaton type SPD are used on
floor-standing designs.
CVX
The CVX device features a Thermally
Protected Metal Oxide Varistor
technology and comes with high
intensity LED phase status indicators.
SPD
The SPD features a Thermally Protected
Metal Oxide Varistor technology. It
comes with dual-colored protection
status indicators for each phase and
for neutral-ground protection mode.
It comes with an audible alarm with
silence button and a Form C contact.
An optional SPD with surge counter
feature package is available. This
provides six-digit surge counter with
reset button.


28
29
30
31

32

33

34
51SC8. Remote display panel (8 feet

standard)
35
51SC12. Remote display panel (12 feet)

51SC4. Remote display panel (4 feet)
54. Front Access
54A. Front access cabinet available for
all Magnum products. This option will
add an additional pull section mounted
on the side of the switch.
59a. Silver-Plated Bus
Silver-plated bus is a standard feature
for all Magnum-based designs.
59b. Tin-Plated Bus
Tin-plated bus is available as an option
for Magnum-based designs.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

January 2015
Sheet 25 096
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Glossary
With respect to their use in this
document and as they relate to switch
operation, the following terminology
is defined:
AvailableA source is defined as
available when it is within its undervoltage/overvoltage/underfrequency/
overfrequency (if applicable) set point
ranges for the nominal voltage and
frequency setting.
Fail-safeA feature that prevents
disconnection from the only available
source and will also force a transfer
or retransfer operation to the only
available source.
RetransferRetransfer is defined as
a change of the load connection from
the secondary to primary source.
Source 1is the primary source
or normal source or normal power
source or normal. (Except when
Source 2 has been designated the
Preferred Source.)
Source 2is the secondary source
or emergency source or emergency
power source or emergency or standby
or backup source. (Except when
Source 2 has been designated the
Preferred Source.)
Source 1Failed or failsSource 1
is defined as failed when it is outside
of its undervoltage or overvoltage or
underfrequency or overfrequency
(if applicable) set point ranges for the
nominal voltage and frequency setting.
Source 2Failed or failsSource 2 is

defined as failed when it is outside
of its undervoltage or overvoltage or
under-frequency or overfrequency
(if applicable) set point ranges for the
nominal voltage and frequency setting
for a time exceeding 0.5 seconds after
the time delay emergency fail (TDEF)
time delay expires.
TransferTransfer is defined as a
change of the load connection from
the primary to secondary source
except when specifically used as
Transfer to Neutral.
Transfer to NeutralTransfer to
Neutral is defined as when the load
circuits are disconnected from both
Source 1 and Source 2.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
January 2015
25.5-25
Sheet 25 097
kW Conversion Chart
Appendix AkW Conversion Chart
22
Table 25.5-4. kW to Ampere Conversion Chart
23
Three-Phase Ampere Table at Common Line-to-Line Voltage

kW 1
200 V
208 V
220 V
230 V
240 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
460 V
480 V
600 V
5.0
18
17
16
16
15
7.5
27
26
25
24
23
14
13
13
12
11
10.0
36
34
33
31
30
19
18
17
16
15
12
15.0
54
52
49
47
45
28
27
26
24
23
18
20.0
72
69
66
63
60
38
36
35
31
30
24
25.0
90
87
82
78
75
47
45
43
39
38
30
30.0
108
104
98
94
90
57
54
52
47
45
36
40.0
144
139
131
126
120
76
72
70
63
60
48
50.0
180
173
164
157
150
95
90
87
78
75
60
60.0
217
208
197
188
180
114
108
104
94
90
72
75.0
271
260
246
235
226
142
135
130
118
113
90
80.0
289
278
262
251
241
152
144
139
126
120
96
100.0
361
347
328
314
301
190
180
174
157
150
120
125.0
451
434
410
392
376
237
226
217
196
188
150
150.0
541
520
492
471
451
285
271
261
235
226
180
175.0
631
607
574
549
526
332
316
304
275
263
210
200.0
722
694
656
628
601
380
361
348
314
301
241
250.0
902
867
820
784
752
475
451
435
392
376
301
300.0
1083
1041
984
941
902
570
541
522
471
451
361
350.0
1263
1214
1148
1098
1052
665
631
609
549
526
421
400.0
1443
1388
1312
1255
1203
760
722
696
628
601
481
500.0
1804
1735
1640
1569
1504
950
902
870
784
752
601
600.0
2165
2082
1968
1883
1804
1140
1083
1043
941
902
722
700.0
2526
2429
2296
2197
2105
1329
1263
1217
1098
1052
842
800.0
2887
2776
2624
2510
2406
1519
1443
1391
1255
1203
962
900.0
3248
3123
2952
2824
2706
1709
1624
1565
1412
1353
1083
1000.0
3609
3470
3280
3138
3007
1899
1804
1739
1569
1503
1203
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
At 0.8 power factor.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Power Circuit Breakers & Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
26.0-1
September 2011
Power Circuit Breakers &

Sheet 26 001
CA08104001E
Contents
22

Breaker Type Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.0-2
Magnum Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-1
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-5
Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12
Breaker-Mounted Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-14
Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-15
Technical and Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-21
Accessories and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-27
Series NRX Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-1
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-2
Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-4
Communications Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-5
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Power Circuit Breakers
Magnum DS and Series NRX
Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475
Section 26 28 11
Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
Magnum SB and Series NRX
Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . Section 16475
Section 26 28 11
Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16904
Section 26 28 50
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
26.0-2
Breaker Type Comparison
September 2011
Sheet 26 002
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Summary of Differences Between Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers,

Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers and Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Low voltage power circuit breakers
comply with the following standards:
There are two main classifications

of low voltage circuit breakers
molded-case circuit breakers and low
voltage power circuit breakers. All
UL, NEMA and ANSI standards are
for molded-case circuit breakers and
low voltage power circuit breakers.
ANSI Std. C37.16Preferred Ratings

ANSI Std. C37.17Trip Devices for
LVPCB
ANSI Std. C37.50Test Procedures
IEEE Std. C37.13LVPCB Used in
Enclosures
UL 1066LVPCB
The industry recognizes three types of

circuit breakersmolded-case circuit
breakers (MCCB), insulated-case circuit
breakers (ICCB) and low voltage power
circuit breakers LVPCB). Insulated-case
circuit breakers are designed to meet
the standards for molded-case circuit
breakers.
Molded-case circuit breakers and

insulated-case circuit breakers typically
comply with the following standards:
UL 489MCCB
UL 489Molded-Case Switches
(MCS)
NEMA AB1MCCB and MCS
NEMA AB3MCCB Application
Table 26.0-1. Breaker Type Comparison Chart
29
Description
LVPCB
(Type Magnum DS and Series NRX)
ICCB
(Type Magnum SB and Series NRX)
MCCB
(QUICKLAG/Series C/Series G)
30
Select trip
short-time rating
Selective trip over full range of fault

currents up to interrupting rating
(high short-time ratings)
Selective trip over partial range of fault

currents within the interrupting rating
(medium short-time ratings). Typically
up to 35 kA
Selective trip over a smaller range of fault

currents within the interrupting rating (low
short-time ratings). Typically 1013 times
the frame size
31
Operator type
Types of operators: mechanically

operated and electrically operated
two-step stored energy

Types of operators: mechanically operated

over-center toggle or motor operator
32
Closing speed
5-cycle closing for electrically

operated devices

operated devices
Greater than 5-cycle closing for electrically

operated devices
Mounting
Available in drawout construction

permitting racking to a distinct test
position and removal for maintenance

Typically fixed-mounted but large

frame sizes may be available in drawout
construction
Interrupting rating
Interrupting duty at 635 Vac:

42100 kA and current limiting
with or without fuses up to 200 kA

35 150 kA

22100 kA without fuses and up to
200 kA with integral fuses or for currentlimiting type
Current limiting
Special current limiting types available


without fuses up to 150 kA
Current limiting available with and without

fuses up to 200 kA
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Relative cost
Higher
Medium
Low
Available
frame sizes
Small number of frame sizes available.

Typical 8006000A

Typical 8006000A
Large number of frame sizes available.

Typical 1002500A
Maintenance
Extensive maintenance possible on all

frame sizes
Limited maintenance possible on larger

frame sizes
Very limited maintenance possible on larger

frame sizes
Enclosure types
Used in enclosures, MCCs,

switchboards and switchgear
Used in enclosures, MCCs

and switchboards
Used in enclosures, panelboards,

switchboards, MCCs and control panels
Series ratings
Not available in series ratings
Available in series ratings
Enclosed rating
100% continuous current rated in

its enclosure
80% continuous-current rated, unless

specifically stated to be rated 100% in
an enclosure

an enclosure
Standards
ANSI/IEEE C37
UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489 or UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.1-1
September 2011
Sheet 26 003
Low Voltage Power/Insulated-Case Circuit BreakersMagnum DS and SB
Magnum Low Voltage

for Global Application
Three Product Families
Magnum low voltage power circuit

breakers enable comprehensive
solutions to meet and exceed the
unique and wide-ranging requirements of todays global power
distribution systems. This powerful
circuit breaker offering is designed
for ultimate custom configuration and
application flexibility, with the needs
of the power distribution equipment
user and the electrical equipment
manufacturer in mind.
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

for ANSI/UL 1558 Rated Switchgear Applications
Magnum consists of three product families; each provides specific rating

features and approvals to optimize performance when applied in power
distribution equipment and custom enclosures:
Up to 635 Vac
2006000A continuous
42200 kA interrupting
23
24
25
26
27
Standards
28
Magnum DS circuit breakers meet

or exceed all applicable requirements
of ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17,
C37.50 and CSA.
See Tab 20 for ANSI/UL 1558
low voltage drawout switchgear
application considerations, including
system voltage and frequency,
continuous current ratings, ambient
temperature, altitude, and other
unusual environmental and
22
29
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family
ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

for UL 891 Switchboard Applications
Up to 635 Vac
2006000A continuous
50150 kA interrupting
30
31
See Tab 21 for UL 891 switchboard

application considerations,
ratings and layouts.
32
33
34
35
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Family

UL Rated for Switchboard Applications
Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers

for IEC Rated Switchboard Applications
Up to 690 Vac
2006300A continuous
40105 kA Icu/Ics
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Magnum IEC Rated Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker

Family for IEC Switchboard Applications
For more information on Magnum IEC

air circuit breakers, please visit
CA08104001E
43
26.1-2

September 2011
Sheet 26 004
22
23
All Magnum Breaker Types

Features, Benefits
and Functions
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Interruption ratings up to 200 kA

with current limiting performance
and low current let-through to
reduce damaging energy to downstream equipment at high fault
levels or with high short-time
ratings for increased selectivity
Short-time ratings up to 100 kA
to maximize system coordination
and selectivity
Four physical frame sizes
(narrow, standard, double
narrow and double) to promote
breaker application in compact
modular enclosures
Continuous current ratings from
8006000A with 100% rating at 40C
and no derating on most ratings
up to 50C in a properly sized and
ventilated enclosure
Fixed breaker mounting
configurations with horizontal
and optional vertical and front
connected terminal connections
Drawout breaker mounting
configurations with cassette
and optional safety shutters
Three- and four-pole breaker
configurations
Through-the-door design for
human interface with the breaker
compartment door closed
Two-step stored energy mechanism
for manually and electrically
operated breakers
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit family
protection with four models each
providing increasing levels of
protection and feature options
for coordination, information
and diagnostics:
Microprocessor-based rms sensing
Basic to programmable overcurrent protection and alarms
Local display for information,
status and diagnostics
Ampere, voltage and
power metering
Power quality, harmonics
and waveform capture
Communications with translators
to common protocols
Zone selective interlocking for
improved coordination
Integral Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
Breaker health monitoring
Field-installable accessories
(UL listed) common across the
breaker frames and designed to
be easily installed in the field to
service or modify the breaker at
the point of use
Secondary terminal contacts

mounted at the top front of the
breaker and away from the primary
voltage areas for improved safety
and access. Finger-safe terminal
blocks accommodate ring-tongue or
spade type terminals as standard
Through-the-Door Design for Human Interface

with the Breaker Compartment Door Closed
High Technology Microprocessor-Based Digitrip RMS 1150+ Trip Units

are Available with Advanced Features Like Programmable Overcurrent
Settings, Power Metering, Power Quality and Communications
CA08104001E
26.1-3
September 2011
Sheet 26 005
Breaker Features on
Front Cover
22
23
The controls and indicators are

functionally grouped on the breaker
faceplate to optimize the human
interface, visibility and ease of use.
For maximum safety, a modern,
through-the-door design permits
access to the breaker levering system,
trip unit, controls and indicators with
the door closed.

Mechanical trip flag pop-out

indicator (optional)red
Interlocked indicator requiring
manual reset is also available
Shunt Trip Attachment (STA)

Spring Release device (SR)
device or second STA
Digitrip RMS trip unit (Model 520M

shown) protected by clear cover
Contact status indicators:
Magnum DS Drawout Breaker
28
29
30
31
32
Spring status indicators:
26
27
OPENgreen
CLOSEDred
25
Accessory viewing windows for:
24
33
Chargedyellow
Dischargedwhite
Push OFF (open) pushbuttonred
34
Push ON (close) pushbuttongreen

Manual spring charging handle
for manually charging the stored
energy springs
Mechanical operations
counter (optional)
35
Accessory Viewing Windows Visibly
Confirm the Breaker Shunt Trip,
Spring Release, UVR Installation
and Their Control Voltage Rating
Key off lock (optional)
36
Drawout Breaker Levering Can be
Accomplished with the Compartment
Door Closed without the Need for a
Special Levering Tool
Padlockable levering device

shutter for drawout breakers
Color-coded position indicator
for drawout breakers:
37
38
39
CONNECTred
TESTyellow
DISCONNECTgreen
40
41
42
Through-the-Door Design for Human
Interface with the Breaker Compartment
Door Closed, for Example, Manually
Charging the Stored Energy Springs
CA08104001E
43
26.1-4

September 2011
Sheet 26 006
22
23
24
25
26
27
Breaker Internal Features
Magnum circuit breakers are designed

for ease of access for inspection,
modification and maintenance at the
point of use. The breaker front cover
is easily removed with four captive
bolts, revealing the modular internal
breaker features.
Secondary terminal points for

internal standardized breaker
wiring connections
Breaker accessory mounting deck
with three positions for mounting:
Shunt Trip Attachment (STA)
Spring Release device (SR)
device or second STA
28
29

(Model 1150+ shown)
30
Spring charging motor (optional)

for electrically charging the stored
energy springs
31
32
33
34

Manual spring charging handle

for manually charging the stored
energy springs
Padlockable levering device
shutter for drawout breakers
Magnum Drawout Breaker Front View with Front Cover Removed

Showing Easy Access to the Breaker Internal Devices
Color-coded position indicator for

drawout breakers:
CONNECTred
TESTyellow
DISCONNECTgreen
35
36
Secondary contact blocks for

connection to external cell
control wiring
37
Removable arc chute covers for easy

access to breaker main contacts
38
39
40
Primary finger cluster disconnecting contacts for drawout breaker

are mounted on the breaker
element for ease of access for
inspection and maintenance
Note: Some competitors mount the primary
finger clusters inside the cell, requiring
shutdown of the switchgear for inspection
and maintenance.
41
Current sensor viewing windows

to view and confirm breaker
sensor rating
42
Rigid frame housing (thermoset

composite resin) providing
increased strength and durability
43
Magnum Drawout Breaker Rear View Showing Primary Disconnecting

Finger Clusters Mounted on the Breaker for Ease of Inspection
CA08104001E
September 2011
26.1-5
Sheet 26 007
Magnum DS Low Voltage

UL and ANSI Test

Certifications
Comprehensive
Enclosure Solutions
Magnum DS is a true UL 1066 listed

low voltage power circuit breaker
family, designed for the highest
performance requirements of
switchgear and specialty
enclosure applications.
Magnum DS meets or exceeds the

applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA
standards, including:
Magnum DS has proven performance

in Eaton manufactured switchgear
and switchboards with the following
test certifications:
Magnum DS low voltage power

circuit breakers have short-time
withstand and interruption ratings
up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with
continuous current ratings up
to 6000A to maximize system
coordination and selectivity
Magnum MDDX non-current
limiting PCBs have 200 kA
interrupting ratings and up to
100 kA short-time rating at 508 Vac
with continuous current ratings up
to 6000A
Magnum MDSX current limiting
power circuit breakers (fuseless)
have 200 kA interrupting ratings
and 3050 kA short-time ratings
at 480 Vac with continuous current
ratings up to 5000A
Magnum MDSL current limiting
power circuit breakers with integral
current limiters (fuses) have 200 kA
interrupting ratings at 600 Vac
with continuous current ratings
up to 2000A
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC power

circuit breakers used in enclosures)
related requirements, and
used in enclosures)
NEMA SG3 (this standard adopts
ANSI C37.16 in its entirety)
UL 1558 (Magnum DS low voltage

metal-enclosed switchgear)
UL 891 (Pow-R-Line C low
voltage switchboards)
UL 1008 standard for transfer
switch equipment
UL, CSA 22.2.31 low voltage
assemblies
22
23
24
25
26
27
Approvals
UL listed: Magnum DS breaker
UL File No. E52096 and cassette
UL File No. E204565
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
Type Listed Certificate Number
04-HS422844A-DUB
28
29
30
31
32
33
Magnum DS, MDSX and MDSL Circuit Breakers
34
35
36
37
38
39
Magnum DS low voltage power circuit

breakers have high withstand ratings
from 42 to 100 kA to provide for maximum
system coordination and selectivity.
Magnum MDSX current limiting power

circuit breakers have fast opening
contacts to provide interrupting ratings
up to 200 kA at 508 Vac without fuses.
Magnum MDSL current limiting power

circuit breakers have integral current
limiters to provide interrupting ratings
of 200 kA at 600 Vac.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 26 008
22
Selecting the Optimal Magnum Solution for System Coordination,

Interruption Performance and Arc Flash Reduction
23
Table 26.1-1. System Application Considerations

Magnum Breaker Type
24
25
28
29
30
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Interruption Arc Flash Energy
Operating System
Convenience and
Life Time Cost
Up to 65 kA
Up to 100 kA
(narrow frame)
Up to 85 kA
(standard frame)
Up to 100 kA
(double narrow
and double frame)
Up to 100 kA Highest energy

at 635 Vac
MDS/MDN
Up to 200 kA
at 508 Vac
MDDX
Inspect, reset and

close after interruption
MDSX
Current limitingfast
opening reverse loop
contacts with trip unit
instantaneous off
30 kA
(standard frame)
200 kA
at 508 Vac
Inspect, reset and

close after interruption
MDSL
Current limiting
integral current
limiters with trip unit
instantaneous off
Based on current
limiter selected
Based on current
limiter selected
and trip unit
settings
Up to 200 kA Lower energy at fault levels Blown limiters require

at 600 Vac
in the current limiting range replacement and inventory
of current limiter
Operating watts loss
is higher than fuse-less
breakers
Per Magnum
breaker type
applied
Trip unit instantaneous settings

affect system
coordination and
continuity
Per Magnum May be reduced by

breaker type employing trip unit:
applied
Ground fault settings,
zone selective interlocking,
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
All Magnum breakers

with trip unit instantaneous on
50 kA
(double frame)
32
33
System
Coordination
MDS and MDDX

High short-time
currentLS trip
functions with trip unit
instantaneous off
26
27
Short-Time
Current (See
Table 26.1-2)
Up to the rated
short-time
current
Based on trip
unit settings
Lower energy at
fault levels in current
limiting range above
short-time current rating
Magnum MDS, MDN and MDDX

High Short-Time Current Rating
Breakers for Maximum Coordination
Magnum MDSX Fuseless

Interruption Up to 200 kA Current
Limiting Performance
Magnum MDS and MDDX breakers

are designed to hold in and carry
their rated short-time current up to
0.5 seconds, the maximum trip unit
short-time delay setting. System
coordination is maximized when the
instantaneous trip unit settings are
either turned off or set high enough to
facilitate coordination with other load
side protective devices in the circuit.
Magnum MDSX breakers provide new

fuseless technology with interruption
ratings up to 200 kA at 508 Vac. The
interruption performance is current
limiting when the fault currents
exceeds the short-time current rating.
The self-protecting fast-opening
reverse-loop contacts quickly open,
clearing the fault in approximately
1/4 cycle, reducing energy let-through
and arc flash energy.
Energy let-through and arc flash energy

to the downstream circuit can be
significantly reduced by employing
instantaneous trip unit settings, as well
as ground fault and zone interlocking.
However, the desire to reduce arc
flash may have to be balanced with the
necessity to maintain system coordination and continuity. This is especially
true at the low fault levels characteristic
of arcing faults, because the trip unit
instantaneous trip setting may have to
be set as low as the minimum setting,
which could cause lack of coordination.
The integral Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System trip unit option
can be employed to optimize arc flash
reduction during system startup and
maintenance operations.
Below their short-time current rating,

MDSX breakers coordinate like standard
MDS breakers. Arc flash levels to the
downstream circuit can be reduced by
employing the trip unit instantaneous
settings as well as ground fault, zone
interlocking and Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System features.
MDSX breakers have the same compact
footprint as standard MDS breakers.
MDSX improves overall operating
system continuity, convenience and life
cycle costs by eliminating fuse trucks,
blown limiter change outs, replacement
limiter inventories and the higher
operating watts loss associated
with fuses.
Per Magnum breaker

type applied
Magnum MDSL Interruption Up to

200 kA with Integral Current Limiters
Magnum MDSL breakers with integral
current limiters provide interruption
ratings up to 200 kA at 600 Vac. MDSL
is especially effective in reducing
energy let-through and arc flash at the
highest fault currents and those that
fall within the current limiting range
of the current limiter. Interruption is
clean and efficient with most of the arc
display contained within the current
limiter. A wide array of current limiter
ratings are available for selection and
application with the breaker current
sensor ratings and trip unit settings
to provide for system coordination.
When fault currents fall below the
current limiting range of the limiter,
energy let-through and arc flash
energy will increase. In this range, a
lower rated current limiter may be
applied, but considerations must be
given to nuisance blowing of the
limiter and system coordination.
MDSL breakers can also employ trip
unit instantaneous settings as well as
ground fault, zone interlocking and
System features to reduce arc flash
levels. Physically, they are 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) deeper than standard
construction Magnum breakers.
CA08104001E
September 2011
26.1-7
Sheet 26 009
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066
22
23
24
25
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications
Table 26.1-2. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Frame
Breaker Type
Amperes Catalog
Number
Frame
Type
800
MDN-408
MDN-508
MDN-608
MDN-C08
1200
1600
2000


Interrupting
at 635 Vac

Short-Time Fixed Internal and Rating Plugs for Digitrip
Withstand Instantaneous RMS Trip Unit (Establishes
Breaker In Rating)
Rating
Trip
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
65
42
50
65
20
MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
MDS-C08
MDS-L08
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
85
85
MDN-412
MDN-512
MDN-612
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
42
50
65
42
50
65
42
50
65
MDS-412
MDS-512
MDS-612
MDS-812
MDS-C12
MDS-X12
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
42
50
65
85
100
200
42
50
65
85
100
200
42
50
65
85
100
65
42
50
65
85
85
30
MDN-416
MDN-516
MDN-616
MDN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
65
42
50
65
30
18 x In
MDS-616
MDS-816
MDS-C16
MDS-L16
MDS-X16
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
65
85
85
30
MDN-620
MDN-C20
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
65
65
65
35
MDS-620
MDS-820
MDS-C20
MDS-L20
MDS-X20
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
65
85
85
30
18 x In
27
28
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
29
30
31
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200
32
33
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600
34
35
85
30
18 x In
26
36
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
85
30
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the
published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists
of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods.
Magnum MDSX fuseless current limiting power circuit breakers with fast opening contacts. See Table 26.1-1 on Page 26.1-6 for peak let-through chart.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 26 010
22
23
Table 26.1-2. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Frame
Breaker Type
Amperes Catalog
Number
Frame
Type
3200
MDS-632
MDS-832
MDS-C32
24
25
4000
26
27
5000
28
6000
29
30
31


Short-Time Fixed Internal and Rating Plugs for Digitrip
Withstand Instantaneous RMS Trip Unit (Establishes
Breaker In Rating)
Rating
Trip
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
85
MDS-X32
Double
200
200
MDN-640
MDN-840
MDN-C40
Double narrow 65
Double narrow 85
Double narrow 100
65
85
100
MDS-840
MDS-C40
MDS-X40
MDD-X40
Double
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
200
85
100
200
200
MDS-850
MDS-C50
MDS-X50
MDD-X50
Double
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
200
85
100
200
200
MDS-C60
MDD-X60
Double
Double
100
200
100
200
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3000, 3200
50
50
65
65
65
65
85
100
85
100
85
100
50
100
50
50
2500, 3200, 4000, 5000
100
85
100
50
100
100
100
100
100
3200, 4000, 5000, 6000

2500, 3200, 4000, 5000
100
85
100
2000, 2500, 3200, 4000
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the
published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists
of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods.
Magnum MDSX fuseless current limiting power circuit breakers with fast opening contacts. See Table 26.1-1 on Page 26.1-6 for peak let-through chart.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
26.1-9
Sheet 26 011
Magnum MDSX
Fuseless Current Limiting
Arc flash levels to the downstream

circuit can be reduced by employing
the trip unit instantaneous settings as
well as ground fault, zone interlocking,
and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System features. MDSX breakers
have the same compact footprint as
standard MDS breakers. MDSX
improves overall operating system
continuity, convenience and life cycle
costs by eliminating fuse trucks, blown
limiter change outs, replacement
limiter inventories and the higher
operating watts loss associated
with fuses.
Magnum MDSX Current Limiting

Power Circuit Breakers have fast
opening contacts to provide
interrupting ratings up to 200 kA
at 508 Vac without fuses. The
interruption performance is current
limiting when the fault currents exceed
the short-time current rating. The selfprotecting fast opening reverse loop
contacts quickly open, clearing the
fault in approximately 1/4 cycle,
reducing energy let-through and arc
flash energy. Below their short-time
current rating, MDSX breakers
coordinate like standard MDS breakers.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Magnum MDSX
29
1000
30
31
Asymmetrical
Available Peak 15%
PF
32
33
MDS-X20 2000A
MDS-X16 1600A
MDS-X12 1200A
Ipeak (kA)
Magnum Let-Through DataIpeak
MDS-X50 5000A
MDS-X40 4000A
MDS-X32 3200A
34
35
100
36
37
38
39
40
41
10
10,000
100,000
Available Fault Circuit Current (Amperes)
Figure 26.1-1. Magnum Let-Through Data
CA08104001E
1,000,000
42
43
26.1-10
September 2011
Sheet 26 012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Magnum MDSL
Fused Current Limiting
The let-through current for a given

limiter application is readily determined
by extending a vertical line from the
applicable maximum available symmetrical fault amperes at the bottom
margin to the characteristic line for
the particular limiter, and from this
intersection extending a horizontal line
to the left margin and reading the peak
current. The withstand rating of any
circuit elements protected by the
limiters should be at least equal to
this peak current.
Ip = The Peak Let-Through Current

ta = The Arcing Time
tc = The Total Interrupting (Clearing)
Time
A. Maximum protection of downstream components. Type MDSL

breakers are often used for this
purpose even when the maximum available fault currents are
within the interrupting rating
of the corresponding unfused
Magnum breakers.
B. Protection of the circuit breaker only.
Ia
Case A would tend to use the smallest

available limiter; Case B the largest.
When downstream protection is
required, the selection is usually
a compromise, because certain small
limiters cannot be coordinated with
the breaker to avoid nuisance blowing
on overloads or small and moderate
short circuits.
Ip
tm
The selection of a suitable limiter

rating for a given application is
generally governed by a choice of
the following types of protection:
ta
tc
Figure 26.1-2. Current Limiting
Minimum, recommended and

maximum limiter sizes for Magnum
MDSL breakers are given in the
table below.
Table 26.1-3. Magnum MDSL Ratings
Frame Available Sensor/
Rating Plug (Amperes)
800
Catalog
Number
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
MDSL08
1600
200, 250, 300, 400, 600,

800, 1000, 1200, 1600
MDSL16
2000
1600, 2000
MDSL20
Table 26.1-4. Magnum MDSL Sensor/Rating Plug vs.Current Limiter Selection

Sensor and
MDSL Current Limiter Selection Chart
Rating Plug In
MA400
MA600
MA800
MB1200
MB1600
MB2000
MD2500
MD3000
250
MA400
MA600
MA800
MB1200
MB1600
MB2000
MD2500
MD3000
300
MA400
MA600
MA800
MB1200
MB1600
MB2000
MD2500
MD3000
MA600
MA800
MB1200
MB1600
MB2000
MD2500
MD3000
MA800
MB1200
MB1600
MB2000
MD2500
MD3000
MB1200
MB1600
MB2000
MD2500
MD3000
MB1600
MB2000
MD2500
MD3000
MB2000
MD2500
MD3000
200
600
38
800
1000
MA250
MA300
1200
1600
MD3000
2000
MD3000

41
tm = The Melting Time
It will be noted that the let-through

current increases with the limiter size
or ampere rating; in other words, the
maximum current limiting effect is
obtained with the smallest size. This
effect is to be expected, because the
resistance decreases as the rating
increases. If the vertical line from the
bottom margin as described in the
previous paragraph does not intersect
the limiter characteristic line, the available system fault current is below the
threshold current of that limiter, and
it will offer no current limiting effect.
400
40
la = The Available Peak Fault Current
The following curves illustrate the ratings,

melting time-current characteristics
and current limiting, or let-through
characteristics, of limiters for Magnum
low voltage power circuit breakers.
37
39
Limiter Selection
The current limiting principle is

illustrated below:
Select the current limiter based on the Magnum breaker frame and current sensor and rating plug as shown.
Refer to MDSL current limiter curves for let-through and time characteristics.
The recommended ratings shown as shaded provide for reduced current let-through and breaker coordination within the trip unit settings.
Selection of current limiters below the recommended ratings shown provides lower current let-through; however, trip unit settings must be
considered to avoid nuisance operation.
42
43
CA08104001E
September 2011
26.1-11
Sheet 26 013
100
90
80
70
60
50
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
40
300
30
22
23
200
20
MD3000
MD2500
MD2000
MD1600
MD1200
MA800
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
MA400
MA300
MA250
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5
MA250
MA300
MA400
MA500
MA800
MB1200
MB1600
MB2000
MB2500
MB3000
30
MA600
24
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
20
Time in Seconds
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5
.4
.4
.3
.2
25
26
27
28
.3
29
.2
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.04
.03
.04
.03
30
31
.02
.02
Available Current, rms Symmetrical Amperes x 10
Figure 26.1-3. Type Magnum DSL Limiters, Peak Let-Through

Current Characteristics
2000
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
200
300
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
30
20
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
20000
30000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
2000
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
200
100
300
.01
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
Peak Instantaneous Let-Through Current in Kilo Amperes X 10
32
Current in Amperes x 100
Figure 26.1-4. Type Magnum DSL Limiters Average Melting

Time-Current Characteristics
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.1-12
September 2011
Sheet 26 014
Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
22
23
Magnum SB
Low Voltage Insulated-Case
Circuit Breakers
25
26
27
28
30

breakers have Interruption ratings
up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 6000A
breakers have lighter-duty shorttime current ratings and fixed
internal instantaneous trips on
most ratings, which is characteristic
of UL 489 molded-case breakers
commonly used in UL 891 switchboards. This provides for greater
economy and excellent coordination
and selectivity for most commercial
applications
Fixed internal instantaneous trips
are included on all SB insulated-case
circuit breakers rated 3200A and
below to provide an extra safety
factor by reducing the energy letthrough to downstream circuits at
the maximum instantaneous trip
point and to facilitate feeder circuit
breaker protection in UL 891 switchboards with 3-cycle bus bracing
Magnum SBSE current limiting
power circuit breakers have 150 kA
interrupting ratings at 480 Vac with
continuous current ratings up to
5000A. The short-time current rating
is 30 kA for standard frame and
50 kA for double frame breakers
24
29
Magnum SB is a low voltage insulatedcase circuit breaker family designed

for the performance and economic
requirements of UL 891 switchboards.
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case

Circuit Breakers are Designed for the
Performance and Economic Requirements
of UL 891 Switchboards
31
32
33
34
35
UL and ANSI Test Certifications

Magnum SB meets or exceeds the
applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA
standards, including:
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC power

circuit breakers used in enclosures)
related requirements, and
used in enclosures)
NEMA SG3 (this standard adopts
ANSI C37.16 in its entirety)
Comprehensive
Enclosure Solutions
Magnum SB has proven performance
in Eaton manufactured switchboards
with the following test certifications:
UL 891 (Drawout Magnum SB
and Pow-R-Line C low voltage
switchboards)
UL, CSA 22.2.31 low voltage
assemblies
Approvals
36
UL listed: Magnum SB breaker

UL File E52096 and cassette
UL File E204565
37
38
39
Typical Magnum SB Low Voltage

Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Nameplate
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
September 2011
26.1-13
Sheet 26 015
Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated-Case
22
23
24
25
26
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Family UL Rated for Switchboard Applications
27
Table 26.1-5. Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated-Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Frame
Breaker Type Frame
Amperes Catalog
Type
Number
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
6000

Available Current Sensor and

Rating Plugs for Digitrip
RMS Trip Unit (Establishes
Breaker In Rating)
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting Interrupting Short-Time

at 508 Vac
at 635 Vac
Withstand Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous Trip
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
30
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
SBN-508
SBN-608
SBN-C08
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
20
20
20
SBS-608
SBS-C08
Standard 65
Standard 100
65
100
65
85
20
20
SBN-512
SBN-612
SBN-C12
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
25
25
25
SBS-612
SBS-C12
SBS-E12
Standard 65
Standard 100
Standard 200
65
100
150
65
85
25
25
30
SBN-516
SBN-616
SBN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
30
30
30
SBS-616
SBS-C16
SBS-E16
Standard 65
Standard 100
Standard 200
65
100
150
65
85
30
30
30
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
18 x In
30
SBN-620
SBN-C20
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
65
65
35
35
18 x In
18 x In
SBS-620
SBS-C20
SBS-E20
Standard 65
Standard 100
Standard 200
65
100
150
65
85
35
35
30
18 x In
18 x In
30
SBS-625
SBS-C25
Standard 65
Standard 100
65
100
65
85
45
45
18 x In
18 x In
SBS-E25
Double
200
150
SBS-630
SBS-C30
Standard 65
Standard 100
65
100
SBS-E30
Double
200
150
SBS-840
SBS-C40
SBS-E40
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
150
85
100
85
100
50
18 x In
18 x In
50
2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
SBS-850
SBS-C50
SBS-E50
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
150
85
100
85
100
50
18 x In
18 x In
50
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
SBS-C60
Double
100
100
100
100
18 x In
3000, 4000, 5000, 6000
65
85
50
50
50
50
18 x In
18 x In
50
50
CA08104001E
29
30
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200
31
32
33
34
35
36
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3000
37
38
39
40
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are
equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation,
a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for
short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
the two periods.
Magnum SBSE Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with fast opening contacts.
Note: Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.
28
41
42
43
26.1-14
Breaker-Mounted Options
September 2011
Sheet 26 016
Magnum DS and SB Breaker-Mounted Options
22
23
24
25
Breaker-Mounted Options
Magnum breakers are available with
a comprehensive array of factoryinstalled breaker options to enable
configured-to-order solutions for
specified customer requirements.
Field option kits are available to
provide easy service, modification
and customization of the breaker at
the point of use.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Shunt trip device (ST). Provides

breaker opening when energized
by a rated voltage input
Spring charge motor (MOT).
Charges the breaker closing springs
automatically, facilitating remote or
local closing. The motor assembly
includes its own cut-off switch
that changes state at the end of the
charging cycle. This contact can be
wired out for external indication
Spring release device (SR).
Provides for remote electrically
controlled breaker closing when
its coils are energized by a rated
voltage input
Undervoltage release (UVR).
Trips the breaker when an existing
voltage signal is lost or falls
below an established threshold
Auxiliary switch. Up to 6a/6b
auxiliary individual dedicated
contacts are available for customer
use to indicate if the breaker is in
the OPEN or CLOSE position
Mechanical trip indicator flag .
The red trip indicator flag pops out
to provide local visual indication
when the Digitrip RMS trip unit
acts to trip the breaker on an
overcurrent condition. Available
in two options: an interlocked
version that mechanically
locks out the breaker until the
indicator is manually reset and
a non-interlocked version for
indication only
Bell alarm/overcurrent trip switch

(OTS). Provides two Form C contacts that change state when the
Digitrip RMS trip unit acts to trip the
breaker. The contacts are available
for external indication or customer
use and are manually reset by the
mechanical trip indicator
Padlockable pushbutton cover.
Permits padlocking hinged cover
plates to block access to the PUSH
ON and PUSH OFF buttons on the
breaker faceplate
Mechanical operations counter.
Records mechanical operations of
the breaker over its installed life
Key off lock provisions. Enables
mounting of a single cylinder Kirk ,
Castell or Ronis Key Lock to lock the
breaker in the OPEN position
Latch check switch. Provides one
Form C contact that changes state
when the breaker is ready to close.
Can be wired to the spring release
device for fast transfer applications
or wired for external ready-to-close
indication
Auxiliary Switches Come in Modular 2a/2b

Contact Stages Providing up to 6a/6b
Dedicated Contacts
Mechanical Trip Indicator with

Bell Alarm (OTS) Switches Mounted
For the Digitrip RMS 1150+ trip unit, other

protective functions, if programmed, will
cause the OTS and mechanical trip indicator
flag to operate.
Shunt Trip, Spring Release and

Undervoltage Release Device
Installed on Accessory Deck
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Microprocessor Trip Units
September 2011
26.1-15
Sheet 26 017
General DescriptionMagnum DS and SB Trip Units
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit Family

for Magnum Circuit Breakers
The Magnum family of Digitrip RMS
trip units consists of four trip unit
models, each providing increasing
levels of features and options to
enable the ultimate selection to
match application requirements for
protection, coordination, information,
diagnostics and communication:
Digitrip RMS 520
Digitrip RMS 520M
Digitrip RMS 520MC
Digitrip RMS 1150+
Common Trip Unit Features

A summary of the important features
common to all Magnum trip units is
as follows:
Microprocessor-based true
rms sensing
Discrete rotary or programmable
settings
Unit status LED (green)
Cause of trip LEDs (red)
Battery check LED (green)
Reset/battery test pushbutton
Thermal memory
Over-temperature protective trip
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)
provisions
Rating plug receptacle
Backup battery for cause of
trip LEDs
Test kit receptacle with cover
Plug-in mounting for easy
replacement
Clear plastic cover (sealable)
Digitrip RMS trip units are highly

accurate microprocessor-based
protective devices that use a sampling
algorithm to compute true rms values
for precise system coordination and
metering. The trip unit is completely
self-contained and requires no
external control power to perform
its overcurrent protective functions
because the power to operate the
trip unit is derived from the primary
current passing through the current
sensors. When the trip unit is operating, the green unit status LED begins
to blink like a heartbeat to visibly
confirm the microprocessor is
powered up.
CA08104001E
The trip unit overcurrent protective

pickup settings are a function of the
breaker In rating, which is established
by the rating plug and current sensors.
When preset conditions are exceeded,
the trip unit initiates a trip signal to
the trip actuator, tripping the circuit
breaker. Red cause-of-trip LEDs light
up to indicate the cause of trip,
powered by a easily replaceable
backup battery located behind the
rating plug. The LED will flash to
save power, until the trip unit reset
button is depressed.
All trip units include three important
self-protecting safety features that are
provided as standard:
Making Current Release (MCR):
employs a fast-acting analog instantaneous trip that prevents the breaker
from closing and latching on a fault
when the peak current exceeds 25 x
the breaker In rating. This reduces arc
flash energy during breaker closing for
faults within the self-protecting range.
The MCR is enabled for the first two
cycles following the circuit breaker
closing operation and thereafter,
depending on the type of Magnum
breaker applied, becomes inactive.
Over-Temperature Protective Trip:
automatically trips the breaker when
the temperature inside the trip unit
exceeds 85C, which indicates that
there are significantly higher
temperatures within enclosure.
Thermal Memory: provides overtemperature protection on load circuits
against effects of repeated overload
conditions. This feature is defeatable
for special applications such as
welding and primary injection testing.
Digitrip RMS 520M adds phase,

neutral and ground current
metering with a four-character
LCD display window
Digitrip RMS 520MC adds
communication of current values
and breaker status (open, closed,
tripped), and Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System for arc flash
reduction
Programmable Trip Units
Digitrip RMS 1150+ provides

programmability for more
sophisticated distribution systems
Increased protection and
coordination capabilities
Systems monitoring information
including power factor, voltage,
current, harmonic distortion
values and waveform capture
with a bright three-line, (eight
characters per line) LED display
Two programmable contacts for
customer use
Time and date stamping of trip
events for improved troubleshooting and diagnostics
Accuracy of 1% on current and
voltage values and 2% on energy
and power
Systems diagnostic information
and breaker health menu
Communications
System for arc flash reduction
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Trip Units
Eatons electrical sector introduced the
first microprocessor-based trip unit
and has advanced the technology
into a new family of UL and CSA
listed Digitrip RMS electronic and
programmable trip units designed
and engineered exclusively for
Magnum DS breakers.
38
41
Digitrip RMS 520 enables the

user as many as nine phase and
ground current protection settings
for maximum flexibility in tripcurve shaping and multi-unit
coordination, and adds ground
current protection settings
39
40
42
Magnum 520MC Trip Unit with
System, Four-Digit LCD Display and
Ampere-Based Communications
43
26.1-16
September 2011
Sheet 26 018

For the second method of arming the
Maintenance Mode function, a remote
switch wired through the breaker
secondary contacts can remotely
arm the Maintenace Mode setting. A
high-quality gold-plated or palladium
contact is required in this application.
22
23
24
A third method to arm the

Maintenance Mode setting is via
a communication device. There is
a confirmation screen that verifies
the arming. A BIM (Breaker Interface
Module) or Power Xpert system
are communication methods to arm
the setting.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum 1150+ Trip Unit with Arcflash

Reduction Maintenance System, 24-Digit
LED Display, Programmable Protection,
Alarms and Relaying, Power Metering,
Power Quality and Alarms, Waveform
Capture, Communications and Breaker
Health Monitoring

System setting has five unique settings
(2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0 x In). To adjust this
setting, a rotary switch on the trip unit
face is provided for the 520MC while the
1150+ trip unit uses its local keypad.
Time
LDPU
Typical I n x 0.4 to 1.0

System Maintenance Mode function
of the Digitrip 520MC and 1150+ can
reduce arc flash incident energy that
is generated on a fault condition. This
is accomplished by an analog trip
circuit that, when armed, provides a
fast-acting response to the fault. This
is separate from the normal system
protection setting of instantaneous.
There are three ways to arm the

Maintenance Mode Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System
setting. One method is locally at the
trip unit front panel. For the 520MC, the
two-position switch in the Maintenance
Mode section of the trip unit is used.
Turning the switch to the ON position
will arm the setting. For the 1150+, the
local front keypad is used to enable the
Maintenance Mode setting. The setting
is located in the SYSTEM submenu of
programmable settings (PGM SET).
The maintenance mode function will

provide fast tripping even when the
regular Instantaneous is set to OFF.
The instantaneous LED position is
also used to indicate a trip initiated
by the Maintenance Mode setting.
The 520MC LCD display, if powered,
will indicate with four dashes while
the 1150+ will display the message
Maintenance Mode Trip.
In = Rating Plug/Sensor Rating

Ir
n
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
Eatons Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System employs a
separate, dedicated analog trip
circuit that eliminates microprocessor
latencies, resulting in clearing times
that are faster than standard instantaneous tripping. This provides superior
arc flash reduction to competitors
systems that simply lower the standard
instantaneous pickup set point.
For all three arming methods, the

520MC provides a blue LED to confirm
the Maintenance Mode function is on.
In addition, there is also a normally
open breaker contact that allows the
user to wire in an external stacklight or
annunciator for remote indication. For
the 1150+, the message Maintenance
Mode Enabled will be shown on its
LED display. The 1150+ also has an
alarm relay that can be programmed
to track the Maintenance Mode state.
LDT @ 6X Ir
Typical 2 to 20 Sec
SDPV = 2 to 10 Times I r
SDT
Typical 0.1, 0.2,
0.3, 0.4, 0.5 Sec
Maintenance
Mode
Instantaneous
Total Clearing Time
60 to 75 msec
Maintenance Mode
Total Clearing Time
40 msec
60 to 75 msec
40 msec
2.5 to 10
Times I n
Optional
Instantaneous
10
Current
Typical at 480V, 60 Hz
Figure 26.1-5. Arcflash Reduction Maintenance SystemTypical Time Current Curve with
Maintenance Mode
CA08104001E
September 2011
26.1-17
Sheet 26 019
Control
Voltage
5
L
22
Remote
Indicator
(BlueLight)
23
Remote Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System Switch
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance
System Switch
24
Communication wiring to BIM,

MODBUS MINT or Power Xpert
computer. This can activate
Maintenance Mode if desired.
1
2
A15
3
A12
A14
B7
A10 A9 B1
B2
25
Alternate Customer 3
A12
Wiring (Partial)
B7
26
27
28
29
Magnum Breaker (with MM wiring)

The Digitrip 520MC (Cat 5ARMxxx) can locally be placed in Maintenance Mode via a two-position switch located on the trip unit. The function can
also be armed via a remote switch as shown. In addition, the function can be activated via communications. A blue LED on the Digitrip verifies
the Digitrip is in Maintenance Mode.
The recommended selector switch for this low voltage application is Eaton part number 10250T1333-2E, which includes a contact block rated for
logic level and corrosive use.
The maximum length of this wiring to remote Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System switch (or alternate relay contact) is 9.78 ft (3m). Use
#20 AWG wire or larger.
Control voltage is 120 Vac or 230 Vac or 2448 Vdc or 125 Vdc. Check Magnum circuit breaker front cover for trip unit power requirements.
A remote stack light, annunciator panel or other remote indication device can be connected to verify that the Digitrip is in Maintenance Mode.
Relay in (GF alarm/PS module) makes when in Maintenance Mode. Contact is rated 1A at 120 Vac or 0.5A at 230 Vac or 1A at 2448 Vdc and
0.35A at 125 Vdc.
The Digitrip 520MC can also be placed remotely in its Maintenance Mode via a general purpose relayice cube type with logic level contacts
activated by remote control switch. A recommended type is IDEC Relay RY22. Choose voltage as desired.
30
31
32
33
34
Figure 26.1-6. Maintenance Mode Wiring Digitrip 520MC
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.1-18
September 2011
Sheet 26 020
22
Digitrip 520 Trip Unit
Digitrip 520M Trip Unit
Digitrip 520MC Trip Unit
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Digitrip 520 Trip Unit with

Basic Overcurrent Protection
The Digitrip 520 is a simple basic

trip unit with three available types
of protection (LI, LSI and LSIG).
Up to nine rotary-type current and
time settings provide for maximum
flexibility in curve-shaping and
multi-unit coordination.
The Instantaneous function (I)
includes an off position setting
when Short Time (S) protection is
provided to increase application
flexibility in the field
I2t time delay settings for better
curve shaping when Short Time (S)
and Ground Fault (G) protective
functions are selected
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI)
provided when Short Time (S)
and/or Ground Fault (G) protective
functions are selected. ZSI provides
hard-wired positive system coordination, allowing the breaker closest
to the fault to trip first, thus avoiding
unnecessary and costly system
downtime. ZSI is a useful method
to reduce arc flash
Digitrip 520MC Trip Unit With

System, Four-Digit LCD Display
and Ampere-based Communications
Digitrip 520M Trip Unit with Four-Digit

LCD Display and Ampere-based Metering,
Alarms and System Diagnostics
The Digitrip 520M is available with

three types of protection (LSI, LSIG
and LSIA) and includes the following
added features:
Four-digit LCD display with a step
pushbutton to scroll through the
display data, including amperebased metering of phase, neutral
and ground currents, plus
operational and cause-of-trip
diagnostic information
When specified, the Power Relay
Module (PRM) is supplied to
perform the following features:
Power up the trip unit display
from an external customer
supplied source through the
breaker secondary contacts to
retain the cause-of-trip and
magnitude of trip information
Provide relay contact for remote
indication of overload (LSI) or
ground trip (LSIG) or ground
alarm (LSIA)
Type LSIA units alarm only when
ground fault settings are exceeded,
which is quite useful in critical
power applications
Plug receptacle for auxiliary power
module to power up the trip unit
display during bench testing remote
from the switchgear
The Digitrip 520MC is available in

three types of protection (LSI, LSIG
and LSIA) and includes the following
enhancements:
41
42
Communications of ampere-based
data, breaker status and cause-oftrip information using the INCOM
communications system. Each trip
unit has a unique hexadecimal
address (001 to 999) set by rotary
switches. A red transmit LED is
provided to confirm communications activity. Peripheral translator
devices are available to convert
INCOM to other protocols like
Modbus, Ethernet and so on
System allows the operator to enable
a special trip unit maintenance
mode with a preset accelerated
instantaneous override trip that can
reduce arc flash energy up to 30%.
This accelerated tripping results
in total clearing times that are
faster than standard instantaneous
tripping. The arc flash reduction level
is preset at the trip unit using a fiveposition switch that facilitates the
maximum arc flash reduction setting
possible while avoiding nuisance
tripping. The Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System can be turned
on locally at the trip unit, remotely
using peripheral devices, or via
communications. A blue LED
provides local indication the trip unit
is in the Maintenance Mode. Remote
indication can be accomplished by
a dedicated trip unit contact for use
with a stack light or annunciator
panel, or via communications
43
CA08104001E
September 2011
26.1-19
Sheet 26 021
General DescriptionMagnum DS and SB Digitrip Trip Units
Digitrip 1150+ Trip Unit
Digitrip 1150+ Trip Unit
The Digitrip 1150+ trip unit is a highly

advanced programmable protective
device available in three types of
protection (LSI, LSIG and LSIA).
The following is a first level summary
of the special features and options:
24-character LED digital display

easily visible from 50 feet and ideal
for dark equipment environments
Membrane type dust-resistant
keypad pushbuttons to facilitate
local unit programming, including
view functions (Up, Down, ESCape,
SELect and Reset), edit values
(Up, Down and Save) and
battery test
Programmable trip unit settings
and curves including I2t and I4t
curves, as well as IEEE moderately
inverse, very inverse and extremely
inverse curves
Voltage and power metering
Power quality monitoring and alarm
with THD and waveform capture
Health menuThe health menu

on the Digitrip 1150+ front panel will
provide information on the Magnum
circuit breakers health, as well as
a history of the circuit breaker and
circuit it is protecting. This data is
useful for planning maintenance
and inspection schedules. The type
of data includes the total number of
all instantaneous and short delay
trips seen by the circuit breaker. A
second counter shows the number
of overloads (LDT) and ground
faults (GFT) encountered while in
service. The OP count provides data
on the number of close operations
experienced by the circuit breaker.
The last time the circuit breaker was
operated (open or closed or tripped)
is viewable with time and date
displayed. Also included is the
maximum temperature in degrees
Centigrade as seen by the Digitrip
microprocessor CHip. The capture
of the data requires external
trip unit power. This data, once
captured, is stored in non-volatile
memory. These features are available for remote communications
Programmable alarm contacts or
trip contacts
including undervoltage, overvoltage,
underfrequency, overfrequency,
reverse power, voltage unbalance
and phase rotation
Communications of comprehensive
access to trip unit capabilities
including programmable settings,
breaker control, metering, alarm,
status, relaying and diagnostic
information. Peripheral translator
devices are available to convert
INCOM to other protocols like
Modbus, Ethernet and so on
Accessory bus for use with
peripheral digital relay modules
that can be programmed through
the trip unit keypad for additional
auxiliary and various alarm contacts
System allows the operator to enable
a special trip unit Maintenance
Mode with a preset accelerated
instantaneous override trip that can
reduce arc flash energy up to 30%.
This accelerated tripping results in
total clearing times that are faster
than standard instantaneous
tripping. The arc flash reduction
level is preset at the trip unit for the
maximum arc flash reduction setting
possible, while avoiding nuisance
tripping. The Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System can be turned
on locally at the trip unit, remotely
using peripheral devices, or via
communications. The display
provides local indication the trip unit
is in the Maintenance Mode. Remote
indication can be accomplished by
a dedicated trip unit contact for use
with a stack light or annunciator
panel, or via communications
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.1-20
September 2011
Sheet 26 022
Selection GuideMagnum DS and SB Digitrip Trip Units
22
Table 26.1-6. Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers
23
24
25
26
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip 520
Digitrip 520M
Digitrip 520MC
Digitrip 1150+
Ampere range
Interrupting rating at 480V
rms sensing
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes

Protection
Ordering options
LI, LSI, LSIG

Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA

Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA

Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA

Yes
Yes
Long
delay
protection
(L)
Long delay pickup

Long delay time I4t
IEEE curves
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
15 seconds
Yes

High load alarm
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
0.51.0 x (Ir)
Short
delay
protection
(S)
Short delay pickup

2001000% x (Ir) and M1

100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (Ir) and M1

100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (Ir) and M1

100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (Ir) and M1

100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
31
Instantaneous
protection
(I)
Off position
2001000% x (In) and M1

Yes
LSI and LSIG
2001000% x (In) and M1

Yes
Yes
2001000% x (In) and M1

Yes
Yes
2001000% x (In) and M1

Yes
Yes
32
Ground
fault
protection
(G)
Ground fault alarm

No
Ground fault pickup
25100% x (In)
Ground fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In 100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
Yes
24100% x (In)
100500 ms

Ground fault ZSI
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Model LSI
Model LSI
Model LSI
Model LSI
Cause-of-trip LEDs
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Digital display
Current (% ) full scale sensor
No
No
4-character LCD
Yes 2%
4-character LCD
Yes 2%
24-character LED
Yes 1%
Voltage (%) L to L
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes 1%
Yes 2%
Yes
Reactive power kVAR

Power factor
Crest factor
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
N/A
No
Optional
INCOM
Standard
INCOM/TripLink
Standard
Trip log (three events)

No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
42
Testing method
Waveform capture
Test set
No
Test set
No
Test set
No

Yes
43

Protective relay functions
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
System Diagnostics
System Monitoring
Type
Power supply in breaker
Additional Features
Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over

and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage
unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip,
and phase rotation alarm are included.

1200A maximum ground fault setting per

UL/NEC.

CA08104001E
September 2011
26.1-21
Sheet 26 023
Technical and Application Data
Time-Current Curve Shaping
Instantaneous (I)
Repetitive Duty
5. Instantaneous Pickup
Determines the level of fault
current that will actuate a trip with
no time delay.
Repetitive breaker opening and

closing, such as in frequent motor
starting and stopping, are covered
by ANSI standards C37.13 and C37.16.
These standards list the number
of operations between servicing
(adjusting, cleaning, lubrication,
tightening and so on) and the total
numbers of operations under
various conditions without requiring
replacement of parts, for the various
breaker frame sizes.
Ground Fault (G)

2B
6. Ground Fault Pickup

current at which the ground fault
trip delay countdown is actuated.
2
2A
3
Time
4B
7. Ground Fault Delay

Determines the amount of time
the breaker will carry a ground
fault before tripping.
4
4A
5
7B
7
7A
Current in Multiples
Figure 26.1-7. Time-Current Curve Shaping

Note: See selection guide charts for
availability of adjustments.
a. Flat Response
I2t out: For coordination with
other circuit breakers with
electronic ground fault settings.
b. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with
zero sequence ground fault
relays, fuses and thermalmagnetic breakers.
Long Delay (L)
Feeder BreakersGeneral
1. Long Delay Pickup

Determines the continuous
ampere rating of the breaker.
Circuit breakers for feeder circuit

protection may be manually or
electrically operated, with long
and short delay or long delay and
instantaneous type trip devices,
and trip settings, as required for the
specific circuit and load requirements.
2. Long Delay Time

the breaker will carry a low level
overload before tripping.
a. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with other
circuit breakers with electronic
trip devices and for coordination
with thermal-magnetic
circuit breakers.
b. I4t Response
fuses and upstream transformer damage curves.
Short Delay (S)

3. Short Delay Pickup
Determine or set the level of fault
current at which the short-time
4. Short Delay
Sets the amount of time the breaker
will carry both a low level and high
fault currents before tripping.
a. Flat Response
electronic trip devices.
b. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with fuses
and thermal-magnetic breakers.
CA08104001E
General purpose feeder breakers, such as

for lighting circuits, are usually equipped
with long delay and short delay trip
devices, with the long delay pickup set
for the maximum load demand in the
circuit. Where arcing fault protection
is required, add instantaneous trip
with setting as low as practicable
consistent with inrush requirements.
As an option, the Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System can be selected
for increased arc flash protection
during maintenance.
Motor Starting Feeder Breakers

These breakers are usually electrically
operated, with long delay, short
delay and instantaneous tripping
characteristics for motor running,
locked rotor and fault protection.
The breaker sensor rating should be
chosen so that the long delay pickup
can be set at 125% of motor full load
current for motors with a 1.15 service
factor, or at 115% for all other motors.
Contactors are recommended for this
application when circuit breaker duty
cycle is exceeded.
For motor starting duty, with closing

starting currents up to 600% and opening
running currents up to 100% of the
breaker frame size, at 80% power
factor or higher, the endurance or
total operations (not requiring parts
replacement) will be as follows:
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
800A Frame: 1400 operations

1600A Frame: 400 operations
29
The frequency of operation should not

exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in
one hour.
30
Group Motor Feeder Breakers

Typical loads for such circuits are motor
control centers. The feeder breakers
may be either manually or electrically
operated as preferred, and are usually
equipped with long and short delay trip
protection only for coordination with
the individual motor circuit devices.
The minimum long delay pickup setting
should be 115% of the running current
of the largest motor in the group, plus
the sum of the running circuits of all
other motors.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
26.1-22
September 2011
Sheet 26 024
Technical and Application Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Zone selective interlocking provides
positive system coordination by allowing
the breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delays. This is
achieved by setting up the distribution
system as shown in Figure 26.1-8.
The hardwired connection between
the trip units sends a restraining signal
upstream, allowing the breaker closest
to the fault to act instantaneously. Zone
selective interlocking also reduces
stress on the distribution system by
isolating faults without time delays.
Zone selective interlocking may be

applied as a type of bus differential
protection. It must be recognized;
however, that one must accept the
minimum pickup of the trip unit
for sensitivity.
By definition, a selectively coordinated

system is one where by adjusting trip
unit pickup and time delay settings, the
circuit breaker closest to the fault trips
first. The upstream breaker serves two
functions: (1) backup protection to the
downstream breaker and (2) protection
of the conductors between the upstream
and downstream breakers. These
elements are provided for on Digitrip
trip units.
Ground Fault Setting:

1200A Pickup
0.5 Seconds Time Delay
Zone 1
Breaker
Number 1
Fault 1
600A Pickup
Zone 2
For faults that occur on the conductors

between the upstream and downstream breakers, it is ideally desirable
for the upstream breaker to trip
with no time delay. This is the
feature provided by zone selective
interlocking. Digitrip trip units include
this option.
Breaker
Number 2
Zone Selective
Interlocking Wiring
Fault 2
Zone 3
300A Pickup
No Time Delay
Zone selective interlocking is a

communication signal between
trip units applied on upstream and
downstream breakers. Each trip unit
must be applied as if zone selective
interlocking were not employed, and
set for selective coordination.
During fault conditions, each trip unit
that senses the fault sends a restraining
signal to all upstream trip units. This
restraining signal results in causing the
upstream trip to continue timing as it
is set. In the absence of a restraining
signal, the trip unit trips the associated
breaker with no intentional time delay,
minimizing damage to the fault point.
This restraining signal is a very low
level. To minimize the potential for
induced noise, and provide a low
impedance interface between trip
units, twisted pair conductors are
used for interconnection.
It must also be recognized that not

all systems may be equipped with
zone selective interlocking. Systems
containing multiple sources, or where
the direction of power flow varies,
require special considerations, or may
not be suitable for this feature. Digitrip
zone interlocking has been tested with
up to three levels with up to 20 trip
units per level.
Ground fault and short delay pickup

on Digitrip trip units have zone
selective interlocking.
Breaker
Number 3
Fault 3
Load
Fault 1
There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the
trip instantaneously.
Fault 2
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit. The
Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker
in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear the
fault in 0.5 seconds.
Fault 3
The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and
Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to Zone 1.
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the
branch breaker in Zone 3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker in
Zone 2 will clear the fault in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event that the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear
the fault in 0.5 seconds.
Figure 26.1-8. Zone Selective Interlocking
CA08104001E
Magnum DS and SB
September 2011
26.1-23
Sheet 26 025
Technical Data
Table 26.1-7. Magnum DS and SB Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc
Nominal Voltage
24 Vdc
Shunt Trip (ST)

Opening time
Trip circuit
70110%
(required for 35 ms)
Seconds
Spring Release (SR)

Closing time
Close circuit
70110%
(required for 200 ms)
Seconds

Amps (running)
Amps (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
Opening time
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
32 Vdc
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
3453 Vdc
250 watts
35 ms
77138 Vdc
450 watts
35 ms
154275 Vdc
450 watts
35 ms
3453 Vdc
250 watts
40 ms
77138 Vdc
450 watts
40 ms
154275 Vdc
450 watts
40 ms
4153 Vdc
5.0A
500%
250 watts
5 sec
94138 Vdc
2.0A
600%
250 watts
5 sec
187225 Vdc
1.0A
600%
250 watts
5 sec
4153 Vdc
1429 Vdc
275 watts
18 watts
70 ms
94138 Vdc
3375 Vdc
450 watts
10 watts
70 ms
187275 Vdc
66150 Vdc
450 watts
10 watts
70 ms
0.5A
0.5A
0.25A
1726 Vdc
250 watts
35 ms
1726 Vdc
250 watts
40 ms
85110% voltage
Running
% of running
Seconds
2026 Vdc
12.0A
300%
300 watts
5 sec
85110% voltage
3060% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
2026 Vdc
714 Vdc
250 watts
18 watts
70 ms
2735 Vdc
1019 Vdc
275 watts
15 watts
70 ms
Inductive load

Nominal Voltage
0.5A
120 Vac
240 Vac
Shunt Trip (ST)

Opening time
Trip circuit
70110%
Seconds
77140 Vac
450 VA
35 ms
146264 Vac
450 VA
35 ms
Spring Release (SR)

Closing time
Close circuit
70110%
Seconds
77140 Vac
450 VA
40 ms
146264 Vac
450 VA
40 ms
Seconds
93140 Vac
2.0A
600%
250 VA
5 sec
177264 Vac
1.0A
600%
250 VA
5 sec
85110% voltage
3060% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
94140 Vac
3376 Vac
450 VA
10 VA
70 ms
177264 Vac
62144 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms

Opening time
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
23
24
25
85110% voltage
Running
% of running
Inductive load
10A
26
27
28
29
30
Table 26.1-8. Magnum DS and SB Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac

Amps (running)
Amps (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
22
415 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
31
32
33
34
35
323457 Vac
114249 Vac
480 VA
10 VA
70 ms
408528 Vac
144288 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
510660 Vac
180360 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
10A
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.1-24
Magnum DS and SB
September 2011
Sheet 26 026
Technical Data
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Legend:
LS
Limit Switch for Closing Spring
MOT
Motor for Spring Charging
ST
Shunt Trip
SR
Spring Release
UVR
Undervoltage Release
OTS
Overcurrent Trip Switch
Description of Operation:
1 Motor is energized through
LS contact.
2 Motor runs and charges closing
spring.
3 When closing spring is fully charged,
LS contacts change state.
4 Close contacts energize SR coil.
5 When breaker closes, b opens.
6 LS contacts change state and motor
recharges closing springs.
31
32
33
Open
B12
B15
Open
Control
Power
L.S.
SR
B10
B26
Lever
in Door
Switch
(Drawout Only)
B24
A7
A1
A2
A3
a.
b.
a.
ST
OTS 1*
OTS 2*
UVR
MOT
B13
29
30
Close
B14
B27
B11
B25
A4
A8
A5
A6
* Contacts shown for breaker open (not fully

charged), not tripped.
Dotted line denotes Magnum Breaker.
Continuous Duty Shunt Trip also available

that eliminates the requirement for the
a contact cutout switch.
MDSEOBKR
Figure 26.1-9. Typical Magnum Breaker Control Circuit Diagram
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7 A8
B3
B4
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
B1
B2
ICL ATR ATR
IP
IN NPW N2
ONO OC ONOONO OC ONO UVR UVR ALL ALC AL
B7
B8
B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15
N1 SGF ZC
ZI
ZO
B5
B6
ST
ST
SR SR
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
CNC CC CNO CNC CC CNO
34
COM IN OUT
OTS
35
36
37
OTS
UVR
ATR
INCOM
CLOSE
INPUT
ATR
SHUNT SPRING MOTOR

INCOM NEG
NEUTRALSOURCE ZONE
CELL SWITCH CONTACTS
POWER SENSOR GROUND INTER- TRIP
RELEASE
(SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN WITHDRAWN POSITION)
INPUT
INPUT INPUT
LOCKING
A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30
B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30
MLS ACN ACP NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC
NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC LCO LC LNC
SPRING ACCESSARY
CHARGE BUS
STATUS COMMUNICATIONS
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS

(SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION)
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS

(SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION)
C7
C8
C9 C10 C11 C12
CNC CC CNO CNC CC CNO
LATCH
CELL SWITCH CONTACTS
CHECK (SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN WITHDRAWN POSITION)
SWITCH
38
Figure 26.1-10. Typical Magnum Secondary Terminal Block Connection Diagram
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Magnum DS and SB
26.1-25
Sheet 26 027
Application Data
Applications
Transformer Main
Secondary Breakers
Transformer secondary breakers are
required or recommended for one or
more of the following purposes:
1. To provide a one-step means
of removing all load from the
transformer.
2. To provide transformer overload
protection in the absence of an
individual primary breaker, and/or
when primary fuses are used.
3. To provide the fastest clearing of
a short circuit in the secondary
main bus.
4. To provide a local disconnecting
means, in the absence of a local
primary switch or breaker, for
maintenance purposes.
5. For automatic or manual transfer
of loads to alternate sources, as in
double-ended secondary selective
unit substations.
6. For simplifying key interlocking
with primary interrupter switches.
7. To satisfy NEC service entrance
requirements when more than
six feeder breakers are required.
Main secondary breakers must have
adequate interrupting and continuous
current ratings. They should be able
to carry continuously not only the
anticipated maximum continuous
output of the transformer, but also
any temporary overloads.
Maximum capabilities of transformers

of various types, can be found in Tab 14
It will be noted that the maximum ratings will often require the substitution
of larger frame main breakers than
those listed in the tables. Even if a selfcooled transformer only is considered,
it should be remembered that with
ratings of 750 kVA and higher, provision
for the future addition of cooling fans
is automatically included. It is recommended that the main breaker have
sufficient capacity for the future
fan-cooled rating, plus an allowance
for overloads, if possible, particularly
because load growth cannot always
be predicted.
The same considerations should be
given to the main bus capacities and
main current transformer ratios.
Bus Sectionalizing (Tie) Breakers

The minimum recommended
continuous current rating of bus
sectionalizing or tie breakers, as used
in double-ended secondary selective
unit sub-stations, or for connecting
two single-ended substations, is onehalf that of the associated main breakers. It is common practice to select
the tie breaker of the next frame size
below that of the main breakers.
However, many users and engineers
prefer that the tie breaker be identical
to and interchangeable with the
main breakers, so that under normal
conditions it will be available as a
spare main breaker.
In general, the tie breaker, like the
main breaker, trip unit should have
its instantaneous tripping defeated.
For a fully selective system,

instantaneous protection on main
breakers should be defeated, as they
typically cannot be coordinated with
downstream devices.
Generator Breakers
In most applications where generators
are connected through breakers to
the secondary bus, they are used as
emergency standby sources only, and
are not synchronized or paralleled
with the unit substation transformers.
Under these conditions, the interrupting rating of the generator breaker will
be based solely on the generator kVA
and sub-transient reactance. This
reactance varies with the generator
type and rpm, from a minimum of
approximately 9% for a two-pole
3600 rpm turbine driven generator
to 15% or 20% or more for a medium
or slow speed engine type generator.
Thus the feeder breakers selected
for the unit substation will usually be
adequate for a standby generator of
the same kVA as the transformer.
Most generators have a 2-hour 25%
overload rating, and the generator
breaker must be adequate for this
overload current. Selective type long
and short delay trip protection only is
usually recommended for coordination
with the feeder breakers, with the long
delay elements set at 125% to 150% of
the maximum generator current rating
for generator protection.
In the case of two or more paralleled
generators, anti-motoring reverse power
relays (device 32) are recommended
for protection of the prime movers,
particularly piston type engines. For
larger generators requiring a Magnum
MDS-632 or larger, voltage-restraint
type overcurrent relays (device 51V)
are recommended.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.1-26
Magnum DS and SB
September 2011
Sheet 26 028
Application Data
22
15000
23
29
30
50
00
00
25
00
20
00
The Magnum DS microprocessorbased true rms sensing devices

have a thermal memory and are well
suited for this service. The thermal
memory functions prevent exceeding
the breaker and cable maximum
permissible thermal energy level. The
circuit also replicates time dissipation
of thermal energy.
16
5000
During-Weld Amperes (rms)
28
The application of Eatons Magnum DS

circuit breakers to resistance welding
circuits is shown in Figure 26.1-11 of
the Sensor Selection Guide. Sensor
ratings only are given; the breaker
frame must be selected as required
for interrupting ratings.
32
10000
25
27
40
00
24
26
Resistance Welding
Sensor Rating,
Amperes
00
12
00
10
00
80
2000
60
The size of the thermal memory is

30 T (In / In)2 unit amperes2 seconds. It
fills at a rate of (iw / In)2 unit amperes2
seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds,
and empties at the rate of (In / In)2 unit
amperes2 seconds/second, where:
T = Long time delay setting in

seconds (range is 224 seconds)
40
30
25
20
31
500
32
200
iw = rms value of the welding

current in amperes
In = Rating plug current value
in amperes
33
The memory is filled during the weld

and empties during the non-welding
period of the duty cycle.
34
37
These welding applications are based

on long delay and instantaneous trip
devices with the following settings.
The long time delay setting is based
on the weld amperes and duty cycle.
Instantaneous trip setting is two times
the average weld amperes (weld
amperes times percent duty cycle)
or higher.
38
Note: Making Current Release (MCR)

may prevent closing the breaker during
a welding cycle.
100
35
36
5 6 7 8 9 10
20
Percent Duty Cycle
30
40 50 60
Figure 26.1-11. Magnum DS Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance

Welding Applications
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Magnum DS and SB
26.1-27
Sheet 26 029
Accessories and Peripheral Devices
Magnum Peripheral Devices
BIM II
Digital Relay Accessory Module

(DRAM)
Modbus Translator Module (mMINT)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Modbus Translator Module
BIM II
The mMINT (Modbus Master INCOM

Network Translator) is a DIN mounted
accessory that facilitates communication with a Modbus RTU Network and
as many as 32 Digitrip 520MC and
1150+ trip units or other INCOM
communications devices by passing
Modbus registers transparently
between the two networks.
The Breaker Interface Module (BIMII)

is a panel-mounted device that
provides a central monitor and display
for as many as 50 Magnum 520MC
and 1150+ trip units or other INCOM
communications devices. The BIMII
can be mounted directly on the
switchgear or may be located up to
10,000 feet away using twisted pair
shielded cable.
Time Delay Undervoltage (TDUVR)
Other Protocol Translators

To facilitate diverse communications
from INCOM to other protocols, Eaton
offers a host of translator devices
including MINTII (RS-232), EtherNet
(Power Xpert Gateway), Modbus
(mMINT), PROFIBUS DP (PMINT) and
others. Contact Eaton for the status of
other communication technologies.
The DRAM is a DIN mounted

accessory device with four Form C
contacts that can be programmed by
the Digitrip 1150+ for indication of
any combination of the following
conditions: auxiliary switch, INST,
SDT, LDT, GndT, GFAlm, HLAlm,
DEADman and others using the trip
unit communications bus function.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Time Delay Undervoltage
40
The Magnum time delay undervoltage

is a DIN mounted accessory device
applied in concert with a Magnum,
Series C or Series G breaker
mounted instantaneous UVR to
provide an adjustable time delay
ride-through on a temporary loss
of voltage. Selectable time delay
settings are 0.1, 0.5, 1 and 2 seconds.
Models are available for 120 Vac and
230 Vac applications.
CA08104001E
41
42
43
26.1-28
Magnum DS and SB
September 2011
Sheet 26 030
22
Control
Voltage
23
24
2
25
RLY 1
26
100
27
28
A17
RLY2
RLY3
RLY4

(DRAM)
RLY 1
RLY2
RLY3
RLY4

(DRAM)
A18
4
Shield
29
Dedicated local network
for each Magnum Circuit Breaker
30
31
32
33
34
Magnum Circuit Breaker

35
36

The Digitrip 1150 front panel is used to program the external module for any combination of the following: Aux Switch, Bell Alarm, INST, SDT,
LDT, GndT or GFAlm, HLAlm, DEADman, WATCHDOG, ALARM (the Alarm relay tracks the function of the Aux Relay A programming).
Each module has four relays. Each relay has a Form C contact with each having a rating of 10A max at 250 Vac. (Maximum of four DRAM Modules
per circuit breakertwo shown in illustration.)
Control voltage is 120 Vac 20% or 48125 Vdc.
Communication cable is C-H style 2A957805G01 or Belden 9463 cable.
Set switch up to insert 100 ohm terminating resistor on last relay of network.
Figure 26.1-12. Digitrip Relay Accessory Module Diagram
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Magnum DS and SB
September 2011
26.1-29
Sheet 26 031
Accessories and
Peripheral Devices
Levering Tool
Locking fixture mounts directly

to Magnum breaker escutcheon
25-foot umbilical cord between the
operator and the device
Hand-held pendant with OPEN/
CLOSE and IN/OUT pushbuttons,
with ENABLE button
Ready lights indicating power to the
unit and pendant
Safety interlock prevents operation
of unit until it is safely locked in place
Complete racking in 25 seconds
or less
Handles for ease of installation
Works on new and existing
Magnum breakers without the
need for any modifications to
doors, breakers or structures
Levering Tool
For maximum safety during drawout

breaker levering operations, the
universal remote power racking system
(RPR-2) can be employed on Magnum,
as well as other drawout low and
medium voltage power circuit breakers
that use rotation of a shaft for insertion
or removal. Remote control is accomplished by an operator pendant with
an INSERT and REMOVE pushbutton
station and a 25-foot connecting cable.
The RPR-2 requires 120 Vac, 15A power
from a common plug receptacle.
Status indication and selectable torque
limitation matched to the breaker
racking mechanism are also provided.
Lifting Yoke and

Floor Lifting Device
Magnum breakers include lifting ears
on each side to accept a lifting yoke
(or suitable sling) to facilitate lifting
using a skyhook from a top of gear
lifter, floor lifter or crane. Various
lifting yoke style numbers are
available for all Magnum frame
types in both three-pole and
four-pole configurations.
Magnum drawout breakers are

designed for closed door manual
levering by use of a standard
3/8-inch (10 mm) drive set, which
is a commonly available tool. This
eliminates the need for a unique
levering device, which tends to get
lost if not properly stored.
A roll-on-the-floor lifting device style

number 6727D63H20 is equipped with
a skyhook for use in conjunction
with a breaker lifting yoke or suitable
sling to lift the breaker from above.
Shelf-type roll-on-the-floor lifters can
also be used to lift the breaker from
underneath without a lifting yoke.
Magnum Remote Racking Device
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
MRR1000 Connected to Magnum Breaker
36
Universal Remote Power Racking

System (Type RPR-2)
37
38
Magnum Breaker Remote Racking Device
Eatons MRR1000 remote racking

device provides a means of remotely
inserting or removing any drawout
circuit breaker in the Magnum DS
and SB family of air circuit breakers
(ACBs), to help mitigate arc flash
exposure. The MRR1000 permits the
operator to remotely open and close a
breaker from up to 25 feet away during
the rack-in or rack-out process, a
distance well beyond the arc flash
boundary for traditional LV switchgear.
120 Vac power supply (with plug)

Works with all breakers in the
Magnum family (MDS, MDN, SBS,
SBN and CM52 network protectors)
CA08104001E
39
40
41
Floor Lifting Device
42
43
Remote Power Racking System
26.1-30
Magnum DS and SB
September 2011
Sheet 26 032
22
23
24
25
26
27
Test Cabinet
Auxiliary Power Module
TripLink
The test cabinet is a separately

mounted device with open and close
pushbuttons that facilitates bench
testing of electrically operated
Magnum breakers. An input power
cord is provided for connection to a
120 Vac, 15A plug receptacle. The test
cabinet output power is matched to
the breaker control voltage(s) and
is connected to the breaker via a
cord that plugs into the breaker
secondary contacts.
The auxiliary power module

catalog number PRTAAPM120V
or PRTAAPM240V plugs into the
receptacle located in the front of the
trip unit to power the display and/or
communications functions during
bench testing. An input power
cord is provided for connection to
a 120 Vac or 230 Vac source.
TripLink style number 5720B59G01

enables the downloading of the trip
unit protection settings and circuit
data from one Digitrip 1150+ trip unit
to another, which saves time during
startup and maintenance.
Hand-Held Functional Test Kit
28
Secondary Injection Test Kit

A test kit style number MTK1000 is
available for secondary injection testing
of Magnum breakers with Digitrip trip
units. This test kit functionally confirms
proper operation at all trip unit settings.
Test reports can be downloaded to a PC
via a removable SD card.
TripLink is a means of transferring

settings from one circuit breaker to
another. TripLink transfers all protection settings and time and date, and
the circuit breakers circuit data. The
transfer of these settings may be
useful for cloning a lineup of circuit
breakers, cloning a circuit breakers
settings for replacing the circuit
breaker with its clone for maintenance
purposes, or for making common
settings for a test program.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Hand-Held Test Kit
A secondary injection hand-held test

kit catalog number MTST120V or
MTST240V is available to functionally
test Magnum and Series G breakers
equipped with Digitrip trip units. The
kit includes test cords and faceplate
templates to match the breaker being
tested, and an auxiliary power module.
This test kit functionally confirms
proper operations at the minimum
trip unit settings.
TripLink Transfer
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Series NRX
September 2011
26.2-1
Sheet 26 033
General Description
Series NRX
Series NRX
General Description
Introducing the Series NRX low
voltage power circuit breakera major
breakthrough of minor proportions.
The Series NRX provides the
performance of a power circuit
breaker65 kA interrupting at
480 Vacin the compact size of a
molded-case breaker. It offers the
protection and features of a power
circuit breaker, along with increased
flexibility at a portion of the size.
The Series NRX is tested to 20,000
mechanical operations and 10,000
electrical operationssignificantly
higher than industry standards,
such as UL and IEC, require or the
capabilities of equivalent products on
the market. Thus, your maintenance
personnel can do what needs to be
done, instead of spending valuable
time inspecting and maintaining the
breakers in the system.
In switchgear and switchboards, its
important that it be easily accessible
during schedule equipment maintenance. The cassette design allows you
to inspect parts without removing the
cassette from the switchgear cell. The
design of the breaker and cassette
enables full use of the breaker handle
and cassette rails with a gloved hand,
allowing electricians to remain in the
appropriate PPE protective gear.
The breaker handles ergonomic
design also maximizes functionality
and leverage across seven complete
strokes (with an average of only 21 lbs
of force) charging the breaker quickly
and easily, and making it easier to
cycle when needed during commissioning or scheduled maintenance.
CA08104001E
The small size, 10.00 inches wide by

10.70 inches deep x 14.20 inches high,
of the Series NRX allows for much
higher densities of power circuit
breakers in a structureup to eight
breakers in a 24.00-inch wide structure.
In todays commercial, facilities, data

centers or manufacturing environment, available space for new and
retrofit equipment is a precious
commodity. When building space
is at a premium, or when system
upgrading requires additional
functionality, equipment dimensions
can present a challenge. In fact,
studies have shown that space savings
can have a value of up to $4000 per
square meter depending on the
application. The compact size and
broad capabilities of the Series NRX
make it the right choice for applications where space savings is a priority.
Series NRX accessories can be quickly

installed at the job site, without any
special tools. Each breaker comes
standard with an accessory tray, the
needed accessories simply plug and
lock into the tray.
A full range of trip units, ranging from
basic protection (LSI or LSIG) to metering, system diagnostics, protective
relay functions and communications,
complement the breaker offering.
Two of the trip units models include
(optional) Eatons Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System, built to reduce
arc flash energy on a downstream unit
during system maintenance.
The small size of the Series NRX,

coupled with a variety of connection
options, gives you the ability to efficiently layout distribution equipment.
See Tab 20 for low voltage metal
enclosed drawout switchgear and
Tab 21 for low voltage switchboards.
Multiple cable and bus connection

options enable quick and flexible
integration. Options include cable
termination, front or rear bus
connection in both drawout and
fixed-mounted styles. Tension clamp
secondary contact terminations allow
for quick connection of control wiring,
reducing wiring time and costs.
The reduced weight of the Series NRX

makes it easier to handle during startup and scheduled inspection. A threepole, fully populated drawout breaker
weighs only 54 lbs/24 kg!
The Series NRX enables twice as many
feeder breakers in a standard structure
or a reduction in overall assembly size
of up to 50%.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Technical Data
34
Description
Rating
Continuous current rating (amps)
800
Short-Circuit Rating (kA)
Description
Rating
800 1200
254 Vac
508 Vac
635 Vac
85
65
42
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
85
65
42
85
65
42
Short-time withstand (kA)
42
Short-time withstand (kA)
42
42
Description
Rating
630 and 800
1000 and 1250
38
1600
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
240/254 Vac
415/435 Vac
690/725 Vac
85
65
42
50
50
42
85
65
42
50
50
42
85
65
42
50
50
42
Short-time withstand = Icw (kA)
42
42
42
42
42
42
Table 26.2-4. Circuit Breaker Dimensions in Inches (mm) and Weights in lbs (kg)
Description
36
37
Table 26.2-3. IEC 60947-2 Ratings
35
39
40
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
41
13.18 (334.8)
13.18 (334.8)
8.25 (209.6)
11.00 (279.4)
7.15 (181.6)
7.15 (181.6)
33.58 (15.23)
44.40 (20.14)
42
10.02 (254.5)
12.69 (322.3)
10.69 (271.5)
10.69 (271.5)
85.20 (38.65)
104.00 (47.17)
43
Fixed
Three-pole
Four-pole
Drawout with Cassette

Three-pole
Four-pole
14.18 (360.2)
14.18 (360.2)
26.2-2
Series NRX
September 2011
Sheet 26 034
Technical Data
22
23
Table 26.2-5. Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings

Pickup
Setting
Pickup
Point
Time Band,
Seconds
Long delay
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.75,

0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0
In times
long delay
setting
2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15,

20, 24 (at 6 times
pickup value)
2, 3, 4, 6, 8,
10, 12
In times
instantaneous
setting
2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6,
8, 10
Ir times
short delay
setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5

(flat response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5
0.25, 0.3, 0.35,

0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75,
1.0 (1200A
maximum)
In times
ground fault
setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5

(flat response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5
24
Instantaneous
25
Short delay
26
Ground fault
27

28
Table 26.2-6. Replacement Rating Plugs

Field installation rating plug on fixed or drawout breakers.
Time/Current
Characteristic

I2t response.
In of
Rating
Plug
Frame Size In (maximum)

630800A
10001250A
1600A
Group A
Group B
Group C
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
200
250
300
NA200T
NA250T
NA300T
400
500
600
NA400T
NA500T
NA600T
NB400T
NB500T
NB600T
630
800
1000
NA630T
NA800T
NB630T
NB800T
NB1000T
NC800T
NC1000T
1200
1250
1600
NB1200T
NB1250T
NC1200T
NC1250T
NC1600T
IEC only (not UL listed).
Note: Rating plug must be selected based on breaker frame rating.
29
30
31
For time/current curves, please visit www.eaton.com/seriesnrx.
Accessories
ry
Tray
Spring Release with Latch Check

Switch/Ready to Close Switch
Arc Hood
Overcurrent
Trip Switches
32
Terminals
33
Secondaries
Auxiliary
Switches
1A/1B
Shutters
34
35
Rails
Trip Unit
36
Accessory Tray
Ground
Clip
Electric
Operator
Rejection
Scheme
Shunt Trip
37
38
UVR
Figure 26.2-1. Breaker and Accessories
Figure 26.2-2. Cassette/Cradle Components
Table 26.2-7. Shunt Trip
39
Control
Voltages
Frequency
40
24
48
110127
DC
DC
560 Hz
41
110125
208240
220250
DC
5060 Hz
DC
Operational Voltage
Range 70%110%
Inrush/Continuous
Power Consumption (VA)
Opening
Time (ms)
1726
3453
77140
500/5
530/5
540/5
25
25
25
77138
146264
154275
540/5
500/5
515/5
25
25
25
42
43
CA08104001E
Series NRX
September 2011
26.2-3
Sheet 26 035
Accessories
Table 26.2-8. UVR
Control
Voltages
Frequency
24
32
48
Operational Voltage
Range 85%110%
DC
DC
DC
Dropout Volts
35%60%
Inrush/Continuous
Power Consumption (VA)
Opening
Time (ms)
22
2026
2735
4153
814
1119
1729
500/5
620/5
850/5
50
50
50
23
110127
110125
208240
5060 Hz
DC
5060 Hz
94140
94138
177264
4494
4494
84125
890/5
890/5
910/5
50
50
50
24
220250
380415
480
600
DC
AC
AC
AC
187275
323457
408528
510660
88132
145228
168288
210360
910/5
960/5
800/8
800/12
50
50
50
50
25
Inrush Power
Consumption (VA)
Closing
Time (ms)
27
26
Table 26.2-9. Spring Release

Control
Voltages
Frequency
Operational Voltage
Range 70%110%
24
48
110127
DC
DC
5060 Hz
1726
3453
77140
500
530
540
25
25
25
28
110125
208240
220250
DC
5060 Hz
DC
77138
146264
154275
540
500
515
25
25
25
29
Table 26.2-10. Motor Operator

Control
Voltages
Frequency
Operational
Voltage Range
85%110%
Running
Current (A)
24
48
110127
DC
DC
5060 Hz
2026
4153
94140
5
3
2
110125
208240
220250
DC
5060 Hz
DC
94138
177264
187275
1
1
1
Typical Inrush
Current
Power
Consumption (VA)
Maximum
Charging
Time (sec)
500%
500%
300%
150
150
280
3
3
3
500%
1000%
1000%
150
280
280
3
4
4
30
31
32
33
Table 26.2-11. Control Voltages and Currents

Control Voltages
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110125 Vdc
110127 Vac
220250 Vdc
208240 Vac
34
21
21/0.2
TBD
11
11/0.1
TBD
5
5/0.04
5/1
5
5/0.04
6/2
2
2/0.02
10/1
2
2/0.02
10/1
35
1726
1726
2026
3453
3453
4153
77138
77138
94138
77140
77140
94140
154275
154275
187275
146264
146264
177264
Current
Close current (inrush)
Shunt trip current (ST)(inrush/continuous)
Charge motor current(inrush/continuous)
Operating Voltage Rating

Close
Trip
Charge
Table 26.2-12. OCT/OTS
Table 26.2-13. Auxiliary Switch
Table 26.2-14. Breaker Position/Continuity
Control
Voltages
Frequency
Contact Rating
(Amperes)
Control
Voltages
Frequency
Contact Rating
(Amperes)
Breaker
Position
250
125
250
5060 Hz
DC
DC
10
0.5
0.25
250
125
250
5060 Hz
DC
DC
10
0.5
0.25
Continuity
Between Red
and Black
Lead Pairs
Continuity
Between Blue
and Black
Lead Pairs
Open
NO
45 and 43
46 and 47
51 and 49
52 and 53
Closed
44 and 43
48 and 47
50 and 49
54 and 53
NO
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.2-4
Series NRX
September 2011
Sheet 26 036
22
Table 26.2-15. Digitrip Trip Units for NRX ANSI/UL Rated Circuit Breakers
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip 520
Digitrip 520M
Digitrip 1150
Ampere range
Interrupting rating at 480V
rms sensing
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
LI, LSI, LSIG

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
Yes
No
2001000% x (Ir)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001200% x (In)
Yes
LSI and LSIG
No
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
No
Yes
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
Yes
Yes (LSI only)
2001000% x (Ir)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001200% x (In)
Yes
Yes
Yes
25100% x (In)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
No
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG,

RLSIA
Yes
Yes
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
Yes
0.51.0 x (Ir)
2001000% x (Ir)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001200% x (In) and M1
Yes
Yes
Yes
24100% x (In)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
4-character LCD
Yes 2% full scale
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Color graphic LCD

Yes 1% of reading
Yes 1% of reading
Yes 2% of reading
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
N/A
Yes
+24 Vdc
Yes
+24 Vdc
No
No
Test set
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes (current and voltage)
Yes
Yes

Protection
Styles
Long delay
protection (L)
Long delay pickup

Long delay time I4t
IEEE curves
High load alarm
Short delay
Short delay pickup
protection (S)
Short Delay Time ZSI
Instantaneous
protection (I)
Off position
Ground fault alarm
Ground fault
Ground fault pickup
protection (G)
Ground fault delay I2t at .625 x In
Ground fault ZSI
System Diagnostics
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Cause-of-trip LEDs
System Monitoring
Digital display
Current (%)
Voltage (%) L to L
Reactive power kVAR
Power factor
Crest factor
Type
Power supply
Additional Features
Trip log
No
No
Testing method
Test set
Waveform capture
No
No
No
No
1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC.
Optional communications modules available: Ethernet (Web-browsing,
Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP), Modbus RTU, INCOM, PROFIBUS DP.

CA08104001E
Series NRX
September 2011
26.2-5
Sheet 26 037
NRX Breaker Communications Adapter Modules
NRX Breaker Communications

Adapter Modules
Control Jumper
This jumper provides the user with a
means of enabling or disabling remote
communication control commands to
the Series NRX trip unit. With jumper
placed in the ENABLE position, remote
slave action commands, such as open
and close, can be acted upon. With the
jumper in the DISABLE position,
commands will not be accepted.
Status
LED
22
23
24
25
Source/Residual Ground Selection Jumper

This jumper selects the protection
configuration for Series NRX trip units
with ground fault protection or ground
fault alarm functionality. Consult
Series NRX trip unit instructions for
further information on ground sensing.
This jumper is not applicable and does
not function for non-ground fault style
trip units.
Jumper
Plugs for
Communication
Control
Jumper
Plug for
Source
Sensing
Series NRX Communications

Adapter Module
General Description
The Series NRX Communication
Adapter Modules (CAMs) are DIN
mounted accessories that facilitate
communication with a variety of
different communications protocols:
Modbus Communication Adapter
Module (MCAM)Modbus RTU
INCOM Communication Adapter
Module (ICAM)INCOM
PROFIBUS Communication Adapter
Module (PCAM)PROFIBUS DP
Ethernet Communication Adapter
Module (ECAM)Web-enabled,
Modbus TCP/IP, SNMP and
Power Xpert Toolkit
The communication device may be

mounted in the Series NRX cassette
secondary terminal blocks or remote
mounted on a DIN rail.
28
30
MicroController LED (Status)

This indicator will be flashing green
whenever the module is powered
up and when the microprocessor is
executing instructions. When the
Series NRX communications adapter
module is connected to a Series NRX
trip unit for the first time, this LED
will alternately flash red and green
to signal a learning process between
both units. This automatic process will
take approximately 15 seconds and
occurs only once during the initial
startup. The LED will also flash red
if the module is not connected to, or
unable to communicate.
Module/address is assigned to the

cassette/cell location. This eliminates the need to do any reprogramming when a replacement breaker is
installed in the existing location
Communication of Open, Close
and Trip status is via the CAM
module, not through the trip unit
24 Vdc control power
Use with Digitrip 520M or Digitrip
1150 NRX trip units
27
29
Wiring Diagrams
Communications Adapter
Module Front View)
26
Communications
Network
CAM
CAM
CAM
31
32
33
34
35
Figure 26.2-3. Communications Adapter
Modules in a Modbus RTU, INCOM or
PROFIBUS DP Network
36
37
Optional
External
Contacts
CS (or PB)
Trip
38
39
Close
Open
Com
40

CA08104001E
Control
Power
Communications
Module
Communication Adapter Module Cassette

Mounted in Secondary Terminal Blocks
CS (or PB)
Close
41
Series NRX Circuit Breaker
Wiring as shown for optional communication close or open capability.

Choose spring release coil voltage rating as desired if communications is required.
Choose shunt trip voltage rating to be the same as spring release voltage rating
if communication is required.
Control power voltage rating must match ST and SR coil voltage rating.
Close duration is two seconds on communication activation when comm. control is enabled.
Figure 26.2-4. Communications Control (SR and ST Wiring)

42
43
26.2-6
Series NRX
September 2011
Sheet 26 038
22
23
24
TB2-1
24
TB2-2
Source
28
Enable
29
3
Shield
24 Vdc +
27
Comr
24 Vdc
Close
26
Open
TB #1
TB #
121 ohms
NW +
NW
25
COM
Comm
Control
Enable
Disable
Communications
Module
30
31
32
19
20
21 22
23
24
25
26
33
Series NRX
Circuit
Breaker
34
Digitrip 520M
35
36

37

38
39
The Series NRX communication module is a separate device that snaps into the DIN rail starting at
location 19 through 26. (Removal of the four contact blocks is required.)
The trip unit AUX voltage is 24 Vdc 10% and should be sourced from a reliable service.
Ground the shield at the master device.
Set the jumper on the module to enable or disable the communications control as desired.
When the communications module is employed and source ground or zero sequence ground sensing
method is required, the ground fault function is enabled by this jumper.
Connectors are UL/CSA rated 300V, VDE rated 250V. Recommended: Weidmuller (BL 3.5/90/5BK)
Orientation: 90 lead exit, but other lead orientations are possible. Wire guage: # 18 AWG/0.82 mm.
The final device in the daisy-chain configuration must have a 121ohms termination resistor installed
across terminals #1 and #2 on TB #2.
Figure 26.2-5. Series NRX Modbus Communication with Digitrip 520M
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Series NRX
September 2011
26.2-7
Sheet 26 039
22
+
24 Vdc
TB2-1
TB2-2

3 2
Source
Ground
Enable
Disable
100 ohms
24
25
26
NW +
NW
Shield
TB #2
27
24
Comr
24
Open
Close
TB #1
23
Comm
Control
28
Enable
Disable
Communications
Module
29
30
31
32
19 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
33
Series NRX
Circuit
Breaker
Digitrip 520M
34
35

The Series NRX communication module is a separate device that snaps into the DIN rail starting at location
19 through 26. (Removal of the four contact blocks is required.)
The trip unit AUX voltage is 24 Vdc 10% and should be sourced from a reliable service.
INCOM communication cable is a two conductor with shield type wire in daisy chain configuration. The
recommended cable (Belden Blue Hose # 9643 or equivalent) has a twisted-pair of wires (# 20 AWG stranded
7 x 28 conductors with PVC insulation) having an aluminum/mylar foil shield with drain wire. The maximum
system capacity is 10,000 feet of communications cable and 1000 devices on the INCOM network. Make sure
that the twisted-pair wire is recommended for INCOM network use. Use shielded twisted-pair wire to connect
each slave to the INCOM network, daisy-chain style. The polarity of the twisted-pair is not important. Ground the
shield at the host computer (device).
Set the jumper on the module to enable or disable the communications control as desired.
When the communications module is employed and source ground or zero sequence ground sensing method
is required, the ground fault function is enabled by this jumper.
Connectors are UL/CSA rated 300V, VDE rated 250V. Recommended: Weidmuller (BL 3.5/90/5BK)
Orientation: 90 lead exit, but other lead orientations are possible. Wire gauge: # 18 AWG/0.82 mm.
The final device in the daisy-chain configuration must have a 100 ohms termination resistor installed
across terminals #1 and #2 on TB #2.
Figure 26.2-6. Series NRX INCOM Communication with Digitrip 520M
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
26.2-8
Series NRX
September 2011
Sheet 26 040
Ethernet Communications Adapter Module
22
Ethernet Communications
Adapter Module
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Series NRX Ethernet Communications

Adapter Module
Data View Summary
General Description
The Series NRX Ethernet
communications adapter module
is an accessory that operates as a
communicating device in conjunction
with a compatible Series NRX trip
unit/breaker via an Ethernet network.
The catalog number of this product
is ECAM.
The Ethernet communications adapter
module provides Web-enabled
monitoring and control of the Series
NRX trip unit metering, logging, and
control functions using a standard web
browser. Features include display of
measured current, voltage, power,
energy and alarms; command,
event and data logging; configuration
of set point, alarm and logging
parameters; and control functions
such as open/close breaker.
In addition to Web server capability,
data communication is provided in
Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP protocols.
Additionally, the Series NRX Ethernet
Communications Adapter Module
provides data communications to the
Eaton Power Xpert Software as an
easy means of centralizing and
gathering data for long-term data
archival, analysis and trending.
Trend Graph View
42
43
CA08104001E
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures
27.0-1
December 2013
Molded-Case Circuit
Breakers & Enclosures
Sheet 27 001
CA08104001E
Contents
22

Breaker Type Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-2
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-3
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-1
Special Function Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-1
Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . Section 16475
Section 26 28 11
Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16904
Section 26 28 50
Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16476
Section 26 28 16.11
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
27.0-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

Breaker Type Comparison
December 2013
Sheet 27 002
22
23
24
25
26
Summary of Differences Between Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers,

Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers and Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
There are two main classifications of low voltage circuit
breakersmolded-case circuit breakers and low voltage
power circuit breakers. All UL, NEMA and ANSI standards
are for molded-case circuit breakers and low voltage
The industry recognizes three types of circuit breakers
molded-case circuit breakers (MCCB), insulated-case circuit
breakers (ICCB) and low voltage power circuit breakers
LVPCB). Insulated-case circuit breakers are designed to
meet the standards for molded-case circuit breakers.
Low voltage power circuit breakers comply with the

following standards:
ANSI Std. C37.16Preferred Ratings
ANSI Std. C37.17Trip Devices for LVPCB
ANSI Std. C37.50Test Procedures
IEEE Std. C37.13LVPCB Used in Enclosures
UL 1066LVPCB
Molded-case circuit breakers and insulated-case circuit

breakers typically comply with the following standards:
UL 489MCCB
UL 489Molded-Case Switches (MCS)
NEMA AB1MCCB and MCS
NEMA AB3MCCB Application
27
28
Table 27.0-1. Breaker Type Comparison Chart
29
Description
LVPCB
(Type Magnum DS and Series NRX)
ICCB
(Type Magnum SB and Series NRX)
MCCB
(QUICKLAG/Series C/Series G)
30
Select trip
short-time rating
Selective trip over full range of fault

currents up to interrupting rating
(high short-time ratings)
31
Selective trip over partial range of fault

currents within the interrupting rating
(medium short-time ratings). Typically
up to 35 kA
Selective trip over a smaller range of fault

currents within the interrupting rating (low
short-time ratings). Typically 1013 times
the frame size
Operator type

Types of operators: mechanically operated

over-center toggle or motor operator
32

Closing speed

operated devices

operated devices
Greater than 5-cycle closing for electrically

operated devices
Mounting


Typically fixed-mounted but large frame

sizes may be available in drawout
construction
Interrupting rating

42100 kA and current limiting with
or without fuses up to 200 kA

35 150 kA

22100 kA without fuses and up
to 200 kA with integral fuses or for
current-limiting type
Current limiting


without fuses up to 150 kA
Current limiting available with and without

fuses up to 200 kA
33
34
35
36
37
38
Relative cost
Higher
Medium
Low
Available
frame sizes

Typical 8006000A

Typical 8006000A
Large number of frame sizes available.

Typical 1002500A
Maintenance
Extensive maintenance possible on all

frame sizes
Limited maintenance possible on larger

frame sizes
Very limited maintenance possible on larger

frame sizes
Enclosure types
Used in enclosures, MCCs, switchboards

and switchgear
Used in enclosures, MCCs

and switchboards
Used in enclosures, panelboards,

switchboards, MCCs and control panels
Series ratings
Available in series ratings
Enclosed rating
100% continuous current rated in

its enclosure

an enclosure

an enclosure
Standards
ANSI/IEEE C37
UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489 or UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.0-3
Sheet 27 003
22
23
24
25
26
27
Series G
Table of Contents
28
General Description
Circuit Breaker Components and Functions . . . . .
Electronic RMS Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Function Circuit Breakers
Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100% Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series Rated Breaker Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Breakers for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AFCI Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400 Hz Breaker Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting Control Solenoid Operated Breakers . . .
SWD Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HACR Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mining Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naval/Marine Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Data
Continuous Ampere Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feeder Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Branch Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breakers Not hp Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slash Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Sizing/Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08104001E
27.1-1
27.1-2
27.1-7
27.2-1
27.2-1
27.2-3
27.2-5
27.2-8
27.2-12
27.2-12
27.2-13
27.2-14
27.2-16
27.2-19
27.2-19
27.2-19
27.2-19
27.2-19
27.2-20
27.2-20
27.2-20
27.3-1
27.3-1
27.3-1
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-3
27.3-4
27.3-6
27.3-6
27.3-7
27.3-8
Time Current Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breaker Selection Table100% Selective . . . .
Breaker Selection Table0.1 Sec Selective . .
Arc Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System . . . . . . .
Unusual Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverse-Feed Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker Selection Data
Overview Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . .
Series G Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . .
Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Industrial Circuit Breakers . . .
Industrial Circuit Breakers in Assemblies . . . . .
Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . .
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . .
QUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series G Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . .
Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . .
Series G Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series C Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breaker (MPCB). . . . . .
Power Monitoring and Metering
Module (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Modules and Breakers. . . . . .
Circuit Breaker Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.3-9
27.3-10
27.3-14
27.3-22
27.3-35
27.3-36
27.3-37
27.3-38
29
30
31
27.4-1
27.4-1
27.4-4
27.4-5
27.4-6
27.4-7
27.4-8
27.4-10
27.4-11
27.4-11
32
27.4-13
27.4-19
27.4-25
27.4-33
27.4-34
36
27.4-35
27.4-38
27.4-40
38
27.4-41
27.4-44
27.4-45
27.4-50
33
34
35
37
39
40
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 004
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.1-1
Sheet 27 005
General Description
General Description
General Circuit
Breaker Information
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers
are designed to provide circuit
protection for low voltage distribution
systems. They are described by
NEMA as, . . . a device for closing
and interrupting a circuit between
separable contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions, and furthermore as, . . . a breaker assembled
as an integral unit in a supporting
and enclosing housing of insulating
material. The NEC describes them
as, A device designed to open and
close a circuit by non-automatic
means, and to open the circuit
automatically on a predetermined
overload of current, without injury
to itself when properly applied within
its rating.
So designed, Eaton circuit breakers
protect conductors against overloads
and conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors and
motor starters, against short circuits.
Circuit Breaker Components

and Functions
Being essentially high interrupting
capacity switches with repetitive
elements, Eaton circuit breakers
are comprised of three main
functional components. These are:
1. Trip elements (thermal-magnetic
or electronic)
2. Operating mechanism
3. Arc extinguishers
1. Trip Elements
The function of the trip element is to trip
the operating mechanism in the event
of a prolonged overload or short-circuit
current. To accomplish this, a thermalmagnetic trip action is provided.
Thermal trip action is achieved

through the use of a bimetal heated by
the load current. On a sustained overload, the bimetal will deflect, causing
the operating mechanism to trip.
Because bimetals are responsive to
the heat emitted by the current flow,
they allow a long-time delay on light
overloads, yet they have a fast
response on heavier overloads.
Magnetic trip action is achieved through
the use of an electromagnet in series
with the load current. This provides an
instantaneous tripping action when the
current reaches a predetermined value.
Front-adjustable magnetic trip elements
are supplied as standard on 250A frame
circuit breakers and above (except 100A
and 150A magnetic only breakers), all
other thermal-magnetic breakers have
non-adjustable magnetic trip elements.
Electronic RMS Trip Breakers

Eaton electronic trip breakers are
generally applied for applications
where high levels of system coordination are called for. Available from
202500A, todays electronic trip
breakers can provide superior
protection and coordination as well
as system alarms and diagnostics,
monitoring and communications.
Both the overload trip action and the
short-circuit trip action of breakers
with Digitrip electronic trip units
are achieved by the use of current
transformers and solid-state circuitry
that monitors the current and initiates
tripping through a flux shunt trip
when an overload or a short circuit
is present. All multiple-pole circuit
breakers have trip elements in each
pole and a common trip bar. An
abnormal circuit condition in any
one pole will cause all poles to open
simultaneously.
Electronic RMS trip breakers can
include trip features such as:
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Eaton thermal-magnetic breakers are

general purpose devices suitable for
the majority of breaker applications
and are considered the industry standard. Available from 15800A, thermalmagnetic breakers provide accurate
reliable overload and short-circuit
protection for conductors and
connected apparatus.
Adjustable long-time pickup

Adjustable short-time pickup
Adjustable long delay time
Adjustable short delay time
Adjustable instantaneous pickup
Adjustable ground fault pickup
Adjustable ground fault delay time
Communications
Trip unit adjustments are made by

setting switches on the front of the trip
unit or by programming the trip unit
electronically.
All electronic RMS trip breakers are
equipped with a manual push-to-trip
mechanism.
22
23
24
2. Operating Mechanism
The function of the operating mechanism is to provide a means of opening
and closing the breaker contacts. All
mechanisms are of the quick-make,
quick-break type and are trip free.
Trip free mechanisms are designed
so that the contacts cannot be held
closed against an abnormal circuit
condition and are sometimes referred
to as an overcenter toggle mechanism.
In addition to indicating whether the
breaker is on or off, the operating
mechanism handle indicates when the
breaker is tripped by moving to a
position midway between the extremes.
This distinct trip point is particularly
advantageous where breakers are
grouped, as in panelboard applications,
because it clearly indicates the faulty
circuit. The operating mechanism
contains a positive on feature. In the
normal switching operation, the
handle of the circuit breaker will not
be capable of being left readily at or near
the off position when the main contacts
are closed.
25
3. Arc Extinguishers
34
The function of the DE-ION arc

extinguisher is to confine, divide
and extinguish the arc drawn between
opening breaker contacts. It consists of
specially shaped steel grids isolated
from each other and supported by an
insulating housing. When the contacts
are opened, the arc drawn induces a
magnetic field in the grids, which in
turn draws the arc from the contacts
and into the grids. The arc is thus split
into a series of smaller arcs and the
heat generated is quickly dissipated
through the metal. These two actions
result in a rapid removal of ions from
the arc, which hastens dielectric buildup between the contacts and results in
rapid extinction of the arc.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 006
General DescriptionTrip Units
22
Electronic RMS Trip Unit

General
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Eaton offers the most comprehensive

range of electronic trip units in the
industry for molded-case circuit
breakers. All electronic trip units are rms
sensing and can be applied from 70A up
through 2500A. Eaton offers electronic
trip units as standard for circuit breakers
rated above 800A, and offers electronic
trip units as optional for circuit breakers
70A up through 800A.
Digitrip electronic trip units are AC
devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true
rms current sensing means for proper
correlation with thermal characteristics
of conductors and equipment. The
primary function of the Digitrip
electronic trip unit is to provide
circuit protection. This is achieved
by analyzing the secondary current
signals received from the circuit
breaker current sensors and initiating
trip signals to the circuit breaker shunt
trip when pre-set current levels and
time delay settings are exceeded. All
Eaton electronic trip units use a high
effective sampling rate to maintain
measurement accuracy, monitoring,
and protection with nonlinear loads
having harmonic content up to the
27th order.
Front-Adjustable Trip Units
Rating Plugs
Front-adjustable trip units are

electronic trip units that have up to
nine time-current setting options that
are set by switches mounted on the
front of the trip unit. The application
for front adjustable trip units would
be distribution systems that can be
coordinated within the range of
settings available and that do not
require sophisticated coordination
strategies to be applied down
through the distribution system to
small rated breakers.
Rating plugs provide a means to

establish the breakers continuous
current rating. Rating plugs are colorcoded and interchangeable to make it
easy to match the correct rating plug
with the correct trip unit. The same
rating plug can be applied to both 50
and 60 Hz distribution systems. Some
rating plugs are fixed and some have
an adjustable range of amperage
values for greater flexibility. Digitrip
310, 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units
can be supplied with either a fixed or
adjustable rating plug. Digitrip 310+
trip units are equipped with adjustable
rating plugs. OPTIM style trip units are
furnished with fixed rating plugs but
have a programmable Long Time
Pickup rating to allow application
over a range of amperage values.
Programmable Trip Units (OPTIM)

Programmable trip units are electronic
trip units that have up to 10 timecurrent setting options that are
programmed electronically by the
use of a programming device. The
application for programmable
trip units would be high integrity
distribution systems that require
superior levels of system coordination
coupled with system alarming,
diagnostics and monitoring.
Electronic trip units are applied to

distribution systems when high standards of protection and coordination
are called for. In addition, electronic
trip units can provide further enhanced
features such as alarming, diagnostics,
system monitoring and communications.
Cause of Trip Indication

All OPTIM and Digitrip 510, 610, 810
and 910 trip units include Cause-ofTrip indication LEDs. Breakers using
the RMS 310+ electronic trip unit
have the ability to output cause-of-trip
information through the test port. The
Cause-of-Trip LED module provides
trip information via LED indication.
The Digiview and Panelmount
Digiview can be installed in the
RMS 310+ test port to provide both
cause-of-trip information and phase
current through an LCD display.
Eaton RMS sensing trip units fall into

two main categories:
Front adjustable trip units
(Digitrip RMS 310, 310+,
510, 610, 810 and 910)
Programmable trip units
(Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050)
Cause-of-Trip LED Module
Digiview
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.1-3
Sheet 27 007

Table 27.1-1. The Digitrip Family of Low Voltage Electronic Trip Units
RMS 310
RMS 310+
RMS 510
OPTIM 550
RMS 610
RMS 810
RMS 910
OPTIM 1050
22
23
24
25
rms sensing
5 functions
Front adjustable
rms sensing
6 functions
Front adjustable
Optional display
for diagnostics
and load
monitoring
Zone selective
interlocking
Optional
Arcflash
Reduction
Maintenance
System
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Diagnostics
rms sensing
10 functions
Programmable
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Zone selective
interlocking
Communications
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
Harmonics
rms sensing
10 functions
Programmable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
Harmonics
26
27
28
29
30
31
Optional features.
Additional Protection Features

Discriminator/Making Current Release
Eatons Digitrip RMS electronic trip
units are designed and built with
safety and reliability in mind, both to
protect the user and the equipment, as
well as to make sure the trip functions
within its design parameters. By
providing a discriminator circuit to
Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip
units, as well as to Digitrip OPTIM 550
and 1050 trip units that do not have
an instantaneous setting, the user is
protected should a faulted circuit exist.
The discriminator (or making current
releases as it is often called) is set at
11 times the rating plug ampere rating
and is enabled for approximately the
first 10 cycles of current flow. Should
a fault condition exist, the breaker will
trip with no intentional time delay on
closing, protecting the user from a
potentially unsafe condition.
Instantaneous Override
In addition to a discriminator, an
instantaneous override is present in
all molded-case and insulated-case
circuit breakers to provide additional
protection for the breaker. The
instantaneous override is factory
set nominally just below the breaker
withstand rating.
CA08104001E
Trip Unit Overtemperature

Digitrip electronic trip units can operate
reliably in ambient temperatures that
range from 20 to 85C. In the unlikely
event that temperatures exceed this
ambient, the trip unit has a built-in
overtemperature trip to protect the trip
unit should the temperature exceed
these design parameters.
imposes a shorter delay time should

an additional overcurrent occur
before a sufficient cooldown period
has elapsed.
Thermal memory protects the
distribution system from cumulative
overheating caused by repeated overcurrent conditions. OPTIM trip units
allow this to be turned ON or OFF.
Thermal Memory
System Alarms
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM

electronic trip units incorporate
powered thermal memory, i.e., the
units remember recent overcurrent
events that may have initiated the trip
timing sequence, and then returned to
nominal levels, halting the sequence
prior to trip initiation. In the event that
the current levels again exceed the
pickup set point within a few cycles of
the original pickup, the units memory
recalls the previous near trip and
automatically imposes a shorter
delay time. In effect, the unit treats
multiple time-related events as a
single continuous event thereby
preventing system damage due to
cumulative overheating.
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910

electronic trip units incorporate a
high load alarm capability. Set at 85%
of Ir, the alarm will be initiated once
the load current exceeds 85% for
40 seconds. Once this occurs, the
HILD message will flash in the display
window and the power/relay module
will operate to send a remote signal.
As a further enhancement, the trip

units incorporate an unpowered
thermal memory feature. In the event
that current levels cause the breaker
to trip and the breaker is immediately
reclosed, the trip unit remembers the
previous overcurrent trip and again
Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units

also offer a high load alarm capability
but with more flexibility. OPTIM trip
units have a high load alarm that can
be programmed to operate between
50% and 100% of Ir.
Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units
incorporate a ground fault alarm
capability. Settings available for ground
fault alarm are the same as for ground
fault trip. Once a ground fault alarm
occurs, both local and remote signal
indication is available (OPTIM 550
is remote only).
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 008
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
System Diagnostics
Current Monitoring
Whenever a circuit breaker trips, it is

normally imperative that the cause of
trip be determined quickly, the faulty
conditions rectified, and the breaker
put back into service. Digitrip RMS
510, 610, 810 and 910, and Digitrip
OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate
a complete package of systems
diagnostics to meet this challenge.
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 trip units

are capable of monitoring currents
in individual phases (A, B, C) as well
as ground currents. Digitrip OPTIM
550 and 1050 trip units are capable
of monitoring currents in individual
phases (A, B, C) as well as neutral
and ground currents.
Four cause-of-trip LEDs are embedded

in the front of the trip unit case,
indicating that the cause-of-trip
was either a long delay, short delay,
instantaneous or ground fault. Remote
signal indication for cause of trip as
well as magnitude of trip information
is also available.
Breakers using the RMS 310+
electronic trip unit have the ability
to output cause-of-trip information
through the test port. The Causeof-Trip LED module provides trip
information via LED indication. The
Digiview and Panelmount Digiview
can be installed to provide both
cause-of-trip information and phase
current through an LCD display.
Systems Monitoring
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM
electronic trip units offer a complete
menu of monitoring capability to
include current, power and energy,
power factor, power quality harmonics,
and other related parameters with a
high level of accuracy.
Digital Display
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 have
a large, easy-to-read four-digit alphanumeric display mounted on the trip
unit. The display is supported by LEDs
that indicate which parameter is being
displayed along with the unit the value
is displayed in, e.g., kA and so on.
Values are displayed in the digital

display window in kA. Accuracy of the
current monitored values is 2% of full
scale sensor rating.
Breakers using the Digitrip 310+
electronic trip unit have the ability
to output phase current monitoring
information through the test port. The
Digiview or Panelmount Digiview can
be installed to provide phase current
through an LCD display.
For current and voltage monitoring
with 0.5% accuracy of reading that can
be used with thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip units, refer to the Power
Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
on Page 27.4-41.
Power and Energy Monitoring

For the trip unit to calculate true
power and energy values, a Potential
Transformer Module (PTM) is required.
This PTM is mounted internally
(R-Frame and larger) or externally
(N-Frame or smaller) to the breaker,
and provides voltage to the trip unit.
The accuracy of power monitored

values is 4% of full scale sensor/
frame rating.
The accuracy of energy monitored
values is 5% of full scale sensor/
frame rating.
Both the RMS 910 and OPTIM 1050
report power factor. Digitrip RMS 910
trip units have the additional capability
of monitoring line-to-line voltage.
For Real Power and Reactive Power
monitoring with ANSI C12.1 revenue
class accuracy that can be used with
thermal-magnetic or electronic trip
units, refer to the Power Monitoring/
Metering Module (PM3) on
Page 27.4-41.
Harmonics Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM
1050 trip units are capable of monitoring values of current harmonics.
Percentage of total harmonic content
can be monitored for each level of
harmonic content up to the 27th
harmonic. Additionally, a total
harmonic distortion (THD) value can
be calculated and displayed providing
the user with total system current
harmonic monitoring capability.
Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units

are capable of monitoring peak power
demand, present power demand, and
reverse power flow in MW. Additionally, both forward and reverse energy
consumption in MWh can be monitored. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units
can also monitor the same power and
energy parameters, but the units are
displayed in kW and kWh.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.1-5
Sheet 27 009
Time-Current Curve Shaping
Short Delay (S)
Curve Shaping
3. Short Delay Pickup

Determines or sets the level
of fault current at which the
short-time trip delay countdown
is actuated.
Eaton Digitrip RMS 310 trip units are

available with up to five phase and
ground adjustments on the front of the
trip unit. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units
are available with up to six phase and
ground adjustments on the front of the
trip unit. Selective system coordination
with both upstream and downstream
devices can be achieved to provide an
economic solution for less sophisticated
distribution systems.
4. Short Delay
Sets the amount of time the breaker
will carry both a low level and high
fault currents before tripping.
2B
2
2A
a. Flat Response
electronic trip devices.
b. I2t Response
fuses and thermal-magnetic
breakers.
3
Time
4B
4
4A
5
7B
7
7A
Current in Multiples
Figure 27.1-1. Time-Current Curve Shaping

Note: See selection guide charts for
availability of adjustments.
Long Delay (L)

1. Long Delay Pickup
Determines the continuous
ampere rating of the breaker.
2. Long Delay Time
the breaker will carry a low level
overload before tripping.
a. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with other
circuit breakers with electronic
trip devices and for coordination
circuit breakers.
b. I4t Response
fuses and upstream transformer damage curves.
Instantaneous (I)
5. Instantaneous Pickup
current that will actuate a trip
with no time delay.
Ground Fault (G)

6. Ground Fault Pickup
current at which the ground fault
7. Ground Fault Delay
the breaker will carry a ground
fault before tripping.
a. Flat Response
electronic ground fault settings.
b. I2t Response
zero sequence ground fault
relays, fuses and thermalmagnetic breakers.
For more sophisticated selective

coordination systems Digitrip RMS
510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units are
available with up to nine curve shaping
choices via switches on the front of
the unit. Curve shaping flexibility is
provided by dependent long and short
delay adjustments that are based on
continuous amperes (Ir) selection.
Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip
units offer programmable curve
shaping via 10 curve shaping choices
that are programmed electronically
into the trip unit. OPTIM also offers
virtual infinite settings to allow the
user to optimize coordination for a
selectively coordinated distribution
system. In addition, time-current set
points can be downloaded via a
communication system from a central
personal computer. Digitrip OPTIM is
normally applied to systems where
system integrity is very important.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 010
22
23
Zone selective interlocking capabilities

are available with Digitrip RMS 310+
510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units as
well as Digitrip OPTIM 550 and
1050 trip units.
24
Note: Optional accessory on the OPTIM 550.
25
26
27
28
29

1200A Pickup
Zone 1
Zone selective interlocking provides

increased system protection and can
reduce arc flash risk by allowing the
breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delays. This is
achieved by setting up the distribution
system as shown in Figure 27.1-2.
The hardwired connection between
the trip units sends a restraining signal
upstream, allowing the breaker closest
to the fault to act instantaneously. Zone
selective interlocking reduces stress
on the distribution system and can
reduce arc flash risk by isolating faults
without time delays.
Breaker
Number 1
Fault 1
600A Pickup
Zone 2
Breaker
Number 2
Zone Selective
Interlocking Wiring
Fault 2
30
31
Zone 3
300A Pickup
No Time Delay
32
Breaker
Number 3
33
Fault 3
34
35
36
37
Load
Figure 27.1-2. Zone Selective Interlocking
Fault 1
Fault 3
There are no interlocking signals.

The main breaker trip unit will initiate
the trip instantaneously.
The branch breaker trip unit will initiate

the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and
Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal
to Zone 1.
Fault 2
38
39
40
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate

the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit.
The Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time
out, and in the event that the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 would not clear
the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1
will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds.
41
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will

begin to time out, and in the event
that the branch breaker in Zone 3
would not clear the fault, the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 will clear the fault
in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event
that the feeder breaker in Zone 2
would not clear the fault, the main
breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault
in 0.5 seconds.
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.1-7
Sheet 27 011
Accessories and Modifications
Internal Accessories
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch
Shunt Trip
Note: For a complete listing of available

external accessories, see Volume 4Circuit
Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Section 25.
The alarm (signal)/lockout switch

monitors circuit breaker trip status and
provides remote signaling and interlocking capabilities when the circuit
breaker trips. For two-, three- and
four-pole circuit breakers, the alarm
(signal)/lockout switch consists of one
or two SPDT switches assembled to a
plug-in module mounted in retaining
slots in the top of the trip unit. The
SPDT switch contacts are identified as
make and break contacts. When the
circuit breaker trips, the make contact
closes and the break contact opens.
The shunt trip provides remote controlled

tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt
trip consists of an intermittent rated
solenoid with a tripping plunger and
a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in
module. When required for ground
fault protection applications, certain
AC rated shunt trips are suitable for
operation at 55% of rated voltage.
All internal accessories are of the

plug-in type and are listed for field
installation under UL File E64983.
Internal accessories for sealed circuit
breakers are listed under UL File E7819
for factory installation only. The
available plug-in accessories include
the following:
Alarm (signal)/lockout switch

Auxiliary switch
Shunt trip
Low energy shunt trip
Undervoltage release mechanism
Make
Break
22
23
24
25
Available in most AC and DC voltages.

Note: Approximate unlatching time
6 milliseconds. Approximate total
circuit breaker contact opening time
18 milliseconds. Endurance4000 electrical
operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with
Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included
with accessory kits.
26
27
28
29
ST
30
31
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch
Auxiliary Switch
Typical Internal Plug-in Accessory Installed

in K-Frame Circuit Breaker
Different accessory wiring options are

available to satisfy most circuit breaker
mounting applications. The standard
wiring configuration is pigtail leads
exiting the rear of the base directly
behind the accessory. Optional
configurations include a terminal
block mounted on the same side of the
base as the accessory, leads exiting the
side of the base where the accessory
is mounted, and leads exiting the rear
of the base on the side opposite the
accessory. If accessory leads longer
than 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) are
required, side-mounted terminal
blocks should be used.
CA08104001E
The auxiliary switch provides circuit

breaker contact status information
by monitoring the position of the
molded crossbar containing the
moving contact arms. The auxiliary
switch is used for remote signaling
and interlocking purposes, and
consists of one or two SPDT switches
assembled to a plug-in module
mounted in retaining slots in the top
of the trip unit. Each SPDT switch has
one a and one b contact. When
the circuit breaker contacts are open,
the a contact is open and the b
contact is closed.
32
Shunt Trip
OPTIM Communications Kit

Eatons OPTIM Communications Kit
provides the option to field install
PowerNet communications into a K-, Lor N-Frame OPTIM 550 breaker. OPTIM
1050 trip units come equipped with
communications as standard.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
OPTIM Communications Kit
40
41
42
Auxiliary Switch
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 012
Accessories and Modifications
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Low Energy Shunt Trip

Low energy shunt trip devices are
designed to operate from low energy
output signals from dedicated current
sensors typically applied in ground
fault protection schemes. However,
with a proper control voltage source,
they may be applied in place of
conventional trip devices for special
applications. Flux paths surrounding
permanent magnets used in the shunt
trip assembly hold a charged spring
poised in readiness to operate the
circuit breaker trip mechanism. When
a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to
28 Vdc is discharged through the shunt
trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the
permanent magnet flux field, which
releases the stored energy in the
spring to trip the circuit breaker. As
the circuit breaker resets, the reset
arm is actuated by the circuit breaker
handle, resetting the shunt trip. The
plug-in module is mounted in retaining
slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is
intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions
required in control circuit.
31
32
ST
LE
With no voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit

breaker contacts will not touch when a
closing operation is attempted.
UV
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
External Accessories
Note: For a complete listing of available
external accessories, see Volume 4Circuit
Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Section 25.
Non-Padlockable Handle Block

The nonlockable handle block secures
the circuit breaker handle in either the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when
the handle block holds the circuit
breaker handle in the ON position.)
The device is positioned over the circuit
breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation
of the circuit breaker handle. (Field
installation only.)
Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included)

The key interlock is used to externally
lock the circuit breaker handle in the
OFF position. When the key interlock is
locked, an extended deadbolt blocks
movement of the circuit breaker
handle. Uniquely coded keys are
removable only with the deadbolt
extended. Each coded key controls a
group of circuit breakers for a given
specific customer installation.
The key interlock assembly consists
of a mounting kit and a purchaser
supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting
kit comprises a mounting plate, which
is secured to the circuit breaker cover
in either the left- or right-pole position;
key interlock mounting hardware; and
a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are
required for individual key interlock
types. (Field installation only.)
Key Interlock Kit
33
Padlockable Handle Block
34
The device is positioned in the cover

opening to prevent handle movement.
Will accommodate one 5/16-inch
(8.0 mm) padlock.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release Mechanism

The undervoltage release mechanism
monitors a voltage (typically a line
voltage) and trips the circuit breaker
when the voltage falls to between 70
and 35% of the solenoid coil rating.
Note: Undervoltage release mechanism
accessories are not designed for, and
should not be used as, circuit interlocks.
The undervoltage release mechanism

consists of a continuous rated
solenoid with a plunger and tripping
lever assembled to a plug-in module.
The tab on the tripping lever resets
the undervoltage release mechanism
when normal voltage has been
restored and the circuit breaker handle
is moved to the reset (OFF) position.
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

The padlockable handle lock hasp
allows the handle to be locked in the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when
the handle lock holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.) The hasp
mounts on the circuit breaker cover
within the trimline. The cover is
predrilled on both sides of the
operating handle so that the hasp
can be mounted on either side of the
handle. The hasp will accommodate
up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch
(6.4 mm) shackles. One per circuit
breaker. (Field installation only.)
Padlockable Handle Block
42
43
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-1
Sheet 27 013
Eaton molded-case switches (MCS)
are UL 489 devices that dont have
thermal protection, but do have a selfprotecting high-magnetic trip setting.
Molded-case switches are applied
when a compact high-capacity
disconnect device is necessary.
Accessories that can be installed in
molded-case circuit breakers are also
available for molded-case switches.
The most common application for a
molded-case switch would be as a
main disconnect for a panelboard
or a loadcenter. Available from 100 to
2500A, molded-case switches provide
a compact high-capacity disconnect
device along with the added benefits
of a molded-case circuit breaker
without the thermal protection.
It provides no overcurrent protection,
overload or low level fault. The MCS
is equipped with a high instantaneous
magnetic fixed trip unit. The fixed
magnetic trip is factory preset to
interrupt high fault currents at or
above its preset level. MCS is self
protecting within its withstand rating.
See Table 27.2-1.
Motor Circuit Protectors

Application flexibility of Eaton motor
circuit protectors (Type GMCP/HMCP/
HMCPE) is enhanced by the higher
interrupting ratings and current limiting
characteristics designed into the line.
These devices are available from
31200A in 63, 100, 150, 250, 400, 600,
800 and 1200A frame sizes.
The motor circuit protectors are
designed for application in individual
motor circuits in combination motor
starter units. Motor circuit protectors
operate on the magnetic principle with
a current sensing element in each pole
to provide short-circuit protection.
The motor circuit protector design

permits the most effective protection
possible against low-level faults while
offering circuit breaker convenience,
quick-make quick-break action,
deadfront safety and prevention
of single phasing.
The GMCP and HMCPE are 480V
devices rated between 3100A. The
HMCP is a 600V device available in five
frames and rated between 31200A.
The MCP is designed to comply with
the applicable requirements of
Underwriters Laboratories Standard
UL 489, Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5,
and International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations
IEC 157-1.
An innovative design of internal

components allows higher MCP-starter
combination interrupting ratings.
The MCP is marked to permit proper
electrical application within the
assigned equipment ratings.
The MCP is a recognized component
(UL File E7819) and complies with the
applicable requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also
designed to comply with the applicable
requirements of Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5,
and International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations
IEC 157-1. The interrupting rating
is defined on the assembled
equipment nameplate.
Table 27.2-1. Molded-Case Switch Short-Circuit Current Ratings at 60 Hz Only

(Maximum Fault Current at Which Device can be Applied in kAIC)
MCS
Frame
Ampere
Rating
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Short-Circuit Current Rating

240V
22
480V
600V
250 Vdc
30
GD
EHD
FD
100
100
150
65
18
65
22
14
35
18
10
10
10
HFD
JD
HJD
150
250
250
100
65
100
65
35
65
25
18
25
22
10
22
DK
KD
HKD
400
400
400
65
65
100
35
65
25
35
10
10
22
LD
HLD
MDL
600
600
800
65
100
65
35
65
50
25
35
25
22
25
22
HMDL
ND
HND
800
1200
1200
100
65
100
65
50
65
35
25
35
25
34
RD
EGK
JGK
2000
125
250
125
100
100
65
65
65
50
35
42
42
35
LGK
LGK
NGK
RGK
400
600
1200
2000
100
100
100
125
65
65
65
65
35
35
35
50
42
42
36
31
32
33
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

December 2013
Sheet 27 014
Selection DataMotor Circuit Protectors
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Motor Protection
In line with 2008 NEC 430.6(A)
circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating
selections are based on full load
currents for induction motors running
at speeds normal for belted motors
and motors with normal torque
characteristics using data taken from
NEC Table 430.250 (three-phase).
Actual motor nameplate ratings will
be used for selecting motor running
overload protection. Motors built
special for low speeds, high torque
characteristics, special starting
conditions and applications will
require other considerations as
of the NEC.
pickup settings.
ampere rating selections are in
line with maximum rules given in
NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based
on known characteristics of Eaton
type breakers, specific units are
recommended. The current ratings
are no more than the maximum limits
set by the NEC rules for motors with
code letters F to V or without code
letters. Motors with lower code letters
will require further considerations.
34

based on:
35
1. AmbientOutside enclosure not

36
2. Motor startingInfrequent
37
3. Locked rotorMaximum 6 times

motor FLA.
38
39
40
41
42
43

motor FLA.
may not be set more than 1300% of
with NEC 430.52 (except for NEMA
Design B energy efficient motors,
which can be set up to 1700%).
ratings. Higher interrupting rating
types may be required to satisfy
specific system application
requirements.
Horsepower
Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA

Maximum
Amperes
Recommended Eaton
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
Time Delay
Amperes
Amperes
Non-Time Delay
Adj. Range
230V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
30
50
50
70
90300
150500
150500
210700
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
460V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
5
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
250
400
400
12502500
20004000
20004000
575V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
5
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
15
15
30
30
45150
45150
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
50
50
50
100
150500
150500
150500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
For motor full load currents of 208V

and 200V, increase the corresponding
230V motor values by 10 and 15%
respectively.
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.2-3
Sheet 27 015
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Eaton offers one of the most complete
lines of both fusible and non-fused
current limiting breakers, and add-on
current limiting modules in the
industry. The industrial breakers are
available in current limiting versions
with interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 480V without fuses in the
same physical size as standard and
high interrupting capacity breakers.
Eaton also manufactures both fused
and non-fused current limiting devices
200 kA at 600 Vac. See Section 27.4 for
complete selection data for current
limiting circuit breakers and add-on
current limiting modules.
The current limiting breakers use a
reverse loop stationary contact. When
current is flowing through the contacts
of these breakers, the positions of the
reverse loop and moving contact arm
induce opposing magnetic fields. The
resulting flux lines cause rapid contact
blow-apart under these conditions,
resulting in very high interrupting
capacities and provide current
limiting characteristics.
Current limiting breakers are available
from 152500A and have an interrupting
rating up to 200 kA at 480V. These
breakers are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels are available and in series rating applications
where the current limiting capability
of these breakers are used upstream
in series combinations.
Circuit breakers 600A and below that
are current limiting have frame catalog
numbers that end with the letter C.
For example, the F-Frame model that is
current limiting has a catalog number
FDC. In accordance with UL circuit
breaker marking requirements, the
nameplate on the breaker is also
labeled current limiting.
Current Limit-R BreakersNon-Fused
FCL Current Limit-R Breaker
Limit-R
The Current
molded-case
circuit breaker was developed with
interrupting ratings up to 200,000A at
480 Vac to provide complete system
protection against faults, including:
1. Overloads, by using inverse time
current tripping characteristics.
2. Low-level short-circuits, by using
instantaneous and/or short-time
delay tripping characteristics.
3. High-level short-circuits, by using
ultra high-speed, blow-apart,
current limiting contacts.
Current Limit-R circuit breakers can
be used in series with Eaton standard
molded-case circuit breakers with
listed interrupting ratings as low as
10,000A in systems capable of delivering fault currents as high as 200,000A.
The excellent current limiting properties
of Current Limit-R breakers completely
protect all Eaton downstream series
circuit breakers applied within their
voltage ratings.
The high level current-limiting action is

achieved by the use of special design,
blow-apart contacts. The opening
speed of the contacts is amplified by
the repulsion force in the slot motor to
effectively separate the contacts under
high level fault conditions in less than
one millisecond. The rapid rise of arc
voltage introduces impedance into the
system, thus limiting the amount of the
otherwise available fault current.
Current Limit-R current limiting circuit
breakers incorporate all the advantages
and features of conventional moldedcase circuit breakers. They are available
in two- and three-pole versions in
two physical frame sizes and three
continuous current frame ratings.
Type FCL has a maximum continuous
current frame rating of 100A. It is
equipped with a conventional, noninterchangeable, thermal-magnetictype trip unit with individual ampere
ratings. The Type LCL is available
with frames having maximum
continuous current ratings of either
250 or 400A. Overload and low level
short-circuit protection is provided by
a SELTRONIC electronic trip unit that
uses the individual rating plug concept
for determining the continuous
rating of the breaker. Rating plugs
are available with either fixed or
adjustable ampere ratings.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 016
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Circuit Breakers
22
TRI-PAC Fused Current Limiting Breakers
23
24
The TRI-PAC breaker offers all of the

advantages of the economical moldedcase breaker and the current limiter
is retained, while the disadvantages
of separately mounted devices
are eliminated.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
TRI-PAC breakers are available in ratings

from 151600A and have a UL listed
interrupting capacity of 200,000A
at up to 600 Vac and also have an
interrupting capacity of 100,000A
at up to 250 Vdc.
Add-on Current Limiting Modules

LA TRI-PAC Breaker
The increase in demand for electrical

power in modern commercial and
industrial buildings has resulted in
electrical services becoming substantially larger. In some low voltage
distribution systems, available shortcircuit currents can exceed 100,000
symmetrical rms amperes. Fault
currents of this intensity may exceed
the interrupting ratings of molded-case
breakers. As a result, larger expensive
circuit interrupting devices that could
withstand the thermal and magnetic
stresses associated with currents of
this value have had to be used. High
interrupting capacity current limiting
devices have been developed that
will restrict short-circuit current. If
applied correctly, they may be used in
conjunction with molded-case circuit
breakers to provide adequate and
economical protection.
The TRI-PAC breaker was developed
for this application and so named
because it affords TRIple-PACkage
protection with (1) time delay thermal
trip, (2) instantaneous magnetic trip
and (3) current limiting protection,
combined and coordinated in a compact
and economical device. These protective actions are so coordinated that
overcurrents and low magnitude faults
are cleared by the thermal action;
normal short circuits are cleared by
the magnetic action; and abnormal
short circuits, above an established
value, are cleared by the current
limiting device. Thus, unless a severe
short-circuit occurs, the current limiter
is unaffected and its replacement is
held to a minimum.
The combination of the current limiting breaker or HMCP and the current
limiter module provides the following
system protection:
Overloads, by using inverse time
current tripping characteristics of
the molded-case circuit breaker
Low-level short circuits, by using
delay tripping characteristics of the
molded-case circuit breaker
High-level short circuits, by using
ultra-high-speed, blow-apart
contacts of the current limiting
module in series with the circuit
breaker contacts. The high-level
current limiting action is achieved
by the use of special design, blowapart contacts. The opening speed
of the contacts is amplifed by the
repulsion force in the slot motor and
reverse loop stationary contact arm
to effectively separate the contacts
under high-level fault conditions in
less than 1 millisecond. The rapid
rise of arc voltage introduces
impedance into the system, thus
limiting the amount of the otherwise
available fault current
Current Limiting Add-On Modules
The current limiting breaker modules

use a reverse loop stationary contact
arm. When high short-circuit current is
flowing through the contacts of these
modules, the positions of the reverse
loop and moving contact arm induce
opposing magnetic fields. The resulting
flux lines cause rapid contact blow-apart
under fault conditions, resulting in
very high interrupting capacities and
providing current limiting characteristics. Current limiting breaker modules
in combination with select Series C
and Series G breakers, are available
with interrupting ratings up to 200 kA
at 600 Vac.
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.2-5
Sheet 27 017
Application Information100% Rated Circuit Breakers
100% Rated Circuit Breakers

100% rated circuit breakers are tested
inside a minimum size enclosure to
UL 489 for application at 100% of the
breakers continuous current rating.
100% rated circuit breakers are equipped
with electronic trip units and applied
with 90C cable rated at 75C ampacity.
To apply 100% rated breakers in
switchboards and panelboards,
additional tests are required to meet
UL 67 and UL 891. Eaton molded-case
circuit breaker frames K-, L-, N-, MDL
and R-, 702000A, can be applied at
100% of their rated continuous current
as long as the breaker is installed in its
minimum size enclosure, including
ventilation. 100% rated breakers are
applied to distribution system to provide
installation cost savings. The amount
of savings that can be realized is
dependent on the application.
Breaker
Nameplate
Example
100%
Application
enclosure
and
wire ampacity
requirements.
Figure 27.2-1. Breaker Nameplate

A 100% rated breaker receives its UL listing
based on tests conducted in a minimum
size enclosure with minimum ventilation
(if required) and minimum cable sizes,
as stated on this nameplate example.
The amount of protection designed

into a distribution system is often based
on economics. However, each project
should be furnished with a reliable
distribution system that delivers the
most effective protection possible for
each investment dollar.
Reliable and economic system design
can be usually achieved with Eatons
circuit breakers that are UL listed for
application at 100% of their ratings
instead of standard breakers that in
actual use are applied at 80% of their
frame ratings in an enclosure.
The concept between a system design
using standard breakers and that
using 100% rated breakers is
uncomplicatedbut there are no
shortcut methods for determining
which design (and devices) is the

best choice for a given system. Good
engineering practice requires a careful
system analysis beginning with the
lowest feeder and concluding with
the main device.
Also included in the system analysis
must be all present and future
factors that could affect the size
and/or quantity of the breakers and
associated hardware, such as switchboard bus, busway, cable and conduit.
Other factors to consider are loads
(continuous and noncontinuous) and
system expansions and transformers
with provisions for forced air cooling.
The NEC
The rules and intent of the National
Electrical Code governing the use of
standard or 100% rated breakers must
be understood before recommending
or applying such devices.
Section 210.20(A) Continuous and
Noncontinuous Loads of the National
Electrical Code addresses differences
between applications of standard rated
breakers and 100% rated breakers.
(Significant sections are in bold
face type.)
Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of
continuous and noncontinuous
loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less than
the noncontinuous load plus
125% of the continuous load.
The minimum circuit conductor
size without the application of any
ampacity adjustment or correction
factors shall have an allowable
ampacity equal to or greater than
the noncontinuous load plus
Exception: Where the assembly
including the overcurrent devices
protecting the feeder(s) are listed
for operation at 100% of their
rating, neither the ampere rating
of the overcurrent device nor the
ampacity of the feeder conductors
shall be less than the sum of
the continuous load plus the
noncontinuous load.
Note: A continuous load as defined
by NEC Article 100 is a load where
the maximum current is expected to
continue for 3 hours or more.
Standard 80% Rated Design

Noncontinuous Load +
125% of the Continuous Load
= Total Minimum Load
Special 100% Rated Design
Noncontinuous Load +
Continuous Load
= Total Minimum Load
The necessity for these NEC requirements results from circuit breaker
testing procedures.
A molded-case circuit breaker is
tested in open air to verify its nameplate ampere rating. The nameplate
specifies a value of current the circuit
breaker is rated to carry continuously
without tripping within specific
operating temperature guidelines.
In most instances, a breaker is applied
in an enclosure and performance could
be adversely affected by slow heat
dissipation and temperature rise. These
factors must be considered regarding
the ability of the breaker to comply
with its nameplate ampere rating.
Testing Conditions and Operating Conditions

There are distinct differences between
these conditions that are addressed in
NEC Section 210.20(A) by introducing
an overcurrent device and associated
hardware sizing factor. The sizing
factor ensures reliable equipment
performance under realistic conditions. Section 210.20(A) is the key to
making the best system design choice.
For feeders, Section 215.2(A)
addresses the rating of all overcurrent
devices that have been tested in open
air but are applied in an enclosure. The
thermal response of an overcurrent
device applied in an enclosure will
usually be faster than in open air,
thus dictating the 125% requirement.
The exception allows for properly tested
and listed overcurrent devices to be
applied at 100% of their nameplate rating.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Figure 27.2-2. NEC Reference

CA08104001E
Section 210.20(A) covers standard

breakers, and the exception 100%
rated breakers. NEC Section 210.20(A)
and the Section 210.20(A) exception
can be expressed by these formulas:

December 2013
Sheet 27 018
22
23
24
25
26
27
There is a Difference Between 100% Rated

Breakers and 100% Rated Assemblies
90C Wire
Special attention should be given

to the word assembly in the NEC
Exception. Normally, an assembly
is listed for 100% operation only
after being successfully tested as
an assembly per UL requirements.
The NEC allows

the breaker to be
rated at 100% of
its frame size in
an assembly,
provided that
90C wire is
applied at the
75C ampacity.
For an assembly to receive a 100%

rated UL listing, it must be tested
separately by UL project engineers.
Panelboards are tested to UL 67,
switchboards tested to UL 891.
Installing 100% rated breakers in
an assembly does not automatically
make it acceptable for a 100% rating.
28
90C Wire
29
Figure 27.2-3. Conductor Requirements
30
Table 27.2-3. The ApplicationThese Examples Illustrate the Cost Savings when the 100% Rated Approach is Used
A visual comparison of breaker, bus and cable sizes in the Three-Phase Distribution System
examples (line diagrams) reveals how a 100% rated system design can provide cost savings.
31
Load
Continuous
400A
32
Noncontinuous
200A
33
34
35
36
Feeder #1
Feeder #2
Feeder #3
Main
Description
800A
1200A
1000
1200A
Three-phase distribution
System line diagrams
Selection of either a 100% rated design or standard design must result from a system analysis beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with
the systems main device. For these system examples, assume that all assembly testing has been successfully completed and either the 100% rated
design or standard design can be selected. Each system is hypothetical and either approach will meet safety requirements. Loads were arbitrarily
selected. The load table includes the calculations for minimum total loads in conformance with NEC Section 210.20(A).
Table 27.2-4. Standard 80% Rated Design

Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load
Line Diagram
Description
Feeder No. 1
Feeder No. 2
Feeder No. 3
Main
Calculation
per NEC
of minimum
total load
200 + (1.25) (400)

=700A
0 + (1.25) (800)
=1000A
600 + 0 = 600A
2250A
Breaker
frame (F)
trip (T)
rating
(F) (T)
800A /700A
(F) (T)
1200A /1000A
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
2500A /2500A
Bus/cable
rating
800A
1000A
600A
2500A
2500A F
2500A T
2500A Bus
37
38
2500 kcmil,
Cu per phase
39
MCC 800A Bus

3400 kcmil,
Cu per phase
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
Pnlbd. 600A Bus
1000A Busway
40
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
#1
#2
#3
1200A F
600A F
800A F
1000A T
600A T
700A T
(Noncontinuous Load) + (125%) (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 210.20(A).

Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-7
Sheet 27 019

Table 27.2-5. Standard 100% Rated Design
Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load
22
Line Diagram
Description
Feeder No. 1
Feeder No. 2
Feeder No. 3
Main
Calculation
per NEC
of minimum
total load
200 + 400 = 600A
0 + 800 = 800A
600 + 0 = 600A
2000A
23
2000A F
2000A T
24
2000A Bus
Breaker
frame (F)
trip (T)
rating
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
800A/800A
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
2000A/2000A
Bus/cable
rating
600A
800A
600A
2000A
600A F
600A T
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
#1
#2
#3
800A F
600A F
800A T
600A T
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
MCC 600A Bus

2600 kcmil,
Cu per phase
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
Pnlbd. 600A Bus
800A Busway

(Noncontinuous Load) + (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 210.20(A) Exception.

Sum of all NEC calculated minimum feeder loads.
25
26
27
28
Table 27.2-6. The ResultSavings in Both Switchboard and Cable Costs

Design
Minimum Total Load

(Amperes)
Potential System
Savings
Standard
700
1000
100% rated
600
800
Results
The standard design

requires higher rated,
more expensive breaker
and bus. Although the
minimum total load is
700A, most breakers and
hardware are available
only in standard sizes
requiring even more
expensive nearest
standard size breakers
and hardware.
Dramatic economic
advantages are
achieved by using
the 100% rated
design. Substantial
savings result from
using an 800A
busway and significant savings are
also provided by
the smaller breaker
frame and cable size.
600
2250
600
2000
29
100% rated breaker systems

can potentially represent
significant economic
Calculations indicate The 100% approach results advantages:
either approach
in the same frame size
In lower rated and sized
results in the same
breaker with a savings in
breakers, less cable and
size breaker and hard- conductor material cost.
significant reductions in
ware. A 100% rated
Additionally, Eaton offers a equipment floor and wall
breaker would be
2000A frame 100%-rated
space. These savings can be
more expensive
breaker, which is less
realized when the results of
although the final
expensive than the 2500A a systems analysis favor the
decision could rest
frame 80%-rated.
100% rated design approach.
on whether or not
future load growth
is anticipated.
30
Rating
at 480V
35
31
32
33
34
Table 27.2-7. Available 100% Rated Circuit Breakers

Frames
Trip
Units
JG-Frame 50/100/250A
Minimum enclosure size
26.00 x 18.00 x 8.00 in (660.4 x 457.2 x 203.2 mm)
JGE-C 25 kA
JGS-C 35 kA
JGH-C 65 kA
JGC-C 100 kA
Thermal-magnetic, Digitrip 310+
K-Frame 125/250/400A
Minimum enclosure size
24.00 x 15.00 x 6.00 in (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)
CKD 35 kA
CHKD 65 kA
Digitrip 310+ (125A, 250A and 400A)
37
LG-Frame 250/400/600A
Minimum enclosure size with ventilation
28.00 x 19.00 x 8.00 in (711.2 x 482.6 x 203.2 mm)
LGE-C 35 kA
LGS-C 50 kA
LGH-C 65 kA
Thermal-magnetic, Digitrip 310+
38
L-Frame 125/250/400/600A
24.00 x 15.00 x 6.00 in (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)
CLD 35 kA
CHLD 65 kA
CLDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310, Digitrip OPTIM
39
Digitrip 310
40
M-Frame 800A
42.00 x 18.00 x 7.50 in (1066.8 x 457.2 x 190.5 mm)
CMDL 50 kA
CHMDL 65 kA
N-Frame 800/1200A
42.00 x 22.75 x 11.50 in (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm)
CND 50 kA
CHND 65 kA
CNDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310, Digitrip OPTIM
R-Frame 1600/2000A
21.50 x 18.00 x 13.00 in (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm)
CRD 65 kA
CRDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310/510/610/810/910, Digitrip OPTIM

Thermal-magnetic LG requires venting 7.00 square inches above and 7.00 square inches below on the front face of enclosure.
Use with 9.00-inch (228.6 mm) tee connector.
CA08104001E
36
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 020
Application InformationSeries Rated Systems
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Series Rated Systems

Series rating is a short-circuit
interrupting rating assigned to a
combination of two or more overcurrent devices connected in series.
The short-circuit interrupting rating
of the upstream device must be equal
to or greater than the available fault
current. Downstream breakers,
however, are not fully rated for the
systems available fault current. Series
combinations must be tested to
UL 489. Series ratings are applied to
distribution systems where shortcircuit coordination is not required.
The Eaton listing of available series
rating combinations are shown in the
applications section of this document.
Under most circumstances, selection
of a series rated system will reduce
initial cost and size, because downstream breakers are not fully rated
for the prospective short-circuit fault
current at their point of application.
The interrupting rating of the
upstream breaker must always be
equal to or greater than the available
fault current at its line terminals. In
addition, downstream breakers must
have been tested in combination with
the upstream breaker and shown to be
protected by the upstream breaker at
the assigned series rated interrupting
rating. The net result is that the system
can be assigned a series rated or
integrated rating higher than the
rating of the downstream breaker when
it is tested or applied alone. Design of
the system and selection of breakers is
based on short-circuit interruption test
specified and witnessed by UL.
42
43
Confirm, during installation, that the

correct breakers have been selected
by checking the nameplates appearing
on the end-use equipment
Evaluating the Protection Systems

Designed properly, series rated and
fully rated systems protect electrical
equipment with equal effectiveness.
But initial cost and continuity of service
can vary widely depending on the
inherent characteristics of the system,
and on the design philosophy adopted.
Fully Rated System

All breakers are rated for full fault
current at their point of application in
accordance with the National Electrical
Code. The continuity of service provided by the system is greater than a
series rated system.
Series Rated System

A series rated system is less costly
than a fully rated system. The
upstream breaker is always fully rated,
but the interrupting ratings of downstream breakers are normally lower.
Service continuity can be acceptable
after initial startup, because the lowerlevel arcing faults most likely occur
after that time can be cleared by the
downstream breaker alone. However,
under high fault conditions, both the
upstream and downstream breakers
would open, eliminating service to
the affected portion of the system.
Therefore, it is not possible to achieve
selective coordination for all magnitudes of available fault current with
a series rated system.
National Electrical Code Requirements
Because of their blow-open design,

most molded-case circuit breakers are
current limiting to some degree. In a
series rated application and in the event
of a major fault, both upstream and
downstream breakers open, protecting
the lower-rated downstream devices
by limiting the let-through current.
Requirements of the National Electrical

Code for short-circuit ratings may now
be met by equipment that is marked
with ratings adequate for the available
fault current at their point of application
in the electrical system. Refer to the
current NEC for specific requirements.
To develop a series rated protective

system, it is suggested that the
design engineer, after completing
preliminary steps:
Available Short-Circuit Current.

Service equipment must be suitable
for the short-circuit current available
at its supply terminal.
Define available fault current at

the line side terminals of the
upstream breaker
Select an upstream breaker with an
interrupting rating equal to or greater
than the available fault current
Verify the series tested interrupting
ratings of the selected combination
of breakers by referring to the tables
in this section
Approval. The conductors and equipment

required or permitted by the Code will
be acceptable only if approved. See
Examination of Equipment for Safety
and Examination, Identification,
Installation and Use of Equipment.
See definitions of Approved,
Identified, Labeled and Listed.
41
General Discussion
Examination, Identification, Installation

and Use of Equipment
1. Examination: in judging equipment, considerations such as the
following should be evaluated.
a. Suitability for installation
and use in conformity with
the provisions of this Code.
Suitability of equipment use
may be identified by a description marked on or provided
with a product to identify the
suitability of the product for a
specific purpose, environment
or application. Suitability of
equipment may be evidenced
by listing or labeling.
b. Mechanical strength and
durability, including, for parts
designed to enclose and protect
other equipment, the adequacy
of the protection thus provided.
c. Wire-ending and
connection space.
d. Electrical insulation.
e. Heating effects under normal
conditions of use and also
under abnormal conditions
likely to arise in service.
f. Arcing effects.
g. Classification by type, size,
voltage, current capacity
and specific use.
h. Other factors that contribute to
the practical safeguarding of
persons using or likely to come
in contact with the equipment.
2. Installation and use: listed or
labeled equipment must be used
or installed in accordance with
any instructions included in the
listing or labeling.
Interrupting Rating
Equipment intended to break current at
fault levels must have an interrupting
rating sufficient for the system voltage
and the current that is available at the
terminals of the equipment. Equipment
intended to break current at other than
fault levels must have an interrupting
rating at system voltage sufficient for
the current that must be interrupted.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-9
Sheet 27 021
Application InformationSeries Rated System

Circuit Impedance and Other
Characteristics
The overcurrent protective devices,
the total impedance, the component
short-circuit withstanding ratings, and
other characteristics of the circuit to
be protected should be so selected
and coordinated as to permit the
circuit protective devices used to
clear a fault without the occurrence
of extensive damage to the electrical
components of the circuit. This fault
will be assumed to be either two or
more of the circuit conductors, or
between any circuit conductor and
the grounding conductor or enclosing
metal raceway.
Motor Contribution
The fault current contribution of
motors connected between series
rated breakers must be considered.
Article 240.86(C) in the 2005 edition of
the National Electrical Code states that
for series ratings the sum of the motor,
full-load currents cannot exceed 1%
of the interrupting rating of the lowerrated circuit breaker. The actual fault
current contribution from induction
motors is about four times their fullload current (impedance value of
25%). For example, if the downstream
branch circuit breakers used in a series
rated combination have an interrupting
rating of 14,000A rms symmetrical for a
480V system, the maximum full-load
current of motors connected to that
panel from the branch circuit breakers
is 140A (1%). For typical induction
motors, this is equivalent to a total
horsepower at 480V of approximately
115 horsepower.
Design/Test Considerations for Series

Coordinated Circuit Breakers
Test procedures for all Eaton moldedcase circuit breakers intended for
application in series connected
systems are in full compliance with
all applicable paragraphs of the latest
edition of UL 489.
Note: For further information, see IEEE
Standards 141, 242 and 446.
The entire system is tested because

such tests are the only way to correctly
verify the performance of overcurrent
devices under short-circuit conditions.
Calibration, interruption, trip-out
and dielectric withstand tests are
performed. Breakers in their asreceived condition are used for
the interrupting and intermediate
interrupting capability tests. If agreeable to concerned parties, previously
tested samples may be used. The
interrupting rating of the line-side
circuit breaker is equal to or greater
than the maximum available fault
current on the distribution system at
its point of intended application.
Tests comply also with the intent of
the proposed revisions to applicable
IEC documents.
Tests are completed in a well-defined
sequence:
Interrupting tests
Intermediate interrupting tests
Trip-out tests
Dielectric voltage-withstand tests
Eatons Series C circuit breakers

intended for application in series rated
systems are subjected, in the following
sequence, to interrupting ability, intermediate interrupting ability, trip-out,
and dielectric voltage-withstand tests.
During testing of the series rated circuit
breakers, each breaker is mounted in
the smallest enclosure in which it is
to be used; openings in the enclosure
do not exceed 10% of its total external
area, and there are no openings
directly opposite a vent in a circuit
breaker case. The two enclosures are
connected by a 12-inch (304.8 mm)
conduit of any diameter. Each lead
from test terminals to the line-side
breaker is less than 4 feet (1.2m) per
breaker, and each load shorting the
load-side breaker(s) is sized based on
the rating of the load-side breaker. The
combined length of the lead from the
line-side overcurrent protective device
of the load-side breaker and from the
load-side breaker to the shorting point,
is less than 4 feet (1.2m) per pole.
Exception: the breakers may be

mounted in the end-use equipment
that will contain them and is marked
for use with the series combination.
The load-side breaker is positioned
as close as possible to the line-side
breaker(s). Line and load leads are
less than 4 feet (1.2m).
A fuse is connected between the
enclosure and line terminal of the
pole least likely to arc to the enclosure,
or the neutral, if the breaker is rated
120/240 or 480Y/277 Vac. The connection to the load-side of the limiting
impedance is #10 AWG copper wire
less than 6 feet (1.8m) long. The fuse is
a 30A non-renewable type acceptable
for branch circuit protection; its voltage
rating is not less than the rating of the
device, and its interrupting rating is
not less than the available current.
1. Interrupting tests:
a. The test circuit is closed on
the series combination with
all breakers fully closed; and
b. The load-side breaker is closed
on the circuit while the line-side
breaker is fully closed.
Note: Random closing is used in all threephase tests. When the circuit is closed on
the combination, closing is controlled in
single-phase tests so that closing occurs
within 10 electrical degrees of the zero-point
of the supply voltage wave.
2. Intermediate interrupting tests at

the specified available current and
maximum voltage. Procedures
are identical to those described
in 1a and 1b (above) but at the
maximum current level that
causes the load-side breaker to
open, but not the line-side breaker.
If the line-side breaker is currentlimiting, the series combination
should be evaluated in the region
below its current-limiting threshold. (There is no need for these
tests if the current is less than
the interrupting rating on the
load-side breaker.)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3. Trip-out tests of the load-side

breaker at 250% of the marked
ampere rating.
40
4. Dielectric voltage-withstand
tests verify that the breaker can
withstand, without breakdown,
a 60 (4862) Hz essentially
sinusoidal potential for 1 minute.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 022
Application InformationSeries Connected Ratings
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Series Connected Ratings:

Eaton Circuit Breakers
A wide range of breakers and combinations in the Eaton line is available
that has been tested in accordance
with UL procedures for series
connected ratings: individually
enclosed breakers in series with main
lug panelboards, main breakers integral
with branch breakers in panelboards,
in switchboards, and in meter centers.
You can rely on the enclosed data
for applications with other undefined
distribution equipment where series
application ratings can be an advantage.
Circuit breaker/circuit breaker series
rated combinations are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories in their
Component Directory (Yellow Book)
under Circuit BreakersSeries
Connected.
The series combinations shown in
the UL Yellow Book are UL recognized
component ratings only. Consult
the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly
combinations.
Specific series ratings tested combinations in assemblies can be found in
Tab 22 for panelboards/switchboards.
Both circuit-breaker-to-circuit-breaker
and fuse-to-circuit-breaker upstream/
downstream series rating tables are
provided. The assemblies series
ratings tables are also on the Eaton
Web site (www.eaton.com). Search for
document 1C96944H02 Panelboard
and Switchboards Series Ratings
Information Manual.
Circuit Breaker Identification

Marking of all Eatons circuit breakers
is clear for easy identification of type,
rating and operating status. Nameplates are color-coded for immediate
identification of rating, and a colorcoded bar identifies the type and
interrupting rating at common
application voltages. Operating status is
indicated clearly by the position of the
handle and color-coded flags. On and
off positions are identified by English
words and international symbols.
Scientists and engineers at the Eaton
Testing Laboratory ensure that Eaton
circuit breakers are the most reliable
and develop new concepts and
improvements in breaker design.
Designs and reliability are verified,
and products are improved continuously and qualified to meet UL, NEMA
and other standards. In addition,
engineers from any breaker or
panelboard manufacturer can work
along-side their peers from Eaton to
test their products in the lab.
Example: Assume a specific type of

current-limiting fuse rated 2000A.
Then using the following figure:
1. Draw a vertical line from the
prospective short-circuit current
of 200 kA to intersect the typical
peak let-through curve at A.
The consolidated nameplate on all

breakers provides complete identification and rating information in a format
that is easy to read and understand.
2. Draw a horizontal line left

from Point A to intersect the
prospective peak curve at B.
The interrupting rating of the series

combination is never permitted to be
marked on the downstream breaker.
However, the series rating may be
marked on panelboards in which the
combination has been tested and
listed if:
3. Drop a vertical line from B to

intersect the horizontal axis and
read the recommended rating,
65 kA rms, concluding that a circuit
breaker with a 65 kA interrupting
capacity will be protected by
a specified 2000A currentlimiting fuse.
The upstream breaker is installed in

the panelboard as a main breaker
The panelboard is a main-lug-only
type and is specifically marked to
indicate the type and rating of the
upstream listed series tested breaker
that must be applied with the
panelboard
This conclusion is wrong when the

downstream service has a blow-open
contact assembly, as does a moldedcase circuit breaker or similar device.
It may be valid when the currentlimiting fuse is sized to protect a
passive bus bar system.
Marking of Panelboards
Marking of panelboards conforms to
the latest edition of UL 67. Markings
are clear and understandable, and
include the short-circuit rating in rms
amperes; maximum voltage rating for
each short-circuit rating; a statement
indicating that additional or replacement devices shall be of the same type
and of equal or greater interrupting
capacity; and, when applicable, the
identity of combinations of integral
and branch circuit overcurrent devices
that are required when applying the
marked short-circuit current rating.
The reason: The up-over-down method

ignores dynamic impedance (the inherent
current-limiting of the downstream
molded-case circuit breaker). Such
impedance is developed directly by the
forces of the let-through current created
when the contacts are blown open.
For proper application of currentlimiting fuses, always refer to recommendations by the manufacturer of
the circuit breaker, which are based
on actual test data.
Up-over-down method.
Fuses
Fuses can be used instead of circuit
breakers in fully rated, selectively
coordinated and series connected
protection systems. Specific series
ratings tested combinations in
assemblies can be found in Tab 22
for panelboards.
Dont apply fuses using the up-overdown method that has been recommended by some fuse manufacturers
for sizing a current-limiting fuse that
protects a downstream molded-case
circuit breaker with a specified rms
symmetrical interrupting rating. The
method can lead to erroneous and unsafe
conclusions, and should not be used.
Asymmetrical
Prospective
Peak Curve
at 15%
Power
Factor
460,000
Prospective Peak Let-Through
Current in Amperes
22
150,000
A
2000A
Current
Limiter
Fuse Curve
65,000
200,000
Prospective Short-Circuit rms Amperes
Do Not Use This Method
Figure 27.2-4. Up-Over-Down Misapplication
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.2-11
Sheet 27 023
Application InformationSeries Connected Ratings

Series Ratings Selected Under
Engineering Supervision
22
The 2005 NEC introduced a new

provision allowing a licensed
professional engineer to select a
series combination of overcurrent
devices for existing installations. This
represents a major change from the
previous requirements that series
rated combinations must be proven
by actual testing, and witnessed and
listed by a third-party certification
agency. A calculated evaluation of
a series rated system is extremely
difficult, if not impossible, to
determine because of the dynamic
impedance of the downstream
breakers as described above.
Compatibility of devices could only
be determined if it is guaranteed that
the downstream device(s) do not even
begin to open during the complete
interruption time of the upstream
device. Another factor is that the letthrough current must not exceed the
interrupting rating of the downstream
device. These are just a couple of the
many difficult factors that must be
verified to ensure the safe application
of an engineered series rated
combination.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 024
High Selective Coordination Breaker
22
High Instantaneous Breakers for

23
24
25
26
27
28
High Instantaneous Breaker
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Eaton introduces the LHH thermalmagnetic and NHH electronic trip

molded-case circuit breakers capable
of providing higher current levels of
selective coordination. These circuit
breakers are based on Eaton industryleading Series G L-Frame and
Series C N-Frame high performance
circuit breaker frames. The LHH and
NHH circuit breakers are available
with trip units having 125400A rating.
The LHH and NHH circuit breakers

incorporate a higher level of magnetic
pickup and electronic instantaneous
setting respectively, thus allowing
for higher current levels of selective
coordination. Standard molded-case
circuit breakers typically are furnished
with a magnetic pickup or electronic
instantaneous adjustment or instantaneous override set at 10 times (10X)
the trip rating. Eatons LHH and NHH
molded-case circuit breakers are
furnished with a higher level of
magnetic pickup (up to 26x) or
electronic instantaneous available
maximum settings. These higher
levels of magnetic pickup (up to 93x)
and electronic instantaneous values
in turn allow the system designer to
obtain selective coordination at fault
current levels up to these higher
ratings. This allows the line side LHH
or NHH circuit breakers to selectively
coordinate up to the values for available fault current values determined
at the load side circuit breaker. When
the line side and load side moldedcase circuit breaker trip ratings are
chosen to coordinate in the overload
range, they also can be selectively
coordinated in the fault range. For
overcurrents protected by circuit
breakers on the load side of the LHH
or NHH, only the effected load side
circuit breaker will open, while the
line side LHH and/or NHH circuit
breakers remain closed, thus providing continuity of power to the other
critical loads supplied by the LHH
and NHH circuit breakers. See
Page 27.3-15 for LHH and NHH
breaker selection data.
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
JG, LG MCCBs Shown with Ground

Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Eaton earth leakage breakers offer

Class 1 ground fault protection and
improved ground fault coordination
capability. A Class 1 device can open
at high levels of fault current, while a
Class 2 device prevents opening
beyond the contact rating of its
interrupting device.
Earth leakage breakers are factory
supplied with a single sensor and
ground fault relay built-in. The ground
fault pick-up setting is adjustable
from 0.03 to 30A in eight steps, and
the ground fault time delay setting
is adjustable from instantaneous to
2.0 seconds. See Page 27.4-44 for
earth leakage circuit breaker
selection data.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.2-13
Sheet 27 025
AFCI Circuit Breakers
AFCI Circuit Breakers

An arc-fault circuit interrupter is a
device intended to provide protection
from the effects of arc faults by recognizing characteristics unique to arcing
and by functioning to de-energize the
circuit when an arc fault is detected.
Eaton offers 120 Vac AFCI single-pole,
15 and 20A breakers, plug-in and
bolt-on, to meet Article 210.12 of
the 2008 NEC.
There are currently two types of AFCI
circuit breakers on the market today.
The types are clearly defined by
UL 1699. These are the branch feeder
Type AFCI and the Combination Type
AFCI. The dual-purpose AFCI is yet
another feature available on the
market that is achieved by simply
adding 5 mA personnel ground fault
protection to the existing AFCI.
The AFCI circuit breaker is the most
tested residential circuit breaker on
the market. In the case of series arc
detection, these arcs are detected
when equipment is operating thus
drawing current. Parallel arcs can
occur and are detected even if the
load is not operating. When thresholds
of monitoring are exceeded, the
electronics within this device work to
identify safe arcs from hazardous arcs.
The combination type AFCI is now set

to begin its application as of January
1, 2008. Another change included the
location of the combination AFCI that
allows it to be within 6 feet of the
loadcenter with qualifications.
There are a few sections in the NEC

that in some way reference the AFCI
technology. NEC Section 210.12 is the
heart of the requirement for the Arc
Fault Technology. The introduction
of the AFCI product to the National
Electrical Code occurred in 1999.
The verbiage of this code included a
start date of enforcement effective
January 1, 2002. The 2002 NEC made
a slight change to remove the word
receptacle to ensure that the AFCI
was to be applied on all circuits supplying the bedroom and not just those
circuits supplying receptacle outlets.
The 2005 NEC introduced some
changes that include the introduction
of the combination type AFCI.
The 2008 National Electrical Code

expanded the application of AFCI
outside of the bedroom circuits to
include family rooms, closets, parlors,
dens, hallways, sunrooms, living
rooms and dining rooms. The 6-foot
rule was also removed and further
clarified the requirements around
using a receptacle combination type
AFCI were expanded upon.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
AFCI Test Button
Latch Lever
AFCI Detection Circuit
Load Terminal
Load Neutral
Terminal
29
30
31
32
Line Connection
Contacts
Trip Mechanism
Pigtail
Connection to
Loadcenter
Figure 27.2-5. AFCI Circuit Breaker

Table 27.2-8. NEC Specifications
Article
Description
210.4
Article 210Branch Circuits

Multiwire Branch Circuits
210.12
Article 210Branch Circuits

Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI)
440.65
Article 440Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment

Leakage-Current Detector-Interrupter (LCDI) and Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI)
550.25
Article 550Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks

Arc-Fault Interrupter Protection
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 026
Application InformationDC Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
DC Rated Breakers
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Breakers are available for use with

ungrounded applications where all
three poles are connected in series,
and grounded applications where the
load is connected to the grounded
terminal, and the series connected
poles are on the non-grounded
terminal. Rated for up to 750 Vdc,
breakers are available from 15 to
2500A trip ranges with thermalmagnetic trip units. Their compact
size and increased interrupting
performance give Eaton the most
complete range of DC breakers in
the industry.
Table 27.2-9. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
DC Circuit Breakers
UL listed Eaton DC molded-case circuit
breakers are for use in general DC
circuits, battery supply circuits of UPS
systems, PV systems and Level 3
electric vehicle charging circuits. These
devices are an excellent alternative to
fuses because they are easier to install
and require less maintenance.
The various DC voltage ratings are
obtained by connecting one, two,
three or four poles in series as noted.
Connection diagrams are shown on the
breaker nameplate. The DC breakers
use the same internal and external
accessories as the standard breakers
for AC application. DC breakers up to
600 Vdc are UL 489 listed and exceed
the requirements of UL Supplement SC
for molded-case circuit breakers with
uninterruptible power supplies.
Molded-case circuit breakers for
transportation application requiring
750 Vdc are available 15150A with
42 kA interrupting capacity at 750 Vdc.
Breakers require four poles in series for
high fault current protection in 750 Vdc
application. For 750V applications with
low fault current requirements, contact
Eaton for three-pole frames and rating
details. 750V is not a UL rating.
Dimensions for DC breakers are
the same as the standard thermalmagnetic equivalent.
DC molded-case circuit breakers use
standard thermal-magnetic trip units,
which are calibrated on AC circuits.
The use of standard trip units allows
for easy interchangeability and
inventory management when both
AC and DC systems are used. The
magnetic trip pickup on DC circuits
are, on average, 42% higher than AC.
Specific time current curves depicting
the values or tolerance band increase
for DC breakers are available. Refer
to publication TC01215003E for
curve information.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Frame
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)

Volts DC
125
250
600
750
HFDDC
225
42
50
42
42
JGEDC
JGSDC
JGHDC
250
250
250
35
42
50
35
42
50
35
50
65
HJDDC
HKDDC
250
400
42
42
50
50
42
42
LGEDC
LGSDC
LGHDC
600
600
600
22
22
42
22
22
42
35
50
65
HLDDC
HLDDC
HMDLDC
600
1200
800
42
42
42
50
50
50
35
35
NBDC
PBDC
1200
2500
42
42
50
65
50
65

DC ratings apply to substantially noninductive circuits. Time constant per UL 489.

Minimum DC application voltage is 48 Vdc.
Single-pole in series.
Two poles in series.

Three poles in series.

Four poles in series. Not a UL listed
voltage rating.
Four-pole frame with two-pole connection
in parallel.
Table 27.2-10. DC Breaker DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Frame
Number
of Poles
HFDDC
1
2
3
4
Width
Height
1.38 (35.1)
2.75 (70.0)
4.13 (105.0)
5.50 (139.7)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Depth
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC
4.13 (105.0)
7.00 (177.8)
3.57 (90.7)
HJDDC
HKDDC
2, 3
2, 3
4.13 (105.0)
5.50 (139.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.13 (257.3)
4.06 (103.1)
4.10 (104.1)
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC
5.48 (139.2)
10.13 (257.3)
4.09 (103.9)
HLDDC
2, 3
4
8.25 (209.6)
11.00 (279.4)
10.75 (273.1)
10.75 (273.1)
4.06 (103.1)
4.06 (103.1)
HMDLDC
NBDC
PBDC
2, 3
3
3
8.25 (209.6)
8.25 (209.6)
12.06 (306.3)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
22.06 (560.3)
4.06 (103.1)
5.50 (139.7)
9.06 (230.1)
DC Molded-Case Switches
Eatons DC molded-case switches
are used in applications requiring a
compact, high-capacity disconnect.
They are UL 489 listed and have
automatic high instantaneous current

protection. These devices do not
provide overload protection.
Table 27.2-11. DC Molded-Case Switches

Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40C
Interrupting
Capacity (kA)
Poles in
Series
With Line and

Load Terminals
Catalog Number
Without Line and

Load Terminals
Catalog Number
100
150
225
42
42
42
3
3
3
HFDDC3100KL
HFDDC3150KL
HFDDC3225KL
HFDDC3100KW
HFDDC3150KW
HFDDC3225KW
250
400
400
42
35
65
3
3
3
HJDDC3250K
HKDDC3400K
LGKDC3400KSG
HJDDC3250KW
HKDDC3400KW
LGKDC3400KSW
600
600
800
65
35
35
3
3
3
LGKDC3630KSG
HLDDC3600K
HMDLDC3800K
LGKDC3630KSW
HLDDC3600WK
HMDLDC3800WK
50
HLDDC21200K
HLDDC21200WK
600 Vdc Maximum
250 Vdc Maximum

1200

Minimum DC application voltage is 48 Vdc.

Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-15
Sheet 27 027
Application InformationDC Circuit Breakers

Table 27.2-12. Typical DC System Applications
Description
250 Vdc Maximum
600 Vdc Maximum
750 Vdc Maximum
Grounded
Grounded
Grounded
Switchgear batteries
Telecom
Ungrounded
Ungrounded
22
Ungrounded
23
Solar photovoltaic
UPS battery systems
24
Traction/transportation systems
25
Electrical vehicle charging
DC motors
26
Wiring Diagrams
27
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application

Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
28
29
30
31
Load
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems,
or grounded systems that have one end of
load (A) connected to grounded terminal,
opposite poles in series connection.
(A)

Load
(A)

32
33
34
Load
35
36
Load
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded
systems only.
Figure 27.2-6. 250 Vdc Maximum

Two Poles in Series
Suitable for use on

ungrounded systems only.

Three Poles in Series
Suitable for use on ungrounded

systems only.

Four Poles in Series
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 028
Application Information400415 Hz
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Application of Eaton MoldedCase Circuit Breakers to

400415 Hz Systems
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers,
including breakers with electronic trip
units, can be applied for overcurrent
protection on 400415 Hz systems.
Commonly used to power computer
installations, 400415 Hz systems
are also employed in conjunction
with certain aircraft, military and other
specialty equipment.
Table 27.2-13. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers

Breaker Frame
Series
EG
This publication contains guidelines

to applying Eaton molded-case circuit
breakers on 400415 Hz systems.
Circuit Breaker Derating Required

Table 27.2-13 lists the maximum
continuous current carrying capacity
and Table 27.2-14 lists the interrupting
capacities at 400415 Hz of Eaton
molded-case circuit breakers. Due to
the increased resistance of the copper
sections resulting from the skin effect
produced by eddy currents at 400
415 Hz, circuit breakers in many cases
require derating.
The thermal derating on these devices
is based upon 100%, three-phase
application in open air in a maximum
of 40C (104F) with 4 feet (1.2m) of
the specified cable 75C (167F) of bus
at the line and load side. Additional
derating of not less than 20% will be
required if the circuit breaker is to be
used in an enclosure. Further derating
may be required if the enclosure
contains other heat generating
devices or if the ambient temperatures
exceed 40C.
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD
JG
JDB, JD, HJD
37
38
39

Maximum
Continuous
Amperes at 60 Hz
400415 Hz Application
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Cable/
Bus Bar
(Per Phase)
Terminals
(Fixed Front)
Catalog or
Style Number
15
20
25
15
20
25
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
30
35
40
30
35
40
1#10 Cu
1#10 Cu
1#8 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
45
50
60
45
50
60
1#8 Cu
1#6 Cu
1#6 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
80
90
100
70
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
110
125
100
110
1-1/0 Cu
1-1/0 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
15
20
25
15
20
25
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
30
35
40
30
35
40
1#10 Cu
1#10 Cu
1#8 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
50
70
90
45
65
85
1#6 Cu
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
100
125
150
95
115
135
1#1 Cu
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
624B100G17
624B100G17
624B100G17
70
90
100
60
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
200
200
225
250
160
175
200
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
70
90
100
60
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
200
225
250
160
200
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the
same as at 60 Hz.
Thermal-magnetic only.
FD and HFD only.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-17
Sheet 27 029
Cable and Bus Sizing
Table 27.2-13. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers (Continued)

Breaker Frame
Series
KDB, KD, HKD
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes at 60 Hz
400415 Hz Application
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Cable/
Bus Bar
(Per Phase)
Terminals
(Fixed Front)
Catalog or
Style Number
125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T300K
T300K
T300K
200
225
250
160
180
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T300K
T300K
T300K
300
350
400
225
275
300
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
23/0 Cu
T300K
T350K
T400K
250
300
350
200
250
275
1250 kcmil Cu
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
TA350LK
TA350LK
TA350LK
400
500
600
300
400
400
1500 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
TA350LK
3TA632LK
3TA632LK
250
300
350
210
240
275
1250 kcmil Cu
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
T600LA
T600LA
400
500
600
310
370
425
2250 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
T600LA
T600LA
LD with Digitrip RMS 310
300
600
300
500
2250 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
T401LA
T401LA
MDL with Digitrip RMS 310
400
500
600
340
405
470
23/0 Cu
2300 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
T600MA1
T600MA1
T600MA1
700
800
355
400
24/0 Cu
2300 kcmil Cu
T800MA1
T800MA1
ND with Digitrip RMS 310
1200
700
750
850
3300 kcmil Cu
3350 kcmil Cu
4350 kcmil Cu
T1000NBI
T1000NBI
T1200NBI
RD with Digitrip RMS 310
2000
1500
41/2 x 4 Cu
Rear connected
Cu T-bar
LG
LDB, LD, HLD

The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the
same as at 60 Hz.
Thermal-magnetic only.
The cable and bus sizes to be used at

400415 Hz are not based on standard
National Electrical Code tables for 60 Hz
application. Larger cross sections are
necessary at 400415 Hz to avoid
exceeding component temperature
limits. All bus bars specified are based
upon mounting the bars in the vertical
plane to allow maximum air flow. All
bus bars are spaced at a minimum of
1/4-inch (6.35 mm) apart. Mounting of
bus bars in the horizontal plane will
necessitate additional drafting. Edgewise
orientation of the bus may change
the maximum ratings indicated. If
additional information is required
for other connections of cable or
bus, contact the Eaton Technical
Resource Center.
Interrupting Capacity
400415 Hz interrupting capacities of
the Eaton molded-case circuit breakers
are found in Table 27.2-14.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Application Recommendations
It is recommended that thermal
indicating devices such as tempi
plates be placed on the line and load
terminals or T-connectors of the center
pole. These are usually the hottest
terminals with a balanced load. A
maximum temperature of 90C (50C
over a maximum ambient of 40C)
would verify the maximum rating for
the particular application. Temperature
profiles taken on these breakers can be
correlated to ensure that the hottest
points within the breaker are within
the required temperature limits. A
thermal cutoff switch can also be
used to actuate a shunt trip to open
the breaker if the thermal limits are
exceeded. Consult the Eaton Technical
Resource Center for further information on special applications.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 030
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Table 27.2-14. Interrupting Capacities of 400 Hz Breakers

Breaker Frame
Series
Estimated 400415 Hz Interrupting Capacities (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

240V
480V
600V
EGB
EGC
EGE
5000
40,000
7000
3600
20,000
5000
7000
3600
EGH
EGS
EHD
20,000
17,000
3600
13,000
7000
2800
5000
4400
FDB
FD, HFD
JDB, JD
3600
13,000
8000
2800
5000
7000
2800
3600
7000
JGC
JGE
JGH
40,000
13,000
20,000
20,000
5000
13,000
7000
3600
5000
JGS
HJD
KDB, KD, HKD
17,000
14,000
21,000
7000
10,000
11,000
3600
7000
8000
LDB, LD
LGC
LGE
14,000
40,000
13,000
10,000
20,000
7000
7000
10,000
3600
LGH
LGS
HLD
MD
20,000
17,000
21,000
14,000
13,000
10,000
11,000
10,000
7000
5000
8000
7000
KD, LD, MDL, ND 14,000

HLD, HMDL
21,000
10,000
11,000
7000
8000
HND
RD
16,000
33,000
8000
33,000
Thermal-Magnetic
32
33

21,000
40,000
The above interrupting ratings are estimates based on the design parameters and operating
characteristics of each breaker as well as on the limited amount of test data thus far available
for circuit breakers applied to 400415 Hz systems.
Not UL listed.
Series G E-Frame is 600/347 Vac maximum.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-19
Sheet 27 031
Special Application Breakers
High-Intensity Discharge (HID)

Breakers
HID breakers are used to switch 120V
or 277V fluorescent lighting circuits
or high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits. Per UL 489 Section 7.14, they
must be listed and marked HID.
HID breakers are tested for endurance
at 75% power factor. The contacts
and the spring of an HID breaker are
heavier duty to dissipate the increased
heat from greater current flow during
the HID ignition period. For listing
of available HID rated breakers,
see Table 27.2-15.
Lighting Control Solenoid

Operated Breakers
Eaton manufactures a wide array
of solenoid operated breakers for
lighting control applications. These
are available in both 120 and 277V
single-pole and two-pole configurations. See individual circuit breaker
selection data, Table 27.4-12, for
more information.
For a full discussion of the use of these
breakers, see Tab 23 Lighting Control
SystemsPow-R-Command.
Switching Duty (SWD)

Rated Breakers
SWD breakers are rated 15 or 20A,
120 and 277V and intended to switch
fluorescent lighting loads on a regular
basis and are marked SWD, per
UL 489 Section 7.9. SWD breakers
are endurance-tested at 100 % power
factor. Eatons single-pole 120 Vac
QUICKLAG line, as well as the GB, GC
and single-pole 277 Vac GHB, GHBS,
GHC, EHD Series C and EG Series G
breakers are tested, rated and marked
SWD. In addition, there are other
SWD rated circuit breakers available
(see Table 27.2-16).
Heating, Air Conditioning

and Refrigeration Circuit
Breakers (HACR)
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Due to changes in the UL 489

standards, all circuit breakers meet
the requirements for HACR application.
NEMA AB-3 Standard, Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers and their Application
States, Section 430.53 of the NEC
permits the use of an inverse-time
circuit breaker as the branch circuit
protective device in multi-motor
and combination load installations,
commonly involved in heating, air
conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Circuit breakers do not need to
be marked HACR in order to be used
in these applications unless the end
use still requires that marking.
Engine generator circuit breakers are

designed specifically for application
on diesel engine powered standby
generator systems where high
interrupting circuit breakers are
not required. Generator breakers are
equipped with a special trip unit that
provides standard overload protection
with low magnetic short-circuit protection to suit generator applications that
call for close short-circuit protection at
low interrupting ratings.
Eaton offers a family of engine
generator circuit breakers from
15 to 1200A that conform to UL 489,
CSA and IEC 947-2 standards.
Frame
Poles
Ampere
Rating
BAB-D
1, 2
1560
CH-HID
1, 2
1530
1, 2
1530
GHBS
1, 2
1530
23
24
25
26
27
28
Table 27.2-15. HID Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
CHB-HID
22
120/240V
Maximum
29
277/480V
Maximum
30
31
HQP-D
1, 2
1560
QC
1, 2
1560
GHQRSP
1, 2
1530
BABRP
1, 2
1530
BABRSP
1, 2
1530
BRRP
1, 2
1530
CLRP
1, 2
1530
32
33
34
Table 27.2-16. SWD Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

SWD at
277 Vac
35
36
Breaker
Family
Frame
Mounting
Poles
Ampere
Rating
SWD at
120 Vac
QUICKLAG
Series C
Series G
GHB, GHBS, GHC and EHD

EG
All
All
All
1
1
1, 2
15 and 20
15 and 20
15 and 20
37
Table 27.2-17. HACR Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Breaker
Family
Frame
Mounting
Poles
Ampere
Rating
Up to
240 Vac
Up to
480 Vac
QUICKLAG
Plug-on
Bolt-on
Cable-cable
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 4
15100
15100
10100
Series C
Series G
GD thru LD
EG thru LG
All
All
All
All
All
All
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 032
Special Application Breakers
22
23
24
25
26
Mining Circuit Breakers
Marine Circuit Breakers
Eaton mining circuit breakers have a

tradition of proven dependability and
reliability in harsh mine environments,
consistently combining strength and
reliability with safe, efficient operation.
The mining breaker is available from
152500A and is designed for trailing
cable applications per MSHA 30 CFR
75. With interrupting ratings up to
25 kA at 1000/577 Vac and rms sensing
electronic trip unit, the mining breaker
can be applied to all mining circuit
breaker applications.
Eaton circuit breakers can be

supplied to meet the following
marine specifications:
27
Mining breakers are available with a

full line of accessories.
28
NAVY MIL-SPEC Breakers
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
NAVY MIL-SPEC molded-case circuit

breakers provide both overload protection for conductors and short-circuit
protection for all circuit elements, such
as conductors, motors and starters.
They also serve as manual disconnecting means, as well as circuit protectors.
These breakers range from 5 to 1600A
with interrupting ratings to 100,000A
rms asymmetrical. These breakers
are rated 500 Vac class for use in
traditional 450 Vac three-phase open
delta ungrounded naval distribution
systems. Smaller distribution panel
breakers are rated 125 Vac. 60 Hz and
400 Hz versions are available as well
as 125/250 Vdc ratings.
All Eaton NAVY breakers meet
applicable MIL-SPECS including:
36
37
38
MIL-C-17588/QPL17588 ALB-1 Breakers

MIL-DTL-17361/QPL17361
AQB Breakers
MIL-S-901 Shock
MIL-STD-167-1 Vibration
MIL-STD-461 EMI
ASTM D5948 Special
Molding Compounds
U.S. Coast Guard CFR

ABSAmerican Bureau of Shipping
IEEE 45
DNV
Lloyds
ABS / NVR
These specifications generally

require molded-case circuit breakers
to be supplied with 50C ambient
ratings and plug-in adapter kits.
When plug-in adapter kits are used,
no terminals need to be supplied
(switchboard applications).
Duty Cycle is based on the one minute

averaging time of the breaker, and can
be determined as follows:
Weld Time 100
Duty Cycle = ---------------------------------------------------------Weld Time + Off Time
During-weld amperes can be
obtained from the welder manufacturer,
or as follows:
During-weld 1000
kVA
During-weld = --------------------------------------------------Amperes
Voltage
Interrupting capacity of the breaker
should be within the maximum available at the point of application. Refer to
Eaton for additional application details.
Circuit breakers can also be supplied

to meet UL 489 Supplement SA
(Marine usefor vessels over 65 feet
in length) and UL 489 Supplement
SB (Naval use).
Molded-Case Breakers for

Application on Resistance
Welding Circuits
Short-circuit protection for resistance
welding devices can be obtained by
properly applying instantaneous trip
molded-case circuit breakers.
Note: Instantaneous only breakers for welding application are intended for application
within the welding equipment not as feeder
breakers to welding machines.
These breakers permit normally high

welding currents, but trip instantaneously if a short-circuit develops.
These breakers include standard
molded-case circuit breaker features,
such as trip-free operation, deadfront
and single-phase protection. Because
the breakers are resettable after
tripping, replacement costs and
downtime are minimized.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-1
Sheet 27 033
Continuous Ampere Rating

Molded-case circuit breakers are rated
in rms amperes at a specific ambient.
This ampere rating is the continuous
current that they will carry in the
ambient temperature for which they
are calibrated. Eaton thermal-magnetic
breakers are calibrated for an ambient
temperature 40C (104F) that is
the average temperature within an
enclosure; thus, they minimize the
need for derating. If the enclosure
ambient is known to exceed 40C, the
breaker used should either be especially
calibrated for that ambient, or be
derated accordingly.
In accordance with the National
Electrical Code, all circuit breakers
are derated to 80% for continuous
loads except electronic trip unit circuit
breakers that have been tested and
marked for 100% application.
The selection of a specific ampere
rating for a given application is dependent upon the type of load and duty
cycle, and is governed by the National
Electrical Code. In general, the NEC
requires overcurrent protection at the
supply and at points where wire sizes
are reduced. It further states that the
conductors be protected in accordance
with their current carrying capacity,
but lists exceptions for applications
such as motor circuits where a larger
rating is often required to override
motor inrush currents.
Some test methods used in the field
are often poor indicators of the condition of a circuit breaker. These tests are
used to minimize test cycle and setup
times. Test types range from contact
resistance measurements to millivolt
drop checks.
Contact resistance should not be
considered a reliable measure of a
breakers ability to carry rated current.
Contact resistance is usually measured
with low currents from a low voltage
supply flowing through the contacts,
and the resistance value is heavily
dependent on transient contact
surface conditions. These transient
surface conditions can vary with
factors, such as the contact material,
the gaseous ambient and the current
level, and the resistance can markedly
decrease with the flow of rated
current. Observation of high contact
resistance should be considered only
as an indicator of the need for further
testing whenever circuit breakers are
being evaluated.
CA08104001E
The millivolt drop procedure outlined

in NEMA Standards Publication AB41996 Section 5.4 can be used to assess
the electrical integrity of connections
and contacts within a circuit breaker.
The IEEE paper by John Shea and
John Bindas, Measuring MoldedCase Circuit Breaker Resistance
Vol. CHMT-16, No. 2, March 1993,
is available as a guideline for more
reliable millivolt drop measurements.
Again, the millivolt drop can be
affected by contact surface conditions
that can change with breaker operation and arcing. Further, the millivolt
drop is only one factor in determining
the thermal loading of a breaker, and
the total system must be considered
prior to judging a breaker to be
unacceptable.
Proper thermal performance of a well
loaded circuit breaker is by far the best
indicator of a circuit breakers current
carrying capability, and a millivolt drop
test, performed at rated current, can
serve to indicate whether further
testing is required.
If the resistance and millivolt drop
test data raises concerns in regards to
breaker integrity, a proper thermal test
must be performed.
Circuit Voltage
Molded-case circuit breakers are rated
by voltage class and should be applied
only to system voltages within their
rating. The voltage rating is determined
by the maximum voltage that can be
applied across its terminals, the type
of distribution system and how the
breaker is applied in the system.
Circuit breakers listed for use at
120/240V may be applied on 120/240V
grounded systems. For applications on
240V ungrounded systems, apply only
circuit breakers rated 240V (with no
slash rating) or higher.
Circuit breakers rated 277/480V are
suitable for application on 277/480V
grounded wye systems and are not for
application on 480V ungrounded delta
systems. Apply circuit breakers rated
480V (with no slash rating) or higher
on 480V ungrounded delta systems.
UL 489 provides standards for testing

the individual poles of two- and threepole molded-case circuit breakers. The
test current is generally lower than the
interrupting rating of the molded-case
circuit breaker. This capability is
necessary for breakers applied on
corner-grounded delta systems where
single line-to-ground faults may be
interrupted by only a single pole of
a circuit breaker with full line-to-line
voltage across that single interrupting
pole. Molded-case circuit breakers
should not be used on circuits where
the available fault current exceeds
the level at which individual poles
were short-circuit tested at line-toline voltage.
23
24
25
26
27
Note: On all three-phase delta, grounded

B Phase applications, refer to Eaton.
28
29
Molded-case circuit breakers are available in various interrupting capacities.

Standard interrupting capacity breakers
are available in both industrial and
replacement circuit breaker lines.
These breakers have interrupting
capacities up to 35 kA at 480 Vac.
30
31
High interrupting capacity breakers are

similar to standard interrupting capacity
breakers, but the improved performance
makes these breakers suited for use in
todays network systems where higher
fault currents exist. These breakers have
interrupting capacities up to 65 kA at
480 Vac.
32
For applications that call for very high

interrupting ratings, current limiting
high interrupting capacity breakers
are available. These breakers offer true
current limiting characteristics in the
same physical frame size as the high
interrupting capacity version and have
interrupting capacities of 100, 150
and 200 kA at 480 Vac.
35
The maximum amount of fault current

supplied by a system can be calculated
at any point in that system. One rule
must be followed for applying the
correct circuit breaker.
38
The interrupting rating of the breaker

must be equal to or greater than the
amount of fault current that can be
delivered at that point in the system
where the breaker is applied.
40
The interrupting rating of the breaker

is the maximum amount of fault current
it can safely interrupt without damaging
itself. A breakers interrupting rating
always decreases as the voltage
increases. Interrupting rating is one of
the most critical factors in the breaker
selection process.
22
33
34
36
37
39
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 034
Application InformationCode Considerations
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Circuit Frequency
The tripping characteristics of most
molded-case circuit breakers remain
virtually constant when applied to
frequencies of 50 and 60 Hz. On higher
frequency applications, molded-case
circuit breakers must usually be specially
calibrated and/or derated. The amount
of derating depends upon the frame
size and ampere rating, as well as the
current frequency. In general, the higher
the ampere rating in a given frame
size, the greater the derating required.
Thermal-magnetic molded-case
circuit breakers applied at frequencies
above 60 Hz could require that individual consideration be given to thermal
performance, magnetic performance
and interrupting capabilities.
Electronic trip units are usually
calibrated for 50/60 Hz, although
operation at higher frequencies is
achievable with the use of special
derating factors and specially sized
cable or bus.
Avoid making circuit breaker
performance assumptions on
applications above 60 Hz. Consult
Eaton for molded-case circuit
breakers above 60 Hz.
Number of Poles
The number of poles in the breaker is
determined by the type of distribution
system. A pole is required for each
hot conductor, but usually not for the
neutral conductor, except in certain
special applications.
In general, a single-pole breaker may
be used on grounded neutral systems
for single-phase applications and a
three-pole breaker on three-phase
applications. There are instances,
however, where two-pole breakers are
necessary on single-phase systems and
four-pole breakers on three-phase
systems to interrupt the neutral. Certain
DC voltage applications also use
special multi-pole configurations.

Molded-case circuit breakers use
internal residual ground fault
protection schemes or separate
earth leakage modules using zero
sequence sensing when optional
ground fault protection is required. For
more information on how the scheme
operates, see Tab 1, Figure 1.4-7 and
the associated explanation.
Code Considerations
Circuit Breaker Sizing
The following paragraphs outline
pertinent information from the NEC
according to the type of load and
duty cycle.
Service
A service includes the conductors and
equipment for delivering electrical
energy from the supply system to the
wiring system of the premises served.
NEC Article 230 contains the many
requirements for services of 600V
or less including the sizing, location
and overcurrent protection of
conductors, disconnect means,
permissible number of disconnects,
grounding of conductors and ground
fault protection requirements of
service equipment.
Feeder Circuits
A feeder is composed of the
conductors of a wiring system
between the service equipment
or the generator switchboard of
an isolated plant and the branch
circuit overcurrent device.
NEC Article 220: Where a feeder
supplies continuous loads or any
combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the
overcurrent device shall not be less
than the noncontinuous load plus
Exception: Where the assembly
including the overcurrent devices
protecting the feeder(s) are listed
for operation at 100% of their rating,
neither the ampere rating of the overcurrent device nor the ampacity of the
feeder conductors shall be less than
the sum of the continuous load plus
the noncontinuous load.
Only breakers listed for 100% application, and so labeled, can be applied
under the exception (for example,
type CKD). Breakers without 100%
application listing and label are applied
under (B) above, or at 80% of rating.
NEC Article 430: Breakers for feeders
having mixed loads; i.e., heating
(lighting and heat appliances) and
motors, should have ratings suitable
for carrying the heating loads plus the
capacity required by the motor loads.
Branch Circuits
A branch circuit is the portion of a wiring
system extending beyond the final
overcurrent device protecting the circuit.
(1) Lighting Circuits (NEC Article 310)
These are protected in accordance
with the conductor ratings as given.
High wattage incandescent lamp loads
may result in abnormally high inrush
currents that must be taken into
account to avoid nuisance tripping.
The lamp manufacturer should be
consulted for data relative to the
inrush currents.
(2) Motor Circuits (NEC Article 430)
Breakers are primarily intended for the
protection of conductors, motor control
apparatus and motors against short
circuits and ground fault conditions.
On motor overloads, the motor overcurrent device will open the circuit
before the correctly applied breaker.
Currents higher than the locked rotor
value will be interrupted by the breakers,
protecting the circuit from these heavy
fault currents. The breaker must not
trip on normal starting.
While breakers may be applied for motor

running overcurrent protection when
the requirements of Article 430 of the
NEC are met, these applications are
not recommended for Eatons breakers
and, therefore, this discussion is
confined to the use of a breaker
as a circuit protector.
For many applications, particularly
those where starting behavior of the
motor is unknown, the NEC maximum
rules are followed. Usually, lower
rated breakers can be used successfully. This is further discussed under
motor circuit application and motor
application tables.
Motor circuit application (NEC
Article 430): The breaker must have
a continuous rating of not less than
115% of the motor full load current.
Before applying a breaker, check to
determine the effect of any of the
following conditions: High ambient
temperature, heating within breaker
enclosure due to grouping of current
consuming devices, frequent
motor starting and lengthy motor
acceleration period.
NEC Article 430: Breakers for motor

feeders shall have a rating not greater
than the sum of the highest breaker
rating of any of its branches and the
full load currents of all other motors
served by the feeder.
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-3
Sheet 27 035

Breaker rating or setting (NEC
Article 430): The motor branch circuit
overcurrent device must be capable
of capable of carrying the inrush current
of the motor. The required protection
should be considered as being
obtained when the overcurrent device
has a rating or setting not exceeding
the values given in Table 27.3-1,
reference NEC Article 430).
An instantaneous trip circuit breaker
(without time delay) should be used
only if adjustable and if part of a
combination controller having overcurrent protection in each conductor
and the combination is especially
approved for the purpose. In the event
a breaker chosen on this basis still
does not allow motor starting, a higher
rating is permitted by the code. See
Exceptions listed with Table 27.3-1.
Due to the infinite number of motorand-load combinations and because

comparable breakers of different
manufacture have different tripping
characteristics, NEC motor circuit
breaker rules are of a general nature
and are set up as maximum boundaries.
Protection is considered satisfactory if
the breaker rating does not exceed the
figure allowed by the NEC requirements.
Although Eaton breakers rated less than
the NEC maximum values may be
applied in most cases, many operating
engineers select breakers on the basis
of the NEC maximum rules simply
because consideration of other factors
is not usually necessary, or to ensure
motor starting when the starting
behavior of the motor is not known.
Tables 27.3-1 and 27.3-2 are adapted
from Article 430 of NEC.
When a certain motor is standard for
a given job, as on a volume-produced
machine tool, it is practical (and often
more economical) to select a breaker
for closer protection than one chosen
on the basis of NEC maximum rules.
Circuit Breaker Not Horsepower Rated

Unlike switches, circuit breakers are
not horsepower rated because they
are able to safely interrupt currents
far in excess of the locked rotor value
for any motor with which they may
be applied. This ability is recognized
in the NEC as stated in paragraph
430.109 and is proven by the
Underwriters Laboratories tests
described in UL bulletin number 489,
Standard for Branch Circuit and
Service Circuit Breakers.
For example, a breaker must pass
the UL overload test consisting of
breaking a current 600% of its ampere
ratings. As motor branch circuit
breaker ratings are usually 125 to
250% of motor full-load currents,
this test establishes the ability of the
breaker to more than interrupt locked
rotor currents. Following the overload
test and others, the breaker is called
upon to successfully clear its rated
short-circuit current that is a minimum
of 5000A. This also is many times
higher than motor locked rotor
current. Because by definition, a
circuit breaker is required to open
under abnormal conditions...without
injury to itself, the breaker must still
be in operating condition after the test.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 036
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Motor Branch Circuits

Table 27.3-1. Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground Fault Protective DevicesNEC Table 430.52
Percent of Full Load Current
Motor
Type
Instantaneous
Trip Breaker
Single-phase motors
AC polyphase motors other than wound rotor squirrel cage:
Other than Design B energy efficient
Design B energy efficient
Synchronous
Wound rotor
Direct-current (constant voltage)
Inverse Time
Breaker
800
250
800
1100
800
800
250
250
250
250
150
150
For certain exceptions to the values specified, see Sections 430.52 through 430.54. The values given in the last column also cover the ratings of
nonadjustable inverse time types of circuit breakers that may be modified as in Section 430.52, Exceptions No. 1 and No. 2. Synchronous motors of
the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps and so on, that start unloaded,
do not require a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of 200% of full load current.
Table 27.3-2. Full-Load Current Three-Phase Alternating-Current MotorsNEC Table 430.250

Hp
115V
29
Synchronous Type Unity Power Factor

Amperes
Induction Type Squirrel Cage and Wound-Rotor

Amperes
200V
208V
230V
460V
575V
2300V
230V
460V
575V
2300V
1/2
3/4
1
4.4
6.4
8.4
2.5
3.7
4.8
2.4
3.5
4.6
2.2
3.2
4.2
1.1
1.6
2.1
0.9
1.3
1.7
30
1-1/2
2
3
12.0
13.6
6.9
7.8
11.0
6.6
7.5
10.6
6.0
6.8
9.6
3.0
3.4
4.8
2.4
2.7
3.9
31
5
7-12
10
17.5
25.3
32.2
16.7
24.2
30.8
15.2
22
28
7.6
11
14
6.1
9
11
32
15
20
25
48.3
62.1
78.2
46.2
59.4
74.8
42
54
68
21
27
34
17
22
27
53
26
21
33
30
40
50
92
120
150
88
114
143
80
104
130
40
52
65
32
41
52
63
83
104
32
41
52
26
33
42
34
60
75
100
177
221
285
169
211
273
154
192
248
77
96
124
62
77
99
16
20
26
123
155
202
61
78
101
49
62
81
12
15
20
35
125
150
200
359
414
552
343
396
528
312
360
480
156
180
240
125
144
192
31
37
49
253
302
400
126
151
201
101
121
161
25
30
40
36
250
300
350
302
361
414
242
289
336
60
72
83
37
400
450
500
477
515
590
382
412
472
95
103
118
38
The following values of full load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque
characteristics. The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed will be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220
to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600V.
For 90% and 80% power factor, the above figures should be multiplied by 1.1 and 1.25 respectively.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-5
Sheet 27 037
Motor Protection
In line with 2008 NEC 430.6(A1)
circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating
selections are based on full load
currents for induction motors running
at speeds normal for belted motors
and motors with normal torque
characteristics using data taken
from NEC Table 430.250 (threephase). Actual motor nameplate
ratings should be used for selecting
motor running overload protection.
Motors built special for low speeds,
high torque characteristics, special
starting conditions and applications
will require other considerations as
of the NEC.
pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere
rating selections are in line with
maximum rules given in NEC 430.52
and Table 430.250. Based on known
characteristics of Eaton breakers,
specific units are recommended. The
current ratings are no more than the
maximum limits set by the NEC rules
for motors with code letters F to V or
without code letters. Motors with
lower code letters will require further
considerations.
based on:
1. Ambientoutside enclosure not
2. Motor startinginfrequent
motor FLA.
motor FLA.
may not be set more than 1300% of
with NEC 430.52 (except for NEMA
Design B energy efficient motors
which can be set up to 1700%).
ratings. Higher interrupting rating types
Horsepower
Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA

Maximum
Amperes
Recommended Eaton
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
Time Delay
Amperes
Amperes
Non-Time Delay
23
230V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
30
50
50
70
90300
150500
150500
210700
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
460V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
5
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
250
400
400
12502500
20004000
20004000
575V, Three-Phase
31
32
33
34
35
36
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
5
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
15
15
30
30
45150
45150
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
50
50
50
100
150500
150500
150500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
41
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
42
For motor full load currents of 208V

and 200V, increase the corresponding
230V motor values by 10% and
15% respectively.
CA08104001E
Adj. Range
22
37
38
39
40
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 038
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Capacitor Protection (NEC Article 460)

In normal applications, breakers rated
about 150% of capacitor rated currents
are recommended. This factor allows
for switching surges, and possible
overcurrent due to overvoltage and
harmonic currents. Such selection
fully meets the NEC requirements
in 460.8 for a conductor and disconnect to be rated not less than 135%
capacitor rating. Where the operating
currents exceed 135% of rated current
due to harmonic components, service
conditions may require the selection of
a breaker with a higher current rating.
For application in ambients higher
than the rated ambient of the breaker,
the breaker derating table should be
checked to determine the rating of the
breaker required to meet the minimum
of 135% capacitor rating.
Circuit breakers and switches for use with

capacitor must have a current rating in
excess of rated capacitor current to provide for overcurrent from overvoltages
at fundamental frequency and harmonic
currents. The following percent of the
capacitor-rated current should be used:
Fused and unfused switches . . . 165%
Enclosed molded-case circuit breaker
(includes additional de-rating for
enclosures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
Air circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
34
35
Contactors:
Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
Exception No. 2: An individual overcurrent device will not be required

where the primary circuit overcurrent
device provides the protection specified
in this Section.
overcurrent device is rated or set at a

current value not more than six times
the rated current of the transformer
for transformers having more than
6% impedance and not more than
four times the rated current of the
transformer for transformers having
more than six but not more than
10% impedance.
Exception No. 3: As provided in

(2) below.
(2) Primary and Secondary
Exception 4: Where the rated secondary

current of a transformer is 9A or more
and 125% of this current does not
correspond to a standard rating of a
fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the
next higher standard rating described
in Section 240 will be permitted.
A transformer 600V or less having an

overcurrent device on the secondary
side rated or set at not more than 125%
of the rated secondary current on the
transformer shall not be required to have
an individual overcurrent device on the
primary side if the primary feeder overcurrent device is rated or set at a current
value not more than 250% of the rated
primary current of the transformer.
Where the rated secondary current is

less than 9A, an overcurrent device
rated or set at not more than 167%
of the rated secondary current shall
be permitted. Closer protection can
be provided by breakers having shunt
trips actuated by a temperature
sensing device imbedded in
transformer windings.
A transformer 600V or less, equipped

with coordinated thermal overload
protection by the manufacturer and
arranged to interrupt the primary
current, will not be required to have
an individual overcurrent device on
the primary side if the primary feeder
Table 27.3-4. Single-Phase Transformer Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
kVA
208V
FLA
240V
277V
Breaker FLA
Trip
Breaker FLA
Trip
480V
Breaker FLA
Trip
600V
Breaker FLA
Trip
Breaker
Trip
2
3
5
10
14
24
20
30
50
8
13
21
20
30
50
7
11
18
15
20
40
5
6
10
10
15
20
4
5
8
7.5
10
15
36
48
72
70
100
150
31
42
63
60
80
125
27
36
54
50
70
100
16
21
31
30
40
60
13
17
25
30
40
50
25
37.5
50
120
180
240
225
350
450
104
156
208
200
300
400
90
135
181
175
250
350
52
78
104
100
150
200
42
63
83
100
150
150
10
20
36
Refer to Tab 35 for specific sizing of

protective devices by kVAR rating.
75
100
167
361
481
803
700
1000
1600
313
417
696
600
800
1200
271
361
603
500
700
1200
156
208
348
300
400
700
125
167
278
250
350
600
37
(NEC Article 450) Primary
250
333
500
1202
1601
2404
2000
3000
3200
1042
1388
2083
1600
2000
3000
903
1202
1805
1600
2000
2500
521
694
1042
800
1200
1600
417
555
833
800
800
1200
38
39
40
41
42
43
Each transformer 600V or less shall be

protected by an individual overcurrent
device on the primary side. Rated or
set at not more than 125% of the rated
primary current of the transformer.
Exception No. 1: Where the rated
primary currents of a transformer are
9A or more and 125% of this current
does not correspond to a standard
rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit
breaker, the next higher standard rating
described in Section 240 will be permitted. Where the rated primary current is
less than 9A, an overcurrent device
rated or set at not more than 167% of
the primary current shall be permitted.
Where the rated primary current is less
than 2A, an overcurrent device rated
or set at not more than 300% will
be permitted.
Table 27.3-5. Single-Phase Transformer Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA
208V
FLA
240V
Breaker
Trip
FLA
277V
Breaker
Trip
2
3
5
10
14
24
15
20
30
8
13
21
15
20
30
7.5
10
15
36
48
72
45
60
90
31
42
63
25
37.5
50
120
180
240
150
225
300
75
100
167
361
481
803
250
333
500
1202
1601
2404
480V
FLA
Breaker
Trip
FLA
Breaker
Trip
11
18
15
25
10
15
40
60
80
27
36
54
35
50
70
16
21
31
20
30
40
104
156
208
150
200
300
90
135
181
150
175
225
52
78
104
70
100
150
450
600
1000
313
417
696
400
600
900
271
361
603
350
450
800
156
208
348
200
300
450
1600
2000
3000
1042
1388
2083
1400
1800
3000
903
1202
1805
1200
1600
2500
521
694
1042
700
900
1400
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-7
Sheet 27 039

Table 27.3-6. Three-Phase Transformer Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
kVA
240V
480V
FLA
Breaker
Trip
3
6
9
7
14
22
15
30
40
15
30
37.5
36
72
90
45
50
75
112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
600V
FLA
Breaker
Trip
FLA
Breaker
Trip
7
11
15
25
6
9
15
20
70
150
200
18
36
45
40
70
90
14
29
36
30
60
70
108
120
180
200
225
350
54
60
90
110
125
200
43
48
72
90
100
150
271
361
541
500
700
1000
135
180
271
250
350
500
108
144
217
200
300
400
722
1203
1804
2406
1000
2000
2500
4000
361
601
902
1203
600
800
1200
2000
289
481
722
962
500
700
1000
1600
Table 27.3-7. Three-Phase Transformer Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA
208V
FLA
240V
Breaker
Trip
FLA
480V
Breaker
Trip
3
6
9
8
17
25
10
20
35
7
14
22
10
20
30
15
30
37.5
42
83
104
60
110
150
36
72
90
45
50
75
125
139
208
175
175
300
112.5
150
225
312
416
652
833
1388
2082
2776
300
500
750
1000
600V
FLA
Breaker
Trip
FLA
Breaker
Trip
7
11
10
15
10
45
100
125
18
36
45
25
45
60
14
29
36
20
40
50
108
120
180
150
175
225
54
60
90
70
80
125
43
48
72
60
60
90
400
600
800
271
361
541
350
500
700
135
180
271
175
225
350
108
144
217
150
200
300
1200
1800
3000
3500
722
1203
1804
2406
900
1500
2500
3000
361
601
902
1203
500
800
1200
1600
289
481
722
962
400
600
900
1200
Slash Ratings from 2008 NEC Article

240.85 Applications
A circuit breaker with a straight
voltage rating, such as 240 or 480V,
shall be permitted to be applied in a
circuit in which the nominal voltage
between any two conductors does not
exceed the circuit breakers voltage
rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shall
not be used for protecting a threephase, corner-grounded delta circuit
unless the circuit breaker is marked
13 to indicate such suitability.
A circuit breaker with a slash rating,
such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, shall
be permitted to be applied in a solidly
grounded circuit where the nominal
voltage of any conductor to ground
does not exceed the lower of the two
values of the circuit breakers voltage
rating and the nominal voltage
between any two conductors does
not exceed the higher value of the
circuit breakers voltage rating.
FPN: Proper application of moldedcase circuit breakers on three-phase
systems, other than solidly grounded
wye, particularly on corner-grounded
delta systems, considers the circuit
breakers individual pole-interrupting
capability.
For corner-grounded delta systems
refer to Eaton for reduced interrupting
ratings of selected type two- and
three-pole breakers.
For center tapped delta applications
where there is a tap between A
and C (high B being the leg),
the following applies:
1. The voltage from the tapped
winding center point that is
grounded is 0.867 x line to
line voltage.
2. Any single-pole breaker connected

to B phase must have a voltage
rating equal to 0.867 x line to
line voltage.
3. Any two-pole breaker should have
a full voltage rating equal to or
above line to line voltage (slash
rating is not acceptable).
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 040
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Cable Sizing/Selection
There is often much confusion about
the size and insulation ratings of cables
that are used with circuit breakers and
other types of electrical equipment
assemblies. Much of the confusion is
caused by not taking into consideration
the rating of the terminations of the
electrical equipment. When sizing and
selecting a cable, the designer must
consider the temperature rating of the
termination it will be landed on so that
the proper size and insulation rating
can be chosen.
Per UL 489, circuit breakers rated
125A or less shall be marked as
being suitable for 60C (140F)
only, 75C (167F) only or 60/75C
(140/167F) wire. All Eaton listed
breakers rated 125A and less are
marked 60/75C
Per UL 489, circuit breakers rated
over 125A shall be marked as being
suitable for 75C (167F). All Eaton
listed breakers rated over 125A are
marked 75C
31
32
33
It is important to note that the

termination rating of electrical
equipment is based on the entire
equipment assembly and not just the
rating of the lug termination itself.
Note: All listed electrical distribution

equipment rated 600 Vac and less has
a maximum cable termination rating
of 75C (167F).
There are many different types of
conductors and Table 310.13(A)
of NEC 2008 can help provide an
understanding of conductors to use
for various field-wired applications.
This table shows that insulation type
is a key aspect of a conductor that
impacts not only where it can be
installed but also the conductors rated
ampacity. Together with Tables 310.16
through 310.21, the cable ampacities
of various conductors with various
insulation types are presented to the
designer who must choose the appropriate conductor for the application.
When a designer is sizing cables for

termination on electrical distribution
equipment, they must ensure not
to exceed:
1. The temperature rating of the
equipment termination.
2. The insulation rating of the cable
at the full load ampacity of the
equipment.
The following are a couple simple
sizing examples to illustrate some of
the considerations for selecting and
sizing cables.
It should also be noted that many
terminals are suitable for use only
with copper wire. Where aluminum
or copper-clad aluminum wire is
used, the terminals must be marked
appropriately. The marking is usually
abbreviated as AL for aluminum,
CU for copper and AL-CU for a
terminal that can handle both.
Table 27.3-8. Sizing Example 1
34
Allowable
Ampacity
Properly
Sized
Explanation
#1/0 Cu Type TW (60C Insulation)
35
125A
Breaker Terminals
Rated 60/75C
36
37
38
The designer must review the equipment labeling or installation guidelines

to determine the proper cable size and
insulation required, regardless of the
markings on the actual lugs. For
example, panelboards, switchboards,
motor control centers and so on. often
contain lugs that are marked 90C on
the lug itself, however, the assembly is
only rated for a 75C cable termination.
Therefore, only cables with a minimum
of 75C insulation and rated/derated per
its 75C ampacity rating can be used.
60C 125A
Yes
Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment without exceeding the

equipment terminal ratings
#1 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)

60C 110A
75C 130A
No
Yes
90C 150A
No
The 60C rating of #1 Cu is not sufficient for the 125A equipment

Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment without exceeding the
equipment terminal ratings
Cannot use 90C ratingexceeds the equipment terminal ratings
Figure 27.3-1. Sizing Example 1

Table 27.3-9. Sizing Example 2
39
Allowable
Ampacity
Explanation
##3/0 Cu Type TW (60C Insulation)
40
41
Properly
Sized
60C 164A
150A
Breaker Terminals
Rated 75C
42
No
Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment, but equipment terminal

temperature rating exceeds cable insulation temperature rating
#1 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)

60C 110A
75C 130A
90C 150A
No
No
No

1/0 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)
43
60C 125A
75C 150A
No
Yes
90C 170A
No
The 60C rating of 1/0 Cu is not sufficient for the 150A equipment
The 75C rating of 1/0 Cu is sufficient for the 150A equipment and
does not exceed equipment terminal ratings
Figure 27.3-2. Sizing Example 2

CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-9
Sheet 27 041
Application InformationTrip Curves
Time-Current Trip Curve

Characteristics
Time-current trip curve characteristics
are available on the Eaton Web site.
The band curves shown for each
breaker type represent current tripping
limits for the breaker and are within
limits established by Underwriters
Laboratories. For a given current, at
rated ambient, a breaker will clear the
circuit automatically at some total time
within the two extreme values defined
by maximum and minimum curves.
For example, a single-pole, 15A
QUICKLAG would trip in no less than
10 seconds and in no more than
150 seconds on a 30A current.
Because of this allowed spread, users
should not specify exact tripping times.
The upper left portions of these curves

show the inverse time delay tripping
of the breakers due to thermal action.
The lower right segments for these
curves portray the magnetic tripping
action of the breakers. In the case of
the front-adjustable thermal-magnetic
breakers, the magnetic tripping
elements may be adjusted to trip at
values within a specific current range.
This adjustment is shown in the
respective characteristic tripping
curve. When these breakers leave the
factory, their magnetic trip elements
are set at the high side of their tripping
range. Adjustment downward may be
made to fit the requirements of the
installation. Currents equal to or
greater than these magnetic settings
will cause instant tripping.
10000
10000
5000
5000
1000
1000
500
500
Curves can be family curves and are

suitable for most applications; for more
accurate applications, a detailed curve of
the particular type and ampere rating of
the breaker should be requested.
The total time taken by a breaker to
clear a fault consists of the mechanical
operating time plus the time of actual
current interruption. Characteristic
time/current curves show total clearing
times. Magnetic only breakers have
no time delay in tripping. The tripping
characteristics of these breakers are
similar to the right-hand portion of
the standard breakers, except with
the vertical lines extended to the top
of the curve.
LONG TIME
PORTION
100
50
LONG TIME DELAY

A
50
T
I
M
E
I
N
10
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
5
SHORT TIME
PICK-UP
2
I t RAMP
.5
SHORT TIME
DELAY
A
.5
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
4
3
GROUND FAUL
F LT
PICK-UP
.01
34
I t RAMP
1
.8
.6
35
GROUND FAUL
F LT
TIME DELAY
A
.4
.3
36
.2
.1
.08
.06
37
.6 .8 1
3 4
6 8
INSTANT
T TANEOUS
PICK-UP
.05
INSTANTANEOUS
PORTION
32
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF
FRAME OR SENSOR RATING.
.1
.05
27
33
10
8
6
.04
.03
.2 .3 .4
.1
26
30
TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT CURVE

ADJUSTMENTS FOR SOLID-STATE TRIP
UNIT WITH ADJUSTABLE GROUND FAULT
PICK-UP AND DELAY SETTINGS.
I
N
10
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
25
31
MINIMUM
I
N
24
28
AMPERE RATING
A
OR
LONG TIME PICK-UP
100
T
I
M
E
23
29
MAXIMUM
T
I
M
E
22
38
39
40
.01
.5
1
5
10
50 100
500 1000
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING
Non-Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic
.5
10
100
5
50
500 1000
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES
L
OF RA
ATING PLUG OR CURRENT SENSOR
Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable

Phase and Ground Current Settings
5000 10000
41
42
Figure 27.3-3. Typical Time-Current Curves
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 042
Application InformationSelective Coordination
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Design Issues
In the design of Elevator feeders,

Emergency systems, Legally Required
Standby systems and new Critical
Operations Power Systems (COPS),
todays engineer faces greater
difficulty in meeting the NEC selective
coordination requirements. Whether
using breakers or fuses, the engineer
has to understand the nature of the
devices being selected, and properly
apply them, such that only the protective device nearest to the fault will open
to clear an overload/fault condition.
Overcurrent = Fault or Overload
29
4
30
31
32
D
D
Only This Overcurrent

Device 3 Opens for a
Fault or Overload at
C Locations
Only This Overcurrent

Device 4 Opens for a
Fault or Overload at
D Locations
3
C
33
34
For MCCBs and LVPCBs in the low

level overload or low level fault
current range (typically below 10 times
the device rating) it is only necessary
to ensure that the minimum time
band of the upstream device does
not overlap the maximum time
band of the downstream device.
This information can be typically
determined from the published
time-current curves of the devices.
In order to properly design a selectively

coordinated system, the design
professional engineer must recognize
how the various low voltage (600V and
below) overcurrent protective devices,
such as molded-case circuit breakers
(MCCBs) and low voltage power
circuit breakers (LVPCBs) operate.
Following is a brief discussion of these
devices in relationship to selective
coordination. Each MCCB and LVPCB
must have a voltage rating and
interrupting capacity equal to or greater
than the system voltage and available
fault current at its point of application
in the electrical distribution system.
Only This Overcurrent Device 2

Opens for a Fault or Overload
at B Locations
C
2
35
Only This Breaker 1
Opens for a Fault or
Overload at A Location
36
37
Branch
Circuit
38
A
Light Ballast
or Motor
39
40
Figure 27.3-4. Example of 100% Selective Coordination of Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-11
Sheet 27 043

Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
Interrupting and Short-Time Rating
IEEE Standard 1015 defines the interrupting rating of the breaker as The
highest current at rated voltage that a
device is intended to interrupt under
standard test conditions. On the other
hand, IEEE Standard 1015 refers to the
short-time rating of the low voltage
circuit breaker as A rating applied to
a circuit breaker that, for reason of
system coordination, causes tripping
of the circuit breaker to be delayed
beyond the time when tripping would
be caused by an instantaneous
element. In other words, the devices
ability to stay closed and NOT open
the circuit immediately under fault
conditions. The short-time rating of
the breaker will be broken down into
two facets for ease of discussion:
1. Short-time current rating
The current carried by the circuit
breaker for a specified interval, or
the maximum current magnitude
under a fault condition for which
the circuit breaker can stay closed.
2. Short-time delay ratingAn
intentional time delay in the tripping of a circuit breaker between
the overload and the instantaneous pickup setting. The maximum short-time delay is the
maximum amount of time the
breaker can keep its contacts
closed under the fault condition.
If two breakers are in series, to
obtain selective coordination, the
upstream breaker must have a
short-time current rating above
the actual fault current on the load
side of any downstream breaker.
In addition, the upstream breaker
has to have short-time delay
capability long enough to allow
the downstream breaker to open
and clear the fault condition.
It should be recognized that as the
short-time current rating and/or shorttime delay rating of the upstream
devices is increased, should a fault
occur on the line side of downstream
circuit breaker 1 and the load side
of upstream circuit breaker 2 the
amount of the arc flash energy allowed
to the fault condition generally will be
increased significantly. This increased
arc flash energy reduces the safety
of operating and/or maintenance
personnel if they are present at the time
of the fault. The higher level of arc flash
energy also increases the potential for
major equipment damage, resulting in
fires and extended downtime.
CA08104001E
Current Limiting
Molded-case circuit breakers are

manufactured and tested to the UL 489
standard. Molded-case circuit breakers
have over-center toggle mechanisms
and either a thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip unit. The thermalmagnetic trip unit is such that the
magnetic pickup maximum setting is
approximately 10 times the trip rating.
The electronic trip unit is typically
furnished with a fixed instantaneous
override of approximately 10 to
15 times the breaker frame rating, or
trip unit rating. Thus, for molded-case
circuit breakers with electronic trip
units, for any load side fault above
these levels, the breaker will open. The
exact magnitude of current that will
cause the molded-case circuit breaker
to open instantaneously will vary
by 1) circuit breaker manufacturer,
2) circuit breaker frame rating, 3) type
of trip unit, 4) type/vintage of moldedcase circuit breaker, 5) manufacturers
curve tolerances. It will be assumed
that the current magnitude needed to
open molded-case circuit breakers
with electronic trips instantaneously
is 13 times the frame ratingits
maximum fixed instantaneous override. The manufacturers actual data
should be used to determine this
value. Typically for molded-case
circuit breakers, once the magnetic
pickup or fixed instantaneous override
is exceeded, the opening time is 1 cycle
or less.
Per UL 489-1991, current limiting

circuit breakers have characteristics
that, when operating within their
current-limiting range, limit the letthrough l2t to a value less than the l2t
of a 1/2-cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current. Current limiting
circuit breakers achieve this by
opening their contacts very rapidly,
such that their l peak let-through
current is reduced to a value much
lower than the l peak current available
from the system at the molded-case
circuit breakers point of application.
Although short-time ratings for

molded-case circuit breakers are not
covered in the IEEE Standard 1015 for
molded-case circuit breakers, some
molded-case circuit breakers are
equipped with electronic trip units
that have adjustable short delay
functions. However, they typically
also have either an adjustable
instantaneous trip (typically with
a maximum setting of 10 times trip
ampere) or a fixed instantaneous
override (of 13 times the frame
ampere rating). When the electronic
trip is in the short-time pickup range
(below 13 times frame size), they can
typically be adjusted up to a maximum
short-time delay setting of approximately 18 cycles (300 ms).

Insulated-case circuit breakers are also
manufactured and tested to the UL 489
standard, however, they usually have
a two-step stored energy mechanism
and increased short-time ratings.
These breakers are typically available
in 800, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
and 5000A frame sizes. Although they
may have high interrupting ratings,
the typical instantaneous override
values for insulated-case circuit
breakers are 25 kA to 35 kA for the
smaller frames and up to 85 kA for the
larger frames. Maximum short-time
delay capability is generally up to
30 cycles (0.5s).
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

are manufactured and tested to the
UL 1066 Standard and ANSI C37
standards and have a two-step stored
energy mechanism. Low voltage
power circuit breakers are typically
available in 800, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3000, 4000 and 5000A frame sizes.
However, even the smaller 800A frame
size is available with very high shorttime current ratings of approximately
85 kA to 100 kA. Low voltage power
circuit breakers are capable of keeping
their contacts closed for up to 30
cycles of fault current, at levels up
to their maximum short-time current
rating. Thus, low voltage power
circuit breakers can normally provide
selective coordination with relative
ease when in series with each other, or
when supplying downstream moldedcase circuit breakers or low voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 044
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Methods to Obtain 100%

There are various methods to obtain
selective coordination between overcurrent protective devices, but the
end goal is to have all the line side
overcurrent protective devices in
series to wait until the overcurrent
protective device directly protecting
the circuit having the overcurrent
opens. This means that typically as
the devices progress upstream toward
the source, each device on the line
side of a downstream series device
must have a longer waiting time. The
only two exceptions to this general
rule would be:
1. Two protective devices of the
same trip or fuse rating directly
in series.
2. A transformer primary feeder
breaker and transformer
secondary main breaker.
For both of these exceptions, it would
not matter which overcurrent device
would open or if they both opened,
because the protected circuit would
be disconnected in either case.
Circuit Breaker Selection

1. Select Specific Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
Selective coordination between
upstream molded-case circuit breakers
and downstream molded-case circuit
breakers requires special consideration.
There are various ways to obtain
selective coordination, some applicable
basic methods are as follows:
For molded-case circuit breakers
with thermal-magnetic trip units,
select a line-side breaker with a
magnetic trip (instantaneous
element) setting above the calculated
available fault current level at the
load side downstream breaker
For molded-case circuit breakers
with electronic trip units, select
a line side breaker that has an
adjustable instantaneous element
or fixed instantaneous override
greater than the calculated available
fault current level at the load side
downstream breakers. In addition,
the line side breaker short-time
delay setting must be selected
to allow the load side breaker
adequate time to open and clear
the fault
2. Select Larger Line Side Molded-Case

Circuit Breaker
Select a line side breaker with a larger
frame size than would normally be
required when just considering the
load current requirements. Typically,
the larger the molded-case circuit
breaker frame size, the higher the
magnetic trip adjustment or fixed
instantaneous override value.
General rule: The magnetic trip setting
or fixed instantaneous override value
must be higher than the calculated
available fault current at load side
circuit breaker. However, the larger
the molded-case circuit breaker frame
size, typically the higher the associated
cost and arc flash energy on a fault
condition.
3. Select a Line Side Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breaker
Use the combination of upstream
and downstream molded-case circuit
breakers. The required combinations
will vary depending on the available
fault current. Most manufacturers
have low voltage power circuit
breakers available in two types.
Type 1: Low voltage power circuit
breakers with short-time current
ratings available up to 100 kA and
with interrupting ratings up to 100 kA.
Type 2: For fault currents above
100 kA, low voltage power circuit
breakers are available either as
combination low voltage power
circuit breakers with current limiters,
or as true current limiting versions
without current limiters. Both types
have interrupting ratings up to 200 kA,
but typically have reduced short-time
current ratings.
4. Select Both Line and Load Low Voltage

When usinng low voltage power
circuit breakers, because of the high
short-time current ratings available in
all frame sizes, and their maximum
30-cycle short-time delay rating, there
is generally no problem obtaining
selective coordination between line
and load side low voltage power
circuit breakers. However, the higher
the short delay setting, the higher
the level of available arc flash energy
should a fault occur directly on the
load side of a given low voltage power
circuit breaker.
Use Manufacturers Test Information

Circuit breaker manufacturers, such as
Eaton Corporation, provide selective
coordination tables between specific
line side circuit breakers and load
side circuit breakers, for various
maximum values of fault current.
(See Table 27.3-10 for 100% Selective
Breaker Combinations.) These tables
are based on circuit breaker test data.
It should be noted that in many cases,
the allowable fault current levels to
achieve selective coordination is
significantly higher when using
the manufacturers specific test
information. This is attributed to the
high-speed performance of modern
molded-case circuit breakers that
in some cases are marked as being
current limiting: In addition, although
some molded-case circuit breakers
may not be formally marked as current
limiting, they still begin to open before
the first 1/2-cycle peak, inserting arc
impedance into the circuit, and thus
still reduce the peak let-through
current (lPI) with resulting lower l2t
values. This current reduction by
the downstream breaker reduces
the current to a level below the
instantaneous override of the
upstream breaker, thus providing
selective coordination for higher
fault current levels.
It should be noted that the test circuit
used by manufacturers to confirm
selective coordination must be known
and reasonable. Eatons test circuit
is similar to the test circuit used by
UL 489. This test circuit allows for
4 feet of wire for the combination
of wire from the load side of the
upstream breaker through the downstream breaker to the point of the fault.
0.1 Second Selective Coordination

Some applications and jurisdictions
only mandate breaker selectivity for
time periods longer than 0.1 seconds.
This allows the designer greater
flexibility to balance the affects of
arc flash risk, downtime risk, risk of
equipment damage and so on. with
selectivity. (See Table 27.3-11 for
0.1 Second Breaker Selectivity
Combinations.)
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-13
Sheet 27 045
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

Combinations
100% Selective Coordination
For 100% Selective Coordination
ApplicationsTable 27.3-10
The left side columns list the
amperages of the downstream
breaker grouped by the available
breaker frames. The next columns
on the right of the amperages indicate
the type of Pow-R-Line panelboards
and/or switchboard that the given
downstream breaker is available in
and whether the breaker may be used
in that assembly as a main, feeder or
sub-feed breaker.
The top rows of the table list the
amperages of the upstream breaker
grouped by the available breaker
frames. The next row below indicates
the type of trip unit needed:
T/M = Thermal-Magnetic
ETU = Electronic Trip Unit
For ETUs, the next rows indicate the
specific type of Digitrip RMS trip unit
and/or OPTIM trip unit available.
The minimum trip/maximum trip
rows indicate the amperage range for
which the indicated selectivity is valid.
The next rows below the minimum/
maximum trip indicate the type of
Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or
switchboard that the given upstream
breaker is available in and whether the
breaker may be used in that assembly
as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker.
The values at the intersection of a row
and column represent the maximum
fault current at which selective
coordination can be achieved
between the chosen downstream
and upstream circuit breakers.
Steps in Determining Selective

Coordination Between Line and
Load Side Circuit Breakers
1. Determine the maximum available
fault current from all sources, at
both the upstream and downstream breakers, by means of a
short-circuit study, appropriate
charts and/or formulas. Where
both upstream and downstream
breakers are connected to the
same bus, this will be the
same value.
2. Starting on the left at the top
and moving downward, select
the downstream Eaton breaker
that has adequate Interrupting
Capacity (IC), voltage rating and
continuous amperage rating
for the downstream breaker
application. If the required
interrupting rating, voltage rating
or amperage rating is not shown
in the table, continue downward
to the row for the next larger
breaker frame.
5. Once an upstream family of

circuit breakers is determined that
selectively coordinates, you can
find the specific breaker within
that family that meets the required
interrupting capacity by checking
the breaker product overview
tables on Pages 27.4-4 through
27.4-6.
6. OptionalOnce the selective
combination of breakers is
determined, you can determine
the type of Pow-R-Line panelboard
or switchboard assembly that can
be used.
Note: If both the upstream and downstream
breakers are to be in the same assembly,
ensure that both devices are available in the
same type Pow-R-Line assembly.
Repeat the above steps for each pair of

breakers in the system to quickly and
easily select devices that will 100%
selectively coordinate.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
3. Move horizontally from the

selected downstream breaker
trip rating to the first value of
symmetrical rms fault current
that meets or exceeds the
value of rms fault current at the
upstream breaker as determined
from Step 1.
31
4. Proceed upward to read the

possible upstream breaker
frame. Check the minimum
and maximum trip range indicated
to ensure it meets the required
upstream breaker trip rating.
If the trip rating meets the
requirements, this will be one of
the possible upstream breakers
that will selectively coordinate
with the downstream breaker.
If the indicated trip rating or
trip range does not meet the
requirements for the line side
breaker, repeat Step 3 and Step 4.
34
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 046
Application Information100% Selective Coordination
22
Table 27.3-10. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 100% Selective Coordination Combinations
Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Downstream Breaker
26
28
29
30
EG
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
J
T/M
310+
310+
310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip)
125A
100A
150A
225A
15A
60A
100A
70A
150A
250A
Maximum Trip (Frame)
125A
100A
200A
225A
80A
160A
225A
125A
225A
250A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch
3E
3a, 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed
1a, 2a, 3E
3a
Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard
Main
27
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
Branch
Sub-Feed
BR, BAB, HQP and QC (10 kA at 240 Vac) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.0
1.0
0.7
2.1
2.1
2.1
4.0
3.4
3.4
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.4
2.5
2.5
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.8
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
2.3
BRH, QPHW, QBHW and QCHW (22 kA at 240 Vac) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
31
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.0
1.0
0.7
2.1
2.1
2.1
4.0
3.4
3.4
32
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.4
2.5
2.5
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.8
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
2.3
33
34
35
GHB Family (65 kA at 240 Vac, 14 kA at 480Y/277 Vac)

20
30
50
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.8
0.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.8
2.8
2.3
0.7
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.2
1.8
2.3
1.8
2.3
2.3
1.8
1.6
1.8
2.3
36
FCL Family Current Limiting (200 kA at 240 Vac, 150 kA at 480 Vac)
37
EG Family (EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH)
100
38
39
40
Swbd
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
1.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.8
2.8
2.3
1.0
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
1.3
1.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.2
1.2
2.3
1.8
1.8
1.5
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
1.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.8
2.3
1.8
1.0
0.7
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
F Family (ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDB(150A), EHD(100A), FDE, HFDE, FDCE)
15
40
100
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1.0
1.0
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-15
Sheet 27 047

Table 27.3-10. MCCB 100% Selective Coordination Combinations (Continued)
22
Upstream Breaker
Downstream Breaker
Breaker Family
EG
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
J
T/M
310+
310+
310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
125A
100A
150A
225A
15A
60A
100A
70A
150A
250A
125A
100A
200A
225A
80A
160A
225A
125A
225A
250A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch
3E
3a, 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3E
3a
Branch
26
Sub-Feed
J Family (JDB, JD, HJD, JDC)

70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, S
4, S
4, S
LCL 250 Family Current Limiting

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
24
25
Main
23
27
28
29

200
300
400
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
K Family (KDB, KD, CKD, HKD, CHKD, KDC)

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
L Family (LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC)

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
30
31
32
33
LG Family (LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC)

250
400
600
35
LG Current Limiting Family

400
600
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
34
36
37
N Family (ND, CND, HND, CHND, NDC, CNDC, NGS, NGH, NGC)
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 048
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Breaker Family
LD
LD
LD
LD
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
Minimum Trip
(Plug/Trip)
100A
200A
400A
70A
125A
200A
300A
400A
600A
200A (OPTIM)
300A (Digi)
175A
350A
400A
125A
250A
400A
350A
500A
600A
600A
Pow-R-Line: Main
26
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
3a,4,Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
27
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
28
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.0
2.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
10
8.0
8.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
6.0
5.0
5.0
10
8.0
8.0
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
29
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
30
31
32
33
34
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.0
2.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
10
8.0
8.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
6.0
5.0
5.0
10
8.0
8.0
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
35
20
30
50
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.0
2.0
1.6
2.7
2.7
2.7
4.5
4.5
4.2
2.7
2.7
2.7
4.0
4.0
3.6
4.5
4.5
4.2
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
12
10
10
10
36
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.5
4.2
4.2
3.6
3.6
4.2
4.2
7.4
10
7.4
7.4
12
12
7.4
7.4
2.8
5.0
6.0
6.5
10
10
10
10
37
100
Swbd
38
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
2.0
2.0
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.6
5.6
5.2
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.6
4.6
4.0
5.6
5.6
5.2
20
15
10
20
15
10
35
35
18
35
35
18
39
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
2.5
2.5
5.2
5.2
5.2
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.2
5.2
5.2
10
10
10
10
10
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
5.0
5.0
3.2
3.2
2.5
2.5
4.0
3.2
3.2
5.0
4.2
4.0
4.0
10
8.3
7.0
10
8.3
7.0
7.0
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
40
41
15
40
100
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
2.0
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.3
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-17
Sheet 27 049

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
LD
LD
LD
LD
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
Minimum Trip
(Plug/Trip)
100A
200A
400A
70A
125A
200A
300A
400A
600A
200A (OPTIM)
300A (Digi)
175A
350A
400A
125A
250A
400A
350A
500A
600A
600A
Pow-R-Line: Main
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
24
25
3a,4,Swbd
4, Swbd
23
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
26
Main
Branch
27
Sub-Feed

70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
2.0
3.2
3.2
3.2
2.5
2.5
4.0
3.7
3.5
6.0
6.0
8.0
7.0
7.0
12
12
10
12
12
10
3.7
3.2
2.5
4.2
3.7
4.2
4.2
3.2
17
17
17
17
17
17
3.2
3.2
3.2
17
17
17
17
17
17
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
2.0
3.5
3.2
2.5
4.2
3.7
4.2
4.2
3.7
10
10
10
10
10
10
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
35
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
36
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

200
300
400
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
28
29
30
31

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

250
400
600
32
33
34

400
600
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
38
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350
37
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 050
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
Downstream Breaker
30
LHH
LG
LG
LG
LG
NHH
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
ETU
310+
310+
310+
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 125A
175A
225A
100A
160A
250A
600A
150A
200A
400A
250A
400A
600A
600A
350A
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
150A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4
4, Swbd
Main
29
LHH
T/M
Pow-R-Line: Branch
26
28
LHH
Pow-R-Line: Main
25
27
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
5.3
5.3
5.3
10
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
4.3
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
31
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
7.5
7.5
22
22
22
22
22
22
10
9.0
9.0
14.4
14.4
14.4
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
32
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
5.3
5.3
5.3
22
22
22
22
22
22
7.5
7.5
7.5
14.4
14.4
12
22
22
18
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
4.3
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
12
12
12
12
18
18
18
18
22
22
22
22
22
33
34
35

20
30
50
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
3.2
3.2
3.2
7.6
7.6
7.6
14
14
14
4.0
4.0
3.6
7.4
7.4
7.4
10
10
10
12.7
12.7
10
14
14
14
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
3.2
7.6
7.6
12.7
12.7
3.6
3.6
7.4
7.4
10
10
10
10
10
30
6.0
10
10
36
37
100
38
39
40
Swbd
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
10
7.5
3.2
27
14
10
65
35
18
4.6
4.6
4.0
20
15
10
35
35
18
65
65
65
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3.2
10
10
10
18
18
18
4.0
4.0
4.0
10
10
10
18
18
18
10
65
22
16
14
12
4.0
3.2
3.2
10
8.3
7.0
7.0
12
12
12
12
10
65
65
15
40
100
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
7.5
3.2
14
10
10
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-19
Sheet 27 051

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
LHH
LHH
LHH
LG
LG
LG
LG
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
ETU
310+
310+
310+
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
175A
225A
100A
160A
250A
600A
150A
200A
400A
250A
400A
600A
600A
350A
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 125A

150A
Pow-R-Line: Main
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH
4
4, Swbd
Branch
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
26
1a, 2a, 3a
3.2
7.6
7.6
12.7
10
10
2.8
2.8
8.0
7.0
7.0
12
12
10
10
12.7
10
2.8
4.2
3.2
17
17
17
10
3.2
15
15
15
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
5.0
10
10
3.5
4.2
3.7
10
10
10
6.0
6.0
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
25
Sub-Feed

70
125
250
24
Main
23
27
28
29

200
300
400
3q, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
30
31
32
33

250
400
600
35

400
600
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
34
36
37
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 052
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
26
27
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
400A
400A
400A
600A
800A
800A
800A
800A
1000A
1200A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
800A
1000A
1200A
1600A
2000A
2500A
Pow-R-Line: Main
4,
Swbd
4,
Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
28
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
29
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
30
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
31
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
32
33
34
35
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
36
37
20
30
50
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
38
100
Swbd
39
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
40
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
42
35
35
42
35
35
42
35
35
42
35
35
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
50
42
35
30
50
42
35
30
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
F Family (ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDB [150A], EHD [100A], FDE, HFDE, FDCE)
41
42
15
40
100
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a,4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
50
42
35
30
50
42
35
30
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-21
Sheet 27 053

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
400A
400A
400A
600A
800A
800A
800A
800A
1000A
1200A
800A
1000A
1200A
1600A
2000A
2500A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
Pow-R-Line: Main
4,
Swbd
4,
Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
4, Swbd
23
24
25
26
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
27
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
28

70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
65
65
50
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
22
18
22
18
22
18
18
22
18
18
42
40
35
42
35
42
40
35
42
40
35
65
65
50
65
65
50
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
42
35
30
42
35
30
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
50
35
30
50
35
30
36
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
25
25
25
35
30
35
30
35
30
50
42
50
42
50
42
37
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
50
35
30
50
35
30
38
29

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
31

200
300
400
3q, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
30
32

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

250
400
600
33
34
35

400
600
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
12
12
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
22
22
22
18
25
25
25
18
4, Swbd
12
16
16
16
16
22
25
39
40
NHH Family
350
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 054
Application Information0.1 Sec Selective Coordination
23
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

Combinations0.1 Second
24
For 0.1 Second Selective Coordination

ApplicationsTable 27.3-11
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
The left side columns list the

amperages of the downstream
breaker grouped by the available
breaker frames. The next columns on
the right of the amperages indicate the
type of Pow-R-Line panelboards and/
or switchboard that the given downstream breaker is available in and
whether the breaker may be used in
that assembly as a main, feeder or
sub-feed breaker.
The top rows of the table list the
amperages of the upstream breaker
grouped by the available breaker
frames. The next row below indicates
the type of trip unit needed:
T/M = Thermal-Magnetic
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
ETU = Electronic Trip Unit

For ETUs, the next rows indicate the
specific type of Digitrip RMS trip unit
and/or OPTIM trip unit available.
The minimum trip/maximum trip
rows indicate the amperage range for
which the indicated selectivity is valid.
The next rows below the minimum/
maximum trip indicate the type of
Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or
switchboard that the given upstream
breaker is available in and whether the
breaker may be used in that assembly
as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker.
The letter T at the intersection
of a row and column indicates that
0.1 second selective coordination
can be achieve between the chosen
downstream and upstream circuit
breakers up to the maximum
interrupting rating of the
downstream breaker.
Steps in Determining 0.1 Second Selective

Coordination Between Line and Load Side
Circuit Breakers
1. Determine the maximum available
fault current from all sources, at
both the upstream and downstream breakers, by means of a
short-circuit study, appropriate
charts and/or formulas. Where
both line and load breakers are
connected to the same bus, this
will be the same value.
2. Starting on the left at the top and
moving downward, select the
downstream Eaton breaker
that has adequate Interrupting
Capacity (IC), voltage rating and
continuous amperage rating for the
downstream breaker application.
If the required interrupting rating,
voltage rating, or amperage rating
is not shown in the table, continue
downward to the row for the next
larger breaker frame.
5. Once an upstream family of

circuit breakers is determined that
selectively coordinates, you can
find the specific breaker within
that family that meets the required
interrupting capacity by checking
the breaker product overview
tables on Pages 27.4-4 through
27.4-6.
6. OptionalOnce the selective
combination of breakers is
determined, you can determine
the type of Pow-R-Line panelboard
or switchboard assembly that can
be used.
Note: If both the upstream and downstream
breakers are to be in the same assembly,
ensure that both devices are available in the
same type Pow-R-Line assembly.
Repeat the above steps for each pair

of breakers in the system to quickly
and easily select devices that will
selectively coordinate to 0.1 seconds.
3. Move horizontally from the

selected downstream breaker
trip rating to the first column that
indicates T. (T indicates that
0.1 second selective coordination
can be achieved between the
chosen downstream and
upstream circuit breakers up to
the maximum interrupting rating
of the downstream breaker.)
4. Proceed upward to read the
possible upstream breaker
frame. Check the minimum
and maximum trip range indicated
to ensure it meets the required
upstream breaker trip rating.
If the trip rating meets the
requirements, this will be one of
the possible upstream breakers
that will selectively coordinate
with the downstream breaker. If
the indicated trip rating or trip
range does not meet the requirements for the line side breaker,
repeat Step 3 and Step 4.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-23
Sheet 27 055

Table 27.3-11. MCCB 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Combinations
22
Upstream Breaker
Downstream Breaker
Breaker Family
EG
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
F
ETU
310+
310+
310+
310+
310+
310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
125A
100A
150A
175A
50A
80A
100A
150A
200A
225A
125A
100A
150A
225A
160A
225A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Pow-R-Line: Branch
3E
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Branch
24
25
26
Main
23
Sub-Feed
BR, BAB, HQP and QC (240 Vac, 10 kA) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27
28
29
30
BRH, QPHW, QBHW and QCHW (240 Vac, 22 kA) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
34

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
35
36
15
40
50
100
33
37

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
39
40
Note: T = Selectivity to 0.1 seconds is achieved with available fault current values up to the full AIC rating of the breaker.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 056
22
Table 27.3-11. MCCB 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Combinations (Continued)

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Downstream Breaker
26
28
29
EG
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310+
310+
310+
310+
310+
310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
125A
100A
150A
175A
50A
80A
100A
150A
200A
225A
125A
100A
150A
225A
160A
225A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3E
Pow-R-Line: Branch
3E
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Main
27
Breaker Family
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
30
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
31
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
32
33

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
34
35
36
37
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
38
39
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
40
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
41
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
42
43
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-25
Sheet 27 057

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
70A
150A
250A
100A
200A
400A
70A
100A
125A
150A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
3a
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
23
24
25
26
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
27
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
28
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
29
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
GD Family (65 kA at 240 Vac, 22 kA at 80 Vac)
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
37
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
39
40
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
41
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
42
CA08104001E
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 058
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
70A
150A
250A
100A
200A
400A
70A
100A
125A
150A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch
26
Downstream Breaker
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
3a
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
36
100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
37
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
38
39
40
41
42
43
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-27
Sheet 27 059

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
T/M
310
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
200A
225A
250A
300A
400A
300A
400A
600A
Pow-R-Line: Main
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Branch
24
25
26
Main
23
Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27
28
29
30
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
34

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
37
38
39
40

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CA08104001E
35
36
15
40
50
100
33
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 060
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
26
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
T/M
310
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
200A
225A
250A
300A
400A
300A
400A
600A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Main
29
ETU
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
28
Type Trip Unit
Pow-R-Line: Main
25
27
Breaker Family
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
30
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
33

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
34
35
36
37
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
38
39
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
40
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
41
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
42
43
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-29
Sheet 27 061

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
LG
LG
LG
LG
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310(+)
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
300A
Pow-R-Line: Main
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
N
ETU
310(+)
550, 1050 550, 1050
400A
600A
250A 300A 400A 500A 400A
600A
600A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4, Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
Branch
24
25
26
Main
23
Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27
28
29
30
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
34

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
37
38
39
40

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CA08104001E
35
36
15
40
50
100
33
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 062
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
Downstream Breaker
LG
LG
LG
LG
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310(+)
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
300A
400A
600A
250A 300A 400A 500A 400A
600A
N
ETU
310(+)
550, 1050 550, 1050
600A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4, Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
Main
29
ETU
Pow-R-Line: Branch
26
28
Type Trip Unit
Pow-R-Line: Main
25
27
Breaker Family
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
30
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
33

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
34
35
36
37
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
38
39
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
40
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
41
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
42
43
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-31
Sheet 27 063

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310(+)
310(+)
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050 550, 1050 510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
800A
1000A
800A
1000A
1200A
1200A
Pow-R-Line: Main
PRL4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
24
25
26
Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
23
Swbd
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
27
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
28
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
29
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
37
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
39
40
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
41
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
42
CA08104001E
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 064
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310(+)
310(+)
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050 550, 1050 510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
800A
1000A
800A
1000A
1200A
1200A
Pow-R-Line: Main
PRL4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
26
Downstream Breaker
PRL4, Swbd
Swbd
Swbd
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
36
100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
37
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
39
40
41
42
43
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-33
Sheet 27 065

22
Upstream Breaker
Downstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
1600A
2000A
2500A
Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Swbd
25
26
Main
Branch
24
Pow-R-Line: Main
23
Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27
28
29
30
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
34

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
37
38
39
40

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CA08104001E
35
36
15
40
50
100
33
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 066
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
26
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
1600A
2000A
2500A
Swbd
Swbd
Main
29
ETU
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
28
Type Trip Unit
Pow-R-Line: Main
25
27
Breaker Family
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
30
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
33

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
34
35
36
37
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
39
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
41
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
42
43
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-35
Sheet 27 067
Application InformationArc Flash
Electric Arc Flash Hazards

There have been several recent codes
and standards regulations that relate
to the fundamental dangers of arc
flash energy. The following provides
a brief overview.
The NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical
Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces presents numerous
requirements for a wide range of
topics such as electrical equipment,
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE),
lockout/tagout practices and safety
training. Where it has been determined that work will be performed
within the flash protection boundary,
NFPA 70E requires an analysis to
determine and document the flash
hazard incident energy exposure
of a worker. This document also
contains some of the initial methods
developed in order to quantify the
incident energy.
The Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) is the governmental enforcement agency whose
mission is to save lives, prevent
injuries and protect the health of
Americas workers. They refer to their
standard Code of Federal Regulations,
CFR 1910.333, Selection and Use
of Work Practices, which states
Safety-related work practices shall
be employed to prevent electric shock
or other injuries resulting from either
direct or indirect electrical contacts,
when work is performed near or on
equipment or circuits which are or
may be energized. This general
statement provides the basis for
OSHAs citing and insisting upon
compliance with the arc flash requirements contained in NFPA 70E.
The 2002 edition of the National
Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70,
contained the first arc flash hazard
references by adding the following
new requirement as Article 110.16.
Flash Protection. Switchboards,
panelboards, industrial control
panels, and motor control centers that
are in other than dwelling occupancies
and are likely to require examination,
adjustment, servicing or maintenance
while energized, shall be field marked
to warn qualified persons of potential
electric arc flash hazards. The marking
shall be located so as to be clearly
visible to qualified persons before
examination adjustment, servicing,
or maintenance of the equipment.
CA08104001E
22
3.50
(88.9)
23
DANGER
24
ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARD

Will cause severe
injury or death.
2.75
(69.8)
Turn OFF ALL power

before opening. Follow
ALL requirements in
NFPA 70E for safe
work practices and for
Personal Protective
Equipment.
Note to installer: Apply label as required by 2002 NEC Art. 110.16.
If desired, additional labels may be purchased through your local
EATON representative.
25
3.25
(82.5)
26
27
0.50
(12.7)
28
29
30
Figure 27.3-5. Electric Arc Flash Hazard

FPN No. 1: NFPA 70E-2000, Electrical
Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces, provides assistance in
determining severity of potential
exposure, planing safe work
practices, and selecting personal
protective equipment.
FPN No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-1998,
Product Safety Signs and Labels,
provides guidelines for the design of
safety signs and labels for application
to products.
There were numerous proposals
for the 2005 NEC that would expand
this requirement to indicate the
incident energy in calories per
square centimeter for a worker at a
distance of 18 in. Adoption of this
requirement would indicate the
need for a standardized method for
determining incident energy.
The IEEE 1584-2002, Guide for
Performing Arc Flash Calculations,
provides a method for the calculation
of incident energy and arc flash
protection boundaries. It presents
formulas for numerically quantifying
these values. The IEEE 1584 Guide
also includes an Excel spreadsheet
Arc Flash Hazard Calculator that
performs the actual calculations using
the formulas stated in the Guide.
The hazard analysis cited in NFPA 70E

requires calculations of the incident
energy available at a given location.
This energy is calculated in cal/cm 2
and, based on amount of energy available, a risk category is assigned, and
based on that risk category, certain
levels of PPE are required. These risk
categories are designed to limit worker
injuries to second degree burns that
occur at energy levels of 1.2 cal/cm 2.
The calculations have two components:
1) magnitude fault current and
2) duration of the fault. The specifics
of the formulas are beyond the scope
of this discussion, but several factors
included in the calculations need
understanding. Faster clearing times
significantly reduce the incident
arc flash energy.
The third factor affecting arc flash
incident energy exposure to personnel
is the distance the person is from the
arc flash location.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 068
Application InformationArc Flash
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Selected models of Eatons moldedcase circuit breakers are available with

an Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System to provide reduced levels of
incident arc flash energy when put in
the Maintenance Mode.
System is available on Magnum power
circuit breakers, NRX power circuit
breakers and select Series G moldedcase circuit breakers. In Series G
molded-case breakers, the trip unit
combines Eatons Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System with the Digitrip
310+ electronic trip unit, allowing for
the ability to place the trip unit in
Maintenance Mode to reduce potential
arc flash energy. This is done by a
dedicated instantaneous sensing circuit
with settings of 2.5 and 4.0 times the
current rating of the trip unit. This
dedicated analog sensing circuit
delivers breaker clearing times that
are faster than instantaneous by
eliminating microprocessor processing
latencies. This provides superior
arc flash reduction to competitors
systems that simply lower the standard
instantaneous pickup set point.
When the Eaton Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System is enabled, the
resulting reduced arc flash energy
allows for reduced PPE, which
improves worker comfort and
mobility. With the Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System set at 2.5X or
4.0X, it reduces incident energy levels
to allow PPE Category 0 for currents of
2.5X or 4.0X the breaker ampere rating
or greater. The initial setting of each
System trip unit is determined by
completing a power system analysis,
to assess available fault current at the
circuit breaker. Based on that analysis,
the Maintenance Mode protection
settings are defined, achieving a
reduced level of arc flash energy.
The Maintenance Mode is then
activated by adjusting the trip units
instantaneous setting to desired
Maintenance Mode levels determined
by the power analysis.
Current in Amperes
1
10
100
1K
1000
100
10
480V Feeder
Magnum DS, RMS 520M
Trip 1600.0A
Plug 1600.0A
Setting Phase
LTPU (0.4-1.0 x P) 1 (1600A)
LTD (2-24 Sec.) 12
STPU (2-12 x LTPU) 6 (9600A)
STD (0.1-0.5 Sec.) 0.2 (l 2t In)
INST (2-12 x P) M1 (12) (19,200A)
10K
1000
100
480V Feeder
ARMS
Trip 1600.0A
Plug 1600.0A
Settings ARMS
ARMS 2.5 (4000A)
10
Time in Seconds
28
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
1
Motor
700.0 hp
0.10 Eatons Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System Gives
Clearing Times That Are
Faster Than Instantaneous
0.10
0.01
0.5
10
100
1K
0.01
10K
Figure 27.3-6. Time Current Curve
Series G MCCB Features
Close-Up of LG Trip Unit
Available with ALSI and ALSIG

electronic trip unit
Dedicated analog trip circuit for
faster than instantaneous tripping
Superior arc flash reduction
over systems that simply lower
the standard instantaneous
pickup set point
Adjustable pickup settings
(2.5x, 4.0x)
Local or remote initiation
Maintenance Mode LED
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-37
Sheet 27 069
Application InformationUnusual Environmental Conditions
Unusual Environmental Conditions

Trip Unit Temperatures
Eatons thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers are temperature sensitive.
At ambient temperatures below 40C
(104F), circuit breakers carry more
current than their continuous current
rating. Nuisance tripping is not a problem under these lower temperature
conditions, although consideration
should be given to closer protection
coordination to compensate for the
additional current carrying capability.
In addition, the actual mechanical
operation of the breaker could be
affected if the ambient temperature is
significantly below the 40C standard.
For ambient temperatures above
40C, breakers will carry less current
than their continuous current rating.
This condition promotes nuisance
tripping and can create unacceptable
temperature conditions at the terminals.
Under this condition, the circuit breaker
should be recalibrated for the higher
ambient temperature.
Electronic trip units are insensitive to
ambient temperatures within a certain
temperature range. The temperature
range for most Eaton electronic trip
units is 20 to 55C (4 to 131F).
However, at very low ambient
temperatures, the mechanical parts
of the breaker could require special
treatment, such as the use of special
lubricants. If the ambient temperature
exceeds 40C significantly, damage
to the electronic circuitry and other
components could result. Eaton
includes temperature protective
circuits in its designs to initiate a
tripping operation and provide
self-protection, should the internal
temperature rise to an unsafe level.
Circuit Breaker Temperatures

The temperature of the air surrounding a circuit breaker is the ambient
temperature. In the mid-1960s, industry
standards were changed to make all
standard breakers calibrated to a 40C
ambient temperature. For any ambient
temperature application above or below
40C, it is recommended that the
breaker manufacturer be consulted as
to any possible re-rating, recalibration
or special procedures, before the
circuit breaker is selected and applied.
CA08104001E
Table 27.3-12. Derating for Non-Compensated

Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Calibrated for 40C
Breaker Ampere
Rating at 40C
Ampere Rating
25C
(77F)
50C
(122F)
60C
(140F)
F-Frame/EG-Frame
15
20
25
17
22
32
13
18
21
11
16
18
30
35
40
33
41
45
27
32
34
24
27
29
50
60
70
55
66
77
46
56
65
42
52
60
90
100
125
150
99
110
137
165
84
94
116
138
78
87
105
125
GD-Frame
15
20
25
14
19
24
13
18
22
30
35
40
28
33
38
27
31
36
45
50
60
43
48
57
40
45
54
70
80
90
100
67
76
86
96
63
72
81
91
70
90
100
79
102
115
63
81
89
55
71
76
125
150
175
140
171
200
114
134
156
102
116
134
200
225
250
230
252
281
178
205
227
153
183
201
100
125
150
121
145
188
90
116
132
79
106
111
175
200
225
210
243
255
159
180
212
141
157
198
250
300
350
400
294
364
412
471
230
270
322
368
208
236
291
333
J-Frame/JG-Frame
K-Frame
Humidity/MoistureCorrosion
Molded-case circuit breakers are
suited for operation in 0 to 95% noncondensing humidity environments. As
is the case with all electrical equipment,
application in a condition or environment above this humidity level should
be avoided. The ability of molded-case
circuit breakers to perform their protective function is negatively affected by
exposure to condensation or water,
as well as the minerals, particles and
contaminants that may be present in
them. Prolonged humidity exposure
and/or the presence of corrosive
elements can result in damage to key
operating components and/or severely
compromise the breakers operational
integrity. It may adversely impact
breaker contact condition and reduce the
insulation and dielectric properties of the
circuit breaker. In electronic trip circuit
breakers, functionality may be similarly
compromised by these conditions. To
prevent these effects, the breaker should
be protected by the proper NEMA rated
enclosure for its installation environment, and kept dry through the use of
space heaters in the enclosure. If such
operating conditions cannot be met,
special treatment of the circuit breaker
should be considered to minimize the
possibility of operational problems.
Most Eaton molded-case circuit breaker
cases are molded from glass polyester
that does not support the growth of
fungus. In addition, a special moistureand fungus-resisting treatment is
recommended for any parts that are
susceptible to the growth of fungus.
Altitude
Low voltage circuit breakers must be
progressively derated for voltage,
current carrying and interrupting rating
at altitudes above 6000 ft (1829m). The
thinner air at higher altitudes reduces
cooling and dielectric characteristics
compared to the denser air found at
lower altitudes. Refer to Eaton for
additional application details.
Shock/Vibration
L-Frame/LG-Frame
300
350
400
330
385
440
276
325
372
252
301
340
500
600
550
660
468
564
435
525
300
350
400
332
388
444
277
322
368
252
292
334
450
500
600
495
550
660
418
468
564
383
435
525
700
800
770
880
658
754
613
704
M-Frame
Where high shock is an anticipated

condition, hi-shock Navy MIL-SPEC
type breakers are recommended.
Molded-case circuit breakers can be
supplied to meet the following marine
specifications, several of which require
vibration testing: U.S. Coast Guard
CFR 46, ABSAmerican Bureau of
Shipping, IEEE 45, UL 489 Supplement
SA Marine, UL 489 Supplemental SB
Naval, ABS/NVR, Lloyds of London
and DNV. See Page 27.2-20 for
additional information on Navy
MIL-SPEC and marine circuit breakers.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 070
Application InformationReverse-Feed Applications
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Reverse-Feed Application
of Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers may be applied in
panelboard, switchboard or motor
control center installations where
there may occasionally be multiple
sources of power, as shown in
Figure 27.3-7. For example, these
may be applications that require
high uptime and high reliability
requirements. For these requirements, permanent, fixed mount or
portable electrical generator systems,
with an appropriate automatic transfer
switching system, are made available
to supplement the normal utility
power supply source. In other
instances, the second power source
may be from a so-called alternate
energy source, such as that derived
from solar photovoltaic or from wind
power electric systems. Similarly,
these alternate energy sources are
also typically connected as a supplement to the normal utility power
sources. As electrical load demand
conditions change, the user may
switch between using power from the
normal utility source to the alternate
power source, and vice versa. Whenever this switch in power source
occurs, the terminals of the circuit
breaker that the power is connected to
will have been reversed. This reversal
in the way that power is connected to
a circuit breaker is called reversefeed. Reverse-feed (or back feed)
refers to a way that the conductors
supplying current are connected to a
circuit breaker.
This Circuit Breaker May Be
Reverse-Fed Depending on
Its Connection to Either of the
Utility Power Sources
Utility #1
52 NC
NO
Bus #1
52
Utility #2
52 NC
Bus #2
52
52
Load
Load
In other applications where there is a

single power source, circuit breakers
may be mounted in an electrical
enclosure where the cables from the
power source are fed to the bottom
of the enclosure. In this case, it may
be a matter of convenience for the
installation to simply connect the
power source conductors to the
terminals at the bottom of the
circuit breaker that are closest to the
incoming power supply conductors.
This connection of the power supply
source to the circuit breakers
bottom terminals will also result
in power being applied in a reversefeed manner.
There are different classifications
and types of circuit breakers that
exist, and they should be carefully
considered when used in reversefeed applications described above.
Depending on the type of circuit
breaker, as listed below, reversefeeding of that circuit breaker
may or may not be suitable for
that application.
Circuit Breaker Classifications

Low voltage circuit breakers fall into
two basic classifications of design.
Testing Requirements
Per UL 489, Paragraph 7.1.1.18: Except
for single-pole circuit breakers tested
singly, if a circuit breaker is not marked
Line and Load, one sample of
each set tested, or one additional
sample, shall be connected with the
line and load connections reversed
during the overload, endurance and
interrupting tests.
This UL test requirement specifies that
for circuit breakers and molded-case
switches to be UL Listed for reversefeed applications, samples shall be
tested with the line and load terminals
reverse-fed, as shown in Figure 27.3-8,
and that the test results shall be the
same as those of normally fed
circuit breakers.
Depending on the design configuration and construction, the circuit
breaker may or may not be affected by
the application of power in a reversefeed connection during these tests.
Top Side
of Circuit
Breaker
Power
Source
Load
Connected to
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker
1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

(MCCBs) per UL 489 Standard
2. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
(LVPCBs) per UL 1066 Standard
Circuit
Breaker
Standards Requirements
UL 489Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,
Molded-Case Switches and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures
Per UL 489, there are clear test
performance and marking requirements for circuit breakers and
molded-case switches that are
UL listed as being suitable for
reverse-feed applications. UL 489
requires reverse-feed circuit breakers
to meet certain construction requirements, and to be tested and marked
accordingly, as follows:
Power
Source
Connected
to Bottom
Side of
Circuit Breaker
Load
Bottom Side
of Circuit
Breaker
Figure 27.3-8. Circuit Breaker Connections

for Reverse-Feed Testing per UL 489
1. Tested per UL 489,

Paragraph 7.1.1.18
2. Markings per UL 489,
Paragraph 9.1.1.13
42
43
Figure 27.3-7. Circuit Breaker Fed from

Multiple Power Supply Sources
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-39
Sheet 27 071

Marking Requirements
MCCB General Rule
PCB General Rule
Per UL 489 Paragraph 9.1.1.13: Circuit

breakers shall be marked Line and
Load unless the construction and
test results are acceptable with the line
and load connections reversed.
This marking requirement specifies
that UL listed circuit breakers and
molded-case switches shall be marked
with the word Line on one end of
the circuit breaker and the word
Load on the other end, as shown
in Figure 27.3-9, if they are unable to
successfully meet the reverse-feed test
requirements per Paragraph 7.1.1.18
of UL 489. Conversely, a UL listed
circuit breaker does not have to be
marked with Line and Load if it
successfully meets the reverified test
requirements.
Cannot be reverse-fed:
When a UL listed molded-case
circuit breaker and a molded-case
switch (not shown) are marked
showing Line and Load, the
power supply conductors must be
connected to the end marked
Line. These devices cannot be
reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
If Line and Load are not
marked on the UL listed moldedcase circuit breaker, the power
supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These
devices are suitable for reversefeed applications
UL 1066Low Voltage AC and DC Power

Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
As part of the standard test programs
required by UL 1066 (referenced to
ANSI/IEEE C37.50-1989) for low
voltage power circuit breakers, tests
are conducted that, when successfully
completed, demonstrate that the
circuit breaker may be applied in a
reverse-feed configuration.
These are mandatory tests that
are done as part of the short-circuit
current tests per Table 3 in Sequence II
(Power-Operated Circuit Breaker
with Dual Trip Device) of ANSI/IEEE
C37.50-1989. As part of this sequence,
tests are to be performed with
opposite terminals energized.
Figure 27.3-9. Circuit Breakers Showing

Line and Load Markings, per UL 489
During these specified sequences of

tests, the circuit breaker is energized
in a reverse-feed configuration, and
the satisfactory completion of these
tests demonstrates their ability to
be used in reverse-feed applications.
Therefore, all low voltage power
circuit breakers that are listed per
UL 1066 may be reverse-fed.
Can be reverse-fed:
that are listed per UL 1066 may be
reverse-fed
Special Application Considerations

Circuit Breakers With Integral
Ground-Fault Protection
Many of Eatons UL listed molded-case
and low voltage power circuit breakers
have design options and schemes
that allow for the detection and
interruption of unwanted groundfault currents. In these ground-fault
protection schemes, the means for
ground-fault detection are either
integral to the circuit breaker or
externally mounted.
The ground-fault detection means
commonly consist of current sensors
and control logic circuitry that may be
connected in various configurations
as follows:
1. Separate current sensors that
monitor each phase circuit and
the neutral circuit conductors, as
shown in Figure 27.3-10
2. One current sensor that monitors
all phases and the neutral circuit
conductors together (not shown)
3. One current sensor that monitors
the ground circuit conductor
(not shown)
The interruption of ground-fault
currents is done by the circuit breaker
opening all three-phase conductor
circuits at the same time, in response
to a trip signal from the ground-fault
detection means.
Therefore, whenever an unwanted
ground-fault condition exists, a UL
listed circuit breaker with ground-fault
protection will detect and interrupt the
ground-fault current flow.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 072

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers with External Ground-Fault/
Earth Leakage Accessories
22
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker
23
24
Power
Source
Circuit
Breaker
Three-Phase
Current Sensors
26
Electronic
Trip Unit
27
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
There are ground-fault current detection schemes that

require sensitivity down to relatively low current levels,
typically as low as 30 mA. These products are called
ground-fault/earth leakage modules.
Neutral Circuit
Current Sensor
25
29
Neutral
Circuit
Conductor
Load
Control Logic
Circuitry
Ground-Fault
Detection Means
Figure 27.3-10. Circuit Breaker with Integral Ground-Fault Protection

In reverse-feed applications, while the primary phase
currents and the ground currents have been interrupted
with the opening of the circuit breaker, voltage at the circuit
breakers terminals may or may not cause damage to the
components of the ground-fault protection system. If
components in the detection means or control logic circuitry
of the ground-fault (or the phase current) protection system
may be damaged by reverse-feed connections, then the
circuit breaker must be marked accordingly. In this case,
where the circuit breaker with ground-fault protection is not
suitable for reverse-feed applications, the circuit breakers
terminals are marked with Line and Load to indicate the
required terminal connection points for the power supply
source (Line) and the load (Load).
Conversely, there are Eaton circuit breaker design configurations where the components in the ground-fault (or phase
current) protection system are unaffected by reverse-feed
connections, and are suitable for those applications. These
circuit breakers are not marked with Line and Load, to
indicate that they are suitable for reverse-feed connections
the power supply source may be connected to the terminals
at either end of the circuit breaker.
A circuit breaker with integral ground-fault protection may
be reverse fed if it is not marked with Line and Load.
The UL listed mark that is applied on this circuit breaker
with integral ground-fault protection indicates that it has
successfully met the UL test requirements for reversefeed applications.
Figure 27.3-11. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers with

Earth Leakage Modules
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are available with
UL listed ground-fault (earth leakage) modules that are
typically mounted external to the bottom end of the
circuit breaker, as shown in Figure 27.3-11. These modules
are self-contained with a current sensor and logic control
circuitry all located inside the product. Depending on the
design configuration and construction of these earth leakage
modules, some of these products may or may not be
suitable for reverse-feed applications. Each product is
marked with a label containing text that describes their
suitability for reverse-feed applications, as shown in
Figure 27.3-12 and Figure 27.3-13.
General Rule
When either a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, or the earth leakage module is
marked as unsuitable for reverse-feed, the power supply
conductors MUST be connected to the Line end of the
circuit breaker. These devices cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
If Line and Load are not marked on the UL listed
circuit breaker, and the earth leakage module is marked
as suitable for reverse-feed, the power supply conductors
may be connected to either end. These devices are
suitable for reverse-feed applications
General Rule
40
41
42
43
When a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, the power supply conductors must
be connected to the end marked Line. These devices
cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These devices are suitable for
reverse-feed applications
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-41
Sheet 27 073
Miniature Circuit Breakers with Integral Ground-Fault

and Arcing-Fault Protection
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are available with UL
listed ground-fault current protection levels that are able to
detect and trip on ground-fault currents as low as 5 mA for
personnel protection, and at 30 mA for sensitive electrical
equipment. Eaton also has circuit breakers that provide
low-level 30 mA arcing-fault protection in residential
applications. The constructions of these circuit breakers
are typically in a single-pole or two-pole configuration, and
with continuous ampere ratings of 15100A. Due to their
relative small size and low continuous ampere ratings, these
types of molded-case circuit breakers are commonly called
miniature circuit breakers.
The 5 mA designs for personnel protection are known as
ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCI)
The 30 mA designs for equipment protection are known
as ground-fault equipment protectors (GFEP)
The circuit breaker designs for arcing-fault protection are
known as arc-fault circuit interrupters (AFCI)
Figure 27.3-12. Earth Leakage Module Suitable for

Reverse-Feed Applications
While the overall performance of the circuit breaker is

governed by UL 489 for molded-case circuit breakers, the
specific 5 mA personnel protection performance is per
UL 943 ground-fault circuit interrupters, and the specific
30 mA performance for sensitive electrical equipment is per
UL 1053, ground-fault sensing and relaying equipment. The
AFCI performance requirements are governed by UL 1699.
Figure 27.3-13. Earth Leakage Modules Not Suitable for

Reverse-Feed Applications
Note: The only acceptable combination of circuit breakers and earth
leakage modules that should be used in reverse-feed applications is
where BOTH 1) the circuit breaker is not marked Line and Load,
and 2) the earth leakage module is not marked Line and Load,
and not marked Do not reverse-feed.
For these AFCI, GFCI and GFEP ground-fault protection

designs, when the circuit breaker is closed, the control
power for the groundfault control logic circuitry is typically
connected to the Load side of the circuit breaker. Whenever a ground-fault condition occurs, the detection means
and control logic circuit will operate and cause the circuit
breakers main current-carrying contacts to open without
any intentional delay, and will interrupt the flow of the fault
current. This instantaneous trip minimizes electrical shock
hazards to personnel in GFCIs, and minimizes the flow of
potentially damaging currents to sensitive electrical equipment in GFEP applications. In addition to the interruption of
the ground-fault current, the detection means and control
logic circuitry also rely on the main current-carrying contacts
to open and disconnect the currents that flow though the
detection and trip system.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 074
22
23
24
If power is applied to the Line terminals, and the load is

connected to the Load terminals in a normal feed
configuration, whenever the circuit breaker trips and the
main current-carrying contacts open, the ground-fault
current is interrupted and control power is also
disconnected from the detection means and control
logic circuitry of the ground-fault system, as shown
in Figure 27.3-14.
25
Power
Source
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker
Neutral
Circuit
Conductor
Voltage Still
Present
Circuit
Breaker
Ground
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
Ground-Fault
Detection Means and
Control Logic Circuitry
Control Power
Connection for Control
Logic Circuitry
No Voltage
Present
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
Load
Circuit
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Contacts Open
Ground-Fault
Detection Means and
Control Logic Circuitry
Circuit Breaker
Contacts Open
28
29
Power
Source
Ground
Figure 27.3-14. Miniature AFCI, GFCI and GFEP Circuit Breaker

Connected in Normal Feed Configuration
When the circuit breaker trips and control power is
disconnected from the control logic circuitry, no further
current flows through the control logic circuitry to ground.
On the other hand, if power is applied to the Load
terminals, whenever the AFCI, GFCI, and GFEP circuit
breaker trips and the main current-carrying contacts open,
the ground-fault current is interrupted, but control power
continues to be applied to the ground-fault detection and
control logic circuit of the ground-fault system, as shown
in Figure 27.3-15. The presence of the control power will
cause current to continually flow through the control logic
circuitry. The effect of this continuous current may or
may not degrade the performance of the control logic
circuitry over time.
Control Power
Connection for Control
Logic Circuitry
Load
Figure 27.3-15. Miniature AFCI, GFCI and GFEP Circuit Breaker

Connected in Reverse-Feed Configuration
Depending on the design configuration, the ground-fault
detection means and control logic circuit of AFCI, GFCI,
and GFEP miniature circuit breakers may be affected by
this reverse-feed application. If the AFCI, GFCI and GFEP
circuit breaker is not able to be connected and applied in a
reverse-feed configuration, the terminals will be marked
Line and Load.
General Rule
When a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, the power supply conductors MUST
be connected to the end marked Line. These devices
cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These devices are suitable to
be reverse-feed applications
Summary
Molded-case circuit breakers, UL listed per UL 489, have
specific test and marking requirements to demonstrate that
the circuit breaker is suitable for reverse-feed applications.
The capabilities of UL 1066 listed low voltage power circuit
breakers for reverse-feed applications are verified as part of
standard circuit breaker test sequences.
If a circuit breaker and molded-case switch are
marked Line and Load, it is not suitable for
reverse-feed applications
Only circuit breakers and molded-case switches
without Line and Load markings are suitable
for reverse-feed applications
Note: Warningfor all types of Eatons circuit breakers, do not

connect the power source to circuit breaker terminals marked Load.
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-43
Sheet 27 075

Table 27.3-13. Reverse-Feed ApplicationsEatons Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Types Suitable for Reverse Feed
Circuit Breaker Types Not Suitable for Reverse Feed
Thermal-Magnetic QUICKLAG and Residential Breakers
GFCI, GFEP
BW, BWH, BWHH, CSR, CSH
AFCI
CA, CAH, CC, CCH, CHH
BABRP, BABSP, BRRP, CLRP
EB, EHB
GHBS, GBHS, GHQRSP
FB, HFB, FB TRI-PAC
KA, HKA
JA
KB, HKB
JB
LA, HLA
LBB, DA
LB, HLB
LAB
MA, HMA, MD
LC, HLC, etc.
NB, HNB
MC, HMC, etc.; MDS
PB
NC, HNC, etc.
LA, NB, PB TRI-PACs
PC, PCC, PCCG, PCF, PCCF, etc.
JD, HJD, JDC,
SPB
KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD
FCL, LCL
LD, HLD, LDC
SPCB
MDL, HMDL
GB, GHB, GC, GHC, GD, GD-K
JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX frames with interchangeable trip unit
LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU with interchangeable trip unit
EHD, EHD-K, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FD-K
GMCP
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
HMCP, HMCPE
JD, HJD, JDC sealed breakers
ELFD, ELHFD, ELFDC
JDB, HJDB, JDCB, JDB-K, HJDB-K
ELKD, ELHKD, ELKDC
DK, DK-K
ELJD, ELHJD, ELJDC
KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD sealed breakers
GHBGFEP, GHCGFEP
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
KDB, HKDB, KDCB, CKDB, CHKDB

KDB-K, HKDB-K
LD, HLD, LDC sealed breakers
33
LDB, HLDB, LDCB, CLDB, CHLDB, CLDCB

LDB-K, HLDB-K
34
MDL, HMDL sealed breakers

MDLB, HMDLB, CMDLB, CHMDLB
MDLB-K, HMDLB-K
35
ND, HND, NDC, NDU, CND, CHND, CNDC

ND-K, HND-K, NGS, NGH, NGC, NGU, NGK
RD, RDC, CRD, CRDC, RD-K, RD-N, RGH, RGC, RGK
E125, EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH, EGC
E125K, EGK switches
J250, JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX sealed breakers
36
37
J250K, JGK switches

L630, LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX sealed breakers
L630K, LGK switches
38
Magnum DS, Magnum SB, DS, DSII
39
Series NRX
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 076
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-1
Sheet 27 077
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breaker Overview Tables
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
25
26
Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors
27
Table 27.4-1. Eatons QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit Breaker
Type Code
HQP
HQP
HQP
QPHW
QPHW
QPHW
QHPX
QHPX
QHPX
QHPW
QHPW
QHPW
QPGF
QPGF
QPHGF
QPHGF
QPGFEP
QPGFEP
QPHGFEP
BABRSP
BABRSP
BRRP
BRRP
CLRP
CLRP
BAB
BAB
BAB
BABRP
BABRP
QBAF
QBCAF
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
QBHAF
QBHCAF
HBAX
HBAX
HBAX
HBAW
HBAW
HBAW
QBGF
QBGF
QBHGF
QBHGF
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P, GF
P, GF
P, GF
P, GF
P, GFEP
P, GFEP
P, GFEP
B
B
P
P
P
P
B
B
B
B
B
B, AF
B, AF, GF
B
B
B
B, AF
B, AF
B
B
B
B
B
B
B, GF
B, GF
B, GF
B, GF

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
Number
of
Poles
Vac
1070
10125
10100
1570
15125
15100
1570
15100
15100
1530
1530
1520
1540
1550
1530
1550
1540
1550
1530
1530
1530
1530
1530
1530
1530
1070
10125
10100
1530
1530
1520
1520
1570
15125
15100
1520
1520
1570
15100
15100
1530
1530
1520
1540
1550
1530
1530
1
2
2, 3
1
2
2, 3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2, 3
1
2
1, 2
1, 2
1
2
2, 3
1, 2
1, 2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120/240
120/240
240
120
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240
120
120/240
120
120/240
Vdc
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

120
120/240
240
2448
62.5
80
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
10b, 11b, 12b
14a
14a
14b
15a
15a
15b
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
10b, 11b, 12b
14a
14a
14b
15a
15a
15b
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10,000
22,000
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
65,000
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
65,000
10,000
22,000
10,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
10,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
Vdc Ratings
Vac Ratings
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 095% noncondensing.
Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
62.5 Vdc interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 1050A and 2500 AIC 55100A continuous.
Note: Circuit Breaker Type Codes: AF Arc Fault; P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
CA08104001E
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 078
22
Table 27.4-1. Eatons QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out (Continued)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit Breaker
Type Code
24
QBGFEP
QBGFEP
QBHGFEP
25
26
23
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
Number
of
Poles
Vac
B, GFEP
B, GFEP
B, GFEP
1540
1550
1530
1
2
1
120
120/240
120
QBHGFEP
QC
QC
B, GFEP
C
C
1530
1070
10100
2
1
2
QC
QCD
QCD
C
C
C
10100
1060
10100
QCF
QCF
QCF
C
C
C
QCR
QCR
QCR
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

120
120/240
240
2448
62.5
80
10,000
22,000
10,000
120/240
120/240
120/240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
22,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
2, 3, 4
1, 2
2, 3
240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 62.5
10b, 11b, 12b
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
1060
1520
1530
1, 2
1, 2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
C
C
C
1060
1520
1530
1, 2
1, 2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
QCHW
QCHW
QCHW
C
C
C
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
14a
14a
14b
22,000
22,000
22,000
5000
5000
5000
QHCX
QHCX
QHCX
C
C
C
1570
15100
15100
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
42,000
42,000
42,000
5000
5000
QHCW
QHCW
QHCW
C
C
C
1530
1530
1520
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
15a
15a
15b
65,000
65,000
65,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QCGF
QCGF
QCHGF
C, GF
C, GF
C, GF
1540
1550
1530
1
2
1
120
120/240
120
10,000
22,000
10,000
QCHGF
QCGFEP
QCGFEP
C, GF
C, GFEP
C, GFEP
1530
1540
1550
2
1
2
120/240
120
120/240
10,000
22,000
10,000
QCHGFEP
QCHGFEP
C, GFEP
C, GFEP
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
22,000
22,000

35
Vdc
Vdc Ratings
Vac Ratings
5000
5000
5000
QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 095% noncondensing.
62.5 Vdc interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 1050A and 2500 AIC 55100A continuous.
Note: Circuit Breaker Type Codes: AF Arc Fault; P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-3
Sheet 27 079

Table 27.4-2. Factory Modifications
Modification
Type
Breaker
Type
23
Shunt trip (requires one extra

pole space on right side)
120, 208, 240 Vac
12, 24, 48 Vac/Vdc
Draws 2.6A at 120V
Draws 11A at 24 Vdc
QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

S
S1
Special calibration (50C)

Shock testing
Freeze testing

V
L
Y
Moisture-fungus treatment
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and

Ground Fault
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C
Marine duty
Naval duty
400 Hz calibration
Specific DC ratings
(breaker marked with
a maximum Vdc rating)
22
Catalog
Suffix
24
25
26
H08
H09
G
Q thru Q9
27
28
Contact the Eaton factory for modifications available for QCR and
QCF breakers.
29
Table 27. 4-3. Factory-Installed Breaker Terminals

Breaker
Type
Standard Load Terminal

Continuous Standard Line Terminal
Ampere
Terminal Wire Wire
Terminal
Rating
Type
Type Range (AWG) Type
Wire
Type
QUICKLAG Type P
HQP, QPHW,
QHPX, QHPW
1030
3550
55125
Plug-on female clips that

mate with the bus stabs
1
2
3
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 81/0
N/A
3
3
31
QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QPGF, QPHGF,
QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
1030
Plug-on female clips that

mate with the bus stabs
1 (single-pole)
4 (two-pole)
4
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 148
Cu
148
N/A
3
3
32
QUICKLAG Type B
BAB, QBHW,
HBAX, HBAW
1030
3550
55125
Extended tangs that bolt

directly to the bus
1 (single- and two-pole)

2 (three-pole)
3
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 81/0
N/A
3
3
QUICKLAG Ground Fault/Arc Fault

QBGF, QBAF, QBCAF, QBHGF,
QBHAF, QBHCAF, QBGFEP,
QBHGFEP
1030
Extended tangs that bolt

directly to the bus
1 (single-pole)
4 (two-pole)
4
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 148
Cu
148
N/A
N/A
QUICKLAG Type C
QC, QCHW,
QHCX, QHCW
1020
2560
70100
5
6
7
Cu/Al TBD
Cu/Al TBD
Cu/Al TBD
5
2
3
Cu/Al 1410
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 81/0
6, 7
5, 7
5
6, 7, 8
5, 6, 7, 8
5, 7, 8
QUICKLAG
QCR, QCF
1055
60
1
1
Cu/Al TBD
Cu
TBD
1
1
Cu/Al 144
Cu
144
N/A
N/A
QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
1020
2550
5
6
Cu/Al TBD
Cu/Al TBD
1
1
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 144
6, 7
5, 7
5
5
QUICKLAG
QCD
1060
70100
9
10
Cu/Al 144
Cu
41/0
9
10
Cu/Al 144
Cu
41/0
See accessories
40
40
Optional Terminals
Wire
Line
Range (AWG)
Load
30
33
34
35
36
37
38
Steel Box Lug
Steel Box Lug
Steel Box Lug
Steel Ring Type
Aluminum Box Lug
39
10
40
Aluminum Box Lug
Aluminum Box Lug
4-Prong Quick Connect

Catalog Suffix P
QCD Terminal Assembly

1060 Amperes
Clamp on line side only.
QCD Terminal Assembly

70100 Amperes
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 080
Series G Industrial Breakers Overview Table
22
23
Table 27.4-4. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries G

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
Volts
AC
DC
Trip
Type
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

DC
AC Ratings Volts
120
120/ 240
240
277
480
600
125
250
125/
250
E-Frame
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
EGB
15125
1
347
2, 3, 4 600Y/347
EGE
15125
2, 3, 4 600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
EGS
15125
1
347
2, 3, 4 600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
N.I.T.
100,000
85,000 35,000
35,000
85,000
35,000 22,000
35,000
EGH
15125
1
347
2, 3, 4 600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
200,000
100,000 65,000
42,000
100,000
65,000 25,000
42,000
EGC
15125
250 N.I.T.
200,000
100,000
35,000
42,000
JGE
JGS
JGH
63250
63250
63250
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
65,000
85,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
65,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
JGC
JGU
JGX
63250
63250
63250
2, 3, 4 600
3, 4
600
3, 4
600
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
42,000
50,000
50,000
35,000
50,000
65,000
18,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
25,000 18,000
25,000
18,000
35,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
18,000 10,000 10,000
L-Frame
LGE
LGS
LGH
100600
100600
100600
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
23a
23a
23a
65,000
85,000
100,000
LGC
LGU
LGX
LHH
100600
100600
100600
125400
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
N.I.T.
23a
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
6001200
6001200
6001200
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
3
3
3
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
250 N.I.T.
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
100,000 100,000
150,000 65,000
200,000 65,000
65,000 35,000
42,000
50,000
50,000
22,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
50,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
45,000
300,000
100,000
150,000 75,000
65,000 35,000
125,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
N-Frame
NGS 800, 1200
NGH 800, 1200
NGC 800, 1200
NGU 800
NGS
NHH
6001200
1600
150350
R-Frame
RGH
RGC

37
J-Frame
36
600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
8001600
8001600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
50,000
65,000

Current limiting.
Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting.
High instantaneous circuit breaker for selective coordination.
Not UL or CSA listed.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-5
Sheet 27 081
Series C Industrial Breakers Overview Table

Table 27.4-5. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries C
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
Volts
of
AC
Poles
Trip
Type
DC
125
N.I.T.
125/250 N.I.T.
125
N.I.T.
Federal
Specification AC Ratings Volts
DC
W-C-375b
120
120/
240
277
480
600
125
240
22
250
125/
250
23
G-Frame
GHB
GHB
GHB
15100
15100
15100
1
2, 3
1
120
240
277
GHB
HGHB
GHQ
15100
1530
1520
2, 3
1
1
GHQRSP
GHBS
GBHS
1520
1530
1520
GD
GD
GHC
GHC
GHC
GHC
HGHC
14,000
14,000
14,000
24
14,000
14,000
25,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
25
14,000
14,000
26
65,000
65,000
14,000
277/480 125/250 N.I.T.

277
125
N.I.T.
277
N.I.T.
15b
12c, 13a, 13b 65,000

12c, 13a, 13b 65,000
1
1, 2
1, 2
277
277/480
347/600
12c, 13a, 13b 65,000
65,000
65,000
1550
15100
15100
2
3
1
480
480
120
125/250 N.I.T.
250
N.I.T.
125
N.I.T.
13b
13b
12c, 13a
65,000
15100
15100
15100
1530
2, 3
1
2, 3
1
240
277
277/480
277
125/250
125
125/250
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
13b
12c, 13a
13b
65,000
EDB
EDS
ED
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
240
240
240
125
125
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
12b
12b
12b
EDH
EDC
EHD
100225
100225
15100
2, 3
2, 3
1
240
240
277
125
125
125
N.I.T.
14b
1
13a
EHD
FDB
FDB
15100
15150
15150
2, 3
2, 3
4
480
600
600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
13b
18a
18,000
18,000
18,000
FD
FD
FD
15225
15225
15225
1
2, 3
4
277
600
600
125
250
250
N.I.T.
13a
22a
35,000
65,000
35,000 18,000
65,000
35,000 18,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
FDE
HFD
HFD
15225
15225
15225
3
1
2,3
600
277
600
125
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
13a
22a
65,000
35,000 18,000
65,000
100,000
65,000 25,000
10,000
22,000
HFD
HFDE
FDC
15225
15225
15225
4
3
2, 3
600
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
100,000
100,000
200,000
65,000 25,000
65,000 25,000
100,000 35,000
22,000
22,000
FDC
FDCE
15225
15225
4
3
600
600
250
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
100,000 35,000
100,000 25,000
22,000
70250
70250
70250
70250
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
22a
22a
22a
22a
65,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
35,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
35,000 25,000
35,000 25,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
38
22,000
22,000
39
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
11a
10b, 11b,
12b, 14b,
65,000
65,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
14,000
27
14,000
14,000
28
10,000
10,000
10,000
30
100,000
200,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
31
65,000
14,000
22,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
25,000
14,000
14,000
F-Frame
24a
22,000
42,000
65,000
14,000
14,000 14,000
14,000 14,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
J-Frame
JDB
JD
HJD
JDC
29
32
33
34
35
36
37
K-Frame
DK
KDB
KD
250400
100400
100400
2, 3
240
2, 3
600
2, 3, 4 600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
14b
23a
23a
CKD
HKD
CHKD
KDC
100400
100400
100400
100400
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a

600
600
600
600
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000

100% rated.
Current limiting.
Not defined in W-C-375b.
35,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 082
Series C Industrial Breakers Overview Table
22
23
Table 27.4-5. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries C (Continued)

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
Volts
of
AC
Poles
DC
Trip
Type
Federal
Specification AC Ratings Volts
DC
W-C-375b
120
120/
240
277
480
600
125
240
250
125/
250
L-Frame
24
LDB
LD
CLD
300600
300600
300600
2, 3
600
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
25
HLD
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
300600
300600
300600
300600
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a
100,000
100,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
300800
300800
300800
300800
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
ND
CND
HND
6001200
6001200
6001200
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
23A
23A
23A
65,000
65,000
100,000
CHND
NDC
HNDC
NDU
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3
600
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
23A
23A
23A
100,000
200,000
200,000
300,000
26
27
28
29
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
35,000 25,000
35,000 25,000
35,000 25,000
22,000
22,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
22,000
25,000
50,000 25,000
50,000 25,000
65,000 35,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
75,000
M-Frame
MDL
CMDL
HMDL
CHMDL
N-Frame
65,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
R-Frame
31
RD 1600
CRD 1600
RD 2000
8001600
8001600
10002000
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
24a
24a
24a
125,000
125,000
125,000
65,000 50,000
65,000 50,000
65,000 50,000
32
RD 2500
CRD 2000
RDC 1600
10002500
10002000
8001600
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
24a
24a
25a
125,000
125,000
200,000
65,000 50,000
65,000 50,000
100,000 65,000
CRDC 1600 8001600

RDC 2000
10002000
RDC 2500
10002500
CRDC 2000 10002000
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
25a
25a
25a
25a
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
33
34

35
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000

100% rated.
Current limiting.
Table 27.4-6. Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit BreakersNon-Fused Type
36
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
AC
FCL
LCL
15100
125400
2, 3
2, 3
480
600
37
38

39
Volts
DC
Trip
Type
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b

120 120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
125/250
200,000
200,000
150,000
200,000
100,000
DC
AC Ratings Volts

Table 27.4-7. TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit BreakersFused Type
40
Circuit
Breaker
Type
41
FB
LA
15100
70400
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
NB
PB
300800
6001600
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
42

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
AC
Volts
DC
Trip
Type
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b

120
120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
125/250
DC
AC Ratings Volts

43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-7
Sheet 27 083
Current Limiting Industrial Breakers Overview Tables

Table 27.4-8. Eaton Molded-Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies
Frame
Ampere
Range
Panelboards
1A
2A
3A
3E
5P
Switchboards
PRL-C
Freedom
IFS
FlashGard
Enclosed
Control
Bus
Plugs
Enclosed
Breaker
QUICKLAG
BAB
QB
QBH
15100
15100
15100
23
24
Series G
EG
JG
LG
15125
20250
100600
NG
RG
4001200
8002500
22
25
26
Series C
FD/ED
JD
KD
LD
MDL
ND
RD
15225
70250
70400
400600
300800
4001200
8002500
27
28
Current Limiting Breakers

FCL
LCL
FB
LA
NB
PB
15100
125400
15100
70400
300800
6001600
Including ground fault, arc fault and solenoid operated versions of each frame.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 084
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Circuit Breakers with Microprocessor Trip Units
29
Table 27.4-9. Digitrip RMS Circuit Breaker Trip Unit Selection (See Table 27.4-10 for details)
Description
30
31
Digitrip
310
Molded-case F-Frame 225A
Molded-case JG250-Frame 250A
LD
Digitrip
610
Digitrip
810
Digitrip
910
OPTIM
1050
LG
Molded-case N-Frame 1200A
ND
NG
34
OPTIM
550
Molded-case L-Frame 600A

Molded-case M-Frame 800A
33
Digitrip
510
Circuit Breaker Type
Molded-case K-Frame 400A
32
Digitrip
310+
Molded-case R-Frame 2500A
RD
10
RG
Features
35
36
37
38
Curve shaping functions
Front adjustable
Harmonics
Waveform capture
Programmable
Load monitoring
Option
Diagnostics (cause-of-trip)
Option
Power/energy monitoring
Option
Option
Communications
39
40

41
Ground fault alarm

Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System (local and remote)

10
Option

Optional feature.
Requires ammeter/cause-of-trip display.
Requires cause-of-trip LED module or ammeter/cause-of-trip display.
Requires Power Metering and Monitoring Module (PM3). See Page 27.4-41 for product details.
Only available in LG, NG and RG breakers.
Requires auxiliary alarm module below R-Frames.
Note: For time current curves for the trip units, see www.eaton.com.
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-9
Sheet 27 085

Table 27.4-10. Molded-Case Digitrip Selection Guide
Trip Unit
Type
Digitrip
RMS 310+
Digitrip
RMS 310
Digitrip
RMS 510
Digitrip
RMS 610
Digitrip
RMS 810
Digitrip
RMS 910
Digitrip
OPTIM 550
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
rms sensing
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FDE, JG, K , LG, NG,

RG
152500A
L, M
K, L, N
K, L, N, R
300800A
8005000A
8005000A
8005000A
8005000A
701200A
705000
35, 65, 100, 150 (kA)
35, 65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
35, 65, 100 (kA)
35, 65, 100 (kA)
Ordering options
LS
LSG
LSI
LSIG
LS
LSG
LSI
LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG
LSI, LSI (A),

LSIG
LSI (A), LISG
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
No
ALSI
ALSIG
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Fixed rated plug (In)

No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
40100% frame
224 seconds
Yes
0.51.0(In)
10 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
No
No
No
No
15 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
0.85 x Ir
Yes
0.85 x Ir
Yes
0.85 x Ir
Yes
0.51.0 x Ir
Yes
0.5-1.0 x Ir
200600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
150800%
x (Ir)
150800%
x (Ir)
Breaker Type
Frame
Ampere range
Interrupting rating
at 48V
Protection
Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable rating
plug (In)
Long delay pickup
Long delay time I2t
Long delay time I4t
Long delay
thermal memory
High load alarm
Short Delay Protection (S)

Short delay pickup
Varies by frame
200800% x (In)
Short delay time I2t

Yes
No
100 ms No
100500 ms
No
Inst300 ms 100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
Short delay time Z.S.I.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Optional
Yes
No
Inst300 ms
Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
No
Yes
200600%
200600%
200600%
200600%
200800%
M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) x (In)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Var/frame
No
No
25100% x In
100500 ms
No
25100% x In
100500 ms
No
25100% x In
100500 ms
No
25100% x In
100500 ms
Inst500 ms
No
100500 ms
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Digital display
Current
Voltage
Power and energy
Power factor
No
Varies by
frame
Discriminator
No
Instantaneous override Yes
No
200800%
x (In)
200800%
x (In)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Yes
Yes
33
20/25100%
20/25100%
100500 ms
20/25100%
20/25100%
100500 ms
34
100500 ms
Yes
100500 ms
Optional
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes (over
Yes
PowerNet only)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground fault alarm
Ground fault pickup
Ground fault delay I2t
Yes
20100% frame
No
Ground fault delay flat Inst300 ms

Ground fault Z.S.I.
Yes
Ground fault
thermal memory
Yes
System Diagnostics
Cause of trip LEDs
Magnitude of
trip information
Remote signal
contacts
35
36
37
System Monitoring
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Optional
Yes
Test kit
Test set
Integral
Integral
Integral
Integral
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
(optional)
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
Testing
Testing method

No rating plugs necessary.

Only available on LG, NG and RG breaker.
Adjust by rating plug.
FDE and JG 2001200% x In
LG 2001200% x In
NG 200900% x In
RG 200800% x In
LS/LSG only.
CA08104001E

Not to exceed 1200A.

L- and N-Frames *20100% x Is.
R-Frame *25100% x In.
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Yes, with addition of power monitoring/
metering module (PM3).
Yes, with addition of Energy Sentinel.
BIM
Is
In
Ir
39
40
Communications
PowerNet
38
=
=
=
=

Sensor Rating
Rating Plug
LDPU Setting x In
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 086
22
Digitrip OPTIM
Breaker information
Metered values

Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
23
24
25
Panel-Mounted User Interface

The breaker interface module can
be mounted directly on the assembly
or at a remote location and can be
used to access, configure and display
information from OPTIM trip units.
26
27
Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Accessories
28
General Description
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable

communicating microprocessor-based
electronic trip unit system for Eatons
molded-case circuit breakers. Digitrip
OPTIM trip units are available in
two models: Digitrip OPTIM 550 and
1050, for the K-, L-, N- and R-Frames
(702500A).
Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully
programmable and can be applied as
a standalone breaker with a hand-held
Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for
configuring the trip unit, displaying
information and testing. In addition,
OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage
assembly with a panel-mounted
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) to
configure, display and test. Alternatively, OPTIM can be applied as part of
a fully integrated IMPACC/PowerNet/
Power Xpert system. (See Tab 2.)
Features
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Fully programmable, rms sensing

trip unit
Available in K, L, N and R Series C
breakers
Available in 80% and 100%
rated breakers
Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA
configurations
Advanced warning systems including

high load alarm, ground fault alarm
Full system diagnostics capability
System monitoring features including:
Phase currents (amps)
Power (kW)
Peak demand (kW)
Forward energy (kWh)
Reverse energy (kWh)
Total energy (kWh)
Power factor
Total harmonic distortion (%THD)
(amps)
Power Xpert communications saves
individual wiring of breakers

(50/60 Hz)
Set system password

Select alarm levels
Breaker information
Metered values

Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
Expanded energy monitoring:

Set addresses for group energy
monitoring
Group energy readings
Common alarm contacts:

Three Form C contacts
Saves wiring to each breaker
Local and remote indication:

Remote indication/alarming
Breaker status LED indication
Expanded communications:
Communicate with:
OPTIM trip units
Digitrip RMS 810
and 910 trip units
IQ Energy Sentinel
and Universal Sentinels
IQ Power Sentinels
A total of 50 devices
Hand-Held Programmer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held
programmer accesses, displays and
configures information from OPTIM
trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into
the front of the trip unit and is powered
by a nine-volt battery, or an auxiliary
power module.
An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:
Note: Ground fault alarm only.
Available in two models:

OPTIM 550 and OPTIM 1050
10 function time-current curve
shaping options, including a new
I4t long delay time or slope
Short delay and ground delay
(Optional on 550)
Additional programmable
protection features including
thermal memory and
discriminator functions
An operator can use the breaker

interface module to:

Select breaker address
(50/60 Hz)
Set system baud rate
Set system password
Select alarm levels
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-11
Sheet 27 087
Selection DataQUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
HQP, QPHW, QHPX
QPHW
QPGF, QPHGF,
QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
BAB, QBHW, HBAX
25
HBAW
26
Table 27.4-11. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections
Plug-On
Bolt-On
Thermal-Magnetic
HQP, QPHW, QHPX
Thermal-Magnetic
QHPW
Thermal-Magnetic
QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP,
QPHGFEP
Thermal-Magnetic
BAB, QBHW, HBAX
27
Thermal-Magnetic
HBAW
28
Circuit Breaker RatingsContinuous Current Rating at 40C and 095% Humidity (Noncondensing)
Amperes
Poles Volts
HQP
570
10150
10100
Amperes
Poles Volts
QHPW
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1520
1-2
3
120/240
240
QPHW
1570
15125
15100
Poles Volts
1540
1550
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1530
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1540
1550
Amperes
Poles Volts
BAB
1
2
120
120/240
QPHGF
QHPX
1570
15100
15100
Amperes
QPGF
570
10150
10100
Amperes
Poles Volts
29
HBAW
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1520
1-2
3
120/240
240
1
2
120
120/240
1570
15125
15100
1
2
120
120/240
1570
15100
15100
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
1.00
(25.4)
3.19
2.38
(81.0) (60.3)
QPGFEP
31
HBAX
32
33
QPHGFEP
34
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker

W
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)
30
QBHW
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)
35
AC Interrupting RatingsUL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts
Amps I.R. Volts
HQP
Amps I.R. Volts
QHPW
120/240, 240
10,000
Amps I.R. Volts
QPGF, QPGFEP
120/240, 240
65,000
QPHW
120, 120/240
10,000
QPHGF, QPHGFEP
120/240, 240
22,000
120, 120/240
Amps I.R. Volts
BAB
Amps I.R.
120/240, 240
10,000
120/240, 240
65,000
QBHW
22,000
QHPX
120/240, 240
42,000
120/240, 240
37
22,000
38
HBAX
120/240, 240
36
HBAW
42,000
DC Interrupting Ratings
Volts
Poles Amps I.R. Volts
Poles Amps I.R.
39
48
62.5
80
1-2
1
2
1-2
1
2
1-2
1
2
1-2
1
2
40
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
5000
2500
5000
Accessories and ModificationsSee MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Bell alarm contacts
Auxiliary switch contacts
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Panelboard accessories
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Two-pole interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
CA08104001E
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Panelboard accessories
Optional terminals
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 088
Selection DataQUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
QBGF, QBHGF,
QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
QCR,QCF
QC, QCHW,
QHCX, QCD
QHCW
QCGF, QCHGF,
QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
Table 27.4-12. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections
Bolt-On
Cable-In/Cable-Out
Thermal-Magnetic
Thermal-Magnetic
Thermal-Magnetic
Thermal-Magnetic
QBAF, QBGF, QBHGF,
QCR, QCF
QC, QCHW, QHCX
QCD
QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
Circuit Breaker RatingsContinuous Current Rating at 40C and 095% Humidity (Noncondensing)
Amperes
Poles Volts
Amperes Poles Volts
Amperes
Poles Volts
Amperes
Poles Volts
QBAF (Arc Fault)
QCR, QCF
QC
QCD
1020
1
120
1060
1
120
570
1
120/240
10100
1-2
120/240
1020
2
120/240
1060
2
120/240
10125
2
120/240
10100
3
240
1530
2-3
240
10100
2-3
240
QBGF
QCHW
1540
1
120
1570
1
120/240
1550
2
120/240
15100
2
120/240
15100
2-3
240
QBHGF
QHCX
1530
1
120
1570
1
120/240
1530
2
120/240
15100
2
120/240
15100
2-3
240
QBGFEP
QHCW
1540
1
120
1530
12
120/240
1550
2
120/240
1520
3
240
QBHGFEP
1530
1
120
1530
2
120/240
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker
W
H
D
W
H
D
W
H
D
W
H
D
1.00
3.19 2.38
.50
3.94 2.63
1.00
3.75 2.44
1.00
3.75 2.63
(25.4)
(81.0) (60.3)
(12.7)
(74.6) (66.7)
(25.4)
(95.3) (61.9)
(25.4)
(95.3) (66.7)
AC Interrupting RatingsUL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts
Amps
Volts
Amps I.R. Volts
Amps
Volts
Amps
I.R.
I.R.
I.R.
QBAF, QBGF, QBGFEP
QCR, QCF
QC
QCD
120, 120/240
10,000
120/240
10,000
120/240, 240
10,000
120/240, 240
10,000
QBHGF, QBHGFEP
QCHW
120, 120/240
22,000
120/240, 240
22,000
QHCX
120/240, 240
42,000
QHCW
120/240, 240
65,000
DC Interrupting Ratings
Volts
Poles Amps
Volts
Poles Amps
Volts
Poles Amps
I.R.
I.R.
I.R.
62.5
1
3000
48
1-2
5000
48
1-2
5000
125
2
3000
62.5
1
2500
62.5
1
2500
80
2
5000
80
2
5000
Accessories and ModificationsSee MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Moisture-fungus treatment Moisture-fungus treatment
Handle lock devices
Handle lock devices
Handle lock devices
Handle lock devices
Bell alarm contacts
QCR mounting clips
Shunt trip
Shunt trip
Ring terminals
Special calibration
Special calibration
Ring terminals
Quick connect
Shock tested
Shock tested
Terminals
Face mounting plate
Face mounting plate
Shunt trip
Base mounting hardware
Shock tested
Optional terminals
Optional terminals
DIN rail mounting clip
Dummy breaker
Dummy breaker
Thermal-Magnetic
QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP,
QCHGFEP
Amperes
QCGF
1540
1550
QCHGF
1530
1550
QCGFEP
1530
1550
QCHGFEP
1550
1530
W
1.00
(25.4)
Poles Volts
1
2
120
120/240
1
2
120
120/240
1
2
120
120/240
1
2
120
120/240
H
D
3.75 2.44
(95.3) (61.9)
Volts
Amps I.R.
QCGF, QCGFEP
120/240
10,000
QCHGF, QCHGFEP
120
22,000
Volts
Poles Amps I.R.
Handle lock devices
Bell alarm contacts
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-13
Sheet 27 089
Selection DataQUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated
Solenoid-Operated, RemoteControlled Latching Types

BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP
and CLRP
Bolt-on line-side terminal

(BABRP, BABRSPType BA)
Plug-on line-side terminal
(BRRPType BR, CLRPType CL)
Cable connected load-side terminal
Four-position control terminal
Bi-metal assembly for thermal
overload protection
Fast-acting short-circuit protection
Arc-chute assembly for fast-acting
arc extinction
Three-position handle: OFF, TRIP
(Center), ON
Handle permits manual switching

when control power is lost
Mechanical trip indicator
15 and 20A breakers SWD
(switching duty) rated
HID ratings for HID (high intensity
discharge) lighting
All models HACR rated
Status feedback of control circuit
(BABRSP)
Series rated (BABRP, BABRSP only)
BRRP series rated same as
BR breakers
BABRP, BABRSP same as
BA breakers
Product Selection
BABRP and BABRSP Breakers

Single- and Two-Pole
General Description
The BABRP and BABRSP are bolt-on
branch circuit breakers designed for use
in panelboards. The BRRP is a plug-on
branch circuit breaker designed for use
in loadcenters not manufactured with
breakers with a 1.00-inch wide format
and are listed on the Compatibility
list for Classified Applications
Pub. 26271. In addition to providing
conventional branch circuit protection,
they include a unique solenoid-operated
mechanism that provides for efficient
breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation
when used with a suitable controller like
Eatons Pow-R-Command lighting
control system. These breakers can
also be controlled by pushbutton or
a PLC unit.
Eatons BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and
CLRP breakers are remotely operated
molded-case circuit breakers ideally
suited for lighting control applications
or energy management applications.
CA08104001E
23
24
25
26
27
28
Table 27.4-13. BABRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number
of Poles
22
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120/240
277/480
Catalog
Number
29
120
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRP1015
BABRP1020
BABRP1025
BABRP1030
30
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRP2015
BABRP2020
BABRP2025
BABRP2030
31
32
Continuous current rating at 40C.
33
Table 27.4-14. BABRP and BABRSP Wire Harness

Description
Catalog
Number
This 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wire pigtail provides a connection from a single
BABRPs control plug to a customers pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box
contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600V. Order in multiples of 12.
SLBKRPTL1
34
35
Table 27.4-15. BABRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number
of Poles
36

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120
120/240
277/480
Catalog
Number
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRSP1015
BABRSP1020
BABRSP1025
BABRSP1030
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRSP2015
BABRSP2020
BABRSP2025
BABRSP2030
37
38
39
40
Table 27.4-16. BRRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number
of Poles

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120
120/240
Catalog
Number
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BRRP115
BRRP120
BRRP125
BRRP130
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BRRP215
BRRP220
BRRP225
BRRP230
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 090
29
30
31
33
34
35
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
CLRP215
CLRP220
CLRP225
CLRP230
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc

(20.4V minimum30V maximum)
Controlled signal:
+AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero
cross, 300 ms maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum,
18 cycles or 300 ms maximum
DC: 8 ms minimum,
300 ms maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/
CLOSE cycles per minute
Operation
Tripping systemthe BABRP,
BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit
breakers have a permanent trip
unit that contains a factory preset
thermal (overload) trip element in
each pole
Operating mechanismthe BABRP,
BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit
breakers have an over-center toggle
mechanism that provides quickmake, quick-break operation. The
operating mechanism is trip free.
An internal cross-bar provides a
common tripping of all multi-pole
circuit breakers
Load
RM
b
Ambient temperature: 0 to 40C

Nominal pulse magnitude:
24 Vac/Vdc
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Maximum breaker cycling:
6 operations per minute
Tolerance: +10% to 15% of
nominal voltage
Humidity: 0 to 95% noncondensing
RM
a
On
Coil
Off Remote
Coil Status
BABRSP
Remote
Contact
Load
Line
Breaker
Contact
RM
b
Operating/Application Data
Line
Breaker
Contact
Blue
CLRP115
CLRP120
CLRP125
CLRP130
BABRP
Remote
Contact
Yellow
Current draw: open 1A, close 3/4A

Blue wire: power input (see power
requirements)
Black wire: remote opening
Red wire: remote closing
Yellow wire: feedback status from
power input, maximum 0.50A draw
(BABRSP only)
32
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
Solenoid Operating Data
28
Catalog
Number
15
20
25
30
120/240
RM
a
BKR
a
On
Coil
Off Remote
Coil Status
Blue
27
120
Yellow
26
Vac (50/60 Hz)
Black
24
Ampere
Rating
Black
Red
Number
of Poles
23
25
Wiring Diagrams
Table 27.4-17. CLRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
Red
22
Figure 27.4-1. Control Circuit for the BABRP

and BABRSP
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-15
Sheet 27 091
Solenoid Operated
Remote-Controlled Latching
for Type GHBS, GBHS and
GHQRSP Breakers

Cable-connected load-side terminal
Status switchremote status and
breaker status available from
internal auxiliary switches
overload protection
Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly
for fast-acting arc extinction
Three-position breaker handle: OFF,
TRIP (Center), ON
Visual indication of the remotely

operated contacts position
(open, closed or trip)
Remote override handle permits
manual switching when control
power is lost
15 and 20A breakers SWD
(switching duty) rated
15 and 20A breakers HID rated
for HID (High intensity discharge)
lighting
All models HACR rated
Series rated with various Eaton
main circuit breakers
22
23
24
25
26
27
Product Selection
Table 27.4-18. GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings
Number
of Poles
GHBS and GHQRSP
Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120
240
277/480
Catalog
Number
15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHBS1015D
GHBS1020D
GHBS1030D
15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHBS2015D
GHBS2020D
GHBS2030D
General Description
Eatons GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP
circuit breakers are bolt-on branch
circuit breakers designed for use in
277/480 Vac panelboards. In addition
to providing conventional branch
circuit protection, they include a
unique solenoid-operated mechanism
that provides for efficient breaker
pulse-on and pulse-off operation
when used with a suitable controller
like Eatons Pow-R-Command lighting
control system.
28
Table 27.4-19. GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings (Not UL Listed)

Number
of Poles
30
31
32

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

347/600
Catalog
Number
15
20
10,000
10,000
GBHS1015D
GBHS1020D
15
20
10,000
10,000
GBHS2015D
GBHS2020D
29
33
34
35
Table 27.4-20. GHQRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
36
Number
of Poles

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120
120/240
277
480Y/277
Catalog
Number
15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHQRSP1015
GHQRSP1020
GHQRSP1030
15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHQRSP2015
GHQRSP2020
GHQRSP2030


All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (high intensity discharge) rated.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 092
22
Wiring Diagrams
Solenoid Operating Data
23
24
25
26
27
28
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc (20.4V minimum

30V maximum)
Controlled signal: +AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero
cross, 300 ms maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles or 300 ms maximum
DC: 8 ms minimum, 300 ms maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/CLOSE cycles
per minute
Blue wire: power input (see power requirements)
Yellow wire: feedback status from power input,
maximum 0.50A draw
Circuit Breaker
Solenoid
Solenoid
Common
AMP Inc.
Conductor
Plug
Auxiliary
/ Cycle
Maximum
28 Vac
Pulse Source
1 2
Circuit Breaker
Open/Closed
Status
28 Vac
Figure 27.4-2. Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram

for GHBS and GBHS Breakers
Operation
33
Line
Ambient temperature: 040C

Frequency: 4862 Hz
Table 27.4-21. Terminal Type

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit
Breaker
Amperes
Screw
Head
Type
Terminal
Type
Range
GHQRSP
1520
Slotted
Clamp
#14#4 AWG
34
Status
On
Coil
Off
Coil
Blue
32
Load
Operating/Application Data
Black
31
GHQRSP
Remote
Breaker
Contact
Contact
Red
30
Mechanism manually operated by external handle allowing

ON, OFF and RESET operation. Handle assumes a center
TRIP position after performing protective response.
Yellow
29
Power
Input
35
36
37
Figure 27.4-3. Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram

for GHQRSP Breakers
Dimensions
Table 27.4-22. Dimensions Per Pole
38
39
Circuit Breaker
Type
Width
Height
Length
GHQRSP
1.00 (25.4)
4.63 (117.6)
2.81 (71.4)

Purchase separate AMP Inc. conductor plug #640426-3.

Excluding line terminal.
Excluding handle.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-17
Sheet 27 093
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
Solenoid Operated
Remote Controlled
Emergency Circuit Breaker

Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly
for fast-acting arc extinction
Three-position breaker handle:
OFF, TRIP (Center), ON
Visual indication of the remotely
operated contacts position
(open, closed or trip)
Remote override handle permits
manual switching when control
power is lost
15 and 20A breakers SWD, and
HID rated
Product Selection
Table 27.4-23. Solenoid OperatedRemote
Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled

Emergency Circuit Breaker
General Description
GHQRSPEL2015
GHQRSPEL2020
Operating Data
15
20
GHQRSPEL circuit breakers incorporate

many of the same robust features as
other GHQRSP breakers including:
Solenoid
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc

(20.4V minimum to 30V maximum)
Controlled signal: +AC/DC 12 ms
minimum with zero cross, 300 ms
maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles
or 300 ms maximum
DC: 12 ms minimum, 300 ms
maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/
CLOSE cycles per minute
Blue wire: power input
Yellow wire: feedback status from
power input, maximum 0.50A draw
22
23
Product Specifications
Catalog
Number
Mechanism manually operated by

external handle allowing ON, OFF and
RESET operation. Handle assumes a
center TRIP position after performing
protective response.
Left pole: Integral solenoid

controlled contacts in series
with thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker pole
Right pole: Standard thermalmagnetic circuit breaker pole
Both poles tied to same phase
Cable-connected load-side terminal
Status switchremote status and
breaker status available from
internal auxiliary switches
overload protection
Ambient temperature: 040C

Frequency: 4862 Hz
Amperes
The GHQRSPEL circuit breaker

contains both a solenoid operated
remote switching circuit and a manually operated thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker. This Emergency Lighting
Circuit Breaker complies with the
2008 National Electrical Code; Section
700.12(F) for Sources of Power used in
emergency lighting applications.
Application
Handle rating: 20A (both switched

and unswitched circuits)
Maximum voltage rating: 277 Vac
Interrupting ratings: 65 kA at
240 Vac, 14 kA at 277 Vac
Maximum series connected
ratings: 200 kA at 240 Vac and
100 kA at 277V
Overcurrent protection
UL listed 489
UL listed switch duty rated (SWD)
and high intensity discharge
(HID) ratings
Lug wire size: (1) #128 Al, #148 Cu
per circuit, 75C conductors
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 094
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
22
Wiring Diagrams
GHQRSPEL
Circuit Breaker
23
24
Manually Operated Circuit

Source
Remotely Operated Circuit
25
26
27
Light Fixture
Light Fixture
Light Fixture
Emergency
Light Equipment
Figure 27.4-4. The Need for Relay is Eliminated with Extra Box, Wiring and Selecting a Properly Rated Component
Note: Circuit breaker mounts into panelboard. Switched and unswitched conductors are connected directly to the breaker load side lug.
28
Remote
Contact
29
Breaker
Contact
Load
Line
30
31
32
35
36
Status
On
Coil
Off
Coil
Blue
Black
Red
34
Yellow
33
+
Power
Input
Figure 27.4-5. Typical Circuit Breaker Schematic for GHQRSP
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-19
Sheet 27 095
Series G Selection DataEG-Frame
Series G, E-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic
15125A
Table 27.4-26. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit
Breaker
Type
22
Number Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)

of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
120 220240
Ics
25
25
25
25
Ics
18
18
18
EGE125
2, 3, 4
35
35
25
25
25
18
10
10
EGS125
1
2, 3, 4
100
85
85
43
43
35
22
40
30
35
22
35
35
35
35
EGH125
1
2, 3, 4
200 100
100
50
50
65
30
70
35
65
25
42
42
42
42
EGC125
3, 4
200
100
100
100 35
42

Icu
1
2, 3, 4
200
18
Volts DC
480 600Y/ 690

125
250
347
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
380415
EGB125
35
Icu
277 347
10
10
10
42

IEC only.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.
10
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
E125-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-24. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Number Width
of Poles
Height
1
2
1.00 (25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
3
4
3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
30
Depth
31
32
Table 27.4-25. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Frame
Ratings
33
EG
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,

60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
EG
34
16, 32, 63
Not UL listed.
35
Note: EG breaker is HACR rated.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 096
Series G Selection DataF-Frame
22
Series G, F-Frame 15225A

Electronic RMS 15225A
23
24

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles

Trip
Type Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
FDE
HFDE
FDCE
3
3
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

25
100
150
225
33

Number Width
of Poles
250
10,000
22,000
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog Number
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #44/0
2.550
2595
2595
3T100FB
3TA150FB
3TA225FD
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
(1) #14#4
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #6300 kcmil
2.516
2.550
2595
16150
3TA50FB
3TA100FD
3T150FB
3TA225FDK
Package of
3 Terminals
Height
Steel
Aluminum
Aluminum
Depth
50
100
150
225
Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless steel
Aluminum
UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.
4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
Table 27.4-28. Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units

Types
Frame
Ratings
FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
225
100, 110, 125, 150, 160,

175, 200, 225
160
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125,

150, 160
80
34
125
18,000
25,000
25,000
Optional Pressure Terminals
F-Frame Breaker
32
600
35,000
65,000
100,000
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
28
31
480
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

Current limiting.
Electronics available on thee-pole only.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
27
30
277
65,000
100,000
200,000
Table 27.4-30. Line and Load Terminals
26
29
240
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,

70, 80
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-21
Sheet 27 097
Series G Selection DataJG-Frame
Series G, J-Frame
Electronic RMS, 20250A
Thermal-Magnetic, 63250A

Circuit
Breaker
Type
380415
Icu
Ics
Icu
Icu
Ics
250
23
25
40
70
25
35
65
18
18
25
12
12
14
6
6
7
10
22
22
24
JGC250
JGU250
JGX250
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
35
50
50
16
18
18
12
14
14
42
50
50
25

Depth
4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)

5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
Frame
Ratings
JG
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,

200, 225, 250
JG
160
26
JG-Frame circuit breakers include Cu/Al terminals T250FJ as standard.

When optional copper only terminals are required, order by catalog number.
27
28
250
250
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire
Range/Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
#4350 (1)
#4350 (1)
T250FJ
TA250FJ
#4350 (1)
TC250FJ
29
Stainless steel
Aluminum
Cu
Cu/Al
25185
25185
30
Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

250

Copper
Cu/Al
25185
Single terminals individually packed.

Standard line and load terminals.
Contact factory for availability.
31
32
33
34
Not UL listed.
35
Ratings
100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250

JG250
JG160 63, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 160
Ics
690
25
40
70
JG100
JG50
600
J-Frame Breaker
Frame
480
65
85
100
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Volts DC
220240
65
85
100
2, 3
4
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
Height
22
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
JGE250
JGS250
JGH250
Number Width
of Poles
Number
of Poles
36
40, 45, 50, 63, 70, 80, 90, 100

20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 45, 50
37
Not UL listed.
Note: JG breaker is HACR rated.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 098
Series G Selection DataLG-Frame
22
23
Series G, L-Frame
Electronic RMS, 100630A*
Thermal-Magnetic, 250630A*
*UL Maximum is 600A

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)

Volts DC
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

240240
380415
Icu
Ics
Icu
480
600
Ics
250
690
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
24
LGE630
LGS630
LGH630
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
65
85
100
65
85
100
35
50
70
35
50
70
35
50
65
18
25
35
12
20
25
6
10
13
22
22
42
22
22
42
25
LGC630
LGU630
LGX630
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
50
65
65
30
35
35
15
18
18
42
50
50
42
50
50
26

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
L-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-36. Dimensions in Inches (mm),

Weight in Lbs (kg)
Number Width
of Poles
Height
Depth
Weight
5.48
(140)
10.13
(258)
4.09
(104)
16
(7.3)
7.22
(183)
10.13
(258)
4.09
(104)
20
(9.1)
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Number of Catalog
Terminals Number
Included
400
400
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
500750 (1)
500750 (1)
240380 (1)
240380 (1)
3
4
3TA631LK
4TA631LK
400
400
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
500750 (1)
500750 (1)
240380 (1)
240380 (1)
3
4
3T631LK
4T631LK
630
630
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
2500 (2)
2500 (2)
35240 (2)
35240 (2)
3
4
3TA632LK
4TA632LK
630
630
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
2500 (2)
2500 (2)
35240 (2)
35240 (2)
3
4
3T632LK
4T632LK
400
400
Aluminum
Copper
Cu/Al
Cu
2500 (1)
2500 (1)
35240 (1)
35240 (1)
1
1
TA350LK
T350LK

Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers.

Standard terminal included with complete breaker.
Table 27.4-37. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Rating

Frame
Ratings
LG
LG
250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600

320, 630
Not UL listed.
Table 27.4-38. Digitrip 310+

Frame
37
DC rating applies to substantially non-inductive circuits.

Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.
IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac.
Ratings
LG_630 250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 500, 600, 630

LG_600 250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
38
LG_400 160, 200, 225, 250, 300, 315, 350, 400

LG_250 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250
39
Note: 160, 315 and 630 are IEC ratings only.

LG breaker is HACR rated.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-23
Sheet 27 099
Series G Selection DataNG-Frame
Series G, N-Frame
Table 27.4-43. Series G Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit Number Trip
Breaker of Poles Type
Type
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

UL 489
240
IEC 60947-2
480
600
220240
380415
660690
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
800, 1200A
NGS
NGH
NGC
3
3
3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65
100
200
50
65
100
25
35
50
85
100
200
85
100
100
50
70
100
50
50
50
20
25
35
10
13
18
N.I.T.
300
150
75
800A
NGU
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
23
24
25
26

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
22
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
(2) 1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
(3) 500750 kcmil
50300
95185
120300
300400
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1
27
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

700
1000
1200
1200
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
N-Frame Breaker

Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
8.25
(209.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
700
1000
1200
Copper
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0500 kcmil

(3) 3/0500 kcmil
(4) /0400 kcmil
T700NB1
T1000NB1
T1200NB3
29
30
31
32
Table 27.4-42. Digitrip 310+ Electronic

Trip Units
33
Frame Ratings
800
1200
70300
95300
95185
28
320, 400, 450, 500, 600, 630, 700, 800

500, 600, 630, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 100
Series G Selection DataRG-Frame
22
Series G, R-Frame
23
Table 27.4-48. Series G Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit Number Trip
Breaker of Poles Type
Type
RGH
RGC
24
3, 4
3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

UL 489
240
125
200
IEC 60947-2
480
65
100
600
50
65
220240
380415
660690
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
135
200
100
100
70
100
50
50
25
35
13
18
25
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
26
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Hardware
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
English
English
English
(4) 5001000 kcmil

(4) 1600 kcmil
(6) 2600 kcmil
300500
50300
35300
TA1600RD
T1600RD
TA2000RD
Wire Terminal
1600
1600
2000
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
R-Frame Breaker

Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
15.50
(393.7)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
20.00
(508.0)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
Table 27.4-46. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit

Rating Plugs
Frame Rating Plugs
1600
2000
2500
35
36
37
800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1500, 1600

1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000
1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
Adjustable rating plug available.
Table 27.4-47. Digitrip 510/610/810/910

and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
1600
2000
2500
800, 1000, 1200, 1600

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
1600, 2000, 2500
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-25
Sheet 27 101
Series C Selection DataG-Frame
Series C, G-Frame
22
23
24
25
26
GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP277V 30 mA GF Breaker
Table 27.4-50. G-FrameDimensions in Inches (mm)

Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
1P G-Frame
2P G-Frame
3P G-Frame
1.00 (25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
GHCGFEP
GHBGFEP
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
4.88 (124.0)
4.00 (101.6)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
Frame
Ratings
GHB, GHC
GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
GHQ
HGHB
15, 20
15, 20, 25, 30

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

120
240
277
480
480Y/277
125
250
GDB
GD
GD
2, 3
2
3
65
65
14
14
22
10
10
10
GHQ
GHB
GHB
1
1
2, 3
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
HGHB
GHC
GHC
HGHC
1
1
2, 3
1
65
65
65
65
25
14
25
14
14
14
14
14

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
27
Application Notes
GHB Breaker and G-Frame
Volts DC
Type GHB are bolt-on panelboard breakers while type

GHC is a cable-in and cable-out breaker for stand-alone
mounting typically in a control panel or separate enclosure
GHCGFEP and GHBGFEP are earth leakage breakers,
rated for 30 mA ground fault protection
On all three-phase delta (240V) grounded B phase
applications, refer to Eaton
480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for
three-phase delta (480V) grounded B phase applications
All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common
trip type
Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 20A. Switching duty
rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications
Suitable for reverse-feed applications
HACR rated
29
30
31
32
33
Terminals
Line side (on GHC) and load side (on GHC and GHB) terminals
are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound .
Table 27.4-54. Terminals
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Range
1520
2560
Clamp
Pressure
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
#14#10 AWG
#10 1/0 AWG
34
35
36
37
Single
38
Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.

Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
1570A breakers only.
39
Table 27.4-53. Terminal Types

Circuit Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
1520
25100
Clamp (plated steel)

Pressure (aluminum body)
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #1410
(1) #101/0
1520
2560
Clamp
Pressure
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #14#10 AWG

(1) #101/0 AWG
Figure 27.4-6. Electrical Schematic
28
40
Do not ground neutral anywhere on load side of breaker.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 102
Series C Selection DataF-Frame
22
23
Series C, F-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic 10225A
Electronic RMS 15225A
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
F-Frame Breaker
Number Width
of Poles
Height
Depth
1
2
1.38 (34.8)
2.75 (69.9)
6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
3
4
4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
Ratings
100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
34
EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDC,
HFDDC
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,

50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,
125, 150
35
FD, HFD, FDC
175, 200, 225
38
EDB
EDS
2, 3
2, 3
N.I.T.
ED
EDH
EDC
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
EHD
1
2, 3
Types
Frame
Ratings
FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
225
100, 110, 125, 150, 160,

175, 200, 225
160
80
Trip
Type Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
277
480
600
125
250
22,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
N.I.T.
65,000
100,000
200,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
N.I.T.
18,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
240
FDB
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
18,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
FD
FD
FDE
1
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
18,000
10,000
10,000
HFD
HFD
HFDE
1
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
FDC
FDCE
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
200,000
100,000
35,000
25,000
22,000
HFDDC
N.I.T.
42,000

ED, EDH, EDC
37
Number
of Poles
Frame
36
Circuit
Breaker
Type
33

Current limiting.
Electronics available on three-pole only.
HFDDC is UL only and is not tested to other standards.
Interrupting rating is 35,000A at 600 Vdc with three poles in series, for ungrounded systems only.

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog Number
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #14#10
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #44/0
2.54
2.550
2595
2595
3T20FB
3T100FB
3TA150FB
3TA225FD
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
(1) #14#4
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #6300 kcmil
2.516
2.550
2595
16150
3TA50FB
3TA100FD
3T150FB
3TA225FDK
Package of
3 Terminals

20 (EHD)
100
150
225
Steel
Steel
Aluminum
Aluminum
Optional Pressure Terminals

50
100
150
225

Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Aluminum

Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125,

150, 160
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
70, 80
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-27
Sheet 27 103
Series C Selection DataJ-Frame
Series C, J-Frame

Number
of Poles
JDB
JD
HJD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
JDC
HJDDC
2, 3, 4
3
I.T.
I.T.
200,000

Trip
Type
22
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

240
Volts DC
600
250
600
35,000
35,000
65,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
100,000
35,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
480
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.

Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
8 milliseconds time constant.
Current limiting.

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
J-Frame Breaker
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
Cu/Al
Cu
(1) #4350 kcmil

(1) #4350 kcmil
25185
25185
TA250KB
T250KB
Number
of Poles
Width
Depth
2, 3
4.13
(104.8)
10.00
(254.0)
4.06
(103.2)
5.50
(139.7)
10.00
(254.0)
4.06
(103.2)
250
250

Aluminum
Stainless steel
Ratings
JDB, JD, HJD

JDC, HJDDC
70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

225, 250
25
26
27
28
30
31
32

Frame
24
29

Height
Terminal
Body
Material
23
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 104
Series C Selection DataK-Frame
22
Series C, K-Frame
Table 27.4-68. NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
24
DK
KDB
KD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
25
HKD
KDC
HKDDC
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
CKD
CHKD
3
3
23
26

27

28

29
31
32
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
480
600
250
600
65,000
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
25,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
100,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
35,000
65,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
100,000
35,000
65,000
25,000
35,000
240

Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
8 milliseconds time constant.
Current limiting.
100% rated.

K-Frame Breaker
30
Trip
Type

Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
5.50
(139.7)
10.13
(257.2)
4.06
(103.2)
7.22
(183.4)
10.13
(257.2)
4.06
(103.2)
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/Wire
Range/Number
Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
TA300K
TA350K

225
350
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
3350 (1)
250500 (1)
35185
120240
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0250 (2)
95120
2TA400K
3TA400K
4TA400K
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

Frame
Ratings
225
350
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
3350 (1)
50500 (1)
35185
120240
T300K
T350K
400
Copper
Cu
3/0250 (2)
95120
2T400K
3T400K
4T400K
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2/0250 (2)
or
2/0500 (1)
70120
70240
70240
2TA401K
3TA401K
4TA401K
DK, KDB, KD, HKD, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

KDC, HKDDC,
225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Table 27.4-66. Digitrip 310+ Electronic

Trip Units
Frame
Ratings
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
500750 (1)
300400
KD, CKD, HKD,

CHKD, KDC
55, 60, 70, 90, 100, 110, 125,

150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250,
300, 315, 350, 400
2TA402K
3TA402K
4TA402K
400
Copper
Cu/Al
500750 (1)
2T402K
3T402K
4T402K
Table 27.4-67. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip

Unit Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
KD, CKD, HKD,

CHKD, KDC
70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150,

175, 200, 225, 250, 300,
350, 400

Individually packed.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
Two-pole kit.
Three-pole kit.
Four-pole kit.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-29
Sheet 27 105
Series C Selection DataL-Frame
Series C, L-Frame

Number
of Poles
LDB
LD, CLD
HLD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
HLDDC
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
100,000
200,000
200,000

L-Frame Breaker
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
8.25
(209.6)
10.75
(273.1)
4.06
(103.2)
11.00
(279.4)
10.75
(273.1)
4.06
(103.2)

Ratings
LDB, LD, CLD,

HLD, CHLD,
LDC, CLDC,
HLDDC
300, 350, 400, 450,

500, 600
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

240
Volts DC
600
250
600
35,000
35,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
22,000
25,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
30,000
42,000
35,000
480
22

L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
Incorporating T/M trip unit only.
100% rated.
Current limiting.
23
24
25
26
27
28
Frame
Trip
Type
Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/
Number of
Conductors
Metric
Wire Range
(mm2)
29
Catalog
Number
30

(two-pole kit)
(three-pole kit)
(four-pole kit)
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
(1) 4/0600 kcmil
120300
2TA401LDK
3TA401LDK
4TA401LDK
500
600
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) 250350 kcmil

(2) 400500 kcmil
120150
185240
TA602LD
2TA603LDK (two-pole kit)
3TA603LDK (three-pole kit)
4TA603LDK (four-pole kit)
120150
T602LD
Optional Copper Pressure Type Terminals

600

Copper
Cu
(2) 250350 kcmil

Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

Rating Plugs
31
32
33
34
Frame
Rating Plugs
35
LDB, LD, CLD,

HLD, CHLD,
LDC, CLDC
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600

300/600 adjustable
36
37

Unit Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
LD, CLD, HLD,

CHLD, LDC,
CLDC
70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400,
500, 600
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 106
Series C Selection DataM-Frame
22
23
Series C, M-Frame
24

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
MDL, CMDL
HMDL, CHMDL
2, 3
2, 3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

25

26
Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts DC
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

240
480
600
250
65,000
100,000
50,000
65,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
25,000

Two poles or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL,
HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated.
100% rated. Not for use on DC.

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
27
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) #1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(2) 500750 kcmil
TA700MA1
TA800MA2
TA801MA
(2) 2/0500 kcmil

(3) 3/0300 kcmil
T600MA1
T800MA1

600
800
800
28
29
M-Frame Breaker
30
31
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum

Width
Height
8.25 (209.6)
16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.2)
600
800

Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Depth
32
33
34
35
Frame
Ratings
MDL
300, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800

Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
MDL
400, 500, 600, 700, 800,

400/800 adjustable
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-31
Sheet 27 107
Series C Selection DataN-Frame
Series C, N-Frame

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
240
277
ND, CND
HND
CHND
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
NDC
CNDC
NDU
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
300,000
100,000
100,000
150,000

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

480
600
24
65,000
65,000
75,000
25

Width
Height
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
(2) 1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
(3) 500750 kcmil
50300
95185
120300
300400
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1
N-Frame Breaker
Number
of Poles
Wire
Type
Depth
700
1000
1200
1200
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
26
27

Terminal
Body
Material
23
25,000
35,000
35,000

100% rated.
800A maximum rating.
Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac.
Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
22
28
29
30

2, 3
8.25
(209.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
11.13
(282.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
700
1000
1200

Copper
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0500 kcmil

(3) 3/0500 kcmil
(4) 3/0400 kcmil

Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
800
1200
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800

600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,1200
Rating Plugs
400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200
31
32
34

Unit Rating Plugs
800
1200
T700NB1
T1000NB1
T1200NB3
33
Frame
70300
95300
95185
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 108
Series C Selection DataR-Frame
22
Series C, R-Frame
23
24

Circuit
Breaker
Frame
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
RD
CRD
RDC
CRDC
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
25
1600
1600
2000
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
277
480
600
125
125
200
200
65
65
100
100
50
50
65
65
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Hardware
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
English
English
English
(4) 5001000 kcmil

(4) 1600 kcmil
(6) 2600 kcmil
300500
50300
35300
TA1600RD
T1600RD
TA2000RD
Wire Terminal
28
31
240

100% rated versions.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
27
30
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
26
29
R-Frame Breaker

Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
15.50
(393.7)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
20.00
(508.0)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)

Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
1600
800, 1000, 1200, 1250,

1400, 1500, 1600
2000
1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000
2500
1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
Table 27.4-88. Digitrip 510/610/810/910

and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
1600
2000
2500
800, 1000, 1200, 1600

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
1600, 2000, 2500
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-33
Sheet 27 109
Series G Accessories and Modifications

Table 27.4-91. Series G Breaker Accessories and Modifications
Breaker Frame
Internal
22
Accessories
Alarm lockout (make/break)
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
Shunt trip
Control wire kit
Multi-wire kit
End cap kit
Terminal cover
Terminal shields
Interphase barriers
Handle mechanisms
26
Electrical operator
Drawout cassette
Earth leakage/ground fault protector
Power monitoring and metering module
Cause-of-Trip LED module
Ammeter/Cause-of-Trip display
DIgitrip 310+ test kit
Rear connecting studs

Plug-in adapters
32
33
34
35
Moisture fungus treatment
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB
31
Modifications
29
30
Sliding bar/walking beam interlock
Key interlock kit
27
Padlockable handle lock hasp
Padlockable handle block
25
28
Handle extension
Non-padlockable handle block
24
Terminal end covers
23
Only one per pole.

Refer to the Eaton.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 110
Series C Breaker Accessories and Modifications
22
Table 27.4-92. Series C Breaker Accessories and Modifications

Breaker Frame
Termination Accessories
23
Line and load terminals
Plug nut
24
25
26
34
35
36
Interphase barriers
Multiwire connectors
38
39
40
41
42
Alarm lockout (1 make/1 break)
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)/alarm lockout
Low energy shunt trip
Key interlock kit
Sliding bar interlock
Walking beam interlock
Electrical (solenoid) operator
IQ Energy Sentinel
LFD current limiter
Plug-in adapters
Electrical (motor) operator
Drawout cassette
Rear connecting studs
Door hardware/accessories
Solid-state (electronic) test kit
Handle mechanisms
Handle extension
Ammeter/Cause-of-Trip display
Cause-of-Trip LED module
Power monitoring and metering module (PM3)
Digitrip 310+ test kit
Modifications
Special calibration
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
Marine application

43
Panelboard connecting straps
37
Terminal shields
Cylinder lock
33
32
31
Standard shunt trip
30
29
28
Control wire terminal kit
27
Make only (one pole).

Requires two breakers.
Refer to the Eaton.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-35
Sheet 27 111
High Instantaneous Breakers
High Instantaneous
Circuit Breaker for
General Description
Eatons Electrical Sector introduces
new high-magnetic withstand moldedcase circuit breakers, specifically
designed for critical operations and
selective coordination requirements.
The high-magnetic withstand LHH
and NHH frames continue the legacy
of circuit breaker innovation for which
Eaton is recognized throughout the
world. The LHH and NHH breakers
are equipped with 125 to 400A trip
units with high-magnetic capability.
This design enables the breakers
to withstand up to 90 times rated
current before opening under shortcircuit conditions.
The LHH and NHH circuit breakers
incorporate a higher level of instantaneous pickup, thus allowing for higher
current levels of selective coordination.
Standard molded-case circuit breakers
typically are furnished with a magnetic
pickup or electronic instantaneous
adjustment or instantaneous override
set at 10 times (10x) the continuous
trip rating.

Eatons LHH and NHH molded-case
circuit breakers are furnished with a
higher level of magnetic pickup or
electronic instantaneous settings
as indicated in Table 27.4-95. These
higher levels of magnetic pickup and
electronic instantaneous values
in turn allow the system designer to
obtain selective coordination at fault
current levels up to these higher ratings.
Greater values of selective coordination
are available based on manufacturer
tested combinations using the LHH
and NHH as line-side breakers and
standard breakers as load-side devices.
Refer to IA01200002E to determine the
maximum fault values that selective
coordination achieves. When the lineside and load-side molded-case circuit
breaker trip ratings are chosen to
coordinate in the overload range, they
also can be selectively coordinated in
the fault range up to the values listed
in Table 27.4-95 or IA01200002E. For
overcurrents protected by circuit
breakers on the load-side of the LHH or
NHH, only the effected load-side circuit
breaker will open, while the line-side
LHH and/or NHH circuit breakers remain
closed, thus providing continuity of
power to the other critical loads supplied
by the LHH or NHH circuit breakers.
Benefits of Using the LHH and

NHH Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Customer expectations and codes
are driving product development to
protect customers critical operations.
NEC 2005 and 2008 requires circuits
with elevators, emergency systems,
legally required standby systems,
health care essential systems and
critical operation power systems to be
selectively coordinated. Simply stated,
only the closest protective device
directly protecting the circuit having

an overcurrent (overload or fault)
condition should open.
All other overcurrent protective
devices within these systems shall
remain closed. Similarly, backup
power system designs of a critical
nature that are not code mandated may
also require overcurrent protective
devices to be selectively coordinated
as much as practicable to provide a
higher level of uptime.
Proven Technology and Performance

The LHH is based on the Series G
L-Frame circuit breaker, sharing the
same small footprint and field-fit
accessories as the L-Frame breaker.
The NHH is based on the Series G
N-Frame circuit breaker and shares the
same footprint and accessories as the
N-Frame breaker. NHH accessories
must be factory installed.
The LHH incorporates a thermalmagnetic trip unit with fixed thermal
and fixed magnetic settings. The NHH
has an OPTIM electronic trip unit
with LSI adjustment capabilities. The
instantaneous setting is adjustable
from 1000 to 4000A or may be turned
off to default to the frame override
of 14,000A. A hand-held OPTIMizer
must be used with the NHH to adjust
short-time delay and instantaneous;
however, the long delay pickup is
fixed and cannot be adjusted.
The LHH and NHH breakers are
available in Eatons panelboards
and switchboards.

UL
CSA
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Product Selection
38
Table 27.4-93. LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers

Ampere
Rating
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
LSI Electronic Trip Unit
LHH Frame
NHH Frame
39
125
150
175
LHH3125FFG
LHH3150FFG
LHH3175FFG
NHH3150T52X15
NHH3175T52X15
40
200
225
250
LHH3200FFG
LHH3225FFG
LHH3250FFG
NHH3200T52X15
NHH3225T52X15
NHH3250T52X15
41
300
350
400
LHH3300FFG
LHH3350FFG
LHH3400FFG
NHH3300T52X15
NHH3350T52X15
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 112
22
LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics
Three-pole
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125400A LHH
150350A NHH
Trip units:
LHHthermal-magnetic
NHHLSI electronic trip unit
Table 27.4-94. Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Description
NHH
400
350
100
65
35
42
100
65
35
220 Vac
415 Vac
690 Vac
125/250 Vdc
100
70
25
22
100
70
25
Number of poles
Ampere range
3
125400
3
150350
Max. rated current (amperes)
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
250 Vac
IEC 60947-2
No rating plugs required

Factory-sealed breakers
LHH uses same internal and
external accessories as standard
Series G L-Frame circuit breaker
NHH uses same internal and
external accessories as standard
Series G N-Frame circuit breaker
Breaker Type
LHH
Table 27.4-95. Continuous Current Ratings

Continuous
Current
Rating
Amperes
LHH
Magnetic
Trip Point
Amperes
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
NHH
Instantaneous
Trip Point
Amperes
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
Short Delay
Pickup
Amperes
125
150
175
2500
2500
4000
20x
16x
22x
14,000
14,000
93x
80x
2251200
2601400
200
225
250
4000
6000
6000
20x
26x
24x
14,000
14,000
14,000
70x
62x
56x
3001600
3381800
3752000
300
350
400
6000
6000
6000
20x
17x
15x
14,000
14,000
47x
40x
4502400
5252800
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-37
Sheet 27 113
22
Table 27.4-96. Dimensions

Description
Height
Width
Depth
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
LHH
NHH
10.13 (257.3)
16.00 (406.4)
5.48 (139.2)
8.25 (209.5)
4.09 (103.9)
5.50 (139.7)
12.36 (5.6)
46.80 (21.2)
4.06
(103.1)
3.16
(80.3)
5.58
141.7)
10.13
(257.3)
1.92
(48.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.69
(68.3)
26
27
28
29
5.38
(136.7)
Front Cover Cutout
24
25
CL Breaker
2.43
(61.7)
R 0.25
(6.4)
23
Front View Four-Pole
30
Side View
Figure 27.4-7. L-Frame
31
CL Breaker
32
3.44
(87.4)
R 0.25
(6.4)
33
1.91
(48.5)
9.25
(235.0)
16.00
(406.4)
1.50
(38.1)
3.68
(93.5)
3.19
(81.0)
34
35
8.25
(209.6)
5.50
(139.7)
Front View Three-Pole
Side View
36
6.38
(162.1)
Front Cover Cutout
37
38
Figure 27.4-8. N-Frame
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 114
22
Motor Circuit Protectors, 31200A
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Motor Circuit Protectors 31200A
Catalog Numbering System

Note: This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers
for circuit breakers or trip units.
Table 27.4-97. HMCP
31
Table 27.4-98. GMCP/HMCPE
HMCP 003 A0 C
GMCP/HMCPE 003 A0 C
32
Motor Circuit
Protector Type
33
HMCP = 3-pole
HM2P = 2-pole
HMCPS= 3-pole
34
Continuous
Ampere Rating
35
003 = 3
007 = 7
015 = 15
025 = 25
030 = 30
050 = 50
070 = 70
100 = 100
150 = 150
250 = 250
400 = 400
600 = 600
800 = 800
12 = 1200
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Motor Circuit
Protector Type
Magnetic Trip Range/

NEMA Starter Size
A0 = 930/0
C0 = 2170/0
E0 = 45150/0
D0 = 4060/0
H1 = 90300/1
G2 = 80120/2
K2 = 150500/2
J2 = 115170/2
M2 = 210700/2
L3 = 160240/3
R3 = 3001000/3
T4 = 4501500/4
U4 = 7502500/4
A5 = 350700/5
C5 = 450900/5
Non-aluminum terminals
W/O terminals
Load terminals only
Line terminals only
Stainless steel terms
(150A frame only)
No Suffix = Standard terminals on
line and load
(electronic)
On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.
=
=
=
=
=
GMCP = 3-pole
HMCPE = 3-pole
D5 = 5001000/5
F5 = 6251250/5
G5 = 7501500/5
J5 = 8751750/5
K5 = 10002000/5
L5 = 11252250/5
W5 = 12502500/5
N5 = 15003000/5
R5 = 17503500/5
X5 = 20004000/5
L6 = 18006000/6
X6 = 5002500
Y6 = 10004000
X7 = 16006400
Y8 = 24009600
Suffix
C
W
X
Y
S
Magnetic Trip Range

GMCP
Continuous
Ampere Rating
003 = 3
007 = 7
015 = 15
030 = 30
050 = 50
060 = 60
063 = 63
070 = 70
100 = 100
A0 =
C0 =
E0 =
H1 =
K2 =
J2 =
M2 =
1530
3570
75150
150300
250500
300600
320630
HMCPE
A0 =
C0 =
E0 =
H1 =
K2 =
M2 =
R3 =
T3 =
933
2177
45165
90330
150550
210770
3001100
5001500
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum
terminals
Table 27.4-99. 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum

Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes)
MCP Catalog Number
JG-Frame
250
5001000
6251250
7501500
HMCPJ250D5L
HMCPJ250F5L
HMCPJ250G5L
8751750
10002000
11252250
12502500
HMCPJ250J5L
HMCPJ250K5L
HMCPJ250L5L
HMCPJ250W5L
11252250
15003000
17503500
HMCPL600L6G
HMCPL600N6G
HMCPL600R6G
20004000
22504500
25005000
30006000
HMCPL600X6G
HMCPL600Y6G
HMCPL600P6G
HMCPL600M6G
LG-Frame
600
43

UL listed for use with Eaton motor starters.

Equipped with an electronic trip device.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-39
Sheet 27 115
Motor Circuit Protector

Catalog Numbers and Ranges
Accessories
Tables are available to provide specific

catalog numbers and application
ranges for the G-Frame (GMCP),
E-Frame (HMCPE), J-Frame (HMCP)
and K-Frame (HMCP) motor circuit
protectors. Motor circuit protector
models are available with earth
leakage ground fault protection.
Models are also available for motor
starters provided with electronic
overload relays rather than thermal
overload relays, such as the Eatons
Advantage motor starter.
Similar tables for the selection of

the settings are available with motor
control products that use motor circuit
protectors. As required by the NEC,
the HMCP setting is selected by using
the actual full load ampere data from
the motor nameplate. The corresponding trip settings provided are within
13 times the minimum full load
amperes of the motor as required
by the NEC. The NEC allows a higher
setting for Design B energy efficient
motors.
Termination Accessories
Line and load terminals

Keeper nut/plug nut
Control wire terminal kit
Terminal shields
Terminal end covers
Interphase barriers
ELC current limiter
Multiwire connector
Only one internal accessory per

pole maximum
Alarm lockout (make/break)
Auxiliary switch/alarm lockout
Shunt tripstandard
Shunt triplow energy

Key interlock kit
Sliding bar interlockrequires
two breakers
Electrical (solenoid) operator
Handle mechanism
Door hardware/accessories
DIN rail adapter (GMCP only)
Modifications

Freeze test
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
See Volume 4Circuit Protection

Catalog, CA08100005E, (Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers, Tab 2) for detailed
tables.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 116
Motor Protector Circuit Breaker
22
Series G Motor Protector

Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
23
24
25
Product Selection
Table 27.4-100. JGMP Catalog Numbers
Continuous
Amperes
35 kAIC
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
50
100
160
250
JGMPS050G
JGMPS100G
JGMPS160G
JGMPS250G
JGMPH050G
JGMPH100G
JGMPH160G
JGMPH250G
Continuous
Amperes
50 kAIC
65 kAIC
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
250
400
600
630
LGMPS250G
LGMPS400G
LGMPS600G
LGMPS630G
LGMPH250G
LGMPH400G
LGMPH600G
LGMPH630G
Table 27.4-101. LGMP Catalog Numbers
26
27
28
Technical Data
Table 27.4-102. JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
Series G Motor Protector
Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
30
32
630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
Note: For pre-trip alarm option, order style number 5721B31G02.
29
31
General Description
Eliminates need for separate
overload relay.
Maximum Rated Current (Amperes)
250
Breaker Type
JGMPS
JGMPH
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz

IEC 60947-2
Can be used with contactor
to eliminate need for overload
relay and still create manual
motor control
Meets requirement for motor
branch protection, including:
Disconnecting means
Branch circuit short-circuit
protection
Overload protection
220240 Vac
I cu
I cs
85
85
100
100
380415 Vac
I cu
I cs
40
40
70
70
660690 Vac
I cu
I cs
12
6
14
7
33
34
35
36
65 kAIC
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac
85
100
480 Vac
35
65
600 Vac
25
35
Number of poles
Ampere range
50250
50250
Table 27.4-103. LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range

Maximum Rated Current (Amperes)
630
Breaker Type
LGMPS
LGMPH
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz
37
Features
38
Phase unbalance protection

Phase loss protection
Hot trip/cold trip
High load alarm
Pre-detection trip relay option
Class 10, 15, 20, 30 protection
39
40
IEC 60947-2
UL 489 rating
CSA C22.2
41
IEC 60947-2
NEMA UL 489
220240 Vac
I cu
I cs
85
85
100
100
380415 Vac
I cu
I cs
50
50
70
70
660690 Vac
I cu
I cs
20
10
25
13
240 Vac
85
100
480 Vac
50
65
600 Vac
25
35
Number of poles
Ampere range
250630
250630
630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-41
Sheet 27 117
Molded-Case Circuit
and Metering Module (PM3)
Communications
The PM3 provides the following

metering, monitoring and
communications functions:
Metering
Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
Phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Iavg)

Phase-to-phase voltages
(Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vavg)
Phase-to-neutral voltages
(Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vavg)
Real power (kW)total and
per phase
Reactive power (kVAR)total and
per phase
Apparent power (kVA)total and
per phase
Power factortotal and per phase
Real energy (WHr)forward,
reverse and net
Reactive Energy (VARHr)forward,
reverse and net
Apparent energy (VAHr)forward,
reverse and net
General Description
Accuracy
The Power Monitoring and Metering

Module (PM3) is a UL-listed add-on
communications module that
mounts directly to the load side
of three-pole molded-case circuit
breakers, similar to an earth leakage
module. The PM3 adds revenue
accurate power metering and breaker
status monitoring to new and/or
existing Series C and Series G
breakers. Regardless of the type of trip
unit (thermal-magnetic or electronic),
the PM3 can be applied in applications
where power metering, circuit breaker
monitoring and/or communications
is essential. The PM3 is extremely
flexible and can be used in main
breaker or feeder breaker applications.
The automatic voltage sensing
means that the same PM3 module
can be used on 208, 240 or 480 Vac
applications. It can also be installed
in reverse-feed and reverse-phasing
(CBA) applications.
Voltage and amperage: 0.5% of

reading
Watts, VARs, VA: 1% of reading
Energy: 1% per ANSI C12.1
Revenue Grade Accuracy: ANSI C12.1
Monitoring
Breaker status
Open/close statusthru breaker
auxiliary contact
Tripped statusthru breaker bell
alarm contact
Unit healthflashing status LED
when module is powered
Breaker must include auxiliary contact

and bell alarm contact accessory.
INCOM and Modbus RTU

communications
Shielded-twisted pair
communications
Daisy-chaining of multiple units
Web-based communications
available through a Power
Xpert Gateway
TX and RX communication
diagnostic LEDs
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Metering Module
Control Power
The PM3 is powered directly from the
circuit breaker voltage for applications
480 Vac and below. External control
power is not required for these
applications. However, an auxiliary
24 Vdc external power input is
included for applications requiring
communications capability even when
the breaker circuit is de-energized.
Note: For 600V applications, external 24 Vdc
auxiliary power is required.
30
31
32
33
34
Product Selection
Table 27.4-104. PM3 Product Selection
PM3 Modules
Frame
480V
600V
PM3FM
PM3JM
PM3LM
PM3FI480
PM3JI480
PM3LI480
PM3FI600
PM3JI600
PM3LI600
Modbus
FD
JG
KD and LG
35
Catalog Number
36
37
INCOM
FD
JG
KD and LG
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 118
22

Metered parameters
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Ia, Ib, Ic
Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn
Apparent Energy, Forward Real
Energy, Reverse Real Energy, Net
Real Energy, Lagging Reactive
Energy, Leading Reactive Energy,
Net Reactive Energy
Apparent Power A, B, C; Apparent
Power Total; Reactive Power A, B, C;
Reactive Power Total; Real Power A,
B, C; Real Power Total
Frequency, Apparent Power Factor,
Apparent PFA, Apparent PFB,
Apparent PFC
Table 27.4-105. PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications
for Modbus RTU
Description
Specification
Current Inputs
Pickup current
0.3A rms
Maximum reported current
FD/JG 250A rms

KD/LD 630A rms
Accuracy 0.5%
0.5% of reading
Voltage Inputs
Range

Supported systems
Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral

Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems
Input impedance
996 kiloohm/phase
Burden per phase
0.36 VA/phase max. at 600V;

0.014 VA at 120V
Phase voltage connections
Internal via screw terminal to busbar. For wye system, a neutral is

required to be connected to the PM3 on the right Phoenix connector.
Neutral connection
If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral

based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage. The system voltage must
be balanced for this to be accurate.
Frequency
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Accuracy
0.1 Hz
Resolution
0.1 Hz
Power and Energy

Accuracy
1% of reading (ANSI C12.1)
Isolation
32
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
20C to +50C
Storage temperature
20C to +50C
Operating humidity
5 to 95% RH noncondensing
Sensing Method
Voltage, current
True rms
Sampling rate
13.02K samples per second
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA
1.03 sec at 60 Hz
1.07 sec at 60 Hz
Power Supply (External)

DC voltage
1830 Vdc
Maximum current
30 mA at 24 Vdc
Burden
0.72W
Standard Communication Format

Connection type
Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common)
Com port baud rate
9600 or 19,200 bauds
Modbus address range
01247
Data format
Selectable (8, N, 1 | 8, N, 2 | 8,
Even, 1 | 8, Odd, 1)
Protocols
Modbus RTU
Internal termination resistor

selectable ON or OFF
Via DIP switch
Default: 19,200 bauds

Default: 8, N, 2
Default: Enabled
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-43
Sheet 27 119

22
1.38
(35.1)
2.88
(73.2)
0.69
(17.5)
3.50 (88.9)
3.39
(86.1)
3.19
(81.0)
Line End
3.63
(92.2)
3.63
(92.2)
On
Off
6.00
(152.4)
CL
Handle
4.50
(114.3)
1.72
(43.7)
0.86
(21.8)
5.77
(146.6)
4.92
(125.0)
24
5.77
(146.6)
On/I
CL
Handle
CL
Handle
S
RY EA
LED
Off/O
8.44
(214.4)
FACTO
O
N
Line End
23
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.81
(96.8)
CL
Handle
10.13
(257.3)
25
26
27
1 2 3 4 5 6
11.00
(279.4)
9.53
(242.1)
12.14
(308.4)
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
Tx
ON O
Rx
STATUS
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
MODBUS
COM
24 Vdc (+)
Power
24 Vdc ()
28
13.83
(351.3)
Network Address
N1
EARTH
123456789101112131415
2.06
(52.3)
3.34
(84.8)
Load End
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
3.42
(86.9)
3.94 (100.1)
4.13 (104.9)
Figure 27.4-9. FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
1.38
(35.1)
0.69
(17.5)
Load End
29
3.98
(101.1)
4.06
(103.1)
4.88 (124.0)
30
31
Figure 27.4-11. KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus

3.57 (90.7)
3.44
(87.4)
3.34
(84.8)
Line End
1.72
(43.7)
0.86
(21.8)
Line End
32
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
33
123456789101112131415
3.17
(80.5)
O
F
F
3.95
(100.3)
PUSH TO
TRIP
CL
Handle
CL
Handle
LED
S
RY EA
5.50
(139.7)
3.95
(100.3)
7.00
(177.8)
O
N
FACTO
10.50
(266.7)
O
N
1 2 3 4 5 6
12.00
(304.8)
5.58
(141.7)
4.73
(120.1)
CL
Handle
8.44
(214.4)
12.14
(308.4)
5.58
(141.7)
CL
Handle
10.13
(257.3)
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
Tx
ON O
Rx
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
STATUS
Network Address
N1
A
B
MODBUS
COM
EARTH
24 Vdc (+)
24 Vdc ()
Power
Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
34
35
36
13.82
(351.0)
37
123456789101112131415
2.06
(52.3)
3.34
(84.8)
Load End
4.13 (104.9)
3.42
(86.9)
4.41 (112.0)
Figure 27.4-10. JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
Load End
3.98
(101.1)
4.06
(103.1)
5.43 (137.9)
Figure 27.4-12. LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
38
39
40
Table 27.4-106. PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights

Description
Weight in lbs (kg)
Basic unit in inches (mm)
Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm)
CA08104001E
Frame
FD
1.26 (0.57)
JG
1.60 (0.73)
KD/LG
2.25 (1.02)
FD
4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
JG
4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
KD/LG
5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139.2 x 94.0 x 103.2)
FD/JG
8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (203.2 x 130.3 x 139.7)
KD/LG
6.25 x 8.25 x 7.00 (158.7 x 209.5 x 177.8)
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 120
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
22
30 mA Ground Fault
(Earth Leakage) Modules
23
24
Table 27.4-108. EG-Frame Earth Leakage

Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
125
125
3
4
ELEBE3125G
ELEBE4125G
400
400
3
4
ELLBN3400W
ELLBN4400W
600
600
3
4
ELLBN3600W
ELLBN4600W
Table 27.4-109. JG-Frame Ground Fault

Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted,
120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
25
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
150
150
3
4
ELJBN3150W
ELJBN4150W
250
250
3
4
ELJBN3250W
ELJBN4250W
26
27
28
Clockwise from Left: JG, LG
MCCBs Shown with Ground
Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
General Description
Eaton offers a three- and four-pole
30 mA ground fault (earth leakage)
protection module for JG and LG
breakers. The module does not restrict
the use of other breaker accessories.
UL-listed modules are available for
JG and LG MCCBs. The JG and LG
modules are both bottom mounted
for circuits up to 160 and 250A (JG),
or 400 and 630A for the LG.
The module is completely self-contained
because the current sensor, relay and
power supply are located inside the
product. Current pickup settings are
selectable from 0.03 to 10A for all
IEC-rated modules and JG UL-listed
module, and 0.0330A for the LG
UL-listed modules. Time delays are
also selectable from instantaneous
to 1.0 second for 0.10A settings and
above. A current pickup setting of
0.03A defaults to an instantaneous
time setting regardless of the time
dials position. Two alarm contacts
come as standard: a 50% pretrip and
a 100% after trip, both based only on
earth leakage current levels.
40
Product Selection
41
Table 27.4-107. EG-Frame Ground Fault

120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
125
125
3
4
ELEBN3125G
ELEBN4125G
42
Table 27.4-111. LG-Frame Ground Fault

120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Table 27.4-110. JG-Frame Earth Leakage

Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
160
160
3
4
ELJBE3160W
ELJBE4160W
250
250
3
4
ELJBE3250W
ELJBE4250W
Table 27.4-112. LG-Frame Earth Leakage

Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
400
400
3
4
ELLBE3400W
ELLBE4400W
630
630
3
4
ELLBE3630W
ELLBE4630W
Table 27.4-113. Dimensions for Assembled

Breaker and Earth Leakage Module
Frame Height
Width
Depth
Three-Pole
EG
JG
LG
10.25 (260.3) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8)

11.25 (285.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7)
15.38 (390.7) 5.48 (139.2) 4.06 (103.1)
Four-Pole
EG
JG
LG
10.25 (260.3) 4.00 (101.6) 2.98 (75.8)

11.25 (285.8) 5.50 (139.7) 3.57 (90.7)
15.38 (390.7) 7.23 (183.6) 4.06 (103.1)
Figure 27.4-13. UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
43
Figure 27.4-14. IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-45
Sheet 27 121
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules
Current Limiting Circuit

Breaker Modules
These breakers are most commonly
applied when very high fault levels
are available and with applications
where the current limiting capability
is used upstream of the final load
to limit current to the load. Typical
loads include lighting and power
distribution, and motor controller
applications.

The combination of the Series G
E-Frame current limiting breaker
or HMCP and the current limiter
module provides the following
system protection:
Overloads, by using inverse time

current tripping characteristics of
the molded-case circuit breaker
General Overview
Product Selection
Power demand continues to grow in

new and existing facilities. To meet
increased demand, larger utility
supplies, spot networks and large
facility transformers are installed.
The increased capacity of the electrical
source provides increased fault
currents. In the past, 65 and 100 kA
overcurrent protective devices may
have suited the job. The new systems
require in excess of 100 kA shortcircuit protection. Eaton manufactures
non-fused current limiting modules
150 kA at 480 Vac. Unlike fused
current limiters with a one-time use,
the current limiter module provides
automatic reset of the module after
interruption. Reset the molded-case
circuit breaker to restore power to the
system without worry of finding the
correct replacement fuse.
Table 27.4-114. EG
General Description
Table 27.4-115. HMCP
The current limiting breaker modules

use a reverse loop stationary contact
arm. When high short-circuit current is
flowing through the contacts of these
modules, the positions of the reverse
loop and moving contact arm induce
opposing magnetic fields. The resulting flux lines cause rapid contact blowapart under fault conditions, resulting
in very high interrupting capacities
and providing current limiting
characteristics. Current limiting
breaker modules, in combination
with Series G E-Frame breakers,
are available from 15 to 100A and
have an interrupting rating up to
100 kA at 600 Vac.
CA08104001E
Low-level short circuits, by using

delay tripping characteristics of the
molded-case circuit breaker
High-level short circuits, by using
ultra-high-speed, blow-apart
contacts of the current limiting
module in series with the circuit
breaker contacts. The high-level
current limiting action is achieved
by the use of special design, blowapart contacts. The opening speed
of the contacts is amplified by the
repulsion force in the slot motor and
reverse loop stationary contact arm
to effectively separate the contacts
under high-level fault conditions
in less than one millisecond. The
rapid rise of arc voltage introduces
impedance into the system, thus
limiting the amount of the otherwise
available fault current
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
UL Listed
(NEMA/IEC Rated)
Base Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker
Breaker with
Line Side
Mounted
Current Limiter
Breaker with
Load Side
Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load

Terminations
Included
Interphase
Barrier Included
for Limiter
EGC3015FFG
EGC3016FFG
EGC3020FFG
EGC3015FFGQ01
EGC3016FFGQ01
EGC3020FFGQ01
EGC3015FFGQ02
EGC3016FFGQ02
EGC3020FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
32
EGC3025FFG
EGC3030FFG
EGC3032FFG
EGC3025FFGQ01
EGC3030FFGQ01
EGC3032FFGQ01
EGC3025FFGQ02
EGC3030FFGQ02
EGC3032FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
33
EGC3035FFG
EGC3040FFG
EGC3045FFG
EGC3035FFGQ01
EGC3040FFGQ01
EGC3045FFGQ01
EGC3035FFGQ02
EGC3040FFGQ02
EGC3045FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
34
EGC3050FFG
EGC3060FFG
EGC3063FFG
EGC3050FFGQ01
EGC3060FFGQ01
EGC3063FFGQ01
EGC3050FFGQ02
EGC3060FFGQ02
EGC3063FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
35
EGC3070FFG
EGC3080FFG
EGC3090FFG
EGC3100FFG
EGC3070FFGQ01
EGC3080FFGQ01
EGC3090FFGQ01
EGC3100FFGQ01
EGC3070FFGQ02
EGC3080FFGQ02
EGC3090FFGQ02
EGC3100FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
36
Two interphase barriers required on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase
barriers required on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.
Motor
Circuit
Protector
Breaker with
Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Breaker with
Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load

Terminations
Included
Interphase
Barrier Included
for Limiter
HMCPE003A0C
HMCPE007C0C
HMCPE015E0C
HMCPE003A0CQ01
HMCPE007C0CQ01
HMCPE015E0CQ01
HMCPE003A0CQ02
HMCPE007C0CQ02
HMCPE015E0CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
HMCPE030H1C
HMCPE050K2C
HMCPE070M2C
HMCPE030H1CQ01
HMCPE050K2CQ01
HMCPE070M2CQ01
HMCPE030H1CQ02
HMCPE050K2CQ02
HMCPE070M2CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
HMCPE100R3C
HMCPE100T3C
HMCPE100R3CQ01
HMCPE100T3CQ01
HMCPE100R3CQ02
HMCPE100T3CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
Two interphase barriers required on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase
barriers required on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.
31
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 122
22
23

Table 27.4-116. Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
Frame
Height
Width
Depth
EG
HMCP
9.66 (245.7)
9.66 (245.7)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
2.98 (75.8)
2.98 (75.8)
24
25
0.56
(14.2)
26
9.66
(245.4)
4.17
(105.9)
3.61
(91.7)
27
28
29
1.00
(25.4)
3.00
(76.2)
0.50
1.00 (12.7)
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
30
3.20
(81.3)
4.17
(105.9)
31
32
33
2.75 0.09
(69.9) (2.3)
34
35
0.78
(19.8)
0.41
(10.4)
36
Figure 27.4-15. EG-Frame with Current Limiter Module
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-47
Sheet 27 123
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Breakers
Current Limiting
Non-Fused Type
FCL-Frame 15100A,
LCL-Frame 125400A
FCL-Frame
LCL-Frame
Terminals
22
Breakers listed include line and load

terminals. Terminals are Underwriters
Laboratories listed for wire sizes and
types listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
To order optional aluminum terminals,
add suffix Z to breaker catalog
number listed.
23
24
25
Table 27.4-118. FCL Terminals

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
26
Standard Pressure Terminals

100
Al/Cu
#141/0
27
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

50
100
Al/Cu
Al/Cu
#14#4
#44/0
28
LCL-Frame Breaker

Frame
FCL
FCL-Frame Breaker

Table 27.4-117. FCL Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
Volts AC
Trip
(50/60 Hz) Type
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240
480
200,000
150,000
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
Number Width
of Poles
2, 3
LCL, LCLG 2, 3
Height Depth
4.13
8.75
3.50
(104.8) (222.3) (88.9)
8.25
16.00 4.00
(209.6) (406.4) (101.6)
Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.
Table 27.4-120. Thermal-Magnetic

Trip Ratings
Frame
Ratings
FCL
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,

60, 70, 80, 90, 100
Note: On all three-phase delta, grounded B

phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Table 27.4-121. SELTRONIC Electronic Trip

Unit Rating Plug
Frame
Ratings
LCL, LCLG 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250,

275, 300, 350, 400
Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.
Listed with Underwriters Laboratories

Except as Noted
Type LCL breakers are not defined in
Federal Specifications W-C-375-b.
29
30

Table 27.4-122. LCL Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
31
Volts AC
Trip
(50/60 Hz) Type
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240
480
600
200,000
200,000
100,000
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
32
33

34
Terminals
Two terminals are required per pole.
Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories
listed for wire type and range listed
below. When used with aluminum
cable, use joint compound.
35
Table 27.4-123. LCL Terminals
37
Maximum AWG/kcmil
Breaker
Wire Range/Number
Amperes of Conductors
Terminal
Catalog
Number
Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

225
400
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu

(1) #4250 kcmil Cu,
plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Cu
T225LA
T401LA
36
38
39
40

225
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu, or

(1) #4350 kcmil Al
TA225LA1
400
(1) #4250 kcmil Al/Cu,

plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA400LA1
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 124
22
23
Current LimitingFused Type

FB TRIPAC 15100A,
LA TRI-PAC 70400A
FB TRI-PAC
24
25
LA TRI-PAC
Terminals
Breakers listed include line and load
terminals. Terminals are Underwriters
Laboratories listed for wire sizes and
types listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
To order optional aluminum terminals,
add suffix Z to breaker catalog
number listed.
Table 27.4-124. FB TRI-PAC Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
26
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Standard Pressure Terminals

100
27
Al/Cu
(1) #141/0

50
100
28
Al/Cu
Al/Cu
(1) #14#4
(1) #44/0
LA TRI-PAC Breaker
29
30
31
32
33
FB TRI-PAC Breaker

Except as Noted
FB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a
and 26a circuit breakers as defined
in Federal Specification W-C-375b.

Underwriters Laboratories Listed
34
35
36
Frame Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth

Except as Noted
FB
2, 3
4.13
(104.8)
8.75
(222.3)
3.50
(88.9)
LA
2, 3
8.13
(206.4)
16.00
(406.4)
7.75
(196.9)
LA TRI-PAC breakers meet the

requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a
and 26a circuit breakers as defined
in Federal Specification W-C-375b.

Table 27.4-126. Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Ratings
Frame
Ratings
FB TRI-PAC
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100
LA TRI-PAC
70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

225, 250, 300, 350, 400

600 Vac maximum: 200,000A
symmetrical.
Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000A.

symmetrical.

B phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Terminals

listed for wire size and type listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add suffix Z to
complete breaker catalog number.

37
Table 27.4-127. LA TRI-PAC Terminals
38
Maximum AWG/kcmil
Breaker
Wire Range/Number
Amperes of Conductors
39
Terminal
Catalog
Number
40
41
225
225
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu

(1) #6250 kcmil Cu
T225LA
T225LBF
400
(1) #4250 kcmil Cu,

plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Cu
T401LA
42
43
225
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu, or

(1) #4350 kcmil Al/Cu
TA225LA1
400
(1) #4250 kcmil Al/Cu,

plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA400LA1
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-49
Sheet 27 125
Current LimitingFused Type

NB TRI-PAC 300800A,
PB TRI-PAC 6001600A
NB TRI-PAC
PB TRI-PAC
Terminals
listed for wire size and type listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add suffix Z to
complete breaker catalog number.
23
24
Table 27.4-128. NB TRI-PAC Terminals

Maximum AWG/kcmil
Ampere
Wire Range/Number
Rating
of Conductors
25
Terminal
Catalog
Number
26

350
700
800
1 #1600 kcmil Cu
2 2/0500 kcmil Cu
3 3/0500 kcmil Cu
22
T350NB
T700NB1
T1000NB1
27

700
800
800
2 #1500 kcmil Al/Cu

3 3/0400 kcmil Al/Cu
3 500750 kcmil Al/Cu
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1201NB1
NB TRI-PAC Breaker

Except as Noted
NB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16b, 17a and
26a circuit breakers as defined in
Federal Specification W-C-375b.
Frame Number Width

of Poles
Height
Depth
NB
2, 3
8.25
(209.6)
22.00
(558.8)
5.50
(139.7)
PB
2, 3
12.06
(306.4)
22.13
(562.0)
9.06
(230.2)
Table 27.4-130. Thermal-Magnetic Trip

Ratings
Frame
Ratings
NB TRI-PAC
300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
PB TRI-PAC
600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200,

1400, 1600
28
PB TRI-PAC Breaker

Except as Noted
PB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 17a and 26a
circuit breakers as defined in Federal
Specification W-C-375b.

symmetrical.

symmetrical.
31
32
33

Bus Bar Connectors
T Connector for Cu/Al Bus
Two required per pole. For rear bus

connection. Accepts up to four bus
bolts. May be rotated 90.

30

B phase applications, refer to Eaton.
29
34
35
36
37
38
T Connector for Cu/Al Bus
Cable Connector (Optional)

For T Connector. Accepts four
600 kcmil copper cables.
39
40
41
42
Optional Cable Connector
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 126
Selection DataCircuit Breaker Enclosures
22
23
NEMA 1 General Purpose
NEMA 4/4X, 5 Water and Dustproof
Surface or Flush Mounting

151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
Stainless SteelType 304,

Surface Mounting
151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
24
UL File Number E7819

CSA File Number LR84319
25
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location

Cast Aluminum, Explosion-Proof
Surface Mounting
151200A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
26
NEMA 1
27
28
29
30
31
Eatons NEMA 1 enclosed breakers are

designed for indoor use in commercial
buildings, apartment buildings and
other areas where a general purpose
enclosure is applicable. The breaker
is front operable and is capable of
being padlocked in the OFF position.
(Padlocking not available on enclosures
for QUICKLAG breakers.) Ratings
through 1200A are listed with
Underwriters Laboratories as suitable
for service entrance application. Both
surface and flush mounted enclosures
are available.
32

33
NEMA 3R Rainproof
Surface Mounting
34
Interchangeable Hubs (through 400A)

151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NEMA 4/4X, 5
This enclosure meets NEMA 4/4X and

5 requirements for water and dustproof
applications and has no knockouts or
other openings. It is particularly well
suited for use in dairies, borax mines,
breweries, paper mills and other process
industries. The operating handle can
be padlocked in the OFF position, and
is interlocked to prevent the door from
opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings
through 1200A are Underwriters
Laboratories listed as suitable for
service entrance application.
NEMA 12 Dustproof
Surface Mounting
No Knockouts or Other Openings
151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
35
40
41
42
43
Hazardous location, Class I, Groups B,

C, D, Divisions 1, 2; Class II, Groups E,
F, G, Divisions 1, 2. This special service
cast aluminum enclosure is supplied
with a wide, machined flanged cover to
prevent igniting outside atmospheres
by arcing from inside the enclosure.
Front operable, the handle padlocks
in the OFF position. Enclosures rated
600A and above have lift-off hinges for
ease of assembly.
Note: XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.
37
39
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location
UL File Number E84577 Enclosed

Circuit Breakers
36
38
Ratings through 1200A are listed by

Underwriters Laboratories as suitable
for service entrance application.
A NEMA 12 semi-dust-tight design
that includes knockouts is available.
These units are rated 15400A, 600 Vac,
500 Vdc.
NEMA 3R
This general purpose outdoor service

center employs a circuit breaker inside
a weatherproof sheet steel enclosure
to serve as a main disconnect and
protective device for feeder circuits.
The operating handle can be padlocked
in the OFF position, and is interlocked
to prevent the door from opening when
the breaker is ON. Ratings through
1200A are listed by Underwriters
Laboratories as suitable for service
entrance application.
NEMA 12 Dustproof

The Eaton Type 12 enclosure is

designed in line with specifications
for special industry application where
unusually severe conditions involving
oil, coolant, dust and other foreign
materials exist in the operating
atmosphere. The handle padlocks
in the OFF position and the cover is
interlocked with the handle mechanism
to prevent opening the cover with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-51
Sheet 27 127

To determine enclosed circuit breaker dimensions, first
select the desired frame size along with the desired NEMA
class of enclosure (from Table 27.4-131). This will determine
the enclosure catalog number.
Then, use Tables 27.4-135 through 27.4-141 to determine
appropriate dimensions for that selected catalog number.
Table 27.4-131. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide
Breaker
Frame
Breaker
Ampere
Range
15100
EHD, FD, FDB,

HFD, FDC
15100
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC,

EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
(F Frame)
EHD, FD, FDB
HFD, FDC
FD, FDB, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
JDB, JD, HJD, JDC
JD, JDB, HJD, JDC
KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK
15225
1550
60225
125225
100250
125250
125400
LD, LDB, HLD
300600
LD, LDB, HLD,

MDL, HMDL
MDL, HMDL, ND,
HND
300600
400800
4001200
Breaker
Frame
Breaker
Ampere
Range
NEMA
Class
Catalog
Number
1 surface
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
1 surface
1 flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
1 surface
1 flush
3R
SGDN100
RGDN100
JGDN100
DGDN100
WGDN100
SFDN100
FFDN100
RFDN100
JFDN100
DFDN100
WFDN100
SEF3
FEF3
REF3
7/9 cast alum.

7/9 cast alum.
1 surface
1 flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
1 surface
1 flush
3R
XFDN050B
XFDN225B
SFDN225
FFDN225
RFDN225
JFDN225
DFDN225
WFDN225
SJJ3
FJJ3
RJJ3
1 surface
1 flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
7/9 cast alum.
1 surface
1 flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
7/9 cast alum.
1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
7/9 cast alum.
SJDN250
FJDN250
RJDN250
JJDN250
DJDN250
WJDN250
XJDN250B
SKDN400
FKDN400
RKDN400
JKDN400
DKDN400
WKDN400
XKDN400B
SLDN600
RLDN600
JLDN600
WLDN600
XMCN800B
22
Enclosure
NEMA
Class
Catalog
Number
23
24
Series G Breakers
EGB, EGE, EGS,
EGH, EGC
15225
1 surface
1 flush
3R
3R
SEF3
FEF3
REF3
REG4
JGE, JGS, JGH,

JGC, JGU
100250
1 surface
1 flush
3R
3R
SJJ3
FJJ3
RJJ3
RJG4
LGE, LGS, LGH
250600
1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SLG630
RLG630
JLG630
WLG630
1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SLG630E
RLG630E
JLG630E
WLG630E
Enclosure
Series C Breakers
GC, GHC, GD
two- and three-pole only
GHCGFEP
single-pole only
Table 27.4-131. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers

Selection Guide (Continued)
25
26
27
Earth Leakage Breakers

LGE, LGS, LGH used
with ELLBN
250600
TRI-PAC Breakers
FB-P
15100
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
RFDN150
JFDN150
DFDN150
WFDN150
LA-P
70400
1 surface
3R
12
4/4X
SNDN1200
RNDN1200
JNDN1200
WNDN1200
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
JNDPN800
WNDPN800
NB-P

500800
Three- or four-pole.
65 kAIC at 480 Vac maximum.
Four-pole only.
Requires additional adapter plate.
1 surface
SNDN1200
3R
RNDN1200
12
JNDN1200
4/4X, 5 st. steel
WNDN1200
ND, HND
4001200
7/9 cast alum.
XNDN1200B
Suitable for use with single-pole breaker base mounting plate kit.
QCCBP required.
Maximum wire size: 4/0.
Three-pole only.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 128
22
Table 27.4-132. Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable

Maximum
Enclosure
Rating (Amperes)
23
24
Main Lug Size

Cu/Al
Ground Lug Size Catalog

Cu/Al
Number
100
(1) 141/0
(1) 142
DH100NK
100 (all others)
(1) 141/0
(1) 141/0
INK100
INK250
250
400
25
600
26
1200
27
28
(1) 4350 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil
(1) 4350 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil
INK250G
(1) 4750 kcmil or

(2) 1/0250 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil
INK400
(2) 250500 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil
(3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (1) #6250 kcmil

(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil
31
32
Description
Compliance
Conduit
Opening
Catalog
Number
A universal breather/drain
fitting is installed in the top
of an enclosure to provide
ventilation to minimize
condensation and in the
bottom to allow drainage
of accumulated condensation while maintaining
explosion-proof integrity.
Type BD:
NEMA 7Class I,
Groups C, D;
Class I, Zone 1,
Group IIB
NEMA 9Class II,
Groups F, G
0.50 (12.7)
XPBD2
INK1200
For use with RFDN100, SFDN100, SEF3, FEF3, REF3 and REG4
enclosures with breakers 100A and less.
For use with SJJ3, FJJ3, RJJ3 and RJG4 enclosures only.
Type DBB:
0.50 (12.7)
NEMA 7Class I,
Groups B,
C, D; Class I, Zone 1,
Group IIB
+ Hydrogen
NEMA 9Class II,
Groups E, F, G
XPDBB50
Table 27.4-133. Raintight HubsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Hub Diameter
Catalog
Number
Small Hubs
29
30
INK600
Table 27.4-134. Breather and Drain, Hazardous Enclosures

For use with

RGDN and RFDN
All rainproof enclosures
30400A are shipped with
plate over cutout. Hubs are
not supplied with screws
on 30400A enclosures.
Use screws from plate.
1.00 (25.4)
1.25 (31.8)
1.50 (38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
DS100H1
DS125H1
DS150H1
DS200H1
Large Hubs
For use with
RJDN. RKDN
has two cutouts
2.00 (50.8) DS200H2

2.50 (63.5) DS250H2
3.00 (76.2) DS300H2
Required if using Type DS hubs

on RJDN and RKDN enclosures DS900AK
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-53
Sheet 27 129
Technical Data and SpecificationsCircuit Breaker Enclosures
22
NEMA 1, 12, 12K, 3R
23
Note: Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Table 27.4-135. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted (See Figure 27.4-16)

Catalog
Number
Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Amperes A
B
SGDN100
SFDN100
SEF3
SFDN225
SJJ3
SJDN250
100
100
225
225
250
250
SKDN400
SLG630
SLG630E
SLDN600
SNDN1200

400
600
600
600
1200
17.50 (444.5)
19.13 (485.9)
23.45 (595.6)
23.25 (590.6)
34.69 (881.1)
34.70 (881.4)
8.56 (217.4)
9.13 (231.9)
8.38 (212.9)
8.56 (217.4)
10.90 (276.9)
10.92 (277.4)
38.81 (985.8)
51.06 (1296.9)
51.06 (1296.9)
45.88 (1165.4)
61.22 (1555.0)
11.06 (280.9)
21.87 (555.5)
21.87 (555.5)
14.31 (363.5)
21.44 (544.6)
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
6.28 (159.5)
5.20 (132.1)
6.51 (165.4)
6.28 (159.5)
7.49 (190.2)
7.20 (182.9)
13.03 (331.0)
17.00 (431.8)
18.88 (479.6)
18.75 (476.3)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
1.20 (30.5)
N/A
1.13 (28.7)
1.20 (30.5)
1.95 (49.5)
1.88 (47.8)
17.19 (436.6)
18.81 (477.8)
23.00 (584.2)
22.94 (582.7)
34.22 (869.2)
34.39 (873.5)
12 (5)
13 (6)
15 (7)
15 (7)
27 (12)
31 (14)
10.94 (277.9)
9.96 (253.0)
9.96 (253.0)
12.38 (314.5)
15.41 (391.4)
34.00 (863.6)
51.63 (1311.5)
51.63 (1311.5)
46.56 (1182.6)
61.84 (1570.7)
9.28 (235.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.94 (49.3)
1.91 (48.5)
1.97 (50.0)
38.50 (977.9)
50.13 (1273.3)
50.13 (1273.3)
45.56 (1157.2)
60.91 (1547.1)
53 (24)
90 (41)
90 (41)
81 (37)
178 (81)

Total width, including door clip is 9.95 inches (252.7 mm).
Single centered mounting hole provided.
Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil.
For earth leakage applications. Includes an opening so that the settings are accessible without removing the cover.
Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Amperes
A
B
FFDN100
FEF3
FFDN225
FJJ3
FJDN250
FKDN400
100
225
225
250
250
400

18.81 (477.8)
24.50 (622.3)
24.56 (623.8)
36.00 (914.4)
36.02 (914.9)
40.13 (1019.3)
9.72 (246.9)
9.75 (247.7)
9.72 (246.9)
12.25 (311.2)
12.23 (310.6)
12.38 (314.5)
25
26
27
28
29
30
Table 27.4-136. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted (See Figure 27.4-17)

Catalog
Number
24
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
6.28 (159.5)
6.51 (165.4)
6.28 (159.5)
7.49 (190.2)
7.20 (182.9)
10.94 (277.9)
13.03 (331.0)
18.88 (479.6)
18.75 (476.3)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
34.00 (863.6)
1.86 (47.2)
1.82 (46.2)
1.86 (47.2)
2.63 (66.8)
1.88 (47.8)
2.94 (74.7)
18.50 (469.9)
23.00 (584.2)
24.25 (616.0)
34.22 (869.2)
35.70 (906.8)
39.81 (1011.2)
12 (5)
15 (7)
15 (7)
27 (12)
32 (15)
53 (24)

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Figure 27.4-16. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted
Figure 27.4-17. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 130
22
23
Table 27.4-137. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof (See Figure 27.4-18)

Catalog
Number
Maximum
Amperes

A
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
JGDN100
JFDN100
JFDN225
100
100
225
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
25.66 (651.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
18.53 (470.7)
18.53 (470.7)
24.28 (616.7)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
16 (7)
19 (9)
19 (9)
JJDN250
JKDN400
JLG630
250
400
600
37.53 (953.3)
41.69 (1058.9)
53.37 (1355.6)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
23.06 (585.7)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
14.10 (358.1)
35.77 (908.6)
39.94 (1014.5)
51.63 (1311.4)
1.94 (49.3)
1.97 (50.0)
1.94 (49.3)
37 (17)
58 (26)
94 (43)
25
JLG630E
JLDN600
JNDPN800
600
600
800
53.37 (1355.6)
48.31 (1227.1)
63.59 (1615.2)
23.06 (585.7)
15.56 (395.2)
22.63 (574.8)
14.10 (358.1)
15.50 (393.7)
17.63 (447.8)
51.63 (1311.4)
46.56 (1182.6)
1.94 (49.3)
1.92 (48.8)
94 (43)
84 (38)
110 (50)
26
JNDN1200
DGDN100
DFDN100
1200
100
100
63.59 (1615.2)
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
22.63 (574.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
17.63 (447.8)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.97 (50.0)
175 (80)
16 (7)
19 (9)
27
DFDN100E
DFDN225
DJDN250
DKDN400
25.66 (651.8)
25.66 (651.8)
37.53 (953.3)
41.69 (1058.9)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
24
28

29
100
225
250
400
19 (9)
19 (9)
37 (17)
58 (26)

For earth leakage applications.
Table 27.4-138. NEMA 3R Rainproof (See Figure 27.4-19)
30
Catalog
Number
31
RGDN100
RFDN100
REF3
REG4
RFDN225
RJJ3
RJG4
RJDN250
RKDN400
RLG630
32
33
34
35
RLG630E
RLDN600
RNDN1200

36
Maximum
Amperes

B
100
100
225
125
225
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
25.65 (651.5)
25.65 (651.5)
25.66 (651.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.19 (232.7)
11.30 (287.0)
11.30 (287.0)
9.16 (232.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
10.93 (277.6)
10.93 (277.6)
9.31 (236.5)
18.53 (470.7)
18.53 (470.7)
24.26 (616.2)
24.26 (616.2)
24.28 (616.7)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
1.73 (43.9)
1.73 (43.9)
1.70 (43.2)
16 (7)
19 (9)
22 (10)
22 (10)
19 (9)
250
250
250
400
600
37.47 (951.7)
37.47 (951.7)
37.50 (952.5)
41.69 (1058.9)
53.37 (1355.6)
12.16 (308.9)
12.16 (308.9)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
23.06 (585.7)
11.29 (286.8)
11.29 (286.8)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
14.10 (358.1)
35.73 (907.5)
35.73 (907.5)
35.77 (908.6)
39.94 (1014.5)
51.63 (1311.4)
1.84 (46.7)
1.84 (46.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.97 (50.0)
1.94 (49.3)
32 (15)
32 (15)
37 (17)
58 (26)
94 (43)
53.37 (1355.6)
48.31 (1227.1)
63.59 (1615.2)
23.06 (585.7)
15.56 (395.2)
22.63 (574.8)
14.10 (358.1)
15.50 (393.7)
17.63 (447.8)
51.63 (1311.4)
46.56 (1182.6)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.92 (48.8)
1.97 (50.0)
94 (43)
84 (38)
175 (80)
600
600
1200

Single centered mounting hole provided on RFDN100, Series B.
For earth leakage applications.
37
ON
A
A
OFF
39
41
38
40
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
Figure 27.4-18. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof
D
OFF
F
Figure 27.4-19. NEMA 3R Rainproof
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-55
Sheet 27 131

Table 27.4-139. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless SteelDimensions in Inches (mm)
E
B
Catalog
Number
D
A
Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
Maximum Dimensions
Amperes
A
B
Figure 27.4-20. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel
WGDN100
16 (7)
100
19.91
(505.6)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
18.53
(470.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN100
16 (7)
100
19.91
(505.6)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
18.53
(470.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN150
20 (9)
150
25.66
(651.7)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
24.28
(616.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN225
20 (9)
225
25.66
(651.7)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
24.28
(616.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WJDN250
39 (18)
250
37.50
(952.5)
11.56
(293.7)
10.22
(259.6)
35.77
(908.5)
1.94
(49.2)
WKDN400
60 (27)
400
41.69
(1058.9)
11.75
(298.4)
14.06
(357.2)
39.94
(1014.4)
1.97
(50.0)
WLDN600
88 (40)
600
48.31
(1227.2)
14.91
(378.6)
15.50
(393.7)
46.56
(1182.7)
1.92
(48.8)
WLG630
39 (18)
600
37.50
(952.5)
11.56
(293.7)
10.22
(259.6)
35.77
(908.5)
1.94
(49.2)
185 (84)
1200
63.59
(1615.3)
22.00
(558.8)
17.63
(447.7)
61.84
(1570.8)
1.97
(50.0)
ON
OFF
22
WNDN1200
Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 27.4-141 for breaker weights.
Table 27.4-140. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals15250ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Breaker
Size
Amperes
Number
of
Outlets
Dimensions
Mounting
A
Inside
J
Outside
D
K
Dim
Standard
Conduit
Size
Approximate
Weight
Lbs
kg
XFDN050B
1550
5.50
13.13
14.13
6.13
10.75
5.25
10.63
15.25
8.88
(139.7) (333.5) (358.9) (155.7) (273.1) (133.4) (270.0) (387.4) (225.6)
2.00
(50.8)
1.50
(38.1)
38
17.3
XFDN100B
60100
6.00
18.00
19.00
6.50
16.00
5.50
11.00
20.50
9.00
(152.4) (457.2) (482.6) (165.1) (406.4) (139.7) (279.4) (520.7) (228.6)
2.31
(58.7)
2.00
(50.8)
57
25.9
XFDN225B
125225
10.25
22.63
(260.4) (574.8)
11.38
20.00
6.38
16.38
25.13
9.63
(289.1) (508.0) (162.1) (416.1) (638.3) (244.6)
3.50
(88.9)
2.50
(63.5)
104
47.2
70225
8.50
27.13
(215.9) (689.1)
11.25
29.88
7.38
16.00
29.50
12.31
(285.8) (759.0) (187.5) (406.4) (749.3) (312.7)
4.00
3.00
(101.6) (76.2)
145
65.8
9.50
27.25
(241.3) (692.2)
11.25
29.88
8.06
16.38
35.00
12.38
(285.8) (759.0) (204.7) (416.1) (889.0) (314.5)
4.19
4.00
(106.4) (101.6)
170
77.2
XJDN225B
XJDN250B

250
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
(2) 1/2-inch
(12.7 mm)
NPT
38
39
40
41
42
Figure 27.4-21. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant SealsDual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on F-Frame 100A and Below
CA08104001E
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 132
22
Table 27.4-141. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant Seals4001200ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Breaker
Size
Amperes
23
24
25
26
Enclosure
Mounting
Conduit
Standard
Conduit
Size
Location
Lbs
XKDN400B
400
35.00
(889.0)
16.38
(416.1)
12.63
(320.8)
9.50
(241.3)
27.25
(692.2)
3.00
(76.2)
4.19
(106.4)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8
170
77
XLDN600B
600
37.88
(962.2)
23.88
(606.6)
14.25
(362.0)
16.00
(406.4)
45.38
(1152.7)
4.00
(101.6)
5.00
(127.0)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8
419
191
XKCN800B
800
47.88
(1216.2)
13.63
(346.2)
12.81
(325.4)
16.13
(409.7)
40.75
(1035.1)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8
228
104
1200
64.00
(1625.6)
26.00
(660.4)
21.38
(543.1)
27.56
(700.0)
38.63
(981.2)
6.50
(165.1)
4.38
(111.3)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8
567
257
XNDN1200B
27
Weight

Overall
Enclosure

kg
Power cables must enter and leave from opposite ends (through-feed).
Table 27.4-142. Typical Breaker Weights
28
Conduit Position No.
2 3
G-MTG.
Holes (4)
29
F-MTG.
A
30
Lbs
kg
G
E
F
2
3
5
0.9
1.4
2.3
J
K
L
12
13
20
5.4
5.9
9.1
M
N
30
45
13.6
20.4
31
Frame
32
H H
E-MT
8
7 6
33
Figure 27.4-22. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant Seals
34
35
Table 27.4-143. Circuit Breaker Enclosure Interpretation Data

1st Field
Enclosure
Type
NEMA 1
36
37
Flush
Surface
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 12K
NEMA 4/4X, 5
NEMA 7/9
38
Stainless
Cast Al.
F
S
R
J
D
W
X
1st 2nd
Field Field
39
2nd Field
Breaker
Family
3rd Field
Maximum
Ampacity
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
Definitions
NEMA
Standard
G-Frame
F-Frame
J-Frame
K-Frame
L-Frame
M-Frame
N-Frame
50
100
150
225
250
400
600
1200
Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of
protection against contact with the enclosed equipment.
3R
Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree
of protection against falling rain, sleet and external ice formation.
12
Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily

to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt
and dripping noncorrosive liquids.
12K
Type 12K enclosures with knockouts are intended for indoor use
primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt
and dripping noncorrosive liquids other than at knockouts.
4/4X
Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily

to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain,
splashing water, and hose-directed water, and corrosion; and will
be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 5 enclosures are used for indoor use primarily to provide a

degree of protection against dust and falling dirt.
Type 7 enclosures are for use indoors in locations classified

as Class I, Groups B, C or D as defined in the National Electrical Code.
Type 9 enclosures are for use in indoor locations classified as

Class II, Groups E, F or G as defined in the National Electrical Code.
3rd
Field
R FD N 150
40
NEMA
Enclosure
41
42

Breaker
Frame
NEMA
Enclosure
N in this position indicates enclosure complies with NEC gutter space requirement.
XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.
43
CA08104001E
Switching DevicesLow Voltage
28.0-1
September 2011
Switching Devices
Low Voltage
Sheet 28 001
Contents
22

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-2
General-Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-3
Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-3
Heavy-DutySolar Photovoltaic Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-3
Six-Pole Motor Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-4
Heavy-Duty Double-Throw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-4
Quick-Connect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-5
Enclosed Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-5
EnviroLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-5
NEMA 7/9Hazardous Location Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-6
Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-7
Elevator Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-7
Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-10
Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-11
K-Series Switch Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-13
Accessories, Hubs, Lug Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-14
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-17
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-25
Short-Circuit Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-27
Typical Fuse Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-28
Flex Center Factory Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-30
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16441A
Section 26 28 16.16
Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty
Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16441B
Section 26 28 16.23
Elevator Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16445
Section 26 28 16.17
Quick-Connect Double-Throw . . . . . . . Section 16441C
Section 26 28 16.26
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Quick-Connect Double-Throw Safety Switches
CA08104001E
28.0-2 Switching DevicesLow Voltage

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 002
General Description
22
Safety Switches
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
General-Duty
Heavy-Duty
EnviroLine
Safety switches have a number of

applications from service entrance to
branch circuit protection. They are also
horsepower rated for use as motor
circuit switches. The Application Guide
Table 28.0-1, below, summarizes major
differences and similarities between
the heavy-duty and general-duty
type of Eatons safety switches.
Double-Throw
K-Series Switch Design
Note: K-Series design available where the

letter K appears in the catalog number.
The efficient K-Series design uses

double-break, rotary blade action for
high performance and reliability. Here
are some of the characteristics of the
K-Series type of switch:
Individual catalog pages and selection

tables provide more specific information as to number of poles, voltage,
specifications and horsepower ratings.
High visibility handle and nameplate

for indication of switch position
ON or OFF
Clear line terminal shields
on heavy-duty switches only
Unique Control Pole option
allows the addition of a late-make/
early-break, 15A switched pole for
disconnecting control power circuits
32
33
Rotary
Generous wiring roommeeting or

exceeding NEC wire bending space
Built-in fuse pullers in NEMA 4X
and 12 enclosed switches
through 200A
Side-hinged NEMA 3R enclosure
doors
Tangential knockouts in heavyduty NEMA 1 and 3R enclosures
through 200A
Type 304 or 316 stainless steel
enclosures for UL NEMA 4X applicationsdust-tight, watertight and
corrosion-resistant
NEMA 12 enclosures for 30800A
switches also rated for NEMA 3R
use when a factory provided drain
hole is opened
Rated for 60C/75C wire connection
34
Table 28.0-1. Safety Switch Application GuideSee Catalog Selection Tables for Specific Ratings
35
36
37
38
39
40
Application/
Features
General-Duty
Safety Switches
Type of facility
Residential, commercial, light industrial
Commercial, institutional, industrial
Maximum voltages
240 Vac250 Vdc in larger sizes
600 Vac250 Vdc and 600 Vdc
Short-circuit rating for

non-fused switches
10,000 rms symmetrical amperes
10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Higher combination ratings

available with upstream Eaton molded-case circuit breakers
and fuses.
Short-circuit rating with

standard fuse clips
With Class H fuse clips10,000 rms

symmetrical amperes
Switches with Class H Fuse Clips10,000 rms amperes

8001200A switches with Class L fusing200,000 rms
Short-circuit rating with

fuse options
Class R fuse adaptation and 400600A switches with

T or J fuse adaptation100,000 rms amperes
Switches with Class R or Class J fusing and 200800A

switches with Class T fuse adaptation200,000A at 480V
and 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 600V
Ampere sizes
30, 60, 100, 200, 400, 600
30, 60, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1200
Maximum horsepower ratings
200 hp at 240 Vac
250 hp at 240V, 500 hp at 480 and 600 Vac
UL (NEMA) enclosure types
Type 1general purpose indoor use

Type 3Rrainproof and sleet-resistant
Type 1 indoor, 3R outdoor

Type 4 watertight and dust-tight
Type 4X watertight, dust-tight and corrosion-resistant
Type 12 indoor falling dust, dirt and liquids
Type 12/3R convertible to outdoor use
Type 7/9 hazardous (classified) locations
Terminals
Box lug (screw pressure) for Al/Cu wire
Box lug (screw pressure) for Al/Cu wire
Electrical interlock
snap-switch type
Field-installed kit, 200600A sizes
Field- or factory-installed for all sizes
41
42
43
Heavy-Duty
Safety Switches
Control pole interlock
Field-installed kit, 400600A sizes
Field-installed for K-Series switches
Fuse pullers
Not available
Standard in Type 4X and 12 enclosed switches through 200A

field-installed for all other 30200A switches
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-3
Sheet 28 003
General DescriptionSelection Guide
General-Duty
Heavy-Duty
Heavy-DutySolar
Photovoltaic Switch
22
23
24
25
26
General-Duty (Plug Fuse)
27
28
Heavy-Duty
For heavy commercial and industrial

applications where reliable performance
and service continuity are critical.
General-Duty (Cartridge Fuse)
For residential and commercial

applications. Suitable for light-duty
motor circuits and service entrance.
240 Vac
30600A
For short-circuit ratings, see
Technical Data
applications unless otherwise noted
Fusible and non-fusible switches
are 100% load break and load
make rated
The continuous load current of
fusible switches is not to exceed
80% of the rating of fuses employed
in other than motor circuits. Nonfusible switches are 100% fully rated
200600A features K-Series design
Horsepower rated
Ample wire bending space provides
for easier installation
With Class R fuses, switches may be
used on systems capable of delivering
100,000A rms symmetrical
Note: Plug fuse switches are not service

entrance rated.
600 Vac, 600 Vdc maximum

301200A
Technical Data
Horsepower rated
make rated
Visible double break rotary blade
mechanism. Two points of contact
provide a positive open and close,
easier operation, and also help to
prevent contact burning for longer
contact life
Triple padlocking capability.
Personnel safety feature because
the large hasp can accommodate
up to three 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) shank
locks. Cabinet door can be further
padlocked at the top and bottom
Interlocking mechanism. Door
cannot be opened when the handle
is in the ON position. Built-in
defeater mechanism provides for
user access when necessary
De-ionizing arc chutes. Arc chutes
confine and suppress the arcs
produced by contacts under load
Heavy-DutySolar Photovoltaic Switch
Marked as suitable for NEC 690 PV

applications up to 600 Vdc.
UL 98 listed
All switches are single-pole and
suitable for switching one circuit
Clear polycarbonate deadfront to
guard against accidental contact
with live parts
Suitable for positive and negative
grounded systems100% load
break rated with current flowing in
either direction
NEC 690.17compliant labeling
warning that the switch terminals
may be energized in the open
position
NEC 690.14.(C) two required PV
System Disconnect labels included
Isolated ground terminals (neutral)
for grounded conductors
Ground lug for equipment
grounding conductor
NEMA 3R, 12 and 4X stainless
enclosures
Fusible and non-fusible configurationsClass R fuse clips standard
Fuse clips are located on the center
pole to ensure that both fuse clips
are de-energizedmeets NEC
Article 690.16, which requires
isolation of the fuse from all
potential supply sources
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 004
22
Six-Pole Motor Circuit
Heavy-Duty Double-Throw
23
24
25
26
27
29
A compact safety switch thats ideal for

use in heavy industry...when an in sight
disconnecting means is required for twospeed motors that are remote from their
motor control devices.
30
28
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Six-Pole Motor Circuit

30200A
Fusible or non-fusible
Trunk-type latches keep the cover
tightly closed and a neoprene
gasket seals out moisture and dust
from the switch assembly
Visible double break rotary blade
contact life
Clear line shield protection
Built-in fuse pullers
Clearly visible handle
Triple padlocking capability. Cabinet
door can be further padlocked at the
top and bottom
Heavy-Duty Double-Throw
Used to transfer service from a normal

power source to an alternate source, or to
switch from one load circuit to another.

Technical Data
301200A switches are
horsepower rated
make rated
Wiring configuration for fusible
double-throw switches up through
600A are wired from factory for a
single load to be supplied by a normal or alternate source. Can be field
modified to allow two loads to be
alternately supplied by a single
power source
800A fusible double-throw switches

must be ordered from the factory for
either two-source or two-load
configuration
1200A fusible double-throw
switches are available only for
two-source connections
Ample wire bending space provides
for easier installation
Visible double-break rotary blade
contact life
Triple padlocking capability.
Personnel safety feature because
the large hasp can accommodate
up to three 3/8-inch (9.5 mm)
shank locks
Clearly visible handle. The position
(ON or OFF) can be clearly seen
from a distance
Additional locking capability.
Cabinet door can be further
padlocked at the top and bottom
Clear line shield protects against
accidental contact with energized
parts. Probe holes enable the user
to test if the line side is energized
without removing the shield
UL listed switching neutral capability
is available on three-pole and
four-pole non-fusible double-throw
switches with the installation of
the proper bonding kit shown on
Page 28.0-14
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-5
Sheet 28 005
Quick-Connect Switches
Enclosed Rotary
EnviroLine
22
23
24
25
26
Enclosed Rotary
Provides users with the ability to lock

directly wired motor loads in the OFF
position to comply with new OSHA lockout/tagout regulations. Also for machine
applications that require compact,
economical disconnect switches.
Quick-Connect Double-Throw
Provides a safe and quick means of

connecting portable generators to
facilities, transferring the building
to backup power, or providing for
temporary connection of portable loads.
Single-throw and double-throw

designs
Safety interlocks prevent access to
the receptacle compartment unless
the lower switch is in the open
position. This prevents against
accidentally unplugging a circuit
under load
Technical Data
30800A switches
make rated
Cam-Lok or Posi-Lok receptacle
options
NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure
ratings
Switching neutral option
CA08104001E
UL listed
Meets NEC Article 430 requirements
for a separate disconnect means
within sight of all motor loads
Padlockable in the OFF position
(up to three padlocks) to meet OSHA
lockout requirements
Available 1680A ratings
600 Vac, three- and four-pole
non-fusible device
Rated at highest available hp rating
(at 480 Vac, 16A10 hp, 25A15 hp,
30A15 hp, 40A20 hp, 60A30 hp,
80A40 hp)
Rated for making and breaking loads
Accepts auxiliary contacts
Capability to signal PLC controllers
Ground lug connection provided
Can be rated up to 65 kAIC,
when protected by applicable
upstream fusing
Stainless Steel Switch
Eaton offers a line of safety switches

designed for your special application
and/or extreme environmental conditions.
EnviroLine Stainless Steel Switch:

Primarily for use in the meatpacking
and food processing industries, or
any application where water is
frequently used to hose down
equipment. In addition to the
stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosure,
the interior mechanism, back pan
and springs are all stainless steel.
Ratings for these heavy-duty
switches are 30400A, 240600 Vac,
available as fusible and non-fusible
switches
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Window Switches
Window Switches: These switches

are available with either an upper
window over the switch contacts or
a lower window over the fuse block.
The upper window provides visual
verification of ON/OFF status. The
lower window switch allows for
visual verification of fuse status if
used in conjunction with fuses with
blown fuse indicator. Ratings are
30800A and 2001200A, 240600
Vac, fusible and non-fusible. Available in NEMA 12/3R, 4X stainless
steel enclosures
39
40
41
42
43

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 006
NEMA 7/9Hazardous Location

Disconnect Switch
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Non-Metallic Switches
Receptacle Switches
Receptacle Switches: These heavyduty switches are pre-wired and

interlocked to polarized receptacles
for three-phase, three-wire, grounded
type power plugs. These are used
for portable power applications
such as welders, infrared ovens,
batch feeders, conveyors, and truck
and marine docks. Receptacles are
interlocked to handle mechanisms
so that power plugs may not be
inserted or removed when the
switch is in the ON position unless
noted otherwise. Ratings are
30100A, 600 Vac, NEMA 12,
4X stainless steel enclosures
Non-Metallic Switch: This switch

has a KRYDON enclosure. This
is a compression molded fiberglass
reinforced polyester enclosure,
which is capable of withstanding
almost any corrosive environment.
Ratings are 30200A, 240600 Vac,
fusible and non-fusible. Enclosure is
NEMA 4X rated
DS361UX
The cast aluminum enclosure is

ideally suited for harsh industrial
applications including petrochemical facilities, mining operations,
pharmaceutical plants and wastewater treatment facilities. Eatons
Type DS switch is used as the
switching device. Ratings are
30100A, 600 Vac, fusible and
non-fusible
Table 28.0-2. EnviroLine Standards Compliances

UL Classified
Standard 886
File No. E84577
CSA Certified
Standard C22.2
File No. LR 42131-6
Class I, division 1 & 2,

groups B, C and D
Class I, division 1 & 2,

groups B, C and D
Class II, division 1 & 2, Class II, division 1 & 2,

groups E, F and G
groups E, F and G
34
Class III, division 1 & 2 Class III, division 1 & 2
35
NEMA Types 7 and 9
NEMA Types 7 and 9
Zone 1, IIB + H2
Zone 1, IIB + H2
36
Non-Metallic Halyester Switch
37
38
39
40
41
42
Non-Metallic Halyester Switch: A

strong, yet lightweight heavy-duty,
corrosion-resistant, NEMA 4X
enclosed switch that withstands salt
environments and general outdoor
conditions better than standard
304-grade stainless steel at a more
competitive price point than other
non-metallic enclosures
316 Grade Stainless Steel Switches:
This option replaces the standard
304 Grade stainless steel and hardware with 316 stainless. 316 stainless
holds up better in high salt environments found in coastal areas, and in
water/wastewater applications

43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-7
Sheet 28 007
General Description
Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty

Safety Switch
Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch
NEC Section 210.63 for Heating,

Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Equipment requires a 125V, singlephase, 15A- or 20A-rated receptacle
outlet be installed at an accessible
location for the servicing of heating,
air-conditioning and refrigeration
equipment. The receptacle must
be located on the same level and
within 25 ft (7.5m) of the heating,
air-conditioning and refrigeration

equipment. The receptacle outlet is
not to be connected to the load side of
the equipment disconnecting means.
The Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty
Safety Switch combines a safety
switch, 2 kVA control transformer,
and 15A GFI receptacle in a single
product. Ratings are 30200A, 240 or
600 Vac, NEMA 3R outdoor enclosures.
The auxiliary circuit is tapped off of the
line side of the safety switch and can
be operated independently of the main
switch circuit. Auxiliary circuit voltages
are available at either 208, 240, 480 or
600V. In 480V and 600V applications,
the auxiliary circuit disconnect and
overcurrent protection are provided by
a fusible deadfront disconnect switch
with Class J fuses. The short-circuit
rating is 200 kAIC. 208V and 240V
applications have a molded-case
breaker with a 100 kAIC rating as the
auxiliary circuit disconnect. The use of
the Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety
Switch eliminates the need for running
a separate 120V circuit common to
rooftop air-conditioning applications.
2-Pole
Breaker
Receptacle
Incoming Lugs
Fuses
Control Power
Transformer
Load
(GFCI Receptacle Option Available 3 kVA

Transformer Required)
Figure 28.0-1. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch Circuit Diagram
22
23
24
25
26
27
Elevator Control Switch
The elevator control switch provides

an all-in-one product solution and
selective coordination for elevator
circuits. The elevator control switch
uses a shunt trip disconnect as standard
with Class J time-delay current-limiting
fuses for meeting several code and user
requirements for such circuits. Ratings
are 30200A, 600 Vac, NEMA 1, 3R,
12 and 4 enclosures. The elevator
control switch carries a 200 kAIC rms
symmetrical short-circuit rating.
Why do Buildings Require Eaton

Elevator Disconnects?
Secondary
Fuse
15 Ampere or Optional
20 Ampere Available
Elevator Control Switch
Eatons Elevator Disconnect is a

simple, all-in-one solution that takes
the mystery out of meeting the many
codes associated with fire protection
and safety in elevator shafts. The model
national building codes that prescribe
the requirements for sprinklers, elevators
and electrical equipment, and how the
various systems shall interact are:
NFPA 70
(National Electrical Code)
NFPA 72
(National Fire Alarm Code)
ANSI/ASME A17.1
(Safety Code for Elevators and
Escalators)
NFPA 13 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems)
In addition to these national codes,

state and local jurisdictions or other
agencies of the government (such as
the Veterans Administration) may edit
or amend the codes, as they deem
necessary for public safety.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 008
General Description
23
Eatons Elevator Disconnect enables

consultants, contractors and building
owners to install a single device that
meets the requirements of the
various codes.
24
Why is There a Need for the Eaton

Elevator Disconnect?
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
1. According to 2010 NFPA 13, fire

sprinkler protection is required
(with some exceptions) at the top
and bottom of elevator shafts.
Additionally, NFPA 13 requires
the installation of sprinklers in
the elevator machine room.
When sprinkler heads are installed
in elevator shafts, or in elevator
machine rooms, then they must
also be installed according to the
State-Adopted Elevator Code (in
many cases, ANSI/ASME A17.1).
The Fire Safety Interface Relay

is available with a 120 Vac or
24 Vdc coil. The 120 Vac coil
should be selected when powered
by the Elevator Disconnect control
circuit, and the 24 Vdc relay
should be selected when the
power is supplied from the fire
alarm system.
When the FACP receives a signal

from the fire alarm system that
there is going to be a sprinkler
release in an elevator shaft, a
normally open contact in the FACP
closes, energizing the Fire Safety
Interface Relay and completing a
circuit to initiate a trip.
Sprinkler System
Sprinklers
2. The ASME A17.1 Safety Code

for Elevators and Escalators,
Rule 102.2 (c) (3), requires the
shutdown of power to the elevator
prior to the application of water
in the elevator machine room
or hoistway.
Shutdown of power is usually
accomplished with the use of a
shunt trip device in the elevator
circuit, and is done for two valid
safety concerns.
The first of these is to minimize

the potential for electric shock
due to the release of water on
energized electrical equipment.
The second, and less obvious,
is to reduce the possibility of
elevator car slippage after the
car has gone to the recall floor
and the doors have opened. Slippage is possible when the hoisting
equipment (cables, sheave, braking
system, etc.) become wet from
discharged water.
Eatons Elevator Disconnect is
a fusible switch that is equipped
with a shunt trip mechanism. The
shunt trip is operated by a control
relay (called a Fire Safety Interface
Relay) in the unit that is wired to
a normally open contact in the
remote Fire Alarm Control
Panel (FACP).
3
Elevator
Disconnect
Fluid Tank
Controller
4
Battery
Lowering
Device
1 NFPA 13 requires sprinklers in

elevator shaft (with exceptions)
and in control room.
3 NFPA 72 (Fire Alarm Code)

requires control circuit for
elevator shutdown to be
monitored for the loss of voltage.
2 ASME A17.1 (Safety Code for

Elevators and Escalators) requires
shutdown of power to the
elevator prior to the release
of water.
4 NEC requires standby power

systems such as a battery
lowering device to be
disconnected by an auxiliary
contact in the elevator disconnect.
Figure 28.0-2. Typical Hydraulic Elevator Components and Requirements
CA08104001E
September 2011

Safety Switches
28.0-9
Sheet 28 009
General Description
3. In addition to turning off power,
the model codes require other
functions that are satisfied by the
Eaton Elevator Disconnect. One
of these requirements is that the
shunt trip control circuit requires
monitoring. The NFPA 72
(Fire Alarm Code) requires:
Control circuits to shut down
elevator power shall be monitored
for the presence of operating
voltage. Loss of voltage to the
control circuit for the disconnecting
means shall cause a supervisory
signal to be indicated at the
control unit and required remote
annunciation.
Eatons Elevator Disconnect

is supplied with a standard set
of 1NO and 1NC auxiliary
contacts that are wired to the
terminal blocks for this feature.
Other manufacturers offer this
as an option.
An additional concern that is not code
related is accidental signaling of a loss
of voltage if a switch is turned off for
maintenance or testing. For example,
if an Eaton Elevator Disconnect is
turned off to perform routine maintenance, the control voltage will be
disconnected and it will send a signal
to the FACPwhich may alert the local

fire department and initiate a fire call.
To solve this problem, an optional
micro switch mounted on the main
switch can be supplied and field-wired
in parallel with the alarm contact on
the Voltage Monitoring relay. Wiring in
this fashion would prevent an alarm
signal from being sent when the Eaton
Elevator Disconnect is turned off for
routine maintenance.
An additional standard feature on the
Eaton Elevator Disconnect is a KeyTo-Test switch to perform a functional
test of the operation of the shunt trip.
A pilot light signaling that the switch is
ON and a neutral lug are the only other
available options.
24
25
26
27
28
1. A shunt trip device is required if the

hoistway and/or machine room is sprinklered.
L3
L2
2. The location of the shunt trip device is required

to be in the elevator machine room.
31
32
Shunt Trip
Device
Shunt trip control voltage
must be monitored for
loss of voltage. Loss of
voltage is required to
activate an annunciator
on the control unit. The
building fire alarm control
unit may be utilized for
this purpose
(ref. NFPA 72 3.9.4).
33
To heat sensor(s)
or flow control
sensor.
34
35
36
Many elevators are equipped with

backup power supplies to allow the
elevator to be lowered if power is lost.
For example, many hydraulic elevators
are equipped with a battery system
that opens a solenoid to lower the
elevator, and then provides power
to open the elevator doors.
Auxiliary Contact for Battery Lowering device

required by Art. 620.91(C). Purpose of this
contact is to distinguish between an actual
power failure and the opening of the
disconnect for maintenance.
Must be provided with overcurrent protection.
Must be lockable in the open position.
Must be externally operable.
This battery-lowering device is viewed

by the NEC as an emergency or
standby power system, and is
governed by Article 620.91.
CA08104001E
23
30
From Feeder
Additional Requirements and Concerns
4. Paragraph (C) requires that the

main disconnect be provided with
an auxiliary contact that disconnects the additional power source
from the load when the disconnecting means is in the open
position. The purpose of this
auxiliary contact is to disconnect
the backup power system when
the elevator switch is opened
22
29
L1
Thus, there is a requirement

to monitor and to annunciate the
presence of shunt trip control
power. This is accomplished in the
Eaton Elevator Disconnect by the
Fire Alarm Voltage Monitoring
Relay option. This relay is either
a SPDT or a 3PDT relay. When
control power is present, the
closed relay contacts complete a
circuit to the FACP that indicate
the presence of control voltage.
If control voltage is lost, the contact opens, signaling an alarm at
the FACP and/or monitoring and
annunciating a single elevator; all
that is required is the single-pole
relay. When wiring multiple
switches (for multiple elevators),
the three-pole relay option should
be chosen. However, if there is a
doubt, selecting the three-pole
relay will provide all the functionality that is needed.
to prevent the elevator from automatically lowering while being

maintainedwhich would
endanger maintenance personnel.
37
38
39
40
Battery Lowering Device
To Elevator Controller
Figure 28.0-3. Shunt Trip Device Wiring Diagram
41
42
43

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 010
22
23
Safety Switch Selection Guide

Table 28.0-3. Safety Switch Selection Guide
Type
Fuse
Type
Fuse
Class
Ampere
Rating
24
25
General- Single-throw Fusible Plug
duty
max. 240 Vac
Cartridge H
horsepower
Non
rated
fusible
26
Heavyduty
27
Single-throw Fusible Cartridge H

max. 600 Vac
L
horsepower
rated
Non
fusible
30
1 and 2
Yes
Yes
30600
2 and 3
Yes
Yes
30600
2 and 3
Yes
Yes
30600
8001200
2, 3
and 4
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
400
1200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
100A
301200
2, 3
and 4
Yes
Yes
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
400
1200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
100A
30200
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
30200
Yes
Yes
Yes
2 and 3
Yes
up to
600A
Yes
up to
400A
28
Six-pole
motor
circuit
Single-throw Fusible Cartridge H

max. 600 Vac Non
fusible
29
Doublethrow
Max. 600 Vac Fusible Cartridge H

30200
horsepower
T (600V) 400
rated
T (240V) 600
L
8001200
30
31
32
33
Number Enclosure Types

of Poles NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 4 NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA
Painted Stainless Non316 Grade 7/9
Steel
Steel
Metallic
Stainless
Steel
Non
fusible
301200
2, 3, 4
and 6
Yes
Yes
Yes
up to
400A
Yes
up to
400A
Rotary
Max. 600 Vac Non
switches
fusible
16125
3, 4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auxiliary Max. 600 Vac Fusible Cartridge H

power
horsepower Non
heavyrated
fusible
duty
30200
Yes
30200
Yes
Elevator
control
switch
30200
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Max. 600 Vac Fusible Cartridge J

horsepower
rated
34
35
Table 28.0-4. EnviroLine Safety Switch Selection Guide
NEMA Type 12 enclosures (30800A) can be field modified to meet NEMA 3R rainproof requirements when a factory provided drain screw is removed.
Class J clips provided.
EnviroLine
Fuse
Type
Fuse
Class
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Enclosure Types
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 4
Painted
Steel
NEMA 4X
Stainless
Steel
NEMA 4X
NonMetallic
36
37
Stainless enclosure
with stainless
mechanism
Fusible Cartridge H
30400
2 and 3
Yes
Non
fusible
30400
Yes
38
Viewing window
upper or lower
Fusible Cartridge H
L
30600
800
Yes
Yes
Yes
Non
fusible
30800
Yes
Yes
Yes
39
40
41
Welding receptacle
Non-metallic

42
Fusible Cartridge H
30100
Yes
Yes
Non
fusible
60
Yes
Yes
Fusible Cartridge H
30200
Yes
Non
fusible
30200
Yes
800A upper window switches are not UL listed.

Lower window switches are available through 600A.
NEMA Type 12 enclosures (30800A) can be field modified to meet NEMA 3R rainproof requirements when a factory provided drain screw is removed.
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-11
Sheet 28 011
General DescriptionCatalog Numbering System
22
Table 28.0-5. Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
23
DH 3 6 1 N D K LW
Options
Switch Type
DP = General-duty/
plug fuse
DG = General-duty/
cartridge fuse
DH = Heavy-duty
DT = Double-throw
DS = Classified
location with
DS interior
Poles/Blades
1
2
3
4
6
Voltage
= 1-Pole
= 2-Poles
= 3-Poles
= 4-Poles
= 6-Poles
W = Upper viewing window

LW = Lower viewing window
X
= EnviroLine stainless
(enclosure and mechanism)
GCL = Mill duty
CB = Provisions for cube fuses
(30100A, 600V)
316 = 316 Grade stainless steel
enclosure and hardware
Fusible/Non-Fusible
or Neutral
1 = 120 Vac
2 = 240 Vac
6 = 600 Vac
F = Fusible without neutral

U = Non-fusible
N = Fusible with neutral
Amperes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= 30A
= 60A
= 100A
= 200A
= 400A
= 600A
= 800A
= 1200A
NEMA Enclosure Ratings

G
R
D
P
W
= NEMA 1
= NEMA 3R
= NEMA 12
= NEMA 4 (painted steel)
= NEMA 4X corrosion resistant
(304 Grade stainless steel)
C = NEMA 4X non-metallic
KRYDON (for Type DH)
X = NEMA 7 and 9 (for Type DS)
Series
K = DesignAll general-duty switches
above 200A and all heavy-duty
switches incorporate K-Series
switch design features listed on
the following page
B = Design general-duty 30100A
H = Design general-duty double-throw
switch (compact design 30100A)
Table 28.0-6. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
Auxiliary Circuit Voltage

GFI Receptacle
Voltage
Fusible/Non-Fusible
or Neutral
3 = 3-Poles
Amperes
1
2
3
4
= 30A
= 60A
= 100A
= 200A
27
28
29
30
33
Switch Type
2 = 240 Vac
6 = 600 Vac
26
32
DH 3 6 1 F R K A1 480
Poles/Blades
25
31
For DC ratings, check individual switch ratings.
DH = Heavy-duty
24
F = Fusible without
neutral
U = Non-fusible
N = Fusible with neutral
A1 = 15A
A2 = 20A
208 = 208V
240 = 240V
480 = 480V
600 = 600V
Series
K = DesignAll general-duty switches above

200A and all heavy-duty switches incorporate
K-Series switch design features listed on the
following page
NEMA Enclosure Ratings

R = NEMA 3R
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 012
General DescriptionCatalog Numbering System
22
Table 28.0-7. Quick-Connect Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
DT 3 6 5 N U R K
LC
23
Switch Type
24
Receptacle Type
DT = Heavy-duty
double-throw
DH = Heavy-duty
single-throw
25
Series
U = Non-fusible
F = Fusible
N = Fusible with solid neutral
SN = Fusible with switched neutral
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
4 = 4 poles
2 = 240 Vac
6 = 600 Vac
28
Switch Ampacity
29
3
4
5
6
7
30
33

= 100A
= 200A
= 400A
= 600A
= 800A
When upper and lower switches are the same, the switch configuration is consolidated in one letter (e.g.,U not UU). Also, a switch with a neutral
will have either a solid neutral or a switched neutral, not both. Lastly, a switched neutral pole is never fused.
Heavy-duty single-throw switches will not have a lower switch option.
This field is only used when a switch is completely non-fused.
Table 28.0-8. Elevator Control Switch Catalog Numbering System
ES 1 T2 R2 G F1 R N
34
Switch Type
35
ES = Elevator
control
switch
36
37
38

39
Neutral
Blank = No neutral or included
with switch designation
N
= Solid neutral
SN
= Switched neutral
U = Non-fusible
F = Fusible
N = Fusible with solid neutral
SN = Fusible with switched neutral
Maximum Voltage
32
Enclosure
G = NEMA 1
R = NEMA 3R
Lower Switch
27
31
K=K
Upper Switch
Poles
26
LC = Cam-Lok
LCR = Cam-Lok reverse pin
LP = Posi-Lok
PLR = Posi-Lok reverse pin
Amperes
1 = 30A
2 = 60A
3 = 100A
4 = 200A
5 = 400A
Industrial
Control
Transformer
Fire Safety
Interface Relay
(3PDT, 10 A, 120 V)
T2 = 208V
T3 = 240V
T1 = 480V
T4 = 600V
R2 = 24 Vdc coil
R1 = 120 Vac coil
Pilot Light
ON
Fire Alarm Voltage

Monitoring Relay
G = Green
R = Red
W = White
F1 = Single-pole
F3 = Three-pole
Enclosure
Options
R = NEMA 3R
D = NEMA 12
W = NEMA 4X
stainless
Isolated
Full Capacity
Neutral Lug
N = Neutral
lug
100 VA with primary and secondary fusing (120V secondary).

To monitor shunt trip voltage.
NEMA 1 standard with no suffix designation required.
Note: All modules are three-pole, 600V and contain a key to test switch and mechanically interlocked auxiliary contact as standard.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
September 2011

Safety Switches
28.0-13
Sheet 28 013
General Description
All General-Duty Switches Above 100A and All Heavy-Duty Switches

Incorporate These K-Series Switch Design Features
22
23
24
25
26
27
Visible Double Break Rotary Blade Mechanism
Two points of contact provide a

positive open and close, easier
operation, and also help prevent
contact burning for longer contact life.
Clearly Visible Handle
The position (ON or OFF) can be

clearly seen from a distance and the
length provides for easy operation.
Interlocking Mechanism
Door cannot be opened when the

handle is in the ON position. Front side
operable defeater mechanism provides
for user access when necessary.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Clear Line Shield
Protects against accidental contact with

energized parts. Probe holes enable
the user to test if the line side is energized without removing the shield.
Not provided on general-duty switches.
Triple Padlocking Capability
Personnel safety feature because the

large hasp can accommodate up to
three 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) shank locks.
Tangential Knockouts
An ample number are provided on the

top, bottom and sides of both NEMA
Types 1 and 3R enclosures through 200A.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Built-in Fuse Pullers (NEMA 12 and

4X 30200A Only)
Provide easy removal of fuses.
Additional Locking Capability
Cabinet door can be further padlocked

at the top and bottom as applicable.
Note: Size of hasp in inches (mm):
30100A0.344 (8.7) 0.250 shank
2001200A0.50 (12.7) 0.375 shank
CA08104001E
Bolt-On Hub Kits
For switches in a NEMA Type 3R, 12,

4 or 4X enclosure.
42
43

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 014
General DescriptionAccessories, Hubs, Lug Data
22
Accessories, Hubs, Lug Data
23
24
25
DH030NK
DS16CP
DS200EK1
DS200GK
DS22JK
DS36CL
DS56CK
DS30FP
DS12FK
DS426TK
26
27
28
29
Table 28.0-9. Safety SwitchesAccessories

Description
Catalog
Number
30
Neutral Kits/Ground Kits
30A DG
60100A DG
200A DG, DH (NEMA 1, 3R enclosures)
3060A DH
100A DH
200A DH (NEMA 4X, 12 enclosures)
400A DG, DH
600A DG, DH
400600A Fusible DT, 8001200A DH
30100A DT
200A DT
400A Non-fusible DT
600A Non-fusible DT
800A DT
1200A DT
DG030NB
DG100NB
DG200NK
DH030NK
DH100NK
DH200NK
DS400NK
DS600NK
DS800NK
DT100NK
DT200NK
DT400NK
DT600NK
DT800NK
DT1200NK
Ground Lug Kits

30100A DG
30100A DH, DT
200A DG, DH, DT
400600A DG, 4001200A DH, 4001200A DT
DG030GB
DS100GK
DS200GK
DS468GK
Switching Neutral Bonding Kits

30100A DT, three-pole, four-pole
DT100BK
DT200BK
DT400BK
DT600BK
DT800BK
38
Control Pole Kit

400600A DG, 301200A DH, 30800A DT
DS16CP
39
Auxiliary Contact Kits

All switches (except 30100A DG) 1NO/1NC
All switches (except 30100A DG) 2NO/2NC
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
Catalog
Number
Fuse Puller Kits

3060A DH
3060A DH
100A DH
200A DH
DS30FP
DS60FP
DS100FP
DS200FP
J Fuse Adapter Kits

60A 240V DH
60A DT and receptacle switches
400A 600V DT
600A 240600V DH only
DS22JK
DS26JK
DT400JK
DS600JK
R Fuse Adapter Kits

30A DG
100A DG
30A 240V DH, DT
30A 600V DH, DT, 60A 240V DH, DT, 60A DG
60A 600V DH, DT
100A 240600V DH, DT
200A 240600V DH, DT, 200A DG
400A 240600V DH, 240V DT, 400A DG
600A 240600V DH, 600A DG
DG030RB
DG100RB
DS12FK
DS16FK
DS26FK
DS36FK
DS46FK
DS56FK
DS66FK
T Fuse Adapter Kits

200A 240V DH
200A 600V DH
400A 240V DG, DH
400A 600V DH
600A 240V DG, DH
600A 600V DH
800A 240V DH
800A 600V DH
8001200A 600V DH DT
DS426TK
DS466TK
DS526TK
DS566TK
DS626TK
DS666TK
DS726TK
DS766TK
DS200EK1
DS200EK2
Hookstick handle
DH800HSH
DSLUBEKIT
Copper Lug Kits

30A DH, DT
60A DH, DT
100A DH, DT
200A DH
400A DH (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 enclosures)
600800A DH (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 enclosures)
Lubricating grease for safety switch blades and contacts

(Each kit contains three 30 cc tubes of lubricating grease.)
DS16CL
DS26CL
DS36CL
DS46CL
DS56CL
DS66CL
Crimp Lug Pad Kit (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 Enclosures)

400600A DH
800A DH
400800A neutral DH
DS56CK
DS76CK
DS800CNK
Auxiliary Contacts for:

1625A three-, four-pole rotary switches, includes holder
and contact (1NO/1NC)
3040A three-pole rotary switches, includes holder
and contact (1NO)
60125A three-pole rotary switches, includes holder
and contact (1NO)
3040A four-pole rotary switches, includes holder
and contact (1NO)
30125A three-, four-pole, contact only (1NC)
30125A three-, four-pole, contact only (1NO)
43
Description

Ground bar kit is not listed on device publications.

Order one kit for three poles.
Order one kit for each pole.
Order one kit per switch.

CMAC
CRAC3
CWAC3
CRAC4
CRAA
CRAB
Receptacle switches.
Order one kit for six poles.
The mechanism is reversed on these contacts.
Note: Accessories are not applicable to NEMA 7/9 switches.
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-15
Sheet 28 015
General DescriptionAccessories, Hubs, Lug Data
Hubs
Table 28.0-11. Myers Type Hubs

NEMA Type 3R (400A and Above)
NEMA Types 4, 4X (Stainless Steel), 12
22
Conduit Size
Inches
DS075H1
Table 28.0-10. Plate Type Hubs

for NEMA Type 3R Enclosures (Up to 200A)
mm
Group 2
General-Duty, Heavy-Duty,
Double-Throw200A
Conduit Size
mm
Catalog
Number
Conduit Size
Inches
Inches
mm
Catalog
Number
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
19.1
25.4
31.8
38.1
50.8
DS075H1
DS100H1
DS125H1
DS150H1
DS200H1
2
2-1/2
3
50.8
63.5
76.2
DS200H2
DS250H2
DS300H2
23
1/2
3/4
1
12.7
19.1
25.4
DS050MH
DS075MH
DS100MH
24
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
31.8
38.1
50.8
DS125MH
DS150MH
DS200MH
25
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
63.5
76.2
88.9
DS250MH
DS300MH
DS350MH
26
101.6
127.0
DS400MH
DS500MH
4
5
Group 1
General-Duty, Heavy-Duty,
Double-Throw Through 100A
Catalog
Number
27
Note: Contact the Flex Center at 1-888-329-9272 for information on

hubs for non-metallic NEMA 4X switches.
28
Table 28.0-12. Standard Lug Capacities

Ampere
Rating
Minimum
Wire Size
Maximum
Wire Size
Wire
Type
29
30A DG
30A DH, DT
#14
#12
#14
#14
#10
#10
#6
#2
Cu OR
Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
30
60A DG
60A DH, DT
#14
#14
#1/0
#2
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
31
100A DG
100A DH, DT
#14
#14
#1/0
#1/0
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
200A DG, DT
200A DH Type 1 and 3R
200A DH Type 4 and 12
#6
#6
#6
250 kcmil
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
400A DG, DH, DT
(2) #1/0
(1) #1/0
(2) 300 kcmil

(1) 750 kcmil
Cu/Al OR
Cu/Al
600A DG
600A DH
600A DT (Fusible)
(1) #2
(1) #1/0
(1) 600 kcmil

(1) 750 kcmil
Cu/Al AND
Cu/Al
34
35
30A DP
Note: Catalog Number DS900AK Adapter KitPermits Installation of

Group 1 Hubs on 200A Type General-Duty, Heavy-Duty and DoubleThrow Switches.
33
600A DT (Non-fusible)
(2) #250
(2) 500 kcmil
Cu/Al
800A DH
800A DT
(4) #1/0
(3) #250
(4) 750 kcmil

(3) 500 kcmil
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(4) #1/0
(4) 750 kcmil
Cu/Al
36
30A Cu
60A Cu
100A Cu
#14
#14
#6
#6
#4
#1/0
Cu
Cu
Cu
37
200A Cu
400A Cu
600A Cu
#6
#1/0
(2) #1/0
250 kcmil
500 kcmil
(2) 500 kcmil
Cu
Cu
Cu
38
1200A DH, DT
Copper-Bodied Lugs
32
The maximum size aluminum or copper-clad aluminum wire allowable

for applications where the conductor enters or leaves the enclosure
through the wall opposite its terminal is #1 gauge.
Note: Although certain lug capacities are larger than required, only
minimum wire bending space is provided per the requirements
noted in NEC Tables 373.6 (a) and (b) for respective ampere ratings.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 016
General DescriptionLug Data, Connection Plugs
22
Table 28.0-13. Available Lug Capacities of the Double-Throw Switch Assembly with Cam-Lok or Posi-Lok Receptacles
Double Throw Switch
SizeCam-Lok or
Posi-Lok Receptacles
Service
Terminal
Openings
Load
Terminal
Openings
Switched Neutral
Solid Neutral
Pole Load Terminal Terminal
Openings
Openings
Ground
Terminal
Openings
Receptacle
Bypass
Terminal
100
(1) 1/014
AWG Cu/Al
(1) 1/014
AWG Cu/Al
(1) 1/014
AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/014 AWG,

(1) 214 AWG Cu/Al
(3) 214
AWG Cu/Al
(1) 1032
Screw mounting
24
200
(1) 300 kcmil

6 AWG Cu/Al
(1) 250 kcmil

6 AWG Cu/Al
(1) 250 kcmil

6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 250 kcmil6 AWG,

(1) 1/014 AWG,
(1) 214 AWG Cu/Al
(3) 214
AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/4 Studs,

1.75-inch spacing
25
400
(1) 750 kcmil1/0

or
(2) 300 kcmil1/0
Cu/Al
(1) 750 kcmil1/0

or
(2) 300 kcmil1/0
Cu/Al
(6) 500 kcmil,

(6) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(4) 250 kcmil

6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/2-13 UNC studs,

1.75-inch spacing
26
(1) 750 kcmil1/0

or
(2) 300 kcmil1/0
Cu/Al
600
(4) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al
(4) 500250 kcmil

Cu/Al
(4) 500250 kcmil

Cu/Al
(4) 250 kcmil

6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/2-13 UNC studs,

1.75-inch spacing
27
(6) 500250 kcmil,

(4) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
800
(4) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al
(4) 500250 kcmil

Cu/Al
(4) 500250 kcmil

Cu/Al
(6) 500250 kcmil,

(4) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(4) 250 kcmil

6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/2-13 UNC studs,

1.75-inch spacing
23
28
29
30
Table 28.0-14. Quick-Connect Double-Throw Standard Receptacles and Corresponding Connection Plugs
(Part Numbers are Cooper Crouse-Hinds)
Double Throw Switch
SizeCam-Lok or
Posi-Lok Receptacles
Cam-Lok Connectors
Posi-Lok Connectors
Receptacle
Plug
Receptacle Panel
Plug
100
Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
E1016-1635S
E1016-1636S
E1016-1600S
E1016-1602S
E1016-1612S
E-Z1016-8366
E-Z1016-8367
E-Z1016-8387
E-Z1016-8389
E-Z1016-8393
Two-pole, three-wire with solid neutral or three-pole, three-wire with

switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): E0200-1696 /
three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): E0200-1686 / three-pole, four-wire
with solid neutral or four-pole, four-wire with switched neutral pole
(three-phase and single neutral pole): E0200-1687
E0200-281
E0200-282
E0200-283
E0200-284
E0200-285
200
Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
E1016-1635S
E1016-1636S
E1016-1600S
E1016-1602S
E1016-1612S
E-Z1016-8366
E-Z1016-8367
E-Z1016-8387
E-Z1016-8389
E-Z1016-8393

E0200-281
E0200-282
E0200-283
E0200-284
E0200-285
400
Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
E1016-1635S
E1016-1636S
E1016-1600S
E1016-1602S
E1016-1612S
E-Z1016-8366
E-Z1016-8367
E-Z1016-8387
E-Z1016-8389
E-Z1016-8393

E0400-281
E0400-282
E0400-283
E0400-284
E0400-285
600
Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
(2) E1016-1635S
(2) E1016-1636S
(2) E1016-1600S
(2) E1016-1602S
(2) E1016-1612S
(2) E-Z1016-8366
(2) E-Z1016-8367
(2) E-Z1016-8387
(2) E-Z1016-8389
(2) E-Z1016-8393

switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1696 /
three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): (2) E0400-1686 / three-pole, four-wire
(three-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1687
(2) E0400-281
(2) E0400-282
(2) E0400-283
(2) E0400-284
(2) E0400-285
800
Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
(2) E1016-1635S
(2) E1016-1636S
(2) E1016-1600S
(2) E1016-1602S
(2) E1016-1612S
(2) E-Z1016-8366
(2) E-Z1016-8367
(2) E-Z1016-8387
(2) E-Z1016-8389
(2) E-Z1016-8393

switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1696 /
three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): (2) E0400-1686 / three-pole, four-wire
(three-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0200-1687
(2) E0400-281
(2) E0400-282
(2) E0400-283
(2) E0400-284
(2) E0400-285
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Note: Switches are not supplied with the mating plugs. Eaton will supply the plug if cord sets are ordered.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-17
Sheet 28 017
LayoutDimensions
Dimensions
Ampere NEMA 1
Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
NEMA 3R
Depth
(D2)
Weight
Lbs (kg)

Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
6.38
10.69
(162.1) (271.5)
6.88
3.75
(174.8) (95.2)
6
(2.724)
6.38
10.81
(162.1) (274.6)
6.88
3.75
(174.8) (95.2)
60
8.69
14.19
(220.7) (360.4)
7.38
4.21
9
(187.5) (106.9) (4.086)
8.69
14.38
(220.7) (365.3)
7.38
4.21
9
(187.5) (106.9) (4.086)
100
9.13
18.81
(231.9) (477.8)
7.38
4.23
12
(187.5) (107.4) (5.448)
9.13
19.25
(231.9) (489.0)
7.38
4.23
12
(187.5) (107.4) (5.448)
200
16.00
25.25
(406.4) (641.4)
11.25
6.14
48
16.00
25.50
(285.8) (156.0) (21.792) (406.4) (647.7)
11.25
6.14
55
(285.8) (156.0) (24.97)
400
23.00
44.75
(584.2) (1136.7)
12.63
7.27
100
(320.8) (184.7) (45.4)
12.63
7.27
105
(320.8) (184.7) (47.67)
24.00
52.25
(609.6) (1327.2)
14.25
8.95
130
(362.0) (227.3) (59.02)
23.00
45.19
(584.2) (1147.8)
24.00
52.70
(609.6) (1338.6)
23
Weight
Lbs (kg)
30
600
22
Table 28.0-15. General-Duty, Non-Fusible, 240V, Three-Pole, Single-Throw
6
(2.724)
14.25
8.95
135
(362.0) (227.3) (61.29)
24
25
D2
26
Figure 28.0-4. NEMA 1-3R 30100A

W
27
28
Table 28.0-16. General-Duty, Fusible, 240V, Three-Pole, Solid Neutral, Single-Throw

Ampere NEMA 1, 3R
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
30
8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
60
8.13
(206.5)
100
29
NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel, 4

Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
10.00 5.25
20
(254.0) (133.3) (9.08)
8.13
(206.5)
17.88
(454.2)
10.00
5.50
22
(254.0) (139.7) (9.988)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00 5.25
20
(254.0) (133.3) (9.08)
8.13
(206.5)
17.88
(454.2)
10.00
5.50
22
(254.0) (139.7) (9.988)
11.13
(282.7)
21.69
(550.9)
10.00 5.25
27
11.13
(254.0) (133.3) (12.258) (282.7)
24.00
(609.6)
10.25
5.50
30
(260.4) (139.7) (13.62)
200
16.00
(406.4)
27.63
(701.8)
11.25 6.14
52
16.00
(285.8) (156.0) (23.608) (406.4)
34.38
(873.3)
11.50
6.44
61
(292.1) (163.6) (27.694)
400
23.00
(584.2)
45.19
12.63 7.27
120
(1147.8) (320.8) (184.7) (54.48)
600
24.00
(609.6)
52.70
14.25 8.95
153
24.00
(1338.6) (362.0) (227.3) (69.462) (609.6)
63.00
14.25
8.88
203
(1600.2) (362.0) (225.6) (92.162)
800
25.38
(644.7)
56.69
14.25 8.95
168
25.38
(1439.9) (362.0) (227.3) (76.272) (644.7)
71.75
14.25
8.88
213
(1822.5) (362.0) (225.6) (96.702)
23.00
(584.2)
Depth
(D2)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
1200
Depth
(D2)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
57.63
12.63
7.19
135
(1463.8) (320.8) (182.6) (61.29)
41.47
70.31
19.94 12.44
465
41.47
70.31
19.94
13.51
510
(1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (316.0) (211.11) (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (343.2) (231.54)
30
CL
31
D2
Figure 28.0-5. NEMA 1-3R 200600A
32
33
34
35
36
Note: Not applicable to plug fuse.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Dimensions are for estimating purposes only.
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 018
LayoutDimensions
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Dimensions (Continued)
Ampere NEMA 1, 3R
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
30
8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00 5.25
(254.0) (133.3)
60
8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
100
11.13
(282.7)
200
Weight
Lbs (kg)

Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
16
(7.264)
8.13
(206.5)
12.13
(308.1)
10.00 5.50
17
(254.0) (139.7) (7.718)
10.00 5.25
(254.0) (133.3)
16
(7.264)
8.13
(206.5)
12.13
(308.1)
10.00 5.50
17
(254.0) (139.7) (7.718)
21.69
(550.9)
10.00 5.25
(254.0) (133.3)
22
(9.988)
11.13
(282.7)
24.00
(609.6)
10.25 5.50
28
(260.4) (139.7) (12.712)
16.00
(406.4)
27.63
(701.8)
11.25 6.14
(285.8) (156.0)
46
16.00
(20.884) (406.4)
34.38
(873.3)
11.50 6.44
55
(292.1) (163.6) (24.97)
400
23.00
(584.2)
45.19
12.63 7.27
(1147.8) (320.8) (184.7)
110
(49.94)
23.00
(584.2)
57.63
12.63 7.19
125
(1463.8) (320.8) (182.6) (56.75)
600
24.00
(609.6)
52.70
14.25 8.95
(1338.6) (362.0) (227.3)
135
(61.29)
24.00
(609.6)
63.00
14.25 8.88
167
(1600.2) (362.0) (225.6) (75.818)
800
25.38
(644.7)
56.69
14.25 8.95
(1439.9) (362.0) (227.3)
158
25.38
(71.732) (644.7)
41.47
70.31
19.94 12.44
(1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (316.0)
Depth
(D2)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
1200
Width
(W)
71.75
14.25 8.88
175
(1822.5) (362.0) (225.6) (79.45)
CL
D2
Figure 28.0-6. NEMA 1, 3R 301200A

W
CL
430
41.47
70.31
19.94 13.51
475
(195.22) (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (343.2) (215.65)
Table 28.0-18. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole Solid Neutral, Single-Throw
Ampere NEMA 1, 3R
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
30
8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
60
8.13
(206.5)
100

Depth
(D2)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
D2
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
10.00 5.25
20
(254.0) (133.3) (9.08)
8.13
(206.5)
17.88
(454.2)
10.00
5.50
22
(254.0) (139.7) (9.988)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00 5.25
20
(254.0) (133.3) (9.08)
8.13
(206.5)
17.88
(454.2)
10.00
5.50
22
(254.0) (139.7) (9.988)
11.13
(282.7)
21.69
(550.9)
10.00 5.25
27
11.13
(254.0) (133.3) (12.258) (282.7)
24.00
(609.6)
10.25
5.50
30
(260.4) (139.7) (13.62)
200
16.00
(406.4)
27.63
(701.8)
11.25 6.14
52
16.00
(285.8) (156.0) (23.608) (406.4)
34.38
(873.3)
11.50
6.44
61
(292.1) (163.6) (27.694)
400
23.00
(584.2)
45.19
12.63 7.27
120
(1147.8) (320.8) (184.7) (54.48)
600
24.00
(609.6)
52.70
14.25 8.95
153
24.00
(1338.6) (362.0) (227.3) (69.462) (609.6)
63.00
14.25
8.88
203
(1600.2) (362.0) (225.6) (92.162)
800
25.38
(644.7)
56.69
14.25 8.95
168
25.38
(1439.9) (362.0) (227.3) (76.272) (644.7)
71.75
14.25
8.88
213
(1822.5) (362.0) (225.6) (96.702)
D2
41.47
70.31
19.94 12.44
465
41.47
70.31
19.94
13.51
510
(1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (316.0) (211.11) (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (343.2) (231.54)
Figure 28.0-8. NEMA 1, 3R 30800A
23.00
(584.2)
Depth
(D2)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
1200
37
Table 28.0-17. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 600V, Three-Pole, Single-Throw
Figure 28.0-7. NEMA 4/4X and 12 30800A

W
CL
57.63
12.63
7.19
135
(1463.8) (320.8) (182.6) (61.29)
38
39
40
41
42
D2
Figure 28.0-9. NEMA 12, 4X 30400A
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-19
Sheet 28 019
LayoutDimensions
22
Table 28.0-19. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole, Double-Throw

Ampere NEMA 1, 3R
Rating
NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel

Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
23
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
30
11.94
(303.3)
24.63
(625.6)
9.88
5.38
34
12.00
25.88
(251.0) (136.7) (15.436) (304.8) (657.4)
10.25
5.50
60
(260.4) (139.7) (27.24)
60
11.94
(303.3)
24.63
(625.6)
9.88
5.38
34
12.00
25.88
(251.0) (136.7) (15.436) (304.8) (657.4)
10.25
5.50
60
(260.4) (139.7) (27.24)
100
11.94
(303.3)
24.63
(625.6)
9.88
5.38
34
12.00
25.88
(251.0) (136.7) (15.436) (304.8) (657.4)
10.25
5.50
60
(260.4) (139.7) (27.24)
200
19.56
(496.8)
37.38
(949.5)
11.25
6.10
80
(285.8) (154.9) (36.32)
19.50
41.00
11.63
6.48
105
(495.3) (1041.4) (295.4) (164.6) (47.67)
400
23.13
(587.5)
53.81
12.50
7.25
140
(1366.8) (317.5) (184.2) (63.56)
23.00
57.50
12.50
7.25
185
(584.2) (1460.5) (317.5) (184.2) (83.99)
600
24.13
(612.9)
63.31
14.13
8.88
175
(1608.1) (358.9) (225.6) (79.45)
800
24.13
(612.9)
63.31
14.13
8.88
175
(1608.1) (358.9) (225.6) (79.45)
1200
Depth
(D2)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
24
CL
25
D2
26
Figure 28.0-10. NEMA 1, 3R 301200A
27
W
28
CL
42.15
78.11
25.62
20.47
509
(1070.6) (1984.0) (650.7) (519.9) (231.09)
Table 28.0-20. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole, Double-Throw

Ampere NEMA 1, 3R
30
NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel

Weight
Lbs (kg)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
11.94
(303.3)
36.63
(930.4)
9.88
5.38
44
12.00
39.81
10.25
5.50
45
(251.0) (136.7) (19.976) (304.8) (1011.2) (260.4) (139.7) (20.43)
60
11.94
(303.3)
36.63
(930.4)
9.88
5.38
44
12.00
39.81
10.25
5.50
45
(251.0) (136.7) (19.976) (304.8) (1011.2) (260.4) (139.7) (20.43)
100
11.94
(303.3)
36.63
(930.4)
9.88
5.38
44
12.00
39.81
10.25
5.50
45
(251.0) (136.7) (19.976) (304.8) (1011.2) (260.4) (139.7) (20.43)
200
19.56
(496.8)
50.88
11.25
6.10
95
(1292.4) (285.8) (154.9) (43.13)
400
25.38
(644.7)
74.75
14.13
8.88
230
25.38
74.75
14.13
8.92
260
(1898.7) (358.9) (225.6) (104.42) (644.7) (1898.7) (358.9) (226.6) (118.04)
600
27.44
(697.0)
86.13
14.13
8.88
320
(2187.7) (358.9) (225.6) (145.28)
800
28.12
(714.2)
58.86
25.62
20.47
282
(1495.0) (650.7) (519.9) (128.03)
42.15
78.11
25.62
20.47
509
(1070.6) (1984.0) (650.7) (519.9) (231.09)
1200
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
30
Depth
(D2)
D2
31
Figure 28.0-11. NEMA 4/4X and 12 30800A
19.56
55.63
11.63
6.46
100
(496.8) (1413.0) (295.4) (164.1) (45.4)
32
W
33
H
CL
34
35
36
D2
29
Figure 28.0-12. NEMA 1, 3R 30800A

W
37
38
39
H
40
41
42
D2
Figure 28.0-13. NEMA 12, 4X 30400A
CA08104001E
43

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 020
LayoutDimensions
22
24
25
26
13.56
(344.4)
18.57
(471.7)
23
Conduit
Entry
Allowed
In This
Area
50.45
(1281.4)
Conduit
Entry
Allowed
Along
This
Side
61.24
(1555.5)
62.89
(1597.4)
33.50
(850.9)
6.00
(152.4)
Grade
29
No Conduit
Entry This End
18.15
(461.0)
26.68
(677.7)
15.61
(396.5)
31
5.12
(130.0)
2.65
(67.31)
32
92.49
(2349.2)
93.11
(2365.0)
87.25
(2216.2)
44.43
(1128.5)
50.18
(1274.6)
10.63
(270.0)
36
37
15.40
(391.2)
1.37
(34.8)
20.95
(532.1)
34
35
4.14
(105.2)
Figure 28.0-14. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 30/200ADimensions in Inches (mm)
30
33
58.38
(1482.9)
95.75
(2432.1)
68.25
(1733.6)
38.90
(988.1)
7.00 (177.8)
2.24 (56.9)
5.00
(127.0)
60.51
(1537.0)
27
28
14.00
(355.6)
8.59 (218.2)
2.93
(74.4)
8.00 (203.2)
16.00 (406.4)
17.75
(450.9)
8.02
(203.7)
23.65
26.25
(666.8) (600.7)
.560
Mounting
Holes
4.42
(112.3)
Figure 28.0-15. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 400ADimensions in Inches (mm)

38.18
(969.8)
38
15.61
(396.5)
2.65
(67.3)
5.12
(130.0)
39
40
92.49
(2349.2)
93.11
(2365.0)
44.43
(1128.5)
41
20.95
(532.1)
61.68
(1566.7)
42
43
87.25
(2216.2)
10.63
(270.0)
16.00 (406.4)
23.65
(600.7)
.560
Mounting
Holes
2.93
(74.4)
8.00 (203.2)
A
37.75
(958.9)
1.37
(34.8)
29.25
(743.0)
8.02
(203.7)
4.42
(112.3)
Figure 28.0-16. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 600800ADimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-21
Sheet 28 021
LayoutDimensions
22
13.68
(347.5)
18.57
(471.7)
1.93 (49.0)
14.00
8.61
(218.7)
R0.25
7.00 (355.6)
(177.8)
38.15
(969.0)
1.06
(26.9)
25
5.00
(127.0)
Conduit Entry
Allowed Along
Left Side
35.27
(895.9)
37.40
(950.0)
26
39.12
(993.6)
28.42
(721.9)
27
39.78
(1010.4)
6.25 (158.8)
0.56
Mounting
Holes
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
28
4.15
(105.4)
Grade
18.00
(457.2)
23
24
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
this Area
27.43
(696.7)
2.24
(56.9)
29
30
Conduit Entry
Allowed in Top
End Wall
31
Figure 28.0-17. Quick-Connect Single-Throw 100ADimensions in Inches (mm)
32
18.57
(471.7)
1.94
(49.3)
13.68
(347.5)
14.00
R0.25
2.24
(56.9)
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
This Area
34
Allowed Along
Left Side
42.53
(1080.3)
41.87
(1063.5)
40.15
(1019.8)
28.38
(720.8)
38.02
(965.7)
37
Holes
6.25 (158.8)
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
Top End Wall
6.00 (152.4) Minimum

Grade
35
36
0.56
40.89
(1038.6)
18.00
(457.2)
33
38
4.15
(105.4)
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 022
LayoutDimensions
22
32.87
(834.9)
23
24
25
11.14 (283.0)
16.10
(408.9)
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
This Area
60.69
(1541.5)
12.00
(304.8)
73.79
(1874.3)
Conduit Entry
Allowed Along
Left Side
26
27
69.79
(1772.7)
51.64
(1311.6)
28
29
0.5
Mo
Hol
74.3
(1888
Conduit Entry
8.30 (210.8)
30
32.60
(828.0)
31
4.34
(110.2)
24.0
(609.
Grad
4.39
(111.5)
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
32
21.73
(551.9)
33
32.87
(834.9)
34
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
This Area
(1541.5)
35
Conduit Entry
36
85.04
(2160.0)
37
62.23
(1580.6)
38
39
81.03
(2058.2)
85.59
(2174.0)
0.5
Mou
Hole
40
41
42
32.6
4.34
(110.2)
13.96 (354.6)
onduit Entry
lowed in Top
nd Wall
24.0
(609
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
4.39
(111.5)
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-23
Sheet 28 023
LayoutDimensions
Table 28.0-21. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch
Ampere
Rating
NEMA 3R
23
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Width (W)
Height (H)
Depth (D)
Depth (D2)
30
26.58
(675.1)
24.93
(633.2)
16.00
(406.4)
11.29
(286.8)
60
26.58
(675.1)
24.93
(633.2)
16.00
(406.4)
11.29
(286.8)
100
26.58
(675.1)
24.93
(633.2)
16.00
(406.4)
11.29
(286.8)
22
108 lbs (49 kg) with a 15A GFI receptacle; 130 lbs (59 kg) with a 20A GFI receptacle.
25
D2
Figure 28.0-21. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty

Switch Diagram
Table 28.0-22. Elevator Control Switch

Ampere
Rating
24
26
27

Width (W)
Height (H)
Depth (D)
30
16.00
(406.4)
20.00
(508.0)
8.63
(219.2)
60
16.00
(406.4)
20.00
(508.0)
8.63
(219.2)
100
16.00
(406.4)
20.00
(508.0)
8.63
(219.2)
200
20.00
(508.0)
30.00
(762.0)
8.63
(219.2)
400
25.21
(640.3)
53.25
(1352.6)
12.69
(322.3)
30
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
8.00
(203.2)
60
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
8.00
(203.2)
100
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
8.00 (
203.2)
200
24.00
(609.6)
30.00
(762.0)
8.00
(203.2)
400
25.21
(640.3)
53.25
(1352.6)
12.69
(322.3)
28
NEMA 1
29
30
31
NEMA 3R or 12
32
Figure 28.0-22. Elevator Control Switch
Diagram
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 024
LayoutDimensions
22
23
24
Table 28.0-23. NEMA 7/9 Enclosure Sizes
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Type
Poles
Voltage
30
DS361FX
DS362FX
Fusible
(Class J fuse
provisions)
60
600 Vac
125/250 Vdc
Non-fusible
100
DS363FX
30
DS361UX
25
60
DS362UX
100
DS363UX
Standard Conduit
Size in Inches (mm)
600 Vac
125/250 Vdc
Enclosure
Number
1.50 (38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
2.50 (63.5)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
26
27
(2) 1/2-inch
(12.7 mm)
NPT
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Figure 28.0-23. NEMA 7/930100ADual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on Enclosures 1 and 2
Table 28.0-24. NEMA 7/9Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Mounting Dimensions
Number A
B
Inside Dimensions
Outside Dimensions
Number
of
Conduits
K
Approximate
Dimensions Weight
Lbs (kg)
5.50
(139.7)
13.13
(333.5)
14.13
(358.9)
5.94
(150.9)
10.75
(273.1)
10.63
(270.0)
15.25
(387.4)
8.84
(224.5)
2
2.00
(50.8)
38
(17)
6.00
(152.4)
18.00
(457.2)
19.00
(482.6)
6.50
(165.1)
16.00
(406.4)
11.00
(279.4)
20.50
(520.7)
8.97
(227.8)
2
2.31
(58.6)
57
(26)
10.25
(260.4)
22.63
(574.8)
11.75
(298.4)
20.00
(508.0)
16.38
(416.1)
25.13
(638.3)
9.59
(243.6)
2
3.50
(88.9)
104
(47)
See Table 28.0-23 for threaded conduit sizes, one at top and one at bottom.
Note: Accessories and modifications shown on Pages 28.0-14,

28.0-15, 28.0-30 and 28.0-31 are not applicable to NEMA 7/9
disconnect switches.
40
41
42
43
Dimensions are for estimating purposes only.
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-25
Sheet 28 025
Technical Data
Maximum Horsepower Ratings

Table 28.0-25. General-Duty, Fusible and Non-Fusible,
120V with Time Delay Fuses
22
Table 28.0-31. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 240V

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
3
7-1/2
30
60
100
200
3
10
20
15
10
20
40
60
24
Table 28.0-26. General-Duty, Fusible and Non-Fusible,

240V with Time Delay Fuses
400
600
800
125
200
25
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
2
3
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
30
60
100
3
10
15
200
400
600
15
Three-Phase
AC
7-1/2
15
30
60
125
200

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
2
3
5
10
Table 28.0-28. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240V with Time Delay Fuses

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
3
10
15
15
400
600
800
Three-Phase
AC
7-1/2
15
30
60
125
200
250

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
7-1/2
20
30
50
15
30
60
125
400
600
800
250
400
500

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
10
25
40
50
20
50
75
150
400
600
800
350
500
500
Three-Phase
AC
26

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
7-1/2
20
40
50
20
50
75
125
400
600
800
250
400
500

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
10
25
50
50
30
60
100
150
400
600
800
350
500
500
Table 28.0-34. Double Throw, Fusible, 240V with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
30
60
100
3
10
15
200
400
600
15
23
Three-Phase
AC
7-1/2
15
30
60
125
50
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Only available for use with fast acting fuses. Standard hp rating is shown.
Table 28.0-35. Double Throw, Fusible, 480V with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
30
60
100
7-1/2
20
30
200
400
50
Three-Phase
AC
15
30
60
125
250
Note: Ratings are based on three-pole designs.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 026
Technical Data
22
23
24
25
Maximum Horsepower Ratings

Table 28.0-36. Double-Throw, Fusible, 600V with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
10
25
40
20
50
75
200
400
50
150
350
Table 28.0-37. Double-Throw, Non-Fusible, 120V
26
27
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
30
60
2
3
Three-Phase
AC
5
10
28
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
29
30
60
100
200
3
10
20
15
10
20
40
60
400
600
800
125
125
125
30
31
Three-Phase
AC

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
33
30
60
100
200
7-1/2
20
40
50
20
50
75
125
34
400
600
800
250
250
250
32

Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
10
25
50
50
30
60
100
150
400
600
800
350
350
350
Table 28.0-41. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 480V, 600V Types 7 and 9

Ampere
Rating
Three-Phase, 480V
AC
Three-Phase, 600V
AC
30
60
100
200
20
40
75
125
20
50
75
150
Table 28.0-42. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 480V, 600V Types 7 and 9 with

Time Delay Fuses
Ampere
Rating
Three-Phase, 480V
AC
Three-Phase, 600V
AC
30
60
100
200
15
30
60
125
20
50
75
150
Note: Ratings are based on three-pole designs.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-27
Sheet 28 027
Technical DataShort-Circuit Ratings
General-Duty
Short-Circuit Ratings of Non-Fusible Switches
Table 28.0-43. Short-Circuit Ratings Using Class R,

J or T Fusing where Applicable
The UL listed short-circuit ratings for Eatons non-fusible

switches are based on the switches being properly protected
by overcurrent protective devices. For applications that
require a UL listed short-circuit rating of 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes or less, an Eaton non-fusible switch
must be properly protected by any overcurrent protective
device rated no greater than the ampere rating of the switch.
For applications that require a UL listed short-circuit rating
of greater than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes, an
Eaton non-fusible switch must be properly protected by
the appropriate class and size fusing noted. Otherwise, this
non-fusible switch must be replaced with an Eaton fusible
switch that uses the appropriate fusing required. Moldedcase circuit breaker protection of non-fusible Eaton switches
for applications that require a short-circuit rating of greater
than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes has been evaluated
and is summarized below. Refer to the reference tables for
typical Eaton fusible switch UL listed short-circuit ratings.
Ampere
Rating
Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes)

Type 1
Type 3R
30
60
100
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
200
400
600
100k at 240V
100k at 250V
100k at 250V
100k at 240V
100k at 250V
100k at 250V
Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A.

Rated at 10,000 rms symmetrical when using class H fuses.
Heavy-Duty
Ampere
Rating
30
Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes)

Type 1
Type 3R
Type 12
Type 4 and 4X
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
Table 28.0-46. UL Recognized Safety Switch/Circuit Breaker

Series-Connected Ratings
Safety
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Maximum
System
Voltage AC
Circuit Breaker
Maximum
Short Circuit
Rating (rms
Symmetrical)
Circuit Breaker
Frame(s)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
60
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
100
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
400
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
30 and
60
600
25,000
18,000
14,000
FDC, HFD, HFDE, EGH

FD, EGE
FDB
31
600
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
100
600
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
25,000
18,000
14,000
FDC, HFD, HFDE, EGH

FD, EGE
FDB
32
800
1200
480
35,000
EGH, EGS
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200k at 600V
200
600
25,000
18,000
14,000
FDC, HFD, HFDE, HJD, JGH

FD, JD, JGE
FDB
33
480
65,000
HFD, HFDE, HJD, JGH
Class L fuse connectors supplied as standard for 800A and 1200A.
Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A. Rated at

10,000A rms symmetrical when using Class H fuses.
Double Throw
Ampere
Rating
Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes) (600V)

Type 1
Type 3R
Type 12
Type 4 and 4X
30
60
100
200
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
400
600
800
1200
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A, except

Class T for 400A at 600V and 600A at 240V. Rated at 10,000A rms
symmetrical when using class H fuses.
Note: Class L fuse connectors supplied as standard for 800A
and 1200A.
Note: Safety switch short-circuit ratings are applicable to AC only.
Note: Safety switch I2t and Ip values are identical to UL maximum
acceptable I2t and Ip values for the corresponding class fuse.
Note: Table 28.0-45 is not applicable to the compact design shown
in Eatons Volume 2Commercial Distribution, CA08100003E, Tab 8,
Section 8.1. The compact design is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
CA08104001E
30
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 028
Technical DataFuse Dimensions
22
23
24
Typical Fuse Dimensions

Cl
Class
T
Cl
Class
J
Class RK5 and RK1
T-Tron Fuses
JJN (300V)
JJS (600V)
Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses

(600V)
Fusetron, Low-Peak and

Limitron Fuses (250 and 600V)
FRN-R and FRS-R; LPN-RK
and LPS-RK; KTN-R and KTS-R
Basic dimensions are same as Class H
(formerly NEC) ONE-TIME (NON and NOS)
and SUPERLAG Renewable RES and
REN fuses.
25
26
Note: These fuses can be used to replace

existing Class H, RK1 and RK5 fuses relating
to dimensional compatibility.
A
27
28
250V
Ampere
1/1030
3560
29
A
2.00
3.00
600V
B
0.56
0.81
A
5.00
5.50
B
0.81
1.06
30
Fusetron and Limitron
250V
31
Ampere
70100
110200
225400
32
A
5.88
7.13
8.63
10.38
B
1.06
1.56
2.06
2.59
600V
A
7.88
9.63
11.63
13.38
B
1.34
1.84
2.59
3.13
Low-Peak
33
250V
Ampere
70100
110200
450600
34
35
Cl
Class
L
36
A
5.88
7.13
8.63
10.38
B
1.16
1.66
2.38
2.88
600V
A
7.88
9.63
11.63
13.38
B
1.16
1.66
2.38
2.88

4000A) (600V)
Note
800A
same dimensions, except tube

3-inch lgth. x 2-inch dia.; terminal
1.63-inch width x 1.25-inch thick.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Figure 28.0-24. Typical Fuse Dimensions in Inches
Note: For typical fuse dimensions in millimeters, see Figure 28.0-25 on Page 28.0-29.
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-29
Sheet 28 029
Technical DataFuse Dimensions
Typical Fuse Dimensions (Continued)
22
Class T
Class J
Class RK5 and RK1
23
T-Tron Fuses
JJN (300V)

LPJ and JKS (600V)
Fusetron, Low-Peak and

Limitron Fuses (250 and 600V)
FRN-R and FRS-R; LPN-RK
and LPS-RK; KTN-R and KTS-R
24
Basic dimensions are same as Class H

(formerly NEC) ONE-TIME (NON and NOS)
and SUPERLAG Renewable RES and REN fuses.
25
Note: These fuses can be used to replace

existing Class H, RK1 and RK5 fuses relating
to dimensional compatibility.
26
JJS (600V)
27
B
250V
Ampere
1/1030
3560
A
50.8
76.2
B
14.3
20.6
600V
A
127.0
139.7
B
20.6
27.0
A
B
28
29
30
Fusetron and Limitron
250V
Ampere
70100
110
A
149.2
181.0
450
263.5
B
26.9
39.6
52.3
65.8
600V
A
200.0
244.5
295.3
339.7
B
34.0
46.7
65.8
79.5
31
32
Low-Peak
250V
Ampere
70100
110
450
A
149.2
181.0
263.5
B
29.5
42.2
60.5
73.2
600V
A
200.0
244.5
295.3
339.7
B
29.5
42.2
60.5
73.2
33
34
35
Class L

KRP-C, KTU and KLU (6014000A) (600V)
Note: KRP-CL (150
800A
samedimensions, except tube

76.2 mm lgth. x 50.8 mm dia.; terminal
41.3 mm width x 31.8 mm thick.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Figure 28.0-25. Typical Fuse Dimensions in Millimeters

Note: For typical fuse dimensions in inches, see Figure 28.0-24 on Page 28.0-28.
CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
Sheet 28 030
Factory ModificationsFlex Center Facility
22
Flex Center
Switching Neutral
Double-Throw (SN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Introduction
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
The Safety Switch Flex Center is a

special facility at the site of Eatons
Cleveland, Tennessee, plant that is
dedicated to providing customized
safety switches that meet customers
challenging applications.
Eatons Safety Switch Flex Center is a
solutions center that provides real value:
A dedicated and knowledgeable
engineering/manufacturing/customer
service team to meet your needs
A production facility stocked with
a full array of equipment to get the
job done
The industrys shortest lead time
Easy ordering through our distributors
Description (Suffix)
Item
Phenolic Nameplates (NP) . . . . . . . . 1
30
Fungus Proofing (FP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Special Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Lock-On Provisions on
Heavy-Duty Safety Switches for
Most Enclosure Types (LO) . . . . . . . 4
Trapped Key Interlock
Systems (TK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Neutral Assemblies Factory

Installed for Single-Throw
Non-Fusible Safety Switches (N) . . . 20
1. Nameplates
Price covers up to three lines of text
with a maximum of 25 characters per
line. Standard nameplates are laserengraved plastic and have black letters
on a white background. Rotary-engraved
phenolic nameplates are also available
at a premium. Additional color
combinations and larger nameplates
are available. Customer must specify
the text when placing an order.
2. Fungus Proofing
All non-metallic components of the
switch are coated with a moisture and
fungus-resistant varnish. The inhibitor
used meets military specification:
MIL-V-173C for MOISTURE AND
FUNGUS-RESISTANT TREATMENT.
The treated switch meets military
specification: MIL-T-152E for
MOISTURE AND FUNGUS-RESISTANT
TREATMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS,
ELECTRONICS AND ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT. Not UL listed.
Upper Cover Viewing Window (W) . . 6
To specify, add Suffix FP to standard

safety switch catalog number.
Example: DH363FGKFP.
Lower Cover Viewing Window (LW) . . 7
3. Special Paint
Neutral Assemblies Factory

Installed for Double-Throw
Safety Switches (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Class R Fuse Clips Factory
Installed for Heavy-Duty
Switches (5 or 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Class T Fuse Clips Factory
Installed for Heavy-Duty
Switches (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Class J Fuse Clips Factory
Installed for Heavy-Duty and
Double-Throw Safety Switches (J) . 11
Fuse Pullers Factory Installed (FE) . . 12
40
Special Crimp Lug Pads Factory

Installed for General-Duty and
Heavy-Duty Switches (CK) . . . . . . . 13
41
Copper Lugs Factory

Installed (CL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
42
Equipment Ground Lugs

Factory Installed (G) . . . . . . . . . . . 15
43
Custom Lug Configurations (L) . . . 16

Auxiliary Contacts Factory
Installed (2 or 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Special paint colors are available

for order quantities of five or more
switches. Colors available are red,
orange, yellow, green, black and white.
Custom color is applied over the
standard ANSI-61 gray finish.
Minimum quantity of five of the same
color is required. To specify, add Suffix
LO to the standard catalog number.
For quantities less than five, higher
ampere ratings, or other color request,
contact the Safety Switch Flex Center.
4. Lock-on Provisions on Heavy-Duty

Safety Switches for Most Enclosure Types
Available on 30800A Heavy-Duty
and Double-Throw Safety Switches.
Provision will accept a single lock. To
specify, add Suffix LO to the standard
catalog number.
5. Trapped Key Interlock Systems

Available only on Heavy-Duty and
Double-Throw Safety Switches.
Trapped Key Systems are used on
safety switches to prevent unauthorized operations or to predetermine
a series of power transfers by an
authorized operator.
Before system construction can begin,

the following information must be
provided to the Flex Center:
1. Username, address and
telephone number.
2. Complete coordination (lock
scheme) required with order.
To specify, add Suffix TK to the standard
catalog number.
6. Upper Cover Viewing Window

Upper Viewing Window is Centered
over the switching contacts to provide
visual verification of ON/OFF status.
Available on most Heavy-Duty NEMA 4X
Stainless Steel and NEMA 12 DoubleThrow enclosures. Not available on
nonmetallic enclosures. To specify, add
Suffix W to the standard catalog number.
Note: 30100A switches are now provided
with a full view cover window for blade
verification and blown fuse indication.
7. Lower Cover Viewing Window

Lower Viewing Window is positioned
over fuses and provides visual
verification of Blown Fuse Indicators.
Available in 30600A, two- and threepole Heavy-Duty NEMA 12, NEMA 3R
and NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Safety
Switches. Not available on nonmetallic
enclosures. To specify, add Suffix LW
to standard catalog number.
Note: 30100A switches are now provided
with a full view cover window for blade
verification and blown fuse indication.
8. Neutral Assemblies Factory Installed

for Double-Throw Safety Switches
To specify, add Suffix N to the standard
Example: DT361URKN
9. Class R Fuse Clips Factory Installed for

Heavy-Duty Switches
To specify, add Suffix 5 to the standard
catalog number for 240V application.
Add Suffix 6 to standard catalog
number for 600V application.
Example: DH324FRK5
10. Class T Fuse Clips Factory Installed

for Heavy-Duty Switches
To specify, add Suffix T to the standard
catalog number (catalog number
identifies voltage).
Example: DH364FGKT
Control Pole Factory Installed (CP). . 18

CA08104001E

Safety Switches
September 2011
28.0-31
Sheet 28 031
Factory ModificationsFlex Center Facility

11. Class J Fuse Clips Factory Installed
for Heavy-Duty and Double-Throw Safety
Switches
To specify by description. A table
of common 30A heavy-duty switches
with J fuse clips factory installed is
shown below (field modification kits
are not available for 30A Heavy-Duty
Switches).
Table 28.0-47. Common 30A Heavy-Duty
Switches with J Fuse Clips Factory Installed
Voltage
240
600
Switch Type
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 4X
DH321FGKJ
DH321FRKJ
DH321FDKJ
DH321FWKJ
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 4X
DH361FGKJ
DH361FRKJ
DH361FDKJ
DH361FWKJ
To specify, add Suffix J to the

standard catalog number (catalog
number identifies voltage).
Example: DH363FGKJ
12. Fuse Pullers Factory Installed

To specify, add Suffix FE to the
standard catalog number.
Example: DH361FRKFE.
Note: Standard NEMA 12/3R, 4 and 4X
switches through 200A are supplied with
fuse pullers from the factory.
13. Special Crimp Lug Pads Factory Installed

for General-Duty and Heavy-Duty Switches
(Crimp Lugs are Not Included)
16. Custom Lug Configurations

Customer-specified lug arrangements
are available on heavy-duty and doublethrow safety switches. Contact the
Safety Switch Flex Center for price
and lead time.
17. Auxiliary Contacts Factory Installed

Provide Early-Make/Early-Break Operation
To specify 1NO/1NC contacts, add
Suffix 2 to the standard safety switch
catalog number.
To specify 2NO/2NC contacts, add
Suffix 3 to the standard safety switch
catalog number.
Example: DT324FGK22
To specify, add Suffix G to the standard

To specify, add Suffix CP to the

standard Safety Switch catalog number.
19. Switching Neutral Double-Throw
To specify, add Suffix SN to the standard

Example: DT324URKSN
20. Neutral Assemblies Factory Installed for

Single-Throw Non-Fusible Safety Switches
Available on 200600A General-Duty
Safety Switches and 301200A HeavyDuty Safety Switches.
To specify, add Suffix N to the standard
Safety Switch Catalog Number.
Example: DH364UWKN
For application, availability or pricing
questions, contact Eaton.
CA08104001E
The K-Series Control Pole provides

one Normally Open contact, latemake, early-break operation. It mounts
in the exact location as the neutral
block using the same pre-drilled holes.
This is directly connected to the power
pole operating shaft. Direct connection
and visible blades provide more
secure electrical interlocking than
handle linkage operation of a snap/
switch type interlock. This reliability
meets the requirements of many
specifications for four-pole switches
when the fourth pole is required
for secure electrical interlocking.
UL listed for three-pole and four-pole

non-fusible double-throw safety
switches. Switching neutrals are
required for separately derived
systems when bonding the neutral of
the generator to a grounding system
at the generator.
15. Equipment Ground Lugs Factory

Installed for General-Duty and
Heavy-Duty Switches
Heavy-Duty Type DH Switches,

30200A, are adaptable to crimp
lugs; simply remove the box lugs.
Example: DH221FGKCL
18. Control Pole Factory Installed Provides

Late-Make/Early-Break Operation
Example: DH267FGKCP
To specify, add Suffix CL to the standard

Example: DH423FGK2
To specify add Suffix CK to the

standard safety switch catalog number.
14. Copper Lugs Factory Installed
Additional Safety Switch Flex

Center Design Offerings
Left-hand design (30200A)

Cover-mounted status lights and
selector switches
Integrated:
Surge protection devices (SPDs)
Current transformers
Double-throw receptacle switches
200% neutrals
1200A NEMA 4X stainless steel
Seam-welded stainless steel
Gang-operated kits:
Mechanically interlocks two or
three separate switches
Cam-Lok receptacles
Reverse feed
Integrated wattmeter
Custom enclosures
Double-throw switches with windows
316 Grade stainless steel
Mill duty
Literature
The Safety Switch Flex Centers innovative approach to flexible engineering,
manufacturing and customer service
provides the shortest production, design
and delivery cycle in the industry. Find
out more about how the Safety Switch
Flex Center can give you the safety
switch solutions you need...when you
need them.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Motor Control CentersLow Voltage
29.0-1
May 2015

Low Voltage
Sheet 29 001
CA08104001E
Contents
22

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Structures and Structure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metering and Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Harmonic Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Groups for AC Combination Starters, AFDs. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPX9000 Clean Power Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freedom Arc Resistant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freedom FlashGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPX9000 Clean Power Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.1-1
29.1-14
29.1-23
29.2-1
29.2-5
29.2-13
29.2-14
29.2-14
29.2-14
29.2-15
29.2-15
29.2-15
29.2-15
29.3-1
29.3-1
29.3-2
29.3-9
29.3-11
29.4-1
29.4-1
29.4-2
29.4-6
29.5-1
29.5-1
29.5-2
29.5-9
29.5-11
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16482A
Section 26 24 19.11
FlashGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16482D
Section 26 24 19.13
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom Motor
Control Center
Freedom FlashGard
Motor Control Center
Freedom Arc Motor

Control Center
29.0-2 Motor Control CentersLow Voltage

May 2015
Sheet 29 002
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
29.1-1
May 2015
Sheet 29 003
General Description
Freedom, Freedom Arc

Resistant MCC, Freedom
FlashGard Motor
Control Centers
Freedom Motor Control Center
Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Center
General Description
Market Segments
Overview
Eatons MCCs have been designed to

meet the specific needs of several
industries including:
Eatons motor control centers (MCCs)

provide a convenient method for
grouping motor control, as well as
associated distribution equipment.
MCCs may be applied on electrical
systems up to 600 V, 50 or 60 Hz,
having available fault currents of up
to 100,000 A rms. Enclosure designs
include NEMA 1 Gasketed as well as
NEMA 2, 12, 3R and 3R walk-in. All
controllers are assembled with Eaton
components of proven safety, quality
and reliability. All components are
wired in accordance with NEC and
UL standards. An ongoing temperature and short-circuit design test
program, as required by UL 845,
ensures a quality product that meets
the latest safety codes. Freedom DC
motor control centers are available
up to 250 Vdc, having available fault
currents up to 22,000 A rms. A comprehensive range of communications
options are also available, including
DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS,
Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP.
Oil and gas (upstream, downstream

and pipeline)
Water treatment and wastewater
Commercial construction
Mining and aggregate
Utility
UL 845 Listed
NEMA ICS 3 Part 1
NEC section 430 Part H
Seismic compliance to IBC 2009
and CBC 2010
ABS certified for non-propulsion
loads
CSA 22.2 No. 0.22-11 ARC Resistant
Tested to C37.20.7 guidelines
Ratings
MCCs provide the best method for

grouping motor control as well as associated distribution equipment. Eatons
MCCs are specially designed to operate
machinery, industrial processes and
commercial building systems. The MCC
enclosure consists of a strong and rigid
self-supporting steel channel framework assembled into standardized
vertical sections and bolted together to
form a complete shipping section of up
to 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) maximum,
four structures each. Structures include
horizontal and vertical bus, insulation
and isolation barriers, horizontal and
vertical isolated wiring troughs, cable
entrance areas, and space for inserting
starter and control equipment. All control units, removable or fixed mounted,
are assembled with Eaton components
of proven safety, quality and reliability.
Specifically designed bus stabs, insertion guides, handle mechanisms and
safety interlocks are added to form a
standardized plug-in unit that meets the
highest safety standards.
600 Vac / 250 Vdc

Maximum 3200 A horizontal bus
Maximum 1200 A vertical bus
42 kA, 65 kA and 100 kA short
circuit withstand
Operating temperature 0 C (32 F)
to 40 C (104 F)
Storage temperature 40 C (40 F)
to 65 C (149 F)
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Key MCC Features
Freedom Arc Motor Control Center
Molded-case and air circuit breaker

mains
Bimetallic and solid-state overloads
IEEE 519 clean power drives
Adjustable frequency drives (AFD)
up to 500 hp
Reduced voltage soft starts (RVSS)
up to 1000 A
Panelboards/transformers/ATS
Metering/SPDs/feeder breakers
MCPs/fused switch disconnects
16- and 21-inch deep enclosures
21-inch deep back-to-back design
1A to 2C wiring capability
120 V / 240 V or 480 V coil options as
well as 24 Vdc
Drawout NEMA Size 1 to 5
Fixed NEMA 6 and higher
Table 29.1-1. Feature Comparison Key
CA08104001E
22
Family
480 V and
Lower
600 V
Compact
Units
ARC
Rating
Smart
Freedom
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom FlashGard
Yes
Yes
N/A
Preventive
Yes
Freedom ARC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Type 2
Yes
35

May 2015
Sheet 29 004
General Description
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Freedom
Eatons Freedom MCC has been in
production since 1994 employing the
Freedom NEMA contactor in combination with multiple motor overload
styles and either a fused switch or a
molded-case breaker disconnect. The
Freedom MCC meets all the above
listed standards, ratings and features.
Freedom Arc Resistant MCC

Eatons Freedom Arc Resistant MCC is
the first MCC to be tested to a North
American guideline specifically written
for low voltage MCCs, unlike C37.20.7
that is a guideline for testing metalenclosed switchgear up to 38 kV.
tested in accordance with CSA C22.2
No. 0.22-11 titled Evaluation methods
for arc resistant ratings of enclosed
electrical equipment. To meet the CSA
guideline (and also the future C37.20.7
guideline) the following must be met.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Criterion 1: DeformationDoors,
covers and other items must not
open. Distortion and bowing of
these items is permitted but must
not extend to the indicators placed
around the enclosure for testing.
Criterion 2: Fragmentation
Fragmentation of the enclosure
must not occur. Small items/parts
are permitted to eject as long as
their mass is 60 grams or less.
Criterion 3: Burn-throughBurnthrough that causes holes in the
enclosure must not occur in the
freely accessible enclosure. Based
on the results of this test, an
Accessibility Type is achieved
(Accessibility Type 1 or Type 2).
Criterion 4: IndicatorsIndicators
placed around the enclosure for
testing must not ignite as a result
of escaping gases or particles.
Criterion 5: GroundingAll
grounding connections must
remain effective.

a Type 2, 50 ms device limited ARC
offering. Device limited means that
specific combinations of devices (units
and assemblies) are tested so that an
ARC rating can be achieved. The
combination of devices includes all
the standard Freedom devices less a
handful, which are covered under the
Features section.
The Freedom Arc Resistant MCC is
constructed out of 12-gauge sheet
steel instead of the standard 14-gauge
including the doors, side and back
sheets and the top panels.
The width of the MCC is 8.00 inches
(203.2 mm) wider than a standard
Freedom MCC with 4.00 inches
(101.6 mm) added to the left and to
the right of the lineup to allow for gas
to expand if an arc occurs. The depth
of the Freedom Arc Resistant MCC is
21.00 inches (533.4 mm) deep and is
front mount only. The Freedom
Arc Resistant MCC is 90.00 inches
(2286.0 mm) in height and does not
come in reduced height. The Freedom
ARC MCC does not need any venting
or plenums to vent the gas, allowing
the MCC to be mounted up against a
wall or a ceiling to be brought down to
the top of the MCC.
ARC Features
To meet the CSA guideline, the following features and devices must be met.
Main breaker must be NGH or RGH

molded-case or MLO fed from NGH
or RGH
Main horizontal bus up to 2500 A
RVSS to 200 hp and AFDs to 150 hp
Thermal-magnetic breaker combination starters only
65 kAIC bus bracing
NEMA 1, 2 enclosures
21-inch front mount
Insulated horizontal bus and
labyrinth vertical bus
80% rated feeder breakers up
to 600 A
Freedom FlashGard
Eatons Freedom FlashGard MCCs are
an industry first in addressing the
dangers associated with an arc flash
event by minimizing the risk of arc
flash exposure. Freedom FlashGard
offers features to help prevent injury
from electric shock, arc-flash burn and
arc-blast impacts and is the first Arc
Preventative MCC.
The Freedom FlashGard MCC uses a
retractable stab mechanism called
RotoTract that allows the electrical
worker to connect and disconnect line
power to the unit from behind a dead
front (closed door). Visual indication of
the stab position is provided on the
unit door on the Connected and
Disconnected positions of RotoTract.
Visual indication on the position of
the shutters that enclose the stabs is
also provided (open shutters indicates
that stabs are extended and closed
shutters indicate that the stabs are
withdrawn). In addition, a number of
safety interlocks prevents scenarios
where removal or insertion of
FlashGard bucket could compromise
arc flash safety.
A motorized tool, such as an electric
screwdriver with a 3/8-inch (9.5 mm)
square bit or standard 3/8-inch (9.5 mm)
drive ratchet is required to operate
RotoTracts retractable stab mechanism. An optional 120 V remote racking
accessory with a pendant station is
available as to enable the operator to
operate the RotoTract from safely
behind the arc flash boundary as
prescribed by the National Fire
Protection Agency (NFPA).
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
29.1-3
May 2015
Sheet 29 005
General Description
NEMA Classifications (ICS 3, Part 1)
Structures
Class I Control Centers

A mechanical grouping of combination
motor control, feeder tap and/or other
units arranged in a convenient assembly. Connections from the common
horizontal power bus to the units are
included. Interwiring or interlocking
between units or to remotely mounted
devices is not included. Only diagrams
of the individual units are supplied.
When master terminal blocks are
specified, a sketch showing general
location of terminals is provided.
Class II Control Centers

The same as Class I, but designed
to form a complete control system.
They include the necessary electrical
interlocking and interwiring between
units and interlocking provisions to
remotely mounted devices. A suitable
diagram illustrating operation of the
control associated with the motor
control center will be provided.
The unit pan forms the top barrier

of each unit space. In conjunction
with the unit wrapper, this provides
isolation between adjacent units
and wireways. The guide rails are an
integral part of this pan and provide
precise alignment of the unit stabs
on the vertical bus.
When master terminal blocks are

specified, the terminal arrangement
and required wiring connections are
shown on the diagram.
Standard Structure Arrangements

Standard StructureSide View
NEMA Types of Wiring

Type A includes no unit terminal
blocks and no unit-to-unit wiring.
Combination line starters power
wiring are factory wired and assembled
in the structure in the most efficient
arrangement. Auxiliary devices can
be supplied, wired or unwired as
specified. All feeder circuit breaker
or fusible disconnect units are in
this classification.
Type B duplicates Type A except that
all control wires terminate at terminal
blocks on the side or near the bottom
of each unit. Removable terminal
blocks are standard for all control
wiring.
The free-standing structure framework

is made of 12-gauge formed steel
channels. The subframes for the front
and rear of each structure are welded.
These subframes are then bolted to
longitudinal members to form the
complete frame, which is rigid and selfsupporting. Side, back and roof covers
of 14-gauge steel (except where noted)
are mounted with screw fasteners for
quick and easy removal. All doors are
14-gauge steel (except where noted)
with a 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) flange to
provide a rigid, secure closure for all
openings. Doors mounted on removable pin hinges are provided on all unit
compartments. Vertical wireways, top
horizontal wireways and bottom horizontal wireways are standard.
Construction
The standard vertical structure is
90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) high and
20.00 inches (508.0 mm) wide. Frontmounted-only structures can be
either 16.00 inches (406.4 mm) or
21.00 inches (533.4 mm) deep. Frontto-back unit mounting is 21.00 inches
(533.4 mm) deep. Bolted back-to-back
can be in 16.00-inch (406.4 mm)
or 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep
structures.
Type C-S all factory-supplied control

terminals are brought to a master
terminal block located in the structure.
Type C-M all factory-supplied control
terminals are brought to a master
terminal block located in a separate
marshaling structure.
Standard structural height is

90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) with
9.00-inch (228.6 mm) horizontal wireways available at top and bottom for
wiring. The balance of vertical compartments, 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm),
is available for mounting of control
units. This space can provide up to 12
6.00-inch (152.4 mm) high (X spaces)
or any combination thereof.
Note: In the rear of common vertical bus
front-to-back structures, the top horizontal
wireway is 15.00 inches (381.0 mm) high
and the bottom wireway is 9.00 inches
(228.6 mm). This means that front-to-back
structures have only 66.00 inches
(1676.4 mm) 11X of usable space in
the rear. 72.00-inch (1828.8 mm) 12X of
mounting space is available with a 3.00-inch
(76.2 mm) bottom wireway. Two frontmounted only structures can be supplied
in a front-to-back configuration, allowing
12X rear usable space (depth dimension
will increase).
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
Sheet 29 006
General Description
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Special Structures
In addition to the standard 20.00-inch
(508.0 mm) wide structure, extra wide
structures are available in 4.00-inch
(101.6 mm) increments up to
40.00 inches (1016.0) wide.
Reduced height structures, in increments
of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) 1X from 90.00
to 54.00 inches (2286.0 to 1371.6 mm),
are available for applications with
limited access.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Horizontal Wireways
Top Horizontal Wireway
Another special structure is a transition

section between Type W and the
Freedom Series. This structure
is 10.00 inches (254.0 mm) wide to
provide for horizontal bus splicing.
Paint
All enclosure parts are thoroughly
cleaned and given a phosphatizing
treatment to inhibit rust and to prime
the metal for the finish coating. A 2 mil
thick electrostatic powder paint coat
is applied to all surfaces. The paint
type and process meets UL 1332 for
electrical equipment steel enclosures.
All exterior enclosure covers and
doors are painted ANSI 61 gray
(Munsell No. 8.3G/6.10/0.54). For
improved interior visibility, the
interior of the enclosure and
plug-in units are painted white
(Munsell No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).
Enclosures
34
Indoor enclosures comply with NEC

UL 845s Two Meter Rule when the
bottom of the MCC is at the same
level as the operators platform. MCCs
elevated on a raised pad or installed
on unembedded channel sills may
require operator handle extensions
for the uppermost operators. Handle
extensions are optionally available and
may be installed on-site.
The standard enclosure type is

NEMA Type 1 Gasketed General
PurposeIndoor. This enclosure
is appropriate for installations with
normal atmospheric conditions.
The NEMA Type 2 DripproofIndoor
employs a special roof panel with a
drip shield and water channels. This
prevents liquid from dripping onto
the front of the control center.

Vertical Wireway
A vertical wireway is provided in each
structure. Located on the right side, it
extends the full 90.00-inch (2286.0 mm)
height of the structure. The width of the
wireway is 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm) at
the rear of the vertical frame members.
Overall depth of the wireway is 8.00
inches (203.2 mm) providing a crosssectional area of nearly 35 square
inches (889 square mm) to easily
accommodate control and load
wiring. Supports are provided at
suitable intervals to secure all
wiring and cables.
The doors swing open 115 and
opposite to the unit doors for maximum accessibility. The doors are
mounted on concealed removable
pin hinges for quick detachment and
are secured in the closed position by
spring-loaded quarter-turn indicating
type fastener.
The NEMA Type 3R Rainproof and

Sleet ResistantOutdoor consists
of a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure
mounted on a special base with an
outdoor house erected around and
over it. Non-walk-in, walk-in aisle
and tunnel types are available.
Bottom Horizontal Wireway
The top front horizontal wireway is

8.00 inches (203.2 mm) deep in frontmounted only structures and in the
front of back-to-back mounted structures. It extends the full width of each
structure and is totally isolated from
the main horizontal bus. The bottom
horizontal wireway is 9.00 inches
(228.6 mm) high and extends the full
depth of the structure. The entire floor
area under the control center is open
for unrestricted conduit entry. For top
entry, the top wireway can be increased
to 15.00 inches (381.0 mm) high,
reducing the bottom wireway height
to 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
For back-to-back unit mounted,
the rear top horizontal wireway is
5.00 inches (127.0 mm) deep.
All horizontal wireway openings
are covered by doors for increased
accessibility. Each door is mounted
with removable pin hinges to allow
quick detachment.
Bus System
The bus system is designed to
efficiently distribute power
throughout the MCC and provides
inherent mechanical strength in
the event of faults.
The NEMA Type 12 Dust-tight and

DriptightIndoor has gasketed
material around all doors, door
cutouts, cover plates, side, top and
back sheets. A gasketed bottom plate
is provided with this enclosure. This
construction provides maximum
protection against airborne matter
and dripping liquids.
CA08104001E
29.1-5
May 2015
Sheet 29 007
General Description
Vertical Bus
Vertical Bus Configuration
The vertical bus provides three-phase

power distribution from the main
horizontal bus into the vertical
compartments. The bus is a unique
angular configuration with a Z
shape for front-mounted structures
and for back-to-back. These shapes
have the inherent mechanical strength
to withstand fault stresses. They also
provide a smooth stabbing surface for
unit connection.
its mechanical strength is better able to

withstand the stresses of unit insertion
and removal on and off the bus. Vertical
bus of the incoming section will match
the horizontal bus when applicable.
Isolation of the Freedom vertical bus
compartment from the unit compartment is accomplished by a full height
isolation barrier, which is a single
sheet of glass-reinforced polyester
with cutouts to allow the unit stabs
to engage the vertical bus. Snap-in
covers are available for the cutout
openings to provide total isolation
during maintenance procedures.
An automatic shutter mechanism

is standard with the labyrinth barrier
to provide complete isolation of the
vertical bus. The shutter moves automatically to cover the stab openings
when a unit is removed. This provides
maintenance personnel with maximum protection because the vertical
bus is never exposed. As the unit is
reinserted in the compartment, the
shutter moves sideways to uncover the
stab openings in the barrier.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Standard Isolation Barrier
Labyrinth Barrier with

Automatic Shutter Mechanism
Horizontal Bus
31
32
33
34
35
36
Horizontal Bus
MCC Bus Layout
Standard Isolation Barrier Rear View
Due to the high-strength capability

of the bus bars, bus bracing at
65,000 rms symmetrical amperes is
standard. Optional bracing is available
at 42,000 and 100,000 A rms. Bus
braces are molded from a glassreinforced polyester material, which
is non-tracking and impervious
to moisture and other adverse
atmospheric operating conditions.
When insulation and isolation of the

vertical bus is required, a labyrinth
design barrier, as shown below, as an
option for Freedom and as a standard
for Freedom Arc Resistant MCC and
Freedom FlashGard. This barrier is
molded glass-reinforced polyester and
forms a labyrinth around the bus bars
to prevent fault propagation. This
design provides maximum protection
against phase-to-phase insulation
breakdown. Thermal efficiency is
maintained by a close tolerance fit
between the bus bars and the barrier,
which minimizes air pockets.
The vertical bus is available in

ratings of 600, 800 and 1200 A for
front-mounted only, and 600, 800
and 1200 A for back-to-back mounted.
Vertical bus bars are tin-plated copper
only. In addition to tin plating having
environmental superiority over silver,
CA08104001E
The main horizontal bus provides

three-phase power distribution from
the incoming line or primary disconnect device to each vertical structure in
the motor control center. The bus bars
are mounted in a vertical plane, edge
to edge. This mounting produces an
exceptionally strong assembly, able to
withstand high fault current stresses.
The main horizontal bus is rated at
600 A as standard with ratings of 800,
1200, 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 A
optionally available. Tin-plated copper
horizontal bus bars are supplied as
standard. Silver-plated copper
horizontal bus bars are an option.
Note: 3200 A horizontal bus available in
NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65 C rise
above 40 C ambient only.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 008
General Description
22
23
24
25
26
27
The horizontal main bus is isolated

from the top horizontal wireway
compartment by a metal isolation
barrier. This two-piece steel barrier
extends to the full width of each vertical
structure. The two-piece design allows
access to bus connections without the
removal of the entire barrier, for added
maintenance convenience. The bus
bar layout permits front access to all
bus connections. This allows maintenance personnel to make splices and
check splice bolt torques from the front
of the structure.
Neutral Assemblies
Units
General
Motor starter units are combination
type employing a linestarter and a
disconnect device of proven capability.
The disconnect device can be a High
interrupting Motor Circuit Protector
(HMCP), Thermal-Magnetic (TM)
breaker or fusible switch. Eatons
Type HMCP and HMCPE motor circuit
protectors are furnished as standard.
All starters and soft starters through
NEMA Size 5 are a drawout design
except Size 5 electromechanical
reduced voltage. Size 5 optionally
can be bolt-in if requested.
28
All feeder breakers through 400 A

are a drawout design.
29
All dimensions and ratings in the

following tables are based on NEMA
Design B, 1800 RPM motors.
30
Neutral Bus (Bottom)
31
32
33
For three-phase, four-wire applications, a neutral landing pad is

provided as standard. This is a 100%
rated neutral. As an option, half or
fully rated neutral bus can be supplied
in the bottom of the entire MCC.
Ground Bus
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Ground Bus (Top)
Copper ground bus, rated 300 A

0.25-inch by 1.00-inch (6.4 mm by
25.4 mm) is supplied as standard.
Mounting is across the top of each
vertical structure in the horizontal
wireway. The bus can also be mounted
across the bottom when the bottom
9.00 inches (228.6 mm) are not
occupied by units or master terminal
blocks. A 0.25-inch by 2.00-inch
(6.4 mm by 50.8 mm) optional copper
ground bus rated 600 or 800 A is
also available.
Full voltage, non-reversing

Full voltage, reversing
Two-speed, single winding
and two winding
Reduced voltage, autotransformer,
closed transition
Reduced voltage, wye delta
Reduced voltage, part winding
Reduced voltage, solid-state (RVSS)
Adjustable frequency drives (AFD)
Each starter includes a stainless steel

corrosion-resistant safety ground clip
that makes connection before the
power stabs engage the vertical bus.
UnitsFreedom and Freedom Arc

Resistant MCC
The HMCP/HMCPE and starter

combination has a 65,000 rms
symmetrical ampere short-circuit
current rating as standard at 480 V.
Starter units are available with
optional 100,000 A short-circuit
current rating. Series C thermalmagnetic circuit breakers (65 kAIC,
or optional 100 kAIC) for starter
units are also available.
Freedom, Freedom Arc Resistant MCC
and Freedom FlashGard starters meet
or exceed IEC 947-4 Type II testing with
HMCP, or R and J fuses (Freedom Arc
Resistant MCC is HMCP only).
34
Typical starter units available include

the following:
The fusible switch disconnect device

is the Type K. It is a quick-make, quickbreak, visible blade switch with fuse
clips for use with current-limiting or
dual element, rejection type, NEMA
Class J or R fuses. Rejection fuse clips
for Class RK-5 fuses are standard.
Fuses are not included as standard.
Both breaker and fuse selection
must take into consideration the total
short-circuit capacity of the system to
which the control center is connected.
For a fused switch and starter combination, a 100 kA SCCR at 600 V can
be achieved.
An optional 300 A vertical tin-plated only

copper ground bus is available.
Located in the vertical wireway, it
provides direct starter unit grounding.
Freedom FVNR Starter
Freedom and Freedom Arc Resistant

MCC starter units are equipped with
Eatons Freedom starters and contactors NEMA Sizes 1 through 5. Size 6
and 7 starters are A200 type. These
contactors have been successfully
applied in thousands of the most
demanding industrial applications.
Overload protection is provided by a
three-pole adjustable ambient compensated, bi-metallic thermal overload
relay. The overload relay also provides
single-phase sensitivity and isolated
alarm contact. As an option, the
overload relay can be upgraded to a
standard solid-state overload or an
advanced solid-state overload as
described on Page 29.1-21. An
insulated hand reset button extends
through the compartment door.
Additionally, motor running data and
starter status/control are available
through one of the many industrial
standard communication protocols.
Freedom Arc Resistant MCC adds line
and load shields to the disconnect.
CA08104001E
29.1-7
May 2015
Sheet 29 009
General Description
UnitsFreedom FlashGard Starter

Racking Tool Receiver
Unit Latch
Power Stab
Position
Connected
Disconnected
Internal Shutter
Position
Open
Closed
Handle
Mechanism
Breaker
Pilot Device
Island
Start, Stop,
Auto/Man
Starter
Freedom FlashGard FVNR Starter
The Freedom FlashGard units are

equipped with a retractable stab
mechanism called RotoTract, that allows
the electrical worker to connect and disconnect power to the bucket with the
unit door closed, thereby
minimizing exposure to arc flash. A
visual indication is provided on the
unit door on the Connected and
Disconnected positions of RotoTract.
A visual indication on the position of the
shutters that enclose the stabs is also
provided (open shutters indicate that
stabs are extended and closed shutters
indicate that the stabs are withdrawn).
A motorized tool such as an electric
screwdriver, drill with a 3/8-inch square
drill bit or standard 3/8-inch drive
ratchet is used to operate RotoTract
through its racking tool receiver.
Freedom FlashGard starters are

equipped with electromechanical
starters and contactors NEMA
size 15.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
S811+ SSRV
S811+ Solid-State Reduced Voltage

(SSRV) starters are designed to reduce
the inrush current to a motor during
starting and to limit the amount of
available starting torque, thus reducing mechanical wear and utility
demand requirements. The amount
of starting current is field adjustable
to match the specific requirements of
all applications.
CA08104001E
UnitsSolid-State
Reduced Voltage Starters (SSRV)
UnitsAdjustable
Frequency Drives
Additional safety features of a

FlashGard unit include:
Unit LatchWhen the RotoTract is in
Connected position, this latch is
mechanically interlocked to hook the
bucket to the divider pan that separates the bucket from the unit above,
thereby preventing physical removal
of the bucket when it is connected to
480 V and/or control power. The unit
latch also prevents insertion of a
bucket with the stabs extended
RotoTract racking tool receiver
shutterWhen the breaker is in the
On position, the shutter for the
access hole in the RotoTract (access
hole is needed for the motorized
tool to retract the stabs) is closed,
thereby not allowing the stabs to
be retracted when the breaker
is energized
Controllers are available to handle

constant torque applications, such as
conveyors and crushers, and variable
torque applications, such as fans and
pumps. Control schemes are available
for volts/Hz, open loop vector and
closed loop vector models. SVX9000
drive units include as standard: line
reactors and a door-mounted keypad.
Units up to 150 hp VT come standard
with a 3% output reactor. MMX drive
units do not contain line or load
reactors and can be added as an
option. All drive structures are bus
connected, which allows for expansion
of the MCC on both sides of the structure. A wide range of AFD features
and options are available to meet the
requirements of most applications
including IEEE 519 compliant applications. AFDs are available in NEMA 1A
gasketed enclosures. AFDs are available in NEMA 3R MCC enclosures from
1200 hp, constant torque.
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Adjustable Frequency Drives are

available from 0.51100 hp for
control of standard AC motors in
processes that benefit from the ability
to change motor speed. Use of Inverter
Duty motors is recommended.
Eatons S811+ SSRV controllers are

available with a wide variety of standard features: kick start, soft stop,
phase loss and stall protection. S811+
SSRV starters are 3070% smaller than
competitive designs and contain an
integral fully rated bypass relay that
almost eliminates heat generation
when the motor is at speed.
Typical applications include
conveyors, compressors, machine
tools, pumps and fans.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 010
General Description
UnitsDC Starters
23
All switches are supplied with fuse

dual-element rejection type. Types of
fuses include Class J, R or L, which are
supplied by others.
24
Freedom FlashGard Feeder

Tap Units
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Freedom and Freedom Arc

Resistant Feeder Tap Units
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanism
Feeder tap units may contain either

circuit breakers or fusible switches.
Drawout breaker units include the
fixed trip Type HFD, single-mounted
in ratings through 150 A and the
interchangeable trip Type HJD singlemounted through 250 A and Type HKD
single-mounted through 400 A. Larger
Series C circuit breakers with ratings
to 2500 A are fixed-mounted.
Fusible feeder tap units use Eatons
Type K visible blade disconnect switch.
Fused switches are mounted in drawout
units through 400 A with 30 A and 60 A
ratings available in dual mountings.
Fixed-mounted switch ratings of 600 A
and 800 A are also available.
34
37
Stab assemblies are accurately matched

to the electrical requirements of each
individual unit and are provided in
60, 150, 300 or 400 A ratings (plug-in
through Size 5).
DC Starter Unit
UL listed DC MCCs use combination

circuit breaker DC starters suitable for
motor starting duty only. Using Eatons
Type ME DC definite purpose contactors, all DC starters are suitable for up
to 250 Vdc and have a 22 kA withstand
rating. Class 135 starting resistors for
reduced voltage starters are sized
for 200% starting current. Typical
applications include emergency lube
oil pumps, emergency seal oil pumps
and emergency turning gear motors.
Freedom Dual Feeder Tap Unit
Feeder tap units may contain either

circuit breakers or fusible switches;
Freedom Arc Resistant MCC only
contains circuit breakers. Freedom
drawout breaker units include the fixed
trip Type HFD, single-or dual-mounted
in ratings through 150A and the interchangeable trip Types HJD and HKD
single-mounted through 250 A and
400 A respectively. Larger Series C
circuit breakers with ratings to 2500 A
are fixed-mounted.
Fusible feeder tap units use Eatons
Type K visible blade disconnect switch.
Fused switches are mounted in drawout
units through 400 A with 30 A and 60 A
ratings available in dual mountings.
Fixed-mounted switch ratings of 600 A
and 800 A are also available.
This ensures a positive connection

yet permits easy unit insertion and
withdrawal. Self-aligning stabs are
mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic
insulation block that totally shrouds
each stab and absolutely ensures
positive alignment of the stabs with
the vertical bus. The insulation block is
also an integral part of the phase-tophase isolation system. Power wiring
is welded to the stabs and is totally
contained within the unit enclosure.
This means the vertical bus compartment is completely free of wiring for
maximum safety and reliability.
All switches are supplied with fuse

dual-element rejection type. Types of
fuses include Class J, R or L supplied
by others.

Resistant MCC Stab Assembly
Freedom Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
A tin-plated copper alloy stab incorporates the ultimate in mechanical

simplicity to provide precise control
of contact pressure on the bus.
Freedom FlashGard Stab Assembly

Stabs Extended
Stabs Withdrawn
Freedom FlashGard Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
The Freedom FlashGard MCC uses a

retractable stab mechanism, called
RotoTract, that allows the electrician to
connect and disconnect power to the
bucket with the unit door closed.
A visual indication is provided on
the unit door on the Connected
and Disconnected positions of RotoTract. A visual indication on the position of the shutters that enclose the
stabs is also provided (open
shutters indicate that stabs are
extended and closed shutters indicate
that the stabs are withdrawn). A
motorized tool or standard 3/8-inch
(9.5 mm) drive ratchet is used to
operate RotoTracts retractable stab
mechanism. A wired remote racking
accessory is also available for operating RotoTract with a pendant station
safely beyond the NFPA-prescribed
flash protection boundaries.
CA08104001E
29.1-9
May 2015
Sheet 29 011
General Description
The stabs are constructed from a tinplated copper alloy, incorporating the
ultimate in mechanical simplicity to
provide precise control of contact
pressure on the bus. This ensures
a positive connection, yet permits
easy unit insertion and withdrawal.
The stabs are self-aligning and are
mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic
insulation block, which totally shrouds
each stab and ensures positive alignment of the stabs with the vertical bus.
The insulation block is also an integral
part of the phasephase isolation
system. Power wiring is welded to
the stabs and is totally contained
within the unit enclosure. The wire
is designed for a high level of
flexibility to be suitable for RotoTracts
retractable stab mechanism.
Stab assemblies are accurately
matched to the electrical requirements
of each individual unit and are
provided in 60 A, 150 A, 300 A or 400 A
ratings (plug-in through Size 5).

Resistant MCC Handle Mechanism
Unit Insertion Interlock
The handle and exterior front panel are

molded from the same plastic material
as the device panel. A textured surface
preserves the appearance. The ON
position indicator is at the top and is
a bright red. The OFF/RESET position
is at the bottom and is bright green.
The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is
in the middle, between the ON and OFF
position. All position indicator colors
contrast with the black background and
are highly visible even at considerable
distances. The operating handle is
designed for rugged duty and solid
operator feel.
Padlocking Bar
The handle mechanism is designed to

provide a high mechanical leverage so
that little effort is required to operate
any device.
The standard handle mechanism is a
vertical motion type device with four
positions: ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET.
Only circuit breaker types have tripped
and reset positions. It is securely
mounted to the front of the unit and
mechanically connected to the breaker
or fusible switch, eliminating alignment
problems. It provides a positive indication of the breaker or switch position,
even with the door open.
CA08104001E
To ensure that units are not energized

accidentally or by unauthorized personnel, the handle mechanism can
be padlocked in the OFF position.
Sufficient space is available for a
maximum of three padlocks. Where
critical processes are involved and
to prevent unauthorized shutdown,
the handle mechanism can be
modified to enable padlocking in
the ON position
Freedom FlashGard Handle

Mechanism
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
The handle mechanism is designed to

provide a high mechanical leverage, so
that little effort is required to operate
any device.
The standard handle mechanism is a
vertical motion type device with four
positions: ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET.
Only circuit breaker types have tripped
and reset positions. It is securely
mounted to the front of the unit and
mechanically connected to the breaker
or fusible switch, eliminating alignment problems. It provides a positive
indication of the breaker or switch
position, even with the door open.
The handle mechanism provides

several safety features:
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
In the ON position, an interlock

prevents the unit door from being
opened. A door interlock defeater
screw located above the handle
is provided to enable authorized
maintenance personnel access to
the units when required
With the unit door open and the
operating handle in the ON position,
an interlock slides into a slot in the
divider pan above and prevents
removal of the unit. This same
interlock prevents insertion of the
unit unless the handle mechanism
is in the OFF position. The interlock
also prevents the operating handle
from being turned on with the unit
door open
38
39
40
41
Unit Insertion Interlock
The handle and exterior front panel are

molded from the same plastic material
as the device panel. A textured surface
preserves the appearance. The ON
position indicator is at the top and is
a bright red. The OFF/RESET position
is at the bottom and is bright green.
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 012
General Description
22
23
24
The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is

in the middle, between the ON and
OFF position. All position indicator colors contrast with the black background
and are highly visible even at considerable distances. The operating handle is
designed for rugged duty and solid
operator feel.
Device Panel
25
26
Standard Device Panel

Padlocking Bar
27
28
The handle mechanism for Freedom

FlashGard provides several safety
features:
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
In the ON position, an interlock

prevents the unit door from being
opened. A door interlock defeater
screw located to the right of the
handle is provided to enable authorized maintenance personnel access
to the units when required
The unit insertion interlock is located
to the left of the operating handle.
The interlock must be in the locked
position in order to turn the disconnect on. When the interlock is in the
locked position, the unit cannot be
withdrawn or inserted
To ensure that units are not
energized accidentally or by
unauthorized personnel, the handle
mechanism can be padlocked in
the OFF position. Sufficient space
is available for a maximum of three
padlocks. Where critical processes
are involved and to prevent
unauthorized shutdown, the
handle mechanism can be
modified to enable padlocking
in the ON position
Each unit has a safe lock position. This
interlock will lock the unit in a position
off the 480 V bus and ensure the unit
cannot be inserted or withdrawn.
Unit
Side
Latch
Screw
42
43
Freedom FlashGard Unit

Wrapper Side Latch
The unit wrapper is designed to

provide ample space for cable entry
from the wireway to the unit.
The unit wrapper has four mounting
points, two on each side, which support
the unit in the structure. They engage
guide rails located near the top of each
unit space. This mounting point guide
rail system produces minimum friction
and allows units to be inserted and
withdrawn easily. The guide rails also
give precise alignment to the unit for
accurate stabbing on the vertical bus.
The device panel can accommodate

up to six 1-3/16-inch (30.2 mm) Eatons
10250T type pilot devices such as
oiltight pushbuttons, indicating lights,
selector switches and miniature meters.
Molded into the panel is a knockout for
each device location. This facilitates the
future addition of devices to the panel.
The device panel is hinged on a
horizontal pivot tube extending across
the front of the unit. With the unit door
open, loosening two captive retaining
screws at the top of the panel and
sliding it 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) left,
permits it to swing down. This
provides ready access to the rear of
the panel and increased accessibility
to the unit interior.
Nameplates
Unit nameplates are 1.00 x 2.50 inches
(25.4 x 63.5 mm) and engraved with
3/16-inch (4.8 mm) high white lettering
on a black background (black lettering
on a white background optional).
They are heat- and crack-resistant to
eliminate the need for replacement.
Nameplates are mounted with
stainless steel self-tapping screws.
Freedom FlashGard Unit Wrapper

The unit wrapper is fabricated of
14-gauge steel. After fabrication, it
is cleaned and given a rust inhibiting
phosphatizing treatment. The finish on
a unit wrapper is a baked Munsell No.
N9.43/0.21B, 0.23 white. This is highly
durable finish, gloss-white in color to
increase visibility within the unit and
to facilitate wiring and maintenance
procedures.
The unit wrapper consists of a threesided rugged steel shell including
the mounting base for the unit
components. The smallest unit
measures 13-3/4 inches (349.3 mm)
wide, 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) deep
and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) high.
Units increase in 6.00-inch (152.4 mm)
increments to a maximum height of
72.00 inches (1828.8 mm).
Freedom FlashGard Plug-in Unit Wrapper

Resistant MCC Unit Wrapper
The FlashGard unit wrapper is
equipped with a quarter-turn side
wrapper latch that securely holds the
unit in the compartment. The latch can
only be engaged when the stabs are
fully mated with the vertical bus. Upon
release of the latch, the unit can be
partially withdrawn such that the stabs
disengage from the vertical bus. In this
position, the latch can be re-engaged
to prevent the unit from being
returned to the fully stabbed position
or from being removed from the
structure. The latch can be padlocked
in this position to ensure that the
stabs remain disengaged during
maintenance.
Freedom Plug-in Unit Wrapper
CA08104001E
29.1-11
May 2015
Sheet 29 013
General Description
Unit Maintenance
Plug-in Unit Maintenance
The Freedom three-piece (clam shell)

unit wrapper design facilitates easy
work bench maintenance. When
removed from the MCC, the unit
top/side barrier assembly can easily
be swiveled up and back for complete
access to components and wiring.
Terminal Blocks
A side-mounted, seven-circuit,
latching pull-apart terminal block is
standard on units with NEMA Type B
or C wiring. This industrial-grade
Eaton MCC terminal block provides
solid electrical connections while
conserving space and making
installation and maintenance easier.
Terminal blocks are mounted in knockouts on the vertical wireway side of the
unit housing affording greater access
to the unit compartment and interior
components. The two-piece terminal
block snap-locks together to ensure
permanent circuit continuity. To aid
installation and wiring checks, the
terminal marking strips for both
sides of the terminal block are fully
visible from the front of the starter
compartment.
Heavy-duty saddle wire terminals are

of the resilient collar design, which
eliminates loose connections caused
by expansion and contracting of the
conductor as the current is switched
on and off. This unique design maintains constant pressure as the wire
expands and contracts. This 600 V, 30 A
rated terminal block will accept 12 AWG
stripped wires, as well as 14 AWG ring
or spade wire lugs. All terminal block
conductors are fully shielded for
added safety and cleanliness.
Control wiring within each starter

compartment consists of 16 AWG
control wire for Freedom FlashGard
MCCs and 2100 Series MCCs. Rated
105 C, the flame-retardant, thermoplastic insulated wire is red. Power
wiring is black and sized to carry the
maximum full load current of the
starter unit.
Side MountedLatched
Pull-Apart Terminal Block
24
25
28
29
30
Freedom 12.00-Inch (304.8 mm)
Unit Door
31
32
33
34
For special applications, other types of

rail-mounted terminal blocks are also
available. They are installed horizontally at the bottom front of the starter
unit. Refer to Eaton for terminal block
types available and space restrictions.
Unit doors are formed of 14-gauge steel

with a 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) flange on all
four sides. The flange adds
rigidity to the door and provides a
surface to contain door gasketing.
Cutouts are made in the door as
required to accommodate the operating handle and device panel. The doors
are cleaned, phosphatized and given a
finish of gray, baked-on enamel ANSI 61
(Munsell No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).
23
27
Front-Rail-Mounted Terminal Blocks
Unit Doors
22
26
A 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) high (2X

space) starter unit accommodates up
to three side-mounted terminal blocks
providing a maximum of 21 points.
Larger units accommodate two additional 7-point terminal blocks for every
additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
1X space of unit height. The 6.00-inch
(152.4 mm) compact starter unit uses
a 9-point pull-apart terminal block,
which is installed along the top front
of the starter unit.
The doors will open 115 opposite

to the wireway doors permitting
optimum access to the unit compartment. The doors are mounted on
removable concealed pin hinges. This
permits quick removal of any door in
a vertical structure without disturbing
adjacent doors.
CA08104001E
Doors 2X and larger are held closed

with a minimum of two quarter-turn
indicating-type fasteners. They securely
hold the door in the closed position,
yet allow quick and easy access to
the unit when required. The fasteners
provide a visual indication of the
latched position. The head slot of
the fastener is designed to prevent
screwdriver slippage.
35
36
Freedom FlashGard 12.00-Inch (304.8 mm)
Unit Door
37
38
39
40
41
42
Spring-Loaded Unit Door Quarter-Turn Latch
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 014
General Description
22
23
24
25
26
27
Options
Eatons starter and feeder tap units
can be modified to meet a variety of
specification requirements. Some
typical components that can be added
include: control power transformers
with two primary and one secondary
control fuses, control relays, solid-state
overload relays, ground fault relays,
current transformers, extra electrical
interlocks, pushbuttons, selector
switches, indicating lights, circuit
breaker shunt trip or undervoltage
release and auxiliary switches. In
most cases, one of these modifications
does not increase starter unit size.
Additional Equipment
28
29
In addition to motor starter and feeder

units, additional equipment can be
supplied including the following:
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Single-phase dry-type distribution

transformers in ratings of 0.5, 0.75,
1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
and 45 kVA
Three-phase dry-type distribution
transformers in ratings of 9, 15, 25,
30 and 45 kVA
Lighting panelboards with up to
42 circuits with either plug-in branch
breakers or bolt-on branch breakers,
120/240 V, 120/208 V or 480 V, singleor three-phase
Metering equipment including the
IQ family of solid-state power
monitors, voltmeters and ammeters
PLC and DCS I/O racks
S811+ family of solid-state reduced
voltage starters
SVX9000 and MMX adjustablefrequency controllers
Active harmonic correction units
Surge protective device (SPD) units
Size 4, 5 and 6 vacuum starters
and contactors
Power factor correction capacitors
Automatic transfer switches
DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS,
Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP
Communications
Power Xpert communications
Industrial Operator Interface
Industrial PLCs and PCs
Control and Load Terminations
Incoming Line
Incoming line cables entering the
MCC from either the top or bottom can
be easily terminated onto main lugs
or connected to a main disconnect.
All incoming line sections comply
with NEC wiring bending requirements
as adopted by UL.
Main Lugs Only (MLO)
Master Terminal Blocks at Bottom

(Class C Wiring)
For NEMA Type A wiring, each unit

is assembled and devices interwired.
Terminal blocks are not supplied and
control and load wiring is internal to
the unit.
For NEMA Type B wiring, control wires
are terminated at blocks within the
unit. Refer to the discussion of units
for types of terminal blocks available.
For NEMA Type C-S wiring, control
and load wires are extended from the
unit terminal blocks to master terminal
blocks located at the top or bottom of
each vertical structure.
The mounting location of the master
terminal block in front-mounted only
structures is in the existing horizontal
wireway space at the top or at the
bottom as shown above. When
mounting is made in an incoming
line section, 12.00 inches (304.8 mm)
of unit space must be used. When
mounting is made in the rear of
back-to-back mounted structures,
6.00 inches (152.4 mm) of unit space
must be used at the bottom and
12.00 inches (304.8 mm) used at
the top.
Master terminal blocks are rackmounted to permit removal of entire
assembly for ease of wiring during
installation and maintenance.
For NEMA Type C-M wiring, control
and load wires are extended from
the unit terminal blocks to master
terminal blocks located in a separate
marshaling structure.
Up to 1200A rated horizontal bus,

cables, up to four per phase, are
terminated on crimp or screw lugs
mounted on adapters solidly bolted
to fully rated vertical bus. Top entry
cables are terminated at the top of
the MCC and bottom entry cables
are conveniently terminated near the
bottom. Table 29.2-4 shows spacing
requirements for various cable
configurations. MLO termination
for 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 A
requires a full vertical section.
Note: 3200 A main lugs only available in
NEMA 1 enclosure only and 65 C rise
above 40 C ambient only.
Main Disconnects
Incoming cables may also be easily
terminated on a main circuit breaker or
fused switch. A variety of main circuit
breakers are available. Tables 29.3-17
through 29.3-22 show spacing requirements for various main devices.
Metering
IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter
IQ 100 series meters are microprocessorbased three-phase power monitors that

replace the traditional ammeter, voltmeter and instrument switches. The meters
display phase currents, voltage, L-L, L-N,
power-real and reactive apparent, power
factor, frequency, energy (watthours,
VAR-hours and VA-hours) at 0.5%
accuracy. Options include Modbus RTU,
Modbus TCP and KYZ outputs.
42
43
CA08104001E
29.1-13
May 2015
Sheet 29 015
General Description
IQ 200 series meters are microprocessorbased three-phase power monitors that
replace the traditional ammeter, voltmeter and instrument switches. The meters
display phase currents, voltage, L-L, L-N,
power-real and reactive apparent, power
factor, frequency, energy (watthours,
VAR-hours and VA-hours) at 0.1% accuracy. Advanced versions also display
THD readings for voltage and current as
well as discrete inputs and outputs that
are ideal for incoming line metering.
Power Xpert 2000 series meters
include all the features of the
IQ 200 series meters with an added
communication port supporting Web
services, Ethernet industrial communications including Modbus TCP and
BACnet/IP as well as DNP 3.0. All
Power Xpert meters support field
upgradable firmware.
IQ Analyzer provides extensive metering, power quality analysis, remote
input monitoring, control relaying,
analog input/outputs and is communications capable. A display provides the
flexibility of exhibiting large characters
with high visibility and small characters
for detailed descriptions. These IQ
power monitors each contain their own
voltage power pack for systems up to
600 V. Therefore, separate potential
transformers are not required. Either
two or three separate current transformers must be used. All IQ power
monitors are communications capable.
Refer to Tab 3 for further details.
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 meters
are available with communication
features for power management
and system software integration in
addition to a Web interface. Customers
and facility personnel can view the
metering data using a standard PC
Web browser. The new platform offers
advanced functionality like transient
capture, high sampling rate, open
communications, Web server gateway, field-upgradable firmware,
expandable memory and optional I/O.
FlashGard Remote Racking

Accessory
Automatic Insulation Tester

(Motorguard)
22
23
24
25
26
27
Remote Racking Accessory
Performs RotoTract racking safely

behind NFPA Arc Flash boundaries
120 Vac motor driven
Mounts to RotoTract mechanism
Wired pendant station for
rack-in/rack-out operation
Momentary jog
Mounting offset bracket to clear
device panel
Voltage Presence Indicator

(VoltageVision)
28
Automatic Insulation Tester (Motorguard)
Meggers equipment motor insulation to continuously monitor integrity

of insulation for the period that the
equipment is de-energized
Applies 500 Vdc potential at currentlimited, operator-safe maximum
amperage of 200 microamperes
Alarms upon detection of a
threshold leakage to ground current
Visual alarm indication and lockout;
Form C contact available for remote
alarm status
FlashGard Padlock Accessory
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision)
Hardwired voltage detector

connected to load side of disconnect
Enables operator to pre-verify
voltage presence with unit
door closed
Installable in a 30 mm pilot
device knockout
Dual redundant circuitry for
reliability
Phase insensitive
38
FlashGard Padlock Accessory
Locks out RotoTract operation

during maintenance
Allows operation of FlashGard units
by authorized personnel only
Provided as standard on NEMA 12
FlashGard MCCs (prevents dust
entry into RotoTract access port)
Heavy-gauge steel construction
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
Sheet 29 016
General Description
22
Surge Protective DeviceSPD
23
MCC Motor Control

Communication Choices
Table 29.1-2 is used to assist the user
in how each of the smart devices communicates within the MCC. All MCC
communication solutions provide for
a single node per unit configuration,
eliminating any single point of failure
within the MCC. All networks are
industry accepted industrial networks
and allow for configuration, monitoring and control of the end node. A
node is defined as a starter, drive, soft
start, breaker, meter or other control
device on the network.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
SPD (Surge Protective Device) with

Circuit Breaker Disconnect
SPD Series units feature advanced

thermodynamic fusing technology and
are available in 18.00 inch (457.2 mm)
space factors. All units (100400 kA)
meet UL 1449, 3rd Edition. Internal fuse
protection is up to 200 kAIC.
Standard MCC offering includes
Monitoring Display with dual-colored
status LEDs. Optional surge counter,
Form C alarm contacts and audible
alarm enable/disable are also available.
Communications
Eatons motor control centers offer
the industrys most comprehensive
communications solutions in
motor control providing seamless
communicating on all major industry
standard field busses. Available with
communications to fit new and
existing applications, Eatons motor
control centers are custom-made
assemblies of conveniently grouped
control equipment primarily used
for control of motors and power
distribution.
Eaton motor control centers not only
are capable of communicating to the
industry standard protocols, they
also have the ability to serve up Web
pages, so any Web client can monitor
and manage the MCC from any
location accessible to the LAN.
Ordering the MCC with the Power
Xpert Gateway provides the ability
to communicate information to the
Web as well as provides a seamless
interface between the low voltage,
medium voltage and all meters.
Eatons Motor Control Centers
Table 29.1-2. Network Matrix

Network
Protocol
EtherNet/IP
Modbus TCP
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS DP
Modbus RTU
Serial
Physical layer Ethernet
Ethernet
Serial
Serial
Node count
Greater than
250, scanner
limited
63 devices
per network
32 devices per 32 devices per

segment, 127
segment, 254
using repeaters using repeaters
Greater than
250, scanner
limited
Speed (baud) 10/100 meg
10/100 meg
125/250/500 K
500 K to 12 meg Default 9600
C306 starter
(AC)
C441U
C441U
C441K
C441S
C441N
C440 starter
(AC)
C441U
C441U
C441K
C441S
C441N
C441 starter
(AC)
C441R
C441R
C441K
C441S
C441N
S811+ (AC)
C441U
C441U
C441KS
C441SS
Onboard
Feeder tap
C441U
C441U
C441K
C441S
C441N
Remote IO
(4 in 2 out)
C441U
C441U
C441K
C441S
C441N
PXM series
meters
Gateway
Onboard
Gateway
Gateway
Onboard
IQ series
meters
Gateway
Gateway/
optional
onboard
Gateway
Gateway
Onboard
MP series
relays
MPONI +
gateway
MPONI +
gateway
MPONI +
gateway
MPONI +
gateway
MPONI
Note: All MCCs are Power Xpert capable with the PXG gateway communicating to each bucket.
CA08104001E
29.1-15
May 2015
Sheet 29 017
General Description
Data Parameters
To simplify system design and wiring
schemes, regardless of the industrial
network selected and the MCC family
selected, the nodes will be the same.
Depending on the type of smart device
chosen, there will be varying types of
data and control capability associated
with it. Each of the Eaton devices has a
rich set of monitored data associated
with it; consulting the user manual
may be needed to determine all available data/parameters.
Table 29.1-3. Data Parameters

Description
Data
S811+ Soft Starts

DeviceNet
Modbus
Modbus TCP
PROFIBUS
EtherNet/IP
Line current (scaled/float)

Average current (scaled/float)
Power pole temperatures
% FLA (Running current/FLA setting)
Thermal capacity
Fault/warning codes
Field wiring status
Handle position/breaker status
Fault history
Status (Run/Fault/Warn/Control/Aux...)
SVX/DG1/MMX
AFDs
DeviceNet
Modbus
Modbus TCP
PROFIBUS
EtherNet/IP
Speed (Hz)
Speed (rpm)
Torque
Current
Voltage
DC bus voltage temperature
Status (Run/Fault/Warn...)
Faults
Morerefer to manual
C441 IO
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
Modbus
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
Four AC inputs (DC is in an option)

(Running/Faulted/Breaker status, user denied)
Two B300 relay outputs (Run)
C440 SSOL
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
Modbus
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
Line currents
% thermal remaining
Faults
Ground current
Status (Run/Fault/input/output)
Morerefer to manual
C441 SSOL
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
Modbus
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
Line currents
% thermal remaining
% current unbalance
Line voltages
% voltage unbalance
Faults
kW
Status (Run/Fault/input/output)
Morerefer to manual
MP-3000
MP-4000
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
Modbus
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
Currents
Voltages
Power
Energy
Much morerefer to manual
PXM Meters
Currents
Voltages
Power
Energy
Much morerefer to manual
Graphic
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Power Xpert
Gateway
to PowerNet
Data depends on target device

Trending
Logging
Fault indication and more
Power Xpert
Smart Gear
Online diagnostics, troubleshooting,

documentation and monitoring
software solution.
Logic Control
In a single unit, a PLC is provided for local

control of the MCC components.
38
39
40
41
42
CA08104001E
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 018
General Description
22
23
24
25
26
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS DP MCC
DeviceNet is an industry standard field bus governed by

ODVA and is supported by most major vendors of PLC and
DSCs. DeviceNet, like most major field buses, provides
simplified control, increased diagnostics, reduced wiring
and data richness of the motor control centers. The Eaton
DeviceNet MCC solution provides users with significantly
reduced installation time and increased uptime through the
integration of intelligent devices and advanced software
tools. Control products include: ODVA compliant motor
starters, variable speed drives, operator interface, line
metering and block I/O.
PROFIBUS
DeviceNet in an MCC
27
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
Eatons MCC use either a direct connect I/O block or direct

connect advanced solid-state overload relay to connect to
the PROFIBUS. The topology for PROFIBUS is daisy chain
and each device in the MCC will be daisy-chained together to
meet the PROFIBUS specification.
28
29
About PROFIBUS
30
Learn more about PROFIBUS by visiting the PROFIBUS

Trade Organization Association at profibus.com.
31
Ethernet
DeviceNet
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Eatons MCC use either a direct connect I/O block or direct

connect advanced solid-state overload relay to connect to
DeviceNet. The topology is a trunk drop configuration where
the trunk runs along the top of the MCC and each device is
connected to DeviceNet via a drop cable running through the
vertical wireway.
About DeviceNet
Learn more about DeviceNet by visiting the Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association at odva.org.
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP is an industry standard field bus governed by
the PROFIBUS Trade Organization and is supported by most
major vendors of PLC and DSCs. PROFIBUS, like most major
field buses, provides simplified control, increased diagnostics, reduced wiring and data richness of the motor control
centers. The Eaton PROFIBUS MCC solution provides users
with significantly reduced installation time and increased
uptime through the integration of intelligent devices and
advanced software tools. Control products include: motor
starters, variable speed drives, operator interface and
block I/O.
There are two supported protocols on Ethernet for the

Eaton MCC offeringEtherNet/IP (ODVA) and Modbus TCP
(Modbus IDA), which are both industry standard field buses
and supported by most major vendors of PLCs and DSCs.
Ethernet, like most major field buses, provides simplified
control, increased diagnostics, reduced wiring and data
richness of the motor control centers. Another added benefit
of Ethernet is that a PC can connect directly to the control
system and monitor the MCC from any location where
remote access is permitted. The Eaton Ethernet MCC
solution provides users with significantly reduced installation time and increased uptime through the integration of
intelligent devices and advanced software tools. Many of the
Eaton control products such as the across-the-line starters,
DG1 AFDs and S811+ communicate on Modbus TCP and
EtherNet/IP at the same time, allowing for a more flexible
control and monitoring solution.
Understanding Ethernet
Ethernet can be a very misunderstood word and confusing
to someone who is trying to build a control or monitoring
system and doesnt have much experience specifying this
type of communication. To help bring some clarity to how to
specify Ethernet, this simple example is going to use an
analogy that most of us are very familiar with. When you are
at home and pick up the phone to call a friend or neighbor,
your conversation is transmitted across a land line (wire)
that can be compared to Ethernet. In this example, both the
land line and the Ethernet are the physical medias in which
the communication is transmitted. When you call your
friends to communicate to them, you need to talk in a
language that is understood by each other; this language
is called the protocol, which is no different than Ethernet,
for the devices to communicate to each other they need to
support the same language or protocol. Modbus TCP and
EtherNet/IP are two widely supported protocols for Ethernet.
Modbus TCP is a standard founded by Modbus IDA and
natively supported by many major PLC and DCS vendors.
CA08104001E
29.1-17
May 2015
Sheet 29 019
General Description
EtherNet/IP is another standard that is founded by ODVA and
supported primarily by AB and other third-party vendors for
use in PLC and DCS applications. Now lets add another twist
to the example, lets say that you and a friend are talking in
one protocol and then you conference in two friends that talk
another protocol. Using the same physical media, the four
of you can all communicate to each other using multiple
protocols. This is no different than Ethernet where the
physical media supports both Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP
(and others) on the same physical media at the same time.
In the Eaton MCC when Ethernet is applied, there is a switch
in each shipping split and all the Ethernet devices for that
split are then home run wired back to that switch. There
will be at least one customer connection per switch to make
local connections or to connect to the control system. Over
this Ethernet connection, not only can control and monitoring be performed, but also configuration of the end devices,
allowing for easy access for maintenance personnel to the
equipment once they gain access to the Ethernet system.
There are two switch choices for the Eaton MCC: an
unmanaged switch (which is typical for Modbus TCP) and
a managed switch (which is required for EtherNet/IP). The
managed switches can be connected in a redundant ring
network and only 600 V CAT 5 shielded Ethernet cable is
used when connecting the devices to the switch and the
switches together.
For more information or clarity on the supported Ethernet
protocols and the products that support Ethernet, please call
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273) option 2.
EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP in a MCC

Each Unit (Node)
Home Run Wired to
Ethernet Switch
Web-Enabled MCC
The Power Xpert Gateway provides Web-enabled, real-time
monitoring of electrical distribution and control equipment.
The Power Xpert Gateway makes integrating power equipment (up to 96 devices) onto an Ethernet network fast and
easy. The PXG is installed in a motor control center, low/
medium voltage switchgear or switchboard to consolidate
data available from components such as breakers, meters,
motor controllers and protective relays. Through standard
onboard Web pages, Power Xpert Software or third-party
software, the PXG allows you to closely monitor the
performance of your power infrastructure with easily
accessed, real-time, Web-enabled data. In addition to
Web-enabling the components in the MCC, the PXG also
makes all the data available to upper level PLC, SCADA,
and BMS type systems over Modbus TCP, SNMP and
BACnet/IP protocols.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Modbus TCP
Power Xpert Gateway
C440
C441
S811+
DG1
SVX9000
PXM Meters
Modbus 485 RTU
29
30
Any 485 RTU

device
31
Figure 29.1-1. MCC ConfigurationModbus TCP
32
Figure 29.1-1 through 29.1-6 represent typical Eaton

communications equipment found in MCCs. For more
available equipment and configurations, please contact
your local Eaton representative.
33
Power Xpert
Gateway
34
35
36
37
38
Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP
About Ethernet
Learn more about EtherNet/IP by visiting the ODVA website
at odva.org. Learn more about Modbus TCP by visiting the
Modbus IDA website at modbus.org.
39
Power Xpert Architecture in an MCC
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
Sheet 29 020
General Description
22
Web
Power Xpert Gateway (Modbus TCP, SNMP, BACnet/IP and Webserver TCP/IP output)
23
Incom
IPONI
24
25
Modbus RTU 485
C440
C441
S811+
PXM Meters
26
27
28
DT3000
DT3200
FP-4000
FP-5000
FP-6000
SMLD
IQ 220/320/230/330
IQES
IQESU
IQPSU
DIM
DT520MC, 810, 910, 1150
OPTIM Trip Units
ATC 400, 600, 800

IQ DP-4000
MP-3000
MP-4000
CMU
BIMII
Universal RTD
IQ Transfer
29
30
31
32
Figure 29.1-2. MCC ConfigurationWeb-Enabled
33
Modbus RTU 485
34
RS485-PONI
MMX9000
SVX9000
DG1
IQ 130
IQ 140
IQ 150
IQ 220M/230M
IQ 230M/330M
IQ 250
IQ 260
EDR-3000
FP-5000
FP-6000
C440
C441
SqD 3000
SqD 4000
SqD PM710
SqD PM800
PML ION7350
PML ION7550
PML ION7650
GE 369
GE 469
Nexus 1262/1272
Qualitrol 118
MMINT
IPONI
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
MMX9000
SVX9000
DG1
IQ 130
IQ 140
IQ 150
IQ 220M/230M
IQ 230M/330M
IQ 250
IQ 260
EDR-3000
FP-5000
FP-6000
C441
C440
PXM2000
PXM4000
PXM6000
PXM8000
ATC 400, 600, 800

IQ DP-4000
MP-3000
MP-4000
CMU
IQ Transfer
DT3000
DT3200
FP-4000
FP-5000
FP-6000
SMLD
IQ 220/320/230/330
IQES
IQESU
IQPSU
DIM
DT520MC, 810, 910, 1150
OPTIM Trip Units
ATC 400,600,800
IQ DP-4000
MP-3000
MP-4000
CMU
BIMII
Universal RTD
IQ Transfer
Figure 29.1-3. MCC ConfigurationModbus 485 RTU
42
43
CA08104001E
29.1-19
May 2015
Sheet 29 021
General Description
Power Xpert Smart Gear

Eatons Power Xpert Smart Gear interface adds one more
layer of safety and diagnosis to any of the Eaton MCC
products. The Power Xpert Smart Gear passively attaches
(can be removed from the network or unplugged without
affecting the MCC communications) to the MCC Ethernet
network and performs a variety of functions including
monitoring, documentation, Maintenance Minder and alarms.
The Power Xpert Smart Gear comes factory configured on a
15.00 inch (381.0 mm) screen. The software is written such
that the application can be easily modified or changed by the
user to fit expansion or reconfiguration of the MCC by any
end user without any software or service contracts.
The Power Xpert Smart Gear views feature provides multiple
ways to look at the loads within the MCC. The views contain
an elevation of the MCC, a one-line view and the grouped
one-line. The default elevation will display the MCC as seen
from the front, with each load identified and in a space that
is representative of the space it occupies in the MCC by
section and location. By selecting a unit, a detailed view of
the unit will appear, which contains a trend along with the
analog and discrete status of the device. Fault information
for the individual units are easily seen from this view.
There is also a one-line that will represent a flat view of the

MCC by power flow. Lastly the user has an option of grouping loads together to form several grouped one-lines that
can be 3 layers deep, which can be used to group loads of
a similar process for example. From the one-line, devices
that are faulted are easily seen and by selecting a device,
a favorites parameter list for that device is displayed.
The documentation view is an easy way to centralize user
manuals, troubleshooting tips, spare parts and electrical
drawings into one location per load. This information
will be factory loaded and the user can choose to easily
add or remove documents in the field. Having all the
wiring diagrams in one location on a large screen makes
troubleshooting easy as drawings will never get lost or
be unreadable.
Maintenance Minder is used to keep track of routine and
scheduled maintenance needed for all the devices in the
MCC. This will let the user know when a breaker needs to
be tripped per PM, how many cycles a contactor has used
and when to order new contacts, and other preventive
maintenance functions.
The alarm view will show all alarms and user-defined events
that occur. From this view, the user can acknowledge and
also Prado the alarms or events to assist in troubleshooting
and operating the equipment more efficiently.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Elevation View
Oneline View
Figure 29.1-4. Power Xpert Smart Gear
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
Sheet 29 022
General Description
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
PLCs
Programmable controllers can be
mounted in all styles of the Eaton MCCs
in a wide variety of configurations.
Popular mounting configurations
include small PLCs (EZ) unit mounted
to replace relays and timers, mediumsized PLCs with I/O for control of
an MCC lineup and also fieldbus
mastering capabilities to control over
DeviceNet, Modbus or Modbus TCP.
Due to the flexibility of PLCs and
the wide variety of applications and
configurations, the Eaton MCC is
designed to meet the mounting
requirements of most applications
to control not only the MCC but also
auxiliary equipment not in the MCC.
EZ PLC
29
30
31
32
EZ PLC
33
34
35
36
37
38
Monitoring and
Configuration Tools
ELC PLC
The EZ PLC is a timer and relay replacer

capable of being mounted directly
inside the MCC bucket and controlling
starters or other types of process
equipment. This small PLC comes
in styles that have AC or DC I/O and
analog I/O, and also the ability to
expand the I/O for larger I/O counts.
From the face of the EZ, a user can
change set points and count values
or other program values to easily
manipulate the process it is controlling.
ELC PLC
FlexibilityHandle I/O counts from

10 I/O up to 256 I/O using a single
controller. ELCs eliminate the process
of counting I/O and deciding which
controller to use, as modules can easily
be added and removed as needed. ELC
modules come in many flavors of I/O
from modules containing 4 in/4 out to
modules containing 8 in/8 out. ELC
controllers and modules mount to a
DIN rail, and the modules are added
by simply snapping them into the
mating connectors and closing the
attached locks.
Large PLC FeaturesInclude the
feature set of larger PLCs such as
multiple communication ports, remote
I/O, data storage, high-speed counters,
high-speed pulse outputs, interrupts,
timer resolution to 1 ms, PID, plus
much more. The ELC also has mastering capabilities to control DeviceNet,
Modbus and Modbus TCP slaves over
an industrial network.
For all the advanced MCC choices, a

tool is available to allow for configuration and monitoring of the MCC and
its devices. The complimentary tool
located at www.eaton.com is called
CH Studio, and is a Windows-based
configuration and monitoring package.
CH Studio allows the user to custom
configure I/O data for the starters
and drives, to verify loads and
configuration parameters, and to
view the faults and operation status
of the end devices. In addition to this,
CH Studio is also able to print out
a detailed report for the system
programmer to use with designing
their program. To get an early start
on the system design, CH Studio
provided the ability to create the
system offline and then synchronize
the offline settings to the online
system once the MCC arrives.
Power of OneRegardless of the level

of integration needed, Eaton MCCs
provide an easy and comprehensive
solution to be part of a larger system
or be the entire system all by itself.
The Power Xpert gateway allows for
seamless integration into the Power
Xpert architecture, linking switchgear,
meters and medium voltage assemblies. When the MCC is the control,
integrating the ELC with one of the
Eaton operator interface units and
communicating to starters, drives,
soft starts, meters and feeder breakers
is integrated into a clean, easy-touse solution.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
29.1-21
May 2015
Sheet 29 023
General Description
Clean Control Center with Active

Harmonic ControlTypical Layout
The layout to the right is a typical
arrangement for Eatons Clean Control
Center including harmonic correction
units for nonlinear loads such as
AC Variable Frequency Drives. The
horizontal bus of the Clean Control
Center is virtually free of harmonic current content at the point where
the harmonic correction unit connects
to the bus. From this point to the
connection at the utility bus, the Clean
Control Center complies with the most
stringent requirements of IEEE 519
and provides a clean waveform to the
upstream distribution system. Harmonic
correction may be applied to loads
fed directly from the MCC (e.g., MCC
mounted AC drives) or loads fed
indirectly from the MCC (e.g., MCC
mounted circuit breakers feeding
remote drives). Multiple correction
units may be used to achieve the level
of harmonic correction as required by
the amount of nonlinear loads within
the MCC lineup.
Source Side
Harmonics
Attenuated
22
Load Side
Harmonics
Present
23
24
25
26
Main
Breaker
27
Panelboard
SPD Surge
Protection
Module
Harmonic
Correction
Unit 100A
SVX9000
AC Drive
(30 hp)
SVX9000
AC Drive
(150 hp)
SVX9000
AC Drive
(250 hp)
Starter
28
29
Distribution
Transformer
30
SVX9000
AC Drive
(30 hp)
Starter
31
Starter
32
20.00
(508.0)
24.00
(609.6)
24.00
(609.6)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
28.00
(711.2)
20.00
(508.0)
33
Figure 29.1-5. Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic ControlDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: As seen by the upstream electrical systemcompliance to the most stringent
standards of IEEE 519 is ensured.
Harmonic Correction
The Clean Control Center uses a
harmonic correction unit to provide
harmonic cancellation directly on the
motor control center horizontal bus.
The harmonic correction unit senses
the load current and injects into the AC
lines a synthesized waveform that is
inverted compared to the remaining
signal. The result is a clean waveform
as seen by the upstream electrical
system. Single or multiple harmonic
correction units may be applied within
a Clean Control Center providing an
economical solution to excessive
harmonics due to AC drives or other
nonlinear loads. Use of the Clean
Control Center will provide compliance
to the most stringent 5% Total Demand
Distortion (TDD) requirements of IEEE
519. Clean Control Center assemblies
include a 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide
MCC structure, active harmonic correction unit, current transformers and a
door-mounted digital interface panel.
CA08104001E
Non-Linear Load(s)
34
35
SVX
36
SVX
37
Source
XFMR
Typical CT
Placement
38
SVX
Alternate CT
Placement
Figure 29.1-6. Clean Control Center Installation Diagram
39
Harmonic
Correction
Unit
SVX
40
41
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 024
General Description
22
Solid-State Motor Protection
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Eatons C440 and C441 solid-state

overload relay offers improved motor
protection due to high repeat accuracy
and fast reaction times to phase failures.
The state-of-the-art microelectronics
design permits the choice of relays
with different trip classes (Class 5, 10,
20, 30) to accommodate motors with
a variety of application needs.
The C440 solid-state overloads are
available on all Freedom starter sizes.
(Size 5 and up use CTs with the overload
relay.) Key features include:
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Phase loss
Phase imbalance
Wide adjustment range
Low energy usage
Reduced heat
With the simple addition of a communication module, the C440 is capable

of communicating to one of the following industrial field busses: DeviceNet,
Modbus RTU, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP
or Modbus TCP.
The C441 Motor Insight is a microprocessor-based solid-state overload

relay providing superior motor protection, communications and motor
monitoring features. This overload
provides the standard set of protections that includes I2t, jam, stall and
phase protections. The C441 also
provides ground fault, phase reversal,
voltage unbalance, programmable trip
class, trip history, thermal capacity,
power factor and voltage, current and
power monitoring. With the simple
addition of a communication module,
the C441 is capable of communicating
to one of the following industrial
field busses: DeviceNet, Modbus
RTU, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP or
Modbus TCP.
Key features of C441 Motor Insight
communicating overloads include:
DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS and

Ethernet communication options
Three-phase voltage monitoring
Three-phase current monitoring
kWh usage indication
Motor power factor indication
Last four faults history
Optional remote mounted display
I/O communication adapter with
four inputs and two outputs
Programmable set points, including:
Low voltage set point
High voltage set point
Voltage unbalance set point
CT multiplier/ratio settings
Overcurrent set point
Current unbalance trip point
Trip Class (5, 10, 15, 20, 30,
and/or Jam)
Rapid cycle timer
Restart delay timer
Underload restart delay timer
Number of restarts after faults
(Manual/Auto)
Undercurrent trip delay
Ground fault trip set point
MP-3000 Overload Relays
The MP-3000 motor overcurrent relay

is a microprocessor-based relay that
provides superior motor protection
for critical process motors. Standard
protective features provided in the
MP-3000 include: I2t, programmable
locked rotor protection, instantaneous
overcurrent, ground fault, under load,
jam, phase loss/unbalance/reversal,
limit starts per hour, alarm and trip
modes, and the capability to use motor
RTD for motor protection. Functions
are user programmable via data entry
and display panel mounted in the
door of the MCC. The MP-3000 can be
monitored via its communications
port. For further details, refer to Tab 4.
MP-4000 Overload Relays
The MP-4000 motor overload relay

provides the ultimate in motor
protection. In addition to all the
protective features included in the
MP-3000, the MP-4000 also includes
voltage-based protection/metering
as well: undervoltage, negative
sequence, power factor, overvoltage,
over/under frequency and forward/
reverse power. For further details,
refer to Tab 4.
CA08104001E
29.1-23
May 2015
Sheet 29 025
General Description
Additional Services
Startup Assistance
To ensure complete customer
satisfaction and to expedite equipment
startup for motor control centers, this
service provides a factory-trained
representative at the job site during
equipment energization. This service
is provided on a fixed price basis. In
addition to factory directed startup,
the standard equipment warranty is
extended for a period of 24 months.
This service is especially beneficial
when solid-state equipment is
incorporated within the MCC due to
the flexibility in adjusting solid-state
equipment for each application.
Maintenance and
Operational Training
A full range of training and operational
training programs are available for all
types of MCC-mounted equipment.
In addition, preventative maintenance
programs are available to ensure years
of trouble-free operation.
Retrofits
Existing installations can many times
benefit from some of the new
technology equipment available
in todays MCCs. Eaton offers a full
range of retrofit capabilities to upgrade
existing MCC lineups. Examples
include: vacuum contactors, reduced
voltage solid-state starters, solid-state
metering and solid-state overload
protection. Starter retrofit kits for
selective competitor MCCs are also
available. Consult factory for availability.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
Sheet 29 026
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Standard Structures and Structure Options
May 2015
29.2-1
Sheet 29 027
Layout and Technical Data
Standard Structures and

Structure Options
The standard Freedom, Freedom Arc
and Freedom FlashGard structure is
NEMA 1, gasketed, 90.00 inches (2286.0
mm) high, 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) wide
with a depth as shown in Figure 29.2-1.
Each standard structure has a 9.00-inch
(228.6 mm) high horizontal wireway
at the top and at the bottom and a

4.00-inch (101.6 mm) wide full height
vertical wireway at the right. All wireway
doors are hinged and secured with
1/4-turn latches. The standard busing is
600 A, UL rated, copper horizontal bus
and 300 A, UL rated, copper vertical bus
braced for 65,000 symmetrical amperes.
Many other bus sizes and types are
available. Also included as standard
is a vertical bus isolation barrier.
22
16.00 (406.4)
23
90.00
(2286.0)
24
25
Table 29.2-1. Standard Structures and Structure OptionsDimensions in Inches (mm) 1
26
20.00
(508.0)
Description
Standard Structures
16.00 (406.4) deep structure 2
21.00 (533.4) deep structure
Front mounting only
Front and rear mounting 2
4.00 (101.6) of additional structure width, 32.00 (812.8) maximum 2
8.00 (203.2) vertical wireway in lieu of standard 4.00-inch (101.6)
Structure 1 6
72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space
Front Mounted Only
Structure 1
Structure 2
Structure 3
27
28
21.00 (533.4)
Special Structures
Single corner section for L configuration of MCC
Transition section 2
Series 2100 to Type W
10.00 (254.0) widefront aligned
Plug-in blank relay mounting space, per 6-inch
Fixed-mounted relay back pan, full depth of structure
20.00 (508.0) structure with wireway
20.00 (508.0) structure without wireway
32.00 (812.8) with double door 2
Relay Structures
(per complete structure with full fixed mounting back pan)
Plexiglass see-through door insert for PLC structure
19.00 (482.6) instrumentation mounting racks installed
in relay structure
1
2
29
30
Any 6.00 (152.4) height

13.00 (330.2) with usable panel
31
Structure 2 6
72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space
Front Mounted Only
Complete section
Complete section
Complete section
Complete section
Complete section
Complete section
6.00 (152.4) increments
21.00 (533.4)
Top Horizontal
Wireway
Vertical
Wireway
Channel floor sills: 11-gauge, 1.00 x 3.00 (25.4 x 76.2)

NEMA 1 gasket
NEMA 12 dust-proof, includes bottom plate 4
Bottom plate for NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure
150-watt space heater, per structure
Thermostat for space heater control
Pullbox kit for cable and wiring to be field mounted on top structure 4
12.00 (304.8) high
18.00 (457.2) high
24.00 (609.6) high
Rear hinged structure door, 72.00 (1828.8) high 4
NEMA 2 drip shield on top of MCC 4
NEMA 3R non-walk-infront-mounted, back-to-back 4
NEMA 3R walk-in aisle-front mounted 4
NEMA 3R walk-in tunnel type 4
NEMA 4Xconsult factory 4
Special reduced height structures 4
Seismic certification (earthquake qualification)
UL handle extension 5
4
5
This table is common for Freedom, Freedom Arc and Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
Not available in Freedom Arc.
The standard Freedom, Freedom Arc and Freedom FlashGard Series structure is designed to
comply with the UL 2-meter requirement. Disconnect operating handle is not more than 2 meters
[78.00 inches (1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the MCC. Motor control centers elevated on a
raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for
the uppermost operators. UL handle extension optionally available when required.
CA08104001E
33
34
35
Consult Eaton
36
Vertical
Compartment
Table 29.2-2. Structure ModificationsDimensions in Inches (mm) 3
32
20.00
(508.0)
37
Bottom
Horizontal
Wireway
20.00
(508.0)
Structure 3
72-inch (1828.8 mm) SpaceFront
66-inch (1676.4 mm) SpaceRear
Back-to-Back
Figure 29.2-1. StructureDimensions in

Inches (mm)
6
The standard Freedom Series structure is

designed to comply with the UL 2-meter
requirement. Disconnect operating handle
is not more than 2 meters [78.00 inches
(1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the
MCC. Motor control centers elevated on
a raised pad or installed on unembedded
channel sills may require operator handle
extensions for the uppermost operators.
UL handle extension optionally available
when required.
38
39
40
41
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 028
22
Table 29.2-3. Bus ModificationsDimensions in Inches (mm) 1

Eatons Freedom Series MCCs bear the UL label. Service entrance labeling is available.
Description
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Copper Horizontal Bus Ratings Tin-Plated
Main Bus, Per Vertical Structure

50 C
65 C
CuTin-Plated
(Standard)
600 A Size
800 A Size
1200 A Size
1600 A Size
2000 A Size
2500 A Size
3200 A Size 2
0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1

0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 1
0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 2
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 4
0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 6
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 8 2
N/A
0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1

0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 1
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 2
0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 4
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 6
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 8
21.00 (533.4) deep 3

21.00 (533.4) deep 3
21.00 (533.4) deep 4
21.00 (533.4) deep 45
1
2
32
3
4
5
33
34
35
6
7
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Not available in back-to-back structure.
Contact Eaton for 3200 A dimensions.
Vertical bus and unit stabs are tin-plated copper only.
Neutral is half-rating of horizontal bus.
Maximum Cable
Size (kcmil)
350
Bus Rating
(Amperes)
600
Maximum Cables
per Phase
Cable Entry
(Top or Bottom)
Lug
Type
Unit
Space
X
Space 9
Enclosure
Width
Top
2X
3X
3X
4X
6X
Bottom
18.00-inch (457.2 mm)
top hat
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
20.00 (508.0)
Screw
Crimp
Screw
Screw
Crimp
Either
Screw
Crimp
Screw
Crimp
Either
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
3X
4X
4X
6X
Screw
Crimp
Screw
Crimp
Screw
Crimp
Screw
Crimp
Screw
Crimp
Screw
Crimp
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
72.00 (1828.8) j
72.00 (1828.8) j
72.00 (1828.8) j
72.00 (1828.8) j
72.00 (1828.8) j
72.00 (1828.8) j
4X
6X
6X
8X
5X
6X
12X
12X
12X
12X
12X
12X
37
38
600
800
39
40
42
Optional
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional Freedom
Standard Cu
Standard Cu
Cu
Cu
Table 29.2-4. Main Lugs OnlyMechanical Lug Compartment (Three-Phase, Three- or Four-wire)Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8
Provisions for terminating incoming line cables directly onto the MCC bus system. Up to 1200 A, all lug landings are bolted to
a fully rated vertical bus in that section. MLO sections must be put at the top for top entry cables and at the bottom for bottom
entry cables. For smaller cable sizes, cable lugs may also be extended into an optional top hat as shown in this table.
36
41
Optional
Optional
Standard 6
Cu only
Standard
Cu only
Cu only
Silver-plated bus main horizontal bus

Insulated main horizontal bus, per vertical structure (taping)
Vertical bus, per vertical structure: 300 Acopper (tin-plated)
Increased bus capacity: rated at 600 A (front-mounted only)
Rated at 600 A (back-to-back)copper
Rated at 800 A (back-to-back and front)
Rated at 1200 A
Increased mechanical bus bracing, per vertical structure:
42,000 A rms symmetrical short-circuit current
65,000 A rms symmetrical short-circuit current
100,000 A rms symmetrical short-circuit current 2
Vertical bus isolation barrier, per vertical structure
Labyrinth design insulation-isolation vertical bus barrier
Ground bus, 300 A standard, per vertical structure
Increased capacity ground bus only, 600 A, 1/4- x 2.00-inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm), per vertical structure
FlashGard plug-in grounding system, includes 300 A vertical ground bus and unit grounding clips, per vertical structure
Neutral bus, ungrounded for three-phase, four-wire power, per vertical structure 7
Splice plates
750
1000
1000
18.00-inch (457.2 mm)

top hat
1200
2
2
4
4
2
1000
1600
1000
2500
3200
43
8
9
j
This table is common for the Freedom and Freedom FlashGard. Freedom Arc Resistant does not contain an MLO option.
Requires 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) = (1X) unit space.
Lug landings require the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
CA08104001E
May 2015

29.2-3
Sheet 29 029

Bus Duct Entry Sandwich Type to Horizontal Bus or Main
DisconnectPull Box
Pull box and pre-fabricated bus connectors are supplied to
match the sandwich type bus duct end flange. Bus duct is
assumed to enter the top. Bus duct type and orientation to
the MCC must be provided.
Table 29.2-6. Typical Heat Loss Data 3

Description
Current (A)
Loss (W)
Vertical Sections
Horizontal Bus and
Ampacity
600
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3200
200
300
500
700
1000
1400
2050
Table 29.2-5. Bus Duct Entry to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect

Pull BoxDimensions in Inches (mm) 1
Horizontal Bus
Rating (Amperes)
Pull Box
Height
6001600
20002500 2
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
This table is common for both Freedom and Freedom

FlashGard MCCs; Freedom Arc does not have this option.
Contact Eaton for 3200 A dimensions.
Note: Consult factory for non-segregated bus requirements.
Space Heaters
Loss (W)
Space heaters
500
22
23
24
25
26
Loss (W)
Starters
C306
C440/C441
FVNR size 1
FVNR size 2
FVNR size 3
FVNR size 4
FVNR size 5
FNVR size 6
40
60
100
130
230
400
30
50
90
120
220
390
27
28
29
AFDs
SVX
DG1
hp (VT)
Loss (W)
FR4
FR5
FR6
FR7
FR8
FR9
FR10
FR1
FR2
FR3
FR4
FR4
7.5
20
40
75
150
250
400
140
400
800
1400
2800
4000
6250
Power Breakers
Amps
Loss (W)
MDN-608 (Fixed)
MDN-612 (Fixed)
MDN-616 (Fixed)
MDS-C08 (Drawout)
MDS-C16 (Drawout)
MDS-C20 (Drawout)
MDS-C32 (Drawout)
800
1200
1600
800
1600
2000
3200
45
110
180
60
240
380
800
Series C Molded Case Breakers
Amps
Loss (W)
FD
KD
LD
ND
ND
RK
RD
RD
150
400
600
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
60
175
225
87
210
220
270
400
Series G Molded Case Breakers
Amps
Loss (W)
EG
JG
LG
NG
NG
RG
RG
RG
125
250
600
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
50
75
225
87
210
220
270
400
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
The starters are using the C306 bi-metal overload relay.
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
Sheet 29 030
22
23
24
Table 29.2-7. Typical Weights in lbs (kg)

Description
Weight
16.00-inch (406.4 mm) deep x 20.00-inch

(508.0 mm) wide structure 1
200 (91)
21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep x 20.00-inch

(508.0 mm) wide structure 1
260 (118)
Table 29.2-8. Control Power Transformer Data 2

All control power transformers are encapsulated and will
deliver rated secondary voltage at full load. Two primary
and one secondary fuses are furnished as standard.
NEMA Size
Starter
Starter Type
Freedom
Standard
VA Rating
Maximum 3
VA Rating
Full voltage
non-reversing
and reversing
100
100
100
N/A
150
200
200
150
150
100
150
N/A
250
250
350
250
Adder for Horizontal Bus
25
800 A
1000 A
1200 A
10 (5)
15 (7)
18 (8)
26
1600 A
2000 A
2500 A
3200 A
24 (11)
30 (14)
38 (17)
49 (22)
Size 1
Size 1 4
Size 2
Size 2 4
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Autotransformer
30 (14)
40 (18)
60 (27)
100
150
200
250
200
150
250
250
350
350
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Two-speed
One winding
100
100
200
350
350
200
200
200
250
500
500
350
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Two-speed
Two winding
100
100
150
200
200
200
150
150
250
250
250
350
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Part winding
150
150
200
350
350
200
150
150
250
500
500
350
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Wye delta
(open or closed
transition)
200
350
350
200
200
200
200
500
500
350
27
28
29
30
Adder for Vertical Bus

600 A
800 A
1200 A
Adder for Units FreedomInches (mm)

12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
1
31
32
33
34
35
36
25 (11.4)
40 (18)
63 (29)
77 (35)
100 (45)
Weight for NEMA 1 structure with 600 A horizontal and 300 A

vertical bus.
3
4
This table is common for Freedom, Freedom Arc and Freedom

FlashGard MCCs.
Maximum size without increasing starter space.
6.00-inch (152.4 mm) unit.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
29.2-5
Sheet 29 031
Motor Protection
In line with 2005 NEC 430.6(A) circuit
breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selections are based on full load currents
for induction motors running at
speeds normal for belted motors and
motors with normal torque characteristics using data taken from NEC Table
130.250 (three-phase). Actual motor
nameplate ratings shall be used for
selecting motor running overload
protection. Motors built special for low
speeds, high torque characteristics,
special starting conditions and applications will require other considerations
as defined in the application section of
the NEC.
pickup settings.
ampere rating selections are in line
with maximum rules given in NEC
430.52 and Table 430.250. Based on
known characteristics of Eaton type
breakers, specific units are recommended. The current ratings are no
more than the maximum limits set
by the NEC rules for motors with code
letters F to V or without code letters.
Motors with lower code letters will
require further considerations.
Horsepower
Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA

Maximum
Amperes
Circuit Breaker
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
Time Delay Non-Time Delay
Amperes Type
Amperes
Adj. Range
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
30
50
50
100
90300
150500
150500
3001000
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
HFD
HFD
HKD
HKD
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
HLD
HLD
HND
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
15
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
1. AmbientOutside enclosure not

more than 40 C (104 F).
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
HFD
HFD
HJD
HJD
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
2. Motor startingInfrequent starting, stopping or reversing.
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
HKD
HJD
L600
400
400
600
20004000
20004000
18006000

motor FLA.
may not set at more than 1300% of the
motor full-load current to comply with
NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA Design
B energy high-efficiency motors which
can be set up to 1700%.)
Circuit breaker selections are based on
types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types
For motor full load currents of 208 and
200 volts, increase the corresponding
230-volt motor values by 10 and 15%
respectively.
CA08104001E
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
460 Volts, Three-Phase

1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
3. Motor accelerating time

10 seconds or less.
23
1
1-1/2
2
3

based on:
22
31
32
33
34
35
36
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
15
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
15
30
30
30
45150
90300
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFD
50
50
70
100
150500
150500
210500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
HFD
HFD
HFD
HJD
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
41
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
HJD
HJD
HKD
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
42
37
38
39
40
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 032
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Table 29.2-10. Starter Sizes Selection Guide 1

Squirrel-Cage
Motor
Horsepower
230 V, Three-Phase
460 V, Three-Phase
Control Center Full Load 2

Starter NEMA Current
Amperes
Size
Wire Size 3
at 75 C Max.
at 40 C Amb.
575 V, Three-Phase

Starter NEMA Current
Amperes
Size
1/2
3/4
1
2.2
14
1
1
3.2
14
1
1
1
4.2
14
1
1-1/2
1
6.0
14
1
2
1
6.8
14
1
3
1
9.6
14
1
5
1
15.2
12
1
7-1/2
1
22
10
1
10
2
28
10
1
15
2
42
8
2
20
3
54
6
2
25
3
68
4
2
30
3
80
3
3
40
4
104
1
3
50
4
130
1/0
3
60
5
154
3/0
4
75
5
192
4/0
4
100
5
248
300 kcmil
4
125
6
312
500 kcmil
5
150
6
360
24/0
5
6
480
2300 kcmil
5
200
6
250 4
300 4
6
1 This table is common for Freedom, Freedom Arc and Freedom
FlashGard MCCs.
2 Information is based on Table 430.150 of NEC (1999).
31
Wire Size 3
at 75 C Max. Starter NEMA Current
at 40 C Amb. Size
Amperes
Wire Size 3
at 75 C Max.
at 40 C Amb.
0.9
14
1.1
14
1
1.3
14
1.6
14
1
1.7
14
2.1
14
1
2.4
14
3.0
14
1
3.4
14
1
2.7
14
4.8
14
1
3.9
14
7.6
14
1
6.1
14
11
14
1
9
14
14
14
1
11
14
21
10
2
17
12
27
10
2
22
10
34
8
2
27
10
40
8
3
32
8
52
6
3
41
8
65
4
3
52
6
77
3
4
62
4
96
2
4
77
3
124
1/0
4
99
2
156
3/0
5
125
1/0
180
4/0
5
144
2/0
240
300 kcmil
5
192
4/0
302
500 kcmil
6
242
300 kcmil
361
24/0
6
289
400 kcmil
3 Information is based on use of copper conductorsTable 310.16 and
Tables 1, 4 and 5, Ch. 9 of NEC. If aluminum conductors are used refer
to Table 310.16 of NEC (1999).
4 Not available in Freedom Arc.
32
12.12
(307.8)
10.50
(266.7)
Location of
Ground Bus
33
3.12 (79.2)
4.62 (117.3)
Front Horizontal
Wireway 7.16
(181.9) Deep
Horizontal Bus Location

Vertical Bus Location
Removable Bus Barrier
3.12 (79.2)
4.62 (117.3) 15.00

(381.0)
4.62 (117.3)
Front Horizontal
Wireway
7.16 (181.9) Deep
Removable
Bus Barrier
Flat Rear Cover

Supplied on Front
Mounted Only
Structure
36
37
D

1.00
(25.4)
39
Floor Line
9.73 (247.14)
or 14.11 (358.4)
20.11 (510.8)
or 15.73 (399.5)
10.50
(266.7)
Rear Horizontal Wireway

4.97 (126.2) Deep
Minimum Rated Vertical

Bus Supplied as Standard
in Front Mounted Only
Structure
38
42
2.25
(57.2)
4.62 (117.3)
35
41
Location of
Ground Bus
2.25
(57.2)
34
40
12.12
(307.8)
10.50
(266.7)
Floor Line
5.00 (127.0)
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills
Supplied Only When Specified
3.00
(76.2)
E
1.00 (25.4)
9.73 (247.14)
or 14.11 (358.4)
20.11 (510.8)
or 15.73 (399.5)
10.50
(266.7)
Location of Neutral Bus

When Specified
5.00 (127.0)
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills

3.00 Supplied Only When Specified
(76.2)

When Specified
Figure 29.2-2. Side View AFront Mounted Only
Figure 29.2-3. Side View BFront and Rear Mounted
Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only. When
location not specified, MTB supplied at the bottom.
Standard structure arrangement in front
Without MTB; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at bottom; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at top; A = 15.00 inches (381.0 mm),
B = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
8
9
43
Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only. When
location not specified, MTB supplied at the bottom.
Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure.
Standard structure arrangement in front
Without MTB; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at bottom; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at top; A = 15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
Standard structure arrangement in rear
Without MTB; C = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm),
D = 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), E = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
With MTB at bottom; C = 0, D = 66.00 inches (1676.4 mm),
E = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at top; C = 12.00 inches (304.8 mm),
D = 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), E = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
CA08104001E

May 2015
29.2-7
Sheet 29 033
22
19.60
(497.8)
23
24
25
0.00
26
0.00
28.00
(711.2)
0.00
19.60
(497.8)
27
0.00
28
29
9.73
(247.1)
30
17.23
(437.6)
Location of relay backpan
18.60 (472.4) from front
31
32
33
34
35
47.23
(1199.6)
36
37
38
39
40
77.23
(1961.6)
41
42
90.00
(2286.0)
Figure 29.2-4. Relay Structure (28.00 inches [711.2 mm] wide and 20.00 inches [508.0 mm] deep shown)
CA08104001E
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 034
22

1
23
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
Top Conduit
Space
24
25
5.41
(137.4)
29
30
31
32
Vertical Wireway
Door
17.50
(444.5)
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
Wire Tie
Brackets
20.00
(508.0)
27
28
16.00
(406.4)
2.20
(55.9)
26
Removable
Top Cover
7.31
(185.7)
1.25
(31.8)
17.50
(444.5)
Removable Bottom
Frame Members
5.41
(137.4)
4.81
(122.2)
Minimum length of anchor bolt

2.00 inches (50.8 mm) 0.36 inches
(9.1 mm)16 recommended.
Recommended maximum conduit height
above floor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm).
Maximum conduit space with channel sills
17.50 x 9.73 inches (444.5 x 247.1 mm).
For multiple structure assemblies. Either one
or both of these members are removed to
provide maximum unrestricted conduit space
at bottom. Not to be removed for seismic.
This conduit space not recommended when
neutral bus required. Otherwise available.
Top rear conduit space not recommended
for conduit entry in FMO structure.
See Side View A Page 29.2-6 for

vertical dimensions.
Vertical
Wireway
13.97
(354.8)
6.81
(173.0)
Bottom Conduit Space
1.58
(40.1)
16.00
(406.4)
.53 Dia.
2.00
(50.8)
.70
(17.8)
.53 Dia.
Figure 29.2-5. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 16.00 Inches (406.4 mm)
Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)
33
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
34
Top Conduit
Space
Removable
Top Cover
35
20.38
(517.7)
5.41
(137.4)
36
37
2.20
(55.9)
1.25
(31.8)
17.50
(444.5)
Vertical Wireway
Door
1.25
(31.8)
20.00
(508.0)
38
39
40
1.25
(31.8)
17.50
(444.50)
Wire Tie
Brackets
7.31
(185.7)
1.25
(31.8)
Removable Bottom
Frame Members
5.41
(137.4)
4.81
(122.2)
Vertical
Wireway
18.35
(466.1)
5.78
(146.8)
5.41
(137.4)
41
42
43
1.58
(40.1)
.53 Dia.
16.00
(406.4)
2.00
(50.8)
.70
(17.8)
.53 Dia.
Figure 29.2-6. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21.00 Inches (533.4 mm)
Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)

CA08104001E

May 2015
29.2-9
Sheet 29 035

22
1
2.20
(55.9)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
Removable
Top Cover
3.22
(81.79)
Top Conduit
Space
21.00
(533.4)
5.41
(137.4)
2.20
(55.9)
1.25
(31.8)
17.50
(444.5)
1.25
(31.8)
7.31
(185.7)
20.00
(508.0)
1.25
(31.8)
4.81
(122.2)
Front Vertical
Wireway Door
1.25
(31.8)
17.50
(444.50)
Wire Tie
Brackets
Rear
Vertical
Wireway
7.31
(185.7)
Removable Bottom
Frame Members
5.41
(137.4)
Vertical
Wireway
4.81
(122.2)
See Side View B Page 29.2-6 for

vertical dimensions.
18.35
(466.1)
5.78
(146.81)
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
5.41
(137.4)
.53 Dia.
Minimum length of anchor bolt

2.00 inches (50.8 mm) 0.36 inches
(9.1 mm)16 recommended.
Recommended maximum conduit height
above floor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm).
Maximum conduit space with channel sills
17.50 x 14.11 (444.5 x 358.4) in
21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
7.50 x 9.73 inches (190.5 x 247.1 mm) in
16.00-inch (406.4 mm) deep structure.
For multiple structure assemblies. Either one
or both of these members are removed to
provide maximum unrestricted conduit
space at bottom. Not to be removed
for Seismic.
This conduit space not recommended when
neutral bus required. Otherwise available.
Channel sills supplied only when specified.
For seismic loads, channel sills if required
must be embedded so top of channel sill
is still at floor level.
30
16.00
(406.4)
2.00
(50.8)
.53 Dia.
1.32
(33.5)
31
32
Figure 29.2-7. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21.00 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep
Front- and Rear-Mounted
33
Removable
Top Cover
Top Conduit
Space
20.38
(517.7)
or 16.00
(406.4)
5.41
(137.4)
2.20 1.25
(55.9) (31.8)
7.50
(190.5)
7.50
(190.5)
3.12
(79.25)
4.62
(117.35)
4.62
(117.35)
Removable Bus
Barrier
Horizontal
Wireway
7.16 inches
(181.9 mm) deep
1.25
(31.8)
Flat Cover
Supplied on
Rear of Front
Mounted Only
Structure
1.25
(31.8)
Removable Bottom
Frame Members
5.41
(137.4)
5.41
(137.4)
5.00
(127.0)
.70
(17.8)
36
37
38
5.00
(127.0)
Floor Line
1.00
(25.4)
9.73 (247.14)
or 14.11 (358.4)
20.11 (510.8)
or 15.73 (399.5)
10.50
(266.7)
3.00
(76.2)

When Specified
Figure 29.2-8. 10.00 Inches (254.0 mm) Wide, 16.00 or 21.00 Inches (406.4 or 533.4 mm) Deep
Transition Structure
CA08104001E
35
40
Bottom Conduit
Space
1.58
(40.1)
34
39
18.35 (466.1)
or 13.97 (354.8)
5.78
(146.81)
.53 Dia.
(2)
Horizontal Bus
Location
2.25
(57.15)
10.00
(254.0)
1.25
(31.8)
12.12
(307.9)
Ground Bus
Location
41
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 036
22
20.00
(508.0)
23
24
0.50
(12.7)
Right-Hand
Drawing
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
25
16.00
(406.4)
26
Top & Bottom

Conduit / Wire Space
20.00
(508.0)
27
28
4.78
(121.4)
(Ref)
20.00
(508.0)
29
2.00
(50.8)
20.00
(508.0)
Corner
Enclosure
19.22
(488.2)
16.00
(406.4)
20.00
(508.0)
0.50
(12.7)
Right-Hand
Drawing
23.60
(599.4)
24.38
(616.7)
20.00
(508.0)
Corner
Enclosure
24.38
(616.7)
22.76
(578.1)
21.00
(533.4)
18.60
(472.5)
11.48
(291.6)
1.25
(31.8)
22.97
(538.4)
22.38
(568.5)
3.49
(88.7)
21.00
(533.4)
20.00
(508.0)
Top & Bottom

Conduit / Wire Space
1.25
(31.8)
38
39
4.62
(117.4)
4.00
(101.6)
(Ref)
19.22
(488.2)
1.25
(31.8)
Figure 29.2-9. 16.00-Inch (406.4 mm) DeepFront-Mounted Corner Structure (inside corner shown; consult factory for outside corner option)
36
37
5.65
(143.6)
2.00
(50.8)
33
35
2.00
(50.8)
0.00
Right-Hand Drawing
34
10.00
(254.0)
0.00
31
32
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
5.40
(137.2)
Front
30
18.00
(457.2)
18.38
(466.9)
16.00
(406.4)
Corner
Enclosure
19.22
(488.2)
18.60
(472.5)
1.25
(31.8)
12.19
(309.6)
1.25
(31.8)
5.40
(137.2)
20.00
(508.0)
Front
4.78
(121.4)
(Ref)
40
41
42
43
24.38
(616.7)
Corner
Enclosure
23.60
(599.4)
21.00
(533.4)
20.00
(508.0)
Right-Hand
Drawing
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
0.00
2.00
(50.8)
0.00
4.00
(101.6)
(Ref)
5.65
(143.5)
4.62
(117.4)
23.60
(599.4)
1.25
(31.8)
11.48
(291.6)
22.97
(583.4)
Figure 29.2-10. 21.00-Inch (533.4 mm) DeepFront- and Rear-Mounted Corner Structure
CA08104001E

May 2015
29.2-11
Sheet 29 037
SECTION A-A
3.50
(88.9)
Top
Conduit
Space
CL
Gasketed Side Sheet

3.50
(88.9)
23.50
(599.4)
0.18
(4.6)
20.30
(515.6)
28.85
(732.8)
5.00 (127.0)
0.18 (4.6)
Vertical
Wireway
Wire Tie
Brackets
2.87 (72.9)
7.97 (204.2)
Minimum Rated Vertical Bus

Supplied on Front
Mounted Only Structures
25
7.31 (185.7)
4.81 (122.2)
4.25
(108.0)
Upper Horizontal
Wireway Door
9.80
(248.9)
28.85 (732.8)
11.42
(290.1)
2.25
(57.2)
25.75
(654.1)
4.82
(122.4)
26
1.75 (44.5)
27
4.62 (117.3)
2.38
(60.5)
23
24
4.25 (108.0)
1.88
(47.8)
22
28
2.12
(53.8)
29
0.75
(19.1)
24.85
(631.2)
95.25
(2419.4)
Vertical
Wireway
90.00
(2286.0)
94.62
(2403.3)
Lower
Horizontal
Wireway
Door
01 02 03
4.25 (108.0)
1.88 (47.8)
Bottom
Conduit
Space
Detail 2
1.25
(31.8)
Max.
5.00
(127.0)
Floor
Line
15.69 (398.5)
4.31 (109.5)
20 (508.0)
1.75 4.00
(44.5) (101.6)
34
0.75
(19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
Location of Neutral
Bus When Specified
23.35
(593.1)
24.85
(631.2)
Detail 1
24.85
15.78 (631.2)
(400.8)
23.35
(593.1)
5.00 (127.0)
17.50
(444.5)
23.50 (596.9)
3.00
(76.2) 3.75
(95.3)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.75
(95.3)
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). 38.00 (9.7 mm)16 recommended.
Recommended maximum conduit height above floor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm).
Maximum conduit space with channel sills 15.78 x 16.6 inches (400.8 x 421.6 mm).
Master terminal block assembly furnished for type C wiring only. When location not specified MTB supplied at the bottom.
Recommended standard anchor bolting for Detail 1. When channel sills are used, see Detail 2.
This conduit space is not recommended when neutral bus is required. Otherwise available.
Top rear conduit space is not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure.
Standard structure arrangement (in front) without master terminal block, A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom,
A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Note: Rear horizontal bus barrier is not supplied with front-mounted only structure.
CA08104001E
38
39
16.00
(406.4)
Figure 29.2-11. Freedom and Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Center Outline and Floor Plan NEMA 3R 28.85-Inch (732.8 mm) Deep Structure
1
36
0.75 (19.1)
3.78 (96.0)
3.00
(76.2)
35
37
0.75 (19.1)
5.00 (127.0)
5.78 (146.8)
32
1.56
(39.6)
19.35 (491.5)
24.85 (631.2)
14.04
(356.6)
31
33
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.75 (44.5)
Channel Sills
4 x 1.56 (101.6 x 39.6)
Supplied Only When Specified
30
40
41
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 038
22
14.17
(359.9)
Wire Tie
Brackets
2.50
(63.5)
23
7.31
(185.7)
Vertical Wireway
1.75
(44.5)
25
26
2.00
W-9.00 (50.8)
(228.6) 2.00
(50.8)
48.82 (1240.0)
Aisle
27
2.25
(57.2)
28
30
3.00
4.00
(101.6) (76.2)
31
3.12 (79.3)
32
10.50
(266.7)
12.12
(307.8)
33
1.88
(47.8)
5.41
(137.4)
3.00
(76.2)
2.20
(55.9)
20.30
(515.6)
71.00
(1803.4)

Ground Bus Location
15 Ref.
0.38
(9.7)
0.38
(9.7)
2.00
(50.8)
W
0.38
(9.7)
2.25
(57.2) Ground Bus
4.62
(117.3)
2.12
(53.8)
2.25
(57.2)
75.50 (1917.7)
10.06
(255.5)
20.10
(510.5)
3.50
(88.9)
1.75
(44.5)
71.00 (1803.4)
11.68
(296.7)
2.00
(50.8)
2
Door Opening 1
36.00 (914.4) W x 90.00 (2288.0) H
29
W-6.00
(152.4)
9.63
(244.6)
2.50
(63.5)
1
3.00
(76.2)
22.18
(563.4)
3.50
(88.9)
2.00
(50.8)
4.81 (122.2)
24
2.12
(53.8)
4.62
(117.3)
34
102.40
(2601.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
35
4
36
Vertical
Bus
3
5.00
(127.0)
37
1 2 3
38
4.00
(101.6)
See
Detail A
39
11.68
(296.7)
10.50
(266.7)
MTB Top
16.44 (417.6)
MTB Bottom
22.44 (570.0)

When Specified
71.00
(1803.4)
40
4.00
(101.6)
W
1.81 (46.0) Isolation Barrier (Standard)
15.58 (395.7) Labyrinth Barrier
When Specified Insulated/Isolated
Top Conduit Space
Figure 29.2-12. Freedom and Freedom FlashGard NEMA 3R Walk-In Aisle StructuresDimensions in Inches (mm)
41
1
2
42
43
All doors open minimum of 105.

Rear vertical bus barrier not supplied with front-mounted only structure.
Standard structure arrangement (in front) without master terminal block, A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom,
A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Master terminal block assembly furnished for type C wiring only. When location is not specified MTB is supplied at the bottom.
Note: Minimum rated vertical bus supplied as standard. Rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only
structure. Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure.
CA08104001E

May 2015
29.2-13
Sheet 29 039
22
W
3.00
(76.2)
23
3.00
(76.2)
W-6.00
(152.4)
24
4.00
(101.6)
22.18
(563.4)
4.79
(121.7)
5.78
15.98 (146.8)
(406.0)
26
5.41
(137.4)
71.00
(1803.4)
25
3/8-16 Stud and

Lockwasher
1.25
(31.8)
27
2.20
(55.9)
28
71.00
(1803.4)
2.25
(57.2)
75.50
(1917.7)
29
Tie DownDetail A
30
Figure 29.2-13. Freedom and Freedom FlashGard NEMA 3R Walk-In Aisle StructuresDimensions in Inches (mm)
1
2
3
4
31
Minimum length of anchor bolt above grade 1.25 (31.75) (0.38-16 grade 5 torqued at 31 lb ft (43.4 Nm).
Recommended maximum conduit height above floor line 5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Maximum conduit space B.
This conduit space not recommended when a neutral bus is required. The space is otherwise available.
Outdoor Structure
Width (W)
Indoor Structure
Width (A)
32
Metering and Bus Protection

Maximum Conduit
Space (B)
23.50 (596.9)
27.50 (698.5)
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
17.50 x 15.98 (444.5 x 405.9)

21.50 x 15.98 (546.1 x 405.9)
31.50 (800.1)
35.50 (901.7)
28.00 (711.2)
32.00 (812.8)
25.50 x 15.98 (647.7 x 405.9)

29.50 x 15.98 (749.3 x 405.9)
Table 29.2-12. Incoming Line Metering and Bus Protection 5

Type
Description
Unit Space
Inches (mm) 6
Switchboard
meters 7
1% accuracy
Ammeter
Ammeter with switch
Voltmeter
Voltmeter with switch
12.00 (304.8)
or 2X
Signal
transducers
Consult
Eaton
6.00 (152.4)
or 1X
Current (add CT) single-phase

Voltage (add PT)
Watt (add CT and PT) single-phase
6.00 (152.4)
or 1X
18.00 (457.2)
or 3X 8
6.00 (152.4)
or 1X
Ground Fault Sensing C-HRG Safe Ground High Resistance Ground System
Voltage
5
6
7
CA08104001E
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep,

20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure
without a vertical wireway.
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X

FlashGard MCCs.
Two electronic meters will fit in a single 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) (2X) unit.
Ammeters require two CTs for three-phase/three-wire systems, and
three CTs for three-phase/four-wire systems. Voltmeters require two
PTs for three-phase/three-wire systems, and three PTs for three-phase/
four-wire systems.
Without disconnect 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X.
38
39
Voltage Protection
Current
36
37
480/120 PT
SPD (see Table 29.2-20 on Page 29.2-15)

Ground detection lightsthree-phase underground systems
System voltage monitor
Lightning arrester and surge capacitor
34
35
AM/VM
AM/VM with switches
Instrument
600/800A CT
Transformers 1000A CT
2000A CT
2500A CT
33
40
41
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 040
22
23
24
25
26
27
Harmonic Correction
Table 29.2-13. Clean Control Center
Eatons Clean Control Center is an integrated power correction
system that provides harmonic correction directly on the
MCC horizontal bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the
load current and dynamically injects into the horizontal bus a
synthesized waveform that cancels harmonic content from
nonlinear loads such as AC drives. The result is a clean
waveform. Clean Control Centers are UL 845 listed.
1
Input
Disconnect
Voltage Type
Standard
Unit Space 2
Inches (mm)
50 A active
harmonic filter 3
Up to
480V
Moldedcase switch
72.00 H x 20.00 W
12X
(1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
100 A active
harmonic filter 3
Up to
480V
Moldedcase switch
72.00 H x 20.00 W
12X
(1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

FlashGard MCCs.
Clean Control Center model includes 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCE
structure, current transformers and door-mounted digital interface panel.
Multiple units can be applied in parallel for additional
harmonic correction.
Poles
Maximum
Voltage
Plug-in
Bolt-on
Ampere
Interrupting
Capacity
1/2/3
1/2/3
1/2/3
1/2/3
240
240
600
600
HQP
QPHW
BAB
QBHW
EHD
HFD
10,000
22,000
14,000
65,000
Table 29.2-14. Lighting Panelboards

120/240 V or 120/208 V Lighting Panelboards TypePL1A 4
Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either
120/240 V, single-phase, three-wire; 208Y / 120 V, threephase, four-wire.
Number Chassis Rating
of
(Amperes)
Circuits SingleThreePhase
Phase
Three-Wire Four-Wire
Unit Space
Inches (mm)
18
30
42
24.00 (609.6) or 4X 24.00 (609.6) or 4X

30.00 (762.0) or 5X 30.00 (762.0) or 5X
36.00 (914.4) or 6X 36.00 (914.4) or 6X
35
225
225
225
100
100
225
Single-Phase
Three-Wire
Three-Phase
Four-Wire

FlashGard MCCs.
Note: For MCB, back-feed panelboard branch circuit breaker,

or select separate feeder unit.
Note: Bolt-on single-, two-, three-pole breakers only.
Table 29.2-17. Automatic Transfer SwitchesDimensions in

Inches (mm) 7
Ampere Switch
Rating Type 8
38
39
40
41
42
Chassis
Rating
(Amperes)
Unit Space Inches (mm)

Three-Phase
Three-Phase
Three-Wire
Four-Wire
14
18
24
26
32
36
42
42
12
14
30
42
100
250
100
250
100
250
100
250
400/600
400/600
400/600
400/600
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
43
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X

60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
20.00 (508.0) 9
Unit
Space
Eaton MTVX, NTVS

Eaton MTVX, NTVS
65
65
100
150
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
65
65
48.00 (1219.2)
or 8X
225
300
400
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
65
65
65
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
600
800
1000
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
50
50
50
24.00 (609.6) 9
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
1000
1200
1600
2000
Eaton ATVISP
Eaton ATVISP
Eaton ATVISP
Eaton ATVISP
100
100
100
100
44.00 (1117.6) j
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
100
150
ASCO Type 7000

ASCO Type 7000
65
65
20.00 (508.0) j
260
400
ASCO Type 7000

ASCO Type 7000
65
35
28.00 (711.2) j
600
800
ASCO Type 7000

ASCO Type 7000
35
50
36.00 (914.4) j
1000
1200
ASCO Type 7000

ASCO Type 7000
50
100
40.00 (1016.0) j
Table 29.2-15. 277/480 V or 480/600 V Lighting Panelboards Type PRL3A 5

Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either
480 or 600 V, three-phase, three-wire or 480Y / 277 V, threephase, four-wire. Mounted in bottom portion of structure.
Number
of Circuits
Interrupting Unit
Rating (kA) Width
100 9
150 9
37

FlashGard MCCs.
Panelboards
36
Standard
Unit
Space (X)
Harmonic
Current
(Amperes)
Table 29.2-16. Lighting Panelboard Circuit Breakers 6

Eatons circuit breakers can be either plug-in or bolt-on,
single-, two- or three-pole through 240 V. 600 V maximum
single-, two- or three-pole circuit breakers are bolt-on.
36.00 (914.4)
or 6X
This table is common for both Freedom and Freedom FlashGard MCCs;
not available in Freedom Arc.
ATVI designs include ATC controller door mounted microprocessorbased monitoring device for use in open transition transfer switches
where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situations is essential. The ATC controller is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be
used with Eaton transfer switches. This device provides the operator
with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well
as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be
viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the
power source currently in use. The ATC controller continuously monitors either single-phase or three-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2
and the Load. Depending on the application, the user can customize
the ATC controller to meet specific application need.
Manually operated switch: MTVX = Single handle manual operation.
NTVS = Electrically operated non-automatic.
Requires 42.00-inch (1066.8 mm) deep structure.

FlashGard MCCs.
Note: For MCB, back-feed panelboard branch circuit breaker,

or select separate feeder unit.
Note: Either plug-in or bolt-on single-, two-, three-pole breakers only.
CA08104001E

May 2015
29.2-15
Sheet 29 041
Surge Protective Devices
Table 29.2-18. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers

Transformer 1.02.0 kVA will include a circuit breaker
and fuses in a standard 2X unit
Transformers 3.0 kVA and above have taps and
electrostatic shields as standard
Transformers 3.0 kVA and above will include the primary and
secondary circuit breakers housed behind a single door
1
kVA
Rating
Unit
Space
Secondary Breaker 2
(Included in
Space Factor)
Primary Breaker
(Included in Space Factor)
230 V
480 V
Single-Phase
0.5
0.75
1
2X
2X
2X
15
15
15
15
15
15
1.5
2
3
2X
2X
4X
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
5
7.5
10
4X
4X
4X
15
20
25
15
20
30
30
40
60
15
20
25
5X
5X
5X
40
50
60
40
60
70
90
125
150
30
45
6X
7X
70
100
80
125
175
250
5X
5X
6X
15
20
40
15
25
40
40
60
90
30
45
6X
6X
40
60
50
70
125
175
Description
100 kA
120 kA
160 kA
200 kA
3X
3X
3X
3X
26
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
3X
27

FlashGard MCCs.
Also available in 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) unit (2X)
without circuit breaker disconnect.
25
28
29
Note: Option groups are common to both Freedom and

Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
30
Option Group A
31
Description
32
NEMA Class IA 6
NEMA Class IC
33
NEMA Class IIB

NEMA Class IIC
NEMA Class IS (includes 1B wiring and 2B schematics)
6
Caution: Capacitors on the main bus of the MCC may affect

solid-state equipment. Please consult factory.
240 V Unit Space
600 V Unit Space
Inches
(mm)
Inches
(mm)
X
Space
2
3
4
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
5
7.5
10
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
15
20
22.5
12.00 (304.8)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
2X
4X
4X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8) 2X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
25
30
40
24.00 (609.6) 4X
24.00 (609.6) 4X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
50
60
75
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
4X
4X
4X
90
100
120
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
4X
6X
6X
34
Control terminal blocks and device panels not included with

NEMA 1A wiring.
Table 29.2-22. 100 kA Circuit Breaker Starter Interrupting Capacity

Starter Type
Voltage
Starters with HMCPs

Starters with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers
480
480
Starters with HMCPs

Starters with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers
7
36
600
600 7
Table 29.2-23. Control Circuit TransformersTypical Sizing 8
35
Current limiter attachments are used. Add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to all
size 3 and 4 starters.
37
38
Starter Size
1, 2 (100 VA)includes extra 50 VA
Extra 50 VA, size 1, 2
8
Refer to Table 29.2-6 for actual ratings.
39
40
41
Note: Price includes one secondary and two primary fuses.

FlashGard MCCs.
CA08104001E
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
Table 29.2-21. Wiring Class
Table 29.2-19. Power Factor Correction Capacitors 3

PF capacitors are electrolytic type and are optionally
available with external line fuses and blown fuse indicators.
Capacitors sizes must be specified by the customer.
X
Space
Option Groups for AC Combination Starters, AFDs
Power Factor Correction Capacitors
X
Space
23
Inches
(mm)
Note: Specify three-phase delta or three-phase wye.

FlashGard MCCs.
Transformers feeding an MCC mounted panelboard require a
secondary breaker or main breaker in panelboard.
kVAR 208 V Unit Space

Rating Inches
X
(mm)
Space
SPD-100
SPD-120 (recommended branch unit)
SPD-160
SPD-200
22
24
Unit Space 5
Surge Current Per Phase
250 kA SPD-250 (recommended service entrance)

300 kA SPD-300
400 kA SPD-400
Three-Phase
9
15
25
Table 29.2-20. SPD (Surge Protective Device) with Circuit Breaker

Disconnect 4
Includes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality
meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C
contact, alarm enable and disable, and circuit breaker disconnect.
42
43

May 2015
Sheet 29 042
22
23
Table 29.2-24. Control Circuit Fusing
Table 29.2-30. Miscellaneous Options
Description
Description
Control fuse and auxiliary switch

Control fuse
Blown fuse indicator
Mini ammeter and CT 4

Mini voltmeter
Mini elapsed time meter
24
Note: Required in accordance with NEC for all starter units with
control wiring external to the MCC. See NEC, General for exceptions.
25
Table 29.2-25. Motor Starter Auxiliary Contacts
26
Description
1NO or 1NC (sizes 14)
1NO or 1NC (sizes 56)
1
27
28
29
30
Maximum of eight on each contactor 1

Maximum of four on each contactor
Maximum of four per contactor on multi-contactor starters and

6.00-inch (152.4 mm) units.
Table 29.2-26. Interlock for Switch or Breaker Operator

Description
Panel elapsed time meter 5

Operations counter
Wiring diagram on door
Coil surge suppressor
CT for remote metering (requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space)
Heater packs installed
Device labels
Blank device panels
4
5
May add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to unit size. Consult factory.
May add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). Consult factory.
Table 29.2-31. Vacuum Contactors in Lieu of Air Break

Starter Type
FVNR
FVR, 2S2W, PW
RVAT, 2S1W, YD-Open
YD-Closed
1NO1NC
2NO2NC
Available sizes 46
Note: For use when control circuit is fed from an external source.
Table 29.2-32. Ground Fault ProtectionInstantaneous or Adjustable
Table 29.2-27. Internal Circuit Breaker Options
Description
Description
D64 relay (with zero sequence CT)
31
32
Alarm contact
Auxiliary 1NO1NC
Auxiliary 2NO2NC
120 V shunt trip
50 C (thermal-magnetic)
Requires additional
6.00-inch (152.4 mm)
space
Note: Option groups are common to both Freedom and

Table 29.2-33. Power FusesR, J Type
Table 29.2-28. Terminal Blocks

Description
Ampere Rating
34
7 Terminal Side mounted 2

(Will accept stripped wire or ring/spade
wire lug12 AWG bare/14 AWG ring/spade)
30
60
100
Optional
Optional
Optional
35
Front railpressure connector

Front railpull apart
Front railutility/accepts ring wire lug.
200
400
600
Optional
Optional
Optional
33
36
Additional 6.00-inch (152.4

mm) space required for
Freedom starters sizes 14
Use Burndy YAEV10-L36 for #10 AWG compression termination.
Description
37
Spade wire terminals

Ring wire terminals 3
Wiring to common CPT
39
SIS power wiresubstitution

SIS control wiresubstitution
Starter Class 2 interwiring/per wire
40
Blown power fuse indicator (set of threeone per phase)
#16 AWG (standard)

#14 AWG
Wire markers
38
Table 29.2-34. Power Factor Capacitor Options

Description
Table 29.2-29. Control Wire Options
Table 29.2-35. Current Limiter Attachment for HMCP

Description
Size 12
Size 3
Size 4
Requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space

Requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space
Freedom Starter control terminals only available with spade

wire terminals.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
29.2-17
Sheet 29 043

Option Group B
Table 29.2-40. Extra Bi-Metallic Overload RelayType C306
Devices may require extra unit space.
Description
Table 29.2-36. Timing Relays
Size 132A overload relay

Type of Relay
Mounting
Solid-state timer
PneumaticAGASTAT
Panel
Panel on or off delay
24-hour motor timer

7-day timer
Repeat cycle timer
Panel
Panel
Door or panel
23
24
Option Group D
25
Table 29.2-41. Solid-State Overload Relays

Table 29.2-37. Control Relays
Description
Number of Poles
Type
Two-pole
Four-pole
General purpose Type D7 socket relay

N300 fixed contacts
Two-pole
Four-pole
Six-pole
Eight-pole
Ten-pole
Type AR machine tool relays

N600 convertible contacts
Two-pole
Three-pole
Four-pole
Six-pole 1
Eight-pole 1
Type MD26 relays

N600 convertible contacts
27
28
29
Option Group E
Table 29.2-42. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
Description
Panel (additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space
required on size 1s and size 2s)
Option Group C
Device
Device Type
Pushbuttons
1 unit
2 unit
3 unit
10250T 56
Table 29.2-39. Monitoring Relays

Type of Relay
D60LA current sensing
voltage
transducer
Price includes 1 PT
AC current
sensors
with CTs 2
05 thru 0100A
050 thru 0300A
0300 thru 0600A
Additional
6.00-inch
(152.4 mm)
space required
Selector switches
2 position
3 position
4 position
Key operated adder
AC current transducer, 420 mA, All Ratings

self-powered with CTs 3
Phase monitoring relaythree-phase
Watt transducer, 420 mA, self-powered CTs 3
Loop-powered devicesrequires 24 Vdc power source, which is
typically provided in the PLC.
Does not require separate 24 Vdc power source. Suitable for powering
analog meters.
Pushbuttons
1 unit
2 unit
3 unit
32
33
34
E30 56
Selector switches
2 position
3 position
4 position
Key operated adder
Pilot lights
Standard transformer 6V bulb
Standard transformer LED bulb
Push to test Transformer 6V bulb
Push to test LED bulb
5
6
30
31
Pilot lights
Push to test transformer 6V bulb
26
Size 4 starters require an additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) (1X) space

when used with solid-state overloads.
Note: Option groups are common to Freedom, Freedom Arc and

Table 29.2-38. Alternators
C440 solid-state overload with ground fault protection 4

C441 Motor Insight
MP-3000 motor protector
MP-3000 RTD module
4
The six- and eight-pole units can be provided with four additional
non-convertible NO contacts.
Two-circuit alternator
Three-circuit alternator
22
Maximum two devices per starter in dual units.

Maximum of six devices without increasing compartment space.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
Sheet 29 044
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Option Group F
Options for 6.00-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Units
Control terminal blocks are 300V rated and are limited

to 12 points maximum
Standard VA control transformer only
Table 29.2-43. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
Device
Device Type
Pushbuttons
1 unit
2 unit
3 unit
E22 1
Selector switches
2 position
3 position
4 position
Key operated adder
Pilot lights
Push to test transformer 6V bulb
1
On 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) starter units, pilot devices are limited to

three E22 devices.
Option Group G
Table 29.2-44. Remote Racking System
31
Description
Wired remote racking system for FlashGard MCC units
32
Table 29.2-45. FlashGard Locking Accessory

Description
33
34
35
36
37
38
Locking accessory for FlashGard MCC
Option Group I
Optional Safety Accessories
Table 29.2-46. Automatic Insulation Tester
Description
Automatic insulation tester
Automatic insulation tester with megohm meter (mounted in unit door)
Table 29.2-47. Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision)

Description
Voltage presence indicator (mounted on unit door)
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
May 2015

Freedom
29.3-1
Sheet 29 045
General Description
Freedom
Freedom Motor Control Center
General Description
Eatons Freedom MCC has been in
production since 1994, employing
the Freedom NEMA contactor in
combination with multiple motor
overload styles and either a fused
switch or a molded-case circuit breaker
disconnect. The Freedom meets all the
above listed standards, ratings and
features.
Quick Reference Layout Guide Index

Device Space Requirements
Short-Circuit ratings for Motor Control (480 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors
or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard-Duty and Severe-Duty Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLA Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination Starters with Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard-Duty and Severe-Duty RatingsFusible. . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Sizing for Isolating Contractor and Bypass Starter . . . . .
FLA Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustable Frequency Drives Passive Filters Addition. . . . . . . . .
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives in NEMA 3R MCCs . . . .
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Thermal-Magnetic
and Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives,
Fusible Switch Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Circuit BreakersMagnum DS Air Circuit Breakers
Manually or Electrically OperatedFixed Mounted . . . . . . . . .
Manually or Electrically OperatedDrawout Mounted. . . . . . .
Digitrip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main-Tie-Main Auto Throw-Over Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freedom Main Incoming Line and Feeder
Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Table
29.3-1
Page
29.3-2
29.3-2
29.3-3
29.3-4
29.3-5
29.3-6
29.3-7
29.3-8
29.3-9
29.3-10
29.3-11
29.3-12
29.3-13
29.3-14
29.3-15
29.3-2
29.3-5
29.3-5
29.3-5
29.3-5
29.3-6
29.3-8
29.3-8
29.3-8
29.3-8
29.3-9
29.3-10
29.3-10
29.3-10
29.3-16
29.3-11
30
29.3-17
29.3-11
31
29.3-18
29.3-12
29.3-19
29.3-12
29.3-20
29.3-21
29.3-22
29.3-13
29.3-13
29.3-13
29.3-23
29.3-13
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
Sheet 29 046
22
Technical Data
Table 29.3-1. Short-Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480 V)
23
24
25
26
27
Short-Circuit
Protective Device
Combination Starter
FV and RV (kA)
Solid-State
Reduced Voltage (kA)
Adjustable
Frequency Drives (kA)
HMCP motor circuit protector (standard rating)

HMCP motor circuit protector (optional rating)
65
100
65
100
65
100
MCCB molded-case circuit breaker (standard rating)

MCCB molded-case circuit breaker (optional rating)
Fusible switch
65
100
100
65
100
65
100
100
Table 29.3-2. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Motor circuit protector ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efficiency) motors.
Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
28
240 V
HMCP/HMCPE
Frame 12
380 V
480 V
600 V
7.5
7.5
34
35
10
10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
6.00 (152.4) 4
12.00 (304.8) 5
18.00 (457.2)
1X 4
2X 5
3X
10
15
25
25
25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
6.00 (152.4) 4
12.00 (304.8) 5
18.00 (457.2)
1X 4
2X 5
3X
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
12.00 (304.8) 4
18.00 (457.2) 6
24.00 (609.6)
2X 4
3X 6
4X
40
50
75
100
100
150
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
12.00 (304.8) 7
18.00 (457.2) 67
24.00 (609.6) 7
2X
3X 6
4X
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
36.00 (914.4)
6X
25
150
100
250
400
600
HLD/LDC h
42.00 (1066.8)
6h
1200
HND
600
1200
HND
37
38
600
7.5
10
72.00 (1828.8) j
12X
Type F216
7.5
10
10
10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
18.00 (457.2) 6
24.00 (609.6)
3X 6
4X
15
25
25
25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
18.00 (457.2) 6
24.00 (609.6)
3X 6
4X
6X
25
30
50
50
50
HFD/FDC/E
24.00 (609.6) k
40
50
75
100
100
150
HJD/JDC
30.00 (762.0) k
5X
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
50
75
125
150
100
200
250
300
300
400
400
600
1200
HLD/LDC
HND
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8) h
12X
12X h
4
5
6
7
h
i
41
10X
40
300
300
7X i
60.00 (1524.0)
39
200
300
350
400
Full Voltage Reversing
36
X Space
10
30
33
Unit Size
Type F206
29
32
Freedom
Inches (mm)
Full Voltage Non-Reversing

1
31
MCCB
Frame 3
j
k
125/150
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE magnetic only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000 A at 480 V.
Optional HMCP/HMCPE combination starter units are available with 100,000 A at 480 V.
E-Frame motor circuit protection available for size 13 starters only.
Optional combination starter units with thermal-magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 or 100,000 A at 480 V.
Maximum of (three) pilot devices, (two) auxiliary contacts 100 VA CPT maximum. Standard lugs only.
12.00-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard.
Minimum 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) space needed with thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
1200 A HMCP frame available in 11X 66.00-inch (1676.4 mm).
For top entry, 8X space required.
Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.
30.00-inch (762.0 mm) space needed for thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
29.3-3
Sheet 29 047

Table 29.3-2. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (Continued)
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
240 V
HMCP
Frame 12
380 V
480 V
MCCB
Frame 23
600 V
7.5
7.5
10
Freedom
23
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
Two-Speed One Winding, Constant/Variable Torque
22
X Space
24
Type F946
10
10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 4
4X
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 4
4X
10
15
25
25
25
125
150
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
E
HJD/JDC
36.00 (914.4) 45
6X
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
36.00 (914.4)
45
6X
72.00 (1828.8) 6
12X
40
50
75
100
100
150
250
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 4
4X
24.00 (609.6) 4
4X
Two-Speed Two Winding, Constant/Variable Torque

1
7.5
10
Type F956
10
10
10
15
25
25
25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
E
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0) 4
5X
30.00 (762.0) 4
30.00 (762.0) 4
5X
5X
72.00 (1828.8) 6
12X
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
30
40
40
50
60
75
75
100
100
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer
26
27
28
7.5
125
150
25
29
30
31
Type F606
10
15
25
25
25
150
HFD/FDC
36.00 (914.4)
6X
25
30
50
50
50
150
HFD/FDC
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
30
50
75
100
100
150
HJD/JDC
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
HLD/LDC
72.00 (1828.8) g
12X
HND
72.00 (1828.8) g
12X
34
35
150
200
300
400
400
600
300
600
600
1200
Reduced Voltage Part Winding

10
10
15
15
15
150
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) h
4X
2PW
20
25
40
40
40
150
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) h
4X
3PW
40
50
75
75
75
150
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0) h
5X
4PW
60
75
60
75
125
150
100
150
125
150
150
250
400
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
36.00 (914.4) h
6X
5PW
100
150
125
150
250
250
350
300
350
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
72.00 (1828.8) g
12X
2
3
4
5
6
g
h
33
Type F706
1PW
32
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE Magnetic Only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000 A at 480 V.
E-Frame motor circuit protector available through size 3 starter only.
Add 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed disconnect.
42.00-inch (1066.8 mm) space needed with Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) space needed with thermal-magnetic
circuit breaker.
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.
For starting speed disconnect, add 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
Sheet 29 048
22
23
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
24
25
28
29
30
380 V
480 V
MCCB
Frame 23
600 V
Freedom
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open Transition 4
X Space
Type F806
2YD
20
25
40
40
150
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0)
5X
3YD
30
40
40
50
75
75
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
4YD
60
75
125
150
150
150
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
26
27
240 V
HMCP
Frame 12
40
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed Transition 4

2YD
20
25
3YD
40
50
4YD
60
5YD
100
150
2
3
4
72.00 (1828.8) 4
12X
Type F896
150
HFD/FDC
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
40
40
40
250
HFD/FDC
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
75
125
150
150
150
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
72.00 (1828.8) 4
12X
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
29.3-5
Sheet 29 049

S811+ Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on S811+ Starter Selection
Eatons S811+ solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs

when starting and a low impedance run circuit during
operation. The S811+ solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc
inputs and two relay outputs. S811+ soft start units include a
disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to

1.00 x full load amperes
1.15 x full load amperes (15% more current).
This chart is based off of a 1.15 SF motor selection
S811+ starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a
larger S811+ SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF
motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below
S811+
S811+ 208 V
230 V
380 V
460 V
575 V
Inches
Amperage Frame hp HMCP T.M. Fuse hp HMCP T.M Fuse hp
HMCP T.M. Fuse hp HMCP T.M. Fuse hp HMCP T.M. Fuse (mm)
X
Space
Standard Duty
37
66
105
65
65
110
10
50
15 100
30 150
70 30/60 10
50
125 100
20 100
225 200
30 150
70 30/60 15
125 100 30
200 200 45
50
100
150
70 30/60 20 50
150 100 40 100
150 200 60 150
70 30/60 30 50
150 100 50 100
150 200 75 150
135
180
240
110
200
200
40 150
50 250
60 250
225 200
400 400
400 400
40 150
60 250
75 250
250 200 55
350 400 75
450 400 110
150
250
400
250 200 75 150

350 400 125 250
500 400 150 400
304
360
420
500
650
720
200
290
290
75 400
100 400
125 600
600 400
700 600
900 600
100 400
125 400

600 600 132

800 600 160
200
400
600
600
600 600 200 400

800 600
1000 800 300 600
250 200 100 150

400 400 150 250
500 400 200 250
600 600 250 400
300 400
1000 800 350 600
290
290
290

200 1200

150 600
1200 1200 200 1200
250 1200
1000 800 250

1200 800 315
1200 1200
600
1200
1000 800 350 600

1200 1200 450 1200
500 1200
1000 800 450 600

1200 1200 600 1200
1200 1200
1000 800 54 (1371.6) 9X

1200 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8) 12X
850
1000
290
290
1200 1200 375

2000 1200 500
1200
2000
1200 1200 600 1200

2000 1200 700 2000
2000 1200 700 1200

2000 1200 900 2000
1200 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X

2000 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X
300 1200
350 2000
80 30/60 18 (457.2)
150 100 18 (457.2)
200 200 18 (457.2)
3X
3X
3X
250
350
450
600
800
900
3X
6X
6X
6X
9X
9X
200
400
400
600
600
600
18 (457.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
54 (1371.6)
54 (1371.6)
Severe Duty
22
42
65
65
65
110
5
10
15
70 40
125 70
200 110
5
10
20
70
35
125
70
200 125
80
115
150
110
200
200
20
30
40
225 150
300 225
350 250
25
30
50
300 175 37
350 200 55
400 300
192
240
305
200
290
290
50
60
75
400 350
500 400
700 500
60

100
500 350 90
110
800 600 132
365
420
480
290
290
290
100
125

900 700
1000 800
125

150
525
600
290
290
65
110
110
200
290
290
31
32
3X
6X
6X
33
500 400 125

600 500 150
800 600 200
500 400 150

600 450
800 600 250
400 350 36 (914.4) 6X
54 (1371.6) 9X
800 600 54 (1371.6) 9X
34
1000 800 160
200
1200 800 220
900 700 250

1200 800 300
1200 1000 350
1000 700 300

1200 800 350
1200 1000 450
900 700 72 (1828.8) 12X

1000 800 72 (1828.8) 12X
1200 1000 72 (1828.8) 12X
Starter
Size
Option Unit
Size 2
Structure
Width
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
5,6
6
7
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8) 12X
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
5, 6
6
7
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
35
36
Table 29.3-6. FLA Ratings

Ramp
Time
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
37
30 seconds
10 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
3
3
3
2
3
4
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
38
450%
500%
350%
30 seconds
10 seconds
65 seconds
4
10
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
25 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
4
4
4
Ramp Current %
of FLA
Standard Duty
Bypass Starter
65
110
110
200
290
290
30
250 150 18 (457.2)

300 250 36 (914.4)
400 300 36 (914.4)
35
80
125
29
250 150 60
300 225 100
400 300 125
60
150
150
28
300 175 50
300 250 75
100
Isolating Contactor
35 10
90 25
100 40
27
3X
3X
3X
60
150
150
26
70
40 18 (457.2)
125
80 18 (457.2)
200 125 18 (457.2)
Table 29.3-4. Option SizingDimensions in Inches (mm)

Disconnect
Type
24
15
30
50
7.5
18.5
22
Standard-duty ratings reflect the maximum starting duty that these units are designed to supply.
S811+ Width
(mm)
23
25
Table 29.3-3. Standard-Duty and Severe-Duty Ratings 1
22
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
Severe Duty
Option fits in standard unit space.
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
39
40
41
42
Table 29.3-5. Control Options

Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 34
24 Vdc Control 3
Line or Load MOV Protection 3
Pump Control Option 3
3
4
43

Option adds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 A units.
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
Sheet 29 050
22
23
24
25
All of Eatons combination starters are available with Class R

or J fuse clips for all voltages. If 100 kA SCR is required at
575 V and 600 V, fuses must be used where current limiting
options are not available in combination with breakers.
When selecting fuse switches, the fuses are not supplied by
default. Fuses may be selected as follows:
RK5: 1.25x FLC

RK1: 1.3x FLC
Class J: 1.5x FLC
Table 29.3-7. Combination Starters with Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)
26
27
NEMA
Size
208 V
29
30
32
33
35
36
39
40
41
600 V
7.5
Inches (mm)
X Space
Type F204
10
10
10
30
12.00 (304.8)
2X
25
25
25
60
12.00 (304.8)
2X
25
30
50
50
50
60/100
24.00 (609.6)
4X
40
50
75
100
100
100/200
36.00 (914.4)
6X
75
100
150
200
200
400 2
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
11X
12X
62
150
7.5
Unit Size
15
200
300
400
400
600
10
10
10
30
18.00 (457.2)
60
18.00 (457.2)
3X
100/200
30.00 (762.0)
5X
Full Voltage ReversingFusible

7.5
Type F214
7.5
3X
10
15
25
25
25
25
30
50
50
50
40
50
75
100
100
200
40.00 (1016.0)
8X
75
100
150
200
200
400
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
150
200
300
400
400
600
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Two-Speed One WindingFusible

7.5
7.5
Type F944
10
10
10
30
24.00 (609.6)
4X
10
15
25
25
25
60
24.00 (609.6)
4X
25
25
30
30
50
30
50
50
50
60
100
36.00 (914.4)
6X
40
50
75
100
60
100
100
200
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
75
100
150
200
200
400
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Two-Speed Two WindingFusible

1
7.5
7.5
Type F954
10
10
10
30
24.00 (609.6)
4X
10
15
25
25
25
60
24.00 (609.6)
4X
25
30
50
50
30
50
60
100
30.00 (762.0)
5X
40
50
75
100
60
100
100
200
60.00 (1524.6)
10X
75
100
150
200
200
400
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
37
38
480 V
10
34
380 V
Freedom
31
240 V
Switch
Rating 1
Full Voltage Non-ReversingFusible

1
28
Maximum Horsepower
Reduced Voltage AutotransformerFusible
Type F604
10
15
25
25
25
60
36.00 (914.4)
25
30
50
50
50
100
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
40
50
75
100
100
200
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
75
100
150
200
200
400
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
150
200
300
400
400
600
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
1
2
6X
Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short-circuit current.

Certain items in unit option Groups B and C may require additional space. See Page 29.2-17.
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
29.3-7
Sheet 29 051

Table 29.3-7. Combination Starters with Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
240 V
Switch
Rating 1
380 V
480 V
600 V
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
Reduced Voltage Part WindingFusible
22
Freedom
X Space
Type F704
1PW
10
10
15
15
15
60
36.00 (914.4)
6X
2PW
20
15
25
25
40
30
40
40
60
100
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
3PW
40
50
75
50
75
60
75
100
200
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
8X
8X
4PW
50
75
75
100
150
100
150
150
200
400
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
10X
5PW
100
150
100
150
200
250
250
350
300
350
400
600
72.00 (1828.8) 2
12X 2
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open TransitionFusible
Type F804
24
25
26
27
2YD
15
20
15
25
30
40
40
40
60
100
30.00 (762.0)
5X
3YD
25
40
30
50
50
75
60
75
75
100
200
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
4YD
50
60
60
75
100
150
125
150
150
200
400
72.00 (1828.8) 2
12X 2
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
72.00 (1828.8) 2
12X 2
200
250
350
350
400
500
400
500
700
350
500
700
700
400
600
800
1200
72.00 (1828.8) 3
12X 3
6YD
250
300
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed TransitionFusible
23
28
29
30
31
Type F894
2YD
15
20
15
25
30
40
40
40
60
100
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
3YD
25
40
30
50
50
75
60
75
75
100
200
66.00 (1676.4)
11X
4YD
50
60
60
75
100
150
125
150
50
200
400
72.00 (1828.8) 2
72.00 (1828.8) 2
12X 2
12X 2
33
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
72.00 (1828.8) 2
12X 2
250
300
200
250
350
350
400
500
400
500
700
350
500
700
700
400
600
800
1200
34
72.00 (1828.8) 3
12X 3
35
6YD
1
2
3

Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep section.
32
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
Sheet 29 052
22
23
S811+ Solid-State Reduced Voltage StarterFusible Switch

disconnect, a starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
24

This chart is based off of a 1.15 SF motor selection.
25
Table 29.3-8. Standard-Duty and Severe-Duty RatingsFusible
26
S811+
S811+ 208 V
230 V
380 V
460 V
575 V
Inches
Amperage Frame hp HMCP T.M. Fuse hp HMCP T.M Fuse hp
X
Space
Standard Duty
27
37
66
105
65
65
110
10
50
15 100
30 150
70 30/60 10
50
125 100
20 100
225 200
30 150
70 30/60 15
125 100 30
200 200 45
50
100
150
70 30/60 20 50
150 100 40 100
150 200 60 150
70 30/60 30 50
150 100 50 100
150 200 75 150
80 30/60 18 (457.2)
150 100 18 (457.2)
200 200 18 (457.2)
3X
3X
3X
28
135
180
240
110
200
200
40 150
50 250
60 250
225 200
400 400
400 400
40 150
60 250
75 250
250 200 55
350 400 75
450 400 110
150
250
400
250 200 75 150

350 400 125 250
500 400 150 400
250 200 100 150

400 400 150 250
500 400 200 250
250 200 18 (457.2)

350 400 36 (914.4)
450 400 36 (914.4)
3X
6X
6X
29
304
360
420
200
290
290
75 400
100 400
125 600
600 400
700 600
900 600
100 400
125 400

600 600 132

800 600 160
200
400
600
600
600 600 200 400

800 600
1000 800 300 600
600 600 250 400
300 400
1000 800 350 600
600 600 36 (914.4) 6X

800 600 54 (1371.6) 9X
900 600 54 (1371.6) 9X
30
500
650
720
290
290
290

200 1200

150 600
1200 1200 200 1200
250 1200
1000 800 250

1200 800 315
1200 1200
600
1200
1000 800 350 600

1200 1200 450 1200
500 1200
1000 800 450 600

1200 1200 600 1200
1200 1200
1000 800 54 (1371.6) 9X

1200 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8) 12X
850
1000
290
290
1200 1200 375

2000 1200 500
1200
2000
1200 1200 600 1200

2000 1200 700 2000
2000 1200 700 1200

2000 1200 900 2000
1200 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X

2000 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X
31
300 1200
350 2000
Severe Duty
32
22
42
65
65
65
110
5
10
15
70 40
125 70
200 110
5
10
20
70
35
125
70
200 125
33
80
115
150
110
200
200
20
30
40
225 150
300 225
350 250
25
30
50
300 175 37
350 200 55
400 300
34
192
240
305
200
290
290
50
60
75
400 350
500 400
700 500
60

100
500 350 90
110
800 600 132
35
365
420
480
290
290
290
100
125

900 700
1000 800
125

150
525
600
290
290
36
15
30
50
70
40 18 (457.2)
125
80 18 (457.2)
200 125 18 (457.2)
3X
3X
3X
300 175 50
300 250 75
100
250 150 60
300 225 100
400 300 125
250 150 18 (457.2)

300 250 36 (914.4)
400 300 36 (914.4)
3X
6X
6X
500 400 125

600 500 150
800 600 200
500 400 150

600 450
800 600 250
400 350 36 (914.4) 6X
54 (1371.6) 9X
800 600 54 (1371.6) 9X
1000 800 160
200
1200 800 220
900 700 250

1200 800 300
1200 1000 350
1000 700 300

1200 800 350
1200 1000 450
900 700 72 (1828.8) 12X

1000 800 72 (1828.8) 12X
1200 1000 72 (1828.8) 12X
7.5
18.5
22
38
39
40
41
42
Ramp Current %
of FLA

24 Vdc Control 1
1
35 10
90 25
100 40
60
150
150
35
80
125
72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8) 12X
37
60
150
150
Table 29.3-10. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
FlashGard
Unit Size
Inches
(mm)
Structure
Width
Inches
(mm)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
32.00 (812.8)
36.00 (914.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
Starter Option
Fused
Size
Unit Size
Switch
Inches
Type
(mm)
(Amperes)
65
110
110
30/60/100
100
200
1, 2, 3
3
4
200
290
290
400/800
600/800
800/1200
5, 6
6
7
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
Standard Duty
S811+
Width
(mm)
Ramp
Time
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
30 Seconds
10 Seconds
20 Seconds
20 Seconds
20 Seconds
20 Seconds
3
3
3
2
3
4
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
450%
500%
350%
30 seconds
10 seconds
65 seconds
4
10
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
25 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
4
4
4
Severe Duty
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
29.3-9
Sheet 29 053
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons standard units include a disconnect, an AC choke,
an output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. All plug-in
units have a built-in dynamic braking circuit through the FR5
frame size. Drive units that require door-mounted fans also
include a CPT.
CT (IH): High overload drives are capable of producing 200%

starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload
for one minute. Essentially a constant torque drive.
VT (IL): Low overload drives are capable of producing 200%
for one minute. Essentially a variable torque drive.
Table 29.3-12. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency DrivesDimensions in Inches (mm)

Nominal (VT)
hp
IL
Amperes
(CT)
Branch Protection Min
IH
HMCP T.M. K-SW Height
Amperes
Typical
25
Maximum
(X) Width
Height
(X) Width
Height
(X) Width
3X
3X
3X
3X
3X
4X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
36.0 (914.4)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
6X
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
42.0 (1066.8)
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
7X
5X 20.0 (508.0)
5X 20.0 (508.0)
5X 20.0 (508.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8) 7X 20.2 (508.0)

6X 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8) 7X 20.2 (508.0)
X6 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8) 7X 20.2 (508.0)
26
200240 V
FR4
Drawout
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.7
4.8
6.6
7.8
11.0
3.7
4.8
6.6
7.8
23
24
Note: Output reactor not included on 240 V units.
AFD Unit
Frame
22
11.0
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
25
25
30
30
30
30
30
30
30 30.0 (762.0)
60 30.0 (762.0)
60 30.0 (762.0)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
24.0 (609.6)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
27
28
FR5
Drawout
5.0
7.5
10.0
17.5
25.0
31.0
17.5
25.0
30
50
50
40
50
70
FR6
Drawout 10.0
15.0
20.0
31.0
48.0
61.0
31.0
48.0
50
100
100
60
100
125
60 42.0 (1066.8) 7X 20.2 (508.0)

100 42.0 (1066.8) 7X 20.2 (508.0)
100 42.0 (1066.8) 7X 20.2 (508.0)
54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)

54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)
54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)
FR7
Fixed
20.0
25.0
30.0
35.0
75.0
88.0
114.0
61.0
75.0
88.0
100
100
100
150
125
175
220
285
100
200
200
200
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
24.0 (609.6)
24.0 (609.6)
3X
3X
3X
3X
3X
4X
4X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
6X
6X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
7X
7X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
32
12.0
15
15
15
15
25
25
25
34
29
30
31
380500 V
FR4
Drawout
7
7
7
15
15
15
30
FR5
Drawout
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
12.0
16.0
23.0
30
30
30
50
25
35
50
60
30
30
60
60
24.0 (609.6)
24.0 (609.6)
24.0 (609.6)
24.0 (609.6)
4X
4X
4X
4X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
7X
7X
7X
7X
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
FR6
Drawout 20.0
25.0
30.0
40.0
38.0
46.0
61.0
31.0
38.0
46.0
50
50
100
100
60
80
100
125
60
60
80
100
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
7X
7X
7X
7X
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
10X
10X
10X
10X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
FR7
Fixed
40.0
50.0
60.0
75.0
72.0
87.0
105.0
61.0
72.0
87.0
100
100
100
150
125
150
175
225
100
100
100
175
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
75.0
100.0
125.0
150.0
140.0
170.0
205.0
105.0
140.0
170.0
150
150
250
400
225
300
400
500
175
200
250
350
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
32.0 (812.8)
32.0 (812.8)
32.0 (812.8)
32.0 (812.8)
500 350 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 28.0 (711.2)

600 450 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 28.0 (711.2)
700 500 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 28.0 (711.2)
72.0 (1828.8) 12X 40.0 (1016.0)

72.0 (1828.8) 12X 40.0 (1016.0)
72.0 (1828.8) 12X 40.0 (1016.0)
39
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
80.0 (2032.0)
80.0 (2032.0)
80.0 (2032.0)
80.0 (2032.0)
40
FR8
Fixed
7.6
FR9
Fixed
150.0
200.0
250.0 1
261.0
300.0
205.0
261.0
400
400
400
FR10
Fixed
250.0
300.0
350.0
400.0
385.0
460.0
520.0
300.0
385.0
460.0
400
600
600
1200
700
800
1000
1200
FR11
Fixed
400.0
500.0
550.0
650.0
730.0
590.0
650.0
730.0
1200
1200
1200
1200 1000 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 80.0 (2032.0)

1500 1000 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 80.0 (2032.0)
1600 1200 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 80.0 (2032.0)
FR12
Fixed
600.0
820.0
1200
1600 1200 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 128.0 (3251.2)
500
600
800
800
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
64.0 (1625.6)
64.0 (1625.6)
64.0 (1625.6)
64.0 (1625.6)
33
35
36
37
38
41
42
If a 250 hp 40 C rating is required, then up-size to the FR10. This FR9 sizing is only valid at 30 C ambient.
Note: FR9 and larger AFD units require a 21.00 inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure. FR11 and FR12 are non UL designs; consult factory for
specific application. In drawout, minimum does not contain an operator panel, typical contains a device panel and room for timers and relays,
maximum makes provisions for isolation contactors and bypass. In fixed, minimum contains a device panel and room for timers and relays,
maximum makes provisions for isolation contactors and bypass. Consult factory for NEMA 3R sizing.
CA08104001E
43

Freedom
May 2015
Sheet 29 054
22
Table 29.3-13. Adjustable Frequency Drives Passive Filters Addition

Hp
(Maximum)
23
SVX Drive
(Amperes)
Passive Input
(Amperes)
Table 29.3-15. Options
Height
Unit Space
(X)
1
1.5
3
2.2
3.3
5.6
6
6
6
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
5
7.5
10
7.6
12
16
8
14
21
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
15
20
25
23
31
38
27
34
44
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
30
40
50
46
61
72
52
66
83
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
8X
8X
8X
27
60
75
100
87
105
140
103
128
165
48.0 (1219.2)
60.0 (1524.0)
60.0 (1524.0)
8X
10X
10X
28
125
150
200
170
205
261
208
208
320
60.0 (1524.0)
60.0 (1524.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
10X
10X
12X
24
25
26
29
30
31
IH
Amperes
Nominal
hp IL
CB Type 3
HMCP
MCCB
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
33
34
35
1
2
36
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
12.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
7
7
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
LonWorks Communications
Can Open (Slave) Communications
DeviceNet Communications
Johnson Controls N2 Communications

PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector)
EtherNet/IP Communications
Modbus TCP Communications
Modbus (D9 Connector)
5
5
5
5
6
5
5
5
5
7
7
8
Other Options
Automatic bypass circuit
Bypass drive test switch
Seven relay 120V control with CPT
Isolated signal processor
315 PSIG interface
Unit Space (Typ./Max)
Dynamic breaking resistors

Graphics keypad
Dim.
Line fuses
57
RFI filter
Deduct to remove output filter
V1K 2000 ft (610m) Dv/Dt filter
Output contactor
Dual overloads
58
Three contactor bypass
58
(X)
380500 V
32
Encoder Expander
Interbus S Communications
Modbus Communications
PROFIBUS DP Communications
One relay
Two relays
Three relays
Table 29.3-14. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives in NEMA 3R MCCs

IL
Amperes
I/O Expander
Plug-in Control Relays
Note: Passive filters are a separate unit located next to the connected AFD. Passive filters
can reduce THD of the connected AFD to 8% or less. Passive filters are not interlocked to the
AFD compartment.
Nominal
hp IH 2
Plug-in Options
Option Boards 4
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
12.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
38.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
38.0
46.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
30
30
30
50
50
25
35
50
60
80
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
12X
46.0
30.0
61.0
40.0
100
100
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
This table is common for both Freedom and Freedom FlashGard MCC.
A separate CPT bucket is provided for all AFDs (15 hp) listed in the table.
For fusible disconnect, use typical option unit.
Note: Drive units fit into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
6
7
8
9
j
37
9
7
5
5
Up to five option boards may be selected.

Please see Tab 31 for detailed information.
All options will fit in typical and maximum
option unit.
This option will fit in all units.
One of these options will fit in 530 hp CT at
480 V frame standard units, 130 hp CT at
480 V typical and maximum option units.
All options will fit in maximum option unit.
Use with bypass option.
DB resistors are to be mounted by the
customer external to the MCC.
Not available for 240V units.
Note: Output reactor or Dv/Dt filter not

required for motor lead lengths shorter
than 100 feet (30.4 m)30 feet (9.1 m) for
2 hp and below).
Note: Maximum motor lead length is
160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below,
330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet
(121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using
a standard output reactor.
Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet
(609.6 m) can be achieved by using a
Dv/Dt filter.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
29.3-11
Sheet 29 055
CPX9000 Clean Power Drives

1500 hp at 480V
IH (CT): High overload drives are

capable of producing 200% starting
torque for 10 seconds and are rated
150% overload for one minute.
Essentially a constant torque drive.
Eatons CPX9000 Clean Power Drives

use advanced 18-pulse, clean-power
technology that significantly reduces
line harmonics at the drive input
terminals, resulting in one of the
purest sinusoidal waveforms.
22
23
IL (VT): Low overload drives are

capable of producing 200% starting
torque for 10 seconds and are rated
110% overload for one minute.
Essentially a variable torque drive.
24
25
Table 29.3-16. CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Thermal-Magnetic Breaker and Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Disconnect
Low Overload Drive 1
IL
Amperes
Nominal hp
IL
MCCB
Width
Height
Depth
(X)
27
80
100
125
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
28
52
65
77
40
50 4
60 4
100
100
150
150
175
225
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
29
124
156
180
100
125 4
150 4
96
124
156
75
100 4
125 4
150
250
400
300
400
400
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
30
240
302
361
200
250
300 5
180
240
302
150
200
250 5
600
600
600
600
600
600
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
31
414
477
515
350 5
400 5
450 5
361
414
477
300 5
350 5
400 5
600
600
1200
600
600
1200
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
32
590
500 5
515
450 5
1200
1200
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
4
5
50
60 4
75 4
HMCP
Nominal hp
IH
50
100
100
65
77
96
IH
Amperes
26
Standard Unit Space Dimensions Inches (mm) 3
20 4
25 4
30 4
25 4
30 4
40 4
CB Type 2
27
34
40
34
40
52
High Overload Drive 1
The CPX9000 drive uses the term Low Overload (IL) in place of the term Variable Torque and High Overload (IH) in place of the term
Constant Torque.
CPX9000 Drives in MCCs are available in thermal-magnetic breaker, motor circuit protector and fused disconnect configurations.
A minimum clearance of 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) should be provided at the back of CPX9000 Drive MCC section for ventilation.
Add 32.00 inches (812.8 mm) of width for bypass.
Required transformer section is 28.00 (711.2) deep. CPX and bypass is 21.00 (533.4) deep.
33
34
35
Table 29.3-17. CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Fusible Switch DisconnectDimensions in Inches (mm)
Fuse Switch
IL
Amperes
IH
Amperes
Fuse
Switch
Nominal hp
IL
Nominal hp
IH

Width
Height
Depth
(X)
36
34
40
52
25 h
30 h
40 h
27
34
40
20 h
25 h
30 h
50
60
80
60
60
100
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
37
65
77
96
50 h
60 h
75 h
52
65
77
40 h
50 h
60 h
100
100
100
100
100
100
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
38
124
156
180
100 h
125 h
150 h
96
124
156
75 h
100 h
125 h
175
200
250
200
200
400
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
39
240
302
361
200
250
300 i
180
240
302
150
200
250 i
350
450
600
600
600
600
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
40
414
477
515
350 i
400 i
450 i
361
414
477
300 i
350 i
400 i
600
600
800
600
600
1200
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
41
590
515
800
1200
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
7
h
i
500
450
The CPX9000 product uses the term Low Overload (IL) in place of the term Variable Torque and High Overload (IH) in place of the term
Constant Torque.
Required transformer section is 28.00 (711.2) deep. CPX and bypass is 21.00 (533.4) deep.
CA08104001E
42
43

Freedom
May 2015
Sheet 29 056
22
23
Table 29.3-18. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit BreakersMolded-Case Circuit BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm)
Frames reflect standard circuit breakers. Unit spacings shown include sufficient space to terminate cables on any standard
breaker lug. If cable sizes exceed those listed, add 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) space for lug adapters.
Frame Size
(Amperes)
24
25
26
Circuit Breaker
Frame
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC)
Main Unit Size
240 V
575 V
Inches (mm)
125
150
E125H
HFD
100
100
65
65
25
25
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
1X 7 or 2X
2X
4/0 (one per phase)

4/0 (one per phase)
150
225
FDC
HFD
100
100
100
65
35
25
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
4/0 (one per phase)

4/0 (one per phase)
225
J250
FDC
100
100
100
100
25
35
18.00 (457.2)
3X
18.00 (457.2)
1X 7 or 3X
4/0 (one per phase)
250
J250
JDC
100
100
65
100
25
35
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
4X
5X
18.00 (457.2)
3X
350 kcmil (one per phase)
400
HKD
KDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
30.00 (762.0)
5X
30.00 (762.0)
4X
CHKD 2
CKDC 2
100
100
65
100
35
50
30.00 (762.0)
5X
30.00 (762.0)
5X
250 kcmil (two per phase)

or 500 kcmil
(one per phase)
HLD
LDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
24.00 (609.6)
4X
30.00 (762.0)
5X
CHLD 23
CLDC 23
100
100
65
100
35
50
4X
24.00 (609.6)
4X
27
600
28
29
30
800
100
50
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
65
100
35
50
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
NGH 4
NGC 4
100
100
65
100
35
50
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
NGH-C 23
NGC-C 23
100
100
65
100
35
50
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
2000
RGH 4
RGC 3
RGH-C 2
RGC-C 2
100
100
100
100
65
100
65
100
50
65
50
65
72.00 (1828.8) 5
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
750 kcmil (six per phase)
2500
RGH
RGC
100
100
65
65
50
50
72.00 (1828.8) 56
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
1200
2
3
5
6
7
37
38
39
40
Maximum
Cable Size 1
100
100
36
X Space
100
35
Inches (mm)
NGC
32
34
Feeder Unit Size

X Space
NGH-C 2
NGC-C 2
31
33
480 V
750 kcmil (three per phase)
See circuit breaker terminal data for variations.

Digitrip 310+ LS is required and included in the price.
NEMA 1 gasketed only.
Digitrip 310+ LS is standard and included in the pricing.
The main breaker requires the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide.
Compact feeder units.
Table 29.3-19. Main Circuit BreakersMagnum DS Air Circuit Breakers Manually or Electrically Operated
Fixed MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size
Amperes
Circuit Breaker
Type

240 V
480 V
575 V
800
MDS-608
MDS-C08
65
100
65
100
65
100
1600
MDS-616
MDS-C16
65
100
65
100
65
100
2000
MDS-620
MDS-C20
65
100
65
100
65
100
Unit
Size
Enclosure
Width
Enclosure
Depth
72.00 (1828.8)
24.00 (609.6)
21.00 (533.4)
Note: A 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) filler section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom
May 2015
29.3-13
Sheet 29 057

Table 29.3-20. Main Circuit Breakers Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated
Drawout MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size
(Amperes)
Circuit Breaker
Type

240 V
480 V
575 V
800
MDS-608
MDS-C08
65
100
65
100
65
100
1600
MDS-616
MDS-C16
65
100
65
100
65
100
2000
MDS-620
MDS-C20
65
100
65
100
65
100
3200
MDS-632
MDS-C32
65
100
65
100
65
100
1
2
Enclosure
Width
Enclosure
Depth
72.00 (1828.8)
24.00 (609.6) 1
42.00 (1066.8) 2
23
24
25
26
A 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) filler section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
Structure is rear aligned.
Table 29.3-21. Digitrip Units

Type
Unit Space
Inches (mm)
RMS 3101150
Refer to Page 21.4-10

for more details.
Options
Tie breaker 3
Switch
Rating 5
Amps 6
72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
UV release-instantaneous
Shunt trip (standard on electrically operated
breakers)
Key interlock on breaker
Auxiliary switch (3A/3B)

Cell position switch
Operations counter
Auxiliary power module (to test Digitrip)

Portable lift truck
Manual close pushbutton cover
Tie breaker adds an additional 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide bus

transition section. Also two 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) filler sections will
be added to the MCC if the tie breaker is located in the center of
the MCC lineup. If the tie breaker is located between the two main
structures, the two 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) fillers are not needed.
27
Table 29.3-23. Freedom Main Incoming Line and Feeder

Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Three-pole250 V or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
Accessories
22
Unit
Size
30
60
30/30 Dual
30/60 Dual
30
60
30/30 Dual
30/60 Dual
60/60 Dual
100
200
400
60/60 Dual
100
200
400
600
800
1200 g
5
6
g
h
i
j
Fuse
Clip Size
Amps
600
800
1200
28
Unit Space
Incoming Line
Feeder
Inches (mm)
X Space Inches (mm)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
2X
18.00 (457.2)
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
3X
5X
8X
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
30.00 (762.0)
42.00 (1066.8)
2X
3X
5X
7X
54.00 (1371.8) h 9X h
48.00 (1219.2) i 8X i
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
X Space
48.00 (1219.2)
8X
48.00 (1219.2) j 8X j
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
Suitable for 100,000 A interrupting if Class RK fuses are used.

Type of SW K-SW 30800 A.
High magnetic molded-case switch.
For bottom cable entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.
For bottom entry, add 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space.
For top entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Table 29.3-22. Main-Tie-Main Auto Throw-Over Options

Option
Description
AT200
Standard PLC-based control scheme. No operator interface

(PanelMate) provided. Sequence of operations and external
controls are pre-defined and not subject to customer
modifications. Type of voltage sensing device must be
chosen. If closed-transition operation is required, a
sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
36
AT300
Same as AT200, except includes operator interface

(PanelMate). 4
AT300X
Same as AT200, except customer modifications are acceptable.

This is the proper choice for PLC-based systems with special
sequences, more than main-tie-main configurations, and/or
where special PanelMate page layouts are required.
AT300IQ
Standard Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) controller-based

control scheme for main-main configurations. Either or both
sources may be generators. Includes manual-auto operation,
and generator control switch. If closed-transition operation is
required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
Operator interface page layouts are pre-defined and not subject to

customer modifications.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

May 2015
Sheet 29 058
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
May 2015

Freedom ARC
29.4-1
Sheet 29 059
General Description

Short-Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLA Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded-Case Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table
29.4-1
Page
29.4-2
29.4-2
29.4-3
29.4-4
29.4-5
29.4-6
29.4-7
29.4-8
29.4-9
29.4-2
29.4-5
29.4-5
29.4-5
29.4-5
29.4-6
29.4-7
29.4-7
29.4-10
29.4-8
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
General Description
29

the first MCC to be tested to a North
American guideline specifically written
for low voltage MCCs, unlike C37.20.7
that is a guideline for testing metalenclosed switchgear up to 38 kV.
tested in accordance with CSA C22.2
No. 0.22-11 titled Evaluation methods
for arc resistant ratings of enclosed
electrical equipment.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom ARC
May 2015
Sheet 29 060
22
Technical Data
23
24
25
26
27
Short-Circuit
Protective Device
Combination Starter
FV and RV (kA)
Solid-State
Adjustable

65
100
65
100
65
100

Fusible switch
65
100
100
65
100
65
100
100
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
28
240 V
HMCP/HMCPE
Frame 12
380 V
480 V
600 V
7.5
7.5
10
10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
6.00 (152.4) 4
12.00 (304.8) 5
18.00 (457.2)
1X 4
2X 5
3X
10
15
25
25
25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
6.00 (152.4) 4
12.00 (304.8) 5
18.00 (457.2)
1X 4
2X 5
3X
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
12.00 (304.8) 4
18.00 (457.2) 6
24.00 (609.6)
2X 4
3X 6
4X
40
50
75
100
100
150
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
12.00 (304.8) 7
18.00 (457.2) 67
24.00 (609.6) 7
2X
3X 6
4X
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
36.00 (914.4)
6X
E
HFD/FDC
18.00 (457.2) 6
24.00 (609.6)
3X 6
4X
E
HFD/FDC
18.00 (457.2) 6
24.00 (609.6)
3X 6
4X
6X
34
35
36
7.5
10
10
10
25
25
125
150
10
15
25
25
30
50
50
50
HFD/FDC/E
24.00 (609.6) 8
40
50
75
100
100
150
HJD/JDC
30.00 (762.0) 8
5X
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
50
75
3
4
5
6
38
7.5
Type F216
125
150
37
X Space
10
30
33
Unit Size
Type F206
29
32
Freedom ARC
Inches (mm)

1
31
MCCB
Frame 3
7
8
125/150
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE magnetic only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000 A at 480 V. Optional
HMCP/HMCPE combination starter units are available with 100,000 A at 480 V.
Maximum of (three) pilot devices, (two) auxiliary contacts 100 VA CPT maximum. Standard lugs only.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom ARC
May 2015
29.4-3
Sheet 29 061

NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
240 V
HMCP
Frame 12
380 V
480 V
MCCB
Frame 23
600 V
7.5
7.5
10
Freedom ARC
23
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
22
X Space
24
Type F946
10
10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 4
4X
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 4
4X
10
15
25
25
25
125
150
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
E
HJD/JDC
36.00 (914.4) 45
6X
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
36.00 (914.4)
45
6X
72.00 (1828.8) 6
12X
40
50
75
100
100
150
250
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 4
4X

1
7.5
10
Type F956
10
10
10
15
25
25
25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 4
4X
E
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0) 4
5X
30.00 (762.0) 4
30.00 (762.0) 4
5X
5X
72.00 (1828.8) 6
12X
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
30
40
40
50
60
75
75
100
100
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer
26
27
28
7.5
125
150
25
29
30
31
Type F606
10
15
25
25
25
150
HFD/FDC
36.00 (914.4)
6X
25
30
50
50
50
150
HFD/FDC
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
30
50
75
100
100
150
HJD/JDC
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Reduced Voltage Part Winding
Type F706
1PW
10
10
15
15
15
150
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 8
4X
2PW
20
25
40
40
40
150
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 8
4X
32
33
34
3PW
40
50
75
75
75
150
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0) 8
5X
60
75
125
150
100
150
125
150
150
250
400
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
35
4PW
60
75
36.00 (914.4) 8
6X
125
150
250
250
350
300
350
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
36
5PW
100
150
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
72.00 (1828.8)
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE Magnetic Only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,00 0A at 480 V. Optional
circuit breaker.
12X
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom ARC
May 2015
Sheet 29 062
22
23
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
24
25
28
29
30
380 V
480 V
MCCB
Frame 23
600 V
Freedom ARC
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
X Space
Type F806
2YD
20
25
40
40
150
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0)
5X
3YD
30
40
40
50
75
75
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
4YD
60
75
125
150
150
150
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
26
27
240 V
HMCP
Frame 12
40

2YD
20
25
3YD
40
50
4YD
60
5YD
100
150
2
3
4
72.00 (1828.8) 4
12X
Type F896
150
HFD/FDC
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
40
40
40
250
HFD/FDC
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
75
125
150
150
150
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
72.00 (1828.8) 4
12X
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE magnetic only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000 A at 480 V. Optional
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom ARC
May 2015
29.4-5
Sheet 29 063



1.15 x full load amperes (15% more current). This
chart is based off of a 1.15 SF motor selection
S811+
Frame
37
66
105
135
180
240
304
208 V
230 V
380 V
460 V
575 V
hp
HMCP
T.M.
hp
HMCP
T.M.
hp
HMCP
T.M.
hp
HMCP
T.M.
hp
HMCP
T.M.
65
65
110
110
200
200
200
10
15
30
40
50
60
75
50
100
150
150
250
250
400
70
125
225
225
400
400
600
10
20
30
40
60
75
100
50
100
150
150
250
250
400
70
125
200
250
350
450
600
15
100
150
150
250
110
132
50
50
75
100
150
200
250
70
150
150
250
350
500
600
20
40
60
75
125
150
200
50
100
150
150
250
400
400
70
150
150
250
400
500
600
30
50
75
100
150
200
250
50
100
150
150
250
250
400
80
150
200
250
350
400
600
65
65
110
110
200
200
200
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
70
125
200
225
300
350
400
5
10
20
25
30
50
60
70
125
200
300
350
400
500
7.5
18.5
22
37
55
90
60
150
150
300
300
500
10
25
40
50
75
100
125
60
150
150
250
300
400
500
15
30
50
60
100
125
150
70
125
200
250
300
400
400
Inches
(mm)
X Space
18.00 (457.2)
3X
18.00 (457.2)
3X
36.00 (914.4)
6X
18.00 (457.2)
3X
18.00 (457.2)
3X
36.00 (914.4)
6X
S811+
Width
(mm)
Disconnect
Type
Starter
Size
Option Unit
Size 2
Structure
Width
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
5,6
6
7
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
72.00 (1828.8) 3
72.00 (1828.8) 3
72.00 (1828.8) 3
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
5, 6
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
72.00 (1828.8) 3
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
Isolating Contactor
65
110
110
200
290
290
Bypass Starter
65
110
110
200
3
27
28
29
30
24
26
Severe Duty
22
42
65
80
115
150
192
23
25

S811+
Amperage
22

Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract.
31

24 Vdc Control 4
4
5
32


Ramp Current %
of FLA
Ramp
Time
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
30 seconds
10 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
3
3
3
2
3
4
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
450%
500%
350%
30 seconds
10 seconds
65 seconds
4
10
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
25 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
4
4
4
Standard Duty
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
Severe Duty
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom ARC
May 2015
Sheet 29 064
22
23
24


include a CPT.

for one minute.Essentially a variable torque drive.
Table 29.4-7. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives Dimensions in Inches (mm)
25
AFD
Unit
Frame
26
200240 V
FR4
Drawout
27
28
(CT)
Branch
Minimum
Nominal (VT)
IH
Protection
hp
IL
Amperes Amperes HMCP T.M. Height
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.7
4.8
6.6
7.8
11.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
3.7
4.8
6.6
7.8
Typical
Maximum
(X) Width
Height
(X) Width
Height
(X) Width
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
36.0 (914.4)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
6X
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
42.0 (1066.8)
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
7X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
6X 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8) 7X

6X 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8) 7X
6X 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8) 7X
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
11.0
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
25
25
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
24.0 (609.6)
3X
3X
3X
3X
3X
4X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
17.5
25.0
31.0
17.5
25.0
30
50
50
40 30.0 (762.0)
50 30.0 (762.0)
70 30.0 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
20.0 (508.0) 36.0 (914.4)

20.0 (508.0) 36.0 (914.4)
20.0 (508.0) 36.0 (914.4)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
FR5
Drawout
29
FR6
Drawout
30
10.0
15.0
20.0
31.0
48.0
61.0
31.0
48.0
50
100
100
60 42.0 (1066.8) 7X
100 42.0 (1066.8) 7X
125 42.0 (1066.8) 7X
20.2 (508.0) 54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0) 54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0) 54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)
FR7
Fixed
20.0
25.0
30.0
35.0
75.0
88.0
114.0
61.0
75.0
88.0
100
100
100
150
125
175
220
285
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
12.0
7
7
7
15
15
15
30
15
15
15
15
25
25
25
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
24.0 (609.6)
24.0 (609.6)
3X
3X
3X
3X
3X
4X
4X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
6X
6X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
7X
7X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
31
380500 V
32
FR4
Drawout
33
34
35
FR5
Drawout
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
12.0
16.0
23.0
30
30
30
50
25
35
50
60
24.0 (609.6)
24.0 (609.6)
24.0 (609.6)
24.0 (609.6)
4X
4X
4X
4X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
7X
7X
7X
7X
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
FR6
Drawout
20.0
25.0
30.0
40.0
38.0
46.0
61.0
31.0
38.0
46.0
50
50
100
100
60
80
100
125
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
7X
7X
7X
7X
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
10X
10X
10X
10X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
FR7
Fixed
40.0
50.0
60.0
75.0
72.0
87.0
105.0
61.0
72.0
87.0
100
100
100
150
125
150
175
225
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
FR8
Fixed
75.0
100.0
125.0
150.0
140.0
170.0
205.0
105.0
140.0
170.0
150
150
250
400
225
300
400
500
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
36
37
38
39
40
7.6
Note: In drawout, minimum does not contain an operator panel, typical contains a device panel and room for timers and relays,
maximum makes provisions for isolation contactors and bypass. In fixed, minimum contains a device panel and room for timers and
relays, maximum makes provisions for isolation contactors and bypass.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom ARC
May 2015
29.4-7
Sheet 29 065

Hp
(Maximum)
SVX Drive
(Amperes)
Passive Input
(Amperes)
Height

Unit Space (X)
Option Boards
1
1.5
3
2.2
3.3
5.6
6
6
6
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
5
7.5
10
7.6
12
16
8
14
21
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
15
20
25
23
31
38
27
34
44
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
30
40
50
46
61
72
52
66
83
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
8X
8X
8X
60
75
100
87
105
140
103
128
165
48.0 (1219.2)
60.0 (1524.0)
60.0 (1524.0)
8X
10X
10X
125
150
170
205
208
208
60.0 (1524.0)
60.0 (1524.0)
10X
10X
Note: Passive filters are a separate unit located next to the connected AFD.
Passive filters can reduce THD of the connected AFD to 8% or less.
22
Plug-in Options
1
I/O Expander
Encoder Expander

2
2
2
2
3
2
2
24
25
26
2
2
27

One relay
Two relays
Three relays
23
4
4
5
28
Other Options
315 PSIG interface

Graphics keypad
Line fuses
24
RFI filter
V1K 2000 ft (610 m) Dv/Dt filter
Output contactor
Dual overloads
25
25
3
4
5
6
g
29
4
2
2
30

option unit.
Not available for 240 V units.

2 hp and below).
Dv/Dt filter.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom ARC
May 2015
Sheet 29 066
22
23
Frame Size
(Amperes)
Circuit Breaker
Frame
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Main Incoming Size
Feeder Unit Size
240 V
480 V
Inches (mm)
575 V
Inches (mm)
X Space
X Space
Maximum
Cable Size 1
125
E125H
65
65
25
12.00 (3048.8)
2X
12.00 (304.8)
1X 2 or 2X
4/0 (one per phase)
150
HFD
65
65
25
18.00 (457.2)
3X
12.00 (304.8)
2X
4/0 (one per phase)
225
HFD
65
65
25
18.00 (457.2)
3X
18.00 (457.2)
3X
4/0 (one per phase)
225
J250
65
65
25
24.00 (609.6)
4X
18.00 (457.2)
1X 2 or 3X
4/0 (one per phase)
250
J250
65
65
65
65
25
35
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
18.00 (457.2)
3X
26
400
HKD
65
65
35
30.00 (762.0)
5X
30.00 (762.0)
4X

or 500 kcmil
(one per phase)
27
600
HLD
65
65
35
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
30.00 (762.0)
5X
800
NGH 3
65
65
50
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
42.00 (1066.8)
12X
1200
NGH 3
65
65
35
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
42.00 (1066.8)
12X
2000
RGH 3
65
65
50
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8) 4
12X
2500
RGH 3
65
65
50
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)45 12X
24
25
28
29
1
2
3
30
4
5

24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
May 2015

Freedom FlashGard
29.5-1
Sheet 29 067
General Description
Freedom FlashGard
Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Center
General Description
Eatons Freedom FlashGard MCCs are
an industry first in addressing the
dangers associated with an arc flash
event by minimizing the risk of arc
flash exposure. Freedom FlashGard
offers features to help prevent injury
from electric shock, arc-flash burn and
arc-blast impacts, and is the first arc
preventative MCC.

Short-Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLA Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination Starters with Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard-Duty and Severe-Duty RatingsFusible. . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter . . . . . .
FLA Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freedom SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . .
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives in NEMA 3R MCCs . . . .
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Thermal-Magnetic
Breaker and Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Disconnect . . . . . .
CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives,
Fusible Switch Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually or Electrically OperatedFixed Mounted . . . . . . . . .
Main Circuit BreakersMagnum DS Air Circuit Breakers,
Manually or Electrically OperatedDrawout Mounted. . . . . . .
Digitrip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main-Tie-Main Auto Throw-Over Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freedom FlashGard Main Incoming Line and
Feeder Fusible Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Table
29.5-1
Page
29.5-2
29.5-2
29.5-3
29.5-4
29.5-5
29.5-6
29.5-7
29.5-8
29.5-9
29.5-10
29.5-11
29.5-12
29.5-13
29.5-14
29.5-15
29.5-2
29.5-5
29.5-5
29.5-5
29.5-5
29.5-6
29.5-8
29.5-8
29.5-8
29.5-8
29.5-9
29.5-10
29.5-10
29.5-10
29.5-16
29.5-11
30
29.5-17
29.5-11
31
29.5-18
29.5-12
29.5-19
29.5-12
29.5-20
29.5-21
29.5-22
29.5-13
29.5-13
29.5-13
29.5-23
29.5-13
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
Sheet 29 068
23
The FlashGard motor control center uses a patented

technology for arc flash prevention called the RotoTract,
which allows the user to retract the stabs from the bus from
behind a deadfront. The RotoTract is described more in
section 29.1-8 under the Freedom FlashGard Stab Assembly
24
Technical Data
22
heading. The RotoTract is a movable stab that can be

installed on any MCC unit 20.00 inches wide and less than
400 A of ampacity and is a drawout unit. Fixed units do not
have the RotoTract nor do units wider than 20.00 inches.
25
Short-Circuit
Protective Device
Combination Starter
FV and RV (kA)
Solid-State
Adjustable
26

65
100
65
100
65
100

Fusible switch
65
100
100
65
100
65
100
100
27
28
29
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
30
32
33
34
35
7.5
37
38
10
10
10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
12.00 (304.8) 4
18.00 (457.2)
2X 4
3X
25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
12.00 (304.8) 4
18.00 (457.2)
2X 4
3X
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
18.00 (457.2) 5
24.00 (609.6)
3X 5
4X
40
50
75
100
100
150
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
24.00 (609.6) 6
30.00 (762.0) 7
4X 68
5X i
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
6X
7X
25
150
100
250
48.00 (1219.2)
8X
300
400
HLD/LDC j
200
300
350
400
600
67
1200
HND
72.00 (1828.8) l
12X
77
300
600
600
1200
HND
72.00 (1828.8) l
12X

7.5
Type F216
7.5
10
10
10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 5
24.00 (609.6)
4X 5
4X
15
25
25
25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6) 5
24.00 (609.6)
4X 5
4X
10
25
30
50
50
50
HFD/FDC/E
24.00 (609.6) m
4X
40
50
75
100
100
150
HJD/JDC
36.00 (914.4) m
6X 8n
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
66.00 (1676.4)
11X
125
150
100
200
250
300
300
400
400
600
1200
HLD/LDC
HND
72.00 (1828.8) l
72.00 (1828.8) o
12X
12X o
4
5
7
8
i
j
k
l
43
7.5
25
42
X Space
Type F206
25
41
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
15
40
600 V
10
67
39
480 V
Freedom FlashGard
36
380 V
MCCB
Frame 3

1
31
240 V
HMCP/HMCPE
Frame 12
m
n
o
125/150
Minimum 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) space needed with thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
1X additional space required with solid-state overloads.
1X additional space with advanced solid-state overload.
7X with solid-state overloads.
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
29.5-3
Sheet 29 069

NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
240 V
HMCP
Frame 12
380 V
480 V
MCCB
Frame 23
600 V
7.5
7.5
10
Freedom FlashGard
23
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
22
X Space
24
Type F946
10
10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
24 (609.6) 4
4X
4X
E
HFD/FDC
24 (609.6) 4
30 (762.0)
4X
5X
25
36 (914.4) 45
6X
26
10
15
25
25
25
125
150
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
E
HJD/JDC
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
42 (1066.8)
72 (1828.8) 7
40
50
75
100
100
150
250
56
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6)
4X

1
7.5
10
45
7X
12X
Type F956
28
7.5
10
10
10
125
150
15
25
25
25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6)
4X
E
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0)
5X
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8) 8
7X 9
7X 9
3
25
30
50
50
50
125
150
30
40
40
50
60
75
75
100
100
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
56
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer 6
72.00 (1828.8) 7
27
12X
29
30
31
Type F606
10
15
25
25
25
150
HFD/FDC
36.00 (914.4)
7X
25
30
50
50
50
150
HFD/FDC
48.00 (1219.2)
9X
30
50
75
100
100
150
HJD/JDC
54.00 (1371.6)
10X
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
HLD/LDC
72.00 (1828.8) j
12X
HND
72.00 (1828.8) j
12X
34
35
150
200
300
400
400
600
300
600
600
1200
Reduced Voltage Part Winding 6

10
10
15
15
15
150
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6)
5X
2PW
20
25
40
40
40
150
HFD/FDC
24.00 (609.6)
5X
3PW
40
50
75
75
75
150
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0)
6X
4PW
60
75
60
75
125
150
100
150
125
150
150
250
400
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
36.00 (914.4) k
7X
5PW
100
150
125
150
250
250
350
300
350
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
72.00 (1828.8) j
12X
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
j
k
33
Type F706
1PW
32
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE Magnetic Only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000 A at 480 V.
circuit breaker.
Fixed assemblies not available with RotoTract.
1X additional space required with standard SSOL and 2X additional space required with advanced SSOL.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
Sheet 29 070
22
23
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
24
25
28
29
30
480 V
600 V
Freedom FlashGard
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
X Space
Type F806
2YD
20
25
40
40
150
HFD/FDC
30.00 (762.0)
6X
3YD
30
40
40
50
75
75
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
42.00 (1066.8)
8X
4YD
60
75
125
150
150
150
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
48.00 (1219.2)
9X
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
40

2YD
20
25
3YD
40
50
4YD
60
5YD
100
150
2
3
4
31
380 V
MCCB
Frame 23
26
27
240 V
HMCP
Frame 12
72.00 (1828.8) 5
12X
Type F896
150
HFD/FDC
42.00 (1066.8)
8X
40
40
40
250
HFD/FDC
54.00 (1371.6)
10X
75
125
150
150
150
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
60.00 (1524.0)
11X
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC
72.00 (1828.8) 5
12X
Fixed assemblies not available with RotoTract.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
29.5-5
Sheet 29 071


22

23
24
25

S811+
S811+ 208 V
230 V
Amperage Frame hp HMCP T.M. Fuse hp HMCP T.M
380 V
Fuse hp
460 V
575 V
Inches
X
Space
Standard Duty
37
66
105
65
65
110
10
50
15 100
30 150
70 30/60 10
50
125 100 20 100
225 200 30 150
70 30/60 15
125 100 30
200 200 45
50
100
150
70 30/60 20 50
150 100 40 100
150 200 60 150
70 30/60 30 50
150 100 50 100
150 200 75 150
80 30/60 18 (457.2)
150 100 18 (457.2)
200 200 24 (609.6)
135
180
240
110
200
200
40 150
50 250
60 250
225
400
400
200
400
400
250
350
450
200 55
400 75
400 110
150
250
400
250
350
500
250
400
500
200 100 150

400 150 250
400 200 250
304
360
420
200
290
290
75 400
100 400
125 600
600
700
900
400 100 400

600 125 400
600
600 600 132

800 600 160
200
400
600
600
600 600 200 400

800 600
1000 800 300 600
600 600 250 400
300 400
1000 800 350 600
500
650
720
290
290
290

200 1200

150 600
1200 1200 200 1200
250 1200
1000 800 250

1200 800 315
1200 1200
600
1200
1000 800 350 600

1200 1200 450 1200
500 1200
850
1000
290
290
1200 1200 375

2000 1200 500
1200
2000
1200 1200 600 1200

2000 1200 700 2000
40 150
60 250
75 250
300 1200
350 2000
200 75 1 50
400 125 250
400 150 400
3X
3X
4X
27
250
350
450
200 24 (609.6) 4X
400 42 (1066.8) 7X
400 42 (1066.8) 7X
28
600
800
900
600 42 (1066.8) 7X
600 54 (1371.6) 9X
600 54 (1371.6) 9X
29
1000 800 450 600

1200 1200 600 1200
1200 1200
1000 800 54 (1371.6) 9X

1200 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8) 12X
30
2000 1200 700 1200

2000 1200 900 2000
1200 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X

2000 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X
Severe Duty
22
42
65
65
65
110
5
10
15
70
125
200
40
70
110
5
10
20
70
125
200
35
70
125
80
115
150
110
200
200
20
30
40
225
300
350
150
225
250
25
30
50
300
350
400
175 37
200 55
300
192
240
305
200
290
290
50
60
75
400
500
700
350 60
400 ---
500 100
500 350 90
110
800 600 132
365
420
480
290
290
290
100
125
---
900 700 125

1000 800
150
1000 800 160
200
1200 800 220
525
600
290
290
7.5
18.5
22
S811+
Width
(mm)
Disconnect
Type
Starter
Size
Option Unit
Size 2
Structure
Width
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
5,6
6
7
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
72.00 (1828.8) 3
72.00 (1828.8) 3
72.00 (1828.8) 3
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
Isolating Contactor
65
110
110
200
290
290
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
Bypass Starter
65
110
110
200
290
290
3
35
90
100
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
5, 6
6
7

CA08104001E
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
72.00 (1828.8) 3
72.00 (1828.8) 3
72.00 (1828.8) 3
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
31
10
25
40
60
150
150
35
80
125
15
30
50
70
125
200
40 18 (457.2)
80 18 (457.2)
125 24 (609.6)
3X
3X
4X
32
300 175 50
300 250 75
100
250
300
400
150 60
225 100
300 125
250
300
400
150 24 (609.6) 4X
250 42 (1066.8) 7X
300 42 (1066.8) 7X
33
500
600
800
400 150
450 ---
600 250
400 350 42 (1066.8) 7X
--54 (1371.6) 9X
800 600 54 (1371.6) 9X
34
900 700 250

1200 800 300
1200 1000 350
1000 700 300

1200 800 350
1200 1000 450
900 700 72 (1828.8) 12X

1000 800 72 (1828.8) 12X
1200 1000 72 (1828.8) 12X
35
500
600
800
400 125
500 150
600 200
72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8) 12X
60
150
150
26
37

24 Vdc Control 4
4
5

Ramp
Time
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
30 seconds
10 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
3
3
3
2
3
4
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
450%
500%
350%
30 seconds
10 seconds
65 seconds
4
10
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
25 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
4
4
4
Standard Duty
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
38
39

Ramp Current %
of FLA
36
40
41
42
Severe Duty
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
43

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
Sheet 29 072
22
23
24
25
All of Eatons combination starters are available with Class R

or J fuse clips for all voltages. If 100 kA SCR is required at
575 V and 600 V, fuses must be used where current limiting
options are not available in combination with breakers.
When selecting fuse switches, the fuses are not supplied by
default. Fuses may be selected as follows:
RK5: 1.25x FLC

RK1: 1.3x FLC
Class J: 1.5x FLC
Table 29.5-7. Combination Starters with Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)
26
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
27
29
30
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
7.5
X Space
10
10
30
18.00 (457.2)
25
25
25
60
18.00 (457.2)
3X
25
30
50
50
50
60/100
24.00 (609.6)
4X
40
50
75
100
100
100/200
36.00 (914.4)
6X 2
75
64
150
100
200
150
200
200
400
7.5
3X
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
66.00 (1676.4) 5
72.00 (1828.8) 6
11X
12X
300
400
400
600
10
10
10
30
24.00 (609.6)
60
24.00 (609.6)
4X
100/200
30.00 (762.0)
5X
Full Voltage ReversingFusible
Type F214
7.5
4X
10
15
25
25
25
25
30
50
50
50
40
50
75
100
100
200
54.00 (1371.6)
54
75
100
150
200
200
400
72.00 (1828.8) 7
12X
64
150
200
300
400
400
600
72.00 (1828.8) 7
12X
Two-Speed One WindingFusible

1
7.5
7.5
9X
Type F944
10
10
10
30
24.00 (609.6)
4X
10
15
25
25
25
60
30.00 (762.0)
5X
25
25
30
30
50
30
50
50
50
60
100
36.00 (914.4)
6X
40
50
75
100
60
100
100
200
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
75
100
150
200
200
400
72.00 (1828.8) 7
12X
Two-Speed Two WindingFusible

1
7.5
10
10
10
30
24.00 (609.6)
4X
10
15
25
25
25
60
30.00 (762.0)
5X
25
30
50
50
30
50
60
100
36.00 (914.4)
6X
40
50
75
100
60
100
100
200
54.00 (1371.6) 8
10X
75
100
150
200
200
400
72.00 (1828.8) 7
12X
54
7.5
Type F954
Reduced Voltage AutotransformerFusible 4
Type F604
10
15
25
25
25
60
36.00 (914.4)
7X
25
30
50
50
50
100
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
40
50
75
100
100
200
72.00 (1828.8) i
12X
75
100
150
200
200
400
72.00 (1828.8) 7
12X
150
200
300
400
400
600
72.00 (1828.8) j
12X
3
4
5
6
43
Inches (mm)
Type F204
10
7.5
Unit Size
15
42
600 V
10
54
36
480 V
Freedom FlashGard
31
380 V
Full Voltage Non-ReversingFusible

1
28
240 V
Switch
Rating 1
7
8
i
j

7X (42.00-inch [1066.8 mm]) unit size with solid-state overloads.
Certain items in unit option Groups B and C may require additional space. See Page 29.3-8.
For bottom entry of motor cables.
For top entry of motor cables.
Add 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) space for low speed fuses.
Bottom 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) space in rear is unusable.
Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
29.5-7
Sheet 29 073

Table 29.5-7. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches (Continued)
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
208 V
240 V
Switch
Rating 1
380 V
480 V
600 V
Unit Size
Inches (mm)
Reduced Voltage Part WindingFusible
22
Freedom FlashGard
X Space
Type F704
1PW
10
10
15
15
15
60
24.00 (609.6)
5X
2PW
20
15
25
25
40
30
40
40
60
100
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
5X
5X
3PW
40
50
75
50
75
60
75
100
200
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
9X
9X
4PW 2
50
75
75
100
150
100
150
150
200
400
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
10X
10X
5PW 2
100
150
100
150
200
250
250
350
300
350
400
600
72.00 (1828.8) 3
12X 3
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open TransitionFusible
Type F804
24
25
26
27
2YD
15
20
15
25
30
40
40
40
60
100
36.00 (914.4)
6X
3YD
25
40
30
50
50
75
60
75
75
100
200
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
4YD 2
50
60
60
75
100
150
125
150
150
200
400
72.00 (1828.8) 3
12X 3
5YD 2
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
72.00 (1828.8) 3
12X 3
200
250
350
350
400
500
400
500
700
350
500
700
700
400
600
800
1200
72.00 (1828.8) 4
12X 4
6YD 2
250
300
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed TransitionFusible 2
23
28
29
30
31
Type F894
2YD
15
20
15
25
30
40
40
40
60
100
48.00 (1219.2)
8X
3YD
25
40
30
50
50
75
60
75
75
100
200
66.00 (1676.4)
12X
4YD
50
60
60
75
100
150
125
150
50
200
400
72.00 (1828.8) 3
72.00 (1828.8) 3
12X 3
12X 3
33
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
72.00 (1828.8) 3
12X 3
250
300
200
250
350
350
400
500
400
500
700
350
500
700
700
400
600
800
1200
34
72.00 (1828.8) 4
12X 4
35
6YD
1
2
3
4

Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep section.
32
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
Sheet 29 074
22
23
S811+ Solid-State Reduced Voltage StarterFusible Switch

disconnect, a starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
24
25
Table 29.5-8. Standard-Duty and Severe-Duty RatingsFusible 1
26
S811+
S811+ 208 V
230 V
Amperage Frame hp HMCP T.M. Fuse hp HMCP T.M
380 V
Fuse hp

460 V
575 V
Inches
X
Space
Standard Duty
27
37
66
105
65
65
110
10
50
15 100
30 150
70 30/60 10
50
125 100 20 100
225 200 30 150
70 30/60 15
125 100 30
200 200 45
50
100
150
70 30/60 20 50
150 100 40 100
150 200 60 150
70 30/60 30 50
150 100 50 100
150 200 75 150
80 30/60 18 (457.2)
150 100 18 (457.2)
200 200 24 (609.6)
28
135
180
240
110
200
200
40 150
50 250
60 250
225
400
400
200
400
400
250
350
450
200 55
400 75
400 110
150
250
400
250
350
500
250
400
500
200 100 150

400 150 250
400 200 250
250
350
450
200 24 (609.6) 4X
400 42 (1066.8) 7X
400 42 (1066.8) 7X
29
304 2
360 2
420 2
200
290
290
75 400
100 400
125 600
600
700
900
400 100 400

600 125 400
600
600 600 132

800 600 160
200
400
600
600
600 600 200 400

800 600
1000 800 300 600
600 600 250 400
300 400
1000 800 350 600
600
800
900
600 42 (1066.8) 7X
600 54 (1371.6) 9X
600 54 (1371.6) 9X
30
500 2
650 2
720 2
290
290
290

200 1200

150 600
1200 1200 200 1200
250 1200
1000 800 250

1200 800 315
1200 1200
600
1200
1000 800 350 600

1200 1200 450 1200
500 1200
1000 800 450 600

1200 1200 600 1200
1200 1200
1000 800 54 (1371.6) 9X

1200 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8) 12X
850 2
1000 2
290
290
1200 1200 375

2000 1200 500
1200
2000
1200 1200 600 1200

2000 1200 700 2000
2000 1200 700 1200

2000 1200 900 2000
1200 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X

2000 1200 72 (1828.8) 12X
31
40 150
60 250
75 250
300 1200
350 2000
Severe Duty
32
22
42
65
65
65
110
5
10
15
70
125
200
40
70
110
5
10
20
70
125
200
35
70
125
33
80
115
150
110
200
200
20
30
40
225
300
350
150
225
250
25
30
50
300
350
400
175 37
200 55
300
34
192 2
240 2
305 2
200
290
290
50
60
75
400
500
700
350 60
400 ---
500 100
500 350 90
110
800 600 132
35
365 2
420 2
480 2
290
290
290
100
125
---
900 700 125

1000 800
150
1000 800 160
200
1200 800 220
525 2
600 2
290
290
36
1
2
37
38
7.5
18.5
22
42
43
35
80
125
15
30
50
70
125
200
40 18 (457.2)
80 18 (457.2)
125 24 (609.6)
300 175 50
300 250 75
100
250
300
400
150 60
225 100
300 125
250
300
400
150 24 (609.6) 4X
250 42 (1066.8) 7X
300 42 (1066.8) 7X
500
600
800
400 150
450 ---
600 250
400 350 42 (1066.8) 7X
--54 (1371.6) 9X
800 600 54 (1371.6) 9X
900 700 250

1200 800 300
1200 1000 350
1000 700 300

1200 800 350
1200 1000 450
900 700 72 (1828.8) 12X

1000 800 72 (1828.8) 12X
1200 1000 72 (1828.8) 12X
400 125
500 150
600 200
3X
3X
4X
72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8) 12X
FlashGard
Unit Size
Inches
(mm)
Structure
Width
Inches
(mm)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
32.00 (812.8)
36.00 (914.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
Starter Option
Fused
Size
Unit Size
Switch
Inches
Type
(mm)
(Amperes)
65
110
110
30/60/100
100
200
1, 2, 3
3
4
200 4
290 4
290 4
400/800
600/800
800/1200
5, 6
6
7
Ramp
Time
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
30 Seconds
10 Seconds
20 Seconds
20 Seconds
20 Seconds
20 Seconds
3
3
3
2
3
4
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
450%
500%
350%
30 seconds
10 seconds
65 seconds
4
10
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
25 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
4
4
4
Standard Duty
S811+
Width
(mm)
60
150
150
Ramp Current %
of FLA
Table 29.5-10. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
41
10
25
40
500
600
800
35
90
100

24 Vdc Control 3
3
60
150
150

39
40
200 75 1 50
400 125 250
400 150 400
3X
3X
4X
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
Severe Duty
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
29.5-9
Sheet 29 075

include a CPT.

for one minute.Essentially a variable torque drive.
Table 29.5-12. Freedom SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency DrivesDimensions in Inches (mm)

Nominal (VT)
hp
IL
Amperes
(CT)
Branch Protection Minimum
IH
HMCP T.M. K-SW Height
Amperes
Typical
(X) Width
25
Maximum
Height
(X) Width
Height
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
36.0 (914.4)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
6X
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
42.0 (1066.8)
6X 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8)

6X 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8)
6X 20.0 (508.0) 42.0 (1066.8)
(X) Width
26
200240 V
FR4
Drawout
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.7
4.8
6.6
7.8
11.0
3.7
4.8
6.6
7.8
23
24
AFD Unit
Frame
22
11.0
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
25
25
30
30
30
30
30
30
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
18.0 (457.2)
30.0 (762.0)
3X
3X
3X
3X
3X
5X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
7X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
7X 20.2 (508.0)
7X 20.2 (508.0)
7X 20.2 (508.0)
27
28
FR5
Drawout
5.0
7.5
10.0
17.5
25.0
31.0
17.5
25.0
30
50
50
40
50
70
30 30.0 (762.0)
60 30.0 (762.0)
60 30.0 (762.0)
5X 20.0 (508.0)
5X 20.0 (508.0)
5X 20.0 (508.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
FR6
Drawout 10.0
15.0
20.0
31.0
48.0
61.0
31.0
48.0
50
100
100
60
100
125
60 42.0 (1066.8)
100 42.0 (1066.8)
100 42.0 (1066.8)
7X 20.2 (508.0)
7X 20.2 (508.0)
7X 20.2 (508.0)
54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)

54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)
54.0 (8229.6) 9X 20.0 (508.0) 60.0 (2362.2) 10X 20.0 (508.0)
FR7
Fixed
20.0
25.0
30.0
35.0
75.0
88.0
114.0
61.0
75.0
88.0
100
100
100
150
125
175
220
285
100
200
200
200
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
30.0 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
7X
7X
7X
7X
7X
7X
7X
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
32
12.0
15
15
15
15
25
25
25
34
29
30
31
380500 V
FR4
Drawout
7
7
7
15
15
15
30
FR5
Drawout
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
12.0
16.0
23.0
30
30
30
50
25
35
50
60
30
30
60
60
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
8X
8X
8X
8X
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
FR6
Drawout 20.0
25.0
30.0
40.0
38.0
46.0
61.0
31.0
38.0
46.0
50
50
100
100
60
80
100
125
60
60
80
100
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
42.0 (1066.8)
7X
7X
7X
7X
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
20.2 (508.0)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
54.0 (8229.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
10X
10X
10X
10X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
FR7
Fixed
40.0
50.0
60.0
75.0
72.0
87.0
105.0
61.0
72.0
87.0
100
100
100
150
125
150
175
225
100
100
100
175
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
60.0 (2362.2)
10X
10X
10X
10X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
75.0
100.0
125.0
150.0
140.0
170.0
205.0
105.0
140.0
170.0
150
150
250
400
225
300
400
500
175
200
250
3 50
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
20.0 (508.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
32.0 (812.8)
32.0 (812.8)
32.0 (812.8)
32.0 (812.8)
500 350 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 28.0 (711.2)

600 450 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 28.0 (711.2)
700 500 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 28.0 (711.2)
72.0 (1828.8) 12X 40.0 (1016.0)

72.0 (1828.8) 12X 40.0 (1016.0)
72.0 (1828.8) 12X 40.0 (1016.0)
39
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
80.0 (2032.0)
80.0 (2032.0)
80.0 (2032.0)
80.0 (2032.0)
40
FR8
Fixed
7.6
FR9
Fixed
150.0
200.0
250.0 1
261.0
300.0
205.0
261.0
400
400
400
FR10
Fixed
250.0
300.0
350.0
400.0
385.0
460.0
520.0
300.0
385.0
460.0
400
600
600
1200
700
800
1000
1200
FR11
Fixed
400.0
500.0
550.0
650.0
730.0
590.0
650.0
730.0
1200
1200
1200
1200 1000 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 80.0 (2032.0)

1500 1000 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 80.0 (2032.0)
1600 1200 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 80.0 (2032.0)
FR12
Fixed
600.0
820.0
1200
1600 1200 72.0 (1828.8) 12X 128.0 (3251.2)
500
600
800
800
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
72.0 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
64.0 (1625.6)
64.0 (1625.6)
64.0 (1625.6)
64.0 (1625.6)
33
35
36
37
38
41
42
If a 250 hp 40 C rating is required, then up-size to the FR10. This FR9 sizing is only valid at 30 C ambient.
Note: FR9 and larger AFD units require a 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure. FR11 and FR12 are non UL designs; consult factory for specific
application. These tables are sized using the Motor Load Block up to 180 A; units without Motor Load Block may be smaller. In drawout,
minimum does not contain an operator panel, typical contains a device panel and room for timers and relays, maximum makes provisions
for isolation contactors and bypass. In fixed, minimum contains a device panel and room for timers and relays, maximum makes provisions for
isolation contactors and bypass. Consult factory for NEMA 3R sizing.
CA08104001E
43

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
Sheet 29 076
22

Hp
(Maximum)
23
SVX Drive
(Amperes)
Passive Input
(Amperes)
Height
(X)
1
1.5
3
2.2
3.3
5.6
6
6
6
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
5
7.5
10
7.6
12
16
8
14
21
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
15
20
25
23
31
38
27
34
44
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
36.0 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
30
40
50
46
61
72
52
66
83
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
48.0 (1219.2)
8X
8X
8X
27
60
75
100
87
105
140
103
128
165
48.0 (1219.2)
60.0 (1524.0)
60.0 (1524.0)
8X
10X
10X
28
125
150
200
170
205
261
208
208
320
60.0 (1524.0)
60.0 (1524.0)
72.0 (1828.8)
10X
10X
12X
24
25
26
29
Note: Passive filters are a separate unit located next to the connected AFD.
Passive filters can reduce THD of the connected AFD to 8% or less.
30
Table 29.5-14. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives in NEMA 3R MCCs

31
IH
Amperes
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
33
34
1
2
3
36
IL
Amperes
Nominal
hp IL
CB Type 3
HMCP
Dim.
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
12.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
7
7
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
Encoder Expander

One relay
Two relays
Three relays
5
5
5
5
6
5
5
5
5
7
7
8
Other Options
Unit Space (Typ./Max)

MCCB
I/O Expander
(X)
380500 V
32
35
Nominal
hp IH 2
Plug-in Options
Option Boards 4
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
12.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
38.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
38.0
46.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
30
30
30
50
50
25
35
50
60
80
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
12X
46.0
30.0
61.0
40.0
100
100
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
This table is common for both Freedom and Freedom FlashGard MCC.
A separate CPT bucket is provided for all AFDs (15 hp) listed in the table.
For fusible disconnect, use typical option unit.
Note: Drive units fit into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.

315 PSIG interface

Graphics keypad
Line fuses
57
RFI filter
V1K 2000 ft (610m) Dv/Dt filter
Output contactor
Dual overloads
58
58
6
7
8
9
j
37
9
7
5
5

option unit.
Not available for 240 V units.

2 hp and below).
Dv/Dt filter.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
29.5-11
Sheet 29 077
CPX9000 Clean Power Drives

1500 hp at 480 V
IH (CT): High overload drives are capable of producing 200%

Eatons CPX9000 Clean Power Drives use advanced 18-pulse,

clean-power technology that significantly reduces line
harmonics at the drive input terminals, resulting in one
of the purest sinusoidal waveforms.
IL (VT): Low overload drives are capable of producing 200%

for one minute. Essentially a variable torque drive.

Nominal hp
IL
CB Type 2
IH
Amperes
HMCP
MCCB
Nominal hp
IH
25

Width
Height
Depth
(X)
34
40
52
25 4
30 4
40 4
27
34
40
20 4
25 4
30 4
50
100
100
80
100
125
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
65
77
96
50 4
60 4
75 4
52
65
77
40 4
50 4
60 4
100
100
150
150
175
225
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
124
156
180
100 4
125 4
150 4
96
124
156
75 4
100 4
125 4
150
250
400
300
400
400
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
240
302
361
200
250
300 5
180
240
302
150
200
250 5
600
600
600
600
600
600
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
414
477
515
350 5
400 5
450 5
361
414
477
300 5
350 5
400 5
600
600
1200
600
600
1200
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
590
500 5
515
450 5
1200
1200
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
2
3
4
5
23
24
Table 29.5-16. CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Thermal-Magnetic Breaker and Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Disconnect
IL
Amperes
22
The CPX9000 drive uses the term Low Overload (IL) in place of the term Variable Torque and High Overload (IH) in place of the term
Constant Torque.
CPX9000 Drives in MCCs are available in thermal-magnetic breaker, motor circuit protector and fused disconnect configurations.
Required transformer section is 28.00 (711.2) inches deep; CPX and bypass is 21.00 (533.4) inches deep.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Table 29.5-17. CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Fusible Switch DisconnectDimensions in Inches (mm)
IL
Amperes
Nominal hp
IL
Fuse Switch
IH
Amperes
Fuse
Switch
Nominal hp
IH
34

Width
Height
Depth
(X)
34
40
52
25 h
30 h
40 h
27
34
40
20 h
25 h
30 h
50
60
80
60
60
100
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
65
77
96
50 h
60 h
75 h
52
65
77
40 h
50 h
60 h
100
100
100
100
100
100
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
124
156
180
100 h
125 h
150 h
96
124
156
75 h
100 h
125 h
175
200
250
200
200
400
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
240
302
361
200
250
300 i
180
240
302
150
200
250 i
350
450
600
600
600
600
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
414
477
515
350 i
400 i
450 i
361
414
477
300 i
350 i
400 i
600
600
800
600
600
1200
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
590
500 i
515
450 i
800
1200
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
7
h
i
The CPX9000 product uses the term Low Overload (IL) in place of the term Variable Torque and High Overload (IH) in place of the term
Constant Torque.
Required transformer section is 28.00 (711.2) inches deep; CPX and bypass is 21.00 (533.4) inches deep.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
Sheet 29 078
22
23
Frame Size
(Amperes)
24
25
26
Circuit Breaker
Frame
Main Unit Size
240 V
575 V
Inches (mm)
125
150
E125H 2
HFD
100
100
65
65
25
25
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
4/0 (one per phase)

4/0 (one per phase)
150
225
FDC
HFD
100
100
100
65
35
25
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
4/0 (one per phase)

4/0 (one per phase)
225
J250
FDC
100
100
100
100
25
35
18.00 (457.2)
3X
18.00 (457.2)
3X
4/0 (one per phase)
250
J250
JDC
100
100
65
100
25
35
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
4X
5X
18.00 (457.2)
3X
400
HKD
KDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
30.00 (762.0)
5X
30.00 (762.0)
4X
CHKD 3
CKDC 3
100
100
65
100
35
50
30.00 (762.0)
5X
30.00 (762.0)
5X

or 500 kcmil
(one per phase)
HLD
LDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
24.00 (609.6)
4X
30.00 (762.0)
5X
CHLD 34
CLDC 34
100
100
65
100
35
50
4X
24.00 (609.6)
4X
27
600
28
29
30
800
100
50
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
65
100
35
50
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
NGH 5
NGC 5
100
100
65
100
35
50
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
NGH-C 34
NGC-C 34
100
100
65
100
35
50
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
2000
RGH 5
RGC 4
RGH-C 3
RGC-C 3
100
100
100
100
65
100
65
100
50
65
50
65
72.00 (1828.8) 6
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
2500
RGH
RGC
100
100
65
65
50
50
72.00 (1828.8) 67
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
1200
2
3
5
6
7
37
38
39
40
Maximum
Cable Size 1
100
100
36
X Space
100
35
Inches (mm)
NGC
32
34
Feeder Unit Size

X Space
NGH-C 3
NGC-C 3
31
33
480 V

Digitrip 310+ LS is required and included in the price.
NEMA 1 gasketed only.
24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide.
Note: RotoTract standard on all feeder taps 400 A and lower and not available on any main devices.
Table 29.5-19. Main Circuit BreakersMagnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated
Fixed MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size
Amperes
Circuit Breaker
Type

240 V
480 V
575 V
800
MDS-608
MDS-C08
65
100
65
100
65
100
1600
MDS-616
MDS-C16
65
100
65
100
65
100
2000
MDS-620
MDS-C20
65
100
65
100
65
100
Unit
Size
Enclosure
Width
Enclosure
Depth
72.00 (1828.8)
24.00 (609.6)
21.00 (533.4)
Note: A 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) filler section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Freedom FlashGard
May 2015
29.5-13
Sheet 29 079

Table 29.5-20. Main Circuit Breakers Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated
Drawout MountedDimensions in Inches (mm) 1
Frame Size
(Amperes)
Circuit Breaker
Type

240 V
480 V
575 V
800
MDS-608
MDS-C08
65
100
65
100
65
100
1600
MDS-616
MDS-C16
65
100
65
100
65
100
2000
MDS-620
MDS-C20
65
100
65
100
65
100
3200
MDS-632
MDS-C32
65
100
65
100
65
100
1
2
3
Enclosure
Width
Enclosure
Depth
72.00 (1828.8)
24.00 (609.6) 2
42.00 (1066.8) 3
Type
Unit Space
Inches (mm)
RMS 3101150
Refer to Page 21.4-10

for more details.
Options
Tie breaker 4
24
25
26
Switch
Fuse
Unit Space
Rating f Clip Size Incoming Line
g
Amps
Amps
Inches (mm)
72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
UV release-instantaneous
Shunt trip (standard on electrically operated
breakers)
Key interlock on breaker
Auxiliary switch (3A/3B)

Cell position switch
Operations counter
Auxiliary power module (to test Digitrip)

Portable lift truck
Manual close pushbutton cover
Tie breaker adds an additional 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide bus

transition section. Also two 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) filler sections will
be added to the MCC if the tie breaker is located in the center of
the MCC lineup. If the tie breaker is located between the two main
structures, the two 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) fillers are not needed.
30
60
30
60
100
200
400
100
200
400
600
800
1200 h
600
800
1200
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
Description
AT200
Standard PLC-based control scheme. No operator interface

(PanelMate) provided. Sequence of operations and external
controls are pre-defined and not subject to customer
modifications. Type of voltage sensing device must be
chosen. If closed-transition operation is required, a
sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
AT300
Same as AT200, except includes operator interface

(PanelMate). 5
AT300X
Same as AT200, except customer modifications are acceptable.

This is the proper choice for PLC-based systems with special
sequences, more than main-tie-main configurations, and/or
where special PanelMate page layouts are required.
AT300IQ
Standard Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) controller-based

control scheme for main-main configurations. Either or both
sources may be generators. Includes manual-auto operation,
and generator control switch. If closed-transition operation is
required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
Feeder
X Space Inches (mm)
X Space
28
29
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
3X
3X
30
18.00 (457.2)
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
3X
5X
8X
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
3X
5X
7X
31
54.00 (1371.8) ij 9X ij
48.00 (1219.2) jk 8X jk
60.00 (1524.0) j 10X j
48.00 (1219.2) j
8X j
48.00 (1219.2) jl 8X jl
60.00 (1524.0) j 10X j
Suitable for 100,000 A interrupting if Class RK fuses are used.

Type of SW K-SW 30800 A.
High magnetic molded-case switch.
For bottom cable entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.
For bottom entry, add 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space.
For top entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.
Table 29.5-22. Main-Tie-Main Auto Throw-Over Options

Option
27
Table 29.5-23. Freedom FlashGard Main Incoming Line and Feeder

Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Three-pole250 or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
Accessories
23
This table is common for both Freedom and Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
A 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) filler section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
Structure is rear aligned.
Table 29.5-21. Digitrip Units
22
Unit
Size
Operator interface page layouts are pre-defined and not subject to

customer modifications.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage
30.0-1
December 2012
Motor Starters and

ContactorsLow Voltage
Sheet 30 001
Contents
Manual Motor Control
MS Manual Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1
B100 MMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-2
Lighting Contactors
Non-Combination Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1
Electrically Held Non-CombinationCN35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-2
Mechanically Held Non-CombinationC30CNM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-5
Magnetically LatchedA202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-9
Enclosed Combination TypeECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-11
NEMA Motor StartersElectromechanical
FreedomGeneral Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1
FreedomTechnical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-2
C441 Motor Insight Motor Protection Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-11
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-13
Reduced VoltageElectromechanical
Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-2
Part Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-3
Wye-Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-4
Reduced VoltageSolid-State
S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-6
DS6 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26
DS7 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-35
PSG Series DC Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-44
Enclosures
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6-1
Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6-3
Group ControlMulti-Pak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1
Specifications:
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Sections 16481,
Sections 26 29 13.11,
16484,
26 29 13.13,
16485,
26 29 13.15,
16902
26 29 05
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Enclosed S801 Soft Start and Freedom NEMA Starter with

C440 Electronic Overload Relay
CA08104001E
22
30.0-2 Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage

December 2012
Sheet 30 002
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Motor Starters and ContactorLow Voltage

December 2012
30.1-1
Sheet 30 003
Type MS
MS Manual Starters
22
2.38
(60.5)
1.19
(30.2)
1.56
Maximum 1 hp, 120/277 Volts

Single-Phase
0.55
(14.0)
2.55
)
2.11
KO
23
24
KO
0.73
(18.5)
Indicating Light
(When Used)
25
4.16
(105.7)
1/2 Diameter Conduit
3 Single Knockouts
1 in Each End & Back
As Shown
3.06
(77.7)
13/64 Diameter
2 Mounting Holes
KO
29
30
19/64 Diameter Lockout Hole
MS manual single-phase starters are

designed to give positive, accurate,
trouble-free overload protection to
single-phase motors rated up to 1 hp.
Typical applications are fans, machine
tools, motors, HVAC, and so on.
Table 30.1-1. MS Ratings
Volts
hp
Poles
120/240V, 277 Vac

120/240 Vdc
240 Vdc
32 Vdc
1
1
1/4
1/4
1 or 2
2
1
1 or 2
31
5.13
(130.3)
5.88
(149.4)
5.81
(147.6)
0.75
(19.1)
3.63
(92.2)
3/4 Inch Pipe To
T p
0.81
(20.6)
3.94
(100.1)
3/4 Inch Pipe To
T p
2.91
(73.7)
Figure 30.1-2. Watertight (Cast Aluminum)
33
2.63
0.42
(10.7)
3.50
(88.9)
Figure 30.1-3. Hazardous Location

(Cast Aluminum)
1.64
(41.7)
1.52
(38.6)
2.75
(69.9)
1.38
(35.1)
Mounting Purposes
(2) Holes
1.06
(26.9)
0.78
(19.8)
0.66
(16.8)
0.34
(8.6)
Indicating
Light
Typical Specifications
1.64
4.50
(41.7) 3.28 (114.3)
(83.3)
Manual single-phase starters shall be

Eatons Type MS or approved equal for
motors rated not greater than 1 hp. They
shall be built and tested in accordance
with the applicable NEMA standards.
34
35
0.22
(5.6)
1 Unit
Handle
Guard
39
42
1.53
(38.9)
Figure 30.1-4. Flush Plates
38
41
2.25
(57.2)
0.31
(7.9)
37
40
Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
CA08104001E
0.44
(11.2)
36
Type 1: General Purpose

Type 1: Flush Mounted, General
Purpose
Type 3, 4, 5: Watertight
Type 7D: Class I, Group D Hazardous
Locations
Type 9E, F, G: Class II, Groups E, F, G
Hazardous Locations
Red pilot light available for NEMA 1,
factory-installed or field-installed kit
The starter shall have a quick-make,

quick-break toggle mechanism. The
overload shall have a field adjustment
allowing up to 10% variance in ratings
of the nominal heater value.
32
6.72
(170.7)
Enclosures
28
Figure 30.1-1. Type 1 Enclosures (Boxes and Covers)
27
KO
1.97
(50.0)
Typical Side View
Typical Front View

(Single Unit)
General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed

MS Starter
26
0.88
(22.4)
43
30.1-2 Motor Starters and ContactorLow Voltage

December 2012
Sheet 30 004
Type B100
22
Type B100
Eatons B100 manual starter can be
used on non-reversing applications
up to10 hp, 600 Vac. It features a
three-pole block overload relay that
uses A200 starter heaters, straightthrough wiring, and will accept
auxiliary contacts.
Maximum 10 hp, 600 Volts
23
24
25
4.72
(118.0)
2.36
(59.9)
26
4.98
(126.5)
3.98
(101.1)
1.02
(25.5)
1.05
(26.8)
5.13
(130.3)
2.56
(65.0)
27
28
0.92
(23.4)
6.00
(152.4)
5.00
(127.0)
9.19
(233.4)
General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed

B100 Starter
1.63
)
3.25
(82.6)
0.63
(16.0)
Enclosures
Type 1: General Purpose
Type 4: Stainless Steel, Watertight
Type 7: Class I, Group D Hazardous
Locations
Type 9: Class II, Groups E, F, G
Hazardous Locations
Type 12: Dust-tight Industrial Use
.218 Dia.
4 Mtg. Holes
1.50
(38.1)
1/2 x 3/4 Conduit K.O.

2 In Each Side
8.28
(210.3)
10.16
(258.1)
0.92
(23.4)
29
30
Off
7.59
(192.8)
B100 starters are available as toggle or

pushbutton-operated open and Type 1
enclosed devices, or toggle-operated
in Type 4, 7, 9 and 12 enclosures with
padlocking provision as standard. Red
pilot lights and one auxiliary contact
are available as options.
3.00
(76.2)
0.09
(2.3)
31
32
33
Table 30.1-2. B100 Ratings
34
35
36
37
NEMA
Size
39
40
41
42
43
5
(31.8)
2.50
(63.5)
2.05
(52.1)
0.17
(4.3)
1.02
(25.9)
0.63
(16.0)
Figure 30.1-7. Type 4 Enclosed
115
Vac
200-230
Vac
460-575
Vac
2
3
5
7.13
(181.1)
3.56
(90.4)
Two-Pole, Single-Phase AC
M-0
1
M-1
2
M-1P(1-1/2) 3
2
3
3
7-1/2
5
10
5.13
(130.3)
10.25
(260.4)
4.19
(106.4)
Offf
0.27
(6.9)
8.28
(210.3)
9.19
(233.4)
9.41
(239.0)
On
4.06
(103.1)
.406 Slot
2 Reqd
8.25
(209.6)
3.00
3
00
(76.2)
7.77
(197.4)
1IN11.50 NPSK
2 Holes
6.31
(160.3)
1.38
(35.1)
0.50
(12.7)
5.00
(127.0)
8.38
(212.9)
12.06
(306.3)
All three-phase manual starters and

single-phase starters rated above 1 hp
shall be Eatons Type B100 or approved
equal. They shall be built and tested in
accordance with the applicable
NEMA standards.
The starter must feature contact
operation that is quick-make,
quick-break and cannot be teased
into a partially open condition. There
must be a provision that blocks the
closure of the contacts while the line
terminals are exposed. Operating
handle or buttons must clearly show
by their position whether unit is ON,
OFF or TRIPPED.
5.13
(130.3)
2.56
(65.0)
6.03
(153.2)
Three-Pole, Three-Phase AC
M-0
M-1
6.00
(152.4)
Maximum Horsepower
38
1/2 x 3/4 Conduit K.O.

2 In Bottom and 2 In
Top End
T
6.00
(152.4)
0.88
(22.4)
Figure 30.1-6. Type 7/9 Enclosed
1.50
(38.1)
5.97
(151.6)
2.33
(59.2)
4.78
(121.4)
Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

CA08104001E

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
30.2-1
Sheet 30 005
General Description
Non-Combination
Lighting Contactors
60 Ampere, Five-Pole Electrically Held
General Description
Lighting contactors are designed to

provide a safe, convenient means for
local or remote switching of tungsten
(incandescent filament) or ballast
(fluorescent and mercury arc) lamp
loads. They are also suitable for other
loads such as low pressure and high
pressure sodium lamp loads and
other non-motor (resistive) loads.
They are not recommended for
most sign flashing loads.
Electrically Held Lighting Contactors

Eatons CN35 or approved equal are
rated for lighting loads of 10300A.
They are built and tested in accordance
with applicable NEMA standards.
These lighting contactors are designed

to withstand the large initial inrush
currents of tungsten lamp loads without contact welding. The full family
of lighting contactors does not require
derating.
These contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents
of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as
well as non-motor (resistive) loads
without contacts welding. The contactor is capable of being operated such
that it will not switch to OFF during
the control power circuit power failures.
26
Magnetically Latched Lighting

ContactorsA202 or approved equal
are rated for lighting loads of 30
4000A. Magnetically latched enclosed
combination lighting contactors are
Type ECL12 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible)
or approved equal for loads up to
30200A when integral short-circuit
protection is required.
29
Loads:
Ballast LampsFluorescent, mercury
vapor, metal halide sodium vapor,
quartz600V maximum.
Filament LampsIncandescent, infrared,

heating480V maximum, line-to-line;
277V maximum line-to-neutral.
Resistance HeatingRadiant and
convection heating, furnaces and ovens.
30 Ampere, 12-Pole Mechanically Held
Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors

Eatons C30CNM or approved equal are
rated for lighting loads of 30A. They
shall be capable of being supplied in
a 212 pole single unit configuration.
These contactors are designed

currents of tungsten and ballast lamp
loads as well as non-motor (resistive)
loads without contacts welding.
The contactors are capable of being
mechanically held via a magnetic
latch design using a permanent
magnet. The contactor is operated
by a RUN signal and a STOP signal
preventing the contactor from switching to OFF during control circuit
power failure.
Table 30.2-1. Lighting Contactor Comparison

Ampere
Rating
30 Ampere, Four-Pole Magnetically Latched
22
23
24
25
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Number
of Poles
Electrically
Held
Mechanically
Held
Magnetically
Latched
10
20
30
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12
CN35
CN35
CN35
38
30
30
60
112
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
C30CNE
C30CNM
A202
A202
39
60
100
100
200
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
CN35
CN35
A202
A202
40
200
300
300
400
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3
2, 3
CN35
CN35
A202
A202
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
Sheet 30 006
Electrically HeldCN35
22
CN35-Open (ECL03-Enclosed)
Filament LampsIncandescent,
infrared, heating480V maximum.
Resistance HeatingRadiant
and convection heating, furnaces
and ovens.
23
Cover ControlSee Enclosed

Control Product Guide PG.3.02.T.E
start-stop and hand-off-auto only.
24
25
Eatons CN35 lighting contactors

include a NO maintaining auxiliary
contact mounted on right-hand side
(on 10A, two- and three-pole devices,
auxiliary contact occupies 4th power
pole positionno increase in width).
Enclosed devices include a NO auxiliary
contact only on the right-hand contactor.
The 1060A devices will accept additional auxiliary contacts on the top
and/or sides. The 100400A sizes will
accept side-mounted auxiliaries only.
28
29
30
31
35
36
60 Ampere
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12
2, 3, 4 , 5
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3
Listed ampere ratings are based on a maximum load voltage of 480V for tungsten lamp
applications and 600V for ballast or mercury
vapor type applications.
Additional power poles mounted on side(s)
of contactor.
A
U
X
General Description
These contactors are designed to

withstand the large initial inrush
loads without contact welding. Contactors are capable of accepting up to 8
auxiliary contactstop and/or side
up to 60A and side only up to 400A.
Contactors are capable of being
operated by AC or DC control.
Loads:
Ballast LampsFluorescent,
mercury vapor, sodium vapor,
quartz600V maximum.
U
X
T p
To
Mtd.
Aux.
Side
Mtd.
Aux.
Auxiliary
Contacts
Figure 30.2-1. Open Type
3 Mtg. Holes
for #10-32
Screws
T p
To
Mtd.
Aux.
T p A
To
Mtd. U
Aux. X E
B
Auxiliary
Contacts
Figure 30.2-2. Open Type, 2030A Sizes,

FourSix Poles
3 Mtg. Holes
for #10-32
Screws
T p
To
Mtd.
Aux.
T p A
To
Mtd. U
Aux. X E
B
Auxiliary
Contacts
Figure 30.2-3. Open Type, 2030A Sizes,

FourSix Poles
38
T
To
Electrically-held lighting contactors

are Eaton Type CN35 or ELC03, or
approved equal for lighting loads of
10300A. They are built and tested
in accordance with applicable
NEMA standards.
Lighting contactors are designed to handle the switching of tungsten (incandescent filament) or ballast (fluorescent and
mercury arc) lamp loads as well as other
non-motor (resistive) loads. Ratings of
10400A, 112 poles, open or NEMA 1,
3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosed.
Mtg. Holes for

#10-32 Screws
37
39
10
20
30
60
100, 200, 300
400
Auxiliary Contacts
27
34
Number
of Poles
Open, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4/4X and 12.

20 Ampere
33
Maximum
Ampere Rating
Enclosures
26
32
Table 30.2-2. RatingsCN35 AC Lighting

ContactorsElectrically Held
See Auxiliary Contacts for type and

location of auxiliary contacts supplied.
Table 30.2-3. Approximate Dimensions and Shipping Weights

Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
40

Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Open Type
10
2030
2030
2030
2030
41
42
43
60
60
60
100
200
300
24
23
46
9
12
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
4.20 (106.7)
10.50 (266.7)
10.50 (266.7)
3.88 (98.5)
3.88 (98.5)
4.35 (110.5)
5.75 (146.0)
5.75 (146.0)
3.49 (88.6)
3.49 (88.6)
3.52 (89.4)
4.52 (114.8)
4.52 (114.8)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
3.50 (88.9)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.86 (98.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.90 (124.5)
4.90 (124.5)
4.90 (124.5)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
1.4 (0.63)
1.45 (0.65)
2.9 (1.3)
4.35 (1.96)
5.8 (2.6)
23
4
5
23
23
23
2.56 (65.1)
3.46 (87.8)
4.36 (110.7)
3.54 (89.9)
7.05 (179.1)
7.05 (179.1)
5.05 (128.3)
5.05 (128.3)
5.05 (128.3)
7.17 (182.1)
9.11 (231.4)
13.12 (333.2)
4.44 (112.8)
4.44 (112.8)
4.44 (112.8)
5.94 (150.9)
7.25 (184.2)
7.78 (184.2)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
6.63 (168.4)
8.50 (215.9)
12.50 (317.5)
5.80 (147.3)
5.80 (147.3)
5.80 (147.3)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
3.4 (1.53)
3.5 (1.57)
3.55 (1.59)
9 (4.1)
20 (9.0)
23 (10.35)
Center mounting slot at bottom on 1030A sizes only.
CA08104001E

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
30.2-3
Sheet 30 007
Electrically HeldCN35
Enclosed Box Selection

Table 30.2-4. Type 1 Non-combination Lighting
ContactorsElectrically HeldCN35
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Contactorswithout Control Power Transformers

10 A (2P, 3P, 4P)
10A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)
w/top adders
10A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
20A (2P, 3P)
20A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)
w/top adders &
6P w/o top adder
20A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
20A (9P, 12P) w/top adders
30A (2P, 3P)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders
30A (5P, 6P)
30A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
60A (2P, 3P)
60A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P)
100A (2P, 3P)
100A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P)
200A (2P, 3P)
200A (4P, 5P, 6P)
300A (2P, 3P)
300A (4P, 5P, 6P)
400A (2P, 3P)
1
2
5 (2.3)
7.3 (3.3)
3
1
2
9.5 (4.3)
5.2 (2.4)
7.3 (3.3)
3
3
1
2
3
3
3
3
1
3
3
3
4
4
4
10
10
10
10
9 (4.1)
9.3 (4.2)
5.3 (2.4)
7.3 (3.3)
9.0 (4.1)
9.2 (4.2)
9.5 (4.3)
9.7 (4.4)
7 (3.2)
9.8 (4.4)
9.5 (4.3)
10 (4.5)
35 (16)
60 (27)
70 (32)
133 (60)
113 (51)
136 (62)
125 (57)
Contactorswith Control Power Transformers

10A
10A
20A
20A
20A
20A
30A
30A
30A
30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
60A
60A
100A
100A
200A
200A
300A
300A
400A
(2P, 3P, 4P)

(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P, 9P,
10P, 12P, 20P) w/top
adders
(2P, 3P, 4P, 6P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) w/
top adders
(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
(9P, 12P) w/top adders
(2P, 3P, 4P)
(2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders
(5P, 6P)
(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
(2P, 3P)
(4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P)
(2P, 3P)
(4P, 5P, 6P, 9P)
(2P, 3P)
(4P, 5P, 6P)
(2P, 3P)
(4P, 5P, 6P)
(2P, 3P)
2
3
11 (5.0)
13.1 (5.9)
2
3
11 (5.0)
13.1 (5.9)
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
4
4
10
10
10
10
10
13.5 (6.1)
13.5 (6.1)
12 (5.4)
13.1 (5.9)
12.5 (5.7)
13.5 (6.1)
13.9 (6.3)
14.1 (6.4)
12.8 (5.8)
14 (6.4)
14 (6.4)
14.2 (6.4)
39 (18)
67 (30)
117 (53)
140 (64)
120 (54)
143 (65)
132 (60)
Table 30.2-5. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Non-combination

Lighting ContactorsElectrically HeldCN35
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)

10A
10A
20A
20A
20A
30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
60A
100A
100A
200A
300A
400A
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)

(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P)
(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P)
(5P, 6P)
(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P)
(5P, 6P)
(9P, 10P, 12P)
(2P, 3P)
(4P, 5P, 6P, 9P)
(2P, 3P)
(2P, 3P)
(2P, 3P)
5
7
5
5
7
5
6
7
5
6
7
8
8
8
10
10
12 (5.4)
20 (9.1)
12 (5.4)
14 (6.4)
20 (9.1)
13 (5.9)
14 (6.4)
20 (9.1)
13 (5.9)
16 (7.3)
22 (10)
49 (22)
57 (26)
110 (50)
113 (51)
125 57)

10A
10A
20A
20A
30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
60A
100A
100A
200A
300A
400A
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)

(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P)
(5P, 6P)
(9P, 10P, 12P, 20P)
(2P, 3P)
(4P, 5P, 6P)
(9P, 10P, 12P)
(2P, 3P)
(4P, 5P, 6P, 9P)
(2P, 3P)
(2P, 3P)
(2P, 3P)
5
7
5
7
6
6
7
6
6
7
8
8
8
10
10
16 (7.3)
20 (9)
16 (7.3)
24 (11)
18 (8.2)
18 (8.2)
24 (11)
21 (10)
23 (10)
22 (10)
56 (25)
64 (29)
117 (53)
120 (54)
132 (60)
Table 30.2-6. Type 1 Combination

Lighting Contactors
Ampere Size
22
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
30A
60A
100A
200A with disconnect switch
200A with thermal-magnetic
breaker
300A
400A
A
A
C
D
E
35 (16)
36 (16)
65 (30)
110 (50)
150 (68)
E
E
160 (73)
170 (77)
Table 30.2-7. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination

Lighting Contactors
Ampere Size
(Device)
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Electrically Held3P Onlywith or without

30A
60A
36 (16)
100A
65 (30)
24
25
26
27
28
29
35 (16)
200A
with disconnect switch
110 (50)
200A
breaker
150 (68)
300A
160 (73)
400A
170 (77)
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
For enclosure box dimensions,

CA08104001E
23
Electrically Held3P Onlywith or without


Lighting Contactors
December 2012
Sheet 30 008
Electrically HeldTechnical DataCN35
22
Table 30.2-8. AC Magnet Coil Data

Description
CN35BN
20A
CN35DN
30A
CN35GN
60A
CN35KN
100A
CN35NN
200A
CN35SN
300A
CN35TN
400A
Frame size
45 mm
45 mm
45 mm
65 mm
90 mm
180 mm
180 mm
180 mm
AC Magnet Coil Data

Pickup voltscold
Pickup voltshot
Pickup voltamperes
Pickup watts
Sealed voltamperes
Sealed watts
74%
78%
100
65
10
3.1
74%
78%
100
65
10
3.1
74%
78%
100
65
10
3.1
74%
78%
230
95
28
7.8
72%
76%
390
112
49.8
13
75%
77%
1158
240
100
27.2
75%
77%
1158
240
100
27.2
75%
77%
1158
240
100
27.2
Dropout voltscold
Dropout voltshot
Pickup time (ms)
Dropout time (ms)
45%
46%
12
12
45%
46%
12
12
45%
46%
12
12
49%
50%
20
14
50%
52%
14
11
63%
64%
23
15
63%
64%
23
15
63%
64%
23
15
10,000,000
6,000,000
5,000,000
5,000,000
5,000,000
816
stranded
10 14 solid
Cu
314 (upper) &/or

614 (lower)
Stranded or solid
Cu
1/014 Cu
350 kcmil6 Cu
350 kcmil8 Cu
600 kcmil2/0 Cu
N/A
N/A
6-65-7
6-65-8
6-43-5
6-43-6
6-44
6-44-2
6-45
6-45-2
6-45
6-45-2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Contactor Catalog Number/Size

CN35AN
10A
Coil operating range
15% to +10%
Magnet coil data

UL listed rating
Class 130 (B)105C Temperature Rate
Operating temperature 20 to +65C

Maximum operating
altitude
6000
Mechanical life
20,000,000
Wire Range
Power terminals
1216
stranded,
1214 solid
Cu
1216
stranded,
1214 solid
Cu
31
Control Terminals
32
Contact Kit Part No.

Two-pole
Three-Pole
N/A
N/A
33
Auxiliary contact
rating
A600, P300
See Page 30.2-5
34
1216 Stranded
1214 Solid Cu
N/A
N/A
Table 30.2-9. dc Magnet Coil Data

Description

CN35AN
10A
CN35BN
20A
CN35DN
30A
CN35GN
60A
CN35KN
100A
CN35NN
200A
CN35SN
300A
CN35TN
400A
Frame size
45 mm
45 mm
45 mm
65 mm
90 mm
180 mm
180 mm
180 mm
Volts
24V
DC Magnet Coil Data

Pickup voltshot
Pickup voltamperes
Pickup watts
Sealed voltamperes
Sealed watts
80%
3.2
76.8
0.14
3.36
80%
3.2
76.8
0.14
3.36
80%
3.2
76.8
0.14
3.36
60%
6.2
88.4
0.21
4.96
61%
12.0
288.0
0.20
4.75
61%
12.0
288.0
0.20
4.75
61%
12.0
288.0
0.20
4.75
67%
18
400.0
0.22
5.3
38
Dropout voltshot
Pickup time (ms)
Dropout time (ms)
60%
22
17
60%
22
17
60%
22
17
29%
20
13
22%
38
14
22%
38
14
22%
38
14
25%
53
14
39
Maximum operating
altitude
3600
35
36
37
40
41
UL Insulation RatingClass 130 (B),

105C temperature rise
Operational Limits85110%
of rated voltage for AC coils and
80%110% of rated voltage for
DC coils
2400
Coil Data Notes

P.U. = Pickup time is the average time
taken from closing of the coil
circuit to main contact touch.
42
D.O. = Dropout time is the average

time taken from opening of
the coil circuit to main contact
separation.
43
Cold = Coil data with a cold coil.
All data is based on a standard

contactor with no auxiliary devices
and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil.
Coil data has a 5% range depending
on the application, therefore specific
data may vary.
Hot = Coil data with a hot coil.
CA08104001E

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
30.2-5
Sheet 30 009
Mechanically Held, 30A, 212 PoleC30CNM
Type C30CNMOpen
(ECCEnclosed)
C30CNM
General Description
Eatons C30CNM 30A mechanically
held lighting contactors are designed
for industrial, commercial and outdoor
lighting applications where efficient
control is required. The mechanically
held operation ensures that the contactor will not switch to OFF during
control power failure. It also ensures
the removal of coil from the circuit for
noise-free operation and the elimination
of all coil losses after the contactor is
latched. The control module microprocessor validates the control signal
before operation, so it will not respond
to momentary voltage spikes of noise.
The operation command has a built-in
0.4 second delay to avoid multiple
short-term commands that can cause
contact fatigue or failure. Also, the
feedback loop prevents the contactor
from getting out of sequence with
switches, even after power failures.
Mechanically held lighting contactors
are Eaton Type C30CNM or approved
equal and are rated for lighting loads
of 30A. They are capable of being
supplied in a 212 pole single unit
configuration.
These contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of
tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well
as non-motor (resistive) loads without
contact welding. The contactor is capable
of being operated such that it will not
switch to OFF during control circuit
power failures.
CA08104001E
Operation
Auxiliary Contacts Rating:
Three-wire control is the choice for use

with momentary devices allowing
operation from multiple locations. A
momentary pulse of energy operates
the contactor while a second pulse on
an alternate leg returns the contactor
to its original state.
Two-wire control is the choice for single

output automatic operation or for
operation from single-pole devices.
When voltage is applied to the input
terminals the contactor is latched into
position (coil is removed from the circuit
while control voltage is continuously
supplied). When control voltage is removed, the latch is disengaged and the
contactor is returned to its original state.

Main Power Poles
Table 30.2-10. Maximum AC Voltage and
Ampere Ratings
Load
Type
Amps
Poles
Continuous SinglePhase
ThreePhase
Ballast
30
347 Vac
600 Vac
General use
30
600 Vac
600 Vac
Tungsten
20
277 Vac
480 Vac
AC resistive
30
600 Vac
600 Vac
Table 30.2-11. Maximum Horsepower Rating

Normal Starting Duty
Volts
Horsepower
110120
220240
Mounting Position:
Vertical three-point mounting only
Coil:
25
Wire Size
26
Inrush 248 VA
Sealed 28 VA
Table 30.2-14. Wire Specifications

Component Number Wire Range
of
(Solid or
Cables Stranded)
Wire
Temp.
Power
Poles
148 AWG
75C Cu
148 AWG
75C Cu
Coil
1 or 2
1814 AWG
60/75C
Cu
Control
Module
2212 AWG
60/75C
Cu
Auxiliary
Contacts
1 or 2
2212 AWG
60/75C
Cu

Table 30.2-15. Type 1 Non-combination
Lighting ContactorsC30CN
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Lighting Contactors
without Control Power Transformers
(212)
(212)
Maximum
VA
1224 Vdc
42
24 Vac
80
115120 Vac
83
12
200277 Vac
91
30
(212)
30A
(212)
Specification
Minimum pulse duration

(Three-wire control module)
250 ms
Maximum allowable
Leakage current
1.8 mA
EMI
35 V/m
Surge transient peak
6 kV
Frequency range
4070 Hz
32
33
13.5 (5.9)
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
36
37
38
14 (6.4)
39
20 (9.1)
40
Consult factory for combination enclosures.
Table 30.2-13. Other Control Module

Characteristics
Description
30
35
Lighting Contactors
with Control Power Transformers
29
34
Lighting Contactors
30A
28
9 (4.1)
Consult factory for combination enclosures.
Ampere Size
(Poles)
27
31
8 AWG stranded only.
Table 30.2-16. Type 3R, 4X and 12 Noncombination Lighting ContactorsC30CN
Table 30.2-12. Control Module
24
3
5
10
15
Steady-State
Current at Rated
Voltage (mA)
23
13 to 104F (25 to 40C)
30A
Three-Pole, Three-Phase
Input
Voltage
Lighting Contactors
1
2
200208
220240
440480
550600
Ambient Temperature:
30A
Single-Pole, Single-Phase
22
600A, 24 Vdc, 24 VA
41
42
43

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
Sheet 30 010
Mechanically Held, 30 Ampere, 212 PoleC30CNM
22
Components
Power Poles
Mechanically Held Module Kits
Electrically Held Base Contactor
23
24
25
Conversion Kits
26
Power Poles
27
The C30CNM contactor accepts up to a

maximum six single- or double-pole
(or combinations) power poles. These
can be used to form up to:
28
29
30
31
Electrically Held Base Contactor
The C30CNE20_0 electrically held base

contactor contains a 2NO power pole
as standard and will allow the addition
of power poles to build an electrically
held contactor up to 12 poles maximum.
A mechanically held module kit can
also be added to convert the electrically
held contactor into a mechanically held
contactor in the field.
Table 30.2-17. Electrically Held Base Contactor
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Power
Poles
Catalog
Number
2NO
C30CNE200
12NO poles maximum when six

double-poles are used in NO positions
(16) or 8NC poles maximum with
four double-poles in the NC position
(14) and 4NO poles with two doublepoles in the 2NO positions (56)
Table 30.2-19. Power Poles
These kits are for converting electrically held contactors to mechanically

held units. Kits include control module, latch, latch cover and auxiliary
contacts plus installation instructions.
Conversion kits are suitable for coil
voltages of 277V and below.
Table 30.2-20. Mechanically Held Module Kits
Coil
Volts
Catalog
Number
Single-pole
Double-pole
C320PRP1
C320PRP2
Catalog
Number
110120 Vac
200277 Vac
24 Vac
1224 Vdc
C320MH2WA0
C320MH2WH0
C320MH2WT0
C320MH2WT1
110120 Vac
200277 Vac
24 Vac
1224 Vdc
C320MH3WA0
C320MH3WH0
C320MH3WT0
C320MH3WT1
Two-Wire
24277 Vac
Power
Poles
Control
Volts
Three-Wire
24277 Vac
When ordering, select required contactor

by Catalog Number and replace the magnet
coil alpha designation in the Catalog
Number (...) with the proper Code Suffix
from Table 30.2-18.
Table 30.2-18. Coil Base Voltage (Digit 8)

Voltage
(Digit 8)
Code
Suffix
115120V 60 Hz/110V 50 Hz
230240V 60 Hz/220V 50 Hz
460480V 60 Hz/440V 50 Hz
575600V 60 Hz/550V 50 Hz
200208V 60 Hz
A
B
C
D
E
265277V 60 Hz/240V 50 Hz
24V 60 Hz/20V 50 Hz
28V 60Hz/24V 50 Hz
347V 60 Hz
H
T
V
X
39
40
41
42
43
Figure 30.2-4. C30CNM ComponentsExploded View
CA08104001E

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
30.2-7
Sheet 30 011
Auxiliary Contacts
Replacement Parts
Table 30.2-21. Auxiliary Contact Configurations
Auxiliary Contacts
Two-Wire
Three-Wire
None
1NO (single-pole)
2NO (double-pole)
None
1NC (double-pole)
1NO (double-pole)
1NC (double-pole)
1NO1NC
(NO single-pole
NC double-pole)
2NO1NC
(double pole)
1NO1NC (double-pole)
Magnetic Coils for the Base Contactor
23
24
25
Table 30.2-22. Auxiliary Contact Blocks
A mechanically held contactor with

a two-wire control module uses 1NC
auxiliary contact as standard for the
control wiring circuit. The mechanically
held contactor with a three-wire control
module uses 1NO1NC auxiliary
contacts as standard for the control
wiring circuit. See Table 30.2-21 for
possible additional auxiliary contact
configurations.
Auxiliary
Block
Catalog
Number
Single-pole
Double-pole
C320AMH1
C320AMH2
26
Table 30.2-23. Magnetic Coils

Coil
Voltage
Catalog
Number
115120V 60 Hz/110V 50 Hz
230240V 60 Hz/220V 50 Hz
460480V 60 Hz/440V 50 Hz
575600V 60 Hz/550V 50 Hz
200208V 60 Hz
9-3242-1
9-3242-2
9-3242-3
9-3242-4
9-3242-5
265277V 60 Hz/240V 50 Hz
24V 60 Hz/20V 50 Hz
28V 60 Hz/24V 50 Hz
347V 60 Hz
9-3242-6
9-3242-7
9-3242-8
9-3242-9
28
29
30
31
32
C30CNE Electrically Held

Line
* If Used
ON
OFF
Pushbutton
Pushbutton
L1
Fuse
Auxiliary
Contact
Remote Auxiliary
Contact
ON
5
6
A1
Fuse
35
36
OFF
37
ON and OFF Pushbuttons
View A
OFF
A2
Coil
Voltage
Coil
L2
Remote
OFF
Coil
34
ON
A2
A1
33
View B
Optional Pilot Devices for Electrically Held Contactor
Load
Optional
Auxiliary
Contacts
L1
SS
ON
38
AUTO
Fuse
A2
Auxiliary
Contact
Remote
Device
CONTROL
Refer to View B for Control Connections
Coil
A1
Fuse
L2
39
OFF
40
OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
41
ON
L1
ON
Fuse
OFF
A2
Coil
A1
AUTO
Remote
Device
Auxiliary
Contact
OFF
OFF/ON/AUTO or HAND/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
Figure 30.2-5. C30CNM Wiring Diagram

CA08104001E
27
Magnetic Coils
Wiring Diagrams
Optional
Auxiliary
Contacts
22
Fuse
L2
42
43

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
Sheet 30 012
22
23
C30CNM Mechanically Held

Refer to View A for 2-/3-Wire Control Options
Load
Line
1
View B
Optional Pilot Devices for 2-Wire Control
SS
OFF
* If Used
Electronic-Module
ON
(AUTO) P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
Fuse
24
Control
Voltage OFF ON
25
Coil
A2
A1
OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
Electronic-Module
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
ON
26
Control OFF ON
Voltage
27
C
29
30
33
34
Coil
A2
Optional
NC
Aux.
Contact
Coil
Voltage
2-WIRE CONTROL
Refer to View B for Control Connections
NC
Auxiliary
Remote
ON
Electronic-Module
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
L
A1
Coil
A2
Coil
A1
Coil
Voltage
*
*
Coil
Voltage
*
* If Used
Fuse
Fuse
*
Coil
Voltage
*
ON & OFF Pushbuttons

Electronic-Module
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
NO
Auxiliary
Optional
N/O
Aux.
Contacts
O
C
Fuse
ON
Control
Voltage OFF ON
31
32
A1
Remote
Device
View C
Optional Pilot Devices for 3-Wire Control
NO
Remote
Auxiliary
OFF
Electronic-Module
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
OFF
Not Used
Optional
N/O
Aux.
Contacts
AUTO
Coil
A2
A1
HAND/OFF/AUTO or ON/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
View A
Electronic-Module
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
28
Fuse
OFF
Fuse
A2
Fuse
Optional
NC
Aux.
Contact
OFF
Control
Voltage
Coil
Voltage
3-WIRE CONTROL
Refer to View C for Control Connections
ON
NC
Auxiliary
OFF ON
A2
Coil
A1
Fuse
*
Coil
Voltage
*
OFF/ON Selector Switch with Spring Return to Center
Figure 30.2-6. C30CNM Wiring Diagram
35
Dimensions
36
.35
(9.0)
SIDE VIEW
Power
Pole
38
Optional
Power
Pole
39
Optional NC
Aux Contacts
40
END VIEW
2 NO
Aux
Contacts
ON ON ON ON ON ON
37
TOP VIEW
1 NO
Aux
Contact
7.39
(187.6)
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
41
42
43
.35 (9.0)
3.86 (98.0)
2 NC
Aux
Contacts
1 NC 3.86
Aux (98.0)
Contact
6.50
(165.1)
Optional NO
Aux Contacts
Mounting Holes
Accept
#10 Screws
.22 (5.5)
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
A1
A2
3.75 (95.3)
4.18 (106.2)
NOTE:
1 Mounting dimensions remain the same
for 1 to 12 poles.
2 Line and Load terminals are interchangeable.
3 Up to 2NO and 2NC auxiliary contacts can be
added onto the base product.
4 Same power pole can be configured as
NO type or NC type in pole positions 1 4;
NO type only in positions 5 6.
.59 (14.9)
Figure 30.2-7. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
30.2-9
Sheet 30 013
Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)A202
Magnetically-held lighting contactors
are Eatons Type A202 or approved
equal for lighting loads of 30400A.
Magnetically-held combination lighting
contactors are Type ECL15 (breaker) or
ECL13 (fusible) or approved equal for
loads of 30200A when integral short
circuit protection is required.
Operation (Magnetic Latch)

A permanent magnet is built into the
contactor structure that will maintain
the contactor in its energized state
indefinitely without using control
power. When energized, a DC current
is applied to the latch coil producing
a magnetic field that reinforces the
polarity of the permanent magnet,
pulling in the contactor. The current
to the coil is disconnected by the coil
clearing interlock. In order to drop out
the contactor, it is necessary to apply
a field through the STOP coil in the
reverse direction to the permanent
magnet. This momentarily cancels the
magnetic attraction and the contactor
drops out.
Specifications
25
30
60
100
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
26
200
300
400
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3
2, 3
27
28
Table 30.2-25. Non-Combination Lighting Contactors6 to 12 Pole

Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Number
of Poles
Pole
Configuration
29
Open Type
Wide A
High B
6
8
10
12
3x3
4x4
5x5
4x4x4
7.13 (181.1)
7.13 (181.1)
10.63 (270.0)
12.38 (314.5)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
6.88 (174.8)
60
6
8
10
12
3x3
4x4
5x5
5x5x2
7.13 (181.1)
10.63 (270.0)
10.63 (270.0)
15.00 (381.0)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
6.88 (174.8)
100
6
8
10
12
3x3
5x3
5x5
5x5x2
9.75 (247.7)
12.38 (314.5)
15.00 (381.0)
34.13 (866.9)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
27.50 (698.5)
33
6
8
10
12
3x3
5x3
5x5
5x5x2
9.75 (247.7)
12.38 (314.5)
15.00 (381.0)
34.13 (866.9)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
27.50 (698.5)
34
200
31
32
35
Connections for
Control Stations
Fig. A Momentary
Pushbutton
1
Off
On
2
3
Fig. B
Figure 30.2-8. Open Type
Terminals:
All except
30A devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . Al/Cu
30A devices . . . . . . . . . . . . Cu only
Connections for Contactor

Front View Diagram
Fig. 1
Top
Auxiliary
Contact
Maintained
Pushbutton
1
Off
On
3
36
Line
When Supplied
C
(Not Supplied)
Red
L2
Control
Module
37
~ ~
N.C. N.O.
3
2
Black
On
Off
White
Red
38
Separate Control
Connect separate control
lines to the No. 1 terminal
on the remote control
station and to the L2
terminal on the contactor.
Auxiliary
Contact
(When Used)
Auxiliary
Contact
(When Used)
Poles to Load
39
Elementary Diagram
M
1
M
Line
M
M
M
Control Voltage Lines

Black
Top
On
L2
3 N.C. Red
M
Momentary
Red
Pushbutton
On
White M
2 N.O.
Ballast load 600 Vac, breaking

all lines
Tungsten lamp loads, maximum volts:
Line-to-line. . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Vac
Line-to-neutral. . . . . . . . . 277 Vac
Off
1
Load
~ ~
40
Off 1
On
Red
Off
41
Maintained
Pushbutton
Figure 30.2-9. Connection Diagram
42
43

CA08104001E
30
30
Enclosures
Open and NEMA Types 1, 3R, 4X and 12.
24
Number
of Poles
These lighting contactors are designed

currents of tungsten lamp loads without contact welding. They are full
rated and do not require derating as
do standard motor control contactors.
23
Continuous Amperes
(Enclosed)
AC lighting contactors provide a safe

convenient means for local or remote
switching of relatively large tungsten,
fluorescent or mercury arc lamp loads.
They are also suitable for low pressure
and high pressure sodium lamp loads.
22
Holding Circuit Auxiliary Contact or

Pushbutton Station not Included
General Description
Table 30.2-24. RatingsLatched AC

Lighting Contactors
60 Ampere Size
These contactors are designed

loads without contacts welding.
The contactors are capable of being
magnetically held via a magnetic
latch design using a permanent
magnet. The contactor shall be

operated by a RUN signal and a STOP
signal preventing the contactor from
switching to OFF during control
circuit power failures.
A202Open (ECL04Enclosed)

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
Sheet 30 014
Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)A202
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

Table 30.2-26. Type 1 Non-combination
Lighting ContactorsMagnetically
LatchedA202
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)

30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
60A
100A
100A
100A
200A
200A
200A
300A
400A
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)

(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P)
(2P, 3P)
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
9
9
4
9
9
10
10
8.5 (3.9)
13 (5.9)
35 (16)
8.7 (3.9)
13.5 (6.1)
40 (18)
40 (18)
85 (39)
100 (45)
46 (21)
95 (43)
110 (50)
115 (52)
125 (57)

30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
60A
60A
100A
100A
100A
200A
200A
200A
300A
400A
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)

(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 8P, 10P)
(12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P)
(2P, 3P)
2
3
4
2
3
9
4
4
9
9
4
9
9
10
10
12.5 (5.7)
17 (7.7)
39 (18)
12.7 (5.8)
17.5 (7.9)
87 (39)
44 (20)
47 (21)
92 (42)
107 (49)
53 (24)
102 (46)
117 (53)
122 (55)
132 (60)
Table 30.2-27. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12

Non-combination Lighting Contactors
Magnetically LatchedA202
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)

30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
60A
100A
100A
100A
200A
200A
300A
400A
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)

(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(6P, 8P, 10P,12P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
(20P)
(2P, 3P)
(2P, 3P)
5
7
8
5
7
8
8
9
10
8
10
10
10
13 (5.9)
21 (10)
46 (21)
14 (6.4)
22 (10)
48 (22)
50 (23)
58 (26)
100 (45)
52 (24)
105 (48)
113 (51)
125 (57)

30A
30A
30A
60A
60A
60A
100A
100A
100A
200A
300A
400A
(2P, 3P)
6
(4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7
(20P)
8
(2P, 3P)
6
(4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7
(20P)
8
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
8
(6P, 8P, 10P, 12P)
9
(20P)
10
(2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
8
(2P, 3P)
10
(2P, 3P)
10
15 (6.8)
28 (13)
54 (25)
16 (7.3)
29 (13)
55 (25)
57 (26)
65 (30)
112 (51)
59 (27)
120 (54)
132 (60)
Table 30.2-28. Type 1 Combination Lighting

Contactors
Ampere Size
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Magnetically LatchedNon-reversing (3P Only)

with or without Control Power Transformers
30A
60A
100A
200A
200A
300A
400A
A
A
C
with disconnect switch D
with thermalE
magnetic breaker
E
E
35 (16)
36 (16)
65 (30)
110 (50)
150 (68)
140 (64)
190 (86)
Table 30.2-29. NEMA 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination

Lighting Contactors
Ampere Size
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Magnetically LatchedNon-reversing (3P Only)

30A
60A
100A
200A
200A
A
A
C
with disconnect switch D
with thermalE
magnetic breaker
300A
300A

with thermalmagnetic breaker
with thermalmagnetic breaker
400A
400A
35 (16)
36 (16)
65 (30)
110 (50)
150 (68)
72 375 (170)
E
160 (73)
72 425 (193)
E
210 (95)
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
30.2-11
Sheet 30 015
Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole OnlyType ECL
Combination Lighting
Contactors
These contactors shall be designed to

withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads
as well as non-motor (resistive) loads
without contact welding. Contactors
shall be capable of accepting up to eight
auxiliary contactstop and/or side up to
60A and side only up to 400A. Contactors shall be capable of being operated
by AC or DC control.
ECL15 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible) or

approved equal for loads of 30200A
when integral short-circuit protection
is required.
Types ECL12, ECL13, ECL14

and ECL15
General Description
Catalog Number ECL12, ECL13, ECL14
and ECL15 combination lighting contactors offer convenient installation of
switching and overcurrent protection
in a single enclosure. Combination
lighting contactors are ideally suited
for industrial and commercial lighting
applications or where a lighting circuit
may have to be disconnected for periodic maintenance. They may also be
applied on resistance heating loads.
Magnetically latched combination
lighting contactors are Eatons Type
These contactors are designed to

withstand the large initial inrush
loads without contact welding. The
contactors are capable of being
magnetically held via a magnetic
latch design using a permanent magnet.
The contactor shall be operated by
a RUN signal and a STOP signal
preventing the contactor from switching
to OFF during control circuit power
failures.
Electrically held combination lighting

contactors are Eaton Type ECL14
(breaker) or ECL12 (fusible) or
approved equal for loads of 30400A
when integral short-circuit protection
is required.
Disconnect deviceseither a
Series C circuit breaker or a fusible
disconnect switch
Handle mechanismflange
mounted
UL listed
UL service entrance approved for
NEMA 3R outdoor enclosure
Extra room for modifications such
as a 24-hour time clock
Design
26
27
28
29
32
Modification Codes
L = CN35 or A202 lighting contactor

C = C30CN lighting contactor
33
(See PG03300001E)
Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings
Class
03 = Non-combination electrically held lighting contactor
04 = Non-combination mechanically held/magnetically
latched lighting contactor
12 = Combination electrically held lighting contactor
fusible disconnect
13 = Combination magnetically latched lighting
contactorfusible disconnect
A = None
B = 30A/250V R
C = 30A/600V R
D = 60A/250V R
E = 30A/600V R
F = 100A/250V R
G = 100A/600V R
H = 200A/250V R
J
K
L
M
N
P
T
= 200A/600V R
= 400A/250V R
= 400A/600V R
= 600A/250V R
= 600A/600V R
= 800A/600V R
= By description
A = None
D = 20A
E = 30A
15 = Combination magnetically latched lighting

contactorthermal-magnetic circuit breaker
F = 60A
G = 100A
H = 200A
J = 300A
K = 400A
L = 600A
M = 800A
T = By description
35
36
Ampere Size
G = 300A
H = 400A
J = 600A
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 = Poles required
A = 10 Poles
B = 12 Poles
C = 20 Poles
Combination Devices = Three-pole only
Enclosure Types
1 = Type 1General purpose
2 = Type 3RRainproof
3 = Type 4Watertight (painted)
4 = Type 4XWatertight (304-grade stainless steel)
6 = Type 7/9Explosion proof
8 = Type 12Dust-tight
9 = Type 4XWatertight (316-grade stainless steel)
37
38
Number of Poles
D = 60A
E = 100A
F = 200A
34
Thermal-Magnetic Breaker Ratings
14 = Combination electrically held lighting

contactorthermal-magnetic circuit breaker
39
40
Coil Voltage
A = 120/60 110/50
B = 240/60 220/50
C = 480/60 440/50
D = 600/60 550/50
E = 208/60
G = 550/50
H = 277/60
J = 208240/60
K
L
M
P
Q
R
S
For normally closed poles, see PG03300001E.

C30CN available in 30A only.
CA08104001E
25
31
EC L 12 D 1 A 3 E - X
24
30
Table 30.2-30. Enclosed Lighting Contactor Catalog Numbering System
23
Features
Catalog Number Selection
A = 10A
B = 20A
C = 30A
22
= 240/50
= 380/50
= 415/50
= 12 Vdc
= 24 Vdc
= 48 Vdc
= 125 Vdc
T = 24/60
U = 24/50
V = 32/50
W = 48/60
X = 104120/60
Y = 48/50
Z = By description
41
42
43

Lighting Contactors
December 2012
Sheet 30 016
Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole OnlyType ECL
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Table 30.2-31. RatingsLatched ELC15

Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Circuit Breaker
Ampere
Rating
System
Voltage
30
60
100
200
30
60
100
200
600
600
600
600
Table 30.2-32. ELC13Fusible Disconnect

Switch
Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Fuse Clip
Ampere
Rating
System
Voltage
30
60
100
200
30
60
100
200
250, 600
250, 600
250, 600
250, 600
Circuit Breaker
Ampere
Rating
System
Voltage
31
30
60
100
30
60
100
600
600
600
32
200
300
400
200
300
400
600
600
600
33
34
35
36
37
Description
Enclosure Used On
Standard Combination
Control transformers:
480 to 120V control transformer
100 VA extra capacity transformer
200 VA extra capacity transformer
240 to 120V control transformer with fuse in holder
Any
Lightning arrester
Undervoltage relay
On-off pushbutton
Hand-off-auto selector switch
Any
Addition of photoelectric receptacle and relay with

photo cell Installed (two-wire circuit)
24-hour time clock, 120V

24-hour time clock with day omission, 120V
7-day time clock, 120V
Cover plate for use in place of watertight hub on enclosure top
Table 30.2-33. RatingsElectrically-held

ELC14 Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
30
Table 30.2-35. Factory Modifications
UL ballast and resistive ratings only.
Table 30.2-34. ELC12Fusible

Disconnect Switch
Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Fuse Clip
Ampere
Rating
System
Voltage
30
60
100
30
60
100
250, 600
250, 600
250, 600
200
300
400
200
300
400
250, 600
250, 600
250, 600
UL ballast and resistive ratings only.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Motor StartersElectromechanical
December 2012
30.3-1
Sheet 30 017
Freedom LineGeneral Description
NEMA Motor Starters

Freedom Series
Features
Freedom NEMA
NEMA AN16DN0AB
NEMA Size 1
General Description
The Freedom Series starters and
contactors listed in this catalog
feature a compact, space-saving
design and high strength, impact
and temperature-resistant insulating
materials. Starters and contactors
are available in the NEMA (National
Electrical Manufacturers Association)
style. The NEMA devices are sized
based on traditional NEMA
classifications.
Adjustable bimetallic ambient

compensated overload relays
with interchangeable heater
packsavailable in three basic
sizes, covering applications up to
900 hpreducing the number of
different contactor/overload relay
combinations that have to be
stocked. Fixed heater overloads
are optional
Electronic overload relay (C440)
available as a stand-alone unit
and assembled with a Freedom
contactor
A full line of snap-on accessories
top and side mounted auxiliary
contacts, solid-state and pneumatic
timers, etc.
Straight-through wiringline lugs
at top, load lugs at bottom
Horizontal or vertical mounting
on upright panel for application
freedom
Screw type power terminals have
captive, backed-out self-lifting
pressure plates with screws
reduced wiring time
Accessible terminals for easy wiring.
Optional fingerproof shields available to prevent electrical shock
Top located coil terminals convenient and readily accessible. 45 mm
contactor magnet coils have three
terminals, permitting either top or
diagonal wiringeasy to replace
European or U.S. style starters
or contactors without changing
wiring layout
Designed to meet or exceed NEMA,
UL, CSA, VDE, BS and other international standards and listings
American engineeringbuilt by
Eaton, using the latest in statistical
process control methods to produce
high quality, reliable products
Sized based on standard NEMA
classifications
Easy coil change and inspectable/
replaceable contacts
Available in open and NEMA Type 1,
3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosures

Standard: Designed to meet or
exceed UL, NEMA and CSA
UL listed: UL File #E1491, Guide
#NLDXOpen; UL File #E176513
Enclosed Combination Motor Controllers; UL File #E19224Enclosed
Non-Combination Motor Controllers;
UL File #E195239Enclosed Power
Conversion Equipment
CSA certified: CSA File #LR353,
Class #321104 Open and NEMA 1
Enclosed
Certified Type 2 Coordination
22
23
24
25
26
Eatons Freedom Series NEMA starters

are now UL certified to achieve IEC 947
Type 2 coordination against 100,000A
short-circuit fault currents. Any brand
of properly selected fuse can be used.
Type 2 coordination means that the
starter will be suitable for further use
following a short-circuit fault.
27
Short-Circuit Protection
30
Fuses and inverse-time circuit breakers

may be selected per Article 430, Part D
of the National Electrical Code to
protect motor branch circuits from
fault conditions. If higher ratings or
settings are required to start the motor,
do not exceed the maximum as listed
in Exception No. 2, Article 430.52.
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 018
Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA Contactors and Starters
22
23
NEMA Sizes 00-8

Table 30.3-1. AC Coil Data
NEMA Motor
Sizes Voltage
26
27
74%
78%
64
80
49
7.1
200
230
460
575
3
3
5
5
74%
78%
78
100
65
9.2
200
230
460
575
7-1/2
7-1/2
10
10
74%
78%
210
230
95
200
230
460
575
10
15
25
25
74%
78%
210
230
200
230
460
575
25
30
50
50
72%
76%
374
200
230
460
575
40
50
100
100
73%
76%
200
230
460
575
75
100
200
200
75%
77%
32
General Coil Data
33
38
7.5
Watts Cold
Hot
Maximum Operation P.U.

D.O.
Rate Operations/Hour Time ms Time ms
2.4
45%
46%
12,000
12
12
10
3.1
45%
46%
12,000
12
12
27
28
7.8
49%
50%
12,000
20
14
95
27
28
7.8
49%
50%
12,000
20
14
390
112
48
49.8
13
50%
52%
7200
14
11
1132
1158
240
96
100
27.2
54%
56%
2400
28
14
1132
1158
240
96
100
27.2
63%
64%
2400
25
13
Table 30.3-2. Coil Data Notes

Description
P.U.
Pickup time is the average time taken

from closing of the coil circuit to main
contact touch.
Coil Offeringencapsulated:
NEMA Sizes 13
UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A)
D.O.
Dropout time is the average time taken

from opening of the coil circuit to main
contact separation.
NEMA Sizes 45
UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F)
Hot
Operational Limits:
85% to 110% of rated voltageAC
80% to 110% of rated voltageDC
35
37
D.O. Volts
VA
Coil Offeringtape wound:

NEMA Sizes 000
UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B)
34
36
Watts VAR
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
29
31
Sealed
VA
200
230
460
575
28
30
P.U.
VAR
00
24
25
Maximum P.U. Volts

hp Rating Cold
Hot

data may vary.
Cold Coil data with a cold coil.

Coil data with a hot coil.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.3-3
Sheet 30 019
Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA Contactors and Starters

Table 30.3-3. DC Coil Data
NEMA
Sizes
Motor
Voltage
00 and 0
12
24
48
120
1 and 2
12
24
48
120
4 and 5
P.U.
Volts (Hot) Amperes
Watts
D.O. Volts
(Hot)
76.8
76.8
76.8
76.8
80%
80%
80%
80%
0.28
0.14
0.07
0.028
3.36
3.36
3.36
3.36
60%
60%
60%
60%
22
22
22
22
17
17
17
17
3600
3600
3600
3600
5
5
5
5
15.4
6.2
2.9
1.1
126
88.4
76.2
67.3
68%
60%
56%
53%
0.42
0.21
0.11
0.041
4.98
4.96
5.04
4.87
30%
29%
28%
29%
21
20
20
20
12
13
14
16
3600
3600
3600
3600
2
2
2
2
12
24
48
120
24
12
6.1
2.5
293
288
295
298
65%
61%
62%
61%
0.40
0.20
0.097
0.038
4.84
4.75
4.67
4.57
23%
22%
22%
22%
39
38
37
37
14
14
14
16
3600
3600
3600
3600
2
2
2
2
24
48
120
240
18
9.0
3.3
1.7
400
400
450
440
67%
67%
65%
64%
0.22
0.11
0.05
0.02
5.3
5.2
5.4
4.9
25%
25%
28%
26%
53
49
56
49
14
16
19
21
2400
2400
2400
2400
2
2
2
2
Amperes
6.4
3.2
1.6
0.64
Sealed
Watts
General Coil Data
P.U.
Time ms
D.O.
Time ms
Maximum Operation Mechanical

Rate Operations/Hour Life Millions
Description
P.U.
Pickup time is the average time taken

from closing of the coil circuit to main
contact touch.
NEMA Sizes 13
UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A)
D.O.
Dropout time is the average time taken

from opening of the coil circuit to main
contact separation.
NEMA Sizes 45
UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F)
Hot
Cold Coil data with a cold coil.
23
24
25
26
27
28
Table 30.3-4. Coil Data Notes
Coil Offeringtape wound:

NEMA Sizes 000
UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B)
22

data may vary.
29
30
31
Coil data with a hot coil.
32
33
Operational Limits:
85% to 110% of rated voltageAC
80% to 110% of rated voltageDC
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 020
Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA
22
Table 30.3-5. SpecificationsSizes 003

Description
CN15B
NEMA Size 0
CN15D
NEMA Size 1
CN15G
NEMA Size 2
CN15K
NEMA Size 3
Configuration
Number of poles
Auxiliary contacts, standard
Add-on auxiliary contacts
2, 3, 4
4th pole NO (1)
Top (4) or side (4)
2, 3
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
2, 3, 4, 5
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
2, 3, 4, 5
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
2, 3
Side NO (1)
Left side (4) or right side (3)
Frame size
45 mm
45 mm
65 mm
65 mm
90 mm
600 Vac
600 Vac
600 Vac
600 Vac
600 Vac
Continuous ampere ratings (I)
9A
18A
27A
45A
90A
Maximum horsepower (hp)

Single-phase 115V
230V
1/3
1
1
2
Three-phase 200V
230V
460V
575V
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
3
3
5
5
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
2
3
7-1/2
7-1/2
10
10
3
7-1/2
10
15
25
25
7-1/2
15
25
30
50
50
Coil operating range % of rated voltage
15% to +10%
15% to +10%
15% to +10%
15% to +10%
15% to +10%
Maximum operating altitude in feet (m)
Mechanical life
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
20,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
20,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
10,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
10,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
6,000,000
4,000,000
90,000
3,000,000
85,000
5,000,000
200,000
3,500,000
62,000
Electrical life (480V/60 Hz)

AC-3
AC-4
Wire range
Power terminals
1,700,000
80,000
1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
816 stranded,
1014 solid Cu
814 stranded
or solid Cu
214 (upper) and/or

614 (lower)
stranded or solid Cu
1/014 Cu
1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded
1214 solid Cu
Power terminal torque

Line and loadlb-in
15
20
40 (148 AWG)
45 (64 AWG)
50 (3 AWG)
35 (1410 AWG)
40 (8 AWG)
45 (64 AWG)
50 (31/0 AWG)
A600, P300
31
Control terminals
32

CN15A
NEMA Size 00
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2012

30.3-5
Sheet 30 021

Table 30.3-6. SpecificationsSizes 45
Description
22

CN15N
NEMA Size 4
CN15S
NEMA Size 5
Configuration
Number of poles
Auxiliary contacts, standard
Add-on auxiliary contacts
2, 3
Side NO (1)
2, 3
Side NO (1)
Frame size
180 mm
180 mm
600 Vac
600 Vac
Continuous ampere ratings (i)
135A
270A
Maximum horsepower (hp)

Single-phase 115V
230V
Three-phase 200V
230V
460V
575V
40
50
100
100
75
100
200
200
Coil operating range % of rated voltage
15% to +10%
15% to +10%
Maximum operating altitude in feet (m)
Mechanical life
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
5,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
5,000,000
Electrical life (480V/60 Hz)

AC-3
AC-4
800,000
70,000
500,000
34,000
Open3/08 Cu;
Enclosed250 kcmil6 Cu/Al
750 kcmil2 or
(2) 250 kcmil3/0 Cu/Al
1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu
Power terminal torque

Line and loadlb-in
200
550
A600, P300
Wire range
Power terminals
Control terminals
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 022
22
23
24
Table 30.3-7. 380V, 50 Hz StartersMaximum hp Ratings

Description
26
27
28
29
10
25
50
75
150
300
Terminal
Maximum hp
Description NEMA Size

1
9.90135.00
38.30270.00 38.30540.00
0.473.81 3.1527.00 3.1545.00 9.9090.00
1.0 S.F.
0.514.14 3.4327.00 3.4345.00 10.8090.00 10.80135.00 41.70270.00 41.70540.00
Size 1 Lower Current Range for motor hp range 1/4 hp to 2 hp at 460V.
NEMA
Size
Two compartment box lug.
31
NC Contact B600
AC Volts
Make and break amperes
Break amperes
Continuous amperes
34
36
38
39
480V
600V
30
3
5
15
1.5
5
7.5
0.75
5
6
0.6
5
3.375
0.375
2.5
3
0.3
2.5
7.5
0.75
2.5
1014 AWG Al Cu
Open#8#3/0 Cu
Enclosed#6 250 kcmilAl Cu
750 kcmil#2 or
(2) #3/0 250 kcmilAl Cu
Table 30.3-14. C306 Control Terminals

Cu Only
Description
(2) #12#16 stranded
(2) #12#14 solid
Table 30.3-11. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A

Specification
45 mm
55 mm
1210 AWG (46 mm2)

86 AWG (616 mm2)
2025 lb-in (2.32.8 Nm)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
61 AWG (1650 mm2)
Capacity
Load terminals
Terminal capacity
Tightening torque
37
240V
15
1.5
2.5
Wire
Size
DC ratings cover Freedom Series coils only.
Description
35
120V
NO Contact C600
Make and break amperes
Break amperes
Continuous amperes
C306DN3B
C306GN3B
C396A_
C306 Power TerminalsLine and Load
#12#16 stranded, #12#14 solid

#8#16 stranded, #10#14 solid
#8#14 stranded or solid
#3#14 (upper) and/or #6#14 (lower) stranded or solid
30
146 AWG
142 AWG
146 AWG
Minimum per NEC. Maximum wire size:

Sizes 000 to 8 AWG and Sizes 12 to
2 AWG.
NEMA
Size
Power TerminalsLine
00
0
1
2
Catalog
Number
Table 30.3-13. Wire (75C) Sizes

AWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 38
Open and Enclosed
Cu
Only
Table 30.3-10. Overload Relay UL/CSA Contact Ratings Control Circuit
33
Table 30.3-9. Wire (75C) SizesAWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 002Open and Enclosed
32
32A
75A
45A
1.15 to
1.25 S.F.
Wire
Size
Power TerminalsLoadCu Only

(Stranded or Solid)
Table 30.3-8. Motor FLA Current Ranges

1
25
Table 30.3-12. Wire (75C) Sizes

AWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 002
Open and Enclosed
NEMA Size
Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals

Terminal capacity
2 x (1812) AWG
Tightening torque
5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
2 x (1812) AWG
5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm)
Voltages
Insulation voltage U i (three-phase)
Insulation voltage U i (control)
690 Vac
500 Vac
690 Vac
500 Vac

Overvoltage category/pollution degree
6000 Vac
III/3
6000 Vac
III/3
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.3-7
Sheet 30 023
Freedom LineTechnical Data
Electrical LifeAC-3 and AC-4

Utilization Categories
22
100,000,000
Life Load Curves
23
10,000,000
25
Size 3
18
27
45
90 135
100
26
Size 5
Size 2
9
10
Size 4
Size 1
Size 0
100,000
AC-1Non-inductive or slightly
inductive loads, such as resistance
furnaces and heating.
Size 00
1,000,000
Utilization Categories
AC-2Starting of slip-ring motors.
24
Operations
Eatons Freedom Series NEMA

contactors have been designed and
manufactured for superior life performance in any worldwide application.
All testing has been based on requirements as found in NEMA and UL
standards and conducted by Eaton.
Actual application life may vary
depending on environmental conditions and application duty cycle.
27
270
1000
Break Amperes
NEMA AC-3 Load Life, Sizes 00 5, 480 V 60 Hz
28
100,000,000
29
AC-3Squirrel cage motors; starting,

switching off motors during running.
10,000,000
Size 5
Size 4
10,000
Size 3
Size 2
Decide what utilization category

your application is and choose the
appropriate curve
Locate the intersection of the
life-load curve of the appropriate
contactor with the applications
operational current (Ie), as found
on the horizontal axis
Read the estimated contact life
along the vertical axis in number
of operational cycles
32
100,000
Size 0
Size 1
Contactor Choice
31
1,000,000
Size 00
Note: AC-3 tests are conducted at rated

device currents and AC-4 tests are conducted at six times rated device currents.
All tests have been run at 460V, 60 Hz.
30
Operations
AC-4Squirrel cage motors; starting,

plugging, inching or jogging.
54 108 153 270 540 822 1620

100
1000
Break Amperes
NEMA AC-4 Load Life, Sizes 00 5, 480 V 60 Hz
10
Figure 30.3-1. AC-3 and AC-4 Utilization Categories
33
10,000
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 024
Freedom LineProduct Selection
22
Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.3-15. NEMA Freedom Line Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System
23
E C N 22 2 1 A A F -
24
Design
Modification Codes
N = Freedom NEMA
2 = A200
25
(See PG03300001E)
Cover Control
Class
01 = Non-reversing contactorthree-pole
Non-reversing contactortwo-pole
Non-reversing contactorfour-pole
Non-reversing contactorfive-pole
02 = Reversing contactorthree-pole
05 = Non-combination non-reversing starter
06 = Non-combination reversing starter
07 = Non-combination non-reversing starter with CPT
08 = Non-combination single-phase non-reversing starter
16 = Combination non-reversing starterfusible disconnect
Combination non-reversing starternon-fusible disconnect
Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter
fusible/non-fusible disconnect
17 = Combination reversing starterfusible disconnect
Combination reversing starternon-fusible disconnect
18 = Combination reversing starterfusible disconnect with CPT
Combination reversing starternon-fusible disconnect
with CPT
22 = Combination non-reversing startercircuit breaker
Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter
circuit breaker
23 = Combination reversing startercircuit breaker
24 = Combination non-reversing startercircuit breaker with CPT
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Type 1 non-combination
All others
E22 style combination
(Contact Eaton)
Contactors
3 = Three-pole
Coil Voltage and/or Control Transformers
See Table 30.3-16 and Table 30.3-17
A = None
B = 30A/250V R
C = 30A/600V R
D = 60A/250V R
E = 60A/600V R
F = 100A/250V R
34
35
3 = Size 3
4 = Size 4
5 = Size 5
6 = Size 6
7 = Size 7
8 = Size 8
9 = Size 9
40
41
42
43
= 150A
= 250A
= 400A
= 600A
= 800A
= 1000A
= 1200A
= 2000A
R = 3000A
T = By description
5 = 3A
6 = 7A
7 = 15A
8 = 30A
9 = 50A
I = 100A
Enclosure Type
37
39
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
Q
1 = Type 1General purpose

2 = Type 3RRainproof
3 = Type 4Watertight (painted steel)
4 = Type 4XWatertight (304-Grade stainless steel)
5 = Type 4XCorrosion (nonmetallic)
6 = Type 7/9Bolted hazardous location
7 = Type 7/9Threaded hazardous location
8 = Type 12Dust-tight
9 = Type 4X316-Grade stainless steel
36
38
N = 600A/600V R
P = 800A/600V L
Q = 1200A/600V L
R = 1600A/600V L
S = 2000A/600V L
T = By description
HMCP/E or Breaker Ratings

A = None
B = 3A
C = 7A
D = 15A
E = 30A
F = 50A
W = 70A
G = 100A
NEMA Size
A = Size 00
0 = Size 0
1 = Size 1
2 = Size 2
G = 100A/600V R
H = 200A/250V R
J = 200A/600V R
K = 400A/250V R
L = 400A/600V R
M = 600A/250V R
Use for Sizes 03, HMCP 600V applications only.
Table 30.3-16. Magnetic Coil Codes (System Voltage)
Table 30.3-17. Control Power Transformer Codes (System Voltage)
Code
Magnet Coil
Code
Magnet Coil
Code
Magnet Coil
Code
Primary
Secondary
A
B
C
D
E
G
H
J
120/60 110/50
240/60 220/50
460/60 440/50
575/60 550/50
208/60
550/50
277/60
208240/60
K
L
M
P
Q
R
S
T
240/50
380/50
415/50
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
24/60
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
24/50
32/50
48/60
104120/60
48/50
By description
B
C
D
E
H
240/480220/440 wired for 240V

240/480220/440 wired for 480V
600/60550/50
208/60
277/60
120/60110/50
120/60110/50
120/60110/50
120/60
120/60
L
M
Q
R
S
380/50
415/50
208/60
240/480220/440 wired for 240V
240/480220/440 wired for 480V
110/50
110/50
24
24
24
T
U
V
W
X
600/60
277/60
380/50
415/50
240/480/600 wired for 480V
24
24
24
24
120
Y
Z
240/480/600 wired for 480V

By description
24
When control power transformer modification codes (C1C11)

are used or when starter class includes CPT (i.e., ECN07, 18) see
Table 30.3-17 for system voltage code.
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.3-9
Sheet 30 025

Table 30.3-18. Type 1 Freedom Contactors
NEMA Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing Contactors
00 (2P, 3P, 4P)
00 (2P, 3P, 4P)
with top adders
0 (2P, 3P, 4P)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P)
with top adders
0 (5P)
1 (2P, 3P)
1 (2P, 3P)
with top adders
1 (4P, 5P)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P 5P)
3 (2P, 3P)
4 (2P, 3P)
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
5.25 (2.4)
7.3 (3.3)
1
2
5.25 (2.4)
7.3 (3.3)
2
1
3
2
2
4
4
10
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
7.3 (3.3)
7.9 (3.6)
11 (5.0)
8.3 (3.8)
8.5 (3.9)
35 (16)
47 (21)
113 (51)
325 (148)

00 (2P, 3P, 4P)
00 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
with top adders
0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
with top adders
1 (2P, 3P)
1 (2P, 3P)
with top adders
1 (4P, 5P)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
3 (2P, 3P)
4 (2P, 3P)
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
12 (5.4)
15 (6.8)
2
3
12 (5.4)
15 (6.8)
2
3
12.2 (5.5)
12.5 (5.7)
2
2
4
4
10
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
12.6 (5.7)
12.8 (5.8)
40 (18)
52 (24)
120 (54)
335 (152)

Three-Pole Reversing Contactors

00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
2
3
3
4
4
10
F1E
F1E
F1E
F2E
Table 30.3-19. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom

Contactors
NEMA Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
5
5
5
5
8
8
10
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
14 (6.4)
14 (6.4)
15 (6.8)
15.5 (7.0)
45 (20)
56 (25)
140 (64)
385 (175)

00
0 (2P, 3P, 4P)
1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
3 (2P, 3P)
4 (2P, 3P)
5
6
7
8
9
5
5
6
6
8
8
10
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
18 (8.2)
18 (8.2)
19 (8.6)
19.5 (8.9)
52 (24)
63 (29)
147 (67)
405 (184)

Three-Pole Reversing Contactors

00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6
6
6
6
8
9
10
F1E
F1E
F1E
F2E
NEMA Size
22
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing Starters
00
0 (2P, 3P, 4P)
1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
3 (2P, 3P)
4 (2P, 3P)
5
6
7
8
9
Table 30.3-20. Type 1 Freedom

Non-combination Starters
18 (8.2)
18 (8.2)
19 (8.6)
19 (8.6)
47 (21)
69 (31)
170 (77)
495 (225)

Consult factory.
Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.
00
00
0
0
1
12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

with top adders/SSOL

1
7 (3.2)
2
10 (4.5)
1
7.1 (3.2)
2
10 (4.5)
1
7.9 (3.6)
3
11.5 (5.2)
2
8.5 (3.9)
4
35 (16)
4
47 (21)
10 139 (63)
F1E 360 (163)
F1E
F1E
F1E
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
00
0
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
with top adders

with top adders
with top adders
27
28
30
31
32
33
3
15 (6.8)
3
15 (6.8)
3
17 (7.7)
3
19 (8.6)
4
50 (23)
9
72 (33)
10 172 (78)
F1E 495 (225)
F1E
F2E
F2E
39
Consult factory.

26
34
Consult factory.
CA08104001E
25
2
8 (3.6)
2
8 (3.6)
3
11 (5)
3
13 (5.9)
3
13.4 (6.1)
3
15 (6.8)
4
43 (20)
9
65 (30)
10 165 (75)
F1E 450 (204)
F1E
F2E
F2E
Reversing Starters
with top adders
24
29
3
15 (6.8)
3
15 (6.8)
3
16 (7.3)
3
16.2 (7.4)
4
42 (19)
4
54 (25)
10 146 (66)
F1E 385 (175)
F1E
F1E
F1E
Reversing Starters
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7.8 (3.5)
8 (3.6)
11 (5.0)
12 (5.4)
67 (30)
154 (70)
170 (77)
425 (193)
23
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43

December 2012
Sheet 30 026
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Non-combination Starters
NEMA Size /
IEC Frame
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5
14.3 (6.5)
5
15.3 (6.9)
7
16 (7.3)
8
46 (21)
8
60 (27)
10 150 (68)
F1E 415 (188)
F1E
F1E
F1E
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6
18 (8.2)
6
19 (8.6)
6
20 (9)
8
53 (24)
8
67 (30)
10 157 (71)
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
Reversing Starters
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
37
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
7
18.5 (8.4)
7
19.5 (8.9)
7
21 (10)
8
48 (22)
9
72 (33)
10 175 (79)
F1E 525 (238)
F1E
F2E
F2E
Consult factory.
Table 30.3-22. Type 1 Freedom

Combination Starters
NEMA Size
(Device)

Combination Starters
Box Shipping
No. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing
with and without Control Power Transformers
0
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
37 (17)
A
38 (17)
A
39 (18)
C
72 (33)
(HMCP)
C
90 (41)
(Disconnect switch) D
150 (68)
E
180 (82)
F1E 435 (197)
F2E
F2E
F2E
Reversing
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
42 (19)
B
43 (20)
B
44 (20)
C
84 (38)
D
173 (79)
F1E
F1E 550 (250)
F2E
F2E
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing
0
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
(HMCP)
(Disconnect switch)
A
A
A
C
C
D
E
F1E
F2E
F2E
F2E
37 (17)
38 (17)
39 (18)
72 (33)
90 (41)
150 (68)
180 (82)
435 (197)

Reversing
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
B
B
C
D
E
F1E
F2E
F2E
42 (19)
43 (20)
44 (20)
84 (38)
173 (79)
550 (250)

Non-reversingOversized
Non-reversingOversized
012
NEMA Size
(Device)
44 (20)
012
Consult factory.
44 (20)
Consult factory.
Table 30.3-23. Type 1 Freedom Non-reversing

Combination StartersNarrow Enclosure
NEMA Size
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
35 (16)
36 (16)
NEMA 1 Enclosed
012
NEMA 12 Enclosed
012
NEMA 12 Enclosed with Safety Door Interlock

012
37 (17)
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.3-11
Sheet 30 027
C441 Motor Insight
C441 Motor Insight
One external remote reset terminal

Motor Protection
C441 Motor Insight Overload

and Monitoring Relay
General Description
Eatons C441 Motor Insight, the
first product in the intelligent power
control solutions family, is a highly
configurable motor, load and line
protection device with power monitoring, diagnostics and flexible communications, allowing the customer to save
energy, optimize their maintenance
schedules and configure greater
system protection, thus reducing
overall costs and downtime.
C441 Motor Insight is available in
either a line-powered or 120 Vac
control powered design, capable of
monitoring voltages up to 660 Vac.
Each of these units is available in
a 19A or a 590A FLA model. With
external CTs, C441 Motor Insight
can protect motors up to 540A FLA.
Available add-on accessories
include communication modules
for Modbus, DeviceNet and
PROFIBUS, all with I/O options.
For ease-of-use and operator
safety, C441 Motor Insight offers a
remote display that mounts easily
with two 30 mm knockouts.
Features
Size/Range
Broad FLA range of 1540A
Selectable trip class (530)
Four operating voltage options
Line-powered from 240 Vac,
480 Vac, 600 Vac
Control-powered from 120 Vac
Motor Control
Two output relays

One B300 Form C fault relay and
one B300 ground fault shunt relay
Other relay configurations are
available, including one Form A
and one Form B SPST (fault
and auxiliary relays) allowing
programmable isolated relay
behavior and unique voltages
CA08104001E
Thermal overload
Jam/stall protection
Current level alarming
Current imbalance
Current phase loss
Ground fault
Phase reversal
Load Protection
Undercurrent
Low power (kW)
High power (kW)
Line Protection
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Voltage imbalance
Voltage phase loss
Provides superior protection

of motors and pumps before
catastrophic failure occurs
Increases profitability with greater
process uptime and throughput,
reduced costs per repair, reduced
energy consumption and extended
equipment life
Adjustments to overload configuration can be made at any time

Terminal blocks are set back
from the display to reduce
operator shock hazard
Remote display (optional) does
not require that the operator open
the panel to configure the device
Options
Type 1, 12 remote display
Communication modules
Modbus
Modbus with I/O
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
Modbus TCP with I/O
(contact product line)
EtherNet/IP with I/O
(contact product line)
Advanced diagnostics allows for

quick and accurate identification
of the root source of a motor, pump
or power quality fault; reducing
troubleshooting time and the loss of
productivity, reducing repeat faults
due to misdiagnosis, and increasing process output and profitability
Offered in a variety of
configurations
External snap-on modules
provide support for multiple
communications protocols
Advanced power, voltage and
current monitoring capabilities
and remote display can be
used simultaneously
Highly configurable fault and
reset characteristics for numerous
applications
Fully programmable isolated
fault and auxiliary relays
Ease of Use
25
26
27
28
Bright LED display with easy-tounderstand setting and references

Powered from line voltage or
Remote display powered from
base unit
Full word descriptions and units
on user interface
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Benefits
24
Flexibility
Currentaverage and phase rms
Voltageaverage and phase rms
Powermotor kW
Power factor
Frequency
Thermal capacity
Run hours
Current imbalance %
Voltage imbalance %
Motor starts
Motor run hours
23
Safety
22
cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508

UL 1053 applicable sections for
ground fault detection
CSA certified (Class 3211-02)
CE
NEMA
IEC EN 60947-4-1
RoHS
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2012
Sheet 30 028
C441 Motor Insight
22
23
24
25
Product Selection
Accessories
Table 30.3-25. C441 Motor Insight
Table 30.3-27. Communication Modules
Power
Source
Monitoring
Range
Current
Range
Catalog
Number
240 Vac (170264)
170264 Vac
19A
590A
C441BA
C441BB
480 Vac (323528)
323528 Vac
19A
590A
C441CA
C441CB
600 Vac (489660)
489660 Vac
19A
590A
C441DA
C441DB
120 Vac (93.5132)
170660 Vac
19A
590A
C4410109NOUI
C4410590NOUI
26
28
29
30
Catalog
Number
37
38
Modbus communication module
None
C441M
Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT
120 Vac
C441N
24 Vdc
C441P
Modbus
DeviceNet
DeviceNet communication module 4IN/2OUT
No. of No. of
CT
Loops Conductors Multiplier
Through
Setting
CT Primary
External
CT Kit
Catalog
Number
PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT
Ethernet-based communication module 4IN/2OUT
42
43
C441L
C441Q
120 Vac
C441R
24 Vdc
C441T
Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside
1
0
2
1
2
1
C441 Motor Insight offers several accessories for the

customers ease of use and safety:
1
0
2
1
2
1
60135A 0
120270A 0
240540A 0
1
1
1
150(150:5) C441CTKIT150
300(300:5) C441CTKIT300
600(600:5) C441CTKIT600
C441_A and
15A
C4410109NOUI 29A
C441S
Current Range: 19A
120 Vac
24 Vdc
4
3
Underscore indicates Operating Voltage Code required.

Operating Voltage Codes:
Code
Voltage
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
<empty>
Any manufacturers CTs may be used.
Types 1 and 12 remote display

Mounting plate adapter

Remote display unit:
Same user interface as the overload relay
Enhanced operator safetyoperator can configure
the overload without opening the enclosure door
Type 3R kit mounts with standard 30 mm holes
Mounting plate for retrofit in existing installations
Table 30.3-28. Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside

Description
Catalog
Number
Remote display Types 1 and 12 (UL 508)

Type 3R kit for remote display (UL 508)
Conversion plate
C4411
C4413
C441CMP1
Communication Cables
The remote display requires a communication cable
to connect to the C441 Motor Insight overload relay:
Table 30.3-29. Communication Cable Lengths
Length in Inches (meters)
41
C441K
EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP
39
40
120 Vac
24 Vdc
4
3
1045A
2090A
34
36
Motor
FLA
C441_B and
522.5A
3
C4410590NOUI 6.6730A 2
33
35
Catalog
Number
Current Range: 590A
31
32
I/O
PROFIBUS
Table 30.3-26. C441 Motor Insight CT Multiplier and Wire Wrap Schedule
27
Description
9.8 (0.25)
39.4 (1.0)
78.7 (2.0)
118.1 (3.0)
Catalog
Number
D77E-QPIP25
D77E-QPIP100
D77E-QPIP200
D77E-QPIP300
Table 30.3-30. Current Transformer Kits

Description
Catalog
Number
Three 150:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight

C441CTKIT150
C441CTKIT300
C441CTKIT600
For more information about technical data and

specifications as well as dimensions, see Volume 5
Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Section 31.
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.3-13
Sheet 30 029
C440/XT Electronic
Overload Relay
Size/Range
Flexibility
Broad FLA range (0.331500A)

Selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30)
Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and
DP contactors
Most compact electronic overload in
its class
Motor Control
Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault
(NC) contacts
Test/Trip button
Motor Protection
Thermal overload
Phase loss
Selectable (ON/OFF)
phase imbalance
Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault
General Description
Eatons electronic overload relay (EOL)
is the most compact, high-featured,
economical product in its class.
Designed on a global platform, the
new EOL covers the entire power
control spectrum, including NEMA,
IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA
and DP versions are offered with
the C440 designation while the IEC
offering has the XT designation. The
electronic design provides reliable,
accurate and value-driven protection
and communications capabilities in a
single compact device. It is the flexible
choice for any application requiring
easy-to-use, reliable protection.
Eaton has a long history of innovations and product development in
motor control and protection,
including both traditional NEMA,
as well as IEC control. It was from
this experience that the C440 was
developed, delivering new solutions
to meet todays demands.
C440 is a self-powered electronic
overload relay available up to 100A
as a self-contained unit. With external
CTs, C440 can protect motor up
to 1500 FLA. Available add-on
accessories include remote reset
capability and communication
modules with I/O for DeviceNet,
PROFIBUS and Modbus.
Features
Reliable, accurate, electronic

motor protection
Easy to select, install and maintain
Compact size
Flexible, intelligent design
Global product offering
available with NEMA, IEC and
DP power control
CA08104001E
User Interface
Large FLA selection dial

Operating mode LED
DIP switch selectable trip class,
phase imbalance and ground fault
Selectable Auto/Manual reset
Feature Options
Remote reset
120 Vac
24 Vac
24 Vdc
Tamper-proof cover
Modbus RTU RS-485
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010)
EtherNet/IP (planned)
Smartwire (planned)
Benefits
C440 provides the users with peace
of mind knowing that their assets
are protected with the highest level
of motor protection and communication capability in its class
Extends the life of plant assets
with selectable motor protection
features such as trip class, phase
imbalance and ground fault
Protects against unnecessary
downtime by discovering changes
in your system (line/load) with
remote monitoring capabilities
Status LED provides added
assurance that valuable assets
are protected by indicating the
overload operational status
Available with NEMA, IEC and

DP contactors
Improves return on investment by
reducing inventory carrying costs
with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and
selectable trip class
Design incorporates built-in ground
fault protection, thus eliminating the
need for separate CTs and modules
Flexible communication with
optional I/O enables easy integration
into plant management systems for
remote monitoring and control
Available as an open component
and in enclosed control and motor
control center assemblies
Individual phase currents rms
Average three-phase current rms
Thermal memory
Fault indication (overload, phase
loss, phase imbalance, ground fault)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Safety
Available in Eatons industry-leading
FlashGard MCCs
Tested to the highest industry
standards, such as UL, CSA,
CE and IEC
RoHS compliant
31
34
UL
CSA
CE
NEMA
IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1)
RoHS
ATEX directive 94/9/EC
Equipment Group 2, Category 2
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2012
Sheet 30 030
22
23
Product Selection
Table 30.3-31. XT Electronic Overload Relays
For Use with
XT Contactor Frame
For Use with

Contactor
Overload
Range (Amps)
Contact
Sequence
Frame
Size
Auxiliary Contact
Configuration
45 mm
NO-NC
Type
Catalog
Number
For Direct Mount to XT Contactors
24
25
XTCE007B,
XTCE009B,
XTCE012B,
XTCE015B
0.331.65
XTCE018C,
XTCE025C,
XTCE032C
0.331.65
26
XTOE1P6BCS
ZEB12-5
XTOE005BCS
420
ZEB12-20
XTOE020BCS
27
F, G
29
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
45 mm
97 95
NO-NC
15
420
945
28
ZEB12-1,65
15
XTCE040D,
XTCE050D,
XTCE065D,
XTCE072D
945
XTCE080F,
XTCE095F,
XTCE115G,
XTCE150G,
XTCE170G
20100
2 4 6 98 96
45 mm
97 95
20100
NO-NC
55 mm
ZEB32-1,65
XTOE1P6CCS
ZEB32-5
XTOE005CCS
ZEB32-20
XTOE020CCS
ZEB32-45
XTOE045CCS
ZEB65-45
XTOE045DCS
ZEB65-100
XTOE100DCS
ZEB150-100
XTOE100GCS
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
55 mm
NO-NC
45 mm
NO-NC
2 4 6 98 96
With Ground Fault for Direct Mount to XT Contactors
30
31
32
XTCE007B,
XTCE009B,
XTCE012B,
XTCE015B
0.331.65
XTCE018C,
XTCE025C,
XTCE032C
0.331.65
420
33
34
F, G
35
36
XTOE020BGS
XTOE1P6CGS
XTOE005CGS
420
ZEB32-20-GF
XTOE020CGS
ZEB32-45-GF
XTOE045CGS
ZEB65-45-GF
XTOE045DGS
ZEB65-100-GF
XTOE100DGS
ZEB150-100-GF
XTOE100GGS
XTCE080F,
XTCE095F,
XTCE115G,
XTCE150G,
XTCE170G
20100
97 95
NO-NC
XTOE005BGS
ZEB12-20-GF
ZEB32-1.65-GF
945
45 mm
XTOE1P6BGS
ZEB32-5-GF
XTCE040D,
XTCE050D,
XTCE065D,
XTCE072D
2 4 6 98 96
45 mm
97 95
20100
NO-NC
55 mm
2 4 6 98 96
55 mm
97 95
NO-NC
2 4 6 98 96
Table 30.3-32. XT Electronic Overload Relays for use with Large Frame XT Contactors (LR)
Use CTs and 1-5A XT overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).
XT
Contactor
Frame
For Use with

IEC Contactor
Ampere Range
(AC-3)
38
L, M
185500A
60300
39
M, N
300820A
40
41
37
2 4 6 98 96
ZEB12-1.65-GF
ZEB12-5-GF
15
945
97 95
15
CT Range
(Amps)
Description
CT Kit
Catalog
Number
Terminal
Size
Overload
Relay
Catalog
Number
Overload Relay
with Ground Fault
Catalog Number
300: 5 panel-mount
CT kit with integrated lugs
ZEB-XCT300
750 kcmil
(2) 250 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS
XTOE005CGSS
120600
600: 5 panel-mount
CT kit with integrated,
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT600
(2) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS
XTOE005CGSS
5801000A
2001000
1000: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT1000
(3) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS
XTOE005CGSS
1600A
3001500
1500: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT1500
(4) 750 kcmil

1/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS
XTOE005CGSS
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.3-15
Sheet 30 031

Table 30.3-33. XT Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount
Overload
Range (Amps)
Frame
Size
Contact
Sequence
Type
Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay with Ground

Fault Catalog Number
ZEB32-1.65/KK
XTOE1P6CCSS
XTOE1P6CGSS
Overload Relay
0.331.65
45 mm
1 3 5 97 95
22
23
15
ZEB32-5/KK
XTOE005CCSS
XTOE005CGSS
420
ZEB32-20/KK
XTOE020CCSS
XTOE020CGSS
ZEB32-45/KK
XTOE045CCSS
XTOE045CGSS
ZEB150-100/KK
XTOE100GCSS
XTOE100GGSS
25
26
2 4 6 98 96
945
20100
55 mm
24
Table 30.3-34. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Direct Mount to Freedom Series Contactors
For Use with Freedom
NEMA Contactor Size
For Use with

Contactor
00
CN15AN3_B
CN15BN3_B
CN15DN3_B
CN15GN3_B
3
CN15KN3_
Overload
Range (Amps)
Standard Feature Set

Catalog Number
Standard Feature Set with

Ground Fault Catalog Number
0.331.65
C440A1A1P6SF00
C440A2A1P6SF00
15
C440A1A005SF00
C440A2A005SF00
420
C440A1A020SF00
C440A2A020SF00
0.331.65
C440A1A1P6SF0
C440A2A1P6SF0
15
C440A1A005SF0
C440A2A005SF0
420
C440A1A020SF0
C440A2A020SF0
0.331.65
C440A1A1P6SF1
C440A2A1P6SF1
15
C440A1A005SF1
C440A2A005SF1
420
C440A1A020SF1
C440A2A020SF1
945
C440A1A045SF1
C440A2A045SF1
15
C440A1A005SF2
C440A2A005SF2
420
C440A1A020SF2
C440A2A020SF2
945
C440A1A045SF2
C440A2A045SF2
20100
C440B1A100SF3
C440B2A100SF3
CN15 contactor listed is non-reversing with a 120 Vac coil. For more options, see Volume 5Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E,
Tab 33, Section 33.1.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Table 30.3-35. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Use with NEMA Contactors Sizes 48
Use CTs and 1-5A C440 overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).
For Use with NEMA
Contactor Size
4 and 5
CT Range
(Amps)
60300
Description
CT Kit
Catalog Number
Terminal
Size
Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay with Ground

Fault Catalog Number
300: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT300
750 kcmil
(2) 250 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
C440A1A005SAX
C440A2A005SAX
35
120600
600: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT600
(2) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al
C440A1A005SAX
C440A2A005SAX
2001000
1000: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT1000
(3) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al
C440A1A005SAX
C440A2A005SAX
3001500
1500: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT1500
(4) 750 kcmil

1/0 Cu/Al
C440A1A005SAX
C440A2A005SAX
36
37
Table 30.3-36. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount

Overload
Range
Frame
Size
Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay with

Ground Fault Catalog Number
0.331.65
45 mm
C440A1A1P6SAX
C440A2A1P6SAX
15
C440A1A005SAX
C440A2A005SAX
420
C440A1A020SAX
C440A2A020SAX
945
C440A1A045SAX
C440A2A045SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B2A100SAX
20100
55 mm
34
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 032
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Table 30.3-37. Type AN19/59 Freedom Series Starters Non-Reversing and Reversing
NEMA
Size
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Service Limit
Current Rating
(Amps)
1
2
1
2
3
27
45
90
32
52
104
2
3
135
270
156
311
4
5
240V
480V
600V
Three-Pole
Non-Reversing
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Reversing
Catalog Number
1-1/2
3
1-1/2
3
2
5
2
5
AN19AN0_ 5E _
AN19BN0_ 5E _
AN59AN0_ 5E _
AN59BN0_ 5E _
3
7-1/2
7-1/2
10
25
7-1/2
15
30
10
25
50
10
25
50
AN19DN0_ 5E _
AN19GN0_ 5E _
AN19KN0_ 5E _
AN59DN0_ 5E _
AN59GN0_ 5E _
AN59KN0_ 5E _
40
75
100
200
100
200
AN19SN0_ 5E _
AN59SN0_ 5E _
50
100
C440 with Ground Fault Electronic Overload Relays

00
0
9
18
11
21
1/3
1
1
2
1
2
3
27
45
90
32
52
104
2
3
135
270
156
311
4
5
1-1/2
3
1-1/2
3
2
5
2
5
AN19AN0_ 5G _
AN19BN0_ 5G _
AN59AN0_ 5G _
AN59BN0_ 5G _
3
7-1/2
7-1/2
10
25
7-1/2
15
30
10
25
50
10
25
50
AN19DN0_ 5G _
AN19GN0_ 5G _
AN19KN0_ 5G _
AN59DN0_ 5G _
AN59GN0_ 5G _
AN59KN0_ 5G _
40
75
50
100
100
200
100
200
AN19SN0_ 5G _
AN59SN0_ 5G _
Underscore (_) indicates coils suffix required, see Coil Suffix table below.
Underscore (_) indicates OLR designation required, see C440 FLA Range table below.
Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4 contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300) and 15A C440
overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).
NEMA Size 5 starter available with 60300A panel-mounted CTs. Starter shipped as an assembled unit with 15A C440 overload relay
(C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).
Table 30.3-39. C440 FLA Range (FVNR and FVR Starters Only)
Suffix
Coil Volts and Hertz
NEMA Size
A
B
C
120/60 or 110/50
240/60 or 220/50
480/60 or 440/50
00
D
E
H
600/60 or 550/50
208/60
277/60
J
K
208240/60
240/50
380415/50
37
208V
1/3
1
Table 30.3-38. Coil Suffix Codes
36
230V
11
21
31
35
115V
9
18
34
Three-Phase
00
0
30
33
Single-Phase
C440 Electronic Overload Relays
32
Maximum UL Horsepower
N
T
U
550/50
24/60, 24/50
24/50
V
W
Y
32/50
48/60
48/50
OLR Code
FLA Range
OLR Code
FLA Rating
4.020A
1P6
0.331.65A
020
005
1.05.0A
1P6
0.331.65A
020
4.020A
005
1.05.0A
1P6
0.331.65A
020
4.020A
005
1.05.0A
045
9.045A
005
1.05.0A
045
9.045A
020
4.020A
100
20100A
4
300
60300A
5
300
60300A
Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4

contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300)
and 15A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or
C440A2A005SELAX).
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.3-17
Sheet 30 033
Accessories
Communication
Table 30.3-40. CT Kits
The C440 is provided with two levels

of communication capability.
Description
Catalog
Number
Safety Cover
Clear Lexan cover that mounts ZEB-XSC
on top of the FLA dial and
DIP switches when closed
Reset Bar
Assembles to the top of the
overload to provide a larger
target area for door-mounted
reset operators
ZEB-XRB
Remote Reset
Remote reset module
(24 Vdc)
C440-XCOM
Remote reset module

(120 Vac)
ZEB-XRR-120
Remote reset module

(24 Vac)
ZEB-XRR-24
Basic Communication via Expansion

ModuleMonitoring Only
Basic communication on the C440
is accomplished using an expansion
module. The expansion module
plugs into the expansion bay on
the C440 overload relay, enabling
communications with the overload via
their Modbus RTU (RS-485) network.
No additional parts are required.
Advanced Communication
Monitoring and Control
C440 also has the ability to communicate on industrial protocols such as
DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU
and Modbus TCP, and Ethernet
(planned) while providing control
capability using I/O.
An expansion module (mentioned
earlier) combined with a communication adapter and a communication
module allows easy integration onto
the customers network.
Communication Module
Customer can wire remote-mounted button

to reset module (i.e., 22 mm pushbutton,
catalog number M22-D-B-GB14-K10).
Basic CommunicationModbus
22
23
24
25
26
27
The communication adapter comes

standard with four inputs and two
outputs (24 Vdc or 120 Vac) while
providing the customer with flexible
mounting options (DIN rail or panel).
28
For more information about technical

data and specifications as well as
dimensions, see Volume 5Motor
Control and Protection, CA08100006E,
Section 31.
30
29
31
32
33
34
Communication Adapter
with Communication Module
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 034
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage

December 2012
30.4-1
Sheet 30 035
General Description
Low Voltage Reduced Voltage
22
Starter Selection Guide

In general, the application will determine the type of starter required. In cases where more than one type starter will meet
the application requirements, reference to the table below will show which starter is best suited for the application.
23
Table 30.4-1. Reduced Voltage Starting Characteristics and Index
24
Starter
Type
Starting Characteristics Expressed in %

of Rated Starting Values (Approximate)
Motor
Voltage
Motor
Current
Line
Current
Page
Remarks
25
Torque
30.4-2
Autotransformer
Class ECA42
80% Tap
65% Tap
50% Tap
26
80
65
50
80
65
50
67
45
28
64
42
25
The adjustable voltage taps permit wide adjustment of characteristics

in the field.
Part winding
Class ECA45
100
65
65
50
Requires part winding motor. A nine-lead 230/460V dual voltage motor

may be used in 230V applications. Closed transition.
30.4-3
Wye-delta
Class ECA48
Class ECA51
100
33
33
33
Requires delta wound motor with wye connections.

Ideal for long accelerations. Closed transition is available.
30.4-4
28
Solid-state
S801/811
S611
DS6/DS7
Ramps
0100%
Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Compatible with NEMA Design A, B or C motors.

092%
092%
085%
Adjustable ramp up and ramp down.
30.5-1
thru
30.5-49
29
30
Includes autotransformer magnetizing current.
General Application
The following factors should be
considered when applying reducedvoltage starters to a squirrel cage
motor-driven load.
1. The motor characteristics that will
satisfy the starting requirements of
the load.
2. The source of power and the effect
the motor starting current will have
on the line voltage.
3. The load characteristics and the
effect the motor starting torque will
have on the driven parts
during acceleration.
The starter protection required to
protect the load, motor, starter, cables
and power source during overload,
undervoltage and fault conditions.
A typical NEMA B motor started with
full voltage will develop as much as
150% full-load torque when started with
a starting current of around 600% fullload current. These values may exceed
the mechanical limitations of the load

or electrical limitations of the source, or
both.
A reduced-voltage or reduced-inrush
starter will reduce both starting current
and starting torque. Care must be taken
when meeting power company limitations that the motor will produce sufficient torque to accelerate the load to
near rated speed.
Part-winding starters are suited to
low starting torque loads such as
fans, blowers and m-g sets. Autotransformer starters should be used with
hard to start loads such as reciprocating compressors, grinding mills, and
pumps. Wye-delta starters are applicable to high inertia loads with long acceleration times which as centrifugal
compressors and centrifuges.
All starters, in addition to overload protection, will provide either low voltage
release or low voltage protection
depending upon the pilot device used
with the starter. Low voltage release,

where power is applied to the motor
after a power failure, can be obtained by
using a two-wire pilot device
(temperature, switch and so on). Low
voltage protection, where power is not
applied to the motor after a power failure
until restarted by an operator, can be
obtained by using three-wire control
such as START STOP pushbuttons.
300
Autotransformer
Starting on 65% Tap
Full Load Current
Full Load
Speed
Figure 30.4-1. Autotransformer Starting
CA08104001E
34
35
36
Solid-state starters are ideally suited for

many loads including conveyor applications since they provide controlled
acceleration from zero to full load.
37
UL listingCombination E176513,
Non-Combination E19224.
38
500
Part Winding Starting
400
300
40
700
Full Voltage Starting
600
Wye-Delta Starting
(Closed Transition)
200
Full Load Current
100
0
Motor Speed
Full Load
Speed
Figure 30.4-2. Wye-Delta or Part

Winding Starting
Line Current, % of Full Load
400
500
Motor Speed
33
Eaton also offers a line of solid-state

reduced-voltage starters known as
Easy-start.
700
Full Voltage Starting

600
32
39
700
100
31
Closed transition wye-delta types

require adequate ventilation to remove
resistor heat.
200
27
600
41
500
400
300
KVA
42
200
100
0
Torque
20
Motor Speed
40
60
80
100
Full Load Speed
Figure 30.4-3. Solid-State Starter
43
30.4-2 Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage

December 2012
Sheet 30 036
Autotransformer Type
29
30
31
32
33
34
25%
42%
64%
28%
45%
67%
Not included 50 hp and below.

Includes transformer magnetizing current.
Closed transition is standard on all

sizes ensuring a smooth transition
from reduced to full voltage. Since
the motor is never disconnected from
the line there is no interruption of line
current which can cause a second
inrush during transition.
(1S)
(2S)
(3-Pole) (3-Pole)
230V, 60 Hz
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
30
50
100
200
300
450
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
460575V, 60 Hz
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
25
50
100
200
400
600
900
An overload, opening the STOP pushbutton or other pilot device de-energizes the (R) contactor removing the
motor from the line.
Other Types
1S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8.
Autotransformer starters are also

available in combination and reversing
types.
Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram)

Closing the START button or other
pilot device energizes the start contactor
R
Duty cycle of these starters is as follows:

up to 200 hp, 15 seconds on each
4 minutes for 1 hour, repeated after
2 hours. Over 200 hp, three periods
of 30 seconds ON, 30 seconds OFF
repeated after 1 hour.
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
CKT BKR
or
SW & FU
3C
2S
RVNR AUTOXFMR (3-coil)

#1
#2
2S
#3
5C
5E
5D
37
38
39
TB1
42
43
1D
TBX2
TB1
Stop
TB2
Start
On-Delay
1.5 15 Sec.
TR
2
7
TB3
OTT "E"
TB4
95
A three-pole (1S) and a three-pole

contactor (2S) connect the motor to the
auto-transformer for reduced-voltage
starting (see Table 30.4-3 for size).
5 51
2S
TB1
TB1
Off
52 A1
53
1S
PS
Auto
1S
A1
A2
96 B
"D"
Auto-Transformer
Overtemp SWa
A2
2S
TB3
8 TR
Hand
6 54
1S
55
A1
A2
T
T
Figure 30.4-4. Typical Schematic Diagram

Table 30.4-4. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom
Reduced Voltage Enclosures
Size
40
41
1S
T3
Contactors(1S) (2S) (Run)
A three-pole contactor (Run) bypasses

the autotransformer and connects the
motor for full-voltage across-the-line
running (see Table 30.4-3 for size).
T2
1S
Run
36
T1
10
Design Features
35
OL
Stopped
1S
1C
3E
3D
2S
1S
0%
28
50%
65%
80%
Line Inrush
% Locked
Ampere
Starting
0%
27
Starting Torque
% Locked
Torque
Run
0%
Tap
Contactor
100%
Table 30.4-2. Starting Characteristics
Starter
65%
26
NEMA Size
80%
25
Maximum
hp
(1S). The interlock (1S) closes, energizing the timing relay (TR) and contactor
(2S) which seal in through the interlock
(2S). With the (1S) and (2S) contactors
closed, the motor is connected through
the autotransformer for reduced-voltage
start. After a preset time interval, the
(TRTO) contacts time open, de-energizing contactor (1S) and connecting the
autotransformer as a reactor in series
with the motor. Interlock (1S) immediately energizes the run contactor (R)
which seals in through its interlock (R).
The run contacts are now closed, and
the motor is running at full voltage.
Start contactor (2S) and relay (TR) are
de-energized when interlock (R) opens.
1
100%
24
Autotransformer type starters are

the most widely used reduced-voltage
starter because of their efficiency and
flexibility. All power taken from the line,
except transformer losses, is transmitted
to the motor to accelerate the load. Taps
on the transformer allow adjustment of
the starting torque and inrush to meet
the requirements of most applications.
The following characteristics are produced by the three voltage taps:
Table 30.4-3. NEMA Contactor Size

Guidelines within Autotransformer Starters
65%
23
General Description
100%
22
Type 1
Box
Shipping
No.
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Type 3R, 4X, 12

Box
Shipping
No.
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Class 42: AutotransformerNon-combination

Class 43: Autotransformerwith Disconnect
Class 44: Autotransformerwith HMCP
24
5
6
6
7
8
9

E2
F1E
F1E
F2E
F2E
F2E

124 (56)
885 (402)
1220 (554)
1400 (636)

E2
F1E
F1E
F2E
F2E
F2E
149 (68)
1010 (459)
1345 (611)
1525 (692)

Non-combination and breaker.

Consult factory.

CA08104001E

December 2012
30.4-3
Sheet 30 037
Part-Winding Type
General Description
Overload Relay(OL)
Part-winding starting provides convenient, economical one-step acceleration

at reduced current where the power
company specifies a maximum or
limits the increments of current drawn
from the line. These starters can be
used with nine-lead dual-voltage
motors on the lower voltage and with
special part-winding motors designed
for any voltage. When used with dualvoltage motors, it should be established that the torque produced by
the first half-winding will accelerate the
load sufficiently so as not to produce
a second undesirable inrush when the
second half-winding is connected to the
line. Most motors will produce a starting torque equal to between 1/2 to 2/3
of NEMA standard values with half of
the winding energized and draw about
2/3 of normal line current inrush.
Two three-pole Type B overload

relays provide starting and running
(1M) which seals in through its interlock (1M) and energizes the timer (TR).
The (1M) contacts connect the first
half-winding of the motor across the
line. After a preset time interval, the
timer (TRTC) contact closes energizing
contactor (2M). The (2M) contact connects the second half-winding of the
motor across-the-line.
Timing Relay(TR)
An electrically operated pneumatic
relay provides accurate, adjustable
start-to-run transfer timing.
Opening the STOP button or other

pilot device de-energizes contactors
(1M), (2M) and timer (TR), removing
the motor from the line.
Other Types
Part-winding Type ECN45 starters are
also available in combination (Type 46
and 47), reversing and three-point
(primary resistor) types.
Contactor
Closing the START button or other pilot

device energizes the start contactor
1M
2M
Part Winding
Design Features
L1
L2
L3
L3
1M
OL
#1
#2
CKT BKR
or
SW & FU
Start
OL
T9
Starter
Contactor
(1M)
(2M)
230V, 60 Hz
15
25
50
75
150
300
1 PW
2 PW
3 PW
4 PW
5 PW
6 PW
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 PW
2 PW
3 PW
4 PW
5 PW
6 PW
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
460575V, 60 Hz
15
40
75
150
350
600
29
TBX2
Stopped
31
8
G
R
TB1
TB2
Start
TB1
A1
TB3
On-Delay
1M
PS
Auto
TB1
Stop
TB1
TB3
T.C. = Timed Closing
T
Hand
A1
1M
1.5
TR
E
2M
A2
TB4
(1M)
OL
(2M)
OL
96
32
7
A2
33
Figure 30.4-5. Typical Schematic Diagram
34
Table 30.4-7. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom

Reduced Voltage Enclosures
35
Size
Type 1
Box
Shipping
No.
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Type 3R, 4X, 12

Box
Shipping
No.
Weight
Lbs (kg)
36
Class 45: Part WindingNon-combination

2PW
3PW
4PW
5PW
6PW
7PW
8PW
3
9
E
F1E
F2E
F2E
25 (11)
47 (21)
125 (47)
780 (354)

7
9
E
F1E
F2E
F2E
37
75 (34)
95 (43)
38
180 (82)
880 (400)
39

Class 46: Part Windingwith Disconnect

Class 47: Part Windingwith Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Circuit Breaker
2PW
3PW
4PW
5PW
6PW
6PW
7PW
8PW

CA08104001E
28
Run
Table 30.4-5. NEMA Contactor Size

Guidelines within Part Winding Starters
NEMA Size
26
30
T8
1M
25
27
T7
Off
Maximum
hp
Run
Select Overload Heater Packs for 50%

of Rated Full Load Motor Current
T1
Contactors(1M) (2M)
7
24
T3
#3
2M
A three-pole contactor (1M) connects

only the first half-winding of the motor
for reduced inrush current on starting
(see table below for size). A three-pole
contactor (2M) connects the second
half-winding of the motor for running
(see table below for size).
23
Table 30.4-6. Contactor Sequence
L1
L2
22
C
D
E
F1E
F1E
F2E
F2E
F2E
68 (31)
162 (74)
230 (104)
440 (200)
440 (200)
515 (234)

C
D
E
F1E
F1E
F2E
F2E
F2E
40
88 (40)
190 (86)
270 (123)
530 (241)
620 (281)
41
42

43
Consult factory.
Fusible.


December 2012
Sheet 30 038
Wye-Delta Type
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
General Description
Wye-delta type starters are applied

extensively to industrial air conditioning installations because they are particularly suited for starting motors
driving high inertia loads with resulting
long acceleration times. They are not,
however, limited to this application.
When six- or 12-lead delta-connected
motors are started wye-connected,
approximately 58% of line voltage is
applied to each winding and the motor
develops 33% of full-voltage starting
torque and draws 33% of normal
locked-rotor current from the line.
When the motor is accelerated, it is
reconnected for normal data operation.
Closing the START button or other pilot

device energizes contactor (1S) whose
contacts connect the motor in a wye
connection. Interlock (1S) closes, energizing contactor (1M) and timer (TR).
The (1M) contacts energize the motor
windings in a wye. After a preset time
interval, timer (TRTC) contact closes
energizing contactor (2S). Interlock (2S)
opens, dropping out contactor (1S).
The motor is now energized in series
with the resistors. Interlock (1S) closes,
energizing contactor (2M), bypassing
the resistors and energizing the
delta connected motor at full voltage.
30
An overload, opening the STOP button

or other pilot device de-energizes contactors (1M) and (2M), removing the
motor from the line. (TRP) de-energizes
and locks out the control circuit if the
duty cycle of the transition resistors
is exceeded.
Wye-delta Class ECN51 closed transition
starters are also available in combination types and Class ECN48 open
transition non-combination and
combination starters.
Elementary Diagram
Design Features
Shop Note:
Refer to Figure 2. Connect Green Ground
Wire to Panel Using Hole Located Adjacent
to Transformers Mounting Foot.
Contactors(1S) (1M) (2S) (2M)
29
Interlock opens, de-energizes the timer

(TR) opening timer (TRTC) thus energizing contactor (2S).
T4
1S
T1
G
R
36
10
25
50
75
150
300
500
800
39
1 YD
2 YD
3 YD
4 YD
5 YD
6 YD
7 YD
8 YD
42
15
40
75
150
300
700
1000
1500
43
1 YD
2 YD
3 YD
4 YD
5 YD
6 YD
7 YD
8 YD
55
A1 2M A2
W
Closed Transition
L1
L2
L3
L2
or
L3 SW & FU
2M
T6
T4
T5
#2
#3
1S
(1S)
1S
2S
(2S)
1M
T3B
1S
Contactor
(2M)
T.O. = Timed Opening

T.C. = Timed Closing
1S
NEMA Size
Starter
A1 1M A2
OL
95 96
Figure 30.4-6. Wye-DeltaOpen Transition
Select Overload Heater Coils

for 58% of Rated Full Load
Motor Current
OL
T1
T2
T3
T1A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
T2A
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1S
Stopped
2M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8.
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
TBX2
R
TB1
TB1
Stop
On-Delay 1.5
Start
TB2
TB3
1S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Motor
Run
460575V, 60 Hz
41
54
T.C.
230V, 60 Hz
38
40
8 TR 6
Table 30.4-8. NEMA Contactor Size Guidelines
(1M)
37
OFF
Hand
A three-pole contactor (2M) energizes

the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during running to connect the motor in delta
(see Table 30.4-8 for size).
Max.
hp
53
TB4
1M
TB3
T2B
35
52
Resistor
34
T.O.
1S
TBX2
Run
TR 7
E
A1 1S A2
T1B
33
2M
51
8 TR 5
PS
Auto
Stopped
ON-Delay 1.5-15 Seconds 2
TB3
1M
TB1 TB1
A three-pole contactor (2S) connects

resistors in series with the motor windings during the start-to-run transition
period (see Table 30.4-8 for size).
1S
Resistor
32
Start
Resistor
31
TB2
Stop
Motor
Select Overload Heater Coils for 58%

of Rated Full Load Motor Current
2M
TB1 TB1
T5
T2
T3
1S
A three-pole contactor (1M) energizes

motor leads T1-T2-T3 for both wye and
delta connections (see Table 30.4-8
for size).
1S
OL
1M
L1 Circuit Breaker 1
2
L2 or Switch
L3 and Fuse
3
1S
2M
Wye-Delta Open Transition
L1
L2
L3
A three-pole contactor (1S) shorts

the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during
starting to connect motor in wye
(see Table 30.4-8 for size).
T6
51
2S
52
A1
1 TR 3
Off
53
T
T.C.
PS
Auto
TB1
7
A2
TB4 1
4
.
1M
TB1
A1
TRP
2S
95
96
7
A2
TB3
1S
Hand
54
A1
A2
56
A1
A2
1M
8
55
1S
T
T.C.
Figure 30.4-7. Wye-DeltaClosed Transition
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.4-5
Sheet 30 039
Wye-Delta Type
Table 30.4-9. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Reduced Voltage Enclosures
Size
Type 1
Box No.
Shipping Weight
Lbs (kg)
22
Type 3R, 4X, 12

Box No.
Shipping Weight
Lbs (kg)
23
Classes 48 & 51: Wye-DeltaNon-combination

Classes 49 & 52: Wye-Deltawith Disconnect
Classes 50 & 53: Wye-Deltawith Thermal
Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker
2YD4YD
5YD
6YD
6YD
7YD
8YD

E
F1E
F1E
F2E
F2E
F2E
185 (84)
605 (275)
635 (288)
715 (325)

24
E
F1E
F1E
F2E
F2E
F2E
225 (102)
705 (320)
735 (334)
830 (377)
25
26

Fusible.
Consult factory.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 040
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-1
Sheet 30 041
General DescriptionSolid-State Reduced Voltage
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
Centrifugal and screw compressors

Material handling equipment
Fans and blowers
Pumps
Cranes and hoists
Food processing
Machinery
Rock crushers
HVAC industry
Enclosure Types
Reduced Voltage Starters
General Description
Eaton offers a complete line of solidstate reduced voltage devices ranging

from fractional horsepower applications to 1000A devices. The line comes
in voltages from 200 to 600 Vac and
operates on 50 or 60 Hz applications.
Units can be ordered as open
components or mounted in enclosures
(NEMA 1, 3R, 4X and 12). Motor
control center (MCC) mounting is
also possible with units through 700 hp
fitting inside of a standard MCC.
Eatons soft starters can be applied in

a wide array of customer applications.
Typical benefits of soft starters
include:
These soft starters provide reduced

voltage starting of AC induction motors.
Motor voltage is controlled by means
of back-to-back SCRs (silicon controlled
rectifiers) providing a smooth, stepless
start (and stop) of the motor driven load.
For more information, please
visit the Eaton Web site at
Designed to control acceleration and
deceleration of three-phase motors,
products are available from 0.25 to
50A and are suitable for mounting in a
variety of enclosures including Type 1,
12, 3R, 4, 4X and 7/9.
Reduced starting torque stress on

mechanical equipment, allowing
longer life of belts, gears, pulleys and
motor shafts commonly weakened
during across-the-line starting
Reduction of voltage drop during
starting on weak utility systems
where the performance of nearby
equipment would be negatively
affected
Reduced inrush current during
starting which can result in lower
utility bills due to the reduction in
peak current demand charges
Smooth, stepless starting of a
motor, allowing superior flexibility
over typical electromechanical
starting methods
Ability to start large loads on backup
generators during power outages
Elimination of the water-hammer
effect in hydraulic systems, which
can help to eliminate additional pipe
hangers and extend the life of the
system, pumps, valves and gaskets
Airborne particulate may be detrimental

to starter performance and reliability,
so caution must be exercised in
choosing the enclosure best suited
to the environment. The NEMA rating
of the enclosure defines its ability
to withstand the ingress of foreign
particulate as described below:
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
NEMA 1
A general purpose, indoor-type
enclosure.
NEMA 12
A dust-tight and drip-tight enclosure
for indoor industrial applications.
30
31
NEMA 3R
32
Enclosures are intended for outdoor

use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection against falling rain, sleet
and external ice formation.
33
NEMA 4
34
A watertight and dust-tight enclosure

for either indoor or outdoor use.
35
NEMA 4X
Identical to NEMA 4, with the additional
requirement that the enclosure be
corrosion-proof as well.
36
NEMA 7/9
37
Enclosures capable of preventing the

entrance of dust and withstanding
pressure resulting from an internal
explosion of specified gas.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 042
General Description
22

Table 30.5-1. Solid-State Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System
23
EC S 90 S 1 C A A
24
Type
S = Solid-state
25
26
27
28
29
Class
90 = Non-combination reduced voltage
soft starterS801
32
33
34
= None
= 30A/250V R
= 30A/600V R
= 60A/250V R
= 60A/600V R
= 100A/250V R
G = 100A/600V R
H = 200A/250V R
J = 200A/600V R
K = 400A/250V R
L = 400A/600V R
M = 600A/250V R
A
B
C
D
E
= None
= 3A
= 7A
= 15A
= 30A
F = 50A
W = 70A
G = 100A
H = 150A
J = 250A
91 = Combination reduced voltage

soft starterfusible disconnectS801
93 = Non-combination reduced voltage

soft starterS811
soft starterfusible disconnectS811
soft startercircuit breakerS811
Z
1
2
3
4
= 240
= 304
= 360
= 420
= 500
K
L
P
Q
= 400A
= 600A
= 1200A
= 1600A
Cover Control
Voltage
S801/S811
= 37
= 66
= 105
= 135
= 180
= 600A/600V R
= 800A/600V L
= 1200A/600V L
= 1600A/600V L
= 2000A/600V L
= By description
See Table 30.6-3 for options
Amperes
Q
S
V
W
Y
N
P
Q
R
S
T
Breaker

soft startercircuit breakerS801
30
31
A
B
C
D
E
F
5 = 650
6 = 720
7 = 850
8 = 1000
B = 230V
C = 460V
D = 575V
E = 200V
Q = 24 Vdc
Enclosure Type
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 3R
3 = Type 4
4 = Type 4X (304-Grade SS)
6 = Type 7/9
8 = Type 12
9 = Type 4X (316-Grade SS)
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2012

30.5-3
Sheet 30 043
General Description
Table 30.5-2. Solid-State Product Comparison
22
Description
S801
Soft Starter
S811 Communicating
Soft Starter
Maximum current range

Start type
Operating voltage
11000A
Ramp or current limit
200600 Vac
11000A
Ramp or current limit
200600 Vac
23
Operating frequency
Control voltage
Kick start
4763 Hz
24 Vdc
02 seconds adjustable
4763 Hz
24 Vdc
02 seconds adjustable
24
Ramp time range

Initial torque setting
Current limit setting
0.5180 seconds
0%85%
0%550%
0.5180 seconds
0%85%
0%550%
25
Soft stop
Pump control option
Overtemperature protection
060 seconds
Yes
Yes
060 seconds
Yes
Yes
26
Overload
Overload setting
Trip class setting
Phase loss/unbalance
Jam
Stall
Phase reversal
Yes
30%100%
5, 10, 20 and 30
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
30%100%
5, 10, 20 and 30
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
27
Jog
Extended start
LED status indication
LED fault indication
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCDYes
LCDYes
29
Table 30.5-3. Application and Environmental Considerations

The installation environment for a solid-state reduced voltage starter is of a prime concern. Conditions such as ambient
temperature, altitude and the presence of corrosives or moisture must all be considered when choosing the appropriate
starter size and enclosure type.
28
30
31
Description
S801
Soft Starter
S811 Communicating
Soft Starter
32
Temperatureoperating (No derating)

Current rating (50C)
Limited duty cycle (50C)
25C to 40C
100%
Fully rated
30C to 50C
100%
Fully rated
33
Current rating (60C)

Limited duty cycle (60C)
Temperaturestorage
Altitude (meters)
10% reduction
Continuous duty cycle at 90%
40C to 70C
2000
Consult factory
Consult factory
50C to 70C
2000
34
Note: Consult factory for applications outside of these parameters for additional information and sizing requirements.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 044
General Description
22
23
Multi-Motor Operation
The S801/S811 line can be used
to control multiple motors if the
following conditions are met:
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
The current rating of the S801/S811

should be equal to or greater than
the total of the individual motor
full load amperes and the S801/S811
overload must be set for the
cumulative full load amperes
of the motors
Individual motor overcurrent
protection is provided by
other devices
The motors should not be
mechanically coupled together,
i.e., two motors on same shaft
NEC and local code requirements
for individual motor protection
and branch short circuit protection
are met
Motors are closely matched in total
load and size
Frequent Starting/Stopping
The number of starts and stops
allowable depends upon many factors.
The most important ones are:
1. Set level of the starting current limit
33
2. Start time
3. Run time
34
35
36
37
38
39
4. Off time before next start

The number of starts per hour is based
on the current carrying capacity of
the SCRs. A high start/stop duty may
require the oversizing of a soft starter.
If a high number of multiple starts
occur, the starter may trip due to the
overload protection for the motor or
it may trip on overtemperature of the
soft starter. In this situation, it is advisable to wait a period of 10 minutes
before restarting to avoid damage to
the soft starter and motor and allow
the units to cool down. The motor
manufacturer should be consulted
about the effect of a high number
of multiple starts on motor life.
Starting Torque
The reduced voltage applied to the
motor results in reduced inrush
current and a soft start. However,
it reduces the starting torque of the
motor. The relationship is as follows:
Torque at reduced current
---------------------------------------------------------------------- =
Torque at full current
2
Current at reduced voltage

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Current at full voltage
EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 1800 RPM, 460V
NEMA B motor draws six times full
load amperes for starting, and starting
torque is 150% of full load torque.
If the same motor were started with
the S801 at 300% current limit, then
the available torque would be:
2
90,000- =
300 = ------------------------------360,000
600
1/4 x 150% full load torque =
EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 480V NEMA B

motor has a full load current of 125
amperes. A typical soft start on this
motor is 300% current limit for 40
seconds. The heat generation during
this time period is:
125 amperes x 300% =
375 watts for 40 seconds
At the end of the ramp, the bypass
contactor closes and total heat generation is reduced to much lower levels.
NEMA Design C and D Motors,

Wound Rotor Motors
These motors are used due to their
high starting torque characteristics.
When high starting currents and high
starting torques are required, it may
be necessary to order the extended
ramp option and oversize the soft
starter to match the application
requirements. Consult the factory
for application considerations.
37.5% full load torque available
Heat Generation
Due to the voltage drop that occurs
across a SCR, there is heat generated
in the unit. For sizing an enclosure
or box size for the soft starters, it is
important to account for this heat
generation.
The S801/S811 lines use a bypass
contactor, so heat generation is minimized. During steady-state conditions,
it generates about the same amount of
heat as an across-the-line starter of the
same size. During start and stopping
ramps it will generate three watts of
heat per ampere.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-5
Sheet 30 045
General Description
Solid-State Reduced
Voltage Starters
Table 30.5-5. Combination Solid-State

Reduced Voltage
Rating
SSRV

Table 30.5-4. Non-combination Solid-State
Reduced Voltage
Rating
SSRV
Non-combination
Box No.
Box No.
37A
66A
105A
135A
180A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
B1
C
D
D
E
A1
A1
B1
C
E
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
E
E
E
E
E
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
7A
7A
7A
B1
C
240A
304A
360A
420A
500A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
240A
304A
360A
420A
500A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811

650A
720A
850A
S801/S811 F1E
S801/S811 F1E
S801/S811 F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
1000A
S801/S811 F1E
F1E
10
10
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
10
10
10
1000A
S801/S811
10
Box No.
37A
66A
105A
135A
180A
650A
720A
850A
Comb. with Comb. with

Fuses
HMCP
Enclosure space will also accommodate for

an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays,
CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes
space for a DNA module or MOV.
Contact Eaton for Box Dimensions not
shown in PG03300001E.
Enclosure space will also accommodate for

an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays,
CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes
space for a DNA module or MOV.
Same as footnote , but CPT is not included.
Upsize to B1 enclosure to include space for a
CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 046
S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter
22
S801 Solid-State Reduced

Voltage Soft Starter

Table 30.5-6. S801 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System
23
S 801 N66 N 3 S
S = Soft Starter
24
B
D
L
S
= Level sensing
= Inside the delta
= Extended ramp start
= Standard soft starter
overload
W = Without CIM (control
interface module)
801 = Non-combination Soft Starter
25
Ampacity Rating
N37 = 37A
N66 = 66A
R10 = 105A
R13 = 135A
T18 = 180A
T24 = 240A
T30 = 304A
U36 = 360A
U42 = 420A
26
27
28
S801 Reduced Voltage Soft Starters
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
U50
V36
V42
V50
V65
V72
V85
V10
= 500A
= 360A
= 420A
= 500A
= 650A
= 720A
= 850A
= 1000A
Eatons S801 line of reduced voltage

soft starters is very compact, multifunctional, easy-to-install and
easy-to-program. Designed to control
acceleration and deceleration of threephase motors, the line is available in
current ranges from 12 to1000A and
is suitable for mounting in motor
control centers or in enclosed control
(NEMA 1, 4, 4X and 12) applications.
that is adjustable from 30% to 100% of

rating and can be set for Trip Class 5,
10, 20 or 30. It also provides additional
protection for jam, stall, phase reversal,
phase loss, overtemperature, undervoltage and so on. Along with the
overload, the unit has a built-in run
bypass contactor. This device is closed
when the soft starter is up to speed
providing a low impedance bypass for
the SCRs and significantly reducing the
amount of heat that is generated in the
soft starter.
42
43
The S801 line uses a total of six SCRs

to control the motor (three matched
pairs). The unit has a built-in overload
N = No options
P = Pump control
V = 690V option
Not available on U-Frame.

U-Frame 500A unit does not have IEC Certification.
General Description
This product line is designed to compete

head-to-head with the high-end soft
starter market, offering improved
performance and dramatically smaller
size versus the competition. By having
the over-load functionality and bypass
contactors built into the unit, it reduces
the amount of wiring required during
installation and offers huge space
savings in the panel or enclosure.
The product is also designed to be
small enough to replace an existing
across-the-line starter (NEMA or IEC)
in the existing enclosure. This allows
customers to upgrade their existing
motor control centers and enclosed
control by replacing the starter they
have today with a soft starter, gaining
the benefits of lower utility charges,
longer component life and less stress
on products and material systems.
This size benefit allows users to save
the expense of replacing the existing
structure or adding a new one to
house a much larger soft starter.
3 = Three-pole device
The S801 is designed to work with

three-phase motors in a delta (threelead) configuration. The S801 works
with all motors from fractional horsepower up to motors requiring 1000A of
steady-state current. The built-in overload (in ranges from 12 to 1000A) and
run bypass contactor makes installation and setup quick and easy. The
overload also offers some advanced
protective functions to give additional
motor protection.
Stall
Phase reversal
Phase loss/unbalance
Shorted SCR detection
Overtemperature
Selectable ramp or current

limit start.
Kick Start:
Adjustable from 0%85%
initial torque
02.0 seconds adjustment time
Ramp Start:
Adjustable from 0%85%
initial torque
Current Limit Start:

Adjustable from 0%550% FLA
Soft Stop:
Adjustable from 0%60 seconds
With the pump control option, it is the

number one soft starter available for
pumping applications. The unique soft
stopping control provides a smooth
transition for stopping a motor and
eliminating the water-hammer
effect that can damage pipes, valves
and pumps.
Features
Built-in overload protection:

30%100% adjustment range
Trip Class 5, 10, 20 and 30
Jam
Built-in run bypass contact

24 Vdc control
IP20 finger protection
Optional pump control

IEC 947 compliant
EN 60947-4-2
CE marked
CSA certified
UL listed
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-7
Sheet 30 047
S801 Enclosed Soft Starter

Longer Life of System Equipment
With the impressive list of control
and protective functions, this new
line of products is designed to significantly increase the protection
it offers to system equipment (e.g.,
motors, belts, pumps and so on).
The benefit of increased system
equipment protection is longer
life and longer system equipment
uptime
Reduced Power DrawPower
control features like Ramp Start,
Current Limit Start and Jog Forward
provide maximum flexibility in
selecting start profiles, minimizing
both mechanical and electrical
stress while maximizing motor
performance
Improved SafetyS801 soft
starters offer fingerproof deadfront
construction, reducing the chance
of electrical shock. With the use
of 24 Vdc control power, pilot
devices and relays can be
operated more safely
Enclosed S801 Soft Starter
General Description
24 Vdc ControlS801 soft starters
superiority begins with the control
package that features 24 Vdc control
running a digital signal processor, or
DSP, and using a low impedance run
circuit, all of which contribute to the
S801 soft starters safety, advanced
functionality and compact size.
Built-in Overload ProtectionWith
most wye-delta starters, many of the
advanced features of the S801 are
functions that must be added at the
expense of cost and space. The S801
soft starter, for example, has built-in
overload protection (overloads must
be added to wye-delta starters). So,
S801 soft starters are more compact,
easier to wire and less costly than their
wye-delta counterparts.
01
02
03
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Enclosed Control
UL 508
IEC 947-4-2
EN 60947.2
CE marked EMC/LV directives
CSA22.2
31
32
33
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
Motor
T3
T1
T2
T3
34
35
IT Soft Start
36
L1 L2 L3
Power Supply
480 Vac24 Vdc
+ +

Lower Starting TorqueSystem cost

savings are significant with an S801
soft starter versus a full voltage starter.
With an S801 soft starter, mechanical
components can have longer life or
be reduced in size because of lower
starting torque values (250500% FLA
current with SSRV).
()
37
Applying Voltages Other Than
24 Vdc to Terminals P Thru 4
May Cause Serious Damage
to Soft-Start Control Board
Terminal Board
(+)
MX
Reset
4
(+)
Customer
Control
Device
MX
96
+
(Diode)
P
1
2
3
4
13
14
95
96
98
38
39
Figure 30.5-1. Wiring Diagram
CA08104001E
22
Schematic Diagram
Reduced Power ConsumptionThe

S801 soft starter costs less in terms
of power consumption. An S801 soft
starter also reduces line brown-outs
and decreases overall energy usage.
For example, an S801 soft starter
controls peak power demand while
a full-voltage starter can apply
600800% FLA on startup.
Fewer Mechanical ProblemsBecause

an S801 soft starter reduces stress on
a system by eliminating the jolts and
violent speed variations that full-voltage
starters introduce to a process,
fewer mechanical breakdowns
occur, improving the quality of
the product and process.
System Cost SavingsWith

improved reliability, longer life of
system equipment, reduced power
draw, space savings and improved
safety, you enjoy the benefit of a
significant improvement in system
uptime and a reduction in system
downtime resulting in overall
system cost saving
Time SavingsTime savings in
using S801 soft starters are achieved
through a quick and easy setup
procedure, user-friendly operational
design, the longer life of system
equipment and improved safety
ProductivityOverall, S801 soft
starters significantly improve your
productivity by saving you time and
money. This is demonstrated by
longer product life, longer runs
between breakdowns and the
ease of installation and operation
40
24V Inputs
DC Only
41
Run
Internal
Auxiliary
Contacts
Fault
24 Vdc
or
120 Vac
42
43

December 2012
Sheet 30 048
22
23
24
25
26

Base Ratings
Starting
Method
Ramp Current % Ramp Time Starts per Ambient

of FLA
Seconds
Hour
Temperature
Table 30.5-8 below is the base ratings for the S801 soft
starter. The tables included in this catalog are meant to
be a selection table for different applications, but to
match a unit to your exact application, consult with
your local Eaton representative or visit our Web site at
vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage
vs. Wye-delta
vs. 80% RVAT
vs. 65% RVAT
vs. 50% RVAT
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
29
30
31
Frame
Size
Maximum
Current
37
66
34
Three-Phase Motor
kW Rating (50 Hz)
230
380400
440
200V
Volt
Volt
Volt
1.0SF
230V
1.15SF
41
42
1.0SF
575V
1.15SF
1.0SF
1.15SF
10
20
10
15
10
20
10
20
25
50
20
40
30
60
30
50
S801N37N3S
S801N66N3S
105
135
30
40
55
63
59
80
30
40
25
30
40
50
30
40
75
100
60
75
100
125
75
100
S801R10N3S
S801R13N3S
180
240
304
51
75
90
90
110
160
110
147
185
60
75
100
50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
150
200
250
125
150
200
150
200
300
150
200
250
S801T18N3S
S801T24N3S
S801T30N3S
360
420
500
110
129
150
185
220
257
220
257
300
125
150
150
100
125
150
150
175
200
125
150
150
300
350
400
250
300
350
350
450
500
300
350
450
S801U36N3S
S801U42N3S
S801U50N3S
360
420
500
650
720
850
1000
110
129
150
200
220
257
315
185
220
257
355
400
475
560
220
257
300
425
450
500
600
125
150
150
250
100
125
150
200
150
175
200
250
300
350
400
125
150
150
200
250
300
350
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
250
300
350
450
500
600
700
350
450
500
600
700
900
1000
300
350
450
500
600
700
800
S801V36N3S
S801V42N3S
S801V50N3S
S801V65N3S
S801V72N3S
S801V85N3S
S801V10N3S

15 sec. start, 300% inrush, 40C, 1 start every 15 minutes. If these start parameters are exceeded, please refer to 290 mm V-Frame, 500A starter.
U-Frame 500A does not have IEC Certification.
Severe-Duty Ratings
Table 30.5-9. Severe-Duty Ratings
Table 30.5-10. Severe-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
40
460V
1.15SF
18.5
37
37
39
1.0SF
18.5
30
36
38
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
Catalog
Number
hp Rating (60 Hz)
Motor applications and customer needs come in many

different varieties. With the standard and severe duty rating
tables, we have attempted to provide guidelines on what
the S801 soft starter is capable of. If the application falls under
these categories, you can use these charts. For other applications, or when a question arises, contact Eaton Corporation
to assist you in selecting the proper soft starter.
35
3
3
3
2
3
4
10
18.5
32
33
30
10
20
20
20
20.
Table 30.5-8. Standard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
27
28
Table 30.5-7. Standard-Duty Ratings
Frame
Size
Maximum
Current
Starting
Method
Ramp Current % Ramp Time Starts per Ambient

of FLA
Seconds
Hour
Temperature
vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage
vs. Wye-delta
vs. 80% RVAT
vs. 65% RVAT
vs. 50% RVAT
450%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
30
10
65
25
40
60
4
10
3
4
4
4
Three-Phase Motor
kW Rating (50 Hz)
Catalog
Number
hp Rating (60 Hz)
230
380400
440
200V
Volt
Volt
Volt
1.0SF
230V
1.15SF
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
1.0SF
460V
1.15SF
1.0SF
575V
1.15SF
1.0SF
1.15SF
22
42
5.5
11
10
18.5
11
22
5
10
5
10
7-1/2
15
5
10
15
30
10
25
20
40
15
30
S801N37N3S
S801N66N3S
65
80
15
22
30
40
33
45
15
25
15
20
20
30
15
25
50
60
40
50
50
75
50
60
S801R10N3S
S801R13N3S
115
150
192
33
45
55
59
80
100
63
90
110
30
50
60
30
40
50
40
50
75
30
50
60
75
100
150
75
100
125
100
150
200
100
125
150
S801T18N3S
S801T24N3S
S801T30N3S
240
305
365
75
90
110
110
160
185
147
185
220
75
100
125
60
75
100
75
100
150
75
100
125
200
250
300
150
200
250
200
300
350
200
250
300
S801U36N3S
S801U42N3S
S801U50N3S
240
305
365
420
480
525
600
75
90
110
129
147
160
185
110
160
185
220
257
280
315
147
185
220
257
295
335
375
75
100
125
150
150
150
200
60
75
100
125
150
150
150
75
100
150
150
200
200
250
75
100
125
150
150
150
200
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
150
200
250
300
350
350
450
200
300
350
450
500
500
600
200
250
300
350
450
450
500
S801V36N3S
S801V42N3S
S801V50N3S
S801V65N3S
S801V72N3S
S801V85N3S
S801V10N3S
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-9
Sheet 30 049

Features
Benefits
Able to fit in place of existing

starters
Smallest unit on the market today
Very easy to install, wire and program
Reduces initial torque on motor
and loads
Able to control the maximum
inrush current
Elimination of water-hammer,
which can reduce installed cost of
pipe hangers and extend existing
system life
Less shock to product on conveyor
lines and material handling gear
24 Vdc control enhances personnel
and equipment safety
Reduced wear on belts, gears,

chains, clutches, shafts and bearings
Allows for controlling the inrush
current to the motor and reducing
electrical charges due to peak
energy demand
Reduced inrush current leads to
more stable power grid and can
lower peak demand charges
22
23
24
25
Table 30.5-11. Technical Data

Soft Starter
(Partial Catalog Number)
S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801
N37 N66 R10
R13
T18 T24 T30 U36 U42 U50 V36 V42 V50 V65 V72 V85 V10
26
Maximum current capacity
37
27
66
105
135
180
240
304
360
420
500
360
420
500
650

Width
Height
Depth
Weight in lbs (kg)
2.60 (66.1)
7.38 (187.4)
6.63 (168.4)
5.80 (2.6)
4.38 (111.3) 7.65 (194.3)

7.92 (201.2) 12.71 (322.8)
7.03 (178.6) 6.69 (169.9)
10.50 (4.8)
48.00 (21.8)
with lugs
41.00 (18.6)
without lugs
7.73 (196.3)
12.72 (323.1)
7.08 (179.9)
48.00 (21.8)
with lugs
41.00 (18.6)
without lugs
11.04 (280.4)
16.57 (420.9)
7.69 (195.3)
103.00 (46.0)with lugs
91.00 (41.4)without lugs
General Information
Bypass mechanical lifespan
Insulating voltage (Ui)
Ramp time range
Resistance to vibration
Resistance to shock
720
850
1000
28
29
30
10M
660V
0.5180 seconds (0.5360 seconds extended ramp)
3g
15g
31
Electrical Information
Operating voltage
Operating frequency
Overload setting
Trip class
32
200600V
4763 Hz
30%100%
5, 10, 20 and 30
33
Cabling Capacity (IEC 947)

Number of conductors
Wire sizes
Type of connectors
1
142
Box lug
1
144/0
Box lug
1 or 2
2/0 to 500 kcmil
Add-on lug kit
2, 4 or 6
2/0 to 500 kcmil
Add-on lug kit
34
Control Wiring (12-Pin)

Wire sizes in AWG
Number of conductors (stranded)
Torque requirements in lb-in.
Solid, stranded or flexible
maximum size in mm2
35
2214
2 (or one AWG 12)
3.5
3.31
36
Control Power Requirements

Voltage range (24 V 10%)
Steady state current amperes
Inrush current amperes
Ripple
21.626.4
1.0
10
1%
Relays (1) Class A and C

Voltage ACmaximum
Voltage DCmaximum
Amperesmaximum
240
120
3
21.626.4
1.4
10
1%
37
38
39
Environment
Temperatureoperating
Temperaturestorage
Altitude
Humidity
Operating position
Pollution degree (IEC 947-1)
Impulse withstand voltage
(IEC 947-4-1)
30C to 50C (no derating) consult factory for operation >50C

50C to 70C
<2000mconsult factory for operation >2000m
<95% noncondensing
Any
3
4000V
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Solid-State Starters
December 2012
Sheet 30 050
22

Voltage Soft Starters
23
The S811 offers an impressive array of

advanced protective features. Not only
are the protective features selectable,
but many offer variable settings allowing the user to fine-tune the starter to
meet specific system requirements.
24
25
26
27
S811 Soft Starter
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
stopping a motor and eliminating

the water-hammer effect that can
damage pipes, valves and pumps.
General Description
The S811 from Eaton offers all the
popular features of the S801, but adds
enhanced functionality with the new
DIM (Digital Interface Module) and
communications capabilities.
The S811 has an easy to use Digital

Interface Module (DIM) that allows the
user to configure the device and to
read system parameters. The DIM
includes an LCD display and keypad to
scroll through the various menus. The
DIM allows the user to modify control
parameters, enable or disable protections, set communication variables,
monitor system parameters such as
line voltages and currents, and access
the fault queue.
communication configuration settings

provide the system integrator with
powerful tools to facilitate system
optimization.
ONLN SS OXFDO1 H STOP
The S811 reduced voltage soft starter

is very compact, multi-functional,
easy to install and easy to program.
Designed to control the acceleration
and deceleration of three-phase
motors up to 690V, the line is available
from 11A through 1000A.
The S811 is designed to be a complete
package combining the SCRs, bypass
contactor and overload in one, very
compact unit. The S811 is available
as a component for panel mounting,
in motor control centers or in enclosed
control (NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 7/9
and 12).
motors, the S811 soft starter uses
silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) to
control the voltage to soft start and
soft stop the motor. After the motor is
started, internal run bypass contactors
close, resulting in the motor running
directly across-the-line. The built-in
solid-state overload protects the motor
from overload conditions with sophisticated algorithms that model true
motor heating, resulting in better
motor protection and fewer nuisance
trips. Advanced protective and
diagnostic features reduce downtime.
A voltage ramp start or current limit
start is available. Kick start is available
in either starting mode. The soft stop
option allows for a ramp stop time that
is longer than the coast to stop time.
The pump control option provides a
smooth transition for starting and
Monitoring
PREV
NEXT
ENTER
ESC
Figure 30.5-2. Digital Interface Module (DIM)

The DIM can be removed from the
S811 and remote mounted. Kits are
available to door mount the DIM,
enabling users to safely configure,
commission, monitor and troubleshoot the system at the electrical panel
without opening the enclosure door.
The S811 has built-in communications
capabilities that enable the soft starter
to be connected to a variety of
networks, including DeviceNet,
Ethernet, Modbus and PROFIBUS.
Multiple control components can be
connected to one Eaton gateway that
concentrates data from the devices
into a single node. Configuration is
simplea single press of the gateways
Auto Configuration button sets the
system up for default operation.
This automatically configures the I/O
assemblies to the system devices.
The DIM provides an intuitive,

easy-to-use human interface with
powerful configuration capabilities
to maximize system performance
Door or device mounted DIM
enables users to safely configure,
commission, monitor and troubleshoot the system at the electrical
panel without opening the
enclosure door
System operating parameters
can be monitored enterprise-wide
through a communications network.
Increase uptime by providing data
for process management and
preventive diagnostics
Run bypass mode greatly reduces
internal heating created by the
greater power dissipation in
the SCRs. Bypass contactor directly
connects the motor to the line and
improves system efficiency by
reducing internal power losses
Internal solid-state overload
protection provides accurate current
measurement and trip settings.
Sophisticated algorithms solve
a series of differential equations
that model true motor heating and
cooling, resulting in superior motor
overload protection while minimizing
nuisance trips. Advanced selectable
protective features safeguard the
motor and system against a variety
of system faults
Internal run bypass contactors and
overload protection eliminate the
need for additional devices, reducing
enclosure sizes, minimizing installation and wiring time and reducing
overall assembly size and cost
Wide range of overload FLA settings
(31100% of rated current) and a
selectable trip class (530) offers
users the flexibility to fine-tune the
starter to match specific application
requirements
The data from these devices are then

assembled into a single input and
output messages.
The S811 communication parameters
can be configured with the DIM or
through the network using CH Studio
Component Manager. Advanced
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-11
Sheet 30 051
Variable ramp times and torque

control settings provide unlimited
starting configurations, allowing for
maximum application flexibility
Kick-start feature enables soft
starting of high friction loads
Soft stop control for applications
where an abrupt stop of the load
is not acceptable
Pump control option with sophisticated pump algorithms on both
starting and stopping that minimize
the pressure surges that cause
water hammer. The pump control
option will maximize the life of the
pump and piping systems while
minimizing the downtime caused
by system failure
Six SCRs control all three motor
phases, providing smooth acceleration and deceleration performance
Soft acceleration and deceleration
reduces wear on belts, gears, chains,
clutches, shafts and bearings
Reduce the peak inrush current
stress on the power system
Minimize peak starting torque to
diminish mechanical system wear
and damage
24 Vdc control module enhances
personnel and equipment safety.
Removable, lockable control terminal
block reduces maintenance costs.
Also provides the opportunity for
OEMs to reduce assembly and
test costs by using pre-assembled
wire harnesses
Protective Features
All protective features can be
configured, enabled or disabled
with the DIM or through the
communications network.
Motor Overload
The S811 includes electronic overload
protection as standard. The overload
meets applicable requirements for a
motor overload protective device. The
overload protects the motor from over
heat conditions with the use of sophisticated algorithms that model true motor
heating, resulting in superior motor
protection and fewer nuisance trips.
The S811 calculates a thermal memory
value. A 100% value represents the
maximum safe temperature of the
motor. When the thermal memory
value reaches 100%, an overload trip
will occur removing power to the
motor. Upon trip, the S811 stores the
calculated motor heating value and
will not allow a motor re-start until the
motor has sufficiently cooled. This
feature ensures the motor will not be
CA08104001E
damaged by repeated overload trip,

reset and re-start cycles.
The thermal memory value can be
monitored through the DIM or the
communications network. The thermal
memory value can be of great use in
determining an impending overload
trip condition. Alarms can be implemented in the process monitoring
system warning of an impending
trip before a trip occurs halting the
process. Costly system downtime
can be avoided.
The trip current is adjusted to match
the specific application requirements
by entering the motor nameplate full
load current rating and trip class. The
FLA adjustment includes a 3 to 1
adjustment range. The overload trip
class is adjustable from class 5
through class 30. The overload is
ambient temperature compensated
meaning its trip characteristics will
not vary with changes in ambient
temperature. The overload protection
can be enabled, disabled, or disabled
on start.
Short Circuit
The use of a short-circuit protective
device in coordination with the S811
is required in branch motor circuits
by most electrical codes. Short-circuit
coordination ratings with both fuses
and Eatons molded case circuit
breakers are available providing
customers with design flexibility. The
S811 has short circuit coordination
ratings as an open component, an
enclosed starter, and in a motor
control center.
Jam
Excessive current and torque up to
locked rotor levels can occur in a jam
condition. The condition can result in
stress and damage to the motor, load,
mechanical system, and the electrical
distribution system. Jam protection
prevents the stress and damage from
a jam during normal run. After the
motor is started, a current greater than
300% FLA setting will cause the starter
to trip on a jam fault.
Stall
locked rotor levels can occur in a stall
condition. The condition can lead to an
overload trip and result in stress and
damage to the motor, load, mechanical system, and the electrical distribution system. Stall protection prevents
stress and damage to a motor that has
not come up to speed, or stalled after
the soft start time. The S811 will trip to
protect the system in the event that the
motor did not get to the rated speed in

the defined soft start period. A current
greater than 200% FLA at the end of
the soft start period will cause the
starter to trip on a stall fault.
22
23
Pole Over Temperature

High ambient temperatures, extended
ramp times and high duty cycle conditions may cause the S811 power pole
conductors to reach a temperature that
exceeds their thermal rating. The S811
is equipped with sensors that monitor
the temperature of the power poles.
Over temperature protection occurs
if the devices thermal capacity is
exceeded. The soft starter will trip
in over temperature conditions,
preventing device failure.
The device pole temperature value
can be monitored through the DIM or
the communications network. This
feature can be of use in determining
an impending over temperature trip
condition. Alarms can be implemented
in the process monitoring system
warning of an impending trip before a
trip occurs, halting the process. Costly
system shutdown can be avoided.
Phase Loss
Loss of a phase can cause a significant
increase in the current drawn in the
remaining two phases. Phase loss
can lead to motor damage before an
eventual overload trip occurs. Phase
loss is typically an indication of a
failure in the electrical distribution
system. The S811 will detect a phase
loss and trip if any phase current drops
below a preset value. The phase loss
trip level is adjustable from 0% to
100% of the average of the other two
phase levels with an adjustable trip
delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
Phase Imbalance
Phase current or voltage imbalance
can cause a significant increase in the
current drawn in the remaining two
phases. Phase imbalance can lead to
motor damage before an eventual
overload trip. Phase imbalance is
typically an indication of a failure in
the electrical distribution system or
the motor. The S811 will detect both
current and voltage phase imbalances
and trip if any phase becomes
imbalanced as compared to the
average of the other two phases.
The phase current imbalance trip level
is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the
average of the current in the other two
phases with an adjustable trip delay of
0.1 to 60 seconds.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2012
Sheet 30 052
22
23
The phase voltage imbalance trip level

average of the voltage in the other two
0.1 to 60 seconds.
Reset Mode
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
The S811 can be set up for automatic

or manual reset on trip. The manual
reset mode requires the operator to
physically press the RESET button
located on the soft starter. The overload can be manually reset through
the DIM or through the communications network. The overload can also
be electrically reset by energizing
a 24 Vdc input on the control
terminal block.
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Provides the average rms line

current as a percentage of the S811
FLA setting.
Provides three rms phase pole

currents in amps, accurate to within
2%. The pole current is the current
through the soft starter. The line and
pole current will be identical in in-line
applications, and will differ in insidethe-delta applications.
The S811 monitors the operation of

the power poles and will trip under an
open SCR condition.
Low Current
Average Line Current
Low current conditions can be a result

of a loss of load or a failure in the
mechanical system. The S811 has low
current protection that will trip if the
average rms current falls below a
preset value. The low current protection can be programmed as a percent
of motor FLA from 0% to 100%.
Provides the average of the threephase rms line currents in amps,

accurate to within 2%. Current data
can be used to indicate a need for
maintenance. Increased currents in
a fixed load application can indicate
a reduction in system efficiencies
and performance, signifying system
maintenance is due.
The automatic reset mode allows the

soft starter to be automatically reset as
soon as the trip condition is no longer
present. With the automatic reset
mode, after the fault is no longer
present, the motor will be restarted as
soon as a valid start signal is present.
The S811 can determine if the proper
line phase sequence is present by
default. The device will trip if the line
phase sequence is something other
than A-B-C. The S811 can be configured to operate under reversed
phase conditions (A-C-B).
Shorted SCR Detection
34
Average line current as a % FLA
High voltage conditions can result from

disturbances in the electrical power
distribution system. High voltage
conditions can cause malfunctions
or failures of electrical equipment.
The S811 has high voltage protection
that will trip if the average rms voltage
is greater than a preset value. The high
voltage protection can be programmed
as a percent of nominal voltage from
101% to 120% with a trip delay of 0.1 to
60 seconds.
The S811 has an impressive array of

system monitoring capabilities that
allow users to access real time process
and diagnostic data. This data can be
viewed at the device with the DIM or
Data over a communications network
can provide valuable insight into the
condition of the equipment and processes. Maintenance and production
personnel can monitor critical operational and maintenance data from a
central control station that can be
located far away from the production
facility. Process data can be monitored
to determine system anomalies that
may indicate a need for preventive
maintenance or an impeding failure.
Adjustments made through the communications network can reduce costs
by minimizing the time traveling to the
location where the motor controls are
located. When faults do occur, real
time fault data can assist maintenance
in troubleshooting and planning repair
resources. Remote reset signals can
be given to tripped devices without
the need for manual intervention by
maintenance personnel.
Phase Reversal
31
High Voltage

the power poles and will trip under a
shorted SCR condition.
Open SCR Detection
Low Voltage
Low voltage conditions can result from
distribution system. Low voltage
conditions can cause a malfunction
and damage to electrical equipment.
The S811 has low voltage protection
that will trip if the average rms
voltage falls below a preset value.
The low voltage protection can be
programmed as a percent of nominal
voltage from 1% to 99% with a
trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
Average Pole Current

Provides the average of the threephase rms pole currents in amps,
accurate to within 2%. The pole
current is the current through the
soft starter. The line and pole current
will be identical in in-line applications,
and will differ in inside-the-delta
applications.
Three-Phase Line Currents

Provides three rms phase line currents
in amps, accurate to within 2%.
Imbalances or changes in the relative
phase current to one another can
indicate anomalies in the motor or
Three-Phase Pole Currents
Three-Phase Line Voltages

Provides the individual rms threephase line voltages. Imbalances or
changes in the relative phase voltage
to one another can indicate anomalies
in the motor or electrical distribution
system. Voltage can be used to
monitor electrical distribution system
performance. Warnings, alarms and
system actions to low or high voltage
conditions can be implemented.
Percent Thermal Memory

Provides the real time calculated
thermal memory value. The S811
calculates thermal memory value. A
100% value represents the maximum
safe temperature of the motor. When
the thermal memory value reaches
100%, an overload trip will occur,
removing power to the motor.
The thermal memory value can be of
great use in determining an impending
overload trip condition. Alarms can be
implemented in the process monitoring system warning of an impending
trip before a trip occurs, halting the
process. Costly system downtime can
be avoided.
DC Control Voltage
Monitors level of the 24 Vdc control
voltage. Fluctuations in control voltage
can cause component malfunction and
failure. System control voltage data
can be used to implement warnings,
alarms and system actions to low or
high voltage conditions.
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-13
Sheet 30 053

Pole Temperature
Breaker Status
Increases in pole temperature are

caused by increases in ambient
temperature, start/stop times and
start duty cycles. Changes in pole
temperatures represent a change
in system operating conditions.
Identifying unexpected operating
conditions or changes can prompt
maintenance and aid in process
evaluation activities.
The S811 has provisions to read and

display circuit breaker status. Eaton
communicating cover control or
other communicating protective
device is required to take advantage
of this feature.
Device Temperature
An increase in device temperature is
a strong indication of an increase in
ambient temperature. High ambient
temperature operation can be identified with the device temperature data.
Ambient temperature increases can be
due to loss of enclosure cooling fans
or blocked venting. High ambient
temperatures will reduce the life of all
electrical equipment in the enclosure.
22
23
24
User Manual
Surge Suppressor
A comprehensive user manual is available and can be downloaded free of

charge from www.eaton.com/electrical
by performing a document search for
MN03902002E.
26
27
Accessories
Surge Suppressors
28
A surge suppressor can mount on

either the line or load side of the
S811 soft starter. It is designed to
clip the line voltage (or load side
induced voltage).
Start Count
Surge Suppressor Mounted on

a 200 mm Device
Table 30.5-12. Surge Suppressors
Start count data can be used to

monitor system output, schedule
preventative maintenance, identify
system anomalies and identify
changes in system operation.
Diagnostics
Fault Queue
Current fault and a fault queue
containing the last nine system
faults can be read through the DIM
or communications network. Fault
identification can minimize troubleshooting time and cost. The fault
queue can be remotely accessed
through a communications network
to assist in planning maintenance
resources. Thirty different faults
can be identified by the S811.
25
Description
Catalog
Number
600V MOV for 65 mm

and 110 mm units
600V MOV for 200 mm and
290 mm units
690V MOV for 200 mm and
290 mm units
EMS38
29
30
31
EMS39
EMS41
32
33

Table 30.5-13. S811 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System
S 811 T 30 N 3 S
34
35
S = Soft starter
811 = Non-combination Soft Starter
Frame Size
Control Status
N
R
T
U
V
The S811 provides data that represents

system conditions that can be read
through the DIM or the communications network. This data identifies the
status of the system and the control
commands the system is requesting
of the S811. This can be used for
advanced troubleshooting and
system integration activities.
= 65 mm
= 110 mm
= 200 mm
= 200 mm
= 290 mm
Ampacity Rating
37
66
10
13
18
24
30

= 37A
= 66A
= 105A
= 135A
= 180A
= 240A
= 304A
36 = 360A
42 = 420A
50 = 500A
65 = 650A
72 = 720A
85 = 850A
10 = 1000A

Not available in U-Frame.
S = Standard soft starter

(configurable for edge
or level control)
D = Inside-the-delta
L = Extended ramp start
W = Without DIM
3 = Three-pole device
N = No options
P = Pump control
V = 690V option
(Frame T18 through V85)
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 054
Starting and Stopping Modes
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
The S811 has a variety of starting and

stopping methods to provide superior
performance in the most demanding
applications. The motor can be started
in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current
Limit Start mode. Kick Start and Soft
Stop are available within both starting
modes.
Provides a voltage ramp to the motor
resulting in a constant torque increase.
The most commonly used form of soft
start, this start mode allows you to
set the initial torque value and the
duration of the ramp to full voltage
conditions. Bypass contactors close
after ramp time.
Adjustable initial torque 085%
of locked rotor torque
Adjustable ramp time 0.5180
seconds (can be extended with
factory modification)
Current Limit Start

Limits the maximum current available
to the motor during the start phase.
This mode of soft starting is used
when it becomes necessary to limit the
maximum starting current due to long
start times or to protect the motor.
This start mode allows you to set
the maximum starting current as a
percentage of locked rotor current
and the duration of the current limit.
Bypass contactors close after current
limit time.
Run (FLA)
Initial
Torque
Time (Seconds)
Maximum current of 085% locked

rotor current
seconds (can be extended with
factory modification)
Figure 30.5-3. Starting CharacteristicsRamp Start
Max.
Allowed
Run
100%
FLA
Time (Seconds)
Figure 30.5-4. Starting CharacteristicsCurrent Limit Start

100%
Run (FLA)
Kick Start
Selectable feature in both Voltage
Ramp Start and Current Limit Start
modes. Provides a current and torque
kick for 0 to 2.0 seconds. This
provides greater initial current to
develop additional torque to breakaway a high friction load.
41
100%
Voltage Ramp Start
Current
23
Locked Rotor Torque
Operation
Locked Rotor Torque
22
Kick
Start
Ramp
Time (Seconds)
Figure 30.5-5. Starting CharacteristicsKick Start
Run
085% of locked rotor torque

02.0 seconds duration
Soft Stop
42
43
Allows for a controlled stopping of a

load. Used when a stop-time that is
greater than the coast-to-stop time is
desired. Often used with high friction
loads where a sudden stop may cause
system or load damage.
Ramp
Time (Seconds)
Figure 30.5-6. Starting CharacteristicsSoft Stop
Stop time = 060 seconds

CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-15
Sheet 30 055
Product Selection
Motor applications and customer needs
come in many different varieties. With
the standard and severe duty rating
tables, we have attempted to provide
guidelines on what the S811 soft
starter is capable of. If the application

falls under these categories, you can
use these charts. For other applications, or when a question arises,
consult with your local Eaton
Representative or call our Technical
Resource Center at (877) ETN-CARE.
22
23
24
Table 30.5-14. Standard-Duty Ratings

Starting
Method
Ramp Current
% of FLA
Ramp Time
Seconds
Starts
per Hour
Ambient
Temperature
vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage
vs. Wye-delta
vs. 80% RVAT
vs. 65% RVAT
vs. 50% RVAT
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
30 sec.
10 sec.
20 sec.
20 sec.
20 sec.
20 sec.
3
3
3
2
3
4
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
25
26
27
Table 30.5-15. Product SelectionStandard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

Frame
Size
Max.
Current
37
66
Three-Phase Motor
kW Rating (50 Hertz)
Catalog
Number
hp Rating (60 Hertz)
230
380400
440
200V
Volt
Volt
Volt
1.0SF
230V
1.15SF
1.0SF
460V
1.15SF
1.0SF
575V
1.15SF
1.0SF
29
1.15SF
10
18.5
18.5
30
18.5
37
10
20
10
15
10
20
10
20
25
50
20
40
30
60
30
50
S811N37N3S
S811N66N3S
105
135
30
40
55
63
59
80
30
40
25
30
40
50
30
40
75
100
60
75
100
125
75
100
S811R10N3S
S811R13N3S
180
240
304
51
75
90
90
110
160
110
147
185
60
75
100
50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
150
200
250
125
150
200
150
200
300
150
200
250
S811T18N3S
S811T24N3S
S811T30N3S
360
420
500
110
120
150
185
220
257
220
257
300
125
150
150
100
125
150
150
175
200
125
150
150
300
350
400
250
300
350
350
450
500
300
350
450
S811U36N3S
S811U42N3S
S811U50N3S
360
420
500
650
720
850
1000
110
129
150
200
220
257
315
185
220
257
355
400
475
560
220
257
300
425
450
500
600
125
150
150
250
100
125
150
200
150
175
200
250
300
350
400
125
150
150
200
250
300
350
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
250
300
350
450
500
600
700
350
450
500
600
700
900
1000
300
350
450
500
600
700
800
S811V36N3S
S811V42N3S
S811V50N3S
S811V65N3S
S811V72N3S
S811V85N3S
S811V10N3S
500A rating does not have IEC Certification.
Table 30.5-16. Severe-Duty Ratings

Starting
Method
Ramp Current
% of FLA
Ramp Time
Seconds
Starts
per Hour
Ambient
Temperature
vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage
vs. Wye-delta
vs. 80% RVAT
vs. 65% RVAT
vs. 50% RVAT
450%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
30 sec.
10 sec.
65 sec.
25 sec.
40 sec.
60 sec.
4
10
3
4
4
4
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 056
22
Table 30.5-17. Product SelectionSevere-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

Frame
Size
Maximum Three-Phase Motor

Current
kW Rating (50 Hertz)
23
24
Catalog
Number
hp Rating (60 Hertz)
230
380400
440
200V
Volt
Volt
Volt
1.0SF
230V
1.15SF
1.0SF
460V
1.15SF
1.0SF
575V
1.15SF
1.0SF
1.15SF
22
42
5.5
11
10
18.5
11
22
5
10
5
10
7-1/2
15
5
10
15
30
10
25
20
40
15
30
S811N37N3S
S811N66N3S
25
65
80
15
22
30
40
33
45
15
25
15
20
20
30
15
25
50
60
40
50
50
75
50
60
S811R10N3S
S811R13N3S
26
115
150
192
33
45
55
59
80
100
63
90
110
30
50
60
30
40
50
40
50
75
30
50
60
75
100
150
75
100
125
100
150
200
100
125
150
S811T18N3S
S811T24N3S
S811T30N3S
240
305
75
90
110
160
147
185
75
100
60
75
75
100
75
100
200
250
150
200
200
300
200
250
S811U36N3S
S811U42N3S
240
305
365
420
480
525
600
75
90
110
129
147
160
185
110
160
185
220
257
280
315
147
185
220
257
295
335
375
75
100
125
150
150
150
200
60
75
100
125
150
150
150
75
100
150
150
200
200
250
75
100
125
150
150
150
200
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
150
200
250
300
350
350
450
200
300
350
450
500
500
600
200
250
300
350
450
450
500
S811V36N3S
S811V42N3S
S811V50N3S
S811V65N3S
S811V72N3S
S811V85N3S
S811V10N3S
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-17
Sheet 30 057
22
Table 30.5-18. SpecificationsS811 Soft Starter

Soft Starter
S811 S811 S811 S811 S811

N37 N66 R10
R13
T18
S811
T24
S811
T30
S811
U36
S811
U42
S811
U50
S811 S811
V36 V42
S811
V50
S811
V65
500
650
720
850
1000
156
500
203
650
225
720
265
580
320
1000
Maximum current capacity 37
66
105
135
180
240
304
360
420
500
360
FLA range
20
66
32
105
42
135
56
180
75
240
95
304
112
360
131
420
156
500
112 131
360
420
11
37
420
S811
V72
S811
V85
S811
V10
23
24
Dimensions
Width in inches (mm)
2.66 (67.6)
4.42 (112.2)
7.67 (194.8)
7.73 (196.3)
11.05 (280.6)
Height in inches (mm)
7.38 (187.4)
7.92 (201.2)
12.71 (322.9)
12.72 (323.1)
16.57 (420.8)
Depth in inches (mm)
6.48 (164.5)
6.64 (168.7)
6.39 (162.4)
7.08 (179.9)
Weight in lbs (kg)
5.80 (2.6)
10.50 (4.8)
7.35 (186.6)
48.00 (21.8) with lugs

48.00 (21.8) with lugs
41.00 (18.6) without lugs 41.00 (18.6) without lugs
103.00 (46.8) with lugs

91.00 (41.4) without lugs
General Information
Bypass mechanical
lifespan
660V
Ramp time range
28
0.5180 seconds (0.5360 seconds extended ramp)
3g
Resistance to shock
15g
26
27
10 million
Insulating voltage Ui
25
29
Operating voltage
200600V
Operating frequency
4763 Hz
Overload setting
30
30100%
Trip class
31
5, 10, 20 and 30

One
One
One or two
Two, four or six
Wire sizes
142
144/0
4 AWG to 500 kcmil
2/0 to 500 kcmil
Type of connectors
Box lug
32
Add-on lug kit
33
Control Wiring (12-Pin)

Wire sizes in AWG
2214
(stranded)
Two
(or one AWG 12)
Torque requirements
in lb-in
3.5
Solid, stranded or flexible

maximum size in mm2
3.31
34
35

Voltage range (24V 10%)
36
21.626.4
Steady state current amps
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.4
Inrush current amps
10
10
10
10
Ripple
37
1%

Voltage ACmaximum
240
Voltage DCmaximum
120
Amperesmaximum
38
39
Environment
30 to +50C (no derating) consult factory for operation > +50C
Temperaturestorage
50 to +70C
Altitude
<2000mconsult factory for operation > 2000m
Humidity
<95% noncondensing
Operating position
Impulse withstand voltage

IEC 947-4-1
6000V

UR Recognized Product.
CA08104001E
41
Any
Pollution degree IEC 947-1
40
42
43

December 2012
Sheet 30 058
S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter
22

Voltage Soft Starter
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
S611 Solid-State Soft Starter
General Description
Eaton revolutionized the reduced
voltage control marketplace with its
advanced feature set and user-friendly
user interface module to enhance
system performance and to reduce
commissioning times. The S611 adds
enhanced functionality with network
communications, metering, monitoring and diagnostics capabilities.
The Eaton line of S611 reduced voltage
soft starters is multi-functional, easy to
install and easy to program. Designed
to control the acceleration and deceleration of three-phase motors up to 600V,
the line is available from 26 to 414A.
The S611 is designed to be a complete
package, combining the SCRs,
bypass contactor and overload in
one compact unit.
motors, the S611 soft starter uses
silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs)
to control the voltage to soft start and
soft stop the motor. After the motor is
started, internal run bypass contactors
close, resulting in the motor running
directly across-the-line. The built-in
solid-state overload protects the
motor from overload conditions with
sophisticated algorithms that model
true motor heating, resulting in better
motor protection and fewer nuisance
trips. Advanced protective and
diagnostic features reduce downtime.
A voltage ramp start or current limit
start is available. Kick start is available
in either starting mode. The soft stop
is longer than the coast to stop time.
The pump control option provides
a smooth transition for starting and
stopping a motor and for eliminating
the water-hammer effect that can
damage pipes, valves and pumps.
The S611 offers an impressive array of
advanced protective features. Not only
are the protective features selectable,
but many offer variable settings allowing the user to fine-tune the starter to
meet specific system requirements.
The S611 has an easy-to-use user
interface module (UI) that allows the
user to configure the device and to read
system parameters. The UI includes
an LED display and a keypad to scroll
through the various parameters. The
UI allows the user to modify control
parameters, enable or disable protections, set communication variables,
monitor system parameters such as
line voltages and currents, and access
the fault queue.
Figure 30.5-7. User Interface

The UI can be removed from the
S611 and be remote mounted. Kits
are available to door mount the UI,
enabling users to safely configure,
commission, monitor and troubleshoot the system at the electrical panel
without opening the enclosure door.
This will help eliminate the possibility
of an arc flash incident.
Communications
The S611 has built-in communication
capabilities through two communications ports to connect the soft starter
to a variety of networks, including
Modbus (native), DeviceNet and
PROFIBUS.
The S611 communication parameters
can be configured with the UI.
Advanced communication configuration settings provide the system
integrator with powerful tools to
facilitate system optimization.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-19
Sheet 30 059
Figure 30.5-8. Control Wiring Diagram
Table 30.5-19. Network Communications Reference

Description
Style
Number
Catalog
Number
Modbus communication adapter without I/O

Modbus communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O
Modbus communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O
3-2372-001A
3-2372-003B
3-2372-004B
C441M
C441N
C441P
DeviceNet communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O

DeviceNet communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O
PROFIBUS communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O
PROFIBUS communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O
3-2372-001B
3-2372-002B
3-2398-001B
3-2398-002B
C441K
C441L
C441S
C441Q

The UI (user interface module)
provides an intuitive, easy-to-use
human interface with powerful
configuration capabilities to
maximize system performance
Door or device mounted UI enables
users to safely configure, commission, monitor and troubleshoot
the system at the electrical panel
without opening the enclosure
door, eliminating the possibility
of an arc flash incident
System operating parameters
can be monitored enterprise-wide
Increase uptime by providing data
for process management and
preventive diagnostics
CA08104001E
Run Bypass mode greatly reduces

greater power dissipation in the
SCRs. Bypass contactor directly
connects the motor to the line and
improves system efficiency by
reducing internal power losses
Internal solid-state overload
protection provides accurate
current measurement and trip
settings. Sophisticated algorithms
solve a series of differential
equations that model true motor
heating and cooling, resulting in
superior motor overload protection
while minimizing nuisance trips.
Advanced selectable protective
features safeguard the motor
and system against a variety of
system faults
Internal run bypass contactors

and overload protection eliminate
the need for additional devices,
reducing enclosure sizes, minimizing installation and wiring time,
and reducing overall assembly
size and cost
Wide range of overload FLA settings
(50100% of rated frame current)
and a selectable trip class (530)
offers users the flexibility to finetune the starter to match specific
application requirements
Variable ramp times and torque
control settings provide unlimited
starting configurations, allowing for
maximum application flexibility
Kick-start feature enables soft
starting of high friction loads
Soft stop control for applications
is not acceptable
Pump control option with sophisticated pump algorithms on both
starting and stopping that minimize
the pressure surges that cause
water hammer. The pump control
option will maximize the life of the
pump and piping systems while
minimizing the downtime caused
by system failure
Six SCRs control all three motor
phases, providing smooth acceleration and deceleration performance
Soft acceleration and deceleration
reduces wear on belts, gears, chains,
clutches, shafts and bearings
Reduce the peak inrush currents
Minimize peak starting torque to
and damage
120 Vac control voltage enhances
ease of connections
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Protective Features
All protective features can be
configured, enabled or disabled
with the UI or through the
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2012
Sheet 30 060
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Motor Overload
Jam
Phase Loss
The S611 includes electronic overload

protection as standard. The overload
meets applicable requirements for a
motor overload protective device.
The overload protects the motor from
overheat conditions with the use of
sophisticated algorithms that model
true motor heating, resulting in
superior motor protection and fewer
nuisance trips.

locked rotor levels can occur in a jam
condition. The condition can result in
mechanical system and the electrical
distribution system. Jam protection
prevents the stress and damage from
a jam during normal run. After the
motor is started, a current greater than
300% FLA setting will cause the starter
to trip on a jam fault.
Loss of a phase can cause a significant

increase in the current drawn in the
remaining two phases. Phase loss
can lead to motor damage before an
eventual overload trip occurs. Phase
loss is typically an indication of a
failure in the electrical distribution
system. The S611 will detect a phase
loss and trip if any phase current drops
below a preset value. The phase loss
trip level is adjustable from 0% to
100% of the average of the other two
phase levels with an adjustable trip
delay of 0.160 seconds.
The S611 calculates a thermal memory

value. A 100% value represents the
maximum safe temperature of the
motor. When the thermal memory
value reaches 100%, an overload trip
will occur removing power to the
motor. Upon trip, the S611 stores the
calculated motor heating value and
will not allow a motor re-start until
the motor has sufficiently cooled. This
feature ensures the motor will not be
damaged by repeated overload trip,
reset and re-start cycles.
The thermal memory value can be
monitored through the UI or the
communications network. The thermal
memory value can be of great use in
determining an impending overload
trip condition. Alarms can be implemented in the process monitoring
system warning of an impending
trip before a trip occurs halting the
process. Costly system downtime
can be avoided.
The trip current is adjusted to match
the specific application requirements
by entering the motor nameplate full
load current rating and trip class. The
FLA adjustment includes a 2 to 1
adjustment range. The overload trip
class is adjustable from class 5
through class 30. The overload is
ambient temperature compensated
meaning its trip characteristics will not
vary with changes in ambient temperature. The overload protection can be
enabled, disabled, or disabled on start.
Short Circuit
The use of a short-circuit protective
device in coordination with the S611
is required in branch motor circuits
by most electrical codes. Short-circuit
coordination ratings with both fuses
and Eaton molded-case circuit breakers
are available providing customers with
design flexibility. The S611 has shortcircuit coordination ratings as an open
component, an enclosed starter, and in
a motor control center.
Stall
locked rotor levels can occur in a stall
condition. The condition can lead to
an overload trip and can result in
mechanical system and the electrical
distribution system. Stall protection
prevents stress and damage to a
motor that has not come up to speed,
or stalled after the soft start time. The
S611 will trip to protect the system in
the event that the motor did not get
to the rated speed in the defined soft
start period. A current greater than
200% FLA at the end of the soft start
period will cause the starter to trip on
a stall fault.
Pole Over Temperature

High ambient temperatures, extended
ramp times and high duty cycle conditions may cause the S611 power pole
conductors to reach a temperature that
exceeds their thermal rating. The S611
is equipped with sensors that monitor
the temperature of the power poles.
Overtemperature protection occurs
if the devices thermal capacity is
exceeded. The soft starter will trip
in overtemperature conditions,
preventing device failure.
The device pole temperature value
can be monitored through the UI or
the communications network. This
feature can be of use in determining
an impending overtemperature trip
condition. Alarms can be implemented
in the process monitoring system
warning of an impending trip before a
trip occurs, halting the process. Costly
system shutdown can be avoided.
Phase Imbalance
Phase current or voltage imbalance
can cause a significant increase in the
current drawn in the remaining two
phases. Phase imbalance can lead to
motor damage before an eventual
overload trip. Phase imbalance is
typically an indication of a failure in
the electrical distribution system or
the motor. The S611 will detect both
current and voltage phase imbalances
and trip if any phase becomes
imbalanced as compared to the
average of the other two phases.
The phase current imbalance trip level
average of the current in the other two
0.160 seconds.
The phase voltage imbalance trip level
average of the voltage in the other two
0.160 seconds.
Reset Mode
The S611 can be set up for automatic
or manual reset on trip. The manual
reset mode requires the operator to
physically press the RESET button
located on the soft starter. The
overload can be manually reset
through the UI or through the
The automatic reset mode allows the
soft starter to be automatically reset as
soon as the trip condition is no longer
present. With the automatic reset
mode, after the fault is no longer
present, the motor will be restarted as
soon as a valid start signal is present.
43
CA08104001E
December 2012

30.5-21
Sheet 30 061

Phase Reversal
Three-Phase Pole Currents
The S611 can determine if the proper

line phase sequence is present by
default. The device will trip if the line
phase sequence is something other
than A-B-C. The S611 can be configured to operate under reversed phase
conditions (A-C-B).
The S611 has an impressive array of

system monitoring capabilities that
allow users to access real-time process
and diagnostic data. This data can be
viewed at the device with the UI or
Data over a communications network
can provide valuable insight into the
condition of the equipment and
processes. Maintenance and production personnel can monitor critical
operational and maintenance data from
a central control station that can be
located far away from the production
facility. Process data can be monitored
to determine system anomalies that
may indicate a need for preventive
maintenance or an impeding failure.
Provides three rms phase pole currents

in amperes, accurate to within 2%. The
pole current is the current through the
soft starter. The line and pole current
will be identical in in-line applications.
Shorted SCR Detection

the power poles and will trip under a
shorted SCR condition.
Open SCR Detection

the power poles and will trip under an
open SCR condition.
Low Current
Low current conditions can be a result
of a loss of load or a failure in the
mechanical system. The S611 has low
current protection that will trip if the
average rms current falls below a
preset value. The low current protection can be programmed as a percent
of motor FLA from 0% to 100%.
Low Voltage
Low voltage conditions can result from
distribution system. Low voltage
conditions can cause a malfunction
and damage to electrical equipment.
The S611 has low voltage protection
that will trip if the average rms
voltage falls below a preset value.
The low voltage protection can be
programmed as a percent of nominal
voltage from 1% to 99% with a trip
delay of 0.160 seconds.
Adjustments made through the

communications network can reduce
costs by minimizing the time traveling
to the location where the motor controls
are located. When faults do occur, realtime fault data can assist maintenance
in troubleshooting and planning repair
resources. Remote reset signals can be
given to tripped devices without the
need for manual intervention by
maintenance personnel.
Average Line Current

Provides the average of the three
phase rms line currents in amperes,
accurate to within 2%. Current data
can be used to indicate a need for
maintenance. Increased currents in a
fixed load application can indicate a
reduction in system efficiencies and
performance, signifying system
maintenance is due.
High Voltage
Average Pole Current
High voltage conditions can result

from disturbances in the electrical
power distribution system. High
voltage conditions can cause
malfunctions or failures of electrical
equipment. The S611 has high voltage
protection that will trip if the average
rms voltage is greater than a preset
value. The high voltage protection
can be programmed as a percent of
nominal voltage from 101% to 120%
with a trip delay of 0.160 seconds.
Provides the average of the three-phase

rms pole currents in amperes, accurate
to within 2%. The pole current is the
current through the soft starter. The line
and pole current will be identical in
in-line applications, and will differ in
inside-the-delta applications.
Average Line Current as a % FLA

Provides the average rms line current as
a percentage of the S611 FLA setting.
Three-Phase Line Currents

Provides three rms phase line currents
in amperes, accurate to within 2%.
Imbalances or changes in the relative
phase current to one another can
indicate anomalies in the motor or
Three-Phase Line Voltages

Provides the individual rms threephase line voltages. Imbalances or
changes in the relative phase voltage
to one another can indicate anomalies
in the motor or the electrical distribution system. Voltage can be used to
monitor electrical distribution
system performance.
Warnings, alarms and system actions
to low or high voltage conditions can
be implemented.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Percent Thermal Memory

Provides the real-time calculated
thermal memory value. The S611
calculates thermal memory value. A
100% value represents the maximum
safe temperature of the motor. When
the thermal memory value reaches
100%, an overload trip will occur,
removing power to the motor.
29
The thermal memory value can be of

great use in determining an impending
overload trip condition. Alarms can be
implemented in the process monitoring system warning of an impending
trip before a trip occurs, halting the
process. Costly system downtime can
be avoided.
32
Pole Temperature
35
Increases in pole temperature are

caused by increases in ambient
temperature, start/stop times and
start duty cycles. Changes in pole
temperatures represent a change
in system operating conditions.
Identifying unexpected operating
conditions or changes can prompt
maintenance and aid in process
evaluation activities.
Power Monitoring
S611 does monitor the power and it
can be displayed on the UI.
30
31
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 062
22
Diagnostics
Fault Queue
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Current fault and a fault queue

containing the last nine system
faults can be read through the UI
or the communications network. Fault
identification can minimize troubleshooting time and cost, and prevent
arc flash incidents. The fault queue
can be remotely accessed through
a communications network to assist
in planning maintenance resources.
30 different faults can be identified by
the S611.
Control Status
The S611 provides data that represents
system conditions that can be read
through the UI or the communications
network. This data identifies the
status of the system and the control
commands the system is requesting
of the S611. This can be used for
advanced troubleshooting and
system integration activities.
Current Limit Start
Kick Start
Limits the maximum current available

to the motor during the start phase.
This mode of soft starting is used
when it becomes necessary to limit the
maximum starting current due to long
start times or to protect the motor.
This start mode allows you to set
the maximum starting current as
a percentage of locked rotor current
and the duration of the current limit.
Bypass contactors close after current
limit time.
Selectable feature in both Voltage

Ramp Start and Current Limit Start
modes. Provides a current and torque
kick for 02.0 seconds. This
provides greater initial current to
develop additional torque to breakaway a high friction load.
Maximum current of 085% locked

rotor current
180 seconds (can be extended
with factory modification)
085% of locked rotor torque

02.0 seconds duration
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of a
system or load damage.
Stop time = 060 seconds
Operation
Starting and Stopping Modes
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
The S611 has a variety of starting and

stopping methods to provide superior
performance in the most demanding
applications. The motor can be started
in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current
Limit Start mode. Kick Start and
Soft Stop are available within both
starting modes.
Figure 30.5-9. Ramp Start
Voltage Ramp Start

Provides a voltage ramp to the motor
resulting in a constant torque increase.
The most commonly used form of soft
start, this start mode allows you to
set the initial torque value and the
duration of the ramp to full voltage
conditions. Bypass contactors close
after ramp time.
Adjustable initial torque 085% of
locked rotor torque
180 seconds (can be extended
with factory modification)
Figure 30.5-10. Current Limit Start
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2012

30.5-23
Sheet 30 063
Edge and Level Sensing Control

Edge or level sensing is selected
with the Start Control parameter in
the Advanced Configuration Menu.
Factory default is level sensing.
Edge Sensing
Edge sensing requires 120 Vac power
be momentarily applied to the Start
terminal (with the Permissive terminal
120 Vac) to initiate a start under all
conditions. After a stop or fault occurs,
the 120 Vac must be removed, then
reapplied to pin 1 before another start
can occur. This control configuration
should be used when restarting of
the motor after a fault or stop must
be supervised manually or as a part
of a control scheme. The cycling of
120 Vac power to the Permissive
terminal before starting is required
regardless of the position of the auto
reset parameter.
Figure 30.5-11. Kick Start Graphic
Level Sensing
Level sensing will enable a motor to
restart after a fault is cleared without
cycling 120 Vac to the Permissive
terminal as long as:
Figure 30.5-12. Stop Ramp Graphic
Permissive terminal is supplied

with 120 Vac
The auto reset parameter is set
to enabled
All faults have cleared or have
been reset
This control configuration should be

used where it is desirable to restart a
motor after a fault without additional
manual or automatic control. An
example of this condition would be
on a remote pumping station where it
is desirable to automatically restart a
pump after a power outage without
operator intervention.
If the auto reset feature is used,
CAUTION must be exercised to
ensure that any restart occurs in
a safe manner.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 064
22
23
24
25
Product Selection
Motor applications and customer
needs come in many different
varieties. The standard and severeduty rating tables provide guidelines
on what the soft starter is capable of.

If the application falls under these
categories, use these charts. For other
applications, or when a question
arises, consult a local Eaton

Representative or call the Eaton
Technical Resource Center.
Table 30.5-20. S611 Horsepower Ratings300% FLA at 15 Seconds at 50C

Maximum
Current
Amperes
60 Hz
200V
1.0 SF
230V
1.15 SV
1.0 SF
460V
1.15 SV
1.0 SF
Catalog
Number
575600V
1.15 SV
1.0 SF
1.15 SV
26
52
65
77
15
20
20
10
15
20
15
20
25
15
20
20
40
50
60
30
40
50
50
60
75
40
50
60
S611A052N3S
S611A065N3S
S611A077N3S
27
99
125
156
30
40
50
25
30
40
30
40
60
30
40
50
75
100
125
60
75
100
100
125
150
75
100
125
S611B099N3S
S611B125N3S
S611C156N3S
28
180
242
302
60
75
100
50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
150
200
250
125
150
200
150
250
350
150
200
250
S611C180N3S
S611D242N3S
S611E302N3S
361
414
125
150
100
125
150
N/A
125
150
300
350
250
250
350
450
300
350
S611E361N3S
S611F414N3S
29
30
Options
Pump Control
For pump control option, change the 9th digit in the Catalog Number to P.
31
32
Table 30.5-21. S611 Horsepower RatingsPump Control Option

Maximum
Current
Amperes
60 Hz
200V
1.0 SF
230V
1.15 SV
1.0 SF
460V
1.15 SV
1.0 SF
Catalog
Number
575600V
1.15 SV
1.0 SF
1.15 SV
33
52
65
77
15
20
20
10
15
20
15
20
25
15
20
20
40
50
60
30
40
50
50
60
75
40
50
60
S611A052P3S
S611A065P3S
S611A077P3S
34
99
125
156
30
40
50
25
30
40
30
40
60
30
40
50
75
100
125
60
75
100
100
125
150
75
100
125
S611B099P3S
S611B125P3S
S611C156P3S
35
180
242
302
60
75
100
50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
150
200
250
125
150
200
150
250
350
150
200
250
S611C180P3S
S611D242P3S
S611E302P3S
361
414
125
150
100
125
150
N/A
125
150
300
350
250
250
350
450
300
350
S611E361P3S
S611F414P3S
36
37
IEC 60947-4-2
UL listed
CSA certified (3211 06)
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-25
Sheet 30 065
22
Table 30.5-22. SpecificationsS611 Solid-State Soft Starter

Soft Starter
S611A052 S611A065 S611A072 S611B099 S611B125 S611C156 S611C180 S611D242
S611E302 S611E361 S611F414
Maximum
current capacity
52
65
77
99
125
156
180
242
302
361
FLA range
2652
32.565
38.577
4899
62.5125
78156
90180
120242
151302
180.5361 207414
23
414
24
DimensionsInches (mm)
Width
11.58 (294.1)
11.58 (294.1)
11.58 (294.1)
11.58 (294.1)
17.56 (446.0)
17.56 (446.0)
Height
19.45 (494.0)
19.45 (494.0)
20.83 (529.1)
20.83 (529.1)
31.15 (791.2)
31.15 (791.2)
Depth
7.46 (189.5)
7.46 (189.5)
8.37 (212.6)
8.37 (212.6)
9.54 (242.3)
9.54 (242.3)
24 (11)
24 (11)
33 (15)
38 (15)
86 (39)
102 (46)
Weight in lbs (kg)
25
26
General Information
Bypass mechanical
lifespan
27
10 million
Insulating voltage
660V
Ramp time range
0.5180 seconds
28
1g
Resistance to shock
Meets ITSA standards
29
Operating voltage
130600V
Operating frequency
30
4763 Hz
Overload setting (frame)
50100% FLA
Trip class
5, 10, 20 and 30
31

Wire sizes
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
Two
Two
Two
142/0
142/0
142/0
142/0
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
Type of connectors
Lug
33
Control Wiring
Wire sizes in AWG
2212
Two (or one 1214 AWG)
Torque requirements
3.5 lb-in
Maximum size
12 AWG
34
35

Voltage range
(24V 10%)
Steady-state
current amperes
Inrush current amperes
Ripple
32
108132
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
36
1%
37
38

Voltage ACmaximum
120
Voltage DCmaximum
24
Amperesmaximum
39
Environment
Temperaturestorage
20 to +50C
40 to +85C
Altitude
<2000m, derate 0.5% per 100m >2000m
Humidity
<95% noncondensing
Operating position
Pollution degree
IEC 947-1
Impulse withstand
voltage IEC 947-4-1
Vertical, line side up
40
41
3
6000V
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 066
DS6 Soft Start Controllers
22
Operation
Voltage Ramp Start
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Bypass contactor(s) close after ramp

time has elapsed.
General Description
Eatons DS6 line of reduced voltage
solid-state soft start controllers is very
compact, multi-functional, easy to install
and easy to commission. Designed to
control the acceleration and deceleration
of three-phase motors, the device is
available for current ranges from
40 to 180A.
With its small size, it can easily fit in
place of existing soft starters, wye-delta
starters, or across-the-line NEMA
and IEC starters. This feature allows
easy upgrades to existing systems.
The product is designed to be wired
in the three-phase line feeding the
three motor input leads as is done
for normal across-the-line starting.
The starter uses silicon controlled
rectifiers (SCRs) to ramp the voltage
to the motor, providing smooth
acceleration and deceleration of the
load. After the motor is started, the
internal run bypass contactor closes,
resulting in the motor running directly
across-the-line. Internal run bypass
significantly reduces the heat generated
as compared to non-bypass starters.
The soft stop option allows for a ramp
stop time that may be longer than
the coast-to-stop time. An external
over-load protection is needed.
Start
Run
Time (Seconds)
Figure 30.5-13. Start Ramp
Adjustable initial voltage 3092%

of full voltage
Adjustable ramp time 130 seconds
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of
system or product damage. Setting the
soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off
this feature.
100%
Speed
24
Bypass
100%
Speed
This start method provides a voltage

ramp to the motor, resulting in a
constant torque increase. This most
commonly used form of soft start
mode allows you to set the initial
voltage value and the duration of the
ramp to full voltage conditions.
23
3
Run
Soft Stop
Time (Seconds)
Soft stop time = 030 seconds
1 = Coast to Stop (Speed)

2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage)
3 = Soft Stop Time
Figure 30.5-14. Stop Ramp
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-27
Sheet 30 067
Run Bypass mode greatly reduces

power dissipation across the SCRs.
The bypass contactor directly
connects the motor to the line
and improves system efficiency
by reducing internal power losses
Less heat minimizes enclosure size
and cooling requirements, and
maximizes the life of all devices
in the enclosure
LED displays device status and
provides fault indication
Variable ramp times and voltage
control (torque control) settings
provide unlimited starting configurations, allowing for maximum
application flexibility
Soft stop control suits applications
is not acceptable. Soft acceleration
and deceleration reduces wear on
belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts
and bearings
Minimizes the peak inrush currents
Manages peak starting torque to
and damage
24 Vdc control module enhances
personnel and equipment safety
Protective Features
There are two auxiliary relays

First relay is a TOR relay that
closes when the TOR is achieved
(internal bypass relays close)
The second relay is a RUN relay
that closes when the RUN signal
is initiated and opens when RUN
signal is removed. It remains
closed during stop ramp time,
if set to a value greater than 0.
The RUN relay will also open
if a fault occurs
Mains connectionThe mains
connection is monitored for an
open condition and/or undervoltage
Motor connectionThe motor
connection is monitored for an
open condition
SCR faultsSCR performance is
monitored during the ramp cycle
for proper operation
Heat sink over/under temperature
High ambient temperatures,
extended ramp times and high duty
cycle conditions may cause the DS6
to exceed its thermal rating. When
temperature goes under 5C, unit
will trip as well. The DS6 is
equipped with sensors that monitor
the temperature of the device. The
soft starter will trip in over/under
temperature conditions, preventing
device failure
Bypass relayThe DS6 can detect if
the bypass relay fails to close after
the ramp start or opens while the
motor is running. The DS6 will
trip on a bypass dropout fault if
either of these conditions occur.
The device does not start when
bypass relay is closed and start
signal is applied
24 Vdc low voltageIf the control
voltage falls below 20 Vdc at any
time during operation, the unit
will fault
IEC 60947-4-2
EN 60947-4-2
UL listed (E251034)
CSA certified
CE marked
C-Tick
Additional Information
22
23
24
25
Instruction Leaflet IL03901001E
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 068
22
Product Selection
DS6 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings
23
24
25
26
27
28
Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection.
Table 30.5-23. DS6 Soft Start ControllersHorsepower Ratings
10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C
Rated
Current
Amperes
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C440 Overload
Catalog
Number
30
40
50
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
HJD3250
150A Class RK5

200A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
XTOB040DC1
XTOB057DC1
XTOB065DC1
C440A1A045SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX041N0-N
DS6-34DSX055N0-N
DS6-34DSX068N0-N
30
30
50
60
75
100
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3400
300A Class RK5

350A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB125GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX081N0-N
DS6-34DSX099N0-N
DS6-34DSX134N0-N
60
75
125
150
HLD3450
HLD3500
500A Class RK5

500A Class RK5
XTOB160LC1
XTOB220LC1
C440A1A005SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX161N0-N
DS6-34DSX196N0-N
200V
230V
40
52
65
10
15
20
10
20
25
77
96
124
25
30
40
156
180
50
60

29
Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size
Motor Power (hp)
460V
Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1.
XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload.
XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload.
ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.
Table 30.5-24. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C
30
Rated
Current
Amperes
Motor Power (hp)

200V
230V
460V
Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C440 Overload
Catalog
Number
31
27
34
40
7.5
10
15
10
10
15
20
30
30
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
HJD3250
150A Class RK5

200A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
XTOB040DC1
XTOB040DC1
XTOB057DC1
C440A1A045SAX
C440A1A045SAX
C440A1A045SAX
DS6-34DSX041NO-N
DS6-34DSX055NO-N
DS6-34DSX068NO-N
32
52
65
80
15
20
30
20
25
30
40
50
75
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3350
300A Class RK5

350A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB057DC1
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB100GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX081NO-N
DS6-34DSX099NO-N
DS6-34DSX134NO-N
33
96
124
30
40
40
50
75
100
HLD3450
HLD3500
500A Class RK5

500A Class RK5
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB150GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX161NO-N
DS6-34DSX196NO-N
34

35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-29
Sheet 30 069

DS6 Soft Start kW Ratings
22
Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection.
Table 30.5-25. DS6 Soft Start ControllerskW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2
10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C
Rated
Current
Amperes
Motor Power (kW)

230V
400V
Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size
23
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C440 Overload
Catalog
Number
C440A1A045SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX041N0-N
DS6-34DSX055N0-N
DS6-34DSX068N0-N
25
26
24
41
55
68
11
15
15
22
30
37
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
HJD3250
150A Class RK5

200A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
XTOB057DC1
XTOB057DC1
XTOB070GC1
81
99
134
22
30
30
45
55
75
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3400
300A Class RK5

350A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB150GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX081N0-N
DS6-34DSX099N0-N
DS6-34DSX134N0-N
160
196
45
55
90
110
HLD3450
HLD3500
500A Class RK5

500A Class RK5
XTOB160LC1
XTOB220LC1
C440A1A005SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX161N0-N
DS6-34DSX196N0-N

28
Table 30.5-26. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C
400V
Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C440 Overload
Catalog
Number
28.8
37.5
46
7.5
11
11
11
18.5
22
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
HJD3250
150A Class RK5

200A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
XTOB040DC1
XTOB040DC1
XTOB057DC1
C440A1A045SAX
C440A1A045SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX041NO-N
DS6-34DSX055NO-N
DS6-34DSX068NO-N
56
68
90
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3350
300A Class RK5

350A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB065DC1
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB100GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX081NO-N
DS6-34DSX099NO-N
DS6-34DSX134NO-N
30
37
55
75
HLD3450
HLD3500
500A Class RK5

500A Class RK5
XTOB160LC1
XTOB160LC1
C440A1A005SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX161NO-N
DS6-34DSX196NO-N
106
134

29
230V
Rated
Current
Amperes
Motor Power (kW)
Considerations
Power Supply
1. Either XTOB, C306 or C440 series

or equivalent overload protection
devices may be selected.
Eatons PSG and ELC power supplies

are recommended as a compact and
low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The
light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices
have a wide input voltage range,
and robust screw terminals make
these power supplies easy to install
and use. These power supplies are
available in 1A and 2A models.
2. Contactor is optional for normal

applications. It is recommended
for mains isolation.
27
30
31
32
33
Table 30.5-27. Power Supply Selection

Description
Catalog
Number
85264V input and 24V output

380480V input and 24V output
ELC-PS01
PSS25F
100240 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60E

380480 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60F
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 070
22
23

Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers
Description
Standards
24
Unit
DS6-34DSX041N0-N
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
Certifications
DS6-34DSX068N0-N
DS6-34DSX081N0-N
Ambient temperature
(operation)
0 to 40C, above 40C

derate linearly by 1% of
rated current per Celsius
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C

to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C

to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C

to 60C
Ambient temperature
(storage)
25 to +55C
25 to +55C
25 to +55C
25 to +55C
Altitude
01000m, above 1000m

rated current per 100m to
a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m

a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m

a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m

a maximum of 2000m
Vertical
25
26
DS6-34DSX055N0-N
General
27
Installation
Vertical
Vertical
Vertical
28
Protection degree
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
Protection against contact
Back of hand and fingerproof (from front face)
29
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
II/2
II/2
II/2
II/2
Shock resistance
8g/11 ms
8g/11 ms
8g/11 ms
8g/11 ms
30
Vibration resistance
according to EN 60721-3-2
2M2
2M2
2M2
2M2
Dimensions in inches (mm)

(W x H x D)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
Weight in lbs (kg)
4.00 (1.8)
4.00 (1.8)
4.00 (1.8)
4.00 (1.8)
200460 Vac
31
32
Main Circuit
Rated operation voltage
200460 Vac
200460 Vac
200460 Vac
Mains frequency
Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
33
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV
50 s
4 kV
4 kV
4 kV
Rated operation current
Ie
52
65
77
34
Motor Power Ratings
35
36
40
200V
hp
10
15
20
25
230V
hp
10
20
25
30
460V
hp
30
40
50
60
230V
kW
11
15
15
22
400V
kW
22
30
37
45
Overload cycle according

to EN 60947-4-2
40A: AC53a; 35; 7510
52A: AC53a; 35; 7510
65A: AC53a; 35; 7510
77A: AC53a; 35; 7510
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-31
Sheet 30 071

Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)
Description
Unit
DS6-34DSX041N0-N
DS6-34DSX055N0-N
DS6-34DSX068N0-N
DS6-34DSX081N0-N
Power terminals (box terminals)

Single conductor
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
122/0
5380
122/0
5380
122/0
5380
122/0
5380
Control signals
Single conductor
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
4 kV
4 kV
4 kV
22
Wire Specifications
Power Section
Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV
50 s
24
25
26
Control Commands
Supply voltage control board
Nominal voltage
Nominal current ramp, TOR
Current peak (closing shorting contactors)
23
Us
Vdc
mA
+24 Vdc +10%/15%

65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%

65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%

65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%

65
600 mA/50 ms
27
28
Voltage to the control terminals

(rated control voltage)
DC driven
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
Input current at 24 Vdc
mA
14
14
14
14
Number of relays
2 (TOR, ready)
2 (TOR, ready)
2 (TOR, ready)
2 (TOR, ready)
Maximum voltage
250 Vac, 60 Vdc
250 Vac, 60 Vdc
250 Vac, 60 Vdc
250 Vac, 60 Vdc
Maximum current
3A, resistive
3A, resistive
3A, resistive
3A, resistive
Ramp times
Start ramp
Stop ramp
s
s
130
030
130
030
130
030
130
030
Initial voltage % line voltage
3092%
3092%
3092%
3092%
29
Relay Outputs
30
Soft Start Functions
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 072
22

Description
Unit
DS6-34DSX099N0-N
DS6-34DSX134N0-N
DS6-34DSX161N0-N
DS6-34DSX196N0-N
General
23
24
25
Standards
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
Certifications/marking
UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
Ambient temperature
(operation)
0 to 40C, above 40C

to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C

to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C

to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C

to 60C
Ambient temperature
(storage)
25 to +55C
25 to +55C
25 to +55C
25 to +55C
Altitude
01000m, above 1000m

a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m

a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m

a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m

a maximum of 2000m
Installation
Vertical
Vertical
Vertical
Vertical
Protection degree
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
Protection against contact
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
II/2
II/2
II/2
II/2
Shock resistance
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
8g/11 ms
8g/11 ms
8g/11 ms
8g/11 ms
Vibration resistance
according to EN 60721-3-2
2M2
2M2
2M2
2M2
Dimensions in inches (mm)

(W x H x D)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01

(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)
4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01

(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)
4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01

(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)
Weight in lbs (kg)
4.00 (1.8)
8.16 (3.7)
8.16 (3.7)
8.16 (3.7)
Main Circuit
Rated operation voltage
200460 Vac
200460 Vac
200460 Vac
200460 Vac
Mains frequency
Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV
50 s
4 kV
4 kV
4 kV
Rated operation current
Ie
124
156
180
96
Motor Power Ratings
34
35
36
200V
hp
30
40
50
60
230V
hp
30
50
60
75
460V
hp
75
100
125
150
230V
kW
30
30
45
55
400V
kW
55
75
90
110
Overload cycle according

to EN 60947-4-2
96A: AC53a; 35; 7510
124A: AC53a; 35; 7510
156A: AC53a; 35; 7510
180A: AC53a; 35; 7510
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-33
Sheet 30 073

Description
Unit
DS6-34DSX099N0-N
DS6-34DSX134N0-N
DS6-34DSX161N0-N
DS6-34DSX196N0-N
Power terminals (box terminals)

Single conductor
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
122/0
5380
12 AWG350 kcmil
44123
12 AWG350 kcmil
44123
12 AWG350 kcmil
44123
Control signals
Single conductor
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
4 kV
4 kV
4 kV
22
Wire Specifications
Power Section
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV
50 s
23
24
25
26
Control Commands
Supply voltage control board
Us
Vdc
Nominal voltage
mA
Nominal current ramp, TOR
Current peak (closing shorting contactors)
+24 Vdc +10%/15%

65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%

65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%

65
600 mA/50 ms
Voltage to the control terminals

(rated control voltage)
DC driven
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
Input current at 24 Vdc
mA
14
14
Number of relays
2 (TOR, ready)
Maximum voltage
Maximum current
Ramp times
Start ramp
Stop ramp
Initial voltage % line voltage
+24 Vdc +10%/15%

65
600 mA/50 ms
27
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
28
14
14
2 (TOR, ready)
2 (TOR, ready)
2 (TOR, ready)
250 Vac, 60 Vdc
250 Vac, 60 Vdc
250 Vac, 60 Vdc
250 Vac, 60 Vdc
3A, resistive
3A, resistive
3A, resistive
3A, resistive
s
s
130
030
130
030
130
030
130
030
3092%
3092%
3092%
3092%
29
Relay Outputs
30
Soft Start Functions
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
Sheet 30 074
22

1.18
(30.0) 1.18
(30.0)
0.88
(22.5)
23
24
PE
25
6.34
(161.0)
26
5.08
(129.0)
27
6.89
(175.0)
28
0.88
(22.5)
PE
E
3.66
(93.0)
29
30
1.38
(35.0)
5.47
(139.0)
Figure 30.5-15. 2575 hp Models
31
1.38
(35.0)
0.59
(15.0)
32
1.38
(35.0)
PE
33
7.87
(200.0)
34
8.47
6.22
(158.0) (215.0)
35
36
37
0.59
(15.0)
PE
(108.0)
38
2.07
(52.5)
7.01
(178.0)
Figure 30.5-16. 100150 hp Models
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2012
30.5-35
Sheet 30 075
Operation
22
Voltage Ramp Start

of full voltage (120/230 Vac control
voltage)
of full voltage (24 Vac/Vdc control
voltage)
Adjustable ramp time 130 seconds
Bypass relays close at the end the
ramp time (TOR)
Bypass
100%
23
Speed
This start method provides a voltage

ramp to the motor, resulting in a
constant torque increase. This most
commonly used form of soft start
mode allows you to set the initial
voltage value and the duration of the
ramp to full voltage conditions.
24
Start
Run
25
Time (Seconds)
General Description
Eatons DS7 line of reduced voltage
solid-state soft start controllers is very
compact, multi-functional, easy to
install and easy to commission.
motors, the device is available for
current ranges from 432A in four
frame sizes.
With its small size, it can easily fit in
place of existing soft starters, wye-delta
starters, or across-the-line NEMA and
IEC starters. This feature allows easy
upgrades to existing systems. The
product is designed to be wired in
the three-phase line feeding the three
motor input leads as is done for
normal across-the-line starting. The
starter uses silicon controlled rectifiers
(SCRs) to ramp the voltage to the
motor, providing smooth acceleration
and deceleration of the load. After
the motor is started, the internal run
bypass relay closes, resulting in the
motor running directly across-the-line.
Internal run bypass significantly reduces
the heat generated as compared to
non-bypass starters. The soft stop
may be longer than the coast-to-stop
time. An external overload protection
relay is needed.
26
100%
Speed
Figure 30.5-17. Start Ramp
27
2
3
Run
Soft Stop
28
Time (Seconds)
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of
system or product damage. Setting the
soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off
this feature.
Soft stop time = 030 seconds
1 = Coast to Stop (Speed)

2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage)
3 = Soft Stop Time
29
30
Figure 30.5-18. St

Consulting Application Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Consulting Application Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Consulting Application Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Sector

Consulting Application Guide

2013 Consulting Application Guide

Lighting Control Systems

Power Distribution Systems

Advanced & Electronic Metering

Power Circuit Breakers &

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Protective & Predictive Relays

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access

Motor Control Centers

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB

Motor Starters &

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium

Adjustable Frequency Drives

Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays

Motor Starters (AMPGARD)

Uninterruptible Power Supplies

Surge Protection (SPD) &

Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage

Power Factor Capacitors

Primary Unit Substations

Resistance Grounding Systems

Secondary Unit Substations

Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment

Unitized Power Centers

Coordinated Electrical Houses

Cat Generator Paralleling

Spot Network Equipment

Power System Studies

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

2013 Consulting Application Guide

Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

ANSI Voltage Classifications

Terms and Conditions

Technical and Descriptive Publications

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Copyright 2013, Eaton.

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Eaton Corporation is a Global Leader in

New Features of the Consulting

Power management products

CD and Product Specifications

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

We continue to print this publication because we have

Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient

Delivering the Promise of Power

Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the

Theres no doubt about it: Accurate product and application

Arc Flash Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.3-1

AC Drive Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7

Arc Flash Safety Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.3-1 41.3-6

Arc-Resistant MVS Metal-Enclosed

Arc-Resistant Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5,

Active Harmonic Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3-1 35.3-7

Add-On Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42

ATC Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.4-1 25.4-16

Addressable Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-28